lit
HENLEY'S TWENTIETH CENTURY
BOOK OF
RECIPES, FORMULAS
AND PROCESSES
HENLEY'S
-TWENTIETH CENTURY
FORMULAS. RECIPES
AND PROCESSES'
CONTAINING TEN THOUSAND SELECTED HOUSEHOLD AND
WORKSHOP FORMULAS, RECIPES, PROCESSES AND MONEY-
SAVING METHODS FOR THE PRACTICAL USE
OF MANUFACTURERS, MECHANICS, HOUSE-
KEEPERS AND HOME WORKERS
EDITED BY
GARDNER D. HISCOX, M.E.
AUTHOR OF "MECHANICAL MOVEMENTS, POWERS AND DEVICES,"
"COMPRESSED AIR," "GAS, GASOLINE AND
OIL ENGINES," ETC., ETC.
1914 EDITION, REVISED AND ENLARGED
NEW YORK
THE NORMAN W. HENLEY PUBLISHING COMPANY
132 NASSAU STREET
1914
(1
COPYRIGHT, 1914 AND 1913, BY
THE NORMAN W. HENLEY PUBLISHING COMPANY
COPYRIGHT, 1912 AND 1907, BY
THE NORMAN W. HENLEY PUBLISHING COMPANY
Also, Entered at Stationers' Hall Court, London, England
All rights reserved
THE TROW PRESS, NEW YORK
PREFACE
IN compiling this book of formulas, recipes and processes, the Edi-
tor has endeavored to meet the practical requirements of the home and
workshop — the mechanic, the manufacturer, the artisan, the housewife,
and the general home worker.
In addition to exercising the utmost care in selecting his materials
from competent sources, the Editor has also modified formulas which
were obviously ill adapted for his needs, but were valuable if altered.
Processes of questionable merit he has discarded. By adhering to this
plan the Editor trusts that he has succeeded in preparing a repos-
itory of useful knowledge representing the experience of experts in
every branch of practical achievement. Much of the matter has been
specially translated for this work from foreign technological period-
icals and books. In this way the Editor has embodied much practical
information otherwise inaccessible to most English-speaking people.
Each recipe is to be regarded as a basis of experiment, to be modi-
fied to suit the particular purpose in hand, or the peculiar conditions
which may affect the experimenter. Chemicals are not always of uni-
form relative purity and strength-, heat or cold may markedly influence
the result obtained, and lack of skill in the handling of utensils and
instruments may sometimes cause failure. Inasmuch as a particular
formula may not always be applicable, the Editor has thought it ad-
visable to give as many recipes as his space would allow under each
heading. In some instances a series of formulas is given which appar-
ently differ but slightly in their ingredients. This has been done on
the principle that one or more may be chosen for the purpose in hand.
Recognizing the fact that works of a similar character are not un-
known, the Editor has endeavored to present in these pages the most
modern methods and formulas. Naturally, old recipes and so-called
trade secrets which have proven their value by long use are also
included, particularly where no noteworthy advance has been made;
but the primary aim has been to modernize and bring the entire work
up to the present date.
284534 THE EDITOR.
JANUARY,
PARTIAL LIST OF AUTHORITIES CONSULTED
Apothecary, The.
Berliner Drog. Zeitung.
Brass World.
British Journal of Photography..
Chemical News.
Chemiker Zeitung Repertorium.
Chemisch Technische Fabrikant.
Chemische Zeitung.
Chemist-Druggist.
Comptes Rendus.
Cooley's Receipts.
Cosmos.
Dekorationsmaler, Der.
Deutschq Drog. Zeitung.
Deutsche Goldschmiede Zeitung.
Deutsche Handwerk.
Deutsche Maler Zeitung.
Deutsche Topfer und Ziefler Zeitung.
Dingler's Polytechnic Journal.
Drogisten Zeitung.
Druggists' Circular.
English Mechanic.
Farben Zeitung.
Gummi Zeitung.
Journal der Goldschmiedekunst.
Journal of Applied Microscopy.
Journal of the Franklin Institute.
Journal Society of Chemical Industry.
Journal Suisse d'Horlogerie.
Keramische Rundschau.
La Nature.
La Science en Famille.
La Vie Scientifique.
Lack und Farben Industrie.
Legierungen.
Le Genie Civil.
Le Praticien.
Leipziger Farber und Zeugdrucker Zei-
tung.
Maler Zeitung.
Metallarbeiter.
Mining and Scientific Press.
Neueste Erfindungen und Erfahrungen.
Nouvelles Scientifiques.
Oils, Colors, and Drysalteries.
Papier-Zeitung.
Parfumer, Der.
Pharmaceutische Zeitung.
Pharmaceutische Centralhalle.
Pharmaceutische Era.
Pharmaceutische Journal.
Pharmaceutische Journal Formulary.
Photo Times.
Polytech. Centralblatt.
Polyt. Notizblatt.
Popular Science News.
Pottery Gazette.
Practical Druggist.
Revue Chronometrique.
Revue de la Droguerie.
Revue des Produits Chimiques.
Revue Industrielle.
Science, Arts and Nature.
Science Pratique.
Seifensieder Zeitung, Der.
Seifenfabrikant, Der.
Spatula.
Stein der Weisen, Der.
Sudd. Apoth. Zeitung.
Technisches Centralblatt.
Technische Rundschau.
Uhland's Technische Rundschau.
Verzinnen Verzinken Vernickeln, Das.
Werkmeister Zeitung.
Wiener Drogisten Zeitung.
Wiener Gewerbe Zeitung.
Zeitschrift fur die Gesammte Kohlen-
saure Industrie.
HENLEY'S BOOK OF RECIPES
ABRASION REMEDY:
See Cosmetics and Ointments.
ABSINTHE:
See Wines and Liquors.
Acid-Proofing
An Acid-Proof Table Top.—
1.
Copper sulphate 1 part
Potassium chlorate.. .. 1 part
Water 8 parts
Boil until salts are dissolved.
2.
Aniline hydrochlorate. 3 parts
Water 20 parts
Or, if more readily procurable:
Aniline 6 parts
Hydrochloric acid 9 parts
Water 50 parts
By the use of a brush two coats of so-
lution No. 1 are applied while hot; the sec-
ond coat as soon as the first is dry. Then
two coats of solution No. 2, and the wood
allowed to dry thoroughly. Later, a
coat of raw linseed oil is to be applied,
using a cloth instead of a brush, in order
to get a thinner coat of the oil.
A writer in the Journal of Applied
Microscopy states that he has used this
method upon some old laboratory tables
which had been finished in the usual way,
the wood having been filled oiled, and
varnished. After scraping off the varnish
down to the wood, the solutions were ap-
plied, and the result was very satisfac-
tory.
After some experimentations the for-
mula was modified without materially
affecting the cost, and apparently in-
creasing the resistance of the wood to the
action of strong acids and alkalies. The
modified formula follows:
1.
Iron sulphate 4 parts
Copper sulphate 4 parts
Potassium permanga-
nate 8 parts
Water, q. s 100 parts
2.
Aniline. 12 parts
Hydrochloric acid .... 18 parts
Water, q. s 100 parts
Or:
Aniline hydrochlorate 15 parts
Water, q. s 100 parts
Solution No. 2 has not been changed,
except to arrange the parts per hundred.
The method of application is the same,
except that after solution No. 1 has dried,
the excess of the solution which has dried
upon the surface of the wood is thor-
oughly rubbed off before the application
of solution No. 2. The black color does
not appear at once, but usually requires
a few hours before becoming ebony
black. The linseed oil may be diluted
with turpentine without disadvantage,
and after a few applications the surface
will take on a dull and not displeas-
ing polish. The table tops are easily
cleaned by washing with water or suds
after a course of work is completed, and
the application of another coat of oil
puts them in excellent order for another
course of work. Strong acids or alkalies
when spilled, if soon wiped off, have
scarcely a perceptible effect.
A slate or tile top is expensive not only
in its original cost, but also as a destroyer
of glassware. Wood tops when painted,
oiled, or paraffined have objectionable
features, the latter especially in warm
weather. Old table tops, after the paint
or oil is scraped off down to the wood,
take the above finish nearly as well as
the new wood.
To Make Wood Acid- and Chlorine-
Proof. — Take 6 pounds of wood tar and
12 pounds rosin, and melt them together
in an iron kettle, after which stir in 8
pounds finely powdered brick dust.
The damaged parts must be cleaned
perfectly and dried, whereupon they
may be painted over with the warm
preparation or filled up and drawn off,
leaving the film on the inside.
Protecting Cement Against Acid. — A
paint to protect cement against acid is
obtained by mixing pure asbestos, very
finely powdered, with a thick solution of
10
; ADHESIVES
sodium/ silicate', Tlte" sodium silicate
must be as alkaline as possible. • . ']The
asbestos is first rubbed with a small
quantity of the silicate, until a cake is
obtained and then kept in well-closed
vessels. For use this cake is simply
thinned with a solution of the silicate,
which furnishes a paint two or three ap-
plications of which protect the walls of
reservoirs, etc., against any acid solid
or liquid. This mass may also be em-
ployed for making a coating of sand-
stone.
To Make Corks Impermeable and
Acid-Proof. — Choose your corks care-
fully. Then plunge them into a solution
of gelatin or common glue, 15 parts, in
24 parts of glycerine and 500 parts of
water, heated to 44° or 48° C. (112°-120°
F.), and keep them there for several
hours. On removing the corks, which
should be weighted down in the solution,
dry them in the shade until they are free
from all surplus moisture. They are now
perfectly tight, retaining at the same
time the greater portion of their elasticity
and suppleness. To render them acid-
proof, they should be treated with a
mixture of vaseline, 2 parts, and paraffine
7 parts, heated to about 105° F. This
second operation may be avoided by
adding to the gelatin solution a little
ammonium dichromate and afterwards
exposing the corks to the light.
Lining for Acid Receptacles. — Plates
are formed of 1 part of brown slate, 2
of powdered glass, and 1 of Portland
cement, the whole worked up with sili-
cate of soda, molded and dried. Make
a cement composed of ground slate and
silicate of soda and smear the surface
for the lining; then, while it is still plastic,
apply the plates prepared as above de-
scribed. Instead of these plates, slabs
of glass or porcelain or similar substances
may be employed with the same cement.
ACACIA, MUCILAGE OF :
See Adhesives under Mucilages.
ACID-PROOF GLASS:
See Glass.
ACID-RESISTING PAINT:
See Paint.
ACIDS, SOLDERING:
See Solders.
ACID STAINS FROM THE SKIN, TO
REMOVE :
See Cleaning Preparations and Meth-
ods.
ACID TEST FOR VINEGAR:
See Vinegar.
Adhesives
GLUES :
Manufacture of Glue. — I. — The usual
process of removing the phosphate of
lime from bones for glue-making pur-
poses by means of dilute hydrochloric
acid has the disadvantage that the acid
cannot be regenerated. Attempts to use
sulphurous acid instead have so far
proved unsuccessful, as, even with the
large quantities used, the process is very
slow. According to a German invention
this difficulty with sulphurous acid can
be avoided by using it in aqueous solu-
tion under pressure. The solution of
the lime goes on very rapidly, it is
claimed, and no troublesome precipi-
tation of calcium sulphite takes place.
Both phosphate of lime and sulphurous
acid are regenerated from the lyes by
simple distillation.
II. — Bones may be treated with suc-
cessive quantities of combined sulphur-
ous acid and water, from which the heat
of combination has been previously dis-
sipated, the solution being removed after
each treatment, before the bone salts
dissolved therein precipitate, and before
the temperature rises above 74° F. — •
U. S. Pat. 783,784.
III. — A patent relating to the process
for treating animal sinews, preparatory
for the glue factory, has been granted to
Florsheim, Chicago, and consists in im-
mersing animal sinews successively in
petroleum or benzine to remove the outer
fleshy animal skin; in a hardening or
preserving bath, as boric acid, or alum
or copper sulphate; and in an alkaline
bath to remove fatty matter from the
fibrous part of the sinews. The sinews
are afterwards tanned and disintegrated.
Test for Glue.— The more water the
glue takes up, swelling it, the better it
is. Four ounces of the glue to be exam-
ined are soaked for about 12 hours in a
cool place in 4 pounds of cold water. If
the glue has dissolved after this time, it
is of bad quality and of little value; but if
it is coherent, gelatinous, and weighing
double, it is good; if it weighs up to 16
ounces, it is very good; if as much as
20 ounces, it may be called excellent.
To Prevent Glue from Cracking.— To
prevent glue from cracking, which fre-
quently occurs when glued articles are
ADHESIVES
II
exposed to the heat of a stove, a little
chloride of potassium is added. This
prevents the glue from becoming dry
enough to crack. Glue thus treated will
adhere to glass, metals, etc., and may
also be used for pasting on labels.
Preventing the Putrefaction of Strong
Glues. — The fatty matter always existing
in small quantity in sheets of ordinary
glue affects the adhesive properties and
facilitates the development of bacteria,
and consequently putrefaction and de-
composition. These inconveniences are
remedied by adding a small quantity of
caustic soda to the dissolved glue. The
soda prevents decomposition absolutely;
with the fatty matter it forms a hard soap
which renders it harmless.
Liquid Glues. —
I. — Glue 3 ounces
Gelatin 3 ounces
Acetic acid 4 ounces
Water 2 ounces
Alum 30 grains
Heat together for 6 hours, skim, and
add:
II. — Alcohol 1 fluidounce
Brown glue, No. 2. . 2 pounds
Sodium carbonate . . 11 ounces
Water 3£ pints
Oil of clove 160 minims
Dissolve the soda in the water, pour
the solution over the dry glue, let stand
over night or till thoroughly soaked and
swelled, then heat carefully on a water
bath until dissolved. When nearly cold
stir in the oil of cloves.
By using white glue, a finer article, fit
for fancy work, may be made.
III. — Dissolve by heating 60 parts of
borax in 420 parts of water, add 480
parts dextrin (pale yellow) and 50 parts
of glucose and heat carefully with con-
tinued stirring, to complete solution;
replace the evaporated water and pour
through flannel.
The glue made in this way remains
clear quite a long time, and possesses
great adhesive power; it also dries very
quickly, but upon careless and extended
heating above 90° C. (194° F.), it is apt
to turn brown and brittle.
IV. — Pour 50 parts of warm (not hot)
water over 50 parts of Cologne glue and
allow to soak over night. Next day the
swelled glue is dissolved with moderate
heat, and if still too thick, a little more
water is added. When this is done, add
from 2£ to 3 parts of crude nitric acid,
stir well, and fill the liquid glue in well-
corked bottles. This is a good liquid
steam glue.
V. — Soak 1 pound of good glue in a
quart of water for a few hours, then melt
the glue by heating it, together with the
unabsorbed water, then stir in J pound
dry white lead, and when that is well
mixed pour in 4 fluidounces of alcohol
and continue the boiling 5 minutes longer.
VI. — Soak 1 pound of good glue in 1 \
pints of cold water for 5 hours, then add
3 ounces of zinc sulphate and 2 fluid-
ounces of hydrochloric acid, and keep
the mixture heated for 10 or 12 hours at
175° to 190° F. The glue remains liquid
and may be used for sticking a variety of
materials.
VII. — A very inexpensive liquid glue
may be prepared by first soaking and
then dissolving gelatin in twice its own
weight of water at a very gentle heat;
then add glacial acetic acid in weight
equal to the weight of the dry gelatin.
It should be remembered, however, that
all acid glues are not generally applica-
ble.
VIII.— Glue 200 parts
Dilute acetic acid. . 400 parts
Dissolve by the aid of heat and add:
Alcohol 25 parts
Alum 5 parts
IX. — Glue 5 parts
Calcium chloride. . 1 part
Water 1 part
X. — Sugar of lead 1 i drachms
Alum 1 i drachms
Gum arabic 2£ drachms
Wheat flour 1 " av. Ib.
Water, q. s.
Dissolve the gum in 2 quarts of warm
water; when cold mix in the flour, and
add the sugar of lead and alum dissolved
in wrater; heat the whole over a slow fire
until it shows signs of ebullition. Let it
cool, and add enough gum water to bring
it to the proper consistence.
XI. — Dilute 1 part of official phos-
phoric acid with 2 parts of water and neu-
tralize the solution with carbonate of
ammonium. Add to the liquid an equal
quantity of water, warm it on a water
bath, and dissolve in it sufficient glue to
form a thick syrupy liquid. Keep in
well-stoppered bottles.
XII. — Dissolve 3 parts of glue in small
pieces in 12 to 15 of saccharate of lime.
By heating, the glue dissolves rapidly
and remains liquid, when cold, without
loss of adhesive power. Any desirable
consistence can be secured by varying
the amount of saccharate of lime. Thick
glue retains its muddy color, while a thin
solution becomes clear on standing.
The saccharate of lime is prepared by
ADHESIVES
dissolving 1 part of sugar in 3 parts of
water, and after adding £ part of the
weight of the sugar of slaked lime, heat-
ing the whole from 149° to 185° F., allow-
ing it to macerate for several days, shaking
it frequently. The solution, which has
the properties of mucilage, is then de-
canted from the sediment.
XIII. — In a solution of borax in water
soak a good quantity of glue until it has
thoroughly imbibed the liquid. Pour off
the surplus solution and then put on
the water bath and melt the glue. Cool
down until the glue begins to set, then
add, drop by drop, with agitation,
enough acetic acid to check the tendency
to solidification. If, after becoming
quite cold, there is still a tendency to
solidification, add a few drops more of
the acid. The liquid should be of the
consistence of ordinary mucilage at all
times.
XIV.— Gelatin 100 parts
Cabinetmakers' glue. 100 parts
Alcohol 25 parts
Alum 2 parts
Acetic acid, 20 per
cent 800 parts
Soak the gelatin and glue with the
acetic acid and heat on a water bath until
fluid; then add the alum and alcohol.
XV.— Glue 10 parts
Water 15 parts
Sodium salicylate. ... 1 part
XVI. — Soak 5 parts of Cologne glue
in an aqueous calcium chloride solution
(1 : 4) and heat on the water bath until
dissolved, replacing the evaporating
water; or slack 100 parts of lime with 150
parts of hot water, dissolve 60 parts of
sugar in 180 parts of water, and add 15
parts of the slacked lime to the solution,
heating the whole to 75° C. (167° F.).
Place aside for a few days, shaking from
time to time. In the clear sugar-lime
solution collected by decanting soak 60
parts of glue and assist the solution by
moderate heating.
XVII.— Molasses, 100 parts, dissolved
in 300 parts of water, 25 parts of quick-
lime (slaked to powder), being then
stirred in arid the mixture heated to 167°
F. on a water bath, with frequent stir-
rings. After settling for a few days a
large portion of the lime will have dis-
solved, and the clear, white, thick solu-
tion, when decanted, behaves like rubber
solution and makes a highly adherent
coating.
XVIII.— Dissolve bone glue, 250
parts, by heating in 1,000 parts of water,
and add to the solution barium perox-
ide 10 parts, sulphuric acid (66° B.) 5
parts, and water 15 parts. Heat for 48
hours on the water bath to 80° C. (176°
F.). Thus a syrupy liquid is obtained,
which is allowed to settle and is then
decanted. This glue has no unpleasant
odor, and does not mold.
JQX. — A glue possessing the adhesive
qualities of ordinary joiners' glue, but
constituting a pale yellow liquid which is
ready for use without requiring heating
and possesses great resistance to damp-
ness, is produced by treating dry casein
with a diluted borax solution or with
enough ammonia solution to cause a
faintly alkaline reaction. The prepara-
tion may be employed alone or mixed
with liquid starch in any proportion.
Glue for Celluloid. — I. — Two parts
shellac, 3 parts spirits of camphor, and 4
parts strong alcohol dissolved in a warm
place, give an excellent gluing agent to fix
wood, tin, and other bodies to celluloid.
The glue must be kept well corked up.
II. — A collodion solution may be used,
or an alcoholic solution of fine celluloid
shavings.
Glue to Form Paper Pads. —
I. — Glue 3^ ounces
Glycerine 8 ounces
Water, a sufficient quantity.
Pour upon the glue more than enough
water to cover it and let stand for several
hours, then decant the greater portion of
the water; apply heat until the glue is
dissolved, and add the glycerin. If the
mixture is too thick, add more water.
II. — Glue 6 ounces
Alum 30 grains
Acetic acid £ ounce
Alcohol 1 1 ounces
Water 6§ ounces
Mix all but the alcohol, digest on a
water bath till the glue is dissolved, allow
to cool and add the alcohol.
III. — Glue 5 ounces
Water 1 ounce
Calcium chloride. . 1 ounce
Dissolve the calcium chloride in the
water, add the glue, macerate until it is
thoroughly softened, and then heat until
completely dissolved.
IV. — Glue 20 ounces
Glycerine 5 ounces
Syrupy glucose. . . 1 ounce
Tannin 50 grains
Cover the glue with cold water, and let
stand over night. In the morning pour
off superfluous water, throw the glue on
muslin, and manipulate so as to get rid
of as much moisture as possible, then put
in a water bath and melt. Add the glyc-
ADHESIVES
erine and syrup, and stir well in. Fi-
nally, dissolve the tannin in the smallest
quantity of water possible and add.
This mixture must be used hot.
V. — Glue 15 ounces
Glycerine 5 ounces
Linseed oil 2 ounces
Sugar 1 ounce
Soak the glue as before, melt, add the
sugar and glycerine, continuing the heat,
and finally add the oil gradually under
constant stirring.
This must be used hot.
Glue for Tablets.—
I. — Glue 3^ ounces
Glycerine 8 ounces
Water, a sufficient quantity.
Pour upon the glue more than enough
water to cover it and let stand for several
hours, then decant the greater portion of
the water; apply heat until the glue is
dissolved, and add the glycerine. If the
mixture is too thick, add more water.
II. — Glue 6 ounces
Alum 30 grains
Acetic acid £ ounce
Alcohol if ounces
Water G| ounces
Mix all but the alcohol, digest on a
water bath till the glue is dissolved, allow
to cool and add the alcohol.
III. — Glue. . .- 5 ounces
Water 1 ounce
Calcium chloride. . . 1 ounce
Dissolve the calcium chloride in the
water, add the glue, macerate until it is
thoroughly softened, and then apply heat
until completely dissolved.
IV. — Glue, 1 pound; glycerine, 4 ounces;
glucose syrup, 2 tablespoonfuls; tannin,
-^o ounce. Use warm, and give an hour
to dry and set on the pads. This can be
colored with any aniline dye.
Marine Glue. — Marine glue is a prod-
uct consisting of shellac and caoutchouc,
which is mixed differently according to
the use for which it is required. The
quantity of benzol used as solvent gov-
erns the hardness or softness of the glue.
I. — One part Para caoutchouc is dis-
solved in 12 parts benzol; 20 parts pow-
dered shellac are added to the solution,
and the mixture is carefully heated.
II. — Stronger glue is obtained by dis-
solving 10 parts good crude caoutchouc
in 120 parts benzine or naphtha which
solution is poured slowly and in a fine
stream into 20 parts asphaltum melted
in a kettle, stirring constantly and heat-
ing. Pour the finished glue, after the
solvent has almost evaporated and the
mass has become quite uniform, into flat
molds, in which it solidifies into very hard
tablets of dark brown or black color.
For use, these glue tablets are first soaked
in boiling water and then heated over a
free flame until the marine glue has be-
come thinly liquid. The pieces to be
glued are also warmed and a very durable
union is obtained.
III. — Cut caoutchouc into small pieces
and dissolve in coal naphtha by heat and
agitation. Add to this solution pow-
dered shellac, and heat the whole, con-
stantly stirring until combination takes
place, then pour it on metal plates to form
sheets. When used it must be heated to
248° F., and applied with a brush.
Water-Proof Glues.— I.— The glue is
put in water till it is soft, and subse-
quently melted in linseed oil at moderate
heat. This glue is affected neither by
water nor by vapors.
II. — Dissolve a small quantity of san-
darac and mastic in a little alcohol, and
add a little turpentine. The solution is
boiled in a kettle over the fire, and an
equal quantity of a strong hot solution of
glue and isinglass is added. Then filter
through a cloth while hot.
III. — Water-proof glue may also be
produced by the simple addition of
bichromate of potassium to the liquid glue
solution, and subsequent exposure to the
air.
IV. — Mix glue as usual, and then add
linseed oil in the proportion of 1 part oil
to 8 parts glue. If it is desired that the
mixture remain liquid, \ ounce of nitric
acid should be added to every pound of
glue. This will also prevent the glue
from souring.
V.— In 1,000 parts of rectified alcohol
dissolve 60 parts of sandarac and as
much mastic whereupon add 60 parts of
white oil of turpentine. Next, prepare a
rather strong glue solution and add about
the like quantity of isinglass, heating the
solution until it commences to boil; then
slowly add the hot glue solution till a thin
paste forms, which can still be filtered
through a cloth. Heat the solution be-
fore use and employ like ordinary glue.
A connection effected with this glue is
not dissolved by cold water and even
resists hot water for a long time.
Vl.— Soak 1,000 parts of Cologne glue
in cold water for 12 hours and in another
vessel for the same length of time 150
parts of isinglass in a mixture of lamp
spirit and water. Then dissolve both
masses together on the water bath in a
suitable vessel, thinning, if necessary,
with some hot water. Next add 100
ADHESIVES
parts of linseed oil varnish and filter hot
through linen.
VII. — Ordinary glue is kept in water
until it swells up without losing its shape.
Thus softened it is placed in an iron
crucible without adding water; then add
linseed oil according to the quantity of
the glue and leave this mixture to boil
over a slow fire until a gelatinous mass
results. Such glue unites materials in a
very durable manner. It adheres firmly
and hardens quickly. Its chief advan-
tage, however, consists in that it neither
absorbs water nor allows it to pass
through, whereby the connecting places
are often destroyed. A little borax will
prevent putrefaction.
VIII. — Bichromate of potassium 40
parts (by weight); gelatin glue, 55 parts;
alum, 5 parts. Dissolve the glue in a
little water and add the bichromate of
potassium and the alum.
IX. — This preparation permits an ab-
solutely permanent gluing of pieces of
cardboard, even when they are moist-
ened by water. Melt together equal
parts of good pitch and gutta-percha; of
this take 9 parts, and add to it 3 parts of
boiled linseed oil and 1 A parts of litharge.
Place this over the fire and stir it till all
the ingredients are intimately mixed.
The mixture may be diluted with a little
benzine or oil of turpentine, and must be
warm when used.
Glue to Fasten Linoleum on Iron
Stairs. — I. — Use a mixture of glue, isin-
glass, and dextrin which, dissolved in
water and heated, is given an admixture
of turpentine. The strips pasted down
must be weighted with boards and brick
on top until the adhesive agent has hard-
ened.
II. — Soak 3 parts of glue in 8 parts
water, add A part hydrochloric acid and
f part zinc vitriol and let this mixture
boil several hours. Coat the floor and
the back of the linoleum with this.
Press the linoleum down uniformly and
firmly and weight it for some time.
Glue for Attaching Gloss to Precious
Metals. — Sandarac varnish, 15 parts;
marine glue, 5 parts; drying oil, 5 parts;
white lead, 5 parts; Spanish white, 5
parts; turpentine, 5 parts. Triturate all to
form a rather homogeneous paste. This
glue becomes very hard and resisting.
Elastic Glue. — Although elastic glue is
less durable than rubber, and will not
stand much heat, yet it is cheaper than
rubber, and is not, like rubber affected
by oil colors. Hence it is largely used
for printing rollers and stamps. For
stamps, good glue is soaked for 24 hours
in soft water. The water is poured off,
and the swollen glue is melted and mixed
with glycerine and a little salicylic acid
and cast into molds. The durability is in-
creased by painting the mass with a solu-
tion of tannin, or, better, of bichromate
of potassium. Printing rollers require
greater firmness and elasticity. The
mass for them once consisted solely of
glue and vinegar, and their manufacture
was very difficult. The use of glycerine
has remedied this, and gives great elas-
ticity without adhesiveness, and has re-
moved the liability of moldiness. Swol-
len glue, which has been superficially
dried, is fused with glycerine and cast
into oil molds. Similar mixtures are
used for casting plaster ornaments, etc.,
and give very sharp casts. A mass con-
sisting of glue and glycerine is poured
over the model in a box. When the mold
is removed, it is painted with plaster out-
side and with boiled oil inside, and can
then be used many times for making re-
productions of the model.
Glue for Paper and Metal. — A glue
which will keep well and adhere tightly
is obtained by diluting 1,000 parts by
weight of potato starch in 1,200 parts by
weight of water and adding 50 parts by
weight of pure nitric acid. The mixture
is kept in a hot place for 48 hours, taking
care to stir frequently. It is afterwards
boiled to a thick and transparent consist-
ency, diluted with water if there is occa-
sion, and then there are added in the
form of a screened powder, 2 parts of sal
ammoniac and 1 part of sulphur flowers.
Glue for Attaching Cloth Strips to Iron.
— Soak 500 parts of Cologne glue in the
evening with clean cold water in a clean
vessel; in the morning pour off the water,
place the softened glue without admix-
ture of water into a clean copper or
enamel receptacle, which is put on a mod-
erate low fire (charcoal or steam appa-
ratus). During the dissolution the mass
must be continually stirred with a wood-
en trowel or spatula. If the glue is too
thick, it is thinned with diluted spirit,
but not with water. As soon as the glue
has reached the boiling point, about 50
parts of linseed oil varnish (boiled oil) is
added to the mass with constant stirring.
When the latter has been stirred up well,
add 50 parts of powdered colophony and
shake it into the mass with stirring,
subsequently removing the glue from the
fire. In order to increase the binding
qualities and to guard against moisture,
it is well still to add about 50 parts of
isinglass, which has been previously cut
ADHESIVES
15
into narrow strips and placed, well
beaten, in a vessel, into which enough
spirit of wine has been poured to cover
all. When dissolved, the last - named
mass is added to the boiling glue with
constant stirring. The adhesive agent
is now ready for use and is employed hot,
it being advisable to warm the iron also.
Apply glue only to a surface equivalent
to a single strip at a time. The strips are
pressed down with a stiff brush or a wad
of cloth.
Glue for Leather or Cardboard. — To
attach leather to cardboard dissolve
good glue (softened by swelling in water)
with a little turpentine and enough water
in an ordinary glue pot, and then having
made a thick paste with starch in the
proportion of 2 parts by weight, of starch
powder for every 1 part, by weight, of
dry glue, mix the compounds and allow
the mixture to become cold before appli-
cation to the cardboard.
For Wood, Glass, Cardboard, and all
Articles of a Metallic or Mineral Char-
acter.— Take boiled linseed oil 20 parts,
Flemish glue 20 parts, hydrated lime 15
parts, powdered turpentine 5 parts, alum
5 parts acetic acid 5 parts. Dissolve the
glue with the acetic acid, add the alum,
then the hydrated lime, and finally the
turpentine and the boiled linseed oil.
Triturate all well until it forms a homo-
geneous paste and keep in well-closed
flasks. Use like any other glue.
Glue for Uniting Metals with Fabrics.
— Cologne glue of good quality is soaked
and boiled down to the consistency of
that used by cabinetmakers. Then add,
with constant stirring, sifted wood ashes
until a moderately thick, homogeneous
mass results. Use hot and press the
pieces well together during the drying.
For tinfoil, about 2 per cent of boracic
acid should be added instead of the wood
ashes.
Glue or Paste for Making Paper
Boxes. —
Chloral hydrate 5 parts
Gelatin, white 8 parts
Gum arabic 2 parts
Boiling water 30 parts
Mix the chloral, gelatin, and gum
arabic in a porcelain container, pour the
boiling water over the mixture and let
stand for 1 day, giving it a vigorous stir-
ring several times during the day. In
cold weather this is apt to get hard and
stiff, but this may be obviated by stand-
ing the container in warm water for a
few minutes. This paste adheres to any
surface whatever.
Natural Glue for Cementing Porcelain,
Crystal Glass, etc.— The large shell
snails which are found in vineyards have
at the extremity of their body a small,
whitish bladder filled with a substance
of greasy and gelatinous aspect. If this
substance extracted from the bladder is
applied on the fragments of porcelain or
any body whatever, which are juxtaposed
by being made to touch at all parts, they
acquire such adhesion that if one strives
to separate them by a blow, they are
more liable to break at another place
than the cemented seam. It is necessary
to give this glue sufficient time to dry per-
fectly, so as to permit it to acquire the
highest degree of strength and tenacity.
Belt Glue. — A glue for belts can be
prepared as follows: Soak 50 parts of
gelatin in water, pour off the excess of
water, and heat on the water bath. With
good stirring add, first, 5 parts, by
weight, of glycerine, then 10 parts, by
weight, of turpentine, and 5 parts, by
weight, of linseed oil varnish and thin
with water as required. The ends of the
belts to be glued are cut off obliquely and
warmed; then the hot glue is applied, and
the united parts are subjected to strong
pressure, allowing them to dry thvs for
24 hours before the belts are used.
Chromium Glue for Wood, Paper, and
Cloth. — I. — (a) One-half pound strong
glue (any glue if color is immaterial,
white fish glue otherwise); soak 12 hours
in 12 fluidounces of cold water, (b) One-
quarter pound gelatin; soak 2 hours in
12 fluidounces cold water, (c) Two
ounces bichromate of potassium dis-
solved in 8 fluidounces boiling water.
Dissolve (a) after soaking, in a glue pot,
and add (6). After (a) and (fc) are mixed
and dissolved, stir in (c). This glue is
exceedingly strong, and if the article
cemented be exposed to strong sunlight
for 1 hour, the glue becomes perfectly
waterproof. Of course, it is understood
that the exposure to sunlight is to be
made after the glue is thoroughly dry.
The one objectionable feature of this
cement is its color, which is a yellow-
brown. By substituting chrome alum
in place of the bichromate, an olive color
is obtained.
II. — Use a moderately strong gelatin
solution (containing 5 to 10 per cent of
dry gelatin), to which about 1 part of
acid chromate of potassium in solution is
added to every 5 parts of gelatin. This
mixture has the property of becoming in-
soluble by water through the action of
sunlight under partial reduction of the
chromic acid.
16
ADHESIVES
Fireproof Glue. —
Raw linseed oil 8 parts
Glue or gelatin 1 part
Quicklime 2 parts
Soak the glue or gelatin in the oil for
10 to 12 hours, and then melt it by gently
heating the oil, and when perfectly fluid
stir in the quicklime until the whole
mass is homogeneous, then spread out in
layers to dry gradually, out of the sun's
rays. For use, reheat the glue in a glue
pot in the ordinary way of melting glue.
CEMENTS.
Under this heading will be found only
cements for causing one substance to ad-
here to another. Cements used prima-
rily as fillers, such as dental cements,
will be found under Cements, Putties,
etc.
Cutlers' Cements for Fixing Knife
Blades into Handles. —
I. — Rosin 4 pounds
Beeswax 1 pound
Plaster of Paris or
brickdust 1 pound
II.— Pitch 5 pounds
Wood ashes 1 pound
Tallow 1 pound
III. — Rosin, 12; sulphur flowers, 3;
iron filings, 5. Melt together, fill the
handle while hot, and insert the instru-
ment.
IV. — Plaster of Paris is ordinarily
used for fastening loose handles. It is
made into a moderately thick paste with
water run into the hole in the head of the
pestle, the handle inserted and held in
place till the cement hardens. Some add
sand to the paste, and claim to get better
results.
V. — Boil together 1 part of caustic soda,
3 parts of rosin, and 5 parts of water till
homogeneous and add 4 parts of plaster
of Paris. The paste sets in half an hour
and is but little affected by water.
VI. — 'Equal quantities of gutta percha
and shellac are melted together and well
stirred. This is best done in an iron cap-
sule placed on a sandbath and heated
over a gas furnace or on the top of a
stove. The combination possesses both
hardness and toughness, qualities that
make it particularly desirable in mend-
ing mortars and pestles. In using,
the articles to be cemented should be
warmed to about the melting point of the
mixture and retained in proper position
until cool, when they are ready for use.
VII.— Rosin 600 ) Parts
Sulphur 150 }• by
Iron filings 250 ) weight.
Pour the mixture, hot, into the opening
of the heated handle and shove in the
knife likewise heated.
VIII. — Melt sufficient black rosin, and
incorporate thoroughly with it one-fifth its
weight of very fine silver sand. Make
the pestle hot, pour in a little of the mix-
ture, then force the handle well home,
and set aside for a day before using.
IX. — Make a smooth, moderately soft
paste with litharge and glycerine; fill the
hole in the pestle with the cement, and
firmly press the handle in place, keeping
it under pressure for three or four days.
Cements for Stone. — I. — An excellent
cement for broken marble consists of 4
parts of gypsum and 1 part of finely
powdered gum arabic. Mix intimately.
Then with a cold solution of borax make
into a mortarlike mass. Smear on each
face of the parts to be joined, and fasten
the bits of marble together. In the
course of a few days the cement becomes
very hard and holds very tenaciously.
The object mended should not be touched
for several days. In mending colored
marbles the cement may be given the hue
of the marble by adding the color to the
borax solution.
II. — A cement which dries instanta-
neously, qualifying it for all sorts of re-
pairing and only presenting the disad-
vantage of having to be freshly prepared
each time, notwithstanding any subse-
?uent heating, may be made as follows:
n a metal vessel or iron spoon melt 4 to
5 parts of rosin (or preferably mastic)
and 1 part of beeswax. This mixture
must be applied rapidly it being of ad-
vantage slightly to heat tne surfaces to be
united, which naturally must have been
previously well cleaned.
III.— Slaked lime, 10 parts; chalk, 15
parts; kaolin, 5 parts; mix. and imme-
diately before use stir with a correspond-
ing amount of potash water glass.
IV.— Cement on Marble Slabs.— The
whole marble slab is thoroughly warmed
and laid face down upon a neatly cleaned
planing bench upon which a woolen cloth
is spread so as not to injure the polish of
the slab. Next apply to the slab very
hot, weak glue and quickly sift hot plaster
of Paris on the glue in a thin even layer,
stirring the plaster rapidly into the ap-
plied glue by means of a strong spatula,
so that a uniform glue-plaster coating
is formed on the warm slab. Before this
has time to harden tip the respective piece
of furniture on the slab. The frame, like-
wise warmed, will adhere very firmly to the
slab after two days. Besides, this process
has the advantage of great cleanliness.
ADHESIVES
17
V. — The following is a recipe used by
marble worKers, and which probably
can be used to advantage: Flour of sul-
phur, 1 part; hydrocnlorate of am-
monia, 2 parts; iron filings, 16 parts.
The above substances must be reduced
to a powder, and securely preserved
in closely stoppered vessels. When the
cement is to be employed, take 20 parts
very fine iron filings and 1 part of the
above powder; mix them together with
enough water to form a manageable
paste. This paste solidifies in 20 days
and becomes as hard as iron. A recipe
for another cement useful for joining
small pieces of marble or alabaster is as
follows: Add £ pint of vinegar to J pint
skimmed milk; mix the curd with the
whites of 5 eggs, well beaten, and suffi-
cient powdered quicklime sifted in with
constant stirring so as to form a paste.
It resists water and a moderate degree of
heat.
VI. — Cement for Iron and Marble. —
For fastening iron to marble or stone a
good cement is made as follows: Thirty
parts plaster of Paris, 10 parts iron filings,
A part sal ammoniac mixed with vinegar
to a fluid paste fresh for use.
Cement -for Sandstones. — One part
sulphur and 1 part rosin are melted
separately; the melted masses are mixed
and 3 parts litharge and 2 parts ground
glass stirred in. The latter ingredients
must be perfectly dry, and have been
well pulverized and mixed previously.
Equally good cement is obtained by
melting together 1 part pitch and iV part
wax, and mixing with 2 parts brickdust.
The stones to be cemented, or be-
tween the joints of which the putty is to
be poured, must be perfectly dry. If
practicable, they should be warmed a
little, and the surfaces to which the putty
is to adhere painted with oil varnish
once or twice. The above two formulae
are of especial value in case the stones
are very much exposed to the heat of the
sun in summer, as well as to cold, rain,
and snow in winter. Experience has
shown that in these instances the above-
mentioned cements give better satisfac-
tion than the other brands of cement.
Cements for Attaching Objects to
Glass.—
Rosin 1 part
Yellow wax 2 parts
Melt together.
To Attach Copper to Glass.— Boil 1
part of caustic soda and 3 parts of co-
lophony in 5 parts of water and mix with
the like quantity of plaster of Paris.
This cement is not attacked by water,
heat, and petroleum. If, in place of the
plaster of Paris, zinc white, white lead,
or slaked lime is used, the cement hard-
ens more slowly.
To Fasten Brass upon Glass. —Boil to-
gether 1 part of caustic soda, 3 parts of
rosin, 3 parts of gypsum, and 5 parts of
water. The cement made in this way
hardens in about half an hour, hence i't
must be applied quickly. During the
preparation it should be stirred con-
stantly. All the ingredients used must
be in a finely powdered state.
Uniting Glass with Horn. — (1) A solu-
tion of 2 parts of gelatin in 20 parts water
is evaporated up to one-sixth of its volume
and J mastic dissolved in ^ spirit added
and some zinc white stirred in. The
putty is applied warm; it dries easily
and can be kept a long time. (2) Mix
gold size with the equal volume of water
glass.
To Cement Glass to Iron. —
I. — Rosin 5 ounces
Yellow wax 1 ounce
Venetian red 1 ounce
Melt the wax and rosin on a water
bath and add, under constant stirring, the
Venetian red previously well dried. Stir
until nearly cool, so as to prevent the Ve-
netian red from settling to the bottom.
II. — Portland cement 2 ounces
Prepared chalk 1 ounce
Fine sand 1 ounce
Solution of sodium silicate
enough to form a semi-
liquid paste.
III. — Litharge 2 parts
White lead 1 part
Work into a pasty condition by using
3 parts boiled linseed oil, 1 part copal
varnish.
Celluloid Cements. — I. — To mend brok-
en draughting triangles and other cellu-
loid articles, use 3 parts alcohol and 4
parts ether mixed together and applied to
the fracture with a brush until the edges
become warm. The edges are then
stuck together, and left to dry for at least
24 hours.
II. — Camphor, 1 part; alcohol, 4 parts.
Dissolve and add equal quantity (by
weight) of shellac to this solution. N
III. — If firmness is desired in putting
celluloid on wood, tin, etc., the following
gluing agent is recommended, viz.: A
compound of 2 parts shellac, 3 parts
spirit of camphor, and 4 parts strong
alcohol.
18
ADHESIVES
IV. — Shellac 2 ounces
Spirits of camphor. . 2 ounces
Alcohol, 90 per cent. . 6 to 8 ounces
V. — Make a moderately strong glue or
solution of gelatin. In a dark place or
a dark room mix with the above a small
amount of concentrated solution of potas-
sium dichromate. Coat the back of the
label, which must be clean, with a thin
layer of the mixture. Strongly press the
label against the bottle and keep the two
in close contact by tying with twine or
otherwise. Expose to sunlight for some
hours; this causes the cement to be insol-
uble even in hot water.
VI. — Lime av. oz. 1
White of egg av. oz. 2£
Plaster of Paris av. oz. 5|
Water fl. oz. 1
Reduce the lime to a fine powder; mix
it with the white of egg by trituration,
forming a uniform paste. Dilute with
water, rapidly incorporate the plaster of
Paris, and use the cement immediately.
The surfaces to be cemented must first
be moistened with water so that the ce-
ment will readily adhere. The pieces
must be firmly pressed together and kept
in t>his position for about 12 hours.
Cementing Celluloid and Hard-Rubber
Articles. — I. — Celluloid articles can be
mended by making a mixture com-
posed of 3 parts of alcohol and 4 parts of
ether. This mixture should be kept in
a well-corked bottle, and when celluloid
articles are to be mended, the broken
surfaces are painted over with the alcohol
and ether mixture until the surfaces
soften: then press together and bind and
allow to dry for at least 24 hours.
II. — Dissolve 1 part of gum camphor
in 4 parts of alcohol; dissolve an equal
weight of shellac in such strong camphor
solution. The cement is applied warm
and the parts united must not be dis-
turbed until the cement is hard. Hard-
rubber articles are never mended to form
a strong joint.
III. — Melt together equal parts of
gutta percha and real asphaltum. The
cement is applied hot, and the broken
surfaces pressed together and held in
place while cooling.
Sign-Letter Cements.—
I. — Copal varnish 15 parts
Drying oil 5 parts
Turpentine (spirits). 3 parts
Oil of turpentine 2 parts
Liquefied glue 5 parts
Melt all together on a water bath until
well mixed, and then add 10 parts slaked
lime.
II. — Mix 100 parts finely powdered
white litharge with 50 parts dry white
lead, knead together 3 parts linseed oil
varnish and 1 part copal varnish into a
firm dough. Coat the side to be attached
with this, removing the superfluous ce-
ment. It will dry quickly and become
very hard.
III. — Copal varnish 15 parts
Linseed-oil varnish . 5 parts
Raw turpentine 3 parts
Oil of turpentine. ... 2 parts
Carpenters' glue, dis-
solved in water ... 5 parts
Precipitated chalk . . 10 parts
IV. — Mastic gum 1 part
Litharge, lead 2 parts
White lead 1 part
Linseed oil 3 parts
Melt together to a homogeneous mass.
Apply hot. To make a thorough and
reliable job, the letters should be heated
to at least the temperature of the cement.
To Fix Gold Letters, etc., upon Glass.
— I. — The glass must be entirely clean and
polished, and the medium is prepared in
the following manner: One ounce fish
glue or isinglass is dissolved in water
so that the latter covers the glue. When
this is dissolved a quart of rectified spir-
it of wine is added, and enough water is
poured in to make up one-quarter the
whole. The substance must be kept well
corked.
II. — Take i quart of the best rum
and I ounce fish glue, which is dissolved
in the former at a moderate degree of
heat. Then add ? quart distilled water,
and filter through a piece of old linen.
The glass is laid upon a perfectly level
table and is covered with this substance
to the thickness of J inch, using a clean
brush. Seize the gold leaf with a
pointed object and place it smoothly
upon the prepared mass, and it will be
attracted by the glass at once. After 5
minutes hold the glass slightly slanting
so that the superfluous mass can run off,
and leave the plate in this position for 24
hours, when it will be perfectly dry. Now
trace the letters or the design on a piece
of paper, and perforate the lines with a
thick needle, mak:ng the holes -^ inch
apart. Then place the perforated paper
upcwi the surface of the glass, and stamp
the tracery on with powdered chalk. The
paper pattern is then carefully removed,
and the accurate design will remain upon
the gold. The outlines are now filled
out with an oily gold mass, mixed with
a little chrome orange and diluted with
boiled oil or turpentine. When all is
dry the superfluous gold is washed off
ADHESIVES
19
with water by means of a common rag.
The back of the glass is then painted
with a suitable color.
Attaching Enamel Letters to Glass. —
To affix enamel letters to glass, first
clean the surface of the glass perfectly,
leaving no grease or sticky substance
of any kind adhering to the surface.
Then with a piece of soap sketch the out-
lines of the design. Make the proper
division of the guide lines, and strike off
accurately the position each letter is to
occupy. Then to the back of the letters
apply a cement made as follows: White
lead ground in oil, 2 parts; dry white
lead, 3 parts. Mix to a soft putty con-
sistency with good copal varnish.
With a small knife or spatula apply
the cement to the back of the letters,
observing especial care in getting the
mixture well and uniformly laid around
the inside edges of the letter. In at-
taching ^he letters to the glass make sure
to expel the air from beneath the char-
acters, and to do this, work them up
and down and sidewise. If the weather
be at all warm, support the letters
while drying by pressing tiny beads of
sealing wax against the glass, close to
the under side or bottom of the letters.
With a putty knife, keenly sharpened
on one edge, next remove all the sur-
plus cement. Give the letters a hard,
firm pressure against the glass around
all edges to securely guard against the
disruptive attacks of moisture.
The seepage of moisture beneath the .
surface of the letters is the main cause
of their early detachment from the glass.
The removal of the letters from the
glass may be effected by applying tur-
pentine to the top of the characters,
allowing it to soak down and through
the cement. Oxalic acid applied in the
same way will usually slick the letters
off in a trice.
Cement for Porcelain Letters. — Slake
15 parts of fresh quicklime in 20 parts of
water. Melt 50 parts of caoutchouc and
50 parts of linseed-oil varnish together,
and bring the mixture to a boil. While
boiling, pour the liquid o>n the slaked
lime, little by little, under constant stir-
ring. Pass the mixture, while still hot,
through muslin, to remove any possible
lumps, and let cool. It takes the cement
2 days to set completely, but when dry
it makes a joint that will resist a great
deal of strain. By thinning the mixture
down with oil of turpentine, a brilliant,
powerfully adhesive varnish is obtained.
Water - Glass Cements. — I. — W7ater
<rlass (sodium of potassium silicate), which
is frequently recommended for cement--
ing glass, does not, as is often asserted,
form a vitreous connection between the
joined surfaces; and, in fact, some of
the commercial varieties will not even
dry, but merely form a thick paste,
which has a strong affinity for moisture.
Good 30° B. water glass is, however,
suitable for mending articles that are ex-
posed to heat, and is best applied to sur-
faces that have been gently warmed;
when the pieces are put together they
should be pressed warmly, to expel any
superfluous cement, and then heated
strongly.
To repair cracked glasses or bottles
through which water will leak, water
glasses may be used, the application
being effected in the following easy
manner: The vessel is warmed to induce
rarefaction of the internal air, after
which the mouth is closed, either by a
cork in the case of bottles, or by a piece
of parchment or bladder if a wide-
mouthed vessel is under treatment.
While still hot, the outside of the
crack is covered with a little glass, and
the vessel set aside to cool, whereupon
the difference between the pressure of the
external and internal air will force the
cement into the fissure and close it
completely. All that is then necessary
is to take off the cover and leave the
vessel to warm for a few hours. Sub-
sequently rinse it out with lime water,
followed by clean water, and it will then
hold any liquid, acids and alkaline fluids
alone excepted.
II. — When water glass is brought into
contact with calcium chloride, a cal-
cium silicate is at once formed which
is insoluble in water. It seems possible
that this reaction may be used in bind-
ing together masses of sand, etc. The
process indicated has long been used in
the preservation of stone which has be-
come "weathered." The stone is first
brushed with the water glass and after-
wards with a solution of calcium chlor-
ide. The conditions here are of course
different.
Calcium chloride must riot be con-
founded with the so-called " chloride of
lime " which is a mixture of calcium hy-
pochlorite and other bodies.
To Fasten Paper Tickets to Glass —To
attach paper tickets to glass, the em-
ployment of water glass is efficacious.
Care should be taken to spread this prod-
uct on the glass and not on the paper,
and then to apply the paper dry, which
should be done immediately. When the
solution is dry the paper cannot be de-
ADHES1VES
tached. The silicate should be some-
what diluted. It is spread on the glass
with a rag or a small sponge.
JEWELERS' CEMENTS.
Jewelers and goldsmiths require, for
the cementing of genuine and colored
gems, as well as for the placing of col-
ored folio under certain stones, very
adhesive gluing agents, which must,
however, be colorless. In this respect
these are distinguished chiefly by the
so-called diamond cement and the regu-
lar jewelers' cement. Diamond ce-
ment is much esteemed by jewelers for
cementing precious stones and corals,
but may also be employed with ad-
vantage for laying colored fluxes of
glass on white glass. The diamond
cement is of such a nature as to be able
to remain for some time in contact with
water without becoming soft. It ad-
heres best between glass or between pre-
cious stones. It is composed as follows:
Isinglass 8 parts, gum ammoniac 1 part,
galbanum 1 part, spirit of wine 4 parts.
Soak the isinglass in water with admix-
ture of a little spirit of wine and add the
solution of the gums in the remainder
of the spirit of wine. Before use, heat
the diamond cement a little so as to
soften it. Jewelers' cement is used for
similar purposes as is the diamond ce-
ment, and is prepared from: Isinglass
(dry) 10 parts, mastic varnish 5 parts.
Dissolve the isinglass in very little water,
adding some strong spirit of wine. The
mastic varnish is prepared by pouring
a mixture of highly rectified spirit of
wine and benzine over finely powdered
mastic and dissolving it in the smallest
possible quantity of liquid. The two
solutions of isinglass and mastic are in-
timately ground together in a porcelain
dish.
Armenian Cement. — The celebrated
" Armenian " cement, so called formerly
used by Turkish and Oriental jewelers
generally, for setting precious stones,
" facing diamonds," rubies, etc., is made
as follows:
Mastic gum 10 parts
Isinglass (fish glue) . 20 parts
Gum ammoniac .... 5 parts
Alcohol absolute 60 parts
Alcohol, 50 per cent. . 35 parts
Water 100 parts
Dissolve the mastic in the absolute
alcohol; dissolve, by the aid of gentle
heat, on the water bath, the isinglass in
the water, and add 10 parts of the dilute
alcohol. Now dissolve the ammoniacum
in the residue of the dilute alcohol. Add
the first solution to the second, mix thor-
oughly by agitation and then add the
solution of gum ammoniac and stir well
in. Finally put on the water bath, and
keeping at a moderate heat, evaporate
the whole down to 175 parts.
Cement for Enameled Dials.— The
following is a good cement for enameled
dials, plates, or other pieces: Grind into
a fine powder 2A parts of dammar rosin
and 2i parts of copal, using colorless
pieces if possible. Next add 2 parts
of Venetian turpentine and enough spirit
of wine so that the whole forms a thick
paste. To this grind 3 parts of the finest
zinc white. The mass now has the
consistency of prepared oil paint. To
remove the yellow tinge of the cement
add a trifle of Berlin blue to the zinc
white. Finally, the whole is heated until
the spirit of wine is driven off and a molt-
en mass remains, which is allowed to cool
and is kept for use. Heat the parts to be
cemented.
Watch-Lid Cement.— The hardest ce-
ment for fixing on watch lids is shellac.
If the lids are exceedingly thin the en-
graving will always press through. Be-
fore cementing it on the inside of the lid,
in order not to injure the polish, it is
coated with chalk dissolved in alcohol,
which is first allowed to dry. Next melt
the shellac on the stick, heat the watch
lid and put it on. After the engraving
has been done, simply force the lid off and
'remove the remaining shellac from the
latter by light tapping. If this does not
remove it completely lay the lid in alco-
hol, leaving it therein until all the shel-
lac has dissolved. All that remains to be
done now is to wash out the watch lid.
Jewelers' Glue Cement. — Dissolve on
a water bath 50 parts of fish glue in
a little 95-per-cent alcohol adding 4
parts, by weight, of gum ammoniac.
On the other hand, dissolve 2 parts, by
weight, of mastic in 10 parts, by weight,
of alcohol. Mix these two solutions and
preserve in a well-corked flask. For
use it suffices to soften it on the water
bath.
Casein Cements. —
I. — Borax 5 parts
Water 95 parts
Casein, sufficient quantity.
Dissolve the borax in water and in-
corporate enough casein to produce a
mass of the proper consistency.
II. — The casein is made feebly alka-
line by means of soda or potash lye and
ADHESIVES
then subjected for about 24 hours to a
temperature of 140° F. Next follow
the customary admixture, such as lime
and water glass, and finally, to accom-
plish a quicker resinification, substances
containing tannin are added. For tan-
nic admixtures to the partially disinte-
grated casein, slight quantities — about
1 per cent — of gallic acid, cutch, or
quercitannic acid are employed. The
feebly alkaline casein cement contain-
ing cannic acid is used in the well-known
manner for the gluing together of wood.
For Metals.— Make a paste with 16
ounces casein, 20 ounces slaked lime, and
20 ounces of sand, in water.
For Glass. — I. — Dissolve casein in a
concentrated solution of borax.
II. — Make a paste of casein and
water glass.
Pasteboard and Paper Cement. — I. —
Let pure glue swell in cold water; pour
and press off the excess; put on the
water bath and melt. Paper or other
material cemented with this is then
immediately, before the cement dries,
submitted to the action of formaldehyde
and dried. The cement resists the action
of water, even hot.
II. — Melt together equal parts of
good pitch and gutta percha. To 9
parts of this mass add 3 parts of boiled
linseed oil and ^ part litharge. The
heat is kept up until, with constant
stirring, an intimate union of all the in-
gredients has taken place. The mix-
ture is diluted with a little benzine or
oil of turpentine and applied while still
warm. The cement is waterproof.
III. — The National Druggist says
that experience with pasting or cement-
ing parchment paper seems to show
that about the best agent is casein
cement, made by dissolving casein in
a saturated aqueous solution of borax.
IV. — The following is recommended
for paper boxes:
Chloral hydrate 5 parts
Gelatin, white 8 parts
Gum arabic 2 parts
Boiling water 30 parts
Mix the chloral, gelatin, and gum
arabic in a porcelain container, pour the
boiling water over the mixture and let
stand for 1 day, giving it a vigorous
stirring several times during the day.
In cold weather this is apt to get hard
and stiff, but this may be obviated by
standing the container in warm water
for a few minutes. This paste adheres
to any surface whatever.
Waterproof Cements for Glass, Stone-
ware, and Metal. — I. — Make a paste of
sulphur, sal ammoniac, iron filings, and
boiled oil.
II. — Mix together dry : Whiting, 6
pounds; plaster of Paris, 3 pounds;
sand, 3 pounds; litharge, 3 pounds;
rosin, 1 pound. Make to a paste with
copal varnish.
III. — Make a paste of boiled oil, 6
pounds; copal, 6 pounds; litharge, 2
pounds; white lead, 1 pound.
IV. — Make a paste with boiled oil,
3 pounds; brickdust 2 pounds; dry
slaked lime, 1 pound.
V. — Dissolve 93 ounces of alum and
93 ounces of sugar of lead in water to
concentration. Dissolve separately 152
ounces of gum arabic in 25 gallons of
water, and then stir in 62 i pounds of
flour. Then heat to a uniform paste
with the metallic salts, but take care not
to boil the mass.
VI. — For Iron and Marble to Stand in
Heat. — In 3 pounds of water dissolve
first, 1 pound water glass and then 1
pound of borax. With the solution
make 2 pounds of clay and 1 pound of
barytes, first mixed dry, to a paste.
VII.— Glue to Resist Boiling Water.—
Dissolve separately in water 55 pounds
of glue and a mixture of 40 pounds of
bichromate and 5 pounds of alum. Mix
as wanted.
VIII. (Chinese Glue).— Dissolve shel-
lac in 10 times its weight of ammonia.
IX. — Make a paste of 40 ounces of
dry slaked lime 10 ounces of alum, and
50 ounces of white of egg.
X.— Alcohol 1,000 parts
Sandarac 60 parts
Mastic 60 parts
Turpentine oil 60 parts
Dissolve the gums in the alcohol and
add the oil and stir in. Now prepare
a solution of equal parts of glue and
isinglass, by soaking 125 parts of each
in cold water until it becomes saturated,
pouring and pressing off the residue, and
melting on the water bath. This should
produce a volume of glue nearly equal
to that of the solution of gums. The
latter should, in the meantime, have
been cautiously raised to the boiling
point on the water bath, and then mixed
with the hot glue solution.
It is said that articles united with
this substance will stand the strain of
cold water for an unlimited time, and
it takes hot water even a long time to
affect it.
ADHESiVES
JQ. — Burgundy pitch . 6 parts
Gutta percha 1 part
Pumice stone, in fine
powder 3 parts
Melt the gutta percha very carefully
add the pumice stone, and lastly the
pitch, and stir until homogeneous.
Use while still hot. This cement will
withstand water and dilute mineral
acids.
LEATHER AND RUBBER CEMENTS.
1. — Use a melted mixture of gutta
percha and genuine asphalt, applied
hot. The hard-rubber goods must be
kept pressed together until the cement
has cooled.
II. — A cement which is effective for
cementing rubber to iron and which is
especially valuable for fastening rub-
ber bands to bandsaw wheels is made
as follows: Powdered shellac, 1 part;
strong water of ammonia, 10 parts. Put'
the shellac in the ammonia water and
set it away in a tightly closed jar for
3 or 4 weeks. By that time the mixture
will become a perfectly liquid transpar-
ent mass and is then ready for use.
When applied to rubber the ammonia
softens it, but it quickly evaporates, leav-
ing the rubber in the same condition as
before. The shellac clings to the iron
and thus forms a firm bond between the
iron and the rubber.
III. — Gutta percha white. 1 drachm
Carbon disulphide. . 1 ounce
Dissolve, filter, and add:
India rubber 15 grains
Dissolve.
Cement for Metal on Hard Rubber. —
I. — Soak good Cologne glue and boil down
so as to give it the consistency of joiners'
glue, and add with constant stirring,
enough sifted wood ashes until a homo-
geneous, moderately thick mass results.
Use warm and fit the pieces well together
while drying.
How to Unite Rubber and Leather. —
II. — Roughen both surfaces, the leather
and the rubber, with a sharp glass edge;
apply to both a diluted solution of gutta
percha in carbon bisulphide and let this
solution soak into the material. Then
press upon each surface a skin of gutta
percha fa of an inch in thickness between
rolls. The two surfaces are now united
in a press, which should be warm but not
hot. This method should answer in all
cases in which it is applicable. The
other prescription covers cases in which
a press cannot be used. Cut 30 parts of
rubber into small pieces, and dissolve
it in 140 parts of carbon bisulphide, the
vessel being placed on a water bath of
30° C. (86° F.). Further, melt 10 parts
of rubber with 15 of colophony, and add
35 parts of oil of turpentine. When the
rubber has been completely dissolved,
the two liquids may be mixed. The
resulting cement must be kept well
corked.
To Fasten Rubber to Wood.— I —
Make a cement by macerating virgin
gum rubber, or as pure rubber as can be
ad, cut in small pieces, in just enough
naphtha or gasoline to cover it. Let it
stand in a very tightly corked or sealed
jar for 14 days, or a sufficient time to
become dissolved, shaking the mixture
daily.
II. — Dissolve pulverized gum shellac,
1 ounce, in 9i ounces of strong ammonia.
This of course must be kept tightly
corked. It will not be as clastic as the
first preparation.
III. — Fuse together shellac and gutta
percha in equal weights.
IV. — India rubber 8 ounces
Gutta percha 4 ounces
Isinglass 2 ounces
Bisulphide of carbon 32 ounces
V. — India rubber 5 ounces
Gum mastic 1 ounce
Chloroform 3 ounces
VI. — Gutta percha 16 ounces
India rubber 4 ounces
Pitch 4 ounces
Shellac 1 ounce
Linseed oil 1 ounce
Amalgamate by heat.
VII. — Mix 1 ounce of oil of turpentine
with 10 ounces of bisulphide of carbon in
which as much gutta percha as possible
has been dissolved.
VIII. — Amalgamate by heat:
Gutta percha.'. . . . 100 ounces
Venice turpentine. 80 ounces
Shellac 8 ounces
India rubber 2 ounces
Liquid storax 10 ounces
IX. — Amalgamate by heat:
India rubber 100 ounces
Rosin 15 ounces
Shellac 10 ounces
Then dissolve in bisulphide of carbon.
X. — Make the following solutions sep-
arately and mix:
(a) India rubber 5 ounces
Chloroform 140 ounces
(b) India rubber 5 ounces
Rosin 2 ounces
Venice turpentine. 1 ounce
Oil of turpentine. . 20 ounces
ADHESIVES
Cement for Patching Rubber Boots
and Shoes. —
I. — India rubber, finely
chopped 100 parts
Rosin 15 parts
Shellac. . . . . .. 10 parts
Carbon disulphide,
q. s. to dissolve.
This will not only unite leather to
leather, india rubber, etc., but will unite
rubber to almost any substance.
II. — Caoutchouc, finely cut 4 parts
India rubber, finely
cut ;•••••. 1 part
Carbon disulphide ... 32 parts
Dissolve the caoutchouc in the carbon
disulphide, add the rubber, let macer-
ate a few days, then mash with a palette
knife to a smooth paste. The vessel in
which the solution is made in both
instances above must be kept tightly
closed, and should have frequent agita-
tions.
III.— Take 100 parts of crude rubber
or caoutchouc, cut it up in small bits,
and dissolve it in sufficient carbon bisul-
phide, add to it 15 parts of rosin and
10 parts of gum lac. The user must
not overlook the great inflammability and
exceedingly volatile nature of the carbon
bisulphide.
Tire Cements. —
I. — India rubber 15 grams
Chloroform 2 ounces
Mastic ^ ounce
Mix the india rubber and chloroform
together, and when dissolved, the mastic
is added in powder. It is then allowed
to stand a week or two before using.
II. — The following is recommended as
very good for cementing pneumatic tires to
bicycle wheels:
Shellac 1 ounce
Gutta percha 1 ounce
Sulphur 45 grains
Red lead 45 grains
Melt together the shellac and gutta per-
cha, then add, with constant stirring, the
sulphur and red lead. Use while hot.
III. — Raw gutta percha. . 16 ounces
Carbon bisulphide. 72 ounces
Eau de Cologne. . . . 2§ ounces
This cement is the subject of an Eng-
lish patent and is recommended for
patching cycle and motor tires, insulat-
ing electric wires, etc.
IV. — A good thick shellac varnish with j
which a small amount of castor oil has (
been mixed will be found a very excellent i
bicycle rim cement. The formula rec-
ommended by Edel is as follows:
Shellac 1 pound
Alcohol ] pint
Mix and dissolve, then add:
Castor oil £ ounce
The castor oil prevents the cement
from becoming hard and brittle.
A cement used to fasten bicycle tires
may be made by melting together at a
gentle heat equal parts of gutta percha
and asphalt. Apply hot. Sometimes a
small quantity each of sulphur and red
lead is added (about 1 part of each to 20
parts of cement).
Cements for Leather.—
I. — Gutta percha 20 parts
Syrian asphalt, pow-
dered 20 parts
Carbon disulphide . . 50 parts
Oil of turpentine ... 10 parts
The gutta percha, shredded fine, is
dissolved in the carbon disulphide and
turpentine oil. To the solution add the
asphalt and set away for several days,
or until the asphalt is dissolved. The
cement should have the consistency of
honey. If the preparation is thinner
than this let it stand, open, for a few
days. Articles to be patched should
first be washed with benzine.
II. — Glue 1 ounce
•Starch paste 2 ounces
Turpentine 1 drachm
.Water, a sufficient quantity.
Dissolve the g.'ue in sufficient water
with heat; mix the starch paste with
water; add the turpentine, and finally
mix with the glue while hot.
III. — Soak for one day 1 pound of .com-
mon glue in enough water to cover, and
1 pound of isinglass in ale droppings.
Then mix together and heat gently un-
til boiling. At this paint add a little
Eure tannin and keep boiling for an
our. If the glue and isinglass when
mixed are too thick, add water. This
cement should be used warm and the
jointed leather pressed tightly together
for 12 hours.
IV. — A waterproof cement for leather
caoutchouc, or balata, is prepared by
dissolving gutta percha, caoutchouc,
benzoin, gum lac, mastic, etc., in some
convenient solvent like carbon disul-
phide, chloroform, ether, or alcohol.
The best solvent, however, in the case of
gutta percha, is carbon disulphide and
ether for mastic. The most favorable
proportions are as follows: Gutta percha,
200 to 300 parts to 100 parts of the sol-
vent, and 75 to 85 parts of mastic to 100
parts of ether. From 5 to 8 parts of
the former solution are mixed with 1
ADHESIVES
part of the latter, and the mixture is
then boiled on the water bath, or in a
vessel fitted with a water jacket.
V. — Make a solution of 200 to 300
parts of caoutchouc, gutta percha india
rubber, benzoin, or similar gum, in 1,000
parts of carbon disulphide, chloroform,
ether, or alcohol, and of this add 5 to 8
parts to a solution of mastic (75 to 125
parts) in ether 100 parts, of equal volume
and boil together. Use hot water as the
boiling agent, or boil very cautiously on
the water bath.
VI. — Forty parts of aluminum ace-
tate, 10° B., 10 parts of glue, 10 parts
of rye flour. These materials are either
to be simultaneously mixed and boiled,
or else the glue is to be dissolved in the
aluminum acetate, and the flour stirred
into the solution. This is an excellent
cement for leather, and is used in so-
called art work with leather, and with
leather articles which are made of sev-
eral pieces. It is to be applied warm.
Rubber Cement for Cloth.— The fol-
lowing formulas have been recommended:
I. — Caoutchouc, 5 parts; chloroform,
3 parts. Dissolve and add gum mastic
(powder) 1 part.
II. — Gutta percha, 16 parts; india rub-
ber. 4 parts; pitch, 2 parts; shellac, 1
part; linseed oil, 2 parts. Reduce the
solids to small pieces, melt together with
the oil and mix well.
III. — The following cement for mend-
ing rubber shoes and tires will answer
similar purposes:
Caoutchouc in shavings .. 10 } parts
Rosin 4V by
'Gum turpentine 40 ) weight.
Oil turpentine, enough.
Melt together first the caoutchouc and
rosin, then add the gum turpentine, and
when all is liquefied, add enough of oil
of turpentine to preserve it liquid. A
second solution is prepared by dissolv-
ing together:
Caoutchouc 10 ( p£rts
Chloroform 280 I weight.
For use these two solutions are mixed.
Wash the hole in the rubber shoe
over with the cement, then a piece of
linen dipped in it is placed over it; as
soon as the linen adheres to the sole, the
cement is then applied as thickly as re-
quired.
CEMENTS FOR METALS AND FOR AT-
TACHING VARIOUS SUBSTANCES
TO METALS:
Cements for Iron. — I. — To make a
good cement for iron on iron, make a
thick paste, with water, of powdered!
iron, 60 parts; sal ammoniac, 2 parts,
and sulphur flowers. 1 part. Use while
fresh.
II. — Sulphur flowers, 6 parts; dry
white lead 6 parts, and powdered borax,
1 part. Mix by sifting and keep as a
dry powder in a closed tin box. To use,
make into a thin paste with strong sul-
phuric acid and press together immedi-
ately. This cement will harden in 5
days.
III. — Graphite 50 pounds
Whiting 15 pounds
Litharge 15 pounds
Make to a paste with a boiled oil.
IV. — Make a paste of white lead and
asbestos.
V. — Make a paste of litharge and glyc-
erine. Red lead may be added. This
also does for stone.
VI. — Make a paste of boiled oil of
equal parts of white lead, pipe clay, and
black oxide of manganese.
VII. — Make iron filings to a paste with
water glass.
VIII. — Sal ammoniac. ... 4 ounces
Sulphur 2 ounces
Iron filings 32 ounces
Make as much as is to be used at once
to a paste with a little water. This re-
mark applies to both the following dry
recipes:
IX. — Iron filings 160 ounces
Lime 80 ounces
Red lead 16 ounces
Alum 8 ounces
Sal ammoniac... 2 ounces
X. — Clay 10 ounces
Iron filings 4 ounces
Salt 1 ounce
Borax 1 ounce
Black oxide of
manganese ... 2 ounces
XL— Mix:
Iron filings 180 ounces
Lime 45 ounces
Salt 8 ounces
XIL— Mix:
Iron filings 140 ounces
Hydraulic lime . . 20 ounces
Sand 25 ounces
Sal ammoniac. . . 3 ounces
Either of these last two mixtures is
made into a paste with strong vinegar
just before use.
XIII. — Mix equal weights of zinc
oxide and black oxide of manganese
into a paste with water glass.
XIV. — Copal varnish, 15 parts; hy-
drated lime, 10 parts; glue de nerfs (of
sinews), 5 parts; fat drying oils 5 parts;
ADHESIVES
powdered turpentine, 3 parts; essence of
turpentine, 2 parts. Dissolve the glue
de nerjs on the water bath, add all the
other substances, and triturate inti-
mately.
XV. — Copal varnish, 15 parts; pow-
dered turpentine, 3 parts; essence of tur-
pentine, 2 parts; powdered fish glue, 3
parts; iron filings, 3 parts; ocher, 10
parts.
XVI. — To make a cement for cast iron,
take 16 ounces cast-iron borings; 2 ounces
sal ammoniac, and 1 ounce sulphur. Mix
well and keep dry. When ready to use
take 1 part of this powder to 20 parts of
cast-iron borings and mix thoroughly into
a stiff paste, adding a little water.
XVII.— Litharge 2 parts
Boiled linseed oil 2 parts
White lead 1 part
Copal 1 part
Heat together until of a uniform con-
sistence and apply warm.
XVIII. — A cement for iron which is
said to be perfectly waterproof and fire-
proof is made by working up a mixture
of equal weights of red lead and litharge
with glycerine till the mass is perfectly
homogeneous and has the consistency
of a glazier's putty. This cement is
said to answer well, even for very large
iron vessels, and to be unsurpassable for
stopping up cracks in large iron pans of
steam pipes.
Cement for Metal, Glass, and Porce-
lain.— A soft alloy is prepared by mixing
from 30 to 36 parts of copper precipi-
tated in the form of a fine brown powder,
with sulphuric acid of a specific gravity
of 1.85 in a cast-iron or porcelain mor-
tar and incorporating by stirring with 75
parts of mercury, the acid being after-
wards removed by washing with water.
In from 10 to 14 hours the amalgam be-
comes harder than tin, but when heated to
692° F., it can be kneaded like wax. In
this condition it is applied to the surface
to be cemented, and will fix them firmly
together on cooling.
Dissolve 1 drachm of gum mastic in 3
drachms of spirits of wine. In a sep-
arate vessel containing water soak 3
drachms of isinglass. When thoroughly
soaked take it out of the water and put
it into 5 drachms of spirits of wine. Take
a piece of gum ammoniacum the size of
a large pea and grind it up finely with a
little spirits of wine and isinglass until
it has dissolved. Then mix the whole
together with sufficient heat. It will be
found most convenient to place the
vessel on a hot-water bath. Keep this
cement in a bottle closely stoppered, and
when it is to be used, place it in hot
water until dissolved.
Cements for Fastening Porcelain to
Metal. — I. — Mix equal parts of alcohol
(95 per cent) and water, and make a
paste by incorporating the liquid with
300 parts of finely pulverized chalk and
250 parts of starch.
II. — Mix finely powdered burned lime,
300 parts, with powdered starch, 250
parts, and moisten the mixture with a
compound of equal parts of water and
alcohol of 95 per cent until a paste
results.
III. — Cement or plaster can be used
if the surfaces are sufficiently large;
cement is the better article when the
object may be exposed to moisture or
subjected to much pressure. A process
which can be recommended consists in
mingling equal weights of chalk, brick-
dust, clay, and Romain cement. These
materials, pulverized and sifted are in-
corporated with linseed oil in the pro-
portion of half a kilo of oil to 3 kilos of
the mingled powder. The Romain or
Romanic cement is so designated from
the district in France where the calca-
reous stone from which it is prepared is
found in considerable quantity. Al-
though its adhesive qualities are unques-
tioned, there are undoubtedly American
cements equally as good.
IV.— Acetate of lead, 46 £ parts by
weight; alum, 46 £ parts by weight;
gum arabic, 76 parts by weight; flour,
500 parts by weight; water, 2,000 parts
by weight. Dissolve the acetate of lead
and the alum in a little water; on the
other hand dissolve the gum arabic in
water by pouring, for instance, the 2
liters of boiling water on the gum arabic
reduced to powder. When the gum has
dissolved, add the flower, put all on the
fire, and stir well with a piece of wood;
then add the solution of acetate of lead
and the alum; agitate well so as to pre-
vent any lumps from forming; retire from
the fire before allowing to boil. This
glue is used cold, does not peel off, and
is excellent to make wood, glass, card-
board, etc. adhere to metals.
Cement for Leather and Iron. — To
face a cast-iron pulley with leather apply
acetic acid to the face of the pulley with
a brush, which will roughen it by rusting,
and then when dry apply a cement made
of 1 pound of fish glue and % pound of
common glue, melted in a mixture of
alcohol and water. The leather should
then be placed on the pulley and dried
under pressure.
ADHESIVES
Amber Cements. — I. — To solder to-
gether two pieces of yellow amber,
slightly heat the parts to be united and
moisten them with a solution of caustic
soda; then bring the two pieces together
quickly.
II. — Dissolve in a closed bottle 75
parts of cut-up caoutchouc in 60 parts of
chloroform. Add 15 parts of mastic and
let the mixture stand in the cold until all
has dissolved.
III. — Moisten the pieces to be joined
with caustic potash and press them to-
gether when warm. The union is so
perfect that no trace of the juncture is
visible. A concentrated alcoholic solu-
tion of the rosin over the amber, soluble
in alcohol, is also employed for this pur-
pose. Another medium is a solution
of hard and very finely powdered copal
in pure sulphuric ether. Coat both
fractures, previously well cleaned, with
this solution and endeavor to combine
them intimately by tying or pressing.
IV. — In 30 parts by weight of copal
dissolve 30 parts by weight of alumina
by means of a water bath. Bathe the
surface to be cemented with this gelat-
inous liquid, but very slightly. Unite
the fractures and press them together
firmly until the mixture is dry.
Acid -Proof Cements for Stoneware
and Glass. — I. — Mix with the aid of heat
equal weights of pitch, rosin, and plaster
of Paris.
II. — Mix silicate of soda to a paste
with ground glass.
III. — Mix boiled oil to a paste with
china clay.
IV. — Mix coal tar to a paste with
pipe clay.
V. — Mix boiled oil to a paste with
quicklime.
VI.— Mix with the aid of heat: Sul-
phur, 100 pounds; tallow, 2 pounds;
rosin, 2 pounds. Thicken with ground
glass.
VII.— Mix with the aid of heat:
Rosin, 2 pounds; sulphur, 2 pounds;
brickdust, 4 pounds.
VIII.— Mix with the aid of heat 2
pounds of india rubber and 4 pounds of
boiled oil. Thicken with 12 pounds of
pipe clay.
IX. — Fuse 100 pounds of india rub-
ber with 7 pounds of tallow. Then
make to a paste with dry slaked lime and
finally add 20 pounds of red lead.
X. — Mix with the aid of heat: Rosin,
24 pounds; red ocher, 8 pounds; boiled
oil, 2 pounds; plaster of Paris, 4 pounds.
Acid-Proof Cement for Wood, Metals,
etc.—
I. — Powdered asbestos ... 2 parts
Ground baryta 1 part
Sodium water-glass so-
lution 2 parts
Mix.
II. — To withstand hot nitric acid the
following is used:
Sodium water-glass so-
lution 2 parts
Sand 1 part
Asbestos 1 part
Mix.
III. — Asbestos 2 parts
Sulphate of barium. . . 3 parts
Silicate of sodium .... 2 parts
By mixing these ingredients a cement
strong enough to resist the strongest
nitric acid will be obtained.
IV. — If hot acids are dealt with, the
following mixture will be found to possess
still more resistant powers:
Silicate of sodium (50°
Baume) 2 parts
Fine sand 1 part
Asbestos 1 part
Both these cements take a few hours
to set. If the cement is wanted to set
at once, use silicate of potassium, instead
of silicate of sodium. This mixture will
be instantly effective and possesses the
same power of resistance as the other.
Directions for Repairing Broken Glass,
Porcelain, Bric-a-Brac. — Broken glass,
china, bric-a-brac, and picture frames,
not to name casts, require each a differ-
ent cement — in fact, several different
cements. Glass may be beautifully
mended to look at, but seldom so as to
be safely used. For clear glass the best
cement is isinglass dissolved in gin. Put
2 ounces of isinglass in a clean, wide-
mouthed bottle, add half a pint of gin,
and set in the sun until dissolved. Shake
well every day, and before using strain
through double lawn, squeezing very
gently.
Spread a white cloth over the mend-
ing table and supply it with plenty of
clean linen rags, strong rubber bands,
and narrow white tape, also a basin of
tepid water and a clean soft towel. Wash
the broken glass very clean, especially
along the break, but take care not to
chip it further. Wet both broken edges
well with the glue, using a camel's-hair
pencil. Fit the break to a nicety, then
slip on rubber bands length- and cross-
wise, every way they will hold. If they
will not hold true as upon a stemmed
ADHESIVES
thing, a vase or jug or scent bottle,
string half a dozen bands of the same
size and strength upon a bit of tape, and
tie the tape about neck or base before
beginning the gluing. After the parts
are joined slip another tape through the
same bands and tie it above the fracture;
thus with all their strength the bands
Eull the break together. The bands can
e used thus on casts of china — in fact,
to hold anything mendable. In glass
mending the greater the pressure the
better — if only it stops short of the break-
ing point. Properly made the isinglass
cement is as clear as water. When the
pieces fit true one on the other the break
should be hardly visible, if the pressure
has been great enough to force out the
tiny bubbles, which otherwise refract
the light and make the line of cleavage
distressingly apparent. Mended glass
may be used to hold dry things — as rose
leaves, sachets, violet powder, even can-
dies and fruits. But it will not bear
to have any sort of liquid left standing
in it, nor to be washed beyond a quick
rinsing in tepid water. In wriping always
use a very soft towel, and pat the vessel
dry with due regard to its infirmities.
Mend a lamp loose in the collar with
sifted plaster of Paris mixed to a very
soft paste with beaten white of egg.
Have everything ready before wetting
up the plaster, and work quickly so it
may set in place. With several lamps to
mend wet enough plaster for one at a
time. It takes less than 5 minutes to
set, and is utterly worthless if one tries
working it over. Metal work apart
from the glass needs the soldering iron.
Dust the break well with powdered rosin,
tie the parts firmly together, lay the stick
of solder above the break, and fetch the
iron down on it lightly but firmly. When
the solder cools, remove the melted rosin
with a cloth dipped in alcohol.
Since breakables have so unhappy a
knack of fracturing themselves in such
fashion they cannot possibly stand up-
right, one needs a sand box. It is only
a box of handy size with 8 inches of
clean, coarse sand in the bottom. Along
with it there should be some small leaden
weights, with rings cast in them, run-
ning from an ounce to a quarter pound.
Two of each weight are needed. In use,
tapes are tied to the rings, and the pair of
weights swung outside the edges of the
box, so as to press in place the upper
part of a broken thing to which the tapes
have been fastened.
Set broken platters on edge in the sand
box with the break up. The sand will
hold them firm, and the broken bit can
be slapped on. It is the same with
plates and saucers. None of these com-
monly requires weighting. But very
fine pieces where an invisible seam is
wanted should be held firm until partly
set, then have the pair of heaviest weights
accurately balanced across the broken
piece. The weights are also very useful
to prop and stay topheavy articles and
balance them so they shall not get out
of kilter. A cup broken, as is so com-
mon with cups, can have the tape passed
around it, crossing inside the handle,
then be set firmly in the sand, face down,
and be held by the hanging weights
pulling one against the other.
The most dependable cement for china
is pure white lead, ground in linseed oil,
so thick it will barely spread smoothly
with a knife. Given time enough to
harden (some 3 months), it makes a seam
practically indestructible. The objec-
tion to it is that it always shows in a
staring white line. A better cement for
fine china is white of egg and plaster. Sift
the plaster three times and tie a generous
pinch of it loosely in mosquito netting.
Then beat the egg until it will stick to
the plaster. Have the broken egg very
clean, cover both with the beaten egg,
dust well with the plaster, fit together at
once, tie, using rubber bands if possible,
wrap loosely in very soft tissue paper,
and bury head and ears in the sand box,
taking care that the break lies so that
the sand will hold it together. Leave in
the box 24 hours. After a week the su-
perfluous plaster may be gently scraped
away.
General Formulas for Cements for
Repairing Porcelain, Glassware, Crock-
ery, Plaster, and Meerschaum. — I. —
An excellent cement for joining broken
crockery and similar small articles can
be made by melting 4 or 5 parts of rosin
(or, better still, gum mastic) with 1 part
of beeswax in an iron spoon or similar
vessel. Apply while hot. It will not
stand great heat.
II. — An excellent cement for porcelain
and stoneware is obtained by mixing 20
parts of fish glue with an equal weight
of crystallizable acetic acid and evapo-
rate the mixture carefully to a syrupy
consistency so that it forms a gelatinous
mass on cooling. For use the cement
thus obtained is made liquid again by
heating and applied to the fracture with
a brush. The pieces should now be
pressed firmly together, by winding a
twine tightly around them, until the
cement has hardened.
III. — For luting vessels made of glass,
ADHESIVES
porcelain, etc., which are to be used to
hold strong acids, a mixture of asbestos
powder, water glass, and an indifferent pow-
der (permanent white, sand, etc.) is rec-
ommended. To begin with, asbestos
powder is made into a pulp with three
or four times the quantity (weight) of a
solution of soda water glass (of 30°
B.). The same is exceedingly fat and
plastic, but is not very well suited for
working, as it shrinks too much and
cracks when drying. By an addition of
fine writing sand of the same weight
as the asbestos used, the mass can be
made less fat, so as to obviate shrinking,
without detracting from the plasticity.
Small vessels were molded from it and
dried in the air, to be tested afterwards.
Put in water, the hardened mass becomes
soft again and falls apart. Brought into
contact, however, with very strong min-
eral acids, it becomes even firmer and
withstands the liquid perfectly. Con-
centrated nitric acid was kept in such
small vessels without the mass being
visibly attacked or anything penetrating
it. The action of the acid manifestly
has the effect that silicic acid is set free
from the water glass in excess, which
clogs up the pores entirely and con-
tributes to the lutation. Later on, the
mass cannot be dissolved by pure water
any more. The mass is also highly fire-
proof. One of the molded bodies can
be kept glowing in a Bunsen gas flame
for about half a day after treatment with
acid, without slagging in the least. For
many purposes it ought to be welcome
to have such a mass at hand. It cannot
be kept ready for use, however, as it
hardens a few hours after being pre-
pared; if potash water glass is used, in-
stead of the soda 'iomposition, this in-
duration takes place still more quickly.
IV. — Cement for Glass, Porcelain, etc.
Isinglass (fish glue) . . 50 parts
Gum ammoniac 4 parts
Gum mastic 2 parts
Alcohol, 95 per cent . . 10 parts
Water, q. s.
Soak the isinglass in cold water over
night, or until it has become swollen and
soft throughout. In the morning throw
off any superfluous fluid and throw the
isinglass on a clean towel or other coarse
cloth, and hang it up in such a way that
any free residual water will drain away.
Upon doing this thoroughly depends, in
a great measure, the strengtn of the
cement. When the gelatin has become
thoroughly drained put it into a flask
or other container, place it in the water
bath and heat carefully until it becomes
fluid, being careful not to let it come to
a boil, as this injures its adhesive prop-
erties (the same may be said in regard
to glues and gelatins of all kinds). Dis-
solve the gums in the alcohol and add
the solution to the gelatin after remov-
ing the same from the water bath, and
letting it cool down to about 160° F.
Stir well together or mix by agitation.
The following precautions must be
observed: 1. Both surfaces to be joined
must be absolutely clean, free from dust,
dirt, grease, etc. 2. Where the cement
is one that requires the application of
heat before use, the objects to be united
should also be heated to a point at least
as high as the melting point of the cement.
Otherwise, the cement on application is
chilled and consequently fails to make a
lasting joint. 3. The thinner the layer
of cement the stronger the joint; avoid,
therefore, using too much of the binding
material. Cover both surfaces to be
united, coapt them exactly, and press
together as closely as possible. In this
manner the thinnest possible layer is
secured. 4. Bind the parts securely to-
gether, and let remain without loosening
or attempting to use the article for 2 or
3 days or longer. A liquid cement ac-
quires its full strength only after evapor-
ation of the fluids used as solvents, and
this can occur only from the infinitesimal
line of exposed surface.
V. — Liquid Porcelain Cement. — Fish
glue, 20 parts; glass acetic acid, 20 parts;
heat together until the mass gelatinizes
on cooling.
VI. — Take 1 ounce of Russian isin-
glass, cut in small pieces, and bruise
well; then add 6 ounces of warm water,
and leave it in a warm place for from
24 to 48 hours. Evaporate the re-
sulting solution to about 3 ounces.
Next dissolve ^ ounce of mastic in 4
ounces of alcohol, and add the mastic
solution to the isinglass in small quan-
tities at a time, continuing the heat and
stirring well. While still hot strain the
liquid through muslin.
VII. — For optical glasses, Canada bal-
sam is employed, the two pieces being firm-
ly pressed together. After a while, espe-
cially by humidity, punctures will form,
and the glass is separated by a mist of
varying reflexes, while in certain climates
the heat will melt the balsam. For all
other glass articles which require only
simple treatment, such as knobs of covers,
plates, etc., silicate of potash is excel-
lent.
VIII. — Glass Cement.— Dissolve in 150
parts of acetic acid of 96 per cent, 100
ADHESIVES
parts of gelatin by the use of heat, and
add ammonium bichromate, 5 parts.
This glue must be kept away from the
light.
IX.— White glue 10 parts
Potassium bichromate 2 parts
Water 100 parts
The glue is dissolved in a portion of
the water by the aid of heat, the bichro-
mate in the remainder, and the liquids
mixed, the mixing being done in a feebly
lighted place, and the mixture is then
kept in the dark. It is applied in feeble
light, being reliquefied by gentle heat,
and the glass, the fractured pieces being
tightly clamped together, is then exposed
to a strong light for some time. By this
exposure the cement becomes insoluble.
This is waterproof cement for glass.
X. — Diamond Glass Cement. — Dis-
solve 100 parts of fish glue in 150 parts
of 90 per cent alcohol and add, with con-
stant stirring, 200 parts of powdered
rosin. This cement must be preserved
in absolutely tight bottles, as it solidifies
very quickly.
XI — To unite objects of crystal dis-
solve 8 parts of caoutchouc and 100 parts
of gum mastic in 600 parts of chloro-
form. Set aside, hermetically closed,
for 8 days; then apply with a brush,
cold.
XII. — To make a transparent cement
for glass, digest together for a week in
the cold 1 ounce of india rubber, 67
ounces of chloroform, and 40 ounces of
mastic.
XIII. — A mixture of traumaticin, a
solution of caoutchouc in chloroform,
and a concentrated solution of water
glass make a capital cement for unit-
ing articles of glass. Not only is the
joint very strong, but it is transparent.
Neither changes of temperature nor
moisture affect the cement.
XIV. — A transparent cement for por-
celain is prepared by dissolving 75 parts
of india rubber, cut into small pieces,
in a bottle containing 60 parts chloro-
form; to this add 15 parts green mastic.
Let the bottle stand in the cold until the
ingredients have become thoroughly dis-
solved.
XV. — Some preparations resist the ac-
tion of heat and moisture a short time,
but generally yield very quickly. The
following cement for glass has proven
most resistant to liquids and heat:
Silver litharge .... 1,000 parts
White lead 50 parts
Boiled linseed oil. . 3 parts
Copal varnish .... 1 part
Mix the lead and litharge thoroughly,
and the oil and copal in the same man-
ner, and preserve separately. When
needed for use, mix in the proportions
indicated (150 parts of the powder to 4
parts of the liquid) and knead well to-
gether. Apply to the edges of the glass,
bind the broken parts together, and let
stand for from 24 to 48 hours.
XVI. — To reunite plaster articles dis-
solve small pieces of celluloid in ether;
in a quarter of an hour decant, and use
the pasty deposit which remains for
smearing the edges of the articles. It
dries rapidly and is insoluble in water.
XVII.— To Mend Wedgwood Mortars.
— It is easy enough to mend mortars so
that they may be used for making emul-
sions and other light work which does
not tax their strength too much. But
a mended mortar will hardly be able to
stand the force required for powdering
hard substances. A good cement for
mending mortars is the following:
a. — Glass flour elutriated. 10 parts
Fluorspar, powdered
and elutriated 20 parts
Silicate of soda 60 parts
Both glass and fluorspar must be in
the finest possible condition, which is
best done by shaking each in fine pow-
der, with water allowing the coarser
particles to deposit, and then to pour off
the remainder, which holds the finest
particles in suspension. The mixture
must be made very rapidly by quick
stirring, and when thoroughly mixed
must be at once applied. This is said
to yield an excellent cement.
b. — Freshly burnt plaster
of Paris 5 parts
Freshly burnt lime .... 1 part
White of egg, sufficient.
Reduce the first two ingredients to a
very fine powder and mix them well;
moisten the two surfaces to be united with
a small quantity of white of egg to make
them adhesive; then mix the powder very
rapidly with the white of egg and apply
the mixture to the broken surfaces. If
they are large, two persons should do this,
each applying the cement to one portion.
The pieces are then firmly pressed to-
gether and left undisturbed for several
da.ys. The less cement is used the better
will the articles hold together.
c. — If there is no objection to dark-
colored cement, the very best that can
be used is probably marine glue. This
is made thus: Ten parts of caoutchouc or
india rubber are dissolved in 120 parts
of benzine or petroleum naphtha, with
ADHESIVES
the aid of a gentle heat. When the so-
lution is complete, which sometimes
laquires from 10 to 14 days, 20 parts of
asphalt are melted in an iron vessel and
the caoutchouc solution is poured in very
slowly in a fine stream and under con-
tinued heating, until the mass has be-
come homogeneous and nearly all the
solvent has been driven off. It is then
poured out and cast into greased tin
molds. It forms dark brown or black
cakes, which are very hard to break.
This cement requires considerable heat
to melt it; and to prevent it from being
burnt it is best to heat a capsule contain-
ing a piece of it first on a water bath until
the cake softens and begins to be liquid.
It is then carefully wiped dry and heated
over a naked flame, under constant stir-
ring, up to about 300° F. The edges of
the article to be mended should, if possi-
ble, also be heated to at least 212° F.,
so as to permit the cement to be ap-
plied at leisure and with care. The
thinner the cement is applied the better
it binds.
Meerschaum Cements. — I. — If the ma-
terial is genuine (natural) meerschaum
a lasting joint can be made between the
parts by proceeding as follows: Clean a
clove or two of garlic (the fresher the
better) by removing all the outside hull
of skin; throw into a little mortar and
mash to a paste. Rub this paste over
each surface to be united and join quick-
ly. Bring the parts as closely together
as possible and fasten in this position.
Have ready some boiling fresh milk;
place the article in it and continue the
boiling for 30 minutes. Remove and
let cool slowly. If properly done, this
makes a joint that will stand any ordi-
nary treatment, and is nearly invisible.
For composition, use a cement made of
quicklime, rubbed to a thick cream with
egg albumen.
II. — Mix very fine meerschaum shay-
ings with albumen or dissolve casein in
water glass, stir finely powdered magne-
sia into the mass, and use the cement
at once. This hardens quickly.
Asbestos Cement. — Ground asbestos
may be made into a cement which will
stand a high degree of heat by simply
mixing it with a solution of sodium sili-
cate. By subsequent treatment with a
solution of calcium chloride the mass
may be made insoluble, silicate of cal-
cium being formed.
A cement said to stand a high degree
of heat and to be suitable for cementing
glass, porcelain, or other vessels intended
to hold corrosive acids, is this one:
I. — Asbestos 2 parts
Barium sulphate 3 parts
Sodium silicate 2 parts
By mixing these ingredients a cement
strong enough to resist the strongest
nitric acid will be obtained. If hot acids
are dealt with, the following mixture will
be found to possess still more resistant
powers :
II. — Sodium silicate 2 parts
Fine sand 1 part
Asbestos powder 1 part
Both these cements take a few hours
to set. If the cement is wanted to set at
once, use potassium silicate instead of
sodium silicate. This mixture will be
instantly effective, and possesses the
same power of resistance as the other.
Parisian Cement. — Mix 1 part of
finely ground glass powder, obtained
by levigation, with 3 parts of finely pow-
dered zinc oxide rendered perfectly free
from carbonic acid by calcination. Be-
sides prepare a solution of 1 part, by
weight, of borax in a very small quantity
of hot water and mix this with 50 parts
of a highly concentrated zinc chloride
solution of 1.5 to 1.6 specific gravity.
As is well known the mixture of this
powder with the liquid into a soft uni-
form paste is accomplished only imme-
diately before use. The induration to
a stonelike mass takes place within a
few minutes, the admixture of borax
retarding the solidification somewhat.
The pure white color of the powder may
be tinted with ocher, manganese, etc.,
according to the shade desired.
Strong Cement. — Pour over well-
washed and cleaned casein 12| parts of
boiled linseed oil and the same amount
of castor oil. Boil. Stir actively and
add a small amount of a saturated aque-
ous solution of alum; remove from the
fire and set aside. After a while a milky
looking fluid will separate and rise. This
should be poured off. To the residue
add 120 parts of rock candy syrup and
6 parts of dextrin.
A Cheap and Excellent Cement. — A
cheap and excellent cement, insoluble
after drying in water, petroleum, oils,
carbon disulphide, etc., very hard when
dry and of very considerable tensile
strength, is composed of casein and
some tannic-acid compound, as, for in-
stance, calcium tannate, and is prepared
as follows:
First, a tannin solution is prepared
either by dissolving a tannin salt, or by
extraction from vegetable sources (as
barks from certain trees, etc.), to which
ADHESIVES
is added clear lime water (obtained by
filtering milk of lime, or by letting the
milk stand until the lime subsides) until
no further precipitation occurs, and red
litmus paper plunged in the fluid is
turned blue. The liquid is now sepa-
rated from its precipitate, either by de-
cantation or otherwise, and the precipi-
tate is dried. In operating with large
quantities of the substance, this is done
by passing a stream of atmospheric
air through the same. The lime tan-
nate obtained thus is then mixed with
casein in proportions running from 1 : 1
up to 1 : 10, and the mixture, thoroughly
dried, is milled into the consistency of the
finest powder. This powder has now
only to be mixed with water to be ready
for use, the consistency of the prepara-
tion depending upon the use to which
it is to be put.
Universal Cement. — Take gum arable,
100 parts, by weight; starch, 75 parts, by
weight; white sugar, 21 parts, by weight;
camphor, 4 parts, by weight. Dissolve
the gum arabic in a little water; also
dissolve the starch in a little water. Mix
and add the sugar and camphor. Boil
on the water bath until a paste is formed
which, on coating, will thicken.
Cement for Ivory. — Melt together
equal parts of gutta percha and ordinary
Eitch. The pieces to be united have to
e warmed.
Cement for Belts.— Mix 50 parts, by
weight, of fish glue with equal parts of
whey and acetic acid. Then add 50
parts, by weight, of garlic in paste form
and boil the whole on the water bath.
At the same time make a solution of
100 parts, by weight, of gelatin in the
same quantity of whey, and mix both
liquids. To the whole add, finally, 50
parts, by weight, of 90-per-cent alcohol
and, after filtration, a cement is ob-
tained which can be readily applied with
a brush and possesses extraordinary
binding qualities.
Cement for Chemical Apparatus. —
Melt together 20 parts of gutta percha,
10 parts of yellow wax, and 30 parts of
shellac.
Size Over Portland Cement. — The
best size to use on Portland cement
molding for wall paper would ordinarily
be glue and alum size put on thin and
warm, made in proportion of ^ pound
of glue and same weight of alum dis-
solved in separate pails, then poured to-
gether.
Aquarium Cements. —
I. — Litharge 3 ounces
Fine white sand ... 3 ounces
Plaster of Paris .... 3 ounces
Rosin, in fine pow-
der 1 ounce
Linseed oil, enough.
Drier, enough.
Mix the first three ingredients, add
sufficient linseed oil to make a homogene-
ous paste, and then add a small quantity
of drier. ^This should stand a few hours
before it is used. It is said that glass
joined to iron with this cement will
break before it will come loose.
II. — Litharge 1 ounce
Fine white sand. ... 1 ounce
Plaster of Paris. ... 1 ounce
Manganese borate. 20 grains
Rosin, in fine pow-
der 3£ pounds
Linseed varnish oil,
enough.
III. — Take equal parts of flowers of
sulphur, ammonium chloride, and iron
filings, and mix thoroughly with boiled
linseed oil. Finally, add enough white
lead to form a thin paste.
IV. — Powdered graphite. 6 parts
Slaked lime 3 parts
Barium sulphate. . . 8 parts
Linseed varnish oil. 7 parts
V. — Simply mix equal parts of white
and red lead with a little kettle-boiled
linseed oil.
Substitute for Cement on Grinder
Disks. — A good substitute in place of
glue or various kinds of cement for fast-
ening emery cloth to the disks of grind-
ers of the Gardner type is to heat or warm
the disk and apply a thin coating of
beeswax; then put the emery cloth in
place and allow to set and cool under
pressure.
Knpckenplombe. — If 1 part of thymol
be mixed with 2 parts of ipdoform we
obtain a substance that retains its fluid-
ity down to 72° C. (161.6° F.). If the
temperature be carried down to 60° C.
(140° F.) it suddenly becomes solid and
hard. If, in its liquid condition, this
substance be mixed intimately with an
equal quantity of calcined bone, it forms
a cement that can be molded or kneaded
into any shape, that, at the temperature
of the body (98° F.), becomes as hard as
stone, a fact that suggests many useful
purposes to which the mixture may be
put.
Cement for General Use. — Take gum
arabic, 100 parts, by weight; starch, 75
ADHESIVES
parts by weight; white sugar, 21 parts, by
weight; camphor, 4 parts, by weight.
Dissolve the gum arable in a little water.
On the other hand, dissolve the starch
also in some water. When this is done
add the sugar and the camphor and put
in a water bath. Boil until a paste is
formed, which must be rather thin, be-
cause it will thicken on cooling.
Strong Cement. — Pour over well-
washed and cleaned casein 12 A parts
of boiled linseed oil and the same amount
of castor oil, put on the fire and bring
to a boil; stir actively and add a small
amount of a saturated aqueous solution
of alum; remove from the fire and set
aside. After standing a while a milky-
looking fluid will separate at the bottom
and rise to the top. This should be
poured off and to the residue add 120
parts of rock-candy syrup and 6 parts of
dextrine.
Syndeticon. — 1. — Slake 100 parts of
burnt lime with 50 parts of water> pour
off the supernatant water; next, dissolve
60 parts of lump sugar in 160 parts of
water, add to the solution 15 parts of the
slaked lime, heat to 70° or 80° C. (158° to
176° F.), and set aside shaking fre-
quently. Finally dissolve 50 to 60 parts
of genuine Cologne glue in 250 parts of
the clear solution.
II. — A solution of 10 parts gum ara-
bic and 30 parts of sugar in 100 parts of
soda water glass.
III. — A hot solution of 50 parts of
Cologne glue in 60 parts of a 20-per-cent
aqueous calcium-chloride solution.
IV. — A solution of 50 parts of Co-
logne glue in 60 parts of acetic acid.
V. — Soak isinglass (fish bladder) in
acetic acid of 70 per cent until it swells up,
then rub it up, adding a little water dur-
ing the process.
"Shio Liao." — Under this name the
Chinese manufacture an excellent ce-
ment which takes the place of glue, and
with which gypsum, marble, porcelain,
stone, and stoneware can be cemented.
It consists of the following parts (by
weight): Slaked powdered lime. 54
parts; powdered alum, 6 parts; and
iresh, well - strained blood, 40 parts.
These materials are stirred thoroughly
until an intimately bound mass of the
consistency of a more or less stiff salve
is obtained. In paste form this mass is
used as cement; in a liquid state it is
employed for painting all sorts of arti-
cles wnich are to be rendered waterproof
and durable. Cardboard covers, which
are coated with it two or three times, be
come as hard as wood. The Chinese paint
their houses with "shio liao" and glaze
their barrels with it, in which they trans-
port oil and other greasy substances.
LUTES.
Lutes always consist of a menstruum
and dissolved or suspended solids, and
they must not be attacked by the gases
and liquids coming in contact with them.
In some cases the constituents of the lute
react to form a more strongly adhering
mass.
The conditions of application are, in
brief:
(a) Heating the composition to make
it plastic until firmly fixed in place.
(6) Heating the surfaces.
(c) Applying the lute with water or a
volatile solvent, which is allowed to vola-
tilize.
(d) Moistening the surfaces with wa-
ter, oil, etc. (the menstruum of the lute
itself).
(e~) Applying the lute in workable con-
dition and the setting taking place by
chemical reactions.
(/) Setting by hydration.
((/) Setting by oxidation.
These principles will be found to cover
nearly all cases.
Joints should not be ill - fitting, de-
pending upon the lute to do what the
pipes or other parts of the apparatus
should do. In most cases one part of
the fitting should overlap the other, so
as to make a small amount of the lute
effective and to keep the parts of the ap-
paratus rigid, as a luted joint is not
supposed to be a particularly strong one,
but rather one quickly applied, effective
while in place and easily removed.
Very moderate amounts of the lute
should be used, as large amounts are
likely to develop cracks, be rubbed off,
etc.
A classification may be given as fol-
lows:
(1) Plaster of Paris.
(2) Hydraulic cement.
(3) Clay.
(4) Lime.
(5) Asphalt and pitch.
(6) Rosin.
(7) Rubber.
(8) Linseed oil.
(9) Casein and albumen.
(10) Silicates of soda and oxychlo-
ride cements.
(11) Flour and starch.
(12) Miscellaneous, including core
compounds.
I. Plaster of Paris is, of course, often
used alone as a paste., which quickly
ADHESIVES
soliames, for gas and wood distillation
retorts, etc., and similar places where
quickness of setting is requisite. It is
more often, however, used with some
fibrous material to give it greater strength.
Asbestos is the most commonly used
material of these, as it will stand a high
temperature. When that is not so im-
portant, straw, plush trimmings, hair,
etc., are used as binders, while broken
stone, glass, and various mineral sub-
stances are used as fillers, but they do
not add anything to the strength.
These lutes seem to be particularly suit-
able for oil vapors and hydrocarbon
Formulas:
(1) Plaster and water.
(2) Plaster (wet) and asbestos.
(3) Plaster (wet) and straw.
(4) Plaster (wet) and plush trim-
mings.
(5) Plaster (wet) and hair.
(6) Plaster (wet) and broken stone,
etc.
II. Hydraulic Cement. — Cement is
used either alone or with sand, asbestos,
etc. These lutes are suitable for nitric
acid. When used with substances such
as rosin or sulphur, cement is probably
employed because it is in such a fine
state of division and used as a filler and
not because of any powers of setting by
hydration.
Formulas:
(1) Cement — neat.
(2) Cement and asbestos.
(3) Cement and sand.
III. Clay. — This most frequently en-
ters into the composition of lutes as a
filler, but even then the very finely divid-
ed condition of certain grades renders
it valuable, as it gives body to a liquid,
such as linseed oil, which, unless stiff-
ened, would be pervious to a gas, the
clay in all cases being neutral. Thus,
for luting pipes carrying chlorine, a stiff
paste of clay and molasses has been sug-
gested by Theo. Koller in Die Surrogate,
but it soon gives way.
Formulas:
(1) Clay and linseed oil.
(2) Same, using fire clay.
(3) Clay and molasses.
(1) Is suitable for steam, etc.; (2) for
chlorine, and (3) for oil vapors.
IV. Lime is used in the old lute known
as putty, which consists of caustic lime
and linseed oil. Frequently the lime is
replaced by chalk and china clay, but
the lime should be, in part at least, caus-
tic, so as to form a certain amount of
lime soap. Lime is also used in silicate
and casein compositions, which are very
strong and useful, but will be described
elsewhere.
Formulas:
(1) Lime and boiled oil to stiff mass.
(2) Clay, etc., boiled oil to stiff
mass.
V. Asphalt and Pitch. —These sub-
stances are used in lutes somewhat inter-
changeably. As a rule, pitch makes the
stronger lutes. Tar is sometimes used,
but, because of the light oils and, fre-
quently, water contained, it is not so
good as either of the others.
Asphalt dissolved in benzol is very
useful for uniting glass for photographic,
microscopical, and other uses. Also
for coating wood, concrete, etc., where
the melted asphalt would be too thick
to cover well. Benzol is the cheapest
solvent that is satisfactory for this pur-
pose, as the only one that is cheaper
would be a petroleum naphtha, which
does not dissolve all the constituents of
the asphalt. For waterproofing wood,
brick, concrete, etc., melted asphalt
alone is much used, but when a little
paraffine is added, it improves its water-
proofing qualities, and in particular cases
boiled oil is also added to advantage.
Formulas:
1. Refined lake asphalt.
2. Asphalt 4 parts
Paraffine 1 part
3. Asphalt 10 parts
Paraffine '. 2 parts
Boiled oil 1 part
Any of these may be thinned with hot
benzol or toluol. Toluol is less volatile
than benzol and about as cheap, if not
cheaper, the straw-colored grades being
about 24 cents per gallon.
Examples of so-called "stone cement"
are:
4. Pitch 8 parts
Rosin 6 parts
Wax 1 part
Plaster \ to * part
5. Pitch 8 parts
Rosin 7 parts
Sulphur 2 parts
Stone powder 1 part
These compositions are used to unite
slate slabs and stoneware for domestic,
engineering, and chemical purposes. Va-
rious rosin and pitch mixtures are used
for these purposes, and the proportions
of these two ingredients are determined
by the consistency desired. Sulphur and
stone powder are added to prevent the
formation of cracks, sulphur acting chem-
ically and stone powder mechanically
ADHESIVES
Where the lute would come in contact
with acid or vapors of the same, lime-
stone should not be the powder used,
otherwise it is about the best. Wax is a
useful ingredient to keep the composi-
tion from getting brittle with age.
A class of lutes under this general
grouping that are much used are so-
called "marine glues" (q. v.). They
must be tough and elastic. When used
for calking on a vessel they must expand
and contract with the temperature and
not crack or come loose.
Formulas:
6. Pitch 3 parts
Shellac 2 parts
Pure crude rubber ... 1 part
7. Pitch 1 part
Shellac 1 part
Rubber substitute .... 1 part
These are used by melting over a
burner.
VI. Rosin, Shellac, and Wax. — A
strong cement, used as a stone cement,
is:
1. Rosin 8 parts
Wax 1 part
Turpentine 1 part
It has little or no body, and is used in
thin layers.
For nitric and hydrochloric acid
vapors:
2. Rosin 1 part
Sulphur 1 part
Fire clay 2 parts
Sulphur gives great hardness and
permanency to rosin lutes, but this com-
position is somewhat brittle.
Good waterproof lutes of this class
are:
3. Rosin 1 part
Wax 1 part
Powdered stone 2 parts
4. Shellac 5 parts
Wax.... 1 part
Turpentine 1 part
Chalk, etc 8 to 10 parts
For a soft air-tight paste for ground-
glass surfaces:
5. Wax 1 part
Vaseline 1 part
6. A strong cement, without body,
for metals (other than copper or alloys
of same), porcelain, and glass is made by
letting 1 part of finely powdered shellac
stand with 10 parts of ammonia water
until solution is effected.
VII. Rubber. — Because of its toughness,
elasticity, and resistance to alterative
influences, rubber is a very useful con-
stituent in lutes, but its price makes its
use very limited.
Leather Cement.
1. Asphalt 1 part
Rosin 1 part
Gutta percha 4 parts
Carbon disulphide. . . 20 parts
To stand acid vapors:
2. Rubber 1 part
Linseed oil 3 parts
Fire clay 3 parts
3. Plain Rubber Cement. — Cut the
crude rubber in small pieces and then
add the solvent. Carbon disulphide is
the best, benzol good and much cheaper,
but gasoline is probably most extensively
used because of its cheapness.
4. To make corks and wood im-
pervious to steam and water, soak them
in a rubber solution as above; if it is
desired to protect them from oil vapors,
use glue composition. (See Section IX.)
VIII. Linseed Oil.— This is one of the
most generally useful substances we have
for luting purposes, if absorbed by a por-
ous substance that is inert.
Formulas: 1. China clay of general
utility for aqueous vapors.
Linseed oil of general utility for aque-
ous vapors.
2. Lime forming the well - known
putty.
Linseed oil forming the well-known
putty.
3. Red or white lead and linseed oil.
These mixtures become very strong
when set and are best diluted with pow-
dered glass, clay, or graphite. There
are almost an endless number of lutes
using metallic oxides and linseed oil. A
very good one, not getting as hard as
those containing lead, is:
4. Oxide of iron and linseed oil.
IX. Casein, Albumen, and Glue. —
These, if properly made, become very
tough and tenacious; they stand moder-
ate heat and oil vapors, but not acid
vapors.
1. Finely powdered case-
in 12 parts
Slaked lime (fresh). . . 50 parts
Fine sand. . ; 50 parts
Water to thick mush.
A very strong cement which stands
moderate heat is the following :
2. Casein in very fine
powder 1 part
Rubbed up with sili-
cate of soda 3 parts
A strong lute for general purposes.
ADHESIVES
which must be used promptly when
made:
3. White of egg made into a paste
with slaked lime.
A composition for soaking corks,
wood, packing, etc., to render them im-
pervious to oil vapors, is:
Gelatine or good glue 2 parts
Glycerine A to 1 part
Water 6 parts
Oil of wintergreen,
etc., to keep from
spoiling.
X. Silicate of Oxy chloride Cements. —
For oil vapors, standing the highest heat:
1. A stiff paste of silicate of soda and
asbestos.
Gaskets for superheated steam, re-
torts, furnaces, etc.:
2. Silicate of soda and powdered glass;
dry the mixture and heat.
Not so strong, however, as the follow-
ing:
3. Silicate of soda 50 parts
Asbestos 15 parts
Slaked lime 10 parts
Metal Cement:
4. Silicate of soda 1 part
Oxides of metal, such
as zinc oxide; lith-
arge, iron oxide,
singly or mixed 1 part
Very hard and extra strong composi-
tions:
5. Zinc oxide 2 parts
Zinc chloride 1 part
Water to make a paste.
6. Magnesium oxide ... 2 parts
Magnesium chloride. 1 part
Water to make a paste.
XI. Flour and Starch Compositions. —
1. The well-known flaxseed poultice
sets very tough, but does not stand water
or condensed steam.
2. Flour and molasses, made by mak-
ing a stiff composition of the two.
This is an excellent lute to have at hand
at all times for emergency use, etc.
3. Stiff paste of flour and strong zinc-
chloride solution forms a more imper-
vious lute, and is more permanent as
a cement. This is good for most pur-
poses, at ordinary temperature, where it
would not be in contact with nitric-acid
vapors or condensing steam.
4. A mixture of dextrine and fine sand
makes a good composition, mainly used
as core compound.
XII. Miscellaneous. —
1. Litharge.
Glycerine.
Mixed to form a stiff paste, sets and
becomes very hard and strong, and is very
useful for inserting glass tubes, etc., in
iron or brass.
For a high heat:
2. Alumina 1 part
Sand 4 parts
Slaked lime 1 part
Borax £ part
Water sufficient.
A class of mixtures that can be classi-
fied only according to their intended use
are core compounds.
I. — Dextrine, about 1 part
Sand, about 10 parts
With enough water to form a paste.
II. — Powdered anthracite coal, with
molasses to form a stiff paste.
III. — Rosin, partly saponi-
fied by soda lye .... 1 part
Flour. 2 parts
Sand (with sufficient
water) 4 parts
(These proportions are approximate
and the amount of sand can be increased
for some purposes.)
IV. — Glue, powdered 1 part
Flour 4 parts
Sand (with sufficient
water) 6 parts
For some purposes the following mix-
ture is used. It does not seem to be a
gasket or a core compound:
V.— Oats (or wheat) ground 25 parts
Glue, powdered 6 parts
Sal ammoniac 1 part
Paper read by Samuel S. Sadtler before
the Franklin Institute.
PASTES:
Dextrine Pastes. —
I. — Borax, powdered.. . . 60 parts
Dextrine, light yellow. 480 parts
Glucose 50 parts
Water 420 parts
By the aid of heat, dissolve the borax
in the water and add the dextrine and
glucose. Continue the heat, but do not
let the mixture boil, and stir constantly
until a homogeneous solution is obtained,
from time to time renewing the water
lost by evaporation with hot water.
Finally, bring up to full weight (1,000
parts) by the addition of hot water, then
strain through flannel. Prepared in this
manner the paste remains bright and
clear for a long time. It has extraor-
dinary adhesive properties and dries very
rapidly. If care is not taken to keep the
cooking temperature below the boiling
point of water, the paste is apt to become
brown and to be very brittle on drying.
ADHESIVES
II. — Dissolve in hot water a sufficient
quantity of dextrine to bring it to the
consistency of honey. This forms a
strong adhesive paste that will keep a
long time unchanged, if the water is not
allowed to evaporate. Sheets of paper
may be prepared for extempore labels
by coating one side with the paste and
allowing it to dry; by slightly wetting
the gummed side, the label will adhere
to glass. This paste is very useful in the
office or laboratory.
III. — Pour over 1,000 parts of dextrine
450 parts of soft water and stir the mix-
ture for 10 minutes. After the dextrine
has absorbed the water, put the mixture
over the fire, or, preferably, on a water
bath, and heat, with lively stirring for
5 minutes, or until it forms a light milk-
like liquid, on the surface of which lit-
tle bubbles begin to form and the liquid
is apparently beginning to boil. Do
not allow it to come to a boil. Re-
move from the fire and set in a bucket
of cold water to cool off. When cold
add to every 1,000 parts of the solution
51 parts glycerine and as much salicylic
acid as will stand on the tip of a knife
blade. If the solution is too thick, thin
it with water that has been boiled and
cooled off again. Dp not add any more
glycerine or the solution will never set.
IV.— Soften 175 parts of thick dex-
trine with cold water and 250 parts of
boiling water added. Boil for 5 minutes
and then add 30 parts of dilute acetic
acid, 30 parts glycerine, and a drop or
two of clove oil.
V. — Powder coarsely 400 parts dex-
trine and dissolve in 600 parts of water.
Add 20 parts glycerine and 10 parts glu-
cose and heat to 90° C. (195° F.).
VI. — Stir 400 parts of dextrine with
water and thin the mass with 200 parts
more water, 20 parts glucose, and 10
parts aluminum sulphate. Heat the
whole to 90° C. (195° F.) in the water
bath until the whole mass becomes clear
and liquid.
VII. — Warm 2 parts of dextrine, 5
parts of water, 1 part of acetic acid, 1
part of alcohol together, with occasional
stirring until a complete solution is at-
tained.
VIII. — Dissolve by the aid of heat 100
parts ot builders' glue in 200 parts of
water add 2 parts of bleached shellac
dissolved previously in 50 parts of alcohol.
Dissolve by the aid of heat 50 parts of dex-
trine in 50 parts of water, and mix the two
solutions by stirring the second slowly
into the first. Strain the mixture through
a cloth into a shallow dish and let it
harden. When needed cut off a piece of
sufficient size and warm until it becomes
liquid and if necessary or advisable thin
with water.
IX. — Stir up 10 parts of dextrine with
sufficient water to make a thick broth.
Then, over a light fire, heat and add 25
parts of sodium water glass.
X. — Dissolve 5 parts of dextrine in
water and add 1 part of alum.
Fastening Cork to Metal. — In fasten-
ing cork to iron and brass, even when
these are lacquered, a good sealing wax
containing shellac will be found to serve
the purpose nicely. Wax prepared with
rosin is not suitable. The cork surface
is painted with the melted sealing wax.
The surface of the metal is heated with
a spirit flame entirely free from soot,
until the sealing wax melts when pressed
upon the metallic surface. The wax is
held in the flame until it burns, and it is
then applied to the hot surface of the
metal. The cork surface painted with
sealing wax is now held in the flame, and
as soon as the wax begins to melt the
cork is pressed firmly on the metallic sur-
face bearing the wax.
To Paste Celluloid on Wood, Tin, or
Leather. — To attach celluloid to wood,
tin, or leather, a mixture of 1 part of
shellac, 1 part of spirit of camphor, 3 to
4 parts of alcohol and spirit of camphor (90°)
is well adapted, in which 1 part of cam-
phor is dissolved without heating in 7
parts of spirit of wine of 0.832 specific
gravity, adding 2 parts of water.
To Paste Paper Signs on Metal or
Cloth. — A piece of gutta percha of the
same size as the label is laid under the
latter and the whole is heated. If the
heating cannot be accomplished by means
of a spirit lamp the label should be ironed
down under a protective cloth or paper
in the same manner as woolen goods are
pressed. This method is also very use-
ful for attaching paper labels to minerals.
Paste for Fastening Leather, Oilcloth,
or Similar Stuff to Table or Desk Tops,
etc. — Use the same paste for leather as
for oilcloth or other goods, but moisten
the leather before applying the paste.
Prepare the paste as follows: Mix 2J
pounds of good wheat flour with 2
tablespoonfuls of pulverized gum ara-
bic or powdered rosin and 2 table-
spoonfuls of pulverized alum in a clean
dish with water enough to make a uni-
formly thick batter; set it over a slow
fire and stir continuously until the paste
is uniform and free from lumps. When
the mass has become so stout that the
wooden spoon or stick will stand in it
ADHESIVES
upright, it is taken from the fire and
placed in another dish and covered so
that no skin will form on top. When
cold, the table or desk top, etc., is
covered with a thin coat of the paste, the
cloth, etc., carefully laid on and smoothed
from the center toward the edges with
a rolling pin. The trimming of edges is
accomplished when the paste has dried.
To smooth out the leather after pasting, a
woolen cloth is of the best service.
To Paste Paper on Smooth Iron. —
Over a water bath dissolve 200 parts, by
weight, of gelatine in 150 parts, by weight,
of water; while stirring add 50 parts, by
weight, of acetic acid, 50 parts alco-
hol, and 50 parts, by weight, of pulver-
ized alum. The spot upon which it is
desired to attach the paper must first
be rubbed with a bit of fine emery paper.
Paste for Affixing Cloth to Metal.—
Starch 20 parts
Sugar 10 parts
Zinc chloride 1 part
Water 100 parts
Mix the ingredients and stir .until a
perfectly smooth liquid results entirely
free from lumps, then warm gradually
until the liquid thickens.
To Fix Paper upon Polished Metal.—
Dissolve 400 parts, by weight, of dextrine
in 600 parts, by weight, of water; add
to this 10 parts, by weight, of glucose,
and heat almost to boiling.
Albumen Paste.— Fresh egg albumen
is recommended as a paste for affixing
labels on bottles. It is said that labels
put on with this substance, and well
dried at the time, will not loosen even
when bottles are put into water and left
there for some time. Albumen, dry, is
almost proof against mold or ferments.
As to cost, it is but little if any higher
than gum arabic, the white of one egg
being sufficient to attach at least 100
medium-sized labels.
Paste for Parchment Paper.— The best
agent is made by dissolving casein in a
saturated aqueous solution of borax.
Medical Paste. — As an adhesive agent
for medicinal purposes Professor Reihl,
of Leipsic, recommends the viscous sub-
stance contained in the white mistletoe.
It is largely present in the berries and
the bark of the plant; it is called viscin,
and can be produced at one-tenth the
price of caoutchouc. Solutions in ben-
zine mav be used like those of caout-
chouc without causing any irritation if
applied mixed with medicinal remedies
to the skin.
Paste That Will Not Mold.— Mix good
white flour with cold water into a thick
paste. Be sure to stir out all the lumps;
then add boiling water, stirring all the
time until thoroughly cooked. To 6
quarts of this add \ pound light brown
sugar and \ ounce corrosive sublimate,
dissolved in a little hot water. When the
paste is cool add 1 drachm oil of lavender.
This paste will keep for a long time.
Pasting Wood and Cardboard on
Metal. — In a little water dissolve 50 parts
of lead acetate and 5 parts of alum. In
another receptacle dissolve 75 parts of
gum arabic in 2,000 parts of water.
Into this gum-arabic solution pour 500
Krts of flour, stirring constantly, and
at gradually to the boiling point.
Mingle the solution first prepared with
the second solution. It should be kept
in mind that, owing to the lead acetate,
this preparation is poisonous.
Agar Agar Paste.— The agar agar is
broken up small, wetted with water, and
exposed in an earthenware vessel to the ac-
tion of ozone pumped under pressure into
the vessel from the ozonizing apparatus.
About an hour of this bleaches the agar
agar and makes it freely soluble in boil-
ing water, when solutions far more con-
centrated than has hitherto been possible
can be prepared. On cooling, the solu-
tions assume a milky appearance, but
form no lumps and are readily relique-
fied by heating. If the solution is com-
pletely evaporated, as of course happens
when the adhesive is allowed to dry after
use, it leaves a firmly holding mass which
is insoluble in cold water. Among the
uses to which the preparation can be
applied are the dressing of textile fabrics
and paper sizing, and the production of
photographic papers, as well as the or-
dinary uses of an adhesive.
Strongly Adhesive Paste. — Four parts
glue are soaked a few hours in 15 parts
cold water, and moderately heated till
the solution becomes perfectly clear,
when 65 parts boiling water are added,
while stirring. In another vessel 30
parts boiled starch are previously stirred
together with 20 parts cold water, so
that a thin, milky liquid without lumps
results. The boiling glue solution is
poured into this while stirring constantly,
and the whole is kept boiling another 10
minutes.
Paste for Tissue Paper.—
(a) Pulverized gum ara-
bic 2 ounces
White sugar 4 drachms
Boiling water 3 fluidounces
ADHESIVES
(6) Common laundry
starch 1^ ounces
Cold water 3 fluidounces
Make into a batter and pour into
Boiling water 32 fluidounces
Mix (a) with (6), and keep in a wide-
mouthed bottle.
Waterproof and Acidproof Pastes. —
I. — Chromic acid 2£ parts
Stronger ammonia. . . 15 parts
Sulphuric acid % part
Cuprammonium so-
lution 30 parts
Fine white paper .... 4 parts
II. — Isinglass, a sufficient
quantity
Acetic acid 1 part
Water 7 parts
Dissolve sufficient isinglass in the mix-
ture of acetic acid and water to make a
thin mucilage.
One of the solutions is applied to the
surface of one sheet of paper and the other
to the other sheet, and they are then
pressed together.
III. — A fair knotting varnish free
from surplus oil is by far the best adhe-
sive for fixing labels, especially on metal
surfaces. It dries instantly, insuring
a speedy job and immediate packing, if
needful, without fear of derangement.
It has great tenacity, and is not only
absolutely damp-proof itself, but is actu-
ally repellent of moisture, to which all
water pastes are subject. It costs more,
but the additional expense is often infini-
tesimal compared with the pleasure of a
satisfactory result.
Balkan Paste.—
Pale glue 4 ounces
White loaf sugar. ... 2 ounces
Powdered starch. ... 1 ounce
White dextrine \ pound
Pure glycerine 3 ounces
Carbolic acid \ ounce
Boiling water 32 ounces
Cut up the glue and steep it in i pint
boiling water; when softened melt in a
saucepan; add sugar, starch, and dex-
trine, and lastly the glycerine, in which
carbolic acid has been mixed; add re-
mainder of water, and boil until it thick-
ens. Pour into jars or bottles.
Permanent Paste. —
I. — Wheat flour 1 pound
Water, cold 1 quart
Nitric acid 4 fluidrachms
Boric acid 40 grains
Oil of cloves 20 minims
Mix the flour, boric acid, and water*
then strain the mixture; add fbe nitric
acid, apply heat with constant stirring
until the mixture thickens; when nearly
cold add the oil of cloves. This paste
will have a pleasant smell, will not attract
flies, and can be thinned by the addition
of cold water as needed.
II. — Dissolve 4 ounces alum in 4
quarts hot water. When cool add as
much flour as will make it of the usual
consistency; then stir into it i ounce
powdered rosin; next add a little water
in which a dozen cloves have been
steeped; then boil it until thick as mush,
stirring from the bottom all the time.
Thin with warm water for use.
Preservatives for Paste. — Various an-
tiseptics are employed for the preserva-
tion of flour paste, mucilage, etc. Boric
and salicylic acids, oil of cloves, oil of
sassafras, and solution of formaldehyde
are among those which have given best
service. A durable starch paste is pro-
duced by adding some borax to the
water used in making it. A paste from
10 parts (weight) starch to 100 parts
(weight) water with 1 per cent borax
added will keep many weeks, while with-
out this addition it will sour after six
days. In the case of a gluing material
prepared from starch paste and joiners'
glue, borax has also demonstrated its pre-
serving qualities. The solution is made
by mixing 10 parts (weight) starch into
a paste with water and adding 10 parts
(weight) glue soaked in water to the hot
solution; the addition of -,-V part (weight)
of borax to the solution will cause it to
keep for weeks. It is equal to the best
glue, but should be warmed and stirred
before use.
Board -Sizing. — A cheap sizing for
rough, weather-beaten boards may be
made by dissolving shellac in sal soda
and adding some heavy-bodied pigment.
This size will stick to grease spots. Lin-
seed oil may be added if desired. Lime-
water and linseed oil make a good heavy
sizing, but hard to spread. They are
usually used half and half, though these
proportions may be varied somewhat.
Rice Paste. — Mix the rice flour with
cold water, and boil it over a gentle fire
until it thickens. This paste is quite
white and becomes transparent on dry-
ing. It is very adherent and of great use
for many purposes.
Casein Paste. — A solution of tannin,
prepared from a bark or from commer-
cial tannin, is precipitated with lime-
water, the lime being added until the
j solution just turns red litmus paper blue.
• The supernatant liquid is then decanted,
ADHESIVES
39
and the precipitate is dried without arti-
ficial heat. The resulting calcium tan-
nate is then mixed, according to the pur-
pose for which the adhesive is intended,
with from 1 to 10 times its weight of dry
casein by grinding in a mill. The ad-
hesive compound is soluble in water,
petroleum, oils, and carbon bisulphide.
It is very strong, and is applied m the
form of a paste with water.
PASTES FOR PAPERHANGERS.
I. — Use a cheap grade of rye or wheat
flour, mix thoroughly with cold water to
about the consistency of dough, or a little
thinner, being careful to remove all
lumps; stir in a tablespoonful of pow-
dered alum to a quart of flour, then pour
in boiling water, stirring rapidly until the
flour is thoroughly cooked. Let this cool
before using, and thin with cold water.
II. — Venetian Paste. —
(a) 4 ounces white or fish glue
8 fluidounces cold water
(6) 2 fluidounces Venice turpentine
(c) 1 pound rye flour
16 fluidounces (1 pint) cold water
(d~) 64 fluidounces (| gallon) boiling
water
Soak the 4 ounces of glue in the cold
water for 4 hours; dissolve on a water
bath (glue pot), and while hot stir in the
Venice turpentine. Make up (c) into a
batter free from lumps and pour into (d).
Stir briskly, and finally add the glue so-
lution. This makes a very strong paste,
and it will adhere to a painted surface,
owing to the Venice turpentine in its
composition.
III.— Strong Adhesive Paste. —
(a) 4 pounds rye flour
| gallon cold water
(6) 1| gallons boiling water
(c) 2 ounces pulverized rosin
Make (a) into a batter free from lumps;
then pour into (6) . Boil if necessary, and
while hot stir in the pulverized rosin a
little at a time. This paste is exceed-
ingly strong, and will stick heavy wall
paper or thin leather. If the paste be
too thick, thin with a little hot water;
never thin paste with cold water.
IV. —Flour Paste. —
(a) 2 pounds wheat flour
32 fluidounces (1 quart) cold water
(6) 1 ounce alum
4 fluidounces hot water
(c) 96 fluidounces ($ gallon) boiling
water
Work the wheat flour into a batter free
from lumps with the cold water. Dis-
solve the alum as designated in (6).
Now stir in (a) and (c) and, if necessary,
continue boiling until the paste thickens
into a semitransparent mucilage, after
which stir in solution (6). The above
makes a very fine paste for wall paper.
V.— Elastic or Pliable Paste. —
(a) 4 ounces common starch
2 ounces white dextrine
10 fluidounces cold water
(6) 1 ounce borax
3 fluidounces glycerine
64 fluidounces (^ gallon) boiling
water
Beat to a batter the ingredients of (a).
Dissolve the borax in the boiling water;
then add the glycerine, after which pour
(a) into solution (6) . Stir until it becomes
translucent. This paste will not crack,
and, being very pliable, is used for paper,
cloth, leather, and other material where
flexibility is required.
VI. — A paste with which wall paper
can be attached to wood or masonry,
adhering to it firmly in spite of damp-
ness, is prepared, as usual, of rye flour, to
which, however, are added, after the boil-
ing, 8J parts, by weight, of good linseed-
oil varnish and 8J parts, by weight, of
turpentine to every 500 parts, by weight.
VII.— Paste for Wall Paper.— Soak 18
pounds of bolus (bole) in water, after it
has been beaten into small fragments,
and pour off the supernatant water.
Boil 10 ounces of glue into glue water,
mix it well with the softened bolus and
2 pounds plaster of Paris and strain
through a sieve by means of a brush.
Thin the mass with water to the consist-
ency of a thin paste. The paste is now
ready for use. It is not only much
cheaper than other varieties, but has the
advantage over them of adhering better
to whitewashed walls, and especially
such as have been repeatedly coated over
the old coatings which were not thor-
oughly removed. For hanging fine wall
paper this paste is less commendable,
as it forms a white color,, with which
the paper might easily become soiled if
great care is not exercised in applying
it. If the fine wall paper is mounted on
ground paper, however, it can be recom-
mended for pasting the ground paper on
'the wall.
LABEL PASTES :
Pastes to Affix Labels to Tin.— Labels
separate from tin because the paste be-
comes too dry. Some moisture is pre-
sumably always present; but more is
required to cause continued adhesion in the
case of tin than where the container is of
ADHESIVES
glass. Paste may be kept moist by the
addition of calcium chloride, which is
strongly hygroscopic, or of glycerine.
The following formulas for pastes of
the type indicated were proposed by Leo
Eliel:
I. — Tragacanth 1 ounce
Acacia 4 ounces
Thymol 14 grains
Glycerine 4 ounces
Water, sufficient to
make 2 pints
Dissolve the gums in 1 pint of water,
strain, and add the glycerine, in which
the thymol is suspended; shake well and
add sufficient water to make 2 pints.
This separates on standing, but a single
shake mixes it sufficiently for use.
II. — Rye flour 8 ounces
Powdered acacia. ... 1 ounce
Glycerine 2 ounces
Oil of cloves 40 drops
Rub the rye flour and acacia to a
smooth paste with 8 ounces of cold water;
strain through cheese cloth, and pour
into 1 pint of boiling water, and continue
the heat until as thick as desired. When
nearly cold add the glycerine and oil of
cloves.
III.— Rye flour 5 parts
Venice turpentine. .. 1 part
Liquid glue, a sufficient quantity
Rub up the flour with the turpentine
and then add sufficient freshly prepared
glue (glue or gelatine dissolved in water)
to make a stiff paste. This paste dries
slowly.
IV. — Dextrine 2 parts
Acetic acid 1 part
Water 5 parts
Alcohol, 95 per cent . 1 part
Dissolve the dextrine and acetic acid
in water by heating together in the water
bath, and to the solution add the alcohol.
V. — Dextrine 3 pounds
Borax 2 ounces
Glucose 5 drachms
Water 3 pints 2 ounces
Dissolve the borax in the water by
warming, then add the dextrine and glu-
cose, and continue to heat gently until
dissolved.
Another variety is made by dissolving'
a cheap Ghatti gum in limewater, but it
keeps badly.
VI. — Add tartaric acid to thick flour
paste. The paste is to be boiled until
quite thick, and the acid, previously dis-
solved in a little water, is added, the pro-
portion being about 2 ounces to the pint
of paste.
VII. — Gum arabic, 50 parts; glycer-
ine, 10 parts; water, 30 parts; liq. Stibii
chlorat., 2 parts.
VIII. — Boil rye flour and strong glue
water into a mass to which are added, for
1,000 parts, good linseed-oil varnish 30
parts and oil of turpentine 30 parts.
This mixture furnishes a gluing agent
which, it is claimed, even renders the
labels proof against being loosened by
moisture.
IX.— Pour 140 parts of distilled cold
water over 100 parts of gum arabic in a
wide-necked bottle and dissolve by fre-
quent shaking. To the solution, which
is ready after standing for about 3 days,
add 10 parts of glycerine; later, 20 parts of
diluted acetic acid, and finally 6 parts of
aluminum sulphate, then straining it
through a fine-hair sieve.
X. — Good glue is said to be obtained
by dissolving 1 part of powdered sugar
in 4 parts of soda water glass.
XI. — A glue for bottle labels is pre-
pared by dissolving borax in water;
soak glue in this solution and dissolve
the glue by boiling. Carefully drop as
much acetic acid into the solution as
will allow it to remain thin on cooling.
Labels affixed with this agent adhere
firmly and do not become moldy in damp
cellars.
XII. — Dissolve some isinglass in acetic
acid and brush the labels over with it.
There will be no cause to complain
of their coming off, nor of striking
through the paper. Take a wide-
mouthed bottle, fill about two-thirds with
commercial acetic acid, and put in as much
isinglass as the liquid will hold, and set
aside in a warm place until completely
dissolved. When cold it should form a
jelly. To use it place the bottle in hot
water. The cork should be well-fit-
ting and smeared with vaseline or melted
paraffine.
How to Paste Labels on Tin. — Brush
over the entire back of the label with a
flour paste, fold the label loosely by
sticking both ends together without
creasing the center, and throw to one
side until this process has been gone
through with the whole lot. Then unfold
each label and place it on the can in the
regular manner. The paste ought not
to be thicker than maple syrup. When
of this consistency it soaks through the
label and makes it pliable and in a con-
dition to be easily rubbed into position.
If the paste is too thick it dries quickly,
and does not soak through the label suf-
ficiently. After the labels have been
placed upon the cans the latter must be
ADHESIVES
kept apart until dry. In putting the
paste upon the labels in the first place,
follow the method of placing the dry
labels over one another, back sides up,
with the edge of each just protruding over
the edge of the one beneath it, so that
the fingers may easily grasp the label
after the pasting has been done.
Druggists' Label Paste.— This paste,
when carefully made, is an admirable one
for label use, and a very little will go a
long way:
Wheat flour 4 ounces
Nitric acid 1 drachm
Boric acid 10 grains
Oil of cloves 5 drops
Carbolic acid | drachm
Stir flour and water together, mixing
thoroughly, and add the other ingre-
dients. After the stuff is well mixed,
heat it, watching very carefully and re-
moving the instant it stiffens.
To Attach Glass Labels to Bottles.—
Melt together 1 part of rosin and 2 parts
of yellow wax, and use while warm.
Photographic Mountants (see also
Photography). — Owing to the nature of
the different papers used for printing
photographs, it is a matter of extreme
importance to use a mountant that shall
not set up decomposition in the coating
of the print. For example, a mountant
that exhibits acidity or alkalinity is in-
jurious with most varieties of paper; and
in photography the following formulas
for pastes, mucilages, etc., have there-
fore been selected with regard to their
absolute immunity from setting up de-
composition in the print or changing its
tone in any way. One of the usual
mountants is rice starch or else rice water.
The latter is boiled to a thick jelly,
strained, and the strained mass used
as an agglutinant for attaching photo-
graphic prints to the mounts. There is
nothing of an injurious nature whatever
in this mountant, neither is there in a
mucilage made with gum dragon.
This gum (also called gum traga-
canth) is usually in the form of curls
(i.e., leaf gum), which take a long time
to properly dissolve in water — several
weeks, in fact — but during the past few
years there has been put on the market a
powdered gum dragon which does not
occupy so many days in dissolving. To
make a mucilage rom gum dragon a
very large volume of water is required.
For example, 1 ounce of the gum, either
leaf or powder, will swell up and con-
vert 1 gallon of water into a thickish
mucilage in the course of 2 or 3 weeks.
Only cold water must be used, and be-
fore using the mucilage, all whitish
lumps (which are particles of undissolved
gum) should be picked out or else the
mucilage strained. The time of solution
can be considerably shortened (to a few
hours) by acidifying the water in which
the gum is placed with a little sulphuric
or oxalic acid; but as the resultant muci-
lage would contain traces of their pres-
ence, such acids are not permissible
when the gum-dragon mucilage is to be
used for mounting photographs.
Glycerine and gum arabic make a very
good adhesive of a fluid nature suited
to mounting photographs; and although
glycerine is hygroscopic by itself, such
tendency to absorb moisture is checked
by the reverse nature of the gum arabic;
consequently an ideal fluid mucilage is
produced. The proportions of the sev-
eral ingredients are these:
Gum arabic, genuine
(gum acacia, not
Bassora gum) 4 ounces
Boiling water 12 ounces
Glycerine, pure 1 ounce
First dissolve the gum in the water,
and then stir in the glycerine, and allow
al] debris from the gum to deposit before
using. The following adhesive com-
pound is also one that is free from chem-
ical reactions, and is suited for photo-
graphic purposes:
Water 2 pints
Gum dragon, pow-
dered 1 ounce
Gum arabic, genuine 4 ounces
Glycerine 4 ounces
Mix the gum arabic with half the wa-
ter, and in the remainder of the water
dissolve the gum dragon. When both
solids are dissolved, mix them together,
and then stir in the glycerine.
The following paste will be found a
useful mountant:
Gum arabic, genuine 1 ounce
Rice starch 1 ounce
White sugar 4 ounces
Water, q. s.
Dissolve the gum in just sufficient
water to completely dissolve it, then add
the sugar, and when that has completely
dissolved stir in the starch paste, and
then boil the mixture until the starch is
properly cooked.
A very strong, stiff paste for fastening
cardboard mounts to frames, wood, and
other materials is prepared by making
a bowl of starch paste in the usual way,
and then adding 1 ounce of Venice tur-
pentine per pound of paste, and boil-
ADHESIVES
ing and stirring the mixture until the
thick turpentine has become well incor-
porated. Venice turpentine stirred into
flour paste and boiled will also be found
a very adhesive cement for fastening
cardboard, strawboard, leatherette, and
skiver leather to wood or metal; but
owing to the resinous nature of the Venice
turpentine, such pastes are not suitable
for mounting photographic prints. The
following half-dozen compounds are
suitable mountants to use with silver
prints:
Alcohol, absolute. ... 10 ounces
Gelatine, good 1 ounce
Glycerine \ to 1 ounce
Soak the gelatine in water for an hour
or two until it is completely softened;
take the gelatine out of the water, and
allow it to drain, and put it into a
bottle and pour alcohol over it; add the
glycerine (if the gelatine is soft, use
only \ ounce; if the gelatine is hard, use
1 ounce of the glycerine), then melt the
gelatine by standing the bottle in a vessel
of hot water, and shake up very well.
For use, remelt by heat. The alcohol
prevents the prints from stretching or
cockling, as they are apt to, under the
influence of the gelatine.
In the following compound, however,
only sufficient alcohol is used to serve as
an antiseptic, and prevent the aggluti-
nant from decomposing : Dissolve 4
ounces of photographic gelatine in 16
ounces of water (first soaking the gela-
tine therein for an hour or two until it is
completely softened), then remove the
gelatine from the water, allow it to drain,
and put it into the bottle, and pour the
alcohol over it, and put in the glycerine
(if the gelatine is soft, use only \ ounce;
if the gelatine is hard, use 1 ounce of the
glycerine), then melt the gelatine by
standing the bottle in a vessel of hot
water, and shake up well and mix thor-
oughly. For use, remelt by heat. The
alcohol prevents the print from stretch-
ing or cockling up under the influence of
the gelatine.
The following paste agglutinant is one
that is very permanent and useful for all
purposes required in a photographic
studio: Take 5 pints of water, 10 ounces
of arrowroot, 1 ounce of gelatine, and a
\ pint (10 fluidounces) of alcohol, and
proceed to combine them as follows:
Make arrowroot into a thick cream with
a little of the water, and in the remainder
of the water soak the gelatine for a few
hours, after which melt the gelatine in
the water by heating it, add the arrow-
root paste, and bring the mixture to the
boil and allow to boil for 4 or 5 minutes,
then allow to cool, and mix in the alcohol,
adding a few drops of oil of cloves.
Perhaps one or the most useful com-
pounds for photographic purposes is that
prepared as follows: Soak 4 ounces of
hard gelatine in 15 ounces of water for a
few hours, then melt the gelatine by
heating it in a glue pot until the solution
is quite clear and free from lumps, stir
in 65 fluidounces of cold water so that
it is free from lumps, and pour in the
boiling-hot solution of gelatine and con-
tinue stirring, and if the starch is not
completely cooked, boil up the mixture
for a few minutes until it "blows," being
careful to keep it well stirred so as not
to burn; when cold add a few drops of
carbolic acid or some essential oil as an
antiseptic to prevent the compound from
decomposing or becoming sour.
A useful photographic mucilage, which
is very liquid, is obtained by mixing equal
bulks of gum-arabic and gum-dragon
mucilages of the same consistence. The
mixture of these mucilages will be con-
siderably thinner than either of them
when alone.
As an agglutinant for general use in the
studio, the following is recommended:
Dissolve 2 ounces of gum arabic in 5
ounces of water, and for every 250 parts
of the mucilage add 20 parts of a solu-
tion of sulphate of aluminum, prepared
by dissolving 1 part of the sulphate in
20 parts of water (common alum should
not be used, only the pure aluminum
sulphate, because common alum is a
mixture of sulphates, and usually con-
taminated with iron salts). The addi-
tion of the sulphate solution to the
gum mucilage renders the latter less
hygroscopic, and practically waterproof,
besides being very adhesive to any
materials, particularly those exhibiting a
smooth surface.
MUCILAGES :
For Affixing Labels to Glass and Other
Objects. — I. — The mucilage is made by
simply pouring over the gum enough
water to a little more than cover it, and
then, as the gum swells, adding more water
from time to time in small portions, until
the mucilage is brought to such con-
sistency that it may be easily spread with
the brush. The mucilage keeps fairly
well without the addition of any anti-
septic.
II. — Tragacanth 1 ounce
Acacia 4 ounces
Thymol 14 grains
Glycerine 4 ounces
Water, sufficient to
make 2 pints
ADHESIVES
Dissolve the gums in 1 pint of water,
strain and add the glycerine, in which
the thymol is suspended; shake well and
add sufficient water to make 2 pints.
This separates on standing, but a single
shake mixes it sufficiently for use.
III. — Rye flour 8 ounces
Powdered acacia. 1 ounce
Glycerine 2 ounces
Oil of cloves 40 drops
Water, a sufficient quantity.
Rub the rye flour and the acacia to a
smooth paste with 8 ounces of cold water;
strain through cheese cloth, and pour
into 1 pint of boiling water and continue
the heat until as thick as desired. When
nearly cold add the glycerine and oil of
cloves.
IV. — One part, by weight, of traga-
canth, when mixed with 95-per-cent alco-
hol to form 4 fluidounces, forms a liquid in
which a portion of the tragacanth is dis-
solved and the remainder suspended;
this remains permanently fluid, never
deteriorates, and can be used in place of
the present mucilage; 4 to 8 minims to
each ounce of mixture is sufficient to
suspend any of the insoluble substances
usually given in mixtures.
V. — To 250 parts of gum-arabic muci-
lage add 20 parts of water and 2 parts of
sulphate of alumina and heat until dis-
solved.
VI. — Dissolve \ pound gum traga-
canth, powdered, J pound gum arabic,
powdered, cold water to the desired con-
sistency, and add 40 drops carbolic acid.
Mucilage of Acacia. — Put the gum,
which should be of the best kind, in a flask
the size of which should be large enough
to contain the mucilage with about one-
fifth of its space to spare (i. e., the product
should fill it about four -fifths full). Now
tare, and wash the gum with distilled wa-
ter, letting the latter drain away as much
as possible before proceeding further.
Add the requisite quantity of distilled
water slowly, which, however, should
first have added to it about 10 per cent of
limewater. Now cork the flask, and lay
it, without shaking, horizontally in a cool
place and let it remain quietly for about
3 hours, then give it a half turn to the
right without disturbing its horizontal
position. Repeat this operation three or
four times during the day, and keep it
up until the gum is completely dissolved
(which will not be until the fourth day
probably), then strain through a thin
cloth previously wet with distilled wa-
ter, avoiding, in so doing, the formation
of foam or bubbles. This precaution
should also be observed in decantation
of the percolate into smaller bottles pro-
vided with paraffine corks. The small
amount of lime water, as will be under-
stood, is added to the solvent water in
order to prevent the action of free acid.
Commercial Mucilage. — Dissolve \
pound white glue in equal parts water
and strong vinegar, and add \ as much
alcohol and \ ounce alum dissolved in a
little water. To proceed, first get good
glue and soak in cold water until it
swells and softens. Use pale vinegar.
Pour off the cold water, then melt the
glue to a thick paste in hot water, and
add the vinegar hot. When a little cool
add the alcohol and alum water.
To Render Gum Arabic More Ad-
hesive.— I. — Add crystallized aluminum
sulphate in the proportion of 2 dissolved
in 20 parts of water to 250 parts of con-
centrated gum solution (75 parts of gum
in 175 parts of water).
II. — Add to 250 parts of concentrated
gum solution (2 parts of gum in 5 parts
of water) 2 parts of crystallized alumi-
num sulphate dissolved in 20 parts of
water. This mixture glues even unsized
paper, pasteboard on pasteboard, wood
on wood, glass, porcelain, and other
substances on which labels frequently do
not adhere well.
Envelope Gum. — The gum used by
the United States Government on postage
stamps is probably one of the best that
could be used not only for envelopes but
for labels as well. It will stick to almost
any surface. Its composition is said to
be the following:
Gum arabic 1 part
Starch 1 part
Sugar 4 parts
Water, sufficient to
give the desired con-
sistency.
The gum arabic is first dissolved in
some water, the sugar added, then the
starch, after which the mixture is boiled
for a few minutes in order to dissolve
the starch, after which it is thinned down
to the desired consistency.
Cheaper envelope gums can be made
by substituting dextrine for the gum
arabic, glucose for the sugar, and adding
boric acid to preserve and help stiffen it.
Mucilage to Make Wood and Paste-
board Adhere to Metals. — Dissolve 50
parts, by weight, of lead acetate together
with 5 parts, by weight, of alum in a little
water. Make a separate solution of 75
parts, by weight, of gum arabic in 2,000
parts, by weight, of water, stir in this 500
ADHESIVES
parts, by weight, of flour, and heat slowly
to boiling, stirring the while. Let it cool
somewhat, and mix with it the solution
containing the lead acetate and alum,
stirring them well together.
Preservation of Gum Solution. — Put a
small piece of camphor in the mucilage
bottle. Camphor vapors are generated
which kill all the bacterial germs that
have entered the bottle. The gum main-
tains its adhesiveness to the last drop.
ADULTERANTS IN FOODS:
See Foods.
ADUROL DEVELOPER:
See Photography.
JESCO -QUININE :
See Horse Chestnut.
AGAR AGAR PASTE:
See Adhesives.
AGATE, BUTTONS OF ARTIFICIAL.
Prepare a mixture or frit of 33 parts
of quartz sand, 65 parts calcium phos-
phate, and 2 parts of potash. The frit,
which has been reduced by heat to the
fusing point, is finely ground, intimately
mingled with a small quantity of kaolin
and pressed in molds which yield button-
shaped masses. These masses, after hav-
ing been fired, are given a transparent
glaze by any of the well-known processes.
AGATE (IMITATION):
See Gems, Artificial.
AGING OF SILK:
See Silk.
AGING, SILVER AND GOLD:
See Plating.
AIR BATH.
This air bath is employed in cases
in which, upon drying or heating sub-
stances, acid vapors arise because the
walls of the bath are not attacked by
them. For the production of the drying
apparatus take a flask with the bottom
burst off or a bell jar tubulated above.
This is placed either upon a sand bath
or upon asbestos paper, previously laid
upon a piece of sheet iron. The sand
bath or the sheet iron is put on a tripod,
so that it can be heated by means of a
burner placed underneath. The sub-
stance to be dried is placed in a glass or
porcelain dish, which is put under the
bell jar, and if desired the drying dish
may be hung on the tripod. For regu-
lating the temperature the tubulure of
the jar is closed with a pierced cork,
through whose aperture the thermom-
eter is thrust. In order to permit the
vapors to escape, the cork is grooved
lengthwise along the periphery.
AIR BUBBLES IN GELATINE:
See Gelatine.
AIR, EXCLUSION OF, FROM SOLU-
TIONS:
See Photography.
AIR-PURIFYING.
Ozonatine is a fragrant air-purifying
preparation consisting of dextrogyrate
turpentine oil scented with slight quan-
tities of fragrant oils.
ALABASTER CLEANING:
See Cleaning Preparations and Meth-
ods.
ALBATA METAL:
See Alloys.
ALBUMEN IN URINE, DETECTION
OF.
Patein (Pharm. Zeit.) recommends the
following test for albumen in urine:
Dissolve 250 grams of citric acid in a
sufficient quantity of water, add enough
ammonia to neutralize, then 50 grams
of alcohol, and finally enough water to
make 1 liter. To the acid (or acidulated)
urine, one-tenth its volume of the ammo-
nium-citrate solution made as above is
added, and the whole heated in the usual
manner. The appearance of the faint-
est turbidity is said to indicate with pos-
itive certainty the presence of albumen.
ALBUMEN PAPER:
See Photography.
ALBUMEN PASTE:
See Adhesives.
Alcohol
After the manuscript of this book was
ready for the press, Congress passed the
bill which has since become a law, whereby
the prohibitive tax on industrial or de-
natured alcohol is removed. So impor-
tant is this legislative measure that the
Editor has deemed it wise to insert an
article on the sources of alcohol and the
manufacture of alcohol from farm prod-
ucts. Because the first portion of the
book was in type when this step was de-
cided upon, the Editor was compelled to
relegate to a later page a monograph
which should properly have appeared
here. The reader will find the matter
on alcohol referred to under the heading
ALCOHOL
"Spirit"; likewise methods of denaturing
and a list of denaturants.
ALCOHOL, DILUTION OF:
See Tables.
Alcohol, Tests for Absolute.— The
committee for the compilation of the
German Arzneibuch established the fol-
lowing tests for the determination of ab-
solute alcohol:
Absolute alcohol is a clear, colorless, vol-
atile, readily imflammable liquid which
burns with a faintly luminous flame.
Absolute alcohol has a peculiar odor, a
burning taste, and does not affect litmus
paper. Boiling point, 78.50. Specific
gravity, 0.795 to 0.797. One hundred
parts contain 99.7 to 99.4 parts, by vol-
ume, or 99.6 to 99.0 parts, by weight, of
alcohol.
Absolute alcohol should have no for-
eign smell and should mix with water
without cloudiness.
After the admixture of 5 drops of sil-
ver-nitrate solution, 10 cubic centimeters
of absolute alcohol should not become
turbid or colored even on heating.
A mixture of 10 cubic centimeters of
absolute alcohol and 0.2 cubic centimeter
of potash lye evaporated down to 1 cubic
centimeter should not exhibit an odor of
fusel oil after supersaturation with dilute
sulphuric acid.
Five cubic centimeters of sulphuric
acid, carefully covered, in a test tube,
with a stratum of 5 cubic centimeters of
absolute alcohol, should not form a rose-
colored zone at the surface of contact,
even on standing for some time.
The red color of a mixture of 10 cubic
centimeters of absolute alcohol and 1
cubic centimeter of potassium -perman-
ganate solution should not pass into
yellow before 20 minutes.
Absolute alcohol should not be dyed
by hydrogen sulphide water or by aque-
ous ammonia.
Five cubic centimeters of absolute al-
cohol should not leave behind a weighable
residue after evaporation on water bath.
Absolute Alcohol. — If gelatine be sus-
pended in ordinary alcohol it will absorb
the water, but as it is insoluble in alcohol,
that substance will remain behind, and
thus nearly absolute alcohol will be ob-
tained without distillation.
Perfumed Denaturized Alcohol. —
East India lemon oil 1,250 parts
Mirbane oil 1,000 parts
Cassia oil 50 parts
Clove oil 75 parts
Lemon oil 100 parts
Amyl acetate 500 parts
Spirit (95 per cent) . 7,000 parts
Dissolve the oils in the spirit and add
the amyl acetate. The mixture serves
for destroying the bad odor of denatur-
ized spirit in distilling. Use 50 parts of
the perfume per 1,000 parts of spirit.
Solid Alcohol.— I.— Heat 1,000 parts of
denaturized alcohol (90 per cent) in a flask
of double the capacity on the water bath
to about 140° F., and then mix with 28 to
30 parts of well-dried, rasped Venetian
soap and 2 parts of gum lac. After re-
peated shaking, complete dissolution
will take place. The solution is put,
while still warm, into metallic vessels,
closing them up at once and allowing the
mixture to cool therein. The admix-
ture of gum lac effects a better preserva-
tion and also prevents the evaporation of
the alcohol. On lighting the solid spirit
the soap remains behind.
II. — Smaragdine is a trade name for
solidified alcohol. It consists of alcohol
and gun cotton, colored with malachite
green. It appears in the market in the
form of small cubes.
Alcohol in Fermented Beers. — Expe-
rience has shown that \ pound of sugar
to 1 gallon of water yields about 2 per cent
of proof spirit, or about 1 per cent of ab-
solute alcohol. Beyond this amount it is
not safe to go, if the legal limit is to be
observed, yet a ginger beer brewed with
| pound per gallon of sugar would be a
very wishy-washy compound, and there
is little doubt that a much larger quantity
is generally used. The more sugar that
is used — up to H or 1J pounds per gallon
— the better the • drink will be and the
more customers will relish it; but it will
be as "strong" as lager and contain per-
haps 5 per cent of alcohol, which will make
it anything but a "temperance" drink.
Any maker who is using as much as even
£ pound of sugar per gallon is bound to
get more spirit than the law allows.
Meanwhile it is scarcely accurate to term
ginger beers, etc., non-alcoholic.
Alcohol Deodorizer. —
Alcohol 160 ounces
Powdered quicklime. 300 grains
Powdered alum 150 grains
Spirit of nitrous ether 1£ drachms
Mix the lime and alum intimately by
'trituration; add the alcohol and shake
well; then add the spirit of nitrous ether;
set aside for 7 days and filter through
animal charcoal.
Denaturized Alcohol. — There are two
general classes or degrees of denaturizing,
viz., the "complete" and the "incom-
plete," according to the purpose for
ALCOHOL
which the alcohol so denaturized is to be
ultimately used.
J. — Complete denaturization by the
German system is accomplished by the
addition to every 100 liters (equal to 26£
gallon* > of spirits:
(a) '1 "wo and one-half liters of the "stand-
ard* 'leiiaturizer, made of 4 parts of
wood alcohol, 1 part of pyridiiie (a nitro-
genous base obtained by distilling bone
oil or coal tar), with the addition of 50
grams to each liter of oil of lavender or
rosemary.
(6) One and one-fourth liters of the
above "standard" and 2 liters of benzol
with every 100 liters of alcohol.
II. — Incomplete denaturization — i. e.,
sufficient to prevent alcohol from being
drunk, but not to disqualify it from use
for various special purposes, for which
the wholly denaturized spirits would be
unavailable — is accomplished by several
methods as follows, the quantity and
nature of each substance given being
the prescribed dose for each 100 liters
(26* gallons) of spirits:
(c) Five liters of wood alcohol or |
liter of pyridiiie.
(d~) Twenty liters of solution of shellac,
containing 1 part gum to 2 parts alcohol
of 90-per-cent purity. Alcohol for the
manufacture of celluloid and pegamoid
is denaturized.
(e) By the addition of 1 kilogram of
camphor or 2 liters oil of turpentine or
\ liter benzol to each 100 liters of spirits.
Alcohol to be used in the manufacture
of ethers, aldehyde, agaricin, white lead,
bromo-silver gelatines, photographic pa-
pers and plates, electrode plates, collo-
dion, salicylic acid and salts, aniline
chemistry, and a great number of other
purposes, is denaturized by the addition
of —
(/) Ten liters sulphuric ether, or 1
part of benzol, or \ part oil of turpentine,
or 0.025 part of animal oil.
For the manufacture of varnishes and
inks alcohol is denaturized by the addi-
tion of oil of turpentine or animal oil,
and for the production of soda soaps by
the addition of 1 kilogram of castor oil.
Alcohol for the production of lanolin is
prepared by adding 5 liters of benzine to
each hectoliter of spirits.
ALE.
The ale of the modern brewer is man-
ufactured in several varieties, which are
determined by the wants of the consumer
and the particular market for which it
is intended. Thus, the finer kinds of
Burton, East India, Bavarian, and other
like ales, having undergone a thorough
fermentation, contain only a small quan-
tity of undecomposed sugar and gum,
varying from 1 to 5 per cent. Some of
these are highly "hopped" or "bittered,"
the further to promote their preservation
during transit and change of temper-
ature. Mild or sweet ales, on the con-
trary, are less accentuated by lengthened
fermentation, and abound in saccharine
and gummy matter. They are, there-
fore, more nutritious, though less intox-
icating, than those previously referred to.
In brewing the finer kinds of ales, pale
malt and the best hops of the current
season's growth are always employed;
and when it is desired to produce a liquor
possessing little color, very great atten-
tion is paid to their selection. With the
same object, the boiling is conductedwith
more than the usual precautions, and the
fermentation is carried on at a somewhat
lower temperature than that commonly
allowed for other varieties of beer. For
ordinary ale, intended for immediate use,
the malt may be all pale; but, if the liquor
be brewed for keeping, and in warm
weather, when a slight color is not objec-
tionable, one-fifth, or even one-fourth of
amber malt may be advantageously em-
ployed. From 4i to 6 pounds of hops is
the quantity commonly used to the one-
fourth of malt, for ordinary ales; and 7
pounds to 10 pounds for "keeping" ales.
The proportions, however, must greatly
depend on the intended quality and de-
scription of the brewing and the period
that will be allowed for its maturation.
The stronger varieties of ale usually
contain from 6 to 8 per cent of "absolute
alcohol"; ordinary strong ale, 41 to 6 per
cent; mild ale, 3 to 4 percent; and table ale,
1 to 1* per cent (each by volume); togeth-
er with some undecomposed saccharine,
gummy, and extractive matter, the bitter
and narcotic principles of the hop, some
acetic acid formed by the oxidation of
the alcohol, and very small and variable
quantities of mineral and saline matter.
Ordinary ale-wort (preferably pale),
sufficient to produce 1 barrel, is slowly
boiled with about 3 handfuls of hops,
and 12 to 14 pounds of crushed groats,
until the whole of the soluble matter of
the latter is extracted. The resulting
liquor, after being run through a coarse
strainer and become lukewarm, is fer-
mented with 2 or 3 pints of yeast; and,
as soon as the fermentation is at its
height, is either closely bunged up for
draft or is at once put into strong stone-
ware bottles, which are then well corked
and wired.
White ale is said to be very nutritious,
though apt to prove laxative to those un-
ALLOYS
47
accustomed to its use. It is drunk in a
state of effervescence or lively fermenta-
tion; the glass or cup containing it being
kept in constant motion, when removed
irom the mouth, until the whole is con-
sumed, in order that the thicker portion
may not subside to the bottom.
ALE, GINGER:
See Beverages.
ALFENIDE METAL:
See Alloys.
ALKALI, HOW TO DETECT:
See Soaps.
ALKALOIDS, ANTIDOTES TO:
See Atropine.
Alloys
No general rules can be given for
alloying metals. Alloys differing greatly
in fusibility are commonly made by
adding the more fusible ones, either in
the melted state or in small portions at a
time, to the other melted or heated to
the lowest possible temperature at which
a perfect union will take place between
them. The mixture is usually effected
under a flux, or some material that will
promote liquefaction and prevent vola-
tilization and unnecessary exposure to
the air. Thus, in melting lead and tin
together for solder, rosin or tallow is
thrown upon the surface is rubbed with
sal ammoniac; and in combining some
metals, powdered charcoal is used for
the same purpose. Mercury or quick-
silver combines with many metals in the
cold, forming AMALGAMS, or easily fusible
alloys (q. v.).
Alloys generally possess characteris-
tics unshared by their component metals.
Thus, copper and zinc form brass,
which has a different density, hardness,
and color from either of its constituents.
Whether the metals tend to unite in
atomic proportions or in any definite
ratio is still undetermined. The evi-
dence afforded by the natural alloys of
gold and silver, and by the phenomena
accompanying the cooling of several
alloys from the state of fusion, goes far
to prove that such is the case (Rud-
berg). The subject is, however, one of
considerable difficulty, as metals and
metallic compounds are generally solu-
ble in each other, and unite by simple
fusion and contact. That they do not
combine indifferently with each other,
but exercise a species of elective affinity
not dissimilar to other bodies, is clearly
shown by the homogeneity and superior
quality of many alloys in which the con-
stituent metals are in atomic proportion.
The variation of the specific gravity and
melting points of alloys from the mean
of those of their component metals also
affords strong evidence of a chemical
change having taken place. Thus, alloys
generally melt at lower temperatures than
their separate metals. They also usually
possess more tenacity and hardness than
the mean of their constituents.
Matthiessen found that when weights
are suspended to spirals of hard-drawn
wire made of copper, gold, or platinum,
they become nearly straightened when
stretched by a moderate weight; but
wires of equal dimensions composed of
copper-tin (12 per cent of tin), silver-
platinum (36 per cent of platinum), and
gold-copper (84 percent of copper) scarce-
ly undergo any permanent change in form
when subjected to tension by the same
weight.
The same chemist gives the following
approximate results upon the tenacity
of certain metals and wires hard-drawn
through the same gauge (No. 23) :
Pounds
Copper, breaking strain 25-30
Tin, breaking strain under 7
Lead, breaking strain under 7
Tin-lead (20% lead) about 7
Tin-copper (12% copper). . .about 7
Copper-tin (12% tin) about 80-90
Gold (12% tin) 20-25
Gold-copper (8.4% copper) 70-75
Silver (8.4% copper) 45-50
Platinum (8.4% copper) 45-50
Silver-platinum (30% platinum) . 75-80
On the other hand, the malleability,
ductility, and power of resisting oxygen
of alloys is generally diminished. The
alloy formed of two brittle metals is
always brittle; that of a brittle and a duc-
tile metal, generally so; and even two
ductile metals sometimes unite to form
a brittle compound. The alloys formed
of metals having different fusing points
are usually malleable while cold and
brittle while hot. The action of the air
on alloys is generally less than on their
simple metals, unless the former are
heated. A mixture of 1 part of tin and
3 parts of lead is scarcely acted on at
common temperatures; but at a red heat
it readily takes fire, and continues to
burn for some time like a piece of bad
turf. In like manner, a mixture of tin
and zinc, when strongly heated, de-
composes both moist air and steam with
rapidity.
The specific gravity of alloys is rarely
48
ALLOYS
the arithmetical mean of that of their
constituents, as commonly taught; and
in many cases considerable condensation
or expansion occurs. When there is a
strong affinity between two metals, the
density of their alloy is generally greater
than the calculated mean; and vice versa,
as may be seen in the following table:
ALLOYS HAVING A DENSITY
Greater than the Mean of their Constit-
uents:
Copper and bismuth,
Copper and palladium,
Copper and tin,
Copper and zinc,
Gold and antimony,
Gold and bismuth,
Gold and cobalt,
Gold and tin,
Gold and zinc,
Lead and antimony,
Palladium and bismuth,
Silver and antimony,
Silver and bismuth,
Silver and lead,
Silver and tin,
Silver and zinc.
Less than the Mean of their Constituents:
Gold and copper,
Gold and iridium,
Gold and iron,
Gold and lead,
Gold and nickel,
Gold and silver,
Iron and antimony,
Iron and bismuth,
Iron and lead,
Nickel and arsenic,
Silver and copper,
Tin and antimony,
Tin and lead,
Tin and palladium,
Zinc and antimony.
Compounding Alloys. — Considerable
experience is necessary to insure success
in compounding alloys, especially when
the metals employed vary greatly in
fusibility and volatility. The following
are rules supplied by an experienced
workman:
1. Melt the least fusible, oxidizable,
and volatile first, and then add the others
heated to their point of fusion or near it.
Thus, if it is desired to make an alloy of
exactly 1 part of copper and 3 of zinc, it
will be impossible to do so by putting
proportions of the metals in a crucible
and exposing the whole to heat. Much
of the zinc would fly off in vapor before
the copper was melted. First, melt the
copper and add the zinc, which has been
melted in another crucible. The zinc
should be in excess, as some of it will be
lost anyway.
2. Some alloys, as copper and zinc,
copper and arsenic, may be formed by
exposing heated plates of the least fusi-
ble metal to the vapor of the other. In
making brass in the large way, thin plates
of copper are dissolved, as it were, in
melted zinc until the proper proportions
have been obtained.
3. The surface of all oxidizable metals
should be covered with some protecting
agent, as tallow for very fusible ones,
rosin for lead and tin, charcoal for zinc,
copper, etc.
^4. Stir the metal before casting and
if possible, when casting, with a white-
wood stick; this is much better for the
purpose than an iron rod.
5. If possible, add a small portion of
old alloy to the new. If the alloy is re-
quired to make sharp castings and
strength is not a very great oVject, the
proportion of old alloy to the new should
be increased. In all cases a new or
thoroughly well-cleansed crucible should
be used.
To obtain metals and metallic alloys
from their compounds, such as oxides,
sulphides, chlorides, etc., a process lately
patented makes use of the reducing
qualities of aluminum or its alloys with
magnesium. The finely powdered ma-
terial (e. g., chromic oxide) is placed in a
crucible mixed with aluminum oxide.
The mixture is set afire by means of a
soldering pipe or a burning magnesium
wire, and the desired reaction takes place.
For igniting, one may also employ with
advantage a special priming cartridge
consisting of pulverized aluminum to
which a little magnesium may be mixed,
and peroxide of magnesia, which is
shaped into balls and lighted with a
magnesium wire. By suitable additions
to the pulverized mixture, alloys con-
taining aluminum, magnetism, chro-
mium, manganese, copper, iron, boron,
silicic acid, etc., are obtained.
ALUMINUM ALLOYS.
M. H. Pecheux has contributed to the
Comptes Rendus, from time to time, the
results of his investigations into the alloys
of aluminum with soft metals, and the
following constitutes a brief summary of
his observations:
Lead. — When aluminum is melted
and lead is added in proportion greater
than 10 per cent, the metals separate on
cooling into three layers — lead, alumi-
num, and between them an alloy contain-
ing from 90 to 97 per cent of aluminum.
ALLOYS
The albys with 93, 95, and 98 per cent have
densities of 2.745, 2.674, and 2.600 re-
spectively, and melting points near that
of aluminum. Their color is like that
of aluminum, but they are less lustrous.
All are malleable, easily cut, softer than
aluminum, and have a granular fracture.
On remelting they become somewhat
richer in lead, through a tendency to
liquation. They do not oxidize in moist
air, nor at their melting points. They
are attacked in the cold by hydrochloric
and by strong sulphuric acid, with evo-
lution of hydrogen, and by strong nitric
acid when hot; strong solution of po-
tassium hydroxide also attacks them.
They are without action on distilled
water, whether cold or hot.
Zinc. — Well-defined alloys were ob-
tained, corresponding to the formulas
Zn3Al, Zn2Al, ZnAl, ZnAl2, ZnAl3,
ZnAl4, ZnAl6, ZnAl10, ZnAl12. Their
melting points and densities all lie be-
tween those of zinc and aluminum, and
those containing most zinc are the hard-
est. They are all dissolved by cold
hydrochloric acid and by hot dilute nitric
acid. Cold concentrated nitric acid at-
tacks the first three, and cold dilute acid
the first five. The Zn3Al, ZnAlR, ZnAl10,
and ZnAl12 are only slightly affected by
cold potassium-hydroxide solution; the
others are strongly attacked, potassium
zincate and aluminate probably being
formed.
Tin. — A filed rod of tin-aluminum alloy
plunged in cold water gives off for some
minutes bubbles of gas, composed of
hydrogen and oxygen in explosive pro-
portions. An unfiled rod, or a filed rod
of either aluminum or tin, is without
action, though the unfiled rod of alloy
will act on boiling water. The filed rod
of alloy, in faintly acid solution of cop-
per or zinc sulphate, becomes covered
with a deposit of copper or zinc, while
bubbles of oxygen are given off. M.
Pecheux believes that the metals are truly
alloyed only at the surface, and that filing
lays bare an almost infinitely numerous
series of junctions of the two metals,
which, heated by the filing, act as ther-
mocouples.
Bismuth. — By the method used for
lead, bismuth alloys were obtained con-
taining 75, 85, 88, and 94 per cent of
aluminum, with densities 2.86, 2.79,
2.78. and 2.74 respectively. They were
sonorous, brittle, finely grained, and
homogeneous, silver-white, and with
melting points between those of their con-
stituents, but nearer that of aluminum.
They are not oxidized in air at the tem-
perature of casting, but are readily at-
tacked by acids, concentrated or dilute,
and by potassium-hydroxide solution.
The filed alloys behave like those of tin,
but still more markedly.
Magnesium. — These were obtained
with 66, 68, 73, 77, and 85 per cent
of aluminum, and densities 2.24, 2.47,
2.32, 2.37, 2.47. They are brittle, with
large granular fracture, silver-white, file
well, take a good polish, and have melt-
ing points near that of aluminum.
Being viscous when melted, they are dif-
ficult to cast, and when slowly cooled
form a gray, spongy mass which cannot
be remelted. They do not oxidize in
air at the ordinary temperatures, but
burn readily at a bright-red heat. They
are attacked violently by acids and by
potassium-hydroxide solution, decom-
pose hydrogen peroxide, and slowly de-
compose water even in the cold.
Tin, Bismuth, and Magnesium. —The
action of water on these alloys just re-
ferred to has been recently demonstrated
on a larger scale, 5 to 6 cubic centimeters
of hydrogen having been obtained in 20
minutes from 2 cubic centimeters of the
filed tin alloy. The bismuth alloy yield-
ed more hydrogen than the tin alloy, and
the magnesium alloy more than the bis-
muth alloy. The oxygen of the decom-
posed water unites with the aluminum.
Larger quantities of hydrogen are ob-
tained from copper-sulphate solution,
apart from the decomposition of this
solution by precipitation of copper at the
expense of the metal alloyed with the
aluminum. The alloys of aluminum
with zinc and lead do not decompose
pure water, but do decompose the water
of copper-sulphate solution, and, more
slowly, that of zinc-sulphate solution.
Aluminum is a metal whose properties
are very materially influenced by a pro-
portionately small addition of copper.
Alloys of 99 per cent aluminum and 1 per
cent of copper are hard, brittle, and bluish
in color; 95 per cent of aluminum and 5
per cent of copper give an alloy which can
be hammered, but with 10 per cent of cop-
per the metal can no longer be worked.
With 80 per cent and upward of copper
are obtained alloys of a beautiful yellow
color, and these mixtures, containing from
5 to 10 percent of aluminum and from 90
to 95 per cent of copper, are the genuine
aluminum bronzes. The 10-per-cent al-
loys are of a pure golden-yellow color;
with 5 per cent of aluminum they are
reddish yellow, like gold heavily alloyed
with copper, and a 2-per-cent admix-
ture is 01 an almost pure copper red
50
ALLOYS
As the proportion of copper increases,
the brittleness is diminished, and alloys
containing 10 per cent and less of aluminum
can be used for industrial purposes, the
best consisting of 90 per cent of copper and
10 of aluminum. The hardness of this
alloy approaches that of the general
bronzes, whence its name. It can be
stretched out into thin sheets between
rollers, worked under the hammer, and
shaped as desired by beating or pressure,
in powerful stamping presses. On ac-
count of its hardness it takes a fine pol-
ish, and its peculiar greenish-gold color
resembles that of gold alloyed with cop-
per and silver together.
Alloys with a still greater proportion of
copper approach this metal more and
more nearly in their character; the color
of an alloy, for instance, composed of
95 per cent of copper and 5 per cent of alu-
minum, can be distinguished from pure
gold only by direct comparison, and the
metal is very hard, and also very mal-
leable.
Electrical Conductivity of Aluminum
Alloys. — During three years' exposure to
the atmosphere, copper-aluminum alloys
in one test gradually diminished in con-
ductivity in proportion to the amount of
copper they contained. The nickel-copper
aluminum alloys, which show such re-
markably increased tensile strength as
compared with good commercial alumi-
num, considerably diminished in total con-
ductivity. On the other hand, the man-
ganese-copper aluminum alloys suffered
comparatively little diminution in total
conductivity, and one of them retained
comparatively high tensile strength. It
was thought that an examination of
the structure of these alloys by aid of
microphotography might throw some
light on the great difference which exists
between some of their physical proper-
ties. For instance, a nickel-copper alu-
minum alloy has 1.6 times the tensile
strength of ordinary commercial alumi-
num. Under a magnification of 800
diameters practically no structure could
be discovered. Considering the re-
markable crystalline structure exhibited
by ordinary commercial aluminum near
the surface of an ingot, when allowed to
solidify at an ordinary rate, the want of
structure in these alloys must be attrib-
uted to the process of drawing down.
The inference is that the great differ-
ence which exists between their tensile
strengths and other qualities is not due
to variation in structure.
Colored Alloys of Aluminum. — A pur-
ple scintillating composition is produced
by an alloyage of 78 parts of gold and 22
parts aluminum, \\ith platinum a gold-
colored alloy is obtained; with palladium
a copper-colored one; and with cobalt
and nickel one of a yellow color. Easily
fusible metals of the color of aluminum
give white alloys. Metal difficult of
fusion, such as iridium, osmium, tita-
nium, etc., appear in abnormal tones of
color through such alloyages.
Aluminum -Brass. — Aluminum, 1 per
cent; specific gravity, 8.35 ; tensile strength,
40. Aluminum, 3 per cent; specific grav-
ity, 8.33; tensile strength, 65. The last
named is harder than the first.
Aluminum-Copper. — Minikin is prin-
cipally aluminum with a small percent-
age of copper and nickel. It is alloyed
by mixing the aluminum and copper,
then adding the nickel. It resembles
palladium and is very strong.
Aluminum - Silver. — I. — Silver, 3 per
cent; aluminum, 97 per cent. A hand-
some color.
II. — A silver aluminum that is easily
worked into various articles contains
about one-fourth silver and three-fourths
of aluminum.
Aluminum -Tin. — Bourbon metal is
composed of equal parts of aluminum
and tin; it solders readily.
Aluminum -Tungsten. — A new metal
alloy consisting of aluminum and tung-
sten is used of late in France in the (4m-
struction of conveyances, especially (Car-
riages, bicycles, and motor vehicles.
The French call it partinium; the com-
position of the new alloy varies according
to the purposes for which it is used. It
is considerably cheaper than aluminum,
almost as light, and has a greater resist-
ance. The strength is stated at 32 to 37
kilograms per square millimeter.
Aluminum-Zinc. — Zinc, 3 per cent:
aluminum, 97 per cent. Very ductile,
white, and harder than aluminum.
AMALGAMS :
See Fusible Alloys.
Anti-Friction Bearing or Babbitt Met-
als.— These alloys are usually supported by
bearings of brass, into which it is poured
after they have been tinned, and heated
and put together with an exact model of
the axle, or other working piece, plastic
clay being previously applied, in the
usual manner, as a lute or outer mold.
Soft gun metal is also excellent, and is
much used for bearings. They all be-
come less heated in working than the
ALLOYS
51
harder metals, and less grease or oil is con-
sequently required when they are used.
I. — An anti-friction metal of excellent
quality and one that has been used with
success is made as follows : 17 parts
zinc; 1 part copper; li parts antimony;
prepared in the following way: Melt the
copper in a small crucible, then add the
antimony, and lastly the zinc, care being
taken not to burn the zinc. Burning
can be prevented by allowing the copper
and antimony to cool slightly before add-
ing the zinc. This metal is preferably
cast into the shape desired and is not
used as a lining metal because it requires
too great a heat to pour. It machines
nicely and takes a fine polish on bearing
surfaces. It has the appearance of
aluminum when finished. Use a lubri-
cating oil made from any good grade of
machine oil to which 3 parts of kerosene
have been added.
II. — Copper, 6 parts; tin, 12 parts;
lead, 150 parts; antimony, 30 parts;
wrought iron, 1 part; cast iron, 1 part.
For certain purposes the composition is
modified as follows: Copper, 16 parts;
tin, 40 parts; lead, 120 parts; antimony,
24 parts; wrought iron, 1 part; cast iron,
1 part. In both cases the wrought iron
is cut up in small pieces, and in this state
it will melt readily in fused copper and
cast iron. After the mixture has been
well stirred, the tin, lead,. and antimony
are added; these are previously melted in
separate crucibles, and when mingled the
whole mass is again stirred thoroughly.
The product may then be run into ingots,
to be employed when needed. When
run into the molds the surface should be
well skimmed, for in this state it oxidizes
rapidly. The proportions may be varied
without materially affecting the results.
III.— From tin, 16 to 20 parts; anti-
mony, 2 parts; lead, 1 part; fused to-
gether, and then blended with copper,
80 parts. Used where there is much
friction or high velocity.
IV. — Zinc, 6 parts; tin, 1 part; cop-
per, 20 parts. Used when the metal is
exposed to violent shocks.
V. — Lead, 1 part; tin, 2 parts; zinc,
4 parts; copper, 68 parts. Used when
the metal is exposed to heat.
VI. — Tin, 48 to 50 parts; antimony, 5
parts; copper, 1 part.
VII.— (Fenton's.) Tin, with some
zinc, and a little copper.
VIII. — (Ordinary.) Tin, or hard
pewter, with or without a small portion
of antimony or copper. Without the
last it is apt to spread out under the
weight of heavy machinery. Used for
the bearings of locomotives, etc.
The following two compositions are
for motor and dynamo shafts: 100
pounds tin; 10 pounds copper; 10 pounds
antimony.
83A- pounds tin; 8-J pounds antimony;
8J pounds copper.
IX.— Lead, 75 parts; antimony, 23
parts; tin, 2 parts.
X. — Magnolia Metal. — This is com-
posad of 40 parts of lead, 7* parts of
antimony, 2i of tin, J of bismuth, J of
aluminum, and J of graphite. It is used
as an anti-friction metal, and takes its
name from its manufacturer's mark,
a magnolia flower.
ARGENTAN :
See German Silver, under this title.
BELL METAL.
The composition of bell metal raries
considerably, as may be seen below:
I. — (Standard.) Copper, 78 parts;
tin, 22 parts; fused together and cast.
The most sonorous of all the alloys of
copper and tin. It is easily fusible, and
has a fine compact grain, and a vitreous
conchoidal and yellowish-red fracture.
According to Klaproth, the finest-toned
Indian gongs have this composition.
II. — (Founder's Standard.) Copper,
77 parts; tin, 21 parts; antimony, 2 parts.
Slightly paler and inferior to No. I.
III. — Copper, 80 parts; tin, 20 parts.
Very deep-toned and sonorous. Used
in China and India for the larger gongs,
tam-tams, 'etc.
IV.— Copper, 78 to 80 parts; tin, 22 to
20 parts. Usual composition of Chinese
cymbals, tam-tams, etc.
V.— Copper, 75 (= 3) parts; tin, 25
(=1) part. Somewhat brittle. In frac-
ture, semivitreous and bluish-red. Used
for church and other large bells.
VI.— Copper, 80 parts; tin, 10| parts;
zinc, 5 1 parts; lead, 4J parts. English
bell metal, according to Thomson. In-
ferior to the last; the lead being apt to
form isolated drops, to the injury of the
uniformity of the alloy.
VIL— Copper, 68 parts; tin, 32 parts.
Brittle; fracture conchoidal and ash-
gray. Best proportions for house bells,
and bells, etc.; for which, however, 2
of copper and 1 of tin is commonly
substituted by the founders.
VIII.— Copper, 72 parts; tin, 26* parts;
iron, 1 A parts. Used by the Paris houses
for the bells of small clocks.
IX. — Copper, 72 parts; tin, 26 parts;
zinc, 2 parts. Used, like the last, for
very small bells.
X.— Copper, 70 parts; tin, 26 parts;
ALLOYS
zinc, 2 parts. Used for the bells of repeat-
ing watches.
XI. — Melt together copper, 100 parts;
tin, 25 parts. After being cast into the
required object, it should be made red-
hot, and then plunged immediately into
cold water in order to impart to it the
requisite degree of sonorousness. For
cymbals and gongs.
XII. — Melt together copper, 80 parts;
tin, 20 parts. When cold it has to be
hammered out with frequent annealing.
XIII. — Copper, 78 parts; tin, 22 parts;
This is superior to the former, and it can
be rolled out. For tam-tams and gongs.
XIV.— Melt together copper, 72 parts;
tin, 26 to 56 parts; iron -fy part. Used
in making the bells of ornamental French
clocks.
Castings in bell metal are all more or
less brittle; and, when recent, have a
color varying from a dark ash-gray to
grayish-white, which is darkest in the
more cuprous varieties, in which it
turns somewhat on the yellowish-red or
bluish-red. The larger the proportion
of copper in the alloy, the deeper and
graver the tone of the bells formed of
it. The addition of tin, iron, or zinc,
causes them to give out their tones sharp-
er. Bismuth and lead are also often
used to modify the tone, which each
metal affects differently. The addition
of antimony and bismuth is frequently
made by the founder to give a more crys-
talline grain to the alloy. All these
conditions are, however, prejudicial to
the sonorousness of bells, and of very
doubtful utility. Rapid refrigeration
increases the sonorousness of all these
alloys. Hence M. D'Arcet recommends
that the "pieces" be heated to a cherry-
red after they are cast, and after having
been suddenly plunged into cold water,
that they be submitted to well-regulated
pressure by skillful hammering, until they
assume their proper form ; after which they
are to be again heated and allowed to cool
slowly in the air. This is the method
adopted by the Chinese with their gongs,
etc., a casing of sheet iron being em-
ployed by them to support and protect
the pieces during the exposure to heat.
In a general way, however, bells are
formed and completed by simple casting.
This is necessarily the case with all very
large bells. Where the quality of their
tones is the chief object sought after, the
greatest care should be taken to use com-
mercially pure copper. The presence
of a very little lead or any similar metal
greatly lessens the sonorousness of this
alloy; while that of silver increases it.
The specific gravity of a large bell is
seldom uniform through its whole sub-
stance; nor can the specific gravity from
any given portion of its constituent met-
als be exactly calculated owing to the
many interfering circumstances. The
nearer this uniformity is approached, or,
in other words, chemical combination is
complete, the more durable and finer-
toned will be the bell. In general, it is
found necessary to take about one-tenth
more metal than the weight of the in-
tended bell, or bells, in order to allow for
waste and scorification during the opera-
tions of fusing and casting.
BISMUTH ALLOYS.
Bismuth possesses the unusual quality
of expanding in cooling. It is, there-
fore, introduced in many alloys to reduce
or check shrinkage in the mold.
For delicate castings, and for taking
impressions from dies, medals, etc., va-
rious bismuth alloys are in use, whose
composition corresponds to the follow-
ing figures:
I II III IV
Bismuth 6 5 2 8
Tin 3 2 1 3
Lead 13 3 1 5
V.— Cliche Metal.— This alloy is com-
posed of tin, 48 parts; lead, 32.5; bis-
muth, 9; and antimony, 10.5. It is es-
pecially well adapted to dabbing rollers
for printing cotton goods, and as it pos-
sesses a considerable degree of hardness,
it wears well.
VI. — For filling out defective places in
metallic castings, an alloy of bismuth 1
part, antimony 3, lead 8, can be ad-
vantageously used.
VII.— For Cementing Glass.— Most
of the cements in ordinary use are dis-
solved, or at least softened, by petro-
leum. An alloy of lead 3 parts, tin 2,
bismuth 2.5, melting at 212° F., is not
affected by petroleum, and is therefore
very useful for cementing lamps made of
metal and glass combined.
LIPOWITZ'S BISMUTH ALLOY :
See Cadmium Alloys.
BRASS.
In general brass is composed of two-
thirds copper and one-third zinc, but a
little lead or tin is sometimes advanta-
geous, as the following:
I. — Red copper, 66 parts; zinc, 34
parts; lead, 1 part.
II. — Copper, 66 parts; zinc, 32 parts;
tin, 1 part; lead, 1 part.
III.— Copper, 64.5 parts; zinc, 33.5
parts; lead, 1.5 parts; tin, 0.5 part.
Brass -Aluminum. — A small addition of
aluminum to brass (1.5 to 8 per cent) great-
ALLOYS
53
ly increases its hardness and elasticity,
and this alloy is also easily worked for any
purpose. Brass containing 8 per cent of
aluminum has the valuable property of
being but slightly affected by acids or gases.
A larger percentage of aluminum makes
the brass brittle. It is to be noted that
aluminum brass decreases very materi-
ally in volume in casting, and the casts
must be copied slowly or they will be
brittle. It is an alloy easily made, and
its low price, combined with its excellent
qualities, would seem to make it in many
cases an advantageous substitute for the
expensive phosphorous bronze.
Bristol Brass (Prince's Metal).— This
alloy, which possesses properties similar
to those of French brass, is prepared in
the following proportions:
I II III
Copper 75.7 67.2 60.8
Zinc 24.3 32.8 39.2
Particular care is required to prevent
the zinc from evaporating during the fus-
ing, and for this purpose it is customary
to put only half of it into the first melting,
and to add the remainder when the first
mass is liquefied.
Brass -Iron (Aich's Metal).— This is
a variety of brass with an admixture of
iron, which gives it a considerable degree
of tenacity. It is especially adapted for
purposes which require a hard and, at
the same time, tenacious metal. Analyses
of the various kinds of this metal show
considerable variation in the proportions.
Even the amount of iron, to which the
hardening effect must be attributed, may
vary within wide limits without materi-
ally modifying the tenacity which is the
essential characteristic of this alloy.
I. — The best variety of Aich's metal
consists of copper, 60 parts; zinc, 38.2;
iron, 1.8. The predominating quality of
this alloy is its hardness, which is claimed
to be not inferior to that of certain kinds
of steel. It has a beautiful golden-yellow
color, and is said not to oxidize easily, a
valuable property for articles exposed to
the action of air and water.
II. — Copper, 60.2 parts; zinc, 38.2;
iron, 1.6. The permissible variations
in the content of iron are from 0.4 to 3
per cent.
Sterro metal may properly be consid-
ered in connection with Aich's metal,
since its constituents are the same and
its properties very similar. The principal
difference between the two metals is
that sterro metal contains a much larger
amount of iron. The composition of
this alloy varies considerably with dif-
ferent manufacturers.
III. — Two varieties of excellent qual-
ity are the product of the Rosthorn fac-
tory, in Lower Austria — copper, 55.33
parts; zinc, 41.80; iron, 4.66. Also
IV. — English sterro metal (Gedge's
alloy for ship sheathing), copper, 60
parts; zinc, 38.125; iron, 1.5.
The great value of this alloy lies in its
strength, which is equaled only by that
of the best steel. As an illustration of
this, a wrought-iron pipe broke with a
pressure of 267 atmospheres, while a
similar pipe of sterro metal withstood the
enormous pressure of 763 atmospheres
without cracking. Besides its remark-
able strength, it possesses a high degree
of elasticity, and is, therefore, particular-
ly suitable for purposes which require
the combination of these two qualities,
such as the construction of hydraulic
cylinders. It is well known that these
cylinders, at a certain pressure, begin to
sweat, that is, the interior pressure is so
great that the water permeates through
the pores of the steel. With a sterro
metal cylinder, the pressure can be con-
siderably increased without any mois-
ture being perceptible on the outside of
the cylinder.
Sterro metal can be made even more
hard and dense, if required for special
purposes, but this is effected rather by
mechanical manipulation than by any
change in the chemical composition. If
rolled or hammered in heat, its strength
is increased, and it acquires, in addition,
an exceedingly high degree of tenacity.
Special care must be taken, however, in
hammering not to overheat the metal,
as in this case it would become brittle and
might crack under the hammer. Sterro
metal is especially suitable for all the
purposes for which the so-called red
metal has been in the past almost ex-
clusively used. Axle bearings, for ex-
ample, made of sterro metal have such
excellent qualities that many machine
factories are now using this material
entirely for the purpose.
Cast Brass. — The various articles of
bronze, so called, statuettes, clock cases,
etc., made in France, where this industry
has attained great perfection and exten-
sive proportions, are not, in many cases^
genuine bronze, but fine cast brass. Fol-
lowing are the compositions of a few
mixtures of metals most frequently used
by French manufacturers:
Copper Zinc Tin Lead
1 63.70 33.55 2.50 0.25
II 64.45 32.44 0.25 2.86
HI 70.90 24.05 2.00 3.05
IV.. . 72.43 22.75 1.87 2.95
ALLOYS
Their special advantage is that they
can be readily cast, worked with file and
chisel, and easily gilded.
To Cast Yellow Brass. — If good, clean,
yellow brass sand castings are desired,
the brass should not contain over 30 per
cent of zinc. This will assure an alloy of
good color and one which will run free
and clean. Tin or lead may be added
without affecting the property of casting
clean. A mixture of 7 pounds of copper,
3 pounds of spelter, 4 ounces of tin, and
3 ounces of lead makes a good casting
alloy and one which will cut free and is
strong. If a stronger alloy be desired,
more tin may be added, but 4 ounces is
usually sufficient. If the alloy be too
hard, reduce the proportion of tin.
Leaf Brass. — This alloy is also called
Dutch gold, or imitation gold leaf. It
is made of copper, 77.75 to 84.5 parts;
zinc-, 15.5 to 22.25. Its color is pale or
bright yellow or greenish, according to
the proportions of the metals. It has an
unusual degree of ductility.
Malleable Brass.— This metal is af-
fected less by sea water than pure copper,
and was formerly much used for ship
sheathing, and for making nails and
rivets which were to come in contact with
sea water. At the present day it has
lost much of its importance, since all the
larger ships are made of steel. It is
usually composed of copper, 60 to 62
parts; and zinc, 40 to 38 parts. It is
sometimes called yellow metal, or Miintz
metal (called after its inventor), and is
prepared with certain precautions, di-
rected toward obtaining as fine a grain
as possible, experience having shown
that only a fine-grained alloy of uniform
density can resist the action of the sea
water evenly. A metal of uneven den-
sity will wear in holes. To obtain as
uniform a grain as possible, small sam-
ples taken from the fused mass are cooled
quickly and examined as to fracture. If
tney do not show the desired uniform
grain, some zinc is added to the mass.
After it has permeated the whole mass,
a fresh sample is taken and tested, this
being continued until the desired result
is reached. It is scarcely necessary to
remark that considerable experience is
required to tell the correct composition
of the alloy from the fracture. The mass
is finally poured into molds and rolled
cold. Malleable brass can be worked
warm, like iron, being ductile in heat, a
valuable quality.
Experiments with malleable brass
show that all alloys containing up to
58.33 per cent of copper and up to 41.67
per cent of zinc are malleable. There is,
in addition, a second group of such al-
loys, with 61.54 per cent of copper and
38.46 per cent of zinc, which are also
malleable in heat.
The preparation of these alloys re-
quires considerable experience, and is
best accomplished by melting the metals
together in the usual manner, and heating
the fused mass as strongly as possible.
It must be covered with a layer of char-
coal dust to prevent oxidation of the zinc.
The mass becomes thinly fluid, and an
intimate mixture of the constituents is
effected. Small pieces of the same alloy
are thrown into the liquid mass until it
no longer shows a reflecting surface,
when it is cast into ingots in iron molds.
The ingots are plunged into water while
still red-hot, and acquire by this treat-
ment a very high degree of ductility. The
alloy, properly prepared, has a fibrous
fracture and a reddish-yellow color.
Sheet Brass (For Sheet and Wire).—
In the preparation of brass for the manu-
facture of wire, an especially pure qual-
ity of copper must be used; without this,
all efforts to produce a suitable quality of
brass will be in vain. That pure copper
is indispensable to the manufacture of
good, ductile brass may be seen from the
great difference in the composition of the
various kinds, all of which answer their
purpose, but contain widely varying
quantities of copper and zinc. The fol-
lowing table shows the composition of
some excellent qualities of brass suitable
for making sheet and wire:
Brass Sheet — Source
Cop-
per
Zinc
Lead
Tin
Jemappes
Stolberg
64.6
64.8
70.1
68.1
71.5
71.1
70.1
72.73
63.66
70.16
68.98
33.7
32.8
29.26
31.9
28.5
27.6
29.9
27.27
33.02
27.45
29.54
1.4
2.0
0.38
0.2
0.4
0.17
Romilly
Rosthorn (Vienna).
Rosthorn (Vienna).
Rosthorn (Vienna).
Iserlohn & Romilly
Liidenscheid
(Brittle)
Heeermiihl. .
1.3
2.52
0.79
0.97
0.20
Oker
Brass Wire —
England
70.29
71.89
70.16
71.36
29.26
27.63
27.45
28.15
0.28
0.85
0.2
0.17
6.79
Augsburg
Neustadt
Neustadt
Neustadt
71.5
28.5
Neustadt
71.0
27.6
(Good quality) ....
(Brittle)
For wire and sheet.
65.4
65.5
67.0
34.6
32.4
32.0
2.1
0.5
0.5
ALLOYS
55
As the above figures show, the per-
centage of zinc in the different kinds of
brass lies between 27 and 34. Recently,
alloys containing a somewhat larger
quantity of zinc have been used, it hav-
ing been found that the toughness and
ductility of the brass are increased there-
by, without injury to its tenacity. Al-
loys containing up to 37 per cent of zinc
possess a high degree of ductility in the
cold, and are well adapted for wire and
sheet.
Gilders' Sheet Brass. — Copper, 1 part;
zinc, 1 part; tin, A part; lead, -fa part.
Very readily fusible and very dense.
White Brass. — Birmingham platina is
an alloy of a pure white, almost silver-
white color, remaining unaffected by
tolerably long exposure to the atmos-
phere. Unfortunately this alloy is so
brittle that it can rarely be shaped ex-
cept by casting. It is used only in the
manufacture of buttons. The alloy is
poured into molds giving rather sharp
impressions and allowing the design on
the button (letters or coat of arms) to
stand out prominently with careful
stamping. The composition of this
alloy, also known by the name of plati-
num lead, is as follows:
I II
Copper 46.5 4
Zinc 53.5 16
III. — Zinc, 80 parts; copper, 10 parts;
iron, 10 parts.
BRITANNIA METAL.
Britannia metal is an alloy consisting
principally of tin and antimony. Many
varieties contain only these two metals,
and may be considered simply as tin
hardened with antimony, while others
contain, in addition, certain quantities of
copper, sometimes lead, and occasion-
ally, though rarely on account of its cost,
bismuth. Britannia metal is always of a
silvery-white color, with a bluish tinge,
and its hardness makes it capable of
taking a high polish, which is not lost
through exposure to the air. Ninety per
cent of tin and 10 per cent of antimony
gives a composition which is the best for
many purposes, especially for casting, as
it fills out the molds well, and is readily
fusible. In some cases, where articles
made from it are to be subjected to con-
stant wear, a harder alloy is required.
In the proportions given above, the metal
is indeed much harder than tin, but
would still soon give way under usage.
A table is appended, giving the com-
position of some of the varieties of Bri-
tannia metal and their special names.
Tin
Anti-
mony
Cop-
per
Zinc
Lead
English
81.90
16.25
1.84
English
90.62
7.81
1.46
English
90.1
6.3
3.1
6.5
....
English
85.4
9.660.81
3.06
Pewter
81.2
5.7
1.60
11.5
Pewter
89.3
7.6
1.8
1.8
Tutania
91.4
0.7
6.3
7.6
Queen's metal
88.5
7.1
3.5
0.9
German
72.0
24.0
4.0
German
84.0
9.0
2.0
5.6
German (for
casting)
20.0
64.0
10.0
6.0
Malleable (for
casting) ....
48.0
3.0
48.0
1.0
Britannia metal is prepared by melting
the copper alone first, then adding a
part of the tin and the whole of the an-
timony. The heat can then be quickly
moderated, as the melting point of the
new alloy is much lower than that of
copper. Finally, the rest of the tin is
added, and the mixture stirred constantly
for some time to make it thoroughly
homogeneous.
An alloy which bears a resemblance
to Britannia metal is Ashberry metal,
for which there are two formulas.
Copper 2
Tin. 8
Antimony 14
Zinc 1
Nickel 2
II
3
79
15
2
1
BRONZES.
The composition of bronze must be
effected immediately before the casting,
for bronze cannot be kept in store ready
Erepared. In forming the alloy, the re-
-actory compound, copper, is first melted
separately, the other metals, tin, zinc,
etc., previously heated, being then
added; the whole is then stirred and the
casting carried out without loss of time.
The process of forming the alloy must be
effected quickly, so that there may be no
loss of zinc, tin, or lead through oxida-
tion, and also no interruption to the
flow of metal, as metal added after an
interval of time will not combine per-
fectly with the metal already poured in.
It is important, therefore, to ascertain
the specific weights of the metals, for
the heavier metal will naturally tend to
sink to the bottom and the lighter to
collect at the top. Only in this way,
and by vigorous stirring, can the com-
plete blending of the two metals be
secured. In adding the zinc, great care
56
ALLOYS
must be taken that the latter sinks at
once to the level of the copper, otherwise
a considerable portion will be volatilized
before reaching the copper. When the
castings are made, they must be cooled
as quickly as possible, for the compo-
nents of bronze have a tendency to form
separate alloys of various composition,
thus producing the so-called tin spots.
This is much more likely to occur with a
slow than with a sudden cooling of the
mass.
Annealing Bronze. — This process is
more particularly employed in the prep-
aration of alloys used in the manufacture
of cymbals, gongs, bells, etc. The alloy
is naturally brittle, and acquires the
properties essential to the purpose for
which it is intended only after casting.
The instruments are plunged into cold
water while red-hot, hammered, re-
heated, and slowly cooled, when they
become soft and sonorous. The alloy
of copper and tin has the peculiar prop-
erty that, whereas steel becomes hard
through cooling, this mixture, when
cooled suddenly, becomes noticeably soft
and more malleable. The alloy is
heated to a dark-red heat, or, in the case
of thin articles, to the melting point of
lead, and then plunged in cold water.
The alloy may be hammered without
splitting or breaking.
Aluminum Bronze. — This is prepared
by melting the finest copper in a cruci-
ble, and adding the aluminum. The
copper is cooled thereby to the thickly
fluid point, but at the moment of the
combination of the two metals, so much
heat is released that the alloy becomes
white hot and thinly fluid. Aluminum
bronze thus prepared is usually brittle,
and acquires its best qualities only after
having been remelted several times. It
may be remarked that, in order to obtain
a bronze of the best quality, only the very
purest copper must be used; with an infe-
rior quality of copper, all labor is wasted.
Aluminum bronze is not affected by ex-
posure to the air; and its beautiful color
makes it very suitable for manufactur-
ing various ornamental articles, includ-
ing clock cases, door knobs, etc.
Aluminum bronze wire is almost as
strong as good steel wire, and castings
made from it are almost as hard as steely
iron; its resistance to bending or sag-
ging is great.
I. — A good formula is 90 to 95 per cent
of aluminum and 5 to 10 per cent of cop-
per, of golden color, which keeps well in
the air, without soon becoming dull and
changing color like pure copper and its
alloys with tin and zinc (bronze, brass,
etc.). It can be cast excellently, can be
filed well and turned, possesses an ex-
traordinary hardness and firmness, and
attains a high degree of polish; it is
malleable and forgeable. On the latter
quality are founded applications which
were formerly never thought of, viz.:
forged works of art for decorative pur-
poses. An alloy of 95 parts aluminum
and 5 parts copper is used here. The
technical working of bronze is not mate-
rially different from that of iron. The
metal, especially in a hot condition, is
worked like iron on the anvil, with ham-
mer and chisel, only that the tempera-
ture to be maintained in forging lies
between dark and light cherry red. If
the articles are not forged in one piece
and the putting together of the separate
parts becomes necessary, riveting or
soldering has to be resorted to. Besides
forging, aluminum bronze is well suited
for embossing, which is not surprising con-
sidering the high percentage of copper.
After finishing the pieces, the metal can
be toned in manifold ways by treatment
with acid.
II. — Copper, 89 to 98 per cent; alu-
minum and nickel, 1 to 2 per cent. Alu-
minum and nickel change in the opposite
way, that is to say, in increasing the per-
centage of nickel the amount of alu-
minum is decreased by the equal quan-
tity. It should be borne in mind that the
best ratio is aluminum, 9.5 per cent;
nickel, 1 to 1.5 per cent at most. In
preparing the alloy a deoxidizing agent
is added, viz., phosphorus to 0.5 per
cent; magnesium to 1.5 per cent. The
phosphorus should always be added in
the form of phosphorous copper or phos-
phor aluminum of exactly determined
percentage. It is first added to the
copper, then the aluminum and the
nickel, and finally the magnesium, the
last named at the moment of liquidity,
are admixed.
III. — A gold bronze, containing 3 to
5 per cent aluminum; specific gravity.
8.37 to 8.15. Handsome golden color.
This alloy oxidizes less on heating than
copper and iron, and is therefore espe-
cially adapted for locomotive fireboxes
and spindles, etc.
IV. — A steel bronze containing on an
average 8.5 per cent aluminum (includ-
ing 1 per cent silicium); specific gravity,
7.7. Very ductile and tough, but slightly
elastic; hence its use is excluded where,
with large demands upon tension and
pressure, no permanent change of form
must ensue. This is changed by work-
ing, such as rolling, drawing, etc. Es-
ALLOYS
57
pecially useful where infrangibility is de-
sired, as in machinery, ordnance, etc.
At high temperature this bronze loses its
elasticity again.
V. — This contains 8.5 per cent alu-
minum and 1 A to 2 per cent silicium. Its
use is advisable in cases where the metal
is to possess a good elasticity, even in
the cast state, and to retain it after
being worked in red heat.
VI. — An acid bronze, containing 10
per cent aluminum; specific gravity,
7.65. Especially serviceable to resist
oxidation and the action of acids.
VII. — Diamond bronze, containing
10 per cent aluminum and 2 per cent
silicium. Specific gravity, 7.3. Very
hard; of great firmness, but brittle.
Art Bronzes. (See also Aluminum
Bronzes and Japanese Bronzes under
this title.) — I. — Copper, 84 parts; zinc,
11 parts; tin, 5 parts.
II. — Copper, 90 parts; zinc, 6 parts;
tin, 2 parts; lead, 2 parts.
III. — Copper, 65 parts; zinc, 30 parts;
tin, 5 parts.
IV. — Copper, 90 parts; tin, 5 parts; zinc,
4 parts; lead, 1 part.
V. — Copper, 85 parts; zinc, 10 parts;
tin, 3 parts; lead, 2 parts.
VI. — Copper, 72 parts; zinc, 23 parts;
tin, 3 parts; lead, 2 parts.
Statuary Bronze. — Many of the an-
tique statues were made of genuine
bronze, which has advantages for this
purpose, but has been superseded in
modern times by mixtures of metals
containing, besides copper and tin — the
constituents of real bronze — a quantity
of zinc, the alloy thus formed being
really an intermediate product between
bronze and brass. The reason for the
use of such mixtures lies partly in the
comparative cheapness of their produc-
tion as compared with genuine bronze,
and partly in the purpose for which the
metal is to be used. A thoroughly good
statuary bronze must become thinly fluid
in fusing, fill the molds out sharply, allow
of being easily worked with the file, and
must take on the beautiful green coating
called patina, after being exposed to the
air for a short time.
Genuine bronze, however strongly
heated, does not become thin enough to
fill out the molds well, and it is also
difficult to obtain homogeneous castings
from it. Brass alone is also too thickly
fluid, and not hard enough for the re-
quired fine chiseling or chasing of the
finished object. Alloys containing zinc
and tin, in addition to copper, can be
prepared in such a manner that they will
become very thinly fluid, and will give
fine castings which can easily be worked
with the file and chisel. The best pro-
portions seem to be from 10 to 18 per
cent of zinc and from 2 to 4 per cent
of tin. In point of hardness, statuary
bronze holds an intermediate position
between genuine bronze and brass,
being harder and tougher than the latter,
but not so much so as the former.
Since statuary bronze is used prin-
cipally for artistic purposes, much de-
pends upon the color. This can be varied
from pale yellow to orange yellow by
slightly varying the content of tin or
zinc, which must, of course, still be kept
between the limits given above. Too
much tin makes the alloy brittle and dif-
ficult to chisel; with too much zinc, on
the other hand, the warm tone of color is
lost, and the bronze does not acquire a
fine patina.
The best proportions for statuary
bronze are very definitely known at the
present day; yet it sometimes happens
that large castings have not the right
character. They are either defective in
color, or they dc not take on a fine patina,
or they are difficult to chisel. These
phenomena may be due to the use of
impure metals — containing oxides, iron,
lead, etc. — or to improper treatment of
the alloy in melting. With the most
careful work possible, there is a consid-
erable loss in melting — 3 per cent at the
very least, and. sometimes as, much as 10.
This is due to the large proportion of
zinc, and it is evident that, in conse-
quence of it, the nature of the alloy will
be different from what might be expected
from the quantities of metals used in its
manufacture.
It has been remarked that slight vari-
ations in composition quickly change
the color of the alloy. The following
table gives a series of alloys of different
colors, suitable for statuary bronze:
Cop-
per
Zinc
Tin
Color
I..
84.42
11.28
4.30
Reddish yellow
II...
84.00
11.00
5.00
Orange red
III...
83.05
13.03
3.92
Orange red
IV...
83.00
12.005.00
Orange red
V...
81.05
15.32 3.63 Orange yellow
VI...
81.00
15.00
4.00 Orange yellow
VII...
78.09
18.47
3.44 Orange yellow
VIII...
73.58
23.273.15
Orange yellow
IX... 73.00
23.004.00
Pale orange
X...
70.36
26.882.76
Pale yellow
XI...
70.00
27.003.00
Pale yellow
XII... 65.95
31.56
2.49
Pale yellow
58
ALLOYS
Perhaps the most satisfactory bronze
metal is the alloy used in France for more
than a century. It contains 91.60 per
cent of copper, 5.33 per cent of zinc, 1.70
per cent of tin, and 1.37 per cent of lead.
Somewhat more zinc is taken for articles
to be gilded.
Bismuth Bronze. — Copper, 52 parts;
nickel, 30 parts; zinc, 12 parts; lead, 5
parts; bismuth, 1 part. For metallic
mirrors, lamp reflectors, etc.
Gun Bronze. — See Phosphor Bronze
under this title.
Japanese Bronzes. — The formulas given
below contain a large percentage of lead,
which greatly improves the patina. The in-
gredients and the ratio of their parts for sev-
eral sorts of modern Japanese bronze follow:
I.— Copper, 81.62 per cent; tin, 4.61
per cent; lead, 10.21 per cent.
II.— Copper, 76.60 per cent; tin, 4.38
per cent; lead, 11.88 per cent; zinc, 6.53
per cent.
III.— Copper, 88.55 per cent; tin, 2.42
per cent; lead, 4.72 per cent; zinc, 3.20
per cent.
Sometimes a little antimony is added
just before casting, and such a composi-
tion would be represented more nearly
by this formula:
IV.— Copper, 68.25 per cent; tin, 5.47
per cent; zinc, 8.88 per cent; lead, 17.06
per cent; antimony, 0.34 per cent.
For imitation Japanese bronze, see
Plating under Bronzing.
Machine Bronze. — I. — Copper, 89 per
cent; tin, 11 per cent.
II. — Copper, 80 per cent; tin, 16 per
cent.
Phosphor Bronze. — Phosphor bronze
is bronze containing varying amounts
of phosphorus, from a few hundredths
of 1 per cent to 1 or 2 per cent. Bronze
containing simply copper and tin is very
liable to be defective from the presence
of oxygen, sulphur, or occluded gases.
Oxvgen causes the metal to be spongy
and weak. Sulphur and occluded gases
cause porosity. ^ Oxygen gets " into the
metal by absorption from the air. It can
be eliminated by adding to the metal
something which combines with the oxy-
gen and then fluxes off. Such deoxidizers
are zinc, antimony, aluminum, man-
ganese, silicon, and phosphorus. Sul-
phur and occluded gases can be elimi-
nated by melting the metal, exposing it to
the air, and letting it thus absorb some
oxygen, which then burns the sulphur
and gas. The oxygen can then be re-
moved by adding one of the above-
mentioned deoxidizers. The important
use of phosphorus in bronze is, there-
fore, to remove oxygen and also indirect-
ly to destroy occluded gas and sulphur.
A bronze is sometimes made with an
extra high percentage of phosphorus,
namely, 6 per cent. This alloy is made
so as to have phosphorus in convenient
form for use, and the process of manu-
facture is as follows: Ninety pounds
of copper are melted under charcoal in
a No. 70 crucible, which holds about
200 pounds of metal when full; 11
pounds of tin are added and the metal is
allowed to become hot. The crucible is
then removed from the furnace and 7
pounds of phosphorus are introduced
in the following manner: A 3-gallon
stone jar, half full of dilute solution
of blue vitriol, is weighed. Then the
weights are increased 7 pounds, and
phosphorus in sticks about 4 inches
long is added till the scales balance
again. The phosphorus is left in this
solution half an hour or longer, the phos-
phorus being given a coating of copper,
so that it may be dried and exposed to
the air without igniting. Have ready
a pan about 30 inches square and 6
inches deep, containing about 2 inches of
water. Over the water is a wire netting,
which is laid loose on ledges or supports
along the inner sides of the pan. On the
netting is blotting paper, and on this the
phosphorus is laid to dry when taken
out of the blue-vitriol solution.. The pan
also has a lid which can be put down in
case of ignition of the phosphorus.
The phosphorus is now ready for
introduction into the metal. This is
done by means of a cup-shaped instru-
ment called a retort or phosphorizer.
One man holds the retort on the rim of
the crucible in a horizontal position. A
second man takes about three pieces of
phosphorus and throws them into the
retort. The first man then immediately
plunges the mouth of the retort below
the surface of the metal before the phos-
phorus has a chance to fall or flow out.
Of course the phosphorus immediately
melts and also Tbegins to volatilize. As
the phosphorus comes in contact with
the metal, it combines with it. This
process is continued till all the 7 pounds
of phosphorus has been put into the metal.
The metal is then poured into slabs about
3 inches by 4 inches by 1 inch thick. The
metal is so hard that a greater thickness
would make it difficult to break it up.
When finished, the metal contains, by
analysis, 6 per cent of phosphorus. When
phosphorus is to be added to metal, a
little of this hardener is employed. ^
Copper is a soft, ductile metal, with its
melting point at about 2,000° F. Mol-
ALLOYS
ten copper has the marked property of
absorbing various gases. Jt is for this
reason that it is so difficult to make sound
castings of clear copper. Molten copper
combines readily with the oxygen of the
air, forming oxide of copper, which dis-
solves in the copper and mixes homo-
geneously with it.
A casting made from such metal would
be very spongy. The bad effect of oxy-
gen is intended to be overcome by adding
zinc to the extent of 1 per cent or more.
This result can be much more effectively
attained by the use of aluminum, man-
ganese, or phosphorus. The action of
these substances is to combine with the
oxygen, and as the product formed sepa-
rates and goes to the surface, the metal
is left in a sound condition. Aluminum
and manganese deoxidize copper and
bronze very effectively, and the oxide
formed goes to the surface as a scum.
When a casting is made from such metal,
the oxide or scum, instead of freeing it-
self from the casting perfectly, generally
remains in the top part of the casting
mixed with the metal, as a fractured
surface will show. Phosphorus deox-
idizes copper, and the oxide formed
leaves the metal in the form of a gas, so
that a casting made from such metal
shows a clean fracture throughout, al-
though the metal is not so dense as when
aluminum or manganese is used.
Copper also has the property of ab-
sorbing or occluding carbon monoxide.
But the carbonic oxide thus absorbed
is in a different condition from the oxy-
gen absorbed. When oxygen is ab-
sorbed by copper, the oxygen combines
chemically with the copper and loses its
own identity as a gas. But when coal
gas is absorbed by the copper, it keeps
its own physical identity and simply ex-
ists in the copper in a state of solution.
All natural waters, such as lake water,
river water, spring water, etc., contain
air in solution or occlusion. When such
water is cooled and frozen, just at the
time of changing from the liquid to the
solid state, the dissolved gas separates
and forms air bubbles, which remain
entangled in the ice. The carbonic
oxide which is dissolved or occluded in
copper acts in exactly the same way.
Hydrogen acts in exactly the same
manner as carbonic oxide. Sulphur also
has a bad effect upon copper and bronze.
Sulphur combines with copper and other
metals, forming sulphide of copper, etc.
When molten copper or bronze contain-
ing sulphur comes in contact with air it
absorbs some oxygen, and this in turn
combines with the sulphur present,
forming sulphur dioxide, which is a gas
which remains occluded in the metal.
Tin is a soft, white metal, melting at
440° F. Toward gases it acts something
like copper, but not in so marked a de-
gree. Although^copper and tin are both
soft, vet when mixed they make a harder
metal. When bronze cools from the
molten state, the copper and the copper-
tin alloy tend to crystallize by themselves.
The quicker the cooling occurs the less
separation will there be, and also the
fracture will be more homogeneous in ap-
pearance.
Gun bronze contains copper and tin
in the proportion of 9 or 10 parts of
copper to 1 of tin. This is the metal
used when an ordinary bronze casting
is wanted. A harder bronze is copper
and tin in the ratio of 6 to 1. This is
often used as a bearing metal. When
either of these metals is to be turned in
the machine shop, they should contain
about 3 per cent of lead, which will make
them work very much better, but it also
decreases their tensile strength. Bear-
ing metal now generally contains about
10 per cent of lead, with copper and tin
in varying ratios. The large percentage
of lead is put in that the metal may wear
away slower. Lead, although a metal
having properties similar to tin, acts en-
tirely different toward copper. Copper
and tin have a good deal of affinity fo?
each other, but copper and lead show
no attraction at all for each other. Cop-
per and tin mix in all proportions, but
copper and lead mix only to a very limit-
ed extent. About 3 per cent of lead can
be mixed with copper. With bronze
about 15 per cent to 20 per cent of lead
can be mixed. In bearing bronze the
lead keeps its own physical properties,
so that the constituent lead melts long
before the metal attains a red heat. It
sometimes happens when a bearing runs
warm that the lead actually sweats out
and forms pimples on the metal. Or,
sometimes, in remelting a bearing bronze
casting the lead may be seen to drop
out while the metal is warming up. All
of these metals, however, should contain
something to flux or deoxidize them,
such as zinc, manganese, aluminum,
silicon, antimony, or phosphorus.
The phosphor bronze bearing metal in
vogue has the following composition : Cop-
per, 79.7 per cent; tin, 10 per cent; lead,
10 percent; and phosphorus, 0.3 per cent.
Melt 140 pounds of copper in a No.
70 pot, covering with charcoal. When
copper is all melted, add 17i pounds of
tin to 17i pounds of lead, and allow the
metal to become sufficiently warm, but
60
ALLOYS
not any hotter than is needed. Then
add 10 pounds of "hardener" (made as
previously described) and stir well. Re-
move from furnace, skim off the char-
coal, cool the metal with gates to as low
a temperature as is consistent with get-
ting a good casting, stir well again, and
pour. The molds for this kind of work
are faced with plumbago.
There are several firms that make
phosphor-bronze bearings with a com-
position similar to the above one, and
most of them, or perhaps all, make it by
melting the metals and then charging
with phosphorus to the extent of 0.7 to
1 per cent. But some metal from all
brands contains occluded gas. So that
after such metal is cast (in about two
minutes or so) the metal will ooze or
sweat out through the gate, and such a
casting will be found to be porous. But
not one such experience with metal made
as described above has yet been found.
This practical point should be heeded,
viz., that pig phosphor bronze should be
brought to the specifications that the
metal should have shrunk in the ingot
mold in cooling, as shown by the con-
cave surface of the upper side, and that
it should make a casting in a sand mold
without rising in the gate after being
poured.
In bearing metal, occluded gas is very
objectionable, because the gas, in trying
to free itself, shoves the very hard cop-
per-tin compound (which has a low
melting point and remains liquid after
the copper has begun to set) into spots,
and thus causes hard spots in the metal.
Phosphorus is very dangerous to han-
dle, and there is great risk from fire with
it, so that many would not care to handle
the phosphorus itself. But phosphor
copper containing 5 per cent of phos-
phorus, and phosphor tin containing 2 to
7 per cent of phosphorus, and several
other such alloys can be obtained in the
market. It may be suggested to those
who wish to make phosphor bronze, but
do not want to handle phosphorus itself,
to make it by using the proper amounts
of one of these high phosphorus alloys.
In using phosphorus it is only necessary
to use enough to thoroughly deoxidize
the metal, say 0.3 per cent. More than
this will make the metal harder, but not
any sounder.
Phosphor bronze is not a special kind
of alloy, but any bronze can be made
into phosphor bronze; it is, in fact, sim-
ply a -deoxidized bronze, produced under
treatment with phosphorus compounds.
Although the effect of phosphorus in
improving the quality of bronze has been
known for more than fifty years, it is only
of late that the mode for preparing phos-
phor bronze has been perfected. It is
now manufactured in many localities.
Besides its action in reducing the oxides
dissolved in the alloy, the phosphorus
exerts another very material influence
upon the properties of the bronze. The
ordinary bronzes consist of mixtures in
which the copper is really the only crys-
tallized constituent, since the tin crys-
tallizes with great difficulty. As a con-
sequence of this dissimilarity in the na-
ture of the two metals, the alloy is not
so solid as it would be if both were crys-
tallized. The phosphorus causes the
tin to crystallize, and the result is a more
homogeneous mixture of the two metals.
If enough phosphorus is added, so
that its presence can be detected in the
finished bronze, the latter may be con-
sidered an alloy of crystallized phosphor
tin with copper. If the content of phos-
phor is still more increased, a part of the
copper combines with the phosphorus,
and the bronze then contains, besides
copper and tin, compounds of crystal-
lized copper phosphide with phosphide
of tin. The strength and tenacity of the
bronze are not lessened by a larger
amount of phosphorus, and its hardness
is considerably increased. Most phos-
phor bronzes are equal in this respect to
the best steel, and some even surpass it
in general properties.
The phosphorus is added to the bronze
in the form of copper phosphide or phos-
phide of tin, the two being sometimes
used together. They must be specially
prepared for this purpose, and the best
methods will be here given. Copper
phosphide is prepared by heating a mix-
ture of 4 parts of superphosphate of lime,
2 parts of granulated copper, and 1 part
of finely pulverized coal in a crucible at a
temperature not too high. The melted
copper phosphide, containing 14 per cent
of phosphorus, separates on the bottom
of the crucible.
Tin phosphide is prepared as follows:
Place a bar of zinc in an aqueous solution
of tin chloride. The tin will be separated
in the form of a sponge-like mass. Col-
lect it, and put it into a crucible, upon
the bottom of which sticks of phosphorus
have been placed. Press the tin tightly
into the crucible, and expose to a gentle
heat. Continue the heating until flames
of burning phosphorus are no longer
observed on the crucible. The pure tin
phosphide, in the form of a coarsely
crystalline mass, tin-white in color, will
be found on the bottom of the crucible.
To prepare the phosphor bronze, the
ALLOYS
61
alloy to be treated is melted in the usual
way, and small pieces of the copper phos-
phide and tin phosphide are added.
Phosphor bronze, properly prepared,
has nearly the same melting point as that
of ordinary bronze. In cooling, how-
ever, it has the peculiarity of passing
directly from the liquid to the solid state,
without first becoming thickly fluid. In
a melted state it retains a perfectly bright
surface, while ordinary bronze in this
condition is always covered with a thin
film of oxide.
If phosphor bronze is kept for a long
time at the melting point, there is not
any loss of tin, but the amount of phos-
phorus is slightly diminished.
The most valuable properties of phos-
phor bronze are its extraordinary te-
nacity and strength. It can be rolled,
hammered, and stretched cold, and its
strength is nearly double that of the best
ordinary bronze. It is principally used
in cases where great strength and power
of resistance to outward influences are re-
quired, as, for instance, in objects which
are to be exposed to the action of sea water.
Phosphor bronze containing about 4
per cent of tin is excellently well adapted
for sheet bronze. With not more than 5
per cent of tin, it can be used, forged,
for firearms. Seven to 10 per cent of
tin gives the greatest hardness, and such
bronze is especially suited to the manu-
facture of axle bearings, cylinders for
steam fire engines, cogwheels, and, in
general, for parts of machines where
great strength and hardness are required.
Phosphor bronze, if exposed to the air,
soon becomes covered with a beautiful,
closely adhering patina, and is therefore
well adapted to purposes of art. The
amount of phosphorus added varies
from 0.25 to 2.5 per cent, according to
the purpose of the bronze. The com-
position of a number of kinds of phos-
phor bronze is given below:
Cop-
per
Tin
Zinc
Lead
Iron
Phos-
pho-
rus
I.
II.
III.
IV.
V.
VI.
VII.
VIII.
IX.
X.
XI.
85.55
77.85
72.50
73.50
74.50
83.50
90.34
90.86
94.71
9.85
4-15
4-15
11.00
8.00
6.00
11.00
8.00
8.90
8.56
4.39
3.77
8-20
7.65
17.00
19.00
11.00
3.00
0.62
4-15
4-15
trs.
0.05
0.5-3
.25-2
0.76
0.196
0.053
I for axle bearings, II and III for
harder and softer axle bearings, IV to
VIII for railroad purposes, IV especially
for valves of locomotives, V and VI axle
bearings for wagons, VII for connecting
rods, VIII for piston rods in hydraulic
presses.
Steel Bronze.— Copper, 60; ferro-
manganese (containing 70 to 80 per cent
manganese), 40; zinc, 15.
Silicon Bronze. — Silicon, similarly to
phosphorus, acts as a deoxidizing agent,
and the bronzes produced under its
influence are very ductile and elastic, do
not rust, and are very strong. On ac-
count of these qualities silicon bronze
is much used for telegraph and telephone
wires. The process of manufacture is
similar to that of phosphor bronze; the
silicon is used in the form of copper sili-
cide. Some good silicon bronzes are
as follows:
I II
Copper 97.12 97.37
Tin 1.14 1.32
Zinc l.io 1.27
Silicon 0.05 0.07
Sun Bronze.— The alloy called sun
bronze contains 10 parts of aluminum,
30 to 50 parts of copper, and 40 to 60
parts of cobalt. The mixture known by
the name of metalline has 25 per cent of
aluminum, 30 of copper, 10 of iron, and
35 of cobalt. These alloys melt at a point
approaching the melting point of copper,
are tenacious, ductile, and very hard.
Tobin Bronze.— This alloy is nearly
similar in composition and properties to
Delta metal.
II
59.00
38.40
2.16
0.11
0.31
III
61.20
37.14
0.90
0.18
0.35
IV
82.67
3.23
12.40
0.10
2.14
0.07
0.005
Copper. . . 61.203
Zinc 27.440
Tin 0.906
Iron 0.180
Lead 0.359
Silver
Phospho- )
rus $
The alloy marked IV is sometimes
called deoxidized bronze.
Violet-colored bronze is 50 parts cop-
per and 50 parts antimony.
CADMIUM ALLOYS:
See also Fusible Alloys.
Lipowitz's Alloy. — I. — This alloy is
composed of cadmium, 3 parts; tin, 4;
bismuth, 15; and lead, 8. The simplest
method of preparation is to heat the
metals, in small pieces, in a crucible,
stirring constantly, as soon as fusion
ALLOYS
begins, with a stick of hard wood. The
stirring is important, in order to prevent
the metals, whose specific gravity varies
considerably, from being deposited in
layers. The alloy softens at 140° F. and
melts completely at 158° P. The color
is silvery white, with a luster like polished
silver, and the metal can be bent, ham-
mered, and turned. These properties
would make it valuable for many pur-
poses where a beautiful appearance is of
special importance, but on account of
the considerable amount of cadmium
and bismuth which it contains, it is
rather expensive, and therefore limited
in use. Casts of small animals, insects,
lizards, etc., have been prepared from
it, which were equal in sharpness to
the best galvanoplastic work. Plaster of
Paris is poured over the animal to be
cast, and after sharp drying, the animal
is removed and the mold filled up with
Lipowitz's metal. The mold is placed
in a vessel of water, and by heating to
the boiling point the metal is melted and
deposited in the finest impressions of the
mold.
This alloy is most excellent for solder-
ing tin, lead, Britannia metal, and nickel,
being especially adapted to the last two
metals on account of its silver-white
color. But here again its costliness pre-
vents its general use, and cheaper alloys
possessing the same properties have been
sought. In cases where the silver-white
color and the low melting point are not
of the first importance, the alloys given
below may very well be used in the place
of it.
II. — Cadmium alloy (melting point,
170° P.): Cadmium, 2 parts; tin, 3; lead,
11; bismuth, 16.
III. — Cadmium alloy (melting point,
167° F.): Cadmium, 10 parts; tin, 3; lead,
8; bismuth, 8.
Cadmium alloys (melting point, 203°
P.):
IV V VI
Cadmium 1 1 1 parts
Tin 231"
Bismuth 35 2 "
VII. — A very fusible alloy, melting at
150° F., is composed of tin, 1 or 2 parts;
lead, 2 or 3; bismuth, 4 or 15; cadmium,
1 or 2.
VIII.— Wood's alloy melts between
140° and 161.5° F. It is composed of
lead, 4 parts; tin, 2; bismuth, 5 to 8;
cadmium, 1 to 2. In color it resembles
platinum, and is malleable to a certain
extent.
IX. — Cadmium alloy (melting point,
179.5° F.): Cadmium, 1 part; lead, 6
parts; bismuth, 7. This, like the pre-
ceding, can be used for soldering in hot
water.
X. — Cadmium alloy (melting point,
300° F.):8 Cadmiiim, 2 parts; tin, 4; lead,
2. This is an excellent soft solder, with a
melting point about 86 degrees below that
of lead and tin alone.
Cadmium Alloys with Gold, Silver, and
Copper.— I.— Gold, 750 parts; silver, 166
parts; cadmium, 84 parts. A malleable
and ductile alloy of green color.
II. — Gold, 750 parts; silver, 125 parts;
and cadmium, 125 parts. Malleable and
ductile alloy of yellowish-green hue.
III. —Gold, 746 parts; silver, ^ 114
parts; copper, 97 parts; and cadmium,
43 parts. Likewise a malleable and
ductile alloy of a peculiar green shade.
All these alloys are suitable for plating.
As regards their production, each must
be carefully melted together from its
ingredients in a covered crucible lined
with coal dust, or in a graphite crucible.
Next, the alloy has to be remelted in a
graphite crucible with charcoal (or rosin
powder) and borax. If, in spite thereof,
a considerable portion of the cadmium
should have evaporated, the alloy must
be re-fused once more with an addition of
cadmium.
ALLOYS FOR CASTING COINS, ME-
DALLIONS, ETC.
Alloys which fulfill the requirements of
the medalist, and capable, therefore, of
reproducing all details, are the following:
I II
Tin 3 6 parts
Lead 13 8 "
Bismuth 6 14 "
III. — A soft alloy suitable to take im-
pressions of woodcuts, coins, metals, en-
gravings, etc., and which must melt at
a low degree of heat, is made out of bis-
muth, 3 parts; tin, li parts; lead, 2^
parts; and worn-out type, 1 part.
Acid-proof Alloy. — This alloy is char-
acterized by its power, of resisting the
action of acids, and is therefore especially
adapted to making cocks, pipes, etc.,
which are to come in contact with acid
fluids. It is composed of copper, zinc,
lead, tin, iron, nickel, cobalt, and an-
timony, in the following proportions:
Copper 74.75 parts
Zinc 0.61 "
Lead 16.35 "
Tin 0.91 "
Iron 0.43 "
Nickel ) 0 24 "
Cobalt f °'24
Antimony 6.78 "
ALLOYS
63
Albata Metal. — Copper, 40 parts; zinc,
32 parts; and nickel, 8 parts.
Alfenide Metal. — Copper, 60 parts;
zinc, 30; nickel, 10; traces of iron.
Bath Metal.— This" alloy is used es-
pecially in England for the manufacture
of teapots, and is very popular owing to
the fine white color it possesses. It
takes a ^ high polish, and articles made
from this alloy acquire in the course of
time, upon only being rubbed with a
white cloth, a permanent silver luster.
The composition of Bath metal is cop-
per, 55 parts; zinc, 45 parts*
Baudoin Metal. — This is composed of
72 parts of copper, 16.6 of nickel, 1.8 of
cobalt, 1 of zinc; J per cent of aluminum
may be added.
CASTING COPPER :
Macht's Yellow Metal.— I. —This alloy
consists of 33 parts of copper and 25 of
zinc. It has a dark golden-yellow color,
great tenacity, and can be forged at a
red heat, properties which make it es-
pecially suitable for fine castings.
II. — Yellow. — Copper, 67 to 70 parts;
zinc, 33 to 30 parts.
III.— Red.— Copper, 82 parts; zinc,
18 parts.
Copper Arsenic. — Arsenic imparts to
copper a very fine white color, and makes
it very hard and brittle. Before Ger-
man silver was known, these alloys were
sometimes used for the manufacture of
such cast articles as were not to come in
contact with iron. When exposed to the
air, they soon lose their whiteness and
take on a brownish shade. On account
of this, as well as the poisonous character
of tne arsenic, they are very little used
at the present time. Alloys of copper
and arsenic are best prepared by pressing
firmly into a crucible a mixture of 70
parts of copper and 30 of arsenic (the
copper to be used in the form of fine
shavings) and fusing this mixture in a
furnace with a good draught, under a
cover of glass.
Copper Iron. — The alloys of copper
and iron are little used in the industries
of the present day, but it would seem
that in earlier times they were frequently
prepared for the purpose of giving a con-
siderable degree of hardness to copper;
for in antique casts, consisting princi-
pally of copper, we regularly find large
quantities of iron, which leads to the sup-
position that they were added intention-
ally.
These alloys, when of a certain com-
position, have considerable strength and
hardness. With an increase in the quan-
tity of "the iron the hardness increases,
but the solidity is lessened. A copper
and iron alloy of considerable strength,
and at .the same time very hard, is
made of copper, 66 parts; iron, 34.
These alloys acquire, on exposure to air,
an ugly color inclining toward black,
and are therefore not adapted for arti-
cles of art.
Copper Nickel.— A. Morrell, of New
York, has obtained a patent on a nickel-
copper alloy which he claims is valu-
able on account of its noncorrosive
qualities, therefore making it desirable
for ships, boiler tubes, and other uses
where the metal comes much in contact
with water. The process of making the
metal is by smelting ore containing sul-
phide of nickel and copper, and besem-
erizing the resultant matter. This is
calcined in order to obtain the nickel
and copper in the form of oxides. The
latter are reduced in reverberating fur-
nace with carbon, or the like, so as to
produce an alloy which preferably con-
tains 2 parts of nickel and 1 part of
copper.
Delta Metal. — An alloy widely used for
making parts of machinery, and also
for artistic purposes, is the so-called
Delta metal. This is a variety of brass
hardened with iron; some manufacturers
add small quantities of tin and lead;
also, in some cases, nickel. The follow-
ing analysis of Delta metal (from the fac-
tory at Diisseldorf) will show its usual
composition:
I
II
III
IV
V
Copper. . . .
Zinc
55.94
41.61
0.72
0.87
0.81
tra-
ces.
0.013
55.80
40.07
1.82
1.28
0.96
tra-
ces.
0.011
55.82
41.41
0.76
0.86
1.38
0.06
tra-
ces.
54.22
42.25
1.10
0.99
1.09
0.16
0.02
58.6:
38.95
0.67
1.62
b'.ii
Lead
Iron. . . .
Manganese
Nickel
Phosphorus
I is cast, II hammered, III rolled,
and IV hot-stamped metal. Delta
metal is produced by heating zinc very
strongly in crucibles (to about 1600° F.),
and adding ferromanganese or "spiegel-
eisen," producing an alloy of 95 per cent
zinc and 5 per cent of iron. Copper and
brass and a very small amount of copper
phosphate are also added.
ALLOYS
Gong Metal. — A sonorous metal for
cymbals, gongs, and tam-tams consists
of 100 parts of copper with 25 parts tin.
Ignite the piece after it is cast and plunge
it into cold water immediately.
Production of Minargent. — This alloy
consists of copper, 500 parts; nickel,
350; tungsten, 25, and aluminum, 5. The
metal obtained possesses a handsome
white color and greatly resembles silver.
Minofor. — The so-called Minofor metal
is composed of copper, tin, antimony, zinc,
and iron in the following proportions:
I II
Copper 3.26 4
Tin 67.53 66
Antimony 17.00 20
Zinc 8.94 9
Iron 1
Minargent and Minofor are sometimes
used in England for purposes in which the
ordinary Britannia metal, 2 parts tin and
1 part antimony, might equally well be
employed; the latter surpasses both of
them in beauty of color, but they are, on
the other hand, harder.
Retz Alloy. — This alloy, which resists
the corrosive action of alkalies and acids,
is composed of 15 parts of copper, 2.34
of tin, 1.82 of lead, and 1 of antimony.
It can be utilized in the manufacture of
receivers, for which porcelain and ebo-
nite are usually employed.
Ruoltz Metal. — This comprises 20
parts of silver, 50 of copper, 30 of nickel.
These proportions may, however, vary.
Tissier's Metal. — This alloy contains
arsenic, is of a beautiful tombac red
color, and very hard. Its composition
varies a great deal, but the peculiar alloy
which gives the name is composed of
copper, 97 parts; zinc, 2 parts; arsenic,
1 or 2. It may be considered a brass
with a very high percentage of copper,
and hardened by the addition of arsenic.
It is sometimes used for axle bearings,
but other alloys are equally suitable for
this purpose, and are to be preferred on
account of the absence of arsenic, which
is always dangerous.
FILE ALLOYS. — Many copper-tin al-
loys are employed for the making of files
which, in distinction from the steel files,
are designated composition files. Such
alloys have the following compositions:
Geneva Composition Files. —
I II
Copper 64.4 62
Tin 18.0 20
Zinc 10.0 10
Lead 7.6 8
VogePs Composition Files. —
III IV V
Copper 57.0 61.5 73.0
Tin 28.5 31.0 19.0
Zinc 78.0 .... 8,0
Lead 7.0 8.5 8.0
VI. — Another alloy for composition
files is copper, 8 parts; tin, 2; zinc, l,and
lead, 1 — fused under a cover of borax.
EASILY FUSIBLE OR PLASTIC AL-
LOYS.
(These have a fusing point usually
below 300° F.)
(See also Solders.)
I. Rose's Alloy. — Bismuth, 2 parts;
lead, 1 part; tin, 1 part. Melting point,
200° F.
II. Darcet Alloy. — This is composed of
8 parts of bismuth, 5 of lead, and 3 of tin.
It melts at 176° F. To impart greater
fusibility, -fo part of mercury is added;
the fusing is then lowered to 149° F.
III.— Newton alloy melt3 at 212° F.,
and is composed of 5 parts of bismuth, 2
of lead, and 3 of tin.
IV.— Wood's Metal.—
Tin 2 parts
Lead 4 parts
Bismuth 5 to 8 parts
This silvery, fine-grained alloy fuses
between 151° and 162° F., and is ex-
cellently adapted to soldering.
V. — Bismuth, 7 parts; lead, 6 parts;
cadmium, 1 part. Melting point, 180° F.
VI.— Bismuth, 7 to 8 parts; lead, 4;
tin, 2; cadmium, 1 to 2. Melting point,
149° to 160° F.
Other easily fusible alloys :
VII VIII
1 2
1 2
1 1
258° F. 283°
IX
3
3
1
311°
Lead
Tin
Bismuth
Melting Point. . .
Fusible Alloys for Electric Installa-
tions.— These alloys are employed in
electric installations as current inter-
rupters. Serving as conductors on a
short length of circuit, they melt as soon
as the current becomes too strong. Fol-
lowing is the composition of some of
these alloys.
Fusing
temper-
ature
Lead
Tin
Bis-
muth
Cad-
mium
I..
203° F.
250
500
500
II...
193° F.
397
532
71
III...
168° F.
344
94
500
62
IV...
153° F.
260| 148
522
70
V...
150° F.
249
142
501
108
VI...
145° F.
267
136
500
100
ALLOYS
65
These alloys are prepared by melting
the lead in a stearine bath and adding
successively, and during the cooling,
first, the cadmium; second, the bismuth;
third, the tin. It is absolutely necessary
to proceed in this manner, since these
metals fuse at temperatures ranging
from 850° F. (for lead), to 551° F. (for
tin).
Fusible Safety Alloys for Steam
Boilers.—
Bis-
muth
Lead
Zinc
Melting
point
Atmos.
pres-
sure
L.
8
5
3
212° F.
1
II
8
8
4
235° F
1 5
III
8
8
3
253° F
2
IV. .
8
10
8
266° F
2 5
V
8
12
8
270° F.
3
VI
8
16
14
280° F.
3.5>
VII
8
16
12
285° F.
4
VIII
8
22
24
309° F.
5
IX
8
32
36
320° F.
6
X
8
32
28
330° F.
7
XI
8
30
24
340° F.
8
Lipowitz Metal. — This amalgam is pre-
pared as follows: Melt in a dish, cad-
mium, 3 parts, by weight; tin, 4 parts;
bismuth, 15 parts; and lead, 8 parts,
adding to the alloy, while still in fusion,
2 parts of quicksilver previously heated
to about 212° F. The amalgamation
proceeds easily and smoothly. The
liquid mass in the dish, which should
be taken from the fire immediately upon
the introduction of the mercury, is stirred
until the contents solidify. While Lipo-
witz alloy softens already at 140° F. and
fuses perfectly at 158°, the amalgam has
a still lower fusing point, which lies
around 143|° F.
This amalgam is excellently adapted
for the production of impressions of
various objects of nature, direct im-
pressions of leaves, and other delicate
parts of plants having been made with its
aid which, in point of sharpness, are
equal to the best plaster casts and have
a very pleasing appearance. The amal-
gam has a silver- white color and a
fine gloss. It is perfectly constant
to atmospheric influences. This amal-
gam has also been used with good suc-
cess for the making of small statuettes
and busts, which are hollow and can be
readily gilt or bronzed by electro-depo-
sition. The production of small statues
is successfully carried out by making a
hollow gypsum mold of the articles to
be cast and heating the mold evenly to
about 140° F. A corresponding quan-
tity of the molten amalgam is then poured
in and the mold moved rapidly to and
fro, so that the alloy is thrown against the
sides all over. The shaking should be
continued until it is certain that the amal-
gam has solidified. When the mold
has cooled off it is taken apart and
the seams removed by means of a sharp
knife. If the operation is carried on
correctly, a chasing of the cast mass be-
comes unnecessary, since the alloy fills
out the finest depressions of the mold
with the greatest sharpness.
Amalgam for Plaster. — Tin, 1 part;
bismuth, 1 part; mercury, 1 part. Melt
the bismuth and the tin together, and
when the two metals are in fusion add
the mercury while stirring. For use,
rub up the amalgam with a little white of
egg and brush like a varnish on the
plaster articles.
Plastic Metal Composition. — I. Copper
oxide is reduced by means of hydrogen
or copper sulphate by boiling a solution
of the same in water with some zinc filings
in order to obtain entirely pure copper.
Of the copper powder obtained in this man-
ner, 20, 30, or 36 parts, by weight, accord-
ing to the degree of hardness desired for
the composition (the greater the quantity
of copper used the harder will the composi-
tion become), are thoroughly moistened
in a cast-iron or porcelain mortar with
sulphuric acid of 1.85 specific gravity;
70 parts, by weight, of mercury are then
added to this paste, the whole being con-
stantly stirred. When all the copper
has been thoroughly amalgamated with
the mercury, the sulphuric acid is washed
out again with boiling water, and in 12
hours after it has become cold the com-
position will be so hard that it can be
polished. It is impervious to the action
of dilute acids, alcohol, ether, and boil-
ing water. It contains the same specific
gravity, alike in the soft or the hard con-
dition. When used as a cement, it can
at any time be rendered soft and plastic
in the following manner: If applied
while hot and plastic to the deoxidized
surfaces of two pieces of metal, these
latter will unite so firmly that in about 10
or 12 hours the metal may be subjected
to any mechanical process. The prop-
erties of this composition render it
very useful for various purposes, and it
forms a most effective cement for fine
metal articles which cannot be soldered
in fire.
II. — Bismuth, 5.5 parts; lead, 3; tin,
1.5.
III. Alloy d'Homburg. — Bismuth,
66
ALLOYS
3 parts; lead, 3; tin, 3. This alloy is
fusible at 251° F., and is of a silvery
white. It is employed for reproductions
of medals.
IV. Alloy Valentine Rose.— Bismuth,
4 to 6 parts; lead, 2 parts; tin, 2 to 3 parts.
This alloy fuses at 212° to 250° F.
V. Alloy Rose pere. — Bismuth, 2
parts; lead, 2; tin, 2. This alloy fuses
at 199° F.
The remainder are plastic alloys for
reproducing cuts, medals, coins, etc.:
VI. — Bismuth, 4 parts; lead, 2 parts;
tin, 1 part.
VII. — Bismuth, 3 parts; lead, 3 parts;
tin, 2 parts.
VIII. — Bismuth, 4 parts; lead, 2 parts;
tin, 2 parts.
IX. — Bismuth, 5 parts; lead, 2 parts;
tin, 3 parts.
X. — Bismuth, 2 parts; lead, 2 parts;
tin, 2 parts.
Quick -Water. — That the amalgam
may easily take hold of bronze objects
and remain there, it is customary to
coyer the perfectly cleansed and shining
article with a thin coat of mercury, which
is usually accomplished by dipping it into
a so-called quick-water bath.
In the form of minute globules the
mercury immediately separates itself
from the solution and clings to the bronze
object, which thereupon presents the
appearance of being plated with silver.
After it has been well rinsed in clean
water, the amalgam may be evenly and
without difficulty applied with the
scratch brush.
This quick- water (in reality a solution
of mercurous nitrate), is made in the sim-
plest manner by taking 10 parts of mer-
cury and pouring over it 11 parts of
nitric acid of a specific gravity equal to
1.33; now let it stand until every part
of the mercury is dissolved; then, while
stirring vigorously, add 540 parts of
water. This solution must be kept in
closed flasks or bottles to prevent im-
purities, such as dust, etc., from falling
into it.
The preparatory work on the object
to be gilded consists mainly in cleansing
it from every trace of oxidation. First,
it must be well annealed by placing it in
a bed of glowing coal, care being exer-
cised that the heating be uniform.
When cooled, this piece is plunged into
a highly diluted sulphuric-acid bath in
order to dissolve in a measure the oxide.
Next it is dipped in a 36° nitric-acid bath,
of a specific gravity equal to 1.33, and
brushed off with a long brush; it is now
dipped into nitric acid into which a little
lampblack and table salt have been
thrown. It is now ready for washing
in clean water and drying in unsoiled
sawdust. It is of the greatest importance
that the surface to be gilded should ap-
pear of a pale yellow tint all over. If it
be too smooth the gold will not take hold
easily, and if it be too dull it will require
too much gold to cover it.
GOLD ALLOYS:
Colored Gold Alloys.— The alloys of
gold with copper have a reddish tinge;
those of gold with silver are whiter, and
an alloy of gold, silver, and copper to-
gether is distinguished by a greenish
tone. Manufacturers of gold ware
make use of these different colors, one
piece being frequently composed of
several pieces of varying color. Below
are given some of these alloys, with their
colors:
Gold
Silver
Copper
Steel
Cad-
mium
I..
2.6
1.0
II..
75.0
16.6
8.4
III..
74.6
11.4
9.7
4.3
IV..
75.0
12.6
12.5
V.
1.0
2 0
VI..
4.0
3.0
1.0
VII..
14.7
7.0
6.0
....
....
VIII..
14.7
9.0
4.0
IX..
3.0
1.0
1.0
X..
10.0
1.0
4.0
XI..
1.0
1.0
XII..
1.0
2.0
XIII..
30.0
3.6
....
2.6
XIV..
4.0
....
1.0
XV.
29.0
11.0
XVI
1 3
1 0
Nos. I, II, III, and IV are green gold;
No. Vis pale yellow; Nos. VI, VII, and
VIII bright yellow; Nos. IX and X pale
red; Nos. XI and XII bright red; Nos.
XIII, XIV, and XV gray; while No.
XVI exhibits a bluish tint. The finished
gold ware, before being put upon the
market, is subjected to a special treat-
ment, consisting either in the simple
pickling or in the so-called coloring,
which operation is conducted especially
with alloys of low degree of fineness, the
object being to give the layers a super-
ficial layer of pure gold.
The presence of silver considerably
modifies the color of gold, and the jewel-
er makes use of this property to obtain
alloys of various shades. The following
proportions are to be observed, viz.:
ALLOYS
67
Gold Silver Copper
Color of Gold per per per
1,000 1,000 1,000
I. Green 750 250 . . .
II. Dead leaves.. .. 700 300 ...
III. Sea green GOO 400 ...
IV. Pink 750 200 50
V. English yellow.. 750 125 125
VI. English white. .. 750 150 100
VII. Whiter 750 170 80
VIII. Less white 750 190 60
IX. Red 750 ... 250
Other colored gold alloys are the fol-
lowing:
X. Blue. — Fine gold, 75; iron, 25.
XI. Dark Gray. — Fine gold, 94;
iron, 6.
XII. Pale Gray. — Fine gold, 191;
iron, 9.
XIII. Cassel Yellow. — Fine gold, 75;
fine silver, 12A; rose copper, 12^.
The above figures are understood to
be by weight.
The gold solders, known in France
under the names of soudures au quart
(13 i carat), au tiers (12 carat), and au
deux (9 carai), are composed of 3, 2, or
1 part of gold respectively, with 1 part of
an alloy consisting of two-thirds silver and
one-third copper. Gold also forms with
aluminum a series of alloys of greatly vary-
ing coloration, the most curious of them,
composed of 22 parts of aluminum for 88
parts of gold, possessing a pretty purple
shade. But all these alloys, of a highly
crystalline base, are very brittle and can-
not be worked, for which reason their
handsome colorings have not yet been
capable of being utilized.
Enameling Alloys. — I. Transparent.
—This alloy should possess the property
of transmitting rays of light so as to give
the highest possible effect to the enamel.
The alloy of gold for transparent green
should be pale; a red or copper alloy
does not do for green enamel, the copper
has a tendency to darken the color and
thus take away a part of its brilliancy.
The following alloy for transparent
green possesses about the nearest print,
in color, to the enamel — which should
represent, as near as possible, the color
and brilliancy of the emerald — that can
be arrived at:
ozs. dwts. grs.
Fine gold 0 18 8
Fine silver 0 1 6
Fine copper 0 0 10
No borax must be used in the melting
of this alloy, it being of a more fusible
nature than the ordinary alloy, and will
not take so high a heat in enameling.
II. Fed Enamel. — The enamel which
forms this color being of a higher fusing
point, if proper care be not taken, the
gold will melt first, and the work become
ruined. In the preparation of red enam-
el, the coloring matter is usually an oxide
of gold, and this so raises the tempera-
ture at which it melts that, in order to
prevent any mishap, the gold to be enam-
eled on should be what is called a 22-
carat red, that is, it should contain a
preponderance of copper in the alloying
mixture so as to raise the fusing point of
the gold. The formula is:
ozs. dwts. grs.
Fine gold 0 18 8
Fine silver 0 0 10
Fine copper 0 1 6
Gold-leaf Alloys. — All gold made into
leaf is more or less alloyed. The gold
used by the goldbeater is alloyed ac-
cording to the variety of color required.
Fine gold is commonly supposed to be in-
capable of being reduced to thin leaves.
This, however, is not the case, although
its use for ordinary purposes is unde-
sirable on account of its greater cost. It
also adheres by contact of one leaf with
another, thus causing spoiled material
and wasted labor; but for work exposed
to the weather it is much preferable, as
it is more durable and does not tarnish
or change color.
The following is a list of the principal
classes of leaf recognized and ordinarily
prepared by beaters with the proportion
of alloy they contain:
Gold Silver Copper
grs. grs. grs.
I. Red gold... 456-460 ... 20-24
II. Pale red. .. 464 ... 16
III. Extra deep. 456 12 12
IV. Deep 444 24 12
V. Citron 440 30 10
VI. Yellow 408 72
VII. Pale yellow 384 96
VIII. Lemon.. .. 360 120
IX. Green or pale 312 168 ....
X. White 240 240 ....
Gold-Plate Alloys.— Gold, 92 parts;
copper, 8 parts.
II. — Gold, 84 parts; copper, 16 parts.
III. — Gold, 75 parts; copper, 25 parts.
IMITATION GOLD.
I. — One hundred parts, by weight, of
copper of the purest quality; 14 of zinc
or tin; 6 of magnesia; | of sal ammoniac,
limestone, and cream of tartar. The
copper is first melted, then the magnesia,
sal ammoniac, limestone, and cream of
tartar in powder are added separately
and gradually. The whole mass is kept
stirred for a half hour, the zinc or tin
being dropped in piece by piece, the stir-
68
ALLOYS
ring being kept up till they melt. Fi-
nally the crucible is covered and the mass
is kept in fusion 35 minutes and, the same
being removed, the metal is poured into
molds, and is then ready for use. The
alloy thus made is said to be fine-grained,
malleable, takes a high polish, and does
not easily oxidize.
II. — An invention, patented in Ger-
many, covers a metallic alloy, to take
the place of gold, which, even if exposed
for some time to the action of ammonia-
cal and acid vapors, does not oxidize or
lose its gold color. It can be rolled and
worked Tike gold and has the appearance
of genuine gold without containing the
slightest admixture of that metal. The
alloy consists of copper and antimony in
the approximate ratio of 100 to 6, and is
produced by adding to molten copper,
as soon as it has reached a certain degree
of heat, the said percentage of antimony.
When the antimony has likewise melted
and entered into intimate union with the
copper, some charcoal ashes, magne-
sium, and lime spar are added to the mass
when the latter is still in the crucible.
III. Aluminum Gold. — This alloy,
called Nuremberg gold, is used for mak-
ing cheap gold ware, and is excellent for
this purpose, as its color is exactly that of
pure gold, and does not change in the air.
Articles made of Nuremberg gold need
no gilding, and retain their color under
the hardest usage; even the fracture of
this alloy shows the pure gold color. The
composition is usually 90 parts of cop-
per, 2.5 of gold, and 7.5 of aluminum.
IV. — Imitation gold, capable of being
worked and drawn into wire, consists of
950 parts copper, 45 aluminum, and 2 to
5 of silver.
V. — Chrysochalk is similar in com-
position to Mannheim gold:
I II
Copper 90.5 58.68
Zinc 7.9 40.22
Lead 1.6 1.90
In color it resembles gold, but quickly
loses its beauty if exposed to the air, on
account of the oxidation of the copper.
It can, however, be kept bright for a long
time by a coating of colorless varnish,
which excludes the air and prevents
oxidation. Chrysochalk is used for
most of the ordinary imitations of gold.
Cheap watch chains and jewelry are
manufactured from it, and it is widely
used by the manufacturers of imitation
bronze ornaments.
Mannheim Gold or Similor. — Mann-
heim gold is composed of copper, zinc,
and tin, in proportions about as follows:
I II
Copper 83.7 89.8
Zinc 9.3 9.9
Tin 7.0 0.6
It has a fine yellow color, and was
formerly much used in making buttons
and pressed articles resembling gold.
Later alloys, however, surpass it in color,
and it has fallen somewhat into disuse.
One variety of Mannheim gold, so
called, contains 1.40 parts of brass
(composition 3 Cu2 1 Zn) to 10 of copper
and 0.1 of zinc.
Mosaic Gold. — This is an alloy com-
posed— with slight deviations — of 100
parts of copper and 50 to 55 of zinc. It
has a beautiful color, closely resembling
that of gold, and is distinguished by a
very fine grain, which makes it especially
suitable for the manufacture of castings
which are afterwards to be gilded. The
best method of obtaining a thoroughly
homogeneous mixture of the two metals
is first to put into the crucible one-half
of the zinc to be used, place the cover
upon it, and fuse the mixture under a
cover of borax at as low a temperature
as possible. Have ready the other half
of the zinc, cut into small pieces and
heated almost to melting, and when the
contents of the crucible are liquid throw
it in, a small portion at a time, stirring
constantly to effect as intimate a mixture
of the metals as possible.
Oreiide or Oroide (French Gold).— The
so-called French gold, when polished, so
closely resembles genuine gold in color
that it can scarcely be distinguished from
it. Besides its beautiful color, it has the
valuable properties of being very ductile
and tenacious, so that it can easily be
stamped into any desired shape; it also
takes a high polish. It is frequently
used for the manufacture of spoons,
forks, etc., but is unsuitable for this pur-
pose on account of the large amount of
copper contained in it, rendering it in-
jurious to health. The directions for
preparing this alloy vary greatly. The
products of some Paris factories show
the following composition:
I II III
Copper 90 80.5 86.21
Zinc 10 14.5 31.52
Tin 0.48
Iron 0.24
A special receipt for orei'de is the fol-
lowing:
IV. — Melt 100 parts of copper and
add, with constant stirring, 6 parts of
magnesia, 3.6 of sal ammoniac, 1.8 of
j lime, and 9 of crude tartar. Stir again
ALLOYS
thoroughly, and add 17 parts of granu-
lated zinc, and after mixing it with the
copper by vigorous stirring keep the
alloy liquid for one hour. Then care-
fully remove the scum and pour off the
alloy.
Pinchbeck. — This was first manufac-
tured in England. Its dark gold color
is the best imitation of gold alloyed with
copper. Being very ductile, it can easily
be rolled out into thin plates, which can
be given any desired shape by stamping.
It does not readily oxidize, and thus
fulfills all the requirements for making
cheap jewelry, which is its principal use.
Copper 88.8 93.6
Zinc 11.2 6.4
Or
Copper 2.1 1.28
Zinc 0.7
Brass 1.0 0.7
Palladium. Gold. — Alloys of gold, cop-
per, silver, and palladium have a brown-
ish-red color and are nearly as hard as iron.
They are sometimes (although rarely)
used for the bearings for the axles of the
wheels of fine watches, as they invite little
friction and do not rust in the air. The
composition used in the Swiss and Eng-
lish watch factories consists usually of
gold 18 parts, copper 13 parts, silver 11,
and palladium 6.
Talmi Gold. — The name of talmi gold
was first applied to articles of jewelry,
chains, earrings, bracelets, etc., brought
from Paris, and distinguished by beau-
tiful workmanship, a low price, and
great durability. Later, when this al-
loy had acquired a considerable reputa-
tion, articles were introduced under the
same name, but which were really made
of other metals, and which retained their
beautiful gold color only as long as they
were not used. The fine varieties of talmi
gold are manufactured from brass, cop-
per, or tombac, covered with a thin plate
of gold, combined with the base by roll-
ing, under strong pressure. The plates
are then rolled out by passing through
rollers, and the coating not only acquires
considerable density, but adheres so
closely to the base that the metal will
keep its beautiful appearance for years.
Of late, many articles of talmi gold
have been introduced whose gold coat-
ing is produced by electroplating, and
is in many cases so thin that hard
rubbing will bring through the color of
the base. Such articles, of course, are
not durable. In genuine talmi gold, the
coating, even though it may be thin, ad-
heres very closely to the base, for the rea-
son that the two metals are actually
welded by the rolling, and also because
alloyed gold is always used, which is
much harder than pure gold. The pure
gold of electroplating is very soft. The
composition of some varieties of talmi
gold are here given. It will be seen that
the content of gold varies greatly, and
the durability of the alloy will, of course,
correspond to this. The alloys I, II, III
are genuine Paris talmi gold; IV, V, and
VI are electroplated imitations; and
VII is an alloy of a wrong composition,
to which the gold does not adhere firmly:
I.
II.
III.
IV.
V.
VI.
VII.
j
1
Copper
89.9
90.8
90.0
90.7
88.2
87.5
83.1
93.5
84.5
86.0
Zinc
9.3
8.3
8.9
89.0 i
11.4
12.4 i
17.0 '
6.6 '
15.8
12.0
Tin Iron
Gold
1.3
0.9
0.9
0.5
0.3
0.05
1.1 0.3
Japanese Alloys. — In Japan some
specialties in metallic alloys are in use of
which the composition is as follows:
Shadke consists of copper with from 1 to
10 per cent of gold. Articles made from
this alloy are laid in a pickle of blue
vitriol, alum, and verdigris, until they
acquire a bluish-black color.
Gui-shi-bu-ichi is an alloy of copper
containing 30 to 50 per cent of silver. It
possesses a peculiar gray shade.
Mokume consists of several composi-
tions. Thus, about 30 gold foils (gen-
uine) are welded together with shadke,
copper, silver, and gui-shi-bu-ichi and
pierced. The pierced holes are, after
firmly hammering together the plates,
filled up with the above-named pickle.
The finest Japanese brass consists of
10 parts copper and 8 parts zinc, and is
called siachu. The bell metal kara kane
is composed of copper 10 parts, tin 10
parts, iron 0.5 part, and zinc 1.5 parts.
The copper is first fused, then tne re-
maining metals are added in rotation.
GERMAN SILVER OR ARGENTAN.
The composition of this alloy varies
considerably, but from the adjoined fig-
ures an average may be found, whicn
will represent, approximately, the normal
composition:
Copper 50 to 66 parts
Zinc 19 to 31 parts
Nickel 13 to 18 parts
The properties of the different kinds,
such as their color, ductility, fusibility,
70
ALLOYS
etc., vary with the proportions of the
single metals. For making spoons, forks,
cups, candlesticks, etc., the most suitable
proportions are 50 parts of copper, 25 of
zinc, and 25 of nickel. This metal has
a beautiful blue-white color, and does
not tarnish easily.
German silver is sometimes so brittle
that a spoon, if allowed to fall upon the
floor, will break; this, of course, indicates
faulty composition. But the following
table will snow how the character of the
alloy changes with the varying percent-
age of the metals composing it:
Copper
Zinc
Nickel
Quality
I.
8
3.5
4
Finest quality.
II.
8
3.5
6
Beautiful, but
refractory.
III.
8
6.5
3
Ordinary,
readily fus-
ible.
IV.
V.
52
59
26.0
30.0
22
11
First quality.
Second quality.
VI.
63
31.0
6
Third quality.
The following analyses give further
particulars in regard to different kinds
of German silver:
For sheet
Cop-
per
Zinc
Nickel
Lead
Iron
(French) ....
50.0
31.3
18.7
(French) ....
50.0
30.0
20.0
(French) ....
58.3
25.0
16.7
Vienna
50.0
25.0
25.0
Vienna
55.6
22.0
22.0
Vienna
60.0
20.0
20.0
Berlin
54.0
28.0
18.0
Berlin
55.5
29.1
17.5
English
63.34
17.01
19.13
.
.
English
62.40
22.15
15.05
.
. . .
English
62.63
26.05
10.85
. . .
. . .
English
57.40
25.
13.0
.
3.0
Chinese
26.3
36.8
36.8
Chinese
43.8
40.6
15.6
Chinese
45.7
36.9
17.9
Chinese
40.4
25.4
31.6
2.6
Castings J48.5
24.3
24.3
2.9
. .
Castings
54.5
21.8
21.8
1.9
.
Castings
58.3
19.4
19.4
2.9
'. '. '.
Castings
Castings
57.8
57.
27.1
20.0
14.3
20.0
0.8
3.0
In some kinds of German silver are
found varying quantities of iron, man-
ganese, tin, and very frequently lead,
added for the purpose of changing the
properties of the alloy or cheapening the
cost of production. But all these metals
have a detrimental rather than a bene-
ficial effect upon the general character of
the alloy, and especially lessen its power
of resistance to the action of dilute acids,
one of its most valuable properties.
Lead makes it more fusible; tin acts
somewhat as in bronze, making it denser
and more resonant, and enabling it to
take a higher polish. With iron or man-
ganese the alloy is whiter, but it be-
comes at the same time more refractory
a-nd its tendency toward brittleness is
increased.
SUBSTITUTES FOR GERMAN SIL-
VER.
There are many formulas for alloys
which claim to be substitutes for Ger-
man silver; but no one of them has yet
become an article of general commerce.
It will be sufficient to note these ma-
terials briefly, giving the composition of
the most important.
Nickel Bronze. — This is prepared by
fusing together very highly purified
nickel (99.5 per cent) with copper, tin,
arid zinc. A bronze is produced contain-
ing 20 per cent of nickel, light-colored
and very hard.
Bismuth Bronze. —
I II III IV
Copper 25.0 45.0 69.0 47.0
Nickel 24.0 32.5 10.0 30.9
Antimony 50.0
Bismuth 1.0 1.0 1.0 0.1
Tin 16.0 15.0 1.0
Zinc 21.5 20.0 21.0
Aluminum 1.0 ...
I is hard and very lustrous, suitable
for lamp reflectors and axle bearings; II
is hard, resonant, and not affected by
sea water, for parts of ships, pipes, tele-
graph wires, and piano strings; III and
IV are for cups, spoons, etc.
Manganese Argentan. —
Copper 52 to 50 parts
Nickel 17 to 15 "
Zinc 5 to 10 • "
Manganese 1 to 5 "
Copper, with 15 per
cent phosphorus . 3 to 5 **
Readily cast for objects of art.
Aphtite.—
Iron 66 parts
Nickel 23 "
Tungsten 4 **
Copper 5
Arguzoid. —
Copper 55 . 78 parts
Zinc 23.198 "
Nickel 13.406 "
Tin 4.035 "
Lead 3.544 "
Silver white, almost ductile, suited for
artistic purposes.
ALLOYS
71
Ferro - Argentan. —
Copper 70 . 0 parts
Nickel 20.0 «
Zinc 5.5 "
Cadmium 4.5 "
Resembles silver; worked like German
silver.
Silver Bronze. — Manganese, 18 per
cent; aluminum, 1.2 per cent; silicium,
5 per cent; zinc, 13 per cent; copper, 67.5
per cent. The electric resistance of sil-
ver bronze is greater than that of Ger-
man silver, hence it ought to be highly
suitable for rheostats.
Instrument Alloys. — The following
are suitable for physical and optical in-
struments, metallic mirrors, telescopes,
etc.:
I. — Copper, 62 parts; tin, 33 parts;
lead, 5 parts.
II. — Copper, 80; antimony, 11 ; lead, 9.
III.— Copper, 10; tin, 10; antimony,
10; lead, 4C.
IV.— Copper, 30; tin, 50; silver, 2;
arsenic, 1.
V.— Copper, 66; tin, 33.
VI.— Copper, 64; tin, 26.
VII.— Steel, 90'; nickel, 10.
VIII.— Platinum, 60; copper, 40.
IX.— Platinum, 45; steel, 55.
X. — Platinum, 55; iron, 45.
XI.— Platinum, 15; steel, 85.
XII. — Platinum, 20; copper, 79; ar-
senic, 1.
XIII.— Platinum, 62; iron, 28; gold,
10.
XIV.— Gold, 48; zinc, 52.
XV.— Steel, 50; rhodium, 50.
XVI.— Platinum, 12; iridium, 88.
XVII.— Copper, 89.5; tin, 8,5; zinc, 2.
LEAD ALLOYS.
The following alloys, principally lead,
are used for various purposes:
Bibra Alloy.— This contains 8 parts of
bismuth, 9 of tin, and 38 to 40 of lead.
Metallic Coffins.— Tin, 40 parts; lead,
45 parts; copper, 15 parts.
Plates for Engraving.— I.— Lead, 84
parts; antimony, 16 parts.
II. — Lead, 86 parts; antimony, 14
parts.
III. — Lead, 87 parts; antimony, 12
parts; copper, 1 part.
IV.— Lead, 81 parts; antimony, 14
parts; tin, 5 parts.
V.— Lead, 73 parts; antimony, 17
parts; zinc, 10 parts.
VI.— Tin, 53 parts; lead, 43 parts;
antimony, 4 parts.
Hard lead is made of lead, 84 parts;
antimony, 16 parts.
Sheet Metal Alloy.—
Tin 35 parts
Lead 250 parts
Copper 2.5 parts
Zinc 0.5 part
This alloy has a fine white color, and
can be readily rolled into thin sheets.
For that reason it is well adapted for
lining tea chests and for the production
of tobacco and chocolate wrappers. The
copper and zinc are used in the form
of fine shavings. The alloy should be
immediately cast into thin plates, which
can then be passed through rolls.
MAGNETIC ALLOYS.
Alloys which can be magnetized most
strongly are composed of copper, man-
ganese, and aluminum, the quantities of
manganese and aluminum being pro-
portional to their atomic weights (55.0 to
27.1, or about 2 to 1). The maximum
magnetization increases rapidly with
increase of manganese, but alloys con-
taining much manganese are exceedingly
brittle and cannot be wrought. The
highest practicable proportion of man-
ganese at present is 24 per cent.
These magnetic alloys were studied by
Hensler, Haupt, and Starck, and Gum-
lich has recently examined them at the
Physikalisch - technische Reichsanstalt,
with very remarkable and interesting re-
sults.
The two alloys examined were com-
posed as follows:
Alloy I. — Copper, 61.5 per cent; man-
ganese, 23.5 per cent; aluminum, 15 per
cent; lead, 0.1 per cent, with traces of iron
and silicon.
Alloy II. — Copper, 67.7 per cent;
manganese, 20.5 per cent; aluminum,
10.7 per cent; lead, 1.2 per cent, with
traces of iron and silicon.
Alloy II could be worked without dif-
ficulty, but alloy I was so brittle that it
broke under the hammer. A bar 7 inches
long and I inch thick was obtained by
grinding. This broke in two during the
measurements, but, fortunately, without
invalidating them. Such a material is
evidently unsuited to practical uses.
The behavior of magnetic alloys at
high temperatures is very peculiar. Al-
loy I is indifferent to temperature chan-
ges, which scarcely affect its magnetic
properties, but the behavior of alloy II is
very different. Prolonged heating to 230°
F. produces a great increase in its capa-
bility of magnetization, which, after 544
hours' heating, rises from 1.9 to 3.2 kilo-
ALLOYS
fauss, approaching the strength of alloy
. But when alloy II is heated to 329°
F., its capability of magnetization fails
again and the material suffers permanent
injury, which can be partly, but not
wholly, cured by prolonged heating.
Another singular phenomenon was
exhibited by both of these alloys. When
a bar of iron is magnetized by an electric
current, it acquires its full magnetic
strength almost instantaneously on the
closure of the circuit. The magnetic
alloys, on the contrary, do not attain
their full magnetization for several min-
utes. In some of the experiments a
gradual increase was observed even after
the current had been flowing five minutes.
In magnetic strength alloy I proved
far superior to alloy II, which con-
tained smaller proportions of manga-
nese and aluminum. Alloy I showed
magnetic strengths up to 4.5 kilogauss,
while the highest magnetization ob-
tained with alloy II was only 1.9 kilo-
gauss. But even alloy II may be called
strongly magnetic, for its maximum mag-
netization is about one-tenth that of good
wrought iron (18 to 20 kilogauss), or
one-sixth that of cast iron (10 to 12
kilogauss). Alloy I is nearly equal in
magnetic properties to nickel, which can
be magnetized up to about 5 kilogauss.
MANGANESE ALLOYS :
Manganese bronze is a bronze de-
prived of its oxide by an admixture of
manganese. The manganese is used as
copper manganese containing 10 to 30
per cent manganese and added to the
bronze to the amount of 0.5 to 2 per cent.
Manganese Copper. — The alloys of
copper with manganese have a beauti-
ful silvery color, considerable ductility,
great hardness and tenacity, and 'are
more readily fusible than ordinary
bronze. A special characteristic is that
they exactly fill out the molds, with-
out the formation of blowholes, and pre-
sent no difficulties in casting.
Cupromanganese is suitable for many
purposes for which nothing else but
bronze can advantageously be used, and
the cost of its production is no greater
than that of genuine bronze. In pre-
paring the alloy, the copper is used in the
form of fine grains, obtained by pouring
melted copper into cold water. These
copper grains are mixed with the dry
oxide of manganese, and the mixture put
into a crucible holding about 66 pounds.
Enough space must be left in the cruci-
ble to allow a thick cover of charcoal,
as the manganese oxidizes easily. The
crucible is placed in a well-drawing
wind furnace and subjected to a strong
white heat. The oxide of manganese is
completely reduced to manganese, which
at once combines with the copper to form
an alloy. In order to prevent, as far as
possible, the access of air to the fusing
mass, it is advisable to cover the crucible
with a lid which has an aperture in the
center for the escape of the carbonic
oxide formed during the reduction.
When the reduction is complete and
the metals fused, the lid is removed and
the contents of the crucible stirred with
an iron rod, in order to make the alloy
as homogeneous as possible. By re-
peated remelting of the cupromanganese
a considerable quantity of the man-
ganese is reconverted into oxide; it is,
therefore, advisable to make the casts
directly from the crucible. When poured
out, the alloy rapidly solidifies, and re-
sembles in appearance good German
silver. Another reason for avoiding re-
melting is that the crucible is strongly
attacked by the cupromanganese, and
can be used but a few times.
The best kinds of cupromanganese
contain between 10 and 30 per cent of
manganese. They have a beautiful
white color, are hard, tougher than cop-
per, and can be worked under the ham-
mer or with rolls. Some varieties of
cupromanganese which are especially
valuable for technical purposes are given
below:
I II III IV
Copper 75 60 65 60
Manganese. 25 25 20 20
Zinc 15 5 ..
Tin 10
Nickel 10 10
Manganin. — This is an alloy of copper,
nickel, and manganese for electric re-
sistances.
MIRROR ALLOYS :
Amalgams for Mirrors. — I. — Tin, 70
parts; mercury, 30 parts.
II. — For curved mirrors. Tin, 1 part;
lead, 1 part; bismuth, 1 part; mercury, 9
parts.
III.— For glass balls. Tin, 80 parts;
mercury, 20 parts.
IV. — Metallic cement. Copper, 30
parts; mercury, 70 parts.
V. — Mirror metal. — Copper, 100 parts;
tin, 50 parts; Chinese copper, 8 parts;
lead, 1 part; antimony, I part.
Reflector Metals. — I. — (Cooper's.)
Copper, 35 parts; platinum, 6; zinc, 2;
tin, 16.5; arsenic, 1. On account of the
hardness of this alloy, it takes a very
high polish; it is impervious to the effects
of the weather, and is therefore remark-
ALLOYS
ably well adapted to the manufacture
of mirrors for fine optical instruments.
II. — (Duppler's.) Zinc, 20 parts; sil-
ver, 80 parts.
III.— Copper, 66.22 parts; tin, 33.11
parts; arsenic, 0.67 part.
IV. — Copper, 64 parts; tin, 32 parts;
arsenic, 4 parts.
V.— Copper, 82.18 parts; lead, 9.22
parts; antimony, 8.60 parts.
VI. — (Little's.) Copper, 69.01 parts;
tin, 30.82 parts; zinc, 2.44 parts; arsenic,
1.83 parts.
Speculum Metal. — Alloys consisting
of 2 parts of copper and 1 of tin can
be very brilliantly polished, and will
serve for mirrors. Good speculum metal
should have a very fine-grained fracture,
should be white and very hard, the high-
est degree of polish depending upon these
qualities. A composition to meet these
requirements must contain at least 35 to
36 per cent of copper. Attempts have
frequently been made to increase the
hardness of speculum metal by additions
of nickel, antimony, and arsenic. With
the exception of nickel, these substances
have the effect of causing the metal to
lose its high luster easily, any consid-
erable quantity of arsenic in particular
having this effect.
The real speculum metal seems to be
a combination of the formula Cu4Sn,
composed of copper 68.21 per cent, tin
31.7. An alloy of this nature is some-
times separated from ordnance bronze
by incorrect treatment, causing the so-
called tin spots; but this has not the pure
white color which distinguishes the spec-
ulum metal containing 31.5 per cent of tin.
By increasing the percentage of copper
the color gradually shades into yellow;
with a larger amount of tin into blue. It
is dangerous to increase the tin too much,
as this changes the other properties of the
alloy, and it becomes too brittle to be
worked. Below is a table showing differ-
ent compositions of speculum metal. The
standard alloy is undoubtedly the best.
Arse- Sil-
Copper Tin Zinc nic ver
Standard
alloy 68.21 31.7
Otto's
alloy 68.5 31.5
Richard-
son's alloy 65.3 30.0 0.7 2. 2.
Sollit's al-
loy 64.6 31.3 4.1 Nickel
Chinese
speculum
metal. .. 80.83 . ... 8.5 Anti-
OldRoman 63.39 19.05
mony
17.29 Lead
PALLADIUM ALLOYS.
I. — An alloy of palladium 24 parts,
gold 80, is white, hard as steel, unchange-
able in the air, and can, like the other
alloys of palladium, be used for dental
purposes.
II.— Palladium 6 parts, gold 18, sil-
ver 11, and copper 13, gives a reddish-
brown, hard, and very fine-grained
alloy, suitable for the bearings of pivots
in clock works.
The alloys of most of the other plati-
num metals, so called, are little used on
account of their rarity and costliness.
Iridium and rhodium give great hardness
to steel, but the commercial rhodium
and iridium steel, so called, frequently
contains not a trace of either. The alloy
of iridium with osmium has great hard-
ness and resistance and is recommended
for pivots, fine instruments, and points
of ship compasses.
Palladium Silver. — This alloy, com-
posed of 9 parts of palladium and 1 of
silver, is used almost exclusively for den-
tal purposes, and is well suited to the
manufacture of artificial teeth, as it does
not oxidize. An alloy even more fre-
quently used than this consists of plati-
num 10 parts, palladium 8, and gold 6.
Palladium Bearing Metal. — This alloy
is extremely hard, and is used instead of
jewel bearings in watches. It is com-
posed of palladium 24 parts, gold 72,
silver 44, copper 92.
PLATINUM ALLOYS.
Platinum has usually been alloyed
with silver in goldsmith's work, 2 parts
silver to 1 of platinum being taken to
form the favorite "platinum silver."
The object has been to produce an alloy
having a white appearance, which can be
polished, and at the same time has a
low melting point. In addition to this
Elatinum alloy the following are well
nown:
I. — A mixture of 7 parts platinum with
3 parts iridium. This gives to platinum
the hardness of steel, which can be still
further increased by taking 4 parts of
iridium.
II. — An alloy of 9 parts platinum and
1 part iridium is used by the French in
the manufacture of measuring instru-
ments of great resisting power.
Compounds of copper, nickel, cad-
mium, and tungsten are also used in the
construction of parts of watches; the lat-
ter acquire considerable hardness with-
out becoming magnetic or rusting like
steel.
III. — For this purpose a compound of
ALLOYS
62.75 parts platinum, 18 parts copper,
1.25 parts cadmium, and 18 parts nickel
is much recommended.
IV. — Very ductile platinum -copper
alloys have also been made, e. g., the so-
called Cooper gold, consisting of 3 parts
platinum and 13 parts copper, which is
almost equal to 18-carat gold in regard
to color, finish, and ductility. If 4 per
cent of platinum is taken, these latter
alloys acquire a rose-red color, while a
golden-yellow color can be produced by
further adding from 1 to 2 per cent (in
all 5 to 6 per cent) of platinum. The
last-named alloy is extensively used for
ornaments, likewise alloy V.
V. — ^?en parts platinum, 60 parts
nickel, and 220 parts brass, or 2 parts
platinum, 1 part nickel and silver re-
spectively, 2 parts brass, and 5 parts
copper; this also gives a golden-yellow
color.
VI. — Fqr table utensils a favorite alloy
is composed of 1 part platinum, 100 parts
nickel, and 10 parts tin. Articles made
of the latter alloy are impervious to at-
mospheric action and keep their polish
for a long time. Pure white platinum
alloys have for some time been used in
dental work, and they have also proved
serviceable for jewelry.
VII. — A mixture of 30 parts platinum,
10 parts gold, and 3 parts silver, or 7
parts platinum, 2 parts gold, and 3 parts
silver.
VIII. — For enameled articles: Plati-
num, 35 parts; silver, 65 parts. First
fuse the silver, then add the platinum
in the spongy form. A good solder for
this is platinum 80 parts, copper 20
parts.
IX. — For pens: Platinum, 4 parts;
silver, 3 parts; copper, 1 part.
Platinum Gold. — Small quantities of
platinum change the characteristics of
gold in many respects. With a small
percentage the color is noticeably lighter
than that of pure gold, and the alloys are
extremely elastic; alloys containing more
than 20 per cent of platinum, however,
almost entirely lose their elasticity. The
melting point of the platinum-gold alloy
is high, and alloys containing 70 per cent
of platinum can be fused only in the
flame of oxyhydrogen gas, like platinum
itself. Alloys with a smaller percentage
of platinum can be prepared in furnaces,
but require the strongest white heat.
In order to avoid the chance of an im-
perfect alloy from too low a temperature,
it is always safer to fuse them with the
oxyhydrogen flame. The alloys of plat-
inum and gold have a somewhat lim-
ited application. Those which contain
from 5 to 10 per cent of platinum are
used for sheet and wire in the manu-
facture of artificial teeth.
Platinum-Gold Alloys for Dental Pur-
poses.—
I II III
Platinum 6 14 10
Gold 246
Silver 1 6
Palladium .... 8
Platinum Silver. — An addition of plat-
inum to silver makes it harder, but also
more brittle, and changes the white color
to gray. An alloy which contains only
a very small percentage of platinum is
noticeably darker in color than pure
silver. Such alloys are prepared under
the name of platine au titre, containing
between 17 and 35 per cent of plati-
num. They are almost exclusively used
for dental purposes.
Imitation Platinum. — I. — Brass, 100
parts; zinc, 65 parts.
II. — Brass, 120 parts; zinc, 75 parts.
III. — Copper, 5 parts; nickel, 4 parts;
zinc, li parts; antimony, 1 part; lead, 1
part; iron, 1 part; tin, 1 part.
Cooper's Pen Metal.— This alloy is
especially well adapted to the manufac-
ture of pens, on account of its great hard-
ness, elasticity, and power of resistance
to atmospheric influences, and would
certainly have superseded steel if it were
possible to produce it more cheaply than
is the case. The compositions most fre-
quently used for pen metal are copper
1 part, platinum 4, and silver 3; or,
copper 21, platinum 50, and silver 36.
Pens have been manufactured, con-
sisting of several sections, each of a dif-
ferent alloy, suited to the special purpose
of the part. Thus, for instance, the
sides of the pen are made of the elastic
composition just described; the upper
part is of an alloy of silver and platinum;
and the point is made either of minute cut
rubies or of an extremely hard alloy of
osmium and iridium, joined to the body
of the pen by melting in the flame of
the oxyhydrogen blowpipe. The price of
such pens, made of expensive materials
and at the cost of great labor, is of course
exceedingly high, but their excellent
qualities repay the extra expense. They
are not in the least affected by any kind
of ink, are most durable, and can be used
constantly for years without showing any
signs of wear.
The great hardness and resistance to
the atmosphere of Cooper's alloys make
them very suitable for manufacturing;
ALLOYS
mathematical instruments where great
precision is required. It can scarcely
be calculated how long a chronometer,
for instance, whose wheels are construct-
ed of this alloy, will run before showing
any irregularities due to wear. In the
construction of such instruments, the
price of the material is not to be taken
into account, since the cost of the labor
in their manufacture so far exceeds this.
PEWTER.
This is an alloy of tin and lead only,
or of tin with antimony and copper.
The first is properly called pewter.
Three varieties are known in trade:
I (Plate Pewter).— From tin, 79 per
cent; antimony, 7 per cent; bismuth and
copper, of each 2 per cent; fused to-
gether. Used to make plates, teapots,
etc. Takes a fine polish.
II (Triple Pewter).— From tin, 79
per cent; antimony, 15 per cent; lead,
6 per cent; as the last. Used for msxior
articles, syringes, toys, etc.
III (Ley Pewter). — From tin, 80
per cent; lead, 20 per cent. Used for
measures, inkstands, etc.
According to the report of a P^rench
commission, pewter containing more
than 18 parts of lead to 82 parts of tin is
unsafe for measures for wine and similar
liquors, and, indeed, for any other uten-
sils exposed to contact with food or
beverages. The legal specific gravity
of pewter in France is 7.764; if it be
greater, it contains an excess of lead,
and is liable to prove poisonous. The
proportions of these metals may be ap-
proximately determined from the specific
gravity; but correctly only by an assay
for the purpose.
SILVER ALLOYS :
Aluminum Silver. — Aluminum and
silver form beautiful white alloys which
are considerably harder than pure alu-
minum, and take a very high polish. They
have the advantage over copper alloys
of being unchanged by exposure to the
air, and of retaining their white color.
The properties of aluminum and silver
alloys vary considerably according to
the percentage of aluminum.
I. — An alloy of 100 parts of aluminum
and 5 parts of silver is very similar to
pure aluminum, but is harder and takes
a finer polish.
II. — One hundred and sixty-nine parts
of aluminum and 5 of silver make an
elastic alloy, recommended for watch
springs and dessert knives.
III. — An alloy of equal parts of silver
and aluminum is as hard as bronze.
IV. — Five parts of aluminum and 1
part of silver make an alloy that is eas-
ily worked.
V. — Also aluminum, 3 parts, and sil-
ver, 1 part.
VI. Tiers -Argent. —This alloy is pre-
pared chiefly in Paris, and used for the
manufacture of various utensils. As in-
dicated by its name (one-third silver),
it consists of 33.33 parts of silver and
66.66 parts of aluminum. Its advan-
tages over silver consist in its lower price
and greater hardness; it can also be
stamped and engraved more easily than
the alloys of copper and silver.
VII. — This is a hard alloy which has
been found very useful for the operating
levers of certain machines, such as the
spacing lever of a typewriter. The metal
now generally used for this purpose by
the various typewriter companies is "alu-
minum silver," or "silver metal." The
proportions are given as follows:
Copper 57 . 00
Nickel 20 . 00
Zinc.. 20.00
Aluminum 3.00
This alloy when used on typewriting
machines is nickel-plated for the sake of
the first appearance, but so far as corro-
sion is concerned, nickeling is unneces-
sary. The alloy is stiff and strong and
cannot be bent to any extent without
breaking, especially if the percentage of
aluminum is increased to 3.5 per cent;
it casts free from pinholes and blow»
holes; the liquid metal completely fills
the mold, giving sharp, clean castings,
true to pattern; its cost is not greater
than brass; its color is silver white,
and its hardness makes it susceptible to
a high polish.
Arsenic. — Alloys which contain small
quantities of arsenic are very ductile,
have a beautiful white color, and were
formerly used in England in the man-
ufacture of tableware. They are not,
however, suitable for this purpose, on
account of the poisonous character of
the arsenic. They are composed usually
of 49 parts of silver, 49 of copper, and 2
of arsenic.
China Silver. — Copper, 65.24 per cent;
tin, 19.52 per cent; nickel, 13.00 per cent;
silver, 2.05 per cent.
Copper -Silver. — When silver is alloyed
with copper only one proportion is known
which will give a uniform casting. The
proportion is 72 per cent silver to 28 per
cent copper. With more silver than 72
per cent the center of a cast bar will be
ALLOYS
richer than the outside, which chills
first; while with a less percentage than
72 per cent the center of the bar will be
poorer and the outside richer than the
average. This characteristic of silver-
copper alloys is known to metallurgists
as "segregation."
When nickel is added to the silver and
copper, several good alloys may be
formed, as the following French com-
positions:
I II III
Silver 33 40 20
Copper. . . . 37-42 30-40 45-55
Nickel 25-30 20-30 25-35
The whitening of alloys of silver and
copper is best accomplished by anneal-
ing the alloy until it turns black on the
surface. Cool in a mixture of 20 parts, by
weight, of concentrated sulphuric acid to
1,000 parts of distilled water and leave
therein for some time. In place of the
sulphuric acid, 40 parts of potassium
bisulphate may be used per 1,000 parts
of liquid. Repeat the process if neces-
sary.
Copper, Silver, and Cadmium Alloys.
— Cadmium added to silver alloys gives
great flexibility and ductility, without
affecting the white color; these proper-
ties are valuable in the manufacture of
silver-plated ware and wire. The pro-
portions of the metals vary in these al-
loys. Some of the most important vari-
eties are given below.
Silver Copper Cadmium
1 980 15 5
II 950 15 35
III 900 18 82
IV 860 20 180
V 666 25 309
VI 667 50 284
VII 500 50 450
In preparing these alloys, the great
volatility of cadmium must be taken
into account. It is customary to pre-
pare first the alloy of silver and copper,
and add the cadmium, which, as in the
case of the alloys of silver and zinc, must
be wrapped in paper. After putting it
in, the mass is quickly stirred, and the
alloy poured immediately into the molds.
This is the surest way to prevent the
volatilization of the cadmium.
Silver, Copper, Nickel, and Zinc Alloys.
— These alloys, from the metals con-
tained in them, may be characterized as
argentan or German silver with a cer-
tain percentage of silver. They have
been used for making small coins, as in
the older coins of Switzerland. Being
quite hard, they have the advantage of
wearing well, but soon lose their beau-
tiful white color and take on a disagree-
able shade of yellow, like poor brass.
The silver contained in them can be
regained only by a laborious process,
which is a great drawback to their use
in coinage. The composition of the
Swiss fractional coins is as follows:
20 cen- 10 cen- 5 cen-
times times times
Silver 15 10 5
Copper 50 55 , 60
Nickel.... 25 25 25
Zinc 10 10 10
Mousset's Alloy.— Copper, 59.06; sil-
ver, 27.56; zinc, 9.57; nickel, 3.42. This
alloy is yellowish with a reddish tinge,
but white on the fractured surface. It
ranks next after Argent- Ruolz, which
also contains sometimes certain quanti-
ties of zinc, and in this case may be
classed together with the alloy just de-
scribed. The following alloys can be
rolled into sheet or drawn into wire:
Silver 33.3
Copper 41.8
Nickel 8.6
Zinc.. . 16.3
II
34
42
8
16
III
40.0
44.6
4.6
10.8
Japanese (Gray) Silver. — An alloy is
prepared in Japan which consists of
equal parts of copper and silver, and
which is given a beautiful gray color by
boiling in a solution of alum, to which
copper sulphate and verdigris are added.
The so-called "mokum," also a Japanese
alloy, is prepared by placing thin plates
of gold, silver, copper, and the alloy just
described over each other and stretch-
ing them under the hammer. The cross
sections of the thin plates obtained in
this way show the colors of the different
metals, which give them a peculiar
striped appearance. Mokum is prin-
cipally used for decorations upon gold
and silver articles.
Silver-Zinc. — Silver and zinc have
great affinity for each other, and alloys
of these two metals are therefore easily
made. The required quantity of zinc,
wrapped in paper, is thrown into the
melted and strongly heated silver, the
mass is thoroughly stirred with an iron
rod, and at once poured out into molds.
Alloys of silver and zinc can be obtained
which are both ductile and flexible. An
alloy consisting of 2 parts of zinc and 1
of silver closely resembles silver in color,
and is quite ductile. With a larger pro-
portion of zinc the alloy becomes brittle.
In preparing the alloy, a somewhat larger
quantity of zinc must be taken than the
ALLOYS
77
finished alloy is intended to contain, as a
small amount always volatilizes.
Imitation Silver Alloys. — There are a
number of alloys, composed of different
metals, which resemble silver, and may
be briefly mentioned here.
I. — Warne's metal is composed of tin
10 parts, bismuth 7, and cobalt 3. It
is white, fine-grained, but quite difficult
to fuse.
II. — Tonca's metal contains coppei 5
parts, nickel 4, tin 1, lead 1, iron 1,
zinc 1, antimony 1. It is hard, difficult
to fuse, not very ductile, and cannot be
recommended.
III. — Trabuk metal contains tin 87.5,
nickel 5.5, antimony 5, bismuth 5.
IV. — Tourun-Leonard's metal is com-
posed of 500 parts of tin and 64 of bell
metal.
V. — Silveroid is an alloy of copper,
nickel, tin, zinc, and lead.
VI.— Minargent. Copper, 100 parts;
nickel, 70 parts; tungsten, 5 parts; alu-
minum, 1 part.
VII. — Nickel, 23 parts; aluminum,
5 parts; copper, 5 parts; iron, 65 parts;
tungsten, 4 parts.
VIII.— Argasoid. Tin, 4.035; lead,
3.544; copper, 55.780; nickel, 13.406;
zinc, 23.198; iron, trace.
SOLDERS :
See Solders.
STEEL ALLOYS:
See also Steel.
For Locomotive Cylinders. — This mix-
ture consists of 20 per cent steel castings,
old steel, springs, etc.; 20 per cent No. 2
coke iron, and 60 per cent scrap. From
this it is stated a good solid metal can be
obtained, the castings being free from
honeycombing, and finishing better than
the ordinary cast-iron mixture, over which
it has the advantage of 24 per cent great-
er strength. Its constituents are: Sili-
con, 1.51; manganese, 0.33; phosphorus,
0.65; sulphur, 0.068; combined carbon,
0.62; graphite, 2.45.
Nickel steel is composed of nickel 36
per cent, steel 64 per cent.
Tungsten steel is crucible steel with
5 to 12 per cent tungsten.
STEREOTYPE METAL.
> Lead 2 parts
Tin 3 parts
Bismuth 5 parts
The melting point of this alloy is 196°
F. The alloy is rather costly because
of the amount of bismuth which it
contains. The following mixtures are
cheaper:
Tin ........
Lead .......
Bismuth ____
Antimony
I II III
131
1 5 1.5
283
IV
2
2
5
1
TIN ALLOYS:
Alloys for Dentists' Molds and Dies.
—I. — Very hard. Tin, 16 parts; anti-
mony, 1 part; zinc, 1 part.
II.— Softer than the former. Tin, 8
parts; zinc, 1 part; antimony, 1 part.
III. — Very hard. Tin, 12 parts; an-
timony, 2 parts; copper, 1 part.
Cadmium Alloy, about the Hardness
of Zinc. — Tin, 10 parts; antimony, 1 part;
cadmium, 1 part.
Tin-Lead. — Tin is one of those metals
which is not at all susceptible to the
action of acids, while lead, on the other
hand, is very easily attacked by them.
In such alloys, consequently, used for
cooking utensils, the amount of lead
must be limited, and should properly not
exceed 10 or 15 per cent; but cases have
been known in which the so-called tin con-
tained a third part, by weight, of lead.
Alloys containing from 10 to 15 per
cent of lead have a beautiful white color,
are considerably harder than pure tin,
and much cheaper. Many alloys of tin
and lead are very lustrous, and are used
for stage jewelry and mirrors for reflect-
ing the light of lamps, etc. An especially
brilliant alloy is called "Fahlun bril-
liants." It is used for stage jewelry, and
consists of 29 parts of tin and 19 of lead.
It is poured into molds faceted in the
same way as diamonds, and when seen
by artificial light, the effect is that of dia-
monds. Other alloys of tin and lead are
employed in the manufacture of toys.
These must fill the molds well, and
must also be cheap, and therefore as
much as 50 per cent of lead is used.
Toys can also be made from type metal,
which is even cheaper than the alloys
of tin and lead, but has the disadvantage
of readily breaking if the articles are
sharply bent. The alloys of tin and
lead give very good castings, if sharp iron
or brass molds are used.
Lead ............... 19 parts
Tin ................ 29 parts
This alloy is very bright and possesses
a permanent sheen. It is well adapted
for the making of artificial gems for
stage use. It is customary in carrying
out the process to start with two parts of
tin and one part of lead. Tin is added
until a sample drop which is allowed to
fall upon an iron plate forms a mirror.
The artificial gems are produced by
78
ALLOYS
dipping into the molten alloy pieces of
glass cut to the proper shape. The tin
coating of metal which adheres to the
glass cools rapidly and adheres tena-
ciously. Outwardly these artificial gems
appear rough and gray, but inwardly they
are highly reflective and quite deceptive
when seen in artificial light.
If the reflective surfaces be coated
with red, blue, or green aniline, various
colored effects can be obtained. In-
stead of fragile glass the gems may be
produced by means of well-polished
pieces of steel or bronze.
Other Tin-Lead Alloys. — Percentage
of lead and specific gravity.
P.O. S.G. P.O. S. G.
0 7.290 28 8.105
1 7.316 29 8.137
2 7.342 30 8.169
3 7.369 31 8.202
4 7.396 32 8.235
5 7.423 33 8.268
6 7.450 34 8.302
7 7.477 35 8.336
8 7.505 36 8.379
9 7.533 37 8.405
10 7.562 38 8.440
11 7.590 39 8.476
12 7.619 40 8.512
13 7.648 41 8.548
14 7.677 42 8.584
15 7.706 43 8.621
16 7.735 44 8.658
17 7.764 45 8.695
18 7.794 46 8.732
19 7.824 47 8.770
20 7.854 48 8.808
21 7.885 49 8.846
22 7.916 50 8.884
23 7.947 60 9.299
24 7.978 70 9.736
25 8.009 80 10.225
26 8.041 90 10.767
27 8.073 100 11.370
Tin Statuettes, Buttons, etc.—
I.— Tin 4 parts
Lead 3 parts
This is a very soft solder which sharp-
ly reproduces all details.
Another easily fusible alloy but some-
what harder, is the following:
II.— Tin 8 parts
Lead 6 parts
Antimony 0.5 part
Miscellaneous Tin Alloys. — I. — Alger
Metal. — Tin, 90 parts; antimony, 10
parts. This alloy is suitable as a protector.
II. Argentine Metal. — Tin, 85.5 per cent;
antimony, 14.5 per cent.
III. — Ashberry metal is composed of
78 to 82 parts of tin, 16 to 20 of antimony,
2 to 3 of copper.
IV. Quen's Metal.— Tin, 9 parts; lead,
1 part; antimony, 1 part; bismuth, 1 part.
Type Metal. — An alloy which is to
serve for type metal must be readily
cast, fill out the molds sharply, and
be as hard as possible. It is difficult to
satisfy all these requirements, but an
alloy of antimony and lead answers the
purpose best. At the present day there
are a great many formulas for type
metal in which other metals besides
lead and antimony are used, either to
make the alloy more readily fusible, as
in the case of additions of bismuth, or
to give it greater power of resistance,
the latter being of especial importance
for types that are subjected to constant
use. Copper and iron have been rec-
ommended for this purpose, but the
fusibility of the alloys is greatly im-
paired by these, and the manufacture of
the types is consequently more difficult
than with an alloy of lead and antimony
alone. In the following table some al-
loys suitable for casting type are given:
T_OJ Anti- Cop- Bis- y. rr.- Nick-
Lead mony per muth Zmc Tm el
I 3 1 .. ..
II 5 1
III 10 1
IV 10 2 .. 1
V 70 18 2 .. .. 10 ..
VI 60 20 .... . . 20
VII 55 25 20 ..
VIII 55 30 15 ..
IX 100 30 8 2 .. 20 8
X 6 .. 4 .. 90 ....
The French and English types contain
a certain amount of tin, as shown by the
following analyses:
English Types ' Drench
I II III
Lead 69.2 61.3 55.0 55
Antimony... 19.5 18.8 22.7 30
Tin 9.1 20.2 22.1 15
Copper 1.7
Ledebur gives the composition of type
metal as follows:
I II III IV
Lead 75 60 80 82
Antimony... 23 25 20 14.8
Tin 22 15 .. 3.2
WATCHMAKERS' ALLOYS:
See Watchmakers' Formulas.
WHITE METALS.
The so-called white metals are em-
ployed almost exclusively for bearings.
(See Anti-friction Metals under Alloys.)
In the technology of mechanics an ac-
curate distinction is made between the
different kinds of metals for bearings;
and they may be classed in two groups,
red brass and white metal. The red-
ALLOYS
79
brass bearings are characterized by great
hardness and power of resistance, and
are principally used for bearings of heav-
ily loaded and rapidly revolving axles.
For the axles of large and heavy fly-
wheels, revolving at great speed, bearings
of red brass are preferable to white metal,
though more expensive.
In recent years many machinists have
found it advantageous to substitute for
the soft alloys generally in use for bear-
ings a metal almost as hard as the axle
itself. Phosphor bronze (q. v.) is fre-
quently employed for this purpose, as it
can easily be made as hard as wrought
or cast steel. In this case the metal is
used in a thin layer, and serves only,
as it were, to fill out the small interstices
caused by wear on the axle and bearing,
the latter being usually made of some
rather easily fusible alloy of lead and tin.
Such bearings are very durable, but ex-
pensive, and can only be used for large
machines. For small machines, ?*ȣ-
ning gently and uniformly, wrhite-metal
bearings are preferred, and do excellent
work, if the axle is not too heavily loaded.
For axles which have a high rate of revo-
lution, bearings made of quite hard
metals are chosen, and with proper care
— which, indeed, must be given to bear-
ings of any material — they will last for a
long time without needing repair.
: : : :8
J888 i8 i 888
500
>O*O
8888885S$.gS8 i £888888
10 c<i o <o co o «o i> cO pi 10 • • oi 06 1> »o <N c<i I-H
000000t>- O500i-Hl>t>-i-( • • t^ CO .-H »O <— i
Illllll
iliifiss
« o ®«.e,«3 o o
OoOHKW^&;feWWtf>>00
Other white bearing metals are:
XXI. — Tin, 8.5; antimony, 10; cop-
per, 5 parts.
XXII.— Tin, 42; antimony, 16; lead,
42 parts.
XXIII. — Tin, 72; antimony, 26; cop-
per, 2 parts.
XXIV. —Tin, 81; antimony, 12.5;
copper, 6.5 parts.
White Metals Based on Copper. —
I. — Copper, 65 parts; arsenic, 55 parts.
II. — Copper, 64 parts; arsenic, 50
parts.
III. — Copper, 10 parts; zinc, 20 parts;
nickel, 30 parts.
IV.— Nickel, 70 parts; copper, 30
parts; zinc, 20 parts.
V. — Nickel, 60 parts; copper, 30 parts;
zinc, 30 parts,
VI. — Copper, 8 parts; nickel, 4 parts;
zinc, 4 parts.
VII. — Copper, 10 parts; nickel, 5
parts; zinc, 5 parts.
VIII.— Copper, 8 parts; nickel, 3
parts; zinc, 4 parts.
IX. — Copper, 50 parts; nickel, 25
parts; zinc, 25 parts.
X. — Copper, 55 parts; nickel, 24
parts; zinc, 21 parts.
XI. — Copper, 55 parts; nickel, 24 parts;
zinc, 16 parts; iron, 2 parts; tin, 3 parts.
IX, X, and XI are suitable for table-
ware.
XII. — Copper, 67 parts, and arsenic,
53 parts.
XIII. — Copper, 63 parts, and arsenic,
57 parts.
XII and XIII are bright gray, un-
affected by the temperature of boiling wa-
ter; they are fusible at red heat.
White Metals Based on Platinum.—
I. — Platinum, 1 part; copper, 4 parts;
or platinum, 1* parts; copper, 3£ parts.
II. — Platinum, 10 parts; tin, 90 parts;
or platinum, 8 parts; tin, 92 parts.
III. — Platinum, 7 parts; copper, 13
parts; tin, 80 parts.
IV.— Platinum, 2 parts; steel, 98 parts.
V.— Platinum, 2.5 parts; steel, 97.5
parts.
IV and V are for gun metal.
Miscellaneous White-Metal Alloys. —
I. — For lining cross-head slides: Lead,
65 parts; antimony, 25 parts; copper,
10 parts. Some object to white metal
containing lead or zinc. It has been
found, however, that lead and zinc
have properties of great use in these
alloys.
II. — Tin, 85 parts; antimony, 7£
parts; copper, 7i parts.
III. — Tin, 90 parts; copper, 3 parts;
antimony, 7 parts.
80
ALUMINUM AND ITS TREATMENT
ZINC ALLOYS:
Bidery Metal. — This is sometimes
composed of 31 parts of zinc, 2 parts of
copper, and 2 parts of lead; the whole is
melted on a layer of rosin or wax to avoid
oxidation. This metal is very resistive;
it does not oxidize in air or moisture. It
takes its name from the town of Bider,
near Hyderabad (India), where it was
prepared for the first time industrially
for the manufacture of different utensils.
Other compositions of Indian Bidery
metal (frequently imitated in England)
are about as follows:
P.O.
Copper. . . 3.5
Zinc 93.4
Tin
Lead.. 3.1
P.O.
11.4
84.3
1.4
2.9
P.O.
16
112
2
4
Erhardt recommends the following as
being both ductile and hard:
Zinc 89 to 93
Tin 9 to 6
Lead 2 to 4
Copper 2 to 4
The tin is first melted, and the lead,
zinc, and copper added successively.
Zinc -Nickel. —Zinc, 90 parts; nickel,
10 parts. Used in powder form for
painting and cloth printing purposes.
Platine for Dress Buttons. — Copper,
43 parts; zinc, 57 parts.
UNCLASSIFIED ALLOYS :
Alloys for Drawing Colors on Steel. —
Alloys of various composition are suc-
cessfully used for drawing colors on steel.
To draw to a straw color use 2 parts of
lead and 1 part of tin, and melt in an
iron ladle. Hold the steel piece to be
drawn in the alloy as it melts and it will
turn to straw color. This mixture melts
at a temperature of about 437° F. For
darker yellow use 9 parts of lead to 4
parts of tin, which melts at 458° F. For
purple, use 3 parts of lead to 1 part
of tin, the melting temperature being
482° F. For violet, use 9 parts of lead
to 2 parts of tin, which melts at 494° F.
Lead without any alloy will draw steel
to a dark blue. The above apply to
steel only since iron requires a somewhat
greater neat and is more or less uncer-
tain in handling.
Alloy for Pattern Letters and Figures.
— A good alloy for casting pattern letters
and figures and similar small parts of
brass, iron, or plaster molds, is made of
lead 80 parts, and antimony 20 parts.
A better alloy will be lead 70 parts, an-
timony and bismuth each 15 parts. To
insure perfect work the molds should
be quite hot by placing them over a Bun-
sen burner.
Alloy for Caliper and Gage -Rod Cast-
ings.— A mixture of 30 parts zinc to 70
parts aluminum gives a light and durable
alloy for gage rods and caliper legs; the
gage rods must be steel tipped, for the
alloy is soft and wears away too rapidly
for gage points.
Alloys for Small Casting Molds.— Tin,
75 parts, and lead, 22 parts; or 75 parts
of zinc and 25 parts of tin; or 30 parts of
tin and 70 parts of lead; or 60 parts of
lead and 40 parts of bismuth.
ALLOYS FOR METAL FOIL:
See Metal Foil.
ALMOND COLD CREAM:
See Cosmetics.
ALMOND LIQUEURS:
See Wines and Liquors.
ALTARS, Tp CLEAN:
See Cleaning Preparations and Meth-
ods.
ALUM :
Burnt Alum. — I. — Heat the alum in a
porcelain dish or other suitable vessel
till it liquefies, then raise and continue
the heat, not allowing it to exceed 400°,
till aqueous vapor ceases to be disen-
gaged, and the salt has lost 47 per cent of
its weight. Reduce the residue to pow-
der, and preserve it in a well-stoppered
bottle. — Cooley.
II. — Heat ordinary alum (alumina
alum) with constant stirring in an iron
pan in which it will first melt quietly,
and then commence to form blisters.
Continue heating until a dry white mass
of a loose character remains, which is
powdered and kept in well-closed glasses.
ALUM BATH:
See Photography.
Aluminum and its Treatment
HOW TO COLOR ALUMINUM:
Blanching of Aluminum. — Aluminum
is one of the metals most inalterable by
air; nevertheless, the objects of aluminum
tarnish quickly enough without being
ALUMINUM AND ITS TREATMENT
81
Altered. They may be restored to their
mat whiteness in the following manner:
Immerse the aluminum articles in a
boiling bath of caustic potash; next
plunge them quickly into nitric acid,
rinse and let dry. It must be under-
stood that this method is applicable only
to pieces entirely of aluminum.
Decolorized Aluminum. — Gray or un-
sightly aluminum may be restored to its
white color by washing with a mixture
of 30 parts of borax dissolved in 1,000
parts of water, with a few drops of am-
monia added.
Mat Aluminum. — In order to impart
to aluminum the appearance of mat
silver, plunge the article into a hot bath
composed of a 10-per-cent solution of
caustic soda saturated with kitchen salt.
Leave it in the bath for 15 to 20 seconds,
then wash and brush; put back into the
bath for half a minute, wash anew and
dry in sawdust.
To Blacken Aluminum. — I. — The sur-
face of the sheet to be colored is polished
with very fine emery powder or finest
emery cloth. After polishing pour a
thin layer of olive oil over the surface
and heat slowly over an alcohol flame.
Large sheets must, of course, be heated
in the drying oven. After a short while
pour on oil again, in order to obtain ab-
solute uniformity of the coating, and heat
the plate once more. Under the action
of the heat the plate turns first brown,
then black, according to the degrees of
heat. When the desired coloration has
been attained, the plate is polished over
again, after cooling, with a woolen rag
or soft leather.
II.— White arsenic 1 ounce
Sulphate of iron .... 1 ounce
Hydrochloric acid . . 12 ounces
Water 12 ounces
When the arsenic and iron are dis-
solved by the acid add the water. The
aluminum to be blackened should be
well cleaned with fine emery powder
and washed before immersing in the
blackening solution. When the deposit
of black is deep enough dry off with fine
sawdust and lacquer.
Decorating Aluminum.— A process for
decorating aluminum, patented in Ger-
many, prescribes that the objects be first
corroded, which is usually done with
caustic soda lye, or, better still, by a new
method which consists in heating 3 parts
of sulphuric acid with 1 part of water to
140° to 158° F., in an enameled vessel.
Into this liquid dip the aluminum arti-
cles, rinsing them off clean and then dry-
ing them well. The corroded articles
are now placed in a bath consisting of
1,000 parts of alcohol (90 per cent),
1.50 parts of antimony, 250 parts of
chemically pure hydrochloric acid, 100
parts of manganous nitrate, and 20 parts
of purified and finally elutriated graph-
ite. In this bath, which is heated to
86°-95° F., the objects are left until
fumes develop around them, which takes
place in a few seconds. Now they are
put over a coal fire or similar arrange-
ment until the alcohol is burned up and
there is no more smoke. After they are
somewhat cooled off, they are laid into
cold water and worked with a brush, then
rinsed with water and well dried. The
pieces are now provided with a gray me-
tallic coating, consisting mainly of anti-
mony, manganese, and graphite. This
metallic layer renders them capable of re-
ceiving a lacquer which is best prepared
from 1,000 parts of alcohol (90 per cent),
50 parts of sandarac, 100 parts of shellac,
and 100 parts of nigrosine (black aniline
color). Then the articles are quickly
but thoroughly rinsed off, dried in
warmed air for a few minutes, and baked
in ovens or over a moderate coal fire
until they do not smoke any more and no
more gloss can be seen. Finally they
are rubbed with a cotton rag saturated
with thin linseed-oil varnish, and the ob-
jects thus treated now appear dull black,
like velvet. The covering withstands all
action of the weather, so that cooking
vessels coated with this varnish on the
outside can be placed on the fire without
injury to the coating. If the articles are
engraved, the aluminum appears almost
glossy white under the black layer at the
engraved places. When the pieces have
been provided with the gray metallic
coating, colored lacquer may also be
applied with the brush. In this manner
paintings, etc., may be done on alu-
minum, while not possible on unprepared
aluminum surfaces, which will not retain
them.
Making Castings in Aluminum. — The
method adopted in preparing molds
and cores for aluminum work is neces-
sarily somewhat the same as for brass,
but there are particular points which
need attention to insure successful work.
Both in the sand and the making of the
molds there are some small differences
which make considerable variation in
the results, and the temperature at which
the metal is poured is a consideration of
some importance.
In selecting the sand, which should
ALUMINUM AND ITS TREATMENT
not have been previously used, that of a
fine grain should be chosen, but it should
not have any excess of aluminous matter,
or it will not permit of the free escape
of gases and air, this being an important
matter. Besides this, the sand must be
used as dry as possible consistent with its
holding against the flow of the metal,
and having only moderate compression
in ramming.
In making the molds it is necessary
to remember that aluminum has a large
contraction in cooling, and also that' at
certain temperatures it is very weak and
tears readily, while all metals shrink
away from the mold when this is
wholly outside the casting, but they
shrink on to cores or portions of the
mold partly inclosed by metal. Thus,
if casting a plate or bar of metal, it will
shrink away from the mold in all direc-
tions; but if casting a square frame, it
shrinks away from the outside only,
while it shrinks on to the central part
or core. With brass, or iron, or such
metals, this is not of much importance,
but with some others, including alumi-
num, it is of great importance, because
if the core or inclosed sand will not give
somewhat with the contraction of the
metal, torn or fractured castings will be
the result. Both for outside and inside
molds, and with cores used with alu-
minum, the sand should be compressed
as little as possible, and hard ramming
must in every case be avoided, particu-
larly where the metal surrounds the sand.
The molds must be very freely vented,
and not only at the joint of the mold,
but by using the vent wire freely through
the body of the mold itself; in fact, for
brass the venting would be considered
excessive. With aluminum it is, how-
ever, necessary to get the air off as rapid-
ly as possible, because the metal soon
gets sluggish in the mold, and unless it
runs up quickly it runs faint at the edges.
The ingates should be wide and of fair
area, but need careful making to prevent
their drawing where they enter the cast-
ing, the method of doing this being
known to most molders.
If it is considered desirable to use a
specially made-up facing sand for the
molds where the metal is of some thick-
ness, the use of a little pea or bean meal
will be all that is necessary. To use this,
first dry as much sand as may be re-
quired and pass through a 20-mesh sieve,
and to each bushel of the fine sand rub
in about 4 quarts of meal, afterwards
again passing through the sieve to insure
regular mixing. This sand should then
be damped as required, being careful
that all parts are equally moist, rubbing
on a board being a good way to get it
tough, and in good condition, with the
minimum of moisture.
The molds should not be sleeked with
tools, but they may be dusted over with
plumbago or steatite, smoothing with
a camel's-hair brush, in cases in which a
very smooth face is required on the
castings. Preferably, however, the use
of the brush even should be avoided.
Patterns for aluminum should be kept
smooth and well varnished.
In melting the metal it is necessary to
use a plumbago crucible which is clean
and wnich has not been used for other
metals. Clay or silica crucibles are not
good for this metal, especially silica, on
account of the metal absorbing silicon
and becoming hard under some condi-
tions of melting. A steady fire is neces-
sary, and the fuel should reach only
about halfway up the crucible, as it is
not desirable to overheat the crucible or
metal. The metal absorbs heat for
some time and then fuses with some ra-
pidity, hence the desirability of a steady
heat; and as the metal should be poured
when of a claret color under the film of
oxide which forms on the surface, too
rapid a heating is not advisable. The
molding should always be well in ad-
vance of the pouring, because the metal
should be used as soon as it is ready; for
not only is waste caused, but the metal
loses condition if kept in a molten state
for long periods. The metal should be
poured rapidly, but steadily, and when
cast up there should not be a large head
of metal left on top of the runner. In
fact, it is rather a disadvantage to leave
a large head, as this tends to draw rather
than to feed the casting.
With properly prepared molds, and
careful melting, fluxes are not required,
but ground cryolite — a fluoride of sodium
and aluminum — is sometimes used to
increase the fluidity of the metal. In
using this, a few ounces according to
the bulk of metal to be treated is put
into the molten metal before it is taken
from the furnace, and well stirred in,
and as soon as the reaction apparently
ceases the pot is lifted and the metal at
once skimmed and poured. The use of
sodium in any form with aluminum is
very undesirable, however, and should
be avoided, and the same remark applies
to tin, but there is no objection to alloy-
ing with zinc, when the metal thus pro-
duced is sold as an alloy.
Aluminum also casts very well in molds
of plaster of Paris and crushed bath
brick when such molds are perfectly dry
ALUMINUM AND ITS TREATMENT
and well vented, smoothness being se-
cured by brushing over with dry stea-
tite or plumbago. When casting in
metal molds, these should be well
brushed out with steatite or plumbago,
and made fairly hot before pouring, as in
cold molds the metal curdles and be-
comes sluggish, with the result that the
castings run up faint.
To Increase the Toughness, Density,
and Tenacity of Aluminum. — For the
purpose of improving aluminum, with-
out increasing its specific gravity, the
aluminum is mixed with 4 to 7 per cent
of phosphorus, whereby the density, te-
nacity, and especially the toughness are
said to be enhanced.
WORKING OF SHEET ALUMINUM:
The great secret, if there is any, in
working aluminum, either pure or al-
loyed, consists in the proper lubricant
and the shape of the tool. Another
great disadvantage in the proper working
of the metal is that, when a manufac-
turer desires to make up an article, he
will procure the pure metal in order to
make his samples, which, of course, is
harder to work than the alloy. But the
different grades of aluminum sheet which
are on the market are so numerous for
different classes of work that it might
be advisable to consider them for a mo-
ment before passing to the method of
working them.
The pure metal, to begin with, can
be purchased of all degrees of hardness,
from the annealed, or what is known as
the "dead soft" stock, to the pure alumi-
num hard rolled. Then comes a harder
grade of alloys, running from "dead
soft" metal, which will draw up hard, to
the same metal hard rolled; and, still
again, another set of alloys which, per-
haps, are a little harder still when hard
rolled, and will, when starting with the
"dead soft," spin up into a utensil which,
when finished, will probably be as stiff as
brass. These latter alloys are finding
a large sale for replacing brass used in all
classes of manufactured articles.
To start with lathe work on aluminum,
probably more difficulty has been found
nere, especially in working pure metal,
and more complaints are heard from
this source than from any other. As
stated before, however, these difficulties
can all be readily overcome, if the proper
tools and the proper lubricants are used,
as automatic screw machines are now
made so that they can be operated when
working aluminum just as readily as
when they are working brass, and in
some cases more readily. To start with
the question of the tool, this should be
made as what is known as a "shearing
tool," that is, instead of a short, stubby
point, such as would be used in turning
brass, the point should be lengthened
out and a lot of clearance provided on
the inside of the tool, so as to give the
chips of the metal a good chance to free
themselves and not cause a clogging
around the point of the tool — a simi-
lar tool, for instance, to what would be
used for turning wood.
The best lubricant to be used would
be coal oil or water, and plenty of it. The
latter is almost as good as coal oil if
enough of it is used, and with either of
these lubricants and a tool properly
made, there should be no difficulty what-
soever in the rapid working of aluminum,
either on the lathe or on automatic screw
machines.
To go from the lathe to the drawing
press, the same tools here would be used
in drawing up shapes of aluminum as
are used for drawing up brass or other
metals; the only precaution necessary
in this instance being to use a proper
lubricant, which in this case is a cheap
grade of vaseline, or in some cases lard
oil, but in the majority of instances better
results will be secured by the use of
vaseline. Aluminum is probably sus-
ceptible of deeper drawing with less
occasion to anneal than any of the other
commercial metals. It requires but
one-third or one-fourth of as much an-
nealing as brass or copper. For in--
stance, an article which is now manu-
factured in brass, requiring, say, three or
four operations before the article is fin-
ished, would probably have to be an-
nealed after every operation. With
aluminum, however, if the proper grade
is used, it is generally possible to perform
these three operations without annealing
the metal at all, and at the same time to
produce a finished article which, to all
intents and purposes, is as stiff as an
article made of sheet brass.
Too much stress cannot be laid on the
fact of starting with the proper grade of
metal, for either through ignorance or
by not observing this point is the founda-
tion of the majority of the complaints
that aluminum "has been tried and found
wanting." If, however, it should be
found necessary to anneal aluminum,
this can be readily accomplished by
heating it in an ordinary muffle, being
careful that the temperature shall not
be too high— about 650° or 700° F. The
best test as to when the metal has
reached the proper temperature is to take
a soft pine stick and draw it across the
84
ALUMINUM AND ITS TREATMENT
metal. If it chars the stick and leaves
a black mark on the metal, it is suffi-
ciently annealed and is in a proper con-
dition to proceed with further opera-
tion.
Next taking up the question of spin-
ning aluminum, success again depends
particularly on starting with the proper
metal. The most satisfactory speed
for articles from 5 to 8 inches in diam-
eter is about 2,600 revolutions a minute,
and for larger or smaller diameters the
speed should be so regulated as to give
tne same velocity at the circumference.
Aluminum is a very easy metal to spin
and no difficulty should be found at all
in spinning the proper grades of sheets.
Several factories that are using large
quantities of aluminum now, both for
spinning and stamping, are paying their
men by the piece the same amount that
they formerly paid on brass and tin work,
and it is stated that the men working on
this basis make anywhere from 10 to
20 per cent more wages by working alu-
minum.
After aluminum has been manufac-
tured into the shape of an article, the next
process is the finishing of it. The best
polish can be obtained by first cutting
down the metal with an ordinary rag buff
on which use tripoli, and then finish it
with a dry red rouge which comes in the
lump form, or that which is known as
"White Diamond Rouge." One point,
however, that it is necessary to observe
carefully is that both the tripoli and the
rouge should be procured ground as fine
as it is possible to grind them; for, if this
is not done, the metal will have little fine
scratches all over it, and will not appear
as bright and as handsome as it other-
wise would.
If it is desired to put on a frosted ap-
pearance, this can either be done by
scratch brushing or sand blasting. A
brass wire scratch brush, made of
crimped wire of No. 32 to No. 36 B. &
S. gage, with three or four rows of bris-
tles, will probably give the best results.
This work of scratch brushing can be
somewhat lessened, however, if, before
applying the scratch brush to the surface
of the aluminum, the article is first cut
down by the use of a porpoise-hide wheel
and fine Connecticut sand, placing the
sand between the surface of the alumi-
num and the wheel, so that the skin and
the irregularities on the surface are re-
moved, and then putting the article on
a buffing wheel before attempting to
scratch brush it. This method, how-
ever, is probably more advantageous in
the treating of aluminum castings than
for articles manufactured out of the sheet
metal, as in the majority of cases it is
simply necessary before scratch brushing
to cut down the article with tripoli, and
then polish it with rouge as already de-
scribed, before putting on the scratch
brush; in this way the brush seems to
take hold quicker and better, and to pro-
duce a more uniform polish.
An effect similar to the scratch-brush
finish can be got by sand blasting, and
by first sand blasting and then scratch
brushing the sheets, a good finish is ob-
tained with very much less labor than by
scratch brushing alone. Another very
pretty frosted effect is procured by first
sand blasting and then treated as here-
inafter described by "dipping" and
"frosting," and many variations in the
finish of aluminum can be got by varying
the treatment, either by cutting down
with tripoli and polishing, scratch brush-
ing, sand blasting, dipping, and frosting,
and by combinations of those treatments.
A very pretty mottled effect is secured on
aluminum by first polishing and then
scratch brushing and then holding the
aluminum against a soft pine wheel, run
at a high rate of speed on a lathe, and by
careful manipulation, quite regular forms
of a mottled appearance can be obtained.
The dipping and frosting of aluminum
sheet is probably the cheapest way of
producing a nice finish. First remove
all grease and dirt from the article by
dipping in benzine, then dip into water
in order that the benzine adhering to
the article may be removed, so as not to
affect the strength of the solution into
which it is next dipped. After they have
been taken out of the water and well
shaken, the articles should be plunged in
a strong solution of caustic soda or caus-
tic potash, and left there a sufficient
length of time until the aluminum starts
to turn black. Then they should be
removed, dipped in water again, and then
into a solution of concentrated nitric
and sulphuric acid, composed of 24 parts
of nitric acid to 1 part of sulphuric acid.
After being removed, the article should
be washed thoroughly in water and dried
in hot sawdust in the usual way. This
finish can also be varied somewhat by
making the solution of caustic soda of
varying degrees of strength, or by adding
a small amount of common salt to the
solution.
In burnishing the metal use a blood-
stone or a steel burnisher. In burnish-
ing use a mixture of melted vaseline and
coal oil, or a solution composed of 2
tablespoonfuls of ground borax dissolved
in about a quart of hot water, with a few
AMALGAMS
85
drops of ammonia added. In engrav-
ing, which adds materially to the ap-
pearance of finished castings, book cov-
ers, picture frames, and similar articles
made of sheet, probably the best lubri-
cant to use on an engraver's tool in order
to obtain a clean cut, which is bright, is
naphtha or coal oil, or a mixture of coal
oil and vaseline. The naphtha, how-
ever, is preferred, owing to the fact that
it does not destroy the satin finish in the
neighborhood of the cut, as the other
lubricants are very apt to do. There is,
however, as much skill required in using
and making a tool in order to give a
bright, clean cut as there is in the choice
of the lubricant to be used. The tool
should be made somewhat on the same
plan as the lathe tools already outlined.
That is, they should be brought to a
sharp point and be "cut back" rather
far, so as to give plenty of clearance.
There has been one class of work in
aluminum that has been developed
lately and only to a certain extent, in
which there are great possibilities, and
that is in drop forging the metal. Some
very superior bicycle parts have been
manufactured by drop forging. This can
be accomplished probably more readily
with aluminum than with other metals,
for the reason that it is not necessary
with all the. alloys to work them hot;
consequently, they can be worked and
handled more rapidly.
ALUMINUM, TO CLEAN:
See Cleaning Preparations and Meth-
ods.
ALUMINUM ALLOYS:
See Alloys.
ALUMINUM BRONZE:
See Alloys under Bronzes.
ALUMINUM CASTINGS:
See Casting.
ALUMINUM PAPER:
See Paper.
ALUMINUM PLATING:
See Plating.
ALUMINUM POLISHES:
See Polishes.
Amalgams
See also Easily Fusible Alloys under
Alloys.
The name amalgam is given to al-
loys of metals containing mercury. The
term comes to us from the alchemists.
It signifies softening, because an excess
of mercury dissolves a large number of
metals.
Preparation of Amalgams. — Mercury
forms amalgams with most metals. It
unites directly and readily, either cold or
hot, with potassium, sodium, barium,
strontium, calcium, magnesium, zinc,
cadmium, tin, antimony, lead, bismuth,
silver, and gold; directly, but more dif-
ficultly, with aluminum, copper, and
palladium. This combination takes
place oftenest at the ordinary temper-
ature; certain metals, however, like
aluminum and antimony, combine only
when heated in presence of quicksilver.
Quicksilver has no direct action on
metals of high fusing points: manganese,
iron, nickel, cobalt, uranium, platinum,
and their congeners. Still, amalgams
of these metals can be obtained of buty-
rous consistency, either by electrolysis of
their saline solutions, employing quick-
silver as the negative electrode, or by the
action of an alkaline amalgam (potas-
sium or sodium), on their concentrated
and neutral saline solutions. These
same refractory metals are also amalga-
mated superficially when immersed in
the amalgam of sodium or of ammonium
in presence of water.
Processes for preparing amalgams by
double decomposition between an alkaline
amalgam and a metallic salt, or by elec-
trolysis of saline solutions, with employ-
ment of mercury as the negative elec-
trode, apply a fortiori to metals capable
of combining directly with the quick-
silver. The latter of these methods is
especially utilized for the preparation of
alkaline earthy metals by electrolytic
decomposition of the solutions of their
salts or hydrated oxides with quicksilver
as a cathode.
General Properties of Amalgams. —
Amalgams are liquid when the quick-
silver is in great excess; solid, but readily
fusible, when the alloyed metal pre-
dominates.
They have a metallic luster, and a
metallic structure which renders them
brittle. They even form crystallized
metallic combinations of constant propor-
tions, dissolved in an excess of quick-
silver, when the excess is separated by
compression in a chamois skin, or by
filtration in a glass funnel of slender
stem, terminating with an orifice almost
capillary.
According as the fusing heat of a metal
is less or greater than its combination
heat with quicksilver, the amalgamation
of this metal produces an elevation or a
lowering of temperature. Thus potas-
86
AMALGAMS
sium, sodium, and cadmium, in alloy
with quicksilver, disengage heat; while
zinc, antimony, tin, bismuth, lead, and
silver combine with mercury with ab-
sorption of heat. The amalgamation of
162 parts of quicksilver with 21 parts of
lead, 12 parts of tin or of antimony, and
28.5 parts of bismuth, lowers the tem-
perature of the mixture 79° F.
Amalgams formed with disengage-
ment of heat are electro-negative with
reference to the metals alloyed with the
quicksilver. The products with absorp-
tion of heat are electro-negative with ref-
erence to the metals combined with the
quicksilver; consequently, in a battery
of elements of pure cadmium and amal-
gamated cadmium, the cadmium will be
the negative pole; in case of zinc and
amalgamated zinc, the zinc will be the
positive pole.
Heat decomposes all amalgams, va-
porizing the mercury and leaving the
metal alloys as a residue.
Water is decomposed by the amal-
gams of potassium and sodium, because
the heat of formation of these amalgams,
although considerable, is even less than
the heat disengaged by potassium and
sodium, on decomposing water. The
alkaline amalgams may, therefore, serve
as a source of nascent hydrogen in pres-
ence of water, giving rise to an action
less energetic, and often more advan-
tageous, than that of the alkaline metals
alone. Thus is caused the frequent em-
ployment of sodium amalgam for hydro-
genizing a large number of bodies. As
a consequence of their action on water,
the alkaline amalgams are changed by
moist air, with production of free alkali
or alkaline carbonate.
Applications of Potassium Amalgams.
— I. — They furnish a process for prepar-
ing potassium by the decomposition of
potash by the electric current, by em-
ploying quicksilver as the cathode, and
vaporizing the quicksilver of the amal-
gam formed by heating this in a current
of dry hydrogen.
II. — They can serve for the prepara-
tion of the amalgams of the metals, other
than those of the alkaline group, by de-
composing the salts of these metals, with
formation of a salt of potash and of the
amalgam of the metal corresponding to
the original salt.
III. — They can be employed as a
source of nascent hydrogen in presence
of water for hydrogenizing many sub-
stances.
Applications of Sodium Amalgams. —
These are nearly the same as those of the
potassium amalgams, but the sodium
amalgams are employed almost exclu-
sively, because sodium is easier to handle
than potassium, and is cheaper. These
employments are the following:
I. — Sodium amalgam furnishes a proc-
ess for the preparation of sodium when
soda is decomposed by means of the
electric current, employing quicksilver
as the cathode, and afterwards vaporizing
the quicksilver of the amalgam formed
by heating this in a current of dry hy-
drogen.
II. — Amalgams of sodium serve for
the preparation of amalgams of the oth-
er metals, particularly alkaline earthy
metals and metals of high fusing points,
by decomposing the salts of these metals,
with formation of a salt of soda and of
the amalgam of the metal corresponding
to the original salt.
III. — They serve for amalgamating
superficially the metals of high fusing
point, called "refractory," such as iron
and platinum, when a well-cleaned plate
of these metals is immersed in sodium
amalgam in presence of water.
IV. — An amalgam of 2 or 3 per cent of
sodium is employed in the processes of
extraction of gold by amalgamation. It
has the property of rendering quick-
silver more brilliant, and consequently
more energetic, by acting as a deoxidant
on the pellicle of oxide formed on its
surface in presence of certain ores,
which, by keeping it separated from the
particles of gold, destroy its activity.
Sodium amalgam of 3 per cent is utilized
with success for the amalgamated plates
employed in crushers and other appa-
ratus for treating the ores of gold. If a
few drops of this amalgam are spread
on a plate of copper, of tin, or of zinc, a
brilliant coating of an amalgam of tin,
copper, or zinc is immediately formed.
V. — Amalgams of from 2 to 8 per cent
of sodium serve frequently in laborato-
ries for reducing or hydrogenizing or-
ganic combinations, -without running
the risk of a partial destruction of these
compounds by too intense action, as
may occur by employing free sodium
instead of its amalgam.
Applications of Barium Amalgams.—
These can, by distillation, furnish bari-
um. It is one of the processes for pre-
paring this metal, which, when thus ob-
tained, almost always retains a little
sodium.
Applications of Strontium Amalgams.
— These amalgams, washed and dried
1 rapidly immediately after their prepara-
I tion, and then heated to a nascent red
AMALGAMS
87
in a current of dry hydrogen, yield a
fused mass of strontium.
Applications of Cadmium Amalgams. —
Amalgams of cadmium, formed of equal
weights of cadmium and quicksilver,
have much power of cohesion and are
quite malleable; the case is the same with
an amalgam formed of 1 part of cad-
mium and 2 parts of quicksilver. They
are used as dental cements for plugging
teeth; for the same purpose an amalgam
of 2 parts of quicksilver, 1 part of cad-
mium, and 2 parts of tin may be used.
Applications of Zinc Amalgams. — The
principal employment of zinc amalgams
is their use as a cathode or negative elec-
trode in the batteries of Munson, Dan-
iels, and Lechanche. This combination
is designed to render the zinc non-attack-
able by the exciting liquid of the battery
with open circuit. The action of the
mercury is to prevent the zinc from form-
ing a large number of small voltaic ele-
ments when foreign bodies are mingled
with the metal; in a word, the giving to
ordinary zinc the properties of pure zinc,
and consequently of causing a great sav-
ing in expense.
For amalgamating a zinc plate it is
plunged for a few seconds into water in
which there is one-sixteenth in volume
of sulphuric acid, then rubbing with
a copper-wire brush which has been
dipped in the quicksilver. The mercury
takes more readily on the zinc when,
after the zinc has been cleaned with
water sharpened with sulphuric acid,
it is moistened with a solution of corro-
sive sublimate, which is reduced and
furnishes a first very thin coat of amal-
gam, on which the quicksilver is im-
mediately fixed by simple immersion
without rubbing.
The zinc of a battery may be amalga-
mated by putting at the bottom of the
compartment containing each element,
a little quicksilver in such a way that the
zinc touches the liquid. The amalga-
mation is effected under the influence of
the current, but this process applies only
on condition that the zinc alone touches
the bottom of the vessel containing the
quicksilver.
Applications of Manganese Amalgams.
— These may serve for the preparation
of manganese. For this purpose it is
sufficient to distill in a current of pure
Lydrogen. The manganese remains in
the form of a grayish powder.
Applications of Tin Amalgams. — I. —
Tinning of glass. This operation is
accomplished in the following manner :
On a cast-iron table, quite horizontal, a
sheet of tin of the dimensions of the glass
is spread out and covered with a layer of
quicksilver, 5 or 6 millimeters in thick-
ness. The glass is made to slide on the
sheet of tin in such a way as to drive off
the excess of quicksilver; wrhen the two
surfaces are covered without interposi-
tion of air, weights are placed on the
glass. In a few days, the glass may be
removed, having been covered with an
adhering pellicle of amalgam of 4 parts
of tin and 1 part of quicksilver. (See
also Mirrors.)
II. — An amalgam consisting of 2 parts
of zinc and 1 part tin may be used for
covering the cushions of frictional elec-
tric machines. This amalgam is pre-
pared by first melting the zinc and tin in
a crucible and adding the quicksilver
previously heated.
III. — Mention has been made of the
cadmium amalgam employed for plug-
ging teeth, an amalgam of 2 parts of
quicksilver, 2 parts of tin, and 1 part of
cadmium. For the same purpose an
amalgam of tin, silver, and gold is em-
ployed. (See also Cements, Dental.)
Applications of Copper Amalgams. —
I. — An amalgam of 30 per cent of copper
has been employed for filling teeth.
This use has been abandoned on account
of the inconvenience occasioned by the
great changeableness of the product.
II. — The amalgam of 30 per cent of
copper, designated by the name of "me-
tallic mastic," is an excellent cement for
repairing objects and utensils of porce-
lain. For this employment, the broken
surfaces are heated to 662° F., and a little
of the amalgam, previously heated to the
consistency of melted wax, is applied.
III. — Copper amalgam, of 30 to 45
per cent of copper, rendered plastic by
heating and grinding, may serve for ob-
taining with slight compression copies of
delicate objects, which may, after hard-
ening of the amalgam, be reproduced,
either in wax or by galvanic process.
IV. — According to Debray, when a
medal, obtained with an amalgam of
45 per cent of copper, by compression in
the soft state, in molds of gutta percha,
is heated progressively to redness in an
atmosphere of hydrogen, the quicksilver
is volatilized gradually, and the particles
of copper come together without fusion
in such a way as to produce a faithful
reproduction, formed exclusively of me-
tallic copper, of the original medal.
V. — In the metallurgy of gold the
crushers are furnished with amalga-
mated plates of copper for retaining the
gold. The preparation of these plates,
88
AMALGAMS
which are at least 0.128 inches in thick-
ness, is delicate, requiring about two
weeks. They are freed from greasy mat-
ter by rubbing with ashes, or, better,
with a little sand and caustic soda, or if
more rapid action is desired, with a cloth
dipped in dilute nitric acid; they are
washed with water, then with a solution
of potassium cyanide, and finally brushed
with a mixture of sal ammoniac and a
little quicksilver, until the surface is
completely amalgamated. They are
finally made to absorb as much quick-
silver as possible. But the plates thus
treated are useful for only a few days
when they are sufficiently covered with a
layer of gold amalgam; in the meantime
they occasion loss of time and of gold.
So it is preferable to cover them arti-
ficially with a little gold amalgam, which
is prepared by dissolving gold in quick-
silver. Sometimes the amalgam of gold
is replaced by an amalgam of silver,
which is readily poured and more eco-
nomical.
Another method giving better results
consists in silvering copper slabs by elec-
troplating and covering them with a layer
of silver. Then it is only necessary to
apply a little quicksilver, which adheres
quite rapidly, so that they are ready for
use almost immediately, and are quite
active at the outset.
These amalgamation slabs ought to
be cleaned before each operation. Po-
tassium cyanide removes fatty matter,
and sal ammoniac the oxides of the low
metals.
Applications of Lead Amalgams. —
These meet with an interesting employ-
ment for the autogenous soldering of
lead. After the surfaces to be soldered
have been well cleaned, a layer of lead
amalgam is applied. It is afterwards
sufficient to pass along the line of junc-
tion a soldering iron heated to redness,
in order that the heat should cause the
volatilization of the quicksilver, and that
the lead, liberated in a state of fine divi-
sion, should be melted and cause the
adherence of the two surfaces. The
only precaution necessary is to avoid
breathing the mercurial vapor, which is
quite poisonous.
Applications of Bismuth Amalgams. —
The amalgam formed of 1 per cent of
bismuth and 4 parts of quicksilver will
cause the strong adherence of glass. It
is employed with advantage in the tin-
ning of glass globes. For this operation
it is poured into a dry hot receiver, and
then passed over the whole surface of
the glass; it solidifies on cooling. For
the purpose of economizing the bismuth,
the price of which is high, the preceding
amalgam is replaced by another com-
posed of 2 parts of quicksilver, 1 part of
bismuth, 1 part of lead, and 1 part of tin.
The bismuth, broken into small frag-
ments, is added to the tin and lead, pre-
viously melted in the crucible, and when
the mixture of the three metals becomes
fluid, the quicksilver is poured in, while
stirring with an iron rod. The impuri-
ties floating on the surface are removed,
and when the temperature is sufficiently
lowered this amalgam is slbwly poured
into the vessels to be tinned, which have
been previously well cleaned and slightly
heated. M. Ditte recommends for the
same employment, as a very strong ad-
herent to the glass, an amalgam obtained
by dissolving hot 2 parts of bismuth and
1 part of lead in a solution of 1 part of
tin in 10 parts of quicksilver. By caus-
ing a quantity of this amalgam to move
around the inside of a receiver, clean,
dry, and slightly heated, the surface will
be covered with a thin, brilliant layer,
which hardens quite rapidly.
For the injection of anatomical pieces
an amalgam formed of 10 parts of quic c-
silver, 50 parts of bismuth, 31 parts of
lead, and 18 parts of tin, fusible at 77.5°
and solidifiable at 60° C., is made use of;
or, again, an amalgam composed of 9
parts of Darcet alloy and 1 part of quick-
silver fusible at 127J° F., and pasty at a
still lower temperature. This last amal-
gam may also be used for filling carious
teeth. The Darcet alloy, as known, con-
tains 2 parts of bismuth, 1 part of lead,
and 1 part of tin, and melts at 199^° F.
The addition of 1 part of quicksilver
lowers the fusing point to 104° F.
Applications of Silver Amalgams. — I. —
In the silvering of mirrors by the Petit-
jean method, which has almost univer-
sally replaced tinning, the property of
silver in readily amalgamating is taken
advantage of, by substituting the glass
after silvering to the action of a dilute
solution of double cyanide of mercury
and potassium in such a manner as to
form an amalgam of white and brilliant
silver adhering strongly to the glass. To
facilitate the operation and utilize all the
silver, while economizing the double cya-
nide, M. Lenoir has recommended the
following: Sprinkle the glass at the time
when it is covered with the mercurial
solution with very fine zinc powder,
which precipitates the quicksilver and
regulates the amalgamation.
II. — The metallurgy of silver also
takes advantage of the property of this
AMALGAMS
89
metal in combining cold with quicksil-
ver; this for the treatment of poor silver
ores.
In the Saxon or Freiburg process for
treating silver ores, recourse is had to
quicksilver in the case of amalgam in
amalgamating casks, in which the ore,
after grinding, is shaken with disks of
iron, and with mercury and water. The
amalgam, collected and filtered under
strong pressure, contains from 30 to 33
per cent of silver. It is distilled either
in cylindrical retorts of cast iron, fur-
nished with an exit tube immersed in
the water for condensing the mercurial
vapors, or on plates of iron, arranged
over each other along a vertical iron
stem, supported by a tripod at the bot-
tom of a tank filled with water, and
covered with an iron receiver, which is
itself surrounded with ignited charcoal.
It should be remarked that the last por-
tions of quicksilver in a silver amalgam
submitted to distillation are voiaiiiized
only under the action of a high and pro-
longed temperature.
Applications of Gold Amalgams. — I. —
Gilding with quicksilver. This process
of gilding, much employed formerly, is
now but little used. It can be applied
only to metals slightly fusible and capa-
ble of amalgamation, like silver, copper,
bronze, and brass. Iron can also be
gilded by this method, provided it is
previously covered with a coating of
copper. To perform this gilding the
surface is well cleaned, and the gold
amalgam, consisting of 2 parts of gold
and 1 part of quicksilver, prepared as
mentioned before, is applied. The piece
is afterwards heated to about the red, so
as to volatilize the mercury. The gold
remains, superficially alloyed with the
metal, and forms an extremely solid
layer of deadened gold, which can be
afterwards polished. The volatilization
should be effected under a chimney hav-
ing strong draught, in order to avoid the
poisonous action of the mercurial vapors.
II. — The amalgamation of gold finds
its principal applications in the treatment
of auriferous ores. The extraction of
small spangles of gold scattered in gold-
bearing sands is based on the ready
dissolution of gold in quicksilver, and
on the formation of an amalgam of solid
gold by compression and filtering through
a chamois skin, in a state more or less
liquid. The spangles of gold are shaken
with about their weight of quicksilver,
collected in the cavities of sluices and
mixed with a small quantity of sand.
The gold is dissolved and the sand re-
mains. The amalgam thus obtained is
compressed in a chamois skin, so as to
separate the excess of mercury which
passes through the pores of the skin; or,
yet again, it is filtered through a glass
funnel having a very slender stem, with
almost capillary termination. In both
cases an amalgam of solid gold remains,
which is submitted to the action of heat
in a crucible or cast-iron retort, com-
municating with a bent-iron tube, of
which the extremity, surrounded with a
cloth immersed in water, is arranged
above a receiver lialf full of water. The
quicksilver is vaporized and condensed
in the water. The gold remains in the
retort.
The property of gold of combining
readily with quicksilver is also used in
many kinds of amalgamating apparatus
for extraction and in the metallurgy of
gold.
In various operations it is essential
to keep the quicksilver active by preserv-
ing its limpidity. For this purpose
potassium cyanide and ammonium
chloride are especially employed; some-
times wood ashes, carbonate of soda,
hyposulphite of soda, nitrate of potash,
cupric sulphate, sea salt, and lime; the
latter for precipitating the soluble sul-
phates proceeding from the decomposi-
tion of pyrites.
The amalgamation of gold is favored
by a temperature of 38° to 45° C. (100°
to 113° F.), and still more by the em-
ployment of quicksilver in the nascent
state. This last property is the base of
the Designol process, which consists in
treating auriferous or auro-argentiferous
ores, first ground with sea salt, in revolv-
ing cylinders of cast iron, with iron and
mercury bichloride, in such a way that
the mercury precipitated collects the gold
and eventually the silver more effica
ciously.
Gold Amalgam. — Eight parts of gold
and 1 of mercury are formed into an
amalgam for plating by rendering the
gold into thin plates, making it red hot,
and then putting it into the mercury while
the latter is also heated to ebullition.
The gold immediately disappears in
combination with the mercury, after
which the mixture may be turned into
water to cool. It is then ready for use.
Zinc Amalgam for Electric Batteries.
• — Dissolve 2 parts of mercury in 1 part
of aqua regia. This accomplished, add
5 parts of hydrochloric acid. This solu-
tion is made warm. It suffices to dip
the zinc to be amalgamated into this
liquid only for a few seconds.
90
AMALGAMS— AMBER
Amalgam for Cementing Glass, Por-
celain, Etc. — Take tin 2 parts, and cad-
mium 1 part. Fuse in an iron spoon
or some vessel of the same material.
When the two materials are in fusion add
a little mercury, previously heated. Place
all in an iron crucible and boil, agitating
the mass with a pestle. This amalgam
is soft and can be kneaded between the
fingers. It may be employed for luting
glass or porcelain vessels, as well as for
filling teeth. It hardens in a short while.
Amalgam for Silvering Glass Balls. —
Lead, 25 parts; tin, 25 parts; bismuth,
25 parts; mercury, 25 parts; or, lead, 20
parts; tin, 20 parts; bismuth, 20 parts;
mercury, 40 parts. Melt the lead and
the tin, then add the bismuth; skim sev-
eral times and add the mercury, stirring
the composition vigorously.
(See also Mirror-Silvering).
Copper Amalgam. — Copper amalgam,
or so-called Viennese metal cement, crys-
tallizes with the greatest readiness and
acquires such hardness on solidifying
that it can be polished like gold. The
amalgam may also be worked under the
hammer or between rollers; it can also
be stamped, and retains its metallic luster
for a long time in the air. In air con-
taining hydrogen sulphide, however, it
quickly tarnishes and turns black. A
very special property of copper amalgam
consists in that it becomes very soft when
laid in water, and attains such pliancy
that it can be employed for modeling the
most delicate objects. After a few
hours the amalgam congeals again into
a very fine-grained, rather malleable
mass. An important application of
copper amalgam is that for cementing
metals. ^ All that is necessary for this
purpose is to heat the metals, which must
be bright, to 80-90° C. (176-194° F.), to
apply the amalgam and to press the metal
pieces together. They will cohere as
firmly as though soldered together.
Copper amalgam may be prepared in
the following manner:
Place strips of zinc in a solution of blue
vitriol and agitate the solution thor-
oughly. The copper thus obtained in
the form of a very fine powder is washed
and, while still moist, treated in a mor-
tar with a solution of mercury nitrate.
The copper powder thereby amalga-
mates more readily with the quicksilver.
Next, hot water is poured over the cop-
per, the mortar is kept hot, and the mer-
cury added. Knead with the pestle of
the mortar until the copper, pulverulent
in the beginning, has united with the
mercury into a very plastic mass. The
longer the kneading is continued the
more uniform will be the mass. As soon
as the amalgam has acquired the suitable
character — for its production 3 parts of
copper and 7 parts of mercury are used
— the water is poured off and the amal-
gam still soft is given the shape in which
it is to be kept.
For cementing purposes, the amalgam
is rolled out into small cylinders, whose
diameter is about 0.16 to 0.2 inches, with
a length of a few inches. In order to
produce with this amalgam impressions
of castings, which are made after wood-
cuts, the amalgam is rolled out hot
into a thin plate and pressed firmly
onto the likewise heated plaster cast.
After the amalgam has hardened the
thin plate of it may be reinforced by
pouring on molten type metal.
Silver Amalgam. — Silver amalgam can
easily be made with the help of finely
powdered silver. The mercury need
only be heated to 250° to 300° C. (482°
to 572° F.); silver powder is then sprin-
kled on it, and mixed with it by stirring.
The vessel is heated for several minutes
and then allowed to cool, the excess of
mercury being removed from the granu-
lated crystalline amalgam by pressing in
a leather bag. Silver amalgam can also
easily be made by dissolving silver in
nitric acid, evaporating the solution till
the excess of free acid is eliminated, di-
luting with distilled water, and adding
mercury to the fluid in the proportion of
4 parts, by weight, of mercury to 1 of the
silver originally used. The mercury
precipitates the silver in a metallic state,
and immediately forms an amalgam with
it; the fluid standing above after a time
contains no more silver, but consists of
a solution of mercury nitrate mixed with
whatever copper was contained in the
dissolved silver in the form of copper
nitrate. The absence of a white pre-
cipitate, if a few drops of hydrochloric
acid are added to a sample of the fluid
in a test tube, shows that all the silver
has been eliminated from the solution
and is present in the form of amalgam.
Amalgam for the Rubber of Electric
Machines. — Mercury, 100 parts; zinc, 50
parts; tin, 50 parts. Tnis amalgam
reduced to powder and incorporated
with grease can be applied to the rubber
of electric machines.
AMALGAM GOLD PLATING:
See Gilding under Plating.
AMBER :
Imitation Amber. — Melt carefully to-
gether pine rosin, 1; lacca in tabulis, 2;
white colophony, 15 parts.
AMBER CEMENT— ANILINE STAINS
91
AMBER CEMENT:
See Adhesives under Cements.
AMBER VARNISH:
See Varnishes.
AMBROSIA POWDER:
See Salts (Effervescent).
AMIDOL DEVELOPER:
See Photography.
AMETHYST (IMITATION) :
See Gems, Artificial.
AMMON-CARBONITE :
See Explosives.
Ammonia
Household Ammonia. — (See also House-
hold Formulas.) — Household ammonia is
simply diluted ammonia water to which
borax and soap have been added. To
make it cloudy add potassium nitrate
or methylated spirit. The following are
good formulas:
I. — Ammonia water .... 16 parts
Yellow soap 64 parts
Potassium nitrate... 1 part
Soft water, sufficient
to make 200 parts
Shave up the soap and dissolve it in
the water by heating, add the potassium
nitrate and dissolve. Cool, strain, skim
off any suds or bubbles, add the am-
monia, mix, and bottle at once.
II. — Yellow soap 10 grains
Borax 1 drachm
Lavender water. ... 20 minims
Stronger ammonia
water 6 ounces
Water, enough to
make 20 ounces
Dissolve the soap and borax in 5
ounces of boiling water; when cold add
the lavender water and ammonia, and
make up to a pint with water.
III. — Methylated spirit. .. 1 gallon
Soft water 1 gallon
Stronger ammonia
water 1 gallon
IV. — Ammonia water. — 5 pints
Distilled water 5 pints
Soap 100 grains
Olive oil 5 drachms
Cut the soap in shavings, boil with the
oil and water, cool, add the ammonia
water, and bottle. For use in laundries,
baths, and for general household pur-
poses add one tablespoonful to one
gallon of water.
V.— The best quality:
Alcohol, 94 per cent . . 4 ounces
Soft water 4 gallons
Oil of rosemary 4 drachms
Oil of citronella 3 drachms
Dissolve the oils in the alcohol and
add to the water. To the mixture add
4 ounces of talc (or fuller's earth will
answer), mix thoroughly, strain through
canvas, and to the colate add 1, 2, or 3
gallons of ammonia water, according to
the strength desired, in which has been
dissolved 1, 2, or 3 ounces of white 'curd,
or soft soap.
Liquor Ainmonii Anisatus. —
Oil of anise, by weight 1 part
Alcohol, by weight 24 parts
Water of ammonia, by weight. . 5 parts
Dissolve the oil in the alcohol and add
the water of ammonia.
It should be a clear, yellowish liquid.
Violet Color for Ammonia. — A purple-
blue color may be given to ammonia
water by adding an aqueous solution
of litmus. The shade, when pale
enough, will probably meet all views as
to a violet color.
Perfumed Ammonia Water. — The
following are typical formulas:
I. — Stronger water of am-
monia 6 ounces
Lavender water 1 ounce
Soft soap 10 grains
Water, enough to
make 16 ounces
II. — Soft soap 1 ounce
Borax 2 drachms
Cologne water | ounce
Stronger water of am-
monia 5£ ounces
Water, enough to
make 12 ounces
Rub up the soap and borax with water
until dissolved, strain and add the other
ingredients. The perfumes may be
varied to suit the price.
AMMONIA FOR FIXING PRINTS:
See Photography.
ANGOSTURA BITTERS:
See Wines and Liquors.
ANILINE :
See Dyes.
ANILINE IN PIGMENTS, TESTS FOR :
See Pigments.
ANILINE STAINS, TO REMOVE:
See Cleaning Preparations and Meth-
ods.
ANTIDOTES FOR POISONS
ANISE CORDIAL:
See Wines and Liquors.
ANKARA:
See Butter.
ANNEALING OF STEEL, TOOLS, WIRE,
AND SPRINGS:
See Steel.
ANODYNES:
See Pain Killers.
ANT DESTROYERS:
See Insecticides.
Antidotes for Poisons
POISON, SYMPTOMS AND ANTI-
DOTES.
When a person has taken poison the
first thing to do is to compel the patient
to vomit, and for that purpose give any
emetic that can be most readily and
quickly obtained, and which is prompt
and energetic, but safe in its action.
For this purpose there is, perhaps,
nothing better than a large teaspoonful
of ground mustard in a tumblerful of
warm water, and it has the advantage of
being almost always at hand. If the dry
mustard is not to be had use mixed
mustard from the mustard pot. Its
operation may generally be facilitated
by the addition of a like quantity of
common table salt. If the mustard is
not at hand, give two or three teaspoon-
fuls of powdered alum in syrup or
molasses, and give freely of warm water
to drink; or give 10 to 20 grains of sul-
phate of zinc (white vitriol), or 20 to 30
grains of ipecac, with 1 or 2 grains of
tartar emetic, in a large cup of warm
water, and repeat every ten minutes until
three or four doses are given, unless
free vomiting is sooner produced. After
vomiting has taken place large draughts
of warm water should be given, so
that the vomiting will continue until the
poisonous substances have been thor-
oughly evacuated, and then suitable anti-
dotes should be given. If vomiting can-
not be produced the stomach pump
should be used. When it is known what
particular kind of poison has been swal-
lowed, then the proper antidote for that
poison should be given; but when this
cannot be ascertained, as is often the
case, give freely of equal parts of cal-
cined magnesia, pulverized charcoal,
and sesquioxide of iron, in a sufficient
quantity of water. This is a very harm-
less mixture and is likely to be of great
benefit, as the ingredients, though very
simple, are antidotes for the most com-
mon and active poisons. In case this
mixture cannot be obtained, the stomach
should be soothed and protected by the
free administration of demulcent, muci-
laginous, or oleaginous drinks, such as the
whites of eggs, milk, mucilage of gum
arabic, or slippery-elm bark, flaxseed
tea, starch, wheat flour, or arrowroot
mixed in water, linseed or olive oil, or
melted butter or lard. Subsequently
the bowels should be moved by some
gentle laxative, as a tablespoonful or
two of castor oil, or a teaspoonful of cal-
cined magnesia; and pain or other evi-
dence of inflammation must be relieved
by the administration of a few drops of
laudanum, and the repeated application
of hot poultices, fomentations, and mus-
tard plasters.
The following are the names of the
substances that may give rise to poison-
ing, most commonly used, and their anti-
dotes:
Mineral Acids — Sulphuric Acid (Oil
of Vitriol), Nitric Acid (Aqua Fortis),
Muriatic Acid (Spirits of Salts). — Symp-
toms: Acid, burning taste in the moutn,
acute pain in the throat, stomach, and
bowels; frequent vomiting, generally
bloody; mouth and lips excoriated,
shriveled, white or yellow; hiccough,
copious stools, more or less bloody, with
great tenderness in the abdomen; diffi-
cult breathing, irregular pulse, excessive
thirst, while drink increases the pain
and rarely remains in the stomach; fre-
quent but vain efforts to urinate; cold
sweats, altered countenance; convul-
sions, generally preceding death. Nitric
acid causes yellow stains; sulphuric
acid, black ones. Treatment: Mix
calcined magnesia in milk or water to the
consistence of cream, and give freely to
drink a glassful every couple of minutes,
if it can be swallowed. Common soap
(hard or soft), chalk, whiting, or even
mortar from the wall mixed in water
may be given, until magnesia can be ob-
tained. Promote vomiting by tickling
the throat, if necessary, and when the
poison is got rid of, flaxseed or slippery-
elm tea, gruel, or other mild drinks.
The inflammation which always follows
needs good treatment to save the pa-
tient's life.
Vegetable Acids— Acetic, Citric, Ox-
alic, Tartaric. — Symptoms: Intense
burning pain of mouth, throat, and
stomach; vomiting blood which is highly
acid, violent purging, collapse, stupor,
death.
Oxalic acid is frequently taken in
ANTIDOTES FOR POISONS
mistake for Epsom salts, to which in
shops it often bears a strong resemblance.
Treatment: Give chalk or magnesia in a
large quantity of water, or large draughts
of limewater. If these are not at hand,
scrape the wall or ceiling, and give the
scrapings mixed with water.
Prussic or Hydrocyanic Acid — Laurel
Water, Cyanide of Potassium, Bitter
Almond Oil, Etc. — Symptoms: In large
doses almost invariably instantaneously
fatal; when not immediately fatal, sud-
den loss of sense and control of the vol-
untary muscles. The odor of the poison
generally noticeable on the breath.
Treatment: Chlorine, in the form of
chlorine water, in doses of from 1 to 4
fluidrachms, diluted. Weak solution
of chloride lime of soda; water of am-
monia (spirits of hartshorn), largely
diluted, may be given, and the vapor of it
cautiously inhaled. Cold affusion, and
chloroform in half to teaspoonful doses
in glycerine or mucilage, repeated every
few minutes, until the symptoms are
ameliorated. Artificial respiration.
Aconite — Monkshood, Wolfsbane. —
Symptoms: Numbness and tingling in
the mouth and throat, and afterwards in
other portions of the body, with sore
throat, pain over the stomach, and vom-
iting; dimness of vision, dizziness, great
prostration, loss of sensibility, and de-
lirium. Treatment: An emetic and
then brandy in tablespoonful doses, in
ice water, every half hour ; spirits of
ammonia in half -teaspoonful doses in
like manner; the cold douche over the
head and chest, warmth to the extrem-
ities, etc.
Alkalis and Their Salts— Concen-
trated Lye, Wood-ash Lye, Caustic Pot-
ash, Ammonia, Hartshorn. — Symptoms:
Caustic, acrid taste, excessive heat in
the throat, stomach, and intestines;
vomiting of bloody matter, cold sweats,
hiccough, purging of bloody stools.
Treatment: The common vegetable
acids. Common vinegar, being always
at hand, is most frequently used. The
fixed oils, as castor, flaxseed, almond,
and olive oils form soaps with the alka-
lis and thus also destroy their caustic
effect. They should be given in large
quantity.
Antimony and Its Preparations — Tar-
tar Emetic, Antimonial Wine, Kerme's
Mineral. — Symptoms : Faintness and
nausea, soon followed by painful and
continued vomiting, severe diarrhea,
constriction and burning sensation in
the throat, cramps, or spasmodic twitch-
ings, with symptoms of nervous derange-
ment, and great prostration of strength,
often terminating in death. Treatment:
If vomiting has not been produced, it
should be effected by tickling the fauces,
and administering copious draughts of
warm water. Astringent infusions, such
as of gall, oak bark, Peruvian bark, act
as antidotes, and should be given prompt-
ly. Powdered yellow bark may be used
until the infusion is prepared, or very
strong green tea should be given. To
stop the vomiting, should it continue,
blister over the stomach by applying a
cloth wet with strong spirits of hartshorn,
and then sprinkle on one-eighth to one-
fourth of a grain of morphia.
Arsenic and Its Preparations— Rats-
bane, Fowler's Solution, Etc. — Symp-
toms: Generally within an hour pain
and heat are felt in the stomach, soon
followed by vomiting, with a burning
dryness of the throat and great thirst;
the matters vomited are generally colored
either green yellow, or brown, and are
sometimes bloody. Diarrhea or dys-
entery ensues, while the pulse becomes
small and rapid, yet irregular. Breath-
ing much oppressed; difficulty in vom-
iting may occur, while cramps, convul-
sions, or even paralysis often precede
death, which sometimes takes place with-
in five or six hours after arsenic has been
taken. Treatment : Give a prompt
emetic, and then hydrate of peroxide of
iron (recently prepared) in tablespoon-
ful doses every 10 or 15 minutes until the
urgent symptoms are relieved. In the
absence of this, or while it is being pre-
pared, give large draughts of new milk
and raw eggs, limewater and oil, melted
butter, magnesia in a large quantity of
water, or even if nothing else is at hand,
flour and water, always5> however, giv-
ing an emetic the first thing, or causing
vomiting by tickling the throat with a
feather, etc. The inflammation of the
stomach which follows must be treated
by blisters, hot fomentations, muci-
laginous drinks, and the like.
Belladonna, or Deadly Nightshade.—
Symptoms: Dryness of the mouth and
throat, great thirst, difficulty of swal-
lowing, nausea, dimness, confusion or
loss of vision, great enlargement of the
pupils, dizziness, delirium, and coma.
Treatment: There is no known anti-
dote. Give a prompt emetic and then
reliance must be placed on continual
stimulation with brandy, whisky, etc.,
and to necessary artificial respiration.
Opium and its preparations, as morphia,
laudanum, etc., are thought by some to
ANTIDOTES FOR POISONS
counteract the effect of belladonna, and
may be given in small and repeated doses,
as also strong black coffee and green tea.
Blue Vitriol, or Blue Stone.— See Cop-
per.
Cantharides (Spanish or Blistering
Fly) and Modern Potato Bug. — Symp-
toms: Sickening odor of the breath,
sour taste, with burning heat in the
throat, stomach, and bowels; frequent
vomiting, often bloody; copious bloody
stools, great pain in the stomach, with
burning sensation in the bladder and
difficulty to urinate followed with ter-
rible convulsions, delirium, and death.
Treatment: Excite vomiting by drinking
plentifully of sweet oil or other whole-
some oils, sugar and water, milk, or
slippery-elm tea; give injections of castor
oil and starch, or warm milk. The in-
flammatory symptoms which generally
follow must be treated by a physician.
Camphorated oil or camphorated spirits
should be rubbed over the bowels, stom-
ach, and thighs.
Caustic Potash. — See Alkalis under this
title.
Cobalt, or Fly Powder. — Symptoms:
Heat and pain in the throat and stomach,
violent retching and vomiting, cold and
clammy skin, small and feeble pulse,
hurried and difficult breathing, diar-
rhea, etc. Treatment: An emetic, fol-
lowed by the free administration of milk,
eggs, wheat flour and water, and muci-
laginous drinks.
Copper — Blue Vitriol, Verdigris or
Pickles or Food Cooked in Copper Ves-
sels.— Symptoms: General inflamma-
tion of the alimentary canal, suppres-
sion of urine; hiccough, a disagreeable
metallic taste, vomiting, violent colic,
excessive thirst, sense of tightness of the
throat, anxiety; faintness, giddiness,
and cramps and convulsions generally
precede death. Treatment : Large
doses of simple syrup as warm as can be
swallowed, until the stomach rejects the
amount it contains. The whites of eggs
and large quantities of milk. Hydrated
peroxide of iron.
Creosote — Carbolic Acid. — Symptoms :
Burning pain, acrid, pungent taste,
thirst, vomiting, purging, etc. Treat-
ment: An emetic and the free adminis-
tration of albumen, as the whites of eggs,
or, in the absence of these, milk, or flour
and water.
Corrosive Sublimate. — See Mercury
under this title.
Deadly Nightshade.— See Belladonna
under this title.
Foxglove, or Digitalis.— Symptoms:
Loss of strength, feeble, fluttering pulse,
faintness, nausea and vomiting and stu-
por ; cold perspiration, dilated pupils,
sighing, irregular breathing, and some-
times convulsions. Treatment: After
vomiting, give brandy and ammonia in
frequently repeated doses, apply warmth
to the extremities, and if necessary resort
to artificial respiration.
Gases — Carbonic Acid, Chlorine, Cy-
anogen, Hydrosulphuric Acid, Etc. —
Symptoms: Great drowsiness, difficult
respiration, features swollen, face blue
as in strangulation. Treatment: Arti-
ficial respiration, cold douche, friction
with stimulating substances to the sur-
face of the body. Inhalation of steam
containing preparations of ammonia.
Cupping from nape of neck. Internal
use of chloroform.
Hellebore, or Indian Poke. — Symp-
toms: Violent vomiting and purging,
bloody stools, great anxiety, tremors,
vertigo, fainting, sinking of the pulse,
cold sweats, and convulsions. Treat-
ment: Excite speedy vomiting by large
draughts of warm water, molasses and
water, tickling the throat with the finger
or a feather, and emetics; give oily and
mucilaginous drinks, oily purgatives,
and clysters, acids, strong coffee, cam-
phor, and opium.
Hemlock (Conium). — Symptoms: Dry-
ness of the throat, tremors, dizziness,
difficulty of swallowing, prostration, and
faintness, limbs powerless or paralyzed,
pupils dilated, pulse rapid and feeble;
insensibility and convulsions sometimes
precede death. Treatment: Empty the
stomach and give brandy in tablespoon-
ful doses, with half teaspoonful of spirits
of ammonia, frequently repeated, and
if much pain and vomiting, give bro-
mide of ammonium in 5-grain doses
every half hour. Artificial respiration
may be required.
Henbane, or Hyoscyamus. — Symp-
toms: Muscular twitching, inability to
articulate plainly, dimness of vision and
stupor; later, vomiting and purging,
small intermittent pulse, convulsive
movement of the extremities, and coma.
Treatment: Similar to opium poison-
ing, which see.
Iodine. — Symptoms: Burning pain in
throat, lacerating pain in the stomach,
fruitless effort to vomit, excessive ten-
derness of the epigastrium. Treatment:
ANTIDOTES FOR POISONS
95
Free emesis, prompt administration of
starch, wheat flour, or arrowroot, beaten
up in water.
Lead — Acetate of Lead, Sugar of Lead,
Dry White Lead, Red Lead, Litharge, or
Pickles, Wine, or Vinegar Sweetened by
Lead. — Symptoms: When taken in large
doses, a sweet but astringent metallic
taste exists, with constriction in the
throat, pain in the region of the stomach,
painful, obstinate, and frequently bloody
vomitings, hiccough, convulsions or
spasms, and death. When taken in
small but long-continued doses it pro-
duces colic, called painters' colic; great
pain, obstinate constipation, and in ex-
treme cases paralytic symptoms, es-
pecially wrist-drop, with a blue line along
the edge of the gums. Treatment: To
counteract the poison give alum in water
li ounce to a quart; or, better still, Ep-
som salts or Glauber's salts, an ounce of
either in a quart of water; or dilute sul-
phuric acid, a teaspoonful to a quart of
water. If a large quantity of sugar of
lead has been recently taken, empty the
stomach by an emetic of sulphate of zinc
(1 drachm in a qur,rt oi water), giving
one-fourth to commence, and repeating
smaller doses until free vomiting is pro-
duced; castor oil should be given to clear
the bowels and injections of oil and
starch freely administered. If the body
is cold use the warm bath.
Meadow Saffron. — See Belladonna.
Laudanum. — See Opium.
Lobelia — Indian Poke. — Symptoms :
Excessive vomiting and purging, pains
in the bowels, contraction of the pupils,
delirium, coma, and convulsions. Treat-
ment: Mustard over the stomach, and
brandy and ammonia.
Mercury— Corrosive Sublimate (bug
poisons frequently contain this poison),
Red Precipitate, Chinese or English
Vermilion. — Symptoms: Acrid, metallic
taste in the mouth, immediate constric-
tion and burning in the throat, with anx-
iety and tearing pains in both stomach
and bowels, sickness, and vomiting of
various-colored fluids, and sometimes
bloody and profuse diarrhea, with dif-
ficulty and pain in urinating; pulse
quick, small, and hard; faint sensations,
great debility, difficult breathing, cramps,
cold sweats, syncope, and convulsions.
Treatment: If vomiting does not al-
ready exist, emetics must be given im-
mediately— white of eggs in continuous
large doses, and infusion of catechu after-
wards, sweet milk, mixtures of flour and
water in successive cupfuls, and to check
excessive salivation put a half ounce of
chlorate of potash in a tumbler of water,
and use freely as a gargle, and swallow a
tablespoonful every hour or two.
Morphine. — See Opium.
Nitrate of Silver (Lunar Caustic).—
Symptoms: Intense pain and vomiting,
and purging of blood, mucus, and shreds
of mucous membranes; and if these stand
they become dark. Treatment: Give
freely of a solution of common salt in
water, which decomposes the poison,
and afterwards flaxseed or slippery-elm-
bark tea, and after a while a dose of
castor oil.
Opium and All Its Compounds —
Morphine, Laudanum, Paregoric, Etc. —
Symptoms: Giddiness, drowsiness, in-
creasing to stupor., and insensibility;
pulse usually, at first, quick and ir-
regular, and breathing hurried, and
afterwards pulse slow and feeble, and
respiration slow and noisy; the pupils are
contracted and the eyes and face con-
gested, and later, as death approaches,
the extremities become cold, the surface
is covered with cold, clammy perspira-
tion, and the sphincters relax. The ef-
fects of opium and its preparations, in
poisonous doses, appear in from a half
to two hours from its administration.
Treatment: Empty the stomach imme-
diately with an emetic or with the stom-
ach pump. Then give very strong
coffee without milk; put mustard plasters
on the wrists and ankles; douche the head
and chest with cold water, and if the
patient is cold and sinking, give brandy,
or whisky and ammonia. Belladonna is
thought by many to counteract the poi-
sonous effects of opium, and may be
given in doses of half to a teaspoonful of
the tincture, or 2 grains of the extract,
every 20 minutes, until some effect is
observed in causing the pupils to ex-
pand. Use warmth and friction, and
if possible prevent sleep for some hours,
for which purpose the patient should
be walked about between two persons.
Finally, as a last resort, use artificial
respiration, persistence in which will some-
times be rewarded with success in ap-
parently hopeless cases. Electricity should
also be tried.
Cooley advises as follows: Vomiting
must be .induced as soon as possible, by
means of a strong emetic and tickling the
fauces. If this does not succeed, the
stomach pump should be applied. The
emetic may consist of a half drachm of
sulphate of zinc dissolved in a half pint
of warm water, of which one-third should
96
ANTIDOTES FOR POISONS
be taken at once, and the remainder at
the rate of a wineglassful every 5 or 10
minutes, until vomiting commences.
When there is much drowsiness or stupor
1 or 2 fluidrachms of tincture of capsi-
cum will be found a useful addition; or
one of the formulas for emetic draughts
may be taken instead. Infusion of galls,
cinchona, or oak bark should be freely
administered before the emetic, and
water soured with vinegar and lemon
juice, after the stomach has been well
cleared out. To rouse the system
spirit and water or strong coffee may be
given. To keep the sufferer awake,
rough friction should be applied to the
skin, an upright posture preserved, and
walking exercise enforced, if necessary.
When this is ineffectual cold water may
be dashed over the chest, head, and
spine, or mild shocks of electricity may
be had recourse to. To allow the suffer-
er to sleep is to abandon him to destruc-
tion. Bleeding may be subsequently
necessary in plethoric habits, or in
threatened congestion. The costiveness
that accompanies convalescence may be
best met by aromatic aperients; and the
general tone of the habit restored by stim-
ulating tonics and the shower bath.
The smallest fatal dose of opium in the
case of an adult within our recollection
was 4 £ grains. Children are much more
susceptible to the action of opium 'than
of other medicines, and hence the dose of
it for them must be diminished consid-
erably below that indicated by the com-
mon method of calculation depending on
the age.
Oxalic Acid.— See Acids.
Phosphorus — Found in Lucifer
Matches and Some Rat Poisons. — Symp-
toms: Symptoms of irritant poisoning;
pain in tha stomach and bowels; vomit-
ing, diarrhea; tenderness and tension
of the abdomen. Treatment: An emetic
is to be promptly given; copious draughts
containing magnesia in suspension; mu-
cilaginous drinks. General treatment
for inflammatory symptoms.
Poisonous Mushrooms. — Symptoms:
Nausea, heat and pains in the stomach
and bowels; vomiting and purging,
thirst, convulsions, and faintings; pulse
small and frequent, dilated pupil and
stupor, cold sweats and death. Treat-
ment: The stomach and bowels are to be
cleared by an emetic of ground mustard
or sulphate of zinc, followed by frequent
doses of Glauber's or of Epsom salts, and
large stimulating clysters. After the
poison is evacuated, either may be given
with small quantities of brandy and
water. But if inflammatory symptoms
manifest themselves such stimuli should
be avoided, and these symptoms appro-
priately treated. A hypodermic injection
of gV grain of atropine is the latest discovered
antidote.
Potash.— See Alkali.
Prussic or Hydrocyanic Acid. — See
Acids.
Poison Ivy. — Symptoms: Contact
with, and with many persons the near
approach to, the vine gives rise to vio-
lent erysipelatous inflammation, espe-
cially of the face and hands, attended
with itching, redness, burning, and swell-
ing, with watery blisters. Treatment:
Give saline laxatives, and apply weak
sugar of lead and laudanum, or limewater
and sweet oil, or bathe the parts freely with
spirits of niter. Anointing with oil will
prevent poisoning from it.
Saltpeter (Nitrate of Potash).— Symp-
toms: Only poisonous in large quanti-
ties, and then causes nausea, painful
vomiting, purging, convulsions, faint-
ness, feeble pulse, cold feet and hands,
with tearing pains in stomach and bowels.
Treatment: Treat as is directed for
arsenic, for there is no antidote known,
and emptying the stomach and bowels
with mild drinks must be relied on.
Savine. — Symptoms: Sharp pains in
the bowels, hot skin, rapid pulse, violent
vomiting and sometimes purging, with
great prostration. Treatment: Mus-
tard and hot fomentations over the
stomach and bowels and ice allowed
in the stomach only until the inflam-
mation ceases. If prostration comes on,
food and stimulants must be given by
injection.
Stramonium, Thorn Apple, or James-
town Weed. — Symptoms: Vertigo, head-
ache, perversion of vision, slight delir-
ium, sense of suffocation, disposition to
sleep, bowels relaxed, and all secretions
augmented. Treatment: Same as for
belladonna.
Snake Bites, Cure for. — The Inspector
of Police in the Bengal Government re-
ports that of 939 cases in which ammonia
was freely administered, 207 victims have
recovered, and in the cured instances the
remedy was not administered till about
3i hours after the attack; on the average
of the fatal cases the corresponding
duration of time was 44 hours.
Strychnine or Nux Vomica. — The char-
acteristic symptom is the special influ-
ence exerted upon the nervous system,
ANTIDOTES FOR POISONS
97
which is manifested by a general con-
traction of all the muscles of the body,
with rigidity of the spinal column. A
profound calm soon succeeds, which is
followed by a new tetanic seizure, longer
than the first, during which the respira-
tion is suspended. These symptoms
then cease, the breathing becomes easy,
and there is stupor, followed by another
general contraction. In fatal cases
these attacks are renewed, at intervals,
with increasing violence, until death en-
sues. One phenomenon which is found
only in poisonings by substances con-
taining strychnine is that touching any
part of the body, or even threatening
to do so, instantly produces the tetanic
spasm. Antidote: The stomach should
be immediately cleared by means of an
emetic, tickling the fauces, etc. To
counteract the asphyxia from tetanus,
etc., artificial respiration should be
practiced with diligence and care. "If
the poison has been applied externally,
we ought immediately to cauterize the
part, and apply a ligature tightly above
the wound. If the poison has been
swallowed for some time we shouH give
a purgative clyster, and administer
draughts containing sulphuric ether or
oil of turpentine, which in most cases
produce a salutary effect. Lastly, in-
jections of chlorine and decoction of
tannin are of value."
According to Ch. Gunther the great-
est reliance may be placed on full doses
of opium, assisted by venesection, in
cases of poisoning by strychnia or nux
vomica. His plan is to administer this
drug in the form of solution or mix-
ture, in combination with a saline ape-
rient.
Another treatment is to give, if obtain-
able, 1 ounce or more of bone charcoal
mixed with water, and follow with an
active emetic; then to give chloroform in
teaspoonful doses, in flour and water or
glycerine, every few minutes while the
spasms last, and afterwards brandy and
stimulants, and warmth of the extremi-
ties if necessary. Recoveries have fol-
lowed the free and prompt administra-
tion of oils or melted butter or lard. ^ In
all cases empty the stomach if possible.
Sulphate of Zinc— White Vitriol.— See
Zinc.
Tin— Chloride of Tin, Solution of Tin
(used by dyers), Oxide of Tin, or Putty
Powder. — Symptoms: Vomiting, pains
in the stomach, anxiety, restlessness, fre-
quent pulse, delirium, etc. Treatment:
Empty the stomach, and give whites of
eggs in water, milk in large quantities,
or flour beaten up in water, with mag-
nesia or chalk.
Tartar Emetic. — See Antimony.
Tobacco. — Symptoms: Vertigo, stu-
por, fainting, nausea, vomiting, sudden
nervous debility, cold sweat, tremors,
and at times fatal prostration. Treat-
ment: After the stomach is empty apply
mustard to the abdomen and to the ex-
tremities, and give strong coffee, with
brandy and other stimulants, with
warmth to the extremities.
Zinc— Oxide of Zinc, Sulphate of
Zinc, White Vitriol, Acetate of Zinc.—
Symptoms: Violent vomiting, astrin-
gent taste, burning pain in the stomach,
pale countenance, cold extremities, dull
eyes, fluttering pulse. Death seldom
ensues, in consequence of the emetic
effect. Treatment: The vomiting may
be relieved by copious draughts of warm
water. Carbonate of soda, administered
in solution, will decompose the sulphate
of zinc. Milk and albumen will also act
as antidotes. General principles to be
observed in the subsequent treatment.
Woorara. — Symptoms: When taken
into the stomach it is inert; when ab-
sorbed through a wound it causes sudden
stupor and insensibility, frothing at the
mouth, and speedy death. Treatment:
Suck the wound immediately, or cut it
out and tie a cord around the limb be-
tween the wound and the heart. Apply
iodine, or iodide of potassium, and give it
internally, and try artificial respiration.
ANTIFERMENTS.
The following are tried and useful
formulas:
I. — Sulphite (not sulphate) of lime,
in fine powder, 1 part; marble dust,
ground oyster shells, or chalk, 7 parts;
mix, and pack tight, so as to exclude the
air.
II. — Sulphite (not sulphate) of potassa,
1 part; new black-mustard seed (ground
in a pepper mill), 7 parts; mix, and pack
so as to exclude air and moisture per-
fectly. Dose (of either), | ounce to 1^
ounces per hogshead.
III. — Mustard seed, 14 pounds; cloves
and capsicum, of each, 1| pounds; mix,
and grind them to powder in a pep-
per mill. Dose, f to ^ pound per hogs-
head.
A portion of any one of these compounds
added to cider, or the like, soon allays
fermentation, when excessive, or when
it has been renewed. The first formula
is preferred when there is a tendency to
acidity. The second and third may be
advantageously used for wine and beer, as
98
ANTISEPTICS
well as for cider. The third compound
greatly improves the flavor and the ap-
parent strength of the liquor, and also
improves its keeping qualities.
Anchovy Preparations
Extemporaneous Anchovy Sauce. —
Anchovies, chopped
small 3 or 4
Butter 3 ounces
Water 2 ounces
Vinegar 1 ounce
Flour 1 ounce
Mix, place over the fire, and stir until
the mixture thickens. Then rub through
a coarse sieve.
Essence of Anchovies. — Remove the
bones from 1 pound of anchovies, reduce
the remaining portions of the fish to a
pulp in a Wedgewood mortar, and pass
through a clean hair or brass sieve. Boil
the bones and other portions which will
not pass through the sieve in 1 pint of
water for 15 minutes, and strain. To
the strained liquor add 2£ ounces of salt
and 2* ounces of flour, and the pulped
anchovies. Let the whole simmer over
the fire for three or four minutes; re-
move from the fire, and when the mix-
ture has cooled a little add 4 ounces of
strong vinegar. The product (nearly
3 pounds) may be then bottled, and the
corks tied over with bladder, and either
waxed or capsuled.
Anchovy Paste. —
Anchovies 7 pounds
Water 9 pints
Salt 1 pound
Flour 1 pound
Capsicum J ounce
Grated lemon peel. . . 1
Mushroom catsup. . . 4 ounces
Anchovy Butter. —
Anchovies, boned and
beaten to a paste . . 1 part
Butter 2 parts
Spice enough
ANTIFOULING COMPOSITIONS :
See Paints.
ANTIFREEZING SOLUTION :
See Freezing Preventives.
ANTIFRICTION METAL :
See Alloys, under Phosphor Bronze
and Antifriction Metals.
ANTIQUES, TO PRESERVE.
The best process for the preservation
of antique metallic articles consists in a
retransformation of the metallic oxides
into metal by the electrolytic method.
For this purpose a zinc strip is wound
around the article and the latter is laid
in a soda-lye solution of 5 per cent, or
suspended as the negative pole of a small
battery in a potassium cyanide solution
of 2 per cent. Where this method does
not seem practicable it is advisable to
edulcorate the objects in running water,
in which operation fragile or easily de-
stroyed articles may be protected by
winding with gauze; next, they should
be carefully dried, first in the air, then
with moderate heat, and finally protected
from further destruction by immersion
in melted paraffiiie. A dry place is re-
quired for storing the articles, since par-
affine is not perfectly impermeable to
water in the shape of steam.
ANTIRUST COMPOSITIONS:
See Rust Preventives.
Antiseptics
Antiseptic Powders. —
I. — Borax 3 ounces
Dried alum 3 ounces
Thymol 22 grains
Eucalyptol 20 drops
Menthol 1£ grains
Phenol 15 grains
Oil of gaultheria ... 4 drops
Carmine to give a pink tint.
II. — Alum, powdered - . 5(H ^
Borax, powdered 50 3
Carbolic acid, crystals ... 5 | £,
Oil of eucalyptus 5 V<<
Oil of wintergreen 5 |
Menthol . . 5 '«'
Thymol
J
III. — Boracic acid 10 ounces
Sodium biborate. . 4 ounces
Alum 1 ounce
Zinc sulphocarbolate 1 ounce
Thymic acid 1 drachm.
Mix thoroughly. For an antiseptic
wash dissolve 1 or 2 drachms in a quart
of warm wa.ter.
IV. — Ektogan is a new dusting powder
which is a mixture of zinc hydroxide and
dioxide. It is equivalent to about 8 per
cent of active oxygen. It is a yellowish-
white odorless and tasteless powder, in-
soluble in water. It is used externally in
wounds and in skin diseases as a moist
dressing mixed with citric, tartaric, or
ANTISEPTICS
99
.
tannic acid, which causes the liberation
of oxygen. With iodides it liberates
iodine. It is stated to be strongly anti-
septic; it is used in the form of a powder,
a gauze, and a plaster.
Antiseptic Pencils. —
I. — Tannin q. s.
Alcohol, q. s 1 part
Ether, q. s 3 parts
Make into a mass, using as an excip-
ient the alcohol and ether previously
mixed. Roll into pencils of the desired
length and thickness. Then coat with
collodion, roll in pure silver leaf, and
finally coat with the following solution of
gelatine and set aside to dry:
Gelatine 1 drachm
Water 1 pint
Dissolve by the aid of a gentle heat.
When wanted for use, shave away a
portion of the covering, dip the pencil
into tepid water and apply.
II. — Pencils for stopping bleeding are
prepared by mixing:
Purified alum 480 1
Borax 24
Oxide zinc 2i
Thymol 8
Formalin 4
Melting carefully in a water bath, add-
ing some perfume, and forming mixture
into pencils or cones.
A very convenient way to form into
pencils where no mold need be made is
to take a small glass tube, roll a piece of
oil paper around the tube, remove the
glass tube, crimp the paper tube thus
formed on one end and stand it on end
or in a bottle, and pour the melted so-
lution in it and leave until cool, then re-
move the paper.
Antiseptic Paste (Poison) for Organic
Specimens. —
(a) Wheat flour 16 ounces
Beat to a batter with
cold water 16 fluidounces
Then pour into boil-
ing water 32 fluidounces
(6) Pulverized gum ar-
abic 2 ounces
Dissolve in boil-
ing water. ...... 4 fluidounces
<£) Pulverized alum. .. 2 ounces
Dissolve in boil-
ing water 4 fluidounces
(d) Acetate of lead .... 2 ounces
Dissolve in boil-
ing water 4 fluidounces
(e) Corrosive sublimate 10 grains
Mix (a) and (6) while hot and continue
to simmer; meanwhile stir in (r) -and
mix thoroughly; then add (d). Stir
briskly, and pour in the dry corrosive
sublimate. This paste is very poison-
ous. It is used for anatomical work and
for pasting organic tissue, labels on skel-
etons, etc.
Mouth Antiseptics.— I.— Thymic acid,
25 centigrams (3£ grains): benzoic acid,
3 grams (45 grains); essence of pep-
permint, 75 centigrams (10 minims);
tincture of eucalyptus, 15 grams (4 A
drachms) ; alcohol, 100 grams (3 ounces).
Put sufficient in a glass of water to render
latter milky.
II. — Tannin, 12 grams (3 drachms);
menthol, 8 grams (2 drachms); thymol,
1 gram (15 grains); tincture benzoin, 6
grams (90 minims); alcohol, 100 grams
(3 ounces). Ten drops in a half-glassful
of tepid water.
See also Dentifrices for Mouth
Washes.
Antiseptic Paste.— Difficulty is often
experienced in applying an antiseptic
dressing to moist surfaces, such as the
lips after operation for harelip. A paste
for this purpose is described by its origi-
nator, Socin. The composition is: Zinc
oxide, 50 parts; zinc chloride, 5 parts;
distilled water, 50 parts. The paste is
applied to the wound, previously dried
by means of a brush or spatula, allowed
to dry on, and to remain in place five or
six days. It may then be removed and
a fresh application made.
Potassium bicar-
bonate 32.0 grams
Sodium benzoate . . 32.0 grams
Sodium borate 8.0 grams
Thymol 0.2 gram
Eucalyptol 2.0 c. cent.
Oil of peppermint.. 0.2 c. cent.
Oil of wintergreen. . 0.4 c. cent.
Tincture of cudbear 15.0 c. cent.
Alcohol 60.0 c. cent.
Glycerine 250.0 c. cent.
Water, enough to
make 1,000.0 c. centimeters
Dissolve the salts in 650 cubic centi-
meters of water, and t>he thymol, eucalyp-
tol, and oils in the alcohol. Mix the
alcoholic solution with the glycerine and
add the aqueous liquid, then the tincture
of cudbear, and lastly enough water to
make 1,000 cubic centimeters. Allow
to stand a few days, then filter, adding a
little magnesium carbonate to the filter,
if necessary, to get a brilliant filtrate.
This is from the Formulary of the
Bournemouth Pharmaceutical Associa-
tion, as reported in the Canadian Phar-
maceutical Association:
100
ANTISEPTICS
Alkaline Glycerine of Thymol. —
Sodium bicarbonate. . 100 grains
Sodium biborate 200 grains
Sodium benzoate 80 grains
Sodium salicylate .... 40 grains
Menthol 2 grains
Pumilio pine oil 4 minims
Wintergreen oil 2 minims
Thymol 4 grains
Eucalyptol 12 minims
Compound Solution of Thymol. —
A
Benzoic acid 64 grains
Borax 64 grains
Boric acid 128 grains
Distilled water 6 ounces
Dissolve.
B
Thymol 20 grains
Menthol 6 grains
Eucalyptol 4 minims
Oil of wintergreen. ... 4 minims
Oil of peppermint. ... 2 minims
Oil of thyme 1 minim
Alcohol (90 per cent) . 3 ounces
Dissolve.
Mix solutions A and B, make up to
20 fluidounces with distilled water, and
filter.
Oil of Cinnamon as an Antiseptic. —
Oil of cinnamon in a 9-per-cent emulsion,
when used upon the hands, completely
sterilizes them. A 7-to 8-per-cent emul-
sion is equal to a 1-per-cent solution of
corrosive sublimate and is certainly far
more agreeable to use. Oil of thyme in
an 11-per-cent solution is equal to a 7-per-
cent solution of cinnamon oil.
Green Coloring for Antiseptic Solu-
tions.— The safest coloring substance for
use in a preparation intended either for
internal administration or for applica-
tion to the skin is the coloring matter of
leaves, chlorophyll. A tincture of spin-
ach or of grass made by macerating 2
ounces of the freshly cut leaves in a pint
of alcohol for five days will be found to
give good results. If the pure coloring
substance is wanted the solvent should
be evaporated off.
Antiseptic Bromine Solution. —
Bromine 1 ounce
Sodium chloride 8 ounces
Water 8 pints
Dissolve the sodium chloride in the
water and add the bromine. This solu-
tion is to be diluted, when applied to
broken skin surfaces, 1 part with 15
parts of water.
Substitute for Rubber Gloves.— Mur-
phy has found that a 4-, 6-, or 8-per-cent
solution of gutta-percha in benzine, when
applied to the hands of the surgeon or
the skin of the patient, will seal these
surfaces with an insoluble, impervious,
and practically imperceptible coating —
a coating that will not allow the secre-
tions of the skin to escape, and will not
admit secretions, blood, or pus into the
crevices of the skin. At the same time
it does not impair the sense of touch nor
the pliability of the skin. A similar solu-
tion in acetone also meets most of the
requirements.
Murphy's routine method of hand prep-
aration is as follows: First, five to seven
minutes' scrubbing with spirits of green
soap and running hot water; second,
three minutes' washing with alcohol;
third, when the hands are thoroughly
dried, the gutta-percha solution is poured
over the hands and forearms, care being
taken to fill in around and beneath the
nails. The hands must be kept exposed
to the air with the fingers separated until
thoroughly dry. The coating is very
thin and can be recognized only by its
glazed appearance. It will resist soap
and water, but is easily removed by wash-
ing in benzine. The hands can be
washed in bichloride or any of the anti-
septic solutions without interfering with
the coating or affecting the skin. If
the operations be many, or prolonged,
the coating wears away from the tips
of the fingers, but is easily renewed. For
the remaining portion of the hands one
application is sufficient for a whole morn-
ing's work.
The 4-per-cent solution of rubber wears
better on the tips of the fingers, in han-
dling instruments, sponges, and tissues
than the acetone solution.
For the abdomen the acetone solution
has the advantage, and it dries in three
to four seconds after its application,
while the benzine solution takes from
three to four and a half minutes to make
a dry, firm coating.
The preparation of the patient's skin
consists in five minutes' scrubbing with
spirits of green soap, washing with ether,
followed by alcohol. The surface is then
swabbed over thoroughly with the ben-
zine or acetone solution.
The gutta-percha solution is prepared
by dissolving the pure gutta-percha chips
in sterile benzine or acetone. These
solutions do not stand boiling, as this
impairs the adhesiveness and elasticity of
the coating.
ANTISEPTICS FOR CAGED BIRDS:
See Veterinary Formulas.
ANTISEPTICS
101
APOLLINARIS :
See Waters.
APPLE SYRUP:
See Essences and Extracts.
AQUA FORTIS FOR BRIGHT LUS-
TER:
See Castings.
AQUA FORTIS FOR THE TOUCH-
STONE :
See Gold.
AQUARIUM CEMENTS:
See Adhesives.
AQUARIUM PUTTY:
See Putty.
ARGENTAN :
See Alloys.
ARMENIAN CEMENT:
See Adhesives under Jewelers' Ce-
ments.
ARMS, OIL FOR :
See Lubricants.
ARNICA SALVE :
See Ointments.
ARSENIC ALLOYS:
See Alloys.
ASBESTOS CEMENT:
See Adhesives.
ASBESTOS FABRIC :
See Fireproofing.
ASPHALT AS AN INGREDIENT OF
INDIA RUBBER:
See Rubber.
ASPHALT IN PAINTING:
See Paint.
ASPHALT VARNISHES:
See Varnishes.
ASSAYING:
See Gold.
ASTHMA CUKES.— Asthma Papers.—
I. — Impregnate bibulous paper with the
following: Extract of stramonium, 10;
potassium nitrate, 17; sugar, 20; warm
water, 200 parts. Dry.
II. — Blotting or gray filter paper, 120;
potassium nitrate, 60; powdered bella-
donna leaves, 5; powdered stramonium
leaves, 5; powdered digitalis leaves, 5;
powdered lobelia, 5; myrrh, 10; oli-
banum, 10; phellandrium fruits, 5 parts.
Stramonium Candle. — Powdered stra-
monium leaves, 120; potassium nitrate,
72; Peruvian balsam, 3; powdered sugar,
1; powdered tragacanth, 4 parts. (Water,
q. s. to mass; roll into suitable shapes
and dry.)
deary's Asthma Fumigating Fowder.
— Powdered stramonium, 15; powdered
belladonna leaves, 15; powdered opium,
2; potassium nitrate, 5.
Asthma Fumigating Powders. — I. —
Powdered stramonium leaves, 4; pow-
dered aniseed, 2; potassium nitrate, 2
parts.
II. — Powdered stramonium, 30; potas-
sium nitrate, 5; powdered tea, 15; pow-
dered eucalyptus leaves, 15; powdered
Indian hemp, 15; powdered lobelia, 15;
powdered aniseed, 2; distilled water, 45
parts. (All the herbal ingredients in
coarse powder; moisten with the water in
which the potassium nitrate has been
previously dissolved, and dry.)
Schiffmann's Asthma Powder. — Potas-
sium nitrate, 25; stramonium, 70; bella-
donna leaves, 5 parts.
Neumeyer's Asthma Powder. — Potas-
sium nitrate, 6 parts; sugar, 4; stramo-
nium, 6; powdered lobelia, 1.
Fischer's Asthma Powder. — Stramo-
nium, 5 parts ; potassium nitrate, 1 ; pow-
dered Achillea millefolium leaves, 1.
Vorlaender's Asthma Powder. — Stra-
monium, 150; lobelia, 80; arnica flowers,
80; potassium nitrate, 30; potassium
iodide, 3; naphthol, 1,100 parts.
Asthma Cigarettes. — I. — Belladonna
leaves, 5 parts; stramonium leaves, 5
parts; digitalis leaves, 5 parts; sage
leaves, 5 parts; potassium nitrate, 75
parts; tincture of benzoin, 40 parts; boil-
ing water, 1,000 parts. Extract the
leaves with the boiling writer, filter, and
in the filtrate dissolve the salts. Im-
merse in the fluid sheets of bibulous
paper (Swedish filter paper will an-
swer) and let remain for 24 hours. At
the end of this time remove, dry, cut into
pieces about 2f by 4 inches, and roll into
cigarettes.
II. — Sodium arseniate, 3 grains; ex-
tract of belladonna, 8 grains; extract of
stramonium, 8 grains. Dissolve the ar-
seniate of sodium in a small quantity of
water, and rub it with the two extracts.
Then soak up the whole mixture with
fine blotting paper, which is dried and
cut into 24 equal parts. Each part is
rolled up in a piece of cigarette paper.
Four or five inhalations are generally
sufficient as a dose.
ASTHMA IN CANARIES:
See Veterinary Formulas.
ASTRINGENT FOR HORSES:
See Veterinary Formulas.
ATOMIC WEIGHTS:
See Weights and Measures.
102
BAKING POWDERS
ATRjOPINE,,
The usual physiological antidotes to
the mydriatic alkaloids from belladonna,
stramonium, and hyoscyamus are mor-
phine or eserine. Strong tea, coffee, or
brandy are usually administered as stim-
ulants. Chief reliance has usually been
placed upon a stomach siphon and
plenty of water to wash out the contents
of the stomach. The best antidote ever
reported was that of muscarine extracted
by alcohol from the mushroom, Amanita
muscaria, but the difficulty of securing
the same has caused it to be overlooked
and almost forgotten. Experiments
with this antidote showed it to be an al-
most perfect opposite of atropine in its
effects upon the animal body and that
it neutralized poisonous doses.
AQUA AROMATIC A.—
Cort. cinnam. chinens. 3 parts
Flor. lavandulae 5 parts
Fol. Menth. pip 5 parts
Fol. rosmarini 5 parts
Fol. salvise 10 parts
Fruct. fceniculi 3 parts
Spiritus 70 parts
Aqua 300 parts
Macerate the drugs in the mixed al-
cohol and water for 24 hours and distill
200 parts.
AQUA REGIA. — Aqua regia consists
in principle of 2 parts of hydrochloric acid
and 1 part of nitric acid. But this quan-
tity varies according to the shop where it
is used for gilding or jewelry, and some-
times the proportion is brought to 4 parts
of hydrochloric acid to 1 of nitric acid.
AUTOMOBILES, ANTIFREEZING SO-
LUTION FOR:
See Freezing Preventives.
AXLE GREASE:
See Lubricants.
BABBITT METAL:
See Alloys.
Baking Powders
I. — Tartaric acid, 3 parts; sodium
bicarbonate, 1 part; starch, 0.75 part.
Of this baking powder the required
amount for 500 parts of flour is about
20 parts for rich cake, and 15 parts for
lean cake.
The substances employed must be
dry, each having been previously sifted
by itself, so that no coarse pieces are
present; the starch is mixed with the
sodium bicarbonate before the acid is
added. When large quantities are pre-
pared the mixing is done by machine;
smaller quantities are best mixed to-
gether in a spacious mortar, and then
passed repeatedly through a sieve. In-
stead of starch, flour may be used, but
starch is preferable, because it inter-
feres with the action of the acid on the
alkali.
II. — A formula proposed by Cramp-
ton, of the United States Department of
Agriculture, as the result of an investi-
gation of the leading baking powders of
the market, is:
Potassium bitartrate. . . 2 parts
Sodium bicarbonate. .. 1 part
Cornstarch 1 part
The addition of the starch serves the
double purpose of a " filler" to increase
the weight of the powder and as a pre-
servative. A mixture of the chemicals
alone does not keep well.
The stability of the preparation is in-
creased by drying each ingredient sepa-
rately by exposure to a gentle heat, mixing
at once, and immediately placing in bot-
tles or cans and excluding access of air
and consequently of moisture.
This is not a cheap powder; but it is
the best that can be made, as to health-
fulness.
III. — Sodium acid phos-
phate 20 parts
Calcium acid phos-
phate 20 parts
Sodium bicarbonate 25 parts
Starch 35 parts
Caution as to drying the ingredients
and keeping them dry muse be observed.
Even the mixing should be done in a
room free from excessive humidity.
IV.— Alum Baking Powder.—
Ammonium alum,
anhydrous 15 parts
Sodium bicarbonate 18 parts
Cornstarch, q. s. to make 100 parts.
Mix. The available carbon dioxide
yielded is 7J per cent or 8 per cent.
BALANCE SPRING:
See Watchmakers' Formulas.
BALDNESS :
See Hair Preparations.
BALL BLUE:
See Laundry Preparations.
BALSAMS :
See also Ointments.
• BALSAMS
103
Wild-Cherry Balsam.—
Wild-cherry bark. . 1 ounce
Licorice root 1 ounce
Ipecac 1 ounce
Bloodroot 1 drachm
Sassafras 1 drachm
Compound tincture
of opium 1 fluidounce
Fluid extract of
cubeb 4 fluidrachms
Moisten the ground drugs with the
fluid extract and tincture and enough
menstruum consisting of 25 per cent
alcohol, and after six or eight hours pack
in a percolator, and pour on menstruum
until percolation begins. Then cork the
orifice, cover the percolator, and allow to
macerate for 24 hours. Then percolate
to 10 fluidounces, pouring back the first
portion of percolate until it comes through
clear. In the percolate dissolve £ ounce
of ammonium chloride and A pound of
sugar by cold percolation, adding simple
syrup to make 16 fluidounces. Finally
add 1 fluidrachm of chloroform.
Balsam Spray Solution. —
Oil of Scotch pine. . . 30 minims
Oil of eucalyptus 1 drachm
Oil of cinnamon .... 30 minims
Menthol crystals. ... q. s.
Fluid extract of balm-
of-Gilead buds ... 1 drachm
Tincture of benzoin,
enough to make . . 4 ounces
This formula can, of course, be modi-
fied to suit your requirements. The oils
of eucalyptus and cinnamon can be omit-
ted and such quantities of tincture of
tolu and tincture of myrrh incorporated
as may be desired.
Birch Balsam. —
Parts by
weight
Alcohol 30,000
Birch juice 3,000
Glycerine 1,000
Bergamot oil 90
Vanillin.... 10
Geranium oil 50
Water 14,000
BALSAM STAINS, TO REMOVE :
See Cleaning Preparations and Meth-
ods.
BANANA BRONZING SOLUTION:
See Plating.
BANANA SYRUP:
See Essences and Extracts.
BANANA TRICK, THE BURNING:
See Pyrotechnics.
BANJO SOUR:
See Beverages under Lemonade.
BAR POLISHES :
See Polishes.
BARBERS'-ITCH CURE:
See Ointments.
BARBERS' POWDER:
See Cosmetics.
BAROMETERS (PAPER):
See Hygrometers and Hygroscopes.
BATH, AIR:
See Air Bath.
BATH METAL:
See Alloys.
BATH POWDER:
See Cosmetics.
BATH TABLETS, EFFERVESCENT.
Tartaric acid 10 parts
Sodium bicarbonate. . 9 parts
Rice flour 6 parts
A few spoonfuls of this, when stirred
into a bathtubful of water, causes a co-
pious liberation of carbon dioxide, which
is refreshing. This mixture can be made
into tablets by compression, moistening,
if necessary, with alcohol. Water, of
course, cannot be used in making them,
as its presence causes the decomposition
referred to. Perfume may be added to
this powder, essential oils being a good
form. Oil of lavender would be a suit-
able addition, in the proportion of a
fluidrachm or more to the pound of
powder. A better but more expensive
perfume may be obtained by mixing 1
part of oil of rose geranium with 6 parts
of oil of lavender. A perfume still more
desirable may be had by adding a mix-
ture of the oils from which Cologne water
is made. For an ordinary quality the
following will suffice:
Oil of lavender . . 4 fluidrachms
Oil of rosemary. . 4 fluidrachms
Oil of bergamot. . 1 fluidounce
Oil of lemon 2 fluidounces
Oil of clove 30 minims
For the first quality the following may
be taken:
Oil of neroli 6 fluidrachms
Oil of rosemary. . 3 fluidrachms
Oil of bergamot.. 3 fluidrachms
Oilofcedrat 7 fluidrachms
Oil of orange peel 7 fluidrachms
A fluidrachm or more of either of these
mixtures may be used to the pound, as in
the case of lavender.
These mixtures may also be used in the
preparation of a bath powder (non-effer-
104
BATTERY FILLERS
vescent) made by mixing equal parts of
powdered soap and powdered borax.
BATH-TUB ENAMEL :
See Varnishes.
BATH-TUB PAINTS:
See Paint.
BATTERY FILLERS AND SOLUTIONS.
I. — In the so-called dry batteries the
exciting substance is a paste instead of
a fluid; moisture is necessary to cause
the reaction. These pastes are gener-
ally secret preparations. One of the
earlier "dry" batteries is that of Gassner.
The apparatus consists of a containing
vessel of zinc, which forms the positive
element; the negative one is a cylinder
of carbon, and the space between is
filled with a paste, the recipe for which is:
Oxide of zinc 1 part
Sal ammoniac 1 part
Plaster 3 parts
Chloride of zinc 1 part
Water 2 parts
The usual form of chloride-of-silyer
battery consists of a sealed cell contain-
ing a zinc electrode, the two being gen-
erally separated by some form of porous
septum. Around the platinum or silver
electrode is cast a quantity of silver
chloride. This is melted and general-
ly poured into molds surrounding the
metallic electrode. The exciting fluid
is either a solution of ammonium chlo-
ride, caustic potassa, or soda, or zinc
sulphate. As ordinarily constructed,
these cells contain a paste of the electro-
lyte, and are sealed up hermetically in
glass or hard-rubber receptacles.
II. — The following formula is said to
yield a serviceable filling for dry batteries:
Charcoal 3 ounces
Graphite 1 ounce
Manganese dioxide. .. 3 ounces
Calcium hydrate 1 ounce
Arsenic acid 1 ounce
Glucose mixed with
dextrine or starch . . 1 ounce
Intimately mix, and then work into a
paste of proper consistency with a sat-
urated solution of sodium and ammo-
nium chlorides containing one-tenth of
its volume of a mercury-bichloride solu-
tion and an equal volume of hydrochloric
acid. Add the fluid gradually, and well
work up the mass.
III. — Calcium chloride,
crystallized 30 parts
Calcium chloride,
granulated 30 parts
Ammonium sulphate 15 parts
Zinc sulphate 25 parts
Solutions for Batteries. — The almost
exclusively employed solution of sal am-
moniac (ammonium chloride) presents
the drawback that the zinc rods, glasses,
etc., after a short use, become covered
with a fine, yellow, very difficultly sol-
uble, basic zinc salt, whereby the gen-
eration of the electric current is impaired,
and finally arrested altogether. This
evil may be remedied by an admixture of
cane sugar. For a battery of ordinary
size about 20 to 25 grams of sugar, dis-
solved in warm water, is sufficient per
50 to 60 grams of sal ammoniac/ After
prolonged use only large crystals (of a
zinc saccharate) form, which, however,
become attached only to the zinc rod in
a few places, having very little disad-
vantageous effect upon the action of the
batteries and being easy to remove, owing
to their ready solubility.
BAUDOIN METAL:
See Alloys.
BAY RUM.
I. — Oil of bay 1 drachm
Alcohol 18 ounces
Water 18 ounces
Mix and filter through magnesia.
II. — Bay-leaf otto A ounce
Magnesium carbonate. ^ ounce
Jamaica rum 2 pints
Alcohol 3 pints
Water 3 pints
Triturate the otto with the magnesium
carbonate, gradually adding the other
ingredients, previously mixed, and filter.
If the rum employed contains sufficient
sugar or mucilaginous matter to cause
any stickiness to be felt on the skin, rec-
tification will be necessary.
BEAR FAT:
See Fats.
BEARING LUBRICANT:
See Lubricants.
BEARING METAL:
See Babbitt Metal, Bearing Metal, and
Phosphor Bronze, under Alloys.
BEDBUG DESTROYERS:
See Insecticides.
BEEF, IRON. AND WINE.
Extract of beef .... 512 grains
Detannated sherry
wine 26 ounces
Alcohol 4 ounces
Citrate of iron and
ammonia 256 grains
Simple sirup 12 ounces
BELT PASTES
105
Tincture of orange . 2 ounces
Tincture of carda-
mom co 1 ounce
Citric acid 10 grains
Water, enough to make 4 pints
Let stand 24 hours, agitate frequently,
and filter. See that the orange is fresh.
BEEF PEPTONOIDS:
See Peptonoids.
BEEF PRESERVATIVES:
See Foods.
BEEF TEA:
See Beverages.
BEERS, ALCOHOL IN :
See Alcohol.
BEER, GINGER, HOP-BITTER,
SCOTCH, AND SPRUCE :
See Beverages.
BEER, RESTORATION OF SPOILED.
I. — Powdered chalk is poured into the
cask and allowed to remain in the beer
until completely precipitated.
II. — The liquor of boiled raisins may
be poured into the beer, with the result
that the sour taste of the beer is disguised.
III. — A small quantity of a solution of
potash will remove the sour taste of
beer. Too much potash must not be
added; otherwise the stomach will suffer.
Beer thus restored will not keep long.
IV. — If the beer is not completely
spoiled it may be restored by the addi-
tion of coarsely powdered charcoal.
V. — If the addition of any of the above-
mentioned substances should affect the
taste of the beer, a little powdered zingi-
ber may be used to advantage. Syrup
or molasses may also be employed.
BEES, FOUL BROOD IN.
"Foul brood" is a contagious disease
to which bees are subject. It is caused
by bacteria and its presence may be
known by the bees becoming languid.
Dark, stringy, and elastic masses are
found in the bottom of the cells, while
the caps are sunken or irregularly punc-
tured. Frequently the disease is said to
be accompanied by a peculiar offensive
odor. Prompt removal of diseased col-
onies, their transfer to clean and thor-
oughly disinfected hives, and feeding on
antiseptically treated honey or syrup are
the means taken for the prevention and
cure of the disease. The antiseptics
used are salicylic acid, carbolic acid, or
formic acid. Spraying the brood with
any one of these remedies in a solution
and feeding with a honey or syrup medi-
cated with them will usually be all that
is required by way of treatment. It is
also said that access to salt water is im-
portant for the health of bees.
BEETLE POWDER:
See Insecticides.
BELL METAL:
See Alloys.
BELLADONNA, ANTIDOTES TO:
See Antidotes and Atropine.
BELT PASTES FOR INCREASING
ADHESION.
I.— Tallow. 50 parts
Castor oil, crude. ... 20 parts
Fish oil 20 parts
Colophony 10 parts
Melt on a moderate fire and stir until
the mass cools.
II.— Melt 250 parts of gum elastic
with 250 parts of oil of turpentine in an
iron, well-closed crucible at 122° F.
(caution!) and mix well with 200 parts of
colophony. After further melting add
200 parts of yellow wax and stir carefully.
Melt in 750 parts of heated train oil,
250 parts of tallow, and to this add, with
constant stirring, the first mixture when
the latter is still warm, and let cool slowly
with stirring. This grease is intended
for cotton belts.
III. — Gutta-percha 40 parts
Rosin 10 parts
Asphalt 15 parts
Petroleum 60 parts
Heat in a glass vessel on the water
bath for a few hours, until a uniform so-
lution is obtained. Let cool and add 15
parts of carbon disulphide and allow the
mixture to stand, shaking it frequently.
Directions for Use. — The leather belts
to be cemented should first be roughened
at the joints, and after the cement has
been applied they should be subjected
to a strong pressure between warm
rollers, whereupon they will adhere to-
gether with much tenacity.
Preservation of Belts. — In a well-cov-
ered iron vessel heat at a temperature of
50° C. (152° F.) 1 part by weight of
caoutchouc, cut in small pieces, with 1
part by weight of rectified turpentine.
When the caoutchouc is dissolved add
0.8 part of colophony, stir until this is
dissolved, and add to the mixture 0.1
part of yellow wax. Into another vessel
of suitable size pour 3 parts of fish oil,
add 1 part of tallow, and heat the mixture
until the tallow is melted; then pour on
the contents of the first vessel, con-
stantly stirring — an operation to be con-
tinued until the matter is cooled and
congealed. This grease is to be rubbed
106
BENZINE
on the inside of the belts from time to
time, while they are in use. The belts
run easily and do not slip. The grease
may also serve for improving old belts.
For this purpose the grease should be
rubbed on both sides in a warm place.
A first layer is allowed to soak in, and
another applied.
To Make a Belt Pull.— Hold a piece of
tar soap on the inside of the belt while it
is running.
BELT CEMENT:
See Adhesives.
BELT GLUE:
See Adhesives.
BELT LUBRICANT:
See Lubricants.
BENEDICTINE:
See Wines and Liquors.
Benzine
Benzine, to Color Green. — Probably
the simplest and cheapest as well as the
best method of coloring benzine green is
to dissolve in it sufficient oil soluble aniline
green of the desired tint to give the re-
quired shade.
Purification of Benzine. — Ill-smelling
benzine, mixed with about 1 to 2 per cent
of its weight of free fatty acid, will dis-
solve therein. One-fourth per cent of
tannin is added and all is mixed well.
Enough potash or soda lye, or even lime
milk, is added until the fatty acids are
saponified, and the tannic acid is neu-
tralized, shaking repeatedly. After a
while the milky liquid separates into two
layers, viz., a salty, soapy, mud-sediment
and clear, colorless, and almost odorless
benzine above. This benzine, filtered,
may be employed for many technical
purposes, but gives an excellent, pure
product upon a second distillation.
Fatty acid from tallow, olive oil, or
other fats may be used, but care should
be taken that they have as slight an odor
of rancid fat as possible. The so-called
elaine or olein — more correctly oleic acid
— of the candle factories may likewise
be employed, but it should first be agi-
tated with a rVper-cent soda solution to
get rid of the bad-smelling fatty acids,
especially the butyric acid.
The Prevention of the Inflammability
of Benzine. — A mixture of 9 volumes
tetrachloride and 1 volume of benzine is
practicably inflammable. The flame is
soon extinguished by itself.
Substitute for Benzine as a Cleansing
Agent.—
I. — Chloroform 75 parts
Ether 75 parts
Alcohol 600 parts
Decoction of quillaya
bark 22,500 parts
Mix.
II. — Acetic ether, tech-
nically pure 10 parts
Amyl acetate 10 parts
Ammonia water 10 parts
Alcohol dilute 70 parts
Mix.
III. — Acetone 1 part
Ammonia water 1 part
Alcohol dilute 1 part
Mix.
Deodorizing Benzine. —
I. — Benzine 20 ounces
Oil of lavender. . . 1 fluidrachm
Potassium dichro-
mate 1 ounce
Sulphuric acid. . . 1 fluidounce
Water 20 fluidounces
Dissolve the dichromate in the water,
add the acid and, when the solution is
cold, the benzine. Shake every hour
during the day, allow to stand all night,
decant the benzine, wash with a pint of
water and again decant, then add the oil
of lavender.
II. — First add to the benzine 1 to 2 per
cent of oleic acid, which dissolves. Then
about a quarter of 1 per cent of tannin is
incorporated by shaking. A sufficient
quantity of caustic potassa solution, or
milk of lime, to combine with the acids
is then well shaken into the mixture,
and the whole allowed to stand. The
benzine rises to the top of the watery
fluid, sufficiently deodorized and decol-
orized for practical purposes.
III.— To 1,750 parts of water add 250
parts of sulphuric acid, and when it has
cooled down add 30 parts of potassium
permanganate and let dissolve. Add
this solution to 4,500 parts of benzine,
stir well together, and set aside for 24
hours. Now decant the benzine and to
it add a solution of 7* parts of potassium
permanganate and 15 parts of sodium
hydrate in 1,000 parts of water, and agi-
tate the substances well together. Let
stand until the benzine separates, then
draw oft'.
IV. — Dissolve 3 parts of litharge and
18 parts of sodium hydrate in 40 parts of
water. Add this to 200-250 parts of
benzine and agitate well together for two
minutes, then let settle and draw off the
benzine. Rinse the latter by agitating
BEVERAGES
107
it with plenty of clear water, let settle,
draw off the benzine, and, if necessary,
repeat the operation.
BENZINE, CLEANING WITH:
See Cleaning Preparations and Meth-
ods, under Miscellaneous Methods.
BENZOIC ACID IN FOOD:
See Food.
BENZOIN SOAP:
See Soap.
BENZOPARAL:
A neutral, bland, oily preparation of
benzoin, useful for applying various
antiseptics by the aid of an atomizer,
nebulizer, or vaporizer. Can be used
plain or in combination with other easily
dissolved medicinals.
Paraffine, liquid 16 ounces
Gum benzoin 1 ounce
Digest on a sand bath for a half hour
and filter.
Beverages
GINGER ALE AND GINGER BEER:
Old-Fashioned Ginger Beer. —
Lemons, large and
sound 6 only
Ginger, bruised 3 ounces
Sugar 6 cups
Yeast, compressed ... J cake
Boiling water 4 gallons
Water enough
Slice the lemons into a large earthen-
ware vessel, removing the seed. Add the
ginger, sugar, and water. When the
mixture has cooled to lukewarmness, add
the yeast, first diffused in a little water.
Cover the vessel with a piece of cheese
cloth, and let the beer stand 24 hours.
At the end of that time strain and bottle
it. Cork securely, but not so tightly that
the bottles would break before the corks
would fly out, and keep in a cool place.
Ginger Beer. — Honey gives the bever-
age a peculiar softness and, from not
having fermented with yeast, is the less
violent in its action when opened. In-
gredients: White sugar, I pound; honey,
| pound; bruised ginger, 5 ounces; juice
of sufficient lemons to suit the taste; water,
4 A gallons. Boil the ginger in 3 quarts
of the water for half an hour, then add
the ginger, lemon juice, and honey, with
the remainder of the water; then strain
through a cloth; when cold, add the
quarter of the white of an egg and a tea-
spoonful of essence of lemon. Let the
whole stand for four days before bot-
tling. This quantity will make a hun-
dred bottles.
Ginger Beer without Yeast.—
Ginger, bruised li pounds
Sugar 20 " pounds
Lemons 1 dozen
Honey 1 pound
Water enough
Boil the ginger in 3 gallons of water
for half an hour; add the sugar, the
lemons (bruised and sliced), the honey,
and 17 gallons of water. Strain and,
after three or four days, bottle.
Package Pop. —
Cream of tartar 3 ounces
Ginger, bruised 1 ounce
Sugar 24 ounces
Citric acid 2 drachms
Put up in a package, and direct that it
be shaken in 1J gallons of boiling water,
strained when cooled, fermented with 1
ounce of yeast, and bottled.
Ginger- Ale Extract. —
I. — Jamaica ginger,
coarse powder. . 4 ounces
Mace, powder. ... i ounce
Canada snakeroot,
coarse powder.. 60 grains
Oil of lemon 1 fluidrachm
Alcohol 12 fluidounces
Water. 4 fluidounces
Magnesium car-
bonate or puri-
fied talcum 1 av. ounce
Mix the first four ingredients, and
make 16 fluidounces of tincture with
the alcohol and water, by percolation.
Dissolve the oil of lemon in a small quan-
tity of alcohol, rub with magnesia or tal-
cum, add gradually with constant trit-
uration the tincture, and filter. The
extract may be fortified by adding 4
avoirdupois ounces of powdered grains
of paradise to the ginger, etc., of the
above before extraction with alcohol and
water.
II. — Capsicum, coarse
powder Bounces
Water 6 pints
Essence of ginger. 8 fluidounces
Diluted alcohol.. . 7 fluidounces
Vanilla extract. . . 2 fluidounces
Oil of lemon 20 drops
Caramel 1 fluidounce
Boil the capsicum with water for three
hours, occasionally replacing the water
lost by evaporation; filter, concentrate
the filtrate on a hot water bath to the con-
sistency of a thin extract, add the remain-
ing ingredients, and filter.
108
BEVERAGES
III. — Jamaica ginger,
ground 12 ounces
Lemon peel, fresh,
cut fine 2 ounces
Capsicum, powder 1 ounce
Calcined magne-
sia '. . . 1 ounce
Water0* [ofeach- sufficient
Extract the mixed ginger and capsi-
cum by percolation so as to obtain 16
fluidounces of water, set the mixture aside
for 24 hours, shaking vigorously from
time to time, then filter, and pass through
the filter enough of a mixture of 2 vol-
umes of alcohol and 1 of water to make
the filtrate measure 32 fluidounces. In
the latter macerate the lemon peel for
7 days, and again filter.
Ginger Beer. —
Brown sugar 2 pounds
Boiling water 2 gallons
Cream of tartar 1 ounce
Bruised ginger root. . . 2 ounces
Infuse the ginger in the boiling water,
add the sugar and cream of tartar; when
lukewarm strain; then add half pint good
yeast. Let it stand all night, then bot-
tle; one lemon and the white of an egg
may be added to fine it.
Lemon Beer. —
Boiling water 1 gallon
Lemon, sliced 1
Ginger, bruised 1 ounce
Yeast 1 teacupful
Sugar 1 pound
Let it stand 12 to 20 hours, and it is
ready to be bottled.
Hop Beer. —
Water 5 quarts
Hops 6 ounces
Boil 3 hours, strain the liquor, add:
Water 5 quarts
Bruised ginger 4 ounces
and boil a little longer, strain, and add
4 pounds of sugar, and when milk-
warm, 1 pint of yeast. Let it ferment;
in 24 hours It is ready for bottling.
(Enanthic Ether as a Flavoring for
Ginger Ale. — A fruity, vinous bouquet
and delightful flavor are produced by the
presence of cenanthic ether or brandy
flavor in ginger ale. This ether throws
off a rich, pungent, vinous odor, and
gives a smoothness very agreeable to any
liquor or beverage of which it forms
a part. It is a favorite with "brandy
sophisticators." Add a few drops of
the ether (previously dissolved in eight
times its bulk of Cologne spirit) to the
ginger-ale syrup just before bottling.
Soluble Extract of Ginger Ale.— Of
the following three formulas the first is
intended for soda-fountain use, the sec-
ond is a "cheap" extract for the bottlers
who want a one.-ounce-to-the-gallon ex-
tract, and the third is a bottlers' extract
to be used in the proportion of three
ounces to a gallon of syrup. This latter
is a most satisfactory extract and has
been sold with most creditable results,
both as to clearness of the finished ginger
ale and delicacy of flavor.
It will be noted that in these formulas
oleoresin of ginger is used in addition to
the powdered root. Those who do not
mind the additional expense might use
one-fourth of the same quantity of vola-
tile oil of ginger instead. This should
develop an excellent flavor, since the oil
is approximately sixteen times as strong
as the oleoresin, and has the additional
advantage of being free from resinous
extractive.
The following are the formulas:
I. — (To be used in the proportion of
4 ounces of extract to 1 gallon of syrup.)
Jamaica ginger, in
fine powder 8 pounds
Capsicum, in fine pow-
der 6 ounces
Alcohol, a sufficient quantity.
Mix the powders intimately, moisten
them with a sufficient quantity of alco-
hol, and set aside for 4 hours. Pack
in a cylindrical percolator and percolate
with alcohol until 10 pints of percolate
have resulted. Place the percolate in a
bottle of the capacity of 16 pints, and
add to it 2 fluidrachms of oleoresin of
ginger; shake, add 2^ pounds of finely
powdered pumice stone, and agitate thor-
oughly at intervals of one-half hour for 12
hours. Then add 14 pints of water in
quantities of 1 pint at each addition,
shaking briskly meanwhile. This part
of the operation is most important. Set
the mixture aside for 24 hours, agitating
it strongly every hour or so during that
period. Then take
Oil of lemon 1 J fluidounces
Oil of rose (or ge-
ranium) 3 fluidrachms
Oil of bergamot .... 2 fluidrachms
BEVERAGES
109
Oil of cinnamon .... 3 fluidrachms
Magnesium carbon-
ate 3 fluidounces
Rub the oils with the magnesia in a
large mortar and add 9 ounces of the
clear portion of the ginger mixture to
which have been previously added 2
ounces of alcohol, and continue tritu-
ration, rinsing out the mortar with the
ginger mixture. Pass the ginger mixture
through a double filter and add through
the filter the mixture of oils and magnesia;
finally pass enough water through the
filter to make the resulting product
measure 24 pints, or 3 gallons. If the
operator should desire an extract of more
or less pungency, he may obtain his de-
sired effect by increasing or decreasing
the quantity of powdered capsicum in
the formula.
II. — (To be used in the proportion of 1
ounce to 1 gallon of syrup.)
Ginger, in moderately
fine powder 6 pounds
Capsicum, in fine pow-
der 2 \ pounds
Alcohol, a sufficient quantity.
Mix, moisten the powder with 3 pints
of alcohol, and set aside in a suitable
vessel for 4 hours. Then pack the pow-
der firmly in a cylindrical percolator,
and percolate until 6 pints of extract are
obtained. Set this mixture aside and
label Percolate No. 1, and continue the
percolation with \\ pints of alcohol
mixed with 1^ pints of water. Set the
resultant tincture aside, and label Per-
colate No. 2.
Take oleoresin ginger 5 fluid ounces
and add to Percolate No. 1. Then take:
Oil of lemon 1^ fluidounces
Oil of cinnamon. . . 1 fluidounce
Oil of geranium \ fluidounce
Magnesium carbon-
ate 8 ounces
Triturate the oils with the magnesia,
add gradually Percolate No. 2, and set
aside. Then place Percolate No. 1 in a
large bottle, add 3J pounds of finely pow-
dered pumice stone, and shake at inter-
vals of half an hour for six hours. This
being completed, add the mixture of oils,
and later 10 pints of water, in quantities
of \ a pint at a time, shaking vigorously
after each solution. Let the mixture
stand for 24 hours, shaking it at inter-
vals, and then pass it through a double
filter. Finally add enough water through
the filter to make the product measure
24 pints, or 3 gallons.
III. — (To be used in proportion of 3
ounces to 1 gallon of syrup.)
Ginger, in moderately
fine powder 8 pounds
Capsicum, in moder-
ately fine powder . . 2 pounds
Alcohol, q. s.
Mix, moisten with alcohol, and set
aside as in the preceding formula; then
percolate with alcohol until 10 pints of
extract are obtained. To this add oleo-
resin of ginger 3 drachms, and place in
a large bottle. Add 2$ pounds of pow-
dereH pumice stone, and shake as di-
rected for formula No. 1. Then add 14
pints of water, in quantities of 1 pint at a
time, shaking vigorously after each addi-
tion. Set the mixture aside for 24 hours,
shaking at intervals. Then take:
Oil of lemon \\ fluidounces
Oil of geranium ... \ fluidounce
Oil of cinnamon ... 3 fluidrachms
Magnesia carbonate 3 ounces
Rub these in a mortar with the mag-
nesia, and add 9 ounces of the clear por-
tion of the ginger mixture mixed with 2
ounces of alcohol, rubbing the mixture
until it becomes smooth. Prepare a
double filter, and filter the ginger mix-
ture, adding through the filter the mix-
ture of oils and magnesia. Finally add
enough water through the filter to make
the final product measure 24 pints, or 3
gallons.
If these formulas are properly manip-
ulated the extracts should keep for a
reasonable length of time without a pre-
cipitate. If, however, a precipitate oc-
cur after the extract has stood for a
week, it should be refiltered.
LEMONADES:
Lemonade Preparations for the Sick.—
I. — Strawberry Lemonade: Citric acid, 6
parts; water, 100 parts; sugar, 450 parts;
strawberry syrup, 600 parts; cherry syr-
up, 300 parts; claret, 450 parts; aromatic
tincture, ad lib.
II. — Lemonade Powder: Sodium bi-
carbonate, 65; tartaric acid, 60; sugar,
125; lemon oil, 12 drops.
III. — Lemonade juice: Sugar syrup,
200; tartaric acid, 15; distilled water,
100; lemon oil, 3; tincture of vanilla, 6
drops.
IV. — Lemonade Lozenges: Tartaric
acid, 10; sugar, 30; gum arabic, 2; pow-
dered starch, 0.5; lemon oil, 6 drops;
tincture of vanilla, 25 drops; and suffi-
cient diluted spirit of wine so that 30
lozenges can be made with it.
Lemonade for Diabetics. — The follow-
ing is said to be useful for assuaging the
thirst of diabetics:
110
BEVERAGES
Citric acid 1 part
Glycerine 50 parts
Cognac 50 parts
Distilled water 500 parts
Hot Lemonade. — Take 2 large, fresh
lemons, and wash them clean with cold
water. Roll them until soft; then divide
each into halves, and use a lemon-squeez-
er or reamer to express the juice into a
small pitcher. Remove all the seeds
from tne juice, to which add 4 or more
tablespoonfuls of white sugar, according
to taste. A pint of boiling water is now
added, and the mixture stirred until the
sugar is dissolved. The beverage is very
effective in producing perspiration, and
should be drunk while hot. The same
formula may be used for making cold
lemonade, by substituting ice water for
the hot water, and adding a piece of
lemon peel. If desired, a weaker lemon-
ade may be made by using more water.
Lemonades, Lemon and .Sour Drinks
for Soda-Water Fountains.— Plain Lem-
onade.— Juice of 1 lemon; pulverized
sugar, 2 teaspoonfuls; filtered water, suffi-
cient; shaved ice, sufficient.
Mix and shake well. Garnish with
fruit, and serve with both spoon and
straws.
Huyler's Lemonade. — Juice of 1 lem-
on; simple syrup, 2 ounces; soda water,
sufficient. Dress with sliced pineapple,
and serve with straws. In mixing, do
not shake, but stir with a spoon.
Pineapple Lemonade. — Juice of 1
lemon; pineapple syrup, 2 ounces; soda
water, sufficient. Dress with fruit.
Serve with straws.
Seltzer Lemonade. — Juice of 1 lemon;
pulverized sugar, 2 teaspoonfuls. Fill
with seltzer. Dress with sliced lemon.
Apollinaris Lemonade. — The same as
seltzer, substituting apollinaris water for
seltzer.
Limeade. — Juice of 1 lime; pulverized
sugar, 2 teaspoonfuls; water, sufficient.
Where fresh limes are not obtainable,
use bottled lime juice.
Orangeade. — Juice of 1 orange; pul-
verized sugar, 2 teaspoonfuls; water,
sufficient; shaved ice, sufficient. Dress
with sliced orange and cherries. Serve
with straws.
Seltzer and Lemon. — Juice of 1 lemon;
seltzer, sufficient. Serve in a small
glass.
Claret Lemonade. — Juice of 1 lemon;
pulverized sugar, 3 teaspoonfuls. Make
lemonade, pour into a glass containing
shaved ice until the glass lacks about one
inch of being full. Pour in sufficient
claret to fill the glass. Dress with cher-
ries and sliced pineapple.
Claret Punch. — Juice of 1 lemon; pul-
verized sugar, 3 teaspoonfuls; claret
wine, 2 ounces; shaved ice, sufficient.
Serve in small glass. Dress with sliced
lemon, and fruit in season. Bright red
cherries and plums make attractive gar-
nishings.
Raspberry Lemonade. — I. — Juice of 1
lemon; 3 teaspoonfuls powdered sugar;
1 tablespoonful raspberry juice; shaved
ice; plain water; shake.
II. — Juice of 1 lemon; 2 teaspoonfuls
powdered sugar; $ ounce raspberry
syrup; shaved ice; water; shake.
Banjo Sour. — Pare a lemon, cut it in
two, add a large tablespoonful of sugar,
then thoroughly muddle it; add the
white of an egg; an ounce of sloe gin; 3
or 4 dashes of abricotine; shake well;
strain into a goblet or fizz glass, and fill
balance with soda; decorate with a slice
of pineapple and cherry.
Orgeat Punch. — Orgeat syrup, 12
drachms; brandy, 1 ounce; juice of 1
lemon.
Granola. — Orange syrup, 1 ounce;
grape syrup, 1 ounce; juice of \ lemon;
shaved ice, q. s. Serve with straws.
Dress with sliced lemon or pineapple.
American Lemonade. — One ounce or-
ange syrup; 1 ounce lemon syrup; 1 tea-
spoonful powdered sugar; 1 dash acid-
phosphate solution; \ glass shaved ice.
Fill with coarse stream. Add slice of
orange, and run two straws through it.
Old -Fashioned Lemonade. — Put in a
freezer and freeze almost hard, then add
the fruits, and freeze very hard. Serve
in a silver sherbet cup.
"Ping Pong" Frappe. — Grape juice,
unfermented, 1 quart; port wine (Cali-
fornia), \ pint; lemon syrup, 12 ounces;
pineapple syrup, 2 ounces; orange syrup,
4 ounces; Benedictine cordial, 4 ounces;
sugar, 1 pound.
Dissolve sugar in grape juice and put
in wine; add the syrup and cordial;
serve from a punch bowl, with ladle, into
12-ounce narrow lemonade glass and
fill with solid stream; garnish with slice
of orange and pineapple, and serve with
straw.
Orange Frapp!.— Glass half full of
fine ice; tablespoonful powdered sugar;
\ ounce orange syrup; 2 dashes lemon
syrup; dash prepared raspberry; \ ounce
BEVERAGES
1H
acid-phosphate solution. Fill with soda
and stir well; strain into a mineral glass
and serve.
Hot Lemonades. —
I. — Lemon essence. . 4 fluidrachms
Solution of citric
acid 1 fluidounce
Syrup, enough to
make 32 fluidounces
In serving, draw 2t fluidounces of the
syrup into an 8-ounce mug, fill with hot
water, and serve with a spoon.
II. — Lemon. 1
Alcohol 1 fluidounce
Solution of citric
acid 2 fluidrachms
Sugar 20 av. ounces
Water 20 fluidounces
White of 1 egg
Grate the peel of the lemon, macerate
with the alcohol for a day; express; also
express the lemon, mix the two, add the
sugar and water, dissolve by agitation,
and add the solution of citric acid and
the white of egg, the latter first beaten to
a froth. Serve like the preceding.
Egg Lemonade.— I. —Break 1 egg into
a soda glass, add 1| ounces lemon syrup,
a drachm of lemon juice, and a little
shaved ice; then draw carbonated water
to fill the glass, stirring well.
II.— Shaved ice J tumblerful
Powdered sugar 4 tablespoonfuls
Juice of 1 lemon
Yolk of 1 egg
Shake well, and add carbonated water
to fill the glass.
HOT SODA-WATER DRINKS:
Chocolate. — I. — This may be prepared
in two ways, from the powdered cocoa or
from a syrup. To prepare the cocoa for
use, dry mix with an equal quantity of
pulverized sugar and use a heaping
teaspoonful to a mug. To prepare a
syrup, take 12 ounces of cocoa, 5 pints
of water, and 4 pounds of sugar. Re-
duce the cocoa to a smooth paste with a
little warm water. Put on the fire.
When the water becomes hot add the
paste, and then allow to boil for 3 or 4
minutes; remove from fire and add the
sugar; stir carefully while heating, to
prevent scorching; when cold add 3
drachms of vanilla; £ to I ounce will suf-
fice for a cup of chocolate; top off with
whipped cream.
II. — Baker's fountain choc-
olate 1 pound
Syrup 1 gallon
Extract vanilla enough
Shave the chocolate into a gallon por-
celained evaporating dish and melt with
a gentle heat, stirring with a thin-bladed
spatula. When melted remove from the
fire and add 1 ounce of cold water, mix-
ing well. Add gradually 1 gallon of hot
syrup and strain; flavor to suit. Use
1 ounce to a mug.
III.— Hot Egg Chocolate.— Break a
fresh egg into a soda tymbler; add 1£
ounces chocolate syrup and 1 ounce
cream; shake thoroughly, add hot soda
slowly into the shaker, stirring mean-
while; strain carefully into mug; top off
with whipped cream and serve.
IV.-^Hot Chocolate and Milk.—
Chocolate syrup .... 1 ounce
Hot milk 4 ounces
Stir well, fill mug with hot soda and
serve.
V.— Hot Egg Chocolate.— One egg, 1|
ounces chocolate syrup, 1 teaspoonful
sweet cream; shake, strain, add 1 cup
hot soda, and 1 tablespoonful whipped
cream.
Coffee. — I. — Make an extract by mac-
erating 1 pound of the best Mocha and
Java with 8 ounces of water for 20 min-
utes, then add hot water enough to per-
colate 1 pint. One or 2 drachms of this
extract will make a delicious cup of cof-
fee. Serve either with or without cream,
and let customer sweeten to taste.
II. — Pack ^ pound of pulverized cof-
fee in a percolator. Percolate with 2
quarts of boiling water, letting it run
through twice. Add to this 2 quarts of
milk; keep hot in an urn and draw as a
finished drink. Add a lump of sugar
and top off with whipped cream.
III. — Coffee syrup may be made by
adding boiling water from the apparatus
to 1 pound of coffee, placed in a suitable
filter or coffeepot, until 2 quarts of the
infusion are obtained. Add to this 3
pounds of sugar. In dispensing, first
put sufficient cream in the cup, add the
coffee, then sweeten, if necessary, and
mix with the stream from the draught
tube.
IV. — Mocha coffee (ground
fine) 4 ounces
Java coffee (ground
fine) 4 ounces
Granulated sugar 6 pounds
Hot water q. s.
Percolate the coffee with hot water un-
til the percolate measures 72 ounces.
Dissolve the sugar in the percolate by
agitation without heat and strain.
Hot Egg Orangeade. — One egg; juice
BEVERAGES
of \ orange; 2 teaspoonfuls powdered
sugar. Shake, strain, add 1 cup of hot
water. Stir, serve with nutmeg.
Hot Egg Bouillon. — One-half ounce
liquid extract beef; 1 egg; salt and pep-
per; hot water to fill 8-ounce mug. Stir
extract, egg, and seasoning together; add
water, still stirring; strain and serve.
Hot Celery Punch. — One - quarter
ounce of clam juice; \ ounce beef extract;
1 ounce of cream; 4 dashes of celery es-
sence. Stir while adding hot water, and
serve with spices.
Chicken Bouillon. — Two ounces con-
centrated chicken; \ ounce sweet cream
and spice. Stir while adding hot water.
Ginger. —
Fluid extract of ginger 2£ ounces
Sugar 40 ounces
Water, to 2£ pints
Take 10 ounces of the sugar and mix
with the fluid extract of ginger; heat on
the water bath until the alcohol is evap-
orated. Then mix with 20 ounces of
water and shake till dissolved. Filter
and add the balance of the water and the
sugar. Dissolve by agitation.
Cocoa Syrup. —
I. — Cocoa, light, soluble. 4 ounces
Granulated sugar. ... 2 pounds
Boiling hot water 1 quart
Extract vanilla 1 ounce
Dissolve the cocoa in the hot water, by
stirring, then add the sugar and dissolve.
Strain, and when cold add the vanilla
extract.
II. — Cocoa syrup 2 ounces
Cream 1 ounce
Turn on the hot water stream and stir
while filling. Top off with whipped
cream.
Hot Soda Toddy. —
Lemon juice 2 fluidrachms
Lemon syrup 1 fluidounce
Aromatic bitters. ... 1 fluidrachm
Hot water, enough to fill an 8-ounce
mug.
Sprinkle with nutmeg or cinnamon.
Hot Orange Phosphate. —
Orange syrup 1 fluidounce
Solution of acid
phosphate 1 fluidrachm
Hot water, enough to fill an 8-ounce
mug.
It is prepared more acceptably by mix-
ing the juice of half an orange with acid
phosphate, sugar, and hot water.
Pepsin Phosphate. — One teaspoonful
of liquid pepsin; 2 dashes of acid phos-
phate; 1 ounce of lemon syrup; 1 cup hot
water.
Cream Beef Tea. — Use 1 teaspoonful
of liquid beef extract in a mug of hot
water, season with salt and pepper, then
stir in a tablespoonful of rich cream.
Put a teaspoonful of whipped cream on
top and serve with flakes.
Cherry Phosphate. — Cherry-phosphate
syrup, \\ ounces; hot water to make 8
ounces.
Cherry-phosphate syrup is made as
follows: Cherry juice, 3 pints; sugar, 6
pounds; water, 1 pint; acid phosphate,
4 ounces. Bring to a boil, and when
cool add the acid phosphate.
Celery Clam Punch. — Clam juice, 2
drachms; beef extract, 1 drachm; cream,
1 ounce; essence of celery, 5 drops; hot
water to make 8 ounces.
Claret Punch. — Claret wine, 2 ounces;
sugar, 3 teaspoonfuls; juice of \ lemon;
hot water to make 8 ounces.
Ginger. — Extract of ginger, 2 drachms;
sugar, 2 drachms; lemon juice, 2 dashes;
hot water to make 8 ounces.
Lemon Juice, Plain. — Fresh lemon
juice, 2iy drachms; lemon syrup, 1 ounce;
hot water, q. s. to make 8 ounces.
Lime Juice. — Lime juice, f drachm;
lemon syrup, 1 ounce; hot water to make
8 ounces. Mix. Eberle remarks that
lemon juice or lime juice enters into
many combinations. In plain soda it
may be combined with ginger and other
flavors, as, for instance, chocolate and
coffee.
Lemonade. — Juice of 1 lemon; pow-
dered sugar, 2 teaspoonfuls; hot water to
make 8 ounces. A small piece of fresh
lemon peel twisted over the cup lends an
added flavor.
Hot Malt. — Extract of malt, 1 ounce;
cherry syrup, 1 ounce; hot water, suffi-
cient to make 8 ounces. Mix.
Malted Milk.— Horlick's malted milk,
2 tablespoonfuls; hot water, quantity
sufficient to make 8 ounces; flavoring to
suit. Mix. Essence of coffee, choco-
late, etc., and many of the fruit syrups
go well with malted milk.
Hot Malted Milk Coffee (or Chocolate).
— Malted milk, 2 teaspoonfuls; coffee
(or chocolate) syrup, 1 ounce; hot water,
quantity sufficient to make 8 ounces.
Hot Beef Tea. —I. —Best beef extract, 1
tablespoonfui; sweet cream, 1 ounce; hot
BEVERAGES
113
water, 7 ounces; pepper, salt, etc., quan-
tity sufficient. Mix.
II. — Extract beef bouillon, 1 teaspoon-
ful; extract aromatic soup herbs (see
Condiments), 10 drops; hot soda, 1 cup-
ful. Mix.
III.— Extract of beef 1 teaspoonful
Hot water q. s.
Pepper, salt, and celery salt.
Mix.
Hot Bouillon.—
Beef extract 1 ounce
Hot water, q. s. to
make 8 ounces
Pepper, salt, etc q. s.
Mix.
Clam Bouillon. —
I. — Clam juice 12 drachms
Cream 2 ounces
Hot water, q. s. to make 8 ounces
Mix.
II. — Extract clam bouillon 2 ounces
Prepared milk 2 drachms
Extract of aromatic
soup herbs 5 drops
Extract white pepper. . 5 drops
Hot soda 1 cupful
Mix.
III. — Clam juice may be served with
hot water, salt and pepper added. Add-
ing butter makes this bouillon a broth.
It may also be served with milk or
cream, lemon juice, tomato catsup, etc.
Hot oyster juice may be served in the
same way.
Hot Tea.—
I. — Tea syrup sufficient
Hot water, q. s. to
make 1 cupful
II. — Loaf sugar 4 cubes
Extract of Oolong
tea, about 1 dessertsp'f ul
Prepared milk, about 1 dessertsp'f ul
Hot soda 1 cupful
Whipped cream. . . 1 tablespoonful
Mix the tea extract, sugar, and pre-
pared milk, pour on water, and dissolve.
Top off with whipped cream.
Hot Egg Drinks.— I.— One-half to 1
ounce liquid extract of beef, 1 egg, salt
and pepper to season, hot water to fill an
8-ounce mug. Stir the extract, egg, and
seasoning together with a spoon, to get
well mixed, add the water, stirring brisk-
ly meanwhile; then strain, and serve.
Or shake the egg and extract in a shaker,
add the water, and mix by pouring back
and forth several times, from shaker to
mug.
II.— Hot Egg Chocolate.— Cne to 1£
ounces chocolate syrup, 1 egg, £ ounce
cream, hot water sufficient to fill an
8-ounce mug.
Mix the syrup, egg, and cream to-
gether in an egg-shaker; shake as in
making cold drinks; add the hot water,
and mix all by pouring back and
forth several times, from shaker to mug.
Or, prepare by beating the egg with a
spoon, add the syrup and cream, mix all
quickly with the spoon, and add hot
water, stirring constantly, and strain.
III.— Hot Egg Coffee.— One egg, 1
dessertspoonful extract of coffee, 1 tea-
spoonful sweet cream, 1 ounce syrup.
Shake well, strain, and add 1 cupful hot
water and top with whipped cream.
IV. — Hot Egg Lemonade. — One egg,
juice of 1 lemon, 3 teaspoonf uls powdered
sugar. Beat the egg with lemon juice
and sugar thoroughly. Mix while add-
ing the water. Serve grated nutmeg and
cinnamon. The amount of lemon juice
and sugar may be varied to suit different
tastes.
V.— Hot Egg Milk.— Two teaspoon-
fuls sugar, 1 ounce cream, 1 egg, hot
milk to fill an 8-ounce mug. Prepare as
in hot egg chocolate, top with whipped
cream, and sprinkle with nutmeg. If
there are no facilities for keeping hot
milk, use about 2 ounces of cream, and
fill mug with hot water.
VI. — Hot Egg Nogg. — Plain syrup,
| ounce; brandy, £ ounce; Angostura
bitters, 3 drops; 1 egg. Put in shaker
and beat well. Strain in 10-ounce mug,
and fill with hot milk; finish with
whipped cream and nutmeg.
VII.— Hot Egg Phosphate. — Two
ounces lemon syrup, 1 egg, ^ ounce solu-
tion of acid phosphate. Mix in a glass,
and shake together thoroughly; pour in-
to another glass, heated previously, and
slowly draw full of hot water; season with
nutmeg.
VIII.— Hot Egg Phosphate.— Break
fresh egg into shaker and add i ounce
pineapple syrup, £ ounce orange syrup,
1 dash phosphate. Shake, without ice,
and pour into bouillon cup. Draw cup-
ful of hot water, sprinkle a touch of cin-
namon, and serve with wafers.
FANCY SODA DRINKS:
Coffee Cream Soda. — Serve in a 12-
ounce glass. Draw 1£ ounces of syrup
and 1 ounce of cream. Into the shaker
draw 8 ounces of carbonated water, pour
into the glass sufficient to fill it to within
114
BEVERAGES
1 inch of the top; pour from glass to
shaker and back, once or twice, to mix
thoroughly; give the drink a rich, creamy
appearance, and make it cream suffi-
ciently to fill the glass.
Iced Coffee. — Serve in a 10-ounce
glass. Draw 1 ounce into glass, fill
nearly full with ice-cold milk, and mix by
stirring.
Egg Malted Milk Coffee. — Prepare
same as, malted milk coffee, with the ex-
ception of adding the egg before shaking,
and top off with a little nutmeg, if de-
sired. This drink is sometimes called
coffee light lunch.
Coffee Frappe. — Serve in a 12-ounce
glass. Coffee syrup, 1| ounces; white
of 1 egg; 1 to 1£ ounces of pure, rich,
sweet cream; a small portion of fine
shaved ice; shake thoroughly to beat the
white of the egg light, and then remove
the glass, leaving the contents in the
shaker. Now fill the shaker two-thirds
full, using the fine stream only. Draw
as quickly as possible that the drink may
be nice and light. Now pour into glass
and back, and then strain into a clean
glass. Serve at once, and without
straws. This should be drunk at once,
else it will settle, and lose its lightness
and richness.
Coffee Nogg. —
Coffee syrup 2 ounces
Brandy 4 drachms
Cream 2 ounces
One egg.
Coffee Cocktail. —
Coffee syrup 1 ounce
One egg.
Port wine 1 ounce
Brandy 2 drachms
Shake, strain into a small glass, and
add soda. Mace on top.
Chocolate and Milk. —
Chocolate syrup 2 ounces
Sweet milk, sufficient.
Fill a glass half full of shaved ice, put
in the syrup, and add milk until the glass
is almost full. Shake well, and serve
without straining. Put whipped cream
on top and serve with straws.
Chocolate Frappe. —
Frozen whipped cream, sufficient.
Shaved ice, sufficient.
Fill a glass half full of frozen whipped
cream, fill with shaved ice nearly to the
top, and pour in chocolate syrup. Other
syrups may be used, it desired.
Royal Frappe. — This drink consists of
3 parts black coffee and 1 part of brandy,
frozen in a cooler, and served while in a
semifrozen state.
Mint Julep. — One-half tumbler shaved
ice, teaspoonful powdered sugar, dash
lemon juice, 2 or 3 sprigs of fresh mint.
Crush the mint against side of the glass
to get the flavor. Then add claret syrup,
\ ounce; raspberry syrup, 1^ ounces; and
draw carbonated water nearly to fill
glass. Insert bunch of mint and fill
glass, leaving full of shaved ice. Serve
with straws, and decorate with fruits of
the season.
Grape Glace". — Beat thoroughly the
whites of 4 eggs and stir in 1 pound of
powdered sugar, then add 1 pint grape
juice, 1 pint water, and 1 pound more of
powdered sugar. Stir well until sugar
is dissolved, and serve from a pitcher or
glass dish, with ladle.
"Golf Goblet."— Serve in a 12-ounce
glass; fill two-thirds full of cracked ice,
add \ ounce pineapple juice, 1 teaspoon-
ful lemon juice, 1 teaspoonful raspberry
vinegar. Put spoon in glass, and fill to
within one-half inch of top with carbon-
ated water; add shaved ice, heaping full.
Put strawberry or cherry on top, and
stick slice of orange down side of glass.
Serve with spoon and straws.
Goldenade. — Shaved ice, £ tumbler-
ful; powdered sugar; juice of 1 lemon;
yolk of 1 egg. Shake well, add soda
water from large stream, turn from tum-
bler to shaker, and vice versa, several
times, and strain through julep strainer
into a 12-ounce tumbler.
Lunar Blend. — Take two mixing
glasses, break an egg, putting the yolk
in one glass, the white into the other;
into the glass with the yolk add 1 ounce
cherry syrup and some cracked ice;
shake, add small quantity soda, and
strain into a 12-ounce glass. Into the
other mixing glass add 1 ounce plain
sweet cream, and beat with bar spoons
until well whipped; add \ ounce lemon
syrup, then transfer it into the shaker,
and add soda from fine stream only,
and float on top of the one containing
the yolk and sherry. Serve with two
straws.
Egg Chocolate.—
Chocolate syrup 2 ounces
Cream 4 ounces
White of one egg.
BEVERAGES
115
Egg CrSme de Menthe.—
Mint syrup 12 drachms
Cream 3 ounces
White of one egg.
Whisky 4 drachms
Egg Sherbet. —
Sherry syrup 4 drachms
Pineapple syrup 4 drachms
Raspberry syrup 4 drachms
One egg.
Cream.
Egg Claret.—
Claret syrup 2 ounces
Cream 3 ounces
One egg.
Royal Mist. —
Orange syrup 1 ounce
Catawba syrup 1 ounce
Cream 2 ounces
One egg.
Banana Cream. —
Banana syrup 12 drachms
Cream 4 ounces
One egg.
Egg Coffee. —
Coffee syrup 2 ounces
Cream .". 3 ounces
One egg.
Shaved ice.
Cocoa Mint. —
Chocolate syrup. .
Peppermint syrup. ... 1
White of one egg.
Cream 2 ounces
The peppermint syrup is made as fol-
lows:
Oil of peppermint. . . 30 minims
Syrup simplex 1 gallon
Soda foam 1 ounce
Egg Lemonade. —
Juice of one lemon.
Pulverized sugar 3 teasp'f uls
One egg.
Water, q. s.
Shake well, using plenty of ice, and
serve in a small glass.
Nadjy.—
Raspberry juice 1 ounce
Pineapple syrup 1 ounce
One egg.
Cream 2 ounces
Siberian Flip.—
Orange syrup 1 ounce
Pineapple syrup 1 ounce
One egg.
Cream 2 ounces
1 ounce
ounce
Egg Orgeat.—
Orgeat syrup 12 drachms
Cream 3 ounces
One egg.
Normona. —
Peach syrup 1 ounce
Grape syrup 1 ounce
Cream 3 ounces
Brandy 2 drachms
One egg.
Silver Fizz.—
Catawba syrup 2 ounces
Holland gin 2 drachms
Lemon juice 8 dashes
White of one egg.
Golden Fizz. —
Claret syrup 2 ounces
Holland gin | ounce
Lemon juice 8 dashes
Yolk of one egg.
Rose Cream.—
Rose syrup 12 drachms
Cream 4 ounces
White of one egg.
Violet Cream. —
Violet syrup 12 drachms
Cream 4 ounces
White of one egg.
Rose Mint. —
Rose syrup 6 drachms
Mint syrup 6 drachms
Cream 3 ounces
White of one egg.
Currant Cream.—
Red-currant syrup ... 2 ounces
Cream 3 ounces
One egg.
Quince Flip. —
Quince syrup 2 ounces
Cream 3 ounces
One egg.
Shaved ice.
Coffee Nogg.—
Coffee syrup 2 ounces
Brandy 4 drachms
Cream 2 ounces
One egg.
Egg Sour. —
Juice of one lemon.
Simple syrup 12 drachms
One egg.
Shake, strain, and fill with soda. Mace
on top.
116
BEVERAGES
Lemon Sour. —
Lemon syrup 12 drachms
Juice of one lemon.
One egg.
Raspberry Sour. —
Raspberry syrup. ... 12 drachms
One egg. \
Juice of one lemon.
Yama. —
One egg.
Cream
Sugar
Jamaica rum.
. . 2 ounces
. . 2 teaspoonfuls
$ ounce
Shake well, put into cup, and add hot
water. Serve with whipped cream, and
sprinkle mace on top.
Prairie Oyster. —
Cider vinegar 2 ounces
One egg.
Put vinegar into glass, and break into
it the egg. Season with salt and pepper.
Serve without mixing.
Fruit Frappe. —
Granulated gelatin ... 1 ounce
Juice of six lemons.
Beaten whites of two eggs.
Water 5 quarts
Syrup 1 quart
Maraschino cherries. . 8 ounces
Sliced peach 4 ounces
Sliced pineapple 4 ounces
Whole strawberries. . . 4 ounces
Sliced orange 4 ounces
Dissolve the gelatin in 1 quart boiling
hot water; add tne syrup and the balance
of the water; add the whites of the eggs
and lemon juice.
KOUMISS.
The original koumiss is the Russian,
made from mare's milk, while that pro-
duced in this country and other parts of
Europe is usually, probably always, made
from cow's milk. For this reason there
is a difference in the preparation which
•may or may not be of consequence. It
has been asserted that the ferment used
in Russia differs from ordinary yeast, but
this has not been established.
In an article on this subject, contrib-
uted by D. H. Davies to the Pharma-
ceutical Journal and Transactions, it is
pointed out that mare's milk contains less
casein and fatty matter than cow's
milk, and he states that it is "therefore
far more easy of digestion." He thinks
that cow's milk yields a better prepara-
tion when diluted with water to reduce
the percentage of casein, etc. He pro-
poses the following formula:
Fresh milk . . 12 ounces
Water 4 ounces
Brown sugar 150 grains
Compressed yeast. . . 24 grains
Milk sugar 3 drachms
Dissolve the milk sugar in the water,
add to the milk, rub the yeast and brown
sugar down in a mortar with a little of
the mixture, then strain into the other
portion.
Strong bottles are very essential, cham-
pagne bottles being frequently used, and
the corks should fit tightly; in fact, it is
almost necessary to use a bottling ma-
chine for the purpose, and once the cork
is properly fixed it should be wired down.
Many failures have resulted because the
corks did not fit properly, the result being
that the carbon dioxide escaped as
formed and left a worthless preparation.
It is further necessary to keep the prepa-
ration at a moderate temperature, and to
be sure that the article is properly fin-
ished the operator should gently shake
the bottles each day for about 10 min-
utes to prevent the clotting of the casein.
It is well to take the precaution of rolling
a cloth around the bottle during the
shaking process, as the amount of gas
generated is great, and should the bottle
be weak it might explode.
Kogelman says that if 1 volume of
buttermilk be mixed with 1 or 2 vol-
umes of sweet milk, in a short time
lively fermentation sets in, and in about
3 days the work is completed. This, ac-
cording to the author, produces a wine-
scented fluid, rich in alcohol, carbon
dioxide, lactic acid, and casein, which,
according to all investigations yet made,
is identical with koumiss. The follow-
ing practical hints are given for the pro-
duction of a good article: The sweet milk
used should not be entirely freed from
cream; the bottles should be of strong
glass; the fermenting milk must be in-
dustriously shaken by the operator at
least 3 times a day, and then the cork
put in firmly, so that the fluid will become
well charged with carbon-dioxide gas ;
the bottles must be daily opened and at
least twice each day brought nearly to a
horizontal position, in order to allow the
carbon dioxide to escape and air to enter;
otherwise fermentation rapidly ceases,
If a drink is desired strong in carbonic
acid, the bottles, toward the end of fer-
mentation, should be placed with the
necks down. In order to ferment a
fresh quantity of milk, simply add $
of its volume of either actively fer-
menting or freshly fermented milk. The
temperature should be from 50° to 60°
F., about 60° being the most favorable.
BEVERAGES
117
Here are some miscellaneous formulas:
I. — Fill a quart champagne bottle up
to the neck with pure milk; add 2 ta-
blespoonfuls of white sugar, after dis-
solving the same in a little water over a
hot fire; add also a quarter of a 2-cent
cake of compressed yeast. Then tie the
cork in the bottle securely, and shake
the mixture well; place it in a room of
the temperature of 50° to 95° F. for 6
hours, and finally in the ice box over
night. Handle wrapped in a towel as
protection if the bottle should burst.
Be sure that the milk is pure, that the
bottle is sound, that the yeast is fresh, to
open the mixture in the morning with
great care, on account of its effervescent
properties; and be sure not to drink it at
all if there is any curdle or thickening
part resembling cheese, as this indicates
that the fermentation has been prolonged
beyond the proper time.
II. — Dilute the milk with £ part of
hot water, and while still tepid add £
of very sour (but otherwise good) but-
termilk. Put it into a wide jug, cover
with a clean cloth, and let stand in a
warmish place (about 75° F.) for 24
hours; stir up well, and leave for an-
other 24 hours. Then beat thoroughly
together, and pour from jug to jug till
perfectly smooth and creamy. It is
now "still" koumiss, and may be drunk
at once. To make it sparkling, which
is generally preferred, put it into cham-
pagne or soda-water bottles; do not
quite fill them, secure the corks well,
and lay them in a cool cellar. It will
then keep for 6 or 8 weeks, though
it becomes increasingly acid. To ma-
ture some for drinking quickly, it is as
well to keep a bottle or two to start with
in some warmer place, and from time to
time shake vigorously. With this treat-
ment it should, in about 3 days, be-
come sufficiently effervescent to spurt
freely through a champagne tap, which
must be used for drawing it off as re-
quired. Later on, when very frothy and
acid it is more pleasant' to drink if a
little sweetened water (or milk and wa-
ter) is first put into the glass. Shake
the bottle, and hold it inverted well into
the tumbler before turning the tap.
Having made one lot of koumiss as above
you can use some of that instead of
buttermilk as a ferment for a second
lot, and so on 5 or 6 times in succession;
after which it will be found advisable to
begin again as at first. Mare's milk is
the best for koumiss; then ass's milk.
Cow's milk may be made more like them
by adding a little sugar of milk (or even
loaf sugar) with the hot water before fer-
menting. But perhaps the chief draw-
back to cow's milk is that the cream
separates permanently, whereas that of
mare's milk will remix. Hence use par-
tially skimmed milk; for if there is much
cream it only forms little lumps of butter,
which are apt to clog the tap, or are left
behind in the bottle.
Kwass. — Kwass is a popular drink
among the Russian population of Kun-
zews, prepared as follows: In a big kettle
put from 13 to 15 quarts of water, and
bring to a boil, and when in active ebul-
lition pour in 500 grams of malt. Let
boil for 20 minutes, remove from the
fire, let cool down, and strain off. The
liquid is now put into a clean keg or
barrel, 30 grams (about an ounce) of best
compressed yeast added along with about
600 grams (20 ounces) of sugar, and the
cask is put in a warm place to ferment.
As soon as bubbles of carbonic gas are de-
tected on the surface of the liquid, it is a
signal that the latter is ready for bottling.
In each of the bottles, which should be
strong and clean, put one big raisin, fill,
cork, and wire down. The bottles
should be placed on the side, and in the
coolest place available — best, on ice.
The liquor is ready for drinking in from
2 to 3 days, and is said to be most pal-
atable.
" Braga." — Braga is a liquid of milky
turbidity, resembling cafe au lait in
color, and forming a considerable pre-
cipitate if left alone. When shaken it
sparkles and a little gas escapes. Its
taste is more or less acid, possessing a
pleasant flavor.
About 35 parts of crushed millet, to
which a little wheat flour is added, are
placed in a large kettle. On this about
400 parts of water are poured. The
mixture is stirred well and boiled for 3
hours. After settling for 1 hour the lost
water is renewed and the boiling con-
tinued for another 10 hours. A viscous
mass remains in the kettle, which sub-
stance is spread upon large tables to
cool. After it is perfectly cool, it is
stirred with water in a wooden trough
and left to ferment for 8 hours. This
pulp is sifted, mixed with a little water,
and after an hour the braga is ready for
sale. The taste is a little sweetish at first,
but becomes more and more sourish in
time. Fermentation begins only in the
trough.
WINTER BEVERAGES :
Campchello. — Thoroughly beat the
yolks of 12 fresh eggs with 2£ pounds
finely powdered, refined sugar, the juice
118
BEVERAGES
of 3 lemons and 2 oranges, and 3 bottles
of Graves or other white wine, over the
fire, until rising. Remove, and slowly
beat 1 bottle of Jamaica rum with it.
Egg Wine. — Vigorously beat 4 whole
eggs and the yolks of 4 with £ pound of
fine sugar; next add 2 quarts of white
wine and beat over a moderate fire until
rising.
Bavaroise au Cognac. — Beat up the
yolks of 8 eggs in 1 quart of good milk
over the fire, until boiling, then quickly
add 5 ounces of sugar and £ quart of
fine cognac.
Bavaroise au Caf6. — Heat 1 pint of
strong coffee and 1 pint of milk, 5 ounces
of sugar, and the yolks of 8 eggs, until
boiling, then add -fa quart of Jamaica
rum.
Carbonated Pineapple Champagne. —
Plain syrup, 42° 10 gallons
Essence of pineapple 8 drachms
Tincture of lemon. . . 5 ounces
Carbonate of magne-
sia 1 ounce
Liquid saffron 2£ ounces
Citric-acid solution.. 30 ounces
Caramel 2J ounces
Filter before adding the citric-acid so-
lution and limejuice. Use 2 ounces to
each bottle.
A German Drink. — To 100 parts of
water add from 10 to 15 parts of sugar,
dissolve and add to the syrup thus formed
an aqueous extract of 0.8 parts of green
or black tea. Add fresh beer or brew-
ers' yeast, put in a warm place and let
ferment. When fermentation has pro-
gressed to a certain point the liquid is
cleared, and then bottled, corked, and
the corks tied down. The drink is said
to be very pleasant. 1
Limejuice Cordial. — Limejuice cor-
dial that will keep good for any length of
time may be made as follows: Sugar,
6 pounds; water, 4 pints; citric acid, 4
ounces; boric acid, £ ounce. Dissolve
by the aid of a gentle heat, and when cold
add refined limejuice, 60 ounces; tinc-
ture of lemon peel, 4 ounces; water to
make up to 2 gallons, and color with car-
amel.
Summer Drink. —
Chopped ice 2 tablespoonfuls
Chocolate syrup . . 2 tablespoonfuls
Whipped cream ... 3 tablespoonfuls
Milk $ cup
Carbonated water. J cup
Shake or stir well before drinking. A
tablespoonful of vanilla ice cream is a
desirable addition. A plainer drink is
made by combining the syrup, f cup of
milk, and the ice, and shaking well.
American Champagne. — Good cider
(crab-apple cider is the best), 7 gal-
lons; best fourth-proof brandy, 1 quart;
genuine champagne wine, 5 pints; milk,
1 gallon; bitartrate of potassa, 2 ounces.
Mix, let stand a short time; bottle while
fermenting. An excellent imitation.
British Champagne. — Loaf sugar,
56 pounds; brown sugar (pale), 48
pounds; water (warm), 45 gallons; white
tartar, 4 ounces; mix, and at a proper
temperature add yeast, 1 quart; and
afterwards sweet cider, 5 gallons; bruised
wild cherries, 14 or 15 ounces; pale
spirits, 1 gallon; orris powder, J ounce.
Bottle while fermenting.
Champagne Cider. — Good pale cider,
1 hogshead; spirits, 3 gallons; sugar,
20 pounds; mix, and let it stand one
fortnight; then fine with skimmed milk,
| gallon; this will be very pale, and
a similar article, when properly bottled
and labeled, opens so briskly that even
good judges have mistaken it for genuine
champagne.
BEER:
Scotch Beer.— Add 1 peck malt to 4
gallons of boiling water and let it mash
for 8 hours, and then strain, and in the
strained liquor boil:
Hops 4 ounces
Coriander seeds ...... 1 ounce
Honey 1 pound
Orange peel 2 ounces
Bruised ginger 1 ounce
Boil for half an hour, then strain and
ferment in the usual way.
Hop Bitter Beer.—
Coriander seeds 2 ounces
Orange peel 4 ounces
Ginger 1 ounce
Gentian root \ ounce
Boil in 5 gallons of water for half an
hour, then strain and put into the liquor
4 ounces hops and 3 pounds of sugar,
and simmer for 15 minutes, then add
sufficient yeast, and bottle when ready.
Sarsaparilla Beer. — I. — Compound ex-
tract of sarsaparilla, 1 \ ounces ; hot water,
1 pint; dissolve, and when cold, add of
good pale or East India ale, 7 pints.
II. — Sarsaparilla (sliced), 1 pound;
guaiacum bark (bruised small), \ pound;
guaiacum wood (rasped) and licorice root
(sliced), of each, 2 ounces; aniseed
(bruised), \\ ounces; mezereon root-
BEVERAGES
119
bark, 1 ounce ; cloves (cut small), J
ounce; moist sugar, 3£ pounds; hot
water (not boiling), 9 quarts; mix in a
clean stone jar, and keep it in a moder-
ately warm room (shaking it twice or
thrice daily) until active fermentation
sets in, then let it repose for about a week,
when it will be ready for use. This is
said to be superior to the other prepara-
tions of sarsaparilla as an alterative
or purifier of the blood, particularly in
old affections. That usually made has
generally only J of the above quan-
tity of 'sugar, for which molasses is often
substituted; but in either case it will not
keep well; whereas, with proper caution,
the products of the above formulas may
be kept for 1 or even 2 years. No
yeast must be used. Dose: A small
tumblerful 3 or 4 times a day, or oftener.
Spruce Beer. — I. — Sugar, 1 pound;
essence of spruce, £ ounce; boiling water,
1 gallon; mix well, and when nearly cold
add of yeast £ wineglassf ul ; and the
next day bottle like ginger beer.
II. — Essence of spruce, £ pint; pi-
mento and ginger (bruised), or each, 5
ounces; hops, £ pound; water, 3 gallons;
boil the whole for 10 minutes, then add
of moist sugar, 12 pounds (or good mo-
lasses, 14 pounds); warm water, 11 gal-
lons; mix well, and, when only luke-
warm, further add of yeast, 1 pint; after
the liquid has fermented for about 24
hours, bottle it.
This is diuretic and antiscorbutic. It is
regarded as an agreeable summer drink,
and often found useful during long sea
voyages. When made with lump sugar
it is called White Spruce Beer; when with
moist sugar or treacle, Brown Spruce
Beer. An inferior sort is made by using
less sugar or more water.
Treacle'Beer. — I. — From treacle or mo-
lasses, £ to 2 pounds per gallon (accord-
ing to the desired strength) ; hops, J to f
ounce; yeast, a tablespoonful; water,
q. s.; treated as below.
II. — Hops, 1£ pounds; corianders, 1
ounce; capsicum pods (cut small), %
ounce; water, 8 gallons; boil for 10 or
15 minutes, and strain the liquor
through a coarse sieve into a barrel con-
taining treacle, 28 pounds; then throw
back the hops, etc., into the copper and
reboil them, for 10 minutes, with a
second 8 gallons of water, which must be
strained into the barrel, as before; next
"rummage" the whole well with a stout
stick, add of cold water 21 gallons (suf-
ficient to make the whole measure 37
r lions), and, again after mixing, stir in
pint of good fresh yeast; lastly, let it
remain for 24 hours in a moderately
warm place, after which it may be put
into the cellar, and in 2 or 3 days bottled
or tapped on draught. In a week it will
be fit to drink. For a stronger beer, 36
pounds, or even half a hundredweight of
molasses may be used. It will then
keep good for a twelvemonth. This is a
wholesome drink, but apt to prove laxa-
tive when taken in large quantities.
Weiss Beer.— This Differs from the
ordinary lager beer in that it contains
wheat malt. The proportions are §
wheat to $ barley malt, 1 pound hops
being used with a peck of the combined
malt to each 20 gallons of water. A
good deal depends on the yeast, which
must be of a special kind, the best grades
being imported from Germany.
Yellow Coloring for Beverages. — The
coloring agents employed are fustic, saf-
fron, turmeric, quercitron, and the va-
rious aniline dyes. Here are some for-
mulas:
I. —Saffron. 1 ounce
Deodorized alco-
hol 4 fluidounces
Distilled water . .. 4 fluidounces
Mix alcohol and water, and then add
the saffron. Allow the mixture to stand
in a warm place for several days, shaking
occasionally; then filter. The tincture
thus prepared has a deep orange color,
and when diluted or used in small quan-
tities gives a beautiful yellow tint to
syrups, etc.
II. — Ground fustic
wood 1| ounces
Deodorized alco-
hol 4 fluidounces
Distilled water ... 4 fluidounces
This color may be made in the same
manner as the liquid saffron, and is a fine
coloring for many purposes.
III. — Turmeric powder. ... 2 ounces
Alcohol, dilute 16 ounces
Macerate for several days, agitating
frequently, and filter. For some bev-
erages the addition of this tincture is not
to be recommended, as it possesses a
very spicy taste.
The nonpoisonous aniline dyes rec-
ommended for coloring confectionery,
beverages, liquors, essences, etc., yellow
are those known as acid yellow R and
tropseolin 000 (orange I).
BICYCLE-TIRE CEMENT:
See Adhesives, under Rubber Cements.
BICYCLE VARNISHES:
See Varnishes.
120
BLEACHING
BIDERY METAL:
See Alloys.
BILLIARD BALLS:
See Ivory and Casein.
BIRCH BALSAM:
See Balsam.
BIRCH WATER:
See Hair Preparations.
BIRD DISEASES AND THEIR REM-
EDIES:
See Veterinary Formulas.
BIRD FOODS:
See also Veterinary Formulas.
Mixed Birdseed.—
Canary seed 6 parts
Rape seed 2 parts
Maw seed 1 part
Millet seed 2 parts
Mocking-Bird Food.—
Cayenne pepper .... 2 ounces
Rape seed 8 ounces
Hemp seed 16 ounces
Corn meal 2 ounces
Rice 2 ounces
Cracker 8 ounces
Lard oil 2 ounces
Mix the solids, grinding to a coarse
powder, and incorporate the oil.
Food for Redbirds.—
Sunflower seed 8 ounces
Hemp seed 16 ounces
Canary seed 10 ounces
Wheat — 8 ounces
Rice 6 ounces
Mix and grind to coarse powder.
BIRD LIME:
See Lime.
BIRD PASTE:
See Canary-Bird Paste.
BISCHOFF :
See Wines and Liquors.
BISCUIT, DOG:
See Dog Biscuit.
BISMUTH ALLOYS:
See Alloys.
BISMUTH, PURIFICATION OF:
See Gold.
BITTERS :
See Wines and Liquors.
BITTER WATER:
See Waters.
BLACKING FOR HARNESS:
See Leather.
BLACKING FOR SHOES:
See Shoedressings.
BLACKING, STOVE:
See Stove Blackings and Polishes.
BLACKBERRY CORDIAL AND BLACK-
BERRY MIXTURE AS A CHOL-
ERA REMEDY:
See Cholera Remedy.
BLACKBOARD PAINT AND VARNISH :
See Paint and Varnish.
BLACKHEAD REMEDIES:
See Cosmetics.
BLANKET WASHING:
See Household Formulas.
BLASTING POWDER:
See Explosives.
Bleaching
Linen. — Mix common bleaching pow-
der in the proportion of 1 pound to a
gallon of water; stir it occasionally for
3 days, let it settle, and pour it off clear.
Then make a lye of 1 pound of soda to
1 gallon of boiling water, in which soak
the linen for 12 hours, and boil it half an
hour; next soak it in the bleaching
liquor, made as above; and lastly, wash
it in the usual manner. Discolored
linen or muslin may be restored by put-
ting a portion of bleaching liquor into
the tub wherein the articles are soaking.
Straw. — I. — Dip the straw in a solution
of oxygenated muriatic acid, saturated
with potash. (Cxyerenated muriate of
lime is much cheaper.) The straw is
thus rendered very white, and its flexi-
bility is increased.
II. — Straw is bleached by simply ex-
posing it in a closed chamber to the
fumes of burning sulphur. An old flour
barrel is the apparatus most used for the
purpose by milliners, a flat stone being
laid on the ground, the sulphur ignited
thereon, and the barrel containing the
goods to be bleached turned over it.
The goods should be previously washed
in pure water.
Wool, Silk, or Straw.— Mix together
4 pounds of oxalic acid, 4 pounds of
table salt, water 50 gallons. The goods
are laid in this mixture for 1 hour;
they are then generally well bleached,
and only require to be thoroughly rinsed
and worked. For bleaching straw it is
best to soak the goods in caustic soda,
and afterwards to make use of chloride
of lime or Javelle water. The excess of
BOILER COMPOUNDS
chlorine is afterwards removed by hypo-
sulphite of soda.
Feathers. — Place the feathers from
3 to 4 hours in a tepid dilute solution
of bichromate of potassa, to which,
cautiously, some nitric acid has been
added (a small quantity only). To
remove a greenish hue induced by this
solution, place them in a dilute solu-
tion of sulphuric acid, in water, whereby
the feathers become perfectly white and
bleached.
Bleaching Solution. — Aluminum hypo-
chloride, or Wilson's bleaching liquid, is
produced by adding to a clear solution of
lime chloride a solution of aluminum
sulphate (alumina, alum) as long as a
precipitate keeps forming. By mutual
decomposition aluminum chloride re-
sults, which remains in solution, and
lime sulphate (gypsum), which separates
out in the form of an insoluble salt.
BLIGHT REMEDIES.
I. — Soft soap 40 parts
Amyl alcohol 50 parts
Methylated spirit. 20 parts
Water 1,000 parts
II.— Soft soap 30 parts
Sulphureted pot-
ash 2 parts
Amyl alcohol 32 parts
Water 1,000 parts
III. — Soft soap 15 parts
Sulphureted pot-
ash 29 parts
Water 1,000 parts
BLEACHING SOLUTIONS FOR THE
LAUNDRY:
See Laundry Preparations.
BLEACHING SOLUTION FOR PHOTO-
GRAPHS:
See Photography.
BLEEDING, LOCAL:
See Styptics.
BLISTER CURE:
See Turpentine.
BLISTERS, FOR HORSES:
See Veterinary Formulas.
BLOCK, HOLLOW CONCRETE
BUILDING :
See Stone, Artificial.
BLOCK FOR SOLDERING:
See Soldering.
BLOTTING PAPER:
See Paper.
BLUE FROM GREEN AT NIGHT, TO
DISTINGUISH :
To distinguish blue from green at
night, use either the light of a magnesium
wire for this purpose or take a number
of Swedish (parlor) matches, light them,
and as soon as they flash up, observe the
2 colors, when the difference can be easily
told.
BLUE (BALL) :
See Dyes.
BLUING:
See Laundry Preparations.
BLUING OF STEEL:
See Steel.
BLUE PRINTS, TO MAKE CHANGES
AND CORRECTIONS ON :
Use a solution of sodium carbonate
and water, with a little red ink mixed in.
This gives a very pleasing pink color to
the changes which, at the same time, is
very noticeable. The amount of sodium
carbonate used depends upon the sur-
face of the blue-print paper, as some
coarse-grained papers will look better if
less soda is used and vice versa. How-
ever, the amount of powdered soda held
on a small coin dissolved in a bottle of
water gives good results.
BLUE-PRINT PAPER MAKING:
See Photography.
BLUE PRINTS, TO TURN BROWN:
See Photography, under Toning.
BOIL REMEDY.
Take a piece of soft linen or borated
gauze, rub some vaseline upon one side
of it, quickly pour upon it some chloro-
form, apply it to the unopened boil or
carbuncle, and place a bandage over all.
It smarts a little at first, but this is soon
succeeded by a pleasing, cool sensation.
The patient is given a bottle of the rem-
edy, and directed to change the cloth
often. In from 2 hours to 1 day the
boil (no matter how indurated) softens
and opens.
Boiler Compounds
There are three chemicals which are
known to attack boiler scale. These are
caustic soda, soda ash, and tannic-acid
compounds, the last being derived from
sumac, catechu, and the exhausted bark
liquor from tanneries.
Caustic soda in large excess is inju-
rious to boiler fittings, gaskets, valves,
BOILER COMPOUNDS
etc. That it is injurious, in reasonable
excess, to the boiler tubes themselves is
yet to be proved. Foaming and priming
may be caused through excess of caustic
soda or soda ash, as is well known by
every practical engineer. Tannic acid
is to be condemned and the use of its
salts is not to be recommended. It may
unite with the organic matter, present in
the form of albuminoids, and with cal-
cium and magnesium carbonates. That
it removes scale is an assured fact; that
it removes iron with the scale is also
assured, as tannic acid corrodes an iron
surface rapidly.
Compounds of vegetable origin are
widely advertised, but they often contain
dextrine and gum, both of which are
dangerous, as they coat the tubes with a
compact scale, not permitting the water
to reach the iron. Molasses is acid and
should not be used in the boiler. Starch
substances generally should be avoided.
Kerosene must be dangerous, as it is
very volatile and must soon leave the
boiler and pass over and through the
engine.
There are two materials the use of
which in boilers is not prohibited through
action upon the metal itself or on ac-
count of price. These are soda ash and
caustic soda. Sodium triphosphate and
sodium fluoride have both been used with
success, but their cost is several hundred
per cent greater than soda ash. If pre-
scribed as per analysis, in slight excess,
there should be no injurious results
through the use of caustic soda and soda
ash. It would be practicable to manu-
facture an intimate mixture of caustic
soda and carbonate of soda, containing
enough of each to soften the average
water of a given district.
There is a great deal of fraud in con-
nection with boiler compounds gener-
ally. The better class of venders ad-
vertise to prepare a special compound for
special water. This is expensive, save on
a large scale, in reference to a partic-
ular water, for it would mean a score or
more of tanks with men to make up the
mixtures. The less honest of the boiler-
compound guild consign each sample of
water to the sewer and send the regular
goods. Others have a stock analysis
which is sent to customers of a given
locality, whether it contains iron, lime,
or magnesium sulphates or carbonates.
Any expense for softening water in
excess of 3 cents per 1,000 gallons is for
the privilege of using a ready-made soft-
ener. Every superintendent in charge
of a plant should insist that the com-
pound used be pronounced by competent
authority free from injurious materials,
and that it be adapted to the water in
use.
Boiler compounds should contain only
such ingredients as will neutralize the
scale-forming salts present. They should
be used only by prescription, so many
gallons per 1,000 gallons of feed water.
A properly proportioned mixture of soda
ought to answer the demands of all plants
depending upon that method of softening
water in limestone and shale regions.
The honest boiler compounds are,
however, useful for small isolated plants,
because of the simplicity of their action.
For plants of from 75 to 150 horse power
two 24-hour settling tanks will answer
the purpose of a softening system. Each
of these, capable of holding a day's sup-
ply, provided with a soda tank in com-
mon, a,nd with sludge valves, has pad-
dles for stirring the contents. Large
plants are operated on this principle,
serving boilers of many thousand horse
power. Such a system has an advan-
tage over a continuous system, in that
the exact amount of chemical solutions
required for softening the particular
water can be applied. For some varia-
tions of such a system, several companies
have secured patents. The fundamen-
tal principles, nowever, have been used
for many years and are not patentable.
Prevention of Boiler Scale. — The lime
contained in the feed water, either as bi-
carbonate or as sulphate, is precipitated
in the shape of a light mud, but the walls
of the boiler remain perfectly bright
without being attacked in any manner.
While under ordinary atmospheric pres-
sure calcium chromate in solution is pre-
cipitated by soda or Glauber's salt as
calcium carbonate or as calcium sul-
Ehate; the latter is separated under
igher pressure by chromates as calcium
chromate. An excess of chromates or
chromic acid does not exercise any dele-
terious action upon the metal, nor upon
the materials used for packing. By the
slight admixture of chromates, two
pounds are sufficient for a small boiler
for weeks; no injurious ingredients are
carried in by the wet steam, the injection
water, on the contrary, having been
found to be chemically pure.
Protecting Boiler Plates from Scale. —
I. — For a 5-horsc-power boiler, fed
with water which contains calcic sul-
phate, take catechu, 2 pounds; dex-
trine, 1 pound; crystallized soda, 2
pounds; potash, £ pound; cane sugar, £
pound; alum, J pound; gum arabic, £
pound.
BOILER COMPOUNDS
II. — For a boiler of the same size, fed
with water which contains lime: Tur-
meric, 2 pounds; dextrine, 1 pound; so-
dium bicarbonate, 2 pounds; potash, £
pound; alum, £ pound; molasses, |
pound.
III. — For a boiler of the same size, fed
with water which contains iron: Gam-
boge, 2 pounds; soda, 2 pounds; dex-
trine, 1 pound; potash, V pound; sugar,
£ pound; alum, A pound; gum arabic, £
pound.
IV. — For a boiler of the same size, fed
with sea water: Catechu, 2 pounds;
Glauber's salt, 2 pounds; dextrine, 2
pounds; alum, £ pound; gum arabic, £
pound.
When these preparations are used add
1 quart of water, and in ordinary cases
charge the boiler every month; but if the
incrustation is very bad, charge every
two weeks.
V. — Place within the boiler of 100
horse power 1 bucketful of washing soda;
put in 2 gallons of kerosene oil (after
closing the blow-off cock), and fill the
boiler with water. Feed in at least 1
quart of kerosene oil every day through a
sight-feed oil cup attached to the feed
Eipe near the boiler— i. e., between the
eater and the boiler — so that the oil is
not entrapped within the heater. If it
is inconvenient to open the boiler, then
dissolve the washing soda in hot water
and feed it in with the pump or through a
tallow cock (attached between the eject-
or and the valve in the suction pipe)
when the ejector is working.
VI. — A paint for protecting boiler plates
from scale, and patented in Germany, is
composed of 10 pounds each of train oil,
horse fat, paraffine, and of finely ground
zinc white. To this mixture is added 40
pounds of graphite and 10 pounds of
soot made together into a paste with
1£ gallons of water, and about a pound
of carbolic acid. The horse fat and the
zinc oxide make a soap difficult to fuse,
which adheres strongly to the plates, and
binds the graphite and the soot. The
paraffine prevents the water from pene-
trating the coats. The scale which forms
on this application can be detached, it is
said, with a wooden mallet, without in-
juring the paint.
VII. — M. E. Asselin, of Paris, recom-
mends the use of glycerine as a preventive.
It increases the solubility of combinations
of lime, and especially of the sulphate.
It forms with these combinations soluble
compounds. When the quantity of lime
becomes so great that it can no longer
be dissolved, nor form soluble combina-
tions, it is deposited in a gelatinous sub-
stance, which never adheres to the sur-
face of the iron plates. The gelatinous
substances thus formed are not carried
with the steam into the cylinder of the
engine. M. Asselin advises the employ-
ment of 1 pound of glycerine for every
300 pounds or 400 pounds of coal burnt.
Prevention of Electrolysis. — In order
to prevent the eating away of the sheets
and tubes by electrolytic action, it has
long been the practice of marine engi-
neers to suspend slabs of zinc in their
boilers. The zinc, being more suscepti-
ble to the electrolytic action than the
iron, is eaten away, while the iron re-
mains unimpaired. The use of zinc in
this way has been found also to reduce
the trouble from boiler scale. Whether
it be due to the formation of hydrogen
bubbles between the heating surfaces
and incipient scale, to the presence in the
water of the zinc salts resulting from the
dissolution of the zinc, or to whatever
cause, it appears to be a general conclu-
sion among those who have used it that
the zinc helps the scale, as well as the
corrosion. Nobody has ever claimed
for it that it prevented the attachment of
scale altogether, but the consensus of
opinion is that it "helps some."
BOILER PRESSURE.
It hardly pays to reduce pressure on
boilers, except in very extreme cases, but
if it can be done by throttling before the
steam reaches the cylinder of the engine
it would be an advantage, because this
retains the heat units due to the higher
pressure in the steam, and the throttling
has a slight superheating effect. As a
matter of fact, tests go to show that for
light loads and high pressure a throt-
tling engine may do better than an auto-
matic cut-off. The ideal arrangement
is to throttle the steam for light loads; for
heavier loads, allow the variable cut-off
to come into play. This practice has
been carried into effect by tne design of
Mr. E. J. Armstrong, in which he ar-
ranges the shaft governor so that there is
negative lead up to nearly one-quarter
cut-off, after which the lead becomes
positive, and this has the effect of throt-
tling the steam for the earlier loads and
undoubtedly gives better economy, in
addition to making the engine run more
quietly.
BONE BLACK :
Bone or Ivory Black. — All bones (and
ivory is bone in a sense) consist of a
framework of crystallized matter or
bone earth, in the interstices of which
organic matter is embedded. Hence if
BONE BLACK
bones are heated red-hot in a closed
vessel, the organic matter is destroyed,
leaving carbon, in a finely divided state,
lodged in the bony framework. If the
heat is applied gradually the bone re-
tains its shape, but is quite black and of
much less weight than at first. This
bone black or animal charcoal is a sub-
stance which has great power of absorb-
ing coloring matter from liquids, so that
it is largely used for bleaching such liquids.
For example, in the vast industry of beet-
sugar manufacture the solutions first
made are very dark in color, but after fil-
tration through animal charcoal will give
colorless crystals on evaporation. Chem-
ical trades require such large quantities
of bone charcoal that its production is
a large industry in itself. As in breaking
up the charred bones a considerable
amount of waste is produced, in the form
of dust and small grains which cannot be
used for bleaching purposes, this waste
should be worked up into a pigment.
This is done by dissolving out the mineral
with hydrochloric acid, and then rinsing
and drying the carbon.
The mineral basis of bones consists
mainly of the phosphates of lime and
magnesia, salts soluble in not too dilute
hydrochloric acid. A vat is half filled
with the above-mentioned waste, which
is then just covered with a mixture of
equal volumes of commercial hydro-
chloric acid and water. As the mineral
matter also contains carbonates, a lively
effervescence at once ensues, and small
quantities of hydrofluoric acid are also
formed from the decomposition of cal-
cium fluoride in the bones. Now hydro-
fluoric acid is a very dangerous sub-
stance, as air containing even traces of it
is very injurious to the lungs. Hence the
addition of hydrochloric acid should be
done in the open air, and the vat should
be left by itself until the evolution of
fumes ceases. A plug is then pulled out
at the bottom and the carbon is thor-
oughly drained. It is then stirred up
with water and again drained, when it
has fully settled to the bottom. This
rinsing with clear water is repeated till all
the hydrochloric acid is washed away
and only pure carbon remains in the vat.
As for pigment-making purposes it is
essential that the carbon should be as
finely divided as possible, it is as well to
grind the washed carbon in an ordinary
color mill. Very little power is required
for this purpose, as when once the bone
earth is removed the carbon particles
have little cohesion. The properly
ground mass forms a deep-black mud,
which can be left to dry or be dried by
artificial heat. When dry, the purified
bone black is of a pure black and makes
a most excellent pigment.
Bone black is put upon the market
under all sorts of names, such as ivory
black, ebur ustum, Frankfort black, neu-
tral black, etc. All these consist of
finely ground bone black purified from
mineral matter. If leather scraps or
dried blood are to be worked up, iron
tubes are employed, closed at one end,
and with a well-fitting lid with a small
hole in it at the other. As these bodies
give off large volumes of combustible
gas during the charring, it is a good plan
to lead the vapors from the hole by a
bent tube so that they can be burnt and
help to supply the heat required and so
save fuel. Leather or blood gives a char-
coal which hardly requires treatment
with hydrochloric acid, for the amount
of mineral salts present is so small that
its removal appears superfluous.
BONES, A TEST FOR BROKEN.
Place a stethoscope on one side of the
supposed fracture, and a tuning fork on
the other. When the latter is vibrated,
and there is no breakage, the sound will
be heard distinctly through bone and
stethoscope. Should any doubt exist,
comparison should be made with the
same bone on the other side of the body.
This test shows the difference in the
power of conducting sound possessed by
bone and soft tissue.
BONE BLEACHES:
See Ivory.
BONE FAT:
See Fats.
BONE FAT, PURIFICATION AND
BLEACHING OF:
See Soap.
BONE POLISHES:
See Polishes.
BONE FERTILIZERS:
See Fertilizers.
BONES, TREATMENT OF, IN MANU-
FACTURING GLUE:
See Adhesives.
BONE, UNITING GLASS WITH:
See Adhesives.
BOOKS, THEIR HANDLING AND
PRESERVATION :
The Preservation of Books in Hot
Climates. — Books in hot climates quickly
deteriorate unless carefully guarded.
There are three destructive agencies:
(1) damp, (2) a small black insect, (3)
cockroaches.
BOOKS
125
(1) Books which are kept in a damp
atmosphere deteriorate on account of
molds and fungi that grow rapidly when
the conditions are favorable. Books
are best kept on open, airy, well-lighted
shelves. When there has been a pro-
longed spell of moist weather their covers
should be wiped, and they should be
placed in the sun or before a fire for a
few hours. Damp also causes the bind-
ings and leaves of some books to sep-
arate.
(2) A small black insect, one-eighth of
an inch long and a sixteenth of an inch
broad, somewhat resembling a beetle, is
very destructive, and books will be
found, if left untouched, after a few
months to have numerous holes in the
covers and leaves. If this insect be al-
lowed plenty of time for its ravages it
will make so many holej that bindings
originally strong can be easily torn to
pieces. All damage may be prevented
by coating the covers of books with the
varnish described under (3). When
books are found to Contain the insects
they should be well wrapped and placed
in the sun before varnishing.
(3) The appearance of a fine binding
may be destroyed in a single night by
cockroaches. The lettering of the bind-
ing may, in two or three days, be com-
pletely obliterated.
The following varnishes have been found
to prevent effectually the ravages of
cockroaches and of all insects that feed
upon books:
I. — Dammar resin 2 ounces
Mastic 2 ounces
Canada balsam 1 ounce
Creosote $ ounce
Spirit of wine 20 fl. ounces
Macerate with occasional shaking for
a few days if wanted at once, but for a
longer time when possible, as a better
varnish will result after a maceration of
several months.
II. — Corrosive sublimate, 1 ounce; car-
bolic acid, 1 ounce; methylated or rum
spirit, 1 quart.
Where it is necessary to keep books or
paper of any description in boxes, cup-
boards, or closed bookcases, some naph-
thalene balls or camphor should be al-
ways present with them. If camphor
be used it is best to wrap it in paper,
otherwise it volatilizes more quickly than
is necessary. In dry weather the doors
of closed bookcases should be left open
occasionally, as a damp, still atmosphere
is most favorable for deterioration.
How to Open a Book.— Never force the
back of the book. Hold the book with
its back on a smooth or covered table;
let the front board down, then the other,
holding the leaves in one hand while you
open a few leaves at the back, then a few
at the front, and so on, alternately open-
ing back and front, gently pressing open
the sections till you reach the center of
the volume. Do this two or three times
and you will obtain the best results.
Open the volume violently or carelessly
in any one place and you will probably
break the back or cause a start in the
leaves.
BOOK DISINFECTANT:
See Disinfectants.
BOOKS, TO REMOVE FINGER-MARKS
FROM:
See Cleaning Preparations and Meth-
ods.
BOOKBINDERS' VARNISH:
See Varnishes.
BOOKWORMS :
See Insecticides.
BOOT DRESSINGS:
See Shoe Dressings.
BOOT LUBRICANT:
See Lubricant.
BOOTS, WATERPROOFING:
See Waterproofing.
BORAX FOR SPRINKLING.
I. — Sprinkling borax is not only
cheaper, but also dissolves less in solder-
ing than pure borax.
The borax is heated in a metal vessel
until it has lost its water of crystallization
and mixed with calcined cooking salt
and potash — borax, 8 parts; cooking
salt, 3 parts; potash, 3 parts. Next i;
is pounded in a mortar into a fine pow-
der, constituting the sprinkling borax.
II. — Another kind of sprinkling borax
is prepared by substituting glass-gall for
the potash. Glass-gall is the froth float-
ing on the melted glass, which can be
skimmed off.
The borax is either dusted on in pow-
der form from a sprinkling box or
stirred with water before use into a thin
paste.
BORAX AND BORIC ACID IN FOOD :
See Food.
BORDEAUX MIXTURE:
See Insecticides.
BOROTONIC :
See Dentifrices.
126
BOTTLES
BOTTLE-CAP LACQUER:
See Lacquer.
BOTTLE CLEANERS:
See Cleaning Preparations and Meth-
ods, under Miscellaneous Methods.
BOTTLE STOPPERS:
See Stoppers.
BOTTLE VARNISH:
See Varnishes.
BOTTLE WAX:
See Photography.
BOUILLON :
See Beverages.
BOURBON METALS:
See Alloys.
BOWLS OF FIRE TRICK:
See Pyrotechnics.
BOX GLUE:
See Adhesives.
BRAGA:
See Beverages.
BRAN, SAWDUST IN.
For the detection of sawdust in bran
use a solution of 1 part of phloroglucin
in 15 parts of alcohol, 15 parts of water,
and 10 parts of syrupy phosphoric acid.
Place 2 parts of the solution in a small
porcelain dish, add a knifepointful of
the bran and heat moderately. Saw-
dust is dyed red while bran parts only
seldom acquire a faint red color. By a
microscopic examination of the reddish
parts, sawdust will be readily recognized.
Bottles
Magic Bottles. —
The mystery of the "wonderful bot-
tle," from which can be poured in suc-
cession port wine, sherry, claret, water,
champagne, or ink, at the will of the op-
erator, is easily explained. The mate-
rials consist of an ordinary dark-colored
pint wine bottle, seven wine glasses
of different patterns, and the chemicals
described below:
Solution A: A mixture of tincture of
ferric chloride, drachms vi; hydro-
chloric acid, drachms ii.
Solution B: Saturated solution of am-
monium sulphocyanide, drachm i.
Solution C: Strong solution of ferric
chloride, drachm i.
Solution D: A weak solution of am-
monium sulphocyanide.
Solution E: Concentrated solution of
lead acetate.
Solution F: Solution of ammonium
sulphide, drachm i; or pyrogallic acid,
drachm i.
Package G: Pulverized potassium bi-
carbonate, drachm iss.
Having poured two teaspoonfuls of
solution A into the wine bottle, treat the
wine glasses with the different solutions,
noting and remembering into which
? lasses the several solutions are placed,
nto No. 1 wine glass pour one or two
drops of solution B; into No. 2 glass
pour one or two drops of solution C; into
No. 3 one or two drops of Solution D;
leave No. 4 glass empty; into No. 5 glass
pour a few drops of Solution E; into No.
6 glass place a few grains of Package G;
into No. 7 glass pour a little of solution F.
Request some one to bring you some
cold drinking water, and to guarantee
that it is pure show that your wine bot-
tle is (practically) empty. Fill it up
from the carafe, and having asked the
audience whether you shall produce wine
or water, milk or ink, etc., you may ob-
tain any of these by pouring a little of
the water from the bottle into the pre-
pared glass. Thus No. 1 glass gives a
port-wine color; No. 2 gives a sherry
color; No. 3 gives a claret color; No. 4 is
left empty to prove that the solution in
the bottle is colorless; No. 5 produces
milk; No. 6, effervescing champagne:
No. 7, ink.
Bottle-Capping Mixtures. —
I. — Soak 7 pounds of good gelatin in
10 ounces of glycerine and 60 ounces of
water, and heat over a water bath until
dissolved, and add any desired color.
Pigments may be used, and various tints
can be obtained by the use of aniline
colors. The resulting compound should
be stored in jars. To apply liquefy the
mass and dip the cork and portion of
the neck of the bottle into the liquid; it
sets very quickly.
II. — Gelatin... 1 ounce
Gum arabic 1 ounce
Boric acid 20 grains
Starch 1 ounce
Water 16 fluidounces
Mix the gelatin, gum arabic, and
boric acid with 14 fluidounces of cold
water, stir occasionally until the gum is
dissolved, heat the mixture to boiling,
remove the scum, and strain. Also mix
the starch intimately with the remainder
of the water, and stir this mixture into
the hot gelatin mixture until a uniform
product results. As noted above, the
composition may be tinted with any suit-
able dye. Before using, it must be soft-
ened by the application of heat.
BRASS
'127
III.— Shellac .. . 3 ounces
Venice turpentine 14 ounces
Boric acid 72 grains
Powdered talcum. 3 ounces
Ether 6 fluidrams
Alcohol 12^ fluidounces
Dissolve the shellac, turpentine, and
boric acid in the mixed alcohol and ether,
color with a spirit-soluble dye, and add
the talcum. During use the mixture
must be agitated frequently.
Show Bottles.—
I. — Place in a cylindrical bottle the
following liquids in the order named:
First, sulphuric acid, tinted blue with
indigo; second, chloroform; third, glyc-
erine, slightly tinted with caramel;
fourth, castor oil, colored with alkanet
root; fifth, 40-per-cent alcohol, slightly
tinted with aniline green; sixth, cod-
liver oil, containing 1 per cent of oil of
turpentine. The liquids are held in
place by force of gravity, and alternate
with fluids which are not miscible, so
that the strata of layers are clearly de-
fined and do not mingle by diffusion.
II. — Chromic acid 1 drachm
Commercial "muri-
atic" acid 2 ounces
Nitric acid 2 ounces
Water, enough to
make 3 gallons
The color is magenta.
The following makes a fine pink for
show carboys:
III.— Cobalt oxide 2 parts
Nitric acid, c. p 1 part
Hydrochloric acid.. .. 1 part
Mix and dissolve, and to the solution
add:
Strongest water of
ammonia. . 6 parts
Sulphuric acid 1 part
Water, distilled, q. s.
to make 400 parts
This should be left standing in a dark,
cool place for at least a month before put-
ting in the window.
IV. — Green. — Copper sulphate, 300
parts, by weight; hydrochloric acid, 450
parts, by weight; distilled water, to 4,500
parts, by weight.
V.— Blue.— Copper sulphate, 480 parts,
by weight; sulphuric acid, 60 parts, by
weight; distilled water, to 450 parts, by
weight.
VI. — Yellowish Brown. — Potassium
dichromate, 120 parts, by weight; nitric
acid, 150 parts, by weight; distilled wa-
ter, to 4,500 parts, by weight.
VII. — Yellow. — Potassium dichromate,
30 parts, by weight; sodium bicarbon-
ate, 225 parts, by weight; distilled water,
to 4,500 parts, by weight.
VIII. — Red. — Liquid ferric chloride,
officinal, 60 parts, by weight: co: cen-
trated ammonium-acetate solution, 120
parts, by weight; acetic acid, 30 per
cent, 30 parts, by weight; distilled water,
to 9,000 parts, by weight.
IX. — Crimson. — Potassium iodide, 7.5
parts, by weight; iodine, 7.5 parts, by
weight; hydrochloric acid, 60 parts, by
weight; distilled water, to 4,500 parts,
by weight.
All the solutions IV to IX should be
filtered. If distilled water be used these
solutions should keep for five to ten years.
In order to prevent them from freezing,
either add 10 per cent of alcohol, or re-
duce the quantity of water by 10 per cent.
A Cheap and Excellent Warming
Bottle. — Mix sodium acetate and sodium
hyposulphate in the proportion of 1 part
of the former to 9 parts of the latter, and
with the mixture fill an earthenware bottle
about three-quarters full. Close the ves-
sel well with a cork and place it either
in hot water or in the oven, and let re-
main until the salts within melt. For
at least a half day the jug will radiate its
heat, and need only be well shaken from
time to time to renew its heat-giving
energy.
Bottle Deodorizer. — Powdered ' black
mustard seed is successfully employed.
Pour a little of it with some lukewarm
water into the receptacle, rinsing it after-
wards with water. If necessary, repeat
the process.
BRANDY AND BRANDY BITTERS
See Wines and Liquors.
Brass
Formulas for the making of Brass will be
found under Alloys.
Colors for Polished Brass. — The brass
objects are put into boiling solutions
composed of different salts, and the in-
tensity of the shade obtained is depend-
ent upon the duration of the immersion.
WTith a solution composed of
Sulphate of copper. . . 120 grains
Hydrochlorate of am-
monia 30 grains
Water 1 quart
greenish shades are obtained. With the
following solution all the shades of brown
from orange brown to cinnamon are ob-
tained:
128
BRASS
Chlorate of potash . . . 150 grains
Sulphate of copper. . . 150 grains
Water 1 quart
The following solution gives the brass
first a rosy tint and then colors it violet
and blue:
Sulphate of copper. . . 435 grains
Hyposulphite of soda 300 grains
Cream of tartar 150 grains
Water 1 pint
Upon adding to the last solution
Ammoniacal sulphate
of iron 300 grains
Hyposulphite of soda 300 grains
there are obtained, according to the dura-
tion of the immersion, yellowish, orange,
rosy, then bluish shades. Upon polar-
izing the ebullition the blue tint gives
way to yellow, and finally to a pretty
gray. Silver, under the same circum-
stances, becomes very beautifully col-
ored. After a long ebullition in the
following solution we obtain a yellow-
brown shade, and then a remarkable fire
red:
Chlorate of potash ... 75 grains
Carbonate of nickel . . 30 grains
Salt of nickel 75 grains
Water 16 ounces
The following solution gives a beau-
tiful, dark-brown color:
Chlorate of potash . . 75 grains
Salt of nickel 150 grains
Water 10 ounces
The following gives, in the first place;
a red, which passes to blue, then to pale
lilac, and finally to white:
Orpiment. 75 grains
Crystallized sal sodae 150 grains
Water 10 ounces
The following gives a yellow brown:
Salt of nickel 75 grains
Sulphate of copper. . 75 grains
Chlorate of potash . . 75 grains
Water 10 ounces
On mixing the following solutions,
sulphur separates and the brass becomes
covered with iridescent crystallizations:
I. — Cream of tartar 75 grains
Sulphate of copper. . 75 grains
Water 10 ounces
II. — Hyposulphite of soda 225 grains
Water 5 ounces
Upon leaving the brass objects im-
mersed in the following mixture con-
tained in corked vessels they at length
acquire a very beautiful blue color:
Hepar of sulphur .... 15 grains
Ammonia 75 grains
Water 4 ounces
Miscellaneous Coloring of Brass. —
Yellow to bright red: Dissolve 2 parts
native copper carbonate with 1 part
caustic soda in 10 parts water. Dip for
a few minutes into the liquor, the va-
rious shades desired being obtained
according to the length of time of the
immersion. Green: Dissolve 1 part cop-
per acetate (verdigris), 1 part blue
vitriol, and 1 part alum in 10 parts of
water and boil the articles therein.
Black: For optical articles, photographic
apparatus, plates, rings, screws, etc.,
dissolve 45 parts of malachite (native
copper carbonate) in 1,000 parts of sal
ammoniac. For use clean and remove
the grease from the article by pickling
and dip it into the bath until the coating
is strong enough. The bath operates
better and quicker if heated. Should
the oxidation be a failure it should be
removed by dipping into the brass
pickle.
A verdigris color on brass is produced
by treating the articles with dilute acids,
acetic acid, or sulphuric acid, and drying.
Brown in all varieties of shades is ob-
tained by immersing the metal in solu-
tions of nitrates or ferric chloride after
it has been corroded with dilute nitric
acid, cleaned with sand and water, and
dried. The strength of the solutions
governs the deepness of the resulting
color.
Violet is caused by immersing the thor-
oughly cleaned objects in a solution of
ammonium chloride.
Chocolate color results if red ferric
oxide is strewn on and burned off, fol-
lowed by polishing with a small quantity
of galena.
Olive green is produced by blacken-
ing the surface with a solution of iron in
hydrochloric acid, polishing with galena,
and coating hot with a lacquer composed
of 1 part varnish, 4 parts cincuma, and 1
part gamboge.
A steel-blue coloring is obtained by
means of a dilute boiling solution of
chloride of arsenic, and a blue one by a
treatment with strong hyposulphite of
soda. Another formula for bluing
brass is: Dissolve 10 parts of antimony
chloride in 200 parts of water, and add 30
parts of pure hydrochloric acid. Dip the
article until it is well blued, then wash
and dry in sawdust.
Black is much used for optical brass
articles and is produced by coating with
a solution of platinum or auric chloride
mixed with nitrate of tin.
Coloring Unpolished Brass. — A yellow
color of handsome effect is obtained on
BRASS
129
unpolished brass by means of antimony-
chloride solution. This is produced by
finely powdering gray antimony and boil-
ing it with hydrochloric acid. With
formation of hydrogen sulphide a solu-
tion of antimony results, which must not
be diluted with water, since a white pre-
cipitate of antimony oxychloride is im-
mediately formed upon admixture of
water. For dilution, completely satu-
rated cooking-salt solution is employed,
using for 1 part of antimony chloride 2
parts of salt solution.
Coloring Fluid for Brass. — Caustic
soda, 33 parts; water, 24 parts; hydraled
carbonate of copper, 5.5 parts.
Dissolve the salt in water and dip the
metal in the solution obtained. The in-
tensity of the color will be proportional
to the time of immersion. After remov-
ing the object from the liquid, rinse with
water and dry in sawdust.
Black Color on Brass. — A black or ox-
idized surface on brass is produced by a
solution of carbonate of copper in am-
monia. The work is immersed and al-
lowed to remain until the required tint
is observed. The carbonate of copper is
best used in a plastic condition, as it is
then much more easily dissolved. Plas-
tic carbonate of copper may be .mixed as
follows: Make a solution of blue vitriol
(sulphate of copper) in hot water, and
add a strong solution of common washing
soda to it as long as any precipitate
forms. The precipitate is allowed to
settle, and the clear liquid is poured off.
Hot water is added, and the mass stirred
and again allowed to settle. This oper-
ation is repeated six or eight times to re-
move the impurities. After the water
has been removed during the last pour-
ing, and nothing is left but an emulsion
of the thick plastic carbonate in a small
quantity of water, liquid ammonia is
added until everything is dissolved and a
clear, deep-blue liquid is produced. If
too strong, water may be added, but a
strong solution is better than a weak one.
If it is desired to make the solution from
commercial plastic carbonate of copper
the following directions may be followed:
Dissolve 1 pound of the plastic carbonate
of copper in 2 gallons of strong ammonia.
This gives the required strength of so-
lution.
The brass which it is desired to black-
en is first boiled in a strong potash solu-
tion to remove grease and oil, then well
rinsed and dipped in the copper solution,
which has previously been heated to
from 150° to 175° F. This solution, if
heated too hot, gives off all the ammonia.
The brass is left in the solution until the
required tint is produced. The color
produced is uniform, black, and tena-
cious. The brass is rinsed and dried in
sawdust. A great variety of effects may
be produced by first finishing the brass
before blackening, as the oxidizing proc-
ess does not injure the texture of the
metal. A satisfactory finish is produced
by first rendering the surface of the
brass matt, either by scratch-brush or
similar methods, as the black finish thus
produced by the copper solution is dead
— one of the most pleasing effects of an
oxidized surface. Various effects may also
be produced by coloring the entire article
and then buffing the exposed portions.
The best results in the use of this so-
lution are obtained by the use of the so-
called red metals — i. e., those in which
the copper predominates. The reason
for this is obvious. Ordinary sheet brass
consists of about 2 parts of copper and 1
part of zinc, so that the large quantity of
the latter somewhat hinders the produc-
tion of a deep-black surface. Yellow
brass is colored black by the solution,
but it is well to use some metal having a
reddish tint, indicating the presence of a
large amount of copper. The varieties
of sheet brass known as gilding or bronze
work well. Copper also gives excellent
results. Where the best results are de-
sired on yellow brass a very light electro-
plate of copper before the oxidizing
works well and gives an excellent black.
With the usual articles made of yellow
brass this is rarely done, but the oxida-
tion carried out directly.
Black Finish for Brass. — I. — A hand-
some black finish may be put on brass
by the following process: Dissolve in
1,000 parts of ammonia water 45 parts of
natural malachite, and in the solution put
the object to be blackened, after first
having carefully and thoroughly cleaned
the same. After letting it stand a short
time gradually warm the mixture, ex-
amining the article from time to time
to ascertain if the color is deep enough.
Rinse and let dry.
II. — The blacking of brass may be
accomplished by immersing it in the fol-
lowing solution and then heating over
a Bunsen burner or a spirit flame:
Add a saturated solution of ammo-
nium carbonate to a saturated copper-
sulphate solution, until the precipitate
resulting in the beginning has almost en-
tirely dissolved. The immersion and
heating are repeated until the brass
turns dark; then it is brushed and dipped
in negative varnish or dull varnish.
130
BRASS
To Give a Brown Color to Brass. — I. —
In 1.000 parts oi rain or distilled water
dissolve 5 parts each of verdigris (copper
acetate) and ammonium chloride. Let
the solution stand 4 hours, then add 1,500
parts of water. Remove the brass to be
Drowned from its attachment to the fix-
tures and make the surface perfectly
bright and smooth and free from grease.
Place it over a charcoal fire and heat un-
til it "sizzes" when touched with the
dampened finger. The solution is then
painted over the surface with a brush or
, swabbed on with a rag. If one swab-
bing does not produce a sufficient depth
of color, repeat the heating and the ap-
plication of the liquid until a fine durable
brown is produced. For door plates,
knobs, and ornamental fixtures gener-
ally, this is one of the handsomest as well
as the most durable surfaces, and is
easily applied.
II. — A very handsome brown may be
produced on brass castings by immersing
the thoroughly cleaned and dried articles
in a warm solution of 15 parts of sodium
hydrate and 5 parts of cupric carbonate
in 100 parts of water. The metal turns
dark yellow, light brown, and finally
dark brown, with a greenish shimmer,
and, when the desired shade is reached,
is taken out of the bath, rinsed, and dried.
III. — Paint the cleaned and dried sur-
face uniformly with a dilute solution of
ammonium sulphide. When this coat-
ing is dry, it is rubbed over, and then
painted with a dilute ammoniacal so-
lution of arsenic sulphide, until the
required depth of color is attained.
If the results are not satisfactory the
painting can be repeated after washing
over with ammonia. Prolonged im-
mersion in the second solution produces
a grayish-green film, which looks well,
and acquires luster when polished with
a cloth.
Refinishing Gas Fixtures. — Gas fix-
tures which have become dirty or tar-
nished from use may be improved in ap-
pearance by painting with bronze paint
and then, if a still better finish is re-
quired, varnishing after the paint is
thoroughly dry with some light-colored
varnish that will give a hard and brilliant
coating.
If the bronze paint is made up with
ordinary varnish it is liable to become
discolored from acid which may be pres-
ent in the varnish. One method pro-
posed tor obviating this is to mix the
varnish with about five times its volume
of spirit of turpentine, add to the mixture
dried sJaked lime in the proportion of
about 40 grains to the pint, agitate well,
repeating the agitation several times, and
finally allowing the suspended matter to
settle and decanting the clear liquid.
The object of this is to neutralize any
acid which may be present. To deter-
mine how effectively this has been done
the varnish may be chemically tested.
Steel Blue and Old Silver on Brass.—
For the former dissolve 100 parts of car-
bonic carbonate in 750 parts of ammonia
and dilute this solution with distilled
water, whereupon the cleaned articles
are dipped into the liquid by means of a
brass wire. After two to three minutes
take them out, rinse in clean water, and
dry in sawdust. Old silver on brass is
produced as follows: The articles are
first silvered and next painted with a thin
paste consisting of graphite, 6 parts;
pulverized hematite, 1 part; and tur-
pentine. Use a soft brush and dry well;
then brush off the powder. Oxidized
silver is obtained by dipping the silvered
goods into a heated solution of liver of
sulphur, 5 parts; ammonia carbonate, 10
parts; and water, 10, 000 parts. Only sub-
stantially silvered objects are suited for
oxidation, as a weak silvering is taken
cff by this solution. Unsatisfactory col-
oring is removed with potassium-cya-
nide solution. It is advisable to lay the
articles in hydrogen sulphide-ammonia
solution diluted with water,wherein they
acquire a blue to a deep-black shade.
Tombac Color on Brass. — This is pro-
duced by immersion in a mixture of cop-
per carbonate, 10 parts; caustic soda, 30
parts; water, 200 parts. This layer will
only endure wiping with a cloth, not vig-
orous scouring with sand.
Graining of Brass. — Brass parts of
timepieces are frequently provided with
a dead grained surface. For this pur-
pose they are fastened with flat-headed
pins on cork disks and brushed with a
paste of water and finest powdered
pumice stone. Next they are thor-
oughly washed and placed in a solution
of 10 quarts of water, 30 grains of mer-
curic nitrate, and 60 grains of sulphuric
acid. In this amalgamating solution
the objects become at once covered with
a layer of mercury, which forms an amal-
gam with the copper, while the zinc
passes into solution. After the articles
have again been washed they are treated
with graining powder, which consists of
silver powder, tartar, and cooking salt.
These substances must be pure, dry, and
very finely pulverized. The mixing is
done with moderate heat. According
BRASS
131
co whether a coarser or finer grain is de-
sired, more cooking salt or more tartar
must be contained in the powder. The
ordinary proportions are:
Silver powder.. 28 28 28 parts
Tartar. 283 110-140 85 parts
Cooking salt. .. 900 370 900 parts
This powder is moistened with water
and applied to the object. Place the article
with the cork support in a flat dish and
rub on the paste with a stiff brush while
turning the !ish incessantly. Gradu-
ally fresh portions of graining powder
are put on until the desired grain is ob-
tained. These turn out the rounder the
more the dish and brush are turned.
When the right grain is attained, rinse
off with water, and treat the object with
a scratch brush, with employment of a
decoction of saponaria. The brushes
must be moved around in a circle in
brushing with the pumice stone, as well
as in rubbing on the graining powder
and in using the scratch brush. The
required silver powder is produced by
precipitating a diluted solution of silver
nitrate with some strips of sheet copper.
The precipitated silver powder is washed
out on a paper filter and dried at moder-
ate heat.
The Dead, or Matt, Dip for Brass.—
The dead dip is used to impart a satiny
or crystalline finish to the surface. The
bright dip gives a smooth, shiny, and per-
fectly even surface, but the dead dip is
the most pleasing of any dip finish, and
can be used as a base for many secondary
finishes.
The dead dip is a mixture of oil of
vitriol (sulphuric acid) and aqua fortis
(nitric acid) in which there is enough
sulphate of zinc (white vitriol) to saturate
the solution. It is in the presence of the
sulphate of zinc tnat the essential differ-
ence between the bright and the dead dip
exists. Without it the dead or matt sur-
face cannot be obtained.
The method generally practiced is to
add the sulphate of zinc to the mixed
acids (sulphuric and nitric), so that some
remains undissolved in the bottom of the
vessel. It is found that the sulphate of
zinc occurs in small crystals having the
appearance of very coarse granulated
sugar. These crystals readily settle to the
bottom of the vessel and do not do the
work of matting properly. If they are
finely pulverized the dip is slightly im-
proved, but it is impossible to pulverize
such material to a fineness that will do
the desired work. The use of sulphate
of zinc, then, leaves much to be desired.
The most modern method of making
up the dead dip is to produce the sul-
phate of zinc directly in the solution
and in the precipitated form. It is well
known that the most finely divided ma-
terials are those which are produced by
precipitation, and ?n the dead dip it is
very important ha* h? sulphate of zinc
shall be finely d;v did so that it will not
immediately settle to he bottc m. There-
fore it chould be precipitated so that
when it is mixed with the acids it will not
settle immediately. The method of mak-
ing the sulphate of zinc directly in the
solution is as follows:
Take 1 gallon of yellow aqua fortis
(38° F.) and place in a stone crock
which is surrounded with cold water.
The cold water is to keep the heat,
formed by the reaction, from evaporating
the acid. Add metallic zinc in small
pieces until the acid will dissolve no
more. The zinc may be in any conven-
ient form — sheet clippings, lumps, gran-
ulated, etc., that may be added little by
little. If all is added at once it will boil
over. ^When the acid will dissolve no
more zinc it will be found that some of
the acid has evaporated by the heat, and
it will be necessary to add enough fresh
acid to make up to the original gallon.
When this is done add 1 gallon of strong
oil of vitriol. The mixture should be
stirred with a wooden paddle while the
oil of vitriol is being added.
As the sulphuric acid is being added
the solution begins to grow milky, and
finally the whole has the consistency of
thick cream. This is caused by the sul-
phuric acid (oil of vitriol) precipitating
out the sulphate of zinc. Thus the very
finely^ divided precipitate of sulphate of
zinc is formed. If one desires to use
known quantities of acid and zinc the
following amounts may be taken: Oil of
vitriol, 1 gallon; aqua fortis (38° F.), 1
gallon; metallic zinc, 6 ounces.
In dissolving the zinc in the aqua for-
tis it is necessary to be sure that none re-
mains undissolved in the bottom.
The dead or matt dip is used hot, and.
therefore, is kept in a stone crock sur-
rounded with hot water. The articles to
be matted are polished and cleaned, and
the dip thoroughly stirred with a wooden
paddle, so as to bring up the sulphate of
zinc which has settled. Dip the work in
the solution and allow it to remain until
the matt is obtained. This is a point
which can be learned only by experience.
When the brass article is first introduced
there is a rapid action on the surface, but
in a few seconds this slows down. Re-
move the article and rinse and immedi-
ately dip into the usual bright dip. This
132
BRASS
is necessary for the reason that the dead
dip produces a dark coating upon the
surface, which, were it left on, would not
show the real effect or the color of the
metal. The bright dip, however, re-
moves this and exposes the true dead
surface.
The usual rule for making up the dead
dip is to use equal parts of oil of vitriol
and aqua fortis; but these may be altered
to suit the case. More oil of vitriol gives
a finer matt, while a larger quantity of
aqua fortis will give a coarser matt.
When the dip becomes old it is unneces-
sary to add more zinc, as a little goes into
the solution each time anything is dipped.
After a while, however, the solution be-
comes loaded with copper salts, and
should be thrown away.
A new dip does not work well, and
will not give good results when used at
once. It is usual to allow it to remain
over night, when it will be found to be in
a better working condition in the morn-
ing. A new dip will frequently refuse to
work, and the addition of a little water
will often start it. The water must be
used sparingly, however, and only when
necessary. Water, as a usual thing,
spoils a dead dip, and must be avoided.
After a while it may be necessary to add
a little more aqua fortis, and this may be
introduced as desired. Much care is
needed in working the dead dip, and it
requires constant watching and experi-
ence. The chief difficulty in working
the dead dip is to match a given article.
The only way that it can be done is to
"cut and try," and add aqua fortis or oil
of vitriol as the case requires.
The dead or matt dip can be obtained
only upon brass or German silver; in
other words, only on alloys which con-
tain zinc. The best results are obtained
upon yellow brass high in zinc.
To Improve Deadened Brass Parts. —
Clock parts matted with oilstone and
oil, such as the hour wheels, minute
wheels, etc., obtain, by mere grinding, a
somewhat dull appearance, with a sensi-
tive surface which readily takes spots.
This may be improved by preparing the
following powder, rubbing a little of it
on a buff stick, and treating the deadened
parts, which have been cleansed with
benzine, by rubbing with slight pressure
on cork. This imparts to the articles a
handsome, permanent, metallic matt
luster. The smoothing powder consists
of 2 parts of jewelers' red and 8 parts of
lime carbonate, levigated in water, and
well dried. Jewelers' red alone may be
employed, but this requires some prac-
tice and care, especially in the treatment
of wheels, because rays are liable to
form from the teeth toward the center.
Pickle for Brass. — Stir 10 parts (by
weight) of shining soot or snuff, 10 parts
of cooking salt, and 10 parts of red tar-
tar with 250 parts of nitric acid, and
afterwards add 250 parts of sulphuric
acid; or else mix 7 parts of aqua fortis
(nitric acid) with 10 parts of English
sulphuric acid. For the mixing ratio of
the acid, the kind and alloy of the metal
should be the guidance, and it is best
found out by practical trials. The bet-
ter the alloy and the less the percentage
of zinc or lead, the handsomer will be
the color. Genuine bronze, for instance,
acquires a golden shade. In order to
give brass the appearance of handsome
gilding it is often coated with gold var-
nish by applying same thinly with a brush
or sponge and immediately heating the
metal over a coal fire.
Pickling Brass to Look Like Gold.—
To pickle brass so as to make it resem-
ble gold allow a mixture of 6 parts of
chemically pure nitric acid and 1 part of
English sulphuric acid to act for some
hours upon the surface of the brass; then
wash with a warm solution, 20 parts of
tartar in 50 parts of water, and rub off
neatly with dry sawdust. Then coat
the article with the proper varnish.
Pickle for Dipping Brass. — To im-
prove the appearance of brass, tombac,
and copper goods, they are usually
dipped. For this purpose they are first
immersed in diluted oil of vitriol (brown
sulphuric acid), proportion, 1 to 10; next
in a mixture of 10 parts of red tartar; 10
parts of cooking salt; 250 parts of Eng-
lish sulphuric acid, as well as 250 parts of
aqua fortis (only for a moment), rinsing
off well in water and drying in sawdust.
For obtaining a handsome matt gold
color ^j part of zinc vitriol (zinc sul-
phate) is still added to the pickle.
Restoration of Brass Articles.— The
brass articles are first freed from adher-
ing dirt by the use of hot soda lye; if
bronzed they are dipped in a highly dilute
solution of sulphuric acid and rinsed in
clean water. Next they are yellowed in
a mixture of nitric acid, 75 parts; sul-
phuric acid, 100 parts; shining lamp-
black, 2 parts; cooking salt, 1 part; then
rinsed and polished and, to prevent
oxidation, coated with a colorless spirit
varnish, a celluloid varnish being best
for this purpose.
Tempering Brass. — If hammered too
brittle brass can be tempered and made
BRICK
183
of a more even hardness throughout by
warming it, as in tempering steel; but
the heat must not be nearly so great.
Brass, heated to the blue heat of steel, is
almost soft again. To soften brass, heat
it nearly to a dull red and allow it to cool,
or, if time is an object, it may be cooled
by plunging into water.
Drawing Temper from Brass. — Brass
is rendered hard by hammering or roll-
ing, therefore when a brass object re-
quires to be tempered the material must
be prepared before the article is shaped.
Temper may be drawn from brass by
heating it to a cherry red and then sim-
ply plunging it into water, the same as
though steel were to be tempered.
BRASS, FASTENING PORCELAIN TO :
See Adhesives.
BRASS PpLISHES:
See Polishes.
BRASS SOLDERS:
See Solders.
BRASS BRONZING:
See Plating.
BRASS CLEANERS:
See Cleaning Preparations and Meth-
ods.
BRASS PLATINIZING:
See Plating.
BRASS, SAND HOLES IN:
See Castings.
BRASSING :
See Plating.
BREAD, DOG:
See Dog Biscuit.
BREATH PERFUMES:
See also Dentifrices.
Remedies for Fetid Breath.— Fetid
breath may be due to the expelled air
(i. e., to disease of the respirational tract),
to gases thrown off from the digestive
tract, or to a diseased mouth. In the
first two cases medication must be di-
rected to the causative diseases, with the
last, antisepsis principally arid the neu-
tralization of the saliva, also the removal
of all residual food of dental caries.
I. — Potassium perman-
ganate 1 part
Distilled water.. . . 10 parts
Mix and dissolve. Add from 5 to 8
drops of this solution to a glass of water
and with it gargle the mouth.
II. — Infusion of sal via 250 parts
Glycerine 30 parts
Tincture of myrrh 12 parts
Tincture of laven-
der 12 parts
Labarraque's so-
lution 30 parts
Mix. Rinse the mouth frequently
with this mixture.
III. — Decoction of cham-
omile 30 parts
Glycerine 80 parts
Chlorinated water. 15 parts
Mix. Use as a gargle and mouth
wash.
IV. — Peppermint water 500 parts
Cherry-laurel wa-
ter 60 parts
Borax 25 parts
Mix and dissolve. Use as gargle and
mouth wash.
V.— Thymol 3 parts
Spirit of cochlea-
ria 300 parts
Tincture of rhat-
any 100 parts
Oil of peppermint 15 parts
Oil of cloves 10 parts
Mix. Gargle and wash mouth well
with 10 drops in a glass of water.
VI.— Salol 5 parts
1 Alcohol 1,000 parts
Tincture of white
canella 30 parts
Oil of pepper-
mint 1 part
Mix. Use as a dentifrice.
VII. — Hydrogen perox-
ide 25 parts
Distilled water. . . 100 parts
Mix. Gargle the mouth twice daily
with 2 tablespoonfuls of the mixture in a
glass of water.
VIII. — Sodium bicarbon-
ate 2 parts
Distilled water. ... 70 parts
Spirit of cochlearia 30 parts
Mix a half-teaspoonful in a wine-
glassful of water. Wash mouth two or
three times daily.
BRICK STAIN.
To stain brick flat the color of brown-
stone, add black to Venetian red until
the desired shade is obtained. If color
ground in oil is used, thin with turpen-
tine, using a little japan as a drier. If
necessary to get the desired shade add
yellow ocher to the mixture of red and
black. If the work is part old and part
new, rub the wall down, using a brick
134
BRONZING
for a rubber, until the surface is uniform,
and keep it well wet while rubbing with
cement water, made by stirring Portland
cement into water until the water looks
the color of the cement. This opera-
tion fills the pores of the brick and makes
a smooth, uniform surface to paint on.
Tinge the wash with a little dry Vene-
tian red and lampblack. This will help
bring the brick to a uniform color, so that
an even color can be obtained with one
coat of stain.
BRICKS :
See Ceramics.
BRICKS OF SAND-LIME:
See Stone, Artificial.
BRICK POLISHES:
See Polishes.
BRICK WALLS, TO CLEAN:
See Cleaning Preparations and Meth-
ods and Household Formulas.
BRICK WATERPROOFING:
See Waterproofing.
BRICKMAKERS' NOTES:
See Ceramics.
BRIDGE PAINT:
See Paint.
BRILLIANTINE :
See Hair Preparations.
BRIMSTONE (BURNING):
See Pyrotechnics.
THEIR PRE3ER-
BRIONY ROOTS:
VATION :
See Roots.
BRITANNIA METAL:
See Alloys.
BRITANNIA METAL, TO CLEAN:
See Cleaning Preparations and Meth-
ods.
BRITANNIA, SILVERPLATING :
See Plating.
BROMINE, ANTISEPTIC:
See Antiseptics.
BROMOFORM.
Bromoform is insoluble in dilute al-
cohol, but may be dissolved by the aid of
glycerine. The following formula has
een devised:
Bromoform 1 part
Alcohol 2 parts
Compound tincture of
cardamon 2 parts
Glycerine U parts
Some other formulas are:
Syrup of Bromofcrm. — Bromoform,
5 parts; alcohol (95 per cent), 45 parts;
glycerine, 150 parts; syrup, 800 parts.
Mix in the order given and place the con-
tainer in warm water until the syrup be-
comes perfectly clear.
Emulsion of Bromoform. — Add 3 parts
of bromoform to 20 parts of expressed oil
of almond; emulsify this mixture in the
usual manner with 2 parts of powdered
tragacanth, 4 parts of powdered acacia,
and sufficient water, using for the com-
pleted emulsion a total of 120 parts of
water, and add, finally, 4 parts of cherry-
laurel water.
Bromoform Rum. — Bromoform, 1.2
parts; chloroform, 0.8 parts; rum, suffi-
cient to make 120 parts. Claimed to
be an effective remedy in the treatment of
whooping cough.
BRONZES:
See Alloys.
BRONZE CASTING:
See Casting.
BRONZE, IMITATION:
See Plaster.
BRONZE POLISHES:
See Polishes.
BRONZE, RENOVATION OF:
See Cleaning Compounds.
Bronze Powders, Liquid
Bronzes, Bronze Substitutes,
and Bronzing
BRONZE POWDERS.
Gold bronze is a mixture of equal
parts of oxide of tin and sulphur, which
are heated for some time in an earthen
retort. Silver bronze is a mixture of
equal parts of bismuth, tin, and mercury,
which are fused in a crucible, adding the
mercury only when the tin and the bis-
muth are in fusion. Next reduce to a
very fine powder. To apply these
bronzes, white of egg, gum arabic, or
varnish is used. It is preferable to ap-
ply them dry upon one of the above-
named mediums serving as size, than to
mix them with the liquids themselves, for
in the latter case their luster is impaired.
Simple Coloring of Bronze Powder. —
In order to impart different colors to
BRONZING
135
bronze powders, such as pale yellow,
dark yellow to copper red. the powder is
heated with constant stirring in flat iron
pans until through the oxidation of the
copper — the bronzes consist of the brass
powder of an alloy from which the so-
called Dutch gold is produced — the de-
sired shade of color is reached. As a
rule a very small quantity of fat, wax, or
even paraffine is added in this operation.
The bronze powders are employed to
produce coatings or certain finishes on
metals themselves or to give articles of
wood, stone, pasteboard, etc., a metallic
appearance.
General Directions for Bronzing. — The
choice of bronze powders is determined
by the degree of brilliancy to be ob-
tained. The powder is mixed with
strong gum water or isinglass, and laid
on with a brush or pencil, almost but not
absolutely dry. A piece of soft leather,
wrapped around the finger, is dipped into
the powder and rubbed over the work;
when all this has been covered with the
bronze it must be left to dry, and the
loose powder is then cleared away with
a hair pencil.
LIQUID BRONZES.
Liquid Bronzes. — I. — For the produc-
tion of liquid bronze, acid-free varnish
should be used, as bronze ground with
ordinary varnish will form verdigris.
For the deacidification of dammar rosin
pour 1,000 parts of petroleum benzine
over 350 parts of finely ground dammar
rosin, and dissolve by repeated shaking.
Next add to the solution 250 parts of a
10-per-cent aqueous solution of caustic
soda and shake up well for 10 minutes.
After standing for a short time two
strata will have formed, the upper one
consisting of benzine-rosin solution and
the lower, aqueous one containing the
resinic acid dissolved as soda salts. Pour
off the benzine layers and agitate again
assiduously with 250 parts of the 10-per-
cent caustic-soda solution. Now set
aside for a complete classification and
separation of the two liquids. The
dammar solution siphoned off will be per-
fectly free from acid. To obtain gold-
bronze varnish add to the deacidified
dammar solution about 250 parts of
bronze or brocade per liter.
II. — Or else carefully mix 100 parts of
finely ground dammar rosin with 30 parts
of calcined soda and heat to fusion, in
which state it is maintained 2 or 3 hours
with frequent stirring. Let cool, grind
the turbid mass obtained, and pour a little
coal benzine or petroleum benzine over
it in a flask. By repeated shaking of the
flask the soluble portion of the molten
mass is dissolved; filter after allowing to
settle; into the filtrate put 300 to 400
parts of bronze powder of any desired
shade, the brocades being especially well
adapted for this purpose. If the metallic
powder remains distributed over the
mass for a long time it is of the right
consistency; if it deposits quickly it is
too thin and a part of the solvent must
be evaporated before stirring in the
bronze powder.
III. — A liquid bronze, which, while
it contains no metallic constituent, yet
possesses a metallic luster and a bronze
appearance, and answers excellently for
many purposes, is made as follows:
Dissolve by the aid of gentle heat 10
parts of aniline red and 5 parts of aniline
purple in 100 parts of alcohol. When
solution is complete, add 5 parts of ben-
zoic acid, raise the heat, and let boil
from 5 to 10 minutes, or until the green-
ish color of the mixture passes over to a
clear bronze brown. For "marbling"
or bronzing paper articles, this answers
particularly well.
Incombustible Bronze Tincture. —
Finely pulverize 5 parts, by weight, of
prime Dammar rosin and 1.5 parts of
ammonia soda. Heat gently, and stir fre-
quently, until no more carbonic acid bub-
bles up. Cool and pulverize again. Put
the powder into a glass carboy, and pour
over it 50 parts of carbon tetrachloride;
let 'this stand for 2 days, stirring fre-
quently. Then filter. Ten parts of the
fluid are mixed with 5 parts of metallic
bronze of any desired shade, and put
into bottles. Shake well before using.
General Formulas for Bronzing Prepa-
rations.— I. — Take 240 parts subacetate
of copper, 120 parts oxide of zinc in pow-
der form, 60 parts borax, 60 parts salt-
peter, and 3.5 parts corrosive sublimate.
Prepare a paste from it with oil, stir to-
gether, and continue working with boiled
linseed oil and turpentine.
II. — Dissolve 120 parts sulphate of
copper and add 120 parts chipping of
tin; stir well and gather the precipitating
copper. After complete drying, grind
very finely in boiled linseed oil and tur-
pentine.
III. — Melt in a crucible 60 parts sul-
phur and 60 parts stannic acid; stir with
a clay tube until the mixture takes on the
appearance of Dutch gold and pour out.
When cold mix the color with boiled lin-
seed oil and turpentine, adding a small
quantity of drier. These three bronzes
must be covered with a pale, resistant
136
BRONZING
lacquer, otherwise they will soon tarnish
in rooms where gas is burned,
Florentine Bronzes. —I.— To produce a
Florentine bronzing, apply to the articles,
which must have previously been dipped,
a varnish composed of cherry gum lac
dissolved in alcohol. This varnish is
put on with a brush, and after that the
bronzed piece is passed through the
stove.
II. — If the article is of brass it must
be given a coat of copper by means of
the battery. Next dip a brush in olive
oil and brush the piece uniformly; let
dry for 5 or 6 hours and place in saw-
dust. Then heat the article on a mod-
erate charcoal dust fire.
Preparation of French Bronze. —
French bronze may be prepared by re-
ducing to a powder hematite, 5 parts,
and plumbago, 8 parts, and mixing into a
paste with spirit of wine. Apply the
composition with a soft brush to the
article to be bronzed and set it aside for
some hours. By polishing with a toler-
ably hard brush the article will assume
the beautiful appearance of real bronze.
The desired tint may be regulated by the
proportions of the ingredients.
How to Bronze Metals. — Prepare a
solution of 1* ounces of sodium hyposul-
phite in 1 pint of water and add to the
same a solution of 1A ounces of lead
acetate dissolved in 1 pint of water.
If, instead of lead acetate, an equal
weight of sulphuric acid (1* ounces) is
added to the sodium hyposulphite and
the process carried on as before, the
brass becomes coated with a very beau-
tiful red, which changes to green, and
finally a splendid brown with a green
and red iridescence. This last is a very
durable coating and may be especially
recommended. It is very difficult to
obtain exact shades by this process with-
out some experience. The thorough
cleansing of all articles from grease by
boiling in potash is absolutely necessary
to success. By substituting other metal
salts for the lead acetate many changes
in tints and quality of the coatings can
also be effected.
When this mixture is heated to a tem-
perature a little below the boiling point
it precipitates sulphide of lead in a state
of fine division. If some metal is pres-
ent some of the lead is precipitated on
the surface and, according to the thick-
ness of the layer, different colors are pro-
duced. To produce an even color the
articles must be evenly heated. By im-
mersion of brass articles for 5 minutes
the same may be coated with colors
varying from gold to copper red, then to
carmine, dark red, and from light blue
to blue white, and at last a reddish white,
depending on the time the metal remains
in the solution and the temperature used.
Iron objects treated in this solution take
a steel-blue color, zinc a brown color. In
the case of copper objects a golden yellow
cannot be obtained.
New Bronzing Liquid. — Dissolve 10
parts of fuchsine and 5 parts of aniline
purple in 100 parts of alcohol (95 percent)
and add to the solution 5 parts of ben-
zoic acid. Boil the whole for 10 min-
utes until the color turns bronze brown.
This liquid can be applied to all metals
and dries quickly.
A Bronze for Brass. — Immerse the
articles, freed from dirt and ^grease, in a
cold solution of 10 parts 01 potassium
permanganate, 50 parts of iron sulphate,
5 parts of hydrochloric acid in 1,000
parts of water. Let remain 30 seconds,
then withdraw, rinse, and let dry in fine,
soft sawdust. If the articles have be-
come too dark, or if a reddish-brown
color be desired, immerse for about 1
minute in a warm (140° F.) solution of
chromic acid, 10 parts; hydrochloric
acid, 10 parts; potassium permanganate,
10 parts; iron sulphate, 50 parts; water,
1,000 parts. Treat as before. If the
latter solution alone be used the product
will be a brighter dark-yellow or red-
dish-brown color. By heating in a dry-
ing oven the tone of the colors is im-
proved. *
To Bronze Copper. — This process is
analogous to the one practiced at the
Mint of Paris for bronzing medals.
Spread on the copper object a solution
composed of:
Acetate or chlorhy-
drate of ammonia. . 30 parts
Sea salt 10 parts
Cream of tartar 10 parts
Acetate of copper .... 10 parts
Diluted acetic acid. . . 100 parts
Let dry for 24 to 48 hours at an ordi-
nary temperature. The surface of the
metal will become covered with a series
of varying tints. Brush with a waxed
brush. The green portions soaked with
chlorhydrate of ammonia will assume a
blue coloring, and those treated with
carbonate will be thick and darkened.
Bronzing and Patinizing of Small Zinc
Articles. — Coatings of bronze tones and
patina shades may be produced on zinc
oy means of various liquids, but the
BRONZING
137
articles, before being worked upon,
should be rubbed down with very fine
glass or emery paper, to make them not
only perfectly metallic, but also some-
what rough, as a consequence of which
the bronze or patina coatings will adhere
much better. The best bronze or pa-
tina effects on bronze are obtained by
electroplating the article with a fairly
thick deposit of brass rich in copper and
then treating it like genuine bronze. The
solutions used, however, must always be
highly diluted, otherwise they may eat
entirely through the thin metallic coat-
ing.
Bronzing of Zinc. — Mix thoroughly 30
parts of sal ammoniac, 10 parts of
oxalate of potash, and 1,000 parts of
vinegar. Apply with a brush or a rag
several times, until the desired tint is
produced.
Bronze Gilding on Smooth Moldings. —
A perfect substitute for dead gilding can-
not be obtained by bronzing, because of
the radically different reflection of the
light, for the matt gilding presents to the
light a perfectly smooth surface, while
in bronzing every little scale of bronze
reflects the light in a different direction.
In consequence of this diffusion of light,
all bronzing, even the best executed, is
somewhat darker and dimmer than leaf
gilding. This dimness, it is true, ex-
tends over the whole surface, and there-
fore is not perceptible to the layman, and
cannot be called an evil, as the genuine
leaf gold is so spotted that a bronzed
surface is cleaner than a gilt one. The
following process is the best known at
present: Choose only the best bronze,
which is first prepared thick with pure
spirit. Next add a quantity of water
and stir again. After the precipitation,
which occurs promptly, the water is
poured off and renewed repeatedly by
fresh water. When the spirit has been
washed out again in this manner, the re-
maining deposit, i. e., the bronze, is
thinned with clean, good gold size. The
bronze must be thin enough just to
cover. The moldings are coated twice,
the second time commencing at the op-
posite end. Under no circumstances
should the dry, dead gilding give off
color when grasping it firmly. If it does
that, either the size is inferior or the so-
lution too weak or the mixture too thick.
Incombustible Bronze Tincture. — Five
parts of prime dammar rosin and 1.5
parts of ammonia soda, very finely pul-
verized. Heat gently, with frequent
stirring, until the evolution of carbonic
acid ceases. Then take from the fire,
and when cool pulverize again. Put
the powder into a glass carboy, and pour
over it 50 parts of carbon tetrachloride;
let this stand for 2 days, stirring fre-
quently, then filter. Ten parts of the
nuid are to be mixed with each 5 parts
of metallic bronze of any desired shade,
and put into bottles. Shake the tincture
well before using.
Bronzing Engraved Ornaments. —
Take bronze and stir. with it pale copal
varnish diluted one-half with turpentine.
With this paint the ornaments neatly.
In £ hour the bronze will have dried.
The places from which the bronze is to
be removed, i. e., where the bronze has
overrun the polished surface, are dabbed
with a small rag soaked with kerosene,
taking care that it is not too wet, so as
to prevent the kerosene from running
into the ornament. After a short while
the bronze will have dissolved and can
be wiped off with a soft rag. If this
does not remove it entirely, dab and wipe
again. Finally finish wiping with an
especially soft, clean rag. Kerosene
does not attack polish on wood. The
bronze must become dull and yet adhere
firmly, under which condition it has a
hardened color. If it does not become
dull the varnish is too strong and should
be diluted with turpentine.
Durable Bronze on Banners. — To
render bronzes durable on banners, etc.,
the ground must be primed with gum
arable and a little glycerine. Then ap-
ply the bronze solution, prepared with
dammar and one-tenth varnish. In-
stead of gum arabic with glycerine, gela-
tine glue may also be employed as an
underlay.
BRONZE SUBSTITUTES.
The following recipe is used in making
imitation gold bronzes:
Sandarac 50 parts
Mastic 10 parts
Venice turpentine. . . 5 parts
Alcohol 135 parts
In the above dissolve:
Metanil yellow and
gold orange 0.4 parts
and add
Aluminum, finely
powdered 20 parts
and shake.
If a deeper shade is desired it is well
to use ethyl orange and gold orange in
the same proportion, instead of the dyes.
For the production of imitation copper
bronze take the above-mentioned rosin
mixture and dissolve therein only gold
138
BRONZING
orange 0.8 parts, and add aluminum 20
parts, whereby a handsome copper color
is produced. Metanil yellow 0.4 parts
without gold orange gives with the same
amount of lacquer a greenish tone of
bronze. The pigments must not be
made use of in larger quantities, because
the luster of the bronze is materially
affected. Only pigments of certain
properties, such as solubility in alcohol,
relative constancy . to reductive agents,
are suitable; unsuitable are, for instance,
naphthol yellow, phenylene-diamin, etc.
Likewise only a lacquer of certain com-
position is fit for use, other lacquers of
commerce, such as zapon (celluloid)
lacquer being unsuitable. The bronzes
prepared in this manner excel in luster
and color effect; the cost is very low.
They are suitable for bronzing low-
priced articles, as tinware, toys, etc.
Under the action of sun and moisture the
articles lose some of their luster, but ob-
jects kept indoors such as figures of plas-
ter of Paris, inkstands, wooden boxes,
etc., retain their brilliancy for years.
Some use powdered aluminum and yel-
low organic dyestuffs, such as gold orange.
These are employed together with a var-
nish of certain composition, which im-
parts the necessary gloss to the mixture.
BRONZE COLORING:
To Color Bronze. — Bronze articles ac-
quire handsome tempering colors by
heating. In order to impart an old ap-
pearance to new objects of bronze, they
may be heated over a flame and rubbed
with a woolen rag dipped in finely pow-
dered graphite, until the desired shade
is attained. Or else a paste is applied
on the article, consisting of graphite 5
parts and bloodstone 15 parts, with a suf-
ficient quantity of alcohol. After 24
hours brush off the dry powder. A hot
solution composed of sal ammoniac 4
parts, sorrel salt 1 part, vinegar 200
parts, may also be brushed on. Another
way is to dip the pieces into a boiling so-
lution of cupric acetate 20 parts, and sal
ammoniac 10 parts, dissolved in 60 to
100 parts of vinegar.
Patent bronzes (products colored by
means of aniline dyes) have hitherto
been used in the manufacture of toys and
de luxe or fancy paper, but makers of
wall or stained paper have recently given
their attention to these products. Wall
—or moire — paper prepared with these
dyes furnishes covers or prints of silken
gloss with a peculiar double-color effect
in which the metallic brilliancy charac-
teristic of bronze combines with the
shades of the tar pigments used. Very
beautiful reliefs, giving rise to the most
charming play of colors in perpendicular
or laterally reflected light, are produced
by pressing the paper lengths or web
painted with aniline-bronze dyes. The
brass brocade and tin bronzes serve as
bases for the aniline dyes; of the tar pig-
ments only basic aniline dyes soluble in
alcohol are used. In coloring the pul-
verized bronze care must be taken that
the latter is as free as possible from or-
ganic fats. Tar dyes should be dis-
solved in as concentrated a form as pos-
sible in alcohol and stirred with the
bronze, the pigment being then fixed on
the vehicle with an alcoholic solution of
tannin. The patent bronze is then
dried by allowing the alcohol to evapo-
rate. This method of coloring is purely
mechanical, as the tar dyes do not com-
bine with the metallic bronze, as is the
case with pigments in which hydrate of
alumina is used. A coating of aniline
bronze of this kind is therefore very sen-
sitive to moisture, unless spread over
the paper surface with a suitable protect-
ive binding medium, or protected by a
transparent coat of varnish, which of
course must not interfere with the special
color effect.
Pickle for Bronzes. — Sulphuric acid,
1,000 parts; nitric acid, 500 parts; soot,
10 parts; sea salt, 5 parts.
Imitation Japanese Bronze. — When
the copper or coppered article is per-
fectly dry and the copper or copper
coating made brilliant, which is produced
by rubbing with a soft brush, put graph-
ite over the piece to be bronzed so
that the copper is simply dyed. Wipe
off the raised portions with a damp cloth,
so that the copper makes its appearance.
Next put on a thin coat of Japanese var-
nish; wipe the relief again and let dry.
Apply 1 or 2 coats after the first is per-
fectly dry. Handsome smoked hues
may be obtained by holding the bronze
either over the dust of lighted peat or
powdered rosin thrown on lighted coal,
so as to obtain a smoke which will change
the color of the varnish employed. The
varnish must be liquid enough to be
worked easily, for this style of bronzing
is only applicable to brass.
Green Bronze on Iron. — Abietate of
silver, 1 part; essence of lavender, 19
parts. Dissolve the abietate of silver in
the essence of lavender. After the arti-
cles have been well pickled apply the
abietate-of-silver solution with a brush;
next place the objects in a stove and let
the temperature attain about 150° C.
Blue Bronze. — Blue bronze is pro-
BRONZING
139
duced by the wet process by coloring
white bronze (silver composition) with
aniline blue. A blue-bronze color can be
produced in the ordinary way from white-
bronze color, the product of pure Eng-
lish tin, and with an alum solution con-
sisting of 20 parts of alum in 4,500 parts
of water boiled for 5 hours and washed
clean and dried. The bronze prepared
in this manner is placed in a porcelain
dish, mixed with a solution of 15 parts of
aniline blue in 1,500 parts of alcohol,
stirring the bronze powder and liquid
until the alcohol has evaporated entire-
ly and the bronze color becomes dry.
This manipulation must be repeated 6
or 8 times, until the desired blue shade
is reached. When the bronze is dark
enough it is washed out in warm water,
and before entirely dry 1 tablespoonful
of petroleum is poured on 2 pounds of
bronze, which is intimately mixed and
spread out into a thin layer, exposed to
the air, whereby the smell is caused to
disappear in a few days.
Bronzing with Soluble Glass.— To
bronze wood, porcelain, glass, and metal
by means of a water-glass solution, coat
the article with potash water-glass of
30° Be. and sprinkle on the respective
bronze powder.
Brown Oxidation on Bronze. — Genu-
ine bronze can be beautifully oxidized by
painting it with a solution of 4 parts of
sal ammoniac and 1 part of oxalium
(oxalate of potash) in 200 parts of vine-
gar, allowing it to dry, and repeating the
operation several times. These articles,
protected against rain, soon lose the un-
pleasant glaring metallic luster and as-
sume instead a soft brown tint, which
bronze articles otherwise acquire only
after several years' exposure to the at-
mosphere. A beautiful bronze color
which will remain unaffected by heat
can be imparted to bronze articles by the
following process: The object is first
washed in a solution of 1 part of crystal-
lized verdigris and 2 parts of sal ammo-
niac in 260 parts of water, and then dried
before an open fire till the green color
begins to disappear. The operation is
repeated 10 to 20 times, but with a solu-
tion of 1 part of verdigris crystals and 2
parts of sal ammoniac in 600 parts of
water. The color of the article, olive
green at first, gradually turns to brown,
which will remain unaltered even when
exposed to strong heat.
BRONZE POWDERS:
See also Plating for general methods
of bronzing, and Varnishes.
Gold and Silver Bronze Powders. —
Genuine gold bronze is produced from
the waste and parings obtained in gold
beating. The parings, etc., are ground
with honey or a gum solution, upon a
glass plate or under ha.rd granite stones,
into a very fine powder, which is re-
peatedly washed out with water and
dried. There are various shades of gold
bronze, viz., red, reddish, deep yellow,
pale yellow, as well as greenish. These
tints are caused by the various percent-
ages of gold or the various mixtures of
the gold with silver and copper.
By the use of various salt solutions or
acidulated substances other shades can
be imparted to bronze. In water con-
taining sulphuric acid, nitric acid, or
hydrochloric acid, it turns a bright yel-
low; by treatment with a solution of crys-
tallized verdigris or blue vitriol in water
it assumes more of a reddish hue; other
tints are obtained with the aid of cooking
salt, tartar, green vitriol, or saltpeter in
water.
Gold bronze is also obtained by dis-
solving gold in aqua regia and mixing
with a solution of green vitriol in water,
whereupon the gold falls down as a me-
tallic powder which may be treated in
different ways. The green vitriol, how-
ever, must be dissolved in boiling water
and mixed in a glass, drop by drop, with
sulphuric acid and stirred until the basic
iron sulphate separating in flakes has re-
dissolved. Another way of producing
gold bronze is by dissolving gold in aqua
regia and evaporating the solution in a
porcelain dish. When it is almost dry
add a little pure hydrochloric acid and
repeat this to drive out all the free chlo-
rine and to produce a pure hydrochlorate
of gold. The gold salt is dissolved in
distilled water, taking \ liter per ducat
(3J grams fine gold); into this solution
drop, while stirring by means of a glass
rod, an 8° solution (by Beaume) of an-
timony chloride, as long as a precipitate
forms. This deposit is gold bronze,
which, dried after removal of all liquids,
is chiefly employed in painting, for bronz-
ing, and for china and glass decoration.
Metallic gold powder is, furthermore,
obtained by dissolving pure and alloyed
gold in aqua regia and precipitating it
again by an electro-positive metal, such
as iron or zinc, which is placed in the liq-
uid in the form of rods. The gold is
completely separated thereby. The rods
must be perfectly clean and polished
bright. The color of the gold bronze
depends upon the proportions of the gold.
In order to further increase the brilliancy
the dried substance may still be ground.
140
BRUSHES
Mosaic Gold. — Mosaic gold, generally
a compound of tin, 64.63 parts, and sul-
phur, 35.37 parts, is odorless and taste-
less, and dissolves only in chlorine solu-
tion, aqua regia, and boiling potash lye.
It is employed principally for bronz-
ing plaster-of-Paris figures, copper, and
brass, by mixing it with 6 parts of bone
ashes, rubbing it on wet, or applying it
with varnish or white of egg in the prep-
aration of gold paper or for gilding
cardboard and wood. Mosaic gold of
golden-yellow color is produced by heat-
ing 6 parts of sulphur and 16 parts of
tin amalgam with equal parts of mer-
cury and 4 parts of sulphur; 8 parts of
precipitate from stannic muriate (stannic
acid) and 4 parts of sulphur also give a
handsome mosaic gold.
The handsomest, purest, and most
gold-like mosaic gold is obtained by
melting 12 parts of pure tin, free from
lead, and mixing with 6 parts of mercury
to an amalgam. This is mixed with 7
parts of flowers of sulphur and 6 parts of
sal ammoniac, whereupon the mass is
subjected for several hours to a heat
which at first does not attain redness,
but eventually when no more fumes are
generated is increased to dark -red heat.
This operation is conducted either in a
glass retort or in an earthenware cru-
cible. The sal ammoniac escapes first
on heating, next vermilion sublimates
and some stannic chloride, while the
mosaic gold remains on the bottom, the
upper layer, consisting of lustrous,
golden, delicately translucent leaflets,
being the handsomest mosaic gold.
Genuine Silver Bronze. — This is ob-
tained by the finely ground waste from
beating leaf silver or by dissolving silver
in aqua fortis. This solution is then
diluted with water and brightly scoured
copper plates are put in, whereby the
silver precipitates as a metallic powder.
Imitation Silver Bronze. — This is ob-
tained through the waste in beating imi-
tation leaf silver, which, finely ground,
is then washed and dried. In order to
increase the luster it is ground again in a
dry condition.
Mosaic Silver. — Mosaic silver is an
amalgam of equal parts of mercury, bis-
muth, and tin. One may also melt 50
parts of good tin in a crucible, and as
soon as it becomes liquid add 50 parts
of bismuth, stirring all with an iron wire
until the bismuth is fused as well. As
soon as this occurs the crucible must be
removed from the fire; then stir in, as
long as the contents are still liquid, 25
parts of mercury and mix the whole mass
evenly until it can be ground on a stone
slab.
BRONZE VARNISHES:
See Varnishes.
BRONZING SOLUTIONS FOR PAINTS :
See Paints.
BRONZING OF WOOD :
See Wood.
BROOCHES, PHOTOGRAPHS ON:
See Photography.
BROWN OINTMENT :
See Ointments.
BROWNING OF STEEL:
See Plating.
BROWNSTONE, IMITATION:
See Brick Stain.
BRUNETTE POWDER:
See Cosmetics.
Brushes
HOW TO TAKE CARE OF PAINT
AND VARNISH BRUSHES.
It is a good plan to fill the varnish brush
before putting it in the keeper.
Whitewash or kalsomine brushes
should not be put into newly slaked
lime or hot kalsomine.
Cement-set brushes should never be
put in any alcohol mixture, such as shel-
lacs and spirit stains.
Varnish brushes should be selected
with a view to their possessing the follow-
ing qualities: 1st, excellence of mate-
rial; 2d, excellence of make, which
includes fullness of hair or bristles and
permanency of binding; 3d, life and
spring, or elasticity sufficient to enable
the varnisher to spread the varnish with-
out reducing it with turpentine; and
4th, springing, when in use, to a true
chisel edge.
Temperature for Brushes. — The bris-
tles of every brush are held in place by
the handle. It passes through the shank
of the brush and is kiln-dried to fit
perfectly. If it shrinks, however, its
outward tension is lost and the bristles
loosened. For this reason the first
principle in brush care is to keep the
tool, when it is new or not soaking, in a
cool place, out of hot rooms, and any
temperature that would tend to shrink
the wood of the handle.
Cleaning Paint Brushes. — No new
brush should be dipped in the paint
and put to work without first being
BRUSHES— BUNIONS
141
cleaned. By working it with a brisk
movement back and forth through the
hand most of the dust and loose hairs
will be taken out. A paint brush, when
thus thoroughly dry cleaned, should be
placed in water for a few minutes, not
long enough to soak or swell it, but only
until wet through, and then swung and
shaken dry. It is then ready to dip in
the paint, and although some of the hairs
may still be loose, most of them will
come out in the first few minutes' work-
ing and can be easily picked from the
surface.
Cleaning Varnish Brushes. — Varnish
brushes, and brushes used in varnish
stain, buggy paint, and all color in var-
nish require different handling than
paint brushes. They should be more
thoroughly dry cleaned, in order that
all loose hairs may be worked out.
After working them through the hand it
is a good thing to pass the brush back
and forth over a sheet of sandpaper.
This rough surface will pull out the loose
bristles and smooth down the rough
ends of the chisel point. The brush
should then be washed by working it for
a few minutes in clean turpentine and
swinging it dry. It should never be put
in water. For carriage work and fine
varnishing the brush should be broken
in on the rubbing coat in order to work
out all the dust particles before it is used
on the finishing coats.
Setting the Paint -Brush Bristles.—
For the first 2 or 3 days new brushes
require special care while at rest. They
should be dipped in raw oil or the
paint itself and smoothed out carefully,
then laid on their sides over night. The
chisel-pointed brushes should be set at
an incline, the handle supported just
enough to allow the brush to lie along
the point. This is done to prevent twist-
ing of the bristles, and to keep the shape
of the brush. It is necessary to do
this only 2 or 3 times before the shape
becomes set.
Paint Brushes at Rest. — An impor-
tant principle in brush care is never to
leave the brush on end while at rest.
Even for temporary rest during a job
the brush should never stand on end.
At night it should always be placed in a
"brush-keeper" — a water-tight box, or a
paint keg, with nails driven through the
sides on which the brushes can be sus-
pended in water. Holes are bored in
the handles so the brush will hang free
of the bottom, but with the bristles en-
tirely under water. Before placing
them in water the brushes should be
wiped so as not to be too full of paint,
but not cleaned.
Varnish Brushes at Rest. — Varnish
brushes should be kept at rest in tur-
pentine and varnish, or better, in some
of the varnish that the brush is used for.
They should preferably not be kept in
turpentine, as that makes the brush
** lousy" — roughening the bristles.
Washing Brushes. — All brushes should
be washed in benzine or turpentine and
shaken dry — not whipped — when it is
desired to change from one color to an-
other, or from one varnish to another.
To Restore Brushes. — A good remedy
to restore lettering brushes which have
lost their elasticity and do not keep a
point, is as follows:
Put the pencil in oil and brush it sev-
eral times over a hot iron in such a man-
ner that the hairs touch the iron from
each side; then dip the pencil quickly in
cold water.
A Removable Binding. — The bristle
bunch of brushes is bound with rope so
as to keep them together for use. In-
stead of the twine, a covering of rubber
may be employed, which is easily slipped
over the bristles and can be conveniently
removed again. The cleaning of the
brush is much facilitated thereby, and
the breadth of the stripe to be drawn
with the brush can be accurately regu-
lated, according to how far the covering
is slipped over the brush.
See also Cleaning Preparations a--d
Methods.
BUBBLES f GELATIN:
See Gelatin.
BUBBLE (SOAP) LIQUID:
See Soap Bubble Liquid.
BUBBLES.
Bubbles of air often adhere to molds
immersed in depositing solutions. They
may be prevented by previously dipping
the object into spirits of wine, or be re-
moved by the aid of a soft brush, or by
directing a powerful current of the liquid
against them by means of a vulcanized
india-rubber bladder, with a long and
curved glass tube attached to it; but the
liquid should be free from sediment.
BUG KILLERS:
See Insecticides.
BUNIONS :
See Corn Cures.
BURNS— BUTTER
BURNS :
See also Ointments and Turpentine.
Mixture for Burns. — I. — A mixture of
castor oil with the white of egg is recom-
mended for burns. The eggs are broken
into a bowl and the castor oil slowly
poured in while the eggs are beaten.
Enough oil is added to make a thick,
creamy paste, which is applied to the
burn. The applications are repeated
often enough to prevent their becoming
dry or sticky. Leave the surface un-
covered.
II. — Put 27 parts, by measure, of
menthol into 44 parts, by measure, of
witch ha/el (distillate) and apply freely.
A good plan is to bandage the parts and
wet the wrappings with this mixture.
III. — A very efficacious remedy for
burns is a solution of cooking salt in
water. It is best to immerse fingers,
hands, and arms in the solution, which
must be tolerably strong. For burns in
the face and other parts of the body,
salt water poultices are applied.
Butter
(See also Foods.)
Butter Color. — Orlean, 80 parts, by
weight; curcuma root (turmeric), 80
parts, by weight; olive oil, 240 parts, by
weight; saffron, 1 part, by weight; alco-
hol, 5 parts, by weight. The orlean and
turmeric are macerated with olive oil and
expressed. The weight of the filtered
liquid is made up again to 240 parts, by
weight, with olive oil, next the filtered
saffron-alcohol extract is added, and the
alcohol is expelled again by heating the
mixture.
Artificial Butter.— I.— Carefully
washed beef suet furnishes a basis for
the manufactures of an edible substitute
for natural butter. The thoroughly
washed and finely chopped suet is ren-
dered in a steam-heated tank; 1,000
parts of fat, 300 parts of water, 1 part of
potassium carbonate, and 2 stomachs of
pigs or sheep, are taken. The temper-
ature of the mixture is raised to 113° F.
After 2 hours, under the influence of the
pepsin in the stomachs, the membranes
are dissolved and the fat is melted and
rises to the top of the mixture. After
the addition of a little salt the melted fat
is drawn off, stood to cool so as to allow
the stearine and palmitin to separate,
and then pressed in bags in a hydraulic
press. Forty to 50 per cent of solid
stearine remains, while 50 to 60 per cent
of fluid oleopalmitin (so-called "oleo-
margarine'') is pressed out. The "oleo
oil" is then mixed with 10 per cent of its
weight of milk and a little butter color
and churned. The product is then
worked, salted, and constituted the
"oleomargarine," or butter substitute.
Leaf lard can be worked in the same way
as beef suet, and will yield an oleopal-
mitin suitable for churning up into a
butter substitute.
II. — Fat from freshly slaughtered cattle
after thorough washing is placed in clean
water and surrounded with ice, where it
is allowed to remain until all animal heat
has been removed. It is then cut into
small pieces by machinery and cooked at
a temperature of about 150° F. (65.6° C.)
until the fat in liquid form has separated
from the tissue, then settled until it is
perfectly clear. Then it is drawn into
the graining vats and allowed to stand
for a day, when it is ready for the presses.
The pressing extracts the stearine, leav-
ing a product commercially known as
oleo oil which, when churned with cream
or milk, or both, and with usually a pro-
Eortion of creamery butter, the whole
eing properly salted, gives the new food
product, oleomargarine.
III. — In making butterine use neutral
lard, which is made from selected leaf
lard in a very similar manner to oleo oil,
excepting that no stearine is extracted.
This neutral lard is cured in salt brine
for from 48 to 70 hours at an ice-water
temperature. It is then taken and, with
the desired proportion of oleo oil and fine
butter, is churned with cream and milk,
producing an article which when proper-
ly salted and packed is ready for the
market. In both cases coloring matter
is used, which is the same as that used by
dairymen to color their butter. At cer-
tain seasons of the year — viz., in cold
weather, a small quantity of sesame oil
or salad oil made from cottonseed oil is
used to soften the texture of the product.
IV. — "Ankara" is a substance which
in general appearance resembles a good
article of butter, being rather firmer at
ordinary temperatures than that sub-
stance, approaching the consistency of
cocoa butter. It is quite odorless, but in
taste it resembles that of a fair article of
butter and, what is more, its behavior
under heat is very similar to that of but-
ter— it browns and forms a sort of spume
like that of fat. Ankara consists of a
base of cocoa butter, carrying about 10
per cent of milk, colored with yolk of egg.
While not derived from milk, on the one
hand, nor does it come from a single
vegetable or animal fat on the other, an-
BUTTER— CAFlS PARFAIT
143
kara may be considered as belonging to
the category of the margarines. An-
kara is obtained in the market in the form
of cakes or tablets of 2 pounds in weight.
V. — Fresh butter, 150 parts, by weight;
animal fat, 80 parts, by weight; sun-
flower oil, 40 parts, by weight; cocoanut
oil, 30 parts, by weight.
yi.— Fresh butter, 100 parts, by
weight; animal fat, 100 parts, by weight;
sunflower oil, 80 parts, by weight; cocoa-
nut oil, 20 parts, by weight.
VII.— Fresh butter, 50 parts, by
weight; animal fat, 150 parts, by weight;
sunflower oil, 80 parts, by weight; cocoa-
nut oil, 20 parts, by weight.
It is seen that these three varieties
contain respectively 50, 33, and about 16
per cent of cow's butter. The appear-
ance of the mixture is nearly perfect.
Formulas V to VII are for a Russian arti-
ficial butter called " Perepusk."
To Impart the Aroma and Taste of
Natural Butter to Margarine. — In order
to give margarine the aroma and flavor of
cow butter, add to it a fatty acid product,
which is obtained by saponification of
butter, decomposition of the soap, and
distillation in the vacuum at about 140°
F. The addition of the product is made
upon emulsification of the fats with milk.
The margarine will keep for months.
Harmless Butter Color. — Alum, pul-
verized finely, 30 parts; extract of tur-
meric, 1 part. With the extract damp-
en the powder as evenly as possible, then
spread out and dry over some hot sur-
face. When dry, again pulverize thor-
oughly. Protect the product from the
light. As much of the powder as will
lie on the point of a penknife is added
to a churnful of milk, or cream, before
churning, and it gives a beautiful golden
color, entirely harmless. To make the
extract of turmeric add 1 part of pow-
dered turmeric to 5 parts of alcohol, and
let macerate together for fully a week.
To Sweeten Rancid Butter.— I.— Wash
the butter first with fresh milk and after-
wards with spring water, carefully work-
ing out the residual water.
II. — Add 25 to 30 drops of lime chlor-
ide to every 2 pounds of butter, work the
mass up thoroughly, then wash in plenty
of fresh, cold water, and work out the
residual water.
III. — Melt the butter in a water bath,
along with some freshly burned animal
charcoal, coarsely powdered and care-
fully sifted to free it from dust. After
this has remained in contact for a few
minutes, the butter is strained through
a clean flannel. If the rancid odor is
not completely removed, complete the
process.
An English Margarine. — A mixture of
edible fats of suitable consistency, e. g.,
oleo oil, 5 parts; neutral lard, 7 parts; and
butter, 1 part; is mixed with albuminous
"batter," 4 parts, with the addition of 1
part of salt as a preservative. If the
albuminous constituent be composed of
the whites and yolks of eggs beaten to a
foam the product will have the consist-
ency and color of butter. The molten
fats are added to the egg batter and the
whole is stirred at a temperature suffi-
cient to produce coagulation of the albu-
men (150-200° F.). The mass is then
cooled gradually with continuous stir-
ring, and the salt is worked in.
Olive-Oil Paste. — If an ounce of peeled
garlic be rubbed up into a pulp, in a
clean Wedgwood mortar, and to this be
added from 3 to 4 ounces of good olive
oil, with constant rubbing up with the
pestle, the oil becomes converted into a
pasty mass, like butter. It is possible
that the mucilage obtainable from other
bulbs of the Lilium tribe would prove
equally efficient in conferring semi-
solidity on the oil, without imparting any
strong smell. The above composition is
largely used by the Spanish peasantry,
instead of butter, which runs liquid in
the Spanish summer. It is known as
"aleoli." The more easily solidified
portion of olive oil is stearine, and this
may be cheaply prepared from mutton
fat. If added, in certain proportions, to
olive oil, it would certainly raise its melt-
ing point.
BUTTERMILK, ARTIFICIAL.
Buttermilk powder, 10 parts; vinegar,
1 part; syrup of buckthorn, 1 part. Dis-
solve the powder in the water and add
the vinegar and syrup. The powder is
prepared as follows: Sodium chloride,
50 parts; milk sugar, 100 parts; potas-
sium nitrate, 5 parts; alum, 5 parts.
Mix.
BUTTER, ARTIFICIAL: TESTS FOR:
See Foods.
BUTTER COLORANT:
See Foods.
BUTTONS OF ARTIFICIAL AGATE:
See Agate.
CADMIUM ALLOYS :
See Alloys.
CALAMUS dORDlAL-CAMPMOft
CALCIUM CARBIDE:
Preservation and Use of Calcium
Carbide. — Calcium carbide is readily at-
tacked by the air and the moisture con-
tained in the generators and consequent-
ly decomposes during the storing, with
formation of acetylene gas. Aside from
the loss, this decomposition is also at-
tended with dangers. One of the oldest
methods of preservation is the saturation
of the carbide with petroleum. In using
such carbide a layer of petroleum forms
on the surface of the water in the gener-
ator, which prevents the water from
evaporating, thus limiting the subse-
quent generation of acetylene from the
remaining carbide. Instead of petro-
leum many other substances have been
proposed which answer the purpose
equally well, e. g., toluol, oils, solid bodies,
which previously have to be liquefied,
such as stearine, paraffine, rosin, etc.
Of a different nature is a medium of-
fered by Letang of Paris. He em-
ploys sugar or saccharine bodies to which
he adds, if necessary, a little petroleum,
turpentine, vaseline, or varnish of any
kind, as well as chalk, limestone, talc,
sulphur, or sand. The carbide is coated
with this mixture. The saccharine sub-
stances dissolve in the generating water,
and also have a dissolving action on the
slaked lime, which is formed by the de-
composition of the carbide which admits
of its easy removal.
According to another process carbide
is put on the market in such a shape
that, without weighing, merely by count-
ing or measuring one is in a position to
use equivalent quantities for every charge.
Gearing casts molten carbide in the
shape of bars, and pours a layer of gela-
tin, glue, and water soluble varnish
over the carbide bars. Others make
shells containing a certain quantity of
reduced carbide. For this ordinary and
varnished pasteboard, wax paper, tin-
foil, thin sneet zinc, and similar sub-
stances may be used which ward off
atmospheric moisture, thus protecting
the carbide from premature decompo-
sition. Before use, the cartridge-like
shell is pierced or cut open, so that the
water can get at the contents. The
more or less reduced carbide is filled in
the shell, either without any admixture
or united into a compact mass by a bind-
ing agent, such as colophony, pitch, tar,
sand, etc.
Deodorization of Calcium Carbide. —
Calcium carbide is known to possess a
very unpleasant odor because It
stantly develops small quantities of im-
pure acetylene in contact with the mois-
ture of tne air. Le Roy, of Rouen,
proposes for portable — especially bicy-
cle— lamps, in which the evil is more
noticeable than in large plants, simply to
pour some petroleum over the carbide
and to pour off the remainder not ab-
sorbed. The petroleum, to which it is
well to add some nitro-benzol (mir-
bane essence), prevents the access of air
to the carbide, but permits a very satis-
factory generation of gas on admission of
water.
CALCIUM SULPHIDE (LUMINOUS):
See Paints.
CALFSKIN:
See Leather.
CAMERA RENOVATION:
See Photography.
CAMPHOR PREPARATIONS:
Fragrant Naphthalene Camphor. —
Naphthalene white,
in scales 3,000 parts
Camphor 1,000 parts
Melt on the steam bath and add to the
hot mass:
Coumarin 2 parts
Mirbane oil 10 parts
Cast in plates or compressed tablets.
The preparation is employed as a moth
preventive.
Powdered Camphor in. Permanent
Form. — I. — Powder the camphor in the
usual manner, with the addition of a
little alcohol. When it is nearly reduced
to the proper degree of fineness add a
few drops of fluid petrolatum and imme-
diately triturate again. In this manner
a powder as fine as flour is obtained,
which does not cake together. This
powdered camphor may be used for all
purposes except for solution in alcohol,
as it will impart to the latter a faint opal-
escence, owing to the insolubility of the
petrolatum.
II. — Take equal parts of strong ether
and alcohol to reduce the camphor to
powder. It is claimed for this method
that it only takes one-half of the time
required when alcohol alone is used, and
that the camphor dries more quickly.
Before sifting add 1 per cent of white
vaseline and 5 per cent of sugar of milk.
Triturate fairly dry, spread out in the air,
say 15 minutes, ^ then pass through a
moderately fine wire sieve, using a stubby
shaving brush to assist in working it
through.
CAMPHOR— CANDLES
145
Camphor Pomade —
Oil of bitter almonds. 1 drachm
Oil of cloves 20 drops
Camphor li ounces
White wax 4 ounces
Lard, orepared 1 pound
Melt the wax and lard together, then
add the camphor in saturated solution
in spirit; put in the oils when nearly
cold.
Camphor Ice. —
L— White wax 16 parts
Benzoated suet 48 parts
Camphor, powdered. 8 parts
Essential oil, to perfume.
Melt the wax and suet together.
When nearly cold, add the camphor and
perfume, mix well, and pour into molds.
II. — Oil of a Imond 16 parts
White wax 4 parts
Spermaceti 4 parts
Paraffine 8 parts
Camphor, powdered. 1 part
Perfume, quantity sufficient.
Dissolve the camphor in the oil by the
aid of a gentle heat. Melt the solids to-
gether, remove, and let cool, but before
the mixture begins to set add the cam-
phorated oil and the perfume, mix, and
pour into molds.
III. — Stearine (stearic acid) 8 pounds
Lard 10 pounds
White wax 5 pounds
Spermaceti 5 pounds
Melt on a water bath in an earthen or
porcelain dish; strain into a similar ves-
sel; add a solution of 2 ounces powdered
borax in 1 pound of glycerine, previously
warmed, to the melted substance when at
the point of cooling; stir well; add cam-
phor, 2 pounds, powdered by means of
alcohol, 3 ounces; stir well and pour into
molds.
CAMPHOR SUBSTITUTES IN THE
PREPARATION OF CELLULOID :
See Celluloid.
CAMPHOR AND RHUBARB AS A
REMEDY FOR CHOLERA:
See Cholera Remedies.
CAN VARNISH :
See Varnishes.
CANARY-BIRD PASTE.
The following is a formula much used
by German canary-bird raisers:
Sweet almonds,
blanched 16 parts
Pea meal , .. 32 parts
Butter, fresh (un-
salted) ... 3 parts
Honey, quantity sufficient to make
a stiff paste.
The ingredients are worked into a
stiff paste, which is pressed through a
colander or large sieve to granulate the
mass. Some add to every 5 pounds,
10 or 15 grains of saffron and the yolks
of 2 eggs.
CANARY BIRDS AND THEIR DIS-
EASES :
See Veterinary Formulas.
CANDLES :
Coloring Ceresine Candles for the
Christmas Tree. — For coloring these
candles only dye stuffs soluble in oil
can be employed. Blue: 23-24 lav-
ender blue, pale or dark, 100-120 parts
per 5,000 parts of ceresine. Violet: 26
fast viole.t R, 150 parts per 5,000 parts of
ceresine. Silver gray: 29 silver gray,
150 parts per 5,000 parts of ceresine.
Yellow and orange: 30 wax yellow, me-
dium, 200 parts per 5,000 parts of cere-
sine; 61 old gold, 200 parts per 5,000
parts of ceresine. Pink and red:
27 peach-pink, or 29 chamois, about 100
parts per 5,000 parts of ceresine. Green:
16-17 brilliant green, 33 May green, 41
May green, 200-250 parts per 5,000
parts of ceresine. The above-named
colors should be ground in oil and the
ceresine tinted with them afterwards.
Manufacture of Composite Paraffine
Candles. — Three parts of hydroxy-
stearic acid are dissolved in 1 part of a
suitable solvent (e. g., stearic acid), and
the solution is mixed with paraffine wax
to form a stock for the manufacture of
composite candles.
Transparent Candles. — The following
are two recipes given in a German
patent specification. The figures de-
note parts by weight:
I. — Paraffine wax, 70; stearine, 15;
petroleum, 15.
II. — Paraffine wax, 90; stearine, 5;
petroleum, 5. Recipe I of course gives
candles more transparent than does
recipe II. The 15 per cent may be re-
garded as the extreme limit consistent
with proper solidity of the candles.
To Prevent the Trickling of Burning
Candles. — Dip the candles in the fol-
lowing mixture:
Magnesium sulphate 15 parts
Dextrin 15 parts
Water 100 parts
The solution dries quickly and does
not affect the burning of the candle,
146
CANDLE— CARAMELS
Candle Coloring. — Candles are colored
either throughout or they sometimes
consist of a white body that is covered
with a colored layer of paraffine wax.
According to the material from which
candles are made (stearine, paraffine,
or ozokerite), the process of coloring
varies.
Stearine, owing to its acid character,
dissolves the coal-tar colors much more
readily than do the perfectly neutral par-
affine and ozokerite waxes. For coloring
stearine the necessary quantity of the
color is added to the melted mass and
well stirred in; if the solution effected
happens to be incomplete, a small addi-
tion of alcohol will prove an effective
remedy. It is also an advantage to dis-
solve the colors previously in alcohol and
add the concentrated solution to the
melted stearine. The alcohol soon evap-
orates, and has no injurious effect on
the quality of the stearine.
For a number of years there have been
on the market so-called " fat colors,"
formed by making concentrated solu-
tions of the color, and also special prep-
arations of the colors in stearine. They
are more easily applied, and are, there-
fore, preferred to the powdered aniline
colors, which are apt to cause trouble by
being accidentally distributed in soluble
particles, where they are not wanted.
Since paraffine and ozokerite dissolve
comparatively little, they will not be-
come colored, and so must be colored
indirectly. One way is to dissolve the
color in oleic acid or in stearine acid and
add the »olution to the wax to be col-
ored. Turpentine may be employed for
the same purpose. Concerning the colors
suitable for candles, there are the cosine
colors previously mentioned, and also
chroline yellow, auramine, taniline blue,
tartrazine, brilliant green, etc. The
latter, however, bleaches so rapidly that
it can hardly be recommended. An
interesting phenomenon is the change
some colors undergo in a warm tem-
perature; for instance, some blues turn
red at a moderate degree of heat (120°
F.) and return to blue only when com-
pletely cooled off; this will be noticed
while the candle mixture is being melted
previous to molding into candles.
CANDLES (FUMIGATING) :
See Fumigants.
CANDY COLORS AND FLAVORS:
See Confectionery.
CANDY:
See Confectionery.
CANVAS WATERPROOFING ;
See Waterproofing.
CAOUTCHOUC :
See Rubber.
CAOUTCHOUC SOLUTION FOR
PAINTS :
See Paint.
CAPPING MIXTURES FOR BOTTLES :
See Bottle-Capping Mixtures.
CAPSULE VARNISH:
See Varnishes.
CARAMEL :
Cloudless Caramel Coloring. — I. —
When it is perfectly understood that in
the manufacture of caramel, sugar is to
be deprived of the one molecule of its
water of constitution, it will be apparent
that heat must not be carried on to the
point of carbonization. Cloudy cara-
mel is due to the fact that part of the
sugar has been dissociated and reduced
to carbon, which is insoluble in water.
Hence the cloudiness. Caramel may be
made on a small scale in the following
manner: Place 4 or 5. ounces of granu-
lated sugar in a shallow porcelain-lined
evaporating dish and apply either a
direct heat or that of an oil bath, con-
tinuing the heat until caramelization
takes place or until tumescence ceases
and the mass has assumed a dark-brown
color. Then carefully add sufficient
water to bring the viscid mass to the
consistence of a heavy syrup. Extreme
care must be taken and the face and
hands protected during the addition of
the water, owing to the intensity of the
heat of the mass, and consequent sput-
tering.
II. — The ordinary sugar coloring
material is made from sugar or glucose
by heating it, while being constantly
stirred, up to a temperature of about
405° F. A metal pan capable of holding
nearly ten times as much as the sugar
used, is necessary so as to retain the
mass in its swollen condition. As soon
as it froths up so as nearly to fill the pan,
an action which occurs suddenly, the fire
must instantly be extinguished or re-
moved. The finished product will be
insoluble if more than about 15 per cent
of its weight is driven off by the heat.
CARAMEL IN FOOD :
See Food.
CARAMELS :
See Confectionery.
CARBOLIC ACID— CARPET SOAP
147
CARBOLIC ACID.
Perfumed Carbolic Acid. —
I. — Carbolic acid (cryst.). 1 ounce
Alcohol 1 ounce
Oil bergamot 10 minims
Oil eucalyptus 10 minims
Oil citronella 3 minims
Tincture cudbear. ... 10 minims
Water, to make 10 ounces
Set aside for several days, and then
filter through fuller's earth.
II. — Carbolic acid (cryst.) 4 drachms
Cologne water 4 drachms
Dilute acetic acid. ... 9 ounces
Keep in a cool place for a few days,
and filter.
Treatment of Carbolic-Acid Burns. —
Thoroughly wash the hands with alco-
hol, and the burning and tingling will
almost immediately cease. Unless em-
ployed immediately, however, the alco-
hol has no effect. When the time
elapsed since the burning is too great
for alcohol to be of value, brush the
burns with a saturated solution of picric
acid in water.
Decolorization of Carbolic Acid. — To
decolorize the acid the following simple
method is recommended. For purify-
ing carbolic acid which has already be-
come quite brown-red on account of
having been kept in a tin vessel, the re-
ceptacle is exposed for a short time to
a temperature of 25° C. (77° F.), thus
causing only a part of the contents to
melt. In this state the acid is put into
glass funnels and left to stand for 10 to
12 days in a room which is likewise
kept at the above temperature. Clear
white crystals form from the drippings,
which remained unchanged, protected
from air and light, while by repeating
the same process more clear crystals are
obtained from the solidified dark col-
ored mother lye. In this manner 75 to
80 per cent of clear product is obtained
altogether.
Disguising Odor of Carbolic Acid.-—
Any stronger smelling substance will dis-
guise the odor of carbolic acid, to an ex-
tent at least, but it is a difficult odor to
disguise on account of its persistence.
Camphor and some of the volatile oils,
such as peppermint, cajeput, caraway,
clove, and wintergreen may be used.
To Restore Reddened Carbolic Acid.
— Demont's method consists in melting
the acid on the water bath, adding 12 per
cent of alcohol of 95 per cent, letting cool
down and, after the greater part of the
substance has crystallized out, decanting
the liquid residue. The crystals ob-
tained in this manner are snowy white,
and on being melted yield a nearly color-
less liquid. The alcohol may be recov-
ered by redistillation at a low tempera-
ture. This is a rather costly procedure.
CARBOLIC SOAP:
See Soap.
CARBOLINEUM:
See also Paints and Wood.
Preparation of Carbolineum. — I. — Melt
together 50 parts of American rosin (F)
and 150 parts of pale paraffine oil (yel-
low oil), and add, with stirring, 20 parts
of rosin oil (rectified).
II. — Sixty parts, by weight, of black
coal tar oil of a specific gravity higher
than 1.10; 25 parts, by weight, of creo-
sote oil; 25 parts, by weight, of beech-
wood tar oil of a higher specific weight
than 0.9. Mix together and heat to
about 347° F., or until the fumes given
off begin to deposit soot. The resulting
carbolineum is brown, and of somewhat
thick consistency; when cool it is ready
for use and is packed in casks. This
improved carbolineum is applied to wood
or masonry with a brush; the surfaces
treated dry quickly, very soon loose the
odor of the carbolineum, and are effec-
tively protected from dampness and for-
mation of fungi.
CARBON PRINTING:
See Photography.
CARBON PROCESS IN PHOTOGRA-
PHY:
See Photography.
CARBONYLE :
See Wood.
CARBUNCLE REMEDIES:
See Boil Remedy.
CARDS (PLAYING), TO CLEAN :
See Cleaning Preparations and Meth-
ods.
CARDBOARD, WATERPROOF GLUE
FOR:
See Adhesives under Cements and
Waterproof Glues.
CARDBOARD, WATERPROOFING:
See Waterproofing.
CARMINATIVES :
See Pain Killers.
CARPET PRESERVATION:
See Household Formulas.
CARPET SOAP:
See Soap.
148
CASEIN
CARRIAGE-TOP DRESSING
See Leather.
CARRON OIL:
See Cosmetics.
CASE HARDENING:
See Steel.
Casein
Dried Casein, its Manufacture and
Uses. — For the production of casein,
skimmed milk or buttermilk is used,
articles of slight value, as they cannot be
employed for feeding hogs or for making
cheese, except of a very inferior sort, of
little or no alimentive qualities. This
milk is heated to from 70° to 90° C.
(175°-195° F.), and sulphuric or hydro-
chloric acid is added until it no longer
causes precipitation. The precipitate
is washed to free it from residual lactose,
redissolved in a sodium carbonate solu-
tion, and again precipitated, this time by
lactic acid. It is again washed, dried,
and pulverized. It takes 8 gallons of
skimmed milk to make 1 pound of dry
casein.
In the manufacture of fancy papers,
or papers that are made to imitate the
appearance of various cloths, laces,
ana silks, casein is very widely used.
It is also largely used in waterproof-
ing tissues, for preparation of water-
proof products, and various articles
prepared from agglomeration of cork
(packing boards, etc.). With lime water
casein makes a glue that resists heat,
steam, etc. It also enters into the manu-
facture of the various articles made from
artificial ivory (billiard balls, combs,
toilet boxes, etc.), imitation of celluloid,
meerschaum, etc., and is finding new
uses every day.
Casein, as known, may act the part
of an acid and combine with bases to
form caseinates or caseates; among these
compounds, caseinates of potash, of
soda, and of ammonia are the only ones
soluble in water; all the others are insol-
uble and may be readily prepared by
double decomposition. Thus, for ex-
ample, to obtain caseinate of alumina it
is sufficient to add to a solution of casein
in caustic soda, a solution of sulphate of
alumina; an insoluble precipitate of ca-
sein, or caseinate of alumina, is instantly
formed.
This precipitate ought to be freed
from the sulphate of soda (formed by
double decomposition), by means of pro-
longed washing. Pure, ordinary cellu-
lose may be incorporated with it by this
process, producing a new compound,
cheaper than pure cellulose, although
possessing the same properties, and capa-
ble of replacing it in all its applications.
According to the results desired, in
transparency, color, hardness, etc., the
most suitable caseinate should be select-
ed. Thus, if a translucent compound is
to be obtained, the caseinate of alumina
yields the best. If a white compound is
desired, the caseinate of zinc, or of mag-
nesia, should be chosen; and for colored
products the caseinates of iron, copper,
and nickel will give varied tints.
The process employed for the new prod-
ucts, with a base of celluloid and casein-
ate, is as follows: On one hand casein is
dissolved in a solution of caustic soda (100
parts of water for 10 to 25 parts of soda),
and this liquid is filtered to separate the
matters not dissolved and the impurities.
On the other hand, a salt of the base of
which the caseinate is desired is dis-
solved, and the solution filtered. It is
well not to operate on too concentrated a
solution. The two solutions are mixed
in a receptacle provided with a mechan-
ical stirrer, in order to obtain the in-
soluble caseinate precipitate in as finely
divided a state as possible. This precip-
itate should be washed thoroughly, so
as to free it from the soda salt formed by
double decomposition, but on account of
its gummy or pasty state, this washing
presents certain difficulties, and should
DC done carefully. After the washing
the mass is freed from the greater part
of water contained, by draining, followed
by drying, or energetic pressing; then it
is washed in alcohol, dried or pressed
again, and is ready to be incorporated in
the plastic mass of the celluloid.
For the latter immersion and washing
it has been found that an addition of 1 to
5 per cent of borax is advantageous, for it
renders the mass more plastic, and facil-
itates the operation of mixing. This
may be conducted in a mixing appara-
tus; but, in practice, it is found prefer-
able to effect it with a rolling mill, oper-
ating as follows:
The nitro-cellulose is introduced in
the plastic state, and moistened with a
solution of camphor in alcohol (40 to 50
parts of camphor in 50 to 70 of alcohol
for 100 of nitro-cellulose) as it is prac-
ticed in celluloid factories.
This plastic mass of nitro-cellulose is
placed in a rolling mill, the cylinders of
which are slightly heated at the same
time as the cdseinate, prepared as above;
then the whole mass is worked by the
cylinders until the mixture of the two
CASTING
149
is perfectly homogeneous, and the final
mass is sufficiently hard to be drawn out
in leaves in the same way as practiced
for pure celluloid.
These leaves are placed in hydraulic
presses, where they are compressed,
first hot, then cold, and the block thus
formed is afterwards cut into leaves of the
thickness desired. These leaves are
dried in an apparatus in the same way
as ordinary celluloid. The product
resembles celluloid, and has all its prop-
erties. At 90° to 100° C. (194° to 212°
F.), it becomes quite plastic, and is
easily molded. It may be sawed, filed,
turned, and carved without difficulty,
and takes on a superb polish. It burns
less readily than celluloid, and its com-
bustibility diminishes in proportion as
the percentage of casemate increases;
finally, the cost price is less than that of
celluloid, and by using a large proportion
of caseinate, products may be manu-
factured at an extremely low cost.
Phosphate of Casein and its Pro-
duction.— The process is designed to
produce a strongly acid compound of
phosphoric acid and casein, practically
stable and not hydroscopic, which may
be employed as an acid ingredient in
bakers' yeast and for other purposes.
The phosphoric acid may be obtained
by any convenient method; for example,
by decomposing dicalcic or monocalcic
phosphate with sulphuric acid. The
commercial phosphoric acid may also be
employed.
The casein may be precipitated from
the skimmed milk by means of a suitable
acid, and should be washed with cold
water to remove impurities. A casein-
ate may also be employed, such as a
compound of casein and an alkali or
an alkaline earth.
The new compound is produced in the
following way: A sufficient quantity of
phosphoric acid is incorporated with the
casein or a caseinate in such a way as to
insure sufficient acidity in the resulting
compound. The employment of 23 to
25 parts by weight of phosphoric acid
with 75 to 77 parts of casein constitutes
a good proportion.
An aqueous solution of phosphoric
acid is made, and the casein introduced
in the proportion of 25 to 50 per cent of
the weight of the phosphoric acid pres-
ent. The mixture is then heated till the
curdled form of the casein disappears,
and it assumes a uniform fluid form.
Then the mixture is concentrated to a
syrupy consistency. The remainder of
the casein or of the caseinate is added
and mixed /with the solution until it is
intimately incorporated and the mass
becomes uniform. The compound is
dried in a current of hot air, or in any
other way that will not discolor it, and it
is ground to a fine powder. The inti-
mate union of the phosphoric acid and
casein during the gradual concentra-
tion of the mixture and during the grind-
ing and drying, removes the hydroscopic
property of the phosphoric acid, and
produces a dry and stable product,
which may be regarded as a hyperphos-
phate of casein. When it is mixed with
water, it swells and dissolves slowly.
When this compound is mingled with its
equivalent of sodium bicarbonate it
yields about 17 per cent of gas.
CASEIN CEMENTS:
See Adhesives.
CASEIN VARNISH :
See Varnishes.
CASKS :
To Render Shrunken Wooden Casks
Watertight. — When a wooden receptacle
has dried up it naturally cannot hold the
water poured into it for the purpose of
swelling it, and the pouring has to be
repeated many times before the desired
end is reached. A much quicker way is
to stuff the receptacle full of straw or bad
hay, laying a stone on top and then filling
the vessel with water. Although the
water runs off again, the moistened
straw remains behind and greatly assists
the swelling up of the wood.
CASSIUS, PURPLE OF:
See Gold.
CASKET TRIMMINGS:
See Castings.
CASTS (PLASTER), PRESERVATION
OF:
See Plaster.
CASTS, REPAIRING OF BROKEN :
See Adhesives and Lutes.
CASTS FROM WAX MODELS:
See Modeling.
Casting
Castings Out of Various Metals. — Un-
til recent years metal castings were all
made in sand molds; that is, the patterns
were used for the impressions in the
sand, the same as iron castings are pro-
duced to-day. Nearly all of the softer
metals are now cast in brass, copper,
zinc, or iron molds, and only the silver
150
CASTING
and German silver articles, like wire
real bronze, are cast the old way, in sand.
Aluminum can be readily cast in iron
molds, especially if the molds have been
previously heated to nearly the same
temperature as the molten aluminum,
and after the molds are full the metal is
cooled gradually and the casting taken
out as soon as cooled enough to prevent
breaking from the shrinkage. Large
bicycle frames have been successfully
cast in this manner.
The French bronzes, which are imi-
tations, are cast in copper or brass molds.
The material used is principally zinc and
tin, and an unlimited number of castings
can be made in the mold, but if a real
bronze piece is to be produced it must be
out of copper and the mold made in
sand. To make the castings hollow,
with sand, a core is required. This fills
the inside of the figure so that the molten
copper runs around it, and as the core is
made out of sand, the same can be after-
wards washed out. If the casting is to be
hollow and is to be cast in a metal mold,
then the process is very simple. The
mold is filled with molten metal, and
when the operator thinks the desired
thickness has cooled next to the walls, he
pours out the balance. An experienced
man can make hollow castings in this
way, and make the walls of any thick-
ness.
Casket hardware trimmings, which
are so extensively used on coffins, es-
pecially the handles, are nearly all cast
out of tin and antimony, and in brass
molds. The metal used is brittle, and
requires strengthening at the weak por-
tions, and this is mostly done with wood
filling or with iron rods, which are
secured in the molds before the metal is
poured in.
Aluminum castings, which one has
procured at the foundries, are usually
alloyed with zinc. This has a close affin-
ity with aluminum, and alloys readily;
but this mixture is a detriment and
causes much trouble afterwards. While
this alloy assists the molder to produce
his castings easily, on the other hand it
will not polish well and will corrode in
a short time. Those difficulties may be
avoided if pure aluminum is used.
Plaster of Paris molds are the easiest
made for pieces where only a few cast-
ings are wanted. The only difficulty is
that it requires a few days to dry the
plaster thoroughly, and that is abso-
lutely necessary to use them successfully.
Not only can the softer metals be run
into plaster molds, but gold and silver
can be run into them. A plaster mold
should be well smoked over a gaslight,
or until well covered with a layer of soot,
and the metal should be poured in as
cool a state as it will run.
To Prevent the Adhesion of Modeling
Sand to Castings. — Use a mixture of
finely ground coke and graphite. Al-
though the former material is highly por-
ous, possessing this quality even as a
fine powder, and the fine pulverization
is a difficult operation, still the invention
attains its purpose of producing an ab-
solutely smooth surface. This is ac-
complished by mixing both substances
intimately and adding melted rosin,
whereupon the whole mass is exposed to
heat, so that the rosin decomposes, its
carbon residue filling up the finest pores
of the coke. The rosin, in melting,
carries the fine graphite particles along
into the pores. After cooling the mass
is first ground in edge mills, then again in
a suitable manner and sifted. Sur-
prising results are obtained with this
material. It is advisable to take pro-
portionately little graphite, as the dif-
ferent co-efficients of expansion of the
two substances may easily exercise a dis-
turbing action. One-fifth of graphite,
in respect to the whole mass, gives the
best results, but it is advisable to add
plenty of rosin. The liquid mixture
must, before burning, possess the con-
sistency of mortar.
Sand Holes in Cast-Brass Work.—
Cast-brass work, when it presents nu-
merous and deep sand holes, should be
well dipped into the dipping acid before
being polished, in order thoroughly to
clean these objectionable cavities; and
the polishing should be pushed to an ex-
tent sufficient to obliterate the smaller
sand holes, if possible, as this class of
work looks very unsightly, when plated
and finished, if pitted all over with mi-
nute hollows. The larger holes cannot,
without considerable labor, be obliter-
ated; indeed, it not infrequently happens
that in endeavoring to work out such
cavities they become enlarged, as they
often extend deep into the body of the
metal. An experienced hand knows
how far he dare go in polishing work of
this awkward character.
Black Wash for Casting Molds.—
Gumlac, 1 part; wood spirit, 2 parts;
lampblack, in sufficient quantity to color.
How to Make a Plaster Cast of a Coin
or Medal. — The most exact observ-
ance of any written or printed directions
is no guarantee of success. Practice
alone can give expertness in this work
CASTING
151
The composition of the mold is of the
most varied, but the materials most gen-
erally used are plaster of Paris and brick
dust, in the proportion of 2 parts of the
first to 1 of the second, stirred in water,
with the addition of a little sal ammo-
niac. The best quality of plaster for
this purpose is the so-called alabaster,
and the brick dust should be as finely
powdered as possible. The addition of
clay, dried and very finely powdered, is
recommended. With very delicate ob-
jects the proportion of plaster may be
slightly increased. The dry material
should be thoroughly mixed before the
addition of water.
As the geometrically exact contour of
the coin or medal is often the cause
of breaking of the edges, the operator
sometimes uses wax to make the edges
appear half round and it also allows the
casting to be more easily removed from
the second half of the mold. Each half
of the mold should be about the thickness
of the finger. The keys, so called, of
every plaster casting must not be for-
gotten. In the first casting some little
half-spherical cavities should be scooped
out, which will appear in the second half-
round knobs, and which, by engaging
with the depressions, will ensure exact-
ness in the finished mold.
After the plaster has set, cut a canal
for the flow of the molten casting mate-
rial, then dry the mold thoroughly in
an oven strongly heated. The halves
are now ready to be bound together with
a light wire. When bound heat the
mold gradually and slowly and let the
mouth of the canal remain underneath
while the heating is in progress, in order
to prevent the possible entry of dirt or
foreign matter. The heating should be
continued as long as there is a suspicion
of remaining moisture. When finally
assured of this fact, take out the mold,
open it, and blow it out, to make sure of
absolute cleanness. Close and bind
again and place on a hearth of fine, hot
sa,nd. The mold should still be glowing
when the casting is made. The ladle
should contain plenty of metal, so as to
hold the heat while the casting is being
made. The presence of a little zinc in
the metal ensures a sharp casting.
Finally, to ensure success, it is always
better to provide two molds in case of
accident. Even the most* practiced
metal molders take this precaution, es-
pecially when casting delicate objects.
How to Make Castings of Insects. —
The object — a dead beetle, for example
— is first arranged in a natural position,
and the feet are connected with an oval
rim of wax. It is then fixed in the cen-
ter of a paper or wooden box by means of
Eieces of fine wire, so that it is perfectly
-ee, and thicker wires are run from the
sides of the box to the object, which sub-
sequently serve to form air channels in
the mold by their removal. A wooden
stick, tapering toward the bottom, is
placed upon the back of the insect to
produce a runner for casting. The box
is then filled up with a paste with 3
parts of plaster of Paris and 1 of brick
dust, made up with a solution of alum
and sal ammoniac. It is also well first to
brush the object with this paste to pre-
vent the formation of air bubbles. Af-
ter the mold thus formed has set, the
object is removed from the interior by
first reducing it to ashes. It is, there-
fore, allowed to dry, very slowly at first,
by leaving in the shade at a normal tem-
perature (as in India this is much higher
than in our zone, it will be necessary to
place the mold in a moderately warm
place), and afterwards heating gradually
to a red heat. This incinerates the ob-
ject, and melts the waxen base upon
which it is placed. The latter escapes,
and is burned as it does so, and the ob-
ject, reduced to fine ashes, is removed
through the wire holes as suggested
above. The casting is then made in the
ordinary manner.
Casting of Soft Metal Castings.— I.— It
is often difficult to form flat back or half
castings out of the softer metals so that
they will run full, owing mostly to the
thin edges and frail connections. In-
stead of using solid metal backs for the
molds it is better to use cardboard, or
heavy, smooth paper, fastened to a
wooden board fitted to the back of the
other half of the mold. By this means
very thin castings may be produced that
would be more difficult with a solid
metal back.
II. — To obtain a full casting in brass
molds for soft metal two important
points should be observed. One is to
have the deep recesses vented so the air
will escape, and the other is to have the
mold properly blued. The bluing is
best done by dipping the mold in sul-
phuric acid, then placing it on a gas
stove until the mold is a dark color.
Unless this bluing is done it will be im-
possible to obtain a sharp casting.
Drosses.— All the softer grades of
metal throw off considerable dross,
which is usually skimmed off; especially
with tin and its composition. Should much
of this gather on the top of the molten
152
CASTING
metal, the drosses should all be saved,
and melted down when there is enough
for a kettle full. Dross may be remelted
five or six times before all the good
metal is out.
Fuel. — Where a good soft coal can be
had at a low price, as in the middle West,
this is perhaps the cheapest and easiest
fuel to use; and, besides, it has some ad-
vantages over gas, which is so much used
in the East. A soft-coal fire can be regu-
lated to keep the metal at an even tem-
perature, and it is especially handy to
keep the metal in a molten state during
the noon hour. This refers particularly
to the gas furnaces that are operated
from the power plant in the shop; when
this power shuts down during the noon
hour the metal becomes chilled, and
much time is lost by the remelting after
one o'clock, or at the beginning in the
morning.
Molds. — I. — Brass molds for the cast-
ing of soft metal ornaments out of bri-
tannia, pewter, spelter, etc., should be
made out of brass that contains enough
zinc to produce a light-colored brass.
While this hard brass is more difficult
for the mold maker to cut, the superior-
ity over the dark red copper-colored brass
is that it will stand more heat and
rougher usage and thereby offset the
extra labor of cutting the hard brass.
The mold should be heavy enough to re-
tain sufficient heat while the worker
is removing a finished casting from the
mold so that the next pouring will come
full. If the mold is too light it cools
more quickly, and consequently the cast-
ings are chilled and will not run full.
Where the molds are heavy enough they
will admit the use of a swab and water
after each pouring. This chills the
casting so that it can be removed easily
with the plyers.
II. — Molds for the use of soft metal
castings may be made out of soft metal.
This is done with articles that are not
numerous, or not often used; and may
be looked upon as temporary. The
molds are made in part the same as when
of brass, and out of tin that contains as
much hardening as possible. The hard-
ening consists of antimony and copper.
This metal mold must be painted over
several times with Spanish red, which
tends to prevent the metal from melt-
ing. The metal must not be used too
hot, otherwise it will melt the mold. By
a little careful manipulation many pieces
can be cast with these molds.
III. — New iron or brass molds must
be blued before they can be used for
| casting purposes. This is done by
placing the mold face downward on a
charcoal fire, or by swabbing with sul-
phuric acid, then placing over a gas
name or charcoal fire until the mold is
perfectly oxidized.
IV. — A good substantial mold for
small castings of soft metal is made of
brass. ^ The expense of making the cast
mold is considerable, however, and, on
that account, some manufacturers are
making their molds by electro-deposition.
This produces a much cheaper mold,
which can be made very quickly. The
electro-deposited mold, however, is very
frail in comparison with a brass casting,
and consequently must be handled very
carefully to keep its shape. The elec-
tro-deposited ones are made out of cop-
per, and the backs filled in with a softer
metal. The handles are secured with
screws.
Plaster Molds. — Castings of any mefal
can be done in a plaster mold, provided
the mold has dried, at a moderate heat,
for several days. Smoke the mold well
with a brand of rosin to insure a full
cast. Where there are only one or two
ornaments or figures to cast, it may be
done in a mold made out of dental plaster.
After the mold is made and set enough
so that it can be taken apart, it should be
placed in a warm place and left to dry
for a day or two. When ready to use
the inside should be well smoked over
a gaslight; the mold should be well
warmed and the metal must not be too
hot. Very good castings may be ob-
tained this way; the only objection being
the length of time needed for a thorough
drying of the mold.
Temperature of Metal.— Metals for
casting purposes should not be over-
heated. If any of the softer metals show
blue colors after cooling it is an indi-
cation that the metal is too hot. The
metal should be heated enough so that it
can be poured, and the finished casting
have a bright, clean appearance. The
mold may be very warm, then the metal
need not be so hot for bright, clean cast-
ings. Some of the metals will not stand
reheating too often, as this will cause them
to run sluggish. Britannia metal should
not be skimmed or stirred too much,
otherwise there will be too much loss in
the dross.
CASTING IN WAX:
See Modeling.
CASTINGS, TO SOFTEN IRON:
See Iron.
CASTOR OIL
153
CASTOR OIL :
Purifying Rancid Castor Oil.— To
clean rancid castor oil mix 100 parts of
the oil at 95° F. with a mixture of 1 part
of alcohol (96 per cent) and 1 part of
sulphuric acid. Allow to settle for 24
hours and then carefully decant from
the precipitate. Now wash with warm
water, boiling for A hour; allow to settle
for 24 hours in well closed vessels, after
which time the purified oil may be taken
off.
How to Pour Out Castor Oil. — Any one
who has tried to pour castor oil from a
square, 5-gallon can, when it is full,
knows how difficult it is to avoid a mess.
This, however, may be avoided by hav-
ing a hole punched in the cap which
screws onto the can, and a tube, 2 inches
long and f of an inch in diameter, sol-
dered on. With a wire nail a hole is
punched in the top of the can between the
screw cap and the edge of the can. This
will admit air while pouring. Resting
the can on a table, with the screw-cap
tube to the rear, the can is carefully tilted
forward with one hand and the shop
bottle held in the other. In this way the
bottle may be filled without spilling any
of the oil and that, too, without a funnel.
It is preferable to rest the can on a table
when pouring from a 1- or 2-gallon
square varnish can, when filling shop
bottles. With the opening to the rear,
the can is likewise tilted forward slowly
so as to allow the surface of the liquid to
become "at rest." Even mobile liquids,
such as spirits of turpentine, may be
poured into shop bottles without a fun-
nel. Of course, the main thing is that
the can be lowered slowly, otherwise the
first portion may spurt out over the bot-
tle. With 5-gallon round cans it is
possible to fill shop bottles in the same
manner by resting the can on a box or
counter. When a funnel is used for non-
greasy liquids, the funnel may be slightly
raised with the thumb and little finger
from the neck of the bottle, while hold-
ing the bottle by the neck between the
middle and ring fingers, to allow egress
of air.
Tasteless Castor Oil.—
I.— Pure castor oil. . 1 pint
Cologne spirit . . 3 fluidounces
Oil of winter-
green 40 minims
Oil of sassafras. 20 minims
Oil of anise 15 minims
Saccharine 5 grains
Hot water, a sufficient quantity.
Place the castor oil in a gallon bottle.
Add a pint of hot water and shake vig-
orously for about 15 minutes. Then
pour the mixture into a vessel with a
stopcock at its base, and allow the mix-
ture to stand tor 12 hours. Draw off
the oil, excepting the last portion, which
must be rejected. Dissolve the essential
oils and saccharine in the cologne spirit
and add to the washed castor oil.
II. — First prepare an aromatic solution
of saccharine as follows:
Refined saccharine. . 25 parts
Vanillin 5 parts
Absolute alcohol. . . . 950 parts
Oil of cinnamon .... 20 parts
Dissolve the saccharine and vanillin
in the alcohol, then add the cinnamon oil,
agitate well and filter. Of this liquid add
20 parts to 980 parts of castor oil and
mix by agitation. Castor oil, like cod-
liver oil, may be rendered nearly taste-
less, it is claimed, by treating it as fol-
lows: Into a matrass of suitable size put
50 parts of freshly roasted coffee, ground
as fine as possible, and 25 parts of puri-
fied and freshly prepared bone or ivory
black. Pour over the mass 1,000 parts
of the oil to be deodorized and rendered
tasteless, and mix. Cork the container
tightly, put on a water bath, and raise
the temperature to about 140° F. Keep
at this heat from 15 to 20 minutes, then
let cool down, slowly, to 90°, at which
temperature let stand for 3 hours.
Finally filter, and put up in small, well-
stoppered bottles.
III. — Vanillin 3 grains
Garantose 4 grains
Ol. menth. pip. ... 8 minims
Alcoholis 3 drachms
Ol. ricinus 12 ounces
Ol. olivae (im-
ported), quan-
tity sufficient ... 1 pint
M. ft. sol.
Mix vanillin, garantose, ol. menth.
pip. with alcohol and add castor oil and
olive oil.
Dose: One drachm to 2 fluidounces.
IV.— The following keeps well:
Castor oil 24 parts
Glycerine 24 parts
Tincture of orange
peel . . : 8 parts
Tincture of senega 2 parts
Cinnamon water
enough to make. 100 parts
Mix and make an emulsion. Dose is
1 tablespoonful.
V. — One part of common cooking mo-
lasses to 2 of castor oil is the best dis-
154
CASTOR OIL— CATATYPY
guise for the taste of the oil that can be
used.
VI. — Castor oil 1£ ounces
Powdered acacia. . 2 drachms
Sugar 2 drachms
Peppermint water. 4 ounces
Triturate the sugar and acacia, adding
the oil gradually; when these have been
thoroughly incorporated add the pep-
permint water .in small portions, tritu-
rating the mixture until an emulsion is
formed.
VII. — This formula for an emulsion
is said to yield a fairly satisfactory prod-
uct:
Castor oil 500 c.c.
Mucilage of acacia 125 c.c.
Spirit of gaultheria 10 grams
Sugar 1 gram
Sodium bicarbonate. 1 gram
VIII. — Castor oil 1 ounce
Compound tinc-
ture of carda-
mom 4 drachms
Oil of wintergreen 3 drops
Powdered acacia.. 3 drachms
Sugar 2 drachms
Cinnamon water enough to
make 4 ounces.
IX. — Castor oil 12 ounces
Vanillin 3 grains
Saccharine ....... 4 grains
Oil of peppermint. 8 minims
Alcohol 3 drachms
Olive oil enough to make 1 pint.
In any case, use only a fresh oil.
How toTake Castor Oil.— The disgust
for castor oil is due to the odor, not to the
taste. If the patient grips the nostrils
firmly before pouring out the dose,
drinks the oil complacently, and then
thoroughly cleanses the mouth, lips,
larynx, etc., with water, removing the
last vestige of the oil before removing
the fingers, he will not get the least taste
from the oil, which is bland and taste-
less. It all depends upon preventing any
oil from entering the nose during the
time while there is any oil present.
Castor-Oil Chocolate Lozenges. —
Cacao, free from oil . 250 parts
Castor oil 250 parts
Sugar, pulverized- . . 500 parts
Vanillin sugar 5 parts
Mix the chocolate and oil and heat in
the water, both under constant stirring.
Have the sugar well dried and add, stir-
ring constantly, to the molten mass.
Continue the heat for 30 minutes, then
pour out and divide into lozenges in the
usual way.
CAT DISEASES AND THEIR REME-
DIES: See Insecticides and Veteri-
nary Formulas.
CATATYPY.
It is a well-known fact that the reac-
tions of the compounds of silver, plat-
inum, and chromium in photographic
processes are generally voluntary ones
and that the light really acts only as an
accelerator, that is to say the chemical
properties of the preparations also change
in the dark, though a longer time is re-
quired. When these preparations are ex-
posed to the light under a negative, the
modification of their chemical proper-
ties is accelerated in such a way that,
through the gradations of the tone-
values in the negative, the positive print
is formed. Now it has been found that
we also have such accelerators in ma-
terial substances that can be used in the
light, the process being termed catalysis.
It is remarkable that these substances,
called catalyzers, apparently do not take
part in the process, but bring about
merely by their presence, decomposition
or combination of other bodies during or
upon contact. Hence, catalysis may be
defined, in short, as the act of changing
or accelerating the speed of a chemical
reaction by means of agents which ap-
pear to remain stable.
Professor Ostwald and Dr. O. Gros,
of the Leipsic University, have given the
name of "catatypy" to the new copying
process. The use of light is entirely
done away with, except that for the sake
of convenience the manipulations are
executed in the light. All that is neces-
sary is to bring paper and negative into
contact, no matter whether in the light
or in the dark. Hence the negative (if
necessary a positive may also be em-
ployed) need not even be transparent,
for the ascending and descending action
of the tone values in the positive picture
is produced only by the quantity in the
varying density of the silver powder
contained in the negative. Hence no
photographic (light) picture, but a ca-
tatypic picture (produced by contact) is
created, but the final result is the same.
Catatypy is carried out as follows:
Pour dioxide of hydrogen over the nega-
tive, which can be done without any
damage to the latter, and lay a piece of
paper on (sized or unsized, rough or
smooth, according to the effect desired);
by a contact lasting a few seconds the
paper receives the picture, dioxide of
hydrogen being destroyed. From a
single application several prints can be
made. The acquired picture — still in-
CATATYPY— CELLULOID
155
visible — may now in the further course
of the process, have a reducing or oxy-
dizing action. As picture-producing
bodies, the large group of iron salts are
above all eminently adapted, but other
substances, such as chromium, manga-
nese, etc., as well as pigments with glue
solutions may also be employed. The
development takes place as follows:
When the paper which has been in con-
tact with the negative is drawn through
a solution of ferrous oxide, the protoxide
is transformed into oxide by the per-
oxide, hence a yellow positive picture,
consisting of iron oxide, results, which
can be readily changed into other com-
pounds, so that the most varying tones of
color can be obtained. With tne use of
pigments, in conjunction with a glue
solution, the action is as follows: In the
places where the picture is, the layer with
the pigments becomes insoluble and all
other dye stuffs can be washed off with
water.
The chemical inks and reductions, as
well as color pigments, of which the pic-
tures consist, have been carefully tested
and are composed of such as are known
to possess unlimited durability.
After a short contact, simply immerse
the picture in the respective solution,
wash out, and a permanent picture is
obtained.
CATERPILLAR DESTROYERS :
See Insecticides.
CATGUT:
Preparation of Catgut Sutures. — The
catgut is stretched tightly over a glass
plate tanned in 5 per cent watery extract
of quebracho, washed £ or a short time in
water, subjected to the action of a 4 per
cent formalin solution for 24 to 48 hours,
washed in running water for 24 hours,
boiled in water for 10 to 15 minutes,
and stored in a mixture of absolute al-
cohol with 5 per cent glycerine and 4 per
cent carbolic acid. In experiments on
dogs, this suture material in aseptic
wounds remained intact for 65 days, and
was absorbed after 83 days. In infected
wounds it was absorbed after 32 days.
CATSUP (ADULTERATED):
See Foods.
CATTLE DIPS AND APPLICATIONS :
See Disinfectants and Insecticides.
CEILING CLEANERS:
See Cleaning Preparations and Meth-
ods, and also Household Formulas.
CELERY COMPOUND.
Celery (seed ground) . 25 parts
Coca leaves (ground). 25 parts
Black haw (ground).. 25 parts
Hyoscyamus leaves
(ground) 12£ parts
Podophyllum (pow-
dered) 10 parts
Orange peel (ground) 6 parts
Sugar (granulated).. . 100 parts
Alcohol 150 parts
Water, q. s. ad 400 parts
Mix the alcohol with 150 parts of
water and macerate drugs for 24 hours;
pack in percolator and pour on men-
struum till 340 parts is obtained ; dis-
solve sugar in it and strain.
CELLS, SOLUTIONS AND FILLERS
FOR BATTERY:
See Battery Solutions and Fillers.
CELLARS, WATERPROOF:
See Household Formulas.
CELLOIDIN PAPER:
See Paper.
Celluloid
New Celluloid. — M. Ortmann has as-
certained that turpentine produced by
the Pinus larix, generally denominated
Venice turpentine, in combination with
acetone (dimethyl ketone), yields the best
results; but other turpentines, such as
the American from the Pinus australis,
the Canada turpentine from the Pinus
balsamea, the French turpentine from
the Pinus maritima, and ketones, such
as the ketone of methyl-ethyl, the ketone
of dinaphthyl, the ketone of methyl-
oxynaphthyl, and the ketone of dioxy-
naphthyl, may be employed.
To put this process in practice, 1,000
parts of pyroxyline is prepared in the
usual manner, and mixed with 65 parts
of turpentine, or 250 parts of ketone and
250 parts of ether; 500 parts or 750 parts
of methyl alcohol is added, and a col-
orant, such as desired. Instead of tur-
pentine, rosins derived from it may be
employed. If the employment of cam-
phor is desired to a certain extent, it may
be added to the mixture. The whole is
shaken and left at rest for about 12 hours.
It is then passed between hot rollers, and
finally pressed, cut, and dried, like or-
dinary celluloid.
156
CELLULOID
The product thus obtained is without
odor, when camphor is not employed;
and in appearance and properties it can-
not be distinguished from ordinary cel-
luloid, while the expense of production is
considerably reduced.
Formol Albumen for Preparation of
Celluloid. — Formol has the property of
forming combinations with most albu-
minoid substances. These are not iden-
tical with reference to plasticity, and the
use which may be derived from them for
the manufacture of plastic substances.
This difference explains why albumen
should not be confounded with gelatin
or casein. With this in view, the Societe
Anonyme 1'Oyonnaxienne has originated
the following processes:
I. — The albumen may be that of the
egg or that of the blood, which are readily
found in trade. The formolizing may
be effected in the moist state or in the
dry state. The dry or moist albumen
is brought into contact with the solution
of commercial formol diluted to 5 or 10
per cent for an hour. Care must be
taken to pulverize the albumen, if it is
dry. The formol penetrates rapidly
into the albuminoid matter, and is fil-
tered or decanted and washed with
water until all the formol in excess has
completely disappeared; this it is easy to
ascertain by means of aniline water,
which produces a turbid white as long
as a trace of formic aldehyde remains.
The formol albumen is afterwards
dried at low temperature by submitting
it to the action of a current of dry air at
a temperature not exceeding 107° F.
Thus obtained, the product appears as
a transparent corneous substance. On
pulverizing, it becomes opaque and loses
its transparency. It is completely in-
soluble in water, but swells in this
liquid.
II. — The formol albumen is reduced
to a perfectly homogeneous powder, and
mixed intimately with the plastic matter
before rolling. This cannot be con-
sidered an adequate means for effecting
the mixture. It is necessary to introduce
the formol albumen, in the course of the
moistening, either by making an emul-
sion with camphor alcohol, or by mixing
it thoroughly with nitro-cellulose, or by
making simultaneously a thorough mix-
ture of the three substances. When the
mixture is accomplished, the paste is
rolled according to the usual operation.
The quantity of formol albumen to add
is variable, being diminished according
to the quantity of camphor.
Instead of adding the desiccated for-
mol albumen, it may previously be
swollen in water in order to render it
more malleable.
Instead of simple water, alkalinized or
acidified water may be taken for this pur-
pose, or even alcoholized water. The
albumen, then, should be pressed be-
tween paper or cloth, in order to remove
the excess of moisture.
Plastic Substances of Nitro -Cellulose
Base. — To manufacture plastic substances
the Compagnie Franyaise du Celluloid
commences by submitting casein to a
special operation. It is soaked with a
solution of acetate of urea in alcohol;
for 100 parts of casein 5 parts of acetate
of urea and 50 parts of alcohol are em-
ployed. The mass swells, and in 48
hours the casein is thoroughly penetrat-
ed. It is then ready to be incorporated
with the camphored nitro-cellulose. The
nitro-cellulose, having received the addi-
tion of camphor, is soaked in the alcohol,
and the mass is well mixed. The casein
prepared as described is introduced into
the mass. The whole is mixed and left
at rest for 2 days.
The plastic pulp thus obtained is
rolled, cut, and dried like ordinary cel-
lulose, and by the same processes and
apparatus. The pulp may also be con-
verted into tubes and other forms, like
ordinary celluloid.
It is advisable to subject the improved
plastic pulp to a treatment with formal-
dehyde for the purpose of rendering in-
soluble the casein incorporated in the
celluloid. The plastic product of nitro-
cellulose base, thus obtained, presents
in employment the same general proper-
ties as ordinary celluloid. It may be
applied to the various manufacturing
processes in use for the preparation of
articles of all kinds, and its cost price
diminishes more or less according to the
proportion of casein associated with the
ordinary celluloid. In this plastic prod-
uct various colorants may be incor-
porated, and the appearance of shell,
pearl, wood, marble, or ivory may also
be imparted.
Improved Celluloid. — This product is
obtained by mingling with celluloid, un-
der suitable conditions, gelatin or strong
glue of gelatin base. Iti s clear that the
replacement of part of the celluloid by
the gelatin, of which the cost is much
less, lowers materially the cost of the
final product. The result is obtained
without detriment to the qualities of the
objects. These are said to be of superior
properties, haying more firmness than
those of celluloid. And the new material
CELLULOID
157
is worked more readily than the celluloid
employed alone.
The new product may be prepared in
openvair or in a closed vessel under pres-
sure. When operated in the air, the gel-
atin is first immersed cold (in any form,
and in a state more or less pure) in alco-
hol marking about 140° F., with the
addition of a certain quantity (for exam-
ple, 5 to 10 per cent) of crystallizable
acetic acid. In a few hours the material
has swollen considerably, and it is then
introduced in alcohol of about 90 per cent,
and at the same time the celluloid pulp
(camphor and gun cotton), taking care
to add a little acetone. The proportion
of celluloid in the mixture may be 50 to
75 per cent of the weight of the gelatin,
more or less, according to the result
desired. After heating the mixture
slightly, it is worked, cold, by the rollers
ordinarily employed for celluloid and
other similar pastes, or by any other suit-
able methods.
The preparation in a closed vessel does
not differ from that which has been de-
scribed, except for the introduction of
the mixture of gelatin, celluloid, alco-
hol, and acetone, at the moment when
the heating is to be accomplished in an
autoclave heated with steam, capable of
supporting a pressure of 2 to 5 pounds,
and furnished with a mechanical agita-
tor. This method of proceeding abridges
the operation considerably ; the paste
comes from the autoclave well min-
gled, and is then submitted to the
action of rollers. There is but little
work in distilling the alcohol and acetic
acid in the autoclave. These may be
recovered, and on account of their evap-
oration the mass presents the desired
consistency when it reaches the rollers.
Whichever of the two methods of prep-
aration may be employed, the sub-
stance may be rolled as in the ordinary
process, if a boiler with agitator is made
use of; the mass may be produced in any
form.
Preparation of Uninflammable Cellu-
loid.— The operation of this process by
Woodward is the following: In a receiver
of glass or porcelain, liquefied fish glue
and gum arabic are introduced and
allowed to swell for 24 hours in a very
dry position, allowing the air to circulate
freely. The receiver is not covered.
Afterwards it is heated on a water bath,
and the contents stirred (for example,
by means of a porcelain spatula) until
the gum is completely liquefied. The
heating of the mass should not exceed
77° F. Then the gelatin is added in
such a way that there are no solid pieces.
The receiver is removed from the water
bath and colza oil added, while agitating
anew. When the mixture is complete
it is left to repose for 24 hours.
Before cooling, the mixture is passed
through a sieve in order to retain the
pieces which may not have been dis-
solved. After swelling, and the dissolu-
tion and purification by means of the
sieve, it is allowed to rest still in the
same position, with access of air. The
films formed while cooling may be re-
moved. The treatment of celluloid
necessitates employing a solution com-
pletely colorless and clear. The cellu-
loid to be treated while it is still in the
pasty state should be in a receiver of
glass, porcelain, or similar material.
The mass containing the fish glue is
poured in, drop by drop, while stirring
carefully, taking care to pour it in the
middle of the celluloid and to increase
the surface of contact.
When the mixture is complete, the cel-
luloid is ready to be employed and does
not produce flame when exposed.
The solution of fish glue may be pre-
pared by allowing 200 parts of it to swell
for 48 hours in 1,000 parts of cold dis-
tilled water. It is then passed through
the sieve, and the pieces which may re-
main are broken up, in order to mingle
them thoroughly with the water. Ten
parts of kitchen salt are then added, and
the whole mass passed through the
sieve.
This product may be utilized for the
preparation of photographic films or for
those used for cinematographs, or for
replacing hard caoutchouc for the insu-
lation of electric conductors, and for the
preparation of plastic objects.
Substitute for Camphor in the Prepa-
ration of Celluloid and Applicable to Other
Purposes. — In this process commercial
oil of turpentine, after being rectified by
distillation over caustic soda, is subjected
to the action of gaseous chlorhydric acid,
in order to produce the solid mono-
chlorhydrate of turpentine. After hav-
ing, by means of the press, extracted the
liquid monochlorhydrate, and after
several washings with cold water, the
solid matter is desiccated and introduced
into an autoclave apparatus capable of
resisting a pressure of 6 atmospheres.
Fifty per cent of caustic soda, calculated
on the weight of the monochlorhydrate,
and mingled with an equal quantity of
alcohol, is added in the form of a thick
solution. The apparatus is closed and
heated for several hours at the temper-
158
CELLULOID
ature of 284° to 302° F. The material
is washed several times for freeing it
from the mingled sodium chloride and
sodium hydrate, and the camphor re-
sulting from this operation is treated in
the following manner:
In an autoclave constructed for the
purpose, camphene and water strongly
mixed with sulphuric acid are introduced
and heated so as to attain 9 pounds of
pressure. Then an electric current is
applied, capable of producing the de-
composition of water. The mass is
constantly stirred, either mechanically
or more simply by allowing a little of the
steam to escape by a tap. In an hour,
at least, the material is drawn from the
apparatus, washed and dried, sublimed
according to need, and is then suitable
for replacing camphor in its industrial
employments, for the camphene is con-
verted entirely or in greater part into
camphor, either right-hand camphor, or
a product optically inactive, according
to the origin of the oil of turpentine made
use of. .
In the electrolytic oxidation of the
camphene, instead of using acidulated
water, whatever is capable of furnishing,
under the influence of the electric cur-
rent, the oxygen necessary for the reac-
tion, such as oxygenized water, barium
bioxide, and the permanganates, may be
employed.
Plastic and Elastic Composition. —
Formaldehyde has the property, as known,
of removing from gelatin its solu-
bility and its fusibility, but it has also
another property, prejudicial in certain
applications, of rendering the composi-
tion hard and friable. In order to
remedy this prejudicial action M. De-
borda adds to the gelatin treated by
means of formaldehyde, oil of turpen-
tine, or a mixture of oil of turpentine and
German turpentine or Venice turpentine.
The addition removes from the composi-
tion its friability and hardness, imparting
to it great softness and elasticity. The
effect is accomplished by a slight pro-
portion, 5 to 10 per cent.
Production of Substances Resembling
Celluloid. — Most of the substitutes for
camphor in the preparation of celluloid
are attended with inconveniences limiting
their employment and sometimes caus-
ing their rejection. Thus, in one case
the celluloid does not allow of the prepa-
ration of transparent bodies; in another
it occasions too much softness in the
products manufactured; and in still an-
other it does not allow of pressing, fold-
ing, or other operations, because the mass
is too brittle; in still others combinations
are produced which in time are affected
unfavorably by the coloring substances
employed.
Callenberg has found that the haloge-
nous derivatives of etherized oils, prin-
cipally oil of turpentine, and especially
the solid chloride of turpentine, which is
of a snowy and brilliant white, and of
agreeable odor, are suitable for yielding,
either alone or mixed with camphor or
one of its substitutes, and combined by
ordinary means with nitrated cellulose,
or other ethers of cellulose, treated with
acetic ether, a celluloidic product, which,
it is said, is not inferior to ordinary cellu-
loid and has the advantage of reduced
cost.
Elastic Substitute for Celluloid.—
Acetic cellulose, like nitro-cellulose, can
be converted into an elastic corneous
compound. The substances particu-
larly suitable for the operation are or-
ganic substances containing one or more
hydroxy, aldehydic, amide, or ketonic
groups, as well as the acid amides. Prob-
ably a bond is formed when these com-
binations act on the acetate of cellulose,
but the bond cannot well be defined,
considering the complex nature of the
molecule of cellulose. According to the
mode of preparation, the substances
obtained form a hard mass, more or less
flexible. In the soft state, copies of en-
grayed designs can be reproduced in
their finest details. When hardened,
they can be cut and polished. In cer-
tain respects they resemble celluloid,
without its inflammability, and they can
be employed in the same manner. They
can be produced by the following meth-
ods— the Lederer process:
I. — Melt together 1 part of acetate of
cellulose and H parts of phenol at about
the temperature of 104° to 122° F. When
a clear solution is obtained place the
mass of reaction on plates of glass or
metal slightly heated and allow it to cool
gradually. After a rest of several days
the mass, which at the outset is similar
to caoutchouc, is hard and forms flexible
plates, which can be worked like cellu-
loid.
II. — Compress an intimate mixture of
equal parts of acetic cellulose and hy-
drate of chloride or of aniline, at a tem-
perature of 122° to 140° F., and proceed
as in the previous case.
In the same way a ketone may be em-
ployed, as acetophenone, or an acid
amide, as acetamide.
III. — A transparent, celluloid-like sub-
stance which is useful for the produc-
CELLULOID
159
tion of plates, tubes, and other articles,
but especially as an underlay for sensitive
films in photography, is produced by
dissolving 1.8 parts, by weight, of nitro-
cellulose in 16 parts of glacial acetic acid,
with heating and stirring and addition
of 5 parts of gelatin. After this has
swelled up, add 7.5 parts, by weight, of
alcohol (96 per cent), stirring constantly.
The syrupy product may be pressed into
molds or poured, after further dilution
with the said solvents in the stated pro-
portion, upon glass plates to form thin
layers. The dried articles are well
washed with water, which may contain a
trace of soda lye, and dried again. Pho-
tographic foundations produced in this
manner do not change, nor attack the
layers sensitive to light, nor do they be-
come electric, and in developing they
remain flat.
IV. — Viscose is the name of a new
product of the class of substances like
celluloid, pegamoid, etc., substances hav-
ing most varied and valuable appli-
cations. It is obtained directly from
cellulose by mascerating this substance
in a 1 per cent dilution of hydrochloric
acid. The maceration is allowed to con-
tinue for several hours, and at its close
the liquid is decanted and the residue
is pressed off and washed thoroughly.
The mass (of which we will suppose
there is 100 grams) is then treated with a
20 per cent aqueous solution of sodium
hydrate, which dissolves it. The solu-
tion is allowed to stand for 3 days in a
tightly closed vessel; 100 grams carbon
disulphide are then added, the vessel
closed and allowed to stand for 12 hours
longer, when it is ready for purification.
Viscose thus formed is soluble in water,
cold or tepid, and yields a solution of a
pale brownish color, from which it is
precipitated by alcohol and sodium
chloride, which purifies it, but at the
expense of much of its solubility. A so-
lution of the precipitated article is color-
less, or of a slightly pale yellow. Under
the action of heat, long continued, vis-
cose is decomposed, yielding cellulose,
caustic soda, and carbon disulphide.
See also Casein for Celluloid Substi-
tutes.
Celluloid of Reduced Inflammability.
— I. — A practicable method consists in
incorporating silica, which does not
harm the essential properties of the cel-
luloid. The material is divided by the
usual methods, and dissolved by means
of the usual solvents, to which silica has
been added, either in the state of amylic,
ethylic, or methylic silicate, or in the state
of any ether derivative of silicic acid.
The suitable proportions vary according
to the degree of inflammability desired,
and according to the proportion of silica
in the ether derivative employed; but
sufficient freedom from inflammability
for practical purposes is attained by the
following proportions: Fifty-five to 65
parts in volume of the solvent of the
celluloid, and 35 to 45 parts of the de-
rivative of silicic acid.
When the ether derivative is in the
solid form, such, for instance, as ethyl
disilicate, it is brought to the liquid state
by means of any of the solvents. The
union of the solvent and of the derivative
is accomplished by mixing the two
liquids and shaking out the air as
much as possible. The incorporation
of this mixture with the celluloid, pre-
viously divided or reduced to the state of
chips, is effected by pouring the mixture
on the chips, or inversely, shaking or stir-
ring as free from the air as possible. The
usual methods are employed for the des-
iccation of the mass. A good result
is obtained by drying very slowly, pref-
erably at a temperature not above 10°
C. (50° F.). The resulting residue is a
new product scarcely distinguished from
ordinary celluloid, except that the in-
herent inflammability . is considerably
reduced. It is not important to employ
any individual silicate or derivative. A
mixture of the silicates or derivatives
mentioned will accomplish the same
results.
II. — Any ignited body is extinguished
in a gaseous medium which is unsuitable
for combustion; the attempt has there-
fore been made to find products capable
of producing an uninflammable gas; and
products have been selected that yield
chlorine, and others producing bromine;
it is also necessary that these bodies
should be soluble in a solvent of cellu-
loid; therefore, among chlorated prod-
ucts, ferric chloride has been taken; this
is soluble in the ether-alcohol mixture.
This is the process: An ether-alcohol
solution of celluloid is made; then an
ether-alcohol solution of ferric perchlor-
ide. The two solutions are mingled, and
a clear, syrupy liquid of yellow color,
yielding no precipitate, is obtained. The
liquid is poured into a cup or any suit-
able vessel; it is left for spontaneous
evaporation, and a substance of shell-
color is produced, which, after washing
and drying, effects the desired result.
The celluloid thus treated loses none of
its properties in pliability and trans-
parency, and is not only uninflammable,
but also incombustible.
160
CELLULOID
Of bromated compounds, calcium
bromide has been selected, which pro-
duces nearly the same result; the product
obtained fuses in the flame; outside, it is
extinguished, without the power of igni-
tion.
It may be objected that ferric perchlor-
ide and calcium bromide, being soluble
in water, may present to the celluloid a
surface capable of being affected by
moist air; but the mass of celluloid, not
being liable to penetration by water, fixes
the chlorinated or brominated product.
Still, as the celluloid undergoes a slight
decomposition, on exposure to the light,
allowing small quantities of camphor to
evaporate, the surface of the perchlorin-
ated celluloid may be fixed by immer-
sion in albuminous water, after previous
treatment with a solution of oxalic acid,
if a light yellow product is desired.
For preventing the calcium bromide
from eventually oozing on the surface of
the celluloid, by reason of its d"eliques-
cence, it may be fixed by immersing the
celluloid in water acidulated with sul-
phuric acid. For industrial products,
such as toilet articles, celluloid with fer-
ric perchloride may be employed.
Another method of preparing an un-
inflammable celluloid, based on the prin-
ciple above mentioned, consists in mix-
ing bromide of camphor with cotton
powder, adding castor oil to soften the
product, in order that it may be less
brittle. The latter product is not in-
combustible, but it is uninflammable,
and its facility of preparation reduces at
least one-half the apparatus ordinarily
made use of in the manufacture of cellu-
loid. The manufacture of this product
is not at all dangerous, for the camphor
bromide is strictly uninflammable, and
may be melted without any danger of
dissolving the gun cotton.
III. — Dissolve 25 parts of ordinary
celluloidin in 250 parts of acetone and
add a solution of 50 parts of magnesium
chloride in 150 parts of alcohol, until a
paste results, which occurs with a pro-
portion of about 100 parts of the former
solution to 20 parts of the latter solution.
This paste is carefully mixed and worked
through, then dried, and gives an abso-
lutely incombustible material.
IV. — Glass-like plates which are im-
pervious to acids, salts, and alkalies,
flexible, odorless, and infrangible, and
still possess a transparency similar to
ordinary glass, are said to be obtained
by dissolving 4 to 8 per cent of collodion
wool (soluble pyroxylin) in 1 per cent of
ether or alcohol and mixing the solution
with 2 to 4 per cent of castor oil, or a
similar non-resinifying oil, and with 4 to
6 per cent of Canada balsam. The in-
flammability of these plates is claimed to
be much less than with others of collo-
dion, and may be almost entirely obviat-
ed by admixture of magnesium chloride.
An addition of zinc white produces the
appearance of ivory.
Solvents for Celluloid.— Celluloid dis-
solves in acetone, sulphuric ether, alco-
hol, oil of turpentine, benzine, amyl
acetate, etc., alone, or in various com-
binations of these agents. The follow-
ing are some proportions for solutions
of celluloid:
I.— Celluloid 5 parts
Amyl acetate 10 parts
Acetone 16 parts
Sulphuric ether .... 16 parts
II.— Celluloid 10 parts
Sulphuric ether .... 30 parts
Acetone 30 parts
Amyl acetate7. 30 parts
Camphor 3 parts
III.— Celluloid 5 parts
Alcohol 50 parts
Camphor 5 parts
IV.— Celluloid 5 parts
Amyl acetate 50 parts
V.— Celluloid 5 parts
Amyl acetate 25 parts
Acetone 25 parts
Softening and Cementing Celluloid. —
If celluloid is to be warmed only suffi-
ciently to be able to bend it, a bath in
boiling water will answer. In steam at
120° C. (248° F.), however, it becomes
so soft that it may be easily kneaded like
dough, so that one may even imbed in it
metal, wood, or any similar material. If
it be intended to soften it to solubility,
the celluloid must then be scraped fine
and macerated in 90 per cent alcohol,
whereupon it takes on the character of
cement and may be used to join broken
pieces of celluloid together. Solutions
of celluloid may be prepared: 1. With
5 parts, by weight, of celluloid in 16
parts, by weight, each of amyl acetate,
acetone, and sulphuric ether. 2. With
10 parts, by weight, of celluloid in 30
parts, by weight, each of sulphuric ether,
acetone, amyl acetate, and 4 parts, by
weight, camphor. 3. With 5 parts, by
weight, celluloid in 50 parts, by weight,
alcohol and 5 parts, by weight, camphor.
4. With 5 parts, by weight, celluloid in
50 parts, by weight, amyl acetate. 5.
Witn 5 parts, by weight, celluloid in 25
parts, by weight, amyl acetate and 25
parts, by weight, acetone.
CEMENTS
161
It is often desirable to soften celluloid
so that it will not break when hammered.
Dipping it in water warmed to 40° C.
(104° F.) will suffice for this.
Mending Celluloid. — Celluloid dishes
which show cracks are easily repaired
by brushing the surface repeatedly with
alcohol, 3 parts, and ether, 4 parts, until
the mass turns soft and can be readily
squeezed together. The pressure must
be maintained for about one day. By
putting only 1 part of ether in 3 parts of
alcohol and adding a little shellac, a ce-
ment for celluloid is obtained, which,
applied warm, produces quicker results.
Another very useful gluing agent for cel-
luloid receptacles is concentrated acetic
acid. The celluloid fragments dabbed
with it stick together almost instantane-
ously.
See also Adhesives for Methods of
Mending Celluloid.
Printing on Celluloid. — Printing on
celluloid may be done in the usual way.
Make ready the form so as to be perfectly
level on the impression — that is, uniform
to impressional touch on the face. The
tympan should be hard. Bring up the
form squarely, allowing for about a 3- or
4-sheet cardboard to be withdrawn from
the tympan when about to proceed with
printing on the celluloid; this is to allow
for the thickness of the sheet of celluloid.
Use live but dry and well-seasoned roll-
ers. Special inks of different colors are
made for this kind of press work; in
black a good card-job quality will be
found about right, if a few drops of
copal varnish- are mixed with the ink
before beginning to print.
Colored Celluloid.—
Black: First dip into pure water, then
into a solution of nitrate of silver; let dry
in the light.
Yellow: First immerse in a solution
of nitrate of lead, then in a concentrated
solution of chromate of potash.
Brown: Dip into a solution of per-
manganate of potash made strongly
alkaline by the addition of soda.
Blue: Dip into a solution of indigo
neutralized by the addition of soda.
Red: First dip into a diluted bath of
nitric acid; then into an ammoniacal
solution of carmine.
Green: Dip into a solution of verdi-
gris.
Aniline colors may also be employed
but they are less permanent.
Bleaching Celluloid. —If the celluloid
has become discolored throughout, its
whiteness can hardly be restored, but if
merely superficially discolored, wipe with
a woolen rag wet with absolute alcohol
and ether mixed in equal proportions.
This dissolves and removes a minute
superficial layer and lays bare a new
surface. To restore the polish rub
briskly first with a woolen cloth and fin-
ish with silk or fine chamois. A little
jeweler's rouge or putzpomade greatly
facilitates matters. Ink marks may be
removed in the same manner. Printer's
ink may be removed from celluloid by
rubbing first with oil of turpentine and
afterwards with alcohol and ether.
Process of Impregnating Fabrics with
Celluloid. — The fabric is first saturated
with a dilute celluloid solution of the
consistency of olive oil, which solution
penetrates deeply into the tissue; dry
quickly in a heating chamber and satu-
rate with a more concentrated celluloid
solution, about as viscous as molasses.
If oil be added to the celluloid solution,
the quantity should be small in the first
solution, e. g., 1 to 2 per cent, in the
following ones 5 to 8 per cent, while the
outer layer contains very little or no oil.
A fabric impregnated in this manner
possesses a very flexible surface, because
the outer layer may be very thin, while
the interior consists of many flexible
fibers surrounded by celluloid.
CELLULOID CEMENTS AND GLUES :
See Adhesives.
CELLULOID LACQUER:
See Lacquer.
CELLULOID PUTTY:
See Cements.
Cements
(See also Putties.)
For Adhesive Cements intended for
repairing broken articles, see Adhe-
sives.
Putty for Celluloid.— To fasten cellu-
loid to wood, tin, etc., use a compound of
2 parts shellac, 3 parts spirit of cam-
phor, and 4 parts strong alcohol.
Plumbers' Cement. — A plumbers' ce-
ment consists of 1 part black rosin,
melted, and 2 parts of brickdust, thor-
oughly powdered and dried.
Cement for Steam and Water Pipes. —
A cement for pipe joints is made as fol-
lows: Ten pounds fine yellow ocher; 4
162
CEMENTS
pounds ground litharge; 4 pounds whit-
ing, and £ pound of hemp, cut up fine.
Mix together thoroughly with linseed oil
to about the consistency of putty.
Gutter Cement. — Stir sand and fine
lime into boiled paint skins while hot and
thick. Use hot.
Cement for Pipe Joints. — A good ce-
ment for making tight joints in pumps,
pipes, etc., is made of a mixture of 15
parts of slaked lime, 30 parts of graphite,
and 40 parts of barium sulphate. The in-
gredients are powdered, well mixed to-
gether, and stirred up with 15 parts of
boiled oil. A stiffer preparation can be
made by increasing the proportions of
graphite and barium sulphate to 30 and
40 parts respectively, and omitting the
lime. Another cement for the same
purpose consists of 15 parts of chalk
and 50 of graphite, ground, washed,
mixed, and reground to fine powder. To
this mixture is added 20 parts of ground
litharge, and the whole mixed to a stiff
paste with about 15 parts of boiled oil.
This last preparation possesses the ad-
vantage of remaining plastic for a long
time when stored in a cool place. Finally,
a good and simple mixture for tightening
screw connections is made from powdered
shellac dissolved in 10 per cent ammonia.
The mucinous mass is painted over the
screw threads, after the latter have been
thoroughly cleaned, and the fitting is
screwed home. The ammonia soon
volatilizes, leaving behind a mass which
hardens quickly, makes a tight joint,
and is impervious to hot and cold water.
Protection for Cement Work. — A
coating of soluble glass will impart to
cement surfaces exposed to ammonia
not only a protective covering, but also
increased solidness.
Cemented surfaces can be protected
from the action of the weather by re-
peated coats of a green vitriol solution
consisting of 1 part of green vitriol and
3 parts of water. Two coatings of 5
per cent soap water are said to render
the cement waterproof; after drying and
rubbing with a cloth or brush, this coat-
ing will become glossy like oil paint.
This application is especially recom-
mended for sick rooms, since the walls
can be readily cleaned by washing with
soapy water. The coating is rendered
more and more waterproof thereby.
The green vitriol solution is likewise
commendable for application on old and
new plastering, since it produces thereon
waterproof coatings. From old plas-
tering the loose particles have first to be
removed by washing.
Puncture Cement. — A patented prepa-
ration for automatically repairing punc-
tures in bicycle tires consists of glycerine
holding gelatinous silica or aluminum
hydrate in suspension. Three volumes
of glycerine are mixed with 1 volume of
liquid water glass, and an acid is stirred
in. The resulting jelly is diluted with 3
additional volumes of glycerine, and
from 4 to 6 ounces of this fluid are placed
in each tire. In case of puncture, the
internal pressure of the air forces the fluid
into the hole, which it closes.
To Fix Iron in Stone. — Of the quickly
hardening cements, lead and sulphur,
the latter is popularly employed. It can
be rendered still more suitable for pur-
poses of pouring by the admixture of
Portland cement, which is stirred into
the molten sulphur in the ratio of 1 to 3
parts by weight. The strength of the
latter is increased by this addition, since
the formation of so coarse a crystalline
structure as that of solidifying pure sul-
phur is disturbed by the powder added.
White Portland Cement.— Mix togeth-
er feldspar, 40-100 parts, -by weight;
kaolin, 100 parts; limestone, 700 parts;
magnesite, 20-40 parts; and sodium
chloride, 2.5-5 parts, all as pure as
possible, and heat to 1430° to 1500° C.
(2606° to 2732° F.), until the whole has
become sintered together, and forms a
nice, white cement-like mass.
Cement for Closing Cracks in Stoves.
— Make a putty of reduced iron (iron
by hydrogen) and a solution of sodium
or potassium silicate, and force it into
the crack. If the crack be a very nar-
row one, make the iron and silicate into
paste instead of putty. This material
grows firmer and harder the longer the
mended article is used.
Cement for Waterpipe. — I. — Mix to-
gether 11 parts, by weight, Portland
cement; 4 parts, by weight, lead white;
1 part, by weight, litharge; and make to
a paste with boiled oil in which 3 per
cent of its weight of colophony has been
dissolved.
II. — Mix 1 part, by weight, torn-up
wadding; 1 part, by weight, of quicklime,
and 3 parts, by weight, of boiled oil.
This cement must be used as soon as
made.
Cement for Pallet Stones. — Place small
pieces of shellac around the stone when
in position and subject it to heat. Often
the lac spreads unevenly or swells up;
and this, in addition to being unsightly,
is apt to displace the stone. This can
be avoided as follows: The pallets are
CEMENTS
163
held in long sliding tongs. Take a piece
of shellac, heat it and roll it into a cylin-
der between the fingers; again heat the
extremity and draw it out into a fine
thread. This thread will break off, leav-
ing a point at the end of the lac. Now
heat the tongs at a little distance from
the pallets, testing the degree of heat by
touching the tongs with the shellac.
When it melts easily, lightly touch the
two sides of the notch with it; a very
thin layer can thus be spread over them,
and the pallet stone can then be placed
in position and held until cold enough.
The tongs will not lose the heat sud-
denly, so that the stone can easily be
raised or lowered as required. The pro-
jecting particles of cement can be re-
moved by a brass wire filed to an angle
and forming a scraper. To cement a
ruby pin, or the like, one may also use
shellac dissolved in spirit, applied in the
consistency of syrup, and liquefied again
by means of a hot pincette, by seizing
the stone with it.
DENTAL CEMENTS:
Fairthorne's Cement. — Powdered glass,
5 parts; powdered borax, 4 parts; silicic
acid, 8 parts; zinc oxide, 200 parts.
Powder very finely and mix; then tint
with a small quantity of golden pcher or
manganese. The compound, mixed be-
fore use with concentrated syrupy zinc-
chloride solution, soon becomes as hard
as marble and constitutes a very durable
tooth cement.
Huebner's Cement. — Zinc oxide, 500.0
parts; powdered manganese, 1.5 parts;
yellow ocher, powdered, 1.5-4.0 parts;
powdered borax, 10.0 parts; powdered
glass, 100.0 parts.
As a binding liquid it is well to use
acid-free zinc chloride, which can be
prepared by dissolving pure zinc, free
from iron, in concentrated, pure, hydro-
chloric acid, in such a manner that zinc
is always in excess. When no more hy-
drogen is evolved the zinc in excess is
still left in the solution for some time.
The latter is filtered and boiled down to
the consistency of syrup.
Commercial zinc oxide cannot be em-
ployed without previous treatment, be-
cause it is too loose; the denser it is the
better is it adapted for dental cements,
and the harder the latter will be. For
this reason it is well, in order to obtain a
dense product, to stir the commercial
pure zinc oxide into a stiff paste with
water to which 2 per cent of nitric acid
has been added; the paste is dried and
heated for some time at white heat in a
Hessian crucible.
After cooling, the zinc oxide, thus ob-
tained, is very finely powdered and kept
in hermetically sealed vessels, so that
it cannot absorb carbonic acid. The
dental cement prepared with such zinc
oxide turns very hard and solidifies with
the concentrated zinc-chloride solution in
a few minutes.
Phosphate Cement. — Concentrate pure
phosphoric acid till semi-solid, and mix
aluminum phosphate with it by heat-
ing. For use, mix with zinc oxide to
the consistency of putty. The cement
is said to set in 2 minutes.
Zinc Amalgam, or Dentists' Zinc. —
This consists of pure zinc filings com-
bined with twice their weight of mercury,
a gentle heat being employed to render
the union more complete. It is best ap-
plied as soon as made. Its color is gray,
and it is said to be effective and durable.
Sorel's Cement. — Mix zinc oxide with
half its bulk of fine sand, add a solu-
tion of zinc chloride of 1.260 specific
gravity, and rub the whole thoroughly
together in a mortar. The mixture
must be applied at once, as it hardens
very quickly.
Metallic Cement. — Pure tin, with a
small proportion of cadmium and suf-
ficient mercury, forms the most lasting
and, for all practical purposes, the least
objectionable amalgam. Melt 2 parts
of tin with 1 of cadmium, run it into in-
gots, and reduce it to filings. Form
those into a fluid amalgam with mercury,
and squeeze out the excess of the latter
through leather. Work up the solid
residue in the hand, and press it into the
tooth. Or melt some beeswax in a pip-
kin, throw in 5 parts of cadmium, and
when melted add 7 or 8 parts of tin in
small pieces. Pour the melted metals
into an iron or wooden box, and shake
them until cold, so as to obtain the alloy
in a powder. This is mixed with 2£ to
3 times its weight of mercury in the palm
of the hand, and used as above described.
CEMENT COLORS:
See Stone.
CEMENT, MORDANT FOR:
See Mordants.
CEMENT, PAINTS FOR:
See Paint.
CEMENT, PROTECTION OF, AGAINST
ACID:
See Acid-Proofing.
164
CERAMICS
CHAIN OF FIRE:
See Pyrotechnics.
CHAINS (WATCH), TO CLEAN:
See Cleaning Preparations and Meth-
ods.
CHALK FOR TAILORS.
Knead together ordinary pipe clay,
moistened with ultramarine blue for
blue, finely ground ocher for yellow, etc.,
until they are uniformly mixed, roll out
into thin sheets, cut and press into wood-
en or metallic molds, well oiled to pre-
vent sticking, and allow to dry slowly at
ordinary temperature or at a very gentle
heat.
CHAPPED HANDS:
See Cosmetics.
CHARTA SINAPIS :
See Mustard Paper.
CHARTREUSE :
See Wines and Liquors.
Ceramics
GROUND CERAMICS— LAYING OIL
FOR:
See Oil.
Notes for Potters, Glass-, and Brick-
makers. — It is of the highest importance
,in selecting oxides, minerals, etc., for
manufacturing different articles, for
potters' use, to secure pure goods, es-
pecially in the purchase of the following:
Lead, manganese, oxide of zinc, borax,
whiting, oxide of iron, and oxide of
cobalt. The different ingredients com-
E rising any given color or glaze should
e thoroughly mixed before being cal-
cined, otherwise the mass will be of a
streaky or variegated kind. Calcination
requires care, especially in the manu-
facture of enamel colors. Over-firing,
particularly of colors or enamels com-
posed in part of lead, borax, antimony, or
litharge, causes a dullness of shade, or
film, that reduces their value for decora-
tive purposes, where clearness and bril-
liancy are of the first importance.
To arrest the unsightly defect of
"crazing," the following have been the
most successful methods employed, in
the order given:
I. — Flux made of 10 parts tincal; 4
parts oxide of zinc; 1 part soda.
II. — A calcination of 5 parts oxide of
zinc; 1 part pearl ash.
III. — Addition of raw oxide of zinc,
6 pounds to each hundredweight of
glaze.
To glazed brick and tile makers, whose
chief difficulty appears to be the produc-
tion of a slip to suit the contraction of
their clay, and adhere strongly to either
a clay or a burnt brick or tile, the follow-
ing method may be recommended:
Mix together:
Ball clay 10 parts
Cornwall stone 10 parts
China clay 7 parts
Flint 6 ^ parts
To be mixed and lawned one week
before use.
To Cut Pottery.— Pottery or any soft
or even hard stone substance can be cut
without chipping by a disk of soft iron,
the edge of which has been charged with
emery, diamond, or other grinding pow-
der, that can be obtained at any tool
agency. The cutting has to be done
with a liberal supply of water fed con-
tinually to the revolving disk and the
substance to be cut.
BRICK AND TILEMAKERS' GLAZED
BRICKS :
White. — When the brick or tile leaves
the press, with a very soft brush cover the
part to be glazed with No. 1 Slip; after-
wards dip the face in the same mixture.
No. i Slip.—
Same clay as brick . . 9 parts
Flint 1 part
Ball clay 5 parts
China 4 parts
Allow the brick to remain slowly dry-
ing for 8 to 10 hours, then when moist
dip in the white body.
White Body.—
China clay 24 parts
Ball clay 8 parts
Feldspar 8 parts
Flint 4 parts
The brick should now be dried slowly
but thoroughly, and when perfectly dry
dip the face in clean cold water, and im-
mediately afterwards in glaze.
Hard Glaze.—
Feldspar 18 parts
Cornwall stone 3£ parts
Whiting 1 1 parts
Oxide of zinc l| parts
Plaster of Paris f part
CERAMICS
165
Soft Glaze. —
White lead 13 parts
Feldspar 20 parts
Oxide of zinc 3 parts
Plaster of Paris 1 part
Flint glass 13 parts
Cornwall stone 3£ parts
Paris white 1J parts
Where clay is used that will stand a
very high fire, the white lead and glass
may be left out. A wire brush should
now be used to remove all superfluous
glaze, etc., from the sides and ends of the
brick, which is then ready for the kiln.
In placing, set the bricks face to face,
about an inch space being left between
the two glazed faces. All the mixtures,
after being mixed with water to the con-
sistency of cream, must be passed 2 or
3 times through a very fine lawn. The
kiln must not be opened till perfectly
cold.
Process for Colored Glazes. — Use color,
1 part, to white body, 7 parts. Use
color, 1 part, to glaze, 9 parts.
Preparation of Colors. — The specified
ingredients should all be obtained finely
ground, and after being mixed in the
proportions given should, in a saggar or
some clay vessel, be fired in the brick
kiln and afterwards ground for use. In
firing the ingredients the highest heat
attainable is necessary.
Turquoise. —
Oxide of zinc 8 parts
Oxide of cobalt 1 J parts
Grass Green. —
Oxide of chrome 6 parts
Flint 1 part
Oxide of copper | part
Royal Blue.—
Pure alumina 20 parts
Oxide of zinc 8 parts
Oxide of cobalt 4 parts
Mazarine Blue. —
Oxide of cobalt 10 parts
i'aris white 9 parts
Sulphate barytes 1 part
Red Brown. —
Oxide of zinc 40 parts
Crocus of martis 6 parts
Oxide of chrome 6 parts
Red lead 5 parts
Boracic acid 5 parts
Red oxide of iron .... 1 part
Orange. —
Pure alumina 5 parts
Oxide of zinc 2 parts
Bichromate of potash. 1 part
Iron scale \ part
Claret Brown. —
Bichromate of potash.
Flint
Oxide of zinc
Iron scale
Blue Green. —
Oxide of chrome
Flint
Oxide of cobalt. .
Sky Blue. —
Flint
Oxide of zinc
Cobalt
Phosphate soda
Chrome Green. —
Oxide of chrome. . . .
Oxide of copper
Carbonate of cobalt .
Oxide of cobalt
Olive.—
Oxide of chrome. . . .
Oxide of zinc
Flint ..'.
Oxide of cobalt
Blood Red.—
Oxide of zinc
Crocus martis
Oxide of chrome. . . .
Litharge
Borax
Red oxide of iron. . ..
Black.—
Chromate of iron. . . .
Oxide of nickel
Oxide of tin
Oxide of cobalt
Imperial Blue. —
Oxide of cobalt
Black color
Paris white
Flint
Carbonate of soda . .
Mahogany. —
Chromate of iron. . . .
Oxide of manganese.
Oxide of zinc
Oxide of tin
Crocus martis . .
Gordon Green. —
Oxide of chrome
Paris white
Bichromate of potash.
Oxide of cobalt
Violet.—
Oxide of cobalt
Oxide of manganese. .
Oxide of zinc,
Cornwall stone
2 parts
2 parts
1 part
1 part
6 parts
2 parts
f part
9 parts
13 parts
2 1 parts
1 part
3 parts
1 part
1 part
2 parts
3 parts
2 parts
5 parts
1 part
30 parts
7 parts
7 parts
5 parts
5 parts
2 parts
24 parts
2 parts
2 parts
5 parts
10 parts
1£ parts
7£ parts
2 1 parts
1 part
30 parts
20 parts
12 parts
4 parts
2 parts
12 parts
8 parts
4^ parts
i part
2$ parts
4 parts
8 parts
8 parts
166
CERAMICS
Lavender. —
Calcined oxide of zinc 5 parts
Carbonate of cobalt . . f part
Oxide of nickel J part
Paris white 1 part
Brown. —
Manganese 4 parts
Oxide of chrome 2 parts
Oxide of zinc 4 parts
Sulphate barytes 2 parts
Dove.—
Oxide of nickel 7 parts
Oxide of cobalt 2 parts
Oxide of chrome 1 part
Oxide of flint 18 parts
Paris white 3 parts
Yellow Green. —
Flint 6 parts
Paris white 4 parts
Bichromate of potash. 4 i parts
Red lead 2 parts
Fluorspar 2 parts
Plaster of Paris li parts
Oxide of copper £ part
BODIES REQUIRING NO STAIN:
Ivory. —
Cane marl 16 parts
Ball clay 12 parts
Feldspar 8 parts
China clay 6 parts
Flint 4 parts
Cream. —
Ball clay 22 parts
China clay 5i parts
Flint 5" parts
Feldspar 3J parts
Cane marl 12 parts
Black.—
Ball clay 120 parts
Ground ocher 120 parts
Ground manganese . 35 parts
Buff.—
Ball clay 12 parts
China clay 10 parts
Feldspar 8 parts
Bull fire clay 16 parts
Yellow ocher 3 parts
Drab.—
Cane marl 30 parts
Ball clay 10 parts
Stone 7 parts
Feldspar 4 parts
Brown. —
Red marl 50 parts
China clay 7 parts
Ground manganese . . 6 parts
Feldspar 3 parts
In making mazarine blue glazed bricks
use the white body and stain the glaze
only.
Mazarine blue 1 part
Glaze 7 parts
For royal blue use 1 part stain to 6
parts white body, and glaze unstained.
Blood-Red Stain. — Numerous brick
manufacturers possess beds of clay from
which good and sound bricks or tiles
can be made, the only drawback being
that the clay does not burn a good color.
In many cases this arises from the fact
that the clay contains more or less sul-
phur or other impurity, which spoils the
external appearance of the finished
article. The following stain will con-
vert clay of any color into a rich, deep
red, mixed in proportions of stain, 1
part, to clay, 60 parts.
Stain.—
Crocus martis 20 parts
Yellow ocher 4 parts
Sulphate of iron 10 parts
Red oxide of iron 2 parts
A still cheaper method is to put a slip
or external coating upon the goods.
The slip being quite opaque, effectively
hides the natural color of the brick or
tile upon which it may be used.
The process is to mix:
Blood-red stain 1 part
Good red clay 6 parts
Add water until the mixture becomes
about the consistency of. cream, then
with a sponge force the liquid two or three
times through a very fine brass wire lawn,
No. 80, and dip the goods in the liquid
as soon as they are pressed or molded.
Blue Paviors. — Blue paving bricks
may be produced with almost any kind
of clay that will stand a fair amount of
heat, by adopting the same methods as
in the former case of blood-red bricks,
that is, the clay may be stained through-
out, or an outside coating may be ap-
plied.
Stain for Blue Paviors. —
Ground ironstone. ... 20 parts
Chromate of iron 5 parts
Manganese 6 parts
Oxide of nickel 1 part
Use 1 part clay and 1 part stain for
coating, and 50 or 60 parts clay and 1
part stain for staining through.
Fire blue paviors very hard.
Buff Terra-Co tta Slip.—
Buff fire clay 16 parts
China clay 6 parts
CERAMICS
167
Yellow ocher 3 parts
Ball clay 10 parts
Flint 4 parts
Add water to the materials after mix-
ing well, pass through the fine lawn, and
dip the goods when soft in the liquid.
Transparent Glaze. —
Ground flint glass 4 parts
Ground white lead .... 4 parts
Ground oxide of zinc. \ part
This glaz,e is suitable for bricks or tiles
made of very good red clay, the natural
color of the clay showing through the
glaze. The goods must first be fired
sufficiently hard to make them durable,
afterwards glazed, and fired again. The
glaze being comparatively soft will fuse at
about half the heat required for the first
burning. The glaze may be stained, if
desired, with any of the colors given in
glazed-brick recipes, in the following
proportions: Stain, 1 part; glaze, 1 part.
SPECIAL RECIPES FOR POTTERY
AND BRICK AND TILE WORKS :
Verifiable Bodies.— The following mix-
tures will flux only at a very high heat.
They require no glaze when a proper
heat is attained, and they are admirably
adapted for stoneware glazes.
I. — Cornwall stone. ... 20 parts
Feldspar 12 parts
China clay 3 parts
Whiting 2 parts
Plaster of Paris ... 1 £ parts
II.— Feldspar 30 parts
Flint 9 parts
Stone 8 parts
China clay 3 parts
III. — Feldspar 20 parts
Stone. . . . 5 parts
Oxide of zinc 3 parts
Whiting 2 parts
Plaster of Paris ... 1 part
Soda crystals, dis-
solved 1 part
Special Glazes for Bricks or Pottery
at One Burning. — To run these glazes
intense heat is required.
I. — Cornwall stone 40 parts
Flint 7 parts
Paris white 4 parts
Ball clay 15 parts
Oxide of zinc 6 parts
White lead 15 parts
II.— Feldspar 20 parts
Cornwall stone. ... 5 parts
Oxide of zinc 3 parts
Flint 3 parts
Lynn sand 1* parts
Sulphate barytes. . . 1 J parts
III. — Feldspar 25 parts
Cornwall stone 6 parts
Oxide of zinc 2 parts
China clay 2 parts
IV. — Cornwall stone 118 parts
Feldspar 40 parts
Paris white 28 parts
Flint 4 parts
V. — Feldspar 16 parts
China clay 4 parts
Stone 4 parts
Oxide of zinc 2 parts
Plaster of Paris .... 1 part
VI.— Feldspar 10 parts
Stone 5 parts
Flint 2 parts
Plaster \ part
The following glaze is excellent for
bricks in the biscuit and pottery, which
require an easy firing:
White.—
White lead 20 parts
Stone 9 parts
Flint 9 parts
Borax. 4 parts
Oxide of zinc 2 parts
Feldspar 3 parts
These materials should be procured
finely ground, and after being thoroughly
mixed should be placed in a fire-clay
crucible, and be fired for 5 or 6 hours,
sharply, or until the material runs down
into a liquid, then with a pair of iron
tongs draw the crucible from the kiln
and pour the liquid into a bucket of cold
water, grind the flux to an extremely
fine powder, and spread a coating upon
the plate to be enameled, previously
brushing a little gum thereon. The
plate must then be fired until a sufficient
heat is attained to run or fuse the pow-
der.
POTTERY BODIES AND GLAZES:
Ordinary. —
I. — China clay 2^ parts
Stone 1 1 parts
Bone 3 parts
II. — China clay 5 parts
• Stone 2£ parts
Bone 7 parts
Barytes 3 parts
III. — Chain clay 5 parts
Stone 3 parts
Flint \ part
Barytes 8 parts
Superior. —
I. — China clay 35 parts
Cornwall stone 23 parts
Bone 40 parts
Flint 2 parts
168
CERAMICS
II. — China clay 35 parts
Cornwall stone 8 parts
Bone 50 parts
Flint 3 parts
Blue clay 4 parts
III. — China clay 8 parts
Cornwall stone 40 parts
Bone 29 parts
Flint 5 parts
Blue clay 18 parts
IV.— China clay 32 parts
Cornwall stone 23 parts
Bone 34 parts
Flint 6 parts
Blue clay 5 parts
V. — China clay 7 parts
Stone 40 parts
Bone. 28 parts
Flint 5 parts
Blue clay 20 parts
Finest China Bodies. —
I. — China clay 20 parts
Bone 60 parts
Feldspar 20 parts
II.— China clay 30 parts
Bone 40 parts
Feldspar 30 parts
III.— China clay 25 parts
Stone 10 parts
Bone 45 parts
Feldspar 20 parts
IV.— China clay 30 parts
Stone 15 parts
Bone 35 parts
Feldspar 20 parts
Earthenware Bodies. —
I.— Ball clay 13 parts
China clay 9$ parts
Flint 5$ parts
Cornwall stone 4 parts
II.— Ball clay 12$ parts
China clay 8 parts
Flint 5$ parts
Cornwall stone ... 2$ parts
One pint of cobalt
stain to 1 ton of
glaze.
III.— Ball clay 13J parts
China clay 11 parts
Flint 4 parts
Cornwall stone 5 parts
Feldspar 4 parts
Stain as required.
IV.— Ball clay 18$ parts
China clay 13$ parts
Flint 8$ parts
Stone 4 parts
Blue stain, 2 pints to ton.
V.— Ball clay 15 parts
China clay 12 parts
Flint 6 parts
Stone 4 parts
Feldspar 4 parts
Blue stain, 2 pints to ton.
VI. (Parian).—
Stone 11 parts
Feldspar 10 parts
China clay 8 parts
COLORED BODIES :
Ivory Body. —
Ball clay 22 parts
China 5$ parts
Flint 5 parts
Stone 3$ parts
Dark Drab Body.—
Cane marl 30 parts
Ball clay 10 parts
Cornwall stone 7 parts
Feldspar 4 parts
Black Body.—
Ball clay 120 parts
Ocher 120 parts
Manganese 35 parts
Cobalt carbonate. . 2 parts
Grind the three last mentioned ingre-
dients first.
Caledonia Body. —
Yellow clay 32 parts
China clay 10 parts
Flint 4 parts
Brown Body. —
Red clay 50 parts
Common clay 7$ parts
Manganese 1 part
Flint 1 part
Jasper Body.—
Cawk clay 10 parts
Blue clay 10 parts
Bone 5 parts
Flint 2 parts
Cobalt 1 part
Stone Body.—
Stone 48 parts
Blue clay 25 parts
China clay 24 parts
Cobalt ! 10 parts
Egyptian Black. —
Blue clay 235 parts
Calcined ocher. . . . 225 parts
Manganese 45 parts
China clay 15 parts
Ironstone Body. —
Stone 200 parts
Cornwall clay 150 parts
CERAMICS
169
Blue clay 200 parts
Flint 100 parts
Calx 1 part
Cream Body. —
Blue clay 1 £ parts
Brown clay if parts
Black clay 1 part
Cornish clay 1 part
Common ball clay. . \ part
Buff color | part
Light Drab.—
Cane marl 30 parts
Ball clay 24 parts
Feldspar 7 parts
Sage Body. —
Cane marl 15 parts
Ball clay 15 parts
China clay 5 parts
Stained with turquoise stain.
COLORED GLAZES FOR POTTERY
Blue.—
White glaze 100 parts
Oxide of cobalt ... 3 parts
Red lead 10 parts
Flowing blue 3 parts
Enamel blue 3 parts
Grind.
Pink.—
White glaze 100 parts
Red lead 8 parts
Marone pink U. G. 8 parts
Enamel red 3 parts
Grind.
Buff.—
White glaze 100 parts
Red lead 10 parts
Buff color 8 parts
Grind.
Ivory.—
White glaze 100 parts
Red lead 8 parts
Enamel amber 8 parts
Yellow underglaze 2 parts
Grind.
Turquoise. —
White glaze 100 parts
Red lead 10 parts
Carbonate of soda. 5 parts
Enamel blue 4 parts
Malachite, 110 4 parts
Grind.
Yellow.—
I.— White glaze 100 parts
Red lead 10 parts
Oxide of uranium , 8 parts
Grind,
II.— Dried flint 5 parts
Cornwall stone 15 parts
Litharge 50 parts
Yellow underglaze. .. 4 parts
Grind.
Green. —
I. — Oxide of copper
Flint of glass
Flint
Red lead
Grind, then take:
Of above
White glaze
Or stronger as required.
II.— Red lead
Stone
Flint
Flint glass
China clay
Calcined oxide of
copper
Oxide of cobalt
Grind only.
8 parts
3 parts
1 part
6 parts
1 part
6 parts
60 parts
24 parts
12 parts
12 parts
3 parts
14 parts
J part
Green Glaze, Best.—
III.— Stone 80 parts
Flint 8 parts
Soda crystals 4 parts
Borax 3£ parts
Niter 2 parts
Whiting 2 parts
Oxide of cobalt \ part
Glost fire, then take:
Above frit 60 parts
Red lead 57 parts
Calcined oxide of
copper 5| parts
Black.—
Red lead 24 parts
Raddle 4 parts
Manganese 4 parts
Flint 2 parts
Oxide of cobalt 2 parts
Carbonate of cobalt. 2 parts
Glost fire.
WHITE GLAZES:
China.— Frit:
I. — Stone 6 parts
Niter 2 parts
Borax 12 parts
Flint 4 parts
Pearl ash 2 parts
To mill:
Frit 24 parts
Stone 15^ parts
Flint 6| parts
White lead 31 parts
170
CERAMICS
II.— Frit:
Stone 24 parts
Borax 53 parts
Lynn sand 40 parts
Feldspar 32 parts
Paris white 16 parts
To mill:
Frit 90 parts
Stone 30 parts
White lead 90 parts
Flint 4 parts
Glass 2 parts
III.— Frit:
Stone 50 parts
Borax 40 parts
Flint 30 parts
Flint glass 30 parts
Pearl barytes 10 parts
To mill:
Frit 160 parts
Red lead 30 parts
Enamel blue £ part
Flint glass 2 parts
IV.— Frit:
Borax 100 parts
China clay 55 parts
Whiting 60 parts
Feldspar 75 parts
To mill:
Frit 200 parts
China clay 16 parts
White clay 3* parts
Stone 3 parts
Flint 2 parts
V.— Frit:
Stone 40 parts
Flint 25 parts
Niter 10 parts
Borax 20 parts
White lead 10 parts
Flint glass 40 parts
To mill:
Frit 145 parts
Stone 56 parts
Borax 16 parts
Flint 15 parts
Red lead 60 parts
Flint glass 8 parts
Earthenware. — Frit:
L— Flint 108 parts
China clay 45 parts
Paris white 60 parts
Borax 80 parts
Soda crystals 30 parts
To mill:
Frit 270 parts
Flint 20 parts
Paris white 15 parts
Stone 80 parts
White lead 65 parts
II.— Frit:
Flint 62 parts
China clay 30 parts
Paris white 38 parts
Boracic acid 48 parts
Soda crystals 26 parts
To mill:
Frit 230 parts
Stone 160 parts
Flint 60 parts
Lead 120 parts
III.— Frit:
Stone 56 parts
Paris white 55 parts
Flint 60 parts
China clay 20 parts
Borax 120 parts
Soda crystals 15 parts
To mill:
Frit... 212 parts
Stone 130 parts
Flint 50 parts
Lead 110 parts
Stain as required.
IV.— Frit:
Stone 100 parts
Flint 44 parts
Paris white 46 parts
Borax 70 parts
Niter 10 parts
To mill:
Frit 200 parts
Stone 60 parts
Lead 80 parts
Pearl White Glaze.— Frit:
Flint 50 parts
Stone 100 parts
Paris white 20 parts
Borax 60 parts
Soda crystals 20 parts
To mill:
Frit 178 pounds
Lead 55 pounds
Stain 3 ounces
Opaque Glaze. — Frit:
Borax 74 parts
Stone 94 parts
Flint 30 parts
China clay 22 parts
Pearl ash 5| parts
To mill:
Frit 175 parts
Lead 46 parts
CERAMICS
171
Flint 10
Oxide of tin 12
Flint glass 12
Glaze for Granite. — Frit:
I.— Stone 100
Flint 80
China clay 30
Paris white . 30
Feldspar 40
Soda crystals 40
Borax 80
To mill:
Frit... 360
Flint 50
Stone 50
Lead 80
II.— Frit:
Borax 100
Stone.. 50
Flint
Paris white
China clay
To mill:
Frit
Stone
Flint
Lead..
50
40
20
210
104
64
95
Raw Glazes. — White:
L— White lead 160
Borax 32
Stone. 48
Flint 52
Stain with blue and grind.
II.— White lead 80
Litharge.. 60
Boracic acid 40
Stone 45
Flint 50
Treat as foregoing.
HI.— White lead 100
Borax 4
Flint 11
Cornwall stone. ... 50
IV.— Red lead 80
Litharge 60
Tincal 40
Stone 40
Flint 52
ROCKINGHAM GLAZES.
I.— Litharge. 50
Stone 7£
Red marl 3
Oxide of manganese 5
Red oxide of iron ... 1
II.— White lead 30
Stone 3
Flint 9
Red marl 3
Manganese 5
parts
parts
parts
parts
parts
parts
parts
parts
parts
parts
parts
parts
parts
parts
parts
parts
parts
parts
parts
parts
parts
parts
parts
parts
parts
parts
parts
parts
parts
parts
parts
parts
parts
parts
parts
parts
parts
parts
parts
parts
parts
parts
parts
parts
parts
part
parts
parts
parts
parts
parts
III.— Red lead 20 parts
Stone 3 parts
Flint 2 parts
China clay 2 parts
Manganese 3 parts
Red oxide of iron. . . 1 part
Stoneware Bodies. —
Ball clay 14 parts
China clay 10 parts
Stone 8 parts
Ball clay : . 8 parts
China clay 5 parts
Flint 3 parts
Stone 4 parts
Ball clay 14 parts
China clay 11 parts
Flint 4 parts
Stone 5 parts
Feldspar 4 parts
Cane marl 16 parts
China clay 10 parts
Stone 9 parts
Flint 5 parts
Glazes. — Hard glaze:
Stone 10 parts
Flint 5 parts
Whiting 1£ parts
Red lead 10 parts
Hard glaze:
Feldspar 25 parts
Flint 5 parts
Red lead 15 parts
Plaster 1 part
Softer:
White lead 13 parts
Flint glass 10 parts
Feldspar 18 parts
Stone 3 parts
Whiting 1* parts
Best:
Feldspar
Flint glass
White lead 14 parts
.... 20 parts
14 parts
Stone
3 parts
Oxide of zinc 3 parts
Whiting 1* parts
Plaster 1 part
Rockingham Bodies. —
Ball clay 20 parts
China clay 13 parts
Flint 7 parts
Stone 1 part
Cane marl 22 parts
China clay 15 parts
Flint 8 parts
Feldspar 1 part
CERAMICS
Glazes. —
I. —Red lead 60 parts
Stone 8 parts
Red clay 3 parts
Best manganese. . . 5 parts
II.— White lead 60 parts
Feldspar 6 parts
Flint 16 parts
Red clay 6 parts
Manganese 12 parts
III.— Red lead 100 parts
Stone 15 parts
Flint 10 parts
China clay 10 parts
Manganese '. . 40 parts
Crocus martis 2 parts
IV.— Litharge 100 parts
Feldspar 14 parts
China clay 20 parts
Manganese 40 parts
Oxide of iron 2 parts
Jet. — Procure some first-class red marl,
add water, and, by passing through a fine
lawn, make it into a slip, and dip the
ware therein.
When fired use the following:
Glaze.—
Stone 60 parts
Flint 30 parts
Paris white 7| parts
Red lead 140 parts
One part mazarine -blue stain to 10
parts glaze.
Mazarine Blue Stain. —
Oxide of cobalt 10 parts
Paris white 9 parts
Sulphate barytes 1 part
Calcine.
Another Process Body.
Ball clay
China clay
Flint clay
Stone clay
Black stain . .
Glaze.—
Litharge.
Paris white
Flint
Stone
Black stain
Black Stain.—
Chromate of iron . . .
Oxide of nickel
Oxide of tin
Carbonate of cobalt.
Oxide of manganese .
Calcine and grind.
16 parts
12 parts
9 parts
6 parts
7 parts
70 parts
3 parts
12 parts
30 parts
20 parts
12 parts
2 parts
2 parts
5 parts
2 parts
Blue Stains. —
I. — Oxide of cobalt. . . ,
Oxide of zinc
Stone
Fire this very hard.
II.— Zinc
Flint
China clay
Oxide of cobalt. . .
Hard fire.
III.— Whiting
Flint
Oxide of cobalt
Glost fire.
Turquoise Stain. —
Prepared cobalt . .
Oxide of zinc
China clay
Carbonate of soda
Hard fire.
2^ parts
7 1 parts
7^ parts
6 pounds
4 pounds
4 pounds
5 ounces
3f parts
3f parts
2J parts
It parts
6 parts
6 parts
1 part
MATERIALS:
Tin Ash. —
Old lead 4 parts
Grain tin 2 parts
Melt in an iron ladle, and pour out in
water, then spread on a dish, and calcine
in glost oven with plenty of air.
Oxide of Tin. —
Granulated tin 5 pounds
Niter \ pound
Put on saucers and fire in glost oven.
Oxide of Chrome is made by mixing
powdered bichromate of potash with
sulphur as follows:
Potash 6 parts
Flowers of sulphur. . 1 part
Put in saggar, inside kiln, so that
fumes are carried away, and place 4 or
5 pieces of red-hot iron on the top so as
to ignite it. Leave about 12 hours, then
pound very fine, and put in saggar again.
Calcine in hard place of biscuit oven.
Wash this until the water is quite clear,
and dry for use.
Production of Luster Colors on Por-
celain and Glazed Pottery.— The luster
colors are readily decomposed by acids
and atmospheric influences, because
they do not contain, in consequence of
the low baking temperature, enough
silicic acid to form resistive compounds.
In order to attain this, G. Alefeld has
patented a process according to which
such compounds are added to the luster
preparations as leave behind after the
burning an acid which transforms the
luster preparation into more resisting
CERAMICS
173
compounds. In this connection the ad-
mixture of such bodies has been found
advantageous, as they form phosphides
with the metallic oxides of the lusters
after the burning. These phosphides
are especially fitted for the production of
saturated resisting compounds, not only
on account of their insolubility in water,
but also on account of their colorings.
Similarly titanic-, molybdic, tungstic, and
vanadic compounds may be produced.
The metallic phosphates produced by
the burning give a luster coating which,
as regards gloss, is not inferior to the non-
saturated metallic oxides, while it mate-
rially excels them in power of resistance.
Since the lusters to be applied are used
dissolved in essential oils, it is necessary
to make the admixture of phosphoric
substance also in a form soluble in essen-
tial oils. For the production of this
admixture the respective chlorides, pre-
eminently phosphoric chloride, are suit-
able. They are mixed with oil of lav-
ender in the ratio of 1 to 5, and the
resulting reaction product is added to the
commercial metallic oxide luster, singly
or in conjunction with precious metal
preparations (glossy gold, silver, plati-
num, etc.) in the approximate propor-
tion of 5 to 1. Then proceed as usual.
Instead of the chlorides, nitrates and
acetates, as. well as any readily destruc-
tible organic compounds, may also be
employed, which are entered into fusing
rosin or rosinous liquids.
Metallic Luster on Pottery. — Accord-
ing to a process patented in Germany, a
mixture is prepared from various natural
or artificial varieties of ocher, to which
25-50 per cent of finely powdered more
or less metalliferous or sulphurous coal is
added. The mass treated in this man-
ner is brought together in saggars with
finely divided organic substances, such
as sawdust, shavings, wood-wool, cut
straw, etc., and subjected to feeble red
heat. After the heating the material is
taken put. The glazings now exhibit
that thin but stable metallic color which
is governed by the substances used.
Besides coal, salts and oxides of silver,
cobalt, cadmium, chrome iron, nickel,
manganese, copper, or zinc may be em-
ployed. The color-giving layer is re-
moved by washing or brushing, while
the desired color is burned in and re-
mains. In this manner handsome shades
can be produced.
Metallic Glazes on Enamels. — The
formulas used by the Arabs and their
Italian successors are partly disclosed in
manuscripts in the British and South
Kensington Museums; two are given
below:
Arab Italian
Copper sulphide 26 . 87 24 . 74
Silver sulphide 1.15 1.03
Mercury sulphide 24 . 74
Red ocher 71.98 49.49
These were ground with vinegar and
applied with the brush to the already
baked enamel. A great variety of iri-
descent and metallic tones can be ob-
tained by one or the other, or a mixture
of the following formulas:
I II III IV V VI
Copper carbonate. . 30 . . . . 28 . . 95
Copper oxalate . 5 . .
Copper sulphide 20
Silver carbonate 3 .. 2 1 5
Bismuth subnitrate. .. 12 .. .. 10 ..
Stannous oxide 25
Red ocher 70 85 55 70 84 .!
Silver chloride and yellow ocher may
be respectively substituted for silver car-
bonate and red ocher. The ingredients,
ground with a little gum tragacanth and
water, are applied with a brush to enam-
els melting about 1814° F., and are fur-
naced at 1202° F. in a reducing atmos-
phere. After cooling the ferruginous
deposit is rubbed off, and the colors thus
brought out.
Sulphur, free or combined, is not nec-
essary, cinnabar has no action, ocher
may be dispensed with, and any organic
gummy matter may be used instead of
vinegar, and broom is not needed in the
furnace. The intensity and tone of the
iridescence depend on the duration of
the reduction, and the nature of the
enamel. Enamels containing a coloring
base— copper, iron, antimony, nickel —
especially in presence of tin, give the
best results. v
To Toughen China.— To toughen
china or glass place the new article in
cold water, bring to boil gradually,
boil for 4 hours, and leave standing in
the water till cool. Glass or china
toughened in this way will never crack
with hot water.
How to Tell Pottery and Porcelain. —
The following simple test will serve:
Hold the piece up to the light, and if it
can be seen through — that is, if it is
translucent — it is porcelain. Pottery is
opaque, and not so hard and white as
porcelain. The main differences in the
manufacture of stoneware, earthenware,
and porcelain are due to the ingredients
used, to the way they are mixed, and to
the degree of heat to which they are sub-
174
CHEESE
jected in firing. Most of the old English
wares found in this country are pottery
or semichina, although the term china
is commonly applied to them all.
Cheese
Manufacture. — The process of cheese
making is one which is eminently in-
teresting and scientific, and which, in
every gradation, depends on principles
which chemistry has developed and il-
lustrated. When a vegetable or min-
eral acid is added to milk, and heat
applied, a coagulum is formed, which,
when separated from the liquid por-
tion, constitutes cheese. Neutral salts,
earthy and metallic salts, sugar, and
gum arabic, as well as some other sub-
stances, also produce the same effect;
but that which answers the purpose
best, and which is almost exclusively
used by dairy farmers, is rennet, or the
mucous membrane of the last stom-
ach of the calf. Alkalies dissolve this
curd at a boiling heat, and acids again
precipitate it. The solubility of casein
in milk is occasioned by the presence of
the phosphates and other salts of the alka-
lies. In fresh milk these substances may
be readily detected by the property it
possesses of restoring the color of red-
dened litmus paper. The addition of an
acid neutralizes the alkali, and so pre-
cipitates the curd in an insoluble state.
The philosophy of cheese making is thus
expounded by Liebig:
" The acid indispensable to the co-
agulation of milk is not added to the milk
in the preparation of cheese, but it is
formed in the milk at the expense of the
milk-sugar present. A small quantity
of water is left in contact with a small
quantity of a calf's stomach for a few
hours, or for a night; the water absorbs
so minute a portion of the mucous mem-
brane as to be scarcely ponderable; this
is mixed with milk; its state of transfor-
mation is communicated (and this is a
most important circumstance) not to the
cheese, but to the milk-sugar, the ele-
ments of which transpose themselves
into lactic acid, which neutralizes the
alkalies, and thus causes the separation
of the cheese. By means of litmus paper
the process may be followed and observed
through all its stages; the alkaline re-
action of the milk ceases as soon as the
coagulation begins. If the cheese is not
immediately separated from the whey,
the formation of lactic acid continues,
the fluid turns acid, and. the cheese itself
passes into a state of decomposition.
"When cheese-curd is kept in a cool
place a series of transformation takes
place, in consequence of which it as-
sumes entirely new properties; it gradu-
ally becomes semi-transparent, and more
or less soft, throughout the whole mass;
it exhibits a feebly acid reaction, and
develops the characteristic caseous odor.
Fresh cheese is very sparingly soluble in
water, but after having been left to itself
for two or three years it becomes (es-
pecially if all the fat be previously re-
moved) almost completely soluble in
cold water, forming with it a solution
which, like milk, is coagulated by the
addition of the acetic or any mineral
acid. The cheese, which whilst fresh is
insoluble, returns during the maturation,
or ripening, as it is called, to a state sim-
ilar to that in which it originally existed
in the milk. In those English, Dutch,
and Swiss cheeses which are nearly in-
odorous, and in the superior kinds of
French cheese, the casein of the milk is
present in its unaltered state.
" The odor and flavor of the cheese is
due to the decomposition of the butter;
the non-volatile acids, the margaric and
oleic acids, and the volatile butyric acid,
capric and caproic acids are liberated
in consequence of the decomposition
of glycerine. Butyric acid imparts to
cheese its characteristic caseous odor,
and the differences in its pungency or
aromatic flavor depend upon the propor-
tion of free butyric, capric, and caproic
acids present. In the cheese of certain
dairies and districts, valerianic acid has
been detected along with the other acids
just referred to. Messrs Jljenjo and
Laskowski found this acid in the cheese
of Limbourg, and M. Bolard in that of
Roquefort.
" The transition of the insoluble into
soluble casein depends upon the de-
composition of the phosphate of lime by
the margaric acid of the butter; mar-
garate of lime is formed, whilst the phos-
phoric acid combines with the casein,
forming a compound soluble in water.
" The bad smell of inferior kinds of
cheese, especially those called meager or
poor cheeses, is caused by certain fetid
products containing sulphur, and which
are formed by the decomposition or pu-
trefaction of the casein. The alteration
which the butter undergoes (that is, in
becoming rancid), or which occurs in the
milk-sugar still present, being trans-
mitted to the casein, changes both the
composition of the latter substance and
its nutritive qualities.
" The principal conditions for the prep-
aration of the superior kinds of cheese.
CHEESE
175
(other obvious circumstances being of
course duly regarded) are a careful
removal of the whey, which holds the
milk-sugar in solution, and a low tem-
perature during the maturation or rip-
ening of the cheese."
Cheese differs vastly in quality and
flavor according to the method em-
ployed in its manufacture and the rich-
ness of the milk of which it is made.
Much depends upon the quantity of
cream it contains, and, consequently,
when a superior quality of cheese is de-
sired cream is frequently added to the
curd. This plan is adopted in the man-
ufacture of Stilton cheese and others of
a like description. The addition of a
pound or two of butter to the curd for a
middling size cheese also vastly improves
the quality of the product. To insure
the richness of the milk, not only should
the cows be properly fed, but certain
breeds chosen. Those of Alderney,
Cheddar, Cheshire, etc., have been
widely preferred.
The materials employed in making
cheese are milk and rennet. Rennet is
used either fresh or salted and dried;
generally in the latter state. The milk
may be of any kind, according to the
quality of the cheese required. Cows'
milk is that generally employed, but occa-
sionally ewes' milk is used; and some-
times, though more rarely, that from
goats.
In preparing his cheese the dairy
farmer puts the greater portion of the
milk into a large tub, to which he adds
the remainder, sufficiently heated to
raise the temperature to that of new
milk. The whole is then whisked to-
gether, the rennet or rennet liquor added,
and the tub covered over. It is now al-
lowed to stand until completely ** turned,"
when the curd is gently struck down
several times with the skimming dish,
after which it is allowed to subside.
The vat, covered with cheese cloth, is
next placed on a " horse " or " ladder "
over the tub, and filled with curd by
means of the skimmer, care being taken
to allow as little as possible of the oily
particles or butter to run back with the
whey. The curd is pressed down with
the hands, and more added as it sinks.
This process is repeated until the curd
rises to about two inches above the edge.
The newly formed cheese, thus partially
separated from the whey, is now placed
in a clean tub, and a proper quantity of
salt, as well as of annotta, added when
that coloring is used, after which a board
is placed over and under it, and pressure
applied for about 2 or 3 hours. The
cheese is next turned out and surrounded
by a fresh cheese cloth, and then again
submitted to pressure in the cheese
press for 8 or 10 hours, after which it is
commonly removed from the press, salted
all over, and again pressed for 15 to 20
hours. The quality of the cheese es-
pecially depends on this part of the proc-
ess, as if any of the whey is left in the
cheese it rapidly becomes bad-flavored.
Before placing it in the press the last
time the common practice is to pare the
edges smooth and sightly. It now only
remains to wash the outside of the
cheese in warm whey or water, to wipe
it dry, and to color it with annotta or
reddle, as is usually done.
The storing of the newly made cheese
is the next point that engages the atten-
tion of the maker and wholesale dealer.
The same principles which influence
the maturation or ripening of fermented
liquors also operate here. A cool cellar,
neither damp nor dry, and which is un-
influenced by change of weather or sea-
son, is commonly regarded as the best
for the purpose. If possible, the tem-
perature should on no account be per-
mitted to exceed 50° or 52° F. at any
portion of the year. An average of
about 45° F. is preferable when it can be
procured. A place exposed to sudden
changes of temperature is as unfit for
storing cheese as it is for storing beer.
"The quality of Roquefort cheese, which
is prepared from sheep's milk, and is
very excellent, depends exclusively upon
the places where the cheeses are kept
after pressing and during maturation.
These are cellars, communicating with
mountain grottoes and caverns which
are kept constantly cool, at about 41° to
42° F., by currents of air from clefts in
the mountains. The value of these cel-
lars as storehouses varies with their
property of maintaining an equable and
low temperature."
It will thus be seen that very slight
differences in the materials, in the prep-
aration, or in storing of the cheese, ma-
terially influence the quality and flavor
of this article. The richness of the milk;
the addition to or subtraction of cream
from the milk; the separation of the
curd from the whey with or without com-
pression; the salting of the curd; the
collection of the curd, either whole or
broken, before pressing; the addition of
coloring matter, as annotta or saffron, or of
flavoring; the place and method of stor-
ing; and the length of time allowed for
maturation, all tend to alter the taste and
odor of the cheese in some or other par-
ticular, and that in a way readily percep-
176
CHEESE
tible to the palate of the connoisseur.
No other alimentary substance appears
to be so seriously affected by slight
variations in the quality of the materials
from which it is made, or by such ap-
parently trifling differences in the meth-
ods of preparing.
The varieties of cheese met with in
commerce are very numerous, and differ
greatly from each other in richness, color,
and flavor. These are commonly dis-
tinguished by names indicative of the
places in which they have been manufac-
tured, or of the quality of the materials
from which they have been prepared.
Thus we have Dutch, Gloucester, Stil-
ton, skimmed milk, raw milk, cream, and
other cheeses; names which explain them-
selves. The following are the principal
varieties :
American Factory. — Same as Cheddar.
Brickbat. — Named from its form;
made, in Wiltshire, of new milk and
cream.
Brie. — A soft, white, cream cheese of
French origin.
Cheddar. — A fine, spongy kind of
cheese, the eyes or vesicles of which con-
tain a rich oil; made up into round, thick
cheeses of considerable size (150 to 200
pounds).
Cheshire. — From new milk, without
skimming, the morning's milk being
mixed with that of the preceding even-
ing's, previously warmed, so that the
whole may be brought to the heat of new
milk. To this the rennet is added, in
less quantity than is commonly used for
other kinds of cheese. On this point
much of the flavor and mildness of the
cheese is said to depend. A piece of
dried rennet, of the size of a half-dollar
put into a pint of water over night, and
allowed to stand until the next morn-
ing, is sufficient for 18 or 20 gallons of
milk; in large, round, thick cheeses (100
to 200 pounds each). They are gen-
erally solid, homogeneous, and dry, and
friable rather than viscid.
Cottenham. — A rich kind of cheese, in
flavor and consistence not unlike Stilton,
from which, however, it differs in shape,
being flatter and broader than the latter.
Cream. — From the "strippings" (the
last of the milk drawn from the cow at
each milking), from a mixture of milk
and cream, or from raw cream only, ac-
cording to the quality desired. It is
usually made in small oblong, square, or
rounded cakes, a general pressure only
(that of a 2- or 4-pound weight) being
applied to press out the whey. After 12
hours it is placed upon a board or wood-
en trencher, and turned every day until
dry. It ripens in about 3 weeks. A
little salt is generally added, and fre-
quently a little powdered lump sugar.
Damson. — Prepared from damsons
boiled with a little water, the pulp passed
through a sieve, and then boiled with
about one-fourth the weight of sugar,
until the mixture solidifies on cooling; it
is next poured into small tin molds pre-
viously dusted out with sugar. Cherry
cheese, gooseberry cheese, plum cheese,
etc., are prepared in the same way, using
the respective kinds of fruit. They are
all very agreeable candies or confections.
Derbyshire. — A small, white, rich
variety, very similar to Dunlop cheese.
Dunlop. — Rich, white, and buttery;
in round forms, weighing from 30 to 60
pounds.
Dutch (Holland).— Of a globular
form, 5 to 14 pounds each. Those from
Edam are very highly salted; those from
Gouda less so.
Emmenthaler. — Same as Gruyere.
Gloucester. — Single Gloucester, from
milk deprived of part of its cream; dou-
ble Gloucester, from milk retaining the
whole of the cream. Mild tasted, semi-
buttery consistence, without being fri-
able; in large, round, flattish forms.
Green or Sage. —From milk mixed with
the juice of an infusion or decoction of
sage leaves, to which marigold flowers
and parsley are frequently added.
Gruyfere. — A fine kind of cheese made
in Switzerland, and largely consumed
on the Continent. It is firm and dry,
and exhibits numerous cells of con-
siderable magnitude.
Holland. — Same as Dutch.
Leguminous. — The Chinese prepare
an actual cheese from peas, called tao-
foo, which they sell in the streets of Can-
ton. The paste from steeped ground
peas is boiled, which causes the starch to
dissolve with the casein; after straining
the liquid it is coagulated by a solution
of gypsum; this coagulum is worked up
like sour milk, salted, and pressed into
molds.
Limburger. — A strong variety of cheese,
soft and well ripened.
Lincoln. — From new milk and cream;
in pieces about 2 inches thick. Soft, and
will not keep over 2 or 3 months.
CHEESE
177
Neufchatel. — A much-esteemed vari-
ety of Swiss cheese; made of cream, and
weighs about 5 or 6 ounces.
Norfolk. — Dyed yellow with annotta
or saffron; good, but not superior; in
cheeses of 30 to 50 pounds.
Parmesan. — From the curd of skimmed
milk, hardened by a gentle heat. The
rennet is added at about 120°, and an
hour afterwards the curdling milk is set
on a slow fire until heated to about 150°
F., during which the curd separates in
small lumps. A few pinches of saffron
are then thrown in. About a fortnight
after making the outer crust is cut off,
and the new surface varnished with lin-
seed oil, and one side colored red.
Roquefort. — From ewes' milk; the
best prepared in France. It greatly
resembles Stilton, but is scarcely of
equal richness or quality, and possesses
a peculiar pungency and flavor.
Roquefort, Imitation. — The gluten of
wheat is kneaded with a little salt and a
small portion of a solution of starch, and
made up into cheeses. It is said that
this mixture soon acquires the taste,
smell, and unctuosity of cheese, and
when kept a certain time is not to be dis-
tinguished from the celebrated Roquefort
cheese, of which it possesses all the pecu-
liar pungency. By slightly varying the
process other kinds of cheese may be
imitated.
Sage. — Same as green cheese.
Slipcoat or Soft. — A very rich, white
cheese, somewhat resembling butter;
for present use only.
Stilton. — The richest and finest cheese
made in England. From raw milk to
which cream taken from other milk is
added; in cheeses generally twicers high
as they are broad. Like wine, this
cheese is vastly improved by age, and is
therefore seldom eaten before it is 2
years old. A spurious appearance of
age is sometimes given to it by placing
it in a warm, damp cellar, or by sur-
rounding it with masses of fermenting
straw or dung.
Suffolk. — From skimmed milk; in
round, flat forms, from 24 to 30 pounds
each. Very hard and horny.
Swiss. — The principal cheeses made
in Switzerland are the Gruyere, the
Neufchatel, and the Schabzieger or
green cheese. The latter is flavored
with melitot.
Westphalian. — Made in small balls or
rolls of about 1 pound each. It derives
its peculiar flavor from the curd being
allowed to become partially putrid before
being pressed. In small balls or rolls of
about 1 pound each.
Wiltshire. — Resembles Cheshire or
Gloucester. The outside is painted with
reddle or red ocher or whey.
York. — From cream. It will not keep.
We give below the composition of
some of the principal varieties of cheese:
Double
Ched- Glouces- Skim
dar ter
Water 36.64 35.61 43.64
Casein 23.38 21.76 45.64
Fatty matter 35.44 38.16 5.76
Mineral matter.. 4.54 4.47 4.96
100.00 100.00 100.00
Water
Butter
Casein
Milk, sugar, and ex-
tractive matters
Mineral matter
Stilton Cother-
stone
32.18 38.28
37.36 30.89
24.31 23.93
2.22
3.93
3.70
3.20
100.00 100.00
Gruyere Ordinary
(Swiss) Dutch
Water 40.00 36.10
Casein 31.50 29.40
Fatty matter 24.00 27.50
Salts 3.00 .90
Non - nitrogenous or-
ganic matter and
loss 1.50 6.10
100.00 100.00
When a whole cheese is cut, and the
consumption small, it is generally found
to become unpleasantly dry, and to lose
flavor before it is consumed. This is
best prevented by cutting a sufficient
quantity for a few days' consumption
from the cheese, and keeping the re-
mainder in a cool place, rather damp
than dry, spreading a thin film of butter
over the fresh surface, and covering it
with a cloth or pan to keep off the dirt.
This removes the objection existing in
small families against purchasing a
whole cheese at a time. The common
practice of buying small quantities of
cheese should be avoided, as not only a
higher price is paid for any given quality
but there is little likelihood of obtaining
exactly the same flavor twice running.
Should cheese become too dry to b§
178
CHEWING GUMS
agreeable, it may be used for stewing,
or for making grated cheese, or Welsh
rarebits.
Goats* Milk Cheese.— Goats' milk
cheese is made as follows: Warm 20
quarts of milk and coagulate it with
rennet, either the powder or extract.
Separate the curds from the whey in a
colander. After a few days the dry curd
may be shaped into larger or smaller
cheeses, the former only salted, the latter
containing salt and caraway seed. The
cheeses must be turned every day, and
sprinkled with salt, and any mold re-
moved. After a few days they may be
put away on shelves to ripen, and left for
several weeks. Pure goat's milk cheese
should be firm and solid all the way
through. Twenty quarts of milk will
make about 4 pounds of cheese,
CHEESE COLORANT:
See Food.
CHEMICAL GARDENS:
See Gardens, Chemical.
CHERRY BALSAM:
See Balsam.
CHERRY CORDIAL:
See Wines and Liquors.
Chewing Gums
Manufacture. — The making of chew-
ing gum is by no means the simple oper-
ation which it seems to be. Much expe-
rience in manipulation is necessary to
succeed, and the published formulas can
at best serve as a guide rather than as
something to be absolutely and blindly
followed. Thus, if the mass is either too
hard or soft, change the proportions until
it is right; often it will be found that
different purchases of the same article
will vary in their characteristics when
worked up. But given a basis, the man-
ufacturer can flavor and alter to suit
himself. The most successful manu-
facturers attribute their success to the
employment of the most approved ma-
chinery and the greatest attention to
details. The working formulas and the
processes of these manufacturers are
guarded as trade secrets, and aside from
publishing general formulas, little in-
formation can be given.
Chicle gum is purified by boiling with
water and separating the foreign matter.
Flavorings, pepsin, sugar, etc., are
worked in under pressure by suitable
machinery. Formula:
I. — Gum chicle 1 pound
Sugar 2 pounds
Glucose 1 pound
Caramel butter 1 pound
First mash and soften the gum at a
gentle heat. Place the sugar and glu-
cose in a small copper pan; add enough
water to dissolve the sugar; set on a fire
and cook to 244° F. ; lift off the fire; add
the caramel butter and lastly the gum;
mix well into a smooth paste; roll out on a
smooth marble, dusting with finely pow-
dered sugar, run through sizing machine
to the proper thickness, cut into strips,
and again into thin slices.
II. — Chicle 6 ounces
Paraffine 2 ounces
Balsam of Tolu ... 2 drachms
Balsam of Peru. . . 1 drachm
Sugar 20 ounces
Glucose 8 ounces
Water 6 ounces
Flavoring, enough.
Triturate the chicle and balsams in
water, take out and add the paraffine,
first heated. Boil the sugar, glucose,
and water together to what is known to
confectioners as "crack " heat, pour the
syrup over the oil slab and turn into it
the gum mixture, which will make it
tough and plastic. Add any desired
flavor.
III. — Gum chicle 122 parts
Paraffine 42 parts
Balsam of Tolu. ... 4 parts
Sugar 384 parts
Water 48 parts
Dissolve the sugar in the water by the
aid of heat and pour the resultant syrup
on an oiled slab. Melt the gum, balsam,
and paraffine together and pour on top
of the syrup, and work the whole up to-
gether.
IV. — Gum chicle 240 parts
White wax 64 parts
Sugar 640 parts
Glucose 128 parts
Water 192 parts
Balsam of Peru ... 4 parts
Flavoring matter, enough.
Proceed as indicated in II.
V.— Balsam of Tolu 4 parts
Benzoin 1 part
White wax 1 part
Paraffine 1 part
Powdered sugar. ... 1 part
Melt together, mix well, and roll into
sticks of the usual dimensions.
Mix, and, when sufficiently cool, roll
out into sticks or any other desirable
form,
CHEWING GUMS— CHOLERA REMEDIES
179
Spruce Chewing Gum. —
Spruce gum 20 parts
Chicle 20 parts
Sugar, powdered. . 60 parts
Melt the gums separately, mix while
hot, and immediately add the sugar, a
small portion at a time, kneading it thor-
oughly on a hot slab. When com-
pletely incorporated remove to a cold
slab, previously dusted with powdered
sugar, roll out at once into sheets, and
cut into sticks. Any desired flavor or
color may be added to or incorporated
with the sugar.
CHICKEN-COOP APPLICATION:
See Insecticides.
CHICKEN DISEASES AND THEIR
REMEDIES:
See Veterinary Formulas.
CHICORY, TESTS FOR:
See Foods.
CHILBLAINS:
See Ointments.
CHILBLAIN SOAP:
See Soap.
CHILDREN, DOSES FOR:
See Doses.
CHILLS, BITTERS FOR:
See Wines and Liquors.
CHINA CEMENTS:
See Adhesives and Lutes.
CHINA:
See Ceramics.
CHINA, TO REMOVE BURNED LET-
TERS FROM:
See Cleaning Preparations and Meth-
ods, under Miscellaneous Methods.
CHINA REPAIRING:
See Porcelain.
CHINA RIVETING.
China riveting is best left to practical
men, but it can be done with a drill made
from a splinter of a diamond fixed on a
handle. If this is not to be had, get a
small three-cornered file, harden it by
placing it in the fire till red hot, and then
plunging it in cold water. Next grind
the point on a grindstone and finish on
an oilstone. With the point pick out the
place to be bored, taking care to do it
fently for fear of breaking the article,
n a little while a piece will break off,
then the hole can easily be made by
working the point round. The wire
may then be passed through and fas-
tened. A good cement may be made
from 1 ounce of grated cheese, J ounce
of finely powdered quicklime, and white
of egg sufficient to make a paste. The
less cement applied the better, using a
feather to spread it over the broken
edge.
CHLORIDES, PLATT'S:
See Disinfectants.
CHLORINE-PROOFING :
See Acid-Proofing.
CHOCOLATE.
Prepare 1,000 parts of finished cacao
and 30 parts of fresh cacao oil, in a
warmed, polished, iron mortar, into a
liquid substance, add to it 800 parts of
finely powdered sugar, and, after a good
consistency has been reached, 60 parts of
powdered iron lactate and 60 parts of
sugar syrup, finely rubbed together.
Scent with 40 parts of vanilla sugar. Of
this mass weigh out tablets of 125 parts
into the molds.
Coating Tablets with Chocolate. —If a
chocolate which is free from sugar be
placed in a dish over a water bath, it will
melt into a fluid of proper consistence
for coating tablets. No water must be
added. The coating is formed by dip-
ping the tablets. When they are suffi-
ciently hardened they are laid on oiled
paper to dry.
CHOCOLATE CASTOR - OIL LOZ-
ENGES:
See Castor Oil.
CHOCOLATE CORDIAL:
See Wines and Liquors.
CHOCOLATE EXTRACTS:
See Essences and Extracts.
CHOCOLATE SODA WATER:
See Beverages.
CHOKING IN CATTLE:
See Veterinary Formulas.
CHOLERA REMEDIES:
Sun Cholera Mixture.—
Tincture of opium ... 1 part
Tincture of capsicum. 1 part
Tincture of rhubarb. . 1 part
Spirit of camphor .... 1 part
Spirit of peppermint . . 1 pa~t
Squibb's Diarrhea Mixture.—
Tincture opium 40 parts
Tincture capsicum. . . 40 parts
Spirit camphor 40 parts
Chloroform 15 parts
Alcohol 65 parts
180
CHOLERA REMEDIES— CIDER
Aromatic Rhubarb. —
Cinnamon, ground . . 8 parts
Rhubarb 8 parts
Calumba 4 parts
Saffron 1 part
Powdered opium 2 parts
Oil peppermint 5 parts
Alcohol, q. s. ad . . . . 100 parts
Macerate the ground drugs with 75
parts alcohol in a closely covered per-
colator for several days, then allow per-
colation to proceed, using sufficient al-
cohol to obtain 95 parts of percolate. In
percolate dissolve the oil of peppermint.
Rhubarb and Camphor. —
Tincture capsicum. . . 2 ounces
Tincture opium 2 ounces
Tincture camphor.. . . 3 ounces
Tincture catechu 4 ounces
Tincture rhubarb. ... 4 ounces
Spirit peppermint. ... 4 ounces
Blackberry Mixture. —
Fluid extract black-
berry root 2 pints
Fluid ginger, soluble. 5J ounces
Fluid catechu 5J ounces
Fluid opium for tinc-
ture 160 minims
Brandy 8 ounces
Sugar 4 pounds
Essence cloves 256 minims
Essence cinnamon . . 256 minims
Chloroform 128 minims
Alcohol (25 per cent),
q. s. ad 1 gallon
CHOWCHOW:
See Condiments.
CHROME YELLOW, TEST FOR:
See Pigments.
CHROMIUM GLUE:
See Adhesives.
CHROMO MAKING.
The production of chromo pictures
requires a little skill. Practice is neces-
sary. The glass plate to be used should
be washed off with warm water, and then
laid in a 10 per cent solution of nitric
acid. After one hour, wash with clean,
cold water, dry with a towel, and polish
the plate with good alcohol on the in-
side— hollow side — until no finger marks
or streaks are visible. This is best as-
certained by breathing on the glass; the
breath should show an even blue surface
on the glass.
Coat the unmounted photograph to be
colored with benzine by means of wad-
ding, but without pressure, so that the
retouching of the picture is not dis-
turbed. Place 2 tablets of ordinary
kitchen gelatin in 8f ounces of distilled
or pure rain water, soak for an hour, and
then heat until the gelatin has com-
pletely dissolved. Pour this warm solu-
tion over the polished side of the glass,
so that the liquid is evenly distributed.
The best way is to pour the solution on
the upper right-hand corner, allowing it
to flow into the left-hand corner, from
there to the left below and right below,
finally letting the superfluous liquid
run off. Take the photograph, which
has been previously slightly moistened
on the back, lay it with the picture
side on the gelatin-covered plate, cen-
tering it nicely, and squeeze out the
excess gelatin solution gently, prefer-
ably by means of a rubber squeegee.
Care must be taken, however, not to dis-
place the picture in this manipulation, as
it is easily spoiled.
The solution must never be allowed to
boil, since this would render the gelatin
brittle and would result in the picture,
after having been finished, cracking off
from the glass in a short time. When
the picture has been attached to the glass
plate without blisters (which is best ob-
served from the back), the edge of the
glass is cleansed of gelatin, preferably
by means of a small sponge and luke-
warm water, and the plate is allowed to
dry over night.
When the picture and the gelatin are
perfectly dry, coat the back of the picture
a few times with castor oil until it is per-
fectly transparent; carefully remove the
oil without rubbing, and proceed with
the painting, which is best accomplished
with good, not over-thick oil colors. The
coloring must be observed from the glass
side, and for this reason the small details,
such as eyes, lips, beard, and hair,
should first be sketched in. When the
first coat is dry the dress and the flesh
tints are painted. The whole surface
may be painted over, and it is not neces-
sary to paint shadows, as these are al-
ready present in the picture, and con-
sequently show the color through in
varying strength.
When the coloring has dried, a second
glass plate should be laid on for protec-
tion, pasting the two edges together with
narrow strips of linen.
Cider
To Make Cider.— Pick the apples off
the tree by hand. Every apple before
going into the press should be carefully
CIDER
181
wiped. As soon as a charge of apples
is ground, remove the pomace and put in
a cask with a false bottom and a strainer
beneath it, and a vessel to catch the
drainage from pomace. As fast as the
juice runs from the press place it in
clean, sweet, open tubs or casks with the
heads out and provide with a faucet, put
in about two inches above bottom. The
juice should be closely watched and as
soon as the least sign of fermentation ap-
pears (bubbles on top, etc.) it should be
run off into casks prepared for this pur-
pose and placed in a moderately cool
room. The barrels should be entirely
filled, or as near to the bunghole as
possible. After fermentation is well
under way the spume or foam should be
scraped off with a spoon several times a
day. When fermentation has ceased
the cider is racked off into clean casks,
filled to the bunghole, and the bung
driven in tightly. It is now ready for
use or for bottling.
Champagne Cider. — I. — To convert or-
dinary cider into champagne cider, pro-
ceed as follows: To 100 gallons of good
cider add 3 gallons of strained honey (or
24 pounds of white sugar will answer),
stir in well, tightly bung, and let alone
for a week. Clarify the cider by adding
a half gallon of skimmed milk, or 4 ounces
of gelatin dissolved in sufficient hot
water and add 4 gallons of proof spirit.
Let stand 3 days longer, then syphon off,
bottle, cork, and tie or wire down.
Bunging the cask tightly is done in order
to induce a slow fermentation, and thus
retain in the cider as much carbonic acid
as possible.
II. — Put 10 gallons of old and clean
cider in a strong and iron-bound cask,
pitched within (a sound beer cask is the
very thing), and add and stir in well 40
ounces of simple syrup. Add 5 ounces
of tartaric acid, let dissolve, then add 7|
ounces sodium bicarbonate in powder.
Have the bung ready and the moment
the soda is added put it in and drive it
home. The cider will be ready for use
in a few hours.
Cider Preservative. — I. — The addition
of 154 grains of bismuth subnitrate to 22
gallons of cider prevents, or materially
retards, the hardening of the beverage on
exposure to air; moreover, the bismuth
salt renders alcoholic fermentation more
complete.
II. — Calcium sulphite (sulphite of
lime) is largely used to prevent fermen-
tation in cider. About J to I of an ounce
of the sulphite is required for 1 gallon of
cider. It should first be dissolved in a
small quantity of cider, then added to
the bulk, and the whole agitated until
thoroughly mixed. The barrel should
then be bunged and allowed to stand for
several days, until the action of the sul-
phite is exerted. It will preserve the
sweetness of cider perfectly, but care
should be taken not to add too much, as
that would impart a slight sulphurous
taste.
Artificial Ciders.— To 25 gallons of
soft water add 2 pounds of tartaric acid,
25 or 30 pounds of sugar, and a pint of
yeast; put in a warm place, and let fer-
ment for 15 days, then add the flavoring
matter to suit taste. The various fruit
ethers are for sale at any wholesale drug
house.
Bottling Sweet Cider. — Champagne
quarts are generally used for bottling
cider, as they are strong and will stand
pressure, besides being a convenient
size for consumers. In making cider
champagne the liquor should be clari-
fied and bottled in the sweet condition,
that is to say, before the greater part of
the sugar which it contains has been
converted into alcohol by fermentation.
The fermentation continues, to a certain
extent, in the bottle, transforming more
of the sugar into alcohol, and the car-
bonic acid, being unable to escape, is
dissolved in the cider and produces the
sparkling.
The greater the quantity of sugar
contained in the liquor, when it is bot-
tled, the more complete is its carbona-
tion by the carbonic-acid gas, and con-
sequently the more sparkling it is when
poured out. But this is true only within
certain limits, for if the production of
sugar is too high the fermentation will
be arrested.
To make the most sparkling cider the
liquor is allowed to stand for three, four,
five, or six weeks, during which fermen-
tation proceeds. The time varies ac-
cording to the nature of the apples, and
also to the temperature; when it is very
warm the first fermentation is usually
completed in 7 days.
Before bottling, the liquid must be
fined, and this is best done with catechu
dissolved in cold cider, 2 ounces of cate-
chu to the barrel of cider. This is well
stirred and left to settle for a few days.
The cider at this stage is still sweet,
and it is a point of considerable nicety
not to carry the first fermentation too
far. The bottle should not be quite
filled, so as to allow more freedom for
the carbonic-acid gas which forms.
When the bottles have been filled,
182
CIDER— CIGARS
corked, and wired down, they should be
placed in a good cellar, which should be
dry, or else the cider will taste of the
cork. The bottles should not be laid
for four or five weeks, or breakage will
ensue. When they are being laid they
should be placed on laths of wood or on
dry sand; they should never be allowed
on cold or damp floors.
Should the cider be relatively poor in
sugar, or if it has been fermented too far,
about 1 ounce of powdered loaf sugar
can be added to each bottle, or else a
measure of sugar syrup before pouring
in the cider.
Imitation Cider. —
I. — A formula for an imitation cider is
as follows:
Rain water 100 gallons
Honey, unstrained . . 6 gallons
Catechu, powdered. 3 ounces
Alum, powdered. ... 5 ounces
Yeast (brewer's pref-
erably) 2 pints
Mix and put in a warm place to fer-
ment. Let ferment for about 15 days;
then add the following, stirring well in:
Bitter almonds, crushed 8 ounces
Cloves 8 ounces
Let stand 24 hours, add two or three
gallons of good whiskey, and rack off into
clean casks. Bung tightly, let stand 48
hours, then bottle. If a higher color is
desired use caramel sufficient to pro-
duce the correct tinge. If honey is not
obtainable, use sugar-house molasses
instead, but honey is preferable.
II. — The following, when properly
prepared, makes a passable substitute
for cider, and a very pleasant drink:
Catechu, powdered. 3 parts
Alum, powdered. . . 5 parts
Honey 640 parts
Water 12,800 parts
Yeast 32 parts
Dissolve the catechu, alum, and honey
in the water, add the yeast, and put in
some warm place to ferment. The con-
tainer should be filled to the square open-
ing, made by sawing out five or six inches
of the center of a stave, and the spume
skimmed off daily as it arises. In cooler
weather from 2 weeks to 18 days will be
required for thorough fermentation. In
warmer weather from 12 to 13 days will
be sufficient. When fermentation is com-
plete add the following solution:
Oil of bitter almonds 1 part
Oil of clover 1 part
Caramel 32 parts
Alcohol 192 parts
The alcohol may be replaced by twice
its volume of good bourbon whiskey. A
much cheaper, but correspondingly poor
substitute for the above may be made as
follows:
Twenty-five gallons of soft water, 2
pounds tartaric acid, 25 pounds of brown
sugar, and 1 pint of yeast are allowed to
stand in a warm place, in a clean cask
with the bung out, for 24 hours. Then
bung up the cask, after adding 3 gallons
of whiskey, and let stand for 48 hours,
after which the liquor is ready for use.
CIDER VINEGAR:
See Vinegar.
Cigars
Cigar Sizes and Colors. — Cigars are
named according to their color and
shape. A dead-black cigar, for instance,
is an "Oscuro," a very dark-brown one
is a "Colorado," a medium brown is a
"Colorado Claro," and a yellowish light
brown is a "Claro." Most smokers
know the names of the shades from
"Claro" to "Colorado," and that is as
far as most of them need to know. As to
the shapes, a "Napoleon" is the biggest
of all cigars — being 7 inches long; a "Per-
fecto" swells in the middle and tapers
down to a very small head at the lighting
end; a "Panatela" is a thin, straight, up-
and-down cigar without the graceful
curve of the "Perfecto"; a "Conchas" is
very short and fat, and a "Londres" is
shaped like a "Perfecto" except that it
does not taper to so small a head at the
lighting end. A "Reina Victoria" is a
"Londres" that comes packed in a rib-
bon-tied bundle of 50 pieces, instead of
in the usual four layers of 13, 12, 13 and
12.
How to Keep Cigars. — Cigars kept in
a case are influenced every time the case
is opened. Whatever of taint there may
be in the atmosphere rushes into the
case, and is finally taken up by the cigars.
Even though the cigars have the appear-
ance of freshness, it is not the original
freshness in which they were received
from the factory. They have been dry,
or comparatively so, and have absorbed
more moisture than has been put in the
case, and it matters not what that mois-
ture may be, it can never restore the
flavor that was lost during the drying-out
process.
After all, it is a comparatively simple
matter to take good care of cigars. All
that is necessary is a comparatively air-
tight, zinc-lined chest. This should be
CIGARS— CLARET PUNCH
183
behind the counter in a place where the
temperature is even. When a customer
calls for a cigar the dealer takes the box
out of the chest, serves his customer, and
then puts the box back again. The box
being opened for a moment the cigars are
not perceptibly affected. The cigars in
the close, heavy chest are always safe
from atmospheric influences, as the boxes
are closed, and the chest is open but a
moment, while the dealer is taking out a
box from which to serve his customer.
Some of the best dealers have either a
large chest or a cool vault in which they
keep their stock, taking out from time to
time whatever they need for use. Some
have a number of small chests, in which
they keep different brands, so as to avoid
opening and closing one particular chest
so often.
It may be said that it is only the high-
er priced cigars that need special care in
handling, although the cheaper grades
are not to be handled carelessly. The
Havana cigars are more susceptible to
change, for there is a delicacy of flavor to
be preserved that is never present in the
cheaper grades of cigars.
Every dealer must, of course, make a
display in his show case, but he need not
serve his patrons with these cigars. The
shrinkage in value of the cigars in the
case is merely a business proposition of
profit and loss.
Cigar Flavoring. — I. — Macerate 2
ounces of cinnamon and 4 ounces of
tonka beans, ground fine, in 1 quart of
rum.
II. — Moisten ordinary cigars with a
strong tincture of cascarilla, to which a
little gum benzoin and storax may be
added. Some persons add a small quan-
tity of camphor or oil of cloves or cassia.
III. — Tincture of valerian. 4 drachms
Butyric aldehyde. . . 4 drachms
Nitrous ether 1 drachm
Tincture vanilla. ... 2 drachms
Alcohol 5 ounces
Water enough to
make 16 ounces
IV. — Extract vanilla 4 ounces
Alcohol $ gallon
Jamaica rum £ gallon
Tincture valerian. . . 8 ounces
Caraway seed 2 ounces
i English valerian root 2 ounces
Bitter orange peel. . . 2 ounces
Tonka beans 4 drachms
Myrrh 16 ounces
Soak the myrrh for 3 days in 6 quarts
of water, add the alcohol, tincture va-
lerian, and extract of vanilla, and after
grinding the other ingredients to a coarse
powder, put all together in a jug and
macerate for 2 weeks, occasionally shak-
ing; lastly, strain.
V.— Into a bottle filled with £ pint of
French brandy put 1J ounces of cascar-
illa bark and 1J ounces of vanilla pre-
viously ground with £ pound of sugar;
carefully close up the flask and distil in a
warm place. After 3 days pour off the
liquid, and add J pint of mastic extract.
The finished cigars are moistened with
this liquid, packed in boxes, and pre-
served from air by a well-closed lid.
They are said to acquire a pleasant flavor
and mild strength through this treat-
ment.
Cigar Spots. — The speckled appear-
ance of certain wrappers is due to the
work of a species of fungus that attacks
the growing tobacco. In a certain dis-
trict of Sumatra, which produces an ex-
ceptionally fine tobacco for wrappers,
the leaves of the plant are commonly
speckled in this way. Several patents
have been obtained for methods of spot-
ting tobacco leaves artificially. A St.
Louis firm uses a solution composed of:
Sodium carbonate 3 parts
Calx chlorinata 1 part
Hot water 8 parts
Dissolve the washing soda in the hot
water, add the chlorinated lime, and
heat the mixture to a boiling tempera-
ture for 3 minutes. When cool, decant
into earthenware or stoneware jugs, cork
tightly, and keep in a cool place. The
corks of jugs not intended for immediate
use should be covered with a piece of
bladder or strong parchment paper, and
tightly tied down to prevent the escape of
gas, and consequent weakening of the
bleaching power of the fluid. The pre-
pared liquor is sprinkled on the tobacco,
the latter being then exposed to light and
air, when, it is said, the disagreeable odor
produced soon disappears.
CINCHONA:
See Wines and Liquors.
CINNAMON ESSENCE:
See Essences and Extracts.
CINNAMON OIL AS AN ANTISEPTIC:
See Antiseptics.
CITRATE OF MAGNESIUM:
See Magnesium Citrate.
CLARET LEMONADE AND CLARET
PUNCH :
See Beverages, under Lemonades.
184
CL A RIFYING— CLEANING PREPARATIONS
CLARIFICATION OF GELATIN AND
GLUE:
See Gelatin.
CLARIFYING.
Clarification is the process by which
any solid particles suspended in a liquid
are either caused to coalesce together or
to adhere to the medium used for clar-
ifying, that they may be removed by fil-
tration (which would previously have
been impossible), so as to render the
liquid clear.
One of the best agents for this purpose
is albumen. When clarifying vegetable
extracts, the albumen which is naturally
present in most plants accomplishes this
purpose easily, provided the vegetable
matter is extracted in the cold, so as to
get as much albumen as possible in solu-
tion.
Egg albumen may also be used. The
effect of albumen may be increased by
the addition of cellulose, in the form of a
fine magma of filtering paper. This has
the further advantage that the subse-
quent filtration is much facilitated.
Suspended particles of gum or pectin
may be removed by cautious precipita-
tion with tannin, of which only an ex-
ceedingly small amount is usually neces-
sary. It combines with the gelatinous
substances better with the aid of heat
than in the cold. There must be no ex-
cess of tannin used.
Another method of clarifying liquids
turbid from particles of gum, albumen,
pectin, etc., is to add to them a definite
quantity of alcohol. This causes the
former substances to separate in more or
less large flakes. The quantity of alco-
hol required varies greatly according to
the nature of the liquid. It should be
determined in each case by an experiment
on a small scale.
Resinous or waxy substances, such as
are occasionally met with in honey, etc.,
may be removed by the addition of bole,
pulped filtering paper, and heating to
boiling.
In each case the clarifying process
may be hastened by making the separat-
ing particles specifically heavier; that is,
by incorporating some heavier sub-
stance, such as talcum, etc., which may
cause the flocculi to sink more rapidly,
and to form a compact sediment.
Clarifying powder for alcoholic liquids:
Egg albumen, dry. ... 40 parts
Sugar of milk 40 parts
Starch 20 parts
Reduce them to very fine powder, and
mix thoroughly.
For clarifying liquors, wines, essences,
etc., take for every quart of liquid 75
grains of the above mixture, shake re-
peatedly in the course of a few days, the
mixture being kept in a warm ' room,
then filter.
Powdered talcum renders the same
service, and has the additional advan-
tage of being entirely insoluble. How-
ever, the above mixture acts more ener-
getically.
CLAY:
Claying Mixture for Forges. — Twenty
parts fire clay; 20 parts cast-iron turn-
ings; 1 part common salt; ^ part sal am-
moniac; all by measure.
The materials should be thoroughly
mixed dry and then wet down to the con-
sistency of common mortar, constantly
stirring the mass as the wetting proceeds.
A rough mold shaped to fit the tuyere
opening, a trowel, and a few minutes'
time are all that are needed to complete
the successful claying of the forge. This
mixture dries hard and when glazed by
the fire will last.
Plastic Modeling Clay. — A perma-
nently plastic clay can be obtained by
first mixing it with glycerine, turpen-
tine, or similar bodies, and then adding
vaseline or petroleum residues rich in
vaseline. The proportion of clay to the
vaseline varies according to the desired
consistency of the product, the admix-
ture of vaseline varying from 10 to 50
per cent. It is obvious that the hardness
of the material decreases with the
amount of vaseline added, so that the one
richest in vaseline will be the softest. By
the use of various varieties of clay and
the suitable choice of admixtures, the
plasticity, as well as the color of the mass,
may be varied.
Cleaning Preparations and
Methods
(See also Soaps, Polishes, and House-
hold Formulas).
TO REMOVE STAINS FROM THE
HANDS:
Removal of Aniline -Dye Stains from
the Skin. — Rub the stained skin with
a pinch of slightly moistened red crys-
tals of chromic trioxide until a distinct
sensation of warmth announces the de-
struction of the dye stuff by oxidation
and an incipient irritation of the skin.
Then rinse with soap and water. A sin-
gle application usually suffices to remove
CLEANING PREPARATIONS AND METHODS
185
the stain. It is hardly necessary to call
attention to the poisonousness and strong
caustic action of chromic trioxide; but
only moderate caution is required to
avoid evil effects.
Pyrogallic-Acid Stains on the Fingers
(see also Photography). — Pyro stains may
be prevented fairly well by rubbing in a
little wool fat before beginning work. A
very effective way of eliminating devel-
oper stains is to dip the ringer tips occa-
sionally during development into the
clearing bath. It is best to use the
clearing bath, with ample friction, be-
fore resorting to soap, as the latter seems
to have a fixing effect upon the stain.
Lemon peel is useful for removing pyro
stains, and so are the ammonium per-
sulphate reducer and the thiocarbamide
clearer.
To Clean Very Soiled Hands.— In the
morning wash in warm water, using a
stiff brush, and apply glycerine. Re-
peat the application two or three times
during the day, washing and brushing an
hour or so afterwards, or apply a warm
solution of soda or potash, and wash in
warm water, using a stiff brush as before.
Finally, rub the hands with pumice or
infusorial earth. There are soaps made
especially for this purpose, similar to
those for use on woodwork, etc., in
which infusorial earth or similar matter
is incorporated.
To Remove Nitric-Acid Stains. — One
plan to avoid stains is to use rubber
finger stalls, or rubber gloves. Nitric-
acid stains can be removed from the
hands by painting the stains with a solu-
tion of permanganate of potash, and
washing off the permanganate with a 5
per cent solution of hydrochloric (muri-
atic) acid. After this wash the hands
with pure castile soap. Any soap that
roughens the skin should be avoided at
all times. Castile soap is the best to
keep the skin in good condition.
CLEANING GILDED ARTICLES:
To Clean Gilt Frames and Gilded Sur-
faces Generally. — Dip a soft brush in
alcohol to which a few drops of ammonia
water has been added, and with it go
over the surface. Do not rub — at least,
not roughly, or harshly. In the course
of five minutes the dirt will have become
soft, and easy of removal. Then go over
the surface again gently with the same or
a similar brush dipped in rain water.
Now lay the damp article in the sunlight
to dry. If there is no sunlight, place it
near a warm (but not hot} stove, and
let dry completely. In order to avoid
streaks, take care that the position of the
article, during the drying, is not exactly
vertical.
To Clean Fire-Gilt Articles.— Fire-gilt
articles are cleaned, according to their
condition, with water, diluted hydro-
chloric acid, ammonia, or potash solu-
tion. If hydrochloric acid is employed
thorough dilution with water is especially
necessary. The acidity should hardly
be noticeable on the tongue.
To clean gilt articles, such as gold
moldings, etc., when they have become
tarnished or covered with flyspecks, etc.,
rub them slowly with an onion cut in half
and dipped in rectified alcohol, and wash
off lightly with a moist soft sponge after
about 2 hours.
Cleaning Gilded and Polychromed
Work on Altars. — To clean bright gold
a fine little sponge is used which is
moistened but lightly with tartaric acid
and passed over the gilding. Next go
over the gilt work with a small sponge
saturated with alcohol to remove all dirt.
For matt gilding, use only a white flannel
dipped in lye, and carefully wipe off the
dead gold with this, drying next with a
fine linen rag. To clean polychromed
work sponge with a lye of rain water,
1,000 parts, and calcined potash, 68
parts, and immediately wash off with a
clean sponge and water, so that the lye
does not attack the paint too much.
SPOT AND STAIN REMOVERS:
To Remove Aniline Stains. —
I. — Sodium nitrate 7 grains
Diluted sulphuric acid 15 grains
Water 1 ounce
Let the mixture stand a day or two
before using. Apply to the spot with a
sponge, and rinse the goods with plenty
of water.
II. — An excellent medium for the re-
moval of aniline stains, which are often
very stubborn, has been found to be
liquid opodeldoc. After its use the
stains are said to disappear at once and
entirely.
Cleansing Fluids. — A spot remover is
made as follows:
I. — Saponine 7 parts
Water 130 parts
Alcohol 70 parts
Benzine. ... % 1,788 parts
Oil mirbane 5 parts
II. — Benzene (benzol).. 89 parts
Ascetic ether 10 parts
Pear oil 1 part
This yields an effective grease eradi-
cator, of an agreeable odor.
186
CLEANING PREPARATIONS AND METHODS
III.— To Remove Stains of Sulphate of
copper, or of salts of mercury, silver, or
gold from the hands, etc., wash them first
with a dilute solution either of ammonia,
iodide, bromide, or cyanide of potassium,
and then with plenty of water; if the
stains are old ones they should first be
rubbed with the strongest acetic acid
and then treated as above.
Removal of Picric-Acid Stains. — I. —
Recent stains of picric acid may be re-
moved readily if the stain is covered with
a layer of magnesium carbonate, the car-
bonate moistened with a little water to
form a paste, and the paste then rubbed
over the spot.
II. — Apply a solution of
Boric acid 4 parts
Sodium benzoate. ... 1 part
Water 100 parts
III. — Dr. Prieur, of Besan9on, recom-
mends lithium carbonate for the removal
of picric-acid stains from the skin or
from linen. The method of using it is
simply to lay a small pinch on the stain,
and moisten the latter with water. Fresh
stains disappear almost instantly, and
old ones in a minute or two.
To Remove Finger Marks from Books,
etc. — I. — Pour benzol (not benzine or
gasoline, but Merck's "c. p." crystalliz-
able) on calcined magnesia until it be-
comes a crumbling mass, and apply this
to the spot, rubbing it in lightly, with the
tip of the finger. When the benzol
evaporates, brush off. Any dirt that re-
mains can be removed by using a piece
of soft rubber.
II. — If the foregoing fails (which it
sometimes, though rarely, does), try the
following: Make a hot solution of sodium
hydrate in distilled water, of strength of
from 3 per cent to 5 per cent, according
to the age, etc., of the stain. Have pre-
pared some bits of heavy blotting paper
somewhat larger than the spot to be re-
moved; also, a blotting pad, or several
pieces of heavy blotting paper. Lay the
spiled page face downward on the blot-
ting pad, then, saturating one of the bits
of blotter with the hot sodium hydrate
solution, put it on the stain and go over
it with a hot smoothing iron. If one ap-
plication does not remove all the grease
or stain, repeat the operation. Then
saturate another bit of blotting paper with
a 4 per cent or 5 per cent solution of hy-
drochloric acid in distilled water, apply
it to the place, and pass the iron over it
to neutralize the strong alkali. This process
will instantly restore any faded writing
or printing, and make the paper bright
and fresh again.
Glycerine as a Detergent. — For cer-
tain kinds of obstinate spots (such as
coffee and chocolate, for instance) there
is no better detergent than glycerine,
especially for fabrics with delicate colors.
Apply the glycerine to the spot, with a
sponge or otherwise, let stand a min-
ute or so, then wash off with water or
alcohol. Hot glycerine is even more
efficient than cold.
CLEANING SKINS AND LEATHER:
See also Leather.
To Clean Colored Leather. — Pour car-
bon bisulphide on non-vulcanized gutta-
percha, and allow it to stand about 24
hours. After shaking actively add more
gutta-percha gradually until the solution
becomes of gelatinous consistency.
This mixture is applied in suitable quan-
tity to oil-stained, colored leather and
allowed to dry two or three hours. The
subsequent operation consists merely in
removing the coat of gutta-percha from
the surface of the leather — that is, rub-
bing it with the fingers, and rolling it off
the surface.
The color is not injured in the least by
the sulphuret of carbon; only those
leathers on which a dressing containing
starch has been used look a little lighter
in color, but the better class of leathers
are not so dressed. The dry gutta-per-
cha can be redissolved in sulphuret of
carbon and used over again.
To Clean Skins Used for Polishing
Purposes. — First beat them thoroughly
to get rid of dust, then go over the surface
on both sides with a piece of good white
soap and lay them in warm water in
which has been put a little soda. Let
them lie here for 2 hours, then wash them
in plenty of tepid water, rubbing them
vigorously until perfectly clean. This
bath should also be made alkaline with
soda. The skins are finally rinsed in
warm water, and dried quickly. Cold
water must be avoided at all stages of the
cleansing process, as it has a tendency to
shrink and harden the skins.
The best way to clean a chamois skin
is to wash and rinse it out in clean water
immediately after use, but this practice is
apt to be neglected so that the skin be-
comes saturated with dirt and grime.
To clean it, first thoroughly soak in
clean, soft water. Then, after soaping
it and rolling it into a compact wad, beat
with a small round stick — a buggy spoke,
say — turning the wad over repeatedly,
and keeping it well wet and soaped.
This should suffice to loosen the dirt.
Then rinse in clean water until the skin
CLEANING PREPARATIONS AND METHODS
187
is clean. As wringing by hand is apt to
injure the chamois skin, it is advisable to
use a small clothes wringer. Before
using the skin again rinse it in clear water
to which a little pulverized
alum has
been added.
STRAW-HAT RENOVATION:
To Renovate Straw Hats.— I. — Hats
made of natural (uncolored) straw, which
have become soiled by wear, may be
cleaned by thoroughly sponging with a
weak solution of tartaric acid in water,
followed by water alone. The hat after
being so treated should be fastened by
the rim to a board by means of pins, so
that it will keep its shape in drying.
II. — Sponge the straw with a solution of
By weight
Sodium hyposulphite. 10 parts
Glycerine 5 parts
Alcohol 10 parts
Water 75 parts
Lay aside in a damp place for 24 hours
and then apply
By weight
Citric acid 2 parts
Alcohol 10 parts
Water 90 parts
Press with a moderately hot iron, after
stiffening with weak gum water, if neces-
sary.
III. — If the hat has become much dark-
ened in tint by wear the fumes of burning
sulphur may be employed. The material
should be first cleaned by thoroughly
sponging with an aqueous solution of
potassium carbonate, followed by a sim-
ilar application of water, and it is then
suspended over the sulphur fumes.
These are generated by placing in a metal
or earthen dish, so mounted as to keep the
heat from setting fire to anything beneath,
some brimstone (roll sulphur), and
sprinkling over it some live coals to start
combustion. The operation is con-
ducted in a deep box or barrel, the dish
of burning sulphur being placed at the
bottom, and the article to be bleached
being suspended from a string stretched
across the top. A cover not fitting so
tightly as to exclude all air is placed over
it, and the apparatus allowed to stand
for a few hours.
Hats so treated will require to be stif-
fened by the application of a little gum
water, and pressed on a block with a
hot iron to bring them back into shape.
Waterproof Stiffening for Straw Hats.
— If a waterproof stiffening is required
use one of the varnishes for which for-
mulas follow:
I. — Copal 450 parts
Sandarac 75 parts
Venice turpentine 40 parts
Castor oil 5 parts
Alcohol 800 parts
II.— Shellac 500 parts
Sandarac 175 parts
Venice turpentine 50 parts
Castor oil 15 parts
Alcohol 2,000 parts
III.— Shellac 750 parts
Rosin 150 parts
Venice turpentine 150 parts
Castor oil 20 parts
Alcohol 2,500 parts
How to Clean a Panama Hat. — Scrub
with castile soap and warm water, a
nail brush being used as an aid to get
the dirt away. The hat is then placed in
the hot sun to dry and in the course of
two or three hours is ready for use. It
will not only be as clean as when new,
but it will retain its shape admirably.
The cleaned hat will be a trifle stiff at
first, but will soon grow supple under
wear.
A little glycerine added to the rinsing
water entirely prevents the stiffness and
brittleness acquired by some hats in dry-
ing, while a little ammonia in the wash-
ing water materially assists in the scrub-
bing process. Ivory, or, in fact, any
good white soap, will answer as well as
castile for the purpose. It is well to
rinse a second time, adding the glycerine
to the water used the second time. Im-
merse the hat completely in the rinse
water, moving it about to get rid of
traces of the dirty water. When the hat
has been thoroughly rinsed, press out the
surplus water, using a Turkish bath towel
for the purpose, and let it rest on the
towel when drying.
PAINT, VARNISH, AND ENAMEL RE-
MOVERS:
To Remove Old Oil, Paint, or Varnish
Coats. — I. — Apply a mixture of about 5
parts of potassium silicate (water glass,
36 per cent), about 1 part of soda lye (40
per cent), and 1 part of ammonia. The
composition dissolves the old varnish
coat, as well as the paint, down to the
bottom. The varnish coatings which
are to be removed may be brushed off or
left for days in a hardened state. Upon
being thoroughly moistened with water
the old varnish may be readily washed
off, the lacquer as well as the oil paint
coming off completely. The ammonia
otherwise employed dissolves the var-
nish, but not the paint,
188
CLEANING PREPARATIONS AND METHODS
II. — Apply a mixture of 1 part oil of
turpentine and 2 parts of ammonia.
This is effective, even if the coatings
withstand the strongest lye. The two
liquids are shaken in a bottle until they
mix like milk. The mixture is applied
to the coating with a little oakum; after a
few minutes the old paint can be wiped
off.
To Clean Brushes and Vessels of Dry
Paint (see also Brushes and Paints). —
The cleaning o£ the brushes and ves-
sels in which the varnish or oil paint had
dried is usually done by boiling with
soda solution. This frequently spoils the
brushes or cracks the vessels if of glass;
besides, the process is rather slow and
dirty. A much more suitable remedy is
amyl acetate, which is a liquid with a
pleasant odor of fruit drops, used mainly
for dissolving and cementing celluloid.
If amyl acetate is poured over a paint
brush the varnish or hardened paint dis-
solves almost immediately and the brush
is again rendered serviceable at once. If
necessary, the process is repeated. For
cleaning vessels shake the liquid about in
them, which softens the paint so that it
can be readily removed with paper. In
this manner much labor can be saved.
The amyl acetate can be easily removed
from the brushes, etc., by alcohol or oil
of turpentine.
Varnish and Paint Remover. — Dis-
solve 20 parts of caustic soda (98 per
cent) in 100 parts of water, mix the solu-
tion with 20 parts of mineral oil, and stir
in a kettle provided with a mechanical
stirrer, until the emulsion is complete.
Now add, with stirring, 20 parts of saw-
dust and pass the whole through a paint
mill to obtain a uniform intermixture.
Apply the paste moist.
To Remove Varnish from Metal.— To
remove old varnish from metals, it suf-
fices to dip the articles in equal parts of
ammonia and alcohol (95 per cent).
To Remove Water Stains from Var-
nished Furniture. — Pour olive oil into a
dish and scrape a little white wax into it.
This mixture should be heated until
the wax melts and rubbed sparingly on
the stains. Finally, rub the surface with
a linen rag until it is restored to bril-
liancy.
To Remove Paint, Varnish, etc., from
Wood. — Varnish, paint, etc., no matter
how old and hard, may be softened in a
few minutes so that they can be easily
scraped off, by applying the following
mixture;
Water glass 5 parts
Soda lye, 40° B. (27
per cent) 1 part
Ammonia water 1 part
Mix.
Removing Varnish, etc. — A patent
has been taken out in England for a
liquid for removing varnish, lacquer, tar,
and paint. The composition is made by
mixing 4 ounces of benzol, 3 ounces of
fusel oil, and 1 ounce of alcohol. It is
stated by the inventor that this mixture,
if applied to a painted or varnished sur-
face, will make the surface quite clean in
less than 10 minutes, and that a paint-
soaked brush " as hard as iron " can be
made as soft and pliable as new by
simply soaking for an hour or so in the
mixture.
To Remove Enamel and Tin Solder. —
Pour enough of oil of vitriol (concen-
trated sulphuric acid) over powdered
fluorspar in an earthen or lead vessel, so
as just to cover the parts whereby hydro-
fluoric acid is generated. For use, dip
the article suspended on a wire into the
liquid until the enamel or the tin is eaten
away or dissolved, which does not injure
the articles in any way. If heated, the
liquid acts more rapidly. The work
should always be conducted in the open
air, and care should be taken not to in-
hale the fumes, which are highly inju-
rious to the health, and not to get any
liquid on the skin, as hydrofluoric acid
is one of the most dangerous poisons.
Hydrofluoric acid must be kept in earth-
en or leaden vessels, as it destroys glass.
Removing Paint and Varnish from
Wood. — The following compound is
given as one which will clean paint or
varnish from wood or stone without in-
juring the material:
Flour or wood pulp. . 385 parts
Hydrochloric acid. . . 450 parts
Bleaching powder.. . 160 parts
Turpentine 5 parts
This mixture is applied to the surface
and left on for some time. It is then
brushed off, and brings the paint away
with it. It keeps moist quite long enough
to be easily removed after it has acted.
Paste for Removing Old Paint or
Varnish Coats. —
I. — Sodium hydrate 5 parts
Soluble soda glass ... 3 parts
Flour paste 6 parts
Water 4 parts
II. — Soap 10 parts
Potassium hydrate. . . 7 parts
Potassium silicate. ... 2 parts
CLEANING PREPARATIONS AND METHODS
189
To Remove Old Enamel.— Lay the
articles horizontally in a vessel contain-
ing a concentrated solution of alum and
boil them. The solution should be just
sufficient to cover the pieces. In 20 or
25 minutes the old enamel will fall into
dust, and the article can be polished with
emery. If narrow and deep vessels are
used the operation will require more
time.
INK ERADICATORS:
Two-Solution Ink Remover. —
I. — (a) Citric acid 1 part
Concentrated solu-
tion of borax ... 2 parts
Distilled water. ... 16 parts
Dissolve the acid in the water, add the
borax solution, and mix by agitation.
(fc) Chloride of lime. . . 3 parts
Water 16 parts
Concentrated bor-
ax solution ..... 2 parts
Add the chloride of lime to the water,
shake well and set aside for a week, then
decant the clear liquid and to it add the
borax solution.
For use, saturate the spot with solu-
tion (a), apply a blotter to take off the ex-
cess of liquid, then apply solution (6).
When the stain has disappeared, apply
the blotter and wet the spot with clean
water; finally dry between two sheets of
blotting paper.
II. — (a) Mix, in equal parts, potassium
chloride, potassium hypochlorite, and oil
of peppermint. (&) Sodium chloride,
hydrochloric acid and water, in equal
parts.
Wet the spot with (a), let dry, then
brush it overlightly with (6), and rinse in
clear water.
A good single mixture which will an-
swer for most inks is made by mixing
citric acid and alum in equal parts. If
desired to vend in a liquid form add an
equal part of water. In use, the powder
is spread well over the spot and (if on
cloth or woven fabrics) well rubbed in
with the fingers. A few drops of water
are then added, and also rubbed in. A
final rinsing with water completes the
process.
Ink Erasers. — I. — Inks made with nut-
galls and copperas can be removed by
using a moderately concentrated solu-
tion of oxalic acid, followed by use of
pure water and frequent drying with
clean blotting paper. Most other black
inks are erased by use of a weak solution
of chlorinated lime, followed by dilute
acetic acid and water, with frequent dry-
ing with blotters. Malachite green ink
is bleached by ammonia water; silver
inks by potassium cyanide or sodium
hyposulphite. Some aniline colors are
easily removed by alcohol, and nearly all
by chlorinated lime, followed by diluted
acetic acid or vinegar. In all cases
apply the substances with camel's-hair
brushes or feathers, and allow them to
remain no longer than necessary, after
which rinse well with water and dry with
blotting paper.
II. — Citric acid 1 part
Water, distilled 10 parts
Concentrated solution
of borax 2 parts
Dissolve the citric acid in the water
and add the borax. Apply to the paper
with a delicate camel's-hair pencil, re-
moving any excess of water with a blot-
ter. A mixture of oxalic, citric, and tar-
taric acids, in equal parts, dissolved in
just enough water to give a clean solution,
acts energetically on most inks.
Erasing Powder or Pounce. — Alum, 1
part; amber, 1 part; sulphur, 1 part;
saltpeter, 1 part. Mix well together and
keep in a glass bottle. If a little of
this powder is placed on an ink spot or
fresh writing, rubbing very lightly with a
clean linen rag, the spot or the writing
will disappear at once.
Removing Ink Stains. — I. — The ma-
terial requiring treatment should first be
soaked in clean, warm water, the super-
fluous moisture removed, and the fabric
spread over a clean cloth. Now allow
a few minims of liquor ammonia? fortis,
specific gravity 0.891, to drop on the ink
spot, then saturate a tiny tuft of absorbent
cotton-wool with acidum phosphoricum
dilutum, B. P., and apply repeatedly and
with firm pressure over the stain; repeat
the procedure two or three times, and
finally rinse well in warm water, after-
wards drying in the sun, when every
trace of ink will have vanished. This
method is equally reliable for old and
fresh ink stains, is rapid in action, and
will not injure the most delicate fabric.
II. — To remove ink spots the fabric
is soaked in warm water, then it is
squeezed out and spread upon a clean
piece of linen. Now apply a few drops
of liquid ammonia of a specific gravitj'
of 0.891 to the spot, and dab it next
with a wad of cotton which has been
saturated with dilute phosphoric acid.
After repeating the process several times
and drying the piece in the sun, the ink
spot will have disappeared without leav-
ing the slightest trace.
190
CLEANING PREPARATIONS AND METHODS
III. — Ink spots may be removed by
the following mixture:
Oxalic acid 10 parts
Stannic chloride .... 2 parts
Acetic acid 5 parts
Water to make 500 parts
Mix.
IV. — The customary method of cleans-
ing ink spots is to use oxalic acid. Thick
blotting paper is soaked in a concen-
trated solution and dried. It is then laid
immediately on the blot, and in many
instances will take the latter out without
leaving a trace behind. In more stub-
born cases the cloth is dipped in boiling
water and rubbed with crystals of oxalic
acid, after which it is soaked in a weak
solution of chloride of lime — say 1 ounce
to a quart of water. Under such circum-
stances the linen should be thoroughly
rinsed in several waters afterwards.
Oxalic acid is undesirable for certain
fabrics because it removes the color.
V. — Here is a more harmless method:
Equal parts of cream of tartar and citric
acid, powdered fine, and mixed together.
This forms the " salts of lemon " sold by
druggists. Procure a hot dinner plate,
lay the part stained in the plate, and
moisten with hot water; next rub in the
above powder with the bowl of a spoon
until the stains disappear; then rinse in
clean water and dry.
To Remove Red (Aniline) Ink.—
Stains of red anilines, except eosine, are
at once removed by moistening with
alcohol of 94 per cent, acidulated with
acetic acid. Eosine does not disappear
so easily. The amount of acetic acid to
be used is ascertained by adding it, drop
by drop, to the alcohol, testing the
mixture from time to time, until when
dropped on the stain, the latter at once
disappears.
CLEANING OF WALLS, CEILINGS, AND
WALL PAPER:
See also Household Formulas.
To Renovate Brick Walls.— Dissolve
glue in water in the proportion of 1 ounce
of glue to every gallon of water; add,
while hot, a piece of alum the size of a
hen's egg, £ pound Venetian red, and 1
pound Spanish brown. Add more water
if too dark; more red and brown if too
light.
Cleaning Painted Doors, Walls, etc. —
The following recipe is designed for
painted objects that are much soiled.
Simmer gently on the fire, stirring con-
stantly, 30 parts, by weight, of pulverized
borax, and 450 parts of brown soap of
good quality, cut in small pieces, in 3,000
parts of water. The liquid is applied by
means of flannel and rinsed off at once
with pure water.
To Remove Aniline Stains from Ceil-
ings, etc. — In renewing ceilings, the old
aniline color stains are often very annoy-
ing, as they penetrate the new coating.
Painting over with shellac or oil paint
will bring relief, but other drawbacks
appear. A very practical remedy is to
place a tin vessel on the floor of the room,
and to burn a quantity of sulphur in it
after the doors and windows of the room
have been closed. The sulphur vapors
destroy the aniline stains, which disap-
pear entirely.
Old Ceilings. — In dealing with old
ceilings the distemper must be washed
off down to the plaster face, all cracks
raked out and stopped with putty (plas-
ter of Paris and distemper mixed), and
the whole rubbed smooth with pumice
stone and water; stained parts should be
painted with oil color, and the whole
distempered. If old ceilings are in bad
condition it is desirable that they should
be lined with paper, which should have
a coat of weak size before being distem-
pered.
Oil Stains on Wall Paper.— Make a
medium thick paste of pipe clay and
water, applying it carefully flat upon the
oil stain, but avoiding all friction. The
paste is allowed to remain 10 to 12 hours,
after which time it is very carefully re-
moved with a soft rag. In many cases a
repeated action will be necessary until
the purpose desired is fully reached.
Finally, however, this will be obtained
without blurring or destroying the de-
sign of the wall paper, unless it be of the
cheapest variety. In the case of a light,
delicate paper, the paste should be com-
posed of magnesia and benzine.
To Clean Painted Walls.— A simple
method is to put a little aqua ammonia
in moderately warm water, dampen a
flannel with it, and gently wipe over the
painted surface. No scrubbing is nec-
essary.
Treatment of Whitewashed Walls.—
It is suggested that whitewashed walls
which it is desired to paper, with a view
to preventing peeling, should be treated
with water, after which the scraper
should be vigorously used. If the white-
•wash has been thoroughly soaked it can
easily be removed with the scraper.
Care should be taken that every part of
the wall is well scraped.
CLEANING PREPARATIONS AND METHODS
191
Cleaning Wall Paper. — I. — To clean
wall paper the dust should first be re-
moved by lightly brushing, preferably
with a feather duster, and the surface
then gently rubbed with slices of moder-
ately stale bread, the discolored surface
of the bread being removed from time
to time, so as to expose a fresh portion for
use. Care should be taken to avoid
scratching the paper with the crust of the
bread, and the rubbing should be in one
direction, the surface being systematically
gone over, as in painting, to avoid the
production of streaks.
II. — Mix 4 ounces of powdered pumice
with 1 quart of flour, and with the aid of
water make a stiff dough. Form the
dough into rolls 2 inches in diameter and
6 inches long; sew each roll separately
in a cotton cloth, then boil for 40 or 50
minutes, so as to render the mass firm.
Allow to stand for several hours, remove
the crust, and they are ready for use.
III. — Bread will clean paper; but un-
less it is properly used the job will be a
very tedious one. Select a " tin " loaf at
least two days old. Cut off the crust at
one end, and rub down the paper, com-
mencing at the top. Do not rub the
bread backwards and forwards, but in
single strokes. When the end gets dirty
take a very sharp knife and pare off a
thin layer; then proceed as before.
It is well to niake sure that the walls
are quite dry before using the bread, or it
may smear the pattern. If the room is
furnished it will, of course, be necessary
to place cloths around the room to catch
the crumbs.
IV. — A preparation for cleansing wall
paper that often proves much more effec-
tual than ordinary bread, especially when
the paper is very dirty, is made by mix-
ing § dough and ^ plaster of Paris. This
should be made a day before it is needed
for use, and should be very gently baked.
If there are any grease spots they
should be removed by holding a hot
flatiron against a piece of blotting paper
placed over them. If this fails, a little
fuller's earth or pipe clay should be made
into a paste with water, and this should
then be carefully plastered over the
grease spots and allowed to remain till
quite dry, when it will be found to have
absorbed the grease.
V. — Mix together 1 pound each of rye
flour and white flour into a dough,
which is partially cooked and the crust
removed. To this 1 ounce common
salt and £ ounce of powdered naph-
thaline are added, and finally 1 ounce of
corn meal, and | ounce of burnt umber.
The composition is formed into a mass.
of the proper size to be grasped in the
hand, and in use it should be drawn in
one direction over the surface to be
cleaned.
VI. — Procure a soft, flat sponge, being
careful that there are no hard or gritty
places in it, then get a bucket of new,
clean, dry, wheat bran. Hold the
sponge flat side up, and put a handful of
bran on it, then quickly turn against the
wall, and rub the wall gently and care-
fully with it; then repeat the operation.
Hold a large pan or spread down a drip
cloth to catch the bran as it falls, but
never use the same bran twice. Still
another way is to use Canton flannel in
strips a foot wide and about 3 yards
long. Roll a strip around a stick 1
inch thick and 10 inches long, so as to
have the ends of the stick covered, with
the nap of the cloth outside. As the
cloth gets soiled, unroll the soiled part
and roll it up with the soiled face inside.
In this way one can change places on
the cloth when soiled and use the whole
face of the cloth. To take out a grease
spot requires care. First, take several
thicknesses of brown wrapping paper
and make a pad, place it against the
grease spot, and hold a hot flatiron
against it to draw out the grease, which
will soak into the brown paper. Be
careful to have enough layers of brown
paper to keep the iron from scorching or
discoloring the wall paper. If the first
application does not take out nearly all
the grease, repeat with clean brown
paper or a blotting pad Then take an
ounce vial of washed sulphuric ether and
a soft, fine, clean sponge, and sponge the
spot carefully until all the grease disap-
pears. Do not wipe the place with the
sponge and ether, but dab the sponge
carefully against the place. A small
quantity of ether is advised, as it is very
inflammable.
CLOTHES AND FABRIC CLEANERS:
Soaps for Clothing and Fabrics. —
When the fabric is washable and the
color fast, ordinary soap and water are
sufficient for removing grease and the or-
dinarily attendant dirt; but special soaps
are made which may possibly be more
effectual.
I. — Powdered borax. ... 30 parts
Extract of soap bark 30 parts
Ox gall (fresh) 120 parts
Castile soap 450 parts
First make the soap-bark extract by
boiling the crushed bark in water until
it has assumed a dark color, then strain
the liquid into an evaporating dish, and
192
CLEANING PREPARATIONS AND METHODS
by the aid of heat evaporate it to a solid
extract; then powder and mix it with the
borax and the ox gall. Melt the castile
soap by adding a small quantity of water
and warming, then add the other ingre-
dients and mix well.
About 100 parts of soap bark make 20
parts of extract.
II. — Castile soap 2 pounds
Potassium carbonate. . * pound
Camphor £ ounce
Alcohol | ounce
Ammonia water £ ounce
Hot water, £ pint, or sufficient.
Dissolve the potassium carbonate in
the water, add the soap previously re-
duced to thin shavings, keep warm over
a water bath, stirring occasionally, until
dissolved, adding more water if neces-
sary, and finally, when of a consistence
to become semisolid on cooling, remove
from the fire. When nearly ready to
set, stir in the camphor, previously dis-
solved in the alcohol and the ammonia.
The soap will apparently be quite as
efficacious without the camphor and
ammonia.
If a paste is desired, a potash soap
should be used instead of the castile in
the foregoing formula, and a portion or
all of the water omitted. Soaps made
from potash remain soft, while soda
soaps harden on the evaporation of the
water which they contain when first
made.
A liquid preparation may be obtained,
of course, by the addition of sufficient
water, and some more alcohol would
probably improve it.
Clothes-Cleaning Fluids :
See also Household Formulas.
I. — Borax 1 ounce
Castile soap 1 ounce
Sodium carbonate. . . 3 drachms
Ammonia water 5 ounces
Alcohol 4 ounces
Acetone 4 ounces
Hot water to make. . . 4 pints
Dissolve the borax, sodium bicarbo-
nate, and soap in the hot water, mix the
acetone and alcohol together, unite the
two solutions, and then add the ammonia
water. The addition of a couple of
ounces of rose water will render it some-
what fragrant.
II. — A strong decoction of soap bark,
preserved by the addition of alcohol,
forms a good liquid cleanser for fabrics
of the more delicate sort.
III. — Chloroform. . . .
Ether. .
15 parts
15 parts
Alcohol 120 parts
Decoction of quillaia
bark of 30° .... 4,500 parts
IV. — Acetic ether 10 parts
Amyl acetate 10 parts
Liquid ammonia.. . . 10 parts
Dilute alcohol 70 parts
V. — Another good non-inflammable
spot remover consists of equal parts of
acetone, ammonia, and diluted alcohol.
For use in large quantities carbon tetra-
chloride is suggested.
VI. — Castile soap 4 av. ounces
Water, boiling. ... 32 fluidounces
Dissolve and add:
Water 1 gallon
Ammonia 8 fluidounces
Ether 2 fluidounces
Alcohol 4 fluidounces
To Remove Spots from Tracing Cloth.
— It is best to use benzine, which is ap-
plied by means of a cotton rag. The
benzine also takes off lead-pencil marks,
but does not attack India and other inks.
The places treated with benzine should
subsequently be rubbed with a little
talcum, otherwise it would not be pos-
sible to use the pen on them.
Removal of Paint from Clothing. —
Before paint becomes " dry " it can be
removed from cloth by the liberal appli-
cation of turpentine or benzine. If the
spot is not large, it may be immersed in
the liquid; otherwise, a thick, folded,
absorbent cloth should be placed under
the fabric which has been spotted, and
the liquid sponged on freely enough that
it may soak through, carrying the greasy
matter with it. Some skill in manipu-
lation is requisite to avoid simply spread-
ing the stain and leaving a "ring" to
show how far it has extended.
When benzine is used the operator
must be careful to apply it only in the
absence of light or fire, on account of the
extremely inflammable character of the
vapor.
Varnish stains, when fresh, are treated
in the same way, but the action of the
solvent may possibly not be so complete
on account of the gum rosins present.
When either paint or varnish has
dried, its removal becomes more diffi-
cult. In such case soaking in strong
ammonia water may answer. An emul-
sion, formed by shaking together 2 parts
of ammonia water and 1 of spirits of tur-
pentine, has been recommended.
To Remove Vaseline Stains from
Clothing. — Moisten the spots with a mix-
ture of 1 part of aniline oil, 1 of pow-
CLEANING PREPARATIONS 'AND METHODS
193
dered soap, and 10 of water. After
allowing the cloth to lie for 5 or 10 min-
utes, wash with water.
To Remove Grease Spots from Plush.
— Place fresh bread rolls in the oven,
break them apart as soon as they have
become very hot, and rub the spots with
the crumbs, continuing the work by us-
ing new rolls until all traces of fat have
disappeared from the fabric. Purified
benzine, which does not alter even the
most delicate colors, is also useful for
this purpose.
To Remove Iron Rust from Muslin
and Linen. — Wet with lemon juice and
salt and expose to the sun. If one ap-
plication does not remove the spots, a
second rarely fails to do so.
Keroclean. — This non - inflammable
cleanser removes grease spots from deli-
cate fabrics without injury, cleans all
kinds of jewelry and tableware by re-
moving fats and tarnish, kills moths,
insects, and household pests by suffo-
cation and extermination, and cleans
ironware by removing rust, brassware by
removing grease, copperware by remov-
ing verdigris. It is as clear as water
and will stand any fire test.
Kerosene ............ 1 ounce
Carbon tetrachloride
(commercial) ....... 3 ounces
Oil of citronella ....... 2 drachms
Mix, and filter if necessary. If a
strong odor of carbon bisulphide is de-
tected in the carbon tetrachloride first
shake with powdered charcoal and filter.
To Clean Gold and Silver Lace. —
I. — Alkaline liquids sometimes used for
cleaning gold lace are unsuitable, for
they generally corrode or change the
color of the silk. A solution of soap also
interferes with certain colors, and should
therefore not be employed. Alcohol is
an effectual remedy for restoring the
luster of gold, and it may be used with-
out any danger to the silk, but where the
gold is worn off, and the base metal ex-
posed, it is not so successful in accom-
plishing its purpose, as by removing the
tarnish the base metal becomes more
distinguishable from the fine gold.
II. — To clean silver lace take alabas-
ter in very fine powder, lay the lace upon
a cloth, and with a soft brush take up
some of the powder, and rub both sides
with it till it becomes bright and clean,
afterwards polish with another brush
until all remnants of the powder are re-
moved, and it exhibits a lustrous surface.
III. — Silver laces are put in curdled
milk for 24 hours. A piece of Venetian
soap, or any other good soap, is scraped
and stirred into 2 quarts of rain water.
To this a quantity of honey and fresh ox
gall is added, and the whole is stirred for
some time. If it becomes too thick,
more water is added. This mass is al-
lowed to stand for half a day, and the
wet laces are painted with it. Wrap a
wet cloth around the roller of a mangle,
wind the laces over this, put another wet
cloth on top, and press, wetting and re
peating the application several times.
Next, dip the laces in a clear solution of
equal parts of sugar and gum arabic,
pass them again through the mangle,
between two clean pieces of cloth, and
hang them up to dry thoroughly, attach-
ing a weight to the lower end.
IV. — Soak gold laces over night in
cheap white wine and then proceed as
with silver laces. If the gold is worn off,
put 771 grains of shellac, 31 grains of
dragon's blood, 31 grains of turmeric in
strong alcohol and pour off the ruby-col-
ored fluid. Dip a fine hair pencil in this,
paint the pieces to be renewed, and hold
a hot flatiron a few inches above them,
so that only the laces receive the heat.
V. — Silver embroideries may also be
cleaned by dusting them with Vienna
lime, and brushing off with a velvet
brush.
For gildings the stuff is dipped in a
solution of gold chloride, and this is re-
duced by means of hydrogen in another
vessel.
For silvering, one of the following two
processes may be employed: (a) Paint-
ing with a solution of 1 part of phos-
phorus in 15 parts bisulphide of carbon
and dipping in a solution of nitrate of
silver; (6) dipping for 2 hours in a solu-
tion of nitrate of silver, mixed with am-
monia, then exposing to a current of pure
hydrogen.
To Remove Silver Stains from White
Fabrics. — Moisten the fabric for two or
three minutes with a solution of 5 parts
of bromine and 500 parts of water.
Then rinse in clear water. If a yellow-
ish stain remains, immerse in a solution
of 150 parts of sodium hyposulphite in
500 parts of water, and again rinse in
clear water.
Rust-Spot Remover. — Dissolve potas-
sium bioxalate, 200 parts, in distilled
water, 8,800 parts; add glycerine, 1,000
parts, and filter. Moisten the rust or
ink spots with this solution; let the linen,
etc., lie for 3 hours, rubbing the moist-
ened spots frequently, and then wash well
with water.
194
CLEANING PREPARATIONS AND METHODS
To Clean Quilts. — Quilts are cleaned >
by first washing them in lukewarm soap-
suds, then laying them in cold, soft (rain)
water over night. The next day they
are pressed as dry as possible and hung
up; the ends, in which the moisture re-
mains for a long time, must be wrung
out from time to time.
It is very essential to beat the drying
quilts frequently with a smooth stick or
board. This will have the effect of
swelling up the wadding, and preventing
it from felting. Furthermore, the quilts
should be repeatedly turned during the
drying from right to left and also from
top to bottom. In this manner streaks
are avoided.
Removal of Peruvian-Balsam Stains.
—The fabric is spread out, a piece of
filter paper being placed beneath the
stain, and the latter is then copiously
moistened with chloroform, applied by
means of a tuft of cotton wool. Rubbing
is tc be avoided.
Solution for Removing Nitrate of Sil-
ver Spots. —
Bichloride of mercury 5 parts
Ammonium chloride. 5 parts
Distilled water 40 parts
Apply the mixture to the spots with a
cloth, then rub. This removes, almost
instantaneously, even old stains on linen,
cotton, or wool. Stains on the skin thus
treated become whitish yellow and soon
disappear.
Cleaning Tracings. — Tracing cloth
can be very quickly and easily cleaned,
and pencil marks removed by the use of
benzine, which is applied with a cotton
swab. It may be rubbed freely over the
tracing without injury to lines drawn in
ink, or even in water color, but the pencil
marks and dirt will quickly disappear.
The benzine evaporates almost immedi-
ately, leaving the tracing unharmed.
The surface, however, has been softened
and must be rubbed down with talc, or
some similar substance, before drawing
any more ink lines.
The glaze may be restored to tracing
cloth after using the eraser by rubbing
the roughened surface with a piece of
hard wax from an old phonograph
cylinder. The surface thus produced is
superior to that of the original glaze, as
it is absolutely oil- and water-proof.
Rags for Cleaning and Polishing. —
Immerse flannel rags in a solution or 20
parts of dextrine and 30 parts of oxalic
acid in 20 parts of logwood decoction;
gently wring them out, and sift over them
a mixture of finely powdered tripoli and
pumice stone. Pile the moist rags one
upon another, placing a layer of the pow-
der between each two. Then press, sepa-
rate, and dry.
Cleaning Powder. —
Bole. 500 parts
Magnesium carbo-
nate 50 parts
Mix and make into a paste with a
small quantity of benzine or water; apply
to stains made by fats or oils on the cloth-
ing and when dry remove with a brush.
CLEANING PAINTED AND VAR-
NISHED SURFACES:
Cleaning and Preserving Polished
Woodwork. — Rub down all the polished
work with a very weak alcoholic solu-
tion of shellac (1 to 20 or even 1 to 30)
and linseed oil, spread on a linen cloth.
The rubbing should be firm and hard.
Spots on the polished surface, made by
alcohol, tinctures, water, etc., should be
removed as far as possible and as soon as
possible after they are made, by the use
of boiled linseed oil. Afterwards they
should be rubbed with the shellac and
linseed oil solution on a soft linen rag.
If the spots are due to acids go over them
with a little dilute ammonia water. Ink
spots may be removed with dilute or (if
necessary) concentrated hydrochloric
acid, following its use with dilute ammo-
nia water. In extreme cases it may be
necessary to use the scraper or sandpa-
per, or both.
Oak as a general thing is not polished,
but has a matt surface which can be
washed with water and soap. First all
stains and spots should be gone over
with a sponge or a soft brush and very
weak ammonia water. The carved work
should be freed of dust, etc., by the use
of a stiff brush, and finally washed
with dilute ammonia water. When dry
it should be gone over very thinly and
evenly with brunoline applied with a
soft pencil. If it is desired to give an
especially handsome finish, after the
surface is entirely dry, give it a prelim-
inary coat of brunoline and follow this
on the day after with a second. Bruno-
line may be purchased of any dealer in
paints. To make it, put 70 parts of lin-
seed oil in a very capacious vessel (on
account of the foam that ensues) and add
to it 20 parts of powdered litharge, 20
parts of powdered minium, and 10 parts
of lead acetate, also powdered. Boil
until the oil is completely oxidized, stir-
ring constantly. When completely oxi-
dized the oil is no longer red, but is of a
dark brown color. When it acquires
CLEANING PREPARATIONS AND METHODS
195
this color, remove from the fire, and add
160 parts of turpentine oil, and stir well.
This brunoline serves splendidly for
polishing furniture or other polished
wood.
To Clean Lacquered Goods. — Papier-
mache and lacquered goods may be
cleaned perfectly by rubbing thoroughly
with a paste made of wheat flour and
olive oil. Apply with a bit of soft flan-
nel or old linen, rubbing hard; wipe off
and polish by rubbing with an old silk
handkerchief.
Polish for Varnished Work. — To reno-
vate varnished work make a polish of 1
quart good vinegar, 2 ounces butter of
antimony, 2 ounces alcohol, and 1 quart
oil. Shake well before using.
To Clean Paintings. — To clean an oil
painting, take it out of its frame, lay a
piece of cloth moistened with rain water
on it, and leave it for a while to take up
the dirt from the picture. Several appli-
cations may be required to secure a
perfect result. Then wipe the picture
very gently with a tuft of cotton wool
damped with absolutely pure linseed oil.
Gold frames may be cleaned with a
freshly cut onion; they should be wiped
with a soft sponge wet with rain water a
few hours after the application of the
onion, and finally wiped with a soft rag.
Removing and Preventing Match
Marks. — The unsightly marks made on
a painted surface by striking matches on
it can sometimes be removed by scrub-
bing with soapsuds and a stiff brush.
To prevent match marks dip a bit of
flannel in alboline (liquid vaseline), and
with it go over the surface, rubbing it
hard. A second rubbing with a dry bit
of flannel completes the job. A man
may " strike " a match there all day, and
neither get a light nor make a mark.
GLOVE CLEANERS:
Powder for Cleaning Gloves. —
I. — White bole or pipe
clay 60.0 parts
Orris root (pow-
dered) 30.0 parts
Powdered grain
soap 7.5 parts
Powdered borax. . . 15 . 0 parts
Ammonium chlor-
ide 2.5 parts
Mix the above ingredients. Moisten
the gloves with a damp cloth, rub on the
powder, and brush off after drying.
II. — Four pounds powdered pipeclay,
2 pounds powdered white soap, 1 ounce
| lemon oil, thoroughly rubbed together.
To use, make powder into a thin cream
with water and rub on the gloves while
on the hands. This is a cheaply pro-
duced compound, and does its work ef-
fectually.
Soaps and Pastes for Cleaning Gloves. —
I. — Soft soap 1 ounce
Water 4 ounces
Oil of lemon £ drachm
Precipitated chalk, a
sufficient quantity.
Dissolve the soap in the water, add the
oil, and make into a stiff paste with a
sufficient quantity of chalk.
II. — White hard soap. ... 1 part
Talcum 1 part
Water 4 parts
Shave the soap into ribbons, dissolve
in the water by the aid of heat, and in-
corporate the talcum.
III. — Curd soap 1 av. ounce
Water 4 fluidounces
Oil of lemon £ fluidrachm
French chalk, a sufficient quantity.
Shred the soap and melt it in the water
by heat, add the oil of lemon, and make
into a stiff paste with French chalk.
IV. — White castile soap,
old and dry 15 parts
Water 15 parts
Solution of chlorin-
ated soda 16 parts
Ammonia water. ... 1 part
Cut or shave up the soap, add the
water, and heat on the water bath to a
smooth paste. Remove, let cool, and
add the other ingredients and mix thor-
oughly.
V. — Castile soap, white,
old, and dry 100 parts
Water 75 parts
Tincture of quillaia 10 parts
Ether, sulphuric. . . 10 parts
Ammonia water,
FF .. 5 parts
Benzine, deodorized 75 parts
Melt the soap, previously finely
shaved, in the water, bring to a boil and
remove from the fire. Let cool down,
then add the other ingredients, incor-
porating them thoroughly. This should
be put up in collapsible tubes or tightly
closed metallic boxes. This is also use-
ful for clothing.
Liquid Cloth and Glove Cleaner. —
Gasoline 1 gallon
Chloroform 1 ounce
Carbon disulphide. .. 1 ounce
196
CLEANING PREPARATIONS AND METHODS
Essential oil almond.. 5 drops
Oil bergamot 1 drachm
Oil cloves 5 drops
Mix. To be applied with a sponge
or soft cloth.
STONE CLEANING:
Cleaning and Polishing Marble. —
I. — Marble that has become dirty by
ordinary use or exposure may be cleaned
by a simple bath of soap and water.
If this does not remove stains, a weak
solution of oxalic acid should be applied
with a sponge or rag, washing quickly
and thoroughly with water to minimize
injury to the surface.
Rubbing well after this with chalk
moistened with water will, in a measure,
restore the luster. Another method of
finishing is to apply a solution of white
wax in turpentine (about 1 in 10), rub-
bing thoroughly with a piece of flannel
or soft leather.
If the marble has been much exposed,
so that its luster has been seriously im-
paired,, it may be necessary to repolish
it in a more thorough manner. This
may be accomplished by rubbing it first
with sand, beginning with a moderately
coarse-grained article and changing this
twice for finer kinds, after which tripoli
or pumice is used. The final polish is
given by the so-called putty powder. A
plate of iron is generally used in applying
the coarse sand; with the fine sand a
leaden plate is used; and the pumice is
employed in the form of a smooth-surfaced
piece of convenient size. For the final
polishing coarse linen or bagging is used,
wedged tightly into an iron planing tool.
During all these applications water is
allowed to trickle over the face of the
stone.
The putty powder referred to is bin-
oxide of tin, obtained by treating metal-
lic tin with nitric acid, which converts
the metal into hydrated metastannic acid.
This, when heated, becomes anhydrous.
In this condition it is known as putty
powder. In practice putty powder is
mixed with alum, sulphur, and other
substances, the mixture used being de-
pendent upon the nature of the stone to
be polished.
According to Warwick, colored mar-
ble should not be treated with soap and
water, but only with the solution of bees-
wax above mentioned.
II. — Take 2 parts of sodium bicarbon-
ate, 1 part of powdered pumice stone,
and 1 part of finely pulverized chalk.
Pass through a fine sieve to screen out
all particles capable of scratching the
marble, and add sufficient water to form
a pasty mass. Rub the marble with it
vigorously, and end the cleaning with
soap and water.
III.— Ox gall 1 part
Saturated solution
of sodium carbo-
nate 4 parts
Oil of turpentine. . 1 part
Pipe clay enough to form a paste.
IV. — Sodium carbonate. 2 ounces
Chlorinated lime. . 1 ounce
Water 14 ounces
Mix well and apply the magma to the
marble with a cloth, rubbing well in, and
finally rubbing dry. It may be neces-
sary to repeat this operation.
V. — Wash the surface with a mixture
of finely powdered pumice stone and vin-
egar, and leave it for several hours; then
brush it hard and wash it clean. When
dry, rub with whiting and wash leather.
VI. — Soft soap 4 parts
Whiting 4 parts
Sodium bicarbonate 1 part
Copper sulphate, . . 2 parts
Mix thoroughly and rub over the mar-
ble with a piece of flannel, and leave it
on for 24 hours, then wash it off with
clean water, and polish the marble with
a piece of flannel or an old piece of felt.
VII. — A strong solution of oxalic acid
effectually takes out ink stains. In
handling it the poisonous nature of this
acid should not be forgotten.
VIII. — Iron mold or ink spots may
be taken out in the following man-
ner: Take J ounce of butter of antimony
and 1 ounce of oxalic acid and dissolve
them in 1 pint of rain water; add enough
flour to bring the mixture to a proper
consistency. Lay it evenly on the
stained part with a brush, and, after it
has remained for a few days, wash it off
and repeat the process if the stain is not
wholly removed.
IX. — To remove oil stains apply com-
mon clay saturated with benzine. If
the grease has remained in long the
polish will be injured, but the stain will
be removed.
X. — The following method for remov-
ing rust from iron depends upon the solu-
bility of the sulphide of iron in a solution
of cyanide of potassium. Clay is made
into a thin paste with ammonium sul-
phide, and the rust spot smeared with
the mixture, care being taken that the
spot is only just covered. After ten
minutes this paste is washed off and re-
placed by one consisting of white bole
mixed with a solution of potassium
cyanide (1 to 4), which is in its turn
CLEANING PREPARATIONS AND METHODS
197
washed off after about 2| hours. Should
a reddish spot remain after washing off
the first paste, a second layer may be ap-
plied for about 5 minutes.
XI. — Soft soap 4 ounces
Whiting 4 ounces
Sodium carbonate. 1 ounce
Water, a sufficient quantity.
Make into a thin paste, apply on the
soiled surface, and wash off after 24
hours.
XII. — In a spacious tub place a tall
vessel upside down. On this set the
article to be cleaned so that it will not
stand in the water, which would loosen
the cemented parts. Into this tub pour
a few inches of cold water — hot water
renders marble dull — take a soft brush
and a piece of Venetian soap, dip the
former in the water and rub on the latter
carefully, brushing off the article from
top to bottom. When in this manner
dust and dirt have >been dissolved, wash
off all soap particles by means of a water-
ing p.ot and cold water, dab the object
with a clean sponge, which absorbs the
moisture, place it upon a cloth and care-
fully dry with a very clean, soft cloth,
rubbing gently. This treatment will
restore the former gloss to the marble.
XIII. — Mix and shake thoroughly in
a bottle equal quantities of sulphuric acid
and lemon juice. Moisten the spots and
rub them lightly with a linen cloth and
they will disappear.
XIV. — Ink spots are treated, with acid
oxalate of potassium; blood stains by
brushing with alabaster dust and dis-
tilled water, then bleaching with chlorine
solution. Alizarine ink and aniline ink
spots can be moderated by laying on rags
saturated with Javelle water, chlorine wa-
ter, or chloride of lime paste. Old oil
stains can only be effaced by placing the
whole piece of marble for hours in ben-
zine. Fresh oil or grease spots are oblit-
erated by repeated applications of a
little damp, white clay and subsequent
brushing with soap water or weak soda
solution. For many other spots an ap-
plication of benzine and magnesia is useful.
XV. — Marble slabs keep well and do
not lose their fresh color if they are
cleaned with hot water only, without the
addition of soap, which is injurious to
the color. Care must be taken that no
liquid dries on the marble. If spots of
wine, coffee, beer, etc., have already ap-
peared, they are cleaned with diluted
spirit of sal ammoniac, highly diluted
oxalic acid, Javelle water, ox gall, or,
take a quantity of newly slaked lime, mix
it with water into a paste-like consistency,
apply the paste uniformly on the spot
with a brush, and leave the coating alone
for two to three days before it is washed
off. If the spots are not removed by a
single application, repeat the latter. In
using Javelle water 1 or 2 drops should
be carefully poured on each spot, rinsing
off with water.
To Remove Grease Spots from Marble.
— If the spots are fresh, rub them over
with a piece of cloth that has been dipped
into pulverized china clay, repeating the
operation several times, and then brush
with soap and water. When the spots
are old brush with distilled water and
finest French plaster energetically, then
bleach with chloride of lime that is put
on a piece of white cloth. If the piece of
marble is small enough to permit it, soak
it for a few hours in refined benzine.
Preparation for Cleaning Marble,
Furniture, and Metals, Especially Cop-
per.— This preparation is claimed to give
very quickly perfect brilliancy, persisting
without soiling either the hand or the
articles, and without leaving any odor o$
copper. The following is the composi-
tion for 100 parts of the product: Wax,
2.4 parts; oil of turpentine, 9.4 parts;
acetic acid, 42 parts; citric acid, 42 parts;
white soap, 42 parts.
Removing Oil Stains. from Marble. —
Saturate fuller's earth with a solution of
equal parts of soap liniment, ammonia,
and water; apply to the greasy part of
the marble; keep there for some hours,
pressed down with a smoothing iron
sufficiently hot to warm the mass, and
as it evaporates occasionally renew the
solution. When wiped off dry the stain
will have nearly disappeared. Some
days later, when more oil works toward
the surface repeat the operation. A few
such treatments should suffice.
Cleaning Terra Cotta. — After having
carefully removed all dust, paint the terra
cotta, by means of a brush, with a mix-
ture of slightly gummed water and finely
powdered terra cotta.
Renovation of Polished and Varnished
Surfaces of Wood, Stone, etc. — This is
composed of the following ingredients,
though the proportions may be varied:
Cereal flour or wood pulp, 38* parts;
hydrochloric acid, 45 parts; chloride of
lime, 16 parts; turpentine, * part. After
mixing the ingredients thoroughly in
order to form a homogeneous paste, the
object to be treated is smeared with it
and allowed to stand for some time.
The paste on the surface is then removed
by passing over it quickly a piece of soft
198
CLEANING PREPARATIONS AND METHODS
leather or a brush, which will remove
dirt, grease, and other deleterious sub-
stances. By rubbing gently with a
cloth or piece of leather a polished sur-
face will be imparted to wood, and ob-
jects of metal will be rendered lustrous.
The addition of chloride of lime tends
to keep the paste moist, thus allowing the
ready removal of the paste without dam-
aging the varnish or polish, while the
turpentine serves as a disinfectant and
renders the odor less disagreeable during
the operation.
The preparation is rapid in its action,
and does not affect the varnished or
polished surfaces of wood or marble.
While energetic in its cleansing action on
brass and other metallic objects, it is
attended with no corrosive effect.
Nitrate of Silver Spots. — To remove
these spots from white marble, they
should be painted with Javelle water,
and after having been washed, passed
over a concentrated solution of thiosul-
phate of soda (hyposulphite).
To Remove Oil-Paint Spots from
Sandstones. — This may be done by
washing the spots with pure turpentine
oil, then covering the place with white
argillaceous earth (pipe clay), leaving it
to dry, and finally rubbing with sharp
soda lye, using a brush. Caustic am-
monia also removes oil-paint spots from
sandstones.
RUST REMOVERS:
To Remove Rust from Iron or Steel
Utensils. —
I. — Apply the following solution by
means of a brush, after having removed
any grease by rubbing with a clean, dry
cloth: 100 parts of stannic chloride are
dissolved in 1,000 parts of water; this
solution is added to one containing 2
parts tartaric acid dissolved in 1,000
parts of water, and finally 20 cubic cen-
timeters indigo solution, diluted with
2,000 parts of water, are added. Afte
allowing the solution to act upon the
stain for a few seconds, it is rubbed clean,
first with a moist cloth, then with a dry
cloth; to restore the polish use is made of
silver sand and jewelers' rouge.
II. — When the rust is recent it is re-
moved by rubbing the metal with a cork
charged with oil. In this manner a per-
fect polish is obtained. To take off old
rust, mix equal parts of fine tripoli and
flowers of sulphur, mingling this mixture
with olive oil, so as to >orm a paste.
Hub the iron with this preparation by
means of a skin.
III. — The rusty piece is connected
with a piece of zinc and placed in water
containing a little sulphuric acid. After
the articles have been in the liquid for
several days or a week, the rust will have
completely disappeared. The length of
time will depend upon the depth to
which the rust has penetrated. A little
sulphuric acid may be added from time
to time, but the chief point is that the
zinc always has good electric contact
with the iron. To insure this an iron
wire may be firmly wound around the
iron object and connected with the zinc.
The iron is not attacked in the least, as
long as the zinc is kept in good electric
contact with it. When the articles are
taken from the liquid they assume a dark
gray or black color and are then washed
and oiled.
IV. — The rust on iron and steel ob-
jects, especially large pieces, is readily
removed by rubbing the pieces with oil
of tartar, or with very fine emery and a
little oil, or by putting powdered alum in
strong vinegar and rubbing with this
alumed vinegar.
V. — Take cyanide of calcium, 25
parts; white soap, powdered, 25 parts;
Spanish white, 50 parts; and water, 200
parts. Triturate all well and rub the
piece with this paste. The effect will be
quicker if before using this paste the
rusty object has been soaked for 5 to
10 minutes in a solution of cyanide of
potassium in the ratio of 1 part of cya-
nide to 2 parts of water.
VI. — To remove rust from polished
steel cyanide of potassium is excellent.
If possible, soak the instrument to be
cleaned in a solution of cyanide of potas-
sium in the proportion of 1 ounce of cya-
nide to 4 ounces of water. Allow this
to act till all loose rust is removed, and
then polish with cyanide soap. The
latter is made as follows: Potassium cya-
nide, precipitated chalk, white castile
soap. Make a saturated solution of the
cyanide and add chalk sufficient to make
a creamy paste. Add the soap cut in
fine shavings and thoroughly incorporate
in a mortar. When the mixture is stiff
cease to add the soap. It should be re-
membered that potassium cyanide is a
virulent poison.
VII. — Apply turpentine or kerosene
oil, and after letting it stand over night,
clean with finest emery cloth.
VIII. — To free articles of iron and
. steel from rust and imbedded grains of
sand the articles are treated with fluor-
hydric acid (about 2 per cent) 1 to 2
hours, whereby the impurities but not the
metal are dissolved. This is followed by
a washing with lime milk, to neutralize
any fluorhydric acid remaining.
CLEANING PREPARATIONS AND METHODS
199
To Remove Rust from Nickel. — First
grease the articles well; then, after a few
days, rub them with a rag charged with
ammonia. If the rust spots persist, add
a few drops of hydrochloric acid to the
ammonia, rub and wipe off at once.
Next rinse with water, dry, and polish
with tripoli.
Removal of Rust.— To take off the
rust from small articles which glass or
emery paper would bite too deeply, the
ink-erasing rubber used in business
offices may be employed. By beveling it,
or cutting it to a point as needful, it can
be introduced into the smallest cavities
and windings, and a perfect cleaning be
effected.
To Remove Rust from Instruments. —
I. — Lay the instruments over night in
a saturated solution of chloride of tin.
The rust spots will disappear through
reduction. Upon withdrawal from the
solution the instruments are rinsed with
water, placed in a hot soda-soap solution,
and dried. Cleaning with absolute alco-
hol and polishing chalk may also follow.
II. — Make a solution of 1 part of
kerosene in 200 parts of benzine or car-
bon tetrachloride, and dip the instru-
ments, which have been dried by leaving
them in heated air, in this, moving their
parts, if movable, as in forceps and scis-
sors, about under the liquid, so that it
may enter all the crevices. Next lay the
instruments on a plate in a dry room, so
that the benzine can evaporate. Nee-
dles are simply thrown in the paraffine
solution, and taken out with tongs or
tweezers, after which they are allowed to
dry on a plate.
III. — Pour olive oil on the rust spots and
leave for several days; then rub with
emery or tripoli, without wiping off the
oil as far as possible, or always bringing
it back on the spot. Afterwards remove
the emery and the oil with a rag, rub
again with emery soaked with vinegar,
and finally with fine plumbago on a piece
of chamois skin.
To Preserve Steel from Rust.— To
preserve steel from rust dissolve 1 part
caoutchouc and 16 parts turpentine
with a gentle heat, then add 8 parts
boiled oil, and mix by bringing them to
t.he heat of boiling water. Apply to the
steel with a brush, the same as varnish.
It can be removed again with a cloth
soaked in turpentine.
METAL CLEANING:
Cleaning and Preserving Medals,
Coins, and Small Iron Articles. — The
coating of silver chloride may be reduced
with molten potassium cyanide. Then
boil the article in water, displace the
water with alcohol, and dry in a drying
closet. When dry brush with a soft
brush and cover with " zaponlack " (any
good transparent lacquer or varnish will
answer).
Instead of potassium cyanide alone, a
mixture of that and potassium carbonate
may be used. After treatment in this
way, delicate objects of silver become less
brittle. Another way is to put the article
in molten sodium carbonate and remove
the silver carbonate thus formed, by
acetic acid of 50 per cent strength. This
process produces the finest possible
polish.
The potassium-cyanide process may be
used with all small iron objects. For
larger ones molten potassium rhodanide
is recommended. This converts the
iron oxide into iron sulphide that is eas-
ily washed off and leaves the surface of a
fine black color.
Old coins may be cleansed by first
immersing them in strong nitric acid and
then washing them in clean water. Wipe
them dry before putting away.
To Clean Old Medals. — Immerse in
lemon juice until the coating of oxide has
completely disappeared; 24 hours is gen-
erally sufficient, but a longer time is not
harmful.
Steel Cleaner. — Smear the object with
oil, preferably petroleum, and allow some
days for penetration of the surface of the
metal. Then rub vigorously with a piece
of flannel or willow wood. Or, with a
paste composed of olive oil, sulphur
flowers, and tripoli, or of rotten stone
and oil. Finally, a coating may be em-
ployed, made of 10 parts of potassium
cyanide and 1 part of cream of tartar; or
2-5 parts of potassium cyanide, with the
'iiddition of 55 parts of carbonate of lime
and 20 parts of white soap.
Restoring Tarnished Gold.—
Sodium bicarbonate. 20 ounces
Chlorinated lime.. . . 1 ounce
Common salt 1 ounce
Water 16 ounces
Mix well and apply with a soft brush.
A very small quantity of the solution
is sufficient, and it may be used either
cold or lukewarm. Plain articles may
be brightened by putting a drop or two
of the liquid upon them and lightly
brushing the surface with fine tissue
paper.
£00
CLEANING PREPARATIONS AND METHODS
Cleaning Copper. —
I. — Use Armenian bole mixed into a
paste with oleic acid.
II. — Rotten stone 1 part
Iron subcarbonate. . 3 parts
Lard oil, a sufficient quantity.
HI. — Iron oxide 10 parts
Pumice stone 32 parts
Oleic acid, a sufficient quantity.
IV. — Soap, cut fine 16 parts
Precipitated chalk . . 2 parts
Jewelers' rouge 1 part
Cream of tartar 1 part
Magnesium carbonate 1 part
Water, a sufficient quantity.
Dissolve the soap in the smallest quan-
tity of water that will effect solution over
a water bath. Add the other ingredients
to the solution while still hot, stirring
constantly.
To Remove Hard Grease, Paint, etc.,
from Machinery. — To remove grease,
paint, etc., from machinery add half a
pound of caustic soda to 2 gallons of
water and boil the parts to be cleaned in
the fluid. It is possible to use it several
times before its strength is exhausted.
Solutions for Cleaning Metals. —
I._Water 20 parts
Alum 2 parts
Tripoli.. 2 parts
Nitric acid 1 part
II.— Water. 40 parts
Oxalic acid 2 parts
Tripoli 7 parts
To Cleanse Nickel.— I. — Fifty parts of
rectified alcohol; 1 part of sulphuric
acid; 1 part of nitric acid. Plunge the
piece in the bath for 10 to 15 seconds,
rinse it off in cold water, and dip it next
into rectified alcohol. Dry with a fine
linen rag or with sawdust.
II. — Stearine oil 1 part
Ammonia water 25 parts
Benzine 50 parts
Alcohol 75 parts
Rub up the stearine with the ammonia,
add the benzine and then the alcohol,
and agitate until homogeneous. Put in
wide-mouthed vessels and close care-
fully.
To Clean Petroleum Lamp Burners. —
Dissolve in a quart of soft water an
ounce or an ounce and a half of washing
soda, using an old half-gallon tomato can.
Into this put the burner after removing
the wick, set it on the stove, and let it
boil strongly for 5 or 6 minutes, then
take out, rinse under the tap, and dry.
Every particle of carbonaceous matter
will thus be got rid of, and the burner be
as clean and serviceable as new. This
ought to be done at least every month,
but the light would be better if it were
done every 2 weeks.
Gold-Ware Cleaner. —
Acetic acid 2 parts
Sulphuric acid 2 parts
Oxalic acid 1 part
Jewelers' rouge 2 parts
Distilled water 200 parts
Mix the acids and water and stir in the
rouge, after first rubbing it up with a por-
tion of the liquid. With a clean cloth,
wet with this mixture, go well over the
article. Rinse off with hot water and
dry.
Silverware Cleaner. — Make a thin paste
of levigated (not precipitated) chalk and
sodium hyposulphite, in equal parts,
rubbed up in distilled water. Apply
this paste to the surface, rubbing well
with a soft brush. Rinse in clear water
and dry in sawdust. Some authorities
advise the cleaner to let the paste dry on
the ware, and then to rub off and rinse
with hot water.
Silver-Coin Cleaner. — Make a bath of
10 parts of sulphuric acid and 90 parts of
water, and let the coin lie in this until the
crust of silver sulphide is dissolved. From
5 to 10 minutes usually suffice. Rinse
in running water, then rub with a soft
brush and castile soap, rinse again, dry
with a soft cloth, and then carefully rub
with chamois.
Cleaning Silver-Plated Ware.— Into
a wide-mouthed bottle provided with a
good cork put the following mixture:
Cream of tartar 2 parts
Levigated chalk 2 parts
Alum 1 part
Powder the alum and rub up with the
other ingredients, and cork tightly.
When required for use wet sufficient of
the powder and with soft linen rags rub
the article, being careful not to use
much pressure, as otherwise the thin
layer of plating may be cut through.
Rinse in hot suds, and afterwards in clear
water, and dry in sawdust. When
badly blackened with silver sulphide, if
small, the article may be dipped for an
instant in hydrochloric acid and imme-
diately rinsed in running water. Larger
articles may be treated as coins are —
immersed for 2 or 3 minutes in a 10
per cent aqueous solution of sulphuric
acid, or the surface may be rapidly wiped
CLEANING PREPARATIONS AND METHODS
201
with a swab carrying nitric acid and in-
stantly rinsed in running water.
Cleaning Gilt Bronze Ware. — If greasy,
wash carefully in suds, or, better, dip into
a hot solution of caustic potash, and then
wash in suds with a soft rag, and rinse in
running water. If not then clean and
bright, dip into the following mixture:
Nitric acid 10 parts
Aluminum sulphate . . 1 part
Water 40 parts
Mix. Rinse in running water.
Britannia Metal Cleaner. — Rub first
with jewelers' rouge made into a paste
with oil; wash in suds, rinse, dry, and
finish with chamois or wash leather.
To Remove Ink Stains on Silver. —
Silver articles in domestic use, and espe-
cially silver or plated inkstands, fre-
quently become badly stained with ink.
These stains cannot be removed by ordi-
nary processes, but readily yield to a
paste of chloride of lime and water. Ja-
velle water may be also used.
Removing Egg Stains. — A pinch of table
salt taken between the thumb and finger
and rubbed on the spot with the end of
the finger will usually remove the darkest
egg stain from silver.
To Clean Silver Ornaments. — Make a
strong solution of soft soap and water,
and in this boil the articles for a few min-
utes— five will usually be enough. Take
out, pour the soap solution into a basin,
and as soon as the liquid has cooled down
sufficiently to be borne by the hand, with
a soft brush scrub the articles with it.
Rinse in boiling water and place on a
porous substance (a bit of tiling, a brick,
or unglazed earthenware) to dry. Fi-
nally give a light rubbing with a chamois.
Articles thus treated look as bright as
new.
Solvent for Iron Rust. — Articles at-
tacked by rust may be conveniently
cleaned by dipping them into a well-
saturated solution of stannic chloride.
The length of time of the action must be
regulated according to the thickness of
the rust. As a rule 12 to 24 hours will
suffice, but it is essential to prevent an
excess of acid in the bath, as this is liable
to attack the iron itself. After the ob-
jects have been removed from the bath
they must be rinsed with water, and sub-
sequently with ammonia, and then
quickly dried. Greasing with vaseline
seems to prevent new formation of rust.
Objects treated in this manner are said
to resemble dead silver.
Professor Weber proposed a diluted
alkali, and it has been found that after
employing this remedy the dirt layer is
loosened and the green platina reappears.
Potash has been found to be an efficacious
remedy, even in the case of statues that
had apparently turned completely black.
To Clean Polished Parts of Machines.
— Put in a flask 1,000 parts of petroleum;
add 20 parts of paraffine, shaved fine;
cork the bottle and stand aside for a
couple of days, giving it an occasional
shake. The mixture is now ready for
use. To use, shake the bottle, pour a
little of the liquid upon a woolen rag and
rub evenly over the part to be cleaned;
or apply with a brush. Set the article
aside and, next day, rub it well with a
dry, woolen rag. Every particle of rust,
resinified grease, etc., will disappear
provided the article has not been neglected
too long. In this case a further applica-
tion of the oil will be necessary. If too
great pressure has not been made, or the
rubbing continued too long, the residual
oil finally leaves the surface protected by
a delicate layer of paraffine that will pre-
vent rusting for a long time.
To Clean Articles of Nickel. — Lay
them for a few seconds in alcohol con-
taining 2 per cent of sulphuric acid; re-
move, wash in running water, rinse in
alcohol, and rub dry with a linen cloth.
This process gives a brilliant polish and
is especially useful with plated articles on
the plating of which the usual polishing
materials act very destructively. The
yellowest and brownest nickeled articles
are restored to pristine brilliancy by
leaving them in the alcohol and acid for
15 seconds. Five seconds suffice ordi-
narily.
How to Renovate Bronzes. — For gilt
work, first remove all grease, dirt, wax,
etc., with a solution in water of potas-
sium or sodium hydrate, then dry, and
with a soft rag apply the following:
Sodium carbonate. . 7 parts
Spanish whiting 15 parts
Alcohol, 85 per cent 50 parts
Water 125 parts
Go over every part carefully, using a
brush to get into the minute crevices.
When this dries on, brush off with a fine
linen cloth or a supple chamois skin.
Or the following plan may be used:
Remove grease, etc., as directed above,
dry and go over the spots where the gilt
surface is discolored with a brush dipped
in a solution of two parts of alum in 250
parts of water and 65 parts of nitric acid.
As soon as the gilding reappears or the
202
CLEANING PREPARATIONS AND METHODS
surface becomes bright, wash off, and
dry in the direct sunlight.
Still another cleaner is made of nitric
acid, 30 parts; aluminum sulphate, 4
parts; distilled or rain water, 125 parts.
Clean of grease, etc., as above, and apply
the solution with a camel's-hair pencil.
Rinse off and dry in sawdust. Finally,
some articles are best cleaned by im-
mersing in hot soap suds and rubbing
with a soft brush. Rinse in clear, hot
water, using a soft brush to get the residual
suds out of crevices. Let dry, then finish
by rubbing the gilt spots or places with a
soft, linen rag, or a bit of chamois.
There are some bronzes gilt with imi-
tation gold and varnished. Where the
work is well done and the gilding has not
been on too long, they will deceive even
the practiced eye. The deception, how-
ever, may easily be detected by touching
a spot on the gilt surface with a glass rod
dipped in a solution of corrosive subli-
mate. If the gilding is true no discolor-
ation will occur, but if false a brown
spot will be produced.
To Clean a Gas Stove. — An easy meth-
od of removing grease spots consists in
immersing the separable parts for sev-
eral hours in a warm lye, heated to about
70° C. (158° F.), said lye to be made of
9 parts of caustic soda and 180 parts of
water. These pieces, together with the
fixed parts of the stove, may be well
brushed with this lye and afterwards
rinsed in clean, warm water. The
grease will be dissolved, and the stove
restored almost to its original state.
Cleaning Copper Sinks. — Make rot-
ten stone into a stiff paste with soft soap
and water. Rub on with a woolen rag,
and polish with dry whiting and rotten
stone. Finish with a leather and dry
whiting. Many of the substances and
mixtures used to clean brass will effec-
tively clean copper. Oxalic acid is said
to be the best medium for cleaning cop-
per, but after using it the surface of the
copper must be well washed, dried, and
then rubbed with sweet oil and tripoli, or
some other polishing agent. Otherwise
the metal will soon tarnish again.
Treatment of Cast-iron Grave Crosses.
— The rust must first be thoroughly re-
moved with a steel-wire brush. When
this is done apply one or two coats of red
lead or graphite paint. After this prim-
ing has oecome hard, paint with double-
burnt lampblack and equal parts of oil of
turpentine and varnish. This coating
is followed by one of lampblack ground
with coach varnish. Now paint the sin-
gle portions with " mixtion " (gilding
oil) and gild as usual. Such crosses look
better when they are not altogether
black. Ornaments may be very well
treated in colors with oil paint and then
varnished. The crosses treated in this
manner are preserved for many years,
but it is essential to use good exterior or
coach varnish for varnishing, and not the
so-called black varnish, which is mostly
composed of asphalt or tar.
Cleaning Inferior Gold Articles. — The
brown film which forms on low-quality
gold articles is removed by coating with
fuming hydrochloric acid, whereupon
they are brushed off with Vienna lime
and petroleum. Finally, clean the ob-
jects with benzine, rinse again in pure
benzine, and dry in sawdust.
To Clean Bronze. — Clean the bronze
with soft soap; next wash it in plenty of
water; wipe, let dry, and apply light en-
caustic mixture composed of spirit of
turpentine in which a small quantity of
yellow wax has been dissolved. The en-
caustic is spread by means of a linen or
woolen wad. For gilt bronze, add 1
spoonful of alkali to 3 spoonfuls of water
and rub the article with this by means
of a ball of wadding. Next wipe with a
clean chamois, similar to that employed
in silvering.
How to Clean Brass and Steel.— To
clean brasses quickly and economically,
rub them with vinegar and salt or with
oxalic acid. Wash immediately after
the rubbing, and polish with tripoli and
sweet oil. Unless the acid is washed off
the article will tarnish quickly. Copper
kettles and saucepans, brass andirons,
fenders, and candlesticks and trays are
best cleaned with vinegar and salt.
Cooking vessels in constant use need only
to be well washed afterwards. Things
for show — even pots and pans — need
the oil polishing, which gives a deep,
rich, yellow luster, good for six months.
Oxalic acid and salt should be employed
for furniture brasses — if it touches the
wood it only improves the tone. Wipe
the brasses well with a wet cloth, and
polish thoroughly with oil and tripoli.
Sometimes powdered rotten stone does
better than the tripoli. Rub, after using,
either with a dry cloth or leather, until
there is no trace of oil. The brass to be
cleaned must be freed completely from
grease, caked dirt, and grime. Wash
with strong ammonia suds and rinse dry
before beginning with the acid and salt.
The best treatment for wrought steel
is to wash it very clean with a stiff brush
CLEANING PREPARATIONS AND METHODS
and ammonia soapsuds, rinse well, dry
by heat, oil plentifully with sweet oil, and
dust thickly with powdered quicklime.
Let the lime stay on 2 days, then brush
it off with a clean, very stiff brush. Polish
with a softer brush, and rub with cloths
until the luster comes out. By leaving
the lime on, iron and steel may be kept
from rust almost indefinitely.
Before wetting any sort of bric-a-brac,
and especially bronzes, remove all the
dust possible. After dusting, wash well
in strong white soapsuds and ammonia,
rinse clean, polish with just a suspicion
of oil and rotten stone, and rub off after-
wards every trace of the oil. Never let
acid touch a bronze surface, unless to
eat and pit it for antique effects.
Composition for Cleaning Copper,
Nickel, and other Metals. — Wool grease,
46 parts, by weight; fire clay, 30 parts,
by weight; paraffine, 5 parts, by weight;
Canova wax, 5 parts, by weight; cocoa-
nut oil, 10 parts, by weight; oil of mir-
bane, 1 part, by weight. After mixing
these different ingredients, which con-
stitute a paste, this is molded in order to
give a cylindrical form, and introduced
into a case so that it can be used like a
stick of cosmetic.
Putz Pomade. — I. — Oxalic acid, 1 part;
caput mortuum, 15 parts (or, if white
pomade is desired, tripoli, 12 parts);
powdered pumice stone, best grade, 20
parts; palm oil, 60 parts; petroleum or
oleine, 4 parts. Perfume with mirbane
oil.
II. — Oxalic acid 1 part
Peroxide of iron
(jewelers' rouge).. 15 parts
Rotten stone 20 parts
Palm oil 60 parts
Petrolatum 5 parts
Pulverize the acid and the rotten stone
and mix thoroughly with the rouge.
Sift to remove all grit, then make into a
paste with the oil and petrolatum. A
little nitro-benzol may be added to scent
the mixture.
III.— Oleine 40 parts
Ceresine 5 parts
Tripoli 40 parts
Light mineral oil
(0.870) 20 parts
Melt the oleine, ceresine, and min-
eral oil together, and stir in the tripoli;
next, grind evenly in a paint mill.
To Clean Gummed Parts of Ma-
chinery.— Boil about 10 to 15 parts of
caustic soda or 100 parts of soda in 1,000
parts of water, immerse the parts to be
cleaned in this for some time, or, better,
boil them with it. Then rinse and dry.
For small shops this mode of cleaning is
doubtless the best.
To Remove Silver Plating. — I. — Put
sulphuric acid 100 parts and potassium
nitrate (saltpeter) 10 parts in a vessel
of stoneware or porcelain, heated on the
water bath. When the silver has left the
copper, rinse the objects several times.
This silver stripping bath may be used
several times, if it is kept in a well-closed
bottle. When it is saturated with silver,
decant the liquid, boil it to dryness, then
add the residue to the deposit, and melt in
the crucible to obtain the metal.
II. — Stripping silvered articles of the
silvering may be accomplished by the fol-
lowing mixture: Sulphuric acid, 60° B.,
3 parts; nitric acid, 40° B., 1 part; heat
the mixture to about 166° F., and im-
merse the articles by means of a copper
wire. In a few seconds the acid mixture
will have done the work. A thorough
rinsing off is, of course, necessary.
To Clean Zinc Articles. — In order to
clean articles of zinc, stir rye bran into a
paste with boiling water, and add a hand-
ful of silver sand and a little vitriol.
Rub the article with this paste, rinse with
water, dry, and polish with a cloth.
To Remove Rust from Nickel. — Smear
the rusted parts well with grease (ordi-
nary animal fat will do), and allow the
article to stand several days. If the
rust is not thick the grease and rust may
be rubbed off with a cloth dipped in am-
monia. If the rust is very deep, apply a
diluted solution of hydrochloric acid,
taking care that the acid does not touch
the metal, and the rust may be easily
rubbed off. Then wash the article and
polish in the usual way.
Compound for Cleaning Brass. — To
make a brass cleaning compound use
oxalic acid, 1 ounce; rotten stone, 6
ounces; enough whale oil and spirits of
turpentine of equal parts, to mix, and
make a paste.
To Clean Gilt Objects.— I.— Into an
ordinary drinking glass pour about 20
drops of ammonia, immerse the piece to
be cleaned repeatedly in this, and brush
with a soft brush. Treat the article
with pure water, then with alcohol, and
wipe with a soft rag.
II. — Boil common alum in soft, pure
water, and immerse the article in the
solution, or rub the spot with it> and dry
with sawdust.
III. — For cleaning picture frames,
&04 CLEANING PREPARATIONS AND METHODS
moldings, and, in fact, all kinds of gilded
work, the best medium is liquor potassse,
diluted with about 5 volumes of water.
Dilute alcohol is also excellent. Methylated
wood spirit, if the odor is not objectionable,
answers admirably.
To Scale Cast Iron. — To remove the
scale from cast iron use a solution of 1
part vitriol and 2 parts water; after mix-
ing, apply to the scale with a cloth rolled
in the form of a brush, using enough to
wet the surface well. After 8 or 10 hours
wash off with water, when the hard, scaly
surface will be completely removed.
Cleaning Funnels and Measures. —
Funnels and measures used for measur-
ing varnishes, oils, etc., may be cleaned
by soaking them in a strong solution of
lye or pearlash. Another mixture for
the same purpose consists of pearlash
with quicklime in aqueous solution.
The measures are allowed to soak in the
solution for a short time, when the resin-
ous matter of the paint or varnish is
easily removed. A thin coating of pe-
troleum lubricating oils may be removed,
it is said, by the use of naphtha or petro-
leum benzine.
To Clean Aluminum. — I. — Aluminum
articles are very hard to clean so they will
have a bright, new appearance. This is
especially the case with the matted or
frosted pieces. To restore the pieces to
brilliancy place them for some time in
water that has been slightly acidulated
with sulphuric acid.
II. — Wash the aluminum with coal-oil,
gasoline or benzine, then put it in a con-
centrated solution of caustic potash, and
after washing it with plenty of water,
dip it in the bath composed of | nitric
acid and $ water. Next, subject it to a
bath of concentrated nitric acid, and
finally to a mixture of rum and olive oil.
To render aluminum capable of being
worked like pure copper, § of oil of tur-
pentine and £ steanc acid are used.
For polishing by hand, take a solution of
30 parts of borax and 1,000 parts of
water, to which a few drops of spirits of
ammonia have been added.
How to Clean Tarnished Silver.— I.—
If the articles are only slightly tarnished,
mix 3 parts of best washed and purified
chalk and 1 part of white soap, adding
water, till a thin paste is formed, which
should be rubbed on the silver with a dry
brush, till the articles are quite bright.
As a substitute, whiting, mixed with caus-
tic ammonia to form a paste, may be
used. This mixture is very effective, but
it irritates the eyes and nose.
II. — An efficacious preparation is ob-
tained by mixing beech-wood ashes, 2
parts; Venetian soap, yo^ part; cooking
salt, 2 parts; rain water, 8 parts. Brush
the silver with this lye, using a somewhat
stiff brush.
III. — A solution of crystallized potas-
sium permanganate has been recom-
mended.
IV. — A grayish violet film which silver-
ware acquires from perspiration, can be
readily removed by means of ammonia.
V. — To remove spots from silver lay it
for 4 hours in soapmakers' lye, then throw on
fine powdered gypsum, moisten the latter
with vinegar to cause it to adhere, dry
near the fire, and wipe off. Next rub
the spot with dry bran. This not only
causes it to disappear, but gives extraor-
dinary gloss to the silver.
VI. — Cleaning with the usual fine
powders is attended with some difficulty
and inconvenience. An excellent result
is obtained without injury to the silver by
employing a saturated solution of hypo-
sulphite of soda, which is put on with a
brush or rag. The article is then
washed with plenty of water.
VII. — Never use soap on silverware,
as it dulls the luster, giving the article
more the appearance of pewter than
silver. When it wants cleaning, rub it
with a piece of soft leather and prepared
chalk, made into a paste with pure water,
entirely free from grit.
To Clean Dull Gold. —I— Take 80 parts,
by weight, of chloride of lime, and rub it
up with gradual addition of water in a
porcelain mortar into a thin, even paste,
which is put into a solution of 80 parts,
by weight, of bicarbonate of soda, and 20
parts, by weight, of salt, in 3,000 parts,
by weight, of water. Shake it, and let
stand a few days before using. If the
preparation is to be kept for any length
of time the bottle should be placed, well
corked, in the cellar. For use, lay the
tarnished articles in a dish, pour the
liquid, which has previously been well
shaken, over them so as just to cover
them, and leave them therein for a few
days.
II. — Bicarbonate of soda. 31 parts
Chloride of lime. . . . 15.5 parts
Cooking salt 15 parts
Water 240 parts
Grind the chloride of lime with a little
water to a thin paste, in a porcelain ves-
sel, and add the remaining chemicals.
Wash the objects with the aid of a soft
brush with the solution, rinse several
times in water, ana ary in fine sawdust.
CLEANING PREPARATIONS AND METHODS
205
Cleaning Bronze Objects. — Employ
powdered chicory mixed with water, so
as to obtain a paste, which is applied
with a brush. After the brushing, rinse
off and dry in the sun or near a stove.
Cleaning Gilded Bronzes. — I. — Com-
mence by removing the spots of grease
and wax with a little potash or soda dis-
solved in water. Let dry, and apply the
following mixture with a rag: Carbonate
of soda, 7 parts; whiting, 15 parts; alco-
hol (85°), 50 parts; water, 125 parts.
When this coating is dry pass a fine linen
cloth or a piece of supple skin over it.
The hollow parts are cleaned with a
brush.
II. — After removing the grease spots,
let dry and pass over all the damaged
parts a pencil dipped in the following
mixture: Alum, 2 parts; nitric acid, 65;
water, 250 parts. When the gilding be-
comes bright, wipe, and dry in the sun or
near a fire.
III. — Wash in hot water containing a
little soda, dry, and pass over the gilding
a pencil soaked in a liquid made of 30
parts nitric acid, 4 parts of aluminum
phosphate, and 125 parts of pure water.
Dry in sawdust.
IV. — Immerse the objects in boiling
soap water, and facilitate the action of
the soap by rubbing with a soft brush;
put the objects in hot water, brush them
carefully, and let them dry in the air;
when they are quite dry rub the shining
parts only with an old linen cloth or a
soft leather, without touching the others.
Stripping Gilt Articles. — Degilding or
stripping gilt articles may be done by at-
taching the object to the positive pole of
a battery and immersing it in a solution
composed of 1 pound of cyanide dissolved
in about 1 gallon of water. Desilvering
may be effected in the same manner.
To Clean Tarnished Zinc.— Apply with
a rag a mixture of 1 .part sulphuric acid
with 12 parts of water. Rinse the zinc
with clear water.
Cleaning Pewter Articles. — Pour hot
lye of wood ashes upon the tin, throw on
sand, and rub with a hard, woolen rag,
hat felt, or whisk until all particles of dirt
have been dissolved. To polish pewter
plates it is well to have the turner make
similar wooden forms fitting the plates,
and to rub them clean this way. Next
they are rinsed with clean water and
placed on a table with a clean linen cover
on which they are left to dry without
being touched, otherwise spots will ap-
pear. This scouring is not necessary so
often if the pewter is rubbed with wheat
bran after use and cleaned perfectly.
New pewter is polished with a paste of
whiting and brandy, rubbing the dishes
with it until the mass becomes dry.
To Clean Files.— Files which have be-
come clogged with tin or lead are
cleaned by dipping for a few seconds into
concentrated nitric acid. To remove
iron filings from the file cuts, a bath of
blue vitriol is employed. After the files
have been rinsed in water they are like-
wise dipped in nitric acid. File-ridges
closed up by zinc are cleaned by im-
mersing the files in diluted sulphuric
acid. Such as have become filled with
copper or brass are also treated with
nitric acid, but here the process has to be
repeated several times. The files should
always be rinsed in water after the treat-
ment, brushed with a stiff brush, and
dried in sawdust or by pouring alcohol
over them, and letting it burn off on the
file.
Scale Pan Clearer. — About the quick-
est cleaner for brass scale pans is a solu-
tion of potassium bichromate in dilute
sulphuric acid, using about 1 part of
chromate, in powder, to 3 parts of acid
and 6 parts of water. In this imbibe a
cloth wrapped around a stick (to protect
the hands), and with it rub the pans.
Do this at tap or hydrant, so that no time
is lost in placing the pan in running
water after having rubbed it with the
acid solution. For pans not very badly
soiled rubbing with ammonia water and
rinsing is sufficient.
Tarnish on Electro -Plate Goods. —
This tarnish can be removed by dipping
the article for from 1 to 15 minutes — •
that is, until the tarnish shall have been
removed — in a pickle of the following
composition: Rain water 2 gallons and
potassium cyanide £ pound. Dissolve
together, and fill into a stone jug or jar,
and close tightly. The article, after
having been immersed, must be taken
out and thoroughly rinsed in several
waters, then dried with fine, clean saw-
dust. Tarnish on jewelry can be speed-
ily removed by this process; but if the
cyanide is not completely removed it
will corrode the goods.
OIL-, GREASE-, PAINT-SPOT ERAD-
ICATORS:
Grease- and Paint -Spot Eradicators. —
I. — Benzol 500 parts
Benzine 500 parts
Soap, best white,
shaved 5 parts
Water, warm, sufficient.
206
CLEANING PREPARATIONS AND METHODS
Dissolve the soap in the warm water,
using from 50 to 60 parts. Mix the ben-
zol and benzine, and add the soap solu-
tion, a little at a time, shaking up well
after each addition. If the mixture is
slow in emulsifying, add at one time from
50 to 100 parts of warm water, and shake
violently. Set the emulsion aside for a
few days, or until it separates, then de-
cant the superfluous water, and pour the
residual pasty mass, after stirring it up
well, into suitable boxes.
II. — Soap spirit 100 parts
Ammonia solution,
10 per cent 25 parts
Acetic ether 15 parts
III. — Extract of quillaia . 1 part
Borax 1 part
Ox gall, fresh 6 parts
Tallow soap 15 parts
Triturate the quillaia and borax to-
gether, incorporate the ox gall, and,
finally, add the tallow soap and mix
thoroughly by kneading. The product
is a plastic mass, which may be rolled
into sticks or put up into boxes.
Removing Oil Spots from .Leather. —
To remove oil stains from leather, dab
the spot carefully with spirits of sal am-
moniac, and after allowing it to act for
a while, wash with clean water. This
treatment may have to be repeated a few
times, taking care, however, not to injure
the color of the leather. Sometimes the
spot may be removed very simply by
spreading the place rather thickly with
butter and letting this act for a few hours.
Next scrape off the butter with the point
of a knife, and rinse the stain with soap
and lukewarm water.
To Clean Linoleum. — Rust spots and
other stains can be removed from lino-
leum by rubbing with si^eel chips.
To Remove Putty, Grease, etc., from
Plate Glass. — To remove all kinds of
greasy materials from glass, and to leave
the latter bright and clean, use a paste
made of benzine and burnt magnesia of
such consistence that when the mass is
pressed between the fingers a drop of
benzine will exude. With this mixture
and a wad of cotton, go over the entire
surface of the glass, rubbing it well.
One rubbing is usually sufficient. After
drying, any of the substance left in the
corners, etc., is easily removed by brush-
ing with a suitable brush. The same
preparation is very useful for cleaning
mirrors and removing grease stains from
books, papers, etc.
Removing Spots from Furniture. —
White spots on polished tables are re-
moved in the following manner: Coat the
spot with oil and pour on a rag a few
drops of " mixtura balsamica oleosa,"
which can be bought in every drug store,
and rub on the spot, which will disappear
immediately.
To Remove Spots from Drawings,
etc. — Place soapstone, fine meerschaum
shavings, amianthus, or powdered mag-
nesia on the spot, and, if necessary, lay
on white filtering paper, saturating it
with peroxide of hydrogen. Allow this
to act for a few hours, and remove the
application with a brush. If necessary,
repeat the operation. In this manner
black coffee spots were removed from a
valuable diagram without erasure by
knife or rubber.
WATCHMAKERS' AND JEWELERS'
CLEANING PREPARATIONS:
To Clean the Tops of Clocks in Re-
pairing.— Sprinkle whiting on the top.
Pour good vinegar over this and rub
vigorously. Rinse in clean water and
dry slowly in the sun or at the fire. A
good polish will be obtained.
To Clean Watch Chains.— Gold or
silver watch chains can be cleaned with
a very excellent result, no matter whether
they be matt or polished, by laying them
for a few seconds in pure aqua ammonia;
they are then rinsed in. alcohol, and
finally shaken in clean sawdust, free from
sand. Imitation gold and plated chains
are first cleaned in benzine, then rinsed
in alcohol, and afterwards shaken in dry
sawdust. Ordinary chains are first
dipped in the following pickle: Pure
nitric acid is mixed with concentrated
sulphuric acid in the proportion of 10
parts of the former to 2 parts of the latter;
a little table salt is added. The chains
are boiled in this mixture, then rinsed
several times in water, afterwards in
alcohol, and finally dried in sawdust.
Cleaning Brass Mountings on Clock
Cases, etc. — The brass mountings are
first cleaned of dirt by dipping them for
a short time into boiling soda lye, and
next are pickled, still warm, if possible,
in a mixture consisting of nitric acid, 60
parts; sulphuric acid, 40 parts; cooking
salt, 1 part; and shining soot (lamp-
black), £ part, whereby they acquire a
handsome golden-yellow coloring. The
pickling mixture, however, must not be em-
ployed immediately after pouring together
the acids, which causes a strong genera-
tion of heat, but should settle for at least
CLEANING PREPARATIONS AND METHODS
207
1 day. This makes the articles hand-
somer and more uniform. After the dip-
ping the objects are rinsed in plenty of
clean water and dried on a hot, iron plate,
and at the same time warmed for lac-
quering. Since the pieces would be
lacquered too thick and unevenly in pure
gold varnish, this is diluted with alcohol,
1 part of gold varnish sufficing for 10
parts of alcohol. Into this liquid dip the
mountings previously warmed and dry
them again on the hot plate.
Gilt Zinc Clocks. — It frequently hap-
pens that clocks of gilt zinc become
covered with green spots. To remove
such spots the following process is used:
Soak a small wad of cotton in alkali and
rub it on the spot. The green color will
disappear at once, but the gilding being
gone, a black spot will remain. Wipe
off well to remove all traces of the alkali.
To replace the gilding, put on, by means
of liquid gum arabic, a little bronze pow-
der of the color of the gilding. The
powdered bronze is applied dry with the
aid of a brush or cotton wad. When the
gilding of the clock has become black or
dull from age, it may be revived by im-
mersion in a bath of cyanide of potas-
sium, but frequently it suffices to wash it
with a soft brush in soap and water, in
which a little carbonate of soda has been
dissolved. Brush the piece in the lather,
rinse in clean water, and dry in rather
hot sav.'dust. The piece should be dried
well inside and outside, as moisture will
cause it to turn black.
To Clean Gummed Up Springs. —
Dissolve caustic soda in warm water,
place the spring in the solution and leave
it there for about one half hour. Any
oil still adhering may now easily be
taken off with a hard brush; next, dry the
spring with a clean cloth. In this man-
ner gummed up parts of tower clocks,
locks, etc., may be quickly and thor-
oughly cleaned, and oil paint may be
removed from metal or wood. The lye
is sharp, but free from danger, nor are
the steel parts attacked by it.
To Clean Soldered Watch Cases.—
Gold, silver, and other metallic watch
cases which in soldering have been ex-
posed to heat, are laid in diluted sul-
phuric acid (1 part acid to 10 to 15 parts
water), to free them from oxide. Heat-
ing the acid accelerates the cleaning proc-
ess. The articles are then well rinsed
in water and dried. Gold cases are next
brushed with powdered tripoli moistened
with oil, to remove the pale spots caused
by the heat and boiling, and to restore
the original color. After that they are
cleaned with soap water and finally pol-
ished with rouge. Silver cases are pol-
ished after boiling, with a scratch brush
dipped in beer.
A Simple Way to Clean a Clock.— Take
a bit of cotton the size of a hen's egg,
dip it in kerosene and place it on the
floor of the clock, in the corner; shut the
door of the clock, and wait 3 or 4 days.
The clock will be like a new one — and
if you look inside you will find the cotton
batting black with dust. The fumes of
the oil loosen the particles of dust, and
they fall, thus cleaning the clock.
To Restore the Color of a Gold or Gilt
Dial. — Dip the dial for a few seconds in
the following mixture: Half an ounce of
cyanide of potassium is dissolved in a
quart of hot water, and 2 ounces of
strong ammonia, mixed with £ an ounce
of alcohol, are added to the solution. On
removal from this bath, the dial should
immediately be immersed in warm water,
then brushed with soap, rinsed, and
dried in hot boxwood dust. Or it may
simply be immersed in dilute nitric acid;
but in this case any painted figures will
be destroyed.
A Bath for Cleaning Clocks. — In an
enameled iron or terra -cotta vessel
pour 2,000 parts of water, add 50 parts
of scraped Marseilles soap, 80 to 100
parts of whiting, and a small cup of
spirits of ammonia. To hasten the proc-
ess of solution, warm, but do not allow
to boil.
If the clock is very dirty or much oxi-
dized, immerse the pieces in the bath
while warm, and as long as necessary.
Take them out with a skimmer or
strainer, and pour over them some ben-
zine, letting the liquid fall into an empty
vessel. This being decanted and bot-
tled can be used indefinitely for rinsing.
If the bath has too much alkali or is
used when too hot, it may affect the
polish and render it dull. This may be
obviated by trying different strengths of
the alkali. Pieces of blued steel are not
injured by the alkali, even when pure.
To Remove a Figure or Name from a
Dial. — Oil of spike lavender may be
employed for erasing a letter or number.
Enamel powder made into a paste with
water, oil, or turpentine is also used for
this purpose. It should be previously
levigated so as to obtain several degrees of
fineness. The powder used for repol-
ishing the surface, where an impression
has been removed, must be extremely
fine. It is applied with a piece of peg-
208
CLEANING PREPARATIONS AND METHODS
wood or ivory. The best method is to
employ diamond powder. Take a little
of the powder, make into a paste with
fine oil, on the end of a copper polisher
the surface of which has been freshly filed
and slightly rounded. The marks will
rapidly disappear when rubbed with this.
The surface is left a little dull; it may be
rendered bright by rubbing with the
same powder mixed with a greater quan-
tity of oil, and applied with a stick of
pegwood. Watchmakers will do well to
try on disused dials several degrees of
fineness of the diamond powder.
Cleaning Pearls. — Pearls turn yellow
in the course of time by absorbing per-
spiration on account of being worn in the
hair, at the throat, and on the arms.
There are several ways of rendering
them white again.
I. — The best process is said to be to
put the pearls into a bag with wheat bran
and to heat the bag over a coal fire, with
constant motion.
II. — Another method is to bring 8
parts each of well-calcined, finely pow-
dered lime and wood charcoal, which
has been strained through a gauze sieve,
to a boil with 500 parts of pure rain
water, suspend the pearls over the steam
of the boiling water until they are
warmed through, and then boil them in
the liquid for 5 minutes, turning fre-
quently. Let them cool in the liquid,
take them out, and wash off well with
clean water.
III. — Place the pearls in a piece of fine
linen, throw salt on them, and tie them
up. Next rinse the tied-up pearls in
lukewarm water until all the salt has
been extracted, and dry them at an ordi-
nary temperature.
IV. — The pearls may also be boiled
about | hour in cow's milk into which a
little cheese or soap has been scraped;
take them out, rinse off in fresh water,
and dry them with a clean, white cloth.
V. — Another method is to have the
pearls, strung on a silk thread or wrapped
up in thin gauze, mixed in a loaf of bread
01 barley flour and to have the loaf baked
well in an oven, but not too brown.
When cool remove the pearls.
VI. — Hang the pearls for a couple of
minutes in hot, strong, wine vinegar or
highly diluted sulphuric acid, remove,
and rinse them in water. Do not leave
them too long in the acid, otherwise they
will be injured by it.
GLASS CLEANING:
Cleaning Preparation for Glass with
Metal Decorations. — Mix 1,000 parts of
denaturized spirit (96 per cent) with 150
parts, by weight, of ammonia; 20 parts
of acetic ether; 15 parts of ethylic ether;
200 parts of Vienna lime; 950 parts of
bolus; and 550 parts of oleine. With
this mixture both glass and metal can be
quickly and thoroughly cleaned. It is
particularly recommended for show
windows ornamented with metal.
Paste for Cleaning Glass. —
Prepared chalk 6 pounds
Powdered French
chalk 1^ pounds
Phosphate calcium. . . 2J pounds
Quillaia bark 2J pounds
Carbonate ammonia. . 18 ounces
Rose pink 6 ounces
Mix the ingredients, in fine powder,
and sift through muslin. Then mix
with soft water to the consistency of
cream, and apply to the glass by means
of a soft rag or sponge; allow it to dry on,
wipe off with a cloth, and polish with
chamois.
Cleaning Optical Lenses. — For this
purpose a German contemporary rec-
ommends vegetable pith. The medulla
of rushes, elders, or sunflowers is cut out,
the pieces are dried and pasted singly
alongside of one another upon a piece of
cork, whereby a brush-like apparatus is
obtained, which is passed over the sur-
face of the lens. For very small lenses
pointed pieces of elder pith are em-
ployed. To dip dirty and greasy lenses
into oil of turpentine or ether and rub
them with a linen rag, as has been pro-
posed, seems hazardous, because the Can-
ada balsam with which the lenses are
cemented might dissolve.
To Remove Glue from Glass. — If glue
has simply dried upon the glass hot
water ought to remove it. If, however,
the spots are due to size (the gelatinous
wash used by painters) when dried they
become very refractory and recourse
must be had to chemical means for their
removal. The commonest size being a
solution of gelatin, alum, and rosin dis-
solved in a solution of soda and com-
bined with starch, hot solutions of caus-
tic soda or of potash may be used. If
that fails to remove them, try diluted
hydrochloric, sulphuric, or any of the
stronger acids. If the spots still remain
some abrasive powder (flour of emery)
must be used and the glass repolished
with jewelers' rouge applied by means of
a chamois skin. Owing to the varied
nature of sizes used the above are only
suggestions.
Cleaning Window Panes. — Take di-
luted nitric acid about as strong as strong
CLEANING PREPARATIONS AND METHODS
209
vinegar and pass it over the glass pane,
leave it to act a minute and throw on
pulverized whiting, but just enough to
give off a hissing sound. Now rub both
with the hand over the whole pane and
polish with a dry rag. Rinse off with
clean water and a little alcohol and polish
dry and clear. Repeat the process on
the other side. The nitric acid removes
all impurities which have remained on
the glass at the factory, and even with
inferior panes a good appearance is ob-
tained.
To Clean Store Windows.— For clean-
ing the large panes of glass of store win-
dows, and also ordinary show cases, a
semiliquid paste may be employed,
made of calcined magnesia and purified
benzine. The glass should be rubbed
with a cotton rag until it is brilliant.
Cleaning Lamp Globes. — Pour 2 spoon-
fuls of a slightly heated solution of potash
into the globe, moisten the whole surface
with it, and rub the stains with a fine
linen rag; rinse the globe with clean
water and carefully dry it with a fine, soft
cloth.
To Clean Mirrors. — Rub the mirror
with a ball of soft paper slightly damp-
ened with methylated spirits, then with a
duster on which a little whiting has been
sprinkled, and finally polish with clean
paper or a wash leather. This treatment
will make the glass beautifully bright.
To Clean Milk Glass.— To remove oil
spots from milk glass panes and lamp
globes, knead burnt magnesia with ben-
zine to a plastic mass, which must be
kept in a tight-closing bottle. A little of
this substance rubbed on the spot with a
linen rag will make it disappear.
To Remove Oil-Paint Spots from
Glass. — If the window panes have been
bespattered with oil paint in painting
walls, the spots are, of course, easily re-
moved while wet. When they have
become dry the operation is more diffi-
cult and alcohol and turpentine in equal
parts, or spirit of sal ammoniac should be
used to soften the paint. After that go
over it with chalk. Polishing with salt
will also remove paint spots. The salt
grates somewhat, but it is not hard
enough to cause scratches in the glass; a
subsequent polishing with chalk is also
advisable, as the drying of the salt might
injure the glass. For scratching off soft
paint spots sheet zinc must be used, as it
cannot damage the glass on account of its
softness. In the case of silicate paints
(the so-called weather-proof coatings) the
panes must be especially protected, be-
cause these paints destroy the polish ot
the glass. Rubbing the spots with
brown soap is also a good way of remov-
ing the spots, but care must be taken in
rinsing off that the window frames are
not acted upon.
Removing Silver Stains. — The follow-
ing solution will remove silver stains
from the hands, and also from woolen,
linen, or cotton goods:
Mercuric chloride. ... 1 part
Ammonia muriate. ... 1 part
Water 8 parts
The compound is poisonous.
MISCELLANEOUS CLEANING METH-
ODS AND PROCESSES:
Universal Cleaner. —
Green soap 20 to 25 parts
Boiling water 750 parts
Liquid ammonia,
caustic 30 to 40 parts
Acetic ether 20 to 30 parts
Mix.
To Clean Playing Cards.— Slightly
soiled playing cards may be made clean
by rubbing them with a soft rag dipped
in a solution of camphor. Very little of
the latter is necessary.
To Remove Vegetable Growth from
Buildings. — To remove moss and lichen
from stone and masonry, apply water
in which 1 per cent of carbolic acid has
been dissolved. After a few hours the
plants can be washed off with water.
Solid Cleansing Compound. — The basis
of most of the solid grease eradicators
is benzine and the simplest form is a
benzine jelly made by shaking 3 ounces
of tincture of quillaia (soap bark) with
enough benzine to make 16 fluidounces.
Benzine may also be solidified by the use
of a soap with addition of an excess of
alkali. Formulas in which soaps are
used in this way follow:
I. — Cocoanut-oil soap. 2 av. ounces
Ammonia water. . . 3 fluidounces
Solution of potas-
sium 1^ fluidounces
Water enough to
make 12 fluidounces
Dissolve the soap with the aid of heat
in 4 fluidounces of water, add the am-
monia and potassa and the remainder of
the water.
If the benzine is added in small por-
tions, and thoroughly agitated, 2£ fluid-
ounces of the above will be found suffi-
cient tp solidify 32 fluidounces of benzine.
210
CLEANING PREPARATIONS— COFFEE
II. — Castile soap, white. 3i av. ounces
Water, boiling 3J fluidounces
Water of ammonia 5 fluidrachms
Benzine enough to
make 16 fluidounces
Dissolve the soap in the water, and
when cold, add the other ingredients.
To Clean Oily Bottles.— Use 2 heaped
tablespoonfuls (for every quart of capac-
ity) of fine sawdust or wheat bran, and
shake well to cover the interior surface
thoroughly; let stand a few minutes and
then add about a gill of cold water. If
the bottle be then rotated in a horizontal
position, it will usually be found clean
after a single treatment. In the case of
drying oils, especially when old, the bot-
tles should be moistened inside with a
little ether, and left standing a few hours
before the introduction of sawdust.
This method is claimed to be more rapid
and convenient than the customary one
of using strips of paper, soap solution,
etc.
Cork Cleaner. — Wash in 10 per cent
solution of hydrochloric acid, then im-
merse in a solution of sodium hypo-
sulphite and hydrochloric acid. Finally
the corks are washed with a solution of
soda and pure water. Corks containing
oil or fat cannot be cleaned by this
method.
To Clean Sponges. — Rinse well first in
very weak, warm, caustic-soda lye, then
with clean water, and finally leave the
sponges in a solution of bromine in water
until clean. They will whiten sooner if
exposed to the sun in the bromine water.
Then repeat the rinsings in weak lye
and clean water, using the latter till all
smell of bromine has disappeared. Dry
quickly and in the sun if possible.
CLEARING BATHS:
See Photography.
CLICHE METALS:
See Alloys.
CLOCK-DIAL LETTERING:
See Watchmakers' Formulas.
CLOCK-HAND COLORING:
See Metals.
CLOCK OIL:
See Oil.
CLOCK REPAIRING:
See Watchmaking.
CLOCKMAKERS' CLEANING PROC-
ESSES.
See Cleaning Preparations and Meth-
ods.
CLOTH TO IRON, GLUEING:
See Adhesives.
CLOTHES CLEANERS:
See Cleaning Preparations and Meth
ods; also, Household Formulas.
CLOTHS FOR POLISHING:
See Polishes.
CLOTH, WATERPROOFING:
See Waterproofing.
CLOTHING, CARE OF:
See Household Formulas.
COACH VARNISH:
See Varnishes.
COALS, TO EAT BURNING:
See Pyrotechnics.
COAL OIL:
See Oil.
COBALTIZING:
See Plating.
COCOAS:
See Beverages.
COCOA CORDIAL:
See Wines and Liquors.
COCOANUT CAKE:
See Household Formulas and Recipes.
COCHINEAL INSECT REMEDY:
See Insecticides.
COD-LIVER OIL AND ITS EMULSION:
See Oil, Cod-Liver.
COFFEE, SUBSTITUTES FOR.
I. — Acorn. — From acorns deprived of
their shells, husked, dried, and roasted.
II. — Bean. — Horse beans roasted along
with a little honey or sugar.
III. — Beet Root. — From the yellow
beet root, sliced, dried in a kiln or oven,
and ground with a little coffee.
IV. — Dandelion. — From dandelion
roots, sliced, dried, roasted, and ground
with a little caramel.
All the above are roasted, before grind-
ing them, with a little fat or lard. Those
which are larger than coffee berries are
cut into small slices before being roasted.
They possess none of the exhilarating
properties or medicinal virtues of the
genuine coffee.
V. — Chicory. — This is a common adul-
terant. The roasted root is prepared by
cutting the full-grown root into slices,
and exposing it to heat in iron cylinders,
along with about 1A per cent or 2 per
cent of lard, in a similar way to that
adopted for coffee. When ground to
powder in a mill it constitutes the ebi-
COFFEE— COLD AND COUGH MIXTURES
cory coffee so generally employed both
as a substitute for coffee and as an
adulterant. The addition of 1 part of
good, fresh, roasted chicory to 10 or 12
parts of coffee forms a mixture which
yields a beverage of a fuller flavor, and
of a deeper color than that furnished by
an equal quantity of pure or unmixed
coffee. In this way a less quantity of
coffee may be used, but it should be re-
membered that the article substituted
for it does not possess in any degree the
peculiar exciting, soothing, and hunger-
staying properties of that valuable prod-
uct. The use, however, of a larger
proportion of chicory than that just
named imparts to the beverage an in-
sipid flavor, intermediate between that
•f treacle and licorice; while the con-
tinual use of roasted chicory, or highly
chicorized coffee, seldom fails to weaken
the powers of digestion and derange the
bowels.
COFFEE CORDIAL:
See Wines and Liquors.
COFFEE EXTRACTS:
See Essences and Extracts.
COFFEE SYRUPS:
See Syrups.
COFFEE FOR THE SODA FOUN-
TAIN:
See Beverages.
COIL SPRING:
See Steel.
COIN CLEANING:
See Cleaning Preparations and Meth-
ods.
COINS, IMPRESSIONS OF:
See Matrix Mass.
COIN METAL:
See Alloys.
COLAS:
See Veterinary Formulas.
Cold and Cough Mixtures
Cough Syrup. — The simplest form of
cough syrup of good keeping quality is
syrup of wild cherry containing am-
monium chloride in the dose of 2i grains
to each teaspoonful. Most of the other
compounds contain ingredients that are
prone to undergo fermentation.
I. — Ipecacuanha wine 1 fluidounce
Spirit of anise. ... 1 fluidrachrn
Syrup 10 fluidounces
Syrup of squill.. .. 8
Tincture of Tolu. 4
Distilled water
enough to make 30
II. — Heroin 6
Aromatic sulphur-
ic acid 1
Concentrated acid
infusion of roses 4
Distilled water. . . 5
Glycerine 5
Oxymel of squill.. 10
fluidounces
fluidrachms
fluidounces
grains
fluidounces
fluidounces
fluidounces
fluidounces
fluidounces
III. — Glycerine 2 fluidounces
Fluid extract of
wild cherry .... 4 fluidounces
Oxymel 10 fluidounces
Syrup 10 fluidounces
Cochineal, a sufficient quantity.
Benzoic-Acid Pastilles. —
Benzoic acid 105 parts
Rhatany extract .... 525 parts
Tragacanth 35 parts
Sugar 140 parts
The materials, in the shape of pow-
ders, are mixed well and sufficient fruit
paste added to bring the mass up to 4,500
parts. Roll out and divide into lozenges
weighing 20 grains each.
Cough Balsam with Iceland Moss. —
Solution of morphine
acetate 12 parts
Sulphuric acid, dilute 12 parts
Cherry-laurel water. 12 parts
Orange-flower water,
triple 24 parts
Syrup, simple 128 parts
Glycerine 48 parts
Tincture of saffron. . 8 parts
Decoction of Iceland
moss 112 parts
Mix. Dose: One teaspoonful.
Balsamic Cough Syrup. —
Balsam of Peru 2 drachms
Tincture of Tolu .... 4 drachms
Camphorated tincture
of opium 4 ounces
Powdered extract lic-
orice 1 ounce
Syrup squill 4 ounces
Syrup dextrine (glu-
cose) sufficient lo
make 16 ounces
Add the balsam of Peru to the tinc-
tures, and in a mortar rub up the extract
of licorice with the syrups. Mix to-
gether and direct to be taken in tea-
spoonful doses.
Whooping-Cough Remedies. — The fol-
lowing mixture is a spray to be used
COLD AND COUGH MIXTURES— CONDIMENTS
in the sick room in cases of whooping
cough:
Thymol 1.0
Tincture of eucalyptus. 30.0
Tincture of benzoin .... 30.0
Alcohol 100.0
Water enough to make 1000.0
Mix. Pour some of the mixture on a
cloth and hold to mouth so that the mix-
ture is inhaled, thereby giving relief.
Expectorant Mixtures. —
I. — Ammon. chloride. 1 drachm
Potass, chlorate.. 30 grains
Paregoric 2 nuidrachms
Syrup of ipecac. . . 2 fluidrachms
Syrup wild cherry
enough to make 2 fluidounces
Dose: One teaspoonful.
II. — Potass, chlorate.. 1 drachm
Tincture guaiac . . 3£ drachms
Tincture rhubarb. 1 $ drachms
Syrup wild cherry
enough to make 3 fluidounces
. Dose: One teaspoonful.
Eucalyptus Bonbons for Coughs. —
Eucalyptus oil 5 parts
Tartaric acid 15 parts
Extract of malt .... 24 parts
Cacao 100 parts
Peppermint oil .... 1.4 parts
Bonbon mass 2,203 parts
Mix and make into bonbons weighing
30 grains each.
COLD CREAM:
See Cosmetics.
COLIC IN CATTLE:
See Veterinary Formulas.
COLLODION.
Turpentine 5 parts
Ether and alcohol. ... 10 parts
Collodion 94 parts
Castor oil 1 part
Dissolve the turpentine in the ether
and alcohol mixture (in equal parts) and
filter, then add to the mixture of collo-
dion and castor oil. This makes a good
elastic collodion.
See also Court Plaster, Liquid.
COLOGNE:
See Perfumes.
COLOGNE FOR HEADACHES:
See Headaches.
COLORS:
See Dyes and Pigments.
COLORS, FUSIBLE ENAMEL:
See Enameling.
COLORS FOR PAINTS:
See Paint.
COLOR PHOTOGRAPHY:
See Photography.
COLORS FOR SYRUPS:
See Syrups.
CONCRETE:
See Stone, Artificial.
Condiments
Chowchow. —
Curry powder 4 ounces
Mustard powder 6 ounces
Ginger 3 ounces
Turmeric 2 ounces
Cayenne 2 drachms
Black pepper powder. 2 drachms
Coriander 1 drachm
Allspice 1 drachm
Mace 30 grains
Thyme 30 grains
Savory 30 grains
Celery seed 2 drachms
Cider vinegar 2 gallons
Mix all the powders with the vinegar,
and steep the mixture over a very gentle
fire for 3 hours. The pickles are to be
parboiled with salt, and drained, and the
spiced vinegar, prepared as above, is to
be poured over them while it is still
warm. The chowchow keeps best in
small jars, tightly covered.
Essence of Extract of Soup Herbs. —
Thyme, 4 ounces ; winter savory, 4 ounces ;
sweet marjoram, 4 ounces; sweet basil,
4 ounces; grated lemon peel, 1 ounce;
eschalots, 2 ounces; bruised celery seed,
1 ounce; alcohol (50 per cent), 64 ounces.
Mix the vegetables, properly bruised, add
the alcohol, close the container and set
aside in a moderately warm place to digest
for 15 days. Filter and press out. Pre-
serve in 4-ounce bottles, well corked.
Tomato Bouillon Extract. — Toma-
toes, 1 quart; arrowroot, 2 ounces; ex-
tract of beef, 1 ounce; bay leaves, 1
ounce; cloves> 2 ounces; red pepper, 4
drachms; Worcestershire sauce, quantity
sufficient to flavor. Mix.
Mock Turtle Extract.— Extract of
beef, 2 ounces; concentrated chicken,
2 ounces; clam juice, 8 ounces; tincture
of black pepper, 1 ounce; extract of
celery, 3 drachms; extract of orange peel,
soluble, 1 drachm; hot water enough to
make 2 quarts.
CONDIMENTS
RELISHES:
Digestive Relish. —
I. — Two ounces Jamaica ginger; 2
ounces black peppercorns; 1 ounce mus-
tard seed; 1 ounce coriander fruit (seed);
1 ounce pimento (allspice); J ounce
inace; ^ ounce cloves; \ ounce nutmegs;
\ ounce chili pods; 3 drachms cardamom
seeds; 4 ounces garlic; 4 ounces escha-
lots; 4 pints malt vinegar.
Bruise spices, garlic, etc., and boil in
vinegar for 15 minutes and strain. To
this add 2£ pints mushroom ketchup;
1 o pints India soy.
Again simmer for 15 minutes' and
strain through muslin.
II. — One pound soy; 50 ounces best
vinegar; 4 ounces ketchup; 4 ounces gar-
lic; 4 ounces eschalots; 4 ounces capsi-
cum; \ ounce cloves; \ ounce mace; \
ounce cinnamon; 1 drachm cardamom
seeds. Boil well and strain.
Lincolnshire Relish. — Two ounces gar-
lic; 2 ounces Jamaica ginger; 3 ounces
black peppercorns; f ounce cayenne pep-
per; | ounce ossein; f ounce nutmeg;
2 ounces salt ; 1 \ pints India soy.
Enough malt vinegar to make 1 gallon.
Bruise spices, garlic, etc., and simmer
in \ a gallon of vinegar for 20 minutes,
strain and add soy and sufficient vinegar
to make 1 gallon, then boil for 5 minutes.
Keep in bulk as long as possible.
Curry Powder. —
I. — Coriander seed 6 drachms
Turmeric 5 scruples
Fresh ginger 4£ drachms
Cumin seed. . 18 grains
Black pepper 54 grains
Poppy seed 94 grains
Garlic 2 heads
Cinnamon 1 scruple
Cardamom 5 seeds
Cloves 8 only
Chillies 1 or 2 pods
Grated cocoanut. .
II. — Coriander seed \ pound
Turmeric J pound
Cinnamon seed 2 ounces
Cayenne ....-....'.. \ ounce
Mustard 1 ounce
Ground ginger 1 ounce
Allspice \ ounce
Fenugreek seed 2 ounces
TABLE SAUC1
jtershire Sauce. —
Pimento 2 drachms
Clove 1 drachm
Black pepper 1 drachm
Ginger 1 drachm
Curry powder 1 ounce
Capsicum 1 drachm
Mustard 2 ounces
Shallots, bruised 2 ounces
Salt 2 ounces
Brown sugar 8 ounces
Tamarinds 4 ounces
Sherry wine 1 pint
Wine vinegar 2 pints
The spices must be freshly bruised.
The ingredients are to simmer together
with the vinegar for an hour, adding
more of the vinegar as it is lost by evap-
oration; then add the wine, and if de-
sired some caramel coloring. Set aside
for a week, strain, and bottle.
Table Sauce. — Brown sugar, 16 parts;
tamarinds, 16 parts; onions, 4 parts;
powdered ginger, 4 parts; salt, 4 parts;
garlic, 2 parts; cayenne, 2 parts; soy, 2
parts; ripe apples, 64 parts; mustard
powder, 2 parts; curry powder, 1 part;
vinegar, quantity sufficient. Pare and
core the apples, boil them in sufficient
vinegar with the tamarinds and raisins
until soft, then pulp through a fine sieve.
Pound the onions and garlic in a mortar
and add the pulp to that of the apples.
Then add the other ingredients and vin-
egar, 60 parts; heat to boiling, cool, and
add sherry wine, 10 parts, and enough
vinegar to make the sauce just pourable.
If a sweet sauce is desired add sufficient
treacle before the final boiling.
Epicure's Sauce. — Eight ounces tam-
arinds; 12 ounces sultana raisins; 2
ounces garlic; 4 ounces eschalots; 4
ounces horse-radish root; 2 ounces black
pepper ; \ ounce chili pods ; 3 ounces
raw Jamaica ginger; \\ pounds golden
syrup; 1 pound burnt sugar (caramel);
1 ounce powdered cloves; 1 pint India
soy; 1 gallon malt vinegar. Bruise roots,
spices, etc., and boil in vinegar for 15
minutes, then strain. To the strained
liquor add golden syrup, soy, and burnt
sugar, then simmer for 10 minutes.
Piccalilli Sauce.— One drachm chili
pods; 1^ ounces black peppercorns;
\ ounce pimento; f ounce garlic; \ gal-
lon malt vinegar. Bruise spices and
garlic, boil in the vinegar for 10 minutes,
and strain.
One ounce ground Jamaica ginger;
1 ounce turmeric; 2 ounces flower of mus-
tard; 2 ounces powdered natal arrowroot;
8 ounces strong acetic acid. Rub pow-
ders in a mortar with acetic acid and
add to above, then boil for 5 minutes,
or until it thickens.
FLAVORING SPICES.
I. — Five ounces powdered cinnamon
bark; 2£ ounces powdered cloves; 2£
CONDIMENTS
ounces powdered nutmegs; 1J ounces
powdered caraway seeds; 1J ounces
powdered coriander seeds; 1 ounce pow-
dered Jamaica ginger; i ounce powdered
allspice. Let all be dry and in fine pow-
der. Mix and pass through a sieve.
II. — Pickling Spice. — Ten pounds
small Jamaica ginger; 2 A pounds black
peppercorns; l£ pounds white pepper-
corns; 1J pounds allspice; f pound long
pepper; 1J pounds mustard seed; £
pound chili pods. Cut up ginger and
long pepper into small pieces, and mix
all the other ingredients intimately.
One ounce to each pint of boiling vin-
egar is sufficient, but it may be made
stronger if desired hot.
Essence of Savory Spices. — Two and
one-half ounces black peppercorns; 1
ounce pimento; f ounce nutmeg; ^ ounce
mace; | ounce cloves; \ ounce cinnamon
bark; J ounce caraway seeds; 20 grains
cayenne pepper; 15 ounces spirit of wine;
5 ounces distilled water. Bruise all the
spices and having mixed spirit and water,
digest in mixture 14 days, shaking fre-
quently, then filter.
MUSTARD :
The Prepared Mustards of Commerce.
— The mustard, i. e., the flower or pow-
dered seed, used in preparing the different
condiments, is derived from three varie-
ties of Brassica (Cruciferoe) — Brassica
alba L,, Brassica nigra, and Brassica
juncea. The first yields the "white"
seed of commerce, which produces a mild
mustard; the second the "black" seed,
yielding the more pungent powder; and
the latter a very pungent and oily mus-
tard, much employed by Russians. The
pungency of the condiment is also af-
fected by the method of preparing the
paste, excessive heat destroying the
sharpness completely. The pungency
is further controlled and tempered, in
the cold processes, by the addition of
wheat or rye flour, which also has the
advantage of serving as a binder of the
mustard. The mustard flour is pre-
pared by first decorticating the seed,
then grinding to a fine powder, the ex-
pression of the fixed oil from which
completes the process. This oil, unlike
the volatile, is of a mild, pleasant taste,
and of a greenish color, which, it is said,
makes it valuable in the sophistication
and imitation of "olive" oils, refined,
cottonseed, or peanut oil being thus con-
verted into huile merge de Lucca, Flor-
ence, or some other noted brand of olive
oil. It is also extensively used for illu-
minating purposes, especially in south-
ern Russia.
The flavors, other than that of the
mustard itself, of the various prepara-
tions are imparted by the judicious use
of spices — cinnamon, nutmeg, cloves,
pimento, etc. — aromatic herbs, such as
thyme, sage, chervil, parsley, mint,
marjoram, tarragon, etc., and finally
chives, onions, shallots, leeks, garlic,
etc.
In preparing the mustards on a large
scale, the mustard flower and wheat
or rye flour are mixed and ground to a
smooth paste with vinegar, must (un-
fermented grape juice), wine, or what-
ever is used in the preparation, a mill
similar to a drug or paint mill being used
for the purpose. This dough immedi-
ately becomes spongy, and in this condi-
tion, technically called "cake," is used
as the basis of the various mustards of
commerce.
Mustard Cakes. — In the mixture, the
amount cf flour used depends on the
pungency of the mustard flower, and the
flavor desired to be imparted to the fin-
ished product. The cakes are broadly
divided into the yellow and the brown.
A general formula for the yellow cake is:
Yellow mustard, from 20 to 30 per
cent; salt, from 1 to 3 per cent; spices,
from J to £ of 1 per cent; wheat flour,
from 8 to 12 per cent.
Vinegar, must, or wine, complete the
mixture.
The brown cake is made with black
mustard, and contains about the follow-
ing proportions:
Black mustard, from 20 to 30 per
cent; salt, from 1 to 3 per cent; spices,
from I to £ of 1 per cent; wheat or rye
flour, from 10 to 15 per cent.
The variations are so wide, however,
that it is impossible to give exact pro-
portions. In the manufacture of table
mustards, in fact, as in every other kind
of manufacture, excellence is attained
only by practice and the exercise of
sound judgment and taste by the manu-
facturer.
Moutarde des Jesuittes. — Twelve sar-
dels and 280 capers are crushed into a
paste and stirred into 3 pints of boiling
wine vinegar. Add 4 ounces of brown
cake and 8 ounces of yellow cake and
mix well.
Kirschner Wine Mustard. — Reduce 30
quarts of freshly expressed grape juice
to half that quantity, by boiling over a
moderate fire, on a water bath. Dissolve
in the boiling liquid 5 pounds of sugar,
and pour the syrup through a colander
containing 2 or 3 large horse-radishes cut
CONDIMENTS
215
into very thin slices and laid on a coarse
towel spread over the bottom and sides
of the colander. To the colate add the
following, all in a state of fine powder:
Cardamom seeds .... 2^ drachms
Nutmeg 2 1 drachms
Cloves 44 drachms
Cinnamon 1 ounce
Ginger 1 ounce
Brown mustard cake. 6 pounds
Yellow mustard cake. 9 pounds
Grind all together to a perfectly
smooth paste, and strain several times
through muslin.
Duesseldorff Mustard. — .
Brown mustard cake. 10 ounces
Yellow mustard cake. 48 ounces
Boiling water 96 ounces
Wine vinegar 64 ounces
Cinnamon 5 drachms
Cloves 15 drachms
Sugar 64 ounces
Wine, gofod white .... 64 ounces
Mix after the general directions given
above.
German Table Mustard. —
Laurel leaves 8 ounces
Cinnamon 5 drachms
Cardamom seeds.... 2 drachms
Sugar. . 64 ounces
Wine vinegar 96 ounces
Brown cake 10 ounces
Yellow cake 48 ounces
Mix after general directions as given
above.
% Krems Mustard, Sweet. —
Yellow cake 10 pounds
Brown cake 20 pounds
Fresh grape juice .... 6 pints
Mix and boil down to the proper con-
sistency.
Krems Mustard, Sour. —
Brown mustard flour. 30 parts
Yellow mustard flour. 10 parts
Grape juice, fresh. ... 8 parts
Mix and boil down to a paste and then
stir in 8 parts of wine vinegar.
Tarragon Mustard. —
Brown mustard flour. 40 parts
Yellow mustard flour. 20 parts
Vinegar 6 parts
Tarragon vinegar. ... 6 parts
Boil the mustard in the vinegar and
add the tarragon vinegar.
Tarragon Mustard, Sharp. — This is
prepared by adding to every 100 pounds
of the above 21 ounces of white pepper,
5 ounces of pimento, and 2 J ounces of cloves,
mixing thoroughly by grinding together
in a mill, then put in a warm spot and let
stand for 10 days or 2 weeks. Finally
strain.
Moutarde aux Epices. —
Mustard flour, yellow. 10 pounds
Mustard flour, brown. 40 pounds
Tarragon 1 pound
Basil, herb 5 ounces
Laurel leaves 12 drachms
White pepper 3 ounces
Cloves 12 drachms
Mace 2 drachms
Vinegar 1 gallon
Mix the herbs and macerate them in
the vinegar to exhaustion, then add to
the mustards, and grind together. Set
aside for a week or ten days, then strain
through muslin.
In all the foregoing formulas where
the amount of salt is not specified, it is to
be added according to the taste or dis-
cretion of the manufacturer.
Mustard Vinegar. —
Celery, chopped fine. 32 parts
Tarragon, the fresh
herb 6 parts
Cloves, coarsely pow-
dered 6 parts
Onions, chopped fine 6 parts
Lemon peel, fresh,
chopped fine 3 parts
White-wine vinegar. . 575 parts
White wine 515 parts
Mustard seed,
crushed 100 parts
Mix and macerate together for a week
or 10 days in a warm place, then strain
off.
Ravigotte Mustard. —
Parsley 2 parts
Chervil 2 parts
Chives 2 parts
Cloves 1 part
Garlic 1 part
Thyme 1 part
Tarragon 1 part
Salt 8 parts
Olive oil 4 parts
White- wine vinegar. . 128 parts
Mustard flower, sufficient.
Cut or bruise the plants and spices,
and macerate them in the vinegar for 15
or 20 days. Strain the liquid through a
cloth and add the salt. Rub up mustard
with the olive oil in a vessel set in ice,
adding a little of the spiced vinegar from
time to time, until the whole is incorpo-
rated and the complete mixture makes
384 parts.
216
CONDIMENTS— CONFECTIONERY
CONDIMENTS, TESTS FOR ADUL-
TERATED:
See Foods.
CONDITION POWDERS FOR CAT-
TLE:
See Veterinary Formulas.
CONDUCTIVITY OF ALUMINUM AL-
LOYS:
See Alloys.
Confectionery
Cream Bonbons for Hoarseness. —
Stir into 500 parts of cream 500 parts of
white sugar. Put in a pan and cook,
with continuous stirring, until it becomes
brown and viscid. Now put in a bak-
ing tin and smooth out, as neatly as pos-
sible, to the thickness of, say, twice that
of the back of a table knife and let it
harden. Before it gets completely hard
draw lines with a knife across the sur-
face in such manner that when it is quite
hard it will break along them, easily, into
bits the size of a lozenge.
Nut Candy Sticks.— Cook to 320° F.
8 pounds best sugar in 2 pints water,
with 4 pounds glucose added. Pour out
on an oiled slab and add 5 pounds al-
monds, previously blanched, cut in small
pieces, and dried in the drying room.
Mix up well together to incorporate the
nuts thoroughly with the sugar. When
it has cooled enough to be handled, form
into a round mass on the slab and spin
out m long, thin sticks.
Fig Squares. — Place 5 pounds of
sugar and 5 pounds of glucose in a cop-
per pan, with water enough to dissolve
the sugar. Set on the fire, and when it
starts to boil add 5 pounds of ground
figs. Stir and cook to 240° on the ther-
mometer. Set off the fire, and then add
5 pounds of fine cocoanuts; mix well and
pour out on greased marble, roll smooth,
and cut like caramels.
Caramels. — Heat 10 pounds sugar and
8 pounds glucose in a copper kettle until
dissolved. Add cream to the mixture,
at intervals, until 2£ Quarts are used.
Add 2J pounds caramel butter and 12
ounces paraffine wax to the mixture.
Cook to a rather stiff ball, add nuts, pour
out between iron bars and, when cool
enough, cut into strips. For the white
ones flavor with vanilla, and add 2
pounds melted chocolate liquor for the
chocolate caramel when nearly cooked.
Candy Orange Drops.— It is compar-
atively easy to make a hard candy, but
to put the material into "drop" form
apparently requires experience and a
machine. To make the candy itself,
put, say, a pint of water into a suitable
pan or kettle, heat to boiling, and add
gradually to it 2 pounds or more of sugar,
stirring well so as to avoid the risk of
burning the sugar. Continue boiling
the syrup so formed until a little of it
poured on a cold slab forms a mass of the
required hardness. If the candy is to be
of orange flavor, a little fresh oil of or-
ange is added just before the mass is
ready to set and the taste is improved
according to the general view at least
by adding, also, say, 2 drachms of citric
acid dissolved in a very little water. As
a coloring an infusion of safflower or
tincture of turmeric is used.
To make such a mass into tablets, it is
necessary only to pour out on a well-
greased slab, turning the edges back if
inclined to run, until the candy is firm,
and then scoring with a knife so that
it can easily be broken into pieces when
cold. To make "drops" a suitable
mold is necessary.
Experiment as to the sufficiency of the
boiling in making candy may be saved
and greater certainty of a good result se-
cured by the use of a chemical thermom-
eter. As the syrup is boiled and the
water evaporates the temperature of the
liquid rises. When it reaches 220° F.,
the sugar is then in a condition to yield
the "thread" form; at 240° "soft ball"
is formed; at 245°, "hard ball"; at 252°,
"crack"; and at 290°, "hard crack."
By simply suspending the thermometer
in the liquid and observing it from time
to time, one may know exactly when to
end the boiling.
Gum Drops. — Grind 25 pounds of
Arabian or Senegal gum, place it in a
copper pan or in a steam jacket kettle,
and pour 3 gallons of boiling water over
it; stir it up well. Now set the pan with
the gum into another pan containing
boiling water and stir the gum slowly
until dissolved, then strain it through a
No. 40 sieve. Cook 19 pounds of sugar
with sufficient water, 2 pounds of glu-
cose, and a teaspoonful of cream of tar-
tar to a stiff ball, pour it over the gum,
mix well, set the pan on the kettle with the
hot water, and let it steam for 1£ hours,
taking care that the water in the kettle
does not run dry; then open the door of
the stove and cover the fire with ashes,
and let the gum settle for nearly an hour,
then remove the scum which has settled
on top, flavor and run out with the fun-
CONFECTIONERY
nel dropper into the starch impressions,
and place the trays in the drying room
for 2 days, or until dry; then take the
drops out of the starch, clean them off
well and place them in crystal pans, one
or two layers. Cook sugar and water
to 34 J° on the syrup gauge and pour over
the drops lukewarm. Let stand in a
moderately warm place over night, then
drain the syrup off, and about an hour
afterwards knock the gum drops out on a
clean table, pick them apart, and place
on trays until dry, when they are ready for
sale.
A Good Summer Taffy. — Place in a
kettle 4 pounds of sugar, 3 pounds of
glucose, and 1J pints of water; when it
boils drop in a piece of butter half the
size of an egg and about 2 ounces of
paraffine wax. Cook to 262°, pour on a
slab, and when cool enough, pull, flavor,
and color if you wish. Pull until light,
then spin out on the table in strips about 3
inches wide and cut into 4- or 4^-inch
lengths. Then wrap in wax paper for
the counter. This taffy keeps long with-
out being grained by the heat.
Chewing Candy. — Place 20 pounds of
sugar in a copper pan, add 20 pounds of
glucose, and enough water to easily dis-
solve the sugar. Set on the fire or cook
in the steam pan in 2 quarts of water.
Have a pound of egg albumen soaked in
2 quarts of water. Beat this like eggs
into a very stiff froth, add gradually the
sugar and glucose; when well beaten up,
add 5 pounds of powdered sugar, and
beat at very little heat either in the steam
beater or on a pan of boiling water until
light, and does not stick to the back of
the hand, flavor with vanilla, and put in
trays dusted with fine sugar. When cold
it may be cut, or else it may be stretched
out on a sugar-dusted table, cut, and
wrapped in wax paper. This chewing
candy has to be kept in a very dry place,
or else it will run and get sticky.
Montpelier Cough Drops. —
Brown sugar 10 pounds
Tartaric acid 2 ounces
Cream of tartar £ ounce
Water I| quarts
Anise-seed flavoring,
quantity sufficient.
Melt the sugar in the water, and when
at a sharp boil add the cream of tartar.
Cover the pan for 5 minutes. Remove
the lid and let the sugar boil up to crack
degree. Turn out the batch on an oiled
slab, and when cool enough to handle
mold in the acid and flavoring. Pass it
through the acid drop rollers, and when
the drops are chipped up, and before
sifting, rub some icing with them.
Medicated Cough Drops. —
Light-brown sugar. . . 14 pounds
Tartaric acid 1^ ounces
Cream of tartar | ounce
Water 2 quarts
Anise-seed, cayenne,
clove, and pepper-
mint flavoring, a few
drops of each.
Proceed as before prescribed, but
when sufficiently cool pass the batch
through the acid tablet rollers and dust
with sugar.
Horehound Candy. —
Dutch crushed sugar. 10 pounds
Dried horehound leaves 2 ounces
Cream of tartar £ ounce
Water 2 quarts
Anise-seed flavoring,
quantity sufficient.
Pour the water on the leaves and let it
gently simmer till reduced to 3 pints; then
strain the infusion through muslin, and
add the liquid to the sugar. Put the pan
containing the syrup on the fire, and
when at a sharp boil add the cream of
tartar. Put the lid on the pan for 5 min-
utes; then remove it, and let the sugar
boil to stiff boil degree. Take the pan
off the fire and rub portions of the
sugar against the side until it produces a
creamy appearance; then add the flavor-
ing. Stir all well, and pour into square
tin frames, previously well oiled.
Menthol Cough Drops. —
Gelatin 1 ounce
Glycerine (by weight) 2^ ounces
Orange-flower water. . 2| ounces
Menthol 5 grains
Rectified spirits 1 drachm
Soak the gelatin in the water for 2
hours, then heat on a water bath until
dissolved, and add 1 \ ounces of glycerine.
Dissolve the menthol in the spirit, mix
with the remainder of the glycerine, add
to the glyco-gelatin mass, and pour into
an oiled tin tray (such as the lid of a bis-
cuit box). When the mass is cold divide
into 10 dozen pastilles.
Menthol pastilles are said to be an
excellent remedy for tickling cough as
well as laryngitis. They should be
freshly prepared, and cut oblong, so that
the patient may take half of one, or less,
as may be necessary.
Violet Flavor for Candy. —Violet fla-
vors, like violet perfumes, are very com-
plex mixtures, and their imitation is a
218
CONFECTIONERY
correspondingly difficult undertaking.
The basis is vanilla (or vanillin), rose,
and orris, with a very little of some pun-
gent oil to bring up the flavor. The fol-
lowing will give a basis upon which a
satisfactory flavor may be built:
Oil of orris 1 drachm
Oil of rose 1 drachm
Vanillin 2 drachms
Cumarin 30 grains
Oil of clove 30 minims
Alcohol 11 ounces
Water 5 ounces
Make a solution, adding the water last.
CONFECTIONERY COLORS. —The
following are excellent and entirely
harmless coloring agents for the pur-
poses named:
Red. — Cochineal syrup prepared as
follows:
Cochineal, in coarse
powder 6 parts
Potassium carbonate 2 parts
Distilled water 15 parts
Alcohol 12 parts
Simple syrup enough
to make 500 parts
Rub up the potassium carbonate and
the cochineal together, adding the water
and alcohol, little by little, under constant
trituration. Set aside over night, then
add the syrup and liltei;.
Pink.—
Carmine 1 part
Liquor potassae 6 parts
Rose water, enough
to make 48 parts
Mix. Should the color be too high,
dilute with water until the requisite tint
is acquired.
Orange. — Tincture of red sandal wood,
1 part; ethereal tincture of orlean, quan-
tity sufficient. Add the tincture of or-
lean to the sandalwood tincture until the
desired shade of orange is obtained.
A red added to any of the yellows gives
an orange color.
The aniline colors made by the "Ak-
tiengesellschaft fur Anilin - Fabrika-
tion," of Berlin, are absolutely non-toxic,
and can be used for the purposes recom-
mended, i. e., the coloration of syrups,
cakes, candies, etc., with perfect confi-
dence in their innocuity.
Pastille Yellow.—
Citron yellow II 7 parts
Grape sugar, first
quality 1 part
White dextrine 2 parts
Sap -Blue Paste.—
Dark blue 3 parts
Grape sugar 1 part
Water 6 parts
Sugar-Black Paste.—
Carbon black 3 parts
Grape sugar 1 part
Water 6 parts
Cinnabar Red.* —
Scarlet 65 parts
White dextrine 30 parts
Potato flour 5 parts
Bluish Rose.*—
Grenadine. 65 parts
White dextrine 30 parts
Potato flour 5 parts
Yellowish Rose. —
Rosa II 60. parts
Citron yellow 5 parts
White dextrine 30 parts
Potato flour 5 parts
Violet —
Red violet 65 parts
White dextrine 30 parts
Potato flour 5 parts
Carmine Green. —
Woodruff (Waldmeis-
ter) green 55 parts
Rosa II 5 parts
Dextrine 35 parts
Potato flour 5 parts
To the colors marked with an asterisk
(*) add, for every 4 pounds, 4i ounces, a
grain and a half each of potassium iodide
and sodium nitrate. Colors given in
form of powders should be dissolved in
hot water for use.
Yellow. — Various shades of yellow
may be obtained by the maceration of
Besiello saffron, or turmeric, or grains
d'Avignon in alcohol until a strong tinc-
ture is obtained. Dilute with water
until the desired shade is obtained. An
aqueous solution of quercitrine also
gives an excellent yellow.
Blue.—
Indigo carmine 1 part
Water 2 parts
Mix.
Indigo carmine is a beautiful, power-
ful, and harmless agent. It may usually
be bought commercially, but if it can-
not be readily obtained, proceed as fol-
lows:
Into a capsule put 30 grains of indigo
in powder, place on a water bath, and
heat to dryness. When entirely dry put
CONFECTIONERY— COPPER
219
into a large porcelain mortar (the sub-
stance swells enormously under subse-
quent treatment — hence the necessity
for a large, or comparatively large, mor-
tar) and cautiously add, drop by drop,
120 grains, by weight, of sulphuric acid,
C. P., stirring continuously during the
addition. Cover the swollen mass close-
ly, and set aside for 24 hours. Now
add 3 fluidounces of distilled water, a
few drops at a time, rubbing or stirring
continuously. Transfer the liquid thus
obtained to a tall, narrow, glass cylinder
or beaker, cover and let stand for 4 days,
giving the liquid an occasional stirring.
Make a strong solution of sodium car-
bonate or bicarbonate, and at the end of
the time named cautiously neutralize the
liquid, adding the carbonate a little at a
time, stirring the indigo solution and
testing it after each addition, as the least
excess of alkali will cause the indigo to
separate out, and fall in a doughy mass.
Stop when the test shows the near ap-
proach of neutrality, as the slight re-
maining acidity will not affect the taste
or the properties of the liquid. Filter,
and evaporate in the water bath to dry-
ness. The resultant matter is sulphin-
digotate ftf potassium, or the "indigo
carmine" of commerce.
Tincture of indigo may also be used as
a harmless blue.
Green. — The addition of the solution
indigo carmine to an infusion of any of
the matters given under "yellow" will pro-
duce a green color. Tincture of crocus
and glycerine in equal parts, with the
addition of indigo-carmine solution, also
gives a fine green. A solution of com-
mercial chlorophyll gives grass-green, in
shades varying according to the concen-
tration of the solution.
Voice and Throat Lozenges. —
Catechu 191 grains
Tannic acid 273 grains
Tartaric acid 273 grains
Capsicin 30 minims
Black-currant paste. 7 ounces
Refined sugar,
Mucilage of acacia,
of each a sufficient
quantity.
Mix to produce 7 pounds of lozenges.
CONSTIPATION IN BIRDS:
See Veterinary Formulas.
COOKING TABLE:
See Tables.
COOLING SCREEN:
See Refrigeration,
Copper
Annealing Copper. —
Copper is almost universally annealed
in muffles, in which it is raised to the
desired temperature, and subsequently
allowed to cool either in the air or in
water. A muffle is nothing more or less
than a reverberatory f urnr ce. It is
necessary to watch the copper carefully,
so that when it has reached the right
temperature it may be drawn from the
muffle and allowed to cool. This is
important, for if the copper is heated too
high, or is left in the muffle at the ordi-
nary temperature of annealing too long,
it is burnt, as the workmen say. Copper
that has been burnt is yellow, coarsely
granular, and exceedingly brittle — even
more brittle at a red heat than when
cold.
In the case of coarse wire it is found
that only the surface is burnt, while the
interior is damaged less. This causes
the exterior to split loose from the in-
terior when bent or rolled, thus giving
the appearance of a brittle copper tube
with a copper wire snugly fitted into it.
Cracks a half inch in depth have been
observed on the surface of an ingot on its
first pass through the rolls, all due to
this exterior burning. It is apparent
that copper that has been thus over-
heated in the muffle is entirely unfit for
rolling. It is found that the purer forms
of copper are less liable to be harmed by
overheating than samples containing
even a small amount of impurities.
Even the ordinary heating in a muffle
will often suffice to burn in this manner
the surface of some specimens of copper,
rendering them unfit for further working.
Copper that has been thus ruined is of
use only to be refined again.
As may be inferred only the highest
grades of refined copper are used for
drawing or for rolling. This is not be-
cause the lower grades, when refined, can-
not stand sufficiently high tests, but be-
cause methods of working are not
adequate to prevent these grades of cop-
per from experiencing the deterioration
due to overheating.
The process of refining copper con-
sists in an oxidizing action followed by
a reducing action which, since it is per-
formed by the aid of gases generated by
stirring the melted copper with a pole, is
called poling. The object of the oxida-
tion is to oxidize and either volatilize or
turn to slag all the impurities contained
in the copper. This procedure is ma-
terially aided by the fact that the sub-
220
COPPER
oxide of copper is freely soluble in
metallic copper and thus penetrates to
all parts of the copper, and parting with
its oxygen, oxidizes the impurities.
The object of the reducing part of the
refining process is to change the excess
of the suboxide of copper to metallic
copper. Copper containing even less
than 1 per cent of the suboxide of copper
shows decreased malleability and duc-
tility, and is both cold-short and red-
short. If the copper to be refined con-
tains any impurities, such as arsenic or
antimony, it is well not to remove too
much of the oxygen in the refining proc-
ess. If this is done, overpoled copper
is produced. In this condition it is
brittle, granular, of a shining yellow
color, and more red-short than cold-
short. When the refining has been prop-
erly done, and neither too much nor too
little oxygen is present, the copper is in
the condition of " tough pitch," and is in
a fit state to be worked.
Copper is said to be " tough pitch "
when it requires frequent bending to break
it, and when, after it is broken, the color
is pale red, the fracture has a silky lus-
ter, and is fibrous like a tuft of silk. On
hammering a piece to a thin plate it
should show no cracks at the edge. At
tough pitch copper offers the highest
degree of malleability and ductility of
which a given specimen is capable.
This is the condition in which refined
copper is (or should be) placed on the
market, and if it could be worked with-
out changing this tough pitch, any
specimen of copper that could be brought
to this condition would be suitable for
rolling or drawing. But tough pitch is
changed if oxygen is either added or
taken from refined copper.
By far the more important of these is
the removal of oxygen, especially from
those specimens that contain more than a
mere trace of impurities. This is shown
by the absolutely worthless condition
of overpoled copper. The addition of
carbon also plays a very important part
in the production of overpoled copper.
That the addition of oxygen to refined
copper is not so damaging is shown by
the fact that at present nearly all the cop-
per that is worked is considerably oxi-
dized at some stage of the process, and
not especially to its detriment.
Burnt copper is nothing more or less
than copper in the overpoled condition.
This is brought about by the action of
reducing gases in the muffle. By this
means the small amount of oxygen nec-
essary to give the copper its tough pitch
is removed. This oxygen is combined
with impurities in the copper, and thus
renders them inert. For example, the
oxide of arsenic or antimony is inca-
pable of combining more than mechan-
ically with the copper, but when its oxy-
gen is removed the arsenic or antimony
is left free to combine with the copper.
This forms a brittle alloy, and one that
corresponds almost exactly in its proper-
ties with overpoled copper. To be sure
overpoled copper is supposed to contain
carbon, but that this is not the essential
ruling principle in case of annealing is
shown by the fact that pure copper does
not undergo this change under condi-
tions that ruin impure copper, and also
by the fact that the same state may be
produced by annealing in pure hydro-
gen and thus removing the oxygen that
renders the arsenic or antimony inert.
No attempt is made to deny the well-
known fact that carbon does combine
with copper to the extent of 0.2 per cent
and cause it to become exceedingly
brittle. It is simply claimed that this is
probably not what occurs in the pro-
duction of so-called burnt copper during
annealing. The amount of impurities
capable of rendering copper easily burnt
is exceedingly small. This may be bet-
ter appreciated when it is considered
that from 0.01 to 0.2 per cent expresses
the amount of oxygen necessary to ren-
der the impurities inert. The removal
of this very small amount of oxygen,
which is often so small as to be almost
within the limits of the errors of analysis,
will suffice to render copper overpoled
and ruin it for any use.
There are methods of avoiding the
numerous accidents that may occur in
the annealing of copper, due to a change
of pitch. As already pointed out, the
quality of refined copper is lowered if
oxygen be either added to or taken from
it. It is quite apparent, therefore, that
a really good method of annealing cop-
per will prevent any change in the state
of oxidation. It is necessary to prevent
access to the heated copper both of at-
mospheric air, which would oxidize it,
and of the reducing gases used in heat-
ing the muffle, which would take oxygen
away from it. Obviously the only way
of accomplishing this is to inclose the
copper when heated and till cool in an
atmosphere that can neither oxidize nor
deoxidize copper. By so doing copper
may be heated to the melting point and
allowed to cool again without suffering
as regards its pitch. There are com-
paratively few gases that can be used for
this purpose, but, fortunately, one which
is exceedingly cheap and universally
COPPER
prevalent fulfills all requirements, viz.,
steam. In order to apply the principles
enunciated it is necessary only to anneal
copper in the ordinary annealing pots
such as are used for iron, care being
taken to inclose the copper while heating
and while cooling in an atmosphere of
steam. This will effectually exclude air
and prevent the ingress of gases used
in heating the annealer. Twenty-four
hours may be used in the process, as in
the annealing of iron wire, with no detri-
ment to the wire. This may seem in-
credible to those manufacturers who
have tried to anneal copper wire after
the manner of annealing iron wire. By
this method perfectly bright annealed
wire may be produced. Such a process
of annealing copper offers many advan-
tages. It allows the use of a grade of
copper that has hitherto been worked
only at a great disadvantage, owing to its
tendency to get out of pitch. It allows
the use of annealers such as are ordi-
narily employed for annealing iron, and
thus cheapens the annealing consider-
ably as compared with the present use of
muffles. There is no chance of produc-
ing the overpoled condition from the
action of reducing gases used in heating
the muffles. There is no chance of pro-
ducing the underpoled condition due to
the absorption of suboxide of copper.
None of the metal is lost as scale, and the
saving that is thus effected amounts to a
considerable percentage of the total
value of the copper. The expense and
time of cleaning are wholly saved. In-
cidentally bright annealed copper is
produced by a process which is appli-
cable to copper of any shape, size, or
condition — a product that has hitherto
been obtained only by processes (mostly
secret) which are too cumbersome and
too expensive for extensive use; and, as
is the case with at least one process, with
the danger of producing the overpoled
condition, often in only a small section
of the wire, but thus ruining the whole
piece.
COPPER COLORING:
Blacking Copper.— To give a copper
article a black covering, clean it with
emery paper, heat gently in a Bunsen or
a spirit flame, immerse for 10 seconds in
solution of copper filings in dilute nitric
acid, and heat again.
Red Coloring of Copper. — A fine red
color may be given to copper by gradu-
ally heating it in an air bath. Prolonged
heating at a comparatively low temper-
ature, or rapid heating at a high tem-
perature, produces the same result. As
soon as the desired color is attained
the metal should be rapidly cooled by
quenching in water. The metal thus
colored may be varnished.
To Dye Copper Parts Violet and Or-
ange.— Polished copper acquires an
orange-like color leaning to gold, when
dipped for a few seconds into a solution
of crystallized copper acetate. A hand-
some violet is obtained by placing the
metal for a few minutes in a solution of
antimony chloride and rubbing it after-
wards with a piece of wood covered with
cotton. During this operation the cop-
per must be heated to a degree bearable
to the hand. A crystalline appearance
is produced by boiling the article in
copper sulphate.
Pickle for Copper.— Take nitric acid,
100 parts; kitchen salt, 2 parts; calcined
soot, 2 parts; or nitric acid, 10 parts; sul-
phuric acid, 10 parts; hydrochloric acid,
1 part. As these bleaching baths attack
the copper quickly, the objects must be
left in only for a few seconds, washing
them afterwards in plenty of water, and
drying in sawdust, bran, or spent tan.
Preparations of Copper Water. — I. —
Water, 1,000 parts; oxalic acid, 30 parts;
spirit of wine, 100 parts; essence of tur-
pentine, 50 parts; fine tripoli, 100 parts.
II. — Water, 1,000 parts; oxalic acid,
30 parts; alcohol, 50 parts; essence of
turpentine, 40 parts; fine tripoli, 50
parts.
III. — Sulphuric acid, 300 parts; sul-
phate of alumina, 80 parts; water, 520
parts.
Tempered Copper. — Objects made of
copper may be satisfactorily tempered
by subjecting them to a certain degree
of heat for a determined period of time
and bestrewing them with powdered
sulphur during the heating. While hot
the objects are plunged into a bath of
blue vitriol; after the bath they may be
heated again.
COPPER ALLOYS:
See Alloys.
COPPER CLEANING:
See Cleaning Preparations and Meth-
ods.
COPPER ETCHING:
See Etching.
COPPER IN FOOD:
See Food.
COPPER LACQUERS:
See Lacquers.
222
COPPER— COPYING PRINTED PICTURES
COPPER PAPER:
See Paper, Metallic.
COPPER PATINIZING AND PLATING :
See Plating.
COPPER POLISHES:
See Polishes.
COPPER, SEPARATION OF GOLD
FROM:
See Gold.
COPPER SOLDER:
See Solders.
COPPER VARNISHES:
See Varnishes.
COPYING PRINTED PICTURES.
The so-called "metallic" paper used
for steam-engine indicator cards has a
smooth surface, chemically prepared so
that black lines can be drawn upon it
with pencils made of brass, copper, sil-
ver, aluminum, or any of the softer
metals. When used on the indicator it
receives the faint line drawn by a brass
point at one end of the pencil arm, and
its special advantage over ordinary paper
is that the metallic pencil slides over its
surface with very little friction, and keeps
its point much longer than a graphite
pencil.
This paper can be used as a transfer
paper for copying engravings or sketches,
or anything printed or written in ink or
drawn in pencil.
The best copies can be obtained by
following the directions below: Lay
the metallic transfer paper, face up, upon
at least a dozen sheets of blank paper,
and lay the print face down upon it. On
the back of the print place a sheet of
heavy paper, or thin cardboard, and run
the rubbing tool over this protecting
sheet. In this manner it is comparative-
ly easy to prevent slipping, and prints 8
or 10 inches on a side may be copied
satisfactorily.
Line drawings printed from relief
plates, or pictures with sharp contrast
of black and white, without any half-
tones, give the best copies. Very few
half-tones can be transferred satisfac-
torily; almost all give streaked, indis-
tinct copies, and many of the results are
worthless.
The transfer taken off as described is
a reverse of the original print. If the
question of right and left is not impor-
tant this reversal will seldom be objec-
tionable, for it is easy to read back-
ward what few letters generally occur.
However, if desired, the paper may be
held up to the light and examined from
the back, or placed before a mirror and
viewed by means of its reflected image,
when the true relations of right and left
will be seen. Moreover, if sufficiently
important, an exact counterpart of the
original may be taken from the reversed
copy by laying another sheet face down-
ward upon it, and rubbing on the back
of the fresh sheet just as was done in
making the reversed copy. The im-
pression thus produced will be fainter
than the first, but almost always it can
be made dark enough to show a distinct
outline which may afterwards be re-
touched with a lead pencil.
For indicator cards the paper is pre-
pared by coating one surface with a suit-
able compound, usually zinc oxide mixed
with a little starch and enough glue to
make it adhere. After drying it is
passed between calendar rolls under great
pressure. The various brands manu-
factured for the trade, though perhaps
equally good for indicator diagrams, are
not equally well suited for copying. If
paper of firmer texture could be prepared
with the same surface finish, probably
much larger copies could be produced.
Other kinds of paper, notably the
heavy plate papers used for some of the
best trade catalogues, possess this trans-
fer property to a slight degree, though
they will not receive marks from a me-
tallic pencil. The latter feature would
seem to recommend them for transfer
purposes, making them less likely to be-
come soiled by contact with metallic
objects, but so far no kind has been
found which will remove enough ink
to give copies anywhere near as dark as
the indicator paper.
Fairly good transfers can be made
from almost any common printers' ink,
but some inks copy much better than
others, and some yield only the faintest
impressions. The length of time since a
picture was printed does not seem to de-
termine its copying quality. Some very
old prints can be copied better than new
ones; in fact, it was by accidental trans-
fer to an indicator card from a book
nearly a hundred years old that the
peculiar property of this "metallic"
paper was discovered.
Copying Process on Wood. — If wood
surfaces are exposed to direct sunlight
the wood will exhibit, after 2 weeks
action, a browning of dark tone in the
exposed places. Certain parts of the
surface being covered up during the en-
tire exposure to the sun, they retain their
original shade and are set off clearly and
sharply against the parts browned by the
sunlight. Based on this property of the
COPYING PROCESSES— CORKS
wood is a sun-copying process on wood.
The method is used for producing tarsia
in imitation on wood. A pierced stencil
of tin, wood, or paper is laid on a freshly
planed plate of wood, pasting it on in
places to avoid shifting, and put into a
common copying frame. To prevent the
wood from warping a stretcher is em-
ployed, whereupon expose to the sun for
from 8 to 14 days. After the brown
shade has appeared the design obtained
is partly fixed by polishing or by a coating
of varnish, lacquer, or wax. Best suited
for such works are the pine woods, espe-
cially the 5-year fir and the cembra pine,
which, after the exposure, show a yellow-
ish brown tone of handsome golden gloss,
that stands out boldly, especially after
subsequent polishing, and cannot be
replaced by any staifi or by pyrography.
The design is sharper and clearer than
that produced by painting. In short,
the total effect is pleasing.
How to Reproduce Old Prints.— Pre-
pare a bath as follows: Sulphuric acid,
3 to 5 parts (according to the antiquity of
print, thickness of paper, etc.); alcohol,
3 to 5 parts; water, 100 parts. In this
soak the print from 5 to 15 minutes (the
time depending on age, etc., as above),
remove, spread face downward on a
glass or ebonite plate, and wash thor-
oughly in a gentle stream of running
water. If the paper is heavy, reverse
the sides, and let the water flow over
the face of the print. Remove care-
fully and place on a heavy sheet of
blotting paper, cover with another, and
press out every drop of water possible.
Where a wringing machine is convenient
and sufficiently wide, passing the blot-
ters and print through the rollers is bet-
ter than mere pressing with the hands.
The print, still moist, is then laid face
upward on a heavy glass plate (a mar-
ble slab or a lithographers' stone an-
swers equally well), and smoothed out.
With a very soft sponge go over the sur-
face with a thin coating of gum-arabic
water. The print is now ready for ink-
ing, which is done exactly as in litho-
graphing, with a roller and printers' or
lithographers' ink, cut with oil of tur-
pentine. Suitable paper is then laid on
and rolled with a dry roller. This gives
a reverse image of the print, which is
then applied to a zinc plate or a lithogra-
phers' stone, and as many prints as de-
sired pulled off in the usual lithographing
method. When carefully done and the
right kind of paper used, it is said that
the imitation of the original is perfect in
every detail.
To Copy Old Letters, Manuscripts, etc.
— If written in the commercial ink of the
period from 1860 to 1864, which was
almost universally an iron and tannin or
gallic-acid ink, the following process may
succeed: Make a thin solution of glucose,
or honey, in water, and with this wet the
paper in the usually observed way in
copying recent documents in the letter
book, put in the press, and screw down
tightly. Let it remain in the press some-
what longer than in copying recent docu-
ments. When removed, before attempt-
ing to separate the papers, expose to the
fumes of strong water of ammonia, copy
side downward.
CORDAGE:
See also Ropes.
Strong Twine. — An extraordinarily
strong pack thread or cord, stronger even
than the so-called " Zuckerschnur," may
be obtained by laying the thread of fibers
in a strong solution of alum, and then
carefully drying them.
Preservation of Fishing Nets. — The
following recipe for the preservation of
fishing nets is also applicable to ropes,
etc., in contact with water. Some have
been subjected to long test.
For 40 parts of cord, hemp, or cot-
ton, 3 parts of kutch, 1 part of blue
vitriol, £ part of potassium chromate,
and 2i parts of wood tar are required.
The kutch is boiled with 150 parts of
water until dissolved, and then the blue
vitriol is added. Next, the net is entered
and the tar added. The whole should
be stirred well, and the cordage must boil
5 to 8 minutes. Now take out the net-
ting, lay it in another vessel, cover up
well, and leave alone for 12 hours. After
that it is dried well, spread out in a clean
place, and coated with linseed oil. Not
before 6 hours have elapsed should it be
folded together and put into the water.
The treatment with linseed oil may be
omitted.
CORDAGE LUBRICANT:
See Lubricants.
CORDAGE WATERPROOFING:
See Waterproofing.
CORDIALS:
See Wines and Liquors.
CORKS :
Impervious Corks. — Corks which have
been steeped in petrolatum are said to be
an excellent substitute for glass stoppers.
Acid in no way affects them and chemi-
cal fumes do not cause decay in them,
neither do they become fixed by a blow
or long disuse.
CORKS— CORN CURES
Non-Porous Corks. — For benzine, tur-
pentine, and varnish cans, immerse the
corks in hot melted paraffine. Keep
them under about 5 minutes; hold them
down with a piece of wire screen cut to
fit the dish in which you melt the paraf-
fine. Whan taken out lay them on a
screen till cool. Cheap corks can in this
way be made gas- and air-tight, and can
be cut and bored with ease.
Substitute for Cork. — Wood pulp or
other ligneous material may be treated
to imitate cork. For the success of the
composition it is necessary that the con-
stituents be mingled and treated under
special conditions. The volumetric pro-
portions in which these constituents
combine with the best results are the fol-
lowing: Wood pulp, 3 parts; cornstalk
pith, 1 part; gelatin, 1 part; glycerine,
1 part; water, 4 parts; 20 per cent formic-
aldehyde solution, 1 part; but the pro-
portions may be varied. After disinte-
grating the ligneous substances, and
while these are in a moist and hot condi-
tion they are mingled with the solution
of gelatin, glycerine, and water. The
mass is stirred thoroughly so as to obtain
a homogeneous mixture. The excess of
moisture is removed. As a last opera-
tion the formic aldehyde is introduced,
and the mass is left to coagulate in this
solution. The formic aldehyde renders
the product insoluble in nearly all liquids.
So it is in this last operation that it is
necessary to be careful in producing the
composition properly. When the oper-
ation is terminated the substance is sub-
mitted to pressure during its coagulation,
either by molding it at once into a desired
form, or into a mass which is afterwards
converted into the finished product.
CORKS, TO CLEAN:
See Cleaning Preparations and Meth-
ods, under Miscellaneous Methods.
CORK TO METAL, FASTENING:
See Adhesives, under Pastes.
CORK AS A PRESERVATIVE:
See Preserving.
CORKS, WATERPROOFING:
See Waterproofing.
CORN CURES:
I. — Salicylic- Acid Corn Cure. — Extract
cannabis indica, 1 part, by measure ;
salicylic acid, 10 parts, by measure; oil
of turpentine, 5 parts, by measure; acetic
acid, glacial, 2 parts, by measure; coca-
ine, alkaloidal, 2 parts, by measure; col-
lodion, elastic, sufficient to make 100
parts. Apply a thin coating every night,
putting each layer directly on the pre-
ceding one. After a few applications,
the mass drops off, bringing the indurated
portion, and frequently the whole of the
corn, off with it.
II. — Compound Salicylated Collodion
Corn Cure. — Salicylic acid, 11 parts, by
weight; extract of Indian hemp, 2 parts,
by weight; alcohol, 10 parts, by weight;
flexible collodion, U. S. P., a "sufficient
quantity to make 100 parts, by weight.
The extract is dissolved in the alcohol
and the acid in about 50 parts, by weight,
of collodion, the solutions mixed, and
the liquid made up to the required
amount. The Indian hemp is presum-
ably intended to prevent pain; whether it
serves this or any other useful purpose
seems a matter of doubt. The acid is
frequently used without this addition.
III. — Extract of cannabis indica, 90
grains; salicylic acid, 1 ounce; alcohol, 1
ounce; collodion enough to make 10
ounces. Soften the extract with the
alcohol, then add the collodion, and
lastly the acid.
IV. — Resorcin, 1 part, by weight;
salicylic acid, 1 part, by weight; lactic
acid, 1 part, by weight; collodion elasti-
cum, 10 parts, by weight. Paint the
corn daily for 5 or 6 days with the above
solution and take a foot bath in very hot
water. The corn will readily come off.
Corn Plaster. — Yellow wax, 24 parts,
by weight; Venice turpentine, 3 parts,
by weight; rosin, 2 parts, by weight;
salicylic acid, 2 parts, by weight; balsam
of Peru, 2 parts, by weight; lanolin, 4
parts, by weight.
Corn Cure. — Melt soap plaster, 85
parts, by weight, and yellow wax, 5 parts
by weight, in a vapor bath, and stir finely
ground salicylic acid, 10 parts, by weight,
into it.
Removal of Corns. — The liquid used
by chiropodists with pumice stone for the
removal of corns and callosities is usually
nothing more than a solution of potassa
or concentrated lye, the pumice stone
being dipped into the solution by the
operator just before using.
Treatment of Bunions. — Wear right
and left stockings and shoes, the inner
edges of the sole of which are perfectly
straight. The bunion is bathed night
and morning in a 4 per cent solution of
carbolic acid for a few minutes, followed
by plain water. If, after several weeks,
the bursa is still distended with fluid, it
is aspirated. If the bunion is due to
flatfoot, the arch of the foot must be
restored by a plate. When the joints
are enlarged because of gout or rheuma-
CORN CURES— COSMETICS
tism, the constitutional conditions must
be treated. In other cases, osteotomy
and tenotomy are required.
The Treatment of Corns. — Any corn
may be speedily and permanently cured.
The treatment is of three kinds — preven-
tive, palliative, and curative.
I. — The preventive treatment lies in
adopting such measures as will secure
freedom from pressure and friction for
the parts most liable to corns. To this
end a well-fitting shoe is essential. The
shoes should be of. well-seasoned leather,
soft and elastic, and should be cut to a
proper model. *
II. — The palliative treatment is gen-
erally carried out with chemical sub-
stances. The best method, is, briefly,
as follows: A ring of glycerine jelly is
painted around the circumference of the
corn, to form a raised rampart. A piece
of salicylic plaster mull is then cut to the
size and shape of the central depression,
and applied to the surface of the corn.
This is then covered with a layer of glyc-
erine jelly, and before it sets a pad of
cotton wool is applied to the surface.
This process is repeated as often as is
necessary, until the horny layer separates
and is cast off.
If the point of a sharp, thin-bladed
knife be introduced at the groove which
runs around the margin of the corn, and
be made to penetrate toward its central
axis, by the exercise of a little manual
dexterity the horny part of the corn can
be easily made to separate from the parts
beneath.
III. — Any method of treatment to be
curative must secure the removal of the
entire corn, together with the under-
lying bursa. It is mainly in connection
with the latter structure that complica-
tions, which alone make a corn a matter
of serious import, are likely to arise.
Freeland confidently advises the full and
complete excision of corns, on the basis
of his experience in upward of 60 cases.
Every precaution having been taken
to render the operation aseptic, a spot is
selected for the injection of the anaesthetic
solution. The skin is rendered insen-
sitive with ethyl chloride, and 5 minims
of a 4 per cent solution of cocaine is in-
jected into the subcutaneous tissue be-
neath the corn. After a wait of a few
minutes the superficial parts of the site
of the incision are rendered insensitive
with ethyl chloride. Anaesthesia is now
complete.
Two semielliptieal incisions meeting
at their extremities are made through
the skin around the circumference of tne
growth, care being taken that they pen-
etrate well into the subcutaneous tissue.
Seizing the parts included in the incision
with a pair of dissecting forceps, a wedge-
shaped piece of tissue — including the
corn, a layer of skin and subcutaneous
tissue, and the bursa if present — is dis-
sected out. The oozing is pretty free,
and it is sometimes necessary to torsion a
small vessel; but the hemorrhage is
never severe. The edges of the wound
are brought together by one or two fine
sutures; an antiseptic dressing is applied,
and the wound is left to heal — primary
union in a few days being the rule. The
rapidity of the healing is often phenom-
enal. There is produced a scar tissue at
the site of the corn, but this leads to no
untoward results.
Cosmetics
COLD CREAM.
I. — Oil of almonds .... 425 parts
Lanolin 185 parts
White wax 62 parts
Spermaceti 62 parts
Borax 4.5 parts
Rose water 300 parts
Melt together the first four ingredients,
then incorporate the solution of borax in
the rose water.
II. — Tragacanth 125 parts
Boric acid 100 parts
Glycerine 140 parts
Expressed oil of al-
monds 50 parts
Glyconine 50 parts
Oil of lavender. ... 0.5 parts
Water enough to
make 1,000 parts
Mix the tragacanth and the boric
acid with the glycerine; add the almond
oil, lavender oil, and egg glycerite, which
have been previously well incorporated,
and, lastly, add the water in divided
portions until a clear jelly of the desired
consistency is obtained.
III. — Oil of almonds 26 ounces
Castor oil (odorless). 6 ounces
Lard (benzoated) ... 8 ounces
White wax 8 ounces
Rose water (in win-
ter less, in sum-
mer more, than
quantity named) .. 12 ounces
Orange-flower water 8 ounces
Oil of rose 15 minims
Extract of jasmine. . 6 drachms
Extract of cassia. ... 4 drachms
Borax 2 ounces
Glycerine 4 ounces
COSMETICS
Melt the oil of sweet almonds, wax, and
lard together, and stir in the castor oil;
make a solution of the borax in the
glycerine and rose and orange-flower
waters; add this solution, a little at a
time, to the melted fat, stirring con-
stantly to insure thorough incorporation;
finally add the oil of rose dissolved in the
extracts, and beat the ointment until
cold.
IV. — Spermaceti (pure), I ounce;
white wax (pure), J ounce; almond oil, I
pound; butter of cocoa, J pound; lano-
lin, 2 ounces.
Melt and stir in 1 drachm of balsam
of Peru. After settling, pour off the clear
portion and add 2 fluidrachms of orange-
flower water and stir briskly until it
concretes.
Camphorated Cold Cream. —
Oil of sweet al-
monds 8 fluidounces
White wax 1 ounce
Spermaceti.. 1 ounce
Camphor 1 ounce
Rose water 5 fluidounces
Borax (in fine pow-
der) 4 drachms
Oil of rose 10 drops
Melt the wax and spermaceti, add the
oil of sweet almonds, in which the cam-
phor has been dissolved with very gentle
heat; then gradually add the rose water,
in which the borax has previously been
dissolved, beating or agitating con-
stantly with a wooden spatula until cold.
Lastly add the oil of rose.
Petrolatum Cold Cream. —
Petrolatum (white).. . 7 ounces
Paraffine ^ ounce
Lanolin 2 ounces
Water 3 ounces
Oil of rose 3 drops
Alcohol 1 drachm
A small quantity of borax may be
added, if desirable, and the perfume may
be varied to suit the taste.
LIP SALVES:
Pomades for the Lips. — Lip pomatum
which is said always to retain a hand-
some red color and never to grow rancid
is prepared as follows:
I.— Paraffine 80 . 0 parts
Vaseline 80.0 parts
Anchusine 0.5 parts
Bergamot oil 1.0 part
Lemon peel 1.0 part
II. — Vaseline Pomade. —
Vaseline oil, white. . . 1,000 parts
Wax, white 300 parts
can ....
Lemon oil
Geranium oil, Afri-
40 parts
20 parts
III. — Rose Pomade. —
Almond oil 1,000 parts
Wax, white 300 parts
Alkannin 3 parts
Geranium oil 20 parts
IV.— Yellow Pomade.—
Vaseline oil, white. 1,000 parts
Wax, white 200 parts
Spermaceti 200 parts
Saffron surrogate. 10 parts
Clove oil 20 parts
V.— White Pomade.—
Vaseline oil, white. 1,000 parts
Wax, white 300 parts
Bitter almond oil,
genuine 10 parts
Lemon oil 2 parts
VI. — Paraffme 49 . 0 parts
Vaseline 49.0 parts
Oil of lemon 0 . 75 parts
Oil of violet 0 . 75 parts
Carmine, quantity sufficient.
Lipol. — For treating sore, rough, or
inflamed lips, apply the following night
and morning, rubbing in well with the
finger tips: Camphor, | ounce; men-
thol, \ ounce; eucalyptol, 1 drachm;
petrolatum (white), 1 pound; paraffine,
i pound; alkanet root, £ ounce; oil of
bitter almonds, 15 drops; oil of cloves,
10 drops; oil of cassia, 5 drops. Digest
the root in the melted paraffine and pe-
trolatum, strain, add the other ingre-
dients and pour into lip jars, hot.
MANICURE PREPARATIONS:
Powdered Nail Polishes.—
I. — Tin oxide 8 drachms
Carmine \ drachm
Rose oil 6 drops
Neroli oil 5 drops
II.— Cinnabar 1 drachm
Infusorial earth 8 drachms
III. — Putty powder (fine) . 4 drachms
Carmine 2 grains
Oil of rose 1 drop
IV.— White castile soap.. . 1 part
Hot water 16 parts
Zinc chloride solu-
tion, 10 per cent,
quantity sufficient.
Dissolve the soap in the water and to
the solution add the zinc-chloride solu-
tion until no further precipitation oc-
curs. Let stand over night; pour off the
supernatant fluid, wash the precipitate
COSMETICS
well with water, and dry at the ordinary
temperature. Carmine may be added if
desired.
Polishing Pastes for the Nails. —
I. — Talcum 5 drachms
Stannous oxide 3 drachms
Powdered tragacanth 5 grains
Glycerine 1 drachm
Rose water, quantity
sufficient.
Solution of carmine
sufficient to tint.
Make paste.
For softening the nails, curing hang-
nails, etc., an ointment is sometimes used
consisting of white petrolatum, 8 parts;
powdered castile soap, 1 part; and per-
fume to suit.
II. — Eosine 10 grains
White wax \ drachm
Spermaceti | drachm
Soft paraffine 1 ounce
Alcohol, a sufficient quantity.
Dissolve the cosine in as little alcohol as
will suffice, melt the other ingredients to-
gether, add the sol ution, and stir until cool.
Nail-Cleaning Washes.—
I. — Tartaric acid 1 drachm
Tincture of myrrh . . 1 drachm
Cologne water 2 drachms
Water 3 ounces
Dissolve the acid in the water; mix
the tincture of myrrh and cologne, and
add to the acid solution.
Dip the nails in this solution, wipe,
and polish with chamois skin.
II. — Oxalic acid 30 grains
Rose water 1 ounce
Nail Varnish.—
Paraffine wax 60 grains
Chloroform 2 ounces
Oil of rose 3 drops
POMADES:
I. — Beef-Marrow Pomade. —
Vaseline oil, yel-
low 20,000 parts
Ceresine, yellow 3,000 parts
Beef marrow . . 2,000 parts
Saffron substi-
tute 15 parts
Lemon oil 50 parts
Bergamot oil. . . 20 parts
Clove oil 5 parts
Lavender oil. . . 10 parts
II.— China Pomade.—
Vaseline oil,
yellow 20,000 parts
Ceresine, yel-
low 5,000 parts
Brilliant,
brown 12 parts
Peru balsam. . . 50 parts
Lemon oil. .... 5 parts
Bergamot oil . . 5 parts
Clove oil 5 parts
Lavender oil . . 5 parts
III. — Crystalline Honey Pomade. —
Nut oil, 125 drachms; spermaceti, 15
drachms: gamboge, 2 drachms; vervain
oil, 10 drops; cinnamon oil, 20 drops;
bergamot oil, 30 drops; rose oil, 3 drops.
The spermaceti is melted in the nut oil
on a water bath and digested with the
gamboge for 20 minutes; it is next
strained, scented, and poured into cans
which are standing in water. The cool-
ing must take place very slowly. In-
stead of gamboge, butter color may be
used. Any desired scent mixture may
be employed.
IV.— Herb Pomade.—
Vaseline oil, yel-
low 20,000 parts
Ceresine, yellow 5,000 parts
Chlorophyll ... 20 parts
Lemon oil
Clove oil
Geranium oil,
African
Curled mint oil.
50 parts
20 parts
12 parts
4 parts
V. — Rose Pomade. —
Vaseline oil,
white 20,000 parts
Ceresine, white 5,000 parts
Alkannin. .... 15 parts
Geranium oil,
African 50 parts
Palmarosa oil. 30 parts
Lemon oil. ... 20 parts
VI.— Strawberry Pomade.— .When the
strawberry season is on, and berries are
plenty and cheap, the following is timely:
Strawberries, ripe
and fresh 4 parts
Lard, sweet and
fresh 25 parts
Tallow, fresh 5 parts
Alkanet tincture,
quantity suffi-
cient.
Essential oil, quan-
tity sufficient to
perfume.
Melt lard and tallow together on the
water bath at the temperature of boiling
water. Have the strawberries arranged
on a straining cloth. Add the alkanet
tincture to the melted grease, stir in, and
then pour the mixture over the berries.
Stir the strained fats until the mass be-
COSMETICS
gins to set, then add the perfume and
stir in. A little artificial essence of
strawberries may be added. The odor
usually employed is rose, about 1 drop to
every 2 pounds.
VII.— Stick Pomade.—
Tallow 500 parts
Ceresine 150 parts
Wax, yellow 50 parts
Rosin, light 200 parts
Paraffine oil
(thick) 300 parts
Oil of cassia 5 parts
Oil of bergamot. . 5 parts
Oil of clove 2 parts
VIII.— Vaseline Pomade.— Melt 250
parts of freshly rendered lard and 25
parts of white wax at moderate heat and
mix well with 200 parts of vaseline.
Add 15 parts of bergamot oil, 3 parts of
lavender oil, 2 parts of geranium oil, and
2 parts of lemon oil, mixing well.
IX.— ^Witch-Hazel Jelly.—
Oil of sweet al-
monds 256 parts
Extract of witch-
hazel fluid 10 parts
Glycerine 32 parts
Soft soap 20 parts
Tincture of musk, quantity suf-
ficient to perfume.
Mix in a large mortar the glycerine
and soft soap and stir until incorporated.
Add and rub in the witch-hazel, and
then add the oil, slowly, letting it fall
in a very thin, small stream, under con-
stant agitation; add the perfume, keep-
ing up the agitation until complete in-
corporation is attained. Ten drops of
musk to a quart of jelly is sufficient.
Any other perfume may be used.
Colors for Pomade. — Pomade may be
colored red by infusing alkanet in the
grease; yellow may be obtained by using
annotto in the same way; an oil-soluble
chlorophyll will give a green color by
admixture.
In coloring grease by means of alkanet
or annotto it is best to tie the drug up in
a piece of coarse cloth, place in a small
portion of the grease, heat gently, squeez-
ing well with a rod from time to time;
and then adding this strongly colored
grease to the remainder. This proce-
dure obviates exposing the entire mass
to heat, and neither decantation nor
straining is needed.
Brocq's Pomade for Itching. —
Acid phenic 1 part
Acid salicylic 2 parts
Acid tartaric ... 3 parts
Glycerole of
starch . 60 to 100 parts
Mix and make a pomade.
White Cosmetique. —
Jasmine pomade 2 ounces
Tuberose pomade.. . . 2 ounces
White wax 2 ounces
Refined suet 4 ounces
Rose oil 15 minims
Melt the wax and suet over a water
bath, then add the pomades, and finally
the otto.
Glycerine and Cucumber Jelly. —
Gelatin 160 to 240 grains
Boric acid 240 grains
Glycerine 6 fluidounces
Water 10 fluidounces
Perfume to suit. The perfume must
be one that mixes without opalescence,
otherwise it mars the beauty of the prep-
aration. Orange-flower water or rose
water could be substituted for the water
if desired, or another perfume consisting
of
Spirit of vanillin (15
grains per ounce). 2 fluidrachms
Spirit of coumarin
(15 grains per
ounce) 2 fluidrachms
Spirit of bitter al-
monds (|) 8 minims
to the quantities given above would
prove agreeable.
Cucumber Pomade. —
Cucumber pomade. . . 2 ounces
Powdered white soap. £ ounce
Powdered borax 2 drachms
Cherry-laurel water. . 3 ounces
Rectified spirit 3 ounces
Distilled water to make 48 ounces
Rub the pomade with the soap and
borax until intimately mixed, then add
the distilled water (which may be
warmed to blood heat), ounce by ounce,
to form a smooth and uniform cream.
When 40 ounces of water have been so
incorporated, dissolve any essential oils
desired as perfume in the spirit, and add
the cherry-laurel water, making up to
48 ounces with plain water.
ROUGES AND PAINTS:
Grease Paints. — Theatrical face paints
are sold in sticks, and there are many
varieties of color. Yellows are obtained
with ocher; browns with burnt umber;
and blue is made with ultramarine.
These colors should in each case be levi-
gated finely along with their own weight
COSMETICS
of equal parts of precipitated chalk and
oxide of zinc and diluted with the same to
the tint required, then made into sticks
with mutton suet (or vaseline or paraf-
fine, equal parts) well perfumed. By
blending these colors, other tints may
thus be obtained.
White Grease Paints.—
I. — Prepared chalk . . 4 av. ounces
Zinc oxide 4 av. ounces
Bismuth subni-
trate. 4 av. ounces
Asbestos powder. 4 av. ounces
Sweet almond oil,
about 2J fluidounces
Camphor 40 grains
Oil peppermint. . . 3 fluidrachms
Esobouquet ex-
tract 3 fluidrachms
Sufficient almond oil should be used
to form a mass of proper consistence.
II. — Zinc oxide 8 parts
Bismuth subnitrate . . 8 parts
Aluminum oxychlor-
ide 8 parts
Almond oil, quantity sufficient, or
5-6 parts.
Perfume, quantity sufficient.
Mix the zinc, bismuth, and aluminum
oxychloride thoroughly; make into a paste
with the oil . Any perfume may be added,
but that generally used is composed of 1
drachm of essence of bouquet, 12 grains
of camphor, and 12 minims of oil of pep-
permint for every 3| ounces of paste.
Bright Red.—
Zinc oxide 10 parts
Bismuth subnitrate. .. 10 parts
Aluminum oxychlor-
ide 10 parts
Almond oil, quantity sufficient.
Mix the zinc, bismuth, and aluminum
salts, and to every 4 ounces of the mix-
ture add 2J grainj of cosine dissolved in
a drachm of essence of bouquet, 12 minims
oil of peppermint, and 12 grains of cam-
phor. Make the whole into a paste with
almond oil.
Red.—
Cacao butter 4 av. ounces
White wax 4 av. ounces
Olive oil 2 fluidounces
Oil of rose 8 drops
Oil of bergamot . . 3 drops
Oil of neroli 2 drops
Tincture musk ... 2 drops
Carmine 90 grains
Ammonia water . . 3 fluidrachms
Deep, or Bordeaux, Red. —
Zinc oxide 30 parts
Bismuth subnitrate. . . 30 parts
Aluminum oxychlor-
ide 30 parts
Carmine 1 part
Ammonia water 5 parts
Essence bouquet 3 parts
Peppermint, camphor, etc., quan-
tity sufficient.
Mix the zinc, bismuth, and aluminum
salts. Dissolve the carmine in the am-
monia and add solution to the mixture.
Add 24 grains of camphor, and 24 minims
of oil of peppermint dissolved in the
essence bouquet, and make the whole
into a paste with oil of sweet almonds.
Vermilion. —
Vermilion 18 parts
Tincture of saffron. . 12 parts
Orris root, powdered 30 parts
Chalk, precipitated. . 120 parts
Zinc oxide 120 parts
Camphor 2 parts
Essence bouquet. ... 9 parts
Oil of peppermint. . . 2 parts
Almond oil, quantity sufficient.
Mix as before.
Pink.—
Zinc carbonate 250 parts
Bismuth subnitrate. . 250 parts
Asbestos. 250 parts
Expressed oil of al-
monds 100 parts
Camphor 55 parts
Oil 01 peppermint . . 55 parts
Perfume 25 parts
Eosine 1 part
Dark Red. — Like the preceding, but
colored with a solution of carmine.
Rouge. —
Zinc oxide 2£ ounces
Bismuth subnitrate. .. 2£ ounces
Aluminum plumbate. 2£ ounces
Eosine 1 drachm
Essence bouquet 2 drachms
Camphor 6 drachms
Oil of peppermint. ... 20 minims
Almond oil, quantity sufficient.
Dissolve the cosine in the essence
bouquet, and mix with the camphor and
peppermint; add the powder and make
into a paste with almond oil.
Black Grease Paints.—
I. — Soot 2 av. ounces
Sweet almond oil . 2 fluidounces
Cacao butter 6 av. ounces
Perfume, sufficient.
230
COSMETICS
The soot should be derived from
burning camphor and repeatedly washed
with alcohol. It should be triturated to
a smooth mixture with the oil; then add
to the melted cacao butter; add the per-
fume, and form into sticks.
Brown or other colors may be obtained
by adding appropriate pigments, such as
finely levigated burned umber, sienna,
ocher, jeweler's rouge, etc., to the fore-
going base instead of lampblack.
II. — Best lampblack 1 drachm
Cacao butter 3 drachms
Olive oil 3 drachms
Oil of neroli 2 drops
Melt the cacao butter and oil, add the
lampblack, and stir constantly as the
mixture cools, adding the perfume
toward the end.
III. — Lampblack 1 part
Cacao butter 6 parts
Oil neroli, sufficient.
Melt the cacao butter and the lamp-
black, and while cooling make an inti-
mate mixture, adding the perfume toward
the last.
IV. — Lampblack 1 part
Expressed oil of al-
monds 1 part
Oil cocoanut 1 part
Perfume, sufficient.
Beat the lampblack into a stiff paste
with glycerine. Apply with a sponge;
if necessary, mix a little water with it
when using.
V. — Beat the finest lampblack into a
stiff paste with glycerine and apply with
a sponge; if necessary, add a little water
to the mixture when using. Or you can
make a grease paint as follows: Drop
black, 2 drachms; almond oil, 2 drachms;
cocoanut oil, 6 drachms; oil of lemon, 5
minims; oil of neroli, 1 minim. Mix.
Fatty Face Powders. — These have a
small percentage of fat mixed with them
in order to make the powder adhere to
the skin.
Dissolve 1 drachm anhydrous lano-
lin in 2 drachms of ether in a mortar.
Add 3 drachms of light magnesia. Mix
well, dry, and then add the following:
French chalk, 2 ounces; powdered
starch, 1£ ounces; boric acid, 1 drachm;
perfume, a sufficient quantity. A good
perfume is coumarin, 2 grains, and attar
of rose, 2 minims.
Nose Putty. — I. — Mix 1 ounce wheat flour
with 2 drachms of powdered tragacanth
and tint with carmine. Take as much
of the powder as necessary, knead into a
stiff paste with a little water and apply
to the nose, having previously painted it
with spirit gum.
II. — White wax, 8 parts; rosin, white,
8 parts; mutton suet, 4 parts; color to
suit. Melt together.
Rose Powder. — As a base take 200
parts of powdered iris root, add 600 parts
of rose petals, 100 parts of sandal wood,
100 parts of patchouli, 3 parts of oil of
geranium, and 2 parts of true rose oil.
Rouge Tablets. — There are two dis-
tinct classes of these tablets: those in
which the coloring matter is carmine,
and those in which the aniline colors are
used. The best are those prepared with
carmine, or ammonium carminate, to
speak more correctly. The following is
an excellent formula:
Ammonium carminate. . . 10 parts
Talc, in powder 25 parts
Dextrin 8 parts
Simple syrup, sufficient.
Perfume, to taste, sufficient.
Mix the talc and dextrin and add the
perfume, preferably in the shape of an
essential oil (attar of rose, synthetic oil of
jasmine, or violet, etc.), using 6 to 8
drops to every 4 ounces of other in-
gredients. Incorporate the ammonium
carminate and add just enough simple
syrup to make a mass easily rolled out.
Cut into tablets of the desired size. The
ammonium carminate is made by adding
1 part of carmine to 2| parts of strong
ammonia water. Mix in a vial, cork
tightly, and set aside until a solution is
formed, shaking occasionally. The am-
monium carminate is made by dissolving
carmine in ammonia water to saturation.
Rouge Palettes. — To prepare rouge
palettes rub up together:
Carmine 9 parts
French chalk 50 parts
Almond oil 12 parts
Add enough tragacanth mucilage to
make the mass adhere and spread the
whole evenly on the porcelain palette.
Liquid Rouge. —
I. — Carmine . . 4 parts
Stronger ammonia
water 4 parts
Essence of rose .... 16 parts
Rose water to make. 500 parts
Mix. A very delightful violet odor, if
this is preferred, is obtained by using
ionone in place of rose essence. A cheaper
preparation may be made as follows:
COSMETICS
II. — Eosine 1 part
Distilled water 20 parts
Glycerine 5 parts
Cologne water 75 parts
Alcohol 100 parts
Mix.
Rub together with 10 parts of almond
oil and add sufficient mucilage of traga-
canth to make the mass adhere to the
porcelain palette.
III. — Carmine . . 1 part
Stronger ammonia
water 1 part
Attar of rose 4 parts
Rose water 125 parts
Mix. Any other color may be used
in place of rose, violet (ionone), for in-
stance, or heliotrope. A cheaper prep-
aration may be made by substituting
cosine for the carmine, as follows:
IV. — Eosine 1 part
Distilled water .... 20 parts
Glycerine 5 parts
Cologne water 75 parts
Alcohol 100 parts
Mix.
Peach Tint.—
a. — Buffalo cosine .... 4 drachms
Distilled water 16 fluidounces
Mix.
b. — Pure hydrochloric
acid 2i drachms
Distilled water 64 fluidounces
Mix.
Pour a into 6, shake, and set aside for a
few hours; then pour off the clear por-
tion and collect the precipitate on a
filter. Wash with the same amount of
6 and immediately throw the precipitate
into a glass measure, stirring in with a
glass rod sufficient of b to measure 16
ounces in all. Pass through a hair sieve
to get out any filtering paper. To every
16 ounces add 8 ounces of glycerine.
Theater Rouge. — Base:
Cornstarch 4 drachms
Powdered white tal-
cum 6 drachms
Mix.
a. — Carminoline 10 grains
Base 6 drachms
Water 4 drachms
Dissolve the carminoline in the water,
mix with the base and dry.
6. — Geranium red 10 grains
Base 6 drachms
Water 4 drachms
Mix as above and dry.
SKIN FOODS.
Wrinkles on the face yield to a wash
consisting of 50 parts milk of almonds
(made with rose water) and 4 parts alu-
minum sulphate. Use morning and night.
Rough skin is to be washed constantly
in Vichy water. Besides this, rough
places are to have the following applica-
tion twice daily — either a few drops of:
I. — Rose water 100 parts
Glycerine 25 parts
Tannin £ part
Mix. Or use:
II. — Orange-flower water 100 parts
Glycerine 10 parts
$orax 2 parts
Mix. Sig.: Apply twice daily.
" Beauty Cream." — This formula gives
the skin a beautiful, smooth, and fresh
appearance, and, at the same time, serves
to protect and preserve it:
Alum, powdered 10 grams
Whites of 2 eggs
Boric acid 3 grams
Tincture of benzoin . . 40 drops
Olive oil 40 drops
Mucilage of acacia. . . 5 drops
Rice flour, quantity sufficient.
Perfume, quantity sufficient.
Mix the alum and the white of eggs,
without any addition of water whatever,
in an earthen vessel, and dissolve the alum
by the aid of very gentle heat (derived
from a lamp, or gaslight, regulated to a
very small flame), and constant, even,
stirring. This must continue until the
aqueous content of the albumen is com-
pletely driven off. Care must be taken
to avoid coagulation of the albumen
(which occurs very easily, as all know).
Let the mass obtained in this manner get
completely cold, then throw into a Wedg-
wood mortar, add the boric acid, tinc-
ture of benzoin, oil, mucilage (instead
of which a solution of fine gelatin may
be used), etc., and rub up together,
thickening it with the addition of suffi-
cient rice flour to give the desired con-
sistence, and perfuming at will. In-
stead of olive oil any pure fat, or fatty
oil, may be used, even vaseline or glyc-
erine.
Face Bleach or Beautifier. —
Syrupy lactic acid. ... 40 ounces
Glycerine 80 ounces
Distilled water 5 gallons
Mix. Gradually add
Tincture of benzoin . . 3 ounces
Color by adding
COSMETICS
Carmine No. 40 40 grains
Glycerine 1 ounce
Ammonia solution. .. £ ounce
Water to 3 ounces
Heat this to drive off the ammonia,
and mix all. Shake, set aside; then
filter, and add
Solution of ionone.. .. 1 drachm
Add a few drachms of kaolin and
filter until bright.
BLACKHEAD REMEDIES.
I. — Lactic acid 1 drachm
Boric acid 1 drachm
Ceresine 1 drachm
Paraffine oil 6 drachms
Hydrous wool fat. . . 1£ ounces
Castor oil 6 drachms
II. — Unna advises hydrogen dioxide
in the treatment of blackheads, his pre-
scription being:
Hydrogen dioxide 20 to 40 parts
Hydrous wool fat . . 10 parts
Petrolatum 30 parts
III.— Thymol 1 part
Boric acid 2 parts
Tincture of witch-
hazel 18 parts
Rose water suffi-
cient to make . . . 200 parts
Mix. Apply to the face night and
morning with a sponge, first washing the
face with hot water and castile soap, and
drying it with a coarse towel, using force
enough to start the dried secretions. An
excellent plan is to steam the face by
holding it over a basin of hot water,
keeping the head covered with a cloth.
I V. — Ichthyol 1 drachm
Zinc oxide 2 drachms
Starch 2 drachms
Petrolatum 3 drachms
This paste should be applied at night.
The face should first be thoroughly
steamed or washed in water as hot as
can be comfortably borne. All pus-
tules should then be opened and black-
heads emptied with as little violence as
possible. After careful drying the paste
should be thoroughly rubbed into the
affected areas. In the morning, after
removing the paste with a bland soap,
bathe with cool water and dry with little
friction.
HAND CREAMS AND LOTIONS:
Chapped Skin.—
1.— Glycerine 8 parts
Bay rum 4 parts
Ammonia water 4 parts
Rose water 4 parts
Mix the bay rum and glycerine, add
the ammonia water, and finally the rose
water. It is especially efficacious after
shaving.
II. — As glycerine is bad for the skin
of many people, here is a recipe which
will be found more generally satisfactory
as it contains less glycerine: Bay rum,
3 ounces; glycerine, 1 ounce; carbolic
acid, £ drachm (30 drops). Wash the
hands well and apply while hands are
soft, preferably just before going to bed.
Rub in thoroughly. This rarely fails to
cure the worst "chaps" in two nights.
III. — A sure remedy for chapped
hands consists in keeping them carefully
dry and greasing them now and then with
an anhydrous fat (not cold cream). The
best substances for the purpose are un-
guentum cereum or oleum olivarum.
If the skin of the hands is already
cracked the following preparation will
heal it:
Finely ground zinc oxide, 5.0 parts;
bismuth oxychloride, 2.0 parts; with fat
oil, 12.0 parts; next add glycerine, 5.0
parts; lanolin, 30.0 parts; and scent with
rose water, 10.0 parts.
IV. — Wax salve (olive oil 7 parts, and
yellow wax 3 parts), or pure olive oil.
Hand-Cleaning Paste. — Cleaning pastes
are composed of soap and grit, either
with or without some free alkali. Any
soap may be used, but a white soap is
preferred. Castile soap does not make
as firm a paste as soap made from animal
fats, and the latter also lather better.
For grit, anything may be used, from
powdered pumice to fine sand.
A good paste may be made by dissolv-
ing soap in the least possible quantity of
hot water, and as it cools and sets stirring
in the grit. A good formula is:
White soap 2| pounds
Fine sand 1 pound
Water 5J pints
Lotion for the Hands. —
Boric acid 1 drachm
Glycerine 6 drachms
Dissolve by heat and mix with
Lanolin 6 drachms
Vaseline 1 ounce
Add any perfume desired. The bora-
ted glycerine should be cooled before
mixing it with the lanolin.
Cosmetic Jelly. —
Tragacanth (white rib-
bon) 60 grains
Rose water 14 ounces
Macerate for two days and strain
forcibly through coarse muslin or cheese
COSMETICS
233
cloth. Add glycerine and alcohol, of
each 1 ounce. Perfume to suit. Use
immediately after bathing, rubbing in
well until dry.
Perspiring Hands.— I.— Take rectified
eau de cologne, 50 parts (by weight);
belladonna dye, 8 parts; glycerine, 3
parts; rub gently twice or three times a
day with half a tablespoonful of this
mixture. One may also employ chalk,
carbonate of magnesia, rice starch, hot
and cold baths of the hands (as hot and
as cold as can be borne), during 6 min-
utes, followed by a solution of 4 parts of
tannin in 32 of glycerine.
II. — Rub the hands several times per
day with the following mixture:
By weight
Rose water 125 parts
Borax 10 parts
Glycerine 8 parts
Hand Bleach. — Lanolin, 30 parts ;
glycerine, 20 parts ; borax, 10 parts ;
eucalyptol, 2 parts ; essential oil of al-
monds, 1 part. After rubbing the hands
with this mixture, cover them with gloves
during the night.
For the removal of developing stains,
see Photography.
MASSAGE CREAMS:
Massage Application. —
White potash soap,
shaved 20 parts
Glycerine 30 parts
Water.. 30 parts
Alcohol (90 per cent) . 10 parts
Dissolve the soap by heating it with
the glycerine and water, mixed. Add
the alcohol, and for every 30 ounces of
the solution add 5 or 6 drops of the mis-
tura oleoso balsamica, German Phar-
macopoeia. Filter while hot.
Medicated Massage Balls. — They are
the balls of paraffine wax molded with
a smooth or rough surface with menthol,
camphor, oil of wintergreen, oil of pep-
permint, etc., added before shaping. Spe-
cially useful in headaches, neuralgias,
and rheumatic affections, and many
other afflictions of the skin and bones.
The method of using them is to roll the
ba|J over the affected part by the aid of
the palm of the hand with pressure.
Continue until relief is obtained or a
sensation of warmth. The only external
method for the treatment of all kinds of
headaches is the menthol medicated mas-
sage ball. This may be made with
smooth or corrugated surfaces. Keep
wrapped in foil in cool places.
Casein Massage Cream. — The basis of
the modern massage cream is casein.
Casein is now produced very cheaply in
the powdered form, and by treatment
with glycerine and perfumes it is possible
to turn out a satisfactory cream. The
following formula is suggested:
Skimmed milk 1 gallon
Water of ammonia. . 1 ounce
Acetic acid 1 ounce
Oil of rose geranium 1 drachm
Oil of bitter almond. 1 drachm
Oil of anise 2 drachms
Cold cream (see below), enough.
Carmine enough to color.
Add the water of ammonia to the milk
and let it stand 24 hours. Then add
the acetic acid and let it stand another 24
hours. Then strain through cheese cloth
and add the oils. Work this thoroughly
in a Wedgwood mortar, adding enough
carmine to color it a delicate pink. To
the product thus obtained add an equal
amount of cold cream made by the for-
mula herewith given:
White wax 4 ounces
Spermaceti 4 ounces
W7hite petrolatum 12 ounces
Rose water 14 ounces
Borax 80 grains
Melt the wax, spermaceti, and petro-
latum together over a water bath; dis-
solve the borax in the rose water and add
to the melted mass at one time. Agitate
violently. Presumably the borax solu-
tion should be of the same temperature
as the melted mass.
Massage Skin Foods. —
This preparation is used in massage for
removing wrinkles:
I. — White wax $ ounce
Spermaceti | ounce
Cocoanut oil 1 ounce
Lanolin 1 ounce
Oil of sweet almonds 2 ounces
Melt in a porcelain dish, remove from
the fire, and add
Orange-flower water. .. 1 ounce
Tincture of benzoin. .. 3 drops
Beat briskly until creamy.
II. — Snow-white cold
cream 4 ounces
Lanolin 4 ounces
Oil of theobroma. . . 4 ounces
White petrolatum oil 4 ounces
Distilled water 4 ounces
In hot weather add
Spermaceti 1^ drachms
White wax %\ drachms
COSMETICS
In winter the two latter are left out and
the proportion of cocoa butter is modi-
fied. Prepared and perfumed in pro-
portion same as cold cream.
III. — White petrolatum 7 av. ounces
Paraffine wax. ... | ounce
Lanolin 2 av. ounces
Water 3 fluidounces
Oil of rose 3 drops
Vanillin 2 grains
Alcohol 1 fluidrachm
Melt the paraffine, add the lanolin and
petrolatum, and when these have melted
pour the mixture into a warm mortar,
and, with constant stirring, incorporate
the water. When nearly cold add the
oil and vanillin, dissolved in the alcohol.
Preparations of this kind should be
rubbed into the skin vigorously, as fric-
tion assists the absorbed fat in developing
the muscles, and also imparts softness
and fullness to the skin.
SKIN BLEACHES, BALMS. LOTIONS.
ETC.:
See also Cleaning Methods and Photog-
raphy for removal of stains caused
by photographic developers.
Astringent Wash for Flabby Skin.—
This is used to correct coarse pores, and
to remedy an oily or flabby skin. Apply
with sponge night and morning:
Cucumber juice 1 J ounces
Tincture of benzoin . . £ ounce
Cologne 1 ounce
Elder-flower water ... 5 ounces
Put the tincture of benzoin in an
8-ounce bottle, add the other ingredients,
previously mixed, and shake slightly.
There will be some precipitation of ben-
zoin in this mixture, but it will settle out,
or it may be strained out through cheese
cloth.
Bleaching Skin Salves. — A skin-bleach-
ing action, due to the presence of hydro-
gen peroxide, is possessed by the follow-
ing mixtures:
I. — Lanolin 30 parts
Bitter almond oil. ... 10 parts
Mix and stir with this salve base a
solution of
Borax 1 part
Glycerine 15 parts
Hydrogen peroxide. . 15 parts
For impure skin the following com-
position is recommended:
II. — White mercurial oint-
ment 5 grams
Zinc ointment 5 grams
Lanolin 30 grams
Bitter almond oil. ... 10 grams
of
And gradually stir into this a solution
Borax 2 grams
Glycerine 30 grams
Rose water 10 grams
Concentrated nitric
acid 5 drops
III. — Lanolin 30 grams
Oil sweet almond. . . 10 grams
Borax 1 gram
Glycerine 15 grams
Solution hydrogen
peroxide 15 grams
Mix the lanolin and oil, then incor-
porate the borax previously dissolved in
the mixture of glycerine and peroxide
solution.
IV. — Ointment ammoniac
mercury 5 grams
Ointment zinc oxide. 5 grams
Lanolin 30 grams
Oil sweet almond. . . 10 grams
Borax 2 grams
Glycerine 30 grams
Rose water 10 grams
Nitric acid, C. P. . . . 5 drops
Prepare in a similar manner as the
foregoing. Rose oil in either ointment
makes a good perfume. Both ointments
may, of course, be employed as a general
skin bleach, which, in fact, is their real
office — cosmetic creams.
Emollient Skin Balm. —
Quince seed £ ounce
Water 7 ounces
Glycerine 1£ ounces
Alcohol 4j ounces
Salicylic acid 6 grains
Carbolic acid 10 grains
Oil of bay 10 drops
Oil of cloves 5 drops
Oil of orange peel. ... 10 drops
Oil of wintergreen. ... 8 drops
Oil of rose 2 drops
Digest the quince seed in the water for
24 hours, and then press through a
cloth; dissolve the salicylic acid in the
alcohol; add the carbolic acid to the glyc-
erine; put all together, shake well, and
bottle.
Skin Lotion. —
Zinc sulphocarbo-
late 30 grains
Alcohol (90 per cent) 4 fluidraclfms
Glycerine 2 fluidrachms
Tincture of cochi-
neal 1 fluidrachm
Orange-flower
water 14 fluidounces
Rose water (triple)
to make 0 fluidounces
COSMETICS
Skin Discoloration. — Discoloration of
khe neck may be removed by the use of
acids, the simplest of which is that in
buttermilk, but if the action of this is too
slow try 4 ounces of lactic acid, 2 of
glycerine, and 1 of rose water. These
will mix without heating. Apply sev-
eral times daily with a soft linen rag;
pour a small quantity into a saucer and
dip the cloth into this. If the skin be-
comes sore use less of the remedy and
allay the redness and^ smarting with a
good cold cream. It is always an acid
that removes freckles and discolorations,
by burning them off. It is well to be
slow in its use until you find how severe
its action is. It is not wise to try for
home making any of the prescriptions
which include corrosive sublimate or any
other deadly poison. Peroxide of hydro-
gen diluted with 5 times as much water,
also will bleach discolorations. Do not
try any of these bleaches on a skin freshly
sunburned. For that, wash in hot water,
or add to the hot water application enough
witch-hazel to scent the water, and after
that has dried into the skin it will be soon
enough to try other applications.
Detergent for Skin Stains. — Moritz
Weiss has introduced a detergent paste
which will remove stains from the skin
without attacking it, is non-poisonous,
and can be used without hot water.
Moisten the hands with a little cold water,
apply a small quantity of the paste to
the stained skin, rub the hands together
for a few minutes, and rinse with cold
water. The preparation is a mixture of
soft soap and hard tallow, melted to-
gether over the fire and incorporated
with a little emery powder, flint, glass,
sand, quartz, pumice stone, etc., with
a little essential oil to mask the smell of
the soap. The mixture sets to a mass
like putty, but does not dry hard. The
approximate proportions of the ingre-
dients are: Soft soap, 30 per cent; tal-
low, 15 per cent; emery powder, 55 per
cent, and a few drops of essential oil.
If an extra detergent quality is de-
sired, 4 ounces of sodium carbonate may
be added, and the quantity of soap may
be reduced. Paste thus made will at-
tack grease, etc., more readily, but it is
harder on the skin.
Removing Inground Dirt. —
Egg albumen 8 parts
Boric acid 1 part
Glycerine . . .; 32 parts
Perfume to suit.
Distilled water to make. 50 parts
Dissolve the boric acid in a sufficient
quantity of water; mix the albumen and
glycerine and pass through a silk strain-
er. Finally, mix the two fluids and add
the residue of water.
Every time the hands are washed, dry
on a towel, and then moisten them lightly
but thoroughly with the liquid, and dry
on a soft towel without rubbing. At
night, on retiring, apply the mixture and
wipe slightly or just enough to take up
superfluous liquid; or, better still, sleep
in a pair of cotton gloves.
TOILET CREAMS:
Almond Cold Creams. — A liquid al-
mond cream may be made by the ap-
pended formula. It has been known as
milk of almond:
I. — Sweet almonds.. .. 5 ounces
White castile soap. 2 drachms
White wax 2 drachms
Spermaceti 2 drachms
Oil of bitter al-
monds 10 minims
Oil of bergamot. . . 20 minims
Alcohol 6 fluidounces
Water, a sufficient quantity.
Beat the almonds in a smooth mortar
until as much divided as their nature will
admit; then gradually add water in very
small quantities, continuing the beating
until a smooth paste is obtained; add to
this, gradually, one pint of water, stirring
well all the time. Strain the resulting
emulsion without pressure through a
cotton cloth previously well washed to
remove all foreign matter. If new, the
cloth will contain starch, etc., which
must be removed. Add, through the
strainer, enough water to bring the meas-
ure of the strained liquid to 1 pint.
While this operation is going on let the
soap be shaved into thin ribbons, and
melted, with enough water to cover it,
over a very gentle fire or on a water bath.
When fluid add the wax and spermaceti
in large pieces, so as to allow them to melt
slowly, and thereby better effect union
with the soap. Stir occasionally. When
all is melted place the soapy mixture in
a mortar, run into it slowly the emulsion,
blending the two all the while with the
pestle. Care must be taken not to add
the emulsion faster than it can be incor-
porated with the soap. Lastly add the
alcohol in which the perfumes have been
previously dissolved, in the same man-
ner, using great care.
This preparation is troublesome to
make and rather expensive, and it is
perhaps no better for the purpose than
glycerine. The mistake is often made
of applying the latter too freely, its
"stickiness" being unpleasant, and it is
286
COSMETICS
best to dilute it largely with water. Such
a lotion may be made by mixing
Glycerine 1 part
Rose water 9 parts
Plain water may, of course, be used
as the diluent, but a slightly perfumed
preparation is generally considered more
desirable. The perfume may easily be
obtained by dissolving a very small pro-
portion of handkerchief "extract" or
some essential oil in the glycerine, and
then mixing with plain water.
II. — White wax J ounce
Spermaceti 2J ounces
Oil of sweet al-
monds 2£ ounces
Melt, remove from the fire, and add
Rose water 1| ounces
Beat until creamy: not until cold. When
the cream begins to thicken add a few
drops of oil of rose. Only the finest
almond oil should be used. Be careful
in weighing the wax and spermaceti.
These precautions will insure a good
product.
III. — White wax 4 ounces
Spermaceti 3 ounces
Sweet almond
oil 6 fluidounces
Glycerine 4 fluidounces
Oil of rose gera-
nium 1 fluidrachm
Tincture of ben-
zoin 4 fluidrachms
Melt the wax and spermaceti, add
the oil of sweet almonds, then beat in the
glycerine, tincture of benzoin, and oil
of rose geranium. When all are incor-
porated to a smooth, creamy mass, pour
into molds.
IV. — Sweet almonds,
blanched 5 ounces
Castile soap,
white 120 grains
White wax 120 grains
Spermaceti .... 120 grains
Oil of bitter al-
monds 10 drops
Oil of bergamot 20 drops
Alcohol ... 6 fluidounces
Water, sufficient.
Make an emulsion of the almonds
with water so as to obtain 16 fluidounces
of product, straining through cotton
which has previously been washed to
remove starch. Dissolve the soap with
the aid of heat in the necessary amount
of water to form a liquid, add the wax
and spermaceti, continue the heat until
the latter is melted, transfer to a mortar,
and incorporate the almond emulsion
slowly with constant stirring until all has
been added and a smooth cream has
been formed. Finally, add the two vola-
tile oils.
V. — Melt, at moderate heat,
By weight.
White wax 100 parts
Spermaceti 1,000 parts
Then stir in
By weight.
Almond oil 500 parts
Rose water 260 parts
And scent with
By weight.
Bergamot oil .... 10 parts
Geranium oil. ... 5 parts
Lemon oil 4 parts
By weight.
VI.— Castor oil 500 parts
White wax 100 parts
Almond oil 150 parts
Melt at moderate heat and scent with
By weight.
Geranium oil 6 parts
Lemon oil 5 parts
Bergamot oil. ... 10 parts
By weight.
VII.— Almond oil 400 parts
Lanoline 200 parts
White wax 60 parts
Spermaceti 60 parts
Rose water 300 parts
By weight.
VIII.— White wax 6 parts
Tallow, freshly
tried out 4 parts
Spermaceti 2 parts
Oil of sweet al-
monds 6 parts
Melt together and while still hot add,
with constant stirring, 1 part of sodium
carbonate dissolved in 79 parts of hot
water. Stir until cold. Perfume to the
taste.
IX.— Ointment of
rose water. . . 1 ounce
Oil of sweet
almonds .... 1 fluidounce
Glycerine 1 fluidounce
Boric acid 100 grains
Solution of
soda 2 J fluidounces
Mucilage of
quince seed . 4 fluidounces
Water enough to
make 40 fluidounces
Oil of rose, oil of bitter almonds,
of each sufficient to perfume.
Heat the ointment, oil, and solution of
soda together, stirring constantly until
an emulsion or saponaceous mixture is
COSMETICS
237
formed. Then warm together the glyc-
erine, acid, and mucilage and about 30
fluidounces of water; mix with the emul-
sion, stir until cold, and add the re-
mainder of the water. Lastly, add the
volatile oils.
The rose-water ointment used should
be the "cold cream" of the United States
Pharmacopoeia.
X. — Spermaceti. ... 2 ounces
White wax. ... 2 ounces
Sweet almond
oil 14 fluidounces
Water, distilled 7 fluidounces
Borax, powder 60 grains
Coumarin £ grain
Oil of bergamot 24 drops
Oil of rose 6 drops
Oil of bitter
almonds .... 8 drops
Tincture of am-
bergris ..... 5 drops
Melt the spermaceti and wax, add the
sweet almond oil, incorporate the water
in which the borax has previously been
dissolved, and finally add the oils of ber-
gamot, rose, and bitter almond.
XI. — Honey 2 av. ounces
Castile soap,
white powder 1 av. ounce
Oil sweet al-
monds 26 fluidounces
Oil bitter al-
monds 1 fluidrachm
Oil bergamot. . \ fluidrachm
Oil cloves .... 15 drops
Peru balsam.. . 1 fluidrachm
Liquor potassa.
Solution carmine, of each suffi-
cient.
Mix the honey with the soap in a mor-
tar, and add enough liquor potassa
(about 1 fluidrachm) to produce a nice
cream. Mix the volatile oils and balsam
with the sweet almond oil, mix this with
the cream, and continue the trituration
until thoroughly mixed. Finally add,
if desired, enough carmine solution to
impart a rose tint.
XII. —White wax 800 parts
Spermaceti 800 parts
Sweet almond
oil 5,600 parts
Distilled water. . 2,800 parts
Borax 50 parts
Bergamot oil . . . 20 parts
Attar of rose. ... 5 parts
Coumarin 0.1 part
Add for each pound of the cream 5
drops of etheric oil of bitter almonds,
and 3 drops tincture of ambra. Proceed
as in making cold cream.
The following also makes a fine cream:
XIII. — Spermaceti 3 parts
White wax 2 parts
Oil of almonds,
fresh 12 parts
Rose water, double 1 part
Glycerine, pure. . . 1 part
Melt on a water bath the spermaceti
and wax, add the oil (which should be
fresh), and pour the whole into a slightly
warmed mortar, under constant and lively
stirring, to prevent granulation. Con-
tinue the trituration until the mass has
a white, creamy appearance, and is
about the consistence of butter at ordi-
nary temperature. Add, little by little,
under constant stirring, the orange-
flower water and glycerine mixed, and
finally the perfume as before. Con-
tinue the stirring for 15 or 20 minutes,
then immediately put into containers.
Chappine Cream. —
Quince seed 2 drachms
Glycerine \\ ounces
Water 1^ ounces
Lead acetate 10 grains
Flavoring, sufficient.
Macerate the quince seed in water,
strain, add the glycerine and lead ace-
tate, previously dissolved in sufficient
water; flavor with jockey club or orange
essence.
Cucumber Creams. —
I. — White wax 3 ounces
Spermaceti 3 ounces
Benzoinated lard. ... 8 ounces
Cucumbers 3 ounces
Melt together the wax, spermaceti, and
lard, and infuse in the liquid the cucum-
bers previously grated. Allow to cool,
stirring well; let stand a day, remelt,
strain and again stir the "cream" until
cold.
II. — Benzoinated lard. ... 5 ounces
Suet 3 ounces
Cucumber juice 10 ounces
Proceed as in making cold cream.
Glycerine Creams. —
I. — Oil of sweet al-
monds 100 parts
White wax 13 parts
Glycerine, pure 25 parts
Add a sufficient quantity of any
suitable perfume.
Melt, on the water bath, the oil, wax,
and glycerine together, remove and as
the mass cools down add the perfume in
sufficient quantity to make a creamy
mass.
238
COSMETICS
II. — Quince seed 1 ounce
Boric acid 16 grains
Starch 1 ounce
Glycerine 16 ounces
Carbolic acid 30 minims
Alcohol 12 ounces
Oil of lavender 30 minims
Oil of rose 10 drops
Extract of white rose 1 ounce
Water enough to make 64 ounces
Dissolve the boric acid in a quart of
water and in this solution macerate the
quince seed for 3 hours; then strain.
Heat together the starch and the glycer-
ine until the starch granules are broken,
and mix with this the carbolic acid.
Dissolve the oils and the extract of rose
in the alcohol, and add to the quince-
seed mucilage; then mix all together,
strain, and add water enough to make
the product weigh 64 ounces.
III. — Glycerine 1 ounce
Borax 2 drachms
Boracic acid 1 drachm
Oil rose geranium . . 30 drops
Oil bitter almond. . . 15 drops
Milk 1 gallon
Heat the milk until it curdles and
allow it to stand 12 hours. Strain it
through cheese cloth and allow it to
stand again for 12 hours. Mix in the
salts and glycerine and triturate in a
mortar, finally adding the odors and
coloring if wanted. The curdled milk
must be entirely free from water to avoid
separation. If the milk will not curdle
fast enough the addition of 1 ounce of
water ammonia to a gallon will hasten it.
Take a gallon of milk, add 1 ounce am-
monia water, heat (not boil), allow to
stand 24 hours, and no trouble will be
found in forming a good base for the
cream.
IV. — This is offered as a substitute
for cucumber cream for toilet uses.
Melt 15 parts, by weight, of gelatin in
hot water containing 15 parts, by weight,
of boracic acid as well as 150 parts,
by weight, of glycerine; the total amount
of water used should not exceed 300
parts, by weight. It may be perfumed
or not.
Lanolin Creams. —
I. — Anhydrous lanolin. 650 parts
Peach-kernel oil. . . 200 parts
Water 150 parts
Perfume with about 15 drops of
ionone or 20 drops of synthetic ylang-
ylang.
II. — Lanolin 40 parts
Olive oil 15 parts
Paraffine ointment. . 10 parts
Aqua naphse 10 parts
Distilled water 15 parts
Glycerine 5 parts
Boric acid 4 parts
Borax 4 parts
Geranium oil, sufficient.
Extract, triple, of ylang-ylang,
quantity sufficient.
III. — Anhydrous lanolin. 650 drachms
Almond oil 200 drachms
Water 150 drachms
Oil of ylang-ylang . 5 drops
Preparations which have been intro-
duced years ago for the care of the skin
and complexion are the glycerine gelees,
which have the advantage over lanolin
that they go further, but present the
drawback of not being so quickly ab-
sorbed by the skin. These products are
filled either into glasses or into tubes.
The latter way is preferable and is more
and more adopted, owing to the conven-
ience of handling.
A good recipe for such a gelee is the
following:
Moisten white tragacanth powder, 50
parts, with glycerine, 200 parts, and spirit
of wine, 100 parts, and shake with a suit-
able amount of perfume; then quickly
mix and shake with warm distilled waier,
650 parts.
A transparent slime will form imme-
diately which can be drawn off at once.
Mucilage Creams. —
I.— Starch .30 parts
Carrageen mucilage. 480 parts
Boric acid 15 parts
Glycerine 240 parts
Cologne water 240 parts
Boil the starch in the carrageen muci-
lage, add the boric acid and the glycer-
ine. Let cool, and add the cologne
water.
II. — Linseed mucilage. .. 240 parts
Boric acid 2 parts
Salicylic acid 1.3 parts
Glycerine 60 parts
Cologne water 120 parts
Rose water 120 parts
Instead of the cologne water any ex-
tracts may be used. Lilac and ylang-
ylang are recommended.
Witch-Hazel Creams.—
I. — Quince seed 90 grains
Boric acid 8 grains
Glycerine 4 fluidounces
Alcohol 6 fiuidounces
Carbolic acid 6 drachms
Cologne water .... 4 fluidounces
Oil lavender flow-
ers 40 drops
COSMETICS
239
Glycerite starch ... 4 av. ounces
Distilled witch-hazel extract enough
to make 32 fluidounces
Dissolve the boric acid in 16 ounces of
the witch-hazel extract, macerate the
quince seed in the solution for 3 hours,
strain, add the glycerine, carbolic acid,
and glycerite, and mix well. Mix the
alcohol, cologne water, lavender oil, and
mucilages, incorporate with the previous
mixture, and add enough witch-hazel
extract to bring to the measure of 32
fluidounces.
II. — Quince seed 4 ounces
Hot water 16 ounces
Glycerine 32 ounces
Witch-hazel water . . 128 ounces
Boric acid 6 ounces
Rose extract 2 ounces
Violet extract 1 ounce
Macerate the quince seed in the hot
water; add the glycerine and witch-hazel,
in which the boric acid has been pre-
viously dissolved; let the mixture stand
for 2 "days, stirring occasionally; strain
and add the perfume.
Skin Cream for Collapsible Tubes.—
I. — White vaseline 6 ounces
White wax '. 1 ounce
Spermaceti 5 drachms
Subchloride bismuth 6 drachms
Attar of rose 6 minims
Oil of bitter almonds 1 minim
Rectified spirit \ ounce
Melt the vaseline, wax, and sperma-
ceti together, and while cooling incor-
porate the subchloride of bismuth (in
warm mortar). Dissolve the oils in the
alcohol, and add to the fatty mixture,
stirring all until uniform and cold. In
cold weather the quantities of wax and
spermaceti may be reduced.
II. — Lanolin 1 ounce
Almond oil 1 ounce
Oleate of zinc (pow-
der) 3 drachms
Extract of white rose \\ drachms
Glycerine 2 drachms
Ro'se water 2 drachms
Face Cream Without Grease. —
Quince seed 10 parts
Boiling water 1,000 parts
Borax 5 parts
Boric acid 5 parts
Glycerine 100 parts
Alcohol, 94 per cent. 125 parts
Attar of rose, quantity sufficient to
perfume.
Macerate the quince seed in half of
the boiling water, with frequent agita-
tions, for 2 hours and 30 minutes, then
strain off. In the residue of the boiling
water dissolve the borax and boric acid,
add the glycerine and the perfume, the
latter dissolved in the alcohol. Now
add, little by little, the colate of quince
seed, under constant agitation, which
should be kept up for 5 minutes after
the last portion of the colate is added.
TOILET MILKS:
Cucumber Milk. —
Simple cerate 2 pounds
Powdered borax 11 £ ounces
Powdered castile soap 10 ounces
Glycerine • . . 26 ounces
Alcohol 24 ounces
Cucumber juice 32 ounces
Water to 5 gallons
lonone 1 drachm
Jasmine \ drachm
Neroli \ drachm
Rhodinol 15 minims
To the melted cerate in a hot water
bath add the soap and stir well, keeping
up the heat until perfectly mixed. Add
8 ounces of borax to 1 gallon of boiling
water, and pour gradually into the hot
melted soap and cerate; add the re-
mainder of the borax and hot water, then
the heated juice and glycerine, and
lastly the alcohol. Shake well while
cooling, set aside for 48 hours, and siphon
off any water that may separate. Snake
well, and repeat after standing again if
necessary; then perfume.
Cucumber Juice. — It is well to make
a large quantity, as it keeps indefinitely.
Washed unpeeled cucumbers are grated
and pressed: the juice is heated, skimmed
and boiled for 5 minutes, then cooled
and filtered. Add 1 part of alcohol to
2 parts of juice, let stand for 12 hours or
more, and filter until clear.
Glycerine Milk.—
Glycerine 1,150 parts
Starch, powdered. . 160 parts
Distilled water 400 parts
Tincture of benzoin 20 parts
Rub up 80 parts of the starch with the
glycerine, then put the mixture on the
steam bath and heat, under continuous
stirring, until it forms a jellylike mass.
Remove from the bath and stir in the
remainder of the starch. Finally, add
the water and tincture and stir till homo-
geneous.
Lanolin Toilet Milk.—
White castile soap,
powdered 22 grains
Lanolin 1 ounce
Tincture benzoin .... 12 drachms
Water, enough.
240
COSMETICS
Dissolve the soap in 2 fluidounces of
warm water, also mix the lanolin with
2 fluidounces of warm water; then in-
corporate the two with each other,
finally adding the tincture. The latter
may be replaced by 90 grains of pow-
dered borax.
Jasmine Milk. — To 25 parts of water
add gradually, with constant stirring,
1 part of zinc white, 2 quarts of grain
spirit, and 0.15 to 0.25 part of glycerine;
finally stir in 0.07 to 0.10 part of jasmine
essence. Filter the mixture and fill into
glass bottles. For use as a cosmetic,
rub on the raspberry paste on retiring at
night, and in the morning use the jas-
mine milk to remove the paste from the
skin. The two work together in their
effect.
SUNBURN AND FRECKLE REME-
DIES.
I. — Apply over the affected skin a
solution of corrosive sublimate, 1 in 500,
or, if the patient can stand it, 1 in 300,
morning and evening, and for the night
apply emplastrum hydrargyri com-
positum to the spots. In the morning
remove the plaster and all remnants of
it by rubbing fresh butter or cold cream
over the spots.
For redness of the skin apply each
other day zinc oxide ointment or oint-
ment of bismuth subnitrate.
II. — Besnier recommends removal of
the mercurial ointment with green soap,
and the use, at night, of an ointment
composed of vaseline and Vigo's plaster
(emplastrum hydrargyri compositum),
in equal parts. In the morning wash off
with soap and warm water, and apply
the following:
Vaseline, white 20 parts
Bismuth carbonate. . . 5 parts
Kaolin 5 parts
Mix, and make an ointment.
III. — Leloir has found the following
of service. Clean the affected part with
green soap or with alcohol, and then ap-
ply several coats of the following:
Acid chrysophanic . . 15 parts
Chloroform 100 parts
Mix. Apply with a camel's-hair pencil.
When the application dries thoroughly,
go over it with a layer of traumaticine.
This application will loosen itself in
several uays, when the process should
be repeated.
IV.— When the skin is only slightly
discolored use a pomade of salicylic acid,
or apply the following:
Acid chrysophanic,
from 1 to 4 parts
Acid salicylic 1 to 2 parts
Collodion 40 parts
V. — When there is need for a more
complicated treatment, the following is
used:
(a) Corrosive sublimate 1 part
Orange- flower
water 7,500 parts
Acid, hydrochloric,
dilute 500 parts
(6) Bitter almonds. . . . 4,500 parts
Glycerine 2,500 parts
Orange-flower
water 25,000 parts
Rub up to an emulsion in a porcelain
capsule. Filter and add, drop by drop,
and under constant stirring, 5 grams of
tincture of benzoin. Finally mix the
two solutions, adding the second to the
first. t
This preparation is applied with a
sponge, on retiring, to the affected places,
and allowed to dry on.
VI. — According to Brocq the follow-
ing should be penciled over the affected
spots:
Fresh pure milk 50 parts
Glycerine 30 parts
Acid, hydrochloric,
concentrated 5 parts
Ammonium chlorate. 3 parts
VII. — Other external remedies that
may be used are lactic acid diluted with
3 volumes of water, applied with a glass
rod: dilute nitric acid, and, finally, per-
oxide of hydrogen, which last is a very
powerful agent. Should it cause too
much inflammation, the latter may be
assuaged by using an ointment of zinc
oxide or bismuth subnitrate — or one may
use the following:
Kaolin 4 parts
Vaseline 10 parts
Glycerine : . 4 parts
Magnesium carbonate 2 parts
Zinc oxide 2 parts
Freckle Remedies. —
I. — Poppy oil 1 part
Lead acetate 2 parts
Tincture benzoin. ... 1 part
Tincture quillaia. ... 5 parts
Spirit nitrous ether. . . 1 part
Rose water 95 parts
Saponify the oil with the lead acetate;
add the rose water, and follow with the
tinctures.
II. — Chloral hydrate 2 drachms
Carbolic acid 1 drachm
COSMETICS
Tincture iodine 60 drops
Glycerine 1 ounce
Mix and dissolve. Apply with a
camel's-hair pencil at night.
III.— Distilled vinegar.. . 660 parts
Lemons, cut in
small pieces 135 parts
Alcohol, 85 per
cent 88 parts
Lavender oil 23 parts
Water 88 parts
Citron oil 6 parts
This mixture is allowed to stand for 3
or 4 days in the sun and filtered. Coat,
by means of a sponge before retiring, the
places of the skin where the freckles are
and allow to dry.
Freckles and Liver Spots, — Modern
dermatological methods of treating
freckles and liver spots are based partly
on remedies that cause desquamation
and those that depigmentate (or de-
stroy or neutralize pigmentation). Both
methods may be distinguished in respect
to their effects and mode of using into
the following: The active ingredients of
the desquamative pastes are reductives
which promote the formation of epithe-
lium and hence expedite desquamation.
There are many such methods, and
especially to be mentioned is that of
Unna, who uses resorcin for the purpose.
Lassar makes use of a paste of naphthol
and sulphur.
Sunburn Remedies. —
I. — Zinc sulphocarbo-
late 1 part
Glycerine 20 parts
Rose water 70 parts
Alcohol, 90 per
cent 8 parts
Cologne water. ... 1 part
Spirit of camphor. 1 part
II.— Borax 4 parts
Potassium chlorate 2 parts
Glycerine 10 parts
Alcohol 4 parts
Rose water to make 90 parts
III. — Citric acid 2 drachms
Ferrous sulphate
(cryst.) 18 grains
Camphor 2 grains
Elder-flower water 3 fluidounces
IV. — Potassium carbon- .
ate 3 parts
Sodium chloride . . 2 parts
Orange- flower
water 15 parts
Rose water 65 parts
V. — Boroglycerine, 50
percent 1 part
Ointment of rose
water 9 parts
VI. — Sodium bicarbon-
ate 1 part
Ointment of rose
water 7 parts
VII. — Bicarbonate of soda 2 drachms
Powdered borax ... 1 drachm
Compound tincture
of lavender 1^ drachms
Glycerine 1 ounce
Rose water 4 ounces
Dissolve the soda and borax in the
glycerine and rose water, and add the
tincture. Apply with a small piece of
sponge 2 or 3 times a day. Then gently
dry by dabbing with a soft towel.
VIII. — Quince seeds 2 drachms
Distilled water.. . . 10 ounces
Glycerine 2 ounces
Alcohol, 94 per
cent 1 ounce
Rose water 2 ounces
Boil the seeds in the water for 10 min-
utes, then strain off the liquid, and when
cold add to it the glycerine, alcohol, and
rose water.
IX. — White soft soap. .. 2^ drachms
Glycerine 1£ drachms
Almond oil 11 drachms
Well mix the glycerine and soap in a
mortar, and very gradually add the oil,
stirring constantly until perfectly mixed.
X. — Subnitrate of bis-
muth 1£ drachms
Powdered French
chalk 30 grains
Glycerine 2 drachms
Rose water 1£ ounces
Mix the powders, and rub down care-
fully with the glycerine; then add the
rose water. Shake the bottle before use.
XI. — Glycerine cream . . 2 drachms
Jordan almonds . . 4 drachms
Rose water 5 ounces
Essential oil of al-
monds 3 drops
Blanch the almonds, and then dry and
beat them up into a perfectly smooth
paste; then mix in the glycerine cream
and essential oil. Gradually add the
rose water, stirring well after each addi-
tion; then strain through muslin.
Tan and Freckle Lotion. —
Solution A:
Potassium iodide, iodine, glycerine,
and infusion rose.
Dissolve the potassium iodide in a
COSMETICS
small quantity of the infusion and a
drachm of the glycerine; with this fluid
moisten the iodine in a glass of water
and rub it down, gradually adding more
liquid, until complete solution has been
obtained; then stir in the remainder of
the ingredients, and bottle the mixture.
Solution B:
Sodium thiosulphate and rose water.
With a small camel's-hair pencil or piece
of fine sponge apply a little of solution A
to the tanned or freckled surface, until a
slight or tolerably uniform brownish
yellow skin has been produced. At the
expiration of 15 or 20 minutes moisten
a piece of cambric, lint, or soft rag with
B and lay it upon the affected part, re-
moving, squeezing away the liquid,
soaking it afresh, and again applying
until the iodine stain has disappeared.
Repeat the process thrice daily, but
diminish the frequency of application if
tenderness be produced.
A Cure for Tan. — Bichloride of mer-
cury, in coarse powder, 10 grains; dis-
tilled water, 1 pint. Agitate the two
together until a complete solution is
obtained. Add £ ounce of glycerine.
Apply with a small sponge as often as
agreeable. This is not strong enough to
blister and skin the face in average cases.
It may be increased or reduced in strength
by adding to or taking from the amount
of bichloride of mercury. Do not for-
get that this last ingredient is a powerful
poison and should be kept out of the
reach of children and ignorant persons.
Improved Carron Oil. — Superior to
the old and more suitable. A desirable
preparation for burns, tan, freckle, sun-
burn, scalds, abrasions, or lung affec-
tions. Does not oxidize so quickly or
dry up so rapidly and less liable to ran-
cidity.
Linseed oil 2 ounces
Limewater 2 ounces
Paraffine, liquid 1 ounce
Mix the linseed oil and water, and add
the paraffine. Shake well before using.
LIVER SPOTS.
I. — Corrosive s u b 1 i -
mate 1 part
White sugar 190 parts
White of egg 34 parts
Lemon juice 275 parts
Water to make.. . . 2,500 parts
Mix the sublimate, sugar, and albu-
men intimately, then add the lemon
juice and water. Dissolve, shake well,
and after standing an hour, filter. Ap-
ply in the morning after the usual ablu-
tions, and let dry on the face.
II. — Bichloride of mercury, in coarse
powder, 8 grains; witch-hazel, 2 ounces;
rose water, 2 ounces.
Agitate until a solution is obtained.
Mop over the affected parts. Keep out
of the way of ignorant persons and chil-
dren.
TOILET POWDERS:
Almond Powders for the Toilet. —
I.— Almond meal .... 6,000 parts
Bran meal 3,000 parts
Soap powder 600 parts
Bergarnot oil 50 parts
Lemon oil 15 parts
Clove oil 15 parts
Neroli oil 6 parts
II.— Almond meal 7,000 parts
Bran meal 2,000 parts
Violet root 900 parts
Borax 350 parts
Bitter almond oil . 18 parts
Palmarosa oil.. .. 36 parts
Bergamot oil 10 parts
III.— Almond meal .... 3,000 parts
Bran meal 3,000 parts
Wheat flour 3,000 parts
Sand 100 parts
Lemon oil 40 parts
Bitter almond oil. 10 parts
Bath Powder. —
Borax 4 ounces
Salicylic acid 1 drachm
Extract of cassia 1 drachm
Extract of jasmine. .. 1 drachm
Oil of lavender 20 minims
Rub the oil and extracts with the borax
and salicylic acid until the alcohol has
evaporated. Use a heaping teaspoonful
to the body bath.
Brunette or Rachelle. —
Base 9 pounds
Powdered Florentine
orris 1 pound
Perfume the same.
Powdered yellow
ocher. . . . (av.) 3 ounces 120 grains
Carmine No. 40 60 grains
Rub down the carmine and ocher with
alcohol in a mortar, and spread on glass
to dry; then mix and sift.
Violet Poudre de Riz.—
I. — Cornstarch 7 pounds
Rice flour 1 pound
Powdered talc 1 pound
Powdered orris root. . 1 pound
Extract of cassia 3 ounces
Extract of jasmine. . . 1 ounce
COSMETICS
II. — Cheaper.
Potato starch 8 pounds
Powdered talc 1 pound
Powdered orris 1 pound
Extract of cassia. . . 3 ounces
Barber's Powder. —
Cornstarch
Precipitated chalk. .
Powdered talc
Oil of neroli
Oil of cedrat
Oil of orange
Extract of jasmine. .
5 pounds
3 pounds
2 pounds
1 drachm
1 drachm
2 drachms
1 ounce
Rose Poudre de Riz. —
I. — Cornstarch 9 pounds
Powdered talc 1 pound
Oil of rose 1 J drachms
Extract of jasmine. .. 6 drachms
II. — Potato starch 9 pounds
Powdered talc 1 pound
Oil of rose \ drachm
Extract of jasmine. . . \ ounce
Ideal Cosmetic Powder. — The follow-
ing combines the best qualities that a
powder for the skin should have:
Zinc, white 50 parts
Calcium carbonate,
precipitated 300 parts
Steatite, best white. . 50 parts
Starch, wheat, or rice 100 parts
Extract white rose,
triple 3 parts
Extract jasmine, tri-
ple 3 parts
Extract orange flow-
er, triple 3 parts
Extract of cassia, tri-
ple 3 parts
Tincture of myrrh. . 1 part
Powder the solids and mix thoroughly
by repeated siftings.
Flesh Face Powder.—
Base 9 pounds
Powdered Florentine
orris 1 pound
Carmine No. 40 250 grains
Extract of jasmine . . 100 minims
Oil of neroli 20 minims
Vanillin 5 grains
Artificial musk 30 grains
White heliotropin. . . 30 grains
Coumarin 1 grain
Rub the carmine with a portion of the
base and alcohol in a mortar, mixing the
perfume the same way in another large
mortar, and adding the orris. Mix and
sift all until specks of carmine disappear
on rubbing.
White Face Powder.—
Base 9 pounds
Powdered Florentine
orris 1 pound
Perfume the same. Mix and sift.
Talcum Powders. — Talc, when used
as a toilet powder should be in a state of
very fine division. Antiseptics are some-
times added in small proportion, but
these are presumably of little or no value
in the quantity allowable, and may
prove irritating. For general use, at all
events, the talcum alone is the best and
the safest. As a perfume, rose oil may
be employed, but on account of its cost,
rose geranium oil is probably more
frequently used. A satisfactory propor-
tion is \ drachm of the oil to a pound
of the powder. In order that the per-
fume may be thoroughly disseminated
throughout the powder, the oil should
be triturated first with a small portion of
it; this should then be further triturated
with a larger portion, and, if the quan-
tity operated on be large, the final mix-
ing may be effected by sifting. Many
odors besides that of rose would be suit-
able for a toilet powder. Ylang-ylang
would doubtless prove very attractive,
but expensive.
The following formulas for other va-
rieties of the powder may prove useful:
Violet Talc.—
I. — Powdered talc 14 ounces
Powdered orris root. 2 ounces
Extract of cassia ....
Extract of jasmine
Rose Talc.—
II. — Powdered talc 5 pounds
Oil of rose \ drachm
Extract of jasmine . 4 ounces
Tea-Rose Talc.—
III. — Powdered talc 5 pounds
Oil of rose 50 drops
Oil of wintergreen . . 4 drops
Extract of jasmine.. 2 ounces
Bora ted Apple Blossom. —
IV. — Powdered talc 22 pounds
Magnesium carbon-
ate ;•••:• 2t pounds
Powdered boric acid 1 pound
Mix.
Carnation pink blos-
som (Schimmers) 2 ounces
Extract of trefle .... 2 drachms
To 12 drachms of this mixture add:
Neroli 1 drachm
Vanillin \ drachm
Alcohol to 3 ounces
Sufficient for 25 pounds.
:: f
ounce
ounce
COSMETICS
V.— Talcum
8
ounces
Starch
8
ounces
Oil of neroli
10
drops
Oil of ylang-ylang.
5
drops
VI.— Talcum
12
ounces
Starch
4
ounces
Orris root
2
ounces
Oil of bergamot. . . .
12
drops
VII. —Talcum
14
ounces
Starch
2
ounces
% Lanolin
^
ounce
Oil of rose
10
drops
Oil of neroli
5
drops
TOILET VINEGARS:
Pumillo Toilet Vinegar.—
Alcohol, 80 per cent 1,600 parts
Vinegar, 10 per
cent. . .......... 840 parts
Oil of pinu spumillo 44 parts
Oil of lavender 4 parts
Oil of lemon 2 parts
Oil of bergamot .... 2 parts
Dissolve the oils in the alcohol, add
the vinegar, let stand for a week and filter.
Vinaigre Rouge. —
Acetic acid 24 parts
Alum 3 parts
Peru balsam 1 part
Carmine, No. 40. .. 12 parts
Ammonia water ... 6 parts
Rose water, dis-
tilled 575 parts
Alcohol 1,250 parts
Dissolve the balsam of Peru in the
alcohol, and the alum in the rose water.
Mix the two solutions, add the acetic
acid, and let stand overnight. Dis-
solve the carmine in the ammonia water
and add to mixture. Shake thoroughly,
let stand for a few minutes, then decant.
TOILET WATERS:
" Beauty Water."—
Fresh egg albumen. . 500 parts
Alcohol. 125 parts
Lemon oil 2 parts
Lavender oil 2 parts
Oil of thyme 2 parts
Mix the ingredients well together.
When first mixed the liquid becomes
flocculent, but after standing for 2 or 3
days clears up — sometimes becomes
perfectly clear, and may be decanted.
It forms a light, amber-colored liquid
that remains clear for months.
At night, before retiring, pour about a
teaspoonful of the water in the palm of the
hand, and rub it over the face and neck,
letting it dry on. In the morning, about
an hour before the bath, repeat the oper-
ation, also letting the liquid dry on the
skin. The regular use of this prepara-
tion for 4 weeks will give the skin an
extraordinary fineness, clearness, and
freshness.
Rottmanner's Beauty Water. — K oiler
says that this preparation consists of 1
part of camphor, 5 parts of milk of sul-
phur, and 50 parts of rose water.
Birch Waters. — Birch water, which
has many cosmetic applications, espe-
cially as a hair wash, or an ingredient in
hair washes, may be prepared as follows:
I.— Alcohol, 96 per cent 3,500 parts
Water 700 parts
Potash soap 200 parts
Glycerine 150 parts
Oil of birch buds. . . 50 parts
Essence of spring
flowers 100 parts
Chlorophyll, quantity sufficient to
color.
Mix the water with 700 parts of the
alcohol, and in the mixture dissolve the
soap. Add the essence of spring flowers
and birch oil to the remainder of the
alcohol, mix well, and to the mixture add,
little by little, and with constant agitation,
the soap mixture. Finally, add the glyc-
erine, mix thoroughly, and set aside for
8 days, filter and color the filtrate with
chlorophyll, to which is added a little
tincture of saffron. To use, add an
equal volume of water to. produce a
lather.
II.— Alcohol, 96 per
cent 2,000 parts
Water 500 parts
Tincture of can-
tharides 25 parts
Salicylic acid 25 parts
Glycerine 100 parts
Oil of birch buds . 40 parts
Bergamot oil. .... 30 parts
Geranium oil 5 parts
Dissolve the oils in the alcohol, add
the acid and tincture of cantharides;
mix the water and glycerine and add,
and, finally, color as before.
III.— Alcohol 30,000 parts .
Birch juice 3,000 parts
Glycerine 1,000 parts
Bergamot oil. ... 90 parts
Vanillin 10 parts
Geranium oil. ... 50 parts
Water 14,000 parts
IV.— Alcohol 40,000 parts
Oil of birch 150 parts
Bergamot oil. ... 100 parts
Lemon oil 50 parts
COTTON
245
Palmarosa oil. . . 100 parts
Glycerine 2,000 parts
Borax 150 parts
Water 20,000 parts
Violet Ammonia Water. — Most prep-
arations of this character consist of
either coarsely powdered ammonium
carbonate, with or without the addition
of ammonia water, or of a coarsely pow-
dered mixture, which slowly evolves the
odor of ammonia, the whole being per-
fumed by the addition of volatile oil,
pomade essences, or handkerchief ex-
tract. The following are typical for-
mulas:
I. — Moisten coarsely powdered am-
monium carbonate, contained in a suit-
able bottle, with a mixture of concen-
trated tincture of orris root, 2t ounces;
aromatic spirit of ammonia, 1 drachm;
violet extract, 3 drachms.
II. — Fill suitable bottles with coarsely
powdered ammonium carbonate and add
to the salt as much of the following solu-
tion as it will absorb: Oil of orris, 5
minims; oil of lavender flowers, 10
minims; violet extract, 30 minims;
stronger water of ammonia, 2 fluid-
ounces.
III. — The following is a formula for
a liquid preparation: Extract violet, 8
fluidrachms; extract cassia, 8 fluidrachms;
spirit of rose, 4 fluidrachms; tincture of
orris, 4 fluidrachms ; cologne spirit, 1
pint; spirit of ammonia, 1 ounce. Spirit
of ionone may be used instead of extract
of violet.
Violet Witch-Hazel.—
Spirit of ionone $ drachm
Rose water 6 ounces
Distilled extract o f
witch-hazel enough
to make 16 ounces
Cotton
BLEACHING OF COTTON:
I.— Bleaching by Steaming.— The
singed and washed cotton goods are
passed through hydrochloric acid of 2°
Be. Leave them in heaps during 1
hour, wash, pass through sodium hvpo-
chlorite of 10° Be. diluted with 10 times
the volume of water. Let the pieces lie
in heaps for 1 hour, wash, pass through
caustic soda lye of 38° Be. diluted with 8
times its volume of water, steam, put
again through sodium chloride, wash,
acidulate slightly with hydrochloric acid,
wash and dry. Should the whiteness
not be sufficient, repeat the operations.
II. — Bleaching with Calcium Sulphite.
— The cotton goods are impregnated
with 1 part, by weight, of water, 1 part
of caustic lime, and £ part of bisulphite
of 40° Be.; next steamed during 1-2
hours at a pressure of \ atmosphere,
washed, acidulated, washed and dried.
The result is as white a fabric as by the
old method with caustic lime, soda, and
calcium chloride. The bisulphite may
also be replaced by calcium hydrosul-
Ehite, and, instead of steaming, the
ibric may be boiled for several hours
with calcium sulphite.
III. — Bleaching of Vegetable Fibers
with Hydrogen Peroxide. — Pass the pieces
through a solution containing caustic
soda, soap, hydrogen peroxide, and burnt
magnesia. The pieces are piled in heaps
on carriages; the latter are shoved into
the well-known apparatus of Mather &
Platt (kier), and the liquid is pumped
on for 6 hours, at a pressure of § atmos-
phere. Next wash, acidulate, wash and
dry. The bleaching may also be done
on an ordinary reeling vat. For 5
pieces are needed about 1,000 parts, by
weight, of water; 10 parts, by weight, of
solid caustic soda; 1 part of burnt mag-
nesia; 30 parts, by weight, of hydrogen
peroxide. After 3-4 hours' boiling,
wash, acidulate, wash and dry. The
bleaching may also be performed by
passing through barium peroxide, then
through sulphuric acid or hydrochloric
acid, and next through soda lye. It is
practicable also to commence with the
latter and finally give a treatment with
hydrogen peroxide.
The whiteness obtained by the above
process is handsomer than that produced
by the old method with hypochlorites,
and the fabric is weakened to a less ex-
tent.
TESTS FOR COTTON.
I. — Cotton, when freed from extrane-
ous matter by boiling with potash, and
afterwards with hydrochloric acid, yields
pure cellulose or absorbent cotton, which,
according to the U. S. P., is soluble in
copper ammonium sulphate solution.
The B. P. is more specific and states
that cotton is soluble in a concentrated
solution of copper ammonium sulphate.
The standard test solution (B. P.) is
made by dissolving 10 parts of copper
sulphate in 160 parts of distilled water,
and cautiously adding solution of am-
monia to the liquid until the precipitate
first formed is nearly dissolved. The
product is then filtered and the filtrate
made up to 200 parts with distilled
COTTON— COUGH MIXTURES
water. The concentrated solution is
prepared by using a smaller quantity
of distilled water.
II. — Schweitzer's reagent for textile
fibers and cellulose is made by dissolving
10 parts of copper sulphate in 100 parts
of water and adding a solution of 5 parts
of potassium hydrate in 50 parts of water;
then wash the precipitate and dissolve in
20 per cent ammonia until saturated.
This solution dissolves cotton, linen, and
silk, but not wool. The reagent is said
to be especially useful in microscopy, as
it rapidly dissolves cellulose, but has no
action on lignin.
III. — Jandrier's Test for Cotton in
Woolen Fabrics. — Wash the sample of
fabric and treat with sulphuric acid
(20 Be.) for half an hour on the water
bath. To 100 to 200 parts of this solu-
tion add 1 part resorcin, and overlay on
concentrated sulphuric acid free from
nitrous products. The heat developed
is sufficient to give a color at the contact
point of the liquids, but intensity of color
may be increased by slightly heating. If
the product resulting from treating the
cotton is made up 1 in 1,000, resorcin
will give an orange color; alphanaphtol
a purple; gallic acid a green gradually
becoming violet down in the acid; hydro-
quinone or pyrogallol a brown; morphine
or codeine, a lavender; thymol or menthol
a pink. Cotton may be detected in
colored goods, using boneblack to de-
colorize the solution, if necessary.
IV. — Overbeck's test for cotton in
woolen consists in soaking the fabric in
an aqueous solution of alloxantine (1 in
10), and after drying expose to ammonia
vapor and rinse in water. Woolen ma-
terial is colored crimson, cotton remains
blue.
V.— Liebermann's Test.— Dye the fab-
ric for half an hour in fuchsine solution
rendered light yellow by caustic soda
solution and then washed with water —
silk is colored dark red; wool, light red;
flax, pink; and cotton remains colorless.
To Distinguish Cotton from Linen. —
Take a sample about an inch and a half
square of the cloth to be tested and
plunge it into a tepid alcoholic solution
of cyanine. After the coloring matter
has been absorbed by the fiber, rinse it
in water and then plunge into dilute sul-
phuric acid. If it is of cotton the sam-
ple will be almost completely bleached,
while linen preserves the blue color al-
most unchanged. If the sample be then
plunged in ammonia, the blue will be
strongly reinforced.
Aromatic Cotton. — Aromatic cotton is
produced as follows : Mix camphor, 5
parts; pine-leaf oil, 5 parts; clove oil,
5 parts; spirit of wine (90 per cent), 80
parts; and distribute evenly on cotton,
500 parts, by means of an atomizer. The
cotton is left pressed together in a tightly
closed tin vessel for a few days.
Cotton Degreasing. — Cotton waste, in
a greasy condition, is placed in an acid-
proof apparatus, where it is simulta-
neously freed from grease, etc., and pre-
pared for bleaching by the following
process, which is performed without the
waste being removed from the appara-
tus: (1) treatment with a solvent, such
as benzine; (2) steaming, for the purpose
of vaporizing and expelling from the
cotton waste the solvent still remaining
in it after as much as possible of this has
been recovered by draining; (3) treatment
with a mineral acid; (4) boiling with an
alkali lye; (5) washing with water.
COTTONSEED HULLS AS STOCK
FOOD.
Cottonseed hulls or other material
containing fiber difficult of digestion are
thoroughly mixed with about 5 per cent
of their weight of hydrochloric acid (spe-
cific gravity, 1.16), and heated in a
closed vessel, provided with a stirrer, to
a temperature of 212° to 300° F. The
amount of acid to be added depends on
the material employed and on the dura-
tion of the heating. By heating for 30
minutes the above percentage of acid is
required, but the quantity may be re-
duced if the heating is prolonged. After
heating, the substance is ground and at
the same time mixed with some basic
substances such as sodium carbonate,
chalk, cottonseed kernel meal, etc., to
neutralize the acid. During the heating,
the acid vapors coming from the mixture
may be led into a second quantity of
material contained in a separate vessel,
air being drawn through both vessels to
facilitate the removal of the acid vapors.
COTTONSEED OIL:
See Oil.
COTTONSEED OIL IN FOOD, TESTS
FOR:
See Foods.
COTTONSEED OIL IN LARD, DETEC-
TION OF:
See Foods and Lard.
COUGH CANDY:
See Confectionery.
COUGH MIXTURES FOR CATTLE:
See Veterinary Formulas.
COURT PLASTERS— CREAM
247
COUGH MIXTURES AND REMEDIES:
See Cold and Cough Mixtures.
Court Plasters
(See also Plasters.)
Liquid Court Plaster. — I. — If soluble
guncotton is dissolved in acetone in the
proportion of about 1 part, by weight, of
the former to 35 or 40 parts, by volume,
of the latter, and half a part each of
castor oil and glycerine be added, a
colorless, elastic, and flexible film will
form on the skin wherever it is applied.
Unlike ordinary collodion it will not be
likely to dry and peel off. If tinted very
slightly with alkanet and saffron it can
be made to assume the color of the skin
so that when applied it is scarcely ob-
servable. A mixture of warm solution
of sodium silicate and casein, about 9
parts of the former to 1 part of the latter,
gelatinizes and forms a sort of liquid
court plaster.
II. — In order to make liquid court plaster
flexible, collodion, U. S. P., is the best
liquid that can possibly be recommended.
It may be made by weighing successively
into a tarred bottle:
Collodion 4 av. ounces
Canada turpentine. . 95 grains
Castor oil 57 grains
Before applying, the skin should be
perfectly dry; each application or layer
should be permitted to harden. Three
or four coats are usually sufficient.
III.— Procure an ounce bottle and fill
it three-fourths full of flexible collodion,
and fill up with ether. Apply to cuts,
bruises, etc., and it protects them and will
not wash off. If the ether evaporates,
leaving it too thick for use, have more
ether put in to liquefy it. It is a good
thing to have in the house and in the tool
chest.
COW DISEASES AND THEIR REM-
EDIES:
See Veterinary Formulas.
CRAYONS:
See Pencils.
CRAYONS FOR GRAINING AND MAR-
BLING.
Heat 4 parts of water and 1 part of
white wax over a fire until the wax has
completely dissolved. Stir in 1 part of
purified potash. When an intimate
combination has taken place, allow to
cool and add a proportionate quantity
of gum arabic. With this mixture the
desired colors are ground thick enough
so that they can be conveniently rolled
into a pencil with chalk. The desired
shades must be composed on the grind-
ing slab as they are wanted, and must
not be simply left in their natural tone.
Use, for instance, umber, Vandyke
brown, and white lead for oak; umber
alone would be too dark for walnut use.
All the earth colors can be conveniently
worked up. It is best to prepare 2 or 3
crayons of each set, mixing the first a
little lighter by the addition of white lead
and leaving the others a little darker.
The pencils should be kept in a dry place
and are more suitable for graining and
marbling than brushes, since they can be
used with either oil or water.
CRAYONS FOR WRITING ON GLASS:
See Etching, and Glass.
Cream
(See also Milk.)
Whipped Cream. — There are many
ways to whip cream. The following is
very highly indorsed: Keep the cream
on ice until ready to whip. Take 2
earthen vessels about 6 inches in diam-
eter. Into 1 bowl put 1 pint of rich
sweet cream, 2 teaspoonfuls powdered
sugar, and 5 drops of best vanilla ex-
tract. Add the white of 1 egg and beat
with large egg beater or use whipping
apparatus until 2 inches of froth has
formed; skim off the froth into the other
vessel and so proceed whipping and
skimming until all the cream in the
first vessel has been exhausted. The
whipped cream will stand up all day and
should be let stand in the vessel on ice.
Special machines have been constructed
for whipping cream, but most dispensers
prepare it with an ordinary egg beater.
Genuine whipped cream is nothing other
than pure cream into which air has been
forced by the action of the different ap-
paratus manufactured for the purpose;
care must, however, be exercised in
order that butter is not produced in-
stead of whipped cream. To avoid this
the temperature of the cream must be
kept at a low degree and the whipping
must not be too violent or prolonged;
hence the following rules must be ob-
served in order to produce the desired
result:
248
CREAM— CRYSTAL CEMENTS
1. Secure pure cream and as fresh as
possible.
2. Surround the bowl in which the
cream is being whipped with cracked
ice, and perform the operation in a cool
place.
3. As rapidly as the whipped cream
arises, skim it off and place it in another
bowl, likewise surrounded with ice.
4. Do not whip the cream too long or
too violently.
5. The downward motion of the beater
should be more forcible than the upward,
as the first has a tendency to force the air
into the cream, while the second, on the
contrary, tends to expel it.
6. A little powdered sugar should be
added to the cream after it is whipped,
in order to sweeten it.
7. Make whipped cream in small
quantities and keep it on ice.
I. — Cummins's Whipped Cream. —
Place 12 ounces of rich cream on the ice
for about 1 hour; then with a whipper
beat to a consistency that will withstand
its own weight.
II.— Eberle's Whipped Cream.— Take
a pint of fresh, sweet cream, which has
been chilled by being placed on the ice,
add to it a heaping tablespoonful of pow-
dered sugar and 2 ounces of a solution
of gelatin (a spoonful dissolved in 2
ounces of water), whip slowly for a
minute or two until a heavy froth gathers
on top. Skim off the dense froth, and
put in container for counter use; con-
tinue this until you have frothed all that
is possible.
III.— Foy's Whipped Cream.— Use
only pure cream; have it ice cold, and in
a convenient dish for whipping with a
wire whipper. A clear, easy, quick, and
convenient way is to use a beater. Fill
about one-half full of cream, and beat
vigorously for 2 or 3 minutes; a little pow-
dered sugar may be added before beat-
ing. The cream may be left in the
beater, and placed on ice.
IV. — American Soda Fountain Com-
pany's Whipped Cream. — Take 2 earthen
bowls and 2 tin pans, each 6 or 8 inches
greater in diameter than the bowls; place
a bowl in each pan, surround it with
broken ice, put the cream to be whipped
in 1 bowl, and whip it with a whipped
cream churn. The cream should be
pure and rich, and neither sugar nor
gelatin should be added to it. As the
whipped cream rises and fills the bowl,
remove the churn, and skim off the
whipped cream into the other bowl.
The philosophy of the process is that
the churn drives air into the cream, and
blows an infinity of tiny bubbles, which
forms the whipped cream; therefore, in
churning, raise the dasher gently and
slowly, and bring it down quickly and
forcibly. When the second bowl is full
of whipped cream, pour off the liquid
cream, which has settled to the bottom,
into the first bowl, and whip it again.
Keep the whipped cream on ice.
The addition of an even teaspoonful
of salt to 1 quart of sweet cream, before
whipping, will make it whip up very
readily and stiff, and stand up much
longer and better.
CRESOL EMULSION.
One of the best starting points for the
preparation is the "creosote" obtained
from blast furnaces, which is rich in
cresols and contains comparatively little
phenols. The proportions used are:
Creosote, 30 parts; soft soap, 10 parts;
and solution of soda (10 per cent), 30
parts. Boil the ingredients together for
an hour, then place aside to settle. The
dark fluid is afterwards drained from any
oily portion floating upon the top.
CREAM, COLD:
See Cosmetics.
CREAMS FOR THE FACE AND SKIN :
See Cosmetics.
CREOSOTE SOAP:
See Soap.
CROCKERY:
See Ceramics.
CROCKERY CEMENTS:
See Adhesives.
CROCUS.
The substance known as "crocus,"
which is so exceedingly useful as a pol-
ishing medium for steel, etc., may be
very generally obtained in the cinders
produced from coal containing iron. It
will be easily recognized by its rusty
color, and should be collected and re-
duced to a powder for future use. Steel
burnishers may be brought to a high
state of polish with this substance by
rubbing them upon a buff made of sol-
diers' belt or hard wood. After this
operation, the burnisher should be
rubbed on a second buff charged with
jewelers' rouge.
CRYSTAL CEMENTS FOR REUNIT-
ING BROKEN PIECES:
See Adhesives, under Cements.
CRYSTALLIZATION— DAMASKEENING
CRYSTALLIZATION, ORNAMENTAL:
See Gardens, Chemical.
CUCUMBER ESSENCE:
See Essences and Extracts.
CUCUMBER JELLY, JUICE, AND
MILK:
See Cosmetics.
CURAgOA CORDIAL:
See Wines and Liquors.
CURTAINS, COLORING OF:
See Laundry Preparations.
CURRY POWDER:
See Condiments.
CUSTARD POWDER:
Corn flour 7 pounds
Arrowroot 8 pounds
Oil of almond 20 drops
Oil of nutmegs 10 drops
Tincture of saffron to color.
Mix the tincture with a little of the
mixed flours; then add the essential oils
and make into a paste; dry this until it
can be reduced to a powder, and then
mix all the ingredients by sifting several
times through a fine hair sieve.
CUTLERY CEMENTS:
See Adhesives.
CYLINDER OIL:
See Lubricants.
CYMBAL METAL:
See Alloys.
Damaskeening
Damaskeening, practicea from most
ancient times, consists in ornamentally
inlaying one metal with another, fol-
lowed usually by polishing. Generally
gold or silver is employed for inlaying.
The article to be decorated by damas-
keening is usually of iron (steel) or
copper; in Oriental (especially Japan-
ese) work, also frequently of bronze,
which has been blackened, or, at least,
darkened, so that the damaskeening is
effectively set off from the ground. If
the design consists of lines, the grooves
are dug out with the graver in such a
manner that they are wider at the bot-
tom, so as to hold the metal forced in.
Next, the gold or silver pieces suitably
formed are laid on top and hammered in
so as to fill up the opening. Finally the
surface is gone over again, so that the
surface of the inlay is perfectly even with
the rest. If the inlays, however, are not
in the form of lines, but are composed of
larger pieces of certain outlines, they are
sometimes allowed to project beyond the
surface of the metal decorated. At times
there are inlays again in the raised por-
tions of another metal; thus, Japanese
bronze articles often contain figures of
raised gold inlaid with silver.
Owing to the high value which dam-
askeening imparts to articles artistic-
ally decorated, many attempts have
been made to obtain similar effects
in a cheaper manner. One is electro-
etching, described further on. Another
process for the wholesale manufacture
of objects closely resembling damask-
eened work is the following: By
means of a steel punch, on which the
decorations to be produced project in
relief, the designs are stamped by means
of a drop hammer or a stamping press
into gold plated or silver plated sheet
metal on the side which is to show the
damaskeening, finally grinding off the
surface, so that the sunken portions are
again level. Naturally, the stamped
portion, as long as the depth of the
stamping is at least equal to the thick-
ness of the precious metal on top, will
appear inlaid.
It is believed that much of the early
damaskeening was done by welding to-
gether iron and either a steel or an im-
pure or alloyed iron, and treating the
surface with a corroding acid that affect-
ed the steel or alloy without changing
the iron.
The variety or damaskeening known
as koftgari or kuft-work, practiced in
India, was produced by rough-etching a
metallic surface and laying on gold-leaf,
which was imbedded so that it adhered
only to the etched parts of the design.
Damaskeening by Electrolysis. — Dam-
askeening of metallic plates may be
done by electrolysis. A copper plate
is covered with an isolating layer of
feeble thickness, such as wax, and the
desired design is scratched in it by the
use of a pointed tool. The plate is sus-
pended in a bath of sulphate of copper,
connecting it with the positive pole of a
battery, while a second copper plate is
connected with the negative pole. The
current etches grooves wherever the wax
has been removed. When enough has
250 DAMASKEENING— DECALCOMANIA PROCESSES
beci eaten away, remove the plate from
the bath, cleanse it with a little hydro-
chloric acid to remove any traces of oxide
of copper which might appear on the
lines of the design; then wash it in plenty
of water and place it in a bath of silver
or nickel, connecting it now with the neg-
ative pole, the positive pole being repre-
sented by a leaf of platinum. After a
certain time the hollows are completely
filled with a deposit of silver or nickel,
and it only remains to polish the plate,
which has the appearance of a piece
damaskeened by hand.
Damaskeening on Enamel Dials. —
Dip the dial into molten yellow wax,
trace on the dial the designs desired,
penetrating down to the enamel. Dip
the dial in a fluorhydric acid a sufficient
length of time that it may eat to the
desired depth. Next, wash in several
waters, remove the wax bv means of
turpentine, i. e., leave the piece covered
with wax immersed in essence of turpen-
tine. By filling up the hollows thus ob-
tained with enamel very pretty effects
are produced.
DANDRUFF CURE:
See Hair Preparations.
DECALCOMANIA PROCESSES:
See also Chromos, Copying Processes,
and Transfer Processes.
The decalcomania process of trans-
ferring pictures requires that the print
(usually in colors)* be made on a spe-
cially prepared paper. Prints made on
decalcomania paper may be transferred
in the reverse to china ware, wood, cellu-
loid, metal, or any hard smooth surface,
and being varnished after transfer (or
burnt in, in the case of pottery) acquire
a fair degree of permanence. The origi-
nal print is destroyed by the transfer.
Applying Decalcomania Pictures on
Ceramic' Products under a Glaze. — A
biscuit-baked object is first coated with
a mixture of alcohol, shellac, varnish,
and liquid glue. Then the prepared
picture print is transferred on to this
adhesive layer in the customary manner.
The glaze, however, does not adhere to
this coating and would, therefore, not
cover the picture when fused on. To
attain this, the layer bearing the transfer
picture, as well as the latter, are simul-
taneously coated with a dextrin solution
of about 10 per cent. When this dex-
trin coating is dry, the picture is glazed.
The mixing proportions of the two so-
lutions employed, as well as of the ad-
hesive and the dextrin solutions, vary
somewhat according to the physical con-
ditions of the porcelain, its porosity, etc.
The following may serve for an example:
Dissolve 5 parts of shellac or equivalent
gum in 25 parts of spirit and emulsify
this liquid with 20 parts of varnish and
8 parts of liquid glue. After drying, the
glaze is put on and the ware thus pre-
pared is placed in the grate fire.
The process described is especially
adapted for film pictures, i. e., for such
as bear the picture on a cohering layer,
usually consisting of collodion. It can-
not be employed outright for gum pic-
tures, i. e., for such pictures as are
composed of different pressed surfaces,
consisting mainly of gum or similar ma-
terial. If this process is to be adapted
to these pictures as well, the ware, which
has been given the biscuit baking, is
first provided with a crude glaze coat-
ing, whereupon the details of the proc-
ess are carried out as described above
with the exception that there is another
glaze coating between the adhesive coat
and the biscuit-baked ware. In this case
the article is also immediately placed in
the grate fire. It is immaterial which
of the two kinds of metachromatypes
(transfer pictures) is used, in every case
the baking in the muffle, etc., is dropped.
The transfer pictures may also be pro-
duced in all colors for the grate fire.
Decalcomania Paper. — Smooth un-
sized paper, not too thick, is coated with
the following solutions:
I. — Gelatin, 10 parts, dissolved in
300 parts warm water. This solution is
applied with a sponge. The paper
should be dried flat.
II. — Starch, 50 parts; gum traga-
canth, dissolved in 600 parts of water.
(The gum tragacanth is soaked in 300
parts of water; in the other 300 parts the
starch is boiled to a paste; the two are
then poured together and boiled.) The
dried paper is brushed with this paste
uniformly, a fairly thick coat being ap-
plied. The paper is then allowed to dry
again.
III. — One part blood albumen is
soaked in 3 parts water for 24 hours. A
small quantity of sal ammoniac is added.
The paper, after having been coated
with these three solutions and dried, is
run through the printing press, the pic-
tures, however, being printed reversed
so that it may appear in its true position
when transferred. Any colored inks may
be used.
DECALCOMANIA PROCESSES— DENTIFRICES 251
IV. — A transfer paper, known as "de-
calque rapide," invented by J. B. Dur-
amy, consists of a paper of the kind
generally used for making pottery trans-
fers, but coated with a mixture of gum
and arrowroot solutions in the propor-
tion of 2 J parts of the latter to 100 of the
former. The coating is applied in the
ordinary manner, but the paper is only
semi-glazed. Furthermore, to decorate
pottery ware by means of this new trans-
fer paper, there is no need to immerse
the ware in a bath in order to get the
paper to draw off, as it will come away
when moistened with a damp sponge,
after having been in position for less than
5 minutes, whereas the ordinary papers
require a much longer time.
Picture Transferrer. — A very weak
solution of soft soap and pearlashes is
used to transfer recent prints, such as
illustrations from papers, magazines,
etc., to unglazed paper, on the decalco-
mania principle. Such a solution is:
I. — Soft soap £ ounce
Pearlash 2 drachms
Distilled water. ... 16 fluidounces
The print is laid upon a flat surface,
such as a drawing board, and moistened
with the liquid. The paper on which
the reproduction is required is laid over
this, and then a sheet of thicker paper
placed on the top, and the whole rubbed
evenly and hard with a blunt instrument,
such as the bowl of a spoon, until the
desired depth of color in the transferrer
is obtained. Another and more artistic
process is to cover the print with a trans-
parent sheet of material coated with
wax, to trace out the pictures wij;h a point
and to take rubbings of the same after
powdering with plumbago.
II. — Hard soap 1 drachm
Glycerine 30 grains
Alcohol 4 nuidrachms
Water » . . . . 1 fluidounce
Dampen the printed matter with the
solution by sponging, and proceed as
with I.
DEHORNERS:
See Horn.
DELTA METAL:
See Alloys.
DEMON BOWLS OF FIRE:
See Pyrotechnics.
DENTAL CEMENTS:
See Cements,
Dentifrices
TOOTH POWDERS:
A perfect tooth powder that will clean
the teeth and mouth with thoroughness
need contain but few ingredients and is
easily made. For the base there is noth-
ing better than precipitated chalk; it
possesses all the detergent and polishing
properties necessary for the thorough
cleansing of the teeth, and it is too
soft to do any injury to soft or to de-
fective or thinly enameled teeth. This
cannot be said of pumice, cuttlebone,
charcoal, kieselguhr, and similar abra-
dants that are used in tooth powders.
Their use is reprehensible in a tooth
powder. The use of pumice or other
active abradant is well enough occasion-
ally, by persons afflicted with a growth
of tartar on the teeth, but even then it is
best applied by a competent dentist.
Abrading powders have much to answer
for in hastening the day of the toothless
race.
Next in value comes soap. Powdered
white castilesoap is usually an ingredient
of tooth powders. There is nothing so
effective for removing sordes or thick-
ened mucus from the gums or mouth.
But used alone or in too large propor-
tions, the taste is unpleasant. Orris
possesses no cleansing properties, but is
used for its flavor and because it is most
effective for masking the taste of the
soap. Sugar or saccharine may be used
for sweetening, and for flavoring almost
anything can be used. Flavors should,
in the main, be used singly, though mixed
flavors lack the clean taste of simple
flavors.
The most popular tooth powder sold is the
white, saponaceous, wintergreen-flavored
powder, and here is a formula for this
type:
I. — Precipitated chalk. .. 1 pound
White castile soap ... 1 ounce
Florentine orris 2 ounces
Sugar (or saccharine,
2 grains) ~ 1 ounce
Oil of wintergreen ... £ ounce
The first four ingredients should be in
the finest possible powder and well dried.
Triturate the oil of wintergreen with part
of the chalk, and mix this with the bal-
ance of the chalk. Sift each ingredient
separately through a sieve (No. 80 or
finer), and mix well together, afterwards
sifting the mixture 5 or 6 times. The
finer the sieve and the more the mixture
is sifted, the finer and lighter the powder
will be,
DENTIFRICES
This powder will cost about 15 cents a
pound.
Pink, rose-flavored powder of the Caswell
and Hazard, Hudnut. or McMahan type,
once so popular in New York. It was
made in two styles, with and without
soap.
II. — Precipitated chalk. .. 1 pound
Florentine orris 2 ounces
Sugar 1 J ounces
White castile soap. .. 1 ounce
No. 40 carmine 15 grains
Oil of rose 12 drops
Oil of cloves 4 drops
Dissolve the carmine in an ounce of
water of ammonia and triturate this with
part of the chalk until the chalk is uni-
formly dyed. Then spread it in a thin
layer on a sheet of paper and allow the
ammonia to evaporate. When there is
no ammoniacal odor left, mix this dyed
chalk with the rest of the chalk and
sift the whole several times until thor-
oughly mixed. Then proceed to make
up the powder as in the previous formula,
first sifting each ingredient separately
and then together, being careful thor-
oughly to triturate the oils of rose and
cloves with the orris after it is sifted and
before it is added to the other powders.
The oil of cloves is used to back up the
oil of rose. It strengthens and accen-
tuates the rose odor. Be careful not to
get a drop too much, or it will predomi-
nate over the rose.
Violet Tooth Powder.—
Precipitated chalk. ... 1 pound
Florentine orris 4 ounces
Castile soap 1 ounce
Sugar H ounces
Extract of violet f ounce
Evergreen coloring, R. & F., quan-
tity sufficient.
Proceed as in the second formula, dye-
ing the chalk with the evergreen coloring
to the desired shade before mixing.
III. — Precipitated chalk. 16 pounds
Powdered orris. ... 4 pounds
Powdered cuttlefish
bone 2 pounds
Ultramarine 9£ ounces
Geranium lake. ... 340 grains
Jasmine 110 minims
Oil of neroli 110 minims
Oil of bitter al-
monds 35 minims
Vanillin 50 grains
Artificial musk
* (Lautier's) 60 grains
Saccharine 140 grains
Rub up the perfumes with 2 ounces of
alcohol, dissolve the saccharine in warm
water, add all to the orris, and set aside
to dry. Rub the colors up with water
and some chalk, and when dry pass all
through a mixer and sifter twice to bring
out the color.
Camphorated and Carbolated Powders.
— A camphorated tooth powder may be
made by leaving out the oil of winter-
green in the first formula and adding 1£
ounces of powdered camphor.
Carbolated tooth powder may like-
wise be made with the first formula by
substituting 2 drachms of liquefied car-
bolic acid for the oil of wintergreen.
But the tooth powder gradually loses the
odor and taste of the acid. It is not of
much utility anyway, as the castile soap
In the powder is of far greater antiseptic
power than the small amount of carbolic
acid that can safely be combined in a
tooth powder. Soap is one of the best
antiseptics.
Alkaline salts, borax, sodium bicar-
bonate, etc., are superfluous in a powder
already containing soap. The only use-
ful purpose they might serve is to correct
acidity of the mouth, and that end can be
reached much better by rinsing the
mouth with a solution of sodium bicar-
bonate. Acids have no place in tooth
powders, the French Codex to the con-
trary notwithstanding.
Peppermint as. a Flavor. — In France
and all over Europe peppermint is the
popular flavor, as wintergreen is in this
country.
English apothecaries use sugar of milk
and heavy calcined magnesia in many of
their tooth powders. Neither has any
particular virtue as a tooth cleanser, but
both are harmless. Cane sugar is pref-
erable to milk sugar as a sweetener, and
saccharine is more efficient, though ob-
jected to by some; it should be used
in the proportion of 2 to 5 grains to
the pound of powder, and great care
taken to have it thoroughly distributed
throughout.
An antiseptic tooth powder, containing
the antiseptic ingredients of listerine, is
popular in some localities.
IV. — Precipitated chalk .. 1 pound
Castile soap 5 drachms
Borax 3 drachms
Thymol 20 grains
Menthol 20 grains
Eucalyptol 20 grains
Oil of wintergreen . . 20 grains
Alcohol £ ounce
Dissolve the thymol and oils in the
alcohol, and triturate with the chalk, and
proceed as in the first formula.
DENTIFRICES
One fault with this powder is the dis-
agreeable taste of the thymol. This
may be omitted and the oil of winter-
green increased to the improvement of
the taste, but with some loss of antisep-
tic power.
Antiseptic Powder. —
V» — Boric acid 50 parts
Salicylic acid 50 parts
Dragon's blood. . . 20 parts
Calcium carbon-
ate. . . . 1,000 parts
Essence spearmint. 12 parts
Reduce the dragon's blood and cal-
cium carbonate to the finest powder,
and mix the ingredients thoroughly.
The powder should be used twice a day,
or even oftener, in bad cases. It is es-
pecially recommended in cases where
tne enamel has become eroded from the
effects of iron.
Menthol Tooth Powder. — Menthol
leaves a cool and pleasant sensation in
the mouth, and is excellent for fetid
breath. It may be added to most for-
mulas by taking an equal quantity of oil
of wintergreen and dissolving in alcohol.
Menthol 1 part
Salol 8 parts
Soap, grated fine.. . . 20 parts
Calcium carbonate.. 20 parts
Magnesia carbonate 60 parts
Essential oil of mint. 2 parts
Powder finely and mix. If there is
much tartar on the teeth it will be well
to add to this formula from 10 to 20
parts of pumice, powdered very finely.
Tooth Powders and Pastes. — Although
the direct object of these is to keep the
teeth clean and white, they also prevent
decay, if it is only by force of mere clean-
liness, and in this way (and also by re-
moving decomposing particles of food)
tend to keep the breath sweet and whole-
some. The necessary properties of a
tooth powder are cleansing power un-
accompanied by any abrading or chemi-
cal action on thle teeth themselves, a cer-
tain amount of antiseptic power to enable
it to deal with particles of stale food, and
a complete absence of any disagreeable
taste or smell. These conditions are
easy to realize in practice, and there is a
very large number of efficient and good
powders, as well as not a few which are
apt to injure the teeth if care is not taken
to rinse out the mouth very thoroughly
after using. These powders include some
of the best cleansers, and have hence
been admitted in the following recipes,
mostly taken from English collections.
I. — Charcoal and sugar, equal weights.
Mix and flavor with clove oil.
II. — Charcoal 156 parts
Red kino 156 parts
Sugar 6 parts
Flavor with peppermint oil.
III. — Charcoal 270 parts
Sulphate of
quinine.. . . 1 part
Magnesia 1 part
Scent to liking.
IV.— Charcoal SO parts
Cream of tar-
tar 8 parts
Yellow c i n-
chona bark 4 parts
Sugar 15 parts
Scent with oil of cloves.
V.— Sugar 120 parts
Alum 10 parts
Cream of tar-
tar. 20 parts
Cochineal. ... 3 parts
VI. — Cream of tar-
tar 1,000 parts
Alum 190 parts
Carbonate of
magnesia . . 375 parts
Sugar 375 parts
Cochineal 75 parts
Essence Cey-
lon cinna-
mon 90 parts
Essence
cloves 75 parts
Essence Eng-
lish p e p-
permint. . . 45 parts
VII.— Sugar 200 parts
Cream of tar-
tar... 400 parts
Magnesia. . . . 400 parts
Starch 400 parts
Cinnamon. . . 32 parts
Mace 11 parts
Sulphate of
quinine.. . . 16 parts
Carmine 17 parts
Scent with oil of peppermint and oil of
rose.
VIII. — Bleaching pow-
der 11 parts
Red coral. ... 12 parts
IX. — Red cinchona
bark. 12 parts
Magnesia. ... 50 parts
Cochineal.. . . 9 parts
Alum 6 parts
Cream of tar-
tar 100 parts
254
DENTIFRICES
English pep-
permint oil. 4 parts
Cinnamon oil 2 parts
Grind the first five ingredients sepa-
rately, then mix the alum with the cochi-
neal, and then add to it the cream of tar-
tar and the bark. In the meantime the
magnesia is mixed with the essential oils,
and finally the whole mass is mixed
through a very fine silk sieve.
X.— Whitewood
charcoal . . . 250 parts
Cinchona
bark 125 parts
Sugar 250 parts
Peppermint
oil 12 parts
Cinnamon oil 8 parts
XI. — Precipitated
chalk
Cream of tar-
tar
Florence or-
ris root ....
Sal ammoniac
Ambergris . . .
Cinnamon. . .
Coriander
Cloves
Rosewood . . .
750 parts
250 parts
250 parts
60 parts
4 parts
4 parts
4 parts
4 parts
4 parts
XII.— D r a g o n ' s
blood 250 parts
Cream of tar-
tar 30 parts
Florence or-
ris root. ... 30 parts
Cinnamon. . . 16 parts
Cloves 8 parts
XIII.— Precipitated
chalk 500 parts
Dragon's
blood 250 parts
Red sandal-
wood 125 parts
Alum 125 parts
Orris root. . . . 250 parts
Cloves 15 parts
Cinnamon. . . 15 parts
Vanilla 8 parts
Rosewood. . . 15 parts
Carmine lake 250 parts
Carmine 8 parts
XIV.— Cream of tar-
tar 150 parts
Alum 25 parts
Cochineal 12 parts
Cloves 25 parts
Cinnamon. . . 25 parts
Rosewood ... 6 parts
Scent with essence of rose.
XV.— Coral
Sugar
Wood char-
coal
Essence of ver-
vain,
XVI.— Precipitated
chalk
Orris root. . . .
Carmine
Sugar
Essence of
rose
Essence of ne-
roli
XVII.— Cinchona
bark
Chalk
Myrrh
Orris root.. . .
Cinnamon. . .
Carbonate of
ammonia. .
Oil of cloves .
20 parts
20 parts
6 parts
1 part
500 parts
500 parts
1 part
1 part
4 parts
4 parts
50 parts
100 parts
50 parts
100 parts
50 parts
100 parts
2 parts
XVIII.— Gum arabic. . 30 parts
Cutch . .. 80 parts
Licorice juice. 550 parts
Cascarilla. ... 20 parts
Mastic 20 parts
Orris root... 20 parts
Oil of cloves. . 5 parts
Oil of pepper-
mint 15 parts
Extract of
amber 5 parts
Extract of
musk 5 parts
XIX.— Chalk 200 parts
Cuttlebone... 100 parts
Orris root.. . . 100 parts
Bergamot oil. . 2 parts
Lemon oil.. . . 4 parts
Neroli oil .... 1 part
Portugal oil . . 2 parts
XX.— Borax 50 parts
Chalk 100 parts
Myrrh 25 parts
Orris root. ... 22 parts
Cinnamon. . . 25 parts
XXL— Wood char-
coal 30 parts
White honey. 30 parts
Vanilla sugar 30 parts
Cinchona
bark 16 parts
Flavor with oil of peppermint.
XXII.— Syrupof 33°B. 38 parts
Cuttlebone. . . 200 parts
Carmine lake 30 parts
English oil of
peppermint 5 parts
DENTIFRICES
255
XXIII.— Red coral 50 parts
Cinnamon. . . 12 parts
Cochineal.... 6 parts
Alum 2J parts
Honey 125 parts
Water 6 parts
Triturate the cochineal and the alum
with the water. Then, after allowing
them to stand for 24 hours, put in the
honey, the coral, and the cinnamon.
When the effervescence has ceased,
which happens in about 48 hours, flavor
with essential oils to taste.
XXIV.— Well-skimmed
honey 50 parts
Syrup of pep-
permint. . . 50 parts
Orris root. ... 12 parts
Sal ammoniac 12 parts
Cream of tar-
tar 12 parts
Tine t u r e of
cinnamon.. 3 parts
Tincture of
cloves 3 parts
Tincture of
vanilla .... 3 parts
Oil of cloves. 1 part
XXV.— Cream of tar-
tar 120 parts
Pumice 120 parts
Alum 30 parts
Cochineal.. . . 30 parts
Bergamotoil. 3 p/arts
Clove 3 parts
Make to a thick paste with honey or
sugar.
XXVI.— Honey 250 parts
Precipit a t e d
chalk 250 parts
Orris root. . . . 250 parts
Tine t u r e of
opium 7 parts
Tine t u r e of
myrrh 7 parts
Oil of rose ... 2 parts
Oil of cloves.. 2 parts
Oil of nutmeg 2 parts
XXVII.— Florentine or-
ris 6 parts
Magn esi u m
carbonate. . 2 parts
Almond soap 12 parts
Calcium car-
bonate .... 60 parts
Thymol 1 part
Alcohol, quantity sufficient.
Powder the solids and mix. Dissolve
the thymol in as little alcohol as possible,
and add perfume in a mixture in equal
parts of oil of peppermint, oil of clove,
oil of lemon, and oil of eucalyptus.
About 1 minim of each to every ounce of
powder will be sufficient.
XXVIII.— Myrrh, 10 parts; sodium
chloride, 10 parts; soot, 5 parts; soap,
5 parts; lime carbonate, 500 parts.
XXIX. — Camphor, 5 parts; soap, 10
parts; saccharine, 0.25 parts; thymol,
0.5 parts; lime carbonate, 500 parts.
Scent, as desired, with rose oil, sassafras
oil, wintergreen oil, or peppermint oil.
XXX. — Powdered camphor, 6 parts;
myrrh, 15 parts; powdered Peruvian
bark, 6 parts; distilled water, 12 parts;
alcohol of 80° F., 50 parts. Macerate
the powders in the alcohol for a week and
then filter.
XXXI. — Soap, 1; saccharine, 0.025;
thymol, 0.05; lime carbonate, 50; sassa-
fras essence, enough to perfume.
XXXII. — Camphor, 0.5; soap, 1; sac-
charine, 0.025; calcium carbonate, 50;
oil of sassafras, or cassia, or of gaul-
theria, enough to perfume.
XXXIII. — Myrrh, 1; sodium chloride,
1; soap, 50; lime carbonate, 50; rose oil
as required.
XXXIV. — Precipitated calcium car-
bonate, 60 parts; quinine sulphate, 2
parts; saponine, 0.1 part; saccharine,
0.1 part; carmine as required; oil of
peppermint, sufficient.
XXXV.— Boracic acid, 100 parts;
powdered starch, 50 parts; quinine hy-
drochlorate, 10 parts; saccharine, 1 part;
vanillin (dissolved in alcohol), 1.5 parts.
Neutral Tooth Powder. — Potassium
chlorate, 200 parts; starch, 200 parts;
carmine lake, 40 parts; saccharine (in
alcoholic solution), 1 part; vanillin (dis-
solved in alcohol), 1 part.
Tooth Powder for Children. —
Magnesia carbonate. . 10 parts
Medicinal soap 10 parts
Sepia powder 80 parts
Peppermint oil, quantity sufficient
to flavor.
Flavorings for Dentifrice. —
I. — Sassafras oil, true. ... 1 drachm
Pinus pumilio oil .... 20 minims
Bitter orange oil 20 minims
Wintergreen oil 2 minims
Anise oil 4 minims
Rose geranium oil ... 1 minim
Alcohol 1 ounce
Use according to taste.
II. — Oil of peppermint,
English 4 parts
Oil of aniseed 6 parts
256
DENTIFRICES
Oil of clove 1 part
Oil of cinnamon. ... 1 part
Saffron 1 part
Deodorized alcohol. 350 parts
Water 300 parts
Or, cassia, 4 parts, and vanilla, J part,
may be substituted for the saffron.
LIQUID DENTIFRICES AND TOOTH
WASHES:
A French Dentifrice. — I. — A prepara-
tion which has a reputation in France as
a liquid dentifrice is composed of alco-
hol, 96 per cent, 1,000 parts; Mitcham
peppermint oil, 30 parts; aniseed oil,
5 parts; oil of Acorus calamus, 0.5 parts.
Finely powdered cochineal and cream
of tartar, 5 parts each, are used to tint
the solution. The mixed ingredients
are set aside for 14 days before filtering.
Sozodont. —
II. — The liquid tooth preparation
"Sozodont" is said to contain: Soap
powder, 60 parts; glycerine, 60 parts;
alcohol, 360 parts; water. 220 parts; oils
of peppermint, of aniseed, of clover, and
of cinnamon, 1 part each; oil of winter-
green, 1-200 part.
III. — Thymol 2 grains
Benzoic acid 24 grains
Tincture eucalyptus 2 drachms
Alcohol quantity sufficient to
make 2 ounces.
Mix. Sig.: A teaspoonful diluted
with half a wineglassf ul of water.
IV. — Carbolic acid, pure 2 ounces
Glycerine, 1,260°.. 1 ounce
Oil wintergreen. . . 6 drachms
Oil cinnamon 3 drachms
Powdered cochi-
neal ^ drachm
S. V. R 40 ounces
Distilled water 40 ounces
Dissolve the acid in the glycerine with
the aid of a gentle heat and the essential
oils in the spirit; mix together, and add
the water and cochineal; then let the
preparation stand for a week and filter.
A mixture of caramel and cochineal
coloring, N. F., gives an agreeable red
color for saponaceous tooth washes. It
is not permanent, however.
Variations of this formula follow:
V. — White castile soap. 1 ounce
Tincture of asarum 2 drachms
Oil of peppermint. £ drachm
Oil of wintergreen. J drachm
Oil of cloves 5 drops
Oil of cassia 5 drops
Glycerine 4 ounces
Alcohol 14 ounces
Water 14 ounces
VI. — White castile soap. 1| ounces
Oil of orange 10 minims
Oil of cassia 5 minims
Oil of wintergreen. 15 minims
Glycerine 3 ounces
Alcohol 8 ounces
Water enough to make 1 quart.
VII. — White castile soap. 3 ounces
Glycerine 5 ounces
Water 20 ounces
Alcohol 30 ounces
Oil of peppermint . 1 drachm
Oil of wintergreen. 1 drachm
Oil of orange peel . 1 drachm
Oil of anise 1 drachm
Oil of cassia 1 drachm
Beat up the soap with the glycerine;
dissolve the oils in the alcohol and add to
the soap and glycerine. Stir well until
the soap is completely dissolved.
VIII. — White castile soap. 1 ounce
Orris root 4 ounces
Rose leaves 4 ounces
Oil of rose i drachm
Oil of neroli £ drachm
Cochineal. ........ \ ounce
Diluted alcohol. .. 2 quarts
If the wash is intended simply as an
elixir for sweetening the breath, the fol-
lowing preparation, resembling the cele-
brated eau de botot, will be found very
desirable:
IX. — Oil of peppermint. 30 minims
Oil of spearmint . . 15 minims
Oil of cloves 5 minims
Oil of red cedar
wood 60 minims
Tincture of myrrh. 1 ounce
Alcohol 1 pint
Care must be taken not to confound
the oil of cedar tops with the oil of cedar
wood. The former has an odor like tur-
pentine; the latter has the fragrance of
the red cedar wood.
For a cleansing wash, a solution of
soap is to be recommended. It may be
made after the following formula :
X. — White castile soap. 1 ounce
Alcohol 6 ounces
Glycerine 4 ounces
Hot water 6 ounces
Oil of peppermint. 15 minims
Oil of wintergreen 20 minims
Oil of cloves 5 minims
Extract of vanilla . A ounce
Dissolve the soap in the hot water and
add the glycerine and extract of vanilla.
Dissolve the oils in the alcohol, mix the
solutions, and after 24 hours filter
through paper.
DENTIFRICES
257
It is customary to color such prepara-
tions. An agreeable brown-yellow tint
may be given by the addition of a small
quantity of caramel. A red color may
be given by cochineal. The color will
fade, but will be found reasonably per-
manent when kept from strong light.
TOOTH SOAPS AND PASTES:
Tooth Soaps.—
I. — White castile soap . . 225 parts
Precipitated chalk . . 225 parts
Orris root. 225 parts
Oil of peppermint. . 7 parts
Oil of cloves 4 parts
Water, a sufficient quantity.
II. — Castile soap 100 drachms
Precipitated chalk. . 100 drachms
Powdered orris root. 100 drachms
White sugar 50 drachms
Rose water . 50 drachms
Oil of cloves 100 drops
Oil of peppermint. . . 3 drachms
Dissolve the soap in water, add the
rose water, then rub up with the sugar
with which the oils have been previously
triturated, the orris root and the pre-
cipitated chalk.
III. — Potassium chlorate, 20 drachms;
powdered white soap, 10 drachms; pre-
cipitated chalk, 20 drachms; peppermint
oil, 15 drops; clove oil, 5 drops; glycer-
ine, sufficient to mass. Use with a soft
brush.
Saponaceous Tooth Pastes.—
I. — Precipitated car-
bonate of lime . . 90 parts
Soap powder 30 parts
Ossa sepia, pow-
dered 15 parts
Tincture of cocaine 45 parts
Oil of peppermint. 6 parts
Oil of ylang-ylang. 0.3 parts
Glycerine 30 parts
Rose water to cause liquefac-
tion. Carmine solution to
color.
II. — Precipitated car-
bonate of lime . . 150 parts
Soap powder 45 parts
Arrowroot 45 parts
Oil of eucalyptus . 2 parts
Oil of peppermint. 1 part
Oil of geranium . . 1 part
Oil of cloves 0.25 parts
Oil of aniseed. . . . 0.25 parts
Glycerine 45 parts
Chloroform water to cause lique-
faction. Carmine solution to
color.
Cherry Tooth Paste.—
III. — Clarified honey . . 100 drachms
Precipitated chalk 100 drachms
Powdered orris
root 100 drachms
Powdered rose
leaves 60 drops
Oil of cloves 55 drops
Oil of mace 55 drops
Oil of geranium. . 55 drops
Chinese Tooth Paste.—
IV. — Powdered pumice 100 drachms
Starch 20 drachms
Oil of peppermint 40 drops
Carmine £ drachm
Eucalyptus Paste. —Forty drachms
precipitated chalk, 11 drachms soap
powder, 11 drachms wheaten starch,
| drachm carmine, 30 drops oil of pep-
permint, 30 drops oil of geranium, 60
drops eucalyptus oil, 2 drops oil of
cloves, 12 drops oil of anise mixed to-
gether and incorporated to a paste, with
a mixture of equal parts of glycerine and
spirit.
Myrrh Tooth Paste. —
Precipitated chalk 8 ounces
Orris 8 ounces
White castile soap. 2 ounces
Borax 2 ounces
Myrrh 1 ounce
Glycerine, quantity sufficient.
Color and perfume to suit.
A thousand grams of levigated pow-
dered oyster shells are rubbed up with
12 drachms of cochineal to a homogene-
ous powder. To this is added 1 drachm
of potassium permanganate and 1 drachm
boric acid and rubbed well up. Foam up
200 drachms castile soap and 5 drachms
chemically pure glycerine and mix it with
the foregoing mass, adding by teaspoon-
ful 150 grams of boiling strained honey.
The whole mass is again thoroughly
rubbed up, adding while doing so 200
drops honey. Finally the mass should
be put into a mortar and pounded for an
hour and then kneaded with the hands
for 2 hours.
Tooth Paste to be put in Collapsible
Tubes. -
Calcium carbonate,
levigated 100 parts
Cuttlefish bone, in fine
powder 25 parts
Castile soap, old white,
powdered 25 parts
Tincture of carmine,
ammoniated 4 parts
Simple syrup. 25 parts
258
DENTIFRICES
Menthol 2 parts
Alcohol 5 parts
Attar of rose or other perfume, quan-
tity sufficient.
Rose water sufficient to make a paste.
Beat the soap with a little rose water,
then warm until softened, add syrup
and tincture of carmine. Dissolve the
perfume and menthol in the alcohol and
add to soap mixture. Add the solids
and incorporate thoroughly. Finally,
work to a proper consistency for filling
into collapsible tubes, adding water, if
necessary.
MOUTH WASHES.
I.— Quillaia bark 125 parts
Glycerine 95 parts
Alcohol 155 parts
Macerate for 4 days and add:
Acid, carbol.
cryst 4 parts
Ol. geranii 0.6 parts
Ol. caryophyll . . 0.6 parts
Ol. rosse 0.6 parts
Ol. cinnam 0.6 parts
Tinct. ratanhse. . 45 parts
Aqua rosse 900 parts
Macerate again for 4 days and filter.
Thymol ........ 20 parts
Peppermint oil. . 10 parts
Clove oil 5 parts
Sage oil 5 parts
Marjoram oil. .. 3 parts
Sassafras oil 3 parts
Wintergreen oil. 0.5 parts
Coumarin 0.5 parts
Alcohol, dil 1,000 parts
A teaspoonful in a glass of water.
II. — Tincture orris (1
in 4) 1£ parts
Lavender water. . . \ part
Tinct. cinnamon
(1 in 8) 1 part
Tinct. yellow cinch
bark 1 part
Eau de cologne 2 parts
Orris and Rose. —
III. — Orris root 30 drachms
Rose leaves 8 drachms
Soap bark 8 drachms
Cocnineal 3J drachms
Dil uted alcohol. . 475 drachms
Oil rose 30 drops
Oil neroli 40 drops
Myrrh Astringent. —
IV. — Tincture myrrh. . 125 drachms
Tincture benzoin. 50 drachms
Tincture cinchona 8 drachms
Alcohol 225 drachms
Oil of rose 30 drops
Boro tonic. —
V. — Acid boric 20 parts
Oilwintergreen. 10 parts
Glycerine 110 parts
Alcohol 150 parts
Distilled water
enough to make 600 parts
Sweet Salicyl.—
VI. — Acid salicylic. .. 4 parts
Saccharine 1 part
Sodium bicar-
bonate 1 part
Alcohol 200 parts
Foaming Orange. —
VII.— Castile soap.. .. 29 drachms
Oil orange 10 drops
Oil cinnamon. . . 5 drops
Distilled water.. 30 drachms
Alcohol 90 drachms
Australian Mint. —
VIII.— Thymol 0.25 parts
Acid benzoic. . . 3 parts
Tincture eucalyp-
tus 15 parts
Alcohol 100 parts
Oil peppermint. 0.75 parts
Fragrant Dentine. —
IX. — Soap bark 125 parts
Glycerine 95 parts
Alcohol 155 parts
Rose water 450 parts
Macerate for 4 days and add:
Carbolic acid,
cryst 4 parts
Oil geranium. .. 0.6 parts
Oil cloves 0.6 parts
Oil rose 0.6 parts
Oil cinnamon.. . 0.6 parts
Tincture rhatany 45 parts
Rose water 450 parts
Allow to stand 4 days; then filter.
Aromantiseptic. —
X.— Thymol 20 parts
Oil peppermint. 10 parts
Oil cloves 5 parts
Oil sage 5 parts
Oil marjoram.. . 3 parts
Oil sassafras. ... 3 parts
Oil wintergreen. 0.5 parts
Coumarin 0.5 parts
Diluted alcohol. 1,000 parts
The products of the foregoing formulas
are used in the proportion of 1 teaspoon-
ful in a half glassful of water.
Foaming. —
XI. — Soap bark, powder 2 ounces
Cocnineal powder. 60 grains
Glycerine 3 ounces
DENTIFRICES— DEPILATORIES
259
Alcohol 10 ounces
Water sufficient
to make 32 ounces
Mix the soap, cochineal, glycerine,
alcohol, and water together; let macerate
for several days; filter and flavor; if
same produces turbidity, shake up the
mixture with magnesium carbonate, and
filter through paper.
Odonter. —
XII. — Soap bark, powder 2 ounces
Cudbear, powder. 4 drachms
Glycerine 4 ounces
Alcohol 14 ounces
Water sufficient
to make 32 ounces
Mix, and let macerate with frequent
agitation, for several days; filter; add
flavor; if necessary filter again through
magnesium carbonate or paper pulp.
Sweet Anise.—
XIII. — Soap bark 2 ounces
Aniseed 4 drachms
Cloves 4 drachms
Cinnamon 4 drachms
Cochineal 60 grains
Vanilla 60 grains
Oil of peppermint. 1 drachm
Alcohol 16 ounces
Water sufficient to
make 32 ounces
Reduce the drugs to coarse powder,
dissolve the oil of peppermint in the
alcohol, add equal parts of water, and
macerate therein the powders for 5 to 6
days, with frequent agitation; place in
percolator and percolate until 32 fluid-
ounces have been obtained. Let stand for
a week and filter through paper; if neces-
sary to make it perfectly bright and
clear, shake up with some magnesia,
and again filter.
Saponaceous. —
XIV. — White castile soap 2 ounces
Glycerine 2 ounces
Alcohol 8 ounces
Water 4 ounces
Oil peppermint. . . 20 drops
Oil wintergreen. . . 30 drops
Solution of carmine N. F. suffi-
cient to color.
Dissolve the soap in the alcohol and
water, add the other ingredients, and
filter.
XV. — Crystallized car-
bolic acid 4 parts
Eucalyptol 1 part
Salol 2 parts
Menthol 0.25 parts
Thymol 0.1 part
Alcohol 100 parts
Dye with cochineal (1£ per cent).
Jackson's Mouth Wash. — Fresh lemon
peel, 10 parts; fresh sweet orange peel,
10 parts; angelica root, 10 parts; guaia-
cum wood, 30 parts; balsam of Tolu, 12
parts; benzoin, 12 parts; Peruvian bal-
sam, 4 parts; myrrh, 3 parts; alcohol (90
per cent), 500 parts.
Tablets for Antiseptic Mouth Wash.—
Heliotropine, 0.01 part; saccharine,
0.01 part; salicylic acid, 0.01 part; men-
thol, 1 part; milk sugar, 5 parts. These
tablets may be dyed green, red, or blue,
with chlorophyll, cosine, and indigo car-
mine, respectively.
Depilatories
Depilatory Cream. — The depilatory
cream largely used in New York hospi-
tals for the removal of hair from the skin
previous to operations:
I. — Barium sulphide. ... 3 parts
Starch 1 part
Water, sufficient quantity.
The mixed powders are to be made
into a paste with water, and applied in a
moderately thick layer to the parts to be
denuded of hair, the excess of the latter
having been previously trimmed off with
a pair of scissors. From time to time a
small part of the surface should be ex-
amined, and when it is seen that the
hair can be removed, the mass should
be washed off. The barium sulphide
should be quite fresh. It can be pre-
pared by making barium sulphate and
its own weight of charcoal into a paste
with linseed oil, rolling the paste into the
shape of a sausage, and placing it upon a
bright fire to incinerate. When it has
ceased to burn, and is a white hot mass,
remove from the fire, cool, and powder.
The formula is given with some re-
serve, for preparations of this kind are
usually unsafe unless used with great
care. It should be removed promptly
when the skin begins to burn.
II. — Barium sulphide 25 parts
Soap 5 parts
Talc 35 parts
Starch 35 parts
Benzaldehyde s u f -
ficient to make.. . 120 parts
Powder the solids and mix. To use,
to a part of this mixture add 3 parts of
water, at the time of its application, and
with a camel's-hair pencil paint the mix-
ture evenly over the spot to be freed of
hair. Let remain in contact with the
£60
DEPILATORIES— DIAMOND TESTS
skin for 5 minutes, then wash off with a
sponge, and in the course of 5 minutes
longer the hair will come off on slight
friction with the sponge.
Strontium sulphide is an efficient de-
pilatory. A convenient form of applying
it is as follows:
III. — Strontium sulphide . 2 parts
Zinc oxide 3 parts
Powdered starch ... 3 parts
Mix well and keep in the dry state un-
til wanted for use, taking then a sufficient
quantity, forming into a paste with warm
water and applying to the surface to be
deprived of hair. Allow to remain from
1 to 5 minutes, according to the nature
of the hair and skin; it is not advisable
to continue the application longer than
the last named period. Remove in all
cases at once when any caustic action is
felt. After the removal of the paste,
scrape the skin gently but firmly with a
blunt-edged blade (a paper knife, for in-
stance) until the loosened hair is re-
moved. Then immediately wash the
denuded surface well with warm water,
and apply cold cream or some similar
emollient as a dressing.
By weight
IV.— Alcohol 12 parts
Collodion 35 parts
Iodine 0.75 parts
Essence of turpen-
tine 1.5 parts
Castor oil 2 parts
Apply with a brush on the affected
parts for 3 or 4 days in thick coats.
When the collodion plaster thus formed
is pulled off, the hairs adhere to its inner
surface.
V. — Rosin sticks are intended for the
removal of hairs and are made from colo-
phony with an admixture of 10 per cent
of yellow wax. The sticks are heated
like a stick of sealing wax until soft or
semi-liquid (142° F.), and lightly applied
on the place from which the hair is to be
removed, and the mass is allowed to cool.
These rosin sticks are said to give good
satisfaction.
DEPTHINGS, VERIFICATION OF:
See Watchmakers' Formulas.
DESILVERING:
See Plating.
DETERGENTS:
See Cleaning Preparations and Meth-
ods.
DEVELOPERS FOR PHOTOGRAPHIC
PURPOSES :
See Photography.
DEXTRIN PASTES AND MUCI-
LAGES:
See Adhesives.
DIAL CEMENTS:
See Adhesives, under Jewelers' Ce-
ments.
DIAL CLEANERS:
See Cleaning Preparations and Meth-
ods.
DIAL REPAIRING:
See Watchmakers' Formulas.
DIAMALT:
See Milk.
DIAMOND TESTS:
See also Gems and Jewelers' For-
mulas.
To Distinguish Genuine Diamonds. —
If characters or marks of any kind are
drawn with an aluminum pencil on glass,
porcelain, or any substance containing
silex, the marks cannot be erased by
rubbing, however energetic the friction,
and even acids will not cause them to dis-
appear entirely, unless the surface is en-
tirely freed from greasy matter, which
can be accomplished by rubbing with
whiting and passing a moistened cloth
over the surface at the time of writing.
So, in order to distinguish the true dia-
mond from the false, it is necessary only
to wipe the stone carefully and trace a
line on it with an aluminum pencil, and
then rub it briskly with a moistened cloth.
If the line continues visible, the stone is
surely false. If, on the contrary, the stone
is a true diamond, the line will disappear
without leaving a trace, and without in-
jury to the stone.
The common test for recognizing the
diamond is the file, which does not cut it,
though it readily attacks imitations.
There are other stones not affected by
the file, but they have characteristics of
color and other effects by which they are
readily distinguished.
This test should be confirmed by
others. From the following the reader
can select the most convenient:
A piece of glass on which the edge of a
diamond is drawn, will be cut without
much pressure; a slight blow is suffi-
cient to separate the glass. An imita-
tion may scratch the glass, but this will
not be cut as with the diamond.
DIAMOND TESTS— DIGESTIVE POWDERS
261
If a small drop of water is placed upon
the face of a diamond and moved about
by means of the point of a pin, it will
preserve its globular form, provided the
stone is clean and dry. If the attempt is
made on glass, the drop will spread.
A diamond immersed in a glass of
water will be distinctly visible, and will
shine clearly through the liquid. The
imitation stone will be confounded with
the water and will be nearly invisible.
By looking through a diamond with a
glass at a black point on a sheet of white
paper, a single distinct point will be seen.
Several points, or a foggy point will ap-
pear if the stone is spurious.
Hydrofluoric acid dissolves all imita-
tions, but has no effect on true diamonds.
This acid is kept in gutta-percha bot-
tles.
For an eye practiced in comparisons
it is not difficult to discern that the facets
in the cut of a true diamond are not as
regular as are those of the imitation; for
in cutting and polishing the real stone an
effort is made to preserve the original as
much as possible, preferring some slight
irregularities in the planes and edges to
the loss in the weight, for we all know
that diamonds are sold by weight. In an
imitation, however, whether of paste or
another less valuable stone, there is al-
ways an abundance of cheap material
which may be cut away and thereby
form a perfect-appearing stone.
Take a piece of a fabric, striped red
and white, and draw the stone to be
tested over the colors. If it is an imi-
tation, the colors will be seen through it,
while a diamond will not allow them to
be seen.
A genuine diamond, rubbed on wood
or metal, after having been previously
exposed to the light of the electric arc,
becomes phosphorescent in darkness,
which does not occur with imitations.
Heat the stone to be tested, after giving
it a coating of borax, and let it fall into
cold water. A diamond will undergo
the test without the slightest damage;
the glass will be broken in pieces.
Finally, try with the fingers to crush
an imitation and a genuine diamond be-
tween two coins, and you will soon see
the difference.
DIAMOND CEMENT:
See Adhesives, under Jewelers' Ce-
ments.
DIARRHEA IN BIRDS:
See Veterinary Formulas.
DIARRHEA REMEDIES:
See Cholera Remedies.
Die Venting. — Many pressmen have
spent hours and days in the endeavor to
produce sharp and full impressions on
figured patterns. If all the deep recesses
in deep-figured dies are vented to allow
the air to escape when the blow is
struck, it will do much to obtain perfect
impressions, and requires only half the
force that is necessary in unvented dies.
This is not known in many shops and
consequently this little air costs much in
power and worry.
DIGESTIVE POWDERS AND TAB-
LETS.
I. — Sodium bicarbonate. 93 parts
Sodium chlorate. ... 4 parts
Calcium carbonate. . 3 parts
Pepsin 5 parts
Ammonium carbon-
ate 1 part
II. — Sodium bicarbonate. 120 parts
Sodium chlorate 5 parts
Sal physiologic (see
below) 4 parts
Magnesium carbon-
ate 10 parts
III. — Pepsin, saccharated
(U.S. P.) 10 drachms
Pancreatin 10 drachms
Diastase 50 drachms
Acid, lactic 40 drops
Sugar of milk 40 drachms
IV. — Pancreatin 3 parts
Sodium bicarbonate. 15 parts
Milk sugar 2 parts
Sal Physiologicum. — The formula for
this ingredient, the so-called nutritive
salt (Nahrsalz), is as follows:
Calcium phosphate. 40 parts
Potassium sulphate. 2 parts
Sodium phosphate. . 20 parts
Sulphuric, precipita-
ted 5 parts
Sodium chlorate 60 parts
Magnesium phos-
phate 5 parts
Carlsbad salts, arti-
ficial 60 parts
Silicic acid 10 parts
Calcium fluoride 2£ parts
Digestive Tablets.—
Powdered double re-
fined sugar 300 parts
Subnitrate bismuth 60 parts
Saccharated pepsin 45 parts
Pancreatin 45 parts
Mucilage 35 parts
Ginger 30 parts
Mix and divide into suitable sizes,
DIOGEN DEVELOPER— DISINFECTANTS
DIOGEN DEVELOPER:
See Photography.
DIP FOR BRASS:
See Plating and Brass.
DIPS:
See Metals.
DIPS FOR CATTLE:
See Disinfectants and Veterinary For-
mulas.
DISH WASHING:
See Household Formulas
Disinfectants
Disinfecting Fluids. —
I. — Creosote 40 gallons
Rosin, powdered. . . 56 pounds
Caustic soda lye,38°
Tw 9 gallons
Boiling water 12 gallons
Methylated spirit. . 1 gallon
Black treacle 14 pounds
Melt the rosin and add the creosote;
run in the lyes; then add the matter and
methylated spirit mixed together, and
add the treacle; boil all till dissolved and
mix well together.
II. — Hot water 120 pounds
Caustic soda lye, 38°
B 120 pounds
Rosin 300 pounds
Creosote 450 pounds
Boil together the water, lye, and rosin,
till dissolved; turn off steam and stir in
the creosote; keep on steam to nearly
boiling all the time, but so as not to boil
over, until thoroughly incorporated.
III. — Fresh - made soap
(hard yellow) .... 7 pounds
Gas tar. 21 pounds
Water, with 2 pounds
soda 21 pounds
Dissolve soap (cut in fine shavings)
in the gas tar; then add slowly the soda
and water which has been dissolved.
IV.— Rosin 1 cwt.
Caustic soda lye, 18°
B 16 gallons
Black tar oil i gallon
Nitro- naphthalene
dissolved in boil-
ing water (about
\ gallon) 2 pounds
Melt the rosin, add the caustic lye;
then stir in the tar oil and add the nitro-
naphthalene.
V. — Camphor 1 ounce
Carbolic acid (75
per cent) 12 ounces
Aqua ammonia 10 drachms
Soft salt water 8 drachms
To be diluted when required for use.
VI. — Heavy tar oil . 10 gallons
Caustic soda dis-
solved in 5 gallons
water 600° F 30 pounds
Mix the soda lyes with the oil, and heat
the mixture gently with constant stir-
ring; add, when just on the boil, 20
pounds of refuse fat or tallow and 20
pounds of soft soap; continue the heat
until thoroughly saponified, and add
water gradually to make up 40 gallons.
Let it settle; then decant the clear liquid.
Disinfecting Fluids or Weed-Killers.—
I. — Cold water, 20 gallons; powdered
rosin, 56 pounds; creosote oil, 40 gallons;
sulphuric acid, \ gallon; caustic soda lye,
30° B., 9 gallons.
Heat water and dissolve the rosin;
then add creosote and boil to a brown
mass and shut off steam; next run in
sulphuric acid and then the lyes.
II.— Water 40 gallons
Powdered black
rosin 56 pounds
Sulphuric acid 2£ gallons
Creosote 10 gallons
Melted pitch 24 pounds
Pearlash boiled in
10 gallons water. . 56 pounds
Boil water and dissolve rosin and acid;
then add creosote and boil well again;
add pitch and run in pearlash solution
(boiling); then shut off steam.
III. (White).— Water, 40 gallons;
turpentine, 2 gallons; ammonia, \ gal-
lon; carbolic crystals, 14 pounds; caustic
lyes, 2 gallons; white sugar, 60 pounds,
dissolved in 40 pounds water.
Heat water to boiling, and add first
turpentine, next ammonia, and then car-
bolic crystals. Stir well until thoroughly
dissolved, and add lyes and sugar solu-
tion.
DISINFECTING POWDERS.
I. — Sulphate of iron. . . 100 parts
Sulphate of zinc. . . 50 parts
Oak bark, powder. 40 parts
Tar 5 parts
Oil 5 parts
II. — Mix together chloride of lime and
burnt umber, add water, and set on plates.
DISINFECTANTS
Blue Sanitary Powder. —
Powdered alum 2 pounds
Oil of eucalyptus. .. 12 ounces
Rectified spirits of
tar 6 ounces
Rectified spirit of
turpentine 2 ounces
Ultramarine blue
(common) f ounces
Common salt 14 pounds
Mix alum with about 3 pounds of salt
in a large mortar, gradually add oil of
eucalyptus and spirits, then put in the
ultramarine blue, and lastly remaining
salt, mixing all well, and passing through
a sieve.
Carbolic Powder. (Strong). — Slaked
lime in fine powder, 1 cwt. ; carbolic acid,
75 per cent, 2 gallons.
Color with aniline dye and then pass
through a moderately fine sieve and put
into tins or casks and keep air-tight.
Pink Carbolized Sanitary Powder.—
Powdered alum 6 ounces
Powdered green cop-
peras 5 pounds
Powdered red lead. . 5 pounds
Calvert's No. 5 car-
bolic acid.. ...... 12£ pounds
Spirit of turpentine. 1? pounds
Calais sand 10 pounds
Slaked lime 60 pounds
Mix carbolic acid with turpentine and
sand, then add the other ingredients,
lastly the slaked lime and, after mixing,
pass through a sieve. It is advisable to
use lime that has been slaked some time.
Cuspidor Powder. — Peat rubble is
ground to a powder, and 100 parts put
into a mixing machine, which can be
hermetically sealed. Then 15 parts of
blue vitriol are added either very finely
pulverized or in a saturated aqueous so-
lution. Next are added 2 parts of forma-
lin, and lastly 1 part of ground cloves,
orange peel, or a sufficient quantity of
some volatile oil, to give the desired per-
fume. The mixing machine is then
closed, and kept at work until the con-
stituents are perfectly mixed; the powder
is then ready to be put up for the market.
Its purpose is to effect a rapid absorption
of the sputum, with simultaneous de-
struction of any microbes present, and to
prevent decomposition and consequent
unpleasant odors.
Deodorants for Water-Close ts.—
I. — Ferric chloride 4 parts
Zinc chloride 5 parts
Aluminum chloride. 5 parts
Calcium chloride. ... 4 parts
Magnesium chloride. 3 parts
Water sufficient to
make 90 parts
Dissolve, and add to each gallon 10
grains thymol and \ ounce oil of rose-
mary, previously dissolved in about 6
quarts of alcohol, and filter.
II. — Sulphuric acid,
fuming 90 parts
Potassium perman-
ganate 45 parts
Water 4,200 parts
Dissolve the permanganate in the
water, and add under the acid. This is
said to be a most powerful disinfectant,
deodorizer, and germicide. It should
not be used where there are metal trim-
mings.
Formaldehyde for Disinfecting Books,
Papers, etc. — The property of formal-
dehyde of penetrating all kinds of paper,
even when folded together in several
layers, may be utilized for a perfect dis-
infection of books and letters, especially
at a temperature of 86° to 122° F. in a
closed room. The degree of penetra-
tion as well as the disinfecting power of
the formaldehyde depend upon the
24 hours at a temperature of 122° F.
when 70 cubic centimeters of formo-
chloral — 17.5 g. of gas — per cubic meter
of space are used. Books must be stood
up in such a manner that the gas can
enter from the sides. Bacilli of typhoid
preserve their vitality longer upon un-
sized paper and on filtering paper than
on other varieties.
There is much difference of opinion
as to the disinfecting and deodorizing
Sower of formaldehyde when used to
isinfect wooden tierces. While some
have found it to answer well, others
have got variable results, or failed of
success. The explanation seems to be
that those who have obtained poor re-
sults have not allowed time for the dis-
infectant to penetrate the pores of the
wood, the method of application being
wrong. The solution is thrown into the
tierce, which is then steamed out at once,
whereby the aldehyde is volatilized be-
fore it has had time to do its work. If
the formal and the steam, instead of
being used in succession, were used to-
gether, the steam would carry the dis-
infectant into the pores of the wood.
But a still better plan is to give the alde-
hyde more time.
264
DISINFECTANTS
Another point to be remembered in all
cases of disinfection by formaldehyde is
that a mechanical cleansing must pre-
cede the action of the antiseptic. If
there are thick deposits of organic mat-
ter which can be easily dislodged with a
scrubbing brush, they can only be dis-
infected by the use of large quantities
of formaldehyde used during a long period
of time.
General Disinfectants. —
I. — Alum 10 ounces
Sodium carbonate . . 10 ounces
Ammonium chloride 2 ounces
Zinc chloride 1 ounce
Sodium chloride. ... 2 ounces
Hydrochloric acid, quantity suffi-
cient.
Water to make 1 gallon.
Dissolve the alum in one half gallon
of boiling water, and add the sodium
carbonate; then add hydrochloric acid
until the precipitate formed is dissolved.
Dissolve the other salt in water and add
to the previous solution. Finally add
enough water to make the whole measure
1 gallon, and filter.
In use, this is diluted with 7 parts of
water.
II. — For the Sick Room. — In using
this ventilate frequently: Guaiac, 10 parts;
eucalyptol, 8 parts; phenol, 6 parts; men-
thol, 4 parts; thymol, 2 parts; oil of
cloves, 1 part; alcohol of 90 per cent,
170 parts.
Atomizer Liquid for Sick Rooms. —
III. —Eucalyptol 10^
Thyme oil 5 parts
Lemon oil 5 J- by
La vender oil 5 weight.
Spirit, 90 per cent. . . 110J
To a pint of water a teaspoonful for
evaporation.
Non-Poisonous Sheep Dips. — Paste. —
I. — Creosote (containing
15 per cent to 20
per cent of car-
bolic acid) 2 parts
Stearine or Yorkshire
grease 1 part
Caustic soda lyes,
specific gravity,
1340 1 part
Black rosin, 5 per cent to 10 per
cent.
Melt the rosin and add grease and soda
lyes, and then add creosote cold.
II. — Creosote 1 part
Crude hard rosin oil 1 part
Put rosin oil in copper and heat to
about 220° F., and add as much caustic
soda powder, 98 per cent strength, as the
oil will take up. The quantity depends
upon the amount of acetic acid in the
oil. If too much soda is added it will
remain at the bottom. When the rosin
oil has taken up the soda add creosote,
and let it stand.
Odorless Disinfectants. —
I. — Ferric chloride 4 parts
Zinc chloride 5 parts
Aluminum chloride. 5 parts
Calcium chloride ... 4 parts
Manganese chloride 3 parts
Water 69 parts
If desired, 10 grains thymol and 2
fluidrachms oil of rosemary, previously
dissolved in about 12 fluidrachms of al-
cohol, may be added to each gallon.
II. — Alum 10 parts
Sodium carbonate . . 10 parts
Ammonium chloride 2 parts
Sodium chloride. ... 2 parts
Zinc chloride 1 part
Hydrochloric acid, sufficient.
Water 100 parts
Dissolve the alum in about 50 parts
boiling water and add the sodium car-
bonate. The resulting precipitate of
aluminum hydrate dissolve with the aid
of just sufficient hydrochloric acid, and
add the other ingredients previously dis-
solved in the remainder of the water.
III. — Mercuric chloride. .. 1 part
Cupric sulphate .... 10 parts
Zinc sulphate 50 parts
Sodium chloride. ... 65 parts
Water to make 1,000 parts.
Paris Salts. — The disinfectant known
by this name is a mixture made from the
following recipe:
Zinc sulphate 49 parts
Ammonia alum 49 parts
Potash permanga-
nate 1 part
Lime 1 part
The ingredients are fused together,
mixed with a little calcium chloride,
and perfumed with thymol.
Platt's Chlorides.—
I. — Aluminum sulphate. 6 ounces
Zinc chloride. 1£ ounces
Sodium chloride. ... 2 ounces
Calcium chloride. .. 3 ounces
Water enough to make 2 pints.
II. — A more elaborate formula for a
preparation said to resemble the proprie*
tary article is as follows:
DISINFECTANTS— DOSES
265
Zinc, in strips 4 ounces
Lead carbonate .... 2 ounces
Chlorinated lime ... 1 ounce
Magnesium carbon-
ate £ ounce
Aluminum hydrate. . 1£ ounces
Potassium hydrate. . Bounce
Hydrochloric acid . . 16 ounces
Water 16 ounces
Whiting, enough.
Dissolve the zinc in the acid; then add
the other salts singly in the order named,
letting each dissolve before the next is
added. When all are dissolved add the
water to the solution, and after a couple
of hours add a little whiting to neutralize
any excess of acid; then filter.
Zinc chloride ranks very low among
disinfectants, and the use of such solu-
tions as these, by giving a false sense of
security from disease germs, may be the
means of spreading rather than of check-
ing the spread of sickness.
Disinfecting Coating. — Carbolic acid,
2 parts; manganese, 3 parts; calcium
chloride, 2 parts; china clay, 10 parts;
infusorial earth, 4 parts ; dextrin, 2
parts; and water, 10 parts.
DISTEMPER IN CATTLE:
See Veterinary Formulas.
DIURETIC BALL:
See Veterinary Formulas.
DOG APPLICATIONS:
See Insecticides.
DOG BISCUIT.
The waste portions of meat and tallow,
including the skin and fiber, have for
years been imported from South Ameri-
can tallow factories in the form of blocks.
Most of the dog bread consists principally
of these remnants, chopped and mixed
with flour. They contain a good deal of
firm fibrous tissue, and a large percent-
age of fat, but are lacking in nutritive
salts, which must be added to make good
dog bread, just as in the case of the meat
flour made from the waste of meat ex-
tract factories. The flesh of dead ani-
mals is not used by any reputable manu-
facturers, for the reason that it gives a
dark color to the dough, has an unpleas-
ant odor, and if not properly sterilized
would be injurious to dogs as a steady
diet.
Wheat flour, containing as little bran
as possible, is generally used, oats, rye,
or Indian meal being only mixed in to
make special varieties, or, as in the case
of Indian meal, for cheapness. Rye
flour would give a good flavor, but it
dries slowly, and the biscuits would have
to go through a special process of drying
after baking, else they would mold and
spoil. Dog bread must be made from
good wheat flour, of a medium sort,
mixed with 15 or 16 per cent of sweet, dry
chopped meat, well baked and dried like
pilot bread or crackers. This is the rule
for all the standard dog bread on the
market. There are admixtures which
affect more or less its nutritive value,
such as salt, vegetables, chopped bones,
or bone meal, phosphate of lime, and
other nutritive salts. In preparing the
dough and in baking, care must be taken
to keep it light and porous.
DOG DISEASES AND THEIR REME-
DIES:
See Veterinary Formulas.
DOG SOAP:
See Soap.
DONARITE:
See Explosives.
DOORS, TO CLEAN:
See Cleaning Preparations and Meth-
ods.
DOSES FOR ADULTS AND CHILDREN.
The usual method pursued by medical
men in calculating the doses of medicine
for children is to average the dose in
proportion to their approximate weight
or to figure out a dose upon the assump-
tion that at 12 years of age half of an
adult dose will be about right. Calcu-
lated on this basis the doses for those
under 12 will be in direct proportion to
the age in years plus 12, divided into the
age. By this rule a child 1 year old
should get 1 plus 12, or 13, dividing 1,
or iV of an adult dose. If the child is
2 years old it should get 2 plus 12, or 14,
dividing 2, or | of an adult dose. A child
of 3 years should get 3 plus 12, or 15,
dividing 3, or -£• of an adult dose. A child
of 4 should get 4 plus 12, or 16, dividing
4, or \ of an adult dose.
As both children and adults vary
materially in size when of the same age
the calculation by approximate weights
is the more accurate way. Taking the
weight of the average adult as 150 pounds,
then a boy, man, or woman, whatever
the age, weighing only 75 pounds should
receive only one-half of an adult dose,
and a man of 300 pounds, provided his
weight is the result of a properly propor-
tioned body, and not due to mere adipose
266
DOSE TABLE— DYES
tissue, should be double that of the aver-
age adult. If the weight is due to mere
fat or to some diseased condition of the
body, such a calculation would be entire-
ly wrong. The object of the calculation
is to get as nearly as possible to the
amount of dilution the dose undergoes in
the blood or in the intestinal contents of
the patient. Each volume of blood should
receive exactly the same dose in order to
give the same results, other conditions
being equal.
DOSE TABLE FOR VETERINARY
PURPOSES:
See Veterinary Formulas.
DRAWINGS, PRESERVATION OF.
Working designs and sketches are eas-
ily soiled and rendered unsuitable for
further use. This can be easily avoided
by coating them with collodion, to which
24 per cent of stearine from a good stearine
candle has been added. Lay the drawing
on a glass plate or a board, and pour on
the collodion, as the photographer treats
his plates. After 10 or 20 minutes the
design will be dry and perfectly white,
possessing a dull luster, and being so well
protected that it may be washed off with
water without fear of spoiling it.
DRAWINGS, TO CLEAN:
See Cleaning Preparations and Meth-
ods.
DRIERS:
See Siccatives.
DRILLING, LUBRICANT FOR:
See Lubricants.
DRINKS FOR SUMMER AND WINTER :
See Beverages.
DROPS, TABLE OF:
See Tables.
DRYING OILS:
See Oil.
DRY ROT:
See Rot.
DUBBING FOR LEATHER:
See Lubricants.
DUST-LAYING:
See Oil.
DUST PREVENTERS AND
CLOTHS:
See Household Formulas.
DUST
Dyes
In accordance with the requirements
of dyers, many of the following recipes
describe dyes for large quantities of
goods, but to make them equally adapted
for the use of private families they are
usually given in even quantities, so that
it is an easy matter to ascertain the quan-
tity of materials required for dyeing, when
once the weight of the goods is known,
the quantity of materials used being re-
duced in proportion to the smaller quan-
tity of goods.
Employ soft water for all dyeing pur-
poses, if it can be procured, using 4 gal-
lons water to 1 pound of goods; for larger
quantities a little less water will do. Let
all the implements used in dyeing be kept
perfectly clean. Prepare the goods by
scouring well with soap and water, wash-
ing out the soap well, and dipping in warm
water, before immersion in the dye or
mordant. Goods should be well aired,
rinsed, and properly hung up after dye-
ing. Silks and fine goods should be ten-
derly handled, otherwise injury to the
fabric will result.
Aniline Black.— Water, 20 to 30 parts;
chlorate of potassa, 1 part; sal ammo-
niac, 1 part; chloride of copper, 1 part;
aniline and hydrochloric acid, each 1 part,
previously mixed together. It is essen-
tial that the preparation should be acid,
and the more acid it is the more rapid
will be the production of the blacks; ii'
too much so, it may injure the fabric.
The fabric or yarn is dried in ageing
rooms at a low temperature for 24 hours,
and washed afterwards.
Black on Cotton. — For 40 pounds
goods, use sumac, 30 pounds; boil f of an
hour; let the goods steep overnight, and
immerse them in limewater, 40 minutes,
remove, and allow them to drip f of an
hour; add copperas, 4 pounds, to the sumac
liquor, and dip 1 hour more; next work
them through limewater for 20 minutes;
then make a new dye of logwood, 20
pounds, boil 2£ hours, and enter the
goods 3 hours; then add bichromate of
potash, 1 pound, to the new dye, and dip
1 hour more. Work in clean cold water
and dry out of the sun.
Black Straw Hat Varnish.— Best al
cohol, 4 ounces; pulverized black seal-
ing wax, 1 ounce. Place in a phial, and
put the phial into a warm place, stirring
or shaking occasionally until the wax is
dissolved. Apply it when warm before
the fire or in the sun. This makes a.
beautiful gloss,
DYES
267
Chrome Black for Wool. — For 40
pounds of goods, use blue vitriol, 3
pounds; boil a short time, then dip the
wool or fabric f of an hour, airing fre-
quently. Take out the goods, and make
a dye with logwood, 24 pounds; boil £
hour, dip f of an hour, air the goods, and
dip | of an hour longer; then wash in
strong soapsuds. A good fast color.
Black Dye on Wool, for Mixtures.—
For 50 pounds of wool, take bichromate
of potash, 1 pound, 4 ounces; ground
argal, 15 ounces; boil together and put
in the fabric, stirring well, and let it re-
main in the dye 5 hours. Take it out,
rinse slightly in clean water, then make a
new dye, into which put logwood, 1|
pounds. Boil 1| hours, adding cham-
ber lye, 5 pints. Let the fabric remain
in all night, and wash out in clean water.
Bismarck Brown. — Mix together 1
pound Bismarck, 5 gallons water, and
f pound sulphuric acid. This paste
dissolves easily in hot water and may be
used directly for dyeing. A liquid dye
may be prepared by making the bulk of
the above mixture to 2 gallons with alco-
hol. To dye, sour with sulphuric acid;
add a quantity of sulphate of soda, im-
merse the wool, and add the color by
small portions, keeping the temperature
under 212° F. Very interesting shades
may be developed by combining the color
with indigo paste or picric acid.
Chestnut Brown for Straw Bonnets. —
For 25 hats, use ground sanders, 1|
pounds; ground curcuma, 2 pounds;
powdered gallnuts or sumac, f pound;
rasped logwood, -fH) pound. Boil to-
gether witn the hats in a large kettle (so
as not to crowd), for 2 hours, then with-
draw the hats, rinse, and let them re-
main overnight in a bath of nitrate of
4° Be., when they are washed. A darker
brown may be obtained by increasing the
quantity of sanders. To give the hats
the desired luster, they are brushed with
a brush of couchgrass, when dry.
Cinnamon or Brown for Cotton and
Silk. — Give the goods as much color,
from a solution of blue vitriol, 2 ounces,
to water, 1 gallon, as they will take up
in dipping 15 minutes; then turn them
through hmewater. This will make a
beautiful sky blue of much durability.
The fabric should next be run through a
solution of prussiate of potash, 1 ounce,
to water, 1 gallon.
Brown Dye for Cotton or Linen. — Give
the pieces a mixed mordant of acetate of
alumina and acetate of iron, and then
dye them in a bath of madder, or madder
and fustic. When the acetate of alu-
mina predominates, the dye has an
amaranth tint. A cinnamon tint is ob-
tained by first giving a mordant of alum,
next a madder bath, then a bath of fustic,
to which a little green copperas has been
added.
Brown for Silk. — Dissolve annatto,
1 pound; pearlash, 4 pounds, in boiling
water, and pass the silk through it for 2
hours; then take it out, squeeze well,
and dry. Next give it a mordant of
alum, and pass through a bath of bra-
zil wood, and afterwards through a bath
of logwood, to which a little green cop-
peras has been added; wring it out and
dry; afterwards rinse well.
Brown Dye for Wool. — This may be
induced by a decoction of oak bark, with
variety of shade according to the quan-
tity employed. If the goods be first
passed through a mordant of alum the
color will be brightened.
Brown for Cotton. — Catechu or terra
japonica gives cotton a brown color;
blue vitriol turns it to the bronze; green
copperas darkens it, when applied as a
mordant and the stuff is boiled in the
bath. Acetate of alumina as a mordant
brightens it. The French color Car-
melite is given with catechu, 1 pound;
verdigris, 4 ounces; and sal ammoniac,
5 ounces.
Dark Snuff Brown for Wool.— For 50
pounds of goods, take camwood, 10
pounds, boil for 20 minutes, then dip the
goods for f of an hour; take them out,
and add to the dye, fustic, 25 pounds,
boil 12 minutes, and dip the goods f of
an hour; then add blue vitriol, 10 ounces,
copperas, 2 pounds, 8 ounces; dip again 40
minutes. Add more copperas if the
shade is required darker.
Brown for Wool and Silk. — Infusion
or decoction of walnut peels dyes wool
and silk a brown color, which is bright-
ened by alum. Horse-chestnut peels
also impart a brown color; a mordant of
muriate of tin turns it on the bronze, and
sugar of lead the reddish brown.
Alkali Blue and Nicholson's Blue. —
Dissolve 1 pound of the dye in 10 gallons
boiling water, and add this by small por-
tions to the dye bath, which should be
rendered alkaline by borax. The fabric
should be well worked about between
each addition of the color. The tem-
perature must be kept under 212° F.
To develop the color, wash with water
268
DYES
and pass through a bath containing
sulphuric acid.
Aniline Blue. — To 100 pounds of fabric,
dissolve 1J pounds aniline blue in 3
quarts hot alcohol, strain through a filter,
and add it to a bath of 130° F.; also 10
pounds Glauber's salts, and 5 pounds
acetic acid. Immerse the goods and
handle them well for 20 minutes. Next
heat slowly to 200° F.; then add 5
pounds sulphuric acid diluted with water.
Let the whole boil 20 minutes longer;
then rinse and dry. If the aniline be
added in 2 or 3 proportions during the
process of coloring, it will facilitate the
evenness of the color.
Blue on Cotton. — For 40 pounds of
§pods, use copperas, 2 pounds; boil and
ip 20 minutes; dip in soapsuds, and
return to the dye 3 or 4 times; then
make a new bath with prussiate of pot-
ash, £ pound; oil of vitriol, 1£ pints;
boil £ hour, rinse out and dry.
Sky Blue on Cotton. — For 60 pounds
of goods, blue vitriol, 5 pounds. Boil a
short time, then enter the goods, dip 3
hours, and transfer to a bath of strong
limewater. A fine brown color will be
imparted to the goods if they are then
put through a solution of prussiate of
potash.
Blue Dye for Hosiery. — One hundred
pounds of wool are colored with 4 pounds
Guatemala or 3 pounds Bengal indigo,
in the soda or wood vat. Then boil in
a kettle a few minutes, 5 pounds of cud-
bear or 8 pounds of archil paste; add 1
pound of soda, or, better, 1 pail of urine;
then cool the dye to about 170° F. and
enter the wool. Handle well for about
20 minutes, then take it out, cool, rinse,
and dry. It makes no difference
whether the cudbear is put in before or
after the indigo. Three ounces of ani-
line purple dissolved in alcohol, \ pint,
can be used instead of the cudbear.
Wood spirit is cheaper than alcohol, and
is much used by dyers for the purpose of
dissolving aniline colors. It produces a
very pretty shade, but should never be
used on mixed goods which have to be
bleached.
Dark-Blue Dye.— This dye is suitable
for thibets and lastings. Boil 100 pounds
of the fabric for \\ hours in a solution of
alum, 25 pounds; tartar, 4 pounds; mor-
dant, 6 pounds; extract of indigo, 6
pounds; cool as usual. Boil in fresh
water from 8 to 10 pounds of logwood,
in a bag or otherwise, then cool the dye
to 170° F. Reel the fabric quickly at
first, then let it boil strongly for 1 hour.
This is a very good imitation of indigo
blue.
Saxon Blue. — For 100 pounds thibet
or comb yarn, use alum, 20 pounds;
cream of tartar, 3 pounds; mordant, 2
pounds; extract of indigo, 3 pounds; or
carmine, 1 pound, makes a better color.
When all is dissolved, cool the kettle to
180° F.; enter and handle quickly at
first, then let the fabric boil \ hour, or
until even. Long boiling dims the color.
Zephyr worsted yarn ought to be pre-
pared, first, by boiling it in a solution
of alum and sulphuric acid; the indigo
is added afterwards.
Logwood and Indigo Blue. — For 100
pounds of cloth. Color the cloth first by
one or two dips in the vat of indigo blue,
and rinse it well, and then boil it in a
solution of 20 pounds of alum, 2 pounds
of half-refined tartar, and 5 pounds of
mordant, for 2 hours; finally take it out and
cool. In fresh water boil 10 pounds of
good logwoodj for half an hour in a bag
or otherwise; cool off to 170° F. before
entering. Handle well over a reel, let it
boil for half an hour; then take it out,
cool and rinse. This is a very firm
blue.
Blue Purple for Silk.— For 40 pounds
of goods, take bichromate of potash, 8
ounces; alum, 1 pound; dissolve all and
bring the water to a boil, and put in the
goods; boil 1 hour. Then empty the
dye, and make a hew dye with logwood,
8 pounds, or extract of logwood, 1 pound
4 ounces, and boil in this 1 hour longer.
Grade the color by using more or less
logwood, as dark or light color is wanted.
Blue Purple for Wool. — One hundred
pounds of wool are first dipped in the
blue vat to a light shade, then boiled in
a solution of 15 pounds of alum and 3
pounds of half -refined tartar, for li
nours, the wool taken out, cooled^ and
let stand 24 hours. Then boil in fresh
water 8 pounds of powdered cochineal
for a few minutes, cool the kettle to 170°
F. Handle the prepared wool in this
for 1 hour, when it is ready to cool, rinse
and dry. By coloring first with cochi-
neal, as aforesaid, and finishing in the
blue vat, the fast purple or dahlia, so
much admired in German broadcloths,
will be produced. Tin acids must not
be used in this color.
To Make Extract of Indigo Blue.—
Take of vitriol, 2 pounds, and stir into it
finely pulverized indigo, 8 ounces, stir-
ring briskly for the first half hour; then
DYES
269
cover up, and stir 4 or 5 times daily
for a few days. Add a little pulverized
chalk, stirring it up, and keep adding it
as long as it foams; it will neutralize the
acid. Keep it closely corked.
Light Silver Drab. — For 50 pounds of
goods, use logwood, | pound; alum, about
the same quantity; boil well, enter the
goods, and dip them for 1 hour. Grade
the color to any desired shade by using
equal parts of logwood and alum.
GRAY DYES:
Slate Dye for Silk. — For a small quan-
tity, take a pan of warm water and
about a teacupful of logwood liquor,
pretty strong, and a piece of pearlash the
size of a nut; take gray-colored goods
and handle a little in this liquid, and it is
finished. If too much logwood is used,
the color will be too dark.
Slate for Straw Hats. — First, soak in
rather strong warm suds for 15 minutes
to remove sizing or stiffening; then rinse
in warm water to get out the soap.
Scald cudbear, 1 ounce, in sufficient
water to cover the hat; work it in this
dye at 180° F., until a light purple is
obtained. Have a vessel of cold water,
blued with the extract of indigo, £ ounce,
and work or stir the bonnet in this until
the tint pleases. Dry, then rinse out
with cold water, and dry again in the
shade. If the purple is too deep in shade
the final slate will be too dark.
Silver Gray for Straw.— For 25 hats,
select the whitest hats and soften them
in a bath of crystallized soda to which
some clean limewater has been added.
Boil for 2 hours in a large vessel, using
for a bath a decoction of the follow-
ing: Alum, 4 pounds; tartaric acid, f
pound; some ammoniacal cochineal,
and carmine of indigo. A little sulphuric
acid may be necessary in order to neu-
tralize the alkali of the cochineal dye. If
the last-mentioned ingredients are used,
let the hats remain for an hour longer in
the boiling bath, then rinse in slightly
acidulated water.
Dark Steel. — Mix black and white
wool together in the proportion of 50
pounds of black wool to 7$ pounds of
white. For large or small quantities,
keep the same proportion, mixing care-
fully and thoroughly.
GREEN DYES:
Aniline Green for Silk.— Iodine green
or night green dissolves easily in warm
water. For a liquid dye 1 pound may be
dissolved in 1 gallon alcohol, and mixed
with 2 gallons water, containing 1 ounce
sulphuric acid.
Aniline Green for Wool. — Prepare two
baths, one containing the dissolved dye
and a quantity of carbonate of soda or
borax. In this the wool is placed, and
the temperature raised to 212° F. A
grayish green is produced, which must
be brightened and fixed in a second bath
of water 100° F., to which some acetic
acid has been added. Cotton requires
preparation by sumac.
Green for Cotton. — For 40 pounds of
goods, use fustic, 10 pounds; blue vitriol,
10 ounces; soft soap, 2J quarts; and log-
wood chips, 1 pound 4 ounces. Soak
the logwood overnight in a brass vessel,
and put it on the fire in the morning,
adding the other ingredients. When
quite hot it is ready for dyeing; enter the
goods at once, and handle well. Differ-
ent shades may be obtained by letting
part of the goods remain longer in the
dye.
Green for Silk. — Boil green ebony in
water, and let it settle. Take the clear
liquor as hot as the hands can bear, and
handle the goods in it until of a bright
yellow. Take water and put in a little
sulphate of indigo; handle goods in this
till of the shade desired. The ebony may
previously be boiled in a bag to prevent
it from sticking to the silk.
Green for Wool and Silk. — Take equal
quantities of yellow oak and hickory
bark, make a strong yellow bath by
boiling, and shade to the desired tint by
adding a small quantity of extract of
indigo.
Green Fustic Dye. — For 50 pounds of
goods, use 50 pounds of fustic with alum,
11 pounds. Soak in water until the
strength is extracted, put in the goods
until of a good yellow color, remove the
chips, and add extract of indigo in small
quantities at a time, until the color is
satisfactory.
PURPLE AND VIOLET DYES:
Aniline Violet and Purple. — Acidulate
the bath by sulphuric acid, or use sul-
phate of soda; both these substances
render the shade bluish. Dye at 212° F.
To give a fair middle shade to 10 pounds
of wool, a quantity of solution equal to
£ to f ounces of the solid dye will be re-
quired. The color of the dyed fabric is
improved by washing in soap and water,
and then passing through a bath soured
by sulphuric acid.
Purple,-— For 40 pounds of goods, use
270
DYES
alum, 3 pounds; muriate of tin, 4 tea-
cups; pulverized cochineal, 1 pound;
cream of tartar, 2 pounds. Boil the
alum, tin, and cream tof tartar, for 20
minutes, add the cochineal and boil 5
minutes; immerse the goods 2 hours; re-
move and enter them in a new dye com-
posed of brazil wood, 3 pounds; log-
wood, 7 pounds; alum, 4 pounds, and
muriate of tin, 8 cupfuls, adding a little
extract of indigo.
Purple for Cotton. — Get up a tub of
hot logwood liquor, enter 3 pieces, give
them 5 ends, and hedge out. Enter
them in a clean alum tub, give them 5
ends, and hedge out. Get up another
tub of logwood liquor, enter, give them
5 ends, and hedge out; renew the alum
tub, give 5 ends in that, and finish.
Purple for Silk. — For 10 pounds of
goods, enter the goods in a blue dye bath,
and secure a light-blue color, dry, and
dip in a warm solution containing alum,
2^ pounds. Should a deeper color be
required, add a little extract of indigo.
Solferino and Magenta for Woolen,
Silk, or Cotton. — For 1 pound of woolen
goods, magenta shade, 96 grains, apothe-
caries' weight, of aniline red, will be re-
quired. Dissolve in a little warm alco-
hol, using, say, 6 fluidounces, or about 6
gills alcohol per ounce of aniline. Many
dyers use wood spirits because of its
cheapness. For a solferino shade, use
64 grains aniline red, and dissolve in 4
ounces alcohol, to each 1 pound of goods.
Cold water, 1 quart, will dissolve these
small quantities of aniline red, but the
cleanest and quickest way will be found
by using the alcohol, or wood spirits.
Clean the cloth and goods by steeping
at a gentle heat in weak soapsuds, rinse
in several masses of clean water and lay
aside moist. The alcoholic solution of
aniline is to be added from time to time
to the warm or hot dye bath, till the color
on the goods is of the desired shade.
The goods are to be removed from the
dye bath before each addition of the
alcoholic solution, and the bath is to be
well stirred before the goods are re-
turned. The alcoholic solution should
be first dropped into a little water, and
well mixed, and the mixture should then
be strained into the dye bath. If the
color is not dark enough after working
from 20 to 30 minutes, repeat the re-
moval of the goods from the bath, and
the addition of the solution, and the re-
immersion of the goods from 15 to 30
minutes more, or until suited, then re-
move from the bath and rinse in several
masses of clean water, and dry in the
shade. Use about 4 gallons water for
dye bath for 1 pound of goods; less water
for larger quantities.
Violet for Silk or Wool.— A good violet
dye may be given by passing the goods
first through a solution of verdigris, then
through a decoction of logwood, and
lastly through alum water. A fast violet
may be given by dyeing the goods crim-
son with cochineal, without alum or
tartar, and after rinsing passing them
through the indigo vat. Linens or cot-
tons are first galled with 18 per cent of
gallnuts, next passed through a mordant
of alum, iron liquor, and sulphate of
copper, working them well, then worked
in a madder bath made with an equal
weight of root, and lastly brightened
with soap or soda.
Violet for Straw Bonnets. — Take alum,
4 pounds; tartaric acid, 1 pound; chlor-
ide of tin, 1 pound. Dissolve and boil,
allowing the hats to remain in the boiling
solution 2 hours; then add enough decoc-
tion of logwood, carmine, and indigo to
induce the desired shade, and rinse finally
in water in which some alum has been dis-
solved.
Wine Color. — For 50 pounds of goods,
use camwood, 10 pounds, and boil 20
minutes; dip the goods £ hour, boil again,
and dip 40 minutes; then darken with
blue vitriol, 15 ounces, and 5 pounds of
copperas.
Lilac for Silk. — For 5 pounds of silk,
use archil, 7t pounds, and mix well
with the liquor. Make it boil \ hour,
and dip the silk quickly; then let it cool,
and wash in river water. A fine half
violet, or lilac, more or less full, will be
obtained.
RED, CRIMSON, AND PINK DYES:
Aniline Red. — Inclose the aniline in
a small muslin bag. Have a kettle (tin
or brass) filled with moderately hot
water and rub the substance out. Then
immerse the goods to be colored, and in
a short time they are done. It improves
the color to wring the goods out of strong
soapsuds before putting them in the dye.
This is a permanent color on wocl or
silk.
Red Madder.— To 100 pounds of fabric,
use 20 pounds of alum, 5 pounds of tar-
tar, and 5 pounds of muriate of tin.
When these are dissolved, enter the
goods and let them boil for 2 hours, then
take out, let cool, and lay overnight.
Into fresh water, stir 75 pounds of good
DYES
271
madder, and enter the fabric at 120° F.
and bring it up to 200° F. in the course
of an hour. Handle well to secure even-
ness, then rinse and dry.
Red for Wool. — For 40 pounds of
goods, make a tolerably thick paste of
lac dye and sulphuric acid, and allow it
to stand for a day. Then take tartar, 4
pounds, tin liquor, 2 pounds 8 ounces,
and 3 pounds of the paste; make a hot
bath with sufficient water, and enter
the goods for f hour; afterwards care-
fully rinse and dry.
Crimson for Silk. — For 1 pound of
goods, use alum, 3 ounces; dip at hand
heat 1 hour; take out and drain, while
making a new dye, by boiling for 10
minutes, cochineal, 3 ounces; bruised
nutgalls, 2 ounces; and cream of tartar,
i ounce, in 1 pail of water. When a
little cool begin to dip, raising the heat
to a boil, continuing to dip 1 hour.
Wash and dry.
Aniline Scarlet. — For every 40 pounds
of goods, dissolve 5 pounds white vitriol
(sulphate of zinc) at 180° F., place the
goods in this bath for 10 minutes, then
add the color, prepared by boiling for a
few minutes, 1 pound aniline scarlet in
3 gallons water, stirring the same con-
tinually. This solution has to be fil-
tered before being added to the bath.
The goods remain in the latter for 15
minutes, when they have become
browned and must be boiled for another
half hour in the same bath after the so-
lution of sal ammoniac. The more of
this is added the deeper will be the shade.
Scarlet with Cochineal. — For 50 pounds
of wool, yarn, or cloth, use cream of tar-
tar, 1 pound 9 ounces; cochineal, pul-
verized, 12^ ounces; muriate of tin or
scarlet spirit, 8 pounds. After boiling
the dye, enter the goods, work them well
for 15 minutes, then boil them It hours,
slowly agitating the goods while boiling,
wash in clean water, and dry out of the
sun.
Scarlet with Lac Dye.— For 100
pounds of flannel or yarn, take 25
pounds of ground lac dye, 15 pounds of
scarlet spirit (made as per directions be-
low), 5 pounds of tartar, 1 pound of flav-
ine, or according to shade, 1 pound of tin
crystals, 5 pounds of muriatic acid. Boil
all for 15 minutes, then cool the dye to
170° F. Enter the goods, and handle
them quickly at first. Let boil 1 hour,
and rinse while yet hot, before the gum
and impurities harden. This color
stands scouring with soap better than
cochineal scarlet. A small quantity of
sulphuric acid may be added to dissolve
the gum.
Muriate of Tin or Scarlet Spirit. —
Take 16 pounds muriatic acid, 22° Be.;
1 pound feathered tin, and water, 2
pounds. The acid should be put in a
stoneware pot, and the tin added, and
allowed to dissolve. The mixture should
be kept a few days before using. The
tin is feathered or granulated by melting
in a) suitable vessel, and pouring it from
a height of about 5 feet into a pailful of
water. This is a most powerful agent
in certain colors, such as scarlets, or-
anges, pinks, etc.
Pink for Cotton. — For 40 pounds of
goods, use redwood, 20 pounds; muriate
of tin, 2^ pounds. Boil the redwood 1
hour, turn off into a large vessel, add the
muriate of tin, and put in the goods.
Let it stand 5 or 10 minutes, and a good
fast pink will be produced.
Pink for Wool. — For 60 pounds of
goods, take alum, 5 pounds 12 ounces;
boil and immerse the goods 50 minutes;
then add to the dye cochineal well pul-
verized, 1 pound, 4 ounces; cream of
tartar, 5 pounds; boil and enter the goods
while boiling, until the color is satisfac-
tory.
YELLOW, ORANGE, AND BRONZE
DYES:
Aniline Yellow.— This color is slightly
soluble in water, and for dyers' use may
be used directly for the preparation of
the bath dye, but is best used by dis-
solving 1 pound of dye in 2 gallons alco-
hol. Temperature of bath should be
under 200° F. The color is much im-
proved and brightened by a trace of sul-
phuric acid.
Yellow for Cotton.— For 40 pounds
goods, use sugar of lead, 3 pounds 8
ounces; dip the goods 2 hours. Make a
new dye with bichromate of potash, 2
pounds; dip until the color suits, wring
out and dry. If not yellow enough re-
peat the operation.
Yellow for Silk. — For 10 pounds of
goods, use sugar of lead, 7£ ounces; alum,
2 pounds. Enter the goods, and let
them remain 12 hours; remove them,
drain, and make a new dye with fustic,
10 pounds. Immerse until the color
suits.
Orange. — I. — For 50 pounds of goods,
use argal, 3 pounds; muriate of tin, 1
quart; boil and dip 1 hour; then add to
the dye, fustic, 25 pounds; madder, 2^
DYES
quarts; and dip again 40 minutes. If
preferred, cochineal, 1 pound 4 ounces,
may be used instead of the madder, as a
better color is induced by it;
II. — For 40 pounds of goods, use
sugar of lead, 2 pounds, and boil 15
minutes. When a little cool, enter the
goods, and dip for 2 hours, wring them
out, make a fresh dye with bichromate
of potash, 4 pounds; madder, 1 pound,
and immerse until the desired color is
secured. The shade may be varied by
dipping in limewater.
Bronze. — Sulphate or muriate of man-
ganese dissolved in water with a little
tartaric acid imparts a beautiful bronze
tint. The stuff after being put through
the solution must be turned through a
weak lye of potash, and afterwards
through another of chloride of lime, to
brighten and fix it.
Prussiate of copper gives a bronze or
yellowish- brown color to silk. The piece
well mordanted with blue vitriol may be
passed through a solution of prussiate of
potash.
Mulberry for Silk. — For 5 pounds of
silk, use alum, 1 pound 4 ounces; dip 50
minutes, wash out, and make a dye with
brazil wood, 5 ounces, and logwood, 1 J
ounces, bv boiling together. Dip in this
£ hour; tnen add more brazil wood and
logwood, equal parts, until the color
suits.
FEATHER DYES.
I. — Cut some white curd soap in small
pieces, pour boiling water on them, and
add a little pearlash. When the soap is
quite dissolved, and the mixture cool
enough for the hand to bear, plunge the
feathers into it, and draw them through
the hand till the dirt appears squeezed
out of them; pass them through a clean
lather with some blue in it; then rinse
them in cold water with blue to give them
a good coior. Beat them against the
hand to shake off the water, and dry by
shaking them near a fire. When perfect-
ly dry, coil each fiber separately with a
blunt knife or ivory folder.
II. — Black. — Immerse for 2 or 3 days
in a bath, at first hot, of logwood, 8
parts, and copperas or acetate of iron,
1 part.
III. — Blue. — Same as II, but with the
indigo vat.
IV. — Brown. — By using any of the
brown dyes for silk or woolen.
V. — Crimson. — A mordant of alum,
followed by a hot bath of brazil wood,
afterwards by a weak dye of cudbear.
VI. — Pink or Rose, — With safflower
or lemon juice.
VII.— Plum.— With the red dye, fol-
lowed by an alkaline bath.
VIII. — Red. — A mordant of alum,
followed by a bath of brazil wood.
IX. — Yellow. — A mordant of alum,
followed by a bath of turmeric or weld.
X. — Green. — Take of verdigris and
verditer, of each 1 ounce; gum water,
1 pint; mix them well and dip the feath-
ers, they having been first soaked in hot
water, into the said mixture.
XI. — Purple. — Use lake and indigo.
XII. — Carnation. — Vermilion and
smalt.
DYES FOR ARTIFICIAL FLOWERS.
The French employ velvet, fine cam-
bric, and kid for the petals, and taffeta
for the leaves. Very recently thin plates
of bleached whalebone have been used
for some portions of the artificial flowers.
Colors and Stains. — I. — Blue. — Indigo
dissolved in oil of vitriol, and the acid
partly neutralized with salt of tartar or
whiting.
II. — Green. — A solution of distilled
verdigris.
III. — Lilac. — Liquid archil.
IV. — Red. — Carmine dissolved in a
solution of salt of tartar, or in spirts of
hartshorn.
V. — Violet. — Liquid archil mixed with
a little salt of tartar.
VI. — Yellow. — Tincture of turmeric.
The colors are generally applied with
the fingers.
DYES FOR FURS:
I. — Brown. — Use tincture of logwood.
II. — Red. — Use ground brazil wood,
£ pound; water, if quarts; cochineal,
| ounce; boil the brazil wood in the
water 1 hour; strain and add the cochi-
neal; boil 15 minutes.
III. — Scarlet. — Boil $ ounce saffron
in \ pint of water, and pass over the
work before applying the red.
IV. — Blue. — Use logwood, 7 ounces;
blue vitriol, 1 ounce; water, 22 ounces;
boil.
V. — Purple. — Use logwood, 11 ounces;
alum, 6 ounces; water, 29 ounces.
VI. — Green. — Use strong vinegar, 1
pints; best verdigris, 2 ounces, groun
fine; sap green, J ounce; mix all to-
gether and boil.
DYES
273
DYES FOR HATS.
The hats should be at first strongly
galled by boiling a long time in a decoc-
tion of galls with a little logwood so that
the dye may penetrate into their sub-
stance; after which a proper quantity of
vitriol and decoction of logwood, with a
little verdigris, are added, and the hats
kept in this mixture for a considerable
time. They are afterwards put into a
fresh liquor of logwood, galls, vitriol,
and verdigris, and, when the hats are
costly, or of a hair which with difficulty
takes the dye, the same process is re-
peated a third time. For obtaining the
most perfect color, the hair or wool is
dyed blue before it is formed into hats.
The ordinary bath for dyeing hats, em-
ployed by London manufacturers, con-
sists, for 12 dozen, of 144 pounds of
logwood; 12 pounds of green sulphate of
iron or copperas; 7J pounds verdigris.
The logwood having been introduced
into the copper and digested for some
time, the copperas and verdigris are
added in successive quantities, and in
the above proportions, along with every
successive 2 or 3 dozen of hats sus-
pended upon the dripping machine.
Each set of hats, after being exposed to
the bath with occasional airings during
40 minutes, is taken off the pegs, and laid
out upon the ground to be more com-
pletely blackened by the peroxydize-
ment of the iron with the atmospheric
oxygen. In 3 or 4 hours the dyeing is
completed. When fully dyed, the hats
are well washed in running water.
Straw hats or bonnets may be dyed
black by boiling them 3 or 4 hours in a
strong liquor of logwood, adding a little
copperas occasionally. Let the bonnets
remain in the liquor all night; then take
out to dry in the air. If the black is not
satisfactory, dye again after drying.
Rub inside and out with a sponge
moistened in fine oil; then block.
I. — Red Dye. — Boil ground brazil
wood in a lye of potash, and boil your
straw hats in it.
II.— Blue Dye.— Take a sufficient
quantity of potash lye, 1 pound of litmus
or lacmus, ground; make a decoction
and then put in the straw, and boil it.
TO DYE, STIFFEN. AND BLEACH
FELT HATS.
Felt hats are dyed by repeated im-
mersion, drawing and dipping in a hot
watery solution of logwood, 38 parts;
green vitriol, 3 parts; verdigris, 2 parts;
repeat the immersions and drawing with
exposure to the air 13 or 14 times, or
until the color suits, each step in the
process lasting from 10 to 15 minutes.
Aniline colors may be advantageously
used instead of the above. For a stiffen-
ing, dissolve borax, 10 parts; carbonate
of potash, 3 parts, in hot water; then add
shellac, 50 parts, and boil until all is dis-
solved; apply with a sponge or a brush,
or by immersing the hat when it is cold,
and dip at once in very dilute sulphuric
or acetic acid to neutralize the alkali and
fix the shellac. Felt hats can be bleached
by the use of sulphuric acid gas.
LIQUID DYE COLORS.
These colors, thickened with a little
gum, may be used as inks in writing, or
as colors to tint maps, foils, artificial
flowers, etc., or to paint on velvet:
I. — Blue. — Dilute Saxon blue or sul-
phate of indigo with water. If required
for delicate work, neutralize with chalk.
II. — Purple. — Add a little alum to a
strained decoction of logwood.
III. — Green. — Dissolve sa^ green in
water and add a little alum.
IV. — Yellow. — Dissolve annatto in a
weak lye of subcarbonate of soda or
potash.
V.— Golden Color. —Steep French
berries in hot water, strain, and add a
little gum and alum.
VI. — Red. — Dissolve carmine in am-
monia, or in weak carbonate of potash
water, or infuse powdered cochineal in
water, strain, and add a little gum in
water.
UNCLASSIFIED DYERS' RECIPES:
To Cleanse Wool. — Make a hot bath
composed of water, 4 parts; and urine, 1
part; enter the wool, teasing and opening
it out to admit the full action of the
liquid. After 20 minutes' immersion,
remove from the liquid and allow it to
drain; then rinse in clean running water,
and spread out to dry. The liquid is
good for subsequent operations, only
keep up the proportions, and use no
soap.
To Extract Oil Spots from Finished
Goods. — Saturate the spot with benzine;
then place two pieces of very soft blotting
paper under and two upon it, press well
with a hot iron, and tne grease will be
absorbed.
New Mordant for Aniline Colors. — Im-
merse the goods for some hours in a bath
of cold water in which chloride or acetate
of zinc has been dissolved until the solu-
tion shows 2° Be. For the wool the
274
BYES
mordanting bath should be at a boiling
heat, and the goods should also be placed
in a warm bath of tannin, 90° F., for half
an hour. In dyeing, a hot solution of
the color must be used to which should
be added, in the case of the cotton, some
chloride of zinc, and, in the case of the
wool, a certain amount of tannin solu-
tion.
To Render Aniline Colors Soluble in
Water. — A solution of gelatin in acetic
acid of almost the consistence of syrups
is first made, and the aniline in fine is
gradually added, stirring all the time so
as to make a homogeneous paste. The
mixture is then to be heated over a water
bath to the temperature of boiling water
and kept at that heat for some time.
Limewater for Dyers* Use. — Put some
lime, 1 pound, and strong limewater, 1£
pounds, into a pail of water; rummage
well for 7 or 8 minutes. Then let it
rest until the lime is precipitated and the
water clear; add this quantity to a tubful
of clear water.
To Renew Old Silks.— Unravel and
put them in a tub, cover with cold water,
and let them remain 1 hour. Dip them
up and down, but do not wring; hang up
to drain, and iron while very damp.
Fuller's Purifier for Cloths.— Dry,
pulverize, and sift the following ingredi-
ents: Fuller's earth, 6 pounds; French
chalk, 4 ounces; pipe clay, 1 pound.
Make into a paste with rectified oil of
turpentine, 1 ounce; alcohol, 2 ounces;
melted oil soap, 1^ pounds. Compound
the mixture into cakes of any desired size,
keeping them in water, or small wooden
boxes.
To Fix Dyes. — Dissolve 20 ounces of
gelatin in water, and add 3 ounces of
bichromate of potash. This is done in a
dark room. The coloring matter is then
added and the goods submitted thereto,
after which they are exposed to the action
of light. The pigment thus becomes in-
soluble in water and the color is fast.
DYES AND DYESTUFFS.
Prominent among natural dyestuffs is
the coloring matter obtained from log-
wood and known as "haematein." The
color-forming substance (or chromogen),
hsematoxylin, exists in the logwood
partly free and partly as a glucoside.
When pure, hsematoxylin forms nearly
colorless crystals, but on oxidation, es-
pecially in the presence of an alkali, it
is converted into the coloring matter
hsematein, which forms colored lakes
with metallic bases, yielding violets,
blues, and blacks with various mordants.
Logwood comes into commerce in the
form of logs, chips, and extracts. The
chips are moistened with water and ex-
posed in heaps so as to induce fermenta-
tion, alkalies and oxidizing agents being
added to promote the "curing" or oxida-
tion. When complete and the chips have
assumed a deep reddish-brown color, the
decoction is made which is employed in
dyeing. The extract offers convenience
in transportation, storage, and use. It is
now usually made from logwood chips
that have not been cured. The chips are
treated in an extractor, pressure often
being used. The extract is sometimes
adulterated with chestnut, hemlock, and
quercitron extracts, and with glucose or
molasses.
Fustic is the heart-wood of certain
species of trees indigenous to the West
Indies and tropical South America. It
is sold as chips and extract, yields a
coloring principle which forms lemon-
yellow lakes with alumina and is chiefly
used in dyeing wool. Young fustic is
the heart-wood of a sumac native to the
shores of the Mediterranean, which
yields an orange-colored lake with alum-
ina and tin salts.
Cutch, or catechu, is obtained from
the wood and pods of the Acacia catechu,
and from the betel nut, both native in
India. Cutch appears in commerce in
dark-brown lumps, which form a dark-
brown solution with water. It contains
catechu-tannic acid, as tannin arid
catechin, and is extensively used in
weighting black silks, as a mordant for
certain basic coal-tar dyes, as a brown
dye on cotton, and for calico printing.
Indigo, which is obtained from the
glucoside indican existing in the indigo
plant and in woad, is one of the oldest
dyestuffs. It is obtained from the plant
by a process of fermentation and oxida-
tion. Indigo appears in commerce in
dark-blue cubical cakes, varying very
much in composition as they often con-
tain indigo red and indigo brown, be-
sides moisture, mineral matters, and
glutinous substances. Consequently the
color varies. Powdered indigo dissolves
in concentrated fuming sulphuric acid,
forming monosulphonic and disulphonic
acids. On neutralizing these solutions
with sodium carbonate and precipitating
the indigo carmine with common salt
there is obtained the indigo extract, solu-
ble indigo, and indigo carmine of com-
merce. True indigo carmine is the so-
dium salt of the disulphonic acid, and
when sold dry it is called "indigotme."
One of the most important of the recent
DYES
275
achievements of chemistry is the synthetic
production of indigo on a commercial
scale.
Artificial dyestuffs assumed preponder-
ating importance with the discovery of
the lilac color mauve by Perkin in 1856,
and fuchsine or magenta by Verguin in
1895, for with each succeeding year other
colors have been discovered, until at the
present time there are several thousand
artificial organic dyes or colors on the
market. Since the first of these were
prepared from aniline or its derivatives
the colors were known as "aniline dyes,"
but as a large number are now prepared
from other constituents of coal tar than
aniline they are better called "coal-tar
dyestuffs." There are many schemes of
classification. Benedikt-Knecht divides
them into I, aniline or amine dyes; II,
phenol dyes; III, azo dyes; IV, quino-
line and acridine derivatives; V, anthra-
cene dyes; and VI, artificial indigo.
Of the anthracene dyes, the alizarine is
the most important, since this is the
coloring principle of the madder. The
synthesis of alizarine from anthracene
was effected by Grabe and Liebermann
in 1868. This discovery produced a
complete revolution in calico printing,
turkey-red dyeing, and in the manu-
facture of madder preparations. Madder
finds to-day only a very limited applica-
tion in the dyeing of wool.
In textile dyeing and printing, sub-
stances called mordants are largely used,
either to fix or to develop the color on
the fiber. Substances of mineral origin,
such as salts of aluminum, chromium,
iron, copper, antimony, and tin, prin-
cipally, and many others to a less extent
and of organic origin, like acetic, oxalic,
citric, tartaric, and lactic acid, sulpho-
nated oils, and tannins are employed as
mordants.
Iron liquor, known as black liquor or
pyrolignite of iron, is made by dissolving
scrap iron in pyroligneous acid. It is
used as a mordant in dyeing silks and
cotton and in calico printing.
Red liquor is a solution of aluminum
acetate in acetic acid, and is produced
by acting on calcium or lead acetate solu-
tions with aluminum sulphate or the
double alums, the supernatant liquid
forming the red liquor. The red liquor
of the trade is often the sulpho-acetate of
alumina resulting when the quantity of
calcium or lead acetate is insufficient to
completely decompose the aluminum
salt. Ordinarily the solutions have a
dark-brown color and a strong pyro-
ligneous odor. It is called red liquor
because it was first used in dyeing reds.
It is employed as a mordant by the
cotton dyer and largely by the printer.
Non-Poisonous Textile and Egg Dyes
for Household Use. — The preparation of
non-poisonous colors for dyeing fabrics
and eggs at home constitutes a separate
department in the manufacture of dye-
stuffs.
Certain classes of aniline dyes may be
properly said to form the materials. The
essence of this color preparation consists
chiefly in diluting or weakening the coal-
tar dyes, made in the aniline factories,
and bringing them down to a certain
desired shade by the addition of certain
chemicals suited to their varying charac-
teristics, which, though weakening the
color, act at the same time as the so-called
mordants.
The anilines are divided with refer-
ence to their characteristic reactions into
groups of basic, acid, moderately acid,
as well as dyes that are insoluble in
water.
In cases where combinations of one or
more colors are needed, only dyes of
similar reaction can be combined, that is,
basic with basic, and acid with acid.
For the purpose of reducing the
original intensity of the colors, and also
as mordants, dextrin, Glauber's salt,
alum, or aluminum sulphate is pressed
into service. Where Glauber's salt is
used, the neutral salt is exclusively em-
ployed, which can be had cheaply and in
immense quantities in the chemical
industry. Since it is customary to pack
the color mixtures in two paper boxes,
one stuck into the other, and moreover
since certain coal-tar dyes are only used
in large crystals, it is only reasonable that
the mordants should be calcined and not
put up in the shape of crystallized salts,
particularly since these latter are prone
to absorb the moisture from the air, and
when thus wet likely to form a compact
mass very difficult to dissolve. This in-
convenience often occurs with the large
crystals of fuchsine and methyl violet.
Because these two colors are mostly used
in combination with dextrin to color
eggs, and since dextrin is also very
hygroscopic, it is better in these in-
dividual cases to employ calcined Glau-
ber's salt. In the manufacture of egg
colors the alkaline coloring coal-tar dyes
are mostly used, and they are to be found
in a great variety of shades.
Of the non-poisonous egg dyes, there
are some ten or a dozen numbers, new
red, carmine, scarlet, pink, violet, blue,
yellow, orange, green, brown, black,
heliotrope, etc., which when mixed will
276
DYES
enable the operator to form shades
almost without number.
The manufacture of the egg dyes as
carried on in the factory consists in a
mechanical mixing of basic coal-tar dye-
stuffs, also some direct coloring benzi-
dine dyestuffs, with dextrin in the ratio
of about 1 part of aniline dye to 8 parts
of dextrin; under certain circumstances,
according to the concentrated state of the
dyes, the reducing quantity of the dextrin
may be greatly increased. As reducing
agents for these colors insoluble sub-
stances may also be employed. A part
also of the egg dyes are treated with the
neutral sulphate; for instance, light
brilliant green, because of its rubbing off,
is made with dextrin and Glauber's salt
in the proportion of 1:3:3.
For the dyeing of eggs such color mix-
tures are preferably employed as contain
along with the dye proper a fixing agent
(dextrin) as well as a medium for the
superficial mordanting of the eggshell.
The colors will then be very brilliant.
Here are some recipes:
Color
Blue..
Brown.
Green .
Orange
Red. .
Pink . .
Violet.
Yellow
Dyestuff
Parts
by
Weight
. 3.5
. Marine blue B. N.
.VesuvinS 30.0
. Brilliant green O. . . 13 . 5
.Orange II 9.0
. Diamond fuchsine I. 3.5
. Eosin A 4.5
. Methyl violet 6 B . . 3.6
.Naphthol yellowS. 13. 5
Cit.
Acid
35.0
37.5
18.0
18.0
18.0
18.0
36.0
Dex-
trin
60.0
30.0
67.5
75.0
75.0
90.0
75.0
67.5
Very little of these mixtures suffices for
dyeing five eggs. The coloring matter is
dissolved in 600 parts by weight of boil-
ing water, while the eggs to be dyed are
boiled hard, whereupon they are placed
in the dye solution until they seem suffi-
ciently colored. The dyes should be put
up in waxed paper.
Fast Stamping Color. — Rub up sepa-
rately, 20 parts of cupric sulphate and 20
parts of anilic hydrochlorate, then mix
carefully together, after adding 10 parts
of dextrin. The mixture is next ground
with 5 parts of glycerine and sufficient
water until a thick, uniform, paste-like
mass results, adapted for use by means
of stencil and bristle-brush. Aniline
black is formed thereby in and upon the
fiber, which is not destroyed by boiling.
New Mordanting Process. — The or-
dinary method of mordanting wool with
a bichromate and a reducing agent al-
ways makes the fiber more or less tender,
and Amend proposed to substitute the
use of a solution of chromic acid contain-
ing 1 to 2 per cent of the weight of the
wool, at 9, temperature not exceeding
148° F., and to treat it afterwards with a
solution of sodium bisulphite. Accord-
ing to a recent French patent, better
results are obtained with neutral or slight-
ly basic chromium sulphocyanide. This
salt, if neutral or only slightly basic, will
mordant wool at 148° F. The double
sulphocyanide of chromium and ammo-
nium, got by dissolving chromic oxide in
ammonium sulphocyanide, can also be
used. Nevertheless, in order to precipi-
tate chromium chromate on the fiber,
it is advisable to have a soluble chromate
and a nitrate present, as well as a soluble
copper salt and a free acid. One ex-
ample of the process is as follows: Make
the bath with 2 to 3 per cent of ammonio-
chromium sulphocyanide, one-half of 1
per cent sodium bichromate, one-third of
1 per cent sodium nitrite, one-third of 1
per cent sulphate of copper, and 1.5 per
cent sulphuric acid — percentages based
on the weight of the wool. Enter cold
and slowly heat to about 140° to 150° F.
Then work for half an hour, lift and rinse.
The bath does not exhaust and can be
reinforced and used again.
Process for Dyeing in Khaki Colors. —
Bichromate of potash or of soda, chloride
of manganese, and a solution of acetate
of soda or formiate of soda (15° Be.) are
dissolved successively in equal quan-
tities.
The solution thus composed of these
three salts is afterwards diluted at will,
according to the color desired, con-
stituting a range from a dark brown to a
light olive green shade. The propor-
tions of the three salts may be increased
or diminished, in order to obtain shades
more or less bister.
Cotton freed from its impurities by the
usual methods, then fulled as ordinarily,
is immersed in the bath. After a period,
varying according to the results desired,
the cotton, threads, or fabrics of cotton,
are washed thoroughly and plunged, still
wet, into an alkaline solution, of which
the concentration ought never to be less
than 14° Be. This degree of concentra-
tion is necessary to take hold of the fiber
when the cotton comes in contact with
the alkaline bath, and by the contraction
which takes place the oxides of chrome
and of manganese remain fixed in the
fibers.
This second operation is followed by
washing in plenty of water, and then the
cotton is dried in the open air. If the
color is judged to be too pale, the threads
or fabrics are immersed again in the
initial bath, left the necessary time for
obtaining the desired shade, and then
BYES
277
washed, but without passing them through
an alkaline bath. This process furnishes
a series of khaki colors, solid to light, to
fulling and to chlorine.
LAKES:
Scarlet Lake. — In a vat holding 120
gallons provided with good agitating ap-
paratus, dissolve 8 pounds potash alum
in 10 gallons hot water and add 50
gallons cold water. Prepare a solution of
2 pounds ammonia soda and add slowly
to the alum solution, stirring all the time.
In a second vessel dissolve 5 pounds of
brilliant scarlet aniline, by first making
it into a paste with cold water and after-
wards pouring boiling water over it; now
let out steam into the vat until a temper-
ature of 150° to 165° F. is obtained.
Next dissolve 10 pounds barium chloride
in 10 gallons hot water in a separate
vessel, add this very slowly, stir at least
3 hours, keeping up temperature to the
same figures. Fill up vat with cold water
and leave the preparation for the night.
Next morning the liquor (which should
be of a bright red color) is drawn off, and
cold water again added. Wash by de-
cantation 3 times, filter, press gently, and
make into pulp.
It is very important to precipitate the
aluminum cold, and heat up before
adding the dyestuff. The chemicals
used for precipitating must be added
very slowly and while constantly stirring.
The quantity used for the three wash-
ings is required each time to be double
the quantity originally used.
I. — Madder Lakes. — Prepare from
the root 1 pound best madder, alum
water (1 pound alum with 1£ gallons of
water), saturated solution of carbonate
of potash (| pound carbonate of potash
to £ gallon of water).
The madder root is inclosed in a linen
bag of fine texture, and bruised with a
pestle in a large mortar with 2 gallons of
water (free from lime) added in small
quantities at a time, until all the coloring
matter is extracted. Make this liquor
boil, and gradually pour into the boiling
water solution. Add the carbonate of
potash solution gradually, stirring all the
time. Let the mixture stand for 12 hours
and drop and dry as required.
II. — Garancine Process. — This is the
method usually employed in preference
to that from the root. Garancine is pre-
pared by steeping madder root in sul-
phate of soda and washing.
Garancine 2 pounds
Alum (dissolved in a
little water) 2 pounds
Chloride of tin £ ounce
Sufficient carbonate of potash or
soda to precipitate the alum.
Boil the garancine in 4 gallons of pure
water; add the alum, and continue boiling
from 1 to 2 hours. Allow the product to
partially settle and filter through flannel
before cooling. Add to the filtrate the
chloride of tin, and sufficient of the pot-
ash or soda solution to precipitate the
alum; filter through flannel and wash
well. The first filtrate may be used for
lake of an inferior quality, and the
garancine originally employed may also
be treated as above, when a lake slightly
inferior to the first may be obtained.
Maroon Lake. — Take of a mixture
made of:
f Sapan wood )
- j ....
| Lima wood f v " 56 Parts
Soda crystals 42 parts
Alum 56 parts
Extract the color from the woods as for
rose pink, and next boil the soda and
alum together and add to the woods
solution cold. This must be washed
clean before adding to the wood liquor.
Carnation Lake. —
Water 42 gallons
Cochineal 12 pounds
Salts of tartar 1£ pounds
Potash alum f pound
Nitrous acid, nitro-
muriate of tin 44 pounds
Muriatic acid, nitro-
muriate of tin 60 pounds
Pure block tin, nitro-
muriate of tin 22 pounds
Should give specific gravity 1.310.
Boil the water with close steam, taking
care that no iron touches it; add the
cochineal and boil for not more than five
minutes; then turn off the steam and add
salts of tartar and afterwards carefully
add the alum. If it should not rise, put
on steam until it does, pass through a
120-mesh sieve into a settling vat, and let
it stand for 48 hours (not for precipita-
tion). Add gradually nitromuriate of
tin until the test on blotting paper
(given below) shows that the separation
is complete. Draw off clear water after
it has settled, and filter. To test, rub a
little of the paste on blotting paper, then
dry on steam chest or on the hand, and
if on bending it cracks, too much tin
has been used.
To Test the Color to See if it is Pre-
cipitating.— Put a drop of color on white
blotting paper, and if the color spreads, it
is not precipitating. If there is a color-
278
less ring around the spot of color it
shows that precipitation is taking place;
if the white ring is too strong, too much
has been used.
BLACK LAKES FOR WALL-PAPER
MANUFACTURE:
Bluish-Black Lake. —Boil well 220
parts of Domingo logwood in 1,000
parts of water to which 2 parts of am-
monia soda have been added; to the boil-
ing logwood add next 25 parts of green
vitriol and then 3.5 parts of sodium bi-
chromate. The precipitated logwood
lake is washed out well twice and then
filtered.
Black Lake Ai. — Logwood extract,
Sanford, 120 parts; green vitriol, 30
parts; acetic acid, 7° Be., 10 parts; sodium
bichromate, 16 parts; powdered alum,
20 parts. The logwood extract is first
dissolved in boiling water and brought
to 25° Be. by the addition of cold water.
Then the remaining ingredients are
added in rotation, the salts in substance,
finely powdered, with constant stirring.
After the precipitation, wash twice and
filter.
Aniline Black Lake. — In the precipi-
tating vat filled with 200 parts of cold
water enter with constant stirring in the
order mentioned the following solutions
kept in readiness: Forty parts of alum dis-
solved in 800 parts of water; 10 parts of
calcined soda dissolved in 100 parts of
water; 30 .parts of azo black dissolved in
1,500 parts of water; 0.6 parts of "brilliant
green" dissolved in 100 parts of water;
0.24 parts of new fuchsine dissolved in 60
parts of water; 65 parts of barium
chloride dissolved in 1,250 parts of
water. Allow to settle for 24 hours, wash
the lake three times and filter it.
Carmine Lake for Wall Paper and
Colored Papers. — Ammonia soda (98 per
cent), 57.5 parts by weight; spirits (96
per cent), 40 parts by weight; corallin
(dark), 10 parts by weight; corallin
(pale), 5 parts by weight; spirit of sal
ammoniac (16° Be.), 8 parts by weight; so-
dium phosphate, 30 parts by weight; stan-
nic chloride, 5 parts by weight; barium
chloride, 75 parts by weight. Dissolve
the corallin in the spirit, and filter the
solution carefully into eight bottles, each
containing 1 part of the above quantity
of spirit of sal ammoniac, and let stand.
The soda should meanwhile be dissolved
in hot water and the solution run into
the stirring vat, in which there is cold
water to the height of 17 inches. Add
the sodium phosphate, which has been
dissolved in a copper vessel, then the
corallin solution, and next the stannic
chloride diluted with 3 pailfuls of cold
water. Lastly the barium chloride solu-
tion is added. The day previous barium
chloride is dissolved in a cask in as little
boiling water as possible, and the recep-
tacle is filled entirely with cold water.
On the day following, allow the same to
run in slowly during a period of three-
fourths of an hour, stir till evening, allow
to settle for 2 days, draw off and filter.
English Pink.—
Quercitron bark. . . . 200 parts
Lime 10 parts
Alum 10 parts
Terra alba 300 parts
Whiting 200 parts
Sugar of lead 7 parts
Put the bark into a tub, slake lime in
another tub, and add the clear limewater
to wash the bark; repeat this 3 times,
letting the bark stand in each water 24
hours. Run liquor into the tub below
and add the terra alba and whiting;
wash well in the top tub and run into
liquor below through a hair sieve, stirring
well.
Dissolve the sugar of lead in warm
water and pour gently into the tub, stir-
ring all the time; then dissolve the alum
and run in while stirring; press slightly,
drop, and dry as required.
Dutch Pink.—
I. — Quercitron bark.. . 200 parts
Lime 20 parts
Alum 20 parts
Whiting 100 parts
Terra alba 200 parts
White sugar of lead 10 parts
II. — Quercitron bark. . . 300 parts
Lime 10 parts
Alum 10 parts
Terra alba 400 parts
Whiting 100 parts
Sugar of lead 7 parts
Put the bark into a tub with cold
water, slake 28 pounds of lime, and add
the limewater to the bark. (This draws
all the color out of the wood.) Dissolve
alum in water and run it into bark
liquor. The alum solution must be just
warm. Dissolve sugar of lead and add it
to above, and afterwards add the terra
alba and whiting. The product should
now be in a pulp, and must be dropped
and dried as required.
Rose Pink.— I.— Light.
Sapan wood 100 parts
Lima 100 parts
Paris white 200 parts
Alum 210 parts
DYES
279
II.— Deep.
Sapan wood 300 parts
Lima 300 parts
Terra alba 400 parts
Paris white 120 parts
Lime 12 parts
Alum 200 parts
III.— Sapan wood 200 parts
Alum 104 parts
Whiting 124 parts
Boil the woods together in 4 waters
and let the products stand until cold;
wash in the whiting and terra alba
through a hair sieve, and afterwards run
in the alum. If a deep color is required
slake 12 pounds lime and run it in at the
last through a hair sieve. Let the alum
be just warm or it will show in the pink.
DYES, COLORS, ETC., FOR TEXTILE
GOODS:
Aniline Black. — This black is pro-
duced by carefully oxidizing aniline hy-
drochloride. The exact stage of oxida-
tion must be carefully regulated or the
product will be a different body (qui-
none). There are several suitable oxi-
dizing agents, such as chromic acid,
potassic bichromate, ferrocyanide of
potassium, etc., but one of the easiest to
manipulate is potassic chlorate, which
by reacting on copper sulphate pro-
duces potassic sulphate and copper
chlorate. This is easily decomposed,
its solution giving off gases at 60° F.
which consist essentially of chloride an-
hydrate. But one of the most useful
agents for the production of aniline
black is yanadate of ammonia, 1 part of
which will do the work of 4,000 parts of
copper. Many other salts besides cop-
per may be .used for producing aniline
black, but the following method is one of
the best to follow in making this dye:
Aniline hydrochlor-
ide 40 parts
Potassic chlorate. ... 20 parts
Copper sulphate. ... 40 parts
Chloride of ammo-
nia (sal ammoniac) 16 parts
Warm water at 60°
F 500 parts
After warming a few minutes the mass
froths up. The vapor should not be
inhaled. Then set aside, and * if the
mass is not totally black in a few hours,
again heat to 60° F., and expose to the air
for a few days, and finally wash away
all the soluble salts and the black is fit
for use.
Aniline Black Substitutes. — I. — Make
a solution of
Aniline (fluid measure) 30 parts
Toluidine (by weight). 10 parts
Pure hydrochloric acid,
B. P. (fluid measure) 60 parts
Soluble gum arabic
(fluid measure) 60 parts
Dissolve the toluidine in the aniline
and add the acid, and finally the mu-
cilage.
II. — Mix together at gentle heat:
Starch paste 13 quarts
Potassic chlorate . . 350 scruples
Sulphate of copper. 300 scruples
Sal ammoniac 300 scruples
Aniline hydrochlor-
ide 800 scruples
Add 5 per cent of alizarine oil, and
then steep it for 2 hours in the dye bath
of red liquor of 2£° Tw. Dye in a
bath made up of $ ounce of rose bengal
and 1^ ounces of red liquor to every 70
ounces of cotton fabric dyed, first enter-
ing the fabric at 112° F., and raising it to
140° F., working for 1 hour, or until the
desirable shade is obtained; then rinse
and dry.
Blush Pink on Cotton Textile.— Rose
bengal or fast pink will give this shade.
The mordant to use is a 5 per cent solu-
tion of stannate of soda and another 5
per cent solution of alum.
Dissolve in a vessel (a) 8£ parts of
chloride of copper in 30 parts of water,
and then add 10 parts chloride of sodium
and 9£ parts liquid ammonia.
In a second vessel dissolve (6) 30 parts
aniline hydrochlorate in 20 parts of water,
and add 20 parts of a solution of gum
arabic prepared by dissolving 1 part of
gum in 2 parts of water.
Finally mix 1 part of a with 4 parts of
6; expose the mixture to the air for a few
days to develop from a greenish to a
black color. Dilute for use, or else dry
the thick compound to a powder.
If new liquor is used as the mordant,
mix 1 part of this with 4 parts of water,
and after working the fabric for 1 to 2
hours in the cold liquor, wring or
squeeze it out and dry; before working
it in the dye liquor, thoroughly wet the
fabric by rinsing it in hot water at a
spring boil; then cool by washing in the
dye bath until the shade desired is at-
tained, and again rinse and dry.
The red liquor or acetate of aluminum
may be made by dissolving 13 ounces of
alum in 69 ounces of water and mixing
this with a solution made by dissolving
7 \ ounces of acetate of lime, also dis-
solved in 69 ounces of water. Stir well,
allow it to settle, and filter or decanter
280
DYEING
off the clear fluid for use, and use this
mixture 2*° Tw.
The fabric is first put into the stannate
of soda mordant for a few minutes, then
wrung out and put into the alum mor-
dant for about the same time; then it is
again wrung out and entered in the dye
bath at 120° F. and dyed to shade de-
sired, and afterwards rinsed in cold
water and dried.
The dye bath is made of £ ounce of
rose bengal per gallon of water. If
fast pink is the dye used, the mordant
used would be Turkey red oil and red
liquor. Use 8 ounces 'of Turkey red oil
per gallon of water. Put the fabric into
this, then wring out the textile and work
in red liquor of 7° Tw. for about 2 hours,
then wring out and dye in a separate
bath made up of cosine, or fast pink, in
water in which a little alum has been dis-
solved.
To Dye Woolen Yarns, etc., Various
Shades of Magenta. — To prepare the dye
bath dissolve 1 pound of roseine in 15
gallons of water. For a concentrated
solution use only 10 gallons of water,
while if a very much concentrated color
is needed, dissolve the dye in methylated
spirit of wine, and dilute this spirituous
tincture with an equal quantity of water.
No mordant is required in using this
color in dyeing woolen goods. The dye-
ing operation consists simply in putting
the goods into the dye bath at 190° F.
and working them therein until the de-
sired shade is obtained, then rinsing in
cold water and drying.
If the water used in preparing the dye
is at all alkaline, make use of the acid
roseine dissolved in water in which a
little sulphuric acid has been mixed, and
work, gradually raising to the boiling
point, and keep up the temperature for
30 minutes, or according to the shade
desired. Put about 20 per cent sul-
phate of soda into the dye oath.
Maroon Dye for Woolens. — To pre-
pare the dye bath, dissolve about 1 pound
of maroon dye in boiling water, with or
without the addition of methylated spirit
of wine. For dark shades dissolve in
boiling water, only slightly acidulated
with hydrochloric acid, and filter before
use. No mordant is required with this
dye when dyeing wool, but for the bright
shade a little curd soap may be dissolved
in the dye bath before proceeding to dye
the wool, while for the dark shade it is
best to put in a little acetate of soda. To
use the dye, first dye in a weak bath and
gradually strengthen it until the desired
shade is obtained, at the same time grad-
ually increasing the temperature until
just below the boiling point.
To Dye Woolens with Blue de Lyons. —
Dissolve 8 ounces of blue dye in 1 gallon
of methylated spirit, which has been
slightly soured with sulphuric acid, and
boil the solution over a water bath until
it is perfectly clear. To prepare the dye
bath, add more or less of the spirituous
tincture to a 10- or 15-gallon dye bath of
water, which has been slightly soured
with sulphuric acid.
Rich Orange on Woolen. — Dissolve 1
pound of phosphine in 15 gallons of
boiling water, and stir the fluid until the
acid has dissolved. No mordant is re-
quired to dye wool. First work the
goods about in a weak solution, and
finally in one of full strength, to which
a little acetate of soda has been added.
Keep up the temperature to just below
the boiling point while working the goods
in the dye bath.
DYEING SILK OR COTTON FABRICS
WITH ANILINE DYES:
Aniline Blue on Cotton. — Prepare a
dye bath by dissolving 1 pound of ani-
line blue (soluble in spirit) in 10 gallons
of water, and set it aside to settle.
Meanwhile prepare a mordant while
boiling 35 ounces of sumac (or 5£
ounces tannic acid in 30 gallons of water)
and then dissolve therein 17 ounces of
curd soap. Boil up and filter. Put the
cotton goods in the hot liquid and let
them remain therein for 12 hours. Then
wring them out and make up a dye bath
of 2J° Tw. with red liquor. Add dye
color according to the shade desired.
Put in the goods and work them until the
color is correct, keeping the temperature
at the boiling point.
To Dye Silk a Delicate Greenish Yel-
low.— Dissolved ounces of citronine in 1
gallon of methylated spirit and keep the
solution hot over a water bath until per-
fectly clear.
To prepare silk fabrics, wash them in
a weak soap liquor that has been just
sweetened (i. e., its alkalinity turned to
a slight sourness) with a little sulphuric
acid. Work the goods until dyed to
shade, and then rinse them in cold water
that has been slightly acidulated with
acetic, tartaric, or citric acid.
To Dye Cotton Dark Brown.— Pre-
pare a mordant bath of 10 pounds of
catechu, 2 pounds of logwood extract,
and J pound magenta (roseine), and
bring to a boil; work the goods therein
for 3 hours at that temperature; then put
DYEING
into a fresh dye bath made up of 3
pounds of bichromate of potash and 2
pounds of sal soda, and dye to shade.
These proportions are for a dye bath to
dye 100 pounds of cotton goods at a time.
To Dye Silk Peacock Blue.— Make up
a dye bath by putting 1 pint of sul-
phuric acid at 170° Tw., and 10 ounces
of methylin blue crystal dye liquor of
120° to 160° Tw., with a dye bath that
will hold 80 pounds of goods. Put in
the silk at 130° F., and raise to 140° F.,
and work up to shade required.
To Dye Felt Goods. — Owing to this
material being composed of animal and
vegetable fiber it is not an easy matter al-
ways to produce evenness of shade. The
best process to insure success is to steep
well the felt in an acid bath of from 6°
to 12° \Be., and then wash away all traces
of acid. Some dyers make the fulling
stork the medium of conveying the dye,
while others partially dye before fulling,
or else dye after that process.
The fulling stock for 72 ounces of
beaver consists of a mixture of
Black lead or plum-
bago ............. 16 ounces
Venetian red ........ 48 ounces
Indigo extract (fluid) . 5 ounces
Ordinary Drab. —
Common plumbago. . 12 ounces
Best plumbago ...... 12 ounces
Archil extract (fluid).. 15 ounces
Indigo extract ....... 10 ounces
Mix into fluid paste with water and add
sulphuric acid at 30° Tw. For the dye
liquor make a boiling-hot solution of the
aniline dye and allow it to cool; then put
into an earthenware vessel holding water
and heat to 83° F., and add sufficient dye
liquor to give the quantity of felt the de-
sired shade. First moisten well the felted
matter (or the hair, if dyed before felting)
with water, and then work it about in
the above dye bath at 140° F. To
deepen the shade, add more dye liquor,
lifting out the material to be dyed before
adding the fresh dye liquor, so that it can
be well stirred up and thoroughly mixed
with the exhausted bath.
Brown Shades. — Bismarck brown will
ive good results, particularly if the
yed goods are afterwards steeped or
passed through a weak solution (pale
straw color) of bichromate of potash.
This will give a substantial look to the
color. Any of the aniline colors suitable
for cotton or wool, or those suited for
mixed cotton and wool goods may be
used.
g
d
Blue. — Use either China blue, dense
ferry blue, or serge blue, first making
the material acid before dyeing.
Green. — Use brilliant green and have
the material neutral, i. e., neither acid nor
alkali; or else steep in a bath of sumac
before dyeing.
Plum Color. — Use maroon (neutral or
acid) and work in an acid bath or else
sumac.
Black. — Use negrosin in an acid bath,
or else mordant in two salts and dye
slightly acid.
Soluble Blue, Ball Blue, etc.— A solu-
ble blue has for many years been readily
obtainable in commerce which is similar
in appearance to Prussian blue, but, un-
like the latter, is freely soluble in water.
This blue is said to be potassium ferri-
ferrocyanide.
To prepare instead of buying it ready
made, gradually add to a boiling solu-
tion of potassium ferricyanide (red prus-
siate of potash) an equivalent quantity
of hot solution of ferrous sulphate, boil-
ing for 2 hours and washing the precip-
itate on a filter until the washings assume
a dark-blue color. The moist precipitate
can at once be dissolved by the further
addition of a sufficient quantity of water.
About 64 parts of the iron salt is neces-
sary to convert 100 parts of the potassium
salt into the blue compound.
If the blue is to be sent out in the
liquid form, it is desirable that the solu-
tion should be a perfect one. To attain
that end the water employed should be
free from mineral substances, and it is
best to filter the solution through several
thicknesses of fine cotton cloth before
bottling; or if made in large quantities
this method may be modified by allow-
ing it to stand some days to settle, when
the top portion can be siphoned off for
use, the bottom only requiring filtration.
The ball blue sold for laundry use
consists of ultramarine. Balls or tablets
of this substance are formed by mixing
it with glucose or glucose and dextrin,
and pressing into shape. When glucose
alone is used, the product has a tendency
to become soft on keeping, which tend-
ency may be counteracted by a proper
proportion of dextrin. Bicarbonate of
sodium is added as a filler to cheapen
the product, the quantity used and the
quality of the ultramarine employed
being both regulated by the price at
which the product is to sell.
New Production of Indigo. — Forty
parts of a freshly prepared ammonium
sulphide solution containing 10 per cent
DYEING— EGGS
of hydrogen sulphide are made to flow
quickly and with constant stirring into
a heated solution of 20 parts of isatine
apilide in 60 parts of alcohol. With
spontaneous heating and temporary
green and blue coloration, an immediate
separation of indigo in small crystalline
needles of a faint copper luster takes
place. Boil for a short time, whereupon
the indigo is filtered off, rewashed with
alcohol, and dried.
To Dye Feathers. — A prerequisite to
the dyeing of feathers appears to be soft-
ening them, which is sometimes accom-
plished by soaking them in warm water,
and sometimes an alkali, such as ammo-
nium or sodium carbonate, is added.
This latter method would apparently be
preferable on account of the removal of
any greasy matter that may be present.
When so prepared the feathers may be
dyed by immersion in any dye liquor.
An ol'd-time recipe for black is immersion
in a bath of ferric nitrate suitably diluted
with water, and then in an infusion of
equal parts of logwood and quercitron.
Doubtless an aniline dye would prove
equally efficient and would be less trou-
blesome to use.
After dyeing, feathers are dipped in an
emulsion formed by agitating any bland
fixed oil with water containing a little
potassium carbonate, and are then dried
by gently swinging them in warm air.
This operation gives the gloss.
Curling where required is effected by
slightly warming the feathers before a
fire, and then stroking with a blunt me-
tallic edge, as the back of a knife. A
certain amount of manual dexterity is
necessary to carry the whole process to
a successful ending.
DYES FOR FOOD:
See Foods.
DYES FOR LEATHER:
See Leather.
DYE STAINS, THEIR REMOVAL
FROM THE SKIN:
See Cleaning Preparations and Meth-
ods.
DYNAMITE:
See Explosives.
EARTHENWARE:
See Ceramics.
EAU DE QUININE:
See Hair Preparations.
EBONY:
See Wood.
EBONY LACQUER:
See Lacquers.
ECZEMA DUSTING POWDER FOR
CHILDREN.
Starch, French chalk, lycopodium, of
each, 40 parts; bismuth subnitrate, 2
parts; salicylic acid, 2 parts; menthol, 1
part. Apply freely to the affected parts.
Eggs
The age of eggs may be approximately
judged by taking advantage of the fact
that as they grow old their density de-
creases through evaporation of moisture.
According to Siebel, a new-laid egg
placed in a vessel of brine made in the
proportion of 2 ounces of salt to 1 pint of
water, will at once sink to the bottom.
An egg 1 day old will sink below the
surface, but not to the bottom, while one
3 days old will swim just immersed in
the liquid. If more than 3 days old the
egg will float on the surface, the amount
of shell exposed increasing with age; and
if 2 weeks old, only a little of the shell
will dip in the liquid.
The New York State Experiment Sta-
tion studied the changes in the specific
gravity of the eggs on keeping and found
that on an average fresh eggs had a
specific gravity of 1.090; after they were
10 dayc old, of 1.072; after 20 days, of
1.053; and after 30 days, of 1.035. The
test was not continued further. The
changes in specific gravity correspond to
the changes in water content. When
eggs arc kept they continually lose water
by evaporation through the pores in the
shell. After 10 days the average loss
was found to be 1.60 per cent of the
total water present in the egg when per-
fectly fresh; after 20 days, 3.16 per cent;
and after 30 days, 5 per cent. The aver-
age temperature of the room where the
eggs were kept was 63.8° F. The evap-
oration was found to increase somewhat
with increased temperature. None of
the eggs used in the 30-day test spoiled.
Fresh eggs are preserved in a number
of ways which may, for convenience, be
grouped under two general classes: (1)
Use of low temperature, i. e., cold stor-
age; and (2) excluding the air by coating,
covering, or immersing the eggs, some
material or solution being used which
may or may not be a germicide. The
two methods are often combined. The
EGGS
first method owes its value to the fact
that microorganisms, like larger forms
of plant life, will not grow below a cer-
tain temperature, the necessary degree of
cold varying with the species. So far as
experiment shows, it is impossible to kill
these minute plants, popularly called
"bacteria" or "germs," by any degree of
cold; and so, very low temperature is
unnecessary for preserving eggs, even if
it were not undesirable for other reasons,
such as injury by freezing and in-
creased cost. According to a report of
the Canadian commission of agriculture
and dairying:
Eggs are sometimes removed from the
shells and stored in bulk, usually on a
commercial scale, in cans containing
about 50 pounds each. The tempera-
ture recommended is about 30° F., or a
little below freezing, and it is said they
will keep any desired length of time.
They must be used soon after they have
been removed from storage and have
been thawed.
Water glass or soluble glass is the
popular name for potassium silicate, or
sodium silicate, the commercial article
often being a mixture of the two. The
commercial water glass is used for pre-
serving eggs, as it is much cheaper
than the chemically pure article which
is required for many scientific pur-
poses. Water glass is commonly sold in
two forms, a syrup-thick liquid of about
the consistency of molasses, and a pow-
der. The thick syrup, the form perhaps
most usually seen, is sometimes sold
wholesale as low as If cents per pound
in carboy lots. The retail price varies,
though 10 cents per pound, according to
the North Dakota Experiment Station,
seems to be the price commonly asked.
According to the results obtained at this
station a solution of the desired strength
for preserving eggs may be made by dis-
solving 1 part of the syrup-thick water
glass in 10 parts, by measure, of water.
If the water-glass powder is used, less is
required for a given quantity of water.
Much of the water glass offered for sale
is very alkaline. Such material should
not be used, as the eggs preserved in it
will not keep well. Only pure water
should^be used in making the solution,
and it is best to boil it and cool it before
mixing with the water glass.
The solution should be carefully
poured over the eggs packed in a suit-
able vessel, which must be clean and
sweet, and if wooden kegs or barrels are
used they should be thoroughly scalded
before packing the eggs in them. The
packed eggs should be stored in a cool
place. If they are placed where it is too
warm, silicate deposits on the shell and
the eggs do not keep well. The North
Dakota Experiment Station found it best
not to wash the eggs before packing, as
this removes the natural mucilaginous
coating on the outside of the shell. The
station states that 1 gallon of the solution
is sufficient for 50 dozen eggs if they are
properly packed.
It is, perhaps, too much to expect that
eggs packed in any way will be just as
satisfactory for table use as the fresh
article. The opinion seems to be, how-
ever, that those preserved with water
glass are superior to most of those pre-
served otherwise. The shells of eggs
preserved in water glass are apt to crack
in boiling. It is stated that this may be
prevented by puncturing the blunt end
of the egg with a pin before putting it
into the water.
To Discover the Age of Eggs.— The
most reliable method of arriving at the
age of hens' eggs is that by specific
gravity. Make a solution of cooking salt
(sodium chloride) in rain or distilled
water, of about one part of salt to two
parts of water, and in this place the eggs
to be tested. A perfectly fresh egg (of
from 1 to 36 hours old) will sink com-
pletely, lying horizontally on the bottom
of the vessel; when from two to three
days old, the egg also sinks, but not to the,
bottom, remaining just below the sur-
face of the water, with a slight tendency
of the large end to rise. In eggs of four
or five days old this tendency of the large
end to rise becomes more marked, and it
increases from day to day, until at the
end of the fifth day the long axis of the
egg (an imaginary line drawn through
the center lengthwise) will stand at an
angle of 20° from the perpendicular.
This angle is increased daily, until at the
end of the eighth day it is at about 45°;
on the fourteenth day it is 60°; on the
twenty-first day it is 75°, while at the end
of 4 weeks the egg stands perfectly up-
right in the liquid, the point or small
end downward.
This action is based on the fact that
the air cavity in the big end of the egg
increases in size and capacity, from day
to day, as the egg grows older. An ap-
paratus (originally devised by a German
poultry fancier) based on this principle,
and by means of which the age of an egg
maintained at ordinary temperature may
be told approximately to within a day, is
made by placing a scale of degrees, drawn
from 0° to 90° (the latter representing
the perpendicular) behind the vessel con-
284
EGGS
taining the solution, and observing the
angle made by the axis of the egg with
the perpendicular line. This gives the
age of the egg with great accuracy.
Weights of Eggs.— The following
table shows the variation in weight be-
tween eggs of the same family of chickens
and of the comparative value of the
product of different kinds of fowls:
Common hen,
Common hen,
Common hen,
Italian hen. .
Houdan
LaFlesche. . .
Brahma. . .
small
mean
large
Weight of
Whole Eggs, Shell,
Grains, Grains.
, 635 . 60
. . 738.35
. . 802.36
. 840 . 00
. . 956.60
926.50
84.86
92.58
93.25
92.50
93.50
94.25
______ ______
1,025.50 114.86
Net.
550.54
645.77
709.11
747.50
853.10
835.25
910.64
From this it will be seen that the
Houdans and Brahmas are the most
profitable producers, as far as food value
of the product is concerned — provided,
of course, they are equally prolific with
the ordinary fowl.
Another calculation is the number of
eggs to the pound, of the various weights.
This is as follows:
Small ordinary eggs
(635 grains) ..... 12.20 to pound
Large ordinary eggs
(802 grains) ..... 9 . 25 to pound
Houdan eggs ...... 8.0 to pound
Brahma, mean ---- 7.4 to pound
Brahma, large ..... 7.1 to pound
Dried Yolk of Egg. — To prepare this,
the yolks of eggs, separated from the
whites, are thoroughly mixed with £
their weight of water. The resulting
emulsion is strained and evaporated
under reduced pressure at a tempera-
ture of 87° to 122° F., to a paste. The
latter is further dried over quicklime or
a similar absorbent of moisture, at a
temperature of 77° to 86° F., and ground
to a fine powder.
Egg Oil.—
Yolks of eggs (about
250) ............ 5.0 parts
Distilled water ...... 0.3 parts
Beat this together and heat the mass
with constant stirring in a dish on the
water bath until it thickens and a sample
exhibits oil upon pressing between the
fingers. Squeeze out between hot plates,
mix the turbid oil obtained with 0.05
parts of dehydrated Glauber's salt, shake
repeatedly, and finally allow to settle.
Tne oil, which must be decanted clear
from the sediment, gives a yield of at
least 0.5 parts of egg oil,
Artificial Egg Oil.—
Yellow beeswax 0.2 parts
Cacao oil 0.5 parts
Melt on the water bath and gradually
add 9 parts of olive oil.
Egg Powder. —
Sodium bicarbonate. . 8 ounces
Tartaric acid 3 ounces
Cream tartar 5 ounces
Turmeric, powdered. 3 drachms
Ground rice 16 ounces
Mix and pass through a fine sieve.
One teaspoonful to a dessertspoonful
(according to article to be made), to be
mixed with each half pound of flour.
The Preservation of Eggs. — The spoil-
ing of eggs is due to the entrance of air
carrying germs through the shells.
Normally the shell has a surface coating
of mucilaginous matter, which prevents
for a time the entrance of these harmful
organisms into the egg. But if this coat-
ing is removed or softened by washing or
otherwise the keeping quality of the egg
is much reduced. These facts explain
why many methods of preservation have
not been entirely successful, and suggest
that the methods employed should be
based upon the idea of protecting and
rendering more effective the natural coat-
ing of the shell, so that air bearing the
germs that cause decomposition may be
completely excluded.
Eggs are often packed in lime, salt, or
other products, or are put in cold storage
for winter use, but such eggs are very far
from being perfect when they come upon
the market. German authorities declare
that water glass more closely conforms
to the requirements of a good preserva-
tive than any of the substances com-
monly employed. A 10 per cent solution
of water glass is said to preserve eggs so
effectually that at the end of three and
one-half months eggs still appeared to be
perfectly fresh. In most packed eggs the
yolk settles to one side, and the egg is
then inferior in quality. In eggs pre-
served in water glass the yolk retained
its normal position in the egg, and in
taste they were not to be distinguished
from fresh, unpacked store eggs.
Of twenty methods tested in Germany,
the three which proved most effective
were coating the eggs with vaseline, pre-
serving them in limewater, and preserving
them in water glass. The conclusion was
reached that the last is preferable, be-
cause varnishing the eggs with vaseline
takes considerable time, and treating
them with limewater is likely to give the
eggs a limy flavor*
EGGS— EKTOGAN
285
Other methods follow:
I. — Eggs can be preserved for winter
use by coating them, when perfectly
fresh, with paraffine. As the spores of
fungi get into eggs almost as soon as
they are laid, it is necessary to rub every
egg with chloroform or wrap it a few
minutes in a chloroform soaked rag be-
fore dipping it into the melted paraffine.
If only a trace of the chloroform enters the
shell the development of such germs as
may have gained access to freshly laid
eggs is prevented. The paraffine coating
excludes all future contamination from
germ-laden air, and with no fungi grow-
ing within, they retain their freshness and
natural taste.
II. — Preserving with Lime. — Dissolve
in each gallon of water 12 ounces of
quicklime, 6 ounces of common salt, 1
drachm of soda, | drachm saltpeter, £
drachm tartar, and 1 J drachms of borax.
The fluid is brought into a barrel and
sufficient quicklime to cover the bottom
is then poured in. Upon this is placed a
layer of eggs, quicklime is again thrown
in and so on until the barrel is filled so
that the liquor stands about 10 inches
deep over the last layer of eggs. The
barrel is then covered with a cloth, upon
which is scattered some lime.
III. — Melt 4 ounces of clear beeswax
in a porcelain dish over a gentle fire, and
stir in 8 ounces of olive oil. Let the
solution of wax in oil cool somewhat, then
dip the fresh eggs one by one into it so
as to coat every part of the shell. A
momentary dip is sufficient, all excess of
the mixture being wiped off with a cotton
cloth. The oil is absorbed in the shell,
the wax hermetically closing all the pores.
IV. — The Reinhard method is said to
cause such chemical changes in the sur-
face of the eggshell that it is closed up
perfectly air-tight and an admittance of
air is entirely excluded, even in case of
long-continued storing. The eggs are
for a short time exposed to the direct
action of sulphuric acid, whereby the
surface of the eggshell, which consists
chiefly of lime carbonate, is transformed
into lime sulphate. The dense texture
of the surface thus produced forms a
complete protection against the access of
the outside air, which admits of storing
the egg for a very long time, without the
contents of the egg suffering any disad-
vantageous changes regarding taste and
odor. The egg does not require any
special treatment to prevent cracking on
boiling, etc.
Some object to this on the ground that
sulphuric acid is a dangerous poison,
that might, on occasion, penetrate the
shell.
V. — Take about half a dozen eggs and
place them in a netting (not so many as
would chill the water below the boiling
point, even for an instant), into a boiling
olution of boric acid, withdraw imme-
diately, and pack. Or put up, in oil,
carrying 2 per cent or 3 per cent of sali-
cylic acid. Eggs treated in this way are
said to taste, after six months, absolutely
as fresh as they were when first put up.
The eggs should be as fresh as possible,
and should be thoroughly clean before
dipping. The philosophy of the process
is that the dipping in boiling boric acid
solution not only kills all bacteria exist-
ing on, or in, the shell and membrane,
but reinforces these latter by a very thin
layer of coagulated albumen; while the
packing in salicylated oil prevents the
admission of fresh germs from the at-
mosphere. Salicylic acid is objected to
on the same grounds as sulphuric acid.
VI. — Dissolve sodium silicate in boil-
ing water, to about the consistency of a
syrup (or about 1 part of the silicate tc
3 parts water). The eggs should be as
fresh as possible, and must be thoroughly
clean. They should be immersed in the
solution in such manner that every part
of each egg is covered with the liquid, then
removed and let dry. If the solution is
kept at or near the boiling temperature,
the preservative effect is said to be much
more certain and to last longer.
EGG CHOCOLATE:
See Beverages.
EGG DYES:
See Dyes.
EGG LEMONADE:
See Beverages, under Lemonade.
EGG PHOSPHATE:
See Beverages.
EGG-STAIN REMOVER:
See Gleaning Preparations and Meth«
ods.
EGGS, TESTS FOR:
See Foods.
EIKONOGEN DEVELOPER;
See Photography.
EKTOGAN:
See Antiseptics.
286
ELECTROPLATING AND ELECTROTYPING
ELAINE SUBSTITUTE.
A substitute for elaine for woolen
yarns is obtained by boiling 4 pounds
carrageen moss in 25 gallons water for
3 hours. The soda is then put in and
the boiling continued for another half hour;
2 pounds fleabane seeds are gradually
added, and a little water to make up for
the evaporation. After a further 1£
hours boiling, the extract is passed
through a fine sieve and well mixed with
25 pounds cottonseed oil, 12£ pounds
sweet oil, and 12| pounds ammonia
solution of 0.96 specific gravity. Next
day stir in 25 pounds saponified elaine
and 13 pounds of odorless petroleum of
0.885 specific gravity. The resulting
emulsion keeps well, dissolves perfectly
in lukewarm water, and answers its pur-
pose excellently.
ELECTRODEPOSITION PROCESSES:
See Plating.
ELECTROLYSIS IN BOILERS:
See Boiler Compounds.
Electroplating and Electro-
typing
(See also Plating.)
PROCESS OF ELECTROPLATING.
First, clean the articles to be plated.
To remove grease, warm the pieces be-
fore a slow fire of charcoal or coke, or in
a dull red stove. Delicate or soldered
articles should be boiled in a solution of
caustic potash, the latter being dissolved
in 10 times its weight of water.
The scouring bath is composed of 100
parts of water to from 5 to 20 parts of
sulphuric acid. The articles may be
put in hot and should be left in the
bath till the surface turns to an ocher
red tint.
The articles, after having been cleansed
of grease by the potash solution, must be
washed in water and rinsed before being
scoured. Copper or glass tongs must
then be used for moving the articles, as
they must not afterwards be handled.
For small pieces, suitable earthenware
or porcelain strainers may be used.
The next stage is the spent nitric acid
bath. This consists of nitric acid weak-
ened by previous use. The articles are
left in until the red color disappears, so
that after rinsing they show a uniform
metallic tint. The rinsing should be
thoroughly carried out.
Having been well shaken and drained,
the articles are next subjected to the
strong nitric acid bath, which is made up
as follows:
Nitric acid of 36° Be. . 100 volumes
Chloride of sodium
(common salt) 1 volume
Calcined soot (lamp-
black) 1 volume
The articles must be immersed in this
bath for only a few seconds. Avoid over-
heating or using too cold a bath. They
are next rinsed thoroughly with cold water
and are again subjected to a strong nitric
acid bath to give them a bright or dull
appearance as required.
To produce a bright finish, plunge
them for a few seconds (moving them
about rapidly at, the same time) in a cold
bath of the following composition:
Nitric acid 100 volumes
Sulphuric acid 100 volumes
Chloride of sodium.. . 1 volume
Again rinse thoroughly in cold water.
The corresponding bath giving a dull
or matt appearance is composed of:
Nitric acid 200 volumes
Sulphuric acid 100 volumes
Sea salt 1 volume
Sulphate of zinc. . . 1 to 5 volumes
The duration of immersion in this bath
varies from 5 to 20 minutes, according to
the dullness required. Wash with plenty
of water. The articles will then have an
unpleasant appearance, which will disap-
pear on plunging them for a moment into
the brightening bath and rinsing quickly.
The pieces are next treated with the
nitrate of mercury bath for a few seconds.
Plain water 10,000 parts
Nitrate of mercury 10 parts
Sulphuric acid 20 parts
It is necessary to stir this bath before
using it. For large articles the propor-
tion of mercury should be greater. An
article badly cleaned will come out in
various shades and lacking its metallic
brightness. It is better to throw a spent
bath away than attempt to strengthen it.
The various pieces, after having passed
through these several processes, are then
ready for the plating bath.
A few words on the subject of gilding
may not be amiss. Small articles are gilded
hot, large ones cold. The cold cyanide
of gold and potassium bath is composed
as follows:
Distilled water 10,000 parts
Pure cyanide of po-
tassium . . 200 parts
Pure gold 100 parts
The gold, transformed into chloride,
is dissolved in 2,000 parts of water and
ELECTROPLATING AND ELECTROTYPING
287
the cyanide in 8,000 parts. The two so-
lutions are then mixed and boiled for
half an hour.
The anode must be entirely submerged
in the bath, suspended from platinum
wires and withdrawn immediately the
bath is out of action.
Hot Gold Bath.— Zinc, tin, lead,
antimony and the alloys of these metals
are better if previously covered with
copper.
The following are the formulas for the
other metals per 10,000 parts of distilled
water:
Crystallized phosphate of soda, 600
parts; alloys rich in copper castings, 500
parts.
Bisulphide of soda, 100 parts; alloys
rich in copper, 125 parts.
Pure cyanide of potassium, 10 parts;
alloys rich in copper, 5 parts. Pure gold
transformed into chloride, 10 parts; alloys
rich in copper, 10 parts.
Dissolve the phosphate of soda hot in
8,000 parts water, let the chloride of gold
cool in 1,000 parts water; mix little by
little the second solution with the first;
dissolve the cyanide and bisulphide in
1,000 parts water and mix this last solu-
tion with the other two. The tempera-
ture of the bath may vary between 122°
and 175° F.
Silvering. — For amateurs a bath of 10
parts silver per 1,000 is sufficient. Dis-
solve 150 parts nitrate of silver, equiva-
lent to 100 parts pure silver, in 10,000
parts of water and add 250 parts pure
cyanide of potassium. Stir it up until
completely dissolved, and then filter the
solution. Silvering is generally effected
cold, except in the case of small articles.
Iron, steel, zinc, lead, and tin are better
if previously copper-plated and then
silvered hot. The cleaned articles are
first treated in a nitrate of mercury bath,
being kept continually in motion.
With excess of current the pieces be-
come gray, and blacken. In the cold
bath anodes of platinum or silver should
be employed. Old baths are, in this
case, preferable to new. They may, if
required, be artificially aged by the addi-
tion of 1 or 2 parts in 1,000 of liquid am-
monia.
If the anode blackens, the bath is too
weak. If it becomes white, there is too
much current, and the deposit, being too
rapid, does not adhere. The deposit may
be taken as normal and regular when the
anode becomes gray during the passage
of the current and white again when it
ceases to flow.
The nickel vat should be of glass,
porcelain, or earthenware, or a case
lined with impermeable gum. The best
nickel bath is prepared by dissolving to
saturation, in hot distilled water, nickel
sulphate and ammonium, free from ox-
ides or alkalies and alkaline earthy metals.
The proportion of salt to dissolve is 1
part, by weight, to 10 of water. Filter
after cooling and the bath is then ready
for use.
When the bath is ready and the bat-
tery- set up, the wires from the latter are
joined by binding screws to two metal bars
resting on the edge of the vat. The bar
joined to the positive pole of the battery
supports, through the intervention of a
nickel-plated copper hook, a plate of
nickel, constituting the soluble anode,
which restores to the bath the metal de-
posited on the cathode by the electro-
lytic action. From the other bar are
suspended the articles to be plated.
These latter should be well polished be-
fore being put into the bath. To remove
all grease, scrub them with brushes soaked
in a hot solution of whiting, boiled in
water and carbonate of soda.
Copper and its alloys are cleaned well
in a few seconds by immersion in a bath
composed of 10 parts, by weight, of water,
and 1 part of nitric acid. For rough ar-
ticles, 2 parts water, 1 nitric acid, and 1
sulphuric acid. For steel and polished
castings, 100 parts water to 1 sulphuric
acid. The articles should remain in the
bath until the whole surface is of a uni-
form gray tint. They are then rubbed
with powdered pumice stone till the solid
metal appears. Iron and steel castings
are left in the bath for three or four
hours and then scrubbed with well-sifted
sand.
If the current be too strong, the nickel
is deposited gray or even black. An
hour or so is time enough to render the
coat sufficiently thick and in a condition
to stand polishing. When the articles
are removed from the bath they are
washed in water and dried in hot saw-
dust.
To polish the articles they should be
taken in one hand and rubbed rapidly
backward and forward on a strip of cloth
soaked in polishing powder boiled in
water, the cloth being firmly fixed at one
end and held in the other hand. The
hollow parts are polished by means of
cloth pads of various sizes fixed on sticks.
These pads must be dipped in the pol-
ishing paste when using them. The arti-
cles, when well brightened, are washed
in water to get rid of the paste and the
wool threads, and finally dried in saw-
dust.
288
ELECTROTYPING— EMBALMING FLUIDS
SOME NOTES ON ELECTROTYPING,
PLATING, AND GILDING.
The first step in the process is the prep-
aration of the mold. The substance
originally used for the construction of
this was plaster of Paris. This sub-
stance is, however, porous and must be
rendered impermeable. The materials
most commonly used of later years are
stearine, wax, marine glue, gelatin,
india rubber, and fusible alloys. With
hollow molds it is a good plan to arrange
an internal skeleton of platinum, for
ultimate connection with the anodes, in
order to secure a good electrical contact
with all parts of the mold. When cov-
ering several pieces at once, it is as well to
connect each of them with the negative
pole by an iron or lead wire of suitable
dimensions.
Having prepared the molds in the
usual way — by obtaining an impression
in the material when soft, and allowing
it to set — they should be given a metallic
coating on their active surfaces of pure
powdered plumbago applied witn a
polishing brush.
For delicate and intricate objects, the
wet process is most suitable. It consists
in painting the object with two or more
coats of nitrate of silver and ultimately
reducing it by a solution of phosphorus
in bisulphide of carbon.
The plating baths are prepared as
follows:
A quantity of water is put in a jar and
to it is added from 8 to 10 parts in 100
of sulphuric acid, in small quantities,
stirring continually in order to dissipate
the heat generated by the admixture of
acid and water. Sulphate of copper
(bluestone) is then dissolved in the
acidulated water at the normal tempera-
ture until it will take up no more. The
solution is always used cold and must be
maintained in a saturated condition by
the addition of copper sulphate crystals
or suitable anodes.
For use it should be poured into vessels
of clay, porcelain, glass, hard brown
earthenware, or india rubber. For
large baths wood may be used, lined on
the interior with an impervious coating
of acid-proof cement, india rubber,
marine glue, or even varnished lead
sheets.
If the solution be too weak and the
current on the other hand be too strong,
the resulting deposit will be of a black
color. If too concentrated a solution
and too weak a current be employed, a
crystalline deposit is obtained. To in-
sure a perfect result, a happy medium in
all things is necessary.
During the process of deposition, the
pieces should be moved about in the bath
as much as possible in order to preserve
the homogeneity of the liquid. If this
be not attended to, stratification and
circulation of the liquid is produced by
the decomposition of the anode, and is
rendered visible by the appearance of
long, vertical lines on the cathode.
For amateurs and others performing
small and occasional experiments, the
following simple apparatus will be ser-
viceable. Place the solution of sulphate
of copper in an earthenware or porcelain
jar, in the center of which is a porous pot
containing amalgamated zinc and a solu-
tion of sulphuric acid and water, about
2 or 3 parts in 100. At the top of the
zinc a brass rod is fixed, supporting a
circle of the same metal, the diameter of
which is between that of the containing
vessel and the porous pot. From this
metallic circle the pieces are suspended
in such a manner that the parts to be
covered are turned toward the porous
pot. Two small horsehair bags filled
with copper sulphate crystals are sus-
pended in the solution to maintain its
saturation.
ELM TEA.
Powdered slippery
elm bark 2 teaspoonfuls
(or the equiva-
lent in whole bar)
Boiling water 1 cup
Sugar, enough.
Lemon juice, enough.
Pour the water upon the bark. When
cool, strain and flavor with lemon juice
and add sugar. This is soothing in case
of inflammation of the mucous mem-
brane.
EMBALMING FLUIDS.
Success in the use of any embalming
fluid depends largely on manipulation,
an important part of the process being
the thorough removal of fluid from the
circulatory system before undertaking
the injection of the embalming liquid.
I. — Solution zinc
chloride (U. S.
P.) 1 gallon
Solution sodium
chloride 6
ounces to pint. 6 pints
Solution mercury
bichloride, 1
ounce to pint . . 4 pints
Alcohol 4 pints
Carbolic acid
(pure) 8 ounces
Glycerine 24 fluidounces
EMBALMING FLUIDS— EMULSIFIERS
289
Mix the glycerine and carbolic acid,
then all the other ingredients, when a
clear solution of 3 gallons results, which
is the proper amount for a body weigh-
ing 150 pounds.
II. — Arsenious acid.. .100 parts
Sodium hydrate . 50 parts
Carbolic acid and water, of each
a sufficient quantity.
Dissolve the arsenious acid and the
soda in 140 parts of water by the aid of
heat. When the solution is cold, drop
carbolic acid into it until it becomes
opalescent, and finally add water until
the finished product measures 700 parts.
III. — Salicylic acid. ... 4 drachms
Boric acid 5 drachms
Potassium c a r -
bonate 1 drachm
Oil of cinnamon. 3 drachms
Oil of cloves 3 drachms
Glycerine 5 ounces
Alcohol 12 ounces
Hot water.. . .... 12 ounces
Dissolve the first 3 ingredients in the
water and glycerine, the oils in the
alcohol, and mix the solutions.
IV. — Thymol 15 grains
Alcohol \ ounce
Glycerine. 10 ounces
Water 5 ounces
500 parts
750 parts
350 parts
120 parts
90 parts
V. — Cooking salt
Alum
Arsenious acid.. .
Zinc chloride. . . .
Mercury chloride
Forma 1 d e h y d e
solution, 40 per
cent 6,000 parts
Water, up to 24,000 parts
VI. — Arsenious acid .... 360 grains
Mercuric chloride. 1J ounces
Alcohol 9 ounces
Sol. ac. carbolic, 5
per cent 120 ounces
From 10 to 12 pints are injected into
the carotid artery — at first slowly and
afterwards at intervals of from 15 to 30
minutes.
EMERALD (IMITATION):
See Gems, Artificial.
EMERY:
Emery Grinder.— Shellac, melted to-
gether with emery and fixed to a short
metal rod, forms the grinder used for
opening the holes in enameled watch dials
and similar work. The grinder is gen-
erally rotated with the thumb and fore-
finger, and water is used to lubricate its
cutting part, which soon wears away.
The grinder is reshaped by heating the
shellac and molding the mass while it is
in a plastic condition.
Preparing Emery for Lapping.— To
prepare emery for lapping screw-gages,
plugs, etc., fill a half-pint bottle with
machine oil and flour emery, 7 parts oil
to 1 part emery, by bulk. Mix thoroughly
and let stand for 20 minutes to settle.
Take the bottle and pour off one-half the
contents without disturbing the settlings.
The portion poured off contains only the
finest emery and will never scratch the
work.
For surface lapping put some flour
emery in a linen bag and tie up closely
with a string. Dust out the emery by
striking the bag against the surface plate;
use turpentine for rough lapping and the
dry surface plate for finishing.
Removing Glaze from Emery Wheels.
—If the wheel is not altogether too hard,
it can sometimes be remedied by reduc-
ing the face of the wheel to about \ inch,
or by reducing the speed, or by both.
Emery wheels should be turned off so
that they will run true before using. A
wheel that glazes immediately after it
has been turned off, can sometimes be
corrected by loosening the nut, and al-
lowing the wheel to assume a slightly
different position, when it is again tight-
ened.
Emery Substitute.— For making arti-
ficial emery, 1,634 parts of the following
substances may be employed: Seven hun-
dred and fifty-nine parts of bauxite, 700
parts of coke, and 96 parts of a flux, which
may be a carbonate of lime, of potash,
or of soda, preferably carbonate of lime
on account of its low price. These ma-
terials are arranged in alternate layers
and fused in an oven having a good
draught. They are said to yield an arti-
ficial emery similar to the natural emery
of Smyrna and Naxos, and at low cost.
EMULSIFIERS :
Rosin Soap as an Emulsifier. — The
soap should be made by boiling gently
for 2 hours, in an evaporating dish, a
mixture of 1,800 grains rosin and 300
caustic soda with 20 fluidounces water.
Upon cooling, the soap separates as a
yellow mass, which is drained from the
liquid, squeezed, then heated on a water
bath until it is dry and friable. Fixed
oils may be emulsified by adding 1 ounce
290
EMULSIFIERS— ENAMELING
to a solution of 10 grains soap in 1 ounce
water. Volatile oils require 10 grains
rosin soap, 2£ ounces water, and 2
drachms oil. Creosote requires double
this amount of soap. Thymol may be
rendered miscible with water by dis-
solving 18 grains together with 20 grains
soap in 3 fluidounces alcohol, then add-
ing enough water to make 6 fluidounces.
Of course many other substances may be
emulsified with the same emulsifier.
Yolk of Egg as an Emulsifier.— The
domestic ointment of Unona, consisting of
a mixture of oil and yolk of egg, is mis-
cible in all proportions with water. It is
proposed to utilize this fact by substitu-
ting a diluted ointment for the gum
emulsions in general use, the following
being given as a general formula:
Yolk of egg 10 parts
Balsam Peru 1 to 2 parts
Zinc oxide 5 to 10 parts
Distilled water 100 parts
If desired, 33 parts of vinegar may be
substituted for the same amount of water,
while oil of cade, oil of birch, lianthral or
storax may be substituted for the balsam
Peru, and an equal quantity of talc, mag-
nesium carbonate, sulphur of bismuth
subcarbonate, may be introduced in
place of the oxide of zinc. A further
variation in the character of the liquid
may be introduced by the use of medi-
cated or perfumed waters instead of the
plain distilled water. Where so diluted,
as in the above formula, the yolk of egg
separates out after long standing, but the
mixture quickly reemulsifies upon shaking.
Tar and balsams can be emulsified by
mixing with double their quantity of yolk
of egg, then diluting by the addition of
small quantities of water or milk.
Emulgen. — This emulsifying agent h
the foil owing composition: Gluten, 5;gu
acacia, 5; gum tragacanth, 20; glycerine,
20; water, 50; alcohol, 10. This mixture
forms a clear grayish jelly.
EMULSIONS OF PETROLEUM:
See Petroleum.
Enameling
(See also Ceramics, Glazes, Paints,
Waterproofing, and Varnishes.)
COMMERCIAL ENAMELING.
Commercial enameling includes: (1)
Hollow ware enameling for domestic use;
(2) hollow ware enameling for chemical
as
gum
use; (3) enameling locomotive and other
tubes; (4) enameling drain and water
pipes; (5) signboard enameling.
There is one defect to which all enamel
ware is subject, and that is chipping.
This may be caused by (1) imperfect
mixing of the enamels; (2) imperfect fus-
ing; (3) imperfect pickling of the iron;
(4) rough usage. With ordinary care a
well-enameled article has been known
to last in daily use for 10 or 12 years,
whereas defective enameling, say, on a
sign tablet — which is exempt from rough
usage — may not have a life exceeding
a few months. All enameled articles,
such as hollow ware and sign tablets,
first receive a coating of a composition
chiefly composed of glass called "gray,"
and this is followed by a deposit of
"white," any additional color required
being laid above the white. In the mix-
ing and depositing of these mixtures lie
the secrets of successful enameling. The
"gray" has to be fused not only on but
also into the metal at a bright red — al-
most white — heat, and it is obvious that
its constituents must be arranged and
proportioned to expand and contract in a
somewhat uniform manner with the iron
itself. The "white" has to be fused on
the surface of the gray, but the gray
being much harder is not affected by the
second firing. If it were liquid it would
become mixed with the white and de-
stroy its purity. Frequently, owing to
inferior chemicals, imperfect mixing or
fusing, a second coating of white is nec-
essary, in order to produce a surface of
the necessary purity and luster. The
difficulties of enameling are thus easily
understood. Unless the metals and
chemicals are so arranged and manip-
ulated that their capacities of expansion
and contraction are approximately the
same, inferior work will be produced.
Oxide of iron on the surface of the plates,
inferior chemicals, incorrect mixings,
insufficient or overheating in the process
of fusing, prevent that chemical combi-
nation which is essential to successful
enameling. The coatings will be laid
on and not combined, with the result that
there will be inequalities in expansion
and contraction which will cause the
enamel to chip off immediately if sub-
mitted to anything approaching rough
usage, and in a very short time if sub-
mitted to chemical or ordinary atmos-
pheric conditions.
The manufacture of sign tablets is the
simplest form to which this important art
is adapted. Sign-tablet enameling is,
however, kept as great a secret as any
other type. This branch of the industry
ENAMELING
391
is divided up as follows: (1) Setting the
plates ; (2) scaling and pickling the plates ;
(3) mixing the enamel constituents; (4)
melting the enamel constituents; (5) grind-
ing the enamel constituents; (6) applying
the enamel; (7) drying the enamel coat-
ings; (8) fusing the enamel 01 the ar-
ticles; (9) lettering — including alphabet-
ical and other drawing, spacing, and
artistic art in arrangement; (10) stencil
cutting on paper and stencil metal;
(11) brushing; (12) refusing. Distinctive
branches of this work have distinctive
experts, the arrangement being generally
as follows: Nos. 1 and 2 may or may not
be combined; Nos.< 3 and 5 may or may
not be combined; Nos. 4, 7, 8, and 12
generally combined; No. 6 generally the
work of girls; Nos. 9 and 10 generally com-
bined; No. 11 generally the work of girls
and boys. The twelve processes, there-
fore, require six classes of trained work-
people, and incompetence or carelessness
at any section can only result in imper-
fect plates or "wasters."
A brief description of these processes
will enable the reader to understand the
more detailed and technical description to
follow, and is, therefore, not out of place.
Ordinary iron sheets will do for the man-
ufacture of sign tablets; but a specially
prepared charcoal plate can be had at a
slightly increased price. The latter type
is the best, for in many cases the scaling
and pickling may, to a certain extent, be
dispensed with. To make this article,
however, as complete as possible, we
shall begin from the lowest rung of the
manufacturing ladder — i. e., from the
first steps in the working of suitable iron.
I. — Setting. — The plates may be re-
ceived in sheets, and cut to the required
size at the enameling factory, or, what is
more general, received in sizes according
to specification. The former are more
liable to have buckled slightly or become
dented, and have to be restored to a
smooth and uniform surface by ham-
mering on a flat plate. The operation
seems simple, but an inexperienced oper-
ator may entirely fail to produce the de-
sired result, and, if he does succeed, it is
with the expenditure of a great amount of
time. An expert setter with compara-
tively few and well-directed strokes brings
an imperfect plate into truth and in readi-
ness for the next operation.
II. — Scaling and Pickling. — The an-
nealing of the sheets in special furnaces
loosens the scale, which can then be
easily removed, after which immersion
for some time in diluted sulphuric or
muriatic acid thoroughly cleans the plate.
Firing to a red heat follows, and then a
generous course of scrubbing, and the
last traces of acid are removed by dip-
ping in boiling soda solution. Scouring
with sand and washing in clean water
may follow, and the metal has then a per-
fect and chemically clean surface.
III.— Mixing the Enamel Constitu-
ents.— Ground, foundation, or gray. —
All articles, whether hollow ware or
plates, are operated upon in a very
similar manner. Both require the foun-
dation coating generally called "gray."
The gray constituents vary considerably
in different manufactures; but as regards
the use of lead, it is universally con-
ceded that while it may in many in-
stances be used with advantage in the
enameling of sign tablets, etc., it should
under no circumstances be introduced
into the coating of articles for culinary
purposes, or in which acids are to be
used. The first successful commercial
composition of this covering was: Gullet
(broken glass), carbonate of soda, and
boracic acid. This composition re-
mained constant for many years, but
ultimately gave place to the following:
Gullet, red lead, borax, niter. The borax
and red lead form the fluxes, while the
niter is to " purify " the mass. Some of
the later mixings consist of the follow-
ing: Silica powder, crystallized or cal-
cium borax, white lead, fused together.
This would be called a frit, and with it
should be pulverized powdered silica,
clay, magnesia. This recipe is one re-
quiring a very high temperature for
fusing: Silica powder, borax, fused and
ground with silica, clay, magnesia. This
requires a slightly lower temperature:
Frit of silica powder, borax, feldspar,
fused together, and then ground with
,clay, feldspar, and magnesia.
The approximate quantities of each
constituent will be given later, but it
must always be remembered that no
hard-and-fast line can be laid down.
Chemicals vary in purity, the furnaces
vary in temperature, the pounding, grind-
ing, and mixing are not always done
alike, and each of these exerts a certain
influence on the character of the "melt."
These compositions may be applied to
the metal either in the form of a powder
or of a liquid. Some few years ago the
powder coating was in general use, but
at the present time the liquid form is in
favor, as it is considered easier of ap-
plication, capable of giving a coating
more uniform in thickness and less costly.
In using the powder coating the plate is
rubbed with a cloth dipped in a gum
ENAMELING
solution, and the powder then carefully
dusted through a sieve over the surface.
In this condition the plate is submitted
to the fusing process. In using the liquid
material the plate surface is dipped into
or has the liquid mixing carefully poured
over it, any surplus being drained off, and
any parts which are not to be coated being
wiped clean by a cloth. The coating is
then dried in suitable stoves, after which
it is ready for fusing on to the iron. The
gray coating should be fairly uniform and
smooth, free from holes or blisters, and
thoroughly covering every part of the iron
which is to be subjected to any outside
influence. Cooling slowly is important.
Rapid cooling frequently causes chipping
of the coating, and in any case it will
greatly reduce the tenacity of the con-
nection existing between the glaze and
the metal.
Generally the next surface is a white
one, and it depends upon the class of
article, the character of the enamels, and
the efficiency of application, whether
one coat or two will be required. Rough-
ly speaking, the coating is composed of a
glass to which is added oxide of tin,
oxide of lead, or some other suitable
opaque white chemical. The mixture
must be so constituted as to fuse at a
lower temperature than the foundation
covering. If its temperature of fusion
were the same the result would be that
the gray would melt on the iron and
become incorporated with the white,
thus loosening the attachment of the
mass to the iron and also destroying the
purity of the white itself. Bone ash is
sometimes used, as it becomes uniformly
distributed throughout the melt, and re-
mains in suspension instead of settling.
Bone ash and oxide of lead are, however,
in much less demand than oxide of tin.
The lead is especially falling into dis-
favor, for the following reasons: Firstly,
it requires special and laborious treat-
ment; secondly, it gives a yellowish-
white color; thirdly, it cannot resist the
action of acids. The following is a
recipe which was in very general use for
some years: Glass (cullet), powdered
flint, lead, soda (crystals), niter, arsenic.
Another consists of the folio wing: Borax,
glass, silica powder, oxide of tin, niter,
soda, magnesia, clay. These are fused
together, and when being ground a
mixture of Nos. 1, 3, 7, and boracic acid
is added.
Enamel mixings containing glass or
china are now generally in use, although
for several years the experience of man-
ufacturers using glass was not satisfac-
tory Improved compositions and work-
ing now make this constituent a most
useful, and, in fact, an almost essential
element. The glass should be white
broken glass, and as uniform in char-
acter as possible, as colored glass worn ^
impart a tinge of its own color to tlu
mixing.
The following are two distinct glazes
which do not contain glass or porcelain:
Feldspar, oxide of tin, niter, soda. This
is free from any poisonous body and re-
quires no additions: Silica powder, oxide
of tin, borax, soda, niter, carbonate of
ammonia, or magnesia.
Alkalies. — Of the alkalies which are
necessary to produce complete fusion of
and combination with the quartz, soda
is chiefly applied in enamel manufac-
tures, as the fusing temperature is then
lower.
Bone Ash. — This material will not add
opacity, but only semi-transparency to
the enamel, and is therefore not much
used.
Boracic Acid. — Boracic acid is some-
times substituted for silicic acid, but
generally about 15 per cent of the former
to 85 per cent of the latter is added.
Borax as a flux is, however, much more
easily used and is therefore largely em-
ployed in enamel factories.
Borax. — Calcined borax, that is, borax
from which a large proportion of the
natural moisture has been eliminated, is
best for enamel purposes. It is a flux
that melts at medium heat, and enters
into the formation of the vitreous basis.
Borax has also the property of thorough-
ly distributing oxide colors in the enamels.
Clay. — Only a fairly pure clay can be
used in enamel mixings, and the varieties
of clay available are therefore limited.
The two best are pipe — or white — clay
and china clay — kaolin. The latter is
purer than the former, and in addition to
acting as a flux, it is used to increase the
viscosity of mixings and therefore the
opacity. It is used in much the same
way as oxide of tin.
Cryolite. — Ground cryolite is a white
mineral, easily fusible, and sometimes
used in enamel mixings. It is closely
associated with aluminum.
Cullet. — This is the general material
used as a basis. Clear glass only should
be introduced; and as the compositions
of glass vary greatly, small experimental
frits should always be made to arrive at
the correct quantity to be added.
Feldspar. — The introduction of feld-
spar into an enamel frit increases con-
sistency. The common white variety is
ENAMELING
generally used, and its preliminary treat-
ment by pounding is similar to that
adopted with quartz.
Fluor-Spar. — In this mineral we have
another flux, which fuses at a red heat.
Fluxes. — These are for the purpose of
regulating the temperature of fusion of a
mixing — frit — some being better adapted
for this purpose than others. This, how-
ever, is not the only consideration, for
the character of the flux depends upon
the composition or chemical changes to
which the ingredients are to be subjected.
The fluxes are borax, clays, cullet,
porcelain, feldspar, gypsum, and fluor-
spar.
Glass. — Glass is composed of lime, si-
licic acid, and soda or potash. The use of
the glass is to form the hard, crystal-like
foundation. %
Gypsum. — This mineral is sometimes
used in conjunction with baryta and
fluor-spar.
Lead. — Crystallized carbonate of lead,
or "lead white," is frequently used in
enamels when a low temperature for
fusion is required. It should never be
used on articles to be submitted to chem-
ical action, or for culinary use. Minium
is a specially prepared oxide of lead, and
suitable for enameling purposes, but is
expensive.
Lime. — Lime is in the form of carbon-
ate of calcium when used.
Magnesium Carbonate is used only in
small quantities in enamel mixings. It
necessitates a higher temperature for
fusion, but does not affect the color to the
slightest extent if pure.
Manganese. — As a decolorant, this
mineral is very powerful, and therefore
only small quantities must be used.
Purity of the mineral is essential — i. e.,
it should contain from 95 to 98 per cent
of binoxide of manganese.
Niter. — At a certain temperature niter
shows a chemical change, which, when
affected by some of the other constitu-
ents, assists in the formation of the vitre-
ous base.
Porcelain. — Broken uncolored porce-
lain is sometimes used in enamel man-
ufacture. Its composition: Quartz,
china clay, and feldspar. It increases
viscosity.
Red Lead. — This decolorant is some-
times called purifier. It will, however,
interfere with certain coloring media,
and when this is the case its use should
at once be discontinued.
Silicic Acid. — Quartz, sand, rock crys-
tal, and flint stone are all forms of this
acid in crystallized form. By itself it is
practically infusible, but it can be incor-
porated with other materials to form
mixings requiring varying temperatures
for fusion.
Soda. — The soda in general use is car-
bonate of soda — 58 per cent — or enamel-
ing soda. The latter is specially pre-
pared, so as to free it almost entirely
from iron, and admit of the production of
a pure white enamel when such is re-
quired.
Tin Oxide. — All enamels must contain
white ingredients to produce opacity,
and the most generally used is oxide of
tin. By itself it cannot be fused, but
with proper manipulation it becomes
diffused throughout the enamel mass.
On the quantity added depends the
denseness or degree of opacity imparted
to the enamel.
It will be understood that the enamel
constituents are divided into four dis-
tinct groups : I. Fundamental media.
II. Flux media. III. Decolorant media.
IV. Coloring media. We have briefly
considered the three first named, and we
will now proceed to No. IV. The color-
ing material used is in every case a
metallic oxide, so that, so far as this goes,
the coloring of an enamel frit is easy
enough. Great care is, however, neces-
sary, and at times many difficulties
present themselves, which can only be
overcome by experience. Coloring ox-
ides are very frequently adulterated, and
certain kinds of the adulterants are in-
jurious to the frit and to the finish of the
color.
Comparison of Hollow Ware and Sign-
Tablet Enameling. — The enameling for
sign tablets is much the same as for
hollow ware; the mixings are practically
alike, but, as a general rule, the mixing is
applied in a much more liquid form on
the latter. It is easy to understand that
hollow ware in everyday use receives
rougher usage than tablets. By handling,
it is submitted to compression, expansion,
and more or less violence due to falls,
knocks, etc., and unless, therefore, the
enamel coating follows the changes of
the metal due to these causes, the con-
nection between the two will become
loosened and chipping will take place.
The enamel, therefore, though much
alike for both purposes, should be so
prepared for hollow ware that it will be
capable of withstanding the changes to
which we have referred. In all cases it
must be remembered that the thinner the
coat of the enamel the better it will be
294
ENAMELING
distributed over the iron, and the greater
will be its adherence to the iron. Any
article heavily enameled is always liable
to chip, especially if submitted to the
slightest bending action, and therefore
any excess of material added to a plate
means that it will always be readily
liable to separate from the plate. In
hollow-ware enameling the preparation
of each frit generally receives somewhat
more attention than for plate enameling.
The grinding is more effectively carried
out, in order to remove almost every
possibility of roughness on any part of
the surface, especially the inside surface.
The iron used in tablet and hollow-
ware manufacture is rolled sheet iron.
It is supplied in a variety of qualities.
Charcoal iron is purer than ordinary
plate iron, more ductile, and therefore
capable of being driven out to various
forms and depths by stamping presses.
The surface of the charcoal iron is not so
liable to become oxidized, and therefore
can be more readily made chemically
clean for the reception of the enamels.
Some manufacturers use charcoal plates
for tablet work, but these are expensive;
the ordinary plates, carefully pickled
and cleaned, adapt themselves to the
work satisfactorily.
The sheet irons generally used for the
enameling purposes referred to vary in
gauge. The finer the iron the greater
must be the care used in coating it with
enamel. Thin iron will rapidly become
hot or cool, the temperatures changing
much more quickly than that of the mix-
ing. Unless care, therefore, is used, the
result of fusing will be that the enamel
mass will not have become thoroughly
liquid, and its adherence to the iron will
be imperfect.
If, however, the temperature is gradu-
ally raised to the maximum, and sym-
pathetic combination takes place, the
dangers of rapid cooling are avoided.
Again, the iron, in losing its temperature
more rapidly than the enamel, will con-
tract, thus loosening its contact with the
glaze, and the latter will either then, or
after a short period of usage, chip off.
We then arrive at the f olloAving hard-and-
fast rules: (1) In all classes of enameling,
but particularly where thin iron sheets
are used, the temperature of the plate
and its covering must be raised very
gradually and very uniformly. (2) In all
cases a plate which has had a glaze fused
on its surface must be cooled very gradu-
ally and very uniformly. The importance
of these rules cannot be over-estimated,
and will, therefore, be referred to in a
more practical way later.
In enameling factories no causes are
more prolific in the production of waste
than these, and in many cases the de-
fects produced are erroneously attributed
to something else. Cast iron is much
easier io> enamel than wrought iron.
This is due to the granular character of
its composition. It retains the enamels
in its small microscopic recesses, and
greater uniformity can be arrived at with
greater ease. Cast-iron enameled sign
tablets and hollow ware were at one
time made, but their great weight made
it impossible for them ever to come into
general use.
Wrought-iron plates, if examined mi-
croscopically, will show that they are of
a fibrous structure, the fibers running in
the direction in which they have been
rolled. The enamels, therefore, will be
more liable to flow longitudinally than
transversely, and this tendency will be
more accentuated at some places than at
others. This, however, is prevented by
giving the iron sheets what might be
described as a cast-iron finish. The
sheets to be enameled should be thorough-
ly scoured in all directions by quartz or
flint sand, no part of the surface being
neglected. This thorough scrubbing
will roughen the surface sufficiently to
make it uniformly retentive of enamel
mixture, and in no cases should it be
omitted or carelessly carried out.
Copper Enameling.— On a clean cop-
per surface the enameling process is easy.
The foundation glaze is not essential,
and when required the most beautiful re-
sults of blended colors can be obtained
by very little additional experience to or-
dinary enameling.
When the vase or other article has been
hammered out to the required shape in*
copper, it is passed on to another class of
artisans, who prepare it for the hands of
the enameler. The design or designs
are sketched carefully. The working
appliances consist only of a pointed tool,
two or three small punches of varying
sizes, and a hammer. With this small
equipment the operator sets to work.
The spaces between each dividing line
are gradually lowered by hammering,
and when this has been uniformly com-
pleted, each little recess is ready to re-
ceive its allotment of enamel. More
accurate work even than this can be ob-
tained by the introduction of flat wire.
This wire is soldered or fixed on the vase,
and forms the outline for the entire
design. It may be of brass, copper, or
gold, but is fixed and buWt round every
item of the whole design with the most
ENAMELING
laborious care. It stands above the sur-
face of the design on the copper articles,
but the little recesses formed by it are
then gradually filled up by enamel in
successive fusings. The whole surface
of the article is now ground perfectly
smooth and polished until its luster is
raised to the highest point possible, and
when this stage has been reached the
article is ready for the market.
From the Sheet to the Sign Tablet.—
The plates are generally in lengths of 6
feet by 2 feet, 6 feet by 3 feet, etc., the
gauge generally being from 14 to 22, ac-
cording to the size and class of plates to
be enameled. These must be cut, but
some enamelers prefer to order their
plates in specified sizes, which does away
with the necessity of cutting at the enam-
eling factory. In order, however, to
make this article complete, we will as-
sume that a stock of large plates is kept
on hand, the sizes being 6 feet by 3 feet
and 6 feet by 2 feet. An order for sign
tablets is given; particulars, say as fol-
lows: Length, 2 feet by 12 inches, white
letters on blue ground; lettering, The
Engineer, 33 Norfolk Street; block letters,
no border line, 2 holes. For ordinary
purposes these particulars would be suf-
ficient for the enameler.
Stage I. — Cutting the plate is the first
operation. The plates 6 feet by 2 feet
would first be cut down the center in a
circular cutting machine, thus forming
two strips, 6 feet by 12 inches. Each
strip would then be cut into three lengths
of 2 feet each. If a guillotine had to be
used instead of a circular cutter, the plate
would be first cut transversely at dis-
tances of 2 feet, thus forming three
square pieces of 2 feet by 2 feet. These
would then be subdivided longitudinally
into two lengths each, the pieces being
then 2 feet by 12 inches. Each sheet
would thus be cut into six plates.
Stage II. — The cut plates should next
have any roughness removed from the
edges, then punched with two holes —
one at each end, followed by leveling or
setting. This is done by hammering
carefully on a true flat surface.
Stage III.— The plates should then be
taken and dipped into a hydrochloric
acid bath made up of equal quantities of
the acid and water. The plates are then
raised to a red heat in the stoves, and on
removal it will be found that the scale — •
iron oxide — has become loosened, and
will readily fall off, leaving a clean me-
tallic surface. A second course of clean-
ing then follows in diluted sulphuric
acid — 1 part acid to 20 parts water. In
this bath the iron may be kept for about
12 hours. In some cases a much
stronger bath is used, and the plates are
left in only a very short time. The bath
is constructed of hard wood coated inside
with suitable varnish.
In mixing the sulphuric acid bath it
must be remembered that the acid
should be slowly poured into the water
under continuous stirring. Following
the bath, the metal is rinsed in water,
after which it is thoroughly scoured with
fine flinty sand. Rinsing again follows,
but in boiling water, and then the metal
is allowed to dry. The enameling proc-
ess should immediately follow the dry-
ing, for if kept for any length of time the
surface of the metal again becomes oxi-
dized. In hollow-ware enameling the
hydrochloric acid bath may be omitted.
Stage IV. — The plates are now ready
for the reception of the foundation or
gray coating. If powder is used the
plate is wiped over with a gum solution,
and then the powder is carefully and uni-
formly dusted through a fine sieve over
the surface. The plate is then reversed
and the operation repeated on the other
side. If a liquid "gray" is to be used it
should have a consistency of cream, and
be poured or brushed with equal care
over the two surfaces in succession, after
the plate has been heated to be only just
bearable to the touch. The plates are
then put on rests, or petits, in a drying
stove heated to about 160° F., and when
thoroughly dry they are ready for the
fusing operation. The petits, with the
plates, are placed on a long fork fixed
on a wagon, which can be moved back-
ward and forward on rails; the door of
the fusing oven is then raised and the
wagon moved forward. The fork en-
ters the oven just above fire clay brick
supports arranged to receive the petits.
The fork is then withdrawn and the
door closed. The stove has a cherry-
red, almost white, heat and in a few min-
utes the enamel coating has been uni-
formly melted, and the plates are ready
to be removed on the petits and fork in
the same manner as they were inserted.
Rapid cooling must now be carefully
avoided, otherwise the enamel and the
iron will be liable to separate, and chip-
ping will result. The temperature of
fusion should be about 2,192° F.* When
all the plates have been thus prepared
they are carefully examined and defec-
tive ones laid aside, the others being now
ready for the next operation. ,
* Melting a piece of copper will approximately
represent this temperature.
296
ENAMELING
Stage V. — The coating of the plate
with white is the next stage. The tem-
perature of fusion of the white glaze is
lower than that of the gray, so that the
plate will remain a shorter time in the
stove, or be submitted to a somewhat
lower temperature. The latter system
is to be strongly recommended in order
to prevent any possibility of fusion of the
ground mass. The white should be
made as liquid as possible consistent
with good results. The advantages of
thin coatings have already been explained,
but if the mixing is too thin the ground
coating will not only be irregularly cov-
ered, but, in fusion, bubbles will be pro-
duced, owing to the steam escaping, and
these are fatal to the sale of any kind of
enameled ware. When the plate has been
thoroughly dried and fusion has taken
place, slow and steady cooling is abso-
lutely essential. Special muffles are
frequently built for this purpose, and
their use is the means of preventing a
large number of wasters. Before put-
ting on the glaze, care must be taken to
remove the gray from any part which is
not to be coated. The temperature of
fusion should be about 1,890° F.,* and
the time taken is about 5 minutes.
Stage VI. — The stencil must be cut
with perfect exactitude. The letters
should be as clear as possible, propor-
tioned, and spaced to obtain the best
effects as regards boldness and appear-
ance. Stencils may be cut either from
paper or from specially prepared soft
metal, called stencil metal. The former
are satisfactory enough when only a few
plates are required from one stencil, but
when large quantities are required, say,
60 upward, metal stencils should be used.
The paper should be thick, tough, and
strong, and is prepared in the following
manner: Shellac is dissolved in methy-
lated spirits to the ordinary liquid gum
form, and this is spread over both sides
of the paper with a brush. When thor-
oughly dry a second protective coating is
added, and the paper is then ready for
stencil work. ^The stencil cutter's outfit
consists of suitable knives, steel rule,
scales of various fractions to an inch, a
large sheet of glass on which the cutting
is done, and alphabets and numerals of
various characters and types. For or-
dinary lettering one stencil is enough,
but for more intricate designs 2, 3, and
even 4 stencils may be required. In the
preparation of the plates referred to in the
paragraph preceding Stage I, only 1
* Melting a piece of brass will represent this tem-
perature.
stencil would be necessary. The paper
before preparation would be measured
out to the exact size of the plate, and the
letters would be drawn in. The cutting
would then be done, and the result
shown at Fig. 1 would be obtained, the
THK ENCilNRER
33 NORFOLK S3
Fig. 1
Fig. 2
black parts being cut out. The lines or
corners of each letter or figure should be
perfectly clear and clean, for any flaw in
the stencil will be reproduced on the
plate.
Stage VII. — The next stage is the ap-
plication of the blue enamel. The opera-
tion is almost identical with that of the
white, but when the coating has been
applied and dried, the lettering must be
brushed out before it is fused. The
coating is generally applied by a badger
brush after a little gum water has been
added; the effect of this is to make the
blue more compact.
Stage VIII. — The next operation is
brushing; the stencil is carefully placed
over the plate, and held in position, and
with a small hand brush with hard
bristles the stencil is brushed over. This
brushing removes all the blue coating,
which shows the lettering and leaves the
rest of the white intact. When this has
been done, the stencil is removed and the
connecting ribs of the lettering — some of
which are marked X in Fig. 2 — are then
removed by hand, the instrument gen-
erally being a pointed stick of box or
other similar wood.
Stage IX. — Fusing follows as in the
case of the white glaze, and the plate is
complete. One coat of blue should be
sufficient, but if any defects are apparent
a second layer is necessary.
The white and blue glazes are applied
only on the front side of the plate, the
back side being left coated with gray
only.
From the Sheet to the Hollow Ware.—
In hollow-ware enameling, the iron is
received in squares, circles, or oblongs,
of the size required for the ware to be
turned out. It is soft and ductile, and
by means of suitable punches and dies it
is driven in a stamping press to the neces-
sary shape. For shallow articles only
one operation is necessary, but for deeper
articles from 2 to 6 operations may be
ENAMELING
29?
required, annealing in a specially con-
structed furnace taking place between
each. Following the "drawing" opera-
tions comes that of trimming; this may
be done in a press or spinning lathe, the
object being to trim the edges and re-
move all roughness. The articles are
now ready for enameling. For explana-
tion, let us suppose they are tumblers, to
be white inside, and blue outside. The
gray is first laid on, then the white, and
lastly the blue — that is, after the pickling
and cleaning operations have been per-
formed. The line of demarcation be-
tween the blue, and white must be clear,
otherwise the appearance of the article
will not be satisfactory. The process of
enameling is exactly the same as for
sign-plate enameling, but more care
must be exercised in order to obtain a
smoother surface. While the liquid
enamels are being applied, circular
articles should be steadily rotated in
order to let the coating flow uniformly
and prevent thick and thin places. The
enameling of "whole drawn" ironware
presents no difficulty to the ordinary
enameler, but with articles which are
seamed or riveted, special care and ex-
perience is necessary.
Seamed or riveted parts are, of course,
thicker than the ordinary plate, will ex-
pand and contract differently, will take
longer to heat and longer to cool, and the
conclusion, therefore, that must be ar-
rived at is that the thickness should be
reduced as much as possible, and the
joints be made as smooth as possible.
Unless special precautions are taken,
cracks will be seen on articles of this
kind running in straight lines from the
rivets or seams. To avoid these, the
enamel liquid must be reduced to the
greatest stage of liquidity, the heat must
be raised slowly, and in cooling the
articles should pass through, say, 2 or 3
muffles, each one having a lower temper-
ature than the preceding one. It is now
generally conceded that the slower and
more uniform the cooling process, the
greater will be the durability of the
enamel. Feldspar is an almost abso-
lutely necessary addition to the gray in
successful hollow-ware enameling, and
the compositions of both gray and white
should be such as to demand a high
temperature for fusion. The utensils
with the gray coating should first be
raised to almost a red heat in a muffle,
and then placed in a furnace raised to a
white heat. The white should be treated
similarly, and in this way the time taken
for complete fusion at the last stage will
be about 4 minutes,
The outside enamel on utensils is less
viscous than the inside enamel, and
should also be applied as thinly as pos-
sible.
Stoves and Furnaces. — Fritting and
Fusing. — The best results are obtained
in enameling when the thoroughly ground
and mixed constituents are fused to-
gether, reground, and then applied to
the metal surface. In cheap enamels the
gray is sometimes applied without being
previously melted, but it lacks the dura-
bility which is obtained by thorough
fusion and regrinding. In smelting en-
amel one of two kinds of furnaces may
be used, viz., tank or crucible. The
former is better adapted to the melting
of considerable quantities of ordinary
enamel, while the .latter is more suitable
for smaller quantities or for finer enamels
as the mixture is protected from the
direct action of the flames by covers on
the crucibles. The number of tanks and
crucibles in connection with each furnace
depends upon the heating capacity of
the furnace and upon the out-turn re-
quired. They are so arranged that all or
any of them can be used or put out of use
readily by means of valves and dampers.
Generally, they are arranged in groups of
from 6 to 12, placed in a straight or
circular line, but the object aimed at is
complete combustion of the fuel, and the
utilization of the heat to the fullest ex-
tent. One arrangement is to have the
flame pass along the bottom and sides of
the tank and then over the top to the
chimney.
The general system in use is, however,
the crucible system. The crucibles are
made from the best fire clay, and the
most satisfactory are sold under the name
of "Hessian crucibles." The chief ob-
jection to the use of the crucibles is that
of cost. They are expensive, and in
many factories the life of the crucible is
very short, in some cases not extending
beyond one period of fusion. When this,
however, is the rule rather than the ex-
ception, the results are due to care-
lessness. Sudden heating or cooling
of the crucible will cause it to crack or
fall to pieces, but for this there is no
excuse. Running the molten material
quickly out of the crucible and replacing
it hurriedly with a fresh cold mixing is
liable — in fact, almost certain — to pro-
duce fracture, not only causing the de-
struction of the crucible, but also the loss
of the mixing. New crucibles should
be thoroughly dried in a gentle heat for
some days and then gradually raised
to the requisite temperature which they
298
ENAMELING
must sustain for the purposes of fusion.
Sometimes unglazed porcelain crucibles
specially prepared with a large propor-
tion of china clay are used. These are,
however, expensive and require special
attention during the first melt. The life
of all crucibles can be lengthened by:
(1) Gradually heating them before put-
ting them into the fire; (2) never replac-
ing a frit with a cold mass for the suc-
ceeding one; it should first be heated in a
stove and then introduced into the cru-
cible; (3) carefully protecting the hot
crucibles from cold draughts or rapid
cooling.
Melting and Melting Furnaces. — The
arrangement of the melting furnace must
be such as to protect the whole of the
crucible from chills. The usual pit
furnaces, with slight modifications, are
suitable for this purpose. The crucible
shown at b in Fig. 3 is of the type already
Fig. 3
described; at the top it is fitted with a
lid, a, hinged at the middle, and at the
bottom it is pierced by a 2-inch conical
hole.* The hole, while melting is going
on, is plugged up with a specially pre-
pared stopper. The crucible stands on
* Two inches for gray, one inch for glaze ; the
hole should be wider at the top
a tubular fireproof support, c, which
allows the molten mass to be easily run
off into a tub of water, which is placed in
the chamber, d. The fuel is thrown in
from the top, and the supply must be
kept uniform. From 4 to 6 of these fur-
naces are connected with the same chim-
ney; but before passing to the chimney
the hot gases are in some cases used for
heating purposes in connection with the
drying stove. The plug used may be
either a permanent iron one coated with
a very hard enamel or made from a
composition of quartz pow^der and water.
An uncovered iron plug would be un-
suitable owing to the action of the iron
on the ingredients of the mixing.
In some cases only a very small hole is
made in the crucible and no stopper used,
the fusion of the mixing automatically
closing up the hole. In some other fac-
tories no hole is made in the crucible, and
when fusion is complete the crucible is
removed and the mixing poured out. The
two latter systems are bad; in the first
there is always some waste of material
through leakage, and in the latter the
operation of removing the crucible is
clumsy and difficult, while the exposure
to the colder atmosphere frequently causes
rupture.
The plug used should be connected with
a rod, as shown in Fig. 3, which passes
through a slot in one-half of the hinged
lid, a. . When fusion is complete this half
is turned over, and the plug pulled up,
thus allowing the molten mass to fall
through into the vat of water placed un-
derneath. The mixing in the crucibles,
as it becomes molten, settles down, and
more material can then be added until
the crucible is nearly full. If the mixing
is correctly composed, and has been thor-
oughly fused, it should flow freely from
the crucible when the plug is withdrawn.
Fusing generally requires only to be done
once, but for fine enamels the operation
may be repeated. The running off into
the water is necessary in order to make
the mass brittle and easy to. grind. If
this was not done it would again form
into hard flinty lumps and require much
time and labor to reduce to a powder.
A careful record should be kept of the
loss in weight of the dried material at
each operation. The weighings should
be made at the following points: (1)
Before and after melting; (2) after
crushing.
The time required for melting varies
greatly, but from 6 to 9 hours may be
considered as the extreme limits. Gas
is much used for raising the necessary
heat for melting. The generator may be
ENAMELING
S99
olaced in any convenient position, but
a very good system is to have it in the
center of a battery of muffles, any or all
of which can be brought into use. When
quartz stoppers are used there is con-
siderable trouble in their preparation,
and as each new batch of material re-
quires a fresh stopper, wrought-iron
stoppers have been introduced in many
factories. These are coated with an
enamel requiring a much higher tempera-
ture of fusion than the fundamental sub-
stance, and this coating prevents the iron
having any injurious action on the frit.
Fusing. — For fusing the enamel muffle
furnaces are used; these furnaces are
simple in construction, being designed
specially for: (1) Minimum consumption
of fuel; (2) maximum heat in the muffle;
(3) protection of the inside of the muffle
from dust, draughts, etc.
The muffle furnaces may be of any
size, but in order to economize fuel, it is
obvious that they should be no larger
than is necessary for the class and
quantity of work being turned out. For
sign-plate enameling the interior of the
muffle may be as much as 10 feet by 5
feet wide by 3 feet in height, but a furnace
of this kind would be absolutely ruinous
for a concern where only about a dozen
small hollow-ware articles were enameled
at a time. The best system is to have
2 or 3 muffle furnaces of different dimen-
sions, as in this way all or any one of
them can be brought into use as the
character and number of the articles
may require. The temperature through-
out the muffle is not uniform, the end
next to the furnace being hotter than
that next to the door. In plate enamel-
ing it is therefore necessary that the
plates should be turned so that uniform
fusion of the enamel may take place. In
the working of hollow ware the articles
should be first placed at the front of the
muffle and then moved toward the back.
The front of the furnace is closed in by a
vertically sliding door or lid, and in this
an aperture is cut, through which the
process of fusion can be inspected. All
openings to the muffle should be used as
little as possible; otherwise cold air is
admitted, and the inside temperature
rapidly lowered.
SECTION ON A. B.
Fig. 4
Fig. 4 shows a simple arrangement of
a muffle furnace; a is the furnace itself,
with an opening, e, through which the
fuel is fed; b is the muffle; c shows the
firebars, and d the cinder box; / is a rest
or plate on which is placed the articles to
be enameled. The plate or petits on
which the articles rest while being put
into the muffle should be almost red hot,
as the whole heat of the muffle in this
way begins to act immediately on the
enamel coating. The articles inside the
muffles can be moved about when neces-
sary, either by a hook or a pair of tongs,
but care must be taken that every part
of the vessel or plate is submitted to the
same amount of heat.
In Figs. 5, 6, and 7 are given drawings
of an arrangement of furnaces, etc.,
connected with an enameling factory at
Fig. 5
300
ENAMELING
present working. The stoves shown in
Fig. 5 are drying stoves fired from the
end by charcoal, and having a tempera-
ture of about 160° F. Fig. 6 shows the
arrangement of the flues for the passage
of the gases round the fusing oven. The
section through the line A B, Fig. 5, as
shown in Fig. 7, and the section through
SECTION THROUGH FUSING OVEN
Fig. 6
SECTION ON A. B.
Fig. 7
DRAUGHT
SECTION THROUGH FRIT KILNS
Fig. 8
the frit kilns, as shown in Fig. 8, are
sufficiently explanatory. The frit kilns
and the fusing oven flues both lead to the
brick chimney, but the stoves are con-
nected to a wrought-iron chimney shown
in Fig. 6. Another arrangement would
have been to so arrange the stoves that
the gases from the frit kilns could have
been utilized for heating purposes.
Fuel. — The consumption of fuel in an
enameling factory is the most serious
item of the expenditure. Ill-constructed
or badly proportioned stoves may rep-
resent any loss of coal from a quarter to
one ton per day, and as great and uniform
temperatures must be maintained, fuel
of low quality and price is not desirable.
In the melting stoves either arranged as
tank or crucible furnaces, the character
of the coal must not be neglected, as
light dust, iron oxide, or injurious gases
will enter into the crucibles through any
opening, especially if the draught is not
very great. Almost any of the various
kinds of fuel may be used, provided that
the system of combustion is specially
arranged for in the construction of the
furnaces. Charcoal is one of the best
fuels available, its calorific value being
so great; but its cost is in some places
almost prohibitive. Wood burns too
quickly, and is therefore expensive, and
necessitates incessant firing.
For practical purposes we are thus
often left to a selection of some type of
coal. A coal with comparatively little
heating power at a cheap price will be
found more expensive in the end than
one costing more, but capable of more
rapid combustion and possessing more
heat yielding gases. Cheap and hard
coals give the fireman an amount of labor
which is excessive. The proper main-
tenance of the temperature of the stove
is almost impossible. Anthracite is ex-
cellent in every way, as it consists of
nearly pure carbon, giving off a high de-
gree of heat without smoke. Its use, of
course, necessitates the use of a blower,
but to this there can be no objection.
Any coal which will burn freely and clean,
giving off no excessive smoke, and capa-
ble of almost complete combustion, will
give satisfaction in enameling; but it
must not be forgotten that the consump-
tion of fuel is so large that both price and
quality must be carefully considered.
Experimental tests must be made from
time to time. A cheap, common coal
will never give good results, and a good
expensive coal will make the cost of
manufacture so great that the prices of
the enameled articles will render them
unsalable. Any ordinary small factory
will use from 2 to 4 tons per day of coal,
and it will thus be seen that the financial
success of a concern lies to a very great
extent at the mouth of the furnace. Coke
is a good medium for obtaining the
necessary heat required in enameling if
it can be got at a reasonable price. With
a good draught a uniform temperature
can be easily kept up, and the use of
this by-product is, therefore, to be rec-
ommended.
ENAMELING
301
With good coal and a furnace con-
structed to utilize the heat given off to
the fullest extent, there may still be un-
necessary waste. The arrangement of
the bars should only be made by those
who fully understand the character of
the coal and the objects in view. The
fireman in charge should be thoroughly
experienced and reliable, as much waste
is frequently traced to imperfect feeding
of the fuel.
Each charge of articles should be as
large as possible, as fusing will take place
equally as well on many articles as on
few. The charges should follow one
another as rapidly as can be conveniently
carried out; and where this is not done
there is a lack of organization which
should be immediately remedied.
Mills. — Any hard substances must first
be broken up and pounded in a pounding
or stamping mill, or in any other suitable
manner, thus reducing the lumps to a
granular condition. When this has been
done, the coarse is separated from the
fine parts and the former again operated
on. The next process is roller grinding
for reducing the hard fritted granular
particles to a fine powder. These mills
vary in construction, but a satisfactory
type is shown in Fig. 9. Motion is con-
GRINDING MILL
Fig. 9
veyed by a belt to the driving pulley, and
this is transmitted from the pinion to the
large bevel, which is connected by a
shaft to the ground plate. As this revolves
the material causes the mill wheels to
revolve, and in this way the material is
reduced to a powder. The rollers are of
reduced diameter on the inner side to
prevent slippage, and when all the parts
are made of iron, the metal must be
close grained and of very hard structure,
so as to reduce the amount removed by
wear to a minimum. When the mate-
rials are ground wet, the powder should
be carefully protected from, (lust and
thoroughly dried before passing to the
next operation.
The glazing or enamel mills are shown
in Fig. 10. These mills consist of a
GLAZING MILL
Fig. 10
strong iron frame securely bolted to a
stone foundation. In the sketch shown
the framing carries 2 mills, but 3 or 4
can be arranged for. A common ar-
rangement for small factories consists of
2 large mills, and 1 smaller mill, driven
from the same shaft. One of the mills is
used for foundation or gray mixings, the
second for white, and the smallest one for
colored mixings. In these mills it is
essential that the construction is such as
to prevent any iron fitting coming into
contact with the mixing, for, as has
already been explained, the iron will
cause discoloration. The ground plate
is composed of quartz and is immovable.
It is surrounded by a wooden casing — as
shown at a — and bound together by iron
hoops. The millstones are heavy, rec-
tangular blocks of quartz, called "French
burr stone," and into the center the spin-
dle, 6, is led. The powdered material
mixed with about three times its bulk of
water is poured into the vats, a, and the
grinding stones are then set in motion.
When a condition ready for enameling
has been reached the mixture is run off
through the valves, c. Each mill can be
thrown out of gear when required, by
means of a clutch box, without inter-
fering with the working of the others.
The grinding stones wear rapidly and
require to be refaced from time to time.
To avoid stoppage of the work, therefore,
it is advisable to always have a spare set
in readiness to replace those removed for
refacing. The composition of the stones
should not be neglected, for, in many
cases, faults in the enamel have been
traced to the wearing away of stones
containing earthy or metallic matter.
302
ENAMELING
Enamel Mixing. — All constituents of
which an enamel glaze is composed must
be intimately mixed together. This can
only be done by reducing each to a fine
powder and thoroughly stirring them up
together. This part of the work is often
carried out in a very superficial manner,
one material showing much larger lumps
than another. Under circumstances such
as these it is absurd to imagine that in
fusion equal distribution will take place.
What really happens is that some parts
of the mass are insufficiently supplied
with certain properties while others have
too much. A mixture of this class can
produce only unsatisfactory results in
every respect, for the variations referred
to will produce variations in the com-
pleteness of fusion in the viscous charac-
ter of the mass, and in the color.
The mixing can be done by thoroughly
stirring the various ingredients together,
and a much better and cheaper system is
mixing in rotating barrels or churns.
These are mounted on axles which rest
in bearings, one axle being long enough
to carry a pulley. From the driving shaft
a belt is led to the cask, which then rotates
at a speed of from 40 to 60 revolutions
per minute, and in about a quarter of an
hour the operation is complete. The
cask should not exceed the 5-gallon size,
and should at no time be more than two-
thirds full. Two casks of this kind give
better results than one twice the size.
The materials are shot into the cask in
their correct proportions through a large
bung hole, which is then closed over by a
close-fitting lid.
Mixings. — For gray or fundamental
coatings:
I. — Almost any kind of
glass 49 per cent
Oxide of lead 47 per cent
Fused borax 4 per cent
II. — Glass (any kind).. 61 percent
Red lead 22 per cent
Borax 16 per cent
Niter 1 per cent
III. — Quartz 67.5 per cent
Borax 29.5 per cent
Soda (enameling) . 3 per cent
The above is specially adapted for iron
pipes.
IV. — Frit of silica pow-
der 60 per cent
Borax 33 per cent
White lead 7 percent
Fused and then ground with —
Three-tenths weight of silica frit.
Clay, three-tenths weight of silica frit.
Magnesia, one-sixth weight of white lead.
V. — Silica 65 per cent
Borax 14 per cent
Oxide of lead 4 percent
Clay 15 per cent
Magnesia 2 per cent
No. V gives a fair average of several
mixings which are in use, but it can be
varied slightly to suit different conditions
of work.
Defects in the Gray or Ground Coat-
ing.— Chipping is the most disastrous.
This may be prevented by the addition
of some bitter salt, say from 3 to 4 per
cent of the weight of the frit.
The addition of magnesia when it has
been omitted from the frit may also act
as a preventive, but it should only be
added in very small quantities, not ex-
ceeding 2.5 per cent, otherwise the
temperature required for fusion will be
very great.
Coating and Fusion. — Difficulties of
either may generally be done away with
by reducing the magnesia used in the
frit to a minimum.
A soft surface is always the outcome
of a mixing which can be fused at a low
temperature. It is due to too much lead
or an insufficiency of clay or silica
powder.
A hard surface is due to the quantity
of lead in the mixing being too small.
Increase the quantity and introduce
potash., say about 2.5 per cent.
The gray or fundamental mixing
should be kept together in a condition
only just sufficiently liquid to allow of
being poured out. When required to be
applied to the plate, the water necessary
to lower it to the consistency of thick
cream can then be added gradually,
energetic stirring of the mass taking
place simultaneously in order to obtain
uniform distribution.
The time required for fusion may
vary from 15 minutes to 25 minutes, but
should never exceed the latter. If it
does, it shows that the mixing is too
viscous, and the remedy would be the
addition and thorough intermixture of
calcined borax or boracic acid. Should
this fail, then remelting or a new frit is
necessary.
A highly glazed surface on leaving the
muffle shows that the composition is too
fluid and requires the addition of clay,
glass, silica powder or other substance
to increase the viscosity.
As has been already explained, the
glaze is much more important than the
fundamental coating. Discoloration or
slight flaws which could be tolerated in
the latter would be fatal to the former.
ENAMELING
In glazes, oxide of lead need not be
used. It should never be used in a coat-
ing for vessels which are to contain acids
or be used as cooking utensils. It may
be used in sign-tablet production.
For pipes the following glaze gives
good results:
I.— Feldspar 33 percent
Borax 22.5 percent
Quartz... 16.5 percent
Oxide of tin.. .. 15 percent
Soda. . 8 percent
Fluorspar 3.75 per cent
Saltpeter 2.25 percent
For sign tablets the following gives
fair results, although some of the suc-
ceeding ones are in more general use:
II.— Gullet 20 per cent
Powdered flint. . 15 per cent
Lead 52 per cent
Soda 4.5 percent
Arsenic 4.5 per cent
Niter 4 per cent
III.— Frit of silica
powder 30 per cent
Oxide of tin. ... 18 percent
Borax 17 per cent
Soda 8.6 per cent
Niter 7.5 percent
White lead 5.5 per cent
Carbonate o f
ammonia .... 5.5 per cent
Magnesia 4 per cent
Silica powder. . . 4 per cent
The following are useful for culinary
utensils, as they do not contain lead:
IV.— Frit of silica
powder 26 percent
Oxide of tin .... 21 per cent
Borax 20 per cent
Soda 10.25 per cent
Niter 7 per cent
Carbonate o f
ammonia .... 5 per cent
Magnesia 3.25 per cent
This should be ground up with the
following:
Silica powder. . . 4.25 per cent
Oxide of tin. . . . 2.25 per cent
Soda 0.5 per cent
Magnesia 0.5 per cent
V. — Feldspar 41 per cent
Borax 35 per cent
Oxide of tin. ... 17 percent
Niter 7 per cent
VI.— Borax 30 per cent
Feldspar 22 per cent
Silicate powder. 17.5 percent •
Oxide of tin. ... 15 percent
Soda 13.5 percent
Niter 2 per cent
Borax will assist fusion. Quartz mix-
ings require more soda than feldspar
mixings.
VII. — Borax 28 per cent
Oxide of tin .... 19.5 per cent
Gullet (powdered
white glass) . . 18 per cent
Silica powder. . . 17.5 per cent
Niter 9.5 per cent
Magnesia 5 per cent
Clay 2.5 per cent
VIII.— Borax 26.75 per cent
Gullet 19 per cent
Silica powder. . . 18.5 per cent
Oxide of tin. ... 19 percent
Niter 9.25 per cent
Magnesia 4.5 per cent
Soda 3 per cent
To No. VII must be added — while
being ground — the following percentages
of the weight of the frit:
Silica powder. . . 18 per cent
Borax 9 per cent
Magnesia 5.25 percent
Boracic acid.. . . 1.5 percent
To No. VIII should be similarly added
the following percentages of the frit:
Silica powder. . . 1.75 per cent
Magnesia 1.75 per cent
Soda 1 per cent
This mixing is one which is used in
the production of some of the best types
of hollow ware for culinary purposes.
The glaze should be kept in tubs mixed
with water until used, and it should be
carefully protected from dust.
Defects in the Glaze or White.— A bad
white may be due to its being insuffi-
ciently opaque. More oxide of tin is
required. Cracks may be prevented by
the addition of carbonate of ammonia.
Insufficient luster can be avoided by
adding to the quantity of soda and re-
ducing the borax. If the gray shows
through the white it proves that the
temperature of fusion is too high or the
viscosity of the mixing is too great. If
the coating is not uniformly spread it
may be due to the glaze being too thin;
add magnesia. If the glaze separates
from the gray add some bitter salt.
Viscosity will be increased by reduc-
ing the quantity of borax. Immunity
against chemical reaction is procured by
increasing the quantity of borax. An
improved luster will be obtained by add-
ing native carbonate of soda. The
greater the quantity of silicic acid the
greater must be the temperature for
fusion. To reduce the temperature add
borax. Clay will increase the difficulty
304
ENAMELING
of fusion. Oxide of lead will make a frit
more easily fusible. A purer white can
be obtained by adding a small quantity
of smalt.
Water.— The character of the water
used in the mixing of enamels is too fre-
quently taken for granted, for unsuitable
water may render a mixing almost entire-
ly useless. Clean water, and with little
or no sulphur present, is essential. For
very fine enamels it is advisable to use
carefully filtered water which has shown,
after analysis, that it is free from any
matter which is injurious to any of the
enamel constituents.
How to Tell the Character of Enamel.
— In the case of sign tablets the charac-
teristics looked to are appearance and
the adherence of the coatings to the iron.
For the latter the tests are simple. The
plate if slightly bent should not crack the
coating. An enamel plate placed in
boiling water for some time and then
plunged into very cold water should not
show any cracks, however small, even
after repeated treatment of this kind.
Culinary utensils, and those to hold
chemicals, should not only look well, but
should be capable of resisting the action
of acids. Lead should never enter into
the composition of enamels of this class,
as they then become easily acted upon,
and in the case of chipping present a
menace to health. The presence of lead
is easily detected. Destroy the outside
coating of the enamel at some spot by the
application of strong nitric acid. Wash
the part and apply a drop of ammonium
sulphide. If lead is present, the part
will become almost black, but remains
unchanged in color if it is absent.
Another simple test is to switch up an
egg in a vessel and allow it to stand for
about 24 hours. When poured out and
rinsed with water a dark stain will re-
main if lead is present in the enamel.
To test the power of chemical resistance
is equally simple. Boil diluted vinegar
in the vessel for several minutes, and if
a sediment is formed and the luster and
smoothness of the glaze destroyed or
partially destroyed, it follows that it is
incapable of resisting the attacks of acids
for any length of time. There are sev-
eral other tests adopted, but those given
present little difficulty in carrying out,
and give reliable results.
Wasters and Seconds: Repairing Old
Articles. — In all enameling there must
be certain articles turned out which are
defective, but the percentage should never
be very great. The causes which most
frequently tend to the production of
wasters are new mixings and a tempera-
ture of fusion which is either too high or
too low. There are two ways of dis-
posing of defective articles, viz.: (1)
Chipping off the bad spots, patching
them up and selling them as "seconds";
(2) throwing the articles into the waste
heap. The best firms adopt the latter
course, because the recoating and firing
of defective parts practically means a
repetition of the whole process, thus add-
ing greatly to the cost, while the selling
price is reduced. Overheating in fusion
is generally shown by blisters or by the
enamel being too thin in various places.
Chipping may be also due to this cause,
the excessive heat having practically
fused the fundamental coating.
At this stage the defects may be
remedied by breaking off the faulty parts,
patching them up, and then recoating
the whole. With sign tablets there is no
objection to doing so, but with hollow
ware the fact remains that the article is
faulty, no matter how carefully defects
may be hidden. As white is the most
general coating used, and shows up the
defects more than the colored coatings,
the greatest care is necessary at every
stage of the manufacture. While glow-
ing on the article, it should appear
uniformly yellow, but on cooling it should
revert to a pure white shade. On ex-
amining different makes of white coated
articles, it will be found that some are
more opaque than others. The former
are less durable than the latter, because
they contain a large percentage of oxide
of tin, which reduces the elasticity. To
ensure hardness the mixing must be
very liquid, and this cannot be arrived
at when a large quantity of oxide of tin
is introduced.
Old utensils which have become
broken or chipped can be repaired,
although, except in the case of large
articles, this is rarely done. The opera-
tions necessary are: (1) The defective
parts chipped off; (2) submitted to a red
neat for a few moments; (3) coated with
gray on the exposed iron; (4) fused; (5)
coated with the glaze on the gray; (6)
fused.
To Repair Enameled Signs. —
Copal 5 parts
Damar 5 parts
Venice turpentine ... 4 parts
Powder the rosins, mix with the tur-
pentine and add enough alcohol to form
a thick liquid. To this add finely
powdered zinc white in sufficient quan-
tity to yield a plastic mass. Coloring
ENAMELING
305
matter may, of course, be added if
desired.
The mass after application is polished
when it has become sufficiently hard.
Enamel for Copper Cooking Vessels. —
White fluorspar is ground to a fine
powder and strongly calcined with an
equal volume of unburnt gypsum, at a
light glowing heat, stirring diligently.
Grind the mixture to a paste with water,
paint the vessel with it, using a brush,
or pour in the paste like a glaze and dry
the same. Increase the heat gradually
and bring the vessels with the glass
substance quickly into strong heat, under
a suitable covering or a mantle of burnt
clay. The substance soon forms a white
opaque enamel, which ahderes firmly to
the copper. It can stand pretty hard
knocks without cracking, is adapted for
cooking purposes and not attacked by
acid matters. If the glassy substance is
desired to cling well and firmly to the
copper, a sudden and severe heat must
be observed.
To Pickle Black Iron-Plate Scrap
Before Enameling. — The black iron-
plate scraps are first dipped clean in a
mixture of about 1 part of sulphuric
acid and 20 to 22 parts of water heated
to 30° to 40° C. (86° to 104° F.), and
sharp quartz sand is then used for scour-
ing. They are then plunged for a few
seconds in boiling water, taken out, and
allowed to dry. Rinsing with cold water
and allowing to dry thus may cause
rust. The grains of quartz cut grooves
in the fibers of the iron; this helps the
grounding to adhere well. With many
kinds of plate it is advisable to anneal
after pickling, shutting off the air; by
this means the plates will be thoroughly
clean and free from oxidation. Much
practice is required. — The Engineer.
ENAMELED IRON RECIPES.
The first thing is to produce a flux to
fuse at a moderate heat, which, by flow-
ing upon the plate, forms a uniform sur-
face for the white or colored enamels to
work upon.
Flux for Enameled Iron. —
White lead 10 parts
Ball clay 1 part
Flint glass 10 parts
Whiting 1 part
The plates may then be coated with
any of the following mixtures, which
may either be spread on as a powder
with a little gum, as in the case of the
flux, or the colors may be mixed with oil
and the plates dipped therein when
coated; the plate requires heating suffi-
ciently to run the enamels bright.
Soft Enamels for Iron, White.—
Flint glass 16 parts
, Oxide of tin 1^ parts
Niter if parts
Red lead 4 parts
Flint or china clay ... 1 part
Black.—
Red oxide of iron. ... \\ parts
Carbonate of cobalt. . 1 \ parts
Red lead 6 parts
Borax 2 parts
Lynn sand 2 parts
Yellow Coral.—
Chromate of lead. ... 1 part
Red lead 2| parts
Flint 1 part
Borax '. \ part
Canary. —
Oxide of uranium ... 1 part
Red lead 4 \ parts
Flint if parts
Flint glass 1 part
Turquoise. —
Red lead 40 parts
Flint glass 12 parts
Borax 16 parts
Flint 12 parts
Enamel white 14 parts
Oxide of copper 7 parts
Oxide of cobalt \ part
Red Brown. —
Calcined sulphate of
iron 1 part
Flux No. 8 (see page 307) 3 parts
Mazarine Blue. —
Oxide of cobalt 10 parts
Paris white 9 parts
Sulphate barytes 1 part
Fire the above at an intense heat and
for use take
Above stain 1 part
Flux No. 8 (see page 307) 3 parts
Sky Blue.—
Flint glass 30 parts
White lead 10 parts
Pearlash 2 parts
Common salt 2 parts
Oxide of cobalt 4 parts
Enamel, white 4 parts
Chrome Green. —
Borax 10 parts
Oxide of chrome 4* parts
White lead 9 parts
Flint glass 9 parts
Oxide of cobalt 2 parts
Oxide of tin 1 part
306
ENAMELING
Coral Red.—
Bichromate potash . . 1 part
Red lead 4& parts
Sugar of lead if parts
Flint 1$ parts
Flint glass 1 part
Enamel White.— Soft :
Red lead 80 parts
Opal glass 50 parts
Flint 50 parts
Borax 24 parts
Arsenic 8 parts
Niter 6 parts
Enamel White.—
Red lead 10 parts
Flint. ... 6 parts
Boracic acid 4 parts
Niter 1 part
Soda crystals 1 part
Where the enameled work is intended
to be exposed to the weather do not use
flux No. 8, but substitute the following:
White lead 1 part
Ground flint glass 1 part
All the enamels should, after being
mixed, be melted in crucibles, poured
out when in liquid, and powdered or
ground for use.
FUSIBLE ENAMEL COLORS.
The following colors are fusible by
heat, and are all suitable for the decora-
tion of china and glass. In the follow-
ing collection of recipes certain terms
are employed which may not be quite
understood by persons who are not con-
nected with either the glass or poVcelain
industries, such as "glost fire" and "run
down," and in such cases reference
must be made to the following defini-
tions:
"Run down." Sufficient heat to melt
into liquid.
"Glost fire." Ordinary glaze heat.
"Grind only." No calcination re-
quired.
"Hard fire." Highest heat attain-
able.
"Frit." The ingredients partly com-
posing a glaze, wliich require calcina-
tion.
"Stone." Always best Cornwall stone.
"Paris white." Superior quality of
whiting.
"Parts." Always so many parts by
weight, unless otherwise stated.
"D. L. Zinc." Particular brand not
essential. Any good quality oxide of
zinc will do.
Ruby and Maroon. — Preparation of
silver :
Nitric acid .......... 1 ounce
Water .............. 1 ounce
Dissolve the silver till saturated, then
put a plate of copper in the solution to
precipitate the silver in a metallic state.
Wash well with water to remove the ace-
tate of copper.
Flux for Above. — Six dwts. white lead
to 1 ounce prepared silver.
Tin Solution. — Put the acid (aqua
regia) in a bottle, add tin in small quan-
tities until it becomes a dark-red color;
let it stand about 4 days before use.
When the acid becomes saturated it will
turn red at the bottom of the bottle, then
shake it up and add more tin; let it stand
and it will become clear.
Aqua Regia. —
Nitric acid ..... ..... 2 parts
Muriatic acid ........ 1 part
Dissolve grain gold in the aqua regia
so as to make a saturated solution.
Take a basin and fill it 3 parts full of
water; drop the solution of gold into it
till it becomes an amber color. Into this
solution of gold gradually drop the solu-
tion of tin, until the precipitate is com-
plete. Wash the precipitate until the
water becomes tasteless, then dry slowly
and flux as follows:
Flux No. i.—
Borax .............. 3
Red lead ............ 3
Flint ............... 2
Run down.
Rose Mixture. —
Purple of Cassius ---- 1
Flux No. 1 .......... 6
Prepared silver ...... 3
Flint glass .......... 2
Grind.
Purple Mixture. —
Purple of Cassius .... 1
Flux No. 8 (see page 307) 2
Flint glass ..... ..... 2
Grind.
Ruby.—
Purple mixture ...... 2
Rose mixture ........ 1
Grind.
Maroon. —
Rose mixture ........ 1 part
Purple mixture ...... £ parts
Grind,
parts
parts
parts
ounce
ounces
dwts.
ounces
ounce
ounces
ounces
parts
parts
ENAMELING
307
Black — Extra quality. —
Red oxide of iron .... 12 parts
Carbonate of cobalt . . 12 parts
Oxide of cobalt 1 part
Black flux A (see next
formula) 80 parts
Glost fire.
Black Flux A.—
Red lead 3 parts
Calcined borax \ part
Lynn sand 1 part
Run down.
Black No. 2.—
Oxide of copper 1 part
Carbonate of cobalt. . \ part
Flux No. 8 (see next
column) 4 parts
Grind only.
Enamel White. —
Arsenic 2$ parts
Niter \\ parts
Borax 4 parts
Flint 16 parts
Glass 16 parts
Red lead 32 parts
Glost fire.
Turquoise. — China :
Calcined copper 5 parts
Whiting 5 parts
Phosphate of soda 8 parts
Oxide of zinc 16 parts
Soda crystals 4 parts
Magnesia 2 parts
Red lead 8 parts
Flux T (see next for-
mula) 52 parts
Glost fire.
Flux T.—
Borax 2 parts
Sand 1 part
Run down.
Orange. —
Orange U. G 1 part
Flux No. 8 (see next
column) 3 parts
Grind only.
Blue Green. —
Flint glass 8 parts
Enamel white 25 parts
Borax 8 parts
Red lead 24 parts
Flint 6 parts
Oxide of copper 2J parts
Glost heat.
Coral Red.—
Chromate of potash. . 1 part
Sugar of lead Imparts
Dissolve in hot water, then dry. Take
1 part of above, 3 parts flux for coral.
Grind.
Flux for Coral. —
Red lead 4| parts
Flint H parts
Flint glass \\ parts
Run down.
Turquoise. —
Oxide of copper 5 parts
Borax 10 parts
Flint 12 parts
Enamel white 14 parts
Red lead 40 parts
Glost fire.
Flux No. 8. —
Red lead 6 parts
Borax 4 parts
Flint 2 parts
Run down.
Russian Green. —
Malachite green 10 parts
Enamel yellow 5 parts
Majolica white 5 parts
Flux No. 8 (see pre-
vious formula) 2 parts
Grind only.
Amber. —
Oxide of uranium ... 1 part
Coral flux 8 parts
Grind only.
Gordon Green. —
Yellow U. G 5 parts
Flux No. 8 (see above) 15 parts
Malachite green 10 parts
Grind only.
Celadon. —
Enamel light blue ... 1 part
Malachite green 1 part
Flux No. 8 (see above) 15 parts
Grind only.
Red Brown. —
Sulphate of iron, fired 1 part
Flux No. 8 (see above) 3 parts
Grind only.
Matt Blue.—
Flux No. 8 (see above) 10£ parts
Oxide of zinc 5 parts
Oxide of cobalt 4 parts
Glost fire, then take
Of above base 1 part
Flux No. 8 (see above) \\ parts
Grind only.
308
ENAMELING
PREPARATION OF ENAMELS.
The base of enamel is glass, colored
different shades by the addition of me-
tallic oxides mixed and melted with it.
The oxide of cobalt produces blue;
red is obtained by the Cassius process.
The purple of Cassius, which is one of
the most brilliant of colors, is used al-
most exclusively in enameling and min-
iature painting; it is produced by adding
to a solution of gold chloride a solution
of tin chloride mixed with ferric chloride
until a green color appears. The oxide
of iron and of copper also produces red,
but of a less rich tone; chrome produces
green, and manganese violet; black is
produced by the mixture of these ox-
ides. Antimony and arsenic also enter
into the composition of enamels.
Enamels are of two classes — opaque
and transparent. The opacity is caused
by the presence of tin.
When the mingled glass and oxides
have been put in the crucible, this is
placed in the furnace, heated to a tem-
perature of 1,832° or 2,200° F. When
the mixture becomes fused, it is stirred
with a metal rod. Two or three hours
are necessary for the operation. The
enamel is then poured into water, which
divides it into grains, or formed into
cakes or masses, which are left to cool.
For applying enamels to metals, gold,
silver, or copper, it is necessary to reduce
tnem to powder, which is effected in an
agate mortar with the aid of a pestle of
the same material. During the opera-
tion the enamel ought to be soaked in
water.
For dissolving the impurities which
may have been formed during the work,
a few drops of nitric acid are poured in
immediately afterwards, well mixed, and
then got rid of by repeated washing with
filtered water. This should be carefully
done, stirring the enamel powder with a,
glass rod, in order to keep the particles in
suspension.
The powder is allowed to repose at
the bottom of the vessel, after making
sure by the taste of the water that it does
not contain any trace of acid; only then
is the enamel ready for use.
For enameling a jewel or other object
it is necessary, first to heat it strongly, in
order to burn off any fatty matter, and
afterwards to cleanse it in a solution of
nitric acid diluted with boiling water.
After rinsing with pure water and wip-
ing with a very clean cloth, it is heated
slightly and is then ready to receive the
enamel.
Enamels are applied with a steel tool
in the form of a spatula; water is the
vehicle. When the layers of enamel have
been applied, the contained water is
removed by means of a fine linen rag,
pressing slightly on the parts that have
received the enamel. The tissue ab-
sorbs the water, and nothing remains on
the object except the enamel powder.
It is placed before the fire to remove every
trace of moisture. Thus prepared and
put on a fire-clap slab, it is ready for its
passage to the heat which fixes the
enamel. This operation is conducted in
a furnace, with a current of air whose
temperature is about 1,832° F. In this
operation the fire-chamber ought not to
contain any gas.
Enamels are fused at a temperature of
1,292° to 1,472° F. Great attention is
needed, for experience alone is the guide,
and the duration of the process is quite
short. On coming from the fire, the
molecules composing the enamel powder
have been fused together and present to
the eye a vitreous surface covering the
metal and adhering to it perfectly. Un-
der the action of the heat the metallic
oxides contained in the enamel have met
the oxide of the metal and formed one
body with it, thus adhering completely.
JEWELERS' ENAMELS.
Melt together:
Transparent Red. — Cassius gold pur-
ple, 65 parts, by weight; crystal glass, 30
parts, by weight; borax, 4 parts, by weight.
Transparent Blue. — Crystal glass, 34
parts, by weight; borax, 6 parts, by
weight; cobalt oxide, 4 parts, by weight.
Dark Blue. — Crystal glass, 30 parts, by
weight; borax, 6 parts, by weight; co-
balt oxide, 4 parts, by weight; bone black,
4 parts, by weight; arsenic acid, 2 parts,
by weight.
Transparent Green. — Crystal glass, 80
parts, by weight; cupric oxide, 4 parts,
by weight; borax, 2 parts, by weight.
Dark Green. — Crystal glass, 30 parts,
by weight; borax, 8 parts, by weight;
cupric oxide, 4 parts, by weight; bone
black, 4 parts by weight; arsenic acid, 2
pares, by weight.
Black. — Crystal glass, 30 parts, by
weight; borax, 8 parts, by weight; cupric
oxide, 4 parts, by weight; ferric oxide, 3
parts, by weight; cobalt oxide, 4 parts,
by weignt; manganic oxide, 4 parts, by
weight.
White. — I. — Crystal glass, 30 parts, by
weight; stannic oxide, 6 parts, by weight;
borax, 6 parts, by weignt; arsenic acid,
2 parts, by weight.
II. — Crystal glass, 30 parts, by weight;
sodium antimonate, 10 parts, by weight.
ENAMELING— ENGRAVINGS
309
The finely pulverized colored enamel is
applied with a brush and lavender oil on
the white enamel already fused in and
then only heated until it melts. For
certain purposes, the color compositions
may also be fused in without a white
f round. The glass used for white, No.
, must be free from lead, otherwise the
enamel will be unsightly.
Various Enamels for Precious Metals :
White.— Crystal glass, 30 parts, by
weight; oxide of tin, 6 parts, by weight;
borax, 6 parts, by weight; dioxide of
arsenic, 2. parts, by weight, or silicious
sand, 50 parts, by weight; powder, con-
sisting of 15 of tin per 100 of lead^lOO
parts, by weight; carbonate of potassium,
40 parts, by weight. Fuse the whole
with a quantity of manganese. To take
away the accidental coloring, pour it
into water, and after having pulverized
it, melt again 3 or 4 times.
Opaque Blue. — Crystal glass, 30 parts,
by weight; borax, 6 parts, by weight;
cobalt oxide, 4 parts, by weight; calcined
bone, 4 parts, by weight; dioxide of ar-
senic, 2 parts, by weight.
Transparent Green. — Crystal glass, 30
parts, by weight; blue verditer, 4 parts,
by weight; borax, 2 parts, by weight.
Opaque Green. — Crystal glass, 30
parts, by weight; borax, 8 parts, by
weight; blue verditer, 4 parts, by weight;
calcined bone, 4 parts, by weight; dioxide
of arsenic, 2 parts, by weight.
Black. — I. — Crystal glass, 30 parts, by
weight; borax, 8 parts, by weight; oxide
of copper, 4 parts, by weight; oxide of
iron, 3 parts, by weight; oxide of cobalt,
4 parts, by weight;' oxide of manganese,
4 parts, by weight.
II. — Take £ part, by weight, of silver;
2 A parts of copper; 3£ parts of lead, and
2 \ parts of muriate of ammonia. Melt
together and pour into a crucible with
twice as much pulverized sulphur; the
crucible is then to be immediately covered
that the sulphur may not take fire, and
the mixture is to be calcined over a smelt-
ing fire until the superfluous sulphur is
burned away. The compound is then
to be coarsely pounded, and, with a solu-
tion of muriate of ammonia, to be formed
into a paste which is to be placed upon
the article it is designed to enamel. The
article must then be held over a spirit
lamp till the compound upon it melts
and flows. After this it may be smoothed
and polished up in safety.
See also Varnishes and Ceramics for
other enamel formulas.
ENAMEL COLORS, QUICK DRYING:
See Varnishes.
ENAMEL REMOVERS:
See Cleaning Preparations and Meth-
ods.
ENAMELING ALLOYS:
See Alloys.
ENGINES (GASOLINE), ANTI-FREEZ-
ING SOLUTION FOR:
See Freezing Preventives.
ENGRAVING SPOON HANDLES.
After the first monogram has been en-
graved, rub it with a mixture of 3 parts
of beeswax, 3 of tallow, 1 of Canada bal-
sam, and 1 of olive oil. Remove any
superfluous quantity, then moisten a
piece of paper with the tongue, and
press it evenly upon the engraving. Lay
a dry piece of paper over it, hold both
firmly with thumb and forefinger of left
hand, and rub over the surface with a
polishing tool of steel or bone. The wet
paper is thereby pressed into the engrav-
ing, and, with care, a clear impression
is made. Remove the paper carefully,
place it in the same position on another
handle, and a clear impression will be
left. The same paper can be used 2
dozen times or more.
ENGRAVING ON STEEL:
See Steel.
Engravings : Their Preser-
vation
(See also Pictures, Prints, and Litho-
graphs.)
Cleaning of Copperplate Engravings.
— Wash the sheet on both sides by
means of a soft sponge or brush witn
water to which 40 parts of ammonium
carbonate has been added per 1,000
parts of water, and rinse the paper each
time with clear water. Next moisten with
water in which a little wine vinegar has
been admixed, rinse the sheet again with
water containing a little chloride of lime,
and dry in the air, preferably in the sun.
The paper will become perfectly clear
without the print being injured.
Restoration of Old Prints. — Old en-
gravings, woodcuts, or printed sheets
that have turned yellow may be ren-
dered white by first washing carefully in
water containing a little hyposulphite of
soda, and then dipping for a minute in
javelle water. To prepare the latter,
put 4 pounds of bicarbonate of soda in a
pan, pour over it 1 gallon of boiling
water; boil for 15 minutes, then stir in 1
310
ENGRAVINGS— ESSENCES AND EXTRACTS
pound of chloride of lime. When cold,
pour off the clear liquid, and keep in a
jug ready for use.
Surprising results are obtained from
the use of hydrogen peroxide in the
restoration of old copper or steel engrav-
ings or lithographs which have become
soiled or yellow, and this without the
least injury to the picture. The cellulose
which makes the substance of the paper
resists the action of ozone, and the black
carbon color of these prints is inde-
structible.
To remove grease or other spots of
dirt before bleaching, the engravings are
treated with benzine. This is done by
laying each one out flat in a shallow ves-
sel and pouring the benzine over it. As
benzine evaporates very rapidly, the
vessel must be kept well covered, and
since its vapors are also exceedingly in-
flammable, no fire or smoking should be
allowed in the room. The picture is
left for several hours, then lifted out
and dried in the air, and finally brushed
several times with a soft brush. The
dust which was kept upon the paper by
the grease now lies more loosely upon it
and can easily be removed by brushing.
In many cases the above treatment is
sufficient to improve the appearance of
the picture. In the case of very old or
badly soiled engravings, it is followed
by a second, consisting in the immersion
of the picture in a solution of sodium
carbonate or a very dilute solution of
caustic soda, it being left as before for
several hours. After the liquid has been
poured off, the picture must be repeated-
ly rinsed in clear water, to remove any
remnant of the soda.
By these means the paper is so far
cleansed that only spots of mold or
other discolorations remain. These may
be removed by hydrogen peroxide, in a
fairly strong solution. The commercial
peroxide may be diluted with 2 parts
water.
The picture is laid in a shallow vessel,
the peroxide poured over it, and the
vessel placed in a strong light. Very
soon the discolorations will pale.
To Reduce Engravings. — Plaster casts,
as we know, can be perceptibly reduced
in size by treatment with water or
alcohol, and if this is properly done, the
reduction is so even that the cast loses
nothing of its clear outline, but some-
times even gains in this respect by con-
traction. If it is desired to reduce an
engraved plate, make a plaster cast of it,
treat this with water or alcohol, and fill
the new cast with some easily fusible
metal. This model, which will be con-
siderably smaller than the original, is
to be made again in plaster, and again
treated, until the desired size is reached.
In this way anything of the kind, even
medallions, can be reproduced on a
smaller scale.
ENLARGEMENTS:
See Photography.
ENVELOPE GUM:
See Adhesives, under Mucilages.
EPIZOOTY:
See Veterinary Formulas.
Essences and Extracts of
Fruits
Preservation of Fruit Juices. — The
juices of pulpy fruits, when frech, con-
tain an active principle known as pectin,
which is the coagulating substance that
forms the basis of fruit jellies. This it
is which prevents the juice of berries
and similar fruits from passing through
filtering media. Pectin may be precipi-
tated by the addition of alcohol, or by
fermentation. The latter is the best, as
the addition of alcohol to the fresh juices
destroys their aroma and injures the
taste. The induction of a light fermen-
tation is far the better method, not only
preserving, when carefully conducted,
the taste and aroma of the fruit, but yield-
ing far more juice. The fruit is crushed
and the juice subsequently carefully but
strongly pressed out. Sometimes the
crushed fruit is allowed to stand awhile,
and to proceed to a light fermentation
before pressure is applied; but while a
greater amount of juice is thus obtained,
the aroma and flavor of the product are
very sensibly injured by the procedure.
To the juice thus obtained, add from
1 to 2 per cent of sugar, and put away in
a cool place (where the temperature will
not rise over 70° or 75° F.). Fermenta-
tion soon begins, and will proceed for a
few days. As soon as the development
of carbonic acid gas ceases, the juice
begins to clear itself, from the surface
downward, and in a short time all solid
matter will lie in a mass at the bottom,
leaving the liquid bright and clear.
Draw off the latter with a siphon, very
carefully, so as not to disturb the sedi-
mentary matter. Fermentation should
be induced in closed vessels only, as
when conducted in open containers a
fungoid growth is apt to form on the
surface, sometimes causing putrefactive,
and at others, an acetic, fermentation, in
either event spoiling the juice for sub-
ESSENCES AND EXTRACTS
311
sequent use, except as a vinegar. The
vessels, to effect the end desired, should
be filled only two-thirds or three-fourths
full, and then carefully closed with a
tight-fitting cork, through which is passed
a tube of glass, bent at the upper end,
the short end of which passes below the
surface of a vessel filled with water. As
soon as fermentation commences the
carbonic acid developed thereby escapes
through the tube into the water, whence
it passes off into the atmosphere. When
bubbles no longer pass off from the tube
the operation should be interrupted, and
decantation or siphoning, with subse-
quent filtration, commenced.
By proceeding in this manner all the
aroma and flavor of the juices are re-
tained. If it is intended for preserva-
tion for any length of time the juice
should be heated on a water bath to about
176° F. and poured, while hot, into bot-
tles which have been asepticized by filling
with cold water, and placing in a vessel
similarly filled, bringing to a boiling
temperature, and maintaining at this
temperature until the juice, while still
hot, is poured into them. If now closed
with corks similarly asepticized, or by
dipping into hot melted paraffine, the
juice may be kept unaltered for years.
It is better, however, to make the juice
at once into syrup, using the best refined
sugar, and boiling in a copper kettle
(iron or tin spoil the color), following the
usual precautions as to skimming, etc.
The syrup should be poured hot into the
bottles previously heated as before de-
scribed.
Ripe fruit may be kept in suitable
quantities for a considerable time if cov-
ered with a solution of saccharine and
left undisturbed, this, too, without dete-
riorating the taste, color, or aroma of the
fruit if packed with care.
Whole fruit may be stored in bulk,
by carefully and without fracture filling
into convenient-sized jars or bottles, and
pouring thereon a solution containing a
quarter of an ounce of refined saccharine
to the gallon of water, so filling each
vessel that the solution is within an inch
of the cork when pressed into position.
The corks should first of all be immersed
in melted paraffine wax, then drained,
and allowed to cool. When fruit juices
alone are required for storage purposes
they are prepared by subjecting the
juicy fruits to considerable pressure, by
which process the juices are liberated.
The sound ripe fruits are crushed and
Eacked into felt or flannel bags. The
:-uit should be carefully selected, rotten
or impaired portions being carefully re-
moved; this is important, or the whole
stock would be spoiled. Several meth-
ods are adopted for preserving and clari-
fying fruit juices.
A common way in which they are kept
from fermenting is by the use of salicylic
acid or other antiseptic substance, which
destroys the fermentative germ, or other-
wise retards its action for a considerable
time. The use of this acid is seriously
objected to by some as injurious to the
consumer. About 2 ounces of salicylic
acid, previously dissolved in alcohol, to
25 gallons of juice, or 40 grains to the
gallon, is generally considered the proper
proportion.
Another method adopted is to fill the
freshly prepared cold juice into bottles
until it reaches the necks, and on the top
of this fruit juice a little glycerine is
placed.
Juices thus preserved will keep in an
unchanged condition in any season.
Probably one of the best methods of pre-
serving fruit juices is to add 15 per cent
of 95 per cent alcohol. On such an ad-
dition, albumen and mucilaginous matter
will be deposited. The juice may then
be stored in large bottles, jars, or barrels,
if securely closed, and when clear, so
that further clarification is unnecessary,
the juice should finally be decanted or
siphoned off.
A method applicable to most berries is
as follows:
Take fresh, ripe berries, stem them,
and rub through a No. 8 sieve, rejecting
all soft and green fruit. Add to each
gallon of pulp thus obtained 8 pounds of
granulated sugar. Put on the fire and
bring just to a boil, stirring constantly.
Just before removing from the fire, add
to each gallon 1 ounce of a saturated alco-
holic solution of salicylic acid, stirring
well. Remove the scum, and, while still
hot, put into jars and hermetically seal.
Put the jars in cold water, and raise them
to the boiling point, to prevent them
from bursting by sudden expansion on
pouring hot fruit into them. Fill the
jars entirely full, so as to leave no air
space when fruit cools and contracts.
Prevention of Foaming and Partial
Caramelization of Fruit Juices. — Fresh
fruit juices carry a notable amount of
free carbonic acid, which must make its
escape on heating the liquid. This will
do easily enough if the juice be heated in
its natural state, but the addition of the
sugar so increases the density of the
fluid that the acid finds escape difficult,
and often the result is foaming. As to
the burning or partial caramelization of
812
ESSENCES AND EXTRACTS
the syrup, that is easily accounted for in
the greater density of the syrup at the
bottom of the kettle — the lighter portion,
or that still carrying imprisoned gases,
remaining on top until it is freed from
them. Constant stirring can prevent
this only partially, since it cannot entirely
overcome the results of the natural forces
in action. The consequence is more or
less caramelization. The remedy is very
simple. Boil the juices first, adding dis-
tilled water to make up for the loss by
evaporation, and add the sugar afterwards.
ESSENCES AND EXTRACTS:
Almond Extracts. —
I. —Oil of bitter almonds 90 minims
Alcohol, 94 per cent, quantity suffi-
cient to make 8 ounces.
II. — Oil of bitter almonds 80 miriims
Alcohol 7 ounces
Distilled water, quantity sufficient
to make 8 ounces.
III.— Oil of bitter al-
monds, deprived
of its hydrocyanic
acid 1 ounce
Alcohol 15 ounces
In order to remove the hydrocyanic
acid in oil of bitter almonds, dissolve 2
parts of ferrous sulphate in 16 parts of
distilled water; in another vessel slake 1
part freshly burned quicklime in a simi-
lar quantity of distilled water, and to this
add the solution of iron sulphate, after
the same has cooled. In the mixture put
4 parts of almond oil, and thoroughly
agitate the liquids together. Repeat the
agitation at an interval of 5 minutes,
then filter. Put the filtrate into a glass
retort and distil until all the oil has passed
over. Remove any water that may be
with the distillate by decantation, or
otherwise.
Apricot Extract. —
Linalyl formate 90 minims
Glycerine 1 ounce
Amyl valerianate 4 drachms
Alcohol 11 ounces
Fluid extract orris. . . 1 ounce
Water, quantity sufficient to make 1
pint.
Apple Extract. —
Glycerine 1 ounce
Amyl valerianate 4 drachms
Linalyl formate 45 minims
Fluid extract orris.. . . 1 ounce
Alcohol 11 ounces
Water, quantity sufficient to make 1
pint.
Apple Syrup. — I. — Peel and remove the
cores of, say, 5 parts of apples and cut
them into little bits. Put in a suitable
vessel and pour over them a mixture of
5 parts each of common white wine and
water, and let macerate together for 5
days at from 125° to 135° F., the vessel
being closed during the time. Then strain
the liquid through a linen cloth, using
gentle pressure on the solid matter, forc-
ing as much as possible of it through the
cloth. Boil 30 parts of sugar and 20
parts of water together, and when boiling
add to the resulting syrup the apple
juice; let it boil up for a minute or so,
and strain through flannel.
II. — Good ripe apples are cut into
small pieces and pounded to a pulp in a
mortar of any metal with the exception
of iron. To 1 part of this pulp add 11
parts of water. Allow this to stand for
12 hours. Colate. To 11 parts of the
colature add 1 part of sugar. Boil for
5 minutes. Skim carefully. Bottle slight-
ly warm. A small quantity of tartaric
acid may be added to heighten the flavor.
Banana Syrup. — Cut the fruit in slices
and place in a jar; sprinkle with sugar
and cover the jar, which is then envel-
oped in straw and placed in cold water
and the latter is heated to the boiling
point. The jar is then removed, allowed
to cool, and the juice poured into bottles.
Cinnamon Essence. —
Oil of cinnamon 2 drachms
Cinnamon, powdered 4 ounces
Alcohol, deodorized. . 16 ounces
Distilled water 16 ounces
Dissolve the oil in the alcohol, and add
the water, an ounce at a time, with agita-
tion after each addition. Moisten the
cinnamon with a little of the water, add,
and agitate. Cork tightly, and put in a
warm place, to macerate, 2 weeks, giv-
ing the flask a vigorous agitation sev-
eral times a day. Finally, filter through
paper, and keep in small vials, tightly
stoppered.
Chocolate Extract.— Probably the best
form of chocolate extract is made as fol-
lows:
Curacao cocoa 400 parts
Vanilla, chopped
fine 1 part
Alcohol of 55 per
cent 2,000 parts
Mix and macerate together for 15
days, express and set aside. Pack the
residue in a percolator, and pour on boil-
ing water (soft) and percolate until 575
parts pass through. Put the percolate
ESSENCES AND EXTRACTS
SIS
in a flask, cork, and let cool, then mix
with the alcoholic extract. If it be de-
sired to make a syrup, before mixing the
extract, add 1,000 parts of sugar to the
percolate, and with gentle heat dissolve
the sugar. Mix the syrup thus formed,
after cooling, with the alcoholic extract.
Coffee Extracts. — In making coffee
extract, care must be used to avoid ex-
tracting the bitter properties of the coffee,
as this is where most manufacturers fail;
in trying to get a strong extract they suc-
ceed only in getting a bitter one.
I. — The coffee should be a mixture of
Mocha, 3 parts; Old Government Java,
5 parts; or, as some prefer, Mocha, 3 parts;
Java, 3 parts; best old Rio, 2 parts.
Coffee, freshly roasted
and pulverized 100 parts
Boiling water 600 parts
Pack the coffee, moistened with boil-
ing water, in a strainer, or dipper, placed
in a vessel standing in the water bath at
boiling point, and let 400 parts of the
water, in active ebullition, pass slowly
through it. Draw off the liquid as quick-
ly as possible (best into a vessel previously
heated by boiling water to nearly the boil-
ing point), add 200 parts of boiling water,
and pass the whole again through the
strainer (the container remaining in the
water bath). Remove from the bath;
add 540 parts of sugar, and dissolve by
agitation while still hot.
II. — The following is based upon Lie-
big's method of making coffee for table
use: Moisten 50 parts of coffee, freshly
roasted and powdered as before, with
cold water, and add to it a little egg albu-
men and stir in. Pour over the whole
400 parts of boiling water, set on the fire,
and let come to a boil. As the liquid
foams, stir down with a spoon, but let it
come to a boil for a moment; add a little
cold water, cover tightly, and set aside in
a warm place. Exhaust the residual
coffee with 300 parts of boiling water, as
detailed in the first process, and to the
filtrate add carefully the now clarified
extract, up to 600 parts, by adding boiling
water. Proceed to make the syrup by
the method detailed above.
III. — To make a more permanent ex-
tract of coffee saturate 600 parts of
freshly roasted coffee, ground moderately
fine, with any desired quantity of a 1 in 3
mixture of alcohol of 94 per cent and
distilled water, and pack in a percolator.
Close the faucet and let stand, closely
stoppered, for 24 hours; then pour on the
residue of the alcohol and water, and let
run through, adding sufficient water, at
the last, so as to compensate for what
boils away. Set this aside, and continue
the percolation, with boiling water, until
the powder is exhausted. Evaporate the
resultant percolate down to the consist-
ency of the alcoholic extract, and mix the
two. If desired, the result may be
evaporated down to condition of an ex
tract. To dissolve, add boiling water.
IV.— This essence is expressly adapted
to boiling purposes. Take 3 pounds of
good coffee, 4 ounces of granulated sugar,
4 pints of pure alcohol, 6 pints of hot
water. Have coffee fresh roasted and of
a medium grinding. Pack in a glass per-
colator, and percolate it with a men-
struum, consisting of the water and the
alcohol. Repeat the percolation until
the desired strength is obtained, or the
coffee exhausted; then add the sugar and
filter.
V. — Mocha coffee 1 pound
Java coffee 1 pound
Glycerine, quantity sufficient.
Water, quantity sufficient.
Grind the two coffees fine, and mix,
then moisten with a mixture of 1 part of
glycerine and 3 parts of water, and pack
in a glass percolator, and percolate slowly
until 30 ounces of the percolate is ob-
tained. It is a more complete extraction
if the menstruum be poured on in the con-
dition of boiling, and it be allowed to
macerate for 20 minutes before percola-
tion commences. Coffee extract should,
by preference, be made in a glass per-
colator. A glycerine menstruum is pref-
erable to one of dilute alcohol, giving a
finer product.
VI.— Coffee, Java, roast-
ed, No. 20 pow-
der 4 ounces
Glycerine, pure. ... 4 fluidounces
Water, quantity sufficient.
Boiling, quantity sufficient.
Moisten the coffee slightly with water,
and pack firmly in a tin percolator; pour
on water, gradually, until 4 fluidounces
are obtained, then set aside. Place the
coffee in a clean tin vessel, with 8 fluid-
ounces of water, and boil for 5 minutes.
Again place the coffee in the percolator
with the water (infusion), and when the
liquid has passed, or drained off, pack
the grounds firmly, and pour on boiling
water until 8 fluidounces are obtained.
When cold, mix the first product, and
add the glycerine, bottle, and cork well.
The excellence of this extract of cof-
fee, from the manner of its preparation,
will be found by experience to be incom-
parably superior to that made by the for-
314
ESSENCES AND EXTRACTS
mulas usually recommended, the reason
being apparent in the first step in the
process.
Coffee Essence. —
Best ground Mocha
coffee 4 pounds
Best ground chicory. . 2 pounds
Boil with 2 gallons of water in a closed
vessel and when cold, strain, press, and
make up to 2 gallons, and to this add
Rectified spirit of wine 8 ounces
Pure glycerine (fluid) 16 ounces
Add syrup enough to make 4 gallons,
and mix intimately.
Cucumber Essence. — Press the juice
from cucumbers, mix with an equal vol-
ume of alcohol and distil. If the distil-
late is not sufficiently perfumed, more
juice may be added and the mixture dis-
tilled. It is said that the essence thus
Erepared will not spoil when mixed with
its in the preparation of cosmetics.
Fruit Jelly Extract.— Fill into separate
paper bags:
Medium finely pow-
dered gelatin 18 parts
Medium finely pow-
dered citric acid. ... 3 parts
Likewise into a glass bottle a mixture of
any desired
Fruit essence 1 part
Spirit of wine 1 part
and dissolve in the mixture for obtain-
ing the desired color, raspberry red or
lemon yellow, -jV part.
For use, dissolve the gelatin and the
citric acid in boiling water, adding
Sugar 125 parts
and mixing before cooling with the fruit
essence mixture.
Ginger Extracts. — The following is an
excellent method of preparing a soluble
essence or extract of ginger:
I. — Jamaica ginger 24 ounces
Rectified spirits, 60
per cent 45 ounces
Water 15 ounces
Mix and let macerate together with
frequent agitations for 10 days, then per-
colate, press off, and filter. The yield
should be 45 ounces. Of this take 40
ounces and mix with an equal amount of
distilled water. Dissolve 6 drachms of
sodium phosphate in 5 ounces of boiling
water ; let cool and add .the solution to the
filtrate and water, mixing well. Add 2
drachms of calcium chloride dissolved in
5 ounces of water, nearly cold, and again
thoroughly shake the whole. Let stand
for 12 hours; then filter.
Put the filtrate in a still, and distil off,
at as slow a temperature as possible, 30
ounces. Set this distillate to one side,
and continue the distillation till another
40 ounces have passed, then let the still
cool. The residue in the still, some 18
ounces, is the desired essence. Pour out
all that is possible and wash the still with
the 30 ounces of distillate first set aside.
This takes up all that is essential.
Finally, filter once more, through double
filter paper and preserve the filtrate —
about 40 ounces, of an amber-colored
liquid containing all of the essentials of
Jamaica ginger.
Soluble Essence of Ginger.— II.— The
following is Harrop's method of proceed-
ing:
Fluid extract of gin-
ger (U. S.) 4 ounces
Pumice, in moder-
ately fine powder . . 1 ounce
Water enough to make 12 ounces
Pour the fluid extract into a bottle, add
the pumice and shake the mixture and
repeat the shaking in the course of several
hours. Now add the water in propor-
tion of about 2 ounces, shaking well and
frequently after each addition. When
all is added repeat the agitation occa-
sionally during 24 hours, then filter,
returning the last portion of the filtrate
until it comes through clear, and if nec-
essary add sufficient water to make 12
ounces.
III. — Jamaica ginger,
ground 2 pounds
Pumice stone, ground 2 ounces
Lime, slaked 2 ounces
Alcohol, dilute 4 pints
Rub the ginger with the pumice stone
and lime until thoroughly mixed. Moisten
with the dilute alcohol until saturated and
place in a narrow percolator, being care-
ful not to use force in packing, but simply
putting it in to obtain the position of a
powder to be percolated, so that the
menstruum will go through uniformly.
Finally, add the dilute alcohol and pro-
ceed until 4 pints of percolate are ob-
tained. Allow the liquid to stand for
24 hours; then filter if necessary.
IV. — Tincture ginger 480 parts
Tincture capsicum.. 12 parts
Oleoresin ginger. ... 8 parts
Magnesium carbon-
ate 16 parts
Rub the oleoresin with the magnesia,
and add the tinctures; add about 400
ESSENCES AND EXTRACTS
315
parts of water, in divided portions, stir-
ring vigorously the while. Transfer the
mixture to a bottle, and allow to stand
1 week, shaking frequently; then filter,
and make up 960 parts with water.
V. — Fluid extract of ginger
(U.S. P.) 4 ounces
Pumice, powdered and
washed 1 ounce
Water enough to make 12 ounces
Pour the fluid extract of ginger into a
bottle, and add the pumice, shake thor-
oughly, set aside, and repeat the opera-
tion in the course of several hours. Add
the water, in the proportion of about 2
ounces at a time, agitating vigorously
after each addition. When all is added,
repeat the agitation occasionally during
24 hours, then filter, returning the first
portion of the filtrate until it comes
through bright and clear. If necessary,
pass water through the filter, enough to
make 12 fluidounces of filtrate.
VI. — Strongest tincture
of ginger 1 pint
Fresh slaked lime. 1£ ounces
Salt of tartar \ ounce
VII.' Jamaica ginger,
ground 32 parts
Pumice stone, pow-
dered 32 parts
Lime, slaked 2 parts
Alcohol, dilute,
sufficient to make 32 parts
Rub the ginger with the pumice stone
and lime, then moisten with alcohol until
it is saturated with it. Put in a narrow
percolator, using no force in packing.
Allow the mass to stand for 24 hours,
then let run through. Filter if neces-
sary.
VIII.— The following is insoluble:
Cochin ginger,
cut fine 1,000 parts
Alcohol, 95 per
cent 2,500 parts
Water. 1,250 parts
Glycerine 250 parts
Digest together for 8 days in a very
warm, not to say hot, place. Decant,
press off the roots, and add to the cola-
ture, then filter through paper. This
makes a strong, natural tasting essence.
IX. —Green Ginger Extract. —The
green ginger root is freed from the epi-
dermis and surface dried by exposure to
the air for a few hours. It is then cut
into thin slices and macerated for some
days with an equal weight of rectified
spirit, which when filtered will yield an
essence possessing a very fine aroma
and forming an almost perfectly clear
solution in water. If the ginger is al-
lowed to dry more than the few hours
mentioned it will not produce a solu-
ble essence. It is used in some of the
imported ginger ales as a flavoring only,
and makes a lovely ginger flavor.
Hop Syrup. — A palatable preparation
not inferior to many of the so-called hop
bitters:
Hops 2 parts
Dandelion 2 parts
Gentian 2 parts
Chamomile 2 parts
Stillingia 2 parts
Orange peel 2 parts
Alcohol 75 parts
Water 75 parts
Syrup, simple 50 parts
Coarsely powder the drugs and ex-
haust with the water and alcohol mixed.
Decant, press out and filter, and finally
add the syrup. The dose is a wineglass-
f ul 2 or 3 times daily.
Lemon Essences. — I. — Macerate the
cut-up fresh peelings of 40 lemons and 30
China oranges in 8 quarts of alcohol and
2 quarts of water, for 2 or 3 days, then
distil off 8 quarts. Every 100 parts of
this distillate is mixed with 75 parts of
citric acid dissolved in 200 parts of water,
colored with a trace of orange and filtered
through talc. Each 200 parts of the fil-
trate is then mixed with 2 quarts of
syrup.
II. — Twenty-five middle-sized lemons
are thinly peeled, the peelings finely cut,
and the whole, lemons and peels, put to
macerate in a mixture of 3 pints 90 per
cent alcohol and 5 quarts water. Let
macerate for 24 hours. Add 10 drops
lemon and 10 drops orange oil; then
slowly distil off 4 quarts. The distillate
will be turbid, but if left to stand in a
cool, dark place for a week it will filter
off clear, and should make a clear mix-
ture with equal parts of water and simple
syrup. If it does not, add with a
pipette, drop by drop, sufficient alcohol
to make it do so. Finally, dissolve in the
mixture 4 drachms of vanillin, and color
with a few drops of tincture of turmeric
and a little caramel.
III.— Peel thinly and lightly, 25 me-
dium-sized fresh lemons and 1 orange,
and cut the peelings into very small
pieces. Macerate in 55 drachms 96 per
cent alcohol, for 6 hours. Filter off the
macerate without pressing. Dilute the
filtrate with 3 pints water and set aside
for eight days, shaking frequently. At
316
ESSENCES AND EXTRACTS
the end of this time filter. The filtrate
is usually clear, and if so, add 4 drachms
of vanillin. If not, proceed as in the
second formula above.
IV.— Oil of lemon, select, 8 fluid-
ounces; oil of lemon grass (fresh), 1
fluidrachm ; peel, freshly grated, of 12
lemons; alcohol, 7 pints; boiled water,
1 pint.
Mix and macerate for 7 days. If
in a hurry for the product, percolate
through the lemon peel and filter. The
addition of any other substance than the
oil and rind of the lemon is not recom-
mended.
V. — Fresh oil of lemon 64 parts
Lemon peel (outer
rind) freshly
grated 32 parts
Oil of lemon grass 1 part
Alcohol 500 parts
Mix, let macerate for 14 days, and
filter.
VI. — Essence of lemon If ounces
Rectified spirit of
wine 6 ounces
Pure glycerine. .. 3 ounces
Pure phosphate
calcium 4 ounces
Distilled water to make 1 pint.
Mix essence of lemon, spirit of wine,
glycerine, and 8 ounces of distilled water,
agitate briskly in a quart bottle for 10
minutes, and introduce phosphate of
calcium and again shake. Put in a
filter and let it pass through twice.
Digest in filtrate for 2 or 3 days, add 1^
ounces fresh lemon peel, and again filter.
VII.— Oil of lemon 6 parts
Lemon peel (fresh-
ly grated) 4 parts
Alcohol, sufficient.
Dissolve the oil of lemon in 90 parts of
alcohol, add the lemon peel, and macer-
ate for 24 hours. Filter through paper,
adding through the filter enough alcohol
to make the filtrate weigh 100 parts.
VIII.— Exterior rind of
lemon 2 ounces
Alcohol, 95 per
cent, deodorized 32 ounces
Oil of lemon, re-
cent 3 fluidounces
Expose the lemon rind to the air until
perfectly dry, then bruise in a wedgwood
mortar, and add it to the alcohol, agitat-
ing until the color is extracted; then add
the lemon oil.
Natural Lemon Juice.— I.— Take 4.20
parts of crystallized citric acid; 2 parts
essence of lemons; 3 parts of alcohol of
96 per cent; ^ part calcium carbonate;
50^ parts sodium phosphate, and 2^0 part
calcium citrate, and dissolve the whole in
sufficient water to make 60 parts.
II. — Squeeze out the lemon juice,
strain it to get rid of the seeds and larger
particles of pulp, etc., heat it to the boil-
ing point, let it cool down, add talc,
shake well together and filter. If it is to
be kept a long time (as on a sea voyage)
a little alcohol is added.
Lime juice. — This may be clarified by
heating it either alone or mixed with a small
quantity of egg albumen, in a suitable
vessel, without stirring, to. near the boil-
ing point of water, until the impurities
have coagulated and either risen to the
top or sunk to the bottom. It is then
filtered into clean bottles, which should
be completely filled and closed (with
pointed corks), so that each cork has to
displace a portion of the liquid to be
inserted. The bottles are sealed and
kept at an even temperature (in a cellar).
In this way the juice may be satisfac-
torily preserved.
Nutmeg Essence. — Oil of nutmeg, 2
drachms; mace, in powder, 1 ounce; al-
cohol, 95 per cent, deodorized, 32 ounces.
Dissolve the oil in the alcohol by agi-
tation, add the mace, agitate, then stop-
per tightly, and macerate 12 hours. Fil-
ter through paper.
Orange Extract. — Grated peel of 24
oranges; alcohol, 1 quart; water, 1 quart;
oil of orange, 4 drachms. Macerate the
orange peel and oil of orange with alco-
hol for 2 weeks. Add distilled water
and filter.
Orange Extract, Soluble.— I.— Pure
oil of orange, 1 1 fluidounces; carbonate
of magnesium, 2 ounces; alcohol, 12
fluidounces; water, quantity sufficient to
make 2 pints.
II. — Dissolve oil of orange in the
alcohol, and rub it with*the carbonate of
magnesium, in a mortar. Pour the mix-
ture into a quart bottle, and fill the bot-
tle with water. Allow to macerate for a
week or more, shaking every day. Then
filter through paper, adding enough
water through the paper to make filtrate
measure 2 pints.
Orange Peel, Soluble Extract.—
Freshly grated orange
rind 1 part
Deodorized alcohol. . . 1 part
Macerate for 4 days and express. Add
the expressed liquid to 10 per cent of its
weight of powdered magnesium carbonate
ESSENCES AND EXTRACTS
317
in a mortar, and rub thoroughly until a
smooth, creamy mixture results; then
gradually add the water, constantly stir-
ring. Let stand for 48 hours, then filter
through paper. Keep in an amber bottle
and cool place. To make syrup of orange,
add 1 part of this extract to 7 parts of
heavy simple syrup.
Peach Extract.—
Linalyl formate
Amyl valerianate. . . .
Fluid extract orris. . .
Oenanthic ether. . . .
Oil rue (pure Ger-
man)
Chloroform
Glycerine
Alcohol, 70 per cent,
120 minims
8 drachms
2 ounces
2 drachms
30 minims
2 drachms
2 ounces
to 3. pints.
Pineapple Essence. — A ripe, but not
too soft, pineapple, weighing about, say,
1 pound, is mashed up in a mortar with
Tokay wine, 6 ounces. The mass is
then brought into a flask with 1 pint of
water, and allowed to stand 2 hours.
Alcohol, 90 per cent, f pint, is then added
and the mixture distilled until 7 quarts
of distillate have been collected. Cog-
nac, 9 ounces, is then added to the dis-
tillation.
Pistachio Essence. —
I. — Essence of almond
Tincture of vanilla
Oil of neroli. .
2 fluidounces
4 fluidounces
1 drop
II. — Oil of orange peel . 4 fluidrachms
Oil of cassia 1 fluidrachm
Oil of bitter almond 15 minims
Oil of calamus. ... 15 minims
Oil of nutmeg 1^ fluidrachms
Oil of clove 30 minims
Alcohol 12 fluidounces
Water 4 fluidounces
Magnesium car-
bonate 2 drachms
Shake together, allow to stand 24
hours, and filter.
Pomegranate Essence. —
Oil of sweet orange 3 parts
Oil of cloves 3 parts
Tincture of vanilla. 15 parts
Tincture of ginger. 10 parts
Maraschino liqueur 150 parts
Tincture of coccion-
ella 165 parts
Distilled water 150 parts
Phosphoric acid,
dilute 45 parts
Alcohol, 95 per cent, quantity suffi-
cient to make 1 000 parts.
Mix and dissolve.
Quince Extract. —
Fluid extract orris. ... 2 ounces
Oenanthic ether H ounces
Linalyl formate 90 minims
Glycerine 2 ounces
Alcohol, 70 per cent, to 3 pints.
Raspberry Syrup, without Alcohol or
Antiseptics. — The majority of producers
of fruit juices are firmly convinced that
the preservation of these juices without
the addition of alcohol, salicylic acid,
etc., is impossible. Herr Steiner's proc-
ess to the contrary is here reproduced:
The fruit is crushed and pressed; the
juice, with 2 per cent of sugar added, is
poured into containers to about three-
quarters of their capacity, and there al-
lowed to ferment. The containers are
stoppered with a cork through which
runs a tube, whose open end is protected
by a bit of gum tubing, the extremity of
which is immersed in a glass filled with
water. It should not go deeper than
-iAo of an inch high. The evolution of
carbonic gas begins in about 4 hours
and is so sharp that the point'of the tube
must not be immersed any deeper.
Ordinarily fermentation ceases on the
tenth day, a fact that may be ascertained
by shaking the container sharply, when,
if it has ceased, no bubbles of gas will
appear on the surface of the water.
The fermented juice is then filtered to
get rid of the pectinic matters, yeast, etc.,
and the filtrate should be poured back on
the filter several times. The juice filters
quickly and comes off very clear. The
necessary amount of sugar to make a
syrup is now added to the liquid and al-
lowed to dissolve gradually for 12 hours.
At the end of this time the liquid is put
on the fire and allowed to boil up at once,
by which operation the solution of the
sugar is made complete. Straining
through a tin strainer and filling into
heated bottles completes the process.
The addition of sugar to the freshly
pressed juice has the advantage of caus-
ing the fermentation to progress to the
full limit, and also to preserve, by the
alcohol produced by fermentation, the
beautiful red color of the juice.
Any fermentation that may be per-
mitted prior to the pressing out of the
juices is at the expense of aroma and
flavor; but whether fermentation occurs
before or after pressure of the berry, the
ordinary alcohol test cannot determine
whether the juice has been completely
fermented (and consequently whether the
pectins have been completely separated)
or not. Since, in spite of the fact that
the liquid remains limpid after 4 days'
318
ESSENCES AND EXTRACTS
fermentation, the production of alcohol
is progressing all the time — a demonstra-
tion that fermentation cannot then be
completed, and that at least 10 days will
be required for this purpose.
An abortive raspberry syrup is always
due to an incomplete or faulty fermenta-
tion, for too often does it occur that in-
completely fermented juices after a little
time lose color and become turbid.
The habit of clarifying juices by shak-
ing up with a bit of paper, talc, etc., or
boiling with albumen is a useless waste
of time and labor. By the process indi-
cated the entire process of clarification
occurs automatically, so to speak.
Deep Red Raspberry Syrup. — A much
deeper and richer color than that ordi-
narily attained may be secured by add-
ing to crushed raspberries, before fer-
mentation, small quantities of sugar, sifted
over the surface in layers. The ethylic
alcohol produced by fermentation in this
manner aids in the extraction of the
red coloring matter of the fruit. More-
over, the fermented juice should never
be cooked over a fire, but by super-
heated steam. Only in this way can
caramelization be completely avoided.
Only sugar free from ultramarine and
chalk should be used in making the
syrup, as these impurities also have a
bad influence on the color.
Raspberry Essences. —
I. — Raspberries, fresh . . 16 ounces
Angelica (California) 6 fluidounces
Brandy (California) 6 ounces
Alcohol 6 ounces
Water, quantity sufficient.
Mash the berries to a pulp in a mortar
or bowl, and transfer to a flask, along
with the Angelica, brandy, alcohol, and
about 8 ounces of water. Let macerate
overnight, then distil off until 32 ounces
have passed over. Color red. The
addition of a trifle of essence of vanilla
improves this essence.
II. — Fresh raspberries. . . 200 grams
Water, distilled 100 grams
Vanilla essence 2 grams
Pulp the raspberries, let stand at a
temperature of about 70° F. for 48 hours,
and then add 100 grams of water. Fifty
grams are then distilled off, and alcohol,
90 per cent, 25 grams, in which 0.01
vanillin has been previously dissolved,
is added to the distillate.
Sarsaparilla, Soluble Extract.—
Pure oil of winter-
green 5 fluidrachms
Pure oil of sassa-
fras 5 fluidrachms
Pure oil of anise . . 5 fluidrachms
Carbonate of mag-
nesium 2i ounces
Alcohol 1 pint
Water, quantity sufficient to make
2 pints.
Dissolve the various oils in the alcohol,
and rub with carbonate of magnesium in
a mortar. Pour the mixture into a
quart bottle, and fill the bottle with
water. Allow to macerate for a week
or more, shaking every day. Then filter
through the paper, adding enough \yater
through the paper to make the finished
product measure 2 pints.
Strawberry Juice. — Put into the water
bath 1,000 parts of distilled water and
600 parts of sugar and boil, with con-
stant skimming, until no more scum
arises. Add 5 parts of citric acid and
continue the boiling until about 1,250
parts are left. Stir in, little by little,
500 parts of fresh strawberries, properly
stemmed, and be particularly careful
not to crush the fruit. When all the
berries are added, cover the vessel, re-
move from the fire, put into a warm place
and let stand, closely covered, for 3 hours,
or until the mass has cooled down to the
surrounding temperature, then strain off
through flannel, being careful not to
crush the berries. Prepare a sufficient
number of pint bottles by filling them
with warm water, putting them into a
kettle of the same and heating them to
boiling, then rapidly emptying and
draining as quickly as possible. Into
these pour the hot juice, cork and seal
the bottles as rapidly as possible. Juice
thus prepared retains all the aroma and
flavor of the fresh berry, and if carefully
corked and sealed up will retain its
properties a year.
Strawberry Essence. —
Strawberries, fresh.. 16 ounces
Angelica (California) 6 fluidounces
Brandy (California) . 6 ounces
Alcohol 8 ounces
Water, quantity sufficient.
Mash the berries to a pulp in a mortar
or bowl, and transfer to a flask, along with
the Angelica, brandy, alcohol, and about
8 ounces of water. Let macerate over-
night, then distil off until 32 ounces have
passed over. Color strawberry red.
The addition of a little essence of vanilla
and a hint of lemon improves this es-
sence.
ESSENCES AND EXTRACTS
319
Tea Extract —
I. — Best Souchong tea. 175 parts
Cinnamon 3 parts
Cloves 3 parts
Vanilla 1 part
Arrack 800 parts
Rum 200 parts
Coarsely powder the cinnamon, clove,
etc., mix the ingredients, and let macer-
ate for 3 days, then filter, press off, and
make up to 1,000 parts, if necessary, by
adding rum. The Souchong may be
replaced by any other brand of tea, and
the place of the arrack may be occupied
by Santa Cruz, or New England rum.
The addition of fluid extract of kola nut
not only improves the taste, but gives the
drink a remarkably stimulating prop-
erty. The preparation makes a clear
solution with either hot or cold water and
keeps well.
II. — Tea, any desirable variety, 16
ounces; glycerine, 4 ounces; hot water,
4 pints; water, sufficient to make 1 pint.
Reduce the tea to a powder, moisten
with sufficient of the glycerine and alco-
hol mixed, with 4 ounces of water added,
pack in percolator, and pour on the alco-
hol (diluted with glycerine and water)
until 12 ounces of percolate have been
obtained. Set this aside, and complete
the percolation with the hot water.
When this has passed through, evapo-
rate to 4 ounces, and add it to the perco-
late first obtained.
Tonka Extract.—
Tonka beans 1 ounce
Magnesium carbonate, quantity suf-
ficient.
Balsam of Peru 2 drachms
Sugar 4 ounces
Alcohol 8 ounces
Water sufficient to make 16 ounces.
Mix the tonka, balsam of Peru, and
magnesia, and rub together, gradually
adding the sugar until a homogeneous
powder is obtained. Pack in a percolator;
mix the alcohol with an equal amount of
water, and pour over the powder, close
the exit of the percolator, and let macer-
ate for 24 to 36 hours, then open the
percolator, and let pass through, gradu-
ally adding water until 16 ounces pass
through.
Vanilla Extracts.— I.— Vanilla, in fine
bits, 250 parts, is put into 1,350 parts of
mixture, of 2,500 parts 95 per cent al-
cohol, and 1,500 parts distilled water.
Cover tightly, put on the water bath,
and digest for 1 hour, at 140° F. Pour
off the liquid and set aside. To the
residue in the bath, add half the remain-
ing water, and treat in the same man-
ner. Pack the vanilla in an extraction
apparatus, and treat with 250 parts of
alcohol and water, mixed in the same pro-
portions as before. Mix the results of
the three infusions first made, filter, and
wash the filter paper with the results of
the percolation, allowing the filtered per-
colate to mingle with the filtrate of the
mixed infusions.
II. — Take 60 parts of the best vanilla
beans, cut into little pieces, and put into
a deep vessel, wrapped with a cloth to
retain the heat as long as possible.
Shake over the vanilla 1 part of potas-
sium carbonate in powder, and immedi-
ately add 240 parts distilled water, in an
active state of ebullition. Cover the
vessel closely, set aside until it is com-
pletely cold, and then add 720 parts
alcohol. Cover closely, and set aside in
a moderately warm place for 15 days,
when the liquid is strained off, the resi-
due pressed, and the whole colate filtered.
The addition of 1 part musk to the
vanilla before pouring on the hot water
improves this essence.
To prepare vanilla fountain syrup
with extracts I or II, mix 25 minims of the
extract with 1 pint simple syrup. Color
with caramel.
III. — Vanilla beans, cut
fine 1 ounce
Sugar 3 ounces
Alcohol, 50 per cent. 1 pint
Beat sugar and vanilla together to a
fine powder. Pour on the dilute alcohol,
cork the vessel, and let stand for 2 weeks,
shaking it up 2 or 3 times a day.
IV. — Vanilla beans,
chopped fine. . . 30 parts
Potassium carbon-
ate 1 part
Boiling water. . . . 1,450 parts
Alcohol 450 parts
Essence of musk. . 1 part
Dissolve the potassium carbonate in
the boiling water, add the vanilla, cover
the vessel, and let stand in a mpderately
warm place until cold. Transfer to a
wide-mouthed jar, add the alcohol, cork,
and let macerate for 15 days; then decant
the clear essence and filter the remainder.
Mix the two liquids and add the essence
of musk.
V. — Cut 60 parts of best vanilla beans
into small bits; put into a deep vessel,
which should be well wrapped in a wool-
en cloth to retain heat as long as possible.
Shake over the beans 1 part of potassium
carbonate, in powder, then pour over the
mass 240 parts distilled water, in an
320
ESSENCES AND EXTRACTS
active state of ebullition, cover the vessel
closely, and set aside in a moderately
warm place. When quite cold add 720
parts alcohol, close the vessel tightly,
and set aside in a moderately warm
place, to macerate for 15 days, then
strain off, press out, and set aside for a
day or two. The liquid may then be
filtered and bottled. The addition of a
little musk to the beans before pouring
on the hot water, is thought by many to
greatly improve the product. One part
of this extract added to 300 parts simple
syrup is excellent for fountain purposes.
VI. — Vanilla beans 8 ounces
Glycerine 6 ounces
Granulated sugar. . . 1 pound
Water 4 pints
Alcohol of cologne
spirits 4 pints
Cut or grind the beans very fine; rub
with the glycerine and put in a wooden
keg; dissolve the sugar in the water, first
heating the water, if convenient; mix the
water and spirits, and add to the vanilla;
pour in keg. Keep in a warm place from
3 to 6 months before using. Shake often.
To clear, percolate through the dregs. If
a dark, rich color is desired add a little
sugar coloring.
VII.— Vanilla beans,
good quality.. 16 ounces
Alcohol 64 fluidounces
Glycerine 24 fluidounces
Water 10 fluidounces
Dilute alcohol, quantity sufficient.
Mix and macerate, with frequent agi-
tation, for 3 weeks, filter, and add dilute
alcohol to make 1 gallon.
VIIL— Vanilla beans,
good quality. . . 8 ounces
Pumice stone,
lump 1 ounce
Rock candy 8 ounces
Alcohol and water, of each a suffi-
ciency.
Cut the beans to fine shreds and trit-
urate well with the pumice stone and rock
candy. Place the whole in a percolator
and percolate with a menstruum com-
posed of 9 parts alcohol and 7 parts water
until the percolate passes through clear.
Bring the bulk up to 1 gallon with the
same menstruum and set aside to ripen.
IX. — Cut up, as finely as possible, 20
parts of vanilla bean and with 40 parts of
milk sugar (rendered as dry as possible
by being kept in a drying closet until it
no longer loses weight) rub to a coarse
powder. Moisten with 10 parts of
dilute alcohol, pack somewhat loosely in
a closed percolator and let stand for 2
hours. Add 40 parts of dilute alcohol,
close the percolator, and let stand 8 days.
At the end of this time add 110 parts of
dilute alcohol, and let pass through. The
residue will repay working over. Dry it
well, add 5 parts of vanillin, and 110
parts of milk sugar and pass through a
sieve, then treat as before.
The following are cheap extracts:
X. — Vanilla beans,
chopped fine . . 5 parts
Tonka beans,
powdered 10 parts
Sugar, powdered . 14 parts
Alcohol, 95 per
cent 25 parts
Water, quantity sufficient to
make 100 parts.
Rub the sugar and vanilla to a fine
powder, add the tonka beans, and incor-
porate. Pack into a filter, and pour on
10 parts of alcohol, cut with 15 parts of
water; close the faucet, and let macerate
overnight. In the morning percolate
with the remaining alcohol, added to 80
parts of water, until 100 parts of perco-
late pass through.
XL — Vanilla beans 4 ounces
Tonka beans 8 ounces
Deodorized alcohol 8 pints
Simple syrup 2 pints
Cut and bruise the vanilla beans,
afterwards bruising the tonka beans.
Macerate for 14 days in one-half of the
spirit, with occasional agitation. Pour
off" the clear liquor and set aside; pour
the remaining spirits in the magma, and
heat by means of the water bath to about
170° F. in a loosely covered vessel. Keep
at this temperature 2 or 3 hours, and
strain through flannel, with slight pres-
sure. Mix the two portions of liquid,
and filter through felt. Add the syrup.
White Pine and Tar Syrup. —
White pine bark .... 75 parts
Wild cherry bark. ... 75 parts
Spikenard root. ... 10 parts
Balm of Gilead buds 10 parts
Sanguinaria root. ... 8 parts
Sassafras bark 7 parts
Sugar 750 parts
Chloroform 6 parts
Syrup of tar 75 parts
Alcohol, enough.
Water, enough.
Syrup enough to make 1,000 parts.
Reduce the first six ingredients to a
coarse powder and by using a menstruum
composed of 1 in 3 alcohol, obtain 500
parts of a tincture from them. In this
ESSENCES AND EXTRACTS
dissolve the sugar, add the syrup of tar
and the chloroform, and, finally, enough
syrup to bring the measure of the fin-
ished product up to 1,000 parts.
Wild Cherry Extract —
Oenanthic ether. . 2 fluidrachms
Amyl acetate 2 fluidrachms
Oil of bitter al-
monds (free from
hydrocyanic acid) 1 fluidrachm
Fluid extract of wild
cherry 3 fluidounces
Glycerine.. 2 fluidounces
Deodorized alcohol enough to make
16 fluidounces.
HARMLESS COLORS FOR USE IN
SYRUPS, ETC. :
Red. — Cochineal syrup, prepared as
follows:
I. — Cochineal in coarse
powder 6 parts
Potassium carbon-
ate 3 parts
Distilled water 15 parts
Alcohol, 95 per
cent 12 parts
Simple syrup to make 500 parts.
Rub the cochineal and potassium to-
gether, adding the water and alcohol
little by little, under constant trituration.
Let stand overnight, add the syrup, and
filter.
II. — Carmine, in fine
powder 1 part
Stronger ammonia
water 4 parts
Distilled water to make 24 parts.
Rub up the carmine and ammonia and
to the solution add the water, little by
little, under constant trituration. If in
standing this shows a tendency to sepa-
rate, a drop or two of ammonia will cor-
rect the trouble.
Besides these there is caramel, which,
of course, you know.
Pink.—
III. — Carmine 1 part
Liquor potassse .... 6 parts
Distilled water 40 parts
Mix. If the color is too high, dilute
with distilled water until the requisite
color is obtained.
To Test Fruit Juices and Syrups for
Aniline Colors. — Add to a sample of the
syrup or juice, in a test tube, its own
volume of distilled water, and agitate to
get a thorough mixture, then add a few
drops of the standard solution of lead
diacetate, shake, and filter. If the syrup
is free from aniline coloring matter the
filtrate will be clear as crystal, since the
lead salt precipitates natural coloring
matters, but has no effect upon the ani-
line colors.
To Test Fruit Juices for Salicylic Acid.
—Put a portion of the juice to be tested
in a large test tube, add the same volume
of ether, close the mouth of the tube and
shake gently for 30 seconds. Set aside
until the liquid separates into two layers.
Draw off the supernatant ethereal por-
tion and evaporate to dryness in a cap-
sule. Dissolve the residue in alcohol,
dilute with 3 volumes of water, and add
1 drop of tincture of iron chloride. If
salicylic acid be present the character-
istic purple color will instantly disappear.
Syrups Selected from the Formulary
of the Pharmaceutical Society of
Antwerp. —
Dionine Syrup. — Dionine, 1 part; dis-
tilled water, 19 parts; simple syrup, 1,980
parts. Mix.
Jaborandi Syrup. — Tincture of jabor-
andi, 1 part; simple syrup, 19 parts. Mix.
Convallaria Syrup. — Extract of con-
vallaria, 1 part; distilled water, 4 parts;
simple syrup, 95 parts. Dissolve the ex-
tract in the water and mix.
Codeine Phosphate Syrup. — Codeine phos-
phate, 3 parts; distilled water, 17 parts;
simple syrup, 980 parts. Dissolve the co-
deine in the water and mix with the syrup.
Licorice Syrup. — Incised licorice root, 4
parts; dilute solution of ammonia, 1 part;
water, 20 parts. Mix and macerate for
12 hours at 58° to 66° F. with frequent
agitation; press, heat the liquid to boil-
ing, then evaporate to two parts on the
water bath; add alcohol, 2 parts; allow to
stand for 12 hours; then filter. Add to
the filtrate enough simple syrup to bring
the final weight to 20 parts.
Maize Stigma Syrup. — Extract of maize
stigmas, 1 part; distilled water, 4 parts;
simple syrup, 95 parts. Dissolve the ex-
tract in the water, filter, and add the syrup.
Ammonium Valerianate Solution. — Am-
monium valerianate, 2 parts; alcoholic ex-
tract of valerian, 1 part; distilled water,
47 parts.
Kola Tincture. — Powdered kola nuts, 1
part; alcohol, 60 per cent, 5 parts. Mace-
rate for 6 days, press, and filter.
Bidet's Liquid Vesicant. — Tincture of
cantharides, tincture of rosemary, chloro-
form, equal parts.
Peptone Wine. — Dried peptone, 1 part;
Malaga wine, 19 parts. Dissolve without
heat and filter after standing for several
days.
ETCHING
Etching
General Instructions for Etching. —
In etching, two factors come into con-
sideration, (1) that which covers that
part of the metal not exposed to the
etching fluid (the resist), and (2) the
etching fluid itself.
In the process, a distinction is to be
made between etching in relief and
etching in intaglio. In relief etching,
the design is drawn or painted upon the
surface with the liquid etching-ground,
so that after etching and removal of the
etching-ground, it appears raised. In
intaglio etching, the whole surface is
covered with the etching-ground, and
the design put on with a needle; the
ground being thus removed at the points
touched by the drawing, the latter, after
etching and removal of the etching-
ground, is sunken.
Covering Agents or Resists. — The plate
is enclosed by a border made of grafting
wax (yellow beeswax, 8 parts; pine rosin,
10 parts; beef tallow, 2 parts; turpentine,
10 parts); or a mixture of yellow wax,
8 parts; lard, 3 parts; Burgundy pitch,
\ part. This mixture is also used to
cover the sides of vessels to be etched.
Another compound consists of wax, 5
parts; cobbler's wax,2i parts; turpentine,
1 part.
Etching - Ground. — I. — Soft : Wax,
2 parts; asphalt, 1 part; mastic, 1 part.
II. — Wax, 3 parts; asphalt, 4 parts.
III. — Mastic, 16 parts; Burgundy pitch,
50 parts; melted wax, 125 parts; and
melted asphalt, 200 parts added succes-
sively, and, after cooling, turpentine oil,
500 parts. If the ground should be deep
black, lampblack is added.
Hard: Burgundy pitch, 125 parts;
rosin, 125 parts, melted; and walnut oil,
100 parts, added, the whole to be boiled
until it can be drawn out into long
threads.
Etching-Ground for Copper Engrav-
ing.— White wax, 120 parts; mastic, 15
parts; Burgundy pitch, 60 parts; Syrian
asphalt, 120 parts, melted together; and
5 parts concentrated solution of rubber
in rubber oil added.
Ground for Relief Etching. — I. — Syrian
asphalt, 500 parts, dissolved in turpen-
tine oil, 1,000 parts. II. — Asphalt, rosin,
and wax, 200 parts of each, are melted,
and dissolved in turpentine oil, 1,200
parts. The under side of the metal plate
is protected by a coating of a spirituous
shellac solution, or by a solution of as-
phalt, 300 parts, in benzol, 600 parts.
For Strongly Acid Solutions. — I.-—
Black pitch, 1 part; Japanese wax, 2
parts; rosin, 1^ parts; Damar rosin, 1
part, melted together and mixed with
turpentine oil, 1 part. II. — Heavy black
printers' ink, 3 parts; rosin, 1 part; wax,
1 part.
For electro-etching, the following
ground is recommended: Wax, 4 parts;
asphalt, 4 parts; pitch, 1 part.
If absolute surety is required respect-
ing the resistance of the etching-ground
to the action of the etching fluids, several
etching-grounds are put on, one over the
other; first (for instance), a solution of
rubber in benzol, then a spirituous shel-
lac solution, and a third stratum of
asphalt dissolved in turpentine oil.
If the etching is to be of different de-
grees of depth, the places where it is to
be faint are stopped out with varnish,
after they are deep enough, and the ob-
ject is put back into the bath for further
etching.
For putting on a design before the
etching, the following method may be
used: Cover the metal plate, tin plate
for example, with a colored or colorless
spirit varnish; after drying, cover this, in
a dark room, with a solution of gelatin,
5 parts, and red potassium chromate, 1
part, in water, 100 parts; or . with a
solution of albumen, 2 parts; ammonium
bichromate, 2 parts, in water, 200 parts.
After drying, put the plate, covered with
a stencil, in a copying or printing frame,
and expose to light. The sensitive gela-
tin stratum will become insoluble at the
places exposed. Place in water, and the
gelatin will be dissolved at the places
covered by the stencil; dry, and remove
the spirit varnish from the places with
spirit, then put into the etching fluid.
Etching Fluids. —The etching fluid is
usually poured over the metallic surface,
which is enclosed in a border, as de-
scribed before. If the whole object is to
be put into the fluid, it must be entirely
covered with the etching-ground. After
etching it is washed with pure water,
dried with a linen cloth, and the etching-
ground is then washed off with turpentine
oil or a light volatile camphor oil. The
latter is very good for the purpose.
Etching Fluids for Iron and Steel. —
I. — Pure nitric acid, diluted for light
etching with 4 to 8 parts of water, for
deep etching with an equal weight of
water.
II. — Tartaric acid, 1 part, by weight;
mercuric chloride, 15 parts, by weight;
water, 420 parts; nitric acid, 16 to 20
drops, if 1 part equals 28 \ grains.
ETCHING
III. — Spirit, 80 per cent, 120 parts, by
weight; pure nitric acid, 8 parts; silver
nitrate, 1 part.
IV. — Pure acetic acid, 30 per cent, 40
parts, by weight; absolute alcohol, 10
parts; pure nitric acid, 10 parts.
V. — Fuming nitric acid, 10 parts, by
weight; pure acetic acid, 30 per cent, 50
parts, diluted with water if necessary or
desired.
VI. — A chromic acid solution.
VII. — Bromine. 1 part; water, 100
parts. Or — mere uric chloride, 1 part;
water, 30 parts.
VIII. — Antimonic chloride, 1 part;
water, 6 parts; hydrochloric acid, 6
parts.
For Delicate Etchings on Steel.— I. —
Iodine, 2 jr.arts; potassium iodide, 4 parts;
water, 40 parts.
II. — Silver acetate, 8 parts, by weight;
alcohol, 250 parts; water, 250 parts; pure
nitric acid, 260 parts; ether, 64 parts;
oxalic acid, 4 parts.
III. — A copper chloride solution.
Etching Powder for Iron and Steel. —
Blue vitriol, 50 parts; common salt, 50
parts; mixed and moistened with water.
For lustrous figures on a dull ground,
as on sword blades, the whole surface is
polished, the portions which are to re-
main bright covered with stencils and
the object exposed to the fumes of nitric
acid. This is best done by pouring sul-
phuric acid, 20 parts, over common salt,
10 parts.
Relief Etching of Copper, Steel, and
Brass. — Instead of nitric acid, which has
a tendency to lift up the etching-ground,
by evolution of gases, it is better to use a
mixture of potassium bichromate, 150
parts; water, 800 parts; and concentrated
sulphuric acid, 200 parts. The etching
is slow, but even, and there is no odor.
For Etching Copper, Brass, and Tom-
bac.— Pure nitric acid diluted with water
to 18° Be. The bubbles of gas given out
should immediately be removed with a
feather that the etching may be even.
Another compound consists of a boil-
ing solution of potassium chlorate, 2
parts, in water, 20 parts, poured into a
mixture of nitric acid, 10 parts, and
water, 70 parts. For delicate etchings
dilute still more with 100 to 200 parts of
water.
Etching Fluid for Copper.— Weak: A
boiling solution of potassium chlorate,
20 parts, in water, 200 parts, poured into
a mixture of pure hydrochloric acid, 20
parts; water, 500 parts.
Stronger: A boiling solution of potas-
sium chlorate, 25 parts, in water, 250
Earts, poured into a mixture of pure
ydrochloric acid, 250 parts; water, 400
parts.
Very strong: A boiling solution of
potassium chlorate, 30 parts, in water,
300 parts, poured into a mixture of pure
hydrochloric acid, 300 parts; water, 300
parts.
For etching on copper a saturated
solution of bromine in dilute hydro-
chloric acid may also be used; or a mix-
ture of potassium bichromate, £ part;
water, 1 part; crude nitric acid, 3 parts.
The following are also much used for
copper and copper alloys:
I. — A copper chloride solution acidi-
fied with hydrochloric acid.
II. — Copper nitrate dissolved in water.
III. — A ferric chloride solution of 30°
to 45° Be. If chrome gelatin or chrome
albumen is used for the etching-ground,
a spirituous ferric chloride solution is
employed. The etching process can be
made slower by adding common salt to
the ferric chloride solution.
Matt Etching of Copper.— White vi-
triol, 1 to 5 parts; common salt, 1 part;
concentrated sulphuric acid, 100 parts;
nitric acid (36° Be.), 200 parts, mixed
together. The sulphuric acid is to be
poured carefully into the nitric acid, not
the reverse.
Etching Fluid for Brass. — Nitric acid,
8 parts; mixed with water, 80 parts; into
this mixture pour a hot solution of potas-
sium chlorate, 3 parts, in water, 50 parts.
Etching Fluid for Brass to Make
Stencils.— Mix nitric acid, of 1.3 specific
weight, with enough fuming nitric acid
to give a deep yellow color. This mix-
ture acts violently, and will eat through
the strongest sheet brass.
Etching Fluid for Zinc. — Boil pounded
gallnuts, 40 parts, with water, 560 parts,
until the whole amounts to 200 parts;
filter, and add nitric acid, 2 parts, and a
few drops of hydrochloric acid. Ferric
chloride and antimonic chloride solutions
may also be used to etch zinc.
Relief Etching of Zinc.— The design is
to be drawn with a solution of platinum
chloride, 1 part, and rubber, 1 part, in
water, 12 parts. The zinc plate is placed
in dilute sulphuric acid (1 in 16). The
black drawing will remain as it is.
Another compound for the drawing is
made of blue vitriol, 2 parts; copper
chloride, 3 parts; water, 64 parts; pure
hydrochloric acid, 1.1 specific weight.
After the drawing is made, lay the plate
in dilute nitric acid (1 in 8).
ETCHING
Etching Fluid for Aluminum. — Dilute
hydrochloric acid serves this purpose.
Aluminum containing iron can be mat-
ted with soda lye, followed by treatment
with nitric acid. The lye dissolves the
aluminum, and the nitric acid dissolves
the iron. Aluminum bronze is etched
with nitric acid.
Etching Fluid for Tin or Pewter.—
Ferric chloride, or highly diluted nitric
acid.
Etching Fluids for Silver.— I.— Dilute
pure nitric acid.
II. — Nitric acid (specific weight,
1.185), 172 parts; water, 320 parts;
potassium bichromate, 30 parts.
Etching Fluid for Gold. — Dilute aqua
regia (= nitric and sulphuric acids, in the
proportion of 1 in 3).
Etching Fluid for Copper, Zinc, and
Steel. — A mixture of 4 parts of acetic
acid (30 per cent), and alcohol, 1 part;
to this is added gradually, nitric acid, 1
part.
Etching Fluid for Lead, Antimony,
and Britannia Metal. — Dilute nitric acid.
Etching Powder for Metals (Tin,
Silver, Iron, German Silver, Copper, and
Zinc). — Blue vitriol, 1 part; ferric oxide,
4 parts. The powder, moistened, is ap-
plied to the places to be etched, as, for
instance, knife blades. Calcined green
vitriol can also be used.
Electro -Etching. —This differs from
ordinary etching in the use of a bath,
which does not of itself affect the metal,
but is made capable of doing so by the
galvanic current.
Ordinary etching, seen under the
microscope, consists of a succession of
uneven depressions, which widen out
considerably at a certain depth. In elec-
tro-etching, the line under the micro-
scope appears as a perfectly even furrow,
not eaten out beneath, however deeply
cut. The work is, accordingly, finer and
sharper; the fumes from the acids are
also avoided, and the etching can be
modified by regulation of the current.
The preparation of the surface, by cov-
ering, stopping-put, etc., is the same as
in ordinary etching. At some uncovered
place a conducting wire is soldered on
with soft solder, and covered with a coat
of varnish. The plate is then suspended
in the bath, and acts as the anode, with
another similar plate for the cathode.
If gradations in etching are desired, tin
plates are taken out after a time, rinsed,
and covered, and returned to the bath.
For the bath dilute acids are used,
or saline solutions. Thus, for copper,
dilute sulphuric acid, 1 in 20. For cop-
per and brass, a blue vitriol solution.
For zinc, white vitriol or a zinc chloride
solution. For steel and iron, green
vitriol, or an ammonium chloride solu-
tion. For tin, a tin-salt solution. For
silver, a silver nitrate or potassium cya-
nide solution. For gold and platinum,
gold chloride and platinum chloride
solutions, or a potassium cyanide solu-
tion. For electro-etching a Leclauche or
Bunsen battery is to be recommended.
In the former, the negative zinc pole is
connected with a plate of the same metal
as that to be etched, and the positive iron
pole with the plate to be etched. In the
Bunsen battery, the carbon pole is con-
nected with the object to be etched, the
zinc pole with the metal plate.
Etching Bath for Brass.— 1.— Mix
nitric acid (specified gravity, 1.4), 8
parts, with water, 80 parts. 2. — Chlorate
of potash, 3 parts, dissolved in 50 parts
of water. Mix 1 and 2. For protecting
those portions which are not to be etched,
any suitable acid-proof composition can
be used.
Etching on Copper. — I. — In order to
do regular and quick etching on copper
take a copper plate silvered on the etch-
ing side. Trace on this plate, either with
varnish or lithographic ink, the design.
When the tracing is dry, place the plate
in an iron bath, using a battery. The
designs traced with me varnish or ink
are not attacked by the etching fluid.
When the plate is taken from the bath
and has been washed and dried, remove
the varnish or ink with essence of turpen-
tine; next pour mercury on the places
reserved by the varnish or ink; the mer-
cury will attack the silvered portions and
the etching is quickly made. When the
mercury has done its duty gather up the
excess and return to the bottle with a
paper funnel. Wash the plate in strong
alum water, and heat.
II. — The plate must be first polished
either with emery or fine pumice stone,
and after it has been dried with care,
spread thereon a varnish composed of
equal parts of yellow wax and essence
of turpentine. The solution of the wax
in the essence is accomplished in the
cold; next a little oil of turpentine and
some lampblack are added. This var-
nish is allowed to dry on, away from
dust and humidity. When dry, trace
the design with a very fine point. Make
a border with modeling wax, so as to pre-
vent the acid from running off. Pour on
nitric acid if the plate is of copper, or
ETCHING
325
hydrochloric acid diluted with water if
the plate is of zinc, allow the acid to act
according to the desired depth of the en-
graving; wash several times and remove
the varnish by heating the plate lightly.
Wash with essence of turpentine and dry
well in sawdust or in the stove. For
relief engraving the designs are traced
before the engraving on the plate with
the resist varnish instead of covering the
plate entirely. These designs must be
delicately executed and without laps, as
the acid eats away all the parts not pro-
tected by the varnish.
Etching Fluids for Copper.— I.— A
new etching fluid for copper plate is hy-
drogen peroxide, to which a little dilute
ammonia water is added. It is said to
bite in very rapidly and with great regu-
larity and uniformity.
II. — Another fluid is fuming hydro-
chloric acid (specific gravity, 1.19), 10
parts; water, 70 parts. To this add a
solution of potassium chlorate, 2 parts,
dissolved in 20 parts of hot water. If
the articles to be etched are very delicate
and fine this should be diluted with from
100 to 200 parts of water.
ETCHING ON GLASS.
Names, designs, etc., can be etched on
glass in three ways: First, by means of an
engraving wheel, a method which requires
some manual skill. Second, by means of a
sand blast, making a stencil of the name,
fixing this on the glass, and then, by means
of a blast of air, blowing sand on the glass.
Third, by the use of hydrofluoric acid.
The glass is covered with beeswax, par-
affine wax, or some acid resisting ink or
varnish; the name or device is then
etched out of the wax by means of a knife,
and the glass dipped in hydrofluoric acid,
which eats away the glass at those parts
where the wax has been cut away.
Fancy work, ornamental figures, let-
tering, and monograms are most easily
and neatly cut into glass by the sand-
blast process. Lines and figures on
tubes, jars, etc., may be deeply etched by
smearing the surface of the glass with
beeswax, drawing the lines with a steel
point, and exposing the glass to the fumes
of hydrofluoric acid. This acid is ob-
tained by putting powdered fluorspar
into a tray made of sheet lead and pour-
ing sulphuric acid on it, after which the
tray is slightly warmed. The propor-
tions will vary with the purity of the
materials used, fluorspar (except when in
crystals) being generally mixed with a
large quantity of other matter. Enough
acid to make a thin paste with the pow-
dered spar will be about right. Where a
lead tray is not at hand, the powdered
spar may be poured on the glass and the
acid poured on it and left for some time.
As a general rule, the marks are opaque,
but sometimes they are transparent. In
this case cut them deeply and fill up with
black varnish, if they are required to be
very plain, as in the case of graduated
vessels. Liquid hydrofluoric acid has
been recommended for etching, but is
not always suitable, as it leaves the
surface on which it acts transparent.
There are two methods of marking
bottles — dry etching, or by stamping
with etching inks. The first process is
usually followed in glass factories. A
rubber stamp is necessary for this proc-
ess, and the letters should be made as
large and clean cut as possible without
crowding them too much. Besides this,
an etching powder is required.
A small quantity of the powder is
poured into a porcelain dish, and this is
placed on a sand bath or over a gentle
fire, and heated until it is absolutely dry,
so that it can be rubbed down to an im-
palpable powder.
The bottle or other glass to be marked
must be perfectly clean and dry. The
etching powder takes better when the
vessel is somewhat warm. The stamp
should be provided with a roller which is
kept constantly supplied with a viscid oil
which it distributes on the stamp and
which the stamp transfers to the glass
surface. The powder is dusted on the
imprint thus made, by means of a camel's-
hair brush. Any surplus falling on the
unoiled surface may be removed with a
fine long-haired pencil. The printed
bottle is transferred to a damp place and
kept for several minutes, the dampness
aiding the etching powder in its work on
the glass surface. The bottle is then well
washed in plain water.
Glass cylinders, large flasks, carboys,
etc., may be treated in a somewhat differ-
ent manner. The stamp here is inserted,
face upward, between two horizontal
boards, in such a manner that its face
projects about a quarter of a millimeter
(say 0.01 inch) above the surface. Oil
is applied to the surface, after which the
cylinder, carboy, or what not, is rolled
along the board and over the stamp.
The design is thus neatly transferred to
the glass surface, and the rest of the
operation is as in the previous case.
For an etching ink for glassware the
following is recommended:
Ammonium fluoride . . 2 drachms
Barium sulphate 2 drachms
Reduce to a fine powder in a mortar,
326
ETCHING
then transfer to a lead dish and make into
a thin writing-cream with hydrofluoric
acid or fuming sulphuric acid. Use a
piece of lead to stir the mixture. The
ink may be put up in bottles coated with
paraffine, which can be done by heating
the bottle, pouring in some melted paraf-
fine, and letting it flow all around. The
writing is done with a quill, and in about
half a minute the ink is washed off.
Extreme caution must be observed in
handling the acid, since when brought in
contact with the skin it produces dan-
gerous sores very difficult to heal. The
vapor is also dangerously poisonous
when inhaled.
Hydrofluoric Formulas. — I. — Dissolve
about 0.72 ounces fluoride of soda with
0.14 ounces sulphate of potash in ^ pint
of water. Make another solution of 0.28
ounces chloride of zinc and 1.30 ounces
hydrochloric acid in an equal quantity of
water. Mix the solutions and apply to
the glass vessel with a pin or brush. At
the end of half an hour the design should
be sufficiently etched.
II. — A mixture consisting . of ammo-
nium fluoride, common salt, and carbon-
ate of soda is prepared, and then placed
in a gutta-percha bottle containing fum-
ing hydrofluoric acid and concentrated
sulphuric acid. In a separate vessel
which is made of lead, potassium fluoride
is mixed with hydrochloric acid, and a
little of this solution is added to the
former, along with a small quantity of
sodium silicate and ammonia. Some
of the solution is dropped upon a rubber
pad, and by means of a suitable rubber
stamp, bearing the design which is to be
reproduced, is transferred to the glass
vessel that is to be etched.
Etching with Wax. — Spread wax or
a preservative varnish on the glass, and
trace on this wax or varnish the letters
or designs. If letters are desired, trace
them by hand or by the use of letters
cut put in tin, which apply on the wax,
the inside contours being taken with a
fine point. When this is done, remove
the excess of wax from the glass, leav-
ing only the full wax letters undis-
turbed. Make an edge of wax all along
the glass plate so as to prevent the acid
from running over when you pour it on
to attack the glass. At the end of 3 to 4
hours remove the acid, wash the glass
well with hot water, next pour on essence
of turpentine or alcohol to take off the
wax or the preservative varnish. Pass
again through clean water; the glass
plate will have become dead wherever the
acid has eaten in, only the letters remain-
ing polished. For fancy designs it suf-
fices to put on the back of the plate a
black or colored varnish, or tin foil, etc.,
to obtain a brilliant effect.
Etching Glass by Means of Glue. — It
is necessary only to cover a piece of ordi-
nary or flint glass with a coat of glue dis-
solved in water in order to see that the
layer of glue, upon contracting through
the effect of drying, becomes detached
from the glass and removes therefrom
numerous scales of varying thickness.
The glass thus etched presents a sort of
regular and decorative design similar to
the flowers of frost deposited on window-
panes in winter. When salts that are
readily crystallizable and that exert no
chemical action upon the gelatin are
dissolved in the latter the figures etched
upon the glass exhibit a crystalline ap-
pearance that recalls fern fronds.
Hyposulphite of soda and chlorate and
nitrate of potash produce nearly the same
effects. A large number of mineral sub-
stances are attacked by gelatin. Tough-
ened glass is easily etched, and the same
is the case with fluorspar and polished
marble. A piece of rock crystal, cut at
light angles with the axis and coated with
isinglass, the action of which seems to be
particularly energetic, is likewise at-
tacked at different points, and the parts
detached present a corichoidal appear-
ance. The contraction of the gelatin
may be rendered visible by applying a
coating of glue to sheets of cardboard or
lead, which bend backward in drying
and assume the form of an irregular
cylinder.
Such etching of glass and different
mineral substances by the action of gela-
tin may be employed for the decoration
of numerous objects.
Dissolve some common glue in ordi-
nary water, heated by a water bath, and
add 6 per cent of its weight of potash
alum. After the glue has become per-
fectly melted, homogeneous, and of the
consistency of syrup, apply a layer, while
it is still hot, to a glass object by means
of a brush. If the object is of ground
glass the action of the glue will be still
more energetic. After half an hour ap-
ply a second coat in such a way as to ob-
tain a smooth, transparent surface desti-
tute of air bubbles. After the glue has
become so hard that it no longer yields to
the pressure of the finger nail (say, in
about 24 hours), put thfe article in a
warmer place, in which the temperature
must not exceed 105° F. When the
object is removed from the oven, after a
few hours, the glue will detach itself with
ETCHING
327
a noise and removes with it numerous
flakes of glass. All that the piece then
requires is to be carefully washed and
dried.
The designs thus obtained are not al-
ways the same, the thickness of the coat
of glue, the time of drying, and various
other conditions seeming to act to modify
the form and number of the flakes de-
tached.
It is indispensable to employ glass
objects of adequate thickness, since, in
covering mousseline glass with a layer of
glue, the mechanical action that it has to
support during desiccation is so powerful
that it will break with an explosion.
Glue, therefore, must not be allowed to
dry in glass vessels, since they would be
corroded and broken in a short time.
Indelible Labels on Bottles. -i-To affix
indelible labels on bottles an etching
liquid is employed which is produced as
follows:
Liquid I, in one bottle. — Dissolve 36
parts of sodium fluoride in 500 parts of
distilled water and add 7 parts of potas-
sium sulphate.
Liquid II, in another bottle. — Dissolve
zinc chloride, 14 parts, in 500 parts of dis-
tilled water, and add 65 parts of concen-
trated hydrochloric acid.
For use mix equal parts together and
add a little dissolved India ink to render
the writing more visible.
The mixing cannot, however, be con-
ducted in a vessel. It is best to use a
cube of paraffine which has been hol-
lowed out.
Etching on Marble or Ivory (see
also Ivory). — Cover the objects with a
coat of wax dissolved in 90 per cent
alcohol, then trace the desired designs
by removing the wax with a sharp
tool and distribute on the tracing the
following mixture: Hydrochloric acid,
1 part; acetic acid, 1 part. Repeat
this operation several times, until the
desired depth is attained. Then take
off the varnish with alcohol. The etch-
ing may be embellished, filling up the
hollows with any colored varnish, by
wiping the surface with a piece of linen
fixed on a stick, to rub the varnish into
the cavities after it has been applied with
a brush. The hollows may be gilded or
silvered by substituting "mixtion" for
the varnish and applying on this mixtion
a leaf of gold or silver, cut in pieces a
little larger than the design to be cov-
ered; press down the gold by means of a
soft brush so as to cause it to penetrate to
the bottom; let dry and remove the pro-
truding edges.
Etching on Steel.— The print should be
heavily inked and powdered with drag-
on's blood several times. After each
powdering heat slightly and additional
powder will stick, forming a heavy coat-
ing in 2 or 3 operations. Before pro-
ceeding to heat up, the plate should re-
ceive a light etching in a weak solution
of the acid described later on. The
purpose of this preliminary etching is to
clean up the print, so that the lines will
not tend to thicken, as would be the case
otherwise. Next a good strong heating
should be given. On top the dragon's
blood plumbago may be used in addition.
For etching use nitric acid mixed with
an even amount of acetic acid. Some
operators use vinegar, based on the same
theory. When commencing the etching,
start with a weak solution and increase as
soon as the plate is deep enough to allow
another powdering. If the operator is
familiar with lithography, and under-
stands rolling up the print with a litho-
roller, the etching of steel is not harder
than etching on zinc.
Liquids for Etching Steel.—
I. — Iodine 2 parts
Potassium iodide. . 5 parts
Water 40 parts
II.— Nitric acid 60 parts
Water 120 parts
Alcohol . 200 parts
Copper nitrate .... 8 parts
III. — Glacial acetic acid . 4 parts
Nitric acid 1 part
Alcohol 1 part
IV. — Mix 1 ounce sulphate of copper, £
ounce alum, \ teaspoonf ul of salt (reduced
to powder), with 1 gill of vinegar and 20
drops of nitric acid. This fluid can be
used either for etching deeply or for
frosting, according to the time it is al-
lowed to act. The parts of the work
which are not to be etched should be
protected with beeswax or some similar
substance.
V. — Nitric acid, 60 parts; water, 120
parts; alcohol, 200 parts; and copper ni-
trate, 8 parts. Keep in a glass-stoppered
bottle. To use the fluid, cover the sur-
face to be marked with a thin even coat
of wax and mark the lines with a ma-
chinist's scriber. Wrap clean cotton
waste around the end of the scriber or a
stick, and dip in the fluid, applying it to
the marked surface. In a few minutes
the wax may be scraped off, when fine
lines will appear where the scriber
marked the wax. The drippings from a
lighted wax candle can be used for the
ETCHING— EXPLOSIVES
coating, and this may be evenly spread
with a knife heated in the candle flame.
VI.— For Hardened Steel.— Heat an
iron or an old pillar-file with a smooth
side, and with it spread a thin, even coat
of beeswax over the brightened surface to
be etched. With a sharp lead pencil
(which is preferable to a scriber) write
or mark as wanted through the wax so as
to be sure to strike the steel surface.
Then daub on with a stick etching acid
made as follows: Nitric acid, 3 parts;
muriatic acid, 1 part. If a lead pencil
has been used the acid will begin to bub-
ble immediately. Two or three minutes
of the bubbling or foaming will be suf-
ficient for marking; then soak up the
acid with a small piece of blotting paper
and remove the beeswax with a piece of
cotton waste wet with benzine, and if
the piece be small enough dip it into a
saturated solution of sal soda, or if the
piece be large swab over it with a piece of
waste. This neutralizes the remaining
acid and prevents rusting, which oil will
not do.
If it is desired to coat the piece with
beeswax without heating it, dissolve
pure beeswax in benzine until of the
consistency of thick cream and pour on
to the steel, and even spread it by rocking
or blowing, and lay aside for it to harden;
then use the lead pencil, etc., as before.
This method will take longer. Keep
work from near the fire or an open flame.
EUCALYPTUS BONBONS FOR COLDS
AND COUGHS:
See Cold and Cough Mixtures.
EXPECTORANTS:
See Cold and Cough Mixtures.
Explosives
Explosives may be divided into two
great classes — mechanical mixtures and
chemical compounds. In the former the
combustible substances are intimately
mixed with some oxygen supplying
material, as in the case of gunpowder,
where carbon and sulphur are inti-
mately mixed with potassium nitrate;
while gun cotton and nitro-glycerine are
examples of the latter class, where each
molecule of the substance contains the
necessary oxygen for the oxidation of
the carbon and hydrogen present, the
oxygen being in feeble combination with
nitrogen. Many explosives are, how-
ever, mechanical mixtures of compounds
which are themselves explosive, e. g.,
cordite, which is mainly composed of
gun cotton and nitro-glycerine.
The most common and familiar of
explosives is undoubtedly gunpowder.
The mixture first adopted appears to
have consisted of equal parts of the
three ingredients — sulphur, charcoal, and
niter; but some time later the propor-
tions, even now taken for all ordinary
purposes, were introduced, namely:
Potassium nitrate. . .. 75 parts
Charcoal 15 parts
Sulphur 10 parts
100 parts
Since gunpowder is a mechanical mix-
ture, it is clear that the first aim of the
maker must be to obtain perfect incor-
poration, and, necessarily, in order to
obtain this, the materials must be in a
very finely divided state. Moreover,
in order that uniformity of effect may be
obtained, purity of the original sub-
stances, the percentage of moisture pres-
ent, and the density of the finished
powder are of importance.
The weighed quantities of the ingre-
dients are first mixed in gun metal or
copper drums, having blades in the
interior capable of working in the op-
Sosite direction to that in which the
rum itself is traveling. After passing
through a sieve, the mixture (green
charge) is passed on to the incorporating
mills, where it is thoroughly ground un-
der heavy metal rollers, a small quan-
tity of water being added to prevent
dust and facilitating incorporation, and
during this process the risk of explosion
is greater possibly than at any other
stage in the manufacture. There are
usually 6 mills working in the same
building, with partitions between. Over
the bed of each mill is a horizontal board,
the "flash board," which is connected
with a tank of water overhead, the ar-
rangement being such that the upsetting
of one tank discharges the contents of
the other tanks onto the corresponding
mill beds below, so that in the event of
an accident the charge is drowned in
each case. The "mill cake" is now
broken down between rollers, the "meal"
produced being placed in strong oak
boxes and subjected to hydraulic pres-
sure, thus increasing its density and
hardness, at the same time bringing the
ingredients into more intimate contact.
After once more breaking down the
material (press cake), the powder only
requires special treatment to adapt it
for the various purposes for which it is
intended.
The products of the combustion of
powder and its manner of burning are
EXPLOSIVES
329
largely influenced by the pressure, a
property well illustrated by the failure of
a red-hot platinum wire to ignite a mass
of powder in a vacuum, only a few
grams actually in contact with the plati-
num undergoing combustion.
Nitro-glycerine is a substance of a
similar chemical nature to gun cotton,
the principles of its formation and puri-
fication being very similar, only in this
case the materials and product are
liquids, thereby rendering the operations
of manufacture and washing much less
difficult. The glycerine is sprayed into
the acid mixture by compressed-air in-
jectors, care being taken that the tem-
perature during nitration does not rise
above 86° F. The nitro-glycerine formed
readily separates from the mixed acids,
and being insoluble in cold water, the
washing is comparatively simple.
Nitro-glycerine is an oily liquid readily
soluble in most organic solvents, but
becomes solid at 3° or 4° above the
freezing point of water, and in this con-
dition is less sensitive. It detonates
when heated, to 500° F., or by a sudden
blow, yielding carbon dioxide, oxygen,
nitrogen, and water. Being a fluid un-
der ordinary conditions, its uses as an
explosive were limited, and Alfred Nobel
conceived the idea of mixing it with other
substances which would act as absorb-
ents, first using charcoal and afterwards
an infusorial earth, "kieselguhr," and
obtaining what he termed "dynamite."
Nobel found that "collodion cotton" —
soluble gun cotton — could be converted
by treatment with nitro-glycerine into a
jellylike mass which was more trust-
worthy in action than the components
alone, and from its nature the substance
was christened "blasting gelatin."
Nobel took out a patent for a smoke-
less powder for use in guns, in which
these ingredients were adopted with or
without the use of retarding agents.
The powders of this class are ballistite
and filite, the former being in sheets, the
latter in threads. Originally camphor
was introduced, but its use has been
abandoned, a small quantity of aniline
taking its place.
Sir Frederick Abel and Prof. Dewar
patented in 1889 the use of trinitro-
cellulose and nitro-glycerine, for al-
though, as is well known, this form of
nitre-cellulose is not soluble in nitro-glyc-
erine, yet by dissolving the bodies in a
mutual solvent, perfect incorporation
can be attained. Acetone is the solvent
used in the preparation of "cordite," and
for all ammunition except blank charges
a certain proportion of vaseline is also
added. The combustion of the powder
without vaseline gives products so free
from solid or liquid substances that
excessive friction of the projectile in the
gun causes rapid wearing of the rifling,
and it is chiefly to overcome this that the
vaseline is introduced, for on explosion a
thin film of solid matter is deposited in
the gun, and acts as a lubricant.
The proportion of the ingredients are:
Nitro-glycerine 58 parts
Gun-cotton 37 parts
Vaseline 5 parts
Gun cotton to be used for cordite is
prepared as previously described, but
the alkali is omitted, and the mass is not
submitted to great pressure, to avoid
making it so dense that ready absorption
of nitro-glycerine would not take place.
The nitro-glycerine is poured over the
dried gun cotton and first well mixed by
hand, afterwards in a kneading machine
with the requisite quantity of acetone
for 3 1 hours. A water jacket is provided,
since, on mixing, the temperature rises.
The vaseline is now added, and the
kneading continued for a similar period.
The cordite paste is first subjected to
a preliminary pressing, and is finally
forced through a hole of the proper size
in a plate either by hand or by hydraulic
pressure. The smaller sizes are wound
on drums, while the larger cordite is cut
off in suitable lengths, the drums and
cut material being dried at 100° F., thus
driving off the remainder of the acetone.
Cordite varies from yellow to dark
brown in color, according to its thick-
ness. When ignited it burns with a
strong flame, which may be extinguished
by a vigorous puff of air. Macnab and
Ristori give the yield of permanent gases
from English cordite as 647 cubic centi-
meters, containing a much higher per
cent of carbon monoxide than the gases
evolved from the old form of powder.
Sir Andrew Noble failed in attempts to
detonate the substance, and a rifle bullet
fired into the mass only caused it to burn
quietly.
Dynamite. — Dynamite is ordinarily
made up of 75 per cent nitro-glycerine,
25 per cent infusorial earth; duahne con-
tains 80 per cent nitro-glycerine, 20 per
cent nitro-cellulose; rend-rock has 40 per
cent nitro glycerine, 40 per cent nitrate
of potash, 13 per cent cellulose, 7 per
cent paraffine; giant powder, 36 per cent
nitro-glycerine, 48 per cent nitrate of
potash, 8 per cent sulphur, 8 per cent
rosin or charcoal.
Smokeless Powder. — The base of
smokeless powders is nitrated cellulose..
330
EXPLOSIVES
which has been treated in one of various
ways to make it burn slower than gun
cotton, and also to render it less sensitive
to heat and shocks. As a rule, these
powders are not only less inflammable
than gun cotton, but require stronger
detonators. As metallic salts cause
smoke, they are not used in these pow-
ders. The smokeless powders now in
use may be divided into three groups:
(1) Those consisting of mixtures of
nitro-glycerine and nitrated cellulose,
which have been converted into a hard,
hornlike mass, either with or without
the aid of a solvent. To this group be-
longs ballistite, containing 50 per cent of
nitro-glycerine, 49 per cent of nitrated
cellulose, and 1 per cent of diphenyl-
amin; also cordite (see further on),
Lenord's powder, and amberite. This
last contains 40 parts of nitro-glycerine
and 56 parts of nitrated cellulose. (2)
Those consisting mainly of nitrated cel-
lulose of any kind, which has been ren-
dered hard and horny by treatment with
some solvent which is afterwards evapo-
rated. These are prepared by treating
nitrated cellulose with ether or benzine,
which dissolves the collodion, and when
evaporated leaves a hard film of collo-
dion on the surface of each grain.
Sometimes a little camphor is added to
the solvent, and, remaining in the pow-
der, greatly retards its combustion. (3)
Those consisting of nitro-derivatives of
the aromatic hydrocarbons, either with
or without the admixture of nitrated
cellulose; to this group belong Dupont's
powder, consisting of nitrated cellulose
dissolved in nitro-benzine; indurite, con-
sisting of cellulose hexanitrate (freed
from collodion by extraction with methyl
alcohol), made into a paste with nitro-
benzine, and hardened by treatment with
steam until the excess of nitro-benzine is
removed; and plastomeite, consisting of
dinitrotoluene and nitrated wood pulp.
Cordite is the specific name of a
smokeless powder which has been
adopted by the English government as a
military explosive. It contains nitro-
glycerine, 58 parts; gun cotton, 37 parts;
and petrolatum, 5 parts. The nitro-
glycerine and gun cotton are first mixed,
19.2 parts of acetone added, and the
pasty mass kneaded for several hours.
The petrolatum is then added and the
mixture again kneaded. The paste is
then forced through fine openings to
form threads, which are dried at about
105° F. until the acetone evaporates.
The threads, which resemble brown
twine, are then cut into short lengths for
use.
Another process for the manufacture
of smokeless powder is as follows:
Straw, preferably oat-straw, is treated in
the usual way with a mixture of nitric
acid and concentrated sulphuric acid,
and then washed in water to free it from
these, then boiled with water, and again
with a solution of potassium carbonate.
It is next subjected, for 2 to 6 hours, to
the action of a solution composed of
1,000 parts of water, 12.5 parts of potas-
sium nitrate, 3.5 parts of potassium
chlorate, 12.5 parts of zinc sulphate, and
12.5 parts of potassium permanganate.
The excess of solution is pressed out,
and the mass is then pulverized, granu-
lated, and finally dried.
The warning as to the danger of ex-
perimenting with the manufacture of
ordinary gunpowder applies with re-
newed force when nitro-glycerine is the
subject of the experiment.
Berge's Blasting Powder. — This is
composed of chlorate of potash, 1 part;
chromate of potash, 0.1 part; sugar,
0.45 parts; yellow wax, 0.09 parts. The
proportions indicated may' vary within
certain limits, according to the force
desired. For the preparation, the chlo-
rate and the chromate of potash, as well
as the sugar, are ground separately and
very finely, and sifted so that the grains
of the different substances may have the
same size. At first any two of the sub-
stances are mixed as thoroughly as possi-
ble, then the third is added. The yellow
wax, cut in small pieces, is finally added,
and all the substances are worked to-
gether to produce a homogeneous prod-
uct. The sugar may be replaced with
charcoal or any other combustible body.
For commercial needs, the compound
may be colored with any inert matter,
also pulverized.
Safety in Explosives. — Ammoniacal
salts have been used in the manufacture
of explosives to render them proof
against firedamp, but not with the full
success desired. Ammonium chloride
has been utilized, but inconveniences
are met with, and the vapor is quite dis-
agreeable. In cooperation with equiva-
lent quantities of soda and potash, its
action is regarded as favorable. Tests
employing benzine vapor and coal dust
were made, and the comparative security
calculated to be as given below.
I. — Donarite, composed as follows:
80 per cent of nitrate of ammonia, 12 of
trinitrotoluol, 4 of flour, 3.8 of nitro-
glycerine, and 0.2 per cent of cotton col-
lodion. Security: Donarite alone, 87
parts; 95 per cent of donarite and 5 per
EXPLOSIVES
331
cent of ammonium chloride, 125 parts;
90 per cent of donarite and 10 per cent
of ammonium chloride, 250 parts; 86
per cent of donarite and 5.5 per cent of
ammonium chloride, with 8.5 per cent of
nitrate of soda, 425 parts. The force of
the explosion is decreased about 8 per
cent, while the security is quintupled.
II. — Roburite, with the following com-
position: 72.5 per cent nitrate of am-
monia; 12 binitro-benzol; 10 nitrate of
potash; 5 sulphate of ammonia; 0.5 per
cent permanganate of potash. Security:
Roburite only, 325 parts; ammonium
chloride, taking the place of sulphate of
ammonia, 400 parts. Here an intensi-
fication of the explosive force is simul-
taneously produced.
III. — Ammon carbonite I, composed
thus: 4 per cent nitro-glycerine; 75.5
nitrate of ammonia; 9.5 nitrate of potash;
9.5 coal dust; 10.5 flour. Security: Am-
mon carbonite I only, 250 parts; 95 per
cent A. C. I. and 5 per cent ammonium
chloride, 400 parts; 92 per cent A. C. I.
and 8 per cent ammonium chloride, 500
parts. The addition of 5 per cent am-
monium chloride diminishes the ex-
plosive force only 3 per cent.
IV.— An explosive of nitro-glycerine
base composed thus: 30 per cent nitro-
glycerine; 1 per cent cotton collodion;
52.6 nitrate of ammonia; 13 nitrate of
potash; 3 to 4 per cent starch. Security
of this mixture, 150 parts.
V. — Thirty per cent nitro-glycerine; 1
per cent cotton collodion; 47.3 nitrate of
ammonia; 11.6 nitrate of potash; 3.1
starch; 7 per cent ammonium chloride.
This mixture has a security of 350 parts.
Inflammable Explosive with Chlorate
of Potash. — Take as an agent promot-
ing combustion, potassium chlorate; as a
combustible agent, an oxidized, nitrated,
or natural rosin. If, to such a mixture,
another body is added in order to render
it soft and plastic, such as oil, nitro-ben-
zine, glucose, glycerine, the benefit of the
discovery is lost, for the mixture is ren-
dered combustible with nitro-benzine,
fecula, sulphur, etc., and inexplosive
with glycerine, glucose, and the oil.
Of all the chlorates and perchlorates,
potassium chlorate (KC1O3) responds
the best to what is desired. As to the
rosins, they may be varied, or even
mixed. To obtain the oxidation or
nitration of the rosins, they are heated
with nitric acid, more or less concentrat-
ed, and with or without the addition of
sulphuric acid. An oxidation, sufficient
and without danger, can be secured by
a simple and practical means. This is
boiling them for several hours in water
containing nitric acid, which is renewed
from time to time in correspondence with
its decomposition. The rosins recom-
mended by M. Turpin are of the tere-
binthine group, having for average for-
mula CaoHsoOa. Colophony is the type.
The products, thus nitrated, are
washed with boiling water, and, on oc-
casion, by a solution slightly alkaline,
with a final washing with pure water,
and dried at a temperature of 230° F. or
in the open air.
The mixing of the constituents of this
explosive is preferably cold. For this
purpose they are used in the state of fine
powder, and when mixed in the tub, 2i
to 5 per cent of a volatile dissolvent is
added, as alcohol, carbon sulphide,
ether, or benzine. As soon as thorough-
ly mingled, the mass is put either in an
ordinary grainer, or in a cylinder of wire
cloth revolving horizontally on its axis,
with glass gobilles forming a screen, by
the aid of which the graining is rapidly
accomplished. Thus a powder more or
less finely granulated is produced free
from dust.
The proportions preferably employed
1. Potassium chlorate. .. 85 parts
Natural rosin 15 parts
2. Potassium chlorate. . . 80 parts
Nitrated rosin 20 parts
For employment in firedamp mines,
there is added to these compounds from
20 to 40 per cent of one of the following
substances: Ammonium oxalate, am-
monium carbonate, oxalic acid, sodium
bicarbonate, calcium fluoride, or other
substance of the nature to lower suffi-
ciently the temperature of the explosive
flame.
Gun Cotton. — For the production of a
high-grade gun cotton, it is important
that the cotton used should approach as
near as possible pure cellulose. The
waste from cotton mills, thoroughly
purified, is usually employed. After
careful chemical examination has been
made to ascertain its freedom from
grease and other impurities, the cotton
waste is picked over by hand to remove
such impurities as wood, cardboard,
string, etc. The cotton is then passed
through the "teasing machine," which
opens out all knots and lumps, thereby
reducing it to a state more suitable for
the acid treatment and exposing to view
any foreign substances which may have
escaped notice in the previous picking.
The cotton is then dried. When per-
EXPLOSIVES
fectly dry, it is removed to air-tight iron
cases, in which it is allowed to cool. The
iron cases are taken to the dipping
houses, and the cotton waste weighed
into small portions, which are then
transferred as rapidly as possible to the
mixed acids, allowed to remain a few
minutes, then removed to the grating
and the excess of acid squeezed out.
The cotton now containing about ten
times its weight of acid is placed in an
earthenware pot and transferred to the
steeping pits, where it is allowed to re-
main for 24 hours, a low temperature
being maintained by a stream of cold
water.
The cotton is now wholly converted
into nitro-cellulose. The superfluous
acid is next removed by a centrifugal
extractor, after which the gun cotton is
taken out of the machine and immedi-
ately immersed in a large volume of
water, and thoroughly washed until it
shows no acid reaction. The moisture
is then run out and the gun cotton is con-
veyed by tramway to the boiling vats,
where it undergoes several boilings by
means of steam. When the " heat test"
shows that a sufficient degree of stability
has been obtained, the gun cotton is re-
moved to a beating engine, and reduced
to a very fine state of division. When
this process is completed the pulp is run
by gravity along wooden shoots, pro-
vided with "grit traps" and electro-
magnets, which catch any traces of sand,
iron, etc., into large " poachers," in
which the gun cotton is continuously
agitated, together with a large quantity
of water. In this way it is thoroughly
washed and a blend made of a large
quantity of gun cotton.
Soluble Gun Cotton. — Soluble gun
cotton is made on the same lines, except
that greater attention has to be paid to
the physical condition of the cotton used,
and to the temperature and strength of
acid mixture, etc.
The term "soluble" usually implies
that the gun cotton is dissolved by a mix-
ture of ethyl-ether and ethyl-alcohol, 2
parts of the former to 1 of the latter being
the proportions which yield the best
solvent action. The classification of
nitro-celluloses according to their solu-
bility in ether-alcohol is misleading,
except when the nitrogen contents are
also quoted.
The number of solvents for gun cotton
which have at various times been pro-
posed is very large. Among the more
important may be mentioned the follow-
ing: Alcohols (used chiefly in conjunc-
tion with other solvents), methyl, ethyi,
propyl, and amyl, methyl-amyl ether,
acetic ether, di-ethyl-ketone, methyl-
ethyl ketone, amyl nitrate and acetate,
nitro-benzple, nitro-toluol, nitrated oils, gla-
cial acetic acid, camphor dissolved in
alcohol, etc.
Some of the above may be called
selective solvents, i. e., they dissolve one
particular variety of gun cotton better
than others, so that solubility in any
given solvent must not be used to indi-
cate solubility in another. No nitro-
cotton is entirely soluble in any solvent.
The solution, after standing some time,
always deposits a small amount of insol-
uble matter. Therefore, in making
collodion solutions, care should be taken
to place the containing bottles in a place
free from vibration and shock. After
standing a few weeks the clear super-
natant liquid may be decanted off. On
a larger scale collodion solutions are
filtered under pressure through layers of
tightly packed cotton wool. The state
of division is important. When the end
in view is the production of a strong film
or thread, it is advisable to use unpulped
or only slightly pulped nitro-cellulose.
In this condition it also dissolves more
easily than the finely pulped material.
FULMINATES:
Fulminating Antimony. — Tartar
emetic (dried), 100 parts; lampblack or
charcoal powder, 3 parts. Triturate
together, put into a crucible that it will
three-fourths fill (previously rubbed inside
with charcoal powder). Cover it with a
layer of dry charcoal powder, and lute
on the cover. After 3 hours' exposure to
a strong heat in a reverberatory furnace,
and 6 or 7 hours' cooling, cautiously
transfer the solid contents of the crucible,
as quickly as possible, without breaking,
to a wide-mouthed stoppered phial,
where, after some time, it will sponta-
neously crumble to a powder. When
the above process is properly conducted,
the resulting powder contains potassium,
and fulminates violently on contact with
water. A piece the size of a pea intro-
duced into a mass of gunpowder ex-
plodes it on being thrown into water,
or on its being moistened in any other
manner.
Fulminating Bismuth. — Take bis-
muth, 120 parts; carbureted cream of
tartar, 60 parts; niter, 1 part.
Fulminating Copper. — Digest copper
(in powder of filings) with fulminate of
mercury or of silver, and a little water.
EXPLOSIVES— FATS
333
It forms soluble green crystals that ex-
plode with a green flame.
Fulminating Mercury. — Take mer-
cury, 100 parts; nitric acid (specific
gravity, 1.4), 1,000 parts (or 740 parts, by
measure). Dissolve by a gentle heat,
and when the solution has acquired the
temperature of 130° F., slowly pour it
through a glass funnel tube into alcohol
(specific gravity, .830), 830 parts (or
1,000 parts, by measure). As soon as
the effervescence is over, and white fumes
cease to be evolved, filter through double
paper, wash with cold water, and dry by
steam (not hotter than 212° F.) or hot
water. The fulminate is then to be
packed in 100-grain paper parcels, and
these stored in a tight box or corked
bottle. Product 130 per cent of the
weight of mercury employed.
Fulminating Powder. — I. — Niter, 3
parts; carbonate of potash (dry), 2
parts; flowers of sulphur, 1 part; reduce
them separately to fine powder, before
mixing them. A little of this compound
(20 to 30 grains), slowly heated on a
shovel over the fire, first fuses and be-
comes brown, and then explodes with a
deafening report.
II. — Sulphur, 1 part ; chlorate of
potassa, 3 parts. When triturated, with
strong pressure, in a marble or wedg-
wood-ware mortar, it produces a series of
loud reports. It also fulminates by per-
cussion.
III. — Chlorate of potassa, 6 parts;
pure lampblack, 4 parts; sulphur, 1 part.
A little placed on an anvil detonates with
a loud report when struck with a ham-
EXPOSURES IN PHOTOGRAPHING:
See Photography.
EXTRACTS:
See Essences and Extracts.
EXTRACTS, TESTS FOR:
See Foods.
EYE LOTIONS:
"Black Eye" Lotion.— "Black eyes"
or other temporary discolorations of the
skin may be disguised by the application
of pink grease paint, or collodion colored
by means of a little Carmine. As lotions
the following have been recommended:
I. — Ammonium chlo-
ride 1 part
Alcohol 1 part
Water 10 parts
Diluted acetic acid may be substituted
for half of the water, and the alcohol
may be replaced by tincture of arnica,
with advantage.
II. — Potassium nitrate. . . 15 grains
Ammonium chloride 30 grains
Aromatic vinegar. . . 4 drachms
Water to make 8 ounces.
III. — The following is to be applied
with camel's-hair pencil every 1, 2, or 3
hours. Be careful not to get it in the
eyes, as it smarts. It will remove the
black discoloration overnight:
Oxalic acid 15 grains
Distilled water 1 ounce
Foreign Matter in the Eye.— If a piece
of iron or other foreign matter* in the eye
irritates it, and there is no way of remov-
ing it until morning, take a raw Irish
potato, grate it, and use as a poultice on
the eye. It will ease the eye so one can
sleep, and sometimes draws the piece
out.
Drops of Lime in the Eye. — If lime has
dropped in the eye, the pouring-in of or
the wiping-out with a few drops of oil is
the best remedy, as the causticity of the
lime is arrested thereby. Poppy-seed
oil or olive oil is prescribed, but pure lin-
seed oil ought to render the same service,
as it is also used in the household. Sub-
sequently, the eye may be rinsed out with
syrup, as the saccharine substance will
harden any remaining particles of lime
and destroy all causticity entirely.
FABRIC CLEANERS:
See Cleaning Preparations and Meth-
ods and also Household Formulas.
FABRICS, WATERPROOFING OF:
See Waterproofing.
FACE BLACK AND FACE POWDER:
See Cosmetics.
Fats
Bear Fat. — Fresh bears' fat is white
and very similar to lard in appearance.
The flank fat is softer and more trans-
parent than the kidney fat, and its odor
recalls that of fresh bacon. Bears' fat
differs from the fats of the dog, fox, and
cat in having a lower specific gravity, a
very low melting point, and a fairly high
iodine value.
Bleaching Bone Fat. — Bone fat, which
is principally obtained from horse bones,
is very dark colored in the crude state,
and of an extremely disagreeable smell.
To remedy these ^ defects it ^ may be
bleached by the air or chemicals, the
former method only giving good results
FATS
when the fat has been recovered by
means of steam. It consists in cutting
up the fat into small fragments and ex-
posing it to the air for several days, the
mass being turned over at intervals with
a shovel. When sufficiently bleached in
this manner, the fat is boiled with half
its own weight of water, which done,
about 3 or 4 per cent of salt is added,
and the whole is boiled over again. This
treatment, which takes 2 or 3 weeks,
sweetens the fat, makes it of the consist-
ency of butter, and reduces the color to a
pale yellow. Light seems to play no
part in the operation, the change being
effected solely by the oxygen of the air.
The chemical treatment has the advan-
tage of being more rapid, sufficient de-
coloration being produced in a few
hours. The fat, which should be free
from gelatin, phosphate of lime, and
water, is placed in an iron pan along
with an equal weight of brine of 14° to
15° Be. strength, with which it is boiled
for 3 hours and left to rest overnight.
Next day the fat is drawn off into a
wooden vessel, where it is treated by
degrees with a mixture of 2 parts of
potassium bichromate, dissolved in 6 of
boiling water, and 8 parts of hydro-
chloric acid (density 22° Be.), this quan-
tity being sufficient for 400 parts of fat.
Decoloration proceeds gradually, and
when complete the fat is washed with hot
water.
Bleaching Tallows and Fats. — In-
stead of exposing to the sun, which is
always attended with danger of render-
ing fats rancid, it is better to liquefy these
at a gentle heat, and then add i in weight
of a mixture of equal parts of kaolin and
water. The fatty matter should be
worked up for a time and then left to
separate. Kaolin has the advantage of
cheapness in price and of being readily
procured.
Freshly burned animal charcoal would
perhaps be a more satisfactory decolor-
izer than kaolin, but it is more expen-
sive to start with, and not so easy to re-
generate.
Exposure of tallow to the action of
steam under high pressure (a tempera-
ture of 250° or 260° F.) is also said to
render it whiter and harder.
Coloring Matter in Fats. — A simple
method for the detection of the addition
of coloring matter to fats is here de-
scribed. Ten parts, by measure, of the
melted fat are put into a small separating
funnel and dissolved in 10 parts, by meas-
ure, of petroleum ether. The solution
is then treated with 15 parts, by measure,
of glacial acetic acid and the whole
shaken thoroughly. The addition of
coloring matter is known by the red or
yellow coloration which appears in the
lower layer of acetic acid after the con-
tents of the funnel have been allowed to
settle. If only a slight addition of
coloring matter is suspected, the acetic
acid solution is run off into a porcelain
basin and the latter heated on a water
bath, when the coloration will be seen
more readily. This test is intended for
butter and margarine, but is also suitable
for tallow, lard, etc.
Fatty Acid Fermentation Process. —
The production of fatty acids from fats
and oils by fermentation is growing in
importance. These particulars, which
are the actual results from recent experi-
ments on a somewhat extended scale, are
given: Seven hundred and fifty pounds of
cottonseed oil are mixed with 45 gallons
of water and 3^ pounds of acetic acid;
this mixture is heated to a temperature
of 85° F. Castor-oil seeds, 53 pounds,
decorticated and ground, are mixed
thoroughly with 3 gallons of water and
4^ gallons of the oil, and this mixture is
stirred into the oil and water; the whole
mass is then kept mixed for 12 hours by
blowing air through, after which it is
allowed to stand for another 12 hours,
being given a gentle stir by hand at the
end of every hour. After 24 hours the
mass is heated to a temperature of 180°
F., which stops the fermentation and
at the same time allows the fatty acids to
separate more freely. To assist in this
effect there is added 1 gallon of sulphuric
acid (1 in 3) solution.
After 2 hours' standing, the mass will
have separated into three layers— fatty
acids on the top, glycerine water below,
and a middle, undefined layer. The
glycerine water is run away, and the
whole mass left to stand for 2 hours.
The middle portion is run off from the
separated fatty acids into another vessel,
where it is mixed with 10 gallons of hot
water, thoroughly stirred, and allowed to
stand for 16 hours or more. The watery
layer at the bottom, which contains some
glycerine, is then run off, while the resi-
due is mixed with a further quantity of
10 gallons of water, and again allowed to
stand. The water which separates out,
also the layer of fatty acids that forms on
the top, are run off and mixed with the
portions previously obtained. The va-
rious glycerine waters are treated to re-
cover the glycerine, while the fatty acids
are made marketable in any convenient
way.
FATS— FEATHER BLEACHING
Preservation of Fats. — To produce
fats and oils containing both iodine and
sulphur, whereby they are preserved
from going rancid, and consequently can
be utilized to more advantage for the
usual purposes, such as the manufacture
of soaps, candles, etc., following is the
Loebell method:
The essential feature of the process is
that the iodine is not merely held in solu-
tion by the oil or fat, but enters into
chemical combination with the same; the
sulphur also combines chemically with
the oil or fat, and from their reactions
the preserving properties are derived.
The process consists of heating, for
example, 6 parts of oil with 1 part of sul-
phur to a temperature varying between
300° and 400° F., then, when at about
195° F., a solution of iodine and oil is
added to the mixture, which is constantly
agitated until cool to prevent lumps
forming. A product is thus obtained
which acquires the consistency of butter,
and contains both iodine and sulphur in
combination.
Purifying Oils and Fats. — In purifying
fatty oils and fats for edible purposes the
chief thing is to remove the free fatty
acids, which is done by the aid of solu-
tions of alkalies and alkaline earths.
The subsequent precipitation of the
resulting soapy emulsions, especially
when lime is used, entails prolonged
heating to temperatures sometimes as
high as the boiling point of water.
Furthermore, the amount of alkalies
taken is always greater than is chemically
necessaryj the consequence being that
some of the organic substances present
are attacked, and malodorous products
are formed, a condition necessitating the
employment of animal charcoal, etc.,
as deodorizer.
To prevent the formation of these un-
toward products, which must injuriously
affect the quality of edible oils, C. Fre-
senius proposes to accelerate the disper-
sion of the said emulsions by subjecting
the mixtures to an excess pressure of 1
to 1A atmospheres and a corresponding
temperature of about 220° F., for a short
time, the formation of decomposition
products, and any injurious influence on
the taste and smell of the substance being
prevented by the addition of fresh char-
coal, etc., beforehand. Charcoal may,
and must in certain cases, be replaced
for this purpose by infusorial earth or
fuller's earth. When this process is ap-
plied to cottonseed oil, 100 parts of the
oil are mixed with -fa part of fresh, pure
charcoal, and ^ part of pure fuller's earth.
The mixture is next neutralized with
lime-water, and placed in an autoclave,
where it is kept for an hour under pres-
sure, and at a temperature of 220° F.
Under these conditions the emulsion soon
separates, and when this is accomplished
the whole is left to cool down in a closed
vessel.
FATS, DECOMPOSITION OF:
See Oil.
FEATHER BLEACHING AND COL-
ORING:
See also Dyes.
Bleaching and Coloring Feathers.—
Feathers, in their natural state, are not
adapted to undergo the processes of dye-
ing and bleaching; they must be prepared
by removing their oil and dirt. This is
usually done by washing them in moder-
ately warm soap and water, and rinsing
in warm and cold water; or the oil may
be chemically removed by the use of ben-
zine. To remove it entirely, the feathers
must be left in the cleansing fluid from
a half hour to an hour, when they may be
subjected to the process of bleaching.
Bleaching Plumes. — Plumes may be
almost entirely bleached by the use of
hydrogen peroxide, without injuring
their texture.
In specially constructed glass troughs,
made the length of an average ostrich
feather, 15 or 20 of these feathers can be
treated at a time. The bleaching fluid
is made from a 30 per cent solution of
hydrogen peroxide, with enough am-
monia added to make it neutral; in other
words when neutral, blue litmus paper
will not turn red, and red will take a pale
violet tinge. The previously cleansed
feathers are entirely immersed in this
bleaching bath, which may be diluted if
desired. The trough is covered with a
glass plate and put in a dark place. From
time to time the feathers are stirred and
turned, adding more hydrogen peroxide.
This process requires 10 to 12 hours and
if necessary should be repeated. After
bleaching they are rinsed in distilled
water or rain water, dried in the air, and
kept in motion while drying.
To insure success in coloring feathers
in delicate tints, they must be free from
all impurities, and evenly white. It has
been found of advantage to rub the quill
of heavy ostrich plumes while still moist
with carbonate of ammonia before the
dyeing is begun.
Methods of Dyeing Feathers. — I. — A
boiling hot neutral solution, the feathers
to be dried in a rotating apparatus. Suit-
able dyes for this method are chrysoidin,
336
FEATHER COLORING— FERTILIZERS
A, C; crystal vesuvin, 4 B C; phosphin
extra, leather yellow, O H; leather red,
O, G B; leather brown, O; morocco red,
O; azophocphine, G O, B R O; fuchsine,
cerise, G R; grenadine, O; safranine, O;
methylene violet, malachite green, crys-
tal brilliant green, methylene green,
methylene gray, coal black II.
II. — A boiling hot sulphuric solution.
Dyes, acid fuchsine, orseilline, R B; acid
cerise, O; acid maroon, O; opal blue,
blue de lyon, R B; cotton blue, No. 2,
China blue No. 2, naphthalene green, O;
patent blue, V A; fast blue, O R; fast
blue black, O; deep black, G; azo yellow,
victorine yellow, orange No. 2, fast
brown O, ponceau G R K R, fast red O,
Bordeaux, GBR.
III. — An acetic solution. Dyes,
Bengal pink G B, phloxine G O, rosolan
O B O F, rhodamine O 4 G, cosine A G,
erythrosine.
By appropriate mixtures of the dyes of
any one class, plumes can be dyed every
possible color. After dyeing they are
rinsed, and dried in a rotating apparatus.
The final process is that of curling, which
is done by turning them round and round
over a gentle heat. For white feathers a
little sulphur may be burned in the fire;
for black or colored ones a little sugar.
IV. — The spray method. The solu-
tion of the dye to be used is put into an
atomizer, and the spray directed to that
part of the feather which it is desired to
color. By using different colors the
most marvelous effects and most delicate
transitions from one color to another are
obtained. Any kind of an atomizer can
be used, the rubber bulb, pump, or bel-
lows; the result is the same.
FELT WATERPROOFING:
See Waterproofing.
FERMENTATION PROCESS, FATTY
ACID:
See Fats.
FERMENTATION, PREVENTION OF:
See Anti -Ferments and Wines and Liquors.
FERROUS OXALATE DEVELOPER:
See Photography.
Fertilizers
(See also Phosphate, Artificial.)
Plant Fertilizers. — Plants are as sen-
sitive to excessively minute quantities of
nutrient substances, such as salts of
potassium, in the soil, as they are to
minute quantities of poisonous sub
stances. Poisons are said to be infinite-
ly more sensitive reagents for the pres-
ence of certain metallic salts than the
most delicate chemical, the statement
haying been made that a trace of copper
which might be obtained by distilling in a
copper retort is fatal to the wbite and
yellow lupin, the castor-oil plant, and
spirogyra. Coupin has found salts of
silver, mercury, copper, and cadmium
especially fatal to plants. With copper
sulphate the limit of sensitiveness is
placed at 1 in 700,000,000. Devaux
asserts that both phanerogams and
cryptogams are poisoned by solutions of
salts of lead or copper diluted to the
extent of 1 in 10,000,000, or less.
As a result of a series of experiments,
Schloesing stated that the nitrification of
ammonium salts is not for all plants a
necessary preliminary to the absorption of
nitrogen by the plant. While for some
plants, as for example buckwheat, the
preferable form of the food material is
that of a nitrate, others, for instance,
tropeolum, thrive even better when the
nitrogen is presented to them in an
ammoniacal form.
Artificial Fertilizers for Pot Plants.—
Experiments on vegetation have shown
that a plant will thrive when the lacking
substances are supplied in a suitable
form, e. g., in, the following combinations:
I. — Calcium nitrate, potassium ni-
trate, potassium phosphate, magnesium
phosphate, ferric phosphate (sodium
chloride).
II. — Calcium nitrate, ammonium ni-
trate, potassium sulphate, magnesiuir
phosphate, iron chloride (or sulphate)
(sodium silicate).
It is well known that in nature nitrates
are formed wherever, decomposition of
organic nitrogenous substances takes
place in the air, the ammonia formed by
the decomposition being oxidized to
nitric acid. These conditions for the
formation of nitrates are present in
nearly every cornfield, and they are also
the cause of the presence of nitrates in
water that has its source near stables,
etc. In Peruvian guano nitrogen is
present partly in the form of potassium
nitrate, partly as ammonium phosphate
and sulphate. As a nitrate it acts more
rapidly than in the form of ammonia,
but in the latter case the effect is more
lasting. Phosphoric acid occurs in guano
combined with ammonia, potash, and
chiefly with lime, the last being slower
and more lasting in action than the
others.
FERTILIZERS
337
Nearly all artificial fertilizers conform,
more or less, to one of the following gen-
eral formulas:
I.— Artificial Flower Fertilizer.—
123
Ammonium nitrate 0.40 1.60
Ammonium phosphate. . . 0 . 20 0 . 80
Potassium nitrate 0 . 25 1 . 00
Ammonium chloride 0 . 05 0 . 20
Calcium sulphate 0 . 06 0 . 24
Ferrous sulphate 0 . 04 0.16
40.0 parts
20 . 0 parts
25 . 0 parts
5.0 parts
6.0 parts
4.0 parts
1.00 4.00 100.0 parts
Dissolve 1 part in 1,000 parts water,
and water the flowers with it 2 or 3 times
weekly. Dissolve 4 parts in 1,000 parts
water, and water with this quantity 10 or
12 pots of medium size.
II. — Compost for Indoor Plants. —
Ammonium sulphate.
Sodium chloride
Potassium nitrate. . . .
Magnesium sulphate..
Magnesium phosphate
Sodium phosphate
1
.0.30
.0.30
.0.15
.0.15
.0.04
.0.06
2
1.20
1.20
0.60
0.60
0.20
0.24
30 . 0 parts
30.0 parts
15.0 parts
15.0 parts
4.0 parts
6 . 0 parts
1.00 4.00 100.0 parts
One part to be dissolved in 1,000 parts
water and the flowers watered up to 3
times daily. Dissolve 4 parts in 1,000
parts water, and water with this solution
daily:
III.— Plant Food Solution.—
1 2
Potassium chloride 0.16 or 12.5 parts
Calcium nitrate 0.71 or 58 . 0 parts
Magnesium sulphate 0.125 or 12.0 parts
Potassium phosphate 0.133 or 15.0 parts
Iron phosphate, recently
precipitated 0 . 032 or 2.5 parts
1.160 or 100. 0 parts
This turbid mixture (1 part in 1,000
parts) is used alternately with water
for watering a pot of about 1 quart capac-
ity; for smaller or larger pots in pro-
portion. After using the amount indi-
cated, the watering is continued with
wa';er alone.
IV.— Fertilizer with Organic Matter,
for Pot Flowers. —
Potassium nitrate. . 100.0 parts
Ammonium phos-
phate 100.0 parts
Phosphoric acid. .. 2.5 parts
Simple syrup 1,000 parts
Add not more than 10 parts to 1,000
parts water, and water alternately with
this and with water alone. For cac-
tacese, crassulacese, and similar plants,
which do not assimilate organic matter
directly, use distilled water instead of
syrup.
Cmorotic plants are painted with a
dilute iron solution or iron is added to the
soil, which causes them to assume their
natural green color. The iron is used in
form of ferric chloride or ferrous sul-
phate.
V. — Sodium phosphate 4 ounces
Sodium nitrate. ... 4 ounces
Ammonium sul-
phate 2 ounces
Sugar 1 ounce
Use 2 teaspoonf uls to a gallon of water.
VI. — Ammonium phosphate 30 parts
Sodium nitrate 25 parts
Potassium nitrate 25 parts
Ammonium sulphate. . 20 parts
Water 100,000 parts
One application of this a week is
enough for the slower growing plants,
and 2 for the more rapid growing her
baceous ones.
VII. — Calcium phos-
phate 4 ounces
Potassium nitrate 1 ounce
Potassium phos-
phate 1 ounce
Magnesium sul-
phate 1 ounce
Iron (ferric)
phosphate 100 grains
VIII. — Pot plants, especially flowering
plants kept around the house, should be
treated to an occasional dose of the fol-
lowing:
Ammonium chlo-
ride 2 parts
Sodium phosphate 4 parts
Sodium nitrate. ... 3 parts
Water 80 parts
Mix and dissolve. To use, add 25
drops to the quart of water, and use as in
ordinary watering.
IX. — Sugar 1 part
Potassium nitrate . 2 parts
Ammonium sul-
phate 4 parts
X. — Ferric phosphate. . 1 part
Magnesium sul-
phate 2 parts
Potassium phos-
phate 2 parts
Potassium nitrate. 2 parts
Calcium acid
phosphate 8 parts
About a teaspoonful of either of these
mixtures is added to a gallon of water,
and the plants sprinkled with the liquid.
For hastening the growth of flowers,
the following fertilizer is recommended:
FERTILIZERS
XI. — Potassium nitrate. 30 parts
Potassium phos-
phate 25 parts
Ammonium sul-
phate 10 parts
Ammonium nitrate 35 parts
The following five are especially recom-
mended for indoor use:
XII. — Sodium chloride . . 10 parts
Potassium nitrate. 5 parts
Magnesium sul-
phate. 5 parts
Magnesia 1 part
Sodium phosphate 2 parts
Mixed and bottled. Dissolve a tea-
spoonful daily in a quart of water and
water the plants with the solution.
XIII. — Ammonium nitrate 40 parts
Potassium nitrate. 90 parts
Ammonium phos-
phate 50 parts
Two grams is sufficient for a medium-
sized flower pot.
XIV. — Ammonium sul-
phate 10 parts
Sodium chloride . . 10 parts
Potassium nitrate. 5 parts
Magnesium sul-
phate. 5 parts
Magnesium car-
t bonate 1 part
Sodium phosphate 20 parts
One teaspoonful to 1 quart of water.
XV. — Ammonium nitrate 40 parts
Ammonium phos-
phate 20 parts
Potassium nitrate. 0.25 parts
Ammonium chlo-
ride 5 parts
Calcium sulphate. 6 parts
Ferrous sulphate. . 4 parts
Dissolve 2 parts in 1,000 of water, and
water the plants with the solution.
XVI. — Potassium nitrate. 20 parts
Potassium phos-
phate. 25 parts
Ammonium sul-
phate. ..... 10 parts
Ammonium nitrate 35 parts
This mixture produces a luxuriant
foliage. If blooms are desired, dispense
with the ammonium nitrate.
XVII. — Saltpeter, 5 parts; cooking
salt, 10 parts; bitter salt, 5 parts; mag-
nesia, 1 part; sodium phosphate, 2 parts.
Mix and fill in bottles. Dissolve a tea-
spoonful in If pints of hot water, and
water the flower pots with it each day.
XVIII. — Ammonium sulphate, 30
parts; sodium chloride, 30 parts; potash
niter, 15 parts; magnesium sulphate, 15
parts; magnesium phosphate, 4 parts;
sodium phosphate, 6 parts. Dissolve
1 part in 1,000 parts water, and apply 3
times per day.
XIX. — Calcium nitrate, 71 parts;
potassium chlorate, 15 parts; magnesium
sulphate, 12.5 parts; potassium phos-
phate, 13.3 parts; freshly precipitated
ferric phosphate, 3.2 parts. A solution
of 1 in 1,000 of this mixture is applied,
alternating with water, to the plants.
After using a certain quantity, pour on
only water.
XX. — Ammonium phosphate, 300
parts; sodium nitrate, 250 parts: potas-
sium nitrate, 250 parts; and ammonium
sulphate, 200 parts, are mixed together.
To every 1,000 parts of water dissolve 2
parts of the mixture, and water the pot-
ted plants once a week with this solution.
XXI. — Potash niter, 20 parts; calcium
carbonate, 20 parts; sodium chlorate, 20
parts; calcium phosphate, 20 parts; so-
dium silicate, 14 parts; ferrous sulphate,
1.5 parts. Dissolve 1 part of the mix-
ture in 1,000 parts water.
Preparing Bone for Fertilizer. — Bone,
in its various forms, is the only one of
the insoluble phosphates that is now
used directly upon the soil, or without
other change than is accomplished by
mechanical action or grinding. The
terms used to indicate the character of
the bone have reference rather to their
mechanical form than to the relative
availability of the phosphoric acid con-
tained in them. The terms raw bone,
fine bone, boiled and steamed bone, etc.,
are used to indicate methods of prep-
aration, and inasmuch as bone is a
material which is useful largely in pro-
portion to its rate of decay, its fineness
has an important bearing upon availabil-
ity, since the finer the bone the more sur-
face is exposed to the action of those
forces which cause decay or solution, and
the quicker will the constituents become
available. In the process of boiling or
steaming, not only is the bone made finer
but its physical character in other re-
spects is also changed, the particles,
whether fine or coarse, being made soft
and crumbly rather than dense or hard;
hence it is more likely to act quickly than
if the same degree of fineness be obtained
by simple grinding. The phosphoric
acid in fine steamed bone may all become
available in 1 or 2 years, while the coarser
fatty raw bone sometimes resists final
decay for 3 or 4 years or even longer.
FERTILIZERS— FILTERS
339
Bone contains considerable nitrogen, a
fact which should be remembered in its
use, particularly if used in comparison
with other phosphatic materials which
do not contain this element. Pure raw
bone contains on an average 22 per cent
of phosphoric acid and 4 per cent of
nitrogen. By steaming or boiling, a por-
tion of the organic substance containing
nitrogen is extracted, which has the effect
of proportionately increasing the phos-
phoric acid in the product; hence a
steamed bone may contain as high as 28
per cent of phosphoric acid and as low as
1 per cent of nitrogen. Steamed bone is
usually, therefore, much richer in phos-
phoric acid and has less nitrogen than
the raw bone.
Brewers' Yeast and Fertilizers. — A
mixture is made of about 2 parts of
yeast with 1 part of sodium chloride and
5 parts of calcium sulphate, by weight,
for use as a manure. Pure or impure
yeast, or yeast previously treated for the
extraction of a portion of its constituents,
may be used, and the gypsum may be
replaced by other earthy substances of a
similar non-corrosive nature.
Authorities seem to agree that lime is
necessary to the plant, and if it be
wholly lacking in the soil, even though
an abundance of all the other essential
elements is present, it cannot develop
normally. Many soils are well provided
with lime by nature and it is seldom or
never necessary for those who cultivate
them to resort to liming. It would be
just as irrational to apply lime where it is
not needed as to omit it where it is re-
quired, and hence arises the necessity of
ascertaining the needs of particular soils
in this respect.
The method usually resorted to for
ascertaining the amount of lime in soils
is to treat them with some strong mineral
acid, such as hydrochloric acid, and de-
termine the amount of lime which is thus
dissolved. The fact that beets of all
kinds make a ready response to liming
on soils which are deficient in lime may
be utilized as the basis of testing.
FEVER IN CATTLE:
See Veterinary Formulas.
FIG SQUARES:
See Confectionery.
Files
Composition Files.' — These files, which
are frequently used by watchmakers and
other metal workers for grinding and pol-
ishing, and the color of which resembles
silver, are composed of 8 parts copper, 2
parts tin, 1 part zinc, 1 part lead. They
are cast in forms and treated upon the
grindstone; the metal is very hard, and
therefore worked with difficulty with the
file.
To Keep Files Clean (see also Clean-
ing Preparations and Methods). — The un-
even working of a file is usually due to the
fact that filings clog the teeth of the file.
To obviate this evil, scratch brush the
files before use, and then grease them
with olive oil. A file prepared in this
manner lasts for a longer time, does not
become so quickly filled with filings and
can be conveniently cleaned with an or-
dinary rough brush.
Recutting Old Files.— Old files may be
rendered useful again by the following
Erocess: Boil them in a potash bath,
rush them with a hard brush and wipe
off. Plunge for half a minute into nitric
acid, and pass over a cloth stretched
tightly on a flat piece of wood. The
effect will be that the acid remains in the
grooves, and will take away the steel
without attacking the top, which has
been wiped dry. The operation may be
repeated according to the depth to be ob-
tained. Before using the files thus treated
they should be rinsed in water and dried.
FILE METAL:
See Alloys.
FILLERS FOR LETTERS:
See Lettering.
FILLERS FOR WOOD:
See Wood.
FILTERS FOR WATER.
A filter which possesses the advantages
of being easily and cheaply cleaned when
dirty, and which frees water from
mechanical impurities with rapidity,
may be formed by placing a stratum of
sponge between two perforated metallic
plates, united by a central screw, and
arranged in such a manner as to permit
of the sponge being compressed as re-
quired. Water, under gentle pressure,
flows with such rapidity through the
pores of compressed sponge, that it is
said that a few square feet of this sub-
stance will perfectly filter several millions
of gallons of water daily.
The sponges are cleaned thoroughly,
rolled together as much as possible, and
placed in the escape pipe of a percolator
in such a manner that the larger portion
of the sponge is in the pipe while the
smaller portion, spreading by itself, pro-
trudes over the pipe toward 'the interior
340
FILTERS— FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
of the percolator, thus forming a flat
filter covering it. After a thorough moist-
ening of the sponge it is said to admit of
a very quick and clear filtration of large
quantities of tinctures, juices, etc.
.For filtering water on a small scale,
and for domestic use, "alcarrazas,"
diaphragms of porous earthenware and
filtering-stone and layers of sand and
charcoal, etc., are commonly employed
as filtering.
A cheap, useful form of portable filter
is the following, given in the proceedings
of the British Association: "Take any
common vessel, perforated below, such
as a flower pot, fill the lower portion with
coarse pebbles, over which place a layer
of finer ones, and on these a layer of clean
coarse sand. On the top of this a piece
of burnt clay perforated with small holes
should be put, and on this again a
stratum of 3 or 4 inches thick of well-
burnt, pounded animal charcoal. A
filter thus formed will last a considerable
time, and will be found particularly use-
ful in removing noxious and putrescent
substances held in solution by water."
The "portable filters," in stoneware,
that are commonly sold in the shops,
contain a stratum of sand, or coarsely
powdered charcoal; before, however,
having access to this, the water has to
pass through a sponge, to remove the
coarser portion of the impurities.
Alum Process of Water Purification. —
Water may be filtered and purified by
precipitation, by means of alum, by add-
ing a 4 per cent solution to the water to
be clarified until a precipitate is no longer
'produced. After allowing the turbid mix-
ture to stand for 8 hours, the clear portion
may be decanted or be siphoned off.
About 2 grains of alum is ordinarily re-
quired to purify a gallon of water.
Potassa alum only should be used, as
ammonia alum cannot be used for this
purpose. The amount of alum re-
quired varies with the water, so that an
initial experiment is required whenever
water from a new source is being purified.
If the purification is properly done, the
water will not contain any alum, but
only a trace of potassium sulphate, for
the aluminum of the double sulphate
unites with the various impurities to
form an insoluble compound which
gradually settles out, mechanically carry-
ing with it suspended matter, while the
sulphuric acid radical unites with the
calcium in the water to form insoluble
calcium sulphate.
FILTER PAPER:
See Paper,
FILM -STRIPPING:
See Photography.
FINGER-TIPS, SPARKS FROM:
See Pyrotechnics.
FIRES, COLORED:
See Pyrotechnics.
FIREARM LUBRICANTS:
See Lubricants.
FIRE EXTINGUISHERS:
I. — Calcium chloride. 184 parts
Magnesium chlo-
ride 57 parts
Sodium chloride. . 13 parts
Potassium b r o -
mide 22 parts
Barium chloride. . 3 parts
Water to make. . . 1,000 parts
Dissolve and fill into hand grenades.
II. — Iron sulphate 4 parts
Ammonium sul-
phate 16 parts
Water 100 parts
Mix, dissolve, and fill into flasks.
III. — Sodium chloride. . . 430 parts
Alum 195 parts
Glauber salts 50 parts
Sodium carbonate,
impure 35 parts
Water glass 266 parts
Water 233 parts
Mix, etc.
IV. — Sodium chloride. . . 90 parts
Ammonium chlo-
ride 45 parts
Water 300 parts
Mix, dissolve, and put into quart
flasks of very thin glass, which are to be
kept conveniently disposed in the dwell-
ing rooms, etc., of all public institutions.
V. — Make 6 solutions as follows:
a. — A m m p n i u m
chloride 20 parts
Water 2,000 parts
6. — Alum, calcined
and powdered 35 parts
Water 1,000 parts
c. — Ammonium sul-
phate, pow-
dered 30 parts
Water 500 parts
d. — Sodium chloride 20 parts
Water 4,000 parts
e. — Sodium carbon-
ate 35 parts
Water 500 parts
/. — Liquid water
glass 450 parts
FIRE EXTINGUISHERS— FIREPROOFING
Mix the solutions in the order named
and to the mixture, while still yellow and
turbid, add 2,000 parts of water, and let
stand. When the precipitate has sub-
sided fill off the clear liquid into thin
glass (preferably blue, to deter decom-
position) containers each of 3 pints to a
half gallon capacity.
VI. — Calcium chloride. . 30 parts
Magnesium chlo-
ride 10 parts
Water. 60 parts
VII. — Sodium chloride.. 20 parts
Ammonium chlo-
ride 9 parts
Water 71 parts
VIII. — Sodium carbonate 16 parts
Sodium chloride. 64 parts
Water 920 parts
The most effective of all extinguishers
is ammonia water. It is almost instan-
taneous in its effect, and a small quan-
tity only is required to extinguish any fire.
Next in value is carbonic acid gas. This
may be thrown from siphons or soda-
water tanks. The vessel containing it
should be thrown into the fire in such a
way as to insure its breaking.
Dry Powder Fire Extinguishers. — The
efficacy of these is doubted by good
authorities. They should be tested be-
fore adoption.
I. — Alum.- 24 parts
Ammonium sulphate 52 parts
Ferrous sulphate.. . . 4 parts
II. — Sodium chloride. ... 8 parts
Sodium bicarbonate 6 parts
Sodium sulphate.. . . 2 parts
Calcium chloride.. . . 2 parts
Sodium silicate 2 parts
III. — Sodium chloride. ... 6 parts
Ammonium chloride 6 parts
Sodium bicarbonate.. 8 parts
IV. — Ammonium chloride 10 parts
Sodium sulphate. ... 6 parts
Sodium bicarbonate 4 parts
Oil Extinguisher. — To extinguish oils
which have taken fire, a fine-meshed
wire net of the size of a boiling pan
should be kept on hand in every varnish
factory, etc. In the same moment when
the netting is laid upon the burning sur-
face, the flame is extinguished because
it is a glowing mass of gas, which the
iron wire quickly cools off so that it can-
not glow any more. The use of water is
excluded, and that of earth and sand un-
desirable, because both dirty the oil.
Substitute for Fire Grenades. — A com-
mon quart bottle filled with a saturated
solution of common salt makes a cheap
and efficient substitute for the ordinary
hand grenade. The salt forms a coating
on all that the water touches and makes
it nearly incombustible.
Fireproofing
For Textiles.— I.— Up to the present
this has generally been accomplished by
the use of a combination of water glass
or soluble glass and tungstate of soda.
The following is cheaper and more suit-
able for the purpose:
Equal parts, by weight, of commercial
white copperas, Epsom salt, and sal am-
moniac are mingled together and mixed
with three times their weight of ammonia
alum. This mixture soon changes into
a moist pulp or paste, that must be dried
by a low heat. When dressing the ma-
terial, add ^ part of this combination to
every 1 part of starch.
II. — Good results are also obtained
from the following formula: Supersatu-
rate a quantity of superphosphate of
lime with ammonia, filter, and decolorize
it with animal charcoal. Concentrate
the solution and mix with it 5 per cent
of gelatinous silica, evaporate the water,
dry, and pulverize. For use mix 30 parts
of this powder with 35 parts of gum and
35 parts of starch in sufficient water to
make of suitable consistency.
III. — -As a sample of the Melunay
process, introduced in France, the fol-
lowing has been published: Apply to a
cotton fabric like flannellet, or other
cotton goods, a solution of stannate of
soda (or a salt chemically equivalent) of
the strength of 5 to 10° Be., then dry
the fabric and saturate it again, this
time with a solution of a titanium salt;
any soluble titanium salt is suitable.
This salt should be so concentrated that
each 1,000 parts may contain about 62
parts of titanium oxide. The fabrics are
again dried, and the titanium is ulti-
mately fixed by means of a suitable
alkaline bath. It is advantageous to em-
ploy for this purpose a solution of silicate
of soda of about 14° Be., but a mixed
bath, composed of tungstate of soda and
ammonium chloride, may be employed.
The objects are afterwards washed, dried,
and finished as necessary for trade. A
variation consists in treating the objects
in a mixed bath containing titanium,
tungsten, and a suitable solvent.
IV. — Boil together, with constant
FIREPROOFING
stirring, the following ingredients until a
homogeneous mass results:
Linseed oil 77 parts
Litharge. 10 parts
Sugar of lead 2 parts
Lampblack 4 parts
Oil turpentine 2 parts
Umber 0.4 parts
Japanese wax 0.3 parts
Soap powder 1.2 parts
Manila copal 0.7 parts
Caoutchouc varnish. . 2 parts
V.— For Light Woven Fabrics.—
Ammonium sulphate, 8 parts, by weight;
ammonium carbonate, 2.5 parts; borax,
2; boracic acid, 3; starch, 2; or dextrin,
0.4, or gelatin, 0.4; water, 100. The
fabric is to be saturated with the mixture,
previously heated to 86° F., and dried;
it can then be calendered in the ordinary
way. The cost is only 2 or 3 cents
for 16 yards or more of material.
VI.— For Rope and Straw Matting. -
Ammonium chloride (sal ammoniac), 15
parts, by weight; boracic acid, 6 parts;
borax, 3; water, 100. The articles are
to be left in the solution, heated to
212° F. for about 3 hours, then squeezed
out and dried. The mixture costs
about 5 cents a quart.
VII. — For Clothing.— The following
starch is recommended: Sodium tung-
state, perfectly neutral, 30 parts; borax,
20; wheat or rice starch, 60. The con-
stituents are to be finely pulverized,
sharply dried, and mixed, and the starch
used like any other. Articles stiffened
with it, if set on fire, will not burst- into
flame, but only smolder.
VIII. —For Tents.—
Water.... 100
Ammonium
sulphate,
chemically Parts
pure 14 >- by
Boracic acid . . 1 weight.
Hartshorn salt 1
Borax 3
Glue water. ... 2
Boil the water, put ammonium sul-
phate into a vat, pour a part of the boil-
ing water on and then add the remaining
materials in rotation. Next follow the
rest of the hot water. The vat should be
kept covered until the solution is com-
plete.
IX. — For Stage Decorations. — Much
recommended and used as a fireproof-
ing composition is a cheap mixture of
borax, bitter salt, and water; likewise for
canvas a mixture of ammonium sulphate,
gypsum, and water. Ammonium sul-
phate and sodium tungstate are also
named for impregnating the canvas
before painting.
X. — For Mosquito Netting. — Immerse
in a 20 per cent solution of ammonium
sulphate. One pound of netting will
require from 20 to 24 ounces of the solu-
tion to thoroughly saturate. After with-
drawing from the bath, do not wring it
out, but spread it over a pole or some
such object, and let it get about half dry,
then iron it out with a hot iron. The
material (ammonium sulphate) is in-
offensive.
Fireproofing of Wood. — Strictly speak-
ing, it is impossible to render wood com-
pletely incombustible, but an almost ab-
solute immunity against the attacks of
fire can be imparted.
Gay-Lussac was one of the first to lay
down the principal conditions indispen-
sable for rendering organic matters in
general, and wood in particular, unin-
flammable.
During the whole duration of the
action of the heat the fibers must be kept
from contact with the air, which would
cause combustion. The presence of
borates, silicates, etc., imparts this prop-
erty to organic, bodies.
Combustible gases, disengaged by the
action of the heat, must be mingled in
sufficient proportion with other gases
difficult of combustion in such a way that
the disorganization of bodies by heat will
be reduced to a simple calcination with-
out production of flame. Salts volatile
or decomposable by heat and not com-
bustible, like certain ammoniacal salts,
afford excellent results.
Numerous processes have been rec-
ommended for combating the inflam-
mability of organic tissues, some consist-
ing in external applications, others in
injection, under a certain pressure, of
saline solutions.
By simple superficial applications only
illusory protection is attained, for these
coverings, instead of fireproofing the ob-
jects on which they are applied, preserve
them only for the moment from a slight
flame. Resistance to the fire being of only
short duration, these coatings scale off
or are rapidly reduced to ashes and the
parts covered are again exposed. It
often happens, too, that such coatings
have disappeared before the occurrence
of a fire, so that the so-called remedy be-
comes injurious from the false security
occasioned.
FIREPROOFING
343
Some formulas recommended are as
follows:
I. — For immersion or imbibition the
following solution is advised: Ammo-
nium phosphate, 100 parts; boracic acid,
10 parts per 1,000; or ammonium sul-
phate, 135 parts; sodium borate, 15
parts; boracic acid, 5 parts per 1,000.
For each of these formulas two coats are
necessary.
II.— For application with the brush the
following compositions are the best:
a. Apply hot, sodium silicate, 100
parts; Spanish white, 50 parts; glue, 100
parts.
b. Apply successively and hot; for
first application, water, 100 parts; alu-
minum sulphate, 20 parts; second appli-
cation, water, 100 parts; liquid sodium
silicate, 50 parts.
c. First application, 2 coats, hot;
water, 100 parts; sodium silicate, 50
parts; second application, 2 coatings;
boiling water, 75 parts; gelatin, white,
200 parts; work up with asbestos, 50
parts; borax, 30 parts; and boracic acid,
10 parts.
Oil paints rendered uninflammable by
the addition of phosphate of ammonia
and borax in the form of impalpable
powders incorporated in the mass, mor-
tar of plaster and asbestos and asbestos
paint, are still employed for preserving
temporarily from limited exposure to a
fire.
III. — Sodium silicate,
solid 350 parts
Asbestos, pow-
dered 350 parts
Water, boiling 1,000 parts
Mix. Give several coatings, letting
each dry before applying the next.
IV. — Asbestos, powdered 35 parts
Sodium borate. ... 20 parts
Water 100 parts
Gum lac 10 to 15 parts
Dissolve the borax in the water by the
aid of heat, and in the hot solution dis-
solve the lac. When solution is com-
plete incorporate the asbestos. These
last solutions give a superficial protection,
the efficiency of which depends upon the
number of coatings given.
V. — Prepare a syrupy solution of so-
dium silicate, 1 part, and water, 3 parts,
and coat the wood 2 to 3 times, thus im-
parting to it great hardness. After dry-
ing, it is given a coating of lime of the
consistency of milk, and when this is al-
most dry, is fixed by a strong solution of
soluble glass, 2 parts of the syrupy mass
to 3 parts of water. If the lime is applied
thick, repeat the treatment with the sol-
uble glass.
VI. — Subject the wood or wooden ob-
jects for 6 to 8 hours to the boiling heat of
a solution of 33 parts of manganese
chloride, 20 parts of orthophosphoric
acid, 12 parts of magnesium carbonate,
10 parts of boracic acid, and 25 parts of
ammonium chloride in 1,000 parts of
water. The wood thus treated is said to
be perfectly incombustible even at great
heat, and, besides, to be also protected by
this method against decay, injury by in-
sects, and putrefaction.
VII. — One of the simplest methods is
to saturate the timber with a solution of
tungstate of soda; if this is done in a
vacuum chamber, by means of which the
wood is partly deprived of the air con-
tained in its cells, a very satisfactory
result will be obtained. Payne's process
consists in treating wood under these
conditions first with solution of sul-
phate of iron, and then with chloride of
calcium; calcium sulphate is thus pre-
cipitated in the tissues of the timber,
which is rendered incombustible and
much more durable. There are several
other methods besides these, phosphate
of ammonia and tungstate being most
useful. A coat of common whitewash is
an excellent means of lessening the com-
bustibility of soft wood.
Fireproofing Wood Pulp. — The pulp
is introduced into a boiler containing a
hot solution of sulphate and phosphate of
ammonia and provided with a stirring
and mixing apparatus, as well as with an
arrangement for regulating the tempera-
ture. After treatment, the pulp is taken
out and compressed in order to free it
from its humidity. When dry, it may be
used for the manufacture of paper or for
analogous purposes. Sawdust treated in
the same manner may be used for pack-
ing goods, for deadening walls, and as a
jacketing for steam pipes.
Fireproofing for Wood, Straw, Tex-
tiles, etc. — The material to be made fire-
proof is treated with a solution of 10 to 20
parts of potassium carbonate and 4 to 8
parts of ammonium borate in 100 parts
of water. W'herever excessive heat oc-
curs, this compound, which covers the
substance, is formed into a glassy mass,
thus protecting the stuff from burning;
at the same time a considerable amount
of carbonic acid is given off, which
smothers the flames,
344
FIREPROOFING— FLOOR DRESSINGS
MISCELLANEOUS FORMULAS FOR
FIREPROOFING.
I. — In coating steel or other furnaces,
first brush over the brickwork to be cov-
ered a solution made by boiling 1 pound
each of silicate of soda and alum in 4
gallons of water, and follow immediately
with composition:
Silica 50 parts
Plastic fire clay .... 10 parts
Ball clay 3 parts
Mix well.
Fireproof Compositions. — II. — For fur-
naces, etc.:
Pure silica (in grain) 60 parts
Ground flint 8 parts
Plaster of Paris 3 parts
Ball clay 3 parts
Mix well together by passing once or
more through a fine sieve, and use in the
same way as cement.
Fireproof Paper. — Paper is rendered
fireproof by saturating it with a solution
of
Ammonium sulphate. 8 parts
Boracic acid 3 parts
Borax 2 parts
Water 100 parts
For the same purpose sodium tung-
state may also be employed.
Fireproof Coating. — A fireproof coat-
ing (so-called) consists of water, 100
parts; strong glue, 20 parts; silicate of
soda, 38° Be., 50 parts; carbonate of soda,
35 parts; cork in pieces of the size of a
pea, 100 parts.
Colored Fireproofing. — I. — Ammo-
nium sulphate, 70 parts; borax, 50 parts;
glue, 1 part; and water up to 1,000
parts.
II. — Solution of glue, 5 parts, zinc
chloride, 2 parts; sal ammoniac, 80
?arts; borax, 57 parts; and water up to
00 parts.
If the coating is to be made visible by
coloration, an addition of 10 parts of
Cassel brown and 6 parts of soda per
1,000 parts is recommended, which may
be dissolved separately in a portion of
the water used.
FIREPROOFING CELLULOID :
See Celluloid.
FIREPROOFING OF PAPER:
See Paper.
FIREWORKS:
See Pyrotechnics.
FILIGREE GILDING:
See Plating.
FISH BAIT.
Oil of rhodium 3 parts
Oil of cumin 2 parts
Tincture of musk .... 1 part
Mix. Put a drop or two on the bait, or
rub trigger of trap with the solution.
FIXATIVES FOR CRAYON DRAW-
INGS, ETC.
I.— Shellac 40) Parts
Sandarac 20 V by
Spirit of wine . 940 ) weight.
II. — During the Civil War, when both
alcohol and shellac often were not pur-
chasable, and where, in the field espe-
cially, ink was almost unknown, and
sized paper, of any description, a rarity,
men in the field were compelled to use
the pencil for correspondence of all sorts.
Where the communication was of a na-
ture to make its permanency desirable,
the paper was simply dipped in skim
milk, which effected the purpose admi-
rably. Such documents written with a
pencil on unsized paper have stood the
wear and rubbing of upward of 40 years.
To Fix Pounced Designs. — Take beer
pr milk or alcohol, in which a little
bleached shellac has been dissolved, and
blow one of these liquids upon the freshly
pounced design by means of an atomizer.
After drying, the drawing will have the
desired fixedness.
FIXING BATHS FOR PAPER AND
NEGATIVES:
See Photography.
FLANNELS, WHITENING OF:
See Laundry Preparations.
FLASH-LIGHT APPARATUS AND
POWDERS:
See Photography.
FLAVORINGS:
See Condiments.
FLEA DESTROYERS:
See Insecticides.
FLIES *IN THE HOUSE:
See Household Formulas.
FLIES AND PAINT:
See Paint.
Floor Dressings
(See also Paint, Polishes, Waxes, and
Wood.)
Oil Stains for Hard Floors.— I.— Burnt
sienna, slate brown, or wine black, is
ground with strong oil varnish in the
paint mill. The glazing color obtained
FLOOR DRESSINGS— FLOWER PRESERVATIVES S45
is thinned with a mixture of oil of tur-
pentine and applied with a brush on the
respective object. The superfluous stain
is at once wiped away with a rag, so that
only the absorbed stain remains in the
wood. If this is uneven, go over the
light places again with dark stain. In a
similar manner all otherwise tinted and
colored oil stains are produced by merely
grinding the respective color with the
corresponding addition of oil. Thus,
green, red, and even blue and violet
shades on wood can be obtained, it being
necessary only to make a previous ex-
periment with the stains on a piece of
suitable wood. In the case of soft wood,
however, it is advisable to stain the whole
previously with ordinary nut stain (not
too dark), and only after drying to coat
with oil stain, because the autumn rings
of the wood take no color, and would
appear too light, and, therefore, disturb
the effect.
II. — Boil 25 parts, by weight, of fustic
and 12 parts of Brazil wood with 2,400
parts of soapmakers' lye and 12 parts of
potash, until the liquid measures about
12 quarts. Dissolve in it, while warm,
30 parts of annatto and 75 of wax, and
stir until cold. There will be a sufficient
quantity of the brownish-red stain to
keep the floor of a large room in good
order for a year. The floor should be
swept with a brush broom daily, and
wiped up twice a week with a damp
cloth, applying the stain, when neces-
sary, to places where there is much wear,
and rubbing it in with a hard brush.
Every 6 weeks put the stain all over the
floor, and brush it in well.
III.— Neatsfoot oil 1 part
Cottonseed oil 1 part
Petroleum oil 1 part
IV. — Beeswax 8 parts
Water. 56 parts
Potassium carbonate 4 parts
Dissolve the potash in 12 parts of
water; heat together the wax and the re-
maining water till the wax is liquefied;
then mix the two and boil together until
a perfect emulsion is effected. Color, if
desired, with a solution of annatto.
V. — Paraffine oil 8 parts
Kerosene 1 part
Limewater 1 part
Mix thoroughly. A coat of the mix-
ture is applied to the floor with a mop.
Paraffining of Floors. — The cracks and
joints of the parquet floor are filled with
a putty consisting of Spanish white, 540
parts; glue, 180 parts; s;enna, 150 parts;
umber, 110 parts: and calcareous earth,
20 parts. After 48 hours apply the paraf-
fine, which is previously dissolved in pe-
troleum, or preferably employed in a boil-
ing condition, in which case it will enter
slightly into the floor. When solidifica-
tion sets in, the superfluous paraffine is
scratched off and .an even, smooth sur-
face of glossy color results, which with-
stands acids and alkalies.
Ball-Room Floor Powder. —
Hard paraffine 1 pound
Powdered boric acid. . 7 pounds
Oil lavender 1 drachm
Oil neroli 20 minims
Melt the paraffine and add the boric
acid and the perfumes. Mix well, and
sift through a -^ mesh sieve.
Renovating Old Parquet Floors. —
Caustic soda lye, prepared by boiling
for 45 minutes with 1 part calcined soda,
and 1 part slaked lime with 15 parts
water, in a cast-iron pot, is applied to the
parquet to be renovated by means of a
cloth attached to a stick. After a while
rub off the floor with a stiff brush, fine
sand, and a sufficient quantity of water,
to remove the dirt and old wax. Spread
a mixture of concentrated sulphuric acid
and water in the proportion of 1 to 8 on
the floor. The sulphuric acid will re-
move the particles of dirt and wax which
have entered the floor and enliven the
color of the wood. Finally, wax the
parquet after it has been washed off with
water and dried completely.
FLOOR OIL:
See Oils.
FLOOR PAPER:
See Paper.
FLOOR POLISH:
See Polishes.
FLOOR VARNISHES:
See Varnishes.
FLOOR WATERPROOFING:
See Waterproofing.
FLOOR WAX:
See Waxes.
FLORICIN OIL:
See Oil.
FLOWER PRESERVATIVES.
I. — To preserve flowers they should be
dipped in melted paraffine, which should
be just hot enough to maintain its fluidity.
The flowers should be dipped one at a
time, held by the stalks and moved about
for an instant to get rid of air bubbles.
Fresh cut flowers, free from moisture,
346
FLOWER PRESERVATIVES
are said to make excellent specimens
when treated in this way. A solution in
which cut flowers may be kept immersed
is made as follows:
Salicylic acid 20 grains
Formaldehyde 10 minims
Alcohol 2 fluidounces
Distilled water 1 quart
II. — The English method of preserv-
ing flowers so as to retain their form and
color is to imbed the plants in a mixture
of equal quantities of plaster of Paris and
lime, and gradually heat them to a tem-
perature of 100° F. After this the
flower looks dusty, but if it is laid aside for
an hour so as to absorb sufficient mois-
ture to destroy its brittleness, it can be
dusted without injury. To remove the
hoary appearance which is often left,
even after dusting, a varnish composed of
5 ounces of dammar and 16 ounces of
oil of turpentine should be used and a
second coat given if necessary. When
the gum has been dissolved in the tur-
pentine, 16 ounces of benzoline should
be added, and the whole should be
strained through fine muslin.
III. — Five hundred parts ether, 20 parts
transparent copal, and 20 parts sand.
The flowers should be immersed in the
varnish for 2 minutes, then allowed to dry
for 10 minutes, and this treatment should
be repeated 5 or 6 times.
IV. — Place the flowers in a solution of
30 grains of salicylic acid in 1 quart of
water.
V. — Moisten 1,000 parts of fine white
sand that has been previously well
washed and thoroughly dried and sifted,
with a solution consisting of 3 parts of
stearine, 3 parts of paraffine, 3 parts of
salicylic acid, and 100 parts of alcohol.
Work the sand up thoroughly so that
every grain of it is impregnated with the
mixture, and then spread it out and let it
become perfectly dry. To use, place
the flowers in a suitable box, the bottom
of which has been covered with a portion
of the prepared sand, and then dust the
latter over them until all the interstices
have been completely filled with it.
Close the box lightly and put it in a place
where it can be maintained at a tem-
perature of from 86° to 104° F. for 2 or 3
days. At the expiration of this time
remove the box and let the sand escape.
The flowers can then be put into suitable
receptacles or glass cases without fear of
deterioration. Wilted or withered flow-
ers should be freshened up by dipping
into a suitable aniline solution, which
will restore their color.
VI. — Stand the flowers upright in a box
of proper size and pour over and around
them fine dry sand, until the flowers are
completely surrounded in every direction
Leave them in this way for 8 or 10 days9
then carefully pour off the sand. The
flowers retain their color and shape per-
fectly, but in very fleshy, juicy specimens
the sand must be renewed. To be effect-
ive the sand must be as nearly dry as
possible.
VII. — A method of preserving cut flow-
ers in a condition of freshness is to dis-
solve small amounts of ammonium
chloride, potassium nitrate, sodium car-
bonate or camphor in the water into
which the stems are inserted. The
Eresence of one or more of these drugs
eeps the flowers from losing their tur-
gidity by stimulating the cells to action
and by opposing germ growth. Flow-
ers that have already wilted are said to
revive quickly if the stems are inserted in
a weak camphor water.
Stuccoed Gypsum Flowers. — Take
natural flowers, and coat the lower sides
of their petals and stamens with paraf-
fine or with a mixture of glue, gypsum,
and lirne, which is applied lightly. Very
fine parts of the flowers, such as stamens,
etc., may be previously supported by
special attachments of textures, wire,
etc. After the drying of the coating the
whole is covered with shellac solution
or with a mixture of glue, gypsum, lime
with lead acetate, oil, mucilage, glycer-
ine, colophony, etc. If desired, the sur-
face may be painted with bronzes in
various shades. Such flowers are much
employed in the shape of festoons for
decorating walls, etc.
Artificial Coloring of Flowers. — A
method employed by florists to impart a
green color to the white petals of "carna-
tion pinks" consists in allowing long-
stemmed flowers to stand in water con-
taining a green aniline dye. When the
flowers are fresh they absorb the fluid
readily, and the dye is carried to the
petals.
Where the original color of the flower
is white, colored stripes can be produced
upon the petals by putting the cut ends
into water impregnated with a suitable
aniline dye. Some dyes can thus be
taken up by the capillary action of the
stem and deposited in the tissue of the
petal. If flowers are placed over a basin
of water containing a very small amount
of ammonia in a bell glass, the colors of
the petals will generally show some
marked change. Many violet-colored
flowers when so treated will become
FLUID MEASURES— FLY-PAPERS AND FLY-POISONS 347
green, and if the petals contain several
tints they will show greens where reds
were, yellows where they were white,
and deep carmine will become black.
When such flowers are put into water
they will retain their changed colors for
hours.
If violet asters are moistened with
very dilute nitric acid, the ray florets be-
come red and acquire an agreeable odor.
FLUID MEASURES:
See Weights and Measures.
FLUORESCENT LIQUIDS.
J^sculin gives pale blue by (1) reflected
light, straw color by (2) transmitted light.
Amido-phthalic acid, pale violet (1),
pale yellow (2). Amido-terephthalic
acid, bright green (1), pale green (2).
Eosine, yellow green (1), orange (2).
Fluorescein, intense green (1), orange
yellow (2).
Fraxin, blue green (1), pale green (2).
Magdala red, opaque scarlet (1), bril-
liant carmine (2).
Quinine, pale blue (1), no color (2).
Safranine, yellow red (1), crimson (2).
FLUXES USED IN ENAMELING:
See Enameling.
FLUXES FOR SOLDERING:
See Soldering.
Fly-Papers and Fly-Poisons
(See also Insecticides.)
Sticky Fly-Papers.— The sticky mate-
rial applied to the paper is the following:
I. — Boiled linseed oil. 5 to 7 parts
Gum thus 2 to 3 parts
Non-drying oil ... 3 to 7 parts
For the non-drying oil, cottonseed,
castor, or neatsfoot will answer — in fact,
any of ,the cheaper oils that do not readily
dry or harden will answer. The proper
amount of each ingredient depends upon
the condition of the boiled oil. If it is
boiled down very stiff, more of the other
ingredients will be necessary, while if
thin, less will be required.
II. — Rosin 8 parts
Rapeseed oil 4 parts
Honey 1 part
Melt the rosin and oil together, and in-
corporate the honey. Two parts of raw
linseed oil and 2 parts of honey may be
used along with 8 parts of rosin instead
of the foregoing. Use paper already
sized, as it comes from the mills, on
which to spread the mixture.
III. — Castor oil 12 ounces
Rosin 27 ounces
Melt together and spread on paper
sized with glue, using 12 ounces glue to 4
pints water.
IV. — Rosin 8 ounces
Venice turpentine. . . 2 ounces
Castor oil 2 ounces
Spread on paper sized with glue.
Poisonous Fly-Papers. —
I. — Quassia chips 150' parts
Chloride of cobalt. .. 10 parts
Tartar emeiic 2 parts
Tincture of long
pepper (1 to 4) . . 80 parts
Water 400 parts
Boil the quassia in the water until the
liquid is reduced one-half, strain, add
the other ingredients, saturate common
absorbent paper with the solution, and
dry. The paper is used in the ordinary
way.
II. — Potassium bichromate 10 ounces
Sugar 3 drachms
Oil of black pepper. . 2 drachms
Alcohol 2 ounces
Water 14 ounces
Mix and let stand for several days,
then soak unsized paper with the solu-
tion.
III. — Cobalt chloride 4 drachms
Hot water 16 ounces
Brown sugar 1 ounce
Dissolve the cobalt in the water and
add the sugar, saturate unsized paper in
the solution, and hang up to dry.
IV. — Quassia chips 150 parts
Cobalt chloride.. . . 10 parts
Tartrate antimony. 2 parts
Tincture of pepper. 80 parts
Water 400 parts
Boil chips in the water until the vol-
ume of the latter is reduced one-half, add
other ingredients and saturate paper and
dry.
Fly-Poison. —
Pepper 4 ounces
Quassia 4 ounces
Sugar 8 ounces
Diluted alcohol 4 ounces
Mix dry and sprinkle around where
the flies can get it.
Non-Poisonous Fly-Papers. — I. — Mix
25 parts of quassia decoction (1:10) with
6 parts of brown sugar and 3 parts of
ground pepper, and place on flat dishes.
II. — Mix 1 part of ground pepper and
1 part of brown sugar with 16 parts milk
348
FLY-PAPERS—FOOD ADULTERANTS
or cream, and put the mixture on flat
plates.
III. — Macerate 20 parts of quassia
wood with 100 parts of water for 24
hours, boil one-half hour, and squeeze
off 24 hours. The liquid is mixed with
3 parts of molasses, and evaporated to
10 parts. Next add 1 part of alcohol.
Soak blotting paper with this mixture,
and put on plates.
IV. — Dissolve 5 parts of potassium
bichromate, 15 parts of sugar, and 1 part
of essential pepper oil in 60 parts of
water, and add 10 parts of alcohol.
Saturate unsized paper with this solu-
tion and dry well.
V. — Boil together for half an hour
Ground quassia
wood 18 pounds
Broken colocynth. . 3 pounds
Ground long pep-
per 5 pounds
Water 80 pounds
Then percolate and make up to 60
pounds if necessary with more water.
Then add 4 pounds of syrup. Unsized
paper is soaked in this, and dried as
quickly as possible to prevent it from
getting sour.
VI.— Mix together
Ordinary syrup.. . . 100 ounces
Honey 30 ounces
Extract of quassia
wood 4 ounces
Oil of aniseed, a few drops.
Removing the Gum of Sticky Fly-
Paper. — The "gum" of sticky fly-paper
that has " leaked " over furniture and
shelfware can be removed without caus-
ing injury to either furniture or bottles.
The "gum" of sticky fly-paper, while
being quite adhesive, is easily dissolved
with alcohol (grain or wood) or oil of
turpentine. Alcohol will not injure the
shelfware, but it should not be used on
varnished furniture; in the latter case
turpentine should be used.
FLY PROTECT! VES FOR ANIMALS:
See Insecticides.
FOAM PREPARATIONS.
A harmless gum cream is the follow-
ing:
I. — Digest 100 parts of Panama wood
for 8 days with 400 parts of water and
100 parts of spirits of wine (90 per cent).
Pour off without strong pressure and
filter.
For every 5 parts of lemonade syrup
take 5 parts of this extract, whereby a
magnificent, always uniform foam is
obtained on the lemonade.
II.— Heat 200 parts of quillaia bark
with distilled water during an hour in a
vapor bath, with frequent stirring, and
squeeze out. Thin with water if neces-
sary and filter.
FOOD ADULTERANTS, SIMPLE TESTS
FOR THEIR DETECTION.
Abstract of a monograph by W. D.
Bigelow and Burton J. Howard, pub-
lished by the Department of Agricul-
ture.
Generally speaking, the methods of
chemical analysis employed in food
laboratories can be manipulated only by
one who has had at least the usual college
course in chemistry, and some special
training in the examination of foods is
almost as necessary. Again, most of the
apparatus and chemicals necessary are
entirely beyond the reach of the home,
and the time consumed by the ordinary
examination of a food is in itself pro-
hibitive.
Yet there are some simple tests which
serve to point out certain forms of adul-
teration and can be employed by the
careful housewife with the reagents in
her medicine closet and the apparatus in
her kitchen. The number may be great-
ly extended by the purchase of a very
few articles that may be procured for a
few cents at any drug store. In apply-
ing these tests, one general rule must
always be kept carefully in mind. Every
one, whether layman or chemist, must
familiarize himself with a reaction be-
fore drawing any conclusions from it. For
instance, before testing a sample of sup-
posed coffee for starch, the method
should be applied to a sample of pure
coffee (which can always be procured
unground) and to a mixture of pure
coffee and starch prepared by the oper-
ator.
Many manufacturers and dealers in
foods have the ordinary senses so highly
developed that by their aid alone they
can form an intelligent opinion of the
nature of a product, or of the character,
and sometimes even of the proportion of
adulterants present. This is especially
true of such articles as coffee, wine,
salad oils, flavoring extracts, butter, and
milk. The housewife finds herself con-
stantly submitting her purchases to this
test. Her broad experience develops
her senses of taste and smell to a high
degree, and her discrimination is often
sharper and more accurate than she her-
self realizes. The manufacturer who
has developed his natural senses most
FOOD ADULTERANTS
349
highly appreciates best the assistance or
collaboration of the chemist, who can
often come to his relief when his own
powers do not avail. So the housewife,
by a few simple chemical tests, can
broaden her field of vision and detect
many impurities that are not evident to
the senses.
There are here given methods adapted
to this purpose, which may be applied to
milk, butter, coffee, spices, olive oil,
vinegar, jams and jellies, and flavoring
extracts. In addition to this some gen-
eral methods for the detection of coloring
matter and preservatives will be given.
All of the tests here described may be
performed with utensils found in any
well-appointed kitchen. It will be con-
venient, however, to secure a small glass
funnel, about 3 inches in diameter, since
filtration is directed in a number of the
methods prescribed. Filter paper can
best be prepared for the funnel by cut-
ting a circular piece about the proper
size and folding it once through the mid-
dle, and then again at right angles to the
first fold. The paper may then be
opened without unfolding in such a way
that three thicknesses lie together on one
side and only one thickness on the other.
In this way the paper may be made to
fit nicely into the funnel.
Some additional apparatus, such as
test tubes, racks for supporting them,
and glass rods, will be found more con-
venjent for one who desires to do consid-
erable work on this subject, but can be
dispensed with. The most convenient
size for test tubes is a diameter of from
J to f inch, and a length of from 5 to 6
inches. A graduated cylinder will also
be found very convenient. If this is
graduated according to the metric sys-
tem, a cylinder containing about 100
cubic centimeters will be found to be
convenient; if the English liquid measure
is used it may be graduated to from 3 to
8 ounces.
Chemical Reagents. — The word "re-
agent" is applied to "any substance used
to effect chemical change in another
substance for the purpose of identifying
its component parts or determining its
percentage composition." The follow-
ing reagents are required in the methods
here given:
Turmeric paper.
Iron alum (crystal or powdered form).
Hydrochloric acid (muriatic acid),
concentrated.
Caution. — All tests in which hydro-
chloric acid is used should be conducted
in glass or earthenware, for this acid at-
tacks and will injure metal vessels. Care
must also be taken not to bring it into
contact with the flesh or clothes. If, by
accident, a drop of it falls upon the
clothes, ammonia, or in its absence a
solution of saleratus or sal soda (wash-
ing soda), in water, should be applied
promptly.
Iodine tincture.
Potassium permanganate, 1 per cent
solution.
Alcohol (grain alcohol).
Chloroform.
Boric acid or borax.
Ammonia water.
Halphen's reagent.
With the exception of the last reagent
mentioned, these substances may be
obtained in any pharmacy. The Hal-
phen reagent should be prepared by a
druggist, certainly not by an inexperi-
enced person.
It is prepared as fellows: An approx-
imately 1 per cent solution of sulphur is
made by dissolving about ^ of a tea-
spoonful of precipitated sulphur in 3 or
4 ounces of carbon bisulphide. This
solution mixed with an equal volume of
amyl alcohol forms the reagent required
by the method. A smaller quantity than
that indicated by these directions may,
of course, be prepared.
If turmeric paper be not available it
may be made as follows: Place a bit of
turmeric powder (obtainable at any drug
store) in alcohol, allow it to stand for a
few minutes, stir, allow it to stand again
until it settles, dip a strip of filter paper
into the solution, and dry it.
Determination of Preservatives. — The
following methods cover all of the more
important commercial preservatives with
the exception of sulphites and fluorides.
These are quite frequently used for pre-
serving foods — the former with meat
products and the latter with fruit prod-
ucts— but, unfortunately, the methods for
their detection are not suitable for house-
hold use.
Detection of Salicylic Acid.— The
determination of salicylic acid can best
be made with liquids. Solid and semi-
solid foods, such as jelly, should be dis-
solved, when soluble, in sufficient water
to make them thinly liquid. Foods con-
taining insoluble matter, such as jam,
marmalade, and sausage, may be macer-
ated with water and strained through a
piece of white cotton cloth. The macer-
ation may be performed by rubbing in a
teacup or other convenient vessel with a
heavy spoon.
Salicylic acid is used for preserving
350
FOOD ADULTERANTS
fruit products of all kinds, including
beverages. It is frequently sold by drug
stores as fruit acid. Preserving powders
consisting entirely of salicylic acid are
often carried from house to house by
agents. It may be detected as follows:
Between 2 and 3 ounces of the liquid
obtained from the fruit products, as de-
scribed above, are placed in a narrow
bottle holding 5 ounces, about a quarter
of a teaspoonful of cream of tartar (or,
better, a few drops of sulphuric acid) is
added, the mixture shaken for 2 or 3
minutes, and filtered into a second small
bottle. Three or 4 tablespoonfuls of
chloroform are added to the clear liquid
in the second bottle and the liquids
mixed by a somewhat vigorous rotary
motion, poured into an ordinary glass
tumbler, and allowed to stand till the
chloroform settles out in the bottom.
Shaking is avoided, as it causes an emul-
sion which is difficult to break up. As
much as possible of the chloroform layer
(which now contains the salicylic acid)
is removed (without any admixture of
the aqueous liquid) by means of a medi-
cine dropper and placed in a test tube or
small bottle with about an equal amount
of water and a small fragment — a little
larger than a pinhead — of iron alum.
The mixture is thoroughly shaken and
allowed to stand till the chloroform again
settles to the bottom. The presence of
salicylic acid is then indicated by the
purple color of the upper layer of liquid.
Detection of Benzole Acid. — Benzoic
acid is also used for preserving fruit prod-
ucts. Extract the sample with chloro-
form as in the case of salicylic acid;
remove the chloroform layer and place it
in a white saucer, or, better, in a plain
glass sauce dish. Set a basin of water —
as warm as the hand can bear — on the
outside window ledge and place the dish
containing the chloroform extract in it,
closing the window until the chloroform
has completely evaporated. In this
manner the operation may be conducted
with safety even by one who is not accus-
tomed to handling chloroform. In
warm weather the vessel of warm water
may, of course, be omitted. Benzoic
acid, if present in considerable amount,
will now appear in the dish in character-
istic flat crystals. On warming the dish
the unmistakable irritating odor of
benzoic acid may be obtained. This
method will detect benzoic acid in tomato
catsup or other articles in which it is
used in large quantities. It is not suffi-
ciently delicate, however, for the smaller
amount used with some articles, such as
wine. It is often convenient to extract a
larger quantity of the sample and divide
the chloroform layer into two portions,
testing one for salicylic acid and the other
for benzoic acid.
Detection of Boric Acid and Borax. —
Boric acid (also called boracic acid) and
its compound with sodium (borax) are
often used to preserve animal products,
such as sausage, butter, and sometimes
milk. For the detection of boric acid
and borax, solids should be macerated
with a small amount of water and
strained through a white cotton cloth.
The liquid obtained by treating solids in
this manner is clarified somewhat by
thoroughly chilling and filtering through
filter paper.
In testing butter place a heaping tea-
spoonful of the sample in a teacup, add a
couple of teaspoonfuls of hot water, and
stand the cup in a vessel containing a
little hot water until the butter is thor-
oughly melted. Mix the contents of the
cup well by stirring with a teaspoon and
set the cup with the spoon in it in a
cold place until the butter is solid. The
spoon with the butter (which adheres to
it) is now removed from the cup and the
turbid liquid remaining strained through
a white cotton cloth, or, better, through
filter paper. The liquid will not all pass
through the cloth or filter paper, but a
sufficient amount for the test may be
secured readily.
In testing milk for boric acid 2 or 3
tablespoonfuls of milk are placed in a
bottle with twice that amount of a
solution of a teaspoonful of alum in a
pint of water, shaken vigorously, and
filtered through filter paper. Here again
a clear or only slightly turbid liquid
passes through the paper.
About a teaspoonful of the liquid ob-
tained by any one of the methods men-
tioned above is placed in any dish, not
metal, and 5 drops of hydrochloric
(muriatic) acid added. A strip of
turmeric paper is dipped into the liquid
and then held in a warm place — near a
stove or lamp — till dry. If boric acid or
borax was present in the sample the
turmeric paper becomes bright cherry
red when dry. A drop of household
ammonia changes the red color to dark
green or greenish black. If too much
hydrochloric acid is used the turmeric
paper may take on a brownish-red color
even in the absence of boric acid. In this
case, however, ammonia changes the
color to brown just as it does turmeric
paper which has not been dipped into
the acid solution.
FOOD ADULTERANTS
351
Detection of Formaldehyde. — Formal-
dehyde is rarely used with other foods
than milk. The method for its detec-
tion in milk is given later. For its
detection in other foods it is usually
necessary first to separate it by distilla-
tion, a process which is scarcely available
for the average person without laboratory
training and special apparatus. For
this reason no method is suggested here
for the detection of formaldehyde in
other foods than milk.
Detection of Saccharine. — Saccharine
has a certain preservative power, but it is
used not so much for this effect as be-
cause of the very sweet taste which it
imparts. It is extracted by means of
chloroform, as described under the
detection of salicylic acid. In the case
of solid and semi-solid foods, the sample
must, of course, be prepared by extrac-
tion with water, as described under sali-
cylic acid. The residue left after the
evaporation of the chloroform, if a con-
siderable amount of saccharine is present,
has a distinctly sweet taste.
The only other substance having a
sweet taste which may be present in
foods, i. e., sugar, is not soluble in
chloroform, and therefore does not
interfere with this reaction. Certain
other bodies (tannins) which have an
astringent taste are present, and as they
are soluble in chloroform may sometimes
mask the test for saccharine, but with
practice this difficulty is obviated.
Determination of Artificial Colors:
Detection of Coal-Tar Dyes. — Coloring
matters used with foods are usually
soluble in water. If the food under
examination be a liquid, it may there-
fore be treated directly by the method
given below. If it be a solid or a pasty
substance, soluble in water either in the
cold or after heating, it may be dissolved
in sufficient water to form a thin liquid.
If it contains some insoluble material, it
may be treated with sufficient water to
dissolve .the soluble portion with the
formation of a thin liquid and filtered,
and then strained through a clean white
cotton cloth to separate the insoluble
portion. About a half teacupful of the
liquid thus described is heated to boiling,
after adding a few drops of hydrochloric
acid and a small piece of white woolen
cloth or a few strands of white woolen
yarn. (Before using, the wool should
be boiled with water containing a little
soda, to remove any fat it may contain,
and then washed with water.) The wool
is again washed, first with hot and then
with cold water, the water pressed out as
completely as possible, and the color of
the fabric noted. If no marked color is
produced, the test may be discontinued
and the product considered free from
artificial colors. If the fabric is colored,
it may have taken up coal-tar colors,
some foreign vegetable colors, and if a
fruit product is being examined, some of
the natural coloring matter of the fruit.
Rinse the fabric in hot water, and then
boil for 2 or 3 minutes in about one-
third of a teacupful of water and 2 or 3
teaspoonfuls of household ammonia.
Remove and free from as much of the
liquid as possible by squeezing or wring-
ing. Usually the fabric will retain the
greater part of the natural fruit color,
while the coal-tar color dissolves in dilute
ammonia. The liquid is then stirred
with a splinter of wood and hydrochloric
acid added, a drop or two at a time, until
there is no longer any odor of ammonia.
(The atmosphere of the vessel is some-
times charged with the ammonia for
several minutes after it has all been
driven out of the liquid; therefore one
should blow into the dish to remove this
air before deciding whether the ammonia
odor has been removed or not.) When
enough acid has been added the liquid
has a sour taste, as may be determined by
touching the splinter, used in stirring, to
the tongue.
A fresh piece of white woolen cloth is
boiled in this liquid and thoroughly
washed. If this piece of cloth has a dis-
tinct color the food under examination
is artificially colored. The color used
may have been a coal-tar derivative,
commonly called an aniline dye, or an
artificial color chemically prepared from
some vegetable color. If of the first
class the dyed fabric is usually turned
purple or blue by ammonia. In either
case, if the second fabric has a distinct
color, it is evident that the product under
examination is artificially colored. Of
course a dull, faint tint must be disre-
garded.
Detection of Copper. — The presence of
copper, often used to deepen the green
tint of imported canned peas, beans,
spinach, etc., may be detected as follows:
Mash some of the sample in a dish
with a stiff kitchen spoon. Place a tea-
spoonful of the pulp in a teacup with 3
teaspoonfuls of water and add 30 drops
of strong hydrochloric acid with a medi-
cine dropper. Set the cup on the stove
in a saucepan containing boiling water.
Drop a bright iron brad or nail (wire
nails are the best and tin carpet tacks
352
FOOD ADULTERANTS
will not answer the purpose) into the cup
and keep the water in the saucepan boil-
ing for 20 minutes, stirring the contents
of the cup frequently with a splinter of
wood. Pour out the contents of the cup
and examine the nail. If present in an
appreciable amount the nail will be
heavily plated with copper.
Caution. — Be careful not to allow the
hydrochloric acid to come in contact with
metals or with the flesh or clothing.
Detection of Turmeric. — In yellow
spices, especially mustard and mace, tur-
meric is often employed. This is espe-
cially true of prepared mustard to which
a sufficient amount of starch adulterant
has been added to reduce the natural
color materially. If turmeric be em-
ployed to restore the normal shade an
indication of that fact may sometimes be
obtained by mixing a half teaspoonful
of the sample in a white china dish and
mixing with it an equal amount of water,
and a few drops (4 to 10) of housenold
ammonia, when a marked brown color,
which does not appear in the absence of
turmeric, is formed. At the present
time turmeric or a solution of curcuma
(the coloring matter of turmeric) is
sometimes added to adulterated mus-
tard in sufficient amount to increase its
color, but not to a sufficient extent to
give the brown appearance with ammo-
nia described above. In such cases a
teaspoonful of the suspected sample may
be thoroughly stirred with a couple of
tablespoonfuls of alcohol, the mixture
allowed to settle for 15 minutes or more,
and the upper liquid ooured off into a
clean glass or bottle. To about 1 table-
spoonful of the liquid thus prepared and
placed in a small, clear dish (a glass
salt cellar serves excellently) add 4 or 5
drops of a concentrated solution of boric
acid or borax and about 10 drops of hy-
drochloric acid, and mix the solution by
stirring with a splinter of wood. A
wedge-shaped strip of filter paper, about
2 or 3 inches long, 1 inch wide at the
upper end, and J inch at the lower end, is
then suspended by pinning, so that its
narrow end is immersed in the solution,
and is allowed to stand for a couple of
hours. The best results are obtained if
the paper is so suspended that air can
circulate freely around it, i. e., not allow-
ing it to touch anything except the pin and
the liquid in the dish. If turmeric be
present a cherry-red color forms on the
filter paper a short distance below the
upper limit to which the liquid is ab-
sorbed by the paper, frequently from
| of an inch to an inch above the surface
of the liquid itself. A drop of household
ammonia changes this red color to a dark
green, almost black. If too much hy-
drochloric acid is used a dirty brownish
color is produced.
Detection of Caramel. — A solution of
caramel is used to color many sub-
stances, such as vinegar and some dis-
tilled liquors. To detect it two test tubes
or small bottles of about equal size and
shape should be employed and an equal
amount (2 or 3 tablespoonfuls or more)
of the suspected sample placed in each.
To one of these bottles is added a tea-
spoonful of fuller's earth, the sample
shaken vigorously for 2 or 3 minutes,
and then filtered through filter paper,
the first portion of the filtered liquid
being returned to the filter paper and
the sample finally collected into the test
tube or bottle in which it was originally
placed, or a similar one. The filtered
liquid is now compared with the un-
treated sample. If it is markedly
lighter in color it may be taken for
granted that the color of the liquid is due
to caramel, which is largely removed by
fuller's earth. In applying this test,
however, it must be borne in mind that
caramel occurs naturally in malt vinegar,
being formed in the preparation of the
malt. It is evident that the tests require
practice and experience before they can
be successfully performed. The house-
wife can use them, but must repeat them
frequently in order to become proficient
in their use.
EXAMINATION OF CERTAIN CLASSES
OF FOODS:
Canned Vegetables. — These are rela-
tively free from adulteration by means of
foreign substances. The different grades
of products may with care be readily
detected by the general appearance of
the sample. The purchaser is, of
course, at the disadvantage of not being
able to see the product until the can is
opened. By a study of the different
brands available in the vicinity, however,
he can readily select those which are
preferable. As stated in an earlier part
of this article, canned tomatoes some-
times contain an artificial coloring mat-
ter, which may be detected as described.
Canned sweet corn is sometimes sweet-
ened with saccharine, which may be de-
tected as described.
It is believed that, as a rule, canned
vegetables are free from preservatives,
although some instances of chemical
preservation have recently been reported
in North Dakota, and some imported
FOOD ADULTERANTS
85$
tomatoes have been found to be arti-
ficially preserved. The presence of cop-
per, often used for the artificial greening
of imported canned peas, beans, spinach,
etc., may be detected as described.
Coffee. — There are a number of sim-
ple tests for the presence of the adulter-
ants of ground coffee. These are called
simple because they can be performed
without the facilities of the chemical
laboratory, and by one who has not had
the experience and training of a chemist.
It must be understood that they require
careful observation and study, and that
one must perform them repeatedly in
order to obtain reliable results. Before
applying them to the examination of an
unknown sample, samples of known
character should be secured and studied.
Unground coffee may be ground in the
home and mixed with various kinds of
adulterants, which can also be secured
separately. Thus the articles themselves
in known mixtures may be studied, and
when the same results are obtained with
unknown samples they can be correctly
interpreted. These tests are well known
in the laboratory and may be used in the
home of the careful housewife who has
the time and perseverance to master
them.
Physical Tests.— The difference be-
tween the genuine ground coffee and the
adulterated article can often be detected
by simple inspection with the naked eye.
This is particularly true if the product
be coarsely crushed rather than finely
ground. In such condition pure coffee
has a quite uniform appearance, whereas
the mixtures of peas, beans, cereals,
chicory, etc., often disclose their hetero-
geneous nature to the careful observer.
This is particularly true if a magnifying
glass be employed. The different arti-
cles composing the mixture may then be
separated by the point of a pen-knife.
The dark, gummy-looking chicory par-
ticles stand out in strong contrast to the
other substances used, and their nature
can be determined by one who is familiar
with them by their astringent taste.
The appearance of the coffee particles
is also quite distinct from that of many
of the coffee substitutes employed. The
coffee has a dull surface, whereas some
of its substitutes, especially leguminous
products, often present the appearance
of having a polished surface.
After a careful inspection of the sample
with the naked eye, or, better, with a
magnifying glass, a portion of it may be
placed in a small bottle half full of water
and shaken. The bottle is then placed
on the table for a moment. Pure coffee
contains a large amount of oil, by reason
of which the greater portion of the sample
will float. All coffee substitutes and
some particles of coffee sink to the bot-
tom of the liquid. A fair idea of the
purity of the sample can often be deter-
mined by the proportion of the sample
which floats or sinks.
Chicory contains a substance which
dissolves in water, imparting a brownish-
red color. When the suspected sample
is dropped into a glass of water, the
grains of chicory which it contains may
be seen slowly sinking to the bottom,
leaving a train of a dark-brown colored
liquid behind them. This test appears
to lead to more errors in the hands of
inexperienced operators than any other
test here given. Wrong conclusions
may be avoided by working first with
known samples of coffee and chicory as
suggested above.
Many coffee substitutes are now sold
as such and are advertised as more
wholesome than coffee. Notwithstand-
ing the claims that are made for them,
a few of them contain a considerable per-
centage of coffee. This may be deter-
mined by shaking a teaspoon! ul in a bot-
tle half full of water, as described above.
The bottle must be thoroughly shaken
so as to wet every particle of the sample.
Few particles of coffee substitutes will
float.
Chemical Tests. — Coffee contains no
starch, while all of the substances, ex-
cept chicory, used for its adulteration
and in the preparation of coffee substi-
tutes contain a considerable amount of
starch. The presence of such substi-
tutes may, therefore, be detected by
applying the test for starch. In making
this test less than a quarter of a teaspoon-
ful of ground coffee should be used, or a
portion of the ordinary infusion pre-
pared for the table may be employed
after dilution. The amount of water
that should be added can only be de-
termined by experience.
Condimental Sauces. — Tomato catsup
and other condimental sauces are fre-
quently preserved and colored artifi-
cially. The preservatives employed are
usually salicylic acid and benzoic acid
or their sodium salts. These products
may be detected by the methods given.
•Coal-tar colors are frequently em-
ployed with this class of goods, espe-
cially with those of a reddish tint, like
tomato catsup. They may be detected
by the methods given.
354
FOOD ADULTERANTS
DAIRY PRODUCTS:
Butter. — Methods are available which,
with a little practice, may be employed
to distinguish between fresh butter,
renovated or process butter, and oleo-
margarine.
These methods are commonly used in
food and dairy laboratories. They give
reliable results. At the same time con-
siderable practice is necessary before we
can interpret correctly the results ob-
tained. Some process butters are on
the market which can be distinguished
from fresh butter only with extreme
difficulty. During the last few years
considerable progress has been made in
the attempt to renovate butter in such a
way that it will appear like fresh butter in
all respects. A study must be made of
these methods if we would obtain reliable
results.
The "spoon" test has been suggested
as a household test, and is commonly
used by analytical chemists for distin-
guishing fresh butter from renovated
butter and oleomargarine. A lump of
butter, 2 or 3 times the size of a pea, is
placed in a large spoon and heated over
an alcohol or Bunsen burner. If more
convenient the spoon may be held above
the chimney of an ordinary kerosene
lamp, or it may even be held over an
ordinary illuminating gas burner. If
the sample in question be fresh butter it
will boil quietly, with the evolution of
many small bubbles throughout the mass
which produce a large amount of foam.
Oleomargarine and process butter, on
the other hand, sputter and crackle,
making a noise similar to that heard
when a green stick is placed in a fire.
Another point of distinction is noted if a
small portion of the sample be placed in
a small bottle and set in a vessel of water
sufficiently warm to melt the butter.
The sample is kept melted from half an
hour to an hour, when it is examined.
If renovated butter or oleomargarine,
the fat will be turbid, while if genuine
fresh butter the fat will almost certainly
be entirely clear.
To manipulate what is known as the
"Waterhouse" or "milk" test, about 2
ounces of sweet milk are placed in a
wide-mouthed bottle, which is set in a
vessel of boiling water. When the milk
is thoroughly heated, a teaspoonful of
butter is added, and the mixture stirred
with a splinter of wood until the fat is
melted. The bottle is then placed in a
dish of ice water and the stirring con-
tinued until the fat solidifies. If the
sample be butter, either fresh or reno-
vated, it will be solidified in a granular
condition and distributed through the
milk in small particles. If, on the other
hand, the sample consist of oleomar-
garine it solidifies practically in one piece
and may be lifted by the stirrer from the
milk.
By these two tests, the first of which
distinguishes fresh butter from process
or renovated butter and oleomargarine,
and the second of which distinguishes
oleomargarine from either fresh butter or
renovated butter, the nature of the sample
under examination may be determined.
Milk. — The oldest and simplest method
of adulterating milk is by dilution with
water. This destroys the natural yellow-
ish-white color and produces a bluish
tint, which is sometimes corrected by the
addition of a small amount of coloring
matter.
Another form of adulteration is the
removal of the cream and the sale as
whole milk of skimmed or partially
skimmed milk. Again, the difficulty
experienced in the preservation of milk
in warm weather has led to the wide-
spread use of chemical preservatives.
Detection of Water. — If a lactometer
or hydrometer, which can be obtained of
dealers in chemical apparatus, be avail-
able, the specific gravity of milk will
afford some clew as to whether the sam-
ple has been adulterated by dilution with
water. Whole milk has a specific grav-
ity between 1.027 and 1.033. The spe-
cific gravity of skimmed milk is higher,
and milk very rich in cream is some-i
times lower than these figures. It is
understood, of course, that by specific
gravity is meant the weight of a substance
with reference to the weight of an equal
volume of water. The specific gravity
of water is 1. It is obvious that if water
be added to a milk with the specific
gravity of 1.030, the specific gravity of
the mixture will be somewhat below
those figures.
An indication by means of a hydrom-
eter or lactometer below the figure 1.027
therefore indicates either that the sample
in question is a very rich milk or that
it is a milk (perhaps normal, perhaps
skimmed) that has been watered. The
difference in appearance and nature of
these two extremes is sufficiently obvious
to make use of the lactometer or hydrom-
eter of value as a preliminary test of the
purity of milk.
Detection of Color. — As previously
stated, when milk is diluted by means of
water the natural yellowish-white color
is changed to a bluish tint, which is
sometimes corrected by the addition
J?OOD ADULTERANTS
355
of coloring matter. Coal-tar colors are
usually employed for this purpose. A
reaction for these colors is often obtained
in the method given below for the detec-
tion of formaldehyde. When strong
hydrochloric acid is added to the milk in
approximately equal proportions before
the mixture is heated a pink tinge some-
times is evident if a coal-tar color has
been added.
Detection of Formaldehyde. — Formal-
dehyde is the substance most commonly
used for preserving milk and is rarely, if
ever, added to any other food. Its use
is inexcusable and especially objection-
able in milk served to infants and in-
valids.
To detect formaldehyde in milk 3 or
4 tablespoonfuls of the sample are placed
in a teacup with at least an equal amount
of strong hydrochloric acid and a piece
of ferric alum about as large as a pin-
head, the liquids being mixed by a gentle
rotary motion. The cup is then placed
in a vessel of boiling water, no further
heat being applied, and left for 5 min-
utes. At the end of this time, if formal-
dehyde be present, the mixture will be
distinctly purple. If too much heat is
applied, a muddy appearance is imparted
to the contents of the cup.
Caution. — Great care must be exercised in
working with hydrochloric acid, as it is
strongly corrosive.
Edible Oils.— With the exception of
cottonseed oil, the adulterants ordi-
narily used with edible oils are of such
a nature that the experience of a chemist
and the facilities of a chemical labora-
tory are essential to their detection.
There is, however, a simple test for the
detection of cottonseed oil, known as the
Halphen test, which may be readily
applied.
Great care must be taken in the manip-
ulation of this test, as one of the reagents
employed — carbon bisulphide — is very
inflammable. The chemicals employed
in the preparation of the reagent used
for this test are not household articles.
They may, however, be obtained in any
pharmacy. The mixture should be pre-
pared by a druggist rather than by an in-
experienced person who desires to use it.
In order to perform the test 2 or 3
tablespoonfuls of this reagent are mixed
in a bottle with an equal volume of the
suspected sample of oil and heated in a
vessel of boiling salt solution (prepared
by dissolving 1 tablespoonful of salt in a
pint of water) for 10 or 15 minutes. At
the end of that time, if even a small per-
centage of cottonseed oil be present, the
mixture will be of a distinct reddish color,
and if the sample consists largely or
entirely of cottonseed oil, the color will
be deep red.
Eggs-— There is no better method for
the testing of the freshness of an egg
than the familiar one of "candling,"
which has long been practiced by dealers.
The room is darkened and the egg held
between the eye and a light; the presence
of dark spots indicates that the egg is not
perfectly fresh, one that is fresh present-
ing a homogeneous, translucent appear-
ance. Moreover, there is found in the
larger end of a fresh egg, between the
shell and the lining membrane, a small
air cell which, of course, is distinctly
transparent. In an egg which is not
perfectly fresh this space is filled and
hence presents the same appearance as
the rest of the egg.
It is now a matter of considerable
importance to be able to distinguish
between fresh eggs and those that have
been packed for a considerable time.
Until recently that was not a difficult
matter. All of the solutions that were
formerly extensively used for that pur-
pose gave the shell a smooth, glistening
appearance which is not found in the
fresh egg. This characteristic, how-
ever, is of less value now than formerly,
owing to the fact that packed eggs are
usually preserved in cold storage.
There is now no means by which a fresh
egg can be distinguished from a packed
egg without breaking it. Usually in eggs
that have been packed for a considerable
time the white and yolk slightly inter-
mingle along the point of contact, and
it is a difficult matter to separate them.
Packed eggs also have a tendency to
adhere to the shell on one side and when
opened frequently have a musty odor.
FLAVORING EXTRACTS.
Although a large number of flavoring
extracts are on the market, vanilla and
lemon extracts are used so much more
commonly than other flavors that a
knowledge of their purity is of the
greatest importance. Only methods for
the examination of those two products
will be considered.
Vanilla Extract. — Vanilla extract is
made by extracting vanilla beans with
alcohol. It consists of an alcoholic
solution of vanillin (the characteristic
flavoring matter of the vanilla bean) and
several other products, chiefly rosins,
which, though present in but small
amount and having only a slight flavor
in themselves, yet affect very materially
356
FOOD ADULTERANTS
the flavor of the product. Vanilla ex-
tract is sometimes adulterated with the
extract of the Tonka bean. This extract,
to a certain extent, resembles vanilla
extract. The extract of the Tonka bean,
however, is far inferior to that of the
vanilla bean. It has a relatively pene-
trating, almost pungent odor, standing
in sharp contrast to the flavor of the
vanilla extract. This odor is so different
that one who has given the matter some
attention may readily distinguish the
two, and the quality of the vanilla ex-
tract may often be judged with a fair
degree of accuracy by means of the odor
alone.
Another form of adulteration, and one
that is now quite prevalent, is the use of
artificial vanillin in place of the extract
of either vanilla or Tonka beans. Arti-
ficial vanillin has, of course, the same
composition and characteristics as the
natural vanillin of the vanilla bean.
Extracts made from it, however, are
deficient in the rosins and other products
which are just as essential to the true
vanilla, as is vanillin itself. Since
vanillin is thus obtained from another
source so readily, methods for the deter-
mination of the purity of vanilla extract
must depend upon the presence of other
substances than vanillin.
Detection of Caramel. — The coloring
matter of vanilla extract is due to sub-
stances naturally present in the vanilla
bean and extracted therefrom by alcohol.
Artificial extracts made by dissolving
artificial vanillin in alcohol contain no
color of themselves* and to supply it
caramel is commonly employed. Cara-
mel may be detected in artificial extracts
by shaking and observing the color of
the resulting foam after a moment's
standing. The foam of pure extracts is
colorless. If caramel is present a color
persists at the points of contact between
the bubbles until the last bubble has
disappeared. The test with fuller's
earth given for caramel in vinegar is
also very satisfactory, but of course re-
quires the loss of the sample used for the
test.
Examination of the Rosin. — If pure
vanilla extract be evaporated to about
one-third its volume the rosins become
insoluble and settle to the bottom of the
dish. Artificial extracts remain clear
under the same conditions. In exam-
ining vanilla extract the character of
these rosins is studied. For this purpose
a dish containing about an ounce of the
extract is placed on a teakettle or other
vessel of boiling water until the liquid
evaporates to about one-third or less of
its volume. Owing to the evaporation
of the alcohol the rosins will then be in-
soluble. Water may be added to restore
the liquid to approximately its original
volume. The rosin will then separate
out as a brown flocculent precipitate. A
few drops of hydrochloric acid may be
added and the liquid stirred and the
insoluble matter allowed to settle. It is
then filtered and the rosin 011 the filter
paper washed with water. The rosin is
then dissolved in a little alcohol, and to 1
portion of this solution is added a small
particle of ferric alum, and to another
portion a few drops of hydrochloric acid.
If the rosin be that of the vanilla bean,
neither ferric alum nor hydrochloric acid
will produce more than a slight change
of color. With rosins from most other
sources, however, one or both of these
substances yield a distinct color change.
For filtering, a piece of filter paper
should be folded once through the middle
and again at right angles to the first fold.
It may now be opened with one fold on
one side and three on the other and fitted
into a glass funnel. When the paper is
folded in this manner the precipitated
rosins may be readily washed with water.
When the washing is completed the
rosins may be dissolved by pouring alco-
hol through the filter. This work with
the rosins will require some practice be-
fore it can be successfully performed. It
is of considerable value, however, in
judging of the purity of vanilla extract.
Lemon Extract. — By lemon extract is
understood a solution of lemon oil in
strong alcohol. In order to contain as
much lemon oil as is supposed to be
found in high-grade extracts the alcohol
should constitute about 80 per cent of
the sample. The alcohol is therefore
the most valuable constituent of lemon
extract, and manufacturers who turn out
a low-grade product usually do so be-
cause of their economy of alcohol rather
than of lemon oil. Owing to the fact
that lemon extract is practically a satu-
rated solution of oil of lemon in strong
alcohol the sample may be examined by
simple dilution with water. A tea-
spoonful of the oil in question may be
placed in the bottom of an ordinary
glass tumbler and 2 or 3 teaspoonfuls of
water added. If the sample in question
be real lemon extract tne lemon oil
should be thrown put of solution by rea-
son of its insolubility in the alcohol after
its dilution with water. The result is at
first a marked turbidity and later the
separation of the oil of lemon on the top
FOOD ADULTERANTS
357
of the aqueous liquid. If the sample
remains perfectly clear after the addition
of water, or if a marked turbidity is not
produced, it is a low-grade product and
contains very little, if any, oil of lemon.
Fruit Products. — Adulteration of fruit
products is practically confined to jellies
and jams. Contrary to the general
belief, gelatin is never used in making
fruit jelly. In the manufacture of the
very cheapest grade of jellies starch is
sometimes employed. Jellies contain-
ing starch, however, are so crude in their
appearance that the most superficial
inspection is sufficient to demonstrate
that they are not pure fruit jellies. From
their appearance no one would think it
worth while to examine them to deter-
mine their purity.
Natural fruit jellies become liquid on
being warmed. A spoonful dissolves
readily in warm water, although con-
siderable time is required with those
that are especially firm. The small
fruits contain practically no starch, as
apples do, and the presence of starch in
a jelly indicates that some apple juice
has probably been used in its prepara-
tion.
Detection of Starch. — Dissolve a tea-
spoonful of jelly in a half teacupful of
hot water, heat to boiling and add, drop
by drop, while stirring with a teaspoon, a
solution of potassium permanganate
until the solution is almost colorless.
Then allow the solution to cool and test
for starch with tincture of iodine, as
directed later. Artificially colored jel-
lies are sometimes not decolorized by
potassium permanganate. Even without
decolorizing, however, the blue color can
usually be seen.
Detection of Glucose. — For the detec-
tion of glucose, a teaspoonful of the jelly
may be dissolved in. a glass tumbler or
bottle in 2 or 3 tablespoonfuls of water.
The vessel in which the jelly is dissolved
may be placed in hot water if necessary
to hasten the solution. In case a jam or
marmalade is being examined, the mix-
ture is filtered to separate the insoluble
matter. The solution is allowed to cool,
and an equal volume or a little more of
strong alcohol is added. If the sample is
a pure fruit product the addition of
alcohol causes no precipitation, except
that a very slight amount of proteid
bodies is thrown down. If glucose has
been employed in its manufacture, how-
ever, a dense white precipitate separates
and, after a time, settles to the bottom of
the liquid.
Detection of Foreign Seeds. — In addi-
tion to the forms of adulteration to
which jellies are subject, jams are some
times manufactured from the exhausted
fruit pulp left after removing the juice
for making jelly. When this is done
residues from different fruits are some-
times mixed. Exhausted raspberry or
blackberry pulp may be used in making
"strawberry" jam and vice versa. Some
instances are reported of various small
seeds, such as timothy, clover, and
alfalfa seed, having been used with jams
made from seedless pulp.
With the aid of a small magnifying
glass such forms of adulteration may
be detected, the observer familiarizing
himself with the seeds of the ordinary
fruits.
Detection of Preservatives and Colors.
— With jellies and jams salicylic and
benzoic acids are sometimes employed.
They may be detected by the methods
given.
Artificial colors, usually coal-tar deriva-
tives, are sometimes used and may be
detected as described.
Meat Products. — As in many other
classes of foods, certain questions im-
portant in the judgment of meats require
practical experience and close observa-
tion rather than chemical training. This
is especially true of meat products. The
general appearance of the meat must
largely guide the purchaser. If, how-
ever, the meat has been treated with pre-
servatives and coloring matter its appear-
ance is so changed as to deceive him.
The preservatives employed with meat
products are boric acid, borax, and sul-
phites. The methods for the detection of
sulphites are not suitable for household
use.
Detection of Boric Acid and Borax. —
To detect boric acid (if borax has been
used the same reaction will be obtained),
about a tablespoonful of the chopped
meat is thoroughly macerated with a
little hot water, pressed through a bag,
and 2 or 3 tablespoonfuls of the liquid
placed in a sauce dish with 15 or 20
drops of strong hydrochloric acid for
each tablespoonful. The liquid is then
filtered through filter paper, and a piece
of turmeric paper dipped into it and
dried near a lamp or stove. If boric
acid or borax were used for preserv-
ing the sample, the turmeric paper
should be changed to a bright cherry-
red color. If too much hydrochloric
acid has been employed a dirty brown-
ish-red color is obtained, which interferes
with the color due to the presence of
358
FOOD ADULTERANTS
boric acid. When a drop of household
ammonia is added to the colored turmeric
paper, it is turned a dark green, almost
black color, if boric acid is present. If
the reddish color, however, was caused
by the use of too much hydrochloric acid
this green color does not form.
Caution. — The corrosive nature of
hydrochloric acid must not be forgotten.
It must not be allowed to touch the flesh,
clothes, or any metal.
Detection of Colors. — The detection of
coloring matter in sausage is often a diffi-
cult matter without the use of a com-
pound microscope. It may sometimes
be separated, however, by macerating
the meat with a mixture of equal parts
of glycerine and water to which a few
drop;* of acetic or hydrochloric acid have
been added. After macerating for some
time the mixture is filtered and the color-
ing matter detected by means of dyeing
wool in the liquid thus obtained.
Spices. — Although ground spices are
very frequently adulterated, there are
few methods that may be used by one
who has "not had chemical training, and
who is not skilled in the use of a com-
pound microscope, for the detection of
the adulterants employed. The major-
ity of the substances used for the adul-
teration of spices are of a starchy char-
acter. Unfortunately for our purposes,
most of the common spices also contain
a considerable amount of starch. Cloves,
mustard, and cayenne, however, are prac-
tically free from starch, and the presence
of starch in the ground article is proof of
adulteration.
Detection of Starch in Cloves, Mustard,
and Cayenne. — A half teaspoonful of the
spice in question is stirred into half a
cupful of boiling water, and the boiling
continued for 2 or 3 minutes. The mix-
ture is then cooled. If of a dark color,
it is diluted with a sufficient amount of
water to reduce the color to such an ex-
tent that the reaction formed by starch
and iodine may be clearly apparent if
starch be present. The amount of dilu-
tion can only be determined by practice,
but usually the liquid must be diluted
with an equal volume of water, or only
^ of a teaspoonful of the sample may be
employed originally. A single drop of
tincture of iodine is now added. If starch
is present, a deep blue color, which in the
presence of a large amount of starch ap-
pears black, is formed. If no blue color
appears, the addition of the iodine tinct-
ure should be continued, drop by drop,
until the liquid shows by its color the
presence of iodine in solution.
Detection of Colors. — Spice substitutes
are sometimes colored with coal-tar
colors. These, products may be detected
by the methods given.
Vinegar. — A person thoroughly famil-
iar with vinegar can tell much regarding
the source of the article from its appear-
ance, color, odor, and taste.
If a glass be rinsed out with the sample
of vinegar and allowed to stand for a
number of hours or overnight, the odor
of the residue remaining in the glass is
quite different with different kinds of
vinegar. Thus, wine vinegar has the
odor characteristic of wine, and cider
vinegar has a peculiar fruity odor. A
small amount of practice with this test
enables one to distinguish with a high
degree of accuracy between wine and
cider vinegars and the ordinary substi-
tutes.
If a sample of vinegar be placed in a
shallow dish on a warm stove or boiling
teakettle and heated to a temperature
sufficient for evaporation and not suffi-
cient to burn the residue, the odor of the
warm residue is also characteristic of the
different kinds of vinegar. Thus, the
residue from cider vinegar has the odor
of baked apples and the flavor is acid
and somewhat astringent in taste, and
that from wine vinegar is equally char-
acteristic. The residue obtained by
evaporating vinegar made from sugar-
house products and from spirit and wood
vinegar colored by means of caramel
has the peculiar bitter taste character-
istic of caramel.
If the residue be heated until it begins
to burn, the odor of the burning product
also varies with different kinds of vine-
gar. Thus, the residue from cider
vinegar has the odor of scorched apples,
while that of vinegars made from sugar-
house wastes and of distilled and wood
vinegars colored with a large amount of
caramel has the odor of burnt sugar. In
noting these characteristics, however, it
must be borne in mind that, in order to
make them conform to these tests, dis-
tilled and wood vinegars often receive
the addition of apple jelly.
The cheaper forms of vinegar, espe-
cially distilled and wood vinegar, are
commonly colored with caramel, which
can be detected by the method given.
FOOD COLORANTS.
(Most, if not all, of these colorants are
injurious and should therefore be used
with extreme caution.)
Sausage Color. — To dye sausage red,
certain tar dyestuffs are employed,
FOOD ADULTERANTS
359
especially the azo dyes, preference being
given to the so-called genuine red. For
this purpose about 100 parts of dyestuff
are dissolved in 1,000 to 2,000 parts of
hot water; when the solution is com-
plete, add a likewise hot solution of 45 to
50 parts of boracic acid, whereupon the
mixture should be stirred well for some
time; then filter, allow to cool, and pre-
serve in tightly closing bottles. It is
absolutely necessary in using aniline
colors to add a disinfectant to the dye-
stuff solution, the object of which is, in
case the sausage should commence to
decompose, to prevent the decomposition
azo dyestuff by the disengaged hydrogen.
Instead of boracic acid, formalin may
be used as a disinfectant. Of this
formalin, 38 per cent, add about 25 to
30 parts to the cooled and filtered dye-
stuff solution. This sausage color is
used by adding about 1 ^ to 2 tablespoon-
f uls of it to the preserving salt measured
out for 100 kilos of sausage mass, stirring
well. The sausage turns neither gray nor
yellow on storing.
Cheese Color. — I. — To produce a suit-
able, pretty yellow color, boil 100 parts
of orlean or annatto with 75 parts of
potassium carbonate in li to 2 liters of
water, allow to cool, and filter after set-
tling, whereupon 15 to 18 parts of boracic
acid are added to give keeping qualities
to the solution. According to another
method, digest about 200 parts of or-
lean. 200 parts of potassium carbonate,
and 100 parts of turmeric for 10 to 12
days in 1,500 to 2,000 parts of 60 per
cent alcohol, filter, and keep in bottles.
To 100,000 parts of milk to be made into
cheese add 1 ^ to 2 small spoonfuls of
this dye, which imparts to the cheese a
permanent and natural yellow appear-
ance.
II. — To obtain a handsome yellow
color for cheese, such as is demanded for
certain sorts, boil together 100 parts of
annatto and 75 parts of potassium car-
bonate in from 1,500 to 2,000 parts of
pure water; let it cool, stand it aside for a
time, and filter, adding finally from 12 to
15 parts of boracic acid as a preservative.
For coloring butter, there is in the trade
a mixture of bicarbonate of soda with 12
per cent to 15 per cent of sodium chlo-
ride, to which is added from 1J per cent
to 2 per cent of powdered turmeric.
Butter Color. — For the coloring of
butter there is in the market under the
name of butter powder a mixture of
sodium bicarbonate with 12 to 15 per
cent of sodium chloride and 1^ to 2 per
cent of powdered turmeric; also a mix-
ture of sodium bicarbonate, 1,50'0 parts;
saffron surrogate, 8 parts; and salicylic
acid, 2 parts. For the preparation of
liquid butter color use a uniform solution
of olive oil, 1,500 parts; powdered tur-
meric, 300 parts; orlean, 200 parts. The
orlean is applied on a plate of glass or
tin in a thin layer and allowed to dry
perfectly, whereupon it is ground very
fine and intimately mixed with the
powdered turmeric. This mixture is
stirred into the oil with digestion for
several hours in the water bath. When
a uniform, liquid mass has resulted, it is
filtered hot through a linen filter with
wide meshes. After cooling, the fil-
trate is filled into bottles. Fifty to 60
drops of this liquid color to 1| kilos of
butter impart to the latter a handsome
golden yellow shade.
INFANT FOODS:
Infants' (Malted) Food.—
I. — Powdered malt .... 1 ounce
Oatmeal (finest
ground) 2 ounces
Sugar of milk 4 ounces
Baked flour 1 pound
Mix thoroughly.
II. — Infantine is a German infant
food which is stated to contain egg
albumen, 5.5 per cent; fat, 0.08 per cent;
water, 4.22 per cent; carbohydrates,
86.58 per cent (of which 54.08 per cent
is soluble in water); and ash, 2.81 per
cent (consisting of calcium, 10.11 per
cent; potassium, 2.64 per cent; sodium,
25.27 per cent; chlorine, 36.65 per cent;
sulphuric acid, 3.13 per cent; and phos-
phoric acid, 18.51 per cent).
MEAT PRESERVATIVES.
(Most of these are considered injurious
by the United States Department of Agri-
culture and should therefore be used with
extreme caution.)
The Preservation of Meats. — Decom-
position of the meat sets in as soon as
the blood ceases to pulse in the veins,
and it is therefore necessary to properly
preserve it until the time of its consump-
tion.
The nature of preservation must be
governed by circumstances such as the
kind and quality of the article to be pre-
served, length of time and climatic con-
dition, etc. While salt, vinegar, and
alcohol merit recognition on the strength
of a long-continued usage as preserva-
tives, modern usage favors boric acid and
borax, and solutions containing salicylic
acid and sulphuric acid are common,
360
FOOD PRESERVATIVES
and have been the subject of severe criti-
cism.
Many other methods of preservation
have been tried with variable degrees of
success; and of the more thoroughly
tested ones the following probably
include all of those deserving more than
passing mention or consideration.
1. The exclusion of external, atmos-
pheric electricity, which has been ob-
served to materially reduce the decaying
of meat, milk, butter, beer, etc.
2. The retention of occluded electric
currents. Meats from various animals
packed into the same packages, and sur-
rounded by a conducting medium, such
as salt and water, liberate electricity.
3. The removal of the nerve centers.
Carcasses with the brains and spinal cord
left therein will be found more prone
to decomposition than those wherefrom
these organs have been removed.
4. Desiccation. Dried beef is an
excellent example of this method of pres-
ervation. Other methods coming un-
der this heading are the application of
spices with ethereal oils, various herbs,
coriander seed extracted with vinegar,
etc.
5. Reduction of temperature, i. e.,
cold storage.
6. Expulsion of air from the meat and
the containers. Appert's, Willaumez's,
Redwood's, and Prof. A. Vogel's meth-
ods are representative for this category of
preservation. Phenyl paper, Dr. Busch's,
Georges's, and Medlock and Baily's proc-
esses are equally well known.
7. The application of gases. Here
may be mentioned Dr. Gamgee's and
Bert and Reynoso's processes, applying
carbon dioxide and other compressed
gases, respectively.
Air-drying, powdering of meat, smok-
ing, pickling, sugar or vinegar curing
are too well known to receive any
further attention here. Whatever proc-
ess may be employed, preference should
be given to that which will secure the
principal objects sought for, the most
satisfactory being at the same time not
deleterious to health, and of an easily
applicable and inexpensive nature.
To Preserve Beef, etc., in Hot
Weather. — Put the meat into a hot oven
and let it remain until the surface is
browned all over, thus coagulating the
albumen of the surface and inclosing the
body of the meat in an impermeable en-
velope of cooked flesh. Pour some melted
lard or suet into a jar of sufficient size,
and roll the latter around until the sides
are evenly coated to the depth of half
an inch with the material. Put in the
meat, taking care that it does not touch
the sides of the jar (thus scraping away
the envelope of grease), and fill up with
more suet or lard, being careful to com-
pletely cover and envelop the meat. Thus
prepared, the meat will remain absolutely
fresh for a long time, even in the hottest
weather. When required for use the
outer portion may be left on or removed.
The same fat may be used over and
over again by melting and retaining in
the melted state a few moments each time,
by which means not only all solid portions
of the meat which have been retained
fall to the bottom, but all septic microbes
are destroyed.
Meat Preservatives. — I. — Barmenite
Corning Agent: For every 100 parts, by
weight, take 25.2 parts, by weight, of
saltpeter; 46.8 parts, by weight, sodium
chloride; 25.7 parts, by weight, cane
sugar; 0.8 parts, by weight, plaster of
Paris or gypsum; 0.1 part, by weight,
of some moistening material, and a trace
of magnesia.
Il.—Carniform, A : For every 100 parts,
by weight, take 3.5 parts, by weight,
sodium diphosphate; 3.1 parts, by weight,
water of crystallization; 68.4 parts, by
weight, sodium chloride; 24.9 parts, by
weight, saltpeter; together with traces of
calcium phosphate, magnesia, and sul-
phuric acid.
III. — Carniform, B: For every 100
parts, by weight, take 22.6 parts, by
weight, sodium diphosphate; 17.3 parts,
by weight, water of crystallization; 59.7
parts, by weight, saltpeter; 0.6 parts, by
weight, calcium phosphate; with traces
of sulphuric acid and magnesia.
IV. — "Cervelatwurst" (spice powder):
For 100 parts, by weight, take 0.7 parts,
by weight, of moistening; 3.5 parts, by
weight, spices — mostly pepper; 89 parts,
by weight, sodium chloride; 5 parts, by
weight, saltpeter; 0.7 parts, by weight,
gypsum; and traces of magnesia.
V. — Cervelatwurst Salt (spice powder):
For 100 parts, by weight, take 7.5 parts,
by weight, spices — mostly pepper; 1.6
parts, by weight, moistener; 81.6 parts,
by weight, sodium chloride; 2.5 parts, by
weight, saltpeter; 6.2 parts, by weight,
cane sugar; and traces of magnesia.
VI. — Rubrolin Sausage (spice powder):
For 100 parts by weight, take 53.5 parts,
by weight, sal ammoniac, and 45.2 parts,
by weight, of saltpeter.
VII.— Servator Special Milk and But-
ter Preserving Salt: 80.3 per cent of
crystallized boracic acid; 10.7 per cent
FOOD PRESERVATIVES— FOOT-POWDERS
861
sodium chloride; and 9.5 per cent of
benzoic acid. (Its use is, however, pro-
hibited in Germany.)
VIII.— Wittenberg Pickling Salt: For
100 parts, by weight, take 58.6 parts, by
weight, sodium chloride; 40.5 parts, by
weight, saltpeter; 0.5 parts, by weight,
gypsum; traces of moisture and mag-
nesia.
IX.— Securo: For a quart take 3.8
parts, by weight, aluminum oxide, and 8
parts, by weight, acetic acid; basic ace-
tate of alumina, 62 parts, by weight;
sulphuric acid, 0.8 parts, by weight ;
sodium oxide, with substantially traces
of lime and magnesia.
X.—Michels Cassala Salt: This is
partially disintegrated. 30.74 per cent
sodium chloride; 15.4 per cent sodium
phosphate; 23.3 per cent potassio-sodic
tartrate; 16.9 per cent water of crystalli-
zation; 1.2 per cent aluminum oxide;
and 2.1 per cent acetic acid as basic ace-
tate of alumina; 8.4 per cent sugar; 0.98
per cent benzoic acid; 0.5 per cent sul-
phuric acid; and traces of lime.
XI. — Corning Salt: Sodium nitrate,
50 parts; powdered boracic acid, 45
parts; salicylic acid, 5 parts.
XII. — Preservative Salt: Potassium
nitrate, 70 parts; sodium bicarbonate,
15 parts; sodium chloride, 15 parts.
XIII. — Another Corning Salt: Potas-
sium nitrate, 50 parts; sodium chloride,
20 parts; powdered boracic acid, 20
parts; sugar, 10 parts.
XIV. — Maciline (offered as condiment
and binding agent for sausages): A mix-
ture of wheat flour and potato flour dyed
intensely yellow with an azo dyestuff and
impregnated with oil of mace.
XV.— Borax 80 parts
Boric acid 17 parts
Sodium chloride. 3 parts
Reduce the ingredients to a powder
and mix thoroughly.
XVI. — Sodium sulphite,
powdered .... 80 parts
Sodium sulphate,
powdered .... 20 parts
XVII.— Sodium chloride. 80 parts
Borax 8 parts
Potassium nitrate 12 parts
Reduce to a powder and mix.
XVIII. — Sodium nitrate. . 50 parts
Salicylic acid. ... 5 parts
Boric acid 45 parts
XIX. — Potassium ni-
trate 70 parts
Sodium bicar-
bonate 15 parts
Sodium chloride. 15 parts
XX. — Potassium ni-
trate 50 parts
Sodium chloride. 20 parts
Boric acid 20 parts
Sugar 10 parts
A German Method of Preserving Meat.
— Entire unboweled cattle or large, suit-
ably severed pieces are sprinkled with
acetic acid and then packed and trans-
ported in sawdust impregnated with
cooking salt and sterilized.
Extract of Meat Containing Albumen.
— In the ordinary production of meat
extract, the albumen is more or less lost,
partly through precipitation by the acids
or the acid salts of the meat extract, part-
ly through salting out by the salts of the ex-
tract, and partly by coagulation at a higher
temperature. A subsequent addition of
albumen is impracticable because the al-
bumen is likewise precipitated, insolubly,
by the acids and salts contained in the
extract. This precipitation can be pre-
vented, according to a French patent, by
neutralizing the extract before mixing
with albumen, by the aid of sodium
bicarbonate. The drying of the mixture
is accomplished in a carbonic acid at-
mosphere. The preparation dissolves
in cold or hot water into a white, milky
liquid and exhibits the smell and taste of
meat extract, if the albumen added was
tasteless. The taste which the extract
loses by the neutralization returns in its
original strength after the mixture with
albumen. In this manner a meat prep-
aration is obtained which contains larger
quantities of albumen and is more
nutritious and palatable than other
preparations.
Foot-Powders and Solutions
The following foot-powders have been
recommended as dusting powders:
I. — Boric acid 2 ounces
Zinc oleate 1 ounce
Talcum 3 ounces
II. — Oleate of zinc (pow-
dered) $ ounce
Boric acid 1 ounce
French chalk 5 ounces
Starch 1 ounces
FOOT-POWDERS—FORMALDEHYDE
III. — Dried alum 1 drachm
Salicylic acid £ drachm
Wheat starch 4 drachms
Powdered talc 1^ ounces
IV. — Formaldehyde solu-
tion 1 part
Thymol -rV part
Zinc oxide 35 parts
Powdered starch. ... 65 parts
V. — Salicylic acid 7 drachms
Boric acid. 2 ounces, 440 grains
Talcum 38 ounces
Slippery elm bark. . . 1 ounce
Orris root 1 ounce
VI.— Talc. 12 ounces
Boric acid 10 ounces
Zinc oleate 1 ounce
Salicylic acid. ...... 1 ounce
Oil of eucalyptus ... 2 drachms
VEI. — Salicylic acid 7 drachms
Boric acid 3 ounces
Talcum 38 ounces
Slippery elm, pow-
dered 1 ounce
Orris, powdered. ... 1 ounce
Salicylated Talcum.—
I. — Salicylic acid 1 drachm
Talcum 6 ounces
Lycopodium 6 drachms
Starch 3 ounces
Zinc oxide 1 ounce
Perfume, quantity sufficient.
II. — Tannoform 1 drachm
Talcum 2 drachms
Lycopodium 30 grains
Use as a dusting powder.
Solutions for Perspiring Feet. —
I. — Balsam Peru 15 minims
Formic acid 1 drachm
Chloral hydrate 1 drachm
Alcohol to make 3 ounces.
Apply by means of absorbent cotton.
II. — Boric acid 15 grains
Sodium borate 6 drachms
Salicylic acid 6 drachms
Glycerine 1£ ounces
Alcohol to make 3 ounces.
For local application.
FOOTSORES ON CATTLE:
See Veterinary Formulas.
FORMALDEHYDE :
See also Disinfectants, Foods, and Milk.
Commercial Formaldehyde. — This ex-
tremely poisonous preservative is ob-
tained by passing tne vapors of wood
spirit, in the presence of air, over copper
heated to redness. The essential parts
of the apparatus employed are a metal
chamber into which a feed-tube enters,
and from which 4 parallel copper tubes
or oxidizers discharge by a common exit
tube. This chamber is fitted with in-
spection apertures, through which the
course of the process may be watched
and controlled. The wood spirit, stored
in a reservoir, falls into a mixer where it
is volatilized and intimately mixed with
air from a chamber which is connected
with a force pump. The gases after
traversing the oxidizer are led into a
condensing coil, and the crude formal-
dehyde is discharged into the receiver
beneath.
The small amount of uncondensed gas
is then led through a series of two
washers. The "formol" thus obtained
is a mixture of water, methyl alcohol,
and 30 to 40 per cent of formaldehyde.
It is rectified in a still, by which the free
methyl alcohol is removed and pure for-
mol obtained, containing 40 per cent of
formaldehyde, chiefly in the form of the
acetal. Rectification must not be pushed
too far, otherwise the formaldehyde may
become polymerized into trioxmethylene.
When once oxidation starts, the heat gen-
erated is sufficient to keep the oxidizers
red hot, so that the process works practi-
cally automatically.
Determination of the Presence of For-
maldehyde in Solutions. — Lemme makes
use, for this purpose, of the fact that
formaldehyde, in neutral solutions of
sodium sulphite, forms normal bisulphite
salts, setting free a corresponding quan-
tity of sodium hydrate, that may be
titrated with sulphuric acid and phenol-
phthalein. The sodium sulphite solu-
tion has an alkaline reaction toward
phenolphthalein, and must be exactly
neutralized with sodium bisulphite.
Then to 100 cubic centimeters of this
solution of 250 grams of sodium sulphite
(NaaSO3+7HaO) in 750 grams water,
add 5 cubic centimeters of the suspected
formaldehyde solution. A strong red
color is instantly produced. Titrate with
normal sulphuric acid until the color
disappears. As the exact disappearance
of the color is not easily determined, a
margin of from 0.1 to 0.2 cubic centi-
meters may be allowed without the ex-
actness of the reaction being injured,
since 1 cubic centimeter of normal acid
answers to only 0.03 grams of formal-
dehyde.
FORMALIN FOR GRAIN SMUT:
See Grain.
FREEZING PREVENTIVES— FROST BITE
FRAMES : THEIR PROTECTION FROM
FLIES.
Since there is great risk of damaging
the gilt when trying to remove fly-
specks with spirits of wine, it has been
found serviceable to cover gilding with
a copal varnish. This hardens and will
stand rough treatment, and may be re-
newed wherever removed.
FRAME CLEANING:
See Cleaning Preparations and Meth-
ods.
FRAME POLISHES:
See Polishes.
FRAMING, PASSE-PARTOUT:
See Passe- Partout.
FRECKLE LOTIONS:
See Cosmetics.
FREEZING MIXTURES:
See also Refrigeration and Refriger-
ants.
Freezing Preventives
Liquid for Cooling Automobile En-
gines.— In order to prevent freezing of the
jacket water, when the engine is not in
operation in cold weather, solutions are
used, notably of glycerine and of calcium
chloride (CaCl2). The proportions for
the former solution are equal parts of
water and glycerine, by weight; for the
latter, approximately ^ gallon of water to
8 pounds of CaCl2, or a saturated solution
at 60° F. This solution (CaCl2+6H2O)
is then mixed with equal parts of water,
gallon for gallon. Many persons com-
plain that CaCl2 corrodes the metal parts,
but this warning need do no more than
urge the automobilist to use only the
chemically pure salt, carefully avoiding
the "chloride of lime" (CaOCl2).
A practical manufacturing chemist of
wide experience gives this:
A saturated solution of common salt is
one of the best things to use. It does
not affect the metal of the engine, as
many other salts would, and is easily
renewed. It will remain fluid down to
0° F., or a little below.
Equal parts of glycerine and water is
also good, and has the advantage that it
will not crystallize in the chambers, or
evaporate readily. It is the most con-
venient solution to use on this account,
and may repay the increased cost over
brine, in the comfort of its use. It needs
only the occasional addition of a little
water to make it last all winter and
leave the machinery clean when it is
drawn off. With brine an incrustation
of salt as the water evaporates is bound
to occur which reduces the efficiency of
the solution until it is removed. Water
frequently must be added to keep the
original volume, and to hold the salt in
solution. A solution of calcium chloride
is less troublesome so far as crystallizing
is concerned, but is said to have a ten-
dency to corrode the metals.
Anti-Freezing Solution for Automo-
bilists. — Mix and filter 4£ pounds pure
calcium chloride and a gallon of warm
water and put the solution in the radia-
tor or tank. Replace evaporation with
clean water, and leakage with solution.
Pure calcium chloride retails at about 8
cents per pound, or can be procured
from any wholesale drug store at 5 cents.
Anti-Freezing, Non-Corrosive Solu-
tion.— A solution for water-jackets on
gas engines that will not freeze at any
temperature above 20° below zero (F.)
may be made by combining 100 parts of
water, by weight, with 75 parts of car-
bonate potash and 50 parts of glycerine.
This solution is non-corrosive and will
remain perfectly liquid at all tempera-
tures above its congealing point.
Anti-Frost Solution. — As an excellent
remedy against the freezing of shop win-
dows, apply a mixture consisting of 55
parts of glycerine dissolved in 1,000 parts
of 62 per cent alcohol, containing, to
improve the odor, some oil of amber.
As soon as the mixture clarifies, it is
rubbed over the inner surface of the
glass. This treatment, it is claimed, not
only prevents the formation of frost, but
also stops sweating.
Protection of Acetylene Apparatus
from Frost. — Alcohol, glycerine, and
calcium chloride have been recommend-
ed for the protection of acetylene gener-
ators from frost. The employment of
calcium chloride, which must not be
confounded with chloride of lime,
appears preferable in all points of view.
A solution of 20 parts of calcium chloride
in 80 parts of water congeals only at 5° F.
above zero. But as this temperature
does not generally penetrate the genera-
tors, it will answer to use 10 or 15 parts
of the chloride for 100 parts of water,
which will almost always be sufficient to
avoid congelation. Care must be taken
not to use sea salt or other alkaline or
metallic salts, which deteriorate the
metal of the apparatus.
FROST BITE.
When the skin is as yet unbroken,
Hugo Kuhl advises the following:
364
FROST BITE— FRUIT PRESERVING
I. — Carbolized water. . . 4 drachms
Nitric acid 1 drop
Oil of geranium .... 1 drop
Mix. Pencil over the skin and then
hold the penciled place near the fire
until the skin is quite dry.
If the skin is already broken, use the
following ointment:
II. — Hebra's ointment. . 500 parts
Glycerine 100 parts
Liquefied carbolic
acid 15 parts
Mix. Apply to the broken skin
occasionally.
III.— Camphor 25 parts
Iodine, pure 50 parts
Olive oil 500 parts
Paraffine, solid 450 parts
Alcohol, enough.
Dissolve the camphor in the oil and
the iodine in the least possible amount of
alcohol. Melt the paraffine and add the
mixed solutions. When homogeneous
pour into suitable molds. Wrap the
pencils in paraifine paper or tin foil, and
pack in wooden boxes. By using more
or less olive oil the pencils may be made
of any desired consistency.
IV. — Dissolve 5 parts of campho'. in
a mixture consisting of 5 parts of yther
and 5 parts of alcohol; then add collodion
sufficient to make 100 parts.
V. — Dissolve 1 part of thymol in 5
parts of a mixture of ether and alcohol,
then add collodion sufficient to make 100
parts.
VI. — Carbolic a«id 2 parts
Lead ointment. ... 40 parts
Lanolin 40 parts
Olive oil... 20 parts
Lavender oil 1 J parts
VII. — Tannic acid 15 parts
Lycopodium 15 parts
Lard 30 parts
VIII.— Zinc oxide 15 parts
Glycerine 45 parts
Lanolin 40 parts
IX.— Ichthyol 10 parts
Resorcin 10 parts
Tannic acid 10 parts
Distilled water 50 parts
Any of these is to be applied about
twice a day.
FROSTED GLASS:
See Glass.
FROST PREVENTIVE:
See Freezing Preventives.
FROST REMOVERS:
See Glass.
FRUIT ESSENCES AND EXTRACTS:
See Essences and Extracts.
Fruit Preserving
(See also Essences, Extracts, and Pre-
serves.)
How to Keep Fruit. — According to
experiments of Max de Nansouty, fruit
carefully wrapped in silk paper and then
buried in dry sand will preserve a fresh
appearance with a fresh odor or flavor,
almost indefinitely. It may also be pre-
served in dry excelsior, but not nearly
so well. In stubble or straw fruit rots
very quickly, while in shavings it. mil-
dews quickly. In short, wheat-straw fruit
often takes on a musty taste and odor,
even when perfectly dry. Finally, wnen
placed on wooden tablets and exposed to
the air, most fruit decays rapidly.
I. — Crushed Strawberry. — Put up by
the following process, the fruit retains
its natural color and taste, and may be
exposed to the air for months, without
fermenting:
Take fresh, ripe berries, stem them,
and rub through a No. 8 sieve, rejecting
all soft and green fruit. Add to each
gallon of. pulp thus obtained, 8 pounds of
granulated sugar. Put on the fire and
bring just to a boil, stirring constantly.
Just before removing from the fire, add
to each gallon 1 ounce of a saturated
alcoholic solution of salicylic acid, stir-
ring well. Remove the scum, and, while
still hot, put into jars, and hermetically
seal. Put the iars in cold water, and
raise them to the boiling point, to pre-
vent them from bursting by sudden
expansion on pouring hot fruit into
them. Fill the jars entirely full, so as to
leave no air space when fruit cools and
contracts.
II. — Crushed Raspberry. — Prepare in
the same manner as for crushed straw-
berry, using £ red raspberries and £
black, to give a nice color, and using 7
pounds of sugar to each gallon of pulp.
III. — Crushed Pineapple. — Secure a
good brand of canned grated pineapple,
and drain off about one-half of the liquor,
by placing on a strainer. Add to each
pound of pineapple 1 pound of granu-
lated sugar. Place on the fire, and bring
to boiling point, stirring constantly.
Just before removing from the fire, add
to each gallon of pulp 1 ounce saturat-
ed alcoholic solution of salicylic acid.
FRUIT PRESERVING— FUMIGANTS
365
Put into air-tight jars until wanted for
use.
IV.— Crushed Peach.— Take a good
brand of canned yellow peaches, drain off
liquor, and rub through a No. 8 sieve.
Add sugar, bring to the boiling point,
and when ready to remove from fire add
to each gallon 1 ounce saturated alco-
holic solution of salicylic acid. Put into
jars and seal hermetically.
V. — Crushed Apricot. — Prepared in
similar manner to crushed peach, using
canned apricots.
VI. — Crushed Orange. — Secure or-
anges with a thin peel, and containing
plenty of juice. Remove the outer, or
yellow peel, first, taking care not to in-
clude any of the bitter peel. (The outer
peel may be used in making orange
phosphate, or tincture of sweet orange
peel.) Next remove the inner, bitter
peel, quarter, and remove the seeds.
Extract part of the juice, and grind the
pulp through an ordinary meat grinder.
Add sugar, place on the fire, and bring
to the boiling point. When ready to
remove, add to each gallon 1 ounce of
saturated alcoholic solution of salicylic
acid and 1 ounce of glycerine. Put into
air-tight jars.
VII. — Crushed Cherries.— Stone the
cherries and grind them to a pulp. Add
sugar, and place on the fire, stirring con-
stantly. Before removing, add to each
gallon 1 ounce of the saturated solution
of salicylic acid. Put into jars and seal.
VIII.^-Fresh Crushed Fruits in Sea-
son.— In their various seasons berries
and fruits may be prepared in fresh lots
for the soda fountain each morning, by
reducing the fruit to a pulp, and mixing
this pulp with an equal quantity of heavy
simple syrup.
Berries should be rubbed through a
sieve. In selecting berries, it is better
to use the medium-sized berries for the
pulp, reserving the extra large specimens
for garnishing and decorative effects.
Mash the berries with a wooden
masher, never using iron or copper
utensils, which may discolor the fruit.
Pineapple may be prepared by remov-
ing the rough outer skin and grating the
pulp upon an ordinary tin kitchen grater.
The grater should be scrupulously clean,
and care should be taken not to grate off
any of the coarse, fibrous matter com-
prising the fruit's core.
All crushed fruits are served as follows:
Mix equal quantities of pulp and simple
syrup in the counter bowl; use 1| to 2*
ounces to each glass, adding the usual
quantity of cream, or ice cream. Draw
soda, using a fine stream freely.
IX. — Glaces. — Crushed fruits, served
in the following manner, make a deli-
cious and refreshing drink:
Crushed fruit. 12 drachms
Juice of half a lemon.
Shaved ice.
Put the ice into a small glass, add the
fruit and lemon juice, stir well, and serve
with a spoon and straws.
FRUIT PRODUCTS, TESTS FOR:
See Foods.
FRUIT SYRUPS:
See Syrups.
FRUIT VINEGAR:
See Vinegar.
Fumigants
(See also Disinfectants.)
Fumigating Candles. — I. — Lime wood
charcoal, 6,000 parts, by weight, satu-
rated with water (containing saltpeter,
150 parts, by weight, in solution), and
dried again, is mixed with benzoin, 750
parts, by weight; styrax, 700 parts, by
weight; mastic, 100 parts, by weight;
cascarilla, 450 parts, by weight; Peruvian
balsam, 40 parts, by weight; Mitcham
oil, lavender oil, lemon oil, and bergamot
oil, 15 parts, by weight, each; and neroli
oil, 3 parts, by weight.
II. — Charcoal, 7,500 parts, by weight;
saltpeter, 150 parts, by weight; Tolu bal-
sam, 500 parts, by weight; musk, 2 parts,
by weight; rose oil, 1 part. The mixtures
are crushed with thick tragacanth to a
solid mass.
III. — Sandal wood, 48 parts, by
weight; clove, 6 parts, hy weight; ben-
zoin, 6 parts, by weight; licorice juice, 4
parts, by weight; potash saltpeter, 2
parts, by weight ; cascarilla bark, 1.5
parts, by weight; cinnamon bark, 1.5 parts,
by weight; musk, 0.05 parts, by weight.
All these substances are powdered and
mixed, whereupon the following are added:
Styrax (liquid), 5 parts, by weight; cin-
namon oil, 0.05 parts, by weight; clove
oil, 0.05 parts, by weight; geranium oil,
0.5 parts, by weight; lavender oil, 0.2
parts, by weight; Peruvian balsam, 0.2
parts, by weight. The solid ingredients
are each powdered separately, then
placed in the respective proportion in a
366
FUMIGANTS
spacious porcelain dish and intimately
mixed by means of a flat spatula. The
dish must be covered up with a cloth in
this operation. After the mixture has
been accomplished, add the essential oils
and just enough solution of gum arabic
so that by subsequent kneading with the
pestle a moldable dough results which
possesses sufficient solidity after drying.
The mass is pressed into metallic molds
in the shape of cones not more than £ of
an inch in height.
IV. — Red Fumigating Candles. — San-
dal wood, 1 part; gum benzoin, 1.5 parts;
Tolu balsam, 0.250 parts; sandal oil, .025
parts; cassia oil, .025 parts; clove oil, 25
parts; saltpeter, .090 parts. The powder
is mixed intimately, saturated with spirit
of wine, in which the oils are dissolved,
and shaped into cones.
V. — Wintergreen oil..". . . 1 part
Tragacanth 20 parts
Saltpeter 50 parts
Phenol, crystallized. 100 parts
Charcoal, powdered. 830 parts
Water.
Dissolve the saltpeter in the water,
stir the solution together with the pow-
dered charcoal and dry. Then add the
tragacanth powder, also the wintergreen
oil and the phenol, and prepare from the
mixture, by means of a tragacanth solu-
tion containing 2 per cent of saltpeter, a
mass which can be shaped into candles.
Fumigating Perfumes. — These are
used for quickly putting down bad odors
in the sick room, etc. They are decid-
edly antiseptic, and fulfil their purpose
admirably.
I. — Select good white blotting paper,
and cut each large sheet lengthwise into
3 equal pieces. Make a solution of 1
ounce of potassium nitrate in 12 ounces
of boiling water; place this solution in a
large plate, and draw each strip of paper
over the solution so as to saturate it.
Then dry by hanging up. The dried
paper is to be saturated in a similar
manner with either of the following so-
lutions:
(1) Siam benzoin 1 ounce
Storax 3 drachms
Olibanum 2 scruples
Mastic 2 scruples
Cascarilla 2 drachms
Vanilla 1 drachm
Rectified spirit 8 ounces
Bruise the solids and macerate in the
spirit 5 days, filter, and add
Oil of cinnamon. ... 8 parts
Oil of cloves 8 parts
Oil of bergamot .... 5 parts
Oil of neroli 5 parts
Mix.
(2) Benzoin 1£ ounces
Sandal wood 1 ounce
Spirit 8 ounces
Macerate as No. 1, and add
Essence of vetiver . . 3 ounces
Oil of lemon grass. . 40 drops
Mix.
After the paper is dry, cut up into
suitable sized pieces to go into commer-
cial envelopes.
II. — Benzoin 1 av. ounce
Storax 1 av. ounce
Fumigating e s -
sence 2 fluidounces
Ether 1 fluidounce
Acetic acid, glacial 20 drops
Alcohol 2 fluidounces
Dissolve the benzoin and storax in a
mixture of the alcohol and ether, filter
and add the fumigating and the acetic
acid. Spread the mixture upon filtering
or bibulous paper and allow it to dry.
To prevent sticking, dust the surface with
talcum and preserve in wax paper. When
used the paper is simply warmed, or held
over a lamp.
III.— Musk 0.2 parts
Oil of rose 1 part
Benzoin 100 parts
Myrrh 12 parts
Orris root 250 parts
Alcohol (**0 per
cent) 500 parts
IV. — Benzoin 80 parts
Balsam Tolu. .... 20 parts
Storax 20 parts
Sandal wood 20 parts
Myrrh 10 parts
Cascarilla bark. . . 20 parts
Musk 0.2 parts
Alcohol 250 parts
Fumigating Ribbon. — I. — Take |-inch
cotton tape and saturate it with niter;
when dry, saturate with the following
tincture:
Benzoin 1 ounce
Orris root 1 ounce
Myrrh 2 drachms
Tolu balsam 2 drachms
Musk 10 grains
Rectified spirit 10 ounces
Macerate for a week, filter, and add
10 minims of attar of rose.
II. — Another good formula which may
also be used for fumigating paper, is:
FUMIGANTS
367
Olibanum 2 ounces
Storax 1 ounce
Benzoin 6 drachms
Peruvian balsam. . . ^ ounce
Tolu balsam 3 drachms
Rectified spirit 10 ounces
Macerate 10 days, and filter.
Perfumed Fumigating Pastilles. —
I. — Vegetable charcoal. . 6 ounces
Benzoin 1 ounce
Nitrate of potash. . . | ounce
Tolu balsam 2 drachms
Sandal wood 2 drachms
Mucilage of tragacanth, a suffi-
ciency.
Reduce the solids to fine powder, mix,
and make into a stiff paste with the mu-
cilage. Divide this into cones 25 grains
in weight, and dry with a gentle heat.
II. — Powdered willow
charcoal 8
Benzoic acid. . 6
ounces
ounces
drachms
drachm
drachm
drachm
drachm
drachm
drachm
ounces
recipe is
grains of
Nitrate of potash ... 6
Oil of thyme \
Oil of sandal wood. .
Oil of caraway \
Oil of cloves \
Oil of lavender
Oil of rose \
Rose water 10
Proceed as in I, but this
better for the addition of 20
powdered tragacanth.
III. — Benzoin 10 av. ounces
Charcoal 24 av. ounces
Potassium nitrate. 1 av. ounce
Sassafras 2 av. ounces
Mucilage of acacia, sufficient.
Mix the first four in fine powder, add
the mucilage, form a mass, and make into
conical pastilles.
IV. — Potassium nitrate 375 grains
Water 25 fluidounces
Charcoal wood,
powder 30 a v. ounces
Tragacanth, pow-
der 375
Storax ......... 300
Benzoin.. . 300
Vanillin
Coumarin
Musk
Civet
Oil of rose
Oil of bergamot.
Oil of ylang-ylang
Oil of rhodium. .
Oil of sandal
wood
Oil of cinnamon.
Oil of orris
Oil of cascarilla . •
8
3
3
1^
20'
15
10
10
5
5
1
1
grains
grains
grains
grains
grains
grains
grains
rops
drops
drops
drops
drops
drops
drop
drop
Saturate the charcoal with the potas-
sium nitrate dissolved in the water, dry
the mass, powder, add the other ingre-
dients, and mix thoroughly. Beat the
mixture to a plastic mass with the addi-
tion of sufficient mucilage of tragacanth
containing 2 per cent of saltpeter in
solution, and form into cone-shaped
pastilles. In order to evenly distribute
the storax throughout the mass, it may
be previously dissolved in a small amount
of acetic ether.
V. — Benzoin 2 av. ounces
Cascarilla 1 av. ounce
Myrrh 1 av. ounce
Potassium n i -
trate £ av. ounce
Potassium chlo-
rate 60 grains
Charcoal, wood. 4 av. ounces
Oil of cloves.. .. 1 fluidrachm
Oil of cinnamon 1 fluidrachm
Oil of lavender. 1 fluidrachm
Mucilage of tragacanth, sufficient.
Mix the first six ingredients previously
reduced to fine powder, add the oils, and
then incorporate enough mucilage to
form a mass. Divide this into pastilles
weighing about 60 grains and dry.
VI. — Charcoal, pow-
der 30 av. ounces
Potassium ni-
trate J av. ounce
Water 33 fluidounces
Tragacanth,
powder 300 grains
Tincture of
benzoin 1J fluidounces
Peru balsam . . 300 grains
Storax, crude. . 300 grains
Tolu balsam . . 300 grains
Oleo-balsamic
mixture 2i fluidrachms
Coumarin .... 8 grains
Saturate the charcoal with the potas-
sium nitrate dissolved in the water, then
dry, reduce to powder, and incorporate
the tragacanth and then the remaining
ingredients. Form a mass by the addi-
tion of sufficient mucilage of tragacanth
containing 2 per cent of potassium
nitrate in solution and divide into pas-
tilles.
VII.— Powdered nitrate of
potassium i ounce
Powdered gum ara-
bic 5 ounce
Powdered cascarilla
bark (fresh) ^ ounce
Powdered benzoin
(fresh) 4 ounces
368
FURS— GARDENS, CHEMICAL
Powdered charcoal. 7 ounces
Oil of eucalyptus. . . 25 drops
Oil of cloves 25 drops
Water, a sufficiency.
Make a smooth paste, press into molds
and dry.
FURS:
To Clean Furs. — For dark furs, warm
a quantity of new bran in a pan, taking
care that it does not burn, to prevent
which it must be briskly stirred. When
well warmed rub it thoroughly into the
fur with the hand. Repeat this 2 or 3
times, then shake the fur, and give it
another sharp rubbing until free from
dust. For white furs: Lay them on a
table, and rub well with bran made
moist with warm water; rub until quite
dry, and afterwards with dry bran. The
wet bran should be put on with flannel,
then dry with book muslin. Light furs,
in addition to the above, should be well
rubbed with magnesia or a piece of book
muslin, after the bran process, against
the way of the fur.
To Preserve Furs. — I. — Furs may be
preserved from moths and other insects
oy placing a little colocynth pulp (bitter
apple), or spice (cloves, pimento, etc.),
wrapped in muslin, among them; or they
may be washed in a very weak solution
of corrosive sublimate in warm water
(10 to 15 grains to the pint), and after-
wards carefully dried. As well as every
other species of clothing, they should be
kept in a clean, dry place, from which
they should be taken out occasionally,
well beaten, exposed to the air, and re-
turned.
II. — Sprinkle the furs or woolen
stuffs, as well as the drawers or boxes in
which they are kept, with spirits of tur-
pentine, the unpleasant scent of which
will speedily evaporate on exposure of
the stuffs to the air. Some persons
place sheets of paper moistened with
spirits of turpentine, over, under, or
between pieces of cloth, etc., and find it
a very effectual method. Many woolen
drapers put bits of camphor, the size of
a nutmeg, in papers, on different parts
of the shelves in their shops, and as they
brush their cloths every 2, 3, or 4
months, this keeps them free from moths;
and this should be done in boxes where
the furs, etc., are put. A tallow candle is
frequently put within each muff when
laid by. Snuff or pepper is also good.
FURNACE JACKET.
A piece of asbestos millboard — 10
inches by 4 inches by f inch — is per-
forated in about a dozen or more places
with glycerined cork borers, then nicked
about an inch from each short end and
immersed in water until saturated; next
the board is bent from the nicks at right
angles and the perforated portion shaped
by bending it over a bottle with as little
force as possible. The result should be
a perforated arched tunnel, resting on
narrow horizontal ledges at each side.
Dry this cover in the furnace, after set-
ting it in position, and pressing it well to
the supports. Three such covers, weigh-
ing 1 pound, replaced 24 fire clay tiles,
weighing 13 pounds, and a higher tem-
perature was obtained than with the
latter.
FURNITURE CLEANERS:
See Cleaning Preparations and Meth-
ods.
FURNITURE, ITS DECORATION:
See Wood.
FURNITURE ENAMEL:
See Varnishes.
FURNITURE POLISHES:
See Polishes.
FURNITURE WAX:
See Waxes.
FUSES:
See Pyrotechnics.
FUSES FOR ELECTRICAL CIRCUITS:
See Alloys.
FUNNELS, TO CLEAN:
See Cleaning Preparations and Meth-
ods.
GALVANIZED PAPER:
See Paper, Metallic.
GAMBOGE STAIN:
See Lacquers.
GAPES IN POULTRY:
See Veterinary Formulas.
GARANCINE PROCESS:
See Dyes.
GARDENS, CHEMICAL:
See also Sponges.
I. — Put some sand into a fish-globe or
other suitable glass vessel to the depth of
2 or 3 inches; in this place a few pieces of
sulphate of copper, aluminum, and iron;
pour over the whole a solution of sodium
silicate (water glass), 1 part, and water,
3 parts, care being taken not to disar-
range the chemicals. Let this stand a
week or so, when a dense growth of the
silicates of the various bases used will be
seen in various • colors. Now displace
GARDENS, CHEMICAL— GELATIN
369
the solution of the sodium silicate with
clear water, by conveying a stream of
water through a very small rubber tube
into the vessel. The water will gradu-
ally displace the sodium silicate solution.
Care must be taken not to disarrange or
break down the growth with the stream
of water. A little experimenting, ex-
perience and expertness will enable the
operator to produce a very pretty garden.
II. — This is a permanent chemical
garden, which may be suspended by
brass chains with a lamp behind.
Prepare a small beaker or jar full of
cold saturated solution of Glauber's salt,
and into the solution suspend by means
of threads a kidney bean and a non-por-
ous body, such as a marble, stone, glass,
etc. Cover the jar, and in a short time
there will be seen radiating from the
bean small crystals of sulphate of sodium
which will increase and give the bean
the aspect of a sea urchin, while the non-
porous body remains untouched. The
bean appears to have a special partiality
for the crystals, which is due to the ab-
sorption of water by the bean, but not of
the salt. In this way a supersaturated
solution is formed in the immediate
neighborhood of the bean, and the crys-
tals, in forming, attach themselves to its
surface.
III. — A popular form of ornamental
crystallization is that obtained by im-
mersing a zinc rod in a solution of a lead
salt, thus obtaining the "lead tree." To
prepare this, dissolve lead acetate in
water, add a few drops of nitric acid, and
then suspend the zinc rod in the solution.
The lead is precipitated in large and
beautiful plates until the solution is ex-
hausted or the zinc dissolved. In this
case the action is electro-chemical, the
first portions of the lead precipitated
forming with the zinc a voltaic arrange-
ment of sufficient power to decompose
the salt.
It is said that by substituting chloride
of tin for the lead salt a"tin tree" may be
produced, while nitrate of silver under
the same conditions would produce a
"silver tree." In the latter case dis-
tilled water should be used to prevent
precipitation of the silver by possible
impurities contained in ordinary water.
GAS FIXTURES:
See Brass.
GAS FIXTURES, BRONZING OF:
See Plating.
GAS SOLDERING:
See Soldering.
GAS-STOVES, TO CLEAN:
See Cleaning Preparations and Meth-
ods.
GAS TRICK:
See Pyrotechnics.
GEAR LUBRICANT:
See Lubricants.
GELATIN:
French Gelatin. — Gelatin is derived
from two sources, the parings of skins,
hides, etc., and from bones. The latter
are submitted to the action of dilute
hydrochloric acid for several days, which
attacks the inorganic matters — car-
bonates, phosphates, etc., and leaves the
ossein, which is, so to say, an isomer of
the skin substance. The skin, parings
of hide, etc., gathered from the shambles,
butcher shops, etc., are brought into the
factory, and if not ready for immediate
use are thrown into quicklime, which
preserves them for the time being. From
the lime, after washing, they pass into
dilute acid, which removes the last traces
of lime, and are now ready for the treat-
ment that is to furnish the pure gelatin.
The ossein from bones goes through the
same stages of treatment, into lime, washed
and laid in dilute acid again. From the
acid bath the material goes into baths of
water maintained at a temperature not
higher than from 175° to 195° F.
The gelatin manufacturer buys from
the button-makers and manufacturers
of knife handles and bone articles gen-
erally, those parts of the bone that they
cannot use, some of which are pieces
8 inches long by a half inch thick.
Bones gathered by the ragpickers fur-
nish the strongest glue. The parings of
skin, hide, etc., are from those portions of
bullock hides, calf skins, etc., that cannot
be made use of by the tanner, the heads,
legs, etc.
The gelatin made by Coignet for the
Pharmacie Centrale de France is made
from skins procured from the tawers of
Paris, who get it directly from the abat-
toirs, which is as much as to say that the
material is guaranteed fresh and healthy,
since these institutions are under rigid
inspection and surveillance of govern-
ment inspectors and medical men.
There is a gelatin or glue, used ex-
clusively for joiners, inside carpenters,
and ceiling makers (plafonneurs), called
rabbit vermicelli, and derived from rab-
bit skins. As the first treatment of these
skins is to saturate them with mercury
bichloride, it is needless to say the prod-
uct is not employed in pharmacy.
370
GELATIN— GEMS
To Clarify Solutions of Gelatin, Glues,
etc. — If 1 per cent of ammonium fluoride
be added to turbid solutions of gelatin or
common glue, or, in fact, of any gums,
it quickly clarifies them. It causes a dep-
osition of ligneous matter, and also very
materially increases the adhesive power
of such solutions.
Air Bubbles in Gelatin. — The pres-
ence of minute air bubbles in cakes of
commercial gelatin often imparts to
them an unpleasant cloudy appearance.
These minute air bubbles are the result
of the rapid, continuous process of drying
the sheets of gelatin by a counter-cur-
rent of hot air. Owing to the rapid
drying a hard skin is formed on the out-
side of the cake, leaving a central layer
from which the moisture escapes only
with difficulty, and in which the air bub-
bles remain behind. Since the best qual-
ities of gelatin dry most rapidly, the
presence of these minute bubbles is, to a
certain extent, an indication of supe-
riority, and they rarely occur in the poorer
qualities of gelatin. If dried slowly in
the old way gelatin is liable to be dam-
aged by fermentation; in such cases large
bubbles of gas are formed in the sheets,
and are a sign of bad quality.
GEMS, ARTIFICIAL:
See also Diamonds.
The raw materials for the production
of artificial gems are the finest silica and,
as a rule, finely ground rock crystals;
white sand and quartz, which remain
pure white even at a higher temperature,
may also be used. ^
Artificial borax is given the preference,
since the native variety frequently con-
tains substances which color the glass.
Lead carbonate or red lead must be per-
fectly pure and not contain any protoxide,
since the latter gives the glass a dull,
greenish hue. White lead and red lead
have to dissolve completely in dilute nitric
acid or without leaving a residue; the so-
lution, neutralized as much as possible,
must not be reddened by prussiate of pot-
ash. In the former case tin is present, in
the latter copper. Arsenious acid and salt-
peter must be perfectly pure; they serve
for the destruction of the organic sub-
stances. The materials, without the col-
oring oxide, furnish the starting quantity
for the production of artificial gems ; sucn
glass pastes are named "strass."
The emerald, a precious stone of green
color, is imitated by melting 1,000 parts
of strass and 8 parts of chromic oxide.
Artificial emeralds are also obtained
with cupric acid and ferric oxides, con-
sisting of 43.84 parts of rock crystal;
21.92 parts of dry sodium carbonate ; 7.2
parts of calcined and powdered borax;
7.2 parts of red lead; 3.65 parts of salt-
peter; 1.21 parts of red ferric oxide, and
0.6 parts of green copper carbonate.
Agates are imitated by allowing frag-
ments of variously colored pastes to flow
together, and stirring during the deli-
quatiori.
The amethyst is imitated by mixing
300 parts of a glass frit with 0.6 parts of
gray manganese ore, or from 300 parts of
frit containing 0.8 per cent of manganic-
oxide, 36.5 parts of saltpeter, 15 parts of
borax, and 15 parts of minium (red lead).
A handsome amethyst is obtained by
melting together 1,000 parts of strass, 8
parts of manganese oxide, 5 parts of
cobalt oxide, and 2 parts of gold purple.
Latterly, attempts have also been
made to produce very hard glasses for
imitation stones from alumina and
borax with the requisite coloring agents.
Besides imitation stones there are also
produced opaque glass pastes bearing the
name of the stones they resemble, e. g.,
aventurine, azure -stone (lapis lazuli),
chrysoprase, turquoise, obsidian, etc.
For these, especially pure materials, as
belonging to the most important ingre-
dients of glassy bodies, are used, and
certain quantities of red lead and borax
are also added.
GEM CEMENTS:
See Adhesives, under Jewelers' Ce-
ments.
GERMAN SILVER:
See Alloys.
GERMAN SILVER SOLDERS:
See Solders.
GILDING:
See Paints, Plating, and Varnishes.
GILDING GLASS:
See Glass.
GILDING, TO CLEAN:
See Cleaning Preparations and Meth-
ods.
GILDING, RENOVATION OF:
See Cleaning Compounds.
GILDING SUBSTITUTE:
See Plating.
GILT, TEST FOR:
See Gold.
GILT WORK, TO BURNISH:
See Gold.
GLASS
371
GINGERADE:
See Beverages.
GINGER ALE AND GINGER BEER:
See Beverages.
GINGER CORDIAL:
See Wines and Liquors.
GINGER EXTRACTS:
See Essences and Extracts.
Glass
Bent Glass. — This was formerly used
for show cases; its uce in store fronts is
becoming more and more familiar, large
plates being bent for this purpose. It is
much used in the construction of dwell-
ings, in windows, or rounded corners,
and in towers; in coach fronts and in
rounded front china closets. Either plain
glass or beveled glass may be bent, and to
any curve.
The number of molds required in a
glass-bending establishment is large.
The bending is done in a kiln. Glass
melts at 2,300° F.; the heat employed in
bending is 1 ,800° F. No pyrometer would
stand long in that heat, so the heat of
the kiln is judged from the color of the
flame and other indications. Smaller
pieces of glass are put into the molds in
the kilns with forks made for the purpose.
The great molds used for bending large
sheets of glass are mounted on cars, that
may be rolled in and out of kilns. The
glass is laid upon the top of the mold or
cavity, and is bent by its own weight.
As it is softened by the heat it sinks into
the mold and so is bent. It may take
an hour or two to bend the glass, which
is then left in the kiln from 24 to 36 hours
to anneal and cool. Glass of any kind
or size is put into the kilns in its finished
state; the great heat to which it is sub-
jected does not disturb the polished sur-
face. Despite every precaution more
or less glass is broken in bending. Bent
glass costs about 50 per cent more than
the flat.
The uzc of bent glass is increasing,
and there are 4 or 5 glass-bending estab-
lishments in the United States, of which
one is in the East.
Colored Glass. — R. Zsigmondy has
made some interesting experiments in
coloring glass with metallic sulphides,
such as molybdenite, and sulphides of
antimony, copper, bismuth, and nickel.
Tests made with batches of 20 to 40
pounds and with a heat not too great, give
good results as follows:
Sand, 65 parts; potash, 15 parts; soda,
5 parts; lime, 9 parts; molybdenite, 3
parts; sulphide of sodium, 2 parts, gave a
dark reddish-brown glass. In thinner
layers this glass appeared light brownish
yellow. Flashed with opal, it became a
smutty black brown.
Sand, 50 parts; potash, 15 parts; soda,
5 parts; lime, 9 parts; molybdenite, 1 part;
sulphide of sodium, 2 parts, gave a yellow
glass.
Sand, 10 parts; potash, 3. 3 parts; soda,
0.27 parts; lime, 1.64 parts; molybdenite,
0.03 parts, gave a reddish-yellow glass
with a fine tinge of red.
Sand, 100 parts; potash, 26 parts; soda,
108 parts; lime, 12 parts; sulphide of cop-
per, 1.7 parts; sulphide of sodium, 2.3
parts, gave a dark-brown color, varying
from sepia to sienna. In thick layers it
was no longer transparent, but still clear
and unclouded. When heated this glass
became smutty black brown and clouded.
A fine copper red was obtained from
sand, 10 parts; potash, 3 parts; lime, 1.2
parts; soda, 0.25 parts; sulphide of cop-
per, 7.5 parts; sulphide of sodium, 10.5
parts; borax, 9.5 parts.
Attempts to color with sulphides of
antimony and bismuth failed. But the
addition of 7 per cent of sulphide of
nickel to an ordinary batch gave a glass
of fine amethyst color.
Coloring Electric-Light Bulbs and
Globes. — Two substances suggest them-
selves as excellent vehicles of color, and
both water soluble — water glass (po-
tassium or sodium silicate) and gelatin.
For tinting, water-soluble aniline colors
should be tried. The thickness of the
solution must be a matter of experimenta-
tion. Prior to dipping the globes they
should be made as free as possible from
all grease, dirt, etc. The gelatin solu-
tion should not be so thick that any
appreciable layer of it will form on the
surface of the glass, and to prevent
cracking, some non-drying material
should be added to it, say glycerine.
Rose-Tint Glass. — Selenium is now
used for coloring glass. Rose-tinted
glass is made by adding selenium directly
to the ingredients in the melting pot.
By mixing first with cadmium sulphide,
orange red is produced. This process
is stated not to require the reheating of
the glass and its immersion in the color-
ing mixture, as in the ordinary process
of making red glass.
CUTTING, DRILLING, GRINDING. AND
SHAPING GLASS:
To Cut Glass.— I.— Glass may be cut
without a diamond. Dip a piece of
372
GLASS
common string in alcohol and squeeze
it reasonably dry. Then tie the string
tightly around the glass on the line of
cutting. Touch a match to the string
and let it burn off. The heat of the
burning string will weaken the glass in
this particular place. While it is hot
plunge the glass under water, letting the
arm go well under to the elbow, so there
will be no vibration when the glass is
struck. With the free hand strike the
glass outside the line of cutting, giving a
quick, sharp stroke with a stick of wood,
a long-bladed knife, or the like, and the
cut will be as clean and straight as if
made by a regular glass cutter.
The same principle may be employed
to cut bottles into vases, and to form all
sorts of pretty things, such as jewelry
boxes, picture panes, trays, small tablets,
windows for a doll house, etc.
II. — Scratch the glass around the
shape you desire with the corner of a file
or graver; then, having bent a piece of
wire into the sa^me shape, heat it red hot
and lay it upon the scratch and sink the
glass into cold water just deep enough
for the water to come almost on a level
with its upper surface. It will rarely
fail to break perfectly true.
To Cut Glass Under Water.— It is
possible to cut a sheet of glass roughly
to any desired shape with an ordinary
pair of scissors, if tne operation be per-
formed under water. Of course, a
smooth edge cannot be obtained by such
means, but it will be found satisfactory.
Drilling, Shaping, and Filing Glass. —
Take any good piece of steel wire,
file to the shape of a drill, and then hold
it in a flame till it is at a dull red heat;
then quench in metallic mercury. A
piece of good steel, thus treated, will bore
through glass almost as easily as through
soft brass. In use, lubricate with oil of
turpentine in which camphor has been
dissolved. When the point of the drill
has touched the other side put the glass
in water, and proceed with the drilling
very slowly. If not possible to do this,
reverse the work — turn the glass over
and drill, very carefully, from the op-
posite side. By proceeding with care
you can easily drill three holes through
flass yV inch thick \ of an inch apart,
n making the drill be careful not to make
the point and the cutting edges too acute.
The drill cuts more slowly, but more safe-
ly, when the point and cutting edges are
at a low angle.
To Make Holes in Thin Glass.— To
produce holes in panes of thin or weak
glass, provide the places to be perforated
with a ring of moist loam, whose center
leaves free a portion of glass exactly the
size of the desired hole. Pour molten
lead into the ring, and the glass and lead
will fall through at once. This process
is based upon the rapid heating of the
glass.
To Grind Glass. — For the grinding of
glass, iron, or steel laps and fine sand
are first used; after that, the sand is re-
placed by emery. Then the polishing
is started with pure lead or pure tin laps,
and finished with willow wood laps. The
polishing powder is tin putty, but per-
oxide of iron or dioxide of tin is a good
polishing medium.
Pohl asserts that if glass is polished
with crocus (Paris red) it appears of a
dark or a yellowish-brown tint. He con-
tends that the crocus enters the pores of
the glass, and, to prevent this, he uses
zinc white with the most satisfactory
results.
A Home -Made Outfit for Grinding
Glass. — Provide two pieces of cork, one
concave and one convex (which may be
cut to shape after fitting to the lathe).
Take a copper cent or other suitable
article and soft-solder a screw to fit the
lathe, and then wax it to the cork; get a
cheap emery wheel, such as is used on
sewing machines. Polish the edge on
the zinc collar of the emery wheel (or use
a piece of zinc). The other cork should
be waxed to a penny and centered.
Spectacle lenses may be cut on the same
emery wheel if the wheel is attached to
the lathe so as to revolve. Another
method is to take a common piece of
window glass (green glass is the best)
and make a grindstone of that, using the
flat surface for grinding. Cement it on
a large chuck, the glass being from 2 to
2 \ inches in diameter.
To Drill Optical Glass. — A graver
sharpened to a long point is twisted
between the fingers, and pressed against
the glass, the point being moistened
from time to time with turpentine.
When the hole is finished half way, the
drilling should be commenced from the
other side. The starting should be be-
gun with care, as otherwise the graver
is likely to slide out and scratch the lens.
It is advisable to mark the point of drill-
ing with a diamond, and not to apply
too great a pressure when twisting the
graver.
Lubricants for Glass Drilling. — I. —
Put garlic, chopped in small pieces, into
spirit of turpentine and agitate the mix-
GLASS
373
ture from time to time. Filter at the end
of a fortnight, and when you desire to
pierce the glass dip your bit or drill into
this liquid, taking care to moisten it
constantly to prevent the drill, etc., from
becoming heated.
II. — Place a little alum in acetic acid,
dip your drill into this and put a drop
of it on the spot where the glass is to be
pierced.
GILDING GLASS.
When it is desired to gild glass for
decorative purposes use a solution of
gelatin in hot water, to which an equal
quantity of alcohol has been added.
The glass to be gilded is covered with
this solution and the gold leaf put on
while wet. A sheet of soft cotton must
be pressed and smoothed over the leaf
until the gelatin below is evenly distrib-
uted. This prevents spots in gilding.
Careful apportionment of the gelatin is
necessary. If too much be used, the gold
may become spotted; if too little, the
binding may be too weak to allow the
gold to be polished. The glass should
be cleaned thoroughly before gilding.
After the gold leaf is put on the whole
is allowed to dry for 10 or 20 minutes,
when the luster of the gold can be raised
by a cautious rubbing with cotton. Then
another layer of gelatin is spread on with
one stroke of a soft brush, and, if espe-
cially good work be required, a second
layer of gold is put on and covered as
before. In this case, however, the gela-
tin is used hot. After the gilding has
become perfectly dry the letters or orna-
mentation are drawn and the surplus
gold around the edges is taken off. The
gilding docs not become thoroughly fixed
until after several months, and until then
rough handling, washing, etc., should be
avoided.
The best backing for glass gilding is
asphaltum, with a little lampblack, this
to be mixed up with elastic varnish;
outside finishing varnish is the best, as
the addition of this material gives dur-
ability.
GLASS MANUFACTURING:
See also Ceramics.
The blue tint of the common poison
bottle is got by the addition of black
oxide of cobalt to the molten glass; the
green tint of the actinic glass bottle is
obtained in the same way by the ad-
dition of potassium bichromate, which
is reduced to the basylous condition, and
the amber tint is produced by the ad-
dition of impure manganese dioxide, a
superior tint beirrg produced by suphur
in one form or another. The .formulas
for various kinds of bottle glass, which
indicate the general composition of
almost all glasses, are:
White Glass for Ordinary Molded
Bottles.—
Sand. .
64T
Lime.. 6
Parts
Carbonate of sodium... 23 f .\.
Nitrate of sodium 5 J wei^ht'
White Flint Glass Containing Lead.—
Sand 63^
Lime - 5 I Parts
Carbonate of sodium .... 21 >- by
Nitrate of sodium 3 I weight.
Red lead 8J
Ordinary Green Glass for Dispensing
Bottles.—
Sand 63^1 Parts
Carbonate of sodium .... 26 j- by
Lime llj weight.
A mixture for producing a good green
flint glass is much the same as that for
the ordinary white flint glass, except that
the lime, instead of being the purest, is
ordinary slaked lime, and the sodium
nitrate is omitted. Sand, lime, and
sodium carbonate are the ordinary bases
of glass, while the sodium nitrate is the
decolorizing agent.
Glass Refractory to Heat. — Fine sand,
70 parts; potash, 30 parts; kaolin, 25
parts.
Transparent Ground Glass. — Take hold
of the glass by one corner with . an
ordinary pair of fire tongs. Hold it in
front of a clear fire, and heat to about
98° F., or just hot enough to be held
comfortably in the hand. Then hold
the glass horizontally, ground side upper-
most, and pour in the center a little
photographer's dry-plate negative var-
nish. Tilt the glass so that the varnish
spreads over it evenly, then drain back
the surplus varnish into the bottle from
one corner of the glass. Hold the glass
in front of the fire again for a few minutes
and the varnish will crystallize on its
surface, making it transparent. The
glass should not be made too hot before
the varnish is put on, or the varnish will
not run evenly. This method answers
very well for self-made magic-lantern
slides. Ground glass may be made
temporarily transparent by wiping with
a sponge dipped in paraffine or glycerine.
WATER-TIGHT GLASS:
Water-Tight Glass Roofs.— Glass roofs,
the skeletons of which are constructed
374
GLASS
of iron, are extremely difficult to keep
water-tight, as the iron expands and
contracts with atmospheric changes.
To meet this evil, it is necessary to use
an elastic putty, which follows the vari-
ations of the iron. A good formula is:
Two parts rosin and one part tallow,
melted together and stirred together
thoroughly with a little minium. This
putty is applied hot upon strips of linen
or cotton cloth, on top and below, and
these are pasted while the putty is still
warm, with one edge on the iron ribs and
the other, about one-fourth inch broad,
over the glass.
Tightening Agent for Acid Receptacles.
— Cracked vessels of glass or porcelain,
for use in keeping acids, can be made
tight by applying a cement prepared in
the following manner: Take finely sifted
sand, some asbestos with short fiber, a
little magnesia and add enough con-
centrated water glass to obtain a readily
kneadable mass. The acid renders the
putty firm and waterproof.
PENCILS FOR MARKING GLASS:
See also Etching and Frosted Glass.
Crayons for Writing on Glass. — I. —
The following is a good formula:
Spermaceti 4 parts
Tallow 3 parts
Wax 2 parts
Red lead 6 parts
Potassium carbonate. 1 part
Melt the spermaceti, tallow, and wax
together over a slow fire, and when
melted stir in, a little at a time, the
potassium carbonate and red lead, previ-
ously well mixed. Continue the heat for
20 or 30 minutes, stirring constantly.
Withdraw from the source of heat, and let
cool down somewhat, under constant stir-
ring, at the temperature of about 180° F. ;
before the mixture commences to set,
pour off into molds and let cool. The
latter may be made of bits of glass tubing
of convenient diameter and length.
After the mixture cools, drive the crayons
out by means of a rod that closely fits
the diameter of the tubes.
II.— Take sulphate of copper, 1 part,
and whiting, 1 part. Reduce these to a
fine powder and mix with water; next
roll this paste into the shape of crayons
and let dry. When it is desired to write
on the glass use one of these crayons and
wipe the traced designs. To make them
reappear breathe on the glass.
III. — Melt together, spermaceti, 3
parts; talc, 3 parts, and wax, 2 parts.
When melted stir in 6 parts of minium
and 1 part of caustic potash. Continue
heating for 30 minutes, then cast in suit-
able molds. When formed and ready to
be put away dust them with talc pow-
der, or roll each pencil in paraffine
powder.
PREVENTION OF FOGGING, DIM-
MING, AND CLOUDING.
I. — Place a few flat glass or porcelain
dishes with calcium chloride in each
window. This substance eagerly ab-
sorbs all moisture from the air. The
contents of the dishes have to be re-
newed every 2 or 3 days, and the moist
calcium chloride rigorously dried, where-
upon it may be used over again.
II. — Apply to the inside face of the
glass a thin layer of glycerine, which
does not permit the vapor to deposit in
fine drops and thus obstruct the light.
Double glass may also be used. In this
way the heat of the inside is not in direct
contact with the cold outside.
III. — By means of the finger slightly
moistened, apply a film of soap of any
brand or kind to the mirror; then, rub
this off with a clean, dry cloth; the
mirror will be as bright and clear as ever;
breathing on it will not affect its clear-
ness.
IV. — Window glass becomes dull dur-
ing storage by reason of the presence of
much alkali. This can be avoided by
taking sand, 160 parts; calcined sodium
sulphate, 75; powdered marble, 50; and
coke, 4 to 5 parts. About 3 parts of the
sodium sulphate may be replaced by an
equal quantity of potash.
FROSTED GLASS.
I. — A frosted appearance may be
given to glass by covering it with a
mixture of
Magnesium sulphate. 6 ounces
Dextrin 2 ounces
Water 20 ounces
When this solution dries, the magne-
sium sulphate crystallizes in fine needles.
II. — Another formula directs a strong
solution of sodium or magnesium sul-
phate, applied warm, and afterwards
coated with a thin solution of acacia.
III. — A more permanent "frost" may
be put on the glass by painting with
white lead and oil, either smooth or in
stipple effect. The use of lead acetate
with oil gives a more pleasing effect,
perhaps, than the plain white lea,d.
IV. — If still greater permanency is
desired, the glass may be ground by
rubbing with some gritty substance.
GLASS
375
V. — For a temporary frosting, dip a
piece of flat marble into glass cutter's
sharp sand, moistened with water; rub
over the glass, dipping frequently in
sand and water. If the frosting is re-
quired very fine, finish off with emery
and water. Mix together a strong, hot
solution of Epsom salt and a clear solu-
tion of gum arabic; apply warm. Or
use a strong solution of sodium sulphate,
warm, and when cool, wash with gum
water. Or daub the glass with a lump
of glazier's putty, carefully and uniform-
ly, until the surface is equally covered.
This is an excellent imitation of ground
glass, and is not disturbed by rain or
damp.
VI. — This imitates ground glass:
Sandarac 2£ ounces
Mastic | ounce
Ether 24 ounces
Benzine 16 to 18 ounces
VII. — Take white lead ground in a mix-
ture of £ varnish and £ oil of turpentine,
to which burnt white vitriol and white
sugar of lead are added for drier. The
paint must be prepared exceedingly thin
and applied to the glass evenly, using
a broad brush. If the windows require
a new coat, the old one is first removed
by the use of a strong lye, or else apply
a mixture of hydrochloric acid, 2 parts;
vitriol, 2 parts; copper sulphate, 1 part;
and gum arabic 1 part, by means of a
brush. The production of this imitation
frosting entails little expense and is of
special advantage when a temporary use
of the glass is desired.
VIII.— A little Epsom salt (sulphate of
magnesia) stirred in beer with a small
dose of dextrin and applied on the panes
by means of a sponge or a brush permits
of obtaining mat panes.
Hoarfrost Glass. — The feathery foams
traced by frost on the inside of the
windows in cold weather may be imitated
as follows:
The surface is first ground either by
sand-blast or the ordinary method, and
is then covered with a sort of varnish.
On being dried either in the sun or by
artificial heat, the varnish contracts
strongly, taking with it the particles of
glass to which it adheres; and as the con-
traction takes places along definite lines,
the pattern given by the removal of the
particles of glass resembles very closely
the branching crystals of frostwork. A
single coat gives a small, delicate effect,
while a thick film, formed by putting on
2, 3 or more coats, contracts so strongly
as to produce a large and bold design.
By using colored glass, a pattern in
half-tint may be made on the colored
ground, and after decorating white glass,
the back may be silvered or gilded.
Engraving, Matting, and Frosting.—
Cover the glass with a layer of wax or of
varnish on which the designs are traced
with a graver or pen-point; next, hydro-
fluoric acid is poured on the tracings.
This acid is very dangerous to handle,
while the following process, though fur-
nishing the same results, does not present
this drawback: Take powdered fluoride
of lime, 1 part, and sulphuric acid, 2 parts.
Make a homogeneous paste, which is
spread on the parts reserved for the
engraving or frosting. At the end of
3 or 4 hours wash with water to remove
the acid, next with alcohol to take off
the varnish, or with essence of turpen-
tine if wax has been employed for stop-
ping off.
To Render Window Panes Opaque.—
I. — Panes may be rendered mat and
non-transparent by painting them on one
side with a liquid prepared by grinding
whiting with potash water-glass solution.
After one or two applications, the panes
are perfectly opaque, while admitting the
light.
II. — Paint the panes with a solution of
Dextrin 20(n p
Zinc vitriol 800 (
Bitter salt 800 f .y, .
In water 2,000 J wei^ht-
III. — For deadening panes already set
in frames the following is suitable: Dis-
solve 1 part of wax in 10 parts of oil of
turpentine, adding 1 part of varnish and
1 part of siccative. With this mixture
coat the panes on the outside and dab,
while still wet, with a pad of cotton
wadding. If desired small quantities of
Paris blue, madder lake, etc., may be
added to the wax solution.
IV. — For deadening window panes in
factories and workshops: To beeswax
dissolved in oil of turpentine, add some
dryer and varnish to obtain a quicker
drying and hardening. After the win-
dow pane has been coated with this
mixture on the outside, it is dabbed
uniformly with a pad of wadding. The
wax may be tinted with glazing colors.
Frosted Mirrors.— I.— Cover with a
solution of Epsom salts in stale beer;
apply with a sponge to the mirror, first
wiping it clean and dry. On drying, the
Epsom salt crystallizes, giving very hand-
some frosted effects, but the solution
must not be applied on humid days
376
GLASS
when the glass is liable to be damp, for
in that case the effect will be a blurred
one. When it is desirable to remove
the coating, lukewarm water will serve
the purpose without damage to the
luster of the mirror.
II. — The following mixture, when
applied to a mirror and left to dry, will
form in many shapes, all radiating from
a focus, this focus forming anywhere on
the glass, and when all dry tends to form
a most pleasing object to the eye.
Sour ale 4 ounces
Magnesium sulphate. 1 ounce
Put on the mirror with a small, clean
sponge and let dry. It is now ready
for the artist, and he may choose his own
colors and subject.
Crystalline Coatings or Frostwork on
Glass or Paper. — Dissolve a small quan-
tity of dextrin (gum arabic and trag-
acanth are not so suitable) in aqueous
salt solution as concentrated as possible,
for instance, m sulphate of magnesia
(bitter salt), sulphate of zinc or any
other readily crystallizing salt; filter the
solution through white blotting paper
and coat glass panes uniformly thin with
the clear filtrate, using a fine, broad
badger brush; leave them lying at an
ordinary medium temperature about one-
quarter hour in a horizontal position.
As the water slowly evaporates during
this short time, handsome crystalline
patterns, closely resembling frostwork,
will develop gradually on the glass panes,
which adhere so firmly to the glass or the
paper (if well-sized glazed paper had
been used) that they will not rub off
easily. They can be permanently fixed
by a subsequent coat of alcoholic shellac
solution.
Especially handsome effects are pro-
duced with colored glass panes thus
treated, and in the case of reflected light
by colored paper.
For testing crystals as regards their
optical behavior, among others their
behavior to polarized light, it is sufficient
to pour a solution of collodion wool
(soluble peroxide lime for the prepara-
tion of collodion) over the surface of
glass with the crystalline designs, and to
pull off the dry collodion film care-
fully. If this is done cautiously it is not
difficult to lift the whole crystalline
group from the glass plate and to in-
corporate it with the glass-like, thin
collodion film.
REMOVING WINDOW FROST.
Here are fourteen methods of prevent-
ing frost on windows, arranged in the
order of their efficacy: 1, Flame of an alco-
hol lamp; 2, sulphuric acid; 3, aqua
ammonia; 4, glycerine; 5, aqua regia; 6,
hydrochloric acid; 7, benzine; 8, hydri-
oaic acid; 9, boric acid; 10, alcohol; 11,
nitric acid; 12, cobalt nitrate; 13, in-
fusion of nutgalls; 14, tincture of ferrous
sulphate. By the use of an alcohol lamp
(which, of course, has to be handled with
great care) the results are immediate,
and the effect more nearly permanent
than by any other methods. The sul-
phuric acid application is made with a
cotton cloth swab, care being taken not
to allow any dripping, and so with all
other acids. The effect of the aqua
ammonia is almost instantaneous, but the
window is frosted again in a short time.
With the glycerine there are very good
results — but slight stains on the window
which may be easily removed.
The instructions for glycerine are:
Dissolve 2 ounces of glycerine in 1 quart
of 62 per cent alcohol containing, to
improve the odor, some oil of amber.
When the mixture clarifies it is rubbed
over the inner surface of the glass. This,
it is claimed, not only prevents the
formation of frost, but also prevents
sweating.
To Prevent Dimming of Eyeglasses,
etc. — Mix olein-potash soap with about
3 per cent of glycerine and a little oil
turpentine. Similar mixtures have also
been recommended for polishing physi-
cians' reflectors, show-windows, etc., to
prevent dimming.
WRITING ON GLASS:
See also Etching and Inks.
Composition for Writing on Glass. —
To obtain mat designs on glass, take
sodium fluoride, 35 parts; potassium sul-
phate, 7 parts; zinc chloride, 15 parts;
hydrochloric acid, 65 parts; distilled
water, 1,000 parts. Dissolve the sodium
fluoride and the potassium sulphate in
half the water; dissolve the zinc chloride
in the remaining water and add the
hydrochloric acid. Preserve these two
solutions separately. For use, mix a
little of each solution and write on the
glass with a pen or brush.
Ink for Writing on Glass. —
Shellac 20 parts
Alcohol 150 parts
Borax 35 parts
Water 250 parts
Water - soluble dye sufficient to
color.
Dissolve the shellac in the alcohol, the
borax in the water, and pour the shellac
GLASS— GLAZES
377
solution slowly into that of the borax.
Then add the coloring matter previously
dissolved in a little water.
GLASS AND GLASSWARE CEMENT:
See Adhesives and Amalgams.
GLASS CLEANERS:
See Cleaning Preparations and Meth-
ods.
GLASS, COPPERING, GILDING, AND
PLATING:
See Plating.
GLASS ETCHING:
See Etching.
GLASS, HOW TO AFFIX SIGN-LET-
TERS ON:
See Adhesives under Sign-Letter
Cements.
GLASS, FASTENING METALS ON:
See Adhesives.
GLASS LETTERING:
See Lettering.
GLASS LUBRICANTS:
See Lubricants.
GLASS, PERCENTAGE OF LIGHT AB-
SORBED BY:
See Light.
GLASS POLISHES:
See Polishes.
GLASS, SILVERING OF:
See Mirrors.
GLASS SOLDERS:
See Solders.
GLASS, SOLUBLE, AS A CEMENT:
See Adhesives.
GLASS, TO AFFIX PAPER ON:
See Adhesives, under Water-Glass
Cements.
GLASS, TO SILVER:
See Silver.
Glazes
(See also Ceramics, Enamels, Paints,
and Varnishes.)
Glazes for Cooking Vessels. — Melt a
frit of red lead, 22.9 parts (by weight);
crystallized boracic acid, 31 parts;
enamel soda, 42.4 parts; cooking salt, 10
parts; gravel, 12 parts; feldspar, 8 parts.
According to the character of the clay,
this frit is mixed with varying quantities
of sand, feldspar and kaolin, in the
following manner:
Frit 84 84 84 84
Red lead 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5
Gravel 8 6 3
Feldspar — 25 8
Kaolin, burnt .6.5 6.5 6.5 6.5
Glazes which are produced without
addition of red lead to the frit, are pre-
pared as follows. Melt a frit of the
following composition: Red lead, 22.9
parts (by weight); boracic acid in
crystals, 24.8 parts; enamel soda, 37.1
parts; calcined potash, 6.9 parts; cook-
ing salt, 10 parts; chalk, 10 parts; gravel,
12 parts; feldspar, 8 parts.
From the frit the following glazes are
prepared:
Frit 86.5 86.5 86.5 86.5
Gravel 7 4.5 3
Feldspar 2.5 4 7
Kaolin, burnt. 6.5 6.5 6.5 6.5
Glazing on Size Colors. — The essential
condition for this work is a well-sized
foundation. For the glazing paint, size
is likewise used as a binder, but a little
dissolved soap is added, of about the
strength employed for coating ceilings.
Good veining can be done with this, and
a better effect can be produced in execut-
ing pieces which are to appear in relief,
such as car-touches, masks, knobs, etc.,
than with the ordinary means. A skill-
ful grainer may, also impart to the work
the pleasant luster of natural wood.
The same glazing method is applicable
to colored paintings. If the glazing
colors are prepared with wax, dissolved
in French turpentine, one may likewise
glaze with them on a size-paint ground.
Glazing tube-oil colors thinned with
turpentine and siccative, are also useful
for this purpose. For the shadows,
asphalt and Van Dyke brown are recom-
mended, while the contour may be
painted with size-paint.
Coating Metallic Surfaces with Glass.
— Metallic surfaces may be coated with
glass by melting together 125 parts (by
weight) of flint-glass fragments, 20 parts
of sodium carbonate, and 12 parts of
boracic acid. The molten mass is next
poured on a hard and cold surface, stone
or metal. After it has cooled, it is pow-
dered. Make a mixture of 50° Be. of this
powder and sodium silicate (water
glass). The metal to be glazed is coated
with this and heated in a muffle or any
other oven until the mixture melts and
can be evenly distributed. This glass
coating adheres firmly to iron and steel.
Gl?ze for Bricks. — A glazing color for
bricks patented in Germany is a compo-
378
GLAZES— GLYCERINE
sition of 12 parts (by weight) lead; 4 parts
litharge; 3 parts quartzose sand; 4 parts
white argillaceous earth; 2 parts kitchen
salt; 2 parts finely crushed glass, and 1
part saltpeter. These ingredients are
all reduced to a powder and then mixed
with a suitable quantity of water. The
color prepared in this manner is said to
possess great durability, and to impart a
fine luster to the bricks.
GLAZES FOR LAUNDRY:
See Laundry Preparations.
GLOBES, HOW TO COLOR:
See Glass-Coloring.
GLOBES, PERCENTAGE OF LIGHT
ABSORBED BY:
See Light.
GLOBES, SILVERING OF:
See Mirrors.
GLOSS FOR PAPER:
See Paper.
GLOVE -CLEANERS :
See Cleaning Compounds.
GLOVES, SUBSTITUTE FOR RUBBER :
See Antiseptics.
GLOVES, TESTING:
See Rubber.
GLUCOSE IN JELLY:
See Foods.
Glue
(Formulas for Glues and methods of
manufacturing Glue will be found under
Adhesives.)
Rendering Glue Insoluble in Water. —
Stuebling finds that the usual mixture of
bichromate and glue when used in the
ordinary way does not possess the water-
proof properties with which it is gener-
ally credited. If mixed in the daylight,
it sets hard before it can be applied to
the surfaces to be glued, and if mixed
and applied in the dark room it remains
just as soluble as ordinary glue, the
light being unable to penetrate the in-
terior of the joints. Neither is a mixture
of linseed oil and glue of any use for this
purpose. Happening to upset a strong
solution of alum — prepared for wood
staining — into an adjacent glue pot, he
stirred up the two together out of
curiosity and left them. Wishing to use
the glue a few days later, he tried to
thin it down with water, but unsuccess-
fully, the glue having set to a waterproof
mass. Fresh glue was then mixed with
alum solution and used to join two
pieces of wood, these resisting the action
of the water completely.
To Bleach Glue. — Dissolve the glue in
water, by heat, and while hot, add a
mixture in equal parts of oxalic acid and
zinc oxide, to an amount equal to about
1 per cent of the glue. After the color
has been removed, strain through muslin.
Method of Purifying Glue.— The glue
is soaked in cold water and dissolved in a
hot 25 per cent solution of magnesium
sulphate. The hot solution is filtered,
and to the filtrate is added a 25 per cent,
solution of magnesium sulphate con-
taining 0.5 per cent of hydrochloric acid
(or, if necessary, sulphuric acid). A
white flocculent precipitate is obtained
which is difficult to filter. The re-
mainder of the glue in the saline solution
is extracted by treatment with magnesium
sulphate.
The viscous matter is washed, then
dissolved in hot water, and allowed to
cool, a quantity of weak alcohol acid-
ulated by 1 per cent of hydrochloric acid
being added just before the mass solidi-
fies. From 2 to 3 parts, by volume, of
strong alcohol (methyl or ethyl) are
then added and the solution filtered,
charcoal being used if necessary. The
glue is finally precipitated from this
solution by neutralizing with ammonia
and washing with alcohol or water.
To Distinguish Glue and Other Ad-
hesive Agents. — The product to be ex-
amined is heated with hydrofluoric acid
(50 per cent). If bone glue is present in
any reasonable quantity, an intense odor
of butyric acid arises at once, similar
to that of Limburger cheese. But if
dextrin or gum arabic is present, only
an odor of dextrine or fluorhydric acid
will be perceptible. Conduct the re-
action with small quantities; otherwise
the smell will be so strong that it is hard
to remove from the room.
GLUE CLARIFIER:
See Gelatin.
Glycerine
Recovering Glycerine from Soap Boil-
er's Lye. — I. — Glycerine is obtained as
a by-product in making soap. For
many years the lyes were thrown away
as waste, but now considerable quantities
of glycerine are recovered, which are
much used in making explosive com-
pounds.
When a metallic salt or one of the
alkalies, as caustic soda, is added to
tallow, a stearite of the metal (common
soap is stearite of sodium) is formed,
whereby the glycerine is eliminated.
GLYCERINE— GOLD
379
This valuable by-product is contained in
the waste lye, and has formed the sub-
ject of several patents.
Draw the lye off from the soap-pans;
this contains a large quantity of water,
some salt and soap and a small quantity
of glycerine, and the great trouble is to
concentrate the lye so that the large
quantity of water is eliminated, some-
times 10 to 12 days being occupied in
doing this. The soap and salt are easily
removed.
To remove the soap, run the lye into a
series of tanks alternating in size step-
like, so that as the first, which should be
the largest, becomes full, the liquor will
flow into the second, from that into the
third, and so on; by this arrangement
the rosinous and albuminous matters
will settle, and the soap still contained
in the lyes will float on the surface, from
which it is removed by skimming.
After thus freeing the lye of the solid
impurities, convey the purified lye to the
glycerine recovering department (wooden
troughs or pipes may be used to do this),
and after concentrating by heating it in a
steam-jacketed boiler, and allowing it to
cool somewhat, ladle out the solid salt
that separates, and afterwards con-
centrate the lye by allowing it to flow
into a tank, but before doing so let the
fluid come in contact with a hot blast of
air or superheated steam, whereby the
crude discolored glycerine is obtained.
This is further purified by heating with
animal charcoal to decolorize it, then
distilling several times in copper stills
with superheated steam. The chief
points to attend to are: (1) The neutral-
izing and concentrating the lye as much
as possible and then separating the salts
and solid matters; (2) concentrating the
purified lye, and mixing this fluid with
oleic acid, oil, tallow, or lard, and heating
the mixture to 338° F., in a still, by steam,
and gradually raise the heat to 372° F.;
(3) stirring the liquor while being heated,
and allowing the aqueous vapor to es-
cape, and when thus concentrated, sa-
ponifying the liquid with lime to elimi-
nate the glycerine; water is at the same
time expelled, but this is removed from
the glycerine by evaporating the mix-
ture.
II. — In W. E. Garrigues's patent for
the recovering of glycerine from spent
soap lyes, the liquid is neutralized with a
mineral acid, and after separation of the
insoluble fatty acids it is concentrated
and then freed from mineral salts and
volatile fatty acids, and the concentrat-
ed glycerine solution treated with an
alkaline substance and distilled. Thus
the soap lye may be neutralized with
sulphuric acid, and aluminum sulphate
added to precipitate the insoluble fatty
acids. The filtrate from these is con-
centrated and the separated mineral
salts removed, after which barium
chloride is added and then sufficient
sulphuric acid to liberate the volatile
fatty acids combined with the alkali.
These acids are partially enveloped in
the barium sulphate, with which they
can be separated from the liquid by
filtration, \vhile the remaining portion
can be expelled by evaporating the
liquid in a vacuum evaporator. Finally,
the solution is treated with sodium
carbonate, and the glycerine distilled.
Glycerine Lotion. —
Glycerine 4 ounces
Essence bouquet .... f ounce
Water 4 ounces
Cochineal coloring, a sufficient
quantity.
(See also Cosmetics for Glycerine
Lotions.)
GLYCERINE APPLICATIONS:
See Cosmetics.
GLYCERINE AS A DETERGENT:
See Cleaning Preparations and Meth-
ods.
GLYCERINE PROCESS:
See Photography.
GLYCERINE SOAP:
See Soap.
GLYCERINE DEVELOPER:
See Photography.
Gold
(See also Jewelers' Formulas.)
Gold Printing on Oilcloth and Imita-
tion Leather. — Oilcloth can very easily
be gilt if the right degree of heat is
observed. After the engraving has been
put in the press, the latter is heated
slightly, so that it is still possible to lay
the palm of the hand on the heated plate
without any unpleasant sensation. Go
over the oilcloth with a rag in which a
drop of olive oil has been rubbed up,
which gives a greasy film. No priming
with white of egg or any other priming
agent should be done, since the gold leaf
wbuld stick. Avoid sprinkling on gild-
ing powder. The gold leaf is applied
directly on the oilcloth; then place in the
lukewarm press, squeezing it down with
GOLD
a quick jerky motion and opening it at
once. If the warm plate remains too
long on the oilcloth, the gold leaf will
stick. When the impression is done, the
gold leaf is not swept off at once, but
the oilcloth is first allowed to cool com-
pletely for several minutes, since there
is a possibility that it has become slightly
softened under the influence of the heat,
especially at the borders of the pressed
figures, and the gold would stick there
if swept off immediately. The printing
should be sharp and neat and the gold
glossy. For bronze printing on oilcloth,
a preliminary treatment of printing with
varnish ground should be given. The
bronze is dusted on this varnish.
Imitation leather is generally treated
in the same manner. The tough paper
substance is made to imitate leather
perfectly as regards color and press-
ing, especially the various sorts of calf,
but the treatment in press gilding differs
entirely from that of genuine leather.
The stuff does not possess the porous,
spongy nature of leather, but on the
contrary is very hard, and in the
course of manufacture in stained-paper
factories is given an almost waterproof
coating of color and varnish. Hence
the applied ground of white of egg pene-
trates but slightly into this substance,
and a thin layer of white of egg remains
on the surface. The consequence is
that in gilding the gold leaf is prone to
become attached, the ground of albumen
being quickly dissolved under the action
of the heat and put in a soft sticky state
even in places where there is no en-
graving. In order to avoid this the
ground is either printed only lukewarm,
or this imitation leather is not primed at
all, but the gold is applied immediately
upon going over the surface with the oily
rag. Print with a rather hot press, with
about the same amount of heat as is
employed for printing shagreen and
title paper. A quick jerky printing,
avoiding a long pressure of the plate, is
necessary.
Liquid Gold. — Take an evaporating
dish, put into it 880 parts, by weight, of
pure gold; then 4,400 parts, by weight, of
muriatic acid, and 3,520 parts, by weight,
nitric acid; place over a gas flame
until the gold is dissolved, and then add
to it 22 parts, by weight, of pure tin;
when the tin is dissolved add 42 parts, by
weight, of butter of antimony. Let ail
remain over the gas until the mixture
begins to thicken. Now put into a glass
and test with the hydrometer, which
should give about 1,800 specific gravity.
Pour into a large glass and fill up with
water until the hydrometer shows 1090;
pour all the solution into a chemical pot
and add to it 1,760 parts, by weight,
balsam of sulphur, stirring well all the
while, and put it over the gas again; in
an hour it should give, on testing,
125° F.; gradually increase the heat up
to 185° F., when it should be well stirred
and then left to cool about 12 hours.
Pour the watery fluid into a large vessel
and wash the dark-looking mass 5 or 6
times with hot water; save each lot of
water as it contains some portion of gold.
Remove all moisture from the dark mass
by rolling on a slab and warming before
the fire occasionally so as to keep it soft.
When quite dry add 2J times its weight
of turpentine and put it over a small
flame for about 2 hours; then slightly in-
crease the heat for another hour and a
half. Allow this to stand about 24 hours,
and then take a glazed bowl and spread
over the bottom of it 1,760 parts, by
weight, of finely powdered bismuth; pour
the prepared gold over it in several
places. Now take a vessel containing
water and place inside the other vessel
containing the gold, and heat it so as to
cause the water to boil for 3 hours; allow
it to remain until settled and pour off
the gold from the settlings of the bis-
muth, and try it; if not quite right con-
tinue the last process with bismuth until
good;, the bismuth causes the gold to
adhere.
Preparation of Balsam of Sulphur. —
Take 16 parts oil of turpentine; 2i parts
spirits of turpentine; 8 parts flour of
sulphur.
Place all in a chemical pot and heat
until it boils; continue the boiling until
no sulphur can be seen in it; now remove
from the heat and thin it with turpentine
until about the thickness of treacle, then
warm it again, stirring well; allow it to
cool until it reaches 45° F., then test it
with the hydrometer, and if specific
gravity is not 995 continue the addition of
turpentine and warming until correct,
let it thoroughly cool, then bottle, keep-
ing it air-tight.
To Purify Bismuth. — Take 6 parts
bismuth metal, £ part saltpeter. Melt
together in a biscuit cup, pour out on to
a slab, and take away all dirt, then grind
into a fine powder.
To Recover the Gold from the Re-
mains of the Foregoing Process. — Put
all the "watery" solutions into a large
vessel and mix with a filtered saturated
solution of copperas; this will
GOLD
381
a precipitate of pure metallic gold to
gradually subside; wash it with cold
water and dry in an evaporating dish.
All rags and settlings that are thick
should be burnt in a crucible until a
yellow mass is seen; then take this and
dissolve it in 2 parts muriatic acid and 1
part nitric acid. Let it remain in a porce-
lain dish until it begins to thicken, and
crystals form on the sides. Add a little
nitric acid, and heat until crystals again
form. Now take this and mix with cold
water, add a solution of copperas to it
and allow it to settle; pour off the water,
and with fresh water wash till quite free
from acid. The gold may then be used
again, and if great care is exercised
almost one-half the original quantity
may be recovered.
The quantities given in the recipe
should produce about 13 to 15 parts of
the liquid gold. It does not in use require
any burnishing, and should be fired at rose-
color heat. If desired it can be fluxed
with Venice turpentine, oil of lavender,
or almonds.
Treatment of Brittle Gold.— L— Add
to every 100 parts, by weight, 5 to 8 parts,
by weight, of cupric chloride and melt un-
til the oily layer which forms has disap-
peared. Then pour out, and in most
cases a perfectly pliable gold will have
been obtained. If this should not be the
case after the first fusion, repeat the oper-
ation with the same quantity of cupric
chloride. The cupric chloride must be
kept in a well-closed bottle, made tight
with paraffine, and in a dry place.
II. — Pass chlorine gas through the
molten gold, by which treatment most of
the gold which has otherwise been set
aside as unfit for certain kinds of work
may be redeemed.
Assaying of Gold. — To determine the
presence of gold in ores, etc., mix a
small quantity of the finely powdered
ore in a flask with an equal volume of
tincture of iodine, shake repeatedly and
well, and leave in contact about 1 hour,
with repeated shaking. Next allow the
mixture to deposit and dip a narrow
strip of filtering paper into the solution.
Allow the paper to absorb, next to dry;
then dip it again into the solution, re-
peating this 5 to 6 times, so that the
filtering paper is well saturated and im-
pregnated. The strip is now calcined,
as it were, and the ashes, if gold is
present, show a purple color. The
coloring disappears immediately if the
ashes are moistened with bromine water.
The same test may also be modified
as follows: Cover the finely pulverized
ore with bromine water, shake well and
repeatedly during about 1 hour of the
contact, and filter. Now add to the
solution stannic protochloride in solution,
whereby, in case gold is present, a purple
color (gold purple of Cassius) will at
once appear. In case the ore to be
assayed contains sulphides, it is well to
roast the ore previously, and should it
contain lime carbonate, it is advisable to
calcine the ore before in the presence of
ammonium carbonate.
Gold Welding.— Gold may be welded
together with any metal, if the right
methods are employed, but best with
copper. Some recipes for welding agents
are here given.
I. — Two parts by weight (16 ounces
equal 1 pound) of green vitriol; 1 part
by weight (16 ounces equal 1 pound) of
saltpeter; 6 parts by weight (16 ounces
equal 1 pound) of common salt; 1 part
by weight (16 ounces equal 1 pound) of
black manganic oxide or pulverized,
and mixed with 48 parts by weight (16
ounces equal 1 pound) of good welding
sand.
II. — Filings of the metal to be used in
welding are mixed with melted borax in
the usual proportion. To be applied in
the thickness desired.
III.— A mixture of 338 parts of
sodium phosphate and 124 parts of
boracic acid is used when the metal is
at dark-red heat. The metal is then to be
brought to a bright-red heat, and ham-
mered at the same time. The metal
easily softens at a high temperature, and
a wooden mallet is best. All substances
containing carbon should be removed
from the surface, as success depends upon
the formation of a fusible copper phos-
phate, which dissolves a thin layer of
oxide on the surface, and keeps the latter
in good condition for welding.
To Recover Gold-Leaf Waste.— To re-
cover the gold from color waste, gold
brushes, rags, etc., they are burned up to
ashes. The ashes are leached with
boiling water containing hydrochloric
acid. The auriferous residuum is then
boiled with aqua regia (1 part nitric
acid and 3 parts hydrochloric acid),
whereby the gold is dissolved and gold
chloride results. After filtration and
evaporation to dryness the product is
dissolved in water and precipitated with
sulphate of protoxide of iron. The pre-
cipitated gold powder is purified with
hydrochloric acid.
Gold from Acid Coloring Baths. — I.—
Different lots are to be poured together
882
GOLD
and the gold in them recovered. The
following method is recommended:
Dissolve a handful of phosphate of iron
in boiling water, to which liquor add
the coloring baths, whereby small
particles of gold are precipitated. Then
draw off the water, being careful not to
dissolve the auriferous sediment at the
bottom. Free this from all traces of acid
by washing with plenty of boiling water;
it will require 3 or 4 separate washings,
with sufficient time between each to
allow the water. to cool and the sediment
to settle before pouring off the water.
Then dry in an iron vessel by the fire and
fuse in a covered skittlepot with a flux.
II. — The collected old coloring baths
are poured into a sufficiently large pot,
an optional quantity of nitro-muriatic
acid is added, and the pot is placed over
the fire, during which time the fluid is
stirred with a wooden stick. It is taken
from the fire after a while, diluted largely
with rain water and filtered through
coarse paper. The gold is recovered
from the filtered solution with a solution
of green vitriol which is stored in air-
tight bottles, then freshened with hot
water, and finally smelted with borax
and a little saltpeter.
Parting with Concentrated Sulphuric
Acid. — It is not necessary scrupulously to
observe the exact proportion of the gold
to the silver. After haying prepared the
auriferous silver, place it in a quantity of
concentrated sulphuric acid contained in
a porcelain vessel, and let it come to a
violent boil. When the acid has either be-
come saturated and will dissolve no more,
or when solution is complete, remove
the dissolving vessel from the fire, let it cool,
and, for the purpose of clarifying, pour
dilute sulphuric acid into the solution.
The dissolved silver is next carefully
decanted from the gold sediment upon
the bottom, another portion of con-
centrated acid is poured in, and the gold
is well boiled again, as it will still contain
traces of silver; this operation may be
repeated as often as is deemed necessary.
The solution, poured into the glass jars,
is well diluted with water, and the silver
is then precipitated by placing a sheet
of copper in the solution. The precipi-
tate is then freshened with hot water,
which may also be done by washing upon
the filter; the granulated silver (sulphate
of silver) is pressed out in linen, dried
and smelted. The freshened gold, after
drying, is first smelted with bisulphate of
soda, in order to convert the last traces
of silver into sulphate, and then smelted
with borax and a little saltpeter.
To Remove Gold from Silver.— I.—
Gold is taken from the surface of silver
by spreading over it a paste, made of
powdered sal ammoniac with aqua fortis
and heating it till the matter smokes and
is nearly dry, when the gold may be
separated by rubbing it with the scratch
brush.
II. — The alloy is to be melted and
poured from a height into a vessel of
cold water, to which a rotary motion is
imparted, or else it is to be poured
through a broom. By this means the
metal is reduced to a fine granular con-
dition. The metallic substance is then
treated with nitric acid, and gently
heated. Nitrate of silver is produced,
which can be reduced by any of the
ordinary methods; while metallic gold
remains as a black sediment, which must
be washed and melted.
Simple Specific Gravity Test.— A cer-
tain quantity of the metal is taken and
drawn out into a wire, which is to be
exactly of the same length as one from
fine silver; of course, both must have
been drawn through the same hole,
silver being nearly A lighter than gold,
it is natural that the one of fine silver
must be lighter, and the increased weight
of the wire under test corresponds to the
percentage of gold contained in it.
To Make Fat Oil Gold Size.— First thin
up the fat oil with turpentine to workable
condition; then mix a little very finely
ground pigment with the gold size, about
as much as in a thin priming coat. Make
the size as nearly gold color as is con-
venient; chrome yellow tinted with ver-
milion is as good as anything for this pur-
pose. Then thin ready for the brush with
turpentine, and it will next be in order to
run the size through a very fine strainer.
Add japan, as experience or experiment
may teach, to make it dry tacky about
the time the leaf is to be laid. Dry slow-
ly, because the slower the size dries, the
longer it will hold its proper tackiness
when it is once in that condition.
To Dissolve Copper from Gold Articles.
— Take 2 ounces of proto-sulphate of
iron and dissolve it in £ a pint of water,
then add to it in powder 2 ounces of
nitrate of potash; boil the mixture for
some time, and afterwards pour it into a
shallow vessel to cool and crystallize;
then to every part of the crystallized salt
add 8 ounces of muriatic acid, and
preserve in a bottle for use. Equal
parts of the above preparation and of
boiling water is a good proportion to use
in dissolving copper, or 1 part by weight
GOLD
of nitric acid may be used to 4 parts by
weight of boiling water as a substitute.
GOLD PURPLE.
I. — The solution of stannous chloride
necessary for the preparation of gold
purple is produced by dissolving pure tin
in pure hydrochloric acid (free from iron),
in such a manner that some of the tin re-
mains undissolved, and evaporating the
solution, into which a piece of tin is laid,
to crystallization.
II. — Recipe for Pale Purple. — Dis-
solve 2 parts by weight of tin in boiling
aqua regia, evaporate the solution at a
moderate heat until it becomes solid,
dissolve in distilled water and add 2
parts by weight of a solution of stannous
chloride (specific gravity 1.7) dilute with
9,856 parts by weight of water, stir into
the liquid a solution of gold chloride
prepared from 0.5 parts by weight of
gold and containing no excess of acid
(the latter being brought about Jby
evaporating the solution of gold chloride
to dryness and heating for some time to
about 320° F.). This liquid is dimmed
by the admixture of 50 parts by weight
of liquid ammonia which eliminates the
purple. The latter is quickly filtered off,
washed out and while still moist rubbed
up with the glass paste. This consists of
enamel of lead 20 parts by weight;
quartzose sand, 1 part by weight; red
lead, 2 parts by weight; and calcined
borax, 1 part by weight, with silver
carbonate, 3 parts by weight.
III.— Recipe for Dark Gold Purple.—
Gold solution of 0.5 parts by weight of
gold, solution of stannous chloride
(specific gravity 1.7) 7.5 parts by weight;
thin with 9,856 parts by weight of water,
separate the purple by a few drops of
sulphuric acid, wash out the purple and
mix same with enamel of lead 10 parts by
weight and silver carbonate, 0.5 parts
by weight.
IV.— Recipe for Pink Purple.— Gold
solution of 1 part by weight of gold;
solution of 50 parts by weight of alum in
19,712 parts by weight of water; add 1.5
parts by weight of stannous chloride so-
lution (specific gravity 1.7) and enough
ammonia until no more precipitate is
formed; mix the washed out precipitate,
while still moist, with 70 parts by weight
of enamel of lead and 2.5 parts by weight
of silver carbonate. According to the
composition of the purple various reds
are obtained in fusing it on; the latter
may still be brightened up by a suitable
increase of the flux.
To Render Pale Gold Darker.— Take
verdigris, 50 parts by weight and very
strong vinegar, 100 parts by weight.
Dissolve the verdigris in the vinegar, rub
the pieces with it well, heat them and dip
them in liquid ammonia diluted with
water. Repeat the operation if the de-
sired shade does not appear the first time.
Rinse with clean water and dry.
To Color Gold. — Gilt objects are im-
proved by boiling in the following solu-
tion: Saltpeter, 2 parts by weight; cook-
ing salt, 1 part by weight; alum, 1 part
by weight; water, 24 parts by weight;
hydrochloric acid, 1 part by weight (1.12
specific gravity). In order to impart a
rich appearance to gilt articles, the fol-
lowing paste is applied: Alum, 3 parts by
weight; saltpeter, 2 parts by weight;
zinc vitriol, 1 part by weight; cooking
salt, 1 part by weight; made into a paste
with water. Next, heat until black, on
a hot iron plate, wash with water, scratch
with vinegar and dry after washing.
Gold -Leaf Striping. — To secure a good
job of gilding depends largely for its
beauty upon the sizing. Take tube
chrome yellow ground in oil, thin with
wearing body varnish, and temper it
ready for use with turpentine. Apply
in the evening with an ox-tail striper, and
let it stand until the next morning, when,
under ordinary circumstances, it will be
ready for the gold leaf, etc. After the
gilding is done, let the job stand 24
hours before varnishing.
Composition of Aqua Fortis for the
Touch -Stone. — Following are the three
compositions mostly in use: I. — Nitric
acid, 30 parts; hydrochloric acid, 3 parts;
distilled water, 20 parts.
II.— Nitric acid, 980 parts by weight;
hydrochloric acid, 20 parts by weight.
III. — Nitric acid, 123 parts by weight;
hydrochloric acid, 2 parts by weight.
To Remove Soft Solder from Gold. —
Place the work in spirits of salts (hydro-
chloric acid) or remove as much as pos-
sible with the scraper, using a gentle
heat to remove the solder more easily.
Tipping Gold Pens. — Gold pens are
usually tipped with iridium. This is
done by soldering very small pieces to
the points and filing to the proper shape.
To Recognize Whether an Article is
Gilt. — Simply touch the object with a
glass rod previously dipped into a solu-
tion of bichloride of copper. If the
article has been gilt the spot touched
should remain intact, while it presents a
384
GOLD— GRAIN
brown stain if no gold has been de-
posited on its surface.
To Burnish Gilt Work.— Ale has
proved a very good substitute for soap
and water in burnishing gilt as it in-
creases the ease and smoothness with
which it is accomplished. Vinegar is a
somewhat poorer substitute for ale.
White -Gold Plates Without Solder.—
The gold serving as a background for
white-gold is rolled in the desired
dimensions and then made perfectly
even under a powerful press. It is then
carefully treated with a file until a per-
fectly smooth surface is obtained. After
a white-gold plate of the required thick-
ness has been produced in the same
manner, the surfaces of the two plates
to be united are coated with borax and
then pressed together by machine, which
causes the harder metal to be squeezed
slightly into the surface of the other,
furnishing a more solid and compact
mass. The metals, now partially united,
are firmly fastened together by means of
strong iron wire and a little more borax
solution is put on the edges. Then heat
to the temperature necessary for a com-
plete adhesion, but the heat must not be
so great as to cause an alloyage by fusing.
The whole is finally rolled out into the
required thickness.
To Fuse Gold Dust.— Use such a
crucible as is generally used for melting
brass; heat very hot; then add the gold
dust mixed with powdered borax; after
some time a scum or slag will be on top,
which may be thickened by the addition
of a little lime or bone ash. If the dust
contains any of the more oxidizable
metals, add a little niter, and skim off
the slag or scum very carefully; when
melted, grasp the crucible with strong
iron tongs, and pour off immediately
into molds, slightly greased. The slag
and crucibles may be afterwards pulver-
ized, and the auriferous matter recovered
from the mass through cupellation by
means of lead.
GOLD ALLOYS:
See Alloys.
GOLD, EXTRACTION OF, BY AMAL-
GAMATION:
See Amalgams.
GOLD LETTERS ON GLASS, CEMENTS
FOR AFFIXING:
See Adhesives, under Sign-Letter Cem-
ents.
GOLD, REDUCTION OF OLD PHOTO-
GRAPHIC:
See Photography.
GOLD FOIL SUBSTITUTES AND GOLD
LEAF:
See Metal Fo''I.
GOLD-LEAF ALLOYS:
See Alloys.
GOLD LEAF AND ITS APPLICATION:
See Paints.
GOLD PLATING:
See Plating.
GOLD, RECOVERY OF WASTE:
See Jewelers' Formulas.
GOLD RENpVATOR:
See Cleaning Preparations and Meth-
ods.
GOLD, SEPARATION OF PLATINUM
FROM:
See Platinum.
GOLD SOLDERS:
See Solders.
GOLD TESTING:
See Jewelers' Formulas.
GOLD VARNISH:
See Varnishes.
GOLDWASSER :
See Wines and Liquors.
GONG METAL:
See Alloys.
GRAIN.
Formalin Treatment of Seed Grain
for Smut. — Smut is a parasitic fungus,
and springs from a spore (which cor-
responds to a seed in higher plants).
This germinates when the grain is
seeded and, penetrating the little grain
plant when but a few days old, grows up
within the grain stem. After entering
the stem there is no evidence of its
presence until the grain begins to head.
At this time the smut plant robs the
developing kernels of their nourishment
and ripens a mass of smut spores.
These spores usually ripen before the
grain, and are blown about the field,
many spores becoming lodged on the
ripening grain kernels. The wholesale
agent of infection is the threshing
machine. For this reason the safest
plan is to treat all seed wheat and oats
each year.
Secure a 40 per cent solution of
formalin (the commercial name for
formaldehyde gas held in a water so-
lution). About 1 ounce is required for
every 5 bushels of grain to be treated.
GRAIN— GREASE ERADlCATORS
385
Clean off a space on the barn floor or
sweep a clean space on the hard level
ground and lay a good-sized canvas
down, on which to spread out the wheat.
See that the place where the grain is to
be treated is swept clean and thoroughly
sprinkled with the formalin solution
before placing the seed grain there.
Prepare the formalin solution im-
mediately before use, as it is volatile,
and if kept may disappear by evapora-
tion.
Use 4 ounces of formalin for 10 gallons
of water. This is sufficient for 600
pounds of grain. Put the solution in a
barrel or tub, thoroughly mixing.
The solution can be applied with the
garden sprinkler. Care must be taken
to moisten the grain thoroughly. Sprinkle,
stir the grain up thoroughly and sprinkle
again, until every kernel is wet.
After sprinkling, place the grain in
a conical pile and cover with horse-
blankets, gunny sacks, etc. The smut
that does the damage lies just under the
glume of the oats or on the basal hairs
of the wheat. Covering the treated grain
holds the gas from the formalin within
the pile, where it comes in contact with
the kernels, killing such smut spores as
may have survived the previous treat-
ment. After the grain has remained in a
covered pile 2 to 4 hours, spread it out
again where the wind can blow over it,
to air and dry.
As soon as the grain can be taken in
the hand without the kernels sticking
together, it can be sown in the field.
The grain may be treated in the forenoon
and seeded in the afternoon.
Since this treatment swells the kernels
it hastens germination and should be
done in the spring just before seeding
time.
While the copper sulphate or blue-
stone treatment is valuable in killing
smut, the formalin treatment can be
given in less time, is applied so easily
and is so effectual that it is recommended
as a sure and ready means of killing
smut in wheat and oats.
GRAINING CRAYONS:
See Crayons.
GRAINING COLORS:
See Pigments.
GRAINING WITH PAINTr
See Paint.
GRAINING, PALISANDER:
See Palisander.
GRAPE JUICE, PRESERVATION OF:
See Wines and Liquors.
GRAPHITE AS A LUBRICANT:
See Lubricants.
GRAVEL WALKS.
For cleaning gravel walks any of the
following may be used : I. — Gas-tar
liquor.
II.— Rock salt (cattle salt).
III. — Hydrochloric acid.
IV. — Sulphuric acid.
V. — Fresh limewater. The gas -tar
liquor must be poured out a few times
in succession, and must not touch the
tree roots and borders of the paths. This
medium is cheap. Cattle salt must like-
wise be thrown out repeatedly. The use
of hydrochloric and sulphuric acids is
somewhat expensive. Mix 60 parts of
water with 10 parts of unslaked lime and
1 part of sulphuric acid in a kettle, and
sprinkle the hot or cold mixture on the
walks by means of a watering pot. If
limewater is used alone it must be fresh
— 1 part of unslaked lime in 10 parts of
water.
GRAVERS:
To Prepare Gravers for Bright-Cutting.
— Set the gravers after the sharpening
on the oilstone on high-grade emery
(tripoli) paper. Next, hone them further
on the rouge leather, out without tearing
threads from it. In this manner the sil-
ver and aluminum engravers grind their
gravers. A subsequent whetting of the
graver on the touchstone is not advisable,
since it is too easily injured thereby. A
graver prepared as described gives excel-
lent bright engraving and never fails.
In all bright-cutting the graver must
be highly polished; but when bright-
cutting aluminum a lubricant like coal-
oil or vaseline is generally employed with
the polished tool; a mixture of vaseline
and benzine is also used for this purpose.
Another formula which may be recom-
mended for bright-cutting aluminum is
composed of the following ingredients:
Mix 4 parts of oil of turpentine and 1
fart of rum with 1 ounce of stearine.
mmerse the grayer in any of the mix-
tures before making the bright-cut.
GREASES:
See Lubricants.
GREASE ERADlCATORS:
See Cleaning Preparations and Meth-
ods.
386
GRINDSTONES— GUMS
GREASE PAINTS:
See Cosmetics.
GREEN, TO DISTINGUISH BLUE
FROM, AT NIGHT:
See Blue.
GREEN GILDING:
See Plating.
GRENADES:
See Fire Extinguishers.
GRINDING:
See Tool Setting.
GRINDER DISK CEMENT, SUBSTI-
TUTE FOR:
See Adhesives.
GRINDSTONES:
To Mend Grindstones. — The mending
of defective places in grindstones is best
done with a mass consisting of earth-
wax (so-called stone-pitch), 5 parts, by
weight; tar, 1 part; and powdered sand-
stone or cement, 3 parts, which is heated
to the boiling point and well stirred to-
gether. Before pouring in the mass the
places to be mended must be heated by
laying red-hot pieces of iron on them.
The substance is, in a tough state, poured
into the hollows of the stone, and the
pouring must be continued, when it com-
mences to solidify, until even with the
surface.
Treatment of the Grindstone.— The
stone should not be left with the lower
part in the water. This will render it
brittle at this spot, causing it to wear off
more quickly and thus lose its circu-
larity. It is best to moisten the stone
only when in use, drop by drop from a
vessel fixed above it and to keep it quite
dry otherwise. If the stone is no longer
round, it should be made so again by
turning by means of a piece of gas pipe or
careful trimming, otherwise it will com-
mence to jump, thus becoming useless.
It is important to clean all tools and
articles before grinding, carefully re-
moving all grease, fat, etc., as the pores
of the stone become clogged with these
impurities, which destroy its grain and
diminish its strength. Should one side
of the grindstone be lighter, this ir-
regularity can be equalized by affixing
pieces of lead, so as to obtain a uniform
motion of the stone. It is essential that
the stone should be firm on the axis and
not move to and fro in the bearings.
Grindstone Oil. — Complaints are often
heard that grindstones are occasionally
harder on one side than the other, the
softer parts wearing away in hollows,
which render grinding difficult, and soon
make the stone useless. This defect can
be remedied completely by means of
boiled linseed oil. When the stone is
thoroughly dry, the soft side is turned
uppermost, and brushed over with boiled
oil, which sinks into the stone, until the
latter is saturated. The operation takes
about 3 to 4 hours in summer. As soon
as the oil has dried, the stone may be
damped, and used without any further
delay. Unlike other similar remedies,
this one does not prevent the stone from
biting properly in the oiled parts, and the
life of the stone is considerably length-
ened, since it does not have to be dressed
so often.
GROUNDS FOR GRAINING COLORS:
See Pigments.
GUMS:
(See also Adhesives, under Mucilages.)
Gums, their Solubility in Alcohol. —
The following table shows the great range
of solubility of the various gums, and of
various specimens of the same gum, in
60 per cent alcohol:
Acajon . . . 6.94 to 42.92
Aden 0.60 to 26.90
Egyptian 46.34
Yellow Amrad 26.90 to 32.16
White Amrad 0.54 to 1.50
Kor.dofan 1.40 to 6.06
Australian 10.67 to 20.85
Bombay 22.06 to 46.14
Cape 1.67 to 1.88
Embavi 25.92
Gedda 1.24 to 1.30
Ghatti 31.60 to 70.32
Gheziereh 1.50 to 12.16
Halebi 3.70 to 22.60
La Plata 9.65
Mogadore 27.66
East Indian 3.24 to 74.84
Persian 1.74 to 17.34
Senegal 0.56 to 14.30
Substitute for Gum Arabic. — Dissolve
250 parts of glue in 1,000 parts of boiling
water and heat this gjue solution on the
water bath with a mixture of about 10
Sarts of barium peroxide of 75 per cent
aO2 and 5 parts of sulphuric acid
(66°) mixed with 115 parts of water, for
about 24 hours. After the time has
elapsed, pour off from the barium sul-
phate, whereby a little sulphurous acid
results owing to reduction of the sul-
phuric acid, which has a bleaching action
and makes the glue somewhat paler.
If this solution is mixed, with stirring,
and dried upon glass plates in the drying-
room, a product which can hardly be
GUNPOWDER STAINS— GYPSUM
distinguished from gum arabic is ob-
tained. An envelope sealed with this
mucilage cannot be opened by moisten-
ing the envelope. The traces of free
acid which it contains prevent the in-
vasion of bacteria, hence all putrefaction.
The adhesive power of the artificial
gum is so enormous that the use of cork
stoppers is quite excluded, since they
crumble off every time the bottle is
opened, so that finally a perfect wreath
around the inner neck of the bottle is
formed. Only metallic or porcelain
stoppers should be used.
GUM ARABIC, INCREASING ADHE-
SION OF:
See Adhesives, under Mucilages.
GUM BICHROMATE PROCESS:
See Photography.
GUM DROPS:
See Confectionery.
GUM-LAC:
See Oil.
GUMS USED IN MAKING VARNISH :
See Varnishes.
GUN BARRELS, TO BLUE :
See Steel.
GUN BRONZE:
See Alloys, under Phosphor Bronze.
GUN COTTON:
See Explosives.
GUN LUBRICANTS:
See Lubricants.
GUNPOWDER:
See Explosives.
GUNPOWDER STAINS.
A stain produced by the embedding
of grains of gunpowder in the skin is
practically the same thing as a tattoo
mark. The charcoal of the gunpowder
remains unaffected by the fluids of the
tissues, and no way is known of bring-
ing it into solution there. The only
method of obliterating such marks is
to take away with them the skin in
which they are embedded. This has
been accomplished by the application
of an electric current, and by the use
of caustics. When the destruction of
the true skin has been accomplished,
it becomes a foreign body, and if the
destruction has extended to a sufficient
depth, the other foreign body, the color-
ing matter which has been tattooed in,
may be expected to be cast off with it.
Recently pepsin and papain have been
proposed as applications to remove the
cuticle. A glycerole of either is tattooed
into the skin over the disfigured part;
and it is said that the operation has
proved successful.
It is scarcely necessary to say that
suppuration is likely to follow such treat-
ment, and that there is risk of scarring.
In view of this it becomes apparent that
any such operation should be under-
taken only by a surgeon skilled in
dermatological practice. An amateur
might not only cause the patient suffer-
ing without success in removal, but add
another disfigurement to the tattooing.
Carbolic acid has been applied to
small portions of the affected area at a
time, with the result that the powder and
skin were removed simultaneously and,
according to the physician reporting the
case, with little discomfort to the patient.
Rubbing the affected part with
moistened ammonium chloride once or
twice a day has been reported as a slow
but sure cure.
GUTTA-PERCHA.
Gutta-Percha Substitute.— I.— A de-
coction of birch bark is first prepared,
the external bark by preference, being
evaporated. The thick, black residue
hardens on exposure to the air, and is
said to possess the properties of gutta-
percha without developing any cracks.
It can be mixed with 50 per cent of India
rubber or gutta-percha. The com-
pound is said to be cheap, and a good
non-conductor of electricity. Whether
it possesses all the good qualities of
gutta-percha is not known.
II. — A new method of making gutta-
percha consists of caoutchouc and a rosin
soap, th- latter compounded of 100 parts
of rosin, 100 parts of Carnauba wax, and
40 parts of gas-tar, melted together and
Eassed through a sieve. They are
eated to about 355° to 340° F., and
slowly saponified by stirring with 75
parts of lime water of specific gravity
1.06. The product is next put into a
kneading machine along with an equal
quantity of caoutchouc cuttings, and
worked in this machine at a tempera-
ture of 195° F. or o\er. When suffi-
ciently kneaded, the mass can be rolled
to render it more uniform.
GUTTER CEMENT:
See Cement and Putty.
GYPSUM:
See also Plaster.
Method of Hardening Gypsum and
Rendering it Weather-Proof. — Gypsum
possesses only a moderate degree of
strength even after complete hardening,
GYPSUM— HAIR PREPARATIONS
and pieces are very liable to be broken
off. Various methods have been tried,
with a view to removing this defect and
increasing the hardness of gypsum. Of
these methods, that of Wachsmuth, for
hardening articles made of gypsum and
rendering them weather-proof, deserves
special notice. All methods of hardening
articles made of gypsum have this in
common: the gypsum is first deprived of
its moisture, and then immersed in a
solution of certain salts, such as alum,
green vitriol, etc. Articles treated by
the methods hitherto in vogue certainly
acquire considerable hardness, but are
no more capable of resistance to the
effects of water than crude gypsum.
The object of Wachsmuth's process is
not merely to harden the gypsum, but to
transform it on the surface into insoluble
combinations. The process is as fol-
lows: The article is first put into the re-
quired shape by mechanical means, and
then deprived of its moisture by heating
to 212° to 302° F. It is then plunged
into a heated solution of barium hydrate,
in which it is allowed to remain for a
longer or shorter time, according to its
strength. When this part of the process
is complete, the article is smoothed by
grinding, etc., and then placed in a solu-
tion of about 10 per cent of oxalic acid
in water. In a few hours it is taken out,
dried, and polished. It then possesses
a hardness surpassing that of marble,
and is impervious to the action of water.
Nor does the polish sustain any injury
from contact with water, whereas gypsum
articles hardened by the usual methods
lose their polish after a few minutes'
immersion in water. Articles treated by
the method described have the natural
color of gypsum, but it is possible to
add a color to the gypsum during the
hardening process. This is done by
plunging the gypsum, after it has been
deprived of its moisture, and before the
treatment with the barium solution,
into a solution of a colored metallic
sulphate, such as iron, copper, or chrome
sulphate, or into a solution of some
coloring matter. Pigments soluble in
the barium or oxalic-acid solutions may
also be added to the latter.
Gypsum may be hardened and
rendered insoluble by ammonium borate
as follows: Dissolve boric acid in hot
water and add sufficient ammonia water
to the solution that the borate at first
separated is redissolyed. The gypsum
to be cast is stirred in with this liquid,
and the mass treated in the ordinary
way. Articles already cast are simply
washed with the liquid, which is quickly
absorbed. The articles withstand the
weather as well as though they were of
stone.
GYPSUM FLOWERS:
See Flowers.
GYPSUM, PAINT FOR:
See Paint.
HAIR FOR MOUNTING.
The microscopist or amateur, who
shaves himself, need never resort to the
trouble of embedding and cutting hairs
in the microtome in order to secure very
thin sections of the hair of the face. If
he will first shave himself closely "with
the hair," as the barbers say (i. e., in the
direction of the natural growth of the
hair), and afterwards lightly "against
the hair" (in the opposite direction to
above), he will find in the "scrapings"
a multitude of exceedingly thin sections.
The technique is very simple. The lather
and "scrapings" are put into a saucer or
large watch-glass and carefully washed
witn clean water. This breaks down
and dissolves the lather, leaving the hair
sections lying on the bottom of the glass.
The after-treatment is that usually em-
ployed in mounting similar objects.
Hair Preparations
DANDRUFF CURES.
The treatment of that condition of the
scalp which is productive of dandruff
properly falls to the physician, but un-
fortunately the subject has not been much
studied. One cure is said to be a sulphur
lotion made by placing a little sublimed
sulphur in water, shaking well, then al-
lowing to settle, and washing the head
every morning with the clear liquid.
Sulphur is said to be insoluble in
water; yet a sulphur water made as
above indicated has long been in use as a
hair wash. A little glycerine improves
the preparation, preventing the hair
from becoming harsh by repeated wash-
ings.
The exfoliated particles of skin or
"scales" should be removed only when
entirely detached from the cuticle. They
result from an irritation which is in-
creased by forcible removal, and hence
endeavors to clean the hair from them
by combing or brushing it in such a way
as to scrape the scalp are liable to be
worse than useless. It follows that
gentle handling of the hair is important
when dandruff is present.
HAIR PREPARATIONS
389
I. — Chloral hydrate 2 ounces
Resorcin 1 ounce
Tannin 1 ounce
Alcohol 8 ounces
Glycerine 4 ounces
Rose water to make . 4 pints
II. — White wax 3* drachms
Liquid petrolatum . . 2£ ounces
Rose water 1 ounce
Borax 15 grains
Precipitated sulphur. 3 £ drachms
Pine-Tar Dandruff Shampoo.—
Pine tar 4 parts
Linseed oil 40 parts
Heat these to 140° F.; make solution
of potassa, U. S. P., 10 parts, and water,
45 parts; add alcohol, 5 parts, and
gradually add to the heated oils, stirring
constantly. Continue the heat until
saponified thoroughly; and make up
with water to 128 parts. When almost
cool, add ol. lavender, ol. orange, and ol.
bergamot, of each 2 parts.
HAIR-CURLING LIQUIDS.
It is impossible to render straight hair
curly without the aid of the iron or paper
and other curlers. But it is possible, on
the other hand, to make artificial curls
more durable and proof against outside
influences, such as especially dampness
of the air. Below are trustworthy re-
cipes:
I II
Water 70 80
Spirit of wine 30 20
Borax 2
Tincture of benzoin . . • — 3
Perfume ad. lib. ad. lib.
HAIR DRESSINGS AND WASHES:
Dressings for the Hair. —
I. — Oil of wintergreen . 20 drops
Oil of almond, es-
sential 35 drops
Oil of rose, ethereal 1 drop
Oil of violets 30 drops
Tincture of canthar-
ides 50 drops
Almond oil 2,000 drops
Mix.
Hair Embrocation. —
II. — Almond oil, sweet . 280 parts
Spirit of sal am-
moniac 280 parts
Spirit of rosemary. . 840 parts
Honey water 840 parts
Mix. Rub the scalp with it every
morning by means of a sponge.
Hair Restorer.—
III. — Tincture of can-
tharides 7 pa. is
Gall tincture 7 parts
Musk essence 1 part
Carmine 0.5 part
Rectified spirit of
wine 28 parts
Rose water 140 parts
To be used at night.
Rosemary Water. —
IV. — Rosemary oi: 1^ parts
Rectified spirit of
wine. 7 parts
Magnesia 7 parts
Distilled water 1,000 parts
Mix the oil with the spirit of wine and
rub up with the magnesia in a mortar;
gradually add the water and finally filter.
Foamy Scalp Wash. — Mix 2 parts of
soap spirit, 1 part of borax-glycerine
(1+2), 6 parts of barium, and 7 parts
of orange-flower water.
Lanolin Hair Wash. — Extract 4 parts
quillaia bark with 36 parts water for
several days, mix the percolate with 4
parts alcohol, and filter after having
settled. Agitate 40 parts of the filtraie
at a temperature at which wool grease
becomes liquid, with 12 parts anhydrous
lanolin, and fill up with water to which 15
per cent spirit of wine has been added,
to 300 parts. Admixture, such as cin-
chona extract, Peru balsam, quinine,
tincture of cantharides, bay-oil, am-
monium carbonate, menthol, etc., may
be made. The result is a yellowish-
white, milky liquid, with a cream-like fat
layer floating on the top, which is finely
distributed by agitating.
Birch Water. — Birch water, which has
many cosmetic applications, especially
as a hair wash or an ingredient in hair
washes, may be prepared as follows:
Alcohol, 96 per cent . .3,500 parts
Water 700 parts
Potash soap 200 parts
Glycerine 150 parts
Oil of birch buds 50 parts
Essence of spring
flowers 100 parts
Chlorophyll, q. s. to color.
Mix the water with 700 parts of the
alcohol, and in the mixture dissolve the
soap. Add the essence of spring flowers
and birch oil to the remainder of the
alcohol, mix well, and to the mixture
add, little by little, and with constant
agitation, the soap mixture. Finally
390
HAIR PREPARATIONS
add the glycerine, mix thoroughly, and
set aside for 8 days, filter and color the
filtrate with chlorophyll, to which add a
little tincture of 'saffron. To use, add an
equal volume of water to produce a
lather.
Petroleum Hair Washes. — I. — Deodor-
ized pale petroleum, 10 parts; citronella
oil, 10 parts; castor oil, 5 parts; spirit of
wine, 90 per cent, 50 parts; water, 75
parts.
II. — Quinine sulphate, 10 parts; acetic
acid, 4 parts; tincture of cantharides, 30
parts; tincture of quinine, 3 parts; spirit
of rosemary, 60 parts; balm water, 90
parts; barium, 120 parts; spirit of wine,
150 parts; water, 1,000 parts.
III. — Very pure petroleum, 1 part;
almond oil, 2 parts.
Brilliantine. — I. — Olive oil, 4 parts:
glycerine, 3 parts; alcohol, 3 parts; scent
as desired. Shake before use.
II. — Castor oil, 1 part; alcohol, 2
parts; saffron to dye yellow. Scent as
desired.
III. — Lard, 7 parts; spermaceti, 7
parts; almond oil, 7 parts; white wax,
1 part.
A Cheap Hair Oil. — I. — Sesame oil or
sunflower oil, 1,000 parts; lavender oil,
15 parts; bergamot oil, 10 parts; and
geranium oil, 5 parts.
II. — Sesame oil or sunflower oil, 1,000
parts; lavender oil, 12 parts; lemon oil,
20 parts; rosemary oil, 5 parts; and
geranium oil, 2 parts.
HAIR DYES.
There is no hair dye which produces a
durable coloration; the color becomes
gradually weaker in the course of time.
Here are some typical formulas in which
a mordant is employed:
I. — Nitrate of silver J ounce
Distilled water 3 ounces
Mordant:
Sulphuret of potas-
sium | ounce
Distilled water 3 ounces
II.—
(a) Nitrate of silver (crys-
tal) 1$ ounces
Distilled water 12 ounces
Ammonia water suf-
ficient to make a
clear solution.
Dissolve the nitrate of silver in the
water and add the ammonia water until
the precipitate is redissolved.
(6) Pyrogallic acid 2 drachms
Gallic acid 2 drachms
Cologne water 2 ounces
Distilled water 4 ounces
III. — Nitrate of silver 20 grains
Sulphate of copper. . 2 grains
Ammonia, quantity sufficient.
Dissolve the salts in ^ ounce of water
and add ammonia until the precipitate
which is formed is redissolved. Then
make up to 1 ounce with water. Apply
to the hair with a brush. This solution
slowly gives a brown shade. For darker
shades, apply a second solution, com-
posed of :
IV. — Yellow sulphide am-
monium 2 drachms
Solution of ammonia 1 drachm
Distilled water 1 ounce
Black Hair Dye without Silver.—
V.— Pyrogallic acid .... 3.5 parts
Citric acid 0.3 parts
Boro-glycerine. ... 11 parts
Water 100 parts
If the dye does not impart the desired
intensity of color, the amount of pyro-
gallic acid may be increased. The wash
is applied evenings, followed in the morn-
ing by a weak ammoniacal wash.
One Bottle Preparation. —
VI. — Nitrate of copper .. 360 grains
Nitrate of silver. . . 7 ounces
Distilled water. ... 60 ounces
Water of ammonia, a sufficiency.
Dissolve the salts in the water and add
the water of ammonia carefully until the
precipitate is all redissolved. This solu-
tion, properly applied, is said to produce
a very black color; a lighter shade is
secured by diluting the solution. Cop-
per sulphate may be used instead of the
nitrate.
Brown Hair Dyes. — A large excess of
ammonia tends to produce a brownish
dye. Various shades of brown may be
produced by increasing the amount of
water in the silver solution. It should
be remembered that the hair must, pre-
viously to treatment, be washed with warm
water containing sodium carbonate, well
rinsed with clear water, and dried.
I. — Silver nitrate 480 grains
Copper nitrate ... 90 grains
Distilled water. . . 8 fluidounces
Ammonia water, sufficient.
Dissolve the two salts in the distilled
water and add the ammonia water until
the liquid becomes a clear fluid.
In using apply to the hair carefully
HAIR PREPARATIONS
S91
with a tooth-brush, after thoroughly
cleansing the hair, and expose the latter
to the rays of the sun.
II. — Silver nitrate 30 parts
Copper sulphate,
crystals 20 parts
Citric acid 20 parts
Distilled water 950 parts
Ammonia water,
quantity sufficient
to dissolve the pre-
cipitate first formed.
Various shades of brown may be pro-
duced by properly diluting the solution
before it be applied.
Bismuth subni-
trate 200 grains
Water 2 fluidounces
Nitric acid, suffi-
cient to dissolve,
or about 420 grains
Use heat to effect solution. Also:
Tartaric acid .... 150 grains
Sodium bicarbon-
ate 168 grains
Water 32 fluidounces
When effervescence of the latter has
ceased, mix the cold liquids by pouring
the latter into the former with constant
stirring. Allow the precipitate to sub-
side; transfer it to a filter or strainer, and
wash with water until free from the
sodium nitrate formed.
Chestnut Hair Dye.—
Bismuth nitrate. . . 230 grains
Tartaric acid 75 grains
Water 100 minims
Dissolve the acid in the water, and to
the solution add the bismuth nitrate and
stir until dissolved. Pour the resulting
solution into 1 pint of water and collect
the magma on a filter. Remove all traces
of acid from the magma by repeated
washings with water; then dissolve it in:
Ammonia water. . 2 fluidrachms
And add:
Glycerine 20 minims
Sodium hyposul-
phite 75 grains
Water, enough to
make 4 fluidounces.
HAIR RESTORERS AND TONICS:
Falling of the Hair. — After the scalp
has been thoroughly cleansed by the
shampoo, the following formula is to be
used:
Salicylic acid 1 part
Precipitate of sulphur. 2 J parts
Rose water 25 parts
The patient is directed to part the hair,
and then to rub in a small portion of the
ointment along the part, working it well
into the scalp. Then another part is
made parallel to the first, and more oint-
ment rubbed in. Thus a series of first,
longitudinal, and then transverse parts
are made, until the whole scalp has Ibeen
well anointed. Done in this way, it is
not necessary to smear up the whole
shaft of the hair, but only to reach the
hair roots and the sebaceous glands,
where the trouble is located. This proc-
ess is thoroughly performed for six suc-
cessive nights, and the seventh night an-
other shampoo is taken. The eighth
night the inunctions are commenced
again, and this is continued for six weeks.
In almost every case the production of
dandruff is checked completely after six
weeks' treatment, and the hair, which
may have been falling out rapidly before,
begins to take firmer root. To be sure,
many hairs which are on the point of
falling when treatment is begun will fall
anyway, and it may even seem for a time
as if the treatment were increasing the
hair-fall, on account of the mechanical
dislodgment of such hairs, but this need
never alarm one.
After six weeks of such treatment the
shampoo may be taken less frequently.
Next to dandruff, perhaps, the most
common cause of early loss of hair is
heredity. In some families all of the
male members, or all who resemble one
particular ancestor, lose their hair early.
Dark-haired families and races, as a
rule, become bald earlier than those with
light hair. At first thought it would
seem as though nothing could be done to
prevent premature baldness when hered-
ity is the cause, but this is a mistake.
Careful hygiene of the scalp will often
counterbalance hereditary predisposition
for a number of years, and even after the
hair has actually begun to fall proper
stimulation will, to a certain extent, and
for a limited time, often restore to the hair
its pristine thickness and strength. Any
of the rubefacients may be prescribed
for this purpose for daily use, such as
croton oil, 1J per cent; tincture of can-
tharides, 15 per cent; oil of cinnamon, 40
per cent; tincture of capsicum, 15 per
cent; oil of mustard, 1 per cent; or any
one of a dozen others. Tincture of cap-
sicum is one of the best, and for a routine
prescription the following has served
well:
Resorcin 5 parts
Tincture capsicum. . 15 parts
Castor oil 10 parts
Alcohol 100 parts
Oil of roses, sufficient.
392
HAIR PREPARATIONS
It is to be recommended that the stim-
ulant be changed from time to time, so
as not to rely on any one to the exclusion
of others. Jaborandi, oxygen gas, qui-
nine, and other agents have enjoyed a
great reputation as hair-producers for a
time, and have then taken their proper
position as aids, but not specifics, in re-
storing the hair.
It is well known that after many
fevers, especially those accompanied by
great depression, such as pneumonia,
typhoid, puerperal, or scarlet fever, the
hair is liable to fall out. This is brought
about in a variety of ways: In scarlatina,
the hair papilla shares in the general
desquamation; in typhoid and the other
fevers the baldness may be the result
either of the excessive seborrhea, which
often accompanies these diseases, or
may be caused by the general lowering of
nutrition of the body. Unless the hair-
fall be accompanied by considerable
dandruff (in which case the above-men-
tioned treatment should be vigorously
employed), the ordinary hygiene of the
scalp will result in a restoration of the
hair in most cases, but the employment
of moderate local stimulation, with the
use of good general tonics, will hasten
this end. It seems unwise to cut the
hair of women short in these cases, be-
cause the baldness is practically never
complete, and a certain proportion of
the hairs will retain firm root. These
may be augmented by a switch made of
the hair which has fallen out, until the
new hair shall have grown long enough
to do up well. In this way all of that
oftentimes most annoying short-hair
period is avoided.
For Falling Hair. —
I. — Hydrochloric acid 75 parts
Alcohol 2,250 parts
The lotion is to be applied to the scalp
every evening at bedtime.
II. — Tincture of cinchona 1 part
Tincture of rose-
mary 1 part
Tincture of jabor-
andi 1 part
Castor oil 2 parts
Rum 10 parts
Mix.
Jaborandi Scalp Waters for Increasing
the Growth of Hair. — First prepare a
Jaborandi tincture from Jaborandi leaves,
200 parts; spirit, 95 per cent, 700 parts;
and water, 300 parts. After digesting
for a week, squeeze out the leaves and
filter the liquid. The hair wash is now
prepared as follows:
I. — Jaborandi tincture, 1,000 parts:
spirit, 95 per cent, 700 parts; water, 300
parts; glycerine, 150 parts; scent essence,
100 parts; color with sugar color.
II. — Jaborandi tincture, 1,000 parts:
spirit, 95 per cent, 1,500 parts; quinine
tannate, 4 parts; Peru balsam, 20 parts;
essence heliotrope, 50 parts. Dissolve
the quinine and the Peru balsam in the
spirit and then add the Jaborandi tinc-
ture and the heliotrope essence. Filter
after a week. Rub into the scalp twice
a week before retiring.
POMADES:
I. — Cinchona Pomade.—
Ox marrow
Lard
Sweet almond oil. ...
Peru balsam
Quinine sulphate. . .
Clover oil
Rose essence
II. — Cantharides Pomade.
Ox marrow
White wax
Mace oil
Clove oil
Rose essence or ge-
ranium oil
Tincture of canthar-
ides. .
100 drachms
70 drachms
17 drachms
1 drachm
1 drachm
2 drachms
25 drops
300 drachms
30 drachms
1 drachm
1 drachm
25 drops
8 drachms
Pinaud Eau de Quinine. — The com-
position of this nostrum is not known.
Dr. Tsheppe failed to find in it any con-
stituent of cinchona bark. The absence
of quinine from the mixture probably
would not hurt it, as the "tonic" effect of
quinine on the hair is generally regarded
as a myth.
On the other hand, it has been stated
that this preparation contains:
Quinine sulphate. . . 2 parts
Tincture of krameria 4 parts
Tincture of canthar-
ides 2 parts
Spirit of lavender. . . 10 parts
Glycerine 15 parts
Alcohol 100 parts
SHAMPOOS :
A Hair Shampoo is usually a tincture
of odorless soft soap. It is mostly per-
fumed with lavender and colored with
green aniline. Prepared the same as tr.
sapon. virid. (U. S. P.), using an inexpen-
sive soft soap, that is a good foam pio-
ducer. Directions: Wet the hair well in
warm water and rub in a few teaspoon-
fuls of the following formulas. No. I is
considered the best:
HAIR PREPARATIONS— HAT WATERPROOFING 393
I II III IV
Parts used
Cottonseed oil — 24 26 14
Linseed oil. . . 20 — — —
Malaga olive oil .... 20 — — —
Caustic potash 9£ 8 6 3
Alcohol 5 4i 5 2
Water 30 26 34 16£
Warm the mixed oils on a large water
bath, then the potash and water in an-
other vessel, heating both to 158° F., and
adding the latter hot solution to the hot
oil while stirring briskly. Now add and
thoroughly mix the alcohol. Stop stir-
ring, keeping the heat at 158° F., until
the mass becomes clear and a small quan-
tity dissolves in boiling water without
globules of oil separating. If stirred
after the alcohol has been mixed the
soap will be opaque. Set aside for a few
days in a warm place before using to
make liquid shampoo.
Liquid Shampoos. —
I.— Fluid extract of
soap-bark 10 parts
Glycerine 5 parts
Cologne water 10 parts
Alcohol 20 parts
Rose water 30 parts
II.— Soft soap 24 parts
Potassium carbon-
ate 5 parts
Alcohol 48 parts
Water enough to
make 400 parts
Shampoo Pastes. —
I. — White castile soap,
in shavings .... 2 ounces
Ammonia water. . 2 fluidounces
Bay rum, or co-
logne water. ... 1 fluidounce
Glycerine 1 fluidounce
Water 12 fluidounces
Dissolve the soap in the water by
means of heat; when nearly cold stir in
the other ingredients.
II. — Castile soap, white. 4 ounces
Potassium carbon-
ate 1 ounce
Water 6 fluidounces
Glycerine 2 fluidounces
Oil of lavender
flowers 5 drops
Oil of bergamot. . . 10 drops
To the water add the soap, in shav-
ings, and the potassium carbonate, and
heat on a water bath until thoroughly
softened; add the glycerine and oils. If
necessary to reduce to proper consist-
ency,, more water may be added.
Egg Shampoo. —
Whites of 2 eggs
Water 5 fluidounces
Water of ammonia. 3 fluidounces
Cologne water £ fluidounce
Alcohol 4 fluidounces
Beat the egg whites to a froth, and add
the other ingredients in the order in
which they are named, with a thorough
mixing after each addition.
Imitation Egg Shampoos. — Many of
the egg shampoos are so called from
their appearance. They usually con-
tain no egg and are merely preparations
of perfumed soft soap. Here are some
formulas:
I. — White castile soap. ... 4 ounces
Powdered curd soap. . 2 ounces
Potassium carbonate. 1 ounce
Honey 1 ounce
Make a homogeneous paste by heating
with water.
II. — Melt 3£ pounds of lard over a
salt-water bath and run into it a lye
formed by dissolving 8 ounces of caustic
potassa in 1^ pints of water. Stir well
until saponification is effected and per-
fume as desired. •
HAIR REMOVERS:
See Depilatories.
HAMBURG BITTERS:
See Wines and Liquors.
HAMMER HARDENING:
See Steel.
HAND CREAMS:
See Cosmetics.
HANDS, TO REMOVE STAINS FROM
THE:
See Cleaning Preparations.
HARE-LIP OPERATION, ANTISEPTIC
PASTE FpR:
See Antiseptics.
HARNESS DRESSINGS AND PREPA-
RATIONS:
See Leather Dressings.
HARNESS WAX:
See Waxes.
HAT -CLEANING COMPOUNDS:
See Cleaning Compounds.
HAT WATERPROOFING:
See Waterproofing.
394
HATS— HERBARIUM SPECIMENS
HATS:
Dyeing Straw Hats. — The plan gen-
erally followed is that of coating the hats
with a solution of varnish in which a
suitable aniline dye has dissolved. The
following preparations are in use:
I. — For dark varnishes prepare a
basis consisting of orange shellac, 900
parts; sandarac, 225 parts; Manila copal,
225 parts; castor oil, 55 parts; and wood-
spirit, 9,000 parts. To color, add to the
foregoing amount alcohol-soluble, coal-
tar dyes as follows: Black, 55 parts of
soluble ivory-black (modified by blue or
green). Olive-brown, 15 parts of bril-
liant-green, 55 parts of Bismarck brown
R, 8 parts of spirit blue. Olive-green, 28
parts of brilliant-green, 28 parts of Bis-
marck-brown R. Walnut, 55 parts of
Bismarck-brown R, 15 parts of nigrosin.
Mahogany, 28 parts of Bismarck-brown
R, which may be deepened by a little
nigrosin.
II. — For light colors prepare a var-
nish as follows: Sandarac, 1,350 parts;
elemi, 450 parts; rosin, 450 parts; castor
oil, 110 parts; wood-spirit, 9,000 parts.
For this amount use dyes as follows:
Gold, 55 parts of chrysoidin, 55 parts of
aniline-yellow. Light green, 55 parts of
brilliant-green, 7 parts of aniline-yellow.
Blue, 55 parts of spirit blue. Deep blue,
55 parts of spirit blue, 55 parts of in-
dulin. Violet, 28 parts of methyl-violet,
3 B. Crimson, 55 parts of safranin. Chest-
nut, 55 parts of safranin, 15 parts of in-
dulin.
III. — Shellac 4 ounces
Sandarac 1 ounce
Gum thus 1 ounce
Methyl spirit 1 pint
In this dissolve aniline dyes of the
requisite color, and apply. For white
straw, white shellac must be used.
To Extract Shellac from Fur Hats.—
Use the common solvents, as carbon
bisulphide, benzine, wood alcohol, tur-
pentine, and so forth, reclaiming the
spirit and shellac by a suitable still.
HEADACHE REMEDIES:
See also Pain Killers.
Headache Cologne. — As a mitigant
of headache, cologne water of the farina
type is refreshing.
Oil of neroli 6 drachms
Oil of rosemary 3 drachms
Oil of bergamot 3 drachms
Oil of cedrat 7 drachms
Oil of orange peel .... 7 drachms
Deodorized alcohol . . 1 gallon
To secure a satisfactory product from
the foregoing formula it is necessary to
look carefully to the quality of the oils.
Oil of cedrat is prone to change, and oil
of orange peel, if exposed to the atmos-
phere for a short time, becomes worth-
less, and will spoil the other materials.
A delightful combination of the acetic
odor with that of cologne water may be
had by adding to a pint of the foregoing,
2 drachms of glacial acetic acid. The
odor so produced may be more grateful
to some invalids than the neroli and
lemon bouquet.
Still another striking variation of the
cologne odor, suitable for the use in-
dicated, may be made by adding to a
pint of cologne water an ounce of am-
moniated alcohol.
Liquid Headache Remedies. —
Acetanilid 60 grains
Alcohol 4 fluidrachms
Ammonium carbon-
ate 30 grains
Water 2 fluidrachms
Simple elixir to
make 2 fluidounces
Dissolve the acetanilid in the alcohol,
the ammonium carbonate in the water,
mix each solution with a portion of the
simple elixir, and mix the whole together.
HEAT -INDICATING PAINT:
See Paint.
HEAT INSULATION:
See Insulation.
HEAT, PRICKLY:
See Household Formulas.
HEAT-RESISTANT LACQUERS:
See Lacquers.
HEAVES:
See Veterinary Formulas.
HEDGE MUSTARD.
Hedge mustard (erysimum) was at
one time a popular remedy in France for
hoarseness, and is still used in country
districts, but is not often prescribed.
Liquid ammonia 10 drops
Syrup of erysimum 1J ounces
Infusion of lime flowers. 3 ounces
To be taken at one dose.
HERBARIUM SPECIMENS, MOUNT-
ING.
A matter of first importance, after
drying the herbarium specimens, is to
poison them, to prevent the attacks of
insects. This is done by brushing them
over on both sides, using a camel's-hair
pencil, with a solution of 2 grains of
HERBARIUM SPECIMENS— HECTOGRAPH PADS 395
corrosive sublimate to an ounce of me-
thylated spirit. In tropical climates
the solution is generally used of twice
this strength. There are several methods
of mounting them. Leaves with a waxy
surface and coriaceous texture are best
stitched through the middle after they
have been fastened on with an adhesive
mixture. Twigs of leguminous trees
will often throw off their leaflets in dry-
ing. This may, in some measure, be
prevented by dipping them in boiling
water before drying, or if the leaves are
not very rigid, by using strong pressure
at first, without the use of hot water. If
the specimens have to be frequently
handled, the most satisfactory prepara-
tion is Lepage's fish glue, but a mixture
of glue and paste, with carbolic acid
added, is used in some large herbaria.
The disadvantage of using glue, gum, or
paste is that it is necessary to have some
of the leaves turned over so as to show
the under surface of the leaf, and some
of the flowers and seeds placed loose in
envelopes on the same sheet for purposes
of comparison or microscopic exami-
nation. Another plan is to use narrow
slips of gummed stiff but thin paper, such
as very thin parchment paper. These
strips are either gummed over the stems,
etc., and pinched in round the stem with
forceps, or passed through slits made
in the sheet and fastened at the back.
If the specimens are mounted on cards
and protected in glass frames, stitching
in the principal parts with gray thread
produces a very satisfactory appearance.
Hectograph Pads and Inks
The hectograph is a gelatin pad used
for duplicating letters, etc., by transfer.
The pad should have a tough elastic
consistency, similar to that of a printer's
roller. The letter or sketch to be dupli-
cated is written or traced on a sheet of
heavy paper with an aniline ink (which
has great tinctorial qualities). When
dry this is laid, inked side down, on
the pad and subjected to moderate and
uniform pressure for a few minutes. It
may then be removed, when a copy of
the original will be found on the pad
which has absorbed a large quantity of
the ink. The blank sheets are laid one
by one on the pad, subjected to moderate
pressure over the whole surface with a
wooden or rubber roller, or with the
hand, and lifted off by taking hold of
the corners and stripping them gently
with an even movement. If this is done
too quickly the composition may be torn.
Each succeeding copy thus made will
be a little fainter than its predecessor.
From 40 to 60 legible copies may be
made. When the operation is finished
the surface of the pad should be gone
over gently with a wet sponge and the
remaining ink soaked out. The super-
fluous moisture is then carefully wiped
off, when the pad will be ready for
another operation.
The pad or hectograph is essentially
a mixture of glue (gelatin) and glycerine.
This mixture has the property of remain-
ing soft yet firm for a long time and of
absorbing and holding certain coloring
matters in such a way as to give them
up slowly or in layers, so to speak, on
pressure.
Such a pad may be made by melting
together 1 part of glue, 2 parts of water
and 4 parts of glycerine (all by weight,
of course), evaporating some of the water
and tempering the mixture with more
glue or glycerine if the season or climate
require. The mass when of proper con-
sistency, which can be ascertained by
cooling a small portion, is poured into a
shallow pan and allowed to set. Clean
glue must be used or the mixture strained;
and air bubbles should be removed by
skimming the surface with a piece of
card-board or similar appliance.
Variations of this formula have been
proposed, some of which are appended:
I. — Glycerine 12 ounces
Gelatin 2 ounces
Water 7t ounces
Sugar 2 ounces
II. — Water 10 ounces
Dextrin 1^ ounces
Sugar 2 ounces
Gelatin 15 ounces
Glycerine 15 ounces
Zinc oxide 1J ounces
III. — Gelatin 10 ounces
Water 40 ounces
Glycerine 120 ounces
Barium sulphate . . 8 ounces
The Tokacs patent composition, be-
sides the usual ingredients, such as gela-
tin, glycerine, sugar, and#gum, contains
soap, and can therefore be washed off
much easier for new use. The smooth-
ness of the surface is also increased,
without showing more sticking capacity
with the first impressions.
Hectograph Inks (see also Inks). — The
writing to be copied by means of the
hectograph is done on good paper with
an aniline ink. Formulas for suitable
ones are appended. It is said that more
copies can be obtained from writing with
the purple ink than with other kinds:
396
HECTOGRAPH INKS— HORN
Purple.—
I. — Methyl violet 2 parts
Alcohol 2 parts
Sugar 1 part
Glycerine 4 parts
Water 24 parts
Dissolve the violet in the alcohol
mixed with the glycerine; dissolve the
sugar in the water; mix both solutions.
II. — A good purple hectograph ink is
made as follows: Dissolve 1 part methyl
violet in 8 parts of water and .add 1 part
of glycerine. Gently warm the solution
for an hour, and add, when cool, J part
alcohol. Or take methyl violet, 1 part;
water, 7 parts; and glycerine, 2 parts.
Black.—
Methyl violet 10 parts
Nigrosin 20 parts
Glycerine 30 parts
Gum arabic 5 parts
Alcohol 60 parts
Blue.—
Resorcin blue M 10 parts
Dilute acetic acid .... 1 part
Water. 85 parts
Glycerine 4 parts
Alcohol 10 parts
Dissolve by heat.
Red.—
Fuchsin 10 parts
Alcohol 10 parts
Glycerine 10 parts
Water 50 parts
Green. —
Aniline green, water
soluble 15 parts
Glycerine 10 parts
Water 50 parts
Alcohol 10 parts
Repairing Hectographs. — Instead of
remelting the hectograph composition,
which is not always successful, it is
recommended to pour alcohol over the
surface of the cleaned mass and to light
it. After solidifying, the surface will
be again ready for use.
HEMORRHOIDS:
See Piles.
HERB VINEGAR:
See Vinegar.
HIDES:
See Leather.
HIDE BOUND:
See Veterinary Formulas.
HIDE-CLEANING PROCESSES:
See Cleaning Preparations and Meth-
ods.
HOARHOUND CANDY:
See Confectionery.
HOARSENESS, CREAM BON-BONS
FOR:
See Confectionery.
HOARSENESS, REMEDY FOR:
See Cough and Cold Mixtures and Tur-
pentine.
HONEY:
Honey Clarifier.— For 3,000 parts of
fresh honey, take 875 parts of water, 150
parts of washed, dried, and pulverized
charcoal, 70 parts of powdered chalk,
and the whites of 3 eggs beaten in 90
parts of water. Put the honey and
the chalk in a vessel capable of contain-
ing £ more than the mixture and boil for
3 minutes; then introduce the charcoal
and stir up the whole. Add the whites
of the eggs while continuing to stir, and
boil again for 3 minutes. Take from the
fire, and after allowing the liquid to cool
for a quarter of an hour, filter, and to
secure a perfectly clear liquid refilter on
flannel.
Detecting Dyed Honey.— For the de-
tection of artificial yellow dyestuff in
honey, treat the aqueous yellow solution
with hydrochloric acid, as well as with
ammonia; also extract the dyestuff from
the acid or ammoniacal solution by sol-
vents, such as alcohol or ether, or con-
duct the Arata wool test in the following
manner: Dissolve 10 parts of honey in
50 parts of water, mix with 10 parts of a
10 per cent potassium-bisulphate solu-
tion and boil the woolen thread in this
liquid for 10 minutes.
HONEY WINE:
See Mead.
HONING:
See Whetstones.
HOOF SORES:
See Veterinary Formulas.
HOP BITTER BEER:
See Beverages.
HOP SYRUP:
See Essences and Extracts.
HORN:
Artificial Horn. — To prepare artificial
horn from compounds of nitro-cellulose
and casein, by hardening them and re-
moving their odor of camphor, the com-
pounds are steeped in formaldehyde
from several hours to as many days,
HORN— HOUSEHOLD FORMULAS
397
according to the thickness of the object
treated. When the formaldehyde has
penetrated through the mass and dis-
solved the camphor, the object is taken
out of the liquid and dried. Both the
camphor extracted and the formalde-
hyde used can be recovered by distilla-
tion, and used over again, thus cheapen-
ing the operation.
Dehorners or Horn Destroyers. — The
following are recommended by the
Board of Agriculture of Great Britain:
Clip the hair from the top of the horn
when the calf is from 2 to 5 days old.
Slightly moisten the end of a stick of
caustic potash with water or saliva (or
moisten the top of the horn bud) and
rub the tip of each horn firmly with the
potash for about a quarter of a minute,
or until a slight impression has been
made on the center of the horn. The
horns should be treated in this way from
2 to 4 times at intervals of 5 minutes. If,
during the interval of 5 minutes after one
or more applications, a little blood ap-
pears in the center of the horn, it will
then only be necessary to give another
very slight rubbing with the potash.
The following directions should be
carefully observed: The operation is
best performed when the calf is under 5
days old, and should not be attempted
after the ninth day. When not in use
the caustic potash should be kept in a
stoppered glass bottle in a dry place, as it
rapidly deteriorates when exposed to the
air. One man should hold the calf while
an assistant uses the caustic. Roll a
piece of tin foil or brown paper round
the end of the stick of caustic potash,
which is held by the fingers, so as not to
injure the hand of the operator. Do
not moisten the stick too much, or the
caustic may spread to the skin around
the horn and destroy the flesh. For the
same reason keep the calf from getting
wet for some days after the operation.
Be careful to rub on the center of the
horn and not around the side of it.
Staining Horns. — A brown stain is
given to horns by covering them first
with an aqueous solution of potassium
ferrocyanide, drying them, and then
treating with a hot dilute solution of
copper sulphate. A black stain can be
produced in the following manner:
After having finely sandpapered the
horns, dissolve 50 to 60 grains of nitrate
of silver in 1 ounce of distilled water. It
will be colorless. Dip a small brush in,
and paint the horns where they are to be
black. When dry, put them where the
sun can shine on them, and you will find
that they will turn jet black, and may
then be polished.
To Soften Horn. — Lay the horn for 10
days in a solution of water, 1 part; nitric
acid, 3 parts; wood vinegar, 2 parts;
tannin, 5 parts; tartar, 2 parts; and zinc
vitriol, 2.5 parts.
HORN BLEACHES:
See Bone and Ivory.
HORN, UNITING GLASS WITH:
See Adhesives.
HORSES, THE TREATMENT OF THEIR
DISEASES:
See Veterinary Formulas.
Household Formulas
How to Lay Galvanized Iron Roofing.
— The use of galvanized iron for general
roofing work has increased greatly dur-
ing the past few years. It has many
features which commend it as a roofing
material, but difficulties have been ex-
perienced by beginners as to the proper
method of applying it to the roof. The
weight of material used is rather heavy
to permit of double seaming, but a meth-
od has been evolved that is satisfac-
tory. Galvanized iron roofing can be
put on at low cost, so as to be water-tight
and free from buckling at the joints.
The method does away with double
seaming, and is considered more suitable
than the latter for roofing purposes
wherever it can be laid on a roof steeper
than 1 to 12.
Galvanized iron of No. 28 and heavier
gauges is used, the sheets being lap-
seamed and soldered together in strips
in the shop the proper length to apply to
the roof. After the sheets are fastened
together a 1^-inch edge is turned up the
entire length of one side of the sheet, as
indicated in Fig. 1. This operation is
FIG. 1
FIG. 3
FIG. 2
CLEAT
S./
FIG. 4
CLEAT
FIG. 5 FIG. 6
done with tongs having gauge pins set
at the proper point. The second oper-
398
HOUSEHOLD FORMULAS
ation consists in turning a strip \ inch
wide toward the sheet, as shown in Fig. 2.
This sheet is then laid on the roof, and a
cleat about 8 inches long and 1 inch
wide, made of galvanized iron, is nailed
to the roof close to the sheet and bent
over it, as shown in Fig. 3.
A second sheet having 1| inches
turned up is now brought against the
first sheet and bent over both sheet and
cleat, as shown in Fig. 4. The cleat is
then bent backward over the second
sheet and cut off close to the roof, as in
Fig. 5, after which the seams are drawn
together by double seaming tools, as the
occasion demands, and slightly ham-
mered with a wooden mallet. The fin-
ished seam is shown in Fig. 6. It will
be seen that the second sheet of galvan-
ized iron, cut \ inch longer than the first,
laps over the former, making a sort of
bead which prevents water from driving
in. Cleats hold both sheets firmly to the
roof and are nailed about 12 inches
apart. Roofs of this character, when
laid with No. 28 gauge iron, cost very
little more than the cheaper grades of
tin, and do not have to be painted.
Applications for Prickly Heat. — Many
applications for this extremely annoying
form of urticaria have been suggested
and their efficacy strongly urged by the
various correspondents of the medical
press who propose them, but none of
them seem to be generally efficacious.
Thus, sodium bicarbonate in strong,
aqueous solution, has long been a domes-
tic remedy in general use, but it fails
probably as often as it succeeds. A
weak solution of copper sulphate has
also been highly extolled, only to disap-
point a very large proportion of those
who resort to it. And so we might go
on citing remedies which may sometimes
give relief, but fail in the large proportion
of cases. In this trouble, as in almost
every other, the idiosyncrasies of the
patient play a great part in the effects pro-
duced by any remedy. It is caused,
primarily by congestion of the capillary
vessels of the skin, and anything that
tends to relieve this congestion will give
relief, at least temporarily. Among the
newer suggestions are the following:
Alcohol 333 parts
Ether 333 parts
Chloroform 333 parts
Menthol 1 part
Mix. Directions: Apply occasion-
ally with a sponge.
Among those things which at least
assist one in bearing the affliction is fre-
quent change of underwear. The under-
garments worn during the day should
never be worn at night. Scratching or
rubbing should be avoided where pos-
sible. Avoid stimulating food and
drinks, especially alcohol, and by all
means keep the bowels in a soluble con-
dition.
Cleaning and Polishing Linoleum. —
Wash the linoleum with a mixture of
equal parts of milk and water, wipe dry,
and rub in the following mixture by
means of a cloth rag: Yellow wax, 5
parts; turpentine oil, 11 parts; varnish,
5 parts. As a glazing agent, a solution
of a little yellow wax in turpentine oil is
also recommended. Other polishing
agents are:
I. — Palm oil, 1 part; paraffine, 18; ker-
osene, 4.
II. — Yellow wax, 1 part; carnauba
wax, 2; turpentine oil, 10; benzine, 5.
Lavatory Deodorant. —
Sodium bicarbonate. . 5 ounces
Alum 5 1 ounces
Potassium bromide.. . 4 ounces
Hydrochloric acid enough.
Water enough to make 4 pints.
To 3 parts of boiling water add the
alum and then the bicarbonate. Intro-
duce enough hydrochloric acid to dis-
solve the precipitate of aluminum hy-
drate which forms and then add the
potassium bromide. Add enough water
to bring the measure of the finished prod-
uct up to 4 pints.
Removal of Odors from Wooden
Boxes, Chests, Drawers, etc. — This is
done by varnishing them with a solution
of shellac, after the following manner:
Make a solution of shellac, 1,000 parts;
alcohol, 90 per cent to 95 per cent, 1,000
parts; boric acid, 50 parts; castor oil, 50
parts. The shellac is first dissolved in
the alcohol and the acid and oil added
afterwards. For the first coating use 1
part of the solution cut with from 1 to 2
parts of alcohol, according to the porosity
of the wood — the more porous the less
necessity for cutting. When the first
coat is absorbed and dried in, repeat the
application, if the wood is very porous,
with the diluted shellac, but if of hard,
dense wood, the final coating may be
now put on, using the solution without
addition of alcohol. If desired, the solu-
tion may be colored with any of the
alcohol soluble aniline colors. The shel
lac solution, by the way, may be applied
to the outside of chests, etc., and finished
off after the fashion of "French polish."
HOUSEHOLD FORMULAS
899
When used this way, a prior application
of 2 coats of linseed oil is advisable.
Stencil Marking Ink that will Wash
Out. — Triturate together 1 part of fine
soot and 2 parts of Prussian blue, with a
little glycerine; then add 3 parts of gum
arabic and enough glycerine to form a
thin paste.
Washing Fluid. — Take 1 pound sal
soda, \ pound good stone lime, and 5
quarts of water; boil a short time, let it
settle, and pour off the clear fluid into a
stone jug, and cork for use; soak the
white clothes overnight in simple water,
wring out and soap wristbands, collars,
and dirty or stained places. Have the
boiler half filled with water just begin-
ning to boil, then put in 1 common tea-
cupful of fluid, stir and put in your
clothes, and boil for half an hour, then
rub lightly through one suds only, and
all is complete.
Starch Luster. — A portion of stearine,
the size of an old-fashioned cent, added
to starch, J pound, and boiled with it for
2 or 3 minutes, will add greatly to the
beauty of linen, to which it may be ap-
plied.
To Make Loose Nails in Walls Rigid.—
As soon as a nail driven in the wall be-
comes loose and the plastering begins
to break, it can be made solid and firm
by the following process: Saturate a bit
of wadding with thick dextrin or glue;
wrap as much of it around the nail as
possible and reinsert the latter in the
hole, pressing it home as strongly as
possible. Remove the excess of glue or
dextrin, wiping it cleanly off with a rag
dipped in clean water; then let dry. The
nail will then be firmly fastened in place.
If the loose plastering be touched with
the glue and replaced, it will adhere and
remain firm.
How to Keep Lamp Burners in Order.
— In the combustion of coal oil a car-
bonaceous residue is left, which attaches
itself very firmly to the metal along the
edge of the burner next the flame. This
is especially true of round burners,
where the heat of the flame is more in-
tense than in flat ones, and the deposit of
carbon, where not frequently removed,
soon gets sufficiently heavy to interfere
seriously with the movement of the wick
up or down. The deposit may be
scraped off with a knife blade, but a
much more satisfactory process of get-
ting rid of it is as follows: Dissolve so-
dium carbonate, 1 part, in 5 or 6 parts of
water, and in this boil the burner for 5
minutes or so. When taken out the
burner will look like a new one, and acts
like one, provided that the apparatus
for raising and lowering the wick nas not
previously been bent and twisted by at-
tempting to force the wick past rough
deposits.
To Remove the Odor from Pasteboard.
— Draw the pasteboard through a 3 per
cent solution of viscose in water. The
pasteboard must be calendered after dry-
ing.
To Remove Woody Odor — To get rid
cf that frequently disagreeable smell in
old chests, drawers, etc., paint the sur-
face over with the following mixture:
Acetic ether 100 parts
Formaldehyde 6 parts
Acid, carbolic 4 parts
Tincture of eucalyp-
tus leaves 60 parts
Mix. After applying the mixture ex-
pose the article to the open air in the sun-
light.
To Keep Flies Out of a House. — Never
allow a speck of food to remain uncov-
ered in dining room or pantry any length
of time after meals. Never leave rem-
nants of food exposed that you intend
for cat or hens. Feed at once or cover
their food up a distance from the house.
Let nothing decay near the house. Keep
your dining room and pantry windows
open a few inches most of the time.
Darken your room and pantry when not
in use. If there should be any flies they
will go to the window when the room is
darkened, where they are easily caught,
killed, or brushed out.
An Easy Way to Wash a Heavy Com-
fortable.— Examine the comfortable, and
if you find soiled spots soap them and
scrub with a small brush. Hang the
comfortable on a strong line and turn
the hose on. When one side is washed
turn and wash the other. The water
forces its way through cotton and cover-
ing, making the comfortable as light and
fluffy as when new. Squeeze the corners
and ends as dry as possible.
Preservation of Carpets. — Lay sheets
of brown paper under the carpet. This
gives a soft feeling to the foot, and by
diminishing the wear adds longer life to
the carpet; at the same time it tends to
keep away the air and renders the apart-
ments warm.
To Do Away with Wiping Dishes.—
Make a rack by putting a shelf over the
kitchen sink, slanting it so that the water
400
HOUSEHOLD FORMULAS
will drain off into the sink. Put a lattice
railing about 6 inches high at the front
and ends of the shelf so that dishes can
be set against it on their edges without
falling out. Have 2 pans of hot water.
Wash the dishes in one and rinse them in
the other. Set them on edge in the rack
and leave until dry.
A Convenient Table.—
Ten common-sized eggs weigh 1
pound.
Soft butter, the size of an egg, weighs
1 ounce.
One pint of coffee and of sugar weighs
12 ounces.
One quart of sifted flour (well heaped)
weighs 1 pound.
One pint of best brown sugar weighs
12 ounces.
How to Make a Cellar Waterproof.—
The old wall surface should be roughened
and perfectly cleaned before plastering
is commenced. It may be advisable to
put the first coat on not thicker than J
inch, and after this has set it may be
cut and roughened by a pointing trowel.
Then apply a second J-inch coat and
finish this to an even and smooth sur-
face. Proportion of plaster: One-half
part slaked lime, 1 part Portland ce-
ment, part fine, sharp sand, to be mixed
well and applied instantly.
Removing Old Wall Paper. — Some
paper hangers remove old paper from
walls by first dampening it with water in
which a little baking soda has been dis-
solved, the surface being then gone over
with a "scraper" or other tool. How-
pver, the principle object of any method
is to soften the old paste. This may be
readily accomplished by first wetting a
section of the old paper with cold or
tepid water, using a brush, repeating the
wetting until the paper and paste are
soaked through, when the paper may
easily be pulled off, or, if too tender, may
be scraped with any instrument of a
chisel form shoved between the paper
and the wall. The wall should then be
washed with clean water, this operation
being materially assisted by wetting the
wall ahead of the washing.
Stained Ceilings. — Take unslaked white
lime, dilute with alcohol, and paint the
spots with it. When the spots are dry —
which will be soon, as the alcohol evapo-
rates and the lime forms a sort of in-
sulating layer — one can proceed painting
with size color, and the spots will not
show through again.
To Overcome Odors in Freshly Papered
Rooms. — After the windows and doors of
such rooms have been closed, bring in
red-hot coal and strew on this several
handfuls of juniper berries. About 12
hours later open all windows and doors,
so as to admit fresh air, and it will be
found that the bad smell has entirely
disappeared.
Treatment of Damp Walls.— I. — A
good and simple remedy to obviate this
evil is caoutchouc glue, which is pre-
pared from rubber hose. The walls to
be laid dry are first to be thoroughly
cleaned by brushing and rubbing off;
then the caoutchouc size, which has been
previously made liquid by heating, is ap-
plied with a broad brush in a uniform
layer — about 8 to 12 inches higher than
the wall appears damp — and finally
paper is pasted over the glue when the
latter is still sticky. The paper will at
once adhere very firmly. Or else, apply
the liquefied glue in a uniform layer
upon paper (wall paper, caoutchouc paper,
etc.). Upon this, size paint may be ap-
plied, or it may be covered with wall
paper or plaster.
If the caoutchouc size is put on with
the necessary care — i. e., if all damp
spots are covered with it — the wall is
laid dry for the future, and no peeling off
of the paint or the wall paper needs to be
apprehended. In cellars, protection
from dampness can be had in a like
manner, as the caoutchouc glue adheres
equally well to all surfaces, whether
stone, glass, metal, or wood.
II. — The walls must be well cleaned
before painting. If the plaster should
be worn and permeated with saltpeter
in places it should be renewed and
smoothed. These clean surfaces are
coated twice with a water-glass solution,
1.1, using a brush ana allowed to dry
well. Then they are painted 3 times
with the following mixture: Dissolve
100 parts, by weight, of mastic in 10
parts of absolute alcohol; pour 1,000
parts of water over 200 parts of isinglass;
allow to soak for 6 hours; heat to solution
and add 100 parts of alcohol (50 per
cent). Into this mixture pour a not
solution of 50 parts of ammonia in 250
parts of alcohol (50 per cent), stir well,
and subsequently add the mastic solu-
tion and stand aside warm, stirring dili-
gently. After 5 minutes take away
from the fire and painting may be com-
menced. Before a fresh application,
however, the solution should be removed.
When this coating has dried complete-
ly it is covered with oil or varnish paint,
preferably the latter. In the same man-
ner the exudation of so-called saltpeter
HOUSEHOLD FORMULAS— HYDROMETER
401
in fresh masonry or on the exterior of
facades, etc., may be prevented, size
paint or lime paint being employed in-
stead of the oil-varnish paint. New
walls which are to be painted will give
off no more saltpeter after 2 or 3 appli-
cations of the isinglass solution, so that
the colors of the wall paper will not be
injured either. Stains caused by smoke,
soot, etc., on ceilings of rooms, kitchens,
or corridors which are difficult to cover
up with size paint, may also be com-
pletely isolated by applying the warm
isinglass solution 2 or 3 times. The
size paint is, of course, put on only after
complete drying of the ceilings.
To Protect Papered Walls from Ver-
min.— It is not infrequent that when the
wall paper becomes defective or loose in
papered rooms, vermin, bed bugs, ants,
etc., will breed behind it. In order to
prevent this evil a little colocynth powder
should be added to the paste used for
hanging the paper, in the proportion of
50 or 60 parts for 3,000 parts.
Care of Refrigerators. — See that the
sides or walls of all refrigerators are oc-
casionally scoured with soap, or soap
and slaked lime.
Dust Preventers. — Against the bene-
ficial effects to be observed in the use
of most preparations we must place the
following bad effects: The great smooth-
ness and slipperiness of the boards dur-
ing the first few days after every appli-
cation of the dressing, which forbids the
use of the latter on steps, floors of gymna-
sia, dancing floors, etc. The fact that
the oil or grease penetrates the soles of
the boots or shoes, the hems of ladies'
dresses, and things accidentally falling
to the floor are soiled and spotted. Be-
sides these there is, especially during the
first few days after application, the dirty
dark coloration which the boards take
on after protracted use of the oils.
Finally, there is the considerable cost of
any process, especially for smaller rooms
and apartments. In schoolrooms and
railroad waiting rooms and other places
much frequented by children and others
wearing shoes set with iron, the boards
soon become smooth from wear, and for
such places the process is not suited.
According to other sources of infor-
mation, these evil tendencies of the appli-
cation vanish altogether, or are reduced
to a minimum, if (1) entirely fresh, or at
least, not rancid oils be used; (2) if, after
each oiling, a few days be allowed to
elapse before using the* chamber or hall,
and finally (3), if resort is not had to
costly foreign special preparations, but
German goods, procurable at wholesale
in any quantity, and at very low figures.
The last advice (to use low-priced
preparations) seems sensible since accord-
ing to recent experiments, none of the
oils experimented upon possess any es-
pecial advantages over the others.
An overwhelming majority of the
laboratories for examination have given
a verdict in favor of oil as a dust-sup-
pressing application for floors, and have
expressed a desire to see it in universal
use. The following is a suggestion put
forth for the use of various preparations:
This dust-absorbing agent has for its
object to take up the dust in sweeping
floors, etc., and to prevent its develop-
ment. The production is as follows:
Mix in an intimate manner 12 parts, by
weight, of mineral sperm oil with 88
parts, by weight, of Roman or Portland
cement, adding a few drops of mirbane
oil. Upon stirring a uniform paste forms
at first, which then passes into a greasy,
sandy mass. This mass is sprinkled
upon the surface to be swept and cleaned
of dust, next going over it with a broom
or similar object in the customary man-
ner, at which operation the dust will
mix with the mass. The preparation
can be used repeatedly.
HUNYADI WATER:
See Water.
HYDROCHINON DEVELOPER:
See Photography.
HYDROGEN, AMALGAMS AS A
SOURCE OF NASCENT:
See Amalgams.
HYDROGEN PEROXIDE AS A PRE-
SERVATIVE:
See Preserving.
HYDROMETER AND ITS USE.
Fill the tall cylinder or test glass with
the spirit to be tested and see that it is of
the proper temperature (60° P.). Should
the thermometer indicate a higher tem-
perature wrap the cylinder in cloths
which have been dipped in cold water
until the temperature falls to the required
degree. If too low a temperature is
indicated, reverse the process, using
warm instead of cold applications.
When 60° is reached note the specific
Sravity on the floating hydrometer,
ave the cylinder filled to the top and look
across the top of the liquid at the mark on
the hydrometer. This is to preclude an
402
HYGROMETERS— ICE
incorrect reading by possible refraction
in the glass cylinder.
HYGROMETERS AND HYGRO-
SCOPES:
Paper Hygrometers. — Paper hygrom-
eters are made by saturating white blot-
ting paper with the following liquid and
then hanging up to dry:
Cobalt chloride 1 ounce
Sodium chloride £ ounce
Calcium chloride 75 grains
Acacia ^ ounce
Water 3 ounces
The amount of moisture in the atmos-
phere is roughly indicated by the chang-
ing color of the papers, as follows:
Rose red rain
Pale red very moist
Bluish red moist
Lavender blue .... nearly dry
Blue very dry
Colored Hygroscopes. — These instru-
ments are often composed of a flower or
a figure, of light muslin or paper, im-
mersed in one of the following solutions:
I. — Cobalt chloride 1 part
Gelatin 10 parts
Water 100 parts
The normal coloring is pink; this color
changes into violet in medium humid
weather and into blue in very dry
weather.
II. — Cupric chloride. . . 1 part
Gelatin 10 parts
Water 100 parts
The color is yellow in dry weather.
III.— Cobalt chloride.. . . 1 part
Gelatin 20 parts
Nickel oxide 75 parts
Cupric chloride. ... 25 parts
Water 200 parts
The color is green in dry weather.
HYOSCYAMUS, ANTIDOTE TO:
See Atropine.
ICE:
See also Refrigeration.
Measuring the Weight of Ice. — A
close estimate of the weight of ice can
be reached by multiplying together the
length, breadth, and thickness of the
block in inches, and dividing the product
by 30. This will be very closely the
weight in pounds. Thus, if a block is
10x10x9, the product is 900, and this
divided by 30 gives 30 pounds as correct
weight. A block 10x10x6 weighs £9
pounds. This simple method can be
easily applied, and it may serve to re-
move unjust suspicions, or to detect
short weight.
To Keep Ice in Small Quantities.— To
keep ice from melting, attention is called
to an old preserving method. The ice
is cracked with a hammer between 2
layers of a strong cloth. Tie over a com-
mon unglazed flower-pot, holding about
2 to 4 quarts and placed upon a porce-
lain disn, a piece of white flannel in such
a manner that it is turned down funnel-
like into the interior of the pot without
touching the bottom. Placed in this
flannel funnel the cracked ice keeps for
days.
ICE FLOWERS.
Make a 2 per cent solution of the best
clear gelatin in distilled water, filter, and
flood the filtrate over any surface which
it is desired to ornament. Drain off
slightly, and if the weather is sufficiently
cold, put the plate, as nearly level as pos-
sible, out into the cold air to freeze. In
freezing, water is abstracted from the
colloidal portion, which latter then as-
sumes an efflorescent form, little flowers,
with exuberant, graceful curves of crys-
tals, showing up as foliage, from all over
the surface. To preserve in permanent
form all that is necessary is to flood them
with absolute alcohol. This treatment
removes the ice, thus leaving a lasting
framework of gelatin which may be
preserved indefinitely. In order to do
this, as soon as the gelatin has become
quite dry it should be either varnished,
flowed with an alcoholic solution of clear
shellac, or the gelatin may be rendered
insoluble by contact, for a few moments,
with a solution of potassium bichromate,
and subsequent exposure to sunlight.
IMOGEN DEVELOPER:
See Photography.
INCENSE:
See Fumigants.
INCRUSTATION, PREVENTION OF;
See Boiler Compounds.
INDIGO :
See Dyes.
INFANT FOODS:
See Foods.
INFLUENZA IN CATTLE:
See Veterinary FormulaSo
IGNITING COMPOSITION— INKS
403
INK ERADICATORS:
See Cleaning Preparations and Meth-
ods.
IGNITING COMPOSITION.
Eight parts of powdered manganese,
10 parts of amorphous phosphorus, and
5 parts of glue. The glue is soaked in
water, dissolved in the heat, and the
manganese and the phosphorus stirred in,
so that a thinly liquid paste results, which
is applied by means of a brush. Allow
to dry well. This, being free from sul-
phur, can be applied on match-boxes.
Inks
BLUEPRINT INKS.
I. — For red-writing fluids for blue-
prints, take a piece 01 common washing
soda the size of an ordinary bean, and
dissolve it in 4 tablespoonf uls of ordinary
red-writing ink, to make a red fluid.
To keep it from spreading too much, use
a fine pen to apply it with, and write fast
so as not to allow too much of the fluid
to get on the paper, for it will continue
eating until it is dry.
II. — For red and white solutions for
writing on blueprints, dissolve a crystal
of oxalate of potash about the size of
a pea in an ink-bottle full of water.
This will give white lines on blueprints;
other potash solutions are yellowisTi. If
this shows a tendency to run, owing to
too great strength, add more water and
thicken slightly with mucilage. Mix
this with red or any other colored ink
rbout half and half, and writing may be
done on the blueprints in colors corre-
sponding to the inks used.
III. — Add to a small bottle of water
enough washing soda to make a clear
white line, then add enough gum arabic
to it to prevent spreading and making
ragged lines. To make red lines dip the
pen in red ink and then add a little of
the solution by means of the quill.
IV. — For white ink, grind zinc oxide
fine on marble and incorporate with it
a mucilage made with gum tragacanth.
Thin a little for use. Add a little oil of
cloves to prevent mold, and shake from
time to time.
V. — A fluid which is as good as any
for writing white on blueprints is made
of equal parts of sal soda and water.
VI. — Mix equal parts of borax and
water.
Both these fluids, V and VI, must be
used with a fine-pointed pen; a pen with
a, blunt point will not work well.
DRAWING INKS:
Blue Ruling Ink.— Good vitriol, 4
ounces; indigo, 1 ounce. Pulverize the
indigo, add it to the vitriol, and let it
stand exposed to the air for 6 days, or
until dissolved; then fill the pots with
chalk, add fresh gall, | gill, boiling it
before use.
Black Ruling Ink. — Take good black
ink, and add gall as for blue. Do not
cork it, as this prevents it from turning
black.
Carbon Ink. — Dissolve real India ink
in common black ink, or add a small
quantity of lampblack previously heated
to redness, and ground perfectly smooth,
with a small portion of the ink.
Carmine. — The ordinary solution of
carmine in ammonia water, after a short
time in contact with steel, becomes black-
ish red, but an ink may be made that
will retain its brilliant carmine color to
the last by the following process, given by
Dingier: Triturate 1 part of pure car-
mine with 15 parts of acetate of ammonia
solution, with an equal quantity of dis-
tilled water in a porcelain mortar, and
allow the whole to stand for some time.
In this way, a portion of the alumina,
which is combined with the carmine dye,
is taken up by the acetic acid of the am-
monia salt, and separates as a precipi-
tate, while the pure pigment of the
cochineal remains dissolved in the half-
saturated ammonia. It is now filtered
and a few drops of pure white sugar
syrup added to thicken it. A solution of
gum arabic cannot be used to thicken it,
since the ink still contains some acetic
acid, which would coagulate the bas-
sorine, one of the constituents of the
gum.
Liquid Indelible Drawing Ink. — Dis-
solve, by boiling, 2 parts of blond (golden
yellow) shellac in 1.6 parts, by weight,
of sal ammoniac, 16°, with 10 parts, by
weight, of distilled water, and filter the
solution through a woolen cloth. Now
dissolve or grind 0.5 parts, by weight, of
shellac solution with 0.01 part, by
weight, of carbon black. Also dissolve
.03 parts of nigrosin in 0.4 parts of
distilled water and pour both solutions
together. The mixture is allowed to
settle for 2 days and the ready ink is
drawn off from the sediment.
GLASS, CELLULOID, AND METAL
INKS:
See also Etching.
Most inks for glass will also write on
celluloid and the metals. The following
404
INKS
I and II are the most widely known
recipes:
I. — In 500 parts of water dissolve 36
parts of sodium fluoride and 7 parts of
sodium sulphate. In another vessel
dissolve in the same amount of water 14
parts of zinc chloride and to the solution
add 56 parts of concentrated hydro-
chloric acid. To use, mix equal vol-
umes of the two solutions and add a little
India ink; or, in the absence of this, rub
up a little lampblack with it. It is
scarcely necessary to say that the mix-
ture should not be put in glass containers,
unless they are well coated internally
with paraffine, wax, gutta-percha, or
some similar material. To avoid the
inconvenience of keeping the solutions in
separate bottles, mix them and preserve
in a rubber bottle. A quill pen is best to
use in writing with this preparation, but
metallic pens may be used, if quite clean
and new.
II. — In 150 parts of alcohol dissolve
20 parts of rosin, and add to this, drop
by drop, stirring continuously, a solution
of 35 parts of borax in 250 parts of water.
This being accomplished, dissolve in the
solution sufficient methylene blue to give
it the desired tint.
Ink for Writing on Glazed Cardboard.
—The following are especially recom-
mended for use on celluloid:
I. — Dissolve 4 drachms of brown
shellac in 4 ounces of alcohol. Dissolve
7 drachms of borax in 6 ounces of dis-
tilled water. Pour the first solution
slowly into the second and carefully mix
them, after which add 12 grains of
aniline dye of the desired color. Violet,
blue, green, red, yellow, orange, or
black aniline dyes can be used.
Such inks may be used for writing on
bottles, and the glass may be cleaned
with water without the inscription being
impaired.
II. — Ferric chloride .... 10 parts
Tannin 15 parts
Acetone 100 parts
Dissolve the ferric chloride in a por-
tion of the acetone and the tannin in the
residue, and mix the solutions.
III. — Dissolve a tar dyestuff of the
desired color in anhydrous acetic acid.
Indelible Inks for Glass or Metal.—
Schobel recommends the following inks
for marking articles of glass, glass slips
for microscopy, reagent flasks, etc., in
black:
I. — Sodium silicate 1 to 2 parts
Liquid India ink 1 part
For white:
II. — Sodium water glass 3 to 4 parts
Chinese white 1 part
Instead of Chinese white, a sufficient
amount of the so-called permanent
white (barium sulphate) may be used.
The containers for these inks should be
kept air-tight. The writing in either case
is not attacked by any reagent used in
microscopical technique but may be
readily scraped away with a knife. The
slips or other articles should be as near
chemically clean as possible, before at-
tempting to write on them.
According to Schuh, a mixture of a
shellac solution and whiting or precipi-
tated chalk answers very well for mark-
ing glass. Any color may be mixed with
the chalk. If the glass is thoroughly
cleaned with alcohol or ether, either a
quill pen or a camel's-hair pencil (or a
fresh, clean steel pen) may be used.
Ink on Marble. —Ink marks on marble
may be removed with a paste made by
dissolving an ounce of oxalic acid and
half an ounce of butter of antimony in a
pint of rain water, and adding sufficient
flour to form a thin paste. Apply this to
the stains with a brush; allow it to re-
main on 3 or 4 days and then wash it off.
Make a second application, if necessary.
Perpetual Ink. — I. — Pitch, 3 pounds;
melt over the fire, and add of lampblack,
f pound; mix well.
II. — Trinidad asphaltum and oil of
turpentine, equal parts. Used in a
melted state to fill in the letters on tomb-
stones, marbles, etc. Without actual
violence, it will endure as long as the
stone itself.
Ink for Steel Tools. — Have a rubber
stamp made with white letters on a black
ground. Make up an ink to use with this
stamp, as follows:
Ordinary rosin, £ pound; lard oil, 1
tablespoonful; lampblack, 2 tablespoon-
fuls; turpentine, 2 tablespoonfuls. Melt
the rosin, and stir in the other ingredients
in the order given. When the ink is cold
it should look like ordinary printers' ink.
Spread a little of this ink over the pad
and ink the rubber stamp as usual, and
press it on the clean steel — saw blade,
for instance. Have a rope of soft putty,
and make a border of putty around the
stamped design as close up to the letter-
ing as possible, so that no portion of the
steel inside the ring of putty is exposed
but the lettering. Then pour into the
putty ring the etching mixture, composed
of 1 ounce of nitric acid, 1 ounce of muri-
INKS
405
atic acid, and 12 ounces of water. Allow
it to rest for only a minute, draw off the
acid with a glass or rubber syringe, and
soak up the last trace of acid with a
moist sponge. Take off the putty, and
wipe off the design with potash solution
first, and then with turpentine, and the
job is done.
Writing on Ivory, Glass, etc. — Nitrate
of silver, 3 parts; gum arabic, 20 parts;
distilled water, 30 parts. Dissolve the
gum arabic in two-thirds of the water,
and the nitrate of silver in the other
third. Mix and add the desired color.
Writing on Zinc (see also Horti-
cultural Inks). — Take 1 part sulphate of
copper (copper vitriol), 1 part chloride
of potassium, both dissolved in 35 parts
water. With this blue liquid, writing or
drawing may be done with a common
steel pen upon zinc which has been
polished bright with emery paper. After
the writing is done the plates are put
in water and left in it for some time,
then taken out and dried. The writing
will remain intact as long as the zinc.
If the writing or drawing should be
brown, 1 part sulphate of iron (green
vitriol) is added to the above solution.
The chemicals are dissolved in warm
water and the latter must be cold before
it can be used.
GOLD INK.
I. — The best gold ink is made by rub-
bing up gold leaf as thoroughly as pos-
sible witn a little honey. The honey is
then washed away with water, and the
finely powdered gold leaf left is mixed to
the consistency of a writing ink with weak
gum water. Everything depends upon
the fineness of the gold powder, i. e.,
upon the diligence with which it has been
worked with the honey. Precipitated
old is finer than can be got by any rub-
ing, but its color is wrong, being dark,
brown. The above gold ink should be
used with a quill pen.
II. — An imitation gold or bronze ink
is composed by grinding 1,000 parts of
powdered bronze of handsome color
with a varnish prepared by boiling to-
gether 500 parts of nut oil, 200 parts of
garlic, 500 parts of cocoanutoil, 100 parts
of Naples yellow, and as much of sienna.
HORTICULTURAL INK.
I. — Chlorate of platinum, f ounce;
soft water, 1 pint. Dissolve and pre-
serve it in glass. Used with a clean
quill to write on zinc labels. It almost
immediately turns black, and cannot be
g
b
removed by washing. The addition of
gum and lampblack, as recommended in
certain books, is unnecessary, and even
prejudicial to the quality of the ink.
II. — Verdigris and sal ammoniac, of
each | ounce; levigated lampblack, £
ounce; common vinegar, | pint; mix
thoroughly. Used as the last, for either
zinc, iron, or steel.
III. — Blue vitriol, 1 ounce; sal am-
moniac, \ ounce (both in powder); vine-
gar, \ pint; dissolve. A little lamp-
black or vermilion may be added, but
it is not necessary. Use No. I, for iron,
tin, or steel plate.
INDELIBLE INKS.
These are also frequently called water-
proof, incorrodible, or indestructible
inks. They are employed for writing
labels on bottles containing strong acids
and alkaline solutions. They may be
employed with stamps, types or stencil
plates, by which greater neatness will be
secured than can be obtained with either
a brush or pen.
The following is a superior prepara-
tion for laundry use:
Aniline oil 85 parts
Potassium chlorate. . . 5 parts
Distilled water 44 parts
Hydrochloric acid,
pure (specific grav-
ity, 1.124).. 68 parts
Copper chloride, pure 6 parts
Mix the aniline oil, potassium chlor-
ate, and 26 parts of the water and heat
in a capacious vessel, on the water bath,
at a temperature of from 175° to 195° F.,
until the chlorate is entirely dissolved,
then add one-half of the hydrochloric
and continue the heat until the mixture
begins to take on a darker color. Dis-
solve the copper chloride in the residue
of the water, add the remaining hydro-
chloric acid to the solution, and add the
whole to the liquid on the water bath,
and heat the mixture until it acquires a
fine red-violet color. Pour into a flask
with a well-fitting ground-glass stopper,
close tightly and set aside for several
days, or until it ceases to throw down a
precipitate. When this is the case, pour
off the clear liquid into smaller (one
drachm or a drachm and a half) con-
tainers.
This ink must be used with a quill pen,
and is especially good for linen or .cotton
fabrics, but does not answer so well for
silk or woolen goods. When first used,
it appears as a pale red, but on washing
with soap or alkalies, or on exposure to
406
INKS
the air, becomes a deep, dead black.
The following is a modification of the
foregoing:
Blue Indelible Ink.— This ink has the
reputation of resisting not only water
and oil, but alcohol, oxalic acid, alkalies,
the chlorides, etc. It is prepared as fol-
lows: Dissolve 4 parts of gum lac in 36
parts of boiling water carrying 2 parts
of borax. Filter and set aside. Now
dissolve 2 parts of gum arabic in 4 parts
of water and add the solution to the
filtrate. Finally, after the solution is
quite cold, add 2 parts of powdered
indigo and dissolve by agitation. Let
stand for several hours, then decant, and
put in small bottles.
Red Indelible Inks. — By proceeding
according to the following formula, an
intense purple-red color may be pro-
duced on fabrics, which is indelible in
the customary sense of the word:
1. — Sodium carbonate . . 3 drachms
Gum arabic 3 drachms
Water 12 drachms
2. — Platinic chloride. ... 1 drachm
Distilled water 2 ounces
3. — Stannous chloride. .. 1 drachm
Distilled water 4 drachms
Moisten the place to be written upon
with No. 1 and rub a warm iron over it
until dry; then write with No. 2, and,
when dry, moisten with No. 3. An
intense and beautiful purple-red color is
porduced in this way. A very rich
purple color — the purple of Cassius — •
may be produced by substituting a solu-
tion of gold chloride for the platinic
chloride in the above formula.
Crimson Indelible Ink. —
The following formula makes an indelible
crimson ink:
Silver nitrate 50 parts
Sodium carbonate,
crystal 75 parts
Tartaric acid 16 parts
Carmine 1 part
Ammonia water,
strongest 288 parts
Sugar, white, crystal-
lized 36 parts
Gum arabic, pow-
dered 60 parts
Distilled water,
quantity sufficient
to make 400 parts
Dissolve the silver nitrate and the
sodium carbonate separately, each in a
portion of the distilled water, mix the
solutions, collect the precipitate on a
filter, wash, and put the washed precipi-
tate, still moist, into a mortar. To this
add the tartaric acid, and rub together
until effervescence ceases. Now, dis-
solve the carmine in the ammonia water
(which latter should be of specific grav-
ity .882, or contain 34 per cent of am-
monia), filter, and add the filtrate to the
silver tartrate magma in the mortar.
Add the sugar and gum arabic, rub up
together, and add gradually, with con-
stant agitation, sufficient distilled water
to make 400 parts.
Gold Indelible Ink. — Make two solu-
tions as follows:
1. — Chloride of gold and
sodium 1 part
Water 10 parts
Gum 2 parts
2. — Oxalic acid . 1 part
Water 5 parts
Gum 2 parts
The cloth or stuff to be written on
should be moistened with liquid No. 2.
Let dry, and then write upon the pre-
pared place with liquid No. 1, using
preferably a quill pen. Pass a hot iron
over the mark, pressing heavily.
INDIA, CHINA, OR JAPAN INK.
Ink by these names is based on lamp-
black, and prepared in various ways.
Many makes flow less easily from the
pen than other inks, and are less durable
than ink that writes paler and afterwards
turns black. The ink is usually unfitted
for steel pens, but applies well with a
brush.
I. — Lampblack (finest) is ground
to a paste with very weak liquor of
potassa, and this paste is then diffused
through water slightly alkalized with po-
tassa, after which it is collected, washed
with clean water, and dried; the dry
powder is next levigated to a smooth,
stiff paste, with a strong filtered decoc-
tion of carrageen or Irish moss, or of
quince seed, a few drops of essence of
musk, and about half as much essence
of ambergris being added, by way of
perfume, toward the end of the process;
the mass is, lastly, molded into cakes,
which are ornamented with Chinese
characters and devices, as soon as they
are dry and hard.
II. — A weak solution of fine gelatin
is boiled at a high temperature in a
digester for 2 hours, and then in an open
vessel for 1 hour more. The liquid is
next filtered and evaporated to a proper
consistency, either in a steam- or salt-
INKS
407
water bath. It is, lastly, made into a
paste, as before, with lampblack which
has been previously heated to dull red-
ness in a well-closed crucible. Neither
of the above gelatinizes in cold weather,
like the ordinary imitations.
To Keep India Ink Liquid. — If one has
to work with the ink for some time, a
small piece should be dissolved in warm
water and the tenth part of glycerine
added, which mixes intimately with the
ink after shaking for a short time. India
ink thus prepared will keep very well in
a corked bottle, and if a black jelly
should form in the cold, it is quickly dis-
solved by heating. The ink flows well
from the pen and does not wipe.
INK POWDERS AND LOZENGES.
Any of these powders may, by the ad-
dition of mucilage of gum arabic, be
made into lozenges or buttons — the "ink
buttons" or "ink stones" in use abroad
and much affected by travelers.
The following makes a good service-
able black ink, on macerating the pow-
der in 100 times its weight of rain or
distilled water for a few days :
I. — Powdered gallnuts . . 16 parts
Gum arabic 8 parts
Cloves 1 part
Iron sulphate 10 parts
Put into an earthenware or glass
vessel, cover with 100 parts of rain or
distilled water, and set aside for 10 days
or 2 weeks, giving an occasional shake
the first 3 or 4 days. Decant and bottle
for use.
The following is ready for use instant-
ly on being dissolved in water:
II. — Aleppo gallnuts 84 parts
Dutch Madder 6 parts
Powder, mix, moisten, and pack into
the percolator. Extract with hot water,
filter, and press out. To the filtrate add
4 parts of iron acetate (or pyroacetate)
and 2i parts of tincture of indigo. Put
into the water bath and evaporate to dry-
ness and powder the dry residue.
LITHOGRAPHIC INKS.
These are for writing on lithographic
stones or plates:
I. — Mastic (in tears), 8 ounces; shel-
lac, 12 ounces; Venice turpentine, 1
ounce. Melt together, add wax, 1
pound; tallow, 6 ounces. When dis-
solved, add hard tallow soap (in shay-
ings), 6 ounces; and when the whole is
perfectly combined, add lampblack, 4
ounces. Mix well, cool a little, and then
pour it into molds, or upon a slab, and
when cold cut it into square pieces.
II. (Lasteyrie). — Dry tallow soap,
mastic (in tears), and common soda (in
fine powder), of each, 30 parts; shellac,
150 parts; lampblack, 12 parts. Mix as
indicated in Formula I.
MARKING OR LABELING INKS:
Black Marking Inks. — •
I. — Borax 60 parts
Shellac 180 parts
Boiling water 1,000 parts
Lampblack, a sufficient quantity.
Dissolve the borax in the water, add
the shellac to the solution and stir until
dissolved. Rub up a little lampblack
with sufficient of the liquid to form a
paste, and add the rest of the solution a
little at a time and with constant rubbing.
Test, and if not black enough, repeat the
operation. To get the best effect — a
pure jet-black — the lampblack should be
purified and freed from the calcium
phosphate always present in the com-
mercial article to the extent, frequently,
of 85 to 87 per cent, by treating with
hydrochloric acid and washing with
water.
II. — An ink that nothing will bleach is
made by mixing pyrogallic acid and sul-
phate of iron in equal parts. Particu-
larly useful for marking labels on bottles
containing acids. Varnish the label
after the ink is dry so that moisture will
not affect it.
COLORED MARKING INKS:
Eosine Red. —
Eosine B 1 drachm
Solution of mercuric
chloride 2 drachms
Mucilage of acacia. . . 2 drachms
Rectified spirit 4 ounces
Oil of lavender 1 drop
Distilled water 8 ounces
Dissolve the eosine in the solution and
2 ounces of water, add the mucilage, and
mix, then the oil dissolved in the spirit,
and finally make up.
Orange. —
Aniline orange 1 drachm
Sugar 2 drachms
Distilled water to .... 4 ounces
Blue.—
I. — Resorcin blue 1 drachm
Distilled water 6 drachms
Mix and agitate occasionally for 2
hours, then add :
408
INKS
Hot distilled water. .. 24 ounces
Oxalic acid 10 grains
Sugar \ ounce
Shake well. This and other aniline
inks can be perfumed by rubbing up a
drop of attar of rose with the sugar be-
fore dissolving it in the hot water.
II. — A solid blue ink, or marking
paste, to be used with a brush for sten-
ciling, is made as follows: Shellac, 2
ounces; borax, 2 ounces; water, 25
ounces; gum arabic, 2 ounces; and ul-
tramarine, sufficient. Boil the borax
and shellac in some of the water till they
are dissolved, and withdraw from the
fire. When the solution has become
cold, add the rest of the 25 ounces of
water, and the ultramarine. When it is
to be used with the stencil, it must be
made thicker than when it is to be
applied with a marking brush.
III. — In a suitable kettle mix well,
stirring constantly, 50 parts of liquid
logwood extract (80 per cent) with 3
parts of spirit previously mingled with 1
part of hydrochloric acid, maintaining a
temperature of 68° F. Dissolve 5 parts
of potassium chromate in 15 parts of
boiling water; to this add 10 parts of
hydrochloric acid, and pour this mixture,
after raising the temperature to about
86° F., very slowly and with constant
stirring into the kettle. Then heat the
whole to 185° F. This mass, which has
now assumed the nature of an extract, is
stirred, a little longer, and next 15 parts of
dextrin mixed with 10 parts of fine
white earth (white bole) are added.
The whole is well stirred throughout.
Transfer the mass from the kettle into a
crusher, where it is thoroughly worked
through.
PRINTING INKS.
Black printing inks owe their color to
finely divided carbon made from lamp-
black, pine-wood, rosin oil, etc., ac-
cording to the quality of the ink desired.
The finest inks are made from flame-
lampblack. There are, however, cer-
tain requirements made of all printing
inks alike, and these are as follows:
The ink must be a thick and homoge-
neous liquid, it must contain no solid
matter but finely divided carbon, and
every drop when examined microscopic-
ally must appear as a clear liquid con-
taining black grains uniformly distrib-
uted.
The consistency of a printing ink must
be such that it passes on to the printing
rollers at the proper rate. It will be
obvious that various consistencies are
demanded according to the nature of the
machine used by the printer. For a
rotary machine which prints many thou-
sands of copies an hour a much thinner
ink will be necessary than that required
for art printing or for slow presses. As
regards color, ordinary printing ink
should be a pure black. For economy's
sake, however, newspaper printers often
use an ink so diluted that it does not look
deep black, but a grayish black, espe-
cially in large type.
The question of the time that the ink
takes to dry on the paper is a very impor-
tant one, especially with ink used for
printing newspapers which are folded
and piled at one operation. If then the
ink does not dry very quickly, the whole
impression smudges and "sets off" so
much that it becomes illegible in places.
Although it is essential to have a quick
drying ink for this purpose, it is danger-
pus to go too far, for a too quickly drying
ink would make the paper stick to the
forms and tear it. A last condition which
must be fulfilled by a good printing ink
is that it must be easy of removal from
the type, which has to be used again.
No one composition will answer every
purpose and a number of different inks
are required. Makers of printing inks
are obliged, therefore, to work from de-
finite recipes so as to be able to turn
out exactly the same ink again and again.
They make newspaper ink for rotary
presses, book-printing inks, half-tone
inks, art inks, etc. As the recipes have
been attained only by long, laborious,
and costly experiments, it is obvious that
the makers are not disposed to commu-
nicate them, and the recipes that are
offered and published must be looked
upon with caution, as many of them are
of little or no value. In the recipes
given below for printing inks, the only
intention is to give hints of the general
composition, and the practical man will
easily discover what, if any, alterations
have to be made in the recipe for his
special purpose.
Many different materials for this man-
ufacture are given in recipes, so many,
in fact, that it is impossible to discover
what use they are in the ink. The fol-
lowing is a list of the articles commonly
in use for the manufacture of printing
ink:
Boiled linseed oil, boiled without
driers.
Rosin oil from the dry distillation of
rosin.
Rosin itself, especially American pine
INKS
409
Soap, usually rosin-soap, but occa-
sionally ordinary soap.
Lampblack and various other pig-
ments.
By the most time-honored method,
linseed oil was very slowly heated over
an open fire until it ignited. It was
allowed to burn for a time and then ex-
tinguished by putting a lid on the pot.
In this way a liquid was obtained of a
dark brown or black color with par-
ticles of carbon, and with a consistency
varying with the period of heating, being
thicker, the longer the heating was con-
tinued. If necessary, the liquid was
then thinned with unboiled, or only very
slightly boiled, linseed oil. Lampblack
in the proper quantity was added and the
mixture was finally rubbed up on a stone
in small quantities at a time to make it
uniform.
Boiling the Linseed Oil. — This process,
although it goes by the name of boiling,
is not so in the proper sense of the word,
but a heating having for its object an
initial oxidation of the oil, so that it will
dry better. Linseed oil is a type of the
drying oils, those which when exposed in
thin coats to the air absorb large quan-
tities of oxygen and are thereby cow-
verted into tough, solid sheets having
properties very similar to those of soft
I ndia rubber. The process goes on much
faster with the aid of heat than at the or-
dinary temperature, and the rate at
which the boiled oil will dry in the ink
can be exactly regulated by heating it for
a longer or shorter time. Prolonged
heating gives an oil which will dry very
quickly on exposure in thin coats to the
air, the shorter the heating the more
slowly will the ink afterwards made with
the oil dry.
Linseed oil must always be boiled in
vessels where it has plenty of room, as
the oil soon swells up and it begins to de-
compose so energetically at a particular
temperature that there is considerable
risk of its boiling over and catching fire.
Various contrivances have been thought
out for boiling large quantities of the oil
with safety, such as pans with an outlet
pipe in the side, through which the oil
escapes when it rises too high instead of
over the edge of the pan, and fires built
on a trolley running on rails, so that they
can at once be moved from under the
pan if there is any probability of the
fatter boiling over. The best apparatus
for preparing thickened linseed oil is
undoubtedly one in which the oil offers a
very large surface to the air, and on that
account requires to be moderately heated
only. The oil soon becomes very thick
under these conditions and if necessary
can be diluted to any required consist-
ency with unboiled oil.
In boiling linseed oil down to the
proper thickness by the old method there
are two points demanding special atten-
tion. One is the liability of the oil to boil
over, and the other consists in the devel-
opment of large quantities of vapor, most-
ly of acroleine, which have a most power-
ful and disagreeable smell, and an intense
action upon the eyes. The attendant
must be protected from these fumes, and
the boiling must therefore be done where
there is a strong draught to take the
fumes as fast as they are produced.
There are various contrivances to cope
with boiling over.
Savage's Printing Ink. — Pure balsam
of copaiba, 9 ounces; lampblack, 3 ounces;
indigo and Prussian blue, each 5 drachms;
drachms; Indian red, £ ounce; yellow
soap, 3 ounces. Mix, and grind to the
utmost smoothness.
Toning Black Inks. — Printers' inks
consisting solely of purified lampblack
and vehicle give, of course, impressions
which are pure black. It is, however,
well known that a black which has to a
practiced eye a tinge of blue in it looks
much better than a pure black. To
make such an ink many makers mix the
lampblack with a blue pigment, which is
added in very fine powder before the first
grinding. Prussian blue is the pigment
usually chosen and gives very attractive
results. Prussian blue is, however, not
a remarkable stable substance, and is
very apt to turn brown from the forma-
tion of ferric oxide. Hence an ink made
with Prussian blue, although it may look
very fine at first, often assumes a dull
brown hue in the course of time. Ex-
cellent substitutes for Prussian blue are
to be found in the Induline blues. These
are very fast dyes, and inks tinted with
them do not change color. As pure in-
digo is now made artificially and sold at
a reasonable price, this extremely fast
dye can also be used for tinting inks made
with purified lampblack.
To Give Dark Inks a Bronze or
Changeable Hue. — Dissolve 1| pounds
gum shellac in 1 gallon 65 per cent
alcohol or cologne spirits for 24 hours.
Then add 14 ounces aniline red. Let it
stand a few hours longer, when it will be
ready for use. Add this to good blue,
black, or other dark ink, as needed in
quantities to suit, when if carefully done
410
INKS
they will be found to have a rich bronze
or changeable hue.
Quick Dryer for Inks Used on Book-
binders' Cases. — Beeswax, 1 ounce;
gum arabic (dissolved in sufficient acetic
acid to make a thin mucilage), \ ounce;
brown japan, £ ounce. Incorporate
with 1 pound of good cut ink.
INKS FOR STAMP PADS.
The ink used on vulcanized rubber
stamps should be such that when ap-
plied to a suitable pad it remains suffi-
ciently fluid to adhere to the stamp. At
the same time the fluidity should cease
by the time the stamp is pressed upon an
absorbing surface such as paper. For-
merly these inks were made by rubbing
up pigments in fat to a paste. Such inks
can hardly be prevented, however, from
making impressions surrounded by a
greasy mark caused by the fat spreading
in the pores of the paper. Now, most
stamping inks are made without grease
and a properly prepared stamping ink
contains nothing but glycerine and coal-
tar dye. As nearly all these dyes dis-
solve in hot glycerine the process of
manufacture is simple enough. The
dye, fuchsine, methyl violet, water blue,
emerald green, etc., is put into a thin
porcelain dish over which concentrated
glycerine is poured, and the whole is
heated to nearly 212° F. with constant
stirring. It is important to use no more
glycerine than is necessary to keep the
dye dissolved when the ink is cold. If
the mass turns gritty on cooling it must
be heated up with more glycerine till
solution is perfect.
In dealing with coal-tar dyes insoluble
in glycerine, or nearly so, dissolve them
first in the least possible quantity of
strong, hot alcohol. Then add the glyc-
erine and heat till the spirit is evapo-
rated.
To see whether the ink is properly
made spread some of it on a strip of
cloth and try it with a rubber stamp.
On paper, the separate letters must be
quite sharp and distinct. If they run
at the edges there is too much glycerine
in the ink and more dye must be added
to it. If, on the contrary, the impres-
sion is indistinct and weak, the ink is too
thick and must be diluted by carefully
adding glycerine.
Aniline colors are usually employed
as the tinting agents. The following is
a typical formula, the product being a
black ink:
I. — Nigrosin 3 parts
Water.... 15 parts
Alcohol 15 parts
Glycerine 70 parts
Dissolve the nigrosin in the alcohol,
add the glycerine previously mixed with
the water, and rub well together.
Nigrosin is a term applied to several
compounds of the same series which
differ in solubility. In the place of
these compounds it is probable that a
mixture would answer to produce black
as suggested by Hans Wilder for making
writing ink. His formula for the mix-
ture is:
II. — Methyl violet 3 parts
Bengal green 5 parts
Bismarck green 4 parts
A quantity of this mixture should be
taken equivalent to the amount of nigro-
sin directed. These colors are freely
soluble in water, arid yield a deep green-
ish-black solution.
The aniline compound known as
brilliant green answers in place of Bengal
green. As to the permanency of color of
this or any aniline ink, no guarantee is
offered. There are comparatively few
coloring substances that can be con-
sidered permanent even in a qualified
sense. Among these, charcoal takes a
foremost place. Lampblack remains
indefinitely unaltered. This, ground
very finely with glycerine, would yield
an ink which would perhaps prove serv-
iceable in stamping; but it would be
liable to rub off to a greater extent than
soluble colors which penetrate the paper
more or less. Perhaps castor oil would
prove a better vehicle for insoluble color-
ing matters. Almost any aniline color
may be substituted for nigrosin in the
foregoing formula, and blue, green, red,
purple, and other inks obtained. In-
soluble pigments might also be made to
answer as suggested for lampblack.
The following is said to be a cushion
that will give color permanently. It
consists of a box filled with an elastic
composition, saturated with a suitable
color. The cushion fulfils its purpose for
years without being renewed, always con-
tains sufficient moisture, which is drawn
from the atmosphere, and continues to
act as a color stamp cushion so long as a
remnant of the mass or composition
remains in the box or receptacle. This
cushion or pad is too soft to be self-sup-
porting, but should be held in a low, flat
pan, and have a permanent cloth cover.
III. — The composition consists pref-
erably of 1 part gelatin, 1 part water,
6 parts glycerine, and 6 parts coloring
matter. A suitable black color can be
INKS
made from the following materials: One
part gelatin glue, 3 parts lampblack,
aniline black, or a suitable quantity of
logwood extract, 10 parts of glycerine,
1 part absolute alcohol, 2 parts water,
1 part Venetian soap, £ part salicylic
acid. For red, blue, or violet: One part
gelatin glue, 2 parts aniline of desired
color, 1 part absolute alcohol, 10 parts
glycerine, 1 part Venetian soap, and ^
part salicylic acid.
The following are additional recipes
used for this purpose:
IV. — Mix and dissolve 2 to 4 drachms
aniline violet, 15 ounces alcohol, 15
ounces glycerine. The solution is poured
on the cushion and rubbed in with
a brush. The general method of pre-
paring the pad is to swell the gelatin
with cold water, then boil and add the
glycerine, etc.
V. — Mix well 16 pounds of hot lin-
seed oil, 3 ounces of powdered indigo, or
a like quantity of Berlin blue, and 8
pounds of lampblack. For ordinary
sign-stamping an ink without the indigo
might be used. By substituting ultra-
marine or Prussian blue for the lamp-
black, a blue "ink" or paint would
result.
Inks for Hand Stamps. — As an excip-
ient for oily inks, a mixture of castor
oil and crude oleic acid, in parts varying
according to the coloring material used,
is admirable. The following are ex-
amples:
Black. — Oil soluble nigrosin and crude
oleic acid in equal parts. Add 7 to 8
parts of castor oil.
Red. — Oil soluble aniline red, 2 parts;
crude oleic acid, 3 parts; castor oil,
from 30 to 60 parts, according to the in-
tensity of color desired.
Red. — Dissolve £ ounce of carmine in
2 ounces strong water of ammonia, and
add 1 drachm of glycerine and f ounce
dextrin.
Blue. — Rub 1 ounce Prussian blue with
enough water to make a perfectly smooth
paste; then add 1 ounce dextrin, incor-
porate it well, and finally add sufficient
water to bring it to the proper consis-
tency.
Blue. — Oil soluble aniline blue, 1 part;
crude oleic acid, 2 parts; castor oil, 30
to 32 parts.
Violet. — Alcohol, 15 ounces; glycer-
ine, 15 ounces; aniline violet, 2 to 4
drachms. Mix, dissolve, pour the solu-
tion on the cushion, and dab on with a
brush,
Color Stamps for Rough Paper. — It
has hitherto been impossible to get a
satisfactory application for printing with
rubber stamps on rough paper. Fatty
vehicles are necessary for such paper,
and they injure the India rubber. It is
said, however, that if the rubber is first
soaked in a solution of glue, and then in
one of tannin, or bichromate of potash,
it becomes impervious to the oils or fats.
Gum arabic can be substituted for the
glue.
Indelible Hand-Stamp Ink.—
I- — Copper sulphate. ... 20 parts
Aniline chlorate .... 20 parts
Rub up separately to a fine powder,
then carefully mix, and add 10 parts of
dextrin and incorporate. Add 5 parts
of glycerine and rub up, adding water, a
little at a time, until a homogeneous
viscid mass is obtained. An aniline
color is produced in the material, which
boiling does not destroy.
II. — Sodium carbonate . . 22 parts
Glycerine. 85 parts
Gum arabic, in pow-
der. 20 parts
Silver nitrate 11 parts
Ammonia water. ... 20 parts
Venetian turpentine 10 parts
Triturate the carbonate of sodium,
gum arabic, and glycerine together. In
a separate flask dissolve the silver nitrate
in the ammonia water, mix the solution
with the triturate, and heat to boiling,
when the turpentine is to be added, with
constant stirring. After stamping, ex-
pose to the sunlight or use a hot iron.
The quantity of glycerine may be varied
to suit circumstances.
White Stamping Ink for Embroidery. —
Zinc white 2 drachms
Mucilage 1 drachm
Water 6 drachms
Triturate the zinc white with a small
quantity of water till quite smooth, then
add the mucilage and the remainder of
the water.
STENCIL INKS.
I. — Dissolve 1 ounce of gum arabic in
6 ounces water, and strain. This is the
mucilage. For Black Color use drop
black, powdered, and ground with the
mucilage to extreme fineness; for Blue,
ultramarine is used in the same manner;
for Green, emerald green; for White,
flake white; for Red, vermilion, lake, or
carmine; for Yellow, chrome yellow.
When ground too thick they are thinned
412
INKS
with a little water. Apply with a small
brush.
II. — Triturate together 1 pint pine
soot and 2 pints Prussian blue with a
little glycerine, then add 3 pints gum
arabic and sufficient glycerine to form a
thin paste.
Blue Stencil Inks.— The basis of the
stencil inks commonly used varies to
some extent, some preferring a mixture
of pigments with oils, and others a
watery shellac basis. The basis:
I. — Shellac 2 ounces
Borax 1£ ounces
Water 10 ounces
Boil together until 10 ounces of solu-
tion is obtained. The coloring:
Prussian blue 1 ounce
China clay \ ounce
Powdered acacia ... \ ounce
Mix thoroughly and gradually incor-
porate the shellac solution.
II. — Prussian blue 2 ounces
Lampblack 1 ounce
Gum arabic 3 ounces
Glycerine, sufficient.
Triturate together the dry powders
and then make into a suitable paste with
glycerine.
Indelible Stencil Inks.— I.— Varnish
such as is used for ordinary printing ink,
1 pound; black sulphuret of mercury, 1
pound; nitrate of silver, 1 ounce; sul-
phate of iron, 1 ounce; lampblack, 2
tablespoonfuls. Grind all well together;
thin with spirits turpentine as desired.
II. — Sulphate of manganese, 2 parts;
lampblack, 1 part; sugar, 4 parts; all in
fine powder and triturated to a paste in
a little water.
III. — Nitrate of silver, \ ounce; water,
f ounce. Dissolve, add as much of the
strongest liquor of ammonia as will
dissolve the precipitate formed on its
first addition. Then add of mucilage,
\\ drachms, and a little sap green, syrup
of buckthorn, or finely powdered indigo,
to color. This turns black on being
held near the fire, or touched with a hot
iron.
SYMPATHETIC INKS:
Table of Substances Used in llaking
Sympathetic Inks. —
For writing and for bringing out the
writing:
Cobalt chloride, heat.
Cobalt acetate and a little saltpeter,
heat.
Cobalt chloride and nickel chloride
mixed, heat.
Nitric acid, heat.
Sulphuric acid, heat.
Sodium chloride, heat.
Saltpeter, heat.
Copper sulphate and ammonium
chloride, heat.
Silver nitrate, sunlight.
Gold trichloride, sunlight.
Ferric sulphate, infusion of gallnuts
or ferrocyanide of potassium.
Copper sulphate, ferrocyanide of
potassium.
Lead vinegar, hydrogen sulphide.
Mercuric nitrate, hydrogen sulphide.
Starch water, tincture of iodine or
iodine vapors.
Cobalt nitrate, oxalic acid.
Fowler's solution, copper nitrate.
Soda lye or sodium carbonate, phenol-
phthaleine.
A sympathetic ink is one that is in-
visible when written, but which can be
made visible by some treatment. Com-
mon milk can be used for writing, and
exposure to strong heat will scorch and
render the dried milk characters visible.
The following inks are developed by
exposure to the action of reagents:
I. — Upon writing with a very clear
solution of starch on paper that contains
but little sizing, and submitting the dry
characters to the vapor of iodine (or
passing over them a weak solution of
potassium iodide), the writing becomes
blue, and disappears under the action
of a solution of hyposulphite of soda
(1 in 1,000).
II. — Characters written with a weak
solution of the soluble chloride of plati-
num or iridium become black when the
paper is submitted to mercurial vapor.
This ink may be used for marking linen,
as it is indelible.
III. — Sulphate of copper in very dilute
solution will produce an invisible writing,
which may be turned light blue by vapors
of ammonia.
IV. — Soluble compounds of antimony
will become red by hydrogen sulphide
vapor.
V. — Soluble compounds of arsenic
and of peroxide of tin will become yellow
by the same vapor.
VI. — An acid solution of iron chloride
is diluted until the writing is invisible
when dry. This writing has the prop-
erty of becoming red by sulphocyanide
vapors (arising from the action of sul-
phuric acid on potassium sulphocyanide
in a long-necked flask), and it disappears
INKS
413
by ammonia, and may alternately be
made to appear and disappear by these
two vapors.
VII. — Write with a solution of paraf-
fine in benzol. When the solvent has
evaporated, the paraffine is invisible, but
becomes visible on being dusted with
lampblack or powdered graphite or
smoking over a candle flame.
VIII.— Dissolve 1 part of a lead salt,
0.1 part of uranium acetate, and the same
quantity of bismuth citrate in 100 parts
of water. Then add, drop by drop, a
solution of sal ammoniac until the whole
becomes transparent. Afterwards, mix
with a few drops of gum arabic. To
reveal the characters traced with this ink,
expose them to the fumes of sulphuric
acid, which turns them immediately to a
dark brown. The characters fade away
in a few minutes, but can be renewed by
a slight washing with very dilute nitric
acid.
TYPEWRITER RIBBON INKS.
I. — Take vaseline (petrolatum) of high
boiling point, melt it on abater bath or
slow fire, and incorporate by constant
stirring as much lamp or powdered drop
black as it'will take up without becom-
ing granular. If the vaseline remains
in excess, the print is liable to have a
greasy outline; if the color is in excess,
the print will not be clear. Remove the
mixture from the fire, and while it is
cooling mix equal parts of petroleum,
benzine, and rectified oil of turpentine, in
which dissolve the fatty ink, introduced
in small portions, by constant agitation.
The volatile solvents should be in such
quantity that the fluid ink is of the con-
sistence of fresh oil paint. One secret of
success lies in the proper application of
the ink to the ribbon. Wind the ribbon
on a piece of cardboard, spread on a
table several layers of newspaper, then
unwind the ribbon in such lengths as
may be most convenient, and lay it flat
on the paper. Apply the ink, after agi-
tation, by means of a soft brush, and
rub it well into the interstices of the rib-
bon with a toothbrush. Hardly any ink
should remain visible on the surface.
For colored inks use Prussian blue, red
lead, etc., and especially the aniline
colors.
II. — Aniline black * ounce
Pure alcohol 15 ounces
Concentrated glycer-
ine 15 ounces
Dissolve the aniline black in the alco-
hol, and add the glycerine. Ink as be-
fore. The aniline inks containing glyc-
erine are copying inks.
III. — Alcohol . 2 ounces
Aniline color \ ounce
Water 2 ounces
Glycerine 4 ounces
Dissolve the aniline in the alcohol and
add the water and glycerine.
IV. — Castor oil 2 ounces
Cassia oil \ ounce
Carbolic acid \ ounce
Warm them together and add 1 ounce
of aniline color. Indelible typewriter
inks may be made by using lampblack
in place of the aniline, mixing it with soft
petrolatum and dissolving the cooled
mass in a mixture of equal parts of ben-
zine and turpentine.
COLORING AGENTS:
Red.—
I. — Bordeaux red, O. S. 15 parts
Aniline red, O. S.. . . 15 parts
Crude oleic acid. ... 45 parts
Castor oil enough to make 1,000
parts
Rub the colors up with the oleic acid,
add the oil, warming the whole to 100°
to 110° F. (not higher), under constant
stirring. If the color is not sufficiently
intense for your purposes, rub up a trifle
more of it with oleic acid, and add it to
the ink. By a little experimentation you
can get an ink exactly to your desire in
the matter.
Blue -Black.—
II. — Aniline black, O. S.. 5 parts
Oleic acid, crude. ... 5 parts
Castor oil, quantity sufficient to
100 parts.
Violet.—
III.— Aniline violet, O. S.. 3 parts
Crude oleic acid. ... 5 parts
Castor oil, quantity sufficient to
100 parts.
The penetration of the ink may be
increased ad libitum by the addition of a
few drops of absolute alcohol, or, better,
of benzol.
Reinking. — For reinking ribbons use
the following recipe for black: One ounce
aniline black; 15 ounces pure grain
alcohol; 15 ounces concentrated glyc-
erine. Dissolve the aniline black in
the alcohol and then add the glycerine.
For blue use Prussian blue, and for red
use red lead instead of the aniline black.
This ink is also good for rubber stamp
pads.
414
INKS
WRITING INKS.
The common writing fluids depend
mostly upon galls, logwood, or aniline
for coloring. There are literally thou-
sands of formulas. A few of the most re-
liable have been gathered together here:
I. — Aleppo galls (well bruised), 4
ounces; clean soft water, 1 quart; mac-
erate in a clean corked bottle for 10
days or a fortnight or longer, with fre-
quent agitation; then add of gum arabic
(dissolved in a wineglassful of water),
Jounces; lump sugar, £ ounce. Mix
11, and afterwards further add of
phate of iron (green copperas crushed
all), 1£ ounces. Agitate occasionally
2 or 3 days, when the ink may be
canted for use, but is better if the
whole is left to digest together for 2 or 3
weeks. When time is an object, the
whole of the ingredients may at once be
put into a bottle, and the latter agitated
daily until the ink is made; and boiling
water instead of cold water may be em-
ployed. Product, 1 quart of excellent
ink, writing pale at first, but soon turn-
ing intensely black.
II. — Aleppo galls (bruised), 12 pounds;
soft water, 6 gallons. Boil in a copper
vessel for 1 hour, adding more water
to make up for the portion lost by evap-
oration; strain, and again boil the galls
with water, 4 gallons, for J hour; strain
off the liquor, and boil a third time
with water, 2? gallons, and strain. Mix
the several liquors, and while still hot
add of green copperas (coarsely pow-
dered), 4J pounds; gum arabic (bruised
small), 4 pounds. Agitate until dis-
solved, and after defecation strain through
a hair sieve, and keep in a bunged cask
for use. Product, 12 gallons.
III. — Aleppo galls (bruised), 14
pounds; gum, 5 pounds. Put them in a
small cask, and add boiling soft water,
15 gallons. Allow the whole to macer-
ate, with frequent agitation, for a fort-
night, then further add of green cop-
peras, 5 pounds, dissolved in water, 7
pints. Again mix well, and agitate the
whole once daily for 2 or 3 weeks. Prod-
uct, 15 gallons.
Brown Ink. — I. — To make brown ink,
use for coloring a strong decoction of
catechu; the shade may be varied by the
cautious addition of a little weak solution
of bichromate of potash.
II. — A strong decoction of logwood,
with a very little bichromate of potash.
Blue Ink. — To make blue ink, sub-
stitute for the black coloring sulphate of
indigo and dilute it with Water till it pro-
duces the required color.
Anticorrosive or Asiatic Ink. — I. —
Galls, 4 pounds; logwood, 2 pounds;
pomegranate peel, 2 pounds; soft water,
5 gallons. Boil as usual; then add to
the strained, decanted cold liquor, 1
pound of gum arabic, lump sugar or sugar
candy, \ pound; dissolved in water, 3
pints. Product, 4$- gallons. Writes pale,
but flows well from the pen, and soon
darkens.
II. — Bruised galls, 14 pounds; gum,
5 pounds. Put them in a small cask,
and add of boiling water, 15 gallons,
Allow the whole to macerate, with fre-
quent agitation, for 2 weeks, then
further add green copperas, 5 pounds,
dissolved in 7 pints water. .Again mix
well, and agitate the whole daily for 2 or
3 weeks.
Blue -Black Ink. — Blue Aleppo galls
(free from insect perforations), 4 1 ounces ;
bruised cloves, 1 drachm; cold water,
40 ounces; purified sulphate of iron,
1$ ounces ; pure sulphuric acid (by
measure), 35 minims; sulphate of in-
digo (in the form of a paste), which
should be neutral, or nearly so, 1 ounce.
The weights used are avoirdupois, and
the measures apothecaries'. Place the
galls, then bruised with the cloves, in a
50-ounce bottle, pour upon them the
water, and digest, often daily shaking
for a fortnight. Then filter through
paper in another 50-ounce bottle. Get
out also the refuse galls, and wring out
of it the remaining liquid through a
strong, clean linen or cotton cloth, into
the filter, in order that as little as possible
may be lost. Next put in the iron, dis-
solve completely, and filter through
paper. Then the acid, and agitate
briskly. Lastly, the indigo, and thor-
oughly mix by shaking. Pass the whole
through paper; just filter out of one bot-
tle into another until the operation is
finished.
NOTE. — No gum or sugar is proper
and on no account must the acid be
omitted. When intended for copying,
5 A ounces of galls is the quantity. On
the large scale this fine ink is made by
percolation.
Colored Inks. — Inks of various colors
may be made from a strong decoction of
the ingredients used in dyeing, mixed
with a little alum or other substance used
as a mordant, and gum arabic. Any of
the ordinary water-color cakes employed
in drawing diffused through water may
also be used for colored ink.
INKS
415
COPYING INK.
This is usually prepared by adding a
little sugar to ordinary black ink. which
for this purpose should be very rich in
color, and preferably made galls pre-
pared by heat. Writing executed with
this ink may be copied within the space
of 5 or 6 hours, by passing it through a
copying press in contact with thin, un-
sized paper, slightly damped, enclosed
between 2 sheets of thick oiled or waxed
paper, when a reversed transcript will be
obtained, which will read in proper order
when the back of the copy is turned up-
wards. In the absence of a press a copy
may be taken, when the ink is good and
the writing very recent, by rolling the
sheets, duly arranged on a ruler, over the
surface of a flat, smooth table, employing
as much force as possible, and avoiding
any slipping or crumbling of the paper.
Another method is to pass a warm flat-
iron over the paper laid upon the writ-
ing. The following proportions are em-
ployed:
I. — Sugar candy or lump sugar, 1
ounce; or molasses or moist sugar, 1£
ounces; rich black ink, 1J pints; dis-
solve.
II. — Malt wort, 1 pint; evaporate it to
the consistence of a syrup, and then dis-
solve it in good black ink, 1J pints.
III. — Solazza juice, 2 ounces; mild
ale, ^ pint; dissolve, strain, and triturate
with lampblack (previously heated to
dull redness in a covered vessel), | ounce;
when the mixture is complete, add of
strong black, li pints; mix well, and in
2 or 3 hours decant the clear.
After making the above mixtures,
they must be tried with a common steel
pen, and if they do not flow freely, some
more unprepared ink should be added
until they are found to do so.
Alizarine Blue. — In 20 parts of fuming
sulphuric acid dissolve 5 parts of indigo,
and to the solution add 100 parts of ex-
tract of aqueous myrobalpus and 10.5
parts iron filings or turning shavings.
Finally add :
Gum arabic 1.5 parts
Sugar 7.5 parts
Sulphuric acid, 66°
B 10.5 parts
Aniline blue 1.5 parts
Carbolic acid 0.5 parts
Mirobalan extract to make 1,000
parts.
This ink when first used has a bluish
tint, afterwards becoming black.
Alizarine Green. — In 100 parts of
aqueous extract of gall apples dissolve:
Iron sulphate 30 parts
Copper sulphate 0.5 parts
Sulphuric acid 2 parts
Sugar. . 8 parts
Wood vinegar, recti-
fied 50 parts
Indigo carmine 30 parts
Copying Ink for Copying Without a
Press. — An ordinary thin-paper copying
book may be used, and the copying done
by transferrence. It is only necessary
to place the page of writing in the letter
book, just as one would use a leaf of blot-
ting paper. The superfluous ink that
would go into the blotting paper goes on
to the leaf of the letter book, and show-
ing through the thin paper gives on the
other side of the leaf a perfect transcript
of the letter. Any excess of ink on the
page, either of the letter or of the copy-
ing paper, is removed by placing a sheet
of blotting paper between them, and run-
ning one's hand firmly over the whole in
the ordinary manner. This ready tran-
scription is accomplished by using ink
which dries slowly. Obviously the ink
must dry sufficiently slowly for the
characters at the top of a page of writing
to remain wet when the last line is being
written, while it must dry sufficiently to
preclude any chance of the copied page
being smeared while subsequent pages
are being covered. The drying must
also be sufficiently rapid to prevent the
characters "setting ,off," as printers term
it, from one page on to another after
folding. The formula for the requisite
ink is very simple:
Reduce by evaporation 10 volumes of
any good ink to 6, then add 4 volumes
of glycerine. Or manufacture some ink
of nearly double strength, and add to any
quantity of it nearly an equal volume of
glycerine.
Gold Ink. — Mosaic gold, 2 parts; gum
arabic, 1 part; rubbed up to a proper
condition.
Green Ink. — A good, bright green,
aniline ink may be made as follows:
Aniline green (solu-
ble) 2 parts
Glycerine 16 parts
Alcohol 112 parts
Mucilage of gum ara-
bic 4 parts
Dissolve the aniline in the alcohol, and
add the other ingredients. Most of the
gum arabic precipitates, but according
to the author of the formula (Nelson) it
has the effect of rendering the ink slow-
flowing enough to write with. Filter.
416
INKS
Hectograph Inks (see also Hectograph).
—I.— Black.— Methyl violet, 10 parts;
nigrosin, 20 parts; glycerine, 30 parts;
gum arabic, 5 parts; alcohol, 60 parts.
II. — Blue. — Resorein blue M, 10 parts.
Dissolve by means of heat in a mix-
ture of:
Dilute acetic acid .... 1 part
Distilled water 85 parts
Glycerine 4 parts
Alcohol, 90 per cent . . 10 parts
III. — Green. — Aniline green, water
solution, 15 parts; glycerine, 10 parts;
Water, 50 parts; alcohol, 10 parts.
Paste Ink to Write with Water.— I. —
Black. — Take 4 parts of bichromate of
potash, pulverized, and mixed with 25
parts of acetio acid; 50 parts of liquid
extract of logwood; J part of picric acid;
10 parts of pulverized sal sorrel; 10 parts
of mucilage; and \ part of citrate of iron,
and mix well. The liquid extract of
logwood is prepared by mixing 3 parts of
an extract of common commercial qual-
ity with 2 parts of water.
II. — Red. — Take 1 part of red aniline
mixed with 10 parts of acetic acid; 5
parts of citric acid, and 25 parts of
mucilage, all well mixed. For use, mix
1 part of the paste with 16 parts of
water.
III. — Blue. — Take 2 parts of aniline
blue mixed with 10 parts of acetic acid;
5 parts of citric acid, and 40 parts of
mucilage, all well mixed. For use, mix
1 part of the paste with 8 parts of water.
IV. — Violet. — Use the same ingre-
dients in the same proportions as blue,
with the difference that violet aniline is
used instead of blue aniline.
V. — Green. — Take 1 part of aniline
blue; 3 parts of picric acid, mixed with
10 parts of acetic acid; 3 parts of citric
acid, and 80 parts of mucilage. For
use, 1 part of this paste is mixed with 8
parts of water.
yi. — Copying. — Take 6 parts of pul-
verized bichromate of potash, mixed
with 10 parts of acetic acid and 240
parts of liquid extract of logwood, and
add a pulverized mixture of 35 parts of
alum, 20 parts of sal sorrel, and 20 parts
mucilage. Mix well. For use, 1 part
of this paste is mixed with 4 parts of hot
water.
Purple Ink. — I. — A strong decoction
of logwood, to which a little alum or
chloride of tin has been added.
II. (Normandy). — To 12 pounds of
Campeachy wood add as many gallons
of boiling water. Pour the solution
through a funnel with a strainer made of
coarse flannel, or 1 pound of hydrate, or
acetate .of deutoxide of copper finely
powdered (having at the bottom of the
funnel a piece of sponge); then add
immediately 14 pounds of alum, and for
every 340 gallons of liquid add 80
pounds of gum arabic or gum Senegal.
Let these remain for 3 or 4 days, and a
beautiful purple color will be produced.
Red Ink. — Brazil wood, ground, 4
ounces; white wine vinegar, hot, 1 J pints.
Digest in a glass or a well-tinned copper
or enamel saucepan, until the next day;
then gently simmer for half an hour,
adding toward the end gum arabic and
alum, of each, \ ounce.
Inks for Shading Pen.— The essential
feature in the ink for use with a shading
pen is simply the addition of a sufficient
quantity of acacia or other mucilaginous
substance to impart a proper degree of
consistency to the ink. A mixture of 2
parts of mucilage of acacia with 8 of ink
gives about the required consistency.
The following formulas will probably be
found useful:
I. — Water-soluble nigro-
sin .. 1 part
Water 9 parts
Mucilage acacia. ... 1 part
II. — Paris violet 2 parts
Water 6 parts
Mucilage acacia .... 2 parts
III.— Methyl violet 1 part
Distilled water 7 parts
Mucilage acacia. ... 2 parts
IV. — Bordeaux red 3 parts
Alcohol 2 parts
Water :. 20 parts
Mucilage acacia. ... 2 parts
V. — Rosaniline acetate . . 2 parts
Alcohol 1 part
Water 10 parts
Mucilage acacia .... 2 parts
Silver Ink. — I. — Triturate in a mortar
equal parts of silver foil and sulphate of
potassa, until reduced to a fine powder;
then wash the salt out, and mix the resi-
due with a mucilage of equal parts of
gum arabic water.
II. — Make as gold ink, but use silver
leaf or silver bronze powder.
III. — Oxide of zinc 30 grains
Mucilage 1 ounce
Spirit of wine 40 drops
Silver bronze 3 drachms
Rub together, until perfectly smooth,
INKS— INSECT BITES
417
the zinc and mucilage, then add the
spirit of wine and silver bronze and make
up the quantity to 2 ounces with water.
Violet Ink.— I.— For 2 gallons, heat
2 gills of alcohol on a water bath. Add
to the alcohol 2 ounces of violet aniline,
and stir till dissolved; then add the mix-
ture to 2 gallons of boiling water; mix
well, and it is ready for use. Smaller
quantities in proportion.
II. — Another good violet ink is made
by dissolving some violet aniline in water
to which some alcohol has been added.
It takes very little aniline to make a large
quantity of the ink.
White Ink (for other White Inks see
Blueprint Inks). — So-called white inks
are, properly speaking, white paints, as a
white solution cannot be made. A paint
suitable for use as an "ink" may be made
by grinding zinc oxide very fine on a slab
with a little tragacanth mucilage, and
then thinning to the required consistency
to flow from the pen. The mixture re-
quires shaking or stirring from time to
time to keep the pigment from separating.
The "ink" may be preserved by adding a
little oil of cloves or other antiseptic to
prevent decomposition of the mucilage.
White marks may sometimes be made
on colored papers by the application of
acids or alkalies. The result, of course,
depends on the nature of the coloring
matter in each instance, and any "ink"
of this kind would be efficacious or other-
wise, according to the coloring present in
the paper.
Yellow Ink. — I. — Gamboge (in coarse
powder), 1 ounce; hot water, 5 ounces.
Dissolve, and when cold, add of spirit,
f ounce.
II. — Boil French berries, £ pound,
and alum, 1 ounce, in rain water, 1
quart, for £ an hour, or longer, then
strain and dissolve in the hot liquor gum
arabic, 1 ounce.
Waterproof Ink (see also Indelible
Inks). — Any ordinary ink may be made
waterproof by mixing with it a little
ordinary glue. After waterproofing ink
in this way it is possible to wash draw-
ings with soap and water, if necessary,
without the ink running at all.
White Stamping Ink. —
Zinc white 2 drachms
White precipitate .... 5 grains
Mucilage 1 drachm
Water 6 drachms
Triturate the zinc white with a small
quantity of water till quite smooth, then
add the mucilage and the remainder of
the water.
INK FOR THE LAUNDRY:
See Laundry Preparations.
INK FOR LEATHER FINISHERS:
See Leather.
INKS FOR TYPEWRITERS:
See Typewriter Ribbons.
INK FOR WRITING ON GLASS:
See Etching and Glass.
INLAYING BY ELECTROLYSIS.
See also Electro-etching, under Etching.
The process consists in engraving the
design by means of the sand-blast and
stencils on the surface of the article.
The design or pattern is rendered con-
ductive and upon this conductive surface
a precipitate of gold, silver, platinum,
etc., is applied, and fills up the hollows.
Subsequently the surface is ground
smooth.
Insect Bites
REMEDIES FOR INSECT BITES.
I. — Carbolic acid 15 grains
Glycerine 2 drachms
Rose water 4 ounces
II. — Salicylic acid 15 grains
Collodion 2^ drachms
Spirit of ammonia . . 5| drachms
III. — Fluid extract rhus
toxicodendron. ... 1 drachm
Water 8 ounces
IV. — Ipecac, in powder. . 1 drachm
Alcohol 1 ounce
Ether 1 ounce
V. — Betanaphthol 30 grains
Camphor 30 grains
Lanolin cold cream. 1 ounce
VI. — Spirit of sal ammoniac, whose
favorable action upon fresh insect bites
is universally known, is often unavail-
able. A simple means to alleviate the
pain and swelling due to such bites, when
still fresh, is cigar ashes. Place a little
ashes upon the part stung, add a drop of
water — in case of need beer, wine, or cof-
fee may be used instead — and rub the
resulting paste thoroughly into the skin.
It is preferable to use fresh ashes of
tobacco, because the recent heat offers
sufficient guarantee for absolute freedom
from impurities. The action of the to-
bacco ashes is due to the presence of
418
INSECTICIDES
potassium carbonate, which, like spirit
of sal ammoniac, deadens the effect of
the small quantities of acid (formic acid,
etc.) which have been introduced into the
small wound by the biting insect.
Insecticides
(See also Petroleum.)
The Use of Hydrocyanic Acid Gas for
Exterminating Household Insects. — Re-
cent successful applications of hydro-
cyanic acid gas for the extermination of
insects infecting greenhouse plants have
suggested the use of the same remedy for
household pests. It is now an established
fact that 1J grains of 98 per cent pure
cyanide of potassium volatilized in a
cubic foot of space, will, if allowed to
remain for a period of not less than 3
hours, kill all roaches and similar in-
sects.
It may be stated that a dwelling,
office, warehouse, or any building may
be economically cleared of all pests,
provided that the local conditions will
permit the use of this gas. It probably
would be dangerous to fumigate a
building where groceries, dried fruits,
meats, or prepared food materials of any
kind are stored. Air containing more
than 25 per cent of the gas is inflam-
mable; therefore it would be well to put
out all fire in an inclosure before fumi-
gating. Hydrocyanic acid, in all its
forms, is one of the most violent poisons
known, and no neglect should attend its
use. There is probably no sure remedy
for its effects after it has once entered the
blood of any of the higher animals.
When cyanide of potassium is being used
it should never be allowed to come in
contact with the skin, and even a slight
odor of the gas should be avoided.
Should the operator have any cut or
break in the skin of the hands or face
it should be carefully covered with court-
plaster to prevent the gas coming in con-
tact with the flesh, or a small particle
of the solid compound getting into the
cut might cause death by poisoning in a
few minutes' time.
Hydrocyanic acid gas should not be used
in closely built apartments with single
walls between, as more or less of the gas
will penetrate a brick wall. An inexpe-
rienced person should never use cyanide
of potassium for any purpose, and if it be
found practicable to treat buildings in
general for the extermination of insects,
the work should be done only under the
direction of competent officials. Ex-
periments have shown that a smaller
dose and a shorter period of exposure are
required to kill mice than for roaches and
household insects generally, and it read-
ily follows that the larger animals and
human beings would be more quickly
overcome than mice, since a smaller
supply of pure air would be required to
sustain life in mice, and small openings
are more numerous than large ones.
The materials employed and the meth-
od of procedure are as follows: After
ascertaining the cubic content of the
inclosure, provide a glass or stoneware
(not metal) vessel of 2 to 4 gallons capac-
ity for each 5,000 cubic feet of space to
be fumigated. Distribute the jars ac-
cording to the space, and run a smooth
cord from each jar to a common point
near an outside door where they may all
be fastened; support the cord above the
jar by means of the back of a chair or
other convenient object in such a position
that when the load of cyanide of potas-
sium is attached it will hang directly
over the center of the jar. Next weigh
out upon a piece of soft paper about 17
ounces of 98 per cent pure cyanide of
potassium, using a large pair of forceps
for handling the lumps; wrap up and
place in a paper bag and tie to the end of
the cord over the jar. After the load
for each jar has been similarly provided,
it is well to test the working of the cords
to see that they do not catch or bind.
Then remove the jar a short distance
from under the load of cyanide and place
in it a little more than a quart of water,
to which slowly add It pints of commer-
cial sulphuric acid, stirring freely. The
action of the acid will bring the temper-
ature of the combination almost to the
boiling point. Replace the jars beneath
the bags of cyanide, spreading a large
sheet of heavy paper on the floor to catch
any acid that may possibly fly over the
edge of the jar when the cyanide is
dropped, or as a result of the violent
chemical action which follows. Close
all outside openings and open up the
interior of the apartment as much as
possible, in order that the full strength of
the gas may reach the hiding places of
the insects. See that all entrances are
locked or guarded on the outside to pre-
vent persons entering; then leave the
building, releasing the cords as you go.
The gas will all be given off in a few
minutes, and should remain in the
building at least 3 hours.
When the sulphuric acid comes in
contact with the cyanide of potassium
the result is the formation of sulphate of
potash, which remains in the jar, and the
hydrocyanic acid is liberated and es-
INSECTICIDES
419
capes into the air. The chemical action
is so violent as to cause a sputtering, and
frequently particles of the acid are
thrown over the sides of the jar; this may
be prevented by supporting a sheet of
stiff paper over the jar by means of a
hole in the center, through which the
cord supporting the cyanide 01 potassium
is passed, so that when the cord is re-
leased the paper will descend with the
cyanide and remain at rest on the top of
the jar, but will not prevent the easy
descent of the cyanide into the acid.
The weight of this paper will in no way
interfere with the escape of the gas.
At the end of the time required for
fumigation, the windows and doors
should be opened from the outside and
the gas allowed to escape before anyone
enters the building. A general cleaning
should follow, as the insects leave their
hiding places and, dying on the floors,
are easily swept up and burned. The
sulphate of potash remaining in the jars
is poisonous and should be immediately
buried and the jars themselves filled
with earth or ashes. No food that has
remained during fumigation should be
used, and thorough ventilation should
be maintained for several hours. After
one of these experiments it was noted
that ice water which had remained in a
closed cooler had taken up the gas, and
had both the odor and taste of cyanide.
For dwellings one fumigation each
year would be sufficient, but for storage
nouses it may be necessary to make an
application every 3 or 4 months to keep
them entirely free from insect pests.
The cost of materials for one application
is about 50 cents for each 5,000 cubic
feet of space to be treated. The cyanide
of potassium can be purchased at about
35 cents per pound, and the commercial
sulphuric acid at about 4 cents per pound.
The strength of the dose may be in-
creased and the time of exposure some-
what shortened, but this increases the
cost and does not do the work so thor-
oughly. In no case, however, should the
dose remain less than 1 hour.
The application of this method of
controlling household insects and pests
generally is to be found in checking the
advance of great numbers of some par-
ticular insect, or in eradicating them
where they have become thoroughly
established. This method will be found
very advantageous in clearing old build-
ings and ships of cockroaches.
APPLICATIONS FOR CATTLE, POUL-
TRY, ETC.:
See also Veterinary Formulas.
Fly Protect! ves for Animals. —
I. — Oil of cloves 3 parts
Bay oil 5 parts
Eucalyptus tincture 5 parts
Alcohol 150 parts
Water 200 parts
II.— Tar well diluted with grease of
any kind is as effective an agent as any
for keeping flies from cattle. The mix-
ture indicated has the advantage of being
cheap. Applying to the legs, neck, and
ears will usually be sufficient.
Cattle Dip for Ticks.— Dr. Noorgard of
the Bureau of Animal Industry finds the
following dip useful, immersion lasting
one minute:
Sulphur 86 pounds
Extra dynamo oil . . 1,000 gallons
Insecticides for Animals. —
I.— Bay oil 500 1
Naphthalene 100
Camphor 60 Parts
Animal oil 25 }• by
II.— Bay oil, pressed. .. 400 weight'
Naphthalene 100
Crude carbolic acid 10 J
For Dogs, Cats, etc. — The following is
an excellent powder for the removal of
fleas from cats or dogs:
Naphthalene .... 4 av. ounces
Starch 12 av. ounces
Reduce to fine powder. A few grains
of lampblack added will impart a light
gray color, and if desirable a few drops
of oil of pennyroyal or eucalyptus will
disguise the naphthalene odor.
Rub into the skin of the animal and
let the powder remain for a day or two,
when the same can be removed by comb-
ing or giving a bath, to which some
infusion of quassia or quassia chips has
been added. This treatment is equally
efficient for lice and ticks.
Poultry Lice Destroyer. — I. — Twenty
pounds sublimed sulphur; 8 pounds
fuller's earth; 2 pounds powdered naph-
thalene; $ ounce liquid carbolic acid.
Mix thoroughly and put up in half-
pound tins or boxes. Sprinkle about
the nest for use.
II. — Oil of eucalyptus smeared about
the coop will cause the parasites to leave.
To drive them out of the nests of sitting
hens, place in the nest an egg that has
been emptied, and into which has been
inserted a bit of sponge imbibed in
essence of eucalyptus. There may be
used also a concentrate.d solution of
extract of tobacco, to which phenol has
been added.
420
INSECTICIDES
HI. — Cover the floor or soil of the house
with ground or powdered plaster, taken
from old walls, etc.
ANT DESTROYERS:
A most efficacious means of getting rid
of ants is spraying their resorts with pe-
troleum. The common oil is worth more
for this purpose than the refined. Two
thorough sprayings usually suffice.
In armoires, dressing cases, etc., oil of
turpentine should be employed. Pour
it in a large plate, and let it evaporate
freely. Tobacco juice is another effect-
ive agent, but both substances have the
drawback of a very penetrating and dis-
agreeable odor.
Boiling water is deadly to ants wherever
it can be used (as in the garden, or yard
around the house). So is carbon disul-
phide injected into the nests by aid of a
good, big syringe. An emulsion of pe-
troleum and water (oil, 1 part; water, 3
parts) poured on the eartn has proven
very efficacious, when plentifully used
(say from 1 ounce to 3 ounces to the
square yard). A similar mixture of cal-
cium sulphide and water (calcium sul-
phide, 100 parts; water, 1,000 parts; and
the white of 1 egg to every quart of water)
poured into their holes is also effective.
A weak solution of corrosive sublimate
is very deadly to ants. Not only does it
kill them eventually, but it seems to
craze them before death, so that ants of
the same nest, after coming into contact
with the poison, will attack each other
with the greatest ferocity.
Where ants select a particular point
for their incursions it is a good plan to
surround it with a "fortification" of ob-
noxious substance. Sulphur has been
used successfully in this way, and so has
coal oil. The latter, however, is not a
desirable agent, leaving a persistent stain
and odor.
The use of carbon disulphide is rec-
ommended to destroy ants' nests on
lawns. A little of the disulphide is
poured into the openings of the hills,
stepping on each as it is treated to close
it up. The volatile vapors of the disul-
phide will penetrate the chambers of the
nest in every direction, and if sufficient
has been used will kill not only the adult
insects but the larvae as well. A single
treatment is generally sufficient.
Formulas to Drive Ants Away.—
I.— Water 1 quart
Cape aloes 4 ounces
Boil together and add:
Camphor in small
pieces 1£ ounces
II. — Powdered cloves. ... 1 ounce
Insect powder 1 ounce
Scatter around where ants infest.
III. — Cape aloes | pound
Water 4 pints
Boil together and add camphor gum,
3 ounces. Sprinkle around where the
ants infest.
BEDBUG DESTROYERS.
A good bug killer is benzine, pure and
simple, or mixed with a little oil of mirbane.
It evaporates quickly and leaves no stain.
The only trouble is the inflammability of
its vapor.
The following is a popular prepara-
tion: To half a gallon of kerosene oil
add a quart of spirit of turpentine and an
ounce of oil of pennyroyal. This mix-
ture is far less dangerous than benzine.
The pennyroyal as well as the turpentine
are not only poisonous but exceedingly
distasteful to insects of all kinds. The
kerosene while less quickly fatal to bugs
than benzine is cheaper and safer, and
when combined with the other ingre-
dients becomes as efficient.
Where the wall paper and wood work
of a room have become invaded, the
usual remedy is burning sulphur. To
be efficient the room must have every
door, window, crevice, and crack closed.
The floor should be wet in advance so
as to moisten the air. A rubber tube
should lead from the burning sulphur to
a key-hole or auger-hole and through it,
and by aid of a pair of bellows air should
be blown to facilitate the combustion of
the sulphur.
Pastes. — Some housewives are partial
to corrosive sublimate for bedbugs; but
it is effective only if the bug eats the poison.
The corrosive sublimate cannot penetrate
the waxy coat of the insect. But inas-
much as people insist on having this a
few formulas are given.
I. — Common soap 1 av. ounce
Ammonium chlo-
ride 3 av. ounces
Corrosive sublimate 3 av. ounces
Water enough to make 32 fluid-
ounces.
Dissolve the salts in the water and add
the soap.
This will make a paste that can be
painted with a brush around in the
cracks and crevices. Besides, it will
make an excellent filling to keep the
cracks of the wall and wainscoting free
from bugs of all kinds. The formula
could be modified so as to permit the use
INSECTICIDES
of Paris green or London purple, if de-
sired. A decoction of quassia could be
used to dissolve the soap. The latter
paste would, of course, not be poisonous,
and in many instances it would be pre-
ferred. It is possible to make a cold in-
fusion of white hellebore of 25 per cent
strength, and in 1 quart of infusion dis-
solve 1 ounce of common soap. The ad-
vantage of the soap paste is simply to
keep the poisonous substance thoroughly
distributed throughout the mass at all
times. The density of the paste can be
varied to suit. Kerosene oil or turpentine
could replace 6 ounces or 8 ounces of the
water in making the paste, and either of
these would make a valuable addition.
Another paste preparation which will
meet with hearty recommendation is
blue ointment. This ointment, mixed
with turpentine or kerosene oil, can be
used to good advantage; especially so as
the turpentine is so penetrating that both
it and the mercury have a chance to act
more effectually. It can be said that
turpentine will kill the bedbug if the two
come in contact; and kerosene is not far
behindhand in its deadly work.
II. — Blue ointment 1 ounce
Turpentine 3 ounces
Stir well together.
Liquid Bedbug Preparations. — There
is no doubt that the liquid form is the
best to use; unlike a powder, or even a
paste, it will follow down a crack into
remote places where bugs hide, and will
prevent their escape, and it will also kill
the eggs and nits. The following sub-
stances are the most employed, and are
probably the best: Kerosene, turpentine,
benzine, carbolic acid, corrosive subli-
mate solution, oil pennyroyal, and strong
solution of soap. Here are several good
formulas that can be depended upon:
I. — Oil of pennyroyal ... 1 drachm
Turpentine 8 ounces
Kerosene oil, enough to make 1
gallon.
Put up in 8-ounce bottles as a bedbug
exterminator.
II. — Oil of eucalyptus. . . 1 drachm
Eucalyptus leaves. . . 1 ounce
Benzine 2 ounces
Turpentine 2 ounces
Kerosene enough to make 16
ounces.
Mix the turpentine, benzine, and
kerosene oil, and macerate the eucalyp-
tus leaves in it for 24 hours; then strain
and make up the measure to 1 pint, hav-
ing first added the oil of eucalyptus.
FLY-KILLERS.
A fly poison that is harmless to man
may be made from quassia wood as fol-
lows:
Quassia 1,000 parts
Molasses 150 parts
Alcohol 50 parts
Water 5,750 parts
Macerate the quassia in 500 parts of
water for 24 hours, boil for half an hour,
set aside for 24 hours, then press out the
liquid. Mix this with the molasses and
evaporate to 200 parts. Add the alcohol
and the remaining 750 parts of water,
and without filtering, saturate absorbent
paper with it.
This being set out on a plate with a
little water attracts the flies, which are
killed by partaking of the liquid.
Sticky Preparations. —
I. — Rosin 150 parts
Linseed oil 50 parts
Honey 18 parts
Melt the rosin and oil together and stir
in the honey.
II.— Rapeseed oil 70 parts
Rosin 30 parts
Mix and melt together.
III.— Rosin 60 parts
Linseed oil 38 parts
Yellow wax 2 parts
IV.— Rosin 10 parts
Turpentine 5 parts
Rapeseed oil 5 parts v
Honey 1 part
Sprinkling Powders for Flies.—
I. — Long peppers, pow-
dered 5 parts
Quassia wood, pow-
dered 5 parts
Sugar, powdered .... 10 parts
Mix, moisten the mixture with 4 parts
of alcohol, dry, and again powder. Keep
the powder in closely stoppered jars, tak-
ing out a sufficient quantity as desired.
II. — Orris root, powdered 4 parts
Starch, powdered 15 parts
Eucalyptol 1 part
Mix. Keep in a closely stoppered jar
or box. Strew in places affected by
flies.
Fly Essences. —
L— Eucalyptol 10 parts
Bergamot oil 3 parts
Acetic ether 10 parts
Cologne water 50 parts
Alcohol, 90 per cent. 100 parts
Mix. One part of this "essence" is
422
INSECTICIDES
to be added to 10 parts of water and
sprayed around the rooms frequently.
II. — Eucalyptol 10 parts
Acetic ether 5 parts
Cologne water 40 parts
Tincture of insect
powder (1 :5) 50 parts
REMEDIES AGAINST HUMAN PARA-
SITES:
By weight
I. — Yellow wax 85 parts
Spermaceti 60 parts
Sweet oil 500 parts
Melt and add:
Boiling distilled
water 150 parts
After cooling add:
Clove oil 2 parts
Thyme oil 3 parts
Eucalyptus oil .... 4 parts
II. — Bay oil, pressed. . . 100 parts
Acetic ether 12 parts
Clove oil 4 parts
Eucalyptus oil 3 parts
For Head Lice in Children.— One of
the best remedies is a vinegar of sabadilla.
This is prepared as follows: Sabadilla
seed, 5 parts; alcohol, 5 parts; acetic acid,
9 parts; and water, 36 parts. Macerate
for 3 days, express and filter. The direc-
tions are: Moisten the scalp and hair
thoroughly at bedtime, binding a cloth
around the head, and let remain over-
night. If there are any sore spots on the
scalp, these should be well greased be-
fore applying the vinegar.
To Exterminate Mites. — Mix together
10 parts of naphthalene, 10 parts of phenic
acid, 5 parts of camphor, 5 parts of lemon
oil, 2 parts of thyme oil, 2 parts of oil of
lavender, and 2 parts of the oil of juniper,
in 500 parts of pure alcohol.
Vermin Killer.—
Sabadilla, powder. . 2 av. ounces
Acetic acid ^ fluidounco
Wood alcohol 2 fluidounces
Water sufficient to make 16 fluid
ounces.
Mix the acetic acid with 14 fluidounces
of water and boil the sabadilla in this
mixture for 5 to 10 minutes, and when
nearly cold add the alcohol, let stand,
and decant the clear solution and bottle.
Directions: Shake the bottle and apply
lo the affected parts night and morning.
INSECTICIDES FOR PLANTS.
Two formulas for insecticides with
especial reference to vermin which
attack plants:
I. — Kerosene 2 gallons
Common soap \ pound
Water 1 gallon
Heat the solution of soap, add it boil-
ing hot to the kerosene and churn until
it forms a perfect emulsion. For use
upon scale insects it is diluted with 9
parts of water; upon other ordinary
insects with 15 parts of water, and upon
soft insects, like plant lice, with from 20
to 25 parts of water.
For lice% etc., which attack the roots of
vines and trees the following is recom-
mended:
II. — Caustic soda 5 pounds
Rosin 40 pounds
Water, a sufficient quantity.
Dissolve the soda in 4 gallons of water,
by the aid of heat, add the rosin and
after it is dissolved and while boiling add,
slowly, enough water to make 50 gallons.
For use, 1 part of this mixture is diluted
with 10 parts of water and about 5 gal-
lons of the product poured into a depres-
sion near the root of the vine or tree.
For Cochineal Insects. — An emulsion
for fumagine (malady of orange trees
caused by the cochineal insect) and other
diseases caused by insects is as follows:
Dissolve, hot, 4 parts of black soap in
15 parts of hot water. Let cool to 104°
F., and pour in 10 parts of ordinary
petroleum, shaking vigorously. Thus
an emulsion of cafe au lait color is ob
tained, which may be preserved in-
definitely. For employment, each part
of the emulsion is diluted, according to
circumstances, with from 10 to 20 parts
of water.
For Locusts. — Much trouble is ex-
perienced in the Transvaal and Natal
with locust pests, the remedies used
being either a soap spray, containing 1
p3imd ordinary household soap in 5
gallons of water, or arsenite of soda, the
latter being issued by the government for
the purpose, and also used for the de-
struction of prickly pear, and as a basis
of tick dips. A solution of 1 pound in
10 gallons of water is employed for full-
grown insects, and of 1 pound in 20
gallons of water for newly hatched ones,
1 ,pound of sugar being added to each
pound of arsenite dissolved. The solu-
tion sometimes causes sores on the skin,
and the natives employed in its use are
given grease to rub over themselves as a
measure of protection. An advantage
of the arsenite solution over soap is that
much less liquid need be used.
A composition for the destruction of
pear blight, which has been patented in
INSECTICIDES
the United States, is as follows: Pepper-
mint oil, 16 parts; ammonia water, 60
parts; calomel, 30 parts; and linseed oil,
1,000 parts.
For Moths and Caterpillars. —
I. — Venice turpentine 200 parts
Rosin 1,000 parts
Turpentine 140 parts
Tar 80 parts
Lard 500 parts
Rape oil. 240 parts
Tallow .WO parts
II. — Rosin 50 parts
Lard 40 parts
Stearine oil 40 parts
For Non-Masticating Insects . — For
protection against all non-masticating
arid many mandibulate insects, kerosene
oil is much used. It is exhibited in the
form of emulsion, which may be made as
follows:
Kerosene 2 gallons
Common soap 8 ounces
Water 1 gallon
Dissolve the soap in the water by the
aid of heat, bring to the boiling point,
and add the kerosene in portions, agitat-
ing well after each addition. This is
conveniently done by means of the pump
to be used for spraying the mixture.
For Scale Insects. — For destroying
scale insects dilute the cochineal emul-
sion (see above) with 9 times its volume
of water; in the case of most others, ex-
cept lice, dilute with 14 volumes, and for
the latter with 20 to 25 volumes.
For the extermination of scale insects,
resinous preparations are also em-
ployed, which kill by covering them with
an impervious coating. Such a wash
may be made as follows:
Rosin 3£ pounds
Caustic soda 1 pound
Fish oil 8 ounces
Water 20 gallons
Boil the rosin, soda, and oil with a
small portion of the water, adding the
remainder as solution is effected.
For the San Jose scale a stronger
preparation is required, the proportion
of water being decreased by half, but
such a solution is applied only when the
tree is dormant.
Scale Insects on Orange Trees.— Scale
insect enemies of orange trees are direct-
ly controlled in two ways: (1) By spray-
ing the infested trees with some liquid
insecticide, and (2) by subjecting them to
the fumes of hydrocyanic acid gas, com-
monly designated as "gassing." The
latter method is claimed to be the most
effective means known of destroying scale
insects. In practice the method con-
sists in closing a tree at night with a tent
and filling the latter with the poisonous
fumes generated by treating refined
potassium cyanide (98 per cent) with
commercial sulphuric acid (66 per cent)
and water. The treatment should con-
tinue from 30 to 40 minutes, the longer
time being preferable. The work is
done at night to avoid the scalding which
follows day applications, at least in bright
sunshine.
The oily washes are said to be the
best for the use by the spraying method.
"Kerosene emulsion" is a type of these
washes. A formula published by the
United States Department of Agricul-
ture follows: Kerosene, 2 gallons; whale-
oil soap, ^ pound; water, 1 gallon. The
soap is dissolved in hot water, the kero-
sene added, and the whole thoroughly
emulsified by means of a power pump
until a rather heavy, creamy emulsion is
produced. The quantity of soap may
be increased if desired. The insecti-
cide is applied by spraying the infected
tree with an ordinary force pump with
spraying nozzle.
Coating Against the Plant Louse. —
(a) — Mix 75 parts of green soap, 50
parts of linseed oil, and 25 parts of car-
bolic acid. Afterwards mix the mass
with 15,000 parts of water.
(6) Mix 4 parts of carbolic acid with
100 parts water glass.
Louse Washes. —
Unslaked lime 18 parts
Sulphur 9 parts
Salt 6.75 parts
Mix as follows: A fourth part of the
lime is slaked and boiled for f of an hour
with the sulphur in 22.6 parts of water.
The remainder of the lime is then slaked
and added with the salt to the hot mix-
ture. The whole is burned for another
half hour or an hour, and then diluted to
353 parts. The fluid is applied luke-
warm when the plants are not in active
growth.
For Slugs on Roses.—
Powdered pyrethrum. 8 ounces
Powdered colocynth.. 4 ounces
Powdered hellebore . . 16 ounces
Flea Powder. —
Naphthalene 4 ounces
Talcum 10 ounces
Tobacco dust 2 ounces
424
INSECT POWDERS
To Keep Flaxseed Free from Bugs. —
As a container use a tin can with a close-
fitting top. At the bottom of the can
place a small vial of chloroform with a
loose-fitting cork stopper. Then pour
the flaxseed, whole or ground, into the
can, covering the vial. Enough of the
chloroform will escape from the vial to
kill such insects as infest the flaxseed.
INSECT POWDERS.
Pyrethrum, whale oil (in the form of
soap), fish oil (in the form of soap), soft
soap, paraffine, Prussic acid, Paris green,
white lead, sulphur, carbon bisulphide,
acorus calamus, camphor, Cayenne
pepper, tobacco, snuff, asafetida, white
hellebore, eucalyptol, quassia, borax,
acetic ether are most important substances
used as insecticides, alone, or in combi-
nation of two or more of them. The
Prussic acid and Paris green are dan-
gerous poisons and require to be used
with extreme care:
Insect powder is used for all small in-
sects and as a destroyer of roaches. The
observations of some experimenters seem
to show that the poisonous principle of
these flowers is non-volatile, but the
most favorable conditions under which
to use them are in a room tightly closed
and well warmed. There may be two
poisonous principles, one of which is vola-
tile. Disappointment sometimes arises
in their use from getting powder either
adulterated, or which has been exposed
to the air and consequently lost some of
its efficiency.
The dust resulting from the use of
insect powder sometimes proves irri-
tating to the mucous membranes of the
one applying the powder. This is best
avoided by the use of a spray atomizer.
Persistence in the use of any means is
an important element in the work of
destroying insects. A given poison may
be employed and no visible result follow
at first, when in reality many may have
been destroyed, enough being left to de-
ceive the observer as to numbers. They
multiply very rapidly, too, it must be
remembered, and vigorous work is re-
quired to combat this increase. Where
they can easily migrate from one house-
holder's premises to those of another, as
in city "flats," it requires constant vigi-
lance to keep them down, and entire
extermination is scarcely to be expected.
The ordinary insect powder on the
market is made from pyrethrum car-
neum, pyrethrum roseum, and pyrethrum
cinerarise-folium. The first two are
generally ground together and are com-
mercially called Persian insect powder;
while the third is commonly called
Dalmatian insect powder. These pow-
ders are sold in the stores under many
names and in combination with other
powders under proprietary names.
The powder is obtained by crushing the
dried flowers of the pellitory (pyrethrum).
The leaves, too, are often used. They
are cultivated in the Caucasus, whence
the specific name Caucasicum some-
times used. Pyrethrum belongs to the
natural order compositse, and is closely
allied to the chrysanthemum. The
active principle is not a volatile oil, as
stated by some writers, but a rosin,
which can be dissolved out from the dry
flowers by means of ether. The leaves
also contain this rosin but in smaller
proportions than the flowers. Tincture
of pyrethrum is made by infusing the
dried flowers in five times their weight
of rectified spirit of wine. Diluted with
water it is used as a lotion.
Borax powder also makes a very good
insectifuge. It appears to be particu-
larly effective against the common or
kitchen cockroach. Camphor is sometimes
used, and the powdered dried root of
acorus calamus, the sweet flag. A mix-
ture of white lead with four times its
weight of chalk is also highly recom-
mended. The fish-oil soaps used in a
powdered form are made from various
recipes, of which the following is a typi-
cal example:
Powdered rosin. . . .
Caustic soda
Fish or whale oil . .
2 pounds
8 ounces
4 ounces
Boil together in a gallon of water for
at least an hour, replacing some of the
water if required.
The following insect-powder formulas
are perfectly safe to use. In each in-
stance insect powder relates to either one
of the pyrethrum plants powdered, or to
a mixture:
I. — Insect powder. ... 8 ounces av.
Powdered borax. . 8 ounces av.
Oil of pennyroyal . 2 fluidrachms
II. — Insect powder 8 ounces av.
Borax 8 ounces av.
Sulphur 4 ounces av.
Oil of eucalyptus . 2 fluidrachms
This formula is especially good for
cockroaches:
III. — Insect powder 14 ounces av.
Quassia in fine
powder 6 ounces av.
White hellebore,
powdered 2 ounces av.
INSECT POWERS— INSULATION
425
Beetle Powder.—
Cocoa powder 4 ounces
Starch 8 ounces
Borax 37 ounces
Mix thoroughly.
Remedies Against Mosquitoes. — A rem-
edy to keep off mosquitoes, etc., is com-
posed as follows: Cinnamon oil, 1 part;
patchouli oil, 1 part; sandal oil, 4 parts;
alcohol, 400 parts. This has a pleasant
odor.
Oil of pennyroyal is commonly used
to keep mosquitoes away. Some form
of petroleum rubbed on the skin is even
more efficient, but unpleasant to use,
and if left on long enough will burn the
skin.
A 40 per cent solution of formaldehyde
for mosquito bites gives remarkably
quick and good results. It should be
applied to the bites as soon as possible
with the cork of the bottle, and allowed
to dry on. Diluted ammonia is also
used to rub on the bites.
Roach Exterminators.— Borax, starch,
and cocoa are said to be the principal in-
gredients of some of the roach foods on
the market. A formula for a poison of
this class is as follows:
Borax 37 ounces
Starch 9 ounces
Cocoa 4 ounces
Moth Exterminators. — Cold storage is
the most effective means of avoiding the
ravages o£ moths. Where this is imprac-
ticable, as in bureau drawers, camphor
balls may be scattered about with satis-
factory result. The following is also ef-
fective:
Spanish pepper 100 parts
Turpentine oil 50 parts
Camphor 25 parts
Clove oil 10 parts
Alcohol, 96 per cent. 900 parts
Cut the Spanish pepper into little bits,
and pour over them the alcohol and oil of
turpentine. Let stand 2 or 3 days, then
decant, and press out. To the liquid
thus obtained add the camphor and
clove oil, let stand a few days, then filter
and fill into suitable bottles. To use,
imbibe bits of bibulous paper in the
liquid and put them in the folds of
clothing to be protected.
Protecting Stuffed Furniture from
Moths. — The stuffing, no matter whether
consisting of tow, hair, or fiber, as well
as the covering, should be coated with a
10 per cent solution of sulphur in carbon
sulphide. The carbon sulphide dis-
solves the sulphur so as to cause a very
fine division and to penetrate the fibers
completely.
Powder to Keep Moths Away. —
Cloves 2 ounces
Cinnamon 2 ounces
Mace 2 ounces
Black pepper 2 ounces
Orris root 2 ounces
Powder coarsely and mix well together.
Book-Worms. — When these insects
infest books they are most difficult to
deal with, as the ordinary destructive
agents injuriously affect the paper of the
book. The books should be well beaten
and exposed to the sun, and a rag moist-
ened with formalin passed through the
binding and the covers where possible.
In other cases the bottom edge of the
binding should be moistened with forma-
lin before putting on the shelves, so that
formaldehyde vapor can be diffused.
INSECT POWDERS:
I See Insecticides.
INSECT TRAP.
Into a china wash-basin, half filled with
water, pour a glass of beer; cover the
basin with a newspaper, in the center of
which a small round hole is cut. Place
it so that the edges of the paper lie on
the floor and the hole is over the center of
the basin. At night beetles and other in-
sects, attracted by the smell of beer, climb
the paper and fall through the hole into
the liquid.
INSTRUMENT ALLOYS:
See Alloys.
INSTRUMENT CLEANING:
See Cleaning Preparations and Meth-
ods.
INSTRUMENT LACQUER:
See Lacquers.
Insulation
ELECTRIC INSULATION:
Insulating Varnishes. — For earth
cables and exposed strong current
wires:
I. — Melt 2 parts of asphalt together
with 0.4 parts of sulphur, add 5 parts of
linseed-oil varnish, linseed oil or cotton-
seed oil, keep at 320° F. for 6 hours;
next pour in oil of turpentine as required.
II. — Maintain 3 parts of elaterite with
2 parts of linseed^oil varnish at 392° F.
for 5 to 6 hours; next melt 3 parts of
asphalt, pour both substances together,
and again maintain the temperature of
426
INSULATION
392° F. for 3 to 4 hours, and then add 1
part of linseed-oil varnish and oil of
turpentine as required.
III. — Insulating Varnish for Dynamos
and Conduits with Low Tension.— Shellac,
4 parts; sandarac, 2 parts; linoleic acid,
2 parts; alcohol, 15 parts.
IV. — An insulating material which
contains no caoutchouc is made by dis-
solving natural or coal-tar asphalt in
wood oil, adding sulphur and vulcanizing
at 572° F. The mixture of asphalt and
wood oil may also be vulcanized with
chloride of sulphur by the ordinary proc-
ess used for caoutchouc. Before vul-
canizing, a solution of rubber scraps in
naphthalene is sometimes added and the
naphthalene expelled by a current of
steam. Substitutes for hard rubber are
made of natural or artificial asphalt com-
bined with heavy oil of tar and talc or
infusorial earth.
Most of the insulating materials ad-
vertised under alluring names consist of
asphalt combined with rosin, tar, and an
inert powder such as clay or asbestos.
Some contain graphite, which is a good
conductor and therefore a very unde-
sirable ingredient in an insulator.
INSULATION AGAINST HEAT.
An asbestos jacket is the usual insu-
lator for boilers, steampipes, etc. The
thicker the covering around the steam-
pipe, the more heat is retained. A
chief requirement for such protective
mass is that it contains air in fine chan-
nels, so that there is no connection with
the closed-in air. Most substances
suitable for insulating are such that they
can only with difficulty be used for a
protective mass. The most ordinary
way is to mix infusorial earth, kieselguhr,
slag-wool, hair, ground cork, etc., with
loam or clay, so that this plastic mass may
be applied moist on the pipes. In using
such substances care should be taken
carefully to clean and heat the surfaces
to be covered. The mass for the first
coating is made into a paste by gradual
addition of water and put on thick
with a brush. After drying each time
a further coating is applied. This
is repeated until the desired thickness
is reached. The last layer put on is
rubbed smooth with the flat hand.
Finally, strips of linen are wound around,
which is coated with tar or oil paint as a
protection against outside injuries. Cork
stones consist of crushed cork with a
mineral binding agent, and are sold
pressed into various shapes.
Leather Waste Insulation. — Portions
of leather, such as the fibers of sole
leather of any size and form, are first
rendered soft. The surface is then
carded or the surface fibers scratched or
raised in such a manner that when sev-
eral pieces are pressed together their
surface fibers adhere, and a compact,
durable piece of leather is produced.
The carding can be done by an ordinary
batting machine, the action of which is
so regulated that not only are the pieces
of leather softened, but the fibers on
their surfaces raised. The structure of
the separate pieces of leather remains
essentially unaltered. The raised fibers
give the appearance of a furry substance
to the leather. The batted pieces of
leather are well mixed with paste or
some suitable gum, either in or outside
of the machine, and are then put into
specially shaped troughs, where they are
pressed together into layers of the re-
quired size and thickness. The separate
pieces of leather adhere and are matted
together. An agglutinant, if accessible,
will contribute materially to the strength
and durability of the product. The
layers are dried, rolled, and are then
ready for use. The pieces need not
be packed together promiscuously. If
larger portions of waste can be secured,
the separate pieces can be arranged one
upon another in rows. The larger pieces
can also, be used for the top and bottom
of a leather pad, the middle portion of
which consists of smaller pieces.
INSULATION AGAINST MOISTURE,
WEATHER, ETC.
Experiments have shown that with the
aid of red lead a very serviceable, resist-
ive, and weatherproof insulation material
may be produced from inferior fibers, to
take the place, in many cases, of gutta-
percha and other substances employed
for insulating purposes, and particularly
to effect the permanent insulation of
aerial conductors exposed to the action
of the weather. Hackethal used for the
purpose any vegetable fiber which is
wrapped around the conductors to be
insulated. The fiber is then saturated
with liquid red lead. The latter is ac-
complished in the proportion of 4 to 5
parts of red lead, by weight, to 1 part, by
weight, of linseed oil, by the hot or cold
process, by mere immersion or under
pressure. All the three substances,
fiber, oil, and red lead, possess in them-
selves a certain insulating capacity, but
none of them is alone of utility for such
purposes. Even the red lead mixed with
linseed oil does not possess in the liquid
state a high degree of insulating power,
IODINE SOLVENT— IRON
427
Only when both substances, the ingre-
dients of the linseed oil capable of ab-
sorbing oxygen and the lead oxide rich in
oxygen, oxidize in the air, a new gummy
product of great insulating capacity
results.
INTENSIFIERS:
See Photography.
IODINE SOLVENT.
Iodine is quickly dissolved in oils by
first rubbing up the iodine with one-
fourth of its weight of potassium iodide
and a few drops of glycerine, then adding
a little oil and rubbing up again. The
addition of the resultant liquid to the rest
of the oil and a sharp agitation finishes
the process.
IODINE SOAP:
See Soap.
IODOFORM DEODORIZER.
Rub the part with about a teaspoonful
of wine vinegar, after a previous thor-
ough washing with soap.
Iron
(See also Metals and Steel.)
To Color Iron Blue. — One hundred
and forty parts of hyposulphite of soda
are dissolved in 1,000 parts of water; 35
parts of acetate of lead are dissolved in
1,000 parts of water; the two solutions
are mixed, boiled, and the iron is im-
mersed therein. The metal takes a blue
color, such as is obtained by heating.
To Distinguish Iron from Steel. — The
piece of metal to be tested is washed and
then plunged into a solution of bichro-
mate of potash, with the addition of
considerable sulphuric acid. In half a
minute or a minute the metal can be
taken out, washed, and wiped. Soft
steels and cast iron assume under this
treatment an ash-gray tint. Tempered
steels become almost black, without any
metallic reflection. Puddled and re-
fined irons remain nearly white and al-
ways have metallic reflections on the
part of their surface previously filed, the
remainder of the surface presenting ir-
regular blackish spots,,
Another method is to apply a magnet.
Steel responds much more quickly and
actively to the magnetic influence than
does iron.
Powder for Hardening Iron and Steel.
—For wrought iron place in the charge
20 parts, by weight, of common salt; 2
parts, by weight, of potassium cyanide;
0.3 parts, by weight, of potassium bi-
chromate; 0.15 parts, by weight, of
broken glass; and 0.1 part, by weight, of
potassium nitrate for case-hardening.
For cooling and hardening cast iron: To
60 parts, by weight, of water add 2.5
parts, by weight, of vinegar; 3 parts, by
weight, of common salt; and 0.25 parts,
by weight, of hydrochloric acid.
Preventing the Peeling of Coatings
for Iron. — To obviate the scaling of coat-
ings on iron, if exposed to the attacks of
the weather, it is advisable to wash the
iron thoroughly and to paint it next with
a layer of boiling linseed oil. If thus
treated, the paint never cracks off. If
the iron objects are small and can be
heated, it is advantageous to heat them
previously and to dip them into linseed
oil. The boiling oil enters all the pores
of the metal and drives out the moisture.
The coating adheres so firmly that frost,
rain, nor wind can injure it.
To Soften Iron Castings. — To soften
hard iron castings, heat the object to a
high temperature, cover it over with fine
coal dust or some similar substance, and
allow it to cool gradually. When the
articles are of small size, a number of
them are packed in a crucible with sub-
stances yielding carbon to iron at a
glowing heat. The crucible is then
tightly closed, and placed in a stove or on
an open fire. It is gradually hea"ted and
kept at a red heat for several hours, and
then allowed to cool slowly. Cast-iron
turnings, carbonate of soda, and unre-
fined sugar are recommended as sub-
stances suitable for packing in the cru-
cible with the castings. If unrefined
sugar alone is added, the quantity must
not be too small. By this process the
iron may be rendered extremely soft.
To Whiten Iron. — Mix ammoniacal
salt in powder with an equal volume of
mercury. This is dissolved in cold
water and mixed thoroughly. Immerse
the metal, heated to redness, in this bath
and it will come out possessing the white-
ness and beauty of silver. Care should
be taken not to overheat the article and
thus burn it.
IRON, BITING OFF RED HOT:
See Pyrotechnics.
IRON, CEMENTS FOR:
See Adhesives.
IRON, TO CLEAN:
See Cleaning Preparations and Meth-
ods.
IRON TO CLOTH, GLUING:
See Adhesives.
428
IRON— IVORY
IRON, HOW TO ATTACH RUBBER TO :
See Adhesives, under Rubber Ce-
ments.
IRON OXALATE DEVELOPER:
See Photography.
IRON SOLDERS:
See Solders.
IRONING WAX:
See Laundry Preparations.
IRON VARNISHES:
See Varnishes.
ITCH, BARBERS':
See Ointments.
Ivory
(See also Bones, Shell, and Horn.)
TO COLOR IVORY:
Red.— The article is placed for 24
hours in water, 1,000 parts of which
carry 100 parts of vinegar (acetic acid,
6 per cent), and from 1 to 5 parts of
aniline red. As soon as it acquires the
desired color pour off the liquid, let the
ivory dry, and polish with Vienna lime.
Black. — Wash the article first in pot-
ash or soda lye and then put into a
neutral solution of silver nitrate. Drain
off the liquid and lay in the direct sun-
shine.
Red -Purple. — Put the article in a weak
solution of triple gold chloride and then
into direct sunshine.
Red. — For a different shade of red
(from the first given), place the article
for a short time in water weakly acidified
with nitric acid and then in a solution of
cochineal in ammonia.
Yellow. — Leave for several hours in a
solution of lead acetate, rinse and dry.
When quite dry place in a solution of
potassium chromate.
To Color Billiard Balls Red.—
Fiery Red. — Wash the article first in a
solution of carbonate of soda, then plunge
for a few seconds in a bath of equal parts
of water and nitric acid. Remove,
rinse in running water: then put in an
alcoholic solution of fuch^ine and let it
remain until it is the required color.
Cherry Red. — Clean by washing in the
sodium carbonate solution, rinse and lay
in a 2 per cent solution of tin chloride,
for a few moments, then boil in a solution
of logwood. Finally lay in a solution of
potassium carbonate until it assumes the
desired color.
Pale Red. — Wash in soda solution, rinse
and lay for 25 minutes in a 5 per cent
solution of nitric acid, rinse, then lay for
several minutes in a weak solution of tin
chloride. Finally boil in the following
solution: Carmine, 2 parts; sodium car-
bonate, 12 parts; water, 200 parts; acetic
acid enough to saturate.
Broivn. — Apply several coats of an
ammoiiiacal solution of potassium per-
manganate. Similar results are ob-
tained if the solution is diluted with vin-
egar, and the ivory article allowed to
remain in the liquid for some time.
Etching on Ivory (see also Etching). —
Although decorations on ivory articles,
such as umbrella handles, cuff-buttons,
fans, book-covers, boxes, etc., are gen-
erally engraved, the work is frequently
done by etching. The patterns must be
very delicate, and are executed in lines
only. The simplest way is to cover the
surface with a thin rosin varnish. Then
transfer the pattern and scratch it out ac-
curately ,with a pointed needle. Otherwise
proceed same as in etching on metal and
stone, making an edge of modeling wax
around the surface to be etched and pour-
ing on the acid, which consists, in this
case, of sulphuric acid, 1 part, to which
5 to 6 parts of water are added. It acts
very quickly. The lines turn a deep
black. If brown lines are desired, dis-
solve 1 part of silver nitrate in 5 parts of
water, etch for a short time, and expose
the article for a few hours to the light,
until the design turns brown. Very
often etchings in ivory are gilded. For
this purpose, fill the etched patterns
accurately with siccatives, using a writ-
ing pen, dry, and dab on gold leaf.
After a few hours remove the superfluous
gold with wadding, and the design will
be nicely gilded. Etched ivory articles
present a very handsome appearance if
they are first covered with a silvery gloss,
the design being gilded afterwards. For
the former purpose the etched object is
laid in the above described solution of
silver nitrate until it has acquired a dark
yellow color. Then rinse it off in clean
water and, while still moist, expose to
direct sunlight. After 3 to 4 hours the
surface becomes entirely black, but will
take on a fine sHvery luster if rubbed
with soft leather.
Flexible Ivory. — To soften ivory and
render it flexible put pure phosphoric
acid (specific gravity, 1.13) into a wide-
mouthed bottle or jar that can be cov-
ered, and steep the ivory in this until it
partially loses its opacity; then wash the
ivory in cold, soft water and dry, when
the ivory will be found soft and flexible.
IVORY
429
It regains its hardness in course of time
when freely exposed to air, although its
flexibility can be restored by immersing
the ivory in hot water.
Another softening fluid is prepared by
mixing 1 ounce of spirit of niter with 5
ounces of water and steeping the ivory in
the fluid for 4 or 5 days.
Hardened Ivory. — To restore the hard-
ness to ivory that has been softened by
the above methods, wrap it in a sheet of
white writing paper, cover it with dry de-
crepitated salt, and let it remain thus
covered for 24 hours. The decrepitated
salt is prepared by strewing common
kitchen salt on a plate or dish and stand-
ing same before a fierce fire, when the
salt loses its crystalline appearance and
assumes a dense opaque whiteness.
IMITATION IVORY:
See also Casein and Plaster.
Manufacture of Compounds Imitating
Ivory, Shell, etc. — Casein, as known,
may act the part of an acid and combine
with bases to form caseinates or caseates;
among these compounds, caseinates of
potash, of soda, and of ammonia are the
only ones soluble in water; all the others
are insoluble and may be readily pre-
pared by double decomposition. Thus,
for example, to obtain caseinate of
alumina, it is sufficient to add to a solu-
tion of casein in caustic soda a solution
of sulphate of alumina; an insoluble
precipitate of casein, or caseinate of
alumina, is instantly formed. This pre-
cipitate ought to be freed from the sul-
phate of soda (formed by double de-
composition) by means of prolonged
washing.
When pure, ordinary cellulose may be
incorporated with it by this process, pro-
ducing a new compound, cheaper than
pure cellulose, although possessing the
same properties, and capable of replacing
it in all its applications. According to
the results desired, in transparency,
color, hardness, etc., the most suitable
caseinate should be selected. Thus, if a
translucent compound is to be obtained,
the caseinate of alumina yields the best.
If a white compound is desired, the case-
inate of zinc or of magnesia should be
chosen; and for colored products the case-
inates of iron, copper, and nickel will
give varied tints.
The process employed for the new
products, with a base of celluloid and
caseinate, is as follows: On one hand
casein is dissolved in a solution of caus-
tic soda (100 of water for 10 to 25 of
soda), and this liquid is filtered, to sepa-
rate the matters not dissolved and the
impurities.
On the other hand, a salt (of the base
of which the caseinate is desired) is dis-
solved, and the solution filtered. It is
well not to operate on too concentrated a
solution. The two solutions are mixed
in a reservoir furnished with a mechan-
ical stirrer, in order to obtain the insol-
uble caseinate precipitate in as finely
divided a state as possible. This precip-
itate should be washed thoroughly so as
to free it from the soda salt formed by
double decomposition, but on account of
its gummy or pasty state, this washing
presents certain difficulties, and should
be done carefully. After the washing it
should be freed from the. greater part of
water contained by draining, followed
by drying, or energetic pressing; then it
is washed in alcohol, dried or pressed
again, and is ready to be incorporated in
the mass of the celluloid.
For the latter immersion and washing,
it has been found that an addition of 1 to
5 per cent of borax is advantageous, for
it renders the mass more plastic, and
facilitates the operation of mixing. This
may be conducted in a mixing apparatus;
but, in practice, it is found preferable to
effect it with a rolling mill, operated as
follows:
The nitro-cellulose is introduced in
the plastic state, and moistened with a
solution of camphor in alcohol (40 to 50
parts of camphor in 50 to 70 parts of
alcohol for 100 parts of nitro-cellulose)
as it is practiced in celluloid factories.
This plastic mass of nitro-cellulose is
placed in a rolling mill, the cylinders of
which are slightly heated at the same
time as the caseinate, prepared as above;
then the whole mass is worked by the
cylinders until the mixture of the two is
perfectly homogeneous, and the final
mass is sufficiently hard to be drawn out
in leaves in the same way as practiced for
pure celluloid. These leaves are placed
in hydraulic presses, where they are com-
pressed, first hot, then cold, and the
block thus formed is afterwards cut into
leaves of the thickness desired. These
leaves are dried in an apparatus in the
same way as ordinary celluloid. The
product resembles celluloid, and has all
its properties. At 195° to 215° F. it be-
comes quite plastic, and is easily molded.
It may be sawed, filed, turned, and
carved without difficulty, and takes on a
superb polish. It burns less readily
than celluloid, and its combustibility
diminishes in proportion as the per-
centage of caseinate increases; finally,
the cost price is less than that of celluloid,
430
IVORY— JEWELERS1 FORMULAS
and by using a large proportion of case-
inate, products may be manufactured at
an extremely low cost.
IVORY AND BONE BLEACHES.
If simply dirty, scrub with soap and
tepid water, using an old tooth or nail
brush for the purpose. Grease stains
may be sometimes removed by applying
a paste of chalk or whiting and benzol,
covering the article so that the benzol may
not dry too rapidly. Carbon disulphide
(the purified article) may be used in place
ot benzol. When dry, rub off with a stiff
brush. If not removed with the first
application, repeat the process. Deli-
cately carved articles that show a ten-
dency to brittleness should be soaked for
a short time in dilute phosphoric acid
before any attempt to clean them is made.
This renders the minuter portions almost
ductile, and prevents their breaking un-
der cleaning.
The large scratched brush should be
treated as follows: If the scratches are
deep, the surface may be carefully rubbed
down to the depth of the scratch, using
the finest emery cloth, until the depth is
nearly reached, then substituting crocus
cloth.
To restore the polish nothing is supe-
rior to the genuine German putz pomade,
following by rubbing first with chamois
and finishing off with soft old silk. The
more "elbow grease" put into the rub-
bing the easier the task, as the heat gen-
erated by friction seems to lend a sort of
ductility to the surface. To remove the
yellow hue due to age, proceed as follows:
Make a little tripod with wire, to hold
the object a few inches above a little
vessel containing lime chloride moistened
with hydrochloric acid; put the object on
the stand, cover the whole with a bell
glass, and expose to direct sunlight.
When bleached, remove and wash in a
solution of sodium bicarbonate, rinse in
clear water and dry.
Like mother-of-pearl, ivory is readily
cleaned by dipping in a bath of oxygen-
ized water or immersing for 15 minutes
in spirits of turpentine, and subsequently
exposing to the sun for 3 cr 4 days. For
a simple cleaning of smooth articles,
wash them in hot water, in which there
has been previously dissolved 100 parts
(by weight) of bicarbonate of soda per
1,000 parts of water. To clean carved
ivory make a paste of very fine, damp
sawdust, and put on this the juice of 1
or 2 lemons, according to the article to be
treated. Now apply a layer of this saw-
dust on the ivory, and when dry brush
it off and rub the object with a chamois.
IVORY TESTS.
Many years ago an article was intro-
duced in the industrial world which in
contradistinction to the genuine animal
ivory, has its origin in the vegetable king-
dom, being derived from the nut of a
palm-like shrub called phytelephasma-
crocarpa, whose fruit reaches the size of
an apple. This fruit has a very white,
exceedingly hard kernel which can be
worked like ivory. A hundred of these
fruits only costing about $1, their use
offers great advantages. Worked on
the lathe this ivory can be passed off as
the genuine article, it being so much like
it that it is often sold at the same price.
It can also be colored just like genuine
ivory.
To distinguish the two varieties of
ivory, the following method may be
employed: Concentrated sulphuric acid
applied to vegetable ivory will cause a
pink coloring in about 10 or 12 minutes,
which can be removed again by washing
with water. Applied on genuine ivory,
this acid does not affect it in any manner.
IVORY BLACK:
See Bone Black.
IVORY CEMENT:
See Adhesives.
IVORY GILDING:
See Plating.
IVORY POLISHES:
See Polishes.
JAPAN BLACK:
See Paints.
JAPANNING AND JAPAN TINNING:
See Varnishes.
JASMINE MILK:
See Cosmetics.
JELLY (FRUIT) EXTRACT:
See Essences and Extracts.
JEWELERS' CEMENTS:
See Adhesives.
JEWELERS' CLEANING PROCESSES:
See Cleaning Preparations and Meth-
ods.
Jewelers7 Formulas
(See also Gems, Gold, and Watchmakers'
Recipes.)
Coloring Gold Jewelry. — Following are
several recipes for coloring: Saltpeter,
40 parts; alum, 30 parts; sea salt, 30
parts; or, liquid ammonia, 100 parts;
sea salt, 3 parts; water, 100 parts. Heat
without allowing to boil and plunge
JEWELERS' FORMULAS
431
the objects into it for 2 or 3 minutes,
stirring constantly; rinse in alum water
and then in clean water. Another
recipe: Calcium bromide, 100 parts;
bromine, 5 parts. Place the articles
in this solution, with stirring, for 2 to 3
minutes; next wash in a solution of
hyposulphite of sodium and rinse in
clean water. Another: Verdigris, 30
parts; sea salt, 30 parts; blood stone,
30 parts; sal ammoniac, 30 parts; alum,
5 parts. Grind all and stir with strong
vinegar; or, verdigris, 100 parts; hydro-
chlorate of ammonia, 100 parts; salt-
peter, 65 parts; copper filings, 40 parts.
Bray all and mix with strong vinegar.
To Widen a Jewel Hole.— Chuck the
hole in a lathe with cement. Place a
spirit lamp underneath to prevent the
cement from hardening. Hold the
pointed bit against the hole, while the
lathe is running, until the hole is true,
when the lamp should be removed. The
broach to widen the hole should be made
of copper, of the required size and shape,
and the point, after being oiled, should
be rolled in diamond dust until it is
entirely covered. The diamond dust
should then be beaten in with a burnish-
er, using very light blows so as not to
bruise the broach. After the hole is
widened as desired, it requires polishing
with a broach made of ivory and used
with oil and the finest diamond dust,
loose, not driven into the broach.
To Clean Jet Jewelry.— Reduce bread
crumbs into small particles, and intro-
duce into all the curves and hollows of
the jewelry, while rubbing with a flannel.
Coloring Common Gold. — In coloring
gold below 18 carat, the following mix-
ture may be used with success, and if
carefully employed, even 12 carat gold
may be colored by it: Take nitrate of
potassa (saltpeter), 4 parts, by weight;
alum, 2 parts; and common salt, 2 parts.
Add sufficient warm water to mix the
ingredients into a thin paste; place the
mixture in a small pipkin or crucible
and allow to boil. The article to be
colored should be suspended by a wire
and dipped into the mixture, where it
should remain from 10 to 20 minutes.
The article should then be removed and
well rinsed in hot water, when it must be
scratch brushed, again rinsed and re-
turned to the coloring salts for a few
minutes; it is then to be again rinsed in
hot water, scratch brushed, and finally
brushed with soap and hot water, rinsed
in hot water, and placed in boxwood
sawdust. The object being merely to
remove the alloy, as soon as the article
has acquired the proper color of fine gold
it may be considered sufficiently acted
upon by the above mixture. The color-
ing salts should not be used for gold of a
lower standard than 12 carat, and, even
for this quality of gold, some care must
be taken when the articles are of a very
slight make.
Shades of Red, etc., on Matt Gold
Bijouterie. — For the production of the
red and other shades on matt gold arti-
cles, the so-called gold varnishes are
employed, which consist of shellac dis-
solved in alcohol and are colored with
gum rosins. Thus a handsome golden
yellow is obtained from shellac, 35 parts;
seed-lac, 35 parts; dragon's blood, 50
parts; gamboge, 50 parts; dissolved in
400 parts of alcohol; the clear solution is
decanted and mixed with 75 parts of
Venice turpentine. By changing the
amounts of the coloring rosins, shades
from bright gold yellow to copper color
are obtained. The varnish is applied
evenly and after drying is wiped off from
the raised portions of the article by
means of a pad of wadding dipped into
alcohol, whereby a handsome patina-
tion effect is produced, since the lacquer
remains in the cavities. Chased articles
are simply rubbed with earth colors
ground into a paste with turpentine oil,
lor which purpose burnt sienna, fine
ochers of a golden color, golden yellow,
and various shades of green are employed.
I. — Yellow wax 32 parts
Red bole 3 parts
Crystallized verdi-
gris 2 parts
Alum 2 parts
II. — Yellow wax 95 parts
Red bole 64 parts
Colcothar 2 parts
Crystallized verdi-
gris 32 parts
Copper ashes 20 parts
Zinc vitriol 32 parts
Green vitriol 16 parts
Borax 1 part
The wax is melted and the finely pow-
dered chemicals are stirred in, in rota-
tion. If the gilt bronze goods are to
obtain a lustrous orange shade, apply a
mixture of ferric oxide, alum, cooking
salt, and vinegar in the heated articles
by means of a brush, heating to about
266° F. until the shade commences to
turn black and water sprinkled on will
evaporate with a hissing sound, then cool
in water, dip in a mixture of 1 part of
nitric acid with 40 parts of water, rinse
JEWELERS1 FORMULAS
thoroughly, dry, and polish. For the
production of a pale-gold shade use a wax
preparation consisting of:
III. — Yellow wax 19 parts
Zinc vitriol 10 parts
Burnt borax 3 parts
Green-gold color is produced by a mix-
ture of:
IV.— Saltpeter 6 parts
Green vitriol 2 parts
Zinc vitriol 1 part
Alum 1 part
To Matt Gilt Articles.— If it is desired
to matt gilt articles partly or entirely, the
portions which are to remain burnished
are covered with a mixture of chalk,
sugar, and mucilage, heating until this
"stopping-off" covering shows a black
color. On the places not covered apply
a matting powder consisting of:
Saltpeter 40 parts
Alum 25 parts
Cooking salt 35 parts
Heat the objects to about 608° F.,
whereby the powder is melted and ac-
?uires the consistency of a thin paste,
n case of too high a temperature de-
composition will set in.
To Find the Number of Carats.— To
find the number of carats of gold in an
object, first weigh the gold and mix with
seven times its weight in silver. This
alloy is beaten into thin leaves, and nitric
acid is added; this dissolves the silver
and copper. The remainder (gold) is
then fused and weighed; by comparing
the first and last weights the number of
carats of pure gold is found. To check
repeat several times.
Acid Test for Gold.— The ordinary
ready method of ascertaining whether a
piece of jewelry is made of gold consists
in touching it with a glass stopper wetted
with nitric acid, which leaves gold un-
touched, but colors base alloys blue from
the formation of nitrate of copper.
Imitation Diamonds. — I. — Minium,
75 parts (by weight); washed white sand,
50 parts; calcined potash, 18 parts; cal-
cined borax, 6 parts: b''oxide of arsenic,
1 part. The sand mus', oe washed in
hydrochloric acid and then several times
in clean water. The specific gravity of
this crystal glass is almost the same as
that of the diamond.
II. — Washed white sand, 100 parts (by
weight): minium, 35 parts; calcined pot-
ash, 25 parts; calcined borax, 20 parts;
nitrate of potash (crystals). 10 parts:
peroxide of manganese, 5 parts. The
sand must be washed as above stated.
Diamantine. — This substance consists
of crystallized boron, the basis of borax.
By melting 100 parts of boracic acid and
80 parts of aluminum crystals is ob-
tained the so-called bort, which even
attacks diamond. The diamantine of
commerce is not so hard.
To Refine Board Sweepings.— The
residue resulting from a jobbing jew-
eler's business, such as board sweepings
and other residuum, which is continually
accumulating and which invariably con-
sists of all mixed qualities of standard,
may have the precious metals recovered
therefrom in a very simple manner, as
follows: Collect the residue and burn it
in an iron ladle or pan, until all grease
or other organic matter is destroyed.
When cool mix with ^ part soda-ash, and
melt in a clay crucible. When the metal
is thoroughly melted it will leave the flux
and sink to the bottom of the crucible;
at this stage the flux assumes the appear-
ance of a thin fluid, and then is the time
to withdraw the pot from the fire. The
metal in the crucible — but not the flux —
may now be poured into a vessel of water,
stirring the water in a circular direction
while the metal is being poured in, which
causes it to form into small grains, and
so prepares it for the next process. Dis-
solve the grains in a mixture of nitric
acid and water in equal quantities. It
takes about four times the quantity of
liquid as metal to dissolve. The gold
remains undissolved in this mixture, and
may be recovered by filtering or decant-
ing the liquid above it in the dissolving
vessel; it is then dried, mixed with a little
flux, and melted in the usual manner,
whereupon pure gold will be obtained.
To recover the silver, dilute the solution
which has been withdrawn from the gold
with six times its bulk of water, and add
by degrees small quantities of finely
powdered common salt, and this will
throw down the silver into a white, curdy
powder of chloride of silver. Continue to
add salt until no cloudiness is observed
in the solution, when the water above
the sediment may be poured off; the
sediment is next well washed with warm
water several times, then dried and
melted in the same manner as the golu,
and you will have a lump of pure silver.
Restoration of the Color of Tur-
quoises.— After a certain time turquoises
lose a part of their fine color. It is easy
to restore the color by immersing them
in a solution of carbonate of soda. But
it seems that the blue cannot be restored
anew after this operation, if it again
becomes dull. The above applies to
JEWELERS FORMULAS
433
common turquoises, and not to those of
the Orient, of which the color does not
change.
Colorings for Jewelers' Work. — I. —
Take 40 parts of saltpeter; 30 parts of
alum; 30 parts of sea salt; or 100 grams
of liquid ammonia; 3 parts sea salt; and
100 parts water. This is heated without
bringing it to a boil, and the articles
dipped into it for from 2 to 3 minutes,
stirring the liquid constantly; after this
bath they are dipped in alum water and
then thoroughly rinsed in clean water.
II. — One hundred parts of calcium bro-
mide and 2 parts of bromium. The ob-
jects are allowed to remain in this solu-
tion (which must be also constantly
stirred) for from 2 to 3 minutes, then
washed in a solution of sodium hypo-
sulphite, after which they must be rinsed
in clean water.
III.— Thirty parts of verdigris; 30 parts
of sea salt; 30 parts of hematite; 30 parts
of sal ammoniac, and 5 parts of alum.
This must be all ground up together and
mixed with strong vinegar; or we may
also use 100 parts of verdigris; 100 parts
of hydrochlorate of ammonia; 65 parts
of saltpeter, and 40 parts of copper
filings, all of which are to be well mixed
with strong vinegar.
22-Carat Solder. — Soldering is a proc-
ess which, by means of a more fusible
compound, the connecting surfaces of
metals are firmly secured to each other,
but, for many practical purposes, it is
advisable to have the fusing point of the
metal and solder as near each other as
possible, which, in the majority of cases,
preserves a union more lasting, and the
joint less distinguishable, in consequence
of the similarity of the metal and solder
in color, which age does not destroy, and
this is not the case with solders the fusible
points of which are very low. The
metal to be soldered together must have
an affinity for the solder, otherwise the
union will be imperfect; and the solder
should likewise act upon the metal,
partly by this affinity or chemical attrac-
tion, and partly by cohesive force, to
unite the connections soundly and firmly
together. Solders should therefore be
prepared suitable to the work in hand, if
a good and lasting job is to be made. It
should always be borne in mind that the
higher the fusing point of the gold alloy
— and this can be made to vary consid-
erably, even with any specified quality —
the harder solder must be used, for. in
the case of a more fusible mixture of gold,
the latter would melt before the solder
and cause the work to be destroyed. A
very good formula for the first, or ordi-
nary, 22-carat alloy is this:
dwts. grs.
Fine gold 1 0
Fine silver 0 3
Fine copper 0 2
This mixture will answer all the many
purposes of the jobber; for soldering
high quality gold wares that come for
repairs, particularly wedding rings, it
will be found admirably suited. If an
easier solder is wanted, and such is very
often the case with jobbing jewelers, es-
pecially where several solderings have to
be accomplished, it is as well to have at
hand a solder which will not disturb the
previous soldering places, for if this is
not prevented a very simple job is made
very difficult, and a lot of time and
patience wholly wasted. To guard
against a thing of this kind the following
solder may be employed on the top of
the previous one:
dwts. grs.
Fine gold 1 0
Fine silver 0 3
Yellow brass 0 2
1 5
This solder is of the same value as the
previous one, but its melting point is
lower, and it will be found useful for
many purposes that can be turned to
good" account in a jobbing jeweler's
business.
JEWELERS5 ALLOYS:
See also Alloys and Solders.
i8-Carat Gold for Rings. — Gold coin,
19 A grains; pure copper, 3 grains; pure
silver, 1 J grains.
Cheap Gold, 12 Carat. — Gold coin,
25 grains; pure copper, 13^ grains; pure
silver, 7^ grains.
Very Cheap 4-Carat Gold.— Copper,
18 parts; gold, 4 parts; silver, 2 parts.
Imitations of Gold. — I. — Platina, 4
pennyweights; pure copper, 2} penny-
weights; sheet zinc, 1 pennyweight;
block tin, If pennyweights: pure lead,
1£ pennyweight. If this should be
found too hard or brittle for practical
use, remelting the composition with a
little sal ammoniac will generally render
it malleable as desired.
II. — Platina, 2 parts: silver, 1 part;
copper. 3 parts. These compositions,
when properly prepared, so nearly resem-
ble pure gold that it is very difficult to
434
JEWELERS1 FORMULAS
pennyweight. The best composition
known for th
distinguish them therefrom. A little
powdered charcoal, mixed with metals
while melting, will be found of service.
Best Oreide of Gold. — Pure copper, 4
ounces; sheet zinc, If ounces; magnesia,
f ounce; sal ammoniac, •£•£ ounce; quick-
lime, -£* ounce; cream tartar, f ounce.
First melt the copper at as low a tem-
perature as it will melt; then add the
zinc, and afterwards the other articles in
powder, in the order named. Use a
charcoal fire to melt these metals.
Bushing Alloy for Pivot Holes, etc. —
Gold coin, 3 pennyweights; silver, 1
pennyweight, 20 grains; copper, 3 pen-
nyweights, 20 grains; palladium, 1
t. The best co
the purpose named.
Gold Solder for 14- to i6-Carat Work.
— Gold coin, 1 pennyweight; pure silver,
9 grains; pure copper, 6 grains; brass,
3 grains.
Darker Solder. — Gold coin, 1 penny-
weight; pure copper, 8 grains; pure
silver, 5 grains; brass, 2 grains. Melt
together in charcoal fire.
Solder for Gold.— Gold, 6 penny-
weights; silver, 1 pennyweight; copper,
2 pennyweights.
Soft Gold Solder.— Gold, 4 parts; silver,
1 part; copper, 1 part.
Solders for Silver (for the use of
jewelers). — Fine silver, 19 pennyweights;
copper, 1 pennyweight; sheet brass, 10
pennyweights.
White Solder for Silver.— Silver, 1
ounce; tin, 1 ounce.
Silver Solder for Plated Metal.— Fine
silver, 1 ounce; brass, 10 pennyweights.
Solders for Gold.— I.— Silver, 7 parts;
copper, 1 part; with borax.
II. — Gold, 2 parts; silver, 1 part; cop-
per, 1 part.
III.— Gold, 3 parts; silver, 3 parts;
copper, 1 part; zinc, £ part.
For Silver. — Silver, 2 parts; brass, 1
part; with borax; or, silver, 4 parts;
brass, 3 parts; zinc, -fa part; with borax.
Gold Solders (see also Solders). — I. —
Copper, 24.24 parts; silver, 27.57 parts;
gold, 48.19 parts.
II. — Enamel Solder. — Copper, 25 parts;
silver, 7.07 parts; gold, 67.93 parts.
III. — Copper, 26.55 parts; zinc, 6.25
parts; silver, 31.25 parts; gold, 36 parts.
IV.— Enamel Solder.— Silver, 19.57
parts; gold, 80.43 parts,
Solder for 22-Carat Gold.— Gold of 22
carats, 1 pennyweight; silver, 2 grains;
copper, 1 grain.
For i8-Carat Gold.— Gold of 18
carats, 1 pennyweight; silver, 2 grains;
copper, 1 grain.
For Cheaper Gold. — I. — Gold, 1 penny-
weight; silver, 10 grains; copper, 8
grains.
II. — Fine gold, 1 pennyweight; silver,
1 pennyweight; copper, 1 pennyweight.
Silver Solders (see also Solders). — I.
(Hard.)— Copper, 30 parts; zinc, 12.85
p^arts; silver, 57.15 parts.
II. — Copper, 23.33 parts; zinc, 10 parts;
silver, 66.67 parts.
III.— Copper, 26.66 parts; zinc, 10
parts; silver, 63.34 parts.
IV. (Soft.) — Copper, 14.75 parts; zinc,
8.50 parts; silver, 77.05 parts.
V. — Copper, 22.34 parts; zinc, 10.48
parts; silver, 67.18 parts.
VI.— Tin, 63 parts; lead, 37 parts.
FOR SILVERSMITHS:
I. — Sterling Silver. — Fine silver, 11
ounces, 2 pennyweights; fine copper, 18
pennyweights.
II. — Equal to Sterling. — Fine silver,
1 ounce; fine copper, 1 pennyweight, 12
grains. .
III. — Fine silver, 1 ounce; fine copper,
5 pennyweights.
IV. — Common Silver for Chains. — Fine
silver, 6 pennyweights; fine copper, 4
pennyweights.
V. — Solder. — Fine silver, 16 penny-
weights; fine copper, 12 grains; pin
brass, 3 pennyweights, 12 grains.
VI. — Alloy for Plating. — Fine silver,
1 ounce; fine copper, 10 pennyweights.
VII. —Silver Solder.— Fine silver, 1
ounce; pin brass, 10 pennyweights; pure
spelter, 2 pennyweights.
VIII.— Copper Solder for Plating.—
Fine silver, 10 pennyweights; fine cop-
per, 10 pennyweights.
IX.— Common Silver Solder.— Fine
silver, 10 ounces; pin brass, 6 ounces,
12 pennyweights; spelter, 12 penny-
weights.
X.— Silver Solder for Enameling. —
Fine silver, 14 pennyweights; fine cop-
per, 8 pennyweights.
XL— For Filling Signet Rings.— Fine
silver, 10 ounces; fine copper, 1 ounce,
16 pennyweights; fine pin brass, 6
ounces, 12 pennyweights; spelter, 12.
pennyweights,
JEWELERS FORMULAS
485
XII.— Silver Solder for Gold Plating.
— Fine silver, 1 ounce; fine copper, 5
pennyweights; pin brass, 5 pennyweights.
XIII. — Mercury Solder. — Fine silver,
1 ounce; pin brass, 10 pennyweights;
bar tin, 2 pennyweights.
XIV. — Imitation Silver. — Fine silver,
1 ounce; nickel, 1 ounce, 11 grains; fine
copper, 2 ounces, 9 grains.
XV. — Fine silver, 3 ounces; nickel, 1
ounce, 11 pennyweights; fine copper, 2
ounces, 9 grains; spelter, 10 penny-
Weights.
XVI.— Fine Silver Solder for Filigree
Work. — Fine silver, 4 pennyweights,
6 grains; pin brass, 1 pennyweight.
Bismuth Solder. — Bismuth, 3 ounces;
lead, 3 ounces, 18 pennyweights; tin, 5
ounces, 6 pennyweights.
BRASS:
I.— Yellow Brass for Turning.— (Com-
mon article.) — Copper, 20 pounds; zinc,
10 pounds; lead, 4 ounces.
II. — Copper, 32 pounds; zinc, 10
pounds; lead, 1 pound.
III.— Red Brass Free, for Turning.—
Copper, 100 pounds; zinc, 50 pounds;
lead, 10 pounds; antimony, 44 ounces.
IV.— Best Red Brass for Fine Cast-
ings.— Copper, 24 pounds; zinc, 5
pounds; bismuth, 1 ounce.
V. — Red Tombac. — Copper, 10 pounds;
zinc, 1 pound.
VI.— Tombac.— Copper, 16 pounds;
tin, 1 pound; zinc, 1 pound.
VII.— Brass for Heavy Castings. —
Copper, 6 to 7 parts; tin, 1 part; zinc, 1
part.
VIII.— Malleable Brass.— Copper, 70.10
parts; zinc, 29.90 parts.
IX. — Superior Malleable Brass. — Cop-
per, 60 parts; zinc, 40 parts.
X. — Brass. — Copper, 73 parts; zinc,
27 parts.
XI. — Copper, 65 parts; zinc, 35 parts.
XII. — Copper, 70 parts; zinc, 30 parts.
XIII. —German Brass.— Copper, 1
pound; zinc, 1 pound.
XI V.— Watchmakers' Brass.— Copper,
1 part; zinc, 2 parts.
XV.— Brass for Wire.— Copper, 34
parts; calamine. 56 parts.
XVI.— Brass for Tubes.— Copper, 2
parts; zinc, 1 part.
XVII.— Brass for Heavy Work.—
Copper, 100 parts; tin, 15 parts; zinc,
15 parts,
XVIII.— Copper, 112 parts; tin, 13
parts; zinc, 1 part.
XIX.— Tombac or Red Brass.— Cop-
per, 8 parts; zinc, 1 part.
XX.— Brass.— Copper, 3 parts; melt,
then add zinc, 1 part.
XXI. — Buttonmakers' Fine Brass. —
Brass, 8 parts; zinc, 5 parts.
XXII. — Buttonmakers' Common
Brass. — Button brass, 6 parts; tin, 1
part; lead, 1 part. Mix.
XXIII.— Mallet's Brass.— Copper,
25.4 parts; zinc, 74.6 parts. Used to pre-
serve iron from oxidizing.
XXIV.— Best Brass for Clocks.—
Rose copper, 85 parts; zinc, 14 parts;
lead, 1 part.
GOLD ALLOYS:
See also Gold Alloys, under Alloys.
Gold of 22 carats fine being so little
used is intentionally omitted.
I.— Gold of 18 Carats, Yellow Tint.
— Gold, 15 pennyweights; silver, 2 pen-
nyweights, 18 grains; copper, 2 penny-
weights, 6 grains.
II.— Gold of 18 Carats, Red Tint.—
Gold, 15 pennyweights; silver, 1 penny-
weight, 18 grains; copper, 3 penny-
weights, 6 grains.
III.— Spring Gold of 16 Carats.—
Gold, 1 ounce, 16 pennyweights; silver,
6 pennyweights; copper, 12 penny-
weights. This when drawn or rolled
very hard makes springs little inferior to
steel.
IV.— Jewelers' Fine Gold, Yellow
Tint, 16 Carats Nearly. — Gold, 1 ounce;
silver, 7 pennyweights; copper, 5 penny-
weights.
V.— Gold of Red Tint, 16 Carats.—
Gold, 1 ounce; silver, 2 pennyweights;
copper, 8 pennyweights.
Sterling Gold Alloys. — I. — Fine gold,
18 pennyweights, 12 grains; fine silver,
1 pennyweight; fine copper, 12 grains.
II.— Dry Colored Gold Alloys, 17
Carat. — Fine gold, 15 pennyweights;
fine silver, 1 pennyweight, 10 grains;
fine copper, 4 pennyweights, 17 grains.
III. — 18 Carat. — Fine gold, 1 ounce;
fine silver, 4 pennyweights, 10 grains;
fine copper, 2 pennyweights, 5 grains.
IV.— 18 Carat.— Fine gold, 15 penny-
weights; fine silver, 2 pennyweights, 4
grains; fine copper, 2 pennyweights, 19
grains.
V. — 18 Carat. — Fine gold, 18 penny-
weights; fine silver, 2 pennyweights, 18
436 JEWELERS1 FORMULAS— KEROSENE DEODORIZER
grains; fine copper, 3 pennyweights, 18
grains.
VI.— 19 Carat.— Fine gold, 1 ounce;
fine silver, 2 pennyweights, 6 grains; fine
copper, 3 pennyweights, 12 grains.
VII. — 20 Carat. — Fine gold, 1 ounce;
fine silver, 2 pennyweights; fine copper,
2 pennyweights, 4 grains.
VIII.— 22 Carat.— Fine gold, 18 pen-
nyweights; fine silver, 12 grains; fine cop-
per, 1 pennyweight, 3 grains.
IX.— Gold Solder for the Foregoing
Alloys. — Take of the alloyed gold you
are using, 1 pennyweight; fine silver, 6
grains.
X.— Alloy for Dry Colored Rings. —
Fine gold, 1 ounce; fine silver, 4 penny-
weights, 6 grains; fine copper, 4 penny-
weights, 6 grains.
XI. — Solder. — Scrap gold, 2 ounces;
fine silver, 3 pennyweights; fine copper,
3 pennyweights.
XII.— Dry Colored Scrap Reduced
to 355. Gold. — Colored scrap, 1 ounce, 9
pennyweights, 12 grains; fine silver, 2
pennyweights; fine copper, 17 penny-
weights, 12 grains; spelter, 4 penny-
weights.
To Quickly Remove a Ring from a
Swollen Finger. — If the ring is of gold,
pull the folds of the swollen muscles
apart, so that it can be seen, then drop
on it a little absolute alcohol and place
the finger in a bowl of metallic mercury.
In a very few minutes the ring will snap
apart. If the ring is of brass, scrape the
surface slightly, or put on a few drops of
a solution of oxalic acid, or even strong
vinegar, let remain in contact for a
moment or two, then put into the mer-
cury, and the result will be as before.
Soldering a Jeweled Ring. — In order
to prevent the bursting of the jewels of a
ring while the latter is being soldered,
cut a juicy potato into halves and make
a hollow in both portions in which the
part of the ring having jewels may fit
exactly. Wrap the jeweled portion in
soft paper, place it in the hollow, and
bind up the closed potato with binding
wire. Now solder with easy-flowing
gold solder, the potato being held in the
nand. Another method is to fill a small
crucible with wet sand, bury the jeweled
portion in the sand, and solder in the
usual way.
JEWELRY, TO CLEAN:
See Cleaning Preparations and Meth-
ods.
Kalsomine
Sodium carbonate. . . 8 parts
Linseed oil 32 parts
Hot water 8 parts
White glue 12 parts
Whiting 160 parts
Dissolve the sodium carbonate in the
hot water, add the oil and saponify by
heating and agitation. Cover the glue,
broken into small pieces, with cold
water and let soak overnight. In the
morning pour the whole on a stout piece
of stuff and let the residual water drain
off, getting rid of as much as possible by
slightly twisting the cloth. Throw the
swelled glue into a capsule, put on the
water bath, and heat gently until it is
melted. Add the sapDnified oil and mix
well; remove from the bath, and stir in
the whiting, a little at a time, adding hot
water as it becomes necessary. When
the whiting is all stirred in, continue
adding hot water, until a liquid is ob-
tained that flows freely from the kalso-
mining brush.
The addition of a little soluble blue to
the mixture increases the intensity of the
white.
Sizing Walls for Kalsomine. — A size
to coat over "hot walls" for the reception
of the kalsomine is made by using
shellac, 1 part; sal soda, % part. Put
these ingredients in ^ gallon of water and
dissolve by steady heat. Another size is
made of glue size prepared in the usual
way, and alum. To \ pound of white
glue add f pound of alum, dissolving the
alum in hot water before adding it to the
glue size.
KARATS, TO FIND NUMBER OF:
See Jewelers' Formulas.
KERAMICS:
See Ceramics.
KERIT:
See Rubber.
KEROCLEAN:
See Cleaning Preparations and Meth-
ods.
KEROSENE DEODORIZER:
See also Benzine, Oils, and Petro-
leum.
Various processes have been recom-
mended for masking the odor of kerosene
such as the addition of various essential
KEROSENE DEODORIZER— LACQUERS
437
oils, artificial oil of mirbane, etc., but
none of them seems entirely satisfactory.
The addition of amyl acetate in the pro-
portion of 10 grams to the liter (1 per
cent) has also been suggested, several
experimenters reporting very successful
results therefrom. Some years ago Ber-
inger proposed a process for removing
sulphur compounds from benzine, which
would presumably be equally applicable
to kerosene. This process is as follows:
Potassium permanga-
nate 1 ounce
Sulphuric acid £ pint
Water 3| pints
Mix the acid and water, and when the
mixture has become cold pour it into a
2-gallon bottle. Add the permanganate
and agitate until it is dissolved. Then
add benzine, 1 gallon, and thoroughly
agitate. Allow the liquids to remain in
.contact for 24 hours, frequently agitating
the mixture. Separate the benzine and
wash in a similar bottle with a mixture
of
Potassium permanga-
nate I ounce
Caustic soda \ ounce
Water 2 pints
Agitate the mixture frequently during
several hours; then separate the benzine
and wash it thoroughly with water. On
agitating the benzine with the acid per-
manganate solution an emulsion-like
mixture is produced, which separates in
a few seconds, the permanganate slowly
subsiding and showing considerable re-
duction. In the above process it is
quite probable that the time specified (24
hours) is greatly in excess of what is
necessary, as the reduction takes place
almost entirely in a very short time. It
has also been suggested that if the proc-
ess were adopted on a manufacturing
scale, with mechanical agitation, the
time could be reduced to an hour or two^
KEROSENE-CLEANING COMPOUNDS:
See Cleaning Preparations, under
Miscellaneous Methods.
KEROSENE EMULSIONS:
See Petroleum.
KETCHUP (ADULTERATED), TESTS
FOR:
See Foods.
KHAKI COLORS:
See Dyes.
KID:
See Leather.,
KISSINGEN SALTS:
See Salts (Effervescent).
KISSINGEN WATER:
See Waters.
KNIFE-SHARPENING PASTES:
See Razor Pastes.
KNOCKENPLOMBE :
See Adhesives.
KNOTS:
See Paint.
KOLA CORDIAL:
See Wines and Liquors.
KOUMISS SUBSTITUTE:
See also Beverages.
To prepare a substitute tor koumiss
from cow's milk: Dissolve i ounce grape
sugar in 3 fluid ounces water. Mix 18
grains well washed and pressed beer
yeast with 2 fluid ounces of cow's milk.
Mix the two liquids in a champagne
bottle, fill with milk, stopper securely,
and keep for 3 to 4 days at a tempera-
ture not exceeding 50° F., shaking fre-
quently. The preparation does not keep
longer than 4 to 5 days.
KUMMEL:
See Wines and Liquors.
KWASS :
See Beverages.
LABEL PASTES, GLUES, AND MUCI-
LAGES:
See Adhesives.
LABEL VARNISHES:
See Varnishes.
LACE LEATHER:
See Leather.
LACE, TO CLEAN GOLD AND SILVER :
See Cleaning Preparations and Meth-
ods.
LACES, WASHING AND COLORING
OF:
See Laundry Preparations.
Lacquers
(See alsoEnamels, Glazes, Paints, Var-
nishes, and Waterproofing.)
LAC AND THE ART OF LACQUERING.
The art of lacquering includes various
steps, which are divulged as little as
possible. Without them nothing but a
varnish of good quality would be realized
Thus in Tonkin, where the abundant
438
LACQUERS
production is the object of an important
trade with the Chinese, it is so used only
for varnishing, while in China the same
product from the same sources con-
tributes to most artistic applications.
When the Annamites propose to lac-
quer an object, a box, for example, they
first stop up the holes and crevices, cov-
ering all the imperfections with a coating
of diluted lac, DV means of a flat, close,
short brush. Then they cover the whole
with a thick coating of lac and white clay.
This clay, oily to the touch, is found at
the bottom of certain lakes in Tonkin;
it is dried, pulverized, and sifted with a
piece of fine silk before being embodied
with the lac. This operation is designed
to conceal the inequalities of the wood
and produce a uniform surface which,
when completely dry, is rendered smooth
with pumice stone.
If the object has portions cut or sunk
the clayey mixture is not applied, for it
would make the details clammy, but in
its place a single, uniform layer of pure
lac.
In any case, after the pumicing, a
third coating, now pure lac, is passed
over the piece, which at this time has a
mouse-gray color. This layer, known
under tne name of sou lot, colors the piece
a brilliant black. As the lac possesses
the remarkable property of not drying in
dry air, the object is left in a damp place.
When perfectly dried the piece is var-
nished, and the desired color imparted
by a single operation. If the metallic
applications are excepted, the lac is
colored only black, brown, or red.
The following formulas are in use:
Black. — One part of turpentine is
warmed for 20 minutes beyond the fus-
ing point; then poured into 3 parts of lac;
at the same time pheu deu (copperas) is
added. The mixture is stirred for at
least a day, sometimes more, by means
of a large paddle.
Maroon. — This is prepared by a process
similar to the preceding, replacing half
of the copperas by an equal quantity of
China vermilion.
Red. — The lac, previously stirred for
6 hours, is mixed with hot oil of trau,
and the whole is stirred for a day, after
which vermilion is added. The latter
should be of good quality, so as to have
it brilliant and unchangeable.
The operation of lacquering is then
ended, but there are parts to be gilded.
These are again covered with a mixture
of lac and oil of trau. When this layer
is dry the metallic leaves are applied,
which are themselves protected by a
coating, composed also of lac and oil of
trau. All these lac and oil of trau mix-
tures are carefully filtered, which the
natives effect by pressing the liquid on a
double filtering surface formed of wad-
ding and of a tissue on which it rests. It
can only be applied after several months
when the metallic leaf is of gold. In the
case of silver or tin the protecting coat
can be laid on in a few days. It favor-
ably modifies the white tints of these two
metals by communicating a golden color.
The hue, at first reddish, gradually im-
proves and acquires its full brilliancy in
a few months.
Little information is procurable con-
cerning the processes employed by the
Chinese. The wood to be lacquered
should be absolutely dry. It receives
successive applications, of which the
number is not less than 33 for perfect
work. When the lac coating attains the
thickness of \ of an inch it is ready for.
the engravers. The Chinese, like the
inhabitants of Tonkin, make use of oil of
trau to mix with the lac, or oil of aleurites,
and the greatest care is exercised in the
drying of the different layers. The
operation is conducted in dim-lighted
rooms specially fitted up for the purpose;
the moisture is maintained to a suitable
extent by systematically watering the
earth which covers the walls of this " cold
stove."
Lacquer for Aluminum. — Dissolve 100
parts of gum lac in 300 parts of am-
monia, and heat the solution for about 1
hour moderately on the water bath. Af-
ter cooling, the mixture is ready for use.
The aluminum to be coated is cleaned in
the customary manner. After it has been
painted with the varnish, it is heated in
the oven to about 572° F. The coating
and heating may be repeated.
Lacquer for Brass. —
Annatto £ ounce
Saffron \ ounce
Turmeric 1 ounce
Seed lac in coarse pow-
der 3 ounces
Alcohol 1 pint
Digest the annatto, saffron, and tur-
meric in the alcohol for several days,
then strain into a bottle containing the
seed lac; cork and shake until dissolved.
Lacquer for Bronze. — I. — The follow-
ing process yields a protective varnish
for bronze articles and other metallic
objects in various shadings, the lacquer
produced excelling in high luster and
permanency: Fill 40 parts of best pale
shellac; 12 parts of pulverized Florentine
LACQUERS
439
lake; 30 parts gamboge; and 6 parts of
dragon's blood, likewise powdered, into
a bottle and add 400 parts of spirit.
Allow this mixture to form a solution
preferably by heating the flask on the
water bath, to nearly the boiling point of
the water, and shaking now and then
until all has dissolved. After the cooling
pour off the liquid from the sediment, if
any is present; this liquid constitutes a
lacquer of dark-red color. In a second
bottle dissolve in the same manner 24
parts of gamboge in 400 parts of spirit,
which affords a lacquer of golden yellow
color. According to the desired shade,
the red lacquer is now mixed with the
yellow one, thus producing any hue re-
quired from the deepest red to a golden
tone. If necessary, thin with spirit of
wine. The varnish is applied, as usual,
on the somewhat warmed article, a cer-
tain temperature having to be adhered
to, which can be ascertained by trials
and is easily regulated by feeling.
II. — The following is equally suitable
for boots and leather goods as for appli-
cation on iron, stone, glass, paper, cloth,
and other surfaces. The inexperienced
should note before making this liquid
that it does not give a yellowish bronze
like gold paint, but a darkish iridescent
one, and as it is a pleasing variation in
aids to home decoration, it would
doubtless sell well. Some pretty effects
are obtained by using a little phloxine
instead of part of the violet aniline, or
phloxine alone will produce a rich red-
dish bronze, and a lustrous peacock green
is obtained with brilliant aniline green
crystals.
Quantities : Flexile methylated col-
lodion, 1 gallon; pure violet aniline, 1
pound. Mix, stand away for a few days
to allow the aniline to dissolve and stir
frequently, taking care to bung down
securely, as the collodion is a volatile
liquid, then strain and bottle off. It is
applied with a brush, dries rapidly, and
does not rub off or peal.
Celluloid Lacquer. — -Dissolve uncol-
ored celluloid in a mixture of strong
alcohol and ether. The celluloid first
swells up in the solvent, and after vigor-
ous shaking, the bottle is allowed to stand
quietly for the undissolved portion to settle,
when the clear, supernatant fluid is
poured off. The latter may be imme-
diately used; it yields a colorless. glossy
lacquer, or may be colored, as desired,
with aniline colors.
Colored Lacquer. — Make a strong
solution of any coloring matter which is
soluble in methylated spirit, such as
cochineal, saffron, the aniline dyes, etc.
Filter through fine cambric, and to this
filtered solution add brown shellac in
flakes in the proportion of 4 to 5 ounces
of shellac to each pint of methylated
spirit. Shake once a day for about 8
days. If too thick it may be thinned by
adding more colored spirit or plain spirit
as required, and any lighter shade can be
obtained by mixing with plain lacquer
mixed in the above proportions. Lac-
quer works best in a warm, dry place,
and the process is improved by slightly
warming the articles, which must be
absolutely free from grease, dirt, or
moisture. The best results are ob-
tained by applying many coats of thin,
light-colored lacquer, each coat to be
thoroughly dry before applying the next.
Apply with a soft camel's-hair brush;
it is better to use too small a brush than
too large. When complete, warm the
articles for a few seconds before a clear
fire; the hotter the better; if too hot,
however, the colors will fade. This
makes the lacquer adhere firmly, es-
pecially to metallic surfaces. Aniline
green works very well.
Lacquer for Copper. — A lacquer which
to a . certain degree resists heat and
acid liquids, but not alkaline ones, is
obtained by heating fine, thickly liquid
amber varnish, whereby it is rendered
sufficiently liquid to be applied with the
brush. The copper article is coated
with this and left to stand until the lac-
quer has dried perfectly. Next, the
object is heated until the lacquer com-
mences to smoke and turns brown. If
the operation is repeated twice, a coating
is finally obtained, which, as regards
resisting qualities to acid bodies, excels
even enamel, but which is strongly at-
tacked even by weakly alkaline liquids.
Ebony Lacquer. — The ebony lacquer
recommended by the well-known Eng-
lish authority, Mr. H. C. Standage, con-
sists of £ ounce aniline hydrochloride,
£ ounce alcohol, 1 part sulphate of cop-
per, 100 parts of water. The aniline dye
is dissolved in the alcohol and the copper
sulphate in the water. The wood is first
coated with the copper sulphate solution,
and after this coating has been given
plenty of time to dry the aniline salt
tincture is applied. Shortly the copper
salt absorbed by the wood will react on
the aniline hydrochloride, developing a
deep, rich black which acids or alkalies
are powerless to destroy. Coat with
shellac and give a French polish, thus
bringing the ebony finish up to a durable
and unsurpassed luster.
440
LACQUERS
GOLD LACQUERS:
I. — For Brassware. — A gold lacquer
to improve the natural color of brassware
is prepared from 16 parts gum lac, 4
parts dragon's blood, and 1 part curcuma
powder dissolved in 320 parts spirits of
wine in the warmth and filtered well.
The articles must be thoroughly cleaned
by burning, grinding, or turning either
dull or burnished, and then coated with
a thin layer of the above mixture, applied
with a soft hair brush or a pad of wad-
ding. If the objects are colored the
lacquer must be laid on by stippling.
Should the color be too dark, it may be
lightened by reduction with a little spirit
until the correct shade is produced. The
most suitable temperature for the metal
during the work is about the warmth of
the hand; if too hot or too cold, the lac-
quer may smear, and will then have to
be taken off again with spirit or hot
potash lye, the goods being dried in
sawdust or recleaned as at first, before
applying the lacquer again. Round
articles may be fixed in the lathe and the
lacquer laid on with a pad of wadding.
In order to color brassware, a solution
of 30 parts caustic soda; 10 parts cupric
carbonate; 200 parts water (or 200 parts
ammonia neutralized by acetic .acid);
100 parts verdigris, and 60 parts sal
ammoniac is employed, into which the
warmed articles are dipped. After
having dried they are coated with color-
less shellac varnish.
II. — For Tin. — Transparent gold lac-
quer for tin (all colors) may be made
as follows: Take £ pint of alcohol, add
1 ounce gum shellac; | ounce turmeric; 1J
ounce red sanders. Set the vessel in a
warm place and shake frequently for
half a day. Then strain off the liquor,
rinse the bottle and return it, corking
tightly for use. When this is used, it
must be applied to the work freely and
flowed on full, or if the work admits it,
it may be dipped. One or more coats
may be given as the color is required
light or dark. For rose color substitute
£ ounce of finely ground lake in place of
the turmeric. For blue, substitute Prus-
sian blue. For purple, add a little of the
blue to the turmeric.
For Bottle Caps, etc. —
I. — Gum gutta 10 parts
Shellac 100 parts
Turpentine 10 parts
Alconol 450 parts
1. — Gum gutta 40 parts
Dragon's blood 5 parts
Alcoholic extract of
sandal wood 5 parts
Sandarac 75 parts
Venice turpentine. ,. 25 parts
Alcohol, 95 per cent. 900 parts
Mix and dissolve by the aid of a gentle
heat.
Liquid Bottle Lac. — Into a half-gallon
bottle put 8 ounces of shellac, and pour
over it 1^ pints of alcohol of 94 per cent,
and 2| ounces of sulphuric ether. Let
stand, with occasional shaking, until the
shellac is melted, and then add 4 ounces
of thick turpentine and ^ ounce of boric
acid. Shake until dissolved. To color,
use the aniline colors soluble in alcohol —
for red, eosine; blue, phenol blue; black,
negrosin; green, aniline green; violet,
methyl violet, etc. If it is desired to
have the lac opaque, add 8 ounces of
pulverized steatite, but remember to
keep the lac constantly stirred while
using, as otherwise the steatite falls to
the bottom.
Lithographic Lacquer. — Dissolve 15
parts, by weight, of red lithol R or G in
paste of 17 per cent, in 150 parts, by
weight, of hot water. Boil for 2 minutes,
shaking with 2.5 parts, by weight, of
barium chloride. Dissolve in 25 parts,
by weight, of water. Add to the mixture
100 parts, by weight, of aluminum hy-
drate of about 4 per cent. Cool, filter,
and dry.
Lacquer for Microscopes, Mathemat-
ical Instruments, etc.— Pulverize 160
parts, by weight, turmeric root, cover it
with 1,700 parts alcohol, digest in a
warm place for 24 hours, and then filter.
Dissolve 80 parts dragon's blood, 80
parts sandarac, 80 parts gum elemi, 50
parts gum gutta, and 70 parts seed lac,
put in a retort with 250 parts powdered
glass, pour over them the colored alco-
ol first made, and hasten solution by
warming in the sand or water bath.
When completely dissolved, filter.
To Fix Alcoholic Lacquers on Metallic
Surfaces. — Dissolve 0.5 parts of crys-
tallized boracic acid in 100 parts of the
respective spirit varnish wnereby the
latter after being applied forms so hard
a coating upon a smooth tin surface
that it cannot be scratched off even with
the finger-nails. The aforementioned
percentage of boracic acid should not
be exceeded in preparing the solution;
otherwise the varnish will lose in inten-
sity of color.
Lacquer for Oil Paintings. — Dilute
100 parts of sulphate of baryta with 600
parts of water containing in solution 60
parts of red lithol R or G in paste of 17
LACQUERS—LAMPBLACK
441
per cent. Boil the mixture for several
minutes in a solution of 10 parts of bar-
ium chloride in 100 parts of water. Af-
ter cooling, filter and dry.
Lacquers for Papers. — I. — With base
of baryta: Dissolve 30 parts of red lithol
R or G in paste of 17 per cent, in 300
parts of hot water. Add an emulsion
obtained by mixing 10 parts of sulphate
of alumina in 100 parts of water and 5
parts of calcined soda dissolved in 50
parts of water. Precipitate with a solu-
tion of 17.5 parts of barium chloride in
125 parts of water. Cool and filter.
II.— With base of lime: Dissolve 30
parts red lithol R or G in paste of 17 per
cent, in 300 parts of hot water. Boil for
a few minutes with an emulsion pre-
pared by mixing 10 parts sulphate of
alumina with 100 parts of water and 2.5
parts of slaked lime in 100 parts of water.
Filter after cooling.
Lacquer for Stoves and other Articles
to Withstand Heat. — This is not altered
by heat, and does not give off disagree-
able odors on heating: Thin 1 part of
sodium water glass with 2 parts of water
in order to make the vehicle. This is
to be thickened with the following ma-
terials in order to get the desired color:
White, barium sulphate or white lead;
yellow, baryta chromate, ocher, or ura-
nium yellow; green, chromium oxide or
ultramarine green; brown, cadmium
oxide, manganese oxide, or sienna
brown; red, either iron or chrome red.
The coloring materials must be free
from lumps, and well ground in with the
vehicle. Bronze powders may also be
used either alone or mixed with other
coloring stuffs, but care must be taken,
in either instance, to secure a sufficient
quantity. The colors should be made
up as wanted, and no more than can
conveniently be applied at the time
should be prepared. An excellent way
to use the bronze powders is to lay on the
coloring matter, and then to dust on the
powder before the glass sets. Lines or
ornamentation of any sort may be put on
by allowing the coating of enamel to dry,
and then drawing the lines or any desired
design with a fresh solution of the water
glass colored to suit the taste, or dusted
over with bronze.
MISCELLANEOUS RECIPES:
Russian Polishing Lac. —
I. — Sticklac 925 parts
Sandarac 875 parts
Larch turpentine. . . 270 parts
Alcohol, 96 per cent 3,500 parts
The sticklac is broken up and mixed
with the sandarac, put into a suitable
container with a wide mouth, the spirit
poured over it and set aside. After
standing for a week in a warm place,
frequently stirring in the meantime (best
with a glass rod) and fully dissolving,
stir in the turpentine. Let stand 2 or
3 days longer, then filter through glass
wool. The sandarac dissolves complete-
ly in the spirit, but the stick leaves a
slight residue which may be added to the
next lot of lac made up and thus be
treated to a fresh portion of spirit. The
larch turpentine should be of the best
quality. This lac is used by woodcarvers
and turners and is very much prized by them.
Mastic Lac. —
II. — Mastic, select 150 parts
Sandarac 400 parts
Camphor 15 parts
Alcohol, 96 per cent 1,000 parts
Prepare as directed in the first recipe.
Leather Polish Lac. —
III.— Shellac 16 parts
Venice turpentine. . 8 parts
Sandarac 4 parts
Lampblack, Swed-
ish 2 parts
Turpentine oil .... 4 parts
Alcohol, 96 per cent 960 parts
The alcohol and turpentine oil are
mixed and warmed under constant stir-
ring in the sand or water bath. The
shellac and sandarac are now stirred in,
the stirring being maintained until both
are dissolved. Finally add the turpen-
tine and dissolve. Stir the lampblack
with a little vinegar and then add and
stir in. Instead of lampblack 125 to 150
parts of nigrosin may be used. This
lac should be well shaken before appli-
cation.
LACQUERED WARE, TO CLEAN:
See Cleaning Preparations and Meth-
ods.
LAKES:
See Dyes.
LAMPBLACK:
Production of Lampblack. — The last
oil obtained in the distillation of coal tar,
and freed from naphthalene as far as
possible, viz., soot oil, is burned in a
special furnace for the production of
various grades of lampblack. In this
furnace is an iron plate, which must
always be kept glowing; upon this plate
the soot oil trickles through a small tube
fixed above it. It is decomposed and
442
LAMPBLACK— LARD
the smoke (soot) rises into four cham-
bers through small apertures. When
the quantity of oil destined for decom-
position has been used up, the furnace is
allowed to stand undisturbed for a few
days, and only after this time has elapsed
are the chambers opened by windows
provided for that purpose. In the fourth
chamber is the very finest lampblack,
which the lithographers use, and in the
third the fine grade employed by manu-
facturers of printers' ink, while the first
and second contain the coarser soot,
which, well sifted, is sold as flame lamp-
black.
From grade No. 1 the calcined lamp-
black for paper makers is also produced.
For preparing this black capsules of iron
plate with closing lid are filled, the stuff
is stamped firmly into them and the
cover smeared up with fine loam. The
capsules are next placed in a well draw-
ing stove and calcined, whereby the em-
pyreumatic oils evaporate and the re-
maining lampblack becomes odorless.
Allow the capsules to cool for a few days
before opening them, as the soot dries
very slowly, and easily ignites again as
soon as air is admitted if the capsules are
opened before. This is semi-calcined
lampblack.
For the purpose of preparing com-
pletely calcined lampblack, the semi-
calcined article is again jammed into
fresh capsules, closing them up well and
calcining thoroughly once more. After
2 days the capsules are opened contain-
ing the all-calcined lampblack in com-
pact pieces.
For the manufacture of coal soot an-
other furnace is employed. Asphalt or
pitch is burned in it with exclusion of
air as far as practicable. It is thrown
in through the doors, and the smoke
escapes through the chimney to the soot
chambers, 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5, assorting
itself there.
When the amount of asphalt pitch
destined for combustion has burned up
completely, the furnace is left alone for
several days without opening it. After
this time has elapsed the outside doors
are slowly opened and some air is ad-
mitted. Later on they can be opened
altogether after one is satisfied that the
soot has cooled completely. Chamber
4 contains the finest soot black, destined
for the manufacture of leather cloth and
oil cloth. In the other chambers is fine
and ordinary flame black, which is sifted
and packed in suitable barrels. Cal-
cined lampblack may also be produced
from it, the operation being the same as
for oil black.
LAMP BURNERS AND THEIR CARE:
See Household Formulas.
LAMPS:
Coloring Incandescent Lamps. — In-
candescent light globes are colored by
dipping the bulbs into a thin solution of
collodion previously colored to suit with
anilines soluble in collodion. Dip and
rotate quickly, bulb down, till dry.
For office desks, room lights, and in
churches, it appears often desirable to
modify the glaring yellowish rays of the
incandescent light. A slight collodion
film of a delicate bluish, greenish, or
pink shade will do that.
For advertising purposes the bulbs are
often colored in two or more colors. It
is also easy with a little practice to paint
words or pictures, etc., on the bulbs with
colored collodion with a brush.
Another use of colored collodion in
pharmacy is to color the show globes on
their inside, thus avoiding freezing and
the additional weight of the now used
colored liquids. Pour a quantity of col-
ored collodion into the clean, dry globe,
close the mouth and quickly let the col-
lodion cover all parts of the inside. Re-
move the balance of the collodion at
once, and keep it to color electric bulbs
for your trade.
LANOLINE CREAMS:
See Cosmetics.
LANOLINE SOAP:
See Soap.
LANTERN SLIDES:
See Photography.
LARD:
Detection of Cottonseed Oil in Lard. —
Make a 2 per cent solution of silver
nitrate in distilled water, and acidify it
by adding 1 per cent of nitrate acid, C. P.
Into a test tube put a sample of the sus-
pected lard and heat gently until it lique-
fies. Now add an equal quantity of the
silver nitrate solution, agitate a little, and
bring to a boil. Continue the boiling
vigorously for about 8 minutes. If the
lard remain clear and colorless, it may
be accepted as pure. The presence of
cottonseed oil or fat will make itself
known by a coloration, varying from
yellow, grayish green to brown, accord-
ing to the amount present.
LATHE LUBRICANT:
See Lubricants.
LAUNDRY PREPARATIONS
443
LAUNDRY INKS:
See Household Formulas.
Laundry Preparations
BLUING COMPOUNDS:
Laundry Blue. — The soluble blue of
commerce, when properly made, dis-
solves freely in water, and solutions so
made are put up as liquid laundry blue.
The water employed in making the solu-
tion should be free from mineral sub-
stances, especially lime, or precipitation
may occur. If rain water or distilled
water and a good article of blue be used,
a staple preparation ought apparently to
result; but whether time alone affects
the matter of solubility it is impossible
to state. As it is essential that trie solu-
tion should be a perfect one, it is best to
filter it through several thicknesses of
fine cotton cloth before bottling; or if
made in large quantities this method
may be modified by allowing it to stand
some days to settle, when the top portion
can be siphoned off for use, the bottom
only requiring filtration.
This soluble blue is said to be potas-
sium ferri-ferrocyanide, and is prepared
by gradually adding to a boiling solution
of potassium ferricyanide (red prussiate
of potash) an equivalent quantity of hot
solution of ferrous sulphate, boiling for
2 hours and washing the precipitate on a
filter until the washings assume a dark-
blue color; the moist precipitate can then
at once be dissolved by the further ad-
dition of a sufficient quantity of water.
About 64 parts of the iron salt are neces-
sary to convert 100 parts of the potassium
salt into the blue compound.
Leaf bluing for laundry use may be
prepared by coating thick sized paper
with soluble blue formed into a paste
with a mixture of dextrin mucilage and
glycerine. Dissolve a given quantity
of dextrine in water enough to make a
solution about as dense as ordinary
syrup, add about as much glycerine as
there was dextrine, rub the blue smooth
with a sufficient quantity of this vehicle
and coat the sheets with the paint. The
amount of blue to be used will depend
of course on the intended cost of the
product, and the amount of glycerine will
require adjustment so as to give a mixture
which will not "smear" after the water
has dried out and yet remain readily sol-
uble.
Ultramarine is now very generally used
as a laundry blue where the insoluble or
"bag blue" is desired. It is mixed with
glucose, or glucose and dextrine, and
pressed into balls or cakes. When glu-
cose alone is used, the product has a
tendency, it is said, to become soft on
keeping, which tendency may be coun-
teracted by a proper proportion of dex-
trin. Bicarbonate of sodium is added
as a "filler" to cheapen the product, the
quantity used and the quality of the
ultramarine employed being both regu-
lated by the price at which the product
is to sell.
The coal-tar or aniline blues are not
offered to the general public as laundry
blues, but laundry proprietors have
them frequently brought under their
notice, chiefly in the form of solutions,
usually 1 to 1£ per cent strong. These
dyes are strong bluing materials, and,
being in the form of solution, are not
liable to speck the clothes. Naturally
their properties depend upon the par-
ticular dye used; some are fast to acids
and alkalies, others are fast to one but
not to another; some will not stand iron-
ing, while others again are not affected
by the operation; generally they are not
fast to light, but this is only of minor im-
portance. The soluble, or cotton, blues
are those most favored; these are made
in a great variety of tints, varying from a
reddish blue to a pure blue in hue, dis-
tinguished by such brands as 3R, 6B,
etc. Occasionally the methyl violets
are used, especially the blue tints.
Blackley blue is very largely used for this
purpose, being rather faster than the
soluble blues. It may be mentioned
that a 1 per cent solution of this dye is
usually strong enough. Unless care is
taken in dissolving these dyes they are
apt to produce specks. The heat to
which the pure blues are exposed in iron-
ing the clothes causes some kinds to
assume a purple tinge.
The cheapest aniline blue costs about
three times as much as soluble blue, yet
the tinctorial power of the aniline colors
is so great that possibly they might be
cheapened.
Soluble Blue. — I. — Dissolve 217 parts
of prussiate of potash in 800 parts of hot
water and bring the whole to 1,000 parts.
Likewise dissolve 100 parts of ferric
chloride in water and bring the solution
also to 1,000 parts. To each of these
solutions add 2,000 parts of cooking
salt or Glauber's salt solution saturated
in the cold and mix well. The solutions
thus prepared of prussiate of potash arid
ferric chloride are now mixed together
with stirring. Allow to settle and re-
move by suction the clear liquid con-
taining undecomposed ferrocyanide of
444
LAUNDRY PREPARATIONS
potassium and Glauber's salt; this is kept
and used for the next manufacture by
boiling it down and allowing the salts to
crystalline out. The percentage of ferro-
cyanide of potassium is estimated by
analysis, and for the next production
proportionally less is used, employing
that obtained by concentration.
After siphoning off the solution the
precipitate is washed with warm water,
placed on a filter and washed out on the
latter by pouring on cold water until the
water running off commences to assume
a strong blue color. The precipitate is
then squeezed out and dried at a moder-
ate heat (104° F.). The Paris blue thus
obtained dissolves readily in water and
can be extensively employed in a similar
manner as indigo carmine.
II. — Make ordinary Prussian blue
(that which has been purified by acids,
chlorine, or the hypochlorites) into a
thick paste with distilled or rain water,
and add a saturated solution of oxalic
acid sufficient to dissolve. If time be of
no consequence, by leaving this solution
exposed to the atmosphere, in the course
of 60 days the blue will be entirely pre-
cipitated in soluble form. Wash with
weak alcohol and dry at about 100° F.
The resultant mass dissolves in pure
water and remains in solution indefi-
nitely. It gives a deep, brilliant blue,
and is not injurious to the clothing or
the hands of the washwoman.
The same result may be obtained by
precipitating the soluble blue from its
oxide solution by the addition of alcohol
of 95 per cent, or with a concentrated solu-
tion of sodium sulphate. Pour off the
mother liquid and wash with very dilute
alcohol; or throw on a filter and wash
with water until the latter begins to come
off colored a deep blue.
Liquid Laundry Blue. — This may be
prepared either with liquid Prussian blue
or indigo carmine. Make a solution of
gum dragon (gum tragacanth) by dis-
solving 1 to 2 ounces of the powdered
gum in 1 gallon of cold water in which \
ounce oxalic acid has been dissolved.
The gum will take several days to dis-
solve, and will require frequent stirring
and straining before use. To the strained
portion add as much Prussian blue in
fine powder as the liquid will dissolve
without precipitating, and the com-
pound is ready for use.
Instead of powdered Prussian blue,
soluble Prussian blue may be used.
This is made by dissolving solid Prus-
sian blue in a solution of oxalic acid, but
as the use of oxalic acid is to be depre-
cated for the use of laundresses, as it
would set up blood poisoning should it
get into any cuts in the flesh, it is best to
prepare liquid blue by making a solution
of yellow prussiate of potash (ferrocya-
nide of potassium) with water, and then
by adding a sufficient quantity of chlor-
ide of iron to produce a blue, but not
enough to be precipitated.
Ball Blue. — The ball sold for laundry
use consists usually, if not always, of
ultramarine. The balls are formed by
compression, starch or some other ex-
cipient of like character being added to
render the mass cohesive. Blocks of
blue can, of course, be made by the same
process. The manufacturers of ultra-
marine prepare balls and cubes of the
pigment on a large scale, and it does
not seem likely that there would be a
sufficient margin of profit to justify the
making of them in a small way from
the powdered pigment. Careful experi-
ments, however, would be necessary to
determine this positively. Ultramarine
is of many qualities, and it may be ex-
pected that the balls will vary also in the
amount of "filling" according to the
price at which they are to be sold.
Below is a "filled" formula:
Ultramarine 6 ounces
Sodium carbonate.. . . 4 ounces
Glucose 1 ounce
Water, a sufficient quantity.
Make a thick paste, roll into sheets,
and cut into tablets. The balls in bulk
can be obtained only in large packages
of the manufacturers, say barrels of 200
pounds; but put up in 1-pound boxes
they can be bought in cases as small as 28
pounds.
Laundry Blue Tablets. —
Ultramarine 6 ounces
Sodium carbonate.. . . 4 ounces
Glucose 1 ounce
Water, a sufficient quantity.
Make a thick paste, roll into sheets,
and cut into tablets.
Polishes or Glazes for Laundry Work.
— I. — To a mixture of 200 parts each of
Japan wax and paraffine, add 100 parts
of stearic acid, melt together, and cast in
molds. If the heated smoothing iron be
rubbed with this wax the iron will not
merely get over the surface much more
rapidly, but will leave a handsome polish.
Laundry Gloss Dressing. —
II. — Dissolve white wax, 5.0 parts, in
ether, 20.5 parts, and add spirit, 75.0
parts. Shake before use.
Heat until melted, in a pot, 1,000 parts
LAUNDRY PREPARATIONS
445
of wax and 1,000 parts of stearine, as well
as a few drops of an essential oil. To
the hot liquid add with careful stirring
250 parts of ammonia lye of 10 per cent,
whereby a thick, soft mass results im-
mediately. Upon further heating same
turns thin again, whereupon it is diluted
with 20,000 parts of boiling water, mixed
with 100 parts of starch and poured into
molds.
STARCHES.
Most laundry starches now contain
some polishing mixture for giving a high
luster.
I. — ^Dissolve in a vessel of sufficient
capacity, 42 parts of crystallized mag-
nesium chloride in 30 parts of water.
In another vessel stir 12 parts of starch
in 20 parts of water to a smooth paste.
Mix the two and heat under pressure until
the starch is fluidified.
II. — Pour 250 parts, by weight, of
water, over 5 parts, by weight, of pow-
dered gum tragacanth until the powder
swells uniformly; then add 750 parts, by
weight, of boiling water, dissolve 50
parts, by weight, of borax in it, and stir 50
parts, by weight, of stearine and 50 parts,
by weight, of talcum into the whole.
Of this fluid add 250 parts to 1,000 parts
of boiled starch, or else the ironing oil
is applied by means of a sponge on the
starched wash, which is then ironed.
By weight
III.— Starch 1,044 parts
Borax 9 parts
Common salt 1 part
Gum arabic 8 parts
Stearine 20 parts
WASHING FLUIDS, BRICKS AND
POWDERS:
Washing Fluids. — Rub up 75 parts of
milk of sulphur with 125 parts of glycer-
ine in a mortar, next add 50 parts of
camphorated spirit and 1 part of lav-
ender oil, and finally stir in 250 parts of
rose water and 1,000 parts of distilled
water. The liquid must be stirred con-
stantly when filling it into bottles, since
the sulphur settles rapidly and would
thus be unevenly distributed.
Grosser's Washing Brick. —
Water 54 parts
Sodium hydrate. . . . 38.21 parts
Sodium biborate.. .. 6.61 parts
Sodium silicate 1.70 parts
Haenkel's Bleaching Solution. —
Water 36.15 parts
Sodium hydrate. . . . 40.22 parts
Sodium silicate 23.14 parts
34.50 parts
25.33 parts
39.40 parts
2 parts
1 part
6 parts
3 parts
1 part
3 parts
1 part
Equal
parts.
Luhn's Washing Extract.
Water
Sodium hydrate. . . .
Soap
Washing Powders. —
I. — Sodium carbonate,
partly effloresced.
O J L.
boda ash
II. — Sodium carbonate,
partly effloresced .
Soda ash
Yellow soap
III. — Sodium carbonate,
partly effloresced
Soap bark
IV. — Sodium carbonate,
partly effloresced
Borax
Yellow soap
V. — A good powder can be made
from 100 parts of crystal soda, 25 parts
of dark-yellow rosin-cured soap, and 5
parts of soft soap. The two latter are
placed in a pan, along with one-half the
soda (the curd soap being cut into small
lumps), and slowly heated, with con-
tinual crutching, until they are thorough-
ly melted — without, however, beginning
to boil. The fire is then drawn and the
remaining soda crutched in until it, too,
is melted, this being effected by the resid-
ual heat of the mass and the pan. The
mass will be fairly thick by the time the
soda is all absorbed. After leaving a
little longer, with occasional stirring, the
contents are spread out on several thin
sheets of iron in a cool room, to be then
turned over by the shovel at short in-
tervals, in order to further cool and break
down the mixture. The soap will then
be in a friable condition, and can be
rubbed through the sieve, the best re-
sults being obtained by passing through
a coarse sieve first, and one of finer mesh
afterwards. With these ingredients a
fine yellow-colored powder will be ob-
tained. White stock soap may also be
used, and, if desired, colored with pa'lm
oil and the same colorings as are used for
toilet soaps. The object of adding soft
soap is to increase the solubility and
softness of the powder, but the propor-
tion used should not exceed one-third of
the hard soap, or the powder will be
smeary and handle moist. The quality
of the foregoing product is good, the
powder being stable and not liable to
ball, even after prolonged storage;
neither does it wet the paper in which it
is packed, nor swell up, and therefore
the packets retain their appearance.
446
LAUNDRY PREPARATIONS— LEAKS
In making ammonia-turpentine soap
powder the ammonia and oil of turpen-
tine are crutched into the mass shortly
before removing it from the pan, and if
the powder is scented — for which pur-
pose oil of mirbane is mostly used — the
perfume is added at the same stage.
To Whiten Flannels. — Dissolve, by the
aid of heat, 40 parts of white castile soap,
shaved fine, in 1,200 parts of soft water,
and to the solution, wnen cold, gradually
add, under constant stirring, 1 part of
the strongest water of ammonia. Soak
the goods in this solution for 2 hours,
then let them be washed as usual for fine
flannels. A better process, in the hands
of experts, is to soak the goods for an
hour or so in a dilute solution of sodium
hyposulphite, remove, add to the solution
sufficient dilute hydrochloric acid to de-
compose the hyposulphite. Replace the
goods, cover the tub closely, and let re-
main for 15 minutes longer. Then re-
move the running water, if convenient,
and if not, wring out quickly, and rinse
in clear water. One not an expert at
such work must be very careful in the
rinsing, as care must be taken to get out
every trace of chemical. This is best
done by a second rinsing.
Ink for the Laundry. — The following
is said to make a fine, jet-black laundry
ink:
a. Copper chloride,crys-
tals 85 parts
Sodium chlorate. . . . 106 parts
Ammonium chloride 53 parts
Water, distilled 600 parts
6. Glycerine 100 parts
Mucilage gum arabic
(gum, 1 part;
water, 2 parts).. . . 200 parts
Aniline hydrochlor-
ate 200 parts
Distilled water 300 parts
Make solutions a and b and preserve in
separate bottles. When wanted for use,
mix 1 part of solution a with 4 parts of
solution 6.
Laces, Curtains, etc. — I. — To give lace
curtains, etc., a cream color, take 1 part
of chrysoidin and mix with 2 parts of
dextrin and dissolve in 250 parts of
water. The articles to be washed clean
are plunged in this solution. About an
ounce of chrysoidin is sufficient for 5
curtains.
II. — Washing curtains in coffee will
give them an ecru color, but the simplest
way to color curtains is with "Philadel-
phia yellow" (G. or R. of the Berlin
Aktiengesellschaft's scale).
LAUNDRY SOAP:
See Soap.
LAVATORY DEODORANT:
See Household Formulas.
LAXATIVES FOR CATTLE AND
HORSES:
See Veterinary Formulas.
LEAD:
See also Metals.
Simple Test for Red Lead and Orange
Lead. — Take a little of the sample in a
test tube, add pure, strong nitric acid and
heat by a Bunsen burner until a white,
solid residue is obtained. Then add
water, when a clear, colorless solution
will be obtained. A white residue would
indicate adulteration with barytes, a red
residue or a yellow solution with oxide of
iron. The presence of iron may be as-
certained by adding a few drops of a
solution of potassium ferrocyanide (yel-
low prussiate of potash) to the solution,
when a blue precipitate will be obtained
if there be the least trace of iron present.
LEAD, TO TAKE BOILING, IN THE
MOUTH:
See Pyrotechnics.
LEAD ALLOYS:
See Alloys.
LEAD PAPER:
See Paper.
LEAD PLATE, TINNED:
See Plating.
LEAKS, IN BOILERS, STOPPING:
See Putties.
LEAKS:
To Stop Leakage in Iron Hot-Water
Pipes. — Take some fine iron borings or
filings and mix with them sufficient vine-
gar to form a sort of paste, though the
mixture is not adhesive. With this mix-
ture fill up the cracks where the leakage
is found, having previously dried the
pipe. It must be kept dry until the paste
has become quite hard. If an iron pipe
should burst, or there should be a nole
broken into it by accident, a piece of iron
may be securely fastened over it, by bed-
ding it on in paste made of the borings
and vinegar as above, but the pipe should
not be disturbed until it has become per-
fectly dry.
To Prevent Wooden Vessels from
Leaking. (See also Casks.) — Wooden
LEATHER
447
vessels, such as pails, barrels, etc., often
become so dry that the joints do not
meet, thus causing leakage. In order to
obviate this evil stir together 60 parts
hog's lard, 40 parts salt, and 33 parts
wax, and allow the mixture to dissolve
slowly over a fire. Then add 40 parts
charcoal to the liquid mass. The leaks
in the vessels are dried off well and filled
up with putty while still warm. When
the latter has become dry, the barrels,
etc., will be perfectly tight. If any
putty is left, keep in a dry place and
heat it to be used again.
Leather
(See also Shoes.)
Artificial Leather. — Pure Italian hemp
is cut up fine; 1 part of this and £ part of
coarse, cleaned wool are carded together
and formed into wadding. This wad-
ding is packed in linen and felted by
treatment with hot acid vapors. The
resulting felt is washed out, dried, and
impregnated with a substance whose
composition varies according to the
leather to be produced. Thus, good
sole leather, for instance, is produced
according to a Danish patent, in the
following manner: Mix together 50 parts
of boiled linseed oil; 20 parts of colo-
phony; 25 parts of French turpentine;
10 parts of glycerine, and 10 parts of
vegetable wax, and heat over a water
bath with some ammonia water. When
the mass has become homogeneous, add
25 parts of glue, soaked in water, as well
as a casein solution, which latter is
produced by dissolving 50 parts, by
weight, of moist, freshly precipitated
casein in i saturated solution of 16 parts
of borax and adding 10 parts of potas-
sium bichromate, the last two also by
weight. Finally, mineral dyestuffs as
well as antiseptic substances may be
added to the mass. The whole mixture
is now boiled until it becomes sticky and
the felt is impregnated with it by im-
mersion. The impregnated felt is dried
for 24 hours at an ordinary tempera-
ture; next laid into a solution of alumi-
num acetate and finally dried completely,
dyed, and pressed between hot rollers.
Black Dye for Tanned Leather. — This
recipe takes the place of the ill-smelling
iron blacking, and is not injurious to the
leather. Gallnuts, pulverized, 150 parts;
vitriol, green or black, 10 parts; rock
candy, 60 parts; alum, 15 parts; vinegar,
250 parts; cooking salt, 20 parts. Dissolve
with 4,000 parts of distilled water.
Boil this solution slowly and the
blacking is done. When it has cooled
and settled, pour through linen, thus
obtaining a pure, good leather blacking.
Bronze Leather.— All sorts of skins —
sheepskins, goatskins, coltskins, and
light calfskins — are adapted for the
preparation of bronze leather. In this
preparation the advantage lies not only
in the use of the faultless skins, but scari-
fied skins and those of inferior quality
may also be employed. The dressing
of the previously tanned skin must be
carried out with the greatest care, to pre-
vent the appearance of spots and other
faults. After tanning, the pelts are well
washed, scraped, and dried. Then
they are bleached. For coloring, it is cus-
tomary to employ methyl violet which
has previously been dissolved in hot
water, taking 100 parts, by weight, of
the aniline color to 8,000 parts, by weight,
of water. If in the leather-dressing
establishment a line of steam piping be
convenient, it is advisable to boil up all
the coloring dyes, rather than simply to
dissolve them; for in this way complete
solution is effected. Where steam is
used no special appliance is required for
boiling up the dyes, for this may take
place without inconvenience in the
separate dye vats. A length of steam
hose and a brass nozzle with a valve is
all that is needed. It may be as well to
add here that the violet color for dyeing
may be made cheaper than as above
described. To 3,000 parts, by weight,
of pretty strong logwood decoction add
50 parts, by weight, of alum and 100
parts, by weight, of methyl violet. This
compound is almost as strong as the
pure violet solution, and instead of 8,000
parts, by weight, we now have 30,000
parts, by weight, of color.
The color is applied and well worked
in with a stiff brush, and the skins al-
lowed to stand for a short time, sufficient
to allow the dye to penetrate the pores,
when it is fulled. As for the shade of
the bronze, it may be made reddish,
bluish, or brownish, according to taste.
For a reddish or brownish ground the
skins are simply fulled in warm water,
planished, fulled again, and then dyed.
According to the color desired, the skins
are treated with cotton blue and methyl
violet R, whereupon the application of
the bronze follows.
The bronze is dissolved in alcohol,
and it is usual to take 200 parts, by
weight, of bronze to 1,000 of alcohol.
By means of this mixture the peculiar
component parts of the bronze are dis-
solved. For a fundamental or thorough
448
LEATHER
solution a fortnight is required. All
bronze mixtures are to be well shaken or
agitated before using. Skins may be
bronzed, however, without the use of the
bronze colors, for it is well known that
all the aniline dyes present a bronze ap-
pearance when highly concentrated, and
this is particularly the case with the
violet and red dyes. If, therefore, the
violet be applied in very strong solutions,
the effect will be much the same as when
the regular bronze color is employed.
Bronze color on a brown ground is the
most beautiful of all, and is used to the
greatest advantage when it is desirable
to cover up defects. Instead of warm
clear water in such a case, use a decoc-
tion of logwood to which a small quan-
tity of alum has been added, and thus,
during the fulling, impart to the skins a
proper basic tint, which may, by the ap-
plication of a little violet or bronze color,
be converted into a most brilliant bronze.
By no means is it to be forgotten that too
much coloring matter will never produce
the desired results, for here, as with the
other colors, too much will bring out a
greenish tint, nor will the gloss turn out
so beautiful and clear. Next rinse the
skins well in clean water, and air them,
after which they may be dried with arti-
ficial heat. Ordinary as well as dam-
aged skins which are not suitable for
chevreaux (kid) and which it is desirable
to provide with a very high polish, in
order the more readily to conceal the
defects in the grain, and other imperfec-
tions, are, after the drying, coated with a
mixture, compounded according to the
following simple formula: Stir well 1
pint of ox blood and 1 pint of unboiled
milk in 10 quarts of water, and with a
soft sponge apply this to the surface of
the skin. The blood has no damaging
effect upon the color. Skins thus mois-
tened must not be laid one upon another,
but must be placed separately in a thor-
oughly well-warmed chamber to dry.
When dry they are glossed, and may then
be pressed into shagreen or pebbled.
The thin light goatskins are worked into
kid or chevreaux. Properly speaking,
they are only imitation chevreaux (kid),
for although they are truly goatskins,
under the term chevreaux one under-
stands only such skins as have bee«
cured in alum and treated with albumen
and flour.
After drying, these skins are drawn
over the perching stick with the round
knife, then glossed, stretched, glossed
again, and finally vigorously brushed
upon the flesh side with a stiff brush.
The brushing should be done preferably
by hand, for the brushing machines
commonly pull the skins out of all shape.
Brushing is intended only to give the
flesh side more of a flaky appearance.
During the second glossing care must
be taken that the pressure is light, for
the object is merely to bring the skin
back into its proper shape, lost in the
stretching; the glossing proper should
have been accomplished during the first
operation.
Cracked Leather. — The badly cracked
and fissured carriage surface greets the
painter on every hand. The following
is the recipe for filling up and facing over
such a surface: Finest pumice stone, 6
parts; lampblack (in bulk), 1 part; com-
mon roughstuff filler, 3 parts. Mix to
stiff paste in good coach japan, 5 parts;
hard drying rubbing varnish, 1 part.
Thin to a brushing consistency with
turpentine, and apply 1 coat per day.
Put on 2 coats of this filler and then 2
coats Or ordinary roughstuff. Rub with
lump pumice stone and water. This
process does not equal burning off in
getting permanently rid of the cracks,
but when the price of painting forbids
burning off, it serves as an effective sub-
stitute. Upon a job that is well cared
for, and not subjected to too exacting
service, this filler will secrete the cracks
and fissures for from 3 to 5 months.
DRESSINGS FOR LEATHER:
For Carriage Tops. — I. — Here is an
inexpensive and quickly prepared dress-
ing for carriage tops or the like: Take
2 parts of common glue; soak and liquefy
it over a fire. Three parts of castile
soap are then dissolved over a moderate
heat. Of water, 120 parts are added
to dissolve the soap and glue, after which
an intimate mixture of the ingredients is
effected. Then 4 parts of spirit varnish
are added; next, 2 parts of wheat starch,
previously mixed in water, are thrown
in. Lampblack in a sufficient quantity
to give the mixture a good coloring power,
without killing the gloss, is now added.
This preparation may be used as above
prepared, or it may be placed over a
gentle fire and the liquid ingredients
slowly evaporated. The evaporated mass
is then liquefied with beer as shop needs
demand.
II. — Shabby dark leather will look
like new if rubbed over with either lin-
seed oil or the well-beaten white of an
egg mixed with a little black ink. Polish
with soft dusters until quite dry and
glossy.
Polishes. — I. — Dissolve sticklac, 25
LEATHER
449
parts; shellac, 20 parts; and gum ben-
zoin, 4 parts, all finely powdered, in a
rolling cask containing 100 parts of 96
per cent alcohol; perfume with 1 part of
oil of rosemary. Upon letting stand for
several days, filter the solution, where-
upon a good glossy polish for leather,
etc., will be obtained.
II. — Dissolve 2 pounds of borax in 4
gallons of water and add 5 pounds of
shellac to the boiling liquid in portions,
till all is dissolved. Then boil half an
hour, and finally stir in 5 pounds of sugar,
2^ pounds of glycerine, and 1^ pounds
of soluble nigrosin. When cold add 4
pounds of 95 per cent methylated spirit.
III.— Ox blood, fresh,
clean 1,000 parts
Commercial glyc-
erine 200 parts
Oil of turpentine. 300 parts
Pine oil (rosin
oil) 5,000 parts
Ox gall 200 parts
Formalin 15 parts
Mix in the order named, stirring in
each ingredient. When mixed strain
through linen.
Kid Leather Dressings. — Creams for
reasing fine varieties of leather, such as
id, patent leather, etc., are produced as
follows, according to tried recipes:
White Cream. —
Lard 75 parts
Glycerine, technical . 25 parts
Mirbane oil, ad libitum.
Black Cream. —
Lard * . 100 parts
Yellow vaseline 20 parts
Glycerine, technical. 10 parts
Castor oil, technical. 10 parts
Dye black with lampblack and per-
fume with oil of mirbane.
Colored Cream. —
Lard 100 parts
Castor oil 20 parts
Yellow wax 25 parts
White vaseline 30 parts
Dye with any desired dyestuff, e. g.,
red with anchusine, green with chloro-
phyl. In summer it is well to add some
wax to the first and second prescriptions.
These are for either Morocco or kid:
I.— Shellac 2 parts
Benzoin 2 parts
Yellow wax 5 parts
Soap liniment 7 parts
Alcohol 600 parts
Digest until solution is effected, then
I
allow the liquid to stand in a cool place
for 12 hours and strain. Apply with a
bit of sponge or soft rag; spread thinJy
and evenly over the surface, without
rubbing much. If dirty, the leather
should first be washed with a little soft
soap and warm water, wiped well, and
allowed to dry thoroughly before the
dressing is put on.
II. — Oil of turpentine. ... 8 ounces
Suet 2 pounds
Soft soap 8 ounces
Water 16 ounces
Lampblack 4 ounces
Patent Leather Dressings. —
I. — Wax 22 parts
Olive oil 60 parts
Oil turpentine, best . 20 parts
Lavender oil 10 parts
With gentle heat, melt the wax in the
oil, and as soon as melted remove from
the fire. Add the turpentine oil, in-
corporate, and when nearly cold, add
and incorporate the lavender oil.
II. — Wax 22 parts
Olive oil 60 parts
Oil of turpentine. ... 30 parts
With gentle heat, melt the wax in the
olive oil, and as soon as melted remove
from the fire. When nearly cold stir in
the turpentine.
Red Russia Leather Varnish. —
Shellac 1.20 parts
Dammar rosin, pow-
dered 0.15 parts
Turpentine, Venice . . 0.60 parts
Dissolve with frequent shaking in 12
parts of alcohol (95 per cent), add 1.8
parts of powdered red sanders wood, let
stand for 3 days and filter. The object
of this varnish is to restore the original
color to worn Russia leather boots, pre-
viously cleaned with benzine.
Russet Leather Dressing. — The fol-
lowing formulas are said to yield effi-
cient preparations that are at once de-
tersive and polishing, thus rendering the
use of an extra cleaning liquid unneces-
sary.
I. — Soft soap ... 2 parts
Linseed oil 3 parts
Annatto solution (in
oil) 8 parts
Beeswax 3 parts
Turpentine 8 parts
Water 8 parts
Dissolve the soap in the water, and
add the annatto; melt the wax in the oil
and turpentine, and gradually stir in the
soap solution, stirring until cold.
450
LEATHER
II. — Palm oil 16 parts
Common soap 48 parts
Oleic acid 32 parts
Glycerine 10 parts
Tannic acid 1 part
Melt the soap and palm oil together
at a gentle heat, and add the oleic acid;
dissolve the tannic acid in the glycerine,
add to the hot soap and oil mixture, and
stir until perfectly cold.
Shoe Leather Dressing. — Over a water
bath melt 50 parts, by weight, of oil of
turpentine; 100 parts, by weight, of olive
oil; 100 parts, by weight, of train oil; 40
parts, by weight, of carnauba wax; 15
parts, by weight, of asphaltum; and 2
parts, by weight, of oil of bitter almonds.
DYEING LEATHER.
In dyeing leather, aniline or coal-tar
colors are generally used. These dyes,
owing to their extremely rapid action on
organic substances, such as leather, do
not readily adapt themselves to the
staining process, because a full brushful
of dye liquor would give a much deeper
coloration than a half-exhausted brush
would give. Consequently, to alter and
to color leather by the staining process
results in a patchy coloration of the skin.
In the dyeing operation a zinc shallow
trough, 4 to 6 inches deep, is used, into
which the dye liquor is put, and to pro-
duce the best results the contents of the
trough are kept at a uniform tempera-
ture by means of a heating apparatus
beneath the troligh, such as a gas jet or
two, which readily allows of a heat being
regulated. The skins to be dyed are
spread out flat in the dye trough, one at a
time, each skin remaining in the dye
liquor the time prescribed by the recipe.
The best coloration of the skin is pro-
duced by using 3 dye troughs of the
same dye liquor, each of different
strength, the skin being put in the
weakest liquor first, then passed into the
second, and from there into the third dye
liquor, where it is allowed to remain
until its full depth of color is obtained.
Very great skill is required in the em-
ployment of aniline dyes, as if the heat be
too great, or the skins remain too long in
the final bath, "bronzing" of the color
occurs. The only remedy for this (and
that not always effectual) is to sponge
the skin with plenty of cold, clean water,
directly it is taken out of the final dye
bath. The dyed skins are dried and
finished as before.
Leather Brown. —
Extract of fustic. ... 5 ounces
Extract of hypernic. . 1 ounce
Extract of logwood. . . \ ounce
Water 2 gallons
Boil all these ingredients for 15 min-
utes, and then dilute with water to make
10 gallons of dye liquor. Use the dye
liquor at a temperature of 110° F.
Mordant. — Dissolve 3 ounces of white
tartar and 4 ounces of alum in 10 gal-
lons of water.
Fast Brown. — Prepare a dye liquor by
dissolving 1 J ounces fast brown in 1 gal-
lon of water, and make a 10-gallon bulk
of this. Use at a temperature of 1 10° F.,
and employ the same mordanting liquor
as in last recipe.
Bismarck Brown. —
Extract of fustic 4 ounces
Extract of hypernic. . 1 ounce
Extract of logwood. . . \ ounce
Water 2 gallons
Preparation. — Boil all together for 15
minutes.
Method of Dyeing. — First mordant
the skins with a mordanting fluid made
by dissolving 3 ounces tartar and \ ounce
borax in 10 gallons of water. Then put
the skins into the above foundation bath
at a temperature of 100° F. Take them
out, and then put in 1 ounce of Bismarck
brown, dissolved in boiling water. Put
the skins in again until colored deep
enough, then lift out, drip and dry.
HARNESS PREPARATIONS:
Blacking for Harness. — I. — In a water
bath dissolve 90 parts of yellow wax in
900 parts of oil of turpentine; aside from
this mix well together, all the ingredients
being finely powdered, 10 parts of Prus-
sian blue, 5 parts of indigo, 50 parts of
bone black, and work this into a portion
of the above-mentioned waxy solution.
Now throw this into the original solution,
which still remains in the water bath, and
stir it vigorously until the mass becomes
homogeneous, after which pour it into,
any convenient earthenware receptacle.
II. — Best glue, 4 ounces; good vine-
gar, 1$ pints; best gum arabic, 2 ounces;
good black ink, \ pint; best isinglass, 2
drachms. Dissolve the gum in the ink,
and melt the isinglass in another vessel
in as much hot water as will cover it.
Having first steeped the glue in the vine-
gar until soft, dissolve it completely by
the aid of heat, stirring to prevent burn-
ing. The heat should not exceed 180°
F. Add the gum and ink, and allow
the mixture to rise again to the same
temperature. Lastly mix the solution in
isinglass, and remove from fire. When
LEATHER
451
used, a small portion must be heated
until fluid, and then applied with a
sponge and allowed to dry on.
Dressings for Harness. —
I. — Ox blood, fresh and
well purified ....... 100
Glycerine, technical. 20
Turpentine oil ...... 30
Pine oil ............ 50
Ox gall . ........... 20
Formalin. ......... l
parts
parts
parts
parts
parts
parts
The raw materials are stirred together
cold in the order named. Pour the mix-
ture through thin linen. It imparts a
wonderful mild, permanent gloss.
II. — A French harness dressing of
food quality consists of oil of turpentine,
00 parts; yellow wax, 90 parts; Berlin
blue, 10 parts; indigo, 5 parts; and bone
black, 50 parts. Dissolve the yellow
wax in the oil of turpentine with the aid
of moderate heat in a water bath, mix
the remaining substances, which should
previously be well pulverized, and work
them with a small portion of the wax
solution. Finally, add the rest of the
wax solution, and mix the whole well in
the water bath. When a homogeneous
liquid has resulted, pour it into earthen
receptacles.
Harness Oils. —
I. — Neatsfoot oil ....... 10 ounces
Oil of turpentine.. .. 2 ounces
Petrolatum ........ 4 ounces
Lampblack ........ \ ounce
Mix the lampblack with the turpentine
and the neatsfoot oil, melt the petrolatum
and mix by shaking together.
II.— Black aniline ---- 35 grains
Muriatic acid ... 50 minims
Bone black ..... 175 grains
Lampblack ..... 18 grains
Yellow wax. . . . . 2^ av. ounces
Oil of turpentine 22 fluidounces
III. — Oil of turpentine 8 fluidounces
Yellow wax ..... 2 av. ounces
Prussian blue ... \ av. ounce
Lampblack ..... J av. ounce
Melt the wax, add the turpentine, a
portion first to the finely powdered Prus-
sian blue and lampblack, and thin with
neatsfoot oil.
Harness Pastes. —
I. — Ceresine, natural
yellow ........... 1.5 parts
Yellow beeswax .... 1.5 parts
Japan wax ......... 1.5 parts
Melt on the water bath, and when half
cooled stir in 8 parts of turpentine oil.
Harness Grease. —
By weight
II. — Ceresine, natural
yellow 2.5 parts
Beeswax, yellow. . . . 0.8 parts
French colophony,
pale 0.4 parts
By weight
III. — French oil turpen-
tine 2.0 parts
Intimately mixed in
the cold with
American lamp-
black 1.5 parts
Put mixture I in a kettle and melt over
a fire. Remove from the fire and stir in
mixture II in small portions. Then
pour through a fine sieve into a second
vessel, and continue pouring from one
kettle into the other until the mass is
rather thickish. Next fill in cans.
Should the mixture have become too
cold during the filling of the cans, the
vessel containing the grease need only
be placed in hot water, whereby the con-
tents are rendered liquid again, so that
pouring out is practicable. For per-
fuming, use cinnamon oil as required.
This harness grease is applied by
means of a rag and brushed.
Waterproof Harness Composition. —
See also Waterproofing.
By weight
Rosin spirit 27 \ parts
Dark mineral oil. . 13| parts
Paraffine scales. . . 16.380 parts
Lampblack 7.940 parts
Dark rosin 5.450 parts
Dark syrup 5.450 parts
Naphthalene black 2.500 parts
Berlin blue 0.680 parts
Mirbane oil 0.170 parts
Melt the paraffine and the rosin, add
the mineral oil and the rosin spirit, stir
the syrup and the pigments into this,
and lastly add the mirbane oil.
PATENT AND ENAMELED LEATHER.
Patent leather for boots and shoes is
Erepared from sealskins, enameled
gather for harness from heavy bullock's
hides. The process of tanning is what
is called "union tannage" (a mixture of
oak and hemlock barks). These tanned
skins are subjected to the process of soak-
ing, unhairing, liming, etc., and are then
subjected to the tanning process. When
about one-third tanned a buffing is taken
off (if the hides are heavy), and the hide
is split into three layers. The top or
grain side is reserved for enameling in
fancy colors for use on tops of carriages;
the middle layer is finished for splatter
LEATHER
boards and carriage trimmings, and
some parts of harness; the underneath
layer, or flesh side is used for shoe uppers
and other purposes. The tanning of
the splits is completed by subjecting them
to a gambier liquor instead of a bark
liquor.
When the splits are fully tanned they
are laid on a table and scored, and then
stretched in frames and dried, after
which each one is covered on one side
with the following compound, so as to
close the pores of the leather that it may
present a suitable surface for receiving
the varnish: Into 14 parts of raw lin-
seed oil put 1 part dry white lead and 1
part silver litharge, and boil, stirring
constantly until the compound is thick
enough to dry in 15 or 20 minutes (when
spread on a sheet of iron or china) into
a tough, elastic mass, like caoutchouc.
This compound is laid on one side of
the leather while it is still stretched in the
frame. If for enameled leather (i. e.,
not the best patent), chalk or yellow
ocher may be mixed in the above com-
pound while boiling, or afterwards, but
before spreading it on the leather.
The frames are then put into a rack in
a drying closet, and the coated leather
dried by steam heat at 80° to 160° F.,
the heat being raised gradually. After
removal from the drying closet, the
grounding coat previously laid on is
pumiced, to smooth out the surface, and
then given 2 or 3 coats of the enameling
varnish, which consists of Prussian blue
and lampblack boiled with linseed oil
and diluted with turpentine, so as to
enable it to flow evenly over the surface
of the coated leather. When spread on
with a brush, each coating of the enamel
is dried before applying the next, and
pumiced or rubbed with tripoli powder
on a piece of flannel (the coat last laid on
is not subjected to this rubbing), when
the leather is ready for market.
To prepare the enameling composi-
tion, boil 1 part asphaltum with 20 parts
raw linseed oil until thoroughly com-
bined; then add 10 parts thick copal
varnish, and when this mixture is homo-
geneous dilute with 20 parts spirit of
turpentine.
Instead of the foregoing enameling
varnish the following is used for superior
articles:
Prussian blue 18 ounces
Vegetable black. . . 4 ounces
Raw linseed oil. ... 160 fluidounces
Boil together as previously directed,
and dilute with turpentine as occasion
requires. These enameling varnishes
should be made and kept several weeks
in the same room as the varnishing is
carried on. so that they are always sub-
jected to the same temperature.
STAINS FOR PATENT LEATHER:
Black Stain. —
Vinegar . 1 gallon
Ivory black 14 ounces
Ground iron scales. . . 6 pounds
Mix well and allow to stand a few
days.
Red Stain. — Water, 1 quart; spirit of
hartshorn, 1 quart; cochineal, | pound.
Heat the water to near the boiling point,
and then dissolve in it the cochineal,
afterwards adding the spirit of hartshorn.
Stir well to incorporate.
Liquid Cochineal Stain. —
Good French carmine 2J drachms
Solution of potash £ ounce
Rectified spirit of wine 2 ounces
Pure glycerine 4 ounces
Distilled water to make 1 pint.
To the carmine in a 20-ounce bottle
add 14 ounces of distilled water. Then
gradually introduce solution of potash,
shaking now and again until dissolved.
Add glycerine and spirit of wine, making
up to 20 ounces with distilled water, and
filter.
Blue Black. — Ale droppings, 2 gallons;
bruised galls, \ pound; logwood extract,
\ pound; indigo extract, 2 ounces; sul-
phate of iron, 3^ ounces. Heat together
and strain.
Finishers' Ink. — Soft water, 1 gallon;
logwood extract, \\ ounces; green vitriol,
2J ounces; potassium bichromate, j
ounce; gum arabic, \ ounce.
Grind the gum and potassium bichro-
mate to powder and then add all the
coloring ingredients to the water and boil.
To Restore Patent Leather Dash. —
Take raw linseed oil, 1 part; cider vine-
gar, 4 ounces; alcohol, 2 ounces; butter
of antimony, 1 ounce; aqua ammonia,
\ ounce; spirits of camphor, \ ounce;
lavender, \ ounce. Shake well together;
apply with a soft brush.
PRESERVATIVES FOR LEATHER.
I. — Mutton suet 50 parts
Sweet oil 50 parts
Turpentine 1 part
Melt together.
The application should be made on
the dry leather warmed to the point
where it will liquefy and absorb the fat.
II. — Equal parts of mutton fat and
linseed oil. mixed with one-tenth their
LEATHER
453
weight of Venice turpentine, and melted
together in an earthen pipkin, will pro-
duce a "dubbin" which is very efficacious
in preserving leather when exposed to
wet or snow, etc. The mixture should
be applied when the leather is quite dry
and warm.
III. — A solution of 1 ounce of solid
paraffine in 1 pint light naphtha, to
which 6 drops of sweet oil have been
added, is put cold on the soles, until they
will absorb no more. One dressing will
do for the uppers. This process is
claimed to vastly increase the tensile
strength.
Patent Leather Preserver. —
Carnauba wax 1.0 part
Turpentine oil 9.5 parts
Aniline black, soluble
in fat 0.06 parts
Melt the wax, stir in the turpentine oil
and the dye and scent with a little mir-
bane oil or lavender oil. The paste is
rubbed out on the patent leather by means
of a soft rag, and when dry should be
polished with a soft brush.
REVIVERS AND REGENERATORS.
By weight.
I. — Methylic alcohol 22| parts
Ground ruby shellac 2.250 parts
Dark rosin 0.910 parts
Gum rosin 0.115 parts
Sandarac 0.115 parts
Lampblack ....... 0.115 parts
Aniline black, spirit-
soluble 0.115 parts
The gums are dissolved in spirit and
next the aniline black soluble in spirit is
added; the lampblack is ground with a
little liquid to a paste, which is added to
the whole, and filtering follows.
Kid Reviver.-^-
By weight.
II. — Clear chloride of lime
solution 3.5 parts
Spirit of sal ammo-
niac 0.5 parts
Scraped Marseilles
soap 4.5 parts
Water 6.0 parts
Mix chloride of lime solution and
spirit of sal ammoniac and stir in the
soap dissolved in water. Revive the
gloves with the pulpy mass obtained, by
means of a flannel rag.
TANNING LEATHER.
Pickling Process. — Eitner and Stiazny
have made a systematic series of experi-
ments with mixtures of salt and vari-
ous acids for pickling skins preparatory
to tanning. Experiments with hydro-
chloric acid, acetic and lactic acids
showed that these offered no advantages
over sulphuric acid for use in pickling,
the pickled pelts and the leather pro-
duced from them being similar in ap-
pearance and quality. By varying the
concentration of the pickle liquors, it was
found that the amount of salt absorbed
by the pelt from the pickle liquor was
controlled by the concentration of the
solution, 23 to 25 per cent of the total
amount used being taken up by the pelt,
and that the absorption capacity of the
pelt for acid was limited.
The goods pickled with the largest
amount of acid possessed a more leathery
feel and after drying were fuller and
stretched much better than those in
which smaller amounts of acids were
employed. Dried, pickled pieces, con-
taining as much as 3 per cent of sulphuric
acid, showed no deterioration or tender-
ing of fiber. The pickled skins after
chrome tanning still retained these
characteristics. An analysis of the
leather produced by tanning with sumac
showed that no free acid was retained in
the finished leather. An Australian
pickled pelt was found to contain 19.2
per cent of salt and 2.8 per cent of sul-
phuric acid.
From a very large number of experi-
ments the following conclusions were
drawn: 1. That sulphuric acid is quite
equal in efficiency to other acids for the
purpose. 2. To a certain limit increas-
ing softness is produced by increasing
the quantity of acid used. 3. For
naturally soft skins and when a leather
not very soft is required the best results
are obtained by using 22 pounds of salt,
2.2 pounds of sulphuric acid, and 25 gal-
lons of water for 1 10 pounds of pelt in the
drum. 4. For material which is natural-
ly hard and when a soft leather is re-
quired, the amount of acid should be
increased to 4.4 pounds, using similar
amounts as those given above of pelt,
salt, and water.
French Hide Tanning Process. — I. —
The prepared pelts are submitted to a
3 to 4 hours' immersion in a solution of
rosin soap, containing 5 to 10 per cent of
caustic soda. The goods are afterwards
placed in a 6 to 12 per cent solution of a
salt of chromium, iron, copper, or alum-
inum (preferably aluminum sulphate)
for 3 to 4 hours.
II. — The hides are soaked in a solu-
tion of sodium carbonate of 10° Be. for
3 to 6 hours. After washing with water
they are allowed to remain for 5 hours in
454
LEATHER
a bath of caustic soda, the strength of
which may vary from 2° to 30° Be.
From this they are transferred to a bath
of hydrochloric acid (1° to 5° Be.) in
which they remain for 2 hours. Finally
the hides are washed and the beam-work
finished in the usual way. The tannage
consists of a special bath of sodium or
ammonium sulphoricinoleate (2 to 30
per cent) and sumac extract, or similar
tanning material (2 to 50 per cent). The
strength of this bath is gradually raised
from 4° to 30° or 40° Be.
Tanning Hides for Robes. — The hides
should be very thoroughly soaked in
order to soften them completely. For dry
hides this will require a longer time than
for salted. A heavy hide requires longer
soaking than a skin. Thus it is impos-
sible to fix a certain length of time. After
soaking, the hide is fleshed clean, and
is now ready to go into the tan liquor,
which is made up as follows: One part
alum; 1 part salt; J to £ part japonica.
These are dissolved in hot water in suf-
ficient quantity to make a 35° liquor.
The hide, according to the thickness, is
left in the tan from 5 to 10 days. Skins
are finished in about 2 or 3 days. The
hide should be run in a drum for about 2
hours before going into tan, and again
after that process. In tanning hides for
robes, shaving them down is a main
requisite for success, as it is impossible
to get soft leather otherwise. After
shaving put back into the tan liquor
again for a day or two and hang up to
dry. When good and hard, shave again
and lay away in moist sawdust and give a
heavy coat of oil. When dry, apply a
solution of soft soap; roll up and lay away
in moist sawdust again. Run the hides
on a drum or wheel until thoroughly soft.
The composition of the tan liquor may
be changed considerably. If the brown-
ish tinge of the japonica be objectionable,
that article may be left out entirely. The
japonica has the effect of making the
robe more able to resist water, as the
alum and salt alone are readily soaked
out by rain.
Lace Leather. — Take cow hides aver-
aging from 25 to 30 pounds each; 35
hides will make a convenient soak for a
vat containing 1,000 gallons of water, or
25 hides to a soak of 700 gallons. Soak
2 days or more, as required. Change
water every 24 hours. Split and flesh;
resoak if necessary. When thoroughly
soft put in limes. Handle and strength-
en once a day, for 5 or 6 days. Unhair
and wash. Bathe in hen manure, 90° F.
Work out of drench, wash well, drain 4
of 5 hours. Then process, using 45
pounds vitriol and 600 pounds of soft
water to 700 gallons of water. In re-
newing process for second or consecutive
packs, use 15 pounds vitriol and 200
pounds salt, always keeping stock con-
stantly in motion during time of proc-
essing. After processing, drain over
night, then put in tan in agitated liquors,
keeping the stock in motion during the
whole time of tanning. Pack down over-
night. Use 200 pounds dry leather to
each mill in stuffing.
For stuffing, use 3 gallons curriers'
hard grease and 3 gallons American cod
oil. Strike out from mill, on flesh. Set
out on grain. Dry slowly. Trim and
board, length and cross. The stock is
then ready to cut. The time for soaking
the hides may be reduced one-half by
putting the stock into a rapidly revolving
reel pit, with a good inflow of water, so
that the dirty water washes over and runs
off. After 10 hours in the soak, put the
stock into a drum, and keep it tumbling
5 hours. This produces soft stock.
In liming, where the saving of the hair
is no object, softer leather is obtainable
by using 35 pounds sulphide of sodium
with 60 pounds lime. Then, when the
stock comes from the limes, the hair is
dissolved and immediately washes off,
and saves the labor of unhairing and
caring for the hair, which in some cases
does not pay.
MISCELLANEOUS RECIPES:
Russian Leather. — This leather owes
its name to the country of its origin. The
skins used for its production are goat,
large sheep, calfskin, and cow or steer
hide. The preliminary operations of
soaking, unhairing, and fleshing are done
in the usual manner, and then the hides
are permitted to swell in a mixture of rye
flour, oat flour, yeast, and salt. This
compound is made into a paste with
water, and is then thinned with suffi-
cient water to steep a hundred hides in
the mixture. The proportions of ingre-
dients used for this mixture are 22
pounds rye flour, 10 pounds oat flour, a
little salt, and sufficient yeast to set up
fermentation.
The hides are steeped in this com-
pound for 2 days, until swelled up, and
then put into a solution of willow and
poplar barks, in which they are allowed
to remain 8 days, being frequently
turned about. The tanning process is
then completed by putting them into a
tanning liquor composed of pine and
willow barks, equal parts. They are
steeped 8 days in this liquor, and then a
LEATHER
455
fresh liquor of the same ingredients and
proportions is made up. The hides are
hardened and split, and then steeped in
the freshly made liquor for another 8
days, when they are sufficiently tanned.
The hides are then cut down the
middle (from head to tail) into sides, and
scoured, rinsed, and dried by dripping,
and then passed on to the currier, who
slightly dampens the dry sides and puts
them in a heap or folds them together
for a couple of days to temper, and then
impregnates them with a compound con-
sisting of f parts birch oil and J parts seal
oil. This is applied on the flesh side for
light leather, and on the grain side also
for heavy leather. The leather is then
"set out," "whitened," and well boarded
and dried before dyeing.
A decoction of sandalwood, alone or
mixed with cochineal, is used for pro-
ducing the Russian red color, and this
dye liquor is applied several times,
allowing each application to dry before
applying the following one. A brush is
used, and the dye liquor is spread on the
grain side. A solution of tin chloride is
used in Russia as a mordant for the
leather before laying on the dye. The
dye liquor is prepared by boiling 18
ounces of sandalwood in 13 pints of
water for 1 hour, and then filtering the
liquid arid dissolving in the filtering
fluid 1 ounce of prepared tartar and
soda, which is then given an hour's
boiling and set aside for a few days be-
fore use.
After dyeing, the leather is again im-
pregnated with the mixture of birch and
seal oils (applied to the grain side on a
piece of flannel) and when the dyed
leather has dried, a thin smear of gum-
dragon mucilage is given to the dyed side
to protect the color from fading, while
the flesh side is smeared with bark-tan
juice and the dyed leather then grained
for market.
Toughening Leather. — Leather is
toughened and also rendered impervious
by impregnating with a solution of 1 part
of caoutchouc or gutta-percha in 16 parts
of benzene or other solvent, to which is
added 10 parts of linseed oil. Wax and
rosin may be added to thicken the solu-
tion.
Painting on Leather. — When the leath-
er is finished in the tanneries it is at the
same time provided with the necessary
greasy particles to give it the required
pliancy and prevent it from cracking.
It is claimed that some tanners strive to
obtain a greater weight thereby, thus
increasing their profit, since a pound of
fat is only one-eighth as dear as a pound
of leather.
If such leather, so called kips, which
are much used for carriage covers and
knee caps, is to be prepared for painting
purposes, it is above all necessary to
close up the pores of the leather, so that
the said fat particles cannot strike
through. They would combine with
the applied paint and prevent the latter
from drying, as the grease consists main-
ly of fish oil. For this reason an elastic
spirit leather varnish is employed, which
protects the succeeding paint coat suffi-
ciently from the fat.
For further treatment take a good
coach varnish to which \ of stand oil
(linseed oil which has thickened by
standing) has been added and allow the
mixture to stand for a few days. W'ith
this varnish grind the desired colors,
thinning them only with turpentine oil.
Put on 2 coats. In this manner the
most delicate colors may be applied to
the leather, only it is needful to put on
pale and delicate shades several times.
In some countries the legs or tops of
boots are painted yellow, red, green, or
blue in this manner. Inferior leather,
such as sheepskin and goat leather,
which is treated with alum by the tanner,
may likewise be provided with color in
the manner stated. Subsequently it can
be painted, gilded, or bronzed.
Stains for Oak Leather. — I. — Apply
an intimate mixture of 4 ounces of umber
(burnt or raw); \ ounce of lampblack,
and 17 fluidounces ox gall.
II. — The moistened leather is primed
with a solution of 1 part, by weight, of
copper acetate in 50 parts of water,
slicked out and then painted with solu-
tion of yellow prussiate potash in feebly
acid water.
LEATHER AS AN INSULATOR:
See Insulation.
LEATHER CEMENTS:
See Adhesives, under Cements.
LEATHER-CLEANING PROCESSES :
See Cleaning Preparations and Meth-
ods.
LEATHER, GLUES FOR:
See Adhesives.
LEATHER LAC:
See Lacquers.
LEATHER LUBRICANTS :
See Lubricants.
456
LEMONS— LETTERING
LEATHER VARNISH :
See Varnish.
LEATHER WATERPROOFING:
See Waterproofing. «
LEMONS:
See also Essences, Extracts, and Fruits.
Preservation of Fresh Lemon Juice. —
The fresh juice is cleared by gently heat-
ing it with a little egg albumen, without
stirring the mixture. This causes all
solid matter to sink with the coagulated
white, or to make its way to the surface.
The juice is then filtered through a
woolen cloth and put into bottles, filled
as full as possible, and closed with a cork
stopper, in such a way that the cork may
be directly in contact with the liquid.
Seal at once and keep in a cool place.
The bottles should be asepticized with
boiling water just before using.
LEMON EXTRACT (ADULTERATED),
TESTS FOR:
See Foods.
LEMON SHERBET POWDER:
See Salts, Effervescent.
LEMONADES, LEMONADE POWDERS,
AND LEMONADE DROPS:
See Beverages.
LEMONADE POWDER:
See Salts, Effervescent.
LENSES AND THEIR CARE:
Unclean Lenses (see also Cleaning Prep-
arations and Methods). — If in either ob-
jective or eyepiece the lenses are not
clean, the definition may be seriously im-
paired or destroyed. Uncleanliness may
be due to finger marks upon the front lens
of the objective, or upon the eyepiece
lenses; dust which in time may settle upon
the rear lens of the objective or on the
eye lens; a film which forms upon one or
the other lens, due occasionally to the fact
that glass is hygroscopic, but generally
to the exhalation from the interior finish
of the mountings, and, in immersion ob-
jectives, because the front lens is not
properly cleaned; or oil that has leaked
on to its rear surface, or air bubbles that
have formed in the oil between the cover
glass and front lens.
Remedy. — Keep all lenses scrupu-
lously clean. For cleaning, use well-
washed linen (an old handkerchief) or
Japanese lens paper.
Eyepieces. — To find impurities, revolve
the eyepieces during the observation;
breathe upon the lenses, and wipe gently
with a circular motion and blow off any
particles which may adhere.
Dry Objectives. — Clean the front lens
as described. To examine the rear and in-
terior lenses use a 2-inch magnifier, look-
ing through the rear. Remove the dust
from the rear lens with a camel's-hair
brush.
Oil Immersion Objectives. — Invariably
clean the front lens after use with moist-
ened linen or paper, and wipe dry.
In applying oil examine the front of
the objective with a magnifier, and if there
are any air bubbles, remove them with a
pointed quill, or remove the oil entirely
and apply a fresh quantity.
LETTERS, TO REMOVE FROM CHINA :
See Cleaning Preparations and Meth-
ods, under Miscellaneous Methods.
LETTER-HEAD SENSITIZERS :
See Photography, under Paper-Sensi-
tizing Processes.
Lettering
CEMENTS FOR ATTACHING LETTERS
ON GLASS :
See .Adhesives, under Sign-Letter Ce-
ments.
Gold Lettering. — This is usually done
by first drawing the lettering, then cover-
ing with an adhesive mixture, such as size,
and finally applying gold bronze powder
or real gold leaf. A good method for
amateurs to follow in marking letters on
glass is to apply first a coat of whiting,
mixed simply with water, and then to
mark out the letters on this surface,
using a pointed stick or the like. After
this has been done the letters may easily
be painted or gilded on the reverse side of
the glass. When done, wash off the
whiting from the other side, and the work
is complete.
Bronze Lettering. — The following is
the best method for card work: Write with
asphaltum thinned with turpentine until
it flows easily, and, when nearly dry, dust
bronze powder over the letters. When
the letters are perfectly dry tap the card
to take off the extra bronze, and it will
leave the letters clean and sharp. The
letters should be made with a camel's-
hair brush and not with the automatic
pen, as oil paints do not work satisfac-
torily with these pens.
For bronzed letters made with the pen,
use black letterine or any water color.
LETTERING
457
If a water color is used add considerable
gum arabic. Each letter should be
bronzed as it is made, as the water color
dries much more quickly than the as-
phaltum.
Another method is to mix the bronze
powder with bronze sizing to about the
consistency of the asphaltum. Make the
letter with a camel's-hair brush, using the
bronze paint as one would any oil paint.
This method requires much skill, as
the gold paint spreads quickly and is apt
to flood over the edge of the letter. For
use on oilcloth this is the most practical
method.
Bronzes may be purchased at any
hardware store. They are made in
copper, red, green, silver, gold, and cop-
per shades.
Lettering on Glass. — White lettering
on glass and mirrors produces a rich
effect. Dry zinc, chemically pure, should
be used. It can be obtained in any first-
class paint store and is inexpensive. To
every teaspoonful of zinc, 10 drops of
mucilage should be added. The two
should be worked up into a thick paste,
water being gradually added until the
mixture is about the consistency of thick
cream. The paint should then be ap-
plied with a camel's-hair brush.
Another useful paint for this purpose
is Chemnitz white. If this distemper
color is obtained in a jar, care should be
exercised to keep water standing above
the color to prevent drying. By using
mucilage as a sizing these colors will ad-
here to the glass until it is washed off.
Both mixtures are equally desirable for
lettering on block card-board.
Any distemper color may be employed
on glass without in any way injuring it.
An attractive combination is — first to
letter the sign with Turkey red, and then
to outline the letters with a very narrow
white stripe. The letter can be ren-
dered still more attractive by shading one
side in black.
Signs on Show Cases. — Most show
cases have mirrors at the back, either in
the form of sliding panels or spring
doors. Lettering in distemper colors
on these mirrors can easily be read
through the fronts or tops of cases. If
the mirror is on a sliding panel, it will
be necessary to detach it from the case
in order to letter it. When the mirror
is on a spring door the sign can be let-
tered with less trouble.
By tracing letters in chalk on the out-
side of the glass, and then painting
them on the inside, attractive signs can
be produced on all show cases; but paint-
ing letters on the inside of a show case
glass is more or less difficult, and it is
not advisable to attempt it in very shallow
cases.
"Spatter" Work. — Some lettering
which appears very difficult to the unin-
itiated is, in fact, easily produced. The
beautiful effect of lettering and orna-
mentation in the form of foliage or con-
ventional scrolls in a speckled ground is
simple and can be produced with little
effort. Pressed leaves and letters or
designs cut from newspapers or maga-
zines may be tacked or pasted on card-
board or a mat with flour paste. As
little paste as possible should be used —
only enough to hold the design in place.
When all the designs are in the positions
desired, a toothbrush should be dipped
in the ink or paint to be employed. A
toothpick or other small piece of wood
is drawn to and fro over the bristles,
which are held toward the sign, the en-
tire surface of which should be spat-
tered or sprinkled with the color. When
the color is dry the designs pasted on
should be carefully removed and the
paste which held them in place should be
scraped off. This leaves the letters and
other designs clean cut and white against
the "spatter" background. The begin-
ner should experiment first with a few
simple designs. After he is able to pro-
duce attractive work with a few figures
or letters he may confidently undertake
more elaborate combinations.
Lettering on Mirrors. — From a bar of
fresh common brown soap cut off a one-
inch-wide strip across its end. Cut this
into 2 or 3 strips. Take one strip and
with a table-knife cut from two opposite
sides a wedge-shaped point resembling
that of a shading pen, but allow the edge
to be fully J- inch thick. Clean the
mirror thoroughly and proceed to letter
in exactly the same manner as with a
shading pen.
To Fill Engraved Letters on Metal
Signs. — Letters engraved on metal may
be filled in with a mixture of asphaltum,
brown japan, and lampblack, the mix-
ture being so made as to be a putty-like
mass. It should be well pressed down
with a spatula. Any of the mass ad-
hering to the plate about the edges of the
letters is removed with turpentine, and
when the cement is thoroughly dried the
plate may be polished.
If white letters are desired, make a
putty of dry white lead, with equal parts
of coach japan and rubbing varnish.
Fill the letters nearly level with the sur-
458
LICORICE— LIME
face, and when hard, apply a stout coat
of flake white in japan thinned with tur-
pentine. This will give a clean white
finish that may be polished.
The white cement may be tinted to
any desired shade, using coach colors
ground in japan.
Tinseled Letters, or Chinese Painting
on Glass. — This is done by painting the
groundwork with any color, leaving the
letter or figure naked. When dry, place
tin foil or any of the various colored
copper foils over the letters on the back
of the glass, after crumpling them in the
hand, and then partially straightening
them out.
LICE KILLERS:
See Insecticides.
LICHEN REMOVERS:
See Cleaning Preparations and Meth-
ods, under Miscellaneous Methods and
Household Formulas.
LICORICE:
Stable Solutions of Licorice Juice. —
A percolator, with alternate layers of
broken glass, which have been well
washed, first with hydrochloric acid and
plentifully rinsed with distilled water, is
the first requisite. This is charged with
pieces of crude licorice juice, from the
size of a hazel nut to that of a walnut,
which are weighted down with well-
washed pebbles. The percolate is kept
for 3 days in well corked flasks which
have been rinsed out with alcohol be-
forehand. Decant and filter and evap-
orate down rapidly, under constant
stirring, or in vacua. The extract
should be kept in vessels first washed
with alcohol and closed with parchment
paper, in a dry place — never in the
cellar.
To dissolve this extract, use water,
first boiled for 15 minutes. The solu-
tion should be kept in small flasks, first
rinsed with alcohol and well corked. If
to be kept for a long time, the flasks
should be subjected for 3 consecutive
days, a half hour each day, to a stream of
steam, and the corks paraffined.
There is frequently met with in com-
merce a purified juice that remains clear
in the mixtura solvens. It is usually
obtained by supersaturation with pure
ammonia, allowing to stand for 3 days,
decanting, filtering the decanted liquor,
and quick evaporation. Since solutions
with water alone rapidly spoil, it is well
to observe with them the precautions
commor for narcotic extracts.
To Test Extract of Licorice. — Mere
solubility is no test for the purity of
extract of licorice. It is, therefore, pro-
posed to make the glycyrrhizin content
and the nature of the ash the determining
test. To determine the glycyrrhizin
quantitatively proceed as follows: Mac-
erate -rV ounce of the extract, in coarse
powder, in 10 fluidounces distilled water
for several hours, with more or less fre-
quent agitation. When solution is com-
plete, add 10 fluidounces alcohol of 90
per cent, filter and wash the filter with
alcohol of 40 per cent until the latter
comes off colorless. Drive off the alco-
hol, which was added merely to facilitate
filtration, by evaporation in the water
bath; let the residue cool down and pre-
cipitate the glycyrrhizin by addition of
sulphuric acid. Filter the liquid and
wash the precipitate on the filter with
distilled water until the wash water comes
off neutral. Dissolve the glycyrrhizin
from the filter by the addition of ammonia
water, drop by drop, collecting the fil-
tered solution in a tared capsule. Evap-
orate in the water bath, dry the residual
glycyrrhizin at 212° F., and weigh. Re-
peated examinations of known pure ex-
tracts have yielded a range of percentage
of glycyrrhizin running from 8.06 per
cent to 11.90 per cent. The ash should
be acid in reaction and a total percentage
of from 5.64 to 8.64 of the extract.
LIGHT, INACTINIC:
See Photography.
LIGNALOE SOAP:
See Soap.
LIMEADE :
See Beverages, under Lemonades.
LIME AS A FERTILIZER:
See Fertilizers.
LIME, BIRD.
Bird lime is a thick, soft, tough, and
sticky mass of a greenish color, has an
unpleasant smell and bitter taste, melts
easily on heating, and hardens when ex-
posed in thin layers to the air. It is dif-
ficult to dissolve in alcohol, but easily
soluble in hot alcohol, oil of turpentine,
fat oils, and also somewhat in vinegar.
The best quality is prepared from the
inner green bark of the holly (Ilex aqui-
folium), which is boiled, then put in bar-
rels, and submitted for 14 days to slight
fermentation until it becomes sticky.
Another process of preparing it is to mix
the boiled bark with juice of mistletoe
berries and burying it in the ground until
LINIMENTS— LINSEED OIL
459
fermented. The bark is then pulverized,
boiled, and washed. Artificial bird lime
is prepared by boiling and then igniting
linseed oil, or boiling printing varnish
until it is very tough and sticky. It is
also prepared by dissolving cabinet-
makers' glue in water and adding a con-
centrated solution of chloride of zinc.
The mixture is very sticky, does not dry
on exposure to the air, and has the ad-
vantage that it can be easily washed off
the feathers of the birds.
LIME JUICE:
See Essences and Extracts
LIME-JUICE CORDIAL :
See Wines and Liquors.
LIME WAFERS:
See Confectionery.
LINEN, TO DISTINGUISH COTTON
FROM:
See Cotton.
LINEN DRESSING:
See Laundry Preparations.
LINIMENTS:
See also Ointments.
For external use only. — I. — The fol-
lowing penetrating oily liniment reduces
all kinds of inflammatory processes:
Paraffine oil 4 ounces
Capsicum powder.. . . £ ounce
Digest on a sand bath and filter. To
this may be added directly the following:
Oil of wintergreen or peppermint, phenol,
thymol, camphor or eucalyptol, etc.
II. — Camphor 2 ounces
Menthol 1 ounce
Oil of thyme 1 ounce
Oil of sassafras 1 ounce
Tincture of myrrh . . 1 ounce
Tincture of capsicum 1 ounce
Chloroform 1 ounce
Alcohol 2 pints .
LINIMENTS FOR HORSES:
See Veterinary Formulas.
LINOLEUM:
See also Oilcloth.
Composition for Linoleum, Oilcloth,
etc. — This is composed of whiting, dried
linseed oil, and any ordinary dryer, such
as litharge, to which ingredients a pro-
portion of gum tragacanth is to be added,
replacing a part of the oil and serving to
impart flexibility to the fabric, and to the
composition, in a pasty mass the property
of drying more rapidly. In the pro-
duction of linoleum, the whiting is re-
placed in whole or in part by pulverized
cork. The proportions are approximate-
ly the following by weight: Whiting or
powdered cork, 13 parts; gum traga-
canth, 5 parts; dried linseed oil, 5$ parts;
siccative, | part.
Dressings for Linoleum. — A weak so-
lution of beeswax in spirits of turpentine
has been recommended for brightening
the appearance of linoleum. Here are
some other formulas:
I. — Palm oil 1 ounce
Paraffine 18 ounces
Kerosene 4 ounces
Melt the paraffine and oil, remove from
the fire and incorporate the kerosene.
II. — Yellow wax 5 ounces
Oil turpentine 11 ounces
Amber varnish. .... 5 ounces
Melt the wax, add the oil, and then the
varnish. Apply with a rag.
Treatment of Newly Laid Linoleum. —
The proper way to cleanse a linoleum
flooring is first to sweep off the dust and
then wipe up with a damp cloth. Several
times a year the surface should be well
rubbed with floor wax. Care must be
had that the mass is well pulverized and
free from grit. Granite linoleum and
figured coverings are cleansed without
the application of water. A floor cover-
ing which has been treated from the
beginning with floor wax need only be
wiped off daily with a dry cloth, either
woolen or felt, and afterwards rubbed
well with a cloth filled with the mass.
It will improve its appearance, too, if it
be washed several times a year with
warm water and a neutral soap.
LINOLEUM, CLEANING AND POLISH-
ING:
See Household Formulas.
LINOLEUM ON IRON STAIRS OR
CEMENT FLOORS, TO GLUE:
See Adhesives, under Glues.
LINSEED OIL:
See also Oils.
Bleaching of Linseed Oil and Poppy-
seed Oil. — In order to bleach linseed oil
and poppyseed oil for painting purposes,
thoroughly shake 2.5 parts of it in a glass
vessel with a solution of potassium per-
manganate, 50 parts, in 1,250 parts of
water; let stand for 24 hours in a warm
temperature, and then mix with 75 parts
of pulverized sodium sulphite. Now
shake until the latter has dissolved and
add 100 parts of crude hydrochloric acid,
20°. Agitate frequently and wash, after
the previously brown mass has become
light colored, with water, in which a little
460
LINSEED OIL— LUBRICANTS
chalk has been finely distributed, until
the water is neutral. Finally filter over
calcined Glauber's salt.
Adulteration of Linseed Oil. — This is
common, and a simple and cheap meth-
od of testing is by nitric acid. P°ur
equal parts of the linseed jil and nitric
acid into a flask, shake vigorously, and
let it stand for 20 minutes. If the oil is
pure, the upper stratum is of straw yellow
color and the lower one colorless. If
impure, the former is dark brown or
black, the latter pale orange or dark
yellow, according to the admixtures to
the oil.
The addition of rosin oil to linseed
oil or other paint oils can be readily de-
tected by the increase in specific gravity,
the low flash point, and the odor of rosin
on heating ; while the amount may
be approximately ascertained from the
amount of unsaponifiable oil left after
boiling with caustic soda.
LIP SALVES AND LIPOL:
See Cosmetics.
LIPOWITZ METAL:
See Alloys.
LIQUEURS :
See Wines and Liquors.
LIQUOR AMMONII ANISATUS :
See Ammonia.
LIQUORS :
See Wines and Liquors.
LITHOGRAPHERS' LACQUER:
See Lacquers.
LITHOGRAPHS :
See Pictures and Engravings.
LIVER-SPOT REMEDIES :
See Cosmetics.
LOCKSMITH'S VARNISH:
See Varnishes.
LOCOMOTIVE LUBRICANTS:
See Lubricants.
LOCUST KILLER:
See Insecticides.
LOUSE WASH:
See Insecticides.
Lubricants
Oil for Firearms. — Either pure vaseline
oil, white, 0.870, or else pure white-bone
oil, proof to cold, is employed for this
purpose, since these two oils are not
only free from acid, but do not oxidize
or resinify.
Leather Lubricants. — Russian tallow,
1 pound; beeswax, 6 ounces; black pitch,
4 ounces; common castor oil, 3 pounds;
soft paraffine, £ pound; oil of citronella,
\ ounce. Melt all together in a saucepan,
except the citronella, which add on cool-
ing. Stir occasionally.
Machinery Oils.— I.— The solid fat,
called bakourine, a heavy lubricant which
possesses extraordinary lubricating quali-
lities, has a neutral reaction and melts
only at about 176° to 188° F. It is pre-
pared as follows:
A mixture is made of 100 parts of
Bienne petroleum or crude naphtha,
with 25 parts of castor oil or some min-
eral oil, and subjected to the action of 60
or 70 parts of sulphuric acid of 66° Be.
The acid is poured in a small stream into
the oil, while carefully stirring. The
agitation is continued until a thick and
blackish-brown mass is obtained free
from non-incorporated petroleum. Very
cold water of 2 or 3 times the weight of
the mass is then added, and the whole is
stirred until the mass turns white and
becomes homogeneous. It is left at
rest for 24 hours, after which the watery
liquid, on the surface of which the fat is
floating, must be poured off. After
resting again from 3 to 4 days, the prod-
uct is drawn off, carefully neutralized
with caustic potash, and placed in bar-
rels ready for shipping.
II.— Melt in a kettle holding 2 to 4
times as much as the volume of the mass
which is to be boiled therein, 10 parts,
by weight, of tallow in 20 parts of rape
oil on a moderate fire; add 10 parts of
freshly and well burnt lime, slaked in
30 or 40 parts of water; increase the fire
somewhat, and boil with constant stirring
until a thick froth forms and the mass
sticks to the bottom of the kettle. Burn-
ing should be prevented by diligent stir-
ring. Then add in portions of 10 parts
each, gradually, 70 parts of rape oil and
boil with a moderate fire, until the little
lumps gradually forming have united
to a whole uniform mass. With this
operation it is of importance to be able to
regulate the fire quickly. Samples are
now continually taken, which are allowed
to cool quickly on glass plates. The
boiling down must not be carried so far
that the samples harden on cooling;
they must spin long, fine threads, when
touched with the finger. When this
point is reached add, with constant stir-
ring, when the heat has abated suffi-
ciently (which may be tested by pouring
in a few drops of water), 25 to 30 parts
of water. Now raise the fire, without
LUBRICANTS
461
ceasing to stir, until the mass comes to a
feeble, uniform boil. In order to be able
to act quickly in case of a sudden boiling
over, the fire must be such that it can be
removed quickly, and a little cold water
must always be kept on hand. Next,
gradually add in small portions, so as
not to disturb the boiling of the mass,
500 parts of paraffine oil (if very thick,
800 to 900 parts may be added), remove
from the fire, allow the contents of the
kettle to clarify, and skim off the warm
grease from the sediment into a stirring
apparatus. Agitate until the mass be-
gins to thicken and cool; if the grease
should still be too solid, stir in a little
paraffine oil the second time. The odor
of the paraffine oil may be disguised by
the admixture of a little mirbane oil.
For Cutting Tools. — The proportion
of ingredients of a lubricating mixture
for cutting tools is 6 gallons of water, 3£
pounds of soft soap, and £ gallon of
clean refuse oil. Heat the water and mix
with the soap, preferably in a mechan-
ical mixer; afterwards add the oil. A
cast-iron circular tank to hold 12 gallons,
fitted with a tap at the bottom and hav-
ing three revolving arms fitted to a ver-
tical shaft driven by bevels and a fast
and loose pulley, answers all requirements
for a mixer. This should be kept run-
ning all through the working day.
For Highspeed Bearings. — To prevent
heating and sticking of bearings on
heavy machine tools due to running con-
tinuously at high speeds, take about £
of flake graphite, and the remainder
kerosene oil. As soon as the bearing
shows the slightest indication of heat-
ing or sticking, this mixture should be
forcibly squirted through the oil hole
until it flows out between the shaft and
bearing, when a small quantity of thin
machine oil may be applied.
For Heavy Bearings. — An excellent
lubricant for heavy bearings can be made
from either of the following recipes:
I. — Paraffine 6 pounds
Palm oil 12 pounds
Oleonaphtha 8 pounds
II. — Paraffine 8 pounds
Palm oil 20 pounds
Oleonaphtha 12 pounds
The oleonaphtha should have a den-
sity of 0.9. First dissolve the paraffine
in the oleonaphtha at a temperature of
about 158° F. Then gradually stir in
the palm oil a little at a time. The pro-
portions will show that No. II gives a
less liquid product than No. I. Quick-
lime may be added if desired.
For Lathe Centers. — An excellent
lubricant for lathe centers is made by
using 1 part graphite and 4 parts tallow
thoroughly mixed.
Sewing Machine Oil. — I. — Petroleum
oils are better adapted for the lubrication
of sewing machines than any of the animal
oils. Sperm oil has for a long time been
considered the standard oil for this pur-
pose, but it is really not well adapted to
the conditions to which a sewing machine
is subjected. If the machine were oper-
ated constantly or regularly every day,
probably sperm oil could not be im-
proved on. The difficulty is, however,
that a family sewing machine will fre-
quently be allowed to stand untouched
for weeks at a time and will then be ex-
pected to run as smoothly as though just
oiled. Under this kind of treatment
almost any oil other than petroleum oil
will become gummy. What is known in
the trade as a "neutral" oil, of high
viscosity, would probably answer better
for this purpose than anything else. A
mixture of 1 part of petrolatum and 7
parts of paraffine oil has also been rec-
ommended.
II. — Pale oil of almonds . 9 ounces
Rectified benzoline.. 3 ounces
Foreign oil of laven-
der 1 ounce
PETROLEUM JELLIES AND SOLID-
IFIED LUBRICANTS.
Petroleum jelly, vaseline, and petro-
latum are different names for the same
thing.
The pure qualities are made from
American stock thickened with hot air
until the desired melting point is at-
tained. Three colors are made: white,
yellow, and black of various qualities.
Cheaper qualities are made by using
ceresine wax in conjunction with the
genuine article and pale mineral oil.
This is the German method and is ap-
proved of by their pharmacopoeia. Ma-
chinery qualities are made with cylinder
oils, pale mineral oils, and ceresine wax.
I. — Yellow ceresine wax 11 parts
White ceresine wax. 6 parts
American mineral
oil, ${ft 151 parts
Melt the waxes and stir in the oil. To
make white, use all white ceresine wax.
To color, use aniline dyes soluble in oil
to any shade required.
II. — Ceresine wax 1 pound
Bloomless mineral
oil, Sq. 910 1 gallon
462
LUBRICANTS
Melt the wax and add the oil, varying
according to the consistency required.
To color black, add 28 pounds lamp-
black to 20 gallons oil. Any wax will
do, according to quality of product de-
sired.
White Petroleum Jelly.—
White tasteless oil . . 4 parts
White ceresine wax . 1 part
Solidified Lubricants. —
I. — Refined cotton oil. . . 2 parts
American mineral
oil, £U 2 parts
Oleate of alumina . . 1 part
Gently heat together.
II.— Petroleum jelly 120 parts
Ceresine wax 5 parts
Slaked lime i part
Water 4£ parts
Heat the wax and the petroleum jelly
gently until liquid; then mix together the
water and lime. Decant the former into
packing receptacles, and add lime and
water, stirring until it sets. For cheaper
qualities use cream cylinder oil instead
of petroleum jelly.
WAGON AND AXLE GREASES:
For Axles of Heavy Vehicles. — I. —
Tallow (free from acid), 19J parts; palm
oil, 14 parts; sal soda, 5i parts; water,
3 parts, by weight. Dissolve the soda in
the water and separately melt the tallow,
then stir in the palm oil. This may be
gently warmed before adding, as it
greatly facilitates its incorporation with
the tallow, unless the latter be made
boiling hot, when it readily melts the
semi-solid palm oil. When these two
greases are thoroughly incorporated,
pour the mixture slowly into the cold lye
(or soda solution), and stir well until the
mass is homogeneous. This lubricant
can be made less solid by decreasing the
tallow or increasing the palm oil.
II. — Slaked lime (in powder), 8 parts,
is slowly sifted into rosin oil, 10 parts.
Stir it continuously to incorporate it
thoroughly, and gently heat the mixture
until of a syrupy consistency. Color
with lampblack, or a solution of turmeric
in a strong solution of sal soda. For
blue grease, 275 parts of rosin oil are
heated with 1 part of slaked lime and
then allowed to cool. The supernatant
oil is removed from the precipitated mat-
ter, and 5 or 6 parts of the foregoing
rosin-oil soap are stirred in until all is a
soft, unctuous mass.
For Axles of Ordinary Vehicles. — I. —
Mix 80 parts of fat and 20 parts of very
fine black lead; melt the fat in a var-
nished earthen vessel; add the black lead
while constantly stirring until it is cold,
for otherwise the black lead, 011 account
of its density, would not remain in sus-
pension in the melted fat. Axles lubri-
cated with this mixture can make 80
miles without the necessity of renewing
the grease.
II. — Mix equal parts of red American
rosin, melted tallow, linseed oil, and
caustic soda lye (of 1.5 density).
III. — Melt 20 parts of rosin oil in 50
parts of yellow palm oil, saponify this
with 25 parts of caustic soda lye of 15°
Be., and add 25 parts of mineral oil or
paramne.
IV. — Mix residue of the distillation of
petroleum, 60 to 80 parts; tallow, 10
parts; colophony, 10 parts; and caustic
soda solution of 40° Be., 15 parts.
A Grease for Locomotive Axles. — Sa-
ponify a mixture of 50 parts tallow, 28
parts palm oil, 2 parts sperm oil. Mix
in soda lye made by dissolving 12 parts
of soda in 137 parts of water.
MISCELLANEOUS LUBRICANTS:
For Cotton Belts.— Carefully melt over
a slow fire in a closed iron or self-regu-
lating boiler 250 parts of caoutchouc or
gum elastic, cut up in small pieces; then
add 200 parts of colophony; when the
whole is well melted and mixed, incor-
porate, while carefully stirring, 200 parts
of yellow wax. Then heat 850 parts of
train oil, mixing with it 250 parts of talc,
and unite the two preparations, con-
stantly stirring, until completely cold.
Chloriding Mineral Lubricating Oils.—
A process has been introduced for pro-
ducing industrial vaselines and mineral
oils for lubrication, based on the treat-
ment of naphthas, petroleums, and simi-
lar hydrocarbides, by means of chlorine
or mixtures of chlorides and hypochlor-
ides, known under the name of decolor-
ing chlorides. Mix and stir thoroughly
1,000 parts of naphtha of about 908
density; 55 parts of chloride of lime,
and 500 parts of water. Decant and
wash.
Glass Stop Cock Lubricant. — (See also
Stoppers).
Pure rubber 14 parts
Spermaceti 5 parts
Petroleum 1 part
Melt the rubber in a covered vessel
and then stir in the other ingredients.
A little more petroleum will be required
when the compound is for winter use.
LUBRICANTS
463
Hard Metal Drilling Lubricant. — For
drilling in hard metal it is recommended
to use carbolic acid instead of another
fatty substance as a lubricant, since the
latter, by decreasing the friction, dimin-
ishes the "biting" of the drill, whereas
the carbolic acid has an etching action
Plaster Model Lubricant. — Take lin-
seed oil, 1,000 parts; calcined lead, 50
parts; litharge, 60 parts; umber, 30 parts;
talc, 25 parts. Boil for 2 hours on a mod-
erate fire; skim frequently and keep in
well-closed flasks.
Graphite Lubricating Compound. —
Graphite mixed with tallow gives a good
lubricating compound that is free from
any oxidizing if the tallow be rendered
free from rancidity. The proportions
are: Plumbago, 1 part; tallow, 4 parts.
The plumbago being stirred into the
melted tallow and incorporated by pass-
ing it through a mixing mill, add a few
pounds per hundredweight of camphor
in powder to the hot compound.
Lubricants for Redrawing Shells.—
Zinc shells should be clean arid free from
all grit and should be immersed in boil-
ing hot soap water. They must be re-
drawn while hot to get the best results.
On some shells hot oil is used in prefer-
ence to soap water.
For redrawing aluminum shells use a
cheap grade of vaseline. It may not be
amiss to add that the draw part of the
redrawing die should not be made too
long, so as to prevent too much friction,
which causes the shells to split and shrivel
up.
For redrawing copper shells use good
thick soap water as a lubricant. The
soap used should be of a kind that will
produce plenty of "slip." If none such
is to be had, mix a quantity of lard oil
with the soap water on hand and boil the
two together. Sprinkling graphite over
the shells just before redrawing some-
times helps out on a mean job.
Rope Grease. — For hemp ropes, fuse
together 20 pounds of tallow and 30
pounds of linseed oil. Then add 20
pounds of paraffine, 30 pounds of vase-
line, and 60 pounds of rosin. Finally mix
with 10 pounds of graphite, first rubbed
up with 50 pounds of boiled oil. For
wire ropes fuse 100 pounds of suint with
20 pounds of dark colophony (rosin).
Then stir in 30 pounds of rosin oil and
10 pounds of dark petroleum.
Sheet Metal Lubricant. —Mix 1 quart
of whale oil, 1 pound of white lead, 1 pint
of water, and 3 ounces of the finest
graphite. This is applied to the metal
with a brush before it enters the dies.
Steam Cylinder Lubricant. — To ob-
tain a very viscous oil that does not de-
compose in the presence of steam even at
a high temperature, it is necessary to ex-
pose neutral wool fats, that have been
freed from wool-fatty acids, such as crude
lanolin or wool wax, either quite alone
or in combination with mineral oils, to a
high heat. This is best accomplished in
the presence of ordinary steam or super-
heated steam at a heat of 572° F., and a
pressure of 50 atmospheres, correspond-
ing with the conditions in the cylinder in
which it is to be used. Instead of sepa-
rating any slight quantities of acid that
may arise, they may be dissolved out as
neutral salts.
Wooden Gears. — An excellent lubri-
cating agent for wooden gears consists
of tallow, 30 parts (by weight); palm oil,
20 parts; fish oil, 10 parts; and graphite,
20 parts. The fats are melted at mod-
erate heat, and the finely powdered and
washed graphite mixed with them inti-
mately by long-continued stirring. The
teeth of wooden combs are kept in a
perfectly serviceable condition for a
much longer time if to the ordinary tal-
low or graphite grease one-tenth part of
their weight of powdered glass is added.
TESTS FOR LUBRICANTS.
In testing lubricants in general, a
great deal depends upon the class of
work in which they are to be employed.
In dealing with lubricating greases the
specific gravity should always be deter-
mined. The viscosity is, of course, also
a matter of the utmost importance. If
possible the viscosity should be taken at
the temperature at which the grease is to
be subjected when used, but this cannot
always be done; 300° F. will be found to
be a very suitable temperature for the
determination of the viscosity of heavy
lubricants. Although one of the stan-
dard viscosimeters is the most satisfac-
tory instrument with which to carry out
the test, yet it is not a necessity. Pro-
vided the test be always conducted in
exactly the same manner, and at a fixed
temperature, using a standard sample
for comparison, the form of apparatus
used is not of great importance. Most
dealers in scientific apparatus will pro-
vide a simple and cheap instrument, the
results obtained with which will be found
reliable. With the exercise of a little
ingenuity any one can fit up a visco-
simeter for himself at a very small outlay.
Acidity is another important point to
464
LUBRICANTS— MAGNETIC CURVES
note in dealing with lubricating greases.
Calculated as sulphuric acid, the free
acid should not exceed .01 per cent, and
free fatty acids should not be present to
any extent. Cylinder oil should dissolve
completely in petroleum benzine (spe-
cific gravity, .700), giving a clear solution.
In dealing with machine oils the condi-
tions are somewhat different. Fatty oils
in mixture with mineral oils are very
useful, as they give better lubrication
and driving power, especially for heavy
axles, for which these mixtures should
always be used. The specific gravity
should be from .900 to .915 and the
freezing point should not be above 58°
F. The flash point of heavy machine
oils is not a matter of great importance.
The viscosity of dynamo oils, taken in
Engler's apparatus, should be 15-16 at
68° F. and 3V-4 at 122° F. In dealing
with wagon oils and greases it should be
remembered that the best kinds are
those which are free from rosin and
rosin products, and their flash point
should be above 212° F.
To Test Grease.— To be assured of the
purity of grease, its density is examined
as compared with water; a piece of fat of
the size of a pea is placed in a glass of
water. If it remains on the surface or
sinks very slowly the fat is pure; if it
sinks rapidly to the bottom the fat is
mixed with heavy matters and coom is
the result.
LUBRICANTS FOR WATCHMAKERS:
See Watchmakers' Formulas.
LUPULINE BITTERS:
See Wines and Liquors.
LUSTER PASTE.
This is used for plate glass, picture
frames, and metal. Five parts of very
finely washed and pulverized chalk; 5
parts of Vienna lime, powdered; 5 parts
of bolus, powdered; 5 parts of wood
ashes, powdered; 5 parts of English red,
powdered; 5 parts of soap powder.
Work all together in a kneading machine,
to make a smooth, even paste, adding
spirit. The consistency of the paste can
be varied, by varying the amount of
spirit, from a solid to a soft mass.
LUTES:
See Adhesives.
MACHINE OIL:
See Lubricants.
MACHINERY, TO CLEAN:
See Cleaning Preparations and Meth-
ods.
MAGIC:
See Pyrotechnics.
MAGNESIUM CITRATE.
Magnesium carbon-
ate 10 ounces
Citric acid 20 ounces
Sugar 21 ounces
Oil of lemon | drachm
Water enough to
make 240 ounces
Introduce the magnesium carbonate into
a wide-mouthed 2-gallon bottle, drop the oil
of lemon on it, stir with a wooden stick:
then add the citric acid, the sugar, and
water enough to come up to a mark on
the bottle indicating 240 ounces. For
this purpose use cold water, adding
about half of the quantity first, and the
remainder when the substances are
mostly dissolved. By allowing the solu-
tion to stand for a half to a whole day, it
will filter better and more quickly than
when hot water is used.
MAGNESIUM ORGEAT POWDER:
See Salts, Effervescent.
MAGNESIUM FLASH-LIGHT POW-
DERS:
See Photography.
MAGNETIC CURVES OF IRON FIL-
INGS, THEIR FIXATION.
One of the experiments made in every
physical laboratory in teaching the ele-
ments of magnetism and electricity is
the production of the magnetic curves by
sprinkling iron filings over a glass plate,
after the well-known method.
For fixing these curves so that they
may be preserved indefinitely, a plate of
glass is warmed on the smooth upper
surface of a shallow iron chest containing
water raised to a suitable temperature
by means of a spirit-lamp. A piece of
paraffine is placed on the glass, and in
the course of 3 or 4 minutes spreads
itself evenly in a thin layer over the sur-
face. The glass plate is removed, the
surplus paraffine running off. The
image is formed with iron filings on the
cooled paraffine, which does not adhere
to the iron, so that if the image is un-
satisfactory the filings may be removed
and a new figure taken. To fix the
curves, the plate of glass is again placed
on the warming stove. Finally, the sur-
face of the paraffine is covered with white
paint, so that the curves appear black
on a white ground. Very well-defined
figures may thus be obtained. A similar
though much simpler process consists in
covering one surface of stiff white paper
with a layer of paraffine, by warming
MANTLES— MATCHES
465
over an iron plate, spreading the filings
over the cooled surface, and fixing them
with a hot iron or a gas flame.
MAGNOLIA METAL:
See Alloys.
MAHOGANY:
See Wood.
MALTED FOOD:
See Foods.
MALTED MILK:
See Milk.
MALT, HOT:
See Beverages.
MANGANESE ALLOYS:
See Alloys.
MANGANESE STEEL:
See Steel.
MANGE CURES:
See Veterinary Formulas.
MANICURE PREPARATIONS:
See Cosmetics.
MANTLES.
These are prepared after processes
differing slightly from one another, but
all based on the original formula of
Welsbach — the impregnation of vege-
table fibers with certain mineral oxides
in solution, drying out, and arranging
on platinum wire.
Lanthanum oxide. . . 30 parts
Yttrium oxide 20 parts
Burnt magnesia 50 parts
Acetic acid 50 parts
Water, distilled 100 parts
The salts are dissolved in the water,
and to the solution another 150 parts of
distilled water are added and the whole
filtered. The vegetable fiber (in its
knitted or woven form) is impregnated
with this solution dried, and arranged on
platinum wire. In the formula the
acetic acid may be replaced with dilute
nitric acid. The latter seems to have
some advantages over the former, among
which is the fact that the residual ash
where acetic acid is used has a tendency
to ball up and make a vitreous residue,
while that of the nitric acid remains in
powdery form.
Self -Igniting Mantles. — A fabric of
platinum wire and cotton thread is
sewed or woven into the tissue of the in-
candescent body; next it is impregnated
with a solution of thorium salts and
dried. The thorium nitrate in glowing
gives a very loose but nevertheless fire-
proof residue. A mixture of thorium
nitrate with platinic chloride leaves after
incandescence a fire-resisting sponge
possessing to a great extent the property
of igniting gas mixtures containing oxy-
gen. Employ a mixture of 1 part of
thorium nitrate to 2£ parts of platinic
chloride.
MANURES:
See Fertilizers.
MANUSCRIPT COPYING:
See Copying.
MAPLE:
See Wood.
MARASCHINO:
See Wines and Liquors
MARBLE CEMENTS:
See Adhesives.
MARBLE CLEANING:
See Cleaning Preparations and Meth-
ods.
MARBLE COLORS:
See Stone.
MARBLE ETCHING:
See Etching.
MARBLE, IMITATION:
See Plaster.
MARBLE, PAINTING ON:
See Painting.
MARBLE POLISHING:
See Polishes.
MARBLING CRAYONS:
See Crayons.
MARGERINE:
See Butter.
MARKING FLUID:
See also Inks and Etching.
For laying out work on structural iron
or castings a better way than chalking
the surface is to mix whiting with ben-
zine or gasoline to the consistency of
paint, and then apply it with a brush ; in
a few minutes the benzine or gasoline
will evaporate, leaving a white surface
ready for scribing lines.
MASSAGE APPLICATIONS:
See Cosmetics.
MASSAGE SOAPS:
See Soaps.
Matches
(See also Phosphorus.)
Manufacture of Matches. — Each fac-
tory uses its own methods and chemical
mixtures, though, in a general way the
latter do not vary greatly. It is impos-
466
MATCHES
sible here to give a full account of the dif-
ferent steps of manufacture, and of all
the precautions necessary to turn out
good, marketable matches. In the
manufacture of the ordinary safety
match, the wood is first comminuted and
reduced to the final shape and then
steeped in a solution of ammonium phos-
phate (2 per cent of this salt with 1 or 1 £
per cent of phosphoric acid), or in a
solution of ammonium sulphate (2^ per
cent), then drained and dried. The
object of this application is to prevent
the match from continuing to glow after
it has been burned out. Next the
matches are dipped into a paraffine or
stearine bath, and after that into the
match bath proper, which is best done
by machines constructed for the purpose.
Here are a few formulas:
I. — Potassium chlor-
ate 2,000 parts
Lead binoxide.. . . 1,150 parts
Red lead 2,500 parts '
Antimony trisul-
phide 1,250 parts
Gum arabic 670 parts
Paraffine 250 parts
Potassium bi-
chromate 1,318 parts
Directions: See No. II.
II. — Potassium chlor-
ate 2,000 parts
Lead binoxide.. . . 2,150 parts
Red lead 2,500 parts
Antimony trisul-
phide 1,250 parts
Gum arabic 670 parts
Paraffine 250 parts
Rub the paraffine and antimony tri-
sulphide together, and then add the
other ingredients. Enough water is
added to bring the mass to a proper con-
sistency when heated. Conduct heating
operations on a water bath. The sticks
are first dipped in a solution of paraffine
in benzine and then are dried. For
striking surfaces, mix red phosphorus, 9
parts; pulverized iron pyrites, 7 parts;
pulverized glass, 3 parts; and gum ara-
bic or glue, 1 part, with water, quantity
sufficient. To make the matches water
or damp proof, employ glue instead of
gum arabic in the above formula, and
conduct the operations in a darkened
room. For parlor matches dry the
splints and immerse the ends in melted
stearine. Then dip in the following
mixture and dry:
Red phosphorus 3.0 parts
Gum arabic or traga-
canth 0.5 parts
Water 3.0 parts
Sand (finely ground) . 2.0 parts
Lead binoxide 2.0 parts
Perfume by dipping in a solution of
benzoic acid.
III. — M. O. Lindner, of Paris, has
patented a match which may be lighted
by friction upon any surface whatever,
and which possesses the advantages of
being free from danger and of emitting
no unpleasant odor. The mixture into
which the splints are first dipped con-
sists of
Chlorate of potash ... 6 parts
Sulphide of antimony. 2 parts
Gum 1 1 parts
Powdered clay 1J parts
The inflammable compound consists
of
Chlorate of potash . 2 to 3 parts
Amorphous phos-
phorus 6 parts
Gum 1£ parts
Aniline if parts
Red or amorphous is substituted for
yellow phosphorus in the match heads.
The composition of the igniting paste is
given as follows:
By weight
Soaked glue (1 to 5 of
water) 37.0 parts
Powdered glass 7.5 parts
Whiting 7.5 parts
Amorphous phosphor-
us (pure) 10.0 parts
Paraffine wax 4.0 parts
Chlorate of potash. . . 27.0 parts
Sugar or lampblack . . 7.0 parts
Silicate of soda may be substituted for
the glue, bichromate of potash added for
damp climates, and sulphur for large
matches.
The different compositions for tip-
ping the matches in use in different
countries and factories all consist essen-
tially of emulsions of phosphorus in a
solution of glue or gum, with or without
other matters for increasing the com-
bustibility, for coloring, etc.
I. — English. — Fine glue, 2 parts,
broken into small pieces, and soaked in
water till quite soft, is added to water, 4
parts, and heated by means of a water
bath until it is quite fluid, and at a
temperature of 200° to 212° F. The
vessel is then removed from the fire, and
phosphorus, 1£ to 2 parts, is gradually
added, the mixture being agitated briskly
and continually \\ith a stirrer having
wooden pegs or bristles projecting at its
lower end. When a uniform emulsion
is obtained, chlorate of potassa, 4 to 5
MATCHES— MATRIX MASSES
467
parts; powdered glass, 3 to 4 parts; and
red lead, smalt, or other coloring matter,
a sufficient quantity (all in a state of very
fine powder), are added, one at a time, to
prevent accidents, and the stirring con-
tinued until the mixture is comparatively
cool. The above proportions are those
of the best quality of English composi-
tion. The matches tipped with it defla-
grate with a snapping noise.
II. — German (Bottger). — Dissolve
gum arabic, 16 parts, in the least possi-
ble quantity of water; add of phosphorus
(in powder), 9 parts, and mix by tritu-
ration. Then add niter, 14 parts; ver-
milion or binoxide of manganese, 16
parts, and form the whole into a paste as
directed above. Into this the matches
are to be dipped, and then exposed to
dry. As soon as they are quite dry they
are to be dipped into very dilute copal
varnish or lac varnish, and again ex-
posed to dry, by which means they are
rendered waterproof, or at least less
likely to suffer from exposure in damp
weather.
III. (Bottger.) — Glue, 6 parts, is
soaked in a little cold water for 24 hours,
after which it is liquefied by trituration
in a heated mortar; phosphorus, 4 parts,
is added, and rubbed down at a heat not
exceeding 150° F.; niter (in fine powder),
10 parts, is next mixed in, and after-
wards red ocher, 5 parts, and smalt, 2
parts, are further added, and the whole
formed into a uniform paste, into which
the matches are dipped, as before.
This is cheaper than the previous one.
IV. (Diesel.)— Phosphorus, 17 parts;
glue, 21 parts; red lead, 24 parts; niter,
38 parts. Proceed as above.
Matches tipped with II, III, or IV,
inflame without fulmination when rubbed
against a rough surface, and are hence
termed noiseless matches by the makers.
Safety Paste for Matches. — The dan-
ger of explosion during the preparation
of match composition may be mini-
mized by addition to the paste of the
following mixture: Finely powdered
cork, 3 parts, by weight; oxide of iron,
15 parts; flour, 23 parts; and water,
about 40 parts. In practice, 30 parts of
gum arabic are dissolved in water, 40
parts, and to the solution are added
powdered potassium chlorate, 57 parts,
and when this is well distributed, amor-
phous phosphorus, 7 parts, and pow-
dered glass, 15 parts, are stirred in. The
above mixture is then immediately in-
troduced, and when mixing is complete,
the composition can be applied to
wooden sticks which need not have been
previously dried or paraffined. The
head of the match is finally coated with
tallow, which prevents atmospheric
action and also spontaneous ignition.
Most chemists agree that the greatest im-
provement of note in the manufacture of
matches is that of Landstrom, of Jon-
kpping, in Sweden. It consists in
dividing the ingredient of the match mix-
ture into two separate compositions, one
being placed on the ends of the splints,
as usual, and the other, which contains
the phosphorus, being spread in a thin
layer upon the end or lid of the box.
The following are the compositions used:
(a) For the splints: Chlorate of potassa,
6 parts; sulphuret of antimony, 2 to 3
parts; glue, 1 part, (b) For the friction
surface: Amorphous phosphorus, 10
parts; sulphuret of antimony or peroxide
of manganese, 8 parts; glue, 3 to 6 parts;
spread thinly upon the surface, which has
been previously made rough by a coating of
glue and sand. By thus dividing the
composition the danger of fire arising
from ignition of the matches by acci-
dental friction is avoided, as neither the
portion on the splint nor that on the box
can be ignited by rubbing against an un-
prepared surface. Again, by using the
innocuous red or amorphous phosphorus,
the danger of poisoning is entirely pre-
vented.
MATCH MARKS ON PAINT, TO RE-
MOVE:
See Cleaning Preparations and Meth-
ods.
MATCH PHOSPHORUS, SUBSTITUTE
FOR:
See Phosphorus Substitute.
Matrix Masses
Matrix for Medals, Coins, etc. — I. —
Sharp impressions of coins, medals, etc.,
are obtained, according to Bottger, with
the following: Mix molten, thinly liquid
sulphur with an equal quantity of in-
fusorial earth, adding some graphite. If
a sufficient quantity of this mass, made
liquid over a flame, is quickly applied
with a spatula or spoon on the coin, etc.,
an impression of great sharpness is ob-
tained after cooling, which usually takes
place promptly. Owing to the addition
of graphite the articles do not become
dull or unsightly.
II. — Bronze and silver medals should
always be coated with a separating grease
layer. The whole coin is greased slightly
and then carefully wiped off again with
a little wadding, but in such a manner
468
MATRIX MASSES— MEAD
that a thin film of grease remains on the
surface. Next, a ring of strong card-
board or thin pasteboard is placed around
the edge, and the ends are sealed to-
gether. Now stir up a little gypsum in a
small dish and put a teaspoonful of it on
the surface of which the mold is to be
taken, distributing it carefully with a
badger's-hair brush, entering the finest
cavities, which operation will be assisted
by blowing on it. When the object is
covered with a thin layer of plaster of
Paris, the plaster, which has meanwhile
become somewhat stiffer, is poured on,
so that the thickness of the mold will be
about 2*0 of an inch. The removal of the
cast can be effected only after a time,
when the plaster has become warm, has
cooled again, and has thoroughly hard-
ened. If it be attempted to remove the
cast from the metal too early and by
the use of force, fine pieces are liable to
break off and remain adhering to the"
model. In order to obtain a positive
mold from the concave one, it is laid in
water for a short time, so that it be-
comes saturated with the water it ab-
sorbs. The dripping, wet mold is again
provided with an edge, and plaster of
Paris is poured on. The latter readily
flows out on the wet surface, and only in
rare cases blisters will form. Naturally
this casting method will furnish a surface
of pure gypsum, which is not the case
if the plaster is poured into a greased
mold. In this case the surface of the
cast contains a soapy layer, for the liquid
plaster forms with oil a subsequently
rather hard lime soap. The freshly cast
plaster must likewise be taken off only
when a quarter of an hour has elapsed,
after it has become heated and has
cooled again.
MATS FOR METALS:
See Metals.
MATZOON.
Add 2 tablespoonfuls of bakers' yeast
to 1 pint of rich milk, which has been
slightly warmed, stirring well together
and setting aside in a warm room in a
pitcher covered with a wet cloth for a
time varying from 6 to 12 hours, accord-
ing to the season or temperature of the
room. Take from this, when curdled,
6 tablespoonfuls, add to another pint of
milk, and again ferment as before, and
continue for five successive fermenta-
tions in all, when the product will have
become free from the taste of the yeast.
As soon as the milk thickens, which is
finally to be kept for use, it should be
stirred again and then put into a re-
frigerator to prevent further fermentation.
It should be smooth, of the consistence of
thick cream, and of a slightly acid taste.
The milk should be prepared fresh
every day, and the new supply is made
by adding 6 tablespoonfuls of the pre-
vious day's lot to a pint of milk and pro-
ceeding as before.
The curd is to be eaten with a spoon,
not drunk, and preferably with some
bread broken into it. It is also some-
times eaten with sugar, which is said not
to impair its digestibility.
MAY WINE:
See Wines and Liquors.
MEAD.
In its best form Mead is made as fol-
lows: 12 gallons of pure, soft water (clean
rain water is, next to distilled water,
best) are mixed with 30 gallons of ex-
pressed honey in a big caldron, 4 ounces
of hops added, and the whole brought
to a boil. The boiling is continued
with diligent skimming, for at least an
hour and a half. The fire is then drawn,
and the liquid allowed to cool down
slowly. When cold, it is drawn off into
a clean barrel, which it should fill to the
bung, with a little over. A pint of fresh
wine yeast or ferment is added, and the
barrel put in a moderately warm place,
with the bung left out, to ferment for
from 8 to 14 days, according to the
weather (the warmer it is the shorter
the period occupied in the primary or
chief fermentation). Every day the
foam escaping from the bung should be
carefully skimmed off, and every 2 or 3
days there should be added a little honey
and water to keep the barrel quite full,
and in the meantime a pan or cup should
be inverted over the hole, to keep out
dust, insects, etc. When fermentation
ceases, the procedure varies. Some
merely drive in the bung securely and let
the liquor stand for a few weeks, then
bottle; but the best German makers pro-
ceed as follows, this being a far superior
process: The liquor is removed from
the barrel in which it fermented to an-
other, clean, barrel, being strained
through a haircloth sieve to prevent the
admission of the old yeast. A second
portion of yeast is added, and the liquid
allowed to pass through the secondary
fermentation, lasting usually as long as
the first. The bung is driven into the
barrel, the liquid allowed to stand a few
days to settle thoroughly and then drawn
off into bottles and stored in the usual
way. Some add nutmeg, cinnamon,
etc., prior to the last fermentation.
MEERSCHAUM— METALS
469
MEASURES:
See Weights and Measures.
MEASURES, TO CLEAN:
See Cleaning Preparations and Meth-
ods.
MEAT EXTRACT CONTAINING AL-
BUMEN:
See Foods.
MEAT PEPTONOIDS:
See Peptonoids.
MEAT PRESERVATIVES:
See Foods.
MEAT PRODUCTS (ADULTERATED) :
See Foods.
MEDAL IMPRESSIONS:
See Matrix Mass.
MEDALS, CLEANING AND PRESERV-
ING:
See Cleaning Compounds.
MEDALLION METAL:
See Alloys.
MEDICINE DOSES:
See Doses.
MEERSCHAUM:
To Color a Meerschaum Pipe.— I. — Fill
the pipe and smoke down about one-
third, or to the height to which you wish
to color. Leave the remainder of the
tobacco in the pipe, and do not empty or
disturb it for several weeks, or until the
desired color is obtained. When smok-
ing put fresh tobacco on the top and
smoke to the same level,
should never be smoked
extremely cold weather.
II. — The pipe is boiled in a prepara-
tion of wax, 8 parts; olive oil, 2 parts;
and nicotine, 1 part, for 10 or 15 minutes.
The pipe absorbs this, and a thin coating
of wax is held on the surface of the pipe,
and made to take a high polish. Under
the wax is retained the oil of tobacco,
which is absorbed by the pipe; and its
hue grows darker in proportion to the to-
bacco used. A meerschaum pipe at
first should be smoked very slowly, and
before a second bowlful is lighted the
pipe should cool off. This is to keep the
wax as far up on the bowl as possible;
rapid smoking will overheat, driving the
wax off and leaving the pipe dry and
raw.
To Repair Meerschaum Pipes. — To
cement meerschaum pipes, make a glue
of finely powdered and sifted chalk and
white of egg. Put a little of this glue on
the parts to be repaired and hold them
pressed together for a moment.
See also Adhesives under Cements.
A new pipe
outdoors in
To Tell Genuine Meerschaum. — For
the purpose of distinguishing imitation
meerschaum from the true article, rub
with silver. If the silver leaves lead
pencil-like marks on the mass, it is not
genuine but artificial meerschaum. If no
such lines are produced, the article is
genuine.
MENTHOL COUGH DROPS:
See Confectionery.
MENTHOL TOOTH POWDER:
See Dentifrices.
MERCURY SALVES:
See Ointments.
MERCURY STAINS, TO REMOVE:
See Cleaning Preparations and Meth-
ods.
METACARBOL DEVELOPER:
See Photography.
Metals and Their Treatment
METAL CEMENTS:
See Adhesives and Lutes.
METAL CLEANING:
See Cleaning Preparations and Meth-
ods.
METAL INLAYING:
See Damaskeening.
METAL POLISHES:
See Polishes.
METAL PROTECTIVES:
See Rust Preventives.
METAL VARNISHES:
See Varnishes.
METALS, HOW TO ATTACH TO RUB-
BER:
See Adhesives, under Rubber Cements.
METALS, SECURING WOOD TO:
See Adhesives.
METALS, BRIGHTENING AND DEAD-
ENING, BY DIPPING:
Brightening Pickle. — To brighten ar-
ticles by dipping, the dipping liquid must
not be too hot, otherwise the pickled
surface turns dull; neither must it be
prepared too thin, nor must wet articles
be entered, else only tarnished -surfaces
will be obtained.
For a burnish-dip any aqua fortis over
33° Be., i. e., possessing a specific gravity
of 1.30, may be employed. It is advis-
able not to use highly concentrated aqua
fortis, to reduce the danger of obtaining
matt work. It is important that the
quantity of oil of vitriol, which is added,
470
METALS
is correct. It is added because the action
of the aqua fortis is very uncertain.
Within a short time it becomes so heated
in acting on the metals that it turns out
only dull work, and pores or even holes
are apt to be the result of the violent
chemical action. If the aqua fortis is
diluted with water the articles do not
become bright, but tarnish. For this
reason sulphuric acid should be used.
This does not attack the metals; it only
dilutes the aqua fortis and distributes the
heat generated in pickling over a larger
space. It is also much cheaper, and it
absorbs water from the aqua fortis and,
therefore, keeps it in a concentrated state
and yet distributed over the space.
In the case of too much oil of vitriol
the dilution becomes too great and the
goods are tarnished; if too little is added,
the mixture soon ceases to turn out bright
articles, because of overheating. On
this experience are based the formulas
given below.
Dip the articles, which must be free
from grease, into the pickle, after they
have been either annealed and quenched
in diluted sulphuric acid or washed out
with benzine. Leave them in the dip-
ping mixture until they become covered
with a greenish froth. Then quickly
immerse them in a vessel containing
plenty of water, and wash them out well
with running water. Before entering
the dipped articles in the baths it is well
to remove all traces of acid, by passing
them through a weak soda or potassium
cyanide solution and washing them out
again. If the brightly dipped goods are
to remain bright they must be coated
with a thin spirit or zapon acquer.
Following are two formulas for the
pickle:
I.— Aqua fortis, 36° Be.,
by weight 100 parts
Oil of vitriol (sul-
phuric acid), 66°
Be., by weight . . 70 parts
Cooking salt, by
volume 1£ parts
Shining soot (lamp-
black), by vol-
ume 1$ parts
II.— Aqua fortis, 40° Be.,
by weight 100 parts
Oil of vitriol, 66°
Be., by weight . . . 100 parts
Cooking salt, by
volume 2 parts
Shining soot, by
volume 2 parts
Matting or Deadening Pickle. — When,
instead of brilliancy, a matted appear-
ance is desired for metals, the article is
corroded either mechanically or chemic-
ally. In the first case it is pierced with
fine holes near together, rubbed with
emery powder or pumice stone and tam-
ponned. In the other case the corrosion
is effected in acid baths thus composed:
Nitric acid of 36° Be., 200 parts, by
volume; sulphuric acid of 56° Be., 200
parts, by volume; sea salt, 1 part, by
volume; zinc sulphate, 1 to 5 parts, by
volume.
With this proportion of acids the
articles can remain from 5 to 20 minutes
in the mixture cold; the prominence of
the matt depends on the length of time
of the immersion. The pieces on being
taken from the bath have an earthy ap-
pearance which is lightened by dipping
them quickly in a brightening acid. If
left too long the matted appearance is
destroyed.
Cotton Matt.— This matt, thus called
on account of its soft shade, is rarely
employed except for articles of stamped
brass, statuettes, or small objects. As
much zinc is dissolved in the bath as it
will take. The pieces are left in it from
15 to 30 minutes. On coming from the
bath they are dull, and to brighten them
somewhat they are generally dipped into
acids as before described.
Silver Matt. — Articles of value for
which gilding is desired are matted by
covering them with a light coating of
silver by the battery. It is known that
this deposit is always matt, unless the
bath contains too large a quantity of
potassium cyanide. A brilliant silvering
can be regularly obtained with electric
baths only by adding carbon sulphide.
Four drachms are put in an emery flask
containing a quart of the bath fluid and
allowed to rest for 24 hours, at the end
of which a blackish precipitate is formed.
After decanting, a quart is poured into
the electric bath for each quart before
every operation of silvering.
Dangers of Dipping. — The operation
of dipping should be carried out only in
a place where the escaping fumes of hypo-
nitric acid and chlorine can pass off
without molesting the workmen, e. g.,
under a well-drawing chimney; prefer-
ably in a vapor chamber. I* such an
arrangement is not present the operator
should choose a draughty place and pro-
tect himself from the fumes by tying a
wet sponge under his nose. The vapors
are liable to produce very violent and
dangerous inflammations of the respira-
tory organs, coming on in a surprisingly
METALS
471
quick manner after one has felt no pre-
vious injurious effect at all.
COLORING METALS:
See also Plating.
Processes by Oxidation. — By heat: —
Coloration of Steel. — The steel, heated
uniformly, is covered in the air with a
pellicle of oxide and has successively the
following colors: Straw yellow, blue (480°
to 570° F.), violet, purple, water-green,
disappearance of the color; lastly the steel
reddens. For producing the blue read-
ily, plunge the object into a bath of 25
parts of lead and 1 part of tin; its tem-
perature is sufficient for bluing small
pieces.
Bronzing of Steel. — I. — The piece to
be bronzed is wet by the use of a sponge
with a solution formed of iron perchlor-
ide, cupric sulphate, and a nitric acid.
It is dried in a stove at 86° F., then kept
for 20 minutes over boiling water. It is
dried again at 86° F., and rubbed with a
scratch brush.
This operation is repeated several
times.
Bronzing of Steel. — II. — Rust and
grease are removed from the objects
with a paste of whiting and soda. They
are immersed in a bath of dilute sul-
phuric acid, and rubbed with very fine
pumice-stone powder. They are then
exposed.from 2 to 3 minutes to the vapor
of a mixture of equal parts of concen-
trated chlorhydric and nitric acids.
The object is heated to 570° to 660° F.
until the bronze color appears. When
cooled, it is covered with paraffine or
vaseline while rubbing, and heated a
second time until the vaseline or paraf-
fine commences to decompose. The
operation is repeated. The shades ob-
tained are beautiful, and the bronzing is
not changeable. By subjecting the ob-
ject to the vapors of the mixture of chlor-
hydric and nitric acids, shades of a light
reddish brown are obtained. By add-
ing to these two acids acetic acid, beau-
tiful yellow bronze tints are procured.
By varying the proportion of these three
acids, all the colors from light reddish
brown to deep brown, or from light
yellow bronze to deep yellow bronze, are
produced at will.
Bronzing. — III.— Under the name of
Tuker bronze, a colored metal is found
in trade which imitates ornamental
bronze perfectly. It is obtained by de-
oxidizing or, if preferred, by burnishing
cast iron. A thin layer of linseed oil or
of linseed-oil varnish is spread on. It is
heated at a temperature sufficient for
producing in the open air the oxidation
of the metal. The temperature is raised
more or less, according as a simple yel-
low coloration or a deep brown is desired.
Lustrous Black. — In a quantity of oil
of turpentine, sulphuric acid is poured
drop by drop, stirring continually until
a precipitate is no longer formed. Then
the whole is poured into water, shaken,
decanted, and the washing of the pre-
cipitate commenced again until blue
litmus paper immersed in the water is
no longer reddened. The precipitate
will thus be completely freed from acid.
After having drained it on a cloth, it is
ready for use. It is spread on the iron
and burned at the fire.
If the precipitate spreads with diffi-
culty over the metal, a little turpentine
can be added. It is afterwards rubbed
with a linen rag, soaked with linseed oil,
until the surface assumes a beautiful
lustrous black. This covering is not
liable to be detached.
Bluish Black. — Make a solution com-
posed of nitric acid, 15 parts; cupric
sulphate, 8 parts; alcohol, 20 parts; and
water, 125 parts. Spread over the metal
when well cleaned and grease removed.
Dry and rub with linen rag.
Black. — Make a solution composed of
cupric sulphate, 80 parts; alcohol, 40
parts; ferric chloride, 30 parts; nitric
acid, 20 parts; ether, 20 parts; water,
400 to 500 parts, and pass over the ob-
ject to be blackened.
Magnetic Oxide. — I. — A coating of
magnetic oxide preserves from rust.
To obtain it, heat the object in a fur-
nace to a temperature sufficient to de-
compose steam. Then inject from 4 to
6 hours superheated steam at 1,100° F.
The thickness of the layer of oxide
formed varies with the duration of the
operation. This process may replace
zincking, enameling, or tinning.
II. — A deposit of magnetic oxide may
be obtained by electrolysis. The iron
object is placed at the anode in a bath of
distilled water heated to 176° F. The
cathode is a plate of copper, or the ves-
sel itself if it is of iron or copper. By
electrolysis a layer of magnetic oxide is
formed.
In the same way other peroxides may
be deposited. With an alkaline solution
of litharge a brilliant black deposit of
lead peroxide, very adherent, is obtained.
The employment of too strong a cur-
rent must be avoided. It will produce a
pulverulent deposit. To obtain a good
coating, it is necessary after leaving the
objects for a moment at the opposite
472
METALS
pole, to place them at the other pole
until the outside is completely reduced,
then bring them back to the first place.
Processes by Sulphuration. — Oxidized
Brown Color. — The object is plunged
into some melted sulphur mingled with
lampblack, or into a liquid containing the
flowers of sulphur mingled with lamp-
black. It is drained and dried. The
bronzing obtained resists acids, and may
acquire a beautiful polish which has the
appearance of oxidized bronze, due per-
haps to the formation of ferric sulphide,
a sort of pyrites remarkable for its beau-
tiful metallic reflections and its resistance
to chemical agents.
Brilliant Black. — Boil 1 part of sulphur
and 10 parts turpentine oil. A sulphur-
ous oil is obtained of disagreeable odor.
Spread this oil with the brush as lightly
as possible, and heat the object in the
flame of an alcohol lamp until the patina
takes the tint desired. This process pro-
duces on iron and steel a brilliant black
patina, which is extremely solid.
Blue. — Dissolve 500 drachms of hypo-
sulphite of soda in 1 quart of water, and
35 grains of lead acetate in 1 quart of
water. The two solutions mingled are
heated to the boiling point. The iron is
immersed, and assumes a blue coloration
similar to that obtained by annealing.
Deposit of a Metal or of a Non-Oxi-
dizable Compound. — Bronze Color. —
Rub the iron smartly with chloride of
antimony. A single operation is not
sufficient. It is necessary to repeat it,
heating the object slightly.
Black. — I. — Make a paste composed
of equal parts of chloride of antimony
and linseed oil. Spread on the object,
previously heated, with a brush or rag;
then pass over it a coating of wax and
brush it. Finally varnish with gum lac.
II. — Prepare a solution of bismuth chlo-
ride, 10 parts; mercury chloride, 20 parts;
cupric chloride, 10 parts; hydrochloric
acid, 60 parts; alcohol, 50 parts; water,
500 parts. Add fuchsine in sufficient
quantity to mask the color.
The mercury chloride is poured into
the hydrochloric acid, and the bismuth
chloride and cupric chloride added; then
the alcohol. Employ this mixture with
a brush or a rag for smearing the object.
The object may also be immersed in the
liquid if it is well cleaned and free from
grease. It is dried and afterwards sub-
mitted to boiling water for half an hour.
The operation is repeated until the
wished-for tint is obtained; then the
object is passed into the oil bath and
taken to the fire without wiping. The
object may also be placed for 10 minutes
in boiling linseed oil.
Brown Tint. — A solution is made of
chloride of mercury, 20 parts; cupric
chloride, 10 parts; hydrochloric acid, 60
parts; alcohol, 50 parts; water, 500 parts.
The object is plunged into this solution
after being well cleaned. The solution
may also be applied with a brush, giving
two coats. It is afterwards put into hot
water. The surface of the object is cov-
ered with a uniform layer of vegetable oil.
It is placed in a furnace at a high tempera-
ture, but not sufficient for carbonizing
the oil. The iron is covered with a thin
layer of brown oxide, which adheres
strongly to the metal, and which can be
beautifully burnished, producing the ap-
pearance of bronze.
Brilliant Black. — The process begins
by depositing on the object, perfectly
clean and free from grease, a layer of
metallic copper. For this purpose the
following solutions are prepared : (a)
Cupric sulphate, 1 part; water, 16 parts.
Add ammonia until complete dissolu-
tion. (6) Chloride of tin, 1 part; water,
2 parts; and chlorhydric acid, 2 parts.
The object is immersed in solution b,
and afterwards in solution a. In this
way there is deposited on the iron a very
adherent coating of copper. The object,
washed with water, is afterwards rubbed
with sulphur, or immersed in a solution
of ammonium sulphhydrate. A dull black
coating of cupric sulphide is produced,
which becomes a brilliant black by burn-
ishing.
Blue Black. — The iron object is first
heated according to the previous recipe,
but the copper is converted into cupric
sulphide, not by a sulphhydrate, but by
a hyposulphite. It is sufficient to dip
the coppered object into a solution of
sodium hyposulphite, acidulated with
chlorhydric acid, and raised to the tem-
perature of 175° to 195° F.
Thus a blue-black coating is obtained,
unchangeable in air and in water. After
polishing, it has the color of blue steel.
It adheres strongly enough to resist the
action of the scratch brush.
Deposition of Molybdenum. — Iron is
preserved from rust by covering it with
a coating of molybdenum, as follows:
Water, 1,000 parts; ammonium molyb-
date, 1 part; ammonium nitrate, 15 to
20 parts. Suspend the object at the
negative pole of a battery. The current
ought to have a strength of 2 to 5 am-
peres per cubic decimeter.
Deposit of Manganese Peroxide. — The
METALS
473
iron or steel is first covered with a coat-
ing of manganese peroxide by immer-
sing as an anode in a bath containing
about 0.05 per cent of chloride or sul-
phate of manganese and from 5 to 25 per
cent of ammonium nitrate. The bath is
electrolyzed cold, making use of a cath-
ode of charcoal. Feeble currents (1 or
2 amperes) produce an adherent and
unchangeable deposit.
Bronzing of Cannon. — Prepare a solu-
tion of ferric chloride of density 1.281,
14 parts; mercury chloride, 3 parts; fum-
ing nitric acid, 3 parts; cupric sulphate,
3 parts; water, 80 parts. Give to the
piece of ordnance 2 or 3 coatings of the
solution, taking care always to scratch
the preceding layer with a steel brush
before spreading the second. Afterwards,
the object is plunged in a solution of
potassium sulphide in 900 parts of water.
It is left in this for 10 days. It is removed
by washing with soap and hot water.
The object is rinsed, dried, and finally
brushed with linseed-oil varnish.
Green Bronzing. — Dissolve 1 part of
acetate of silver in 20 parts of essence of
lavender; coat the surface of iron with
this liquid by means of a brush and raise
the temperature to 292° F. A brilliant
green color is developed on the surface.
Coating on Steel Imitating Gilding. —
The object is first covered by the gal-
vanic method by means of a solution of
cyanide of copper and potassium, then
covered electrolytically with a thin de-
posit of zinc. It is dried and cleaned
with a little washed chalk and finally
immersed in boiling linseed oil. The
surface of the piece after a few seconds,
at a temperature of 310° F., appears as if
there had been a real penetration of cop-
per and zinc; that is to say, as though
there were a formation of tombac.
Bronzing of Cast Iron. — The piece,
when scraped, is coppered with the fol-
lowing bath: Cupric chloride, 10 parts;
hydrochloric acid, 80 parts; nitric acid,
10 parts. It is rubbed with a rag and
washed with pure water, and then
rubbed with the following solution: Am-
monium chlorhydrate, 4 parts; oxalic
acid, 1 part; water, 30 parts.
Gilding of Iron and Steel. — Chloride
of gold is dissolved either in oil of tur-
pentine or in ether, and this solution is
applied with the brush on the metallic
surface, after being perfectly scraped.
It is allowed to dry, and then heated
more or less strongly for obtaining the
necessary adherence. When it is dry
the gilding is burnished.
Process by Deposit of a Color or
Varnish. — Beautiful colorations, resis-
tive to light, may be given to metals by
the following method:
The metallic objects are immersed in
a colorless varnish with pyroxyline, and
dried in a current of hot air at 176° F.
When the varnish is sufficiently dry, the
objects are bathed for a few minutes in a
2 per cent alcoholic solution of alizarine
or of a color of the same group. By
washing with water the yellowish color
covering the object on coming from the
coloring bath passes to the golden red.
Coloring Copper.— To redden copper
hang it from a few minutes to an hour,
according to the shade wanted, in a 5 to 10
per cent solution of ferrocyanide of po-
tassmm in water. By adding a little
hydrochloric acid to the solution the
color given to the copper may be made to
assume a purple shade. On removing
the copper, dry it in the air or in fine saw-
dust, rinse, and polish with a brush or
chamois leather, after drying it again.
Coloring Brass. — To redden brass, dip
in solution of 5 ounces of sulphate of
copper and 6 to 7 ounces of perman-
ganate of potash in 500 ounces of water.
To blue copper or brass any one of the
following recipes may be used:
I. — Dip the article in a solution of 2
ounces of liver of sulphur and 2 ounces
of chlorate soda in 1,000 ounces of water.
II. — Dip the article in a solution of
ferrocyanide of potassium very strongly
acidulated with hydrochloric acid.
III. — Stir the article about constantly
in a solution of liver of sulphur in 50
times its weight of water.
Fusion Point of Metals. — The point
of fusion of common metals is as follows:
Antimony, 808° F.; aluminum, 1,160° F.;
bismuth, 517° F.; copper, 1,931°F.; gold,
1,913°F.; iron, 2,912° F.; lead, 850° F.;
nickel, 2,642° F.; platinum, 3,225°^.;
silver, 1,750° F. ; tin, 551°F. ; zinc, 812° F.
Mercury, which is normally fluid, con-
geals at 38° below zero, F., this being it?
point of fusion.
To Produce Fine Leaves of Metal. —
The metal plate is laid between parch-
ment leaves and beaten out with ham-
mers. Although films obtained in this
manner reach a high degree of fineness,
yet the mechanical production has its
limit. If very fine films are desired the
galvano-plastic precipitation is employed
in the following manner:
A thin sheet of polished copper is en-
tered in the bath and connected with the
474
METALS— MILK
electric conduit. The current precipi-
tates gold on it. In order to loosen it,
the gilt copper plate is placed in a solu-
tion of ferric chloride, which dissolves
the copper and leaves the gold behind.
In this manner gold leaf can be ham-
mered out to almost incredible thinness.
METAL FOIL.
Tin foil is the most common foil used»
being a combination of tin, lead, and
copper, sometimes with properties of
other metals.
I II III
Per cent Per cent Per cent
Tin 97.60 98.47 96.21
Copper 2.11 0.38 0.95
Lead 0.04 0.84 2.41
Iron 0.11 0.12 0.09
Nickel 0.30
I is a mirror foil; III is a tin foil.
Tin Foils for Capsules. —
I II
Per cent Per cent
Tin 20 22
Lead.... 80 77
Copper 1
Tin Foils for Wrapping Cheese, etc. —
I II III
Per cent Per cent Per cent
Tin 97 90 92
Lead 2.5 7.8 7
Copper 0.5 0.2 1
Tin Foils, for Fine Wrapping,
for Tea Boxes, III. —
I II
Per cent Per cent
Tin 60 65
Lead 40 35
Copper
Imitation Gold Foils. —
Deep Pure
gold gold
Per cent Per cent
Copper 84.5 78
Zinc 15.5 22
I and II;
III
Per cent
40
58.5
1.5
Pale
gold
Per cent
76
14
Deep Deep
gold gold Gold
Per cent Per cent Per cent
Copper 91 86 83
Zinc 9 14 17
dark pale
reddish yellow yellow
Imitation Silver Foil. — Alloy of tin and
zinc: harder than tin and softer than zinc:
Zinc, 1 part; tin, 11 parts.
To Attach Gold Leaf Permanently. —
Dissolve finely cut isinglass in a little
water, with moderate heat, which must
not be increased to a boil, and add as
much nitric acid as has been used of the
isinglass. The adhesive will not penetrate
the cardboard or paper.
METH:
See Mead.
METHEGLIN:
See Mead.
METHYL SALICYLATE, TO DISTIN-
GUISH FROM OIL OF WINTER-
GREEN:
See Wintergreen.
METOL DEVELOPER:
See Photography.
METRIC WEIGHTS:
See Weights and Measures.
MICE POISON:
See Rat Poison.
MICROPHOTOGRAPHS
See Photography.
MILK:
See also Foods.
Determining Cream.— -An apparatus
for determining cream in milk consists
of a glass cylinder having a mark about
half its height, and a second mark a little
above the first. The milk is added up to
the lower mark, and water up to the
second. The amount of water thus
added is about one-fourth the volume of
the milk, and causes the cream to rise
more quickly. The tube is graduated
between the two marks in percentages of
cream on the undiluted milk. A vertical
blue strip in the side of the cylinder aids
the reading of the meniscus.
Formaldehyde in Milk, Detection of. —
To 10 parts of milk add 1 part of fuchsine
sulphurous acid. Allow to stand 5 min-
utes, then add 2 parts of pure hydro-
chloric acid and shake. If formalde-
hyde is not present, the mixture remains
yellowish white, while if present a blue-
violet color is produced. This test will
detect 1 grain of anhydrous formalde-
hyde in 1 quart of milk.
Malted Milk.— To malt milk, add the
following:
Powdered malt 1 ounce
Powdered oat meal. . . 2 ounces
Sugar of milk 4 ounces
Roasted flour 1 pound
Milk Extracts. — These are made from
skimmed milk freed from casein, sugar
and albumen, and resemble meat ex-
tracts. The milk is slightly acidulated
with phosphoric or hydrochloric acid,
and evaporated in vacua to the consis-
MILK
475
tency of thick syrup. During the crys-
tallization of tne sugar, the liquid is
sterilized.
Modification of Milk for Infants. —
For an ill child note the percentages of
milk taken; decide, if indigestion is
present, which ingredient of the milk, fat
or proteid, or both, is at fault, and make
formula accordingly.
After allowing the milk to stand 8
hours, remove the top 8 ounces from a
quart jar of 4 per cent fat milk by means
of a dipper, and count this as 12 per cent
fat cream. Count the lowest 8 ounces of
the quart fat-free milk. From these the
following formula may be obtained,
covering fairly well the different per-
centages required for the different pe-
riods of life.
First Week.
12 per cent cream. Fat-free milk.
Fat 2.00 Cream .... 3$ oz.
Sugar. . . . 5.00 Milk l| oz.
Proteids. . 0.75 Milk sugar 2 meas.
Second Week.
2.50 Cream ..
.6.00 Milk
Fat
Sugar. .
Proteids
4J oz.
li oz.
2* meas.
Fat
Sugar
Proteids
Fat
Sugar. . .
Proteids.
oz.
oz.
Fat
Sugar . . .
Proteids.
Fat
Sugar. .
Proteids.
Fat
Sugar. . .
Proteids .
1.00 Milk sugar
Third Week.
3.00 Cream .... 5
6.00 Milk 1
1.00 Milk sugar. 2
Four to Six Weeks.
3.50 Cream .... 5}
6.50 Milk 11
1.00 Milk sugar £J meas.
Six to Eight Weeks.
3.50 Cream.. .. 5f
6.50 Milk 3|
1.50 Milk sugar 2j
Two to Four Months.
4.00 Cream .... 6|
7.00 Milk 2|
1.50 Milk sugar 2| meas.
Four to Eight Months.
4.00 Cream .... 6J oz.
7.00 Milk.. . 4£ oz.
oz.
oz.
oz.
oz.
meas.
oz.
oz.
Fat.
Sugar. .
Proteids.
Fat.. .
Sugar .
Proteids
2.00 Milk sugar 2J meas.
Eight to Nine Months.
. 4.00 Cream .... 6J oz.
. 7.00 Milk 7$ oz.
. 2.50 Milk sugar 2 meas.
Nine to Ten Months.
Cream . . 6 f oz.
Milk.. . 10* oz.
4.00
7.00
3.00
Milk sugar 1$ meas.
Ten to Twelve Months.
Fat 4.00 Cream 6| oz.
Sugar.... 5.00 Milk llf oz.
Proteids.. 3.50 Milk sugar J meas.
After Twelve Months.
Unmodified cow's milk.
Preservation of Milk (see also Foods).
— I. — Shortly after the milk is strained
add to it from 1 per cent to 2 per cent
of a 12-volume solution of hydrogen per-
oxide, and set it aside for 10 to 12 hours.
It thus acquires the property of keeping
perfectly sweet and fresh for 3 or 4 days,
and is far preferable to milk sterilized by
heat. Two points are worthy of notice
in the process. The addition of oxy-
genated water should be made as soon
after it is taken from the cow, strained,
etc., as possible; the peroxide appears to
destroy instantly all anaerobic microbes
(such as the bacillus of green diarrhea of
childhood), but has no effect upon the
bacillus of tuberculosis. This process is
to be especially recommended in the heat
of summer, and at all times in the milk
of cattle known to be free of tuberculosis.
II. — Fresh milk in bottles has been
treated with oxygen and carbonic acid
under pressure of some atmospheres.
By this method it is said to be possible to
preserve milk fresh 50 to 60 days. The
construction of the bottle is siphon-like.
Milk Substitute.— Diamalt is a thick
syrupy mass of pleasant, strong, some-
what sourish odor and sweetish taste,
which is offered as a substitute for milk.
The preparation has been analyzed. Its
specific gravity is 1.4826; the percentage
of water fluctuates between 24 and 28
per cent; the amount of ash is 1.3 per
cent. There are present: Lactic acid,
0.718 to 1.51; nitrogenous matter, 4.68
to 5.06 per cent; and constituents rich in
nitrogen, about 68 per cent. The latter
consist principally of maltose. Dissolved
in water it forms a greenish-yellow mixt-
ure. Turbidness is caused by starch
grains, yeast cells, bacteria, and a shape-
less coagulum.
MILK AS A SUBSTITUTE FOR CELLU-
LOID, BONE, AND IVORY:
See Casein.
MILK, CUCUMBER:
See Cosmetics.
MILK OF SOAP:
See Cleaning Preparations and Meth-
odsf under Miscellaneous Methods,
MINARGENT:
See Alloys,
476
MIRRORS
MINERAL WATERS:
See Waters.
MINOFOR METAL:
See Alloys.
MINT CORDIAL:
See Wines and Liquors.
Mirrors
(See also Glass.)
Mirror Silvering. — Mirror silvering is
sometimes a misnomer, inasmuch as the
coating applied to glass in the manu-
facture of mirrors does not always con-
tain silver. In formula I it is an amal-
gam of mercury and tin.
I. — A sheet of pure tin foil, slightly
larger than the glass plate to be silvered,
is spread evenly on a perfectly plane
stone table having a raised edge, and is
well cleaned from all dust and impurity.
The foil must be free from the slightest
flaw or crack. The tin is next covered
uniformly to a depth of J of an inch
with mercury, preference being given by
some to that containing a small propor-
tion of tin from a previous operation.
The glass plate, freed from all dust or
grease, and repolished if necessary, is
then carefully slid over the mercury.
This part of the work requires skill and
experience to exclude all air bubbles, and
even the best workmen are not successful
every time. If there is a single bubble or
scratch the operation must be repeated
and the tin foil is lost; not a small expense
for large sizes. When this step has been
satisfactorily accomplished the remainder
is easy. The glass plate is loaded with
heavy weights to press out the excess of
mercury which is collected and is used
again. After 24 hours the mirror is
lifted from the table and placed on edge
against a wall, where it is left to dram
well.
II. — Solution No. 1 is composed as
follows: To 8 ounces of distilled water,
brought to a boil, add 12 grains of silver
nitrate and 12 grains of Rochelle salts.
Let it come to a boil for 6 to 7 minutes;
then cool and filter.
Solution No. 2 is made as follows:
Take 8 ounces of distilled water, and
into a small quantity poured into a tum-
bler put 19 grains of silver nitrate. Stir
well until dissolved. Then add several
drops of 26° ammonia until the solution
becomes clear. Add 16 grains more of
nitrate of silver, stirring well until dis-
solved. Add balance of distilled water
and filter. The filtering must be done
through a glass funnel, in which the
filter paper is placed. The solution must
be stirred with a glass rod. Keep the
solutions in separate bottles marked No.
1 and No. 2.
Directions for Silvering: Clean the
glass with ammonia and wipe with a
wet chamois. Then take half and half of
the two solutions in a graduating glass,
stirring well with a glass rod. Pour the
contents on the middle of the glass to be
silvered. It will spread over the surface
of itself if the glass is laid flat. Leave it
until the solution precipitates.
Silvering Globes. — The insides of globes
may be silvered, it is said, by the follow-
ing methods:
I. — Take $ ounce of clean lead, and
melt it with an equal weight of pure tin;
then immediately add \ ounce of bismuth,
and carefully skim off the dross; remove
the alloy from the fire, and before it
grows cold add 5 ounces of mercury, and
stir the whole well together; then put the
fluid amalgam into a clean glass, and it
is fit for use. When this amalgam is
used for silvering, it should be first
strained through a linen rag; then gently
pour some ounces of it into the globe in-
tended to be silvered; the alloy should be
poured into the globe by means of a
paper or glass funnel reaching almost to
the bottom of the globe, to prevent it
splashing the sides; the globe should be
turned every way very slowly, to fasten
the silvering.
II. — Make an alloy of 3 ounces of
lead, 2 ounces of tin, and 5 ounces of
bismuth. Put a portion of this alloy
into the globe and expose it to a gentle
heat until the compound is melted; it
melts at 197° F.; then by turning the
globe slowly round, an equal coating
may be laid on, which, when cold, hard-
ens and firmly adheres.
Resilvering Mirrors — If mirrors coated
with amalgam become damaged they
may sometimes be successfully repaired
by one of the following processes:
I. — Place the old mirror in a weak
solution of nitric acid — say 5 per cent —
whick immediately removes the silver.
Rinse it a little, and then clean very thor-
oughly with a pledget of cotton- wool and
a mixture of whiting and ammonia.
Rouge will answer in place of whiting, or,
as a last extreme, finest levigated pumice,
first applied to a waste glass to crush
down any possible grit. This cleaning
is of the utmost importance, as upon its
thoroughness depends eventual success.
Front, back, and edges must alike be
left in a state above suspicion. The
MIRRORS
477
plate is then again flowed with weak acid,
rinsed under the tap, then flowed back
and front with distilled water, and kept
immersed in a glass-covered dish of dis-
tilled water until the solutions are ready.
The depositing vessel is the next con-
sideration, and it should be realized that
unless most of the silver in the solution
finds its way on to the face of the mirror
it were cheaper that the glass should be
sent to the professional mirror-maker.
The best plan is to use a glass dish al-
lowing a -n;- inch margin all round the
mirror, inside. But such a glass dish is
expensive, having to be made specially,
there being no regular sizes near enough
to 4x7 or 8x5 (usual mirror sizes). If
too large, a dish must perforce be used,
the sides or ends of which should be filled
up with sealing wax. Four strips of glass
are temporarily bound together with 2
or 3 turns of string, so as to form a hol-
low square. The side pieces are i inch
longer outside, and the end pieces i inch
wider than the mirror glass. This frame
is placed in about the center of the dish,
moistened with glycerine, and the molten
wax flowed outside of it to a depth of
about £ of an inch or more. For econ-
omy's sake, good "parcel wax" may be
used, but best red sealing wax is safer.
This wax frame may be used repeatedly,
being cleaned prior to each silvering
operation. It is the only special ap-
pliance necessary, and half an hour is a
liberal time allowance for making it.
Use a stock solution of silver nitrate of
the strength of 25 grains to 1 ounce of
distilled water: Take 2 drachms of sil-
ver nitrate stock solution and convert it
to ammonia nitrate, by adding ammonia
drop by drop until the precipitate is re-
dissolved. Add 3 1 ounces of distilled
water.
In another measure take 80 drops
(approximately 74 minims) of 40 per cent
formalin. Pour the solution of ammo-
nio nitrate of silver into the measure con-
taining the formalin, then back into the
original measure, and finally into the
dish containing the glass to be silvered.
This should be done rapidly, and the
dish containing the mirror well rocked
until the silvering is complete, which may
be ascertained by the precipitation of a
black, flocculent deposit, and the clearing
of the solution. The actual process of
silvering takes about 2 minutes.
Cleanliness throughout is of the great-
est importance. The vessels in which
the solutions are mixed should be well
rinsed with a solution of bichromate of
potash and sulphuric acid, then washed
out three or four times under the tap, and
finally with distilled water. For cleans-
ing, dip the glass for a short time in a
solution of bichromate of potash, to
which a little sulphuric acid is added.
The glass is afterwards well rinsed for a
minute or two under the tap, flooded
with distilled water, and dried with a
clean linen cloth. A little absolute
alcohol is then rubbed on with a soft
linen handkerchief, which is immediately
rolled into a pad and used for well polish-
ing the surface. The cleaning with al-
cohol is repeated to avoid risk of failure.
After the mirror has been silvered,
hold it under the tap and allow water to
flow over it for about 3 minutes. Rinse
it with distilled water, and stand it up
on edge on blotting paper. When it is
quite dry take a pad of very soft wash-
leather, spread a small quantity of finest
opticians' rouge on a sheet of clean glass,
and well coat the pad with rouge by
polishing the sheet of glass. A minute
quantity of rouge is sufficient. After-
wards polish the mirror by gently rubbing
the surface with the pad, using a circular
stroke.
It will be seen that with this process it
is unnecessary to suspend the mirror in
the silvering solution, as usually recom-
mended. The mirror is laid in the dish,
which is a distinct advantage, as the
progress of the silvering may be watched
until complete. The film also is much
more robust than that obtained by the
older methods.
II. — Clean the bare portion of the
glass by rubbing it gently with fine cot-
ton, taking care to remove any trace of
dust and grease. If this cleaning be not
done very carefully, defects will appear
around the place repaired. With the
point of a penknife cut upon the back of
another looking glass around a portion of
the silvering of the required form, but a
little larger. Upon it place a small drop
of mercury; a drop the size of a pin's
head will be sufficient for a surface equal
to the size of the nail. The mercury
spreads immediately, penetrates the
amalgam to where it was cut off with the
knife, and the required piece may be
now lifted and removed to the place to be
repaired. This is the most difficult part
of the operation. Then press lightly the
renewed portion with cotton; it hardens
almost immediately, and the glass pre-
sents the same appearance.
Clouding of Mouth Mirrors. — By
means of the finger, slightly moistened,
apply a film of soap of any brand or kind
to the mirror; then rub this off with a
clean, dry cloth; the mirror will be as
478
MIRRORS— MOLDS
bright and clear as ever. Breathing on
it will not affect its clearness and the
mirror does not suffer from the opera-
tion.
Magic Mirrors. — Among the many
amusing and curious articles which the
amateur mechanic can turn out, metallic
mirrors having concealed designs on
them, and which can be brought into
view by breathing on the polished sur-
face, are both funny and easy to produce.
To produce steel mirrors either tough
bronze or good cast mottled iron discs
should be used, and the design should be
on the bottom of the cast disc, as this is
the soundest and densest part of the
metal. The method of working is dif-
ferent with bronze and iron, and bronze
will be dealt with first.
The cast disk of bronze should be
turned up level on both sides, and the
edges should be turned or shaped up, the
metal being about half an inch thick.
On the side which was at the bottom in
casting, a line should be drawn to allow
for working up the border or frame of
the mirror, ano: on the rest of the smooth
surface the design should be drawn, not
having too much detail. It is best to
mark the lines with a sharp scriber, to
prevent their effacement during working.
When the disk is marked out, it should
be laid on a smoothly planed iron block,
and the lines punched to a depth of about
}. inch, a punch with round edges being
used. Then the disk should be turned
down to just below the surface of the
punched-in metal, and the border or edge
formed, finishing smoothly, but without
burnishing. The back can be turned
down and, with the outer edge, bur-
nished; but the inside of the edge and
the face of the mirror should be polished
with fine abrasive powder, and finished
with fine rouge. When dry, the mirror
will appear equally bright all over; but
when breathed on the design will show,
again disappearing as the moisture is
removed. The metal punched in will be
more dense than the rest of the surface,
and will also be very slightly raised, this
being imperceptible unless the polishing
has been too long continued.
With iron mirrors a good mottled iron
must be used, selecting hematite for pref-
erence; but in any case it must be chill-
able metal. Preferably it should be
melted in a crucible, as this causes the
least change in the metallic content, and
as the metal can be made hot and fluid,
it works well. The design must be
worked out in iron of about £ inch in
thickness, and must be level, as it has to
touch the molten metal in the bottom of
the mold. If preferred, the design may
be cast and ground flat, but this depends
largely on the design. The chill pattern
should be coated with plumbago, and in
molding the disk pattern of about £ inch
in thickness should be laid on a board,
and on this the design — chill — should
be placed, and the mold should be
rammed up from the back in the ordinary
manner. The casting should be allowed
to get cold in the mold, and should then
be removed and dressed in the usual way.
It should then be ground bright all over
on emery wheels of successively finer
grades, and the mirror surface should be
buffed and polished until a steely mirror
surface is produced. With a good mot-
tled iron the chilled design will not show
until the surface is breathed on or rubbed
with a greasy rag, but will then show
clearly.
MIRROR ALLOYS:
See Alloys.
MIRRORS, FROSTED:
See Glass.
MIRROR-LETTERING :
See Lettering.
MIRROR POLISHES:
See Polishes.
MIRRORS, TO CLEAN:
See Cleaning Preparations and Meth-
ods.
MIRRORS, TO PREVENT DIMMING
OF:
See Glass.
MIRROR VARNISH:
See Varnishes.
MITE KILLER:
See Insecticides.
MIXING STICKS FOR PAINT:
See Paint.
MODELING WAX:
See Wax, Modeling.
MOISTURE:
See Insulation.
MOLDS:
See also Casting and Matrix.
Molding Sand. — A high grade of mold-
ing sand should be fat, i. e., strongly
mixed with clay. Naturally the molds of
this sand should be employed only in
a perfectly dry state. The fat molding
sand is prepared artificially from quartz
sand (fine sprinkling sand), fat clay, free
MOLDS— MOUNTANTS
479
from lime and ferric oxide (red ocher).
The molding sand is fixed by breaking
up the loose pieces in which it is partly
dug; next it is passed through a fine sieve
and mixed up to one-third of its volume
with charcoal dust, or, better still, with
lampblack, which, owing to its looseness
and fatness, does not detract so much
from the binding qualities of the sand.
The utility of the sand may be tested by
pressing the finger into it, whereupon the
fine lines of the skin should appear
sharply defined; its binding power is
ascertained by dropping a lump pressed
together with the hand from a neight,
which is increased until it breaks.
MOLDS OF PLASTER:
See Plaster.
MOLES:
See also Warts.
Lunar caustic is frequently used to
remove warts and moles. It should be
wrapped in tin foil or placed in a quill so
that it will not touch the bare flesh.
Moisten the raised surface and touch
with the caustic night and morning.
Successive layers of skin will dry up and
peel off. When on a level with the sur-
rounding flesh apply a healing ointment.
Let the last crust formed drop without
touching it. Unless carefully done this
process may leave a white scar.
A simple remedy for warts consists in
wetting and rubbing them several times
a day in a strong solution of common
washing soda. The electric treatment,
however, is now the most popular.
MORDANTS:
See also Dyes.
Mordant for Cement Surfaces. — Take
green vitriol and dissolve it in hot water.
If the cement is rather fresh add 1 part
of vinegar for each part of green vitriol.
Best suited, however, is triple vinegar
(vinegar containing f 3- per cent of acetic
acid), which is alone sufficient for well-
dried places. For such surfaces that
have been smoothed with a steel tool and
have hardly any pores, take alcohol, 1
part, and green vitriol, 10 parts, and
apply this twice until the iron has ac-
quired a yellowish color. This mordant
forms a neutral layer between cement
and paint, and causes the latter to dry
well.
Mordant for Gold Size. — A mordant
for gold size gilding that has been thor-
oughly tested and found to be often pref-
erable to the shellac-mixed article, is
prepared from yolk of egg and glycerine.
The yolk of an egg is twirled in a cup
and up to 30 drops of glycerine are added
to it. The more glycerine added, the
longer the mordant will take to dry. Or
else an equal portion of ordinary syrup
is mixed with the yolk of egg. Same
must be thinly liquid. If the mass be-
comes too tough it is warmed a little or
thinned with a few drops of warm water.
A single application is sufficient. Nat-
urally, this style of gilding is only prac-
ticable indoors; it cannot withstand the in-
fluence of moisture.
MORTAR, ASBESTOS.
Asbestos mortar consists of a mixture
of asbestos wi*h 10 per cent of white
lime. Canadian asbestos is generally
used, which is composed of 80 per cent
of asbestos and 20 per cent of serpen-
tine. The asbestos is ground and the
coarse powder used for the first rough
cast, while the finer material is employed
for the second top-plastering. This
mortar is highly fire-resisting and water-
proof, is only half as heavy as cement
mortar, and tough enough to admit of
nails being driven in without breaking it.
MOSQUITO REMEDIES:
See Insecticides.
MOSS REMOVERS:
See Cleaning Preparations and Meth-
ods, under Miscellaneous Methods.
MOTHS:
See Turpentine.
MOTH PAPER:
See Paper.
MOTH TRAPS AND MOTH KILLERS:
See Household Formulas.
MOTHER-OF-PEARL :
See Pearl.
MOTORS, ANTI -FREEZING SOLU-
TION FOR:
See Freezing Preventives.
MOUNTANTS:
See also Adhesives and Photography.
Mounting Drawings, Photos, etc.,
upon Fine Pasteboard. — It frequently
happens that the pasteboard will warp
toward the face of the picture, even if
left in a press till the gluing medium is
perfectly dry. This fault can be obvi-
480
MOUNTANTS— MUSTARD PAPER
ated by moistening the back of the paste-
board moderately with a sponge, and,
while this is still wet, pasting the picture
on with good, thin glue. If moistening
the pasteboard is impracticable (with
sensitive drawings, paintings, etc.),
paste which has been pressed through a
fine cloth is rubbed on, always in the
same direction, and the picture is care-
fully and evenly pressed on. Then
bend the pasteboard backward in a wide
semicircle, and place it between two
heavy objects on the table. After a few
hours, when the paste is completely dry,
put the picture down flat and load pro-
portionately. Papers of large size,
which cannot conveniently be placed
between two objects, are wrapped up,
and twine is stretched around, thus
keeping them bent.
Mounting Prints on Glass. — Take 4
ounces of gelatin; soak £ hour in cold
water; then place in a glass jar, adding
16 ounces of water; put the jar in a large
dish of warm water and dissolve the gel-
atin. When dissolved pour in a shal-
low tray; have the prints rolled on a
roller, albumen side up; take the print by
the corners and pass rapidly through the
gelatin, using great care to avoid air
bubbles. Squeeze carefully onto the
glass. The better the quality of glass,
the finer the effect.
MOUTH ANTISEPTICS:
See Antiseptics.
MOUTH WASHES:
See Dentifrices.
MOVING OBJECTS AND HOW TO
PHOTOGRAPH THEM:
See Photography.
MUCILAGE :
See Adhesives.
MUSIC BOXES.
Care must be exercised in taking apart,
for if the box is wound up and the fly
is removed, the cylinder is ruined. The
spring relaxes at a bound, causing the
cylinder to turn with such rapidity that
the pins cannot resist the teeth, whose
force is intensified by the velocity of the
cylinder. The pins originally bent for-
ward are broken, or pressed backwards;
as they are hardened, they cannot be
bent forward again without breaking.
This accident involves the cost of a new
cylinder, the most expensive part of the
apparatus. Besides, the comb almost
always loses some teeth and the wheel-
work also suffers in its turn.
To avoid such mishaps the careful
operator will take the parts asunder in
the following order:
1. Remove the comb.
2. Take the apparatus from the box
and completely disarm the spring.
3. Remove the barrel.
4. Remove the escapement.
5. Remove the cylinder.
The barrel and the wheels are cleaned
like those of a watch.
The cylinder should be handled care-
fully. The holes should be well cleaned.
Oil should be put only on the pivots,
especially none on the part of the arbor
to which the cylinder is attached. It is
the first piece to be replaced, care being
taken to see that the arbor turns freely,
but without play, between the bridges.
When it is in position, put in the escape-
ment, then the barrel, and finally the
comb.
The comb, representing the musical
part of a simple box, cannot receive too
much care. Before replacing it examine
the springs closely, and in supplying the
ones that are lacking, take for the model
of size and form those resembling them
the most. If the parts have been put
together properly, then, as soon as the
comb is screwed in its place, these should
be found in good working order: the levee
(lift) — that is, that the pins do not lift the
teeth too much or too little; the tombee
(fall)— that is, that the chords, the bass,
the medium, and the treble, fall together;
and the visee (pointing) — that the pins
catch at the center of the ends of the
teeth.
MUSLIN, PAINTING ON:
See Painting.
MUSTACHE FIXING FLUID.
Balsam of Tolu 1 part
Rectified spirit 3 parts
Jockey club 1 part
Dissolve the balsam in the liquids.
Apply a few drops to the mustache with
a brush, then twist into the desired shape.
MUSTARD PAPER.
I. — India rubber 1 part
Benzol 49 parts
Black mustard in powder, a suffi-
ciency.
Dissolve the India rubber in the ben-
zol, then stir in the mustard until the
mixture is of a suitable consistence for
spreading. It was further recommended
to remove the fixed oil from the mustard
by percolation with benzol. Mustard
paper thus made is of good quality, very
active, and keeps well.
MUSTARD PAPER— NICKEL TESTING
481
II. — Black and white
mustard, in No.
60 powder, de-
prived of fixed oil . 1 part
Benzol solution of
India rubber (1 in
40) 4 parts
Mix to a smooth mass, and spread the
same over one side of a suitable paper by
means of a plaster-spreading machine,
or passing the paper over the mass con-
tained in a suitable shallow vessel. Ex-
pose to warm air for a short time to dry.
Preserve the dry paper in well-closed
boxes. It may be useful to know that
mustard paper, after spreading, should
not be long exposed to light and air. By
so doing not only does the mustard
bleach but the rubber soon perishes.
Moreover, mustard paper is hygroscopic,
so that in a moist atmosphere it soon
loses its virtue. It is, therefore, highly
important that mustard paper should be
rapidly dried in a warm atmosphere with
free ventilation, then at once stored in
well-closed packets. Thus prepared
they keep well and remain active for
many years.
MUSTARDS :
See Condiments.
MYRRH ASTRINGENT:
See Dentifrices.
NAIL, INGROWING.
Copious applications of dried pow-
dered alum are sufficient to cure every
case of ingrowing nail in about 5 days.
The applications are not painful in the
least, and the destruction of the patho-
logic tissue results in the formation of a
hard, resistant, and non-sensitive bed
for the nail, a perfect cure for the in-
growing tendency. Apply a fomenta-
tion of soap and water for 24 hours be-
forehand and then pour the alum into
the space between the nail and its bed,
tamponing with cotton to keep the alum
in place, and repeating the application
daily. The suppuration rapidly dries
up, and pain and discomfort are relieved
almost at once.
NAIL POLISHES:
See Cosmetics.
NAPOLEON CORDIAL:
See Wines and Liquors.
NAPHTHOL SOAP:
See Soap.
NEATSFOOT OIL.
Crude neatsfoot oil 5,000 parts
Alcohol, 90 per cent 2,500 parts
Tannin 5 parts
Place in a clearing flask, agitate vigor-
ously and allow to stand for 8 days in a
warm room with daily repetition of the
shaking. Then draw off the spirit of
wine on top, rinse again with 1,000 parts
of spirit of wine (90 per cent) and place
the oil in a temperature of about 53£° F.
Allow to stand in this temperature for at
least 6 weeks, protected from the light,
and then filter.
NEEDLES, ANTI-RUST PAPER FOR:
See Rust Preventives.
NEGATIVES, HOW TO USE SPOILED:
See Photography.
NERVE PASTE:
See also Dental Cements, under Ce-
ments.
Arsenious acid 4 parts
Morphine sulphate. . . 2 parts
Clove oil 1 part
Creosote, quantity sufficient to make
a paste.
After the nerve is destroyed the fol-
lowing paste is to be put in the cavity:
Alum 1 part
Thymol 1 part
Zinc oxide 1 part
Glycerine 1 part
NERVINE OINTMENT:
See Ointments.
NESSELRODE PUDDING:
See Ice Creams.
NETS:
See Cordage.
NICKEL-TESTING.
Pure nickel will remain nearly white,
while "patent nickel," or nickel- copper
will not retain its primitive brilliancy,
but soon becomes slightly oxidized and
grayish in color. The magnet furnishes
a good means of testing. The unadul-
terated nickel is distinctly sensitive to
magnetism, while that much alloyed is
destitute of this property.
NICKEL ALLOYS:
See Alloys.
NICKEL, TO REMOVE RUST FROM:
See Cleaning Preparations and Meth-
ods.
NICKEL-PLATING:
See Plating.
NICKEL STEEL:
See Steel.
NICKELING, TEST FOR:
See Plating.
OILS
NIELLO:
See Steel.
NITROGLYCERINE:
See Explosives.
NOYAUX LIQUEUR:
See Wines and Liquors.
NUT CANDY STICKS :
See Confectionery.
NUTMEG CORDIAL:
See Wines and Liquors.
NUTMEG ESSENCE:
See Essences and Extracts.
OAK:
See Wood.
ODONTER:
See Dentifrices.
Oils
Clock Oil. — Put 2,000 parts, by weight,
of virgin oil in a decanting vessel, add a
solution of 40 parts of ether tannin in
400 parts of water and shake until com-
pletely emulsified. Let stand for 8 days,
with frequent shaking; next, add 100
parts of talcum and, when this has also
been well shaken, 1,600 parts of water.
Allow to settle for 24 hours, and then run
off the lower water layer, repeating the
washing as long as the wash water still
shoAvs a coloration with ferric chloride.
Pour the contents of the decanting vessel
into an evaporating dish; then add 200
parts of thoroughly dried and finely
ground cooking salt; let stand for 24
ours and filter through paper. The
clock oil is now ready, and should be
filled in brown glass bottles, holding 20
to 25 parts (about 1 ounce), which must
be corded up well and kept at a cool
temperature.
COD-LIVER OIL:
Aromatic Cod-Liver Oil. —
Coumarin 0.01 parts
Saccharine 0.50 parts
Vanillin 0.10 parts
Alcohol, absolute. 5.40 parts
Oil of lemon 5.00 parts
Oil of peppermint. 1.00 part
Oil of neroli 1.00 part
Cod-liver oil to make 1,000 parts
Deodorized Cod-Liver Oil. — Mix 400
parts of cod-liver oil with 20 parts of
ground coffee and 10 parts of bone black,
warm the mixture in an open vessel to
140° F., let it stand 5 days, shaking occa-
sionally, and strain through linen. The
oil acquires the taste of coffee.
Cod-Liver Oil Emulsions. —
I. — Calcium hypo-
phosphite 80 grains
Sodium hypophos-
phite 120 grains
Sodium chloride. . 60 grains
Gum acacia, in
powder 2 ounces
Elixir of glucoside 20 minims
Essential oil of al-
monds 15 minims
Glycerine 2 fluidounces
Cod-liver oil 8 fluidounces
Distilled water, a sufficient quan-
tity to produce 16 fluidounces.
II. — Mix 190 parts of powdered sugar
with 5 parts of acacia and 500 parts
of tragacanth in a mortar. Mix in a
large bottle and shake thoroughly to-
gether 500 parts of cod-liver oil and 200
parts of a cold infusion of coffee. Grad-
ually add a part of this mixture to the
powder in the mortar and triturate until
emulsified. To the remaining liquid
mixture add 100 parts of rum, then
gradually incorporate with the contents
of the mortar by trituration.
Extracting Oil from Cottonseed. —
Claim is made for a process of extraction,
in an English patent, in which the seeds
are placed in a rotable vessel mounted
on a hollow shaft divided into compart-
ments by means of a partition. The sol-
vent is introduced at one end of this
shaft and passes into the vessel, which is
then made to rotate. After the extrac-
tion the bulk of the solvent and the ex-
tracted oil pass away through an exit
pipe, and steam is then introduced
through the same opening as the solvent,
in order to cook the seeds and expel the
residual solvent. The steam and the
vapors pass through perforations in a
scraper fixed to the shaft and thence
through connected pipes into the other
compartment of the shaft, the end of
which is attached to a condenser.
Silver Nitrate Test for Cottonseed
Oil. — Investigations of Charabout and
March throw some light on the value of
this test in presence of olive oil. The
free-fat acids obtained from cottonseed
oil by saponification were treated in ac-
cordance with the method of Milliau on
a water bath with a 3 per cent solution
of silver nitrate, and the brown precipi-
tate thus formed subjected to a chemical
examination. It was found to consist
chiefly of a brown silver salt composed of
a fat acid melting at 52° F., and congeal-
OILS
485
ing at 120° to 1226 F., and of sulphide of
silver. Olive oil, which contains a sul-
phur compound of an analogous com-
position, is also capable of forming a
more or less distinct precipitate of a dark
colored silver sulphide with nitrate of
silver. It is important to bear this fact
in mind when examining olive oil for
cottonseed oil.
Floral Hair Oil. —
White vaseline. . . .
Floricin, pure
Linalool rose
Terpineol
Aubepine (haw
thorne), liquid..
Floral Hair Pomade.-
White ceresine. . . .
Floricin, pure
Vanillin
Geranium oil
Isoeugenol
Floricin Brilliantine.-
5,000 parts
800 parts
60 parts
50 parts
12 parts
250 parts
1,600 parts
3 parts
5 parts
4 parts
Floricin oil 2,100 parts
White ceresine 250 parts
Ylang-ylangoil. ... 2 parts
Kananga oil 5 parts
Oil of rose, artificial 1 part
Cheirantia 5 parts
Solid Linseed Oil. — Cements for the
manufacture of linoleum and other sim-
ilar substances are composed to a large
extent of linseed oil, oxidized or poly-
merized until it has become solid. The
old process of preparing this solid oil is
tedious, costly, and invites danger from
fire. It consists in running linseed oil
over sheets of thin cloth hung from the
top of a high building. The thin layer
of oil upon the cloth dries, and then a
second layer is obtained in the same way.
This is continued until a thick skin of
solid oil is formed on either side of the
cloth. A new method of solidifying lin-
seed oil is by means of alkalies. The
drying oils, when heated with basic sub-
stances such as the alkalies, polymerize
and become solid. Hertkorn makes use
of the oxides of the alkaline earths, or
their salts with weak acids, such as their
soaps. When chalk or lime is added to
the oil during the process of oxidation,
either during the liquid or the plastic
stage, it forms a calcium soap, and causes
polymerization to set in in the partially
oxidized oil. Similarly, if caustic soda
or caustic potash be added, the action is
not caused by them in the free state, but
by the soaps which they form. Oxidized
oil is more readily saponified than raw
oil, and the greater the oxidation, the
more readily does saponification take
place. Lime soaps are not soluble in
water, whereas soda and potash soaps
are. Consequently a cement made with
the latter, if exposed to the weather,
will be acted upon by rain and moisture,
owing to the soluble soap contained in it,
while a cement made with lime will not
be acted upon. It is suggested that the
action of the bases on linseed oil is simply
due to their neutralization of the free acid.
The acidity of linseed oil increases as
it becomes oxidized. When the basic
matter is added part of the free acid is
neutralized, and polymerization sets in.
The presence of a large amount of free
acid must therefore hinder polymeriza-
tion. From 5 to 10 per cent of chalk or
lime is considered to be the amount
which gives the best result in practice.
Decolorizing or Bleaching Linseed
Oil. — Linseed oil may be bleached by the
aid of chemical bodies, the process of
oxidizing or bleaching being best per-
formed by means of peroxide of hydro-
gen. For this purpose, the linseed oil
to be bleached is mixed with 5 per cent
Eeroxide of hydrogen in a tin or glass
ottle, and the mixture is shaken re-
peatedly. After a few days have elapsed
the linseed oil is entirely bleached and
clarified, so that it can be poured off
from the peroxide of hydrogen, which
has been reduced to oxide of hydrogen,
i. e., water, by the process of oxidation.
The use of another oxidizing medium,
such as chloride of lime and hydro-
chloric acid or bichromate of calcium
and sulphuric acid, etc., cannot be rec-
ommended to the layman, as the oper-
ation requires more care and is not with-
out danger. If there is no hurry about
the preparation of bleached linseed oil,
sun bleaching seems to be the most
recommendable method. For this only
a glass bottle is required, or, better still,
a flat glass dish, of any shape, which can
be covered with a protruding piece of
glass. For the admission of air, lay
some sticks of wood over the dish and
the glass on top. The thinner the layer
of linseed oil, the quicker will be the oxi-
dation process. It is, of course, neces-
sary to place the vessel in such a manner
that it is exposed to the rays of the sun
for many hours daily.
Linseed Oil for Varnish -Making. —
Heat in a copper vessel 50 gallons Baltic
oil to 280° F., add 2| pounds calcined
white vitriol, and stir well together.
Keep the oil at the above temperature
for half an hour, then draw the fire, and
in 24 hours decant the clear oil. It
should stand for at least 4 weeks.
484
OILS
Refining Linseed Oil. — Put 236 gallons
of oil into a copper boiler, pour in 6
pounds of oil of vitriol, and stir them
together for 3 hours, then add 6 pounds
fuller's earth well mixed with 14 pounds
hot lime, and stir for 3 hours. The oil
must be put in a copper vessel with an
equal quantity of water. Now boil for
3 hours, then extinguish the fire. When
cold draw off the water. Let the mix-
ture settle for a few weeks.
MINERAL OIL :
See also Petroleum.
Production of Consistent Mineral
Oils.—
By weight
I. — Mineral oil 100 parts
Linseed oil 25 parts
Ground nut oil. ... 25 parts
Lime 10 parts
II. — Mineral oil 100 parts
Rosin oil 100 parts
Rape seed oil 50 parts
Linseed oil 75 parts
Lime 25 parts
Mixing Castor Oil with Mineral Oils. —
Castor oil is heated for 6 hours in an auto-
clave at a temperature of 500° to 575° F.,
and under a pressure of 4 to 6 atmos-
pheres. When cold the resulting product
mixes in all proportions with mineral oils.
BLEACHING OILS:
Linseed Oil or Poppy Oil. — Agitate in
a glass balloon 25,000 parts, by weight,
of oil with a solution of 50 parts, by
weight, potassium permanganate in
1,250 parts, by volume, of water. Let
stand for 24 hours at a gentle warmth
and add 75 parts, by weight, of pow-
dered sodium sulphite. Agitate strongly
and add 100 parts, by weight, of hydro-
chloric acid and again agitate. Let
stand until decolorization takes place,
then wash the oil with a sufficiency of
water, carrying in suspension chalk,
finely powdered, until the liquid no
longer has an acid reaction. Finally
filter off over anhydrous sodium sulphate.
Boiled Oil. — The following is espe-
cially adapted for zinc painting, but will
also answer for any paint: Mix 1 part
binoxide of manganese, in coarse pow-
der, but not dusty, with 10 parts nut or
linseed oil. Keep it gently heated and
frequently stirred for about 30 hours, or
until the oil begins to turn reddish.
British Oil. —
I. — Oil of turpentine. ... 40 parts
Barbadoes pitch. ... 26 parts
Oil of rosemary 1 part
Oil of origanum .... 1 part
II. — Oil of turpentine. ... 2 parts
Rape oil 20 parts
Spirit of tar 2 parts
Alkanet root, quantity sufficient.
Macerate the alkanet root in the rape
oil until the latter is colored deep red;
then strain off and add the other ingre-
dients.
Decolorizing and Deodorizing Oils. —
I. — One may partially or completely
deodorize and decolorize rank fish and
other oils by sending a current of hot air
or of steam through them, after having
heated them from 175° to 200° F. To
decolorize palm oil pass through it a
current of steam under pressure corre-
sponding to a temperature of 230° F.,
agitating the oil constantly. The vapor
is then passed through leaden tuyeres of
about 2 inches diameter, 10 hours being
sufficient for deodorizing 4 tons of oil.
II. — Another method that may be ap-
plied to almost all kinds of fats and oils
with excellent results is the following:
Melt say 112 parts, by weight, of palm
oil in a boiler. When the mass is en-
tirely liquefied add to it a solution of cal-
cium chloride, made by dissolving 7
parts, by weight, of lime chloride for
every 84 parts, by weight, of oil in water,
and mix intimately. After cooling, the
mass hardens and is cut into small bits
and exposed to the air for a few weeks.
After this exposure the material is re-
assembled in a boiler of iron, jacketed
on the inside with lead; a quantity of sul-
phuric acid diluted to 5 per cent, equal in
amount to the lime chloride previously
used, is added, and heat is applied until
the oil melts and separates from the
other substances. It is then left to cool
off and solidify.
Decomposition of Oils, Fats, etc. —
In many of the processes at present in
use, whereby oils and fats are decom-
posed by steam at a high pressure, the
time during which the oil or fat has to
be exposed to high pressure and tem-
perature has the effect of considerably
darkening the resulting product. Han-
nig's process claims to shorten the time
required, by bringing the steam and oil
into more intimate contact. The oil to
be treated is projected in fine streams
into the chamber containing steam at 8
to 10 atmospheres pressure. The streams
of oil are projected with sufficient force
to cause them to strike against the walls
of the chamber, and they are thus broken
up into minute globules which mix inti-
mately with the steam. In this way the
most satisfactory conditions for the de-
composition of the oil are obtained.
OILS
485
Driffield Oils. —
Barbadoes tar 1 ounce
Linseed oil. 16 ounces
Oil turpentine 3 ounces
Oil vitriol \ ounce
Add the oil of vitriol to the other in-
gredients very gradually, with constant
stirring.
Drying Oils. — To dry oils for varnishes,
paintings, etc., the most economical
means is to boil them with shot, to leave
them for some time in contact with
shot, or else to boil them with lith-
arge. Another method consists in boil-
ing the oils with equal parts of lead, tin,
and sulphate of zinc in the ratio of ^
part (weight) of the united metals to 1
part of oil to be treated. These metals
must be granulated, which is easily ac-
complished by melting them separately
and putting them in cold water. They
will be found at the bottom of the water
in the shape of small balls. It is in this
manner, by the way, that shot is pro-
duced.
Dust-Laying Oil. — A process has been
patented for rendering mineral oils mis-
cible in all proportions of water. The
method consists of forming an intimate
mixture of the oil with a soap which is
soluble in water. The most simple
method is as follows: The oil is placed
in a tank provided with an agitator. The
latter is set in motion and the fatty oil or
free fatty acid from which the soap is to
be formed is added, and mixed inti-
mately with the mineral oil. When the
mixture is seen to be thoroughly homo-
geneous, the alkali, in solution in water,
is added little by little and the stirring
continued until a thorough emulsion is
obtained, of which the constituents do
not separate, even after prolonged stand-
ing at ordinary temperatures. The
agitation may be produced either by a
mechanical apparatus or by forcing air
in under pressure. As a rule, the oper-
ation can be carried out in the cold, but
in certain cases the solution of the fatty
body and its saponification requires
the application of moderate heat. This
may be obtained by using either a steam-
jacketed pan, or by having the steam
coil within the pan, or live steam may
be blown through the mixture, serving at
the same time both as a heating and
stirring agent. Any fatty matter or
fatty acid suitable for soap-making may
be used, and the base may be any one
capable of forming a soluble soap, most
commonly the alkaline hydroxides,
caustic soda, and caustic potash, as also
ammonia. The raw materials are chos-
en according to the use to which the fin-
ished product is to be applied. A good
formula, suitable for preparing an oily
liquid for watering dusty roads, is as
follows:
By weight
Heavy mineral oil .... 75 parts
Commercial olein. ... 2 parts
Commercial ammonia 1.5 parts
Water 21.5 parts
Floor Oils.—
I. — Neatsfoot oil 1 part
Cottonseed oil 1 part
Petroleum oil 1 part
II. — Beeswax 8 parts
Water. 56 parts
Potassium carbonate 4 parts
Dissolve the potash in 12 parts of
water; heat together the wax and the re-
maining water till the wax is liquefied;
then mix the two and boil together until
a perfect emulsion is effected. Color, if
desired, with a solution of annatto.
Ground -Laying Oil for Ceramics. — Boi>
together until thoroughly incorporated
1 pint of linseed oil, 1 pint of dissolved
gum mastic, \ ounce of red lead, \ ounce
of rosin. In using mix with Venice
turpentine.
Oil Suitable for Use with Gold. — Heat
and incorporate linseed oil, 1 quart; rape
oil, 1 pint; Canadian balsam, 3 pints;
rectified spirits of tar, 1 quart.
Wool Oil. — These are usually pro-
duced by the distillation in retorts of
Yorkshire grease and other greases. The
distilled oil is tested for quality, and is
brought down to 70 per cent or 50 per
cent grades by the addition of a suitable
quantity of mineral oil. The lower the
quality of the grease used the lower is the
grade of the resulting wool oil.
OIL, CASTOR :
See Castor Oil.
OIL FOR FORMING A BEAD ON
LIQUORS :
See Wines and Liquors.
OILS FOR HARNESS:
See Leather.
OILS (EDIBLE), TESTS FOR:
See Foods.
OIL, HOW TO POUR OUT :
See Castor Oil.
OIL, LUBRICATING :
See Lubricants.
486
OILS— OINTMENTS
OILS, PURIFICATION OF:
See Fats.
OILCLOTH :
See Linoleum.
OILCLOTH ADHESIVES:
See Adhesives.
OILCLOTH VARNISHES :
See Varnishes.
OILING FIBERS AND FABRICS:
See Waterproofing.
OILSKINS :
See Waterproofing.
OIL REMOVERS:
See Cleaning Preparations and Meth-
ods.
OIL, SOLIDIFIED :
See Lubricants.
Ointments
Arnica Salve. —
Solid extract of arnica 2 parts
Rosin ointment 16 parts
Petrolatum 4 parts
Sultanas 16 parts
Fine cut tobacco 1 part
Boil the raisins and the tobacco in 40
ounces of water until exhausted, express
the liquid, and evaporate down to 8
ounces. Soften the arnica extract in a
little hot water and mix in the liquid.
Melt the rosin 'ointment and petrolatum
together, and add the liquid to the melted
mass and incorporate thoroughly.
Barbers' Itch.—
Ichthyol 30 grains
Salicylic acid 12 grains
Mercury oleate (10
per cent) 3 drachms
Lanolin 1 ounce
Mix. To be kept constantly applied
to the affected parts.
Brown Ointment. —
Rosin 1 ounce
Lead plaster 4 ounces
Soap cerate 8 ounces
Yellow beeswax. ... 1 ounce
Olive oil 7i fluidounces
Chilblains. — The following are for
unbroken chilblains:
I. — Sulphurous acid. ... 3 parts
Glycerine 1 part
Water 1 part
II. — Balsam Peru 1 part
Alcohol 24 parts
Hydrochloric acid.. . 1 part
Tincture benzoin
compound 8 parts
Dissolve the balsam in the alcohol,
and add the acid and tincture. Apply
morning and evening.
Domestic Ointments. —
I. — Vaseline 80 parts
Diachylon oint-
ment 30 parts
Carbolic acid 4 parts
Camphor 5 parts
II. — Butter, fresh (un-
salted) 750 parts
Wax, yellow 125 parts
Rosin, white 100 parts
Nutmeg oil 15 parts
Peru balsam 1 part
III. — Lead plaster, sim-
ple 6,090 parts
Vaseline, yellow. . 1,000 parts
Camphor 65 parts
Carbolic acid 50 parts
Mix.
Green Salve. —
White pine turpentine 8 ounces
Lard, fresh 8 ounces
Honey 4 ounces
Beeswax, yellow. .... 4 ounces
Melt, stir well, and add
Verdigris, powdered. . 4 drachms
Apply locally.
This cannot be surpassed when used
for deep wounds, as it prevents the
formation of proud flesh and keeps up a
healthy discharge.
Salve for all Wounds. —
Lard, fresh 16 ounces
White lead, dry 3 ounces
Red lead, dry 1 ounce
Beeswax, yellow 3 ounces
Black rosin 2 ounces
Mix, melt, and boil for 45 minutes,
then add
Common turpentine 4 ounces
Boil for 3 minutes and cool.
Apply locally to cuts, burns, sores,
ulcers, etc. It first draws, then heals.
Irritating Plaster. —
Tar, purified 16 ounces
Burgundy pitch 1 ounce
White pine turpentine 1 ounce
Rosin, common 2 ounces
Melt and add
Mandrake root, pow-
dered 1 drachm
Bloodroot, powdered. 1 ounce
Poke root, powdered. . 1 ounce
Indian turnip root,
powdered 1 ounce
Apply to the skin in the form of a
OINTMENTS
487
plaster (spread on muslin) and renew it
daily.
This salve will raise a sore which is to
be wiped with a dry cloth to remove mat-
ter, etc. The sore must not be wetted.
This is a powerful counter-irritant for re-
moving internal pains, and in other cases
where an irritating plaster is necessary.
Mercury Salves.— I.— Red Salve.— Red
mercury oxide, 1 part; melted lard,
9 parts.
II. — White Salve. — Mercury precipi-
tate, 1 part; melted lard, 9 parts.
Pink salve.
Ammoniated mer-
cury 1 ounce
Mercuric oxide,
precipitated.. ... 2| ounces
Red mercuric sul-
phide (vermilion) 60 grains
Perfume \ fluidounce
Lard 1£ pounds
Prepared suet \ pound
Antiseptic Nervine Ointment. —
lodoform 2 parts
Salol 4 parts
Boric acid 5 parts
Antipyrine 5 parts
Vaseline 80 parts
Photographers' Ointment. — The fol-
lowing protects the hands from photo-
graphic chemicals:
Best castile soap, in
fine shavings 1 ounce
Water 1 ounce
Wax 1 ounce
Ammonia 45 minims
Lanolin 1 ounce
The soap is dissolved in the water
heated for that purpose, the wax mixed
in with much stirring, and, when all is in
solution, the ammonia is added. When
clear, the lanolin is put in, and then, if
the mixture is very thick, water is added
until the whole has the consistency of
honey. Keep in a covered stoneware
jar. The hands should be first washed
with ordinary soap, and then, while the
lather is still on them, a bit of the mixture
about the size of a hazel nut is rubbed in
until all is absorbed, and the hands are
dry. At the close of the work, the film
of wax is washed off in warm water and
a little lanolin rubbed into the hands.
Pain-Subduing Ointment. — The fol-
lowing is an excellent formula:
Tincture of capsicum. 5 parts
Tincture of camphor. 1 part
Ammonia water 2 parts
Alcohol 2 parts
Soap liniment 2 parts
Skin Ointment. — I. — Add about 2 per
cent of phenol to petrolatum, perfuming
it with oil of bergamot and color a dull
green. It has been suggested that a
mixture of Prussian blue and yellow
ocher would answer as the coloring
agent.
II. — Phenol 40 grains
Boric acid 2 drachms
Oil of bergamot 90 minims
Petrolatum 1 pound
Color with chlorophyll.
OINTMENTS FOR VETERINARY PUR-
POSES :
See Veterinary Formulas.
OLEIN SOAP:
See Soap.
OLEOMARGARINE :
See Butter.
OLIVE-OIL PASTE:
See Butter Substitutes.
ONYX CEMENTS:
See Adhesives.
ORANGEADE :
See Beverages, under Lemonades.
ORANGE BITTERS AND CORDIAL:
See Wines and Liquors.
ORANGE DROPS:
See Confectionery.
ORANGE EXTRACT:
See Essences and Extracts.
ORANGE FRAPPE:
See Beverages, under Lemonades.
ORANGE PHOSPHATE:
See Beverages.
ORGEAT PUNCH:
See Beverages, under Lemonades.
ORTOL DEVELOPER:
See Photography.
OXIDIZING:
See Bronzing, Plating, Painting.
OXIDE, MAGNETIC:
See Rust Preventives.
OXOLIN :
See Rubber.
OZONATINE :
See Air Purifying.
PACKAGE POP:
See Beverages, under Ginger Ale.
PACKAGE WAX:
See Waxes.
488
PACKINGS— PAINTINGS
PACKINGS:
Packing for Stuffing Boxes. —
Tallow 10 parts
Barrel soap, non-filled 30 parts
Cylinder oil 10 parts
Talcum Venetian,
finely powdered.. . . 20 parts
Graphite, finely
washed 6 parts
Powdered asbestos. . . 6 parts
Melt the tallow and barrel soap to-
gether, add the other materials in rota-
tion, mix intimately in a mixing ma-
chine, and fill in 4-pound cans.
Packing for Gasoline Pumps. — For
packing pumps on gasoline engines use
asbestos wick-packing rubbed full of
regular laundry soap; it will work with-
out undue friction and will pack tightly.
Common rubber packing is not as good,
as the gasoline cuts it out.
PADS OF PAPER:
See Paper Pads.
PAIN-SUBDUING OINTMENT:
See Ointments.
PAINTING PROCESSES :
Painting Ornaments or Letters on
Cloth and Paper. — Dissolve gum shellac
in 95 per cent alcohol at the rate of 1
pound of shellac to 3 pints of alcohol, and
mix with it any dry color desired. If
it becomes too thick, thin with more
alcohol. This works free, does not
bleed out, imparts brilliancy to the color,
and wears well. The preparation can
be used also on paper.
Painting on Marble. — To paint marble
in water colors, it must be first thor-
oughly cleaned and all grease com-
pletely removed. The slab is washed
well, and then rubbed off with benzine
by means of a rag or sponge. In order
to be quite sure, add a little ox gall or
aguoline to the colors. After marble has
been painted with water colors it cannot
be polished any more.
Painting on Muslin. — To paint on
muslin requires considerable skill. Select
a smooth wall or partition, upon which
tack the muslin, drawing the fabric
taut and firm. Then make a solution
of starch and water, adding one-fourth
starch to three-fourths water, and apply
a glaze of this to the muslin. To guard
against the striking in of the paint, and
to hold it more securely in place and tex-
ture, mix the pigment with rubbing varnish
to the consistency of a stiff paste, and
then thin with turpentine to a free work-
ing condition. A double thick camel's-
hair brush, of a width to correspond
properly with the size of the surface to be
coated, is the best tool with which to coat
fine muslin. A fitch-hair tool is prob-
ably best suited to the coarser muslin.
Many painters, when about to letter on
muslin, wet the material with water; but
this method is not so reliable as sizing
with starch and water. Wetting canvas
or duck operates very successfully in
holding the paint or color in check, but
these materials should not be confounded
with muslin, which is of an entirely dif-
ferent texture.
PAINTING ON LEATHER:
See Leather.
PAINTINGS :
Protection for Oil Paintings. — Oil
paintings should under no circumstances
be varnished over before the colors are
surely and unmistakably dry, otherwise
the fissuring and early decay of the sur-
face may be anticipated. The conten-
tion of some people that oil paintings
need the protection of a coat of varnish
is based upon the claim that the picture,
unvarnished, looks dead and lusterless
in parts and glossy in still others, the
value and real beauty of the color being
thus unequally manifested. It is not to
be inferred, however, that a heavy coat-
ing of varnish is required. When it is
deemed advisable to varnish over an oil
painting the varnish should be mastic,
with perhaps 3 or 4 drops of refined lin-
seed oil added to insure against cracking.
A heavy body of varnish used over
paintings must be strictly prohibited, in-
asmuch as the varnish, as it grows in
age, naturally darkens in color, and in so
doing carries with it a decided clouding
and discoloration of the delicate pig-
ments. A thinly applied coat of mastic
varnish affords the required protection
from all sorts and conditions of atmos-
pheric impurities, besides fulfilling its
mission in other directions.
Oil paintings, aquarelles, etc., may be
also coated with a thin layer of Canada
balsam, and placed smoothly on a pane
of glass likewise coated with Canada
balsam, so that both layers of balsam
come together. Then the pictures are
pressed down from the back, to remove
all air bubbles.
To Renovate Old Oil Paintings. —
When old oil paintings have become
dark and cracked, proceed as follows:
Pour alcohol in a dish and put the pic-
ture over it, face downward. The fumes
of the alcohol dissolve the paint of the
picture, the fissures close up again, and
PAINTINGS— PAINTS
489
the color assumes a freshness which is
surprising. Great caution is absolutely
necessary, and one must look at the paint-
ing very often, otherwise it may happen
that the colors will run together or even
run off in drops.
PAINTINGS, TO CLEAN:
See Cleaning Preparations and Meth-
ods.
Paints
(See also Acid-Proofing, Ceramics,
Enamels, Fireproofing, Glazing, Painting
Processes, Pigments, Rust Preventives,
Varnishes, and Waterproofing.)
PAINT BASES:
Dry Bases for Paints. — The following
colors and minerals, mixed in the pro-
portions given and then ground to fine
powder, make excellent dry paints, and
may be thinned with turpentine oil, and
a small percentage of cheap varnish to
consistency required.
Buff.—
Yellow ocher 44 pounds
Whiting 6 pounds
Oxide of zinc 5 pounds
Plaster of Paris | pound
Brick Brown. —
Yellow ocher 26 pounds
Calcined copperas.. .. 4 pounds
Red hematite 1 J pounds
Best silica 7 pounds
Whiting 18 pounds
Gray. —
Oxide of zinc 30 pounds
White lead 6 pounds
Whiting. . 12 pounds
Bone black f pound
Yellow ocher 2 pounds
Crimson. —
Indian red 25 pounds
Crocus martis 7 pounds
Oxide of zinc 6 pounds
Whiting 6 pounds
Vandyke Brown. —
Yellow ocher 25 pounds
Whiting 18 pounds
Umber 4 pounds
Oxide of zinc 7 pounds
Purple oxide of iron . . 1 pound
Blood Red. —
Crocus martis 30 pounds
Whiting 20 pounds
Hematite 3 pounds
Silica 6 pounds
Venetian red 2 pounds
Drab.—
Yellow ocher 40 pounds
Whiting 10 pounds
Oxide of zinc 8J pounds
Sulphate of barytes.. . 1 pound
Paint for Blackboards. —
Shellac 1 pound
Alcohol 1 gallon
Lampblack (fine
quality) 4 ounces
Powdered emery 4 ounces
Ultramarine blue .... 4 ounces
Dissolve the shellac in the alcohol.
Place the lampblack, emery, and ultra-
marine blue on a cheese-cloth strainer,
pour on part of the shellac solution,
stirring constantly and gradually adding
the solution until all of the powders have
passed through the strainer.
Dark-Green Paint for Blackboards. —
Mix 1 part Prussian blue and 1 part
chrome green with equal parts of
gilders' size and alcohol to a thin cream
consistency. Apply with a large, stiff
brush and after an hour a second coat is
given. After 24 to 48 hours smooth the
surface with a felt cloth. This renders
it rich and velvety. The shade must be
a deep black green and the quantities of
the colors have to be modified accordingly
if necessary. Old blackboards should
be previously thoroughly cleaned with
soda.
BRONZING SOLUTIONS FOR PAINTS.
I. — The so-called " banana solution "
(the name being derived from its odor)
which is used in applying bronzes of
various kinds, is usually a mixture of
equal parts of amyl acetate, acetone,
and benzine, with just enough pyr-
oxyline dissolved therein to give it
body. Powdered bronze is put into a
bottle containing this mixture and the
paint so formed applied with a brush.
The thin covering of pyroxyline that is
left after the evaporation of the liquid
protects the bronze from the air and
keeps it from being wiped off by the
cleanly housemaid. Tarnished picture
frames and tarnished chandeliers to
which a gold bronze has been applied
from such a solution will look fresh and
new for a long time. Copper bronze as
well as gold bronze and the various col-
ored bronze powders can be used in the
"banana solution" for making very
pretty advertising signs for use in the
drug store. Lettering and bordering
work upon the signs can be done with it.
Several very small, stiff painters' brushes
are needed for such work and they must
490
PAINTS
be either kept in the solution when not in
use, or, better still, washed in benzine or
acetone immediately after use and put
away for future service. As the "banana
solution" is volatile, it must be kept well
corked.
II. — A good bronzing solution for paint
tins, applied by dipping, is made by dis-
solving Syrian asphaltum in spirits of
turpentine, etc., and thinning it down
with these solvents to the proper bronze
color and consistency. A little good
boiled oil will increase the adherence.
Paint Brushes. — To soften a hard
paint brush, stand the brush overnight in
a pot of soft soap and clean in warm
water. Afterwards clean in benzine. If
the brush is wrapped with a string do
not let the string touch the soap.
Paint brushes which have dried up as
hard as stone can be cleaned in the fol-
lowing manner: Dissolve 1 part soda
in 3 parts water; pour the solution in a
cylinder glass, and suspend in it the
brushes to be cleaned, so that they are
about 2 inches from the bottom of the
vessel. Let it remain undisturbed at a
temperature of 140° to 158° F., 12 to 24
hours, after which the most indurated
brushes will have become soft, so that
they can be readily cleaned with soap.
It is essential, however, to observe the
temperature, as bristle brushes will be
injured and spoiled if the heat is greater.
Black. — A Permanent Black of Rich
Luster for Metal Boxes. — Dissolve
chlorate of potassium and blue vitriol,
equal parts, in 36 times as much water,
and allow the solution to cool. The
parts to be blacked may be either dipped
in the solution, or the solution may be
flowed on and allowed to remain until
the metal becomes black, after which the
fixtures should be rinsed in clean water
and allowed to dry. Those parts of the
surface which show imperfections in the
black should be recoated.
Dead White on Silver Work, etc.—
Bruise charcoal very finely and mix it
with calcined borax in the proportion of
4 parts of charcoal to 1 of borax. Of
this make a paste with water; apply this
paste on the parts to be deadened; next
expose the piece to the fire of well-lit coal
until it acquires a cherry-red shade;
allow to cool and then place it in water
slightly acidulated with sulphuric acid.
The bath must not be more than 5° Be.
Leave the piece in the bath about 2
hours, then rinse off several times.
White 'Coating for Signs, etc. — A
white color for signs and articles exposed
to the air is prepared as follows for the
last coat: Thin so-called Dutch "stand"
oil with oil of turpentine to working
consistency, and grind in it equal parts of
zinc white and white lead, not adding
much siccative, as the white lead assists
the drying considerably. If the paint is
smoothed well with a badger brush, a
very durable white color of great gloss is
obtained. Linseed oil, or varnish which
has thickened like "stand" oil by long
open storing, will answer equally well.
To Prevent Crawling of Paints. —
Probably the best method to pursue
will be to take an ordinary flannel rag
and carefully rub it over the work pre-
vious to varnishing, striping, or painting.
This simple operation will obviate the
possibility of crawling.
In some instances, however, crawling
may be traced to a defective varnish.
The latter, after drying evenly on a well-
prepared paint surface will at times
crawl, leaving small pitmarks. For this,
the simple remedy consists in purchasing
varnish from a reputable manufacturer.
FIREPROOF PAINTS:
See also Fireproofing.
Fireproofing paints of effective quality
are prepared in different ways. Natu-
rally no oily or greasy substances enter
into their composition, the blending agent
being simply water.
I. — One of the standing paints con-
sists of 40 pounds of powdered asbestos,
10 pounds of aluminate of soda, 10
pounds of lime, and 30 pounds of silicate
of soda, with the addition of any non-
rosinous coloring matter desired. The
whole is thoroughly mixed with enough
water to produce a perfect blend and
render an easy application. Two or
more coats of this is the rule in applying
it to any wood surface, inside or outside
of building.
II. — Another formula involves the use
of 40 pounds of finely ground glass, a
like amount of ground porcelain, and
similarly of China clay or the same quan-
tity of powdered asbestos, and 20 pounds
of quicklime. These materials are
ground very fine and then mixed in 60
pounds of liquid silicate of soda with
water, as in the preceding formula. Two
or more coats, if necessary, are given.
Each of these paints is applied with a
.brush in the ordinary way, the drying
being accomplished in a few hours, and,
if coloring matter is desired, the above
proportions are varied accordingly.
III. — A surface coated with 3 coats of
water glass, these 3 coats being subse-
PAINTS
491
quently coated with water glass con-
taining enough whiting or ground chalk
to make it a trifle thicker than ordinary
paint, is practically non-inflammable,
only yielding to fierce consuming flames
after a somewhat protracted exposure.
IV. — Zinc white, 70 pounds; air-
slaked lime, 39 pounds; white lead, 50
pounds; sulphate of zinc, 10 pounds;
silicate of soda, 7 gallons. The zinc
white and lime are mixed together, then
ground in elastic oil, after which the sili-
cate of soda is added, this addition being
followed by the white lead and sulphate
of zinc. This white paint can be colored
to meet any desired shade and it may be
classed as a good working paint and
probably fireproof to the same extent
that most of the pretentiously sounded
pigments on the markets are.
Fireproof and Waterproof Paints. —
The following recipes are claimed to
resist both fire and water: A prepara-
tion for protecting wood against the ac-
tion of fire and of moisture, and also for
producing on the surface of wood and
metal a coat, insulating with reference to
electricity and preservative from corro-
sion, has been introduced in France
by Louis Bethisy and Myrthil Rose.
The bases or fundamental raw materials
quite distinct from those hitherto em-
ployed for the same purpose, are 100
parts, by weight, of nitro-cellulose and 30
parts, by weight, of chloride of lime, dis-
solved in 50 per cent alcohol.
Preparation of the Bases. — The cellu-
lose (of wood, paper, cotton, linen, ramie,
or hemp) is put in contact with two-
thirds part of sulphuric acid of 66° Be.
and one-third part of nitric acid of 42° Be.
for some 20 or 30 minutes, washed with
plenty of water, and kept for 24 hours in
a tank of water supplied with an ener-
getic current.
The nitro-cellulose thus obtained is
bleached for this purpose; a double hypo-
chlorite of aluminum and magnesium is
employed. This is obtained by grinding
together 100 parts of chloride of lime, 60
parts of aluminum sulphate, 23 parts of
magnesium sulphate, with 200 parts of
water.
When the nitro-cellulose is bleached
and rewashed, it is reduced to powder
and dried as thoroughly as possible. It
is then placed in a vat hermetically closed
and put in contact with the indicated
proportion of calcium chloride dissolved
in alcohol. This solution of calcium
chloride should be prepared at least
24 hours in advance and filtered.
Composition of the Coating. — This
has the following constituents: Bases
(nitro-cellulose and solution of calcium
chloride), 1 part; amyl acetate (solvent
of the bases), 5 parts, by weight; sul-
phuric ether of 65°, 1.650 parts, by
weight; alcohol, 0.850 parts, by weight;
one of these powders, alum, talc, as-
bestos, or mica, 0.100 parts. Other sol-
vents may be employed instead of amyl
acetate; for example, acetone, acetic acid,
ether alcohol, or methylic alcohol. The
ether alcohol furnishes a product drying
very quickly. If a very pliant coating
is desired, the amyl acetate is employed
preferably, with addition of vaseline oil,
0.20 parts, and lavender oil, 0.010 parts.
Method of Operating. — The sulphuric
acid is mixed with the alcohol, and left
for an hour in contact, shaking from
time to time. Afterwards the amyl ace-
tate is added, and left in contact for an-
other hour under similar agitation. In
case of the employment of vaseline oil
and lavender oil, these two are mingled
in ether alcohol. The base is introduced
and left in contact for 24 hours, with
frequent agitation. The fluidity of the
product is augmented by increasing the
quantity of the solvent.
Properties. — Wood covered with this
coating is fireproof, non-hygrometric,
and refractory to the electric current. It
also resists the action of acids and alka-
lies. Metals covered with it are shel-
tered from oxidation, and effectually
insulated on their surface from the elec-
tric current. The coating is liquid in
form, and applied like collodions, either
by the brush or by immersion or other
suitable method.
Paint Deadening. — In order to obtain
an even dullness of large walls, proceed
as follows: After all the dirt has been
carefully swept off, oil with 2 parts
linseed oil and 1 part turpentine and rub
down the smooth places in the wet oil
with pumice stone. When the oil coat-
ing is dry, mix the ground paint, con-
sisting of whiting, 2 parts; and white
lead, 1 part; both finely ground and
diluted as above. Do not apply the
grounding too thin, because the chalk in
itself possesses little covering power. It
is not the mission of the chalk, however,
to adulterate the material, but to afford a
hard foundation for the subsequent
coats. For the third coating take white
lead, 1 part; and zinc white, 1 part; thin
as above and blend with a soft hair pencil.
For the final application use only zinc
white, ground stiff in oil with any de-
sired mixing color and thinned with
turpentine and rain water. Mix the
492
PAINTS
water and the turpentine with the color
at the same time, and this coat may be
dabbed instead of blended. By the ad-
dition of water the paint becomes dull
more slowly and is a little more difficult
to lay on; but it does not show a trace of
gloss after a few days and never turns
yellow, even in places less exposed to the
air, and besides excels by great perma-
nency.
Another way is to add white wax in-
stead of water to the last coating. This
wax paint also gives a handsome dullness
but is more difficult of treatment. A
nice matt coating is also obtained by
addition of Venetian soap, dissolved in
water instead of the wax. This is very
desirable for church decorations where
exceptionally large surfaces are to be
deadened.
PAINT DRYERS:
I. — Ordinary barytes. . .
Whiting
Litharge
Sulphate of zinc ....
Sugar of lead
Boiled linseed oil. . . .
Plaster of Paris
II.— Whiting
Barytes
White lead
Boiled linseed oil. . . £ gallon
PAINTS FOR GOLD AND GILDING:
Gold Paints. — The formulas of the
various gold paints on the market are
carefully guarded trade secrets. Essen-
tially they consist of a/ bronze powder
mixed with a varnish. The best bronze
powder for the purpose is what is known
m the trade as "French flake," a deep
gold bronze. This bronze, as seen under
the microscope, consists of tiny flakes or
spangles of the bronze metal. As each
minute flake forms a facet for the re-
flection of color, the paint made with it
is much more brilliant than that prepared
from finely powdered bronze.
For making gold paint like the so-
called " washable gold enamel " that is
sold by the manufacturers at the present
time, it is necessary to mix a celluloid
varnish with the French flake bronze
powder. This varnish is made by dis-
solving transparent celluloid in amyl
acetate in the proportion of about 5 per
cent of celluloid.
Transparent cellu-
loid, finely shred-
ded 1 ounce
Acetone, sufficient quantity.
Amyl acetate to make 20 ounces.
25
4
2
2
2
5
16
16
3
pounds
pounds
pounds
pounds
pounds
pounds
pound
pounds
pounds
pounds
Digest the celluloid in the acetone until
dissolved and add the amyl acetate.
From 1 to 4 ounces of flake bronze is to
be mixed with this quantity of varnish.
For silver paint or "aluminum enamel,"
flake aluminum bronze powder should
be used in place of the gold. The cellu-
loid varnish incloses the bronze particles
in an impervious coating, air-tight and
water-tight. As it contains nothing that
will act upon the bronze, the latter re-
tains its luster for a long period, until
the varnished surface becomes worn or
abraded and the bronze thus exposed to
atmospheric action.
All of the "gold" or, more properly,
gilt furniture that is sold so cheaply by
the furniture and department stores is
gilded with a paint of this kind, and for
that reason such furniture can be offered
at a moderate price. The finish is sur-
prisingly durable, and in color and luster
is a very close imitation of real gold-leaf
work. This paint is also used on picture
frames of cheap and medium grades, tak-
ing the place of gold leaf or the lacquered
silver leaf formerly used on articles of the
better grades; it is also substituted for
"Dutch metal," or imitation gold leaf, on
the cheapest class of work.
A cheaper gold paint is made by using
an inexpensive varnish composed of
gutta percha, gum dammar, or some
other varnish gum, dissolved in benzole,
or in a mixture of benzole and benzine.
The paints made with a celluloid-amyl-
acetate varnish give off a strong banana-
like odor when applied, and may be read-
ily recognized by this characteristic.
The impalpably powdered bronzes
are called "lining" bronzes. They are
chiefly used for striping or lining by car-
riage painters; in bronzing gas fixtures
and metal work; in fresco and other in-
terior decoration, and in printing; the
use of a very fine powder in inks or paints
admits of the drawing or printing of very
delicate lines.
Lining bronze is also used on picture
frames or other plastic ornamental work.
Mixed with a thin weak glue sizing it is
applied over "burnishing clay," and
when dry is polished with agate bur-
nishers. The object thus treated, after
receiving a finishing coat of a thin trans-
parent varnish, imitates very closely in
appearance a piece of finely cast antique
bronze. To add still more to this effect
the burnishing clay is colored the green-
ish black that is seen in the deep parts
of real antique bronzes, and the bronze
powder, mixed with size, is applied only
to the most prominent parts or "high
lights" of the ornament.
PAINTS
493
Since the discovery of the celluloid-
amyl-acetate varnish, or bronze liquid,
and its preservative properties on bronze
powders, manufacturers have discon-
tinued the use of liquids containing oils,
turpentine, or gums, since their constitu-
ents corrode the bronze metal, causing
the paint finally to turn black.
Gilding in Size. — The old painters and
gilders used to prepare the gold size
themselves, but nowadays it is usually
bought ready made, barring the white of
egg additional. The best and most
reliable, and especially suited for fine
work, is undoubtedly the red French
gold size. It is cleaned, as far as pos-
sible, of all impurities, and powdered.
For 246 grains take 1 white of egg; put it
into a glass, taking care to exclude the
yolk entirely — otherwise the burnish will
show black spots. Beat the white of egg
to a froth with a long, well-cleaned bristle
brush; add the froth to the size and grind
finely together, which is soon done.
When grinding, a little water and red
size, if necessary, may be added (use
only water for thinning). After being
ground, the size is forced through a very
fine hair sieve into a perfectly clean
vessel, and covered up well, for imme-
diate or subsequent use.
The raw stuff of the red size is bolus,
which is dug in France and Armenia in
excellent quality. Besides the red size
there are yellow, white (pipe clay), blue,
and gray (alumina), which are used for
certain purposes, to enumerate which
here would lead too far.
For burnish gold, always take yellow
size for ground work. Dip a finely
ground bristle brush in the gold size pre-
pared for use; fill a well-cleaned glass
(holding 1 pint) half full of water, and
add the size contained in the brush, also
about 4 to 5 spoonfuls of pure alcohol.
It is advisable not to take too much size;
the liquid, when applied, must hardly
have a yellow tint. When this is dry
soon after, commence applying the size,
for which a hair pencil is used. The
essentials are to paint evenly and not too
thickly, so that the tone remains uniform.
Apply three coats of size.
When the size is laid on correctly and
has become dry, brush the whole with
a special brush, or rub with a flannel rag,
so as to obtain the highest possible luster.
The size must not stand too long; other-
wise no gloss can be developed. After
brushing, coat the work with weak glue
water and wrap it up in tissue paper if
the gilding is not to be done at once.
The strictest cleanliness is essential, as
the red gold size is very sensitive. The
parts where the size has been applied
must not be touched with the hand, else
grease spots will ensue, which will make
a flawless gloss in gilding impossible.
The least relaxation of the necessary
attention may spoil the whole job, so that
everything has to be ground off again.
The necessary tools for the application
of gold leaf are: Hair pencils of various
sizes, tip, cushion, and gilding knife, as
"with oil-gilding. Take pure alcohol or
grain brandy, and dilute with two-thirds
water. When ready to apply the gold
leaf, dip a hair pencil of suitable size into
the fluid, but do not have it full enough
that the alcohol will run on the size
ground. Moisten a portion of the
ground surface as large as the gold leaf,
which is laid on immediately after.
Proceed in the same manner, first mois-
tening, then applying the ready-cut gold
leaf. The latter must not be pressed on,
but merely laid down lightly, one leaf a
little over the edge of the previous one,
without using up too much gold. Tech-
nical practice in gold-leaf gilding is
presupposed; through this alone can any
skill be acquired, reading being of no
avail.
The leaf of gold being applied, all dust
must be swept off by means of a light,
fine hair pencil (but never against the
overlapping edges), and the burnishing
is commenced. For this purpose there
are special agate tools of the shape of a
horn. Flint stone, blood stone, and
wolf's teeth are sometimes, but gradually
more seldom, employed. Burnish till a
full, fine luster appears; but very care-
fully avoid dents and lines, not to speak
of scratches, which would be very hard
to mend.
Gold Enamel Paints. —
I. — Pure turps 6 pints
Copal varnish 1 pint
Good gold bronze. . . 6£ pounds
Calcis hydrate (dry-
slaked lime) \ ounce
Mix the varnish and turps at a gentle
heat, then slake well with the lime, and
settle for a few days, then pour off the
clean portion and mix with the powder.
II. — White hard varnish . 1 gallon
Methylated spirit. . . f gallon
Gold bronze 12 pounds
Finely powdered
mica 3 ounces
Mix the varnish and the spirit, reduce
the mica to an impalpable powder, mix
with the gold, then add to the liquid.
Many bronze powders contain a goodly
494
PAINTS
proportion of mica, as it imparts bril-
liancy. Powdered mother-of-pearl is
used also.
GRAINING WITH PAINT:
See also Wood.
Oak Graining. — Prepare a paint of
two-thirds of white lead and one-third of
golden ocher with the requisite amount
of boiled linseed oil and a little drier,
and cover the floor twice with this mix-
ture, which possesses great covering
power. When the last coating is dry,
paint the floor with a thinly liquid paint
consisting of varnish and sienna, apply-
ing the same in the longitudinal direc-
tion of the boards. Treat a strip about
20 inches wide at a time, and draw at
once a broad paint brush or, in the ab-
sence of such, an ordinary brush or
goose feather along the planks through
the wet paint, whereupon the floor will
acquire a nicely grained appearance.
The paint requires several days to dry.
A subsequent coating of varnish will
cause the graining to stand out still more
prominently.
Birch. — Imitations of birch are use-
fully employed for furniture. The
ground should be a light, clean buff,
made from white lead, stainecWivith
either yellow ocher or raw sienna BH oil.
In graining, brush over the surface with
a thin wash of warm brown, making
the panel of 2 or 3 broad color shades.
Then take a large mottler and mottle the
darker parts into the light, working
slantwise, as for maple, but leaving a
broad and stiff mark. While this is still
wet soften the panel and then slightly
mottle across the previous work to break
it up. When thoroughly dry, carefully
wet the work over with clean water and
clean mottler, and put in darker over-
grain with a thin oak overgrainer or
overgrainer in tubes.
Maple. — Sixty pounds white lead; 1
ounce deep vermilion; 1 ounce lemon
chrome.
Ash. — Sixty pounds white lead; 1
ounce deep vermilion; 1 ounce lemon
chrome.
Medium Oak. — Sixty pounds white
lead; 2 pounds French ocher; 1 ounce
burnt umber.
Light Oak. — Sixty pounds white lead;
1 ounce lemon chrome; \ pound French
ocher.
Dark Oak. — Sixty pounds white lead;
10 pounds burnt umber; \\ pounds
medium Venetian red.
Satin Wood. — Sixty pounds white
lead; 1 ounce deep vermilion; \\ pounds
lemon chrome.
Pollard Oak. — Seventy-five pounds
white lead; 20 pounds French ocher; 3
pounds burnt umber; 2A pounds medium
Venetian red.
Pitch Pine. — Sixty pounds white lead;
\ pound French ocher; \ pound medium
Venetian red.
Knotted Oak. — Sixty pounds white
lead; 9 pounds French ocher; 3J pounds
burnt umber.
Italian Walnut. — Sixty pounds white
lead; 6 pounds French ocher; 1^ pounds
burnt umber; 1| pounds medium Vene-
tian red.
Rosewood. — Nine and one-half pounds
burnt umber; 40 pounds mediimi Venetian
red; 10 pounds orange chrome.
Dark Mahogany. — Nine and one-half
pounds burnt umber; 40 pounds medium
Venetian red; 10 pounds orange chrome.
Light Mahogany. — Sixty pounds white
lead; 3 pounds burnt umber; 10 pounds
medium Venetian red.
American Walnut. — Thirty pounds
white lead; 9 pounds French ocher;
4 pounds burnt umber; 1 pound medium
Venetian red.
LUMINOUS PAINTS.
The illuminating power of the phos-
phorescent masses obtained by heating
strontium thiosulphate or barium thio-
sulphate is considerably increased by the
addition, before heating, of small quan-
tities of the nitrates of uranium, bismuth,
or thorium. Added to calcium thio-
sulphate, these nitrates do not heighten
the luminosity or phosphorescence.
The product from strontium thiosul-
phate is more luminous than that of the
barium compound. Among the best
luminous paints are the following:
I. — Lennord's. — One hundred parts,
by weight, of strontium carbonate; 100
parts, by weight, of sulphur; 0.5 parts,
by weight, of potassium chloride; 0.5
parts, by weight, of sodium chloride;
0.4 parts, by weight, of manganese
chloride. The materials are heated for
three-quarters of an hour to one hour,
to about 2,372° F. The product gives
a violet light.
II. — Mourel's. — One hundred parts, by
weight, of strontium carbonate; 30 parts,
by weight, of sulphur; 2 parts by weight,
of sodium carbonate; 0.5 parts, by weight,
of sodium chloride: 0.2 parts, by weight,
of manganese sulphate. The method of
treatment is the same as in the first, the
phosphorescence deep yellow.
PAINTS
III. — Vanino's. — Sixty parts, by weight,
of strontium thiosulphate; 12 parts, by
weight, of a 0.5 per cent acidified alco-
holic solution of bismuth nitrate; 6 parts,
by weight, of a 0.5 per cent alcoholic solu-
tion of uranium nitrate. The materials
are mixed, dried, brought gradually to a
temperature of 2,372° F., and heated for
about an hour. The phosphorescence is
emerald green.
IV. — Balmain's. — Twenty parts, by
weight, of calcium oxide (burnt lime),
free from iron; 6 parts, by weight, of sul-
phur; 2 parts, by weight, of starch; 1
part, by weight, of a 0.5 per cent solution
of bismuth nitrate; 0.15 parts, by weight,
of potassium chloride; 0.15 parts, by
weight, of sodium chloride. The materi-
als are mixed, dried, and heated to 1,300°
C. (2,372° P.). The product gives a vio-
let light.
To make these phosphorescent sub-
stances effective, they are exposed for a
time to direct sunlight; or a mercury
lamp may be used. Powerful incandes-
cent gas light also does well, but requires
more time.
PAINTS FOR METAL SURFACES:
Blackening Ornaments of Iron. — I. —
To give iron ornaments a black-brown
to black color, proceed in the following
manner: The articles are treated with
corrosives, cleaned of all adhering grease,
and placed in a 10 per cent solution of
potassium bichromate, dried in the air,
and finally held over an open, well-glow-
ing, non-sooting fire for 2 minutes. The
first coloring is usually black brown, but
if this process is repeated several times,
a pure mack shade is obtained. Special
attention has to be paid to removing all
grease, otherwise the greasy spots will
not be touched by the liquid, and the
coloring produced will become irregular.
Benzine is employed for that purpose
and the articles must not be touched with
the fingers afterwards.
II. — This process protects the iron
from rust for a long time. The treat-
ment consists in coating the objects very
uniformly with a thin layer of linseed-oil
varnish, and burning it off over a char-
coal fire. During the deflagration the
draught must be stopped. The varnish
will first go up in smoke with a strong
formation of soot, and finally burn up
entirely. The process is repeated, i. e.,
after one coating is burned off a new one
is applied, until the parts exhibit a uni-
formly handsome, deep - black color.
Next, wipe off the covering with a dry
rag and heat again, but only moder-
ately. Finally, the articles are taken
from the fire and rubbed with a rag well
saturated with linseed-oil varnish. The
black turns completely dull, and forms a
real durable covering for the objects.
Black for Polished Iron Pieces. — Apply
successive layers of a very concentrated
solution of nitrate of manganese dis-
solved in alcohol over a gentle fire and
the water bath. The surfaces to be
blackened should be previously heated.
By repeating the layers all the tints be-
tween brownish black and bluish black
may be obtained.
Glossy Black for Bicycles, etc.—
Amber ,8 ounces
Linseed oil 4 ounces
Asphaltum 1A ounces
Rosin 1| ounces
Oil turpentine 8 ounces
Heat the linseed oil to boiling point,
add the amber, asphaltum, and rosin,
and when all melted remove from the fire
and gradually add the turpentine.
Japan Black. — The following is a
good japan black for metal surfaces:
Take 12 ounces of amber and 2 ounces
of asphaltum. Fuse by heat, and add
$ pjtfp boiled oil and 2 ounces of rosin.
Wnen cooling add 16 ounces of oil of
turpentine.
Brass and Bronze Protective Paint. —
As a protective covering, especially for
brass and bronze objects, a colorless
celluloid solution is recommended, such
as is found in trade under the name of
"Zapon" (q. v.).
Paint for Copper. — Dissolve 1 ounce of
alum in 1 quart of warm soft water.
When cold add flour to make it about
the consistency of cream, then add £
thimble of rosin and £ ounce of sugar of
lead.
Priming Iron. — The following, if care-
fully carried out, gives the best satis-
faction: The first step consists in thor-
oughly cleaning the surface of the iron,
removing all adhesions in the way of
dirt, rust, etc., before the question of
priming is considered. As paint in this
instance is applied more with a view of
protecting the iron from atmospheric
influences, rather than for a decorative
effect, careful attention should be de-
voted for securing a base or surface
which is calculated to produce a thorough
and permanent application. A great
deal depends upon the nature of the
metal to be painted. Common cast iron,
for instance, possessing a rough exterior,
496
PAINTS
with ordinary precautions can be more
readily painted with the prospect of a
permanent adhesion of the paint, than a
planed steel or wrought-iron surface.
With the latter it has been demonstrated
that a hard and elastic paint is needed,
while with regard to cast iron, other
paints containing iron oxides are more
suitable. For good drying and covering
properties, as well as elasticity, a good
boiled oil to which has been added an
adequate proportion of red lead will be
found to form an excellent paint for
smooth metal surfaces. The primary
object is to protect the surface of the iron
from moisture for the purpose of avoid-
ing rust. The priming must therefore
be carried out so that it will stick, after
which subsequent coats may be added if
desired.
It is advisable that articles made of
iron should first be coated with linseed-
oil varnish. It dries slowly, hardens,
and enables the operator afterwards to
exercise an effective control over the con-
dition of his material. Iron must be
absolutely dry and free from rust when
it is to be painted. It is best to apply
next a coating of hot linseed oil; when
dry this should be followed by a priming
of pure red lead in good linseed oil, and
the iron should then be painted as de-
sired, using ground oil paints and leav-
ing an interval of a week between each
coating. Cementing should be done
after the red lead priming, but the last
coat must not be given until the whole is
thoroughly dry. Bright oil paints and
an upper coating with plenty of oil resist
the effects of heat better than thin coat-
ings; moreover, rust can be detected in
its early stages with the former. Coat-
ings of tar and asphalt (asphalt dissolved
in turpentine) are practicable for under-
ground pipes, but are not adapted for
pipes exposed to the air, as they are
quickly spoiled. Asphalt varnish, used
for coating coal scuttles, fire screens, etc.,
consists of asphalt dissolved in linseed-
oil varnish. Iron stoves and stovepipes
are best coated with graphite.
Galvanized Iron. — For galvanized iron
there has been recommended a wash
consisting simply of dilute hydrochloric
acid, which produces chloride of zinc,
that in combination with the oxygen of
the air is said to produce a film upon
which oil color takes as good a hola as
it would upon ordinary sheet iron.
Another method which has been
tested and found effective is to make a
solution as follows: One ounce of chlo-
ride of copper; 1 ounce nitrate of copper;
1 ounce sal ammoniac, dissolved in 2
quarts of soft water, to which is added
1 ounce of crude or commercial hydro-
chloric acid. This solution should be
made in an earthenware dish or pot, or
in gKss or stoneware, as tin will precipi-
tate the copper salts and make the solu-
tion imperfect. To large surfaces this
solution is applied with a broad brush,
when the surface assumes a deep black
color, which in drying out in from 12 to
24 hours becomes a gray white, upon
which the properly prepared primer will
take a permanent grip. On the film so
produced a much thinner paint will
coyer very much better than a stouter
paint would on the untreated galvanized
or ordinary iron surface. A single trial
will convince the craftsman that this
treatment is a method that will give
lasting results, provided he tries the same
priming paint on the treated and un-
treated surface.
To Paint Wrought Iron with Graphite.
— In order to make wrought iron look
like new mix fine graphite with equal
parts of varnish and turpentine oil, add-
ing a little siccative. Paint the iron
parts with this twice, allowing to dry
each time. Especially the second coat-
ing must be perfectly dry before further
treatment. The latter consists in pre-
paring graphite with spirit and applying
it very thinly over the first coat. After
the drying or evaporation of the spirit
the graphite last applied is brushed
vigorously, whereby a handsome, dura-
ble gloss is produced.
Paint for Iron Bodies Exposed to
Heat. — Dilute 1 part soda water glass
with 2 parts water and mix intimately
with the following pigments:
White.— White lead or sulphate of
barium.
Yellow. — Chromate of barium, ocher,
or uranium yellow.
Green. — Chromic oxide or ultramarine
green.
Blue. — Ultramarine.
Brown. — Oxide of cadmium, oxide of
manganese or terra di sienna.
Red. — English red or chrome red.
Bronze powder in a suitable quantity
may be added to the mixture, but not
more paint should be prepared than can
be uSted up in a few hours. The bronze
powder may also be strewn on the fresh
paint, or applied with a dry brush, to
enhance the gloss. This paint is not
affected by heat, and is inodorous.
Protective Coating for Bright Iron
Articles. — Zinc white, 30 parts; lamp-
PAINTS
497
black, 2 parts; tallow, 7 parts; vaseline,
1 part; olive oil, 3 parts; varnish, 1 part.
Boil together £ hour and add \ part of
benzine and \ part of turpentine, stirring
the mass carefully and boiling for some
time. The finished paste-like substance
can be readily removed with a rag with-
out the use of solvents.
Rust Paints. — I. — A new rust paint is
produced by the following process: Mix
100 parts dry iron sulphate and 87 parts
sodium chlorate and heat to 1,500° to
1,800° F. The chlorine set free seems
to have a very favorable action on the
color of the simultaneously forming iron
oxide. In order to avoid, however, too
far-reaching an effect of the chlorine gas,
about 18 pounds of a substance which
absorbs the same mechanically, such as
kaolin, ground pumice stone, ocher,
etc., are added to the mixture.
II. — A material known under the
names of lardite, steatite, agalmatolite,
pagodite, is excellently adapted as a sub-
stitute for the ordinary metallic protec-
tive agent of the pigments and has the
property of protecting iron from rust in
an effective manner. In China, lardite
is used for protecting edifices of sand-
stone, which crumbles under the action
of the atmosphere. Likewise a thin
layer of powdered steatite, applied in the
form of paint, has been found valuable
there as a protector against the decay of
obelisks, statues, etc. Lardite, besides,
possesses the quality of being exceedingly
fine-grained, which renders this material
valuable for use in ship painting.
Ground steatite is one of the finest ma-
terials which can be produced, and no
other so quickly and firmly adheres to the
fibers of iron and steel. Furthermore,
steatite is lighter than metallic covering
agents, and covers, mixed in paint, a
larger surface than zinc white, red lead,
or iron oxide. Steatite as it occurs in
Switzerland is used there and in the
Tyrol for stoves, since it is fireproof.
Steel. — An excellent coating for steel,
imitating the blue color of natural steel,
is composed of white shellac, 5 parts;
borax, 1 part; alcohol, 5 parts; water, 4
parts; and a sufficient quantity of methy-
lene blue. The borax is dissolved in
water, the shellac in alcohol. The
aqueous solution of the borax is heated
to a boil antt the alcoholic solution of the
shellac is added with constant stirring.
Next add the blue color, continuing to
stir. Before this coating is applied to
the steel, e. g., the spokes of a bicycle,
the latter are first rubbed off with fine
emery paper. The coat is put on with
a soft rag. The quantity of pigment to
be added is very small. By varying the
quantity a paler or darker coloring of the
steel can be produced.
PAINTS FOR ROOFS AND ROOF
PAPER:
Carbolineum. — This German prepar-
ation is made in three colors.
I. — Pale. — Melt together in an iron
kettle, over a naked fire, 30 parts of
American rosin F and 150 parts of pale
paraffine oil and stir in 10 parts of single
rectified rosin oil.
II.— Dark.— Melt 100 parts of an-
thracene oil and 20 parts of American
rosin F on a slow fire. Next stir in 2
parts of Para rubber solution (or solution
of caoutchouc waste) and keep on boil-
ing until all is dissolved. When this is
done there should be still added 5 parts
of crude concentrated carbolic acid and
5 parts of zinc chloride lye, 50° Be., stir-
ring until cool. The last-named ad-
mixture is not absolutely necessary, but
highly advisable, owing to its extraor-
dinary preservative and bactericidal
properties.
III.— Colored.— For red, melt 100
parts of coal-tar oil, then stir in 50 parts
of pale paraffine oil, and finally 75 parts
of bole or iron minium, and pass through
the paint mill. Although the addition of
iron minium is very desirable, it is con-
siderably more expensive. For gray,
proceed as above, with the exception
that metallic gray is used in place of the
bole. For green, metallic green is em-
ployed. The colors are identical with
those used in the manufacture of roof
varnish. To increase the antiseptic
properties of the colored carbolineum,
any desired additions of phenol or zinc
chloride solutions may be made, but the
chief requirement in the case of colored
carbolineum is good covering power of
he coating.
Paints for Roofs Covered with Tar
Paper, for Roofing Paper, etc. —
I. — Distilled coal tar. ... 70 parts
Heavy mineral oil
(lubricating oil) . . 10 parts
American rosin 20 parts
II. — Distilled coal tar. ... 50 parts
Trinidad asphalt. . . 15 parts
Mineral oil, contain-
ing paraffine 10 parts
Dry clay, finely
ground 25 parts
Imitation Oil Paint. — Schulz's German
patent paint is cheap, and claimed to be
498
PAINTS
durable, weatherproof, and glossy, like
oil paint. The application consists of a
ground coat, upon which the surface
coat proper is applied after the former is
dry. For the preparation of the ground-
ing dissolve 1,000 parts, by weight,
of Marseilles soap in 10,000 parts of
boiling water and stir. In a separate
vessel dissolve 2,000 parts of glue in
10,000 parts of boiling water, adding
17,500 parts of spirit of sal ammoniac.
These two solutions are poured to-
gether and well stirred. Then dis-
solve 400 parts of chrome alum in 5,000
parts of water, and pour into the above
mixture. To this mixture add 10,000
parts of pipe clay, stirring the whole well
and tinting with earth colors, ocher,
Vandyke brown, etc. The solid ingre-
dients'must be dissolved in boiling hot
water, and sifted so as to obtain a finely
divided ground color. This priming is
applied in a warm state. The coating
proper is put on the ground coat after it
is dry, in about one-half to one hour.
For this coat dissolve 2,000 parts of crys-
tallized alum in 10,000 parts of boiling
water and add to this liquid a solution of
2,000 parts of glue in 10,000 parts of
water; in a special vessel prepare soap-
suds of 1,000 parts of Marseilles soap in
12,000 parts of boiling water; dissolve
120 parts of chrome alum in 1,500 parts
of boiling water, and mix the three solu-
tions together with diligent stirring. This
paint or liquid should also be put on hot,
and assures a durable exterior paint.
PAINTS, STAINS, ETC., FOR SHIPS.
Anti -Fouling Composition. — Make an
agglutinant by heating together
By weight
White lead, ground in
oil 2 parts
Red lead, dry 1 part
Raw 'inseed oil 14 parts
While hot stir in yellow ocher, kao-
lin, baked clay in powder, or any inert
body, such as silica, barytes, gypsum, etc.,
to form a stiff dough, and, without allow-
ing this compound to become cold (the
vessel should not be removed from the
source of heat), dilute with more or less
manganese linoleate to the required
consistency.
Marine Paint to Resist Sea Water. —
First prepare the water- resisting agglu-
tinant by heating together
Drv white lead, car-
bonate only 1 part
Litharge ... 1 part
Linseed oil (fluid
measure) 14 parts
Heat these and stir until of the con-
sistency of thick glue, and for every 36
parts, by weight, of this compound add
3 parts, by weight, of turpentine, and 1
part, by weight, of mastic varnish (mas-
tic rosin dissolved in turpentine) ; reheat
the whole, and for every 32 parts, by
weight, stir in and mix the following:
Baked and powdered
clay 4 parts
Portland cement 16 parts
Zinc white 1 part
Red lead 1 part
After well mixing, dilute with more or
less turpentine (not exceeding 25 per
cent of the whole), or linoleate of man-
ganese, the latter being preferable, as
it has greater binding power. For col-
ored paints use red oxide of iron or green
oxide of chrome, but do not use chrome
green or lead, as they will not stand the
action of the sea water.
Compositions for Ships' Bottoms. —
Green.
Pale rosin 25 pounds
Prepared mineral
green 8 pounds
D. L. zinc. . . .. 13 pounds
Boiled oil 2 pounds
Mineral naphtha. .. 1 gallon
Petroleum spirit 1£ gallons
Prepared Mineral Green.
Dry levigated min-
eral green 28 pounds
Turpentine 7 pounds
Turpentine varnish . 7 pounds
Refined linseed oil . . 7 pounds
Copper Color.
Pale rosin 25 pounds
Light Italian ocher. . 15 pounds
D. L. zinc 5 pounds
Turkey red paint. . . $ pound ,
Petroleum spirit. ... l| pounds
Mineral naphtha. .. 1 pound
Pink.
Pale rosin 25 pounds
D. L. zinc 16 pounds
Deep vermilion 7 pounds
Mineral naphtha. .. 1 gallon
Petroleum spirit. ... 1^ gallons
PAINTS FOR WALLS OF CEMENT,
PLASTER, HARD FINISH, ETC.
Coating for Bathrooms. ^- As a rule
cement plastering, as well as oil paint,
suffices for the protection of walls and
ceilings in bathrooms, but attention
must be called to the destructive action
of medicinal admixtures. For such
rooms as well as for laboratories, an
PAINTS
499
application of Swedish wood tar, made
into a flowing consistency with a little
oil of turpentine and put on hot, has
been found very excellent. It is of
advantage previously to warm the wall
slightly. To the second coat add some
wax. A very durable coating is ob-
tained, which looks so pleasing that it is
only necessary to draw some stripes with
a darker paint so as to divide the surface
into fields.
Cement, to Paint Over Fresh. — The
wall should be washed with dilute sul-
phuric acid several days before painting.
This will change the surplus caustic lime
to sulphate of lime or gypsum. The
acid should be about one-half chamber
acid and one-half water. This should be
repeated before painting, and a coat of
raw linseed oil flowed on freely should
be given for the first coat. While this
cannot be always guaranteed as effectual
for making the paint hold, it is the best
method our correspondent has heard of
for the purpose, and is worth trying when
it is absolutely necessary to paint over
fresh cement.
Damp Walls, Coating for. — Thirty
parts of tin are dissolved in 40 parts of
hydrochloric acid, and 30 parts of sal
ammoniac are added. A powder com-
posed of freestone, 50 parts; zinc oxide,
20 parts; pounded glass, 15 parts; pow-
dered marble, 10 parts; and calcined
magnesia, 5 parts, is prepared, and made
into a paste with the liquid above men-
tioned. Coloring matter may be added.
The composition may be used as a
damp-proof coating for walls, or for
repairing stonework, or for molding
statues or ornaments.
Facade Paint. — For this zinc oxide is
especially adapted, prepared with size
or casein. Any desired earth colors may
also be added. The surfaces are coated
3 times with this mass. After the third
application is dry, put on a single coat-
ing of zinc chloride solution of 30° Be.
to which 3 per cent borax is added.
This coating is very solid, can be
washed, and is not injured by hydrogen
sulphide.
Hard -Finished Walls.— The treatment
for hard-finished walls which are to be
painted in flat colors is to prime with a
thin coat of lead and oil well brushed
into the wall. Next put on a thin coat of
glue size; next a coat mixed with ^ oil
and f turpentine; next a coat of flat
paint mixed with turpentine. If you use
any dry pigment mix it stiff in oil and
thin with turps. If in either case the
paint dries too fast, and is liable to show
laps, put a little glycerine in, to retard
the drying.
PAINTS, WATERPROOF AND
WEATHERPROOF:
See also Fireproof Paint.
The following are claimed to be both
waterproof and weatherproof:
I. — In 50 parts, by weight, of spirit
of 96 per cent, dissolve 16 parts, by
weight, of shellac, orange, finely pow-
dered; 3 parts", by weight, of silver lake,
finely powdered; and 0.6 parts, by
weight, of gamboge, finely powdered.
This paint may be employed without ad-
mixture of any siccative, and is excel-
lently adapted for painting objects which
are exposed to the inclemencies of the
weather, as it is perfectly weatherproof. *
II. — Mix glue water with zinc oxide
(zinc white) and paint the respective
object with this mixture. When this is
dry (after about 2 hours) it is followed
up with a coating of glue water and zinc
chloride in a highly diluted state. Zinc
oxide enters into a chemical combination
with zinc chloride, which acquires the
hardness of glass and a mirror-like
bright surface. Any desired colors can
be prepared with the glue water (size)
and are practically imperishable. This
zinc coating is very durable, dries quick-
ly, and is 50 per cent cheaper than oil
paint.
Water- and Acid -Resisting Paint. —
Caoutchouc is melted with colophony at
a low temperature, after the caoutchouc
has been dried in a drying closet (stove)
at 158° to 176° F., until no more con-
siderable increase in weight is percepti-
ble, while the colophony has completely
lost its moisture by repeated melting.
The raw products thus prepared will
readily melt upon slight heating. To
the melted colophony and caoutchouc
add in a hot liquid state zinc white or any
similar pigment. Thin with a varnish
consisting of 50 parts of perfectly an-
hydrous colophony, 40 parts of absolute
alcohol, and 40 parts of benzine. The
whole syrupy mass is worked through in
a paint mill to obtain a uniform product,
at which operation more or less colo-
Shony varnish is added according to the
esired consistency.
Water- and Air -Proof Paint. — An air-
proof and waterproof paint, the subject
of a recent French patent, is a compound
of 30 parts, by weight, acetone; 100
parts acetic ether; 50 parts sulphuric
ether; 100 parts camphor; 50 parts gum
lac; 200 parts cotton; 100 parts paper
500
PAINTS
(dissolved in sulphuric acid); 100 parts
mastic in drops. These proportions
may fluctuate according to need. The
paper is reduced well and dissolved with-
out heat with sufficient sulphuric ether;
the cotton is dissolved in the acetone and
the whole is mixed together with the
other ingredients and stirred well. The
application is performed as with any
other varnish. The coating is said not
to crack or shrink and to be particularly
useful as a protection against moisture
for all stuffs.
PAINTS FOR WOOD:
See also Wood.
Floor Coating. — A new paint for floors,
especially those of soft wood: Mix to-
gether 2.2 pounds joiners' glue; a little
over 1 ounce powdered bichromate of
potash; 3 \ ounces aniline brown; and
10 \ quarts water in a tin vessel. After
6 hours have elapsed (when the glue is
completely soaked), heat gradually to
the boiling point. The coating becomes
perfectly water-tight after 2 or 3 days; it
is not opaque, as the earthy body is lack-
ing. The glue causes the wood fibers
to be firmly united. It becomes in-
soluble by the addition of bichromate
of potash, under the influence of light.
Without this admixture a simple glue
coat has formerly not been found satis-
factory, as it dissolves if cleaned with
water.
Durable House Paint. — I. — New
houses should be primed once with pure
linseed oil, then painted with a thin
paint from white lead and chalk, and
thus gradually covered. The last coat
is prepared of well-boiled varnish, white
lead, and chalk. The chalk has the
mission to moderate the saponification
of the linseed oil by the white lead.
Mixing colors such as ocher and black,
which take up plenty of oil, materially
assist in producing a durable covering.
II. — Prime with zinc white and let
this be succeeded by a coating with zinc
chloride in glue water (size). The zinc
oxide forms with the zinc chloride an
oxy-chloride of great hardness and
glossy surface.' By admixture of pig-
ments any desired shade may be pro-
duced. The zinc coating is indestruc-
tible, dries quickly, does not peel, is free
from the smell of fresh oil paint, and
more than 5 per cent cheaper.
Ivory Coating for Smooth, Li^ht Wood.
— In order to cover the articles, which
may be flat or round, with this coating,
they must first be polished quite smooth
and clean; then they are coated with
thin, hot, white glue. When the coat is
thoroughly dry, the glue is rubbed off
again witn fine glass paper. The mass
is prepared as follows: Take 3 pounds
(more or less, according to the number
of articles) of the purest and best collo-
dion; grind upon a clean grinding stone
twice the quantity that can be taken up
with the point of a knife of Krems white,
with enough good pale linseed oil as is
necessary to grind tne white smooth and
fine. Take a clean bottle, into which
one-half of the collodion is poured; to
this add the ground white, which can be
removed clean from the stone by means
of a good spatula and put in the bottle.
Add about 100 drops of linseed oil, and
shake the mass till it looks like milk.
Now painting with this milky sub-
stance may be commenced, using a fine
hair pencil of excellent quality. The
pencil is not dipped in the large bottle;
but a glass is kept at hand with an open-
ing of abput 1 inch, so as to be able to
immerse the pencil quickly. The sub-
stance is not flowing like the alcohol
lacquers, for which reason it may be put
on thick, for the ether, chiefly consti-
tuting the mass, evaporates at once and
leaves but a very thin film which becomes
noticeable only after about 10 such
applications have been made. Shake
the bottle well each time before filling
the small glass, as the heavy Krems
white is very apt to sink to the bottom of
the bottle. If it is observed that the
substance becomes too thick, which may
easily occur on account of the evapora-
tion, a part of the remaining ether is
added, to which in turn 30 to 40 drops
of oil are added, shaking it till the oil
appears to be completely dissolved.
The operator must put on the mass
in quick succession and rather thick.
After about 10 coats have been applied
the work is allowed to rest several hours;
then 3 or 4 coats of pure collodion, to
which likewise several drops of oil have
been added, are given. Another pause
of several hours having been allowed to
intervene, application of the mass is once
more begun.
When it is noticed that a layer of the
thickness of paper has formed, the arti-
cles, after drying thoroughly, should be
softly rubbed off with very fine glass
paper, after which they require to be
wiped off well with a clean linen rag, so
that no dust remains. Then coating is
continued till the work seems serviceable.
A few applications of pure collodion
should be made, and when this has
become perfectly hard, after a few
hours, it can be rubbed down with a rag,
PAINTS
501
tripoli, and oil, and polished by hand,
like horn or ivory. This work can be
done only in a room which is entirely free
from dust. The greatest cleanliness
must be observed.
MISCELLANEOUS RECIPES. PAINTS,
ETC.:
Bathtub Paint. — Take white keg lead,
tint to any desired color and then add,
say, £ boiled oil (pure linseed) to £ hard
drying durable body varnish. Clean the
surface of the tub thoroughly before ap-
plying the paint. Benzine or lime wash
are good cleaning agents. Coat up un-
til a satisfactorily strong, pure color is
reached. This will give good gloss and
will also wear durably.
Coating for Name Plates. — A durable
coating for name plates in nurseries is
produced as follows: Take a woolen rag,
saturate it with joiners' polish, lay it
into a linen one, and rub the wooden sur-
face with this for some time. Rub down
with sandpaper and it can be written on
almost like paper. When all is dry,
coat with dammar lacquer for better
protection. If the wood is to receive a
color it is placed in the woolen rag before
rubbing down, in this case chrome
yellow.
To Keep Flies from Fresh Paint. — For
the purpose of keeping flies and other
insects away from freshly painted sur-
faces mix a little bay oil (laurel oil) with
the oil paint, or place a receptacle con-
taining same in the vicinity of the painted
objects. The pungent odor keeps off
the flies.
Heat -Indicating Paint. — A heat-indi-
cating paint composed of a double iodide
of copper arid mercury was first dis-
covered years ago by a German physi-
cist. At ordinary temperatures the
paint is red, but when heated to 206° F.
it turns black. Paper painted with this
composition and warmed at a stove ex-
hibits the change in a few seconds. A
yellow double iodide of silver and mer-
cury is even more sensitive to heat,
changing from yellow to dark red.
To Keep Liquid Paint in Workable
Condition. — To prevent liquid paint
which, for convenience sake, is kept in
small quantities and flat receptacles,
from evaporating and drying, give the
vessels such a shape that they can be
placed one on top of the other without
danger "of falling over, and provide the
under side with a porous mass — felt or
very porous clay, etc. — which, if mois-
tened, will retain the water for a long
time. Thus, in placing the dishes one
on top of the other, a moist atmosphere is
created around them, which will inhibit
evaporation and drying of the paint. A
similar idea consists in producing covers
with a tight outside and porous inside,
for the purpose of covering up, during
intermission in the work, clay models
and like objects which it is desired to
keep soft. In order to avoid the forma-
tion of fungous growth on the constantly
wet bottom, it may be saturated with
non-volatile disinfectants, or with vola-
tile ones if their vapors are calculated to
act upon the objects kept underneath the
cover. If the cover is used to cover up
oil paints, it is moistened on the inside
with volatile oil, such as oil of turpentine,
oil of lavender, or with alcohol.
Peeling of Paints. — For the preven-
tion of peeling of new coatings on old oil
paintings or lakes, the latter should be
rubbed with roughly ground pumice
stone, wet by means of felt rags, and to
the first new coat there should be added
fine spirit in the proportion of about
-iV of the thinning necessary for stir-
ring (turpentine, oil, etc.). This paint
dries well and has given good results,
even in the most difficult cases. The
subsequent coatings are put on with the
customary paint. Fat oil glazes for
graining are likewise mixed with spirit,
whereby the cracking of the varnish
coating is usually entirely obviated.
Polychroming of Figures. — This paint
consists of white wax, 1 part, and pow-
dered mastic, 1 part, melted together
upon the water bath and mixed with
rectified turpentine. The colors to be
used are first ground stiffly in turpentine
on the grinding slab, and worked into
consistency with the above solution.
Priming Coat for Water Spots. — A very
simple way to remove rain spots, or
such caused by water soaking through
ceilings, has been employed with good
results. Take unslaked white lime,
dilute with alcohol, and paint the spots
with it. When the spots are dry — which
ensues quickly, as the alcohol evaporates
and the lime forms a sort of insulating
layer — one can proceed painting with
size color, and the spots will not show
through again.
PAINT FOR PROTECTING CEMENT
AGAINST ACID:
See Acid-Proofing.
PAINT, GREASE:
See Cosmetics.
508
PAINTS— PAPER
PAINT REMOVERS:
See Cleaning Compounds.
PALLADIUM ALLOYS:
See Alloys.
PALLADIUMIZING:
See Plating.
PALMS, THEIR CARE.
Instead of washing the leaves of palms
with water, many florists employ a mix-
ture of milk and water, the object being
to prevent the formation of disfiguring
brown stains.
Paper
Paper Pads (see also Adhesives, under
Glue).
I. — Glue 3J ounces
Glycerine 8 ounces
Water, a sufficient quantity.
Pour upon the glue more than enough
water to cover it and let stand for several
hours, then decant the greater portion of
the water; apply heat until the glue is
dissolved, and add the glycerine. If the
mixture is too thick, add more water.
II. — Glue 6 ounces
Alum 30 grains
Acetic acid $ ounce
Alcohol l| ounces
Water 6£ ounces
Mix all but the alcohol, digest on a
water bath till the glue is dissolved, allow
to cool, and add the alcohol.
Papier Mache". — The following are the
ingredients necessary to make a lump of
papier mache a little larger than an ordi-
nary baseball and weighing 17 ounces:
Wet paper pulp, dry paper, 1 ounce;
water, 3 ounces; 4 ounces (avoirdupois);
dry plaster Paris, 8 ounces (avoirdupois);
hot glue, \ gill, or 44 tablespoonfuls.
While the paper pulp is being pre-
pared, melt some best Irish glue in the
glue pot and make it of the same thick-
ness and general consistency as that used
by cabinet makers. On taking the paper
pulp from the water squeeze it gently,
but do not try to dry it. Put in a
bowl, add about 3 tablespoonfuls of
the hot glue, and stir the mass up into a
soft and very sticky paste. Add the
plaster of Paris and mix thoroughly.
By the time about 3 ounces of the
plaster have been used, the mass is so dry
and thick that it can hardly be workea.
Add the remainder of the glue, work
it up again until it becomes sticky once
more, and then add the remainder of
the plaster. Squeeze it vigorously through
the fingers to thoroughly mix the mass,
and work it until free from lumps,
finely kneaded and sticky enough to ad-
here to the surface of a planed board.
If it is too dry to stick fast add a few
drops of either glue or water, and work
it up again. When the paper pulp is
poor and the mache is inclined to be
lumpy, lay the mass upon a smooth
bo.ard, take a hammer and pound it hard
to grind it up fine.
If the papier mache is not sticky enough
to adhere firmly to whatever it is rubbed
upon, it is a failure, and requires more
glue. In using it the mass should be
kept ifi a lump and used as soon as
possible after making. Keep the sur-
face of the lump moist by means of a wet
cloth laid over it, for if you do not, the
surface will dry rapidly. If it is to be
kept overnight, or longer, wrap it up in
several thicknesses of wet cotton cloth,
and put under an inverted bowl. If it
is desired, to keep a lump for a week, to
use daily, add a few drops of glycerine
when making, so that it will dry more
slowly.
The papier mache made according to
this formula has the following qualities:
When tested by rubbing between the
thumb and finger, it was sticky and cov-
ered the " thumb with a fine coating.
(Had it left the thumb clean, it would
have been because it contained too
much water.) When rubbed upon a
pane of glass it sticks tightly and dries
hard in 3 hours without cracking, and
can only be removed with a knife.
When spread in a layer as thin as writiag
paper it dries in half an hour. A mass
actually used dried hard enough to coat
with wax in 18 hours, and, without
cracking, became as hard as wood; yet
a similar quantity wrapped in a wet cloth
and placed under an inverted bowl kept
soft and fit for use for an entire week.
Parchment Paper. — I. — Dip white un-
sized paper for half a minute in strong
sulphuric acid, specific gravity, 1.842,
and afterwards in water containing a
little ammonia.
II. — Plunge unsized paper for a few
seconds into sulphuric acid diluted with
half to a quarter its bulk of water (this
solution being of the same temperature
as the air), and afterwards wash with
weak ammonia.
Razor Paper. — I. — Smooth unsized
paper, one of the surfaces of which,
while in a slightly damp state, has been
rubbed over with a mixture of calcined
peroxide of iron and emery, both in im-
palpable powder. It is cut up into
PAPER
503
pieces (about 5x3 inches), and sold in
packets. Used to wipe the razor on,
which thus does not require stropping.
II. — From emery and quartz (both in
impalpable powder), and paper pulp
(estimated in the dry state), equal parts,
made into sheets of the thickness of
drawing paper, by the ordinary process.
For use, a piece is pasted on the strop
and moistened with a little oil.
Safety Paper. — White paper pulp
mixed with an equal quantity of pulp
tinged with any stain easily affected by
chlorine, acids, alkalies, etc., and made
into sheets as usual, serves as a" safety
paper on which to write checks or the
like. Any attempt to wash out the writ-
ing affects the whole surface, showing
plainly that it has been tampered with.
Tracing Paper. — Open a quire of
smooth-, unsized white paper, and place
it flat upon a table. Apply, with a clean
sash tool to the upper surface of the first
sheet, a coat of varnish made of equal
parts of Canada balsam and oil of tur-
pentine, and hang the prepared sheet
across the line to dry; repeat the opera-
tion on fresh sheets until the proper
quantity is finished. If not sufficiently
transparent, a second coat of varnish
may be applied as soon as the first has
become quite dry.
Strengthened Filter Paper. — When or-
dinary filter paper is dipped into nitric
acid (specific gravity, 1.42), thoroughly
washed and dried, it becomes a tissue of
remarkable properties, and one that de-
serves to be better known by chemists
and pharmacists. It shrinks somewhat
in size and in weight, and gives, on burn-
ing, a diminished ash. It yields no ni-
trogen, nor does it in the slightest man-
ner affect liquids. It remains perfectly
pervious to liquids, its filtering properties
being in no wise affected, which, it is
needless to say, is very different from
the behavior of the same paper "parch-
mented" by sulphuric acid. It is as
supple as a rag, yet may be very roughly
handled, even when wet, without tearing
or giving way. These qualities make it
very valuable for use in filtration under
pressure or exhaust. It fits closely to the
funnel, upon which it may be used direct,
without any supports, and it thus pre-
vents undue access of air. As to strength,
it is increased upward of 10 times. A
strip of ordinary white Swedish paper,
i of an inch wide, will sustain a load of
from | to | of a pound avoirdupois, ac-
cording to the quality of the paper. A
similar strip of the toughened paper
broke, in 3 trials, with 5 pounds, 7 ounces,
and 3 drachms; 5 pounds, 4 ounces, and
36 grains; and 5 pounds, 10 ounces re-
spectively. These are facts that deserve
to be better known than they seem to be
to the profession at large.
Blotting Paper. — A new blotting paper
which will completely remove wet as
well as dry ink spots, after moistening the
paper with water, is produced as follows:
Dissolve 100 parts of oxalic acid in 400
parts of alcohol, and immerse porous
white paper in this solution until it is
completely saturated. Next hang the
sheets up separately to dry over threads.
Such paper affords great advantages,
but in its characteristic application is
serviceable for ferric inks only, while
aniline ink spots cannot be removed with
it, after drying.
Carbon Paper. — Many copying papers
act by virtue of a detachable pigment,
which, when the pigmented paper is
placed between two sheets of white paper,
and when the uppermost paper is writ-
ten on, transfers its pigment to the lower
white sheet along lines which correspond
to those traced on the upper paper, and
therefore gives an exact copy of them on
the lower paper.
The pigments used are fine soot or
ivory black, indigo carmine, ultramarine,
and Paris blue, or mixtures of them.
The pigment is intimately mixed with
grain soap, and then rubbed on to thin
but strong paper with a stiff brush.
Fatty oils, such as linseed or castor oil,
may be used, but the grain soap is pref-
erable. Graphite is frequently used
for black copying paper. It is rubbed
into the paper with a cotton pad until a
uniform light-gray color results. All
superfluous graphite is then carefully
brushed off.
It is sometimes desired to make a copy-
ing paper which will produce at the same
time a positive copy, which is not required
to be reproduced, and a negative or re-
versed copy from which a number of
direct copies can be taken. Such paper
is covered on one side with a manifolding
composition, and on the other with a
simple copying composition, and is used
between 2 sheets of paper with the mani-
folding side undermost.
The manifolding composition is made
by mixing 5 ounces of printers' ink with
40 of spirits of turpentine, and then mix-
ing it with a fused mixture of 40 ounces
of tallow and 5 ounces of stearine. When
the mass is homogeneous, 30 ounces of
the finest powdered protoxide of iron,
first mixed with 15 ounces of pyrogallic
504
PAPER
acid and 5 ounces of gallic acid, are
stirred in till a perfect mixture is ob-
tained. This mass will give at least 50
copies on damp paper in the ordinary
way. The copying composition for the
other side of the prepared paper consists
of the following ingredients:
Printers' ink 5 parts
Spirits of turpentine. 40 parts
Fused tallow 30 parts
Fused wax 3 parts
Fused rosin 2 parts
Soot 20 parts
It goes without saying that rollers or
stones or other hard materials may be
used for the purpose under consideration
as well as paper. The manifolding
mass may be made blue with indigotin,
red with magenta, or violet with methyl
violet, adding 30 ounces of the chosen
dye to the above quantities of pigment.
If, however, they are used, the oxide of
iron and gallic acids must be replaced by
20 ounces of carbonate of magnesia.
Celloidin Paper. — Ordinary polished
celluloid and celloidin paper are dif-
ficult to write upon with pen and ink.
If, however, the face is rubbed over with
a chalk crayon, and the dust wiped off
with a clean rag, writing becomes easy.
Cloth Paper. — This is prepared by
covering gauze, calico, canvas, etc., with
a surface of paper pulp in a Foudrinier
machine, and then finishing the com-
pound sheet in a nearly similar manner
to that adopted for ordinary paper.
Drawing Paper. — The blue drawing
paper of commerce, which is frequently
employed for technical drawings, is not
very durable. For the production of a
serviceable and strong drawing paper,
the following process is recommended.
Mix a solution of
Gum arabic 2 parts
Ammonia iron citrate. 3 parts
Tartaric acid 2 parts
Distilled water 20 parts
After still adding 4 parts of solution of
ammonia with a solution of
Potassium ferri cyanide 2.5 parts
Distilled water 10.0 parts
allow the mixture to stand in the dark
half an hour. Apply the preparation on
the paper by means of a soft brush, in ar-
tificial light, and dry in the dark. Next,
expose the paper to light until it appears
dark violet, place in water for 10 seconds,
air a short time, wash with water, and
finally dip in a solution of
Eau de javelle 50 parts
Distilled water 1,000 parts
until it turns dark blue.
Filter Paper. — This process consists in
dipping the paper in nitric acid of 1.433
specific gravity, subsequently washing it
well and drying it. The paper there-
by acquires advantageous qualities. It
shrinks a little and loses in weight, while
on burning only a small quantity of ash
remains. It possesses no traces of nitro-
gen and does not in any way attack the
liquid to be filtered. Withal, this paper
remains perfectly pervious for the most
varying liquids, and its filtering capacity
is in no wise impaired. It is difficult to
tear, and still elastic and flexible like
linen. It clings completely to the funnel.
In general it may be said that the
strength of the filtering paper thus
treated increases 100 per cent.
Fireproof Papers. — I. — Ammonium
sulphate, 8 parts, by weight; boracic
acid, 3 parts; borax, 2 parts; water, 100
parts. The temperature should be about
122° F.
II. — For paper, either printed or un-
printed, bills of exchange, deeds, books,
etc., the following solution is recom-
mended: Ammonium sulphate, 8 parts;
boracic acid, 3 parts; sodium borate,
1.7 parts; water, 10,000 parts. The so-
lution is heated to 122° F., and may be
used when the paper is manufactured.
As soon as the paper leaves the machine
it is passed through this solution, then
rolled over a warm cylinder and dried.
If printed or in sheets, it is simply im-
mersed in the solution, at a temperature
of 122° F., and spread out to dry, finally
pressed to restore the luster.
Hydrographic Paper. — This is paper
which may be written on with simple
water or with some colorless liquid hav-
ing the appearance of water.
I. — A mixture of nut galls, 4 parts, and
calcined sulphate of iron, 1 part (both
perfectly dry and reduced to very fine
powder), is rubbed over the surface of
the paper, and is then forced into its
pores by powerful pressure, after which
the loose portion is brushed off. The
writing shows black when a pen dipped
in water is used.
II. — A mixture of persulphate of iron
and ferrocyanide of potassium may be
employed as in formula I. This writes
blue.
Iridescent Paper. — Sal ammoniac and
sulphate of indigo, of each 1 part;
sulphate of iron, 5 parts; nut galls, 8
parts; gum arabic, | part. Boil them in
water, and expose the paper washed
with the liquia to (the fumes of) am-
monia.
PAPER
505
Lithographic Paper. — I. — Starch, 6
ounces; gum arable, 2 ounces; alum, 1
ounce. Make a strong solution of each
separately, in hot water, mix, strain
through gauze, and apply it while still
warm to one side of leaves of paper, with
a clean painting brush or sponge; a sec-
ond and a third coat must be given as
the preceding one becomes dry. The
paper must be, lastly, pressed, to make
it smooth.
II. — Give the paper 3 coats of thin
size, 1 coat of good white starch, and 1
coat of a solution of gamboge in water,
the whole to be applied cold, with a
sponge, and each coat to be allowed to
dry before the other is applied. The
solutions should be freshly made.
Lithographic paper is written on with
lithographic ink. The writing is trans-
ferred simply by moistening the back of
the paper, placing it evenly on the stone,
and then applying pressure. A reversed
copy is obtained, which, when printed
from, yields corrected copies resembling
the original writing or drawing. In this
way the necessity of executing the writ-
ing or drawing in a reversed direction is
obviated.
MARBLING PAPER FOR BOOKS.
Provide a wooden trough 2 inches deep
and the length and width of any desired
sheet; boil in a brass or copper pan a
quantity of linseed and water until a
thick mucilage is formed; strain it into
a trough, and let cool; then grind on a
marble slab any of the following colors
in small beer:
For Blue. — Prussian blue or indigo.
Red. — Rose pink, vermilion, or drop
lake.
Yellow. — King's yellow, yellow ocher,
etc.
White. — Flake white.
Black. — Burnt ivory or lampblack.
Brown. — Umber, burnt; terra di
sienna, burnt.
Black mixed with yellow or red also
makes brown.
Green. — Blue and yellow mixed.
Orange. — Red and yellow mixed.
Purple. — Red and blue mixed.
For each color have two cups, one for
the color after grinding, the other to mix
it with ox gall, which must be used to
thin the colors at discretion. If too
much gall is used, the colors will spread.
When they keep their place on the sur-
face of the trough, when moved with a
quill, they are fit for use. All things in
readiness, the colors are successively
sprinkled on the surface of the mucilage
in the trough with a brush, and are waved
or drawn about with a quill or a stick,
according to taste. When the design is
just formed, the book, tied tightly be-
tween cutting boards of the same size, is
lightly pressed with its edge on the sur-
face of the liquid pattern, and then with-
drawn and dried. The covers may be
marbled in the same way, only letting the
liquid colors run over them. In mar-
bling paper the sides of the paper are gent-
ly applied to the colors in the trough.
The film of color in the trough may be as
thin as possible, and if any remains after
the marbling it may be taken off by ap-
plying paper to it before you prepare
for marbling again. To diversify the
effects, colors are often mixed with a
little sweet oil before sprinkling them on,
by which means a light halo or circle
appears around each spot.
WATERPROOF PAPERS.
I. — Wall papers may be easily ren-
dered washable, either before or after
they are hung, by preparing them in the
following manner: Dissolve 2 parts of
borax and 2 parts of shellac in 24 parts
of water, and strain through a fine cloth.
With a brush or a sponge apply this to
the surface of the paper, and when it is
dry, polish it to a high gloss with a soft
brush. Thus treated the paper may be
washed without fear of removing the
colors or even smearing or blurring
them.
II. — This is recommended for drawing
paper. Any kind of paper is lightly primed
with glue or a suitable binder, to which a
finely powdered inorganic body, such as
zinc white, chalk, lime, or heavy spar, as
well as the desired coloring matter for the
paper, are added. Next the paper thus
treated is coated with soluble glass —
silicate of potash or of soda — to which
small amounts 01 magnesia have been
admixed, or else it is dipped into this
mixture, and dried for about 10 days in
a temperature of 77° F. Paper thus
prepared can be written or drawn upon
with lead pencil, chalk, colored crayons,
charcoal, India ink, and lithographic
crayon, and the writing or drawing may
be washed off 20 or more times, entirely
or partly, without changing the paper
materially. It offers the convenience
that anything may be readily and quickly
removed with a moist sponge and imme-
diately corrected, since the washed places
can be worked on again at once.
Wax Paper. — I. — Place cartridge paper
or strong writing paper, on a not iron
506
PAPER
plate, and rub it well with a lump of
beeswax. Used to form extempora-
neous steam or gas pipes, to cover the
joints of vessels, and to tie over pots, etc.
II. — For the production of waxed or
ceresine paper, saturate ordinary paper
with equal parts of stearine and tallow or
ceresine. If it is desired to apply a
business stamp on the paper before sat-
uration and after stamping, it should be
dried well for 24 hours, so as to prevent
the aniline color from spreading.
Wrapping Paper for Silverware. —
Make a solution of 6 parts of sodium
hydrate in sufficient water to make it
show about 20° B. (specific gravity, 1.60).
To it add 4 parts zinc oxide, and boil
together until the latter is dissolved.
Now add sufficient water to reduce the
specific gravity of the solution to 1.075
(10° B.). The bath is now ready for
use. Dip each sheet separately, and
hang on threads stretched across the
room, to dry. Be on your guard against
dust, as particles of sand adhering to the
paper will scratch the ware wrapped in it.
Ware, either plated or silver, wrapped in
this paper, will not blacken.
Varnished Paper. — Before proceeding
to varnish paper, card-work, pasteboard,
etc., it is necessary to give it 2 or 3 coats
of size, to prevent the absorption of the
varnish, and any injury to the color or
design. The size may be made by dis-
solving a little isinglass in boiling water,
or by boiling some clean parchment cut-
tings until they form a clear solution.
This, after being strained through a
piece of clean muslin, or, for very nice
purposes, clarified with a little white
of egg, is applied by means of a small
clean brush called by painters a sash
tool. A light, delicate touch must be
adopted, especially for the first coat, lest
the ink or colors be started or smothered.
When the prepared surface is quite dry
it may be varnished.
Impregnation of Papers with Zapon
Varnish. — For the protection of impor-
tant papers against the destructive in-
fluences of the atmosphere, of water
fungi, and light, but especially against
the consequences of the process of
molding, a process has been introduced
under the name of zapon impregnation.
The zaponizing may be carried out by
dipping the papers in zapon or by coating
them with it by means of a brush or pen-
cil. Sometimes the purpose may also be
reached by dripping or sprinkling it on,
but in the majority of cases a painting
of the sheets will be the simplest method.
Zapon in a liquid state is highly in-
flammable, for wnich reason during the
application until the evaporation of the
solvent, open flames and fires should be
kept away from the vicinity. When the
drying is finished, which usually takes a
few hours where both sides are coated,
the zaponized paper does not so easily
ignite at an open flame any more or at
least not more readily than non-im-
pregnated paper. For coating with and
especially for dipping in zapon, a con-
trivance which effects a convenient sus-
pension and dripping off with collection
of the excess is of advantage.
The zapon should be thinned accord-
ing to the material to be treated. Fee-
bly sized papers are coated with ordinary,
i. e., undiluted zapon. For dipping pur-
poses, the zapon should be mixed with a
diluent, if the paper is hard and well
sized. The weaker the sizing, the more
careful should be the selection of the
zapon.
Zapon to be used for coating purposes
should be particularly thick, so that it
can be thinned as desired. Unsized
papers require an undiluted coating.
The thick variety also furnishes an
excellent adhesive agent as cement for
wood, glass, porcelain, and metals
which is insoluble in cold and hot water,
and binds very firmly. Metallic sur-
faces coated with zapon do not oxidize or
alter their appearance, since the coating
is like glass and only forms a very thin
but firmly adhering film, which, if ap-
plied on pliable sheet metal, does not
crack on bending.
For the preparation of zapon the fol-
lowing directions are given: Pour 20
parts of acetone over 2 parts of colorless
celluloid waste — obtainable at the cellu-
loid factories — and let stand several days
in a closed vessel, shaking frequently,
until the whole has dissolved into a clear,
thick mass. Next admix 78 parts of amyl
acetate and completely clarify the zapon
varnish by allowing to settle forweeks.
Slate Parchment. — Soak good paper
with linseed-oil varnish (boiled oil) and
apply the following mass, mentioned be-
low, several times in succession: Copal
varnish, 1 part, by weight; turpentine
oil, 2 parts; finest sprinkling sand, 1 part;
powdered glass, 1 part; ground slate as
used for slates, 2 parts; and lampblack,
1 part, intimately mixed together, and
repeatedly ground very fine. After
drying and hardening, the plates can be
written upon with lead or slate pencils.
Paper Floor Covering. — The floor is
carefully cleaned, and all holes and
PAPER— PARAFFINE
507
cracks are filled up with a mass which
is prepared by saturating newspapers
with a paste that is made by mixing
thoroughly 17f ounces wheat flour,
3.17 quarts water, and 1 spoonful of
pulverized alum. The floor is coated
with this paste throughout, and covered
with a layer of manilla paper, or other
strong hemp paper. If something very
durable is desired, paint the paper layer
with the same paste and put on another
layer of paper, leaving it to dry thor-
oughly. Then apply another coat of
paste, and upon this place wall paper of
any desired kind. In order to protect
the wall paper from wear, give it 2 or
more coats of a solution of 8| ounces
white glue in 2.11 quarts hot water, allow
them to dry, and finish the job with a
coating of hard oil varnish.
METALLIC PAPER.
This paper, made by transferring, past-
ing, or painting a coating of metal on
ordinary paper, retains a comparatively
dull and dead appearance even after
glazing or polishing with the burnisher
or agate. Galvanized or electroplated
metal paper, on the other hand, in which
the metal has penetrated into the most
minute pores of the paper, possesses an
extraordinarily brilliant polish, fully
equal to that of a piece of compact
polished metal. It is much more ex-
tensively used than the kind first men-
tioned.
The following solutions are recom-
mended for making "galvanized" metal
paper:
I. — For silver paper: Twenty parts
argento-cyanide of potassium; 13 parts
cyanide of potassium; 980 parts water.
II. — For gold paper: Four parts auro-
cyanide of potassium; 9 parts cyanide of
potassium; 900 parts water.
Moth Paper. —
Naphthalene 4 ounces
Paraffine wax 8 ounces
Melt together and while warm paint
unsized paper and pack away with the
goods.
Lead Paper. — Lay rough drawing
rper (such as contains starch) on an
per cent potassium iodide solution.
After a moment take it out and dry.
Next, in a dark room, float the paper
face downward on an 8 per cent lead ni-
trate solution. This sensitizes the paper.
Dry again. The paper is now ready for
printing. This process should be car-
ried on till all the detail is out in a grayish
color. Then develop in a 10 per cent
ammonium chloride solution. The tones
obtained are of a fine blue black.
Aluminum Paper. — Aluminum paper
is not leaf aluminum, but real paper
glazed with aluminum powder. It is
said to keep food materials fresh. The
basic material is artificial parchment,
coated with a solution of rosin in alcohol
or ether. After drying, the paper is
warmed until the rosin has again sof-
tened to a slight degree. The aluminum
powder is dusted on and the paper then
placed under heavy pressure to force
the powder firmly into it. The metallic
coating thus formed is not affected by
air or greasy substances.
PAPER (ANTI-RUST) FOR NEEDLES:
See Rust Preventives.
PAPER CEMENTS:
See Adhesives.
PAPER DISINFECTANT:
See Disinfectants.
PAPER, FIREPROOF:
See Fireproofing.
PAPER, FROSTED:
See Glass (Frosted).
PAPER ON GLASS, TO AFFIX:
See Aahesives, under Water-Glass Ce-
ments.
PAPERS, IGNITING :
See Pyrotechnics.
PAPER ON METALLIC SURFACES,
PASTING:
See Adhesives.
PAPER AS PROTECTION FOR IRON
AND STEEL:
See Rust Preventives.
PAPERHANGERS' PASTES:
See Adhesives.
PAPER, PHOTOGRAPHIC:
See Photography.
PAPER VARNISHES:
See Varnishes.
PAPER WATERPROOFING:
See Waterproofing.
PAPIER MACHE:
See Paper.
PARAFFINE:
Rendering Paraffine Transparent.—
A process for rendering paraffine and its
mixtures with other bodies (ceresine, etc.)
used in the manufacture of transparent
candles consists essentially in adding a.
508
PARAFFINE— PASSE-PARTOUT FRAMING
naphthcl, particularly beta-naphthol, to
the material which is used for the manu-
facture of the candles, tapers, etc. The
quantity added varies according to the
material and the desired effect. One
suitable mixture is mide by heating 100
parts of paraffine and 2 parts of beta-
naphthol at 175° to 195° F. The material
can be colored in the ordinary way.
Removal of Dirt from Paraffine. — Fil-
tration through felt will usually remove
particles of foreign matter from paraf-
fine. It may be necessary to use a layer
of fine sand or of infusorial earth. If
discolored by any soluble matter, try
freshly heated animal charcoal. To keep
the paraffine fluid, if a large quantity is
to be handled, a jacketed funnel will be
required, either steam or hot water being
kept in circulation in the jacket.
Paraffine Scented Cakes.
Paraffine, 1 ounce; white petrolatum,
2 ounces; heliotropin, 10 grains; oil of
bergamot, 5 drops; oil of lavender, 5 drops;
oil of cloves, 2 drops. Melt the first two
substances, then add the next, the oils
last, and stir all until cool. After settling
cut into blocks and wrap in tin foil. This
is a disseminator of perfume. It per-
fumes where it is rubbed. It kills moths
and perfumes the wardrobe. It is used
by rubbing on cloth, clothes, and the
handkerchief.
PARCHMENT AND PARCHMENT
PAPER:
See Paper.
PARCHMENT CEMENT:
See Adhesives.
PARCHMENT PASTE:
See Adhesives.
PARFAITS:
See Ice Creams.
PARFAIT D' AMOUR CORDIAL:
See Wines and Liquors.
PARIS GREEN:
See Pigments.
PARIS RED:
See Polishes.
PARIS SALTS:
See Disinfectants.
PARISIAN CEMENT:
See Adhesives.
PASSE-PARTOUT FRAMING.
It is hardly correct to call the passe-
partout a frame, as it is merely a binding
together of the print, the glass, and the
backing with a narrow edge of paper.
This simple arrangement lends to the
picture when complete a much greater
finish and a more important appearance
than might be anticipated.
In regard to the making of a passe-
partout frame, the first thing is to decide
as to the width of the mount or matt to be
used. In some cases, of course, the
print is framed with no mount being visi-
ble; but, unless the picture is of large
size, it will usually be found more be-
coming to have one, especially should
the wall paper be of an obtrusive design.
When the print and mount are both
neatly trimmed to the desired size, pro-
cure a piece of clear white picture glass —
most amateur frarners will have dis-
covered that there is a variance in the
quality of this — and a piece of stout card-
board, both of exactly the same dimen-
sions as the picture. Next prepare or
buy the paper to be used for binding the
edges together. This may now be
bought at most all stationery stores in a
great variety of colors. If it is prepared
.at home a greater choice of colors is
available, and it is by no means a diffi-
cult task with care and sharp scissors.
The tint should be chosen to harmonize
with the print and the mount, taking also
into consideration the probable sur-
roundings— brown for photographs of
brown tone, dark gray for black, pale
gray for lighter tones; dark green is also
a good color. All stationers keep col-
ored papers suitable for the purpose,
while plain wall papers or thin brown
paper answers equally well.
Cut the paper, ruling it carefully, into
even strips an inch wide, and then into
four pieces, two of them the exact length
of the top and bottom of the frame, and
the other two half an inch longer than
the two sides. Make sure that the print
is evenly sandwiched between the glass
and the back. Cut some tiny strips of
thin court-plaster, and with these bind the
corners tightly together. Brush over the
two larger pieces of paper with mount-
ant, and with them bind tightly together
the three thicknesses — print, glass, and
cardboard — allowing the paper to pro-
ject over about a third of an inch on
the face side, and the ends which were
left a little longer must be neatly turned
over and stuck at the back. Then, in
the same manner, bind the top and bot-
tom edges together, mitering the corners
neatly.
It should not be forgotten, before
binding the edges together, to make two
slits in the cardboard back for the pur-
PASTES— PERFUMES
509
pose of inserting little brass hangers,
having flat ends like paper fasteners,
which may be bought for the purpose;
or, where these are not available, two
narrow loops of tape may be used in-
stead, sticking the ends firmly on the
inside of the cardboard by means of a
little strong glue.
These are the few manipulations
necessary for the making of a simple
passe-partout frame, but there are num-
berless variations of the idea, and a great
deal of variety may be obtained by means
of using different mounts. Brown paper
answers admirably as a mount for some
subjects, using strips of paper of a darker
shade as binding. A not too obtrusive
design in pen and ink is occasionally
drawn on the mount, while a more am-
bitious scheme is to use paint and brushes
in the same way. An ingenious idea
which suits some subjects is to use a piece
of hand-blocked wall paper as a mount.
PARQUET POLISH:
See Polishes.
PASTES:
See Adhesives for Adhesive Purposes.
Pastes, Razor. — I. — From jewelers'
rouge, plumbago, and suet, equal parts,
melted together and stirred until cold.
II. — From prepared putty powder
(levigated oxide of tin), 3 parts; lard,
2 parts; crocus martis, 1 part; triturated
together.
III. — Prepared putty powder, 1 ounce;
powdered oxalic acid, J ounce; pow-
dered gum, 20 grains; make a stiff paste
with water, quantity sufficient, and
evenly and thinly spread it over the strop,
the other side of which should be covered
with any of the common greasy mixtures.
With very little friction this paste gives
a fine edge to the razor, and its action is
still further increased by slightly mois-
tening it, or even breathing on it. Im-
mediately after its use, the razor should
receive a few turns on the other side of
the strop.
PASTE FOR PAPER:
See Paper.
PASTES FOR POLISHING METALS:
See Soaps.
PASTEBOARD CEMENT:
See Adhesives.
PASTEBOARD DEODORIZERS:
See Household Formulas.
PASTILLES, FUMIGATING:
See Fumigants.
PATINAS:
See Bronzing and Plating.
PATENT LEATHER:
See Leather.
PEACH EXTRACT:
See Essences and Extracts.
PEARLS, Tp CLEAN:
See Cleaning Preparations and Meth-
ods.
PEGAMOID.
Camphor, 100 parts; mastic, 100
parts; bleached shellac, 50 parts; gun
cotton, 200 parts; acetone, 200 parts;
acetic ether, 100 parts; ethylic ether, 50
parts.
PEN METAL:
See Alloys.
PENCILS, ANTISEPTIC:
See Antiseptics.
PENCILS FOR MARKING GLASS:
See Etching, Frosted Glass, and Glass.
PENS, GOLD:
See Gold.
PEONY ROOTS, THEIR PRESERVA-
TION:
See Roots.
PERCENTAGE SOLUTION.
Multiply the percentage by 5 ; the prod-
uct is the number of grains to be added
to an ounce of water to make a solution
of the desired percentage. This is cor-
rect for anything less than 15 per cent.
Perfumes
DRY PERFUMES:
Sachet Powders. —
I. — Orris root 6 ounces
Lavender flowers. .. 2 ounces
Talcum 4 drachms
Musk 20 grains
Terpinol 60 grains
II. — Orange peel 2 ounces
Orris root 1 ounce
Sandalwood 4 drachms
Tonka 2 drachms
Musk 6 grains
510
PERFUMES
Lavender Sachets. —
I. — Lavender flowers. . . 16 ounces
Gum benzoin 4 ounces
Oil lavender 2 drachms
II. — Lavender flowers, 150 parts;
orris root, 150 parts; benzoin, 150 parts;
Tonka beans, 150 parts; cloves, 100 parts;
"Neugenwerz," 50 parts; sandalwood,
50 parts; cinnamon, 50 parts; vanilla, 50
parts; and musk, £ part. All is bruised
finely and mixed.
Violet Sachet. —
Powdered orris root 500 parts
Rice flour 250 parts
Essence bouquet. . . 10 parts
Spring flowers ex-
tract 10 parts
Violet extract 20 parts
Oil of bergamot ... 4 parts
Oil of rose 2 parts
Borated Talcum. —
I. — Purified talcum,
N. F . . 2 pounds
Powdered boric acid 1 ounce
To perfume add the following:
Powered orris root. . 1£ ounces
Extract jasmine .... 2 drachms
Extract musk 1 drachm
II. — A powder sometimes dispensed
under this name is the salicylatea pow-
der of talcum of the National Formulary,
which contains in every 1,000 parts 30
parts of salicylic acid and 100 parts of
Doric acid.
Rose. —
I. — Cornstarch 9 pounds
Powdered talc 1 pound
Oil of rose 80 drops
Extract musk 2 drachms
Extract jasmine .... 6 drachms
II. — Potato starch 9 pounds
Powdered talc 1 pound
Oil rose 45 drops
Extract jasmine .... § ounce
Rose Talc. —
I. — Powdered talc 5 pounds
Oil rose 50 drops
Oil wintergreen .... 4 drops
Extract jasmine .... 2 ounces
II. — Powdered talc 5 pounds
Oil rose 32 drops
Oil jasmine 4 ounces
Extract musk 1 ounce
Violet Talc.—
I. — Powdered talc 14 ounces
Powdered orris root. 2 ounces
Extract cassie \ ounce
Extract jasmine \ ounce
Extract musk 1 drachm
II. — Starch 5,000 parts
Orris root 1,000 parts
Oil of lemon 14 parts
Oil of bergamot . . 14 parts
Oil of clove 4 parts
Smelling Salts. — I. — Fill small glasses
having ground stopper with pieces of
sponge free from sand and saturate
with a mixture of spirit of sal ammoniac
(0.910), 9 parts, and oil of lavender, 1
part. Or else fill the bottles with small
dice of ammonium sesquicarbonate and
pour the above mixture over them.
II. — rEssential oil of lav-
ender 18 parts
Attar of rose 2 parts
Ammonium car-
bonate 480 parts
Violet Smelling Salts. — I. — Moisten
coarsely powdered ammonia carbonate,
contained in a suitable bottle, with a
mixture of concentrated tincture of
orris r6ot, 2£ ounces; aromatic spirit
of ammonia, 1 drachm; violet extract, 3
drachms.
II. — Moisten the carbonate, and add
as much of the following solution as it
will absorb: Oil of orris, 5 minims; oil
of lavender flowers, 10 minims; violet
extract, 30 minims; stronger water of
ammonia, 2 fluidounces.
To Scent Advertising Matter, etc. —
The simplest way of perfuming printed
matter, such as calendars, cards, etc., is
to stick them in strongly odorous sachet
powder. Although the effect of a strong
perfume is obtained thereby, there is a
large loss of powder, which clings to the
printed matter. Again, there are often
little spots which are due to the essential
oils added to the powder.
Another way of perfuming, which is
used especially in France for scenting
cards and other articles, is to dip them in
very strong "extraits d'odeur," leaving
them therein for a few days. Then the
cards are taken out and laid between fil-
tering paper, whereupon they are pressed
vigorously, which causes them not only
to dry, but also to remain straight. They
remain under strong pressure until com-
pletely dry.
Not all cardboard, however, can be
subjected to this process, and in its
choice one should consider the perfum-
ing operation to be conducted. Nor can
the cards be glazed, since spirit dissolves
the glaze. It is also preferable to have
lithographed text on them, since in the
case of ordinary printing the letters often
partly disappear or the colors are
changed.
PERFUMES
511
For pocket calendars, price lists, and
voluminous matter containing more
leaves than one, another process is
recommended. In a tight closet, which
should be lined with tin, so that little air
can enter, tables composed of laths are
placed on which nets stretched on frames
are laid. Cover these nets with tissue
paper, and proceed as follows: On the
bottom of the closet sprinkle a strongly
odorous and reperfumed powder; then
cover one net with the printed matter
to be perfumed and shove it to the closet
on the lath. The next net again re-
ceives powder, the following one printed
matter, and so on until the closet is
filled. After tightly closing the doors,
the whole arrangement is left to itself.
This process presents another advantage
in that all sorts of residues may be em-
ployed for scenting, such as the filters
of the odors and infusions, residues of
musk, etc. These are simply laid on the
nets, and will thus impart their perfume
to the printed matter.
Such a scenting powder is produced
as follows:
By weight
Iris powder, finely
ground 5,000 parts
Residues of musk. . 1,000 parts
Ylang-ylang oil. ... 10 parts
Bergamot oil 50 parts
Artificial musk .... 2 parts
lonone 2 to 5 parts
Tincture of benzoin 100 parts
The powder may subsequently be
employed for filling cheap sachets, etc.
LIQUID PERFUMES:
Coloring Perfumes. — Chlorophyll is a
suitable agent for coloring liquid per-
fumes green. Care must be taken to pro-
cure an article freely soluble in the men-
struum. As found in the market it is
prepared (in form of solutions) for use
in liquids strongly alcoholic; in water
or weak alcohol; and in oils. Aniline
greens of various kinds will answer the
same purpose, but in a trial of any one of
these it must be noted that very small
quantities should be used, as their tinc-
torial power is so great that liquids in
which they are incautiously used may
stain the handkerchief.
Color imparted by chlorophyll will be
found fairly permanent; this term is a
relative one, and not too much must be
expected. Colors which may suffer but
little change by long exposure to diffused
light may fade perceptibly by short ex-
posure to the direct light of the sun.
Chlorophyll may be purchased or it
may be prepared as follows: Digest
leaves of grass, nettles, spinach, or other
green herb in warm water until soft;
pour off the water and crush the herb to
a pulp. Boil the pulp for a short time
with a half per cent solution of caustic
soda, and afterwards precipitate the
.chlorophyll by means of dilute hydro-
chloric acid; wash the precipitate thor-
oughly with water, press and dry it, and
use as much for the solution as may be
necessary. Or a tincture made from
grass as follows may be employed:
Lawn grass, cut fine. . 2 ounces
Alcohol 16 ounces
Put the grass in a wide-mouthed bottle'
and pour the alcohol upon it. After
standing a few days, agitating occasion-
ally, pour off the liquid. The tincture
may be used with both alcoholic and
aqueous preparations.
Among the anilines, spirit soluble
malachite green has been recommended.
A purple or violet tint may be pro-
duced by using tincture of litmus or am-
moniated cochineal coloring. The for-
mer is made as follows:
Litmus 2£ ounces
Boiling water 16 ounces
Alcohol 3 ounces
Pour the water upon the litmus, stir
well, allow to stand for about an hour,
stirring occasionally, filter, and to the
filtrate add the alcohol.
The aniline colors "Paris violet" or
methyl violet B may be similarly em-
ployed. The amount necessary to pro-
duce a desired tint must be worked out
by experiment. Yellow tints may best
be imparted by the use of tincture of
turmeric or saffron, fustic, quercitron, etc.
If a perfumed spirit, as, for instance,
a mouth wash, is poured into a wine-
glassful of water, the oils will separate
at once and spread over the surface of
the water. This liquid being allowed to
stand uncovered, one oil after another
will evaporate, according to the degree of
its volatility, until at last the least vola-
tile remains behind.
This process sometimes requires weeks,
and in order to be able to watch
the separate phases of this evaporation
correctly, it is necessary to use several
glasses and to conduct the mixtures at
certain intervals. The glasses must be
numbered according to the day when set
up, so that they may be readily identified.
If we assume, for example, that a
mouth wash is to be examined, we may
probably prepare every day for one
week a mixture of about 100 grams of
water and 10 drops of the respective
liquid. Hence, after a lapse of 7 days
512
PERFUMES
we will have before us 7 bouquets, of dif-
ferent odor, according to the volatility of
the oils contained in them. From these
different bouquets the qualitative com-
position of the liquid may be readily
recognized, provided that one is familiar
enough with the character of the different
oils to be able to tell them by their odors.
The predominance of peppermint oil —
to continue with the above example —
will soon be lost and other oils will rise
one after the other, to disappear again
after a short time, so that the 7 glasses
afford an entire scale of characteristic
odors, until at last only the most lasting
are perceptible. Thus it is possible with
some practice to tell a bouquet pretty
accurately in its separate odors.
In this manner interesting results are
often reached, and with some persever-
ance even complicated mixtures can be
analyzed and recognized in their dis-
tinctiveness. Naturally the difficulty in
recognizing each oil is increased in the
case of oils whose volatility is approxi-
mately the same. But even in this case
changes, though not quite so marked,
can be determined in the bouquet.
In a quantitative respect this method
also furnishes a certain result as far as
the comparison of perfumed liquids is
concerned.
According to the quantity of the oils
present the dim zone on the water is
broader or narrower, and although the
size of this layer may be changed by the
admixture of other substances, one gains
an idea regarding the quantity of the oils
by mere smelling. It is necessary, of
course, to choose glasses with equally
large openings and to count out the drops
of the essence carefully by means of a
dropper.
When it is thought that all the odors
have been placed, a test is made by pre-
paring a mixture according to the recipe
resulting from the trial.
Not pure oils, always alcoholic dilu-
tions in a certain ratio should be used, in
order not to disturb the task by a sur-
plus of the different varieties, since it is
easy to add more, but impossible to take
away.
It is true this method requires patience,
perseverance, and a fine sense of smell.
One smelling test should not be consid-
ered sufficient, but the glasses should be
carried to the nose as often as possible.
Fixing Agents in Perfumes. — The
secret of making perfumery lies mainly in
the choice of the fixing agents — i. e., those
bodies which intensify and hold the
floral odors. The agents formerly em-
ployed were musk, civet, and ambergris,
all having a heavy and dull animal odor,
which is the direct antithesis of a floral
fragrance. A free use of these bodies
must inevitably mean a perfume which
requires a label to tell what it is intended
for, to say nothing of what it is. To-day
there is no evidence that the last of these
(ambergris) is being used at all in the
newer perfumes, and the other two are
employed very sparingly, if at all. The
result is that the newer perfumes possess
a fragrance and a fidelity to the flowers
that they imitate which is far superior to
the older perfumes. Yet the newer per-
fume is quite as prominent and lasting as
the old, while it is more pleasing. It
contains the synthetic odors, with bal-
sams or rosinous bodies as fixatives, and
employs musk and civet only in the most
sparing manner in some of the more sen-
sitive odors. As a fixing agent benzoin
is to be recommended. Only the best
variety should be used, the Siamese, which
costs 5 or 6 times as much as that from
Sumatra. The latter has a coarse pun-
gent odor.
Musk is depressing, and its use in
cologne in even the minutest quantity
will spoil the cologne. The musk lingers
after the lighter odors have disappeared,
and a sick person is pretty sure to feel
its effects. Persons in vigorous health
will not notice the depressing effects of
musk, but when lassitude prevails these
are very unpleasant. Moreover, it is not
a necessity in these toilet accessories,
either as a blending or as a fixing agent.
Its place is better supplied by benzoin
for both purposes.
As to alcohol, a lot of nonsense has
been written about the necessity of ex-
treme care in selecting it, such as certain
kinds requiring alcohol made from
grapes and others demanding extreme
purification, etc. A reasonable attention
to a good quality of alcohol, even at a
slight increase in»cost, will always pay,
but, other things being equal, a good
quality of oils in a poor quality of alcohol
will give far better satisfaction than the
opposite combination. The public is not
composed of exacting connoisseurs, and
it does not appreciate extreme care or
expense in either particular. A good
grade of alcohol, reasonably free from
heavy and lingering foreign odors, will
answer practically all the requirements.
General Directions for Making Per-
fumes.— It is absolutely essential for ob-
taining the best results to see that all
vessels are perfectly clean. Always em-
ploy alcohol, 90 per cent, deodorized by
PERFUMES
51S
means of charcoal. When grain musk is
used as an ingredient in liquid perfumes,
first rub down with pumice stone, then
digest in a little hot water for 2 or 3 hours;
finally add to alcohol. The addition of
2 or 3 minims of acetic acid will improve
the odor and also prevent accumulation
of NH3, Civet and ambergris should
also be thoroughly rubbed down with
some coarse powder, and transferred
directly to alcohol.
Seeds, pods, bark rhizomes, etc.,
should be cut up in small pieces or pow-
dered.
Perfumes improve by storing. It is a
good plan to tie over the mouth of the
containing vessel some fairly thick por-
ous material, and to allow the vessel to
stand for a week or two in a cool place,
instead of corking at once.
It is perhaps unnecessary to add that
as large a quantity as possible should be
decanted, and then the residue filtered.
This obviously prevents loss by evapora-
tion. Talc or kieselguhr (amorphous
SiO2) are perhaps the best substances to
add to the filter in order to render liquid
perfumes bright and clear, and more
especially necessary in the case of aro-
matic vinegars.
The operations involved in making per-
fumes are simple; the chief thing to be
learned, perhaps, is to judge of the quality
of materials.
The term "extract," when used in
most formulas, means an alcoholic solu-
tion of the odorous principles of certain
flowers obtained by enfluerage; that is,
the flowers are placed in contact with pre-
pared grease which absorbs the odorous
matter, and this grease is in turn macer-
ated with alcohol which dissolves out the
odor. A small portion of the grease is
taken up also at ordinary temperatures;
this is removed by filtering the "ex-
tract" while "chilled" by a freezing mix-
ture. The extracts can be either pur-
chased or made directly from the pomade
(as the grease is called). To employ the
latter method successfully some experi-
ence may be necessary.
The tinctures are made with 95 per
cent deodorized alcohol, enough men-
struum being added through the marc
when filtering to bring the finished prep-
aration to the measure of the menstruum
originally taken.
The glycerine is intended to act as a
"fixing" agent — that is, to lessen the
volatility of the perfumes.
Tinctures for Perfumes. —
a. Ambergris, 1 part; alcohol, 96 per
cent, 15 parts.
b. Benzoin, Sumatra, 1 part; alcohol,
96 per cent, 6 parts.
c. Musk, 1 part; distilled water, 25
parts; spirit, 96 per cent, 25 parts.
d. Musk, 1 part; spirit, 96 per cent,
50 parts; for very oleiferous composi-
tions.
e. Peru balsam, 1 part in spirit, 96
per cent, 7 parts; shake vigorously.
/. Storax, 1 part in spirit, 96 per cent,
15 parts.
g. Powdered Tolu balsam, 1 part;
spirit, 96 per cent, 6 parts.
h. Chopped Tonka beans, 1 part;
spirit, 60 per cent, 6 parts; for composi-
tions containing little oil.
i. Chopped Tonka beans, 1 part;
spirit, 96 per cent, 6 parts; for composi-
tions containing much oil.
j. Vanilla, 1 part; spirit, 60 per cent, 6
parts; for compositions containing little
oil.
k. Vanilla, 1 part; spirit, 96 per cent,
6 parts; for compositions containing
much oil.
/. Vanillin, 20 parts; spirit, 96 per
cent, 4,500 parts.
m. Powdered orris root, 1 part; spirit,
96 per cent, 5 parts.
n. Grated civet, 1 part in spirit, 96 per
cent, 10 parts.
Bay Rum. — Bay rum, or more prop-
erly bay spirit, may be made from the oil
with weak alcohol as here directed:
I. — Oil of bay leaves 3 drachms
Oil of orange peel ... £ drachm
Tincture of orange
peel 2 ounces
Magnesium carbon-
ate £ ounce
Alcohol 4 pints
Water 4 pints
Triturate the oils with the magnesium
carbonate, gradually adding the other
ingredients previously mixed, and fil-
ter.
The tincture of orange peel is used
chiefly as a coloring for the mixture.
Oil of bay leaves as found in the mar-
ket varies in quality. The most costly
will presumably be found the best, and
its use will not make the product ex-
pensive. It can be made from the best
oil and deodorized alcohol and still sold
at a moderate price with a good profit.
Especial care should be taken to use
only perfectly fresh oil of orange peel.
As is well known, this oil deteriorates
rapidly on exposure to the air, acquiring
an odor similar to that of turpentine.
The oil should be kept in bottles of such
size that when opened the contents can
be all used in a short time.
514
PERFUMES
II. — Bay oil, 15 parts; sweet orange
oil, 1 part; pimento oil, 1 part; spirit of
wine, 1,000 parts; water, 750 parts; soap
spirit or quillaia bark, ad libitum.
III. — Bay oil, 12.5 parts; sweet orange
oil, 0.5 part; pimento oil, 0.5 part; spirit
of wine, 200 parts; water, 2,800 parts;
Jamaica rum essence, 75 parts; soap
powder, 20 parts; quillaia extract, 5 parts;
borax, 10 parts; use sugar color.
Colognes. — In making cologne water,
the alcohol used should be that obtained
from the distillation of wine, provided a
first-class article is desired. It is pos-
sible, of course, to make a good cologne
with very highly rectified and deodorized
corn or potato spirits, but the product
never equals that made from wine
spirits. Possibly the reason for this lies
in the fact that the latter always con-
tains a varying amount of oenanthic
ether.
I. — Oil of bergamot . .
Oil of neroli
Oil of citron
Oil of cedrat
Oil of rosemary. . .
Tincture of am-
bergris :
Tincture of ben-
zoin .
Alcohol
10 parts
15 parts
5 parts
5 parts
1 part
5 parts
5 parts
1,000 parts
II. — The following is stated to be the
"original" formula:
Oil of bergamot. 96 parts
Oil of citron 96 parts
Oil of cedrat. ... 96 parts
Oil of rosemary. 48 parts
Oil of neroli 48 parts
Oil of lavender. . 48 parts
Oil of cavella. ... 24 parts
Absolute alcohol. 1,000 parts
Spirit of rose-
mary 25,000 parts
III.— Alcohol, 90 per
cent 5,000 parts
Bergamot oil 220 parts
Lemon oil 75 parts
Neroli oil 20 parts
Rosemary oil. .... 5 parts
Lavender oil,
French 5 parts
The oils are well dissolved in spirit
and left alone for a few days with fre-
quent shaking. Next add about 40 parts
of acetic acid and filter after a while.
IV.— Alcohol, 90 per
cent 5,000 parts
Lavender oil,
French 35 parts
Lemon oil 30 parts
Portugallo oil ..
Neroli oil. .
Bergamot oil. ...
Petit grain oil . . .
Rosemary oil. . . .
Orange water. . .
30 parts
15 parts
15 parts
4 parts
4 parts
700 parts
Cologne Spirits or Deodorized Alco-
hol.— This is used in all toilet prepara-
tions and perfumes. It is made thus:
Alcohol, 95 per cent . . 1 gallon
Powdered unslaked
lime 4 drachms
Powdered alum 2 drachms
Spirit of nitrous ether 1 drachm
Mix the lime and alum, and add them
to the alcohol, shaking the mixture well
together; then add the sweet spirit of
niter and set aside for 7 days, shaking
occasionally; finally filter.
Florida Waters. —
Oil of bergamot. . . 3 fluidounces
Oil of lavender ... 1 fluidounce
Oil of cloves 1% fluidrachms
Oil of cinnamon . . 2$ fluidrachms
Oil of neroli ...... | fluidrachm
Oil of lemon 1 fluidounce
Essence of jasmine 6 fluidounces
Essence of musk. . 2 fluidounces
Rose water 1 pint
Alcohol 8 pints
Mix, and if cloudy, filter through mag-
nesium carbonate.
Lavender Water. — This, the most
famous of all the perfumed waters, was
originally a distillate from a mixture of
spirit and lavender flowers. This was
the perfume. Then came a compound
water, or "palsy water," which was in-
tended strictly for use as a medicine, but
sometimes containing ambergris and
musk, as well as red sanders wood.
Only the odor of the old compound re-
mains to us as a perfume, and this is the
odor which all perfume compounders
endeavor to hit. The most important
precaution in making lavender water is
to use well-matured oil of lavender.
Some who take pride in this perfume use
no oil which is less than 5 years old, and
which has had 1 ounce of rectified spirit
added to each pound of oil before being
set aside to mature. After mixing, the
perfume should stand for at least a
month before filtering through gray fil-
tering paper. This may be taken as a
general instruction:
I. — Oil of lavender 1£ ounces
Oil of bergamot .... 4 drachms
Essence ambergris. . 4 drachms
Proof spirit 3 pints
PERFUMES
II. — English oil of laven-
der 1 ounce
Oil of bergamot .... 1* drachms
Essence of musk
(No. 2) \ ounce
Essence of amber-
gris \ ounce
Proof spirit 2 pints
III. — English oil of laven-
der.'. \ ounce
Oil of bergamot .... 2 drachms
Essence of amber-
gris 1 drachm
Essence of musk
(No. 1) 3 drachms
Oil of angelica 2 minims
Attar of rose 6 minims
Proof spirit 1 pint
IV. — Oil of lavender. .... 4 ounces
Grain musk 15 grains
Oil of bergamot .... 2£ ounces
Attar of rose l| drachms
Oil of neroli \ drachm
Spirit of nitrous
ether 2£ ounces
. Triple rose water. .. 12 ounces
Proof spirit 5 pints
Allow to stand 5 weeks before filtering.
LI
1
2
150
parts
parts
parts
part
part
parts
parts
parts
UID PERFUMES FOR THE HAND-
KERCHIEF, PERSON, ETC. :
Acacia Extract. —
French acacia 400
Tincture of amber
(linlO) 3
Eucalyptus oil 0.5
Lavender oil 1
Bergamot oil
Tincture of musk . . .
Tincture of orris root
Spirit of wine, 80 per
cent 500
Bishop Essence. —
Fresh green peel of
unripe oranges . .
Cura£ao orange peel
Malaga orange peel
Ceylon cinnamon. .
Cloves
Vanilla
Orange flower oil . .
Spirit of wine 1,500.0 grams
Hungarian wine ... 720.0 grams
A dark -brown tincture of pleasant taste
and smell.
Caroline Bouquet. —
Oil of lemon 15 minims
Oil of bergamot 1 drachm
Essence of rose 4 ounces
Essence of tuberose . . 4 ounces
Essence of violet 4 ounces
Tincture of orris 2 ounces
60.0 grams
180.0 grams
90.0 grams
2.0 grams
7.5 grams
11.0 grams
4 drops
Alexandra Bouquet. —
Oil of bergamot ......
Oil of rose geranium
Oil of rose
Oil of cassia
Deodorized alcohol. . .
Navy Bouquet. —
Spirit of sandalwood. .
Extract of patchouli . .
Spirit of rose
Spirit of vetivert
Extract of verbena . . .
drachms
drachm
drachm
15 minims
1 pint
10 ounces
10 ounces
10 ounces
10 ounces
12 ounces
Bridal Bouquet. — Sandal oil, 30 min-
ims; .rose extract, 4 fluidounces; jas-
mine-extract, 4 fluidounces; orange
flower extract, 16 fluidounces; essence of
vanilla, 1 fluidpunce; essence of musk, 2
fluidci-y^des; tincture of storax, 2 fluid-
ounces.^ (The tincture of storax is pre-
pared with liquid storax and alcohol [90
per cent], 1:20, by macerating for 7
days.)
Irish Bouquet. —
White rose essence . 5,000 parts
Vanilla essence .... 450 parts
Rose oil 5 parts
Spirit 100 parts
Essence Bouquet. —
I. — Spirit 8,000 parts
Distilled water .... 2,000 parts
Iris tincture 250 parts
Vanilla herb tinc-
ture 100 parts
Benzoin tincture. .. 40 parts
Bergamot oil 50 parts
Storax tincture .... 50 parts
Clove oil 15 parts
Palmarosa oil 12 parts
Lemon-grass oil . . . 15 parts
II. — Extract of rose (2d) . . 64 ounces
Extract of jasmine
(2d) 12 ounces
Extract of cassie (2d) . 8 ounces
Tincture of orris (1
to 4) 64 ounces
Oil of bergamot \ ounce
Oil of cloves 1 drachm
Oil of ylang-ylang \ drachm
Tincture of benzoin
(1 to 8) 2 ounces
Glycerine 4 ounces
Bouquet Canang. —
Ylang-ylang oil ... 45 minims
Grain musk 3 grains
Rose oil 15 minims
Tonka beans 3
Cassie oil 5 minims
Tincture orris rhi-
zome 1 fluidounce
516
PERFUMES
Civet 1 grain
Almond oil ^ minim
Storax tincture ... 3 fluidrachms
Alcohol, 90 per cent 9 fluidounces
Mix, and digest 1 month. The above
is a very delicious perfume.
Cassie oil or otto is derived from the
flowers of Acacia farnesiana Mimosa
farnesiana, L. (N. O. Leguminosae, sub-
order Mimosese). It must not be con-
founded with cassia otto, the essential
oil obtained from Cinnamomum cassia.
Cashmere Nosegay. —
I. — Essence of violet,
from pomade 1 pint
Essence of rose,
from pomade 1| pints
Tincture of benzoin,
(1 to 4) $ pint
Tincture of civet (1
to 64) J pint
Tincture of Tonka (1
to 4) | pint
Benzoic acid f ounce
Oil of patchouli .... \ ounce
Oil of sandal | ounce
Rose water \ pint
II. — Essence violet 120 ounces
Essence rose 180 ounces
Tincture benjamin
(1 in 4) 60 ounces
Tincture civet (1 in
62) 30 ounces
Tincture Tonka (1 in
4) 30 ounces
Oil patchouli 3 ounces
Oil sandalwood 6 ounces
Rose water 60 ounces
Clove Pink. —
I. — Essence of rose
Essence of orange
flower
Tincture of vanilla. .
Oil of cloves . .
2 ounces
6 ounces
3| ounces
20 minims
5 ounces
II. — Essence of cassie.. . .
Essence of orange
flower 5 ounces
Essence of rose 10 ounces
Spirit of rose 7 ounces
'Tincture of vanilla . . 3 ounces
Oil of cloves 12 minims
Frangipanni.; —
I. — Grain musk 10 grains
Sandal otto 25 minims
Rose otto 25 minims
Orange flower
otto (neroli) 30 minims
Vetivert otto .... 5 minims
Powdered orris
rhizome £ ounce
Vanilla 30 grains
Alcohol (90 per
cent) 10 fluidounces
Mix and digest for 1 month. This is a
lasting and favorite perfume.
II. — Oil of rose 2 drachms
Oil of neroli 2 drachms
Oil of sandalwood . . 2 drachms
Oil of geranium
(French) v 2 drachms
Tincture of vetivert
(IJtoS) 96 ounces
Tincture of Tonka (1
to 8) 16 ounces
Tincture of orris (1
to 4) 64 ounces
Glycerine 6 ounces
Alcohol 64 ounces
Handkerchief Perfumes. —
I. — Lavender oil 10 parts
Neroli oil 10 parts
Bitter almond oil . . 2 parts
Orris root 200 parts
Rose oil 5 parts
Clove oil 5 parts
Lemon oil ........ 1 part
Cinnamon oil 2 parts
Mix with 2,500 parts of best alcohol,
and after a rest of 3 days heat moder-
ately on the water bath, and filter.
II. — Bergamot oil 10 parts
Orange peel oil 10 parts
Cinnamon oil 2 parts
Rose geranium oil . . 1 part
Lemon oil 4 parts
Lavender oil 4 parts
Rose oil 1 part
Vanilla essence 5 parts
Mix with 2,000 parts of best spirit, and
after leaving undisturbed for 3 days, heat
moderately on the water bath, and filter.
Honeysuckle. —
Oil of neroli 12 minims
Oil of rose 10 minims
Oil of bitter almond. . 8 minims
Tincture of storax. ... 4 ounces
Tincture of vanilla. . . 6 ounces
Essence of cassie 16 ounces
Essence of rose 16 ounces
Essence of tuberose . . 16 ounces
Essence of violet 16 ounces
India.—
Coumarin 10 grains
Concentrated rose
water (1 to 40) 2 ounces
Neroli oil 5 minims
Vanilla bean 1 drachm
Bitter almond oil 5 minims
Orris root 1 drachm
Alcohol 10 ounces
Macerate for a month.
PERFUMES
517
Javanese Bouquet. —
Rose oil
Pimento oil
Cassia oil
Neroli oil
Clove oil.
Lavender oil
Sandal wood oil
Alcohol
Water
Macerate for 14 days.
Lily Perfume. —
Essence of jasmine. . .
Essence of orange
flowers
Essence of rose
Essence of cassie
Essence of tuberose . .
Spirit of rose
Tincture of vanilla. . .
Oil of bitter almond. .,
15
20
3
3
2
60
10
10
minims
minims
minims
minims
minims
minims
minims
ounces
ounces
1 ounce
1 ounce
2 ounces
2 ounces
8 ounces
1 ounce
1 ounce
2 minims
Lily of the Valley. —
I. — Acacia essence. . . 750 parts
Jasmine essence. . 750 parts
Orange flower es-
sence 800 parts
Rose flower es-
sence 800 parts
Vanilla flower es-
sence 1,500 parts
Bitter almond oil. 15 parts
II. — Oil of bitter almond 10 minims
Tincture of vanilla. . 2 ounces
Essence of rose 2 ounces
Essence of orange
flower 2 ounces
Essence of jasmine. . 2£ ounces
Essence of tuberose. 2^ ounces
Spirit of rose 2£ ounces
III.— Extract rose 200 parts
Extract vanilla .... 200 parts
Extract orange . . . . 800 parts
Extract jasmine . . . 600 parts
Extract musk tinc-
ture 150 parts
Neroli oil 10 parts
Rose oil 6 parts
Bitter almond oil . . 4 parts
Cassia oil 5 parts
Bergamot oil 6 parts
Tonka beans es-
sence 150 parts
Linaloa oil 12 parts
Spirit of wine (90
per cent) 3,000 parts
JV. — Neroli extract 400 parts
Orris root extract. . 600 parts
Vanilla extract. . . . 400 parts
Rose extract 900 parts
Musk extract 200 parts
Orange extract. . . . 500 parts
Clove oil 6 parts
Bergamot oil 5 parts
Rose geranium oil 15 parts
Marechal Niel Rose. — In the genus of
roses, outside of the hundred-leaved or
cabbage rose, the Marechal Niel rose
(Rosa Noisetteana Red), also called
Noisette rose and often, erroneously, tea
rose, is especially conspicuous. Its fine,
piquant odor delights all lovers of pre-
cious perfumes. In order to reproduce
the fine scent of this flower artificially at
periods when it cannot be had without
much expenditure, the following recipes
will be found useful:
I. — Infusion rose I
(from pomades) 1,000 parts
Genuine rose oil. . 10 parts
Infusion Tolu bal-
sam 150 parts
Infusion genuine
musk 1 40 parts
Neroli oil 30 parts
Clove oil 2 parts
Infusion tube-
reuse I (from
pomades) 1,000 parts
Vanillin 1 part
Coumarin 0.5 parts
II. — Triple rose essence. . 50 grams
Simple rose essence . 60 grams
Neroli essence 30 grams
Civet essence 20 grams
Iris essence 30 grams
Tonka beans essence 20 grams
Rose oil 5 drops
Jasmine essence. ... 60 grams
Violet essence 50 grams
Cassia essence 50 grams
Vanilla essence 45 grams
Clove oil 20 drops
Bergamot oil 10 drops
Rose geranium oil . . 20 drops
May Flowers. —
Essence of rose. .... 10 ounces
Essence of jasmine. . 10 ounces
Essence of orange
flowers 10 ounces
Essence of cassie. ... 10 ounces
Tincture of vanilla. . 20 ounces
Oil of bitter almond. \ drachm
Narcissus. —
Caryophyllin 10 minims
Extract of tuberose. . 16 ounces
Extract of jasmine. . 4 ounces
Oil of neroli 20 minims
Oil of ylang-ylang . . 20 minims
Oil of clove 5 minims
Glycerine 30 minims
518
PERFUMES
Almond Blossom. —
Extract of heliotrope 30 parts
Extract of orange
flower 10 parts
Extract of jasmine. . 10 parts
Extract of rose 3 parts
Oil of lemon 1 part
Spirit of bitter al-
mond, 10 per cent 6 parts
Deodorized alcohol. 40 parts
Artificial Violet. — lonone is an arti-
ficial perfume which smells exactly like
fresh violets, and is therefore an ex-
tremely important product. Although
before it was discovered compositions
were known which gave fair imitations of
the violet perfume, they were wanting in
the characteristic tang which distin-
guishes all violet preparations. lonone
has even the curious property possessed
by violets of losing its scent occasionally
for a short time. It occasionally hap-
pens that an observer, on taking the
stopper out of a bottle of ionone, per-
ceives no special odor, but a few seconds
after the stopper has been put back in
the bottle, the whole room begins to
smell of fresh violets. It seems to be a
question of dilution. It is impossible,
however, to make a usable extract by
mere dilution of a 10 per cent solution of
ionone.
It is advisable to make these prepara-
tions in somewhat large quantities, say
30 to 50 pounds at a time. This en-
ables them to be stocked for some time,
whereby they improve greatly. When
all the ingredients are mixed, 10 days or
a fortnight, with frequent shakings,
should elapse before filtration. The
filtered product must be kept in well-
filled and well-corked bottles in a dry,
dark, cool place, such as a well- ventilated
cellar. After 5 or 6 weeks the prepara-
tion is ready for use.
Quadruple Extract.— By weight
Jasmine extract, 1st
pomade 100 parts
Rose extract, 1st
pomade 100 parts
Cassia extract, 1st
pomade 200 parts
Violet extract, 1st
pomade 200 parts
Oil of geranium,
Spanish 2 parts
Solution of vanil-
lin, 10 per cent. . 10 parts
Solution of orris,
10 per cent 100 parts
Solution of io-
none, 10 per cent 20 parts
Infusion of musk . . 10 parts
Infusion of orris
from coarsely
ground root 260 parts
Triple Extract.— By weight
Cassia extract, 2d
pomade 100 parts
Violet extract, 2d
pomade 300 parts
Jasmine extract,
2d pomade 100 parts
Rose extract, 2d
pomade 100 parts
Oil of geranium,
African 1 part
lonone, 10 per cent 15 parts
Solution of vanil-
lin, 10 per cent. . 5 parts
Infusion of orris
from coarse
ground root .... 270 parts
Infusion of musk . . 10 parts
Double Extract. — jjv weight
Cassia extract, 2d
pomade 100 parts
Violet extract, 2d
pomade 150 parts
Jasmine extract,
2d pomade 100 parts
Rose extract, 2d
pomade 100 parts
Oil of geranium,
reunion 2 parts
lonone, 10 per cent 10 parts
Solution of vanil-
lin, 10 per cent. . 10 parts
Infusion of am-
brette 20 parts
Infusion of orris
from coarse
ground root 300 parts
Spirit 210 parts
White Rose. —
Rose oil 25 minims
Rose geranium oil . . 20 minims
Patchouli oil 5 minims
lonone 3 minims
Jasmine oil (syn-
thetic) 5 minims
Alcohol 10 ounces
Ylang-Ylang Perfume. —
I. — Ylang-ylang oil 10 minims
Neroli oil. » 5 minims
Rose oil 5 minims
Bergamot oil 3 minims
Alcohol 10 ounces
One grain of musk may be added.
II. — Extract of cassie (2d) 96 ounces
Extract of jasmine
. 24 ounces
PERFUMES
519
Extract of rose 24 ounces
Tincture of orris. ... 4 ounces
Oil of ylang-ylang . . 6 drachms
Glycerine 6 ounces
TOILET WATERS.
Toilet waters proper are perfumed
liquids designed more especially as re-
freshing applications to the person —
accessories to the bath and to the opera-
tions of the barber. They are used
sparingly on the handkerchief also, but
should not be of so persistent a char-
acter as the "extracts" commonly used
for that purpose, as they would then be
unsuitable as lotions.
Ammonia Water. — Fill a 6-ounce
ground glass stoppered bottle with a
rather wide mouth with pieces of am-
monium carbonate as large as a marble,
then drop in the following essential oils:
Oil of lavender.'. ... 30 drops
Oil of bergamot .... 30 drops
Oil of rose 10 drops
Oil of cinnamon. ... 10 drops
Oil of clove 10 drops
Finally fill the bottle with stronger
water of ammonia, put in the stopper and
let stand overnight.
Birch-Bud Water. — Alcohol (96 per
cent), 350 parts; water, 70 parts; soft
soap, 20 parts; glycerine, 15 parts; essen-
tial oil of birch buds, 5 parts; essence of
spring flowers, 10 parts; chlorophyll,
quantity sufficient to tint. Mix the
water with an equal volume of spirit
and dissolve the soap in the mixture.
Mix the oil and other ingredients with
the remainder of the spirit, add the soap
solution gradually, agitate well, allow to
stand for 8 days and filter. For use,
dilute with an equal volume of water.
Carmelite Balm Water. —
Melissa oil 30 minims
Sweet marjoram
oil 3 minims
Cinnamon oil .... 10 minims
Angelica oil 3 minims
Citron oil 30 minims
Clove oil 15 minims
Coriander oil .... 5 minims
Nutmeg oil 5 minims
Alcohol (90 per
cent) 10 fluidounces
Angelica oil is obtained principally
from the aromatic root of Angelica
archangelica* L. (N. O. Umbelliferae),
which is commonly cultivated for the
sake of the volatile oil which it yields.
Cypress Water. —
Essence of ambergris | ounce
Spirits of wine 1 gallon
Water 2 quarts
Distill a gallon.
Eau de Botot. —
Aniseed 80 parts
Clover 20 parts
Cinnamon cassia . . 20 parts
Cochineal 5 parts
Refined spirit 800 parts
Rose water 200 parts
Digest for 8 days and add
Tincture of amber-
gris 1 part
Peppermint oil. ... 10 parts
Eau de Lais. —
Eaa de cologne
Jasmine extract ....
Lemon essence
Balm water
Vetiver essence
Triple rose water. . .
Eau de Merveilleuse. —
Alcohol
Orange flower water
Peru balsam
Clove oil
Civet
Rose geranium oil . .
Rose oil
Neroli oil
Edelweiss. —
Bergamot oil
Tincture of am-
bergris
Tincture of veti-
ver (1 in 10).. . .
Heliotropin
Rose oil spirit (1
in 100)
Tincture of musk.
Tincture of angel-
ica
Neroli oil, artifi-
cial
Hyacinth, artifi-
cial
Jasmine, artificial.
Spirit of wine, 80
per cent
Honey Water. —
I. — Best honey 1 pound
Coriander seed 1 pound
Cloves 1$ ounces
Nutmegs.. 1 ounce
Gum benjamin 1 ounce
Vamlloes, No. 4 1 drachm
The yellow rind of 3 large lemons.
1 part
0.5 parts
0.5 parts
0.5 parts
0.5 parts
0.5 parts
3 quarts
4 quarts
2 ounces
4 ounces
1£ ounces
| ounce
4 drachm*
4 drachms
10 grams
2 grams
25 grams
5 grams
25 grams
5 drops
12 drops
10 drops
15 drops
1 gram
1,000 grams
520
PERFUMES
Bruise the cloves, nutmegs, coriander
seed, and benjamin, cut the vanilloes in
pieces, and put all into a glass alembic
with 1 gallon of clean rectified spirit,
and, after digesting 48 hours, draw off
the spirit by distillation. To 1 gallon of
the distilled spirit add
Damask rose water. 1J pounds
Orange flower water 1J pounds
Musk 5 grains
Ambergris 5 grains
Grind the musk and ambergris in a
glass mortar, and afterwards put all to-
gether into a digesting vessel, and let
them circulate 3 days and 3 nights in a
gentle heat; then let all cool. Filter, and
keep the water in bottles well stoppered.
II. — Oil of cloves 2£ drachms
Oil of bergamot .... 10 drachms
English oil of laven-
der 2 1 drachms
Musk 4 grains
Yellow sandalwood. 2£ drachms
Rectified spirit 32 ounces
Rose water 8 ounces
Orange flower water 8 ounces
English honey 2 ounces
Macerate the musk and sandalwood
in the spirit 7 days, filter, dissolve the oils
in the filtrate, add the other ingredients,
shake well, and do so occasionally, keep-
ing as long as possible before filtering.
Lilac Water.—
Terpineol 2 drachms
Heliotropin 8 grains
Bergamot oil 1 drachm
Neroli oil 8 minims
Alcohol 12 ounces
Water 4 ounces
Orange Flower Water. —
Orange flower es-
sence 8 ounces
Magnesium carbon-
ate 1 ounce
Water . . 8 pints
Triturate the essence with the mag-
nesium carbonate, add the water, and
filter.
To Clarify Turbid Orange Flower
Water. — Shake 1 quart of it with J pound
of sand which has previously been boiled
out with hydrochloric acid, washed with
water, and dried at red heat. This process
doubtless would prove valuable for many
other purposes.
Violet Waters.—
I. — Spirit of ionone, 10
per cent $ drachm
Distilled water 5 ounces
Orange flower water 1 ounce
Rose water 1 ounce
Cologne spirit 8 ounces
Add the spirit of ionone to the alcohol
and then add the waters. Let stand and
filter.
II. — Violet extract 2 ounces
Cassie extract 1 ounce
Spirit of rose \ ounce
Tincture of orris. ... \ ounce
Green coloring, a sufficiency.
Alcohol to 20 ounces.
PERFUMED PASTILLES.
These scent tablets consist of a com-
pressed mixture of rice starch, mag-
nesium carbonate, and powdered orris
root, -saturated with heliotrope, violet,
or lilac perfume.
Violet. —
Ionone 50 parts
Ylang-ylang oil 50 parts
Tincture of musk,
extra strong 200 parts
Tincture of benzoin . 200 parts
Heliotrope. —
Heliotropin 200 parts
Vanillin 50 parts
Tincture of musk. . . 100 parts
Tincture of benzoin . 200 parts
Lilac.—
Terpineol 200 parts
Muguet 200 parts
Tincture of musk. . .200 parts
Tincture of benzoin . 200 parts
Sandalwood 2 drachms
Vetivert 2 drachms
Lavender flowers. .. 4 drachms
Oil of thyme \ drachm
Charcoal 2 ounces
Potassium nitrate. . . \ ounce
Mucilage of tragacanth, a sufficient
quantity.
Perfumes for Hair Oils. —
I. — Heliotropin 8 grains
Coumarin 1 grain
Oil of orris 1 drop
Oil of rose 15 minims
Oil of bergamot .... 30 minims
II. — Coumarin 2 grains
Oil of cloves 4 drops
Oil of cassia 4 drops
Oil of lavender flow-
ers 15 minims
Oil of lemon 45 minims
Oil of bergamot .... 75 minims
Soap Perfumes. —
See also Soap.
I. — Oil of lavender \ ounce
Oil of cassia 30 minims
Add 5 pounds of soap stock.
PETROLEUM
521
II. — Oil of caraway
Oil of clove
Oil of white thyme. . 1£ drachms
Oil of cassia > of
Oil of orange leaf each
(neroli petit grain)
Oil of lavender
Add to 5 pounds of soap stock.
PERFUMES (FUMIGANTS):
See Ftimigants.
PERSPIRATION REMEDY:
See Cosmetics.
Petroleum
(See also Oils.)
The Preparation of Emulsions of
Crude Petroleum. — Kerosene has long
been recognized as a most efficient insec-
ticide, but its irritating action, as well as
the very considerable cost involved, has
prevented the use of the pure oil as a
local application in the various parasitic
skin diseases of animals.
In order to overcome these objections
various expedients have been resorted to,
all of which have for their object the dilu-
tion or emulsification of the kerosene.
Probably the best known and most gen-
erally employed method for accomplish-
ing this result is that which is based upon
the use of soap as an emulsifying agent.
The formula which is used almost uni-
versally for making the kerosene soap
emulsion is as follows:
Kerosene 2 gallons
Water 1 gallon
Hard soap \ pound
The soap is dissolved in the water with
the aid of heat, and while this solution is
still hot the kerosene is added and the
whole agitated vigorously. The smooth
white mixture which is obtained in this way
is diluted before use with sufficient water
to make a total volume of 20 gallons, and
is usually applied to the skin of animals
or to trees or other plants by means of a
spray pump. This method of applica-
tion is used because the diluted emulsion
separates quite rapidly, and some me-
chanical device, such as a • self-mixing
spray pump, is required to keep the oil
in suspension.
It will be readily understood that
this emulsion would not be well adapted
either for use as a dip or for application
by hand, for in the one case the oil,
which rapidly rises to the surface, would
adhere to the animals when they emerged
from the dipping tank and the irritating
effect would be scarcely less than that
produced by the plain oil, and in the
second case the same separation of the
kerosene would take place and necessa-
rily result in an uneven distribution of the
oil on the bodies of the animals which
were being treated.
Within recent years it has been found
that a certain crude petroleum frcm the
Beaumont oil fields is quite effective for
destroying the Texas fever cattle ticks.
This crude petroleum contains from 40
to 50 per cent of oils boiling below
300° C. (572° F.), and from 1 to 1.5 per
cent of sulphur. After a number of
trials of different combinations of crude
oil, soap, and water, the following for-
mula was decided upon as the one best
suited to the uses in view:
Crude petroleum 2 gallons
Water £ gallon
Hard soap | pound
Dissolve the soap in the water with
the aid of heat; to this solution add the
crude petroleum, mix with a spray pump
or shake vigorously, and dilute with the
desired amount of water. Soft water
should, of course, be used. Various
forms of hard and soft soaps have been
tried, but soap with an amount of free
alkali equivalent to 0.9 per cent of sodium
hydroxide gives the best emulsion. All
the ordinary laundry soaps are quite sat-
isfactory, but toilet soaps. in the main
are not suitable.
An emulsion of crude petroleum made
according to this modified formula re-
mains fluid and can be easily poured; it
will stand indefinitely without any ten-
dency toward a separation of the oil and
water and can be diluted in any propor-
tion with cold soft water. After suffi-
cient dilution to produce a 10 per cent
emulsion, a number of hours are re-
quired for all the oil to rise to the
surface, but if the mixture is agitated
occasionally, no separation takes place.
After long standing the oil separates in
the form of a creamlike layer which is
easily mixed with the water again by
stirring. It is therefore evident that for
producing an emulsion which will hold
the oil in suspension after dilution, the
modified formula meets the desired re-
quirements.
In preparing this emulsion for use in
the field, a large spray pump capable of
mixing 25 gallons may be used with
perfect success.
In using the formula herewith given,
it should be borne in mind that it is
recommended especially for the crude
PETROLEUM —PICTURES
petroleum obtained from the Beaumont
oil fields, the composition of which has
already been given. As crude petroleums
from different sources vary greatly in their
composition, it is impracticable to give a
formula that can be used with all crude
oils. Nevertheless, crude petroleum
from other sources than the Beaumont
wells may be emulsified by modifying
the formula given above. In order to
determine what modification of this
formula is necessary for the emulsifica-
tion of a given oil, the following method
may be used:
Dissolve \ pound of soap in \ gallon of
hot water; to 1 measure of this soap
solution add 4 measures of the crude
petroleum to be tested and shake well
in a stoppered bottle or flask for several
minutes.
If, after dilution, there is a separation
of a layer of pure oil within half an hour
the emulsion is imperfect, and a modifi-
cation of the formula will be required.
To accomplish this the proportion of oil
should be varied until a good result is
obtained.
Petroleum for Spinning. — In order to
be able to wash out the petroleum or
render it "saponifiable," the following
process is recommended: Heat the min-
eral oil with 5 to 10 per cent of plein,
add the proper amount of alcoholic lye
and continue heating until the solvent
(water alcohol) evaporates. A prac-
tical way is to introduce an aqueous lye
at 230° F. in small portions and to heat
until the froth disappears. For clearness
it is necessary merely to evaporate all the
water. In the same manner, more olein
may be added as desired if the admixture
of lye is kept down so that not too much
soap is formed or the petroleum be-
comes too thick. After cooling, a uni-
form gelatinous mass results. This is
liquefied mechanically, during or after
the cooling, by passing it through fine
sieves. Soap is so finely and intimately
distributed in the petroleum that the fin-
est particles of oil are isolated by soap, as
it were. When a quantity of oil is
intimately stirred into the water an
emulsion results so that the different
parts cannot be distinguished. The
same process takes place in washing, the
soap contained in the oil swelling be-
tween the fibers and the oil particles
upon mixture with water, isolating the
oil and lifting it from the fiber.
Deodorized Petroleum. — Petroleum
may be deodorized by shaking it first
witn 100 parts of chlorinated lime for
every 4,500 parts, adding a little hydro-
chloric acid, then transferring the liquid
to a vessel containing lime, and again
shaking until all the chlorine is removed.
After standing, the petroleum is de-
canted.
Petroleum Briquettes. — Mix with 1,000
parts of petroleum oil 150 parts of
ground soap, 150 parts of rosin, and 300
parts of caustic soda lye. Heat this
mixture while stirring. When solidifi-
cation commences, which will be in
about 40 minutes, the operation must be
watched. If the mixture tends to over-
flow, pour into the receiver a few drops
of soda, and continue to stir until the
solidification is complete. When the
operation is ended, flow the matter into
molds for making the briquettes, and
place them for 10 or 15 minutes in a
stove; then they may be allowed to cool.
The briquettes can be employed a few
hours after they are made.
To the three elements constituting the
mixture it is useful to add per 1,000 parts
by weight of the briquettes to be ob-
tained, 120 parts of sawdust and 120
parts of clay or sand, to render the
briquettes more solid.
Experiments in the heating of these
briquettes have demonstrated that they
will furnish three times as much heat as
briquettes of ordinary charcoal, without
leaving, any residue.
PETROLEUM EMULSION:
See Insecticides.
PETROLEUM JELLIES:
See Lubricants.
PETROLEUM SOAP:
See Soap.
PEWTER:
See Alloys.
PEWTER, TO CLEAN:
. See Cleaning Preparations and Meth-
ods.
PEWTER, AGEING:
If it is desired to impart to modern ar-
ticles of pewter the appearance of an-
tique objects, plunge the pieces for several
moments into a solution of alum to which
several drops of hydrochloric or sulph
acid have been added.
uric
PICTURES, GLOW.
These can be easily produced by draw-
ing the outlines of a picture, writing, etc.,
on a piece of white paper with a solution
of 40 parts of saltpeter and 20 parts of
gum arabic in 40 parts of warm water,
using a writing pen for this purpose. All
the lines must connect and one of them
PHOSPHATE SUBSTITUTE—PHOTOGRAPHY
must run to the edge of the paper, where
it should be marked with a fine lead-
Eencil line. When a burning match is
eld to this spot, the line immediately
glows on, spreading over the whole de-
sign, and the design formerly invisible
finally appears entirely singed. This
little trick is not dangerous.
PHOSPHATE SUBSTITUTE.
An artificial phosphate is thus pre-
pared: Melt in an oven a mixture of 100
parts of phosphorite, ground coarsely, 70
parts of acid sulphate of soda; 20 parts of
carbonate of lime; 22 parts of sand, and
607 parts of charcoal. Run the molten
matter into a receiver filled with water;
on cooling it will become granular. Rake
out the granular mass from the water,
and after drying, grind to a fine powder.
The phosphate can be kept for a long
time without losing its quality, for it is
neither caustic nor hygroscopic. Wag-
ner has, in collaboration with Dorsch,
conducted fertilizing experiments for
determining its value, as compared with
superphosphate or with Thomas slag.
The phosphate decomposes more rapidly
in the soil than Thomas slag, and so far
as the experiments have gone, it appears
that the phosphoric acid of the new phos-
phate exercises almost as rapid an action
as the phosphoric acid of the superphos-
phate soluble in water. <^v
PHOSPHORESCENT MASS.
See also Luminous Bodies and Paints.
Mix 2 parts of dehydrated sodium
carbonate, 0.5 parts of sodium chloride,
and 0.2 parts of manganic sulphate with
100 parts of strontium carbonate and 30
parts of sulphur and heat 3 hours to a
white heat with exclusion of air.
PHOSPHOR BRONZE:
See Alloys, under Bronzes.
PHOSPHORUS SUBSTITUTE.
G. Graveri recommends persul fo-
cyanic acid = H2(CN)yS3 as meeting all
the requirements of phosphorus on
matches. It resists shock and friction,
it is readily friable, and will mix with
other substances; moreover, it is non-
poisonous and cheaper than phosphorus.
Photography
DEVELOPERS AND DEVELOPING
OF PLATES.
No light is perfectly safe or non-actinic,
even that coming through a combined
ruby and orange window or lamp.
Therefore use great care in developing.
A light may be tested this way: Place a
dry plate in the plate holder in total
darkness, draw the slide sufficiently to
expose one-half of the plate, and allow
the light from the window or lamp, 12 to
18 inches distant, to fall on this exposed
half for 3 or 4 minutes. Then develop
the plate the usual length of time in total
darkness. If the light is safe, there will
be no darkening of the exposed part. If
not safe, the remedy is obvious.
The developing room must be a per-
fectly dark room, save for the light from
a ruby- or orange-colored window (or
combination of these two colors). Have
plenty of pure running water and good
ventilation.
Plates should always be kept in a dry
room. The dark room is seldom a safe
place for storage, because it is apt to be
damp.
Various developing agents give differ-
ent results. Pyrogallic acid in combi-
nation with carbonate of sodium or
carbonate of . potassium gives strong,
vigorous negatives. Eikonogen and metol
yield soft, delicate negatives. Hydro-
chinon added to eikonogen or metol
produces more contrast or greater
strength.
It is essential to have a bottle of bro-
mide of potassium solution,, 10 per cent,
in the dark room. (One ounce of bromide
of potassium, water to 10 ounces.) Over-
timed plates may be much improved
by adding a few drops of bromide solu-
tion to the developer as soon as the
overtimed condition is apparent (a plate
is overtimed when the image appears
almost immediately, and then blackens
all over).
Undertimed plates should be taken
out of the developer and placed in a tray
of water where no light can reach them.
If the detail in the shadows begins to ap-
pear after half an hour or so, the plate
can be replaced in the developer and de-
velopment brought to a finish.
Quick development, with strong solu-
tions, means a lack of gradation or half-
tones.
A developer too warm or containing
too much alkali (carbonate of sodium or
potassium) will yield flat, foggy nega-
tives.
A developer too cold is retarded in its
action, and causes thin negatives.
Uniform temperature is necessary for
uniform results.
If development is continued too long,
the negative will be too dense.
In warm weather, the developer
should be diluted; in cold weather, it
should be stronger.
524
PHOTOGRAPHY
The negative should not be exposed to
white light until fixation is complete.
The negative should be left fully 5
minutes longer in the fixing bath than is
necessary to dissolve out the white bro-
mide of silver.
In hot weather a chrome alum fixing
bath should be used to prevent frilling.
Always use a fresh hypo or fixing bath.
Hypo is cheap.
Plates and plate holders must be kept
free from dust, or pinholes will result.
After the negative is fixed, an hour's
washing is none too much.
The plate should be dried quickly in
warm weather else the film will become
dense and coarse-grained.
Do not expect clean, faultless negatives
to come out of dirty developing and fix-
ing solutions and trays.
Pyro and Soda Developer. —
I. — Pure water 30 ounces
Sulphite soda, crys-
tals 5 ounces
Carbonate soda*,
crystals 2£ ounces
II. — Pure water 24 ounces
Oxalic acid 15 grains
Pyrogallic acid 1 ounce
To develop, take of
Solution No. 1 1 ounce
Solution No. II £ ounce
Pure water 3 ounces
More water may be used in warm
weather and less in cool weather.
If solution No. I is made by hydrom-
eter test, use equal parts of the follow-
ing:
Sulphite soda testing, 80°.
Carbonate soda testing, .40°.
One ounce of this mixture will be equiv-
alent to 1 ounce of solution No. I.
Pyro and Potassium Developer. —
I. — Pure water 32 ounces
Sulphite soda, crys-
tals 8 ounces
Carbonate p o t a s -
sium, dry 1 ounce
II. — Pure water 24 ounces
Oxalic acid 15 ounces
Pyrogallic acid 1 ounce
To develop, take of
Solution No. 1 1 ounce
Solution No. II Bounce
Pure water 3 ounces
When the plate is fully developed, if
the lights are too thin, use less water in
the developer; if too dense, use more
water.
Pyro and Metol Developer. — Good for
short exposures:
I. — Pure water 57 ounces
Sulphite soda, crys-
tals 2£ ounces
Metol 1 ounce
II. — Pure water 57 ounces
Sulphite soda, crys-
tals 2 \ ounces
Pyrogallic acid \ ounce
III. — Pure water 57 ounces
Carbonate p o t a s -
sium 2^ ounces
To develop, take of
Pure water 3 ounces
Solution No. 1 1 ounce
Solution No. II 1 ounce
Solution No. III. ... 1 ounce
This developer may be used repeat-
edly by adding a little fresh developer as
required.
Keep the used developer in a separate
bottle.
Rodinal Developer. — One part rodinal
to 30 parts pure water.
Use repeatedly, adding fresh as re-
quired.
Bromo -Hydrochinon Developer. — For
producing great contrast and intensity,
also for developing over-exposed plates.
I. — Distilled or ice water 25 ounces
Sulphite of soda, crys-
tals 3 ounces
Hydrochinon \ ounce
Bromide of potas-
sium \ ounce
Dissolve by warming, and let cool be-
fore use.
II. — Water 25 ounces
Carbonate of soda,
crystals 6 ounces
Mix Nos. I and II, equal parts, for use.
Eikonogen Hydrochinon Developer. —
I. — Distilled or pure
well water 32 ounces
Sodium sulphite,
crystals 4 ounces
Eikonogen 240 grains
Hydrochinon 60 grains
II. — Water 32 ounces
Carbonate of potash 4 ounces
To develop, take
No. 1 2 ounces
No. II 1 ounce
* Water.. 1 ounce
*For double-coated plates use 5 ounces of
water.
PHOTOGRAPHY
525
By hydrometer:
I. — Sodium sulphite.
solution to test 30 34 ounces
Eikonogen 240 grains
Hydrochinon 60 grains
II. — Carbonate of pot-
ash solution to
test 50
To develop, take
No. I 2 ounces
No. II 1 ounce
*W7ater 1 ounce
Hydrochinon Developer. —
I. — Hydrochinon 1 ounce
Sulphite of soda,
crystals 5 ounces
Bromide of potas-
sium 10 grains
Water (ice or dis-
tilled) 55 ounces
II. — Caustic potash 180 grains
Water 10 ounces
To develop:
Take of I, 4 ounces; II, £ ounce. Af-
ter use pour into a separate bottle. This
can be used repeatedly, and with uni-
formity of results, by the addition of 1
drachm of I and 10 drops of II to every
8 ounces of old developer.
In using this developer it is important
to notice the temperature of the room,
as a slight variation in this respect causes
a very marked difference in the time it
takes to develop, much more so than with
pyro. The temperature of room should
be from 70° to 75° F.
Metol Developer. —
I. — Water 8 ounces
Metol 100 grains
Sulphite of soda,
crystals 1 ounce
II. — Water 10 ounces
Potassium carbonate 1 ounce
Take equal parts of I and II and 6
parts of water. If more contrast is
needed, take equal parts of I and II and
3 parts of water, with 5 drops to the
ounce of a iV solution of bromide of
potassium.
Metol and Hydrochinon Developer. —
I. — Pure hot water 80 ounces
Metol 1 ounce
Hydrochinon J ounce
Sulphite soda, crys-
tals 6 ounces
*For double-coated plates use 5 ounces of
water.
II. — Pure water 80 ounces
Carbonate soda,
crystals 5 ounces
To develop, take of
Pure water 2 ounces
Solution No. 1 1 ounce
Solution No. II 1 ounce
Metol-Bicarbonate Developer. — Thor-
oughly dissolve
Metol 1 ounce
In water 60 ounces
Then add
Sulphite of soda,
crystals 6 ounces
Bicarbonate of soda. 3 ounces
To prepare with hydrometer, mix
Sulphite of soda so-
lution, testing 75.. 30 ounces
Bicarbonate of soda
solution, testing 50 30 ounces
Metol 1 ounce
Dissolved in 12 ounces water.
Ferrous -O xalate Developer . — For
transparencies and opals.
I. — Oxalate of potash. . . 8 ounces
Water 30 ounces
Citric acid 60 grains
Citrate of ammonia
solution. . 2 ounces
II. — Sulphate of iron .... 4 ounces
Water 32 ounces
Sulphuric acid 16 drops
III. — Citrate of ammonia
solution saturated.
Dissolve 1 ounce citric acid in 5 ounces
distilled water, add liquor ammonia un-
til a slip of litmus paper just loses the
red color, then add water to make the
whole measure 8 ounces.
Add 1 ounce of II to 2 of I, and $ ounce
of water, and 3 to 6 drops of 10 per cent
solution bromide potassium.
To develop, first rinse developing dish
with water, lay film or plate down, and
flow with sufficient developer to well
cover. Careful attention must be given
to its action, and when detail is just
showing in the face, or half-tone lights in
a view, pour off developer, and well wash
the film before placing in the fixing bath.
Tolidol Developer. — Standard formula
for dry plates and films:
Water 16 ounces
Tolidol 24 grains
Sodium sul-
phite 72 (144) grains
Sodium car-
bonate 96 (240) grains
The figures in parenthesis are for crys-
tals. It will be seen that in every case
526
PHOTOGRAPHY
the weight of sulphite required in crys-
tals is double that of dry sulphite,
while the weight of carbonate crystals is
2| times as much as dry carbonate.
For tank development Dr. John M.
Nicol recommends the standard formula
diluted with 6 times the amount of water,
and the addition of 1 drop of retarder to
every ounce after dilution.
To obtain very strong negatives:
Water 16 ounces
Tolidol 50 to 65 grains
Sodium sul-
phite 80 (160) grains
Sodium car-
bonate 120 (300) grains
On some brands of plates the addition
of a little retarder will be necessary.
If stock solutions are preferred, they
may be made as follows:
Solution A
Water 32 ounces
Tolidol 1 ounce
Sodium sulphite. . 1 (2) ounce
Solution B
Water 32 ounces
Sodium sulphite. . 2 (4) ounces
Solution C
Water. 32 ounces
Sodium carbonate 4 (10) ounces
If preferred, stock solutions B and C
can be made by hydrometer, instead of
by weight as above. The solutions will
then show:
Solution B
Sodium sulphite. ... 40
Solution C
Sodium carbonate . . 75
Or if potassium carbonate is preferred
instead of sodium:
Solution C
Potassium carbonate 60
For standard formula for dry plates
and films, mix
Solution A 1 part
Solution B 1 part
Solution C 1 part
Water 7 parts
For strong negatives (for aristo-pla-
tino) :
Solution A I$to2 parts
Solution B 1 part
Solution C 1 part
Water 4 to 4£ parts
For tank development:
Solution A 1 part
Solution B 1 part
Solution C 1 part
Water 35 parts
For developing paper:
Solution A 2 parts
Solution B 2 parts
Solution C 1 part
The reading of the hydrometer for
stock solutions is the same whether
dried chemicals or crystals are used.
No water is used.
Pyrocatechin-Phosphate Developer. —
Solution A
Crystallized sulphite
of soda 386 grains
Pyrocatechin 77 grains
Water 8 ounces
Solution B
Ordinary crystal
Phosphate of so-
ium 725 grains
Caustic soda (puri-
fied in sticks) 77 grains
Water 8 ounces
Mix 1 part of A with 1 part of B and
from 1 to 3 parts of water. If the ex-
posure is not absolutely normal we
recommend to add to the above develop-
er a few drops of a solution of bromide
of potassium (1.10).
Pyrocatechin Developer (One Solu-
tion).— Dissolve in the following range:
Sulphite of soda crys-
tallized 25 £ drachms
Caustic soda (puri-
fied in sticks) .... 3| drachms
Distilled water 14 ounces
Pyrocatechin 308 grains
The pyrocatechin must not be added
until the sulphite and caustic soda are
entirely dissolved. For use the con-
centrated developer is to be diluted with
from 10 to 20 times as much water. The
normal proportion is 1 part of developer
in 15 parts of water.
Vogel's Pyrocatechin Combined De-
veloper and Fixing Solution. —
Sulphite of soda
crystallized 468 grains
Water 2| ounces
Caustic potash
(purif ie d in
sticks) 108 grains
Pyrocatechin 108 grains
Mix for a formally fixing plate of
5x7 inches.
Developer 3 drachms
Fixing soda solution
(1:5) 5£ drachms
Water 1 ounce
The process of developing and fixing
with this solution is accomplished in a
PHOTOGRAPHY
527
few minutes. The picture first appears
usually, strengthens very quickly, and
shortly after the fixing is entirely done.
Ellon's Pyrocatechin Developer. —
Pyrocatechin, 2 per cent solution (2
grams pyrocatechin in 100 cubic centi-
meters of water).
Carbonate of potassium, 10 per cent
solution (10 grams carbonate in 100
cubic centimeters of water).
For use take equal parts and add water
as desired.
Imperial Standard Pyro Developer.—
I. — Metabisulphite of
potassium 120 grains
Pyrogallic acid .... 55 grains
Bromide of potas-
sium 20 grains
Metol 45 grains
Water 20 ounces
II. — Carbonate of soda. 4 ounces
Water 20 ounces
For use mix equal parts I and II.
BardwelPs Pyro -Acetone Developer. —
Water 4 ounces
Sulphite of sodium
(saturated s o 1 u -
tion) 4 drachms
Acetone 2 drachms
Pyro 10 grams
Hauff's Adurol Developer. — One so-
lution.
Water 10 ounces
Sulphide of sodium,
crystals 4 ounces
Carbonate of potas-
sium 3 ounces
Adurol £ ounce
For studio work and snap shots take
1 part with 3 parts water.
For time exposures out-door take 1
part with 5 parts water.
Glycin Developer. —
I. — Hot water 10 ounces
Sulphite of sodium,
crystals 11 ounces
Carbonate of sodium | ounce
Glycin \ ounce
Add to water in order given.
II. — Water 10 ounces
Carbonate of potash \\ ounces
For normal exposure take I, 1 ounce;
II, 2 ounces; water, 1 ounce.
Imogen Developer. —
I. — Hot water 9 ounces
Sulphite of sodium,
crystals 385 grains
Imogen 123 grains
II. — Hot water 4£ ounces
Carbonate of sodium 2 ounces
For use take 2 ounces of I and 1 ounce
of II.
Diogen Developer. —
Water 9 ounces
Sulphite of sodium. . 3£ ounces
Diogen 7 drachms
Carbonate of potas-
sium 4 £ ounces
For normal exposure take 4 drachms
of this solution; dilute with 2 ounces, 1
drachm of water, and add 2 drops bromide
of potassium, 10 per cent solution.
Ortol Developer. — Formula by Pent-
large.
I. — Water 1 ounce
Metabisulphite o f
potassium 4 grains
Ortol 8 grains
II. — Water 1 ounce
Sulphite of sodium. . 48 grains
Carbonate of potas-
sium 16 grains
Carbonate of sodium 32 grains
For use take equal parts I and II, and
an equal bulk of water.
Metacarbol Developer. —
Metacarbol 25 grains
Sulphite of soda,
crystals 100 grains
Caustic soda 50 grains
Water 10 ounces
Dissolve the metacarbol in water, then
add the sulphite, and when dissolved add
the caustic soda and filter.
DEVELOPING POWDERS.
By weight
I. — Pyrogallol 0.3 parts
Sodium bisulphite . . 1.2 parts
Sodium carbonate . . 1.2 parts
II. — Eikonogen 1.1 parts
Sodium sulphite. ... 2.4 parts
Potassium carbonate 1.5 parts
III. — Hydroquinone 0.6 parts
Sodium sulphite. ... 3.4 parts
Potassium bromide. 0.3 parts
Sodium carbonate . . 7.0 parts
These three formulas each yield one
powder. The powders should be put up
in oiled paper, and carefully inclosed,
besides, in a wrapper of black paper.
For use, one powder is dissolved in about
60 parts of distilled water.
DEVELOPING PAPERS.
Light. — The paper can be safely
handled 8 feet from the source of light
528
PHOTOGRAPHY
which may be Welsbach gas light, cov-
ered with post-office paper, incandes-
cent light, ordinary gas light, kerosene
light, or reduced daylight, the latter pro-
duced by covering a window with one or
more thicknesses of orange post-office
paper, as necessitated by strength of light.
Expose by holding the printing frame
close to gas, lamp, or incandescent light,
or to subdued daylight. Artificial light
is recommended in preference to day-
light because of uniformity, and it being
in consequence easier to judge the proper
length of time to expose.
Exposure. — The amount of exposure
required varies with the strength of the
light; it takes about the same time with an
ordinary gas burner and an incandescent
light; a Welsbach gas light requires only
about one-half as much time as the ordi-
nary gas burner, and a kerosene light of
ordinary size about three times as much
as an ordinary gas burner. If day-
light is to be used the window should be
covered with post-office paper, in which
a sub-window about 1 foot square for
making the exposure may be made.
Cover this window first with a piece of
white tissue paper, then with a piece of
black cloth or post-office paper to ex-
clude the white light when not wanted.
Make exposure according to strength of
light at from 1 to 2 feet away from the
tissue paper. Keep the printing frame
when artificial light is used constantly in
motion during exposure.
Timing the Exposure. — The time
necessary for exposing is regulated by
density of negative and strength of light.
The further away the negative is from
the source of light at the time of ex-
posure the weaker the light; hence, in
order to secure uniformity in exposure
it is desirable always to make the exposure
at a given distance from the light used.
With a negative of medium density exposed
1 foot from an ordinary gas burner, from 1
to 10 minutes' exposure is required.
A test to ascertain the length of ex-
posure should be made. Once the
proper amount of exposure is ascer-
tained with a given light, the amount of
exposure required can be easily approx-
imated by making subsequent exposures
at the same distance from the same
light; the only difference that it would
then be necessary to make would be to
allow for variation in density of different
negatives.
Fixing. — Allow the prints to remain in
the fixing solution 10 to 20 minutes, when
they should be removed to a tray con-
taining clear water.
Washing. — Wash 1 hour in running
water, or in 10 or 12 changes of clear
water, allowing prints to soak 2 to 3
minutes in each change.
Pyrocatechin Formula. —
Solution A
Pyrocatechin 2 parts
Sulphite of soda,
crystals 2.5 parts
Water , . . . 100 parts
Solution B
Carbonate of soda . 10 parts
Water 100 parts
Before using mix 20 parts of Solution
A, and $ part of Solution B.
Metol Quinol. —
Water 10 ounces
Metol 7 grains
Sodium sulphite,
crystals, pure £ ounce
Hydroquinone 30 grains
Sodium carbonate,
dessicated 200 grains
(or 400 grains
of crystallized
carbonate).
Ten per cent bro-
mide of potassium
solution, about. . . 10 drops
Amidol Formula. —
Water 4 ounces
Sodium sulphite,
crystals, pure . . . 200 grains
Amidol, about 20 grains
Ten per cent bro-
mide of potas-
sium solution,
about 5 drops
If the blacks are greenish, add more
amidol; if whites are grayish, add more
bromide of potassium.
Hypo -Acid Fixing Bath. —
Hypo 16 ounces
Water 64 ounces
Then add the following hardening
solution:
Water 5 ounces
Sodium sulphite,
crystals | ounce
Commercial acetic
acid (containing
25 per cent pure
acid) 3 ounces
Powdered alum Bounce
Amidol Developer. —
Amidol 2 grains
Sodium sulphite. . . 30 grains
Potassium bromide. 1 grain
Water.. 1 ounce
PHOTOGRAPHY
529
With a fairly correct exposure this will
be found to produce prints of a rich
black tone, and of good quality. The
whole secret of successful bromide
Frinting lies in correctness of exposure,
t is generally taken for granted that any
poor, flat negative is good enough to
yield a bromide print, but this is not so.
A negative of good printing quality on
printing-out paper will also yield a good
print on bromide paper, but considerable
care and skill are necessary to < " ^ain a
good result from a poor negativ at.e.The
above developer will not keep in t,Py ' tion,
and should be freshly prepared i-s re-
quired. The same formula will also be
found useful for the development of
lantern plates, but will only yield black-
toned slides.
PLATINUM PAPERS:
General Instructions. — To secure the
most brilliant results the sensitized paper,
before, during, and after its exposure to
light, must be kept as dry as possible.
The paper is exposed to daylight, in the
printing frame, for about one-third of the
time necessary for ordinary silver paper.
The print is then immersed in the
developer for about 30 seconds, then
cleared in 3 acid baths containing 1
part of muriatic acid C. P. to 60 parts
of water, washed for a short time in
running water, the whole operation of
printing, clearing, and washing being
complete in about half an hour.
As a general rule all parts of the pic-
ture except the highest lights should be
visible when the exposure is complete.
When examining the prints in the
printing frames, care should be taken
not to expose them unduly to light; for
the degradation of the whites of the
paper due to slight action of light is not
visible until after development.
Ansco Platinum Paper. — Print until a
trace of the detail desired is slightly visi-
ble in the high lights.
Development. — Best results are ob-
tained with the temperature of the de-
veloper from 60° to 80° F. Immerse
the print in the developer with a quick
sweeping motion to prevent air bells.
Develop in artificial or weak daylight.
The development of a print from a nor-
mal negative will require 40 seconds or
more.
Formula for Developer. —
Water 50 ounces
Neutral oxalate of
potash 8 ounces
Potassium p h o s -
phate (monobasic) 1 ounce
Care must be used to obtain the mono-
basic potassium phosphate.
Immediately after prints are devel-
oped, place them face down in the first
acid bath, composed of
Muriatic acid, C. P. 1 ounce
Water 60 ounces
After remaining in this bath for a pe-
riod of about 5 minutes, transfer to the
second acid bath of the same strength.
The prints should pass through at least
3 and preferably 4 acid baths, to re-
move all traces of iron that may re-
main in the pores of the paper.
When thoroughly cleared, the print
should be washed from 10 to 20 minutes
in running water. If running water is
not available, several changes of water in
the tray will be necessary.
"Water Tone" Platinum Paper. —
"Water tone" platinum paper is very
easily affected by moisture; it will, there-
fore, be noticed when printing in warm,
damp weather that the print will show
quite a tendency to print out black in the
deep shadows. This must not be taken
into consideration, as the same amount
of exposure is necessary as in dry days.
Print by direct light (sunlight pre-
ferred) until the shadows are clearly out-
lined in a deep canary color. At this stage
the same detail will be observed in the
half tones that the finished print will
show. For developing, use plain water,
heated to 120° F. (which will be as hot
as they can bear).
The development will be practically
instantaneous, and care must be taken to
avoid air bubbles forming upon the sur-
face of the prints. Place prints, after
developing, directly into a clearing bath
of muriatic acid, 1 drachm to 12 ounces
of water, and let them remain in this
bath about 10 minutes, when they are
ready for the final washing of 15 minutes
in running water, or 5 changes of about
3 minutes each. Lay out between blot-
ters to dry, and mount by attaching the
corners.
Bradley Platinum Paper. — Developer.
A. — For black tones:
Neutral oxalate potas-
sium 8 ounces
Potassium phosphate .. 1 ounce
Water 30 ounces
B. — For sepia tones:
Of above mixed solu-
tion 8 ounces
Saturated bichloride
mercury solution . . 1 ounce
Citrate soda 5 grains
530
PHOTOGRAPHY
If deep red tones are desired add to B
Nitrate uranium 10 grains
Then filter and use as a developer.
W. & C. Platinotype. — Development. —
The whole contents of the box of the
W. & C. developing salts must be dis-
solved at one time, as the salts are mixed;
and if this be not done, too large a pro-
portion of one of the ingredients may be
used.
Development should be conducted in
a feeble white light, similar to that used
when cutting up the paper, or by gas
light.
It may take place immediately after
the print is exposed, or at the end of the
day's printing.
Develop by floating the print, exposed
side downwards, on the developing solu-
tion.
Development may take 30 seconds or
more.
During the hot summer days it is not
advisable to unduly delay the develop-
ment of exposed prints. If possible
develop within 1 hour after printing.
Either porcelain or agate — preferably
porcelain — dishes are necessary to hold
the developing solution.
To clear the developed prints: These
must be washed in a series of baths (not
less than three) of a weak solution of
muriatic acid C. P. This solution is
made by mixing 1 part of acid in 60
parts of water.
As soon as the print has been removed
from the developing dish it must be im-
mersed face downwards in the first bath
of this acid, contained in a porcelain
dish, in which it should remain about 5
minutes; meanwhile other prints follow
until all are developed. The prints
must then be removed to a second acid
bath for about 10 minutes; afterwards to
the third bath for about 15 minutes.
While the prints remain in these acid
baths they should be moved so that the
solution has free access to their surfaces,
but care should be taken not to abrade
them by undue friction.
Pure muriatic acid must be used.
If commercial muriatic acid be used,
the prints will be discolored and turn
yellow.
For each batch of prints fresh acid
baths must be used.
After the prints have passed through
the acid baths they should be well
washed in three changes of water during
about a half hour. It is advisable to add
a pinch of washing soda to the second
washing water to neutralize any acid
remaining in the print. Do not use
water that contains iron, as it tends to
turn paper yellow. Soft water is the
best for this purpose.
W. & C. Sepia Paper. — With a few
exceptions the method of carrying out
the operations is the same as for the
"black" kinds of platinotype paper.
The following points should be attended
to:
The "sepia" paper is more easily
affected by faint light, and, therefore,
increased care must be taken when
printiJ ;.
To Cjevelop, add to each ounce of the
developing solution 1J drachms of sepia
solution supplied for this purpose, and
proceed as described for black paper.
The solution must be heated to a
temperature of 150° to 160° F., to obtain
the greatest amount of brilliance and the
warmest color, but very good results can
be obtained by using a cooler developer.
Variations of the Sepia Developer. —
Primarily the object of the sepia solution
in the developer is to increase the
brightness of the prints, as, for example,
when the negative is thin and flat, or
pense and flat, the addition of the sepia
solution to the developer clears up, to
some extent, the flatness of the print by
taking out traces of the finer detail in the
higher lights, which is often a decided
improvement. If, however, the nega-
tive be dense, with clear shadows, the
sepia solution may be discarded alto-
gether. This will prevent the loss of
any of the finer detail and greatly reduce
harshness in the prints. Sometimes a
half, or even a quarter, of the quantity
of the sepia solution recommended as an
addition to the developer will be suffi-
cient, depending altogether upon the
strength of the negatives. Prints de-
veloped without the solution have less of
the sepia quality but are very agreeable
nevertheless. It should be remembered
that the sepia paper is totally different
from the black, and will develop sepia
tones on a developer to which no sepia
solution has been added. The sepia
solution clears up and brightens the flat,
muddy (to some extent, not totally)
effects from the thinner class of nega-
tives.
The Glycerine Process. — The "glyc-
erine process," or the process of de-
veloping platinotype prints by applica-
tion of the developing agent with the
brush, is perhaps one of the most inter-
esting and fascinating of photographic
processes, owing to its far-reaching
possibilities.
PHOTOGRAPHY
531
By this method of developing platino-
type paper, many negatives which have
been discarded on account of the dim,
flat, non-contrasty results which they
yield, in the hands of one possessing a
little artistic skill, produce snappy, ani-
mated pictures. On the other hand,
from the sharp and hard negative, soft,
sketchy effects may be secured.
There are required for this process:
Some glass jars; some soft brushes, vary-
ing from the fine spotter and the Japan-
ese brush to the 1^-inch duster, and sev-
eral pieces of special blotting paper.
Manipulation. — Print the paper a trifle
deeper than for the ordinary method of
developing. Place the print face up on
a piece of clean glass (should the print
curl so that it is unmanageable, moisten
the glass with glycerine), and, with the
broad camel's-hair brush, thinly coat the
entire print with pure glycerine, blotting
same off in 3 or 4 seconds; then recoat
more thickly such portions as are desired
especially restrained, or the details
partly or entirely eliminated. Now
brush or paint such portion of the print
as is first desired with solution of 1 part
glycerine and 4 parts normal developer,
blotting the portion being developed
from time to time to avoid developing
too far. Full strength developer (with-
out glycerine) is employed where a pro-
nounced or deep shade is wanted.
When any part of the print has reached
the full development desired, blot that
portion carefully with the blotter and
coat with pure glycerine.
A brown effect may be obtained by
using saturated solution of mercury in
the developer (1 part mercury to 8 parts
developer). By the use of diluted mer-
cury the "flesh tones" are produced in
portraits, etc.
When print has reached complete
development, place in hydrochloric
(muriatic) acid and wash as usual.
Eastman's Sepia Paper. — This paper
is about 3 times as rapid as blue paper.
It should be under rather than over
printed, and is developed by washing in
plain water. After 2 or 3 changes of
water fix 5 minutes in a solution of hypo
(H grains to the ounce of water), and
afterwards wash thoroughly.
Short fixing gives red tones. Longer
fixing produces a brown tone.
Development of Platinum Prints. —
In the development of platinotype prints
by the hot bath process, distinctly warmer
tones are obtained by using a bath
which has been several times heated,
colder blacks resulting from the use of a
freshly prepared solution, and colder
tones still if the developing solution be
faintly acidified. The repeated heating
of the solution of the neutral salt ap-
parently has the effect of rendering the
bath slightly alkaline by the conversion
of a minute proportion of the oxalate into
potassium carbonate. If this be the
case, it allows a little latitude in choice
of tone which may be useful. Some
photographers recommend the use of
potassium phosphate with the neutral
oxalate, stating that the solution should
be rendered acid by the addition of a
small proportion of oxalic acid. When
the potassium phosphate was first
recommended for this purpose, probably
the acid salt, KH2PO4, was intended, by
the use of which cold steely black tones
were obtained. The use of the oxalic
acid with the ordinary phosphate K2HPO4,
is probably intended to produce the same
result.
THE CARBON PROCESS.
The paper used is coated on one
surface with a mixture of gelatin and
some pigment (the color of which de-
pends upon the color the required print
is to be), and then allowed to dry. When
required for printing it is sensitized by
floating upon a solution of bichromate of
potassium, and then again drying, in the
dark this time. The process is based
upon the action of light upon this film of
chromatized gelatin; wherever the light
reaches, the gelatin is rendered insol-
uble, even in hot water.
The paper is exposed in the usual way.
But as the appearance of the paper be-
fore and after printing is precisely the
same, it is impossible to tell when it is
printed by examining the print. This
is usually accomplished by exposing a
piece of gelatine-chloride paper under
a negative of about the same density,
and placing it alongside of the carbon print.
When the gelatino-chloride paper is
printed, the carbon will be finished. The
paper is then removed from the printing
frame and immersed in cold water,
which removes a great deal of the bi-
chromate of potassium, and also makes
the print lie out flat. It is then floated
on to what is known as a support, and
pressed firmly upon it, face down-
wards, and allowed to remain for 5 or 10
minutes. Then the support, together
with the print, is placed in hot water for
a short time, and when the gelatin
commences to ooze out at the edges the
print is removed by stripping from the
support, this process leaving the greater
quantity of the gelatin and pigment
PHOTOGRAPHY
upon the support. The gelatin and
pigment are then treated with hot water
by running the hot water over the face
of the support by means of a sponge.
This removes the soluble gelatin, and
leaves the gelatin, together with the
pigment it contains, which was acted
upon by light; this then constitutes the
picture.
The reason for transferring the gela-
tin film is quite apparent, since the
greater portion of the unacted-upon gel-
atin will be at the back of the film, and
in order to get at it to remove it, it is
necessary to transfer it to a support. In
this condition the print can be -dried and
mounted, but on consideration it will be
seen that the picture i^ in a reversed
position, that is to say, that the right-
nand side of the original has become the
left, and vice versa.
If the picture be finished in this con-
dition, it is said to have been done by the
single transfer method. In some in-
stances this reversal would be of no con-
sequence, such as some portraits, but
with views which are known this would
never do. In order to remedy this state
of affairs, the picture is transferred once
more, by pressing, while wet, upon an-
other support, and allowed to dry upon
it; when separated, the picture remains
upon the latter support, and is in its
right position. This is what is known
as the double transfer method. When
the double transfer method is used, the
first support consists of a specially pre-
pared support, which has been waxed in
order to prevent the pictures from ad-
hering permanently to it; this is then
known as a temporary support. The
paper upon which the print is finally
received is prepared with a coating of
gelatin, and is known as the final sup-
port.
LANTERN SLIDES.
The making of a good slide begins
with the making of the negative, the
operations in both cases being closely
allied, and he who has mastered the first,
which is the corner stone to all successful
results in any branch of photography,
may well be expected to be able to make
a good lantern slide. A slide is judged
not by what it appears to be when held
in the hand, but by its appearance when
magnified two to five thousand times on
the screen, where a small defect in the
slide will show up as a gross fault.
Patience and cleanliness are absolutely
necessary. The greatest caution should
be observed to keep the lantern plates
free from dust, both before and after
exposure and development, for small pin-
holes and dust spots, hardly noticeable
on the slide, assume huge proportions
on the screen and detract materially
from the slide's beauty.
The high lights in a slide should, in
rare cases only, be represented by clear
glass, and the shadows should always be
transparent, even in the deepest part.
The balance between these extremes
should be a delicate gradation of tone
from one to the other. The contrast
between the strongest high light and the
deepest shadow should be enough to
give brilliancy without hardness and
delicacy or softness without being flat.
This is controlled also, to some extent, by
the subject summer sunshine requiring
a more vigorous rendering than hazy
autumn effects, and herein each indi-
vidual must decide for himself what is
most necessary to give the correct por-
trayal of the subject. It is a good idea
to procure a slide, as near technically
perfect as possible, from some slide-
making friend, or dealer, to use it as a
standard, and to make slide after slide
from the same negative until a satis-
factory result is reached.
A black tone of good quality is usu-
ally satisfactory for most slides, but it is
very agreeable to see interspersed a va-
riety of tone, and beautiful slides can be
made, where the subject warrants, in
blue, brown, purple, and even red and
green, by varying the exposure and de-
velopment and by using gold or uranium
toning baths and other solutions for that
purpose, the formulas and materials for
which are easily obtainable from the
magazines and from stock dealers, re-
spectively.
It must be understood, however, that
these toning solutions generally act as
intensifiers, and that if toning is contem-
plated, it should be borne in mind at the
time of developing the slide, so that it
may not finally appear too dense. Ton-
ing will improve otherwise weak slides,
but will not help under-exposed ones, as
its tendency will be in such case to in-
crease the contrast, which in such slides
is already too great. Another method
of getting a fine quality of slides is to
make rather strong exposures to over-
develop, and then to reduce with persul-
phate of ammonium.
The popular methods of making the
exposure are: First, by contact in the
printing frame, just as prints are made
on velox or other developing paper, pro-
vided the subject on the negative is of
the right size for a lantern slide; and the
other and better method is the camera
PHOTOGRAPHY
533
method, by which the subject of any
negative, large or small, or any part
thereof, can be reduced or enlarged,
and thus brought to the proper size de-
sired for the slide. This is quite a
knack, and should be considered and
studied by the slide maker very care-
fully.
Hard and inflexible rules cannot be
laid down in this relation. Portrait
studies of bust or three-fourths figures
or baby figures need not be made for a
larger opening than 1J by 2 inches, and
often appear to good advantage if made
quite a bit smaller. Figure or group
compositions, with considerable back-
ground or accessories, may, of course,
have a larger opening to suit the par-
ticular circumstances. Monuments, tall
buildings, and the like should have the
benefit of the whole height of mat open-
ing of 2f inches, and should be made of
a size to fill it out properly, providing,
however, for sufficient foreground and a
proper sky line. Landscapes and marine
views generally can be made to fill out
the full length of mat opening, which,
however, should not exceed 2£ inches,
and may be of any height to suit the sub-
ject, up to 2f inches.
The subject should be well centered
on the plate and the part intended to be
shown as the picture should be well
within the size of the mat opening de-
cided upon, so that with a slight varia-
tion of the placing of the mat no part of
the picture will be cut off by the carrier
in the stereopticon. The horizon line in
a landscape, and more particularly in a
marine view, should always be in proper
position, either below or above the center
line of the slide, as may suit the subject,
but should never divide the picture in the
middle and should not appear to be run-
ning either up or down hill. And the ver-
tical lines in the pictures should not be
leaning, but should run parallel with the
side lines of the mat; this refers espe-
cially to the vertical lines in architecture,
except, however, the Tower of Pisa and
kindred subjects, which should in every
case be shown with their natural inclina-
tions.
As to time of exposure, very little can
be said. That varies with the different
makes of plates, with the quality of the
light, ana the nature and density of
each individual negative. Therefore
every one must be a judge unto himself
and make as good a guess as he can for
the first trial from each negative and
gauge further exposures from the results
thus obtained; but this much may be
said, that a negative strong in contrast
should be given a long exposure, close
to the light, if artificial light is used, or in
strong daylight, and developed with a
weak or very much diluted developer to
make a soft slide with full tone values.
And a flat, weak negative will yield bet-
ter results if exposed farther from the
light or to a weaker light, and developed
by a normal or more aggressive de-
veloper. Over exposure and under ex-
posure show the same results in slide
plates as in negative plates, and the treat-
ment should be similar in both kinds of
plates except that, perhaps, in cases of
under exposure of slide plates, the better
plan would be to cast them aside and
make them over, as very little can be done
with them. For getting bright and
clear effects it is now well understood
that better and more satisfactory results
are obtained by backing the slide plates
as well as by backing negative plates.
This is accomplished by coating the back
or glass side of the plate with the follow-
ing mixture:
Gum arabic £ ounce
Caramel 1 ounce
Burnt sienna 2 ounces
Alcohol 2 ounces
Mix and apply with small sponge or
wad of absorbent cotton.
It should coat thin and smooth and
dry hard enough so it will not rub off
when handled. If the plates are put into
a light-proof grooved box as fast as
backed, they can be used about half an
hour after being coated. Before devel-
oping, this backing should be removed;
this is best done by first wetting the
film side of the plate under the tap,
which will prevent staining it, and then
letting the water run on the backing, and,
with a little rubbing, it will disappear
in a few moments, when development
may proceed. Other preparations for
this purpose, ready for use, may be
found at the stock houses. The mat
should be carefully selected or cut of a
size and shape to show up the subject to
best advantage, and should cover every-
thing not wanted in the picture. The
opening should not exceed 2| x 2| inches
in any case, and must not be ragged or
fuzzy, but clean cut and symmetrical.
The lines of the opening of square mats
should be parallel with the outside lines
of the plate. Oval, or round, or other
variously shaped mats, should be used
sparingly, and in special cases only
where the nature of the subject will war-
rant their use.
Statuary shows up to best advantage
when the background is blocked out.
534
PHOTOGRAPHY
This is easily done with a small camel's-
hair artist's brush and opaque or india
ink, in a retouching frame, a good eye
and a steady hand being the only addi-
tional requirements. This treatment
may also be applied to some flower
studies and other botanical subjects.
Binding may be performed with the
aid of a stationer's spring clamp, such as
is used for holding papers together, and
can be purchased for 10 cents. Cut the
binding strips the length of the sides and
ends of the slide, and gum them on
separately, rubbing them firmly in con-
tact with the glass with a piece of cloth
or an old handkerchief, which might be
kept handy for that purpose, so that the
binding may not loosen or peel off after
the slides are handled but half a dozen
times. Before storing the slides away
for future use they should be properly
labeled and named. The name label
should be affixed on the right end of the
face of the slide as you look at it in its
proper position, and should contain the
maker's name and the title of the slide.
The thumb label should be affixed to the
lower left-hand corner of the face of the
slide, and may show the number of the
slide.
HOW TO UTILIZE WASTE MA-
TERIAL.
Undoubtedly spoiled negatives form
the greatest waste. The uses to which a
ruined negative may be put are mani-
fold. Cut down to 3 J inches square and
the films cleaned off, they make excellent
cover glasses for lantern slides. An-
other use for them in the same popular
branch of photography is the following:
If, during development, you see that
your negative is spoiled through uneven
density, over exposure, or what not, ex-
pose it to the light and allow it to blacken
all over. Now with sealing wax fasten a
needle to a penholder, and by means of
this little tool one can easily manufacture
diagram slides from the darkened film
(white lines on black ground).
Take a spoiled negative, dissolve out
all the silver with a solution of potassium
ferricyanide and hypo. Rinse, dry, rub
with sandpaper, and you will have a
splendid substitute for ground glass.
Remove the silver in a similar manner
from another negative, but this time
wash thoroughly. Squeegee down on
this a print, and an opaline will be your
reward. From such an opaline, by ce-
menting on a few more glasses, a tasteful
letter weight may soon be made. An-
other way in which very thin negatives
may be used is this: Bleach them in
bichloride of mercury, back them with
black paper, and positives will result.
Old negatives also make good trimming
boards, the film preventing a rapid blunt-
ing of the knife, and they may be suc-
cessfully used as mounting tables. Clean
off the films, polish with French chalk,
and squeegee your prints thereto.
When dry they may be removed and will
have a fine enameled, if hardly artistic,
appearance. Many other uses for them
may also be found if the amateur is at all
ingenious.
Users of pyro, instead of throwing the
old developer away, should keep some of
it and allow it to oxidize. A thin nega-
tive, if immersed in this for a few min-
utes, will be stained a deep yellow all
over, and its printing quality will be
much improved.
Old hypo baths should be saved, and,
when a sufficient quantity of silver is
thought to be in solution, reduced to
recover the metal.
Printing paper of any sort is another
great source of waste, especially to the
inexperienced photographer. Prints are
too dark or not dark enough success-
fully to undergo the subsequent opera-
tions. Spoiled material of this kind,
however, is not without its uses in
photography. Those who swear by the
"combined bath," will find that scraps of
printing-out paper, or any silver paper,
are necessary to start the toning action.
Spoiled mat surface, printing -out
paper, bromide paper, or platinotype
should be allowed to blacken all over.
Here we have a dead-black surface use-
ful for many purposes. A leak in the
bellows when out in the field may be
repaired temporarily by moistening a
piece of mat printing-out paper and stick-
ing it on the leak; the gelatin will cause
it to adhere. These papers may also
be used to back plates, platinotypes, of
course, requiring some adhesive mixture
to make them stick.
In every photographer's possession
there will be found a small percentage of
stained prints. Instead of throwing
these away, they may often be turned to
good account in the following manner:
Take a large piece of cardboard, some
mountant, and the prints. Now proceed
to mount them tastefully so that the
corners of some overlap, arranging in
every case to hide the stain. If you have
gone properly to work, you will have an
artistic mosaic. Now wash round with
india ink, or paint a border of leaves,
and the whole thing will form a very
neat "tit bit."
Keep the stiff bits of cardboard be-
PHOTOGRAPHY
535
tween wnich printing paper is packed.
They are useful in many ways — from
opaque cards in the dark slide'to parti-
tions between negatives in the storing
boxes.
In reclaiming old gold solutions, all
liquids containing gold, with the excep-
tion of baths of which cyanide forms a
part, must be strongly acidulated with
chlorhydric or sulphuric acid, if they are
not already acid in their nature. They
are afterwards diluted with a large pro-
portion of ordinary water, and a solution
of sulphate of ferroprotoxide (green
vitriol) is poured in in excess. It is
recognized that the filtered liquid no
longer contains gold when the addition
of a new quantity of ferric sulphate does
not occasion any cloudiness. Gold
precipitated in the form of a reddish or
blackish powder is collected on a filter
and dried in an oven with weights equal
to its own of borax, saltpeter, and car-
bonate of potash. The mass is after-
wards introduced gradually into a fire-
Eroof crucible and carried to a white-red
eat in a furnace. When all the matter
has been introduced, a stronger blast is
given by closing the furnace, so that all
the metal collects at the bottom of the
crucible. On cooling, a gold ingot,
chemically pure, will be obtained. This
mode of reduction is also suitable for
impure chloride of gold, and for the re-
moval of gilding, but not for solutions
containing cyanides, which never give up
all the gold they contain; the best means
of treating the latter consists in evaporat-
ing them to dryness in a cast-iron boiler,
and in calcining the residue in an earthen
crucible at the white red. A small
quantity of borax or saltpeter may be
added for facilitating the fusion, but it
is not generally necessary. The gold
separated collects at the bottom of the
crucible. It is red, if saltpeter is em-
ployed; and green, if it is borax.
To reclaim silver place the old films,
plates, paper, etc., in a porcelain dish, so
arranged that they will burn readily. To
facilitate combustion, a little kerosene or
denatured alcohol poured over the con-
tents will be found serviceable.
Before blowing off the burnt paper,
place the residue in an agateware dish,
the bottom of which is covered with a
solution of saltpeter and water. Place
the whole on the fire, and heat it until
the silver is separated as a nitrate.
The solution being complete, add to
the mass a little water and hydrochloric
acid, when in a short time the serviceable
silver chloride will be obtained. If the
films should not give up their silver as
freely as the plates, then add a little more
hydrochloric acid or work them up
separately. Silver reclaimed in this way
is eminently suitable for silver-plating
all sorts of objects.
FIXING AND CLEARING BATHS:
The Acid Fixing and Clearing Bath. —
Add 2 ounces of S. P. C. clarifier (acid
bisulphite of sodium) solution to 1 quart
of hypo solution 1 in 5.
Combined Alum and Hypo Bath. —
Add saturated solution of sulphite of
sodium to saturated solution of alum till
the white precipitate formed remains un-
dissolved, and when the odor of sul-
phurous acid becomes perceptible.
Mix this solution with an equal bulk
of freshly prepared hypo solution 1 in 5,
and filter.
This bath will remain clear.
Clearing Solution (Edward's). —
Alum 1 ounce avoirdupois
Citric acid. . 1 ounce avoirdupois
Sulphate of
iron, crys-
tals 3 ounces avoirdupois
Water 1 imperial pint
This should be freshly mixed.
Clearing Solution. —
Saturated solution of
alum 20 ounces
Hydrochloric acid 1 ounce
Immerse negative after fixing and
washing. Wash well after removal.
Reducer for Gelatin Dry-Plate Nega-
tives.—
I. — Saturated solution of
ferricyanide of po-
tassium 1 part
Hyposulphite of sodi-
um solution (1 in 10) 10 parts
II. — Perchloride of iron .. 30 grains
Citric acid 60 grains
Water 1 pint
Belitski's Acid Ferric -Oxalate Re-
ducer for Gelatin Plates. —
Water 7 ounces
Potassium ferric oxal-
ate • 2£ drachms
Crystallized neutral
sulphite of sodium. 2 drachms
Powdered oxalic acid,
from 30 to 45 grains
Hyposulphite of soda. 1£ ounces
The solution must be made in this
order, filtered, and be kept in tightly
closed bottles; and as under the influence
of light the ferric salt is reduced to fer-
536
PHOTOGRAPHY
rous, the preparation must be kept in
subdued light, in non-actinic glass bot-
tles.
Orthochromatic Dry Plates — Erythro-
sine Bath (Mailman and Scolik). — Pre-
liminary bath:
Water 200 cubic centimeters
Stronger am-
monia. ... 2 cubic centimeters
Soak a plate for 2 minutes.
Color bath:
Erythrosine
solution (1
in 1,000) . 25 cubic centimeters
Stronger
ammonia
(0.900) ... 4 cubic centimeters
Water 175 cubic centimeters
The plate should not remain longer in
the bath than 1J minutes.
PAPER-SENSITIZING PROCESSES:
Blueprint Paper. — I. — The ordinary
blue photographic print in which white
lines appear on a blue ground may be
made on paper prepared as follows:
A. — Potassium ferricya-
nide 10 drachms
Distilled water 4 ounces
B. — Iron ammonia citrate. 15 drachms
Distilled water 4 ounces
Mix when wanted for use, filter, and
apply to the surface of the paper.
With this mixture no developer is re-
quired. The paper after exposure is
simply washed in water to remove the
unaltered iron salts. The print is im-
proved by immersion in dilute hydro-
chloric acid, after which it must be again
well washed in water.
II. — The following process, credited
to Captain Abney, yields a photographic
paper giving blue lines on a white
ground:
Common salt 3 ounces
Ferric chloride 8 ounces
Tartaric acid 3| ounces
Acacia 25 ounces
Water 100 ounces
Dissolve the acacia in half the water
and dissolve the other ingredients in the
other half; then mix.
The liquid is applied with a brush to
strongly sized and well rolled paper in a
subdued light. The coating should be
as even as possible. The paper should
be dried rapidly to prevent the solution
sinking into its pores. When dry, the
paper is ready for exposure.
In sunlight, 1 or 2 minutes is generally
sufficient to give an image; while in a
dull light as much as an hour is nec-
essary.
To develop the print, it is floated im-
mediately after leaving the printing
frame upon a saturated solution of po-
tassium ferrocyanide. None of the de-
veloping solution should be allowed to
reach the back. The development is
usually complete in less than a minute.
The paper may be lifted off the solution
when the face is wetted, the development
proceeding with that which adheres to
the print.
When the development is complete,
the print is floated on clean water, and
after 2 or 3 minutes is placed in a bath,
made as follows:
Sulphuric acid 3 ounces
Hydrochloric acid. . . 8 ounces
Water 100 ounces
In about 10 minutes the acid will have
removed all iron salts not turned into the
blue compound. It is next thoroughly
washed and dried. Blue spots may be
removed by a 4 per cent solution of
caustic potash.
The back of the tracing must be
placed in contact with the sensitive
surface.
III. —Dissolve 3f ounces of ammonia
citrate of iron in 18 ounces of water, and
put in a bottle. Then dissolve 2f ounces
of red prussiate of potash in 18 ounces of
water, and put in another bottle. When
ready to prepare the paper, have the sheets
piled one on top of the other, coating but
one at a time. Darken the room, and
light a ruby lamp. Now, mix thor-
oughly equal parts of both solutions and
apply the mixture with a sponge in long
parallel sweeps, keeping the application
as even as possible. Hang the paper in
the dark room to dry and keep it dark
until used. Any of the mixture left
from sensitizing the paper should be
thrown away, as it deteriorates rapidly.
Often, in making blueprints by sun-
light, the exposure is too long, and when
the frame is opened the white lines of
the print are faint or obscure. Usually
these prints are relegated to the waste
basket; but if, after being washed as
usual, they are sponged with a weak
solution of chloride of iron, their recla-
mation is almost certain. When the lines
reappear, the print should be thoroughly
rinsed in clear water.
Often a drawing, from which prints
have already been made, requires chang-
ing. The blueprints then on hand are
worthless, requiring more time to correct
PHOTOGRAPHY
537
than it would take to make a new print.
An economical way of using the worth-
less prints is to cancel the drawing al-
ready thereon, sensitize the reverse side,
and use the paper again.
How to Make Picture Postal Cards
and Photographic Letter Heads. — I. —
Well-sized paper is employed. If the
si/ing should be insufficient, resizing can
be done with a 10 per cent gelatin solu-
tion, with a 2 per cent arrowroot paste,
or with a 50 per cent decoction of carra-
geen. This size is applied on the crude
paper with a brush and allowed to dry.
The well-sized or resized papers are
superior and the picture becomes strong-
er on them than on insufficiently sized
paper. Coat this paper uniformly with
a solution of 154 grains of ferric oxalate
in 3| fluidounces of distilled water, using
a brush, and allow to dry. Next, apply
the solution of 15 J grains of silver nitrate
in 3| fluidounces of water with a second
brush, and dry again. Coating and dry-
ing must be conducted with ruby light or
in the dark.
The finished paper keeps several days.
Print deep so as to obtain a strong pic-
ture and develop in the following bath:
Distilled water. .. 3 A fluidounces
Potassium oxal-
ate (neutral) . . 340 grains
Oxalic acid 4 grains
After developing the well-washed
prints, fix them preferably in the follow-
ing bath:
Distilled water. . 3£ fluidounces
Sodium thiosul-
phate 75 grains
Gold chloride
solution (1 in
100) 80 minims
Any other good bath may be em-
ployed.
II. — Starch is dissolved in water and
the solution is boiled until it forms a
thin paste. Carmine powder is added,
arid the mixture is rapidly and assidu-
ously stirred until it is homogeneous
throughout. It is now poured through
muslin and spread by means of a suit-
able pencil on the paper to be sensitized.
Let dry, then float it, prepared side down
on a solution of potassium chromate, 30
parts in 520 parts of distilled water, being
careful to prevent any of the liquid from
getting on the back or reverse side. Dry
in the dark room, and preserve in dark-
ness. When desired for use lay the neg-
ative on the face of the paper, and expose
to the full sunlight for 5 or 6 minutes (or
about an hour in diffused light). Wash-
ing in plenty of water completes the proc-
ess.
A Simple Emulsion for Mat or Print-
ing-Out Paper. — One of the very best
surfaces to work upon for coloring in
water color is the carbon print. Apart
from its absolute permanency as a base,
the surface possesses the right tooth for
the adhering of the pigment. It is just
such a surface as this that is required
upon other prints than carbon, both for
finished mat surfaces and for the pur-
poses of coloring. The way to ob-
tain this surface upon almost any kind
of paper, and to print it out so that the
correct depth is ascertained on sight,
will be described. Some of the crayon
drawing papers can be utilized, as well
as many other plain photographic papers
that may meet the desires of the pho-
tographer. If a glossy paper is desired,
the emulsion should be coated on a
baryta-coated stock.
There will be required, in the first
place, 2 half-gallon stoneware crocks
with lids. The best shape to employ is
a crock with the sides running straight,
with no depressed ridge at the top. One
of these crocks is for the preparation of
the emulsion, the other to receive the
emulsion when filtered. An enameled
iron saucepan of about 2 gallons capac-
ity will be required in which to stand
the crock for preparing the emulsion,
and also to remelt the emulsion after it
has become set. The following is the
formula for the emulsion, which must be
prepared and mixed in the order given.
Failure will be impossible if these details
are scrupulously attended to.
Having procured 2 half-gallon stone-
ware crocks with lids, clean them out
well with hot and cold water, and place
into one of these the following:
Distilled water 10 ounces
Gelatin (Heinrich's,
hard) 4 ounces
Cut the gelatin into shreds with a
clean pair of scissors. Press these shreds
beneath the water with a clean strip
of glass and allow to soak for 1 hour.
Now proceed to melt the water-soaked
gelatin by placing the crock into hot
water in the enameled saucepan, the
water standing about half way up on the
outside of the crock. Bring the water to
boiling point, and keep the gelatin oc-
casionally stirred until it is completely
dissolved. Then remove the crock to
allow the contents to cool down to 120° F.
Now prepare the following, which can be
done while the gelatin is melting:
538
PHOTOGRAPHY
No.
Rpchelle salts. ..
Distilled water. .
90 grains
1 ounce
No. 2
Chloride of ammo-
nium 45 grains
Distilled water 1 ounce
No. 3
Nitrate of silver,.
1 ounce and 75 grains
Citric acid (crushed
crystals) ....
Distilled water.
95 grains
10 ounces
No. 4
Powdered white alum 90 grains
Distilled water (hot) . . 5 ounces
The latter solution may be made with
boiling water. When these solutions
are prepared, pour into the hot gelatin
solution No. 1, stirring all the while with
a clean glass rod. Then add No. 2.
Rinse the vessel with a little distilled
water, and add to the gelatin. Now,
while stirring gradually, add No. 3, and
lastly add No. 4, which may be very hot.
This will cause a decided change in the
color of the emulsion. Lastly add 2
ounces of pure alcohol (photographic).
This must be added very gradually with
vigorous stirring, because if added too
quickly it will coagulate the gelatin
and form insoluble lumps. The emul-
sion must, of course, be mixed under a
light not stronger than an ordinary small
gas-jet, or under a yellow light obtained
by covering the windows with yellow
paper. The cover may now be placed
upon the crock, and the emulsion put
aside for 2 or 3 days to ripen.
At the end of this time the contents of
the crock, now formed into a stiff emul-
sion, may be remelted in hot water by
placing the crock in the enameled sauce-
pan over a gas stove. The emulsion
may be broken up by cutting it with a
clean bone or hard-rubber paper cutter
to facilitate the melting. Stir the mix-
ture occasionally until thoroughly dis-
solved, and add the following as soon as
the emulsion has reached a temperature
of about 150° F.:
Distilled water 4 ounces
Pure alcohol 1 ounce
The emulsion must now be filtered
into the second crock. The filtering is
best accomplished in the following man-
ner: Take an ordinary plain-top kero-
sene lamp chimney, tie over the small
end two thicknesses of washed cheese
cloth. Invert the chimney and insert a
tuft of absorbent cotton about the size of
an ordinary egg. Press it . carefully
down upon the cheese cloth. Fix the
chimney in the ring of a retort stand (or
cut a hole about 3 inches in diameter in a
wooden shelf), so that the crock may
stand conveniently beneath. In the
chimney place a strip of glass, resting
upon the cotton, to prevent the cotton
from lifting. Now pour in the hot emul-
sion and allow the whole of it to filter
through the absorbent cotton. This
accomplished, we are now ready for
coating the paper, which is best done in
the following manner:
Cut the paper into strips or sheets,
say 12 inches wide and the full length of
the sheet. This will be, let us suppose,
12 x 26 inches. Attach, by means of the
well-known photographic clips, a strip
of wood at each end of the paper upon
the back. Three clips at each end will
be required. Having a number of
sheets thus prepared, the emulsion
should be poured into a porcelain pan or
tray, kept hot by standing within another
tray containing hot water. The emul-
sion tray being, say, 11 x 14 size, the
paper now is easily coated by holding
the clipped ends in each hand, then hold-
ing the left end of the paper up, and the
right-hand end lowered so that the curve
of the paper just touches the emulsion.
Then raise the right hand, at the same
time lowering the left hand at the same
rate. Then lower the right hand, lifting
the left. Repeat this operation once
more; then drain the excess of emulsion
at one corner of the tray, say, the left-
hand corner. Just as soon as the emul-
sion has drained, the coated sheet of
Eaper may be hung up to dry, by the
ooks attached to the clips, upon a piece
of copper wire stretched from side to
side of a spare closet or room that can be
kept darkened until the paper is dry. In
this way coat as much paper as may be
required. When it is dry it may be
rolled up tight or kept flat under pressure
until needed.
If any emulsion remains it may be
kept in a cool place for 2 weeks, and still
be good for coating. Be sure to clean
out all the vessels used before the emul-
sion sets, otherwise this will present a
difficult task, since the emulsion sets into
an almost insoluble condition.
This emulsion is so made that it does
not require to be washed. If it is washed
it will become spoiled. It is easy to
make and easy to use. If it is desired
that only small sheets of paper are to be
coated, they may be floated on the emul-
sion, but in this case the paper must be
damp, .which is easily accomplished by
PHOTOGRAPHY
539
wetting a sheet of blotting paper, then
covering this with two dry sheets of blot-
ting paper. Place the sheets to be
coated upon these, and place under
pressure during the night. Next day
they will be in good condition for floating.
When the coated paper is dry it may
be printed and toned just the same as any
other printing-out paper, with any toning
bath, and fixed in hyposulphite of soda
as usual. Toning may be carried to a
rich blue black, or if not carried too far
will remain a beautiful sepia color.
After well washing and drying, it will be
observed that the surface corresponds
with that of a carbon print; if the paper
has been of a somewhat absorbent char-
acter, the surface will be entirely mat, and
will give an excellent tooth for coloring
or finishing in sepia, black and white, etc.
How to Sensitize Photographic Print^
ing Papers. — I. — The older form of
paper is one in which the chemicals are
held by albumen. Silver is said to com-
bine with this, forming an albuminate.
Pictures printed on this would be too
sharp in their contrasts, and conse-
quently "hard"; this is avoided by intro-
ducing silver chloride.
To prepare this form of paper, beat 15
ounces of fresh egg albumen with 5
ounces of distilled water, dissolve in it
300 grains of ammonium chloride, set
aside for a time, and decant or filter.
Suitable paper is coated with this solu-
tion by floating, and then dried. The
paper is "sensitized" by floating it on
a solution of silver nitrate in distilled
water, about 80 grains to the ounce, with
a drop of acetic acid. The paper is
dried as before, and is then ready for
printing. The sensitizing must, of
course, be done in the dark room.
The reaction between the ammonium
chloride present in the albumen coating
produces a certain quantity of silver chlo-
ride, the purpose of which is shown above.
Of course, variations in the proportions
of this ingredient will give different de-
grees of softness to the picture.
II. — The bromide and chloride papers
which are now popular consist of the or-
dinary photographic paper sensitized by
means of a thin coating of bromide or
chloride emulsion. In "Photographic
Printing Methods," by the Rev. W. H.
Burbank, the following method is given
for bromide paper:
A. — Gelatin (soft) 42£ grains
Bromide of potassium 26 grains
Distilled water. . 1 ounce
B. — Nitrate of silver.
Distilled water..
3J grans
1 ounce
Dissolve the bromide first, then add
the gelatin and dissolve by gentle heat
(95° to 100° F.). Bring the silver so-
lution to the same temperature, and add
in a small stream to the gelatin solution,
stirring vigorously, of course in non-ac-
tinic light. Keep the mixed emulsion at
a temperature of 105° F. for half an hour,
or according to the degree of sensitive-
ness required, previously adding 1 drop
of nitric acid to every 5 ounces of the
emulsion. Allow it to set, squeeze
through working canvas, and wash 2
hours in running water. In his own
practice he manages the washing easily
enough by breaking the emulsion up
into an earthen jar filled with cold water,
and placed in the dark room sink. A
tall lamp chimney standing in the jar
immediately under the tap conducts
fresh water to the bottom of the jar, and
keeps the finely divided emulsion in con-
stant motion; a piece of muslin, laid over
the top of the jar to prevent any of the
emulsion running out, completes this
simple, inexpensive, but efficient wash-
ing apparatus.
Next melt the emulsion and add one-
tenth of the whole volume of glycerine
and alcohol; the first to prevent trouble-
some cockling of the paper as it dries, the
second to prevent air bubbles and hasten
drying. Then filter.
With the emulsion the paper may be
coated just as it comes from the stock
dealer, plain, or, better still, given a
substratum of insoluble gelatin, made as
follows:
Gelatin If grains
Water 1 ounce
Dissolve and filter; then add 11 drops
of a 1 in 50 filtered chrome alum solution.
The paper is to be floated for half a
minute on this solution, avoiding air
bubbles, and then hung up to dry in a
room free from dust. The purpose of
this substratum is to secure additional
brilliancy in the finished prints by keep-
ing the emulsion isolated from the sur-
face of the paper. The paper should
now be cut to the size desired.
We do not know of these processes
having been applied to postal cards, but
unless there is some substance in the
sizing of the card which would interfere,
there is no reason why it should not be.
Of course, however, a novice will not get
the results by using it that an experienced
hand would.
Ferro-Prussiate Paper. — The follow-
ing aniline process of preparing sensitive
paper is employed by the Prussian and
Hessian railway administrations. The
540
PHOTOGRAPHY
ordinary paper on reels is used for the
purpose, and sensitized as follows:
Two hundred and fifty parts, by
weight, of powdered potassium bichro-
mate are dissolved in water; the solution
should be completely saturated; 10 parts
of concentrated sulphuric acid, 10 parts
of alcohol (962), and 30 parts of phos-
phoric acid, are added successively, and
the whole stirred together. The solu-
tion is sponged over the paper. It is not
necessary to have the room absolutely
dark, or to work by a red light, still the
light should be obscured. The drying
of the paper, in the same place, takes
about 10 minutes, after which the tracing
to be reproduced and the paper are
placed in a frame, as usual, and exposed
to daylight. On a sunny day, an ex-
posure of 35 seconds is enough; in
cloudy weather, 60 to 70 seconds; on a
very dark day, as much as 5 minutes.
After exposure, the paper is fixed by
suspending it for 20 minutes upon a bar
in a closed wooden box, on the bottom
of which are laid some sheets of blotting
paper, sprinkled with 40 drops of ben-
zine and 20 of crude aniline oil. The
vapors given off will develop the design.
Several impressions may be taken at the
same time.
For fixing, crude aniline oil is to be
used (anilinum purum), not refined
(purissimum), for the reason that the
former alone contains the substances
necessary for the operation. The re-
produced design is placed in water for a
few minutes, and hung up to dry.
Pigment Paper for Immediate Use. —
Pigment paper is usually sensitized in
the bichromate solution on the evening
before it is desired for use. If it is not
then ussd it will spoil. By proceeding
as follows the paper may be used within
a quarter of an hour after treating it
in the bichromate bath. Make a solu-
tion of
Ammonium bi-
chromate 75 grains
Water 3£ fluidounces
Sodium carbonate 15 grains
Mix 0.35 ounces of this solution with 0.7
ounces alcohol, and with a broad brush
apply to surface of the pigment paper,
as evenly as possible. Dry this paper
as quickly as possible in a pasteooard
box of suitable size, 15 minutes being
usually long enough for the purpose. It
may then be used at once.
Photographing on Silk. — China silk is
thoroughly and carefully washed to free
it from dressing, and then immersed in
the following solution:
Sodium chloride. ... 4 parts
Arrowroot ......... 4 parts
Acetic acid ......... 15 parts
Distilled water ...... 100 parts
Dissolve the arrowroot in the water by
warming gently, then add the remaining
ingredients. Dissolve 4 parts of tannin
in 100 parts of distilled water and mix the
solutions. Let the silk remain in the
bath for 3 minutes, then hang it care-
fully on a cord stretched across the
room to dry. The sensitizing mixture
is as follows:
Silver nitrate ....... 90 parts
Distilled water ...... 750 parts
Nitric acid ......... 1 part
Dissolve. On the surface of this so-
lution the silk is to be floated for 1
minute, then hung up till superficially
dry, then pinned out carefully on a flat
board until completely dry. This must,
of course, be done in the dark room.
Print, wash, and tone in the usual man-
ner.
TONING BATHS FOR PAPER.
The chief complaints made against
separate baths are (1) the possibility
of double tones, and (2) that the prints
sometimes turn yellow and remain so.
Such obstacles may easily be removed by
exercising a little care. Double tones
may be prevented by soaking the prints
in a 10 per cent solution of common salt
before the preliminary washing, and by
not touching the films with the fingers;
and the second objection could not be
raised provided fresh solution were used,
with no excess of sulphocyanide, if this
be the bath adopted.
A very satisfactory solution may be
made as follows:
Sodium phosphate. .. 20 grains
loride
grans
Gold chl
Distilled (or boiled)
water ............ 10 ounces
This tones very quickly and evenly,
and the print will be, when fixed, exactly
the color it is when removed from the
bath. Good chocolate tints may be
obtained, turning to purple gray on pro-
longed immersion.
Next to this, as regards ease of ma-
nipulation, the tungstate bath may be
placed, the following being a good for-
mula:
Sodium tungstate. ... 40 grains
Gold chloride ....... 2 grains
Water .............. 12 ounces
The prints should be toned a little
further than required, as they change
color, though only slightly, in the hypo.
PHOTOGRAPHY
541
Provided that ordinary care be ex-
ercised, the sulphocyanide bath cannot
well be improved upon. The formulas
given by the various makers for their
respective papers are all satisfactory,
and differ very little. One that always
acts well is
Ammonium sulpho-
cyanide 28 grains
Distilled water 16 ounces
Gold chloride 2£ grains
For those who care to try the various
baths, and to compare their results, here
is a table showing the quantities of dif-
ferent agents that may be used with
sufficient water to make up 10 ounces:
Gold chlo-
ride, 1 gr.
to 1 oz.
water. . . .
Borax ....
Sod. bicar-
bonate.. .
Sod. car-
bonate
12 dr.
60 gr.
16 dr.
10 gr.
16 dr.
20 gr.
11 dr.
11 dr.
14 dr.
Sod. phos-
phate.
20 gr.
Sod. tung-
state...
40 gr.
Amm. sul-
phocya-
nide
17 5gr
We may take it that any of these sub-
stances reduce gold trichloride, AuCl3 to
AuCl; this AuCl apparently acts as an
electrolyte, from which gold is deposited
on the silver of the image, and at the
same time a small quantity of silver
combines with the chlorine of the gold
chloride thus:
AuCl + Ag = AgCl + Au
When toning has been completed, the
prints are washed and placed in the fix-
ing bath, when the sodium thiosulphate
E resent dissolves any silver chloride that
as not been affected by light.
Besides the well-known, every-day
tones we see, which never outstep the
narrow range between chocolate brown
and purple, a practically infinite variety
of color,, from chalk red to black, may be
obtained by a little careful study of ton-
ing baths instead of regarding them as
mere unalterable machines. Most charm-
ing tints are produced with platinum
baths, a good formula being
Strong nitric acid .... 5 drops
Water 4 ounces
Chloro-platinite of po-
tassium 1 grain
The final tone of a print cannot be
judged from its appearance in the bath,
but some idea of it may be got by holding
it up to the light and looking through it.
A short immersion gives various reds,
while prolonged toning gives soft grays.
Results very similar to platinotype
may be obtained with the following
combined gold and platinum bath:
A. — Sodium acetate 1 drachm
Water 4 ounces
Gold chloride 1 grain
B. — Chloro-platinite of po-
tassium 1 grain
Water 4 ounces
Mix A and B and neutralize with nitric
acid. (The solution will be neutral
when it just ceases to turn red litmus
paper blue.)
Another toning agent is stannous
chloride. Two or three grains of tin foil
are dissolved in strong hydrochloric acid
with the aid of heat. The whole is then
made up to about 4 ounces with water.
Toning Baths for Silver Bromide
Paper. — The picture, which has been
exposed at a distance of 1| feet for about
8 to 10 seconds, is developed in the cus-
tomary manner and fixed in an acid
fixing bath composed of
Distilled water.. 1,000 cubic centimeters
Hyposulphite of
soda. . 100 grams
Sodium sulphite 20 grams
Sulphuric acid. . 4 to 5 grams
First dissolve the sodium sulphite,
then add the sulphuric acid, and finally
the hyposulphite, and dissolve.
Blue tints are obtained by laying the
picture in a bath composed as follows:
A. — Uranium ni-
trate 2 grams
Water 200 cubic centimeters
B. — Red p r u s -
siate o f
potash. . . 2 grams
Water 200 cubic centimeters
C. — A m m o n i a-
iron-alum 10 grams
Water 100 cubic centimeters
Pure hydro-
chloric
acid 15 cubic centimeters
Immediately before the toning, mix
Solution A. . 200 cubic centimeters
Glacial ace-
tic acid... 20 cubic centimeters
Solution B.. 200 cubic centimeters
Solution C. . 30 to 40 cubic centi-
meters
Brown tints,
lutions:
Use the following so-
542
PHOTOGRAPHY
A. — Uranium ni-
trate 12 grams
Water 1,000 cubic centimeters
B. — Red p r u s -
siate of
potash. . . 9 grams
Water 1,000 cubic centimeters
And mix immediately before use
Solution A. . 100 cubic centimeters
Solution B. . 100 cubic centimeters
Glacial ace-
tic acid ... 10 cubic centimeters
Pictures toned in this bath are then
laid into the following solution:
Water 1,500 cubic centimeters
Pure hydro-
chloric
acid 5 cubic centimeters
Citric acid. . 20 grams
To Turn Blueprints Brown. — A piece
of caustic soda about the size of a bean
is dissolved in 5 ounces of water and the
blueprint immersed in it, on which it
will take on an orange-yellow color.
When the blue has entirely left the print
it should be washed thoroughly and im-
mersed in a bath composed of 8 ounces
of water in which has been dissolved a
heaping teaspoonf ul of tannic acid. The
prints in this bath will assume a brown
color that may be carried to almost any
tone, after which they must again be
thoroughly washed and allowed to dry.
COMBINED TONING AND FIXING
BATHS.
The combined toning and fixing
bath consists essentially of five parts —
(1) water, the solvent; (2) a soluble
salt of gold, such as gold chloride; (3)
the fixing agent, sodium thiosulphate;
(4) a compound which will readily com-
bine with "nascent" sulphur — i. e., sul-
phur as it is liberated — this is usually a
soluble lead salt, such as the acetate or
nitrate, and (5) an auxiliary, such as a
sulphocyanide.
The simplest bath was recommended
by Dr. John Nicol, and is as follows:
Sodium thiosulphate. 3 ounces
Distilled water 16 ounces
When dissolved, add
Gold chloride. ... 4 grains
Distilled water ... 4 fluidrachms
A bath which contains lead is due to Dr.
Vogel, whose name alone is sufficient to
warrant confidence in the formula:
Sodium thiosulphate 7 ounces
Ammonium sulpho-
cyanide 1 ounce
Lead acetate 67 grains
Alum 1 ounce
Gold chloride 12 grains
Distilled water 35 nuidounces
A bath which contains no lead is one
which has produced excellent results
and is due to the experimental research
of Dr. Liesegang. It is as follows:
Ammonium sul-
phocyanide. ... 1 ounce
Sodium chloride. . 1 ounce
Alum *, ounce
Sodium thios ul-
phate
Distilled water. .
4
24
ounces
fluidounces
Allow this solution to stand for 24
hours, during which time the precipi-
tated sulphur sinks to the bottom of the
vessel; decant or filter, and add
Gold chloride. ... 8 grains
Distilled water. .. 1 fluidounce
It is curious that, with the two baths
last described, the addition to them of
some old, exhausted solution makes them
work all the better.
ENLARGEMENTS.
TIMES OF ENLARGEMENT AND REDUCTION
00 .
3 03
U C
2
j=!
G
I
o
I
0
a
00
flj
0
a
co
a*
"o
d
OB
V
CO
m
0
0
G
00
18
2}
rH
0*
CO
«
?
4
4
5
6
3
3f
8
21
10
Si
10
2*
12
21
15
3
14
*i
16
2f
20"
2*
12 i
si
2-,H,-
22}
2A
3
6
6
7
8
9
12
4
15
si
18
3|
21
3}
24}
4-,V
24
3?
28~
4
27
S|
14
17$
4j
21
4*
31i
4
12
6
16
20
5
24
28
4|
32
36
4}
4i
9
9
13}
e|
18
6
22*
5|
27
51
31}
36
54
45A-
5
10
10
15
20
25
61
30
6
35
g
40
45
Si
6
11
11
12
16*
81
18
9
22
27*
6-i
30
33
6}
36~
n
38*
6,\
44
6?
49}
~54
e|
24
8
42
7
48
7
14
14
21
10}
28
35
42
82
fi
49
84
56
8
63
?£
8
7
16
16
Is
18
24
12
32
io§
40
10
48
91
54
56
64
72
9
27 36
13} 12
45
in
63
72
lOf
81
10J
PHOTOGRAPHY
543
The object of this table is to enable
any manipulator who is about to enlarge
(or reduce) a copy any given number of
times to do so without troublesome cal-
culation. It is assumed that the pho-
tographer knows exactly what the focus
of his lens is, and that he is able to meas-
ure accurately from its optical center.
The use of the table will be seen from
the following illustration: A photogra-
pher has a carte to enlarge to four times
its size, and the lens he intends employ-
ing is one of 6 inches equivalent focus.
He must therefore look for 4 on the
upper horizontal line and for 6 in the first
vertical column, and carry his eye to
where these two join, which will be at
30-7 1. The greater of these is the dis-
tance the sensitive plate must be from
the center of the lens; and the lesser, the
distance of the picture to be copied. To
reduce a picture any given number of
times, the same method must be fol-
lowed; but in this case the greater num-
ber will represent the distance between
the lens and the picture to be copied, the
latter that between the lens and the
sensitive plate. This explanation will
be sufficient for every case of enlargement
or reduction.
If the focus of the lens be 12 inches, as
this number is not in the column of focal
lengths, look out for 6 in this column and
multiply by 2, and so on with any other
numbers.
To make a good enlargement five
points should be kept constantly in view,
1. Most careful treatment of the orig-
inal negative.
2. Making a diapositive complete in
all its parts.
3. Scrupulous consideration of the
size of the enlargement.
4. Correct exposure during the proc-
ess of enlargement.
5. The most minute attention to the
details of development, including the
chemical treatment of the enlarged neg-
ative.
The original negative should not be
too dense, nor, on the contrary, should it
be too thin. If necessary, it should be
washed off, or strengthened, as the case
may be. Too strong a negative is usu-
ally weakened with ammonium per-
sulphate, or the fixing hypo solution is
quite sufficient. All spots, points, etc.,
should be retouched with the pencil and
carmine.
The diapositive should be produced by
contact in the copying apparatus. A
border of black paper should be used to
prevent the entry of light from the side.
The correct period of exposure de-
pends upon the thickness of the negative,
the source of the light, its distance, etc.
Here there is no rule, experience alone
must teach.
For developing one should use not too
strong a developer. The metol-soda
developer is well suited to this work, as
it gives especially soft lights and half
tones. Avoid too short a development.
When the finger laid behind the thickest
spot, and held toward the light, can no
longer be detected, the negative is dense
enough.
The denser negatives should be ex-
posed longer, and the development
should be quick, while with thin, light
negatives the reverse is true; the ex-
posure should be briefer and the de-
velopment long, using a strong developer,
and if necessary with an addition of po-
tassium bromiae.
The silver chloro-bromide diapositive
plates, found in the shops, are totally
unsuited for enlargements, as they give
overdone, hard pictures.
To produce good artistic results in
enlarging, the diapositive should be kept
soft, even somewhat too thin. It should
undergo, also, a thorough retouching.
All improvements are easily carried out
on the smaller positive or negative pic-
tures. Later on, after the same have
been enlarged, corrections are much
more difficult and troublesome.
VARNISHES:
Cold Varnish. —
I. — Pyroxylin .......... 10 grains
Amyl alcohol ....... 1 ounce
Amyl acetate ....... 1 ounce
Allow to stand, shaking frequently till
dissolved. Label: The negative should
be thoroughly dried before this solution
is applied, which may be done either by
flowing it over the solution or with a flat
brush. The negative should be placed in
a warm place for at least 12 hours to
thoroughly dry.
Label: In applying this varnish great
care should be taken not to use it near
a light or open fire. It can be flowed
over or brushed on the negative.
Black Varnish. —
Brunswick black. . . 1| ounces
Benzol ......... .. . . 1 ounce
Label: The varnish should be applied
with a brush, care being taken not to
use it near a light or open fire.
544
PHOTOGRAPHY
Dead Black Varnish. —
Borax
Shellac
Glycerine
Water..
30 grains
60 grains
30 minims
2 ounces
Boil till dissolved, filter, and add ani-
line black, 120 grains.
Label: Apply the solution with a
brush, and repeat when dry if necessary.
Ordinary Negative Varnish. —
Gum sandarac 1 ounce
Orange shellac \ ounce
Castor oil 90 minims
Methyl alcohol 1 pint
Allow to stand with occasional agita-
tion till dissolved, and then filter. Label:
The negative should be heated before a
fire till it can be comfortably borne on the
back of the hand, and then the varnish
flowed over, any excess being drained
off, and the negative should then be
again placed near the fire to dry.
Water Varnish. — It is not only in con-
nection with its application to a wet col-
lodion film that water varnish forms a
valuable addition to the stock of chem-
icals in all-round photography; it is
almost invaluable in the case of gelatin
as with wet collodion films. In the case
of gelatin negatives the water varnish is
applied in the shape of a wash directly
after the negatives have been washed to
free their films from all traces of hypo,
or in other words, at that stage when the
usual drying operation would begin.
After the varnish has been applied the
films are dried in the usual manner, and
its application will soon convince anyone
that has experienced the difficulty of re-
touching by reason of the want of a tooth
in the film to make a lead-pencil bite, as
the saying goes, that were this the only
benefit accruing from its application it
is well worthy of being employed.
The use of water varnish, however,
does away with the necessity of em-
ploying collodion as an additional pro-
tection to a negative, and is, perhaps,
the best known remedy against damage
from silver staining that experienced
workers are acquainted with. As a var-
nish it is not costly, neither is it difficult
to make in reasonably small quantities,
while its application is simplicity itself.
The following formula is an excellent
sample of water varnish:
Place in a clean, enameled pan 1 pint
of water, into which insert 4 ounces of
shellac in thin flakes, and place the vessel
on a fire or gas stove until the water is
raised to 212° F. When this tempera-
ture is reached a few drops of hot, sat-
urated solution of borax is dropped into
the boiling pan containing the shellac
and water, taking care to stir vigorously
with a long strip of glass until the shellac
is all dissolved. Too much borax should
not be added, only just sufficient to
cause the shellac to dissolve, and it is
better to stop short, if anything, before
all the flakes dissolve out than to add too
much borax. The solution is then fil-
tered carefully and, when cold, the water
varnish is ready for use.
FADED PHOTOGRAPHS AND THEIR
TREATMENT:
Restoring Faded Photographs. — I. —
As a precaution against a disaster first
copy the old print in the same size.
Soak the faded photograph for several
hours in clean water and, after separating
print from mount, immerse the former in
nitric acid, highly dilute (1 per cent), for
a few minutes. Then the print is kept
in a mercury intensifier (mercuric chlo-
ride, Bounce; common salt, \ ounce; hot
water, 16 ounces, used cold), until
bleached as much as possible. After
half an hour's rinsing, a very weak am-
monia solution will restore the photo-
graph, with increased vigor, the upper
tones being much improved, though the
shadows will show some tendency to
clog. The net result will be a decided
improvement in appearance; but, at this
stage, any similarly restored photo-
graphs should be recopied if their im-
portance warrants it, as mercury inten-
sifier results are not permanent. It may
be suggested that merely rephotograph-
ing and printing in platinotype will
probably answer.
II.— Carefully remove the picture
from its mount, and put it in a solution of
the following composition:
By weight
Hydrochloric acid. ... 2 parts
Sodium chloride 8 parts
Potassium bichromate 8 parts
Distilled water 250 parts
The fluid bleaches the picture, but
photographs that have been toned with
gold do not quite vanish. Rinse with
plenty of water, and develop again with
very dilute alkaline developer.
MOUNTANTS:
See also Adhesives.
I. — If buckling of the mount is to be
cured, the prints must be mounted in a
dry state, and the film of mountant borne
by the print must be just sufficient to
attach it firmly to the mount and no
more. The great virtue of the method
PHOTOGRAPHY
545
here described consists of the mar-
velously thin film of tenacious mountant
applied to the print in its dry condition,
shrinkage by this means being entirely
obviated. A drawing board with a per-
fectly smooth surface and of fair dimen-
sions, an ivory or bone burnisher at-
tached to a short handle, with some
common glue, are the principal requi-
sites. Take, say, a quarter of a pound of
the glue broken into small pieces and
cover it with water in a clean gallipot,
large enough to allow for the subsequent
swelling of the glue. Place on one side
until the glue has become thoroughly
permeated by the water, then pour off
the excess and dissolve the glue in the
water it has absorbed, by placing the
gallipot in a vessel of hot water. The
solution tested with a piece of blue lit-
mus paper will show a distinctly acid
reaction, which must be carefully neu-
tralized by adding some solution of car-
bonate of soda. The amount of water
absorbed by the glue will probably be
too little to give it the best working con-
sistency, and, if this is the case, sufficient
should be added to make it about the
thickness of ordinary molasses. Care-
ful filtration through a cambric hand-
kerchief, and the addition of about 10
grains of thymol, completes the prepara-
tion of the mounting solution. As glue
deteriorates by frequent and prolonged
heating, it is preferable to make up a
stock solution, from which sufficient for
the work in hand can be taken in the
form of jelly, melted, and used up at once.
The finished prints, dried and trimmed
to the required size, are placed on
the boards they are to occupy when
mounted, and, as it is impossible to re-
move a print for readjustment once it is
laid down for final mounting, the wisest
course is to indicate by faint pencil
marks on the mount the exact position
the print is to occupy; then it may be
laid down accurately and without any
indecision. A small gas or oil stove is
required on the mounting table to keep
the glue liquid, but maintaining the solu-
tion in a constant state of ebullition
throughout the operation is unnecessary
and harmful to the glue; the flame
should be regulated so that the mountant
is kept just at the melting point. Place
the drawing board beside the gas stove
and with a house-painter's brush of
good quality and size spread the glue
over an area considerably exceeding the
dimensions of the print to be mounted.
A thin coating of glue evenly applied to
the board is the end to aim at, to accom-
plish which the brush should be worked
in horizontal strokes, crossing these with
others at right angles. Have at hand a
small pile of paper cut into pieces some-
what larger than the print to be mounted
(old newspaper answers admirably for
these pieces), lay one down on the glued
patch and press it well into contact by
passing the closed hand across it in all
directions. Raise one corner of the
paper, and slowly but firmly strip it
from the board. Repeat the operations
of gluing the board (in the same place)
and stripping the newspaper 2 or 3
times, when a beautifully even cushion
of glue will remain on the board.
Mounting the prints is the next step.
The cushion of glue obtained on the
board has to be coated with glue for,
say, every second print, but the amount
applied must be as small as possible.
After applying the glue the print is laid
down upon .it, a square of the waste
newspaper laid over the print, which
has then to be rubbed well into contact
with the glue. Raise a corner of the
print with the point of a penknife and
strip it from the board, as in the case of
the newspaper. Care must be taken
when handling the print in its glued con-
dition to keep the fingers well beyond
the edges of the print, in order that no
glue may be abstracted from the edges.
Lay the print quickly down upon its
mount; with a clean, soft linen duster
smooth it everywhere into contact, place
upon it a square of photographic drying
board, and with the bone burnisher go
over it in all directions, using consider-
able pressure. The finished result is a
mounted print that shows no signs of
buckling, and which adheres to the
mount with perfect tenacity.
II. — Gelatin 2 parts
Water 4 parts
Alcohol 8 parts
The alcohol is added slowly as soon as
the gelatin is well dissolved in the water,
and the vessel turned continually to
obtain a homogeneous mixture. The
solution must be kept hot during the
operation on a water bath, and should
be applied quickly, as it soon dries; the
print must be placed exactly the first
time, as it adheres at once. The solu-
tion keeps for a long time in well-corked
bottles.
TRANSPARENT PHOTOGRAPHS:
I. — The following mixture may be
employed at 176° F., to render photo-
graphs transparent. It consists of 4 parts
paraffine and 1 part linseed oil. After
immersion the photographs are at once
546
PHOTOGRAPHY
dried between blotting paper. For fast-
ening these photographs to glass, glue or
gelatin solution alone cannot be em-
ployed. This is possible only when one-
fourth of its weight of sugar has been
added to the glue before dissolving. The
glasses for applying the photographs
must be perfect, because the slightest
defects are visible afterwards.
II. — If on albumen paper, soak the
print overnight in a mixture of 8 ounces
of castor oil and 1 ounce of Canada bal-
sam. Plain paper requires a much
shorter time. When the print is thor-
oughly soaked, take it from the oil, drain
well, and lay it on the glass face down-
ward, and squeeze till all is driven out
and the print adheres. If a curved glass
is used, prepare a squeegee with edge par-
allel with the curvature of the glass. It
will take several hours before the print is
dry enough to apply color to it.
THE GUM - BICHROMATE PHOTO-
PRINTING PROCESS.
Gum bichromate is not a universal
printing method. It is not suited for
all subjects or for all negatives, but
where there is simplicity and breadth in
sizes of 8£ x 6i and upward, direct or
enlarged prints by it have a charm al-
together their own, and afford an oppor-
tunity for individuality greater than any
other method.
While almost any kind of paper will
do, there are certain qualities that the
beginner at least should endeavor to
secure. It should be tough enough to
stand the necessary handling, which is
considerably more than in either the
printing-out or developing methods. It
must not be so hard or smooth as to make
coating difficult, nor so porous as to ab-
sorb or let the coating sink in too much;
but a few trials will show just what sur-
face is best. Till that experience is ac-
quired it may be said that most of What-
man's or Michallet's drawing papers, to
be had at any artist's materials store, will
be found all that can be desired; or,
failing these, the sizing of almost any
good paper will make it almost as suit-
able.
For sizing, a weak solution of gelatin
is generally employed, but arrowroot is
better; half an ounce to a pint of water.
It should be beaten into a cream with a
little of the water, the rest added, and
brought to the boil. When cold it may
be applied with a sponge or tuft of cotton,
going several times, first in one direction
and then in the other, and it saves a
little future trouble to pencil mark the
non-sized side.
The quality of the gum is of less im-
portance than is generally supposed, so
long as it is the genuine gum arabic, and
in round, clean "tears." To make the
solution select an 8-ounce, wide-mouthed
bottle, of the tall rather than the squat
variety, and place in it 6 ounces of water.
Two ounces of the gum are then tied
loosely in a piece of thin muslin and sus-
pended in the bottle so as to be about
two-thirds covered by the water. Solu-
tion begins at once, as may be seen by
the heavier liquid descending, and if
kept at the ordinary temperature of the
room may not be complete for 24 or even
48 hours; but the keeping qualities of the
solution will be greater than if the time
had been shortened by heat. When all
that will has been dissolved, there will
still be a quantity of gelatinous matter in
the muslin, but on no account must it be
squeezed out, as the semi-soluble matter
thus added to the solution would be in-
jurious. With the addition of a few
drops of carbolic acid and a good cork
the gum solution will keep for months.
The selection of the pigments is not
such a serious matter as some of the
writers would lead us to believe. Tube
water colors are convenient and save the
trouble of grinding, but the cheap colors
in powder take a better grip and give
richer images. The best prints are made
with mixtures of common lampblack,
red ocher, sienna, umber, and Vandyke
brown, the only objection to their em-
ployment being the necessity of rather
carefully grinding. This may be done
with a stiffish spatula and a sheet of
finely ground glass, the powder mixed
with a little gum solution and rubbed
with the spatula till smooth, but better
still is a glass paper weight in the shape
of a cone with a base of about li inches
in diameter, bought in the stationer's for
25 cents.
The sensitizer is a 10 per cent solution
of potassium bichromate, and whatever
be the pigment or whatever the method
of preparing the coating, it may be useful
to keep in mind that the right strength
or proportion, or at least a strength of
coating that answers very well, is equal
parts of that and the gum solution.
In preparing the coating measure the
gum solution in a cup from a toy tea set
that holds exactly 1 ounce, it being easier
to get it all out of this than out of a conic-
al graduate. From 20 to 30 grains of
the color or mixture of colors in powder is
placed on the slab — the ground surface
of an "opal" answers well — and enough
of the gum added to moisten it, and work
the paper weight "muller," aided by the
PHOTOGRAPHY
547
spatula, as long as any grittiness remains,
or till it is perfectly smooth, adding more
and more gum till it is like a thick cream.
It is then transferred to a squat teacup
and 1 ounce of the bichromate solution
gradually added, working it in with one
of the brushes to perfect homogeneity.
Of course, it will be understood that this
mixture should be used all at once, or
rather only as much as is to be used at
once should be made, as notwithstanding
what has been said to the contrary, it will
not keep. After each operation, both or
all of the brushes should be thoroughly
cleaned before putting them away.
Not the least important are the
brushes; one about 2 inches wide and
soft for laying on the coating, the other,
unless for small work, twice that breadth
and of what is known as "badger" or a
good imitation thereof, for softening.
The paper can be bought in sheets of
about 17 x 22 inches. Cut these in two,
coating pieces of about 17 x 11. The
sheet is fastened to a drawing board by
drawing pins, one at each corner. The
coating brush — of camel's hair, but it is
said that hog's is better — is filled with
the creamy mixture, which has been
transferred to a saucer as more con-
venient, and with even strokes, first one
way and then the other, drawn all over
the paper. It is easier to do than to de-
scribe, but all three joints, wrist, elbow,
and shoulder take part, and unless the
surface of the paper is too smooth, there
is really no difficulty to speak of.
By the time the whole surface has been
covered the paper will have expanded to
an extent that makes it necessary to re-
move three of the pins and tighten it, and
then comes the most" important and the
only really difficult part of the work, the
softening. The softener is held exactly
as one holds the pen in writing, and the
motion confined altogether to the wrist,
bringing only the points of the hair in
contact with the coating, more like stip-
pling than painting.
If much of the coating has been laid
on, and too much is less of an evil than
too little, the softener will soon have
taken up so much as to require washing.
This is done at the tap, drying on a soft
cloth, and repeat the operation, the
strokes or touches gradually becoming
lighter and lighter, till the surface is as
smooth and free from markings as if it
had been floated.
Just how thick the coating should be is
most easily learned by experience, but as,
unlike ordinary carbon, development
begins from the exposed surface, it must
be as deep; that is, as dark on the paper
as the deepest shadow on the intended
print, and it should not be deeper.
While it is true that the bichromate
colloid is not sensitive while wet, the
coating is best done in subdued light,
indeed, generally at night. Hang the
sheets to dry in the dark room.
Exposure should be made with some
form of actino-meter.
Development may be conducted in
various ways, and is modified according
to the extent of the exposure. Float the
exposed sheet on water at the ordinary
temperature from the .tap. The expo-
sure should admit of complete, or nearly
complete, development in that position
in from 5 to 10 minutes; although it
should not generally be allowed -to go so
far. By turning up a corner from time
to time one may see how it goes, and at
the suitable stage depending on what one
really wants to do, the otherwise plain
outcome of the negative is modified,
gently withdrawn from the water, and
pinned up to dry.
The modifying operation may be done
at once, where the exposure has been
long enough to admit it, but generally,
and especially when it has been such as
to admit of the best result, the image is
too soft, too easily washed off to make it
safe. But after having been dried and
again moistened by immersion in water,
the desired modification may be made
with safety.
The moistened print is now placed on
a sheet of glass, the lower end of which
rests on the bottom of the developing
tray, and supported by the left hand at a
suitable angle; or, better still, in some
other way so as to leave both hands free.
In this position, and with water at va-
rious temperatures, camel's-hair brushes
of various sizes, and a rubber syringe, it
is possible to do practically anything.
TABLES AND SCALES:
Comparative Exposures of Various
Subjects. —
Seconds
Open panorama, with fields and
trees 1
Snow, ice, marine views 1
Panorama, with houses, etc 2
Banks of rivers 3
Groups and portraits in open air
(diffused light) 6
Underneath open trees 6
Groups under cover 10
Beneath dense trees 10
Ravines, excavations 10
Portraits in light interiors 10
Portraits taken 4 feet from a win-
dow, indoors, diffused light 30
PHOTOGRAPHY
TABLE SHOWING DISPLACEMENT
ON GROUND GLASS OF OBJECTS
IN MOTION
By Henry L. Tolman
From the Photographic Times
Lens 6-inch Equivalent Focus, Ground
Glass at Principal Focus
of Lens
Miles
per
Hour.
Feet
per Sec-
ond.
Distance on
Ground Glass,
in inches, with
Object 30 Feet
away.
Same
with
Object
60 Feet
away.
Same
with Ob-
ject 120
Feet
away.
1
u
.29
.15
.073
2
• 3"
.59
.29
.147
3
H
.88
.41
.220
4
6
1.17
.59
.293
5
n
1.47
.73
.367
6
9
1.76
.88
.440
7
10|
2.05
.03
.513
8
12
2.35
.17
.587
9
13
2.64
.32
.660
10
14$
2.93
.47
.733
11
16
3.23
.61
.807
12
17^
3.52
.76
.880
13
19
3.81
.91
.953
14
20 \
4.11
2.05
1.027
15
22
4.40
2.20
1.100
20
29
5.87
2.93
1.467
25
37
7.33
3.67
1.833
30
44
8.80
4.40
2.200
35
51
10.27
5.13
2.567
40
59
11.73
5.97
2.933
W. D. Kilbey, in the American Annual
of Photography, gives still another table
for the exposure that should be given to
objects in motion.
According to his method the table is
made out for a distance from the camera
100 times that of the focus of the lens;
that is, for a 6-inch focus lens at 50
feet, a 7-inch at 58 feet, an 8-inch at 67
feet, a 9-inch at 75 feet, or a 12-inch at
100 feet.
Toward At Right
the Angles to
Camera, the Camera.
Man walking slowly,
street scenes
Cattle grazing
Boating
Man walking, children
playing, etc
Pony and trap, trot-
ting
Cycling, ordinary. . . .
Man running a race
and jumping
Cycle racing
Horses galloping
sec.
|
A "
TsTT
If the object is twice the distance, the
length of allowable exposure is doubled,
and vice versa.
To Reduce Photographs. — When one
wishes to copy a drawing or photograph
he is usually at a loss to know how high
the plate will be when any particular base
is selected. A plan which has the merit
of being simple and reliable has been in
use in engravers' offices for years.
Here are the details:
Reducing Scale for Copying Photographs.
Turn the drawing face down and rule
a diagonal line from the left bottom to
the right top corner. Then measure
from the left, on the bottom line, the
width required. Rule a vertical line from
that point until it meets the diagonal.
Rule from that point to the left, and the
resulting figure will have the exact pro-
portions of the reduction. If the depth
wanted is known, and the width is re-
quired, the former should be measured
on the left upright line, carried to the
diagonal, and thence to the lower hori-
zon. The accompanying diagram ex-
plains the matter simply.
COLOR PHOTOGRAPHY:
A Three -Color Process. — Prepare 7
solutions, 4 of which are used for color
screens, the remaining 3 serving as dyes
for the plates.
A. — Screen Solutions. —
Blue violet. By weight
Methylene blue .... 5 parts
Tetraethyldiamido-
oxytriphenyl car-
binol 2 parts
By weight
Methyl violet 5 parts
Alcohol 200 parts
Water, distilled. . . . 300 parts
Green. By weight
Malachite green ... 10 parts
Alcohol 200 parts
Water, distilled.. . . 300 parts
PHOTOGRAPHY
549
Yellow. By weight
Acridin yellow N.
0 10 parts
Alcohol 200 parts
Water, distilled. . . . 300 parts
Red. By weight
Congo rubin 10 parts
Alcohol 200 parts
Water, distilled. . . . 300 parts
B. — Dyes (Stock Solutions). —
By weight
I. — Acridin yellow or
acridin orange,
N. 0 1 part
Alcohol 100 parts
Water, distilled 400 parts
By weight
II. — Congo rubin 1 part
Alcohol 100 parts
Water, distilled 400 parts
By weight
III. — Tetraethyldiamido-
oxytriphenyl car-
binol 1 part
Alcohol 100 parts
Water, distilled. . . . 400 parts
The screen solutions, after being fil-
tered through paper filters into clean
dishes, are utilized to bathe 6 clean glass
plates previously coated with 2 per cent
raw collodion; we require 1 plate for blue
violet, 2 plates for red, 2 plates for yel-
low, and 1 plate for green, which in order
to obtain the screens are combined in
the following way: Yellow and red
plate, yellow and green plate. For
special purposes the other red plate may
be combined with the blue violet. An-
other method of preparing the screens
is to add the saturated solutions drop by
drop to a mixture of Canada balsam and
2 per cent castor oil and cement the
glasses together. Those who consider
the screens by the first method too trans-
parent, coat the glass plates with a mix-
ture of 2 to 3 per cent raw collodion and
1 per cent color solution. Others prefer
gelatin screens, using
By weight
Hard gelatin (Nel-
son's) 8 parts
Water 100 parts
Absolute alcohol. .. 10 parts
Pigment 1 part
This is poured over the carefully leveled
and heated plate after having been fil-
tered through flannel.
The collodion screens are cemented
together by moistening the edges with
Canada balsam (containing castor oil)
and pressing the plates together in a
printing frame, sometimes also binding
the edges with strips of Japanese paper.
On the evening before the day of work,
good dry plates of about 18° to 24° W.
are dyed in the following solution:
By weight
Stock solution, No. 1 16 parts
Distilled water 100 parts
Alcohol 5 parts
Nitrate of silver
(1.500) 50 parts
Ammonia 1-2 parts
This bath sensitizes almost uninter-
ruptedly to line A. The total sensi-
tiveness is high, and the plate develops
cleanly and fine. Blue sensitiveness is
very much reduced, and the blue screen
is used for exposure. As far as the
author's recollection goes, the plate for
the yellow color has never been color-
sensitized, many operators using the
commercial Vogel-Obernetter eosin sil-
ver plates made by Perutz, of Munich;
others again only use ordinary dry
plates with a blue-violet screen. This
is, however, a decided mistake, necessi-
tating an immense amount of retouch-
ing, as otherwise it produces a green
shade on differently colored objects of
the'print.
For the red color plate the dry plate
is dyed in
By weight
Stock solution, No. 2 10 parts
Distilled water 100 parts
Nitrate of silver
(1.500) 100 parts
Ammonia 2 parts
The resulting absorption band is
closed until E, reaching from violet to
red (over C). This red pigment was
examined by Eder, who obtained very
good results, using ammonia in the solu-
tion.
The corresponding screen is a com-
bination of malachite green with acridin
yellow or acridin orange N. O.
For the blue color plate the dye is
made up as follows:
By weight
Stock solution, No. 3 0.5-1 part
Distilled water 100 parts
Nitrate of silver
(1.500) 100 parts
Ammonia 1-2 parts
This dye yields a strong band, com-
mencing at B, reaching to C £ D; since
the orange screen used herewith neces-
sitates a long exposure, the action seems
to extend into the infra-red (beyond A).
As a rule, cyanine is used instead of
the tetraethyldiamidooxytriphenyl car-
550
PHOTOGRAPHY
binol (HC1 salt), but the former is apt
to produce fogged plates. Methyl vio-
let or crystal violet has also been sug-
gested.
Exposures should be made in direct
sunlight or with artificial pure white
light (acetylene); electric light is too
variable.
The most suitable methods of repro-
duction are half-tone, and the prototype
methods; also Turati's Isotypie. The
greatest difficulty in 3-color printing
nowadays is presented by the want of
accurate printing. We must use the
proper paper and pure fast colors; the
inking rollers should be smooth, not too
soft, and free from pores or weals. The
blocks must be firmly fixed typehigh,
otherwise they take color irregularly. A
good printing machine is, of course,
most essential.
To supplement the above working
directions: After having kept the plates
for 2 or 3 minutes (constantly moving
the dish) in the dyes, they are removed
into a dish containing filtered alcohol,
which extracts the superfluous pigment.
Plates thus treated dry much more
rapidly, develop cleaner, and show no
fogging.
Most of the above dyes may be .ob-
tained from the "Berliner Actienge-
sellschaft fiir Anilinfabrikation," the
acridin only from the "Farbwerk Miihl-
heim, a/Main, vorm. A. Leonhard &
Company."
Solution for Preparing Color Sensitive
Plates. — H. Vollenbruch maintains that
plates sensitized with erythrosin silver
citrate are not only more sensitive to
color impressions, but also have better
keeping qualities than ordinary ery-
throsin bathed plates.
For depression of the over-active blue
rays he recommends the addition of
picric acid to the coloring solution. The
picric acid erythrosin silver citrate am-
monia solution is prepared as follows:
Solution I
Citrate of potassa 1 gram
Distilled water . . 10 cubic centimeters
Solution II
Silver nitrate 1 gram
Distilled water . . 10 cubic centimeters
Both solutions are mixed and a white
precipitate is formed which is allowed to
subside. The clear supernatant liquid
is poured off carefully, precipitate washed
with water, allowed again to subside, and
the wash water again decanted. This
process is repeated two or three times.
Finally a large bulk of water (20 cubic
centimeters) is added to the precipitate
and well shaken; 5 cubic centimeters of
this is reserved, the remainder is treated
to ammonia, drop by drop, until the
precipitate is redissolved. Now add the
5 cubic centimeters of reserved solution
and shake the whole until every particle
is dissolved. Then make up the solu-
tion to 50 cubic centimeters and filter;
this forms Solution III.
Solution IV
Distilled water . . 300 cubic centimeters
Pure erythrosin.. 1 grain
Under lamplight the 50 cubic centi-
meters of Solution III are poured slowly
with repeated shaking in Solution IV, by
which the originally beautiful red is con-
verted into a dirty turbid bluish red
somewhat viscid fluid; add —
Solution V
Picric acid 4 grams
Absolute alcohol. 30 cubic centimeters
Shake well, and add to the whole 33
cubic centimeters ammonia (specific
gravity, 0.91), wherewith the beautiful
red color is restored.
After the filtration call this Solution
VI. This solution keeps well. The
slight deposit formed is redissolved on
shaking.
The plates are sensitized as follows:
The plate to be sensitized is first laid in a
tray of distilled water for 2 or 3 minutes,
then bathed in a mixture of 1 cubic cen-
timeter ammonia for 1 minute and finally
for 2 minutes in a bath composed of the
following:
Color Solution VI 10 cubic centimeters
Distilled water. . . 300 cubic centimeters
The plate is well drained and dried in
a perfectly dark room. These plates
keep well for several months.
MICROPHOTOGRAPHS.
The instruments used are an objective
of very short focus and a small camera
with a movable holder. This camera
and the original negative to be reduced
are fastened to the opposite ends of a
long, heavy board, similar to the ar-
rangement in use for the making of lan-
tern slides. The camera must be mov-
able in the direction of the objective axis,
and the negative must be fastened to a
vertically stationary stand. It is then
uniformly lighted from the reversed side
by either daylight or artificial light. Some
difficulty is experienced in getting a
sharp focus of the picture. The ordi-
nary ground glass cannot be used, not
PHOTOGRAPHY
551
being fine enough, and the best medium
for this purpose is a perfectly plain piece
of glass, coated with pretty strongly
iodized collodion, and sensitized in the
silver bath, the same way as in the wet
process. The focusing is done with a
small lens or even with a microscope.
The plate intended for the picture has,
of course, to lie in exactly the same plane
as the plate used for focusing. To be
certain on this point, it is best to focus
upon the picture plate, inserting for this
purpose a yellow glass between objective
and plate. If satisfactory sharpness has
been obtained, the apparatus is once for
all in order for these distances. Bromide
of silver gelatin plates, on account of
their comparatively coarse grain, are not
suitable for these small pictures, and the
collodion process has to come to the
rescue.
Dagron, in Paris, a prominent spe-
cialist in this branch, gives the following
directions: A glass plate is well rubbed on
both sides with a mixture of 1,000 parts
of water, 50 parts powdered chalk, and
200 parts of alcohol, applied with a cot-
ton tuft, after which it is gone over with
a dry cotton tuft, and thereafter cleaned
with a fine chamois leather. The side
used for taking the picture is then finally
cleaned with old collodion. The collo-
dion must be a little thinner than ordi-
narily used for wet plates. Dissolve
Ether 400 parts
Alcohol 100 parts
Collodion cotton. ... 3 parts
Iodide ammonia. ... 4 parts
Bromide ammonia. . 1 part
The plate coated herewith is silvered
in a silver bath of 7 or 8 per cent. From
12 to 15 seconds are sufficient for this.
The plate is then washed in a tray or
under a faucet with distilled water, to
liberate it from the free nitrate of silver
and is afterwards placed upon blotting
paper to drip off. The still moist plate
is then coated with the albumen mixture:
Albumen 150 cubic centimeters
Add
Water 15 cubic centimeters
Iodide potassium 3 grams
Ammonia 5 grams
White sugar 2 grams
Iodine, a small cake.
With a v/ooden quirl this is beaten to
snow (foam) for about 10 minutes, after
which it must stand for 14 hours to.settle.
The albumen is poured on to the plate
the same as collodion, and the surplus
filtered back. After drying, the plate is
laid for 15 seconds in a silver bath, con-
sisting of 100 parts of water, 10 parts
nitrate of silver, and 10 cubic centimeters
of acetic acid. The plate is then care-
fully washed and left to dry. If care-
fully kept, it will retain its properties for
years. To the second silver bath, when
it assumes a dirty coloration, is added 25
parts kaolin to each 100 parts, by shak-
ing the same well, and the bath is then
filtered, after which a little nitrate of
silver and acetic acid is added.
After each exposure the plate holder
is moved a certain length, so that 10 or
more reproductions are obtained upon
one and the same plate. The time of
exposure depends upon the density of
the negative ^ and differs according to
light. It varies between a second and a
minute.
The developer is composed as follows:
Water 100 parts
Gallic acid 0.3 parts
Pyro 0.1 part
Alcohol 2.5 parts
The exposed plate is immersed in this
bath, and after 10 to 20 seconds, from 1
to 2 drops of a 2 per cent nitrate of silver
solution are added to each 100 cubic
centimeters of the solution, whereby the
picture becomes visible. To follow the
process exactly, the plate has to be laid —
in yellow light — under a weakly enlarg-
ing microscope, and only a few drops of
the developer are put upon the same.
As soon as the picture has reached the
desired strength, it is rinsed and fixed in
a fixing soda solution, 1 to 5. Ten to 15
seconds are sufficient generally. Finally
it is washed well.
After the drying of the plate, the sev-
eral small pictures are cut with a dia-
mond and fastened to the small enlarg-
ing lenses. For this purpose, the latter
are laid upon a metal plate heated from
underneath, a drop of -Canada balsam is
Eut to one end of the same, and, after it
as become soft, the small diappsitive
is taken up with a pair of fine pincers,
and is gradually put in contact with the
fastener. Both g.asses are then allowed
to lie until the fastener has become hard.
If bubbles appear, the whole method of
fastening the picture has to be repeated.
Photographs on Brooches. — These may
be produced by means of a paper (celuidin
paper) whose upper layer after exposure
by means of ordinary negative can be
detached in lukewarm water. The pic-
ture copied on this paper is first laid in
tepid water. After a few minutes it is
taken out and placed on the article in
question, naturally with the face upon it.
The enamel surface upon which the pic
552
PHOTOGRAPHY
ture is laid is previously coated with
gelatin solution to insure a safe ad-
hesion. When dry, the article is placed
in water in which the paper is loosened
and the photographic image now ad-
heres firmly to the object. It may now
be colored further and finally is coated
with a good varnish.
FLASHLIGHT POWDERS AND AP-
PARATUS.
Flash powders to be ignited by simply
applying the flame of a match or laying
on an oued paper and igniting that, may
be made by the following formulas:
I. — Magnesium 6 parts
Potassium chlorate.. Imparts
II. — Aluminum 4 parts
Potassium chlorate.. 10 parts
Sugar 1 part
The ingredients in each case are to be
powdered separately, and then lightly
mixed with a wooden spatula, as the
compound may be ignited by friction
and burn with explosive violence.
It is best to make only such quantity
as may be needed for use at the time,
which is 10 or 15 grains.
To Prevent Smoke from Flashlight. —
Support over the point where the ignition
is to take place a large flat pad of damp
wool lint. This may be done by tacking
the lint to the underside of a board sup-
ported on legs. When ignition takes
place the products of combustion for the
most part will become absorbed by the
wool.
A Flashlight Apparatus with Smoke
Trap.— A light box, not too large to be
conveniently carried out into the open
air, is the first essential, and to the open
front of this grooves must be fitted, in
which grooves a lid will slide very easily,
a large sheet of 'millboard being con-
venient as a sliding lid. The box being
so placed that the sliding lid can be
drawn out upward, a thread is attached
to the lower edge of the lid, after which
the thread is passed over a pulley fixed
inside the box near the top, when the end
is attached to the bottom of the box, so
that the thread holds the sliding lid
up. The lid will then slide down the
grooves quickly, and close the box, if the
thread is severed, the thread being cut
at the right instant by placing the lower
part across the spot where the flash is
to be produced. So small is the cloud
of smoke at the first instant that prac-
tically the whole of it can be caught in a
drop trap of the above-mentioned kind,
apparatus is not required again
drop trap
If the at)
for immediate use, the smoke may be
allowed to settle down in the box; but in
other cases the box may be taken out
into the open air, and the smoke buffeted
out with a cloth. In the event of sev-
eral exposures being required in imme-
diate succession, the required number of
apparatus might be set up, as each need
not cost much to construct.
INTENSIFIERS AND REDUCERS:
Intensifier (Mercuric) with Sodium
Sulphite, for Gelatin Dry Plates. — •
Whiten the negative in the saturated
solution of mercuric chloride, wash and
blacken with a solution of sulphite of
sodium, 1 in 5. Wash well.
The reduction is perfect, with a posi-
tive black tone.
Intensifier with Iodide of Mercury. — •
Dissolve 1 drachm of bichloride of mer-
cury in 7 ounces of water and 3 drachms
of iodide of potassium in 3 ounces of
water, and pour the iodide solution into
the mercury till the red precipitate formed
is completely dissolved.
For use, dilute with water, flow over
the negative till the proper density is
reached, and wash, when the deposit will
turn yellow. Remove the yellow color
by flowing a 5 per cent solution of hypo
over the plate, and give it the final wash-
ing.
Agfa Intensifier. — One part of agfa
solution in 9 parts water (10 per cent
solution). Immerse negative from 4 to*
6 minutes.
Intensifying Negatives Without Mer-
cury.— Dissolve 1 part of iodine and 2
parts of potassium iodide in 10 parts of
water. When required for use, dilute 1
part of this, solution with 100 parts of
water. Wash the negative well and
place in this bath, allowing it to remain
until it has become entirely yellow, and
the image appears purely dark yellow on
a light-yellow ground. The negative
should then be washed in water until
the latter runs off clearly, when it is
floated with the following solution until
the whole of the image has become uni-
formly brown:
Schlippe's salt 60 grains
Water 1 ounce
Caustic soda solution,
10 per cent 6 drops
Finally the negative is again thor-
oughly washed and dried. The addi-
tion of the small quantity of caustic
soda is to prevent surface crystallization.
It is claimed that with this intensifier the
operation may be carried out to a greater
PHOTOGRAPHY
553
extent than with bichloride of mercury;
that it gives clear shadows, and that it
possesses the special advantage of re-
moving entirely any yellow stain the
negative may have acquired during de-
velopment and fixing. Furthermore,
with this intensifying method it is not
necessary to wash the negative, even
after fixing, as carefully as in the case of
the intensifying processes with mercury,
because small traces of hypo which may
have been left in the film will be rendered
innocuous by the free iodine. The iodine
solution may be employed repeatedly if
its strength is kept up by the addition of
concentrated stock solution.
Uranium Intensifier. —
Potassium ferricya-
nide (washed) 48 grains
Uranium nitrate 48 grains
Sodium acetate 48 grains
Glacial acetic acid. ... 1 ounce
Distilled water to. ... 10 ounces.
Label: Poison. Immerse the well-
washed negative till the desired intensi-
fication is reached, rinse for 5 minutes
and dry. This intensifier acts very
strongly and should not therefore be
allowed to act too long.
MISCELLANEOUS FORMULAS:
Renovating a Camera. — The follow-
ing formula should be applied to the
mahogany of the camera by means of a
soft rag, rubbing it well in, finally polishing
lightly with a clean soft cloth:
Raw linseed oil 6 ounces
White wine vinegar. . . 3 ounces
Methylated spirit .... 3 ounces
Butter of antimony. . . \ ounce
Mix the oil with vinegar by degrees,
shaking well to prevent separation after
each addition, then add the spirit and
antimony, and mix thoroughly. Shake
before using.
Exclusion of Air from Solutions. —
Water is free from air only when it has
been maintained for several minutes in
bubbling ebullition. In order to keep
out the air from the bottle, when using
the contents, the air-pressure contriv-
ances are very convenient; one glass
tube reaching through the rubber stop-
per into the bottle to the bottom, while
the second tube, provided with a rubber
pressing-ball, only runs into the flask
above. If the long bent tube is fitted
with a rubber tube, a single pressure suf-
fices to draw off the desired quantity of
the developer. It is still more convenient
to pour a thin layer of good sweet oil on
top of the developer besides. The de-
veloper is not injured thereby, and the
exclusion of air is perfect.
Bottle Wax. — Many ready-prepared
solutions, such as developers and other
preparations from which light has to be
excluded, should be packed in bottles
whose neck, after complete drying of the
stopper, is dipped in a pot with molten
sealing wax. A good recipe is the fol-
. -
lowing, pigments being added if desired:
For black take: Colophony, 6 parts;
paraffine, 3 parts. Melt together and
, .
add 20 parts of black. For yellow, only
7 parts of chrome yellow. For blue, 7
parts of ultramarine.
Bleaching Photographic Prints White.
— To make a salt print, ink over it with
waterproof ink, then bleach out white all
but the black lines. Sensitize Clemen's
mat surface paper on a 40-grain bath of
nitrate of silver. After fuming and
printing, the print is thoroughly fixed
in hyposulphite of soda solution, and
washed in running water until every
trace of the hypo is out of the print. On
this the permanency of the bleaching op-
eration depends. The bleaching bath is:
Bichloride of mercury 1 ounce
Water .............. 5 ounces
Alcohol ............. 1 ounce
Hydrochloric acid.. .. 1 drachm
If the drawing has been made with
non-waterproof ink, then alcohol is sub-
stituted for the water in the formula.
For safety, use an alcoholic solution of
mercury. The bleaching solution is
poured on and off the drawing, and, when
the print is bleached white, the mercury is
washed off the drawing by holding it for
a few moments under running water.
Photographs bleached in this way will
keep white for years.
To Render Negatives Permanent. — A
fine negative, one that we would like to
preserve, may be rendered permanent
by placing it, after it has been fixed, in a
10 per cent solution of alum, and letting
it remain a few minutes. This makes
the plate wonderfully clear and clean,
and absolutely unalterable. The alum
acts upon the gelatin, rendering it in-
soluble.
Stripping Photograph Films. — This
is generally done by immersing the plate
in formaldehyde solution until the film
has become almost insoluble and im-
permeable. Then it is placed in a solu-
tion of sodium carbonate until the gela-
tin has absorbed a sufficient quantity
of it. When the negative is immersed
in weak hydrochloric acid, carbon di-
554
PHOTOGRAPHY
oxide is liberated, and the little bub-
bles of gas which lodge themselves be-
tween the film and the glass cause a
separation of the two, so that the film
may be stripped off. After having har-
dened the film with formaldehyde, it
is a lengthy process to get it saturated
with sodium carbonate. It is advisable
to use a combined bath of 1 part of car-
bonate, 3 of 40 per cent formaldehyde,
and 20 of water; its tanning action is en-
hanced by the alkaline reaction, and two
operations are superseded by one. Af-
ter 10 minutes' soaking, the surface of
the film must be wiped and the plate
dried. A sharp knife is then used to cut
all around the film a slight distance
from the edge, and when this is done the
negative is put into a 5 per cent solution
of nydrochloric acid, when the film will
probably float off unaided; but, if neces-
sary, may be assisted by gently raising
one corner.
Phosphorescent Photographs. — The
necessary chemicals belong to the class of
phosphorescent bodies, among others,
calcium sulphite, strontium sulphite,
barium sulphide, calcareous spar, fluor-
spar. These placed in the magnesium
light or sunlight, acquire the property of
giving forth, for a shorter or longer time,
a light of their own. The best examples
of these substances are the well-known
"Balmains light colors," which yield a
very clear and strong light after ex-
posure. They consist of calcium sul-
phide, 10,000 parts; bismuth oxide, 13
parts; sodium hyposulphite, 1,000 parts.
According to Professor Schnauss,
plates for phosphorographs are prepared
as follows: Dissolve 10 parts of pure
gelatin in 50 parts of hot water, add and
dissolve 30 parts of "light" color (as
above), and 1 part of glycerine.
If a plate or a paper, prepared as
above detailed, be placed under a dia-
positiye, in a copying apparatus, and
submitted to the action of sunlight for a
few minutes, when taken out in a dark
room a phosphorescent picture of the
diapositive will be found. It is also a
known fact that duplicate negatives or
positives may be made with this phos-
phorograph by simply bringing the latter
in contact in a copying apparatus, with
the ordinary silver bromide plate for 30
seconds, in the dark room, and then de-
veloping the same.
Printing Names on Photographs. —
The name or other matter to be printed
on the photograph is set up in type, and
printed on cardboard; from this make
an exposure on a transparency plate,
developing it strongly. After the print
has been made from the regular printing
negative, it is placed under the dense
transparency of the regular negative,
and the name printed in. The only
precaution necessary is to time the
transparency negative properly, and de-
velop strongly, so as to get good con-
trast. Photographers will find this a
much easier and quicker method than
the old one of printing on tissue paper
and fastening the paper to the negative
by means of varnish; moreover, the
result is black instead of white, usually
much more pleasing.
Spots on Photographic Plates. — Spots
on photographic plates may be caused
by dust or by minute bubbles in the
emulsion, both of which are easily pre-
ventable, but some spots cannot be
ascribed to either of these causes. On
investigating this trouble, Mumford
found that it is due to the presence on
the surface of the film of small colonies
of microorganisms which, under condi-
tions favorable to their growth, are capa-
ble of producing large mold colonies,
from which the organisms can easily be
separated. Experiments were instituted
in order to find whether these growths
can be produced on the plate by arti-
ficial means, by inoculating the surface
with a fluid culture of one of these
organisms, with affirmative results, but
with one slight difference, namely, that
in the inoculated film, on microscopic
examination, no dust particle was visible
in the center of each spot, which had
formerly been the case. As these micro-
organisms do not exist in the air as iso-
lated units, but travel upon small or large
dust particles in the case under consid-
eration, the carrying medium most
probably is the fine impalpable dust
from which it is practically impossible to
free the air of a building. In order
that these organisms may grow into
colonies of sufficient size to cause spots,
they must be able to grow rapidly, there
being only about 12 hours before the
plate is dry in which they can grow; and
they must also be capable of growing at
the rather high temperature of 70° F.
On testing some of the organisms caus-
ing the spots it was found that they grew
best under exactly such conditions. A
bacteriological examination of some of
the gelatin used in the manufacture of
plates, both in the raw state and in the
form of emulsion, also revealed the fact
that there were numerous organisms
present. No means for the prevention
of this troublesome defect is suggested;
PHOTOGRAPHY— PIGMENTS
555
most dry-plate manufacturers use the
precaution to add a small quantity of a
chemical antiseptic to the emulsion, but
it is not possible to employ a sufficient
quantity to destroy any organisms that
may be present without damaging the
plate for photographic purposes.
To Remove Pyro Stains from the Fin-
gers.— Make a strong solution of chlori-
nated lime; dip the fingers which are
stained in this, and rub the stains with a
large crystal of citric acid. Apply the
lime solution and acid alternately until
the stain is removed; then rinse with
water.
To Remove Pvro Stain from Nega-
tives.— Immerse in a clearing bath as
follows:
Protosulphate of iron . 3 ounces
Alum 1 ounce
Citric acid 1 ounce
Water 20 ounces
Prevention is better than cure, how-
ever; therefore immerse the negatives in
the above directly they are taken from
the fixing bath. After clearing the neg-
atives, they should be well washed.
PHOTOGRAPHY WITHOUT LIGHT:
See Catatypy.
PIANO POLISHES:
See Polishes.
PICKLE FOR BRASS:
See Brass and Plating.
PICKLE FOR BRONZE:
See Bronze Coloring.
PICKLE FOR COPPER:
See Copper and Plating.
PICKLE VINEGAR:
See Vinegar.
PICKLING OF GERMAN-SILVER
ARTICLES:
See Plating.
PICKLING IRON SCRAP BEFORE
ENAMELING:
See Enameling.
PICRIC ACID STAINS, TO REMOVE:
See Cleaning Preparations and Meth-
ods.
PICTURE COPYING:
See Copying.
PICTURE FRAMES, REPAIRING:
See Adhesives and Lutes.
PICTURE POSTAL CARDS:
See Photography.
Pigments
(See also Paints.)
Nature, Source, and Manufacture of
Pigments. — A pigment is a dry earthy or
clayey substance that, when mixed with
oil, water, etc., forms a paint. Most
pigments are of mineral origin, but there
are vegetable pigments, as logwood, and
animal pigments, as cochineal. In
modern practice the colors are produced
mainly by dyeing certain clays, which
excel in a large percentage of silicic acid,
with aniline dyestuffs. The coloring
matters best adapted for this purpose
are those of a basic character. The col-
ors obtained in this manner excel in a
vivid hue, and fastness to light and water.
Following is a general outline of their
manufacture: One hundred parts, by
weight, of washed clay in paste form are
finely suspended in 6 to 8 times the volume
of water and acidulated with about 1|
parts, by volume, of 5 per cent hydrochlo-
ric or acetic acid, and heated by means
of steam almost to the boiling tempera-
ture. There is next introduced, ac-
cording to the shade desired, 1 to 2 parts,
by weight, of the dyestuff, such as aura-
min, diamond green, Victoria blue, etc.,
with simultaneous stirring and heating,
for 1 to 2 hours, or until a sample filtered
off from the liquor shows no dyestuff.
Next the clay dyed in this manner is
isolated by filtration and washed with
hot water and dried. The colors thus
obtained may be used as substitutes for
mineral colors of all description.
The method of manufacture varies
greatly. According to the Bennett and
Mastin English patent the procedure
is as follows: Grind together to a paste
in water, substances of a clayey, stony,
earthy, or vitreous nature, and certain
metallic oxides, or "prepared oxides,"
such as are commonly used in the pot-
tery trades; dry and powder the paste,
and subject the powder to the heat of a
furnace, of such a temperature that the
requisite color is obtained, and for such
length of time that the color strikes
through the whole substance. For ex-
ample, 8 parts of black oxide of cobalt,
12 parts of oxide of zinc, and 36 parts of
alumina, when incorporated with 20
times their combined bulk of clay and
treated as described, yield a rich blue
pigment in the case of a white clay, arid
a rich green in the case of a yellow clay.
Long-continued firing in this case im-
proves the color.
Many minerals included in formulas
for pigments have little or no coloring
power in themselves; nevertheless they
556
PIGMENTS
are required in producing the most beau-
tiful shades of color when blended one
with another, the color being brought
out by calcination.
Mixing Oil Colors and Tints. — It must
not be expected that the formulas given
will produce the exact effect desired, be-
cause the strength of the various brands
of colors vary to a great extent, and
therefore the painter must exercise his
own judgment. The table simply gives
an idea of what can be produced by fol-
lowing the formulas given, when chem-
ically pure material is employed in the
mixing. It is also recommended that
the parts mentioned be weighed out in
paste form, and the white or black and
each color separately thinned and
strained before mixing them together,
because the arriving at the proper hue of
color or depth and tone of tint will be
simplified by using that precaution. By
thinning it is not meant that they should
be quite ready for application, but of
such consistency that they will pass an
ordinary strainer with the aid of a
brush.
Unless otherwise indicated, the ma-
terials are understood to be ground fine
in paste form.
NOTE. — The majority of the following
are by Joseph Griggs, in the Painters'
Magazine:
GROUNDS FOR GRAINING COLORS:
Ash Ground. — Four hundred parts white
lead; 4 parts French ocher; 1 part raw
Turkey umber.
Ash. — Raw umber; raw sienna; and a
little black or Vandyke brown.
Hungarian Ash. — Raw sienna and raw
and burnt umber.
Bun Ash. — Raw sienna; burnt umber;
and Vandyke brown.
Cherry Ground. — One hundred parts
white lead; 5 parts burnt sienna; 1 part
raw sienna.
Natural Cherry. — Raw and burnt
sienna and raw umber.
Stained Cherry. — Burnt sienna; burnt
umber; and Vandyke brown.
Chestnut. — Raw sienna; burnt umber;
Yandyke brown; and a little burnt
sienna.
Maple. — Raw sienna and raw umber.
Silver Maple. — Ivory black over a
nearly white ground.
Light Maple Ground. — One hundred
parts white lead; 1 part French ocher.
Dark Maple Ground. — One hundred
parts white lead; 1 part dark golden
ocher.
Oak. — Raw sienna; burnt umber; a
little black.
Pollard Oak. — Raw and burnt sienna,
or burnt umber and Vandyke brown.
Light Oak Ground. — Fifty parts white
lead; 1 part French ocher.
Dark Oak Ground. — Fifty parts white
lead; 1 part dark golden ocher.
Satinwood. — Add a little ivory black
to maple color.
Mahogany. — Burnt sienna; burnt um-
ber; and Vandyke brown.
Mahogany Ground. — Ten parts white
lead; 5 parts orange chrome; and 1 part
burnt sienna.
Rosewood. — Vandyke brown and a
little ivory black.
Rosewood Ground. — Drop black.
Walnut Ground. — Fifty parts white
lead; 3 parts dark golden ocher; 1 part
dark Venetian red; and 1 part drop
black.
Black Walnut. — Burnt umber with a
little Vandyke brown for dark parts.
French Burl Walnut. — Same as black
walnut.
Hard Pine. — Raw and burnt sienna;
add a little burnt umber.
Cypress. — Raw and burnt sienna and
burnt umber.
Whitewood. — Ground same as for
light ash; graining color, yellow ocher,
adding raw umber and black for dark
streaks.
POSITIVE COLORS:
Blue. — Twelve parts borate of lime; 6
parts oxide of zinc; 10 parts litharge; 9 parts
feldspar; 4 parts oxide of cobalt.
Blue Black A. — Nine parts lamp-
black; 1 part Chinese or Prussian blue.
Blue Black B. — Nineteen parts drop
black; 1 part Prussian blue.
Bright Mineral. — Nine parts light Ve-
netian red; 1 part red lead.
Brilliant Green. — Nine parts Paris
green; 1 part C. C. chrome green, light.
Bronze Green, Light. — Three parts
raw Turkey umber; 1 part medium
chrome yellow.
Bronze Green, Medium. — Five parts
medium chrome yellow; 3 parts burnt
Turkey umber; 1 part lampblack.
Bronze Green, Dark. — Twenty parts
drop black; 2 parts medium chrome yel-
low; and 1 part dark orange chrome.
PIGMENTS
557
Bottle Green. — Five parts commercial
chrome green, medium, and 1 part
drop black.
Brown. — Ten parts crude antimony;
12 parts litharge; 2 parts manganese;
1 part oxide of iron.
Brown Stone. — Eighteen parts burnt
umber; 2 parts dark golden ocher; and 1
part burnt sienna.
Cherry Red. — Equal parts of best
imitation vermilion and No. 40 carmine.
Citron A. — Three parts medium chrome
yellow and 2 parts raw umber.
Citron B. — Six parts commercial chrome
green, light, and 1 part medium chrome
yellow.
Coffee Brown. — Six parts burnt Tur-
key umber; 2 parts French ocher; and 1
part burnt sienna.
Emerald Green. — Use Paris green.
Green. — Twenty parts litharge; 12 parts
flint; 2 parts oxide of copper; 2J parts ground
glass; 2 \ parts whiting; 1J parts oxide of
chrome.
Flesh Color. — Nineteen parts French
ocher; 1 part deep English vermilion.
Fern Green. — Five parts lemon chrome
yellow and 1 part each of light chrome
green and drop black.
Foliage Green. — Three parts medium
chrome yellow and 1 part of ivory or
drop black.
Foliage Brown. — Equal parts of Van-
dyke brown and orange chrome yellow.
Golden Ocher. — Fourteen parts French
yellow ocher and 1 part medium chrome
yellow for the light shade, and 9 parts
Oxford ocher and 1 part orange chrome
yellow for the dark shade.
Gold Russet. — Five parts lemon chrome
yellow and 1 part light Venetian red.
Gold Orange. — Equal parts of dry
orange mineral and light golden ocher in
oil.
Indian Brown. — Equal parts of light
Indian red, French ocher, and lamp
black.
Mahogany, Cheap. — Three parts dark
golden ocher and 1 part of dark Venetian
red.
Maroon, Light. — Five parts dark Ve-
netian red; 1 part drop black.
Maroon, Dark. — Nine parts dark In-
dian red; 1 part lampblack.
Olive Green. — Seven parts light golden
ocher; 1 part drop black.
Ochrous Olive. — Nine parts French
ocher; 1 part raw umber.
Orange- Brown. — Equal parts burnt
sienna and orange chrome yellow.
Oriental Red. — Two parts Indian red,
light, in oil; 1 part dry red lead.
Purple A. — Eight parts crocus martis;
2 parts red hematite; 1 part oxide of iron.
Purple B. — Two parts rose pink; 1
part ultramarine blue.
Purple Black. — Three parts lamp-
black and 1 part rose pink, or 9 parts
drop black and 1 part rose pink.
Purple Brown. — Five parts Indian
red, dark, and 1 part each of ultramarine
blue and lampblack.
Roman Ocher. — Twenty-three parts
French ocher and 1 part each burnt
sienna and burnt umber.
Royal Blue, Dark. — Eighteen parts
ultramarine blue and 2 parts Prussian
blue. To lighten use as much white
lead or zinc white as is required.
Royal Purple. — Two parts ultramarine
blue; 1 part No. 40 carmine or carmine
lake.
Russet. — Fourteen parts orange
chrome yellow and 1 part C. P. chrome
green, medium.
Seal Brown. — Ten parts burnt umber;
2 parts golden ocher, light; 1 part burnt
sienna.
Snuff Brown. — Equal parts burnt um-
ber and golden ocher, light.
Terra Cotta. — Two parts white lead; 1
part burnt sienna; also 2 parts French
ocher to 1 part Venetian red.
Turkey Red. — Strong Venetian red or
red oxide.
Tuscan Red. Ordinary. — Nine parts
Indian red to 1 part rose pink.
Brilliant. — Four parts Indian red to 1
part red madder lake.
Violet. — Three parts ultramarine blue;
2 parts rose lake; 1 part best ivory black.
Yellow. — Four and one-half parts tin
ashes; 1 part crude antimony; 1 part
litharge; and 1 part red ocher.
Yellow, Amber. — Ten parts medium
chrome yellow; 7 parts burnt umber; 3
parts burnt sienna.
Yellow, Canary. — Five parts white
lead; 2 parts permanent yellow; 1 part
lemon chrome yellow.
Yellow, Golden. — Ten parts lemon
chrome yellow; 3 parts orange chrome,
dark; 5 parts white lead.
Yellow, Brimstone. — Three parts
white lead; 1 part lemon chrome yellow;
1 part permanent yellow-
558
PIGMENTS
Azure Blue. — Fifty parts white lead;
1 part ultramarine blue.
Blue Gray. — One hundred parts white
lead; 3 parts Prussian blue; 1 part lamp-
black.
Bright Blue.— Twenty parts zinc
white; 1 part imitation cobalt blue.
Blue Grass. — Seven parts white lead;
2 parts Paris green; 1 part Prussian blue.
Deep Blue. — Fifteen parts white lead;
1 part Prussian blue or Antwerp blue.
French Blue. — Five parts imitation
cobalt blue; 2 parts French zinc white.
Green Blue. — One hundred parts
white lead; 5 parts lemon chrome yellow;
3 parts ultramarine blue.
Hazy Blue. — Sixty parts white lead; 16
parts ultramarine blue; 1 part burnt
sienna.
Mineral Blue. — Five parts white lead;
4 parts imitation cobalt blue; 2 parts
red madder lake; 1 part best ivory or
drop black.
Orient Blue. — Twenty-five parts white
lead; 2 parts Prussian blue; 1 part lemon
chrome yellow.
Royal Blue. — Thirty-four parts white
lead; 19 parts ultramarine blue; 2 parts
Prussian blue; 1 part rose madder or
rose lake.
Sapphire Blue. — Two parts French
zinc white and 1 part best Chinese blue.
Sky Blue. — One hundred parts white
lead; 1 part Prussian blue.
Solid Blue. — Five parts white lead; 1
part ultramarine blue.
Turquoise Blue. — Twenty parts white
lead; 3 parts ultramarine blue; 1 part
lemon chrome yellow.
RED TINTS:
Cardinal Red. — Equal parts of white
lead and scarlet lake.
Carnation Red. — Fifteen parts white
lead; 1 part scarlet lake.
Claret. — Twenty-one parts oxide of
zinc; 4 parts crocus martis; 4 parts oxide
of chrome; 3 parts red lead; 3 parts bor-
acic acid.
Coral Pink. — Fifteen parts white lead;
2 parts bright vermilion; 1 part deep
orange chrome.
Deep Rose. — Ten parts white lead;
1 part red lake.
Deep Purple.— Five parts white lead;
1 part ultramarine blue; 1 part rose pink.
Deep Scarlet. — Fifteen parts bright
vermilion; 2 parts red lake; 5 parts white
lead.
Flesh Pink. — One hundred parts
white lead; 1 part orange chrome yellow;
1 part red lake.
Indian Pink. — One hundred parts
white lead; 1 part light Indian red.
Lavender. — Fifty parts white lead; 2
parts ultramarine blue; 1 part red lake.
Light Pink. — Fifty parts white lead; 1
part bright vermilion.
Lilac. — Fifty parts white lead; 1 part
best rose pink.
Mauve. — Fifteen parts white lead; 2
parts ultramarine blue; 1 part carmine
lake or red lake.
Orange Pink. — Two parts white lead;
1 part dark orange chrome or American
vermilion.
Purple. — Five parts white lead; 2
parts ultramarine blue; 1 part red mad-
der lake.
Royal Pink. — Five parts white lead;
1 part carmine lake or red madder lake.
Royal Rose. — Twenty parts white
lead; 1 part rich rose lake.
Red Brick. — Ten parts white lead; 3
parts light Venetian red; 1 part yellow
ocher.
Reddish Terra Cotta. — Two parts
white lead; 1 part rich burnt sienna.
Salmon. — Fifty parts white lead; 5
parts deep orange chrome.
Shell Pink. — Fifty parts white lead; 2
parts bright vermilion; 1 part orange
chrome; 1 part burnt sienna.
Violet. — Fifteen parts white lead; 4
parts ultramarine blue; 3 parts rose
lake; 1 part drop black.
GREEN TINTS:
Apple Green. — Fifty parts white lead;
1 part chrome green, light or medium
shade.
Citrine Green. — One hundred parts
white lead; 2 parts medium chrome
yellow; 1 part drop black.
Citron Green. — One hundred parts
white lead; 3 parts medium chrome
yellow; 1 part lampblack.
Emerald Green. — Ten parts white
lead; 1 part Paris (emerald) green.
Grass Green A. — Five parts white
lead; 7 parts Paris green.
Grass Green B. — Ten parts oxide of
chrome; 2 parts tin ashes; 5 parts whit-
ing; 1 part crocus martis; 1 part bi-
chromate potash.
Gray Green. — Five parts white lead;
1 part Verona green.
PIGMENTS
559
Marine Green. — Ten parts white lead;
1 part ultramarine green.
Nile Green. — Fifty parts white lead;
6 parts medium chrome green; 1 part
Prussian blue.
Olive Green. — Fifty parts white lead;
2 parts medium chrome yellow; 3 parts
raw umber; 1 part drop black.
Olive Drab. — Fifty parts white lead; 8
parts raw umber; 5 parts medium chrome
green; 1 part drop black.
Pea Green. — Fifty parts white lead; 1
part light chrome green.
Satin Green. — Three parts white lead;
1 part Milori green.
Sage Green. — One hundred parts
white lead; 3 parts medium chrome
green; 1 part raw umber.
Sea Green. — Fifty parts white lead; 1
part dark chrome green.
Stone Green. — Twenty-five parts white
lead; 2 parts dark chrome green; 3 parts
raw umber.
Velvet Green. — Twenty parts white
lead; 7 parts medium chrome green; 2
parts burnt sienna.
Water Green. — Fifteen parts white
lead; 10 parts French ocher; 1 part dark
chrome green.
BROWN TINTS:
Chocolate. — Twenty-five parts white
lead; 3 parts burnt umber.
Cocoanut. — Equal parts white lead
and burnt umber.
Cinnamon. — Ten parts white lead; 2
parts burnt sienna; 1 part French ocher.
Dark Drab. — Forty parts white lead;
1 part burnt umber.
Dark Stone. — Twenty parts white
lead; 1 part raw umber.
Fawn. — Fifty parts white lead; 3
parts burnt umber; 2 parts French
ocher.
Golden Brown. — Twenty-five parts
white lead; 4 parts French ocher; 1 part
burnt sienna.
Hazel Nut Brown. — Twenty parts white
lead; 5 parts burnt umber; 1 part me-
dium chrome yellow.
Mulberry. — Ten parts manganese; 2
parts cobalt blue; 2 parts saltpeter.
Purple Brown. — Fifty parts white
lead; 6 parts Indian red; 2 parts ultra-
marine blue; 1 part lampblack.
Red Brown. — Twelve parts hematite
ore; 3 parts manganese; 7 parts litharge;
2 parts yellow ocher.
Seal Brown. — Thirty parts white lead;
5 parts burnt umber; 1 part medium
chrome yellow.
Snuff Brown. — Twenty-five parts white
lead; 1 part burnt umber; 1 part Oxford
ocher.
GRAY TINTS:
Ash Gray. — Thirty parts white lead;
2 parts ultramarine blue; 1 part burnt
sienna.
Cold Gray. — Five hundred parts white
lead; 6 parts lampblack; 1 part Antwerp
blue.
Dcve Color. — Twelve parts manga-
nese; 5 parts steel filings; 3 parts whiting;
1 part oxide of cobalt.
Dove Gray. — Two hundred parts
white lead; 5 parts ultramarine blue; 2
parts drop black.
French Gray. — One hundred and fifty
parts white lead; 2 parts lampblack; 1
part orange chrome yellow; I part
chrome red (American vermilion).
Lead Color. — Fifty parts white lead;
1 part lampblack (increase proportion
of white lead for light tints).
Lustrous Gray. — Ten parts white
lead; 1 part graphite (plumbago).
Olive Gray. — Two hundred parts
white lead; 2 parts lampblack; 1 part
medium chrome green.
Pure Gray. — One hundred parts white
lead; 1 part drop black.
Pearl Gray. — One hundred parts
white lead; 1 part ultramarine blue; 1
part drop black.
Silver Gray. — One hundred and fifty
parts white lead; 2 parts lampblack; 3
parts Oxford ocher.
Warm Gray. — One hundred parts
white lead; 3 parts drop black; 2 parts
French ocher; 1 part light Venetian red.
NOTE. — For inside work and whenever
desirable, the white lead may be replaced
by zinc white or a mixture of the two
white pigments may be used. Be it also
remembered that pure colors, as a rule,
will produce the cleanest tints and that
fineness of grinding is an important
factor. It will not be amiss to call at-
tention to the fact that the excessive use
of driers, especially of dark japans or
liquid driers, with delicate tints is bad
practice, and liable to ruin otherwise
good effects in tints or delicate solid
colors.
COLOR TESTING.
Expense and trouble deter many a
painter from having a color examined,
560
PIGMENTS
although such an examination is often
very necessary. For the practical man
it is less important to know what per-
centage of foreign matter a paint con-
tains, but whether substances are con-
tained therein, which may act injuriously
in some way or other.
If a pigment is to be tested for arsen-
ic, pour purified hydrochloric acid into
a test tube or a U-shaped glass vessel
which withstands heat, add a little of
the pigment or the colored fabric, wall
paper, etc. (of pigment take only enough
to strongly color the hydrochloric acid
simply in the first moment), and finally
a small quantity of stannous chloride.
Now heat the test tube with its contents
moderately over a common spirit lamp.
If the liquid or mass has assumed a
brown or brownish color after being
heated, arsenic is present in the pigment
or fabric, etc.
An effective but simple test for the
durability of a color is to paint strips of
thick paper and nail them on the wall in
the strongest light possible. A strip of
paper should then be nailed over one-
half of the samples of color so as to pro-
tect them from the light. On removing
this the difference in shade between the
exposed and unexposed portions will be
very apparent. Some colors, such as
the vermilionettes, will show a marked
difference after even a few weeks.
Testing Body Colors for Gritty Ad-
mixtures.— The fineness of the pow-
dered pigment is not a guarantee of the
absence of gritty admixtures. The latter
differ from the pigment proper in their
specific gravity. If consisting of metallic
oxides or metallic sulphides the sandy
admixtures are lighter than the pigments
and rise to the surface upon a syste-
matic shaking of the sample. In the
case of other pigments, e. g., aluminas
and iron varnish colors, they collect at
the bottom. For carrying out the test, a
smoothly bored metallic tube about |
to £ inch in diameter and 6 to 7 inches
long is used. Both ends are closed with
screw caps and at one side of the
tube some holes about £ of an inch in
diameter are bored, closed by pieces of
a rubber hose pushed on. The tube is
filled with the pigment powder, screwed
up and feebly shaken for some time in a
vertical position (the length of time vary-
ing according to the fineness of the pow-
der). Samples may now be taken from
all parts of the tube. Perhaps glass
tubes would be preferable, but lateral
apertures cannot be so readily made.
After the necessary samples have been
collected in this manner, they must be
prepared with a standard sample, which
is accomplished either by feeling the pow-
der between the fingers or by inspecting
it under a microscope, or else by means
of the scratching test, which last named
is the usual way. The requisites for
these scratch tests consist of two soft,
well-polished glass plates (2^x2^ inches)
which are fixed by means of cement in
two stronger plates of hard wood suit-
ably hollowed out. The surface of the
glass must project about | inch over the
wooden frame. If a sample of the pig-
ment powder is placed on such a glass
plate, another plate is laid on top and
both are rubbed slowly together; this
motion will retain a soft, velvety charac-
ter in case the pigment is free from
gritty admixtures; if otherwise, the glass
is injured and a corresponding sound
becomes audible. Next the powder is
removed from the plate, rubbing the
latter with a soft rag, and examining
the surface with a microscope. From the
nature of the scratches on the plate the
kind of gritty ingredients can be readily
determined. The human finger is suffi-
ciently sensitive to detect the presence of
gritty substances, yet it is not capable of
distinguishing whether they consist of im-
perfectly reduced or badly sifted grains
of pigment or real gritty admixtures.
To Determine the Covering Power of
Pigments. — To determine the covering
power of white lead, or any other pig-
ment, take equal quantities of several
varieties of white lead and mix them
with a darker pigment, black, blue, etc.,
the latter also in equal proportions. The
white ^ lead which retains the lightest
color is naturally the most opaque. In
a similar manner, on the other hand, the
mixing power of the dark pigments can
be ascertained. If experiments are
made with a variety of white lead or
zinc white, by the admixture of dark pig-
ments, the color which tints the wnite
lead or zinc white most, also possesses
the greatest covering or mixing power.
To Detect the Presence of Aniline in
a Pigment. — Lay a little of the color
upon letter paper and pour a drop of
spirit on it. If it is mixed with aniline
tne paper is colored right through there-
by, while a pure pigment does not alter
the shade of the paper and will never
penetrate it.
Vehicle for Oil Colors. — Petroleum, 20
to 30 pounds; tallow, 3 to 5 pounds;
cotton-seed oil, 5 to 7 pounds; col-
ophony, 5 to 7 pounds. The pigments
PIGMENTS— PLASTER
561
having been ground up with this mix-
ture, the mixed paint can be made still
better by adding to it about a sixth
of its weight of the following mixture:
Vegetable oil, 8 to 20 pounds; saponified
rosin, 6 to 16 pounds; turpentine, 4 to 30
ounces.
Frankfort Black. — Frankfort black,
also known as German black, is a name
applied to a superior grade of lamp-
black. In some districts of Germany
it is said to be made by calcining wine
lees and tartar. The material is heated
in large cylindrical vessels having a vent
in the cover for the escape of smoke and
vapors that are evolved during the proc-
ess. When no more smoke is observed,
the operation is finished. The residuum
in the vessels is then washed several times
in boiling water to extract the salts con-
tained therein and finally is reduced to
the proper degree of fineness by grinding
on a porphyry.
Paris Green. — Emerald or Paris green
is rather permanent to light, but must
not be mixed with pigments containing
sulphur, because of the tendency to
blacken when so mixed. It will not re-
sist acids, ammonia, and caustics.
PIGMENT PAPER:
See Photography.
PILE OINTMENTS.
I. — "Extract" witch-
hazel
Lanum
Petrolatum
Glycerine
Tannic acid
Powdered opium.
II. — Tannic acid
Bismuth subni-
trate
Powdered opium,
Lanum
Petrolatum
2 fluidounces
2 ounces
6 ounces
4 fluidounces
1 drachm
1 drachm
20 grains
1 drachm
10 grains
3 drachms
5 drachms
PINE SYRUP:
See Essences and Extracts.
PINEAPPLE ESSENCE:
See Essences and Extracts.
PINEAPPLE LEMONADE:
See Beverages.
PING PONG FRAPPE:
See Beverages, under Lemonades,
PINS OF WATCHES:
See Watchmakers' Formulas.
PINION ALLOY:
gee Watchmakers' Formulas.
PINK SALVE:
See Ointments.
PINKEYE:
See Veterinary Formulas.
PIPE-JOINT CEMENT:
See Cement.
PIPE LEAKS:
See Leaks.
PIPES, RUST -PREVENTIVE FOR:
See Rust Preventives.
PISTACHIO ESSENCE:
See Essences and Extracts.
PLANTS:
Temperature of Water for Watering
Plants. — Experiments were made sev-
eral years ago at the Wisconsin Agri-
cultural Experiment Station to determine
whether cold water was detrimental to
plants. Plants were grown under glass
and in the open field, and in all cases
the results were similar. Thus, coleus
planted in lots of equal size and vigor
were watered with water at 35°, 50°, 65°,
and 86° F. At the end of 60 days it was
impossible to note any difference, and
when the experiment was repeated with
water at 32°, 40°, 70°, and 100° F., the
result was the same. Beans watered with
water at 32°, 40°, 70°, and 100° F., were
equally vigorous; in fact, water at 32°
and 40° F. gave the best results. Lettuce
watered with water at 32° F. yielded
slightly more than the other lots. From
these experiments it was concluded that
for vegetable and flowering plants com-
monly grown under glass, ordinary well
or spring water may be used freely at
any time of the year without warming.
PLANT PRESERVATIVES:
See Flowers.
Plaster
(See also Gypsum.)
Therapeutic Grouping of Medicinal
Plasters. — The vehicle for medicated
plasters requires some other attribute
than simply adhesiveness. From a study
of the therapy of plasters they may be
put in three groups, similarly to the
ointments with reference to their general
therapeutic uses, which also governs the
selection of the respective vehicles.
1. — Epidermatic: Supportive, protec-
tive, antiseptic, counter-irritant, vesi-
cant. Vehicle: Rubber or any suitably
562
PLASTER
adhesive. Official plasters: Emp. ad-
hesivum, E. capsici.
2. — Endermatic: Anodyne, astrin-
gent, alterative, resolvent, sedative,
stimulant. Vehicle: Oleates or lead
plaster, sometimes with rosins or gum
rosins. Official plasters: Emp. Bella-
donnse, E. opii, E. plumbi, E. saponis.
3. — Diadermatic: For constitutional
or systemic effects. Vehicle: Lanolin
or plaster-mull. Official plasters: Emp.
hydrargyri.
Methods of Preparing Rubber Plas-
ters.— Mechanic Roller Pressure Method.
—This method of incorporating the rub-
ber with certain substances to give it the
necessary body to serve as a vehicle is at
present the only one employed. But since
it requires the use of the heaviest ma-
chinery— some of the apparatus weighing
many tons — and enormous steam power,
its application for pharmaceutical pur-
poses is out of the question.
As is well known, the process consists
in: 1. Purification of the rubber by
mascerating and pressing it and re-
moving foreign impurities by elutriating
it with water. 2. Forming a homoge-
neous mass of the dried purified rubber
by working it on heated revolving rollers
and incorporating sufficient quantities of
orris powder and oleoresins. 3. In-
corporating the medicinal agent, i. e.,
belladonna extract, with the rubber mass
by working it on warmed revolving rollers.
4. Spreading the prepared plaster.
Solution in Volatile Solvents. — This
process has been recommended from
time to time, the principal objection
being the use of so relatively large quan-
tities of inflammable solvents.
The German Pharmacopoeia Method.
— The following is the formula of "Arz-
neibuch fur das Deutsche Reich," 1900:
Emplastrum adhesivum: Lead plaster,
waterfree, 40 parts; petrolatum, 2.5 parts;
liquid petrolatum, 2.5 parts, are melted
together, and to the mixture add rosin,
35 parts; dammar, 10 parts, previously
melted. To the warm mixture is added
caoutchouc, 10 parts; dissolved in ben-
zine, 75 parts, and the mixture stirred
on the water-bath until all the benzine
is lost by evaporation.
The Coleplastrum adhesivum of the
Austrian Society is still more complex,
the formula containing the following:
Rosin oil, empyreumatic, 150 parts; co-
paiba, 100 parts; rosin, 100 parts; lard,
50 parts; wax, 30 parts; dissolved in ether,
1,200 parts, in which caoutchouc, 250
parts, has been previously dissolved; to this
is then added orris powder, 220 parts; saR=
darac, 50 parts; ether, 400 parts. The
mixture, when uniform, is spread on
cloth.
Solution of Rubber in Fixed Solvent:
Petrolatum and Incorporation with Lead
Acetate. — India rubber dissolves, though
with difficulty, in petrolatum. The heat
required to melt the rubber being com-
paratively high, usually considerably
more than 212° F., as stated in the
U. S. P., it is necessary to melt the rubber
first and then add the petrolatum, in
order to avoid subjecting the latter to the
higher temperature. The mixture of
equal parts of rubber and petrolatum is
of a soft jelly consistence, not especially
adhesive, but when incorporated with
the lead oleate furnishes a very adhesive
plaster. While at first 5 per cent of each
rubber and petrolatum was used, it has
been found that the petrolatum would
melt and exude around the edges of the
plaster when applied to the skin, and the
quantity was therefore reduced to 2 per
cent of each. This mass affords a plas-
ter which is readily adhesive to the body,
does not run nor become too soft. Plas-
ters spread on cloth have been kept for
months exposed to the sun in the sum-
mer weather without losing their stabil-
ity or permanency.
The lead oleate made by the inter-
action of hot solution of soap and lead
acetate, thoroughly washed with hot
water, and freed from water by working
the precipitated oleate on a hot tile, is
much to be preferred to the lead plaster
made by the present official process. The
time-honored method of boiling litharge,
olive oil, and water is for the requirements
of the pharmacists most tedious and un-
satisfactory. Since in the beginning of
the process, at least, a temperature higher
than that of 212° F. is required, the water
bath cannot be employed, and in the ab-
sence of this limiting device the product is
usually "scorched." When the steam bath
under pressure can be used this objection
does not apply. But the boiling process
requires from 3 to 4 hours, with more or
less attention, while the precipitation
method does not take over half an hour.
Besides, true litharge is difficult to ob-
tain, and any other kind will produce un-
satisfactory results.
The following is the process employed:
Lead oleate (Emplastrum plumbi):
Soap, granular and
dried 100 parts
Lead acetate GO parts
Distilled water, a sufficient quan-
tity.
PLASTER
563
Dissolve the soap in 350 parts hot
distilled water and strain the solution.
Dissolve the lead acetate in 250 parts
hot distilled water and filter the solution
while hot into the warm soap solution,
stirring constantly. When the precipi-
tate which has formed has separated,
decant the liquid and wash the precipi-
tate thoroughly with hot water. Remove
the precipitate, let it drain, free from
water completely by kneading it on a warm
slab, form it into rolls, wrap in paraffine
paper, and preserve in tightly closed con-
tainers.
Emplastrum adhesivum:
Rubber, cut in small
pieces 20 parts
Petrolatum 20 parts
Lead plaster 960 parts
Melt the rubber at a temperature not
exceeding 302° F., add the petrolatum,
and continue the heat until the rubber
is dissolved. Add the lead plaster to
the hot mixture, continue the heat until
i* becomes liquid; then let it cool and
;;tir until it stiffens.
Court Plaster or Sticking Plaster. — I.
— Brush silk over with a solution of isin-
glass, in spirits or warm water, dry and
repeat several times. For the last ap-
plication apply several coats of balsam
of Peru. This is used to close cuts or
wounds, by warming and applying it.
It does not wash off until the skin par-
tially heals.
II. — Isinglass, 1 part; water, 10 parts;
dissolve, strain the solution, and gradu-
ally add to it of tincture of benzoin, 2
parts; apply this mixture gently warmed,
by means of a camel's-hair brush, to the
surface of silk or sarcenet, stretched on a
frame, and allow each coating to dry
before applying the next one, the appli-
cation being repeated as often as neces-
sary; lastly, give the prepared surface a
coating of tincture of benzoin or tincture
of balsam of Peru. Some manufacturers
apply this to the unprepared side of the
plaster, and others add to the tincture
a few drops of essence of ambergris or
essence of musk.
III. (Deschamps). — A piece of fine
muslin, linen, or silk is fastened to a flat
board, and a thin coating of smooth,
strained flour paste is given to it; over
this, when dry, two coats of colorless
gelatin, made into size with water,
quantity sufficient, are applied warm.
Said to be superior to the ordinary court
plaster.
Coloring of Modeling Plaster. — I. — If
burnt gypsum is stirred up with water con-
taining formaldehyde and with a little
alkali, and the quantity of water necessary
for the induration of the plaster contain-
ing in solution a reducible metallic salt is
added thereto, a plaster mass of perfectly
uniform coloring is obtained. The hard-
ening of the plaster is not affected there-
by. According to the concentration of
the metallic salt solutions and the choice
of the salts, the most varying shades of
color, as black, red, brown, violet, pearl
gray, and bronze may be produced.
The color effect may be enhanced by
the addition of certain colors. For the
production of a gray-colored gypsum
mass, for example, the mode of pro-
cedure is as follows: Stir 15 drachms of
plaster with one-fourth its weight of
water, containing a few drops of formal-
dehyde and a little soda lye and add 10
drops of a one-tenth normal silver solu-
tion, which has previously been mixed
with the amount of water necessary for
hardening the gypsum. The mass will
immediately upon mixing assume a
pearl-gray shade, uniform throughout.
In order to produce red or copper-like,
black or bronze-like shades, gold salts,
copper salts or silver salts, bismuth
salts or lead salts, singly or mixed, are
used. Naturally, these colorings admit
of a large number of modifications. In
lieu of formaldehyde other reducing
agents may be employed, such as solu-
tions of sulphurous acid or hydrogen
peroxide with a little alkali. Metals in
the elementary state may likewise be
made use of, e. g., iron, which, stirred
with a little copper solution and plaster,
produces a brown mass excelling in
special hardness, etc. This process of
coloring plaster is distinguished from the
former methods in that the coloration is"
caused by metals in the nascent state and
that a very fine division is obtained. The
advantage of the dyeing method consists
in that colorings can be produced with
slight quantities of a salt; besides, the
fine contours of the figures are in no way
affected by this manner of coloring, and
another notable advantage lies in the
mass being colored throughout, whereby
a great durability of the color against
outside actions is assured. Thus a peel-
ing off of the color or other way of be-
coming detached, such as by rubbing off,
is entirely excluded.
II. — Frequently, in order to obtain
colored plaster objects, ocher or pow-
dered colors are mixed with the plaster.
This method leaves much to be desired,
because the mixture is not always per-
fect, and instead of the expected uniform
color, blotches appear. Here is a more
564
PLASTER
certain recipe: Boil brazil wood, log-
wood, or yellow wood, in water, according
to the desired color, or use extracts of the
woods. When the dye is cold mix it with
the plaster. The dye must be passed
through a cloth before use. One may
also immerse the plaster articles, medals,
etc., in this dye, but in this case they
must be left for some time and the oper-
ation repeated several times.
Treatment of Fresh Plaster. — Freshly
plastered cement surfaces on walls may
be treated as follows:
The freshly plastered surface first
remains without any coating for about
14 days; then it is coated with a mixture
of 50 parts water and 10 parts ammonia
carbonate dissolved in hot water; leave
this coat alone for a day, paint it again
and wait until the cement has taken on
a uniform gray color, which takes place
as a rule in 12 to 14 days. Then prime
the surface thus obtained with pure var-
nish and finish the coating, after drying,
with ordinary varnish paint or turpentine
paint.
Plaster for Foundry Models. — Gum
lac, 1 part; wood spirit, 2 parts; lamp-
black in sufficient quantity to dye.
Plaster from Spent Gas Lime. — Spent
lime from gas purifiers, in which the sul-
phur has been converted into calcium
sulphate, by exposure to weather, if
necessary, is mixed with clay rich in
alumina. The mixture is powdered,
formed into balls or blocks with water,
and calcined at a temperature below
that at which the setting qualities of cal-
cium sulphate are destroyed. Slaked
lime, clay, and sand are added to the
<jalcined product, and the whole is finely
powdered.
Plaster Mold. — Nearly all fine grades
of metals can be cast in plaster molds,
provided only a few pieces of the cast-
ings are wanted. Dental plaster should
be used, with about one-half of short
asbestos. Mix the two well together,
and when the mold is complete let it dry
in a warm place for several days, or until
all the moisture is excluded. If the mold
is of considerable thickness it will answer
the purpose better. When ready for
casting,, the plaster mold should be
warmed, and smoked over a gas light;
then the metal should be poured in, in as
cool a state as it will run.
Cleaning of Statuettes and Other
Plaster Objects. — Nothing takes the dust
more freely than plaster objects, more or
less artistic, which are the modest orna-
ments of our dwellings. They rapidly
contract a yellow-gray color, of unpleas-
ant appearance. Here is a practical
method for restoring the whiteness:
Take finely powdered starch, quite
white, and make a thick paste with hot
water. Apply, when still hot, with a
flexible spatula or a brush on the plaster
object. The layer should be quite thick.
Let it dry slowly. On drying, the
starch will split and scale off. All the
soiled parts of the plaster will adhere,
and be drawn off with the scales. This
method of cleaning does not detract from
the fineness of the model.
Hardening and Toughening Plaster
of Paris. — I. — Plaster of Paris at times
sets too rapidly; therefore the following
recipe for toughening and delaying dry-
ing will be useful. To calcined plaster
of Paris add 4 per cent of its weight of
powdered marshmallow root, whicn will
keep it from setting for about an hour,
and augment its hardness when set, or
double the quantity of marshmallow
root powder, and the plaster will become
very firm, and may be worked 2 or 3
hours after mixing, and may be carved
and polished when hard. It is essential
that these powders, which are of different
densities and specific gravities, should be
thoroughly mixed, and the plaster of
Paris be quite fresh, and it must be
passed through fine hair sieves to ensure
its being an impalpable powder. To
ensure thorough mixing, pass the com-
bined powders through the hair sieve
three times. Make up with water suffi-
cient for the required model or models.
Should any of the powder be left over it
may be kept by being put in an air-tight
box and placed in a warm room.
The marshmallbw root powder may
be replaced by dextrin, gum arabic, or
glue. The material treated is suitable
while yet in a soft state, for rolling, glass-
tube developing, making plates, etc.
II. — Plaster of Paris may be caused to
set more quickly if some alum be dis-
solved in the water used for rendering it
plastic. If the gypsum is first moistened
with a solution of alum and then again
burned, the resulting co'mpound sets very
quickly and becomes as hard as marble.
Borax may be similarly employed. The
objects may also be be treated wilh a solu-
tion of caustic baryta. But it has been
found that no matter how deep this pen-
etrates, the baryta is again drawn
toward the surface when the water
evaporates, a portion efflorescing on the
outside, and only a thin layer remaining
in the outer shell, where it is converted
into carbonate. This at the same time
PLASTER— PLATING
565
stops up the pores, rendering it impos-
sible to repeat the operation. It was
later found that the whole mass of the
cast might be hardened by applying to it
with a brush made of glass bristles, a hot
solution of baryta. To prevent sepa-
ration of the crystallized baryta at the
surface, the object must be raised to a
temperature of 140° to 175° F. To pro-
duce good results, however, it is neces-
sary to add to the plaster before casting
certain substances with which the baryta
can combine. These are silicic acid in
some form, or the sulphates of zinc,
magnesium, copper, iron, aluminum,
etc. With some of these the resulting
object may be colored. As it is, how-
ever, difficult to insure the production of
uniform tint, it is better when employing
salts producing color, to mix the plaster
with about 5 per cent of quicklime, or,
better, to render it plastic with milk of
lime., and then to soak the object in a
solution of metallic sulphate.
Preservation of Plaster Casts. — Upon
complete drying, small objects are laid
for a short while in celluloid varnish of 4
per cent, while large articles are painted
with it, from the top downward, using a
soft brush. Articles set up outside and
exposed to the weather are not protected
by this treatment, while others can be
readily washed off and cleaned with
water. To cover 100 square feet of
surface, If pints of celluloid varnish are
required.
To Arrest the Setting of Plaster of
Paris. — Citric acid will delay the setting
of plaster of Paris for several hours. One
ounce of acid, at a cost of about 5 cents,
will be sufficient to delay the setting of
100 pounds of plaster of Paris for 2 or 3
hours. Dissolve the acid in the water
before mixing the plaster.
Weatherproofing Casts. — I. — Bre-
thauer's method of preparing plaster of
Paris casts for resisting the action of the
weather is as follows: Slake 1 part of
finely pulverized lime to a paste, then mix
gypsum with limewater and intimately
mix both. From the compound thus
prepared the figures are cast. When
perfectly dry they are painted with hot
linseed oil, repeating the operation sev-
eral times, then with linseed-oil varnish,
and finally with white oil paint. Stat-
ues, etc., prepared in this way have been
constantly exposed to the action of the
weather for 4 years without suffering any
change.
II. — Jacobsen prepares casts which
retain no dust, and can be washed with
lukewarm soap water by immersing
them or throwing upon them in a fine
spray a hot solution of a soap prepared
from stearic acid and soda lye in ten
times its quantity, by weight, of hot
water.
Reproduction of Plaster Originals, —
This new process consists in making a
plaster mold over the original in the
usual manner. After the solidification
of the plaster the mass of the original is
removed, as usual, by cutting out and
rinsing out. The casting mold thus
obtained is next filled out with a ceramic
mass consisting of gypsum, 1 part; pow-
dered porcelain, 5 parts; and flux, 1 part.
After, the mass has hardened it is baked
in the mold. This renders the latter
brittle and it falls apart on moistening
with water while the infusion remains as
a firm body, which presents all the de-
tails of the original in a true manner.
PLASTER ARTICLES, REPAIRING OF:
See Adhesives and Lutes.
PLASTER GREASE:
See Lubricants.
PLASTER, PAINTS FOR:
See Paints.
PLASTER OF PARIS, MOLDS FOR
CASTING:
See Casting.
PLASTIC COMPOSITIONS:
See Celluloid and Matrix Mass.
PLASTER, IRRITATING:
See Ointments.
PLATES, CARE OF PHOTOGRAPHIC:
See Photography.
PLATINA, BIRMINGHAM:
See Alloys, under Brass.
Plating
The plating of metal surfaces is ac-
complished in four different ways: (1)
By oxidation, usually involving dipping
in an acid bath; (2) by electrodeppsition,
involving suspension in a metallic solu-
tion, through which an electric current is
passed; (3) by applying a paste that is
fixed, as by burning in; (4) by pouring
on molten plating metal and rolling. For
convenience the methods of plating are
arbitrarily classified below under the fol-
lowing headings:
1. Bronzing.
2. Coloring of Metals.
3. Electrodeposition Processes.
4. Gilding and Gold- Plating.
566
PLATING
5. Oxidizing Processes.
6. Patina Oxidizing Processes.
7. Platinizing.
8. Silvering and Silver- Plating.
9. Tinned Lead- Plating.
10. Various Recipes.
BRONZING:
Art Bronzes. — These are bronzes of
different tints, showing a great variety
according to the taste and fancy of the
operator.
I. — After imparting to an object a
coating of vert antique, it is brushed to
remove the verdigris, and another coat
is applied with the following mixture:
Vinegar, 1,000 parts, by weight; pow-
dered bloodstone, 125 parts, by weight;
plumbago, 25 parts, by weight. Finish
with a waxed brush and a coat of white
varnish.
II. — Cover the object with a mixture
of vinegar, 1,000 parts, by weight; pow-
dered bloodstone, 125 parts, by weight;
plumbago, 25 parts, by weight; sal am-
moniac, 32 parts, by weight; ammonia,
32 parts, by weight; sea salt, 32 parts, by
weight. Finish as above.
Antique Bronzes. — In order to give
new bronze castings the appearance and
patina of old bronze, various composi-
tions are employed, of which the follow-
ing are the principal ones:
I. — Vert Antique: Vinegar, 1,000
parts, by weight; copper sulphate, 16
parts, by weight; sea salt, 32 parts, by
weight; sal ammoniac, 32 parts, by
weight; mountain green (Sanders green),
70 parts, by weight; chrome yellow, 30
parts, by weight; ammonia, 32 parts, by
weight.
II. — Vert Antique: Vinegar, 1,000
parts, by weight; copper sulphate, 16
parts, by weight; sea salt, 32 parts, by
weight; sal ammoniac, 32 parts, by
weight; mountain green, 70 parts, by
weight; ammonia, 32 parts, by weight.
III. — Dark Vert Antique: To obtain
darker vert antique, add a little plum-
bago to the preceding mixtures.
IV. — Vinegar, 1,000 parts, by weight;
sal ammoniac, 8 parts, by weight; potas-
sium bioxalate, 1 part, by weight.
Brass Bronzing. — I. — Immerse the
articles, freed from dirt and grease, into a
cold solution of 10 parts of potassium
permanganate, 50 parts of iron sulphate,
5 parts of hydrochloric acid, in 1,000
parts of water. Let remain 30 seconds;
then withdraw, rinse off, and dry in fine,
soft sawdust. If the articles have be-
come too dark, or if a reddish-brown
color be desired, immerse for about 1
minute into a warm (60° C. or 140° F.)
solution of chromic acid, 10 parts; hy-
drochloric acid, 10 parts; potassium per-
manganate, 10 parts; iron sulphate, 50
parts; water, 1,000 parts. Treat as be-
fore. If the latter solution alone be
used the product will be a brighter dark
yellow or reddish-brown color. By heat-
ing in a drying oven the tone of the
colors is improved.
II. — Rouge, with a little chloride of
platinum arid water, will form a choco-
late brown of considerable depth of tone
and is exceedingly applicable to brass
surfaces which are to resemble a copper
bronze.
Copper Bronzing. — I. — After cleaning
the pieces, a mixture made as follows is
passed over them with a brush: Castor
oil, 20 parts; alcohol, 80 parts; soft
soap, 40 parts; water, 40 parts. The day
after application, the piece has become
bronzed; and if the time is prolonged,
the tint will change. Thus, an affinity
of shades agreeable to the eye can be
Srocured. The piece is dried in hot saw-
ust, and colorless varnish with large ad-
dition of alcohol is passed over it. This
formula for bronzing galvanic apparatus
imparts any shade desired, from Bar-
bodienne bronze to antique green, pro-
vided the liquid remains for some time
in contact with the copper.
II. — Acetate of copper, 6 parts; sal
ammoniac, 7 parts; acetic acid, 1 part;
distilled water, 100' parts. Dissolve all
in water in an earthen or porcelain vessel.
Place on the fire and Leat slightly; next,
with a brush give the objects to be
bronzed 2 or 3 coats, according to the
shade desired. It is necessary that each
coat be thoroughly dry before applying
another.
Bronzing of Gas Fixtures. — Gas fix-
tures which have become dirty or tar-
nished from use may be improved in
appearance by painting with bronze
paint and then, if a still better finish is
required, varnishing after the paint is
thoroughly dry with some light-colored
varnish that will give a hard and brilliant
coating.
If the bronze paint is made up with
ordinary varnish it is liable to become
discolored from acid which may be
present in the varnish. One method
proposed for obviating this is to mix the
varnish with about 5 times its volume of
spirit of turpentine, add to the mixture
dried slaked lime in the proportion of
about 40 grains to the pint, agitate well,
PLATING
567
repeating the agitation several times, and
finally allowing the suspended matter to
settle and decanting the clear liquid.
The object of this is, of course, to neu-
tralize any acid which may be present.
To determine how effectively this has
been done, the varnish may be chem-
ically tested.
Iron Bronzing. — I. — The surface of a
casting previously cleaned and polished
is evenly painted with a vegetable oil,
e. g., olive oil, and then well heated, care
being taken that the temperature does
not rise to a point at which the oil will
burn. The cast iron absorbs oxygen at
the moment when the decomposition of
the oil begins, and a brown layer of oxide
is formed which adheres firmly to the
surface and which may be vigorously
polished, giving a bronze-like appearance
to the surface of the iron.
II. — To give polished iron the ap-
pearance of bronze commence by clean-
ing the objects, then subject them for
about 5 minutes to the vapor of a mix-
ture of concentrated hydrochloric and
nitric acids; then smear them with vase-
line and heat them until the vaseline be-
gins to decompose. The result is a fine
bronzing.
Liquid for Bronze Powder. — Take 2
ounces gum animi and dissolve in ^ pint
Jinseed oil by adding gradually while the
oil is being heated. Boil, strain, and
dilute with turpentine.
Bronzing Metals. — I. — The following
composition is recommended for bronz-
ing metal objects exposed to the air:
Mix about equal parts of siccative, recti-
fied oil of turpentine, caoutchouc oil, and
dammar varnish, and apply this com-
position on the objects, using a brush.
This bronze has been found to resist the
influences of the weather.
II. — Cover the objects with alight lay
of linseed oil, and then heat over a co
fire, prolonging the heat until the de-
sired shade is reached.
III. — Expose the objects to be bronzed
for about 5 minutes to the vapors of a
bath composed of 50 parts of nitric acid
and 50 parts of concentrated hydro-
chloric acid. Then rub the articles with
vaseline and heat until the vaseline is
decomposed. The objects to be bronzed
must always be perfectly polished.
IV. — To bronze iron articles they
should be laid in highly heated coal dust;
the articles must be covered up in the
glowing dust, and the heat must be the
same throughout. The iron turns at
. er
coal
first yellow, then blue, and finally rather
black. Withdraw the objects when they
have attained the blue shade or the black
color; then while they are still hot, rub
them with a wad charged with tallow.
* V. — For electrolytic bronzing of
metals the baths employed differ from
the brass baths only in that they contain
tin in solution instead of zinc. Accord-
ing to Eisner, dissolve 70 parts, by
weight, of cupric sulphate in 1,000 parts
of water and add a solution of 8 parts of
stannic chloride in caustic lye. For a
positive pole plate put in a bronze plate.
The bath works at ordinary tempera-
ture.
VI. — A good bath consists of 10 parts
of potash, 2 parts of cupric chloride, 1
part of tin salt, 1 part of cyanide of potas-
sium dissolved in 100 parts of water.
VII. — Mix a solution of 32 parts of
copper sulphate in 500 parts of water
with 64 parts of cyanide of potassium.
After the solution has become clear, add
4 to 5 parts of stannic chloride dissolved
in potash lye.
VIII. — Precipitate all soda from a
solution of blue vitriol by phosphate of
sodium, wash the precipitate well, and
dissolve in a concentrated solution of
pyrophosphate of copper. Also, satu-
rate a solution of the same salt with tin
salt. Of both solutions add enough in
such proportion to a solution of 50 parts,
by weight, of pyrophosphate of sodium in
1,000 parts of water until the solution
appears clear and of the desired color.
A cast bronze plate serves as an anode.
From time to time a little soda, or if the
precipitate turns out too pale, copper so-
lution should be added.
Tin Bronzing. — The pieces are well
washed and all grease removed; next
plunged into a solution of copperas
(green vitriol), 1 part; sulphate, 1 part;
water, 20 parts. When dry they are
plunged again into a bath composed of
verdigris, 4 parts; dissolved in distilled
wine vinegar, 11 parts. Wash, dry, and
polish with English red.
Zinc Bronzing. — The zinc article must
be first electro-coppered before proceed-
ing to the bronzing. The process used
is always the same; the different shades
are, however, too numerous to cover all of
them in one explanation. The bronzing
of zinc clocks is most frequently done on
a brown ground, by mixing graphite,
lampblack, and sanguine stirred in water
in which a little Flanders Dutch glue is
dissolved. The application is made by
means of a brush. When it is dry a
568
PLATING
spirit varnish is applied; next, before the
varnish is perfectly dry, a little powdered
bronze or sanguine or powdered bronze
mixed with sanguine or with graphite,
according to the desired shades. For
green bronze, mix green sanders with
chrome yellow stirred with spirit in
which a little varnish is put. When the
bronzing is dry, put on the varnish and
the powdered bronze as above described.
After all has dried, pass the brush over a
piece of wax, then over the bronzed
article, being careful to charge the brush
frequently with wax.
COLORING OF METALS:
Direct Coloration of Iron and Steel by
Cupric Selenite. — Iron precipitates cop-
per and selenium from their salts. Im-
mersed in a solution of cupric selenite,
acidulated with a few drops of nitric acid,
it precipitates these two metals on its sur-
face in the form of a dull black deposit,
but slightly adherent. But, if the object
is washed with water, then with alcohol,
and rapidly dried over a gas burner, the
deposit becomes adherent. If rubbed
with a cloth, this deposit turns a blue
black or a brilliant black, according to
the composition of the bath.
The selenite of copper is a greenish
salt insoluble in water, and but slightly
soluble in water acidulated with nitric or
sulphuric acid. It is preferable to mix a
solution of cupric sulphate with a solu-
tion of selenious acid, and to acidulate
with nitric acid, in order to prevent the
precipitation of the selenite of copper.
This process, originated by Paul Mal-
herbe, is quite convenient for blackening
or bluing small objects of iron or steel,
such as metallic pens or other small
pieces. It does not succeed so well for
objects of cast iron; and the selenious
acid is costly, which is an obstacle to its
employment on large metallic surfaces.
The baths are quickly impoverished,
for insoluble yellow selenite of iron is
deposited.
Brilliant Black Coloration. — Selenious
acid, 6 parts; cupric sulphate, 10 parts;
water, 1,000 parts; nitric acid, 4 to 6 parts.
Blue-Black Coloration. — Selenious acid,
10 parts; cupric sulphate, 10 parts; water,
1,000 parts; nitric acid, 4 to 6 parts.
By immersing the object for a short
time the surface of the metal can be col-
ored in succession yellow, rose, purple,
violet and blue.
Coloration of Copper and Brass with
Cupric Selenite.— When an object of
copper or brass is immersed in a solution
of selenite of copper acidulated with
nitric acid, the following colors are ob-
tained, according to the time of the im-
mersion: Yellow, orange, rose, purple,
violet, and blue, which is the last color
which can be obtained. In general, the
solution should be slightly acid; other-
wise the color is fugacious and punctate.
a. b.
Selenious acid 6.5 2.9 parts
Sulphate of
copper 12.5 20.0 parts
Nitric acid 2.0 2.5 parts
Water 1,000.0 1,000.0 parts
Production of Rainbow Colors on
Metals (iron, copper, brass, zinc, etc.) —
I. — The following process of irisation
is due to Puscher. It allows of covering
the metals with a thick layer of metallic
sulphide, similar to that met with in na-
ture— in galena, for example.
These compounds are quite solid and
are not attacked by concentrated acids
and alkalies, while dilute reagents are
without action. In 5 minutes thousands
of objects of brass can be colored with
the brightest hues. If they have been
previously cleaned chemically, the colors
deposited on the surface adhere with such
strength that they can be worked with
the burnisher.
Forty-five parts of sodium hyposulphite
are dissolved in 500 parts of water; a
solution of 15 parts of neutral acetate of
lead in 500 parts of water is poured in.
The clear mixture, which is composed of
a double salt of hyposulphite of lead and
of sodium, possesses, when heated to 212°
F., the property of decomposing slowly
and of depositing brown flakes of lead
sulphide. If an article of gold, silver,
copper, brass, tombac, iron, or zinc is
put into this bath while the precipitation
is taking place, the object will be covered
with a film of lead sulphide, which will
give varied and brilliant colors, according
to its thickness. For a uniform colora-
tion, it is necessary that the pieces should
be heated quite uniformly. However,
iron assumes under this treatment only
a blue color, and zinc a bronze color.
On articles of copper the first gold color
which appears is defective. Lead and
tin are not colored.
By substituting for the neutral acetate
of lead an equal quantity of cupric sul-
phate and proceeding in a similar way,
brass or imitation gold is covered with
a very beautiful red, succeeded by an
imperfect green, and finally a magnifi-
cent brown, with iridescent points of
greenish red. The latter coating is fairly
permanent.
Zinc is not colored in this solution, and
PLATING
569
precipitates in it a quantity of flakes of
greenish brown (cupric sulphide), but if
about one-third of the preceding so-
lution of lead acetate is added, a solid
black color is developed, which, when
covered with a light coating of wax,
fains much in intensity and solidity,
t is also useful to apply a slight coating
of wax to the other colors.
II. — Beautiful designs may be ob-
tained, imitating marble, with sheets of
copper plunged into a solution of lead,
thickened by the addition of gum traga-
canth, and heated to 212° F. After-
wards they are treated with the ordinary
lead solution. The compounds of an-
timony, for example the tartrate of anti-
mony and potash, afford similar colora-
tions, but require a longer time for their
development. The solutions mentioned
do not change, even after a long period,
and may be employed several times.
III. — By mixing a solution of cupric
sulphate with a solution of sodium hypo-
sulphite, a double hyposulphite of sodi-
um and of copper is obtained.
If in the solution of this double salt an
article of nickel or of copper, cleaned
with nitric acid, then with soda, is im-
mersed, the following colors will appear
in a few seconds: Brilliant red, green,
rose, blue, and violet. To isolate a color,
it is sufficient to take out the object and
wash it with water. The colors obtained
on nickel present a moire appearance,
similar to that of silk fabrics.
IV. — Tin sulphate affords with so-
dium hyposulphite a double salt, which
is reduced by heat, with production of tin
sulphide. The action of this double
salt on metallic surfaces is the same as
that of the double salts of copper and
lead. Mixed with a solution of cupric
sulphate, all the colors of the spectrum
will be readily obtained.
V. — Coloration of Silver. — The ob-
jects of copper or brass are first covered
with a layer of silver, when they are
dipped in the following solution at the
temperature of 205° to 212° F.: Water,
3,000 parts; sodium hyposulphite, 300
parts; lead acetate, 100 parts.
VI. — Iron precipitates bismuth from
its chlorhydric solution. On heating
this deposit, the colors of the rainbow
are obtained.
Coloration by Electrolysis. — I. — Col-
ored Rings by Electrolysis (Nobili, Bec-
querel). — In order to obtain the Nobili
rings it is necessary to concentrate the
current coming from one of the poles of
the battery through a platinum wire,
whose point alone is immersed in the
liquid to be decomposed, while the other
pole is connected with a plate of metal
in the same liquid. This plate is placed
perpendicularly to the direction of the
wire, and at about 0.04 inches from the
point.
Solutions of sulphate of copper, sul-
phate of zinc, sulphate of manganese, ace-
tate of lead, acetate of copper, acetate
of potassium, tartrate of antimony and
potash, phosphoric acid, oxalic acid,
carbonate of soda, chloride of manga-
nese, and manganous acetate, may be em-
ployed.
II. — A process, due to M. O. Mathey,
allows of coloring metals by precipitating
on their surface a transparent metallic
peroxide. The phenomenon of electro-
chemical coloration on metals is the
same as that which takes place when an
object of polished steel is exposed to
heat. It first assumes a yellow color,
from a very thin coating of ferric oxide
formed on its surface. By continuing
the heating, this coating of oxide in-
creases in thickness, and appears red,
then violet, then blue. Here, the color-
ation is due to the increase in the thick-
ness of a thin coating of a metallic oxide
precipitated by an alkaline solution.
The oxides of lead, tin, zinc, chromium,
aluminum, molybdenum, tungsten, etc.,
dissolved in potash, may be employed;
also protoxide of iron, zinc, cadmium,
cobalt, dissolved in ammonia.
Lead Solution. — Potash, 400 parts;
litharge or massicot, 125 parts. Boil 10
minutes, filter, dilute until the solution
marks 25° Be.
Iron Solution. — Dissolve ferrous sul-
phate in boiling water, and preserve
sheltered from air. When desired for
use, pour a quantity into a vessel and add
ammonia until the precipitate is redis-
solved. This solution, oxidizing rapidly
in the air, cannot be used for more than
an hour.
III. — Electro-chemical coloration suc-
ceeds very well on metals which are not
oxidizable, such as gold and platinum,
but not well on silver. This process is
employed for coloring watch hands and
screws. The object is placed at the pos-
itive pole, under a thickness of 1^ inches
of the liquid, and the negative electrode
is brought to the surface of the bath. In
a few seconds all the colors possible are
obtained. Generally, a ruby-red tint is
sought for.
IV. — Coloration of Nickel. — The
nickel piece is placed at the positive pole
in a solution of lead acetate. A netting
570
PLATING
of copper wires is arranged at the nega-
tive pole according to the contours of the
design, and at a snort distance from the
object. The coloration obtained is uni-
form if the distance of the copper wires
from the object is equal at all points.
Coloring of Brass. — I. — (a) Brown
bronze: Acid solution of nitrate of silver
and bismuth or nitric acid. (6) Light
bronze: Acid solution of nitrate of silver
and of copper, (c) Black: Solution of
nitrate of copper. In all cases, however,
the brass is colored black, if after having
been treated with the acid solution, it is
placed for a very short time in a solution
of potassium sulphide, of ammonium
sulphydrate, or of hydrogen sulphide.
II. — The brass is immersed in a dilute
solution of mercurous nitrate; the layer
of mercury formed on the brass is con-
verted into black sulphide, if washed
several times in potassium sulphide. By
substituting for the potassium sulphide
the sulphide of antimony or that of ar-
senic, beautiful bronze colors are ob-
tained, varying from light brown to dark
brown.
III. — Clean the brass perfectly. Af-
terwards rub with sal ammoniac dissolved
in vinegar. Strong vinegar, 1,000 parts;
sal ammoniac, 30 parts; alum, 15 parts;
arsenious anhydride, 8 parts.
IV.; — A solution of chloride of plati-
num is employed, which leaves a very
light coating of platinum on the metal,
and the surface is bronzed. A steel tint
or gray color is obtained, of which the
shade depends on the metal. If this is
burnished, it takes a blue or steel gray
shade, which varies with the duration of
the chemical action, the concentration,
and the temperature of the bath. A
dilute solution of platinum is prepared
thus: Chloride of platinum, 1 part; water,
5,000 parts.
Another solution, more concentrated
at the temperature of 104° F., is kept
ready. The objects to be bronzed are
attached to a copper wire and immersed
for a few seconds in a hot solution of
tartar, 30 parts to 5,000 parts of water.
On coming from this bath they are
washed 2 or 3 times with ordinary water,
and a last time with distilled water, and
then put in the solution of platinum
chloride, stirring them from time to time.
When a suitable change of color has
been secured, the objects are passed to
the concentrated solution of platinum
chloride (40°). They are stirred, and
taken out when the wished-for color has
been reached. They are then washed
2 or 3 times, and dried in wood sawdust.
V. — To give to brass a dull black
color, as that used for optical instruments,
the metal is cleaned carefully at first,
and covered with a very dilute mixture
of neutral nitrate of tin, 1 part; chloride
of gold, 2 parts. At the end of 10 min-
utes this covering is removed with a
moist brush. If an excess of acid has
not been employed, the surface of the
metal will be found to be of a fine dull
black.
The nitrate of tin is prepared by de-
composing the chloride of this metal
with ammonia and afterwards dissolving
in nitric acid the oxide of tin formed.
VI. — For obtaining a deposit of bis-
muth the brass is immersed in a boiling
bath, prepared by adding 50 to 60 parts of
bismuth to nitric acid diluted with 1,000
parts of water, and containing 32 parts
of tartaric acid.
VII. — The electrolysis of a cold solu-
tion of 25 to 30 parts per 1,000 parts of
the double chloride of bismuth and am-
monium produces on brass or on copper
a brilliant adherent deposit of bismuth,
whose appearance resembles that of old
silver.
Production of Rainbow Hues. — Var-
ious colors. — I. — Dissolve tartrate of
antimony and of potash, 30 parts; tar-
taric acid, 30 parts; water, 1,000 parts.
Add hydrochloric acid, 90 to 120 parts;
fulverized antimony, 90 to ^ 120 parts,
mmerse the object of brass in this boil-
ing liquid, and it will be covered with a
film, wnich, as it thickens, reflects quite a
series of beautiful tints, first appearing
iridescent, then the color of gold, copper,
or violet, and finally of a grayish blue.
These colors are adherent, and do not
change in the air.
II. — The sulphide of tin may be depos-
ited on metallic surfaces, especially on
brass, communicating shades varying
with the thickness of the deposit. For
this purpose, Puscher prepares the fol-
lowing solutions: Dissolve tartaric acid,
20 parts, in water, 1,000 parts; add a
salt of tin, 20 parts; water, 125 parts.
Boil the mixture, allow it to repose, and
filter. Afterwards pour the clear portion
a little at a time, shaking continually,
into a solution of hyposulphite of soda, 80
parts; water, 250 parts. On boiling, sul-
phide of tin is formed, with precipitation
of sulphur. On plunging the pieces of
brass in the liquid, they are covered,
according to the period of immersion,
with varied shades, passing from goM
yellow to red, to crimson, to blue, and
finally to light brown.
III.— The metal is treated with the
PLATING
571
following composition: Solution A. —
Cotton, well washed, 50 parts; salicylic
acid, 2 parts, dissolved in sulphuric acid,
1,000 parts, and bichromate of potash,
100 parts. Solution B. — Brass, 20
parts; nitric acid, density 1.51, 350
parts; nitrate of soda, 10 parts. Mix
the two solutions, and dilute with 1,500
parts of water. These proportions may
be modified according to the nature of
the brass to be treated. This prepara-
tion is spread on the metal, which im-
mediately changes color. When the
desired tint is obtained, the piece is
quickly plunged in an alkaline solution;
a soda salt, 50 parts; water, 1,000 parts.
The article is afterwards washed, and
dried with a piece of cloth. Beautiful
red tin;s are obtained by placing the
objects between 2 plates, or better yet,
2 pieces of iron wire-cloth.
IV. — Put in a flask 100 parts of cupric
carbonate and 750 parts of ammonia and
shake. This liquid should be kept in
well-stoppered bottles. When it has
lost its strength, this may be renewed
by pouring in a little ammonia. The
objects to be colored should be well
cleaned. They are suspended in the
liquid and moved back and forth. After
a few minutes of immersion, they are
washed with water and dried in wood
sawdust. Generally, a deep-blue color
is obtained.
V. — Plunge a sheet of perfectly clean
brass in a dilute solution of neutral
acetate of copper, and at the ordinary
temperature, and in a short time it will
be found covered with a fine gold yellow.
VI. — Immerse the brass several times
in a very dilute solution of cupric chlo-
ride, and the color will be deadened and
bronzed a greenish gray.
A plate of brass heated to 302° F. is
colored violet by rubbing its surface
gently with cotton soaked with cupric
chloride.
yil. — On heating brass, perfectly
polished, until it can be no longer held
in the hand, and then covering it rapidly
and uniformly with a solution of an-
timony chloride by means of a wad of
cotton, a fine violet tint is communi-
cated.
VIII. — For greenish shades, a bath
may be made use of, composed of water,
100 parts; cupric sulphate, 8 parts; sal
ammoniac, 2 parts.
IX. — For orange-brown and cinna-
mon-brown shades: Water, 1,000 parts;
potassium chlorate, 10 parts; cupric
sulphate, 10 parts,
X. — For obtaining rose-colored hues,
then violet, then blue: Water, 400 parts;
cupric sulphate, 30 parts; sodium hypo-
sulphite, 20 parts; cream of tartar, 10
parts.
XI. — For yellow, orange, or rose-
colored shades, then blue, immerse the
objects for a longer or shorter time in
the following bath: Water, 400 parts,
ammoniacal ferrous sulphate, 20 parts;
sodium hyposulphite, 40 parts; cupric
sulphite, 30 parts; cream of tartar, 10
parts. By prolonging the boiling, the
blue tint gives place to yellow, and
finally to a fine gray.
XII. — A yellowish brown may be ob-
tained with water, 50 parts; potassium
chlorate, 5 parts; nickel carbonate, 2
parts; sal nickel, 5 parts.
XIII. — A dark brown is obtained
with water, 50 parts; sal nickel, 10 parts;
potassium chlorate, 5 parts.
XIV. — A yellowish brown is obtained
with water, 350 parts; a crystallized
sodium salt, 10 parts; orpiment, 5 parts.
XV. — Metallic moire is obtained by
mixing two liquids: (a) Cream of tar-
tar, 5 parts; cupric sulphate, 5 parts;
water, 250 parts. (6) Water, 125 parts;
sodium hyposulphite, 15 parts.
XVI. — A beautiful color is formed
with one of the following baths: (a)
Water, 140 parts; ammonia, 5 parts; po-
tassium sulphide, 1 part. (6) Water, 100
parts; ammonium sulphydrate, 2 parts.
Bronzing of Brass. — The object is
boiled with zinc grains and water satu-
rated with ammoniacal chlorhydrate. A
little zinc chloride may be added to
facilitate the operation, which is com-
pleted as above.
It may also be terminated by plunging
the object in the following solution:
Water, 2,000 parts; vinegar, 100 parts;
sal ammoniac, 475 parts; pulverized
verdigris, 500 parts.
ELECTRODEPOSITION PROCESSES.
The electrodeposition process is that
used in electroplating and electrotyping.
It consists in preparing a bath in which
a metal salt is in solution, the articles to
be plated being suspended so that they
hang in the solution, but are insulated.
The bath being provided with an anode
and cathode for the passing of an elec-
tric current, and the article being con-
nected with the cathode or negative
pole, the salts are deposited on its sur-
face (on the unprotected parts of its
surface), and thus receive a coating or
plating of the metal in solution.
572
PLATING
When a soft metal is deposited upon a
hard metal or the latter upon a metal
softer than itself, the exterior metal
should be polished and not burnished,
and for this reason: If silver is deposited
upon lead, for instance, the great pres-
sure which is required in burnishing to
produce the necessary polish would cause
the softer metal to expand, and conse-
quently a separation of the two metals
would result. On the other hand, silver
being softer than steel, if the burnisher
is applied to silver-coated steel the ex-
terior metal will expand and separate
from the subjacent metal.
Many articles which are to receive
deposits require to have portions of
their surfaces topped off, to prevent the
deposit spreading over those parts; for
instance, in taking a copy of one side of
a bronze medallion, the opposite side
must be coated with some kind of var-
nish, wax, or fat, to prevent deposition;
or, in gilding the inside of a cream jug
which has been silvered on the outside,
varnish must be applied all around the
outer side of the edge, for the same
reason. For gilding and other hot so-
lutions, copal varnish is generally used;
but for cold liquids and common work,
an ordinary varnish, such as engravers
use for similar purposes, will do very
well. In the absence of other sub-
stances, a solution of sealing wax, dis-
solved in naphtha, may be employed.
Plating of Aluminum. — The light
metal may be plated with almost any
other metal, but copper is most com-
monly employed. Two formulas for cop-
pering aluminum follow:
I. — Make a bath of cupric sulphate,
30 parts; cream of tartar, 30 parts; soda,
25 parts; water, 1,000 parts. After well
scouring the objects to be coppered, im-
merse in the bath. The coppering may
also be effected by means of the battery
with the following mixture: Sodium phos-
phate, 50 parts; potassium cyanide, 50
parts; copper cyanide, 50 parts; distilled
water, 1,000 parts.
II. — First clean the aluminum in a
warm solution of an alkaline carbonate,
thus making its surface rough and
porous; next v/ash it thoroughly in run-
ning water, and dip it into a not solution
of hydrochloric acid of about 5 per cent
strength. Wash it again in clean water,
and then place it in a somewhat concen-
trated acid solution of copper sulphate,
until a uniform metallic deposit is
formed; it is then again thoroughly
washed and returned to the copper sul-
phate bath, when an electric current is
passed until a coating of copper of the
required thickness is obtained.
Brassing. — The following recipe is
recommended for the bath: Copper ace-
tate, 50 parts, by weight; dry zinc chlo-
ride, 25 parts, by weight; crystallized
sodium sulphite, 250 parts, by weight;
ammonium carbonate, 35 parts, by
weight; potassium cyanide, 110 parts, by
weight. Dissolve in 3,000 parts of water.
Coppering. — I. — This is the Dessolle
process for the galvanic application of
copper. The special advantage claimed
is that strong currents can be used, and
a deposit obtained of 0.004 inch in 1^
hours. After having cleaned the object
to be coppered, with sand or in an acid
bath, a first coat is deposited in an ordi-
nary electrolytic bath; then the object is
placed in a final bath, in which the elec-
trolyte is projected on the electrode, so
as to remove all bubbles of gas or other
impurities tending to attach themselves
to the surface. The electrolyte employed
is simply a solution of cupric sulphate in
very dilute sulphuric acid. For the pre-
liminary bath the double cyanide of potas-
sium and copper is ma.de use of.
II. — Those baths which contain cya-
nide work best, and may be used for all
metals. The amount of the latter must
not form too large an excess. The ad-
dition of a sulphide is very dangerous.
It is of advantage that the final bath
contain an excess of alkali, but only
as ammonia or ammonium carbonate.
For a copper salt the acetate is pref-
erable. According to this, the solution
A is prepared in the warm, and solution
B is added with heating. Solution A:
Neutral copper acetate, 30 parts, by
weight; crystallized sodium sulphite, 30
parts, by weight; ammonium carbonate,
5 parts, by weight; water, 500 parts, by
weight. Solution B: Potassium cyanide
(98 to 99 per cent), 35 parts, by weight;
and water, 500 parts, by weight.
Coppering Glass. — I. — Glass vessels
may be coated with copper by electro-
lytic process, by simply varnishing the
outer surface of the vessel, and when the
varnish is nearly dry, brushing plum-
bago well over it. A conducting wire is
then attached to the varnished surface,
which may be conveniently done by em-
ploying a small piece of softened gutta
percha or beeswax, taking care to employ
the plumbago to the part which unites
the wire to the plumbagoed surface.
II. — Dissolve gutta percha in essence
of turpentine or benzine; apply a coat of
the solution on the glass in the places to
PLATING
573
be coppered and allow to dry; next rub
it with graphite and place in the electric
bath. The rubber solution is spread
with a brush.
Coppering Plaster Models, etc. — Busts
and similar objects may be coated by
saturating them with linseed oil, or bet-
ter, with beeswax, then well blacklead-
ing, or treating them with phosphorous,
silver and gold solutions, attaching a
number of guiding wires, connected with
all the most hollow and distant parts, and
then immersing them in the sulphate of
copper solution and causing just suffi-
cient copper to be deposited upon them,
by the battery process, to protect them,
but not to obliterate the fine lines or
features.
Coppering Zinc Plate. — The zinc plate
should first be cleaned with highly di-
luted hydrochloric acid and the acid
completely removed with water. Then
prepare an ammoniacal copper solution
from 3 parts copper sulphate, 3 parts
spirits of sal ammoniac, and 50 parts
water. If possible the zinc articles are
dipped into this solution or else the sur-
face is coated a few times quickly and
uniformly with a flat, soft brush, leaving
to dry between the coats. When suffi-
cient copper has precipitated on the zinc,
brush off the object superficially.
Cobaltizing of Metals. — Following are
various processes for cobaltizing on cop-
per or other metals previously coppered:
I. — Cobalt, 50 parts, by weight; sal am-
moniac, 25 parts; liquid ammonia, 15
parts; distilled water, 1,000 parts. Dis-
solve the cobalt and the sal ammoniac in
the distilled water, and add the liquid
ammonia.
II. — Pure potash in alcohol, 50 parts,
by weight; cobalt chloride, 10 parts;
distilled water, 1,000 parts. Dissolve
the cobalt in half the distilled water and
the potash in the other half and unite the
two.
III. — Potassium sulphocyanide, 13
parts, by weight; cobalt chloride, 10
parts; pure potash in alcohol, 2 parts;
distilled water, 1,000 parts. Proceed as
described above. All these baths are
used hot and require a strong current.
Nickel Plating with the Battery.— The
nickel bath is prepared according to the
following formula:
I. — Nickel and ammo-
nium sulphate. . . 10 parts
Boracic acid 4 parts
Distilled water .... 175 parts
A sheet of nickel is used as an
anode.
Perfect cleanliness of the surface to be
coated is essential to success. With
nickel especially is this the case, as traces
of oxide will cause it to show dark
streaks. Finger marks will in any case
render the deposit liable to peel off.
Cleansing is generally accomplished
either by boiling in strong solution of
potassium hydrate, or, when possible,
by heating to redness in a blow-pipe
flame to burn off any adhesive grease, and
then soaking in a pickle of dilute sul-
phuric acid to remove any oxide formed
during the heating. In either case it is
necessary to subject the article to a
process of scratch brushing afterwards;
that is, long-continued friction with wire
brushes under water, which not only
removes any still adhering oxide, but
renders the surface bright.
To certain metals, as iron, nickel, and
zinc, metallic deposits do not readily
adhere. This difficulty is overcome by
first coating them with copper in a bath
composed as follows:
II. — Potassium cyanide. 2 parts
Copper acetate, in
crystals 2 parts
Sodium carbonate,
in crystals 2 parts
Sodium bisulphite . . 2 parts
Water 100 parts
Moisten the copper acetate with a
small quantity of water and add the so-
dium carbonate dissolved in 20 parts of
water. When reaction is complete, all
the copper acetate being converted into
carbonate, add the sodium bisulphite,
dissolved in another 20 parts of water;
lastly, add the potassium cyanide, dissolved
in the remainder of the water. The finished
product should be a colorless liquid.
If a dynamo is not available for the
production of a current, a Daniell's
battery is to be recommended, and the
"tank" for a small operation may be a
glass jar. The jar is crossed by copper
rods in connection with the battery; the
metal to be deposited is suspended
from the rod in connection with the posi-
tive pole, and is called the anode. The
articles to be coated are suspended by
thin copper wires from the rod in con-
nection with the negative pole; these
form the cathode. The worker should
bear in mind that it is very difficult to
apply a thick coating of nickel without
its peeling.
Replating with Battery. — It is well
known to electro-metallurgists that met-
als deposited by electricity do not adhere
so firmly to their kind as to other metals.
Thus gold will adhere more tenaciously
574
PLATING
to silver, copper, or brass, than it will to
gold or to a gilt surface, and silver will
attach itself more closely to copper or
brass than to a silver-plated surface.
Consequently, it is the practice to re-
move, by stripping or polishing the sil-
ver from old plated articles before elec-
troplating them. If this were not done,
the deposited coating would in all prob-
ability "strip," as it is termed, when
the burnisher is applied to it — that is,
the newly deposited metal would peel
off the underlying silver. It must be
understood that these remarks apply to
cases in which a good, heavy deposit of
silver is required, for, of course, the mere
film would not present any remarkable
peculiarity.
Silver Plating. — The term silver de-
posit designates a coating of silver which
is deposited upon glass, porcelain, china,
or other substances. This deposit may
be made to take the form of any desired
design, and to the observer it has the ap-
pearance (in the case of glass) of having
been melted on.
Practically all of the plated articles
are made by painting the design upon
the glass or other surface by means of a
mixture of powdered silver, a flux and a
liquid to make the mixture in the form
of a paint so that it may be readily spread
over the surface. This design is then
fired in a muffle until the flux melts and
causes the silver to become firmly
attached to the glass. A thin silver
deposit is thus produced, which is a con-
ductor of electricity, and upon which any
thickness of silver deposit may be pro-
duced by electroplating in the usual cya-
nide silver-plating bath.
To be successful in securing a lasting
deposit a suitable flux must be used.
This flux must melt at a lower tempera-
ture than the glass upon which it is put,
in order to prevent the softening of the
articles by the necessary heat and the
accompanying distortion. Second, a
suitable muffle must be had for firing the
glass articles upon which the design has
been painted. Not only must a muffle
be used in which the heat can be abso-
lutely controlled, but one which allows
the slow cooling of the articles. If this
is not done they are apt to crack while
cooling.
The manufacture of the flux is the
most critical part of the silver deposit
process. Witnout a good flux the oper-
ation will not be a success. This flux is
frequently called an enamel or frit.
After a series of experiments it was
found that the most suitable flux is a
borate of lead. This is easily prepared,
fuses before the glass softens, and ad-
heres tenaciously to the glass surface.
To make it, proceed as follows: Dis-
solve I pound of acetate of lead (sugar of
lead) in 1 quart of water and heat to
boiling. Dissolve ^ pound of borax in
1 quart of hot water and add to the sugar
of lead solution. Borate of lead follows
as a white precipitate. This is filtered
out and washed until free from impuri-
ties. It is then dried.
The precipitated borate of lead is then
melted in a porcelain or clay crucible.
When in the melted condition it should
be poured into a basin of cold water.
This serves to granulate and render it
easily pulverized. After it has been
poured into water it is removed and
dried. Before using in the paint it is
necessary that this fused borate of lead
be ground in a mortar as fine as possible.
Unless this is done the deposit will not be
smooth.
The silver to be used should be finely
powdered silver, which can be purchased
in the same manner as bronze powders.
The mixture used for painting the de-
sign upon the glass is composed of 2
parts of the powdered silver, and 1 part
of the fused borate of lead. Place the
parts in a mortar and add just enough
oil of lavender to make the mass of a
paint-like consistency. The whole is
then ground with the pestle until it is as
fine as possible. The amount of oil of
lavender which is used must not be too
great, as it will then be found that a
thick layer cannot be obtained upon the
glass.
The glass to be treated must be
cleaned by scouring with wet pumice
stone and washing soda. The glass
should be rinsed and dried. The design
is then painted on the glass with a brush,
painting as thick as possible and yet
leaving a smooth, even surface. The
glass should be allowed to dry for 24
hours, when it is ready for firing.
When placed in the gas muffle, the
glass should be subjected to a tempera-
ture of a very low red heat. The borate
of lead will melt at this temperature, and
after holding this heat a short time to
enable the borate of lead to melt and
attach itself, the muffle is allowed to
cool.
After cooling, the articles are removed
and scratch brushed and placed in a
silver bath for an electro deposit of
silver of a thickness desired.
Before the plating the glass article is
dipped into a cyanide dip, or, if found
necessary, scoured lightly with pumice
PLATING
575
stone and cyanide, and then given a dip
in the customary blue dip or mercury
solution, so as to quickly cover all parts
of the surface. It next passes to the
regular cyanide silver solution, and is
allowed to remain until the desired de-
posit is obtained.
A little potassium cyanide and some
mono-basic potassium citrate in powder
form is added from time to time to the
bath generally used, which is prepared by
dissolving freshly precipitated silver cya-
nide in a potassium cyanide solution.
After this the glass is rinsed and dried,
and may be finished by buffing.
Steel Plating. — The following is a
solution for dipping steel articles before
electroplating: Nitrate of silver, 1 part;
nitrate of mercury, 1 part; nitric acid
(specific gravity, 1.384), 4 parts; water,
120 parts. The article, free from
grease, is dipped in the pickle for a
second or two.
The following electroplating bath is
used: Pure crystallized ferrous sulphate,
40 parts, by weight, and ammonium
chloride, 100 parts, by weight, in 1,000
parts, by weight, of water. It is of ad-
vantage to add to this 100 parts, by
weight, of ammonium citrate, in order to
prevent the precipitation of basic iron
salts, especially at the anode.
Tin Plating by Electric Bath. — Most
solutions give a dead- white film of tin,
and this has to be brightened by friction
of some sort, either by scratch brushing,
burnishing, polishing, or rubbing with
whiting. The bright tin plates are made
bright by rolling with polished steel
rollers. Small articles may be bright-
tinned by immersion in melted tin, after
their surfaces have been made chemically
clean and bright, all of which processes
entail much time and labor. Benzoic
acid, boric acid, or gelatin may be tried
with a well-regulated current and the
solution in good working order, but all
will depend upon the exact working of
the solution, the same conditions being
set up as are present in the deposition of
other metals. These substances may be
separately tried, in the proportion of 1
ounce to each gallon of the tin solution,
by boiling the latter and adding either
one during the boiling, as they dissolve
much easier with the tin salts than in
water separately. Tin articles are usu-
ally brightened and polished with Vienna
lime or whiting, the first being used with
linen rags and the latter with chamois
leather. Tin baths must be used hot, not
below 75° F., with a suitable current ac-
cording to their composition. Too strong
a current produces a bad color, and the
deposit does not adhere well. A current
of from 2 to 6 volts will be sufficient.
Small tinned articles are brightened by
being shaken in a leather bag containing
a quantity of bran or by revolving in a
barrel with the same substance; but large
objects have to be brightened by other
means, such as scratch brushing and
mopping to give an acceptable finish to
the deposited metal.
GILDING AND GOLD PLATING :
Genuine gilding readily takes up mer-
cury, while imitation gilding does not or
only very slowly. Any coating of var-
nish present should, however, be re-
moved before conducting the test. Mer-
curous nitrate has no action on genuine
gold, but on spurious gilding a white
spot will form which quickly turns dark.
A solution of neutral copper chloride
does not act upon genuine gold, but on
alloys containing copper a black spot
will result. Gold fringe, etc., retains
its luster in spirit of wine, if the gilding
is genuine; if not, the gilding will burn
and oxidize. Imitation gilding might
be termed "snuff gilding, ' as in Ger-
many it consists of dissolved brass, snuff,
saltpeter, hydrochloric acid, etc., and is
used for tin toys. An expert will im-
mediately see the difference, as genuine
gilding has a different, more compact
pore formation and a better color.
There are also some gold varnishes
which are just as good.
The effect of motion while an article is
receiving the deposit is most clearly seen
during the operation of gilding. If a
watch dial, for instance, be placed in the
gilding bath and allowed to remain for a
few moments undisturbed and the solu-
tion of gold has been much worked, it is
probable that the dial will acquire a
dark fox-red color; but if it be quickly
moved about, it instantly changes color
and will sometimes even assume a pale
straw color. In fact, the color of a de-
posit may be regulated greatly by motion
of the article in the bath — a fact which
the operator should study with much
attention, when gilding.
The inside of a vessel is gilded by
filling the vessel with the gilding solu-
tion, suspending a gold anode in the
liquid, and passing the current. The
lips of cream jugs and the upper parts of
vessels of irregular outline are gilded by
passing the current from a gold anode
through a rag wetted with the gilding
solution and laid upon the part.
Sometimes, when gilding the insides of
mugs, tankards, etc., which are richly
576
PLATING
chased or embossed, it will be found that
the hollow parts do not receive the de-
posit at all, or very partially. When
this is the case, the article must be rinsed
and well scratch brushed, and a little
more cyanide added to the solution.
The anode must be slightly kept in
motion and the battery power increased
until the hollow surfaces are coated.
Frequent scratch brushing aids the de-
posit to a great extent by imparting a
slight film of brass to the surface.
In gilding chains, brooches, pins,
rings, and other articles which have been
repaired, i. e., hard soldered, sometimes,
it is found that the gold will not deposit
freely upon the soldered parts; when
such is the case, a little extra scratch
brushing applied to the part will assist
the operation greatly and it has some-
times been found that dry scratch brush-
ing for an instant — that is, without the
stream of beer usually employed — ren-
ders the surface a better and more uni-
form conductor and consequently it will
more readily receive the deposit. In
fact, dry scratch brushing is very useful
in many cases in which it is desirable to
impart an artificial coating of brass upon
an article to which silver or gold will not
readily adhere. In scratch brushing
without the employment of beer or some
other liquid, however, great care must
be taken not to continue the operation
too long, as the minute particles of metal
given off by the scratch brush would be
likely to prove prejudicial to the health
of the operator, were he to inhale them
to any great extent.
The following solutions are for gilding
without a battery: I. — In 1,000 parts of
distilled water dissolve in the following
order:
Crystalline sodium
pyrophosphate .... 80 parts
Twelve per cent solu-
tion of hydrocyanic
acid 8 parts
Crystalline gold chlo-
ride 2 parts
Heat to a boiling temperature, and dip
the article, previously thoroughly cleaned,
therein.
II. — Dissolve in boiling distilled water,
1 part of chloride of gold and 4 parts of
cyanide of potassium. Plunge the objects
into this solution, while still hot, and leave
them therein for several hours, keeping
them attached to a copper wire or a very
clean strip of zinc. They will become
covered with a handsome gold coating.
Aluminum Gilding. — I. — Dissolve 6
parts of gold in aqua regia and dilute the
solution with distilled water; on the
other hand, put 30 parts of lime in 150
parts of distilled water; at the end of 2
hours add the gold solution to the lime,
shake all and allow to settle for 5 to 6
hours, decant and wash the precipitate,
which is lime aurate. Place this aurate
of lime in 1,000 parts of distilled water,
with 20 parts of hyposulphite of soda;
put all on the fire for 8 to 10 minutes,
without allowing to boil; remove and
filter. The filtered liquor serves for
gilding in the cold, by plunging into this
bath the aluminum articles previously
pickled by passing through caustic pot-
ash and nitric acid. This gilding is ob-
tained without the aid of the battery.
II. — The gold bath is prepared with
gold dissolved in the usual way, and the
addition of salts, as follows: Gold, 20
parts, by weight; sulphate of soda, 20
parts; phosphate of soda, 660 parts;
cyanuret of potassium, 40 parts; water,
1,000 parts. The bath ought to be of
the temperature of 68° to 77° F.
Amalgam Gold Plating.— Gold amal-
gam is chiefly used as a plating for silver,
copper, or brass. The article to be
plated is washed over with diluted nitric
acid or potash lye and prepared chalk,
to remove any tarnish or rust that might
prevent the amalgam from adhering.
After having been polished perfectly
bright, the amalgam is applied as evenly
as possible, usually with a fine scratch
brush. It is then set upon a grate over
a charcoal fire, or placed into an oven
and heated to that degree at which mer-
cury exhales. The gold, when the mer-
cury has evaporated, presents a dull
yellow color. Cover it with a coating of
pulverized niter and alum in equal parts,
mixed to a paste with water, and heat
again till it is melted, then plunge into
water. Burnish up with a steel or
bloodstone burnisher.
Brass Gilding. — On brass, which is an
electropositive metal, an electromagnetic
metal, such as gold, can be deposited
very cheaply from the dilute solutions
of its salts. The deposit is naturally
very thin, but still quite adhesive. In
preparing it, the proportions stated be-
low have to be accurately observed,
otherwise no uniform, coherent coating
will result, but one that is uneven and
spotted.
I. — In 750 parts, by weight, of water
dissolve: Phosphate of soda, 5 parts, and
caustic potash, 3 parts, and in 250 parts
of water, gold chloride, 1 part, and po-
tassium cyanide, 16 parts. Mix both
PLATING
577
solutions well and cause the mixture to
boil, whereupon the brass articles to be
gilded are immersed. The gold in the
mixture can be utilized almost entirely.
When the solution does not gild well any
more a little potassium cyanide is added,
and it is used for pre-gilding the articles,
which can then be gilded again in a fresh
solution. This solution is very weak.
A stronger one can be prepared mechan-
ically by dissolving 2 to 3 parts of gold
chloride in very little water to which 1
part of saltpeter is added. Into this
solution dip linen rags, let them dry in a
dark place, and cause them to char into
tinder, which is rubbed up in a porcelain
dish. Into the powder so made, dip a
soft, slightly charred cork, moistened
with a little vinegar, or else use only the
finger, and rub the gold powder upon
the brass articles.
II. — To Give Brass a Golden Color,
it is dipped until the desired shade is ob-
tained into a solution of about 175° F.,
produced as follows: Boil 4 parts of
caustic soda, 4 parts of milk sugar, and
100 parts of water for 15 minutes; next
add 4 parts of blue vitriol, dissolved in as
little water as possible.
Copper and Brass Gilding. — The solu-
tions used to gild copper can be gener-
ally used also for brass articles. Copper
gilding acquires importance because in
order to gild iron, steel, tin, and zinc, they
must first be coated with copper, if the
boiling method is to be employed. Fol-
lowing is Langbein's bath for copper and
brass:
Dissolve 1 part, by weight, of chloride
of gold and 16 parts, by weight, of potas-
sium cyanide in 250 parts, by weight, of
water; dissolve also and separately, 5
parts, by weight, of sodium phosphate
and 3 parts, by weight, of caustic potash
in 750 parts, by weight, of cold water.
Mix these solutions and bring them to a
boil. If the action subsides, add from
3 to 5 parts, by weight, more potassium
cyanide. The polished iron and steel
objects must first be copper-plated by
dipping them into a solution of 5 parts,
by weight, of blue vitriol and 2 parts, by
weight, of sulphuric acid in 1,000 parts,
by weight, of water. They may now be
dipped into a hot solution containing 6
parts, by weight, of gold chloride and
22 £ parts, by weight, of soda crystals in
75 parts, by weight, of water. This
coating of gold may be polished.
Cold Chemical Gilding. — The chem-
ical gilding by the wet process is accom-
plished by E. E. Stahl with the aid of three
baths: A gold bath, a neutralization
bath, and a reduction bath. The gold
bath is prepared from pure hydrochloric
acid, 200 parts; nitric acid, 100 parts;
and pure gold. The gold solution evap-
orated to crystallization is made to con-
tain 1| per cent of gold by diluting with
water. The neutralization bath con-
sists of soda lye of 6°, of pure sodium
hydroxide, and distilled water. The
reduction bath contains a mixture of
equal parts of 90 per cent alcohol and
distilled water, wherein pure hydrogen
has been dissolved. The gilding proper
is conducted by first entering the article
in the gold bath, next briskly moving it
about in the neutralization bath, and
finally adding the reducing bath with
further strong agitation of the liquid.
The residues from the gilding are melted
with 3 parts each of potash, powdered
borax, and potash niter, thus recovering
the superfluous gold. The gilding or
silvering respectively produces a deposit
of gold or silver of very slight thickness
and of the luster of polishing gold. Be-
sides the metal solution an "anti-reducer"
is needed, consisting of 50 grams of recti-
fied and rosinified turpentine oil and 10
grams of powdered roll sulphur. From
this is obtained, by boiling, a syrupy
balsam, to which is added, before use,
lavender oil, well-ground basic bismuth
nitrate, and the solution for gilding or
silvering. The last takes place by a
hydrochloric solution of aluminum with
the above balsam.
Colored Gilding. — A variety of shades
of green and red gold can be obtained
by the electro-chemical process, which
method may be employed for the decora-
tion of various objects of art. In order to
produce red gold in the different shades,
a plate of pure copper is hung into a rather
concentrated gold bath (5 to 6 parts, by
weight, per 1,000 parts of liquid), which
is connected with the battery in such a
manner that gold is deposited on the ar-
ticle immersed in the bath. By the action
of the electric current copper is dissolved
as well from the copper plate and is sepa-
rated simultaneously with the gold, so
that, after a certain time, a deposit con-
taining a gold copper alloy, conforming in
color to the quantities of gold and copper
contained in it, is obtained by the electric
process. When the desired snade of color
of the deposit is reached the copper plate
is taken out and replaced by another con-
sisting of the copper gold alloy, likewise
produced by electrodeposition, and the
articles are now gilt in this liquid. In
some large manufactories of gold articles
this last coloring is used even for pure
578
PLATING
gold articles, to give them a popular
color. To produce green gold (alloy of
gold and silver), a silver plate is first
employed, which is dipped into the gold
bath and from which enough silver is dis-
solved until the separating alloy shows
the desired shade. The silver plate is
then exchanged for a gold-silver plate of
the respective color, and the articles are
gilt with green gold.
Gilding German Silver. — In gilding
German silver the solution may be
worked at a low temperature, the solu-
tion being weakened and a small sur-
face of anode exposed. German silver
has the power of reducing gold from its
solution in cyanide (especially if the
solution be strong) without the aid of the
battery; therefore, the solution should
be weaker, in fact, so weak that the Ger-
man silver will not deposit the gold per se ;
otherwise the deposit will take place so
rapidly that the gold will peel off when
being burnished or even scratch brushed.
Gilding of Glass. — I. — In order to
produce a good gilding on glass, the gold
salt employed must be free from acid.
Prepare three solutions, viz.:
a. 20 parts acid-free gold chloride in
150 parts of distilled water.
6. 5 parts dry sodium hydrate in 80
parts of distilled water.
c. 2t parts of starch sugar in 30 parts
distilled water; spirit of wine, 20 parts;
and commercial pure 40 per cent alde-
hyde, 20 parts. These liquids are quickly
mixed together in the proportion of 200,
50, and 5 parts, whereupon the mixture is
poured on the glass previously cleaned
with soda solution, and the gilding will
be effected in a short time. The gold
coating is said to keep intact for years.
II. — Coat the places to be gilded
thinly with a saturated borax solution,
lay the gold leaf on this and press down
well and uniformly with cotton-wool.
Heat the glass over a spirit flame, until
the borax melts, and allow to cool off.
If the glass is to be decorated with gilt
letters or designs, paint the places to be
gilded with water-glass solution of 40°
Be.; lay on the gold leaf, and press
down uniformly. Then heat the ob-
ject to 86° P., so that it dries a little,
sketch the letters or figures on with a
lead pencil, erase the superfluous gold,
and allow the articles to dry completely
at a higher temperature.
Green Gilding. — This can be obtained
conveniently by the galvanic process,,
by means of anodes of sheet platinum
with the following composition: Water,
10,000 parts, by weight; sodium phos-
phate, 200 parts; sodium sulphate, 35
parts; potassium carbonate, 10 parts;
1 ducat gold from gold chloride, potas-
sium cyanide (100 per cent), 20 parts.
Dissolve the first three salts in 10,000
parts of cold water and add, with stir-
ring, the gold chloride and potassium
cyanide. Before the first use boil down
the solution thoroughly about one-half,
replacing the evaporating water and
filter after cooling, in case a sediment
should appear. To this gold bath very
carefully add some silver bath. The
platinum sheets which are to serve as
anodes are employed If inches long, $
inch broad, and Too of an inch thick.
With these anodes the gold tone can be
somewhat regulated by hanging more or
less deeply into the solution during the
gilding. The current should have a tension
of 3 to 4 volts. In the case of batteries
three Busen elements are connected for
current tension. It is difficult to pro-
duce old gold on silver, especially if the
raised portions are to appear green.
It is most advantageous first to lightly
copper the silver goods, taking the cop-
per off again on the high places by
brushing with pumice stone. After that
hang at once in the above gold bath.
If the embossed portions should be too
mat, brighten slightly by scratching
with a very fine brass wire brush. In
this manner a handsome brown shade is
obtained in the deep places and a green
color on the raised portions. This proc-
ess requires practice. Since this method
will produce only a very light gilding, a
coating of white varnish will protect the
articles from tarnishing.
Incrusting with Gold. — The article is
first made perfectly bright, and those
places which are to be gilt are covered
with a matt consisting of white lead
ground with gum water, made into a
paste which can be applied like a thick
paint by means of a pen or brush. Those
E laces of the metal surface not covered
y the paint are coated with asphalt
varnish — a solution of asphaltum in
benzine to which oil of .turpentine is
added to render it less volatile. After
this is done lay the article in water, so
that the white lead paint comes off, and
put it into a gilding bath. By the elec-
tric current gold is precipitated on the
bright parts of the metal. When the
layer of gold is thick enough lift the ob-
ject from the bath, wash, let dry and lay
it into a vessel filled with benzol. The
asphalt dissolves in the benzol, and the
PLATING
579
desired design appears in gold on the
bronze or silver ground. This operation
may also be performed by coating the
whole article with asphalt varnish and
executing the design by means of a blunt
graver which only takes away the var-
nish covering without scratching the
metal itself. On the parts thus bared
gold is deposited by the electric current
and the varnish coating is then removed.
Ivory Gilding. — I. — The pattern is
painted with a fine camel's-hair pencil,
moistened with gold chloride. Hold
the ivory over the mouth of a bottle in
which hydrogen gas is generated (by the
action of dilute sulphuric acid on zinc
waste). The hydrogen reduces the
auric chloride in the painted places into
metallic gold, and the gold film precipi-
tated in this manner will quickly obtain a
considerable luster. The gold film is
very thin, but durable.
II. — This is especially suitable for
monograms. Take gold bronze and
place as much as can be taken up with
the point of a knife in a color-cup,
moistening with a few drops of genuine
English gold paint. Coat the raised
portions sparingly with gold, using a fine
pencil; next, coat the outer and inner
borders of the design. When the work
is done, and if the staining and gilding
have been unsuccessful, which occurs
frequently at the outset, lay the work
for 5 or 10 minutes in warmed lead water
and brush off with pumice stone. By
this process very fine shades are often
obtained which cannot be produced by
mere staining. Since the gold readily
wears off on the high places of the work,
it is well to lightly coat these portions
with a thin shellac solution before gild-
ing. This will cause the gilding to be
more permanent.
Mat Gilding. — To obtain a handsome
mat gilding the article, after having
been neatly polished, is passed through
a sand-blast, such as is found in glass-
grinding and etching establishments;
next, the object is carefully cleansed
of fine sand (if possible, by annealing
and decocting), whereupon it is gilt and
subsequently brushed mat with the brass
brush. Where there is no sand-blast,
the article is deadened with the steel
wire brush, which will produce a satis-
factory result, after some practice. After
that, treatment is as above. The above-
mentioned applies in general only to
silver articles. In case of articles of
gold, brass, or tombac, it is better to
previously silver them strongly, since
they are too hard for direct treatment
with the steel wire brush, and a really
correct mat cannot be attained. The
brushes referred to are, of course, cir-
cular brushes for the lathe.
Dead -Gilding of an Alloy of Copper
and Zinc. — The parts which are to be
deadened must be isolated from those
which are to be polished, and also from
those which are to be concealed, and
which therefore are not to be gilded.
For this purpose they are coated with a
paste made of Spanish white mixed with
water. The articles prepared in this
manner are then attached by means of
iron wire to an iron rod and suspended
in a furnace constructed for this process.
The floor of this furnace is covered on
four sides with plates of enameled earth-
enware for receiving the portions spat-
tered about of the salt mixture given off
later.
In the middle is an oven constructed
like a cooking stove, on which is an iron
tripod for carrying the deadening pan;
this latter is cemented into a second pan
of cast iron, the intervening space being
filled up with stove cement. In the mid-
dle of the pan is the bottom or sill, pro-
vided with a thick cast-iron plate, form-
ing the hearth. On all four sides of the
latter are low brick walls, connecting
with the floor of the furnace, and the
whole is covered with thick sheet meta,!.
On the side of the furnace opposite the
side arranged for carrying the pans, is a
boiler in which boiling water is kept.
On the same side of the furnace, but out-
side it, is a laige oval tub of a capacity of
about 700 or 800 quarts, which is kept
filled with water. The upper portions
of the staves of this tub are covered with
linen to absorb all parts that are spat-
tered about.
Powder for Gilding Metals. — I. — In a
solution of perchloride of gold soak
small pieces of linen which are dried
over the solution so that the drops fall-
ing therefrom are saved. When the rags
are dry burn them, carefully gather-
ing the ashes, which ashes, stirred with
a little water, are used for gilding either
with pumice stone or with a cork. For
the hollows, use a small piece of soft
wood, linden, or poplar.
II. — Dissolve the pure gold or the leaf
in nitro-muriatic acid and then precipi-
tate it by a piece of copper or by a solu-
tion of iron sulphate. The precipitate,
if by copper, must be digested with dis
tilled vinegar and then washed by pour-
ing water over it repeatedly and dried.
This precipitate will be in the form of
very fine powder; it works better and is
580
PLATING
more easily burnished than gold leaf
ground with honey.
Gilding Pastes. — I. — A good gilding
paste is prepared as follows: Slowly
melt an ounce of pure lard over the fire,
add £ a teaspoonful of juice of squills,
and stir up the mixture well, subse-
quently adding 10 drops of spirit of sal
ammoniac. If the mixture is not stiff
enough after cooling, the firmness may
be enhanced by an admixture of & to &
ounce of pure melted beef-tallow. A
larger addition of tallow is necessary if
the white of an egg is added. After
each addition the mixture should be
stirred up well and the white of egg
should be added, not to the warm, but
almost cold, mixture.
II. — Alum, 3 parts, by weight; salt-
peter, 6 parts; sulphate of zinc, 3 parts;
common salt, 3 parts. Mix all into a
thick paste, dip the articles into it, and
heat tnem, until nearly black, on a piece
of sheet iron over a clear coke or char-
coal fire; then plunge them into cold
water.
Red Gilding. — This is obtained by the
use of a mixture of equal parts of verdi-
gris and powdered tartar, with which the
article is coated; subsequently burning it
off on a moderate coal fire. Cool in
water, dip the article in a pickle of tartar,
scratch it, and a handsome red shade
will be the result, which has not attacked
the gilding in any way.
Regilding Mat Articles. — In order to
regenerate dead gold trinkets without
having to color them again — which is, as
a rule, impossible, because the gold is too
weak to stand a second coloring — it is
advisable to copper these articles over
before gilding them. After the copper
has deposited all over, the object, well
cleaned and scratched, is hung in the
gilding. By this manipulation much
time and vexation is saved, such as every
jeweler will have experienced in gilding
mat gold articles. The article also ac-
quires a faultless new appearance. Here
are two recipes for the preparation of
copper baths:
I. — Distilled boiling water, 2,000
parts, by weight; sodium sulphate, 10
parts; potassium cyanide, 15 parts; cu-
pric acetate, 15 parts; sodium carbonate,
20 parts; ammonia, 12 parts.
II. — Dissolve crystallized verdigris, 20
parts, by weight, and potassium cyanide,
42 parts, in 1,000 parts of boiling water.
Silk Gilding. — This can only be ac-
complished by the electric process. The
fiber is first rendered conductive by im-
pregnation with silver nitrate solution
and reduction of same with grape sugar
and diluted alkali, or, best of all, with
Raschig's reduction salt. In place of the
silver nitrate, a solution of lead acetate
or copper acetate may be employed.
The silk thus impregnated is treated in
the solution of an alkaline sulphide, e. g.,
sodium sulphide, ammonium sulphide,
or else with hydrogen sulphide, thus pro-
ducing a conductive coating of metallic
sulphide. Upon this gold can be pre-
cipitated by electrodeposition in the usual
way.
Spot Gilding. — Gilding in spots, pro-
ducing a very fine appearance, is done
by putting a thin coat of oil on those
parts of the metal where the gilding is not
to appear; the gold will then be deposited
in those spots only where there is no oil,
and the oil is easily removed when the
work is finished.
Gilding Steel. — Pure gold is dissolved
in aqua regia; the solution is allowed to
evaporate until the acid in excess has
gone. The precipitate is placed in clean
water, 3 times the quantity of sulphuric
acid is added and the whole left to stand
for 24 hours in a well-closed flask, until
the ethereal gold solution floats on top.
By moistening polished steel with the
solution a very handsome gilding is ob-
tained. By the application of designs
with any desired varnish the appearance
of a mixture of gold and steel may be im-
parted to the article.
Wood Gilding. — I. — The moldings,
ledges, etc., to be gilded are painted with
a strong solution of joiners' glue, which
is left to harden well, whereupon 8 to 10
coatings of glue mixed with whitening
are given. Each coat must, of course,
be thoroughly dry, before commencing
the next. After this has been done,
paint with a strong mixture of glue and
minium, and while this is still wet, put on
the gold leaflets and press them down
with cotton. To impart the fine gloss,
polish with a burnishing agate after the
superfluous gold has been removed.
II. — Proceed as above, but take silver
leaf instead of gold leaf, and after all
is thoroughly dry and the superfluous
silver has been removed, apply a coating
of good gold lacquer. The effect will
be equally satisfactory.
Zinc Gilding. — I. — Gilding by means
of zinc contact may be accomplished
with the following formula: Two parts, by
weight, of gold chloride; 5 parts, by
weight, of ootassium cyanide; 10 parts,
PLATING
581
by weight, of sulphite of soda; and 60
parts, by weight, of sodium phosphate
are dissolved in 1,000 parts of water.
When used the bath must be hot. A
cold bath without the addition of potas-
sium cyanide may also be used for gild-
ing, and this consists of 7 parts, by
weight, of gold chloride; 30 parts, by
weight, of yellow prussiate of potash; 30
parts, by weight, of potash; 30 parts, by
weight, of common salt in 1,000 parts of
water.
II. — To gild zinc ^ articles, dissolve
20 parts of gold chloride in 20 parts of
distilled water, and 80 parts of potassium
cyanide in 80 parts of water, mix the
solutions, stir a few times, filter, and add
tartar, 5 parts, and fine chalk, 100 parts.
The resulting paste is applied with a
brush. Objects of copper and brass are
previously coated with zinc. This is
done in the following manner: Heat a
concentrated sal ammoniac solution to
the boiling point with addition of zinc
dust and immerse the thoroughly cleaned
objects until a uniform zinc coating has
formed. Or boil the articles in a con-
centrated caustic soda solution with zinc
dust.
OXIDIZING PROCESSES:
Aluminum Plating. — I. — To plate iron
and other metals with pure aluminum,
deoxidize the pieces with a solution of
borax and place them in an enameling
oven, fitted for receiving metallic vapors.
Raise the temperature to 1,882° to 2,732°
F. Introduce the aluminum vapors
generated by heating a quantity of the
metal on the sand bath. When the
vapors come in contact with the metallic
surfaces, the aluminum is deposited.
The vapors that have not been used or
are exhausted may be conducted into a
vessel of water.
To Copper Aluminum,
take
II. — Sulphate of copper. 30 parts
Cream of tartar 30 parts
Soda 25 parts
Water 1,000 parts
The articles to be coppered are merely
dipped in this bath, but they must be
well cleaned previously.
Antimony Baths. — I. — By dissolving
15 parts, by weight, of tartar emetic
and 15 parts of prepared tartar in 500
parts of hot water and adding 45-60
parts of hydrochloric acid and 45-60
parts of powdered antimony, brass be-
comes coated in the boiling liquid with
beautiful antimony colors. In this
manner it is possible to impart to brass,
golden, copper-red, violet, or bluish-gray
shades, according to a shorter or longer
stay of the objects in the liquid. These
antimony colors possess a handsome
luster, are permanent, and never change
in the air.
II. — Carbonate of soda, 200 parts, by
weight; sulphide of antimony, 50 parts;
water, 1,000 parts. Heat the whole in
a porcelain capsule for 1 hour, keeping
constantly in ebullition; next, filter the
solution, which, on cooling, leaves a
precipitate, which boil again with the
liquid for one-half hour, whereupon the
bath is ready for use.
To Coat Brass Articles with Antimony
Colors. — Dissolve 15 parts, by weight, of
tartar emetic and 15 parts, by weight, of
powdered tartar in 500 parts, by weight,
of hot water and add 50 parts, by weight,
of hydrochloric acid, and 50 parts, by
weight, of powdered antimony. Into
this mixture, heated to a boil, the im-
mersed articles become covered with
luster colors, a golden shade appearing
at first, which is succeeded by one of
copper red. If the objects remain longer
in the liquid, the color passes into violet
and finally into bluish gray.
Brassing. — I. — To brass small articles
of iron or steel drop them into a quart of
water and £ ounce each of sulphate of
copper and protochloride of tin. Stir
the articles in this solution until desired
color is obtained.
II. — Brassing Zinc, Steel, Cast Iron,
etc. — Acetate of copper, ^ 100 parts, by
weight; cyanide of potassium, 250 parts;
bisulphite of soda, 200 parts; liquid am-
monia, 100 parts; protochloride of zinc,
80 parts; distilled water, 10,000 parts.
Dissolve the cyanide of potassium and
the bisulphite of soda. On the other
hand, dissolve the ammonia in three-
fourths of the water and the proto-
chloride of zinc in the remaining water;
next, mix the two solutions. This bath
is excellent for brassing zinc and is used
cold.
III. — Acetate of copper, 125 parts, by
weight; cyanide of potassium, 400 parts;
protochloride of zinc, 100 parts; liquid
ammonia, 100 parts; distilled water,
8,000 to 10,000 parts. Proceed as above
described.
IV. — Acetate of copper, 150 parts, by
weight; carbonate of soda, 1,000 parts;
cyanide of potassium, 550 parts; bisul-
phite of soda, 200 parts; protochloride
of zinc, 100 parts. Proceed as above.
This bath serves for iron, cast iron, and
steel, and is used cold.
582
PLATING
Colored Rings on Metal.— Dissolve 200
parts, by weight, of caustic potash in
2,000 parts of water and add 50 parts of
litharge. Boil this solution for half an
hour, taking care that a little of the
litharge remains un dissolved. When
cold, pour off the clear fluid; it is then
ready for use. Move the object to and
fro in the solution; a yellow-brown color
appears, becoming in turn white, yellow,
red, and finally a beautiful violet and
blue. As soon as the desired color is
obtained, remove the article quickly
from the solution, rinse in clean water,
and dry in sawdust.
Green or Gold Color for Brass. —
French articles of brass, both cast and
made of sheet brass, mostly exhibit a
golden color, which is produced by a
copper coating. This color is prepared
as follows: Dissolve 50 parts, by weight,
of caustic soda and 40 parts of milk
sugar in 1,000 parts of water and boil
a quarter of an hour. The solution
finally acquires a dark-yellow color.
Now add to the mixture, which is re-
moved from the fire, 40 parts of concen-
trated cold blue vitriol solution. A red
precipitate is obtained from the vitriol,
which falls to the bottom at 167° F.
Next a wooden sieve, fitted to the vessel,
is put into the liquid with the polished
brass articles. Toward the end of the
second minute the golden color is usually
dark enough. The sieve with the arti-
cles is taken out and the latter are
washed and dried in sawdust. If they
remain in the copper solution they soon
assume a green color, which in a short
time passes into yellow and bluish green,
and finally into the iridescent colors.
These shades must be produced slowly
at a temperature of 133° to 135° F.
To Give a Green Color to Gold Jew-
elry.— Take verdigris, 120 parts, by
weight; sal ammoniac, 120 parts; ni-
trate of potassium, 45 parts; sulphate
of zinc, 16 parts. Grind the whole and
mix with strong vinegar. Place on the
fire and boil in it the articles to be col-
ored.
Nickeling by Oxidation. — I. — Nickel-
ing may be performed on all metals cold,
by means of nickelene by the Mitressey
process, without employing electrical
apparatus, and any desired thickness
deposited. It is said to be more solid
than nickel.
First Bath.— Clean the objects and
take 5 parts, by weight, of American
potash per 25 parts, by weight, of watei.
If the pieces are quite rusted, take 2
parts, by weight, of chlorhydric acid per
1 part, by weight, of water. The bath
is employed cold.
Second Bath.— Put 250 parts, by
weight, of sulphate of copper in 25,000
parts, by weight, of water. After dis-
solution add a few drops of sulphuric
acid, drop by drop, stirring the liquid
with a wooden stick until it becomes as
clear as spring water.
Take out the pieces thus cleaned and
place them in what is called the copper
bath, attaching to them leaves of zinc;
they will assume a red tint. Then pass
them into the nickeling bath, which is
thus composed:
By weight
Cream of tartar 20 parts
Sal ammoniac, in
powder 10 parts
Kitchen salt 5 parts
Oxychlorhydrate o f
tin 20 parts
Sulphate of nickel,
single 30 parts
Sulphate of nickel,
double 50 parts
Remove the pieces from the bath in a
few minutes and rub them with fine sand
on a moist rag. Brilliancy will thus be
obtained. To improve the appearance,
apply a brass wire brush. The nickel-
ing is said to be more solid and beauti-
ful than that obtained by the electrical
method.
Brilliancy may be also imparted by
means of a piece of buff glued on a
wooden wheel and smeared with Eng-
lish red stuff. This will give a glazed
appearance.
II. — Prepare a bath of neutral zinc
chloride and a neutral solution of a
nickel salt. The objects are immersed
in the bath with small pieces of zinc
and kept boiling for some time. This
process has given satisfactory results.
It is easy to prepare the zinc chloride
by dissolving it in hydrochloric acid, as
well as a saturated solution of ammo-
niacal nickel sulphate in the proportion
of two volumes of the latter to one of the
zinc chloride. The objects should be
boiled for 15 minutes in the bath.
Nickel salt may also be employed, pref-
erably in the state of chloride.
Pickling Solutions. — Oxidized copper,
brass, and German silver articles must
be cleansed by acid solutions. In the
case of brass alloys, this process, through
which the object acquires a dull yel-
low surface, is known as dipping or
yellowing. The treatment consists of
PLATING
583
several successive operations. The ar-
ticle is first boiled in a lye composed of
1 part caustic soda and 10 parts water,
or in a solution of potash or soda or in
limewater; small objects may be placed
in alcohol or benzine. When all the
grease has been removed, the article is
well rinsed with water, and is then ready
for the next pickling. It is first plunged
into a mixture of 1 part sulphuric acid
and 10 parts water, and allowed to re-
main in it till it acquires a reddish tinge.
It is then immersed in 40° Be. nitric
acid, for the purpose of removing the
red tinge, and then for a few seconds into
a bath of 1 part nitric acid, 1.25 parts
sulphuric acid of 66° Be., 0.01 part com-
mon salt, and 0.02 parts lampblack.
The article must then be immediately
and carefully washed with water till no
trace of acid remains. It is then ready
for galvanizing or drying in bran or
beech sawdust. When articles united
with soft solder are pickled in nitric acid,
the solder receives a gray-black color.
Palladiumizing Watch Movements. —
Palladium is successfully employed for
coating parts of timepieces and other
pieces of metals to preserve them against
oxidation. To prepare a palladium
bath use the following ingredients:
Chloride of palladium, 10 parts, by
weight; phosphate of ammonia, 100
parts; phosphate of soda, 300 parts;
benzoic acid, 8 parts; water, 2,000
parts.
Metal Browning by Oxidation. — The
article ought first to be cleaned with
either nitric acid or muriatic acid, then
immersed in an acid affecting the metal
and dried in a warm place. A light
coating is thus formed. For a second
coating acetic or formic acid is used
preferably for aluminum, nickel, and
copper; but for iron and steel, muriatic
or nitric acid. After cleaning, the arti-
cle is placed in a solution of tannin or
gallic acid, and is then dried in a warm
place as before. The second coating is
of a yellowish-brown color. On placing
it near the fire, the color can be deepened
until it becomes completely black; care
must be taken to withdraw it when the
desired shade is produced. Instead of
the acids employed for the first coating,
ammonia may be used.
Silvering by Oxidation. — The oxidiz-
ing of silver darkens it, and gives an an-
tique appearance that is highly prized.
I. — The salts of silver are colorless
when the acids, the elements of which
enter into their composition, are not col-
ored, but they generally blacken on ex-
posure to light. It is easy, therefore, to
blacken silver and obtain its oxide; it is
sufficient to place it in contact with a
sulphide, vapor of sulphur, sulphohydric
acids, such as the sulphides or polysul-
phides of potash, soda, dissolved in water
and called eau de barege. The chlorides
play the same part, and the chloride of
lime in solution or simply Javelle water
may be used. It is used hot in order to
accelerate its action. The bath must be
prepared new for each operation for two
reasons: (1) It is of little value; (2)
the sulphides precipitate rapidly and
give best effects only at the time of their
direct precipitations. The quantity of
the reagent in solution, forming the bath,
depends upon the thickness of the deposit
of silver. When this is trifling, the oxi-
dation penetrates the entire deposit and
the silver exfoliates in smaller scales,
leaving the copper bare. It is neces-
sary, therefore, in this case to operate
with dilute baths inclosing only about
45 grains of oxidizant at most per quart.
The operation is simple: Heat the nec-
essary quantity of water, add the sul-
phide or chloride and agitate to effect
the solution of the mixture, and then at
once plunge in the silver-plated articles,
leaving them immersed only for a few
seconds, which exposure is sufficient to
cover it with a pellicle of deep black-blue
silver. After withdrawing they are
plunged in clean cold water, rinsed and
dried, and either left mat or else pol-
ished, according to the nature of the
articles.
Should the result not be satisfactory,
the articles are brightened by immersing
them in a lukewarm solution of cyanide
of potassium. The oxide, the true name
of which would be the sulphuret or
chloruret, can be raised only on an object
either entirely of silver or silver plated.
II. — Rub the article with a mixture of
graphite, 6 parts, and powdered blood-
stone, 1 part, moistened with oil of tur-
pentine. Allow to dry and brush with
soft brushes passed over wax. Or else,
brush with a soft brush wet with alco-
holic or aqueous platinic chloride solu-
tion of 1 in 20.
III. — Sulphurizing is effected with the
following methods: Dip in a solution
heated to about 175° F., of potassium
sulphide, 5 parts, by weight; ammo-
nium carbonate, 10 parts; water, 1,000
parts; or, calcium sulphide, 1 to 2 parts;
sal ammoniac, 4 parts; water, 1.000
parts.
584
PLATING
IV. — In the following solution articles
of silver obtain a warm brown tone:
Copper sulphate, 20 parts, by weight;
potassium nitrate, 10 parts; ammonium
chloride, 20 parts. By means of bro-
mine, silver and silver alloys receive a
black coloring. On engraved surfaces
a niello-like effect may be produced
thereby.
Oxidized Steel. — I. — Mix together bis-
muth chloride, 1 part; mercury bichlo-
ride, 2 parts; copper chloride, 1 part; hy-
drochloric acid, 6 parts; alcohol, 5 parts;
and water, 5 parts. To use this mixture
successfully the articles to be oxidized
must be cleaned perfectly and freed
from all grease, which is best accom-
plished by boiling them in a soda solu-
tion or by washing in spirit of wine.
Care should be taken not to touch the
article with the fingers again after this
cleaning. However clean the hand
may be, it always has grease on it and
leaves spots after touching, especially on
steel. Next the object is dipped into
the liquid, or if this is not possible the
solution is applied thin but evenly with a
brush, pencil, or rabbit's foot. When
the liquid has dried, the article is placed
for a half hour in simple boiling water.
If a very dark shade is desired the proc-
ess is repeated until the required color
is attained.
II. — Apply, by means of a sponge, a
solution of crystallize^ iron chloride, 2
parts; solid butter of antimony, 2 parts;
and gallic acid, 1 part in 5 parts of water.
Dry the article in the air and repeat the
treatment until the desired snade is
reached. Finally rinse with water,
dry, and rub with linseed-oil varnish.
Tinning by Oxidation. — A dipping
bath for tinning iron is prepared by dis-
solving 300 parts, by weight, ammonia
alum (sulphate of akimina and sulphate
of ammonia)' and 10 parts of melted
stannous chloride (tin salt) in 20,000
parts of warm water. As soon as the
solution boils, the iron articles, previ-
ously pickled and rinsed in fresh water,
are plunged into the fluid; they are im-
mediately covered with a layer of tin of
a beautiful dull-white color, which can
be made bright by treatment in a tub or
sack. Small quantities of tin salt are
added from time to time as may be re-
quired to replace the tin deposited on
tne iron. This bath is also well adapted
for tinning zinc, but here also, as with
iron, the deposit is not sufficient to pre-
vent oxidation of the metal below.
Larger articles tinned in this way are
polished by scratch brushing. In tin-
ning zinc by this process, the ammonia
alum may be replaced by any other kind
of alum, or aluminum sulphate may be
used alone; experience has shown, how-
ever, that this cannot be done with iron,
cast iron, or steel. If it is desired to tin
other metals besides iron and zinc in the
solution which we have described, the
battery must be resorted to; if the latter
is used, the above solution should be ap-
plied in preference to any other.
PATINA OXIDIZING PROCESSES:
Patina of Art Bronzes. — For all
patinas, whether the ordinary brown
of commerce, the green of the Barye
bronzes, or the dark-orange tint of the
Florentine bronzes, a brush is used with
pigments varying according to the shade
desired and applied to the metal after it
is warmed. Recipes are to be met with
on every hand that have not been pat-
ented. But the details of the operation
are the important thing, and often the
effect is produced by a handicraft which
it is difficult to penetrate.
I. — A dark tint may be obtained by
cleaning the object and applying a coat
of hydrosulphate of ammonia; then,
after drying it, by rubbing with a brush
smeared with red chalk and plumbago.
The copper may also be moistened with
a dilute solution of chloride of platina
and warmed slightly, or still by plunging
it in a warm solution of the hydrochlo-
rate of antimony. For the verde an-
tique a solution is recommended com-
posed of 200 grams of acetic acid of 8°
strength, the same quantity of common
vinegar, 30 parts, by weight, of car-
bonate of ammonia; 10 parts, by weight,
of sea salt; with the same quantities of
cream of tartar and acetate of copper
and a little water. To obtain the
bronze of medals several processes afford
a selection: For example, the piece may
be dipped in a bath consisting of equal
parts of the perchloride and the sesquia-
zotate of iron, warming to the evapora-
tion of the liquid, and rubbing with a
waxed brush.
II. — Dissolve copper nitrate, 10 parts,
by weight, and kitchen salt, 2 parts, in
500 parts of water and add a solution of
ammonium acetate obtained by neu-
tralization of 10 parts of officinal spirit of
sal ammoniac with acetic acid to a faintly
acid reaction, and filling up with water
to 500 parts. Immerse the bronze, allow
to dry, brush off superficially and repeat
this until the desired shade of color has
been obtained.
PLATING
585
A Permanent Patina for Copper. —
Green. —
I. — Sodium chloride. 37 parts
Ammonia water. . 75 parts
Ammonium chlo-
ride 37 parts
Strong wine vin-
egar 5,000 parts
Mix and dissolve. Apply to object to
be treated, with a camel's-hair pencil.
Repeat the operation until the desired
shade of green is reached.
Yellow Green.- —
II. — Oxalic acid 5 parts
Ammonium chlo-
ride 10 parts
Acetic acid, 30 per
cent dilution. . . . 500 parts
Mix and dissolve. Use as above in-
dicated. The following will produce
the same result:
III. — Potassium oxalate,
acid 4 parts
Ammonium chlo-
ride ..16-17 parts
Vinegar contain-
ing 6 per cent of
acetic acid 1,000 parts
IV. — Bluish Green. — After using the
first formula (for green) pencil over with
the following solution:
Ammonium chlo-
ride 40 parts
Ammonium car-
bonate 120 parts
Water 1,000 parts
Mix and dissolve.
Greenish Brown. —
V. — Potassium s u 1 -
phuret 5 parts
Water 1,000 parts
Mix and dissolve. With this, pencil
over object to be treated, let dry, then
pencil over with 10 parts a mixture of a
saturated solution of ammonia water and
acetic acid and 5 parts of ammonium
chloride thinned with 1,000 parts of
water. Let dry again, then brush off
well. Repeat, if necessary, until the
desired hue is attained.
Another Blue Green. —
VI. — Corrosive sublimate. 25 parts
Potassium nitrate.. 86 parts
Borax 56 parts
Zinc oxide 113 parts
Copper acetate . . .220-225 parts
Mix and heat together on the surface
of the object under treatment.
VII. — Brown. — The following is a
Parisian method of producing a beau-
tiful deep brown:
Potassium oxalate,
acid 3 parts
Ammonium chlo-
ride 15 parts
Water, distilled. ... 280 parts
Mix and dissolve. The object is pen ,
ciled over with this several times, each
time allowing the solution to dry be-
fore putting on any more. The process
is slow, but makes an elegant finish.
Green Patina Upon Copper. — To pro-
duce a green patina upon copper take
tartaric acid, dilute it half and half with
boiling water; coat the copper with this;
allow to dry for one day and rub the ap-
plied layer off again the next day with
oakum. The coating must be done in
dry weather, else no success will be ob-
tained. Take hydrochloric acid and
dilute it half and half with boiling water,
but the hydrochloric acid should be
poured in the water, not vice-versa,
which is dangerous. In this hydro-
chloric acid water dissolve as much zinc
as it can solve and allow to settle. The
clear liquid is again diluted half with
boiling water and the copper is coated
with tnis a few times.
Black Patina. — Black patina is ob-
tained by coating with tallow the pieces
to be oxidized and lighting with a rosin
torch. Finally, wipe the reliefs and let
dry.
Blue -Black Patina. — Use a dilute so-
lution of chloride of antimony in water
and add a little free hydrochloric acid.
Apply with a soft brush, allow the article
to dry and rub with a flannel. If ex-
pense is no object, employ a solution of
chloride of palladium, which gives a
magnificent blue black. It is necessary,
however, to previously clean the articles
thoroughly in a hot solution of carbon-
ate of soda, in order to remove the dirt
and greasy matter, which would prevent
the patina from becoming fixed.
Red Patina. — The following is a new
method of making a red patina, the so-
called blood bronze, on copper and
copper alloys. The metallic object is
first made red hot, whereby it becomes
covered with a coating consisting of
cupric oxide on the surface and cuprous
oxide beneath. After cooling, it is
worked upon with a polishing plate until
the black cupric oxide coating is removed
and the cuprous oxide appears. The
metal now shows an intense red color,
586
PLATING
with a considerable degree of luster, both
of which are so permanent that it can be
treated with chemicals, such as blue
vitriol, for instance, without being in the
least affected.
If it is desired to produce a marbled
surface, instead of an even red color,
borax or some chemical having a similar
action is sprinkled upon the metal during
the process of heating. On the places
covered by the borax, oxidation is pre-
vented, and after polishing, spots of the
original metallic color will appear in the
red surface. These can be colored by
well-known processes, so as to give the
desired marbled appearance.
PLATINIZING:
Platinizing Aluminum. — Aluminum
vessels coated with a layer of platinum
are recommended in place of platinum
vessels, when not exposed to very high
temperatures. The process of platin-
izing is simple, consisting in rubbing the
aluminum surface, previously polished,
with platinic chloride, rendered slightly
alkaline. The layer of platinum is made
thicker by repeated application. Potash
lye is carefully addea to a solution of
5 to 10 per cent of platinic chloride in
water till a slightly alkaline reaction is
produced on filtering paper or a porce-
lain plate by means of pnenolphthalein.
This solution must always be freshly
prepared, and is the best for the purpose.
Neither galvanizing nor amalgamating
will produce the desired result. Special
care must be taken that the aluminum
is free from iron, otherwise black patches
will arise which cannot be removed.
Vessels platinized in this way must not
be cleaned with substances such as sea-
sand, but with a 5 to 10 per cent solution
of oxalic acid in water, followed by thor-
ough rinsing in water. These vessles
are said to be specially suitable for evap-
orating purposes.
Platinizing Copper and Brass. — I. — The
articles are coated with a thin layer of
platinum in a boiling solution of platinum
sal ammoniac, 1 part; sal ammoniac, 8
parts; and water, 40 parts, and next pol-
ished with chalk. A mixture of equal
parts of platinum sal ammoniac and tar-
tar may also be rubbed on the objects.
Steel and iron articles can be platinized
with an ethereal solution of platinic
chloride. For small jewelry the boiling
solution of platinic chloride, 10 parts;
cooking salt, 200 parts; and water, 1,000
parts, is employed, which is rendered alka-
line with soda lye. In this, one may
also work with zinc contact.
II. — Heat 800 parts of sal ammoniac
and 10 parts of platinum sal ammoniac
to the boiling point with 400 parts of
water, in a porcelain dish, and place the
articles to be platinized into this, where-
by they soon become covered with a
coating of platinum. They are then re-
moved from the liquid, dried and pol-
ished with whiting.
Platinizing on Glass or Porcelain. —
First dissolve the platinum at a moder-
ate temperature in aqua regia, and next
evaporate the solution to dryness, ob-
serving the following rules: When the
solution commences to turn thick it is
necessary to diminish the fire, while
carrying the evaporation so far that the
salt becomes dry, but the solution should
not be allowed to acquire a brown color,
which occurs if the heat is too strong.
The result of this first operation is
chloride of platina. When the latter
has cooled off it should be dissolved in
alcohol (95 per cent). The dissolution
accomplished, which takes place at the
end of 1 or 2 hours, throw the solution
gradually into four times its weight of
essence of lavender, then put into a well-
closed flask.
For use, dip a brush into the solution
and apply it upon the objects to be plat-
inized, let dry and place in the muffle,
leaving them in the oven for about one-
half hour. In this operation one should
be guided as regards the duration of
the baking by the hardness or fusibility
of the objects treated. The platiniza-
tion accomplished, take a cotton cloth,
dipped into whiting in the state of pulp,
and rub the platinated articles with this,
rinsing with water afterwards.
Platinizing Metals. — Following are
several processes of platinizing on met-
als:
It is understood that the metals to be
covered with platinum must be copper
or coppered. All these baths require
strong batteries.
I. — Take borate of potash, 300 parts,
by weight; chloride of platina, 12 parts;
distilled water, 1,000 parts.
II. — Carbonate of soda, 250 parts, by
weight; chloride of platina, 10 parts; dis-
tilled water, 1,000 parts.
III. — Sulphocyanide of potash, 12
parts, by weight; chloride of platina, 12
parts; carbonate of soda, 12 parts; dis-
tilled water, 1,000 parts.
IV. — Borate of soda, 500 parts, by
weight; chloride of platina, 12 parts; dis-
tilled water, 1,000 parts.
PLATING
587
SILVERING, SILVER-PLATING, AND
DESILVERING:
See also Silvering by Oxidation, under
Oxidation Processes, under Plating.
Antique Silver — There are various
processes for producing antique silver,
either fat or oxidized:
To a little copal varnish add some
finely powdered ivory black or graphite.
Thin with spirits of turpentine and rub
with a brush dipped into this varnish
the objects to be treated. Allow to dry
for an hour and wipe off the top of the
articles with some rag, so that the black
remains only in the hollows. If a softer
tint is desired, apply again with a dry
brush and wipe as the first time. The
coating of black will be weaker and the
shade handsomer.
Britannia Silver -Plating. — I. — The
article should first be cleaned and then
rubbed by means of a wet cloth with a
pinch of powder obtained by mixing to-
gether: Nitrate of silver, 1 part; cyanide
of potassium, 2 parts; chalk, 5 parts.
Then wipe with a dry cloth, and polish
well with rouge to give brilliancy.
II. — By the electric method the metal
is simply plunged into a hot saturated
solution of crude potassium carbonate,
and the plating is then done directly,
using a strong electrical current. The
potassium carbonate solution dissolves
the surface of the britannia metal and
thus enables the silver to take a strong
hold on the article.
To Silver Brass, Bronze, Copper, etc.
— I. — In order to silver copper, brass,
bronze, or coppered metallic articles,
dissolve 10 parts of lunar caustic in 500
parts of distilled water, and 35 parts of
potassium cyanide (98 per cent) in 500
parts of distilled water; mix both solu-
tions with stirring, heat to 176° to 194°
F. in an enameled vessel, and enter the
articles, well cleansed of fat and impuri-
ties, until a uniform coating has formed.
II. — Zinc, brass, and copper are sil-
vered by applying a paste of the follow-
ing composition: Ten parts of silver
nitrate dissolved in 50 parts of distilled
water, and 25 parts of potassium cya-
nide dissolved m distilled water; mix,
stir, and filter. Moisten 100 parts of
whiting and 400 parts of powdered tartar
with enough of the above solution to
make a paste-like mass, which is applied
by means of a brush on the well-cleaned
objects. After the drying of this coat-
ing, rinse off, and dry in sawdust.
III. — To silver brass and copper by
friction, rub on the articles, previously
cleaned of grease, a paste of silver
chloride, 10 parts; cooking salt, 20 parts;
powdered tartar, 20 parts; and the nec-
essary water, using a rag.
Desilvering. — I.— It often happens in
plating that, notwithstanding all pre-
cautions, some pieces have failed and it
is necessary to commence the work
again. For removing the silver that has
been applied, a rapid method is to take
sulphuric acid, 100 parts, and nitrate of
potash, 10 parts. Put the sulphuric
acid and the nitrate of potash (saltpeter)
in a vessel of stoneware or porcelain,
heated on the water bath. When the
silver has been removed from the cop-
per, rinse the object several times and
recommence the silvering. This bath
may be used repeatedly, taking care each
time to put it in a stoppered bottle.
When it has been saturated with silver
and has no more strength, decant the
deposit, boil the liquor to dryness, add
the residue to the deposit, and melt in a
crucible to regenerate the metal.
II. — To dissolve the silver covering of
a metallic object, a bath is made use of,
composed of 66 per cent sulphuric acid,
3 parts, and 40 per cent nitric acid, 1
part. This mixture is heated to about
176° F., and the objects to be desilvered
are suspended in it by means of a copper
wire. The operation is accomplished in
a few seconds. The objects are washed
and then dried in sawdust.
To Silver Glass Balls and Plate Glass.
— The following is a method for silvering
the glass balls which are used as orna-
ments in gardens, glass panes, and con-
cave mirrors: Dissolve 300 parts of
nitrate of silver and 200 parts of am-
monia in 1,300 parts of distilled water.
Add 35 parts of tartaric acid dissolved in
4 times its weight of water. Dilute
the whole with 15,000 to 17,000 parts of
distilled water. Prepare a second solu-
tion containing twice the amount of
tartaric acid as the preceding one. Ap-
ply each of these solutions successively
for 15 to 20 minutes on the glass to be
silvered, which must previously have
been cleaned and dried. When the sil-
vering is sufficient, wash the object with
hot water, let dry, and cover with a
brown varnish.
Iron Silver -Plating. — I. — Iron articles
are plated with quicksilver in a solution
of nitrate of mercury before being sil-
vered. The quicksilver is then removed
by heating to 572° F. The articles may
also be first tinned to economize the
silver. Steel is dipped in a mixture of
588
PLATING
nitrate of silver and mercury, each dis-
solved separately in the proportion of 5
parts, by weight, to 300 parts, by weight,
of water, then wiped to remove the black
film of carbon, and silvered till a sample
dipped in a solution of blue vitriol ceases
to turn red. According to H. Krupp,
articles made of an alloy of nickel, cop-
per, and zinc, such as knives, forks,
spoons, etc., should be coated electric-
ally with nickel, put into a solution of
copper like that used for galvanic cop-
pering, and then electroplated.
II. — A brilliant silver color may be
imparted to iron (from which all grease
has been previously removed) by treat-
ing it with the following solution: Forty
parts, by weight, chloride of antimony;
10 parts, by weight, powdered arsenious
acid; and 80 parts levigated hematite
are mixed with 1,000 parts of 90 per
cent alcohol and gently heated for half
an hour on a water bath. A partial so-
lution takes place, and a small cotton pad
is then dipped in the liquid and applied
with a gentle pressure to the iron. A
thin film consisting of arsenic and an-
timony is precipitated, as described by
Dr. Langbein, in his "Handbuch der
galv. Metallniederschlage." The bril-
ancy of the effect depends upon the
care with which the iron has previously
been polished.
To Silver-Plate Metals. — I. — Nitrate
of silver, 30 parts, by weight; caustic
potash, 30 parts; distilled water, 100 parts.
Put the nitrate of silver into the water;
one-quarter hour afterwards add the pot-
ash, and, when the solution is done, fil-
ter. It is sufficient to dip the objects to
be silvered into this bath, moving them
about in it for 1 or 2 minutes at most;
then rinsing and drying in sawdust. It
is necessary to pickle the pieces before
using the bath. To make the nitrate of
silver one's self, take 30 parts of pure
silver and 60 parts of nitric acid, and
when the metal is dissolved add the
caustic potash and the water.
II. — Kayser's silvering liquid, which
is excellent for all kinds of metals, is
prepared from lunar caustic, 11 parts;
sodium hyposulphite, 20 parts; sal am-
moniac, 12 parts; whiting, 20 parts; and
distilled water, 200 parts. The articles
must be cleaned well.
Mosaic Silver. — This compound con-
sists of tin, 3 parts, by weight; bismuth,
3 parts; and mercury, 1£ parts. The
alloy of these metals is powdered finely,
thus forming a silvery mass used for
imitation silvering of metals, paper,
wood, etc. In order to impart to metals,
especially articles of copper and brass, au
appearance similar to silver, they are
made perfectly bright. The powder of
the mosaic silver is mixed witn six times
the volume of bone ashes, adding enough
water to cause a paste and rubbing this
on the metallic surface by means of a
cork of suitable shape. In order to
silver paper by means of this preparation
it is ground with white of egg, diluted
mucilage, or varnish, and treated like a
paint.
Pastes for Silvering. — I. — Carbonate
of lime, 65 parts; sea salt, 60 parts;
cream of tartar, 35 parts; nitrate of
silver, 20 parts. Bray all in a mortar,
not adding the carbonate of lime until
the other substances are reduced to a
fine powder. Next, add a little water to
form a homogeneous paste, which is
preserved in blue bottles away from the
fight. For use, put a little of this paste
on a small pad and rub the article with it.
II. — Articles of zinc, brass, or copper
may also be silver-plated by applying to
them a pasty mass of the following
composition: First dissolve 10 parts, by
weight, of nitrate of silver in 50 parts, by
weight, of distilled water; also 25 parts,
by weight, of potassium cyanide in suffi-
cient distilled water to dissolve it. Pour
the two together, stir well, and filter.
Now 100 parts, by weight, of whiting or
levigated chalk and 400 parts, by weight,
of potassium bitartrate, finely powdered,
are moistened with the above solution
sufficiently to form a soft paste, which
may be applied to the objects, previously
well cleansed, with a brush. After this
coating has dried well, rinse it off, and
dry the object in clean sawdust.
Resilvering. — I. — Take 100 parts, by
weight, of distilled water and divide it
into two equal portions. In the one dis-
solve 10 parts of silver nitrate and in the
other 25 parts of potassium cyanide.
The two solutions are reunited in a single
vessel as soon as completed. Next pre-
pare a mixture of 100 parts of Spanish
white, passed through a fine sieve, 10
parts of cream of tartar, pulverized, and
1 part of mercury. This powder is
stirred in a portion of the above liquid
so as to form a rather thick paste. The
composition is applied by means of the
finger, covered with a rag, on the object
to be silvered. The application must be
as even as possible. Let the object dry
.and wash in pure water. The excess of
powder is removed with a brush.
II. — The following is a process used
when the jeweler has to repair certain
pieces from which silvering has come off
PLATING
589
in places, and which he would like to
repair without having recourse to the
battery, and specially without having to
take out the stones or pearls: Take
nitrate of silver, 25 parts, by weight;
cyanide of potassium, 50 parts; cream of
tartar, 20 parts; Paris white, 200 parts;
distilled water, 200 parts; mercury, 2 parts.
Dissolve the nitrate of silver in half of
the distilled water and the cyanide in
the other half; mix the two liquids; next
bray well in a mortar the mercury, Paris
white, and cream of tartar. Preserve
the products of these two operations
separately, and when you wish to use
them make a rather soft paste of the two,
which apply with a little cotton or a
brush on the portion to be silvered. Let
dry and subsequently rub with a soft
brush.
Tin Silver-Plating. — 'Prepare a solu-
tion of 3 parts, by weight, of bismuth
subnitrate in 10 parts of nitric acid of
1.4 specific gravity, to which add a solu-
tion of 10 parts of tartar and 40 parts of
hydrochloric acid in 1,000 parts of water.
In the mixture of these solutions im-
merse the tin articles freed from grease
and oxide. The pulverous bismuth
precipitated on the surface is rubbed off,
whereupon the objects appear dark steel
gray. For silvering prepare a mixture
of 10 parts of silver chloride; 30 parts of
cooking salt; 20 parts of tartar, and 100
parts of powdered chalk, which is rubbed
in a slightly moist state on the bismuth
surface of the tin articles, using a flannel
rag. The silver separates only in a
very thin layer, and must be protected
against power and light before tarnish-
ing by a coating of preservative or cel-
luloid varnish.
Zinc Contact Silver-Plating. — Accord-
ing to Buchner, 10 parts, by weight, of
silver nitrate is dissolved in water and
precipitated by the addition of hydro-
chloric acid in the form of silver chloride,
which is washed several times in clean
water; now dissolve 70 parts, by weight,
of spirit of sal ammoniac in water, and
add to it 40 parts, by weight, of soda crys-
tals, 40 parts, by weight, of pure potas-
sium cyanide, and 15 parts, by weight, of
common salt. Now thin down the
compound with sufficient distilled water
to make a total of 1,000 parts.
Tin Plating of Lead. — Lead plates are
best tinned by plating. For this purpose
a table with a perfectly even iron surface
and provided with vertical raised edges
to prevent the melted metal from flowing
away, is employed. The lead is poured
on this table, and covered with grease to
prevent oxidation of the surface. As
soon as the lead is congealed, melted tin
is poured over it, care being taken that
the tin is sufficiently heated to remelt the
surface of the lead and combine thorough-
ly with it. When the plate is sufficiently
cooled, it is turned over, and the lower
surface treated in the same way. The
plate, thus tinned on both sides, is then
placed between rollers, and can be rolled
into very thin sheets without injury to
the tin coating. These sheets, doubly
coated with tin by this process, are spe-
cially adapted for lining cases intended
for the transport of biscuits, chocolate,
candies, tea, snuff, etc. If lead plates
are only to be tinned superficially, they
are heated to a tolerably high tempera-
ture, and sprinkled with powdered rosin;
melted tin is then rubbed on the surface
of the plate with a ball of tow. It is
advisable to give the lead a fairly thick
coating of tin, as the latter is rendered
thinner by the subsequent rolling.
VARIOUS RECIPES:
To Ascertain whether an Article is
Nickeled, Tinned, or Silvered.— -When
necessary to ascertain quickly and accur-
ately the nature of the white metal cover-
ing an object, the following process will
be found to give excellent results:
Nickeled Surface. — If the article has a
nickel coating, a drop of hydrochloric
acid, deposited on a spot clean and free
from grease, will quickly develop a green-
ish tint. If the object is kept for 5 or 10
minutes in a solution composed of 60
parts of sea salt and 110 parts of water,
it will receive a very characteristic red-
dish tint. A drop of sulphuret of so-
dium does not change a nickeled surface.
Tinned Surface. — A tinned object may
be recognized readily by applying hydro-
chloric acid, which, even diluted, will
remove the tin. The salt solution, used
as previously described, produces a gray
tint, faint in certain cases. The sul-
phuret of sodium dissolves tin.
Silvered Surface. — In the case of a sil-
vered article a drop of nitric acid will
remove the silver, while hydrochloric
acid will scarcely attack it. The salt
solution will produce no effect. The
sulphuret of sodium will blacken it
rapidly.
PLATINIZING:
See Plating.
PLATINOTYPE PAPER:
See Photography.
590
PLATINUM PAPERS— POLISHES
PLATINUM PAPERS AND THEIR DE-
VELOPMENT:
See Photography, under Developing
Papers.
PLATINUM WASTE, TO SEPARATE
SILVER FROM:
See Silver.
PLUMBAGO:
See Lubricants.
PLUMES:
See Feathers.
PLUSH :
To Make Plush Adhere to Metal. —
Wash off with ordinary soda water the
bottom of a tin box, wiping it dry with
cloth. Coat the tin with the juice of
onion and press on this space a piece of
strong paper, smoothing it out so that
there will be no blisters. When this has
dried, the paper will adhere, so that it
can be removed only by scraping with a
sharp instrument. Then give a coat of
hot glue to the paper and press the plush
down into the glue, and when dry and
hard, the plush can be removed only by
placing the tin box in boiling water.
PLUSH, TO REMOVE GREASE SPOTS
FROM:
See Cleaning Preparations and Meth-
ods.
POISONS, ANTIDOTES FOR:
See Antidotes.
Polishes
Polishes for Aluminum. — I. — M.
Mouray recommends the use of an emul-
sion of equal parts of rum and olive oil,
made by shaking these liquids together
in a bottle. When a burnishing stone is
used, the peculiar black streaks first
appearing should not cause vexation,
since they do not injure the metal in the
least, and may be removed with a woolen
rag. The object in question may also
be brightened in potash lye, in which
case, however, care must be taken not to
have the lye too strong. For cleaning
purposes benzol has been found best.
II. — Aluminum is susceptible of tak-
ing a beautiful polish, but it is not white
like that of silver or nickel, rather
slightly bluish, like tin. The shade can
be improved. First, the grease is to be
removed from the object with pumice
stone. Then, for polishing, use is made
of an emery paste mingled with tallow,
forming cakes which are rubbed on the
polishing brushes. Finally, rouge pow-
der is employed with oil of turpentine.
Polishes for Bars, Counters, etc.
I. — Linseed oil 8 ounces
Stale ale. .......... 8 ounces
Hydrochloric acid . . 1 ounce
Alcohol, 95 per cent. 1 ounce
White of 1 egg.
Mix. Shake before using. Clean
out the dust, dirt, etc., using an appro-
priate brush, or a bit of cloth wrapped
around a stick, then apply the above,
with a soft brush, or a bit of cotton
wrapped in a bit of silk — or, in fact, any
convenient method, of applying it.
II. — Japan wax 1 av. ounce
Oil of turpentine 3 fluidounces
Linseed oil 16 fluidounces
Alcohol 3 fluidounces
Solution of pot-
ash 1| fluidounces
Water to make 32 fluidounces.
Dissolve the wax in the turpentine,
add the other ingredients, diluting the
potash solution with the water before
adding to the other ingredients, and stir
briskly until well mixed.
POLISHES FOR BRASS, BRONZE,
COPPER, ETC.
Objects of polished copper, bronze,
brass, and other alloys of copper tarnish
through water and it is sometimes neces-
sary to give them again their bright ap-
pearance. Pickle the articles in an acid
bath; wash them next in a neutral bath;
dry them, and subsequently rub them
with a polishing powder. Such is the
general formula; the processes indicated
below are but variants adapted to divers
cases and recommended by disinterested
experimenters:
Sharp Polishes. — The following three
may be usec^ on dirty brasses, copper
articles, etc., where scratching is not ob-
jectionable:
I. — Quartz sand, pow-
dered and levigat-
ed 20 parts
Paris red 30 parts
Vaseline 50 parts
Mix intimately and make a pomade.
II. — Emery flour, finest
levigated 50 parts
Paris red 50 parts
Mutton suet 40 parts
Oleic acid 40 parts
III. — Levigated emery
powder 100 parts
Anhydrous sodium
carbonate 5 parts
Tallow soap 20 parts
Water 100 parts
POLISHES
591
Copper Articles. — Make a mixture of
powdered charcoal, very fine, 4 parts;
spirit of wine, 3 parts; and essence of
turpentine, 2 parts. To this add water
in which one-third of its weight of sorrel
salt or oxalic acid has been stirred, and
rub the objects with this mixture.
Bronze Articles. — Boil the objects in
soap lye, wash in plenty of water, and
dry in sawdust.
Highly Oxidized Bronzes. — First dip
in strong soda lye, then in a bath con-
taining 1 part of sulphuric acid to 12
parts of water. Rinse in clean water,
and next in water containing a little am-
monia. Dry and rub with a polishing
powder or paste.
POLISHES FOR FLOORS.
I. — Throw a handful of permanganate
potash crystals into a pail of boiling
water, and apply the mixture as hot as
possible to tne floor with a large flat
brush. If the stain produced is not
dark enough, apply one or two more
coats as desired, leaving each wash to
dry thoroughly before applying another.
If it is desired to polish the surface with
beeswax, a coat of size should be applied
to the boards before staining, as this
gives depth and richness to the color.
After 3 or 4 days, polish well with a mix-
ture of turpentine and beeswax. A few
cents will cover the cost of both size and
permanganate of potash.
II. — Potash 1 part
Water 4 parts
Yellow beeswax .... 5 parts
Hot water, a sufficient quantity.
Emulsify the wax by boiling it in the
water in which the potash has been dis-
solved; stir the whole time. The exact
amount of boiling is determined by the
absence of any free water in the mass.
Then remove the vessel from the fire,
and gently pour in a little boiling water,
and stir the mixture carefully. If a fat-
like mass appears without traces of
watery particles, one may know the mass
is in a fit condition to be liquefied by the
addition of more hot water without the
water separating. Then put in the water
to the extent of 200 to 225 parts, and
reheat the compound for 5 to 10 minutes,
without allowing it to reach the boiling
point. Stir constantly until the mixture
is cool, so as to prevent the separation of
the wax, when a cream-like mass results
which gives a o^uick and brilliant polish
on woodwork, u applied in the usual way,
on a piece of flannel rag, and polished
by rubbing with another piece of flannel.
Colored Floor Polishes. — Yellow : Caus-
tic soda solution, 7% parts, mixed with 1|
to 2 parts of finely powdered ocher, heated
with 2£ parts of yellow wax, and stirred
until uniformly mixed. A reddish-brown
color may be obtained by adding 2 parts
of powdered umber to the above mixture.
Nut Brown. — I. — Natural umber, £
part; burnt umber, 1 part; and yellow
ocher, 1 part, gives a fine red-brown
color when incorporated with the same
wax and soda mixture.
II. — Treat 5 pounds of wax with 15
pounds of caustic soda lye of 3° Be. so
that a uniform wax milk results; boil
with £ pound of annatto, 3 pounds of
yellow ocher, and 2 pounds of burnt
umber.
Mahogany Brown. — Boil 5 pounds of
wax with 15 pounds of caustic soda lye
as above. Then add 7 pounds of burnt
umber very finely powdered, making it
into a uniform mass by boiling again.
Yellow pcher. — The wax milk obtained
as above is boiled with 5 pounds of yel-
low ocher.
The mass on cooling has the consist-
ency of a salve. If it is to be used for
rubbing the floor it is stirred with suf-
ficient boiling water so as to form a
fluid of the consistency of thin syrup or
oil. This is applied very thin on the
floor, using a brush; then it is allowed
to dry only half way, and is rubbed with
a stiff floor brush. The polishing is
continued with a woolen rag until a
mirror-like gloss is obtained. It is best
not to paint the whole room and then
brush, but the deals should be taken one
after the other, otherwise the coating
would become too dry and give too dull a
luster. The floors thus treated with
gloss paste are very beautiful. To keep
them in this condition they should be
once in a while rubbed with a woolen
rag, and if necessary the color has to be
renewed in places. If there are parquet
floors whose patterns are not to be cov-
ered up, the ocher (yellow) paste or,
better still, the pure wax milk is used.
French Polish. — The wood to be pol-
ished must be made perfectly smooth and
all irregularities removed from the surface
with glass paper; next oil the work with
linseed oil, taking care to rub off all super-
fluous oil. (If the wood is white no oil
should be used, as it imparts a slight color.)
Then prepare a wad or rubber of wadding,
taking care there are no hard lumps in it.
After the rubber is prepared pour on it a
small quantity of polish. Then cover it
with a piece of old cotton rag (new will
592
POLISHES
not answer). Put a small drop of oil
with the finger on the surface of the rub-
ber, and then proceed to polish, moving
the rubber in lines, making a kind of fig-
ure of eight over the work. Be very
careful that the rubber is not allowed to
stick or the work will be spoilt. A little
linseed oil facilitates the process. When
the rubber requires more polish, turn
back the rag cover, pour on the polish,
replace the cover, oil and work as before.
After this rubbing has proceeded for a
little time and the whole surface has been
gone over, the work must be allowed to
stand for a few hours to harden, and
then be rubbed down smooth with very
fine emery paper. Then give another
coat of polish. If not smooth enough,
emery paper again. This process must
continue until tne grain is filled up. Fin-
ish off with a clean rubber with only
spirit on it (no polish), when a clear
bright surface should be the result.
Great care must be taken not to put the
polish on too freely, or you will get a
rough surface. After a little practice
all difficulties will vanish. The best
French polish will be found to be one
made only from good pale orange shel-
lac and spirit, using 3 pounds of shellac
for each gallon of spirit. The latter
should be of 63 to 64° over-proof. A
weak spirit is not suitable and does not
make a good polish. A few drops of
pure linseed oil make the polish work
more freely.
POLISHES FOR FURNITURE.
First make a paste to fill cracks as fol-
lows: Whiting, plaster of Paris, pumice
stone, litharge, equal parts; japan dryer,
boiled linseed oil, turpentine, coloring
matter of sufficient quantity. Rub the
solids intimately with a mixture of 1 part
of the japan, 2 parts of the linseed oil,
and 3 parts of turpentine, coloring to
suit with Vandyke brown or sienna.
Lay the filling on with a brush, let it set
for about 20 minutes, and then rub off
clean except where it is to remain. In
2 or 3 days it will be hard enough to
polish.
After the surface has been thus pre-
pared, the application of a coat of first-
class copal varnish is in order. It is
recommended that the varnish be ap-
plied in a moderately warm room, as it
is injured by becoming chilled in drying.
To get the best results in varnisning,
some skill and experience are required.
The varnish must be kept in an evenly
warm temperature, and put on neither
too plentifully nor too gingerly.
After a satisfactorily smooth and reg-
ular surface has been obtained, the
polishing proper may be done. This
may be acconplished by manual labor
and dexterity, or consist in the applica-
tion of a very thin, even coat of a very
fine, transparent varnish.
If the hand-polishing method be
E referred, it may be pursued by rubbing
riskly and thoroughly with the follow-
ing finishing polish:
I. — Alcohol 8 ounces
Shellac 2 drachms
Gum benzoin 2 drachms
Best poppy oil 2 drachms
Dissolve the shellac and gum in the
alcohol in a warm place, with frequent
agitation, and, when cold, add the poppy
oil. This may be applied on the end of a
cylindrical rubber made by tightly rolling
a piece of flannel which has been torn, not
cut, into strips 4 to 6 inches wide.
A certain "oily sweating" of articles
of polished wood occurs which has been
ascribed to the oil used in polishing, but
has been found to be due to a waxy sub-
stance present in shellac, which is often
used in polishing. During the operation
of polishing, this wax enters into close
combination with the oil, forming a soft,
greasy mass, which prevents the varnish
from ever becoming really hard. This
greasy matter exudes in the course of time.
The remedy is to use only shellac from
which the vegetable wax has been com-
pletely removed. This is accomplished
by making a strong solution of the shellac
in alcohol and then shaking it up with
fresh seed lac or filtering it through seed
lac. In this way the readily soluble
rosins in the seed lac are dissolved, and
with them traces of coloring matter. At
the same time the vegetable wax, which
is only slightly soluble, is deposited. The
shellac solution which has exchanged its
vegetable wax for rosin is not yet suitable
for fine furniture polishing. It is not
sufficiently taken up by the wood, and
an essential oil must be added to give it
the necessary properties, one of the best
oils to employ for this purpose being
that of rosemary. The following recipe
is given:
II. — Twenty pounds of shellac and 4
pounds of benzoin are dissolved in the
smallest possible quantity of alcohol, to-
gether with 1 pound of rosemary oil. The
solution then obtained is filtered through
seed lac so as to remove whatever vegeta-
ble wax may be present.
Red Furniture Paste. —
Soft water 6 pints
Turpentine 6 pints
POLISHES
593
Beeswax 3 pounds
White wax 1J ounces
White soap 18 ounces
Red lead 12 ounces
Cut up soap and dissolve in water by
aid of heat; then evaporate to 6 pounds.
Melt the waxes and add turpentine in
which red lead has been stirred, pour into
this the soap solution, and stir until it is
nearly cold. If a darker color is wanted
add more red lead, 4 to 6 ounces.
Beechwood Furniture. — The wood of
the red beech is known to acquire, by the
use of ordinary shellac polish, a dirty
yellow color, and by the use of white
polish, prepared from bleached shellac,
an unsightly gray-white color. There-
fore, where light colors are desired, only
filtered shellac polish should be em-
ployed, and in order to impart some fire
to the naturally dull color of the beech-
wood the admixture of a solution of
dragon's blood in alcohol for a red shade,
or turmeric in alcohol for yellow may be
used. A compound of the red and yel-
low liquids gives a good orange shade.
A few trials will soon show how much
coloring matter may be added to the
polish.
Polishes for Glass. — I. — Mix calcined
magnesia with purified benzine to a semi-
liquid paste. Rub the glass with this
mixture by means of a cotton wad, until
it is bright.
II. — Crush to powder cologne chalk,
60 parts, by weight; tripoli, 30 parts, by
weight; bole, 15 parts, by weight. For
use moisten the glass a little, dip a linen
rag into the powder and rub the glass
until it is clean.
III. — Tin ashes may be employed
with advantage. The glass is rubbed
with this substance and then washed off
with a piece of soft felt. In this manner
a very handsome polish is obtained.
Polishes for Ivory, Bone, etc. — I. —
First rub with a piece of linen soaked
with a paste made of Armenian bole
and oleic acid. Wash with Marseilles
soap, dry, rub with a chamois skin, and
finally render it bright with an old piece
of silk. If the ivory is scratched, it may
be smoothed by means of English red
stuff on a cloth, or even with a piece of
flass if the scratches are rather deep,
n the hollow parts of ivory objects the
paste can be made to penetrate by means
of an old toothbrush.
II. — Tortoise-shell articles have a way
of getting dull and dingy looking. To
repolish dip the finger in linseed oil and
rub over the whole surface. Very little
oil should be used, and if the article is a
patterned one it may be necessary to use
a soft brush to get it into the crevices.
Then rub with the palm of the hand
until all oil has disappeared, and the
shell feels hot and looks bright and shiny.
Marble Polishing. — Polishing includes
five operations. Smoothing the rough-
ness left on the surface is done by rub-
bing the marble with a piece of moist
sandstone; for moldings either wooden
or iron mullers are used, crushed, and
wet sandstone, or sand, more or less fine,
according to the degree of polish re-
quired, being thrown under them. The
second process is continued rubbing with
pieces of pottery without enamel, which
have only been baked once, also wet. If
a brilliant polish is required, Gothland
stone instead of pottery is used, and
potter's clay or fuller's earth is placed
beneath the muller. This operation is
performed upon granites and porphyry
with emery and a lead muller, the upper
part of which is incrusted with the mix-
ture until reduced by friction to clay or
impalpable powder. As the polish de-
pends almost entirely upon these two
operations, care must be taken that they
are performed with a regular and steady
movement. When the marble has re-
ceived the first polish, the flaws, cavities,
and soft spots are sought out and filled
with mastic of a suitable color.
This mastic is usually composed of a
mixture of yellow wax, rosin, and Bur-
gundy pitch, mixed with a little sulphur
and plaster passed through a fine sieve,
which gives it the consistency of a thick
paste; to color this paste to a tone anal-
ogous to the ground tints or natural
cement of the material upon which it is
placed, lampblack and rouge, with a
little of the prevailing color of the ma-
terial, are added. For green and red
marbles, this mastic is sometimes made
of gum lac, mixed with Spanish sealing
wax of the color of the marble. It is
applied with pincers, and these parts
are polished with the rest. Sometimes
crushed fragments of marble are intro-
duced into the cement, but for fine mar-
bles the same colors are employed which
are used in painting, and which will
produce the same tone as the ground;
the gum lac is added to give it body and
brilliancy.
The third operation in polishing con-
sists in rubbing it again with a hard
pumice stone, under which water is
being constantly poured, unmixed with
sand. For the fourth process, called
594
POLISHES
softening the ground, lead filings are
mixed with the emery mud produced by
the polishing of mirrors or the working
of precious stones, and the marble is
rubbed by a compact linen cushion well
saturated with this mixture; rouge is also
used for this polish. For seme outside
works, and for hearths and paving tiles,
marble workers confine themselves to
this polish. When the marbles have
holes or grains, a lead muller is substi-
tuted for the linen cushion. In order to
give a perfect brilliancy to the polish, the
gloss is applied. Wash well the pre-
pared surfaces and leave them until per-
fectly dry, then take a linen cushion,
moistened only with water, and a little
powder of calcined tin of the first qual-
ity. After rubbing with this for some
time take another cushion of dry rags,
rub with it lightly, brush away any for-
eign substance which might scratch the
marble, and a perfect polish will be ob-
tained. A little alum mixed with the
water used penetrates the pores of the
marble, and gives it a speedier polish.
This polish spots very easily and is soon
tarnished and destroyed by dampness.
It is necessary when purchasing articles
of polished marbles to subject them to
the test of water; if there is too much
alum, the marble absorbs the water and
a whitish spot is left.
POLISHING POWDERS.
Polishing powders are advantageously
prepared according to the following re-
cipes:
I. — Four pounds magnesium carbon-
ate, 4 pounds chalk, and 4 pounds
rouge are intimately mixed.
II. — Four pounds magnesium carbon-
ate are mixed with J pound fine rouge.
III. — Five pounds fine levigated whit-
ing and 2 pounds Venetian red are
ground together.
IV. — Kieselguhr 42 pounds
Putty powder 14 pounds
Pipe clay 14 pounds
Tartaric acid 1 J pounds
Powder the acid, mix well with the
others. This is styled "free from mer-
cury, poisonous mineral acids, alkalies,
or grit." It may be tinted with 12
ounces of oxide of iron if desired.
Liquid Polishes. —
I. — Malt vinegar 4 gallons
Lemon juice 1 gallon
Para ffine oil 1 gallon
Kieselguhr 7 pounds
Powdered bath brick 3 pounds
Oil lemon 2 ounces
II. — Kieselguhr 56 pounds
Paraffine oil 3 gallons
Methylated spirit. . . 1£ gallons
Camphorated spirit . f gallon
Turpentine oil . . | gallon
Liquid ammonia
fort 3 pints
III. — Rotten stone 16 av. ounces
Paraffine 8 av. ounces
Kerosene (coal oil) 16 fluidounces
Oil of mirbane enough to per-
fume.
Melt the paraffine, incorporate the
rotten stone, add the kerosene, and the
oil of mirbane when cold.
IV. — Oxalic acid ^ av. ounce
Rotten stone 10 av. ounces
Kerosene (coal oil) 30 fluidounces
Paraffine 2 av. ounces
Pulverize the oxalic acid and mix it
with rotten stone; melt the paraffine, add
to it the kerosene, and incorporate the
powder; when cool, add oil of mirbane
or lavender to perfume.
Pour the ammonia into the oil, methy-
lated spirits, and turpentine, add the
camphorated spirit and mix with the
kieselguhr. To prevent setting, keep
well agitated during filling. The color
may be turned red by using a little ses-
quioxide of iron and less kieselguhr.
Apply with a cloth, and when dry use
another clean cloth or a brush.
Polishing Soaps. —
I. — Powdered pipe clay 112 pounds
Tallow soap 16 pounds
Tartaric acid 1£ pounds
Grind until pasty, afterwards press into
blocks by the machine.
II. — Levigated flint 60 pounds
Whiting 52 pounds
Tallow 20 pounds
Caustic soda 5 pounds
Water 2 gallons
Dissolve the soda in water and add to
the tallow; when saponified, stir in the
others, pressing as before.
III. — Saponified cocoanut
oil 56 pounds
Kieselguhr 12 pounds
Alum. 5£ pounds
Flake white 5J pounds
Tartaric acid If pounds
Make as before.
IV. — Tallow soap 98 pounds
Liquid glycerine
soap 14 pounds
Whiting 18 pounds
Levigated flint 14 pounds
Powdered pipe clay. 14 pounds
POLISHES
595
METAL POLISHES:
Polishing Pastes. —
I. — W h i t e petroleum
jelly 90 pounds
Kieselguhr 30 pounds
Refined paraffine
wax 10 pounds
Refined chalk or
whiting 10 pounds
Sodium hyposulphite 8 pounds
Melt wax and jelly, stir in others and
grind.
It is an undecided point as to whether
a scented paste is better than one with-
out perfume. The latter is added merely
to hide the nasty smell of some of the
greases used, and it is not very nice to
have spoons, etc., smelling, even tasting,
of mirbane, so perhaps citronelle is best
for this purpose. It is likely to be more
pure. The dose of scent is usually at
the rate of 4 ounces to the hundred-
weight.
II. — Dehydrated soda.. 5 parts
Curd soap 20 parts
Emery flour 100 parts
To be stirred together on a water bath
with water, 100 parts, until soft.
III. — Turpentine 1 part
Emery flour 1 part
Paris red 2 parts
Vaseline 2 parts
Mix well and perfume.
IV. — Stearine 8 to 9 parts
Mutton suet 32 to 38 parts
Stearine oil 2 to 2.5 parts
Melt together and mix with Vienna
chalk, in fine powder, 48 to 60 parts;
Paris red, 20 parts.
V. — Rotten stone 1 part
Iron subcarbonate. . 3 parts
Lard oil, a sufficient quantity.
VI. — Iron oxide 10 parts
Pumice stone 32 parts
Oleic acid, a sufficient quantity.
VII. — Soap, cut fine 16 parts
Precipitated chalk. . 2 parts
Jewelers' rouge. ... 1 part
Cream of tartar. ... 1 part
Magnesium carbon-
ate 1 part
Water, a sufficient quantity.
Dissolve the soap in the smallest
quantity of water over a water bath.
Add the other ingredients to the solu-
tion while still hot, stirring all the time
to make sure of complete homogeneity.
Pour the mass into a box with shallow
sides, and afterwards cut into cubes.
Non-Explosive Liquid Metal Polish. —
Although in a liquid form, it does not
necessarily follow that a liquid polish is
less economical than pastes, because the
efficiency of both is dependent upon the
amount of stearic or oleic acid they con-
tain, and a liquid such as that given be-
low is as rich in this respect as most of
the pastes, especially those containing
much mineral jelly and earthy matters
which are practically inert, and can only
be considered as filling material. Thus
it is a fact that an ounce of fluid polish
may possess more polishing potency than
an equal weight of the paste. Propor-
tions are: Sixteen pounds crude oleic acid;
4 pounds tasteless mineral oil; 5 pounds
kieselguhr; 1£ ounces lemon oil. Make
the earthy matter into a paste with the
mixed fluids and gradually thin out,
avoiding lumps. Apply with one rag,
and finish with another.
Miscellaneous Metal Polishes. — I. —
Articles of polished copper, such as clocks,
stove ornaments, etc., become tarnished
very quickly. To restore their-brilliancy
dip a brush in strong vinegar and brush
the objects to be cleaned. Next pass
through water and dry in sawdust. A
soap water, in which some carbonate of
soda has been dissolved, will do the same
service.
II. — This is recommended for ma-
chinery by the chemical laboratory of
the industrial museum of Batavia:
Oil of turpentine 15 parts
Oil of stearine 25 parts
Jewelers' red 25 parts
Animal charcoal, of
superior quality 45 parts
Alcohol is added to that mixture in
such a quantity as to render it almost
liquid, then by means of a brush it is put
on those parts that are to be polished.
When the alcohol has dried, the remain-
ing cover is rubbed with a mixture of
45 parts of animal charcoal and 25 parts
jewelers' red. The rubbed parts will
become quite clean and bright.
III. — The ugly spots which frequently
show themselves on nickel-plated ob-
jects may be easily removed with a mix-
ture of 1 part sulphuric acid and 50 parts
alcohol. Coat the spots with this solu-
tion, wipe off after a few seconds, rinse
off thoroughly with clean water, and rub
dry with sawdust.
IV. — Crocus, dried and powdered,
when applied with chamois leather to
nickel-plated goods, will restore their
brilliancy without injuring their surface.
V. — Articles of tin should be ground
596
POLISHES
and polished with Vienna lime or Span-
ish white. The former may be spread
on linen rags, the latter on wash leather.
Good results may be obtained by a
mixture of about equal parts of Vienna
lime, chalk, and tripoli. It should be
moistened with alcohol, and applied with
a brush. Subsequent rubbing with roe
skin (chamois) will produce a first-rate
polish. Tin being a soft metal, the
above polishing substances may be very
fine.
VI. — To polish watch cases, take two
glasses with large openings, preferably
two preserving jars with ground glass
covers. Into one of the glass vessels
pour 1 part of spirit of sal ammoniac
and 3 parts water, adding a little ordi-
nary barrel soap and stirring everything
well. Fill the other glass one half with
alcohol. Now lay the case to be cleaned,
with springs and all, into the first-named
liquid and allow to remain therein for
about 10 to 20 seconds. After pro-
tracted use this time may be extended
to several minutes. Now remove the
case, quickly brush it with water and
soap and lay for a moment into the alco-
hol in the second vessel. After drying
off with a clean cloth heat over a solder-
ing flame for quick drying and the case
will now look almost as clean and neat
as a new one. The only thing that may
occur is that a polished metal dome
may become tarnished, but this will only
happen if either the mixture is too strong
or the case remains in it too long, both
of which can be easily avoided with a
little practice. Shake before using.
VII. — This is a cleanser as well as
polisher:
Prepared chalk 2 parts
Water of ammonia 2 parts
Water sufficient to make. 8 parts
The ammonia saponifies the grease
usually present.
It must be pointed out that the alkali
present makes this preparation somewhat
undesirable to handle, as it will affect the
skin if allowed too free contact.
The density of the liquid might be
increased by the addition of soap; the
solid would, of course, then remain
longer in suspension.
VIII . — Serviettes Magiques. — These
fabrics for polishing articles of metal con-
sist of pure wool saturated with soap and
tripoli, and dyed with a little coralline.
They are produced by dissolving 4 parts
of Marseilles soap in 20 parts of water,
adding 2 parts of tripoli and saturating a
piece of cloth 3 inches long and 4 inches
wide with it, allowing to dry.
IX. — In order to easily produce a mat
polish on small steel articles use fine
powdered oil stone, ground with turpen-
tine.
Polishes for Pianos. —
I. — Alcohol, 95 per cent. . 300 parts
Benzol 700 parts
Gum benzoin 8 parts
Sandarac 16 parts
Mix and dissolve. Use as French
polish.
II. — Beeswax 2,500 parts
Potassium carbon-
ate 25 parts
Oil of turpentine. . . . 4,000 parts
Water, rain or dis-
tilled 4,500 parts
Dissolve the potassium carbonate in
1,500 parts of the water and in the solu-
tion boil the wax, shaved up, until the
latter is partially saponified, replacing
the water as it is driven off by evapora-
tion. When this occurs remove from the
fire and stir until cold. Now add the
turpentine little by little, and under con-
stant agitation, stirring until a smooth,
homogeneous emulsion is formed. When
this occurs add the remainder of the
water under constant stirring. If a
color is wanted use alkanet root, letting
it macerate in the oil of turpentine be-
fore using the latter (about an ounce to
the quart is sufficient). This prepara-
tion is said to be one of the best polishes
known. The directions are very simple:
First wash the surface to be polished,
rinse, and dry. Apply the paste as even-
ly and thinly as possible over a portion of
the surface, then rub off well with a soft
woolen cloth.
Polishes for Silverware. — The best pol-
ish for silverware — that is, the polish
that, while it cleans, does not too rapidly
abrade the surface — is levigated chalk,
either alone or with some vegetable acid,
like tartaric, or with alum. The usual
metal polishes, such as tripoli (diatomace-
ous earth), finely ground pumice stone,
etc., cut away the surface so rapidly that
a few cleanings wear through ordinary
plating.
I.— White lead 5 parts
Chalk, levigated. ... 20 parts
Magnesium carbon-
ate 2 parts
Aluminum oxide 5 parts
Silica 3 parts
Jewelers' rouge 2 parts
Each of the ingredients must be re-
duced to an impalpable powder, mixed
carefully, and sifted through silk several
POLISHES
597
times to secure a perfect mixture, and to
avoid any possibility of leaving in the
powder anything that might scratch the
silver or gold surface. This may be left
in the powder form, or incorporated
with soap, made into a paste with glycer-
ine, or other similar material. The ob-
jection to mixtures with vaseline or greasy
substances is that after cleaning the object
must be scrubbed with soap and water, while
with glycerine simple rinsing and running
water instantly cleans the object. The
following is also a good formula:
II. — Chalk, levigated 2 parts
Oil of turpentine. ... 4 parts
Stronger ammonia
water 4 parts
Water 10 parts
Mix the ammonia and oil of turpen-
tine by agitation, and rub up the chalk in
the mixture. Finally rub in the water
gradually or mix by agitation. Three
parts each of powdered tartaric acid and
chalk with 1 part of powdered alum
make a cheap and quick silver cleaning
powder.
III. — Mix 2 parts of beechwood ashes
with Tihy °f a part of Venetian soap and
2 parts of common salt in 8 parts of rain
water. Brush the silver with this, using
a pretty stiff brush. A solution of crys-
tallized permanganate of potash is often
recommended, or even the spirits of
hartshorn, for removing the grayish
violet film which forms upon the surface
of the silver. Finally, when there are
well-determined blemishes upon the
surface of the silver, they may be soaked
4 hours in soapmakers' lye, then cover
them with finely powdered gypsum
which has been previously moistened
with vinegar, drying well before a fire;
now rub them with something to remove
the powder. Finally, they are to be
rubbed again with very dry bran.
POLISHES FOR STEEL AND IRON.
The polishing of steel must always
be preceded by a thorough smoothing,
either with oilstone dust, fine emery, or
coarse rouge. If any lines are left to be
erased by means of fine rouge, the oper-
ation becomes tedious and is rarely suc-
cessful. The oilstone dust is applied on
an iron or copper polisher. When it is
desired to preserve the angles sharp, at
a shoulder, for instance, the polisher
should be of steel. When using dia-
mantine an iron polisher, drawn out and
flattened with a hammer, answers very
well. With fine rouge, a bronze or bell-
metal polisher is preferable for shoul-
ders; and for flat surfaces, discs or large
zinc or tin polishers, although glass is
preferable to either of these. After
each operation with oilstone dust, coarse
rouge, etc., the polisher, cork, etc., must
be changed, and the object should be
cleaned well, preferably by soaping,
perfect cleanliness being essential to
success. Fine rouge or diamantine
should be made into a thick paste with
oil; a little is then taken on the polisher
or glass and worked until quite dry. As
the object is thus not smeared over, a
black polish is more readily obtained,
and the process gets on better if the
surface be cleaned from time to time.
For Fine Steel. — Take equal parts
(by weight) of ferrous sulphate — green
vitriol — and sodium chloride — cooking
salt — mix both well together by grind-
ing in a mortar and subject the mix-
ture to red heat in a mortar or a dish.
Strong fumes will develop, and the mass
begin to flow. When no more fumes
arise, the vessel is removed from the
fire and allowed to cool. A brown
substance is obtained with shimmering
scales, resembling mica. The mass is
now treated with water, partly in order
to remove the soluble salt, partly in
order to wash out the lighter portions
of the non-crystallized oxide, which yield
an excellent polishing powder. The
fire must be neither too strong nor too
long continued, otherwise the powder
turns black and very hard, losing its
good qualities. The more distinct the
violet-brown color, the better is the
powder.
For polishing and cleaning fenders,
fireirons, horses' bits, and similar arti-
cles: Fifty-six pounds Bridgewater stone;
28 pounds flour emery; 20 pounds rotten
stone; 8 pounds whiting. Grind and
mix well.
To make iron take a bright polish like
steel, pulverize and dissolve in 1 quart of
hot water, 1 ounce of blue vitriol; 1
ounce of borax; 1 ounce of prussiate of
potash; 1 ounce of charcoal; £ pint of
salt, all of which is to be added to one
gallon of linseed oil and thoroughly mixed.
To apply, bring the iron or steel to the
proper heat and cool in the solution.
Stove Polish. — The following makes
an excellent graphite polish:
I. — Ceresine 12 parts
Japan wax 10 parts
Turpentine oil 100 parts
Lampblack, best.. . 12 parts
Graphite, levigated 10 parts
Melt the ceresine and wax together,
remove from the fire, and when half
598
POLISHES
cooled off add and stir in the graphite
and lampblack, previously mixed with
the turpentine.
II. — Ceresine 23 parts
Carnauba wax .... 5 parts
Turpentine oil 220 parts
Lampblack 300 parts
Graphite, finest
levigated 25 parts
Mix as above.
III. — Make a mixture of water glass
and lampblack of about the consistency
of thin syrup, and another of finely levi-
gated plumbago and mucilage of Soudan
gum (or other cheap substitute for gum
arabic), of a similar consistency. After
getting rid of dust, etc., go over the stove
with mixture No. I and let it dry on,
which it will do in about 24 hours. Now
go over the stove with the second mix-
ture, a portion of the surface at a time,
and as this dries, with an old blacking
brush give it a polish. If carefully done
the stove will have a polish resembling
closely that of new Russian iron. A va-
riant of this formula is as follows: Mix
the graphite with the water glass to a
smooth paste; add, for each pound of
paste, 1 ounce of glycerine and a few
grains of aniline black. Apply to the
stove with a stiff brush.
POLISHES FOR WOOD:
See also Polishes for Furniture, Floors
and Pianos.
In the usual method of French pol-
ishing, the pad must be applied along
curved lines, and with very slight pres-
sure, if the result is to be uniform. To
do this requires much practice and the
work is necessarily slow. Another dis-
advantage is that the oil is apt to sweat
out afterwards, necessitating further
treatment. According to a German
patent all difficulty can be avoided by
placing between the rubber and its cov-
ering a powder composed of clay or
loam, or better, the powder obtained by
grinding fragments of terra cotta or of
yellow pricks. The powder is mois-
tened with oil for use. The rubber will
then give a fine polish, without any
special delicacy of manipulation and
with mere backward and forward rub-
bing in straight lines, and the oil will not
sweat out subsequently. Another ad-
vantage is that no priming is wanted,
as the powder fills up the pores. The
presence of the powder also makes the
polish adhere more firmly to the wood.
Oak Wood Polish. — The wood is first
carefully smoothed, then painted with
the following rather thickly liquid mass,
using a brush, viz.: Mix H parts, by
weigm, of finely washed chalk (whiting),
^ part of dryer, and 1 part of boiled lin-
seed oil with benzine and tint (umber
with a little lampblack, burnt sienna).
After the applied mixture has become
dry, rub it down, polish with glass pow-
der, and once more coat with the same
mixture. After this filling and after
rubbing off with stickwood chips or
fine sea grass, one or two coats of shellac
are put on (white shellac with wood
alcohol for oak, brown shellac for cherry
and walnut). This coatmg is cut down
with sandpaper and given a coat of var-
nish, either polishing varnish, which is
polished off with the ball of the hand or
a soft brush, or with interior varnish,
which is rubbed down with oil and
pumice stone. This polish is glass hard,
transparent, of finer luster, and resistive.
Hard Wood Polish. — In finishing hard
wood with a wax polish the wood is first
coated with a "filler," which is omitted
in the case of soft wood. The filler is
made from some hard substance, very
finely ground; sand is used by some man-
ufactures.
The polish is the same as for soft
wood. The simplest method of apply-
ing wax is by a heated iron, scraping off
the surplus, and then rubbing with a
cloth. It is evident that this method is
especially laborious; and for that reason
solution of the wax is desirable. It may
be dissolved rather freely in turpentine
spirit, and is said to be soluble also in
kerosene oil.
The following recipes give varnish-like
polishes:
I. — Dissolve 15 parts of shellac and 15
parts of sandarac in 18C parts of spirit
of wine. Of this liquid put some on a
ball of cloth waste and cover with white
linen moistened with raw linseed oil.
The wood to be polished is rubbed with
this by the well-known circular motion.
When the wood has absorbed sufficient
polish, a little spirit of wine is added to
the polish, and the rubbing is continued.
The polished articles are said to sustain
no damage by water, nor show spots or
cracks.
II. — Orange shellac, 3 parts; sandarac,
1 part; dissolved in 30 parts of alcohol.
For mahogany add a little dragon's
blood.
III. — Fifteen parts of oil of turpen-
tine, dyed with anchusine, or undyed,
and 4 parts of scraped yellow wax are
stirred into a uniform mass by heating
on the water bath.
POLISHES
599
IV. — Melt 1 part of white wax on the
water bath, and add 8 parts of petro-
leum. The mixture is applied hot. The
petroleum evaporates and leaves behind
a thin layer of wax, which is subse-
quently rubbed out lightly with a dry
cloth rag.
V. — Stearine 100 parts
Yellow wax 25 parts
Caustic potash .... 60 parts
Yellow laundry
soap 10 parts
Water, a sufficient quantity.
Heat together until a homogeneous
mixture is formed.
VI. — Yellow wax 25 parts
Yellow laundry
soap 6 parts
Glue 12 parts
Soda ash 25 parts
Water, a sufficient quantity.
Dissolve the soda in 400 parts of water,
add the wax, and boil down to 250 parts,
then add the soap. Dissolve the glue in
100 parts of hot water, and mix the
whole with the saponified wax.
VII. — This is waterproof. Put into a
stoppered bottle 1 pint alcohol; 2 ounces
gum benzoin; ^ ounce gum sandarac,
and J ounce gum anime. Put the bottle
in a sand bath or in hot water till the
solids are dissolved, then strain the solu-
tion, and add ^ gill best clear poppy oil.
Shake well and the polish is ready for
use.
VIII. — A white polish for wood is
made as follows:
White lac 1^ pounds
Powdered borax. ... 1 ounce
Alcohol 3 pints
The lac should be thoroughly dried,
especially if it has been kept under
water, and, in any case, after being
crushed, it should be left in a warm place
for a few hours, in' order to remove every
trace of moisture. The crushed lac and
borax are then added to the spirit, and
the mixture is stirred frequently until
solution is effected, after which the polish
should be strained through muslin.
IX. — To restore the gloss of polished
wood which has sweated, prepare a
mixture of 100 parts of linseed oil, 750
parts of ether, 1,000 parts of rectified oil
of turpentine, and 1,000 parts of petro-
leum benzine, perfumed, if desired, with
a strongly odorous essential oil, and
colored, if required, with cuicuma, or-
lean, or alkanna. The objects to be
treated are rubbed thoroughly with this
mixture, using a woolen rag.
MISCELLANEOUS POLISHING
AGENTS:
Polishing Agent which may also be
used for Gilding and Silvering. — The
following mediums hitherto known as
possessing the aforenamed properties,
lose these qualities upon having been kept
for some time, as the metal salt is partly
reduced. Furthermore, it has not been
possible to admix reducing substances
such as zinc to these former polishing
agents, since moisture causes the metal
to precipitate. The present invention
obviates these evils. The silver or gold
salt is mixed with chalk, for instance, in
a dry form. To this mixture, fine dry
powders of one or more salts (e. g., am-
monia compounds) in whose solutions
the metal salt can enter are added; if re-
quired, a reducing body, such as zinc,
may be added at the same time. The
composition is pressed firmly together
and forms briquettes, in which condition
the mass keeps well. For use, all that
is necessary is to scrape off a little of the
substance and to prepare it with water.
Silver Polishing Balls. — This polishing
agent is a powder made into balls by
means of a binding medium and enjoys
much popularity in Germany. It is
prepared by adding 5 parts of levigated
chalk to 2 parts of yellow tripoli, mixing
the two powders well and making into a
stiff paste with very weak gum water
—1 part gum arabic to 12 parts of water.
This dough is finally shaped by hand
into balls of the size of a pigeon's egg.
The balls are put aside to dry on boards
in a moderately warm room, and when
completely hard are wrapped in tin-foil
paper.
To Prepare Polishing Cloths. — The
stuff must be pure woolen, colored with
aniline red, and then put in the follow-
ing:
Castile soap, white. . 4 parts
Jewelers' red 2 parts
Water 20 parts
Mix. One ounce of this mixture will
answer for a cloth 12 inches square,
where several of them are saturated at
the same time. For the workshop, a bit
of chamois skin of the same size (a foot
square), is preferable to wool, on account
of its durability. After impregnation
with the soap solution, it should be dried
in the air, being manipulated while drying
to preserve its softness and suppleness.
To Polish Delicate Objects. — Rub the
objects with a sponge charged with a
mixture of 28 parts of alcohol, 14 parts
of water, and 4 parts of lavender oil.
600
POLISHES
Polish for Gilt Frames. — Mix and beat
the whites of 3 eggs with one-third, by
weight, of javelle water, and apply to the
gilt work.
Steel Dust as a Polishing Agent. — Steel
dust is well adapted for polishing pre-
cious stones and can replace emery with
advantage. It is obtained by spraying
water on a bar of steel brought to a high
temperature. The metal becomes fria-
ble and can be readily reduced to pow-
der in a mortar. This powder is dis-
tinguished from emery by its mordanting
properties and its lower price. Besides,
it produces a finer, and consequently, a
more durable polish.
Polishing Bricks. — Stir into a thick
pulp with water 10 parts of finely pow-
dered and washed chalk, 1 part of Eng-
lish red, and 2 parts of powdered gyp-
sum; give it a square shape and dry.
Polishing Cream. —
Denaturized alcohol 400 parts
Spirit of sal ammo-
niac 75 parts
Water 150 parts
Petroleum ether .... 80 parts
Infusorial earth 100 parts
Red bole or white
bole 50 parts
Calcium carbonate. . 100 parts
Add as much of the powders as de-
sired. Mirbane oil may be used for scent-
ing.
Polishing Paste. —
Infusorial earth
(Kieselguhr) .... 8 ounces
Paraffine 2 ounces
Lubricating oil .... 6 fluidounces
Oleic acid 1 fluidounce
Oil mirbane 30 minims
Melt the paraffine with the lubricating
oil, and mix with the infusorial earth,
then add the oleic acid and oil of mir-
bane.
To Polish Paintings on Wood. — Ac-
cording to the statements of able cabinet
makers who frequently had occasion to
cover decorations on wood, especially
aquarelle painting, with a polish, a good
coating of fine white varnish is the first
necessity, dammar varnish being em-
ployed for this purpose. This coat is
primarily necessary as a protective layer
so as to preserve the painted work from
destructive attacks during the rubbing
for the production of a smooth surface
and the subsequent polishing. At all
events, the purest white polishing varnish
must be used for the polish so as to pre-
vent a perceptible subsequent darkening
of the white painting colors. Naturally
the success here is also dependent upon
the skill of the polisher. To polish paint-
ing executed on wood it is necessary to
choose a white, dense, fine grained wood,
which must present a well-smoothed
surface before the painting. After the
painting the surface is faintly coated with
a fine, quickly drying, limpid varnish.
When the coating has dried well, it is
carefully rubbed down with finely pulver-
ized pumice stone, with tallow or white
lard, and now this surface is polished in
the usual manner with a good solution
prepared from the best white shellac.
Polishing Mediums. — For iron and
steel, stannic oxide or Vienna lime or
iron oxide and sometimes steel powder
is employed. In using the burnisher,
first oil is taken, then soap water, and
next Vienna lime.
For copper, brass, German silver, and
tombac, stearine oil and Vienna lime
are used. Articles of brass can be pol-
ished, after the pickling, in the lathe
with employment of a polish consisting
of shellap, dissolved in alcohol, 1,000
parts; powdered turmeric, 1,000 parts;
tartar, 2,000 parts; ox gall, 50 parts;
water, 3,000 parts.
Gold is polished with ferric oxide
(red stuff), which, moistened with alco-
hol, is applied to leather.
For polishing silver, the burnisher or
bloodstone is employed, using soap
water, thin beer, or a decoction of soap
wort. Silver-plated articles are also
polished with Vienna lime.
To produce a dull luster on gold and
silver ware, glass brushes, i. e., scratch
brushes of finely spun glass threads, are
made use of.
Pewter articles are polished with
yienna lime or whiting; the former on a
linen rag, the latter on leather.
If embossed articles are to be pol-
ished, use the burnisher, and for polish,
soap water, soap-wort decoction, ox gall
with water.
Antimony-lead alloys are polished
with burnt magnesia on soft leather or
with fine jewelers' red.
Zinc is brightened with Vienna lime
or powdered charcoal.
Vienna lime gives a light -colored
polish on brass, while ferric oxide im-
parts a dark luster.
Rouge or Paris Red. — This appears in
commerce in many shades, varying from
brick red to chocolate brown. The
color, however, is in no wise indicative of
its purity or good quality, but it can be
accepted as a criterion by which to de-
POLISHES— PORCELAIN
601
termine the hardness of the powder.
The darker the powder, the greater is
its degree of hardness; the red or red-
dish is always very soft, wherefore the
former is used for polishing steel and the
latter for softer metals.
For the most part, Paris red consists
of ferric oxide or ferrous oxide. In its
production advantage is taken of a pe-
culiarity common to most salts of iron,
that when heated to a red heat they
separate the iron oxide from the acid
combination. In its manufacture it is
usual to take commercial green vitriol,
copperas crystals, and subject them to a
moderate heat to drive off the water of
crystallization. When this is nearly
accomplished they will settle down in a
white powder, which is now placed in
a crucible and raised to a glowing red
heat till no more vapor arises, when the
residue will be found a soft smooth red
powder. As the temperature is raised
in the crucible, the darker will become
the color of the powder and the harder
the abrasive.
Should an especially pure rouge be
desired, it may be made so by boiling
the powder we have just made in a weak
solution of soda and afterwards washing
it out repeatedly and thoroughly with
clean water. If treated in this way, all
the impurities that may chance to stick to
the iron oxide will be separated from it.
Should a rouge be needed to put a
specially brilliant polish upon any object
its manufacture ought to be conducted
according to the following formula:
Dissolve commercial green vitriol in
water; dissolve also a like weight of sor-
rel salt in water; filter both solutions;
mix them well, and warm to 140° F.; a
yellow precipitate, which on account of
its weight, will settle immediately; decant
the fluid, dry out the residue, and after-
wards heat it as before in an iron dish in a
moderately hot furnace till it glows red.
By this process an exceptionally
smooth, deep-red powder is obtained,
which, if proper care has been exercised
in the various steps, will need no elutria-
tion, but can be used for polishing at
once. With powders prepared in this
wise our optical glasses and lenses of fin-
est quality are polished.
POLISHES FOR THE LAUNDRY:
See Laundry Preparations.
POMADE, PUTZ:
See Cleaning Preparations and Meth-
ods.
POMADES:
See Cosmetics.
POMEGRANATE ESSENCE:
See Essences and Extracts.
PORCELAIN:
See also Ceramics.
Mending Porcelain by Riveting (see
Adhesives for methods of mending Porcelain
by means of cements).— Porcelain and glass
can be readily pierced with steel tools.
Best suited are hardened drills of ordinary
shape, moistened with oil of turpentine, if
the glazed or vitreous body is to be pierced.
In the case of majolica and glass without
enamel the purpose is best reached if the
drilling is done under water. Thus, the
vessel should previously be filled with
water, and placed in a receptacle containing
water, so that the drill is used under
water, and, after piercing the clay body,
reaches the water again. In the case of
objects glazed on the inside, instead of
filling them with water, the spot where
the drill must come through may be
underlaid with cork. The pressure
with which the drill is worked is deter-
mined by the hardness of the material,
but when the tool is about to reach the
other side it should gradually decrease
and finally cease almost altogether, so as
to avoid chipping. In order to enlarge
small bore holes already existing, three-
cornered or four-square broaches, ground
and polished, are best adapted. These
are likewise employed under water or,
if the material is too hard (glass or enam-
el), moistened with oil of turpentine.
The simultaneous use of oil of turpen-
tine and water is most advisable in all
cases, even where the nature of the article
to be pierced does not admit the use of
oil alone, as in the case of majolica and
non-glazed porcelain, which absorb the
oil, without the use of water.
Porcelain Decoration. — A brilliant yel-
low color, known as "gold luster," may
be produced on porcelain by the use
of paint prepared as follows: Melt over
a sand bath 30 parts of rosin, add 10
parts of uranic nitrate, and, while con-
stantly stirring, incorporate with the
liquid 35 to 40 parts of oil of lavender.
After the mixture has become entirely
homogeneous, remove the source of heat,
and add 30 to 40 parts more of oil of
lavender. Intimately mix the mass thus
obtained with a like quantity of bis-
muth glass prepared by fusing together
equal parts of oxide of bismuth and
crystallized boric acid. The paint is to
be burned in in the usual manner.
PORCELAIN, HOW TO TELL POT-
TERY AND PORCELAIN:
See Ceramics.
602
PRESERVATIVES—PRESERVING
PORTLAND CEMENT:
See Cement.
PORTLAND CEMENT, SIZE OVER:
See Adhesives.
POSTAL CARDS, HOW TO MAKE
SENSITIZED :
See Photography, under Paper-Sensi-
tizing Processes.
POTASSIUM SILICATE AS A CE-
MENT:
See Adhesives, under Water-Glass Ce-
ments.
POTATO STARCH:
See Starch.
POTTERY:
See Ceramics.
POULTRY APPLICATIONS:
See Insecticides.
POULTRY FOODS AND POULTRY
DISEASES AND THEIR REME-
DIES:
See Veterinary Formulas.
POULTRY WINE:
See Wines and Liquors.
POUNCE:
See Cleaning Preparations and Meth-
ods, under Ink Eradicators.
POWDER FOR COLORED FIRES:
See Pyrotechnics.
POWDER, FACE:
See Cosmetics.
POWDER, ROUP:
See Roup Powder.
POWDERS FOR STAMPING:
See Stamping.
POWDERS FOR THE TOILET:
See Cosmetics.
Preservatives
(See also Foods.)
Preservative Fluid for Museums. —
Formaldehyde solu-
tion 6 parts
Glycerine 12 parts
Alcohol 3 parts
Water 100 parts
The addition of glycerine becomes
necessary only if it is desired to keep the
pieces in a soft state. Filtering through
animal charcoal renders the liquid per-
fectly colorless. For dense objects, such
as lungs and liver, it is best to make in-
cisions so as to facilitate the penetration
o< the fluid. In the case of very thick
pieces, it is best to take 80 to 100 parts
of formaldehyde solution for above
quantities.
Preservative for Stone, etc. — A new
composition, or paint, for protecting
stone, wood, cement, etc., from the
effects of damp or other deleterious in-
fluences consists of quicklime, chalk,
mineral colors, turpentine, boiled oil,
galipot, rosin, and benzine. The lime,
chalk, colors, and turpentine are first
fixed and then made into a paste with the
boiled oil. The paste is finely ground
and mixed with the rosins previously
dissolved in the benzine.
Preservative for Stuffed Animals. —
For the exterior preservation use
Arsenic 0.7 parts
Alum 15.0 parts
Water 100.0 parts
For sprinkling the inside skin as well
as filling bones, the following is em-
ployed:
Camphor 2 parts
Insect powder 2 parts
Blacjc pepper 1 part
Flowers of sulphur. . . 4 parts
Alum 3 parts
Calcined soda 3 parts
Tobacco powder. .... 3 parts
Preservatives for Zoological and Ana-
tomical Specimens. — The preparations
are first placed in a solution or mixture of
Sodium fluoride 5 parts
Formaldehyde (40 per
cent) 2 parts
Water 100 parts
After leaving this fixing liquid they
are put in the following preservative
solution:
Glycerine (28° Be.)... 5 parts
Water 10 parts
Magnesium chloride. . 1 part
Sodium fluoride 0.2 parts
In this liquid zoological preparations,
especially reptiles, retain their natural
coloring. Most anatomical preparations
likewise remain unchanged therein.
PRESERVATIVES FOR WOOD:
See Wood.
Preserving
Canning. — There should be no trou-
ble in having canned fruit keep well if
perfect or "chemical cleanliness" is ob-
served in regard to jars, lids, etc., and if
the fruit or vegetables are in good order,
not overripe or beginning to ferment
where bruised or crushed. Fruit will
PRESERVING
603
never come out of jars better than it goes
in. It is better to put up a little fruit at a
time when it is just ripe than to wait for a
large amount to ripen, when the first
may be overripe and fermenting and
likely to spoil the whole lot. Use only
the finest flavored fruit.
Have everything ready before begin-
ning canning. Put water in each jar,
fit on rubbers and tops, and invert the
jar on the table. If any water oozes
» out try another top and rubber until
sure the jar is air-tight. Wash jars and
tops, put them in cold water and bring
to a boil. When the fruit is cooked
ready take a jar from the boiling water,
set it on a damp cloth laid in a soup
plate, dip a rubber in boiling water, and
fit it on firmly. Fill the jar to over-
flowing, wipe the brim, screw on the top,
and turn it upside down on a table. If
any syrup oozes out empty the jar back
into the kettle and fit on a tighter rub-
ber. Let it stand upside down till cold,
wipe clean, wrap in thick paper, and
keep in a cool, dry place.
These general directions are for all
fruits and vegetables that are cooked
before putting in the jars. Fruit keeps
its shape better if cooked in the jars,
which should be prepared as above, the
fruit carefully looked over and filled into
the jars. If a juicy fruit, like black-
berries or raspberries, put the sugar in
with it in alternate layers. For cherries
the amount of sugar depends on the
acidity of the fruit and is best made into
a syrup with a little water and poured
down through them. Peaches and pears
after paring, are packed into the jars and
a syrup of about a quarter of a pound
of sugar to a pound of fruit poured over
them. Most fruits need to be cooked
from 10 to 15 minutes after the water
around them begins to boil.
Red raspberries ought not to be boiled.
Put them into jars as gently as possible;
they are the tenderest of all fruits and
will bear the slightest handling. Drop
them in loosely, fold a saucer into a
clean cloth, and lay over the top, set on a
perforated board in a boiler, pour water
to two-thirds, cover and set over a slow
fire. As the fruit settles add more until
full. When it is cooked soft lift the jar
out and fill to the top with boiling syrup
of equal parts of sugar and water, and
seal.
Do not can all the fruit, for jams and
jellies are a welcome change and also
easier to keep. Raspberries and cur-
rants mixed make delicious jam. Use
the juice of a third as many currants and
| of a pound of sugar to a pound of fruit.
The flavor of all kinds of fruit is injured
by cooking it long with the sugar, so
heat the latter in the oven and add when
the fruit is nearly done.
Jelly is best made on a clear day, for
small fruits absorb moisture, and if
picked after a rain require longer boiling,
and every minute of unnecessary boiling
gives jelly a less delicate color and flavor.
When jelly is syrupy, it has been boiled
too long; if it drops from the spoon with
a spring, or wrinkles as you push it with
the spoon in a saucer while cooling, it is
done enough. Try it after 5 minutes'
boil. Cook the fruit only until the skin
is broken and pulp softened. Strain
without squeezing for jelly, and use the
last juice you squeeze out for jam.
Measure the juice and boil uncovered,
skimming off. For sweet fruits f of a
pound of sugar is enough to a pint of
juice. Heat the sugar in the oven, add
to the boiling juice; stir till dissolved.
When it boils up, draw to the back of the
stove. Scald the jelly glasses, fill and
let stand in a clean, cool place till next
day; then cover. Blackberries make
jelly of a delicious flavor and jelly easily
when a little underripe. Currants should
be barely ripe; the ends of the bunches
may be rather green.
A highly prized way of canning cher-
ries: Stone and let them stand overnight.
In the morning pour off the juice, add
sugar to taste, and some water if there is
not much juice, and boil and skim till it is
a rich syrup. If the cherries are sweet a
pint of juice and f of a pint of sugar will
be right. Heat the jars, put in the un-
cooked cherries till they are nearly full;
then pour over them the boiling syrup
and fasten on the covers. Set the jars in
a washboiler, fill it with very hot water
and let it stand all night. The heat of
the syrup and of the water will cook the
fruit, but the flavor and color will be
that of fresh and uncooked cherries.
Canning without Sugar. — I. — In order
to preserve the juices of fruit merely by
sterilization, put the juice into the bottles
in which it is to be kept, filling them very
nearly full; place tne bottles, unstop
pered, in a kettle filled with cold water,
so arranging them on a wooden perfor
ated "false bottom," or other like con-
trivance, as to prevent their immediate
contact with the metal, thus preventing
unequal heating and possible fracture.
Now heat the water, gradually raising
the temperature to the boiling point, and
maintain at that until the juice attains a
boiling temperature; then close the bot
ties with perfectly fitting corks, which
604
PRESERVING
have been kept immersed in boiling
water for a short time before use. The
corks should not be fastened in any way,
for if the sterilization is not complete,
fermentation and consequent explosion
of the bottle might occur, unless the cork
should be forced out. The addition of
sugar is not necessary to secure the suc-
cess of the operation; in fact a small pro-
portion would have no antiseptic effect.
If the juice is to be used for syrup as for
use at the soda fountain, the best method
is to make a concentrated syrup at once,
using about 2 pounds of refined sugar
to 1 pint of juice, dissolving by a gentle
heat. The syrup may be made by sim-
ple agitation without heat and a finer
flavor thus results, but its keeping qual-
ity would be uncertain.
II. — Fruit juices may be preserved by
gentle heating and after protection from
the air in sterilized containers. The
heat required is much below the boiling
point. Professor Miiller finds that a
temperature of from 140° to 158° F.,
maintained for 15 minutes, is sufficient
to render the fermenting agents present
inactive. The bottles must also be
heated to destroy any adherent germs.
The juices may be placed in them as ex-
pressed and the container then placed in
a water bath. As soon as the heating is
finished the bottles must be securely
closed. The heating process will, in
consequence of coagulating certain sub-
stances, produce turbidity, and if clear
liquid is required, filtration is, of course,
necessary. In this case it is better to
heat the juice in bulk in a kettle, filter
through felt, fill the bottles, and then
heat again in the containers as in the
first instance. It is said that grape
juice prepared in this manner has been
found unaltered after keeping for many
years. Various antiseptics nave been
proposed as preservatives for fruit juices
and other articles of food, but all such
agents are objectionable both on ac-
count of their direct action on the system
and their effect in rendering food less
digestible. While small quantities of
such drugs occasionally taken may exert
no appreciable effect, continuous use is
liable to be more or less harmful.
CRUSHED FRUIT PRESERVING:
Crushed Pineapples. — Secure a good
brand of canned grated pineapple and
drain off about one-half of the liquor by
placing on a strainer. Add to each
pound of pineapple 1 pound of granu-
lated sugar. Place on the fire and bring
to boiling point, stirring constantly.
Just before removing from the fire, add
to each gallon of pulp 1 ounce saturated
alcoholic solution salicylic acid. Put
into air-tight jars until wanted for use.
Crushed Peach. — Take a good brand
of canned yellow peaches, drain off
liquor, and rub through a No. 8 sieve.
Add sugar, bring to the boiling point,
and when ready to remove from fire add
to each gallon 1 ounce saturated alcoholic
solution of salicylic acid. Put into jars
and seal hermetically.
Crushed Apricots. — Prepared in similar
manner to crushed peach, using canned
apricots.
Crushed Orange. — Secure oranges with
a thin peel and containing plenty of
juice. Remove the outer or yellow peel
first, taking care not to include any of
bitter peel. The outer peel may be
used in making orange phosphate or
tincture sweet orange peel. After re-
moving the outer peel, remove the inner,
bitter peel, quarter and remove the seeds.
Extract part of the juice and grind the
pulp through an ordinary meat grinder.
Add sugar, place on the fire, and bring to
the boiling point. When ready to re-
move, add to each gallon 1 ounce satu-
rated alcoholic solution of salicylic acid
and 1 ounce glycerine. Put into jars
and seal.
Crushed Cherries. — If obtainable, the
large, dark California cherry should be
used. Stone the cherries, and grind to a
pulp. Add sugar, and place on the fire,
stirring constantly. Before removing,
add to each gallon 1 ounce of the satu-
rated solution of salicylic acid. Put into
jars and seal.
Dry Sugar Preserving. — The fruits
are embedded in a thick layer of dry,
powdered sugar to which they give up
the greater part of the water contained
in them. At the same time, a quantity
of sugar passes through the skins into
the interior of the fruits. Afterwards,
the fruits are washed once, wiped, and
completely dried.
Fruit Preserving. — Express the juice
and filter at once, through two thick-
nesses of best white Swedish paper, into
a container that has been sterilized im-
mediately before letting the juice run
into it, by boiling water. The better
plan is to take out of water in active
ebullition at the moment you desire to
use it. Have ready some long-necked,
8-ounce vials, which should also be kept
in boiling water until needed. Pour the
juice into these, leaving room in the
upper part of the body of the vial to re*
PRESERVING
605
ceive a teaspoonful of the best olive oil.
Pour the latter in so that it will trickle
down the neck and form a layer on top
of the juice, and close the neck with a
wad of antiseptic cotton thrust into it in
such manner that it does not touch the
oil, and leaves room for the cork to be
put in without touching it. Cork and
cap or seal the vial, and put in a cool,
dark place, and keep standing upright.
If carried out faithfully with due atten-
tion to cleanliness, this process will keep
the juice in a perfectly natural condition
for a very long time. The two essentials
are the careful and rapid filtration, and
the complete asepticization of the con-
tainers. Another process, in use in the
French Navy, depends upon the rapid and
careful filtering of the juice, and the addi-
tion of from 8 to 10 per cent of alcohol.
Raspberry Juice. — A dark juice is
obtained by adding to the crushed rasp-
berries, before the fermentation, slight
quantities of sugar in layers. The
ethyl-alcohol forming during the fermen-
tation is said to cause a better extraction
of the raspberry red. Furthermore,
the boiling should not be conducted on
a naked fire, but by means of super-
heated steam, so as to avoid formation of
caramel. Finally, the sugar used should
be perfectly free from ultramarine and
lime, since both impurities detract from
the red color of the raspberries.
Spice for Fruit Compote. — This is
greatly in demand in neighborhoods
where many plums and pears are pre-
served.
Parts Parts
Lemon peel 15 or ...
Cinnamon, ordi-
nary 15 or 50
Star aniseed .... 10 or 15
Coriander 3 or 100
Carob pods 5 or
Ginger root,
peeled 2 or 200
Pimento or 100
Licorice or 100
Cloves, without
stems or 30
Spanish peppers ... or 2
Oil of lemon or 4
Oil of cinnamon ... or 2
Oil of cloves or 2
All the solid constituents are pow-
dered moderately fine and thoroughly
mixed; the oils dropped in last, and
rubbed into the powder.
Strawberries. — Carefully remove the
stems and calyxes, place the strawber-
ries on a sieve, and move the latter
about in a tub of water for a few mo-
ments, to remove any dirt clinging to
them. Drain and partially dry spon-
taneously, then remove from the sieve
and put into a porcelain-lined kettle
provided with a tight cover. To every
pound of berries take a half pound of
sugar and 2 ounces of water and put the
same in a kettle over the fire. Let re-
main until the sugar has dissolved or
become liquid, and then pour the same,
while still hot, over the berries, cover the
kettle tightly and let it stand overnight.
The next morning put the kettle over the
fire, removing the cover when the berries
begin to boil, and let boil gently for 6
to 8 minutes (according to the mass),
removing all scum as it arises. Remove
from the fire, and with a perforated
spoon or dipper take the fruit from the
syrup, and fill into any suitable vessel.
Replace the syrup on the fire and boil for
about the same length of time as before,
then pour, all hot, over the berries. The
next day empty out the contents of the
vessel on a sieve, and let the berries
drain off; remove the syrup that drains
off, add water, put on the fire, and boil
until you obtain a syrup which flows but
slowly from the stirring spoon. At this
point add the berries, and let boil gently
for a few moments. Have your pre-
serve jars as hot as possible, by putting
them into a £ot of cold water and bring-
ing the latter* to a boil, and into them fill
the berries, hot from the kettle. Cool
down, cover with buttered paper, and
immediately close the jars hermetically.
If corks are used, they should be pro-
tected below with parchment paper,
and afterwards covered with wet bladder
stretched over the top, securely tied and
waxed. The process seems very trou-
blesome and tedious, but all of the care
expended is repaid by the richness and
pureness of the flavor of the preserve,
which maintains the odor and taste of
the fresh berry in perfection.
Hydrogen Peroxide as a Preservative.
— Hydrogen peroxide is one of the best,
least harmful, and most convenient agents
for preserving syrups, wine, beer, cider,
and vinegar. For this purpose 2| flui-
drachms of the commercial peroxide of
hydrogen may be added to each quart of
the article to be preserved. Hydrogen
peroxide also affords an easy test for
bacteria in water. When hydrogen per-
oxide is added to water that contains
bacteria, these organisms decompose it,
and consequently oxygen gas is given off.
If the water be much contaminated the
disengagement of gas may be quite brisk.
606
PRESERVING— PUTTY
To Preserve Milk (which should be as
fresh as possible) there should be added
enough hydrogen peroxide to cause it to
be completely decomposed by the en-
zymes of the milk. For this purpose 1.3
per cent, by volume, of a 3 per cent
hydrogen peroxide solution is required.
The milk is well shaken and kept for 5
hours at 122° to 125° F. in well-closed
vessels. Upon cooling, it may keep fresh
for about a month and also to retain its
natural fresh taste. With this process,
if pure milk is used, the ordinary disease
germs are killed off soon after milking
and the milk sterilized.
Powdered Cork as a Preservative. —
Tests have shown that powdered cork is
very efficacious for packing and pre-
serving fruits and vegetables. A bed of
cork is placed at the bottom of the case,
and the fruits or vegetables and the cork
are then disposed in alternate layers,
with a final one of cork at the top. Care
should be taken to fill up the interstices,
in order to prevent friction. Fruit may
thus be kept fresh a year, provided any
unsound parts have been removed pre-
liminarily. When unpacking for sale,
it suffices to plunge the fruit into water.
Generally speaking, 50 pounds of cork go
with 1,000 or 1,200 pounds of fruit. The
cork serves as a protection against cold,
heat, and humidity. Various fruits,
such as grapes, mandarines, tomatoes,
and early vegetables, are successfully
packed in this way.
PRESSURE TABLE:
See Tables.
PRINT COPYING:
See Copying.
PRINTERS'
See Oil.
OIL:
PRINTING ON PHOTOGRAPHS:
See Photography.
PRINTS, RESTORATION OF:
See Engravings.
PRINTS, THEIR PRESERVATION:
See Engravings.
PRINTING OILCLOTH AND LEATHER
IN GOLD:
See Gold.
PRINTING -OUT PAPER, HOW TO
SENSITIZE:
See Photography, under Paper-Sen-
sitizing Processes.
PRINTING -ROLLER COMPOSITIONS:
See Roller Compositions for Printers.
PRUSSIC ACID:
See Poisons.
PUMICE STONE.
While emery is used for polishing tools,
Eolishing sand for stones and glass,
irric oxide for fine glassware, and lime
and felt for metals, pumice stone is more
frequently employed for polishing softer
objects. Natural pumice stone pre-
sents but little firmness, and the search
has therefore been made to replace the
natural product with an artificial one.
An artificial stone has been produced by
means of sandstone and clay, designed to
be used for a variety of purposes. No. 1,
hard or soft, with coarse grain, is
designed for leather and waterproof
garments, and for the industries of felt
and wool; No. 2^ hard and soft, of aver-
age grain, is designed for work in stucco
and sculptors' use, and for rubbing down
wood before painting; No. 3, soft, with
fine grain, is used for polishing wood and
tin articles; No. 4, of average hardness,
with fine grain, is used for giving to wood
a surface previous to polishing with oil;
No. 5, hard, with fine grain, is employed
for metal work and stones, especially
lithographic stones. These artificial
products are utilized in the same manner
as the volcanic products. For giving a
smooth surface to wood, the operation is
dry; but for finishing, the product is
diluted with oil.
PUMICE-STONE SOAP:
See Soaps.
PUNCHES:
See Ice Creams.
PUNCTURE CEMENT:
See Cement.
PURPLE OF CASSIUS:
See Gold.
Putty
(See also Lutes, under Adhesives and
Cements.)
Common putty, as used by carpenters,
painters, and glaziers, is whiting mixed
with linseed oil to the consistency of
dough. Plasterers use a fine lime mortar
that is called putty. Jewelers use a tin
oxide for polisning, called putty powder
or putz powder. (See Putz Powder,
under Jewelers' Polishes,under Polishes.)
PUTTY
607
Acid-Proof Putty.— I.— Melt 1 part of
gum elastic with 2 parts of linseed oil and
mix with the necessary quantity of white
bole by continued kneading to the desired
consistency. Hydrochloric acid and
nitric acid do not attack this putty, it
softens somewhat in the warm and does
not dry readily on the surface. The dry-
ing and hardening is effected by an admix-
ture of | part of litharge or red lead.
II. — A putty which will even resist
boiling sulphuric acid is prepared by
melting caoutchouc at a moderate heat,
then adding 8 per cent of tallow, stirring
constantly, whereupon sufficiently slaked
lime is added until the whole has the
consistency of soft dough. Finally
about 20 per cent of red lead is still
added, which causes the mass to set im-
mediately and to harden and dry. A
solution of caoutchouc in double its
weight of linseed oil, added by means of
heat and with the like quantity (weight)
of pipe clay, gives a plastic mass which
likewise resists most acids.
Black Putty. — Mix whiting and an-
timony sulphide, the latter finely pow-
dered, with soluble glass. This putty, it
is claimed, can be polished, after narden-
ing, by means of a burnishing agate.
Durable Putty. — According to the
"Gewerbeschau," mix a handful of burnt
lime with 4| ounces of linseed oil; allow
this mixture to boil down to the consist-
ency of common putty, and dry the ex-
tensible mass received, in a place not
accessible to the rays of the sun. When
the putty, which has become very hard
through the drying, is to be used, it is
warmed. Over the flame it will become
soft and pliable, but after having been
applied and become cold, it binds the
various materials very firmly.
Glaziers' Putty. — I. — For puttying
panes or looking glasses into picture
frames a mixture prepared as follows is
well adapted: Make a solution of gum
elastic in benzine, strong enough so that
a syrup-like fluid results. If the solu-
tion be too thin, wait until the benzine
evaporates. Then grind white lead in
linseed-oil varnish to a stiff paste and
add the gum solution. This putty may
be used, besides the above purposes, for
the tight puttying-in of window panes
into their frames. The putty is applied
on the glass lap of the frames and the
panes are firmly pressed into it. The
glass plates thereby obtain a good, firm
support and stick to the wood, as the
putty adheres both to the glass and to
the wood.
II. — A useful putty for mirrors, etc.,
is prepared by dissolving gummi elasti-
cum (caoutchouc) in benzol to a syrupy
solution, and incorporating this 'latter
with a mixture of white lead and linseed
oil to make a stiff pulp. The putty
adheres strongly to both glass and wood,
and may therefore be applied to the
framework of the window, mirror, etc.,
to be glazed, the glass being then
pressed firmly on the cementing layer
thus formed.
Hard Putty. — This is used by carriage
painters and jewelers. Boil 4 pounds
brown umber and 7 pounds linseed oil
for 2 hours; stir in 2 ounces beeswax;
take from the fire and mix in 5^ pounds
chalk and 11 pounds white lead; the
mixing must be done very thoroughly.
Painters' Putty and Rough Stuff.—
Gradually knead sifted dry chalk (whit-
ing) or else rye flour, powdered white
lead, zinc white, or lithopone white with
good linseed-oil varnish. The best
putty is produced from varnish with
plenty of chalk and some zinc wrhite.
This mixture can be tinted with earth
colors. These oil putties must be well
kneaded together and rather compact
(like glaziers' putty).
If flour paste is boiled (this is best
produced by scalding with hot water,
pouring in, gradually, the rye flour
which has been previously dissolved in a
little cold water and stirring constantly
until the proper consistency is attained)
and dry sifted chalk and a little varnish
are added, a good rough stuff for wood
or iron is obtained, which can be rubbed.
This may also be produced from gla-
ziers' oil putty by gradually kneading into
it flour paste and a little more sifted dry
chalk.
To Soften Glaziers' Putty. — I. — Gla-
ziers' putty which has become hard can
be softened with the following mixture:
Mix carefully equal parts of crude pow-
dered potash and freshly burnt lime and
make it into a paste with a little water.
This dough, to which about J part of
soft soap is still added, is applied on the
putty to be softened, but care has to be
taken not to cover other paint, as it
would be surely destroyed thereby. Af-
ter a few hours the hardest putty will be
softened by this caustic mass and can be
removed from glass and wood.
II. — A good way to make the putty
soft and plastic enough in a few hours so
that it can be taken off like fresh putty,
is by the use of kerosene, which entirely
dissolves the linseed oil of the putty,
608
PUTTY— PYROTECHNICS
transformed into rosin, and quickly pen-
etrates it.
Substitute for Putty. — A cheap and
effective substitute for putty to stop
cracks in woodwork is made by soaking
newspapers in a paste made by boiling
a pound of flour in 3 quarts of water, and
adding a teaspoonful of alum. This
mixture should be of about the same
consistency as putty, and should be
forced into the cracks with a blunt knife.
It will harden, like papier mache, and
when dry may be painted or stained to
match the boards, when it will be almost
imperceptible.
Waterproof Putties. — I. — Grind pow-
dered white lead or minium (red lead)
with thick linseed-oil varnish to a stiff
paste. This putty is used extensively
for tightening wrought-iron gas pipes,
for tightening rivet seams on gas meters,
hot- water furnaces, cast-iron flange pipes
for hot-water heating, etc. The putty
made with minium dries very slowly, but
becomes tight even before it is quite
hard, and holds very firmly after solidifi-
cation. Sometimes a little ground gyp-
sum is added to it.
The two following putties are cheaper
than the above - mentioned red lead
putty: II. — One part white lead, 1 part
manganese, one part white pipe clay,
prepared with linseed-oil varnish.
III. — Two parts red lead, 5 parts
white lead, 4 parts clay, ground in or
prepared with linseed-oil varnish.
IV. — Excellent putty, which has been
found invaluable where waterproof
closing and permanent adhesion are
desired, is made from litharge and
glycerine. The litharge must be finely
pulverized and the glycerine very concen-
trated, thickly liquid, and clear as water.
Both substances are mixed into a viscid,
thickly liquid pulp. The pegs of kero-
sene lamps, for instance, can be fixed in
so firmly with this putty that they can only
be removed by chiseling it out. For put-
tying in the glass panes of aquariums it
is equally valuable. As it can withstand
higher temperatures it may be success-
fully used for fixing tools, curling irons,
forks, etc., in the wooden handles. The
thickish putty mass is rubbed into the
hole, and the part to be fixed is inserted.
As this putty hardens very quickly it
cannot be prepared in large quantities,
and only enough for immediate use must
be compounded in each case.
V. — Five parts of hydraulic lime, 0.3
parts of tar, 0.3 parts of rosin. 1 part of horn
water (the decoction resulting from boil-
ing horn in water and decanting the lat-
ter). The materials are to be mixed and
boiled. After cooling, the putty is ready
for use. This is an excellent cement for
glass, and may be used also for reservoirs
and any vessels for holding water, to ce-
ment the cracks; also for many other
purposes. It will not give way, and is
equally good for glass, wood, and metal.
VI. — This is especially recommended
for boiler leaks: Mix well together 6
parts of powdered graphite, 3 parts of
slaked lime, 8 parts of heavy spar
(barytes), and 8 parts of thick linseed-oil
varnish, and apply in the ordinary way
to the spots.
PUTTY FOR ATTACHING SIGN-LET-
TERS TO GLASS:
See Adhesives, under Sign-Letter Ce-
ments.
PUTTY, TO REMOVE:
See Cleaning Preparations and Meth-
ods.
PUTZ POMADE:
See Cleaning Preparations and Meth-
ods.
PYROGALLIC ACID:
See Photography.
PYROGALLIC ACID STAINS, TO RE-
MOVE, FROM THE SKIN:
See Cleaning Preparations and Meth-
ods and Photography.
PYROCATECHIN DEVELOPER:
See Photography.
Pyrotechnics
FIREWORKS.
The chief chemical process is, of
course, oxidation. Oxidation may be
produced by the atmosphere, but in many
cases this is not enough, and then the
pyrotechnist must employ his knowledge
of chemistry in selecting oxidizing agents.
The chief of these oxidizing agents are
chlorates and nitrates, the effect of which
is to promote the continuance of com-
bustion when it is once started. They
are specially useful, owing to their solid
non-hygroscopic nature. Then ingredi-
ents are needed to prevent the too speedy
action of the oxidizing agents, to regulate
the process of combustion, such as
calomel, sand, and sulphate of potash.
Thirdly, there are the active ingredients
that produce the desired effect, prominent
among which are substances that in
contact with flame impart some special
color to it. Brilliancy and brightness
are imparted by steel, zinc, and copper
PYROTECHNICS
609
filings. Other substances employed are
lampblack with gunpowder, and, for
theatre purposes, lycopodium.
Fireworks may be classified under
four heads, viz.:
1. Single fireworks.
2. Terrestrial fireworks, which are
placed upon the ground and the fire
issues direct from the surface.
3. Atmospheric fireworks, which begin
their display in the air.
4. Aquatic fireworks, in which oxida-
tion is so intense that they produce a
flame under water.
Rockets. — First and foremost among
atmospheric fireworks are rockets, made
in different sizes, each requiring a slightly
different percentage composition. A good
formula is
Sulphur 1 part
Carbon, wood 2 parts
Niter 4 parts
Meal powder 1 part
Meal powder is a fine black or brown
dust, which acts as a diluent.
Roman Candles. — Roman candles are
somewhat after the same principle. An
average formula is:
Sulphur 4 parts
Carbon 3 parts
Niter 8 parts
Pin Wheels. — These are also similar
in composition to the preceding. The
formula for the basis is
Sulphur 5 parts
Niter 9 parts
Meal powder 15 parts
Color as desired.
Bengal Lights. — Bengal lights have
the disadvantage of being poisonous.
A typical preparation can be made ac-
cording to this formula:
Realgar 1 part
Black antimony 5 parts
Red lead 1 part
Sulphur 3 parts
Niter 14 parts
COLORED FIRES.
The compounds should be ignited in a
small pill box resting on a plate. All the
ingredients must be dried and powdered
separately, and then lightly mixed on a
sheet of paper. Always bear in mind
that sulphur and chlorate of potassium
explode violently if rubbed together.
Smokeless Vari -Colored Fire. — First
take barytes or strontium, and bring to
a glowing heat in a suitable dish, remove
from the fire, and add the shellac. The
latter (unpowdered) will melt at once,
and can then be intimately mixed with
the barytes or strontium by means of a
spatula. After cooling, pulverize. One
may also add about 2| per cent of pow-
dered magnesium to increase the effect.
Take for instance 4 parts of barytes or
strontium and 1 part of shellac.
The following salts, if finely powdered
and burned in an iron ladle with a little
spirits, will communicate to the flame
their peculiar colors.
Potassium nitrate or sodium chlorate,
yellow.
Potassium chlorate, violet.
Calcium chloride, orange.
Strontium nitrate, red.
Barium nitrate, apple green.
Copper nitrate, emerald green.
Borax, green.
Lithium chloride, purple.
The colored fires are used largely in the
production of various theatrical effects.
Blue Fire. —
I. — Ter-sulphuret of
antimony 1 part
Sulphur 2 parts
Nitrate of potassium 6 parts
II. — Sulphur 15 parts
Potassium sulphate 15 parts
Ammonio - c u p r i c
sulphate 15 parts
Potassium nitrate.. 27 parts
Potassium chlorate 28 parts
III. — Chlorate of potash. 8 parts
Calomel 4 parts
Copper sulphate. . . 5 parts
Shellac 3 parts
IV. — Ore pigment 2 parts
Charcoal 3 parts
Potassium chloride 5 parts
Sulphur 13 parts
Potassium nitrate.. 77 parts
V. — Potassium chlorate 10 parts
Copper chlorate ... 20 parts
Alcohol 20 parts
Water 100 parts
VI. — Copper chlorate. . . 100 parts
Copper nitrate .... 50 parts
Barium chlorate. .. 25 parts
Potassium chlorate 100 parts
Alcohol 500 parts
Water 1,000 parts
Green. —
I. — Barium chlorate. . . 20 parts
Alcohol 20 parts
Water 100 parts
II. — Barium nitrate. ... 10 parts
Potassium chlorate 10 parts
Alcohol 20 parts
Water 100 parts
610
PYROTECHNICS
III.— Shellac 5 parts
Barium nitrate. ... 1J parts
Pound after cooling, and add
Barium chlorate, 2 to 5 per cent.
Red.—
I. — Shellac 5 parts
Strontium nitrate 1 to 1.2 parts
Preparation as in green fire. In damp
weather add 2 to 4 per cent of potassium
chlorate to the red flame; the latter
causes a little more smoke.
II. — Strontium nitrate. . 20 parts
Potassium chlorate 10 parts
Alcohol 20 parts
Water 100 parts
Yellow.—
I. — Sulphur 16 parts
Dried carbonate of
soda 23 parts
Chlorate of potas-
sium 61 parts
II. — Sodium chlorate. . . 20 parts
Potassium oxalate. 10 parts
Alcohol 20 parts
Water 100 parts
Violet.—
I. — Strontium chlorate. 15 parts
Copper chlorate. . . 15 parts
Potassium chlorate 15 parts
Alcohol 50 parts
Water 100 parts
II. — Potassium chlorate 20 parts
Strontium chlorate. 20 parts
Copper chlorate . .. 10 parts
Alcohol 50 parts
Water 100 parts
Lilac.—
Potassium chlorate 20 parts
Copper chlorate. . . 10 parts
Strontium chloride. 10 parts
Alcohol 50 parts
Water 100 parts
Mauve. —
Chlorate of potash . 28 parts
Calomel 12 parts
Shellac 4 parts
Strontium nitrate. . 4 parts
Cupric sulphate ... 2 parts
Fat 1 part
Purple. —
Copper sulphide. .. 8 parts
Calomel 7 parts
Sulphur 2 parts
Chlorate of potash. 16 parts
White.—
I. — Gunpowder 15 parts
Sulphur 22 parts
Nitrate of potassium 64 parts
II. — Potassium nitrate. . . 30 parts
Sulphur 10 parts
Antimony sulphide
(black) 5 parts
Flour 3 parts
Powdered camphor. 2 parts
III.— Charcoal 1 part
Sulphur 11 parts
Potassium sulphide. 38 parts
IV. — Stearine 1 part
Barium carbonate . . 1 part
Milk sugar 4 parts
Potassium nitrate .... 4 parts
Potassium chlorate. 12 parts
As a general rule, a corresponding
quantity of shellac may be taken instead
of the sulphur for inside fireworks.
The directions for using these solu-
tions are simply to imbibe bibulous pa-
pers in them, then carefully dry and roll
tightly into rolls of suitable length, accord-
ing to the length of time they are to burn.
Fuses. — For fuses or igniting papers,
the following is used:
Potassium nitrate. . . 2 parts
Lead acetate 40 parts
Water 100 parts
Mix and dissolve, and in the solution
place unsized paper; raise to nearly a boil
and keep at this temperature for 20
minutes. If the paper is to be "slow,"
it may now be taken out, dried, cut into
strips, and rolled. If to be "faster," the
heat is to be continued longer, according
to the quickness desired. Care must be
taken to avoid boiling, which might dis-
integrate the paper.
In preparing these papers, every pre-
caution against fire should be taken, and
their preparation in the shop or house
should not be thought of. In making
the solutions, etc., where heat is neces-
sary, the water bath should invariably
be used.
PYROTECHNIC MAGIC.
[Caution. — When about to place any
lighted material in the moutn be sure
that the mouth is well coated with saliva,
and that you are exhaling the breath con-
tinuously, with greater or less force,
according to the amount of heat you can
bear.
If the lighted material shows a ten-
dency to burn the mouth, do not attempt
to drag it out auickly, but simply shut the
lips tight, and breathe through the nose,
and the fire must go out instantly.
In the Human Gas Trick, where a
flame 10 to' 15 inches long is blown from
the mouth, be careful after lighting the
PYROTECHNICS
611
gas, to continue to exhale the breath.
When you desire the gas to go out, sim-
ply shut the lips tight and hold the
breath for a few seconds. In this trick,
until the gas is well out, any inhalation
is likely to be attended with the most
serious results.
The several cautions above given may
be examined with a lighted match, first
removing, after lighting the match, any
brimstone or phosphorus from its end.]
To Fire Paper, etc., by Breathing on
it. — This secret seems little known to
conjurers. Pay particular attention to
the caution concerning phosphorus at
the head of this article, and the caution
respecting the dangerous nature of the
prepared fluid given.
Half fill a half-ounce bottle with car-
bon disulphide, and drop in 1 or 2 frag-
ments of phosphorus, each the size of a
pea, which will quickly dissolve. Shake
up the liquid, and pour out a small tea-
spoonful onto a piece of blotting paper.
The carbon disulphide will quickly evap-
orate, leaving a film of phosphorus on
the paper, which will quickly emit fumes
and burst into flame. The once-popu-
lar term Fenian fire was derived from
the supposed use of this liquid by the
Fenians for the purpose of setting fire to
houses by throwing a bottle down a
chimney or through a window, the bottle
to break and its contents to speedily set
fire to the place.
For the purpose of experiment this
liquid should only be prepared in small
quantities as above, and any left over
should be poured away onto the soil in
the open air, so as to obviate the risk of
fire. Thin paper may be fired in a sim-
ilar manner with the acid bulbs and
powder already mentioned. The pow-
der should be formed into a paste, laid on
the paper, and allowed to dry. Then the
acid bulb is pasted over the powder.
Burning Brimstone. — Wrap cotton
around two small pieces of brimstone
and wet it with gasoline; take between the
ngers, squeezing the surplus liquid out,
ght it with a candle, throw back the
head well, and put it on the tongue blaz-
ing. Blow fire from mouth, and observe
that a freshly blown-out candle may be
lighted from the flame, which makes it
more effective. After lighting candle
chew up brimstone and pretend to swallow.
Blazing Sponge Trick. — Take 2 or 3
small sponges, place them in a ladle;
pour just enough oil or gasoline over
them to wet them. Be very careful not
to have enough oil on them to cause them
to drip. Set fire to the sponges and take
one of them up with the tongss and throw
the head back and drop the blazing
sponge in the mouth, expelling the
breatn all the time. Now close your
mouth quickly; this cuts off the air from
the flame and it immediately goes out.
Be careful not to drop the sponge on the
face or chin. Remove sponge under
cover of a handkerchief before placing
the second one in the mouth.
Burning Sealing Wax. — Take a stick
of common sealing wax in one hand and
a candle in the other, melt the wax over
the candle, and put on your tongue while
blazing. The moisture of the mouth
cools it almost instantly. Care should
be taken not to get any on the lips, chin,
or hands.
Demon Bowls of Fire. — The performer
has three 6^-inch brass bowls on a table,
and openly pours ordinary clean water
(may be drunk) into bowls, until each is
about half full. Then by simply passing
the hand over bowls they each take fire
and produce a flame 12 to 20 inches high.
Each bowl contains about 2 tea-
spoonfuls of ether, upon which is placed
a small piece of the metal potassium,
about the size of a pea. If the ether be
pure the potassium will not be acted
upon. When the water is poured into
the bowl the ether and potassium float
up, the latter acting vigorously on the
water, evolving hydrogen and setting fire
thereto, and to the ether as well.
The water may be poured into the
bowl and lighted at command. In this
case the potassium and ether are kept
separated in the bowl, the former in a
little cup on one side, and the latter in
the body of the bowl. The water is
poured in, and on rocking the bowl it is
caused to wash into the little cup, the
potassium floats up, and the fire is pro-
duced.
N. B. — The above tricks are not safe
in any but specially made bowls, i. e.,
bowls with the wide flange round edge to
prevent the accidental spilling of any
portion of the burning ether.
The Burning Banana. — Place some
alcohol in a ladle and set fire to it. Dip
a banana in the blazing alcohol and eat
it while it is blazing. As soon as it is
placed in the mouth the fire goes out.
Sparks from the Finger Tips. — Take a
small piece of tin about £ inch wide and
It inches long. Bend this in the shape
of a ring. To the center of this piece
solder another small piece of tin bent in
the shape of a letter U; between the
612
PYROTECHNICS
ends of this U place a small piece of wax
tape about A inch long. Take a piece of
small rubber tubing about 2 feet in length
and to one end of this attach a hollow
rubber ball, which you must partly fill
with iron filings. Place the rubber ball
containing the iron filings under the arm
and pass the rubber tube down through
the sleeve of the coat to the palm of the
hand; now place the tin ring upon the
middle finger, with the wax taper inside
of the hand. Light this taper. By
pressing the arm down sharply on the
rubber ball, the force of the air will drive
some of the iron filings through the rub-
ber tube and out through the flame of the
burning taper, when they will ignite and
cause a beautiful shower of sparks to ap-
pear to rain from the finger tips.
To Take Boiling Lead in the Mouth.—
The metal used, while not unlike lead in
appearance, is not the ordinary metal,
but is really an alloy composed of the
following substances:
Bismuth 8 parts
Lead 5- parts
Tin 2 parts
To prepare it, first melt the lead in a
crucible, then add the bismuth and finally
the tin, and stir well together with a piece
of tobacco pipe stem. This " fusible
metal" will melt in boiling water, and a
teaspoon cast from the alloy will melt if
very hot water be poured into it, or if
boiling water be stirred with it. If the
water be not quite boiling, as is pretty
sure to be the case if tea from a teapot is
used, in all probability the heat will be
insufficient to melt the spoon. But by
melting the alloy and adding to it a small
quantity of quicksilver a compound will
be produced, which, though solid at the
ordinary temperature, will melt in water
very much below the boiling point.
Another variety of easily fusible alloy is
made by melting together
Bismuth 7 to 8 parts
Lead 4 parts
Tin 2 parts
Cadmium 1 to 2 parts
This mixture melts at 158°, that given
above at 208° F.
Either one of the several alloys above
given will contain considerably less heat
than lead, and in consequence be the
more suitable for the purposes of a "Fire
King."
When a body is melted it is raised to a
certain temperature and then gets no
hotter, not even if the fire be increased —
all the extra heat goes to melt the re-
mainder of the substance.
Second Method. — This is done with a
ladle constructed similarly to the tin cup
in a previous trick. The lead, genuine in
this case, is, apparently, drunk from the
ladle, which is then tilted, that it may
be seen to be empty. The lead is con-
cealed in the secret interior of the ladle,
and a solid piece of lead is in conclusion
dropped from the mouth, as congealed
metal.
To Eat Burning Coals.— In the first
place make a good charcoal fire in the
furnace. Just before commencing the
act throw in three or four pieces of soft
pine. When burnt to a coal one cannot
tell the difference between this and char-
coal, except by sticking a fork into it.
This will not burn in the least, while the
genuine charcoal will. You can stick
your fork into these coals without any
difficulty, but the charcoal is brittle and
hard; it breaks before the fork goes into
it.
Chain of Fire. — Take a piece of candle
wick 8 or 10 inches long, saturated with
kerosene oil, squeeze out surplus oil.
j Take hpld of one end with your fire tongs,
light by furnace, throw back your head,
and lower it into your mouth while ex-
haling the breath freely. When all in,
close your lips and remove in handker-
chief.
NOTE. — Have a good hold of the end
with the tongs, for if it should fall it would
probably inflict a serious burn; for this
reason also no burning oil must drop
from the cotton.
Biting Off Red-Hot Iron.— Take a
piece of hoop iron about 2 feet long,
place it in a vise and bend it backwards
and forwards, about an inch from the
end, until it is nearly broken off. Put
this in a furnace until it becomes red hot,
then take it in your right hand, grasp the
broken end in your teeth, being careful
not to let it touch your lips or your
tongue, make a "face" as though it was
terribly hard to bite off, and let the
broken end drop from between your teeth
into a pail of water (which you should
always have at hand in case of fire),
when the hissing will induce the belief
that the portion bitten off is still "red
hot" — it may be, for that matter, if the
iron be nearly broken off in the first place
and if you have good teeth and are not
afraid to injure them.
Water Stirred Yellow, Scarlet, and
Colorless. — Obtain a glass tube with one
end hermetically sealed and drawn into a
fine point that will break easily. Into an
ale glass put a solution of mercury bi-
QUICK- WATER— RAT POISONS
613
chloride (corrosive sublimate, a deadly
poison) and into the tube a strong solu-
tion of potassium iodide so adjusted in
strength that it will redissolve the scarlet
precipitate formed by the union of the
two liquids. While stirring the solution
in the glass the bottom of the tube (ap-
parently a glass rod) is broken and a
small portion of its contents allowed to
escape, which produces a beautiful scar-
let. The balance of the fluid in the tube
is retained there by simply keeping the
thumb on the open top end. Continue
the stirring, allowing the balance of the
contents of the tube to escape, and the
scarlet fluid again becomes colorless.
Before the scarlet appears the liquid is
yellow.
To heighten the effect, another ale
glass, containing only clean water and a
solid glass stirring-rod, may be handed
to one of the company, with instructions
to do the same as the performer; the
result is amusing.
QUICK- WATER:
See Alloys.
QUILTS, TO CLEAN:
See Cleaning Preparations and Meth-
ods.
QUINCE EXTRACT:
See Essences and Extracts.
RAGS FOR CLEANING AND POLISH-
ING:
See Cleaning Preparations and Meth-
ods.
RASPBERRYADE POWDER:
See Salts, Effervescent.
RASPBERRY SYRUP:
See Essences and Extracts.
Rat Poisons
(See also Turpentine.)
Poisons for rats may be divided into
two classes, quick and slow. Potassium
cyanide and strychnine belong to the
first, and phosphorus and arsenic to the
second. Both should be kept away
from children, dogs, and cats, and this is
best done by putting them in places too
narrow for anything larger than a rat to
squeeze into. If the poison is too quick,
the effect of it is visible to the same rats
which saw the cause, and those which
have not eaten of the bait will leave it
alone. On the other hand, if it is too
slow, the poisoned rat may spread it to
edible things in the pantry, by vomiting.
Slow poisons generally cause the rat to
seek water, and when they are used
water should not be left about promis-
cuously.
The substances most useful as rat
poisons, and which are without danger
to the larger domestic animals, are plas-
ter of Paris and fresh squills. Less dan-
gerous than strychnine and arsenic are
the baryta preparations, of which the
most valuable is barium carbonate.
Like plaster of Paris, this substance,
when used for the purpose, must be
mixed with sugar and meal, or flour, and
as a decoy some strong-smelling cheese
should be added. In closed places there
should be left vessels containing water
easily accessible to the creatures.
One advantage over these substances
Sossessed by the squill is that it is greed-
y eaten by rats and mice. When it is
used, however, the same precaution as
to water, noted above, is necessary, a
circumstance too frequently forgotten.
In preparing the squill for this purpose,
by the addition of bacon, or fat meat of
any kind, the use of a decoy like cheese
is unnecessary, as the fats are suffi-
ciently appetizing to the rodents. It is
to be noted that only fresh squills should
be used for this purpose, as in keeping
the bulb the poisonous principle is de-
stroyed, or, at least, is so modified as to
seriously injure its value.
Squill Poisons. — T06 preparation of
the squill as a rat poison can be effected
in several different ways. Usually, af-
ter the removal of the outer peel, the
bulb is cut up into little slices and mixed
with milk and flour; these are stirred
into a dough or paste, which, with bits
of bacon rind, is put into the oven and
baked. Another plan is to grate the
squill on a grater and mingle the gratings
with mashed, boiled, or roasted potato.
This method of preparing them necessi-
tates the immediate use of the poison.
The following is, however, a stable prep-
aration that keeps well:
I. — Hog's lard 500 grams
Acid salicylic 5 grams
Squill 1 bulb
Beef suet 50 to 100 grams
Barium carbon-
ate 500 grams
Solution of am-
monium cop-
per acetate, 20
per cent 50 grams
Cut or grate the squill into very small
pieces, and fry it in the lard and suet un-
til it has acquired a dark-brown color and
814
RAT POISONS
the fats have taken up the characteristic
squill odor; then to the mess add the
other substances, and stir well together.
II. — Squill, bruised 4 ounces
Bacon, chopped fine 6 ounces
Flour or meal, enough.
Water, enough.
Make into a stiff mass, divide into
small cakes, and bake.
Phosphorus Poisons. — Next to the
squill in value as a poison comes phos-
pnorus in the shape of an electuary, or
in pills. For readily preparing the
electuary, when needed or ordered, it is
a good plan to keep on hand a phos-
phorated syrup made as follows:
To 200 parts of simple syrup, in a
strong flask, add 50 parts of phosphorus
and 10 parts of talc powder; place the
container in a suitable vessel and sur-
round it with water heated to 120° to
130° F., and let it stand until the phos-
phorus is melted. Now, cork the flask
well, tie down the cork, and agitate until
the mixture is completely cold. As a
measure of precaution, the flask should
be wrapped with a cloth.
To make the poison take 50 parts of
rye flour and mix with it 10 parts of pow-
dered sugar. To the mixture add about
40 parts of water and from 30 to 40 parts
of the phosphorated syrup, and mix the
mass thoroughly.
While it is best to make the phosphor-
ated syrup fresh every time that it is
required, a stable syrup can be made as
follows:
Heat together very carefully in a water
bath 5 parts of phosphorus, 3 parts of
sublimea sulphur, ana 30 parts oi' water,
until the phosphorus is completely
melted and taken up; then add 30 parts
of wheat flour and 6 parts of ground
mustard seed, and work up, with the ad-
dition of warm water from time to time,
if necessary, into a stiff paste, finally
adding and working in from 1 to 2 parts
of oil of anise.
Borax in powder, it may be noticed,
is also useful as a preservative of phos-
phorated paste or the electuary.
Miihsam gives the following formula
for an electuary of phosphorus for this
purpose:
I. — Phosphorus, granu-
lated 1 part
Rye flour 30 parts
Simple syrup 10 parts
Mustard seed, pow-
dered 1 part
Sublimed sulphur.. . 1 part
Water 10 parts
Proceed as indicated above.
Hager's formula for "Phosphorus
globules" is as follows:
II. — Phosphorus, amor-
phous 10 parts
Glycerine 20 parts
Linseed, powdered 100 parts
Meat extract 15 parts
Quark, recently coagulated, quan-
tity sufficient.
Mix, and make a mass, and divide
into 200 globules, weighing about 15
grains each. Roll in wheat flour, in
which a little powdered sugar has been
mixed.
Phosphorus electuary, made as indi-
cated above, may be smeared upon bits
of fried bacon, which should be tacked
firmly to a bit of board or to the floor.
It is essential that either flour or sugar,
or both, be strewn over the surface of
the phosphorus.
The most convenient in practice, on
the whole, are the phosphorus globules,
either made after Hager's formula, or,
more readily, by adding rye flour and
sugar to the electuary and working up
to a pill mass, or barium carbonate and
plaster may be added.
Arsenical Poisons. — The following are
some of the formulas given by Hager for
preparing globules, or pills, of arsenic:
I. — Arsenic, white, pow-
dered 100 parts
Soot from the kitch-
en 5 parts
Oil of anise 1 part
Lard, sufficient.
Wheat flour, sufficient.
Make into 400 globules.
II. — Beef suet 500 parts
Rye flour 500 parts
Arsenic, white, pow-
dered 50 parts
Ultramarine 10 parts
Oil of anise 1 part
Melt the suet, and add to the flour,
mix in the other ingredients, and work up
while hot, beating the mass with a roller.
Make 1,000 globules.
Strychnine Poisons. — The strychnine
preparations are also valuable in the
destruction of rats and mice. The first
of these in point of usefulness is strych-
nine-wheat, or strychnine-oats (Strych-
ninweizen or Strycnninhafer), in the pro-
portion of 1 part of strychnine to 100 or
150 parts of wheat or oat flour, prepared
by dissolving 1 part of strychnine in 40
to 50 parts of hot water, mixing well up
with the flour, and drying in the water
RAZOR PASTES— REFRIGERANTS
615
bath. Strychnine may also be used on
fresh or salted meat, sausage, etc., by
insertion of the powder, or the heads of
fried fish are opened and the powder
strewn on the inside. The latter is an
especially deadly method, since the odor
of the fish acts as a powerful lure, as also
do the bits of bacon or other fats used in
frying fish. Strong cheese is also a good
vehicle for strychnine, acting as a power-
ful lure for the rodents.
Strychnine sulph 1 drachm
Sugar milk 3 drachms
Prussian blue 5 grains
Sugar. . . ^ ounce
Oat flour | ounce
Nux Vomica Poison. —
Oatmeal 1 pound
Powdered nux vomica 1 ounce
Oil of anise 5 drops
Tincture of asafetida. 5 drops
Barium Poison. —
Barium carbonate 4 ounces
Sugar 6 ounces
Oatmeal 6 ounces
Oil of anise 4 drops
Oil of caraway 4 drops
RAZOR PAPER:
See Paper.
RAZOR PASTES:
See also Pastes.
The razor pastes, razor creams, etc.,
on the market, have for their cutting, or
sharpening, agent jewelers' rouge, or
rouge and emery. When emery is used
it should be ground to an impalpable
powder and levigated.
I. — The simplest formula is a mixture
in equal parts of rouge and emery pow-
der, rubbed up with spermaceti ointment.
Coke is also used as a cutting agent.
Suet, prepared lard, in fact, any greasy
or soapy substance, will answer for the
vehicle.
II. — Melt 1,000 parts of beef tallow
ano! pour 250 parts of oil to it. To this
mixture, which is uniformly combined
by thorough stirring, add in the same
manner 150 parts of washed emery, 100
parts of tin ashes, and 50 parts of iron
oxide. The stirring of these ingredients
must be continued until the mass is cool,
as otherwise they would be unevenly
distributed. The leather of the strop
should be rubbed with this grease, ap-
plying only small quantities at a time.
This renders it possible to produce a
very uniform coating, since little quanti-
ties penetrate the fibers of the leather
more easily.
III.— Tin putty (tin
ashes) .......... 2 parts
Colcothar ......... 2 parts
Forged iron scales
or filings ....... 1 part
Pure levantine hon-
ing stone finely
powdered ....... 7 parts
Beef suet .......... 3 parts
All the ingredients with the exception
of the suet should be finely powdered.
The suet is melted, the ingredients poured
in, and the whole thoroughly mixed to
form a doughy mass.
IV.— Colcothar ......... Imparts
Pumice stone ...... 1 J parts
Graphite ......... 4£ parts
Bloodstone (red
hematite) ....... 2 parts
Iron filings ....... 1 part
These ingredients are finely powdered,
washed, and mixed with the following:
Grafting wax ........
Soap ...............
Lard ...............
Olive oil ............
2 parts
2 parts
2 parts
2 parts
Naturally the fatty ingredients are to
be heated before the solid substances are
commingled with them.
The side of the blade to be polished
should be treated with the following
compositions:
a. Tin ashes (tin putty) rubbed down
to a fine powder on a honing stone and
mixed with axle grease.
b. Washed graphite mingled with
olive oil.
REDUCERS:
See Photography.
REDUCING PHOTOGRAPHS, SCALE
FOR:
See Photography.
REFLECTOR METAL:
See Alloys.
REFRIGERANTS.
I. — Potassium nitrate. .. 2
Ammonium chloride 2
Water .......... 5
II. — Potassium nitrate. . . 2
Ammonium chloride 2
Sodium sulphate. ... 4
Water 9
III. — Ammonia nitrate .
Water..
IV. — Sodium sulphate. ... 8
Dilute hydrochloric
acid . . 5
pounds
pounds
pints
pounds
pounds
pounds
pints
pounds
pints
parts
parts
616
REFRIGERATION— RHUBARB
V. — Snow 1 part
Water 1 part
Sulphuric acid 4 parts
VI. — Snow . 3 parts
Calcium chloride ... 4 parts
Refrigeration
If water to be frozen is placed in a tin
bucket or other receptacle it can be
readily congealed by putting it in a pail
containing a weak dilution of sulphuric
acid and water. Into this throw a
handful of common Glauber salts, and
the resulting cold is so great that water
immersed in the mixture will be frozen
solid in a few minutes, and ice cream or
ices may be quickly and easily prepared.
The cost is only a few cents. The same
process in an ice-cream freezer will do the
trick for ice cream.
Home -Made Refrigerators. — I. — Partly
fill with water a shallow granite-ware pan.
Place it in an open, shady window where
there is a good draught of air. In this
put bottles of water, milk, and cream
(sealed), wrapped with wet cloths reach-
ing into the water. Put butter in an
earthen dish deep enough to prevent
water getting in. Over this turn an
earthen flower-pot wrapped with a wet
cloth reaching into the water. The pan
should be fixed every morning and
evening. With several of these pans one
can keep house very comfortably without
ice.
II. — Procure a wire meat-safe — that is,
a box covered by wire netting on three
sides, with a fly-proof door. On top
place a deep pan filled with water. Take
a piece of burlap the height of the pan
and safe, and of sufficient length to reach
around the entire safe. Tack it fast
where the door opens and closes. Tuck
the upper edge in the water. Place it
where there is a draught and where the
dripping will do no damage. This con-
stitutes a well-ventilated refrigerator
chat costs nothing but water to maintain.
III. — Take a store box, any convenient
size, and place in this a smaller box,
having the bottom and space around the
sides packed with sawdust. Have a
galvanized iron pan made, the size of the
inside box and half as deep, to hold the
ice. Have the pan made with, a spout
6 inches long to drain off the water as
the ice melts. Bore a hole the size of the
spout through the double bottom and
sawdust packing to admit the spout.
Short legs may be nailed on the sides of
the box and a vessel set underneath to
catch the drippings. Put on a tight
board cover. A shelf may be placed in
the box above the ice. This box will
keep ice for three days.
IV. — Select a large cracker box with
a hinged cover. Knock out the bottom
and cut windows in each side, leaving a
3-inch frame, over which tack wire gauze.
In the coolest part of the cellar dig away
the earth to a level depth of 3 inches and
fit the box into the space.
Mix plaster of Paris to a consistency of
thick cream and pour into the box for a
i-inch thick bottom. Twenty-four hours
will harden it sufficiently. Put a hook
and catch on the lid. A box of this
sort can be cleaned easily, and insects
cannot penetrate it.
To Drain a Refrigerator. — I. — Have
a stout tin funnel made, 7 inches in diam-
eter at the top. The tube portion should
be at least 8 inches long and of uniform
diameter. Bore a hole through the
floor directly under the drain-pipe of the
refrigerator; insert the funnel, then force
a piece of rubber tubing (a tight fit) over
the funnel from the cellar side. Pass
the tubing through a hole cut in the
screen frame of a cellar window, and
drain into any convenient place. This
avoids the necessity of continually emp-
tying the drain-pan, and prevents the
overflow that frequently occurs when
it is forgotten.
II. — This simple device saves the in-
convenience of having a drip-pan under
the refrigerator: If the refrigerator is
placed near the outer wall get a piece of
rubber hose long enough to reach from
the waste pipe to the outside of the wall.
Bore a hole through the wall under the
refrigerator, where baseboard and floor
meet. Attach the hose to the waste-pipe
and pass through the hole in the wall. A
small trough outside should carry the
water away from the house.
REFRIGERATORS, THEIR CARE:
See Household Formulas.
REFLATING:
See Plating.
RESILVERING OF MIRRORS:
See Mirrors.
REVOLVER LUBRICANTS:
See Lubricants.
RHUBARB AS A REMEDY FOR
CHOLERA:
See Cholera Remedies.
ROLLER COMPOSITIONS— ROPES
617
RIBBONS FOR TYPEWRITERS:
See Typewriter Ribbons.
RICE PASTE:
See Adhesives.
RICE POWDER:
See Cosmetics.
RIFLE LUBRICANTS:
See Lubricants.
RING, HOW TO SOLDER A JEWELED :
See Solders.
RINGS ON METAL, PRODUCING COL-
ORED:
See Plating.
ROACH EXTERMINATORS:
See Insecticides.
ROBURITE:
See Explosives.
RODINAL DEVELOPER:
See Photography.
ROLLER COMPOSITIONS FOR PRINT-
ERS.
Rollers for transferring ink to types
have to possess special properties,
which have reference both to the nature
of the ink and that of the types to which
it is to be transferred. They must be as
little liable as possible to changes of tem-
perature. They must be sticky, but
only just sticky enough, and must have
elasticity enough to exert a uniform
pressure over the varying surface with
which they meet in the form. Origi-
nally, the composition was one of glue
and molasses in varying proportions, and
the only practical improvement that has
been made is the addition of glycerine.
This being slightly hygroscopic, helps to
keep the roller at the right degree of
softness, and being practically unfreez-
able, it is a great assistance in keeping
the rollers from hardening in cold
weather.
The recipes given in technical works
for printing roller compositions are
numerous and very different. All con-
tain glue and molasses, and it is the prac-
tice to put a larger proportion of glue in
rollers to be used in the summer than in
those intended for winter use. The fol-
lowing is a selection of recipes:
I. — Soak 8 pounds of glue in as much
water as it will absorb. When there is
no visible water, treat the glue till melted,
and add 7 pounds of hot molasses.
II. — Glue (summer) 8 pounds
Glue (winter) 4 pounds
Molasses 1 gallon
III. — Molasses 12 pounds
Glue 4 pounds
IV. — Molasses 24 pounds
Glue 16 pounds
Paris white 2 pounds
V. — Glue or gelatin 64 pounds
Water 48 pounds
Linseed oil 96 pounds
Molasses or sugar.
64 to 96 pounds
Chloride of calcium 3 pounds
Powdered rosin ... 8 pounds
Soak the glue in the water and then
liquefy by heat. Then stir in the oil,
first heated to 150° F. Then add the
molasses and the chloride of calcium,
and finally the fused rosin. The latter
ingredient is only to be added when very
tough rollers are required. This recipe
is interesting from the inclusion in it of
the hygroscopic salt, chloride of calcium,
the object of which is obviously to keep
the rollers moist.
ROOFS, HOW TO LAY GALVANIZED.
See Household Formulas.
ROOFS, PREVENTION OF LEAKAGE:
See Household Formulas.
ROOF PAINTS:
See Paint.
ROOM DEODORIZER:
See Household Formulas.
ROPES.
To protect ropes, cordage, and cloths
made of flax and hemp against rot, it has
been recommended to leave them for 4
days in a solution of copper sulphate, 20
parts by weight to a liter, then allow
them to dry, and then, to prevent the
copper sulphate being washed away by
the water, place in tar or a solution of
soap — 1 to 10. In the latter case an
insoluble copper soap is formed. To
secure the same result with twine, the
following process has been recom-
mended: Place the string for an hour in a
solution of glue, then allow to dry, and
place in a solution of tannin. After
removal from the tannin, again dry, and
soak in oil. The process first described
has been shown by experience to be very
effective; but to prevent the washing
away of the copper sulphate, it is ad-
visable to use the solution of soap in
preference to the tar, as articles steeped
in the latter substance are apt to become
stiff, and consequently brittle. The
618
ROT— RUBBER
treatment with glue and tannin in the
second process has the drawback that it
tends to make the string too stiff and
inflexible, and thus impair its usefulness.
ROPE LUBRICANTS:
See Lubricant.
ROPES, WATERPROOFING:
See Waterproofing.
ROSE CORDIAL:
See Wines and Liquors.
ROSEWOOD:
See Wood.
ROSE POWDERS:
See Cosmetics.
ROSIN, TESTS FOR, IN EXTRACTS:
See Foods.
ROSIN OIL:
See Oil.
ROSIN STICKS:
See Depilatories.
ROT:
Remedies for Dry Rot. — A good remedy
for dry rot is petroleum. The sick parts
of the wood are painted with it, which
causes the fungi to die, turn black, and
finally drop off. The best preventive of
dry rot is plenty of draught. If the por-
tions are already affected so badly that
they must be removed and renewed, the
freshly inserted wood is coated with "car-
bolineum" to prevent a fresh appearance
of dry rot. Another remedy is ordinary
salt, which is known to have a highly
hygroscopic action. It absorbs the moist-
ure of the wood, whereby it is itself dis-
solved, thus gradually impregnating the
planks, etc. In order to combat dry rot
with salt, proceed as follows: Throw salt
into boiling water until a perfectly satu-
rated solution is obtained. With this
repeatedly wash the wood and masonry
afflicted with dry rot. Wherever practi-
cable the salt may be sprinkled direct
upon the affected place.
ROUGE:
See Cosmetics.
ROUGE FOR BUFF WHEELS.
The rouge employed by machinists,
watchmakers, and jewelers, is obtained
by directly subjecting crystals of sul-
Chate of iron or copperas to a high heat
y which the sulphuric acid is expelled
and the oxide of iron remains. Those
portions least calcined, when ground,
are used for polishing gold and silver.
These are of bright crimson color. The
darker and more calcined portions are
known as 'crocus/' and are used for
polishing brass and steel. Others pre-
fer for the production of rouge the per-
oxide of iron precipitated by ammonia
from a dilute solution of sulphate of iron,
which is washed, compressed until dry,
then exposed to a low red heat and
ground to powder. Of course, there are
other substances besides rouge which
are employed in polishing, as powdered
emery, kieselguhr, carborundum, rotten
stone, etc.
ROUGE POWDER:
See Polishes.
ROUGH STUFF:
See Wood.
ROUP CURES:
See Veterinary Formulas.
Rubber
ARTIFICIAL RUBBER.
Austin G. Day tried hundreds of ex-
periments and took out many patents
for rubber substitutes. He was in a
measure, successful, his "Kerite" com-
pound proving of great value and being a
result of his seeking for something that
would wholly supplant rubber. As far
back as 1866 he made public the results
of some of his work, giving as formulas
for rubber substitutes the following
compounds:
I. — Linseed oil 2 pounds
Cottonseed oil 1 pound
Petroleum 2 pounds
Raw turpentine .... 2 pounds
Sulphur 2 pounds
Boil 2 hours.
II. — Linseed oil
Cottonseed oil ....
Petroleum. ......
Raw turpentine. . .
Castor oil
Sulphur
Boil \ hour.
III. — Linseed oil
Cottonseed oil
Petroleum
Raw turpentine . .
Liquid coal tar. . .
Peanut oil
Spirits turpentine.
Sulphur
Boil 35 minutes.
IV. — Linseed oil
Cottonseed oil. . . .
Petroleum
Raw turpentine. .
Liquid coal tar. . .
2 pounds
1 pound
1 pound
2 pounds
1 pound
2 pounds
2 pounds
1 pound
1 pound
\ pound
3 pounds
1 pound
1 pound
4 pounds
2 pounds
1 pound
2 pounds
| pound
2 pounds
RUBBER
619
Spirits turpentine. .. 1 pound
Rubber pound
Sulphur 2 pounds
Boil 1 hour.
In 1871 Mr. Day had brought his
experimenting down to the following
formula:
V. — Cottonseed oil 14 pounds
Linseed oil 14 pounds
Asphaltum 8 pounds
Coal tar 8 pounds
Sulphur 10 pounds
Camphor £ pound
In this the tar and asphaltum were
first mixed with the cottonseed oil, after
which was added the linseed oil and
camphor, and, last of all, the sulphur,
when the temperature was about 270° F.
A substitute designed to be used in
rubber compounding in place, say, of re-
claimed rubber, was made as follows:
VI. — Cottonseed oil 27 pounds
Coal tar 30 pounds
Earthy matter 5 pounds
To be mixed and heated to 300° F.,
and then strained and cooled to 200° F.
Then were added 27 pounds linseed oil,
the heat raised to 220° F., and 15 to 18
pounds of sulphur added, the heat being
continually raised until the mass was sul-
phurized. When the heat reached 240°
F., 1 to 1£ ounces of nitric acid were
added, and at 270° to 280° F., from 1 to
3 ounces camphor were added to help
the sulphurization. The resultant com-
pound was used on the following basis:
VII. — Para rubber 20 pounds
Litharge 5 pounds
Sulphur 1 pound
Above com-
pound 20 to 40 pounds
Mr. Day did not insist on the com-
pound quoted, but advised that the pro-
portions be varied as widely as the exi-
gencies of the case might demand.
Whiting, barytes, infusorial earth, white
lead, blacks, in fact almost any of the
oxides, carbonates, or earthy ^materials
commonly used in compounding, were
used in connection with his substitute,
as also were any grades of crude rubber.
Among other ingredients that he found
of use in making his substitutes were
vegetable and animal waxes, together
with ozokerite and paraffine. These
were only used in small quantities, and
always in connection with the linseed
and 'cottonseed oils, and generally as-
phaltum or coal tar. One of his
compounds also called for a quantity of
golden sulphuret of antimony, presum-
ably to assist in the sulphurization, and
a small amount of tannic acid.
Another line of experimenting that is
interesting, and that will yet produce
good results, although so far it has not
amounted to much, is in the use of cellu-
lose. A very simple formula is of
French origin and calls for the treating
of cellulose with sulphuric acid, washing,
drying, granulating, treating with resi-
nate of soda — which is afterwards pre-
cipitated by sulphate of alumina — then
drying and molding under pressure. As
a matter of fact, the resultant mass would
not be mistaken for rubber. An Eng-
lish formula is more like it. This con-
sists of
VIII.— Cellulose 15 pounds
Pitch 25 pounds
Asphalt 20 pounds
Silica 20 pounds
Mastic 5 pounds
Bitumen 5 pounds
Rosin 10 pounds
Coal tar 12 pounds
This makes a thick gummy varnish
which is of little use except as for its
waterproof qualities. Allen's formula
for a cellulose substitute might have a
value if it were carried further. It is
made up of 100 pounds of rosinous wood
pulp treated with animal gelatin, 100
pounds asphalt, and 10 pounds asphalt
oil, all heated and molded.
The Greening process, which is Eng-
lish, is more elaborate than Allen's, but
seems a bit laborious and costly. This
process calls for the treatment of the
cellulose by a mixture of sulphuric acid
and nitrate of potash, and, after drying,
a treatment to a bath of liquid carbonic
acid. When dry again, it is mixed in a
retort with refined rosin, gum benzoin,
castor oil, and methylated alcohol. The
distillate from this is dried by redistilling
over anhydrous lime.
Another curious line of substitutes is
that based upon the use of glue and glyc-
erine. Some of these have uses, while
others, that look very attractive, are of no
use at all, for the simple reason that they
will absorb water almost as readily as a
dry sponge. The first of these is more
than 30 years old and is said to be of
French origin. The formula is:
IX. — Glue 4 pounds
Glycerine 8 ounces
Nutgall 3 ounces
Acetic acid, 1 pound in 5 pounds
of water.
Ten years later this was approached by
an English formula in which in place of
RUBBER
the nutgall and acetic acid, chromic and
tannic acids were substituted, and a
modicum of ground cork was added as a
cheapener probably. Some four years
later an ingenious Prussian gave out a
formula in which to the glue and glycerine
and tannic acid were added Marseilles
soap and linseed oil. None of the above
have ever had a commercial value, the
nearest approach being the glue and
glycerine compound used as a cover for
gas tubing.
The substitutes that have really come
into use generally are made either from
linseed, cottonseed, or maize oil. Scores
of these have been produced and thou-
sands of dollars have been spent by
promoters and owners in trying to make
these gums do just what crude rubber
will. A German formula which was
partially successful is
X. — Linseed oil, in solu-
tion 80 pounds
Lime- hardened
rosin, in solution 50 pounds
Add to above
Sulphur 8 pounds
Linseed oil 42 pounds
Add 20 pounds sulphur and heat to
375° F.
Rubber and Rubber Articles. — As re-
gards the action of coal gas on rubber
tubes, it has been observed that it is
weakest on ordinary gray rubber which
withstands it the longest, and gives off
no odor. Red rubber is more readily
affected, and the black kind still more so.
To prevent rubber tubes from drying
up and becoming brittle, they should be
coated with a 3 per cent aqueous solution
of carbolic acid, which preserves them.
If they have already turned stiff and
brittle, they can be rendered soft and
pliant again by being placed in ammonia
which has been made liquid with double
the amount of water.
In France rubber tubes are used as a
core for casting pipes from cement and
sand. In order to construct a connected
pipe conduit in the ground, a groove is
dug and a layer of cement mortar spread
out. Upon this the rubber tube is laid,
which is wrapped up in canvas and in-
flated. The remaining portion of the
channel is then filled up with cement
mortar, and as soon as it has set, the air
is let out of the rubber hose and the latter
is pulled out and used as before.
To cover cloth with rubber, there are
chiefly employed for dissolving the rub-
ber, naphtna, alcohol, and benzol. They
are mixed with purified solid paraffine,
and ground together.
Rubber boots and shoes are rendered
waterproof by melting 4 parts of sper-
maceti and 1 part of rubber on a moderate
fire, adding tallow or fat, 10 parts, and
lastly 5 parts of copal varnish or amber
varnish. This mixture is applied on the
shoes with a brush. It should be stated
that the rubber used for this purpose
must be cut up very small and allowed 4
to 5 hours to dissolve.
To rid rubber articles of unpleasant
odor, cover both sides with a layer of
animal charcoal and heat to about 140° F.
To prevent gas from escaping through
rubber hose, cover it with a mixture pre-
pared as follows: Dissolve 5 parts of
gum arabic and 3 parts of molasses in 15
parts of white wine and add, with con-
stant stirring, 6 parts of alcohol in small
quantities. Stirring is necessary to pre-
vent the alcohol from precipitating the
gum arabic.
Repairing Rubber Goods. — First, clean
off all adherent matter, and dry thorough-
ly. Varnish or lacquer, as for instance on
rubber shoes, may be removed with sand
or emery paper, or even with a file, in the
absence 'of one of these. The surface
thus produced is then rubbed with ben-
zine. A solution of Para rubber in ben-
zine is then • painted over the surface
around the break or tear, and a strip of
natural rubber fitted over it. Then pre-
pare a vulcanizing solution as follows:
Sulphur chloride.. . . 18 parts
Benzine. 400 parts
Carbon disulphide . . 300 parts
This is applied to the edges of the joint
by means of a pledget of cotton wrapped
on the end of a little stick, and press the
jointed parts well together.
One may repair rubber bulbs by the
following method: Put some pure gum in
three times its bulk of benzine, and cork
tightly. Let stand several days. Get
some rubber in sheet form; it will be bet-
ter if it is backed with cloth. To make
a patch, dampen some little distance
around the hole to be mended with
benzine. After a moment, scrape with a
knife; repeat the process several times
till the site to be patched is thoroughly
clean. Cut a patch from sheet of rubber
a little larger than the hole to be mended,
and apply to its surface several coats of
the benzine solution. Then apply a
good coat of the solution to both patch
and about the hole, and press the patch
firmly in place. Again apply the solu-
tion to make coating over the patch, and
allow to dry till it will not stick to the
finger. Do not use for several days.
Cracked rubber goods may be sue-
RUBBER
621
cessfully mended in the following man-
ner: Before patching, the cracked sur-
faces to unite well must be dried, entirely
freed from all dirt and dust and greased
well, otherwise the surfaces will not com-
bine. In case of a cover, waterproof
coat, or rubber boots, etc., take a mod-
erately thick piece of india rubber, suited
to size of the object, cut off the edges
obliquely with a sharp knife moistened in
water, coat the defective places as well
as the cut pieces of rubber with oil of
turpentine, lay the coated parts together
and subject them for 24 hours to a
moderate pressure. The mended por-
tions will be just as waterproof as the
whole one. Rubber cushions or articles
containing air are repaired in a very
simple manner, after being cleaned as
aforesaid. Then take colophony, dis-
solve it in alcohol (90 per cent) so that
a thick paste forms, smear up the holes,
allow all to harden well, and the rubber
article, pillow, ball, knee caps, etc., may
be used again.
Softening Rubber. — The hardening of
gum articles is generally referable to
these having been kept for a long time in
some warm, dry place, though keeping them
in the cold will produce the same effect.
Hardness and brittleness, under any rea-
sonable care and conditions, are usually
signs of an inferior article of goods. Ar-
ticles of Para rubber, of good workmanship,
usually maintain their elasticity for a very
long time. Before attempting to soften
hollow rubber ware, such as flasks, water
bags, or bottles, etc., they should be well
scrubbed with a wire brush (bottle
cleaner) and warm water, so as to re-
move all dirt and dust. This scrubbing
should be continued until the wash water
comes away clean and bright. For
softening, the best agent is dilute water
of ammonia, prepared by mixing phar-
macopreial ammonia water, 1 part, and
water, 2 parts. There should be enough
of this to cover the articles, inside and
out. Let them remain in the mixture
until the ammonia has evaporated.
Warm water works better than cold.
From 1 to 2 hours will be long enough,
as a usual thing. Thick and massive
articles such as large rubber tubing, re-
quire more energetic treatment, and the
journal recommends for the treatment of
these that they be filled nearly full with
the ammonia mixture, corked at both
ends, and coiled up in a kettle, or other
vessel, of sufficient size, warm water
poured in sufficient to cover the coil com-
pletely, and lightly boiled for from 1 to 2
nours. The water lost by evaporation
should be replaced from time to time,
and the vessel should never be allowed
to boil violently. When the proper time
has arrived (and this must be learned, it
appears, by experience, as the article
quoted gives no directions save those
translated), remove from the fire, and al-
low to cool gradually.
Glycerine has been also recommended,
and it may be used with advantage in
certain cases. The articles must first
be cleaned with the brush and warm
water, as above detailed. Heat them in
water and rub them with a wad of cot-
ton soaked in glycerine, drawing the wad
over them, backwards and forwards.
This wad should be wrapped with good
stout wire, the ends of which are pro-
longed, to serve as a handle. Where
possible the articles should be stricken
with the glycerine inside and out, the
article being, naturally, held out of the
boiling water, sufficiently, at least, to
make bare the part being rubbed at the
time. Let rest for 24 hours, and repeat
this process. With goods kept in stock,
that show a tendency to grow brittle,
this treatment should be repeated every
6 months or oftener. Never put away
tubing, etc., treated in this manner until
every particle of moisture has drained off
or evaporated.
Another authority, Zeigler, has the
following on this subject: Tubing,
bands, and other articles of vulcanized
caoutchouc that have become brittle and
useless, may be restored to usefulness,
indeed, to their pristine elasticity, by
treating them as follows: First, put them
in a hot aqueous solution of tannic acid
and tartar emetic. Next, transfer them
to a cold aqueous solution of tannic acid
and calcium sulphate. Mix the two so-
lutions and heat to about the boiling
point, and transfer the articles to the hot
solution. This treatment should bemain-
tained from 1 day to 3 or 4, according to
the nature and condition of the articles.
To restore rubber stoppers that have
become too hard for usefulness, digest
them in 5 per cent soda lye for about 10
days at 86° to 104° F., replacing the lye
repeatedly. Next, wash the stoppers in
water and scrape off the softened outer
layer with a knife, until no more can be
removed. The stoppers (which have
become quite soft and elastic again) are
next rinsed in warm water to remove the
caustic soda. If it is desired to trim
them it should be done with a knife
moistened with soap spirit.
Treatment and Utilization of Rubber
Scraps. — The scraps, assorted according
RUBBER— RUM, BAY
to their composition, are first cleaned by
boiling to remove the adhering dirt, ab-
sorbed and adhering acids, salts, etc., as well
as to eliminate the free sulphur. Next,
the waste is ground between rollers and
reduced to powder in emery grinders
with automatic feeding. In many cases
the material obtained may be added at
once dry to the mixture, but generally it
first receives a chemical treatment.
This is carried out by boiling in caustic
soda solution, or sulphuric or hydro-
chloric acid respectively, and steaming
for about 20 hours with 4 atmospheres
pressure.
According to another method, the
ground scraps are steamed with soda lye
under pressure, washed twice thoroughly
ror the elimination of the lye, and dried
in the vacuum. Subsequently mix be-
tween cold rollers with 5 to 10 per cent of
benzol or mineral oil and steam for some
hours under hydraulic pressure at 4
atmospheres. The product thus ob-
tained is rolled in plates and added to
the mixture. The finely ground dry
waste must not be stored for a long time
in large quantities, as it hardens very
easily and takes fire.
Old articles of vulcanized rubber are
first "devulcanized" by grinding, boiling
with caustic soda, and washing thor-
oughly. After drying, the scraps are
heated to 302° F. with linseed oil in a
kettle provided with stirring mechanism
which is kept in continual motion.
When the rubber has dissolved, a quan-
tity of natural or coal-tar asphalt is added,
and as soon as the contents of the kettle
have become well mixed, the tempera-
ture is raised so high that dense fumes
begin to rise and air is forced through
the mass until a cooled sample shows
the desired consistence. This compo-
sition being very tough and flexible,
forms an excellent covering for electric
cables. It finds many other uses, the
proportions of rubber, asphalt, and oil
being varied in accordance with the
purpose for which it is designed.
Vulcanization. — Besides the Good-
year, Mason, and other patented proc-
esses, the process now usually followed
in vulcanizing rubber stamps and simi-
lar small objects of rubber, is as fol-
lows:
Sulphur chloride is dissolved in car-
bon aisulphide in various proportions,
according to the degree of hardness the
vulcanized object is to receive; the rub-
ber cast is plunged in the solution and
loft there from 60 to 70 seconds. On
removing, it is placed in a box or space
warmed to 80° F., and left long enough
for the carbon disulphide to evaporate,
or about 90 to 100 seconds. It is then
washed in a weakly alkaline bath of
water, and dried.
Another method (recommended by
Gerard) depends upon letting the rubber
lie in a solution of potassium ter or penta
sulphide, of 25° Be., heated to about
280° F. for 3 hours.
Testing Rubber Gloves. — In testing
rubber gloves it is best to inflate them
with air, and then put them under water.
Thus one may discover many small holes
in new ones which otherwise would have
been impossible to find.
Dissolving Old Rubber. — The material
is shredded finely and then heated, under
pressure, for several hours, with a strong
solution of caustic soda. All cloth, paint,
glue, fillers, etc., in the rubber are disin-
tegrated, but the rubber is not affected.
The mass is then washed repeatedly with
water, to remove all alkali, and the re-
sultant pure rubber may then be formed
into sheets.
Rubber Stamps.— Set up the desired
name and address in common type, oil
the type and place a guard about £ inch
high around the form. Mix plaster of
Paris to the proper consistence, pour in
and allow it to set. Have the vulcanized
rubber all ready, as made in Jong strips
3 inches wide and | of an inch thick, cut
off the size of the intended stamp, remove
the plaster cast from the type, and place
both the cast and the rubber in a screw
press, applying sufficient heat to thor-
oughly soften the rubber. Then turn
down the screw hard and let it remain
until the rubber receives the exact im-
pression of the cast and becomes cold,
when it is removed, neatly trimmed with
a sharp knife, and cemented to the han-
dle ready for use.
RUBBER CEMENTS:
See Adhesives.
RUBBER GLOVES, SUBSTITUTE FOR :
See Antiseptics.
RUBBER, ITS PROPERTIES AND
USES IN WATERPROOFING:
See Waterproofing.
RUBBER YARNISHES:
See Varnishes.
RUBY SETTINGS:
See Watchmakers' Formulas.
RUOLTZ METAL:
See Alloys.
RUM, BAY:
See Bay Rum.
RUST PREVENTIVES
628
Rust Preventives
(See also Enamels, Glazes, Paints,
Varnishes, Waterproofing.)
In spite of the numerous endeavors to
protect metal objects from oxidation, a
thoroughly satisfactory process has not
yet been found, and we still have to re-
sort to coatings and embrocations.
By covering the metals with a pale,
colorless linseed-oil varnish, a fat or
spirit lacquer, an unfailing protection
against oxidation is obtained. This
method, though frequently employed,
however, is too laborious and expensive
to admit of general use, and instead we
frequently see employed ordinary or
specially composed greases, especially
for scythes, straw-knives, and many
other bright iron goods. These greases
are not suited to retard oxidation, for
they are without exception acid-reacting
bodies, which absorb oxygen in the air
and under the action of light, thus rather
assisting oxidation than retarding it. A
covering of wax dissolved in oil of tur-
pentine would be more recommendable,
because wax is an impervious body, and
a firm and rather hard layer remains
after evaporation of the oil of turpen-
tine, which excludes the air. If the
treatment with the wax salve is carefully
attended to no other objection can be
urged against this preserving agent than
that it is likewise comparatively ex-
pensive if used in large quantities. As
regards the greases, and treatment with
petroleum or vaseline, the easy attrition of
these substances is another drawback,
which makes a lasting protection impos-
sible.
According to Shedlok, cast-iron ar-
ticles are treated with acids, then ex-
posed to the action of steam, hot or cold
water, and dried. The receptacle is ex-
hausted of air and a solution of pitch,
rosin, rubber, or caoutchouc, applied
under pressure. Objects prepared in
this manner are said to be impervious
even to weak acids.
The inoxidizing process of Ward is
founded on the simultaneous employ-
ment of silicates and heat. The cast
iron or wrought iron are coated with a
siliceous mass by means of a brush or
by immersion. This covering dries
quickly, becomes liquid when the articles
are exposed to a suitable heat, and soaks
into trie pores of the metal, forming a
dense and uniform coat of dull black
color after cooling, which is not changed
by long-continued influence of the at-
mosphere, and which neither scales nor
peels from the object. By the admixture
of glass coloring matters to the siliceous
mass, decorated surfaces may be pro-
duced.
Another inoxidation process for cast
iron is the following: The cast-iron ob-
jects, such as whole gas chandeliers,
water pipes, ornaments, balcony railings,
cooking vessels, etc., are laid upon an
iron sliding carriage 3.5 meters long and
are exposed in a flame furnace of special
construction first 15 minutes to the in-
fluence of gas generators with oxidizing
action, then 20 minutes to such with re-
ducing action^ After being drawn out and
cooled off the inoxidized pieces take on a
uniform slate-blue shade of color, but
can be enameled and ornamented in any
manner desired. In applying the enamel
the corroding with acid is obviated, for
which reason the enamel stands ex-
ceedingly well.
A bronze-colored oxide coating which
withstands outward influences fairly
well, is produced as follows: The bright-
ly polished and degreased objects are ex-
posed from 2 to 5 minutes to the vapors
of a heated mixture of concentrated
hydrochloric acid and nitric acid (1:1)
until the bronze color becomes visible
on the articles. After these have been
rubbed well with vaseline, heat once
more until the vaseline commences to
decompose. After cooling, the object is
smeared well with vaseline. If vapors
of a mixture of concentrated hydrochlo-
ric acid and nitric acid are allowed to
act on the iron object, light reddish-
brown shades are obtained, but if acetic
acid is added to the above named two
acids, oxide coatings of a bronze-yellow
color can be obtained by the means of
the vapors. By the use of different mix-
tures of acids any number of different
colorings can be produced.
"Emaille de fer contre-oxide" is the
name of an enamel which is said to protect
iron pipes cheaply. The enamel is com-
posed as follows: One hundred and thirty
parts powdered crystal glass, 20.5 parts
soda, 12 parts boracic acid. These sub-
stances mixed in the most careful manner
are melted together in crucibles, the mass
is chilled and transformed into a fine
powder by crushing and grinding. The
iron pipes and other objects of iron are
. first cleaned in the usual manner by
corroding, dried and then coated with a
very dilute gum arabic solution or any
other gluing agent, and the powdered
mass is spread over them by means of
a sieve. The objects thus powdered are
put in a room which is heated to 160° C.
to drive out all moisture and are heated
624
RUST PREVENTIVES
to dark redness, at which temperature
the oxide coating melts.
Those processes, which produce a
black protoxide layer on the iron by
heating iron objects in supersaturated
aqueous vapor, have not stood the test,
as the layer formed will drop off or peel
off after a short time, thus opening the
way for rust after all.
The anti-rust composition called rub-
ber oil is prepared as follows, according
to the specification of the patent: The
crude oil obtained by the dry distillation
of brown oil, peat and other earthy sub-
stances are subjected to a further dis-
tillation. Thinly rolled India rubber,
cut in narrow strips, is saturated with
four times the bulk of the oil and left
alone for a week or so. The mass thus
composed is then subjected to the action
of mineral sperm oil or a similar sub-
stance, until an entirely uniform clear
substance has formed. This substance,
which is applied on the metallic surfaces
in as thin a layer as possible, forms a
sort of film after slowly drying, which is
perfectly proof against atmospheric in-
fluences.
The rust-preventive composition of
Jones & Co., Sheffield, is a composition
of wax, fat, turpentine, and small quan-
tities of iron oxide.
According to a process patented by A.
Buchner in Germany, the iron objects
are first painted with a mixture of an
alkaline glue solution and rosin soap.
The alkaline mass enters all the pores
and fissures and "prevents the rust from
extending under the coating. After the
first coat is dry a second one is applied
of the following composition: Five parts
linseed oil boiled with peroxide of man-
ganese; 2.25 parts turpentine; 0.25 parts
benzol; 20 parts zinc dust, carbonate of
calcium, lead oxide, or peroxide of
manganese. The mixing of the liquid
with the powders must be done im-
mediately before use, as the mass solidi-
fies after 10 hours, and is then no longer
of working consistency. The second
coating, which should only be thin,
hardens quickly. The paint is weather-
proof, does not peel off or blister, and
adheres so firmly that it can only be re-
moved with mechanical means.
A patented process to prevent rusting
of wrought or cast iron consists in ap-
plying with a brush a strong solution of
potassium dichromate and drying in a
stove or over an open fire. Drying at
ordinary temperature is not sufficient.
To ascertain if the heat is strong enough
the iron is moistened with a little water.
So long as this takes up any color the
heat must be increased. When the
proper degree of heat is reached a fine
deep black layer results, which is not
acted upon by water, and protects the
surface from the action of the atmosphere.
A permanent lustrous rust preventive
is secured as follows: The well-cleaned
iron parts are suspended for a few
minutes in a blue vitriol solution, so that
a delicate skin of copper forms on the
surface; if the pieces rinsed off with
water are then moved about for a few
minutes in a solution of sodium hypo-
sulphite faintly acidulated with hydro-
chloric acid, they assume a blue-black
coating of copper sulphide, which is
equally permanent in air and in water.
Tne black surface may be immediately
rinsed with water, dried with a rag or
blotting paper, and polished at once. It
possesses a steel-blue luster, adheres well
to the iron, will stand treatment with the
scratch brush, and protects against rust
in a most satisfactory manner.
Black Sheet Rust Preventive.— Before
black plate is ready to receive a rust pro-
tective coating, it is necessary to render
the surface free from grease and scales,
for which purpose the sheet iron is placed
for some time into a warmed solution of
10 parts of sulphuric acid in 100 parts
of water, whereby the impurities become
detached, a process which may be as-
sisted and accelerated by scouring with
sand. Then rinse in clean water and
rub dry in sawdust. The sheets thus
prepared are placed for a short while
into a feeble solution of blue vitriol,
where they assume a reddish coloring.
Next, they are rinsed in water, and after
that moved to and fro, for a short time,
in a feeble solution of hyposulphite of
soda acidulated with a little hydrochloric
acid. The result is a dark-blue coating
on the sheets, which prevents all oxida-
tion.
To Keep Machinery Bright.— I.— In
order to keep machinery from rusting
take 1 ounce of camphor, dissolve it in
1 pound of melted lard; take off the
scum, and mix as much fine black lead
as will give it iron color. Clean the
machinery and smear it with this mix-
ture. After 24 hours, rub clean with
soft linen cloth. It will keep clean for
months under ordinary circumstances.
II. — Mastic, transparent
grains 10 parts
Camphor 5 parts
Sandarac 5 parts
Gum elemi 5 parts
Alcohol, wood, quantity sufficient
to dissolve.
RUST PREVENTIVES
625
Mix and cover the articles with the
solution. The latter will take the lac-
quer better if warmed slightly, but may
be easily covered in the cold, if neces-
sary.
Magnetic Oxide. — A layer of magnetic
oxide is a good preservative from rust.
To obtain it the objects are placed in
the furnace at a temperature sufficient
for decomposing steam. Steam super-
heated to 1,040° F. is then injected for
from 4 to 6 hours. The thickness of
the layer of oxide formed varies with the
duration of the operation. This process
can replace zincing, enameling, and tin-
ning.
The deposit of magnetic oxide may
also be obtained by electrolysis. The
iron object is placed at the anode in a
bath of distilled water heated to 176° F.
The cathode is a copper plate, or the
vessel itself, if it is of iron or copper. By
electrolysis a layer of magnetic oxide is
formed. Other peroxides may be de-
posited in the same manner. With an
alkaline solution of litharge, a very ad-
herent, brilliant, black deposit of perox-
ide of lead is secured. Too energetic a
current must be avoided, as it would
cause a pulverulent deposit. To obtain
a good coating it is necessary, after put-
ting the objects for a moment at the
positive pole, to place them at the other
pole until the oxide is completely re-
duced, and then bring them back to their
first position.
Paper as Protection for Iron and Steel.
— That paraffine paper is a very good
protector of iron and steel has been
proven by tests conducted by Louis H.
Barker for the Pennsylvania Railroad.
The mode of applying the paraffine
paper is as follows: After the rust is
carefully cleaned off by means of stiff
wire brushes, a tacky paint is applied.
The paper is then covered over and
tightly pressed upon the painted surface,
the joints of the paper slightly lapping.
As soon as the paper is in place it is ready
for the outside coat of paint. Iron and
steel girders and beams subjected to the
action of smoke and gases may thus be
admirably protected from decomposi-
tion.
Anti-Rust Paper for Needles.— This is
paper covered with logwood, and pre-
pared from a material to which fine
graphite powder has been added, and
which has been sized with glue and alum.
It is used for wrapping around steel
goods, such as sewing needles, etc., and
protecting them against rust. Accord-
ing to Lake, the paper is treated with
sulphuric acid, like vegetable parchment,
the graphite being sprinkled on before
the paper is put into the water.
Rust Paper. — Rust paper is produced
by coating strong packing paper with
linseed-oil varnish, size, or any other
binder, and sprinkling on the powder
given in previous formula. For use the
paper must be moistened with petroleum.
Anti-Rust Pastes.— I.— This prepar-
ation serves for removing rust already
present, as well as for preventing same,
by greasing the article with it: Melt 5
parts of crude vaseline on the water bath,
and mix with 5 parts of finely levigated
pOAvdered pumice stone into a uniform
mass. To the half-way cooled mass add
\ part of crude acid oxalate of potassium
(sorrel salt) in a finely powdered state
and grind into complete homogeneity.
II. — Dry tallow, 25 parts; white wax,
23 parts; olive oil, 22 parts; oil of tur-
pentine, 25 parts; mineral oil, 10 parts.
Apply with a brush at the fusing tem-
perature of the mixture.
Rust Prevention for Iron Pipes. — The
pieces of pipe are coated with tar and
filled with light wood sawdust, which is
set afire. This method will fully pro-
tect the iron from rust for an unlimited
period, rendering a subsequent coat alto-
gether superfluous.
Rust Preventive for Tools, etc. — I. —
To preserve tools, dies, etc., from rust,
they should be greased well with yellow
vaseline. To use oil is not advisable,
since all oils, except the dear ones, which
are too expensive for this purpose, con-
tain a certain percentage of acid that has
an injurious effect upon the steel and
iron articles. For greasing the cavities
use a hard brush.
II. — Carefully heat benzine and add
half its weight of white wax, which dis-
solves completely in this ratio. This
solution is applied to the tools by means
of a brush. It is also said to protect
against the action of acidiferous fumes.
III. — Take a pound of vaseline and
melt with it 2 ounces of blue ointment —
what druggists call one-third — and add,
to give it a pleasant odor, a few drops of
oil of wintergreen, cinnamon, or sassa-
fras. When thoroughly mixed pour into
a tin can — an old baking-powder can
will do. Keep a rag saturated with the
preventive to wipe tools that are liable to
rust.
To Separate Rusty Pieces. — By boiling
the objects in petroleum, success is cef-
626
RUST PREVENTIVES— SALTS
tain. It is necessary to treat them with
alcohol or spirit to avoid subsequent
oxidation, petroleum being in itself an
oxidant.
To Protect Zinc Roofing from Rust. —
Zinc sheets for roofing can easily be pro-
tected against rust by the following
simple process. Clean the plates by
immersing them in water to which 5 per
cent of sulphuric acid has been added,
then wash with pure water, allow to dry
and coat with asphalt varnish. Asphalt
varnish is prepared by dissolving 1 to 2
parts asphalt in 10 parts benzine; the
solution should be poured evenly over
the plates, and the latter placed in an
upright position to dry.
RUST SPOT REMOVER:
See Cleaning Preparations and Meth-
ods.
SACCHARINE IN FOOD:
See Food.
SADDLE GALLS:
See Veterinary Formulas.
SADDLE SOAP:
See Soap.
SALAMANDRINE DESSERT:
See Pyrotechnics.
SALICYL (SWEET):
See Dentifrices.
SALICYLIC ACID IN FOOD:
See Foods.
SALICYLIC SOAP:
See Soap.
Salts, Effervescent
Granulated effervescent salts are pro-
duced by heating mixtures of powdered
citric acid, tartaric acid, sodium bi-
carbonate, and sugar to a certain temper-
ature, until they assume the consistency
of a paste, which is then granulated and
dried.
If effervescent caffeine citrate, anti-
pyrin, lithium citrate, etc., are to be pre-
pared, the powder need not be dried be-
fore effecting the mixture, but if sodium
phosphate, sodium sulphate, or magnes-
ium sulphate are to be granulated, the
water of crystallization must first be re-
moved by drying, otherwise a hard, in-
soluble and absolutely non-granulable
mass will be obtained. Sodium phos-
phate must lose 60 per cent of its weight
in drying, sodium sulphate 56 per cent,
and magnesium sulphate 23 per cent.
Naturally, water and carbonic acid
escape on heating, and the loss will in-
crease with the rise of temperature. For
the production of the granulation mass it
must not exceed 158° F., and for drying
the grains a temperature of 122° F. is
sufficient.
The fineness of the mesh should vary
according to the necessary admixture of
sugar and the size of the grains.
If the ingredients should have a
tendency to cling to the warm bottom,
an effort should be made immediately
upon the commencement of the reaction
to cause a new portion of the surface to
come in contact with the hot walls.
When the mass is of the consistency
of paste it is pressed through a wire sieve,
paper or a fabric being placed under-
neath. Afterwards dry at sufficient heat.
For wholesale manufacture, surfaces of
large size are employed, which are heated
by steam.
In the production of substances con-
taining alkaloids, antipyrin, etc., care
must be taken that they do not become
colored. It is well, therefore, not to use
heat, but to allow the mixture to stand in
a moist; condition for 12 hours, adding
the medicinal substances afterwards and
kneading the whole in a clay receptacle.
After another 12 hours the mass will
have become sufficiently paste-like, so
that it can be granulated as above.
According to another much employed
method, the mass is crushed with alcohol,
then rubbed through a sieve, and dried
rapidly. This process is somewhat
dearer, owing to the great loss of alcohol,
but presents the advantage of furnishing
a better product than any other recipe.
Effervescent magnesium citrate can-
not be very well made; for this reason
the sulphate was used in lieu of the
citrate. A part of the customary ad-
mixture of sulphate is replaced by sugar
and aromatized with lemon or similar
substances.
An excellent granulation mass is ob-
tained from the following mixture by
addition of alcohol:
Parts by
weight
Sodium bicarbonate 30
Tartaric acid. 15
Citric acid 13
Sugar 30
The total loss of this mass through
granulation amounts to from 10 to 15 per
cent.
To this mass, medicinal substances,
such as antipyrin, caffeine citrate, lithium
citrate, lithium salicylate, phenacetin,
piperacin, ferric carbonate, and pepsin
may be added, as desired,
SALTS
627
In order to produce a quinine prepara-
tion, use tincture of quinine instead of
alcohol for moistening; the quinine
tincture is prepared with alcohol of 96
per cent.
Basis for Effervescent Salts. —
Sodium bicarbonate,
dried and powdered 53 parts
Tartaric acid, dried
and powdered 28 parts
Citric acid, unefflor-
esced crystals 18 parts
Powder the citric acid and add the
tartaric acid and sodium bicarbonate.
This basis may be mixed with many of
the medicaments commonly used in the
form of granular effervescent salts, in
the proportion which will properly rep-
resent their doses and such substances
as sodium phosphate, magnesium sul-
phate, citrated caffeine, potassium bro-
mide, lithium citrate, potassium citrate,
and others, will produce satisfactory
products. A typical formula for effer-
vescent sodium phosphate would be as fol-
lows:
Sodium phosphate,
uneffloresced crys-
tals 500 parts
Sodium bicarbonate,
dried and pow-
dered 477 parts
Tartaric acid, dried
and powdered. . . . 252 parts
Citric acid, unefflor-
esced crystals 162 parts
Dry the sodium phosphate on a water
bath until it ceases to lose weight; after
powdering the dried salt, mix it intimate-
ly with the citric acid and tartaric acid,
then thoroughly incorporate the sodium
bicarbonate. The mixed powders are
now ready for granulation. The change
in manipulation which is suggested to
replace that usually followed, requires
either a gas stove or a blue-flame coal-oil
stove, and one of the small tin or sheet-
iron ovens which are so largely used with
these stoves. The stove itself will be
found in almost every drug store; the
oven costs from $1 to $2.
The oven is heated to about 200° F.
(the use of a thermometer is desirable at
first, but one will quickly learn how to
regulate the flame to produce the desired
temperature), and the previously mixed
powders are placed on, preferably, a
glass plate, which has been heated with
the oven, about £ pound being taken at a
time, dependent upon the size of the
oven. The door of the oven is now
closed for about one minute, and, when
opened, the whole mass will be found to
be uniformly moist and ready to pass
through a suitable sieve, the best kind
and size being a tinned iron, No. 6.
This moist, granular powder may then
be placed upon the top of the oven, where
the heat is quite sufficient to thoroughly
dry the granules, and the operator may
proceed immediately with the next lot of
mixed powder, easily granulating 10 or
more pounds within an hour.
Sugar has often been proposed as an
addition to these salts, but experience
has shown that the slight improvement
in taste, which is sometimes questioned,
does not offset the likelihood of darken-
ing, which is apt to occur when the salt is
being heated, or the change in color after
it has been made several months. It
should be remembered that in making
a granular effervescent salt by the method
which depends upon the liberation of
water of crystallization, a loss in weight,
amounting to about 10 per cent, will be
experienced. This is due, in part, to
the loss of water which is driven off, and
also to a trifling loss of carbon dioxide
when the powder is moistened.
EFFERVESCENT POWDERS:
Magnesian Lemonade Powder. —
Fine white sugar 2 pounds
Magnesium carbonate 6 ounces
Citric acid 4 ounces
Essence of lemon .... 2 drachms
Rub the essence into the dry ingre-
dients, work well together, sift, and bot-
tle.
Magnesian Orgeat Powder. —
Fine sugar 1 pound
Carbonate of magne-
sia 3 ounces
Citric acid 1 ounce
Oil of bitter almonds . 3 drops
Vanilla flavoring, quantity sufficient.
Thoroughly amalgamate the dry in-
gredients. Rub in the oil of almonds
and sufficient essence of vanilla to give
a slight flavor. Work all well together,
sift, and bottle.
Raspberryade Powder. —
Fine sugar 2 pounds
Carbonate of soda. ... 2 ounces
Tartaric acid 2 ounces
Essence of raspberry . 4 drachms
Carmine coloring, quantity suffi-
cient.
Rub the essence well into the sugar,
and mix this with the soda and acid.
Then work in sufficient liquid carmine
to make the powder pale red, sift through
a fine sieve, and pack in air-tight bottles,
628
SALTS— SAND
Ambrosia Powder. —
Fine sugar 2 pounds
Carbonate of soda. ... 12 drachms
Citric acid 10 drachms
Essence of ambrosia. . 20 drops
Amalgamate the whole of the above,
and afterwards sift and bottle in the usual
Noyeau Powder. —
Fine sugar 2 pounds
Carbonate of soda. ... 12 drachms
Tartaric acid 10 drachms
Essence of Noyeau. . . 6 drops
After the dry ingredients have been
mixed, and the essence rubbed into them,
sift and bottle the powder.
Lemon Sherbet. —
Fine sugar 9 pounds
Tartaric acid 40 ounces
Carbonate of soda. . . 36 ounces
Oil of lemon 2 drachms
Having thoroughly mixed the dry in-
gredients, add the lemon, rubbing it well
in between the hands; then sift the whole
thrice through a fine sieve, and cork
down tight.
As oil of lemon is used in this recipe,
the blending must be quite perfect, other-
wise when tne powder is put in water the
oil of lemon will float.
Any other flavoring may be substi-
tuted for lemon, and the sherbet named
accordingly.
Cream Soda Powder. —
Fine sugar 30 parts
Tartaric acid 7 parts
Carbonate of soda. ... 6 parts
Finely powdered gum
arable 1 part
Vanilla flavoring, quantity suffi-
cient.
Proceed exactly as for lemon sherbet.
Kissingen Salt. —
Potassium chloride. . 17 parts
Sodium chloride. . . . 367 parts
Magnesium sulphate
(dry) 59 parts
Sodium bicarbonate. 107 parts
For the preparation of Kissingen
water, dissolve 1.5 grams in 180 grams of
water.
Vichy Salt.—
Sodium bicarbonate. 846 parts
Potassium carbonate 38 parts
Magnesium sulphate
(dry) 38 parts
Sodium chloride .... 77 parts
For making Vichy water dissolve 1.
part in 200 parts of water.
Seidlitz Salt. — This is one of the many
old names for magnesium sulphate. It
has at various times been known as
Seidlitz salt, Egra salt, canal salt, bitter
salt, cathartic salt, English salt, and
Epsom salt. Its earliest source was from
the salt springs of Epsom in England
and from this fact it took its last two
names. For a long time sea-salt makers
supplied the markets of the world.
They procured it as a by-product in
the making of salt. The bitter water
that remained after the table salt had
been crystallized out was found to con-
tain it. Now it is chiefly procured from
such minerals as dolomite, siliceous
magnesium hydrate, and schistose rock
containing the sulphide of magnesia.
Many medical men deem it our best
saline cathartic.
SALTS, SMELLING.
I. — Moisten coarsely powdered am-
monium carbonate with a mixture of
Strong tincture of or-
ris root 2^ ounces
Extract of violet 3 drachms
Spirit of ammonia. ... 1 drachm
II. — Fill suitable bottles with coarsely
powdered ammonium carbonate, and
add to the salt as much of the following
solution as it will absorb:
Oil of orris 5 minims
Oil of lavender flow-
ers 10 minims
Extract of violet 30 minims
Stronger water of am-
monia 2 ounces
SALVES:
See Ointments.
SAND:
Colored Sand. — Sift fine white sand
from the coarser particles and color it as
follows:
I. — Blue. — Boil 106 parts of sand
and 4 of Berlin blue with a small quantity
of water, stirring constantly, and dry as
soon as the sand is thoroughly colored.
II. — Black Sand. — Heat very fine
quartz sand, previously freed from dust
by sifting, and add to every J pound of
it 6 to 8 spoonfuls of fat. Continue the
heating* as long as smoke or a flame is
observed on stirring. The sand is
finally washed and dried. This black
sand will not rub off.
III. — Dark-Brown Sand. — Boil white
sand in a decoction of brazil wood and
dry it over a fire.
IV. — Rose- colored sand is obtained
by mixing 100 parts of white sand with
4 parts of vermilion.
SAND— SCREWS
629
Lawn Sand. — Lawn sand may be pre-
pared by mixing crude ammonium sul-
phate, 65 parts, with fine sand, 35 parts.
This mixture will kill daisies and plan-
tains, but does not permanently injure
the grass of lawns. A most effective
method of killing plantains is to put,
during dry weather, a full teaspoonful of
common salt in the head of each.
SAND HOLES IN BRASS:
See Castings.
SAND SOAP:
See Soap.
SANDSTONE CEMENTS:
See Adhesives.
SANDSTONE COATING:
See Acid-Proofing.
SANDSTONES, TO REMOVE OIL
SPOTS FROM:
See Cleaning Preparations and Meth-
ods.
SAND, TO PREVENT ADHESION OF
SAND TO CASTINGS:
See Castings.
SARSAPARILLA.
Each fluidounce of Ayer's sarsaparilla
represents
Sarsaparilla root 10 parts
Yellow dock root 8 parts
Licorice root 8 parts
Buckthorn bark 4 parts
Burdock root 3 parts
Senna leaves 2 parts
Black cohosh root.. . . 2 parts
Stillingia root 4 parts
Poke root 1 part
Cinchona red bark. . . 2 parts
Potassium iodide. ... 4 parts
Solvent. — Alcohol, 10^ minims to each
fluidrachm; glycerin, syrup, water.
This is the formula as given by Dr.
Charles H. Stowell, of the Ayer Com-
pany, to the daily papers, for advertising
purposes.
Sarsaparilla Flavoring. —
Oil wintergreen 6 parts
Oil sassafras 2 parts
Oil cassia It parts
Oil clove l| parts
Oil anise 1^ parts
Alcohol 60 parts
Sarsaparilla Syrup. —
Simple syrup 40 ounces
Sarsaparilla flavoring. 1 drachm
Caramel to color.
SARSAPARILLA EXTRACT:
See Essences and Extracts.
SAUCES, TABLE:
See Condiments.
SATINWOOD:
See Wood.
SAUSAGE COLOR:
See Foods.
SAWDUST IN BRAN:
See Bran.
SAWDUST FOR JEWELERS AND
WATCHMAKERS:
See Watchmakers' Formulas.
SCALD HEAD,, SOAP FOR:
See Soap.
SCALD REMEDIES:
See Cosmetics.
SCALE FOR PHOTOGRAPHIC RE-
DUCTION:
See Photography.
SCALE PAN CLEANER:
See Cleaning Preparations and Meth-
ods.
SCALE IN BOILERS:
See Boiler Compounds.
SCALE INSECTS, EXTERMINATION
OF:
See Insecticides.
SCALP WASHES:
See Hair Preparations.
SCISSORS HARDENING:
See Steel.
SCOURING LIQUIDS:
See Laundry Preparations.
SCRATCH BRUSHING:
See Plating, under Gilding.
SCREWS:
To Prevent Screws from Rusting and
Becoming Fast. — Screws will sometimes
rust in their seats, even when carefully
oiled before driving them to their seats,
but if they are anointed with a mixture
of graphite and soft tallow they will re-
main unrusted and unaltered for years.
A screw rusted in may also be removed
by placing the flat extremity of a red-hot
rod of iron on it for 2 or 3 minutes.
When the screw is heated, it will be found
to turn quite easily.
SCREWS, BLUEING:
See Steel.
SCREWS IN WATCHES:
See Watchmakers' Formulas.
630
SEA SICKNESS— SHELL CAMEOS
SEALING (BURNING) TRICK:
See Pyrotechnics.
SEALING WAX
See Waxes.
SEA SICKNESS.
I. — To prevent sea sickness, take 2 or
3 grams of potassium bromide dissolved
in plain or carbonated water every even-
ing either with supper or just before re-
tiring for several weeks before going on
the voyage. During the voyage, breath-
ing should be deep and a tight bandage
should be worn around the abdomen.
II.— Menthol 0.1 part
Cocaine hydro-
chloride 0.2 parts
Alcohol .' . . 60.0 parts
Syrup 30.0 parts
A dessertspoonful to be taken at
intervals of half an hour.
SEASONINGS:
See Condiments.
SEED, BIRD:
See Bird Foods.
SEEDS, TESTS FOR FOREIGN:
See Foods.
SEIDLITZ POWDERS:
See Salts (Effervescent).
SELTZER WATER:
See Water.
SERPENTS, PHARAOH'S.
An old form consisted of pellets of a
very poisonous mercurial compound which
gave off dangerous fumes when heated.
The "eggs" may be made of compara-
tively safe material by the following
formula:
Potassium bichromate. 2 parts
Potassium nitrate 1 part
White sugar 2 parts
Powder each ingredient separately,
mix, and press into small paper cones.
These must be kept from light and
moisture.
Of course, neither this nor other
chemical toys containing substances in
the slightest degree harmful if swallowed
should be placed in the hands of children
not old enough fully to understand the
danger of eating or even tasting un-
known things.
SERVIETTES MAGIQUES:
See Polishes.
SETTING OF TOOLS:
See Tool Setting.
SEWING-MACHINE OIL:
See Lubricants.
SHAMPOp LOTIONS AND PASTES:
See Hair Restorers and Soaps.
SHARPENING PASTES:
See Razor Pastes.
SHARPENING STONES:
See Whetstones.
SHAVING PASTE.
An emulsion of paraffine wax, melting
at 131° F., should be used. This is pre-
pared with 25 per cent of wax and 2 per
cent of tragacanth, the wax being melted
and mixed with the tragacanth previous-
ly made into a mucilage with some of the
water. The addition of a little stearine
or lard renders the emulsification of the
wax easier, while about 10 per cent of
alcohol makes the preparation more
agreeable to use. The fatty odor of the
preparation may be covered by the ad-
dition of £ to 1 per cent of lavender oil,
and the finished product then appears as
a thick white cream. In use a small
quantity is rubbed over the area to be
shaved and the razor immediately ap-
plied. As the water in the emulsion
evaporates, the particles of wax previ-
ously distributed in the emulsion become
coherent and fill up the depressions in
the surface of the skin from which the
hairs arise, thus forming a mechanical
support during the passage of the razor.
The quantity required is very small, 1
ounce being sufficient for shaving the
face about 6 times.
SHAVING SOAP:
See Soap.
SHEEP -DIPS:
See Disinfectants.
SHEEP DISEASES:
See Veterinary Formulas.
SHELL CAMEOS.
If shell cameos and corals have be-
come too hot in cementing and cracks
have appeared in consequence, olive oil
is applied and allowed to soak in by
heating. The same process is employed
for shell cameos which have developed
white fissures, owing to being filed
smaller.
SHELL, IMITATION OF:
See Casein Compounds.
SHELLS, LUBRICANTS FOR RE-
DRAWING:
See Lubricants.
SHELLAC—SHOE DRESSINGS
631
SHELL POLISHES:
See Polishes.
SHELLAC:
See Varnishes.
SHELLAC BLEACHING.
In bleaching, shellac is brought into
contact with an acidified solution of
chloride of lime for some time, then
washed, kneaded in hot water, placed back
into the chloride of lime solution, and
brushed. Through this treatment with
the chloride of lime solution the bleached
shellac sometimes loses its solubility in
alcohol, which, however, can be restored
if the shellac is melted in boiling water,
or if it is moistened with a little ether
in a well-closed vessel. A quantity of
ether in the proportion of 1 part to 20
parts shellac is sufficient. Great cau-
tion is recommended in the handling of
ether. The ether vapors easily ignite
when in proximity to a burning light and
a mixture of ether vapor and atmos-
pheric air may cause most vehement ex-
plosions. After an action of the ether
upon the shellac for several hours, the
alcohol necessary to dissolve it may either
be added directly or the shellac mois-
tened with ether is placed in the open air
for half an hour in a dish, after which
time the ether will have evaporated and
the shellac can then be dissolved by the
use of alcohol.
Bleached shellac is known to lose its
solubility in alcohol, especially if treated
with chlorine in bleaching. This solu-
bility can be readily restored, however,
by first moistening the rosin with -£G its
weight of ether, placing it in a closed
vessel and allowing it to swell there.
Shellac thus treated becomes perfectly
soluble again.
SHIMS IN ENGINE BRASSES.
In taking up the wear of engine brasses
on wrist pin or crosshead pin when the
key is driven clear down, back out the
key and instead of putting in sheet-iron
shims, put in a small piece of pine wood
of just the right thickness to allow the
key to come even with the under side of
the strap, then pour in melted babbitt.
A hole must be drilled through the flange
of the brasses to allow for pouring the
babbitt.
Every engineer knows the trouble it is
to put several shims between the brass
box and the end of the strap, especially
if the box is a round-end one, as many
are. By using the method described,
brasses may be worn up much closer,
even if worn through; the babbitt will
form part of the bearing.
Shoe Dressings
(See also Leather.)
Acid -Free Blacking. —
Lampblack 27-36 parts
Bone black 3 parts
Syrup 60-70 parts
Put in a kettle and under gentle heat
stir together until a smooth, homoge-
neous mass has been attained. In an-
other kettle put 3 parts of finely shredded
gutta percha and warm over an open fire
until it begins to run, then add, with
constant stirring, 5 parts of olive oil,
continuing the heat until the gum is
completely dissolved. When this oc-
curs dissolve in 1 part of stearine, and
add the whole while still hot in a slow
stream, and under diligent and constant
stirring, to the mixture of syrup and
blacks. Continue the agitation of the
mass until it is completely homogeneous.
Now dissolve 4 parts of Senegal gum in
12 parts of water, and add the solution to
the foregoing mass. Stir well in and
finally add sufficient mirbane (about
i part) to perfume.
Blacking Pastes.— While shellac is not
soluble in water alone, it is soluble in water
carrying borax, the alkaline carbonates,
etc. In paste blacking the object of the
sulphuric acid is to remove from the bone
black the residual calcium phosphate.
The ordinary bone black of commerce
consists of only about 10 per cent of
carbon, the residue being chiefly calcium
phosphate. This is the reason that we
cannot obtain a pure black color from it,
but a dirty brown. To make a good
blacking, one that is of a black in color,
either use purified bone black, or a
mineral acid (sulphuric or hydrochloric
acid) with crude bone black. The
residual acid is entirely neutralized by
the sodium carbonate and has no bad
effect on the leather. The following
formula contains no acid and makes a
good paste:
I. — Marseilles soap. . . 122 parts
Potassium c a r -
bonate 6l' parts
Beeswax 500 parts
Water 2,000 parts
Mix and boil together with occasional
stirring until a smooth, homogeneous
paste is obtained, then add, a little at a
time, and under constant stirring, the
following:
632
SHOE DRESSINGS
Rock candy, pow-
dered 153 parts
Gum arable, pow-
dered 61 parts
Ivory black 1,000 parts
Stir until homogeneous, then pour,
while still hot, into boxes.
The following makes a very brilliant
and durable black polish for shoes:
II.— Bone black. ..... 40 parts
Sulphuric acid. . . 10 parts
Fish oil 10 parts
Sodium carbonate
crystal 18 parts
Sugar, common
brown, or mo-
lasses 20 parts
Liquid glue, pre-
pared as below . 20 parts
Water, sufficient.
Soak 10 parts of good white glue in
40 parts of cold water for 4 hours, then
dissolve by the application of gentle
heat, and add 1.8 parts of glycerine
(commercial). Set aside. Dissolve the
sodium carbonate in sufficient water to
make a cold saturated solution (about
3 parts of water at 60° F.), and set aside.
In an earthenware vessel moisten the
bone black with a very little water, and
stirring it about with a stick, add the
sulphuric acid, slowly. Agitate until a
thick dough-like mass is obtained, then
add and incorporate the fish oil. Any
sort of animal oil, or even colza will
answer, but it is best to avoid high-smell-
ing oils. Add a little at a time, and
under vigorous stirring, sufficient of the
saturated sodium carbonate solution to
cause effervescence. Be careful not to
add so freely as to liquefy the mass. Stir
until effervescence ceases, then add the
molasses or sugar, the first, if a soft,
damp paste is desired, and the latter if
a dryer one is wanted. Finally, add, a
little at a time, and under constant
stirring, sufficient of the solution of glue
to make a paste of the desired con-
sistency. The exact amount of this last
ingredient that is necessary must be
learned by experience. It is a very
important factor, as it gives the finished
product a depth and brilliancy that it
could not otherwise have, as well as a
certain durability, in which most of the
blackings now on the market are defi-
cient.
III.— Soap 122 parts
Potassium c a r -
bonate 61 parts
Beeswax 500 parts
Water 2,000 parts
Mix and boil together until a smooth,
homogeneous paste is obtained, then
add
Bone black 1,000 parts
Powdered sugar. . 153 parts
Powdered gum
arabic 61 parts
Mix thoroughly, remove from the fire,
and pour while still hot into boxes.
Boot-Top Liquid. —
Solution of muriate of
tin 3 drachms
French chalk (in pow-
der) .1 1 ounce
Salt of sorrel J ounce
Flake white 1 ounce
Burnt alum \ ounce
Cuttle-fish bones
(powdered) 1 ounce
White arsenic 1 ounce
Boiling water 1 quart
Brown Dressing for Untanned Shoes. —
Yellow wax 30 parts
Soap 12 parts
Nankin yellow 15 parts
Oil of turpentine 100 parts
Alcohol 12 parts
Water 100 parts
Dissolve in the water bath the wax in
the oil of turpentine; dissolve, also by
the aid of heat, the soap in the water,
and the Nankin yellow (or in place of
that any of the yellow coal-tar colors) in
the alcohol. Mix the solutions while
hot, and stir constantly until cold. The
preparation is smeared over the shoes in
the usual way, rubbed with a brush until
evenly distributed, and finally polished
with an old silk or linen cloth.
Heel Polish.—
I. — Carnauba wax. ... 5 parts
Japanese wax 5 parts
Paraffine 5 parts
Oil of turpentine . . 50 parts
Lampblack 1 part
Wine black 2 parts
Melt the wax and the paraffine, and
when this has become lukewarm, add
the turpentine oil, and finally the lamp-
black and the wine black. When the
black color has become evenly dis-
tributed, pour, while still lukewarm, into
tin cans.
II. — Melt together Japanese wax,
100 parts; carnauba wax, 100 parts;
paraffine, 100 parts; and mix with tur-
pentine oil, 500 parts, as well as a tritur-
ation of lampblack, 10 parts; wine black,
20 parts; turpentine oil, 70 parts.
SHOE DRESSINGS
LIQUID BLACKINGS.
The following formulas make a
product of excellent quality:
I. — Ivory black 120 parts
Brown sugar 90 parts
Olive oil 15 parts
Stale beer 500 parts
Mix the black, sugar and olive oil into
a smooth paste, adding the beer, a little
at a time, under constant stirring. Let
stand for 24 hours, then put into flasks,
lightly stoppered.
II. — Ivory black 200 parts
Molasses 200 parts
Gallnuts, bruised. 12 parts
Iron sulphate 12 parts
Sulphuric acid. ... 40 parts
Boiling water 700 parts
Mix the molasses and ivory black in
an earthen vessel. In an iron vessel let
the gallnuts infuse in 100 parts of boil-
ing water for 1 hour, then strain and set
aside. In another vessel dissolve the iron
sulphate; in another, 100 parts of the
boiling water. One-half of this solution
is added at once to the molasses mixture.
To the remaining half add the sulphuric
acid, and pour the mixture, a little at a
time, under constant stirring, into the
earthen vessel containing the molasses
mixture. The mass will swell up and
thicken, but as soon as it commences to
subside, add the infusion of gallnuts,
also under vigorous stirring. If a paste
blacking is desired the preparation is
now complete. For a liquid black add
the remaining portion of the boiling
water (500 parts), stir thoroughly and
bottle.
Patent -Leather Polish.—
Yellow wax or ceresine Bounces
Spermaceti 1 ounce
Oil of turpentine 11 ounces
Asphaltum varnish. . . 1 ounce
Borax 80 grains
Frankfort black 1 ounce
Prussian blue 150 grains
Melt the wax, add the borax, and stir
until an emulsion has been formed. In
another pan melt the spermaceti; add
the varnish, previously mixed with the
turpentine; stir well and add to the wax;
lastly add the colors.
Preservatives for Shoe Soles. — I. —
This preparation, destined for impreg-
nating leather shoe soles, is produced as
follows: Grind 50 parts of linseed oil
with 1 part of litharge; next heat for 2
hours to the boiling point with 4 part
of zinc vitriol, which is previously cal-
cined (dehydrated). The composition
obtained in this manner, when perfectly
cold, is mixed with 8 parts of benzine
and filled in bottles or other receptacles.
To render this preservative effective,
the soles must be coated with it until
the leather absorbs it.
II. — Dissolve ordinary household soap
in water; on the other hand, dissolve an
aluminum salt — the cheapest is the com-
mercial aluminum sulphate — in water
and allow both solutions to cool. Now
pour the aluminum salt solution, with
constant stirring, into the soap solution,
thereby obtaining a very fine precipitate
of aluminum oleate. The washed-out
residue is dried with moderate heat. By
adding 10 to 30 per cent to petroleum
with slight heating, a solid petroleum of
vaseline-like consistency is received,
which may be still further solidified by
additional admixture. A 10 per cent
solution of aluminum oleate in petro-
leum is a very excellent agent for pre-
serving the soles, a single saturation of
the soles sufficing forever. The sole will
last about 1 year.
III. — The following mixture is pre-
pared by melting together over the fire
in an enameled iron vessel: Vaseline,
400 parts; ceresine, 100 parts. The
melted mass, which is used as a grease,
is filled in wooden boxes or tin cans.
IV. — The oleic acid of the stearine
factories is heated with strong alcohol
and sulphuric acid. Take 16 parts of
oleic acid, 2 parts of alcohol (90 per
cent), and 1 part of concentrated sulphu-
ric acid. The oleic-acid ether formed
separates as a thin brownish oil. It is
liberated from free sulphuric acid and
the alcohol in excess by agitation with
warm water and allowing to settle. This
oleic-acid ether is mixed with the same
weight of fish oil, and 4 to 8 parts of
nitro-benzol are added per 1,000 parts to
disguise the odor.
TAN AND RUSSET SHOE POLISHES:
To Renovate and Brighten Russet
and Yellow Shoes. — First, clean off all
dirt and dust with a good stiff brush,
then with a sponge dipped in benzine go
over the leather, repeating the process
as soon as the benzine evaporates. A
few wipings will bring back the original
color. Then use a light-yellow dressing
and brush well.
The liquid application consists usually
of a solution of yellow wax and soap in
oil of turpentine, and it should be a mat-
ter of no difficulty whatever to compound
a mixture of this character at least equal
SHOE DRESSINGS
to the preparations on the market. As a
type of the mixture occasionally recom-
mended we may quote the following:
I. — Yellow wax 4 ounces
Pearl ash 4 drachms
Yellow soap 1 drachm
Spirit of turpentine . 7 ounces
Phosphine (aniline). 4 grains
Alcohol 4 drachms
Water, a sufficient quantity.
Scrape the wax fine and add it, to-
gether with the ash and soap, to 12
ounces of water. Boil all together until
a smooth, creamy mass is obtained; re-
move the heat and add the turpentine
and the aniline (previously dissolved in
the alcohol). Mix thoroughly, and add
sufficient water to bring the finished
product up to 1£ pints.
II.— Water 18 parts
Rosin oil 4£ parts
Spirit of sal ammo-
niac, concentrated l£ parts
White grain soap. . . 1.93 parts
Russian glue 1.59 parts
Brown rock candy . . 0.57 parts
Bismarck brown. . . . 0.07 parts
Bjpil all the ingredients together, ex-
cepting the pigment; after all has been
dissolved, add the Bismarck brown and
filter. The dressing is applied with a
sponge.
III. — Beeswax, yellow. ... 2 ounces
Linseed oil 3 ounces
Oil turpentine 10 ounces
Dissolve by heat of a water bath, and
add 1J ounces soap shavings, hard yel-
low. Dissolve this in 14 ounces of hot
water.
IV. — A simpler form of liquid mix-
ture consists of equal parts of yellow wax
and palm oil dissolved with the aid of
heat in 3 parts of oil of turpentine.
V. — Soft or green soap. . . 1 ounce
Linseed oil, raw .... 2 ounces
Annatto solution (in
oil) 7 ounces
Yellow wax 2 ounces
Gum turpentine. ... 7 ounces
Water 7 ounces
Dissolve the soap in the water and add
the solution of annatto; melt the wax in
the oil of turpentine, and gradually stir
in the soap solution, stirring until cold.
The paste to accompany the foregoing
mixtures is composed of yellow wax ana
rosin thinned with petrolatum, say 4
parts of wax, 1 part of rosin, and 12 parts
of petrolatum.
Paste Dressings for Russet Shoes. —
The paste dressings used on russet
leather consist of mixtures of wax with
oil and other vehicles which give a mix-
ture of proper working quality.
A simple formula is:
I. — Yellow wax 9 parts
Oil of turpentine. ... 20 parts
Soap 1 part
Boiling water 20 parts
Dissolve the wax in the turpentine on
a water bath and the soap in the water
and stir the two liquids together until the
mixture becomes sufficiently cold to re-
main homogeneous.
Another formula in which stearine is
used is appended:
II.— Wax 1 part
Stearine 2 parts
Linseed oil 1 part
Oil of turpentine. ... 6 parts
Soap 1 part
Water 10 parts
Proceed as above.
Carnauba wax is often used by manu-
facturers of such dressings instead of
beeswax, as it is harder and takes a
higher polish. These dressings are
sometimes colored with finely ground
yellow ocher or burnt umber. If the
leather be badly worn, however, it is best
to apply a stain first, and afterwards the
waxy dressing.
Suitable stains are made by boiling
safflower in water, and annatto is also
used in the same way, the two being
sometimes mixed together. Oxalic acid
darkens the color of the safflower. Ani-
line colors would also doubtless yield
good results with less trouble and ex-
pense. By adding finely ground lamp-
black to the waxy mixture instead of
ocher, it would answer as a dressing for
black leather.
WATERPROOF SHOE DRESSINGS.
I. — Caoutchouc 10 parts
Petroleum 10 parts
Carbon disulphide. 10 parts
Shellac 40 parts
Lampblack 20 parts
Oil lavender 1 part
Alcohol 200 parts
Upon the caoutchouc in a bottle pour
the carbon disulphide, cork well, and let
stand a few days, or until the caoutchouc
has become thoroughly gelatinized or
partly dissolved. Then add the petro-
leum, oil of lavender, and alcohol, next
the shellac in fine powder, and heat it to
about 120° F., taking care that as little as
possible is lost by evaporation. When
the substances are all dissolved and the
liquid is tolerably clear, add the lamp-
SHOE DRESSINGS— SHOW CASES
635
black, mix thoroughly, and fill at once
into small bottles.
II. — A waterproof blacking which will
give a fine polish without rubbing, and
will not injure the leather:
Beeswax 18 parts
Spermaceti 6 parts
Turpentine oil 66 parts
Asphalt varnish .... 5 parts
Powdered borax. ... 1 part
Frankfort black .... 5 parts
Prussian blue 2 parts
Nitro-benzol 1 part
Melt the wax, add the powdered bor-
ax and stir till a kind of jelly has formed.
In another pan melt the spermaceti, add
the asphalt varnish, previously mixed
with the oil of turpentine, stir well, and
add to the wax. Lastly add the color
previously rubbed smooth with a little
of the mass. The nitro-benzol gives fra-
grance.
Waterproof Varnish for Beach Shoes. —
Yellow.—
Water 150 parts
Borax 5 parts
Glycerine 3 parts
Spirit of ammonia. . . 1 part
White shellac 25 parts
Yellow pigment, water
soluble 1 part
Formalin, a few drops.
Orange. —
Water 150 parts
Borax 5 parts
Glycerine 2 parts
Spirit of ammonia. . . 1 part
Ruby shellac 22 parts
Orange, water solu-
ble 1 part
Brown 0.3 parts
Formalin 0.1 part
Pale Brown. —
Water 150 parts
Borax 5 parts
Glycerine 2* parts
Spirit of ammonia.. . 0.25 parts
White shellac 25 parts
Yellow, water solu-
ble 8 parts
Orange 0.3 parts
Formalin 0.1 part
Stir the glycerine and the spirit of
ammonia together in a special vessel be-
fore putting both into the kettle. It is
also advisable, before the water boils, to
pour a little of the nearly boiling water
into a clean vessel and to dissolve the
colors therein with good stirring, adding
this solution to the kettle after the shellac
has been dissolved.
White Shoe Dressing. —
I. — Cream of tartar 3 ounces
Oxalic acid 1 ounce
Alum 1 ounce
Milk 3 pints
Mix and rub on the shoes. When
they are thoroughly dry, rub them with a
mixture of prepared chalk and magne-
sium carbonate.
II.— Water 136 parts
Fine pipe clay 454 parts
Shellac, bleached. . 136 parts
Borax, powdered . . 68 parts
Soft soap 8 parts
Ultramarine blue. . 5 parts
Boil the shellac in the water, adding
the borax, and keeping up the boiling
until a perfect solution is obtained, then
stir in the soap (5 or 6 parts of "ivory"
soap, shaved up, and melted with 2 or 3
parts of water, is better than common
soft soap), pipe clay, and ultramarine.
Finally strain through a hair-cloth sieve.
This preparation, it is said, leaves abso-
lutely nothing to be desired. A good
deal of stiffness may be imparted to the
leather by it. The addition of a little
glycerine would remedy this. The old
application should be wiped away before
a new one is put on. This preparation is
suitable for military shoes, gloves, belts,
and uniforms requiring a white dressing.
SHOES, WATERPROOFING:
See Waterproofing.
SHIO LIAO:
See Adhesives, under Cements.
SHIP COMPOSITIONS AND PAINTS:
See Paints.
SHOW BOTTLES FOR DRUGGISTS:
See Bottles.
SHOW CASES.
Dents in show cases and counters, and,
indeed, almost all forms of "bruises" on
shop and other furniture, may be re-
moved by the exercise of a little patience,
and proceeding as follows: Sponge the
place with water as warm as can be
borne by the hand. Take a piece of
filtering or other bibulous paper large
enough to fold 6 or 8 times and yet cover
the bruise, wet in warm water and place
over the spot. Take a warm (not hot)
smoothing iron and hold it on the paper
until the moisture is evaporated (re-
newing its heat, if necessary). If the
bruise does not yield to the first trial, re-
peat the process, A dent as large as a
636
SICCATIVES
dollar and \ inch deep in the center,
in black walnut of tolerably close texture,
was brought up smooth and level with
the surrounding surface by two applica-
tions of the paper and iron as described.
If the bruise be small, a sponge dipped
in warm water placed upon it, renewing
the warmth from time to time, will be
all-sufficient. When the dent is removed
and the wood dry, the polish can be re-
stored by any of the usual processes. If
the wood was originally finished in oil,
rub with a little boiled linseed cut with
acetic acid (oil, 8 parts; acid, 1 part). If
it was "French polished," apply an al-
coholic solution of shellac, and let dry;
repeat if necessary, and when completely
dry proceed as follows: Rub the part
covered with shellac, first with crocus
cloth and a few drops of olive oil, until
the ridges, where the new and old polish
come together, disappear; wipe with a
slightly greased but otherwise clean rag
and finish with putz pomade.
SHOW-CASE SIGNS:
See Lettering.
SHOW-CASES, TO PREVENT DIM-
MING OF:
See Glass.
Siccatives
The oldest drier is probably litharge,
a reddish -yellow powder, consisting of
lead and oxygen. Formerly it was
ground finely in oil, either pure or with
admixture of white vitriol and added to
the dark oil paints. Litharge and sugar
of lead are used to-day only rarely as
drying agents, having been displaced by
the liquid manganese siccatives, which
are easy to handle. E. Ebelin, however,
is of the opinion that the neglect of the
lead compounds has not been beneficial
to decorative painting. Where these
mediums were used in suitable quantities
hard-drying coatings were almost always
obtained. Ebelin believes that formerly
there used to be less lamentation on
account of tacky floors, pews, etc., than
at the present time.
Doubtless a proposition to grind
litharge into the oil again will not be
favorably received, although some old
master painters have by no means dis-
carded this method.
Sugar of lead (lead acetate) is likewise
used as a drier for oil paint. While we
may presume in general that a siccative
acts by imparting its oxygen to the lin-
seed oil or else prepares the linseed oil in
such a manner as to render it capable of
readily absorbing the oxygen of the air,
it is especially sugar of lead which
strengthens us in this belief. If, ac-
cording to Leuchs, a piece of charcoal is
saturated with lead acetate, the charcoal
can be ignited even with a burning
sponge, and burns entirely to ashes.
(Whoever desires to make the experi-
ment should take 2 to 3 parts, by weight,
of sugar of lead per 100 parts of char-
coal.) This demonstrates that the sugar
of lead readily parts with its oxygen,
which though not burning itself, sup-
ports the combustion. Hence, it may be
assumed that it will also as a siccative
freely give off its oxygen.
Tormin reports on a siccative, of
which he says that it has been found
valuable for floor coatings. Its produc-
tion is as follows: Pour 1 parrt of white
lead and 1| parts each of litharge, sugar
of lead and red lead to 12J parts of lin-
seed oil, and allow this mixture to boil
for 8 to 10 hours. Then remove the
kettle from the fire and add to the mix-
ture 20 parts of oil of turpentine. During
the boiling, as well as during and after
the pouring in of the oil turpentine,
diligent stirring is necessary, partly to
prevent anything from sticking to the
kettle (which would render the drier im-
pure) and partly to cause the liquid
mass to cool off sooner. After that, it is
allowed to stand for a few days, whereby
the whole will clarify. The upper layer
is then poured off and added to the light
tints, while the sediment may be used for
the darker shades.
If white vitriol (zinc sulphate or zinc
vitriol) has been introduced among the
drying agents, this is done in the en-
deavor to create a non-coloring admix-
ture for the white pigments and also not
to be compelled to add lead compounds,
which, as experience has shown, cause
a yellowing of white coatings to zinc
white. For ordinary purposes, Dr.
Roller recommends to add to the linseed
oil 2 per cent (by weight) of litharge and
i per cent of zinc vitriol, whereupon the
mixture is freely boiled. If the white
vitriol is to be added in powder foim, it
must be deprived of its constitutional
water. This is done in the simplest
manner by calcining. The powder, which
feels moist, is subjected to the action of
fire on a sheet-iron plate, whereby the
white vitriol is transformed into a vesicu-
lar, crumbly mass. At one time it was
ground in oil for pure zinc white coat-
ings only, while for the other pigments
litharge is added besides, as stated above.
As regards the manganese prepara-
tions which are employed for siccatives,
it must be stated that they do not possess
SICCATIVES
certain disadvantages of the lead prepar-
ations as, for instance, that of being
acted upon by hydrogen sulphide gas.
The ordinary brown manganese driers,
however, are very liable to render the
paint yellowish, which, of course, is not
desirable for pure white coatings. In
case of too large an addition of the said
siccative, a strong subsequent yellowing
is perceptible, even if, for instance, zinc
white has been considerably " broken "
by blue or black. But there are also
manganese siccatives or drying prepara-
tions offered for sale which are colorless'
or white, and therefore may unhesitatingly
be used in comparatively large quanti-
ties for white coatings. A pulverulent
drying material of this kind consists,
for example, of equal parts of calcined
(i. e., anhydrous) manganese vitriol, man-
ganous acetate, and calcined zinc vitriol.
Of this mixture 3 per cent is added to
the zinc white. Of the other manganese
compounds, especially that containing
most oxygen, viz., manganic peroxide, is
extensively employed. This body is
treated as follows: It is first coarsely
powdered, feebly calcined, and sifted.
Next, the substance is put into wire gauze
and suspended in linseed oil, which
should be boiled slightly. The weight
of the linseed oil should be 10 times that
of the manganese peroxide.
According to another recipe a pure
pulverous preparation may be produced
by treating the manganic peroxide with
hydrochloric acid, next filtering, precipi-
tating with hot borax solution, allowing
to deposit, washing out and finally dry-
ing. Further recipes will probably be
unnecessary, since the painter will hardly
prepare his own driers.
Unless for special cases driers should
be used but sparingly. As a rule 3 to 5
per cent of siccative suffices; in other
words, 3 to 5 pounds of siccative should
be added to 100 pounds of ground oil
paint ready, for use. As a standard it
may be proposed to endeavor to have
the coating dry in 24 hours. For lead
colors a slight addition of drier is ad-
visable; for red lead, it may be omitted
altogether. Where non-tacky coatings
are desired, as for floors, chairs, etc., as
well as a priming for wood imitations,
lead color should always be employed
as foundation, and as a drier also a lead
preparation. On the other hand, no
lead compounds should be used for pure
zinc- white coats and white lacquering.
Testing Siccatives. — Since it was dis-
covered that the lead and manganese
compounds of rosin acids had a better
and more rapid action on linseed oil than
the older form of driers, such as red
lead, litharge, manganese dioxide, etc.,
the number of preparations of the former
class has increased enormously. Man-
ufacturers are continually at work en-
deavoring to improve the quality of
these compounds, and to obtain a prep-
aration which will be peculiarly their
own. Consequently, with such a large
variety of substances to deal with, it
becomes a matter of some difficulty to
distinguish the good from the bad. In
addition to the general appearance, color,
hardness, and a few other such physical
properties, there is no means of ascer-
taining the quality of these substances
except practical testing of their drying
properties, that is, one must mix the
driers with oil and prove their value for
oneself. Even the discovery of an ap-
parently satisfactory variety does not end
the matter, for experience has shown
that such preparations, even when they
appear the same, do not give similar
results. A great deal depends upon
their preparation; for example, manga-
nese resinate obtained from successive
consignments, and containing the same
percentage of manganese, does not al-
ways give identical results with oil. In
fact, variation is the greatest drawback
to these compounds. With one prepar-
ation the oil darkens, with another it
remains pale, or sometimes decomposi-
tion of the oil takes place in part. The
addition of a small proportion of drier
has been known to cause the separation
of 50 per cent of the oil as a dark viscous
mass. One drier will act well, ard the
oil will remain thin, while with another,
the same oil will in the course of a few
months thicken to the consistency of
stand oil. These various actions may all
be obtained from the same compound of
rosin with a metal, the source only of the
drier varying.
The liquid siccatives derived from
these compounds by solution in turpen-
tine or benzine also give widely divergent
results. Sometimes a slight foot will
separate, or as much as 50 per cent may
go to the bottom of the pan, and at times
the whole contents of the pan will settle
to a thick, jelly-like mass. By increas-
ing the temperature, this mass will be-
come thin and clear once more, and dis-
tillation will drive over pure unaltered
turpentine or benzine, leaving behind
the metallic compound of rosin in its
original state.
The compounds of metals with fatty
acids which, in solution in turpentine,
have been used for many years by var-
638
SICCATIVES
nish-makers, show even greater variation.
At the same time, a greater drying power
is obtained from them than from rosin
acids, quantities being equal. As these
compounds leave the factory, they are
often in solution in linseed oil or turpen-
tine, and undoubtedly many of the prod-
ucts of this nature on the market are of
very inferior quality.
The examination of these bodies may
be set about in two ways:
A. — By dissolving in linseed oil with
or without heat.
B. — By first dissolving the drier in
turpentine and mixing the cooled solu-
tion (liquid siccatives) with linseed oil.
Before proceeding to describe the
method of carrying out the foregoing
tests, it is necessary to emphasize the
important part which the linseed oil
plays in the examination of the driers.
As part of the information to be gained
by these tests depends upon the amount
of solid matter which separates out, it is
essential that the linseed oil should be
uniform. To attain this end, the oil
used must always be freed from muci-
lage before being used for the test. If
this cannot readily be obtained, ordinary
linseed oil should be heated to a temper-
ature of from 518° to 572° F., so that it
breaks, and should then be cooled and
filtered. With the ordinary market
linseed oil, the amount of solid matter
which separates varies within wide
limits, so that if this were not removed,
no idea of the separation of foot caused
by the driers would be obtained. It is
not to be understood from this that
unbroken linseed oil is never to be used
for ordinary paint or varnish, the warn-
ing being only given for the sake of ar-
riving at reliable values for the quality of
the driers to be tested.
A. — Solution of Drier in Linseed Oil.
— The precipitated metallic compounds
of rosin (lead resinate, manganese res-
in ate and lead manganese resinate) dis-
solve readily in linseed oil of ordinary
temperature (60° to 70° F.). The oil is
mixed with 1£ per cent of the drier and
subjected to stirring or shaking for 24
hours, the agitation being applied at
intervals of an hour. Fused metallic res-
inates are not soluble in linseed oil at or-
dinary temperatures, so different treat-
ment is required for them. The oil is
heated in an enameled pan together with
the finely powdered drier, until the latter
is completely in solution, care being
taken not to allow the temperature to
rise above 390° F. The pan is then re-
moved from the fire and its contents
allowed to settle. The quantity of drier
used should not exceed 1£ to 3 per cent.
In the case of metallic linoleates (lead
linoleate, manganese linoleate and lead-
manganese linoleate), the temperature
must be raised above 290° F. before they
will go into solution. In their case also
the addition should not be greater than
3 per cent. Note, after all the tests have
settled, the amount of undissolved
matter which is left at the bottom, as this
is one of the data upon which an idea of
the value of the drier must be formed.
B. — Solution of Drier in Turpentine
or Benzine. — For the preparation of these
liquid siccatives 1 to 1.4 parts of the
metallic resinate or linoleate are added
to the benzine or turpentine and dis-
solved at a gentle heat, or the drier may
first be melted over a fire and added to
the solvent while in the liquid state.
The proportion of matter which does not
go into solution must be carefully noted
as a factor in the valuation of the drier.
From 5 to 10 per cent of the liquid sicca-
tive is now added to the linseed oil, and
the mixture shaken well, at intervals dur-
ing 24 hours.
Samples of all the oils prepared as
above should be placed in small clear
bottles, which are very narrow inside, so
that a thin layer of the oil may be ob-
served. The bottles are allowed to stand
for 3 or 4 days in a temperate room,
without being touched. When sufficient
time has been allowed for thorough set-
tling, the color, transparency, and con-
sistency of the samples are carefully ob-
served, and also the quantity and nature
of any precipitate which may have
settled out. A note should also be made
of the date for future reference. Natu-
rally the drier which has colored the oil
least and left it most clean and thin, and
which shows the smallest precipitate, is
the most suitable for general use. The
next important test is that of drying
power, and is carried out as follows: A
few drops of the sample are placed on a
clear, clean glass plate, 4 x*6 inches, and
rubbed evenly over with the fingers. The
plate is then placed, clean side up, in a
sloping position with the upper edge
resting against a wall. In this way any
excess of oil is run off and a very thin
equal layer is obtained. It is best to
start the test early in the morning as it
can then be watched throughout the day.
It should be remarked that the time
from the "tacky" stage to complete dry-
ness is usually very short, so that the ob-
server must be constantly on the watch.
If a good drier has been used, the time
may be from 4 to 5 hours, and should not
be more than 12 or at the very highest
SIGN CLEANING— SILVER
639
15. The bleaching of the layer should
also be noted. Many of the layers, even
after they have become as dry as they
seem capable of becoming, show a slight
stickiness. These tests should be set
aside in a dust-free place for about 8
days, and then tested with the finger.
SIGN LETTERS:
To Remove Black Letters from White
Enameled Signs. — It frequently hap-
pens that a change has to be made on
such signs, one name having to be taken
off and another substituted. Priming
with white lead followed by dull and
glossy zinc white paint always looks like a
daub and stands out like a pad. Lye,
glass paper or steel chips will not attack
the burned-in metallic enamel. The
quickest plan is to grind down carefully
with a good grindstone.
SIGN -LETTER CEMENTS:
See Adhesives, under Cements.
SIGNS, TO REPAIR ENAMELED:
See Enamels.
SILK:
Artificial "Rubbered" Silk.— A solu-
tion of caoutchouc or similar gum in
acetone is added, in any desired propor-
tion, to a solution of nitro-cellulose in
acetone, and the mixture is made into
threads by passing it into water or other
suitable liquid. The resulting threads
are stated to be very brilliant in appear-
ance, extremely elastic, and very resistant
to the atmosphere and to water. The
product is not more inflammable than
natural silk.
Artificial Ageing of Silk Fabrics.— To
give silk goods the appearance of age,
exposure to the sun is the simplest way,
but as this requires time it cannot always
be employed. A quicker method con-
sists in preparing a dirty-greenish liquor
of weak soap water, with addition of a
little blacking and gamboge solution.
Wash the silk fabric in this liquor and
dry as usual, without rinsing in clean
water, and calender.
Bleaching Silk. — The Lyons process of
bleaching skeins of silk is to draw them
rapidly through a sort of aqua regia bath.
This bath is prepared by mixing 5 parts
of hydrochloric acid with I of nitric,
leaving the mixture for 4 or 5 days at a
gentle heat of about 77° F., and then
diluting with about 15 times its volume
of water. This dilution is effected in
large tanks cut from stone. The tem-
perature of the bath should be from 68°
.to 85° F., and the skeins should not be
in it over 15 minutes, and frequently
not so long as that; they must be kept in
motion during all that time. When
taken out, the silk is immediately im-
mersed successively in 2 troughs of
water, to remove every trace of the acid,
after which they are dried.
Hydrogen peroxide is used as a silk
bleach, the silk being first thoroughly
washed with an alkaline soap and ammo-
nium carbonate to free it of its gummy
matter. After repeated washings in the
peroxide (preferably rendered alkaline
with ammonia and soda), the silk is
"blued" with a solution of blue aniline
in alcohol.
Washing of Light Silk Goods. — The
best soap may change delicate tints.
The following method is therefore pref-
erable: First wash the silk tissue in warm
milk. Prepare a light bran infusion,
which is to be decanted, and after resting
for a time, passed over the fabric. It is
then rinsed in this water, almost cold.
It is moved about in all directions, and
afterwards dried on a napkin.
SILK SENSITIZERS FOR PHOTO-
GRAPHIC PURPOSES:
See Photography, under Paper-Sen-
sitizing Processes.
Silver
Antique Silver (see also Plating). — Coat
the polished silver articles with a thin
paste of powdered graphite, 6 parts; pow-
dered bloodstone, 1 part; and oil of tur-
pentine. After the drying take off the
superfluous powder with a soft brush and
rub the raised portions bright with a linen
rag dipped in spirit. By treatment with
various sulphides an old appearance is
likewise imparted to silver. If, for ex-
ample, a solution of 5 parts of liver of sul-
phur and 10 parts of ammonium carbonate
are heated in 1 quart of distilled water
to 180° F., placing the silver articles
therein, the latter first turn pale gray,
then dark gray, and finally assume a
deep black-blue. In the case of plated
ware, the silvering must not be too thin;
in the case of thick silver plating or solid
silver 1 quart of water is sufficient. The
colors will then appear more quickly.
If the coloring is spotted or otherwise
imperfect dip the objects into a warm
potassium cyanide solution, whereby the
silver sulphide formed is immediately
640
SILVER
dissolved. The bath must be renewed
after a while. Silver containing much
copper is subjected, previous to the col-
oring, to a blanching process, which is
accomplished in a boiling solution of 15
parts of powdered tartar and 30 parts of
cooking salt in 2 pints of water. Ob-
jects which are to be mat are coated
with a paste of potash and water after
the blanching, then dry, anneal, cool in
water, and boil again.
Imitation of Antique Silver. — Plated
articles may be colored to resemble old
objects of art made of solid silver. For
this purpose the deep-lying parts, those
not exposed to friction, are provided with
a blackish, earthy coating, the promi-
nent parts retaining a leaden but bright
color. The process is simple. A thin paste
is made of finely powdered graphite
and oil of turpentine (a little blood-
stone or red ocher may be added, to imi-
tate the copper tinge in articles of old
silver) and spread over the whole of the
previously plated article. It is then
allowed to dry, and the particles not ad-
hering to the surface removed with a soft
brush. The black coating should then
be carefully wiped off the exposed parts
by means of a linen rag dipped in alco-
hol. This process is very effective in
making imitations of objects of antique
art, such as goblets, candlesticks, vessels
of every description, statues, etc. If it
is desired to restore the original bright-
ness to the object, this can be done by
washing with caustic soda or a solution
of cyanide of potassium. Benzine can
also be used for this purpose.
Blanching Silver. — I. — Mix pow-
dered charcoal, 3 parts, and calcined
borax, 1 part, and stir with water so as
to make a homogeneous paste. Apply
this paste on the pieces to be blanched.
Put the pieces on a charcoal fire, taking
care to cover them up well; when they
have acquired a cherry red, withdraw
them from the fire and leave to cool off.
Next place them in a hot bath composed
of 9 parts of water and 1 part of sul-
Ehuric acid, without causing the bath to
oil. Leave the articles in for about 1
hour. Remove them, .rinse in clean
water, and dry.
II. — If the coat of tarnish on the sur-
face of the silver is but light and super-
ficial, it suffices to rub the piece well
with green soap to wash it thoroughly
in hot water; then dry it in hot sawdust
and pass it through alcohol, finally rub-
bing with a fine cloth or brush. Should
the coat resist this treatment, brush
with Spanish white, then wash, dry, and
pass through alcohol. The employment
of Spanish white has the drawback of
shining the silver if the application is
strong and prolonged. If the oxidation
has withstood these means and if it is
desired to impart to the chain the hand-
some mat appearance of new goods, it
should be annealed in charcoal dust and
passed through vitriol, but this operation,
for those unused to it, is very dangerous
to the soldering and consequently may
spoil the piece.
Coloring Silver. — A rich gold tint may
be imparted to silver articles by plung-
ing them into dilute sulphuric acid,
saturated with iron rust.
Frosting Polished Silver. — Articles of
polished silver may be frosted by putting
them into a bath of nitric acid diluted
with an equal volume of distilled water
and letting them remain a few minutes.
A better effect may be given by dipping
the article frequently into the bath until
the requisite degree of frosting has been
attained. Then rinse and place for a
few moments in a strong bath of potas-
sium cyanide; remove and rinse. The
fingers must not be allowed to touch the
article during either process. It should
be held with wooden forceps or clamps.
Fulminating Silver. — Dissolve 1 part
of fine silver in 10 parts of nitric acid of
1.3G specific gravity at a moderate heat;
pour the solution into 20 parts of spirit
of wine (85 to 90 per cent) and heat the
liquid. As soon as the mixture begins
to boil, it is removed from the fire and
left alone until cooled off. The fulminic
silver crystallizes on cooling in very fine
needles of dazzling whiteness, which are
edulcorated with water and dried care-
fully in the air.
Hollow Silverware. — A good process
for making hollow figures consists in
covering models of the figures, made of
a base or easily soluble metal, with a thin
and uniform coating of a nobler metal, by
means of the electric current in such a
way that this coating takes approximate-
ly the shape of the model, the latter being
then removed by dissolving it with acid.
The model is cast from zinc in one or
more pieces, a well-chased brass mold
being used for this purpose, and the
separate parts are then soldered together
with an easily fusible solder. The figure
is then covered with a galvanized coating
of silver, copper, or other metal. Before
receiving the coating of silver, the figure
is first covered with a thin deposit of
copper, the silver being added afterwards
in the required thickness. But in order
SILVER
641
that the deposit of silver may be of the
same thickness throughout (this is es-
sential if the figure is to keep the right
shape), silver anodes, so constructed and
arranged as to correspond as closely as
possible to the outlines of the figure,
should be suspended in the solution of
silver and cyanide of potassium on both
sides of the figure, and at equal distances
from it. As soon as the deposit is suffi-
ciently thick, the figure is removed from
the bath, washed, and put into a bath of
dilute sulphuric or hydrochloric acid,
where it is allowed to remain till the zinc
core is dissolved. The decomposition of
the zinc can be accelerated by adding a
pin of copper. The figure now requires
only boiling in soda and potassic tartrate
to acquire a white color. If the figure is
to be made of copper, the zinc model
must be covered first with a thin layer
of silver, then with the copper coating,
and then once more with a thin layer
of silver, so that while the zinc is being
dissolved, the copper may be protect-
ed on either side by the silver. Similar
precautions must be taken with other
metals, regard being paid to their pecu-
liar properties. Another method is to
cast the figures, entire or in separate
parts, out of some easily fusible alloy in
chased metal molds. The separate por-
tions are soldered with the same solder,
and the figure is then provided with a
coating of copper, silver, etc., by means
of the galvanic current. It is then placed
in boiling water or steam, and the inner
alloys melted by the introduction of the
water or steam through holes bored for
this purpose.
Lustrous Oxide on Silver (see also Plat-
ing and Silver, under Polishes). — Some
experience is necessary to reproduce a
handsome black luster. Into a cup filled
with water throw a little liver of sulphur
and mix well. Scratch the silver article as
bright as possible with the scratch brush
and dip into the warm liquid. Remove
the object after 2 minutes and rinse off
in water. Then scratch it up again and
return it into the liquid. The process
should be repeated 2 or 3 times, whereby
a wonderful glossy black is obtained.
Ornamental Designs on Silver. — Select
a smooth part of the silver, and sketch on
it a monogram or any other design with
a sharp lead pencil. Place the article in
a gold solution, with the battery in good
working order, and in a short time all the
parts not sketched with the lead pencil
will be covered with a coat of gold. After
cleaning the article the black lead is easily
removed with the finger, whereupon the
silver ornament is disclosed. A gold or-
nament may be produced by reversing
the process.
Separating Silver from Platinum Waste.
— Cut the waste into small pieces, make
red hot to destroy grease and organic
substances, and dissolve in aqua regia
(hydrochloric acid, 3 parts, and nitric
acid, 1 part). Platinum and all other
metals combined with it are thus dis-
solved, while silver settles on the bot-
tom as chloride in the shape of a gray,
spongy powder. The solution is then
drawn off and tested by oxalic acid for
gold, which is precipitated as a fine yel-
lowish powder. The other metals re-
main untouched thereby. The plati-
num still present in the solution is now
obtained by a gradual addition of sal
ammoniac as a yellowish-gray powder.
These different precipitates are washed
with warm water, dried, and transformed
into the metallic state by suitable fluxes.
Platinum filings, however, have to be
previously refined. They are also first
annealed. All steel or iron filings are
removed with a magnet and the rest is
dipped into concentrated sulphuric acid
and heated with this to the boiling point.
This process is continued as long as an
action of the acid is noticeable. The
remaining powder is pure platinum.
Hot sulphuric acid dissolves silver with-
out touching the platinum. The liquid
used for the separation of the platinum is
now diluted with an equal quantity of
water and the silver expelled from it by
means of a saturated cooking salt solu-
tion. The latter is added gradually
until no more action, j. e., separation, is
perceptible. The liquid is carefully
drawn off, the residue washed in warm
water, dried and melted with a little
soda ashes as flux, which yields pure me-
tallic silver.
The old process for separating silver
from waste was as follows: The refuse
was mixed with an equal quantity of
charcoal, placed in a crucible, and sub-
jected to a bright-red heat, and in a short
time a silver button formed at the bot-
tom. Carbonate of soda is another eood
flux.
Silvering Glass Globes. — Take ^ ounce
of clean lead, and melt it with an equal
weight of pure tin; then immediately
add \ ounce of bismuth, and carefully
skim off the dross; remove the alloy
from the fire and before it grows cold add
5 ounces of mercury, and stir the whole
well together; then put the fluid amal-
gam into a clean glass, and it is fit for use.
When this amalgam is used for silvering
642
SILVER
let it be first strained through a linen rag;
then gently pour some ounces thereof
into the globe intended to be silvered;
the alloy should be poured into the globe
by means of a paper or glass fu'nnel
reaching almost to the bottom of the
globe, to prevent it splashing the sides;
the globe should be turned every way
very slowly, to fasten the silvering.
Silvering Powder for Metals. — Cop-
per, brass, and some other metals may be
silvered by rubbing well with the follow-
ing powder: Potassium cyanide, 12
parts; silver nitrate, 6 parts; calcium
carbonate, 30 parts. Mix and keep in a
well-closed bottle. It must be applied
with hard rubbing, the bright surface
being afterwards rinsed with water, dried,
and polished. Great care must be ex-
ercised in the use of the powder on
account of its poisonous nature. It
should not be allowed to come in con-
tact with the hands.
Silver Testing. — For this purpose a
cold saturated solution of potassium
bichromate in pure nitric acid of 1.2
specific gravity is employed. After the
article to be tested has been treated with
spirit of wine for the removal of any
varnish coating which might be present,
a drop of the above test liquor is applied
by means of a glass rod and the resultant
spot rubbed off with a little water.
A testing solution of potassium bi-
chromate, 1 ounce, pure nitric acid, 6
ounces, and water, 2 ounces, gives the
following results on surfaces of the
metals named:
Metal.
Color in one
minute.
Color of mark
left.
Pure silver
.925 silver
Bright blood-red
Dark red
Grayish white
Dark brown
.800 silver
Chocolate
Dark brown
.500 silver
Green
Dark brown
German silver
Nickel
Copper
Brass
Dark blue
Turquoise blue
Very dark blue
Dark brown
Light gray
Scarcely any
Cleaned copper
Light brown
Lead
Nut brown
Leaden
Tin
Reddish brown
Dark
Zinc
Light chocolate
Steel gray
Aluminum
Yellow
No stain
Platinum
Vandyke brown
No stain
Iron
Various
Black
9-carat gold
Unchanged
No stain
The second column in the table shows
such change of color as the liquid — not
the metal — undergoes during its action
for the period of 1 minute. The test
liquid being then washed off with cold
water, the third column shows the nature
of the stain that is left.
In the case of faintly silvered goods,
such as buttons, this test fails, since the
slight quantity of resulting silver chro-
mate does not become visible or dis-
solves in the nitric acid present. But
even such a thin coat of silver can be
recognized with the above test liquor, if
the bichromate solution is used, diluted
with the equal volume of water, or if a
small drop of water is first put on the ar-
ticle and afterwards a little drop of the
undiluted solution is applied by means
of a capillary tube. In this manner a
distinct red spot was obtained in the case
of very slight silvering.
A simpler method is as follows: Rub
the piece to be tested on the touchstone
and moisten the mark with nitric acid,
whereupon it disappears. Add a little
hydrochloric acid with a glass rod. If
a white turbidness (silver chloride) ap-
pears which does not vanish upon addi-
tion of water, or, in case of faint silvering
or an alloy poor in silver, a weak opal-
escence, the presence of silver is certain.
Even alloys containing very little silver
give this reaction quite distinctly.
Pink Color on Silver. — To produce a
beautiful pink color upon silver, dip the
clean article for a few seconds into a hot
and strong solution of cupric chloride,
swill it in water and then ary it or dip it
into spirit of wine and ignite the spirit.
SILVER, IMITATION:
See Alloys.
SILVERING:
See Plating.
SILVERING OF MIRRORS:
See Mirrors.
SILVERING, TEST FOR:
See Plating.
SILVER FOIL SUBSTITUTE:
See Metal Foil.
SILVER NITRATE SPOTS, TO RE-
MOVE:
See Cleaning Preparations and Meth-
ods.
SILVER-PLATING :
See Plating.
SILVER, RECOVERY OF PHOTO-
GRAPHIC:
See Photography.
SILVER SOLDERS:
See Solders.
SLATE— SNAKE BITES
643
SILVER, TO CLEAN:
See Cleaning Preparations and Meth-
ods.
SILVER, TO RECOVER GOLD FROM:
See Gold.
SILVERWARE POLISHES:
See Polishes.
SIMILOR:
See Alloys.
SINEWS, TREATMENT OF, IN MANU-
FACTURING GLUE:
See Adhesives.
SYRUP (RASPBERRY):
See Raspberry.
SYRUPS:
See Essences and Extracts.
SIZING:
See Adhesives.
SIZING WALLS FOR KALSOMINE:
See Kalsomine.
SKIN-CLEANING PREPARATIONS:
See Cleaning Preparations and Meth-
ods.
SKIN OINTMENTS:
See Ointments.
SKIN FOODS:
See Cosmetics.
SKIN TROUBLES:
See Soap.
SLATE:
Artificial Slate.— The artificial slate
coating on tin consists of a mixture of
finely ground slate, lampblack, and a
water-glass solution of equal parts of
potash and soda water glass (1.25 specific
gravity). The process is as follows:
I. — First prepare the water-glass solu-
tion by finely crushing equal parts of
solid potash ?,nd soda water glass and
pouring over this 6 to 8 times the quan-
tity of soft river water, which is kept
boiling about 1J hours, whereby the
water glass is completely dissolved. Add
7 parts finely crushed slate finely ground
with a little water into impalpable dust,
1 part lampblack, which is ground with
it, and grind enough of tliis mass with
the previously prepared water-glass solu-
tion as is necessary for n thick or thin
coating. With this compound the rough-
ened tin plates are painted as uniformly
as possible. For roofing, zinc plate may
be colored in the same manner. The
coating protects the zinc from oxidation
and consequently from destruction. For
painting zinc plate, however, only pure
[• glass must be added to
mixture, as the paint would loosen or
peel off from the zinc if soda water glass
were used.
II.— Good heavy paper or other sub-
stance is saturated with linseed-oil varnish
and then painted, several coats, one
after another with the following mixture:
Copal varnish 1 part
Oil of turpentine 2 parts
Fine, dry sand, pow-
dered 1 part
Powdered glass 1 part
Ground slate 2 parts
Lampblack 1 part
SLIDES FOR LANTERNS:
See Photography.
SLUGS ON ROSES:
See Insecticides.
SMARAGDINE:
See Alcohol (Solid).
SMUT, TREATMENT FOR:
See Grain.
SNAKE BITES.
About 25 years ago, Dr. S. Weir
Mitchell and Dr. Reichert published
results of their investigations of snake
venom which indicated that permanga-
nate of potassium may prove of material
value as an antidote to this lethal sub-
stance. Since that time permanganate
has been largely used all over the world
as a remedy when men and animals were
bitten by poisonous snakes, and Sir
Lauder Brunton devised an instrument
by means of which the permanganate
may be readily carried in the pocket, and
immediately injected into, or into the
neighborhood of, the wound. Captain
Rodgers, of the Indian Medical Service,
recently reported several cases treated by
this method, the wounds being due to
the bites of the cobra. After making
free crucial incisions of the bitten part,
the wound was thoroughly flushed with
a hot solution of permanganate of po-
tassium, and then bandaged. Recovery
occurred in each instance, although the
cauterant action of the hot solution of
permanganate of potassium delayed heal-
ing so long that the part was not well
for about 3 weeks. About 12 or 13 years
ago, Dr. Amos Barber, of Cheyenne,
Wyoming, reported cases in which ex-
cellent results had followed this method
of treatment. "
644
SOAPS
Soaps
(See also Cleaning Compounds and
Polishes.)
ANTISEPTIC SOAP.
I. — Various attempts have been made
to incorporate antiseptics and cosmetics
with soap, but for the most part unsuc-
cessfully, owing to the unfavorable ac-
tion of the added components, a good
instance of this kind being sodium perox-
ide, which, though a powerful antiseptic,
soon decomposes in ihe soap and loses
its properties, while the caustic character
of the oxide renders its use precarious,
even when the soap is fresh, unless great
care is taken. However, according to a
German patent, zinc peroxide is free
from these defects, since it retains its
stability and has no corrosive action on
the skin, while possessing powerful anti-
septic and cosmetic properties, and has a
direct curative influence when s-pplied to
cuts or wounds.
II. — The soap is prepared by melting
80 parts of household soap in a jack-
etea pan, and gradually adding 20 parts
of moist zinc peroxide (50 per cent
strength), the whole being kept well
stirred all the time. The finished mix-
ture will be about as stiff as dough, and
is easily shaped into tablets of conven-
ient size.
III. — Take 50 parts, by weight, of
caustic soda of 70 per cent, and free from
carbonic acid, if possible; 200 parts, by
weight, of sweet almond oil; 160 parts, by
weight, of glycerine of 30° Be.; and suf-
ficient distilled water to make up 1,000
parts by weight. First, dissolve the
alkali in double its weight of water, then
add the glycerine and oil and stir together.
Afterwards, add the remainder of the
water and keep the whole on the water
bath at a temperature of 140° to 158° F.,
for 24 to 36 hours; remove the oil not
saponified, which gives a gelatinous mass.
Mix 900 parts, by weight, of it with 70
parts, by weight, of 90 per cent alcohol
and 10 parts, by weight, of lemon oil,
and as much of the oil of bergamot and
the oil of vervain. Heat for some hours
at 140° F., then allow to cool and filter
on wadding to eliminate the needles of
stearate of potash. The liquid after
filtering remains clear.
Carpet Soap. —
Fuller's earth 4 ounces
Spirits of turpentine. . 1 ounce
Pearlash 8 ounces
Rub smooth and make into a stiff
paste with a sufficiency of soft soap.
To Cut Castile Soap. — A thin spatula
must be used. To cut straight, a
trough with open ends made with |-inch
boards should be taken, the inside
dimensions being 2£ inches wide, 3f
inches deep, and about 14 inches long.
Near the end a perpendicular slit is
sawed through the side pieces. Passing
the spatula down through this slit the
bar is cut neatly and straight. For
trimming off the corners a carpenter's
small iron plane works well.
COLORING SOAP.
The first point to be observed is to
select the proper shade of flower cor-
responding with the perfume used, for
instance, an almond soap is left white;
rose soap is colored pink or red; mi-
gnonette, green, etc.
The colors from which the soapmaker
may select are numerous; not only are
most of the coal-tar colors adapted for
his purpose, but also a very great number
of mineral colors. Until recently, the
latter were almost exclusively employed,
but the great advance in the tar-color
industry has brought about a change. A
prominent advantage of the mineral
colors is their stability; they are not
changed or in any way affected by ex-
posure to light. This advantage, how-
ever, is offset in many cases by the more
difficult method of application, the diffi-
culty of getting uniform shades. The
coal-tar colors give brilliant shades and
tints, are easy to use, and produce uni-
form' tints. The specific gravity of
mineral colors being rather high, in most
cases they will naturally tend to settle
toward the bottom of soap, and their use
necessitates crutchiiig of the soap until it
is too thick to allow the color to settle.
For mottled soap, however, vermilion,
red oxide, and ultramarine are still
largely employed.
For transparent soap mineral colors
are not applicable, as they would detract
from their transparency; for milled toilet
soap, on the other hand, they are very
well adapted, as also for cold-made soaps
which require crutching anyway until a
sufficient consistency is obtained to keep
the coloring material suspended.
A notable disadvantage in the use of
aniline colors, besides their sensitiveness
to the action of light, is the fact thatmany
of them are affected and partly destroyed
by the action of alkali. A fev/ of them are
proof against a small excess of lye, and
these may be used with good effect. Cer-
tain firms have made a specialty of manu-
facturing colors answering the peculiar
requirements of soap, being very easy of
SOAPS
645
application, as they are simply dissolved
in boiling water and the solution stirred
into the soap. To some colors a little
weak lye is added; others are mixed with
a little oil before they are added to the
soap.
For a soluble red color there were
formerly used alkanet and cochineal; at
present these have been displaced to a
great extent, on account of their high
cost, by magenta, which is very cheap
and of remarkable beauty. A very
small amount suffices for an intense
color, nor is a large proportion desirable,
as the soap would then stain. Delicate
tints are also produced by the eosine
colors, of which rose bengal, phloxine,
rhodamine, and eosine are most com-
monly used. These colors, when dis-
solved, have a brilliant fluorescence which
heightens their beautiful effect.
The following minerals, after being
ground and washed several times in
boiling water, will produce the colors
stated:
Hematite produces deep red.
Purple oxide iron produces purple.
Oxide of manganese produces brown.
Yellow ocher produces yellow.
Yellow ocher calcined produces orange.
Umber produces fawn.
Cinnabar produces medium red.
There are also a number of the azo
dyes, which are suitable for soaps, and
these, as well as the eosine colors, are
used principally for transparent soaps.
For opaque soaps both aniline and
mineral reds are used, among the latter
being vermilion, chrome red, and iron
oxide. Chrome red is a basic chromate
of lead, which is now much used in place
of vermilion, but, as it becomes black on
exposure to an atmosphere containing
even traces only of sulphureted hydro-
gen, it is not essentially adapted for soap.
Vermilion gives a bright color, but its
price is high. Iron oxide, known in the
trade as colcothar, rouge, etc., is used
for cheap soaps only.
Among the natural colors for yellow
are saffron, gamboge, turmeric, and
caramel (sugar color) ; the first named of
these is now hardly used, owing to its
high cost. Of the yellow aniline colors
special mention must be made of picric
acid (trinitrophenol), martius yellow,
naphthol yellow, acid yellow, and aura-
mine. If an orange tint is wanted, a
trace of magenta or safranine may be
added to the yellow colors named. The
use of some unbleached palm oil with
the stock answers a similar purpose, but
the color fades on exposure. A mineral
yellow is chrome yellow (chromate of
lead), which has the same advantages
and disadvantages as chrome red.
Of the blue aniline colors, there may
be used alkali blue, patent blue, and
indigo extract. Alkali or aniline blue is
soluble only in alkaline liquids; while
patent blue is soluble in water and in
alcohol. Both blues can be had in
different brands, producing from green
blues to violet blues. Indigo extract,
which should be classed among the
natural colors rather than among the tar
colors, is added to the soap in aqueous
solution.
Of ultramarine there are two modifica-
tions, the sulphate and the soda. Both
of these are proof against the action of
alkali, but are decomposed by acids or
salts having an acid reaction. The
former is much paler than the latter; the
soda ultramarine is best adapted for
coloring soda soaps blue. The ultra-
marine is added to the soap in the form
of a fine powder. Smalt is unsuitable,
although it gives soap a color of won-
derful beauty because a considerable
quantity of it is required to produce a
deep color, and, furthermore, it makes
the soap rough, owing to the gritty
nature which smalt has even when in the
finest powder. By mixing the blue and
yellow colors named, a great variety of
greens are obtained. Both component
colors must be entirely free from any
reddish tint, for the latter would cause
the mixture to form a dirty-green color.
Of the colors producing green directly
the two tar colors, Victoria and brilliant
green, are to be noted; these give a bright
color, but fade rapidly; thereby the soap
acquires an unsigntly appearance. For
opaque soap of the better grades, green
ultramarine or chrome green are used.
Gray and black are produced by lamp-
black. For brown, there is Bismarck
brown among the aniline colors and
umber among the earthy pigments.
Garment -Cleaning Soap. — The follow-
ing is excellent:
I. — White soap, rasped
or shaved 12 parts
Ammonia water. ... 3 parts
Boiling water 18 parts
Dissolve the soap in the water and
when it cools down somewhat, add to
the solution the ammonia water. Pour
the solution into a flask of sufficient
capacity (or holding about three times
as much as the mixture) and add enough
water to fill it about three-quarters full.
Shake and add, a little at a time, under
active agitation, enough benzine to make
100 parts. This constitutes the stock
646
SOAPS
bottle. To make up the mass or paste
put a teaspoonful in an 8-ounce bottle
and add, a little at a time, with constant
agitation, benzine to about fill the bot-
tle. This preparation is a rapid cleaner
and does not injure the most delicate
colors.
II. — Good bar soap,
shaved up 165 parts
Ammonia water. . 45 parts
Benzine 190 parts
Water sufficient
to make 1,000 parts
Dissolve the soap in 600 parts of water
by heating on the water bath, remove,
and add the ammonia under constant
stirring. Finally add the benzine, and
stir until homogeneous, and quite cold.
The directions to go with this paste are:
Rub the soap well into the spot and lay
the garment aside for a half hour.
Then using a stiff brush, rub with warm
water and rinse. This is especially use-
ful in spots made by rosins, oils, grease,
etc. Snould the spot be only partially
removed by the first application, repeat.
Glycerine Soaps. — Dr. Sarg's liquid
glycerine soap consists of4 334 parts of
potash soda soap, and 666 parts of glyc-
erine free from lime, the mixture being
scented with Turkish rose oil and orange
blossom oil in equal proportions, the
actual amount usea being varied accord-
ing to taste. The soap should be per-
fectly free from alkali; but as this is a
condition difficult of attainment in the
case of ordinary potash soaps, it is pre-
supposed that the soap used has been
salted out with potassium chloride, this
being the only way to obtain a soap free
from alkali.
Another variety of liquid glycerine
soap is prepared from purified medicinal
soft soap, 300 parts; glycerine free from
lime, 300 parts; white sugar syrup, 300
parts; doubly rectified spirit (96 per cent),
300 parts. The mixture is scented with
oil of cinnamon, 1 part; oil of sassafras,
2 parts; oil of citronella, £ part; oil of
wintergreen, 1 part; African geranium
oil, 1 part; clove oil, £ part; oil of berga-
mot, 3 parts; pure tincture of musk, £
part. These oils are dissolved in spirit,
and shaken up with the other ingredi-
ents; then left for 8 days with frequent
shaking, and 3 days in absolute quiet,
after which the whole is filtered, and is
then ready for packing.
Iodine Soaps. — In British hospitals,
preference is given to oleic acid over al-
coholic preparations for iodine soaps, as
t he former do not stain and can be washed
off with soap and water. The following
formula is given:
I. — Iodine 1 av. ounce
Oleic acid 1 fluidounce
Alcohol 6 fluidrachms
Stronger water of
ammonia 2 fluidrachms
This makes a soapy paste soluble in all
liquids, except fixed oils.
II. — Iodine 1 av. ounce
Oleic acid 2 fluidounces
Stronger water of
ammonia 3 fluidrachms
Paraffine oil, col-
orless, to make 20 fluidounces
III. — Iodine 1 av. ounce
Alcohol 5 fluidounces
Solution of am-
monium oleate. 1 fluidounce
Glycerine to make 20 fluidounces
The solution of ammonium oleate is
made from oleic acid and spirit of am-
monia.
Liquid Soaps. — Liquid soaps, or, as
they are sometimes called, soap essences,
are made from pure olive-oil soap by
dissolving it in alcohol and adding some
potassium carbonate. Tallow or lard
soaps cannot be used, as they will not
make a transparent preparation. The
soap is finely snaved and placed with the
alcohol and potassium carbonate in a
vessel over a water bath, the temperature
slowly and gradually raised, while the
mixture is kept in constant agitation by
stirring. The soap should be of a pure
white color and the alcohol gives the best
product when it is about 80 per cent
strength. After about three-quarters
of an hour to one hour, solution will be
complete and a perfectly transparent
article obtained. This can be scented
as desired by adding the proper essen-
tial oil as soon as the mixture is removed
from the water bath.
If an antiseptic soap is wanted the ad-
dition of a small amount of benzoic acid,
formaldehyde, or corrosive sublimate
will give the desired product. Liquid
soaps should contain from 20 to 40 per
cent of genuine white castile soap and
about 2 to 2J per cent of potassium car-
bonate.
This is a common formula:
By weight
I. — Olive or cottonseed
oil 60 parts
Caustic potash, U.
S. P 15 parts
Alcohol and water,
sufficient of each.
SOAPS
647
Dissolve the potash in 1 ounce of
water, heat the oil on a water bath,
add the solution of potash previously
warmed, and stir briskly. Continue the
heat until saponification is complete. If
oil globules separate out and refuse to
saponify, the potash is not of proper
strength, and more must be added — 1 or
2 parts dissolved in water. If desired
transparent add a little alcohol, and con-
tinue the heat without stirring until a
drop placed in cold water first solidifies
and then dissolves.
Commercial potash may be used, but
the strength must be ascertained and ad-
justed by experiment. The soap thus
made will be like jelly; it is dissolved in
alcohol, 4 to 6 ounces of soap to 2 of
alcohol, and after standing a day or two
is filtered and perfumed as desired. A
rancid oil would be easier to saponify,
but the soap would likely be rancid or
not as good.
II. — Ammonium sulphoichthyolate, 10
parts; distilled water, 15 parts; hebra's
soap spirit (a solution of potash soap,
120 parts, in 90 per cent spirit, 60 parts;
and spirit of lavender, 5 parts), 75 parts.
MEDICATED SOAPS.
First make up a suitable soap body and
afterwards add the medicament. For
instance, carbolic soaps may be made as
follows:
I. — Cocoanut oil 20 pounds
Tallow 4 pounds
Soda lye (38° to 40°
B.) 12 pounds
Phenol 1 pound
Prepare the body soap by stirring the
liquefied fat into the lye at 113° F., and
when combination has set in, incorpo-
rate the phenol and quickly pour into
molds. Cover the latter well. Instead
of the phenol 2 pounds of sulphur may
be used, and a sulphur soap made.
Parts by
weight
II. — Cotton oil 200
Alcohol, 91 per cent ... . . 300
Water 325
Caustic soda 45
Potassium carbonate 10
Ether... 15
Carbolic acid 25
The oil is mixed in a large bottle with
water, 100 parts; alcohol, 200 parts; and
caustic soda, 45 parts, and after saponi-
fication the remaining alcohol and the
potassium carbonate dissolved in the
rest of the water, and finally the carbolic
acid and the ether are added and the
whole well shaken. The mixture is
filled in tightly closed bottles and stored
at medium temperature. The prepara-
tion may be scented as desired, and the
carbolic acid replaced with other anti-
septics.
Liquid Tar Soap. — Mix 200 parts of tar
with 400 parts of oleic acid, warm lightly
and filter. In this way the aqueous con-
tent produces no trouble. Now warm
the filtrate on the water bath, neutralize
by stirring in an alcoholic potash solution.
To the soap thus produced, add 100 parts
of alcohol, and further a little olive oil, in
order to avoid a separation of any over-
plus of alkaline matter. Finally, bring up
to 1,000 parts with glycerine. This soap,
containing 22 per cent of tar, answers all
possible demands that may be made upon
it. Mixed with 2 parts of distilled water
it leaves no deposit on the walls of the
container.
Liquid Styrax Soap. — The process is
identical with the foregoing. For diges-
tion with oleic acid, the crude balsam
will answer, since filtration deprives the
product of all contaminating substances.
While this soap will separate, it is easily
again rendered homogeneous with a vigor-
ous shake. Preparations made with it
should be accompanied with a "shake"
label.
Superfatted Liquid Lanolin-Glycerine
Soap. — Dissolve about 10 per cent of
lanolin in oleic acid, saponify as in the
tar soap, and perfume (for which a solu-
tion of coumarin in geranium oil is prob-
ably the most suitable agent). The pre-
pared soap is improved by the addition
of a little tincture of benzoin.
Massage Soaps. — I. — An excellent recipe
for a massage soap is: Special cocoanut
oil ground soap, 2,500 pounds; lanolin,
50 pounds; pine-needle oil, 20 pounds;
spike oil, 3 pounds. Other massage
soaps are made from olive oil ground
soap, to which in special cases, as in the
treatment of certain rheumatic affections,
ichthyol is added. Massage soaps are
always wanted white, so that Cochin
cocoanut oil should be preferred to other
kinds.
II. — Cocoanut oil, 1,000 pounds; caus-
tic soda lye, 37° B., 500 pounds; pine-
needle oil, 4 pounds; artificial bitter al-
mond oil, 2 pounds. There is also a
"massage cream," wrhich differs from the
ordinary massage soaps in being made
with a soft potash soap as a ground soap.
The oils, etc., incorporated with the
ground mass are exactly the same in the
"cream" as in the soap.
648
SOAPS
Metallic Soaps. — Metallic soaps are
obtained by means of double decomposi-
tion. First a soap solution is produced
which is brought to a boil. On the other
hand, an equally strong solution of the
metallic salt of which the combination is
to be made (chlorides and sulphides are
employed with preference) is prepared,
the boiling solutions are mixed together,
and the metallic soap obtained is gath-
ered on a linen cloth. This is then put
on enameled plates and dried, first at
104° F., later at 140° F.
Aluminum soap is the most important.
Dissolved in benzine or oil of turpentine,
it furnishes an excellent varnish. It has
been proposed to use these solutions for
the varnishing of leather; they further-
more serve for the production of water-
5 roof linen and cloths, paper, etc.
arry recommended this compound for
impregnating railroad ties to render
them weatherproof.
Manganese soap is used as a siccative
in the preparation of linseed-oil varnish,
as well as for a drier to be added to
paints. Zinc soap is used in the same
manner.
Copper soap enters into the composi-
tion of gilding wax, and is also employed
for bronzing plaster of Paris articles.
For the same purpose, a mixture is made
use of consisting of copper soap and iron
soap melted in white lead varnish and
wax. Iron soap is used with aluminum
soap for waterproofing purposes and for
the production of a waterproof varnish.
By using wax instead of a soap, insoluble
metallic soaps are obtained, which,
melted in oils or wax, impart brilliant
colorings to them; but colored water-
proof and weather-resisting varnishes
may also be produced with them. Me-
tallic rosin soaps may be produced by
double decomposition of potash rosin
soaps and a soluble metal salt. From
these, good varnishes are obtained to
render paper carriage covers, etc., water-
proof; they may also be employed for
floor wax or lacquers.
Petroleum Soap. —
I. — Beeswax, refined. . . 4 parts
Alcohol 5 parts
Castile soap, finely
grated 10 parts
Petroleum 5 parts
Put the petroleum into a suitable
vessel along with the wax and alcohol
and cautiously heat on the water bath,
with an occasional agitation, until com-
plete solution is effected. Add the soap
and continue the heat until it is dis-
solved. When this occurs remove from
the bath and stir until the soap begins to
set, then pour into molds.
II. — The hydrocarbons (as petroleum,
vaseline, etc.) are boiled with a sufficient
quantity of alkali to form a soap, during
which process they absorb oxygen and
unite with the alkali to form fatty acid
salts. The resulting soap is dissolved
in water containing alkali, and the solu-
tion is heated along with alkali and salt.
The mass of soap separates out in three
layers, the central one being the purest;
and from this product the fatty acids
may be recovered by treatment with
sulphuric acid.
Perfumes for Soap. — From 1 to 2 ounces
of the following mixtures are to be used
to 10 pounds of soap:
I. — Oil of rose geranium 2 ounces
Oil of patchouli ^ ounce
Oil of cloves A ounce
Oil of lavender
flowers 1 ounce
Oil of bergamot. ... 1 ounce
Oil of sandalwood. . 1 ounce
II. — Oil of bergamot. . . . 2 ounces
Oil of orange flow-
ers 2 ounces
Oil of sassafras 2 ounces
Oil of white thyme. . 3 ounces
Oil of cassia 3 ounces
Oil of cloves 3 ounces
III. — Oil of citronella .... 1 ounce
Oil of cloves 1 ounce
Oil of bitter al-
monds 2 ounces
Pumice -Stone Soaps. — These soaps are
always produced by the cold process,
either from cocoanut oil alone or in con-
junction with tallow, cotton oil, bleached
palm oil, etc. The oil is melted and the
lye stirred in at about 90° F.; next, the
powdered pumice stone is sifted into the
soap and the latter is scented. Following
are some recipes:
I. — Cocoanut oil 40,000 parts
Cotton oil 10,000 parts
Caustic soda lye,
38° Be 24,000 parts
Caustic potash lye,
30° Be 1,000 parts
Powdered pumice
stone 25,000 parts
Cassia oil 150 parts
Rosemary oil 100 parts
Lavender oil 50 parts
Saf rol 50 parts
Clove oil 10 parts
II. — Cocoanut oil 50,000 parts
Caustic soda lye,
40° Be %. . . 25,000 parts
SOAPS
649
Powdered pumice
stone 50,000 parts
Lavender oil 250 parts
Caraway oil 80 parts
Shaving Soaps.
I. — Palm oil soap 5 pounds
Oil of cinnamon. ... 10 drachms
Oil of caraway 2 drachms
Oil of lavender 2 drachms
Oil of thyme. ...... 1 drachm
Oil of peppermint . . 45 minims
Oil of bergamot .... 2| drachms
Melt the soap, color if desired, and in-
corporate the oils.
II. — Soap 10 pounds
Alcohol 1 ounce
Oil of bitter almonds 1 J ounces
Oil of bergamot. ... f ounce
Oil of mace 3 drachms
Oil of cloves | ounce
Melt the soap with just enough water
to convert it into a soft paste when cold;
dissolve the oils in the alcohol, mix with
the paste, and rub up in a mortar, or
pass several times through a kneading
machine.
III. — White castile soap . . 5 parts
Alcohol 15 parts
Rose water 15 parts
SOAP POWDERS.
The raw materials of which soap pow-
der is made are soap and soda, to which
ingredients an addition of talcum or water
glass can be made, if desired, these ma-
terials proving very useful as a filling.
An excellent soap powder has been
made of 20 parts of crystallized soda, 5
parts of dark-yellow soap (rosin curd),
and 1 part of ordinary soft soap. At
first the two last mentioned are placed in
a pan, then half the required quantity
of soda is added, and the whole is treated!
Here it must be mentioned that the dark-
yellow curd soap, which is very rosinous,
has to be cut in small pieces before
placing the quantity into the pan. The
heating process must continue very
slowly, and the material has to be
crutched continually until the whole of
the substance has been thoroughly
melted. Care must be taken that the
heating process does not reach the boil-
ing point. The fire underneath the pan
must now be extinguished, and then the
remaining half of the crystallized soda
is added to be crutched with the molten
ingredients, until the whole substance
has become liquid. The liquefaction is
assisted by the residual heat of the first
heated material and the pan. The slow
cooling facilitates the productive pro-
cess by thickening the mass, and when
the soda has been absorbed, the whole
has become fairly thick. With occa-
sional stirring of the thickened liquid the
mass is left for a little while longer,
and when the proper moment has arrived
the material contained in the pan is
spread on sheets of thin iron, and these
are removed to a cool room, where, after
the first cooling, they must be turned
over by means of a shovel, and the turn-
ing process has to be repeated at short
intervals until the material has quite
cooled down and the mixture is thor-
oughly broken. The soap is now in a
very friable condition, and the time has
now come to make it into powder, for
which purpose it is rubbed through the
wire netting or the perforated sieves.
Generally the soap is first rubbed
through a coarse sieve, and then through
finer ones, until it has reached the re-
quired conditions of the powder. Some
of the best soap powders are coarse, but
other manufacturers making an equally
good article prefer the finer powder,
which requires a little more work, since
it has to go through three sieves, whereas
the coarse powder can do with one or at
most two treatments. But this is, after
all, a matter of local requirements or per-
sonal taste.
The powder obtained from the above-
mentioned ingredients is fine and yellow
colored, and it has all the qualities needed
for a good sale. Instead of the dark-
yellow soap, white stock soap can also
be used, and this makes only a little dif-
ference in the coloring. But again white
stock soap can be used, and the same
color obtained by the use of palm oil, or
other coloring ingredients, as these ma-
terials are used for giving the toilet
soaps their manifold different hues.
Many makers state that this process is
too expensive, and not only swallows up
all the profit, but some of the color ma-
terials influence the soap and not to its
advantage.
Soft soap is used only to make the
powder softer and easier soluble, and for
this reason the quantity to be used varies
a little and different manufacturers be-
lieve to have a secret by adding differ-
ent quantities of this material. As a gen-
eral statement it may be given that the
quantity of soft soap for the making of
soap powder should not overstep the pro-
portion of one to three, compared with
the quantity of hard soap; any excess in
this direction would frustrate the desires
of the maker, and land him with a prod-
uct which has become smeary and moist,
forming into balls and lumping together
650
SOAPS
in bags or cases, to become discolored
and useless. It is best to stick to the
proportion as given, 5 parts of hard and
1 part of soft soap, when the produced
powder will be reliable and stable and
not form into balls even if the material
is kept for a long while.
This point is of special importance,
since soap powder is sold mostly in
weighed-out packages of one and a half
pounds. Most manufacturers will ad-
mit that loose soap powder forms only
a small part of the quantities produced,
as only big laundries and institutions
purchase same in bags or cases. The
retail trade requires the soap powder
wrapped up in paper, and if tnis has to
be aone the powder must not be too
moist, as the paper otherwise will fall
to pieces. This spoils the appearance
of the package, and likely a part of the
quantity may be lost. When the pow-
der is too moist or absorbs easily external
moisture, the paper packages swell very
easily and burst open.
The best filling material to be em-
ployed when it is desired to produce a
cheaper article is talcum, and in most
cases this is preferred to water glass.
The superiority of the former over the
latter is that water glass hardens the
powder, and this is sometimes done to
such an extent, when a large quantity of
filling material is needed, that it becomes
very difficult to rub the soap through the
sieves. In case this difficulty arises,
only one thing can be done to lighten the
task, and that is to powderize the soap
when the mixed materials are still warm,
and this facilitates the work very much.
It is self-evident that friction under these
conditions leaves a quantity of the soap
powder material on the sieves, and this
cannot be lost. Generally it is scraped
together and returned to the pan to be
included in the next batch, when it is
worked up, and so becomes useful, a need
which does not arise when talcum has
been used as a filling material. Again,
the soap powder made with the addition
of water glass is not so soluble, and at
the same time much denser than when
the preparation has been made without
this material. It is thus that the purchaser
receives by equal weight a smaller-looking
quantity, and as the eye has generally a
great influence when the consumer deter-
mines a purchase, the small-sized parcels
will impress him unfavorably. This second
quality of soap powder is made of the same
ingredients as the other, except that an
addition of about 6 parts of talcum is
made, and this is stirred up with the other
material after all the soda has been dis-
solved. Some makers cheapen the prod-
ucts also by reducing the quantity of
hard soap from 5 to 3 parts and they
avoid the filling; the same quantity of
soda is used in all cases. On the same
principle a better quality is made by
altering the proportions of soda and
soap the other way. Experiments will
soon show which proportions are most
suitable for the purpose.
So-called ammonia - turpentine soap
powder has been made by crutching oil
of turpentine and ammonia with the
materials just about the time before the
whole is taken out of the heating pan.
Some of the powder is also scented, and
the perfume is added at the same time
and not before. In most of the latter
cases mirbane oil is used for the pur-
pose.
These powders are adaptable to hard
water, as their excess of alkali neu-
tralizes the lime that they contain:
I. — Curd (hard) soap,
nwdered 4 parts
oda 3 parts
Silicate of soda 2 parts
Make as dry as possible, and mix
intimately.
Borax Soap Powder. —
II. — Curd (hard) soap, in
powder 5 parts
Soda ash 3 parts
Silicate of soda 2 parts
Borax (crude) 1 part
Each ingredient is thoroughly dried,
and all mixed together by sieving.
London Soap Powder. —
III. — Yellow soap 6 parts
Soda crystals 3 parts
Pearl ash 1J parts
Sulphate of soda.. . . if parts
Palm oil 1 part
TOILET SOAPS.
The question as to the qualities of
toilet soaps has a high therapeutical
significance. Impurity of complexion
and morbid anomalies of the skin are
produced by the use of poor and un-
suitable soaps. The latter, chemically
regarded, are salts of fatty acids, and are
prepared from fats and a lye, the two
substances being mixed in a vessel and
brought to a boil, soda lye being used
in the preparation of toilet soaps. In
boiling together a fat and a lye, the
former is resolved into its component
parts, a fatty acid and glycerine. The
SOAPS
651
acid unites with the soda lye, forming a
salt, which is regarded as soap. By the
addition of sodium chloride, this (the
soap) is separated and swims on the
residual liquid as "kern," or granulated
soap. Good soaps were formerly made
only from animal fats, but some of the
vegetable oils or fats have been found to
also make excellent soap. Among them
the best is cacao butter.
From a hygienic standpoint it must be
accepted as a law that a good toilet soap
must contain no free (uncombined)
alkali, every particle of it must be
chemically bound up with fatty acid to
the condition of a salt, and the resultant
soap should be neutral in reaction.
Many of the soaps found in commerce
to-day contain free alkali, and exert a
harmful effect upon the skin of those
who use them. Such soaps may readily
be detected by bringing them into con-
tact with the tongue. If free alkali
be present it will make itself known
by causing a burning sensation — some-
thing that a good toilet soap should
never do.
The efficiency of soap depends upon
the fact that in the presence of an
abundance of water the saponified fat is
decomposed into acid and basic salts, in
which the impurities of the skin are dis-
solved and are washed away by the
further application of water. Good soap
exerts its effects on the outer layer of the
skin, the so-called horny (epithelial)
layer, which in soapy water swells up and
is, in fact, partially dissolved in the
medium and washed away. This fact,
however, is unimportant, since the super-
ficial skin cells are reproduced with
extraordinary rapidity and ease. When
a soap contains or carries free alkali, the
caustic effects of the latter are carried
further and deeper, reaching below the
epithelial cells and attacking the true
skin, in which it causes minute rifts and
splits and renders it sore and painful.
Good soap, on the contrary, makes the
skin smooth and soft.
Since the employment of poor soaps
works so injuriously upon the skin, many
persons never, or rarely ever, use soap,
but wash the face in water alone, or with
a little almond bran added. Their skins
cannot bear the regular application of
poor soap. This, however, applies only to
poor, free-alkali containing soaps. Any
skin can bear without injury any amount
of a good toilet soap, free from uncom-
bined alkali and other impurities. The
habit of washing the face with water
only, without the use of soap, must be
regarded as one altogether bad, since
the deposits on the skin, mostly dust-
particles and dead epithelial cells, ming-
ling with the oily or greasy matter exuded
from the fat glands of the skin — ex-
cellent nutrient media for colonies of
bacteria — cannot be got rid of by water
alone. Rubbing only forces the mass
into the openings in the skin (the sweat
glands, fat glands, etc.), and stops them
up. In this way are produced the so-
called "black heads" and other spots and
blotches on the skin usually referred to
by the uneducated, or partially educated,
as "parasites." . The complexion is in
this manner injured quite as much by
the failure to use good soap as by the
use of a poor or bad article.
All of the skin troubles referred to may
be totally avoided by the daily use of a
neutral, alkali-free soap, and the com-
plexion thus kept fresh and pure. Com-
pletely neutral soaps, however, are more
difficult to manufacture — requiring more
skill and care than those in which no
attention is paid to excess of alkali — •
and consequently cost more than the
general public are accustomed, or, in
fact, care to pay for soaps. While this
is true, one must not judge the quality
of a soap by the price demanded for
it. Some of the manufacturers of mis-
erable soaps charge the public some of
the most outrageous prices. Neither
can a soap be judged by its odor or
its style of package and putting on the
market.
To give a soap an agreeable odor the
manufacturers add to it, just when it
commences to cool off, an etheric oil
(such as attar of rose, oil of violets,
bergamot oil, etc.), or some balsamic
material (such as tincture of benzoin,
for instance). It should be known, how-
ever, that while grateful to the olfactory
nerves, these substances do not add one
particle to the value of the soap, either
as a detergent or as a preserver of the
skin or complexion.
Especially harmful to the skin are
soaps containing foreign substances, such,
for instance, as the starches, gelatin,
clay, chalk, gums, or rosins, potato flour,
etc., which are generally added to in-
crease the weight of soap. Such soaps
are designated, very significantly, "filled
soaps," and, as a class, are to be avoided,
if for no other reason, on account of their
lack of true soap content. The use of
these fillers should be regarded as a
criminal falsification under the laws re-
garding articles of domestic use, since
they are sold at a relatively high price,
yet contain foreign matter, harmful to
health.
652
SOAPS
RECIPES FOR COLD-STIRRED TOI-
LET SOAPS. Parts by
weight
I. — Cocoanut oil 30
Castor oil 3
Caustic soda lye (38° Be). 17 J
Pink Soap. — Parts by
weight
II.— Pink No. 114 10
Lemon oil 60
Cedar- wood oil 60
Citronella oil 50
Wintergreen oil 15
Pale-Yellow Soap.— Parts by
weight
III.— Orange No. 410 10
Citronella oil 60
Sassafras oil 60
Lavender oil 45
Wintergreen oil 15
Aniseed oil 25
Toilet Soap Powder. —
Marseilles soap, pow-
dered 100 parts
Bran of almonds 50 parts
Lavender oil 5 parts
Thyme oil 3 parts
Spike oil 2 parts
Citronella oil 2 parts
Soft Toilet Soaps. — Soft toilet soaps or
creams may be prepared from fresh lard
with a small addition of cocoanut oil and
caustic potash solution, by the cold
process or by boiling. For the cold
process, 23 parts of fresh lard and 2 parts
of Cochin cocoanut oil are warmed in a
jacketed pan, and when the temperature
reaches 113° F. are treated with 9 parts
of caustic potash and 2t parts of caustic
soda solution, both of 38° Be. strength,
the whole being stirred until saponifica-
tion is complete. The soap is transferred
to a large marble mortar and pounded
along with the following scenting ingredi-
ents: 0.15 parts of oil of bitter almonds and
0.02 parts of oil of geranium rose, or 0.1
part of the latter, and 0.05 parts of lemon
oil. The warm process is preferable, ex-
perience having shown that boiling is
essential to the proper saponification of
the fats. In this method, 80 parts of
lard and 20 parts of Cochin cocoanut oil
are melted together in a large pan, 100
parts of potash lye (20° Be.) being then
crutched in by degrees, and the mass
raised to boiling point. The combined
influence of the heat and crutching
vaporizes part of the water in the lye,
and the soap thickens. When the soap
has combined, the fire is made up, and
another 80 parts of the same potash lye
are crutched in gradually. The soap
gets thicker and thicker as the water is
expelled and finally throws up "roses"
on the surface, indicating that it is near-
ly finished. At this stage it must be
crutched vigorously, to prevent scorch-
ing against the bottom of the pan and
the resulting more or less dark colora-
tion. The evaporation period may be
shortened by using only 50 to 60 parts of
lye at first, and fitting with lye of 25° to
30° strength. For working on the large
scale iron pans heated by steam are
used, a few makers employing silver-
lined vessels, which have the advantage
that they are not attacked by the alkali.
Tinned copper pans are also useful. The
process takes from 7 to 8 hours, and when
the soap is finished it is transferred into
stoneware vessels for storage. Clear
vegetable oils (castor oil) may be used,
but the soaps lack the requisite nacreous
luster required.
TRANSPARENT SOAPS.
The mode of production is the same
for all. The fats are melted together,
sifted into a double boiler, and the lye is
stirred in at 111° F. Cover up for an
hour, steam being allowed to enter
slowly. There is now a clear, grain-like
soap in the kettle, into which the sugar
solution and the alcohol are crutched,
whereupon the kettle is covered up. If
cuttings are to be used, they are now
added. When same are melted, the
kettle will contain a thin, clear soap,
which is colored and scented as per
directions, and subsequently filled into
little iron molds and cooled.
Rose -Glycerine Soap.-
I. — Cochin cocoanut
oil
Compressed tal-
low
Castor oil
Caustic soda lye,
38° Be
Sugar
Dissolved in
Water
Alcohol
Geranium oil
(African)
Lemon oil
Palmarosa oil. .
Bergamot oil
70,000 parts
40,000 parts
30,000 parts
79,000 parts
54,000 parts
60,000 parts
40,000 parts
250 parts
200 parts
1,200 parts
80 parts
Benzoin -Glycerine Soap. —
II. — Cochin cocoanut
oil 66,000 parts
Compressed tal-
low 31,000 parts
SOAPS
653
Castor oil ....
Caustic soda
38° Be.. ..
Sugar
Dissolved in
lye,
Water
Alcohol
Brown, No. 120...
Powdered benzoin
(Siam)
Styrax liquid
Tincture of ben-
zoin
Peru balsam
Lemon oil
Clove oil . .
35,000 parts
66,000 parts
35,000 parts
40,000 parts
35,000 parts
200 parts
4,200 parts
1,750 parts
1,400 parts
700 parts
200 parts
70 parts
Sunflower -Glycerine Soap. —
III. — Cochin cocoanut
oil 70,000 parts
Compressed tal-
low 50,000 parts
Castor oil 23,000 parts
Caustic soda lye,
39° Be 71,000 parts
Sugar 40,000 parts
Dissolved in
Water
Alcohol
Brown, No. 55. .
Geranium oil.. . .
Bergamot oil. ...
Cedar- wood oil. .
Palmarosa oil. . .
Vanillin
Tonka tincture. .
30,000 parts
40,000 parts
250 parts
720 parts
300 parts
120 parts
400 parts
10 parts
400 parts
MISCELLANEOUS FORMULAS:
Szegedin Soap. — Tallow, 120 parts;
palm kernel oil, 80 parts. Saponify well
with about 200 parts of lye of 24° Be.
and add, with constant stirring, the fol-
lowing fillings in rotation, viz., potash
solution, 20° Be., 150 parts, and cooling
salt solution 20° Be., 380 parts.
Instrument Soap. — A soap for clean-
ing surgical instruments, and other ar-
ticles of polished steel, which have be-
come specked with rust by exposure, is
made by adding precipitated chalk to a
strong solution of cyanide of potassium
in water, until a cream-like paste is
obtained. Add to this white castile soap
in fine shavings, and rub the whole to-
gether in a mortar, until thoroughly in-
corporated. The article to be cleaned
should be first immersed, if possible, in a
solution of 1 part of cyanide of potash in
4 parts of water, and kept there until the
surface dirt and rust disappears. It
should then be polished with the soap,
made as above directed.
Stain-Removing Soaps. — These are
prepared in two ways, either by making
a special soap, or by mixing ordinary
soap with special detergents. A good
recipe is as follows:
I. — Ceylon cocoanut
or palm seed oil 320 pounds
Caustic soda lye,
38° Be 160 pounds
Carbonate of pot-
ash, 20° Be .... 56 pounds
Oil of turpentine. 9 pounds
Finely powdered
kieselguhr 280 pounds
Brilliant green.. . . 2 pounds
The oil having been fused, the dye is
mixed with some of it and stirred into
the contents of the pan. The kieselguhr
is then crutched in from a sieve, then the
lye, and then the carbonate of potash.
These liquids are poured in in a thin
stream. When the soap begins to
thicken, add the turpentine, mold, and
cover up the molds.
II. — Rosin grain soap. 1,000 pounds
Talc (made to a
paste with weak
carbo n a t e of
potash) 100 pounds
Oil of turpentine. 4 pounds
Benzine 3 pounds
Mix the talc and soap by heat, and
when cool enough add the turpentine
and benzine, and mold.
III. — Cocoanut oil 600 pounds
Tallow 400 pounds
Caustic soda lye. . 500 pounds
Fresh ox gall 200 pounds
Oil of turpentine. 12 pounds
Ammonia (sp. gr.,
0.91) 6 pounds
Benzine 5 pounds
Saponify by heat, cool, add the gall
and the volatile liquids, and mold.
Soap Substitutes. —
I. — Linseed oil 28 pounds
Sulphur 8 pounds
Aluminum soap. ... 28 pounds
Oil of turpentine.. . . 4 pounds
II. — Aluminum soap. ... 15 pounds
Almadina 25 pounds
Caoutchouc 50 pounds
Sulphur. 6 pounds
Oleum succini 4 pounds
Shampoo Soap. —
Linseed oil 20 parts
Malaga olive oil 20 parts
Caustic potash 9^ parts
Alcohol 1 part
Water 30 parts
654
SOAPS
Warm the mixed oils on a large water
bath, then the potash and water in
another vessel, heating both to 158° F.,
and adding the latter hot solution to the
hot oil while stirring briskly. Now add
and thoroughly mix the alcohol. Stop
stirring, keep the heat at 158° F. until
the mass becomes clear and a small
quantity dissolves in boiling water with-
out globules of oil separating. Set aside
for a few days before using to make the
liquid soap.
The alcohol may be omitted if a
transparent product is immaterial.
Sapo Durus. —
Olive oil 100 parts
Soda lye, sp. gr., 1.33. 50 parts
Alcohol (90 per cent) . 30 parts
Heat on a steam bath until saponifica-
tion is complete. The soap thus formed
is dissolved in 300 parts of hot distilled
water, and salted out by adding a filtered
solution of 25 parts of sodium chloride
and 5 parts of crystallized sodium car-
bonate in 80 parts of water.
Sapo Mollis. —
Olive oil 100 parts
Solid potassium hy-
droxide 21 parts
Water 100 parts
Alcohol (90 per cent) . 20 parts
Boil by means of a steam bath until
the oil is saponified, adding, if necessary,
a little more spirit to assist the saponifica-
tion.
Sand Soap. — Cocoa oil, 24 parts; soda
lye, 38° Be., 12 parts; sand, finely sifted,
28 parts; cassia oil, .0100 parts; sassafras
oil, .0100 parts.
Salicylic Soap. — When salicylic acid is
used in soap it decomposes, as a rule, and
an alkali salicylate is formed which the
skin does not absorb. A German chemist
claims to have overcome this defect by
thoroughly eliminating all water from
potash or soda soap, then mixing it with
vaseline, heating the mixture, and incor-
porating free salicylic acid with the re-
sulting mass. The absence of moisture
prevents any decomposition of the sali-
cylic acid.
Olein Soap Substitute. — Fish oil or
other animal oil is stirred up with sul-
phuric acid, and then treated with water.
After another stirring, the whole is left
to settle, and separate into layers, where-
upon the acid and water are drawn off,
and caustic soda solution is stirred in
with the oil. The finishing stage con-
sists in stirring in refined mineral oil,
magnesium chloride, borium chloride,
and pure seal or whale oil, in succession.
Mottled Soap. — Tallow, 30 parts;
palm kernel oil, 270 parts; lye, 20°, 347*
parts; potassium chloride solution, 20°,
37* parts. After everything has been
boiled into a soap, crutch the following
dye solution into it: Water, 5£ parts;
blue, red, or black, .0315 parts; water
glass, 38°, 10 parts; and lye, 38°, 1J
parts.
Laundry Soap. — A good, common
hard soap may be made from clean tal-
low or lard and caustic soda, without any
very special skill in manipulation. The
caustic soda indicated is a crude article
which may now be obtained from whole-
sale druggists in quantities to suit, at a
very moderate price. A lye of average
strength is made by dissolving it in water
in the proportion of about 2 pounds to
the gallon. For the saponification of
lard, a given quantity of the grease is
melted at a low heat, and £ its weight of
lye is then added in small portions with
constant stirring; when incorporation
has been thoroughly effected, another
portion of lye equal to the first is added,
as before, and the mixture kept at a
gentle heat until saponification appears
to be complete. If the soap does not
readily separate from the liquid, more
lye should be added, the soap being in-
soluble in strong lye. When separation
has occurred, pour off the lye, add water
to the mass, heat until dissolved, and
again separate by the use of more strong
lye or a strong solution of common salt.
The latter part of the process is designed
to purify the soap and may be omitted
where only a cruder article is required.
The soap is finally remelted on a water
bath, kept at a gentle heat until as much
water as possible is expelled, and then
poured into frames or molds to set.
Dog Soap. —
Petroleum 5^1 „ .
Wax 4 I Parts
Alcohol 5 1 ?v
Good laundry soap. 15 J*
Heat the petroleum, wax, and alcohol
on a water bath until they are well mixed,
and dissolve in the mixture the soap cut
in fine shavings. This may be used on
man or beast for driving away vermin.
Liquid Tar Soap (Sapo Picis liqui-
dus).—
Wood tar 25 parts
Hebra's soap spirit. . . 75 parts
Ox -Gall Soap for Cleansing Silk
Stuffs. — To wash fine silk stuffs, such as
SOAPS— SOLDERS
655
piece goods, ribbons, etc., employ a soap
containing a certain amount of ox gall,
a product that is not surpassed for the
purpose. In making this soap the fol-
lowing directions will be found of ad-
vantage: Heat 1 pound of cocoanut oil
to 100° F. in a copper kettle. While
stirring vigorously add \ pound of caustic
soda lye of 30° Baume. In a separate
vessel heat \ pound of white Venice tur-
pentine, and stir this in the soap in the
copper kettle. Cover the kettle well,
and let it stand, mildly warmed for 4
hours, when the temperature can be
again raised until the mass is quite hot
and flows clear; then add the pound of
ox gall to it. Now pulverize some good,
perfectly dry grain soap, and stir in as
much of it as will make the contents of
the copper kettle so hard that it will yield
slightly to the pressure of the fingers.
From 1 to 2 pounds is all the grain soap
required for the above quantity of gall
soap. When cooled, cut out the soap
and shape into bars. This is an indis-
pensable adjunct to the dyer and cleaner,
as it will not injure the most delicate color.
SOAP-BUBBLE LIQUIDS.
I. — White hard soap. . . 25 parts
Glycerine 15 parts
Water 1,000 parts
II. — Dry castile soap. . . 2 parts
Glycerine 30 parts
Water 40 parts
SOAP POLISHES:
See Polishes.
SOAP, TOOTH:
See Dentifrice.
SODA PAINT:
See Paint.
SODA WATER:
See Beverages.
SODIUM HYPOSULPHITE:
See Photography.
SODIUM SILICATE AS A CEMENT:
See Adhesives, under Water-Glass
Cements.
SODIUM SALTS, EFFERVESCENT:
See Salts.
Solders
SOLDERING OF METALS AND THE
PREPARATION OF SOLDERS.
The object of soldering is to unite two
portions of the same metal or of different
metals by means of a more fusible metal
or metallic alloy, applied when melted,
and known by the name of solder. As
the strength of the soldering depends on
the nature of the solder used, the degree
of strength required for the joint must
be kept in view in choosing a solder.
The parts to be joined must be free from
oxide and thoroughly clean; this can be
secured by filing, scouring, scraping, or
pickling with acids. The edges must
fit exactly, and be heated to the melting
point of the solder. The latter must
have a lower melting point than either
of the portions of metal that require to
be joined, and if possible only those
metals should be chosen for solder which
form alloys with them. The solder
should also as far as possible have the
same color and approximately the same
strength as the article whose edges are to
be united.
To remove the layers of oxide which
form during the process of soldering,
various so-called "fluxes" are employed.
These fluxes are melted and applied to
the joint, and act partly by keeping off
the air, thus preventing oxidation, and
partly by reducing and dissolving the
oxides themselves. The choice of a flux
depends on the quantity of heat required
for soldering.
Solders are classed as soft and hard
solders. Soft solders, also called tin
solders or white solders, consist of soft,
readily fusible metals or alloys, and do
not possess much strength; they are easy
to handle on account of their great
fusibility. Tin, lead-tin, and alloys of
tin, lead, and bismuth are used for soft
solders, pure tin being employed only for
articles made of the same metal (pure
tin).
The addition of some lead makes the
solder less fusible but cheaper, while that
of bismuth lowers the melting point.
Soft solders are used for soldering easily
fusible metals such as Britannia metal,
etc., also for soldering tin plate. To
prepare solder, the metals are melted
together in a graphite crucible at as low
a temperature as possible, well stirred
with an iron rod, and cast into ingots in
an iron mold. To melt the solder when
required for soldering, the soldering iron
is used; the latter should be kept as free
from oxidation as possible, and the part
applied should be tinned over. •
To make so-called "Sicker" solder,
equal parts of lead and tin are melted
together, well mixed, and allowed to
stand till the mixture begins to set, the
part still in a liquid condition being then
poured off. This mixture can, however,
656
SOLDERS
be more easily made by melting together
37 parts of lead and 63 parts of tin
(exactly measured).
Soldering irons are usually made of
copper, as copper is easily heated and
easily gives up its heat to the solder.
The point of the iron must be "tinned."
To do this properly, the iron should be
heated hot enough easily to melt the
solder; the point should then be quickly
dressed with a smooth flat file to remove
the oxide, and rubbed on a piece of tin
through solder and sal ammoniac. The
latter causes the solder to adhere in a
thin, even coat to the point of the iron.
A gas or gasoline blow torch or a char-
coal furnace is best for heating the iron,
but a good, clean coal fire, well coked,
will answer the purpose.
When in use, the iron should be hot
enough to melt the solder readily. A
cold iron produces rough work. This is
where the beginner usually fails. If pos-
sible, it is well to warm the pieces
before applying the iron. The iron
must not be heated too hot, however, or
the tin on the point will be oxidized.
The surfaces to be soldered must be
clean. Polish them with sandpaper,
emery cloth, a file, or a scraper. Grease
or oil will prevent solder from sticking.
Some good soldering fluid should be
used. A very good fluid is made by dis-
solving granulated zinc in muriatic acid.
Dissolve as much zinc as possible in the
acid. The gas given off will explode if
ignited. To granulate the zinc, melt it
in a ladle, and pour it slowly into a barrel
of water. A brush or swab should be
used to spread the fluid on the surfaces
to be soldered. If the point of the solder-
ing iron becomes dirty, it should be
wiped on a cloth or piece of waste that
has been dampened with the soldering
fluid.
Soldering of Metallic Articles. — -In a
recently invented process the parts to be
united are covered, on the surfaces not
to be soldered, with a protective mass,
which prevents an immediate contact of
the solder with the surfaces in question,
and must be brushed off only after the
soldered pieces have cooled perfectly,
whereby the possibility of a change of
position of these pieces seems precluded.
For the execution of this process the
objects .to be soldered, after the surfaces
to be united have been provided with a
water-glass solution as the soldering agent
and placed together as closely as possible
or united by wires or rivets, are coated in
the places where no solder is desired with
a protective mass, consisting essentially
of carbon (graphite, coke, or charcoal),
powdered talc or asbestos, ferric hydrate
(with or without ferrous hydrate), and,
if desired, a little aluminum oxide, to-
gether with a binding agent of the cus-
tomary kind (glue solution, beer).
Following are some examples of the
composition of these preparations:
I. — Graphite, 50 parts; powdered coke,
5 parts; powdered charcoal, 5 parts; pow-
dered talc, 10 parts; glue solution, 2.5
parts; drop beer, 2.5 parts; ferric hydrate,
10 parts; aluminum oxide, 5 parts.
II. — Graphite, burnt, 4 parts; graphite,
unburnt, 6 parts; powdered charcoal, 3
Earts; powdered asbestos, 1 part; ferric
ydrate, 3 parts; ferrous hydrate, 2
parts; glue solution, 1 part.
The article thus prepared is plunged,
after the drying of the protective layer
applied, in the metal bath serving as
solder (molten brass, copper, etc.), and
left to remain therein until the part to
be soldered has become red hot, which
generally requires about 50 to 60
seconds, according to the size of the ob-
ject. In order to avoid, in introducing
the article into the metal bath, the
scattering of the molten metal, it is well
previously to warm the article and to dip
it warm. After withdrawal from the
metal bath the soldered articles are al-
lowed to cool, and are cleaned with wire
brushes, so as to cause the bright surfaces
to reappear.
The process is especially useful for
uniting iron or steel parts, such as
machinery, arms, and bicycle parts in a
durable manner.
Soldering Acid. — A very satisfactory
soldering acid may be made by the use of
the ordinary soldering acid for the base
and introducing a certain proportion of
chloride of tin and sal ammoniac. This
gives an acid which is superior in every
way to the old form. To make 1 gallon
of this soldering fluid take 3 quarts of
common muriatic acid and allow it to
dissolve as much zinc as it will take up.
This method, of course, is the usual one
followed in the manufacture of ordinary
soldering acid. The acid, as is well
known, must be placed in an earthen-
ware or glass vessel. The zinc may be
sheet clippings or common plate spelter
broken into small pieces. Place the acid
in the vessel and add the zinc in small
portions so as to prevent the whole from
boiling over. When all the zinc has
been added and the action has stopped, it
indicates that enough has been taken up.
Care must be taken to see that there is
a little zinc left in the bottom, as other-
SOLDERS
657
wise the acid will be in excess. The
idea is to have the acid take up as much
zinc as it can.
After this has been done there will
remain some residue in the form of a
black precipitate. This is the lead which
all zinc contains, and which is not dis-
solved by the muriatic acid. This lead
may be removed by filtering through a
funnel in the bottom of which there is a
little absorbent cotton, or the solution
may be allowed to remain overnight until
the lead has settled and the clear solu-
tion can then be poured off. This lead
precipitate is not particularly injurious
to the soldering fluid, but it is better to
get rid of it so that a good, clear solution
may be obtained. Next, dissolve 6
ounces of sal ammoniac in a pint of
warm water. In another pint dissolve
4 ounces of chloride of tin. The chloride
of tin solution will usually be cloudy, but
this will not matter. Now mix the 3
solutions together. The solution will
be slightly cloudy when the 3 have been
mixed, and the addition of a few drops
of muriatic acid will render it perfectly
clear. Do not add any more acid than
is necessary to do this, as the solution
would then contain too much of this
ingredient and the results would be in-
jurious.
This soldering acid will not spatter
when the iron is applied to it. It has
also been found that a poorer grade of
solder may be used with it than with
the usual soldering acid.
ALUMINUM SOLDERS.
To solder aluminum it is necessary
previously to tin the parts to be soldered.
This tinning is done with the iron, using
a composition of aluminum and tin.
Replace the ordinary soldering iron by
an iron of pure aluminum. Prepara-
tion of aluminum solder: Commence by
fusing the copper; then add the alumi-
num in several installments, stir the mix-
ture well with a piece of iron; next add
the zinc and a little tallow or benzine at
the same time. Once the zinc is added
do not heat too strongly, to avoid the
volatilization of the zinc.
I. — Take 5 parts of tin and 1 part of
aluminum. Solder with the iron or
with the blowpipe, according to the article
in question.
II. — The pieces to be soldered are to
be tinned, but instead of using pure tin,
alloys of tin with other metals are em-
ployed, preferably those of tin and
aluminum. For articles to be worked
after soldering, 45 parts of tin and 10
parts of aluminum afford a good alloy,
malleable enough to be hammered, cut,
or turned. If they are not to be worked,
the alloy requires less aluminum and
may be applied in the usual manner as in
soldering iron.
Aluminum Bronze. — I. — Strong solder:
Gold, 89 parts; fine silver, 5 parts; cop-
per, 6 parts.
II. — Medium solder: Gold, 54 parts;
fine silver, 27 parts; copper, 19 parts.
III. — Weak solder: Gold, 14 parts;
silver, 57 parts; copper, 15 parts; brass,
14 parts.
BRASS SOLDERS.
Brass solder consists of brass fusible
at a low temperature, and is made by
melting together copper and zinc, the
latter being in excess. A small quantity
of tin is often added to render the solder
more fusible. Hard solders are usually
sold in the form of granules. Although
many workers in metals make their own
solder, it is advisable to use hard solder
made in factories, as complete uni-
formity of quality is more easily secured
where large quantities are manufactured.
In making hard solder the melted
metal is poured through birch twigs in
order to granulate it. The granules are
afterwards sorted by passing them
through sieves.
When brass articles are soft-soldered,
the white color of the solder contrasts
unpleasantly with the brass. If this is
objected to, the soldered part can be
colored yellow in the following manner:
Dissolve 10 parts of copper sulphate
in 35 parts of water; apply the solution to
the solder, and stir with a clean iron
wire. This gives the part the appear-
ance of copper. To produce the yellow
color, paint the part with a mixture
consisting of 1 part of a solution of equal
parts of zinc and water (1 part each) and
2 parts of a solution of 10 to 35 parts
respectively of copper sulphate and water
and rub on with a zinc rod. The result-
ing yellow color can, if desired, be im-
proved by careful polishing.
The quality of soft solder is always
judged in the trade from the appearance
of the surface of the castings, and it is
considered important that this surface
should be radiant and crystalline,
showing the so-called "flowers." These
should be more brilliant than the dull
background, the latter being like mat
silver in appearance. If the casting has
a uniform whitish-gray color, this is an
indication that the alloy contains an
insufficient quantity of tin. In this case
658
SOLDERS
the alloy should be remelted and tin
added, solder too poor in tin being ex-
tremely viscid.
Most of the varieties of brass used in
the arts are composed of from 68 to 70
per cent copper and from 32 to 30 per
cent zinc. Furthermore, there are some
kinds of brass which contain from 24
to 40 per cent zinc. The greater the
quantity of zinc the greater will be the
resemblance of the alloy to copper.
Consequently, the more crystalline will
the structure become. For hard solder-
ing only alloys can be employed which,
as a general rule, contain no more than 34
per cent of zinc. With an increase in
copper there follows a rise in the melting
point of the brass. An alloy containing
90 per cent of copper will meet at 1,940°
F.; 80 per cent copper, at 1,868° F.; 70
per cent copper, at 1,796° F.; 60 per cent
copper, at 1,742° F. Because an increase
in zinc causes a change in color, it is
sometimes advisable to use tin for zinc,
at least in part, so that the alloy becomes
more bronze-like in its properties. The
durability of the solder is not seriously
affected, but its fusibility is lowered. If
more than a certain proportion of tin be
added, thin and very fluid solders are
obtained of grayish-white color, and very
brittle — indeed, so brittle that the solder-
ing joints are apt to open if the object is
bent. Because too great an addition of
tin is injurious, the utmost caution must
be exercised. If very refractory metals
are to be soldered, brass alone can be
used. In some cases, a solder can be
produced merely by melting brass and
adding copper. The following hard
solders have been practically tested and
found of value.
YELLOW HARD SOLDERS:
Applebaum's Compositions. —
I. — Copper 58 parts
Zinc 42 parts
II.— Sheet brass. . . 85.42 parts
Zinc 13.58 parts
Karmarsch's Composition. —
III. — Brass 7 parts
Zinc 1 part
IV.— Zinc 49 parts
Copper 44 parts
Tin 4 parts
Lead 2 parts
Prechtl's Composition. —
V. — Copper 53.3 parts
Zinc 43.1 parts
Tin 1.3 parts
Lead 0.3 parts
All these hard-solder compositions
have the fine yellow color of brass, are
very hard, and can be fused only at high
temperatures. They are well adapted
for all kinds of iron, steel, copper, and
bronze.
Solders which fuse at somewhat lower
temperatures and, therefore, well adapted
for the working of brass, are the follow-
ing:
VI.— Sheet brass. .. 81.12 parts
Zinc 18.88 parts
VII. — Copper 54.08 parts
Zinc 45.29 parts
VIII.— Brass 3 to 4 parts
Zinc 1 part
A solder which is valuable because it
can be wrought with the hammer, rolled
put, or drawn into wire, and because it
is tough and ductile, is the following:
IX.— Brass 78.26 parts
Zinc 17.41 parts
Silver ^ 4.33 parts
Fusible White Solder. —
X. — Copper 57.4 parts
Zinc 28 parts
Tin 14.6 parts
Easily Fusible Solders. —
XI. — Brass 5 parts
Zinc 2.5 parts
XII. — Brass 5 parts
Zinc 5 parts
Semi-White Hard Solders.—
XIII. — Copper 53.3 parts
Zinc 46.7 parts
XIV.— Brass 12 parts
Zinc 4 to 7 parts
Tin 1 part
XV.— Brass 22 parts
Zinc 10 parts
Tin 1 part
XVI. — Copper 44 parts
Zinc 49 parts
Tin 3.20 parts
Lead 1.20 parts
Formulas XIII and XVI are fairly
fusible.
White Hard Solders.—
XVII.— Brass
Zinc
Tin..
XVIII.— Copper.
Zinc. . .
Tin..
XIX.— Brass
Zinc
Tin..
20 parts
1 part
4 parts
58 parts
17 parts
15 parts
1 1 parts
1 part
2 part;
SOLDERS
659
XX. — Brass 6 parts
Zinc 4 parts
Tin 10 parts
XXI.— Copper 57.44 parts
Zinc 27.98 parts
Tin 14.58 parts
For Brass Tubes. — I. — Copper, 100
parts; lead, 25 parts.
II. — A very strong solder for soldering
brass tubes to be drawn, etc., is com-
posed of 18 parts brass, 4 parts zinc, and
1 part fine silver.
For Fastening Brass to Tin. — To 20
parts of fine, reduced copper, add suffi-
cient sulphuric acid to make a stiff paste.
To this add 70 parts of metallic mercury,
and work in, at the same time applying
heat until the mass assumes a wax-like
consistency. Warm or heat the plates to
be united, to about the same tempera-
ture, apply the mixture, hot, to each, then
press together, and let cool.
COPPER SOLDERS.
The copper solders which are used for
soldering copper as well as bronze are
mixtures of copper and lead. By in-
creasing the quantity of lead the fusi-
bility is increased, but the mixture de-
parts from the color and toughness of
copper. The most commonly employed
copper solder is the following:
I. — Copper 5 parts
Lead 1 part
II. — Copper 80 parts
Lead 15 parts
Tin 5 parts
For Red Copper. — I. — Copper, 3 parts;
zinc, 1 part.
II. — Copper, 7 parts; zinc, 3 parts;
tin, 2 parts.
FATS FOR SOLDERING.
I. — Soldering fat or grease is com-
monly a mixture of rosin and tallow with
the addition of a small quantity of sal
ammoniac. It is particularly adapted to
the soldering of tinned ware, because it is
easily wiped off the surface after the
joint is made, whereas if rosin were
used alone, the scraping away might
remove some of the tin and spoil the
object.
II. — The following is a well-tried
recipe for a soldering grease: In a pot
of sufficient size and over a slow fire
melt together 500 parts of olive oil and
400 parts of tallow; then stir in slowly
250 parts of rosin in powder, and let the
whole boil up once. Now let it cool
down, and add 125 parts of saturated
solution of sal ammoniac, stirring the
while. When cold, this preparation will
be ready for use.
FLUIDS FOR SOLDERING.
I. — To the ordinary zinc chloride,
prepared by digesting chips of zinc in
strong hydrochloric acid to saturation,
add J spirits of sal ammoniac and ^ part
rain water, and filter the mixture. This
soldering liquid is especially adapted to
the soft soldering of iron and steel, be-
cause it does not make rust spots.
To solder zinc, the zinc chloride may
be used without any spirit sal ammoniac.
II. — Mix phosphoric acid with strong
spirits of wine in the following propor-
tions:
Phosphoric acid solu-
tion 1 quart
Spirits of wine (80 per
cent) 1| quarts
More or less of the spirits of wine is
used depending upon the concentration
of the phosphoric acid solution. When
this soldering liquid is applied to the
metal to be soldered, the phosphoric acid
immediately dissolves the oxide. The
hot soldering iron vaporizes the spirits of
wine very quickly and causes the oxide
released by the phosphoric acid to form
a glazed mass with the surplus phosphoric
acid, which mass can be easily removed.
III. — Dissolve in hydrochloric acid:
Zinc, 50 parts (by weight); sal am-
moniac, 50 parts.
IV. — Hydrochloric acid, 600 parts (by
weight); sal ammoniac, 100 parts. Put
zinc chips into the acid to saturation,
next add the sal ammoniac. Filter
when dissolved and preserve in flasks.
V. — Eight hundred parts of water with
100 parts of lactic acid and 100 parts of
glycerine. This dispenses with the use
of chloride of zinc.
Acid -Free Soldering Fluid. — I. — Five
parts of zinc chloride dissolved in 25
parts of boiling water. Or, 20 parts of
zinc chloride, 10 parts of ammonia
chloride, dissolved in 100 parts of boil-
ing water and put into glass carboys.
II. — Chloride zinc 1 drachm
Alcohol 1 ounce
Substitute for Soldering Fluid. — As a
substitute for the customary soldering
fluid and soldering mediums an am-
monia soap is recommended, which is
obtained by the mixture of a finely pow-
dered rosin with strong ammonia solu-
tion. Of this soap only the finely divided
660
SOLDERS
rosin remains on the soldered place after
the soldering. This soldering process
is well adapted for soldering together
copper wires for electrical conduits, since
the rosin at the same time serves as an
insulator.
FLUXES FOR SOLDERING.
The fluxes generally used in the soft-
soldering of metals are powdered rosin
or a solution of chloride of zinc, alone or
combined with sal ammoniac. A neutral
soldering liquid can be prepared by
mixing 27 parts neutral zinc chloride,
11 parts sal ammoniac, and 62 parts
water; or, 1 part sugar of milk, 1 part
glycerine, and 8 parts water.
A soldering fat for tin-plate, preferable
to ordinary rosin, as it can be more easily
removed after soldering, is prepared as
follows: One hundred and fifty parts beef
tallow, 250 parts rosin, and 150 parts
olive oil are melted together in a crucible
and well stirred, 50 parts powdered sal
ammoniac dissolved in as little water as
possible being added.
Soldering fat for iron is composed of
50 parts olive oil and 50 parts powdered
sal ammoniac. Soldering fat for al-
uminum is made by melting together
equal parts of rosin and tallow, half the
quantity of zinc chloride being added to
trie mixture.
Soldering paste consists of neutral
soldering liquid thickened with starch
paste. This paste must be applied more
lightly than the soldering liquid.
Soldering salt is prepared by mixing
equal parts of neutral zinc chloride, free
from iron, and powdered sal ammoniac.
When required for use, 1 part of the salt
should be dissolved in 3 or 4 parts water.
Borax is the flux most frequently used
for hard-soldering; it should be applied
to the soldering seam either dry or stirred
to a paste with water. It is advisable
to use calcined borax, i. e., borax from
which the water of crystallization has
been driven out by heat, as it does not
become so inflated as ordinary borax.
Borax dissolves the metallic oxides form-
ing on the joint.
Finely powdered cryolite, or a mixture
of 2 parts powdered cryolite and 1 part
phosphoric acid, is also used for hard-
soldering copper and copper alloys.
Muller's hard-soldering liquid con-
sists of equal parts of phosphoric acid
and alcohol (80 per cent)-
A mixture of equal parts of cryolite
and barium chloride is used as a flux in
hard-soldering aluminum bronze.
A very good dry-soldering preparation
consists of two vials, one of wnicn is filled
with zinc chloride, and the other with
ammonium chloride. To use, dissolve
a little of each salt in water, apply the
ammonium chloride to the object to be
soldered and heat the latter until it
begins to give off vapor of ammonivim,
then apply the other, and immediately
thereafter the solder, maintaining the
heat in the meantime. This answers
for very soft solder. For a harder solder
dissolve the zinc in a very small por-
tion of the ammonium chloride solution
(from i to ^ pint).
When steel is to be soldered on steel,
or iron on steel, it is necessary to remove
every trace of oxide of iron between the
surfaces in contact. Melt in an earthen
vessel: Borax, 3 parts; colophony, 2
parts; pulverized glass, 3 parts; steel
filings, 2 parts; carbonate of potash, 1
part; hard soap, powdered, 1 part. Flow
the melted mass on a cold plate of sheet
iron, and after cooling break up the
pieces and pulverize them. This powder
is thrown on the surfaces a few minutes
before the pieces to be soldered are
brought together. The borax and glass
contained in the composition dissolve,
and consequently liquefy all of the im-
purities, which, if they were shut up
between the pieces soldered, might form
scales, at times dangerous, or interfering
with the resistance of the piece.
To prepare rosin for soldering bright
tin, mix 1£ pounds of olive oil, li pounds
of tallow, and 12 ounces of pulverized
rosin, and let them boil up. When this
mixture has become cool, add If pints
of water saturated with pulverized sal
ammoniac, stirring constantly
GAS SOLDERING.
The soldering of small metallic articles
where the production is a wholesale one,
is almost exclusively done by the use of
gas, a pointed flame being produced by
air pressure. The air pressure is ob-
tained by the workman who does the
soldering setting in motion a treadle
with his foot, wnich, resting on rubber
bellows, drives by pressure on the same
the aspirated air into wind bellows.
From here it is sent into the soldering
pipe, where it is connected with the gas
and a pointed flame is produced. In
order to obtain a rather uniform heat
the workman has to tread continually,
which, however, renders it almost im-
possible to hold the article to be soldered
steady, although this is necessary if the
work is to proceed quickly. Hence,
absolutely skillful and expensive hands
are required, on whom the employer is
often entirely dependent. To improve
SOLDERS
661
this method of soldering and obviate its
drawbacks, the soldering may be con-
ducted with good success in the following
manner: For the production of the air
current a small ventilator is set up. The
wind is conducted through two main con-
duits to the work tables. Four or six
tables may, for instance, be placed to-
gether, the wind and the gas pipe end-
ing in the center. The gas is admitted
as formerly, the wind is conducted into
wind bellows by means of joint and hose
to obtain a constant pressure and from
here into the soldering pipe. In this
manner any desired flame may be pro-
duced, the workman operates quietly
and without exertion, which admits of
employing youthful hands and consequently
of a saving in wages. The equipment is
considerably cheaper, since the rubber
bellows under the treadle are done away
with.
GERMAN-SILVER SOLDERS.
Because of its peculiar composition
German-silver solder is related to the
ordinary hard solders. Just as hard
solders may be regarded as varieties of
brass to which zinc has been added,
German-silver solders may be regarded
as German silver to which zinc has been
added. The German-silver solder be-
comes more easily fused with an increase
in zinc, and vice versa. If the quantity
of zinc be increased beyond a certain
proportion, the resultant solder becomes
too brittle. German-silver solders are
characterized by remarkable strength,
and are therefore used not only in sol-
dering German silver, but in many cases
where special strength is required. As
German silver can be made of the color
of steel, it is frequently used for solder-
ing fine steel articles.
Solder for ordinary German silver can
be made of 1,000 parts German-silver
chips, 125 parts sheet-brass chips, 142
parts zinc, and 33 parts tin; or, of 8
parts German silver and 2 to 3 parts
zinc.
Soft German-Silver Solder. —
I. — Copper 4.5 parts
Zinc 7 parts
Nickel 1 part
II. — Copper 35 parts
Zinc 56.5 parts
Nickel. .. 8.5 parts
III. — German silver 5 parts
Zinc 5 parts
Compositions I and II have analo-
gous properties. In composition III
German silver" is to be considered as a
mixture of copper, zinc, and nickel, for
which reason it is necessary to know the
exact composition of the German silver
to be used. Otherwise it is advisable
to experiment first with small quantities
in order to ascertain how much zinc is to
be added. The proper proportion of
German silver to zinc is reached when
the mixture reveals a brilliancy and
condition which renders it possible to
barely pulverize it while hot. A small
quantity when brought in contact with
the soldering iron should just fuse.
Hard German-Silver or Steel Solder. —
I. — Copper 35 parts
Zinc 56.5 parts
Nickel 9.5 parts
II. — Copper 38 parts
Zinc 50 parts
Nickel 12 parts
Composition I requires a fairly high
temperature in order to be melted.
Composition II requires a blow pipe.
GOLD SOLDERS:
Hard Solder for Gold.— The hard
solder or gold solder which the jeweler
frequently requires for the execution of
various works, not only serves for solder-
ing gold ware, but is also often employed
for soldering fine steel goods, such as
spectacles, etc. Fine gold is only used
for soldering articles of platinum. The
stronger the alloy of the gold, the more
fusible must be the solder. Generally
the gold solder is a composition of gold,
silver, and copper. If it is to be very
easily fusible, a little zinc may be added,
but, on the other hand, even the copper
is sometimes left out and a mixture con-
sisting only of gold and silver (e. g., equal
parts of both) is used. The shade of the
solder also requires attention, which
must be regulated by varying proportions
of silver and copper, so that it may be as
nearly as possible the same as that of the
gold to be soldered.
I. — For 24-carat gold: Twenty-two
parts gold (24 carat), 2 parts silver, and
1 part copper; refractory.
II. — For 18-carat gold: Nine parts gold
(18 carat), 2 parts silver, and 1 part
copper; refractory.
III. — For 16-carat gold: Twenty-four
parts gold (16 carat), 10 parts silver, and
8 parts copper; refractory.
IV.— For 14-carat gold: Three parts
gold (14 carat), 2 parts silver, and 1 part
copper; more fusible.
V. — Gold solder for alloys containing
smaller quantities of gold is composed
662
SOLDERS
of 8 parts gold, 10.5 parts silver, and 5.5
parts copper, or,
VI. — T«n parts gold (13.5 carat), 5
parts silver, and 1 part zinc.
VII. — The following easily fusible
solder is used for ordinary gold articles:
Two parts gold, 9 parts silver, 1 part
copper, and 1 part zinc. Articles soldered
with this solder cannot be subjected to
the usual process of coloring the gold, as
the solder would become black.
VIII. — A refractory enamel solder for
articles made of 20-carat and finer gold,
which can bear the high temperature
required in enameling, consists of 37
parts gold and 9 parts silver, or 16 parts
gold (18 carat), 3 parts silver, and 1 part
copper.
Which of these compositions should
be employed depends upon the degree
of the fusibility of the enamel to be ap-
plied. If it is very difficult of fusion
only the first named can be used; other-
wise it may happen that during the
melting on of the enamel the soldering
spots are so strongly heated that the
solder itself melts. For ordinary articles,
as a rule, only readily fusible enamels
are employed, and consequently the
readily fusible enameling solder may
here be made use of. Soldering with the
latter is readily accomplished with the
aid of the soldering pipe. Although the
more hardly fusible gold solders may
also be melted by the use of the ordinary
soldering pipe, the employment of a special
small blowing apparatus is recommended
on account of the resulting ease and
rapidity of the work.
SOLDERS FOR GLASS.
I. — Melt tin, and add to the melted
mass enough copper, with constant stir-
ring, until the melted metal consists of
95 per cent of tin and 5 per cent of
copper. In order to render the mixture
more or less hard, add £ to 1 per cent of
zinc or lead.
II. — A compound of tin (95 parts)
and zinc (5 parts) melts at 392° F., and
can then be firmly united to glass. An
alloy of 90 parts of tin and 10 parts of
aluminum melts at 734° F., adheres, like
the preceding, to glass, and is equally
brilliant. With either of these alloys
glass may be soldered as easily as metal,
in two ways. In one, heat the pieces of
glass in a furnace and rub a stick of
soldering alloy over their surfaces. The
alloy will melt, and can be easily spread
by means of a roll of paper or a slip of
aluminum. Press the pieces firmly to-
gether, and keep so until cool. In the
other method a common soldering iron,
or a rod of aluminum, is heated over a
coal fire, a gas jet, or a flame supplied
by petroleum. The hot iron is passed
over the alloy and then over the pieces to
be soldered, without the use of a dis-
solvent. Care should be taken that
neither the soldering irons nor the glass
be brought to a temperature above the
melting point of the alloy, lest the latter
should be oxidized, and prevented from
adhering.
HARD SOLDERS.
Hard solders are distinguished as
brass, German silver, copper, gold, silver,
etc., according to the alloys used (see Brass
Solders, Copper Solders, etc., for other
hard solders).
The designation "hard solder" is
used to distinguish it from the easily
running and softer solder used by tin-
smiths, and it applies solely to a com-
position that will not flow under a red
heat. For the purposes of the jeweler
solder may be classified according to its
composition and purpose, into gold or
silver solder, which means a solder con-
sisting of an alloy of gold with silver,
copper, tin, or zinc-like metal or an
alloy of silver with copper, tin, or zinc-
like metal. According to the uses, the
solder is made hard or soft; thus in gold
solders there is added a greater amount
of silver, whereas for silver solders there
is added more tin or zinc-like metal.
In the production of solder for the
enameler's use, that is for combining
gold with gold, gold with silver, or gold
with copper, which must be enameled
afterwards, it is necessary always to keep
in mind that no solder can be used
effectually that contains any tin, zinc,
zinc alloys, or tin or zinc-like metals in
any great quantities, since it is these very
metals that contribute to the cracking of
the enamel. Yet it is not possible to do
without such an addition entirely, other-
wise the solder would not flow under the
melting point of the precious metals
themselves and we should be unable to
effect a union of the parts. It is there-
fore absolutely necessary to confine these
additions to the lowest possible per-
centage, so that only a trace is apparent.
Moreover, care must be taken to use for
enameling purposes no base alloy, be-
cause the tenacity or durability of the
compound will be affected thereby; in
other words, it must come up to the
standard.
In hard soldering with borax, direct,
several obstacles are encountered that
make the process somewhat difficult. In
SOLDERS
663
the first place the salt forms great bubbles
in contact with the soldering iron, and
easily scales away from the surface of the
parts to be soldered. Besides this, the
parts must be carefully cleaned each time
prior to applying the salt. All these dif-
ficulties vanish if instead of borax we use
its component parts, boric acid and sodium
carbonate. The heat of the soldering iron
acting on these causes them to combine
in such a way as to produce an excellent
flux, free from the difficulties mentioned.
Composition of Various Hard Solders.
— Yellow solders for brass, bronze, cop-
per, and iron:
I. — Sheet-brass chips, 5 parts, and
zinc, 3 to 5 parts, easily fusible.
II. — Sheet brass chips, 3 parts, and
zinc, 1 part; refractory.
III. — Sheet-brass chips, 7 parts, and
zinc, 1 part; very refractory and firm.
Semi-white solders, containing tin and
consequently harder:
I. — Sheet brass, 12 parts; zinc, 4 to
7 parts, and tin, 1 part.
II.— Copper, 16 parts; zinc, 16 parts,
and tin, 1 part.
III. — Yellow solder, 20 to 30 parts,
and tin, 1 part.
White solders:
I.— Sheet brass, 20 parts; zinc, 1 part,
and tin, 4 parts.
II. — Copper, 3 parts; zinc, 1 part, and
tin, 1 part.
To Hard-Solder Parts Formerly Sol-
dered with Tin Solder. — To repair gold
or silver articles which have been spoiled
with tin solder proceed as follows: Heat-
ing the object carefully by means a of
small spirit lamp, brush the tin off as
much as possible with a chalk brush;
place the article in a diluted solution of
hydrochloric acid for about 8 to 10
hours, as required. If much tin re-
mains, perhaps 12 hours may be neces-
sary. Next withdraw it, rinse off and
dry; whereupon it is carefully annealed
and finally put in a pickle of dilute
sulphuric acid, to remove the annealing
film. When the article has been dipped,
it may be hard soldered again.
SILVER SOLDERS.
Silver solder is cast in the form of
ingots, which are hammered or rolled into
thin sheets. From these small chips or
"links," as they are called, are cut off.
The melted solder can also be poured,
when slightly cooled, into a dry iron mor-
tar and pulverized while still warm. The
solder can also be filed and the filings used
for soldering.
Silver solders are used not only for
soldering silver objects, but also for
soldering metals of which great resist-
ance is expected. A distinction must be
drawn between silver solder consisting
either of copper and silver alone, and
silver solder to which tin has been added.
Very Hard Silver Solder for Fine
Silverware. —
I. — Copper 1 part
Silver. 4 parts
Hard silver solder.
II. — Copper 1 part
Silver 20 parts
Brass 9 parts
III. — Copper 2 parts
Silver 28 parts
Brass 10 parts
Soft silver solder.
IV.— Silver 2 parts
Brass 1 part
V. — Silver 3 parts
Copper 2 parts
Zinc 1 part
VI. — Silver 10 parts
Brass 10 parts
Tin 1 part
These solders are preferably to be
employed for the completion of work
begun with hard silver solders, defective
parts alone being treated. For this
purpose it is sometimes advisable to use
copper-silver alloys mixed with zinc, as
for example:
VII. — Silver 12 parts
Copper 4 parts
Zinc 1 part
VIII. — Silver 5 parts
Brass 6 parts
Zinc 2 parts
This last formula (VIII) is most com-
monly used for ordinary silverware.
Silver Solders for Soldering Iron,
Steel, Cast Iron, and Copper. —
I. — Silver 10 parts
Brass 10 parts
II. — Silver 20 parts
Copper 30 parts
Zinc 10 parts
III.— Silver 30 parts
Copper 10 parts
Tin 0.5 parts
IV. — Silver 60 parts
Brass 60 parts
Zinc 5 parts
664
SOLDERS
In those solders in which brass is used
care should be taken that none of the
metals employed contains iron. Even
an inappreciable amount of iron dele-
teriously affects the solder.
V. — Copper, 30 parts; zinc, 12.85
parts; silver, 57.15 parts.
VI.— Copper, 23.33 parts; zinc, 10
parts ; Xjver, 66.67 parts.
VII. — ^Copper, 26.66 parts; zinc, 10
parts; silver, 63.34 parts.
VIII. — Silver, 66 parts; copper, 24
parts, and zinc, 10 parts. This very strong
spider is frequently used for soldering
silver articles, but can also be used for
soldering other metals, such as brass,
copper, iron, steel band-saw blades, etc.
IX. — Silver, 4 parts, and brass, 3
parts.
X. — A very refractory silver solder,
which, unlike the silver solder containing
zinc, is of great ductility and does not
break when hammered, is composed of
3 parts silver and 1 part copper.
Soft Silver Solders. — I. — A soft silver
solder for resoldering parts already
soldered is made of silver, 3 parts; cop-
per, 2 parts, and zinc, 1 part.
II. — Silver, 1 part, and brass, 1 part;
or, silver, 7 parts; copper, 3 parts, and
zinc, 2 parts.
III. — A readily fusible silver solder for
ordinary work: Silver, 5 parts; copper, 6
parts, and zinc, 2 parts.
IV. — (Soft.) Copper, 14.75 parts;
zinc, 8.20 parts; silver, 77.05 parts.
V. — Copper, 22.34 parts; zinc, 10.48
parts; silver, 67.18 parts.
VI. — Tin, 63 parts; lead, 37 parts.
French Solders for Silver. — I. — For
fine silver work: Fine silver, 87 parts;
brass, 13 parts.
II. — For work 792 fine: Fine silver,
83 parts; brass, 17 parts.
III. — For work 712 fine: Fine silver,
75 parts; brass, 25 parts.
IV. — For work 633 fine: Fine silver,
66 parts; brass, 34 parts.
V. — For work 572 fine: Fine silver,
55 parts; brass, 45 parts.
Solder for Silversmiths, etc. — Gold,
10 parts; silver, 55 parts; copper, 29
parts; zinc, 6 parts.
Hard Solder. — Silver, 60 parts; bronze,
39 parts; arsenic, 1 part.
Soft Solder. — Powdered copper, 30
parts; sulphate of zinc, 10 parts; mer-
cury, 60 parts; sulphuric acid. Put
the copper and the zinc sulphate in a
porcelain mortar, and then the sulphuric
acid. Enough acid is required to cover
the composition; next add the mercury
while stirring constantly. When the
amalgamation is effected, wash several
times with hot water to remove the acid,
then allow to cool. For use, it is suffi-
cient to heat the amalgam until it takes
the consistency of wax. Apply on the
parts to be soldered and let cool.
Solder for Silver -Plated Work. — I.—
Fine silver, 2 parts; bronze, 1 part.
II. — Silver, 68 parts; copper, 24 parts;
zinc, 17 parts.
Solder for Silver Chains. — I. — Fine
silver, 74 parts; copper, 24 parts; orpi-
ment, 2 parts.
II. — Fine silver, 40 parts; orpiment,
20 parts; copper, 40 parts.
SOFT SOLDERS:
See also Brass Solders, Copper Solders,
Gold Solders.
I. — Fifty parts bismuth, 25 parts tin,
and 25 parts lead. This mixture melts
at 392° F.
II. — Fifty parts bismuth, 30 parts lead,
and 20 parts tin. This will melt at
374° F.
III. — The solder that is used in solder-
ing Britannia metal and block tin pipes
is composed of 2 parts tin and 1 part
lead. This melts in the blow-pipe flame
at many degrees lower temperature
than either tin or Britannia metal, and it
is nearly of the same color. Care must
be taken in mixing these solders to keep
them well stirred when pouring into
molds. Care should also be taken tnat the
metal which melts at a higher tempera-
ture be melted first and then allowed to
cool to the melting temperature of the
next metal to be added, and so on.
Articles to be soldered with these solders
should be joined with a blow pipe to get
the best results, but if a copper is used it
must be drawn out to a long, thin point.
For a flux use powdered rosin or sweet
oil.
Tin solders for soldering lead, zinc,
tin, tin-plate, also copper and brass when
special strength is not required, are pre-
pared as follows:
I. — Tin, 10 parts; lead, 4 parts; melt-
ing point, 356° F.
II. — Tin, 10 parts; lead, 5 parts; melt-
ing point, 365° F.
III.— Tin, 10 parts; lead, 6 parts;
melting point, 374° F.
SOLDERS
665
IV.— Tin, 10 parts; lead, 10 parts;
melting point, 392° F.
V. — Tin, 10 parts; lead, 15 parts;
melting point, 432° F.
VI. — Tin, 10 parts; lead, 20 parts;
melting point, 464° F.
The last of the above mixtures is the
cheapest, on account of the large quantity
of lead.
Bismuth solder or pewterer's solder
fusible at a low temperature is prepared
by melting together:
I. — Tin, 2 parts; lead, 1 part; bismuth,
1 part; melting point, 266° F.
II. — Tin, 3 parts; lead, 4 parts; bis-
muth, 2 parts; melting point, 297° F.
III. — Tin, 2 parts; lead, 2 parts; bis-
muth, 1 part; melting point, 320° F.
STEEL SOLDERING.
Dissolve scraps of cast steel in as small
a quantity as possible of nitric acid, add
finely pulverized borax and stir vigor-
ously until a fluid paste is formed, then
dilute by means of sal ammoniac and
put in a bottle. When soldering is to
be done, apply a thin layer of the solu-
tion to the two parts to be soldered, and
when these have been carried to or-
dinary redness, and the mass is con-
sequently plastic, beat lightly on the anvil
with a flat hammer. This recipe is useful
for cases when the steel is not to be
soldered at an elevation of temperature
to the bright red.
To Solder a Piece of Hardened Steel. —
To hard-solder a piece of hardened steel
such as index (regulator), stop spring (in
the part which is not elastic), click, etc.,
take a very flat charcoal if the piece is
difficult to attach; hard-solder and as
soon as the soldering has been done,
plunge the piece into oil. All that re-
mains to be done is to blue it again ,?nd
to polish.
Soldering Powder for Steel. — Melt in
an earthen pot 3 parts of borax, 2 of col-
ophony, 1 of potassium carbonate, as
much powdered hard soap, to which
must be added 3 parts of finely powdered
glass and 2 parts of steel filings. The
melted mass is run out upon a cold plate
of sheet iron, and when it is completely
chilled it is broken into small bits or
finely powdered. - To solder, it is neces-
sary to sprinkle the powder on the sur-
faces to be joined several minutes be-
fore bringing them together.
Soldering Solution for Steel. — A sol-
dering solution for steel that will not rust
or blacken the work is made of 6 ounces
alcohol, 2 ounces glycerine, and 1 ounce
oxide of zinc.
PLATINUM SOLDERS.
There are many platinum solders in
existence, but the main principle to be
borne in mind in jewelry work is that
the soldering seam should be as little
perceptible as possible; the solder, there-
fore, should have the same color as the
alloy.
I. — A platinum solder which meets
these requirements very satisfactorily is
composed of 9 parts gold and 1 part
palladium; or, 8 parts gold and 2 parts
palladium.
II. — The following is a readily fusible
platinum solder: Fine silver, 1.555 parts,
and pure platinum, 0.583 parts. This
melts easily in the ordinary draught fur-
nace, as well as before the soldering pipe
on a piece of charcoal. Of similar
action is a solder of the following com-
position, which is very useful for places
not exposed to the view:
III. — Fine gold, 1.555 parts; fine sil-
ver, 0.65 parts; and pure copper, 0.324
parts.
SOLDER FOR IRON:
See also under Silver Solders.
Copper, 67 parts; zinc, 33 parts; or,
copper, 60 parts; zinc, 40 parts.
TIN SOLDERS:
See also Soft Solders.
Gold jewelry which has been rendered
unsightly by tin solder may be freed
from tin entirely by dipping the article
for a few minutes into the following
solution and then brushing off the tin:
Pulverize 2 parts of green vitriol and 1
part of saltpeter and boil in a cast-iron
Eot with 10 parts of water until the
irger part of the latter has evaporated.
The crystals forming upon cooling are
dissolved in hydrochloric acid (8 parts of
hydrochloric acid to 1 part of crystals).
If the articles in question have to be left
in the liquid for some time, it is well to
dilute it with 3 or 4 parts of water.
The tin solder is dissolved by this solu-
tion without attacking or damaging the
article in the least.
VARIOUS RECIPES FOR SOLDERING:
To Conceal Soldering. — Visible solder-
ing may be obviated by the following
methods: For copper goods a concen-
trated solution of blue vitriol is prepared
and applied to the places by means of an
iron rod or iron wire. The thickness of
666
SOLDERS
the layer may be increased by a repeti-
tion of the process. In order to give the
places thus coppered the appearance of
the others, use a saturated solution of zinc
vitriol, 1 part, and blue vitriol, 2 parts,
and finish rubbing with a piece of zinc.
By sprinkling on gold powder and sub-
sequently polishing, the color is rendered
deeper. In the case of gold articles the
places are* first coppered over, then cov-
ered with a thin layer of fish glue, after
which bronze filings are thrown on. When
the glue is dry rub off quickly to produce
a fine polish. The places can, of course,
also be electro-gilt, whereby a greater
uniformity of the shade is obtained. In
silver objects, the soldering seams, etc.,
are likewise coppered in the above-de-
scribed manner; next they are rubbed
with a brush dipped into silver powder
and freshly polished.
Solder for Articles which will not Bear
a High Temperature. — Take powdered
copper, the precipitate of a solution of
the sulphate by means of zinc, and mix
it with concentrated sulphuric acid.
According to the degree of hardness re-
quired, take from 20 to 30 or 36 parts of
copper. Add, while constantly snaking,
70 parts of quicksilver, and when the
amalgam is complete, wash with warm
water to remove the acid; then allow it
to cool. In 10 or 12 hours the composi-
tion will be hard enough to scratch tin.
For use, warm it until it reaches the
consistency of wax, and spread it where
needed. When cold it will adhere with
great tenacity.
Soldering a Ring Containing a Jewel.
— I. — Fill a small crucible with wet sand
and bury the part with the jewel in the
sand. Now solder with soft gold solder,
holding the crucible in the hand. The
stone will remain uninjured.
II. — Take tissue paper, tear it into
strips about 3 inches in width, and make
them into ropes; wet them thoroughly
and wrap the stone in them, passing
around tne stone and through the ring
until the center of the latter is slightly
more than half filled with paper, closely
wound around. Now fix on charcoal,
permitting the stone to protrude over the
edge of the charcoal, and solder rapidly.
The paper will not only protect the stone,
but also prevent oxidation of the portion
of the ring which is covered.
Soldering without Heat. — For solder-
ing objects without heating, take a large
copper wire filed to a point; dip into
soldering water and rub the parts to be
soldered. Then heat the copper wire
and apply the solder, which melts on
contact. It may then be applied to the
desired spot without heating the object.
COLD SOLDERING:
See also Adhesives and Cements.
For soldering articles which cannot
stand a high temperature, the following
process may be employed:
I. — Take powdered copper precipi-
tated from a solution of sulphate by
means of zinc and mix it in a cast-iron
or porcelain mortar with concentrated
sulphuric acid. The number of parts of
copper varies according to the degree of
hardness which it is wished to obtain.
Next add, stirring constantly, 70 parts of
mercury, and when the amalgam is
finished, allow to cool. At the end of 10
to 12 hours the composition is sufficiently
hard. For use, heat until it acquires the
consistency of wax. Apply to the sur-
face. When cool it will adhere with great
tenacity.
II. — Crush and mix 6 parts of sulphur,
6 parts of white lead, and 1 part of
borax. Make a rather thick cement of
this powder by triturating it with sul-
phuric acid. The paste is spread on the
surfaces to be welded, and the articles
pressed firmly together. In 6 or 7 days
the soldering is so strong that the two
pieces cannot be separated, even by
striking them with a hammer.
Cast-iron Soldering. — A new process
consists in decarbonizing the surfaces of
the cast iron to be soldered, the molten
hard solder being at the same time
brought into contact with the red-hot
metallic surfaces. The admission of air,
however, should be carefully guarded
against. First pickle the surfaces of the
pieces to be soldered, as usual, with acid
and fasten the two pieces together. The
place to be soldered is now covered with
a metallic oxygen compound and any
one of the customary fluxes and heated
until red hot. The preparation best suited
for this purpose is a paste made by inti-
mately mingling together cuprous oxide
and borax. The latter melts in solder-
ing and protects the pickled surfaces as
well as the cuprous oxide from oxidation
through the action of the air. During
the heating the cuprous oxide imparts its
oxygen to the carbon contained in the
cast iron and burns it. Metallic copper
separates in fine subdivision. Now apply
hard solder to the place to be united, which
in melting forms an alloy with the elimi-
nated copper, the alloy combining with
the decarburized surfaces of the cast iron.
SOLDERS— SPIRIT
667
Soldering Block. — This name is given
to a very useful support for hard solder-
ing and can be readily made. The in-
gredients are: Charcoal, asbestos, and
plaster of Paris. These are powdered in
equal parts, made into a thick paste with
water, and poured into a suitable mold.
Thus a sort of thick plate is obtained.
When this mass has dried it is removed
from the mold and a very thin cork
plate is affixed on one surface by means
of thin glue. The mission of this plate
is to receive the points of the wire clamps
with which the articles to be soldered are
attached to the soldering block, the as-
bestos not affording sufficient hold for
them.
SOLDERS FOR JEWELERS:
See Jewelers' Formulas.
SOLDER FROM GOLD, TO REMOVE:
See Gold.
SOLDERING PASTE.
The semi-liquid mass termed solder-
ing paste is produced by mixing zinc
chloride solution or that of ammonia-
zinc chloride with starch paste. For
preparing this composition, ordinary
potato starch is made with water into a
milky liquid, the latter is heated to a boil
with constant stirring, and enough of this
mass, which becomes gelatinous after
cooling, is added to the above-men-
tioned solutions as to cause a liquid
resembling thin syrup to result. The
use of all zinc preparations for soldering
presents the drawback that vapors of a
strongly acid odor are generated by the
heat of the soldering iron, but this evil is
offset by the extraordinary convenience
afforded when working with these prepar-
ations. It is not necessary to subject
the places to be soldered to any special
cleaning or preparation. All that is re-
quired is to coat them with the soldering
medium, to apply the solder to the seam,
etc., and to wipe the places with a sponge
or moistened rag after the solder has
cooled. Since the solder adheres readily
with the use of these substances, a skillful
workman can soon reach such perfection
that he has no, or very little, subsequent
polishing to do on the soldering seams.
Soft Soldering Paste. — Small articles
of any metals that would be very delicate
to solder with a stick of solder, especially
where parts fit into another and only
require a little solder to hold them to-
gether, can best be joined with a solder-
ing paste. This paste contains the
solder and flux combined, and is easily
applied to seams, or a little applied be-
fore the parts are put together. The
soldering flame will cause the tin in the
paste to amalgamate quickly. The
paste is made out of starch paste mixed
with a solution of chloride of tin to the
consistency of syrup.
SOLUTIONS, PERCENTAGE :
See Tables.
SOOTHING SYRUP:
See Pain Killers.
SOUP HERB EXTRACT:
See Condiments.
SOZODONT:
See Dentifrices.
SPARKS FROM THE FINGER TIPS:
See Pyrotechnics.
SPATTER WORK:
See Lettering.
SPAVIN CURES:
See Veterinary Formulas.
SPECULUM METAL:
See Alloys.
SPICES, ADULTERATED:
See Foods.
SPICES FOR FLAVORING:
See Condiments.
Spirit
INDUSTRIAL AND POTABLE ALCO-
HOL: SOURCES AND MANUFAC-
TURE.
Abstract of a Farmers' Bulletin prepared
for the United States Department of Agricul-
ture by Dr. Harvey W . Wiley.
The term "industrial alcohol," or
spirit, is used for brevity, and also be-
cause it differentiates sharply between
alcohol used for beverages or for medicine
and alcohol used for technical purposes
in the arts.
Alcohol Defined. — The term "alcohol"
as here used and as generally used
means that particular product which is
obtained by the fermentation of a sugar,
or a starch converted into sugar, and
which, from a chemical point of view,
is a compound of the hypothetical sub-
stance "ethyl" with water, or with that
part of water remaining after the separa-
tion of one of the atoms of hydrogen.
This is a rather technical expression, but
it is very difficult, without using technical
language, to give a definition of alcohol
from the chemical point of view. There
are three elementary substances repre-
sented in alcohol: Carbon, the chemical
symbol of which is C; hydrogen, symbol
668
SPIRIT
H; and oxygen, symbol O. These atoms
are put together to form common alcohol,
or, as it is called, ethyl alcohol, in which
preparation 2 atoms of carbon and 5
atoms of hydrogen form the hypothet-
ical substance "ethyl," and 1 atom of
oxygen and 1 atom of hydrogen form
the hydroxyl derived from water. The
chemical symbol of alcohol therefore is
C2H6OH. Absolutely pure ethyl alcohol
is made only with great difficulty, and the
purest commercial forms still have as-
sociated with them traces of other volatile
products formed at the time of the dis-
tillation, chief among which is that
group of alcohols to which the name
"fused oil" is applied. So far as in-
dustrial purposes are concerned, how-
ever, ethyl alcohol is the only com-
ponent of any consequence, just as in
regard to the character of beverages the
ethyl alcohol is the component of least
consequence.
Sources of Potable Alcohol. — The
raw materials from which alcohol is
made consist of those crops which con-
tain sugar, starch, gum, and cellulose
(woody fiber) capable of being easily
converted into a fermentable sugar.
Alcohol as such is not used as a beverage.
The alcohol occurring in distilled bever-
ages is principally derived from Indian
corn, rye, barley, and molasses. Alcohol
is also produced for drinking purposes
from fermented fruit juices such as the
juice of grapes, apples, peaches, etc. In
the production of alcoholic beverages a
careful selection of the materials is re-
quired in order that the desired character
of drink may be secured. For instance,
in the production of rum, the molasses
derived from the manufacture of sugar
from sugar cane is the principal raw
material. In the fermentation of mo-
lasses a particular product is formed
which by distillation gives the alcohol
compound possessing the aroma and
flavor of rum. In the making of brandy,
only sound wine can be used as the raw
material, and this sound wine, when sub-
jected to distillation, gives a product con-
taining the same kind of alcohol as that
found in rum, but associated with the
products of fermentation which give to
the distillate a character entirely dis-
tinct and separate from that of rum.
Again, when barley malt or a mixture of
barley malt and rye is properly mashed,
fermented, and subjected to distilla-
tion, a product is obtained which, when
properly concentrated and aged, becomes
potable malt or rye whisky. In a sim-
ilar manner, if Indian corn and bar-
ley malt are properly mashed, with a
small portion of rye, the mash fermented
and subjected to distillation, and the
distillate properly prepared and aged,
the product is known as Bourbon whisky.
Thus, every kind of alcoholic beverage
gets its real character, taste, and aroma,
not from the alcohol which it contains
but from the products of fermentation
which are obtained at the same time the
alcohol is made and which are carried
over with the alcohol at the time of dis-
tillation.
Agricultural Sources of Industrial
Alcohol. — The chief alcohol-yielding ma-
terial produced in farm crops is starch,
the second important material is sugar,
and the third and least important raw
material is cellulose, or woody fiber.
The quantity of alcohol produced from
cellulose is so small as to be of no im-
portance at the present time, and there-
fore this source of alcohol will only be
discussed under the headings "Utiliza-
tion of Waste Material or By-Products"
and "Wood Pulp and Sawdust."
Starch-Producing Plants. — Starch is a
compound which, from the chemical
point of view, belongs to the class known
as carbohydrates, that is, compounds in
which the element carbon is associated
by a chemical union with water. Starch
is therefore a compound made of carbon,
hydrogen, and oxygen, existing in the
proportion of 2 atoms of hydrogen to 1
atom of oxygen. Each molecule of starch
contains at least 6 atoms of carbon, 10
atoms of hydrogen, and 5 atoms of
oxygen. The simplest expression for
starch is therefore C6H,oO5. Inasmuch
as this is the simplest expression for
what the chemist knows as a molecule of
starch, and it is very probable that very
many, perhaps a hundred or more, of
these molecules exist together, the proper
expression for starch from a chemical
point of view would be (CeHioOs)^.
The principal starch-producing plants
are the cereals, the potato, and cassava.
With the potato may be classed, though
not botanically related thereto, the sweet
potato and the yam. Among cereals
rice has the largest percentage of starch
and oats the smallest. The potato, as
grown for the table, has an average
content of about 15 per cent of starch.
When a potato is grown specifically for
the production of alcohol it contains a
larger quantity, or nearly 20 per cent.
Cassava contains a larger percentage of
starch than the potato, varying from 20
to 30 per cent.
Sugar -Producing Plants. — Sugar cans,
SPIRIT
669
etc. While sugar is present in some
degree in all vegetable growths, there are
some plants which produce it in larger
quantities than are required for im-
mediate needs, and this sugar is stored
in some part of the plant. Two plants
are preeminently known for their rich-
ness in sugar, namely, the su^ar cane
and the sugar beet. In Louisiana the
sugar canes contain from 9 to 14 per
cent of sugar, and tropical canes contain
a still larger amount.
The juices of the sugar beet contain
from 12 to 18 per cent of sugar. There
are other plants which produce large
quantities of sugar, but which are less
available for sugar-making purposes than
those just mentioned. Among these, the
sorghum must be first mentioned, con-
taining in the stalk at the time the seed is
just mature and the starch hardened
from 9 to 15 per cent of sugar. Sorghum
seed will also yield as much alcohol as
equal weights of Indian corn. The
juices of the stalks of Indian corn con-
tain at the time the grain is hardening
and for some time thereafter large quan-
tities of sugar, varying from 8 to 15 per
cent.
In the case of the sorghum and the
Indian-corn stalk a large part of the
sugar present is not cane sugar or sucrose
as it is commonly known, but the invert
sugar derived therefrom. For the pur-
poses of making alcohol the invert sugar
is even more suitable than cane sugar.
Many other plants contain notable
quantities of sugar, but, with the excep-
tion of fruits, discussed under the follow-
ing caption, not in sufficient quantities to
be able to compete with those just men-
tioned for making either sugar or alcohol.
Cane sugar is not directly susceptible
to fermentation. Chemically considered,
it has the formula expressed by the
symbols: Ci2H22Ou. When cane sugar
having the above composition becomes
inverted, it is due to a process known as
hydrolysis, which consists in the molecule
of cane sugar taking up 1 molecule of
water and splitting off into 2 molecules
of sugar having the same formula but
different physical and chemical properties.
Thus the process may be represented as
follows: Ci2H22Oii (cane sugar) + H2O
(water) = C6H12OB (dextrose) + C6H12O6
(levulose). These two sugars (dextrose
and levulose) taken together are known
as invert sugar and are directly sus-
ceptible to fermentation. All cane sugar
assumes the form of invert sugar before
it becomes fermented.
Fruits. — Nearly all fruit juices are
rich in sugar, varying in content from 5
to 30 per cent. The sugar in fruits is
composed of both cane sugar and its
invert products (dextrose and levulose),
in some fruits principally the latter. Of
the common fruits the grape yields the
largest percentage of sugar. The normal
grape used for wine making contains
from 16 to 30 per cent of sugar, the usual
amount being about 20 per cent. Fruit
juices are not usually employed in any
country for making industrial alcohol,
because of their very much greater value
for the production of beverages.
Composition and Yield of Alcohol-
Producing Crops. — The weight of alcohol
that may be produced from a given crop
is estimated at a little less than one-half
of the amount of fermentable substance
present, it being understood that the
fermentable substance is expressed in
terms of sugar. Pasteur was the first to
point out the fact that when sugar was
fermented it yielded theoretically a little
over one-half of its weight of alcohol. It
must be remembered, however, that in
the production of alcohol a process of
hydrolysis is taking place which adds
a certain quantity of alcohol to the
products which are formed. For this
reason 100 parts of sugar yield more than
100 parts of fermentable products. The
distribution of the weights produced, as
theoretically calculated by Pasteur, is as
follows:
One hundred parts of sugar yield the
following quantities of the products of
fermentation:
Alcohol 51.10 parts
Carbonic acid 49.20 parts
Glycerine 3.40 parts
Organic acids, chiefly
succinic 65 parts
Ethers, aldehydes, fur-
fural, fat, etc 1.30 parts
Total weight fer-
mentation prod-
ucts produced. . .105.65 parts
Artichokes. — The artichoke has been
highly recommended for the manu-
facture of alcohol. The fermentable
material in the artichoke is neither starch
nor sugar, but consists of a mixture of a
number of carbohydrates of which inulin
and levulin are the principal constituents.
When these carbohydrate materials are
hydrolized into sugars they produce
levulose instead of dextrose. The levu-
lose is equally as valuable as dextrose for
the production of alcohol. Artichokes
may be harvested either in the autumn
or in the spring. As they keep well
during the winter, and in a few places
670
SPIRIT
may be kept in hot weather, they form a
raw material which can be stored for a
long period and still be valuable for
fermentation purposes.
Under the term "inulin" are included
all the fermentable carbohydrates. The
above data show, in round numbers, 17
per cent of fermentable matter. Theo-
retically, therefore, 100 pounds of arti-
chokes would yield approximately 8?
pounds of industrial alcohol, or about
1J gallons.
Bananas. — The banana is a crop
which grows in luxurious abundance in
tropical countries, especially Guatemala
and Nicaragua. The fruit contains large
quantities of starch and sugar suitable
for alcohol making. From 20 to 25 per
cent of the weight of the banana consists
of fermentable material. It is evident
that in the countries where the banana
grows in such luxuriance it would be a
cheap source of industrial alcohol.
Barley and the Manufacture of Malt. —
A very important cereal in connection
with the manufacture of alcohol is barley
which is quite universally employed for
making malt, the malt in its turn being
used for the conversion of the starch of
other cereals into sugar in their prepara-
tion for fermentation.
Malt is made by the sprouting of
barley at a low temperature (from 50° to
60° F.) until the small roots are formed
and the germ has grown to the length of
£ an inch or more. The best malts
are made at a low temperature requiring
from 10 to 14 days for the growth of the
barley. The barley is moistened and
spread upon a floor, usually of cement,
to the depth of 1 foot or 18 inches. As
the barley becomes warm by the process
of germination, it is turned from time
to time and the room is kept well ven-
tilated and cool. It is better at this
point in the manufacture of malt to keep
the temperature below 60° F. After the
sprouting has been continued as above
noted for the proper length of time, the
barley is transferred to a drier, where it
is subjected to a low temperature at first
and finally to a temperature not to ex-
ceed 140° or 158° F., until all the water
is driven off, except 2 or 3 per cent.
Great care must be exercised in drying
the barley not to raise the temperature
too high, lest the diastase which is formed
be deprived of its active qualities. The
malt has a sweetish taste, the principal
portion of the starch having been con-
verted into sugar, which is known
chemically as "maltose." This sugar is,
of course, utilized in the fermentation
for the production of alcohol. Malt is
chiefly valuable, however, not because of
the amount of alcohol that may be pro-
duced therefrom, but from the fact that
in quantities of about 10 per cent it is
capable of converting the starch of the
whole of the un malted grains, whatever
their origin may be, into maltose, thus
Breparing the starch for fermentation,
arley is not itself used in this country
as a source of industrial alcohol, but it is
employed for producing the highest
grades of whisky, made of pure barley
malt, which, after fermentation, is dis-
tilled in a pot still, concentrated in
another pot still to the proper strength,
placed in wood, and stored for a number
of years. Barley malt is too expensive a
source of alcohol to justify its use for
industrial purposes. It is, however, one
of the cheapest and best methods of
converting the starch of other cereals
into sugar preparatory to fermentation.
Barley has, in round numbers, about
68 per cent of fermentable matter. The
weight of a bushel of barley (48 pounds)
multiplied by 0.68 gives 32 pounds of
fermentable matter in a bushel of barley.
Cassava. — Cassava is grown over a
large area of the South Atlantic and Gulf
States of this country. Of all the sub-
stances which have been mentioned, ex-
cept the cereals, cassava contains the
largest amount of alcoholic or ferment-
able substances. The root, deprived of
its outer envelope, contains a little over
30 per cent of starch, while the un-
determined matter in the analyses is
principally sugar. If this be added to
the starch, it is seen that approximately
35 per cent of the fresh root is ferment-
able. This of course represents a very
high grade of cassava, the ordinary roots
containing very much less fermentable
matter. If, however, it is assumed that
the fermentable matter of cassava root
will average 25 per cent, this amount
is much greater than the average of
the potato, or even of the sweet potato
and the yam. Twenty-five per cent is
undoubtedly a low average content of
fermentable matter. In the dry root
there is found nearly 72 per cent of
starch and 17 per cent of extract, prin-
cipally sugar. Assuming that 15 per cent
of this is fermentable, and adding this
to the 72 per cent, it is seen that 87 per
cent of the dry matter of the cassava is
fermentable. This appears to be a very
high figure, but it doubtless represents
almost exactly the conditions which
exist. It would be perfectly safe to say,
discounting any exceptional qualities of
the samples examined, that 80 per cent
of the dry matter of the cassava root is
SPIRIT
671
capable of being converted into alcohol.
It thus becomes in a dry state a source
of alcohol almost as valuable, pound for
pound, as rice.
Careful examinations, however, of ac-
tual conditions show that if 5 tons per
acre of roots are obtained it is an average
yield. In very many cases, where no
fertilizer is used and where the roots are
grown in the ordinary manner, the yield
is far less than this, while with improved
methods of agriculture it is greater. The
bark of the root, has very little ferment-
able matter in it. If the whole root be
considered, the percentage of starch is
less than it would be for the peeled root.
If cassava yields 4 tons, or 8,000 pounds,
per acre and contains 25 per cent of fer-
mentable matter, the total weight of
fermentable matter is 2,000 pounds, yield-
ing approximately 1,000 pounds of 95
per cent alcohol, or 143 gallons of 95 per
cent alcohol per acre.
Corn (Indian Corn or Maize}. — The
crop which at the present time is the
source of almost all of the alcohol made
in the United States is Indian corn.
The fermentable matter in Indian
corn — that is, the part which is capable
of being converted into alcohol — amounts
to nearly 70 per cent of the total weight,
since the unfermentable cellulose and
pentosans included in carbohydrates do
not exceed 2 per cent. Inasmuch as a
bushel of Indian corn weighs 56 pounds,
the total weight of fermentable matter
therein, in round numbers, is 39 pounds.
The weight of the alcohol which is pro-
duced under the best conditions is little
less than one-half of the fermentable
matter. Therefore the total weight of
alcohol which would be yielded by a
bushel of average Indian corn would be,
in round numbers, about 19 pounds.
The weight of a gallon of 95 per cent al-
cohol is nearly 7 pounds. Hence 1 bush-
el of corn would produce 2.7 gallons.
If the average price of Indian corn be
E laced, in round numbers, at 40 cents a
ushel, the cost of the raw material —
that is, of the Indian corn — for manu-
facturing 95 per cent industrial alcohol
is about 15 cents a gallon. To this must
be added the cost of manufacture, stor-
age, etc., which is perhaps as much more,
making the estimated actual cost of in-
dustrial alcohol of 95 per cent strength
made from Indian corn about 30 cents
per gallon. If to this be added the
profits of the manufacturer and dealer,
it appears that under the conditions cited,
industrial alcohol, untaxed, should be
sold for about 40 cents per gallon.
Potatoes. — The weight of a bushel of
potatoes is 60 pounds. As the average
amount of fermentable matter in potatoes
grown in the United States is 20 per
cent, the total weight of fermentable
matter in a bushel of potatoes is 12
pounds, which would yield approximate-
ly 6 pounds or 3.6 quarts of alcohol.
The quantity of starch in American-
grown potatoes varies from 15 to 20 per
cent. Probably 18 per cent might be
stated as the general average of the best
grades of potatoes.
Under the microscope the granules of
potato starch have a distinctive appear-
ance. They appear as egg-shaped bodies
on which, especially the larger ones,
various ring-like lines are seen. With a
modified light under certain conditions
of observation a black cross is developed
upon the granule. It is not difficult for
an expert microscopist to distinguish
potato from other forms of starch by
this appearance.
The potato contains very little ma-
terial which is capable of fermentation
aside from starch and sugars.
Although the potato is not sweet to
the taste in a fresh state, it contains not-
able quantities of sugar. This sugar is
lost whenever the potato is used for
starch-making purposes, but is utilized
when it is used for the manufacture of
industrial a!cohol. The percentage of
sugar of all kinds in the potato rarely
goes above 1 per cent. The average
quantity is probably not far from 0.35
per cent, including sugar, reducing
sugar, and dextrin, all of which are
soluble in water. In the treatment of
potatoes for starch making, therefore, it
may be estimated that 0.35 per cent of fer-
mentable matter is lost in the wash water.
Average Composition. — The average
composition of potatoes is:
Water 75.00 per cent
Starch 19.87 per cent
Sugars and dex-
trin 77 per cent
Fat 08 per cent
Cellulose 33 per cent
Ash 1.00 per cent
According to Maercker, the sugar con-
tent, including all forms of sugar, varies
greatly. Perfectly ripe potatoes contain
generally no sugar or only a fractional
per cent. When potatoes are stored
under unfavorable conditions, large
quantities of sugar may be developed,
amounting to as high as 5 per cent
altogether. In general, it may be stated
that the content of sugar of all kinds
will vary from 0.4 per cent to 3.4 per
cent, according to conditions.
672
SPIRIT
The liberal application of nitrogenous
fertilizers increases the yield per acre of
tubers and of starch to a very marked
extent, although the average percentage
of starch present is increased very little.
Of all the common root crops, the
potatoes, including the yam and the
sweet potato, are tne most valuable for
the production of alcohol, meaning by
this term that they contain more fer-
mentable matter per 100 pounds than
other root crops.
While sugar beets, carrots, and pars-
nips contain relatively large amounts
of fermentable matter, these roots could
not compete with potatoes even if they
could all be produced at the same price
per 100 pounds.
A general review of all the data in-
dicates that under the most favorable
circumstances and with potatoes which
have been grown especially for the purpose
an average content of fermentable mat-
ter of about 20 per cent may be reason-
ably expected. It is thus seen that
approximately 10 pounds of industrial
alcohol can be made from 100 pounds of
potatoes. If 60 pounds be taken as the
average weight of a bushel of potatoes,
there are found therein 12 pounds of
fermentable matter, from which 6 pounds
of industrial alcohol can be produced, or
f of a gallon. It has also been shown
that the amount of Indian corn neces-
sary for the production of a gallon of in-
dustrial alcohol costs not less than 15
cents. From this it is evident that the
potatoes for alcohol making will have to
oe produced at a cost not to exceed 15
cents per bushel, before they can com-
pete with Indian corn for the manufac-
ture of industrial alcohol.
Rice.—- Rice is not used to any great
extent in this country for making alco-
hol, but it is extensively used for this
purpose in Japan and some other coun-
tries, and has the largest percentage of
fermentable matter of all the cereais.
The percentage of fermentable matter in
rice is nearly 78 per cent. A bushel of
rice weighs, unhulled, 45 pounds, hulled,
56 pounds, and it therefore has about 34
and 43 pounds, respectively, of ferment-
able matter for the unhulled and the
hulled rice. It is not probable that rice
will ever be used to any extent in this
country as a source of industrial alcohol,
although it is used to a large extent in the
manufacture of beverages, as for in-
stance in beers, which are often made
partly of rice.
Rye.— Large quantities of alcohol,
chiefly in the form of alcoholic beverages,
are manufactured from rye. It is, in
connection with Indian ccrn, the prin-
cipal source of the whiskies made in the
United States. Rye, however, is not used
to any extent in this or other countries
for making industrial alcohol.
Rye contains almost as much ferment-
able matter as Indian corn. A bushel of
rye weighs 56 pounds. Wheat and other
cereals, not mentioned above, are not
used in this country to any appreciable
extent in the manufacture of alcohol.
Spelt. — This grain, which is botanic-
ally a variety of wheat, more closely
resembles barley. Under favorable con-
ditions as much as 73 bushels per acre
have been reported, and analyses show
70 per cent of fermentable carbohy-
drates. The weight per bushel is about
the same as that of oats. It would ap-
pear that this crop might be worthy of
consideration as a profitable source of
industrial alcohol.
Sugar Beets. — The sugar beet is often
used directly as a source of alcohol.
Working on a practical scale in France,
it has been found that from 10,430 tons
of beets^ there were produced 183,624
gallons of crude alcohol of 100 per cent
strength. The beets contain 11.33 per
cent of sugar. From 220 pounds of sugar
15.64 gallons of alcohol were produced.
The weight of pure alcohol obtained is a
little less than one-half the weight of the
dry fermentable matter calculated as
sugar subjected to fermentation. About
18 gallons of alcohol are produced for
each ton of sugar beets employed.
Sweet Potatoes. — Experiments show
that as much as 11,000 pounds of sweet
potatoes can be grown per acre. The
average yield of sweet potatoes, of course,
is very much less. On plots to which
no fertilizer is added the yield is about
8,000 pounds of sweet potatoes per acre,
yielding in round numbers 1,900 pounds
of starch. The quantity of sugar in the
8,000 pounds is about 350 pounds, which
added to the starch, makes 2,250 pounds
of fermentable matter per acre. This
will yield 1,125 pounds of industrial
alcohol of 95 per cent strength, or ap-
proximately 160 gallons per acre. The
percentage of starch is markedly greater
than in the white or Irish potato. In all
cases over 20 per cent of starch was ob-
tained in the South Carolina sweet
potatoes, and in one instance over 24 per
cent. As much as 2,600 pounds of starch
were produced per acre.
In addition to starch, the sweet potato
contains notable quantities of sugar,
sometimes as high as 6 per cent being
present, so that the total fermentable
matter in the sweet potato may be reck-
SPIRIT
673
oned at the minimum at 25 per cent. A
bushel of sweet potatoes weighs 55
pounds, and one-quarter of this is fer-
mentable matter, or nearly 14 pounds.
This would yield, approximately, 7
pounds, or a little over 1 gallor of 95 per
cent alcohol. It may be fairly stated,
therefore, in a general way, that a bushel
of sweet potatoes will yield 1 gallon of
industrial alcohol.
Experiments have shown that the
quantity of starch diminishes and the
quantity of sugar increases on storing.
Further, it may be stated that in the
varieties of sweet potatoes which are
most esteemed for table use there is less
starch and perhaps more sugar than
stated above. The total quantity of
fermentable matter, however, does not
greatly change, although there is prob-
ably a slight loss.
Utilization of Waste Material or By-
products. — Molasses. — The utilization
of the waste materials from the sugar
factories and sugar refineries for the pur-
pose of making alcohol is a well-es-
tablished industry. The use of these
sources of supply depends, of course,
upon the cost of the molasses. When
the sugar has been exhausted as fully as
possible from the molasses the latter
consists of a saccharine product, contain-
ing a considerable quantity of unferment-
able carbohydrate matter, large quan-
tities of mineral salts, and water. In
molasses of this kind there is probably
not more than 50 pounds of fermentable
matter to 100 pounds of the product.
Assuming that a gallon of such molasses
weighs 11 pounds, it is seen that it con-
tains 5 1 pounds of fermentable matter,
yielding 2|- pounds of industrial alcohol
of 95 per cent strength. It requires
about 3 gallons of such molasses to make
1 gallon of industrial alcohol.
When the price of molasses delivered to
the refineries falls as low as 5 or 6 cents a
gallon it may be considered a profitable
source of alcohol.
Wood Pulp and Sawdust. — Many at-
tempts have been made to produce
alcohol for industrial purposes from
sawdust, wood pulp, or waste wood
material. The principle of the process
rests upon the fact that the woody sub-
stance is composed of cellulose and
kindred matters which, under the action
of dilute acid (preferably sulphuric or
sulphurous) and heat, with or without
pressure, undergo hydrolysis and are
changed into sugars. A large part of
the sugar which is formed is non-
fermentable, consisting of a substance
known as xylose. Another part of the
sugar produced is dextrose, made from
the true cellulose which the wood
contains.
The yield of alcohol in many of the
experiments which have been made has
not been very satisfactory. It is claimed,
however, by some authors that paying
quantities of alcohol are secured. In
Simmonsen's process for the manu-
facture of alcohol ^ per cent sulphuric
acid is employed and from 4 to 5 parts
of the liquid heated with 1 part of the
finely comminuted wood for a quarter of
an hour under a pressure of 9 atmos-
pheres. It is claimed by Simmonsen
that he obtained a yield of 6 quarts of
alcohol from 110 pounds of air-dried
shavings. Another process which has
been tried in this and other countries for
converting comminuted wood into alcohol
is known as Classen's. The comminuted
wood is heated for 15 minutes in a closed
apparatus at a temperature of from 248°
to 293° F. in the presence of sulphurous
acid (fumes of burning sulphur) instead
of sulphuric acid. It is claimed by the
inventor that he has made as much as 12
quarts of alcohol from 110 pounds of the
air-dried shavings. There is reason to
doubt the possibility of securing such
high yields in actual practice as are
claimed in the above processes. That
alcohol can be made from sawdust and
wood shavings is undoubtedly true, but
whether or not it can be made profitably
must be determined by actual manu-
facturing operations.
Waste Products of Canneries, etc. — The
principal waste materials which may be
considered in this connection are the
refuse of wine making, fruit evaporating,
and canning industries, especially the
waste of factories devoted to the can-
ning of tomatoes and Indian corn. In
addition to this, the waste fruit products
themselves, which are not utilized at all,
as, for instance, the imperfect and rotten
apples, tomatoes, grapes, etc., may be
favorably considered. The quantity of
waste products varies greatly in different
materials.
The quantities of waste material in
grapes and apples, as shown by Lazenby,
are as follows: About 25 per cent of the
total weight in grapes, with the exception
of the wild grape, where it is about 60
per cent; with apples the average per-
centage of waste was found to be 23.8
per cent from 25 varieties. This in-
cluded the waste in the core, skin, and
the defective apples caused by insects,
fungi/bruises, etc. In general it may be
said that in the preparation of fruits for
674
SPIRIT
preserving purposes about 25 per cent
of their weight is waste, and this, it is
evident, could be utilized for the manu-
facture of alcohol. If apples be taken
as a type of fruits, we inay assume that
the waste portions contain 10 per cent of
fermentable matters, which, however, is
perhaps rather a high estimate. Five
per cent of this might be recovered as
industrial alcohol. Thus, each 100
pounds of fruit waste in the most favor-
able circumstances might be expected to
produce 5 pounds of industrial alcohol.
The quantity of waste which couid be
utilized for this purpose would hardly
established it might be profitable to
devote them to this purpose.
Manufacture of Alcohol. — The three
principal steps in the manufacture of
alcohol are (1) the preparation of the
mash or wort, (2) the fermentation of the
mash or wort drawn off from the mash
tun, and (3) the distillation of the dilute
alcohol formed in the beer or wash from
the fermentatioji tanks. The prepara-
tion of the mash includes (1) the treat-
ment of the material used with hot water
to form a paste of the starch or the sugar,
and (2) the action of the malt or ferment
FIG. 1.— MASH TUN IN AN IRISH DISTILLERY.
render it profitable to engage in the
manufacture. A smaller percentage could
be expected from the waste of the to-
mato, where the quantity of sugar is
not so great. In the waste of the sweet-
corn factory the amount of ferment-
able matter would depend largely on the
care with which the grain was removed.
There is usually a considerable quantity
of starchy material left on the cobs, and
this, with the natural sugars which the
grown cobs contain, might yield quite
large Quantities of fermentable matter.
It would not be profitable to erect dis-
tilleries simply for the utilization of
waste of this kind, but if these wastes
could be utilized in distilleries already
on the paste to convert the starch into
fermentable sugar.
Mashing. — Figs. 1 and 2 show two
views of the mashing tun or tank, the
first figure giving the general appearance,
and the second a view of the interior of
the tun, showing the machinery by
which the stirring is effected and the
series of pipes for cooling the finished
product down to the proper tempera-
ture for the application of the malt.
The object of the mash tun is to re-
duce the starch in the ground grain to a
pasty, gummy mass, in order that the
ferment of the malt rnay act upon it
vigorously and convert it into sugar. If
the mashing be done before the addition
SPIRIT
675
FlQ. 2.— MASHING AND COOLING APPARATUS, CROSS SECTION.
FIG. 3.— FERMENTATION TANKS IN AN IRISH DISTILLERY.
676
SPIRIT
of the malt the temperature may be
raised to that of boiling water. If, how-
ever, the malt be added before the mash-
ing begins, the temperature should not
rise much, if any, above 140° F., since
the fermenting power is retarded and
disturbed at higher temperatures. The
mashing is simply a mechanical process
by means of which the starch is reduced
to a form of paste and the temperature
maintained at that point which is best
suited to the conversion of the starch into
sugar.
Fermentation. — The mash, after the
starch has all been converted into sugar,
goes into fermenting tanks, which in
Scotland are called "wash backs," when
the yeast is added.. A view of the typical
wash back is shown in Fig. 3. They
often have a stirring apparatus, as in-
dicated in the figure; wnereby the con-
tents can be thoroughly mixed with the
yeast and kept in motion. This is not
necessary after the fermentation is once
well established, but it is advisable,
especially in the early stages, to keep the
yeast well distributed throughout the
mass. In these tanks the fermentations
are conducted, the temperature being
varied according to the nature of the
product to be made. For industrial
alcohol the sole purpose should be to
secure the largest possible percentage of
alcohol without reference to its palatable
properties.
An organism belonging to the vege-
table family and to which the name
"yeast" has been given is the active
agent in fermentation. The organism
itself does not take a direct part in the
process, but it secretes another ferment
of an unorganized character known as
an "enzym" or a "diastase." This en-
zym has the property, under proper
conditions of food, temperature, and
dilution, of acting upon sugar and con-
verting it into alcohol and carbonic acid.
Anyone who has ever seen a fermenting
vat in full operation and noticed the
violent boiling or ebullition of the liquor,
can understand how rapidly the gas
"carbon dioxide" or "carbonic acid," as
it is usually called, may be formed, as it
is the escape of this gas which gives the
appearance to the tank of being in a
violent state of ebullition. The yeast
which produces the fermentation belongs
to the same ganeral family as the ordi-
nary yeast which is used in the leavening
of bread. The leavening of bread under
the action of yeast is due to the conver-
sion of the sugar in the dough into
alcohol and carbon dioxide or carbonic
acid. The gas thus formed becomes
entangled in the particles of the gluten,
and these expanding cause the whole
mass to swell or "rise," as it is commonly
expressed. Starch cannot be directly
fermented, but must be first converted
into sugar, either by the action of a
chemical like an acid, or a ferment or
enzym, known as diastase, which is one
of the abundant constituents of malt,
especially of barley malt. In the prep-
aration of a cereal, for instance, for
fermentation, it is properly softened and
ground, and then usually heated with
water to the boiling point or above in
order that the starch may be diffused
throughout the water. After cooling, it is
treated with barley malt, the diastase of
which acts vigorously upon the starch,
converting it into a form of sugar,
namely, maltose, which lends itself
readily to the activities of the yeast fer-
mentation. (Fig. 4.)
FIG. 4.— YEAST FROM BEER SEDIMENT SHOWING
BUDDING ( X 1270).
When ordinary sugar (cane sugar,
beet sugar, and sucrose) is subjected to
fermentation it is necessary that the
yeast, which also exerts an activity
similar to that of malt, should first con-
vert the cane sugar into invert sugar
(equal mixtures of dextrose and levulose)
before the alcoholic fermentation is set
up. The cane sugar is also easily in-
verted by heating with an acid.
When different kinds of sugars and
starches are fermented for the purpose of
making a beverage it is important that
the temperature of fermentation be care-
fully controlled, since the character of
the product depends largely upon the
temperature at which the fermentation
takes place. On the contrary, when in-
dustrial alcohol is made, the sole object
is to get as large a yield as possible, and
for this reason that temperature should
be employed which produces the most
alcohol and the least by-products, ir-
respective of the flavor or character of the
product made. Also, in the making of
alcoholic beverages, it is important that
the malt be of the very best quality in
SPIRIT
677
order that the resulting product may
have the proper flavor. In the produc-
tion of alcohol for industrial purposes
this is of no consequence, and the sole
purpose here should be to produce the
largest possible yield. For this reason
there is no objection to the use of acids
for converting the starch, cane sugar,
and cellulose into fermentable sugars.
Therefore, the heating of the raw ma-
terials under pressure with dilute acids
in order to procure the largest quantity
of sugar is a perfectly legitimate method
of procedure in the manufacture of in-
dustrial alcohols.
Sugars and starches are usually asso-
ciated in nature with another variety of
carbohydrates known as cellulose, and
this cellulose itself, when acted upon by
an acid, is converted very largely into
sugars, which, on fermentation, yield
alcohol. For industrial purposes, the
alcohol produced in this manner is just
as valuable as that made from sugar and
starch. Whether the diastatic method
of converting the starch and sugar into
fermentable sugars be used, or the acid
method, is simply a question of economy
and yield. On the other hand, when
alcoholic beverages are to be made, those
processes must be employed, irrespective
of the magnitude of the yield, which give
the finest and best flavors to the products.
Distillation. — The object of distilla-
tion is to separate the alcohol which has
been formed from the non-volatile sub-
stances with which it is mixed. A typical
form of distilling apparatus for the con-
centration of the dilute alcohol which is
formed in the beer or wash from the fer-
mentation tanks, is represented in Fig. 5.
This apparatus is of the continuous
type common to Europe and America.
It consists of a "beer still" provided with
a number of chambers fitted with per-
forated plates and suitable overflow pipes.
It is operated as follows:
The syrup and alcohol are pumped
into the top of the beer still through a
pipe G; the tank G may also be placed
above the center of the still and the con-
tents allowed to flow into the still by
gravity; steam is admitted through an
open pipe into the kettle A at the bottom
of the column or is produced by heating
the spent liquor by means of a coil. The
steam ascends through the perforations
in the plates, becoming richer and richer
in alcohol as it passes through each lay-
er of liquor, while the latter gradually
descends by means of the overflow pipes
to the bottom of the column B and finally
reaches the kettle completely exhausted
of alcohol, whence it is removed by
means of a pump connected with the
pipe line H. On reaching the top of the
beer still B the vapors of the alcohol and
the steam continue to rise and pass into
the alcohol column C. This column is
also divided into chambers, but by solid
instead of perforated plates, as shown at
FIG. 5.— CONTINUOUS DISTILLING APPARATUS.
K. Each chamber is provided with a
return or overflow pipe and an opening
through which the vapors ascend. In
the alcohol column the vapors are so
directed as to pass through a layer of
678
SPIRIT— SPONGES
liquid more or less rich in alcohol which
is retained by the plate separating the
compartments. An excess of liquids in
these compartments overflows through
the down pipes, gradually works its way
into the beer still, and thence to the
kettle. On reaching the top of the col-
umn the vapors, which have now be-
come quite rich in alcohol, are passed
into a coil provided with an outlet at the
lowest part of each bend. These outlets
lead into the return pipe P, which con-
nects with the top chamber of the alcohol
column. This coil is technically termed
the "goose" and is immersed in a tank
called the "goose tub." A suitable ar-
rangement is provided for controlling
the temperature of the water in the tub
by means of outlet and inlet water pipes.
When the still is in operation the temper-
ature of the "goose" is regulated accord-
ing to the required density of the alco-
hol. The object of the "goose" is the
return to the column of 'all low products
which condense at a temperature be-
low the boiling point of ethyl alcohol
of the desired strength. On leaving the
"goose" the vapors enter a condenser E,
wnence the liquid alcohol is conducted
into a separator F. This separator con-
sists simply of a glass box provided with
a cylinder through which a current of
alcohol is constantly flowing. An alcohol
spindle is inserted in this cylinder and
snows the density of the spirit at all
times. A pipe, with a funnel-shaped
opening at its upper extremity, connects
with the pipe leading from the condens-
er and gives vent to any objectionable
fumes. The separator is connected by
means of a pipe with the alcohol storage
tank. The pipe O is for emptying the
upper chambers when necessary. The
valves N, communicating by means of a
small pipe with a condenser M, are for
testing the vapors in the lower chambers
for alcohol.
Substances Used for Denaturing Alco-
hol.— The process of rendering alcohol
unsuitable for drinking is called "denatur-
ing," and consists, essentially, in adding
to the alcohol a substance soluble there-
in of a bad taste or odor, or both, of an
intensity which would render it impos-
sible or impracticable to use the mixture
as a drink. Among the denaturing sub-
stances which have been proposed are
the following:
Gum shellac (with or without the ad-
dition of camphor, turpentine, wood
spirit, etc.), colophonium, copal rosin,
Manila gum, camphor, turpentine, acetic
acid, acetic ether, ethylic ether, methyl
alcohol (wood alcohol), pyridine, acetone,
methyl acetate, methyl violet, methylene
blue, aniline blue, eosin, fluorescein,
naphthalene, castor oil, benzine, carbolic
acid, caustic soda, musk, animal oils,
etc.
Methyl (wood) alcohol and benzine
are the denaturing agents authorized in
the United States, in the following pro-
portions: To 100 parts, by volume, of
ethyl alcohol (not less than 90 per cent
strength) add 10 parts of approved
methyl (wood) alcohol and ^ of 1 part of
approved benzine. Such alcohol is classed
as completely denatured. Formulas for
special denaturation may be submitted
for approval by manufacturers to the
Commissioner of Internal Revenue, who
will determine whether they may be used
or not, and only one special denaturant
will be authorized for the same class of
industries unless it shall be shown that
there is good reason for additional special
denaturants. Not less than 300 wine
gallons can be withdrawn from a bonded
warehouse at one time for denaturing
purposes.
Spirit. — Proof spirit is a term used by
the revenue department in assessing the
tax on alcoholic liquors. It means a
liquid in which there is 50 per cent (by
volume) of absolute alcohol. As it is
the actual alcohol in the whisky, brandy,
dilute alcohol, etc., which is taxed, and as
this varies so widely, it is necessary that
the actual wine gallons be converted into
proof gallons before the tax rate can be
fixed. A sample that is half alcohol
and half water (let us say for conven-
ience) is "100 proof." A sample that is
| alcohol and ^ water is 150 proof, and
the tax on every gallon of it is 1^ times
the regular government rate per proof
gallon. Absolute alcohol is 200 proof
and has to pay a double tax.
The legal definition of proof spirit is,
"that alcoholic liquor which contains
one-half its volume of alcohol of a spe-
cific gravity of 0.7939 at 60° F."
SPONGES:
Bleaching Sponges. — I. — Soak in
dilute hydrochloric acid to remove the
lime, then wash in water, and place for
10 minutes in a 2 per cent solution of
potassium permanganate. The brown
color on removal from this solution is
due to the deposition of manganous oxide,
and this may be removed by steeping for
a few minutes in very dilute sulphuric
acid. As soon as the sponges appear
white, they are washed out in water to
remove the acid.
II. — A sponge that has been used in
SPONGES— STAMPING
679
surgical operations or for other purposes,
should first be washed in warm water, to
every quart of which 20 drops of liquor
of soda have been added; afterwards
washed in pure water, wrung or pressed
out and put into a jar of bromine water,
where it is left until bleached. Bleaching
is accelerated by exposing the vessel
containing the bromine water to the
direct rays of the sun. When the sponge
is bleached it is removed from the bro-
mine water, and put for a few minutes in
the water containing soda lye. Finally
it is rinsed in running water until the
odor of bromine disappears. It should
be dried as rapidly as possible by hang-
ing it in the direct sunlight.
Sterilization of Sponges. — I. — Allow
the sponges to lie for 24 hours in an 8
per cent hydrochloric acid solution, to
eliminate lime and coarse impurities;
wash in clean water, and place the
sponges in a solution of caustic potash,
10 parts; tannin, 10 parts; and water,
1,000 parts. After they have been sat-
urated for 5 to 20 minutes with this
liquid, they are washed out in steril-
ized water or a solution of carbolic acid
or corrosive sublimate, until they have
entirely lost the brown coloring acquired
by the treatment with tannin. The
sponges thus sterilized are kept in a 2 per
cent or 15 per cent carbolic solution.
Sponge Window Display. — Soak a large
piece of coarse sponge in water, squeeze
half dry, then sprinkle in the openings
red clover seed, millet, barley, lawn grass,
oats, rice, etc. Hang this in the window,
where the sun shines a portion of the day,
and sprinkle lightly with water daily. It
will soon form a mass of living green
vegetation very refreshing to the eyes.
While the windows are kept warm this
may be done at any season. The seeds
used may be varied, according to fancy.
SPONGES AS FILTERS:
See Filters.
SPONGE CLEANERS:
See Cleaning Preparations and Meth-
ods, under Miscellaneous Methods.
SPONGE-TRICK, BURNING:
See Pyrotechnics.
SPOT ERADICATORS:
See Cleaning Preparations and Meth-
ods and Soaps.
SPOT GILDING:
See Plating.
SPRAY SOLUTION:
See Balsams.
SPEARMINT CORDIAL:
See Wines and Liquors.
SPRAIN WASHES:
See Veterinary Formulas.
SPRING CLEANING:
See Cleaning Preparations and Meth-
ods.
SPRING HARDENING:
See Steel.
SPRINGS OF WATCHES:
See Watchmakers' Formulas.
SPRUCE BEER:
See Beverages.
STAIN REMOVERS:
See Cleaning Preparations and Meth-
ods.
STAINS:
See Paints, Varnishes and Wood
Stains.
STAINS FOR LACQUERS:
See Lacquers.
Stamping
(See also Dyes.)
Stamping Colors for Use with Rubber
Stamps. — Blue: 0.3 parts of water-blue
IB, 1.5 parts of dextrin, 1.5 parts of dis-
tilled water. Dissolve the aniline dye
and the dextrin in the distilled water,
over a water bath, and add 7 parts of
refined glycerine, 28° Be.
Other colors may be made according
to the same formula, substituting the
following quantities of dyes for the
water-blue: Methyl violet 3 B, 0.02 parts;
diamond fuchsine I, 0.02 parts; aniline
green D, 0.04 parts; vesuvine B, 0.05
parts; phenol black, 0.03 parts. Oleagi-
nous colors are mostly used for metallic
stamps, but glycerine colors can be used
in case of necessity.
Oleaginous Stamping Colors. — Mix 0.8
parts of indigo, ground fine with 2.5 parts
of linseed-oil varnish, and 0.5 parts of
olein. Add 2 parts of castor oil and 5
parts of linseed oil. For other colors accord-
ing to the same formula, use the following
quantities: Cinnabar, 2$ parts; verdigris,
2£ parts; lampblack, 1.2 parts; oil-soluble
aniline blue A, 0.35 parts; oil-soluble
aniline scarlet B, 0.3 parts; aniline yellow
(oil-soluble), 0.45 parts; oil-soluble aniline
black L, 0.6 parts.
Stamping Liquids and Powders. — Dis-
solve 1 drachm each of rosin and copal
680
STAMPING— STARCH
in 4 fluidounces of benzine and with a
little of this liquid triturate \ drachm of
Prussian blue and finally mix thoroughly
with the remainder.
Ultramarine, to which has been added
a small proportion of powdered rosin, is
generally used for stamping embroidery
patterns on white goods. The powder
is dusted through the perforated pattern,
which is then covered with a paper and a
hot iron passed over it to melt the rosin
and cause the powder to adhere to the
cloth. The following are said to be ex-
cellent powders:
I. — White. — One part each of rosin,
copal, damar, mastic, sandarac, borax,
and bronze powder, and 2 parts white
lead.
II. — Black. — Equal parts of rosin, dam-
ar, copal, sandarac, Prussian blue, ivory
black, and bronze powder.
III. — Blue. — Equal parts of rosin,
damar, copal, sandarac, Prussian blue,
ultramarine, and bronze powder.
In all these powders the gums are first
to be thoroughly triturated and mixed by
passing through a sieve, and the other
ingredients carefully added. Other colors
may be made by using chrome yellow,
burnt or raw sienna, raw or burnt umber,
Vandyke brown, etc. For stamping fab-
rics liable to be injured by heat, the
stamping is done by moistening a suitable
powder with alcohol and using it like a
stencil ink.
Stamping Powder for Embroideries. —
"Stamping powders" used for outlining
embroidery patterns are made by mixing
a little finely powdered rosin with a suit-
able pigment. After dusting the powder
through the perforated pattern it is fixed
on the fabric by laying over it a piece of
paper and then passing a hot iron care-
fully over the paper. By this means the
rosin is melted and the mixture adheres.
When white goods are to be "stamped,"
ultramarine is commonly used as the
pigment; for dark goods, zinc white may
be substituted. Especial care should be
taken tc avoid lead compounds and other
poisonous pigments, as they may do
mischief by dusting off. On velvets or
other materials likely to be injured by
heat, stamping is said to be done by
moistening a suitable powder with alco-
hol and using it as stencil paint. A
small addition of rosinous matter would
seem required here also.
Starch
Black Starch. — Add to the starch a
certain amount of logwood extract be-
fore the starch mixture is boiled. The
quantity varies according to the depth
of the black and the amount of starch.
A small quantity of potassium bichro-
mate dissolved in hot water is used to
bring out the proper shade of black. In
place of bichromate, black iron liquor
may be used. This comes ready pre-
pared.
Starch Gloss. — I. — Melt 2£ pounds
of the best paraffine wax over a slow fire.
When liquefied remove from the fire to
stir in 100 drops of oil of citronella.
Place several new pie tins on a level
table, coat them slightly with sweet oil,
and pour about 6 tablespoonfuls of the
melted paraffine wax into each tin. The
pan may be floated in water sufficiently
to permit the mixture to be cut or
stamped out with a tin cutter into small
cakes about the size of a peppermint
lozenge. Two of these cakes added to
each pint of starch will cause the smooth-
ing iron to impart the finest possible
finish to, muslin or linen, besides perfum-
ing the clothes.
II. — Gum arabic, pow-
dered 3 parts
Spermaceti wax .... 6 parts
Borax, powdered. . . 4 parts
White cornstarch ... 8 parts
All these are to be intimately mixed in
the powder form by sifting through a
sieve several times. As the wax is in a
solid form and does not readily become
reduced to powder by pounding in a mor-
tar, the best method of reducing it to
such a condition is to put the wax into a
bottle with some sulphuric or rectified
ether and then allow the fluid to evap-
orate. After it has dissolved the wax,
as the evaporation proceeds, the wax will
be deposited again in the solid form, but
in fine thin flakes, which will easily
break down to a powder form when
rubbed up with the other ingredients in
a cold mortar. Pack in paper or in
cardboard boxes. To use, 4 teaspoon-
fuls per pound of dry starch are to be
added to all dry starch, and then the
starch made in the usual way as boiled
starch.
Refining of Potato Starch. — A suit-
able quantity of chloride of lime, fluc-
tuating according to its quality between
\ to 1 part per 100 parts of starch, is
made with little water into a thick paste.
To this paste add gradually with con-
stant stirring 10 to 15 times the quantity
of water, and filter.
The filtrate is now added to the starch
stirred up with water; \ part of ordinary
STARCH— STEEL
681
hydrochloric acid of 20° Be. previously
diluted with four times the quantity of
water is mixed in, for every part of
chloride of lime, the whole is stirred
thoroughly, and the starch allowed to
stand.
When the starch has settled, the
supernatant water is let off and the starch
is washed with fresh water until all odor
of chlorine has entirely disappeared.
The starch now obtained is the resulting
final product.
If the starch thus treated is to be
worked up into dextrin, it is treated in
the usual manner with hydrochloric acid
or nitric acid and will then furnish a dex-
trin perfectly free from taste and smell.
In case the starch is to be turned into
"soluble" starch proceed as usual, in a
similar manner as in the production of
dextrin, with the single difference that
the starch treated with hydrochloric or
nitric acid remains exposed to a temper-
ature of 212° F., only until a test with
tincture of iodine gives a bluish-violet
reaction. The soluble starch thus pro-
duced, which is clearly soluble in boiling
water, is odorless and tasteless.
Starch Powder. — Finely powdered
starch is a very desirable absorbent, ac-
cording to Snively, who says that for
toilet preparations it is usually scented
by a little otto or sachet powder. Frangi-
panin powder, used in the proportion of
1 part to 30 of the starch, he adds, gives
a satisfactory odor.
STARCHES:
See Laundry Preparations.
STARCH IN JELLY, TESTS FOR:
See Foods.
STARCH PASTE:
See Adhesives.
STATUE CLEANING:
See Cleaning Preparations and Meth-
ods.
STATUETTES, CLEANING OF:
See Plaster.
STATUETTES OF LIPOWITZ METAL:
See Alloys.
Steel
(See also Iron and Metals.)
ANNEALING STEEL:
See also Hardening Steel and Temper-
ing Steel.
This work requires the use of sub-
stances which yield their carbon readily
and quickly to the tools on contact at
a high temperature. Experience has
shown that the best results are obtained
by the use of yellow blood-lye salt (yel-
low prussiate of potash), which, when
brought in contact with the tool at a
cherry-red heat, becomes fluid, and in
this condition has a strong cementing
effect. The annealing process is as fol-
lows: The tool is heated to a cherry red
and the blood-lye salt sprinkled over the
surface which is to be annealed. A fine
sieve should be used, to secure an even
distribution of the substance. The tool
is then put back into the fire, heated to
the proper temperature for tempering,
and tempered. If it is desired to give a
higher or more thorough tempering to
iron or soft steel, the annealing process is
repeated 2 or 3 times. The surface of
the tool must, of course, be entirely free
from scale. Small tools to which it is
desired to impart a considerable degree
of hardness by annealing with blood-lye
salt are tempered as follows: Blood-lye
salt is melted in an iron vessel over a
moderate fire, and the tool, heated to a
brown-red heat, placed in the melted
salt, where it is allowed to remain for
about 15 minutes. It is then heated to
the hardening temperature and hardened.
A similar but milder effect is produced in
small, thin tools by making them re-
peatedly red hot, immersing them slowly
in oil or grease, reheating them, and
finally tempering them in water. To in-
crease the effect, soot or powdered char-
coal is added to the oil or grease (train
oil) till a thick paste is formed, into
which the red-hot tool is plunged. By
this means the tool is covered with a thick,
not very combustible, coating, which
produces a powerful cementation at the
next heating. By mixing flour, yellow
blood-lye salt, saltpeter, horn shavings,
or ground hoofs, grease, and wax, a
paste is formed which serves the same
purpose. A choice may be made of any
of the preparations sold as a "hardening
paste"; they are all more or less of the
same composition. This is a sample:
Melt 500 grains of wax, 500 grains tal-
low, 100 grains rosin, add a mixture of
leather-coal, horn shavings, and ground
hoofs in equal parts till a paste is formed,
then add 10 grains saltpeter and 50 to
100 grains powdered yellow blood-lye
salt, and stir well. The tools are put
into this paste while red hot, allowed to
cool in it, then reheated and tempered.
More steel is injured, and sometimes
spoiled, by over-annealing than in any
other way. Steel heated too hot in an-
nealing will shrink badly when being
hardened; besides, it takes the life out of
it. It should never be heated above a
STEEL
low cherry red, and it should be a lower
heat than it is when being hardened. It
should be heated slowly and given a
uniform heat all over and through the
piece.
This is difficult to do in long bars and
in an ordinary furnace. The best way
to heat a piece of steel, either for anneal-
ing or hardening, is in red-hot, pure lead.
By this method it is done uniformly, and
one can see the color all the time. Some
heating for annealing is done in this way:
Simply cover up the piece in sawdust,
and let it cool there, and good results will
be obtained.
Good screw threads cannot be cut in
steel that is too soft. Soft annealing
produces a much greater shrinkage and
spoils the lead of the thread.
This mixture protects the appearance
of polished or matted steel objects on
heating to redness: Mix 1 part of white
soap, 6 parts of chemically pure boracic
acid, and 4 parts of phosphate of soda,
after pulverizing, and make with water
into a paste. For use, apply this to the
article before the annealing.
COLORING STEEL:
Black. — I. — Oil or wax may be em-
ployed on hard steel tools; with both
methods the tool loses more or less of its
hardness and the blacking process there-
fore is suited only for tools which are
used for working wood or at least need
not be very hard, at any rate not for
tools which are employed for working
steel or cast iron. The handsomest
glossy black color is obtained by first
polishing the tool neatly again after it
has been hardened in water, next causing
it to assume on a grate or a hot plate the
necessary tempering color, yellow, vio-
let blue, etc., then dipping it in molten,
not too hot, yellow wax and burning off
the adhering wax, after withdrawal, at
a fire, without, however, further heating
the tool. Finally dip the tool again into
the wax and repeat the burning off at the
flame until the shade is a nice lustrous
black, whereupon the tool may be
cooled off in water. The wax is sup-
posed to impart greater toughness to the
tool. It is advisable for all tools to have
a trough of fat ready, which has been
heated to the necessary tempering de-
gree, and the tools after hardening in
water are suspended in the fat until they
have acquired the temperature of the fat
bath. When the parts are taken out and
slowly allowed to cool, they will be a
nice, but not lustrous, black.
II. — The following has been suggested
for either steel or iron:
Bismuth chloride. . . 1 part
Mercury bichloride. 2 parts
Copper chloride. ... 1 part
Hydrochloric acid . . 6 parts
Alcohol 5 parts
Water sufficient to make 64 parts.
Mix. As in all such processes a great
deal depends upon having the article to
be treated absolutely clean and free from
grease. Unless this is the case uniform
results are impossible. The liquid may
be applied with a swab, or a brush, but
if the object is small enough to dip into
the liquid better results may thus be
obtained than in any other way. The
covering thus put on is said to be very
lasting, and a sure protection against
oxidation.
Blue. — I. — Heat an iron bar to redness
and lay it on a receptacle filled with
water. On this bar place the objects to
be blued, with the polished side up. As
soon as the article has acquired the
desired color cause it to fall quickly into
the water. The pieces to be blued must
always previously be polished with pum-
ice stone or fine emery.
II. — For screws: Take an old watch
barrel and drill as many holes into the
head of it as the number of screws to be
blued. Fill it about one-fourth full of
brass or iron filings, put in the head,
and then fit a wire long enough to bend
over for a handle, into the arbor holes —
head of the barrel upward. • Brighten
the heads of the screws, set them, point
downward, into the holes already drilled,
and expose the bottom of the barrel to
the lamp, until the screws assume the
color you wish.
III. — To blue gun-barrels, etc., dis-
solve 2 parts of crystallized chloride of
iron; 2 parts solid chloride of antimony;
1 part gallic acid in 4 or 5 parts of water;
apply with a small sponge, and let dry in
the air. Repeat this two or three times,
then wash with water, and dry. Rub
with boiled linseed oil to deepen the
shade. Repeat this until satisfied with
the result.
IV. — The bluing of gun barrels is
effected by heating evenly in a muffle
until the desired blue color is raised, the
barrel being first made clean and bright
with emery cloth, leaving no marks of
grease or dirt upon the metal when the
bluing takes place, and then allow to
cool in the air. It requires considerable
experience to obtain an even clear blue.
Brown. — I. — The following recipe for
browning is from the United States Ord-
nance Manual: Spirits of wine, 1$
STEEL
683
ounces; tincture of iron, 1^ ounces; cor-
rosive sublimate, 1A ounces; sweet
spirits of niter, 1^ ounces; blue vitriol, 1
ounce; nitric acid, f ounce. Mix and
dissolve in 1 quart of warm water and
keep in a glass jar. Clean the barrel well
with caustic soda water to remove grease
or oil. Then clean the surface of all
stains and marks with emery paper or
cloth, so as to produce an even, bright
surface for the acid to act upon, and one
without finger marks. Stop the bore
and vent with wooden plugs. Then ap-
ply the mixture to every part with a
sponge or rag, and expose to the air for
24 hours, when the loose rust should be
rubbed off with a steel scratch brush.
Use the mixture and the scratch brush
twice, and more if necessary, and finally
wash in boiling water, dry quickly, and
wipe with linseed oil or varnish with
shellac.
II. — Apply four coats of the following
solution, allowing each several hours to
dry. Brush after each coat if necessary.
After the last coat is dry, rub down hard.
Sulphate of copper. .. 1 ounce
Sweet spirits of niter. . 1 ounce
Distilled water 1 pint
Niello. — This is a brightly polished
metal, which is provided with a black or
blue-black foundation by heating, is cov-
ered with a design by the use of a suitable
matrix and then treated with hydro-
chloric acid in such a manner that only
the black ground is attacked, the metal
underneath remaining untouched. Next,
the acid is rinsed off and the reserve is
removed with suitable solvents. The
parts of the metal bared by the acid may
also be provided with a galvanic coating
of silver or other metal.
Another method is to plunge the articles
for a few minutes into a solution of ox-
alic acid and to clean them by passing
them through alcohol. In this way the
polish can even be brought back with-
out the use of rouge or diamantine.
Whitening or Blanching. — If dissatis-
fied with the color acquired in tempering,
dip the article into an acid bath, which
whitens it, after which the bluing opera-
tion is repeated. This method is of great
service, but it is important to remember
always thoroughly to wash after the use
of acid and then allow the object to re-
main for a few minutes in alcohol. Sul-
phuric acid does not whiten well, often
leaving dark shades on the surface. Hy-
drochloric acid gives better results. Small
pieces of steel are also whitened with a
piece of pith moistened with dilute sul-
phuric acid, else the fine steel work, such
as a watch hand, is fixed with lacquer on
a plate and whitened by means of pith
and polishing rouge, or a small stiff brush
is charged with the same material. It is
then detached by heating and cleaned in
hot alcohol.
TEMPERING STEEL.
The best temperature at which to
quench in the tempering of tool steel is
the one just above the transformation
point o'f the steel, and this temperature
may be accurately determined in the fol-
lowing manner, without the use of a
pyrometer. The pieces of steel are in-
troduced successively at equal intervals
of time into a muffle heated to a temper-
ature a little above the transformation
point of the steel. If, after a certain
time, the pieces be taken out in the re-
verse order they will at first show pro-
gressively increasing degrees of brightness/
these pieces being at the transformation
point. When this point is passed the
pieces again rapidly acquire a brightness
superior to that of their neighbors, and
should then be immediately quenched.
I. — Heat red hot and dip in an un-
guent made of mercury and the fat of
bacon. This produces a remarkable
degree of hardness and the steel pre-
serves its tenacity and an elasticity
which cannot be obtained by other means.
II. — Heat to the red white and thrust
quickly into a stick of sealing wax.
Leave it a second, and then change it to
another place, and so continue until the
metal is too cool to penetrate the wax.
To pierce with drills hardened in this way,
moisten them with essence of turpentine.
To Temper Small Coil Springs and
Tools. — To temper small coil springs in
a furnace burning wood the springs are
exposed to the heat of the flame and are
quenched in a composition of the follow-
ing preparation: To a barrel of fish oil,
10 quarts of rosin and 12 quarts of tallow
are added. If the springs tempered in
this mixture break, more tallow is added,
but if the break indicates brittleness of
the steel rather than excessive hardness,
a ball of yellow beeswax about 6 inches
in diameter is added. The springs are
drawn to a reddish purple by being
placed on a frame having horizontally
radiating arms like a star which is
mounted on the end of a vertical rod.
The springs are laid on the star and are
lowered into a pot of melted lead, being
held there for such time as is required to
draw to the desired color.
It is well known that the addition of
STEEL
certain soluble substances powerfully
affects the action of tempering water.
This action is strengthened if the heat-
conducting power of the water is raised
by means of these substances; it is re-
tarded if this power is reduced, or the
boiling point substantially lowered. The
substance most frequently used for the
purpose of increasing the heat-conduct-
ing power of tempering water is common
salt. This is dissolved in varying pro-
portions of weight, a saturated solution
being generally used as a quenching
mixture. The use of this solution is
always advisable when tools of com-
plicated shape, for which a considerable
degree of hardness is necessary, are to be
tempered in large quantities or in fre-
quent succession. In using these cooling
fluids, care must be taken that a suffi-
cient quantity is added to the water to
prevent any great rise of temperature
when the tempering process is pro-
tracted. For this reason the largest
possible vessels should be used, wide and
shallow, rather than narrow and deep,
vessels being selected. Carbonate of soda
and sal ammoniac do not increase the
tempering action to the same extent as
common salt, and are therefore not so
frequently employed, though they form
excellent additions to tempering water in
certain cases. Tools of very complicated
construction, such as fraises, where the
danger of fracture of superficial parts
has always to be kept in view, can with
advantage be tempered in a solution of
soda or sal ammoniac. Acids increase
the action of tempering water consider-
ably, and to a far greater extent than
common salt. They are added in quan-
tities up to 2 per cent, and frequent-
ly in combination with salts. Organ-
ic acids (e. g., acetic or citric) have a
milder action than mineral acids (e. g.,
hydrochloric, nitric, or sulphuric). Acid-
ulous water is employed in tempering
tools for which the utmost degree of
hardness is necessary, such as instru-
ments for cutting exceptionally hard ob-
jects, or when a sufficiently hard surface
nas to be given to a kind of steel not
capable of much hardening. Alcohol
lowers the boiling point of water, and
causes so vigorous an evaporation when
the water comes in contact with the red-
hot metal, that the tempering is greatly
retarded (in proportion to the amount of
alcohol in the mixture). Water con-
taining a large quantity of alcohol will
not temper. Soap and soap suds will
not temper steel; this property is made
use of in the rapid cooling of steel for
which a great degree of hardness is not
desirable. When certain parts of com-
pletely tempered steel have to be rendered
soft, these parts are heated to a red heat
and then cooled in soap suds. This is
done with the tangs of files, knives,
swords, saws, etc. Soluble organic sub-
stances retard the tempering process in
proportion to the quantity used, and
thus lessen the effect of pure water.
Such substances (e. g., milk, sour beer,
etc.) are employed only to a limited
extent.
To Caseharden Locally. — In case-
hardening certain articles it is sometimes
necessary, or desirable, to leave spots or
sections in the original soft uncarbonized
condition while the remainder is carbon-
ized and hardened. This may be ef-
fected by first covering the parts to be
hardened with a protecting coat of japan,
and allowing it to dry. Then put the
piece in an electroplating bath and de-
posit a heavy coat of nickel over the
parts not protected by the japan. The
piece thus prepared may be treated in
the usual manner in casehardening.
The coat of nickel prevents the metal
beneath being carbonized, so it does not
harden when dipped in the bath.
A plating of copper answers the same
purpose as nickel and is often used. A
simpler plan, where the shape of the
piece permits, is to protect it from the
action of the carbonizing material with
an iron pipe or plate closely fitted or
luted with clay. Another scheme is to
machine the parts wanted soft after
carbonizing but before hardening. By
this procedure the 'carbonized material is
removed where the metal is desired soft,
and when heated and dipped these parts
do not harden.
To Harden a Hammer. — To avoid the
danger of "checking" a hammer at the
eye, heat the hammer to a good uniform
hardening heat and then dip the small
end almost up to the eye and cool as
quickly as possible by moving about in
the hardening bath; then dip the large
end. To harden a hammer successfully
by this method one must work quickly
and cool the end dipped first enough to
harden before the heat is lost on the
other end. Draw the temper from the
heat left about the eye. The result is a
hammer hard only where it should be
and free from "checks."
Hardening Steel Wire. — Pass the steel
wire through a lead bath heated to a
temperature of 1,200° to 1,500° F. after it
has previously been coated with a paste
of chalk, so as to prevent the formation
STEEL
685
of oxides. The wire is thus heated in
a uniform manner and, according to
whether it is desired hard or elastic, it is
cooled in water or in oil.
Hardening of Springs. — A variety of
steel must be chosen which is suitable
for the production of springs, a very
tough quality with about 0.8 per cent of
carbon being probably the best. Any
steel works of good reputation would no
doubt recommend a certain kind of steel.
In shaping a spring, forging and ham-
mering should be avoided if possible. In
forging, an uneven treatment can scarcely
be avoided; one portion is worked more
than the other, causing tensions which,
especially in springs, must be guarded
against. It is most advantageous if a
material of the thickness and shape of
the spring can be obtained, which, by
bending and pressing through, is shaped
into the desired spring. Since this also
entails slight tension, a careful annealing
is advisable, so as to prevent cracking or
distorting in hardening. The annealing
is best conducted with exclusion of the
air, by placing the springs in a sheet-iron
box provided with a cover, smearing all
the joints well up with loam. The heat-
ing may be done in a muffled furnace;
the box, with contents, is, not too slowly,
heated to cherry red and then allowed to
cool gradually, together with the stove.
The springs must only be taken out
when they have cooled off enough that
they will give off no hissing sound when
touched by water. In order to uniform-
ly heat the springs for hardening, a
muffle furnace is likewise employed,
wherein they are heated to cherry-red
heat. For cooling liquid, a mixture of oil,
tallow, and petroleum is employed. A
mass consisting of fish oil, tallow, and
wax also renders good service, but one
should see to it that there is a sufficient
quantity of these cooling liquids, so that
the springs may be moved about, same
as when cooled in water, without causing
an appreciable increase in the tempera-
ture of the liquid. In most cases too
small a quantity of the liquid is responsi-
ble for the many failures in hardening.
When the springs have cooled in the
hardening liquid, they are taken out,
dried off superficially, and the oil still
adhering is burned off over a charcoal
fire. This enables one to moderate the
temper according to the duration of the
burning off and to produce the desired
elasticity. An even heating being of
great importance in: hardening springs,
the electric current has of late been suc-
cessfully employed for this purpose.
To Temper a Tap. — After the tap has
been cut and finished heat it in a pair of
tongs to a blood-red heat over a charcoal
fire or the blue flame of a Bunsen burner
or blow pipe, turning it around so that
one point does not get heated before
another. Have ready a pail of clean,
cold water, into which a handful of com-
mon salt has been put. Stir the water in
the pail so that a whirlpool is set up.
Then plunge the tap, point first and
vertically, into the vortex to cool. The
turning of the tap during heating, as well
as the swirl of the quenching water, pre-
vents distortion. In tempering, the tem-
per of the tap requires to be drawn to a
light straw color, and this may be done
as follows: Get a piece of cast-iron tube
about 3 inches in diameter and heat it to
a dull-red heat for about 4 inches of its
length. Then hold the tap, with the
tongs, up the center of the tube, mean-
while turning the tap around until the
straw color appears all over it. Then
dip the tap in the water, when it will be
found perfectly hard. The depth of the
color, whether light or dark straw, must
be determined by the nature of the cast
steel being used, which can be gained
only from experience of the steel.
Scissors Hardening. — The united legs
of the scissors are uniformly heated to a
dark cherry red, extending from the
point to the screw or rivet hole. This
may be done in the naked fire, a feeble
current of air being admitted until the
steel commences to glow. Then the fire
is left to itself and the scissor parts are
drawn to and fro in the fire, until all the
parts to be hardened show a uniform
dark cherry red. The two legs are
hardened together in water and then
tempered purple red to violet.
The simultaneous heating, hardening,
and tempering of the parts belonging
together is necessary, so that the degree
of heat is the same and the harder part
does not cut the softer one.
, In accordance with well-known rules,
the immersion in the hardening bath
should be done with the point first,
slowly and vertically up to above the
riveting hole.
Hardening without Scaling. — Articles
made of tool steel and polished may be
hardened without raising a scale, thereby
destroying the polish, by the following
method: Prepare equal parts in bulk of
common salt and (fine) corn meal, well
mixed. Dip the article to be hardened
first into water, then into the mixture and
place it carefully into the fire. When hot
enough to melt the mixture, take from
686
STEEL
the fire and dip or roll in the salt and
meal, replace in the fire and bring to the
required heat for hardening. Watch
the piece closely and if any part of it
shows signs of getting dry, sprinkle some
of the mixture on it. The mixture, when
exposed to heat, forms a flux over the
surface of the steel which excludes the
air and prevents oxidation, and when
cooled in water or oil comes off easily,
leaving the surface as smooth as before
heating. Borax would possibly give the
same result, but is sometimes difficult to
remove when cold.
Hardening with Glycerine. — I. — The
glycerine employed must be of the density
of 1.08 to 1.26 taken at the temperature
of 302° F. Its weight must be equal
to about 6 times the weight of the pieces
to be tempered. For hard temper add
to the glycerine £ to 4 per cent of sulphate
of potash or of manganese, and for soft
temper 1 to 10 per cent of chloride of
manganese, or 1 to 4 per cent of chloride
of potassium. The temperature of the
tempering bath is varied according to
the results desired.
II. — Glycerine, 8,000-parts, by weight;
cooking salt, 500 parts, by weight; sal
ammoniac, 100 parts, by weight; con-
centrated hydrochloric acid, 50 parts;
and water, 10,000 parts, by weight.
Into this liquid the steel, heated, for
example, to a cherry red, is dipped. A
reheating of the steel is not necessary.
To Remove Burnt Oil from Hardened
Steel. — To remove excess oil from parts
that have been hardened in oil, place the
articles in a small tank of gasoline, which,
when exposed to the air, will dry off
immediately, allowing the part to be
polished and tempered without the con-
fusing and unsightly marks of burnt oil.
VARIOUS RECIPES:
To Put an Edge on Steel Tools. —
Aluminum will put an edge on fine cut-
ting instruments such as surgical knives,
razors, etc. It acts exactly like a razor-
hone of the finest quality. When steel
is rubbed on the aluminum, as, for in-
stance, in honing a knife blade, the met-
al disintegrates, forming an infinitely
minute powder of a greasy unctuous
quality that clings to steel with great
tenacity and thus assists in cutting away
the surface of the harder metal. So fine
is the edge produced that it can in no
wise be made finer by the strop, which
used in the ordinary way merely tends to
round the edge.
To Restore Burnt Steel.— To restore
burnt cast steel heat the piece to a red
heat and sprinkle over it a mixture of
8 parts red chromate of potassium; 4
parts saltpeter; £ part aloes; £ part gum
arabic; and J part rosin.
To Remove Strains in Metal by Heat-
ing.— In making springs of piano wire,
or, in fact, any wire, if the metal is
heated to a moderate degree the spring
will be improved. Piano or any steel
wire should be heated to a blue, brass
wire to a degree sufficient to cause tal-
low to smoke. Heating makes the met-
al homogeneous; before heating, it is full
of strains.
If a piece of metal of any kind is
straightened cold and then put into a
lathe and a chip turned off, it will be far from
true. Before turning, it was held true by
the strain of the particles on the outside,
they having changed position, while the
particles near the axis are only sprung.
The outside particles being removed by
the lathe tool, the sprung particles at the
center return to their old positions. If,
after straightening, the metal is heated
to a temperature of 400° F., the particles
settle together and the strains are re-
moved.
This is the case in the manufacture of
saws. The saw is first hardened and
tempered and then straightened on an
anvil by means of a hammer. After it is
hammered true, it is ground and polished
a little, then blued to stiffen it and then
is subjected to the grinding process.
Before bluing, the metal is full of strains;
these are entirely removed by the heat
required to produce the blue color.
Often a piano-wire spring will not stand
long wear if used without heating, while
if heated it will last for years.
To Render Fine Cracks in Tools Visi-
ble.— It is often of importance to recog-
nize small cracks which appear in the
metal of the tools. For this purpose it
is recommended to moisten the fissured
surface with petroleum; next rub and
dry with a rag and rub again, but this
time with chalk. The petroleum which
has entered the cracks soon comes out
again and the trace is plainly shown by
the chalk.
To Utilize Drill Chips.— There is one
modern machining process that produces
a shaving that has more value than that
of mere scrap, and that is drilling rifle
barrels with the oil-tube drill. The
cutting edge of this drill is broken up in-
to steps and the chips produced are liter-
ally shavings, being long hair-like threads
of steel. These shavings are consider-
ably used in woodworking factories for
smoothing purposes.
STEEL
687
To Remove Fragments of Steel from
Other Metals. — The removal of broken
spiral drills and taps is an operation
which even the most skillful machinist
has to perform at times. A practical
process for removing such broken steel
pieces consists in preparing in a suitable
kettle (not iron) a solution of 1 part, by
weight, of commercial alum in 4 to 5
parts, by weight, of water and boiling
the object in this solution until the
piece which is stuck works itself out.
Care must be taken to place the piece
in such a position that the evolving gas
bubbles may rise and not adhere to the
steel to protect it from the action of the
alum solution.
Testing Steel. — A bar of the steel to
be tested is provided with about nine
notches running around it in distances of
about | of an inch. Next, the foremost
notched piece is heated in a forge in
such a manner that the remaining por-
tion of the bar is heated less by the fire
proper than by the transmitted heat.
When the foremost piece is heated to
burning, i. e., to combustion, and the
color of the succeeding pieces gradually
passes to dark-brownish redness, the
whole rod is hardened. A test with the
file will now show that the foremost
burned piece possesses the greatest hard-
ness, that several softer pieces will follow,
and that again a piece ordinarily situ-
ated in the second third, whose tempera-
ture was the right one for hardening, is
almost as hard as the first one. If the
different pieces are knocked off, the
fracture of the piece hardened at the
correct temperature exhibits the finest
grain. This will give one an idea of the
temperature to be employed for harden-
ing the steel in question and its behavior
in general. Very hard steel will readily
crack in this process.
Welding Compound. — Boracic acid,
41 ^ parts; common salt 35 parts; ferro-
cyanide of potassium, 20 parts; rosin,
7^ parts; carbonate of sodium, 4 parts.
Heat the pieces to be welded to a light-
red heat and apply the compound; then
heat to a strong yellow heat and the
welding may be accomplished in the
usual manner.
The precaution should be observed,
the same as with any of the cyanides,
to avoid breathing the poisonous fumes.
Softening Steel. — Heat the steel to a
brown red and plunge into soft water,
river water being the best. Care should
be taken, however, not to heat over brown
red, otherwise it will be hard when im-
mersed. The steel will be soft enough
to be cut with ease if it is plunged in the
water as soon as it turns red.
Draw -Tempering Cast Steel. — First
heat the steel lightly by means of char-
coal until of a cherry-red shade, where-
upon it is withdrawn to be put quickly
into ashes or dry charcoal dust until
completely cooled. The steel may also
be heated in the forge to a red cherry
color, then hammered until it turns blue
and then plunged into water.
Drilling Hard Steel. — -To accomplish
the object quickly, a drill of cast steel
should be made, the point gradually
heated to the red, the scales taken off,
and the extremity of the point immersed
at once in quicksilver; then the whole
quenched in cold water. Thus prepared,
the drill is equal to any emergency; it will
bore through the hardest pieces. The
quantity of quicksilver needed is trifling.
Engraving or Etching on Steel. — Dis-
solve in 150 parts of vinegar, sulphate of
copper, 30 parts; alum, 8 parts; kitchen
salt, 11 parts. Add a few drops of
nitric acid. According to whether this
liquid is allowed to act a longer or
shorter time, the steel may be engraved
upon deeply or the surface may be given
a very ornamental, frosted appearance.
To Distinguish Steel from Iron. — Take
a very clean file and file over the flame
of an alcohol lamp. If the filed piece is
made of steel, little burning and crack-
ling sparks will be seen. If it consists of
iron, the sparks will not crackle.
STEEL, BROWNING OF:
See Plating.
STEEL, DISTINGUISHING IRON
FROM:
See Iron.
STEEL ETCHING:
See Etching.
STEEL-HARDENING POWDER:
See Iron.
STEEL, OXIDIZED:
See Plating.
STEEL PLATING:
See Plating.
STEEL POLISHES:
See Polishes.
STEEL, TO CLEAN:
See Cleaning Preparations and Meth-
ods.
STEREOCHROMY— STONE
STENCILS FOR PLOTTING LETTERS
OF SIGN PLATES:
See Enameling.
STENCIL INKS:
See Inks.
STEREOCHROMY.
Stereochromatic colors can be bought
ground in a thickly liquid water-glass
solution. They are only diluted with
water-glass solution before application
on the walls. The two solutions are
generally slightly dissimilar in their
composition, the former containing less
silicic acid, but more alkali, than the
latter, which is necessary for the better
preservation of the paint. Suitable pig-
ments are zinc white, ocher with its
different shades of light yellow, red, and
dark brown, black consisting of a mix-
ture of manganese and lampblack, etc.,
etc. White lead cannot be used, as it
coagulates with the water glass, nor
vermilion, because it fades greatly under
the action of the light. The plastering
to be coated must be porous, not fresh,
but somewhat hardened. Otherwise
the caustic lime of the plaster will
quickly decompose the water glass. This
circumstance may account for the un-
satisfactory results which have fre-
quently been obtained with water-glass
coatings. Before applying the paint the
wall should first be impregnated with a
water-glass solution. The colors may
be kept on hand ground, but must be
protected from contact with the air. If
air is admitted a partial separation of
silica in the form of a jelly takes place.
Only pure potash water glass, or, at
least, such as only contains little soda,
should be used, as soda will cause efflor-
escence.
STEREOPTICON SLIDES:
See Photography.
STEREOTYPE METAL:
See Alloys.
STONE, ARTIFICIAL.
The following is a process of manu-
facture in which the alkaline silicates
prepared industrially are employed.
The function of the alkaline silicates,
or soluble glass, as constituents of arti-
ficial stone, is to act as a cement, forming
with the alkaline earths, alumina, and
oxide of lead, insoluble silicates, which
weld together the materials (quartz sand,
pebbles, granite, fluorspar, and the
waste of clay bricks). The mass may
be colored black by the addition of a
quantity of charcoal or graphite to the
extent of 10 per cent at the maximum,
binoxide of manganese, or ocher; red, by
6 per cent of colcothar; brick red, by 4
to 7 per cent of cinnabar; orange, by 6
to 8 per cent of red lead; yellow, by 6 per
cent of yellow ocher, or 5 per cent of
chrome yellow; green, by 8 per cent of
chrome green; blue, by 6 to 10 per cent
of Neuwied blue, Bremen blue, Cassel
blue, or Napoleon blue; and white, by 20
per cent, at the maximum, of zinc white.
Chrome green and zinc oxide pro-
duce an imitation of malachite. An
imitation of lapis lazuli is obtained by
the simultaneous employment of Cassel
blue and pyrites in grains. The metallic
oxides yield the corresponding silicates,
and zinc oxide, mixed with cleansed
chalk, yields a brilliant marble. The
ingredients are mixed in a kind of
mechanical kneading trough, furnished
with stirrers, in variable proportions,
according to the percentage of the solu-
tion of alkaline silicate. The whole is
afterwards molded or compressed by the
ordinary processes.
The imitation of granite is obtained by
mixing lime, 100 parts; sodium silicate
(42° Be.), 35 parts; fine quartz sand, 120
to 180 parts; and coarse sand, 180 to 250
parts..
Artificial basalt may be prepared by
adding potassium sulphite and lead
acetate, or equal parts of antimony ore
and iron filings.
To obtain artificial marble, 100
pounds of marble dust or levigated chalk
are mixed with 20 parts of ground glass
and 8 parts of fine lime and sodium
silicate. The coloring matter is mixed
in proportion depending on the effect to
be produced.
A fine product for molding is obtained
by mixing alkaline silicate, 100 parts;
washed chalk, 100 parts; slaked lime, 40
parts; quick lime, 40 parts, fine quartz
sand, 200 parts; pounded glass, 80 parts;
infusorial earths, 80 parts; fluorspar, 150
parts. On hardening, there is much
contraction.
Other kinds of artificial stone are
prepared by mixing hydraulic lime or
cement, 50 parts; sand, 200 parts; sodium
silicate, in dry powder, 50 parts; the
whole is moistened with 10 per cent of
water and molded.
A hydraulic cement may be employed,
to which an alkaline silicate is added.
The stone or object molded ought to be
covered with a layer of fluosilicate.
STONE
689
A weather-proof water-resisting stone
is manufactured from sea mud, to which
5 per cent of calcic hydrate is added.
The mass is then dried, lixiviated, and
dried once more at 212° F., whereupon
the stones are burned. By an admixture
of crystallized iron sulphate the firmness
of these stones is still increased.
Sand -Lime Brick. — In a French patent
for making bricks from pitch and coal
tar, powdered coke and sea sand are
gently heated in a suitable vessel, and
20 per cent of pitch and 10 per cent of
coal tar added, with stirring. The pasty
mass obtained is then molded under
pressure. The product obtained may
be employed alone, or together with a
framework of iron, or with hydraulic
lime or cement.
According to a French patent for
veining marble, etc., in one or more
colors, coloring matters of all kinds are
mixed with a sticky liquid, which is then
spread in a very thin layer on the surface
of another immiscible and heavier liq-
uid. By agitating the surface, colored
veins, etc., are obtained, which are then
transferred to the object to be decorated
(which may be of most varied kind) by
applying it to the surface of the heavy
liquid. A suitable composition with
which tfye colors may be mixed consists
of: Oil of turpentine, 100 parts; colo-
phony, 10 parts; linseed oil, 10 parts;
siccatif soleil, 5 parts. The heavy liq-
uid may be water, mercury, etc.; and
any colors, organic or mineral, may be
used.
CONCRETE.
Concrete is the name applied to an
artificial combination of various mineral
substances which under chemical action
become incorporated into a solid mass.
There are one or two compositions of
comparatively trifling importance which
receive the same name, though differing
fundamentally from true concrete, their
solidification being independent of chem-
ical influence. These compositions only
call for passing mention; they are: Tar
concrete, made of broken stones (mac-
adam) and tar; iron concrete, composed
of iron turnings, asphalt, bitumen, and
pitch; and lead concrete, consisting of
broken bricks set in molten lead. The
last two varieties, with rare exceptions,
are only used in connection with military
engineering, such as for fortifications.
Concrete proper consists essentially of
two groups or classes of ingredients. The
first, termed the aggregate, is a hetero-
geneous mass, in itself inactive, of
mineral material, such as shingle, broken
stone, broken brick, gravel, and sand.
These are the substances most com-
monly in evidence, but other ingredients
are also occasionally employed, such as
slag from iron furnaces. Burnt clay, in
any form, and earthenware, make ad-
mirable material for incorporation. The
second class constitutes the active agency
which produces adhesion and solidifica-
tion. It is termed the matrix, and con-
sists of hydraulic lime or cement, com-
bined with water.
One of the essential features in good
concrete is cleanliness and an entire
absence of dirt, dust, greasy matter, and
impurities of any description. The ma-
terial will preferably be sharp and angu-
lar, with a rough, porous surface, to
which the matrix will more readily
adhere than to smooth, vitreous sub-
stances. The specific gravity of the ag-
gregate will depend upon the purpose for
which the concrete is to be used. For
beams and lintels, a light aggregate, such
as coke breeze from gasworks, is per-
missible, especially when the work is
designed to receive nails. On the other
hand, for retaining walls, the heaviest
possible aggregate is desirable on the
ground of stability.
The aggregate by no means should be
uniform in size. Fragments of different
dimensions are most essential, so that
the smaller material may fill up the
interstices of the larger. It is not in-
frequently stipulated by engineers that
no individual fragment shall be more
than 4 inches across, and the material is
often specified to pass through a ring 1 J
to 2 inches in diameter. The absolute
limits to size for the aggregate, however,
are determinable by a number of con-
siderations, not the least important of
which is the magnitude and bulk of the
work in which it is to be employed. The
particles of sand should also be of vary-
ing degrees of coarseness. A fine, dust-
like sand is objectionable; its minute
subdivision prevents complete contact
with the cement on all its faces. Another
desideratum is that the particles should
not be too spherical, a condition brought
about by continued attrition. Hence, pit
sand is better in many cases than river
sand or shore sand.
The matrix is almost universally
Portland cement. It should not be used
in too hot a condition, to which end it is
usually spread over a wooden floor to a
depth of a few inches, for a few days
prior to use. By this means, the alumin-
ate of lime becomes partially hydrated,
and its activity is thereby modified,
690
STONE
Roman cement and hydraulic lime may
also be used as matrices.
Portland cement will take a larger
proportion of sand than either Roman
cement or hydraulic lime; but with the
larger ratios of sand, its tenacity is, of
course, correspondingly reduced. One
part of cement to 4 parts of sand should
therefore be looked upon as the upper
limit, while for the strongest mortar the
proportion need hardly exceed 1 part of
cement to 1J or 2 parts of sand. In the
ensuing calculations there is assumed a
ratio of 1 to 3. For impermeability, the
proportion of 1 to 2 should be observed,
and for Roman cement this proportion
should never be exceeded. The ratio
will even advantageously be limited to
2 to 3. For hydraulic lime equal parts of
sand and cement are suitable, though 2
parts of sand to 1 part of cement may be
used.
The quantity of mortar required in
reference to the aggregate is based on the
vacuities in the latter. For any particu-
lar aggregate the amount of empty space
may be determined by filling a tank of
known volume with the minerals and
then adding sufficient water to bring to
a level surface. The volume of water
added (provided, of course, the aggregate
be impervious or previously saturated)
gives the net volume of mortar required.
To this it is necessary to make some ad-
dition (say 10 per cent of the whole), in
order to insure the thorough flushing of
every part of the work.
Assuming that the proportion of
interstices is 30 per cent and adding 10
for the reason just stated, we derive 40
parts as the quantity of mortar to 100 —
10 = 90 parts of the aggregate. An
allowance of J volume for shrinkage
brings the volume of the dry materials
(sand and cement) of the mortar to
40 + 40/3 = 53 £ parts, which, divided in
the ratio of 1 to 3, yields:
53J
Cement
13J parts
Sand, f X 53$ = 40 parts
Aggregate 90 parts
Total 143J parts
As the resultant concrete is 100 parts,
the total shrinkage is 30 per cent.
Expressed in terms of the cement, the
concrete would have a composition of 1
part cement, 3 parts sand, 7 parts gravel
and broken stone, and it would form,
approximately, what is commonly known
as 7 to 1 concrete.
There are other ratios depending on
the proportion of sand. Thus we have:
Cement
1
1
1
1
Sand
Aggregate
5
6
7
7i
8J
The cost of concrete may be materially
reduced without affecting the strength or
efficacy of the work, by a plentiful use of
stone "plums" or "burrs." These are
bedded in the fluid concrete during its
deposition in situ, but care must be taken
to see that they are thoroughly sur-
rounded by mortar and not in contact
with each other. Furthermore, if they
are of a porous nature, they should be
well wetted before use.
The mixing of concrete is important.
If done by hand, the materials forming
the aggregate will be laid out on a plat-
form and covered by the cement in a thin
layer. The whole should be turned over
thrice in the dry state, and as many
times wet, before depositing, in order to
bring about thorough and complete
amalgamation. Once mixed, the con-
crete is to be deposited immediately and
allowed to remain undisturbed until the
action of setting is finished. Deposition
should be effected, wherever possible,
without tipping from a height of more
than about 6 feet, as in greater falls there
is a likelihood of the heavier portions of
the aggregate separating from the lighter.
In extensive undertakings, concrete is
more economically mixed by mechanical
appliances.
The water used for mixing may be
either salt or fresh, so far as the strength
of the concrete is concerned. For surface
work above the ground level, salinity in
any of the ingredients is objectionable,
since it tends to produce efflorescence —
an unsightly, floury deposit, difficult to
get rid of. The quantity of water re-
quired cannot be stated with exactitude;
it will depend upon the proportion of the
aggregate and its porosity. It is best
determined by experiment in each par-
ticular case. Without being profuse
enough to "drown" the concrete, it
should be plentiful enough to act as an
efficient intermediary between every
particle of the aggregate and every
particle of the matrix. Insufficient
moisture is, in fact, as deleterious as an
excess.
Voids. — The strength of concrete de-
pends greatly upon its density, and this is
secured by using coarse material which
contains the smallest amount of voids or
empty spaces. Different kinds of sand,
STONE
691
gravel, and stone vary greatly in the
amount of voids they contain, and by
judiciously mixing coarse and fine
material the voids may be much reduced
and the density increased. The density
and percentage of voids in concrete ma-
terial may be determined by filling a box
of 1 cubic foot capacity and weighing it.
One cubic foot of solid quartz or lime-
stone, entirely free from voids, would
weigh 165 pounds, and the amount by
which a cubic foot of any loose material
falls short of this weight represents the
proportion of voids contained in it.
For example, if a cubic foot of sand
weighs 115 1 pounds, the voids would be
49J-165ths of the total volume, or 30
per cent.
The following table gives the per cent
of voids and weight per cubic foot of
some common concrete materials:
Per
Cent Wt. per
Voids Cu. Ft.
Sandusky Bay sand. 32. 3 111.7 pounds
Same through 20-
mesh screen 38.5 101.5 pounds
Gravel, £ to J inch. ...42.4 95.0 pounds
Broken limestone,
egg-size 47.0 87.4 pounds
Limestone screen-
ings, dust to J
inch 26.0 122.2 pounds
It will be noted that screening the
sand through a 20-mesh sieve, and thus
taking out the coarse grains, consider-
ably increased the voids and reduced the
weight; thus decidedly injuring the sand
for making concrete.
The following figures show how weight
can be increased and voids reduced by
mixing fine and coarse material:
Per
Cent Wt. per
Voids Cu. Ft.
Pebbles, about 1
inch 38.7 101.2 pounds
Sand, 30 to 40 mesh . 35.9 105.8 pounds
Pebbles plus 38.7 per
cent sand, by vol. . 19.2 133.5 pounds
Experiments have shown that the
strength of concrete increases greatly
with its density; in fact, a slight increase
in weight per cubic foot adds very de-
cidedly to the strength.
The gain in strength obtained by
adding coarse material to mixtures of
cement and sand is shown in the fol-
lowing table of results of experiments
made in Germany by R. Dykerhoff. The
blocks tested were 2£-inch cubes, 1 day
in air and 27 days in water,
Per
Com-
Proportions by Measure.
Cent.
Cement.
pression
Strength.
Cement.
Sand.
Gravel.
By
Volume.
Lbs. per
Sq. In.
1
o
33 0
2,125
2
5
12.5
2,387
3
25.0
1,383
3
6J
9.5
1,515
4
20.0
1,053
4
8h
7.4
1,204
These figures show how greatly the
strength is improved by adding coarse
material, even though the proportion of
cement is thereby reduced. A mixture of
1 to 12| of properly proportioned sand
and gravel is, in fact, stronger than 1 to
4, and nearly as strong as 1 to 3, of
cement and sand only.
In selecting materials for concrete,
those should be chosen which give the
greatest density. If it is practicable to
mix two materials, as sand and gravel,
the proportion which gives the greatest
density should be determined by ex-
periment, and rigidly adhered to in
making concrete, whatever proportion of
cement it is decided to use. Well-pro-
portioned dry sand and gravel or sand
and broken stone, well shaken down,
should weigh at least 125 pounds per
cubic foot. Limestone screenings, owing
to minute pores in the stone itself, are
somewhat lighter, though giving equally
strong concrete. They should weigh at
least 120 pounds per cubic foot. If the
weight is less, there is probably too much
fine dust in the mixture.
The density and strength of concrete
are also greatly improved by use of a
liberal amount of water. Enough water
must be used to make the concrete
thoroughly soft and plastic, so as to
quake strongly when rammed. If mixed
too dry it will never harden properly,
and will be light, porous, and crum-
bling.
Thorough mixing of concrete materials
is essential, to increase the density and
give the cement used a chance to produce
its full strength. The cement, sand, and
gravel should be intimately mixed dry,
then the water added and the mixing
continued. If stone or coarse gravel is
added, this should be well wetted and
thoroughly mixed with the mortar.
Materials for Concrete Building Blocks.
— In the making of building blocks the
spaces to be filled with concrete are gen-
erally too narrow to permit the use of
very coarse material, and the block-
692
STONE
maker is limited to gravel or stone not
exceeding \ or f inch in size. A con-
siderable proportion of coarse material is,
however, just as necessary as in other
kinds of concrete work, and gravel cr
screenings should be chosen wnich will
give the greatest possible density. For
good results, at least one-third of the
material, by weight, should be coarser
than | inch. Blocks made from such
gravel or screenings, 1 to 5, will be found
as good as 1 to 3 with sand only. It is
a mistake to suppose that the coarse
fragments will snow on the surface; if
the mixing is thorough this will not be
the case. A moderate degree of rough-
ness or variety in the surface of blocks is,
in fact, desirable, and would go far to
overcome the prejudice which many
architects hold against the smooth, life-
less surface of cement work. Sand and
gravel are, in most cases, the cheapest
material to use for block work. The
presence of a few per cent of clay or
loam is not harmful provided the mixing
is thorough. ^ Stone screenings, if of
good quality, give fully as strong concrete
as sand and gravel, and usually yield
blocks of somewhat lighter color. Screen-
ings from soft stone should be avoided,
also such as contain too much dust.
This can be determined from the weight
per cubic foot, and by a sifting test. If
more than two-thirds pass \ inch, and
the weight (well jarred down) is less than
120 pounds, the material is not the best.
Cinders are sometimes used for block
work; they vary greatly in quality, but if
clean and of medium coarseness will give
fair results. Cinder concrete never de-
velops great strength, owing to the por-
ous character and crushability of the
cinders themselves. Cinder blocks may,
however, be strong enough for many
purposes, and suitable for work in which
great strength is not required.
Lime. — It is well known that slaked
lime is a valuable addition to cement
mortar, especially for use in air. In
sand mixtures, 1 to 4 or 1 to 5, at least
one-third of the cement may be replaced
by slaked lime without loss of strength.
The most convenient form of lime for
use in block-making is the dry-slaked or
hydrate lime, now a common article of
commerce. This is, however, about as
expensive as Portland cement, and there
is no great saving in its use. Added to
block concrete, in the proportion of \ to
\ the cement used, it will be found to
make the blocks lighter in color, denser,
and decidedly less permeable by water.
Cement. — Portland cement is the only
hydraulic material to be seriously con-
sidered by the blockmaker. Natural
and slag cements and hydraulic lime are
useful for work which remains constantly
wet, but greatly inferior in strength and
durability when exposed to dry air. A
further advantage of Portland cement is
the promptness with which it hardens
and develops its full strength; this
quality alone is sufficient to put all other
cements out of consideration for block
work.
Proportions. — There are three im-
portant considerations to be kept in view
in adjusting the proportions of materials
for block concrete — strength, permea-
bility, and cost. So far as strength goes,
it may easily be shown that concretes
very poor in cement, as 1 to 8 or 1 to 10,
will have a crushing resistance far be-
yond any load that they may be called
upon to sustain. Such concretes are,
however, extremely porous, and absorb
water like a sponge. The blocks must
bear a certain amount of rough hand-
ling at the factory and while being carted
to work and set up in the wall. Safety
in this respect calls for a much greater
degree of hardness than would be needed
to bear the weight of the building. Again,
strength and hardness, with a given pro-
portion of cement, depend greatly on the
character of the other materials used;
blocks made of cement and sand, 1 to 3,
will not be so strong or so impermeable
to water as those made from a good mixed
sand and gravel, 1 to 5. On the whole, it
is doubtful whether blocks of satisfactory
quality can be made, by hand mixing
and tamping, under ordinary factory
conditions, from a poorer mixture than
1 to 5. Even this proportion requires for
good results the use of properly graded
sand and gravel or screenings, a liberal
amount of water, and thorough mixing
and tamping. When suitable gravel is
not obtainable, and coarse mixed sand
only is used, the proportion should not be
less than 1 to 4. Fine sand alone is a
very bad material, and good blocks can-
not be made from it except by the use of
an amount of cement which would make
the cost very high.
The mixtures above recommended, 1 to
4 and 1 to 5, will necessarily be some-
what porous, and may be decidedly so if the
gravel or screenings used is not properly
graded. The water-resisting qua.ities
may be greatly improved, without loss of
strength, by replacing a part of the
cement by hydrate lime. This is a light,
extremely fine material, and a given
weight of it goes much further than the
STONE
693
same amount of cement in filling the
pores of the concrete. It has also the
effect of making the wet mixture more
plastic and more easily compacted by
ramming, and gives the finished blocks
a lighter color.
The following mixtures, then, are to
be recommended for concrete blocks.
By "gravel" is meant a suitable mix-
ture of sand and gravel, or stone screen-
ings, containing grains of all sizes, from
fine to \ inch.
1 to 4 Mixtures, by Weight.
Cement, 150 parts; gravel, 600 parts.
Cement, 125 parts; hydrated lime, 25
parts; gravel, 600 parts.
Cement, 100 parts; hydrated lime, 50
parts; gravel, 600 parts.
1 to 5 Mixtures, by Weight.
Cement, 120 parts; gravel, 600 parts.
Cement, 100 parts; hydrated lime, 20
parts; gravel, 600 parts.
Proportion of Water. — This is a
matter of the utmost consequence, and
has more effect on the quality of the work
than is generally supposed. Blocks
made from too dry concrete will always
remain soft and weak, no matter how
thoroughly sprinkled afterwards. On
the other hand, if blocks are to be re-
moved from the machine as soon as
made, too much water will cause them
to stick to the plates and sag out of
shape. It is perfectly possible, how-
ever, to give the concrete enough water
for maximum density and first-class
hardening properties, and still to remove
the blocks at once from the mold. A
good proportion of coarse material
allows the mixture to be made wetter
without sticking or sagging. Use of
plenty of water vastly improves the
strength, hardness, and waterproof qual-
ities of blocks, and makes them decid-
edly lighter in color. The rule should
be:
Use as much water as possible with-
out causing the blocks to stick to the
plates or to sag out of shape on removing
from the machine.
The amount of water required to pro-
duce this result varies with the materials
used, but is generally from 8 to 9 per cent
of the weight of the dry mixture. A prac-
ticed blockmaker can judge closely when
the right amount of water has been added,
by squeezing some of the mixture in the
hand. Very slight variations in propor-
tion of water make such a marked differ-
ence in the quality and color of the blocks
that the water, when the proper quantity
for the materials used has been deter-
mined, should always be accurately meas-
ured out for each batch. In this way
much time is saved and uncertainty
avoided.
Facing. — Some blockmakers put on
a facing of richer and finer mixture,
making the body of the block of poorer
and coarser material. As will be ex-
plained later, the advantage of the prac-
tice is, in most cases, questionable, but
facings may serve a good purpose in case
a colored or specially waterproof surface
is required. Facings are generally made
of cement and sand, or fine screenings,
passing a J-inch sieve. To get the same
hardness and strength as a 1 to 5 gravel
mixture, at least as rich a facing as 1 to
3 will be found necessary. Probably
1 to 2 will be found better, and if one-
third the cement be replaced by hydrate
lime the waterproof qualities and ap-
pearance of the blocks will be improved.
A richer facing than 1 to 2 is liable to
show greater shrinkage than the body of
the block, and to adhere imperfectly or
develop hair-cracks in consequence.
Poured Work. — The above sugges-
tions on the question of proportions of
cement, sand, and gravel for tamped
blocks apply equally to concrete made
very wet, poured into the mold, and
allowed to harden a day or longer before
removing. Castings in a sand mold are
made by the use of very liquid concrete;
sand and gravel settle out too rapidly
from such thin mixtures, and rather fine
limestone screenings are generally used.
Mixing.— To get the full benefit of the
cement used it is necessary that all the
materials shall be very thoroughly mixed
together. The strength of the block as
a whole will be only as great as that of
its weakest part, and it is the height
of folly, after putting a liberal measure
of cement, to so slight the mixing as to
get no better result than half as much ce-
ment, properly mixed, would have given.
The poor, shoddy, and crumbly blocks
turned put by many small-scale makers
owe their faults chiefly to careless mixing
and use of too little water, rather than to
too small proportion of cement.
The materials should be mixed dry,
until the cement is uniformly distributed
and perfectly mingled with the sand and
gravel or screenings; then the water is
to be added and the mixing continued
until all parts of the mass are equally
moist and every particle is coated with
the cement paste.
Concrete Mixers. — Hand mixing is
always imperfect, laborious, and slow.
694
STONE
and it is impossible by this method to
secure the thorough stirring and knead-
ing action which a good mixing machine
gives. If a machine taking 5 or 10
horse-power requires 5 minutes to mix
one-third of a yard of concrete, it is of
course absurd to expect that two men will
do the same work by hand in the same
time. And the machine never gets tired
or shirks if not constantly urged, as it is
the nature of men to do. It is hard to
see how the manufacture of concrete
blocks can be successfully carried on
without a concrete mixer. Even for a
small business it will pay well in economy
of labor and excellence of work to install
such a machine, which may be driven by
a small electric motor or gasoline engine.
In work necessarily so exact as this,
requiring perfectly uniform mixtures
and use of a constant percentage of
water, batch mixers, which take a meas-
ured quantity of material, mix it, and
discharge it, at each operation, are the
only satisfactory type, and continuous
mixers are unsuitable. Those of the
pug-mill type, consisting of an open
trough with revolving paddles and bot-
tom discharge, are positive and thorough
in their action, and permit the whole
operation to be watched and controlled.
They should be provided with exten-
sible arms of chilled iron, which can be
lengthened as the ends become worn.
Concrete Block Systems. — For smaller
and less costly buildings, separate blocks,
made at the factory and built up into the
walls in the same manner as brick or
blocks of stone, are simpler, less ex-
pensive, and much more rapid in con-
struction than monolithic work. They
also avoid some of the faults to which
solid concrete work, unless skillfully
done, is subject, such as the formation of
shrinkage cracks.
There are two systems of block mak-
ing, differing in the consistency of the
concrete used:
1. Blocks tamped or pressed from
semi-wet concrete, and removed at once
from the mold.
2. Blocks poured or tamped from wet
concrete, and allowed to remain in the
mold until hardened.
Tamped Blocks from Semi-Wet Mix-
ture.— These are practically always
made on a block machine, so arranged
that as soon as a block is formed the
cores and side plates are removed and
the block lifted from the machine. By
far the larger part of the blocks on the
market are made in this way. Usually
these are of the one-piece type, in which a
single block, provided with hollow cores,
makes the whole thickness of the wall.
Another plan is the two-piece system, in
which the face and back of the wall are
made up of different blocks, so lapping
over each other as to give a bond and
hold the wall together. Blocks of the
two-piece type are generally formed in a
hand or hydraulic press.
Various shapes and sizes of blocks are
commonly made; the builders of the
most popular machines have, however,
adopted the standard length of 32 inches
and height of 9 inches for the full-sized
block, with thickness of 8, 10, and 12
inches. Lengths of 24, 16, and 8 inches
are also obtained on the same machines
by the use of parting plates and suitably
divided face plates; any intermediate
lengths and any desired heights may
be produced by simple adjustments or
blocking off.
Blocks are commonly made plain,
rock-faced, tool-faced, paneled, and of
various ornamental patterns. New de-
signs of face plates are constantly being
added by the most progressive machine
makers.
Block Machines. — There are many
good machines on the market, most of
which are of the same general type, and
differ only in mechanical details. They
may be divided into two classes: those
with vertical and those with horizontal
face. In the former the face plate
stands vertically, and the block is simply
lifted from the machine on its base plate
as soon as tamped. In the other type
the face plate forms the bottom of the
mold; the cores are withdrawn horizon-
tally, and by the motion of a lever the
block with its face plate is tipped up into
a vertical position for removal. In case
it is desired to put a facing on the blocks,
machines of the horizontal-face type are
considered the more convenient, though
a facing may easily be put on with the
vertical-face machine by the use of a
parting plate.
Blocks Poured from Wet Concrete.
— As already stated, concrete made too
dry is practically worthless, and an ex-
cess of water is better than a deficiency.
The above-described machine process,
in which blocks are tamped from damp
concrete and at once removed, gives
blocks of admirable hardness and quality
if the maximum of water is used. A
method of making blocks from very wet
concrete, by the use of a large number
of separable molds of sheet steel, into
which the wet concrete is poured and in
which the blocks are left to harden for 24
STONE
695
hours or longer, has come into consider-
able use. By this method blocks of
excellent hardening and resistance to
water are certainly obtained. Whether
the process is the equal of the ordinary
machine method in respect of economy
and beauty of product must be left to
the decision of those who have had actual
experience with it.
The well-known cast-stone process
consists in pouring liquid concrete mix-
ture into a sand mold made from a
pattern in a manner similar to that in
which molds for iron castings are pro-
duced. The sand absorbs the surplus
water from the liquid mixture, and the
casting is left in the mold for 24 hours
or longer until thoroughly set. This
process necessitates the making of a new
sand mold for every casting, and is neces-
sarily much less rapid than the machine
method. It is less extensively used for
building blocks than for special orna-
mental architectural work, sills, lintels,
columns, capitals, etc., and for purposes
of this kind it turns out products of the
highest quality and beauty.
Tamping of Concrete Blocks. — This
is generally done by means of hand
rammers. Pneumatic tampers, operat-
ed by an air compressor, are in use at a
few plants, apparently with considerable
saving in time and labor and improve-
ments in quality of work. Hand tamping
must be conscientious and thorough, or
poor work will result. It is important
that the mold should be filled a little at
a time, tamping after each addition; at
least four fillings and tampings should be
given to each block. If the mixture is
wet enough no noticeable layers will be
formed by this process.
Hardening and Storage. — Triple-
decked cars to receive the blocks from
the machines will be found a great sav-
ing of labor, and are essential in factories
of considerable size. Blocks will gener-
ally require to be left on the plates for at
least 24 hours, and must then be kept
under roof, in a well-warmed room, with
frequent sprinkling, for not less than 5
days more. They may then be piled up
out of doors, and in dry weather should
be wetted daily with a hose. Alternate
wetting and drying is especially favor-
able for the hardening of cement, and
concrete so treated gains much greater
strength than if kept continuously in
water or dry air.
Blocks should not be used in building
until at least 4 weeks from the time they
are made. During this period of sea-
soning, blocks will be found to shrink at
least -,\ inch in length, and if built up in
a wall when freshly made, shrinkage
cracks in the joints or across the blocks
will surely appear.
Efflorescence, or the appearance of a
white coating on the surfaces, sometimes
takes place when blocks are repeatedly
saturated with water and then dried out;
blocks laid on the ground are more liable
to show this defect. It results from
diffusion of soluble sulphates of lime and
alkalies to the surface. It tends to dis-
appear in time, and rarely is sufficient in
amount to cause any complaint.
Properties of Concrete Blocks —
Strength. — In the use of concrete blocks
for the walls of buildings, the stress to
which they are subjected is almost en-
tirely one of compression. In compres-
sive strength well-made concrete does
not differ greatly from ordinary building
stone. It is difficult to find reliable
records of tests of sand and gravel con-
crete, 1 to 4 and 1 to 5, such as is used in
making blocks; the following figures
show strength of concrete of approxi-
mately this richness, also the average
of several samples each of well-known
building stones, as stated by the author-
ities named:
Limestone, Bedford, Ind.
(Indiana Geographical
Survey) 7,792 pounds
Limestone, Marblehead,
Ohio (Q. A. Gillmore)
7,393 pounds
Sandstone, N. Amherst,
Ohio (Q. A. Gill-
more) 5,831 pounds
Gravel concrete, 1:1.6-
:2.8, at 1 year (Cand-
lot) 5,500 pounds
Gravel concrete, 1:1.6-
:3.7, at 1 year (Cand-
lot) 5,050 pounds
Stone concrete, 1:2:4 at
1 year (Boston El.
R. R.) 3,904 pounds
Actual tests of compression strength
of hollow concrete blocks are difficult to
make, because it is almost impossible to
apply the load uniformly over the whole
surface, and also because a block 16
inches long and 8 inches wide will bear
a load of 150,000 to 200,000 pounds, or
more than the capacity of any but the
largest testing machines. Three one-
quarter blocks, 8 inches long, 8 inches
wide, and 9 inches high, with hollow
space equal to one-third of the surface,
tested at the Case School of Science,
showed strengths of 1,805, 2,000, and.
696
STONE
1,530 pounds per square inch, respec-
tively, when 10 weeks old.
Two blocks 6X8X9 inches, 22 months
old, showed crushing strength of 2,530
and .2.610 pounds per square inch.
These blocks were made of cement 1J
parts, lime £ part, sand and gravel 6 parts,
and were tamped from damp mixture.
It is probably safe to assume that the
minimum crushing strength of well-made
blocks, 1 to 5, is 1,000 pounds per square
inch at 1 month and 2,000 pounds at 1
year.
A block 12 inches wide and 24 inches
long has a total surface of 288 square
inches, or, deducting ^ for openings, a
net area of 192 inches. Such a block,
9 inches high, weighs 130 pounds. As-
suming a strength of 1,000 pounds and a
factor of safety of 5, the safe load would
be 200 pounds per square inch, or 200 X
192 = 38,400 pounds for the whole
surface of the block. Dividing this by
the weight of the block, 130 pounds, we
find that 295 such blocks could be placed
one upon another, making a total height
of wall of 222 feet, and still the pressure
on the lowest block would be less than
one-fifth of what it would actually bear.
This shows how greatly the strength of
concrete blocks exceeds any demands
that are ever made upon it in ordinary
building construction.
The safe load above assumed, 200
pounds, seems low enough to guard
against any possible failure. In Taylor
and Thompson's work on concrete, a
safe load of 450 pounds for concrete 1 to
2 to 4 is recommended; this allows a
factor of safety of 5$. On the other
hand, the Building Code of the city of
Cleveland permits concrete to be loaded
only to 15G pounds per square inch, and
limits the height of walls of 12-inch
blocks to 44 feet. The pressure of such
a wall would be only 40 pounds per
square inch; adding the weight of two
floors at 25 pounds per square foot each,
and roof with snow and wind pressure,
40 pounds per square foot, we find that
witn a span of 25 feet the total weight
on the lowest blocks would be only 52
pounds per square inch, or about one-
twentieth of their minimum compression
strength.
Blocks with openings equal to only
one-third the surface, as required in
many city regulations, are heavy to
handle, especially for walls 12 inches
and more in thickness, and, as the above
figures show, are enormously stronger
than there is any need of. Blocks with
openings of 50 per cent would be far
more acceptable to the building trade,
and if used in walls not over 44 feet high,
with floors and roof calculated as above
for 25 feet span, would be loaded only to
56 pounds per square inch of actual
surface. This would give a factor of
safety of 18, assuming a minimum com-
pression strength of 1,000 pounds.
There is no doubt that blocks with
one-third opening are inconveniently
and unnecessarily neavy. Such a block,
32 inches long, 12 inches wide, and 9
inches high, has walls about 3$ inches
thick, and weighs 180 pounds. A
block with 50 per cent open space would
have walls and partitions 2 inches in
thickness, and would weigh about 130
pounds. With proper care in manu-
facture, especially by using as much water
as possible, blocks with this thickness of
walls may be made thoroughly strong,
sound, and durable. It is certainly
better for strength and water-resisting
qualities to make thin-walled blocks of
rich mixture, rather than heavy blocks of
poor and porous material.
Filling the voids with cement is a
rather expensive method of securing
waterproof qualities, and gives stronger
concretes than are needed. The same
may be accomplished more cheaply by
replacing part of the cement by slaked
lime, which is an extremely fine-grained
material, and therefore very effective
in closing pores. Hydrate lime is the
most convenient material to use, but
nearly as costly as Portland cement at
present prices. A 1 to 4 mixture in
which one-third the cement is replaced
by hydrate lime will be found equal to a
1 to 3 mixture without the lime. A
1 to 4 concrete made from cement, 1;
hydrate lime, i; sand and gravel, 6 (by
weight), will be found fairly water-tight,
and much superior in this respect to one
of the same richness consisting of cement,
1J; sand and gravel, 6.
The cost of lime may be greatly re-
duced by using ordinary lump lime
slaked to a paste. The lime must, how-
ever, be very thoroughly hydrated, so
that no unslaked fragments may remain
to make trouble by subsequent expan-
sion. Lime paste is also very difficult to
mix, and can be used successfully only in
a concrete mixer of the pug-mill type.
Ordinary stiff lime paste contains about
50 per cent water; twice as much of it, by
weight, should therefore be used as of
dry hydrate lime.
Waterproof Qualities. — The chief fault
of concrete building blocks, as ordinarily
made, is their tendency to absorb water.
In this respect they are generally no
STONE
697
worse than sandstone or common brick;
it is well known that stone or brick walls
are too permeable to allow plastering di-
rectly on the inside surface, and must be
furred and lathed before plastering, to
avoid dampness. This practice is gen-
erally followed with concrete blocks, but
their use and popularity would be greatly
increased if they were made sufficiently
waterproof to allow plastering directly
on the inside surface.
For this purpose it is not necessary
that blocks should be perfectly water-
proof, but only that the absorption of
water shall be slow, so that it may pene-
trate only part way through the wall
during a long-continued rain. Walls
made entirely water-tight are, in fact,
objectionable, owing to their tendency to
"sweat" from condensation of moisture
on the inside surface. For health and
comfort, walls must be slightly porous,
so that any moisture formed on the in-
side may be gradually absorbed and
carried away.
Excessive water absorption may be
avoided in the following ways:
1. Use of Properly Graded Materials.
— It has been shown by Feret and others
that porosity and permeability are two
different things; porosity is the total
proportion of voids or open spaces in the
mass, while permeability is the rate at
which water, under a given pressure, will
pass through it. Permeability depends
on the size of the openings as well as on
their total amount. In two masses of the
same porosity or percentage of voids,
one consisting of coarse and the other of
fine particles, the permeability will be
greater in the case of the coarse material.
The least permeability, and also the
least porosity, are, however, obtained by
use of a suitable mixture of coarse and
fine particles. Properly graded gravel or
screenings, containing plenty of coarse
fragments and also enough fine material
to fill up the pores, will be found to give
a much less permeable concrete than fine
or coarse sand used alone.
2. Use of Rich Mixtures. — All con-
cretes are somewhat permeable by water
under sufficient pressure. Mixtures rich
in cement are of course much less
permeable than poorer mixtures. If the
amount of cement used is more than
sufficient to fill the voids in the sand and
gravel, a very dense concrete is obtained,
into which the penetration of water is
extremely slow. The permeability also
decreases considerably with age, owing
to the gradual crystallization of the
cement in the pores, so that concrete
which is at first quite absorbent may be-
come practically impermeable after ex-
posure to weather for a few weeks or
months. There appears to be a very
decided increase in permeability when
the cement is reduced below the amount
necessary to fill the voids. For example,
a well-mixed sand and gravel weighing
123 pounds per cubic foot, and therefore
containing 25 per cent voids, will give a
fairly impermeable concrete in mixtures
up to 1 to 4, but with less cement will be
found quite absorbent. A gravel with
only 20 per cent voids would give about
equally good results with a 1 to 5 mix-
ture; such gravel is, however, rarely met
with in practice. On the other hand,
the best sand, mixed fine and coarse,
seldom contains less than 33 per cent
voids, and concrete made from such
material will prove permeable if poorer
than 1 to 3.
3. Use of a Facing. — Penetration of
water may be effectively prevented by
giving the blocks a facing of richer
mixture than the body. For the sake of
smooth appearance, facings are generally
made of cement and fine sand, and it is
often noticed that these do not harden
well. It should be remembered that a
1 to 3 sand mixture is no stronger and
little if any better in water absorption
than a 1 to 5 mixture of well-graded sand
and gravel. To secure good hardness
and resistance to moisture a facing as
rich as 1 to 2 should be used.
4. Use of an Impervious Partition. —
When blocks are made on a horizontal-
face machine, it is a simple matter, after
the face is tamped and cores pushed into
place, to throw into each opening a small
amount of rich and rather wet mortar,
spread this fairly evenly, and then go on
tamping in the ordinary mixture until
the mold is filled. A dense layer across
each of the cross walls is thus obtained,
which effectually prevents moisture from
passing beyond it. A method of ac-
complishing the same result with vertical-
face machines, by inserting tapered
wooden blocks in the middle of the cross
walls, withdrawing these blocks after
tamping, and filling the spaces with rich
mortar, has been patented. In the two-
piece system the penetration of moisture
through the wall is prevented by leaving
an empty space between the web of the
block and the inside face, or by filling
this space with rich mortar.
5. Use of Waterproof Compounds. —
There are compounds on the market,
of a fatty or waxy nature, which, when
mixed with cement to the amount of
698
STONE
only 1 or 2 per Cent of its weight, in-
crease its water-resisting qualities in a
remarkable degree. By thoroughly mix-
ing 1 to 2 pounds of suitable compound
with each sack of cement used, blocks
which are practically waterproof may be
made, at very small additional cost,
from 1 to 4 or 1 to 5 mixtures. In
purchasing waterproof compound, how-
ever, care should be taken to select such
as has been proved to be permanent in
its effect, and some of the materials used
for this purpose lose their effect after a
few days' exposure to weather, and are
entirely worthless.
6. Application to Surface after Erect-
ing.— Various washes, to make concrete
and stone impervious to water, have
been used with some success. Among
these the best known is the Sylvester
wash of alum and soap solution. It is
stated that this requires frequent re-
newal, and it is hardly likely to prove of
any value in the concrete industry. The
writer's experience has been that the
most effective remedy, in case a concrete
building proves damp, is to give the out-
side walls a very thin wash of cement
suspended in water. One or two coats
will be found sufficient. If too thick
a coating is formed it will show hair
cracks. The effect of the cement wash
is to make the walls appear lighter in
color, and if the coating is thin the ap-
pearance is in no way injured.
General Hints on Waterproof Quali-
ties.— To obtain good water-resisting
properties the first precaution is to
make the concrete sufficiently wet. Dry-
tamped backs, even from rich mixture,
will always be porous and absorbent,
while the same mixture in plastic con-
dition will give blocks which are dense,
strong, and water-tight. The difference
in this respect is shown by the following
tests of small concrete blocks, made by
the writer. The concrete used was made
of 1 part cement and 5 parts mixed fine
and coarse sand, by weight.
No. 1. With 8 per cent water, rather
dryer than ordinary block concrete,
tamped in mold.
No. 2. With 10 per cent % water,
tamped in the mold, ana the mold removed
at once.
No. 3. With 25 per cent water,
poured into a mold resting on a flat
surface of dry sand; after 1 hour the sur-
face was troweled smooth; mold not
removed until set.
These blocks were allowed to harden a
week in moist air, then dried. The
weights, voids, and water absorption
were as follows:
123
Damp- Wet- pourpfi
tamped tamped ^(
Weight, per cubic
foot, pounds 122.2 123.9 110.0
Voids, calculated,
per cent of volume 25.9 24.9 33.3
Water required to
fill voids, per cent
of weight 9.8 9.4 12.5
Water absorbed, af-
ter 2 hours, per
cent of weight ... 8.8 6.4 10.5
The rate at which these blocks ab-
sorbed water was then determined by
drying them thoroughly, then placing
them in a tray containing water | inch
in depth, and weighing them at intervals.
123
Damp- Wet- Poured
tamped tamped
i hour 2.0 0.9 1.8
1 hour 3.2 1.1 2.5
2 hours 4.1 1.6 3.2
4 hours 5.2 2.0 3.8
24 hours 6.1 3.4 7.0
48 hours 6.4 4.3 7.5
These figures show that concrete
which is sufficiently wet to be thoroughly
plastic absorbs water much more slow-
ly than dryer concrete, and prove the
importance of using as much water as
possible in the damp-tamping process.
Cost. — Concrete blocks can be sold
and laid up at a good profit at 25 cents
per cubic foot of wall. Common red
brick costs (at this writing) generally
about $12 per thousand, laid. At 24 to
the cubic foot, a thousand brick are
equal to 41.7 cubic foot of wall; or,
$12, 29 cents per cubic foot. Brick walls
with pressed brick facing cost from 40
cents to 50 cents per cubic foot, and
dressed stone from $1 to $1.50 per foot.
The factory cost of concrete blocks
varies according to the cost of materials.
Let us assume cement to be $1.50 per
barrel of 380 pounds, and sand and gravel
25 cents per ton. With a 1 to 4 mixture,
1 barrel cement will make 1,900 pounds
of solid concrete, or at 130 pounds per
cubic foot, 14.6 cubic feet. The cost of
materials will then be:
Cement, 380 pounds $1.50
Sand and gravel, 1,500 pounds. . . 0.19
Total $1.69
or 11.5 cents per cubic foot solid con-
crete. Now, blocks 9 inches high and
32 inches long make 2 square feet of
face of wall, each. Blocks of this height
STONE
699
and length, 8 inches thick, make 1$ cubic
feet of wall; and blocks 12 inches thick
make 2 cubic feet of wall. From these
figures we may calculate the cost of
materials for these blocks, with cores or
openings equal to 3 or | the total volume,
as follows:
Per cubic foot of block, ^ open-
ing ....................... 7.7 cts.
Per cubic foot of block, | open-
ing ...................... 5.8 cts.
Block 8 x 9 x 32 inches, ^ open-
ing ....................... 10.3 cts.
Block 8 x 9 x 32 inches, $ open-
ing ....................... 7.7 cts.
Block 12 x 9 x 32 inches, ^
opening .................. 15.4 cts.
Block 12 x 9 x 32 inches, $
opening .................. 11.6 cts.
If one-third of the cement is replaced
by hydrate lime the quality of the blocks
will be improved, and the cost of
material reduced about 10 per cent.
The cost of labor required in manufac-
turing, handling, and delivering blocks
will vary with the locality and the size
and equipment of factory. With hand
mixing, 3 men at an average of $1.75 each
will easily make 75 8-inch or- 50 12-inch
blocks, with £ openings, per day. The
labor cost for these sizes of blocks will
therefore be 7 cents and 10^ cents
respectively. At a factory equipped with
power concrete mixer and cars for trans-
porting blocks, in which a number of
machines are kept busy, the labor cost
will be considerably less. An extensive
industry located in a large city is, how-
ever, subject to many expenses which
are avoided in a small country plant,
such as high wages, management, office
rent, advertising, etc., so that the total
cost of production is likely to be about
the same in both cases. A fair estimate
of total factory cost is as follows:
Material Labor Total
8 x 32 inch, £
space ...... 10.3 7 17.3 cts.
8 x 32 inch,
space
12 x 32 inch,
10.3
7.7
6
13.7 cts.
15.4
10.5 25.9 cts.
9
20.6 cts.
space
12 x 32 inch, \
space ...... 11.6
With fair allowance for outside ex-
penses and profit, 8-inch blocks may be
sold at 30 cents and 12-inch at 40 cents
each. For laying 12-inch blocks in the
wall, contractors generally figure about
10 cents each. Adding 5 cents for
teaming, the blocks will cost 55 cents
each, erected, or 27 \ cents per cubic
foot of wall. This is less than the cost
of common brick, and the above figures
show that this price could be shaded
somewhat, if necessary, to meet com-
petition.— S. B. Newberry in a monograph
issued by the American Association of Port-
land Cement Manufacturers.
Artificial Marbles. — I. — The mass used
by Beaumel consists of alum and heavy
spar (barium sulphate) with addition of
water and the requisite pigments. The
following proportions have been found
to be serviceable: Alum, 1,000 parts;
heavy spar, 10 to 100 parts; water, 100
parts; the amount of heavy spar being
governed by the degree of translucence
desired. The alum is dissolved in water
with the use of heat. As soon as the
solution boils the heavy spar is mixed in,
stirred with water and the pigment; this
is then boiled down until the mixture has
lost about 3 per cent of its weight, at
which moment the mass exhibits a density
of 34° Be. at a temperature of 212° F.
The mixture is allowed to cool with constant
stirring until the substance is semi-liquid.
The resultant mass is poured into a mold
covered on the inside with several layers
of collodion and the cast permitted to
cool completely in the mold, whereupon
it is taken out and dried entirely in an
airy room. Subsequently the object may
be polished, patinized, or finished in some
other way.
II.— Imitation Black Marble. — A
black marble of similar character to
that exported from Belgium — the lat-
ter product being simply prepared slate
— may be produced in the following
manner: The slate suitable for the pur-
pose is first smoothly polished with a
sandstone, so that no visible impression
is made on it with a chisel — this being
rough — after which it is polished finely
with artificial pumice stone, and lastly
finished with extremely light natural
pumice stone, the surface then present-
ing a soft, velvet-like appearance. After
drying and thoroughly heating the finely
polished surface is impregnated with a
neated mixture of oil and fine lampblack.
This is allowed to remain 12 hours; and,
according to whether the slate used is
more or less gray, the process is repeated
until the gray appearance is lost. Pol-
ishing thoroughly with emery on a linen
rag follows, and the finishing polish is done
with tin ashes, to which is added some
lampblack. A finish being made thus,
wax dissolved in turpentine, with some
lampblack, is spread on the polished
plate and warmed again, which after a
while is rubbed off vigorously with a
700
STOPPERS— STOVE POLISH
clean linen rag. Treated thus, the slate
has the appearance of black marble.
STONE CEMENTS:
See Adhesives.
STONE CLEANING:
See Cleaning Preparations and Meth-
ods.
STONES FOR SHARPENING:
See Tool Setting and Whetstones.
STONES (PRECIOUS), IMITATION OF:
See Gems, Artificial.
STONEWARE:
See Ceramics.
STONEWARE CEMENTS:
See Adhesives and Lutes.
STOPPERS.
I. — To make an anti-leak and lubri-
cating mixture for plug-cocks use 2
parts of tried suet and 1 part of beeswax
melted together; stir thoroughly, strain,
and cool.
II. — A mixture for making glass stop-
pers tight is made by melting together
equal parts of glycerine and paraffine.
To Loosen a Glass Stopper. — I. — Make
a mixture of
Alcohol 2 drachms
Glycerine 1 drachm
Sodium chloride 1 drachm
Let a portion of this stand in the space
above the stopper for a few hours, when
a slight tap will loosen the stopper.
II. — A circular adjustable clamp, to
which is attached a strip of asbestos in
which coils of platinum wire are im-
bedded, is obtained. By placing this on
the neck of the bottle, and passing a cur-
rent of electricity through the coils of
wire, sufficient heat will be generated to
expand the neck and liberate the stopper.
Heat may also be generated by passing
a yard of cord once around the bottle
neck and, by taking one end of the cord
in each hand, drawing it rapidly back
and forth. Care should be taken that
the contents of the bottle are not spilled
on the hand or thrown into the face
when the stopper does come out — or
when the bottle breaks.
STOPPER LUBRICANTS:
See Lubricants.
STOVE POLISH:
See also Polishes.
The following formula gives a liquid
stove blacking:
Graphite, in fine pow-
der 1 pound
Lampblack 1 ounce
Rosin 4 ounces
Turpentine 1 gallon
The mixture must be well shaken when
used, and must not be applied when
there is a fire or light near on account of
the inflammability of the vapor.
This form may be esteemed a con-
venience by some, but the rosin and tur-
pentine will, of course, give rise to some
disagreeable odor on first heating the
stove, after the liquid is applied.
Graphite is the foundation ingredient
in many stove polishes; lampblack,
which is sometimes added, as in the fore-
going formula, deepens the color, but
the latter form of carbon is of course
much more readily burned off than the
former. Graphite may be applied by
merely mixing with water, and then no
odor follows the heating of the iron. The
coating must be well rubbed with a brush
to obtain a good luster.
The solid cakes of stove polish found
in the market are made by subjecting
the powdered graphite, mixed with
spirit of turpentine, to great pressure.
They have to be reduced to powder and
mixed with "water before being applied.
Any of them must be well rubbed with
a brush after application to give a hand-
some finish.
STOVE CEMENT:
See Cement.
STOVE CLEANERS:
See Cleaning Compounds.
STOVE LACQUER:
See Lacquers.
STOVE VARNISHES:
See Varnishes.
STRAMONIUM, ANTIDOTE FOR:
See Atropine.
STRAP LUBRICANT:
See Lubricant.
STRAW FIREPROOFING:
See Fireproofing.
STRAWBERRIES, FROZEN:
See Ice Creams.
STRAWBERRY JUICE:
See Essences and Extracts.
STRAW -HAT CLEANERS:
See Cleaning Preparations and Meth*
ods.
STRAW-HAT DYES:
See Hats,
STYPTICS— SYRUPS
701
STROPPING PASTES:
See Razor Pastes.
STYPTICS.
Styptics are substances which arrest
local bleeding. Creosote, tannic acid,
alcohol, alum, and most of the astringent
salts belong to this class.
Brocchieri's Styptic. — A nostrum con-
sisting of the water distilled from pine
tops.
Helvetius's Styptic. — Iron filings (fine)
and cream of tartar mixed to a proper
consistence with French brandy.
Eaton's Styptic. — A solution of sul-
phate disguised by the addition of some
unimportant substances. Helvetius's
styptic was for a long time employed
under this title.
Styptic Paste of Gutta Percha. — Gutta
percha, 1 ounce; Stockholm tar, li or 2
ounces; creosote, 1 drachm; shellac, 1
ounce; or quantity sufficient to render it
sufficiently hard. To be boiled together
with constant stirring, till it forms a ho-
mogeneous mass. For alveolar hemor-
rhage, and as a styptic in toothache. To
be softened by molding with the fingers.
SULPHATE STAINS, TO REMOVE:
See Cleaning Preparations and Meth-
ods.
SULTANA ROLL:
See Ice Creams.
SUNBURN REMEDIES:
See Cosmetics.
SUTURES OF CATGUT, THEIR PREP-
ARATION:
See Catgut.
SYNDETICON:
See Adhesives.
Syrups
(See also Essences and Extracts.)
The syrups should either be made
from the best granulated sugar, free
from ultramarine, or else rock-candy
syrup. If the former, pure distilled
water should be used in making the
syrup, as only in this manner can a syrup
be obtained that will be free from im-
purities and odor. There are two meth-
ods by which syrup can be made, namely,
by the cold process, or by boiling. The
advantage of the former is its con-
venience; of the latter, that it has better
keeping qualities. In the cold process,
the sugar is either stirred up in the water
until it is dissolved, or water is percolated
or filtered through the sugar, thus forming
a solution. In the hot process, the sugar
is simply dissolved in the water by the aid
of heat, stirring until solution is effected.
The strength of the syrup for fountain use
should be about 6 pounds in the gallon
of finished syrup; it is best, however, to
make the stock syrup heavier, as it will
keep much better, using 15 pounds of
granulated sugar, and 1 gallon of water.
When wanted for use it can be diluted
to the proper density with water. The
syrups of the market are of this con-
centrated variety. Unless the apart-
ments of the dispenser are larger than is
usual, it is often best to buy the syrup,
the difference in cost being so small that
when the time is taken into considera-
tion the profit is entirely lost. Foamed
syrups should, however, never be pur-
chased; they are either contaminated
with foreign flavor, or are more prone to
fermentation than plain syrup.
Fruit Syrups. — These may be pre-
pared from fruit juices, and the desired
quantity of syrup, then adding soda
foam, color, and generally a small
amount of fruit- acid solution. They
may also be made by reducing the con-
centrated fruit syrups of the market with
syrup, otherwise proceeding as above.
As the fruit juices and concentrated
syrups always have a tried formula at-
tached, it is needless to use space for this
purpose.
When a flavor is weak it may be forti-
fied by adding a small amount of flav-
oring extract, but under no condition
should a syrup flavored entirely with an
essence be handed out to the consumer
as a fruit syrup, for there is really no
freat resemblance between the two.
'ruit syrups may be dispensed solid by
adding the syrup to the soda water and
stirring with a spoon. Use nothing but
the best ingredients in making syrups.
Preservation of Syrups. — The preser-
vation of syrups is purely a pharma-
ceutical question. Tney must be made
right in order to keep right. Syrups,
particularly fruit syrups, must be kept
aseptic, especially when made without
heat. The containers should be made
of glass, porcelain, or pure block tin, so
that they may be sterilized, and should
be easily and quickly removed, so that
the operation may be effected with
promptness and facility. As is well
known, the operation of sterilization is
702
SYRUPS
very simple, consisting in scalding the
article with boiling water. No syrup
should ever be filled into a container
without first sterilizing the container. The
fruit acids, in the presence of sugar, serve
as a media for the growth and develop-
ment of germ life upon exposure to the
air. Hence the employment of heat as
pasteurization and sterilization in the pre-
serving of fruits, etc.
A pure fruit syrup, filled into a glass
bottle, porcelain jar, or block-tin can,
which has been rendered sterile with
boiling water, maintained at a cool tem-
perature, will keep for any reasonable
length of time. All danger of fracturing
the glass, by pouring water into it, may
be obviated by first wetting the interior
of the bottle with cold water.
The fruits for syrups must not only be
fully ripe, but they must be used imme-
diately after gathering. The fruit must
be freed from stems, seeds, etc., filled into
lightly tied linen sacks, and thus sub-
jected to pressure, to obtain their juices.
Immediately after pressure the juice
should be heated quickly to 167° F., and
filtered through a felt bag. The filtrate
should fall directly upon the sugar neces-
sary to make it a syrup. The heating
serves the purpose of coagulating the al-
buminous bodies present in the juices,
and thus to purify the latter.
Syrups thus prepared have not only a
most agreeable, fresh taste, but are very
stable, remaining in a good condition
for years.
Hints on Preparation of Syrups. —
Keep the extracts in a cool, dark place.
Never add flavoring extracts to hot
syrup. It will cause them to evaporate,
and weaken the flavor. Keep all the
mixing utensils scrupulously clean.
Never mix fruit syrups, nor let them
stand in the same vessels in which sarsa-
parilla, ginger, and similar extract flavors
are mixed and kept. If possible, always
use distilled water in making syrup.
Never allow a syrup containing acid to
come in contact with any metal except
pure block tin. Clean the syrup jars
each time before refilling. Keep all
packages of concentrated syrups and
crushed fruits tightly corked. Mix only a
small quantity of crushed fruit in the bowl
at a time, so as to have it always fresh.
How to Make Simple Syrups — Hot
Process. — Put 25 pounds granulated
sugar in a large pail, or kettle, and pour
on and stir hot water enough to make
4 gallons, more or less depending on how
thick the syrup is desired. Then strain
while hot tnrough fine cheese cloth.
Cold Process. — By agitation. Sugar,
25 pounds; water, 2 gallons. Put the.
sugar in a container, add the water, and
agitate with a wooden paddle until the
sugar is dissolved. An earthenware jar
with a cover and a faucet at the bottom
makes a very convenient container.
Cold Process. — By percolation. A
good, easy way to keep syrup on hand
all the time: Have made a galvanized
iron percolator, 2 feet long, 8 inches
across top, and 4 inches at base, with a
4-inch wire sieve in bottom. Finish the
bottom in shape of a funnel. Put a
syrup faucet in a barrel, and set on a box,
so that the syrup can be drawn into a gallon
measure. Bore a hole in the barrel head,
arid insert the percolator. Fill three-
fourths full of sugar, and fill with water.
As fast as the syrup runs into the barrel
fill the percolator, always putting in plenty
of sugar. By this method 20 to 25 gal-
lons heavy syrup can be made in a day.
Rock-Candy Syrup. — Sugar, 32 pounds;
water, 2 gallons. Put the sugar and
water in a suitable container, set on
stove, and keep stirring until the mixture
boils up once. Strain and allow to cool.
When cool there will be on top a crust,
or film, of crystallized sugar. Strain
again to remove this film, and the prod-
uct will be what is commonly known as
rock-candy syrup. This may be reduced
with .one-fifth of its bulk of water when
wanted for use. %
COLORS FOR SYRUPS:
Caramel. — Place 3 pounds of crushed
sugar in a kettle with 1 pint of water,
and heat. The sugar will at first dis-
solve, but as the water evaporates a
solid mass will be formed. This must
be broken up.
Continue to heat, with constant stir-
ring, until the mass has again become
liquefied. Keep on a slow fire until the
mass becomes very dark; then remove
the kettle from the fire and pour in slowly
3 pints of boiling water. Set the kettle
back on the fire and permit contents to
boil for a short time, then remove, and
cool. Add simple syrup to produce any
required consistency.
Blue. —
I. — Indigo carmine 1 part
Water 20 parts
Indigo carmine may usually be ob-
tained commercially;
H. — Tincture of indigo also makes a
harmless blue.
SYRUPS— TABLES
703
Sap Blue. —
Dark blue 3 parts
Grape sugar 1 part
Water 6 parts
Green. — The addition of indigo-car-
mine solution to any yellow solution will
give various shades of green. Indigo
carmine added to a mixture of tincture
of crocus and glycerine will give a fine
green color. A solution of commercial
chlorophyll yields grass-green shades.
Pink.—
I. — Carmine 1 part
Liquor potasses 6 parts
Rose water to make. . 48 parts
Mix. If the color is too high, dilute
with distilled water until the required tint
is obtained.
II. — Soak red-apple parings in Cali-
fornia brandy. The addition of rose
leaves makes a fine flavoring as well as
coloring agent.
Red.—
Carmine, No. 40 .... 1 part
Strong ammonia
water 4 parts
Distilled water to make 24 parts
Rub up the carmine and ammonia
water and to the solution add the water
under trituration. If, in standing, this
shows a tendency to separate, a drop or
two of water of ammonia will correct
the trouble. This statement should be
put on the label of the bottle as the
volatile ammonia soon escapes even in
glass-stoppered vials. Various shades
of red may be obtained by using fruit
juices, such as black cherry, raspberry,
etc., and also the tinctures of sudbear,
alkanet, red saunders, erythroxylon, etc.
Orange. —
Tincture of red sandal-
wood 1 part
Ethereal tincture of Orlean, q. s.
Add the orlean tincture to the sandal-
wood gradually until the desired tint is
obtained. A red color added to a yellow
one gives an orange color.
Purple. — A mixture of tincture of
indigo, or a solution of indigo carmine,
added to cochineal red gives a fine
purple.
Yellow. — Various shades o.f yellow
may be obtained by the maceration of
saffron or turmeric in alcohol until a
strong tincture is obtained. Dilute with
water until the desired tint is reached.
SYRUP, TABLE:
See Tables.
Tables
ALCOHOL DILUTION.
The following table gives the per-
centage, by weight, of alcohol of 95 per
cent and of distilled water to make 1
liter (about 1 quart), or 1 kilogram (2.2
pounds), of alcohol of various dilutions.
TABLE FOR THE DILUTION OF
ALCOHOL.
1 Liter
^
1 Kilogram
contains
•g
contains
oj o3
£>
8,-rf
C-r
|
0^
§
"O .
#1
G v
|>
•3
||
00
<G*i
'o ^
5
o> ^
35
&
PnJ2
|
uffc:
I
a
0
alfe
PM.Q
Q
02
3
P
Gms.
Gms.
Gms.
Gms.
5
42.87
950.13
0.993
43.17
956.83
3.99
10
85.89
900.11
0.986
87.11
912.89
8.05
15
128.87
852.13
0.981
131.37
868.63
12.14
20
171.83
804.17
0.976
176.06
823.94
16.27
25
214.77
756.23
0.971
221.18
778.82
20.44
30
257.93
707.07
0.965
267.28
732.72
24.70
35
300.74
658.26
0.959
313.60
686.40
28.98
40
343.77
608.23
0.952
361.10
638.90
33.37
45
386.75
557.25
0.944
409.69
590.31
37.86
50
429.65
504.35
0.934
460.01
539.99
42.51
55
472.64
451.36
0.924
511.52
488.48
47.27
60
515.60
398.40
0.914
564.11
435.89
52.13
65
558.61
343.39
0.902
619.30
380.70
57.23
70
601.55
288.45
0.890
675.90
324.10
62.46
75
644.58
232.42
0.877
734.98
265.02
67.92
80
687.57
176.43
0.864
795.80
204.20
73.54
85
730.51
119.49
0.850
859.43
140.57
79.42
90
773.53
0.47
0.834
927.49
72.51
85.71
Capacities of Common Utensils. — For
ordinary measuring purposes a wine-
glass may be said to hold 2 ounces.
A tablespoon, £ ounce.
A dessertspoon, J ounce.
A teaspoon, J ounce, or 1 drachm.
A teacupful of sugar weighs £ pound.
Three tablespoonfuls weign J pound.
Cook's Table. — Two teacupfuls (well
heaped) of coffee and of sugar weigh 1
pound.
Two teacupfuls (level) of granulated
sugar weigh 1 pound.
Two teacupfuls soft butter (well packed)
weigh 1 pound.
One and one-third pints of powdered
sugar weigh 1 pound.
Two tablespoonfuls of powdered sugar
or flour weigh 1 pound.
Four teaspoonfuls are equal to 1 table-
spoon.
Two and one-half teacupfuls (level) of
the best brown sugar weigh 1 pound.
Two and three-fourths teacupfuls (level)
of powdered sugar weigh 1 pound.
One tablespoonful (well heaped) of
granulated or best brown sugar equals 1
ounce.
704
TABLES
One generous pint of liquid, or 1 pint
finely chopped meat, packed solidly,
weighs 1 pound.
Table of Drops. — Used in estimating
the amount of a flavoring extract neces-
sary to flavor a gallon of syrup. Based
on the assumption of 450 drops being
equal to 1 ounce.
One drop of extract to an ounce of
syrup is equal to 2 drachms to a gallon.
Two drops of extract to an ounce of
syrup are equal to 4^ drachms to a gallon.
Three drops of extract to an ounce of
syrup are equal to 64 drachms to a gallon.
Four drops of extract to an ounce of
syrup are equal to 1 ounce and 1 drachm
to a gallon.
Five drops of extract to an ounce of
syrup are equal to 1 ounce and 3J drachms
to a gallon.
Six drops of extract to an ounce of
syrup are equal to 1 ounce and 5^ drachms
to a galloTi.
Seven drops of extract to an ounce of
syrup are equal to 2 ounces to the gallon.
Eight drops of extract to an ounce of
syrup are equal to 2 ounces and 2£ drachms
to a gallon.
Nine drops of extract to an ounce of
syrup are equal to 2 ounces and 4£ drachms
to a gallon.
Ten drops of extract to an ounce of
syrup are equal to 2 ounces and 6| drachms
to a gallon.
Twelve drops of extract to an ounce of
syrup are equal to 3 ounces and 3| drachms
to a gallon.
Fourteen drops of extract to an ounce
of syrup are equal to 4 ounces to a gallon.
Sixteen drops of extract to an ounce
of syrup are equal to 4 ounces and 4£
drachms to a gallon.
Eighteen drops of extract to an ounce
of syrup are equal to 5 ounces and 1
drachm to a gallon.
NOTE. — The estimate 450 drops to the
ounce, while accurate and reliable
enough in this particular relation, must
not be relied upon for very exact purposes,
in which, as has frequently been demon-
strated, the drop varies within a very wide
range, according to the nature of the
liquid, its consistency, specific gravity,
temperature; the size and shape of the
aperture from which it is allowed to
escape, etc.
Fluid Measure. — U. S. Standard, or
Wine Measure. — Sixty minims are equal
to 1 fluidrachm.
Eight fluidrachms are equal to 1 fluid-
ounce.
Sixteen fluidounces are equal to 1 pint.
Two pints are equal to 1 quart.
Four quarts are equal to 1 gallon.
One pint of distilled water weighs
about 1 pound.
Percentage Solutions. — To prepare
the following approximately correct solu-
tions, dissolve the amount of medicament
indicated in sufficient water to make one
imperial pint.
For J-o per cent, or 1 in 5,000 solution,
use If grains of the medicament.
For-/j per cent, or 1 in 2,000 solution,
use 4| grains of the medicament.
For-fV per cent, or 1 in 1,000 solution,
use 8| grains of the medicament.
For I per cent, or 1 in 400 solution,
use 21| grains of the medicament.
For £ per cent, or 1 in 200 solution,
use 43f grains of the medicament.
For 1 per cent, or 1 in 100 solution,
use 87i grains of the medicament.
For 2 per cent, or 1 in 50 solution,
use 175 grains of the medicament.
For 4 per cent, or 1 in 25 solution,
use 350 grains of the medicament.
For 5 per 'cent, or 1 in 20 solution,
use 437£ grains of the medicament.
For 10 per cent, or 1 in 10 solution,
use 875 grains of the medicament.
To make smaller quantities of any
solution, use less water and reduce the
medicament in proportion to the amount
of water employed; thus i imperial pint
of a 1 per cent solution will require 43|
grains of the medicament.
Pressure Table. — This table shows the
amount of commercial sulphuric acid
(HsSOO and sodium bicarbonate neces-
sary to produce a given pressure:
120 Pounds Pressure.
Water, Soda Bicar., Acid Sulph.,
gallons Av. ounces Av. ounces
10 86 50
20 123 71
30 161 93
40 198 118
50 236 138
135 Pounds Pressure.
Water, Soda Bicar., Acid Sulph.,
gallons Av. ounces Av. ounces.
10 96 56
20 134 73
30 171 100
40 209 122
50 246 144
K marble dust be used, reckon at the
rate of 18 ounces hot water for use.
Syrup Table. — The following table shows
the amount of syrup obtained from
1. The addition of pounds of sugar to
1 gallon of water; and the
TABLES-TERRA COTTA SUBSTITUTES
705
2. Amount of sugar in each gallon of
syrup resulting therefrom:
Pounds
of sugar
added to
one gallon
of cold
water.
Quantity of syrup actually
obtained.
Pounds
of sugar
in one
gallon of
syrup.
Gallons.
Pints.
Fluid-
ounces.
1
_
10
.93
2
1
4
1.73
3
1
14
2.43
4
2
3
3.05
5
3
2
3.6
6
3
12
4.09
7
4
6
4.52
8
5
—
4.92
9
5
10
5.28
10
6
4
5.62
11
6
14
5.92
12
1
7
8
6.18
13
2
—
2
6.38
14
2
—
12
6.7
15
2
1
« 6
6.91
TABLE-TOPS, ACID-PROOF:
See Acid- Proofing.
TABLES FOR PHOTOGRAPHERS:
See Photography.
TAFFY:
See Confectionery.
TALCUM POWDER:
See Cosmetics.
TALLOW:
See Fats.
TALMI GOLD:
See Alloys.
TAMPRING:
See Tampring, under Steel.
TAN REMEDY:
See Cosmetics.
TANK:
To Estimate Contents of a Circular
Tank. — The capacity of a circular tank
may be determined by multiplying the
diameter in inches by itself and by .7854
and by the length (or depth) in inches,
which gives the capacity of the tank in
inches, and then dividing by 231, the
number of cubic inches in a United
States gallon.
TANNING:
See Leather.
TAPS, TO REMOVE BROKEN.
First clean the hole by means of a
small squirt gun filled with kerosene.
All broken pieces of the tap can be re-
moved with a pair of tweezers, which
should be as large as possible. Then
insert the tweezers between the hole and
flutes of the tap. By slowly working
back and forth and occasionally blowing
out with kerosene, the broken piece is
easily released.
TAR PAINTS :
See Wood.
TAR-SPOTS ON WOODWORK:
See Paint.
TAR-SULPHUR SOAP:
See Soap.
TAR SYRUP:
See Essences and Extracts.
TATTOO MARKS, REMOVAL OF.
Apply a highly concentrated tannin
solution on the tattooed places and treat
them with the tattooing needle as the
tattooer does. Next vigorously rub the
places with a lunar caustic stick and
allow the silver nitrate to act for some
time, until the tattooed portions have
turned entirely black. Then take oft
by dabbing. At first a silver tannate
forms on the upper layers of the skin,
which dyes the tattooing black; with
slight symptoms of inflammation a scurf
ensues which comes off after 14 to 16
days, leaving behind a reddish scar.
The latter assumes the natural color of
the skin after some time. The process is
said to have given good results.
TAWING:
See Leather.
TEA EXTRACT:
See Essences and Extracts.
TEETH, TO WHITEN DISCOLORED.
Moisten the corner of a linen hand-
kerchief with hydrogen peroxide, and
with it rub the teeth, repeating the rub-
bing occasionally. Use some exceed-
ingly finely pulverized infusorial earth,
or pumice ground to an impalpable
powder, in connection with the hydrogen
peroxide, and the job will be quicker
than with the peroxide alone.
TEMPERING OF STEEL:
See Steel.
TERRA COTTA SUBSTITUTE.
A substance, under this name, designed
to take the place of terra cotta and plaster
of Paris in the manufacture of small orna-
mental objects, consists of
706
THERMOMETERS— TIN
Albumen 10 parts
Magnesium sulphate . 4 parts
Alum 9 parts
Calcium sulphate, cal-
cined 45 parts
Borax , 2 parts
Water 30 parts
The albumen and alum are dissolved
in the water and with the solution so
obtained the other ingredients are made
into a paste. This paste is molded at
once in the usual way and when set the
articles are exposed in an oven to a heat
of 140° F.
TERRA COTTA CLEANING:
See Cleaning Preparations and Meth-
ods.
TEXTILE CLEANING:
See Cleaning Preparations and Meth-
ods and Household Formulas.
Thermometers
Table Showing the Comparison of tve
Readings of Thermometers.
CELSIUS, OR CENTIGRADE (C). REAUMUR (R).
FAHRENHEIT (F).
C.
R.
F.
C.
R.
F.
-30
-24.0
-22.0
23
18.4
73.4
-25
-20.0
-13.0
24
19.2
75.2
-20
-16.0
- 4.0
25
20.0
77.0
-15
-12.0
+ 5.0
26
20.8
78.8
-10
- 8.0
14.0
27
21.6
80.6
- 5
- 4.0
23.0
28
22.4
82.4
- 4
- 3.2
24.8
29
23.2
84.2
- 3
- 2.4
26.6
30
24.0
86.0
- 2
- 1.6
28.4
1 31
24.8
87.8
- 1
- 0.8
30.2
32
25.6
89.6
j 33
26.4
91.4
Freezing point of water.
i 34
27.2
93.2
i 35
28.0
95.0
0
0.0
32.0
! 36
28.8
96.8
1
0.8
33.8
37
29.6
98.6
2
1.6
35.6
38
30.4
100.4
3
2.4
37.4
39
31.2
102.2
4
3.2
39.2
40
32.0
104.0
5
4.0
41.0
41
32.8
105.8
6
4.8
42.8
42
33.6
107.6
7
5.6
44.6
43
34.4
109.4
8
6.4
46.4
44
35.2
111.2
9
7.2
48.2
45
36.0
113.0
10
8.0
50.0
50
40.0
122.0
11
8.8
51.8
55
44.0
131.0
12
9.6
53.6
60
48.0
140.0
13
10.4
55.4
65
52.0
149.0
14
11.2
57.2
70
56.0
158.0
15
12.0
59.0
75
60.0
167.0
16
12.8
60.8
80
64.0
176.0
17
13.6
62.6
85
68.0
185.0
18
14.4
64.4
90
72.0
194.0
19
15.2
66.2
95
76.0
203.0
20
16.0
68.0
100
80.0
212.0
21
16.8
69.8
22
17.6
71.6
Boiling point of water.
Readings on one scale can be changed
into another by the following formulas,
in which t° indicates degrees of temper-
ature:
Re'au. to Fahr.
Re'au to Cent.
Cent, to Fahr.
i°C + 32° = Z0 F
Cent, to Re'au.
Fahr. to Cent.
Fahr. to Rdau.
THREAD :
See also Cordage.
Dressing for Sewing Thread. — For
colored thread: Irish moss, 3 pounds;
gum arabic, 2^- pounds; Japan wax, |
pound; stearine, 185 grams; borax, 95
grams; boil together for | hour.
For white thread: Irish moss, 2 pounds;
tapioca, 1| pounds; spermaceti, f pound;
stearine, 110 grams; borax, 95 grams;
boil tpgether for 20 minutes.
For black thread: Irish moss, 3 pounds;
gum Senegal, 2J pounds; ceresin, 1 pound;
borax, 95 grams; logwood extract, 95 grams;
blue vitriol, 30 grams; boil together for
20 minutes. Soak the Irish moss in each
case overnight in 45 liters of water, then
boil for 1 hour, strain and add the other
ingredients to the resulting solution. It
is of advantage to add the borax to the
Irish moss before the boiling.
THROAT LOZENGES:
See Confectionery.
THYMOL:
See Antiseptics.
TICKS, CATTLE DIP FOR:
See Insecticides.
TIERCES:
See Disinfectants.
TILEMAKERS' NOTES:
See Ceramics.
Tin
Etching Bath for Tin. — The design is
either freely drawn upon the metal with
a needle or a lead pencil, or pricked
into the metal through tracing paper
with a needle. The outlines are filled
with a varnish (wax, colophony, asphalt).
The varnish is rendered fluid with tur-
pentine and applied with a brush. The
article after having dried is laid in a
^ solution of nitric acid for 1^ to 2 hours.
It is then washed and dried with blotting
TIN— TINFOIL
707
paper. The protective coating of as-
phalt is removed by heating. The zinc
oxide in the deeper portions is cleaned
away with a silver soap and brush.
Recovery of Tin and Iron in Tinned-
Plate Clippings. — The process of utiliz-
ing tinned-plate scrap consists essentially
in the removal of the tin. This must be
very completely carried out if the re-
maining iron is to be available for cast-
ing. The removal of the outer layer of
pure tin from the tinned plate is an easy
matter. Beneath this, however, is an-
other crystalline layer consisting of an
alloy of tin and iron, which is more dif-
ficult of treatment. It renders the iron
unavailable for casting, as even 0.2
per cent of tin causes brittleness. Its
removal is best accomplished by elec-
trolysis. If dilute sulphuric acid is used
as an electrolyte, the deposit is spongy
at first, and afterwards, when the acid
has been partly neutralized, crystalline.
After 6 hours the clippings are taken out
and the iron completely dissolved in
dilute sulphuric acid; the residue of tin
is then combined with the tin obtained by
the electrolysis. Green vitriol is there-
fore a by-product in this process.
Gutensohn's process has two objects:
To obtain tin and to render the iron fit
for use. The tin is obtained by treating
the tinned plate repeatedly with hydro-
chloric acid. The tin is then removed
from the solution by means of the electric
current. The tinned plate as the positive
pole is placed in a tank made of some in-
sulating material impervious to the action
of acids, such as slate. A copper plate
forms the cathode. The bichloride of
tin solution, freed from acid, is put round
the carbon cylinder in the Bunsen ele-
ment. Another innovation in this proc-
ess is that the tank with the tinned-
plate clippings is itself turned into an
electric battery with the aid of the tin.
A still better source of electricity is, how-
ever, obtained during the treatment of
the untinned iron which will be de-
scribed presently. The final elimination
of the tin takes place in the clay cup
of the Bunsen elements. Besides the
chloride of tin solution (free from acid),
another tin solution, preferably chromate
of tin, nitrate of tin, or sulphate of tin,
according to the strength of the current
desired, may be used. To render the
iron of the tinned plate serviceable the
acid is drawn off as long as the iron is
covered with a thin layer of an alloy of
iron and tin. The latter makes the iron
unfit for use in rolling mills or for the
precipitation of copper. Fresh hydro-
chloric acid or sulphuric acid is there-
fore poured over the plate to remove the
alloy, after the treatment with the bi-
chloride of tin solution. This acid is
also systematically used in different vats
to the point of approximate saturation.
This solution forms the most suitable
source of electricity, a zinc-iron element
being formed by means of a clay cell and
a zinc cylinder. The electrical force
developed serves to accelerate the solu-
tion in the next tank, which contains
tinned plate, either fresh or treated with
hydrochloric acid. Ferrous oxide, or
spongy metallic iron if the current is
very strong, is liberated in the iron bat-
tery. Both substances are easily oxi-
dized, and form red oxide of iron when
heated. The remaining solution can be
crystallized by evaporation, so that fer-
rous sulphate (green vitriol) or ferric
chloride can be obtained, or it can be
treated to form red oxide of iron.
Tin in Powder Form. — To obtain tin
in powder form the metal is first melted;
next pour it into a box whose sides, etc.,
are coated with powdered chalk. Agitate
the box vigorously and without discon-
tinuing, until the metal is entirely cold.
Now pass this powder through a sieve
and keep in a closed flask. This tin
powder is eligible for various uses and
makes a handsome effect, especially in
bronzing. It can be browned.
TINFOIL:
See also Metal Foil.
By pouring tin from a funnel with a
very long and narrow mouth upon a
linen surface, the latter being tightly
stretched, covered with a mixture of
chalk and white of egg, and placed in a
sloping position, very thin sheets can be
produced, and capable of being easily
transformed into thin foil. Pure tin should
never be used in the preparation of foil
intended for packing tobacco, chocolate,
etc., but an alloy containing 5 to 40 per
cent of lead. Lead has also been recently
plated on both sides with tin by the fol-
lowing method: A lead sheet from 0.64
to .80 inches thick is poured on a casting
table as long as it is hot, a layer of tin
from 0.16 to 0.20 inches in thickness add-
ed, the sheet then turned over and coated
on the other side with tin in the same
manner. The sheet is then stretched
between rollers. Very thin sheet tin can
also be made in the same way as sheet
lead, by cutting up a tin cylinder into
spiral sections. Colored tinfoil is pre
pared by making the foil thoroughly
bright by rubbing with purified chalk
708
TINFOIL— TOOL SETTING
and cotton, then adding a coat of gela-
tin, colored as required, and covering the
whole finally with a transparent spirit var-
nish. In place of this somewhat trouble-
some process, the following much simpler
method has lately been introduced: Ani-
line dyes dissolved in alcohol are applied
on the purified foil, and the coat, when
dry, covered with a very thin layer of a
colorless varnish. This is done by pour-
ing the varnish on the surface and then
inclining the latter so that the varnish
may reach every part and flow off.
TIN, SILVER-PLATING:
See Plating.
TIN VARNISHES:
See Varnishes.
TINNING:
See Plating.
TIRE:
Anti-Leak Rubber Tire. — Pneumatic
tires can be made quite safe from punc-
tures by using a liberal amount of the
following cheap mixture: One pound of
sheet glue dissolved in hot water in the
usual manner, and 3 pints of molasses.
This mixture injected into the tire
through the valve stem, semi-hardens into
an elastic jelly, being, in fact, about the
same as the well-known ink roller com-
position used for the rollers of printing
presses. This treatment will usually be
found to effectually stop leaks in punc-
tured or porous tires.
TIRE CEMENTS:
See Adhesives, under Rubber Cements.
TISSIER'S METAL:
See Alloys.
TITANIUM STEEL:
See Steel.
TODDY, HOT SODA:
See Beverages.
TOILET CREAMS, MILKS, POWDERS,
ETC.:
See Cosmetics.
TOLIDOL DEVELOPER:
See Photography.
TOMATO BOUILLON EXTRACT:
See Condiments.
TOMBACK:
See Jewelers' Formulas.
TONING BATHS:
See Photography.
TONKA EXTRACT:
See Essences and Extracts.
TONKA, ITS DETECTION IN VANILLA
EXTRACTS :
See Vanilla.
TOOL SETTING.
The term "setting" (grinding) is ap-
plied to the operation of giving an edge
to the tools designed for cutting, scrap-
ing, or sawing. Cutting tools are rubbed
either on flat sandstones or on rapidly
turned grindstones. The wear on the
faces of the tools diminishes their thick-
ness and rendeis the cutting angle
sharper. Good edges cannot be ob-
tained except with the aid of the grind-
stone; it is therefore important to select
this instrument with care. It should be
soft, rather than hard, of fine, smooth
grain, perfectly free from seams or
flaws. The last condition is essential,
for it often happens that, under the in-
fluence of the revolving motion, a de-
fective stone suddenly yields to the
centrifugal force, bursts and scatters its
pieces with such violence as to wound
the operator. This accident may also
happen with perfectly formed stones.
On this account artificial stones have
been substituted, more homogeneous and
coherent than the natural ones.
Whatever may be the stone selected, it
ought to be kept constantly moist during
the operation. If not, the tools will
soon get heated and their temper will be
impaired. When a tool has for a certain
time undergone the erosive action of the
stone, the cutting angle becomes too
acute, too thin, and bends over on itself,
constituting what is called "the feather
edge." This condition renders a new
setting necessary, which is usually ef-
fected by bending back the feather edge,
if it is long, and whetting the blade
on a stone called a "setter." There are
several varieties of stones used for this
purpose, though they are mostly com-
posed of calcareous or argilaceous mat-
ter, mixed with a certain proportion of
silica.
The scythestone, of very fine grain,
serves for grinding off the feather edge of
scythes, knives, and other large tools.
The Lorraine stone, of chocolate color
and fine grain, is employed with oil for
carpenters' tools. American carborun-
dum is very erosive. It is used with
water and with oil to obtain a fine edge.
The lancet stone is not inferior to any of
the preceding. As its name indicates,
it is used for sharpening surgical instru-
ments, and only with oil. The Levant
stone (Turkish sandstone) is the best of
all for whetting. It is gray and semi-
transparent; when of inferior quality, it
TOOTHACHE— TRANSPARENCIES
709
is somewhat spotted with red. It is
usually quite soft.
To restore stones and efface the in-
equalities and hollows caused by the
friction of the tools, they are laid flat
on a marble or level stone, spread over
with fine, well-pulverized sandstone, and
rubbed briskly. When tools have a
curved edge, they are subjected to a
composition formed of pulverized stone,
molded into a form convenient for the
concavity or convexity. Tools are also
whetted with slabs of walnut or aspen
wood coated with emery of different
numbers, which produces an excellent
setting.
TOOL LUBRICANT:
See Lubricant.
Toothache
TOOTHACHE GUMS:
See also Pain Killers.
I. — Paraffine 94 grains
Burgundy pitch. . .800 grains
Oil of cloves £ fluidrachm
Creosote £ fluidrachm
Melt the first two ingredients, and,
when nearly cool, add the rest, stirring
well. May be made into small pills or
turned out in form of small cones or
cylinders.
II. — Melt white wax or spermaceti,
2 parts, and when melted add carbolic-
acid crystals, 1 part, and chloral-hydrate
crystals, 2 parts; stir well until dissolved.
While still liquid, immerse thin layers of
carbolized absorbent cotton wool and
allow them to dry. When required for
use a small piece may be snipped off and
slightly warmed, when it can be in-
serted into the hollow tooth, where it
will solidify.
Toothache Remedy. —
Camphor 4 drachms
Chloral hydrate.. 4 drachms
Oil of cloves 2 drachms
Oil of cajeput. ... 2 drachms
Chloroform 12 drachms
Tincture of capsi-
cum 24 drachms
TOOTH CEMENTS:
See Cements.
TOOTH PASTES. POWDERS. SOAPS,
AND WASHES:
See Dentifrices.
TORTOISE-SHELL POLISHES:
See Polishes.
TOOTH STRAIGHTENING:
See Watchmakers' Formulas.
TOUCHSTONE, AQUAFORTIS FOR
THE:
See Aquafortis.
TOY PAINT:
See Paint.
TRACING-CLOTH CLEANERS :
See Cleaning Preparations and Meth-
ods.
TRAGACANTH, MUCILAGE OF:
See Adhesives, under Mucilages.
TRANSPARENCIES:
See also Photography.
A good method of preparing hand-
some London transparencies is as fol-
lows:
White paper is coated with a liquid
whose chief constituent is Iceland moss
strongly boiled down in water to which a
slight quantity of previously dissolved
gelatin is added. In applying the mass,
which should always be kept in a hot
condition, the paper should be covered
uniformly throughout. After it has been
dried well it is smoothed on the coated
side and used for a proof. The trans
parent colors to be used must be ground
in stronger varnish than the opaque ones.
In order to produce a handsome red,
yellow lake and red sienna are used; the
tone of the latter is considerably warmer
than that of the yellow lake. Where the
cost is no consideration, aurosolin may
also be employed. For pale red, madder
lakes should be employed, but for darker
shades, crimson lakes and scarlet cochi-
neal lakes. The vivid geranium lake
gives a magnificent shade, which, how-
ever, is not at all fast in sunlight. The
most translucent blue will always be
Berlin blue. For purple, madder pur-
ple is the most reliable color, but pos-
sesses little gloss. Luminous effects
can be obtained with the assistance
of aniline colors, but these are only of
little permanence in transparencies.
Light, transparent green is hardly avail-
able. Recourse has to be taken to mix-
ing Berlin blue with yellow lake, or red
sienna. Green chromic oxide may be
used if its sober, cool tone has no dis-
turbing influence. Almost all brown
coloring bodies give transparent colors,
but the most useful are madder lakes
and burnt umber. Gray is produced by
mixing purple tone colors with suitable
brown, but a gray color hardly ever oc-
710
TRANSPARENCIES— TRANSFER PROCESSES
curs in transparent prints. Liquid sic-
cative must always be added to the colors,
otherwise the drying will occupy too
much time. After the drying, the prints
are varnished on both sides. For this
purpose, a well-covering, quickly drying,
colorless, not too thick varnish must be
used, which is elastic enough not to
crack nor to break in bending.
Frequently the varnishing of the pla-
cards is done with gelatin. This imparts
to the picture an especially handsome,
luminous luster. After an equal quantity
of alcohol has been added to a readily
flawing solution of gelatin, kept for use
in a zinc vessel, the gelatin solution is
poured on the glass plates destined for
the transparencies. After a quarter of
an hour, take the placard, moisten its
back uniformly, arid lay it upon a gela-
tin film which has meanwhile formed
on the glass plate, where it remains 2 to
3 days. When it is to be removed from
the plate, the edge of the gelatin film
protruding over the edge of the placard
is lifted up with a dull knife, and it is
thus drawn off. A fine, transparent gloss
remains on the placard proper. In order
to render the covering waterproof and
pliable, it is given a coating of collodion,
which does not detract from the trans-
Earence. The glass plates and their
;ames must be cleaned of adhering gela-
tin particles before renewed use.
TRANSFER PROCESSES:
To Transfer Designs. — Designs can be
transferred on painted surfaces, cloth,
leather, velvet, oil cloth, and linen
sharply and in all the details with little
trouble. Take the original design, lay
it on a layer of paper, and trace the lines
of design accurately with a packing
needle, the eye of which is held by a piece
of wood for a handle. It is necessary
to press down well. The design be-
comes visible on the back by an eleva-
tion. When everything has been accu-
rately pressed through, take, e. g., for dark
objects, whiting (formed in pieces), lay
the design face downward on the knee
and pass mildly with the whiting over
the elevations; on every elevation a chalk
line will appear. Then dust off the
superfluous whiting with the fingers, lay
the whiting side on the cloth to hold it
so that it cannot slide, and pass over it
with a soft brush. For light articles
take powdered lead pencil, which is
rubbed on with the finger, or limewood
charcoal. For tracing use oil paint on
cloth and India ink on linen.
To Copy Engravings. — To make a
facsimile of an engraving expose it in
a warm, closed box to the vapor o_
iodine, then place it, inkside downward,
on a smooth, dry sheet of clean white
paper, which has been brushed with
starch water. After the two prepared
surfaces have been in contact for a short
time a facsimile of the engraving will be
reproduced more or less accurately, ac-
cording to the skill of the operator.
To Transfer Engravings. — The best
way to transfer engraving from one
piece to another is to rub transfer wax
into the engraved letters. This wax is
made of beeswax, 3 parts; tallow, 3
parts; Canada balsam, 1 part; olive oil,
1 part. If the wax becomes too hard,
add a few drops of olive oil, and if too
soft, a little more beeswax. Care should
be taken that the wax does not remain
on the surface about the engraving,
otherwise the impression would be blurred.
Then moisten a piece of paper by draw-
ing it over the tongue and lay it on the
engraving. Upon this is laid another
piece of dry paper, and securing both
with the thumb and forefinger of the
left hand, so they will not be moved,
go over the entire surface with a bur-
nisher made of steel or bone, with a
pointed end. This will press the lower
paper into the engraving and cause the
wax to adhere to it. Then the top paper
is removed and the corner of the lower
one gently raised. The whole is then
carefully peeled off, and underneath
will be found a reversed, sharp impres-
sion of the engraving. The edges of the
paper are then cut so it can be fitted in
a position on the other articles similar
to that on the original one. When this
is done lay the paper in the proper posi-
tion and rub the index finger lightly over
it, which will transfer a clear likeness of
the original engraving. If due care is
taken two dozen or more transfers can
be made from a single impression.
TRICKS WITH FIRE:
See Pyrotechnics.
TUBERS, THEIR PRESERVATION:
See Roots.
TUBS: TO RENDER SHRUNKEN
TUBS WATER-TIGHT:
See Casks.
TUNGSTEN STEEL:
See Steel.
TURMERIC IN FOOD:
See Foods.
TURPENTINE STAINS:
See Wood.
TYPEWRITER RIBBONS— VALVES
711
TURTLE (MOCK) EXTRACT:
See Condiments.
TWINE:
See also Thread and Cordage.
Tough twine may be greatly strength-
ened by dissolving plenty of alum in
water and laying the twine in this solu-
tion. After drying, the twine will have
much increased tensile strength.
Typewriter Ribbons
(See also Inks.)
The constituents of an ink for type-
writer ribbons may be broadly divided
into four elements: 1, the pigment; 2, the
vehicle; 3, the corrigent; 4, the solvent.
The elements will differ with the kind of
ink desired, whether permanent or copy-
ing-
Permanent (Record) Ink. — Any finely
divided, non-fading color may be used as
the pigment; vaseline is the best vehicle
and wax the best corrigent. In order to
make the ribbon last a long time with
one inking, as much pigment as feasible
should be used. To make black record
ink: Take some vaseline, melt it on a
slow fire or water bath, and incorporate
by constant stirring as much lampblack
as it will take up without becoming
granular. Take from the fire and allow
it to cool. The ink is now practically
finished, except, if not entirely suitable
on trial, it may be improved by adding
the corrigent wax in small quantity.
The ribbon should be charged with a
very thin, evenly divided amount of ink.
Hence the necessity of a solvent — in this
instance a mixture of equal parts of
petroleum benzine and rectified spirit of
turpentine. In this mixture dissolve a
sufficient amount of the solid ink by
vigorous agitation to make a thin paint.
Try the ink on one extremity of the
ribbon; if too soft, add a little wax to
make it harder; if too pale, add more color-
ing matter; if too hard, add more vaseline.
If carefully applied to the ribbon, and
the excess brushed off, the result will be
satisfactory.
On the same principle, other colors
may be made into ink; but for delicate
colors, albolene and bleached wax
should be the vehicle and corrigent,
respectively.
The various printing inks may be used
if properly corrected. They require the
addition of vaseline to make them non-
drying on the ribbon, and of some wax
if found too soft. Where printing inks
are available, they will be found to give
excellent results if thus modified, as the
pigment is well milled and finely divided.
Even black cosmetic may be made to
answer, by the addition of some lamp-
black to the solution in the mixture of
benzine and turpentine.
After thus having explained the prin-
ciples underlying the manufacture of
permanent inks, we can pass more rapidly
over the subject of copying inks, which
is governed by the same general rules.
For copying inks, aniline colors form
the pigment; a mixture of about 3 parts
of water and 1 part of glycerine, the
vehicle; transparent soap (about £ part),
the corrigent; stronger alcohol (about 6
parts), the solvent. The desired aniline
color will easily dissolve in the hot
vehicle, soap will give the ink the neces-
sary body and counteract the hygro-
scopic tendency of the glycerine, and in
the stronger alcohol the ink will readily
dissolve, so that it can be applied in a
finely divided state to the ribbon, where
the evaporation of the alcohol will leave
it in a thin film. There is little more to
add. After the ink is made and tried —
if too soft, add a little more soap; if too
hard, a little more glycerine; if too pale,
a little more pigment. Printer's copy-
ing ink can be utilized here likewise.
Users of the typewriter should so set a
fresh ribbon as to start at the edge near-
est the operator, allowing it to run back
and forth with the same adjustment until
exhausted along that strip; then shift the
ribbon forward the width of one letter,
running until exhausted, and so on.
Finally, when the whole ribbon is ex-
hausted, the color will have been equably
used up, and on reinking, the work will
appear even in color, while it will look
patchy if some of the old ink has been
left here and there and fresh ink applied
over it.
UDDER INFLAMMATION:
See Veterinary Formulas.
VALVES.
The manufacturers of valves test each
valve under hydraulic pressure before it
is sent out from the factory, yet they
frequently leak when erected in the pipe
lines. This is due to the misuse of the
erector in most cases. The following are
the most noteworthy bad practices to be
avoided when fitting in valves:
I. — Screwing a valve on a pipe very
tightly, without first closing the valve.
Closing the valve makes the body much
VALVES
more rigid and able to withstand greater
strains and also keeps the iron chips
from lodging under the seats, or in the
working parts of the valves. This, of
course, does not apply to check valves.
II. — Screwing a long mill thread into
a valve. The threads on commercial
pipes are very long and should never be
screwed into a valve. An elbow or tee
will stand the length of thread very well,
but a suitable length thread should be
cut in every case on the pipe, when used
to screw into a valve. If not, the end of
pipe will shoulder against the seat of
valve and so distort it that the valve will
leak very badly.
III. — The application of a pipe wrench
on the opposite end of the valve from the
end which is being screwed on the pipe.
Th?s should never be done, as it in-
variably springs or forces the valve seats
from their true original bearing with the
disks.
IV. — Never place the body of a valve
in the vise to remove the bonnet or center-
piece from a valve, as it will squeeze
together the soft brass body and throw
all parts out of alignment. Properly to
remove the bonnet or centerpiece from
a valve, either screw into each end of the
valve a short piece of pipe and place one
piece of the pipe in the vise, using a
wrench on the square of bonnet; or if the
vise is properly constructed, place the
square of the bonnet in same and use
the short piece of pipe screwed in each
end as a lever. When using a wrench
on square of bonnet or centerpiece, use
a Stillson or Trimo wrench with a piece
of tin between the teeth of the jaws and
the finished brass. It may mark the brass
slightly, but this is preferable to round-
ing off all the corners with an old monkey
wrench which is worn out and sprung.
As the threads on all bonnets or center-
pieces are doped with litharge or cement,
a sharp jerk or jar on the wrench will
start the bonnet much more quickly
than a steady pull. Under no circum-
stances try to replace or remove the
bonnet or centerpiece of a valve without
first opening it wide. This will prevent
the bending of the stem, forcing the disk
down through the seat or stripping the
threads on bonnet where it screws into
body. If it is impossible to remove bon-
net or centerpiece by ordinary methods,
heat the body of the valve just outside
the thread. Then tap lightly all around
the thread with a soft hammer. This
method never fails, as the heat expands
the body ring and breaks the joint made
by the litharge or cement.
V. — The application of a large
monkey wrench to the stuffing box of
valve. Many valves are returned with
the stuffing boxes split, or the threads in
same stripped. This is due to the fact
that the fitter or engineer has used a large-
sized monkey wrench on this small part.
VI. — The screwing into a valve of a
long length of unsupported pipe. For
example, if the fitter is doing some re-
pair work and starts out with a run of
2-inch horizontal pipe from a 2-inch
valve connected to main steam header,
the pipe being about 18 feet long, after
he has screwed the pipe tightly into the
valve, he leaves the helper to support the
pipe at the other end, while he gets the
hanger ready. The helper in the mean-
time has become tired and drops his
shoulder on which the pipe rests about
3 inches and in consequence the full
weight of this 18-foot length of pipe
bears on the valve. The valve is badly
sprung and when the engineer raises
steam the next morning the valve leaks.
When a valve is placed in the center of a
long run of pipe, the pipe on each side,
and close to the valve, should be well
supported.
VII. — The use of pipe cement in
valves. When it is necessary to use pipe
cement in joints, this mixture should
always be placed on the pipe thread
which screws into the valve, and never in
the valve itself. If the cement is placed in
the valve, as the pipe is screwed into the
valve it forces the cement between the
seats and disks, where it will soon harden
and thus prevent the valve from seating
properly.
VIII. — Thread chips and scale in
pipe. Before a pipe is screwed into a
valve it should be stood in a vertical
Eosition and struck sharply with a
ammer. This will release the chips
from the thread cutting, and loosen the
scale inside of pipe. When a pipe line
containing valves is connected up, the
valves should all be opened wide and the
pipe well blown out before they are again
closed. This will remove foreign sub-
stances which are liable to cut and
scratch the seats and disks.
IX. — Expansion and contraction.
Ample allowance must be provided for
expansion and contraction in all steam
lines, especially when brass valves are
included. The pipe and fittings are
much more rigid and stiff than the brass
valves and in consequence the expan-
sion strains will relieve themselves at
the weakest point, unless otherwise pro-
vided for.
VALVES— VANILLA
713
X. — The use of wrenches or bars on
valve wheels to close the valves tightly.
This should never be done, as it springs
the entire valve and throws all parts out
of alignment, thus making the valve leak.
The manufacturer furnishes a wheel
sufficiently large properly to close against
any pressure for which it is suitable.
If the valves cannot be closed tightly by
this means, there is something between
the disks and seats or they have been cut
or scratched by foreign substances.
Vanilla
(See also Essences and Extracts.)
The best Mexican vanilla yields only
in the neighborhood of 1.7 per cent of
vanillin; that from Reunion and Gua-
deloupe about 2.5 per cent; and that
from Java 2.75 per cent. There seems
to be but little connection between the
quantity of vanillin contained in vanilla
pods and their quality as a flavor pro-
ducer. Mexican beans are esteemed
the best and yet they contain far less
than the Java. Those from Brazil and
Peru contain much less than those from
Mexico, and yet they are considered in-
ferior in quality to most others. The
vanillin of the market is chiefly, if not
entirely, artificial and is made from the
coniferin of such pines and firs as abies
excelsa, a. pectinata, pinus cembra, and
p. strobus, as well as from the eugenol
of cloves and allspice. Vanillin also ex-
ists in asparagus, lupine seeds, the seeds
of the common wild rose, asafetida, and
gum benzoin.
A good formula for a vanilla extract is
the following:
Vanilla 1 ounce
Tonka 2 ounces
Alcohol, deodor-
ized 32 fluidounces
Syrup 8 fluidounces
Cut and bruise the vanilla, afterwards
adding ami bruising the Tonka; macerate
for 14 days in 16 fluidounces of the alco-
hol, with occasional agitation; pour off
the clear liquid and set aside; pour the
remaining alcohol on the magma, and
heat by means of a water bath to about
168° F., in a closely covered vessel.
Keep it at that temperature for 2 or 3
hours, then strain through flannel with
slight pressure; mix the two portions of
liquid and filter through felt. Lastly,
add the syrup. To render this tinc-
ture perfectly clear it may be treated
with pulverized magnesium carbonate,
using from £ to 1 drachm to each pint.
To Detect Artificial Vanillin in
Vanilla Extracts (see also Foods). — There
is no well-defined test for vanillin, but
one can get at it in a negative way. The
artificial vanillin contains vanillin iden-
tical with the vanillin contained in the
vanilla bean; but the vanilla bean, as the
vanilla extract, contains among its many
"extractive matters" which enter into the
food and fragrant value of vanilla extract,
certain rosins which can be identified with
certainty in analysis by a number of de-
termining reactions. Extract made with-
out true vanilla can be detected by nega-
tive results in all these reactions.
Vanilla beans contain 4 to 11 per cent
of this rosin. It is of a dark red to brown
color and furnishes about one-half the
color of the extract of vanilla. This
rosin is soluble in 50 per cent alcohol,
so that in extracts of high grade, where
sufficient alcohol is used, all rosin is kept
in solution. In cheap extracts, where as
little as 20 per cent of alcohol by volume
is sometimes used, an alkali — usually
potassium bicarbonate — is added to aid
in getting rosin, gums, etc., in solution,
ana to prevent subsequent turpidity.
This treatment deepens the color very
materially.
Place some of the extract to be exam-
ined in a glass evaporating dish and
evaporate the alcohol on the water bath.
When alcohol is removed, make up
about the original volume with hot water.
If alkali has not been used in the manu-
facture of the extract, the rosin will ap-
pear as a flocculent red to brown residue.
Acidify with acetic acid to free rosin
from bases, separating the whole of the
rosin and leaving a partly decolorized,
clear supernatant liquid after standing a
short time. Collect the rosin on a filter,
wash with water, and reserve the filtrate
for further tests.
Place a portion of the filter with the
attached rosin in a few cubic centimeters
of dilute caustic potash. The rosin is
dissolved to a deep-red solution. Acid-
ify. The rosin is thereby precipitated.
Dissolve a portion of the rosin in alcohol;
to one fraction add a few drops of fer-
ric chloride; no striking coloration is
produced. To another portion add
hydrochloric acid; again there is little
change in color. In alcoholic solution
most rosins give color reactions with fer-
ric chloride or hydrochloric acid. To
a portion of the nitrate obtained above
add a few drops of basic lead acetate.
The precipitate is so bulky as to almost
714
VANILLA— VARNISHES
solidify, due 1o the excessive amount of
organic acids, gums, and other extractive
matter. The filtrate from this precipi-
tate is nearly, but not quite, colorless.
Test another portion of tne filtrate from
the rosin for tannin with a solution of
gelatin. Tannin is present in varying
but small quantities. It should not be
present in groat excess.
To Detect Tonka in Vanilla Extract. —
The following test depends on the chem-
ical difference between cournarin and
vanillin, the odorous principles of the two
beans. Coumarin is the anhydride of
coumaric acid, and on fusion with a caus-
tic alkali yields acetic and salicylic acids,
while vanillin is methyl protocatechin
aldehyde, and when treated similarly
yields protocatechuic acid. The test is
performed by evaporating a small quan-
tity of the extract to dryness, and melting
the residue with caustic potash. Trans-
fer the fused mass to a test tube, neu-
tralize with hydrochloric acid, and add
a few drops of ferric chloride solution.
If Tonka be present in the extract, the
beautiful violet coloration characteristic
of salicylic acid will at once become evi-
dent.
Vanilla Substitute. — A substitute for
vanilla extract is made from synthetic
vanillin. The vanillin is simply dis-
solved in diluted alcohol and the solution
colored with a little caramel and sweet-
ened perhaps with syrup. The follow-
ing is a typical formula:
• Vanillin 1 ounce
Alcohol 6 quarts
Water 5 quarts
Syrup 1 quart
Caramel sufficient to color.
An extract so made does not wholly
represent the flavor of the bean; while
vanillin is the chief flavoring constituent
of the bean, there are present other sub-
stances which contribute to the flavor;
and connoisseurs prefer this combina-
tion, the remaining members of which
have not yet been made artificially.
VANILLIN:
See Vanilla.
Varnishes
(See also Enamels, Glazes, Oils, Paints,
Rust Preventives, Stains, and Water-
proofing.)
Varnish is a solution of resinous matter
forming a clear, limpid fluid capable of
hardening without losing its transparency.
It is used to give a shining, transparent,
hard, and preservative covering to the
finished surface of woodwork, capable of
resisting in a greater or less degree the
influence of the air and moisture. This
coating, when applied to metal or mineral
surfaces, takes the name of lacquer, and
must be prepared from rosins at once
more adhesive and tenacious than those
entering into varnish.
The rosins, commonly called gums,
suitable for varnish are of two kinds —
the hard and the soft. The hard varie-
ties are copal, amber, and the lac rosins.
The dry soft rosins are juniper gum
(commonly called sandarac), mastic, and
dammar. The elastic soft rosins are
benzoin, elemi, anime, and turpentine.
The science of preparing varnish con-
sists in combining these classes of rosins
in a suitable solvent, so that each conveys
its good qualities and counteracts the
bad ones of the others, and in giving the
desired color to this solution without
affecting the suspension of the rosins, or
detracting from the drying and harden-
ing properties of the varnish.
In spirit varnish (that made with alco-
hol) the hard and the elastic gums must be
mixed to insure tenderness and solidity,
as the alcohol evaporates at once after
applying, leaving the varnish wholly
dependent on the gums for the tenacious
and adhesive properties; and if the soft
rosins predominate, the varnish will
remain. "tacky" for a long time. Spirit
varnish, however good and convenient to
work with, must always be inferior to oil
varnish, as the latter is at the same time
more tender and more solid, for the oil in
oxidizing and evaporating thickens and
forms rosin which continues its softening
and binding presence, whereas in a spirit
varnish the alcohol is promptly dissi-
Eated, and leaves the gums on the sur-
ice of the work in a more or less granu-
lar and brittle precipitate which chips
readily and peels off.
Varnish must be tender and in a
manner soft. It must yield to the
movements of the wood in expanding or
contracting with the heat or cold, and
must not inclose the wood like a sheet of
glass. This is why oil varnish is superior
to spirit varnish. To obtain this supple-
ness the gums must be dissolved in some
liquid not highly volatile like spirit, but
one which mixes with them in substance
permanently to counteract their extreme
friability. Such solvents are the oils of
lavender, spike, rosemary, and turpen-
tine, combined with linseed oil. The
vehicle in which the rosins are dissolved
must be soft and remain so in order to
VARNISHES
715
keep the rosins soft which are of them-
selves naturally hard. Any varnish from
which the solvent has completely dried
out must of necessity become hard and
glassy and chip off. But, on the other
hand, if the varnish remains too soft and
"tacky," it will "cake" in time and
destroy the effect desired.
Aside from this, close observers if not
chemists will agree that for this work it
is much more desirable to dissolve these
rosins in a liquid closely related to them
in chemical composition, rather than in a
liquid of no chemical relation and which
no doubt changes certain properties of
the rosins, and cuts them into solution
more sharply than does turpentine or
linseed oil. It is a well-known fact that
each time glue is liquefied it loses some
of its adhesive properties. On this
same principle it is not desirable to dis-
solve varnish rosins in a liquid very un-
like them, nor in one in which they are
quickly and highly soluble. Modern ef-
fort has been bent on inventing a cheap
varnish, easily prepared, that will take
the place of oil varnish, and the market
is flooded with benzine, carbon bisul-
phide, and various ether products which
are next to worthless where wearing and
durable properties are desired.
Alcohol will hold in solution only
about one-third of its weight in rosins.
Turpentine must be added always last to
spirit varnish. Turpentine in its clear
recently distilled state will not mix with
alcohol, but must first be oxidized by
exposing it to the air in an uncorked
bottle until a small quantity taken there-
from mixes perfectly with alcohol. This
usually takes from a month to six weeks.
Mastic must be added last of all to the
ingredients of spirit varnish, as it is not
wholly soluble in alcohol but entirely so
in a solution of rosins in alcohol. Spirit
varnishes that prove too hard and brittle
may be improved by the addition of
either of the oils of turpentine, castor
seed, lavender, rosemary, or spike, in the
proportion required to bring the varnish
to the proper temper.
Coloring " Spirit " Varnishes. — In
modern works the following coloring
substances are used, separately and
in blends: Saffron (brilliant golden
yellow), dragon's blood (deep reddish
brown), gamboge (bright yellow), Soco-
trine or Bombay aloes (liver brown),
asphalt, ivory, and bone black (black),
sandalwood, pterocarpus santalinus, the
heartwood (dark red), Indian sandal-
wood, pterocarpus indica, the heart-
wood (orange red), brazil wood (dark
yellow), myrrh (yellowish to reddish
brown; darkens on exposure), madder
(reddish brown), logwood (brown), red
scammony rosin (light red), turmeric
(orange yellow), and many others ac-
cording to the various shades desired.
Manufacturing Hints. — Glass, coarse-
ly powdered, is often added to varnish
when mixed in large quantities for the
purpose of cutting the rosins and pre-
venting them from adhering to the bot-
tom and sides of the container. When
possible, varnish should always be com-
pounded without the use of heat, as this
carbonizes and otherwise changes the
constituents, and, besides, danger always
ensues from the highly inflammable
nature of the material employed. How-
ever, when heat is necessary, a water
bath should always be used; the varnish
should never fill the vessel over a half to
three-fourths of its capacity.
The Gums Used in Making Varnish. — •
Juniper gum or true sandarac comes in
long, yellowish, dusty tears, and requires
a high temperature for its manipulation
in oil. The oil must be so hot as to
scorch a feather dipped into it, before
this gum is added; otherwise the gum is
burned. Because of this, juniper gum is
usually displaced in oil varnish by gum
dammar. Both of these gums, by their
dryness, counteract the elasticity of oil
as well as of other gums. The usual
sandarac of commerce rs a brittle, yellow,
transparent rosin from Africa, more
soluble in turpentine than in alcohol.
Its excess renders varnish hard and brit-
tle. Commercial sandarac is also often
a mixture of the African rosin with dam-
mar or hard Indian copal, the place of
the African rosin being sometimes taken
by true juniper gum. This mixture is
the pounce of the shops, and is almost
insoluble in alcohol or turpentine.
Dammar also largely takes the place of
tender copal, gum anime, white amber,
white incense, and white rosin. The
latter three names are also often applied
to a mixture of oil and Grecian wax,
sometimes used in varnish. When gum
dammar is used as the main rosin in a
varnish, it should be first fused and
brought to a boiling point, but not
thawed. This eliminates the property
that renders dammar varnish soft and
"tacky" if not treated as above.
Venetian turpentine has a tendency to
render varnish "tacky" and must be
skillfully counteracted if this effect is to
be avoided. Benzoin in varnish exposed
to any degree of dampness has a ten-
716
VARNISHES
dency to swell, and must in such cases
be avoided. Elemi, a fragrant rosin
from Egypt, in time grows hard and
brittle, and is not so soluble in alcohol as
anime, which is highly esteemed for its
more tender qualities. Copal is a name
given rather indiscriminately to various
gums and rosins. The East Indian or
African is the tender copal, and is softer
and more transparent than the other
varieties; when pure it is freely soluble
in oil of turpentine or rosemary. Hard
copal comes in its best form from Mexico,
and is not readily soluble in oil unless
first fused. The brilliant, deep-red col-
or of old varnish is said to be based on
dragon's blood, but not the kind that
comes in sticks, cones, etc. (which is
always adulterated), but the clear, pure
tear, deeper in color than a carbuncle,
and as crystal as a ruby. This is sel-
dom seen in the market, as is also the
tear of gamboge, which, mixed with the
tear of dragon's blood, is said to be the
basis of the brilliant orange and gold
varnish of the ancients.
Of all applications used to adorn and
protect the surface of objects, oil var-
nishes or lacquers containing hard ros-
ins are the best, as they furnish a hard,
glossy coating which does not crack and
is very durable even when exposed to wind
and rain.
To obtain a varnish of these desirable
qualities the best old linseed oil, or
varnish made from it, must be combined
with the residue left by the dry distilla-
tion of amber or very hard copal. This
distillation removes a quantity of vola-
tile oil amounting to one-fourth or one-
fifth of the original weight. The residue
is pulverized and dissolved in hot linseed-
oil varnish, forming a thick, viscous,
yellow-brown liquid, which, as a rule,
must be thinned with oil of turpentine
before being applied.
Hard rosin oil varnish of this sort may
conveniently be mixed with the solution
of asphalt in the oil of turpentine with
the aid of the simple apparatus described
below, as the stiffness of the two liquids
makes hand stirring slow and laborious.
A cask is mounted on an axle which
projects through both heads, but is
inclined to the axis of the cask, so that
when the ends of the axle are set in bear-
ings and the cask is revolved, each end
of the cask will rise and fall alternately,
and any liquid which only partly fills the
cask will be thoroughly mixed and
churned in a short time. The cask is
two-thirds filled with the two thick vai-
nishes (hard rosin in linseed oil and
asphalt in the oil of turpentine) in the
desired proportion, and after these have
been intimately mixed by turning the
cask, a sufficient quantity of rectified oil
of turpentine to give proper consistence
is added and the rotation is continued
until the mixture is perfectly uniform.
To obtain the best and most durable
result with this mixed oil, rosin, and as-
phalt varnish it is advisable to dilute it
freely with oil of turpentine and to apply
2 or 3 coats, allowing each coat to dry
before the next is put on. In this way a
deep black and very glossy surface is
obtained which cannot be distinguished
from genuine Japanese lacquer.
Many formulas for making these
mixed asphalt varnishes contain rosin —
usually American rosin. The result is
the production of a cheaper but inferior
varnish. The addition of such soft
rosins as elemi and copaiba, however, is
made for another reason, and it im-
proves the quality of the varnish for
certain purposes. Though these rosins
soften the lacquer, they also make it more
elastic, and therefore more suitable for
coating leather and textile fabrics, as it
does not crack in consequence of repeated
bending, rolling, and folding.
In coloring spirit varnish the alcohol
should always be colored first to the
desired shade before mixing with the
rosin, except where ivory or bone black
is used. If the color is taken from a
gum, due allowance for the same must
be made in the rosins of the varnish.
For instance, in a varnish based on
mastic, 10 parts, and tender copal, 5
parts, in 100 parts, if this is to be colored
with, say, 8 parts of dragon's blood (or
any other color gum), the rosins must be
reduced to mastic, 8 parts, and tender
copal, 4 parts. Eight parts of color gum
are here equivalent to 3 parts of varnish
rosin. This holds true with gamboge,
aloes, myrrh, and the other gum rosins
used for their color. This seeming dis-
proportion is due to the inert matter and
gum insoluble in alcohol, always present
in these gum rosins.
Shellac Varnish. — This is made in the
general proportion of 3 pounds of shellac
to a gallon of alcohol, the color, temper,
etc., to be determined by the require-
ments of the purchaser, and the nature of
the wood to which the varnish is to be
applied. Shellac varnish is usually tem-
pered with sandarac, elemi, dammar, and
the oil of linseed, turpentine, spike, or
rosemary.
Various impurities held in suspension
in shellac varnish may be entirely pre-
cipitated by the gradual addition of some
VARNISHES
717
crystals of oxalic acid, stirring the varnish
to aid their solution, and then setting it
aside overnight to permit the impurities
to settle. No more acid should be used
than is really necessary.
Rules for Varnishing. — 1. Avoid as far
as possible all manipulations with the
varnishes; do not dilute them with oil of
turpentine, and least of all with siccative,
to expedite the drying. If the varnish
has become too thick in consequence of
faulty storing, it should be heated and
receive an addition of hot, well-boiled
linseed-oil varnish and oil of turpentine.
Linseed-oil varnish or oil of turpentine
added to the varnish at a common tem-
perature renders it streaky (flacculent)
and dim and has an unfavorable influ-
ence on the drying; oil of turpentine takes
away the gloss of varnish.
2. Varnishing must be done only on
smooth, clean surfaces, if a fine, mirror-
like gloss is desired.
3. Varnish must be poured only into
clean vessels, and from these never back
into the stationary vessels, if it has been
in contact with the brush. Use only dry
brushes for varnishing, which are not
moist with oil of turpentine or linseed oil
or varnish.
4. Apply varnishes of all kinds as uni-
formly as possible; spread them out
evenly on the surfaces so that they form
neither too thick nor too thin a layer.
If the varnish is put on too thin the coat-
ing shows no gloss; if applied too thick
it does not get even and does not form a
smooth surface, but a wavy one.
5. Like all oil-paint coatings, every
coat of varnish must be perfectly dry
before a new one is put on; otherwise
it is likely that the whole work will
show cracks. The consumer of varnish
is only too apt to blame the varnish for
all defects which appear in his work or
develop after some time, although this
can only be proven in rare cases. As a
rule, the ground was not prepared right
and the different layers of paint were not
sufficiently dry, if the surfaces crack after
a comparatively short time and have the
appearance of maps. The cracking of
paint must not be confounded with the
cracking of the varnish, for the cracking
of the paint will cause the varnish to
crack prematurely. The varnish has to
stand more than the paint; it protects the
latter, and as it is transparent, the de-
fects of the paint are visible through the
varnish, which frequently causes one to
form the erroneous conclusion that the
varnish has cracked,
6. All varnish coatings must dry
slowly, and during the drying must be
absolutely protected from dust, flies, etc.,
until they have reached that stage when
we can pass the back of the hand or a
finger over them without sticking to it.
The production of faultless varnishing
in most cases depends on the accuracy
of the varnisher, on the treatment of his
brush, his varnish pot, and all the other
accessories. A brush which still holds
the split points of the bristles never var-
nishes clear; they are rubbed off easily
and spoil the varnished work. A brush
which has never been used does not pro-
duce clean work; it should be tried several
times, and when it is found that the var-
nishing accomplished by its use is neat
and satisfactory it should be kept very
carefully.
The preservation of the brush is thus
accomplished: First of all do not place it
in oil or varnish, for this would form a
skin, parts of which would adhere to it,
rendering the varnished surface unclean
and grainy; besides these skins there are
other particles which accumulate in the
corners and cannot be removed by dust-
ing off; these will also injure the work.
In order to preserve the brush properly,
insert it in a glass of suitable size through
a cork in the middle of which a hole has
been bored exactly fitting the handle.
Into the glass pour a mixture of equal
parts of alcohol and oil of turpentine,
and allow only the point of the brush
to touch the mixture, if at all. If the
cork is air-tight the brush cannot dry in
the vapor of oil of turpentine and spirit.
From time to time the liquids in the glass
should be replenished.
If the varnish remains in the varnish
receptacle, a little alcohol may be poured
on, which can do the varnish no harm.
At all events the varnish will be pre-
vented from drying on the walls of the
vessel and from becoming covered by a
skin which is produced by the linseed oil,
and which indicates that the varnish is
both fat and permanent. No skin forms on
a meager varnish, even when it drys thick.
After complete drying of the coat of
varnish it sometimes happens that the
varnish becomes white, blue, dim, or
blind. If varnish turns white on ex-
posure to the air the quality is at fault.
The varnish is either not fat enough or it
contains a rosin unsuitable for exterior
work (copal). The whitening occurs a
few days after the drying of the varnish
and can be removed only by rubbing off
the varnish.
Preventing Varnish from Crawling. —
Rub down the surface to be varnished
718
VARNISHES
with sharp vinegar. Coating with strong-
ly diluted ox gall is also of advantage.
Amber Varnish. — This varnish is cap-
able of giving a very superior polish or
surface, and is especially valuable for
coach and other high-class work. The
amber is first bleached by placing a
quantity — say about 7 pounds — of yel-
low amber in a suitable receptacle, such
as an earthenware crucible, of suffi-
cient strength, adding 14 pounds of sal
gemmae (rock or fossil salt), and then
pouring in as much spring water as will
dissolve the sal gemmae. VVhen the lat-
ter is dissolved more water is added, and
the crucible is placed over a fire until
the color of the amber is changed to a
perfect white. The bleached amber is
then placed in an iron pot and heated
over a common fire until it is completely
dissolved, after which the melting pot is
removed from the fire, and when suffi-
ciently cool the amber is taken from the
pot and immersed in spring water to
eliminate the sal gemmae, after which
the amber is put back into the pot and is
again heated over the fire till the amber
is dissolved. When the operation is
finished the amber is removed from the
pot and spread out upon a clean marble
slab to dry until all the water has evap-
orated, and is afterwards exposed to a
gentle heat to entirely deprive it of hu-
midity.
Asphalt Varnishes. — Natural asphalt is
not entirely soluble in any liquid. Al-
cohol dissolves only a small percentage
of it, ether a much larger proportion.
The best solvents are benzol, benzine,
rectified petroleum, the essential oils,
and chloroform, which leave only a
small residue undissolved. The em-
ployment of ether as a solvent is im-
practicable because of its low boiling
point, 97° F., and great volatility. The
varnish would dry almost under the
brush. Chloroform is not open to this
objection, but it is too expensive for
ordinary use. Rectified petroleum is a
good solvent of asphalt, but it is not a
desirable 'ingredient of varnish because,
though the greater part of it soon
evaporates, a small quantity of less
volatile substances, wnich is usually
present in even the most thoroughly
rectified petroleum, causes the varnish
to remain "tacky" for a considerable
time and to retain a disagreeable odor
much longer. Common coal-tar benzine
is also a good solvent and has the merit
of cheapness, but its great volatility
makes the varnish dry too quickly for
convenient use, especially in summer.
The best solvent, probably, is oil of
turpentine, which dissolves asphalt al-
most completely, producing a varnish
which dries quickly and forms a perfect
coating if the turpentine has been well
rectified. The turpentine should be a
"water white," or entirely colorless,
liquid of strong optical refractive power
and agreeable odor, without a trace of
smokiness. A layer £ of an inch in depth
should evaporate in a short time so com-
pletely as to leave no stain on a glass
dish.
But even solutions of the best Syrian
asphalt in the purest oil of turpentine,
if they are allowed to stand undisturbed
for a long time in large vessels, deposit
a thick, semi-fluid precipitate which a
large addition of oil of turpentine fails to
convert into a uniform thin liquid. It
may be assumed that this deposit con-
sists of an insoluble or nearly insoluble
part of the asphalt which, perhaps, has
been deprived of solubility by the action
of light. Hence, in order to obtain a
uniform solution, this thick part must be
removed. This can be done, though
imperfectly, by carefully decanting the
solution after it has stood for a long
time in large vessels. This tedious and
troublesome process may be avoided by
filtering the solution as it is made, by
the following simple and quite satis-
factory method: The solution is made in
a large cask, lying on its side, with a
round hole about 8 inches in diameter in
its upper bilge. This opening is pro-
vided with a well-fitting cover, to the
bottom of which a hook is attached.
The asphalt is placed in a bag of closely
woven canvas, which is inclosed in a
second bag of the same material. The
diameter of the double bag, when filled,
should be such as to allow it to pass
easily through the opening in the cask,
and its length such that, when it is hung
on the hook, its lower end is about 8
inches above the bottom of the cask.
The cask is then filled with rectified oil
of turpentine, closed, and left undis-
turbed for several days. The oil of tur-
pentine penetrates into the bag and dis-
solves the asphalt, and the solution, which
is heavier tnan pure oil of turpentine,
exudes through the canvas and sinks to
the bottom of the cask. Those parts of
the asphalt which are quite insoluble, or
merely swell in the oil of turpentine,
cannot pass through the canvas, and are
removed with the bag, leaving a perfect
solution. When all soluble portions
have been dissolved, the bag, with the
cover, is raised and hung over the open-
ing to drain. If pulverized asphalt has
VARNISHES
719
been used the bag is found to contain
only a small quantity of semi-fluid
residue. This, thinned with oil of
turpentine and applied with a stiff brush
and considerable force, forms a thick,
weather-resisting, and very durable coat-
ing for planks, etc.
The proportion of asphalt to oil of
turpentine is so chosen as to produce, in
the cask, a pretty thick varnish, which
may be thinned to any desired degree by
adding more turpentine. For use, it
should be just thick enough to cover
bright tin and entirely conceal the metal
with a single coat. When dry, this coat
is very thin, but it adheres very firmly,
and continually increases in hardness,
probably because of the effect of light.
This supposition is supported by the diffi-
culty of removing an old coat of asphalt
varnish, which will not dissolve in tur-
pentine even after long immersion, and
usually must be removed by mechanical
means.
For a perfect, quick-drying asphalt
varnish the purest asphalt must be used,
such as Syrian, or the best Trinidad.
Trinidad seconds, though better than
some other asphalts, yield an inferior
varnish, owing to the presence of impur-
ities.
Of artificial asphalt, the best for this
purpose is the sort known as "mineral
caoutchouc," which is especially suit-
able for the manufacture of elastic
dressings for leather and other flexible
substances. For wood and metal it is
less desirable, as it never becomes as hard
as natural asphalt.
FORMULAS:
I. — A solution of 1 part of caoutchouc
in 16 parts of oil of turpentine or kero-
sene is mixed with a solution of 16 parts
of copal in 8 parts of linseed-oil varnish.
To the mixture is added a solution of
2 parts of asphalt in 3 or 4 parts of lin-
seed-oil varnish diluted with 8 or 10 parts
of oil of turpentine, and the whole is
filtered. This is a fine elastic varnish.
II. — Coal-tar asphalt, American as-
phalt, rosin, benzine, each 20 parts;
linseed-oil varnish, oil of turpentine, coal-
tar oil, each 10 parts; binoxide of man-
ganese, roasted lampblack, each 2 parts.
The solid ingredients are melted to-
gether and mixed with the linseed-oil
varnish, into which the lampblack has
been stirred, and, finally, the other
liquids are added. The varnish is
strained through tow.
Bicycle Varnish. — This is a spirit var-
nish, preferably made by a cold proc-
ess, and requires less technical knowl-
edge than the preparation of fatty var-
nishes. The chief dependence is upon
the choice of the raw materials. These
raw materials, copal, shellac, etc., are
first broken up small and placed in a
barrel adapted for turning upon an axis,
with a hand crank, or with a belt and
pulley from a power shaft. The barrel
is of course simply mounted in a frame of
wood or iron, whichever is the most con-
venient. After the barrel has received
its raw material, it may be started and
kept revolving 'for 24 hours. Long in-
terruptions in the turning must be care-
fully avoided, particularly in summer,
for the material in the barrel, when at
rest, will, at this season, soon form a
large lump, to dissolve which will con-
sume much time and labor. To prevent
the formation of a semi-solid mass, as
well as to facilitate the dissolving of the
gum, it would be well to put some hard,
smooth stones into the barrel with the
varnish ingredients.
Bicycle Dipping Varnish (Baking Var-
nish).— Take 50 parts, by weight, of
Syrian asphalt; 50 parts, by weight, of
copal oil; 50 parts, by weight, of thick
varnish oil, and 105 parts, by weight,
turpentine oil, to which add 7 parts, by
weight, of drier. When the asphalt is
melted through and through, add the
copal oil and heat it until the water is
driven off, as copal oil is seldom free
from water. Now take it off the fire
and allow it to cool; add first the sicca-
tive, then the turpentine and linseed oil,
which have been previously thoroughly
mixed together. This bicycle varnish
does not get completely black until it is
baked.
Black Varnishes. — Black spirit lacquers
are employed in the wood and metal in-
dustries. Different kinds are produced
according to their use. They are called
black Japanese varnishes, or black brill-
iant varnishes.
Black Japanese Varnish. — I. — Sculpture
varnish, 5 parts; red acaroid varnish, 2
parts; aniline black, f part; Lyons blue,
.0015 parts. If a sculpture varnish pre-
pared with heated copal is employed, a
black lacquer of especially good quality
is obtained. Usually 1 per cent of oil of
lavender is added.
II. — Shellac 4 'parts
Borax. 2 parts
Glycerine 2 parts
Aniline black 5 parts
Water 50 parts
Dissolve the borax in the water, add
120
VARNISHES
the shellac, and heat Until solution is
effected; then add the other ingredients.
This is a mat-black varnish.
For Blackboards. — For blackening
these boards mix \ liter (1.05 pints) good
alcohol, 70 grams (1,080 grains) shellac,
6 grams (92 grains) fine lampblack, 3
grams (46 grains) fine chalk free from
sand. If red lines are to be drawn, mix
the necessary quantity of red lead in
alcohol and shellac.
Bookbinders' Varnishes. —
I II III IV V
Per Per Per Per Per
Cent Cent Cent Cent Cent
Shellac 14.5 6.513.5 6.3 8.3
Mastic 6.0 2.0 .. .. 1.1
Sandarac.. .6.0 13.0 .. 1.3 1.1
Camphor... 1.0 .. 0.5 1.5
Benzoin .13.7
Alcohol 72.5 78.5 86.0 79.2 75.8
Scent with oil of benzoin, of lavender,
or of rosemary. Other authors give the
following recipes:
VI VII VIII IX
Per Per Per Per
Cent Cent Cent Cent
Blond shellac. 11. 5 13.0 9.0
White shellac. 11. 5
Camphor 0.7
Powdered
sugar 0.7
Sandarac 18.0 6.6
Mastic ., .. 13.0
Venice turpen-
tine ., 2.0 6.6
Alcohol 77.0 85.6 71.0 73.8
All solutions may be prepared in the
cold, but the fact that mastic does
not dissolve entirely, must not be lost
sight of.
Bottle Varnish. — Bottles may be made
to exclude light pretty well by coating
them with asphaltum lacquer-or varnish.
A formula recommended for this purpose
is as follows: Dissolve asphaltum, 1 part,
in light coal-tar oil, 2 parts, and add to
the solution about 1 per cent of castor oil.
This lacquer dries somewhat slowly, but
adheres very firmly to the glass. As-
phaltum lacquer may also be rendered
less brittle by the addition of elemi.
Melt together asphaltum, 10 parts, and
elemi, 1 part, and dissolve the cold fused
mass in light coal-tar oil, 12 parts.
Amber-colored bottles for substances
acted upon by the actinic rays of light
may be obtained from almost any manu-
facturer of bottles.
Can Varnish. — Dissolve shellac, 15
parts, by weight; Venice turpentine, 2
parts, by weight; and sandarac, 8 parts,
by weight, in spirit, 75 parts, by weight.
Copal Varnish. — Very fine copal var-
nish for those parts of carriages which
require the highest polish, is prepared as
follows:
I. — Melt 8 pounds best copal and mix with
20 pounds very clear matured oil. Then
boil 4 to 5 hours at moderate heat until it
draws threads; now mix with 35 pounds
oil of turpentine, strain and keep for use.
This varnish dries rather slowly, there-
fore varnishers generally mix it one-half
with another varnish, which is prepared
by boiling for 4 hours, 20 pounds clear
linseed oil and 8 pounds very pure, white
anime rosin, to which is subsequently
added 35 pounds oil of turpentine.
II. — Mix the following two varnishes:
(a) Eight pounds copal, 10 pounds lin-
seed oil, I pound dried sugar of lead, 35
pounds oil of turpentine.
(6) Eight pounds good anime rosin, 10
pounds linseed oil, \ pound zinc vitriol,
35 pounds oil of turpentine. Each of
these two sets is boiled separately into
varnish and strained, and then both are
mixed. This varnish dries in 6 hours in
winter, and in 4 hours in summer. For
old articles which are to be re-varnished
black, it is very suitable.
Elastic Limpid Gum Varnishes. — I. —
In order to obtain a limpid rubber
varnish, it is essential to have the rubber
entirely free from water. This can be
obtained by cutting the rubber into thin
strips, or better, into shreds as fine as
possible, and drying them, at a temper-
ature of from 104° to 122° F., for several
days or until they are water free, then
proceed as follows:
II. — Dissolve 1 part of the desiccated
rubber in 8 parts of petroleum ether
(benzine) and add 2 parts of fat copal
varnish and stir in. Or, cover 2 parts of
dried rubber with 1 part of ether; let
stand for several days, or until the rubber
has taken up as much of the ether as it
will, then liquefy by standing in a vessel
of moderately warm water. While still
warm, stir in 2 parts of linseed oil. cut
with 2 parts of turpentine oil.
ENAMEL VARNISHES:
Antiseptic Enamel. — This consists of a
solution of spirituous gum lac, rosin, and
copal, with addition of salicylic acid,
etc. Its purpose is mainly the preven-
tion or removal of mold or fungous
formation. The salicylic acid contained
in the mass acts as an antiseptic during
the painting, and destroys all fungi
present.
VARNISHES
721
Bath-Tub Enamel Unaffected by Hot
Water. — I. — In order to make paint hold
on the zinc or tinned copper lining of a bath
tub, a wash must be used to produce a
film to which oil paint will adhere. First
remove all grease, etc., with a solution of
soda or ammonia and dry the surface
thoroughly; then apply with a wide, soft
brush equal parts, by weight, of chloride
of copper, nitrate of copper, and sal
ammoniac, dissolved in 64 parts, by
weight, of water. When dissolved add
1 part, by weight, of commercial muri-
atic acid. This solution must be kept
in glass or earthenware. It will dry in
about 12 hours, giving a grayish-black
coating to which paint will firmly adhere.
The priming coat should be white lead
thinned with turpentine, with only just
sufficient linseed oil to bind it. After
this is thoroughly dry, apply one or more
coats of special bath-tub enamel, or a
gloss paint made by mixing coach colors
ground in Japan with hard-drying varnish
of the best quality. Most first-class
manufacturers have special grades that
will stand hot water.
II. — The following preparation pro-
duces a brilliant surface on metals and
is very durable, resisting the effect of
blows without scaling or chipping off,
and being therefore highly suitable for
cycles and any other articles exposed to
shock:
For the manufacture of 44 gallons, 11
pounds of red copper, 8.8 pounds of yel-
low copper, 4.4 pounds of hard steel, and
4.4 pounds of soft steel, all in a com-
minuted condition, are well washed in
petroleum or mineral spirit, and are then
treated with concentrated sulphuric acid
in a lead-lined vessel, with continued
stirring for 2 hours. After 12 hours'
rest the sulphuric acid is neutralized
with Javel extract, and the fine powder
left in the vessel is passed through a silk
sieve to remove any fragments of metal,
then ground along with linseed oil, ivory
black, and petroleum, the finely divided
mass being afterwards filtered through
flannel and incorporated with a mixture
of Bombay gum, 22 pounds; Damascus
gum, 11 pounds; Judea bitumen, 22
pounds; Norwegian tar rosin, 11 pounds;
and 11 pounds of ivory black ground
very fine in refined petroleum. When
perfectly homogeneous the mass is again
filtered, and is then ready for use. It is
laid on with a brush, and then fixed by
exposure to a temperature of between
400° and 800° F. The ivory black may
be replaced by other coloring -matters,
According to recjuirementsr
A Color Enamel. — On the piece to be
enameled apply oil varnish or white lead,
and add a powder giving brilliant re-
flections, such as diamantine, brilliantine,
or argentine. Dry in a stove. Apply a
new coat of varnish. Apply the powder
again, and finally heat in the oven.
Afterwards, apply several layers of
varnish; dry each layer in the oven.
Apply pumice stone in powder or tripoli,
and finally apply a layer of Swedish
varnish, drying in the oven. This
enamel does not crack. It adheres per-
fectly, and is advantageous for the pieces
of cycles and other mobiles.
Cold Enameling. — This style of enam-
eling is generally employed for repairing
purposes. The various colors are either
prepared with copal varnish and a little
oil of turpentine, or else they are melted
together with mastic and a trifle of oil of
spike. In using the former, the surface
usually settles down on drying, and
ordinarily the latter is preferred, which
is run on the cracked-off spot by warming
the article. After the cooling, file the
cold enamel off uniformly, and restore
the gloss by quickly drawing it through
the flame. For black cold enamel melt
mastic together with lampblack, which is
easily obtained by causing the flame of
a wick dipped into linseed oil to touch a
piece of tin.
White.— White lead or flake white.
Red. — Carmine or cinnabar (vermil-
ion).
Blue. — Ultramarine or Prussian blue.
Green. — Scheele's green or Schwein-
furt green.
Brown. — Umber.
Yellow. — Ocher or chrome yellow.
The different shades are produced by
mixing the colors.
Enamel for Vats, etc. — Two different
enamels are usually employed, viz., one for
the ground and one for tne top, the latter
being somewhat harder than the former.
Ground enamel is prepared by melting
in an enameled iron kettle 625 parts
brown shellac, 125 parts French oil of
turpentine, with 80 parts colophony, and
warming in another vessel 4,500 parts
of spirit (90 per cent). As soon as the
rosins are melted, remove the pot from
the fire and add the spirit in portions o*
250 parts at a time, seeing to it that the
spirit added is completely combined
with the rosins by stirring before adding
any more. When all the spirit is added,
warm the whole again for several min-
utes on the water bath (free fire should
722
VARNISHES
be avoided, on account of danger of fire),
and allow to settle. If a yellow color is
desired, add yellow ocher, in which case
the mixture may also be used as floor
varnish.
The top enamel (hard) consists of 500
parts shellac, 125 parts French oil of tur-
pentine, and 3,500 parts spirit (90 per
cent). Boiling in the water bath until
the solution appears clear can only be
of advantage. According to the thick-
ness desired, one may still dilute in the
cold with high-strength spirit. Tinting
may be done, as desired, with earth
colors, viz., coffee brown with umber,
red with English red, yellow with ocher,
silver gray with earthy cerussite, and
some lampblack. Before painting, dry
out the vats and putty up the joints with
a strip of dough which is prepared from
ground enamel and finely sifted charcoal
or brown coal ashes, and apply the
enamel after the putty is dry. The
varnish dries quickly, is odorless and
tasteless, and extraordinarily durable.
If a little annealed soot black is added
to this vat enamel, a fine iron varnish is
obtained which adheres very firmly.
Leather -(spattering leather on car-
riages) can also be nicely varnished
with it.
Finishing Enamel for White Furni-
ture.— Various methods are practiced
in finishing furniture in white enamel,
and while numerous preparations in-
tended for the purpose named are gen-
erally purchasable of local dealers in
paint supplies, it is often really difficult,
and frequently impossible, to obtain
a first-class ready-made enamel. To
prepare such an article take £ pint of
white lead and add to it \ pint of pure
turpentine, £ gill of pale coach Japan,
and \ gill of white dammar varnish.
Mix all the ingredients together thor-
oughly. Apply with a camel's-hair brush,
and for large surfaces use a 2-inch double
thick brush. There should be at least
three coats for good work, applied after
an interval of 24 hours between coats;
and for strictly high-class work four coats
will be necessary. Each coat should be
put on thin and entirely free from brush
marks, sandpapering being carefully done
upon each coat of pigment. Work that
has been already painted or varnished
needs to be cut down with, say, No. \
sandpaper, and then smoothed fine with
No. \ paper. Then thin white lead to a
free working consistency with turpentine,
retaining only a weak binder of oil in the
pigment, and apply two coats of it to the
surface. Give each coat plenty of time
to harden (36 hours should suffice), after
which sandpapering with No. \\ paper
had best be done. Ordinarily, upon two
coats of white lead, the enamel finish, as
above detailed, may be successfully pro-
duced. For the fine, rich enamel finish
adapted to rare specimens of furniture
and developed in the mansions of the
multimillionaires, a more elaborate and
complex process becomes necessary.
Quick-Drying Enamel Colors. — En-
amel colors which dry quickly, but re-
main elastic so that applied on tin they
will stand stamping without cracking off,
can be produced as follows:
In a closed stirrer or rolling cask place
21.5 parts, by weight, of finely powdered
pale French rosin, 24 \ parts, by weight,
of Manila copal, as well as 35 parts, by
weight, of denaturized spirit (95 per
cent), causing the cask or the stirrer to
rotate until all the gum has completely
dissolved, which, according to the tem-
perature of the room in which the stirrer
is and the hardness of the gums, re-
quires 24 to 48 hours. When the gums
are entirely dissolved add to the mix-
ture a solution of 21 \ parts, by weight,
of Venice oil turpentine in 0.025 parts,
by weight, of denaturized spirit of 95 per
cent, allowing the stirrer to run another 2
to 3 hours. For the purpose of removing
any impurities present or any undis-
solved rosin from the varnish, it is poured
through a hair sieve or through a three-
fold layer of fine muslin (organdie) into
suitable tin vessels or zinc-lined barrels
for further clarification. After 10 to 14
days the varnish is readv^ for use. By
grinding this varnish with the corre-
sponding dry pigments the desired
shades of color may be obtained; but it
is well to remark that chemically pure
zinc white cannot be used with advan-
tage because it thickens and loses its
covering power. The grinding is best
carried out twice on an ordinary funnel
mill. Following are some recipes:
I. — Enamel White. — Lithopone, 2
parts, by weight; white lead, purest, \
part, by weignt; varnish, 20 parts, by
weight.
II. — Enamel Black. — Ivory black, 2
parts, by weight; Paris blue, 0.01 part,
by weight; varnish, 23 parts, by weight.
III. — Pale Gray. — Graphite, 2 parts,
by weight; ultramarine, 0.01 part, by
weight; lithopone, 40 parts, by weight;
varnish, 100 parts, by weight.
IV.— Dark Gray. — Graphite, 3 parts,
by weight; ivory black, 2 parts, by weight;
lithopong, 40 parts, by weight; varnish,
110 parts, by weight.
VARNISHES
723
V. — Chrome Yellow, Pale. — Chrome
yellow, 2 parts, by weight; lithopone, 2
parts, by weight; varnish, 40 parts, by
weight; benzine, 1 \ parts, by weight.
VI. — Chrome Yellow, Dark. — Chrome
yellow, dark, 2 parts, by weight; chrome
orange, | part, by weight; lithopone, 1
part, by weight; varnish, 35 parts, by
weight; benzine, 1 part, by weight.
VII. — Pink, Pale. — Carmine, \ part,
by weight; lithopone, 15 parts, by weight;
varnish, 40 parts, by weight; benzine, 1^
parts, by weight.
VIII. — Pink, Dark. — Carmine, \ part,
by weight; Turkey red, 1 part, by weight;
lithopone, 15 parts, by weight; varnish,
40 parts, by weight.
IX. — Turkey Red. — Turkey red, pale,
2 parts, by weight; lithopone, 1 part, by
weight; Turkey red, dark, 1 part, by weight;
white lead, pure, \ part, by weight; var-
nish, 18 parts, by weight; benzine, \ part,
by weight.
X. — Flesh Tint. — Chrome yellow, pale,
\\ parts, by weight; graphite, \ part, by
weight; lithopone, 15 parts, by weight;
Turkey red, pale, 2 parts, by weight;
varnish, 42 parts, by weight; benzine, \
part, by weight.
XI. — Carmine Red. — Lead sulphate,
5 parts, by weight; Turkey red, pale, 6
parts, by weight; carmine, \\ parts, by
weight; orange minium, 3 parts, by
weight; vermilion, 2 parts, by weight;
varnish, 50 parts, by weight; benzine, 1£
parts, by weight.
XII. — Sky Blue. — Ultramarine, 5 parts,
by weight; lithopone, 5 parts, by weight;
ultramarine green, 0.05 parts, by weight;
varnish, 30 parts, by weight; benzine, 1
part, by weight.
XIII. — Ultramarine. — Ultra blue, 5
parts, by weight; varnish, 12 parts, by
weight; benzine, \ part, by weight.
XIV. — Violet. — Ultramarine, with red
tinge, 10 parts, by weight; carmine, O.a
parts, by weight; varnish, 25 parts, by
weight.
XV. — Azure. — Paris blue, 10 parts, by
weight; lithopone, 100 parts, by weight;
varnish, 300 parts, by weight.
XVI. — Leaf Green. — Chrome green,
Cale, 5 parts, by weight; varnish, 25 parts,
y weight; benzine, \ part, by weight.
XVII.— Silk Green.— Silk green, 10
parts, by weight; chrome yellow, pale, \
part, by weight; lead sulphate, 5 parts,
by weight; varnish, 30 parts, by weight;
benzine. \ part, by weight.
XVIII."— Brown. — English red, 10
parts, by weight; ocher, light, 3 parts, by
weight; varnish, 30 parts, by weight;
benzine, \ part, by weight.
XIX. — Ocher. — French ocher, 10 parts,
by weight; chrome yellow, dark, \ part,
by weight; varnish, 30 parts, by weight;
benzine, A part, by weight.
XX. — Chocolate. — Umber, 10 parts, by
weight; Florentine lake, \ part, by weight;
varnish, 25 parts, by weight; benzine, \
part, by weight.
XXI. — Terra Cotta. — Chrome yellow,
pale, 10 parts, by weight; Turkey red,
dark, 3 parts, by weight; varnish, 35
parts, by weight.
XXII. — Olive, Greenish. — French
ocher, 5 parts, by weight; Paris blue, \
part, by weight; graphite, \ part, by
weight; varnish, 25 parts, by weight;
lithopone, 5 parts, by weight.
XXIIL— Olive, Brownish.— Chrome
orange, 5 parts, by weight; Paris blue, 2
parts, by weight; lead sulphate, 10 parts,
by weight; English red, 1 part, by weight;
varnish, 40 parts, by weight; benzine, \\
parts, by weight.
XXI V.— Olive, Reddish.— Turkey red,
dark, 75 parts, by weight; sap green, 75
parts, by weight; ocher, pale, 5 parts, by
weight; varnish, 300 parts, by weight;
benzine, 1^ parts, by weight.
ENGRAVERS' VARNISHES.
In copper-plate engraving the plate
must be covered with a dark-colored
coating which, though entirely unaffected
by the etching fluid, must be soft enough
to allow the finest lines to be drawn with
the needle and must also be susceptible
of complete and easy removal when the
etching is finished. Varnishes which
possess these properties are called "etch-
ing grounds." They are made accord-
ing to various formulas, but in all cases
the principal ingredient is asphalt, of
which only the best natural varieties are
suitable for this purpose. Another com-
mon ingredient is beeswax, or tallow.
Etching grounds are usually made in
small quantities, at a single operation, by
melting and stirring the solid ingredients
together and allowing the mass to cool
in thin sheets, which are then dissolved
in oil of turpentine. The plate is coated
uniformly with this varnish through
which the engraver's tool readily pene-
trates, laying bare the metal beneath.
After the" lines thus drawn have been
etched by immersing the plate in acid,
the varnish is washed off with oil of
turpentine.
The following formulas for etching
grounds have been extensively used by
engravers;
724
VARNISHES
I II III IV
Yellow wax 50 30 110 40 parts
Syrian asphalt. . .20 20 25 40 parts
Rosin 20 parts
Amber 20 . . parts
Mastic 25 25 25 ..parts
Tallow 2 parts
Bergundy pitch . . 10 parts
FLOOR VARNISHES.
I. — Manila copal, spirit-
soluble 12 parts
Ruby shellac, pow-
dered 62 parts
Venice, turpentine 12 parts
Spirit, 96 per cent .... 250 parts
The materials are dissolved cold in a
covered vat with constant stirring, or
better still, in a stirring machine, and
filtered. For the pale shades take light
ocher; for dark ones, Amberg earth,
which are well ground with the varnish
in a paint mill.
II. — Shellac, A C leaf, 1.2 parts; san-
darac, 8 parts; Manila copal, 2 parts;
rosin, 5 parts; castor or linoleic acid or
wood oil acid, 1.50 parts; spirit (96 per
cent), 65 parts.
French Varnish. — So-called French
varnish is made by dissolving 1 part of
bleached or orange shellac in 5 parts of
alcohol, the solution being allowed to
stand and the clear portion then being de-
canted. The varnish may be colored by
materials which are soluble in alcohol.
For red, use 1 part of eosin to 49 parts
of the bleached shellac solution. For
blue, use 1 part of aniline blue to 24
parts of the bleached shellac solution, as
the orange shellac solution would impart
a greenish cast. For green, use 1 part of
aniline green (brilliant green) to 49 parts
of the orange shellac solution. For yel-
low, use either 2 parts of extract of tur-
meric or 1 part of gamboge to 24 parts of
the solution, or 1 part of aniline yellow
to 49 parts of the solution. For golden
yellow, use 2 parts of gamboge and 1
part of dragon's blood to 47 parts of the
orange shellac solution. The gamboge
and dragon's blood should be dissolved
first in a little alcohol.
Golden Varnishes. —
I. — Powdered benzoin. . 1 part
Alcohol enough to make 10 parts.
Pure saffron, roughly broken up,
about 6 threads to the ounce.
Macerate 3 days and filter. Vary the
quantity of saffron according to the
shade desired. Mastic and juniper gum
may be added to this varnish if a heavier
body is desired.
II. — Benzoin, juniper gum, gum mas-
tic, equal parts.
Dissolve the gums in 9 times their
weight of alcohol (varied more or less
according to the consistency wanted),
and color to the desired shade with
threads of pure saffron. This varnish is
very brilliant and dries at once.
India -Rubber Varnishes. — I. — Dissolve
10 pounds of India rubber in a mix-
ture of 10 pounds of turpentine and 20
pounds of petroleum by treating same
on a water bath. When the solution is
completed add 45 pounds of drying oil
and 5 pounds of lampblack and mix
thoroughly.
II. — Dissolve 7 pounds of India rub-
ber in 25 pounds of oil of turpentine. By
continued heating dissolve 14 pounds of
rosin in the mixture. Color while hot
with 3 pounds of lampblack.
Inlay Varnish. —
Ozokerite 17 parts
Carnauba wax 3 parts
Turpentine oil 15 parts
Melt the ozokerite and Carnauba wax,
then stir in the turpentine oil. This
varnish is applied like a polish and im-
parts to the wood a dark natural color
and a dull luster.
Japanning Tin. — The first thing to be
done when a vessel is to be japanned, is
to free it from all grease and oil, by rub-
bing it with turpentine. Should the oil,
however, be linseed, it may be allowed to
remain on the vessel, which must in that
case be put in an oven and heated till
the oil becomes quite hard.
After these preliminaries, a paint of
the shade desired, ground in linseed oil,
is applied. For brown, umber may be
used.
When the paint has been satisfactorily
applied it should be hardened by heat-
ing, and then smoothed down by rubbing
with ground pumice stone applied gently
by means of a piece of felt moistened
with water. To be done well, this re-
quires care and patience, and, it might
be added, some experience.
The vessel is next coated with a var-
nish, made by the following formula:
Turpentine spirit .... 8 ounces
Oil of lavender 6 ounces
Camphor 1 drachm
Bruised copal 2 ounces
Perhaps some other good varnish
would give equally satisfactory results.
After this the vessel is put in an oven
and heated to as high a temperature as it
will bear without causing the varnish to
VARNISHES
725
blister or run. When the varnish has
become hard, the vessel is taken out and
another coat is put on, which is submitted
to heat as before. This process may be
repeated till the judgment of the opera-
tor tells him that it is no longer advisable.
Some operators mix the coloring mat-
ter directly with the varnish; when this is
done, care should be taken that the pig-
ment is first reduced to an impalpable
powder, and then thoroughly mixed with
the liquid.
LABEL VARNISHES.
I. — Sandarac 3 ounces av.
Mastic | ounce av.
Venice turpentine 150 grains
Alcohol 16 fluidounces
Macerate with repeated stirring until
solution is effected, and then filter.
The paper labels are first sized with
diluted mucilage, then dried, and then
coated with this varnish. If the labels
have been written with water-soluble
inks or color, they are first coated with 2
coats of collodion, and then varnished.
II. — The varnished labels of stock ves-
sels often suffer damage from the spilling
of the contents and the dripping after
much pouring.
Formalin gelatin is capable of with-
standing the baneful influence of ether,
benzine, water, spirit of wine, oil, and
most substances. The following method
of applying the preservative is recom-
mended: Having thoroughly cleaned
the surface of the vessel, paste the label
on and allow it to dry well. Give it a
coat of thin collodion to protect the
letters from being dissolved out or caused
to run, then after a few minutes paint
over it a coat of gelatin warmed to
fluidity — 5 to 25 — being careful to cover
in all the edges. Just before it solidifies
go over it with a tuft of cotton dipped
into a 40 per cent formalin solution. It
soon dries and becomes as glossy as
varnish, and may be coated again and
again without danger of impairing the
clear white of the label or decreasing its
transparency.
Leather Varnishes. — I. — -An excellent
varnish for leather can be made from the
following recipe: Heat 400 pounds of
boiled oil to 212° F., and add little by
little 2 pounds of bichromate of potash,
keeping the same temperature. The
addition of the bichromate should take
about 15 minutes. Raise to 310° F.,
and add gradually during 1 hour at that
temperature, 40 pounds Prussian blue.
Heat for 3 hours more, gradually raising
to 482° to 572° F., with constant stirring.
In the meantime, heat together at 392°
F., for | an hour, 25 pounds linseed oil,
35 pounds copal, 75 pounds turpentine,
and 7 pounds ceresine. Mix the two
varnishes, and dilute, if necessary, when
cold with turpentine. The varnish should
require to be warmed for easy application
with the brush.
II. — Caoutchouc, 1 part; petroleum,
1 part; carbon bisulphide, 1 part;
shellac, 4 parts; bone black, 2 parts;
alcohol, 20 parts. First the caoutchouc
is brought together with carbon bisul-
phide in a well-closed bottle and stood
aside for a few days. As soon as the
caoutchouc is soaked add the petroleum
and the alcohol, then the finely powdered
shellac, and heat to about 125° F. When
the liquid appears pretty clear, which
indicates the solution of all substances,
the bone black is added by shaking
thoroughly and the varnish is at once
filled in bottles which are well closed.
This pouch composition excels in drying
quickly and produces upon the leather a
smooth, deep black coating, which pos-
sesses a certain elasticity.
METAL VARNISHES.
The purpose of these varnishes is to
protect the metals from oxidation and to
render them glossy.
Aluminum Varnish. — The following is
a process giving a special varnish for
aluminum, but it may also be employed
for other metals, giving a coating unal-
terable and indestructible by water or
atmospheric influences: Dissolve, prefer-
ably in an enameled vessel, 10 parts, by
weight, of gum lac in 30 parts of liquid
ammonia. Heat on the water bath for
about 1 hour and cool. The aluminum
to be covered with this varnish is care-
fully cleaned in potash, and, having
applied the varnish, the article is placed
in a stove, where it is heated, during a
certain time, at a suitable temperature
(about 1062° F.).
Brass Varnishes Imitating Gold. — I. —
An excellent gold varnish for brass ob-
jects, surgical or optical instruments,
etc., is prepared as follows: Gum lac, in
grains, pulverized, 30 parts; dragon's
blood, 1 part; red sanders wood, 1 part;
pounded glass, 10 parts; strong alcohol,
600 parts; after sufficient maceration,
filter. The powdered o-Jass simply serves
for accelerating the dissolving, by inter-
posing between the particles of gum lac
and opal.
II. — Reduce to powder, 160 parts, by
weight, of turmeric of best quality, and
pour over it 2 parts, by weight, of saffron,
726
VARNISHES
and 1,700 parts, by weight, of spirit;
digest in a warm place 24 hours, and
filter. Next dissolve 80 parts, by weight,
of dragon's blood; 80 parts, by weight, of
sandarac; 80 parts, by weight, of elemi
gum; 50 parts, by weight, of gamboge; 70
parts, by weight, of seedlac. Mix these
substances with 250 parts, by weight, of
crushed glass, place them in a flask, and
pour over this mixture the alcohol colored
as above described. Assist the solution by
means of a sand or water bath, and filter
at the close of the operation. This is a
fine varnish for brass scientific instru-
ments.
Bronze Varnishes. — I. — The follow-
ing process yields a top varnish for
bronze goods and other metallic ware in
the most varying shades, the varnish ex-
celling, besides, in high gloss and dur-
ability. Fill in a bottle, pale shellac,
best quality, 40 parts, by weight; pow-
dered Florentine lake, 12 parts, by
weight; gamboge, 30 parts, by weight;
dragon's blood, also powdered, 6 parts,
by weight; and add 400 parts, by weight,
of spirit of wine. This mixture is al-
lowed to dissolve, the best way being to
heat the bottle on the water bath until the
boiling point of water is almost reached,
shaking from time to time until all is
dissolved. Upon cooling, decant the
liquid, which constitutes a varnish of
dark-red color, from any sediment that
may be present. In a second bottle dis-
solve in the same manner 24 parts, by
weight, of gamboge in 400 parts, by
weight, of spirit of wine, from which will
result a varnish of golden-yellow tint.
According to the hue desired, mix the
red varnish with the yellow variety, pro-
ducing in this way any shade from the
deepest red to the color of gold. If re-
quired, dilute with spirit of wine. The
application of the varnish should be con-
ducted as usual, that is, the article should
be slightly warm, it being necessary to
adhere strictly to a certain temperature,
which can be easily determined by trials
and maintained by experience. In order
to give this varnish a pale-yellow to
greenish-yellow tone, mix 10 drops of
picric acid with about 3 parts, by weight,
of spirit of wine, and add to a small
quantity of the varnish some of this mix-
ture until the desired shade has been
reached. Picric acid is poisonous, and
the keeping of varnish mixed with this
acid in a closed bottle is not advisable,
because there is danger of an explosion.
Therefore, it is best to prepare only s )
much varnish at one time as is necessary
for the immediate purpose.
Brown Varnish. — An excellent and
quickly drying brown varnish for metals
is made by dissolving 20 ounces of gum
kino and 5 ounces of gum benjamin in 60
ounces of the best cold alcohol; 20 ounces
of common shellac and 2 ounces of thick
turpentine in 36 ounces of alcohol also
give a very good varnish. If the brown
is to have a reddish tint, dissolve 50
ounces of ruby shellac, 5 ounces balsam
of copaiba, and 2 to 5 ounces of aniline
brown, with or without ^ to 1 ounce of
aniline violet, in 150 ounces of alcohol.
Copper Varnishes. — These two are for
polished objects:
I. — One hundred and ten parts of
sandarac and 30 parts of rosin, dissolved
in sufficient quantity of alcohol; 5 parts
of glycerine are to be added.
II. — Sandarac 10 parts
Rosin 3 parts
Glycerine i part
Alcohol, a sufficient quantity.
Dissolve the two rosins in sufficient
alcohol and add the glycerine.
Decorative Metal Varnishes. —
I II III IV
Per Per Per Per
Cent Cent Cent Cent
Seedlac 11.5
Amber 7.6 .. .. 13.5
Gamboge.... 7.6 .. .. ; -.•'„.
Dragon's
blood 0.18 .. .. :-i..-
Saffron 0.16 ;.
Sandarac 11.2 15.9 16.6
Mastic 6.5 14.0 3.4
Elemi 3.3
Venice tur-
pentine .. 1.0 3.4
Camphor 1.5
Aloe 7.0
Alcohol ..72.96 77.5 66.1 63.2
As will be seen, only natural colors are
used. The so-called "gold lacquer" is
composed as follows: Sandarac, 6.25
parts; mastic, 3 parts; shellac, 12.5 parts;
Venice turpentine, 2.5 parts; aloe, 0.75
parts; gamboge, 3 parts; alcohol, 72
parts. The solution is filtered. Ap-
plied in a thin coating this varnish shows
a handsome^ golden shade. Other metal
varnishes have the following composi-
tion:
V VI VII
Per Per Per
Cent Cent Cent
Shellac 17.5 .. 18.0
Yellow acaroid gum.. 13.1 25.0
Manila 8.0 9.0
Alcohol.. ..69.4 67.0 63.0
VARNISHES
727
Gold Varnish. — I. — A good gold var-
nish for coating moldings which pro-
duces great brilliancy is prepared as
follows: Dissolve 3 pounds of shellac in
30 quarts of alcohol, 5 pounds of mas-
tic in 5 quarts of alcohol, 3 pounds of
sandarac in 5 quarts of alcohol, 5 pounds
of gamboge in 5 quarts of alcohol, 1 pound
of dragon's blood in 1 quart of alcohol,
3 pounds of saunders in 5 quarts of alco-
hol, 3 pounds of turpentine in 3 quarts
of alcohol. After all the ingredients have
been dissolved separately in the given
quantity of absolute alcohol and filtered,
the solutions are mixed at a moderate
heat.
II. — A varnish which will give a
splendid luster, and any gold color from
deep red to golden yellow, is prepared by
taking 50 ounces pale shellac, 15 pounds
Florentine lake (precipitated from cochi-
neal or redwood decoction by alum onto
strach, kaolin, or gypsum), 25 ounces of
sandalwood, and 8 ounces of dragon's
blood. These in fine powder are dis-
solved on the water bath, in 500 ounces
rectified spirit. The spirit must boil
and remain, with occasional shaking, for
2 to 3 hours on the bath. Then cool and
decant. In the meantime heat in an-
other flask on the bath 30 ounces of
gamboge in 500 ounces of the same spirit.
The two liquids are mixed until the right
color needed for the particular purpose
in hand is obtained. Dilute with spirit
if too thick. The addition of a little
picric acid gives a greenish-yellow bronze
but makes the varnish very liable to ex-
plode. These varnishes are applied to
gently warmed surfaces with a soft
bristle brush.
Gold Varnish for Tin. — This is obtained
in the following manner: Spread out 5
parts, by weight, of finely powdered
crystallized copper acetate in a warm
spot, allowing it to lie for some time; then
grind the powder, which will have ac-
quired a light-brown shade, with oil of
turpentine and add, with stirring, 15
parts, by weight, of fat copal varnish
heated to 140° F. When the copper
acetate has dissolved (in about I hour),
the mass is filled in a bottle and allowed
to stand warm, for several days, shaking
frequently. The gold varnish is then
ready for use. Coat the articles uni-
formly with it, and heat in a drying
chamber, whereupon, according to the
degree of temperature, varying colora-
tions are obtained, changing from green
to yellow, then golden yellow, and finally
orange to brown. When good copal var-
nish is employed, the varnish will adhere
very firmly, so that the article can be
pressed without damage.
Iron Varnishes. — I. — A varnish ob-
tained by dissolving wax in turpentine is
useful. It gives a fairly hard coat, but
has the drawback of filling up fine
grooves, and so injuring the appearance
of many metal ornaments.
II. — Shellac, 15 pounds; Siam benja-
min, 13 pounds; alcohol, 80 pounds;
formylchloride, 20 pounds.
III. — Sierra Leone copal, 6 pounds;
dammar, 18 pounds; oleic acid, 3 pounds;
alcohol, 40 pounds; oil of turpentine, 20
pounds; formylchloride, 15 pounds. The
formylchloride not only effects the rapid
drying necessary to prevent the varnish
gravitating into hollows, but enables
the alcohol to make a perfect solution of
the rosin. The varnishes are excessively
volatile, and must be stored accordingly.
Stove Varnishes. —
Shellac 12 parts
Manila copal 14 parts
Rosin 12 parts
Gallipot 2 parts
Benzoin 1 part
Lampblack.. 5 parts
Nigrosin, spirit-sol-
uble 1? parts
Alcohol 250 parts
Tin Varnishes. — I. — For Tin Boxes. —
In 75 parts of alcohol dissolve 15 parts
of shellac, 2 parts of Venice turpentine,
and 8 parts of sandarac.
II. — For Trays and Other Tinware. —
The ground is prepared by adding to the
white lead the tinting colors ground in
good rubbing varnish and half oil of
turpentine. For drier an admixture of
"terebine" is recommended. With this
lean and dull paint, coat the tins 2 or 3
times and blend. Next, grain with
water or vinegar glaze, and varnish with
pure Zanzibar copal varnish, or finest
amber table-top varnish. There are
other tried methods for varnishing tin,
which are applicable for new goods,
manufactured in large quantities, while
they are less advantageous for the res-
toration of old, repeatedly used articles.
VARNISH SUBSTITUTES.
A substitute for varnish is produced
by adding to 100 parts of casein 10 to
25 parts of a 1 to 10 per cent soap solu-
tion and then 20 to 25 parts of slaked
lime. . The mixture is carefully kneaded
until a perfectly homogeneous mass re-
sults. Then gradually add 25 to 40
parts of turpentine oil and sufficient
728
VARNISHES— VETERINARY FORMULAS
water for the mass to assume the con-
sistency of varnish. If it is desired to
preserve it for some time a little ammonia
is added so that the casein lime does not
separate. The surrogate is considerably
cheaper than varnish and dries so quick-
Jy that paint ground with it may be ap-
plied twice in quick succession.
Zapon Varnishes. — In the case of
many articles which have been colored
mechanically or by the battery, par-
ticularly with large pieces, an opaque
varnish is used as a protection against
atmospheric influences. The so-called
brassoline, of a brown color, negroline,
black, and zapon. which is colorless, are
employed, according to the color of the
article. The last-named varnish is most
commonly used, and gives a fine and
durable coating, insoluble in almost all
liquids which would come into consider-
ation here, except that it will wash off in
soap and water. Zapon varnish is a
solution of collodion cotton and camphor
in amyl acetate and amyl alcohol, and
was formerly used to preserve old manu-
scripts and legal documents. In the
process of zaponizing, the article is
slightly warmed and immersed in the
varnish, or the latter is applied with a
brush. The solution is very durable,
and has the advantage that after drying
it will not show edges, rings, or spots.
Zapon varnish which has become too
thick must be diluted, and the brushes
must be kept from becoming dry. If it
is desired to give an ' especially warm
tone, the article is treated with brushes
which have been drawn over beeswax or
mineral wax.
For the production of zapon or celluloid
varnish, pour 20 parts of acetone over 2
parts of colorless celluloid waste, allow-
ing it to stand for several days in a closed
vessel, stirring frequently until the whole
has dissolved into a clear, thick mass.
Admix 78 parts of amyl acetate and clarify
the zapon varnish by allowing it to settle
for weeks.
VARNISH, HOW TO POUR OUT:
See Castor Oil.
VARNISHES, INSULATING:
See Insulation.
VARNISHES, PHOTOGRAPHIC RE-
TOUCHING:
See Photography.
VARNISH REMOVERS:
See Cleaning Preparations and Meth-
ods.
VASELINE STAINS, TO REMOVE
FROM CLOTHING:
See Cleaning Preparations and Meth-
ods.
VASOLIMENTUM.
This unguent is of two kinds, liquid
and semi-solid. The former is prepared
by mixing 500 parts of olein, 250 parts of
alcoholic ammonia, and 1,000 parts of liq-
uid paraffine, the whole being warmed
until completely dissolved, and any loss
in weight made up by addition of spirit.
The semi-solid preparation is made of
the same ingredients, except the paraffine
salve is substituted for the liquid. The
product is used as a basis for ointments
in place of yasogene, and can be in-
corporated with a number of medica-
ments, such as 10 per cent of naphthol,
20 per cent of guaiacol, 25 per cent of
juniper tar, 5 per cent of thiol, 6 per
cent of iodine, 5 per cent of creosote, 10
per cent of ichthyol, 5 per cent of creolin,
2 per cent of menthol, etc.
VAT ENAMELS AND VARNISHES:
See Varnishes.
VEGETABLES, TESTS FOR CANNED:
See Foods.
VEGETABLE PARCHMENT:
See Parchment.
VICHY:
See Waters.
VICHY SALT:
See Salts (Effervescent).
Veterinary Formulas
FOR BIRDS:
Asthma in Canaries. —
Tincture capsicum. . . 5 drachms
Spirits chloroform ... 90 minims
Iron citrate, soluble. . 45 grains
Fennel water. ....... 3£ ounces
Give a few drops on lump of sugar in
the cage once daily.
Colas.—
Tincture ferri per-
chloride 1 drachm
Acid hydrochloric, dil. | drachm
Glycerine l| drachms
Aqua camphor, q. s . . 1 ounce
Use 3 to 6 drops in drinking water.
Ointment for Healing. —
Peru balsam 60 grains
Cola cream 1 ounce
Apply.
VETERINARY FORMULAS
729
Constipation in Birds. —
F. E. senna 2 drachms
Syrup manna 1 ounce
Fennel water, q. s. . . . 4 ounces
Give a few drops on sugar in cage
once daily.
Diarrhoea. —
Tincture iron chloride 2 drachms
Paregoric 2 drachms
Caraway water 3^ ounces
Give few drops on lump of sugar once
daily.
Mocking-Bird Food. —
Crackers 8 ounces
Corn 9 ounces
Rice • . 2 ounces
Hemp seed 1 ounce
Capsicum 10 grains
Mix and reduce to a coarse powder.
Foods for Red Birds. —
Sunflower seed 8 ounces
Hemp seed 16 ounces
Canary seed 10 ounces
Cracked wheat 8 ounces
Unshelled rice 6 ounces
Mix and grind to a coarse powder.
Canary-Bird Food. —
Yolk of egg (dry) .... 2 ounces
Poppy heads (pow-
dered) 1 ounce
Cuttlefish bone (pow-
dered) 1 ounce
Sugar 2 ounces
Powdered crackers. . . 8 ounces
Bird Tonic. —
Powdered capsicum.
Powdered gentian.. .
Ferri peroxide. .
Powdered sugar
20
1
grains
drachm
ounce
ounce
Syrup, q. s.
Put a piece size of pea in cage daily.
Tonic. —
I. — Tincture cinchona ... \ drachm
Tincture iron. ... v ... 2 drops
Glycerine 1 drachm
Caraway water 1 ounce
Put a few drops on lump of sugar in
cage daily.
II. — Compound t i n c t ure
cinchona 2 drachms
Compound tincture
gentian 2 drachms
Syrup orange 1 ounce
Simple elixir 2£ ounces
Put a few drops on lump of sugar in
the cage daily.
Antiseptic Wash for Cage Birds. —
Chinosol, F 2 drachms
Sugar (burnt) 20 minims
Aqua cinnamon 4 ounces
Aqua 20 ounces
Add 1 or 2 teaspoonfuls to the bath
water and allow the birds to use it, when
it will quickly destroy all parasites or
germs in the feathers. To wash out the
cages, use a mixture of 1 tablespoonful
in a pint of hot water.
Mixed Bird Seed. —
Sicily canary 10 ounces
German rape 2 ounces
Russian hemp 1 ounce
German millet 3 ounces
FOR HORSES AND CATTLE:
Blistering. — Tincture cantharides, 1
ounce; camphorated oil, \ ounce. Apply
a portion with friction 3 times a day un-
til a blister shows. As it subsides apply
again.
Horse -Colic Remedy. — I. — In making
a horse-colic remedy containing tincture
of opium, ether and chloroform, to be
given in tablespoonful doses, apportion
the ingredients about equally, and mix
the dose with a pint of water.
Other formulas are:
II. — Chloroform anodyne 1 ounce
Spirit of nitrous
ether 2 ounces
Linseed oil 13 ounces
Give in one dose and repeat in an hour
if necessary.
Condition Powders. — I. — Sulphur, 2
pounds; Glauber salts, 1 pound; black
antimony, \ pound; powdered blood-
root, 4 ounces; copperas, \ pound; rosin,
\ pound; asafetida, 2 ounces; saltpeter
\ pound. Powder and mix well.
II. — Gentian, 4 ounces; potassium ni-
trate, 1 ounce; sulphur, 4 ounces; ginger
(African), 4 ounces; antimony, 4 ounces;
rosin, 2 ounces; Foenugreek, 2 ounces;
capsicum, 2 ounces; serpentaria, 2 ounces;
sodium sulphate, 9 ounces; flaxseed meal,
16 ounces. All ingredients in fine pow-
der. Dose: 1 tablespoonful in feed twice
a day.
Veterinary Dose Table. — For a colt 1
month old give -/? of the full dose; 3
months old, -yV; 6 months old, \\ 1 year
old, \\ 2 years old, A; 3 years old, f.
Fluids for cattle usually the same dose
as for the horse. Solids for cattle usu-
ally 1 J times the dose for the horse.
750
VETERINARY FORMULAS
Drug.
Horses.
Cattle.
Aloes
1 to 8 dr.
1 to 3 dr.
i to 2 oz.
1 to 3 dr.
Aqua ammonia. ....
Ammonia bromide . .
Ammonia carbonate.
Ammonia iodide ....
Antimony black ....
3 to 5 dr.
i to 2 oz.
1 to 3 dr.
\ to 3 dr.
15 to 50 gr.
3 to 5 dr.
3 to 5 dr.
Jto 2oz.
2 to 5 dr.
1 to 5 dr.
Arsenic
5 to 12 gr.
5 to 12 gr.
Asafetida
Belladonna leaves. . .
Buchu leaves
Calaber bean
1 to 4 dr.
\ to 2 oz.
| to 3 oz.
4 to 12 gr.
| to 2 dr.
to 2 oz.
to 2 oz.
to 4oz.
4 to 12 gr.
2 to 3 dr.
Cantharides
Capsicum
5 to 25 gr.
1 to 2 dr.
1 to 2 dr.
12 to 30 gr.
1 to 3 dr.
2 to 4 dr.
Chalk preparation. . .
Chloral hydrate
2 to 3oz.
| toll oz.
$ to 1 dr.
2 to 4 oz.
\ to \\ oz.
1 to 2 dr.
Cinchona
Copper sulphate
Creolin
1 to 3 dr.
i to 2 dr.
1 to 5 dr.
i to 2 oz.
| to 3 dr.
2 to 5 dr.
Creosote
Digitalis leaves.
15 to 30 min.
10 to 20 gr.
Ito 2 dr.
20 to 50 gr.
Dover powder
i to 2 dr.
i to 2 dr.
Ergot
Ether
J to 1 oz.
| to 2J oz.
i to 1 oz.
1 to 3 oz.
Ex. belladonna fluid .
i to 2 dr.
1 to 5 dr
2 to 4 dr.
Extract cannabis in-
dica
\ to \ dr.
i to 1 dr.
Foenugreek
Gallnuts
\ to 3 oz.
2 to 4 dr.
1 to 3 oz.
to 1 oz.
Gentian
2 to 6 dr.
to 1 oz.
Ginger
3 to 5 dr.
to 2 oz.
Ipecac
i to 2 dr.
1 to 2 dr.
to 3 dr.
Iron sulphate
ito 2 dr.
1 to 2 oz.
Ito 3 dr.
1 to 3 oz.
Limewater
Magnesia sulphate. . .
3 to 6oz.
ito 31b.
2 to 4 dr.
3 to 6 oz.
ito 31b.
2 to 6 dr.
Nux vomica
Oil castor
i to 1 dr.
| to 1 pt.
2 to 3 dr.
i to 1 pt.
OilCroton
Oil juniper
Oil linseed
10 to 20 min.
Ito 2 dr.
to 1 pt.
1 to 2 dr.
§to 2 dr.
| to 2 pt.
Oil olive
to 2 pt.
1 to 2 pt.
Oil savin
1 to 3 dr.
\ to 2 oz.
1 to 3 dr.
$ to 2 oz.
Opium
Potassium iodide. . . .
Potassium nitrate. . .
Potassium sulphide. .
i to 2 dr.
2 to 4 dr.
1 to 2 oz.
1 to 2 dr.
10 to 30 gr.
i to 2 dr.
2 to 6 dr.
1 to 2 oz.
1 to 2 dr.
20 to 40 gr.
Rhubarb
\ to 1 oz.
1 to 2 oz.
Santonine
Sodium hyposulphite
Sodium sulphate. . . .
Sodium sulphite ....
Spirits ammonia, aro-
matic
15 to40gr.
i to 1 oz.
| to 2 Ib.
J to 1 oz.
i to 2 oz.
i to 1 dr.
1 to 3 oz.
Ito 21b.
1 to 3 oz.
1 to 3 oz.
Spirits chloroform. . .
Spirits nitrous ether .
Spirits peppermint. .
Strychnine sulphite. .
i to 1 oz.
1 to 3 oz.
1 to 2 oz.
i to 1 gr.
2 to 4 oz.
1 to 2 oz.
1 to 3 oz.
1 to 2 oz.
Ito 3gr.
2 to 4 oz.
Tincture aconite ....
5 to 30 min.
1 to 4 dr
5 to 20 min.
Tincture belladonna
Tincture cantharides
Tincture columbo. . .
Tincture digitalis
Tincture iron
Tincture ginger
Tincture nux vomica
Tincture opium
Tobacco
1 to 3 dr.
1 to 2 oz.
i to 2 oz.
1 to 3 dr.
1 to 2 oz.
i to 2 oz.
2 to 4 dr.
i to 3 oz.
i to 1 dr.
2 to 4 dr.
to 1 oz.
to 2 oz.
2 to 4 dr.
1 to 2 oz.
1 to 2 oz.
$ to 1 oz.
1 to 3 oz.
i to 1 dr.
Vinegar
1 to 3 oz.
2 to 6 oz.
Whisky
2 to 10 oz.
White vitriol
5 to 15 gr.
5 to 15 gr.
Astringent. —
I. — Opium 12 grains
Camphor \ drachm
Catechu 1 drachm
One dose.
II. — Opium 12 grains
Camphor 1 drachm
Ginger 2 drachms
Castile soap 2 drachms
Anise 3 drachms
Licorice 2 drachms
Contracted Hoof or Sore Feet. —
I.— Lard
Yellow wax.
Linseed oil !-Equal parts.
Venice turpentine.. . .
Tar J
Apply to the edge of the hair once a
day.
II. — Rosin . 4 ounces
Lard 8 ounces
Melt and add
Powdered vertigris. . . 1 ounce
Stir well; when partly cool add
Turpentine 2 ounces
Apply to hoof about 1 inch down from
the hair.
Cough. —
I. — Sodii bromide
Creosote water. . . .
Fennel water
Half tablespoonful 4
II. — Ammonia bromide.
Fennel water
Syrup licorice
Teaspoonful 4 times
Cow Powder. —
Powdered catechu.
Powdered ginger. . .
Powdered gentian.
Powdered opium...
. . 180 grains
2 ounces
4 ounces
times daily.
. . . 180 grains
4 ounces
4 ounces
daily.
60 grains
240 grains
240 grains
30 grains
CUTS, WOUNDS, SORES.
I. — Tincture opium, 2 ounces; tannin,
\ ounce.
II. — Tincture aloes, 1 ounce; tincture
of myrrh, } ounce; tincture of opium, $
ounce; water, 4 ounces. Apply night
and morning.
III. — Lard, 4 ounces; beeswax, 4
ounces; rosin, 2 ounces; carbolic acid, |
ounce.
Diarrhrea. —
I. — Opium 15 grains
Peppermint J ounce
Linseed meal 1 ounce
Give half in morning and remainder
in evening in a pint of warm water.
VETERINARY FORMULAS
731
II. — Prepared chalk 6 ounces
Catechu 3 ounces
Opium 1| ounces
Ginger 3 ounces
Gentian 3 ounces
One powder 3 times a day in half a
pint of warm water. One-sixth of dose
for calves.
Diuretic Ball. —
I. — Oil juniper
Rosin
Saltpeter
Camphor
Castile soap
Flaxseed meal.. . .
Make 1 pill.
II.— Rosin.
Potassium nitrate.
Po buchu leaves. .
Dose: 1 twice a day.
Drying Drink. —
Powdered alum
Armenian bole
Powdered juniper ber-
ries .
\ drachm
2 drachms
2 drachms
\ drachm
1 ounce
90 grains
90 grains
45 grains
> ounces
I ounces
\ ounce
Once daily in 1 quart of warm gruel.
Epizo'oty or Pinkeye. —
Sublimed sulphur .... \ ounce
Epsom salt 1 ounce
Charcoal \ ounce
Extract licorice 1 ounce
Fever. —
I. — Salicylic acid f ounce
Sodium bicarbonate.. \ ounce
Magnesium sulphate. 10 ounces
Give half in quart of warm bran water
at night.
II. — Spirits niter 3 ounces
Tincture aconite 2 drachms
Fluid extract bella-
donna \ ounce
Nitrate potash 2 ounces
Muriate ammonia. .. 2 ounces
Water, q. s 1 quart
Dose: Teaspoonful every 2 or 3 hours
till better.
Heaves. — I. — Balsam copaiba, 1
ounce; spirits of turpentine, 2 ounces;
balsam fir, 1 ounce; cider vinegar, 16
ounces.
Tablespoonful once a day.
II. — Saltpeter, 1 ounce; indigo, \
ounce; rain or distilled water, 4 pints.
Dose: 1 pint twice a day.
Hide Bound. —
Elecampane 2 ounces
Licorice root. 2 ounces
Fcenugreek 2 ounces
Rosin 2 ounces
Copperas \ ounce
Ginger 2 drachms
Gentian 1 drachm
Saltpeter 1 drachm
Valerian 1 drachm
Linseed meal 3 ounces
Sublimed sulphur. ... 1 ounce
Black antimony 4 drachms
Tablespoonful twice a day.
HORSE EMBROCATIONS AND LINI-
MENTS.
I. — Camphor 1 ounce
Acetic acid 15 ounces
Alcohol 18 ounces
Oil turpentine 51 ounces
Eggs 6
Distilled witch hazel . 45 ounces
II. — Iodine 50 grains
Pot iodide 125 grains
Soap liniment 6 ounces
INFLUENZA.
I. — Ammonia muriate. . .
Gum camphor
Pot chloride
Extract licorice, pow-
dered
Molasses, q. s.
JV^ake a mass. Dose: Tablespoonful
in form of pill night and morning.
II. — Ammonium chloride.
Potassium nitrate.. . .
Potassium sulphate in
little crystals
Licorice powder
ounces
ounce
1 ounce
2 ounces
30 parts
30 parts
100 parts
65 parts
Mix. Dose: A tablespoonful, in a
warm mash, 3 times daily.
INFLAMMATION OF THE UDDER.
I. — Salicylic acid 40 grains
Mercurial ointment. . 1 ounce
Liniment of camphor 3£ ounces
Apply and rub the udder carefully
twice a day.
II. — Belladonna root 1 drachm
Oil turpentine 1 ounce
Camphor 1 drachm
Solution green soap, q. s. 6 ounces
Mix and make a liniment. Bathe the
udder several times with hot water.
Dry and apply above liniment.
MANGE.
Sulphur is a specific for mange; the
trouble consists in its application, "The
732
VETERINARY FORMULAS
old-fashioned lotion of train oil and
black sulphur serves well enough, but for
stabled animals something is wanted
which will effectually destroy the para-
sites in harness and saddlery without
injury to those expensive materials.
The creosote emulsions and coal-tar
derivatives generally are fatal to the
sarcopts if brought into actual contact,
but a harness pad with ridges of ac-
cumulated grease is a sufficient retreat
for a few pregnant females during a per-
functory disinfection, and but a few days
will be needed to reproduce a new and
vigorous stock. A cheap and efficient
application can be made by boiling to-
gether flowers of sulphur and calcis hydras
in the proportion of 4 parts of the former
to 1 of the latter, and 100 of water, for
half an hour. It should be applied warm,
or immediately after washing with soft
soap.
Milk Powder for Cows. — For increas-
ing the flow of milk, in cows, Hager rec-
ommends the following mixture:
Potassium nitrate. ... 1 part
Alum 1 part
Sublimed sulphur. ... 1 part
Prepared chalk 1 part
White bole 2 parts
Red clover 5 parts
Anise 10 parts
Fennel 10 parts
Salt 10 parts
All should be in tolerably fine powder
and should be well mixed. The direc-
tions are to give 1 or 2 handfuls with the
morning feed.
LAXATIVES.
I. — Aloes 1 drachm
Soap 12 drachms
Caraway 4 drachms
Ginger 4 drachms
Treacle, q. s.
Make 4 balls. Dose: 1 daily.
II. — Rochelle salts 2 ounces
Aloes, powdered 150 grains
Linseed meal 150 grains
One dose, given in warm water.
Lice.—
Crude oil 1 ounce
Oil tar 1 ounce
Oil cedar 1 drachm
Cottonseed oil 5 ounces
Apply to parts.
DOMESTIC PETS.
The sarcoptic itch of the dog, as well
as that of the cat, is transmissible to man.
The Tinea tonsurans, the so-called
barbers' itch, due to a trychophyton, and
affecting both the dog and cat, is highly
contagious to man. Favus, Tinea favos,
caused by achorion schoenleini, of both
animals, is readily transmissible to hu-
man beings. The dog carries in his
intestines many kinds of tcsnia (tape-
worm), among them Ticnia echinococ-
cus, the eggs of which cause hydatic
cysts. Hydatic cysts occur in persons
who are always surrounded with dogs,
or in constant contact with them.
Aviar diphtheria (i. e., the diphtheria
of birds), caused by at least two microbes
(bacillus of Klebs-Loeffler and bacillus
coli), may easily be transmitted to man
and cause in him symptoms analogous
to those of true diphtheritic angina.
Parrots are subject to an infectious
enteritis which may be communicated
to human beings, giving rise to the so-
called psittacosis (from the Greek,
psitta, a parrot), of which there have
been a number of epidemics in France.
It is determined by the bacillus of No-
card.
Human tuberculosis is certainly trans-
mitted to dogs, cats, and birds. Cadiot,
Gibert, Roger, Benjamin, Petit, and
Basset, as well as other observers, cite
cases where dogs, cats, and parrots,
presenting all the lesions of tuberculosis,
were shown to have contracted it from
contact with human beings; while there
are no recorded cases, there can scarcely
be a natural doubt that man may, in a
similar manner, become attainted through
them, and that their tuberculosis con-
stitutes an actual danger to man.
Need we recall here the extraordinary
facility with which hydrophobia is com-
municated to man through the dog, cat,
etc.?
We may, therefore, conclude that we
should not permit these animals to take
up so much space in our apartments,
nor should they be petted and caressed
either by adults or children in the reck-
less manner common in many house-
holds. The disgusting habit of teaching
animals to take bits of food, lumps of
sugar, etc., from between the lips of
members of the family is also to be
shunned.
Finally, any or all of them should be
banished from the house the moment
that they display certain morbid symp-
toms. Besides, in certain cases, there
should be a rigid prophylaxis against
certain diseases — as echiuococcus, for
instance.
Worms. — In cats and dogs, round
worms, of which ascaris mystax is the
VETERINARY FORMULAS
most common in cats, are found chiefly
in young animals. This worm has hir-
sute appendages somewhat resembling
a mustache. To treat an animal in-
fected with such "guests," the patient
should be made to fast for 24 hours.
For a small kitten t grain of santonin,
up to a grain or two for large cats, fol-
lowed in an hour by a dose of castor oil,
is recommended. To avoid spilling the
oil on the animal's coat the "doctor"
should have it heated and whipped with
warm milk. Another way to get cats to
take it is to smear it on the bottoms of
their front feet, when they will lick it off.
Areca nut, freshly ground by the drug-
gist himself and administered in liberal
doses, say 30 to 60 grains, will usually
drive out any worms in the alimentary
canal.
It is important that animals success-
fully treated for worms once should
undergo the treatment a second or third
time, as all the parasites may not have
been killed or removed the first time,
or their progeny may have developed in
the field vacated by the parents.
The following is an effective formula:
German wormseed,
powdered 1 drachm
Fluid extract of spi-
gelia 3 drachms
Fluid extract of senna. 1 drachm
Fluid extract of vale-
rian 1 drachm
Syrup of buckthorn . . 2 ounces
Dose: From | to 1 teaspoonful night
and morning.
Foot Itch.— The itch that affects the
feet of poultry is contagious in a most
insidious way. The various birds of a
poultry yard in which the disease is
prevalent, rarely contract it until after a
comparatively long period of exposure,
but sooner or later every bird will con-
tract it. One infected bird is enough to
infect a whole yard full, and once in-
fected, it is exceedingly difficult to get
rid of. The disease, however, affects
birds only.
The treatment is simple. Having
softened the feet by keeping them for
some minutes in tepid water, the scabs
that cover them are carefully detached,
avoiding, as far as possible, causing them
to bleed, and taking the precaution of
throwing every scab into the fire. The
feet are then carefully dried, with a bit of
soft cotton material, which should after-
wards be burned; then the entire surface
is covered with ointment (Unguentum sul->
phuris kalinum). An alcoholic solution
of Canada balsam is preferred by some.
Protect the ointment by a proper ap-
pliance, and allow it to remain in contact
2 or 3 days. At the end of this time re-
move the applications and wash off with
tepid suds. The bird will generally be
found cured, but if not, repeat the treat-
ment— removing the remaining scabs,
which will be found soft enough without
resorting to soaking in tepid water, and
apply the ointment directly.
There is another method of treatment
that has been found successful, which
not only cures the infected birds but
prevents the infection of others. It is
simply providing a sand bath for the
birds, under a little shed, where they can
indulge themselves in rolling and scratch-
ing, the bath being composed of equal
parts fine sand, charcoal in fine powder,
ashes, and flowers of sulphur, sifted
together. .The bath should be renewed
every week. In the course of a few
weeks the cure is complete.
Foods. —
I. — Powdered egg shell or
phosphate of lime. 4 ounces
Iron sulphate 4 ounces
Powdered capsicum.. 4 ounces
Powdered Foenugreek 2 ounces
Powdered black pep-
per 1 ounce
Silver sand 2 ounces
Powdered lentils .... 6 ounces
A tablespoonful to be mixed with
sufficient feed for 20 hens.
II. — Oyster shell, ground. 5 ounces
Magnesia 1 ounce
Calcium carbonate . . 3 ounces
Bone, ground 1^ ounces
Mustard bran 1J ounces
Capsicum 1 ounce
Powders. —
I. — Cayenne pepper 2 parts
Allspice 4 parts
Ginger 6 parts
Powder and mix well together. A
teaspoonful to be mixed with every
pound of food, and fed 2 or 3 times a
week. Also feed fresh meat, finely
chopped.
II. — Powdered egg shells.. 4 parts
Powdered capsicum. . 4 parts
Sulphate of iron 4 parts
Powdered Fu>nugreek 2 parts
Powdered black pep-
per 1 part
Sand. : 2 parts
Powdered dog biscuit 6 parts
A tablespoonful to be mixed with
sufficient meal or porridge to feed 20
hens.
734
VETERINARY FORMULAS— VINEGAR
Lice Powders. —
I. — Sulphur 4 ounces
Tobacco dust 6 ounces
Cedar oil £ ounce
White hellebore 4 ounces
Crude naphthol 1 ounce
Powdered chalk, q. s. 2 pounds
II. — Sulphur 1 ounce
Carbolic acid | ounce
Crude naphthol 1 ounce
Powdered chalk 1 pound
Roup or Gapes. — Roup in poultry is
caused by the presence of parasites
or entozoa in the windpipe. Young birds
are most commonly affected. The best
method of treatment is to expose the
affected bird to the fumes of heated
carbolic acid until on the point of suffo-
cation. The bird may be placed in a
box with a hot brick, and carbolic acid
placed thereon. The fowls soon re-
cover from the incipient suffocation, and
are almost always freed from the disease.
Care must be taken to burn the parasites
coughed out, and the bodies of any birds
which may die of the disease. The
following powders for the treatment of
"roup" in poultry have been recom-
mended:
I. — Potassium chlorate . . 1 ounce
Powdered cubebs.. .. 1 ounce
Powdered anise | ounce
Powdered licorice.. . . l| ounces
Mix a teaspoonf ul with the food for 20
hens.
II. — Ammonium chloride. 1 ounce
Black antimony J ounce
Powdered anise | ounce
Powdered squill £ ounce
Powdered licorice.. .. 2 ounces
Mix and use in the foregoing.
FOR SHEEP:
Dips. — For the prevention of "scab"
in sheep, which results from the burrow-
ing of an acarus or the destruction of the
parasite when present, various prepara-
tions of a somewhat similar character
are used. The following formulas for
sheep dips are recommended by the
United States Department of Agriculture:
I. — Soap 1 pound
Crude carbolic acid. . 1 pint
Water 50 gallons
Dissolve the soap in a gallon or more
of boiling water, add the acid, and stir
thoroughly.
II. — Fresh skimmed milk . . 1 gallon
Kerosene 2 gallons
Churn together until emulsified, or
mix and put into the mixture a force
pump and direct the stream from the
pump back into the mixture. The
emulsification will take place more
rapidly if the milk be added while boil-
ing hot.
use 1 gallon of this emulsion to each
10 gallons of water required.
Constipation. —
I. — Green soap 150 grains
Linseed oil 1£ ounces
Water 15 ounces
Give -J- every £ hour till action takes
place.
II. — Calomel 1 £ grains
Sugar 15 grains
One dose.
Loss of Appetite. —
Sodium sulphate,
dried 90 grains
Sodium bicarbonate. . 30 grains
Rhubarb 30 grains
Calamus 90 grains
Form the mass into 6 pills. Give one
twice daily.
Inflammation of the Eyes. —
Zinc sulphate 20 grains
Mucilage quince seed. 4 ounces
Distilled water 4 ounces
Bathe eyes twice daily.
Vinegar
I. — Into a hogshead with a large bung-
hole put 1,500 parts, by weight, of honey,
125 parts of carob-pods, cut into pieces,
50 parts of powdered red or white
potassium bitartrate, 125 parts of pow-
dered tartaric acid, 2,000 parts of raisin
stems, 400 parts of the best brewers'
yeast, or 500 of leaven rubbed up in
water; add 16,000 parts of triple vinegar
and 34,000 parts of 40 per cent spirit,
containing no fusel oil. Stir all vigor-
ously together; fill up the hogshead with
hot water (100° F.), close the bunghole
with gauze to keep out insects, and let
the contents of the cask stand for from
4 to 6 weeks or until they have turned to
vinegar. The temperature of the room
should be from 77° to 88° F.
Draw off half the vinegar, and fill the
hogshead up again with 15 parts of soft
water and 1 part of spirit (40 per cent).
Do this 4 times, then draw off all the
vinegar and begin the first process over
• again. This method of making vinegar
is suitable for households and small
dealers, but would not suffice for whole-
VINEGAR
735
sale manufacturers, since it would take I
too long to produce any large amount.
II. — -Put into an upright wine cask
open at the top, 14,000 parts, by weight,
of lukewarm water, 2,333 parts of 60 per
cent alcohol, 500 parts of brown sugar,
125 parts of powdered red or white
potassium bitartrate, 250 parts of good
brewers' yeast, or 125 parts of leaven,
1,125 parts of triple vinegar, and stir
until the substances are dissolved. Lay
a cloth and a perforated cover over the
cask and let it stand in a temperature of
72° to 77° F. from 4 to 6 weeks; then
draw off the vinegar. The thick deposit
at the bottom, the "mother of vinegar,"
so called, can be used in making more
vinegar. Pour over it the same quan-
tities of water and alcohol used at first;
but after the vinegar has been drawn off
twice, half the first quantity of sugar and
potassium bitartrate, and the whole
quantity of yeast, must be added. This
makes excellent vinegar.
III. — A good strong vinegar for house-
hold use may be made from apple or
pear peelings. Put the peelings in a
stone jar (not glazed with lead) or in a
cask, and pour over them water and a
little vinegar, fermented beer, soured
wine, or beet juice. Stir well, cover with
a linen cloth and leave in a warm room.
The vinegar will be ready in 2 or 3 weeks.
IV. — Two wooden casks of any desired
size, with light covers, are provided.
They may be called A and B. A is filled
with vinegar, a tenth part of this is
poured off into B, and an equal amount
of fermented beer, wine, or any other
sweet or vinous liquid, or a mixture of
1,125 parts, by weight, of alcohol, 11,500
to 14,000 parts of water, and 1,125 parts
of beet juice, put into A.
When vinegar is needed, it is drawn
out of B, an equal quantity is poured
from A into B and the same quantity of
vinegar-making liquids put into A. In
this way vinegar is constantly being
made and the process may go on for
years, provided that the casks are large
enough so that not more than a tenth of
the contents of A is used in a week. If
too much is used, so that the vinegar in
the first cask becomes weak, the course
of the vinegar making is disturbed for a
long time, and this fact, whose import-
ance has not been understood, prevents
this method — in its essential principles
the best — from being employed on a
large scale. The surplus in A acts as a
fermentative.
Aromatic Vinegar. — I. — Sixteen ounces
glacial acetic acid, 40 drops oil of cloves,
40 drops oil of rosemary, 40 drops oil
of bergamot, 16 drops oil of neroli, 30
drops oil of lavender, 1 drachm benzoic
acid, ^ ounce camphor, 30 to 40 drops
compound tincture of lavender, 3 ounces
spirit of wine. Dissolve the oils, the ben-
zoic acid, and the camphor in the spirit
of wine, mix with acetic acid and shake
until bright, lastly adding the tincture of
lavender to color.
II. — Dried leaves of rosemary, rue,
wormwood, sage, mint, and lavender
flowers, each \ ounce; bruised nutmegs,
cloves, angelica root, and camphor, each
\ of an ounce; rectified alcohol, 4 ounces;
concentrated acetic acid, 16 ounces.
Macerate the materials for a day in the
alcohol; then add the acid and digest for
1 week longer at a temperature of 490° F.
Finally press put the now aromatised
acid and filter it.
Cider Vinegar. — By "artificial vine-
gar " is meant vinegar made by the quick
method with beechwood shavings. This
cannot be carried out with any economy
on a small scale, and requires a plant.
A modification of the regular plan is as
follows: Remove the head from a good
tight whisky barrel, and put in a wooden
faucet near the bottom. Fill the barrel
with corn cobs and lay an empty coffee
sack over them. Moisten the cobs by
sprinkling them with some good, strong,
natural vinegar, and let them soak for a
few hours. After the lapse of 2 or 3
hours draw off the vinegar and again
moisten the cobs, repeating this until
they are rendered sour throughput,
adding each time 1 quart of high wines
to the vinegar before throwing it back
on the cobs. This prevents the vinegar
from becoming flat, by the absorption of
its acetic acid by the cobs. Mix a
gallon of molasses with a gallon of high
wine and 14 gallons of water and pour it
on the cobs. Soak for 8 hours, then
draw off and pour on the cobs again.
Repeat this twice daily, until the vinegar
becomes sour enough to suit. By hav-
ing a battery of barrels, say 4 barrels
prepared as above, the manufacture may
be made remunerative, especially if the
residue of sugar casks in place of mo-
lasses, and the remnants of ale, etc., from
the bar-rooms around town are used.
All sugar-containing fruit may be utilized
for vinegar making.
VINEGAR, TESTS FOR:
See Foods.
VINEGAR, TOILET:
See Cosmetics.
736
WARTS— WATCHMAKERS' FORMULAS
VIOLET AMMONIA:
See Cosmetics.
VIOLET WATER:
See Perfumes.
VIOLIN ROSIN:
See Rosin.
VIOLIN VARNISH:
See Varnishes.
VISCOSE:
See Celluloid.
VOICE LOZENGES:
See Confectionery.
VULCANIZATION OF RUBBER:
See Rubber.
WAGON GREASE:
See Lubricants.
WALLS, DAMP:
See Household Formulas.
WALL AND WALL-PAPER CLEAN-
ERS:
See Cleaning Preparations and Meth-
ods, also Household Formulas.
WALL-PAPER DYES:
See Dyes.
WALL-PAPER PASTE:
See Adhesives.
WALL PAPER, REMOVAL OF:
See Household Formulas.
WALL WATERPROOFING:
See Waterproofing and Household For-
mulas.
WALL PRIMING:
See Paints.
WALNUT:
See Wood.
WARMING BOTTLE:
See Bottles.
WARPING, PREVENTION OF:
See Wood.
Warts
Wart Cure. — The following is espe-
cially useful in cases where the warts
are very numerous:
I. — Chloral hydrate 1 part
Acetic acid 1 part
Salicylic acid 4 parts
Sulphuric ether 4 parts
Collodion 15 parts
Mix. Directions: Every morning ap-
ply the foregoing to the warts, painting
one coat on another. Should the mass
fall off without taking the warts with it,
repeat the operation. Take, internally
10 grains of burnt magnesia daily.
II. — Sulphur 10 parts
Acetic acid 5 parts
Glycerine 25 parts
Keep the warts covered with this
mixture.
WASHING FLUIDS AND POWDERS:
See Laundry Preparations.
WASTE, PHOTOGRAPHIC, ITS DIS-
POSITION:
See Photography.
WATCH -DIAL CEMENTS:
See Adhesives, under Jewelers' Ce-
ments.
WATCH GILDING:
See Plating.
Watchmakers' Formulas
WATCH MANUFACTURERS' ALLOYS.
Some very tenacious and hard alloys,
for making the parts of watches which
are not sensitive to magnetism, are as
follows:
I II III IV V VI VII
Platinum. 62.75 62.75 62.75 54.32 0.5 0.5 —
Copper. . . 18 16.20 16.20 16 18.5 18.5 25
Nickel.... 18 18 16.5024.70 2 1
Cadmium. 1.25 1.25 1.25 1.25 — — —
Cobalt.... — 1.50 1.96 —
Tungsten. — 1.80 1.80 1.77 — — —
Palladium - - 72 72 70
Silver — — — — 6.5 7 4
Rhodium. — — — — 1 — —
Gold — — — — 1.5— —
A non-magnetic alloy for watch-
springs, wheels, etc.: Gold, 30 to 40 parts;
palladium, 30 to 40 parts; copper, 10 to
20 parts; silver, 0.1 to 5 per cent; cobalt,
0.1 to 2.5 per cent; tungsten, 0.1 to 5 per
cent; rhodium, 0.1 to 5 per cent; plati-
num, 0.1 to 5 per cent.
An Alloy for Watch Pinion Sockets. —
Gold, 31 parts; silver, 19 parts; copper,
39 parts; palladium, 1 part.
Replacing Rubies whose Settings have
Deteriorated. — -Enlarge, with the squarer
(steel brooch for enlarging holes), the
hole of the old setting, and adjust it,
with hard rubbing, to the extremity of a
stem of pierced brass wire. Take the
stem in an American nippers, and set the
ruby at the extremity (the setting may be
driven back by using a flat burnishing
tool, very gently). Then take off with a
cleaving file the part of the stem where
the ruby is set, and diminish it to the
thickness desired, by filing on the finger,
or on cork. These operations finished.
WATCHMAKERS1 FORMULAS
737
a set stopper is obtained which now needs
only to be solidly fixed at the suitable
height, in the hole prepared.
To Straighten Bent Teeth. — Bent teeth
are straightened by means of the screw-
driver used as a lever against the root of
the adjacent teeth, and bent pivots may
be held in the jaws of the pliers and the
pinion bent with the fingers in the direc-
tion and to the extent required. For
such a purpose, pliers having the jaws
lined with brass are used so that the
pivot is not bruised, and the bending has
to be done with great care.
To Renew a Broken Barrel Tooth. —
Frequently, in consequence of the break-
ing of a spring, a tooth of a barrel is
broken. Sometimes it may only be bent,
in which case the blade of a penknife
may be used with care. If 2 or 3 suc-
cessive teeth are lacking, the best way is
to change the barrel, but a single tooth
may be easily renewed in this way:
Drill a hole through the thickness of the
tooth, taking care not to penetrate the
drum; then fit in a piece of metal tightly
and give it, as well as possible, the cor-
rect form of the tooth. To assure
solidity, solder it; then clean and round
the edges. Properly executed the repair
will scarcely be noticed.
Heated Sawdust. — Sawdust is known
to have been employed from time im-
memorial by watchmakers and gold-
smiths for the purpose of drying rinsed
articles. The process of drying can be
accelerated four-fold if the sawdust is
heated before use. This must, however,
be done with great caution and constant
stirring.
To Repair a Dial, etc., with Enamel
Applied Cold. — There are two kinds of
false enamel for application, when cold,
to damaged dials. The first, a mixture
of white rosin and white lead, melts like
sealing wax, which it closely resembles.
It is advisable when about to apply it to
fently heat the dial and the blade of a
nife", and with the knife cut the piece of
enamel of the requisite size and lay it on
the dial. The new enamel must project
somewhat above the old. When cold
the surface is leveled by scraping, and a
shining surface is at once produced by
holding at a little distance from the
flame of a spirit lamp. It is necessary
to be very careful in conducting this
operation, as the least excess of heat will
burn the enamel and turn it yellow. It
is, however, preferable to the following
although more difficult to apply, as it is
harder and does not become dirty so
soon. The second false enamel con-
tains white lead mixed with melted
white wax. It is applied like cement,
neatly filling up the space and afterwards
rubbing with tissue paper to produce a
shining surface. If rubbed with a knife
blade or other steel implement its surface
will be discolored.
Lettering a Clock Dial. — Painting
Roman characters on a clock dial is not
such a difficult task as might at first be
imagined. If one has a set of drawing
instruments and properly proportions the
letters, it is really simple. The letters
should be proportioned as follows: The
breadth of an "I" and a space should
equal \ the breadth of an "X," that is,
if the "X" is \ inch broad, the "I" will
be -,\<- inch broad and the space between
letters -fa inch, thus making the "I" plus
one space equal to £ inch or half the
breadth of an "X." The "V's" should
be the same breadth as the "X's." After
the letters have been laid off in pencil,
outline them with a ruling pen and fill
in with a small camel's-hair brush, using
gloss black paint thinned to the proper
consistency to work well in the ruling
pen. Using the ruling pen to outline the
letters gives sharp straight edges, which
it would be impossible to obtain with a
brush in the hands of an inexperienced
person.
Verification of the Depthings. — In the
verge watches, the English watches, and
those of analogous caliber, it is often
difficult to verify the depthings, except
by the touch. For this reason we often
find the upper plate pierced over each
depth. In the jewelea places, instead of
perforating the upper plate, it suffices to
deposit a drop of very limpid oil on the
ruby, taking care that it does not scatter.
In this manner a lens is formed and one
may readily distinguish the depthing.
To Make or Enlarge a Dial Hole. — By
wetting the graver or the file with spirit
of turpentine, cracks may be avoided
and the work will be accomplished much
quicker.
To Repair a Repeating Clock -Bell. —
When the bell is broken, whether short
off or at a distance, file it away and pierce
it, and after having sharpened a little the
stem of the spring which remains, push
by force, in the hole just made, a thin
piece of solder (pewter). The sound
will not have changed in any appreciable
manner.
A seconds pendulum of a regulator,
which has no compensation for temper-
ature will cause the clock to lose about
738
WATCHMAKERS' FORMULAS
1 second per day for each 3 degrees of
increase in heat. A watch without a
compensation balance will lose 6.11
seconds in 24 hours for each increase of
1° F. in heat.
To Remedy Worn Pinions. — Turn the
leaves or rollers so that the worn places
upon them will be toward the arbor or
shaft and fasten them in that position.
If they are "rolling pinions," and they
cannot be secured otherwise, a little soft
solder should be used.
Watchmakers* Oil. — I. — Put some
lead shavings into neat's foot oil, and
allow to stand for some time, the longer
the better. The lead neutralizes the
acid, and the result is an oil that never
corrodes or thickens.
II. — Stir up for some time best olive
oil with water kept at the boiling point;
then after the two fluids have separated,
decant the oil and shake up with a little
freshly burned lime. Let the mixture
stand for some weeks in a bottle ex-
posed to the sunlight and air, but pro-
tected from wet and dirt. When filtered,
the oil will be nearly colorless, perfectly
limpid, and will never thicken or be-
come rancid.
To Weaken a Balance Spring. — A bal-
ance spring may need weakening; this is
effectea by grinding the spring thinner.
Remove the spring from the collet and
place it upon a piece of pegwood cut to
fit the center coil. A piece of soft iron
wire, flattened so as to pass freely be-
tween the coils and charged with a little
powdered oilstone, will serve as a grinder,
and with it the strength of the spring may
soon be reduced. Operations will be con-
fined to the center coil, for no other part
of the spring will rest sufficiently against
the wood to enable it to be ground, but
this will generally suffice. The effect will
be rather rapid; therefore care should be
taken or the spring may be made too
weak.
To Make a Clock Strike Correctly. —
Pry the plates apart on the striking side,
slip the pivots of the upper wheels out,
and having disconnected them from the
train, turn them partly around and put
them back. If still incorrect, repeat the
experiment. A few efforts at most will
get them to work properly. The sound
m cuckoo clocks is caused by a wire act-
ing on a small bellows whicli is connected
with two small pipes like organ pipes.
To Reblack Clock Hands. — One coat
of asphaltum varnish will make old rusty
hands look as good as new, and will dry
in a few minutes.
To Tighten a Ruby Pin. — Set the ruby
pin in asphaltum varnish. It will be-
come hard in a few minutes and be much
firmer and better than the gum shellac,
generally used.
To Loosen a Rusty Screw in a Watch
Movement. — Put a little oil around the
screw; heat the head lightly by means of
a red-hot iron rod, applying the same for
2 or 3 minutes. The rusty screw may
then be removed as easily as though it
had just been put in.
Gilding Watch Movements. (See also
Gilding.) — In gilding watch movements,
the greatest care must be observed with
regard to cleanliness. The work is first
to be placed into a weak solution of caustic
potash for a few minutes, and then rinsed
in cold water. The movements are now
to be dipped into pickling acid (nitrous
acid) for an instant, and then plunged
immediately into cold water. After being
finally rinsed in hot water, they may be
placed in the gilding bath and allowed
to remain therein until they have re-
ceived the required coating. A few
seconds will generally be sufficient, as
this class of work does not require to be
very strongly gilt. When gilt, the move-
ments are to be rinsed in warm water,
and scratch-brushed; they may then be
returned to the bath, for an instant, to
give them a good color. Lastly, rinse
in hot water and place the movements
in clean box sawdust. An economical
mode of gilding watch movements is to
employ a copper anode — working from
the solution, add 10 parts of cream of
tartar and a corresponding quantity of
elutriated chalk to obtain a pulp that
can be put on with the brush. The
gilding or silvering obtained in this
manner is pretty, but of slight durability.
At the present time this method is only
seldom employed, since the electroplat-
ing affords a means of producing gilding
and silvering in a handsome and com-
paratively cheap manner, the metallic
coating having to be but very thin. Gold
and silver for this kind of work are used
in the form of potassium cyanide of gold
or potassium cyanide of silver solutions, it
being a custom to copper the zinc articles
previously by the aid of a battery, since
the appearance will then be much hand-
somer than on zinc alone. Gilding or
silvering with leaf metal is done by pol-
ishing the surface of the zinc bright and
coating it with a very tough linseed-oil
varnish diluted with 10 times the quan-
tity of benzol. The metallic leaf is then
laid on and polished with an agate.
WATER
739
WATCHMAKERS' CLEANING PREP-
ARATIONS:
See Cleaning Preparations and Meth-
ods.
WATCH MOVEMENTS, PALLADIUM
PLATING OF:
See Plating.
Water, Natural and Artifi-
cial
In making an artificial mineral water
it must be remembered that it is sel-
dom possible to reproduce the water
by merely combining its chemical com-
ponents. In other words, the analysis
of the water cannot serve as a basis from
which to prepare it, because even though
all of the components were put together,
many would be found insoluble, and
others would form new chemical com-
binations, so that the result would differ
widely from the mineral water imitated.
For example, carbonate of magnesia
and carbonate of lime, which are im-
portant ingredients in most mineral
waters, will not make a clear solution
unless freshly precipitated. Hence,
when these are to be reproduced in a
mineral water it is customary to employ
other substances which will dissolve at
once, and which will, upon combining,
produce these salts. The order in which
the salts are added is also a very im-
portant matter, for by dissolving the
salts separately and then carefully com-
bining them, solutions may be effected
which would be impossible were all the
salts added together to the water in the
portable fountain.
In this connection the following table
will be found useful:
Group 1
Ammonium carbon- Sodium carbonate.
ate. Sodium chloride.
Ammonium chloride. Sodium fluoride.
Sodium borate (bo- Sodium iodide.
rax). Sodium nitrate.
Potassium carbon- Sodium phosphate.
ate. Sodium pyrophos-
Potassium chloride. phate.
Potassium nitrate. Sodium silicate.
Potassium sulphate. Sodium sulphate.
Sodium bromide.
Group 2
Lithium carbonate.
Group 3
Aluminum chloride. Magnesium chlo-
Barium chloride. ride.
Calcium bromide. Magnesium nitrate.
Calcium chloride. Strontium chloride.
Calcium nitrate. Lithium chloride.
Group 4
Magnesium s u 1 - Alum (potassa or
phate. soda alum).
Group 5
Lime carbonate. Lime sulphate pre-
Magnesium carbon- cipitate.
ate hydrate.
Group 6
Lithium carbonate. Iron pyrophosphate.
Acid hydrochloric. Iron sulphate.
Acid sulphuric. Manganese chloride.
Iron chloride. Manganese sulphate.
Group 7
Sodium arseniate, or sodium sulphide,
or acid hydrosulphuric.
Explanation of Groups. — The explana-
tion of the use of these groups is simple.
When about to prepare an artificial
mineral water, first ascertain from the
formula which of the ingredients belong
to group 1. These should be dissolved in
water, and then be filtered and added to
distilled water, and thoroughly agitated.
Next the substance or substances be-
longing to group 2 should be dissolved
in water, then filtered and added to the
water, which should again be agitated.
And so the operation should proceed;
whatever ingredients are required from
each group should be taken in turn, a
solution made, and this solution, after
being filtered, should be separately add-
ed to the fountain, and the latter be well
agitated before the following solution is
added.
For groups 1, 3, and 4, the salts should
be dissolved in 5 times their weight of
boiling, or 10 times their weight of cold,
water. For group 2 (lithium carbonate)
the proportions should be 1 part of
lithium carbonate to about 130 parts of
cold or boiling water. The substances
mentioned in group 5 are added to the
portable fountain in their solid state, and
dissolve best when freshly precipitated.
As carbonic acid gas aids their solution,
it is best to charge the fountain after they
are added, and agitate thoroughly, blow-
ing off the charge afterwards if necessary.
In group 5 the lithium carbonate is
dissolved in the acids (see also group 2),
the iron and manganese salts are dis-
solved in 5 parts of boiling, or 10 parts of
cold, water, the solution quickly filtered,
the acids added to it, and the whole
mixture added to the fountain already
charged with gas, the cap being quickly
taken off, and the solution poured in.
The iron and manganese saJts easily
oxidize and produce turbidity, therefore
the atmospheric air should be carefully
740
WATER
blown off under high pressure several
times while charging fountains. The
substances mentioned in group 7 are
never put into the fountain, except the
arseniate of sodium in the case of Vichy
water, which contains but a trifling amount
of this compound.
Most of the solutions may be prepared
beforehand and be used when required,
thus saving considerable time.
Formulas for various waters will be
given at the end of this article.
A question which arises in preparing
mineral waters is: What is the best
charging pressure ? As a general rule, they
are charged to a lower pressure than plain
soda; good authorities even recommend
charging certain mineral waters as low as
30 pounds pressure to the square inch, but
this seems much too low a pressure for
the dispensing counter. From 50 to 120
pounds pressure would be a good limit,
while plain soda may be served out as
high as 180 pounds. There must be
enough pressure completely to empty the
fountain, while enabling sufficient gas to
be retained by the water to give it a
thorough pungency. Moreover, a high
pressure to the mineral water enables a
druggist at a pinch, when he runs out of
plain soda, to use his Vichy water, in-
stead, with the syruped drinks. The taste
of the Vichy is not very perceptible when
covered by the syrup, and most custom-
ers will not notice it.
Apollinaris Water. —
Sodium carbonate. . . . 2,835 grains
Sodium sulphate 335 grains
Sodium silicate 10 grains
Magnesium chloride. 198 grains
Calcium chloride 40 grains
Potassa alum 57 grains
Magnesium carbon-
ate hydrate 158 grains
Iron sulphate 21 grains
Hunyadi Water. —
Magnesium sulphate. 400 parts
Sodium sulphate 400 parts
Potassium sulphate . . 2 parts
Sodium chloride 31 parts
Sodium bicarbonate.. 12 parts
Water 1 quart
Lithia Water.—
Lithium carbonate. . . 120 grains
Sodium bicarbonate. 1,1 00 grains
Carbonated water. ... 10 gallons
For "still" lithia water, substitute
lithium citrate for the carbonate in the
above formula.
Seltzer Water. — Hydrochloric acid
(chemically pure), 2,520 grains; pure
water, 40 ounces. Mix and add marble
dust, 240 grains; carbonate of magnesium,
420 grains. Dissolve, and after 1 hour
add bicarbonate of sodium, 2,540 grains.
Dissolve, then add sufficient pure water
to make 10 gallons. Filter and charge
to 100 pounds pressure.
Vichy Water. — The following formula,
based on the analysis of Bauer-Struve,
yields an imitation of
Vichy (Grande Grille).
Sodium iodide 0.016 parts
Sodium bromide. ... 0.08 parts
Sodium phosphate . . 2 parts
Sodium silicate 80 parts
Potassium sulphate . 125 parts
Sodium chloride .... 139 parts
Sodium carbonate.. . 6,792 parts
Aluminum chloride. 1 part
Strontium chloride. . 1 part
Ammonium chloride 3 parts
Magnesium chloride 24 parts
Calcium chloride. .. 170 parts
Manganese sulphate 0.46 parts
Iron sulphate 1 part
Sulphuric acid 40 parts
Water to make 10 gallons
Mix the first 7 ingredients with about
10 times their weight of water and filter.
In the same manner, mix the next 5
ingredients with water and filter; and
then the last 3 ingredients. Pour these
solutions into sufficient water contained
in a fountain to make 10 gallons, and
charge at once with carbon dioxide gas.
Waters like the above are more cor-
rectly named "imitation" than "arti-
ficial," as the acidic and basic radicals
may bear different relations to one an-
other in the natural and the other.
PURIFYING WATER.
See also Filters.
If an emulsion of clay is poured into a
soap solution, the clay gradually separates
out without clarifying the liquid. When
a few drops of hydrochloric acid, how-
ever, are added to a soap solution and a
small quantity — about 1.5. per cent — of
a clay emulsion poured in, the liquid
clarifies at once, with formation of a
plentiful sediment. Exactly the same
process takes place when the waste
waters from the combing process in
spinning are treated with clay. The
waters which remain turbid for several
days contain 500 to 800 grams of fatty
substances per cubic meter. If to 1
liter of this liquid 1 gram of clay is
added, with 15 to 20 per cent of water,
the liquid clarifies with separation of a
sediment and assumes a golden-brown
WATER— WATERPROOFING
741
color. Besides the fatty substances, this
deposit also contains a certain quantity
of nitrogenous bodies. Dried at (100° C.)
212° F., it weighs about 1.6 grams and
contains 30 per cent of fat. The grease
obtained from it is clear, of good quality,
and deliquesces at 95° F. After removal
of this fat, the mass still contains 1.19
per cent of nitrogen.
Sterilization of Water with Lime
Chloride. — In order to disinfect and
sterilize 1,000 parts of drinking water,
0.15 parts of dry chloride of lime are
sufficient. The lime is stirred with a
little water into a thin paste and intro-
duced, with stirring, into the water to be
disinfected and a few drops of officinal
hydrochloric acid are added. After
A hour the clarification and disinfection
is accomplished, whereupon 0.3 parts of
calcium sulphite are added, in order to
kill the unpleasant smell and taste of the
chlorine.
Clarifying Muddy Water. — The water
supply from rivers is so muddy at times
that it will not go through the filter.
When this happens agitate each barrel
of water with 2 pounds of phosphate of
lime and allow it to settle. This will
take but a few minutes, and it will be
found that most of the impurities have
been carried down to the bottom. The
water can then be drawn off carefully
and filtered.
Removal of Iron from Drinking
Water. — The simplest method for re-
moving the taste of iron in spring water
is to pass the water through a filter con-
taining a layer of tricalcic phosphate
either in connection with other filtering
materials or alone. The phosphate is
first recovered in a gelatinous form, then
dried and powdered.
For Hardness. — A solution perfectly
adapted to this purpose, and one which
may be kept a long time, is prepared as
follows:
Thirty-five parts of almond oil are
mixed with 50 parts of glycerine of
1.26 specific gravity and 8.5 parts of 50
per cent soda lye, and boiled to saponifi-
cation. To this mixture, when it has
cooled to from 85° to 90° C. (185° to 194°
F.), are added 100 to 125 parts of boiling
water. After cooling again, 500 parts
of water are added, and the solution is
poured into a quart flask, with 94 per
cent alcohol to make up a quart. After
standing 2 months it is filtered. Twenty
hydrolimeter degrees of this solution
make, with 40 parts of a solution of 0.55
grams of barium chloride in 1 quart of
water, a dense lather 1 centimeter high.
WATER (COPPER):
See Copper.
WATER ICES:
See Ice Creams.
WATER, TO FREEZE:
See Refrigeration.
WATER JACKETS, ANTI-FREEZING
SOLUTIONS FOR:
See Freezing Preventives.
WATER SPOTS, PRIMING FOR:
See Paint.
WATER STAINS:
See Wood.
WATER-LILY ROOTS:
See Pyrotechnics.
WATER, STIRRED YELLOW, SCAR-
LET AND COLORLESS:
See Pyrotechnics.
WATERS (TOILET):
See Cosmetics.
WATER-GLASS CEMENTS:
See Adhesives.
WATER GLASS IN STEREOCHRO-
MATIC PAINTING:
See Stereochromy.
Waterproofing
(See also Enamels, Glazes, Paints,
Preservatives, Varnishes.)
Waterproofing Brick Arches. — Water-
E roofing of brick arches is done in the
allowing manner: The masonry is first
smoothed over with cement mortar.
This is then covered with a special
compound on which a layer of Hydrex
felt is laid so as to lap at least 12 inches
on the transverse seams. Five layers of
compound and 5 of felt are used, and
special attention is paid to securing
tightness around the drain pipes and at
the spandrel walls. In fact the belt is
carried up the back of the latter and
turned into the joint under the coping
about 2 inches, where it is held with
cement mortar. The waterproofing on
the arches is protected with 1 inch of
cement mortar and that on the walls
with a single course of brickwork.
Waterproofing Bltie Prints. — Use re-
fined paraffine, and apply by immersing
the print in the melted wax, or more
conveniently as follows: Immerse in
melted paraffine until saturated, a number
of pieces of an absorbent cloth a foot
or more square. When withdrawn and
cooled they are ready for use at any time.
742
WATERPROOFING
To apply to a blue print, spread one of
the saturated cloths on a smooth surface,
place the dry print on it with a second
waxed cloth on top, and iron with a
moderately hot flatiron. The paper
immediately absorbs paraffine until sat-
urated, and becomes translucent and
highly waterproofed. The lines of the
print are intensified by the process, and
there is no shrinking or distortion. As
the wax is withdrawn from the cloths,
more can be added by melting small
pieces directly under the iron.
By immersing the print in a bath of
melted paraffine the process is hastened,
but the ironing is necessary to remove
the surplus wax from the surface, unless
the paper is to be directly exposed to the
weather and not to be handled. The
irons can be heated in most offices by
gas or over a lamp, and a supply of
saturated cloths obviates the necessity
of the bath. This process, which was
originally applied to blue prints to be
carried by the engineer corps in wet
mines, is equally applicable to any kind
of paper, and is convenient for water-
proofing typewritten or other notices to
be posted up and exposed to the weather.
Waterproof Coatings. — I. — Rosin oil,
50 parts; rosin, 30 parts; white soap,
9 parts. Apply hot on the surfaces to be
protected.
II. — It has been observed that when
gluten dried at an ordinary temperature,
hence capable of absorbing water, is
mixed with glycerine and heated, it
becomes water-repelling and suitable for
a waterproof paint. One part of gluten
is mixed with 1 1 parts of glycerine, where-
by a slimy mass is obtained which is ap-
plied on fabrics subsequently subjected
to a heat of 248° F. The heating should
not last until all glycerine has evaporated,
otherwise the coating becomes brittle and
peels off.
Waterproofing Canvas. — I. — The can-
vas is coated with a mixture of the three
solutions named below:
1. Gelatin, 50 parts; by weight, boiled
in 3,000 parts of water free from lime.
2. Alum, 100 parts, dissolved in 3,000
parts of water. 3. Soda soap dissolved
in 2,000 parts of water.
II. — Prepare a zinc soap by entirely
dissolving 56 parts of soft soap in 125 to
150 parts of water. To trie boiling
liquid add, with constant stirring, 28 to
33 parts of zinc vitriol (white vitriol).
The zinc soap floats on top and forms,
after cooling, a hard white mass, which
is taken out. In order to clean it of
admixed carbonic alkali, it must be re-
( melted in boiling fresh water. Next
Elace 232.5 parts of raw linseed oil (free
*om mucus) in a kettle with 2.5 parts of
best potash, and 5 parts of water. This
mass is boiled until it has become white
and opaque and forms a liquid, soap-like
compound. Now, add sugar of lead, 1.25
parts; litharge, 1 part; red lead, 2 parts;
and brown rosin, 10.5 parts. The whole
is boiled together about 1 hour, the
temperature not being allowed to exceed
212° F., and stirring well from time to
time. After this add 15 parts of zinc soap
and stir the whole until the metal soap
has combined with the oil, the tempera-
ture not exceeding 212° F. When the
mixture is complete, add a solution of
caoutchouc, 1.2 parts, and oil of turpen-
tine, 8.56 parts, which must be well in-
corporated by stirring. The material is
first coated on one side by means of a
brush with this composition, which must
have a temperature of 158° F. There-
upon hang it up to dry, then apply a
second layer of composition possessing
the same temperature, which is likewise
allowed to dry. The fiber is now filled
out, so that the canvas is waterproof.
Waterproofing Corks. — For the pur-
pose of making corks as impervious as
possible, while at the same time keeping
them elastic, saturate them with caout-
chouc solution. Dissolve caoutchouc in
benzine in the ratio of 1 part of caout-
chouc to 19 parts of benzine. Into this
liquid lay the corks to be impregnated
and subject them to a pressure of 150 to
180 pounds by means of a force pump, so
that the liquid can thoroughly enter.
The corks thus treated must next be ex-
posed to a strong draught of air until all
trace of benzine has entirely evaporated
and no more smell is noticeable.
WATERPROOFING FABRICS.
It will be convenient to divide water-
proof fabrics into two classes, viz., those
which are impervious to water, and those
which are water-repellent. It is im-
portant to make this distinction, for,
although all waterproof material is made
for the purpose of resisting water, there
is a vast difference between the two
classes. The physical difference be-
tween them can be briefly summed up as
follows: Fabrics which are completely
impervious to water comprise oil-skins,
mackintoshes, and all materials having
a water-resisting film on one or both sides,
or in the interior of the fabric. Those
coming under the second heading of
water-repellent materials do not possess
WATERPROOFING
743
this film, but have their fibers so treated
as to offer less attraction to the water
than the water molecules have for them-
selves.
The principal members of the first
group are the rubber-proofed goods; in
these the agent employed is rubber in
greater or less quantity, together with
other bodies of varying properties. Be-
fore enlarging on this class, it will be
necessary to give a short description of
the chemical and physical properties of
rubber.
Rubber, or caoutchouc, is a natural
gum exuding from a large number of
plants, those of the Euphorbiacew being
the chief source for the commercial va-
riety. The raw material appears on the
market in the shape of blocks, cakes, or
bottle-shaped masses, according to the
manner in which it has been collected.
It possesses a dark-brown — sometimes
nearly black — exterior; the interior of
the mass is of a lighter shade, and varies
from a dingy brown to a dirty white, the
color depending on the different brands
and sources. In the raw state its prop-
erties are very different from what they
are after going through the various man-
ufacturing processes, and it has only
a few of the characteristics which are
generally associated with India rubber.
Chemically it is a complex hydrocarbon
with the formula C46H36, and appears to
consist of a highly porous network of
cells having several different rosins iri
their interstices. It is perfectly soluble
in no single solvent, but will yield some
of its constituents to many different
solvents. At a temperature of 10° C.
(50° F.) raw caoutchouc is a solid body
and possesses very little elasticity. At
36° C. (97° F.) it is soft and elastic to a
high degree, and is capable of being
stretched 16 times its length. Further
increase of temperature lessens its elas-
tic properties, and at 120° C. (248° F.)
it melts. While in the raw condition
it has several peculiar properties, one of
which is: After stretching, and cooling
suddenly while stretched, it retains its
new form, and only regains its former
shape on being warmed. Another strik-
ing feature is its strong adhesive capacity;
this property is so powerful that the
rubber cannot be cut with a knife unless
the blade is wet; and freshly cut portions,
if pressed together, will adhere and form
a homogeneous mass. From these facts
it will be seen how it differs from rubber
in the shape of a cycle tire or other manu-
factured form.
The most valuable property possessed
by raw caoutchouc is that of entering into
chemical combination with sulphur, after
which its elasticity is much increased; it
will then bear far greater gradations of
heat and cold. This chemical treatment
of caoutchouc with sulphur is known as
"vulcanizing," and, if properly carried
out, will yield either soft vulcanized rub-
ber or the hard variety known as vulcan-
ite. On the other hand, caoutchouc,
after vulcanizing, has lost its plastic
nature, and can no longer be molded into
various shapes, so that in the production
of stamped or molded objects, the cus-
tomary method is to form them in un-
vulcanized rubber and then to vulcanize
them.
Raw caoutchouc contains a number of
natural impurities, such as sand, twigs,
soil, etc.; these require removing before
the manufacturing processes can be
carried out. The first operation, after
rough washing, is to shred the raw
material into small strips, so as to en-
able the impurities to DC washed out.
This process is carried out by pressing
the rubber against the surface of a re-
volving drum (A, Fig. 1), carrying a
FIG. 1
number of diagonally arranged knives,
B, on its surface. A lever, C, presses
the rubber against the knives; D is the
fulcrum on which C works, E being a
weight which throws back the lever on
the pressure being removed. During
744
WATERPROOFING
this operation a jet of water is kept play-
ing onto the knives to cool and enable
them to cut.
Following this conies the passage
between a pair of corrugated steel rollers
(as shown in Fig. 2). These rollers have
each a different speed, so that the rubber
gets stretched and squeezed at the same
time. Immediately over the rollers a
water pipe is fixed, so that a steady
stream of water washes out all the sand
and other extraneous matter. In Fig. 2,
A A are the steel rollers, while B is a
screw working springs which regulate
the pressure between the rollers. The
power is transmitted from below from
the pulley, C, and thence to the gearing.
The next operation, after well drying,
is to thoroughly masticate the shredded
rubber between hot steel rollers, which
resemble those already described, but
usually have a screw-thread cut on their
surfaces. Fig. 3 shows the front view
FIG. 3.
of this masticating machine, A being the
rollers, while the steam pipe for heating
is shown at B. Fig. 3a gives a top view
FIG. 3A.
of the same machine, showing the two
rollers.
After passing several times through
these, the rubber will be in the form of
homogeneous strips, and is then ready
either for molding or dissolving. As
we are dealing solely with waterproofed
textiles, the next process which concerns
us is the dissolving of the rubber in a
suitable solvent. Benzol, carbon bi-
sulphide, oil of turpentine, ether, and
absolute alcohol, will each dissolve a
certain amount of rubber, but no one of
them used alone gives a thorough solu-
tion. The agent commonly employed
is carbon bisulphide, together with 10
per cent of absolute alcohol. Whatever
solvent is used, after being steeped in it
for some hours the caoutchouc swells out
enormously, and then requires the addi-
tion of some other solvent to effect a
complete solution. A general method is
to place the finely shredded rubber in a
closed vessel, to cover it with carbon
bisulphide, and allow to stand for some
hours. Toward the end of the time the
vessel is warmed by means of a steam
coil or jacket, and 10 parts absolute
alcohol are added for every 100 parts of
carbon bisulphide. The whole is then
kept gently stirred for a few hours. Fig.
4 shows a common type of the vessel
FIG. 4.
used for dissolving rubber. In this
diagram A is the interior of the vessel,
and B a revolving mixer in the same.
The whole vessel is surrounded by a
steam jacket, C, with a steam inlet at D
and a tap for condensed water at E.
F is the cock by which the solution is
drawn off.
After the rubber is dissolved, about 12
to 24 per cent of sulphur is added, and
thoroughly incorporated with the solu-
tion. The sulphur may be in the form
of chloride of sulphur, or as sulphur pure
and simple. A very small quantity of
sulphur is required to give the necessary
result, 2 to 3 per cent being sufficient to
effect vulcanization; but a large quantity
is always added to hasten the operation.
Even after prolonged treatment with
the two solvents, a solution of uniform
consistency is never obtained: clots of a
thicker nature will be found floating
in the solution, and the next operation
is to knead it up so as to obtain equal
WATERPROOFING
745
density throughout. Fig. 5 will give an
idea of how this mixing is done.
FIG. 5.
At the top of a closed wooden chamber
is a covered reservoir, A, containing the
solution of rubber. A long slit at the
base of this reservoir allows the solution
to fall between sets of metal rollers, BBB
below. Neighboring rollers are revolv-
ing in opposite directions, and at differ-
ent speeds, so that, after passing all
three sets of rollers, and emerging at
the bottom, the solution should be of uni-
form consistency. CCC are the guiding
funnels, and EE are scrapers to clear the
solution from the rollers. D is a wedge-
shaped plug worked by a rack and pinion,
and regulates the flow of the solution.
It now remains to apply the rubber to
the fabric and vulcanize it. Up to this
stage the sulphur has only been mechan-
ically mixed with the rubber; the aid of
heat is now required to bring about
chemical combination between the two.
This process, which is known as "burn-
ing," consists in subjecting the rubber-
covered fabric to a temperature of about
248° F. Sulphur itself melts at 239° F.,
FIG. 6.
and the temperature at which combina-
tion takes place must be above this.
Fig. 6 shows one of the methods of
spreading the rubber on the cloth. A
is the tank containing the solution with
an outlet at the bottom arranged so as
to regulate the flow of solution. The
fabric passes slowly underneath this, re-
ceiving as it travels a thin coating of the
waterproofing. The two rollers at B press
the solution into the fabric and distrib-
ute the proofing evenly over the entire
surface.
After leaving the two squeezing rollers,
the cloth travels slowly through a covered
chamber, C, having a series of steam
pipes, EE, underneath, to evaporate the
solvent; this condenses on the upper por-
tion of the chamber, which is kept cooled,
and flows down the sides into suitable
receptacles. After this the proofed cloth
is vulcanized by passing round metal
cylinders heated to the necessary temper-
ature, or by passing through a heated
chamber. Fig. 7 shows the spreading of
FIG. 7.
rubber between two fabrics. The two
cloths are wound evenly on the rollers,
BB; from this they are drawn conjointly
through the rollers, D, the stream of
proofing solution flowing down between
the rollers, which then press the two
fabrics together with the rubber inside.
The lower rollers marked CC are heated
to the necessary degree, and cause the
rubber and sulphur to combine in chem-
ical union.
So far the operation of proofing has
been described as though pure rubber
only was used; in practice the rubber
forms only a small percentage of the
proofing material, its place being taken
by cheaper bodies. One of the common
ingredients of proofing mixtures is boiled
linseed oil. together with a small quantity
of litharge; this dries very quickly, and
forms a glassy flexible film. Coal tar,
shellac, colophony, etc., are all used, to-
gether with India-rubber varnish, to make
746
WATERPROOFING
different waterproof compositions. Oil
of turpentine and benzol form good solvents
for rubber, but it is absolutely essential
that both rubber and solvent be perfectly
anhydrous before mixing. Oil of turpen-
tine, alcohol, etc., can be best deprived
of water by mixing with either sulphuric
acid or dehydrated copper sulphate, and
allowing to stand. The acid or the
copper salt will absorb the water and
sink to the bottom, leaving a supernatant
layer of dehydrated turpentine "or what-
ever solvent is used. All the sulphur in
a rubber-proofed cloth is not in com-
bination with the rubber; it is frequently
found that, after a lapse of time, rubber-
proofed material shows an efflorescence
of sulphur on the surface, due to excess
of sulphur, and occasionally the fabric
becomes stiff and the proofing scales off.
Whenever a large proportion of sulphur
is present, there is always the danger of
the rubbers forming slowly into the hard
vulcanite state, as the substance com-
monly called vulcanite consists only of
ordinary vulcanized rubber carried a
stage further by more sulphur being
used and extra heat applied. If after
vulcanizing, rubber is treated with caus-
tic soda, all this superfluous sulphur can
be extracted; if it is then well washed
the rubber will retain its elasticity for a
long period. With the old methods of
proofing, a sheet of vulcanized rubber
was cemented to a fabric with rubber
varnish, and frequently this desulphuriz-
ing was performed before cementing to-
gether. The result was a flexible and
durable cloth, but of great weight and
thickness, and expensive to produce.
The chemistry of rubber is very little
understood; as mentioned previously,
rubber is a highly complex body, liable
to go through many changes. These
changes are likely to be greater in rub-
ber varnish, consisting of half a dozen or
more ingredients, than in the case of
rubber alone. The action of sunlight
has a powerful effect on rubber, much
to its detriment, and appears to increase
its tendency to oxidize. Vulcanized
rubber keeps its properties better under
water than when exposed to the air, and
changes more slowly if kept away from
the light. It appears as though a slight
decomposition always takes place even
with pure rubber; but the presence of so
many differently constituted substances
as sometimes occur in rubber solutions
no doubt makes things worse. When-
ever a number of different bodies with
varying properties are consolidated to-
getner by heat, as in the case of rubber
compositions, it is only reasonable to
expect there will be some molecular r •»-
arrangement going on in the mass; and
this can be assigned as the reason why
some proofings last as long again as
others. Some metallic salts have a very
injurious action on rubber, one of the
worst being copper sulphate. Dyers are
frequently warned that goods for rubber-
proofing must be free from this metal,
as its action on rubber is very powerful,
though but little understood. As is
generally known, grease in any form is
exceedingly destructive to rubber, and it
should never be allowed in contact in
the smallest proportion. Some composi-
tions are made up by dissolving rubber
in turpentine and coal tar; but in this
case some of the rubber's most valuable
properties are destroyed, and it is doubt-
ful if it can be properly vulcanized.
Owing to rubber being a bad conductor
of heat, it requires considerable care to
vulcanize it in any thickness. A high
degree of heat applied during a short
Kriod would tend to form a layer of
,rd vulcanite on the surface, while that
immediately below would be softer and
would gradually merge into raw rubber
in the center.
The different brands of rubber vary
so much, especially with regard to solu-
bility, that it is always advisable to treat
each brand by itself, and not to make a
solution of two or more kinds. Oilskins
and tarpaulins, etc., are mostly proofed
by boiled linseed oil, with or without
thickening bodies added. They are
not of sufficient interest to enlarge upon
in this article, so the second, or "water-
repellent," class has now to be dealt with.
All the shower-proof fabrics come
under this heading, as well as every cloth
which is pervious to air and repulsive to
water. The most time-honored recipe
for proofing woollen goods is a mixture
of sugar of lead and alum, and dates
back hundreds of years. The system of
using this is as follows: The two ingre-
dients are dissolved separately, and the
solutions mixed together. A mutual de-
composition results, the base of the lead
salt uniting with the sulphuric acid out
of the alum to form lead sulphate, which
precipitates to the bottom. The clear
solution contains alumina in the form of
acetate, and this supplies the proofing
quality to the fabric. It is applied in a
form of machine shown in Fig. 8, which
will be seen to consist of a trough con-
taining the proofing solution, (7, with a
pair of squeezing rollers, A, over the top.
The fabric is drawn down through the
solution and up through the squeezers
in the direction of the arrows. At the
WATERPROOFING
747
back of the machine the cloth automatic-
ally winds itself onto a roll, J9, and then
only requires drying to develop the water-
FIG. 8.
resisting power. D is a weight acting on
a lever which presses the two rollers, A,
together. The water-repelling property
is gained as follows:
Drying the fabric, which is impreg-
nated with acetate of alumina, drives off
some of the volatile acetic acid, leaving a
film of basic acetate of alumina on each
wool fiber. This basic salt is very diffi-
cult to wet, and has so little attraction
for moisture that in a shower of rain the
drops remain in a spheroidal state, and
fall off. In a strong wind, or under pres-
sure, water eventually penetrates through
fabrics proofed in this manner; but they
will effectually resist a sharp shower.
Unfortunately, shower-proofed goods,
with wear, gradually lose this property
of repelling water. The equation repre-
senting the change between alum and
sugar of lead is given below. In the case
of common alum there would, of course,
be potassium acetate in solution besides
the alumina.
Alum. Sugar of lead.
Al9Ka (So04 + 4Pb(C9H8O8)?
Lead Potassium Aluminum
sulphate. acetate. acetate.
= 4PbSo4 + 2KC2H3O2 + A12(C3H3O2)8
Now that sulphate of alumina is in
common use, alum need not be used, as
the potash in it serves no purpose in
proofing.
There are many compositions con-
ferring water: resisting powers upon tex-
tiles, but unfortunately they either af-
fect the general handle of the material
and make it stiff, or they stain and dis-
color it, which is equally bad. A large
range of waterproof compositions can be
got by using stearates 'of the metals;
these, in nearly every case, are insoluble
bodies, and when deposited in the in-
terior of a fabric form a water-resisting
"filling" which is very effective. As a
rule these stearates are deposited on the
material by means of double baths; for
example, by passing the fabric through
(say) a bath of aluminum acetate, and
then, after squeezing out the excess of
liquid, passing it through a bath of soap.
The aluminum salt on the fabric de-
composes the soap, resulting in a deposit
of insoluble stearate of alumina. This
system of proofing in two baths is clean-
er and more economical than adding all
the ingredients together, as the stearate
formed is just where it is required "on
the fibers," and not at the bottom of the
bath.
One of the most important patents
now worked for waterproofing purposes
is on the lines of the old alumina process.
In this case the factor used is rosin,
dissolved in a very large bulk of petro-
leum spirit. The fabrics to be proofed
(usually dress materials) are passed
through a bath of this solution, and
carefully dried to drive off the solvent.
Following this, the goods are treated by
pressing with hot polished metal rollers.
This last process melts the small quan-
tity of rosin, which is deposited on the
cloth, and leaves each single fiber with
an exceedingly thin film of rosin on it.
It will be understood that only a very
attenuated solution of jrosin is per-
missible, so that the fibers of the threads
and not the threads themselves are coated
with it. If the solution contains too
much rosin the fabric is stiffened, and the
threads cemented together; whereas if
used at the correct strength (or, rather,
weakness) neither fabric nor dye suffers,
and there is no evidence of stickiness of
any description.
FIG. 9.
Fig. 9 shows a machine used for
spreading a coat of either proofing or any
other fluid on one side of the fabric.
748
WATERPROOFING
This is done by means of a roller, A,
running in the proofing solution, the
material to be coated traveling slowly
over the top and just in contact with the
roller, A, which transfers the proofing
to it. Should the solution used be of a
thick nature, then a smooth metal roller
will transfer sufficient to the fabric. If
the reverse is the case, and the liquid
used is very thin, then the roller is
covered with felt, which very materially
adds to its carrying power. As shown in
Fig. 9, after leaving the two squeezing
rollers, BB, the fabric passes slowly
round a large steam-heated cylinder, C,
with the coated side uppermost. This
dries the proofing and fastens it, and the
cloth is taken off at D.
Besides stearates of the metals, glues
and gelatins have been used for proof-
ing purposes, but owing to their stiffen-
ing effect, they are only of use in some
few isolated cases. With glue and
gelatin the fixing agent is either tannic
acid or some metallic salt. Tannic
acid converts gelatin into an insoluble
leather-like body; this can be deposited
in the interstices of the fabric by passing
the latter through a gelatin bath first,
and then squeezing and passing through
the tannic acid. Bichromate of potash
also possesses the property of fixing the
proteid bodies and rendering them in-
soluble.
The following are special processes
used to advantage in the manufacture of
waterproof fabrics:
I. — Ordinary Fabrics, Dressing Ap-
parel, etc. — Immerse in a vat of acetate
of alumina (5° Be.) for 12 hours, lift, dry,
and let evaporate at a temperature of
from 140° to 149° F.
II. — Sailcloth, Awnings, Thick Blank-
ets, etc. — Soak in a 7 per cent solution of
gelatin at 104° F., dry, pass through a
4 per cent solution of alum, dry again,
rinse in water, and dry.
III. — Fabrics of Cotton, Linen, Jute,
and Hemp. — Put into a bath of am-
moniacal cupric sulphate of 10° Be. at a
temperature of 87° F.; let steep thorough-
ly, then put in a bath of caustic soda
(20° Be.) and dry. To increase the im-
permeability, a bath of sulphate of al-
umina may be substituted for the caustic-
soda bath.
IV. — Saturate the fabrics with the fol-
lowing odorless compound, subjecting
them several times to a brushing machi.ie
having several rollers, where the warp
threads will be well smoothed, and a
waterproof product of fine sheen and
scarcely fading will be the result. The
compound is made with 30 parts, by
weignt, of Japan wax, 22| parts, by
weight, of paraffine, 12 parts, by weight,
of rosin soap, 35 parts, by weight, of
starch, and 5 parts, by weight, of a 5 per
cent solution of alum. Fabrics thus pre-
pared are particularly adapted to the
manufacture of haversacks, shoes, etc.
V.— White or Light Fabrics.— Pass
first through a bath of acetate of alumina
of 4° to 5° Be. at a temperature of 104° F.,
then through the rollers to rid of all
liquid; put into a warm solution of soap
(5 parts, by weight, of olive-oil soap to
100 parts, by weight, of fresh water) and
finally pass through a 2 per cent solution
of alum, dry for 2 or 3 days on the drop-
ping horse, and brush off all particles of
soap.
VI. — Dissolve 1£ parts, by weight, of
gelatin in 50 parts, by weight, of boil-
ing water, add 1£ parts, by weight, of
scraped tallow soap and 2| parts, by
weight, of alum, the latter being put in
gradually; lower the temperature of the
bath to 122° F., lift out the fabric, dry,
and calender.
VII. — Tent Cloth. — Soak in a warm
solution of 1 part, by weight, of gelatin,
1 part, by weight, of glycerine, and 1
Eart, by weight, of tannin in 12 parts,
y weight, of wood vinegar (pyroligne-
ous acid) of 12° Be. The whole is
melted in a kettle and carefully mixed.
The mass is poured into the receiver of
the brushing machine, care being taken
to keep it liquid. For a piece of 500
feet in length and 20 inches in width,
50 to 80 parts, by weight, of this com-
pound are needed.
VIII. — To freshen worn waterproof
material, cover with the following: Fifty-
five thousand parts, by weight, of gelatin;
100 parts, by weight, of bichromate of
potash; 100 parts, by weight, of acetic
acid (to keep glue from congealing), and
from 3,000 to 5,000 parts, by weight, of
water; to this add 500 parts, by weight,
of peroxide of ammoniacal copper, 100°
Be. This compound is put on the fabric
with a brush and then exposed to air and
light.
IX.— Soft Hats.— The hats are stiffened
as usual, then put through the following
three baths: Dissolve £ part, by weight,
of tallow soap in from 40 to 50 parts, by
weight, of warm water (140° F.). Put
3 to 4 dozen hats into this solution, leave
them in it for half an hour, then take out
and put them as they are into another
bath prepared with 40 to 50 parts, by
weight, of water and J part, by weight, of
alum and heated to 86° to 104° F. After
WATERPROOFING
749
having been left in the second bath for
I or \ hour, take out as before, put
into the third bath of 40 to 50 parts, by
weight, of water, \ part, by weight, of
alum, and about 13 parts, by weight, of
fish glue. In this cold bath the hats are
left for another \ hour or more until they
are completely saturated with the liquid,
then dried and the other operations con-
tinued.
X. — Woolen cloth may be soaked in
a vat filled with aluminum acetate, of
5° Be., for 12 hours, then removed, dried,
and dried again at a temperature of
140° F.
XI. — Wagon covers, awnings, and
sails are saturated with a 7 per cent
gelatin solution, at a temperature of
104° F., dried in the air, put through a 4
per cent solution of alum, dried again in
the air, carried through water, and dried
a third time.
XII. — Cotton, linen, jute, and hemp
fabrics are first thoroughly saturated in
a bath of ammonio-cupric sulphate, of
10° Be., at a temperature of 77° F., then
put into a solution of caustic soda, 2°
Be., and dried. They may be made still
more impervious to water by substituting
a solution of aluminum sulphate for the
caustic soda.
XIII. — White and light-colored fabrics
are first put into a bath of aluminum
acetate, 4° to 5° Be., at a temperature of
102° F., the superfluous liquid being re-
moved from the fabric by press rollers.
The fabric is put into a soap solution
(5 parts of good Marseilles soap in 100
parts of soft water). Finally it is put
through a 2 per cent alum solution, and
left to dry for 2 or 3 days on racks. The
adhering particles of soap are removed
by brushing with machinery.
XIV. — Dissolve 1.5 parts of gelatin in
50 parts of boiling water, add 1 .5 parts
of shavings of tallow grain soap, and
gradually, 2.5 parts of alum. Let this
cool to 122° F., draw the fabric through
it, dry and calender.
XV. — Cellular tissues are made water-
proof by impregnating them with a warm
solution of 1 part, by weight, of gelatin,
1 part, by weight, of glycerine, and 1 part,
by weight, of tannin, in 12 parts, by weight,
of wood vinegar, 12° Be.
XVI. — Linen, hemp, jute, cotton, and
other fabrics can be given a good odor-
less waterproof finish by impregnating
them, and afterwards subjecting them to
the action of several mechanical brush
rollers. By this process the fabric is
brushed dry, the fibers are laid smooth,
the threads of the warp brought out, and
a glossy, odorless, unfading waterproof
stuff results. Fabrics manufactured in
the usual way from rough and colored
yarns are put through a bath of this
waterproof finish, whose composition is
as follows: Thirty parts, by weight, of
Japanese wax; 22.5 parts, by weight, of
paraffine; 15 parts, by weight, of rosin
soap; 35 parts, by weight, of starch, and 5
parts, by weight, of a 5 per cent alum solu-
tion. The first three components are
melted in a kettle, the starch and, lastly,
the alum added, and the whole stirred
vigorously.
XVII. — One hundred parts, by weight,
of castor oil are heated to nearly 204° F.,
with 50 parts, by weight, of caustic
potash, of 50° Be\, to which 50 parts, by
weight, of water have previously been
added. Forty parts, by weight, of
cooler water are then added slowly, care
being taken to keep the temperature of
the mixture constant. As soon as the
liquor begins to rise, 40 parts, by weight,
of cooler water are again added, with the
same precaution to keep the temperature
from falling below 204° F. At the same
time care must be taken to prevent the
liquor boiling, as this would produce too
great saponification. By the prolonged
action of heat below the boiling point,
the oil absorbs water and caustic potash
without being changed, and the whole
finally forms a perfectly limpid, nearly
black liquid. This is diluted with 5
times its weight of hot or cold water, and
is then ready for use without any further
preparation. Other vegetable oils may
be employed besides castor oil, and the
quantity of unsaponified oil present may
be increased by stirring the prepared
liquid with a fresh quantity of castor or
other vegetable oil. The product is slight-
ly alkaline, but wool fiber is not injured,
as the oiling may be done in the cold.
The solution is clear and limpid, and will
not separate out on standing like an emul-
sion. This product in spinning gives a
10 per cent better utilization of the raw
material owing to the greater evenness
and regularity with which the fibers are
oiled; in weaving less oiling is required.
The product can be completely re-
moved by water, preferably by cold
water, and scouring of the goods subse-
quently with soap, soda, or fuller's earth
can thus be dispensed with.
XVIII. — Cloth may be rendered water-
proof by rubbing the under side with a
lump of beeswax until the surface presents
a uniform white or grayish appearance.
This method it is said renders the cloth
750
WATERPROOFING
practically waterproof, although still leav-
ing it porous to air.
XIX. — Coating the under side of the
cloth with a solution of isinglass and
then applying an infusion of galls is
another method, a compound being thus
formed which is a variety of leather.
XX. — An easy method is the formation
of aluminum stearate in the fiber of the
cloth, which may readily be done by im-
mersing it in a solution of aluminum
sulphate in water (1 in 10) and without
allowing it to dry passing through a solu-
tion of soap made from soda and tallow
or similar fat, in hot water. Reaction
between the aluminum sulphate and the
soap produces aluminum stearate and
sodium sulphate. The former is insoluble
and remains in the fiber; the latter is re-
moved by subsequently rinsing the fabric
in water.
XXI. — A favorite method for cloth is
as follows: Dissolve in a receptacle,
preferably of copper, over a bright coal
fire, 1 liter (1.76 pints) of pure linseed oil,
1 liter (1.76 pints) of petroleum, | liter
(0.88 pints) of oil turpentine, and 125
grams (4.37 ounces) of yellow wax, the
last named in small bits. As there is
danger of fire, boiling of this mass should
be avoided. With this hot solution re-
moved from the fire, of course the felt
material is impregnated; next it is hung
up in a warm, dry room or spread out,
but in such a manner that the uniform
temperature can act upon all parts.
Waterproofing Leather. — I. — Ten-
ning's process is as follows: Melt together
equal parts of zinc and linseed oil, at a
temperature not above 225° F. Put the
leather in the molten mixture and let it
remain until saturated. The "zinc soap"
is made by dissolving 6 parts of white
soap in 16 parts of water, and stirring
into the solution 6 parts of zinc sulphate.
To make sure of a homogeneous mixture
remelt the whole and stir until it begins
to cool. The process, including the satu-
ration of the leather, requires about 48
hours. Instead of zinc sulphate, copper
or iron sulphate may be used. The phi-
losophy of the process is that the mois-
ture and air contained in the pores of the
leather are driven out by the heat of the
soap mixture, and their place is taken, on
cooling, by the mixture. The surface of
the leather is scraped after cooling, and
the article is dried, either by heating over
an open fire or by hanging in a drying
room, strongly heated.
II. — Prideaux' process consists in sub-
mitting the leather to treatment with a
solution of caoutchouc until it is thor-
oughly saturated with the liquid. The
latter consists of 30 parts of caoutchouc
in 500 parts of oil of turpentine. Com-
plete impregnation of the leather re-
quires several days, during which the
solution must be frequently applied to
the surface of the leather and rubbed in.
III. — Villon's process consists in ap-
plying a soap solution to the leather,
about as follows: The leather is first
treated to a solution of 62 parts of soap,
124 parts of glue, and 2,000 parts of
water. When it has become saturated
with the solution, it is treated to rubbing
with a mixture of 460 parts of common
salt and 400 parts of alum, in sufficient
water to dissolve the same. After this it
is washed with tepid water and dried.
This process is much the quickest. The
application of the soap requires about
2 hours, and the subsequent treat-
ment about as much more, or 4 or 5 hours
in all.
Oilskins. — The art of painting over
textile fabrics with oily preparations to
make them waterproof is probably nearly
as old as textile manufacture itself, an
industry of prehistoric, nay, geologic,
origin. It is certainly more ancient than
the craft of the artistic painter in oils, whose
canvases are nothing more nor less than
art oilskins, and when out of their frames,
have served the usual purpose of those
things in protecting goods or the human
body before now. The art of water-
proofing has been extended beyond the
domain of the oilskin by chemical
processes, especially those in which alum
or lead salts, or tannin, are used, as well
as by the discovery of India rubber and
gutta percha. These two have revolu-
tionized the waterproofing industry in
quite a special manner, and the oilskin
manufacture, although it still exists and
is in a fairly flourishing condition, has
found its products to a very large extent
replaced by rubber goods. The natural
result has been that the processes used in
the former industry have remained now
unchanged for a good many years. They
had already been brought to a very per-
fect state when the rubber- waterproofing
business sprang up, so that improve-
ments were even then difficult to hit upon
in oilskin making, and the check put
upon the trade by India rubber made
people less willing to spend time and
money in experimenting with a view to
improving what many years had already
made it difficult to better. Hence the
three cardinal defects of the oilskin: its
weight, its stiffness, and the liability of
WATERPROOFING
751
its folds to stick together when it is
wrapped up, or in the other extreme to
crack, still remains. The weight, of
course, is inevitable. An oilskin must
be heavy, comparatively, from the very
essence of the process by which it is
made, but there seems no reason why it
should not in time be made much more
pliable (an old-time oilskin coat could
often stand up on end when empty) and
free from the danger of cracking or being
compacted into a solid block when it has
been stored folded on a shelf.
Probably the best oilskins ever made
are those prepared by combining Dr.
Stenhouse's process (patented in 1864)
with the ordinary method, which con-
sists in the main of painting over the
fabric with two or more coats of boiled
linseed oil, allowing each coat to dry
before the next is applied. This, with a
few variations in detail, is the whole
method of making oilskins. Dr. Sten-
house's waterproofing method is to im-
pregnate the fabric with a mixture of
hard paraffine and boiled oil in propor-
tions varying according to circum-
stances from 95 per cent of paraffine and
5 of oil to 70 per cent of the former and
30 of the latter. The most usual per-
centages are 80 and 20. The mixture is
made with the aid of heat, and is then
cast into blocks for storage. It is ap-
plied to the cloth stretched on a hot plate
by rubbing the fabric thoroughly all
over with a block of the composition,
which may be applied on one or both
sides as may be wished. The saturation
is then made complete, and excess of
composition is removed by passing the
cloth between hot rollers. When the
cloth is quite cold the process is com-
plete. The paraffine and the drying oil
combine their waterproofing powers, and
the paraffine prevents the oil from ex-
erting any injurious action upon the
material. Drying oil, partly on account
of the metallic compounds in it, and
partly on account of its absorbing oxygen
from the atmosphere, has a decided slow
weakening effect upon textile fibers.
Dr. Stenhouse points out that the in-
flammability of oilskins may be much
lessened by the use of the ordinary fire-
proofing salts, such as tungstate of soda,
or alum, either before or after the water-
proofing process is carried out.
The following are some of the best
recommended recipes for making oil-
skins:
I. — Dissolve 1 ounce of yellow soap in
H pints of boiling water. Then stir in
1 quart of boiled oil. When cold, add
I pint of gold size.
II.— Take fine twilled calico. Soak
it in bullock's blood and dry it. Then
give it 2 or 3 coats of boiled oil, mixed
with a little litharge, or with an ounce of
gold size to every pint of the oil.
III. — Make ordinary paint ready to
be applied thin with a strong solution of
soap.
IV. — Make 96 pounds of ocher to a
thin paste with boiled oil, and then add
16 pounds of ordinary black paint mixed
ready for use. Apply the first coat of
this with soap, the subsequent coats
without soap.
V. — Dissolve rosin in hot boiled oil
till it begins to thicken.
VI. — Mix chalk or pipe clay in the
finest powder, and in the purest state
obtainable to a thin paste with boiled oil.
VII.— Melt together boiled oil, 1 pint;
beeswax and rosin, each, 2 ounces.
VIII. — Dissolve soft soap in hot water
and add solution of protosulphate of
iron till no further precipitate is produced.
Filter off, wash, and dry, and form the
mass into a thin paste with boiled oil.
All these compositions are painted on
with an ordinary painter's brush. The
fabric should be slightly stretched, both
to avoid folds and to facilitate the pene-
tration of the waterproofing mixture. To
aid the penetration still further, the
mixture should be applied hot. It is of
the greatest importance that the fabric
should not be damp when the composi-
tion is applied to it. It is best to have it
warm as well as the composition. If
more than one coat is applied, which is
practically always the case, three being
the usual number, it is essential that the
last coat should be perfectly dry before
the next is applied. Neglect of this
precaution is the chief cause of sticki-
ness, which frequently results in serious
damage to the oilskins when they have
to be unfolded. In fact, it is advisable
to avoid folding an oilskin when it can
be avoided. They should be hung up
when not in use, whenever practicable,
and be allowed plenty of room. It goes
without saying that no attempt should
be made to sell or use the oilskin, whether
garment or tarpaulin, until the final coat
of composition is perfectly dry and set.
It is unadvisable to use artificial heat in
the drying at any stage in the manu-
facture.
Waterproofing Paper. — Any conven-
ient and appropriate machinery or ap-
paratus may be employed; but the best
method for waterproofing paper is as
follows: The treatment may be applied
752
WATERPROOFING
while the pulp is being formed into paper,
cr the finished paper may be treated. If
the material is to be treated while being
formed into paper, then the better method
is to begin the treatment when the web
of pulpy material leaves the Foudrinier
wire or the cylinders, it then being in a
damp condition, but with the larger per-
centage of moisture removed. From this
point the treatment of the paper is the
same whether it be pulp in a sheet, as
above stated, or finished paper.
The treatment consists, first, in satu-
rating the paper with glutinous material,
preferably animal glue, and by preference
the bath of glutinous material should be
hot, to effect the more rapid absorption
and more perfect permeation, impregna-
tion, and deposit of the glutinous ma-
terial within all the microscopic inter-
stices throughout the body of the paper
being treated. By preference a suitable
tank is provided in which the glutin-
ous material is deposited, and in which
it may be kept heated to a constant
temperature, the paper being passed
through the tank and saturated during
its passage. The material being treated
should pass in a continuous sheet — that
is, be fed from a roll and the finished
product be wound in a roll after final
treatment. This saves time and the
patentee finds that the requisite permea-
tion or incorporation of glutinous mat-
ter in the fiber will with some papers
— for instance, lightly sized manila
hemp — require but a few seconds. As
the paper passes from the glutin tank
the surplus of the glutinous matter is
removed from the surface by mechani-
cal means, as contradistinguished from
simply allowing it to pass off by gravity,
and in most instances it is preferred to
pass the paper between suitable pres-
sure rolls to remove such surplus. The
strength and consistency of the glutinous
bath may be varied, depending upon the
material being treated and the uses for
which such material is designed. It
may, however, be stated that, in a ma-
jority of cases, a hot solution of about
1 part of animal glue to about 10 parts of
water, by weight, gives the best results.
After leaving the bath of glutinous ma-
terial and having the surplus adhering
to the surfaces removed, the paper be-
fore drying is passed into or through
a solution of formaldehyde and water
to "set" the glutinous material. The
strength of this solution may also be
variable, depending, as heretofore stated,
upon the paper and uses for which it is
designed. In the majority of cases,
however, a solution of 1 part of formalde-
hyde (35 per cent solution) to 5 parts of
water, by weight, gives good results, and
the best result is attained if this bath is
cold instead of hot, though any particu-
lar temperature is not essentially neces-
sary. The effect of the formaldehyde
solution upon the glutin-saturated paper
is to precipitate the glutinous matter and
render it insoluble.
As the material comes from the formal-
dehyde bath, the surplus adhering to
the surfaces is removed by mechanical
means, pressure rolls being probably
most convenient. The paper is then dried
in any convenient manner. The best
result in drying is attained by the air-
blast, i. e., projecting blasts of air against
both surfaces of the paper. This drying
removes all the watery constituents and
leaves the paper in a toughened or
greatly strengthened condition, but not
in practical condition for commercial
uses, as it is brittle, horny, and stiff, and
has an objectionable odor and taste
on account of the presence of the alde-
hydes, paraldehydes, formic acid, and
other products, the result of oxidation.
Hence it needs to be "tempered." Now
while the glutinous material is rendered
insoluble — that is, it is so acted upon by
formaldehyde and the chemical action
which takes place while the united solu-
tions are giving off their watery constit-
uents that it will not fully dissolve — it
is, however, in a condition to be acted
on by moisture, as it will swell and ab-
sorb, or take up permanently by either
chemical or mechanical action a per-
centage of water, and will also become
improved in many respects, so that to
temper and render the paper soft and
pliable and adapt it for most com-
mercial uses it is subjected to moisture,
which penetrates the paper, causing a
welling in all directions, filling the
interstices perfectly and resulting in
"hydration" throughout the entire cel-
lular structure. Two actions, mechanical
and chemical, appear to take place, the
mechanical action being the temporary
absorption of water analogous to the ab-
sorption of water by a dry sponge, the
chemical action being the permanent
union of water with the treated paper,
analogous to the union of water and
tapioca, causing swelling, or like the
chemical combination of water with lime
or cement. For this purpose it is pre-
ferred to pass the paper into a bath
of hot water, saturated steam or equiva-
lent heat-and-moisture medium, thus
causing the fibers and the non-soluble
glutinous material filling the interstices
to expand in all directions and forcing
WATERPROOFING— WAX
753
the glutinous material into all the mi-
croscopic pores or openings and into the
masses of fiber, causing a commingling
or thorough incorporation of the fibers
and the glutinous compound. At the
same time, as heretofore indicated, a
change (hydration) takes place, whereby
the hardened mass of fiber, glutinous
material, and formaldehyde become
tempered and softened and the strength
imparted by the previous treatment in-
creased. To heighten the tempering and
softening* effect, glycerine may, in some
instances, be introduced in the temper-
ing bath, and in most cases one two-
hundredths in volume of glycerine gives
the best results.
The paper may be dried in any con*
venient manner and is in condition for
most commercial uses, it being greatly
strengthened, more flexible, more im-
pervious to moisture, acids, grease, or
alkalies, and is suitable for the manufac-
ture of binding-twine, carpets, and many
novelties, for dry wrappings and lining
packing cases, etc., but is liable to have
a disagreeable taste and may carry
traces of acids, rendering it impracti-
cable for some uses — for instance, wrap-
ping butter, meats, cheese, etc., after
receiving the alkali treatment. The
paper is also valuable as a packing for
joints in steam, water, and otner pipes or
connections. For the purpose, there-
fore, of rendering the material absolutely
free from all traces of acidity and all
taste and odors and, in fact, to render it
absolutely hygienic, it is passed through
a bath of water and a volatile alkali (am-
monium hydrate), the proportion by pref-
erence in a majority of cases being one-
hundredth of ammonium hydrate to
ninety-nine one-hundredths of water by
volume. A small percentage of wood
alcohol may be added. This bath is
preferably cool, but a variation in its
temperature will not interfere to a seri-
ous extent with the results. The effect of
this bath followed by drying is to com-
plete the chemical reaction and destroy
all taste or odor, removing all traces
of acids and rendering the paper hy-
gienic in all respects. The material may
be calendered or cut and used for any
of the purposes desired. If the material
is to be subjected to the volatile alkali
bath, it is not necessary to dry it be-
tween the tempering and volatile alkali
baths.
The paper made in accordance with
the foregoing will, it is claimed, be found
to be greatly strengthened, some ma-
terials being increased in strength from
100 to 700 per cent. It will be non-
absorbent to acids, greases, and alkalies,
and substantially waterproof, and owing
to its component integrate structure will
be practically non-conductive to elec-
tricity, adapting it as a superior insu-
lating material. It may with perfect safety
be employed for wrapping butter, meats,
spices, groceries, and all materials, whether
unctuous or otherwise.
The term "hydration" means the sub-
jecting of the material (after treatment
with glutinous material and formalde-
hyde and drying) to moisture, whereby
the action described takes place.
• A sheet or web of paper can be treated
by the process as rapidly as it is manu-
factured, as the time for exposure to the
action of the glutinous material need not
be longer than the time required for it to
become saturated, this, of course, vary-
ing with different thicknesses and
densities, and the length of time of ex-
posure may be fixed without checking
the speed by making the tank of such
length that the requisite time will elapse
while the sheet is passing through it and
the guides so arranged as to maintain the
sheet in position to be acted on by such
solution the requisite length of time.
Four seconds' exposure to the action of
formaldehyde is found sufficient in most
cases.
Waterproof Ropes. — For making ropes
and lines impervious to weatherr the
process of tarring is recommended, which
can be done either in the separate strands
or after the rope is twisted. An addi-
tion of tallow gives greater pliability.
Waterproof Wood. — I. — Soak in a
mixture of boracic acid, 6 parts; ammo-
nium chloride, 5 parts; sodium borate, 3
parts, and water, 100 parts.
II. — Saturate in a solution of zinc
chloride.
Wax
Adulteration of Wax. — Wax is adulter-
ated with the following among other
substances: Rosins, pitch, flowers of sul-
phur, starch, fecula, stearine, paraffine,
tallow, palm oil, calcined bones, yellow
ocher, water, and wood sawdust.
Rosins are detected by cold alcohol,
which dissolves all rosinous substances
and exercises no action on the wax. The
rosins having been extracted from the
alcoholic solution by the evaporation of
the alcohol, the various kinds may be
distinguished by the odors disengaged
by burning the mass several times on a
plate of heated iron.
All earthy substances may be readily
754
WAX
separated frcm wax by means of oil of
turpentine, which dissolves the wax, while
the earthy matters form a residue.
Oil of turpentine also completely sepa-
rates wax from starchy substances, which,
like earthy matters, do not dissolve,
but form a residue. A simpler method
consists in heating the wax with boiling
water; the gelatinous consistency assumed
by the water, and the blue coloration in
presence of iodine, indicate that the wax
contains starchy substances. Adultera-
tion by means of starch and fecula is
quite frequent. These substances are
sometimes added to the wax in a pro-
portion of nearly 60 per cent. To sepa-
rate either, the suspected product is
treated hot with very dilute sulphuric
acid (2 parts of acid per 100 parts of
water). All amylaceous substances, con-
verted into dextrin, remain dissolved in
the liquid, while the wax, in cooling, forms
a crust on the surface. It is taken off
and weighed; the difference between its
weight and that of the product analyzed
will give the quantity of the amylaceous
substances.
Flowers of sulphur are recognized
readily from the odor of sulphurous acid
during combustion on red-hot iron.
Tallow may be detected by the taste
and odor. Pure wax has an aromatic,
agreeable taste, while that mixed with
tallow is repulsive both in taste and
smell. Pure wax, worked between the
fingers, grows soft, preserving a certain
cohesion in all parts. It divides into
lumps, which adhere to the fingers, if it
is mixed with tallow. The adulteration
may also be detected by the thick and
nauseating fumes produced when it is
burned on heated iron.
Stearic acid may be recognized by
means of boiling alcohol, which dissolves
it in nearly all proportions and causes it
to deposit crystals on cooling, while it is
without action on the wax. Blue litmus
paper, immersed in alcohol solution,
reddens on drying in air, and thus serves
for detecting the presence of stearic acid.
Ocher is found by treating the wax
with boiling water. A lemon-yellow
deposit results, which, taken up with
chlorhydric acid, yields with ammonia a
lemon-yellow precipitate of ferric oxide.
The powder of burnt bones separates
and forms a residue, when the wax is
heated with oil of turpentine.
Artificial Beeswax. — This is obtained
by mixing the following substances, in ap-
proximately the proportions stated: Paraf-
fine, 45 parts, by weight; white Japan
vegetable wax, 3C parts, by weight; rosins,
or colophonies, 10 parts, by weight; white
pitch, 10 parts, by weight; tallow, 5 parts,
by weight; ceresine, colorant, 0.030 parts,
by weight; wax perfume, 0.100 parts, by
weight. If desired, the paraffine may be
replaced with ozokerite, or by a mixture
of vaseline and ozokerite, for the purpose
of varying the fusing temperature, or
rendering it more advantageous for the
various applications designed. The fol-
lowing is the method of preparation:
Melt on the boiling water bath, shaking
constantly, the paraffine, the Japan wax,
the rosins, the pitch, and the tallow.
When the fusion is complete, add the
colorant and the perfume. When these
products are perfectly mingled, remove
from the fire, allow the mixture to cool,
and run it into suitable molds. The wax
thus obtained may be employed specially
for encaustics for furniture and floors, or
for purposes where varnish is employed.
Waxes for Floors, Furniture, etc. —
I. — White beeswax 16 parts
Colophony 4 parts
Venice turpentine. . 1 part
Melt the articles together over a gentle
fire, and when completely melted and
homogeneous, pour into a sizable earthen-
ware vessel, and stir in, while still warm,
o parts of the best French turpentine.
Cool for 24 hours, by which time the
mass has acquired the consistence of soft
butter, and is ready for use. Its method
of use is very simple. It is smeared, in
small quantities, on woolen cloths, and
with these is rubbed into the wood.
This is the best preparation, but one in
which the beeswax is merely dissolved
in the turpentine in such a way as to have
the consistence of a not too thin oil color,
will answer. The wood is treated with
this, taking care that the surface is
evenly covered with the mixture, and that
it does not sink too deeply in the orna-
ments, corners, etc., of the woodwork.
This is best achieved by taking care to
scrape off from the cloths all excess of
the wax.
If, in the course of 24 hours, the sur-
face is hard, then with a stiff brush go
over it, much after the way of polishing
a boot. For the corners and angles
smaller brushes are used; when necessary,
stiff pencils may be employed. Finally,
the whole is polished with plush, or
velvet rags, in order not to injure the orig-
inal polish. Give the article a good coat
of linseed oil or a washing with petro-
leum before beginning work.
II. — Articles that are always exposed
to the water, floors, doors, especially of
oak, should, from time to time, be satu
WAX
755
rated with oil or wax. A house door,
plentifully decorated with wood carving,
will not shrink or warp, even where the
sun shines hottest on it, when it is fre-
quently treated to saturation with wax
and oil. Here a plain dosage with lin-
seed oil is sufficient. Varnish, without
the addition of turpentine, should never
be used, or if used it should be followed
by a coat of wax.
III. — A good floor wax is composed of
2 parts of wax and 3 parts of Venice
turpentine, melted on the water bath, and
the mixture applied while still hot, using
a pencil, or brush, for the application,
and when it has become solid and dry,
diligently rubbed, or polished down with
a woolen cloth, or with a floor brush,
especially made for the purpost,.
IV. — An emulsion of 5 parts of yellow
wax, 2 parts of crude potassium carbon-
ate, and 12 parts of water, boiled to-
gether until they assume a milky color
and the solids are dissolved, used cold,
makes an excellent composition for floors.
Any desired color may be given this
dressing by stirring in the powdered col-
oring matter. Use it exactly as de-
scribed for the first mass.
Gilders* Wax. — For the production of
various colorings of gold in fire gilding,
the respective places are frequently
covered with so-called gilders' wax.
These consist of mixtures of various
chemicals which have an etching action
in the red heat upon the bronze mass,
thus causing roughness of unequal depth,
as well as through the fact that the com-
position of the bronze is changed some-
what on the surface, a relief of the gold
color being effected in consequence of
these two circumstances. The gilding
wax is prepared by melting together the
finely powdered chemicals with wax ac-
cording to the following recipes:
I II III IV V
Yellow wax 32 32 32 96 36
Red chalk 3' 24 18 48 18
Verdigris 2 4 18 32 18
Burnt alum 2 4 — — —
Burnt borax — — 2 1 3
Copper ash — 4 6 20 8
Zinc vitriol — — — 32 18
Green vitriol — — — 1 6
Grafting Wax. —
I. — Beeswax 7 parts
Purified rosin 12 parts
Turpentine 3 parts
Rape oil 1 part
Venice turpentine.. . . 2.5 parts
Zinc white 2.5 parts
Color yellow with turmer.ic.
II. — Japan wax 1 part
Yellow wax 3 parts
Rosin 8 parts
Turpentine 4 parts
Hard paraffine 1 part
Suet 3 parts
Venice turpentine. ... 6 parts
Harness Wax.—
Oil of turpentine 90 parts
Wax, yellow 9 parts
Prussian blue 1 part
Indigo 0.5 parts
Bone black 5 parts
Dissolve the wax in the oil by aid of a
low heat, on a water bath. Mix the re-
maining ingredients, which must be well
powdered, and work up with a portion of
the solution of wax. Finally, add the
mixture to the solution, and mix thor-
oughly on the bath. When a homogene-
ous liquid is obtained, pour into earthen
boxes.
Modeling Wax. — I. — Yellow wax,
1,000 parts; Venice turpentine, 130 parts;
lard, 65 parts; bole, 725 parts. The
mixture when still liquid is poured into
tepid water and kneaded until a plastic
mass is obtained.
II. — Summer Modeling Wax. — White
wax, 20 parts; ordinary turpentine, 4
parts; sesame oil, 1 part; vermilion, 2
parts.
III.— Winter Modeling Wax.— White
wax, 20 parts; ordinary turpentine, 6
parts; sesame oil, 2 parts; vermilion, 2
parts. Preparation same as for Formula I .
Sealing Waxes. — The following for-
mulas may be followed for making seal-
ing wax: Take 4 pounds of shellac, 1
pound of Venice turpentine, and 3 pounds
of vermilion. Melt the lac in a copper
pan suspended over a clear charcoal fire,
then add the turpentine slowly to it, and
soon afterwards add the vermilion, stir-
ring briskly all the time with a rod in
either hand. In forming the round sticks
of sealing wax, a certain portion of the
mass should be weighed while it is duc-
tile, divided into the desired number of
pieces, and then rolled out upon a warm
marble slab by means of a smooth wooden
block like that used by apothecaries for
rolling a mass of pills.
The oval and square sticks of sealing
wax are cast in molds, with the above
compound, in a state of fusion. The
marks of the lines of junction of the
mold box may be afterwards removed by
holding the sticks over a clear fire, or
passing them over a blue gas flame.
Marbled sealing wax is made by mixing
756
WAX— WEATHER FORECASTERS
two, three, or more colored kinds to-
gether while they are in a semi-fluid
state. From the viscidity of the several
portions their incorporation is left in-
complete, so as to produce the appearance
of marbling. Gold sealing wax is made
simply by adding gold chrome instead of
vermilion into the melted rosins. Wax
may be scented by introducing a little
essential oil, essence of musk, or other
perfume. If 1 part of balsam of Peru be
melted along with 99 parts of the seal-
ing-wax composition, an agreeable fra-
grance will be exhaled in the act of sealing
with it. Either lampblack or ivory black
serves for the coloring matter of black
wax. Sealing wax is often adulterated
with rosin, in which case it runs into thin
drops at the flame of a candle.
The following mistakes are some-
times made in the manufacture of sealing
wax:
I. — Use of filling agents which are too
coarsely ground.
II. — Excessive use of filling agents.
III. — Insufficient binding of the pig-
ments and fillings with a suitable ad-
hesive agent, which causes these bodies
to absorb the adhesive power of the
gums.
IV. — Excessive heating of the mass,
caused by improper melting or faulty
admixture of the gummy bodies. Tur-
pentine and rosin must be heated before
entering the shellac. If this rule is in-
verted, as is often the case, the shellac
sticks to the bottom and burns partly.
Great care must be taken to mix the
coloring matter to a paste with spirit or
oil of turpentine before adding to the
other ingredients. Unless this is done
the wax will not be of a regular tint.
Dark Blue Wax. — Three ounces Vene-
tian turpentine, 4 ounces shellac, 1 ounce
rosin, 1 ounce Prussian blue, \ ounce
magnesia.
Green Wax. — Two ounces Venetian
turpentine, 4 ounces shellac, 1J ounces
rosin, \ ounce chrome yellow, \ ounce
Prussian blue, 1 ounce magnesia.
Carmine Red Wax. — One ounce Vene-
tian turpentine, 4 ounces shellac, 1 ounce
rosin, colophony, 1 \ ounces Chinese red,
1 drachm magnesia, with oil of turpen-
tine.
Gold Wax. — Four ounces Venetian
turpentine, 8 ounces shellac, 14 sheets of
genuine leaf gold, \ ounce bronze, \
ounce magnesia, with oil of turpentine.
White Wax.— I.— The wax is bleached
by exposing to moist air and to the sun,
but it must first be prepared in thin
sheets or ribbons or in grains. For this
purpose it is first washed, to free it from
the honey which may adhere, melted,
and poured into a tin vessel, whose bot-
tom is perforated with narrow slits.
The melted wax falls in a thin stream
on a wooden cylinder arranged below
and half immersed in cold water. This
cylinder is turned, and the wax, rolling
round in thin leaves, afterwards falls in-
to the water. To melt it in grains, a
vessel is made use of, perforated with
small openings, which can be rotated.
The wax is projected in grains into the
cold water. It is spread on frames of
muslin, moistened with water several
times a day, and exposed to the sun until
the wax assumes a fine white. This
whiteness, however, is not perfect. The
operation of melting and separating into
ribbons or grains must be renewed.
Finally, it is melted and flowed into
molds. The duration of the bleaching
may be abridged by adding to the wax,
treated as above, from 1.25 to 1.75 per
cent of rectified oil of turpentine, free
from rosin. In 6 or 8 days a result will
be secured which would otherwise re-
quire 5 or 6 weeks.
II. — Bleached shellac. .... 28 parts
Venetian turpentine.. 13 parts
Plaster of Paris 30 parts
WAX FOR BOTTLES:
See Photography.
WAX, BURNING, TRICK:
See Pyrotechnics.
WAXES, DECOMPOSITION OF:
See Oil.
WAX FOR IRONING:
See Laundry Preparations.
WAX FpR LINOLEUM:
See Linoleum.
Weather Forecasters
(See also Hygrometers and Hygroscopes.)
I. — It is known that a leaf of blotting
paper or a strip of fabric made to change
color according to the hygrometric state
of the atmosphere has been employed
for weather indications in place of a
barometer. The following compound is
recommended for this purpose: One part
of cobalt chloride, 75 parts of nickel
oxide, 20 parts of gelatin, and 200 parts
of water. A strip of calico, soaked in
this solution, will appear green in fine
weather, but when moisture intervenes
the color disappears.
WEATHER FORECASTERS
757
II. — Copper chloride. ... 1 part
Gelatin 10 parts
Water 100 parts
III. — This is a method of making old-
fashioned weather glasses containing a
liquid that clouds or solidifies under
certain atmospheric conditions:
Camphor 2^- drachms
Alcohol 11 drachms
Water 9 drachms
Saltpeter 38 grains
Sal ammoniac. ... 38 grains
Dissolve the camphor in the alcohol
and the salts in the water and mix the
solutions together. Pour in test tubes,
cover with wax after corking and make a
hole through the cork with a red-hot
needle, or draw out the tube until only a
pin hole remains. When the camphor,
etc., appear soft and powdery, and
almost filling the tube, rain with south or
southwest winds may be expected; when
crystalline, north, northeast, or north-
west winds, with fine weather, may be
expected; when a portion crystallizes
on one side of the tube, wind may be
expected from that direction. Fine
weather: The substance remains entirely
at bottom of tube and the liquid per-
fectly clear. Coming rain: Substance
will rise gradually, liquid will be very
clear, with a small star in motion. A
coming storm or very high wind: Sub-
stance partly at top of tube, and of a
leaflike form, liquid very heavy and in
a fermenting state. These effects are
noticeable 24 hours before the change sets
in. In winter: Generally the substance
lies higher in the tube. Snow or white
frost: Substance very white and small
stars in motion. Summer weather: The
substance will lie quite low. The sub-
stance will lie closer to the tube on the
opposite side to the quarter from which
the storm is coming. The instrument is
nothing more than a scientific toy.
WEATHERPROOFING :
See Paints.
WEED KILLERS:
See Disinfectants.
Weights and Measures
INTERNATIONAL ATOMIC WEIGHTS.
The International Committee on
Atomic Weights have presented this
table as corrected:
Aluminum Al
Antimony Sb
Argon A
O=16
27.1
120.2
39.9
26.9
119.3
39.6
O = 16
H=l
Arsenic
As
75
74.4
Barium
Ba
137.4
136.4
Bismuth
Bi
208.5
206.9
Boron
B
11
10.9
Bromine
Br
79.96
79.36
Cadmium
Cd
112.4
111.6
Caesium
Cs
132.9
131.9
Calcium
Ca
40.1
39.7
Carbon
C
12
11.91
Cerium
Ce
140.25
139.2
Chlorine
Cl
35.45
35.18
Chromium
Cr
52.1
51.7
Cobalt . .
Co
59
58.55
Columbium. . . .
Cb
94
93.3
Copper
Erbium
Cu
Er
63.6
166
63.1
164.8
Fluorine
F
19
18.9
Gadolinium.. .-.
Gd
156
154.8
Gallium
Ga
70
69.5
Germanium.. . .
Ge
72.5
72
Glucinum
Gl
9.1
9.03
Gold
Au
197.2
195.7
Helium
He
4
4
Hydrogen
H
1.008
1
Indium
In
115
114.1
Iodine
I
126.97
126.01
Iridium
Ir
193
191.5
Iron
Fe
55.9
55.5
Krypton
Kr
81.8
81.2
Lanthanum. . . .
La
138.9
137.9
Lead
Pb
206.9
205.35
Lithium
Li
7.03
6.98
Magnesium. . . .
Mg
24.36
24.18
Manganese . . . .
Mn
55
54.6
Mercury
Hg
200
198.5
Molybdenum . .
,. _P
Mo
96
95.3
Neodymium.. . .
Nd
143.6
142.5
Neon
Ne
20
19.9
Nickel
Ni
58.7
58.3
Nitrogen
N
14.04
13.93
Osmium
Os
191
189.6
Oxygen
O
16
15.88
Palladium
Pd
106.5
105.7
Phosphorus. . . .
P
31
30.77
Platinum
Pt
194.8
193.3
Potassium
K
39.15
38.85
Praseodymium .
Pr
140.5
139.4
Radium
Ra
225
223.3
Rhodium
Rh
103
102.2
Rubidium
Rb
85.5
84.9
Ruthenium ....
Ru
101.7
100.9
Samarium
Sm
150.3
149.2
Scandium
Sc
44.1
43.8
Selenium
Se
79.2
78.6
Silicon
Si
28.4
28.2
Silver
Ag
107.93
107.11
Sodium
Na
23.05
22.88
Strontium
Sr
87.6
86.94
Sulphur
S
32.06
31.82
Tantalum
Ta
183
181.6
Tellurium
Te
127.6
126.6
Terbium
Tb
160
158.8
Thallium
Tl
204.1
202.6
758
WEIGHTS AND MEASURES
INTERNATIONAL ATOMIC WEIGHTS— Continued.
Thorium Th
Thulium Tm
Tin Sn
Titanium Ti
Tungsten W
Uranium U
O=16
232.5
171
119
48.1
184
238.5
H=l
230.8
169.7
118.1
47.7
182.6
236.7
Vanadium V
Xenon Xe
Ytterbium Yb
Yttrium Yt
Zinc Zn
Zirconium. . . Zr
O=16
51.2
128
173
89
65.4
90.6
50.8
127
171.7
88.3
64.9
89.9
UNITED STATES WEIGHTS AND MEASURES
(According to existing standards)
12 inches =1 foot.
3 feet = 1 yard.
5 . 5 yards = 1 rod.
40 rods=l furlong.
8 furlongs = 1 mile.
LINEAL
Inches. Feet.
12 = 1
36= 3
198= 16.
7,920= 660
63,360= 5,280
KMB
Yards
1
5.
220
1,760
. Rods
5= 1
= 40
= 320
Fur's. Mile.
= 1
= 8=1
144 sq. inches = 1 square foot.
9 square feet= 1 square yard.
30.25 square yards = 1 square rod
40 square rods = 1 square rood.
4 square roods = 1 acre.
640 acres = 1 square mile.
Rods. Roods. Acres.
SURFACE— LAND
Feet. Yards.
9=1
272.25= 30.25= 1
10,890= 1,210= 40= 1
43,560= 4,840= 160= 4= 1
27,878,400 = 3,097,600=102,400 = 2,560 = 640
VOLUME— LIQUID
4 gills = 1 pint.
2 pints = 1 quart.
4 quarts = 1 gallon.
Gills. Pints. Gallon. Cub. In.
32 = 8 = 1 =231
FLUID MEASURE
Gallon. Pints. Ounces. Drachms. Minims. Cubic Centimeters.
1 = 8 = 128 = 1,024 = 61,440 = 3,785.435
1 = 16 = 128 = 7,680 = 473.179
1 = 8 = 480 = 29.574
1 = 60 = 3.697
16 ounces, or a pint, is sometimes called a fluidpound.
TROY WEIGHT
Pound. Ounces. Pennyweights. Grains. Grams.
1 = 12 = 240 = 5,760 = 373.24
1 = 20 = 480 = 31.10
1 = 24 1.56
APOTHECARIES' WEIGHT
ib. 3 3 3
Pound. Ounces. Drachms. Scruples.
1 = 12 = 96 = 288 =
24 =
3 =
96
8 =
1 =
gr.
Grains.
5,760
480
60
Grams
373.24
31.10
3.89
1 = 20 = 1.30
1 = .06
The pound, ounce, and grain are the same as in Troy weight.
AVOIRDUPOIS WEIGHT
Pound. Ounces. Drachms. Grains (Troy) Grams.
1 = 16 = 256 = 7,000 = 453.60
1 = 16 = 437.5 = 28.35
1 = 27.34 = 1.77
ENGLISH WEIGHTS AND MEASURES
APOTHECARIES' WEIGHT
20 grains = 1 scruple = 20 grains
3 scruples = 1 dracnm = 60 grains
8 drachms = 1 ounce = 480 grains
12 ounces = 1 pound = 5,760 grains
FLUID MEASURE
60 minims = 1 fluidrachm
8 drachms = 1 fluidounce
20 ounces = 1 pint
8 pints = 1 gallon
The above weights are usually adopted
in formulas.
All chemicals are usually sold by
AVOIRDUPOIS WEIGHT
27 J£ grains =1 drachm = 27 J£ grains
16 drachms = 1 ounce = 437? grains
16 ounces = 1 pound =7,000 grains
Precious metals are usually sold by
TROY WEIGHT
24 grains = 1 pennyweight = 24 grains
20 penny weights = 1 ounce = 480 grains
1 2 ounces = 1 pound =5,760 grains
NOTE. — An ounce of metallic silver contains
480 grains, but an ounce of nitrate of silver con-
tains only 437? grains.
WEIGHTS AND MEASURES
759
METRIC SYSTEM OF WEIGHTS AND MEASURES
MEASURES OF LENGTH
DENOMINATIONS AND
VALUES.
EQUIVALENTS IN USE.
Myriameter. .
10,000 meters
6.2137 miles
Kilometer
Hectometer .
1 ,000 meters
100 meters
.62137 miles, or 3,280 feet, 10 inches
328 feet and 1 inch
10 meters
393.7 inches
Meter
1 meter
1-1 Oth of a meter
39.37 inches
3.937 inches
Centimeter
Millimeter ...
l-100th of a meter
1-1, 000th of a meter
.3937 inches
.0394 inches
MEASURES OF SURFACE
DENOMINATIONS AND VALUES.
EQUIVALENTS IN USE.
Hectare.. .
Are
Centare. ..
10,000 square meters
100 square meters
1 square meter
2.471 acres
119.6 square yards
1 ,550 square inches
MEASURES OF VOLUME
DENOMINATIONS AND VALUES.
EQUIVALENTS IN USE.
NAMES.
No. OF
LITERS.
CUBIC MEASURES.
DRY MEASURE.
WINE MEASURE.
Kiloliter or stere.
Hectoliter.
Dekaliter
Liter
1,000
100
10
1
1 cubic meter
1-1 Oth cubic meter
10 cubic decimeters
1 cubic decimeter
1.308 cubic yards
2 bushels and
3.35 pecks
9.08 quarts
.908 quarts
264.17 gallons
26.417 gallons
2.6417 gallons
1.0567 quarts
Deciliter
Centiliter
Milliliter
1-10
1-100
1-1,000
l-10th cubic decimeter
10 cubic centimeters
1 cubic centimeter
6.1023 cubic inches
.6102 cubic inches
.061 cubic inches
.845 gills
.338 fluidounces
.27 fluidrachms
WEIGHTS
DENOMINATIONS AND VALUES.
EQUIVALENTS
IN USE.
NAMES.
NUMBER
OF GRAMS.
WEIGHT OF VOLUME OF WATER
AT ITS MAXIMUM DENSITY.
AVOIRDUPOIS
WEIGHT.
Millier or Tonneau
1,000,000
100,000
10,000
1,000
100
10
1
1-10
1-100
1-1,000
1 cubic meter
1 hectoliter
10 liters
1 liter
1 deciliter
10 cubic centimeters
1 cubic centimeter
l-10th of a cubic centimeter
10 cubic millimeters
1 cubic millimeter
2,204.6 pounds
220.46 pounds
22.046 pounds
2.2046 pounds
3.5274 ounces
.3527 ounces
15.432 grains
1.5432 grains
.1543 grains
.0154 grains
Quintal
Kilogram or Kilo
Hectogram. ...
Gram
Centigram
Milligram .
For measuring surfaces, the square dekameter is used under the term of ARE ; the hectare,
or 100 ares, is equal to about 2| acres. The unit of capacity is the cubic decimeter or LITER,
and the series of measures is formed in the same way as in the case of the table of lengths. The
cubic meter is the unit of measure for solid bodies, and is termed STERE. The unit of weight
is the GRAM, which is the weight of one cubic centimeter of pure water weighed in a vacuum
at the temperature of 4° C. or 39.2° F., which is about its temperature of maximum density.
In practice, the term cubic centimeter, abbreviated c.c., is generally used instead of milliliter,
and cubic meter instead of kilbliter.
760
WEIGHTS AND MEASURES
THE CONVERSION OF METRIC INTO ENGLISH WEIGHT
The following table, which contains no error greater than one-tenth of a grain, will
suffice for most practical purposes:
1 gram = 15§ grains
2 grams = 30| grains
3 grams = 46^ grains
4 grams = 61 f grains, or 1 drachm, 1| grains
5 grams = 77g grains, or 1 drachm, 17£ grains
6 grams = 92f grains, or 1 drachm, 32f grains
7 grams = 108 grains, or 1 drachm, 48 grains
8 grams = 123§ grains, or 2 drachms, 3§ grains
9 grams = 138f grains, or 2 drachms, 18* grains
10grams= 154§ grains, or 2 drachms, 34f grains
11 grams = 1691 grains, or 2 drachms, 49| grains
12 grams= 185£ grains, or 3 drachms, 5£ grains
13 grams = 200f grains, or 3 drachms, 20| grains
14 grams = 216 grains, or 3 drachms, 36 grains
1 5 grams = 23 If grains , or 3 drachms , 5 1 § grains
16grams= 247 grains, or 4 drachms, 7 grains
17 grams = 262| grains, or 4 drachms, 22 f grains
18 grams = 277| grains, or 4 drachms, 37f grains
19grams= 293^ grains, or 4 drachms, 53& grains
20 grams = 308§ grains, or 5 drachms, 8g grains
30 grams = 463 grains, or 7 drachms, 43 grains
40 grams = 6 1 7£ grains , or 1 0 drachms , 1 7£ grains
50 grams = 77 If grains, or 12 drachms, 51§ grains
60 grams = 926 grains, or 15 drachms, 26 grains
70 grams = 1 ,080s grains, or 18 drachms, Q£ grains
80 grams = 1 ,234f grains, or 20 drachms, 34f grains
90 grams = 1 ,389 grains, or 23 drachms, 9 grains
100 grams= 1,543£ grains, or 25 drachms, 43£ grains
1,000 grams = 1 kilogram =32 ounces, 1 drachm, 12§ grains
THE CONVERSION OF METRIC INTO ENGLISH MEASURE
1 cubic centimeter =
2 cubic centimeters =
3 cubic centimeters =
4 cubic centime ters =
5 cubic centimeters =
6 cubic centimeters =
7 cubic centime ters=
8 cubic centimeters=
9 cubic centimeters =
10 cubic centimeters =
20 cubic centime ters=
30 cubic centimeters =
40 cubic centime ters =
50 cubic centime ters=
60 cubic centime ters=
70 cubic centimeters =
80 cubic centimeters =
90 cubic cent! meters =
100 cubic centimeters =
1,000 cubic centimeters'
17 minims
34 minims
51 minims
•• 68 minims, or 1 drachm, 8 minims
85 minims, or 1 drachm, 25 minims
! 101 minims, or 1 drachm, 41 minims
1 18 minims, or 1 drachm, 58 minims
' 135 minims, or 2 drachms, 15 minims
•• 152 minims, or 2 drachms, 32 minims
169 minims, or 2 drachms, 49 minims
338 minims, or 5 drachms, 38 minims
507 minims, or 1 ounce, 0 drachm, 27 minims
= 676 minims, or 1 ounce, 3 drachms, 16 minims
•• 845 minims, or 1 ounce, 6 drachms, 5 minima
1,014 minims, or 2 ounces, 0 drachms, 54 minims
1,183 minims, or 2 ounces, 3 drachms, 43 minims
1 ,352 minims, or 2 ounces, 6 drachms, 32 minims
•1,521 minims, or 3 ounces, 1 drachm, 21 minims
1 ,690 minims, or 3 ounces, 4 drachms, 10 minims
> 1 liter = 34 fluidounces nearly, or 2& pints.
WELDING POWDERS— WHITEWASH
761
WELDING POWDERS.
See also Steel.
Powder to Weld Wrought Iron at Pale-
red Heat with Wrought Iron. — I. — Borax,
1 part (by weight); sal ammoniac, \ part;
water, \ part. These ingredients are
boiled with constant stirring until the
mass is stiff; then it is allowed to harden
over the fire. Upon cooling, the mass is
rubbed up into a powder and mixed with
one-third wrought-iron filings free from
rust. When the iron has reached red
heat, this powder is sprinkled on the
parts to be welded, and after it has
liquefied, a few blows are sufficient to
unite the pieces.
II. — Borax, 2 parts; wrought-iron
filings, free from rust, 2 parts; sal am-
moniac, 1 part. These pulverized parts
are moistened with copaiba balsam and
made into a paste, then slowly dried over
a fire and again powdered. The applica-
tion is the same as for Formula I.
Welding Powder to Weld Steel on
Wrought Iron at Pale -red Heat. — Borax,
3 parts; potassium cyanide, 2 parts;
Berlin blue, 1-100 part. These substances
are powdered well, moistened with water;
next they are boiled with constant stirring
until stiff; then dry over a fire. Upon
cooling, the mass is finely pulverized and
mixed with 1 part of wrought-iron filings,
free from rust. This powder is sprinkled
repeatedly upon the hot pieces, and after
it nas burned in the welding is taken in
hand.
WHEEL GREASE:
See Lubricants.
WHETSTONES.
To make artificial whetstones, take
gelatin of good quality, dissolve it in
equal weight of water, operating in
almost complete darkness, and add \\
per cent of bichromate of potash, pre-
viously dissolved. Next take about 9
times the weight of the gelatin employed
of very fine emery or fine powdered gun
stone, which is mixed intimately with the
gelatinized solution. The paste thus ob-
tained is molded into the desired shape,
taking care to exercise an energetic
pressure in order to consolidate the mass.
Finally dry by exposure to the sun.
WHITING:
To Form Masses of Whiting. — Mix
the whiting into a stiff paste with water,
and the mass will retain its coherence
when dry.
Whitewash
(See also Paint.)
Wash the ceiling by wetting it twice
with water, laying on as much 88 can
well be floated on, then rub the old
color up with a stumpy brush and wipe
off with a large sponge. Stop all cracks
with whiting and plaster of Paris. When
dry, claricole with size and a little of the
whitewash when this is dry. If very
much stained, paint those parts with
turps, color, and, if necessary, claricole
again. To make the whitewash, take a
dozen pounds of whiting (in large balls),
break them up in a pail, and cover with
water to soak. During this time melt
over a slow fire 4 pounds common size,
and at the same time, with a palette
knife or small trowel, rub up fine about a
dessertspoonful of blue-black with water
to a fine paste; then pour the water off
the top of the whiting and with a stick
stir in the black; when well mixed, stir in
the melted size and strain. When cold,
it is fit for use. If the jelly is too stiff for
use, beat it up well and add a little cold
water. Commence whitewashing over
the window and so work from the light.
Distemper color of any tint may be
made by using any other color instead of
the blue-black — as ocher, chrome, Dutch
pink, raw sienna for yellows and buff;
Venetian red, burnt sienna, Indian red or
purple brown for reds; celestial blue,
ultramarine, indigo for blues; red and
blue for purple, gray or lavender; red
lead and chrome for orange; Brunswick
green for greens.
Ox blood in lime paint is an excellent
binding agent for the lime, as it is chief-
ly composed of albumin, which, like
casein or milk, is capable of transform-
ing the lime into casein paint. But the
ox blood must be mixed in the lime paint;
to use it separately is useless, if not harm-
ful. Whitewashing rough mortar-plas-
tering to saturation is very practical, as it
closes all the pores and small holes.
A formula used by the United States
Government in making whitewash for
light-houses and other public buildings
is as follows:
Unslaked lime 2 pecks
Common salt 1 peck
Rice flour 3 pounds
Spanish whiting \ pound
Glue (clean and
white) 1 pound
Water, a sufficient
quantity.
Slake the lime in a vessel of about 10
gallons capacity; cover it, strain, and add
WHITEWASH— WINES AND LIQUORS
the salt previously dissolved in warm
water. Boii the rice flour in water; soak
the glue in water and dissolve on a water
bath, and add both, together with the
whiting and 5 gallons of hot water to
the mixture, stirring all well together.
Cover to protect from dirt, and let it
stand for a few days, when it will be
ready for use. It is to be applied hot,
and for that reason should be used from
a kettle over a portable furnace.
To Soften Old Whitewash.— Wet the
whitewash thoroughly with a wash made
of 1 pound of potash dissolved in 10
quarts of water.
WHITEWASH, TO REMOVE:
See Cleaning Preparations and Meth-
ods.
WHITE METAL:
See Alloys.
WINDOW-CLEANING COMPOUND:
See Cleaning Compounds.
WINDOW DISPLAY:
See also Sponges.
An attractive window display for
stores can be prepared as follows:
In a wide-mouth jar put some sand,
say, about 6 inches in depth. Make a
mixture of equal parts of aluminum sul-
phate, copper sulphate, and iron sul-
phate, coarsely powdered, and strew it
over the surface of the sand. Over this
layer gently pour a solution of sodium
silicate, dissolved in 3 parts of hot water,
taking care not to disturb the layer of
sulphates. In about a week or 10 days
the surface will be covered with crystals
of different colors, being silicates of
different metals employed. Now take
some pure water and let it run into the
vessel by a small tube, using a little more
of it than you used of the water-glass
solution. This will displace the water-
glass solution, and a fresh crop of crystals
will come in the silicates, and makes,
when properly done, a pretty scene.
Take care in pouring in the water to let
the point of the tube be so arranged as
not to disturb the crop of silicates.
WINDOW PERFUME.
In Paris an apparatus has been intro-
duced consisting of a small tube which
is attached lengthwise on the exterior of
the shop windows. Through numerous
little holes a warm, lightly perfumed
current of air is passed, which pleasantly
tickles the olfactory nerves of tne looker-
on and at the same time keeps the panes
clear and clean, so that the goods exhib-
ited present the best possible appearance.
WINDOW POLISHES:
See Polishes.
WINDOWS, FROSTED:
See Glass.
WINDOWS, TO PREVENT DIMMING
OF:
See Glass.
Wines and Liquors
BITTERS.
Bitters, as the name indicates, are
merely tinctures of bitter roots and
barks, with the addition of spices to
flavor, and depend for their effect upon
their tonic action on the stomach. Taken
too frequently, however, they may do
harm, by overstimulating tne digestive
organs.
The recipes for some of these prepara-
tions run to great lengths, one for An-
gostura bitters containing no fewer than
28 ingredients. A very good article, how-
ever, may be made without all this elabo-
ration. The following, for instance, make
a very good preparation:
Gentian root (sliced).. 12 ounces
Cinnamon bark 10 ounces
Caraway seeds 10 ounces
Juniper berries 2 ounces
Cloves 1 ounce
Alcohol, 90 per cent . . 7 pints
Macerate for a week; strain, press out,
and filter, then add
Capillaire 1 J pints
Water to make up. ... 2^ gallons
Strength about 45 u. p.
Still another formula calls for Angostura
bark, 2£ ounces; gentian root, 1 ounce;
cardamom seeds, Bounce; Turkey rhubarb,
^ ounce; orange peel, 4 ounces; caraways,
| ounce; cinnamon bark, $ ounce; cloves,
J ounce.
Brandy Bitters. —
Sliced gentian root. .. 3 pounds
Dried orange peel 2 pounds
Cardamom seed 1 pound
Bruised cinnamon.. . . \ pound
Cochineal 2 ounces
Brandy 10 pints
Macerate for 14 days and strain.
Hostetter's Bitters. —
Calamus root 1 pound
Orange peel 1 pound
Peruvian bark 1 pound
Gentian root 1 pound
WINES AND LIQUORS
763
Calumba root 1 pound
Rhubarb root 4 ounces
Cinnamon bark 2 ounces
Cloves 1 ounce
Diluted alcohol 2 gallons
Water 1 gallon
Sugar 1 pound
Macerate together for 2 weeks.
CORDIALS.
Cordials, according to the Spatula,
are flavored liquors containing from 40
to 50 per cent of alcohol (from 52 to 64
fluidounces to each gallon) and from 20
to 25 per cent of sugar (from 25 to 32
ounces avoirdupois to each gallon).
Cordials, while used in this country to
some degree, have their greatest con-
sumption in foreign lands, especially in
France and Germany.
Usually such mixtures as these are
clarified or "fined" only with consider-
able difficulty, as the finally divided
particles of oil pass easily through the
pores of the filter paper. Purified talcum
will be found to be an excellent clarifying
medium; it should be agitated with the
liquid and the liquid then passed through
a thoroughly wetted filter. The filtrate
should be returned again and again to
the filter until it filters perfectly bright.
Purified talcum being chemically inert is
superior to magnesium carbonate and
other substances which are recom-
mended for this purpose.
When the filtering process is com-
pleted the liquids should at once be put
into suitable bottles which should be
filled and tightly corked and sealed.
Wrap the bottles in paper and store
away, laying the bottles on their sides in
a moderately warm place. A shelf near
the ceiling is a good place. Warmth and
age improve the beverages, as it appears
to more perfectly blend the flavors, so
that the older the liquor becomes the
better it is. These liquids must never
be kept in a cold place, as the cold might
cause the volatile oils to separate.
The following formulas are for the
production of cordials of the best quality,
and therefore only the very best of
materials should be used; the essential
oils should be of unquestionable quality
and strictly fresh, while the alcohol must
be free from fusel oil, the water distilled,
and the sugar white, free from bluing,
and if liquors of any kind should be
called for in any formula only the very
best should be used. The oils and other
flavoring substances should be dissolved
in the alcohol and the sugar in the water.
Then mix the two solutions and filter
clear.
Alkermes Cordial. —
Mace 1^ avoirdupois ounces
Ceylon cinnamon 1J avoirdupois ounces
Cloves f avoirdupois ounce
Rose water
(best) 6 fluidounces
Sugar 28 avoirdupois ounces
Deodorized al-
cohol 52 fluidounces
Distilled water,
q. s 1 gallon
Reduce the mace, cinnamon, and
cloves to a coarse powder macerate with
the alcohol for several days, agitating
occasionally, then add the remaining
ingredients, and filter clear.
Anise Cordial. —
Anethol 7 fluidrachms
Oil of fennel seed. . 80 minims
Oil of bitter
almonds 16 drops
Deodorized alcohol 8 pints
Simple syrup 5 pints
Distilled water, q. s. 16 pints
Mix the oils and anethol with the
alcohol and the syrup with the water;
mix the two and filter clear, as directed.
Blackberry Cordial. — This beverage is
usually misnamed "blackberry brandy"
or "blackberry wine." This latter be-
longs only to wines obtained by the
fermentation of the blackberry juice.
When this is distilled then a true black-
berry brandy is obtained, just as ordinary
brandy is obtained by distilling ordinary
wines.
The name is frequently applied to a
preparation containing blackberry root
often combined with other astringents,
but the true blackberry cordial is made
according to the formulas given here-
with. Most of these mention brandy,
and this article should be good and fusel
free, or it may be replaced by good
whisky, or even by diluted alcohol, de-
pending on whether a high-priced or cheap
cordial is desired.
I. — Fresh blackberry juice, 3 pints;
sugar, 7^ ounces; water, 30 fluidounces;
brandy, 7^ pints; oil of cloves, 3 drops;
oil of cinnamon, 3 drops; alcohol, 6
fluidrachms. Dissolve the sugar in the
water and juice, then add the liquor.
Dissolve the oils in the alcohol and add
£ to the first solution, and if not suffi-
ciently flavored add more of the sejond
solution. Then filter.
II. — Fresh blackberry juice, 4 pints;
powdered nutmeg (fresh), 1 ounce; pow-
dered cinnamon (fresh), 1 ounce; powdered
pimento (fresh), Bounce; powdered cloves
764
WINES AND LIQUORS
(fresh), | ounce; brandy, 2£ pints; sugar,
2| pounds. Macerate the spices in the
brandy for several days. Dissolve the
sugar in the juice and mix and filter clear.
Cherry Cordials. —
I. — Oil of bitter almonds 8 drops
Oil of cinnamon 1 drop
Oil of cloves 1 drop
Acetic etjaer 12 drops
Ceuanthic ether 1 drop
Vanilla extract 1 drachm
Alcohol 3 pints
Sugar 3 pounds
Cherry juice 20 ounces
Distilled water, q. s. . 1 gallon
The oils, ethers, and extracts must be
dissolved in the alcohol, the sugar in
part of the water, then mix, add the
juice and filter clear. When the juice is
not sufficiently sour, add a small amount
of solution of citric acid. To color, use
caramel.
II. — Vanilla extract 10 drops
Oil of cinnamon 10 drops
Oil of bitter almonds. 10 drops
Oil of cloves 3 drops
Oil of nutmeg 3 drops
Alcohol 2 £ pints
Cherry juice 2£ pints
Simple syrup 3 pints
Dissolve the oils in the alcohol, then
add the other ingredients and filter clear.
It is better to make this cordial during
the cherry season so as to obtain the
fresh expressed juice of the cherry.
Curacoa Cordials. —
I. — Curacoa orange peel.. 6 ounces
Cinnamon f ounce
Mace 2 1 drachms
Alcohol 3i pints
Water 4£ pints
Sugar 12 ounces
Mix the first three ingredients and re-
duce them to a coarse powder, then mix
with the alcohol and 4 pints of water and
macerate for 8 days with an occasional
agitation, express, add the sugar and
enough water to make a gallon of finished
product. Filter clear.
II. — Curacoa or bitter
orange peel 2 ounces
Cloves 80 grains
Cinnamon 80 grains
Cochineal 60 grains
Oil of orange (best). . 1 drachm
Orange-flower water. £ pint
Holland gin 1 pint
Alcohol 2 pints
Sugar 3 pints
Water, q. s 1 gallon
Reduce the solids to a coarse powder,
add the alcohol and macerate 3 days.
Then add the oil, gin, and 3 pints of
water and continue the maceration for
8 days more, agitating once a day, strain
and add sugar dissolved in balance of
the water. Then add the orange-flower
water and filter.
Kola Cordial. —
Kola nuts, roasted
and powdered 7 ounces
Cochineal powder.. . . 30 grains
Extract of vanilla. ... 3 drachms
Arrac 3 ounces
Sugar 7 pounds
Alcohol 6 pints
Water, distilled 6 pints
Macerate kola and cochineal with
alcohol for 10 days, agitate daily, add
arrac, vanilla, and sugar dissolved in
water. Filter.
Kiimmel Cordials. —
I. — Oil of caraway 30 drops
Oil of peppermint 3 drops
Oil of lemon 3 drops
Acetic ether 30 drops
Spirit of nitrous ether 30 drops
Sugar 72 ounces
Alcohol 96 ounces
Water. 96 ounces
Dissolve the oils and ethers in the al-
cohol, and the sugar in the water. Mix
and filter.
II. — Oil of caraway 20 drops
Oil of sweet fennel. . . 2 drops
Oil of cinnamon 1 drop
Sugar 14 ounces
Alcohol 2 pints
Water 4 pints
Prepare as in Formula I.
Orange Cordials. — Many of the prepa-
rations sold under this name are not
really orange cordials, but are varying
mixtures of uncertain composition, pos-
sibly flavored with orange. The follow-
ing are made by the use of oranges:
I. — Sugar 8 avoirdupois pounds
Water 2| gallons
Oranges.. . . 15
Dissolve the sugar in the water by the
aid of a gentle heat, express the oranges,
add the juice and rinds to the syrup, put
the mixture into a cask, keep the whole
in a warm place for 3 or 4 days, stirring
frequently, then close the cask, set aside
in a cool cellar and draw off the clear
liquid.
II. — Express the juice from sweet
oranges, add water equal to the volume
WINES AND LIQUORS
765
of juice obtained, and macerate the ex-
pressed oranges with the juice and water
for about 12 hours. For each gallon of
juice, add 1 pound of granulated sugar,
grape sugar, or glucose, put the whole
into a suitable vessel, covering to exclude
the dust, place in a warm location until
fermentation is completed, draw off the
clear liquid, and preserve in well-stop-
pered stout bottles in a cool place.
III. — Orange wine suitable for "soda"
purposes may be prepared by mixing 3
fluidounces of orange essence with 13
fluidounces of sweet Catawba or other
mild wine. Some syrup may be added
to this if desired.
Rose Cordial. —
Oil of rose, very best. . 3 drops
Palmarosa oil 3 drops
Sugar 28 ounces
Alcohol 52 ounces
Distilled water, q. s . . 8 pints
Dissolve the sugar in the water and
the oils in the alcohol; mix the solutions,
color a rose tint, and filter clear.
Spearmint Cordial. —
Oil of spearmint 30 drops
Sugar 28 ounces
Alcohol 52 ounces
Distilled water, q. s . . 8 pints
Dissolve the sugar in the water and the
oil in the alcohol; mix the two solutions,
color green, and filter clear.
Absinthe. —
I. — Oil of wormwood... 96
Oil of star anise. . . 72
Oil of aniseed 48
Oil of coriander. . . 48
Oil of fennel, pure . 48
Oil of angelica
root 24
Oil of thyme 24
Alcohol (pure) .... 162
Distilled water. . . 30
Dissolve the oils in the
the water, color green, and
drops
drops
drops
drops
drops
drops
drops
fluidounces
fluidounces
alcohol, add
filter clear.
II. — Oil of wormwood. . 36 drops
Oil of orange peel. 30 drops
Oil of star anise. . . 12 drops
Oil of neroli petate. 5 drops
Fresh oil of lemon. 9 drops
Acetic ether 24 drops
Sugar 30 avoirdupois
ounces
Alcohol, deodorized 90 fluidounces
Distilled water .... 78 fluidounces
Dissolve the oils and ether in the
alcohol and the sugar in the water; then
mix thoroughly, color green, and filter
clear.
DETANNATING WINE.
According to Caspari, the presence of
appreciable quantities of tannin in wine
is decidedly objectionable if the wine is to
be used in connection with iron and
other metallic salts; moreover, tannin is
incompatible with alkaloids, and hence
wine not deprived of its tannin should
never be used as a menstruum for alka-
loidal drugs. The process of freeing
wines from tannin is termed detannation,
and is a very simple operation. The
easiest plan is to add £ ounce of gelatin
in number 40 or number 60 powder
to 1 gallon of the wine, to agitate oc-
casionally during 24 or 48 hours, and
then to filter. The operation is prefer-
ably carried out during cold weather or
in a cold apartment, as heat will cause
the gelatin to dissolve, and the macera-
tion must be continued until a small
portion of the wine mixed with a few
drops of ferric chloride solution shows
no darkening of color. Gelatin in large
pieces is not suitable, especially with
wines containing much tannin, since the
newly formed tannate of gelatin will be
deposited on the surface and prevent
further intimate contact of the gelatin
with the wine. Formerly freshly pre-
pared ferric hydroxide was much em-
ployed for detannating wine, but the chief
objection to its use was due to the fact
that some iron invariably was taken up by
the acid present in the wine; moreover,
the process was more tedious than in the
case of gelatin. As the removal of
tannin from wine in no way interferes
with its qualitv — alcoholic strength and
aroma remaining the same, and only
coloring matter being lost — a supply of
detannated wine should be kept on hand,
for it requires very little more labor to
detannate a gallon than a pint.
If ferric hydroxide is to be used, it
must be freshly prepared, and a con-
venient quantity then be added to the
wine — about 8 ounces of the expressed,
but moist, precipitate to a gallon.
PREVENTION OF FERMENTATION.
Fermentation may be prevented in
either of two ways:
(1) By chemical methods, which con-
sist in the addition of germ poisons or
antiseptics, which either kill the germs
or prevent their growth. Of these the
principal ones used are salicylic, sul-
phurous, boracic, and benzoic acids,
formalin, fluorides, and saccharine. As
these substances are generally regarded
as adulterants and injurious, their use is
not recommended.
(2) The germs are either removed by
766
WINES AND LIQUORS
some mechanical means such as a filter-
ing or a centrifugal apparatus, or they
are destroyed by heat or electricity.
Heat has so far been found the most
practical.
When a liquid is heated to a sufficiently
high temperature all organisms in it are
killed. The degree of heat required,
however, differs not only with the par-
ticular kind of organism, but also with
the liquid in which it is held. Time
is also a factor. An organism may not be
killed if heated to a high temperature
and quickly cooled. If, however, the
temperature is kept at the same high
degree for some time, it will be killed.
It must also be borne in mind that fungi,
including yeasts, exist in the growing and
the resting states, the latter being much
more resistant than the former. One
characteristic of the fungi and their
spores is their great resistance to heat
when dry. In this state they can be
heated to 212° F. without being killed.
The spores of the common mold are even
more resistant. This should be well con-
sidered in sterilizing bottles and corks,
which should be steamed to 240° F. for
at least 15 min,utes.
Practical tests so far made indicate
that grape juice can be safely sterilized
at from 165° to 176° F. At this tem-
perature the flavor is hardly changed,
while at a temperature much above
200° F. it is. This is an important point,
as the flavor and quality of the product
depend on it.
Use only clean, sound, well-ripened,
but not over-ripe grapes. If an ordinary
cider mill is at hand, it may be used for
crushing and pressing, or the grapes
may be crushed and pressed with the
hands. If a light-colored juice is desired,
put the crushed grapes in a cleanly
washed cloth sack and tie up. Then
either hang up securely and twist it or
let two persons take hold, one on each
end of the sack and twist until the great-
er part of the juice is expressed. Next
gradually heat the juice in a double
boiler or a large stone jar in a pan of hot
water, so that the juice does not come in
direct contact with the fire at a tempera-
ture of 180° to 200° F., never above
200° F. It is best to use a thermometer,
but if there be none at hand heat the
juice until it steams, but do not allow it
to boil. Put it in a glass or enameled
vessel to settle for 24 hours; carefully
drain the juice from the sediment, and
run it through several thicknesses of clean
flannel, or a conic filter made from
woolen cloth or felt may be used. This
filter is fixed to a hoop of iron, which
can be suspended wherever necessary.
After this fill into clean bottles. Dp not
fill entirely, but leave room for the liquid
to expand when again heated. Fit a
thin board over the bottom of an ordinary
wash boiler, set the filled bottles (ordi-
nary glass fruit jars are just as good) in
it, fill in with water around the bottles to
within about an inch of the tops, and
gradually heat until it is about to simmer.
Then take the bottles out and cork or
seal immediately. It is a good idea to
take the further precaution of sealing the
corks over with sealing wax or paraffine
to prevent mold germs from entering
through the corks. Should it be de-
sired to make red juice, heat the crushed
grapes to not above 200° F., strain
through a clean cloth or drip bag (nc
pressure should be used), set away to
cool and settle, and proceed the same as
with light-colored juice. Many people
do not even go to the trouble of letting
the juice settle after straining it, but re-
heat and seal it up immediately, simply
setting the vessel away in a cool place in
an upright position where they will be
undisturbed. The juice is thus allowed
to settle, and when wanted for use the
clear juice is simply taken off the sedi-
ment. Any person familiar with the
process of canning fruit can also preserve
grape juice, for the principles involved
are identical.
One of the leading defects so far found
in unfermented juice is that much of it is
not clear, a condition which very much
detracts from its otherwise attractive ap-
pearance, and due to two causes already
alluded to. Either the final sterilization
in bottles has been at a higher tempera-
ture than the preceding one, or the juice
has not been properly filtered or has not
been filtered at all. In other cases the
juice has been sterilized at such a high
temperature that it has a disagreeable
scorched taste. It should be remembered
that attempts to sterilize at a tempera-
ture above 195° F. are dangerous so far
as the flavor of the finished product is
concerned.
Another serious mistake is sometimes
made by putting the juice into bottles so
large that much of it becomes spoiled
before it is used after the bottles are
opened. Unfermented grape juice prop-
erly made and bottled will keep in-
definitely, if it is not exposed to the
atmosphere or mold germs; but when a
bottle is once opened it should, like
canned goods, be used as soon as possible
to keep from spoiling.
Another method of making unfer-
mented grape juice, which is often re-
WINES AND LIQUORS
767
sorted to where a sufficiently large
quantity is made at one time, consists in
this:
Take a clean keg or barrel (one that
has previously been made sweet). Lay
this upon a skid consisting of two scant-
lings or pieces of timber of perhaps 20
feet long, in such a manner as to make a
runway. Then take a sulphur match,
made by dipping strips of clean muslin
about 1 inch wide and 10 inches long
into melted brimstone, cool it and attach
it to a piece of wire fastened in the lower
end of a bung and bent over at the end,
so as to form a hook. Light the match
and by means of the wire suspend it in
the barrel, bung the barrel up tight, and
allow it to burn as long as it will. Re-
peat this until fresh sulphur matches will
no longer burn in the barrel.
Then take enough fresh grape juice
to fill the barrel one-third full, bung
up tight, roll and agitate violently on
the skid for a few minutes. Next burn
more sulphur matches in it until no more
will burn, fill in more juice until the
barrel is about two-thirds full; agitate
and roll again. Repeat the burning
process as before, after which fill the
barrel completely with grape juice and
roll. The barrehshould then be bunged
tightly and stored in a cool place with
the bung up, and so secured that the
package cannct be shaken. In the
course of a few weeks the juice will have
become clear and can then be racked off
and filled into bottles or jars direct,
sterilized, and corked or sealed up ready
for use. By this method, however, unless
skillfully handled, the juice is apt to
have a slight taste of the sulphur.
The following are the component parts
of a California and a Concord unfer-
mented grape juice:
Con- Cali-
cord fornia
Per Per
Cent Cent
Solid contents 20.37 20.60
Total acids (as tartaric) . .663 .53
Volatile acids 023 . 03
Grape sugar 18 . 54 19 . 15
Free tartaric acids 025 . 07
Ash 255 .19
Phosphoric acids 027 . 04
Cream of tartar 55 .59
This table is interesting in so far that
the California unfermented grape juice
was made from Viniferas or foreign
varieties, whereas the Concord was a
Labruska or one of the American sorts.
The difference in taste and smell is even
more pronounced than the analysis would
indicate.
Small quantities of grape juice may be
E reserved in bottles. Fruit is likely to
e dusty and to be soiled in other ways,
and grapes, like other fruits', should be
well washed before using. Leaves or
other extraneous matter should also be
removed. The juice is obtained by
moderate pressure in an ordinary screw
press, and strained through felt. By
gently heating, the albuminous matter is
coagulated and may be skimmed off, and
further clarification may be effected by
filtering through paper, but such filtra-
tion must be done as rapidly as possible,
using a number of filters and excluding
the air as much as possible.
The juice so obtained may be pre-
served by sterilization, in the following
manner: Put the juice in the bottles in
which it is to be kept, filling them very
nearly full; place the bottles, unstop-
pered, in a kettle filled with cold water,
so arranging them on a wooden per-
forated "false bottom" or other like con-
trivance as to prevent their immediate
contact with the metal, this preventing
unequal heating and possible fracture.
Now heat the water, gradually raising
the temperature to the boiling point, and
maintain at that until the juice attains a
boiling temperature; then close the
bottles with perfectly fitting corks, which
have been kept immersed in boiling
water for a short time before use.
The corks should not be fastened in
any way, for, if the sterilization is not
complete, fermentation and consequent
explosion of the bottle may occur unless
the cork should be forced out.
If the juice is to be used for syrup, as
for use at the soda fountain, the best
method is to make a concentrated syrup
at once, using about 2 pounds of refined
sugar to 1 pint of juice, dissolving by a
gentle heat. This syrup may be made
by simple agitation without heat; and a
finer flavor thus results, but its keeping
quality would be uncertain.
The juices found in the market are fre-
quently preserved by means of antiseptics,
but so far none have been proposed for
this purpose which can be considered en-
tirely wholesome. Physiological experi-
ments have shown that while bodies suited
for this purpose may be apparently with-
out bad effect at first, their repeated in-
gestion is likely to cause gastric disturb-
ance.
SPARKLING WINES..
An apparatus for converting still into
foaming wines, and doing this efficiently,
simply, and rapidly, consists of a vertical
steel tube, which turns on an axis, and
768
WINES AND LIQUORS
bears several adjustable glass globes that
are in connection with each other by
means of distributing valves, the latter
being of silver-plated bronze. The glass
globes serve as containers for carbonic
acid, and are kept supplied with this gas
from a cylinder connected therewith.
The wine to be impregnated with the
acid is taken from a cask, through a
special tube, which also produces a light
pressure of carbonic acid on the cask, the
object of which is to prevent the access
of atmospheric air to the wine within,
and, besides, to cause the liquid to pass
into the bottle without jar or stroke.
The bottles stand under the distributing
valves, or levers, placed above and below
them. Now, if the cock, by means of
which the glass bulbs and the bottles
are brought into connection, is slightly
opened, and the desired lever is put in
action, the carbonic acid at once forces
the air out of the bottles, and sterilizes
them. The upper bottles are now gradu-
ally filled. The whole apparatus, in-
cluding the filled bottles, is now tilted
over, and the wine, of its own weight,
flows through collectors filled with car-
bonic acid, and passes, impregnated with
the gas, into other bottles placed below.
Each bottle is filled in course, the time
required for each being some 45 seconds.
The saturation of the liquid with car-
bonic acid is so complete and plentiful
that there is no need of hurry in corking.
By means of this apparatus any desired
still wine is at once converted into a
sparkling one, preserving at the same
time its own peculiarities of taste, bou-
quet, etc. The apparatus may be used
equally well upon fruit juices, milk, and,
in fact, any kind of liquid, its extreme
simplicity permitting of easy and rapid
cleansing.
ARTIFICIAL FRENCH BRANDY.
I. — The following is Eugene Dieterich's
formula for Spiritus vini Gallici arti-
ficialis:
Tincture of gall-
apples. 10 parts
Aromatic tincture. . . 5 parts
Purified wood vine-
gar 5 parts
Spirit of nijrous ether 10 parts
Acetic ether 1 part
Alcohol, 68 per cent. 570 parts
Distilled water 400 parts
Mix, adding the water last, let stand
for several days, then filter.
II. — The Miinchener Apotheker Verein
has adopted the following formula for the
same thing:
Acetic acid, dilute,
90 per cent 4 parts
Acetic ether 4 parts
Tincture aromatic . . 40 parts
Cognac essence 40 parts
Spirit of nitrous
ether 20 parts
Alcohol, 90 per cent. 5, 000 parts
Water, distilled 2,500 parts
Add the acids, ethers, etc., to the
alcohol, and finally add the water. Let
stand several days, and, if necessary,
filter.
III. — The Berlin Apothecaries have
adopted the following as a magistral
formula:
Aromatic tincture. . . 4 parts
Spirit of nitrous
ether 5 parts
Alcohol, 90 per cent.1,000 parts
Distilled water,
quantity sufficient
to make 2,000 parts
Mix the tincture and ether with the
alcohol,, add the water and for every
ounce add one drop of tincture of
rhatany.
Of these formulas the first is to be
preferred as a close imitation of the taste
of the genuine article. To imitate the
color use burnt sugar.
LIQUEURS.
Many are familiar with the properties of
liqueurs but believe them to be very com-
plex and even mysterious compounds.
This is, of course, due to the fact that
the formulas are of foreign origin and
many of them have been kept more or
less secret for some time. Owing to the
peculiar combination of the bouquet oils
and flavors, it is impossible to make ac-
curate analyses of them. But by the use
of formulas now given, these products
seem to be very nearly duplicated.
It is necessary to use the best sugar
and oils obtainable in the preparation of
the liqueurs. As there are so many
grades of essential oils on the market,
it is difficult to obtain the best indirectly.
The value of the cordials is enhanced by
the richness and odor and flavor of the
oils, so only the best qualities should be
used.
For filtering, flannel or felt is valuable.
Flannel is cheaper and more easily
washed. It is necessary to return filtrate
several times with any of the filtering
media.
As a clarifying agent talcum allowed to
stand several days acts well. These rules
are common to all.
WINES AND LIQUORS
769
grams
4.500 grams
120 grams
2 grams
2 grams
.600 grams
2,000 grams
c.c.
The operations are all simple:
First: Heat all mixtures. Second:
Keep the product in the dark. Third:
Keep in warm place.
The liqueurs are heated to ripen the
bouquet flavor, it having effect similar to
age. To protect the ethereal oils, air and
light are excluded ; hence it is recom-
mended that the bottles be filled to the
stopper. The liqueurs taste best at a
temperature not exceeding 55° F. They
are all improved with age, especially
many of the bouquet oils.
Benedictine . —
I. — Bitter almonds.. 40
Powdered nut-
meg ..
Extract vanilla..
Powdered
cloves
Lemons, sliced..
True saffron. . . .
Sugar
Boiling milk.. . . 1,000
Alcohol, 95 per
cent 2,000 c.c.
Distilled water.. 2,500 c.c.
Mix. Let stand 9 days with occasional
agitation. Filter sufficiently.
II. — Essence Bene-
dictine 75 c.c
Alcohol, 95 per
cent 1,700 c.c.
Mix.
Sugar 1,750 grams
Water, distilled. 1,600 c.c.
Mix together, when clear solution of
sugar is obtained. Color with caramel.
Filter sufficiently.
NOTE. — This liqueur should be at least
1 year old before used.
Essence Benedictine for Benedictine
No. II.—
I. — Myrrh. 1 part
Decorticated carda-
mom 1 part
Mace 1 part
Ginger 10 parts
Galanga root 10 parts
Extract aloe 4
Alcohol 160
Water.. . 80
Orange peel (cut). . 10 parts
parts
parts
parts
Mix, macerate 10 days and filter.
II. — Extract licorice. ... 20 parts
Sweet spirits niter. .200 parts
Acetic ether 30 parts
Spirits ammonia. . . 1 part
Coumarin 12 parts
Vanillin 1 part
3 drops
3 drops
2.5 drops
2 drops
1 drop
15 drops
15 drops
12 drops
10 drops
7 drops
6 drops
4 drops
2 drops
2 drops
1 drop
1 drop
III.— Oil lemon
Oil orange peel. . .
Oil wormwood.. .
Oil galanga ,
Oil ginger
Oil anise
Oil cascarilla
Oil bitter almond
Oil milfoil
Oil sassafras. . . .
Oil angelica
Oil hyssop
Oil cardamom. . .
Oil liops
Oil juniper
Oil rosemary
Mix A, B, and C.
NOTE. — This essence should stand 2
years before being used for liqueurs.
Chartreuse. — I. — Elixir vegetal de la
Grande Chartreuse.
Fresh balm mint
herbs 64 parts
Fresh hyssop herbs . . 64 parts
Angelica herbs and
root, fresh, together 32 parts
Cinnamon 16 parts
Saffron 4 parts
Mace 4 parts
Subject the above ingredients to
maceration for a week with alcohol (96
per cent), 1,000 parts, then squeeze off
and distill the liquid obtained over a
certain quantity of fresh herbs of balm
and hyssop. After 125 parts of sugar
have been added to the resultant liqueur,
filter.
The genuine Chartreuse comes in
three different colors, viz., green, white,
and yellow. The coloration, however,
is not artificial, but is determined by the
addition of varying quantities of fresh
herbs in the distillation. But since it
would require long and tedious trials to
produce the right color in a small manu-
facture, the yellow shade is best im-
parted by a little tincture of saffron, and
the green one by the addition of a few
drops of indigo solution.
II. — Eau des Carmes 3£ ounces
Alcohol 1 quart
Distilled water 1 quart
Sugar 1^ pounds
Tincture of saffron.. . 1 ounce
Mix. Dissolve sugar in warm water,
cool, strain, add remainder of in-
gredients, and filter. This is known as
yellow Chartreuse.
770
WINES AND LIQUORS
Curasao Liqueur. —
A. — Oil lemon, q. s 10 drops
Oil bitter almond, q. s. 5 drops
Oil cura£oa orange. . . 15 parts
Oil sweet orange 1 part
Oil bitter orange 1 part
Cochineal 1 part
French brandy 50 parts
B.— Alcohol 4,500 parts
C. — Sugar 3,500 parts
Water (distilled) 4,000 parts
Mix A, B, and C. Filter. Color with
caramel.
May Bowl or May Wine. — The prin-
cipal ingredient of May bowl, or that
which gives it its flavor and bouquet, is
fresh W aldmeisterkraut (Asperula odor-
ata), the "woodruff" or "sweet grass,"
"star grass," and a dozen other aliases,
of a plant growing wild all over Europe,
both continental and insular, and cul-
tivated by some gardeners in this country.
It is accredited with being a diuretic,
deobstruent and hepatic stimulant, of
no mean order, though it has long been
banished from the pharmacopoeia.
In Baden and in Bavaria in preparing
Maitrank the practice was formerly to
first make an essence — Maitrankessenz,
for the preparation of which every house-
wife had a formula of her own. The
following was that generally used in the
south of Germany:
I. — Fresh, budding
woodruff, cut fine 500 parts
Alcohol, commer-
cial (90 per cent). 1,000 parts
Digest together for 14 days, then filter
and press off. Many add to this some
flavoring oil. As coumarin has been
found to be the principle to which the
Waldmeister owes its odor, many add to
the above Tonka bean, chopped fine, 1
part to the thousand. From about 12 to
15 drachms of this essence is added to
make a gallon of the wine, which has
about the following formula:
French brandy, say 4 drachms
Oil of unripe
oranges 80 drops
Sugar 4 to 8 ounces
Essence 12 drachms
Wine to make 1 gallon
II. — Take enough good woodruff
(Waldmeister) of fine aroma and flavor.
Remove all parts that will not add to the
excellence of the product, such as wilted,
dead, or imperfect leaves, stems, etc.,
and wash the residue thoroughly in cold
water, and with as little pressure as pos-
sible. Now choose a flask with a neck
sufficiently wide to receive the stems
without pressing or bruising them, and
let the pieces fall into it. Pour in
sufficient strong alcohol (96 per cent) to
cover the herbs completely. In from 30
to 40 minutes the entire aroma is taken
up by the alcohol, which takes on a
beautiful green color, which, unfor-
tunately, does not last, disappearing in a
few days, but without affecting the aroma
in the least. The alcohol should now be
poured off, for if left to macerate longer,
while it would gain in aroma, it will also
take up a certain bitter principle that
detracts from the delicacy of flavor and
aroma. The extract is now poured on a
fresh quantity of the herb, and continue
proceeding in this manner until a suffi-
ciently concentrated extract is obtained
to give aroma to 100 times its weight of
wine or cider.
III. — Fresh woodruff , in bloom or flower,
is freed from the lower part of its stem
and leaves, and also of all foreign or
inert matter. The herb is then lightly
stuck into a wide-mouth bottle, and
covered with strong alcohol. After 30
minutes pour off the liquor on fresh
woodruff. In another half hour the
essence is ready, though it should not be
used immediately. It should be kept at
cellar heat (about 60° F.) for a few days,
or until the green color vanishes. Any
addition to the essence of aromatics, such
as orange peel, lemons, spices, etc., is to
be avoided. To prepare the Maitrank,
add the essence to any good white wine,
tasting and testing, until the flavor suits.
The following are other formulas for
the drink:
IV. — Good white wine or
cider 65 parts
Alcohol, dilute 20 parts
Sugar 10 parts
Maitrankessenz 1 part
Mix.
Maraschino Liqueur. —
' Oil bitter almonds 15 minims
Essence vanilla 1 drachm
Jasmine extract 2 drops
Raspberry essence.. . . 10 drops
Oil neroli 10 drops
Oil lemon 15 minims
Spirits nitrous ether . . 2 drachms
Alcohol 6 pints
Sugar 8 pounds
Rose water 10 ounces
Water sufficient to
make 2 gallons
Make a liquor in the usual manner.
To Clarify Liqueurs. — For the clari-
fication of turbid liqueurs, burnt pow«
WINES AND LIQUORS— WIRE ROPE
771
dered alum is frequently employed.
Make a trial with 200 parts of the dim
liqueur, to which 1.5 parts of burnt
powdered alum is added; shake well and
let stand until the liquid is clear. Then
decant and filter the last portion. If the
trial is successful, the whole stock may
be clarified in this manner.
MEDICINAL WINES:
Beef and Iron. — The following formula
is recommended by the American Phar-
maceutical Association:
I. — Extract of beef. ... 35 grams
Tincture of citro-
chloride of iron. . 35 c.c.
Compound spirit
of orange 1 c.c.
Hot water 60 c.c.
Alcohol 125 c.c.
Syrup 125 c.c.
Sherry wine suffi-
cient to make 1,000 c.c.
Rub the extract of beef with the hot
water, and add, while stirring, the
alcohol. Allow to stand 3 days or more,
then filter and distill off the alcohol.
Add to the residue 750 cubic centimeters
of the wine, to which the compound
spirit of orange has been previously
added. Finally add the tincture of citro-
chloride of iron, syrup, and enough wine
to make 1,000 cubic centimeters. Filter
if nece.,sary.
II. — For Poultry and Stock. — A good
formula for wine of beef and iron is as
follows:
Beef extract 256 grains
Tincture of iron
citro-chloride . ..256 minims
Hot water 1 fluidounce
Sherry wine enough
to make 1 pint
Pour the hot water in the beef extract
and triturate until a smooth mixture is
made. To • this add, gradually and
under constant stirring, 12 ounces of the
wine. Add now, under same conditions,
the iron, stir in well, and finally add the
remainder of the wine.
Cinchona. — I. — Macerate 100 parts of
cinchona succirubra in coarse powder
for 30 minutes in 100 parts of boiling
water. Strain off the liquor and set
aside. Macerate the residuum in 1,000
parts of California Malaga for 24 hours,
strain off the liquid and set aside.
Finally macerate the magma in 500 parts
of alcohol, of 50 per cent, for 1 hour,
strain off and set aside. Wash the
residue with a little water to recover all
the alcoholic tincture; then unite all the
liquids, let stand for 24 hours, ana filter.
To the filtrate add 800 parts loaf sugar
and dissolve by the aid of gentle heat
and again filter. The product is all that
could be asked of a wine of cinchona.
To make a ferrated wine of this, dissolve
1 part of citro-ammoniacal pyrophos-
phate of iron to every 1,000 parts of wine.
II. — Yvon recommends the following
formula:
Red cinchona, coarse
powder 5 parts
Alcohol, 60 per cent. . 10 parts
Diluted hydrochloric
acid 1 part
Bordeaux wine 100 parts
Macerate the bark with the acid and
alcohol for 6 days, shaking from time to
time, add the wine, macerate for 24
hours, agitating frequently, then filter.
Removal of Musty Taste and Smell
from Wine. — For the removal of this
unpleasant quality, Kulisch recommends
the use of a piece of charcoal of about the
size of a hazel nut — 5 to 10 parts per 1,000
parts of wine. After this has remained
in the cask for 6 to 8 weeks, and during
this time has been treated once a week
with a chain or with a stirring rod, the
wine can be racked off. Obstinate turbid-
ness, as well as stalk taste and pot flavor,
can also be obviated by the use of the
remedy.
WINTERGREEN, TO DISTINGUISH
METHYL SALICYLATE FROM OIL
OF.
A quantity of the sample is mixed in
a test tube with an equal volume of
pure concentrated sulphuric acid. Under
these conditions the artificial compound
shows no rise in temperature and ac-
quires only a slight yellowish tint, while
with the natural oil there is a marked rise
in temperature and the mixture assumes
a rose-red color, gradually passing into
darker shades.
WIRE ROPE.
See also Steel.
A valuable anti-friction and preserva-
tive compound for mine cables is as
follows: Seven parts soft tallow and 3
parts plumbago, mixed thoroughly; make
a long, hollow box or trough, gouge out
a 4 by 6 piece of scantling about 2 feet
long, sawing it down lengthwise and
hollowing out the box or trough enough
to hold several pounds of the compound,
making also a hole lengthwise of the
772
WIRE ROPE— WOOD
trough for the cable to run through; then
affix to rope and clamp securely, having
the box or trough so fixed that it cannot
play, and letting the cable pass through
it while going up or down, so that it will
get a thorough coating. This, it is found,
will preserve a round cable very well,
and can be used at least once a week.
For a flat steel cable raw linseed oil can
be used instead of the tallow, in about the
proportion of 6 parts oil and 3 plumbago.
If tar is used, linseed oil is to be added to
keep the tar from adhering, both in-
gredients to be mixed while warm.
To preserve wire rope laid under
ground, or under water, coat it with a
mixture of mineral tar and fresh slaked
lime in the proportion of 1 bushel of lime
to 1 barrel of tar. The mixture is to be
boiled, and the rope saturated with it
while hot; sawdust is sometimes added
to give the mixture body. Wire rope ex-
posed to the weather is coated with raw
linseed oil, or with a paint composed of
equal parts of Spanish brown or lamp-
black with linseed oil.
WIRE HARDENING:
See Steel.
WITCH-HAZEL JELLY:
See Cosmetics.
Wood
DECORATIVE WOOD-FINISH.
Paint or stencil wood with white-lime
paint. When it has dried slowly in the
shade, brush it off and a handsome dark-
brown tone will be imparted to the oak-
wood. Some portions which may be
desired darker and redder are stained
again with lime, whereby these places
become deeper. It is essential that the
lime be applied in even thickness and
dried slowly, for only then the staining
will be red and uniform.
After the staining saturate the wood
with a mixture of varnish, 2 parts; oil of
turpentine, 1 part; turpentine, £ part.
When the oil ground is dry apply 2
coatings of pale amber varnish.
Colored decorations on pinewood can
be produced as follows:
The most difficult part of the work is
to remove the rosin accumulations with-
out causing a spot to appear. Burn out
the places carefully with a red-hot iron.
Great care is necessary to prevent the
iron from setting the rosin on fire, thus
causing black smoke clouds.
The resulting holes are filled up with
plaster to which a little light ocher is
added to imitate the shade of the wood
as perfectly as possible. Plaster up no
more than is necessary.
Rub the wood down with very fine
sandpaper, taking especial care to rub
only with the grain of the wood, since ali
cross scratches will remain permanently
visible.
After this preliminary work cover the
wood with a solution of white shellac, in
order not to injure the handsome golden
portions of the wood and to preserve the
pure light tone of the wood in general.
On this shellac ground paint and
stencil with glazing colors, ground with
isinglass solution. The smaller, more
delicate portions, such as flowers and
figures, are simply worked out in wash
style with water colors, using the tone of
the wood to remain as high lights, sur-
rounding the whole with a black contour.
After this treatment the panels and
decorated parts are twice varnished with
dammar varnish. The friezes and pilaster
strips are glazed darker and set off with
stripes; to varnish them use amber var-
nish.
The style just mentioned does not ex-
clude any other. Thus, for instance, a
very good effect is produced by decorat-
ing the panels only with a black covering
color or with black and transparent red
(burnt sienna and a little carmine) after
the fashion of boule work in rich orna-
ments, in such a way that the natural
wood forms the main part and yet quite
a considerable portion of the ornament.
Intarsia imitation is likewise well
adapted, since the use of variegated cov-
ering colors is in perfect keeping with
the decoration of natural wood. How it
should be applied, and how much of it,
depends upon one's taste, as well' as the
purpose and kind of the object.
It is a well-known fact that the large
pores of oak always look rather smeary,
according to whether the workshop is
more or less dusty. If this is to be
avoided, which is essential for neat work,
take good wheat starch, pound it fine
with a hammer andllstir by means of a
wooden spatula good strong polish with
the wheat starch to a paste and work the
paste into the pores by passing it cross-
wise over the wood. After about \
hour, rub down the wood thus treated in
such a manner that the pores are filled.
In case any open pores remain, repeat
the process as before. After that, rub
down, polish or deaden. If this opera-
tion is not performed, the pores will
always look somewhat dirty, despite all
WOOD
773
care. Every cabinetmaker will readily
perceive that this filling of the pores will
save both time and polish in the sub-
sequent finishing.
WOOD FILLERS.
The novice in coach painting is quite
as likeJy to get bewildered as to be aided
by much of the information given about
roughstuff, the more so as the methods
differ so widely. One authority tells us
to use a large proportion of lead ground
in oil with the coarser pigment, while
another says use dry lead and but a
small percentage, and still another in-
sists that lead must be tabooed alto-
gether. There are withal a good many
moss-grown superstitions associated with
the subject. Not the least of these is the
remarkably absorbent nature which the
surface that has been roughstuffed and
"scoured" is supposed to possess. By
many this power of absorption is be-
lieved to be equal to swallowing up, not
only all the color applied, but at least 3
coats of varnish, and none of these would
think of applying a coat of color to a
roughstuffed surface without first giving
it a coat of liquid filler as a sort of
sacrificial oblation in recognition of this
absorbing propensity. Another authority
on the subject has laid down the rule
that in the process of scouring, the block
of pumice stone must always be moved
in one direction, presumably for the
reason that some trace of the stone is
likely to be visible after the surface is
finished.
If the block of stone is scratching, per-
haps the appearance of the finished panel
may be less objectionable with the fur-
rows in parallel lines than in what en-
gravers call "cross-hatching," but if the
rubbing is properly done it is not easy
to discover what difference it could make
whether the stone is moved in a straight
line or a circle. As to absorption, it can-
not be distinguished in the finished
panel between the surface that was
coated with liquid filler and that to
which the color was applied directly, ex-
cept that cracking always occurs much
sooner in the former, and this will be
found to be the case with surfaces that
have been coated with liquid filler and
finished without roughstuff. Among the
pigments that may be used for rough-
stuff, and there are half a dozen or more,
any of which may be used with success,
there is no doubt but that known as
"English filler" is best, but it is not
always to be had without delay and in-
conveniences.
Yellow ocher, Reno umber and Key-
stone filler are all suitable for roughstuff,
the ocher having been used many years
for the purpose, but, as already re-
marked, the English filler is best. This is
the rule for mixing given by Nobles and
Hoare: Four pounds filler, 1 pound ground
white lead, 1 pint gold size, 1 pint varnish
and lj pints turpentine, or f pint good
size and \ pint boiled oil in lieu of the
varnish. In regard to the use of white
lead ground in oil, it makes the rubbing
more laborious, increases the liability to
scratching, and requires a much longer
time to harden before the scouring can
be done, without in any appreciable man-
ner improving the quality of the surface
when finished.
It may be remarked here that the ad-
dition of white lead, whether ground in
oil or added dry to the coarser pigment,
increases the labor of scouring just in
proportion as it is used until sufficient
may be used to render the scouring proc-
ess impossible; hence, it follows that
the mixing should be governed by the
character of the job in hand. If the job
is of a cheap class the use of very little
or no lead at all is advisable, and the pro-
portion of Japan and turpentine may also
be increased, with the result that a fairly
good surface may be obtained with much
less labor than in the formula given.
The number of coats of filler required
to effect the purpose in any given case
must depend upon how well the builder
has done his part of the work. If he has
left the surface very uneven it follows,
as a matter of course, that more coats
will be required to make it level, and
more of the roughstuff will remain after
the leveling process than if the wood-
work had been more perfectly done.
While the merits of a system or method
are not to be judged by its antiquity, there
should be a good reason to justify the
substitution of a new method for one
that has given perfect satisfaction for
generations and been used by the best
coach painters who ever handled a brush.
A well-known writer on paints says
that the effect of a varnish is usually at-
tributed to the manner of its applica-
tion and the quantity of thinners used
for diluting the melted gums, with the
prepared oils and the oxidizing agents
used in its manufacture. While this has
undoubtedly much to do with the success-
ful application of varnish, there are other
facts in this connection that should not
be overlooked. For example, varnish is
sometimes acted on by the breaking up,
or the disintegration of the filling coats;
which in turn is evidently acted on by the
wood itself, according to its nature.
774
WOOD
With the aid of the microscope in
examining the component parts of wood
a cellular tissue is observed which va-
ries in form according to the species and
the parts which are inspected. This
cellular tissue is made up of small
cavities called pores or cells, which are
filled with a widely diversified matter
and are covered with a hard and usually
brittle substance called lignin.
This diversified matter consists of
mineral salts and various organic sub-
stances, gelatinous in their nature and held
in solution by a viscous liquid and con-
taining nitrogenous matter in different
combinations, the whole being designated
by the general name of albuminous sub-
stances. The older the wood the more
viscous is the matter; while wood of
recent growth (sapwood) contains less
viscous matter holding these substances
in solution. This albumen in wood acts
on substances like filler and varnish in
one way or the other, good or bad. The
seasoning of wood does not dispose of
these substances. The water evaporates,
leaving them adhering to the sides of the
cells. The drier these substances are the
less action they exert on the filler or what-
ever substance is coated on the surface.
If the filler disintegrates, it affects the
varnish.
All albuminous substances, be they dry
or in liquid form, are subject, more or
less, according to the protein they con-
tain— which seems, or rather is, the es-
sential principle of all albuminous matter
— to the influence of caustic potash and
soda. Thus, the albumen of an egg is
exactly like that contained in the com-
position of wood. As albumen in wood
becomes solid by drying, it is easily dis-
solved again, and will then be acted on
chemically by any extraneous substance
with which it comes in contact.
Some of the shellacs, substitutes for
shellacs, and some of the liquid fillers are
manufactured from some of the following
substances: Old linseed oil, old varnish,
old and hard driers, turpentine, benzine,
often gasoline, rosin, whiting, cornstarch
flour, hulls, paint skins, silica, and so on.
The list is long. To these must be
added a large volume of potash, to bring
it to and hold it in solution. There must
be an excess of potash which is not com-
bined into a chemical compound, which
if it did, might mitigate its influence on
the albumen of the wood. But as there
is potash in its pure state remaining in
the solution it necessarily attacks the al-
bumen of the wood, causing disintegra-
tion, which releases it from the wood,
causing white, grayish flakes, and the
formation of a powder. This is not a con-
clusion drawn from an inference but an
established scientific fact resulting from
experiments with fillers the various com-
positions of which were known. All
alkalies act on albumen. No one would
knowingly varnish over a surface such
as it would be were the white of an egg
applied to it and then washed with an
alkali solution; but that is just what is
done when varnish is put over a wood
surface filled with a filler which contains
an alkali.
Most of the combinations of material
used in the painting trade are mixtures;
that is, each part remains the same —
exerting the same chemical action on
another substance, or any other sub-
stance coming in contact with a paint
mixture will exert the same chemical
action on any part, or on any ingredient
it contains, the same as if that part was
by itself.
We can now account for some of the
numerous peculiarities of varnish. We
know that any alkali when coming in con-
tact with albumen forms a compound,
which on drying is a white, brittle sub-
stance easily disintegrated. This is why
potash, sal soda, and kindred substances
will remove paint. The alkali attacks the
albumen in the oil, softening it, causing
easy removal, whereas if it were allowed
to dry, the albumen in the oil would take
on a grayish color quite brittle. Potash
or other alkalies in filler not only attack
the albumen in the wood, but also attack
the albumen in the oil by forming a com-
pound with it. Probably this compound
is very slight, only forming a compound
in part, enough, nevertheless, to start a
destroying influence, which is demon-
strated by the following results of experi-
ments. The reader has, perhaps, some
time in his career applied a rosin varnish
over a potash filler and has been sur-
prised by the good results, a more per-
manent effect being obtained than in other
instances where the best of varnish was
used. This is accounted for by the rosin
of the potash. Again, the reader may
have had occasion to remove varnish
with potash and found that potash would
not touch it. This is because of its being
a rosin varnish. Potash in filler may be
rendered somewhat inert, by reason of
its compounding with other parts of the
filler, but owing to the quantity used in
some of the commercial fillers it is not
possible that all the alkali is rendered
inert. Hence it will attack the albumen
wherever found, as all albumen is iden-
tical in its chemical composition.
Alkalies have but little effect on the
WOOD
775
higher classes of gums, because of their
effect on the albumen in the wood and
oil. All alcohol varnishes or varnishes
made by the aid of heat stand well over
an alkali filler. Varnishes which contain
little oil seem to stand well. This is ac-
counted for by the fact that alcohol ren-
ders albumen insoluble. Alkalies of all
kinds readily attack shellac and several
other of the cheap gums, forming unstable
compounds on which oil has but little
effect.
Close-grained wood contains less albu-
men and more lignin than open-grained
varieties, and consequently does not take
so much filler, which accounts for the
finish invariably lasting longer than the
same kind used on an open-grained wood.
Open-grained wood contains more sap
than close grained; consequently there is
more albumen to adhere to the sides of
the cells. The more albumen, the more
readily it is attacked by the potash, and
the more readily decomposed, or rather
destroyed.
Alcohol renders albumen insoluble
immediately on application. It prevents
it from compounding with any other
substance, or any other substance com-
pounding with it. Hence, we must con-
clude that an application of alcohol
to wood before the filler is applied is
valuable, which is proven to be a fact by
experiment. Wash one half of a board
with alcohol, then apply the potash filler
over all. Again, wash the portion of the
board on which is the filler and apply
a heavy-bodied oil varnish. Expose to
sunlight and air the same as a finished
door or the like, and wait for the result.
At the end of a few months a vast differ-
ence will be found in the two parts of the
surface. The one on which there is no
alcohol will show the ravages of time and
the elements much sooner than the one
on which it is.
Wood finishers demand a difference
in the composition of fillers, paste and
liquid, for open- and close-grained wood,
respectively; but unfortunately they do
not demand a difference between either
kind in themselves, according to the kind
of wood. Paste fillers are used indis-
criminately for open-grained wood and
liquid for close-grained wood.
To find the fillers best adapted for a
certain wood, and to classify them in
this respect will require a large amount
of chemical work and practical experi-
ments; but that it should be done is
evidenced by the fact that both success
and failure result from the use of the same
filler on different varieties of wood. After
once being classified (owing to the large
number now on the market), they will
not number nearly so many in the ag-
gregate as might be supposed; as it will
be found in many instances that two en-
tirely different varieties of wood resemble
each other more closely in their vascular
formation and cell characteristics than
do two other specimens of the same variety.
It is a recognized fact that paste fillers
whose base is starch or the like work
better and give better results in certain in-
stances, while those whose base is mineral
matter seem to do better in other cases.
It is noticed that rosewood as a finish-
ing veneer is obsolete. This is not because
of its scarcity, but because it is so hard
to finish without having been seasoned
for a long time. In these days, manu-
facturers cannot wait. It takes longer
for the sap of rosewood to become inac-
tive, or in trade parlance to "die," than
any other wood. This is because it takes
so long for the albumen in the sap to
coagulate. Rosewood has always been a
source of trouble to piano makers, on
account of the action of the sap on the
varnish. However, if this wood, previ-
ously to filling, was washed with a weak
solution of phosphoric acid, and then
with wood spirit, it might be more easily
finished. The phosphoric acid would
coagulate the albumen on the surface of
the wood immediately, while alcohol
would reduce it to an insoluble state.
The idea here is to destroy the activity
of the sap, on the same principle as sappy
places and knot sap are destroyed by alco-
hol-shellac before being painted.
Oak is another wood which gives the
painter trouble to finish. This may be
accounted for as follows: Oak contains a
sour acid principle called tannic acid.
It is a very active property. Wood dur-
ing the growing season contains more
albumen; thus in the circulation of the
sap a large quantity of soft matter is de-
posited on the lignin which lines the cells,
which lignin, if it contains any acid matter,
acts on the material of the filler. Tannic
acid has a deleterious effect on some of
the material of which a number of fillers
are made. Starch and many gums are
susceptible to its influence, making some
of them quite soft. Oak, like most other
timber cut at the season when the least
sap is in circulation, is the more easily
finished.
The vascular formation may, and no
doubt has, something to do with wood
finishing. Different species of wood
differ materially in their vascular and
cellular formation. Wood finishers rec-
ognize a difference in treatment of French
burl walnut and the common American
776
WOOD
variety. Circassian and Italian walnut,
although of the same species, demand
widely different treatment in finishing to
get the best results.
The only way to find the best ma-
terials to use in certain cases is to study
and experiment with that end in view.
If, by aid of a microscope, a certain
piece of wood shows the same cellular
formation that another piece did which
was successfully finished by a certain
process, it may be regarded as safe to
treat both alike. If observation on this
line is indulged in, it will not take the
finisher very long to learn just what
treatment is best for the work in hand.
How often it has been noticed in some-
thing of two parts, like a door, that the
panels when finished will pit, run, or
sag, while the sides will present a sur-
face in every way desirable and vice
versa. This is due to the difference in
the cellular construction of the wood
and to the cellulose, and cannot be
otherwise for the parts have been seasoned
the same time and treated exactly alike.
The physiology of wood is imperfectly
understood, but enough is known to
warrant us in saying with a certainty
that the chemicals in fillers do act upon
the principles embodied in its formation.
Some tried formulas follow:
I. — Make a paste to fill the cracks as
follows: Old furniture polish: Whiting,
plaster of Paris, pumice stone, litharge,
equal parts, Japan drier, boiled linseed
oil, turpentine, coloring matter, of each a
sufficient quantity.
Rub the solids intimately with a mix-
ture of 1 part of the Japan, 2 parts of the
linseed oil, and 3 parts of turpentine,
coloring to suit with Vandyke brown or
sienna. Lay the filling on with a brush,
let it set for about 20 minutes, and then
rub off clean except where it is to remain.
In 2 days it will be hard enough to polish.
After the surface has been thus prepared,
the application of a coat of first-class
copal varnish is in order. It is recom-
mended that the varnish be applied in a
moderately warm room, as it is injured
by becoming chilled in drying. To get
the best results in varnishing, some skill
and experience are required. The var-
nish must be kept in an evenly warm
temperature, and put on neither too
plentifully nor too gingerly. After a
satisfactorily smooth and regular surface
has been obtained, the polishing proper
may be done. This may be accomplished
by manual labor and dexterity, or by the
application of a very thin, even coat of a
very fine, transparent varnish.
If the hand-polishing method be pre-
ferred, it may be pursued by rubbing
briskly and thoroughly with the follow-
ing finishing polish:
Alcohol ........... 8 ounces
Shellac ........... 2 drachms
Gum benzoin ...... 2 drachms
Best poppy oil ..... 2 drachms
Dissolve the shellac and gum in the
alcohol in a warm place, with frequent
agitation, and, when cold, add the poppy
oil. This ma be applied on the end of
a cylindrical rubber made by tightly
rolling a piece of flannel, which has been
torn, not cut, into strips 4 to 6 inches
wide. It should be borne in mind that
the surface of the cabinet work of a
piano is generally veneered, and this
being so, necessitates the exercise of
much skill and caution in polishing.
II. — Prepare a paste from fine starch
flour and a thick solution of brown
shellac, with the spatula upon a grinding
stone, and rub the wooden object with
this. After the drying, rub off with
sandpaper and polish lightly with a rag
moistened with a thin shellac solution
and a few drops of oil. The ground thus
prepared varnish once or twice and a fine
luster will be obtained. This method
is well adapted for any wood with large
pores, such as oak.
Removal of Heat Stains from Polished
Wood- — Fold a sheet of blotting paper a
couple of times (making 4 thicknesses of
the paper), cover the place with it, and
put a hot smoothing iron thereon. Have
ready at hand some bits of flannel, also
folded and made quite hot. As soon as
the iron has made the surface of the
wood quite warm, remove the paper,
etc,, and go over the spot with a piece of
paraffine, rubbing it hard enough to
leave a coating of the substance. Now
with one of the hot pieces of flannel rub
the injured surface. Continue the rub-
bing, using freshly warmed cloths until
the whiteness leaves the varnish or
polish. The operation may have to be
repeated.
PRESERVATION OF WOOD.
I. — An excellent way of preserving
wood is to cut it between August and
October. The branches are removed,
leaving only the leaves at the top. The
trunks, carefully cut or sawn (so tnat their
pores remain open), are immediately
placed upright, with the lower part im-
mersed in tanks three-quarters filled with
water, into which 3 or 4 kilograms of
Eowdered cupric sulphate per hectoliter
ave been introduced. The mass of
WOOD
777
leaves left at the extremity of each trunk
is sufficient to cause the ascent of the
liquid by means of the capillary force
and a reserve of energy in the sap.
II. — Wood which can be well pre-
served may be obtained by making a
circular incision in the bark of the trees
a certain time before cutting them
down. The woodcutters employed in
the immense teak forests of Siam have
adopted in an empirical way a similar
process, which has been productive of
good results. The tree is bled, making
around the trunk, at the height of 4 feet
above ground, a circular incision 8
inches wide and 4 inches deep, at the
time when it is in bloom and the sap
rising. Sometimes the tree is left stand-
ing for 3 years after this operation.
Frequently, also, a deep incision reach-
ing the heart is made on two opposite
sides, and then it takes sometimes only
6 months to extract the sap.
It is probable that it is partly in con-
sequence of this method that the teak-
wood acquires its exceptional resistance
to various destructive agents.
III. — A good preservation of piles,
stakes, and palisades is obtained by
leaving the wood in a bath of cupric
sulphate of 4° of the ordinary acidimeter
for a time which may vary from 8 to 15
days, according to greater or less dry-
ness of the wood and its size. After
they are half dried they are immersed in
a bath of lime water; this forms with the
sulphate an insoluble compound, pre-
venting the rain from dissolving the
sulphate which has penetrated the wood.
This process is particularly usetul for vine
props and the wood of white poplars.
A good way to prevent the decay of
stakes would be to plant them upside
down; that is, to bury the upper ex-
tremity of the branch in the ground. In
this way, the capillary tubes do not so
easily absorb the moisture which is the
cause of decay. It frequently happens
that for one or another reason, the im-
pregnation of woods designed to be
planted in the ground, such as masts,
posts, and supports has been neglected.
It would be impracticable, after they are
placed, to take up these pieces in order to
coat them with carbolineum or tar,
especially if they are fixed in a wall,
masonry, or other structure. Recourse
must be had to other means. Near the
point where the piece rises from the
ground, a hole about one centimeter in
width is made in a downward slanting
direction, filled with carbolineum, ana
dosed with a wooden plug.
It depends upon the consistency of the
wood whether the liquid will be absorbed
in 1 or 2 days. The hole is filled again
for a week. The carbolineum replaces
by degrees the water contained in the
wood. When it is well impregnated, the
hole is definitely closed with a plug of
wood, which is sawn level with the open-
ing. The wood will thus be preserved
quite as well as if it had been previously
coated with carbolineum.
IV. — Wooden objects remaining in the
open air may be effectually protected
against the inclemency of the weather by
means of the following coating: Finely
powdered zinc oxide is worked into a
paste with water and serves for white-
washing walls, garden fences, benches,
and other wooden objects. After dry-
ing, probably at the end of 2 or 3 hours,
the objects must be whitewashed again
with a very dilute solution of zinc
chloride in glue or water. Zinc oxide
and zinc chloride form a brilliant, solid
compound, which resists the inclemency
of the weather.
As a paint for boards, planks for cover-
ing greenhouses, garden-frames, etc.,
Inspector Lucas, of Reutlingen ( Wiirtem-
berg), has recommended the following
coating: Take fresh cement of the best
quality, which has been kept in a cool
place, work it up with milk on a stone
until it is of the consistency of oil paint.
The wood designed to receive it must not
be smooth, but left rough after sawing.
Two or 3 coats are also a protection from
fire. Wood to be tnus treated must be
very dry.
V. — Wood treated with creosote resists
the attacks of marine animals, such as the
teredo. Elm, beech, and fir absorb creo
sote very readily, provided the wood is
sound and dry. Beechwood absorbs it
the best. In fir the penetration is com-
plete, when the wood is of a species of
rapid growth, and of rather compact
grain. Besides, with the aid of pressure
it is always possible to force the creosote
into the wood. Pieces of wood treated
with creosote have resisted for 10 or 11
years under conditions in which oak wood
not treated in this way would have been
completely destroyed.
The prepared wood must remain in
store at least 6 months before use. The
creosote becomes denser during this
time and causes a greater cohesion in the
fibers. In certain woods, as pitch pine,
the injection is impossible, even under
pressure, on account of the presence of
rosin in the capillary vessels.
VI. — M. Zironi advises heating the wood
778
WOOD
in vacuo. The sap is eliminated in this
way.
Then the receiver is filled with
rosin in solution with a hydrocarbide.
The saturation takes place in two hours,
when the liquid is allowed to run off, and
a jet of vapor is introduced, which carries
off the solvent, whole the rosin remains
in the pores of the wood, increasing its
weight considerably.
VII. — Wood can be well preserved by
impregnating it with a solution of tannate
of ferric protoxide. This method is due
to Hazfeld.
VIII. — The Hasselmann process (xyl-
olized wood), which consists in immers-
ing the wood in a saline solution kept
boiling under moderate pressure, the
liquid containing copper and iron sul-
phates (20 per cent of the first and 80
per cent of the second), as well as
aluminum and kainit, a substance until
recently used only as a fertilizer, is now
much employed on the railways in Ger-
many.
IX. — Recently the discovery has been
made that wood may be preserved with
dissolved betuline, a vegetable product of
the consistency of paste, called also
birchwood rosin. Betuline must first be
dissolved. It is procurable in the crude
state at a low price. The wood is im-
mersed for about 12 hours in the solu-
tion, at a temperature of from 57° to
60° F.
After the first bath the wood is
plunged into a second, formed of a solu-
tion of pectic acid of 40° to 45° Be.,
and with a certain percentage of an
alkaline carbonate — for instance, potas-
sium carbonate of commerce — in the
proportion of 1 part of carbonate to
about 4 parts of the solution. The wood
remains immersed in this composition
for 12 hours; then it is taken out and
drained from 8 to 15 hours, the time
varying according to the nature of the
wood and the temperature. In con-
sequence of this second bath, the betulin
which was introduced through the first
immersion, is fixed in the interior of the
mass. If it is desirable to make the
wood more durable and to give it special
qualities of density, hardness, and
elasticity, it must be submitted to strong
pressure. In thus supplementing the
chemical with mechanical treatment, the
best results are obtained.
X. — A receiver of any form or dimen-
sions is filled with a fluid whose boiling
point is above 212° F., such as heavy tar
oil, saline solutions, etc. This is kept at
an intermediate temperature varying be-
tween 212° F. and the boiling point; the
latter will not be reached, but if into this
liquid a piece of wood is plunged, an
agitation analogous to boiling is mani-
fested, produced by the water and sap
contained in the pores of the wood.
These, under the action of a temperature
above 212° F., are dissolved into vapor
and traverse the bath.
If the wood is left immersed and a
constant temperature maintained until
every trace of agitation has disappeared,
the water in the pores of the wood will
be expelled, with the exception of a slight
quantity, which, being in the form of
vapor, represents only the seventeen-
hundredth part of the original weight of
the water contained; the air which was
present in the pores having been likewise
expelled.
If the liquid is left to cool, this vapor is
condensed, forming a vacuum, which is
immediately filled under the action of the
atmospheric pressure. In this way the
wood is completely saturated by the
contents of the bath, whatever may be
its form, proportions or condensation.
To attain the desired effect it is not
necessary to employ heavy oils. The
latter have, however, the advantage of
leaving on the surface of the prepared
pieces a kind of varnish, which con-
tributes to protect them against mold,
worms, moisture, and dry rot. The
same phenomenon of penetration is
produced when, without letting the wood
grow cold in the bath, it is taken out and
plunged immediately into a cold bath of
the same or of a different fluid. This
point is important, because it is possible
to employ as fluids to be absorbed
matters having a boiling point below
212° F., and differing in this respect
from the first bath, which must be com-
posed of a liquid having a boiling point
above 212° F.
If, instead of a cold bath of a homo-
geneous nature, two liquids of different
density separated in two layers, are em-
ployed, the wood can, with necessary
precautions, be immersed successively
in them, so that it can be penetrated
with given quantities of each. Such
liquids are heavy tar oil and a solution of
zinc chloride of 2° to 4° Be. The first,
which is denser, remains at the bottom
of the vessel, and the second above. If
the wood is first immersed in a saline
solution, it penetrates deep into the pores,
and when finally the heavy oil is absorbed,
the latter forms a superficial layer, which
prevents the washing out of the saline
solution in the interior, as well as the
penetration of moisture from the out-
side.
WOOD
779
XI. — Numerous experiments have been
made with all kinds of wood, even with
hard oak. In the preparation of oak rail-
way ties it was discovered that pieces
subjected to a temperature of 212° F.
in a bath of heavy tar oil for 4 hours
lost from 6 to 7 per cent of their weight,
represented by water and albuminous
substances, and that they absorbed in
heavy oil and zinc chloride enough to
represent an increase of from 2 to 3 per
cent on their natural original weight.
The oak wood in question had been cut
for more than a year and was of a density
of 1.04 to 1.07.
This system offers the advantage of
allowing the absorption of antiseptic
liquids without any deformation of the
constituent elements of the wood, the
more as the operation is performed
altogether in open vessels. Another
advantage is the greater resistance of the
wood to warping and bending, and to the
extraction of metallic pieces, such as
nails, cramp irons, etc.
XII. — In the Kyanizing process sea-
soned timber is soaked in a solution of
bichloride of mercury (corrosive sub-
limate) which coagulates the albumen.
The solution is very poisonous and cor-
rodes iron and steel, hence is unsuited
for structural purposes in which metallic
fastenings are used. The process is
effective, but dangerous to the health of
the workers employed.
XIII. — The Wellhouse process also
uses zinc chloride, but adds a small per-
centage of glue. After the timber has
been treated under pressure the zinc chlo-
ride solution is drawn off and one of
tannin is substituted. The tannin com-
bines with the glue and forms an insolu-
'ble substance that effectually seals the
pores.
XIV. — The Allardyce process makes
use of zinc chloride and dead oil of tar,
the latter being applied last, and the
manner of application being essentially
the same for both as explained in the
other processes.
XV. — The timber is boiled in a solu-
tion of copper, iron, and aluminum sul-
phate, to which a small quantity of kainit
is added.
XVI. — In the creo - rosinate process
the timber is first subjected to a steam-
ing process at 200° F. to evaporate the
moisture in the cells; the temperature is
then gradually increased to 320° F. and
a pressure of 80 pounds per square inch.
The pressure is slowly reduced to 26
inches vacuum, and then a solution of
dead oil of tar, melted rosin, and formal-
dehyde is injected. After this process
the timber is placed in another cylinder
where a solution of milk of lime is ap-
plied at a temperature of 150° F. and a
pressure of 200 pounds per square inch.
XVII. — The vulcanizing process of
treating timber consists essentially in
subjecting it to a baking process in hot
air which is heated to a temperature of
about 500° F. by passing over steam
coils. The heat coagulates the albumen,
expels the water from the cells, kills the
organisms therein, and seals the cells by
transforming the sap into a preservative
compound. This method is used with
success by the elevated railway systems
of several cities.
XVIII. — A durable coating for wood
is obtained by extracting petroleum
asphalt, with light petroleum, benzine,
or gasoline. For this purpose the
asphalt, coarsely powdered, is digested
for 1 to 2 days with benzine in well-
closed vessels, at a moderately warm
spot. Petroleum asphalt results when
the distillation of petroleum continued
until a glossy, firm, pulverizable mass
of conchoidal fracture and resembling
colophony in consistency remains. The
benzine dissolves from this asphalt only
a yellowish-brown dyestuff, which deeply
enters the wood and protects it from the
action of the weather, worms, dry rot,
etc. The paint is not opaque, hence the
wood retains its natural fiber. It is very
pleasant to look at, because the wood
treated with it keeps its natural appear-
ance. The wood can be washed off with
soap, and is especially suited for country
and summer houses.
XIX. — A liquid to preserve wood
from mold and dry rot which destroys
the albuminous matter of the wood and
the organisms which feed on it, so there
are neither germs nor food for them if
there were any, is sold under the name of
carbolineum. The specific gravity of a
carbolineum should exceed 1.105, and
should give the wood a fine brown color.
It should, too, be perfectly waterproof.
The three following recipes can be
absolutely relied on: a. Heat together and
mix thoroughly 95 pounds of coal-tar oil
and 5 pounds of asphalt from coal tar.
6. Amalgamate together 30 pounds of
heavy coal-tar oil, 60 pounds of crude
wood-tar oil, and 25 pounds of heavy
rosin oil. c. Mix thoroughly 3 pounds of
asphalt, 25 pounds of heavy coal-tar oil,
and 40 pounds of heavy rosin oil.
XX. — Often the wooden portions of
machines are so damaged by dampness
prevailing in the shops that the follow-
780
WOOD
ing compound will be found useful for
their protection: Melt 375 parts of colo-
phony in an iron vessel, and add 10,000
parts of tar, and 500 parts of sulphur.
Color with brown ocher or any other
coloring matter diluted with linseed oil.
Make a first light application of this mix-
ture while warm, and after drying apply
a second coat.
XXI. — For enameling vats, etc., 1,000
parts of brown shellac and 125 parts of
colophony are melted in a spacious kettle.
After the mass has cooled somewhat, but
is still thinly liquid, 6.1 parts of alcohol
(90 per cent) is gradually added. In
order to prevent the ignition of the spirit
vapor, the admixture of spirit is made at
a distance from the stove.. By this ad-
dition the shellac swells up into a semi-
liquid mass, and a larger amount of en-
amel is obtained than by dissolving it
cold. The enamel may be used for
wood or iron.
The wood must be well dried; only
then will the enamel penetrate into the
pores. Two or three coats suffice to close
up the pores of the wood thoroughly and
to render the surface smooth and glossy.
Each coating will harden perfectly in
several hours. The covering endures a
heat of 140° to 150° F. without injury.
This glaze can also be mixed with earth
colors. Drying quickly and being taste-
less, its applications" are manifold.
Mixed with ocher, for instance, it gives
an elegant and durable floor varnish,
which may safely be washed off with
weak soda solution. If it is not essen-
tial that the objects be provided with a
smooth and glossy coating, only a
preservation being aimed at the follow-
ing coat is recommended by the same
source: Thin, soluble glass (water glass)
as it is found in commerce, with about
24 per cent of water, and paint the dry
vessel rather hot with this solution.
When this has been absorbed, repeat the
application, allow to dry, and coat with a
solution of about 1 part of sodium bi-
carbonate in 8 parts of water. In this
coating silicic acid is separated by the
carbonic acid of the bicarbonate; from
the water glass (sodium silicate) ab-
sorbed by the pores of the wood, which,
as it were, silicifies the wooden surfaces,
rendering them resistive against the
penetration of liquids. The advantages
claimed for both processes are increased
durability and facilitated cleaning.
XXII. — Tar paints, called also mineral
or metallic paints, are sold in barrels or
boxes, at varying prices. Some dealers
color them — yellow ocher, red ocher,
brown, gray, etc. They are prepared by
mixing equal parts of coal tar and oil of
turpentine or mineral essence (gasoline).
The product, if it is not colored arti-
ficially, is of a brilliant black, even when
cold. It dries in a few hours, especially
when prepared with oil of turpentine.
The paints with mineral essence are,
however, generally preferred, on account
of their lower cost. Either should be
spread on with a hard brush, in coats as
thin as possible. They penetrate soft
woods, and even semi-hard woods
sufficiently deep, and preserve them
completely. They adhere perfectly to
metals. Their employment can, there-
fore, be confidently advised, so far as
concerns the preservation directly of iron
cables, reservoirs, the interior surface of
generators, etc. However, it has been
shown that atmospheric influence or
variations of temperature cause _ the
formation of ammoniacal solutions,
which corrode the metals. Several com-
panies for the care and insurance of
steam engines have for some time
recommended the abandonment of tar
products for applications of this kind
and the substitution of hot linseed oil.
XXIII. — Coal-tar paints are prepared
according to various formulas. One in
current use has coal tar for a base, with
the addition of gum rosin. It is very
black. Two thin coats give a fine
brilliancy. It is employed on metals,
iron, sheet iron, etc., as well as on wood.
It dries much quicker than the tars
used separately. Its preserving influence
against rust is very strong.
The following Tissandier formula has
afforded excellent results. Its facility of
preparation and its low cost are among
its advantages. Mix 10 parts of coal tar,
1 to 1.6 parts of slaked lime, 4,000 parts of
oil of turpentine, and 400 parts of strong
vinegar, in which i part of cupric sul-
phate has been previously boiled. The
addition of 2 or 3 cloves of garlic in the
solution of cupric sulphate aids in pro-
ducing a varnish, brilliant as well as
permanent. The compound can be col-
ored like ordinary paints.
XXIV. — Rectified rosinous oil for
painting must not be confounded with
oils used in the preparation of lubricants
for metallic surfaces exposed to friction.
It contains a certain quantity of rosin in
solution, which, on drying, fills the pores
of the wood completely, and prevents de-
composition from the action of various
saprophytic fungi. It is well adapted to
the preservation of pieces to be buried in
the ground or exposed to the inclemency
WOOD
781
of the weather. Paints can also be pre-
pared with it by the addition of coloring
powders, yellow, brown, red, green, blue,
etc., in the proportion of 1 kilo to 5
liters of oil. The addition ought to take
place slowly, while shaking, in order to
obtain quite a homogeneous mixture.
Paints of this kind are economical, in
consequence of the low price of rosin,
but they cannot be used in the interior of
dwellings by reason of the strong and
disagreeable odor disengaged, even a
long time after their application. As an
offset, they can be used like tar and
carbonyl, for stalls, stables, etc.
To Prevent Warping. — Immerse the
wood to be worked upon in a con-
centrated solution of sea salt for a week
or so. The wood thus prepared, after
having been worked upon, will resist all
changes of temperature.
STAINS FOR WOOD.
In the staining of wood it is not enough
to know merely how to prepare and how
to apply the various staining solutions; a
rational exercise of the art of wood stain-
ing demands rather a certain acquaint-
ance with the varieties of wood to be
operated upon, a knowledge of their
separate relations to the individual stains
themselves; for with one and the same
stain very different effects are obtained
when applied to the varying species of
wood.
Such a diversity of effects arises from
the varying chemical composition of
wood. No unimportant role is played by
the presence in greater or lesser quan-
tities of tannin, which acts chemically
upon many of the stains and forms with
them various colored varnishes in the
fibers. Two examples will suffice to
make this clear. (1) Let us take pine or
fir, in which but little of the tanning
principle is found, and stain it with a
solution of 50 parts of potassium chro-
mate in 1,000 parts of pure water; the
result will be a plain pale yellow color,
corresponding with the potassium chro-
mate, which is not fast and as a con-
sequence is of no value. If, with the
same solution, on the contrary, we stain
oak, in which the tanning principle is
very abundant, we obtain a beautiful
yellowish-brown color which is capable
of withstanding the effects of both light
and air for some time; for the tannin of
the oak combines with the penetrating
potassium chromate to form a brown
dyestuff which deposits in the woody
cells. A similar procedure occurs in the
staining of mahogany and walnut with
the chromate because these varieties of
wood are very rich in tannin.
(2) Take some of the same pine or fir
and stain it with a solution of 20 parts of
sulphate of iron in 1,000 parts of water
and there will be no perceptible color.
Apply this stain, however, to the oak and
we get a beautiful light gray, and if the
stain be painted with a brush on the
smoother oaken board, in a short time a
strong bluish-gray tint will appear. This
effect of the stain is the result of the
combination of the green vitriol with the
tannin; the more tannin present, the
darker the stain becomes. The hard-
ness or density of the wood, too, exerts a
marked influence upon the resulting
stain. In a soft wood, having large
Eores, the stain not only sinks further in,
ut much more of it is required than in a
hard dense wood; hence in the first place
a stronger, greasier stain will be obtained
with the same solution than in the latter.
From this we learn that in soft woods
it is more advisable to use a thinner stain
to arrive at a certain tone; while the
solution may be made thicker or stronger
for hard woods.
The same formula or the same stain-
ing solution cannot be relied upon to
give the same results at all times even
when applied to the same kinds of wood.
A greater or lesser amount of rosin or
sap in the wood at the time the tree is
felled, will offer more or less resistance to
the permeating tendencies of the stain,
so that the color may be at one time
much lighter, at another darker. Much
after the same manner we find that the
amount of the tanning principle is not
always equal in the same species of wood.
Here much depends upon the age of
the tree as well as upon the climatic
conditions surrounding the place where
it grew. Moreover, the fundamental
color of the wood itself may vary greatly
in examples of the same species and thus,
particularly in light, delicate shades,
cause an important delay in the realiza-
tion of the final color tone. Because of
this diversification, not only in the
different species of wood, but even in
separate specimens of the same species,
it is almost impossible always, and at the
first attempt, to match a certain pre-
determined color.
It is desirable that trials at staining
should first be made upon pieces of
board from the same wood as the object
to be stained; the results of such ex-
periments furnishing exact data con-
cerning the strength and composition of
the stain to be employed for the exact
reproduction of a prescribed color.
782
WOOD
Many cases occur in which the color tone
obtained by staining cannot always be
judged directly after applying the stain.
Especially is this the case when stain is
employed which slowly develops under
the action of the air or when the dye-
stuff penetrates only slowly into the
pores of the wood. In such cases the
effect of the staining may only be fully
and completely appreciated after the
lapse of 24 or 48 hours.
Wood that has been stained should
always be allowed 24 or 48 hours to dry
in ordinary temperatures, before a coat
of varnish, polish, or wax is applied. If
any dampness be left in the wood this
will make itself apparent upon the
varnish or polish. It will become dull,
lose its glossy appearance, and exhibit
white spots which can only be removed
with difficulty. If a certain effect de-
mand the application of two or more
stains one upon the other, this may only
be done by affording each distinct coat
time to dry, which requires at least 24
hours.
Not all the dyes, which are applicable
to wood staining, can be profitably used
together, either when separately applied
or mixed. This injunction is to be care-
fully noted in the application of coal tar
or aniline colors.
Among the aniline dyes suitable for
staining woods are two groups — the so-
called acid dyes and the basic dyes. If
a solution of an acid dye be mixed with a
basic dye the effect of their antagonistic
dispositions is shown in the clouding up
of the stain, a fine precipitate is visible
and often a rosin-like separation is
noticeable.
It is needless to say tha^t such a stain-
ing solution is useless for any practical
purpose. It cannot penetrate tne wood
fibers and would present but an un-
seemly and for the most part a flaky
appearance. In preparing the stains it
is therefore of the greatest importance
that they remain lastingly clear. It
would be considerably of advantage,
before mixing aniline solutions of which
the acid or basic characteristics are un-
known, to make a test on a small scale in
a champagne glass and after standing a
short time carefully examine the solu-
tion. If it has become cloudy or want-
ing in transparency it is a sign that a
separation of the coloring matter has
taken place.
The mixing of acid or basic dyestuffs
even in dry powdered form is attended
with the same disadvantages as in the
state of solubility, for just as soon as
they are dissolved in water the reactions
commence and the natural process of
precipitation takes place with all its
attending disagreeable consequences.
COLOR STAINS:
Bronze. — I. — Prepare first a thin glue
size by soaking good animal glue over
night in cold water and melting it next
morning in the usual water bath. Strain
it, before using, through old linen or
cheese cloth into a clean vessel. Sand-
paper smooth and dust the articles, then
apply with a soft bristle brush 2 or 3
coats of the size, allowing sufficient time
for each coat to harden before applying
the next. Now, a ground coat made by
thoroughly mixing finely bolted gilders'
whiting and glue size is applied, and
when this has become hard it is rubbed
to a smooth, even surface with selected
fine pumice, and then given 1 coat of
thin copal varnish. When this is nearly
but not quite dry, the bronze powder is
applied with a suitable brush or wad of
cotton, and when dry the surplus bronze
is removed with the same tool. If col-
lected on clean paper, the dusted-off
bronze powder may be used again.
II. — Diluted water - glass solution
makes a good ground for bronze.
Bronze powder is sprinkled on from a
wide-necked glass tied up with gauze,
and the excess removed by gently knock-
ing. The bronze powder adheres so
firmly after drying that a polish may be
put on by means of an agate. The
process is especially useful for lepairing
worn-off picture frames, book ornamen-
tations, etc. The following bronze ground
also yields good results: Boil 11,000
parts of linseed oil with 25 parts of im-
Eure zinc carbonate, 100 parts of red
;ad, 25 parts of litharge, and 0.3 parts of
mercuric chloride, until a drop taken out
will stand like a pea upon a glass surface.
Before complete cooling, the mass is
diluted with oil of turpentine to a thick
syrup.
Ebony Stains. — I. — To 1 pint of boil-
ing water add f ounce of copperas and
1 ounce logwood chips. Apply this to
the wood hot. When the surface has
dried thoroughly wet it with a solution
composed of 7 ounces steel filings dis-
solved in | pint of vinegar.
II. — Give the wood several applica-
tions of a stout decoction of logwood
chips, finishing off with a free smear of
vinegar in which rusty nails have been
for some time submerged.
III. — In 1 quart of water boil £ pound
of logwood cnips, subsequently adding
\ ounce pearl ash, applying the mixture
WOOD
783
hot. Then again boil the same quantity
of logwood in the same quantity of water,
adding £ ounce of verdigris and f ounce
of copperas, after which strain and put
in £ pound of rusty steel filings. With
this latter mixture coat the work, and,
should the wood not be sufficiently black,
repeat the application.
Metallic Luster. — A valuable process
to impart the luster of metal to ordinary
wood, without injuring its natural quali-
ties, is as follows: The wood is laid, ac-
cording to its weight, for 3 or 4 days in a
caustic alkaline solution, such as, for
instance, of calcined soda, at a tempera-
ture of 170° F. Then it is at once placed
in a bath of calcium hydrosulphite, to
which, after 24 to 36 hours, a saturated
solution of sulphur in caustic potash is
added. In this mixture the wood is left
for 48 hours at 100° to 120° F. The
wood thus prepared, after having been
dried at a moderate temperature, is
polished by means of a smoothing iron,
and the surface assumes a very hand-
some metallic luster. The effect of this
metallic gloss is still more pleasing if the
wood is rubbed with a piece of lead, zinc,
or tin. If it is subsequently polished
with a burnisher of glass of porcelain,
the wood gains the brilliancy of a
metallic mirror.
Nutwood. — One part permanganate of
potassium is dissolved in 30 parts clear
water; with this the wood to be stained is
coated twice. After an action of 5
minutes, rinse off with water, dry, oil,
and polish. It is best to prepare a fresh
solution each time.
Oak. — I. — Water-color stains do not
penetrate deep enough into wood to
make the effect strong enough, hence
solutions of other material than color are
being employed for the purpose. Aqua
ammonia alone, applied with a rag or
brush repeatedly, will darken the color
of oak to a weathered effect, but it is not
very desirable, because of its tendency
to raise the grain. Bichromate of potash,
dissolved in cold water, applied in a like
manner, until the desired depth is ob-
tained, will serve the purpose. These
washes or solutions, however, do not give
the dark, almost black, effect that is at
the present time expected for weathered
oak, and in order to produce this, 4
ounces of logwood chips and 3 ounces of
green copperas should be boiled together
in 2 quarts of water for 40 minutes and
the solution applied hot. When this has
dried it should be gone over with a wash
made from 4 ounces steel filings and 1
pint of strong vinegar. The steel filings
are previously put into the vinegar and
allowed to stand for several days. This
will penetrate into the wood deeply, and
the stain will be permanent. ^ JPicture-
frame manufacturers use a quick-drying
stain, made from aniline blacks.
II. — Dissolve \ part of permanganate
of potassium in 1,000 parts of cold water
and paint the wood with the violet solu-
tion obtained. As soon as the solution
comes in contact with the wood it de-
composes in consequence' of chemical
action, and a handsome^ light -brown
precipitate is produced in the wood.
The brushes used must be washed out
immediately, as the permanganate of
potassium destroys animal bristles, but
it is preferable to use sponges or brushes
of glass threads for staining. Boil 2
Earts of cutch in 6 parts of water for 1
our, stir while boiling, so that the
rosiniferous catechu cannot burn on the
bottom of the vessel; strain the liquid as
soon as the cutch is dissolved, through
linen, and bring again to a boil. Now
dissolve therein £ part of alum, free from
iron; apply the stain while hot, and cover
after the drying, with a solution of 1
part of bichromate of potassium in 25
parts of water.
Rosewoood. — First procure | pound
logwood, boiling it in 3 pints water.
Continue the boiling until the liquid
assumes a very dark color, at which
point add 1 ounce salt of tartar. When
at the boiling point stain your wood with
2 or 3 coats, but not in quick succession,
as the latest coat must be nearly dry
before the succeeding one is applied.
The use of a fiat graining brush, deftly
handled, will produce a very excellent
imitation of dark rosewood.
Silver Gray. — This stain is prepared by
dissolving 1 part of pyrogallic acid in 25
parts of warm water and the wood is
coated with this. Allow this coating to
dry and prepare, meanwhile, a solution
of 2 parts of green vitriol in 50 parts of
boiling water, with which the first coat-
ing is covered again to obtain the silver-
gray shade.
Walnut. — I. — Prepare a solution of 6
ounces of a solution of permanganate of
potassium, and 6 ounces of sulphate of
magnesia in 2 quarts of hot water. The
solution is applied on the wood with a
brush and the application should be re-
peated once. In contact with the wood
the permanganate decomposes, and a
handsome, lasting walnut color results.
If small pieces of wood are to be thus
stained, a very dilute bath is prepared
784
WOOD
according to the above description, then
the wooden pieces are immersed and left
therein from 1 to 5 minutes, according to
whether a lighter or darker coloring is
desired.
II. — One hundredweight Vandyke
brown, ground fine in water, and 28
pounds of soda, dissolved in hot water,
are mixed while the solutions are hot in a
revolving mixer. The mixture is then
dried in sheet-iron trays.
Yellow. — The wood is coated with a
hot concentrated solution of picric acid,
dried, and polished. (Picric acid is poi-
sonous.)
IMITATION STAINS.
Yellow, green, blue, or gray staining
on wood can be easily imitated with a
little glazing color in oil or vinegar,
which will prove better and more
permanent than the staining. If the
pores of the wood are opened by a lye
or a salt, almost any diluted color can be
worked into it. With most stains the
surface is thus prepared previously.
Light-Fast Stains. — Stains fast to
light are obtained by saturating wood in
a vacuum chamber, first with dilute sul-
phuric acid, then with dilute alkali to
neutralize the acid, and finally with a
solution with or without the addition of
a mordant. The action of the acid is
to increase the affinity of the wood for
dye very materially. As wood consists
largely of cellulose, mercerization, which
always increases the affinity of that sub-
stance for dyes, may be caused to some
extent by the acid.
SPIRIT STAINS:
Black.—
I. — White shellac 12 ounces
Vegetable black 6 ounces
Methylated spirit. ... 3 pints
II. — Lampblack 1 pound
Ground iron scale.. .. 5 pounds
Vinegar 1 gallon
Mahogany Brown. — Put into a vessel,
say 4 pounds of bichromate of potash,
and as many ounces of burnt umber, let
it stand a day or two, then strain or lawn
for use.
Vandyke Brown. —
Spirit of wine 2 pints
Burnt umber 3 ounces
Vandyke brown color 1 ounce
Carbonate of soda. .. 1 ounce
Potash J ounce
Mahogany. — Rub the wood with a
solution of nitrous acid, and then apply
with a brush the following:
I. — Dragon's blood 1 ounce
Sodium carbonate. .. 6 drachms
Alcohol 20 ounces
Filter just before use.
II. — Rub the wood with a solution of
potassium carbonate, 1 drachm to a pint
of water, and then apply a dye made by
boiling together:
Madder 2 ounces
Logwood chips £ ounce
Water 1 quart
Maple.—
I. — Pale button lac 3 pounds
Bismarck brown.. . . | ounce
Vandyke brown. ... | ounce
Gamboge 4- ounces
Methylated spirit. .. 1 gallon
II. — Use 1 gallon of methylated spirit,
4 ounces gamboge (powdered), £ ounce
Vandyke brown, 1 drachm Bismarck
brown, 3' pounds shellac.
Maroon. — To produce a rich maroon
or ruby, steep red Janders wood in
rectified naphtha and stir into the solu-
tion a little cochineal; strain or lawn
for use.
Turpentine Stains. — Turpentine stains
are chiefly solutions of oil-soluble coal-
tar dyes in turpentine oil, with small
quantities of wax also in solution. They
do not roughen the wood, making a final
polishing unnecessary. They enter the
wood slowly, so that an even stain,
especially on large surfaces, is secured.
The disadvantages of turpentine stains
are the lack of permanence of the color-
ing, when exposed to light and air, and
their high price.
Varnish Stains.— Shellac is the chief
article forming the basis of varnish stains
the coloring matter being usually coal
tar or aniline dyes, as they give better
results than dye wood tincture. To
Erevent the varnish stain being too
rittle, the addition of elemi rosin is a
much better one than common rosin, as
the latter retards the drying quality, and
if too much be used, renders the stain
sticky.
Water Stains. — Water stains are solu-
tions of chemicals, dye extracts, astrin-
gent substances, and coal-tar dyes in
water. They roughen the wood, a dis-
advantage, however, which can be rem-
edied to a large extent by previous
treatment, as follows: The wood is mois-
tened with a wet sponge, allowed to dry,
WOOD
785
and then rubbed with sandpaper, or
made smooth by other agencies. This
almost entirely prevents roughening of
the surface by the stain. Another dis-
advantage of these stains is that they are
rapidly absorbed by the wood, which
makes an even staining of large surfaces
difficult. For this too there is a remedy.
The surface of the wood is rubbed all
over evenly with raw linseed oil, applied
with a woolen cloth, allowed to dry, and
then thoroughly smoothed with sand-
paper. The water stain, applied with a
sponge, now spreads evenly, and is but
slightly absorbed by the wood.
Among good water stains are the long-
known Cassel brown and nut brown,
in granules. Catechine is recommended
for brown shades, with tannin or pyro-
gallic acid and green vitriol for gray.
For bright-colored stains the tar-dyes
azine green, croceine scarlet, Parisian
red, tartrazine, water-soluble nigrosin,
walnut, and oak brown are very suitable.
With proper mixing of these dyes, all
colors except blue and violet can be
produced, and prove very fast to light
and air, and superior to turpentine stains.
Only the blue and violet dyes, methyl
blue, naphthol blue, and pure violet, do
not come up to the standard, and require
a second staining with tannin.
A very simple method of preparing
water stains is as follows: Solutions are
made of the dyes most used, by dissolving
500 parts of the dye in 10,000 parts of
hot water, and these are kept in bottles
or casks. Any desired stain can be
prepared by mixing proper quantities of
the solutions, which can be diluted with
water to make lighter stains.
Stains for Wood Attacked by Alkalies
or Acids. —
Solution A
Copper sulphate. . . 125 grams
Potassium chlorate. 125 grams
Water 1,000 cu. cm.
Boil until all is dissolved.
Solution B
Aniline hydro-
chloride 150 grams
Water 1,000 cu. cm.
Apply Solution A twice by means of a
brush, allowing time to dry after each
coat; next, put on Solution B and let dry
again. On the day following, rub on a
little oil with a cloth and repeat this once
a month.
SUBSTITUTES FOR WOOD.
I. — Acetic paraldehyde or acetic alde-
hyde respectively, or polymerized formal-
dehyde is mixed with methylic alcohol
and carbolic acid, as well as fusel oil
saturated with hydrochloric acid gas or
sulphuric acid gas or methylic alcohol,
respectively, are added to the mixture.
The mass thus obtained is treated with
paraffine. The final product is useful
as a substitute for ebonite and wood as
well as for insulating purposes.
II. — "Carton Pierre" is the name of a
mass which is used as a substitute for
carved wood. It is prepared in the fol-
lowing manner: Glue is dissolved and
boiled; to this, tissue paper in suitable
quantity is added, which will readily go
to pieces. Then linseed oil is added,
and finally chalk is stirred in. The hot
mass forms a thick dough which crumbles
in the cold, but softens between the
fingers and becomes kneadable, so that
it can be pressed into molds (of glue,
gypsum, and sulphur). After a few days
the mass will become dry and almost as
hard as stone. The paper imparts to it
a high degree of firmness, and it is less
apt to be injured than wood. It binds
well and readily adheres to wood.
III.— Wood Pulp.— The boards for
painters' utensils are manufactured in
the following manner: The ordinary
wood fiber (not the chemical wood cellu-
lose) is well mixed with soluble glass of
33° Be., then spread like cake upon an
even surface, and beaten or rolled until
smooth. Before completely dry, the cake
is removed, faintly satined (for various
other purposes it is embossed) and finally
dried thoroughly at a temperature of
about 133° F., whereupon the mass may
be sawed, carved, polished, etc., like wood.
Any desired wood color can be ob-
tained by the admixture of the cor-
responding, pulverized pigment to the
mass. The wood veining is produced
by placing a board of the species of
timber to be imitated, in vinegar, which
causes the soft parts of the wood to
deepen, and making an impression with
the original board thus treated upon the
wood pulp when the latter is not quite
hard. By means of one of these original
boards (with the veins embossed), im-
pressions can be made upon a large
number of artificial wood plates. The
veins will show to a greater advantage
if the artificial wood is subsequently
saturated and treated with colored oil,
colored stain and colored polish, as is
done with palettes.
WOOD, ACID-PROOF:
See Acid-Proofing.
WOOD CEMENTS:
See Adhesives,
786
WRITING— YEAST
WOOD, CHLORINE -PROOFING:
See Acid-Proofing.
WOOD, FIREPROOFING :
See Fireproofing.
WOOD GILDING:
See Plating.
WOOD, IMITATION:
See Plaster.
WOOD PpLISHES:
See Polishes.
WOOD RENOVATORS:
See Cleaning Preparations and Meth-
ods under Paint, Varnish, and Enamel
Removers.
WOOD, SECURING METALS TO:
See Adhesives.
WOOD, WATERPROOFING:
See Waterproofing.
WOOD'S METAL:
See Alloys.
WOOL FAT:
See Fats.
WORM POWDER FOR STOCK:
See Veterinary Formulas.
WRITING, RESTORING FADED:
Writing on old manuscripts, parch-
ments, and old letters that has faded into
nearly or complete invisibility can be
restored by rubbing over it a solution of
ammonium sulphide, hydrogen sulphide
or of "liver of sulphur." On parchment
the restored color is fairly permanent but
on paper it does not last long. The let-
ters however could be easily retraced,
after such treatment, by the use of India
ink and thus made permanent. This
treatment will not restore faded aniline
ink. It only works with ink containing a
metal-like iron that forms a black sul-
phide.
WRINKLES, REMOVAL OF:
See Cosmetics.
Yeast
DRY YEAST.
Boil together for £ hour, 95 parts of
the finest, grated hops and 4,000 parts of
water. Strain. Add to the warm liquor
1,750 parts of rye meal or flour. When
the temperature has fallen to that of the
room add 167 parts of good yeast. On
the following day the mass will be in a
state of fermentation. While it is in this
condition add 4,000 parts of barlev
flour, so as to form a dough. This dough
is cut up into thin disks, which are dried
as rapidly as possible in the open air or
sun. For use, the disks are broken into
small pieces and soaked overnight in warm
water. The yeast can be used on the fol-
lowing day as if it were ordinary brewers'
yeast.
PRESERVATION OF YEAST.
I. — The yeast is laid in a vessel of cold
water which is thereupon placed in a
well-ventilated, cool spot. In this man-
ner the yeast can be preserved for several
weeks. In order to preserve the yeast
for several months a different process
must be followed. The yeast, after
having been pressed, is thoroughly dried.
For this purpose the yeast is cut up into
small pieces which are rolled out, placed
on blotting paper, and allowed to dry in
a place which is not reached by the sun.
These rolls are then grated, again dried,
and finally placed in glass bottles. For
use, the yeast is dissolved, whereupon it
immediately regains its freshness. This
process is particularly to be recommend-
ed because it preserves the yeast for a
long period.
II. — For liquid yeast add one-eighth
of its volume in glycerine. In the case of
compressed yeast, the cakes are to be
covered with glycerine and kept in
closed vessels. Another method of pre-
serving compressed yeast is to mix it
intimately with animal charcoal to a
dough, which is to be dried by exposure
to sunlight. When it is to be used, it is
treated with water, which will take up
the ferment matter, while the charcoal
will be deposited. Liquid and com-
pressed yeast have been kept for a con-
siderable time, without alteration, by
saturating the former with chloroform
and keeping the latter under chloroform
water.
YEAST TESTS.
I. — Pour a few drops of yeast into
boiling water. If the yeast sinks, it is
spoiled; if it floats, it is good.
II. — To 1 pound yeast add £ tablespoon-
ful of corn whisky or brandy, a pinch of
sugar, and 2 tablespoonfuls of wheat
flour. Mix thoroughly and allow the re-
sultant compound to stand in a warm
place. If the yeast is good it will rise in
about an hour.
YEAST AND FERTILIZERS:
See Fertilizers.
YELLOW (CHROME), TEST FOR:
See Pigments.
INDEX
Absinthe, 765
Absolute Alcohol, 45
Abrasion Remedy, 225, 486
Acacia, Mucilage of, 43
Acid-free Soldering Fluid, 659
Acid-proof Alloy, 62
Cement, 26
Corks, 10
Glass, 374
Acid-proofing, 9
Acid-proof Pastes, 38
Putty, 607
Table Top, 9
Acid Receptacles, Lining for, 10
Acid-resisting Paint, 499
Acids, Soldering, 656
Acid Stains Removed, 184
Test for Gold, 432
for Vinegar, 358
Aconite-Monkshood Poison, 93
Adhesion, 105
Belt Pastes for Increasing, 105
Adhesive Paste, 37, 39
Adhesives, 10
Advertising Matter, to Scent, 510
Adulterants in Foods, 348
Adulteration of Linseed Oil, 460
of Wax, 753
Adurol Developer, 527
Affixing Labels to Glass, 42
Agar Agar Paste, 37
Agate, Buttons of Artificial, 44
Agate (Imitation), 370
Age of Eggs, 283
Aging of Silk, 639
Agricultural Sources of Industrial
Alcohol, 668
Air Bath, 44
Bubbles in Gelatine, 370
Exclusion of, 553
Air-purifying, 44
Albata Metal, 63
Albumen, 34
in Urine, Detection of, 44
Paste, 37
Alcohol, 44
Absolute, 45
Defined, 667
Deodorized, 45, 514
Dilution of, 45, 703
in Beer, 45
Manufacture, 667, 674
Solid, 45
Tests for Absolute, 45
Ale, 46
Ginger, 107
Alfenide Metal, 63
Alkali Blue and Nicholson's Blue
Dye, 267
Alkalis and Their Salts Poison,
93
Alkaline Glycerine of Thymol,
100
Alkaloids, Antidotes to, 102
Alkermes Cordial, 763
Alloy, Acid-proof, 62
for Caliper and Gage-rod Cast-
ings, 80
for Watch Pinion Sockets, 736
Lipowitz's, 61
Moussets', 76
Alloys, 47
Copper, Silver, Cadmium, 76
for Casting Coins, etc., 62
for Cementing Glass, 52
for Drawing Colors on Steel, 80
for Metal Foil, 474
for Small Casting Molds, 80
having a Density, 48
Silver, Nickel, Zinc, 76
Tin, 77
Unclassified, 80
Almond Blossom Perfumery, 518
Cold Cream, 235
Extracts, 312
Powders for the Toilet, 242
Altars, to Clean, 185
Alum, 80
Baking Powder, 102
Bath, 535
Process of Water Purification,
340
Aluminum Alloys, 48
Electrical Conductivity of, 50
Aluminum-brass, 50
Aluminum Bronze, 56, 657
Castings, 150
Aluminum-Copper, 50
Aluminum Gilding, 576
Gold, 68
Etching Fluid for, 324
How to Color, 80
Lacquer for, 438
Paper, 507
Plating, 572, 581
Polishes, 590
Aluminum-Silver, 50, 75
Aluminum Solders, 657
Aluminum-Tin, 50
Aluminum, to Clean, 204
Toughness, Density and Te-
nacity, 83
Aluminum-Tungsten, 50
Aluminum Varnish, 725
Working of Sheet, 83
Aluminum-Zinc, 50
Amalgam for Cementing Glass,
etc., 90
for Plaster, 65
for Silvering Glass Balls, 90
for the Rubber of Electric
Machines, 90
Gold Plating, 576
Amalgams, 64, 85
for Mirrors, 72
Amber, 90
Cements, 26
Varnish, 718
Ambrosia Powder, 628
American Champagne, 118
Factory Cheese, 176
Lemonade, 110
Soda Fountain Company's
Whipped Cream, 248
Amethyst (Imitation), 370
Amidol Developer, 528
Ammon-carbonite, 331
Ammonia, 91
for Fixing Prints, 536
Household, 91
Poison, 93
Violet Color for, 91
Water, 245, 519
Perfumed, 91
Anchovies, Essence of, 98
787
Anchovy Paste, 98
Preparations, 98
Sauce, Extemporaneous, 98
Angostura Bitters, 762
Anise Cordial, 763
Aniline, 266
Black Dye, 266, 279
Substitutes, 279
Black Lake Dye, 278
Blue Dye, 268
Green Dye for Wool, 269
for Silk, 269
in Pigments, Tests for, 560
Scarlet Dye, 271
Stains, to Remove, 185
Yellow Dye, 271
Animals, Fly Protection for, 419
Ankara, 142
Annealing Bronze, 56
Copper, 219
Annealing of Steel, Wire, etc.,
681
Anodynes, 486
Ansco Platinum Paper, 529
Ant Destroyers, 420
Anti-corrosive or Asiatic Ink, 414
Antidotes for Belladonna, 93
for Poisons, 92
Anti-ferments, 97
Anti-fouling Compositions, 498
Anti-freezing Solution, 362, 363
for Automobilists, 363
Anti-friction Bearing or Babbitt
Metals, 50
Metal, 58
Anti-frost Solution, 363
Anti-leak Rubber Tire, 708
Antimony Poison, 93
Baths, 581
Antique Bronzes, 566
Silver, 587, 639
Imitation of, 640
Antiques, to Preserve, 98
Anti-rust Compositions, 625
Paper for Needles, 625
Pastes, 625
Antiseptic Bromine Solution, 100
Enamel, 720
Nervine Ointment, 487
Oil of Cinnamon, 100
Paste (Poison), 99
Pencils, 99
Powders, 98
Soap, 644
Solution, Coloring for, 100
Tooth Powder, 253
Antiseptics, 98
for Caged Birds, 729
Mouth, 99
Aphtite, 70
Apollinaris Lemonade, 110
Water, 740
Apple Extract, 312
Syrup, 312
Applications for Prickly Heat, 398
of Barium Amalgams, 86
of Bismuth Amalgams, 88
of Cadmium Amalgams, 87
of Copper Amalgams, 87
of Gold Amalgams, 89
of Lead Amalgams, 88
of Manganese Amalgams, 87
788
INDEX
Applications of Potassium Amal-
gams, 86
of Silver Amalgams, 88
of Sodium Amalgams, 86
. of Strontium Amalgams, 86
of Tin Amalgams, 87
of Zinc Amalgams, 87
Applying Decalcomania Pictures,
Apricot Extract, 312
Aquarium Putty, 608
Argentan, 69
Arguzoid, 70
Armenian Cement, 20
Arms, Oil for, 460
Arnica Salve, 486
Aromatic Cod-Liver Oil, 482
Cotton, 246
Rhubarb Remedy, 180
Vinegar, 735
Arsenic Alloys, 63, 75
Arsenic Poison, 93, 614
Art Bronzes, 57, 556
of Lacquering, 437
Artificial Aging of Fabrics, 639
Beeswax, 754
Butter, 142
Ciders, 181
Coloring of Flowers, 346
Egg Oil, 284
Fertilizers for Pot Plants, 336
Flowers, Dyes for, 272
Flower Fertilizer, 337
Horn, 396
Leather, 447
Marbles, 699
Rubber, 618
"Rubbered" Silk, 639
Slate, 643
Violet Perfumery, 518
Water, 739
Asbestos Cement, 30
. Fabric, 342
Asphalt and Pitch, 33
as Ingredient of Rubber, 619
in Painting, 718
Varnishes, 718
Assaying of Gold, 381
Asthma Cures, 101
Fumigating Powders, 101
in Canaries, 728
Papers, 101
Astringent for Horses, 730
Wash for Flabby Skin, 234
Atomic Weights, 758
Atomizer Liquid for Sick Rooms,
264
Attaching Enamel Letters to
Glass, 19
by Cement, 17
Atropine, Antidote to, 102
Aqua Aromatica, 102
Fortis for the Touchstone, 383
Poison, 92
Regia, 102
Aquarium Cements, 31
Automobile Engines, Cooling, 363
Automobiles, Anti-freezing Solu-
tion, 363
Axle Grease, 462
Babbitt-Metals, 50
Baking Powders, 102
Balance Spring, 738
Baldness, 392
Balkan Paste, 38
Ball Blue, 281, 444
Ball-Room Floor Powder, 345
Balsam, Birch, 103
of Sulphur, 380
Spray Solution, 103
Balsam, Stains, to Remove, 194
Wild-cherry, 103
Balsams, 102
Balsamic Cough Syrup, 211
Banana Bronzing Solution, 489
Cream, 115
Trick, the Burning, 611
Syrup, 312
Banjo Sour, 110
Barbers' Itch, 486
Powder, 243
Barium Amalgams, 86
Poison, 615
Barometers (Paper), 402
Bath, Air, 44
Metal, 63
Powder, 242
Tablets, Effervescent, 103
Bath-tub Enamel, 721
Paint, 501
Batteries, Solution for, 104
Basis for Effervescent Salts, 627
Baudoin Metal, 63
Bavaroise au Cognac, 118
Bay Rum, 104, 513
Bear Fat, 333
Bearing Lubricant, 461
Metal, 50
Beauty Cream, 231
Water, 244
Bedbug Destroyers, 420
Beechwood Furniture Polish, 593
Beef and Iron, 771
Iron, and Wine, 104
Beef-marrow Pomade, 227
Beef Peptomoids, 509
Preservatives, 360
Tea, 112
Beer, 118
Ginger, 108
Lemon, 108
Restoration of Spoiled, 105
Spruce, 119
Treacle, 119
Weiss, 119
Beers, Alcohol in, 45
Beetle Powder, 425
Bees, Foul Brood in, 105
Beeswax, Artificial, 754
Belladonna, Antidotes to, 93
Bell Metal, 51
Belt Cement, 31
Glue, 15
Lubricant, 462
Pastes for Increasing Adhesion,
105
Benedictine, 769
Bengal Lights, 609
Bent Glass, 371
Benzine, 106
Cleaning with, 209
Purification of, 106
to Color Green, 106
Benzoic Acid, Detection of, 350
in Food, 350
Benzoic-acid Pastilles, 211
Benzoin-Glycerine Soap, 652
Benzoparal, 107
Berge's Blasting Powder, 330
Beverages, 107
Yellow Coloring for, 119
Bibra Alloy, 71
Bicycle Dipping Varnish, 719
Bicycle-tire Cement, 23
Bicycle Varnishes, 719
Bicycles, Black Paint for, 495
Bidery Metal, 80
Billiard Balls, 148, 428
Birch Balsam, 103
Birch-Bud Water, 519
Birch Water, 244, 389
Bird Diseases, Remedies, 728
Foods, 120, 729
Bird Lime, 458 k
Paste, 145
Tonic, 729
Birds, Antiseptic Wash for, 729
C9nstipation in, 729
Diarrhoea in, 729
Biscuit, Dog, 265
Bismarck Brown Dye, 267
Bismuth, 49
Alloys, 52
Amalgams, Applications of, 88
Bronze, 70
Purification of, 380
to Purify, 380
Biting Off Red-hot Iron, 612
Bitter Almond Oil Poison, 93
Bitters, 762
Blackberry Cholera Mixture, 180
Cordial, 763
Blackboard Paint and Varnish,
489
Varnish, 720
Black Color on Brass, 129
Dye for Tanned Leather, 447
on Cotton, 266
on Wool, for Mixtures, 267
Blackening Iron, 495
"Black Eye" Lotion, 333
Black Finish for Brass, 129
Grease Paints, 229
Hair Dye without Silver, 390
Blackhead Remedies, 232
Blacking Copper, 221
for Harness, 450
for Shoes, 631
Stove, 700
Black Japanese Varnish, 719
Lake Dyes for Wall-paper, 278
Marble, Imitation, 699
Marking Inks, 407
Paint for Polished Iron, 495
Patina, 585
Putty, 607
Ruling Ink, 403
Sheet Rust Preventive, 624
Starch, 680
Straw Hat Varnish, 266
Varnish, 543, 544, 719
Wash for Casting Molds, 150
Blanching Silver, 640
Blanket Washing, 399
Blasting Powder, 330
Blazing Sponge Trick, 611
Bleach for Hands, 233
Bleaches, Bone, 430
Bleaching, 120
and Coloring Feathers, 335
Bone Fat, 333
•Cotton by Steaming, 245
Cotton, 245
Feathers, 121, 335
Linen, 120
of Linseed Oil, 459
of Vegetable Fibers with Hy-
drogen Peroxide, 245
Oils, 484
Photographic Prints White, 553
Silk, 120, 639
Skin Salves, 234
Solution, 121
for Photographs, 553
Solutions for the Laundry, 446
Sponges, 678
Straw, 120
Tallows and Fats, 334
Wool, 120
Bleeding, Local, 701
Blight Remedies, 121
Blisters, for Horses, 729
Block for Soldering, 667
Hollow Concrete Building, 691
Machines, 694
Blocks Poured from Wet Con-
crete, 694
Bood-red Brick Stain, 166
INDEX
789
Blotting Paper, 503
Blue, Ball, 281
Blue-black Ink, 414
Patina, 585
Blue Bronze, 138
Dye for Hosiery, 268
from Green at Night, 121
Indelible Ink, 406
Paving Bricks, 166
Blueprint Inks, 403
Paper Making, 536
Blueprints, to Change, 121
to Turn Brown, 542
Waterproofing, 741
Blue Ruling Ink, 403
Sanitary Powder, 263
Vitriol Poison, 94
Bluing, 443
Compounds, 443
of Steel, 682
Bluish-black Lake Dye, 278
Blush Pink Dye on Cotton Tex-
tile, 279
Board-sizing, 38
Boiled Oil, 484
Boiler Compounds, 121
Plates, Protecting from Scales,
122
Pressure, 123
Scales, Prevention of, 122
Boiling the Linseed Oil, 409
Boil Remedy, 121
Bone Black, 123
Bleaches, 430
Fat, 333
Fertilizers, 338
or Ivory Black, 123
Polishes, 395
Uniting Glass With, 17
Bones, A Test for Broken, 124
Treatment of, in Manufactur-
ing Glue, 10
Bookbinders' Varnish, 720
Book Disinfectant, 263
How to Open, 125
Bookworms, 425
Books, their Preservation, 124
to Remove Marks from, 186
Boot Dressings, 631
Lubricant, 460
Boot-top Liquid, 632
Boots, Waterproofing, 750
Borated Apple Blossom Powder,
243
Talcum, 510
Borax in Food, 350
for Sprinkling, 125
Soap Powder, 650
Boric Acid, Detection of, 350
Borotonic, 258
Bottling Sweet Cider, 181
Bottle-cap Lacquer, 440
Bottle-Capping Mixtures, 126
Bottle Cleaners, 210
Deodorizer, 127
Stoppers, 700
Varnish, 720
Wax, 553
Bottles, 126
White Glass for, 373
Bouillon, 113
Chicken, 112
Clam, 113
Hot Egg, 112
Tomato Extract, 212
Bowls of Fire Trick, 611
Box Glue, 15
Bradley Platinum Paper, 529
"Braga," 117
Bran, Sawdust in, 126
Brandy, Artificial French, 768
and Brandy Bitters, 762
Brass, 127, 435
A Bronze for, 136
Brass and Bronze Protective
Paint, 495
Articles, Restoration of, 132
Black Color on, 129
Black Finish for, 129
Bronzing, 566
Brown Color to, 130
Cleaners, 202, 203
Coloring, 129, 473
Colors for Polished, 127
Etching Bath for, 324
Fluid for, 323
Fastening Porcelain to, 17
Gilding, 576
Graining of, 130
Brass-Iron (Aich's Metal), 53
Brass Parts, Improved, 132
Pickle for, 132
Platinizing, 566
Polishes, 590
Sand Holes in, 150
Solders, 657
to Cast Yellow, 54
Tombac Color on, 130
Unpolished Coloring, 128
Varnishes Imitating Gold, 725
Brassing, 572, 581
Zinc, Steel, Cast Iron, 581
Brassware, Gold Lacquers for. 440
Bread, Dog, 265
Breath, Fetid, Remedies for, 133
Perfumes, 258
Brewers' Yeast, 339
Brick and Tilemakers' Glazed
Bricks, 164
Arches, Waterproofing, 741
Brickbat, Cheese, 176
Brick, Blood-red Stain, 166
Colors, 165
Brickmakers' Notes, 167
Brick Polishes, 600
Stain, 133, 166
Walls, to Clean, 197
to Renovate, 190
Waterproofing, 134
Bricks, 164
Glaze for, 377
of Sand-lime, 689
Polish for, 600
Brie, Cheese, 176
Brightening Pickle, 469
Bright Red Rouge, 229
Brilliantine, 390
Florician, 483
Brimstone (Burning), 611
Bristol Brass (Prince's Metal), 53
Britannia Metal, 55
to Clean, 201
Silver-plating, 587
British Champagne, 118
Oil, 484
Brocchieri's Styptic, 701
Brocq's Pomade for Itching, 228
Broken Bones, A Test for, 124
Bromine, Antiseptic, 100
Bromoform, 134
Rum, 134
Bronze, Aluminum, 56
Annealing, 56
Articles, Polish for, 591
Casting, 150
Cleaning, 202, 205
Coloring, 138
Dye, 272
for Brass, 136
Gilding, 137
Leather, 447
Lettering, 456
Machine, 58
Phosphor, 58
Polishes, 591
Powder, Liquid for, 567
Bronze Powders, 134, 139
Preparations, 135
I Bronze, Renovation of, 205
Silicon, 61
Steel, 61
1 Substitutes, 137
Tincture, 135, 137
to Renovate, 201
Varnishes, 726
Bronzes, 55
Art, 57
Pickle for, 138
Statuary, 57
Bronzing, 566
and Patinizing of Articles, 136
Engraved Ornaments, 137
General Directions for, 135
Liquid, 136
Metals, 567
of Brass, 571
of Gas Fixtures, 566
of Wood, 782
of Zinc, 137
Solutions for Paints, 489
with Soluble Glass, 139
Brooches, Photographing on, 551
Brown Dye for Cotton, 267
for Silk, 267
for Wool, 267
and Silk, 267
Hair Dye, 390
Browning of Steel, 583
Brown Ink, 414
Ointment, 486
Oxidation on Bronze, 139
Shoe Dressing, 632
Brownstone, Imitation, 133
Brown Tints, 559
Varnish, 726
Brunette or Rachelle Powder,
242
Brushes, 140
Bubble (Soap), Liquid, 655
Bubbles, 141
in Gelatine, 370
Buff Terra-Cotta Slip, 166
Wheels, Rouge for, 618
Bug Killers, 420
Building Blocks, Concrete, 691
Bunions, 224
Burning Banana Trick, 103
Brimstone, 611
Sealing Wax, 611
Burns, 486
Carbolic Acid, 147
Mixture for, 142
Burnt Alum, 80
Steel, to Restore, 686
Butter, 142, 354
Artificial, Tests for, 354
Color, 142, 359
Buttermilk, Artificial, 143
Buttons of Artificial Agate, 44
Platine for, 80
Cadmium Alloy, about the Hard-
ness of Zinc, 77
Alloys, 61, 64
with Gold, Silver, and Cop-
Er, 62
_ ims, Applications of, 87
Calcium Carbide, 144
Sulphide (Luminous), 494
Camera, Renovating a, 553
Campchello, 117
Camphor for Cholera, 180
Camphorated and Carbolated
Powders, 252
Cold Cream, 226
Ice, 145
Pomade, 145
Preparations, 144
790
INDEX
Camphorated Substitutes in the
Preparation of Celluloid, 157
Canary-Bird Food, 729
Paste, 145
Canary Birds, Their Diseases, 729
Concrete, 689
Candles, 145
Coloring, 145, 146
Fumigating, 365
Transparent, 145
Candy, 216
Colors and Flavors, 218
Orange Drops, 216
Canned Vegetables, 352
Canning, 602
without Sugar, 603
Cantharides and Modern Potato
Bug Poison, 94
Pomade, 392
Can Varnish, 720
Canvas Waterproofing, 742
Caoutchouc, 618
Solution for Paints, 719
Capacities of Utensils, 703
Capsule Varnish, 720
Capping Mixtures for Bottles, 126
Caramels, 146, 216
Caramel in Food, 352
12-Carat, 433
4-Carat Gold, 433
18-Carat Gold for Rings, 433
22-Carat Solder, 433
Carats, to Find the Number of,
432
Carbolic Acid, 147
Carbolic-acid Burns, 147
Decolorization of, 147
Disguising Odor of, 147
Carbolic Powder, 263
Soap, 647
Carbolineum, 497
Carbonated Pineapple Cham-
pagne, 118
Carbon Ink, 403
Paper, 503
Printing, 531
Process in Photography, 531
Carbuncle Remedies, 121
Cardboard or Leather Glue, 15
Waterproofing, 751
Cards (Playing), to Clean, 209
Care of Refrigerators, 401
Carmelite Balm Water, 519
Carmine, 403
Lake Dye for Wall Paper, 278
Carnation Lake Dye, 277
Carpet Preservation, 399
Soap, 644
Carpets, How to Preserve, 399
Carriage-top Dressing, 448
Carron Oil, 242
Case Hardening, 648
Casein, 34, 148
Albumen, and Glue, 34
Cements, 20
Massage Cream, 233
Paste, 38
Varnish, 34
Cashmere Perfumery, 516
Casket Trimmings, 150
Casks, 149
Watertight, 149
Cassius, Purple of, 383
Cast Brass, 53
Cast-brass Work, Sand Holes in,
150
Castile Soap, to Cut, 644
Casting, 149
Copper, 63
in Wax, 755
Molds, Alloys for, 80
of Soft Metal Castings, 151
Castings, Making in Aluminum,
81
Castings Out of Various Metals,
149
to Soften Iron, 427
Cast-iron Soldering, 666
Castor Oil, 153
Castor-oil Chocolate Lozenges,
154
Castor Oil, How to Take, 154
Tasteless, 153
Casts from Wax Models, 755
(Plaster), Preservation of, 565
Repairing of Broken, 26
Waterproofing, 565
Catatypy, 154
Cat Diseases and Remedies, 732
Caterpillar Destroyers, 423
Catgut, 155
Sutures, Preparation of, 155
Catsup, Adulterated, 353
Cattle Dips and Applications, 264
Caustic Potash Poison, 93, 94
Ceiling Cleaners, 400
Celery Clam Punch, 112
Compound, 155
Cellars, Waterproof, 400
Celloidin Paper, 504
Cells, Solutions and Fillers for
Battery, 104
Celluloid, 155
Cements and Glues, 17
Glue for, 12
Lacquer, 439
of Reduced Inflammability, 159
Putty, 161
Cement, 692
Armenian, 20
Asbestos, 30
Cheap and Excellent, 30
C9lors, 688
Diamond Glass, 29
for Belts, 31
for Chemical Apparatus, 31
for Cracks in Stoves, 162
for Enameled Dials, 20
for General Use, 31
for Glass, 21, 25, 28
for Iron and Marble, 17
for Ivory, 31
for Leather and Iron, 25
for Metals, 21, 25
for Metal on Hard Rubber, 22
for Pallet Stones, 162
for Pasteboard and Paper, 21
for Patching Boots, 23
for Pipe Joints, 162
for Porcelain Letters, 19
for Sandstones, 17
for Steam and Water Pipes, 161
for Watch-lid, 20
for Waterpipe, 162
Hydraulic, 33
Cementing Celluloid and Hard-
rubber Articles, 18
Cement Jewelers, 20
Mordant for, 479
on Marble Slabs, 16
Paints for, 499
Parisian, 30
Protection of, Against Acid, 9
Rubber for Cloth, 24
to Paint Over Fresh, 499
Transparent for Glass, 29
Strong, 30, 32
Universal, 31
Work, Protection for, 162
Cements, 16, 161
Amber, 26
Aquarium, 31
Casein, 20
Celluloid, 17
for Attaching Letters on Glass,
19
for Fastening Porcelain to
Metal, 25
Cements, for Iron, 24
for Leather, 22, 23
for Metals, 24
for Rubber, 22
for Stone, 16
for Tires, 23
for Water-glass, 19
Meerschaum, 30
Sign-letters, 18
Silicate of Oxychloride, 35
Ceramics, 164
Chain of Fire, 612
Chains (Watch), to Clean, 206
Chalk for Tailors, 164
Chamois Skin, to Clean, 186
Champagne, 118
Cider, 181
Chapped Skin, 232
Chappine Cream, 237
Charta Sinapis, 480
Chartreuse, 769
Cheddar Cheese, 176
Cheese, 174
Color, 359
Wrapping, Tin Foil for, 474
Chemical Apparatus, Cement for,
31
Gardens, 368
Reagents, 349
Cherry Balsam, 103
Cordial, 764
Phosphate, 112
Tooth Paste, 257
Chewing Candy, 217
Gums, 178
Cheshire Cheese, 176
Chestnut Brown Dye for Straw
Bonnets, 267
Hair Dye, 391
Chicken Bouillon, 112
Chicken-coop Application, 419
Chicken Diseases, 734
Chicory, Tests for, 353
Chilblains, 486
Children, Doses for, 265
Children's Tooth Powder, 255
China, 173
Pomade, 227
Repairing, 601
Riveting, 179
Silver Alloy, 75
to Toughen, 173
Chinese Tooth Paste, 257
Chlorides, Platt's, 264
Chloriding Mineral Lubricating
Oils, 462
Chlorine-proofing, 9
Chocolate, 179
and Milk, 114
Castor-oil Lozenges, 154
Extracts, 312
Frappe, 114
Hot, 111
Soda Water, 111
Cholera Remedies, 179
Chowchow, 212
Chrome Black Dye for Wool, 267
Chromium Glue, 15
Chromo Making, 180
Cider, 180
Preservative, 181
Vinegar, 735
Cigarettes, Asthma, 101
Cigar Flavoring, 183
Sizes and Colors, 182
Spots, 183
Cigars, 182
Cinnamon Essence, 312
Oil as an Antiseptic, 100
or Brown Dye for Cotton and
Silk, 267
Cinchona, 771
Pomade, 392
Citrate of Magnesium, 464
Clam Bouillon, 113
INDEX
791
Claret Lemonade, 110
Punch, 110, 112
Clarification of Gelatin and Glue,
370
Clarifying, 184
Muddy Water, 741
Clay, 33, 184
Claying Mixture for Forges, 184
Clean Bronze, 202
Cleaner, Universal, 209
Cleaning Linoleum, 398
Marble, 196
Polished Woodwork, 194
Brass on Clock, 206
Bronze Objects, 205
Clocks, 207
Copper, 200
Copper Sinks, 202
Electro-plate Goods, 205
Funnels and Measures, 204
Gilded Work on Altars, 185
Gilded Articles, 185
Gilded Bronzes, 205
Gilt Bronze Ware, 201
Glass, Paste for, 208
Inferior Gold Articles, 207
Lamp Globes, 209
Marble, Furniture, etc., 197
Methods and Processes, 209
of Copperplate Engravings, 309
of Statuettes and Plaster Ob-
jects, 564
of Walls, Ceilings, and Paper,
190, 397
Oil Stains on Wall Paper, 190
Optical Lenses, 208
Paint Brushes, 140
Painted and Varnished Sur-
faces, 194
Painted Doors, Walls, etc., 190
Pearls, 208
Preparations, 184, 397, 590, 644
Preparation for Glass with
Metal Decorations, 208
Pewter Articles, 205
Powder, 194
Skins and Leather, 186
Silver-plated Ware, 200
Terra Cotta, 197
Tracings, 194
Varnish Brushes, 141
Wall Paper, 191
Whitewashed Walls, 190
Window Panes, 208
Cleansing Fluids, 185
Clearing Baths, 535
Cleary's Asthma Fumigating
Powder, 101
Cliche Metal, 52
Clock-bell Repairing, 737
Clock Cleaning, 207
Clock-dial Lettering, 737
Clock Hands, to Reblack, 738
Clockmakers' Cleaning Processes,
206
Clock Oil, 482
Repairing, 738
Clothes and Fabric Cleaners, 191
Cleaners, 191
Clothes-Cleaning Fluids, 192
Cloth Paper, 504
Strips Attached to Iron, 14
to Iron, Gluing, 37
Waterproofing, 748
Cloths for Polishing, 599
Clouding of Mouth Mirrors, 477
Cloudless Caramel Coloring, 146
Clove Pink Perfumery, 516
Coal Oil, 484
Coals, to Eat Burning, 612
Coating for Bathrooma, 498
for Damp Walls, 499
for Name Plates, 501
Metallic Surfaces with Glass, 377
Tablets with Chocolate, 179
Cobaltizing of Metals, 573
Cobalt, or Fly Powder Poison, 94
Cochineal Insect Remedy, 422
Cocoa Mint, 115
Syrup, 112
Cocoas, 112
Cod Liver Oil and Its Emulsion,
482
Coffee, 353
Cocktail, 114
Cordial, 763
Cream Soda, 113
Essence, 314
Extracts, 313
for the Soda Fountain, 111
Frappe, 114
Hot, 111
Iced, 114
Nogg, 114, 115
Substitutes for, 210
Syrups, 313
Coil Spring, 683
Springs, to Temper, 683
Coin Cleaning, 200
Metal, 62
Coins, Impressions of, 467
Matrix for, 467
Colas, 728
Cold and Cough Mixtures, 211
Chemical Gilding, 577
Cream, 225
Enameling, 721
Soldering, 666
Varnish, 543
Colic in Cattle, 729
Collapsible Tubes, Skin Cream,
239
Tooth Paste for, 257
Collodion, 212
Cologne, 514
for Headaches, 394
Spirits or Deodorized Alcohol,
514
Coloration of Copper and Brass
with Cupric Selenite, 568
Colored Alloys for Aluminum, 50
Celluloid, 161
Fireproofing, 344
Fires, 609
Floor Polishes, 591
Gilding, 577
Glass, 165, 371
Gold Alloys, 66
Hygroscopes, 402
Inks, 414
Lacquer, 439
Marking Inks, 407
Rings on Metal, 582
Sand, 628
Coloring Benedine Green, 106
Brass, 473
Ceresine Candles for the Christ-
mas Tree, 1*45
Common Gold, 431
Copper, 473
Electric-light'Bulbs and Globes,
371
Fluid for Brass, 129
Gold Jewelry, 430
Incandescent Lamps, 442
Matter in Fats, 334
Metals, 471, 568
of Brass, 128, 570
of Modeling Plaster, 563
Perfumes, 511
Silver, 640
Soap, 644
"Spirit" Varnishes, 715
Steel, 682
Unpolished Brass, 128
Colorings for Jewelers' Work, 433
Color Enamel, 721
Photography, 548
Stains, for Wood, 782
Color Stamps for Rough Paper,
Testing, 559
Colors, 266
and Sizes of Cigars, 182
for Confectionery, 218
for Paints, 555
for Polished Brass, 127
for Pomade, 228
for Syrups, 702
Fusible Enamel, 306
Combined Alum and Hypo Bath,
535
Toning and Fixing Baths, 542
Comfortable, Washing, 399
Commercial Enameling, 290
Formaldehyde, 362
Mucilage, 43
Common Silver for Chains, 434
Silver Solder, 434
Composition Files, 339
for Cleaning Copper, Nickel,
and other Metals, 203
for Linoleum, Oilcloth, etc., 459
for Writing on Glass, 376
of Various Hard Spiders, 663
Compositions for Ships' Bottoms,
498
Compost for Indoor Plants, 337
Compound for Cleaning Brass,
203
Salicylated Collodion Corn
Cure, 224
Solution of Thymol, 100
Concentrated Lye Poison, 93
Concrete, 689
Blocks, Properties of, 695
Tamping of, 695
Concrete Block Systems, 694
Building Block, 691
Mixers, 693
Condimental Sauces, 353
Condiments, 212
Tests for Adulterated, 349
Condition Powders, 729
for Cattle, 729
Conductivity of Aluminum Al-
loys, 48
Confectionery, 216
Colors, 218
Constipation in Birds, 729
Contracted Hoof or Sore Feet in
Cattle, 730
Conversion of Metric into Eng-
lish Measure, 760
Cooling Screen, 616
Cooking Vessels, Glazes for, 377
Cook's Table, 703
Cooper's Pen Metal, 74
Copal Varnish, 720
Copper, 219
Alloys, 51, 76
Amalgam, 90
Amalgams, Applications of, 87
and Brass Gilding, 577
Platinizing, 586
A Permanent Patina for, 585
Arsenic, 63
Articles, Polish for, 591
Bronzing, 566
Cleaning, 200
Coloring, 221, 473
Enameling, 294
Etching, 324
in Food, 351
Iron, 63
Lacquers, 439
Nickel, 63
Paint for, 495
Paper, 507
Patinizing and Plating, 586
Polishes, 590
Separation of Gold from, 382
Copper-Silver Alloy, 75
792
INDEX
Copper, Silver, and Cadmium Al-
loys, 76
Solder for Plating, 434
Solders, 659
to Bronze, 136
Varnishes, 726
Coppering, 572
Glass, 572
Plaster Models, etc., 573
Zinc Plate, 573
Copying Ink, 415
Printed Pictures, 222
Process on Wood, 222
Cordage, 223
Lubricant, 463
Waterproofing, 753
Cordials, 763
Cork as a Preservative, 606
Cleaner, 210
to Metal, Fastening, 36
Corks, 223
Impermeable and Acid-proof,
10
to Clean, 210
Waterproofing, 742
Corn Plaster, 224
Cures, 224
Corrosive Sublimate Poison, 94
Cosmetic Jelly, 232
Cosmetics, 225
Cottenham Cheese, 176
Cotton, 245
Belts, Lubrication, 462
Degreasing, 246
Cottonseed, Extracting Oil, 482
Hulls as Stock Food, 246
Oil, 482
Compress Cough Balsam with
Iceland Moss, 211
Drops, 217
Mixtures and Remedies, 211
for Cattle, 730
Syrup, 211
Counter Polishes, 590
Court Plasters, 247, 563
Cow Diseases — Remedies, 730
Powder, 730
Cow's Milk, Powder for, 732
Cracked Leather, 448
Cracks in Tools, to Render Visi-
ble, 686
Crayons, 374
for Graining and Marbling, 247
for Writing on Glass, 374
Cream, 247
Beef Tea, 112
Bonbons for Hoarseness, 216
Cheese, 176
How to Determine, 474
Soda Powder, 628
Creams for the Face and Skin, 225
Creosote-carbolic Acid Poison, 94
Cresol Emulsion, 248
Crimson Dye for Silk, 271
Indelible Ink, 406
Crystal Cements, 248
Crystalline Coatings or Frost-
work on Glass or Paper, 376
Honey Pomade, 227
Crystallization, Ornamental, 368
Crockery, 167
Plaster and Meerschaum Re-
pairing, 27
Crocus, 248
Crude Petroleum, Emulsion of, 521
Crushed Apricot, 365, 604
Cherries, 365, 604
Fruit Preserving, 604
Orange, 365, 604
Peach, 365, 604
Pineapples, 364, 604
Raspberry, 364
Strawberry, 364
Cucumber Creams, 237
Cucumber Essence, 314
Jelly, Juice, and Milk, 228
Juice, 239
Milk, 239
Pomade, 228
Cummins's Whipped Cream, 248
Curagoa Cordial, 764
Liqueur, 770
Cure for Barber's Itch, 486
for Snake Bites, 96
for Tan, 242
for Warts, 736
Currant Cream, 115
Curry Powder, 213
Curtains, Coloring of, 446
Cutlers' Cements for Fixing Knife
Blades into Handles, 16
Cutlery Cements, 16
Cutting, Drilling, Grinding, and
Shaping Glass, 371
Cuspidor Powder, 263
Custard Powder, 249
Cyanide of Potassium Poison, 93
Cylinder Oil, 464
Cymbal Metal, 64
Cypress Water, 519
Dairy Products, 354
Damaskeening, 249
by Electrolysis, 249
on Enamel Dials, 250
Damp Walls, Coating for, 400,
499
Damson Cheese, 176
Dandruff Cures, 388
Darcet Alloy, 64
Dark-blue Dye, 268
Dark Gold Purple, 383
Dark-Green Blackboard Paint,
489
Dark Red Grease Paint, 229
Snuff -Brown Dye for Wool, 267
Steel Dye, 269
Deadening Paint, 491
Dead-gilding of an Alloy of Cop-
per and Zinc, 579
Dead, or Matt, Dip for Brass, 131
Deadly Nightshade Poison, 94
Decalcomania Processes, 250
Decolorization of Carbolic Acid,
147
Decolorizing and Deodorizing
Oils, 484
or Bleaching Linseed Oil, 483
Decomposition of Oils, Fats, 484
Decorating Aluminum, 81
Decorative Metal Varnishes, 726
Wood-finish, 772
Deep Red Grease Paint, 229
Red Raspberry Syrup, 318
Dehorners or Horn Destroyers,
397
Delta Metal, 63
Demon Bowls of Fire, 611
Denaturized Alcohol, 45, 678
Dental Cements, 163
Platinum, 74
Dentrifices, 251
Deodorants for Water-closets, 263
Deodorization of Calcium Car-
bide, 144
Deodorized Alcohol, 514
Cod Liver Oil, 482
Petroleum, 522
Deodorizing Benzine, 106
Depilatory Cream, 259
Depthings, Verification of, 737
Derbyshire Cheese, 176
Desilvering, 587
Detannating Wine, 765
Detecting Dyed Honey, 396
Detection of Albumen in Urine,
44
of Formaldehyde in Food, 351
in Milk, 474
of Copper in Food, 351
of Cottonseed Oil in Lard, 442
of Glucose in Food, 357
of Saccharine in Food, 351
of Salicylic Acid in Food, 349
of Starch in Food, 357
Detergent for Skin Stains, 235
Detergents, 186
Determination of Artificial Colors
in Food, 351
of Preservatives, 349
Determining Cream, 474
Developers for Photographic Pur-
poses, 523
Development of Platinum Prints,
531
Dextrine Pastes, 35
Diabetics, Lemonade for, 109
Dial Cements, 20
Cleaners, 207
Repairing, 737
Diamalt, 475
Diamantine, 432
Diamond Cement, 20
Glass Cement, 29
Tests, 260
Diarrhoea in Birds, 729
Remedies, 179
Die Venting, 261
Digestive Powders, 261
Relish, 213
Diogen Developer, 527
Dip for Brass, 131
Dipping Metals, Danger of, 470
Dips, 469
for Cattle, 264
Direct Coloration of Iron and
Steel by Cupric Selenite, 568
Directions for Bronzing, 135
for Making Perfumes, 512
Disinfectants, 264
Disguising Odor of Carbolic Acid,
147
Dish Washing, 399
Disinfectant for Books, 125
Disinfectants, 262
for Sick Room, 264
Disinfecting Coating, 265
Fluids, 262
or Weed-killers, 262
Powders, 262
Dissolving Old Rubber, 622
Distemper in Cattle, 729
Distinguishing Blue from Green,
121
Diuretic Ball, 731
Dog Applications, 419
Biscuit, 265
Soap, 654
Domestic Ointments, 486
Pets, 732
Donarite, 330
Doors, to Clean, 190
Doses for Adults and Children,
265
Dose Table for Veterinary Pur-
poses, 729
Double Extract Perfumery, 518
Drawing Inks, 403
Paper, 504
Temper from Brass, 133
Drawings, Preservation of, 266
to Clean, 206
Draw-tempering Cast Steel, 687
Dressing for Carriage Tops, 448
for Sewing Thread, 706
Dressings for Harness, 451
for Leather, 448
for Linoleum, 459
for the Hair, 389
INDEX
793
Dried Casein, its Mfg., 148
Yolk of Egg, 284
Driers, 636
Driffield Oils, 485
Drill Chips, to Utilize, 686
Drilling Hard Steel, 687
Lubricant for, 463
Shaping, and Filing Glass, 372
Drinking Water, Removal of Iron
from, 741
Drinks for Summer and Winter
107
Soda Water, 111
Drops of Lime in the Eye, 333
Table of, 704
Drosses, 151
Dry Bases for Paints, 489
Perfumes, 509
Powder Fire Extinguishers, 341
Rot, Remedies for, 618
Sugar Preserving, 604
Yeast, 786
Drying Oils, 485
Druggists' Label Paste, 41
Dubbing for Leather, 460
Duesseldorff Mustard, 215
Dunlop Cheese, 176
Durable Bronze on Banners, 137
Putty, 607
Dust-laying, 485
Dust Preventers and Cloths, 401
Dutch (HoUand) Cheese, 176
Pink Dye, 278
Dyeing Feathers, 335
Leather, 450
Silk or Cotton Fabrics, 280
Straw Hats, 394
Dyes, 266
and Dyestuffs, 274
Colors, etc., for Textile Goods,
279
for Artificial Flowers, 272
for Feathers, 272
for Food, 359
for Furs, 272
for Hats, 273
for Leather, 450
Dye Stains, Removal from Skin,
184
Dynamite, 329
Earthenware, 168
Easily Fusible Alloys, 64
Eastman's Sepia Paper, 531
Eaton's Styptic, 701
Eau de Botot Water, 519
de Lais Water, 519
de Merveilleuse Water, 519
de Quinine, 392
Eberle's Whipped Cream, 248
Ebony, 783
Lacquer, 439
Stains, 782
Eczema Dusting Powder, 282
Edible Oils, 355
Effervescent Bath Tablets, 103
Powders, 627
Eggs, 282, 355
Egg Chocolate, 114
Claret, 115
Coffee, 115
Creme de Menthe, 115
Dyes, 275
Lemonade, 111, 115
Malted Milk Coffee, 114
Oil, 284
Orgeat, 115
Phosphate, 113
Powder, 284
Shampoo, 393
Sherbet, 115
Sour, 115
Wine, 118
Egg-stain Remover, 201
Eikonogen Developer, 524
Ektogan, 98
Elaine Substitute, 286
Elastic Glue, 14
Limpid Gum Varnishes, 720
or Pliable Paste, 39
Substitute for Celluloid, 158
Electrical Conductivity of Alumi-
num Alloys, 50
Electric Installations, Fusible Al-
loys for, 64
Insulation, 425
Light Bulbs, Coloring, 371
Electrodeposition Processes, 571
Electro-etching, 324
Electrolysis in Boilers, 123
Electroplating and Electrotyp-
ing, 286
Elm Tea, 288
Embalming Fluids, 288
Embroideries, Stamping Powder
for, 680
Embroidery, Ink for, 411
Emerald, Imitation, 370
Emery, 289
Grinder, 289
Substitute, 289
Emmenthaler Cheese, 176
Emollient Skin Balm, 234
Emulgen, 290
Emulsifiers, 289
Emulsion, Cresol, 248
of Bromoform, 134
Emulsions of Petroleum, 521
Enamel Colors, 727
for Copper Cooking Vessels, 305
for Vats, 721
How to Remove, 189
Letters Attaching to Glass, 19
Mixing, 302
Removers, 187
Solder, 434
Varnishes, 720
Enameled Dials, Cement for, 20
Iron Recipes, 305
Enameling, 290
Alloys, 67
Enamels, Metallic Glazes on, 173
Unaffected by Hot Water, 721
Engines (Gasoline), Anti-freezing
Solution for, 363
English Margarine, 143
Pink Dye, 278
Weights and Measures, 758
Engravers' Varnishes, 723
Engraving, Matting, and Frost-
ing Glass, 375
on Steel, 687
or Etching on Steel, 687
Spoon Handles, 309
Engravings, their Preservation,
309
to Reduce, 310
to Transfer, 710
Enlargements, 542
Envelope Gum, 43
Epicure's Sauce, 213
Epizooty, 731
Eradicators, 205
Erasing Powder or Pounce, 189
Essence Benedictine, 769
of Anchovies, 98
of Cinnamon, 312
of Extract of Soup Herbs, 212
of Savory Spices, 214
Essences and Extracts of Fruits,
310, 312
Etching, 322
Bath for Brass, 324
for Tin, 706
Copper, Brass, and Tombac,
Fluids, 322
Fluid for Aluminum, 324
Etching, Fluid, for Brass, 323
to Make Stencils, 323
for Copper, Zinc, and Steel,
324
for Gold, 324
for Lead, Antimony, and Bri-
tannica Metal, 324
for Tin or Pewter, 324
for Zinc, 323
Fluids for Copper, 325
for Iron and Steel, 322
for Silver, 324
Glass by Means of Glue, 326
-ground for Copper Engrav-
ing, 322
on Copper, 324
on Glass, 325
on Ivory, 327, 428
on Marble, 327
on Steel, 687
Powder for Iron and Steel, 323
for Metals, 324
Steel, Liquids for, 327
with Wax, 326
Eucalyptus Bonbons, 212
Paste, 257
Examination of Foods, 352
Expectorant Mixtures, 212
Explosives, 328, 330
Exposures in Photographing, 528
Extemporaneous Anchovy Sauce,
98
Extract, Ginger-ale, 107
of Meat Containing Albumen,
361
of Milk, 474
Extracting Oil from Cottonseed.
482
Extracts, 312
Coffee, 313
Eye, Foreign Matter in, 333
Eyeglasses, 376
Eye Lotions, 333
Fabric Cleaners, 191
Fabrics, Waterproofing of, 742
Facade Paint, 499
Face Black and Face Powder, 230
Bleach or Beautifier, 231
Cream without Grease, 239
Powder, Fatty, 230
Faded Photographs, 544
Fairthorne's Dental Cement, 163
Falling Hair. 392
Fa*icy Soda Drinks, 113
Fastening Cork to Metal, 36
Fats, 333, 334, 335
Decomposition of, 484
for Soldering, 659
Fatty Acid Fermentation Process,
334
Face Powders, 230
Feather Bleaching and Coloring,
121, 335
Dyes, 272, 335
Felt Waterproofing, 749
Fermentation, Prevention of, 765
Process, Fatty Acid, 334
Ferro-argentan, 71
Ferro-prussiate Paper, 539
Ferrpus-oxalate Developer, 525
Fertilizer with Organic Matter,
for Pot Flowers, 337
Fertilizers, 336
Bone, 338
Fever in Cattle, 731
Fig Squares, 216
File Alloys, 64
Metal, 64
Files, 339
Geneva Composition, 64
to Clean, 205, 339
Vogel's Composition, 64
794
INDEX
Filigree Gilding, 576
Fillers for Letters, 457
for Wood, 773
Film-stripping, 553
Filter Paper, 504
Filters for Water, 339
Finger-marks, to Remove, 125
Fingers, Pyrogallic-acid Stains on,
185
Finger-tips, Sparks from, 611
Finishing Enamel for White Fur-
niture, 722
Firearm Lubricants, 460
Firearms, Oil for, 460
Fire, Chain of, 612
Colored, 609
. Grenades, Substitutes for, 341
Trick, 611
Extinguishers, 340
Fireproof and Waterproof Paints,
491
Coating, 344
Compositions, 344
Glue, 16
Paints, 490
Papers, 344, 504
Fireproofing, 341, 344
Celluloid, 159
Clothing, 342
for Wood, Straw, Textiles, 343
Light Woven Fabrics, 342
Mosquito Netting, 342
Rope and Straw Matting, 342
Stage Decorations, 342
Tents, 342
Fireworks, 608
Fish Bait, 344
Fishing Net, Preservation of,
223
Fixing and Clearing Baths, 535
Agents in Perfumes, 512
Baths for Paper, 542
Fixatives for Crayon Drawings,
etc., 344
Flabby Skin, Wash for, 234
Flashlight Apparatus, 552
Apparatus with Smoke Trap,
552
Flannels, Whitening of, 446
Flavoring Cigars, 183
Extracts, 355
Peppermint as a, 252
Sarsaparilla, 629
Flavorings, 213
for Dentifrice, 255
Spices, 213
Flea Destroyers, 423
Flesh Face Powder, 243
Flexible Ivory, 428
Flies and Paint, 501
in the House, 399
Floor Coating, 500
Dressings, 344
Oils, 485
Paper, 506
Polish, 591
Varnishes, 724
Waterproofing, 753
Wax, 754
Floral Hair Oil, 483
Hair Pomade, 483
Florentine Bronzes, 136
Floricin Brilliantine, 483
Oil, 483
Florida Waters, 514
Flower Preservatives, 345
Flowers, Coloring for, 346
Flour and Starch Compositions,
35
Paste, 39
Fluid Measure, U. S. Standard,
704
Fluid Measures, 758
Fluids, Clothes-cleaning, 192
Disinfecting, 262
for Embalming, 288
for Soldering, 659
Fluorescent Liquids, 347
Fluxes for Soldering, 660
Used in Enameling, 305
Flux for Enameled Iron, 305
Fly Essences, 421
Fly-papers and Fly-poisons, 347
Fly-killers, 421
Fly Protectives for Animals, 419
Foam Preparations, 348
Foamy Scalp Wash, 389
Foreign Matter in the Eye, 333
Food Adulterants, Tests for, 348
Benzoic Acid in, 107
Colorants, 358
Cooked in Copper Vessels, 94
Foods, Bird, 120, 729
for Pets, 733
for Red Birds, 729
Foot Itch, 733
Foot-powders and Solutions, 361
Footsores on Cattle, 730
Formaldehyde, 362
for Disinfecting Books, 263
in Milk, Detection of, 474
Formalin for Grain Smut, 384
Treatment of Seed Grain for
Smut, 384
Formol Albumen for Preparation
of Celluloid, 156
Formulas for Bronzing Prepara-
tions, 135
for Cements for Repairing Por-
celain, Glassware, Crockery,
Plaster, and Meerschaum,
27
to Drive Ants Away, 420
Foul Brood in Bees, 105
Fowler's Solution Poison, 93
Foxglove, or Digitalis Poison, 94
Foy's Whipped Cream, 248
Fragrant Naphthalene Camphor,
14
Frames, Protection from Flies,
363
Frame Cleaning, 185
Polishes, 600
Framing, Passe-partout, 508
Frangipanni Perfumery, 516
Frankfort Black, 561
Freckle Lotions, 240
Freckles and Liver Spots, 241
Freezing Mixtures, 615, 616
Preventives, 363
French Brandy, 768
Bronze, Preparation of, 136
Dentrince, 256
Floor Polish, 591
Gelatin, 369
Hide Tanning Process, 453
Solders for Silver, 664
Varnish, 724
Fresh Crushed Fruits, 365
Frost Bite, 363
Preventive, 363
Removers, 376
Frosted Glass, 374
Mirrors, 375
Frosting Polished Silver, 640
Fruit Essences and Extracts,
310
Frappe, 116
Jelly Extract, 314
Preserving, 364, 604
Products, 357
Syrups, 701
Vinegar, 735 i
Fuel, 152
Fuller's Purifier for Cloths, 274
Fulminates, 332
Fulminating Antimony, 332
Bismuth, 332
Copper, 332
Mercury, 333
Powder, 333
Silver, 640
Fumigants, 365
Fumigating Candles, 365
Funnels, to Clean, 204
Furnace Jacket, 368
Furniture Cleaners, 206
Enamel, 722
Its Decoration, 772
Polishes, 592
Wax, 754
uses, 610
for Electrical Circuits, 64
Fusible Alloys for Electric Instal-
lations, 64
Enamel Colors, 306
Safety Alloys for Steam Boilers,
65
Fusion Point of Metals, 473
Galvanized Iron, 496
Roofing, 397
Paper, 507
Gamboge Stain, 439
Gapes in Poultry, 734
Garancine Process, 277
Gardens, Chemical, 368
Garment-cleaning Soap, 645
Gas Fixtures, 130
Bronzing of, 566
Gasoline Pumps, Packing for, 488
Gas Soldering, 660
Stove, to Clean, 202
Trick, 610
Gear Lubricant, 463
Gelatin, 369
Air Bubbles in, 370
Gems, Artificial, 370
Gem Cements, 20
Geneva Composition Files, 64
Genuine Silver Bronze, 140
German Matches, 467
Method of Preserving Meat,
361
Silver or Argentan, 69
German-silver Solders, 661
German Table Mustard, 215
Gilders' Sheet Brass, 55
Wax, 755
Gilding, 493
and Gold Plating, 575
German Silver, 578
Glass, 373, 578
in Size, 493
Metals, Powder for, 579
Pastes, 580
Plating and Electrotyping, 288
Renovation of, 185
Steel, 580
Substitute, 575
to Clean, 185
Watch Movements, 738
Gilt Frames, Polish for, 600
Test for, 383
Work, to Burnish, 384
Ginger, 112
Ginger-Ale Extract, 107
Ginger Ale, Flavoring for, 108
Soluble Extract, 108
Beer, 107, 108
Extracts, 314
Gold-leaf Alloys, 67
Striping, 383
Gold Varnish for Tin, 727
Glass, 371
Acid-proof, 374
INDEX
795
Glass and Porcelain Cement, 28
and Glassware Cement, 25
Balls, Amalgam for, 90
Silvering, 587
Celluloid, and Metal Inks, 403
Cement for, 21
Cleaning, 208
Coppering, Gilding, and Plat-
ing, 572
Etching, 325
Fastening Metals on, 25
Gilding, 373, 578
Globe, Silvering, 641
How to Affix Sign-letters on,
18
Lettering, 457
Lubricants, 372
Manufacturing, 373
Polishes for, 593
Porcelain Repairing, 26
Refractory to Heat, 373
Stop Cock Lubricant, 462
Stopper, to Loosen, 700
Silvering of, 476
Solders for, 662
Soluble, as a Cement, 28
to Affix Paper on, 19
to Cut, 371
to Fasten Brass Upon, 17
to Fix Gold Letters to, 18
to Remove Glue from, 208
to Silver, 641
Waterproof Cements for, 21
Globes, How to Color, 371
Silvering, 476
Glossy Paint for Bicycles, 495
Gloucester Cheese, 176
Glove Cleaners, 195
Gloves, Substitute for Rubber,
100
Testing, 622
Glaziers' Putty, 607
Glazing on Size Colors, 377
Glaze for Bricks, 377
Glazes, 377
and Pottery Bodies, 167
for Cooking Vessels, 377
for Laundry, 444
Glucose in Jelly, 357
Glue, Box, 15
Chromium for Wood, Paper
and Cloth, 15
Clarifier, 370
Elastic, 14
Fireproof, 16
for Articles of a Metallic or
Mineral Character, 15 m
for Attaching Cloth Strips to
Iron, 14
for Attaching Gloss to Precious
Metals, 14
for Belts, 15
for Cardboard, 15
for Celluloid, 12
for Glass, 15
for Leather or Cardboard, 15
for Paper and Metal, 14
for Tablets, 13
for Uniting Metals with Fab-
rics, 15
for Wood, 15
Manufacture, 10
Marine, 13
or Paste for Making Paper
Boxes. 15
Prevented from Cracking, 10
Test, 10
to Fasten Linoleum on Iron
Stairs. 14
to Form Paper Pads, 12
Glues. 10. 34, 378
Liquid. 11
Waterproof, 13
Glycerine, 378
and Cucumber Jelly, 228
Applications, 228, 236, 237, 239
as a Detergent, 186
Creams, 237
Developer, 530
Lotion, 379
Milk, 239
Process, 531
Soap, 646, 652
Goats' Milk Cheese, 178
Gold, 379
Acid Test for, 432
Alloys, 66, 435
Amalgams, 89
and Silver Bronze Powders, 139
Assaying of, 381
Enameling Alloys, 67
Enamel Paints, 493
Etching Fluid for, 324
Extraction of, by Amalgama-
tion, 89
Foil Substitutes and Gold Leaf,
747
from Acid Coloring Baths, 381
Imitations of, 433
Indelible Ink, 406
Ink, 405,415
Jewelry, to Give a Green Color
to, 582
Lacquers, 440
Leaf and its Applications, 492
Gold-leaf Alloys, 67
Gold-leaf Waste, to Recover, 381
Gold Lettering, 456
Letters on Glass, Cements for
Affixing, 18
Oil Suitable for Use, 485
Paints, 492
Gold-plate Alloys, 67
Gold Plating, 575
Printing on Oilcloth, 379
Purple, 383
Recovery of Waste, 381
Reduction of Old Photographic,
535
Renovator, 199
Solders, 434, 661
Testing, 432
Varnish, 726, 727
Ware Cleaner, 200
Welding, 381
Goldenade, 114
Golden Fizz, 115
Varnishes, 724
"Golf Goblet," 114
Gong Metal, 64
Grafting Wax, 755
Grain, 384
Graining and Marbling, 247
Colors, 556
Crayons, 247
of Brass, 130
with Paint, 494
Granola, 110
Grape Glace, 114
Juice, Preservation of, 767
Graphite Lubricating Compound,
463
Gravel Walks, 385
Gravers, 385
Gray Dyes, 269
Tints, 559
Grease Eradicators, 205
for Locomotive Axles, 462
Greasless Face Cream, 239
Grease Paints, 228
Greases, 462
Wagon and Axle, 462
Green Bronze on Iron, 138
Coloring for Antiseptic Solu-
tions, 100
Dyes, 269
Green Dye for Cotton, 269
for Silk, 269
for Wool and Silk, 269
Fustic Dye, 269
Gilding, 578
Ginger Extract, 315
Ink, 415
or Gold Color for Brass, 582
or Sage Cheese, 176
Patina Upon Copper, 585
Salve, 486
to Distinguish Blue from, 121
Grenades, 341
Grinder Disk Cement, Substitute
for, 31
Grinding, 708
Glass, 372
Grindstone Oil, 386
Grindstones, 386
Ground Ceramics, Laying Oil for,
485
for Relief Etching, 322
Grounds for Graining Colors, 556
Grosser's Washing Brick, 445
Gruyere Cheese, 176
Gum Arabic, Substitute, 43, 386
Bichromate Process, 546
Drops, 216
for Envelopes, 43
Gums, 386
their Solubility in Alcohol, 386
Used in Making Varnish, 715
Gun Barrels, to Blue, 682
Bronze, 59
Cotton, 331
Lubricants, 460
Gunpowder, 328
Stains, 387
Gutta-percha, 387
Gutter Cement, 162
Gypsum, 387
Flowers, 346
Paint for, 293
H
Haenkel's Bleaching Solution, 445
Hair-curling Liquids, 389
Hair Dressings and Washes, 389
Dyes, 390
Embrocation, 389
for Mounting, 388
Oil, 390
Oils, Perfumes for, 520
Preparations, 388
Removers, 259
Restorers and Tonics, 389, 391
Shampoo, 392
Hammer, to Harden, 684
Hand Bleach, 233
Creams and Lotions, 232
Hand-cleaning Paste, 232
Handkerchief Perfumes, 516
Hand Stamps, Ink for, 411
Hands, Remove Stains from,
184, 185
Perspiring, 233
Hard-finished Walls, 499
Hard German-silver or Steel Sol-
der, 661
Glaze Bricks, 164
Lead, 71
Metal Drilling Lubricant, 463
Putty, 607
Solders, 662, 664
Solder for Gold, 661
Wood Polish, 598
Hardened Ivory, 429
Steel, to Solder, 665
Hardening Plaster of Paris, 564
of Springs, 685
Steel without Scaling, 685
Steel Wire, 684
796
INDEX
Hare-lip Operation, 99
Harmless Butter Color, 143
Colors for Use in Syrups, 321
Harness Dressings, 450
Grease, 451
Oils, 451
Preparations, 450
Pastes, 451
Wax, 755
Hartshorn Poison, 93
Hat-cleaning Compounds, 187
Hat Waterproofing, 748
Hats, 394
to Dye, 273
Headache Cologne, 394
Remedies, 394
Head Lice in Children, 422
Heat-indicating Paint, 501
Heat Insulation, 426
Prickly, 398
Heat-resistant Lacquers, 441
Heaves, 731
Hectograph Pads and Inks,395,416
Hedge Mustard, 394
Heel Polish, 632
Hellebore Poison, 94
Helvetius's Styptic, 701
Hemlock Poison, 94
Hemorrhoids, 561
Henbane Poison, 94
Herbarium Specimens, Mounting,
394
Pomade, 227
Herb Vinegar, 735
Hide Bound, 731
Hide-cleaning Processes, 186
Hides, 454
Hoarfrost Glass, 375
Hoarseness, Bonbons for, 216
Remedy for, 211
Holland Cheese, 176
Hollow Concrete Blocks, 691
Silverware, 640
Home-made Outfit for Grinding
Glass, 372
Refrigerators, 616
Honey, 396
Clarifier, 396
Water, 519
Wine, 468
Honeysuckle Perfumery, 516
Honing, 761
Hoof Sores, 730
Hop Beer, 108
Bitter Beer, 118
Syrup, 315
Horehound Candy, 217
Horn, 396
Bleaches, 430
Uniting Glass with, 17
Horns, Staining, 397
Horse Blistering, 729
Horse-colic Remedy, 729
Horse Embrocations and Lini-
ments, 731
Horses and Cattle, 729
Treatment of Diseases, 729
Horticultural Ink, 405
Hosiery, Dye for, 268
Hostetter's Bitters, 762
Hot Beef Tea, 112
Bouillon, 113
Celery Punch, 112
Chocolate and Milk, 111
Egg Bouillon, 112
Chocolate, 111, 113
Coffee, 113
Drinks, 113
Lemonade, 113
Milk, 113
Nogg, 113
Orangeade, 111
Phosphate, 113
Lemonades, 110, 111
Malt, 112
Hot Malted Milk Coffee (or
Chocolate), 112
Orange Phosphate, 112
Soda Toddy, 112
Soda-water Drinks, 111
Tea, 113
Household Ammonia, 91
Formulas, 397
House Paint, 500
How to Bronze Metals, 136
to Clean a Panama Hat, 187
Brass and Steel, 202
Tarnished Silver, 204
to Color Aluminum, 80
to Keep Cigars, 187
Fruit, 364
Lamp Burners in Order, 399
to Lay Galvanized Roofing,
397
to Make Castings of Insects,
151
a Cellar Waterproof, 400
a Plaster Cast of a Coin or
Medal, 150
Picture Postal Cards and
Photographic Letter Head,
537
Simple Syrups; Hot Process,
702
to Open a Book, 125
to Paste Labels on Tin, 40
to Pour Out Castor Oil, 153
to Renovate Bronzes, 201
to Reproduce Old Prints, 223
to Sensitize Photographic
Printing Papers, 539
to Take Care of Paint Brushes,
140
Castor Oil, 154
to Tell Pottery, 173
to Unite Rubber and Leather,
22
to Tell the Character of Enamel
304
Huebner's Dental Cement, 163
Hunyadi Water, 740
Huyler's Lemonade, 110
Hydraulic Cement, 33
Hydrochinon Developer, 525
Hydrocyanic Acid Gas for Exter-
minating Household Insects,
418
Hydrofluoric Formulas, 326
Hydrographic Paper, 504
Hydrogen Peroxide as a Preserva-
tive, 605
Hygrometer and Its Use, 401
Hydrometers and Hygroscopes,
402
Hyoscyamus, Antidote to, 102
I
Ice, 402
Flowers, 402
Iced Coffee, 114
Iceland Moss, Cough Mixture, 211
Ideal Cosmetic Powder, 243
Igniting Composition, 403
Imitation Black Marble, 699
Cider, 182
Diamonds, 432
Egg Shampoos, 393
Gold, 67, 433
Foils, 474
Japanese Bronze, 138
of Antique Silver, 640
Ivory, 429
Platinum, 74
Silver Alloys, 77
Bronze, 140
Foil, 474
Stains for Wood, 784
Imogen Developer, 527
Impervious Corks, 223
Impregnation of Papers with
Zapon Varnish, 506
Improved Celluloid, 156
Incandescent Lamps, 442
Incense, 366
Incombustible Bronze Tincture,
135, 137
Increasing the Toughness, Den-
sity and Tenacity of Alumi-
num, 83
Incrustation, Prevention of, 122
Indelible Hand-stamp Ink, 411
Inks, 405
for Glass or Metal, 404
Labels on Bottles, 327
Stencil Inks, 412
India, China or Japan Ink, 406
India-rubber Varnishes, 724
Indigo, 268, 281
Indoor Plants, Compost for, 337
Industrial and Potable Alcohol:
Sources and Mfg., 667
Infant Foods, 359
Infants, Milk for, 475
Inflammable Explosive with
Chlorate of Potash, 331
Inflammability of Celluloid Re-
duced, 159
Inflammation of the Udder, 731
Influenza in Cattle, 731
in Horses, 731
Ink Eradicators, 189
Erasers, 189
for Laundry, 446
for Leather Finishers, 453
for Steel Tools, 404
for Writing on Glass, 325, 376
on Glazed Cardboard, 404
on Marble, 404
Powders and Lozenges, 407
Stains, Removing, 189
Inks, 403
for Hand Stamps, 411
for Shading Pen, 416
for Stamp Pads, 410
for Typewriters, 711
Hectograph, 395
Inlay Varnish, 724
Inlaying by Electrolysis, 324
Insect Bites, 417
Casting, 151
Powders, 419, 424
Trap, 425
Insecticides, 418
for Animals, 419
for Plants, 422
Instructions for Etching, 322
Instrument Alloys, 71
Cleaning, 199
Lacquer, 440
Soap, 653
Instruments, to Remove Rust,
199
Insulating Varnishes, 425
Insulation, 425
Against Heat, 426
Moisture, Weather, etc., 426
Intensifies and Reducers, 552
International Atomic Weights,
757
Iodine Poison, 94
Soap, 646
Solvent, 427
lodoform Deodorizer, 427
Iridescent Paper, 504
Iridia Perfumery, 516
Iron, 427
and Marble, Cement for, 17
and Steel, Etching Fluids for.
322
Polishes, 597
Powder for Hardening, 427
Biting Off Red Hot, 612
Black Paint for, 495
INDEX
797
Iron, Bronzing, 567
Castings, to Soften, 427
Cements for, 17, 25
How to Attach Rubber to, 22
Pipes, Rust Prevention for, 625
Silver-plating, 587
Solders, 665
to Cement Glass to, 17
to Clean, 204
to Cloth, Gluing, 14
to Color Blue, 427
to Whiten, 427
Varnishes, 727
Ironing Wax, 444
Irritating Plaster, 486
Itch, Barbers', 486
Ivory, 428
and Bone Bleaches, 430
Black, 123
Cement, 31
Coating for Wood, 500
Etching on, 428
Gilding, 579
Polishes, 593
Tests, 430
Jaborandi Scalp Waters, 392
Jackson's Mouth Wash, 259
Jandrier's Test for Cotton, 246
Japan Black, 495
Paint, 495
Japanese Alloys, 69
Bronze, 138
(Gray), Silver, 76
Japanning and Japan Tinning, 724
Jasmine Milk, 240
Jelly (Fruit) Extract, 314
Jet Jewelry, to Clean, 431
Jewelers' Alloys, 433
Cements, 20
Cleaning Processes, 206
Enamels, 308
Formulas, 430
Glue Cement, 20
Jewelry, to Clean, 206
Kalsomine, 436
Karats, to Find Number of, 432
Keeping Flies Out of a House, 399
Keramics, 164
Kerit, 619
Kerosene-cleaning Compounds,
193
Kerosene Deodorizer, 484
Emulsions, 521
Ketchup (Adulterated), 353
Khaki Color Dyeing, 276
Kid, 449
Leather Dressings, 449
Reviver, 453
Kirschner Wine Mustard, 214
Kissingen Salts, 628
Knife-blade Cement, 16
Knife-sharpening Pastes, 615
Knockenplombe, 31
Kola Cordial, 764
Tincture, 321
Koumiss, 116
Substitute, 437
Krems Mustard, Sour, 215
Krems Mustard, Sweet, 215
Kiimmel, 764
Kwass, 117
Label Pastes, 39
Varnishes, 725
Labels on Tin, How to Paste, 4o
Lac and the Art of Lacquering,
437
Lace Leather, 454
to Clean Gold and Silver, 193
Laces, Washing and Coloring of,
446
Lacquer for Aluminum, 438
for Brass, 438
for Bronze, 438
for Copper, 439
for Oif Paintings, 440
for Microscopes, etc., 440
for Stoves and other Articles,
441
Lacquered Ware, to Clean, 195
Lacquers, 437
for Papers, 441
Lakes, 277
Lampblack, 441
Lamp Burners, to Clean, 200, 399
Lamps, 442
Lanoline Creams, 238
Hair Wash, 389
Soap, 647
Toilet Milk, 239
Lantern Slides, 532
Lard, 442
Lathe Lubricant, 461
Laudanum Poison, 95
Laundry Blue, 443
Tablets, 444
Gloss Dressing, 444
Inks, 399
Preparations, 443
Soap, 654
Laundrying Laces, 446
Laurel Water, Poison, 93
Lavatory Deodorant, 398
Lavender Sachets, 510
Water, 514
Lawn Sand, 629
Laxatives for Cattle, etc., 732
Lead, 48, 446
Alloys, 48, 71
Amalgams, Application of, 88
Paper, 507
Plate, Tinned, 589
Poison, 95
to Take Boiling, in the Mouth,
612
Leaf Brass, 54
Leaks, 446
in Boilers, Stopping, 608
Leather, 447
and Rubber Cements, 22
as an Insulator, 426
Cements for, 23
Leather-cleaning Processes, 186
Leather Dyeing, 450
Lac, 441
Lubricants, 460
or Cardboard Glue, 15
Painting on, 455
Polish Lac, 441
Removing Spots from, 206
Russian, 454
Varnish, 725
Waste Insulation, 426
Waterproofing, 750
Leguminous Cheese, 176
Lemon Beer, 108
Essences, 315
Extract (Adulterated), 356
Juice, Plain, 112
Sherbet, 628
Sour, 116
Lemons, 456
Lemonade, 109, 112
for Diabetics, 109
Powder, 627
Preparations for the Sick, 109
Lemonades and Sour Drinks, 110
Lenses and their Care, 456
Letter-head Sensitizers, 537
Lettering, 456
a Clock Dial, 737
on Glass, 457
on Mirrors, 457
Ley Pewter, 75
Lice Killers, 422
Powders, 734
Lichen Removers, 4
Licorice, 458
Syrup, 321
Liebermann's Bleaching Test, 246
Light, Inactinic, 154
Lilac Dye for Silk, 270
Water Perfumery, 520
Limburger Cheese, 176
Lime, 33, 692
Limeade, 110
Lime as a Fertilizer, 339
Bird, 458
Juice, 112, 316
Lime-juice Cordial, 118
Limewater for Dyers' Use, 274
Lincoln Cheese, 176
Lincolnshire Relish, 213
Linen Bleaching, 120
Dressing, 444
to Distinguish Cotton from, 246
Linoleum, 459
Cleaning and Polishing, 206,
398
Glue to Fasten, 14
Liniments, 459
for Horses, 731
Lining for Acid Receptacles, 10
Linseed Oil, 34, 459
Adulteration of, 460
Bleaching of, 459
for Varnish Making, 483
or Poppy Oil, 484
Refining, 484
Solid, 483
Lipol, 226
Lipowitz Metal, 61, 65
Lip, Pomades, 226
Salves and Lipol, 226
Liqueurs, 768
to Clarify, 770
Liquid Bedbug Preparations, 421
Bottle Lac, 440
Bronzes, 135
Cloth and Glove Cleaner, 195
Court Plaster, 247
Dentifrices, 256
Dye Colors, 273
for Bronze Powder, 567
for Cooling Automobile En-
gines, 363
Liquids for Etching Steel, 327
Liquid Gold, 380
Glues, 11
Headache Remedies, 394
Indelible Drawing Ink, 403
Laundry Blue, 444
Metal Polish, Non-explosive,
595
Perfumes, 511, 515
Polishes, 594
Porcelain Cement, 28
Rouge, 230
Shampoos, 393
Shoe Blackings, 633
Soaps, 646
Styrax Soap, 647
Tar Soap, 647, 654
Liquor Ammonii Anisatus, 91
Liquors, 762
Lithia Water, 740
Lithographic Inks, 407
Lacquer, 440
Paper, 505
Liver-spot Remedies, 241, 242
Lobelia-Indian Poke Poison, 95
INDEX
Locomotive Axles, Grease for, 462
Lubricants, 462
Locust Killer, 422
Logwood and Indigo Blue Dye,
268
London Soap Powder, 650
Lotion for the Hands, 232
Louse Wash, 423
Lozenges, Voice and Throat, 219
Lubricants, 460, 462
for Cutting Tools, 461
for Heavy Bearings, 461
for Highspeed Bearings, 461
for Lathe Centers, 461
for Redrawing Shells, 463
for Watchmakers, 738
Luhn's Washing Extract, 445
Luminous Paints, 494
Lunar Blend, 114
Lustrous Oxide on Silver, 641
Luster Paste, 464
Lutes, 32
M
Machine Bronze, 58
Oil, 460
Machinery, to Clean, 200, 201,
203
to Keep it Bright, 624
Macht's Yellow Metal, 63
Madder Lake Dye, 277
Magic, 610
Bottles, 126
Mirrors, 478
Magnesian Lemonade Powder,
627
Orgeat Powder, 627
Magnesium, 49
Citrate, 464
Flash-light Powders, 552
Magnetic Alloys, 71
Curves of Iron Filings, their
Fixation, 464
Oxide, 625
Magnolia Metal, 51
Mahogany, 784
Make Extract of Indigo Blue Dye,
268
Making Castings in Aluminum, 81
Malleable Brass, 54
Malt, Hot, 112
Malted Food, 359
Milk, 112, 474
Manganese Alloys, 72
Amalgams, Applications of, 87
Argentan, 70
Copper, 72
Manganin, 72
Mange Cures, 731
Manicure Preparations, 226
Mannheim Gold or Similor, 68
Mantles, 465
Manufacture of Alcohol, 674
of Cheese, 174
of Chewing Gum, 178
of Compounds Imitating Ivory,
Shell, etc., 429
of Composite Paraffine Can-
dles, 145
of Glue, 10
of Matches, 465
of Pigments, 555
Manufacturing Varnish Hints,
715
Manures, 337
Manuscript Copying, 223
Maple, 784
Maraschino Liqueur, 770
Marble, Artificial, 699
Cements, 16
Cleaning, 196
Colors, 699
Etching, 327
Painting on, 488
Marble, Polishing, 593
Slabs, Cement for, 16
Marbling Crayons, 247
Paper for Books, 505
Margerine, 143
Marine Glue, 13
Paint to Resist Sea Water, 498
Marking Fluid, 465
or Labeling Inks, 407
Maroon Dye for Woolens, 280
Lake Dye, 277
Massage Application, 233
Balls, 233
Creams, 233
Skin Foods, 233
Soaps, 647
Mastic Lac, 441
Mat Aluminum, 81
Gilding, 579
Mats for Metals, 470
Matches, 465
Match Marks on Paint, 195
Phosphorus, Substitute for, 523
Materials, 172
for Concrete Building Blocks,
691
Matrix for Medals, Coins, etc.,
467
Matt Etching of Copper, 323
Matzoon, 468
May Bowl or May Wine, 770
Mead, 468
Meadow Saffron Poison, 95
Measures, 760
to Clean, 204
Measuring the Weight of Ice, 402
Meat Extract Containing Albu-
men, 361
Preservatives, 359, 360
Products (Adulterated), 357
Medallion Metal, 62
Medal Impressions, 467
Medals, to Clean, 199
Medical Paste, 37
Medicated Cough Drops, 217
Massage Balls, 233
Soaps, 647
Medicinal Wines, 771
Medicine Doses, 265
Meerschaum, 469
Cements, 30
Repairing, 27
Mending Celluloid, 161
Porcelain by Riveting, 601
Menthol Cough Drops, 217
Tooth Powder, 253
Mercury, Poison, 95
Salves, 487
Stains, to Remove, 186
Metacarbol Developer, 527
Metal and Paper Glue, 14
Browning by Oxidation, 583
Cements, 25
Cleaning, 199
Foil, 474
Glass and Porcelain Cement, 25
Inlaying, 249
Lipowitz, 65
Polishes, 595
Protectives, 624
Temperature of, 152
Type, 78
Varnishes, 725, 727
Waterproof Cements for, 21
Metallic Articles, Soldering of,
656
Cement, 163
Coffins, 71
Glazes on Enamels, 173
Luster on Pottery, 173
Stain, 783
Paper, 507
Soaps, 648
Metals and Their Treatment, 469
Brightening and Deadening, by
Dipping, 469
Bronzing, 567
Cements for, 21, 24
Coloring, 471
Etching Powder for, 324
Fusion Point of, 473
How to Attach to Rubber, 22
How to Bronze, 136
Securing Wood to, 37
Solution for Cleaning, 200
to Silver-plate, 588
Metric System of Weights and
Measures, 759
Weights, 759
Meth, 468
Metheglin, 468
Method of Hardening Gypsum
and Rendering it Weather-
proof, 387
of Purifying Glue, 378
Methods of Preparing Rubber
Plasters, 562
Methyl Salicylate, to Distinguish
from Oil of Wintergreen, 771
Metol and Hydrochinon Devel-
oper, 525
Metol-bicarbonate Developer, 525
Metol Developer, 524, 525
Mice Poison, 613
Microphotographs, 550
Milk, 354, 474
Milk as a Substitute for Celluloid,
Bone, and Ivory, 148
Cucumber, 239
Extracts, 474
Powder for Cows, 732
Substitute, 475
to Preserve, 475, 606
Minargent, 64
Mineral Acids, Poison, 92
Oil, 484
Waters, 739
Minofor Metal, 64
Mint Cordial, 765
Julep, 114
Mirror Alloys, 72
Mirror-lettering, 457
Mirror Polishes, 593
Silvering, 476
Mirrors, 476
Frosted, 375
to Clean, 209
to Prevent Dimming of, 374
Miscellaneous Tin Alloys, 78
Mite Killer, 422
Mixed Birdseed, 120, 729
Mixers, Concrete, 693
Mixing Castor Oil with Mineral
Oils, 484
Mixture for Burns, 142
Mocking-bird Food, 120, 729
Mock Turtle Extract, 212
Modeling Wax, 755
Modification of Milk for Infants,
473
Moisture, 426
Molding Sand, 478
Molds, 152
of Plaster, 564
Moles, 479
Montpelier Cough Drops, 217
Mordant for Cement Surfaces,
479
for Gold Size, 479
Morphine Poison, 95
Mortar, Asbestos, 479
Mosaic Gold, 68, 140
Silver, 140, 588
Mosquitoes, Remedies, 425
Moss Removers, 209
Moth Exterminators, 425
Paper, 507
Moths and Caterpillars, 423
INDEX
799
Motors, Anti-freezing Solution
for, 363
Mottled Soap, 654
Mountants, 479, 544
Mounting Drawings, etc., 479
Prints on Glass, 480
Mousset's Alloy, 76
Moutarde aux Epices, 215
des Jesuittes, 214
Mouth Antiseptics, 99
Washes, 258
Wash-tablets, 259
Moving Objects, How to Photo-
graph Them, 548
Mucilage, 42
Commercial, 43
Creams, 238
of Acacia, 43
to Make Wood and Pasteboard
Adhere to Metals, 43
Mulberry Dye for Silk, 272
Muriatic Acid Poison, 92
Mushroom Poison, 96
Music Boxes, 480
Muslin, Painting on, 488
Mustache Fixing Fluid, 480
Mustard, 214
Cakes, 214
Paper, 480
Vinegar, 215
Myrrh Mouth Wash, 258
Tooth Paste, 257
N
Nadjy, 115
Nail-cleaning Washes, 227
Nail, Ingrowing, 481
Polishes, 226
Varnish, 227
Name Plates, Coating for, 501
Natural Glue for Cementing Por-
celain, Crystal Glass, etc., 15
Lemon Juice, 316
Water, 739
Nature, Source and Manufacture
of Pigments, 555
Neatsfoot Oil, 481
Needles, Anti-rust Paper for, 625
Negatives, How to Use Spoiled,
534
Nervine Ointment, 487
Nerve Paste, 481
Nets, 223
Neufchatel Cheese, 177
Neutral Tooth Powder, 255
New Celluloid, 155
Mordant for Aniline Colors, 273
Production of Indigo, 281
Nickel Alloys, 76
Bronze, 70
Nickel-plating, 573
with the Battery, 573
Nickel-testing, 481
Nickel, to Clean, 200
to Remove Rust from, 199
Nickeled Surface, 589
Nickeling by Oxidation, 587
Test for, 589
Niello, 683
Nitrate of Silver Poison, 95
Spots, 198
Nitric Acid Poison, 92
Stains to Remove, 185
Nitroglycerine, 329
Non-explosive Liquid Metal Pol-
ish, 595
Non-masticating Insects, 423
Non-Poisonous Textile and Egg
Dyes for Household Use, 275
Fly-papers, 347
Non-porous Corks, 224
Norfolk Cheese, 177
Normona, 115
Nose Putty, 230
Notes for Potters, Glass-, and
Brick-makers, 164
Noyeau Powder, 628
Nut Candy Sticks, 216
Nutmeg Essence, 316
Nutwood Stain, 783
Nux Vomica Poison, 615
Oak, 775, 783
Graining, 494
Leather, Stains for, 455
Stain, 783
Wood Polish, 598
Odorless Disinfectants, 264
Odonter, 259
(Enanthic Ether as a Flavoring
for Ginger Ale, 108
Oil, Carron, 242
Castor, 153
Clock, 482
Oilcloth, 459
Adhesives, 36
Oil Extinguisher, 341
for Firearms, 460
Grease-, Paint-spot Eradica-
tors, 205
How to Pour Out, 153
Lubricating, 460
Neatsfoot, 481
of Cinnamon as an Antiseptic,
100
of Vitriol Poison, 92
Paintings, Lacquer for, 440
Protection for, 488
Prints, Reproduced, 223
Removers, 205
Solidified, 461
Stains for Hard Floors, 344
Suitable for Use with Gold, 485
Oils, 482
(Edible), Tests for, 355
for Harness, 451
Purification of, 335
Oilskins, 750
Oily Bottles, to Clean, 210
Ointments, 486
for Veterinary Purposes, 731
Oleaginous Stamping Colors, 679
Olein Soap, 654
Oleomargarine, 142
Old-fashioned Ginger Beer, 107
Lemonade, 110
Olive-oil Paste, 143
Onyx Cements, 16
Opium and All Its Compounds,
Poison, 95
Optical Lenses, Cleaning, 208
Orangeade, 110
Orange Bitters and Cordial, 762,
764
Drops, 216
Dye, 271
Extract, 316
Flower Water, 520
Frappe, 110
Peel, Soluble Extract, 316
Phosphate, 112
Ordinary Drab Dye, 281
Green Glass for Dispensing
Bottles, 373
Negative Varnish, 544
Oreide (French Gold), 68
Orgeat Punch, 110
Ornamental Designs on Silver,
641
Ornaments of Iron, Blackening,
495
Orris and Rose Mouth Wash, 258
Ortol Developer, 527
Ox-gall Soap for Cleansing Silk,
654
Oxide, Magnetic, 625
of Chrome, 172
of Tin, 172
of Zinc Poison, 97
Oxidized Steel, 584
Oxidizing, 139
Processes, 581
Ozonatine, 44
Package Pop, 107
Wax, 755
Packing for Gasoline Pumps, 488
for Stuffing Boxes, 488
Packings, 488
Pads of Paper, 488, 502
Pain-subduing Ointment, 487
Paint, Acid-resisting, 10
Brushes, 490
at Rest, 141
Cleaning, 140
Deadening, 491
Dryers, 492
for Bathtubs, 501
for Blackboards, 489
for Copper, 495
for Iron, 496
for Protecting Cement Against
Acid, 9
Grease, 229
Peeling of, 501
Removed from Clothes, 192
Removers, 187
to Prevent Crawling of, 490
Varnish, and Enamel Remov-
ers, 187
Painters' Putty, 607
Painting on Leather, 455
on Marble, 488
on Muslin, 488
Ornaments or Letters on Cloth
and Paper, 488
Over Fresh Cement, 499
Processes, 488
Paintings, 488
to Clean, 195
Paints, 489
Dry Base for, 489
for Gold and Gilding, 492
for Metal Surfaces, 495
for Roofs and Roof Paper, 497
for Walls of Cement, Plaster,
Hard Finish, etc., 498
for Wood, 500
Stains, etc., for Ships, 498
Waterproof and Weatherproof,
499
Pale Purple Gold, 383
Pale-yellow Soap, 652
Palladium Alloys, 73
Bearing Metal, 73
Gold, 69
Silver Alloy, 73
Palladiumizing, 583
Palms, their Care, 502
Panama Hat, How to Clean, 187
Paper, 502
and Metal Glue, 14
(Anti-rust) for Needles, 625
as Protection for Iron, 625
Blotting, 503
Box Glue, 15
Celloidin, 504
Cements, 21
Disinfectant, 263
Fireproof, 344
Floor Covering, 506
Frosted, 374
Paperhangers' Pastes, 39
Paper Hygrometers, 402
Making, Blue Print, 536
on Glass, to Affix, 19
Pads, 502
800
INDEX
Paper Pads, Glue for, 12
Photographic, 527
-sensitizing Processes, 536
Tickets Fastening to Glass, 19
Varnishes, 725
Waterproofing, 505, 751
Papers, Igniting, 611
Papier-mache, 502
Paraffine, 507
Scented Cakes, 508
Paraffining of Floors, 345
Parchment and Paper, 502
Cement, 21
Paste, 37
Paris Green, 561
Red, 600
Salts, 264
Parisian Cement, 30
Parmesan Cheese, 177
Parquet Floors, Renovating, 345
Polishes, 591
Passe-partout Framing, 508
Paste, Agar-agar, 37
Albumen, 37
Antiseptic, 99
Balkan, 38
Pasteboard Cement, 21
Deodorizers, 399
Paste, Elastic or Pliable, 39
for Affixing Cloth to Metal, 37-
for Cleaning Glass, 208
for Fastening Leather to
Desk Tops, etc., 36
for Making Paper Boxes, 15
for Paper, 37
for Parchment Paper, 37
for Removing Old Paint or
Varnish Coats, 188
for Tissue Paper, 37
for Wall Paper, 39
Flour, 39
Ink to Write with Water, 416
Permanent, 38
that will not Mold, 37
Venetian, 39
Pastes, 35
for Paperhangers, 39
for Polishing Metals, 595
for Silvering, 588
to Affix Labels to Tin, 39
Pastilles, Fumigating, 367
Pasting Celluloid on Wood, 36
Paper Signs on Metal 36
Wood and Cardboard on
Metal, 37
Pattern Letters and Figures, Al-
loys for, 80
Paving Brick, Stain for, 166
Patent Leather, 451
Leather Dressings, 449
Polish, 633
Preserver, 453
Stains for, 452
Patina of Art Bronzes, 584
Oxidizing Processes, 584
Patinas, 584
Peach Extract, 317
Tint Rouge, 231
Pearls, to Clean, 208
Peeling of Paints, 501
Pegamoid, 509
Pencils, Antiseptic, 99
for Marking Glass, 374
Pen Metal, 74
Pens, Gold, 383
Peppermint as a Flavor, 252
Pepsin Phosohate, 112
Percentage Solution, 509, 704
Perfumed Ammonia Water, 91
Fumigating Pastilles, 367
Pastilles, 520
Perfumes, 366, 509
Cploring, 511
Directions for Making, 512
Fumigating, 366
for Hair Oils, 520
for Soap, 648
Permanent Patina for Copper,
585
Paste, 38
Perpetual Ink, 404
Perspiration Remedy, 233
Perspiring Hands, 233
Petrolatum Cold Cream, 226
Petroleum, 521
Briquettes, 522
Emulsion, 423
for Spinning, 522
Hair Washes, 390
Jellies and Solidified Lubri-
cants, 461
Soap, 648
Pewter, 75
Aging, 522
to Clean, 205
Phosphate Dental Cement, 163
of Casein and its Production
149
Phosphor Bronze, 58
Phosphorescent Mass, 523
Photographers' Ointment, 487
Photographs, 554
Phosphorus Poison, 96, 614
Substitute, 523
Photographic Developing Papers,
Mountants, 41
Photographing on Silk, 540
Photographs Enlarged, 542
on Brooches, 551
Transparent, 545
Photography, 523
without Light, 154
Piano Polishes, 598
Piccalilli Sauce, 213
Pickle for Brass, 132
for Bronze, 138
for Copper, 221
for Dipping Brass, 132
Pickling Brass like Gold, 132
Iron Scrap before Enameling,
305
of German-silver Articles, 582
Process, 453
Spice, 214
Picric Acid Stains, 186
Picture Copying, 222
Postal Cards, 537
Transferrer, 251
Pictures, Glow, 522
Pigment Paper, 540
Pigments, 555
Pile Ointments, 561
Pinaud Eau de Quinine, 392
Pinchbeck Gold, 69
Pineapple Essence, 317
Lemonade, 110
Pine Syrup, 320
Pine-tar Dandruff Shampoo, 389
Ping-pong Frappe, 110
Pinion Alloy, 737
Pink Carbolized Sanitary Powder,
263
Color on Silver, 642
Dye for Cotton, 271
for Wool, 271
Pinkeye, 731
Pink Grease Paint, 229
Purple Gold, 383
Salve, 487
Soap, 652
Pins of Watches, 738
Pin Wheels, 609
Pipe-joint Cement, 162
Pipe Leaks, 446
to Color a Meerschaum, 469
Pipes, Rust-preventive for, 625
Pistachio Essence, 317
Plain Rubber Cement, 34
Plant Fertilizers, 336
Preservatives, 345
Plants, 561
Plaster, 561
Articles, Repairing of, 27
Cast of Coins, 150
Casts, Preservation of, 565
for Foundry Models, 564
from Spent Gas Lime, 564
Grease, 463
Irritating, 486
Model Lubricant, 463
Mold, 152, 564
Objects, Cleaning of, 564
of Paris, Hardening, 32, 150,
564
Repairing, 27
Plastic Alloys, 64
and Elastic Composition, 158
Metal Composition, 65
Modeling Clay, 184
Substances of Nitro-cellulose
Base, 156
Polishing Paste, 600
Platina, Birmingham, 55
Plate Glass, Removing Putty,
206
Pewter, 75
Plates, Care of Photographic, 523
for Engraving, 71
Platine for Dress Buttons, 80
Plating, 565
Gilding and Electrotyping, 288
of Aluminum, 572
Platinizing, 586
Aluminum, 586
Copper and Brass, 586
Metals, 586
on Glass or Porcelain, 586
Platinotype Paper, 530
Platinum Alloys, 73
-gold Alloys for Dental Pur-
poses, 74
Papers and Their Develop-
ment, 529
Silver, 74
Solders, 665
Waste, to Separate Silver from,
641
Platt's Chlorides, 264
Playing Cards, to Clean, 209
Plumbago, 460
Plumbers' Cement, 161
Plumes, 335
Plush, 590
to Remove Grease Spots from,
193
Poison Ivy, 96
Poisonous Fly-papers, 347
Mushrooms, 96
Poisons, Antidotes for, 92
Polish for Beechwood Furniture,
593
for Bronze Articles, 591
for Copper Articles, 591
for Fine Steel, 597
for Gilt Frames, 600
for Varnished Work, 195
Polishes, 590
Bone, 395
for Aluminum, 590
for Bars, Counters, etc., 590
for Brass, Bronze, Copper, etc.,
590
for Floors, 591
for Furniture, 592
for Glass, 593
for Ivory, Bone, etc., 593
for Pianos, 596
for Silverware, 596
INDEX
801
Polishes, for Steel and Iron, 597
for the Laundry, 444
for Wood, 598
or Glazes for Laundry Work,
444
Polishing Agent, 599
Bricks, 600
Cloths, to Prepare, 599
Cream, 600
Mediums, 600
Pastes, 595
for the Nails, 227
Powders, 594
Soaps, 594
Polychroming of Figures, 501
Pomade, Putz, 203
Pomades, 277, 392
Colors for, 228
for the Lips, 226
Pomegranate Essence, 317
Poppy Oil, 484
-seed Oil, Bleaching of, 459
Porcelain, 601
How to Tell Pottery, 173
Letters, Cement for, 19
Production of Luster Colors,
172
Portland Cement, 162
Size Over, 30
Positive Colors, 556
Postal Cards, How to Make, 537
How to Make Sensitized, 539
Potassium Amalgams, Applica-
tions of, 86
Silicate as a Cement, 19
Potato Starch, 680
Pottery, 173
and Porcelain, How to Tell, 173
Bodies and Glazes, 167
Metallic Luster on, 173
to Cut, 164
Poultry Applications, 419
Foods and Poultry Diseases
and Their Remedies, 733
Lice Destroyer, 419
Wine, 771
Pounce, 189
Powdered Camphor in Perma-
nent Form, 144
Cork as a Preservative, 606
Nail Polishes, 226
Powder, Blasting, 330
Face, 243
for Cleaning Gloves, 195
for Colored Fires, 609
for Gilding Metals, 579
for Hardening Iron, 427
Roup, 734
to Keep Moths Away, 425
to Weld Wrought Iron at Pale-
red Heat with Wrought Iron,
761
Powders for Stamping, 679
for the Toilet, 242
Preservation and Use of Calcium
Carbide, 144
of Belts, 105
of Carpets, 399
of Drawings, 266
of Eggs, 284
of Fats, 335
of Fishing Nets, 223
of Fresh Lemon Juice, 456
of Fruit Juices, 310
of Gum Solution, 44
of Meats, 359
of Milk, 475
of Plaster Casts, 565
of Syrups, 701
of Wood, 776
of Yeast, 786
Preservative Fluid for Museums,
602
for Stuffed Animals, 602
Preservatives, 602
Preservatives, for Leather, 452
Prairie Oyster, 116
Preparation of Amalgams, 85
of Brick Colors, 165
of Carbolineum,147
of Catgut Sutures, 155
of Celluloid, 156
of Emulsions of Crude Petro-
leum, 521
of Enamels, 308
of French Bronze, 136
of Syrups, 702
of Uninflammable Celluloid,
157
Preparations of Copper Water,
221
Prepared Mustards of Commerce,
214
Preparing Bone for Fertilizer, 338
Preparing Emery for Lapping,
289
Preservative for Stone, 602
Preservatives for Paste, 38
for Shoe 89168, 633
for Zoological and Anatomical
Specimens, 602
Preserved Strawberries, 605
Preserving Antiques, 98
Eggs with Lime, 285
Meat, a German Method, 361
Pressure Table, 704
Preventing the Peeling of Coat-
ings for Iron, 427
the Putrefaction of Strong
Glues, 11
Varnish from Crawling, 717
Prevention of Boiler Scale, 122
of Electrolysis, 123
of Fermentation, 765
of Foaming and Partial Cara-
melization of Fruit Juices,
311
of Fogging, Dimming and
Clouding, 374
Prickly Heat, Applications for,
398
Priming Coat for Water Spots,
501
Iron, 495
Print Copying, 222
Printing Ink, Savages, 409
Inks, 408
Oilcloth and Leather in Gold,
379
on Celluloid, 161
on Photographs, 554
Printing-out Paper, How to Sensi-
tize, 539
Printing-roller Compositions, 617
Prints, their Preservation, 309
Process for Colored Glazes, 165
for Dyeing in Khaki Colors, 276
of Electroplating, 286
of Impregnating Fabrics with
Celluloid, 161
Production of Consistent Mineral
Oils, 484 \
of Lampblack, 441
of Luster Colors on Porcelain
and Glazed Pottery, 172
of Minargent, 64
of Rainbow Colors on Metals,
568
of Substances Resembling Cel-
luloid, 158
Properties of Amalgams, 85
of Concrete Blocks, Strength,
695
Protecting Boiler Plates from
Scale, 122
Cement Against Acid, 9
Stuffed Furniture from Moths,
425
Protection for Cement Work, 162
for Oil Paintings, 488
Protection of Acetylene Appara-
tus from Frost, 363
Protective Coating for Bright
Iron Articles, 496
Prussic Acid, 93
Pumice Stone, 606
Pumice-stone Soap, 648
Pumillo Toilet Vinegar, 244
Punch, Claret, 112
Puncture Cement, 162
Purification of Benzine, 106
Purifying-air, 44
Purifying Oils and Fats, 335
Rancid Castor Oil, 153
Water, 740
Purple and Violet Dyes, 269
Dye, 269
for Cotton, 270
for Silk, 270
Ink, 416
of Cassius, 383
Putty, 606
Acid-proof, 607
for Attaching Sign-letters to
Glass, 19
for Celluloid, 161
Nose, 230
Substitute for, 608
to Remove, 206
Putz Pomade, 203
Pyrocatechin Developer, 526
Pyrogallic Acid Stains, 185
Pyrotechnics, 608, 610
Quadruple Extract Perfumery,
518
Quince Extract, 317
Flip, 115
Quick Dryer for Inks Used on
Bookbinders' Cases, 410
Quick-drying Enamel Colors, 722
Quick-water, 66
Quilts, to Clean, 194
Rags for Cleaning, 194
Raspberryade Powder, 627
Raspberry Essences, 318
Lemonade, 110
Sour, 116
Syrup, 317, 318
Rat Poisons, 96, 613
Ratsbane Poison, 93
Ravigotte Mustard, 215
Razor Paper, 503
Pastes, 509, 615
Recipes for Cold-stirred Toilet
Soaps, 652
for Pottery and Brick Work,
167
for Soldering, 665
Recovering Glycerine from Soap
Boiler's Lye, 378
Recovery of Tin and Iron in
Tinned-plate Clippings. 707
Recutting Old Files, 339
Red Birds, Food for, 729
Coloring of Copper, 221
Crimson and Pink Dyes, 270
Dye for Wool, 271
Furniture Paste, 592
Gilding, 580
Gold Enamel, 67
Grease Paint, 229
Indelible Inks, 406
Ink, 416
Patina, 585
Russia Leather Varnish, 449
Reducer for Gelatin Dry-plate
Negatives, 535
INDEX
Reducers, 552
Reducing Photographs, 542
Refining Linseed Oil, 484
of Potato Starch, 680
Refinishing Gas Fixtures, 130
Reflector Metal, 72
Refrigerants, 615
Refrigeration, 616
Refrigerators, Home-made, 616
their Care, 401
Regilding Mat Articles, 580
Reinking Typewriter Ribbons,
413
Relief Etching of Copper, Steel,
and Brass, 323
Ground for, 322
of Zinc, 323
Relishes, 213
Remedies Against Human Para-
sites, 422
Mosquitoes, 425
for Dry Rot, 618
for Fetid Breath, 133
for Insect Bites, 417
Removable Binding, 141
Removal of Aniline-dye Staina
from the Skin, 184
of Corns, 224
of Dirt from Paraffine, 508
of Heat Stains from Polished
Wood, 776
of Iron from Drinking Water,
741
of Musty Taste and Smell from
Wine, 771
of Odors from Wooden Boxes,
Chests, Drawers, etc., 398
of Paint from Clothing, 192
of Peruvian-balsam Stains, 194
of Picric-acid Stains, 186
of Rust, 199
Removing Acid Stains, 184
and Preventing Match Marks,
195
Egg Stains, 201
Glaze from Emery Wheels, 289
Grease Spots from Plush, 193
Inground Dirt, 235
Ink Stains, 189
Iron Rust from Muslin, 193
Odor from Pasteboard, 399
Oil Spots from Leather, 206
Oil Stains from Marble, 197
Old Wall Paper, 400
Paint from Wood, 188
Silver Stains, 209
Spots from Furniture, 206
the Gum of Sticky Fly-paper,
348
Varnish, etc., 188
Window Frost, 376
Woody Odor, 399
Rendering Paraffine Transparent,
507
Renovating a Camera, 553
Old Parquet Floors, 345
Renovation of Polished Surfaces
of Wood, etc., 197
Repairing Broken Glass, 26
Hectographs, 396
Rubber Goods, 620
Replacing Rubies whose Settings
have Deteriorated, 736
Replating, 588
with Battery, 573
Reproduction of Plaster Origi-
nals, 565
Resilvering, 588
of Mirrors, 476
Restoring Photographs, 544
Tarnished Gold, 199
Restoration of Brass Articles, 132
of Old Prints, 309
Restoration of Spoiled Beer, 105
of the Color of Turquoises, 432
Retz Alloy, 64
Revolver Lubricants, 460
Rhubarb for Cholera, 180
Ribbon, Fumigating, 366
Ribbons for Typewriters, 711
Rice Paste, 38
Rifle Lubricants, 460
Ring, How to Solder, 666
Rings on Metal, Producing Col-
ored, 582
Riveting China, 179
Roach Exterminators, 425
Rock-candy Syrup, 702
Rockets, 609
Rockingham Glazes, 171
Rodinal Developer, 524
Roller Compositions for Printers,
617
Roman Candles, 609
Roof Paints, 497
Roofs, How to Lay, 397
Prevention of Leakage, 397
Room Deodorizer, 400
Rope Lubricants, 463
Ropes, 617
Waterproofing, 753
Roquefort Cheese, 177
Rose's Alloy, 64
Rose Cordial, 765
Cream, 115
Rose-Glycerine Soap, 652
Rosemary Water for the Hair,-389
Rose Mint, 115
Pink Dye, 278
Pomade, 227
Poudre de Riz Powder, 243
Powders, 230
Talc, 510
Rose-tint Glass, 371
Rosewood, 783
Stain, 783
Rosin, Shellac, and Wax Cement,
34
Soap as an Emulsifier, 289
Sticks, 260
Tests for, in Extracts, 356
Rottmanner's Beauty Water, 244
Rouge, 228, 229, 230
for Buff Wheels, 618
or Paris Red, 600
Palettes, 230
Powder, 600
Tablets, 230
Theater, 231
Roup Cures, 734
Royal Frappe, 114
Mist, 115
Rubber, 618
and Rubber Articles, 620
Wood Fastened, 22
Boots and Shoe Cement, 23
Cement for Cloth, 24
Cements, 22, 34
Gloves, Substitute for, 100
Testing, 622
Goods, Repairing, 620
Its Properties and Uses in
Waterproofing. 743
Scraps, Treatment of, 621
Softening, 621
Stamps, 622
Varnishes, 724
Ruby Settings, 737
Rules for Varnishing, 717
Rum, Bay, 104
Ruoltz Metal, 64
Russet Leather Dressing, 449
Russian Leather, 454
Polishing Lac, 411
Rust Paints, 497
Paper, 625
Rust, Prevention for Iron Pipes,
625
Preventive for Tools, etc., 625
Removers, 193, 198
Preventives, 623
Rusty Pieces, to Separate, 625
Saccharine in Food, 351
Sachet Powders, 509
Safety in Explosives, 330
Paper, 503
Paste for Matches, 467
Sage Cheese, 176
Salicyl, Sweet, 258
Salicylic Acid in Food, 349
Soap, 654
Saltpeter (Nitrate of Potash), 96
Salts, Effervescent, 626
Smelling, 628
Salve, 486
Sand, 628
Holes in Brass, 150
in Cast-brass Work, 150
Sand-lime Brick, 689
Sand Soap, 654
to Prevent Adhesion of Sand to
Castings, 150
Sandstone Cements, 17
Coating, 10
to Remove Oil Spots from, 198
Sapo Durus; 654
Saponaceous Tooth Pastes, 257
Sarsaparilla, 629
Beer, 118
Extract, 318
Soluble Extract, 318
Sauces, Table, 213
Sausage Color, 358
Savage's Printing Ink, 409
Savine Poison, 96
Sawdust for Jewelers, 737
in Bran, 126
Saxon Blue Dye, 268
Scald Head, Soap for, 653
Scale for Photographic Reduc-
tion, 542
in Boilers, 122
Insects, Extermination of, 423
on Orange Trees, 423
Pan Cleaner, 205
Scales and Tables, 547
Scalp Wash, 389
Scarlet Lake Dyes, 277
with Lac Dye, 271
Schiffmann's Asthma Powder, 101
Scissors Hardening, 685
Scotch Beer, 118
Scratch Brushing, 576
Screws, 629
Bluing, 682
in Watches, 738
Sealing (Burning) Trick, 611
Waxes, 755
Sea Sickness, 630
Seasonings, 213
Seed, Bird, 120
Seidlitz Salt, 628
Self-igniting Mantles, 465
Seltzer and Lemon, 110
Lemonade, 110
Water, 740
Separating Silver from Platinum
Waste, 641
Serpents, Pharaoh's, 630
Serviettes Magiques, 596
Setting of Tools, 708
the Paint-brush Bristles, 141
Sewing-machine Oil, 461
Sewing Thread, Dressing for, 706
Shades of Red, etc., on Matt Gold
Bijouterie, 431
Shading Pen, Ink for, 416
INDEX
803
Shampoo Lotions and Pastes, 392
Soap, 653
Sharpening Pastes, 509
Stones, 761
Shaving Paste, 630
Soaps, 649
Sheep, 734
Sheet Brass, 54
Sheet-dips, 264
Sheet Metal Alloy, 71
Lubricant, 463
Shellac, 716
Bleaching, 631
Shell Cameos, 630
Imitation of, 429
Polishes, 593
Shells, Lubricants for Redrawing,
463
Sherbet, Egg, 115
Shims in Engine Brasses, 631
"Shio Liao," 32
Ship Compositions and Paints,
498
Shoe Dressings, 631
Leather Dressing, 450
Shoes, Blacking for, 631
Waterproofing, 750
Show Bottles, 127
Show-case Signs, 457
Show Cases, 635
to Prevent Dimming of» 374
Siberian Flip, 115
Siccatives, 636
Sign Letters, 639
Sign-letter Cements, 18
Signs on Show Cases, 457
to Repair Enameled, 304
Silicate of Oxychloride Cements,
35
Silicon Bronze, 61
Silk, 639
Gilding, 580
Sensitizers for Photographic
Purposes, 540
Silver, 639
Alloys, 75
Amalgam, 88, 90
Bromide Paper, Toning Baths
for, 541
Bronze, 71
Silver-coin Cleaner, 200
Silver, Copper, Nickel, and Zinc
Alloys, 76
Etching Fluid for, 324
Fizz, 115
Foil Substitute, 474
Gray Dye for Straw, 269
Stain, 783
Imitation, 77
Ink, 416
Nitrate Spots, to Remove, 194
Test for Cottonseed Oil, 482
, Ornamental Designs on, 641
Silver-plating, 574, 587
Silver Polishing Balls, 599
Solder for Enameling, 434
for Plated Metal, 434
Solders, 663
for Soldering Iron, . Steel,
Cast Iron, and Copper, 663
Testing, 642
to Clean, 204
to Color Pink, 642
to Recover Gold from, 382
Silvering by Oxidation, 583
Bronze, 587
Copper, 587
Glass Balls, Amalgam for, 90
Globes, 641
Globes, 476
of Mirrors, 476
Powder for Metals, 642
Silver-plating, and Desilvering,
587
Test for, 642
Silverware Cleaner, 200
Polishes, 596
Wrapping Paper for, 506
Silver-zinc, 76
Similor, 68
Simple Coloring of Bronze Pow-
der, 134
Test for Red Lead and Orange
Lead, 446
Way to Clean a Clock, 207
Sinews, Treatment of, 11
Sinks, to Clean, 202
Size Over Portland Cement, 31
Sizing, 38
Walls for Kalsomine, 436
Skin Bleaches, Balms, etc., 234
Chapped, 232
Skin-cleaning Preparations, 184
Skin Cream, 239
Discoloration, 235
Foods, 231, 234
Lotion, 234
Ointments, 487
Troubles, 644
Slate, 643
Dye for Silk, 269
for Straw Hats, 269
Parchment, 506
Slides for Lanterns, 532
Slipcoat or Soft Cheese, 177
Slugs on Roses, 423
Smaragdine, 45
Smelling Salts, 510, 628
Smokeless Powder, 329
Van-colored Fire, 609
Smut, Treatment for, 384
Snake Bites, 96, 643
Soap, Benzoin, 652
Soap-bubble Liquids, 655
Soap, Coloring, 644
for Surgical Instruments, 653
for Garment Cleaning, 645
Perfumes, 520
Polishes, 594
Powder, Borax, 649, 650
Substitutes, 653
Tooth, 257
Soaps, 644
and Pastes for Gloves, 195
for Clothing and Fabrics, 191
Soda, Coffee Cream, 113
Water, 111
Soda-water Fountain Drinks, 110
Sodium Amalgams, Applications
of, 86
Salts, Effervescent, 627
Silicate as a Cement, 19
Soft Enamels for Iron, White, 305
German-silver Solder, 661
Glaze Brick, 1.65
Gold Solder, 434
Metal Castings, 151
Silver Solders, 664
Soldering Paste, 667
Solder, 664
Toilet Soaps, 652
Softening Celluloid, 160
Rubber, 621
Steel, 687
Solder, Copper, 659
for Articles which will not Bear
a High Temperature, 666
for Brass Tubes, 659
for Fastening Brass to Tin, 659
for Gold, 434
for Iron, 665
for Silver Chains, 664
for Silver-plated Work, 664
for Silversmiths, 664
from Gold, to Remove, 383
Soldering, Acids, 656
a Ring Containing a Jewel, 436,
666
Block, 667
Soldering, Concealed, 665
of Metallic Articles, 656
of Metals, 655
Fluxes for, 660
Paste, 667
Powder for Steel, 665
Recipes, 665
Solution for Steel, 665
without Heat, 666
Solders, 655
for Glass, 662
for Gold, 434
for Jewelers, 436
for Silver, 434
Solid Alcohol, 45
Cleansing Compound, 209
Linseed Oil, 483
Solidified Lubricants, 462
Soluble Blue, 443
Essence of Ginger, 314
Extract of Ginger Ale, 108
Glass, Bronzing with, 139
Gun Cotton, 332
Solution for Removing Nitrate of
Silver Spots, 194
Solutions for Batteries, 104
for Cleaning Metals; 200
Percentage, 704
Solvent for Iron Rust, 201
Solvents for Celluloid, 160
Sorel's Dental Cement, 163
Soup Herb Extract, 212
Sources of Potable Alcohol, 668
Sozodont, 256
Sparkling Wines, 767
Sparks from the Finger Tips, 611
Spatter Work, 457
Spavin Cures, 730
Spearmint Cordial, 765
Special Glazes for Bricks, 167
Specific Gravity Test, 382
Speculum Metal, 73
Spice for Fruit Compote, 605
Pickling, 214
Spices, Adulterated, 358
for Flavoring, 213
Spirit, 667, 678
Stains for Wood, 784
Spirits of Salts Poison, 92
Sponge Trick, Blazing, 611
Window Display, 679
Sponges, 678
as Filters, 339
Sterilization of, 679
to Clean, 210
Spot and Stain Removers, 185
Gilding, 580
Spots on Photographic Plates, 554
Sprain Washes, 730
Spray Solution, 103
Spring Cleaning, 207
Hardening, 685
Springs of Watches, 737
t9 Clean, 207
Sprinkling Powders for Flies, 421
Spruce Beer, 118, 119
Squibb's Diarrhcea Mixture, 179
Squill Poisons, 613
Stage Decorations, Fireproofing,
342
Stain, Brick, 133
for Blue Paving Bricks, 166
Stain-removing Soaps, 653
Stained Ceilings, 400
Staining Horns, 397
Stains, 781
for Lacquers, 438
for Oak Leather, 455
for Patent Leather, 452
for Wood, 781
Attacked by Alkalies or
Acids, 785
Stamping, 679
Colors for Use with Rubber
Stamps, 679
804
INDEX
Stamping Liquids and Powders,
679
Powder for Embroideries, 680
Starch, 445, 680
in Jelly, Tests for, 357
Luster, 399
Paste, 35
Powder, 681
Starch-producing Plants, 668
Statuary Bronze, 57
Statue Cleaning, 197
Statuettes, Cleaning of, 564
of Lipowitz Metal, 64
Steam Cylinder Lubricant, 463
Steel, 681
Alloys, 77
for Drawing Colors on, 80
for Locomotive Cylinders, 77
and Iron Polishes, 597
Blue and Old Silver on Brass,
130
Bluing, 682
Bronze, 61
Browning of, 682
Cleaner, 199
Coloring, 682
Distinguishing Iron from, 427
Dust as a Polishing Agent, 600
Etching, 323
on, 687
Fragments, 687
Steel-hardening Powder, 427
Steel, Oxidized, 584
Paint for, 497
Plating, 575
Polishes, 597
Soldering, 665
Testing, 687
to Clean, 199
Tools, to Put an Edge on, 686
Wire Hardening, 684
Stencil Inks, 411
Marking Ink that will Wash
Out, 399
Stencils for Plotting Letters of
Sign Plates, 296
Stereochromy, 688
Stereopticon Slides, 532
Stereotype Metal, 77
Sterilization of Sponges, 679
of Water with Lime Chloride,
741
Sterling Silver, 434
Stick Pomade, 228
Sticky Fly-papers, 347
Fly Preparations, 421
Stilton Cheese, 177
Stone, Artificial, 688
Cements, 16
Cleaning, 196
Preservative for, 602
Stones for Sharpening, 708, 761
(Preeious), Imitation of, 370
Stoneware, 167
and Glass Cements, 26
Waterproof Cements for, 21
Stopper Lubricants, 462, 700
Store Windows, to Clean, 209
Stove, Blacking, 700
Cement, 162
Cleaners, 202
Lacquer, 441
Polish, 597, 700
Varnishes, 727
Stramonium, Antidote for, 102
Strap Lubricant, 460
Strawberries, Preserved, 605
Strawberry Essence, 318
Juice, 318
Pomade, 227
Straw, Bleaching, 120
Fireproofing, 343
Straw-hat Cleaners, 187
Dyes, 394
Strengthened Filter Paper, 503
Stripping Gilt Articles, 205
Photograph Films, 553
Strong Adhesive Paste, 37, 39
Cement, 32
Twine, 223
Strontium Amalgams, 86
Stropping Pastes, 615
Strychnine or Nux Vomica, 96
Poisons, 614
Stuffed Animals, Preserved, 602
Styptic Paste of Gutta Percha,
701
Styptics, 701
Substances Used for Denaturing
Alcohol, 678
Substitute for Benzine, 106
for Camphor in the Preparation
of Celluloid arid Applicable
to Other Purposes, 157
for Cement on Grinder Disks,
31
for Cork, 224
for Fire Grenades, 341
for Gum Arabic, 386
for Putty, 608
for Rubber Gloves, 100
for Soldering Fluid, 659
Substitutes for Coffee, 210
for German Silver, 70
for Wood, 785
Suffolk Cheese, 177
Sugar-producing Plants, 668
Sulphate of Zinc Poison, 97
Stains, to Remove, 186
Sulphuric Acid Poison, 92
Summer Drink, 118
Taffy, 217
Sun Bronze, 61
Cholera Mixture, 179
Sunburn Remedies, 240, 241
Sunflower-glycerine Soap, 653
Superfatted Liquid Lanolin-glyc-
erine Soap, 647
Sutures of Catgut, 155
Swiss Cheese, 177
Sympathetic Inks, 412
Syndeticon, 32
Syrup of Bromoform, 134
(Raspberry), 317
Table, 704
Syrups, 321, 701
Szegedin Soap, 653
Table of Drops, 704
Sauces, 213
Showing Displacement on
Ground Glass of Objects in
Motion, 548
Top, Acid-proof, 9
Tables, 703
and Scales, 547
for Photographers, 547
Tablet Enameling, 293
Tablets, Chocolate Coated, 179
for Mouth Wash, 259
Glue for, 13
Taffy, 217
Tailor's Chalk, 164
Talc Powder, 243
Talcum Powder, 243
Tallow, 334
Talmi Gold, 69
Tamping of Concrete Blocks, 695
Tan and Freckle Lotion, 241
and Russet Shoe Polishes, 633
Tank, 705
Tanned Leather, Dye for, 447
Tanning, 453
Hides, 454
Taps, to Remove Broken, 705
Tar Paints, 780
Tarragon Mustard, 215
Tar Syrup, 320
Tasteless Castor Oil, 153
Tattoo Marks, Removal of, 705
Tawing, 448
Tea Extract, 319
Hot, 113
Tea-rose Talc Powder, 243
Teeth, to Whiten Discolored, 705
Telescope Metal, 71
Temperature for Brushes, 140
of Metal, 152
of Water for Plants, 561
Tempered Copper, 221
Tempering Brass, 132
Steel, 683
Terra Cotta Cleaning, 197
Substitute, 705
Test for Glue, 10
Testing Nickel, 481
Rubber Gloves, 622
Siccatives, 637
Silver, 642
Steel, 687
Tests for Absolute Alcohol, 45
for Aniline in Pigments, 560
for Cotton, 245
for Lubricants, 463
for Yeast, 786
Textile Cleaning, 191
Theater Rouge, 231
The Burning Banana, 611
Gum-bichromate Photoprint-
ing Process, 546
Preservation of Books, 124
Prevention of the Inflamma-
bility of Benzine, 106
Therapeutic Grouping of Medic-
inal Plasters, 561
Thermometers, 706
Thread, 706
Three-color Process, 548
Throat Lozenges, 218
Thymol, 100
Ticks, Cattle Dip for, 419
Tiers-Argent Alloy, 75
Tilemakers' Notes, 164
Tin, 49, 706
Alloys, 77
Amalgams, Applications of, 87
Ash, 172
Bismuth, and Magnesium, 49
Bronzing, 567
Chloride of Tin, Poison, 97
Tinctures for Perfumes, 513
Tin, Etching Fluid for, 324
Tinfoil, 707
Tin Foils for Capsules, 474
for Wrapping Cheese, 474
Tin in Powder Form, 707
Tin-lead, 77
Alloys, 78
Tinned Surface, 589
Tinning, 584
by Oxidation, 584
Tin Plating by Electric Bath,
575
of Lead, 589
Tinseled Letters, or Chinese
Painting on Glass, 458
Tin Silver-Plating, 589
Solders, 665
Statuettes, Buttons, etc., 78
Varnishes, 727
Tipping Gold Pens, 383
Tire, 708
Cements, 23
Tissier's Metal, 64
Tissue Paper, Paste for, 37
To Ascertain whether an Article
is Nickeled, Tinned, or Sil-
vered, 589
Attach Glass Labels to Bottles,
41
Gold Leaf Permanently, 474
INDEX
805
Tobin Bronze, 61
To Blacken Aluminum, 81
Bleach Glue, 378
Tobacco Poison, 97
To Bronze Copper, 136
Burnish Gilt Work, 384
Caseharden Locally, 684
Cast Yellow Brass, 54
Cement Glass to Iron, 17
Clarify Liqueurs, 770
Solutions of Gelatin, Glues,
etc., 370
Turbid Orange Flower Water,
512
Clean a Gas Stove, 202
Aluminum, 204
Articles of Nickel, 201
Brushes of Dry Paint, 188
Colored Leather, 186
Dull Gold, 204
Files, 205
Fire-gilt Articles, 185
Furs, 368
Gilt Frames, etc., 185
Gilt Objects, 203
Gold and Silver Lace, 193
Gummed Parts of Machin-
ery, 203
Gummed-up Springs, 207
Jet Jewelry, 431
Lacquered Goods, 195
Linoleum, 206
Milk Glass, 209
Mirrors, 209
Oily Bottles, 210
Old Medals, 199
Painted Walls, 190
Paintings, 195
Petroleum Lamp Burners,
200
Playing Cards, 209
Polished Paits of Machines,
201
Quilts, 194
Silver Ornaments, 201
Skins Used for Polishing
Purposes, 186
Soldered Watch Cases, 207
Sponges, 210
Store Windows, 209
Tarnished Zinc, 205
the Tops of Clocks in Re-
pairing, 20
Very Soiled Hands, 185
Watch Chains, 206
Wool, 273
Zinc Articles, 203
Coat Brass Articles with Anti-
mony Colors, 581
Color a Meerschaum Pipe, 469
Billiard Balls Red, 428
Bronze, 138
Butter, 359
Cheese, 359
Gold, 383
Iron Blue, 427
Ivory, 428
Conceal Soldering, 665
Copper Aluminum, 581
Copy Old Letters, etc., 223
Cut Castile Soap, 644
Glass, 371
To Cut Glass under Water, 372
Pottery, 164
Toddy, Hot Soda, 112
To Detect Artificial Vanillin in
Vanilla Extracts, 713
the Presence of Aniline in a
Pigment, 560
Tonka in Vanilla Extract,
714
Determine the Covering Power
of Pigments, 560
Dissolve Copper from Gold
Articles, 382
To Distinguish Cotton from
Linen, 246
Genuine Diamonds, 260
Glue and Other Adhesives,
378
Iron from Steel, 427
Steel from Iron, 687
Do Away with Wiping Dishes,
399 '
Drain a Refrigerator, 616
Drill Optical Glass, 372
Dye Copper Parts Violet and
Orange, 221
Cotton Dark Brown, 280
Feathers, 282
Felt Goods, 281
Silk a Delicate Greenish Yel-
low, 280
Silk Peacock Blue, 281
Stiffen, and Bleach Felt
Hats, 273
Woolen Yarns, etc., Various
Shades of Magenta, 280
Woolens with Blue de Lyons,
280
Eat Burning Coals, 612
Estimate Contents of a Circu-
lar Tank, 705
Extract Oil Spots from Fin-
ished Goods, 273
Shellac from Fur Hats, 394
Fasten Brass upon Glass, 17
Paper Tickets to Glass, 19
Rubber to Wood, 22
Fill Engraved Letters on Metal
Signs, 457
Find the Number of Carats,
432
Fire Paper, etc., by Breathing
on it, 611
Fix Alcoholic Lacquers on
Metallic Surfaces, 440
Dyes, 274
Gold Letters, etc., upon
Glass, 18
Paper upon Polished Metal,
37
Iron in Stone, 162
Fuse Gold Dust, 384
Give a Brown Color to Brass,
130
a Green Color to Gold Jew-
elry, 582
Brass a Golden Color, 577
Dark Inks a Bronze or
Changeable Hue, 409
Grind Glass, 372
Harden a Hammer, 684
Hard-solder Parts Formerly
Soldered with Tin Solder, 663
Impart the Aroma and Taste
of Natural Butter to Mar-
garine, 143
Improve Deadened Brass Parts
132
Increase the Toughness, Dens-
ity, and Tenacity of Alumi-
num, 83
Toilet Creams, 235
Milks, 239
Powders, 242
Soap Powder, 652
Toilet Soaps, 650
Vinegars, 244
Waters, 244, 519
To Keep Files Clean, 339
Flaxseed Free from Bugs, 424
Flies from Fresh Paint, 501
Ice in Small Quantities, 402
India Ink Liquid, 407
Liquid Paint in Workable
Condition, 501
Keep Machinery Bright, 624
Tolidol Developer, 52
To Loosen a Glass Stopper, 700
a Rusty Screw in a Watch
Movement, 738
Tomato Bouillon Extract, 212
Tombac Volor on Brass, 130
To Make a Belt Pull, 106
a Clock Strike Correctly, 738
a Transparent Cement for
Glass, 29
Cider, 180
Corks Impermeable and
Acid-proof, 10
Fat Oil Gold Size, 382
Holes in Thin Glass, 372
Loose Nails in Walls Rigid,
399
or Enlarge a Dial Hole, 737
Pluah Adhere to Metal, 590
Matt Gilt Articles, 432
Mend Grindstones, 386
Wedgwood Mortars, 29
Toning Baths, 540
for Silver Bromide Paper,
541
Black Inks, 409
Tonka Extract, 319
Its Detection in Vanilla Ex-
tracts, 714
Tool Lubricant, 461
Setting, 708
Tools, Rust Prevention, 625
Toothache, 709
Tooth Cements, 163
Paste to be put in Collapsible
Tubes, 257
Pastes, Powders, and Washes,
251
Powder for Children, 255
Powders and Pastes, 253
Soaps and Pastes, 257
Straightening, 737
To Overcome Odors in Freshly
Prepared Rooms, 400
Paint Wrought Iron with
Graphite, 496
Paste Paper on Smooth Iron, 37
Pickle Black Iron-plate Scrap
Before Enameling, 305
Polish Delicate Objects, 599
Paintings on Wood, 600
Prepare Polishing Cloths, 599
Preserve Beef, 360
Furs, 368
Milk, 606
Steel from Rust, 199
Prevent Crawling of Paints,
490
Dimming of Eyeglasses, etc.,
376
Glue from Cracking, 10
Screws from Rusting and
Becoming Fast, 629
Smoke from Flashlight, 552
the Adhesion of Modeling
Sand to Castings, 150
the Trickling of Burning
Candles, 145
Wooden Vessels from Leak-
ing, 446
Produce Fine Leaves of Metal,
473
Protect Papered Walls from
Vermin, 401
Zinc Roofing from Rust, 626
Purify Bismuth, 380
Put an Edge .on Steel Tools,
686
Quickly Remove a Ring from a
Swollen Finger, 431
Reblack Clock Hands, 738
Recognize Whether an Article
is Gilt, 383
Recover Gold-leaf Waste, 381
Reduce Engravings, 310
806
INDEX
To Reduce Photographs, 548
Refine Board Sweepings, 432
Remedy Worn Pinions from
Watches, 738
Remove a Name from a Dial,
207
Aniline Stains, 185
from Ceilings, etc., 190
Balsam Stains, 194
Black Letters from White
Enameled Signs, 639
Burnt Oil from Hardened
Steel, 686
Enamel and Tin Solder, 188
Fragments of Steel from
Other Metals, 687
Finger Marks from Books,
etc., 186
Glue from Glass, 208
Gold from Silver, 382
Grease Spots from Marble,
197
Hard Grease, Paint, etc.,
from Machinery, 200
Ink Stains on Silver, 201
Nitric-acid Stains, 185
Oil-paint Spots from Glass,
209-
Oil-paint Spots from Sand-
stones, 198
Old Enamel, 189
Old Oil, Paint, or Varnish
Coats, 187
Paint, Varnish, etc., from
Wood, 188
Putty, Grease, etc., from
Plate Glass, 206
Pyro Stains from the Fin-
gers, 555
Red (Aniline) Ink, 190
Rust from Instruments, 199
Rust from Iron Utensils, 198
Rust from Nickel, 199, 203
Silver Plating, 203
Silver Stains from White
Fabrics, 193
Soft Solder from Gold, 383
Spots from Drawings, 206
Spots from Tracing Cloth,
192
Stains from the Hands, 184
Stains of Sulphate, 186
Strains in Metal by Heating,
686
Varnish from Metal, 188
Vegetable Growth from
Buildings, 209
Water Stains from Varnished
Furniture, 188
Vaseline Stains from Cloth-
ing, 192
Render Aniline Colors Soluble
in Water, 274
Fine Cracks in Tools Visible,
686
Gum Arabic More Adhesive,
43
Negatives Permanent, 553
Pale Gold Darker, 383
Shrunken Wooden Casks
Watertight, 149
Window Panes Opaque, 375
Renew Old Silks, 274
Renovate and Brighten Russet
and Yellow Shoes, 633
Brick Walls, 190
Old Oil Paintings, 488
Straw Hats, 187
Repair a Dial, etc., with
Enamel Applied Cold, 737
a Repeating Clock-bell, 737
Enameled Signs, 304
Meerschaum Pipes, 469
Restore Brushes, 141
Patent Leather Dash, 452
To Restore Reddened Carbolic
Acid, 147
the Color of a Gold or Gilt
Dial, 207
Burnt Steel, 686
Tortoise-shell Polishes, 593
To Scale Cast Iron, 204
Scent Advertising Matter, 510
Separate Rusty Pieces, 625
Silver Brass, Bronze, Copper,
587
Glass Balls and Plate Glass,
587
Silver-plate Metals, 588
Soften Glaziers' Putty, 607
Horn, 397
Iron Castings, 427
Old Whitewash, 762
Solder a Piece of Hardened
Steel, 665
Stop Leakage in Iron Hot-
Water Pipes, 446
Sweeten Rancid Butter, 143
Take Boiling Lead in the
Mouth, 612
Tell Genuine Meerschaum, 469
• Temper Small Coil Springs and
Tools, 683
Test Extract of Licorice, 458
Fruit Juices and Syrucs for
Aniline Colors, 321
Fruit Juices for Salicylic
Acid, 321
the Color to See if it is Pre-
cipitating, 277 ,
Tighten a Ruby Pin, 738
Toughen China, 173
Transfer Designs, 710
Engravings, 710
Turn Blueprints Brown, 542
Utilize Drill Chips, 686
Touchstone, Aquafortis for the,
383
Toughening Leather, 455
To Weaken a Balance Spring, 733
Whiten Flannels, 446
Iron, 427
Widen a Jewel Hole, 431
Tracing-cloth Cleaners, 194
Tracing Cloth, Removing Spots
from, 192
Tracing, How to Clean, 194
Paper, 503
Tragacanth, Mucilage of, 42
Transfer Processes, 710
Transparencies, 709
Transparent Candles, 145
Brick Glaze, 167
Ground Glass, 373
Photographs, 545
Soaps, 652
Trays, Varnish for, 727
Treacle Beer, 119
Treatment and Utilization of
Rubber Scraps, 621
of Bunions, 224
of Carbolic-acid Burns, 147
of Cast-iron Grave Crosses, 202
of Corns, 225
of Damp Walls, 400
of Fresh Plaster, 564
of Newly Laid Linoleum, 459
of the Grindstone, 386
Tricks with Fire, 608
Triple Extract Perfumery, 513
Pewter, 75
Tubs: to Render Shrunken Tubs
Water-tight, 149
Turmeric in Food, 352
Turpentine Stains, 784
Turquoises, Restoration of the
Color of, 432
Turtle (Mock) Extract, 212
Twine, 711
Strong, 223
Two-solution Ink Remover, 189
Type Metal, 78
Typewriter Ribbon Inks, 413
Ribbons, 711
Udder Inflammation, 731
Unclassified Alloys, 80
Dyers' Recipes, 273
Unclean Lenses, 456
Uninflammable Celluloid, 157
United States Weights and Meas-
ures, 758
Uniting Glass with Horn, 17
Rubber and Leather, 22
Universal Cement, 31
Cleaner, 209
Urine, Detection of Albumen, 44
Utensils, Capacities of, 703
to Remove Rust, 198
Utilization of Waste Material or
By-products, 673
Valves, 711
Vanilla, 713
Extract, 319, 355
Substitute, 714
Vanillin, 713
Vaseline Pomade, 228
Stains, to Remove, 192
Vasolimentum, 728
Varnish and Paint Remover, 188
Bookbinders', 720
Brushes at Rest. 141
for Bicycles, 719
for Blackboards, 720
for Floors, 724
for Trays and Tinware, 727
Gums Used in Making, 715
How to Pour Out, 153
Making, Linseed Oil for, 483
Manufacturing Hints, 715
Removers, 187
Substitutes, 727
Varnished Paper, 506
Varnishes, 543, 714
Engravers', 723
Insulating, 426
Photographic Retouching, 543
Varnishing, Rules for, 717
Vat Enamels and Varnishes, 721
Vegetable Acids, Poison, 92
Vegetables, Canned, 352
Vehicle for Oil Colors, 560
Venetian Paste, 39
Vermilion Grease Paint, 229
Vermin Killer, 422
Very Hard Silver Solder, 663
Veterinary Dose Table, 729
Formulas, 728
Vichy, 740
Salt, 628
Violet Ammonia, 244, 245
Color for Ammonia, 91
Cream, 115
Dye for Silk or Wool, 270
for Straw Bonnets, 270
Flavor for Candy, 217
Ink, 417
Poudre de Riz Powder, 242
Sachet, 510
Smelling Salts, 510
Talc, 510
Powder, 243
Tooth Powder, 252
Water, 520
Witch Hazel, 245
Vinaigre Rouge, 244
Vinegar, 358, 734
Toilet, 244
Viscose, 159
INDEX
807
Vogel's Composition Files, 64
Voice Lozenges, 219
Vulcanization of Rubber, 622
W
Wagon and Axle Greases, 462
Wall Cleaners, 190
Wall-paper Dyes, 278
Removal of, 400
Wall-paper Paste, 39
Wall Priming, 501
Waterproofing, 741
Walls, Damp, 400
Hard-finished, 499
Walnut, 783
Warming Bottle, 127
Warping, Prevention of, 781
Warts, 736
Washes, Nail-cleaning, 227
Washing Blankets, 399
Brushes, 141
Fluids and Powders, 445
of Light Silk Goods, 639
Waste, Photographic, Its Dis-
position, 534
Watch Chains, to Clean, 206
Watch-dial Cements, 20
Watch Gilding, 738
Watch-lid Cement, 20
Watchmakers' Alloys, 736
and Jewelers' Cleaning Prepa-
rations, 206
Formulas, 736
Oil, 738
Watch Manufacturers' Alloys, 736
Movements, Palladium Plating
of, 583
Waterproof and Acid-proof
Pastes, 38
Cements for Glass, Stoneware,
and Metal, 21
Coatings, 742
Glues, 13
Harness Composition, 451
Ink, 417
Paints, 491
Papers, 505
Putties, 608
Ropes, 753
Shoe Dressings, 634
Stiffening for Straw Hats, 187
Varnish for Beach Shoes, 635
Wood, 753
Waterproofing, 741
Blue Prints, 741
Brick Arches, 741
Canvas, 742
Cellars, 400
Corks, 742
Fabrics, 742
Leather, 750
Paper, 751
Water- and Acid-resisting Paint,
499
Water-closets, Deodorants for, 263
Water, Copper, 221
Filters for, 339
Water-glass Cements, 19
Water Glass in Stereochromatic
Painting, 688
Jackets, Anti-freezing Solutions
for, 363
Natural and Artificial, 739
Purification, Alum Process of,
340
Spots, Priming for, 501
Stains, 784
Water Stirred Yellow, Scarlet
and Colorless, 612
Water-tight Casks, 149
Glass, 373
Roofs, 373
"Water Tone" Platinum Paper,
529
to Freeze, 616
Varnish, 544
Waters, Toilet, 244
Wax, 753
Burning, Trick, 611
for Bottles, 553
for Ironing, 444
for Linoleum, 459
Paper, 505
Waxes for Floors, Furniture, etc.,
754
Weather Forecasters, 756
Weatherproofing, 499
Casts, 565
Weed Killers, 262
Weights and Measures, 757
of Eggs, 284
Weiss Beer, 119
Welding Compound, 687
Powder to Weld Steel on
Wrought Iron at Pale-red
Heat, 761
Powders, 761
Westphalian Cheese, 177
Wheel Grease, 462
Whetstones, 761
Whipped Cream, 247, 248
White Brass, 55
Bricks, 164
Coating for Signs, etc., 490
Cosmetique, 228
Face Powder, 243
Flint Glass Containing Lead, 373
Furniture, Enamel for, 722
Glass for Ordinary Molded
Bottles, 373
Glazes, 167
White-gold Plates Without Sol-
der, 384
White Grease Paints, 229
Ink, 417
Metals, 78
White-metal Alloys, 79
White Metals Based on Copper, 79
Based on Platinum, 79
Pine and Tar Syrup, 320
Petroleum Jelly, 462
Portland Cement, 162
Rose Perfumery, 518
Shoe Dressing, 635
Solder for Silver, '434
Stamping Ink, 417
for Embroidery, 411
Vitriol, Poison, 97
Whitewash, 761
to Remove, 190
Whiting, 761
Whooping-cough Remedies, 211
Wild-cherry Balsam, 103
Extract, 321
Wiltshire Cheese, 177
Window-cleaning Compound, 208
Window Display, 762
Panes, Cleaning, 208
Opaque, to Render, 375
Perfume, 762
Polishes, 593
Windows, Frosted, 376
to Prevent Dimming of, 376
Wine Color Dye, 270
Wines and Liquors, 762
Medicinal, 771
Removal of Musty Taste, 771
Winter Beverages, 117
Wintergreen, to Distinguish
Methyl Salicylate from Oil
of, 771
Wire Hardening, 684
Rope, 771
Witch-hazel Creams, 238
Jelly, 228
Violet, 245
Wood, 772
Acid-proof, 9
Cements, 26
Chlorine-proofing, 9
Fillers, 773
Fireproofing, 342
Wooden Gears, 463
Wood Gilding, 580
Polishes, 598
Pulp, Fireproofing, 343
Renovators, 194, 197
Securing Metals to, 37
Stain for, 781
Substitutes for, 785
• Warping, to Prevent, 781
Waterproofing, 753
Wood's Metal, 64
Woodwork, Cleaning, 194
Wool Oil, 485
Silk, or Straw Bleaching, 120
to Clean, 273
Woorara Poison, 97
Worcestershire Sauce, 213
Working of Sheet Aluminum, 83
Worm Powder for Stock, 732
Wrapping Paper for Silverware , 506
Wrinkles, Removal of, 231, 233
Writing Inks, 414
on Glass, 376, 405
on Ivory, Glass, etc., 405
on Zinc, 405
Restoring Faded, 786
Yama, 116
Yeast, 786
and Fertilizers, 339
Yellow Coloring for Beverages,
119
Dye for Cotton, 271
for Silk, 271
Hard Solders, 658
Ink, 417
Orange and Bronze Dyes, 271
Stain for Wood, 784
Ylang-Ylang Perfume, 518
Yolk of Egg as an Emulsifier, 290
York Cheese, 177
Zapon, 728
for Impregnating Paper, 506
Varnishes, 728
Zinc, 49
Alloys, 80
Amalgam for Electric Bat-
teries, 89
for Dentists' Zinc, 163
Amalgams, Applications of, 87
Articles, Bronzing, 136
to Clean, 203
Bronzing, 137, 567
Contact Silver-plating, 589
Etching, 323
Gilding, 580
Zinc-Nickel, 80
Zinc Plates, Coppering, 573
Poison, 97
to Clean, 205
THIS BOOK IS DUE ON THE LAST DATE
STAMPED BELOW
AN INITIAL FINE OF 25 CENTS
WILL BE ASSESSED FOR FAILURE TO RETURN
THIS BOOK ON THE DATE DUE. THE PENALTY
WILL INCREASE TO SO CENTS ON THE FOURTH
DAY AND TO $I.OO ON THE SEVENTH DAY
OVERDUE.
UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA LIBRARY